GREEK AND ENGLISH 
 
 LEXICON 
 
 OF THE 
 
 NEW TESTAMENT. 
 
 BV 
 
 EDWARD ROBINSON, D. D. LL. D. 
 
 OK BIBLICAL LITERATURE IN THE UNION THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY, NKW-YOKC I 
 AUTHOR OF "BIBLICAL RESEARCHES IN PALESTINE," ETC. 
 
 A NEW EDITION, 
 
 REVISED AND IN GREAT PART REWRITTEN. 
 
 NEW YORK: 
 
 HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, 
 
 329 & 331 PEAR I, STREET, 
 FRANKLIN SQUARE. 
 
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1850, by 
 
 : -EDWARD liOBINSON. 
 
 
 
 tn the Clerk s Office of thf Disif let -C6urt for tie Southern District of New- York. 
 
P K E F A C E 
 
 . THE Author ^ tarliest effort in the department of New Testamei.i 
 Lexicography, was a translation of the first edition of Wahl s Clavi* 
 Philologica Novi Testament^ with some additions, published in 1825. 
 This was followed in 1836 by his own Greek and English Lexicon of 
 the New Testament ; in the preparation of which several years of dili 
 gent labour had been expended. Whatever may have been the defi- 
 ciences of the latter work, it would seem to have met and supplied, 
 however imperfectly, a want in the theological literature of the day ; as 
 was evinced by its speedy republication in Great Britain, in three rival 
 editions, and the subsequent appearance of two abridgments. 
 
 When the time came, three years ago, to prepare for a new edition ot 
 this Lexicon, although not desiring to shun any necessary labour, I yet 
 hoped that the task would be comparatively light. The progress ol 
 science in this department, as in others, had indeed not ceased to be 
 onward. Wahl and Bretschneider had issued new and corrected editions 
 of their Lexicons, and Winer had revised and enlarged his Grammar ; 
 while the labours and improvements of.Passow had been carried forward 
 after his decease by able successors, and the more extended results spread 
 before the English public in the very valuable Lexicon of Liddell and 
 Scott. Still more, the Commentaries of De Wette and Meyer on the 
 New Testament had appeared ; to say nothing of many others. My 
 own official duties, too, had called me, for the greater portion of the pre 
 ceding decennium, to the daily interpretation of the New Testament 
 before large classes of young men preparing for the ministry of the Gos 
 pel ; and, in the meantime, I had visited and partially explored the Holy 
 Land. Under these circumstances, it is not surprising, that, when I sat 
 down to the work of revision, I found many portions of my former labouro, 
 and especially the earliest, less satisfactory than I had hoped. The 
 result was, that a large part of the work required, in my judgment, to 
 be rewritten ; and it has accordingly been rewritten, without regard to 
 time or labour. The remaining portions have been thoroughly revised : 
 and have received very many additions, corrections, and curtailments. 
 
 M4512Q 
 
lv PREFACE. 
 
 In its present form, the work may stand as an unpretending memorial of 
 the progress and condition of the Interpretation and Lexicography of the 
 New Testament, at the close of the first half of the nineteenth century. 
 
 A full and scientific Lexicon of any language embraces a wide field 
 of inquiry. The scholar who would pursue the study of a language crit 
 ically and philologically, does not rest, until he has traced each word to 
 its origin ; investigated its primitive form and signification ; noted the 
 various forms and senses in which it has been current in the different 
 epochs and dialects of the language, and the manner and order in which 
 all these are deduced from the primitive one and froi|[ each other ; and 
 last, though not least, has observed the relations in which it stands to 
 other words, in constructions and phrases, and the various modifications 
 which it has undergone in these respects. When all these points are 
 properly ascertained and arranged in his own mind, then and not till 
 then is the scholar master of the word in question ; and the transcript of 
 the view thus obtained, with the necessary vouchers, is the true lexicog 
 raphy of that word. This is justly termed the historico-logical method 
 of lexicography, which has grown up out of the general progress of philo 
 logy within the present century, and aims to present a logical and histor 
 ical view of each word in all its varieties of signification and construction. 
 The first exemplification of this method was given by Gesenius, in his 
 J lebrew Lexicon ; and it was ably followed out by Passow, in his Lexi 
 con of the Greek language. 
 
 These remarks proceed upon the supposition, that a language is 111 
 itself primitive and independent of every other ; and that its words may 
 therefore be traced to their ultimate roots within itself. This indeed is 
 usually assumed in regard to the Greek language ; and the Lexicon of 
 Passow was originally constructed on this principle. But in respect to 
 our own and many other languages, this is obviously not the fact ; and 
 the science of comparative philology, which has sprung up within our 
 own days, has already taught us, that both the Greek and Latin are in 
 like manner only members of one great family of languages, which, de 
 scending apparently from the mountains of India, have spread themselves 
 over Southern and Western Asia and the whole of Europe ; retaining 
 under every diversity of climate and circumstances such obvious affini 
 ties, as give undeniable evidence of a common origin. These Indo- 
 European tongues, as they are called, include the Sanscrit, Persian, 
 Greek, Latin, Gothic, German, English, and the other dialects of the 
 Teutonic ; and strictly also those of the Slavic and Celtic races. The 
 Semitic languages form a distinct family ; though still, in their primary 
 elements, kindred to the former in a greater degree than has usually been 
 supposed. Here too, the first scientific attempt at marking these coinci 
 dences as a part of lexicography, was made by Gesenius, in his Latin 
 Manual of 1833 ; but the time is perhaps not far distant, when every Lex 
 icon of the Greek or Latin, or indeed of any of the occidental tongues. 
 
PREFACE. y 
 
 will be regarded as incomplete, which shall fail to notice these striking 
 affinities. 
 
 In respect to the Greek, it should be borne in mind, that there are 
 three great epochs which mark the progress of the language ; through all 
 or some of which, the different meanings and uses of a word can be traced 
 with more or less distinctness. . These are its youth, in the heroic or epic 
 poems of Homer and Hesiod, with which may be joined the Ionic prose 
 of Herodotus ; its prime, in the palmy days of Attic elegance and purity, 
 as exhibited in the great tragedians, and in the prose of Thucydides, 
 Xenophon, Plato ; and its decline, after the Macedonian conquest, and 
 still later under the Roman dominion. In this latter period, the breaking 
 up of the various independent states, the mingling together in armies of 
 soldiers enlisted from every quarter, and the founding of colonies and 
 large cities peopled with inhabitants from every part of Greece and also 
 from foreign lands, could not fail to produce great changes in the lan 
 guage of different communities ; which, by natural consequence, would 
 speedily be reflected in the language of books. Thus was formed the 
 later Greek idiom, 77 Kotvrj 8iu\e/cT09, which every where superseded the 
 pure Attic ; and of which Aristotle, Polybius, Diodorus, Plutarch, .ZElian, 
 and other later writers, are the representatives. Some of the forms pecu 
 liar to this later idiom were ascribed to the influence of the Macedonians, 
 and referred to the Macedonia dialect ; or sometimes the same forms 
 were referred to an Alexandrine dialect, inasmuch as the chief seat of 
 the later Greek culture was in Egypt and its metropolis Alexandria. But 
 these terms are probably too specific ; and embrace what strictly belonged 
 to the later language of common life in general, rather than to the dialect 
 of any particular tribe or city. 
 
 The language of the New Testament is the later Greek language, 
 as spoken by foreigners of the Hebrew stock, and applied by them to 
 subjects on which it had never been employed by native Greek writers. 
 The simple statement of this fact, suggests at once what the character of 
 this idiom must be ; and might, one would think, have saved volumes of 
 controversy. The Jews came in contact with the Greeks only at and 
 after the Macedonian conquests; and were therefore conversant only 
 with the later Greek. They learned it from the intercourse of life, in 
 commerce, in colonies, in cities founded like Alexandria, where the in 
 habitants were drawn together from Asia as well as from Greece ; and it 
 was therefore the spoken language of common life, and not that of books, 
 with which they became acquainted. But they spoke it as foreigners, as 
 Hebrews ; and therefore it could not fail to have in general a colouring 
 of the Hebrew, or rather of the later Aramaean, which was their vernac 
 ular tongue. Jews who spoke Greek, are called in the New Testament 
 E\hj]vi,a-rai, Hellenists ; and hence in modern usage, since the time of 
 the younger Scaliger, the Jewish Greek has not unaptly been termed 
 Hellenistic 
 
Vl PREFACE. 
 
 The earliest monument of this idiom is the Version of the Seventy 
 made at Alexandria, probably at different times during the centuries 
 immediately preceding the Christian era. This, as being a direct trans 
 lation from the Hebrew, made by Jews, exhibits strongly the influence 
 of the Hebrew, as well as an imperfect knowledge of the Greek ; though 
 in various degrees in its different parts. Closely allied to this are the 
 Apocryphal books usually connected with the Septuagint. Meanwhile, 
 the Greek language had become current also in Palestine, along with the 
 Aramasan ; partly through frequent intercourse with Hellenistic Jews 
 settled in Egypt and in Asia Minor, who constantly resorted to Jerusa 
 lem ; and partly from the influence of the Herods and the Roman domin 
 ion. Hence the New Testament was written in the now universal tongue. 
 Still later there appeared other Greek Versions of the Old Testament, 
 made by Jews ; and also the remaining Pseudepigraphic and Apocryphal 
 writings of the Old and New Testaments. Two Jewish writers only, 
 Philo and Josephus, both of them cotemporary with the Apostles, were 
 able to overcome in a great measure the influence of their vernacular 
 tongue ; and although when treating of Jewish affairs they necessarily 
 employ many terms belonging to the Jewish Greek, yet in general they 
 approach much nearer to the written idiom of the later Greek, than any 
 of the writers either of the Septuagint or New Testament. 
 
 The writers of the New Testament, with the exception of Paul, arid 
 partially perhaps of Luke, were unlearned men ; and, like the rest of 
 their countrymen, knew the Greek language only from the intercourse 
 of common life, and not from books. With them, therefore, the Hebrew 
 element which mingled in their idiom, would naturally have great prom 
 inence ; although, since their writings are not translated from a Hebrew 
 original, it is not here as strongly marked as in the Septuagint. It often 
 lies in the turn of the thought, or in the thought itself, rather than in the 
 expression. Even where the expression is modelled after the Hebrew, 
 this is seen more in the construction and connection of words in phrases 
 and sentences, than as affecting their intrinsic signification. Whoever 
 has himself learned to speak a foreign language, or has closely watched 
 the discourse of foreigners speaking our own tongue, will readily have per 
 ceived, that the signification of words is in general much more easily 
 retained and correctly applied, than their forms and their proper construc 
 tion and connection. Thus, nothing perhaps imparts more to the Gos 
 pels the air of the Hebrew narratives of the Old Testament, than the 
 frequent use of the particle Kai as a connective, corresponding to the 
 Hebrew usage of the particle Vav (}). From Hebraisms of this kind, 
 the writings of Paul are comparatively free ; since, from his birth and 
 residence amid the Greek schools of Tarsus, he probably had acquired a 
 more accurate knowledge of that language than was usual with the He 
 brews of Palestine ; though the course of his education and the charactei 
 of his learning were not Greek, but wholly Jewish. 
 
PREFACE. VI! 
 
 The writers of the New Testament, further, applied the GreeK lan 
 guage to subjects on which it had never been employed by native Greek 
 writers. No native Greek had ever written on Jewish affairs, nor on the 
 Jewish theology and ritual. Hence the Seventy, in their translation, had 
 often to employ Greek words as the signs of things and ideas, which 
 heretofore had been expressed only in Hebrew. In such a case, they 
 could only select those Greek words which most nearly corresponded to 
 the Hebrew ; leaving the different shade or degree of signification to be 
 gathered by the reader from the context. Thus, to express the idea of the 
 Hebrew cibr: as a word of salutation or farewell, they employ the Greek 
 word elpijvrj, just as we use the word peace in the same way and for the 
 very same reason. Similar is v\oye(o for Heb. 7p? to bless ; in Greek 
 writers only to speak well of. Thus far the path was indeed already 
 broken for the writers of the New Testament. But beyond this, they 
 were to be the instruments of making known a new revelation, a new 
 dispensation of mercy to mankind. Here was opened a wide circle of 
 new ideas and new doctrines to be developed, for which all human lan 
 guage was as yet too poor ; and this poverty was to be done away, even 
 as at the present day on the discovery and culture of a new science, 
 chiefly by enlarging the signification and application of words already in 
 use, rather than by the formation of new ones. An example of this in 
 the New Testament is especially the word irians, to which may be 
 added SiKaLocrvvrj, Sifcaiovcr ^rai, e/cXoy/;, aTrocrro/Vo?, and many others. 
 
 The New Testament, then, was written by Hebrews, aiming to 
 express Hebrew thoughts, conceptions, feelings, in the Greek tongue. 
 Their idiom, consequently, in soul and spirit, is Hebrew ; in its external 
 form, Greek, and that more or less pure, according to the facilities which 
 an individual writer may have possessed, for acquiring fluency and accu 
 racy of expression in that tongue. 
 
 It follows from all these considerations, that in constructing a Lexicon 
 of the New Testament, it should be a matter of prominent importance, 
 to exhibit each word in its true character and relations, as a component 
 part of the Greek tongue ; as compared, on the one hand, with the Hel 
 lenistic idiom ; and, on the other, with the usage of classic Greek writers. 
 It is just here, that Wahl perhaps has erred in having reference too exclu 
 sively to the latter ; and Bretschneider, in drawing his illustrations mainly 
 from the former. In the present work I have endeavoured to pursue a 
 middle course, and present a comparison with both ; giving, when possi 
 ble, one or more references to the Septuagint, or, where that fails, to Jose- 
 phus ; at least one (and often more) to the later Greek writers ; and one 
 to the Attic, as represented by Xenophon, Plato, or Thucydides. Where 
 a reference is wanting in either of these three classes, except under words 
 well known and of frequent occurrence, it may be presumed, that none 
 such has yet been found. Very many new references have been added, 
 where there were none l)efore ; especially from the writings of Plutarch 
 
v iii PREFACE. 
 
 and Plato. Indeed, this comparison of words used in the New Testa 
 ment with their usage in classic writers, has cost more time and labour 
 than any other portion of the work. 
 
 Let the student not be startled at the apparent multitude of such ref 
 erences, nor think them all of no avail. They are adduced not merely 
 nor mainly to elucidate the meaning of a word ; but to show its authority 
 and standing in the Greek language. They serve to show in what rela 
 tion each word stands to the Septuagint and Jewish writings, and also to 
 the later and Attic Greek ; and whether it is common to all or any of 
 them, or found in none. In this way they have an important bearing on 
 the long disputed question of the purity of the New Testament idiom ; 
 and aid in determining its true character. 
 
 The preceding remarks present a summary view of the principles 
 which have guided the Author in the preparation of the present volume. 
 The Greek of the New Testament constitutes but a small portion of the 
 Greek language as a whole ; and a Lexicon of it can only aim to give a 
 just exhibition of one of the subordinate forms or phases of that rich and 
 noble tongue. Of such a work, the following, it would seem, ought to 
 be some of the chief traits ; and they have accordingly been made promi 
 nent objects of attention. 
 
 1. The etymology of each word is given, so far as it appertains to the 
 Greek and Hebrew, and occasionally the Latin.* A general comparison 
 of the affinities between the Greek and other languages, belongs only to 
 a general Lexicon of the language. 
 
 2. The full historical view of a word, is here out of place ; since 
 we strictly have to do only with those significations and constructions 
 which are found in the New Testament itself. But the logical method 
 is still applicable in its full force. This consists in assigning first to each 
 word its primary signification, whether found in the New Testament or 
 not ; and then deducing from it, in logical (not historical) order, all the 
 significations which occur in the New Testament ; but not others, except 
 so far as they may be necessary to illustrate the former. t In this con 
 nection, the attempt has every where been made, to discriminate between 
 the intrinsic significations of a word, and those senses in which it may 
 be employed through the force of adjuncts. By referring the latter to 
 their appropriate heads, the multiplicity of meanings given by earlier lex 
 icographers has been greatly diminished. Particular attention has also 
 been given, to bring out prominently to view the force of the prepositions 
 in composition. 
 
 3. The various constructions of verbs and adjectives with their cases 
 and with other adjuncts, is in general fully given. Unusual or difficult 
 constructions are noted and explained, by reference both to grammatical 
 
 * See the articles xdp., \tpav6s, v<r<r<inros. ffovtidpiov, <ppayf\\iov, etc. 
 t Comp. the articles a-rf\\<a, <bvta } \^d\\o>, etc. 
 
PREFACE. 1X 
 
 lules and to the usage of other writers. Here some of the usual Latin 
 abbreviations for marking the construction of words, are too convenient 
 to be laid aside for any English substitutes ; and therefore such terms as 
 c. ace. and the like, have been retained without scruple ; just as the com 
 mon English has adopted the forms etc. and per cent. 
 
 4. The different forms and inflection of words are exhibited, so far as 
 seemed proper in a Lexicon. Any variety or irregularity of form is, in 
 particular, fully explained. 
 
 5. So far as the limits of a Lexicon permit, attention has been given 
 to the interpretation of difficult passages ; in order that the work may, in 
 some measure, supply the place of a more extended Commentary. And, 
 if I may be permitted here to give to the student a recommendation 
 founded on the experience of many years, I would counsel him, first to 
 study the New Testament for himself, with only the help of his Grammar 
 and Lexicon, giving close attention to the context and the logical con 
 nection. In this way, whatever he acquires will be his own, and will 
 remain with him ; and he will then know what further aid to seek in 
 Commentaries. The true end of a Commentary is not to supersede the 
 student s own investigations ; but to aid him to fill out and complete 
 them. 
 
 6. Each article, so far as practicable, contains a reference to every 
 passage of the New Testament in which the word is found. In this way. 
 in more than nine- tenths of the words, the Lexicon is a complete Con- 
 coi dance of the New Testament. Those articles in which this is not 
 the case, are marked at the end with the sign -f .* In the articles not so 
 marked, my endeavour has been to include the different readings of the 
 Textus Receptus and the most approved later editions, as also some of 
 those found in Manuscripts ; without, however, being solicitous to note 
 every minor variation, even when adopted by an Editor. 
 
 7. The most sedulous care has been bestowed to verify all the refer 
 ences, especially those to the New Testament ; and although in a work 
 containing so many thousands of them, many errors are unavoidable, yet 
 it is hoped that the present volume will bear comparison in this respect 
 with any other of a like size and character. The scriptural references 
 are regularly made to the New Testament of Hahn, to the Septuagint of 
 Mill, and to the Hebrew Bible of Van der Hooght, again edited by Hahn. 
 Those to the Old Testament, where not otherwise specified, are to the 
 Hebrew ; never to the English Version. 
 
 Such is the plan of the work now given to the public; to the execu 
 tion of which the Author has unweariedly and repeatedly devoted the 
 best powers of many of the best years of his life ; with what success, 
 the theological public must judge. His fervent hope and prayer to God 
 
 * The letter A, for example, contains 891 separate articles ; of which only 39 have the 
 mark -{-. The relative proportion of such articles elsewhere is probably not much (if any) 
 greater. 
 
X PREFACE. 
 
 is, that the work may be still further instrumental in giv : ng facility and 
 impulse to the study of the Holy Scriptures ; and thus aii" in promoting 
 the cause of sacred learning, and Christian piety. 
 
 The Author would express his gratitude to various frient .s, by whose 
 advice and encouragement he has been aided. Especially are his thanks 
 due to the Rev. President Woolsey of Yale College, for his counsel, and 
 for the unrestricted use of his valuable private library. 
 
 E. ROBINSON. 
 NEW- YORK, July, 1850. 
 
, 
 
 FOR THE STUDENT. 
 
 The references to Greek authors are generally to editions in common use; ana 
 mainly to such as have been followed in the miniature classics published by Tauchnitz. 
 Thus, Plato is quoted by the pages of H. Stephens ; but these are also given by Tauch 
 nitz ; and so in other cases. Where the edition is not named, or does not appear from 
 the manner of citation, it may be presumed to be that of Tauchnitz. But from this 
 remark the following are excepted : 
 
 ORATORES GRJECI: Demosthenes, JEschines, Lysias, Isacus, Antiphon, etc. ed. Reiske, 
 XII. Tom. Lips. 1770-75. 
 
 Anlhologia Graca, ed. F. Jacobs, XIII. Tom. Lips. 1794-1814. 
 
 Arr. Epict. i. e. Epicteti Dissertationes ab Arriano digestae, ed. Schweighaiiser, III. 
 Tom. Lips. 1799. 
 
 Dion Cass. ed. Reimar. II. Tom. fol. Hamb. 1750. 
 
 Herodiani Historic, ed. Irmisch, IV. Tom. Lips. 1789-1805. The edition of Tauch 
 nitz gives only the larger divisions. 
 
 Isocrates, ed. Bekker, in ORATORES ATTICI. 
 
 Strabonis Geographic, ed. Casaubon, et c. notis, fol. Amst. 1709. 
 
 Josephi Opera, ed. Havercamp, II. Tom. fol. Amst. 1726. All later editions have the 
 same divisions. 
 
 The following are the full titles of several works often referred to in the following 
 
 pages: 
 
 Bill. Res. in Palest. i. e. Biblical Researches in Palestine, Mount Sinai, and Arabia 
 Petrcca, by E. ROBINSON and E. SMITH, 3 vols. 8vo. Bos 
 ton, 1841. Lond. 1841. 
 
 " A Harmony of the Four Gospels in Greek, by E. ROBINSON, 
 8vo. Bost. 1845. 
 
 " A Hebrew and English Lexicon of the Old Testament, from 
 the Latin of W. GESENIUS ; by E. ROBINSON. 8vo. 
 Bost. 1849. 
 
 " Hebraische Grammatik, xon W. GESENIUS, neu bearbeitct 
 ron E. ROEDIGER. 15th Ed. Leipz. 1848. English, 
 with the same divisions, Hebrew Grammar, etc. by M. 
 Stuart, Andover 1847; also by T. J. Conant, New- 
 York 1847. 
 
 " Lehrgebaude der Heb. Sprache, ron W. GESENIUS, 8vo. 
 Leipz. 1817. 
 
 " Grammatik des neutest. Sprachidioms, ton G. B. W:NEB, 
 Leipz. 1844. 5th Ed. 
 
 " Biblisches RealwOrterbuch, von G. B. WINER, Leipz. 1847. 
 2 vols. 3d Ed. 
 
 " Phrynichi EclogtE Nominum. Edidit C. A. LOBECK, 8vo. 
 Leipz. 1820. 
 
 " De Dialecto Macedonica et Alexandrina F. G. STURZ, 8vo. 
 
 Lips. 1808. 
 
 Tittm. de Synon. N. T. " De Synonymis in Novo Testamento, Lib. I. H, J. A H. 
 TITTMANN, Lips. 1829, 1832. 
 
 Gr. Harm. 
 Heb. Lex. 
 
 Heb. Gr. 
 
 Jjehrgb. or Lgb. 
 Winer, 
 
 Winer Realw. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. 
 Sturz de Dial. Mac. 
 
ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 Herm. ad Viger. 
 Buttm. 
 
 Buttin. Ausf. Sprachl. 
 
 Matth. 
 
 Kilhner, 
 
 Passou. , 
 
 DicL of Antt. 
 
 F. VIGERI de prcccipuis Gr&cx Dictwnis Idiotism:s Liber 
 ed. G. HERMANN, 8vo. Lips. 1834. 4th Ed. 
 
 A Greek Grammar for the use of High Schools and Univer 
 sities, by PHILIP BUTTMANN, revised by his Son ; from the. 
 18th German edition, by E. ROBINSON, New-York 1851. 
 The 18th German edition was published at Berlin lato 
 in 1849. 
 
 Ausfiihrliche Griechische Sprachlehre, xon PHILIP BUTT- 
 MANN, 2 Bde, Berlin 1830, 1839. 2d Ed. 
 
 Ausfiihrliche Griechische Grammatik, von A. MATTHIJE, 
 2 Th. Leipz. 1825, 1827. 2d edition. A third edition 
 with few changes was published after the author s 
 death, Leipz. 1835. English by E. V. Blorafield, edited 
 by J. Kenrick, Lond. 1832. 
 
 Grammar of the Greek Language, for the us? of High 
 Schools and Colleges, by R. KUEHNER ; from the German, 
 by B. B. EDWARDS and S. H. TAYLOR ; Andover 1844. 
 
 Handicorterbuch der Griechischen SpracJie, von F. PASSOW, 
 4 Th. Leipz. 1831. Also: A Greek-English Lexicon, 
 based on the German work of F. PASSOW, by H. G. LID- 
 DELL and R. SCOTT, second edition, Oxford 1845. New- 
 York 1848. 
 
 Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities, edited >y W. 
 SMITH, Lond. 1848. Second edition. 
 
 (jienr. 
 Spec. 
 Pr. 
 Prop 
 Melon. 
 c. dot. 
 c. ace. 
 Absol. 
 
 [} 
 
 OTHER ABBREVIATIONS. \ 
 
 i. e. generally, in a general sense, ordinarily. 
 
 " specially, in a special and particular sense. \ 
 
 " proprie, in the proper and literal sense, not figurative. 
 " tropically, in a tropical or figurative sense. 
 " metonyniically, by metonymy. 
 
 " cum dativo, cum accusativo, etc. 
 
 " absolutely, without case or adjunct. 
 " KCU TU XotTrd, Lat. et c&tera, Engl. etc. 
 
 Brackets usually mark a diversity of reading ; sometimes a different num 
 bering of the verses. 
 
 For ADDENDA, see end of the Volume. 
 
LEXICON 
 
 OF THE 
 
 NEW TESTAMENT. 
 
 A. 
 
 S , a, alpha, the first letter of the Greek 
 alphabet, corresponding to the Hebrew K. 
 Ff r its power as a privative and intensive 
 r article in composition, see the Grammars, 
 Buttm. 120. 5, and n. 11. Kuhner { 237. 
 R. 3. b. In N. T. TO A or TO oA<pa signi 
 fies the first, Rev. 1, 8. [11.] 21, 6. 22, 13 ; 
 .vhere the miter himself explains it by 
 jrptoTos and dpxn- See Is. 48, 12, comp. 
 41, 4. 44, 6. So Clem. Alex. Strom. 4. 25 
 [p. 5S7. C. ed. Sylb. J KixXosyap avrbs (6 tnoy) 
 rraauiv T<av 8vvdp.((ov, els tv fih.ovp.fva>v Kal 
 (vovp.fvw 8ia TOVTO A Kal Q 6 \6yos fipr)rai. 
 
 Aapwv, 6, indec. Aaron, Heb, "plttx , 
 pr. n. of a son of Amram and Jochebed of 
 the tribe of Levi, Ex. 6, 20 ; the elder bro 
 ther of Moses, and his interpreter (^22) 
 before Pharaoh, Ex. 4, 14 sq. 5, 1 sq. 7, 
 10 sq. as also the first High Priest, Ex. 28, 
 1 sq. 40, 12sq. In N. T. Acts 7, 40. 
 Heb. 5, 4. 7, 11. 9, 4. By Hebraism, the 
 family of Aaron, Luke 1, 5. 
 
 J A(3a&S(0v, 6, indec. Abaddon, Heb. 
 "ISK (destruction), the name ascribed 
 Rev. 9, 11 to the angel of Tartarus (TTJS 
 dfivaa-ov), and explained by the Greek dno\- 
 \vcov, the destroyer. The usual Heb. word 
 is rnniaa, Sept. 6 oXo3piW, Ex. 12,23. 
 Wisd. 18, 25 ; comp. oXoSptvrqs, 1 Cor. 
 10, 10. 
 
 afiaprjS, e r, ovs, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. /3a- 
 oo?), pr. not heavy, e. g. nvp dftapes Plut. de 
 1 
 
 Stoic, repugn. 42. T. VI. p. 98. In N. T. 
 trop. not burdensome, i. e. not causing ex 
 pense ; 2 Cor. 11, 9 d/3apf/ vp.lv fp.avrbv 
 frfiprjcra. So eVi/3apea>, q. v. and ftapvs 
 Jos. Ant. 1. 16. 2. 
 
 A/3/33,, kidec. Abba, i. e. father, Heb. 
 3S, Chald. XSK; Mark 14, 36. Rom. 8, 
 15. Gal. 4, 6. 
 
 *A/3e\ 6, indec. Abel, Heb. ^sri (a 
 breath), pr. n. of the second son of Adam, 
 Matt. 23, 35. Luke 11,51. Heb. 11,4. 12, 
 24. See Gen. 4, 1-16. 
 
 Afiid, 6, indec. Abia, Heb. 
 (Jehovah his father), pr. n. of two men in 
 N.T. a) A king of Judah, Matt. 1,7 bis; 
 see 1 K. 14, 31. 15, 1 sq. b) A priest of 
 the posterity of Aaron, and founder of a 
 sacerdotal family, Luke 1, 5. When all 
 the priests were distributed into 24 classes, 
 the eighth class was called from liirn the 
 class of Abia ; see 1 Chr. 24, 10. 
 
 J Aj3ia&ap, 6, indec. Abiathar, Heb. 
 "iP^2X (father of abundance), pr. n. of a 
 high priest, Mark 2, 26 ; see 1 Sam. 22, 21. 
 1 K. 2, 26. 27. 35. The high priest at the 
 time referred to by Mark was Ahimelech ; 
 but his son Abiathar, who was high priest 
 afterwards, is here mentioned perhaps as 
 having been conspicuous in the transaction, 
 and more intimately connected with the his 
 tory of David. 
 
A/3t\r]vri, fc, !j, Abilene, pr. n. of a 
 district on the eastern declivity of Anti- 
 Lebanon, so called from the city Abila or 
 Abela situated on the mountain 18 Roman 
 miles N. W. of Damascus towards Helio- 
 polis or Ba albek ; known also as Api\r) 
 row Avcraviov to distinguish it from another 
 in Perasa. This district extended apparent 
 ly along the eastern slope of Anti-Lebanon 
 and Hermon as far as to Paneas and Gau- 
 lonitis ; and thus bordered on the territories 
 of Philip. So in Luke 3, 1 ; where Lysa- 
 nias "is said to be tetrarch of Abilene in the 
 fifteenth year of Tiberius, about A. D. 28. 
 Long before tlu s time Josephus speaks of a 
 Lysanias, the son of a Ptolemy who in the 
 days of Pompey was lord of Chalcis under 
 Lebanon, and was a powerful and danger 
 ous neighbour to Damascus ; Ant. 14. 7. 4, 
 comp. 13. 16. 3 and 14. 3. 2. From this 
 it may perhaps be inferred that he was lord 
 algo of Abjterjae ,"<ysa nias succeeded him 
 B. C. 40 ; but was p ut to death by Antony 
 .through" th d Intrigues of. Cleopatra about 
 B. C. : 34- ; Ant. 15 t *4: 1.. Dio Cass. 49. 32. 
 Some years later a certain Zenodorus is 
 mentioned as having farmed the possessions 
 (oiKof) of Lysanias ; he also had jurisdic 
 tion over Trachonitis and other districts ; 
 but having become implicated with robber- 
 hordes, Augustus took away Trachonitis 
 and the adjacent tracts and gave them to 
 Herod the Great, B. C. 22 ; and on the 
 death of Zenodorus, B. C. 19, Herod re 
 ceived still more of his territories, as Paneas 
 and the district further east ; Ant. 15. 10. 
 1, 3. Thus far Josephus does not even 
 name Abilene ; but in the first year of Cali 
 gula, A. D. 38, more than seventy years 
 after the death of the first Lysanias, and 
 ten years after the statement of Luke, he 
 relates that Caligula gave to the elder 
 Agrippa, the Herod of the book of Acts, the 
 tetrarchy of his uncle Philip, and also " the 
 tetrarchy of Lysanias," or Abilene ; and 
 these were confirmed to Agrippa by Clau 
 dius on his accession, with the specification 
 that " Abila of Lysanias and whatever was 
 on Mount Lebanon " were districts belong- 
 big to the emperor himself (e /c TWV avrov) ; 
 Ant. 18. 6. 10. ib. 19. 5. 1. B. J. 2. 11. 5. 
 At Herod Agrippa s death they went to his 
 son, the younger Agrippa, before whom 
 Paul was brought; Ant. 20. 7. 1. Acts c. 
 26. From all these facts it is probable, 
 that both Ptolemy and his son, the first 
 Lysanias, had possession of Abilene ; that 
 after the murder of the latter it was farmed 
 by the emperor to Zenodorus for the benefit 
 
 of the family of Lysanias yet in their mino 
 rity ; and that afterwards the children were 
 reinstated in their rights ; in which case 
 the Lysanias of Luke may well have been 
 the son or grandson of the former Lysanias. 
 If the son, he must have been near seventy 
 years old at the time specified by Luke. 
 This is not improbable ; for ten years later 
 (A. D. 38) his territories had reverted to 
 the emperor, perhaps from the failure of 
 heirs ; and were given by him to Herod 
 Agrippa. In this way the testimony of Jo 
 sephus and that of Luke are in harmony. 
 Indeed, as Josephus nowhere connects the 
 first Lysanias with Abilene, it is not im 
 probable that when he speaks of that dis 
 trict seventy years later as " the tetrarchy 
 of Lysanias," he in fact refers to the se 
 cond Lysanias, who was actually tetrarch 
 of it, and was then dead. The site of the 
 city of Abila is occupied by the modern vil 
 lage S&k Wady el-Barada, where the river 
 Barada issues from a wild chasm. Here 
 are seen the remains of ancient walls and 
 foundations of edifices, fragments of col 
 umns, rock-hewn sepulchres, and a road 
 along the cha^m cut throxigh the rock, with 
 inscriptions. See more in Biblioth. Sac. 
 1848. p. 79 sq. Winer Bibl. Realw. art. 
 Abilene. 
 
 , 6, indec. Abiud, Heb. 
 (Judah his father), pr. n. of a son of Zoro- 
 babel, Matt. 1, 13 bis. Omitted in 1 Chr. 
 3, 19. 
 
 Aftpad/J,, 6, indec. Abraham, Heb. 
 tr ^^ (father of a multitude), pr. n. of 
 the celebrated patriarch and founder of the 
 Israelitish nation, Matt. 1, 1. 2. 22, 32. 
 Heb. 11, 8-19. al. In Acts 7, 16 A0paa/i, 
 by an obvious error of transcription, is writ 
 ten for laccw/3 ; see Gen. 33, 19. Josh. 34, 
 22. + 
 
 a/3ucrcro9, O v, 17, (a priv. /3u3o? or fivo-- 
 <rof,) pr. adj. bottomless, deep, profound, as 
 \{p.i>T) aflva-<ros Diod. Sic. 5. 25. Hdot. 2. 
 28. Sept. for dl MFi , abyss, either the ocean, 
 Gen. 1, 2. 7, 11 ; or the underworld, Ps. 71, 
 21. 107,26. In N.T. Subst. TI a3vo-<ros, 
 the abyss, the place of the dead, orcus, a8rjs, 
 Rom. 10, 7. Spec. Tartarus, that part of 
 a8r)s in which the souls of the wicked are 
 represented as confined, Luke 8, 31. Rev. 
 9, 1. 2. 11. 11,7. 17, 8. 20, 1. 3; comp. 
 2 Pet. 2, 4. So Acta Thomae 32 17 afivv- 
 cros TOV Taprdpov. 
 
 "" AyaftoSj ov, 6, Agabus, pr. n. of a 
 Jewish Christian, who predicted a famine 
 
dycfeoepyew 
 
 and the imprisonment of Paul, Acts 11, 28. 
 21, 10. 
 
 dycfeoepyea), , f. JJCTCO, (dyaSds, 
 Phavorin. evepyeroj KOI epydop.ai d 
 In N. T. to do good to others, absol. 1 Tim. 
 6, 18; comp. Gal. 6, 10. So dyaSovpyd? 
 Plut. de Is. et Osir. 48. 
 
 , f. jyo-co, (dyaSoTroto f,) 
 but the better form is dyaSoi TTOUO>, Lobeck 
 ad Phryn. p. 200. 
 
 1 . to do good to others, absol. Mark 3, 4. 
 Luke 6, 9. 35. Acts 14, 17 ; with ace. of 
 pers. Luke 6, 33 bis. Sept. for 2^ Judg. 
 17, 13. Zeph. 1, 12. So Tob. 12, 13. 1 
 Mac. 11, 33. 
 
 2. to do well, to act virtuously, absol. 
 1 Pet. 2, 15.20. 3,6.17. 3 John 11. Comp. 
 1 Pet. 3, 11. 
 
 as, fj, well-doing, virtuous 
 conduct, 1 Pet. 4, 19; see dya3o7roi<r a> no. 
 2. Others less well beneficence. Test. XII. 
 Pat. ap. Fabric. Cod. Pseudep. I. 722. 
 
 dycfeoTTOios, oD, 6, 17, adj. (dya3o y, 
 TTOie co.) pr. doing good, beneficent, Plut. Is. 
 et Osir. 42 ; bland, courteous, e. g. yvvrj 
 Ecclus. 42, 14. In N. T. doing well, up 
 right, a well-doer, 1 Pet. 2, 14; see in 
 aya3o7roie &) no. 2. So Athenag. Apol. p. 
 29 6 3edy, reAfuos dya3oy &v, d i8ia>s dyaSo- 
 woios early. 
 
 aycfeo?, f), 6v, (ayai/.) corresp. to Heb. 
 -IB , Lat. bonus, Engl. good. 
 
 1. good, i.e. distinguished for good and 
 eminent qualities, character ; of persons, 
 Matt. 19, 16 SiSdo-KoXe dyaSe. v. 17 bis. 
 Mark 10, 17 sq. Luke 18, 18 sq. (Jos. Ant. 
 -9. 5. 2 TOVS dytiSovs av8pas Kal Sixaiovs 
 aTreKTfive. Xen. Ven. 1. 14.) Of things, 
 Luke 10, 42 TTJV dyaSjjj/ p.fpi8a. John 1,47. 
 Sept. for Sl lS Ezra 8, 27 ^aX/cot) dyaSou. 
 Spec. 
 
 a) In a physical sense, good, as opp. to 
 bad, e. g. &v8pov dya3o i/ Matt. 7, 17. 18 ; 
 yrf dy. Luke 8, 8. Sept. ytj ay. for 2l l3 
 Ex. 3, 8. Plut. Gryll. 3. Xen. (Ec. 16. 7 
 yi} dy. 
 
 b) In a moral sense, good, well-disposed, 
 upright. a) Of persons, Matt. 5, 45 eVt 
 irovrjpovs KOL dyaSou?. 12, 35. 22, 10. 25, 
 21. Luke 23, 50. John 7, 12. Acts 11,24. 
 Sept. for ate Prov. 13, 2. 15, 3. So Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 4. 8 TOVS KUKOVS Ko\dttv KOI TOVS 
 dyaSoif Tipqv. /3) Of things, actions, 
 good, right, upright, e. g. icapSla Luke 8, 
 15 ; firo\r) Rom. 7, 12 ; Xdyoy 2 Thess. 2, 
 17; Z&rjpa TOV 3. Rom. 12, 2. (Sept. TO 
 
 dycfeo? 
 
 TO dy. for nio Neh. 9, 20. Ps. 143, 
 10. Wisd. 8, 19 V^X 7 ? "V-) Hence trvvfi- 
 8qo-is dyaSij a good conscience, conscious 
 ness of rectitude, Acts 23, 1. 1 Tim. 1, 5. 
 19. 1 Pet. 3, 16. 21. Also epyov dya- 
 %6v, epya dya3d, good deeds, well-doing, 
 uprightness, Rom. 2, 7. 13, 3. Eph. 2, 10. 
 Col. 1, 10. 2 Tim. 2, 21. al. Sept. jrotT?- 
 /ttira dy. for ai a 1 Sam. 19,4. Wisd. 3, 15 
 TTOVOI dy. 
 
 c) Neut. as Subst. (ro) dyaSoV, (TO) 
 dyaSd, good, good things, right, -virtue, 
 Matt. 12,34.35. 19,16. Luke 6, 45. Rom. 
 2, 10. 7, 18. 19. al. Rom. 7, 13 TO dyaSdv 
 that ichich is in itself good. 14, 16 vp.mv TO 
 dyaSdv your good, sc. liberty of conscience, 
 Christian liberty. Sept. for m a Ps. 53, 2. 
 4. Arr. Epict. 1. 4. 1. Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 5. 
 
 2. good, in respect to operation, influ 
 ence, utility, i. e. useful, beneficial, profit 
 able. 
 
 a) Of persons, good, kind, benevolent, 
 doing good, Rom. 5, 7. 1 Thess. 3, 6. Tit. 
 2, 5. 1 Pet. 2, 18. Sept. for nrj 2 Chr. 
 30, 19 6 3e6r dy. Ps. 73, 1. Plut. Consol. 
 ad Apoll. 37. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 4 evepyfTrjv, 
 TOV avdpa TOV dya3oV. 
 
 b) Of things; e. g. Sd/iaTa Matt. 7, 11. 
 Luke 11, 13 ; 86o-is James i, 17 ; dva 
 
 1 Pet. 3, 16; KapTroi James 3, 17; 
 Tit. 2, 10. (Sept. for ri-j 1 Sam. 12, 23 
 dy. 686s. Neh. 9, 13 eVroXai dy.) Matt. 12, 
 35 dy. "Srjo-avpos, treasure of good things. 
 Luke 6, 45. So fpya dyaSd, good deeds, 
 benefits, Acts 9, 36. 2 Cor. 9, 8. 1 Tim. 2, 
 
 10. 5, 10. Also good for any purpose, 
 suitable, adapted to, Eph. 4, 29 Xoyos dy. 
 irpbs olKo8o/j.rjv. Rom. 15, 2. So Jos. Ant. 4. 
 6. 1 TToXt? (poivLKas (ptpfiv dyaSij. Pausan. 
 Eliac. post. c. 26. 4 x^P a e>y <apnovs eVr/jf- 
 <pfiv dycftr). Plut. Sept. Sap. Conv. 14, p. 
 367. Plato Rep. 608. e. 
 
 c) Neut. as Subst. TO dya^ov, something 
 useful and profitable, a benefit, Rom. 8, 28. 
 12, 21. 13, 4. Gal. 6, 10. Eph. 4, 28. 6, 8. 
 
 1 Thess. 5, 15. Philem. 6. 14. (Xen. Cyr. 4. 
 2. 18.) Plur. TO. dyaSd, things good and 
 useful, benefits, blessings, Matt. 7, 1 1 . Luke 
 1, 53. 16, 25. Rom. 3, 8. Gal. 6, 6. Heb. 9, 
 
 11. 10, 1. (Plut. Pericl. 39. Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 
 15 TOVS fvepyfToviTas dya3oiy vTrf^/SaXXo- 
 pevoi.) In the sense of goods, ivealth, Luke 
 
 12. 18. 19. Sept. for 3113 Gen. 24, 10. 
 Deut. 6, 11. So Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 20. 
 
 3. good, in respect to the feelings excited, 
 i. e. glad, joyful, happy. 1 Pet. 3, 10 f]p.f- 
 pas dy. Rom. 10, 15 TO. dyaSd happy times. 
 
 2 Thess. 2, 16, Sept. for aia Ps. 34. 12 
 
ay. Zech. 8, 19 eopraj ay. So 
 Ecclus. 14, 14. 1 Mace. 10, 55. + 
 
 dycfoovpyeco, >, f. jjo-oo, a later form 
 for dyaSofpyfca, to do good to others, absol. 
 Acts 14, 17 in some Mss. CyrUl. Alex. c. 
 Julian. 3. p. 81. a, et in Mich. cap. 2. p. 
 409. c. 
 
 rjs, T], pr. for dya3oavvT), 
 Buttm. 119. 10. c ; in Greek writers dya- 
 SOTTJS, or better ^pr/a-roYr;?, Thorn. Mag. p. 
 921 ; goodness, e. g. of disposition and cha 
 racter, uprightness, virtue, Rom. 15, 14. 
 Eph. 5, 9. 2 Thess. 1, 11. Sept. for SIB 
 Ps. 52, 5 ; S-Dia 2 Chr. 24, 16. Alsog-oorf- 
 ness towards others, kindness, beneficence, 
 Gal. 5, 22. Sept. for Ml Neh. 9, 25. 
 
 dja\\iacn<) : ea >s, tj, not found in Gr. 
 writers ; but often in Sept. in the sense of 
 exultation, joy, for ^ Ps. 45, 16. 65, 13 ; 
 rejoicing, with song, dancing, for MS I Ps. 
 30,7. 118, 15. 126, 2. 6; great joy, for 
 jMBto Ps. 45, 8. 51,10.14; soTob.13,1. 
 In N. T. joy, gladness, rejoicing, Luke 1, 
 14, 44. Acts 2, 46. Jude 24. (Acta Thorn. 
 7 ev X a P9 Ka ayaXXtaa-ei.) Heb. 1, 9 
 eXaioz/ dyaXXiacrecos from Ps. 45, 8, oil of 
 gladness, i. e. with which guests were an 
 ointed at feasts, here put as an emblem of 
 the highest honour ; see Ps. 23, 5. Am. 6, 6. 
 
 dya\\iaOfJ,ai) up.ai, (ayav, oXXo/iat,) 
 aor. 1 r)yaX\iaa-d[j.r]v, also Pass. aor. 1 ^yoX- 
 Xid^rjv as Mid. John 5, 35 in later editions ; 
 once Act. dyaXXidco, , Luke 1, 47. Not 
 found in Gr. writers, but often in Sept. for 
 fcia Ps. 2, 11 ; y Ps. 68, 4 ; 1 )3 l i Ps. 20, 
 6 ; iBIiS Ps. 40, 17, etc. pr. spoken of re 
 joicing with song and dance. Hence in 
 N. T. to exult, to rejoice, absol. Luke 10, 
 21. Acts 2, 26 ^yoXXidVaro ; yXaxro-d p.ov, 
 I rejoiced in words, sang aloud. 16, 34. 
 So ^alpeiv KOI dyoXX. intens. to rejoice exceed 
 ingly, Matt. 5, 12. 1 Pet. 4, 13. Rev. 19, 7 ; 
 comp. Ps. 90, 14. 40, 17. (Acta Thorn. 
 ^ 27.) W^h a noun of the same signif. as 
 dat. of manner ; 1 Pet. 1, 8 dyoXXi ao-Se 
 X^pa di/eKXaX7]T<, rejoice with joy unspeak 
 able, i. e. unspeakably. With tva and the 
 Subjunct. John 8, 56 ^yaXXidcraro Iva i8r) 
 rfv Tipfpav TTJV ep.r]v, he rejoiced that he should 
 see my day, i. e. to see it. With eVi c. dat. 
 Luke 1 , 47 ^yoAXi acre TO irvfy^d p.ov eVt T<U 
 3ew. Here, as the active form is elsewhere 
 unknown, it should prob. read dyoXXido-erat 
 TO TTV. comp. Ps. 13, 6 ayaXXiacrerai 17 /cap 
 ita p.ov. (So dydXXecrSat rt rivi Xen. Mem. 
 3. 5. 16. Sept. Ps. 9, 15.) With / c. dat. 
 where a simple dative might stand ; Jolrn 
 
 ayairaa) 
 
 5, 35 dyaX. eV rw <pa>Ti avrov. 1 Pet. 1, 6 
 So Ps. 89, 16 eV TO> ovofjiari <rov dyaXX. 
 13,5. 
 
 dyayu-oy, ov, 6, f), adj. (a priv. yd/xos,) un 
 married, either wholly, ccelebs, 1 Cor. 7, 32. 
 34 ; or spoken of those who do not marry 
 a second time, ib. v. 8. 11. Horn. II. 3. 40. 
 Plut. Lycurg. 15. Xen. Conv. 9. 7. 
 
 djavafCTea), w, f. 170-0), (ayav, a^Sos,) 
 pr. to be pained, either in body, Plato Phsedr. 
 251. c ; or in mind, i. e. to be solicitous or 
 provoked, Plato Phaedo 8, 9. p. 63. b. 64. a. 
 In N. T. to be displeased, angry, indig 
 nant, absol. Matt. 21, 15. 26, 8. Mark 10, 14. 
 Luke 13, 14. (Bel and Drag. 28. Hdian. 
 8. 7. 6.) Mark 14, 4 uyavaKrovvres Trpbs 
 tavTovs KOI \eyovres, indignant among them 
 selves and saying, for dyavaK. KOL Xey. Trpos 
 eavrovs. With Kepi c. gen. Matt. 20, 24. 
 Mark 10, 41. So genr. Plato Ep. 7. p. 
 345. d. Apollodor. Bib. I, Trepl Tirdvav 
 dyavaKTOvcra. 
 
 dyavaKTrjcn^ f a>s, f], indignation, 2 
 Cor. 7, 11. Plut. Comp. Pelop. c. Marcell. 
 3 pen. Thuc. 2. 41. 
 
 ayaTTOO), <, f. Tjtrco, (ciyafjLai, comp. Heb. 
 SIS ,) to love ; sometimes synon. with (ptXea, 
 implying regard and good-will ; biit not like 
 it including sexual love, unless in very late 
 writers ; comp. Luc. V. H. 2. 25. 
 
 1 . Pr. of kindred and near friends, to love, 
 to hold dear, c. ace. e. g. wives, Eph. 5, 25 
 ol av8pes, dycnraTe ras yvvaiKas eavrcov. V. 
 28. 33. Col. 3, 19 ; friends, companions, 
 John 11, 5. 13, 1 rovs 18 iovs. v. 23. 19,26. 
 21, 7. al. So (piXeco Matt. 10, 37. John 11, 
 3. 36. Sept. for nfiJJ Gen. 24, 67-. Ruth 
 4 ; i5._Plut. Pericl. f. Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 14 
 VTTO T>V avruiv yovemv dymra>p.fi oi. Mem. 
 2. 7. 9 <ri> fJiev fKfivas [dSeXcpas] (pi\rj(rfis 
 fKflvai Se ere dyanrjaova-iv. 
 
 2. As including the idea of respect, con 
 fidence, benevolence, sympathy ; e. g. to 
 love a master, Matt. 6, 24. Luke 16, 13 ; 
 our fellow-men, rbv ir\vo-iov Matt. 5, 43. 
 19, 19. Mark 12, 31 ; also Matt. 5, 46. 
 Mark 10, 21. Luke 7, 5 ; ace. impl. v. 42. 
 47 ; TOVS ex^povs Matt. 5, 44. Luke 6, 27. 
 35. Sept. for snx 1 Sam. 18, 16. So 
 Plut. Pericl. 7. Hdian. 1. 8. 9. Xen. Hi. 
 11. 9 VTTO TroXXoJi TToXecoi dyaTrwo liv. 
 Spec, and emphat. of God as loving Christ, 
 John 3, 35. 10, 17. 15, 9. 17, 23. 26 17 
 dya7r>7, rjv ijydTrrjcrds p-e, the love (with) which 
 thou hast loved me ; so Sept. 2 Sam. 13, 15. 
 Buttm. \ 131.4,5. Kiihn. \ 484. (So (piXeco 
 John 5, 20.) Of Christ as loving the Fa 
 ther, John 14, 31. Of God as loving men, 
 
Christians, John 3, 16. 14, 21 Pass. Rom. 
 
 9, 13. 2 Cor. 9, 7. Heb. 12, 6. 1 John 4, 
 
 10, 11. al. Of Christ as loving believers., 
 his disciples, John 13, 34. 14, 21. 15,9. 12. 
 Rom. 8, 37. Eph. 5, 2. 25. al. Of Chris 
 tians as loving God, Matt. 22, 37. Mark 
 
 12, 30. Rom. 8, 28. 1 Cor. 2, 9. 8, 3. 1 
 John 4, 10. 19. 20; (Sept. for Snx Ex. 
 
 20, 6 ;) Christ, John 8, 42. 14, 15. 21 sq. 
 
 21, 16. Eph. 6, 24. 1 Pet. 1, 8 ; one ano 
 ther, i. e. with mutual love as Christian 
 brethren, oXX^Xous John 13, 34. 15, 12. 17. 
 Rom. 13, 8. 1 Pet. 1, 22. 1 John 3, 11. al. 
 TOV doe\(f>6v 1 John 2, 10. 3, 10 ; also 1 
 John 3, 14. 1 Pet. 2, 17 ; ace. impl. 6 dya- 
 TTWV 1 John 4, 7. 8. So of Paul and his 
 spiritual brethren, 2 Cor. 11, 11. 12, 15 el 
 KOI TTfpicr<TOTfpa>s vpds dycnrcav TJTTOV dyo- 
 Trcap.ai even though, the more I love you, the 
 less lam beloved.. 1 Thess. 1, 4 d8f\<pol 
 T)ycnrr]iJ.fvoi. Col. 3, 12. 
 
 3. Of things, to love, to delight in, to like, 
 c. ace. as TrpwroKaSeSptW Luke 11, 43 ; TO 
 O-KOTOS John 3, 19; TOV Koo-pov 1 John 2, 
 15 ; OIKMOO-IIVTJV Heb. 1, 9. (So <iXe&> Matt. 
 23, 6. al.) Sept. for stix Ps. 45. 8. So 
 Jos. Ant. 7. 1. 6. Plut. Lycurg. 29. Xen. 
 Cyr. 7. 5. 67 ^uiXtor av dycnrqv TTJV Trap 
 avT<p oiaiTav. Spec. Rev. 12, 11 OVK rjyd- 
 Trrjcrav TTJV ^rv)(r}V avTutv (i%pi Savdrov they 
 loved not their lives unto the death, i. e. they 
 were careless of their lives and voluntarily 
 exposed themselves to death ; see in art. ov 
 no. 5. Heb. Gr. 149. So Ecclus. 15, 13 OVK 
 dyaTnjroV not loved, i. e. hated, abhorred, -f- 
 
 aycnrr)) TJS, 17, (dyon-doo,) love ; not found 
 in Gr. writers. Sept. for nntix Cant. 5, 8. 
 8, 6. 7. al. In N. T. not found in Mark, 
 Acts, nor James, and only once in both 
 Matt, and Luke. 
 
 1 . love, e. g. to our fellow-men, John 1 5, 
 
 13. Elsewhere spec, and emphat. as con 
 nected with God s mercy to mankind, or 
 with the religious emotions and duties of 
 men ; e. g. God s love to Christ, John 17, 26. 
 Col. 1,136 vibs Ti)s dyanris avTov the son 
 of his love, his beloved son ; Heb. Gr. 104. 
 2. God s love to men, 1 John 3, 1. 4, 
 16 ; so c. gen. 17 dyaTn; TOV SeoO the love of 
 God towards men, Rom. 5, 5. 8 els fads. 
 2 Cor. 13, 13. Eph. 2, 4. Christ s love to 
 men, e. g. Eph. 3. 19 yv&vai TTJV vTrepfidX- 
 Xovcrai/ rffs yvdxreas ayamp TOV X. Rom. 
 8, 35. 39. 2 Cor. 5, 14 ; ev TJJ dydTrrj fiov 
 John 15, 10 ; also with possess, pron. John 
 15, 9 p.fivaTf ev TJ) dyaTrrj rrj ep.fi abide in 
 my love, remain worthy of it. So of love to 
 God as the duty of men, believers, c. gen. 
 
 John 5, 42 TTJV dydnrjv TOV Seot) OVK e 
 Luke 11, 42. 2 Thess. 3, 5. 1 John 2, 5. 
 
 15. 3, 17. 4, 9. 5, 3. Of love to our fel 
 low-Christians, mutual Christian love ; e. g. 
 f] dydmj els d\\r]\ovs 1 Thess. 3, 12. 2 
 Thess. 1, 3. 1 Pet. 4, 8; els Trdvras TOVS 
 ayiovs Eph. 1,15. Col. 1, 4. Philem. 5 ; els 
 vjj.ds 2 Cor. 2, 4 ; ev c. dat. John 13, 35 edv 
 dyuTrrji fx r l re * v "XXijXoiy. 2 Cor. 8, 7 T# 
 e vp.u>v ev Tjfjuv dydnrj love from you to 
 wards us, your love to us (see Winer 54. 
 4) ; absol. Rom. 14, 15 ovKfri Kara dydrrrjv 
 jTfpnraTfls. 1 Cor. 4, 21. 16, 13. 24. 2 Cor. 
 2, 8. Eph. 4, 15. al. Of tore of the truth, 
 TJ dy. Trjs dXri^eias 2 Thess. 2, 10. Hence, 
 love in general, holy love, without specifying 
 a definite object, e. g. as an attribute of 
 God, 1 John 4, 7. 8 6 3c6j dydnr] ecrnv. v. 
 16; as a Christian grace, Rom. 12, 9 17 
 dyaTn; dwiroKpiTos. 13, 10. 1 Cor. 8, 1. 13, 
 1-13. 14, 1. 1 John 4, 10, 16. al. Matt. 24, 
 12. Also f/ dyaTrr) TOV TrvevpaTos the love the 
 Spirit inspires Rom. 1 5, 30. So Wisd. 3,9. 
 6, 17. 18. The gen. after dyaTn; may ex 
 press either the subject or object ; e. g. % 
 dydrrr) TOV 3eoC the love of God towards any 
 one, or also love towards God; see the ex 
 amples above. Winer $ 30. 1. Heb. Gr. 
 5112.2. + 
 
 2. Plur. dyaTrai, >v, al, agapcc, love- 
 feasts, Jude 12. (2 Pet. 2, 13.) Comp. 1 
 Cor. 1 1 , 17 sq. These were public banquets 
 of a frugal kind, instituted by the early 
 Christians, and connected by them with the 
 celebration of the Lord s supper. The pro 
 visions etc. were contributed by the more 
 wealthy individuals, and were common to 
 all Christians, whether rich or poor, who 
 chose to partake. Portions were also sent 
 to the sick and absent members. These 
 dydVai were intended as an exhibition of 
 that mutual love which is required by the 
 Christian religion ; but they became subject 
 to abuses, and were afterwards discontinued. 
 See Tertull. Apol. c. 39. Neander Hist, of 
 the Ch. I. p. 325. [56.1.] 
 
 d yaTnjTo?, 77, 6v, (dyaTrdw,) beloved, 
 dear, of things, Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 32 17 dpeTi} 
 . . . dyarrr]Tri (rvvepyos re^vtraty. Sept. for 
 T 1 ^ Ps. 84, 2. In N. T. beloved, dear, 
 spoken only of Christians as united with 
 God or with each other in the bonds of holy 
 love, e. g. Col. 4, 14 AovKay 6 IciTpos 6 
 dyaTTTjTos. v. 7. 9. 1, 7. Eph. 6, 21. Philem. 
 
 16. 2 Pet. 3, 15. 3 John 1 ; fern. Philem. 
 2; Plur. Acts 15, 25. 1 Tim. 6, 2 on TTIO- 
 roi etcrt Kal dyaTrrjToi. i. e. conjoined in the 
 bonds of faith and love. So dSeX0ot dya- 
 
"Ayap ( 
 
 jnjToi m a direct address, Moved brethren, 
 Christians, Phil. 4, 1. James 1, 16. 19. 2, 
 5. Absol. dyaTrr/Toi id. Rom. 12, 19. 2 Cor. 
 7, 1. Heb. 6, 9. 1 Pet. 2, 11. 1 John 3, 2. 
 21. al. Sing. deX<e 3 John 2. 5. 11. 
 Hence c. gen. cyan-Tyrol 3eoi), beloved of 
 God, chosen by him to salvation, Rom. 1, 
 7. 11, 28. Eph. 5, 1. So Sept. ayanrjroi 
 <rov for "T 1 *?? , spoken of the worshippers 
 of God, Ps/60, 8. 108, 7. 127, 2. Paul 
 applies the term particularly to those con 
 verted under his ministry ; as when he 
 speaks of Epenetus, TOV dya-rrrjTov pov, 
 Rom. 16, 5; also 16, 8. 9. 12; comp. 1 
 Cor. 4, 17 Tt/xoSeoi/, os e ori T(KVOV fiov 
 dyaTrrjTbv tv Kvpim. 2 Tim. 1, 2. So too 
 of a whole church gathered by himself; 
 1 Cor. 4, 14 TfKva fj.ov dya^r/Toi. 10, 14. 
 Phil. 2, 12. With dat. 1 Thess. 2, 8 SioYi 
 dyaTrrjTol riiuv fyevfj^rjTf. In the phrase : 
 6 vlbs 6 dyairrfTos, the beloved son, the well- 
 beloved, as an epithet of an only son, 6 
 fiovoyfvrjs, and spoken in the N. T. only of 
 Christ, as 6 vl\s dyanrjTos TOV 3eov, Matt. 3, 
 17. 12, 18. 17, 5. Mark 1, 11. 9, 7. Luke 
 3, 22. 9, 35. 2 Pet. 1, 17. So in the para 
 ble, Mark 12, 6 eva vlbv ex.a>v, dyaTrr/Tov 
 UVTOV, having one son, his well-beloved, i. e. 
 his only son. Luke 20, 13. Sept. for IW 
 Gen. 22, 2. 12. Jer. 6, 26. Amos 8, 10. 
 Zech. 12, 10. So Hesych. dyaTrr/Tov p.ovo- 
 yevrj, Kf%api.criJ.fi>ov. Pollux 3. 2 KaXotro 8 
 av vibs dyaTTTjTos, 6 p.6vos a>v irarpi rj p.rj- 
 rpi. + 
 
 "Ayap, f), indec. Hagar, Heb. Ijrj 
 ^flight), pr. n. of a maid-servant of Abra 
 ham, the mother of Ishmael. In Gal. 4, 24. 
 25, Paul applies this name allegorically to 
 the inferior condition of the Jews under the 
 law, as compared with that of Christians 
 under the Gospel. Gen. c. 16. 
 
 ayyapevo), f. tvo-u>, pr. to send off an 
 ayyapos or public courier. This word is of 
 Persian origin, and being received into the 
 Greek language passed also into use among 
 the Jews and Romans. Cyrus, or, accord 
 ing to Herodotus, Xerxes, was the first to 
 establish relays of horses (iinra>vfs) and 
 couriers at certain distances on all the 
 great roads, in order that the royal letters 
 and messages might be transmitted with 
 the greatest possible speed. These ayyapoi 
 had authority to press into their service 
 men, horses, ships, or any thing that came 
 in their way, which might serve to hasten 
 their journey, Xen. Cyr. 8. 6. 17. Hdot. 
 8. 98. Comp. Esth. 8, 10. 14. Diet, of Antt. 
 art. Angaria. Afterwards dyyapeva) came 
 
 ayye\o$ 
 
 to signify, to press into service in the man* 
 ner of an ayyapos, Jos. Ant. 13. 2. 3 KeXeuw 
 cje dyyapevecr Sai TCI Ttav lovbaitav VTTOV- 
 yia. Hence in N. T. c. ace. to compel, to 
 press into service, e. g. to accompany one, 
 Matt. 5, 41 OCTTIS ere dyyapevcrei fiiXiov ev. 
 So genr. Matt. 27,32. Mark 15,21. Comp 
 Buxtorf Lex. Rab. Chald. Talm. 131. 
 
 ayyelov, O v, TO (dim. yyos,) a vessel, 
 utensil, Matt. 13, 48. 25, 4. Sept. for ^3 
 Gen. 42, 25. Num. 4, 9. Plut. Romul. 20 . 
 Xen. An. 7. 4. 3. 
 
 dyye\,ia, as, 17, (dyye XXw,) pr. message 
 brought, news, Plut. Pomp. 13. Xen. Cyr. 
 6. 2. 14. In N. T. trop. doctrine announced, 
 precept given, in the name of any one, 1 
 John (1,5.) 3, 11. Sept. for IM Prov. 
 12. 25. 
 
 ayye\.o$, O u, 6, (dyyeXXw,) 1. a mes 
 senger, one who is sent, in order to an 
 nounce, teach, perform, or explore any 
 thing, Matt. 11, 10. Luke 7, 24. 9, 52. 
 James 2, 25 comp. Josh. 6, 17. al. Sept. 
 for Tjldja Mai. 2, 7. al. (Diod. Sic. 11. 23. 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 1.) So in Rev. 1, 20 sq. 
 the angels of the seven churches, are probably 
 the prophets or pastors of those churches, 
 who were the messengers, delegates, of the 
 churches to God in the offering of prayer, 
 service, etc. Others refer this to guardian 
 angels. 
 
 2. an angel, a celestial messenger, in the 
 usage of Scripture, a being superior to man. 
 The Deity is represented as surrounded by 
 innumerable beings of a higher order than 
 man, whom he also employs as his messen 
 gers and agents in administering the affairs 
 of the world, and in promoting the welfare 
 of individuals as well as of the whole hu 
 man family. Matt. 1, 20. 18, 10. 22, 30. 
 Acts 7, 30. al. saep. They are also subject 
 to the Son, and act as his ministers, 1 Pet. 
 3, 22. Heb. 1, 6. Matt. 16, 27. 24, 31. 
 2 Thess. 1, 7. al. As to the numbers of 
 the angels, see Matt. 26, 53. Heb. 12, 22. 
 Rev. 5, 11. Sept. for Ti^n p s . 104, 4. al. 
 See more under Ap^dyyeXoy. Some of 
 these beings ap-apTTjcravres Kal fj.rj Tr/prjcrav- 
 Tfs TrjV eavT&v dp-^rjv, 2 Pet. 2, 4. Jude 6, 
 are called ol nyyeXoi TOV &ta/3oXou V. TOV 
 Sardi/, angels of the devil, or of Satan, Matt. 
 25, 41. 2 Cor. 12, 7. Rev. 12, 9. al. Rev. 
 9, 11 6 dyyeXos TTJS dftvcrcrov, the angel of 
 the abyss, Tartarus, i. e. the destroying an 
 gel ; see A/3a88o>j>. Difficult is 1 Cor. 1 1 , 
 10 8ta TOVTO d(pi\fi T] yvvrj e^ovcriav ex fiv 
 7Ti TTJS Kf(pa\rjs 8ia TOVS dyyt\ovs, for this 
 cause ought the woman to have power (a 
 
aye 
 
 veil) on her head because of the angels, i. e. 
 a veil as the emblem of her being under the 
 power of a husband, and this because of the 
 angels who were regarded as present and 
 taking deep interest in the conduct and 
 worship of Christians ; comp. Luke 15, 7. 
 10. So Paul says of the apostles, 1 Cor. 
 
 4, 9 Searpov tyevrj^Tj/jifv T<O KocrfJico Kal dyye- 
 \ois Kal dvZpoiTTois. Others in 11, 10 un 
 derstand evil angels, demons ; others, spies, 
 but against the usus loquendi. On the an 
 gels generally, see Stuart in Biblioth. Sac. 
 1843, p. 88 sq. + 
 
 aye, (pr. imper. of uy,) a particle of 
 exhortation or incitement, come now, go to, 
 Lat. age, with plur. James 4, 13 aye vvv 
 ot \fyot>T(s. 5, 1. Sept. for NJ Judg. 19, 6. 
 See Winer $ 47. 3. n. Pint. JEm. Paul. 31. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 47. 
 
 ayeto), rjs, 17, (aya>,) a herd ; in N. T. 
 only of swine, Matt. 8, 30. 31. 32 bis. Mark 
 
 5, 11. 13. Luke 8, 32. 33. Sept. for T!? 
 Judg. 5, 16. Hdian. 7. 2. 9. Xen. Mem" 
 2. 9. 7. 
 
 dyevea\6yr)TOS, O v, 6, adj. (a priv. 
 yei/eoAoyea),) without genealogy, whose de 
 scent is unknoivn, Heb. 7, 3. Found only 
 in N. T. where Melchizedek is so called, 
 because, not standing in the public genea- 
 .ogical registers as belonging to the family 
 of Aaron, he was a priest not by right of 
 sacerdotal descent, but by the grace of God ; 
 lu s priesthood therefore is of a higher and 
 more ancient order than that of Aaron ; 
 comp. v. 4 sq. Gen. 14, 18 sq. Ex. 40, 15. 
 Num. 3, 10. 
 
 ayevrjs, e s, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. yews,) 
 pr. one who is without ancestors, or with 
 out descendants ; in N. T. low born, igno 
 ble, base, 1 Cor. 1,28; opp. to fvytv^s in 
 v. 26. Plut. Pericl. 24. Pol. 5. 111. 3. 
 
 ayia^w, f. dorm, (oytos,) not found in 
 Greek writers, but often in Sept. for W ^s . 
 In N. T. pr. to render ayiov. 
 
 1 . to make clean, to cleanse, e. g. ceremo 
 nially, Heb. 9, 13 dytdfet -rrpus TTJV rrjs vap- 
 KOS KaSapoTTjTa. Trop. in a moral sense, 
 to purify, to sanctify ; Rom. 15, 16 that the 
 offering of the Gentiles may be acceptable, 
 f]yiacr/j,fVT} tv TrvtvpaTi dyi w, being purified 
 by the Holy Spirit, i. e. by the sanctifying 
 influences of the H. S. on the hearts of the 
 Gentiles. 1 Cor. 6, 11. Eph. 5,26. 1 These. 
 5, 23. 1 Tim. 4, 5. Heb. 2, 11. 10, 10. 14. 
 29. 13, 12. Rev. 22, 11. Hence of 17 yt- 
 a<rfj.evoi, those who are sanctified, said of 
 Christians in general, Acts 20, 32. 26, 18. 
 
 1 Cor. 1, 2. Jude 1. Also 1 Cor. 7, 14 bis 
 ijyiaa-Tm 6 avrjp . . . ffyUumu TJ ywf], the un 
 believing husband or wife is made clean or 
 sanctified, i. e. is to be regarded, not as un 
 clean, not as an idolater, but as connected 
 with the Christian community. See ayios 
 no. 1. Hence, to regard or venerate as ho 
 ly, to hallow, Pass. Matt. 6, 9 dytao-SiTjra) TO 
 oi/o/za o-ou. Luke 11,2. 1 Pet. 3, 15. Sept. 
 for ttigp Is. 9, 13. 29, 23. 
 
 2. to make sacred or holy, to consecrate, 
 to set apart from a common to a sacred use ; 
 since in the Jewish ritual this was one great 
 object of the purifications ; e. g. things, 
 Matt. 23, 17 6 vaos 6 ayida>v TOV ^pvfruv, 
 23, 19. 2 Tim. 2, 21 o~Kfvos f)yiacrp.tvov. 
 Sept. for Uflp Lev. 8, 10 sq. 30. Of per 
 sons, to sanctify and set apart, to consecrate, 
 as being set apart of God and sent by him 
 for the performance of his will, and thus 
 including the idea of holiness. John 10, 36 
 ov 6 Trarrjp r)yia<rf, whom the father hath con 
 secrated and sent into the world. 17, 17 dyi- 
 ao-ov avTovs fv rfj dXrj Sfia crov, consecrate 
 them in or through thy truth, i. e. the preach 
 ing of thy truth, i. q. / rw Xo yw (comp. 
 V. 18). v. 19 bis. So Ecclus. 45, 4. 49,7. 
 
 O v, o, (aytaw,) not found in 
 Gr. writers ; in N. T. sanctification, purity 
 of heart and life, holiness, Rom. 6, 19. 22. 
 1 Thess. 4, 3. 4. 7. 1 Tim. 2, 15. Heb. 12, 
 14. Hence 2 Thess. 2, 13 eV dyta(r/ia) 
 TrvfvpaTos, in sanctification of the spirit, i. e. 
 produced by the Holy Spirit. 1 Pet. 1, 2. 
 Meton. the cause or author of this sanctifi 
 cation, 1 Cor. 1, 30. Sept. consecration 
 for ttfljjn Judg. 17, 3. 
 
 ayios, la, tor, rarely found in Attic 
 writers, who prefer ayvos, but often in the 
 Sept. for ttJl *^ and ^p . Hence the pri 
 mary idea is pure, clean, (see in dytd^w no. 
 1. Gesen. Heb. Lex. art. li 11)5, 5 3J3,)like 
 ayvos, but it superadds the notion of respect 
 and veneration, which in the latter is less 
 prominent ; see Tittm. de Synon. N. T. p. 
 21 sq. 
 
 1 . pure, clean, i. e. ceremonially or mo 
 rally clean, and also worthy of respect, re 
 verence, veneration ; so of a sacrifice. 3ucr/a, 
 iviihout blemish, holy, Rom. 12, 1. Metaph. 
 morally pure, upright, blameless in heart 
 and life, holy ; Mark 6, 20 londwrjv ...av- 
 8pa SiKaiov Kal ayiov. 1 Cor. 7, 34. Eph. 
 1, 4. 5, 27 ; 6 vopos Rom. 7, 12. al. Sept. 
 for lUVi!? Lev. 11, 44. (Plato Soph. p. 
 249. a, crep-vav /cat aytov vovv OVK f%ov.) 
 Spec, of those who are purified and sancti 
 
ayiOTT/9 
 
 fied by the influences of the Spirit, a saint ; 
 and as this is assumed of all who profess 
 the Christian name, hence ayioi, saints, 
 Christians, Acts 9, 13 comp. v. 14. 9,32. 
 41. 26, 10. Rom. 1, 7. 8, 27. al. Hence 
 spoken of those who are to be in any way 
 reckoned to the Christian community, 1 
 Cor. 7, 14; see ayidfa no. 1. So ayiov 
 (friXrjpa, the sacred Christian kiss, the pledge 
 of Christian affection, Rom. 16, 16. 1 Cor. 
 16, 20. 2 Cor. 13, 12. Emphat. holy, hal 
 lowed, u-orthy of reverence and veneration ; 
 e. g. God, John 17, 11. Rev. 4, 8. 6, 10. 
 Sept. for ti-hj? Is. 5, 16. 6, 3. So of his 
 name, Luke 1, 49. Sept. for tiKp Lev. 22, 
 2. So TO TTVfvfjia TO ay i ot>, the Holy 
 Spirit, Matt. 1, 18, and very often ; see 
 T7VfVfj.a. Luke 1, 72 dia^rjKT] ayia. Rom. 1, 
 2 iv ypa(pals dyiais. Sept. for ^1P Dan. 
 11,28. 30. 
 
 2. consecrated, sacred, holy, set apart 
 from a common to a sacred use, belonging 
 to God ; spoken of places, temples, cities, 
 the priesthood, men, etc. Matt. 4, 5. 7, 6. 
 24,15. 27,53. Acts 7, 33. Rev. 11,2. So of 
 persons, airapx^l ayia Rom. 11,16. Luke 2, 
 23; apostles, Eph. 3, 5; prophets, Luke 1, 
 70. Acts 3, 21. 2 Pet. 1,21 ; angels, Matt. 
 25, 31. 1 Thess. 3, 13. al. So of the temple, 
 Acts 6, 13. 21, 28. Hence TO ayiov the sanc 
 tuary, spoken of the tabernacle or temple, 
 Heb. 9, 1 ; oftener Plur. ra ay la, the sanc 
 tuary, either terrestrial Heb. 9, 2, or celestial 
 Heb. 8,2. 9,8.12.24. 10,19. Heb. 9, 3 TO 
 ayia ayiuv, the holy of holies, the inner 
 sanctuary; see Heb. Gr. 117. Winer 
 5 37. 2. Sept. for &&r%. ti^ p Ex. 26, 33. 
 2 Chr. 3, 8 sq. 5, 7 sq. Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 
 19 iepbv fj.d\a ayiov. -f- 
 
 ayiorrjs, TJTOS, 77, (ayios, ) pr. purity, in 
 N. T. metaph. sanctity of life, holiness, Heb. 
 12, 10. 1 Mace. 15, 2. On nouns in -orrjs 
 see Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 350. 
 
 aryiaxrwi}, rjs, 77, (ayios,) for the comm. 
 ayiocrvvT), pr. i. q. ayiorrjs. 
 
 1 . Metaph. sanctity, holiness, 2 Cor. 7, 1 . 
 1 Thess. 3, 13. 
 
 2. the being worthy of veneration and 
 icorship, i. e. sanctity, majesty. Rom. 1, 4 
 TTvevjj.a ayiioo-uvr/s, i. e. Christ s spiritual 
 state of exaltation and majesty as Messiah, 
 in antithesis to Kara crap/ca in the preceding 
 verse; comp. 1 Tim. 3, 16. Sept. for&Kp 
 Ps. 97, 12 ; but also for ti) p s . 95, 6, and 
 for Tin Ps. 145, 6. For the gen. instead 
 of an adj. see Winer } 34. 2. b. Buttm. 
 5132. n. 12. Heb. Gr. 104. 1. 
 
 8 ayvoeco 
 
 ay/coXy, n s, TJ, the arm, Luke 2, 28, 
 comp. Mark 9, 36. Sept. for p^n 1 K. 3, 
 20. Plut. Amator. 10. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 50. 
 
 ajKicrrpov, ov, TO, (kindr. ayKvpa,) a 
 fish-hook, Matt. 17, 27. Sept. for nn 2 K. 
 19, 28 ; nan Hab. 1, 15. Julian. V. H. 1. 
 
 5. Plat. Soph. 220. c. 
 
 cijKVpa, as, 77, (kindr. ayKos,) an an 
 chor, Acts 27, 29. 30. 40. Trop. Heb. 6, 
 19. Plut. Pomp. 50. Xen. Anab. 3. 5. 10. 
 
 ayvafos, ov, 6, fj, adj. (a priv. yvafavs,) 
 not yet fulled or dressed; hence new, Matt. 
 9, 16. Mark 2, 21 ; i. q. Kaivos in Luke 5. 
 36. 
 
 / t srr \ 
 
 ayveia, as, 77, (ayvos,) pr. purity, up 
 rightness, Plato Legg. 917. b. In N. T. 
 purity, chastity, 1 Tim. 4, 12. 5, 2. So 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 5. 1. Sopji. (Ed. R. 864. An- 
 tiph. 116. 11. 
 
 a^jVlCffi, f. io-a>, (ayvos,) 1 . to purify, to 
 make clean, e. g. ceremonially, c. ace. John 
 11, 55 ayvifiv favTov, to prepare oneself 
 by purification for the sacred festivals ; 
 which was done among the Jews by visit 
 ing the temple, offering up prayers, abstain 
 ing from certain kinds of food, washing 
 their clothes, bathing, shaving the head, etc. 
 Comp. Ex. 19, 10. 14 sq. Sept. for "ina 
 2 Chr. 29, 16. 18; W?p Ex. 19, 10. 
 Plut. Quaest. Rom. 1. Soph. Aj. 656. 
 
 2. Mid. dyyio^at,Pass. perf. andaor. 1 
 fjyvi(TiJ.ai, 1771/10-3771 , with a Mid. signif. agere 
 castimoniam, to take upon oneself a row of 
 abstinence, for the purpose of greater sanc 
 tity, like a Nazarite, Acts 21, 24. 26. 24, 
 18. The Jews were accustomed, when 
 under a vow of this kind, to abstain for a 
 certain time from the better sorts of food, 
 to let their hair grow, to keep themselves 
 from all pollution ; and when this time had 
 expired, they were freed from the obligation 
 of their vow by a particular sacrifice ; Num. 
 
 6, 2-21. Sept. for 1H Hiph. Num. 6, 3. 
 See Lightfoot Hor. Heb. p. 1078. Trop. 
 to render pure, to cleanse in a moral sense, 
 c. ace. James 4, 8 ayviaaTe nap8ias. 1 Pet. 
 1, 22 TOS ^v^as v[J.uv rjyviKores. 1 John 3, 
 3. So Apollodor. 2. 928. 
 
 ov, 6, (ayvifa, ) a cleansing, 
 i. e. ceremonial, Sept. for " H-? and nxatl 
 Num. 8, 7. 8. Dion. Hal. Ant. 3. 22. In 
 N. T. abstinence, in consequence of a vow, 
 Acts 21, 26, see in ayvifa no. 2. Sept. for 
 I" Num. 6, 5; "VM Amos 2, 11. 
 
 ayvoea), , fat. 770-0), (a priv. voe w,) not 
 to perceive, not to know. 
 
1. Genr. not to knou*, to be ignorant of, 
 with ace. of pers. Acts 17, 23 ; ace. of 
 thing, Rom. 10, 3. 11, 25. 2 Cor. 2, 11. 
 (Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 23~. ib. 4. 2. 25.) With 
 OTI, Rom. 1, 13. 6, 3. 7, 1. 1 Cor. 10, 1 ; 
 imfp nvos on, 2 Cor. 1, 8. (Xen. Ag. 5. 
 6.) Also TTfpi TIVOS 1 Cor. 12, 1. 1 Thess. 
 
 4, 13. In 2 Pet. 2, 12 ev ols dyvoova-i /3\a- 
 (r<pr)p.ovvTfs is by attraction for eV TOVTOIS, a 
 dyvoovtn, ^Xaa-fprjpovvrfs. Winer 63. Ab- 
 sol. 1 Tim. 1, 13. 1 Cor. 14, 38 Se TIS 
 dyvotl, dyvoeiTO). (Others here, to act fool 
 ishly, as Sept. for bxia Num. 12, 1 1 .) Part. 
 pass, dyvoovp.fvos, c. dat. unknown to any 
 one, Gal. 1, 22; absol. unknown, ignoble, 
 2 Cor. 6, 9. Spec. Part, ol dyvoovvTes, 
 spoken of those who sin through ignorance 
 and blindness, the ignorant, the sinful, Heb. 
 
 5, 2; comp. Hos. 4, 6. Sept. for fi$tt5 , 
 M<, Lev. 4, 13. 5, 18. Pol. 5. 11. ft.* 
 
 2. Spec, not to understand, not to appre 
 hend or comprehend, c. ace. Mark 9, 32 ot 
 Se fiyvoow TO /%ta. Luke 9, 45. Acts 13, 
 27; ort Rom. 2, 4. Soph. Trach. 78. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 33. 
 
 UTOS, TO, (dyi/oeo),) pr. igno 
 rance, involuntary error, Theophr. H. PI. 
 9. 4. 8. Sept. for nattja Gen. 43, 12. In 
 N. T. error, sin, Heb. 9, 7. So Tob. 3, 3. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 1. 
 
 a 
 
 ayvoia, as, rj, (ayi/oe o>,) ignorance, Acts 
 3, 17. (Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 34.) Spoken of 
 ignorance of God and divine things, Acts 
 17, 30. Eph. 4, 18. 1 Pet. 1, 14. 
 
 TJ, ov, pure, clean; ayvos dpi 
 Eurip. Orest. 1620. In N. T. trop. 
 pure, innocent, blameless; 2 Cor. 7, 11 
 ayvovs elvai ev rravrl irpdypaTi. Phil. 4, 8. 
 1 Tim. 5, 22. (Hdian. 1. 11. 12.) Also 
 modest, chaste, 2 Cor. 11, 2. Tit. 2, 5. 1 
 Pet. 3, 2. (Xen. Conv. 8. 15.) Spec. of 
 God, pure, perfect, holy, 1 John 3, 3 ; of his 
 <ro<f)ia, James 3, 17 ; comp. Wisd. 7, 22 sq. 
 Sept. for lino Ps. 12, 7. 19, 10. 
 
 TTJTOS, 17, (dywk,) pr. purity ; 
 trop. pureness of life, 2 Cor. 6, 6. 
 
 ayvw$, adv. with pure intent, sincerely, 
 Phil. 1, 16 or 17. Hesiod. Op. et D. 339 
 ayvats Kal KaSapcos. 
 
 dyvwa-ia, as , f,, (a priv. yvS.a-is, ) pr. 
 ignorance, Thuc. 8. 66. In N. T. wilful 
 ignorance, blindness; 1 Cor. 15, 34 ayi/- 
 viav 3eoi5. 1 Pet. 2, 15. Sept. Job 35, 16. 
 Wisd. 13, 1. 
 
 ayvaa-TOS, ov, 6, fj, adj. (a priv. yz/co- 
 <n-(fc,) unknown ; Acts 17, 23 ayi/worw Sew, 
 
 to a unknown god, i. e. a god whose name 
 was unknown, not necessarily the God of 
 the Jews. Wisd. 11, 19. Hdian. 1. 1. 14 
 Plut. CatoMaj. 1. 
 
 ayopa, ds, f], (dye/pca,) a place of pub 
 lic resort, in towns and cities ; any open 
 place, where the people came together ei 
 ther for business or to sit and converse. In 
 oriental cities such open places were at the 
 inside of the gates ; and here public busi 
 ness was transacted, and tribunals held, as 
 also the markets ; see Ruth 4, 11. Neh. 8, 
 16. Heb. Lex. art. "I?1S .Hence in N. T. 
 a place, market-place, forum, Acts 16, 19. 
 17, 17. Matt. 11, 16 and Luke 7, 32. Matt. 
 20, 3. 23, 7. Mark 6, 56. 12, 38. Luke 
 11, 43. 20, 46. Sept. for pVCJ open street. 
 Ecc. 12, 4. 5. (Plut. Demetr. 12. Xen. 
 Conv. 8. 21. Mem. 4. 2. 1.) Mark 7, 4 
 Kal OTTO dyopds [e ASoirej] fdv prj jBanTi- 
 u>vrai, OVK eVSiotm, and [coming] from the 
 market, except they wash, they eat not ; see 
 Winer 66. III. e. Ecclus. 31, 25 flaTmfo- 
 pevos dno vfKpov. Arr. Epict. 3. 19 av p.rj 
 fvpo)fj.fv (payelv e< ftaXaveiov. Others 
 here take dyopd as i. q. things sold in the 
 market, provisions, and translate : of what 
 is from the market, unless they wash it, they 
 do not eat ; see Krebs Obss. p. 85. Winer 
 1. c. So dyopd for grain Jos. Ant. 14. 16. 2. 
 
 dyopdfyj), f. ao-co, (dyopa,) to market, 
 Hdot. 2. 35 at p.ev yvvaiKes dyopdovcri Kal 
 KaTrrjXfvovcri. In N. T. 
 
 1. to buy, to purchase, c. ace. Matt. 13, 
 44 TOV dypbv eKflvov. v. 46. Mark 15, 46. 
 16, 1. al. (Plut. de Fortun. 1. Xen. An. 
 5. 7. 13.) With ace. and dat. Matt. 14, 15 
 eavTols /3pco/iara. Mark 6, 36 ; ace. and e ls 
 Tiva Luke 9, 13 ; ace. impl. Matt. 21, 12. 
 25, 9. 10. Luke 17, 28. 19, 45. Sept. for 
 nj|3 Is. 24, 2; "i?^ Gen. 41, 57. (Xen. 
 An. 1. 5. 10.) Further, ace. and gen. of 
 price, Mark 6, 37 dyopdcroifiev 8rjvapia>v dia- 
 K0(ria>v uprovs . (Ecclus. 20, 12.) Also ace. 
 and fK c. gen. of price, Matt. 27, 7 rjyopaa-av 
 e avT(i>v TOV dypov. (Palsph. Fab. 46.) So 
 too ace. and ivapd TIVOS, Rev. 3, 18. Sept. 
 Neh. 10, 31. 
 
 2. Trop. of persons, to buy, to redeem, for 
 a price or ransom paid ; spoken of those 
 redeemed by the blood of Christ from the 
 bondage of sin and death ; c. ace. 2 Pet. 2, 1 
 Kal TOV dyopdcravra avTovs decrrrorrjv dpvov- 
 p.fvoi. Pass, with gen. of price, 1 Cor. 6, 
 20 fjyopdcr^rjTe yap Tip.rjs. 7, 23. Also with 
 ace. and dat. and ev of price, Rev. 5, 9 rjyo- 
 pacras ro> 3ew fjfJ.ds fv rw ai/iart crou. (Sept. 
 for 3 rt3 l ]3 l Chr. 21, 24.) Pass, with dVrf 
 TIVOS Rev. 14, 3. 4. + 
 
1 
 
 ou, 6, f), adj. (dyopd,) pr. per 
 taining to the market, Plato Rep. 425. c ; a 
 market-man, Hdot. 1. 93. In N. T. 
 
 1 . Of persons who loiter in the markets 
 and public places, a lounger, idler, vulg. a 
 loafer, Acts 17, 5. Xen. Hell. 6. 2. 23 TOV 
 dyopaiov re o^Xoz/. Plato Prot. 347. C. 
 
 2. Of time or days as held in public, a 
 court-day, judicial day; Acts 19,38 dyo- 
 paioi ayovrat S. rjfjifpai. So Jos. Ant. 14. 
 10. 21 ayovri. rov dyopaiov. Strabo 13. p. 
 629. a. Some editions in Acts 19, 38 have 
 ayopatoi, but without good reason ; see Wi 
 ner 5 6. 2. 
 
 aypa, as, 17, a hunting, catching, Xen. 
 
 Ven. 1. 1. In N. T. only of fishing, Luke 
 
 5, 4. Meton. draught of fishes, Luke 5, 9. 
 
 So Horn. Od. 12. 330. Plut. Timol. 20 ; 
 
 meton. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 19. 
 
 d<ypdfj,/jt,aTO$, O v, 6, f], adj. (a priv. 
 ypd/i/ia,) illiterate, unlearned, Acts 4, 13. 
 It here refers rather to Jewish literature 
 and learning ; comp. John 7, 15. Diod. 
 Sic. 12. 13. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 20. 
 
 , >, f. rja-ca, (oypctvAos ; dypos, 
 av\r),) to rf.Tr.ain or live abroad, in the fields 
 or country, sub dio agere ; absol. Luke 2, 8 
 irotjueWs 1 r]<jav . . . dyoavXoviTcs. Parthen. 
 Erot. c. 29 jBovKo\a)t> Kara TOV A. tri>r]v ^fip.a- 
 TOS re Kal 3epovs rjypav\fi. Strabo 4. p. 197. 
 Plut. Numa 4. 
 
 aypevo), f. etio-co, (aypa.) to take in hunt 
 ing, Xen. Anab. 5. 3. 8. Sept. Job 10, 16. 
 In N. T. trop. to ensnare, to entrap, by 
 insidious questions, c. ace. Mark 12, 13. 
 Sept. for ^ Prov. 5, 22 ; Hb Prov. 6, 25. 
 
 d<ypl\aiOS, on, 6, (aypios, e Acu a,) a 
 wild olive-tree, oleaster, i. q. KOTIVOS, Rom. 
 11, 17. 24. The wild olive bears little or 
 no fruit, and is therefore contrasted by Paul 
 with the cultivated olive, KaXXteXaioy. 
 Theophr. H. PI. 2. 2. 5. 
 
 aypto?, la, iov, adj. (dypos, ) wild, e. g. 
 animals Pol. 12. 4. 1. Xen. An. 1. 2. 7. 
 In N. T. wild, e. g. 
 
 1. Of honey, pe\i aypiov wild honey 
 Matt. 3, 4. Mark 1,6. Here the honey of 
 wild bees is to be understood, made in hol 
 low trees or crevices of the rocks, i. q. ho 
 ney out of the rock Ps. 81, 17. Deut. 32, 13; 
 or like the honey and honey-comb men 
 tioned 1 Sam. 14, 25-27 ; comp. Judg. 14, 
 8. Prov. 25, 16. Maundrell saw many bees 
 on the flowers between Jericho and the 
 Dead Sea (p. 115) ; and Forskal notes that 
 he often saw honey flowing in the woods 
 of Arabia ; Descr. Animal, p. xxiii. Comp. 
 
 ajco 
 
 Diod. Sic. 17. 75. Jos. B. J. 4. 8. 3 /cat /if- 
 \iTTorp6<pos Se 17 x^P ) * e - the region ot 
 Jericho. Others understand honey-dew, 
 found in Arabia and other regions of Asia 
 upon the leaves of certain species of trees, 
 and similar to the present manna of Sinai ; 
 see Theophr. H. Plant. 3. 9. Plin. H. N. 
 12. 18. ib. 16. 11. Diod. Sic. 19. 94. But 
 the evidence is very slight that this was 
 ever common in Judea, and especially on 
 the high deserts west of the Dead Sea ; 
 Burckhardt Syria p. 392. See Bochart Hie- 
 roz. II. 518 sq. CEdmann Verm. Samml. 
 VI. p. 136. Rosenm. Alterthumsk. IV. ii. 
 p. 425. Winer Realw. art. Honig. 
 
 2. Of waves, wild, fierce, raging, an em 
 blem of wicked men, Jude 13. Wisd. 14, 1 
 ciypia Kv/j-ara. Plato Legg. 919. a, \mb ^et- 
 }iu>va>v aypicov. 
 
 a , 6, Agrippa, see Hpw- 
 
 ov, 6, a field, i. e. 1. the open 
 fields, country, as distinguished from the 
 city or town, Matt. 24, 18 6 / r aypw. 
 Mark 15, 21. Luke 17, 7. 23, 26 ; as 
 including tillage, pasturage, herbage, Matt. 
 6, 28. 30. Luke 12, 28. 15, 15. Sept. 
 Gen. 2, 5. 2 K. 8, 6. (Xen. OEc. 11. 15, 
 16.) Spec, a field in tillage, but in Pales 
 tine not enclosed, Matt. 13,24. 27. 31. 
 Luke 15, 25. al. Sept. for JTiia Ruth 2. 
 17. 23. (Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 8.) I lur. fields, 
 i. q. a farm, farms, land; Matt. 19, 29 
 ocrriy dtprJKev . . . rj rtuva rj dypovs. Mark 10, 
 29, 30 ; Sing. id. Acts 4, 37. Sept. and 
 Tii? 2 K. 8, 3. 5. So Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 
 1 1 . Hence 
 
 2. Plur. dy pot, farms, i. q. villas, ham 
 lets, in the country, Mark 5, 14. 6, 36. 56. 
 Sept, for .Tito Neh. 11, 30. Xen. Hell. 
 -4. 7. 3. + 
 
 aypVTTVed), <>, f. ^o-o>, (aypvnvos ; a 
 priv. ZTTVOS^ to be sleepless, to watch, Plut. 
 Themist. 3. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 3 InN. T. 
 trop. to be ivakeful, vigilant, to watch, absol. 
 Mark 13, 33. Luke 21, 36. Eph. 6, 18; c. 
 imfp TLVOS over any one, Heb. 13, 17. So 
 Wisd. 6, 15. Sept. Ezra 8, 29. 
 
 aypVTrvia, as, r/, a watching, want of 
 sleep, 2 Cor. 6, 5. 11, 27. 2 Mace. 2, 26. 
 Plut. Philopcem. 3. Xen. Mem. 4. 5. 9. 
 
 ajco, f. 2 w Acts 22, 5. 1 Thess. 4, 14, 
 also Xen. An. 4. 8. 12, and often in Sept. 
 as Ex. 22, 13. Num. 3, 15 ; but the usual 
 form is fut. OO/H, Buttm. 113. 5. Winer 
 5 15. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 287, 735; Aor. 2 
 with redupl. tfyayov Buttm. \ 85. n. 3 : 
 
Pass. aor. 1 rjx^ r l v > to l^d, to conduct. 
 Sept. often for fiTCrt, Tj ^ in. 
 
 1. Pr. of persons and things in various 
 senses : a) to lead or bring to a person or 
 olace ; with ace. impl. and dat. Matt. 21, 2 
 vydytTf fj.oi. (1 MaCC. 7, 2.) So uyeiv ea> 
 c. acc. et dut. John 19, 4. 13 ; uyeiv 2>e 
 c. acc. Luke 19, 27. With acc. and prep, 
 as e-rri Tiva of pers. or place, to lead to, to 
 bring before, Matt. 10, 18. Luke 21, 12. 
 23, 1. Acts 17, 19. 18, 12; also eVt <r(pa- 
 y^v Acts 8, 32 from Sept. Is. 53, 7. Sept. 
 Ex. 22, 13. Jer. 25, 9. Also -n-pos Tiva, to 
 lead or bring to any one, adducere, Mark 
 11,7. Luke 4, 40. 18, 40. 19, 35. John 1, 
 43. 8, 3. 9, 13. Acts 9, 27. 23, 18 bis. 
 Sept. Gen. 2, 19. 22. (Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 1.) 
 With eo>s c. gen. of place, Luke 4, 29. 
 Acts 17, 15. With acc. simply, id. Matt. 
 21,7. Mark 11, 2. Luke 19, 30. John 7, 
 45. 10, 16. Acts 5, 21. 26. 27. 19, 37. 20, 
 12. 25, 6. 17. 23. b) to lead or bring with 
 one, e. g. <? avv at>ra> 1 Thess. 4, 14 comp. 
 .V. 17; aye p.era creavTou 2 Tim. 4, 11 ; 
 simply c. acc. impl. Acts 21, 16 ayovres 
 Trap w evio-%up.ev Mvdo~cavi, bringing with 
 them Mnason, by attract, for Mmo-wra, see 
 Buttm. 143. 4. Kiihn. $ 657. Jos. Ant. 
 10. 9. 6 cmfiptv els TT)V A. iyvTTTov aya>v nal 
 TOV lepffj.iav. Plato Soph. 216. a. c) to 
 lead out or away, deducere ; c. acc. simply, 
 Mark 13 ; 11 orav 5e ayaxriv vp.ds TrapaSi- 
 Sovres. Luke 22, 54 ; Pass. Luke 23, 32 ; 
 also with eTy Tiva of place etc. to which, 
 Luke 4, 1. 9. 10, 34. John 18, 28. Acts 6, 
 12. 9,2. 11,25. 21,34. 22,5. [24.] 23, 10. 
 31 ; (Is rov 8jjfjiov Acts 17, 5 ; els b*6gav Heb. 
 2, 10. (Jos. Ant. 2. 7. 3 els UTroXavo-iv dya- 
 3o> rjyayov TOVTOV.) With eiri Tiva of pers. 
 Acts 9, 21 ; absol. John 19, 16. d) By Hebr. 
 to bring forth, i. e. to cause to come, to raise 
 up ; Acts 13, 23 in later editions : tfyaye rc5 
 icrpaijX cra>rf}pa irjcrovv, where others fjyeipe. 
 Sept. for X n 2n Zech. 3,8. Is. 46, 11. e) 
 Trop. to lead, to incite, to induce; with acc. 
 and els, Rom. 2, 4 els peTavoidv ere liyei. 
 (Pol. 5. 1 6. 2 e Is peTavoiav aeiv TOV /3acrtAea.) 
 Pass. 1 Cor. 12, 2 o>s av rjyeo-^e just as ye 
 were led away, sc. to idolatry. Also ye- 
 crSai Trvevp.aTi Seou Rom. 8, 14. Gal. 5, 18 ; 
 ay. eTn%vfj.ims 2 Tim. 3, 6. So Dem. 228. 
 1 1 Tols e^uftev Xoyots Tjy/Jievos. 
 
 2. Intrans. with eavrov or the like im 
 plied, to lead off", to go away, to depart ; see 
 Buttm. $ 130. n. 2. Kiihn. 338. b. So 
 Subj. yo>/iev, let us go, Matt. 26, 46. Mark 
 14, 42. John 11, 16; aywynei firevSev John 
 14, 31 ; see Buttm. 5 139. n. 1. 2. With els 
 
 11 ASdfJ, 
 
 Tiva of place Mark 1. 38. John 11,7; -n-pos 
 Tiva of pers. John 11, 15. Dem. 608. 14 
 Xen. Hell. 4. 2. 18,19. 
 
 3, In respect to time, to lead on, to pass, 
 impers. c. acc. Luke 24, 21 TpiTJ]v -ra.vrr]v 
 rjfjLepav ayei <TT)p.epov, to-day one is passing 
 this third day, the third day is passing. 
 Also to keep, to hold, i. e. to celebrate ; 
 Pass, yrvtaimv be dyopevuv TOV Hpcodov 
 Matt. 14, 6; dyopaioi ayovrai Acts 19, 38. 
 Sept. for fliOS Esth. 9, 18 sq. 2 Mace. 2 
 16. Pol. 8. 37. 1. Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 6. 
 
 ajwjrj, T) f , ^ (ayta,) pr. a leading, so 
 of a horse Xen. Eq. 6. 4 ; a training, edu 
 cation, Xen. Eq. 3. 4. In N. T. the life 
 which one leads, manner of life, 2 Tim. 3, 10. 
 Sept. Esth. 2,20. So Jos. Ant. 14. 10. 2 
 Trepl Tr)s lovSaiW dywyf/s. Pol. 18. 1. 2. 
 See Ldsner Obss. e Phil. p. 420 sq. 
 
 aycov, ) VOS , 6, (ay,) a place of assem 
 bly, Horn. II. 18. 376; also where games 
 were held, a place of contest, stadium, Thuc. 
 5. 50. In N. T. only trop. a contest, con 
 ftict, fight, held in the stadium, as an em 
 blem of the efforts, toils, and trials of the 
 Christian life ; 1 Tim. 6, 12 dyow fov TOV 
 KaXov dyatva TTJS Trio-Teas. 2 Tim. 4, 7. 
 With the idea of peril, affliction, Phil. 1, 30. 
 Col. 2, 1. 1 Thess. 2, 2. So pr. 2 Mace. 
 4, 18. Pol. 7. 10. 2. Xen. CEc. 7. 9; trop. 
 Pol. 4. 56. 4. Spec, a race, in the same 
 tropical sense ; Heb. 12, 1 Tpe^nev TOV 
 TrpOKeip.evov Tjfuv aycava. 
 
 aywvia, as, i], (aywj/,) a contest, conflict, 
 pr. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 15. In N. T. trop. 
 agony, conflict of mind, Luke 22, 44. So 
 2 MaCC. 3, 16. Pol. 8. 21. 2 TrX^y ayw- 
 vias. 
 
 i, f:ia- p. M , (ayobi/,) Mid. dep. 
 
 1. to contend for a prize, to be a com 
 batant in the public games ; Part. 6 ayw- 
 vi6(jievos 1 Cor. 9, 25. (Xen. Mem. 3. 12 
 1.) Hence to contend, to fight with an 
 adversary, absol. John 18, 36 ; acc. of cor- 
 resp. noun, ay. TOV Ka\bv dy&va 1 Tim. 6, 
 12. 2 Tim. 4, 7 ; see in aycoi/. So 2 Mace. 
 8, 16. Pint. Arat. 38. Xen. An. 4. 6. 7. 
 
 2. Genr. to strive, to struggle, with effort, 
 absol. Luke 13, 24. Col. 1, 29. [1 Tim. 4, 
 10] ; ay. inrep TWOS Col. 4, 12. Dem. 129. 
 5 ; comp. 314. 16. 
 
 MSa/i, o, indec. Adam, Heb. B^ 
 (ruddy), pr. n. of the first man, Luke 3, 38. 
 Rom. 5, 14 bis. 1 Cor. 15, 22. 45. 1 Tim. 
 2, 13. 14. Jude 14. See Gen. 1, 27 sq. 
 In 1 Cor. 15, 45 Jesus is called 6 eaxaros 
 ASa/x, as being the author of spiritual life 
 
12 
 
 and the first to rise from the dead ; comp. 
 v. 20-22. 
 
 ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. Scwra- 
 i/aa>.) without expense, gratuitous, 1 Cor. 9, 
 18. Diod. Sic. 1. 80. Plut. Mor. II. p. 49. 
 
 AS&l, 6, indec. Addi, pr. n. of a man, 
 Luke 3, 28. It is probably Heb. but does 
 not occur in the O. T. 
 
 a8e\(f})], iJ ?J 17, (aSeX^os.) a sister, born 
 of the same parents, Luke 10, 39. 40. John 
 11, 1. 3. 5. Acts 23, 16. al. (Xen. Cyr. 2. 
 4. 5.) So too Matt. 13, 56. Mark 6, 3 ; 
 where others understand a relative, kins 
 woman, as Sept. and fi DX Gen. 24, 59. 
 60. Trop. for a female friend, esteemed 
 and beloved as a sister, Matt. 12, 50. Mark 
 3, 35. 1 Tim. 5, 2. (Comp. Sept. Cant. 4, 
 9 sq.) Spec, a sister of the same faith, a 
 female Christian, Rom. 16, 1. 1 Cor. 7, 
 15. 9, 5. James 2, 15. -f- 
 
 d8e\(f)6$, ov, 6, from a collect, and SeX- 
 0vs,seeButtm. 5 120. n. 11.2. Kiihner333. 
 
 1. a brother, whether from the same fa 
 ther only, Matt. 1, 2. Luke 3, 1. 19; or 
 also born of the same mother, Matt. 4, 18. 
 
 13, 55. Luke 6, 14. John 1, 41. 11, 2. al. 
 (Xe.i. Hell. 3. 4. 29.) Sometimes it is to 
 be supplied before the gen. of a pronoun, 
 as Acts 1, 13. Luke 6, 16; comp. Jude 1. 
 But 6 d8f\(>6s, like Heb. nx , is often 
 employed in other and wider senses, e. g. 
 
 2. For a kinsman, relative, in any de 
 gree of blood, as Sept. for nx Gen. 13, 8. 
 
 14, 16. Here some refer Matt. 12, 46. 47. 
 13, 55. John 7, 3. Acts 1, 14, as implying 
 the kinsmen of Jesus ; but more prob. they 
 were his uterine brothers ; see Matt. 1, 25. 
 13, 55. Mark 6, 3. Luke 2, 7. John 2, 12. 
 
 3. For one of the same nation, a fellow- 
 citizen, countryman, Matt. 5. 47. Acts 2, 
 29. 3, 17. 22. 7, 2. 23. al. Sept. and HX 
 Ex. 2, 11. 4, 18. So in a wider sense, a 
 fellow, fellow-man, like 6 Tr\T](nov, but still 
 as descended from a common ancestor and 
 belonging to the same stock, Matt. 5, 22- 
 24. 7, 3-5. Luke 6, 41 sq. Heb. 2, 17. 8, 
 11. a.. Sept. and ru< Lev. 19, 17. 
 
 4. For a friend, companion, e. g. of 
 equals Matt. 23, 8; comp. Sept. and -fix 
 Job 30, 29. Prov. 18, 9. Also an associ 
 ate, colleague, in office or dignity, 1 Cor. 1, 
 1. 2 Cor. 1, 1. 2, 12. In Rev. 6, 11 ol 
 crvvSovXoi avT<cv KOL ol dSeXt^oi avrdtv. 19, 
 10. 22, 9. Sept. and HX Ezra 3, 2. 
 
 5. Trop. for a friend beloved as a brother, 
 one in the place of a brother, e. g. of those 
 
 whom Christ calls brethren, Matt. 12, 50 
 and Mark 3, 35. Matt. 25, 40. Heb. 2, 11. 
 12. (Comp. !~IX , Sept. eyyvraros, Job 6, 
 15.) Spec, a brother of the same faith, a 
 Christian brother, I Tim. 6, 2 ort aSeX0ot 
 fla-iv. Acts 9, 30. 10, 23. Rom. 8, 29. 1 
 Cor. 5, 11. Eph. 6, 23. Phil. 1, 14. Rev. 1, 
 9. al. So in direct address. Acts 6, 3. Gal. 
 4, 12. 28. 1 Thess. 5, 1. + 
 
 a8eA(6T?7?, njroy, 17, (czSeX^o y,) bro- 
 therlimss, 1 Mace. 12, 10. 17. Dio Chrys. 
 472. d. In N. T. a brotherhood, e. g. of 
 Christians, 1 Pet. 2, 17. 5, 9. 
 
 a8rj\o<f, ov, 6, rj, adj. (a priv. o^Xoy.) not 
 manifest to the eye, unseen, hidden, ra nvrj- 
 fifla Luke 11, 44. So Soph. Aj. 647. Xen. 
 Cyr. 6. 3. 13. Also to the ear or mind, 
 indistinct, uncertain, as a sound 1 Cor. 14. 
 8. So of hopes 2 Mace. 7, 34. Pol. 8. 3. 2. 
 
 a8ri\6Tr)$, TTJTOS, 77, (uST/Xoy.) uncer 
 tainty ; 1 Tim. 6, 17 eVi TT\OVTOV a.8rf\orr)ri. 
 in uncertain riclies, for eVl TrXowrw aS^Xw ; 
 see Winer $ 34. 2. a. Buttm. 132. n. 12. 
 Plut. Camill. 32. Pol. 36. 4. 2. 
 
 , adv. (aS^Xoy.) not openly, se 
 cretly, Plut. Sulla 10. Pol. 2. 47. 9. In 
 N. T. uncertainly, in an uncertain irreso 
 lute manner, 1 Cor. 9, 26. Comp. ^ els 
 ao-rfKov Plato Conv. 181. d. 
 
 d&r)fMOVe(0, , f. faa, (aSij^WJ , aSc w,) 
 pr. to be sated, wearied; then to be heavy, 
 dejected, absol. Matt. 26, 37. Mark 14, 33. 
 Phil. 2, 2 . Xen. Hell. 4. 4. 3 a%ioz^- 
 o-ai ray \|nr^ay. Plut. de prefect, in Virt. 4. 
 Plato Pheedr. 251. d. 
 
 aS^9, ov, 6, (a priv. I8flv.) for diiSijs, in 
 Horn. pr. n. Hades, i. q. Pluto, II. 15. 188 ; 
 in later Gr. writers put for Pluto s domain, 
 the infernal regions, Hades, Orcus, the 
 abode of the dead, Luc. D. Mort. 13. 3. de 
 Luctu 2. Diod. Sic. 1. 92. Xen. CEc. 21. 
 12. The Hebrew bixti Sheol signified in 
 like manner the wider world, and was held 
 to be a vast subterranean place (VTTO x^ovos 
 Jos. Ant. 18. 1. 3), full of thickest dark 
 ness, where dwelt the shades (^u^at) of 
 the dead ; but no distinction of place is in 
 dicated in the Sheol of the O. T. between 
 the righteous and the wicked ; see Deut. 
 32, 22. Job 10, 21. 22. 11, 8. Ps. 30, 4. 
 86, 13. Prov. 23, 14. Is. 14, 9sq. Heb. Lex. 
 sub voce. For Heb. ^^> the LXX have 
 almost every where put aSr/y ; and in ac 
 cordance with this usage, the idea of Sheol 
 is found among the later Jews more deve 
 loped and assimilated to the Greek Hades. 
 The souls of the righteous and the wicked 
 
13 
 
 were held to be separated ; the former in 
 habiting the region of the blessed, the infe 
 rior Paradise (Luke 23, 43) or Eden of the 
 Rabbins ; while lower down was the abyss 
 called Gehenna or Tartarus, hi which the 
 souls of the wicked are in torment; see 
 Jos. Ant. 18. 1. 3. Lightfoot Hor. Heb. on 
 Luke 23, 43. Lowth Lect. on Heb. Poetry 
 
 VII. In N. T. aftrjs is represented as a 
 
 dreary prison with gates and bars ; hence 
 TrvXai aSov Matt. 16, 18, see in TrvXTj. 
 Also at xXei? TOV aSov Rev. 1, 18 ; els aSov 
 sc. fiw/ia Acts 2, 27. 31 ; see Buttm. 132. 
 n. 30. Comp. Sept. and bisio Ps. 16, 10. 
 (So eV aSov Luc. D. Mort. 13. 3.) Also 
 Hades as personified, 1 Cor. 15, 55. Rev. 
 6, 8. 20, 13. 14. Put in antithesis with 6 
 ovpavos for the lowest depths, Matt. 11, 23. 
 Luke 10, 15. Once meton. the abyss of 
 Hades, Gehenna, Luke 16, 23. 
 
 aSiaKplTOS, ov, 6, fj, adj. (a priv. diaKpi- 
 va>,~) not separated, chaotic, Symm. for ^ 3 
 Gen. 1, 2; not separable, undistinguishable, 
 confused ; as voices Pol. 1 5. 12. 9. In N. T. 
 not doubtful, unambiguous, sincere ; James 
 3, 17 17 Se civa&fv crofpia . . . dftiaKpiTOS Kal 
 dwTroKpiTos. Others undistinguishing, im 
 partial. 
 
 a8id\et7TT09, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. Sta- 
 XfiVco,) unceasing, constant, Rom. 9, 2. 2 
 Tim. 1, 3. Clem. Alex. Strom. 7. 1 aSid- 
 XfnrTos dydiTT). Plato Locr. 98. e. 
 
 aiaA,ei7rTCj)9> adv. unceasingly, i. e. in 
 N. T. assiduously, Rom. 1, 9. 1 Thess. 1, 3. 
 2, 13. 5, 17. 2 Mace. 15, 7. Pol. 9. 
 3.8. 
 
 O&Laff&OpM, as, T], (a priv. Sa(3et /3a>,) 
 pr. incorruptibleness ; in N. T. metaph. 
 uncorruptness, purity in doctrine, Tit. 2, 7. 
 Dem. 325. 14 d8id(p 3opos rrjs ^V^TJS. 
 
 dBiKew, o>, f. jjcrw, (AbiKos,) to do wrong, 
 to act unjustly, e. g. 
 
 1. In respect to law, to break the law, to 
 transgress, absol. Act? 25, 11. 2 Cor. 7, 
 12. Col. 3, 25. Rev. 22, 11 bis. Sept. for 
 X-jn Jer. 37, 18 ; Sian 1 K. 8, 47. Ps. 106, 
 6. Aristot. Rhet. 1. 9 TO ddiKflv e ori TO 
 BXdnrfiv IKOVTO. Trapa rbv vop-ov. Xen. Cyr. 
 5. 1. 21. 
 
 2. In respect to persons, to do wrong to 
 any one, to wrong, to injure, c. ace. Matt. 
 20, 13. Acts 7, 26. 27. 25, 10. 1 Cor. 6,8. 
 2 Cor. 7, 2. With two accus. Gal. 4, 12. 
 Philem. 18 8e n f]8iKrjcr <r(. Pass. dSi- 
 Ke o/itu, to be wronged, to suffer wrong or 
 injury, Acts 7, 24. 2 Cor. 7, 12. Mid. to 
 let oneself be wronged, to suffer wrong, 1 Cor. 
 
 6, 7 ; see Buttm. 135. 8. Hdian. 2. 4. 5. 
 Xen. An. 5. 4. 6. 
 
 3. Intens. to hurt, to harm, c. ace. Luke 
 10,19. Rev.2,M. 6,6. 7,2.3. 9,4.10.19. 
 
 11, 5 bis. Sept. for nstt Is. 10, 20 ; pay 
 Lev. 6, 2 ; KS n Is. 3, 15. Hdian. 7. 5. 9. 
 Plato Conv. 188. b. 
 
 aS//c?7/ia, CZTOS, TO, (dStKeco,) wrong, ini 
 quity, wrong done, Acts 18, 14. 24, 20. 
 Rev. 18, 5. Sept. for rtsn 1 Sam. 26, 18. 
 pS 1 Sam. 20, 1. Dem." 188. 19. Plato 
 Gorg. 480. c. 
 
 dSitcia, as, 17, (uSiKo?,) 1. wrong-doing^ 
 wrong, injustice; Luke 18, 6 OK/HTJJJ TTJS 
 d8iKias the unjust judge, comp. v. 2. Rom. 
 
 9, 14. Sept. for t>Ys Deut. 32, 4. (Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 2. 12.) As done to others ; 2 Cor. 
 
 12, 13 ^apto"ao"3e p.oi TTJV dftiKiav TaiiTr/v. 
 Sept. for fi^S Mic. 3, 10. Thuc. 3. 66. 
 
 2. By Hebr. unrighteousness, iniquity, 
 wickedness; Sept. for OEFI, "p3>, VlSI j 
 comp. by antith. StKatoo-vw?, Heb. it^X. 
 Luke 16, 8 TW OIKOVO^OV TT)S aSi/a ar Z^e 
 unrighteous (i. e. unfaithful) steward, v. 9 
 e * TOV fj.app.cai ds TIJS ddiKias, i. e. which is SO 
 often the occasion of wickedness. (Eurip. 
 Helen. 911 6 TT\OVTOS aSiKoy.) Luke 13, 
 27 epydrai TTJS d8. workers of iniquity, wicked 
 men. John 7, 18. Acts 1, 18. 8, 23. Rom. 
 1,29. 3,5. 6,13. 2 Tim. 2, 19. Heb. 8, 12 
 (Sept. for fw Jer. 31, 34). 2 Pet. 2, 13. 
 1 John 1,9. 5, 17 see in a/ia/m a. James 
 3, 6 see in art. Koa-p-os. Sept. for D^n 
 Gen. 6, 11. 13; ytf 1 Sam. 3, 13. 14. 
 Zech. 3, 9; i>1 Ez. 28, 18. Opp. to 17 
 d\jj3eta, religious and moral truth, the truth 
 of God ; Rom. 1,18 bis, where T^ dXi^et- 
 av tv dSiKia Kare^ovres are those holding 
 (having), the truth of God, but living in idol 
 atry. Rom. 2, 8. 1 Cor. 13, 6. 2 Thess. 2, 
 
 10. 12. 2 Pet. 2, 15. 
 
 0&/C09, ov, 6, 17, (a priv. SI K?/,) not right, 
 wrong, i. e. unjust towards others, Luke 
 18, 11. Rom. 3, 5. Heb. 6, 10. So Hdian. 
 2. 3. 23. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 10. By Hebr. 
 unrighteous, wicked, see in d&iKi a no. 2. 
 1 Cor. 6, 9 OI*K oi Sare 6Vt aStKOi ftaaiXfiav 
 3eov ov K\rjpovop.r]crovcri. So Sixaioi Kal 
 &8iKoi the righteous and the wicked Matt. 
 5, 45. Acts 24, 15. 1 Pet. 3, 18 ; opp. to 
 fiicrt^f)s, 2 Pet. 2, 9 ; opp. to Tnoro s, i. e. 
 unfaithful Luke 16, 10 bis. Also Luke 16, 
 1 1 eV TW dSiKW p.ap.p.a>va in the unrighteous 
 mammon, i. e. so often acquired by unright 
 eous means. Sept. for 3>ian Ex. 23, 1. Job 
 16, 11 ; 3*1 Prov. 15, 26. Hence ot aSi*oi 
 as an epithet for tJie heathen, the gentiles, 
 1 Cor. 6, 1, oppt 01 ayioi and i. q. 01 UTTKTTOI 
 in v. 6. 
 
dSl/cay? 14 
 
 9? adv. wrongfully, unjustly, 1 Pet. 
 2, 19. Sept. for Stth Prov. 17, 24. Hdian. 
 4. 4. 14: Xen. Cyr.Y 2. 7. 
 
 aooKi/j,o$, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a priv* So Kt/xoj,) 
 no approved, rejected, e. g. metals, as dSo /a- 
 /uoi> dpyvpiov Sept. Prov. 25, 4. Plato Legg. 
 742. a. In N. T. trop. worthy of condem 
 nation, reprobate, of persons, Rom. 1, 28. 
 2 Tim. 3, 8 ; disapproved, disallowed, 1 Cor. 
 9, 27. 2 Cor. 13, 5. 6. 7. (Pol. 16. 14. 19.) 
 Hence worthless, unworthy, of persons Tit. 
 1,16 Trpos Trdv epyov dya Sbv dSoKt/xoi. (Xen. 
 Lac. 3. 3.) Of land, worthless, waste, Heb. 
 
 6, 8. Hesych. d8oKi[iov Trovrjpov, 071-0/3X77- 
 TOV, a%pr]o~TOV. 
 
 0^0X09, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a priv. 8aXos,) 
 guileless, of persons Thuc. 5. 18,47. In 
 N. T. of milk, unadulterated, pure, trop. for 
 pure doctrine and nourishment, 1 Pet. 2, 2. 
 So Poll. On. 3. 86 dpyvpiov a8o\ov. 
 
 ASpafMvrrr/vos, T), ov, gentile adj. of 
 Adramyttium ; Acts 27, 2 TrXoioz A8. De 
 rived from A.8pap.vTfiov V. A.8pafj,vTTfiov, 
 the name of a maritime city in Jilolia, a co 
 lony of the Athenians. 
 
 Abpuis, ov, 6, sc. TTOVTOS, the Adriatic 
 sea, Acts 27, 27. Not, as now, the Gulf of 
 Venice only, but including also the whole 
 Ionian sea, which lies between Sicily and 
 Greece ; so Strabo 2. p. 123 6 8 lovios KO\- 
 TTOS fJ-epos eVri rov vvv ASpi ov Xeyo/teVov. 
 
 7. p. 317. Hesych. loviov ireXayos- 6 vvv 
 A.8pias. 
 
 aopOT??9, TTJTOS, fj, (d8po y,) pr. ripe 
 ness, fulness, of stature, Horn. II. 16. 857. 
 Theophr. C. PI. 4. 12. 1. In N. T. fulness, 
 abundance, 2 Cor. 8, 20. So Hesych. dSpd- 
 TTJS- 8vvafj.is, /ieyeSos 1 . 
 
 " dSvvarea), S,, f. faa, (dSiWoj,) to be 
 unable, Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 23. In N. T. of 
 things, to be impossible, unable to be done ; 
 only in fut. 3 sing. So with dat. of pers. 
 Matt. 17, 20 ov8ev d8vvaTrjcrfi vfjuv. (Sept. 
 Job 42, 2. Wisd. 13, 16.) With Trapd c. dat. 
 Luke 1, 37 OVK. dSwar^crei Trapa r<5 Setu 
 TTOV prjp-a. So Sept. Gen. 18, 14. 
 
 d8vva,TO$, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a priv. Svwrro s,) 
 wanting strength, unable, Sept. Joel 3, 10. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 7. In N. T. impotent, 
 weak, in body, c. dat. Acts 14, 8 dS. rots 
 Ti-ocrlv. (Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 31 TOIS a-^ao-iv 
 dSvwrroi.) Trop. in faith, knowledge, Rom. 
 15, 1. Neut. of things, impossible, unable 
 to be done ; Rom. 8, 3 ro d8vvaTov TOV vo- 
 /iov that which the law could not do. So 
 ddvvaTov flvai, to be impossible, c. Trapd TIVI 
 
 with or for any one, Matt. 19, 26. Mark 10, 
 27. Luke 18, 27. With eWt impl. and an 
 infin. Heb. 6, 4. 18 aSwaroc ^eucrao-Scu 
 SeoV. 10, 4. 11, 6. So Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 16. 
 
 ), f. (po-opai, (contr. for dei Sai,) to 
 sing, c. ace. Rev. 5, 9 KOI a8ovo-iv wS^i/ 
 Kaivqv. 14, 3. 15, 3. Sept. for T ttj *Ex. 
 
 14, 32. (Plut. Sept. Sap. Conv. 18. p. 375. 
 Xen. An. 4. 4. 27 wSas.) With dat. of 
 pers. to sing to any one, in his praise and 
 honour, Eph. 5, 19 qftovres KOL ^aXAoires 
 ...rw Kvpiy. Col. 3, 16. Sept. for "^ 
 Ex. 15, 21. 1 Chr. 16, 23. So Hdian. 4 
 
 2. 10 et Xen. Lac. 12. 7 els TOVS %eovs. 
 
 aei, adv. always, at all time, ever, 2 Cor. 
 6, 10. Tit. 1, 12. 1 Pet. 3, 15. Sept. Is. 
 51, 13. (Hdian. 1. 6. 3. Xen. Hell. 1.4. 
 15.) Also for assiduously, diligently, 2 Pet. 
 1, 12. In a more limited sense, i. q. on 
 every occasion, 2 Cor. 4,11 del yap 7?apa8i- 
 8o>e3a. Acts 7, 51. Heb. 3, 10. Mark 15, 
 8 KaSwy del eVoi et as he always did, i. e. 
 was accustomed to do every year. Sept. 
 Ps. 95, 10. 2 Mace. 14, 15. Judg. 16, 21 
 Cod. Alex. Trotjjo-o) Ka3<as det. So Pol. 1 . 
 
 15. 13. Xen. Cyr. 1, 4. 15. 
 
 aero9, ov, 6, an eagle, Rev. 4, 7. 8, 13. 
 12, 14. Sept. for nttJS Ps. 103, 5. (Xen. 
 Cyr. 2. 4. 19.) Proverbially, Matt. 24, 28 
 and Luke 17, 37 orrov TO crco/*a (TO 7rra>- 
 p,a), eWt o~vva)fir]o-ovTai of derot , i. e. where 
 there is crime, there God s judgments fol 
 low surely and speedily. Here 6 deros 
 seems to denote some species of vulture ; 
 like Sept. and *I133 Job 39, 27-30. Prov. 
 30, 17. The proper eagle feeds only on 
 fresh or living prey. 
 
 <ziyz,09, ov, 6, f/, adj. (a priv. v/7,) 
 unleavened; so a fv/iot aprot, fv/xa Xdyava, 
 Heb. W SW, Sept. Lev. 2,4. Num. 6,15. 
 In N. T. 
 
 1. Trop. unleavened, i. e. morally uncor- 
 rupted, pure, 1 Cor. 5, 7; also v. 8 eV dv- 
 p-ois flXiKpivfius with the unleavened bread 
 of sincerity, i. e. with the pureness of sin 
 cerity and truth. 
 
 2. Spec. 77 e oprr) T&V dvp.a>v the 
 festival of unleavened bread Luke 22, 1 ; 
 at f]/j,fpai TCOV dfv/ncoi> the days of unleavened 
 bread Acts 12, 3. 20, 6; also TO. avp.a id. 
 Mark 14, 1 ; all referring to the seven days 
 immediately following the paschal supper, 
 during which the Jews were to cat unlea 
 vened bread ; see Ex. 12, 17. 18. Deut. 16, 
 
 3. 4. So 77 npaiTT) fj^epa ru>v dfv/iwi , tlis 
 first day of unleavened bread, i. e. the day 
 of the passover meal, Matt. 26, 17. Mark 
 
15 
 
 14, 12 ; called in Luke 22, 7 r; y^ pa T 
 avp.a>v. See Gr. Harm. p. 212. 
 
 Afop, 6, indec. Azor, (helper, r. "NS, 
 pr. n. of a man, Matt. 1, 13. 14. 
 
 ov, 77", Azotus, He 
 Ashdod, pr. n. of one of the five chief cities 
 of the Philistines, Acts 8, 40 ; comp. Josh. 
 13, 3. 1 Sam. 5, 1. 6, 4. It lay within the 
 limits of the tribe of Judah, Josh. 15, 47. 
 Now Esdud,a small village ; see Bibl. Res. 
 in Palest. II. p. 368. 
 
 ai)p, dtpos, f], (ao), a7?/u,) the lower va 
 poury atmosphere, opp. 6 aferjp the higher 
 and purer region, Horn. II. 14. 288. Pol. 
 18. 3. 7. In N. T. genr. the air, atmo 
 sphere, Acts 22, 23. 1 Thess. 4, 17. Rev. 
 9, 2. 16, 17. (Hdian. 8. 3. 20. Xen. Mem. 
 4. 3. 8.) Proverbial are: els depa Xa- 
 Xelv to speak into the air 1 Cor. 14, 9, 
 comp. Lat. ventis verba profundere Lu- 
 cret. 4. 929; also at pa depeiv to beat the 
 air 1 Cor. 9, 26, comp. Lat. verberare ic- 
 tibus auras Virg. JEn. 5. 376 ; the sense 
 of both is, to speak or act in vain. 
 Spec. Eph. 2, 2 6 ap^a>v rrjs fovo-ias TOV 
 dtpos, the prince of the power of the air, i. e. 
 Satan the prince of evil spirits which dwell 
 often in the air, according to the Jewish 
 belief ; see Eisner Obss. in N. T. ad loc. 
 Stuart in Biblioth. Sac. 1843. p. 139. 
 Others less well : darkness, comp. Col. 
 1, 13. 
 
 as, 77, (dSdi/aror, 3di/aros,) 
 immortality, 1 Cor. 15, 53. 54. 1 Tim. 6, 
 16. Wisd. 3, 4. Plut. Aristid. 6. Plato 
 Conv. 208. b. 
 
 ov, 6, TI, adj. (a priv. Sf/wro ?, 
 3>tf.) unlawful, Acts 10, 28. 1 Pet. 4, 3. 
 2 Mace. 7, 1. Plut. JEm. Paul. 19. Pol. 
 29. 6. 17. 
 
 a jO9, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a priv. 3edr,) god 
 less, impious, Xen. An. 2. 5. 39. In N. T. 
 without God, estranged from the knowledge 
 and worship of the true God, Eph. 2, 12. 
 
 9, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. Se 
 lawless, wicked, 2 Pet. 2,7. 3, 17. 3 Mace. 
 5,12. Diod. Sic. 1. 14 rrjs dSeV/iov ftias. 
 
 C&tT&O) >, f. TJO-CO, (ofoeroy, rt 3r;ju,) to 
 displace, to put away, i. e. a) Of things, 
 to reject, to make void or null, c. ace. Mark 
 7, 9 TTJV evro\f)v. Luke 7, 30 TTJV ftovXr)* 
 TOV SeoO. 1 Cor. 1, 19 (comp. Is. 29, 14). 
 Gal. 2, 21. 3, 15. Sept. for RW Ps. 33, 
 10. (1 Mace. 11, 36. Pol. 2, 58. 5.) So 
 to cast off, Jo violate, e. g. a law Heb. 10, 
 
 28 ; one s faith 1 Tim. 5, 12. Sept. for 
 153 Jer. 3, 20. So Pol. 15. 1. 9. b) Of 
 persons, to reject, to despise, to treat with 
 neglect or scorn, c. ace. Mark 6, 26 OVK 
 TjZe\T]o-(v avTrjv u3er/}o-at, where aimji/ in 
 cludes also the idea of her request. Luke 
 10, 16 quater. John 12, 48. 1 Thess. 4, 8 
 bis. Jude 8. Sept. for yX3 1 Sam. 2, 17. 
 1*3 Ex. 21, 8. 
 
 e& )j, 77, (dSereco,) a putting 
 away, an annulling, Heb. 7, 18. 9, 26. 
 Cic. ad Att. 6. 9. 
 
 i, <oi/, at, Athens, the capital of 
 Attica and the chief city of ancient Greece, 
 so called from ASijwj, Minerva. The Athe 
 nians are celebrated in the history of Greece 
 for their warlike valour, and also for their 
 general intelligence and the cultivation of 
 all the arts of peace. Their city was the 
 seat of the fine arts, the resort of philoso 
 phers, and the birth-place of an unusual 
 number of illustrious men. Acts 17, 15. 16. 
 18, 1. 1 Thess. 3, 1. See Leake s Topo 
 graphy of Athens, Lond. 1841. 2 vols. 
 
 , a , ov, Athenian; Acts 17, 
 21, 22. 
 
 oSyXe&>, w, f. 770-6), (a3Xo?,) to combat, 
 to contend, as a champion in the public 
 games of boxing, throwing the discus, 
 wrestling, running, etc. absol. 2 Tim. 2, 5 
 bis. ^El. V. H. 10. 1. Plato Legg. 830. a. 
 
 a&\.r}cri? ) f<B y, r;, (daXe co,) combat in the 
 public games, ^El. V. H. 2. 23. Pol. 5. 64. 
 6. In N. T. trop. a conflict, struggle., with 
 afflictions, Heb. 10, 32. 
 
 a^iyiew, , f. 770-0), (a3u/ioy,) to be dis 
 couraged, disheartened, absol. Col. 3, 21. 
 Sept. for rnn Gen. 4, 5. Pol. 3. 54. 7 
 Xen. An. 3*2. 18. 
 
 ou, 6, 77. adj. (a priv. 30)17.) pr. 
 unpunished Pol. 2. 60. 1 ; c. gen. TTJS OIKTIS 
 Dem. 646. 13. In N. T. innocent, Matt. 
 27, 4 cif/xa d3woi/. Sept. Jer. 26, 15. Dent. 
 27, 25. With OTTO c. gen. Matt. 27, 24 
 dSoior OTTO TOV at/xaror, and so Sept. for Heb. 
 l^ *p3 2 Sam. 3, 28. Comp. /eaSapor aTrd 
 Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 16. 
 
 aiyeio$; firj, eiov, (a?^.) caprinus, of 
 goats; Heb. 11, 37 eV alydots 8epfJLao-iv, in 
 goat-skins. Sept. for D" 1 ?^ Ex. 25, 4. 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 6. 1. Apoll. Rhod. 4. 1349. 
 Plato Ion 538. c. 
 
 alyi,a\o<>, O v, 6, (aywp.t, oX?,) the shore, 
 coast, of a sea or lake, Matt. 13, 2. 48. John 
 21, 4. Acts 21, 5. 27, 39. 40. Sept. for 
 
AljVTTTlOS 16 
 
 f)l n Judg. 5, 17. Hdian. 3. 4. 4. Xen. 
 An. 6. 2. 1, 7. 
 
 ov, 6, an Egyptian, Acts 7, 
 22. 24. 28. Heb. 11, 29. In Acts 21, 38 
 the Egyptian spoken of was an Egyptian 
 Jew, who set himself up at Jerusalem for a 
 prophet, and gained many followers, who 
 were dispersed and slain by Felix ; see Jos. 
 Ant. 20. 8 6. B. J. 2. 13. 5. 
 
 ov, 77, Egypt, a country of 
 northern Africa, watered by the Nile, and 
 celebrated both in sacred and profane liisto- 
 ry. The whole region was known to the 
 Hebrews by the name ta^SE Mizraim ; 
 and the princes who governed it were styled 
 in virtue of their office Pharaoh, i. e. king, 
 until the time of Solomon ; after which they 
 are mentioned in the Scriptures by their 
 proper names. After the captivity, Egypt 
 became a place of resort to great numbers 
 of the Jews, who settled there either of their 
 own accord, or from the invitations and en 
 couragements held out by Alexander the 
 Great and the Ptolemies ; so that in the 
 reign of Ptolemy Philopater, they were able 
 to erect a temple at Leontopolis similar to 
 the one at Jerusalem, and to establish in it 
 all the rites of their paternal worship ; see 
 Jos. Ant. 13. 3. 1, 2, 3. Matt. 2, 13. 14. 
 15. Acts 2, 10. al. In Rev. 11, 8 Egypt 
 is put as a symbolical name of the Jews, 
 thus likening the obstinacy and stubborn 
 ness of this nation to that of the Egyptians 
 of old. + 
 
 ov, 6, 77, adj. (a,) always exist 
 ing, eternal, everlasting ; Rom. 1, 20 aiSioy 
 avrov duj/a/us. Jude 6 8eo-p.ol tudioi ever 
 lasting bonds. Wisd. 7, 26. Hdian. 4. 14. 
 10. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 73. 
 
 atOft)9, ooy, ovs, f), 1. shamefacedness, 
 modesty ; 1 Tim. 2, 9 pera alSovs KOI <ro>- 
 (j)poo-vvT]s. Plut. Thes. 6. Xen. Conv. 1. 8. 
 
 2. reverence, before God Heb. 12, 28. 
 Jos. Ant. 6, 12. 7 al8a>s eVt yepovo-tv. Hdian. 
 6. 1. 24. Xen. An. 2. 6. 14. 
 
 , OTTOS, 6, (cu3o>, wA/f.) an Ethio 
 pian, Heb. ttJSQ Cushite, Acts 8, 27 bis. 
 See Jer. 13, 23. Is. 18, 1. Ez. 30, 4. 5. 9. 
 The Ethiopia of the N. T. lay south of 
 Egypt on the Nile, including the island of 
 Meroe, and corresponding to the modern 
 Nubia and the adjacent parts of Abyssinia. 
 It formed a separate kingdom governed by 
 a succession of females, all bearing the 
 name KewSaKi; q. v. Plin. H. N. 6. 29 or 
 35. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. III. p. 349, 358. 
 For the Cush or Ethiopia of the O. T. 
 
 which included portions of Arabia, see Heb. 
 Lex. art. U3. 
 
 aifACt) aros, TO, blood ; Sept. everywhere 
 for Dv! . The Jews regarded the blood as 
 the seat of life ; they were to offer it in 
 atonement to God, but were strictly forbid 
 den to eat of it; see Lev. 17, 10-14. Gen. 
 9, 4. Deut. 12, 23 sq. Jos. Ant. 3. 11. 2. 
 
 1. Pr. and genr. blood; Mark 5, 25. 29. 
 Luke 8, 43. 44. 13, 1. (Xen. An. 5. 8. 15.) 
 So anything is said to be or become blood or 
 as blood, by turning to a dark red colour, 
 Acts 2, 20 KOI 77 (TfXrjVT) (jifTao-Tpcxprjo-fTai) 
 els al/jLa, also Rev. 6, 12 <B? alpa, see Joel 
 
 3. 3. 4 [2, 30. 31]. Rev. 8, 8. 11, 6. 16, 3. 
 
 4. Of blood which has been shed, e. g. of 
 victims or other slaughtered animals, Heb. 
 9, 7. 12. 13. 18-25. 10, 4. 11, 28. al. 
 Hence an-e^eo-Sai TOV cu^arcy to abstain 
 from eating blood, as unlawful, Acts 15, 
 20. 29. 21, 25. So of men, Luke 13, 1. 
 John 19, 34. al. In Rev. 14, 20. 17, 6, 
 human blood is spoken of under the symbol 
 of the blood of grapes, i. e. wine, alpa o-ra- 
 (pv\fjs, comp. Gen. 49, 11. Deut. 32, 14. 
 Ecclus. 39, 26. So at/xa SIKCLIOV and af/m 
 dSaioj/ righteous or innocent blood, the blood 
 of -righteous or innocent persons, Matt. 23, 
 35. 27,4. (Sept. for ijM OT 1 Sam. 19,5, 
 1 K. 2, 5. Hist, of Sus. v. 63.) So of the 
 blood of Christ shed on the cross, af/xa rov 
 Xpiarov, e. g. in connection with the Lord s 
 supper, Matt. 26, 28. Mark 14, 24. Luke 
 22, 20. 1 Cor. 10, 16. 11, 25. 27 ; perhaps 
 too 1 John 5, 6. 8 ; and espec. John 6, 53- 
 58, where the phrase (payelv TTJV o-dpKa KOI 
 jrtvfiv TO alfj.a TOV XptoroC, to eat thejlesh 
 and drink the blood of Christ, signifies, " to 
 receive Christ wholly into oneself, so that 
 he may become wholly united and incorpo 
 rated with us, as food with the body, and 
 we thus become partakers of that life which 
 is in him ;" comp. Gal. 4, 19. Col. 1, 27. 
 3, 10. Further, in relation to his church, 
 Acts 20, 28. Col. 1, 20. Eph. 2, 13 ; to the 
 atonement made by his death, Rom. 3, 25. 
 
 5. 9. Eph. 1, 7. Heb. 9, 12. 14. 1 Pet. 1, 
 2. 19. 1 John 1, 7; and to the new co 
 venant, Heb. 10, 29. 12, 24. 13, 20. So 
 too m^a TOV dpviov, Rev. 7, 14. 12,11. 19, 
 13. Spec. a) crapl- KOL cu/za, flesli and 
 blood, i. e. the human body, man, with the 
 idea of frailty and mortality, Matt. 16, 17. 
 1 Cor. 15, 50. Gal. 1, 16. Eph. 6, 12. Heb. 
 2, 14. Comp. Ecclus. 14, 18. b) alpa 
 eKxyveiv, to shed blood, i. e. to kill, put to 
 death, Luke 11, 50. Acts 22, 20. Rom. 3, 15. 
 Rev. 16, 6. So Sept. for D 1 ? TjSW Gen. 9, 
 
 6. Ez. 18, 10, 
 
2. Trop. blood, for bloodshed, i. e. violent 
 death, slaughter, murder, Matt. 23, 30. 27, 
 6. Acts 2, 19. Rev. 6, 10. 18, 24. 19, 2. 
 So Sept. and tn Gen. 4, 10. Ez. 24, 6. 9. 
 So Heb. 12, 4 p-fXP 15 atp-aros, unto death, 
 i. e. with exposure of life. Further, by 
 Hebr. for the guilt of murder, blood-guilti 
 ness, the guilt and punishment of shedding 
 blood, Matt. 23, 35. 27,25. Acts 5, 28. 18, 
 6. 20, 26. Sept and Cfl Num. 35, 27. 
 Josh. 2, 19. So Dem. 548 . ult. 
 
 3. Trop. blood, for blood-relationship, kin 
 dred ; Acts 17, 26 e tvbs ai/iaror of one 
 blood, kindred. Sept. 2 Sam. 21, 1. So 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 6. 3 e cr/xep dSeX<pot KOI KOIVUV 
 af/xa. ib. 20. 10. 1 e at/zeros Aapajj/ros. 
 Plat. Soph. 268. d. John 1, 13 ol owe e 
 atp.arcoi born not of blood, i. e. sons of God 
 not by virtue of their blood as being de 
 scended from Abraham ; the Plur. being 
 here for the Sing, as in Eurip. Ion. 693 
 XXo>i/ rpmpeis acp aip.arcoi , spoken of a 
 mother. Comp. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 45 TIS e 
 aip-aros, i. e. an Israelite, -f- 
 
 17 cupoj 
 
 18, 9. Horn. Od. 21. 110. Find. Ol. 6. 18. 
 An old poetic word, Buttm. Lexil. II. p. 112. 
 
 Alvwv, f), indec. Enon, (Chald. plur. 
 "Cr? fountains, Buxt. Lex. 1601,) pr. n. of 
 a place with fountains near Salim, John 3, 
 23 ; see SoXet/x. Situated prob. in one of 
 the lateral valleys running down to the val 
 ley of the Jordan from the west. 
 
 at,pecri$) eo>s, 17, (aipe co,) pr. capture ol 
 a city, Thuc. 2. 58 17 alptcris TTJS TroAewr. 
 Also choice, 1 Mace. 8, 30. Plato Rep. 618 
 e. In N. T. a chosen way of life, i. e. a 
 sect, school, party, Acts 5, 17. 15, 5. 24, 5. 
 14. 26, 5. 28, 22. (Diod. Sic. 2. 29 alpe- 
 (Tfis T>V <pi\o(r6(pQ)v.) Hence discord, dis 
 sension, arising from difference of views, 
 1 Cor. 11, 19. Gal. 5, 20. 2 Pet. 2, 1. 
 
 a, as, 17, apxi, 
 a shedding of blood, Heb. 9, 22. 
 
 ai/J,OppOCi)) a>, (atjudp poos ; af/xa, pea),) 
 to have a flow or issue of blood, absol. 
 Matt. 9, 20. Sept. Lev. 15, 33. Plut. de 
 Fluv. 21. 3. 
 
 ov, 6, JEneas, pr. n. of a man, 
 Acts 9, 33. 34. 
 
 fats, f/, (atj/ew,) praise; Heb. 
 13, 15 Suo-ta alvfo-eas. Sept. for STlin Ps. 
 26, 2 ; f&n*? Ps. 66, 2. Ecclus. 32, 2 3u- 
 cria^wj/ cuve crews. Clem. Alex. Strom. 7. 6. 
 
 a>, f. rjcrca or e cra), (aa/os.) to 
 praise, in N. T. only of God, c. ace. Luke 
 2, 13. 20. 24, 53. Acts 2, 47. 3,8.9. Rom. 
 15, 11. Rev. 19, 5; ace. and nepi TWOS 
 Luke 19, 37. Sept. for nn-in Gen. 49, 8 ; 
 b|n i Chr. 16, 4. 10; Tp3 Ps. 100, 4. 
 Eurip. Suppl. 707. Soph. Antig. 1 157. The 
 prose writers used e 
 
 arcs, TO, (aivitrcro/iat,) an 
 enigma, riddle, Sept. for W^T] 1 K. 10, 1. 
 Ecclus. 39, 3. Dem. 184. nit. In N. T. 
 trop. a dark hint, obscureness; 1 Cor. 13, 
 12 tv aii/i y/xtm, i. e. enigmatically, obscure 
 ly. Sept. for iTi^n Num. 12, 8, opp. TO 
 the distinct realit. 
 
 ov, 6, pr. discourse, narration, 
 i. q. p.C3os, Horn. Od. 14. 508. In N. T. 
 jtraise, Matt. 21, 16 (comp. Ps. 8, 3). Luke 
 18 43. Sept. for t Ps. 8, 3. So Wisd. 
 2 
 
 f. iVw, (aipfTOS, alpe w.) a 
 word of the Alexandrine age, i. q. aip^o/xat, 
 to choose (1 Mace. 9, 30), and so to love, c. 
 ace. Matt. 12, 18, comp. Is. 42, 1. Sept. 
 for ina Judg. 5, 8 ; fan Num. 14, 8. 
 1 Esdr. 4, 19. Hesych. ijp(Tio-dp.rjv ^yaTr?;- 
 o~a, eVeSvjw/cra, ^Se X^o-a. See Sturz de 
 Dial. Alex. p. 144. 
 
 oO, 6, (atper/^ca, atpecrts 1 ,) pr. 
 adj. -6s, rj, ov, capable of choosing, Plato 
 Def. 412. a. In N. T. Subst. a seclarist, 
 partisan, one who founds or belongs to a 
 atpecrts, Tit. 3, 10. Often in the ecclesi 
 astical writers, i. q. a heretic ; see Suic. 
 Thes. Ecc. h. v. 
 
 aipea), w, f. fjaco, aor. 2 etXoi/, to take, to 
 capture, e. g. a city or camp, Pol. 14. 9. 4. 
 Xen. Ag. 1. 32. In N. T. only Mid. at- 
 peofj-ai, f. jjcro/iat, aor. 2 etXo p-jjv, to take 
 for oneself, to choose, to prefer, c. ace. 2 
 Thess. 2, 13; infin. Heb. 11, 25. Phil. 1, 
 22 TI alprj<Top.m ov yvap ifa, where for the 
 fut. instead of the Subj. see Winer Gr. 
 $ 42. 4. b. So 2 Mace. 11, 25. Hdian. 4. 
 14. 3 alpovvra /3acriXea A8oveitroi>. 
 
 aipa), f. apa>, (aijp ; for aet poo,) aor. 1 
 ^pa, perf. rjoKa Col. 2, 14; Pass. perf. part. 
 7/pp.eVoi Jolrh 20, 1 ; to take up, corresp. to 
 Heb. Kb3 . 
 
 1. to take up, to lift up, to raise, c. ace. 
 as stones, John 8, 59. Rev. 18, 21 : ser 
 pents Mark 16, 18 ; a boat into a ship, Acts 
 27, 17. (Xen. Eq. 6. 7. ib. 10. 15.) So of 
 anchors, Acts 27, 13 upavres sc. ayKvpas, 
 as is fully written Pol. 31. 22. 13. Plut. 
 Pomp. 50. Hence in Gr. writers r pas. 
 apavrts, is often i. q. to sail away, to depart, 
 Arr. Exp. Alex. 6. 21 np<is eV narruXaw. 
 Thuc. 2. 23 med. and is even used of an 
 
al pat 18 
 
 army on land, as Thuc. 2. 23 init. Jos. 
 Ant. 3. 1. 7 fKt&fv apavTfs els Pafpio lv TJKOV, 
 spoken of the Israelites in the desert. 
 Spec, of parts of the body, to lift up, e. g. 
 the hand, Rev. 10, 5. Sept. and NID3 Deut. 
 32, 40. (Xen. An. 7. 3. 6.) The eyes, 
 John 11, 41. Sept. and NiUJ Ps. 121, 1. al. 
 Also to lift up the voice, to cry aloud, Luke 
 17, 13; Trpbs TOV 3eoV Acts 4, 24. Sept. 
 andNtoS Judg. 21, 2. 1 Sam. 11,4. Trop. 
 a iptiv Trjv \^v^r}v TIVOS to lift up the soul of 
 any one, to excite to expectation, John 10, 
 24. Comp. Jos. Ant. 3. 2. 3 ot fie r/crav eVi 
 TOV Kivaewov ras \^v^as r]pp.fvoi, Kal Trpos TO 
 Sfivov irolfiMS f xovTes. 3. 5. 1 rjprjfjLevoi Tols 
 &tavouug. Philostr. 2. 4 Kap.e iravv a ipei 6 
 \6yos ov f iprjKfv. Others, to lift up in sus 
 pense, doubt. 
 
 2. to take up and bear, to bear, to carry, 
 c. ace. Matt. 4, 6 eVi ^fipwv dpovo~i o~e 
 (Sept. and XiZJ3 Ps. 91, 12). Matt. 11, 29 
 apare TOV vyov pov e<p vp.ds (comp. Sept. 
 and XttJS Lam. 3, 17). So TOV a-Tavpov 
 Matt. 27, 32. Mark 15, 21. (Luke 23, 26 
 TOV o-Tavpov (p(pfiv.~) Trop. Matt. 16, 24. 
 Mark 8, 34. 10, 21. Luke 9, 23. Spec, to 
 take or carry with or about oneself, Mark 
 6, 8. Luke 9, 3. 22, 36. 
 
 3. to take up and away, to take away, to 
 remove, by taking up ; c. ace. e. g. a be d 
 Matt. 9, 6. John 5, 8-12 ; a person Matt. 
 22, 13 ; a dead body Matt. 14, 12. John 20, 
 2. 13. Acts 20, 9. (1 Mace. 9, 19. So XiD5 
 Sept. \appdv(o Judg. 16, 31.) Also for 
 use, as fragments of food, Matt. 14, 20. 15, 
 37. Mark 8, 8. 19. 20 ; and so Matt. 17, 27. 
 Acts 21,11. Pass. ap%r)Ti, be ihou removed, 
 Matt. 21, 21. (Plato Rep. 578. e.) Trop. 
 aipeiv TTjv a/japTiav TWOS to lake away one s 
 sin, i. e. the penalty of sin, by making an 
 expiation or atonement, comp. dipaipea). 
 John 1, 29. 1 John 3, 5. So nxan K ^3 
 Sept. aipeiv TO ajuapr^yna 1 Sam. 15, 25; 
 |13? X!U3 Sept. dfyaiptiv TTJV a/jLapTtav Lev. 
 10, 17. Others less well, to bear the sin of 
 any one, i. e. its penalty, comp. Matt. 8, 17. 
 1 Pet. 2, 24 ; so "pS XtoD Sept. Xa/3eli/ TTJV 
 ufuipTiav Lev. 5, 17. Num. 5, 31. 
 
 4. Simply to take, to take away, the idea 
 of lifting being lost ; usually with the no 
 tion of violence, authority, or the like, a) 
 Of things ; c. ace. Luke 6, 29. 30 HTTO 
 TOV a ipovTOS TO. era /JLTJ diFaiTtl. 1 1, 22. Matt. 
 9, 1G aipei, yap TO TrX^pw/xa avTov (ri) O.TTO 
 TOV fyian ov. Mark 2, 21 ; of branches, i. q. 
 to prune, John 15, 2. Sept. for EJiEri 
 Mic. 2, 3. b) Of persons, to take away or 
 remove, e. g. from a church, i. q. to excom- 
 
 municate, Pass. 1 Cor. 5, 2 "iva dpSfj e/c p.e- 
 <rov vfj.S)v, where others fgapZf/. Comp. 
 Sept. for -iion Gen. 35, 2. So to take 
 away by death, out of the world, c. ace. 
 John 17, 15. Matt. 24, 39. Also stronger, 
 to kill, to destroy, John 11, 48 TOV TOTTOV Kal 
 TO eZvos. Imperat. alpe, apov, sc. avTov. 
 away with him ! put him to death ! Luke 
 23, 18. John 19, 15. Acts 21, 36. 22, 22. 
 Sept. for C]G Is. 57, 1.2. 1 Mace. 5, 2. 
 (Dion. Hal. 4. 4.) So in the difficult pas 
 sage Acts 8, 33 bis : eV TTJ rcm-eii/oxm UVTOV 
 T] KpLo-is avTov rjp Sr) . . . aipfTai O.TTO Trjs yfjs 
 rj far) avTov, in his humiliation his condem 
 nation was taken away ...his life is taken 
 from the earth, i. e. in the first clause from 
 his state of humiliation and condemnation 
 he was set free by death ; quoted from 
 Sept. Is. 53, 8, where Heb. EQBarai ISJa 
 ^\f rom (through!) oppression and con 
 demnation lie was taken away. In the se 
 cond clause, Heb. "M53 . c ) Trop. c. ace. 
 1 Cor. 6, 15 apas TO. fj.f\T) TOV Xp. taking 
 away the members of Christ, wrongfully. 
 So a law, CK TOV /jLfo-ov Col. 2, 14. (1 Mace. 
 
 3, 29.) With OTTO TIVOS, to take away from 
 any one, e. g. the kingdom of heaven Matt 
 21, 43 ; the word, TOV \6yov Luke 8, 12. 18 
 Mark 4, 15 (with dno implied) ; gifts Mark 
 
 4, 25 ; joy John 16, 22. (Sept. dp^o-fTai 
 fv(ppoo-vvr),lieb. 5]t>3, Is. 16, 10. Eurip. 
 El. 942 TO. Kaicd.) Also vices, to put away, 
 with diro TIVOS Eph. 4, 31. -f- 
 
 alcr^dvo^at. f. -^0-op.ai, Mid. depon. 
 (oto), mcrStt.) aor. 2 ffo-^o^rjv, to perceive,^. 
 with the external senses, Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 
 31. In N. T. trop. to perceive, to under 
 stand, c. ace. Luke 9, 45. Sept. for "p2>i 
 Job 23, 5 ; yi* Prov. 24, 14. So Plut" 
 de Prefect, in Virt. 7. Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 4. 
 
 tor, 17, (ntcrSdj/o^at,) pr. per 
 ception by the external senses, Xen. Mem. 
 1 . 4. 5. In N. T. trop. understanding, the 
 power of discerning, Phil. 1, 9. Sept. for 
 ny? p r ov. 1, 4. 22 ; fi^n Ex. 28, 3. So 
 Judith 16, 17. Dem. 14171 5. 
 
 ala&rjTrjpiov, O v, TO, (cuV3az>o/ia(,) pr. 
 seat of the senses, Hesych. aiVSqr^pia ra 
 (j,e\ij 81 a>v aiVSo /LteSa. Plato Ax. 366. a ; 
 also sense, external, Galen, de dignot. Puls. 
 or fj.ev yap ... TO alo-%r)TT)piov e^et yeyvp,- 
 vao-fjitvov IKUVUS. In N. T. trop. internal 
 sense, faculty of perceiving and judging, 
 Heb. 5, 14. Sept. Jer. 4, 19 TCI alo-^Trjpia 
 TTJS Kapftias. 
 
 alcrxpoKepSfa eos, ovs, 6, 17, adj. ( - 
 o~xp6s, KepSoj,) eager for unworthy gain, 
 
1 9 
 
 sordid, 1 Tim. 3, [3.J 8. Tit. , 7. Plut. 
 de aud. Poetis 13. Xen. A. 11. 3. 
 
 , wlv.farthe sake of un 
 worthy gain, sordidly, 1 Pet. 5, 2 ; comp. 
 Tit. 1, 11. 
 
 as, ], ai 
 
 unbecoming discourse, improper language, 
 Col. 3, 8. Diod. Sic. 5. 4. Xen. Lac. 
 5.6. 
 
 d, w, (ato^o?,) pr. ugly, de 
 formed, opp. to KoXo ?, Xen. Conv. 4. 19. 
 Sept. for sn Gen. 41, 3. 4. In N. T. trop. 
 unbecoming, indecorous, shameful ; spoken 
 of what is offensive either to modesty and 
 Christian purity, Eph. 5, 12. Tit. 1, 11 ; or 
 to the manners and customs of a communi 
 ty, 1 Cor. 11,6. 14, 35. So Jos. Ant. 4. 
 8. 23. Hdian. 1. 15. 15. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 10. 5. 
 
 TTJTOS, j, atxpoy, pr. ug 
 liness; trop. unbecomingness, impropriety, 
 either in words or actions, only Eph. 5, 4. 
 Plato Gorg. 525. a. Comp. al 
 
 77?, 17, (alaxos, ) shame, i. e. 
 
 1. Subjectively, the feeling of shame, fear 
 of disgrace, Luke 14, 9. Ecclus. 4, 21. 
 Plut. de rect. rat. Aud. 17. Xen. Anab. 
 3. 1. 10. 
 
 2. Objectively, disgrace, reproach, infa 
 my, Heb. 12, 2. Sept. for nda Job 8, 22 ; 
 nabs Is. 50, 6 ; ne-in Ps. 69, 20. Ec 
 clus. *25, 22. Luc. P isc. 32. Xen. Anab. 
 
 2. 6. 6. 
 
 3. a cause of sliame, a shameful deed or 
 thing, disgraceful conduct. 2 Cor. 4, 2 TO. 
 KpvirTa TTJS ala-xyvrjs, the hidden things of 
 shame, which bring shame upon those who 
 practise them. Phil. 3, 19. Jude 13. Rev. 
 
 3, 18 17 alo-xvin) TTJS yvfjivuTrjTos o~ov the 
 shame of thy nakedness, arising from thy 
 nakedness. ^Eschin. 23. 40 Kartyvaxe TOV 
 
 ), f. vvS>, (ato-xoy,) pr. to de 
 form Xen. Eq. 1. 12; to shame, to put to 
 shame, Plato Menex. 246. d. In N. T. 
 Pass, depon. alcrxvvop.ai, aor. 1 jjo-xvv- 
 STJV and fut. 1 alcrxw^i](Tofj.at, Buttm. } 113. 
 4 ; to shame oneself, to feel or be ashamed, 
 2 Cor. 10, 8. 1 Pet. 4, 16 ; cV ov8evi Phil. 
 1, 20 ; infin. Luke 16, 3 raiTi> alcr\\ivo- 
 fjMi. Praegn. with OTTO, 1 John 2, 28 (cat 
 p.f) aurxvvdSpo air avrov and not be asham 
 ed before liim, pr. so as to turn away/ro? 
 him ; comp. Ecclus. 21,22 ala^x- <wr6 npo- 
 (T&irov. Sept. for ttj-ia Ezra 8, 22. 9, 6. 
 So Dem. 1022. 25. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 26. 
 
 , >, f. r;o-&>, to ask; also Mid. ai- 
 ai, ovfj,at, to ask for oneself, in one s 
 own behalf, but in common usage not dis 
 tinguished from the Active. Hence 
 
 1. to ask, to request, to entreat, to beseech. 
 a) Genr. and construed : a) With ace. 
 of pers. Matt. 5, 42 TO> atTovvri (re 8i8ov. 
 Luke 6, 30. John 4, 10\ Comp. Dem. 255. 
 15. ft) With ace. of thing, Matt. 7, 10 Kal 
 fuv lx%vi> aiTrjo-rj. Luke 11, 12. (Hdian. 3. 
 11. 18.) Mid. Matt. 14, 7. 20, 22 OVK o i- 
 Sare ri aiYelcrSe. 27, 58. Mark 6, 24. 10, 
 38. 15, 43. Luke 23, 52. Acts 12, 20. So 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 6 arwnjplav alrela^ai. y) 
 With two ace. of pers. and thing, Matt. 7, 
 9. Mark 6, 22 ainja-ov pe o eav ZeXys. \. 23. 
 Luke 11, 11. So Sept. Ps. 21, 5. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 3. 41. 8) With ace. of thing and 
 napd TWOS of pers. Matt. 20, 20 atroCo-a rt 
 Trap ai/Tov. John 4, 9. Acts 3, 2. So Xen. 
 An. 1. 3. 16. f) Absol. Matt. 7, 8 nay yap 
 6 alra>i> Xa/i/3oWi. Luke 11,9. 10. Mid. c. 
 part. Mark 6, 25 7/7170-07-0 Xe youo-a. 
 
 b) Spec, of persons asking of God, to ask, 
 to entreat, to pray for, in the like construc 
 tions, e. g. Ace. of pers. Matt. 6, 8. 7, 11. 
 Luke 11, 13. Ace. of thing, Mark 10, 35. 
 John 14, 13. 14. 15,7. 16,24; Mid. Matt. 
 21, 22. Mark 11, 24. Acts 13, 21. 1 John 
 5, 14. 15 ; by attract, ov for o Matt. 18,19. 
 Eph. 3, 20. With two ace. John 16, 23 ; 
 Mid. John 11, 22. 15, 16. With ace. and 
 irapd c. gen. 1 John 5, 15. James 1, 5; so 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 5. Also Mid. with inf. of 
 object, Acts 7, 46. Eph. 3, 13 ; with Iva 
 Col. 1, 9. Absol. Act. Matt. 7, 7. John 1C, 
 24. James 1,6. 4, 3 bis. 1 John 5, 16 ; 
 Mid. John 16, 26. James 4, 2. For the 
 interchange of the Act. and Mid. compare 
 John 16, 26 with vv. 23. 24. James 4, 3 ; 
 see Winer j 39, 6. 
 
 2. In a stronger sense, to ask for, to re 
 quire, to demand, construed as above ; e. g. 
 ace. of things, Acts 16, 29 alr^cras 8e (pwra. 
 Luke 1, 63. 1 Cor. 1, 22; so Xen. An. 2, 
 1. 10 6 /3ao-tAevff aiTfl TO. 6VXa. Mid. Acts 
 25,3. 15 aiTovfjievoi /far avrov biiajv. Matt. 
 
 27, 20. Mark 15, 6. Luke 23, 25 ; so Pol. 
 
 28. 13. 1. With two ace. Act. Luke 12, 
 48. 1 Pet. 3, 15 ; so Xen. An. 1. 3. 14, 16. 
 With ace. and Trapa TWOS Mid. Acts 9, 2. 
 Sept. c. ?rapa TWOS for nsa bxd Deut. 10, 
 12. Pol. 28. 11. 7, 10. Also Mid. with ace. 
 and inf. Luke 23, 23. Acts 3, 14; ace. of 
 pers. and inf. of object, Acts 13, 28; c. 
 Ka3o>? KT\. Mark 15, 8. 
 
 , , , 
 
 aroj, TO, (airea>,) a request, 
 petition, pr. thing asked for, e. g. from God, 
 
20 
 
 Phil. 4, 6. 1 John 5, 15. Sept. for 
 1 Sam. 1, 17. 27. ,Ep. Pseudo-Socr. 24.) 
 Emphat. a requirement, demand, Luke 23, 
 24. So TO rvpavviKov airr/p-a Plat. Rep. 
 566. b. 
 
 cuTia, as, ^, a cause, i. e. 1. a motive, 
 reason, why something takes place, Matt. 
 19, 3 Kara iraaav alriav. Luke 8, 47. Acts 
 10,21. 23,28. 28,20; fit fjv air lav for 
 what cause, wherefore, Acts 22, 24. 2 Tim. 
 1, 6. 12. Tit. 1, 13. Heb. 2, 11. So 2 
 Mace. 4, 28. 35 fit fjv alriav. Pol. 4. 76. 
 5. Spec, a matter, case, Lat. causa i. q. 
 res, Matt. 19, 10. So Lat. causa Cic. 
 Off. 3. 27. 
 
 2. In a forensic sense, e. g. a) a charge, 
 accusation, Acts 25, 18. 27. Matt. 27, 37. 
 Mark 15, 26. So Plut. M. Ant. 6 fin. 
 Xen. Hell. 1. 4. 14. b) fault, guilt, John 
 18, 38 ovfiffiiav alriav evpiaKca eV avrta. 19, 
 4. 6 ; am a Samrov a fault worthy of death 
 Acts 13, 28. 28, 18. Sept. for yi Gen. 4, 
 13. So Xen. Mem. 2. 8. 6. 
 
 aiTia/Aa, arcs, TO, (amdo/xai,) a charge, 
 accusation, Acts 25, 7 Rec. Plut. Corio- 
 lan. 31. Thuc. 5. 72. 
 
 alndop,ai, S>p.ai, Mid. depon. (am a,) 
 to accuse, <to charge, c. inf. as object, Rom. 
 3, 9 in Mss. Plut. Pericl. 29. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 1. 2. 
 
 amo?, la, iov, adj. (am a,) pr. causing; 
 in N. T. used substantively. 
 
 1. Masc. 6 amoj, the causer or author 
 of any thing ; amos TTJS cra>TT)pias Heb. 5, 
 9. Jos. Ant. 3. 3 3foi>...T77S amrrjpias ai- 
 TIOV. Luc. Tim. 38. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 24 
 a inov . . . ovra rov epyov. 
 
 2. Neut. TO amoi>, a cause, i. q. 17 alrla, e. g, 
 a) a reason, motive, Acts 19, 40. So Jos. 
 Ant. 7. 4. 1. Xen. An. 4. 1. 17 TO a lTiov 
 rrjs o-TrovSrjs. b) fault, guilt, Luke 23, 4. 
 14 ; a inov Zavdrov v. 22. So amos guilty 
 Hist, of Sus. 53. Xen. Hell. 1. 7. 6. 
 
 alrlcofjia, aros, TO, (amdo/iai,) a charge, 
 accusation, Acts 25, 7 ; a later form for 
 ahiaaa, received by Griesbach and other 
 editors. 
 
 s, iov, o, fj, adj. (kindr. a<pvco, 
 d(pavf]s, (paivca,) unforeseen, sudden, with 
 .he force of an adverb, Luke 21 , 34. 1 Thess. 
 5, 3. Wisd. 17,5. Hdian. 1. 6. 8. Thuc. 
 4. 125. 
 
 as, 17, ai^/i, awo-ir, 
 captivity, pr. in war, Rev. 13, 10 tls alxp-a- 
 \ao-iav. Sept. for -qtt5 Deut. 28, 41. So 
 Jos. Ant. 10. 4. 5. Phit. Themist. 31. 
 
 Meton. concr. captives, a captive multitude, 
 Rev. 13, 10 ft TIS at^/zaXoxr/ai/ trvvayti. 
 Eph. 4, 18 quoted from Ps. 68, 19 where 
 Sept. for -ate . So Diod. Sic. 17. 70. 
 
 ai%Jjia\(i)TeV(i), f. ev(Ta>, (at^/naXwTOS,; 
 to make prisoner, to lead captive, c. ace. 
 Eph. 4, 8. Trop. 2 Tim. 3, 6 Rec. 
 Sept. for !-!30J Ps. 68, 19 ; rftft Ez. 29, 13. 
 Constant. Porphyr. Adm. 30. 94. b. Ni- 
 cet. Annal. 16. 5. A late word for the 
 earlier cu^/idXorov Troitlv, Lobeck ad Phryn. 
 p. 442. 
 
 ai XjjLaX.coTL^a), f. /o-w, (at^dXwTos.) 
 to make prisoner, to lead captive, Pass. Luke 
 21, 24. Sept. for n^W 1 K. 8, 36. (Diod. 
 Sic. 13. 59.) Trop. 2 Tim. 3, 6 in later 
 editions ; comp. Judith 1 6, 9 TO KaXAor av- 
 rrjs rJxp.a\a)Ti<Tf V^V^TJV aiTov. Trop. also 
 to bring into captivity, sutyeclion, e. g. the 
 mind or will, c. ace. Rom. 7, 23. 2 Cor. 
 10, 5. A late word for the earlier al^d- 
 oiflv, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442. 
 
 (OTO?, ov, 6, 17, (ai xM 1 ?) <5Xt o-KO- 
 
 one captured in war, a captive, Luke 
 4, 18 or 19. Sept. for ""Dti Is. 61, 1. 
 1 Mace. 2, 9. Hdian. 7. 2. 18. Xen. Cyr. 
 3. 1.7. 
 
 al(ov, tovos, 6, poet. TJ, (kindr. aei, or 
 perh. from ao>,) pr. duration, the course or 
 flow of time, in various relations as deter 
 mined by the context, viz. A) For human 
 life, existence, Horn. II. 22. 58 avrbs Se (pi- 
 \ijs aluivos dp.ep Srjs. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 3 -f]8iov 
 rov aluva o~idyeiv, for the more usual TOP 
 jSt ov SidyfLv. Plato Gorg. p. 448. c. B) 
 For time indefinite, a period of the world, 
 the u orld. in Gr. w r riters, and also in Sept. 
 and N. Testament; see below in no. 1. 
 C) For endless duration, perpetuity, eterni 
 ty ; e. g. as distinguished from 6 ^pdVos. 
 Plato Tim. p. 37. d, eiKova 8 f-mvoel Kivrjrrjv 
 . . . riva alatvos Trotr/crai. Kal 8iaKocrfJ.a>v apa 
 ovpavov, TTOiei, fjifvovros alu>vos tv evi, Kar 
 dpiS/noi loixrav alatmov eluova, TOVTOV ov 8rj 
 Xpdvov <avoiJ.dKap.fv. Ib. p. 38. a. Plato Locr. 
 p. 97. d, ov yap rjv Trpo Kocr/MCf acrTpa- o~i6rrep 
 ovS fviavruf ouS fopdv Trepio8oL, ais p.frpfe- 
 rai 6 yevvaros Koo-p.os ovros. eiKcav Se (<TTI TO> 
 dyevvdra) ^pwco, ov ala>va TTOTayopevap.es, 
 KT\. Diod. Sic. 1. 6. 92; see in no. 2. a. 
 Sept. mostly for Heb. C& iS hidden time. 
 duration, eternity. Hence in N. T. of long- 
 continued time, indefinite duration, in ac 
 cordance with Greek usage, but modified 
 as to construction and extent by the exam 
 ple of the LXX, and the Rabbinic views. 
 1. Of time indefinite, Lat. ccvum, an ag& 
 
21 
 
 aitov 
 
 or period of the world, the world; see above 
 inB. Thus 
 
 a) Of time long past, as in Gr. writers, 
 lime immemorial, the olden time, of old, re 
 ferring to high antiquity, e. g. an- aliovos 
 from of old, since the world began, Luke 1, 
 70 8ia oro/iaTo? TCOV aylcov TCOV an alcovos 
 TTpo<pT]Tcov avTov. Acts3,21. 15,18. Plur. 
 d TT 6 TCOV aliovcov from past ages, from of 
 old; Col. 1, 26 TO p.v<rrfjpiov TO imoKfKpv- 
 fj.fvoi> OTTO TCOV alcovcov Kal OTTO TCOV yevecov. 
 Eph. 3, 9. So too e K T o a f co v o s , id. John 
 9, 32 eVc TOV cdStvos OVK TJKOVCT^, i. e. never. 
 Also TV po T>V at a> POP, before the ages, 
 worlds, from eternity, 1 Cor. 2,1 ; i. q. Trpb 
 Xpovcov alcovLcov 2 Tim. 1, 9. Tit. 1,2. In 
 the same sense, Jude 25 Ttpo Travrus TOV 
 alcovos, in some editions. Sept. an- aliovos 
 and dno TOV aliovos for nbl Sa Gen. 6,4. Is. 
 64, 4 ; also irpo alcovcov for Ct!i5 Ps. 55, 19. 
 Tob. 4, 12. So JEl V. H. 6. 13 e al&vos 
 Kal els eyyovovs. Diod. Sic. 4. 83 of the 
 temple of Venus : uovov Se TOVTO TTJV e 
 alcovos dpx*]v Xa/3o i>. Lycurg. 216. 4 e 
 aavros TOV aiiovos 
 
 b) Of time present, according to the 
 Jewish usage, oalcovovTos, this age, this 
 v-orld, the present scene and order of tilings 
 in its course or flow, corresponding to the 
 Rabb. nn nbis , see Buxtorf Lex. 1620. 
 a) With the idea of evil both moral and 
 physical, as frailty, transientness, care, cor 
 ruption, sin. Matt. 13, 22 17 uepipva TOV 
 alcavos TOVTOV. Mark 4, 19 ; comp. Luke 
 21, 34. Luke 16, 8 oi viol TOV alcovos TOV 
 TOV the sons of this world, worldly men. 20, 
 34. Hence called alcov irovrjpos evil world 
 Gal. 1, 4; and Satan is said to be 6 3eo? 
 TOV alcovos TOVTOV 2 Cor. 4, 4. So Rom. 
 12, 2. 1 Cor. 1, 20. 2, 6 bis. 8. 3, 18. 
 [Eph. 6, 12.] 1 Tim. 6, 17. 2 Tim. 4, 10. 
 Tit. 2. 12. Eph. 2, 2 Kara TOV alcova TOV KQCT- 
 /xou TOVTOV according to the course or lapse 
 of this world, the present age or period of 6 
 KOO-UOS, q. d. as it is wont to go in this world. 
 In antith. to the future ; Matt. 12, 32 oi/Ve eV 
 TovTca Tea alcovi, ovTe tv Tea fj.f\Xovrt, cornp. 
 Mark 10, 30 where it is eV r<a *aip<a TOVTCO. 
 Eph. 1, 21. So Sept. and Heb. abis Ecc. 3, 
 11 ; comp. 8, 17. The present ag3 or pe 
 riod of the world is spoken of as succeeded 
 by the reign of the Messiah, the world to 
 come (see in no. 2. b) ; hence tJie end of 
 the world is sometimes the coming of Christ 
 and the introduction of the gospel, i. e. the 
 end of the Jewish dispensation, see in fo~xa- 
 ros no. 2. b ; so fj o~vvre\tia TOV alcavos 
 Matt. 24, 3 ; ff crvvr. TU>V ala>via>v Heb. 9, 
 
 26; TO. Te\j] T<av ala>vi(t>v 1 Cor. 10, 11. 
 Or also it is referred to his second coming 
 at the day of judgment ; so 77 o-vvr\fici 
 TOV alcavos Matt. 13, 39. 40. 49. 28, 20 e yw 
 /j.e3 vpcav flfj.1 . . . fats Trjs o~vvr. TOV alccvos. 
 /5) Meton. the world, as created and exist 
 ing ; only in Plur. as including the upper and 
 lower worlds, the heavens and the earth. 
 the universe; see Winer 27. 3. Heb. ,1,2 
 6V ov TOVS alcavas frroirjo-f 11, 3 
 voov/j-fv Kar^prurSai TOVS alcovas 
 3eoi). So perh. Wis-d. 13, 9 et yap TOCTOV- 
 TOV io~xvo~av fldevai, iva Swcavrai o~To^do~a- 
 o~3at TOV aleava, TOV TOVTCOV decnroTrjv TTCOS 
 ra^ioi oi>x fvpov, comp. v. 7. Ecclus. 36. 
 17. Tob. 13, 6. Greg. Syncell. p. 47 Din- 
 dorf. 6 j3ao~i\fvs TTUVTCOV TCOV alcovcov. 
 
 2. Put for endless duration, eternity, ever, 
 everlasting, as in Gr. writers ; see above in 
 C. Thus 
 
 aj Genr. 1 Tim. 1, 17 r<3 Se /Sao-tXet TCOV 
 alotov to the king of eternity, the king eter 
 nal ; the Plur. being here used perh. as 
 implying eternity both ante and post; see 
 Winer 27. 3. So Ecclus. 36, 17 [19] tn 
 Kvpios el 6 Sfor TO>V alcovcov. Tob. 13, 6. 10. 
 Pliilo de Mund. p. 1157 nvpios /S 
 TCOV alcovcov. Jos. Ant. 1. 18. 6 
 TTUVTOS alcovos. Others in all these pas 
 sages take alcov, alcoves, in the sense of the 
 world, the universe ; see Bleek Hebraerbr. 
 II. p. 39. Spec. a) Of eternity ante ; 
 Plur. Eph. 3, 1 1 17 o~o(pia TOV 3fov Kara irpo- 
 2eo-ii TCOV alcovcov, according to his eternal 
 purpose, from eternity. So Diod. Sic. 1. 6 
 iiTrefprjvavTO Kal TO yevos TCOV dvSpconcov e 
 alcovos vtrdpxfiv. Plato as quoted above in 
 C. /3) Of eternity post ; once simply. 
 2 Pet. 3, 18 ds fiptpav alcovos, i. q. els ijfie- 
 pav alcoviov, i. e. time without end, eternal 
 duration, for ever ; comp. Sept. els TOV alu>- 
 va xpovov for cbl S "IS Ex. 14, 13; ns:5 
 Is. 13, 20. Elsewhere only with eiy, and 
 always implying duration without end ; so 
 els TOV aleava for ever, spoken of God 
 and his word 1 Pet. 1, [23]. 25 ; of Christ s 
 priesthood Heb. 5, 6. 6, 20. 7, 17. 21. 24. 
 28. John 12, 34; of the happiness of the 
 righteous, John 6, 51. 58. 2 Cor. 9, 9. 1 
 John 2, 17. 2 John 2 ; of the punishment 
 of the wicked, tls alcova id. 2 Pet. 2, 17. 
 Jude 13; and so genr. Luke 1, 55 (others 
 fcos alcovos). John 8,35 bis. 14, 16. 1 Cor. 
 8, 13. With a negat. never, Matt. 21, 19. 
 Mark 3, 29 OVK e^ 6 a<pfo-iv ds TOV alcova. 
 11, 14. John 4, 14. 8, 51. 52. 10, 28. I 1 , 
 26. 13,8. Sept. for ob-isb Is. 40,8. 51 
 6. 8 ; nbiS 19 Deut. 29, 29 ; nwi Jer 5Q 
 
auav 
 
 22 
 
 39. Is. 28, 28. Ecclus. 18, 1 6 &v els rbv 
 aluva sc. 3eor. Comp. Lycurg. 211. 19 oi> 
 fjLOVoii fls TOV Trapovra Kivftvvov, aXX as 
 airavra TOV aicora KT\. Diod. Sic. 1. 72 Sia 
 TOV (j)6j3ov TTJS . . . fliXacr(f)r]p.ias fls airavTa 
 rbv ala>va. ibid. 1.92 <as TOV aliava Starpt- 
 jBeiv /ieXXovro? a3 aSov, spoken of a shade 
 in Hades. Plur. els TOV s alwvas id. for 
 ever, cornp. ovpavos and ovpavoi, o-d/S^aroi/ and 
 o-a/3/3ara, see Winer 27. 3. So of Christ 
 Luke 1,33 Ka\ /SatriXeucrei . . . els TOVS alaivas, 
 parall. OVK eWai re Xoy. Elsewhere only of 
 God in ascriptions, [Matt. 6, 13.] Rom. 1, 
 25. 9,5. 11,36. 16,27. 2 Cor. 11,31; of 
 Christ Heb. 13, 8. Sept. for tbisb Ps. 
 104, 31 ; n^w b p s . 77, 8. Intens. in 
 Plur. els TOVS aluvas TUIV aica va> v,for 
 ever and ever; comp. Heb. B"^7i? Bs lp, 
 ra a-yta tiyicav, the holy of holies, see Gesen. 
 Lehrg. p. 691, 692. Heb. Gr. 117. Winer 
 37. 2. So of God, in ascriptions, Gal. 1, 
 5. Phil. 4, 20. 1 Tim. 1, 17. 2 Tim. 4, 18. 
 1 Pet. 5, 11. Rev. 1, 6. 4, 9. 10. [5, 14.] 
 7, 12. 10, 6. 15, 7 ; and so in the still 
 stronger expression : els micras TUS yeveas 
 TOV aloavos rwv alcavciov Eph. 3, 21. Of 
 Christ Heb. 13, 21. 1 Pet. 4, 11. Rev. 1, 
 18. 5, 13. 11, 15 ; of the happiness of the 
 saints in heaven Rev. 22, 5 ; of the punish 
 ment of the wicked, Rev. 19, 3. 20, 10 ; 
 also els al<ovas ala>va>v id. Rev. 14, 11. 
 Once Sing, els TOV alaiva TOV al5>vos id. 
 Heb. 1, 8, quoted from Ps. 45, 7 where 
 Sept. for Heb. W tfcis . So Sept. els 
 alS>va alwvos for 1?b Ps. 19, 10. 110, 3. 10 ; 
 also ea>s alatvos T>V aitavcw Dan. 7, 18. 
 (Tob. 6, 17 els TOV alfava TOV alaivos.) The 
 same is els Trdvras TOVS altovas Jude 25. 
 
 b) In the later Jewish and Rabb. usage, 
 the world to come, always including the idea 
 of endless duration, eternity, and corres 
 ponding to the Rabb. NSfi eblj ; so Bux- 
 torf Lex. 1620: " Mundum futurum, sive 
 N2n nbl 3 1 , quidam intelligunt mundum, qui 
 futurus est post destructum hunc mundum 
 inferiorem, et post resurrectionem hominum 
 mortuorum, quando animae cum corporibus 
 suis rursum conjungentur . . . Quidam per 
 xan ebis> intelligunt rnEEri rvra?, dies 
 Messuc, quibus scil. venturus Messias, quern 
 Judsei adhuc expectant, quod in hoc mundo 
 temporaliter regnaturus sit. Vide Abarba- 
 nel in Pirke Aboth c. 4." In accordance 
 with this distinction, the world to come, i. e. 
 the kingdom of the Messiah, the new gos 
 pel dispensation, is regarded as beginning 
 with the coming of Christ on earth at the 
 close of the Jewish dispensation ; but as 
 
 fully developed and established in its glo 
 rious spiritual character only at Christ s 
 coming to judgment at the last day ; see in 
 /SacriXei a no. 3 ; ecr^aros no. 2. b ; and 
 comp. above in no. 1. b. a. E. g. 6 at <u v 6 
 /j.e\\a>v, Heb. 6, 5 8vvdfj.eis Tf P.\\OVTOS 
 alcovos, comp. Heb. 2,5; so with ald>v impl. 
 Matt. 12, 32. Eph. 1, 21 ; 6 alvv 6 epxofJ-t- 
 vos, Mark 10, 30. Luke 18, 30 ; 6 aiwv 
 fKflvos Luke 20, 35. Plur. ot alfaves ol 
 eTrepx6[j.evoi: id. Eph. 2, 7 ; see above in 
 lett. a. /3. 
 
 cuaivios, lov, 6, ?], adj. (aiwi/,) also fern. 
 alcavia 2 Thess. 2, 16. Heb. 9, 12. Plat. 
 Tim. 38. b ; erer enduring, perpetual, ever 
 lasting, corresponding in usage to mow q. v. 
 
 1. Of time long past and indefinite, of 
 past ages, primeval, most ancient, of old, 
 since the world began ; Rom. 16, 25 P,VO-TTJ* 
 plov xpovois altoviois o-eanyr]p.fvov, the mys 
 tery kept secret in the times of old, since the 
 world began. So Trpb XP OVU>V almviaav be 
 fore the times of old, from eternity, 2 Tim. 
 
 1, 9. Tit. 1,2; i. q. irpb TU>V ala>va>v 1 Cor. 
 
 2, 7 ; see in ala>v no. 1. a. Sept. for d^l S 
 Ps. 77, 6. Prov. 22, 28. Hab. 3, 5. 
 
 2. Of endless duration, eternal, everlast 
 ing, for ever, e. g. a) Genr. as implying 
 eternity both ante and post, see in aluiv no. 
 2. a. So of God, Rom. 16, 26 tear e?ri- 
 rayrjv TOV OLCOVLOV Seov. Of the Spirit which 
 was in Christ, Heb. 9, 14 8ia Trvev/j-aTOS al- 
 oviov. Sept. Seo? alcovios for fibl3> ^N Gen. 
 21, 33. Is. 40, 28. So Barach 4,8. 10. 14. 
 Plato Locr. 96. d, %ebv 8e TOV alu>viov voos 
 oprj P.OVOS. b) Elsewhere of the future 
 without end, eternity post ; so genr. TO. Se 
 ^77 ^KfTvo^eva alvvia, opp. irpoo-Kaipa, 2 Cor. 
 4, 18 ; olicia ev TO!S ovpavols 5, 1 ; aKrjvai 
 Luke 16, 9 ; StaS^K?/ Heb. 13, 20 ; Xvrpw- 
 o-ts 9, 12 ; evayye\iov Rev. 14, 6 ; and in 
 ascription to God, co Tip,fj Kal KpaTos alcovioi- 
 I Tim. 6, 16; adverbially, Philem. 15 Iva 
 alaviov avTov aTre^ns, see Buttm. 123. 6. 
 Kiihn. \ 588. Sept. $ia%r]Kr) alvvios foi 
 Cbl 2 Gen. 9, 16. 17, 7. sajp. So Ecclus. 
 
 45, 15. Jos. Ant. 7. 14. 5 i]yefj.ovia aluvia. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 1, 93 els TrjV alaiviov O IKTJO-IV. 
 Plato Legg. 904. a, dvwXeZpov 8e ov yevope- 
 vov, aXX OVK fumviov. Hence of Christ s 
 kingdom 2 Pet. 1, 11 ; and of the happiness 
 of the saints in heaven, in the world to 
 come, see in ala>v no. 2. b ; so o-cor^pt a at co- 
 vios Heb. 5, 9 ; doga 2 Cor. 4, 17. 2 Tim. 
 2, 10. 1 Pet. 5, 10 ; 7rapd K \rjo-is 2 Thess. 
 2, 16 ; K\r)povofj.la Heb. 9, 15 ; espec. far; 
 ai&vios, life eternal, Matt. 19, 16. 29. 25, 
 
 46. Mark 10, 17. 30. Luke 10, 25. 18, 18. 
 
a/cc&apcria 
 
 30. John 3, 15. 16. 36. 4, 14. 36. 5, 24. 
 39. 6, 27. 40. 47. 54. 68. 10, 28. 12, 25. 
 50. 17, 2. 3. Acts 13, 46. 48. Rom. 2, 7. 5, 
 21. 6, 22. 23. Gal. 6, 8. 1 Tim. 1, 16. 6, 
 12. 19. Tit. 1, 2. 3, 7. 1 John 1, 2. 2, 25. 
 3,15. 5,11.13.20. Jude 21. Sept. for 
 tbiS Dun. 12, 2. 2 Mace. 7, 9. Contra, 
 of the punishment of the wicked, e. g. KO- 
 Xrunr aluvLos Matt. 25, 46 ; Kpiais Mark 3, 
 29 ; Kpipa Heb. 6, 2 ; oXfSpor 2 Thess. 1,9; 
 Ti-vp Matt. 18, 8. 25, 41. Jude 7. Sept. 
 alaiviov for obiu Dan. 12, 2. 
 
 a, as, 17, (a priv. KaSa/pw,) 
 uncleanness, impurity, filth ; physical, Matt. 
 23, 27. Sept. for HJ^rj 2 Sam. 11, 4. 
 Plut. de placit. Philos/S. 6. Plato Tim. 72. 
 c. Moral, mostly as opp. to purity of mind, 
 chastity, i. q. leicd?iess, Rom. 1, 24. 6, 19. 
 2 Cor."l2, 21. Gal. 5, 19. Eph. 4, 19. 5, 3. 
 Col. 3, 5. 1 Thess. 4, 7, comp. v. 3. Sept. 
 for nxs-J Ez 1 . 22, 15. 36, 25. Once of 
 impure motives, covetousness, 1 Thess. 2, 
 
 3, comp* v. 5. So genr. wickedness, de 
 pravity, Dem. 553. 12. Arr. Epict. 4. 11.5. 
 
 dKcfeapTijs, 7771-0?, 17, (a priv. *a3a/pco,) 
 uncleanness, i. e. lewdness, trop. for idolatry, 
 Rev. 17, 4 Rec. Others ra d^aSapra. Not 
 found in classic writers. 
 
 d/ccfeapTOS, ov, 6, fj, adj. (a priv. jcaSai - 
 pa),) unclean, impure,filthy, pr. not cleansed, 
 Xen. Eq. 5. 10. In N. T. 
 
 1. Levitically, ceremonially, see Lev. 5, 
 2 ; unclean, e. g. of food, Acts 10, 14. 11, 
 8 ; of birds Rev. 18, 2. See Lev. ll,4sq. 
 Dent. 14, 7 sq. where Sept. for Nwii. 
 Transferred to persons, e. g. heathen, not 
 Jews, Acts 10, 28 ; unbelievers, not connect 
 ed with the Christian community, 1 Cor. 
 7 14 see in ayida> and ayios no. 1.2 Cor. 
 6, 17, quoted from Is. 52, 11 where Sept. 
 for JO33 . 
 
 2. Morally, i. q. lewd, lascivious, Eph. 5, 
 
 5. Trop. of idolatry, ra d)ca3apra Rev. 17, 
 4 in later editions ; see in dicaSdpTTjs. Symm. 
 for rvinp; Hos. 4, 14. 
 
 3. In a wider sense, wicked, depraved; 
 so of unclean or foul spirits, rrvevfiara d<d- 
 Sapra, devils, demons, (called also Trvf vp,ara 
 novrjpd Matt. 1-2, 45. Luke 7, 21,) Matt. 
 10, 1. 12, 43. Mark 1, 23. 26. 27. 3, 11. 
 30. 5, 2. 8. 13. 6, 7. 7, 25. 9, 25. Luke 
 
 4, 33. 36. 6, 18. 8,29. 9,42. 11,24. Acts 
 5,16.8,7. Rev. 16, 13. 18,2; comp. Sept. 
 for MSis-J Zech. 13, 2. So called as the 
 authors and promoters of all uncleanness, 
 e. g. lewdness, Tob. 3, 8. 6, 14, comp. Gen. 
 
 6, 2 ; wickedness, idolatry, Sept. Ps. 96, 5. 
 Bar. 4, 7. 2 Cor. 4, 4 ; dwelling also in 
 
 23 
 
 unclean places, Bar. 4, 35. Sept. Is. 13,21. 
 34, 14. Sec in 8aip.vvioi> no. 2. So genr. 
 Sept. for xra Is. 6, 5 : nbx3 Job 15, 16. 
 Dem. 403. 14. Plato Legg. 716. e, uKtteap- 
 TOS . . TTJV -^rvxfiv 5 ye KOKOS. 
 
 ClK(ltp60lCll, ou/iai. (aipoy, Kuipdj.) 1t> 
 lack opportunity, absol. Phil. 4, 10. A word 
 of the later Greek, Lob ad. Phryn. p. 126. 
 
 afCdipo)?, adv. (anaipos, xatpoy,) unsea 
 sonably ; 2 Tim. 4, 2 evKaipas aKcu pcos in 
 season and out of season, i. e. for the hear 
 ers, whether they will listen or not ; comp. 
 Ez. 2, 5. 7. Ecclus. 35, 4 dgatpws p.f/ cro- 
 (plov. Pluto Tim. 33. a. 
 
 aKClKOS, ov, 6, f), adj. (a priv. KOKOS,) 
 without evil, i. e. 
 
 1. u?isuspecting,simple-minded,Rom. 16, 
 18. Sept. for ins Prov. 1,4. 14, 15. 
 Pol. 3. 98. 5. Plato Alcib. II. 140. c. 
 
 2. harmless, Homeless, Heb. 7, 26. Sept. 
 for CP) Job 2, 3. 8, 20. Plato Tim. 91. d. 
 
 afcaifca, rjs, 17, (kindr. d/c^,) a thorn. 
 thorn-bush, Matt. 7, 16. Luke 6, 44. Heb 
 6, 8, comp. Gen. 3, 18 where Sept. for yip. 
 
 Also (TTTfipflV V. TTf (TfLV 7Tt OKai/SciS Matt. 1 3, 
 
 7 bis. 22. Mark 4, 7 bis. 18. Luke 8, 7 bis. 
 14 ; Sept. O-TT. eVt UK. for yip Jer. 4, 3. 
 Spec. (rre(pai>os f ditav Stov, a crown of 
 thorns, i. e. of thorn-branches, Matt. 27, 29. 
 John 19, 2. Sept. also for nin Cant. 2, 2. 
 Diod. Sic. 5. 41. Hdot. 2. 96. 
 
 , ov, 6, f], adj. (arai^a,) made 
 of thorns, of thorn-branches, Mark 15, 17. 
 John 19, 5. Hdot. 2. 96 lo-rbs dtdiftivos. 
 
 ov, 6, f], adj. (a priv. 
 unfruitful, barren, e. g. 8ev8pn iiKapna Jude 
 12. Sept. Jer. 2, 6 tv yrj d/cap7rw. So Pol. 
 
 12, 3. 2 x^pa. Trop. unfruitful, yielding 
 no good fruit of knowledge or virtue, Matt. 
 
 13, 22. Mark 4, 19 ; or of beneficence 1 Cor. 
 
 14, 14. Tit. 3, 14. 2 Pet. 1, 8. So Eph. 
 5, 1 1 TO fpya TII (Kiipna TOV (TKOTOVS, the 
 unfruitful works of darkness, i. e. evil, wick 
 ed ; opp. 6 KapTroy rov (pcoTos 1 (Trvtu/xaToj) 
 in v. 9. Plato Phsdr. 277. a. ol Xoyot . . . 
 
 OU^t (IKClpTTOl. 
 
 a/car djvaxTTO^, ov, 6, fj, adj. (a priv 
 (carayti/ajo-KO),) not to be condemned, blame 
 less, e. g. discourse, Tit. 2, 8. 2 Mace. 4, 
 47 of persons on trial. 
 
 a/caTaaXv7TT09, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. 
 KaTa/caXv7rra>,) unveiled, 1 Cor. 11,5. 13. 
 Sept. Cod. Alex. Lev. 13,45. Pol. 15. 27. 2. 
 
 ov, 6. 77, adj. (a priv. *a- 
 uncondemned, Acts 16, 37. 22,25. 
 
24 
 
 ov, 6, 77, adj. (a priv. 
 indissoluble ; hence, enduring, ever 
 lasting, Heb. 7, 16. Dion. Hal. Ant. 10. 31 
 aKaTitXvrov Kpdros rfjs tnap^ias. 
 
 dKardTravcTTOS, O v, 6, ?;, adj. (a priv. 
 KaraTrauco,) unceasing, continual, Pol. 4. 17. 
 4 eV axaraTraiicrrots crracrecrii . Diod. Sic. 
 
 II. 67. In N. T. c. gen. not ceasing from 
 any thing; 2 Pet. 2,14 o03uX/iot UK. d^ap- 
 rtas eyes noi ceasing from sin, i. e. from 
 lascivious gazing. 
 
 t / > > \ 
 
 aKaradTacna^ as, i], {aKaraararos,) 
 
 pr. instability ; hence disorder, commotion, 
 tumult, Luke 21, 9. 1 Cor. 14, 33. 2 Cor. 
 6,5. 12,20. James 3, 16. Sept. for nrHE 
 Prov. 26, 28. Tob. 4, 13. Pol. 1. 70. !. 
 
 f, ov , 6, 17, adj. (o priv. 
 unstable, inconstant, James 1, 
 8. . Sept. for -ii;b Is. 54, 11. Pol. 7. 4. 6. 
 Pint. Symp. 7. 10. 1. 
 
 a/carao-^ero?, O u, o, 17, adj. (a priv. 
 Kare^w.) ?io to be held fast, unrestrainable, 
 untamable, James 3, 8. Sept. Job 31, 11. 
 Diod. Sic. 14. 53,54. Plut. C. Mar. 44. fin. 
 
 A/ce\8a/jid, indec. Aram. K^ 1 ? ^>tt, 
 the field of Mood, the field purchased with 
 the money for which Judas betrayed Jesus, 
 and appropriated as a place of burial for 
 strangers ; Acts 1,19. Now shown on the 
 south of Jerusalem beyond tlie valley of 
 Hinnom ; see Bibl. Res. in Pal. I. p. 524. 
 
 ciKepcuos, O u, 6, fj, adj. (o priv. Kfpdv- 
 vD/ii.) unmixed, simple, as TJ yrj Plato Grit. 
 
 III. b. In N. T. trop. simple, blameless, 
 without guile, Matt. 10, 16. Rom. 16, 19. 
 Phil. 2, 15. So Jos. Ant. 1. 2. 2 oVpmos 
 /Si off. Diod. Sic. 13. 20. Plato Polit. 
 268. b. 
 
 atc\ivr]$, (os, ovs, 6, fj, adj. (a priv. 
 KXiVco), not inclining or leaning, Plato Pha> 
 do 109. a. In N. T. trop. unwavering, 
 inflexible, firm, Heb. 10, 23. So Symm. 
 Job 61, 4. M. V. H. 12. 64 jBavtXfia 
 rjs Kai aK\ii>r]s- 
 
 ), f. aero), (OK/LIT/,) to be at the 
 highest point, to be in full bloom or vigour, 
 /o flourish, Jos. Ant. 1. 18. 3. Plato Ax. 
 367. b. In N. T. to be fully ripe, as fruits 
 in their best state, absol. Rev. 14, 18. So 
 Plut. Lucull. 31. Xen. Hell. 1. 2. 4. 
 
 aKfJir], tjs, f), (a*)?,) ft point, edge of a 
 weapon Pol. 15. 16. 3 ; of time, life, acme, 
 floicer, eV dtyijj TOU /3/ou Xen. Cyr. 7. 2. 20. 
 In N. T. only ace. aKp.r)v as Adverb, 
 for the earlier KO.T OK/XT)I> xpoVov, at this 
 point of time, i.e. ei;e?i now, y.t, still, Matt. 
 
 15, 16. So Pol. 1. 13. 12. Xen. An. 4, 
 3. 26. See Lob. ad Phryn. p. 123. 
 
 a/cor), JJy, fj } (UKOVCO,) 1. the hearing, 
 i. e. a) The sense of hearing, 1 Cor. 12, 
 17 bis. 2 Tim. 4, 3. 4 ; the act of hearing, 
 2 Pet. 2, 8. (Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 6.) So by 
 Hebr. UKOIJ azova-ere with the hearing ye 
 shall hear, Matt. 13, 14. Acts 28, 26- 
 quoted from Is. 6, 9, where Sept. for inf. 
 absol. SIEtti. b) Plur. ai OK oat, the 
 instrument of hearing, the ears ; Mark 7, 35 
 8iT]voi^r]crav avrov ai aKoal. Luke 7, 1 . Acts 
 17, 20. Heb. 5, 11 va>%pol rats aKoals dull 
 as to your ears, dull of hearing ; see Winer 
 
 5 31. 3. So 2 Mace. 15, 39. Plato Epin. 
 985. c. 
 
 2. Me ton. what is heard, viz. a) The 
 thing announced, message, teaching, preach 
 ing. John 12, 38 and Rom. 10, 16 ris eni- 
 arfvcre rrj d.Korj TjfjLwv, i. e. our message, 
 quoted from Is. 53, 1, where Sept. for 
 in^aai . go ivhat is heard, the message heard, 
 Rom. 10, 17 bis. Gal. 3, 2. 5 e aKofjs Trurrecor 
 from the message or preaching of faith, opp. 
 e epycov vopov. 1 Thess. 2,13 and Heb. 4, 2 
 
 6 \6yos TTJS dKorjs the word of the message, 
 the word preached. So Xen. Hi. 1. 14. 
 b) Genr. a report, rumour, Matt. 4, 24. 
 14, 1. 24, 6. Mark 1, 28. 13, 7. Sept. for 
 MStttti 2 Sam. 13, 30 ; saai Jer. 50, 43. 
 So Dem. 597. 12. Thuc.V 41. 
 
 , >, f. 7/0-0, (a of unity, 
 ,) to follow, to go with, to accom 
 pany any one. a) Genr. and construed 
 with a dat. Matt. 4, 25 Kai r]Ko\ov^r]a-av 
 OUTW 6 xXoi TroXXot. 8, 1. 9, 19. 27. Mark 
 5, 24. Luke 9, 11. John 11, 31. Acts 12. 
 8. 9. Rev. 14, 4. al. sasp. Sept. for T^rj 
 i$ 1 Sam. 25, 42. (Hdian. 6. 7. 17. 
 Xen. Hell. 5. 2. 26.) Absol. Luke 22, 54. 
 Acts 21, 36. 1 Cor. 10, 4 eK Tri>fvp.aTiKr)s 
 dKo\ov%ovo-T]s irtrpas, of the spiritual rock 
 that followed them, i. e. which miraculous 
 ly gave them water both at Horeb and 
 Kadesh ; see Ex. 17, 6. Num. 20, 8 sq. 
 With fjLfTo. TWOS Rev. 6, 8 ; see Lobeck ad 
 Phryn. p. 353 sq. So Dem. 608. 14. b) 
 Spec, to follow a teacher, to accompany him 
 personally, as was usual with the disciples 
 of Jewish doctors and Greek philosophers, 
 c. dat. Matt. 4, 20. 22. 9, 9. 19, 27. 28. 
 Mark 1, 18. John 1, 41. al. With a negat. 
 Mark 9, 38 ; p.frd TIVOS Luke 9, 49 see 
 above in lett. a. So Sept. UKO\. micro) for 
 "nr^ T^fi i K. 19, 20. Also in the sense : 
 to be or become the disciple of any one as to 
 faith, doctrine, practice, to follow his teach 
 ing, c. dat. Matt. 16,24. Mark 8, 34. Luke 
 
(IKOU(0 
 
 25 
 
 O.KOVW 
 
 9, 23. John 8, 12. 12, 26; with onio-u> /zou 
 Matt. 10, 38. [Mark 8, 34.] See above 
 Sept. 1 K. 19, 20. Comp. doX. rois; vopois 
 2 Mace. 8, 36. Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 1 1. c) to 
 follow one after another, c. dat. Rev. 14, 8. 
 9. So Ecclus. Prol. init. d) Of acts, 
 deeds ; so c. p,erd TWOS, Rev. 14, 13 rd 8e 
 tpya CIVTUIV dicoXou3et per avT&v, their ivorks 
 do follow them, their good deeds accompany 
 them to the judgment-seat and receive an 
 immediate reward. Also of sins, absol. 
 Rev. 18, 5 Rec. T)Ko\ov%i]crav, where others 
 read eKoXXjjSqo-ai/. So Judith 12, 2 TU ^KO- 
 Xoi/SJqKora pot, things accompanying me, 
 brought with me. + 
 
 a/COVd)) f. aKov<Top.ai, perf. dicrjKoa , Pass, 
 perf. T^Koucr/iat, aor. 1 rjKovo-^rjv , Buttm. 
 \ 85. 2. 98. n. 6. Klihn. ^ 222, 223. 
 I^ater and less usual is fut. UKOVO-W Matt. 
 
 12, 19. 13, 14. 15. John 10, 6. Sept. Is. 
 6, 9. Luc. Navig. 11 ; see Winer 5 15. 
 Passow s. v. To hear, Sept. everywhere 
 for yattJ . 
 
 1. Intrans. to hear, to have or recover 
 the faculty of hearing ; e. g. of those deaf, 
 Matt. 11,5 and Luke 7, 22 Koxpol UKOVOVO-I. 
 Mark 7, 37. Rom. 11, 8 2>ra TOU pfj O.KOV- 
 uv, ears so as not to hear. (Xen. Mem. 4. 
 S. 8. Apol. Socr. 6.) So jSapecos anovftv 
 to hear heacily, to be dull of hearing, Matt. 
 
 13, 15. Acts 28, 27. 
 
 2. Trans, to hear, to perceive by the ear, 
 in various constructions both of the object 
 heard and the person from whom it is heard. 
 Thus, 
 
 a) Genr. in the following constructions : 
 a) Absol. the thing heard and person being 
 implied from the context. Matt. 13, 16 KOI 
 (p-aKapia) TII oora vp,u>v, art aKovti. V. 17. 
 Mark 4, 15. Luke 6, 27. Rom. 10, 14. al. 
 (Xen. Hell. 4. 2. 3.) John 9, 27 T L ndXiv 
 3eXere uKoveiv. So rot? 2>o~iv UKOVHV Matt. 
 13, 15. Acts 28,27; d/coj? duoveiv Matt. 
 13, 14. Acts 28, 26, see in duor) no. 1. a ; 
 with its Part, in the like intensive sense, 
 Iva . . . aKovovrfS CKOVCOCTI Mark 4,12; see 
 Winer 46,10. (Comp. Plut. de Lib. educ. 
 
 18 p.i] aKovfLv aKovovras.) Part, duovcras, 
 aKovcravrfs, often thus serves for transition 
 or connection ; Matt. 2, 3 duoixras 8e Hpo>- 
 8179 ... fTapdx^r). 8, 10. 9, 12. John 6, 60. 
 Acts 4, 24. 14,14. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 13, 14.) 
 With Trapd TIVOS of pers. John 1, 41. 6,45. 
 ) With ace. of object; Matt. 10, 27. 12, 
 
 19 ov8e aKovo-d rt? . . . TIJV (pavrjv avrov. 13, 
 17. 19. 20. Luke 1, 41. John 3, 8. Acts 4, 
 20. 5, 24. 1 John 1, 1. al. sacp. Luke 23, 6 
 aKovo-as Td\i\aiav hearing the name Gali 
 lee. Eph. 4, 21 etye avTov (XptorAr) TJKOV- 
 
 a-are, i. e. Christ as the sum and substance 
 of the apostolic preaching. (Dem. 240. 12. 
 Plato Rep. 565. e.) Pass. Matt. 2, 18 (pcoi/q 
 rjKoixr^r]. Luke 12, 3. Acts 11, 22. Rev. 
 18,22. Heb. 2, 1 Tois dKovcrSflcrt. sc. pfjfiaa-i., 
 i. e. the doctrines heard. With an adjunct of 
 pers. superadded ; e. g. in the genit. Acts 
 1, 4 fjv rjKovaaTe fjiov which ye have heard of 
 (from) me ; so with e /c TIVOS 2 Cor. 12, 6 ; 
 dno TIVOS 1 John 1,5; Trapd TIVOS pr. with 
 any one, while with him, John 8, 26. 40. 15, 
 15. Acts 10, 22. 28,22. 2 Tim. 1 , 1 3 (5>v by 
 attr. for a) . 2, 2. So c. gen. Xen. Cyr. 3.1.1; 
 UK TIVOS Horn. Od. 15. 374; dno TIVOS Time. 
 1 . 125 ; Trapd TIVOS Xen. An. 1.2.5. y) With 
 genit. of object ; Mark 14, 64 UK. Ttjs fi\ao-(pr]- 
 p-i ay. Luke 6, 47 UK. TWV \6ya>v. 15, 25. 
 John 5, 25. 6, 60. Acts 7, 34. 9, 7. Heb. 
 3,7. Rev. 16, 1. al. saep. So Dem. 226. 21. 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 13. S) With genit. of 
 pers. to hear one speaking, Luke 2, 46. 47. 
 21, 38. John 3,29. 10, 20 TI UVTOV dxovfTe. 
 Acts 22, 22. al. (Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 31.) So 
 with a participle added; as Mark 14, 58 
 jj/xels r)Kovo-a[j.fv UVTOV \eyovTos, as in Engl. 
 we heard him saying. Acts 2,6. 11. Rev. 
 6, 3. 5. 16, 5. 7 ; see Winer j 46. 1. (Xen. 
 GEc. 1.1.) With Trepi TIVOS of object super- 
 added, to hear one concerning any thing, 
 Acts 17, 32. 24, 24 ; comp. Xen. Mem. 4. 
 8. 4. e) With UTTO TIVOS of pers. and nepi 
 TIVOS of object ; Acts 9, 13 aKrjKoa dno TroX- 
 X<ui/ Trept rov dvftpbs TOVTOV. f) With ace. 
 of pers. and particip. Rev. 5, 13 irav KTio~p.a 
 . . . fjKovo-a \tyovras, an example of the 
 constructio ad sensum. 77) With ort, 
 Acts 22, 2 dKovvavres 8, ort 777 E/3pcufti 
 8ia\eKT<p Trpoo~f(pa>v(i avTols- So Xen. Hell. 
 5. 1. 26*. 
 
 b) Spec, to give ear, to hearken, to listen, 
 to hear with attention. So in a direct ad 
 dress, Imper. axove, uKovere, hear ! absol. 
 Mark 4, 3. 12, 29. Acts 7, 2. 13, 16 ; ace. 
 of thing, Acts 2, 22 ; gen. of pers. Mark 7, 
 14. (absol. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 16. ib. 7. 2. 11.) 
 Of those who listen to a teacher ; ahsol. 
 Luke 19, 48 ; ace. of thing Luke 5, 1 ; 
 ger. of tiling John 12, 47. John 6, 60 ris 
 Sujtmu UUTOV dxovfiv, comp. v. 61 ; gen. of 
 pers. Mark 6, 20. Luke 15, 1. Rev. 3, 20. 
 Part. uKovovrfs hearers, listeners, disciple?, 
 Luke 6, 27. Spec. a) i. q. to give heed 
 to, to hear and obey, with ace. of thing, 
 Matt. 10, 14 6? fav . . . p.rj8f dKovo-y rovs 
 \6yovs vp>v. John 5, 24. Gal. 4, 21. Rev. 
 1,3; gen. of pers. or of voice, Matt. 17, 5 
 avrov aKovfTe. 18, 15. 16. Mark 6, 11. 
 Luke 9, 35. 16, 29. 31. John 10, 8. Acts 
 3, 22. 23. 4, 19. 1 John 4, 5. 6 ; so OK. TTJS 
 
26 
 
 t]s id. John 10, 3. 16. 27. 18, 37. Sept. 
 for SSti Gen. 3, 17. Ex. 16. 20 ; a^Bpfi 
 2 Chr. 20, 14. Is. 48, 18. (1 Esdr. 5, 69. 
 c. gen. JEi. V. H. 3. 16. Xcn. Cyr. 8. 6. 1.) 
 Here belongs the phrase : 6 t^cov ovs (5>ra), 
 dKovaaTco, ichosoever hath ears, let him hear, 
 
 1. e. give heed and obey, Rev. 2, 7. 11. 17. 
 
 29. 3, 6. 13. 22. 13, 9. Matt. 11, 15. 13, 
 
 9. Luke 14, 35. Comp. the phrases 6 e^coi/ 
 vovv Rev. 13, 18 and 6 e^oov o~o(piav Rev. 
 17, 9. /3) By Hebr. of God, to hear and 
 answer prayer, i. q. elo-aKovco, only in John ; 
 so c. gen. John 9, 31. 11, 41. 42. 1 John 
 5, 15. So Heb. SaU Sept. elo-aKovco Ps. 
 
 10. 17. 28, 2. Comp. Plato Legg. 712. 
 b. Soph. (Ed. R. 903. 
 
 c) In a judicial sense, to hear, e. g. testi 
 mony, a prisoner, sc. as a judge or magis 
 trate ; absol. KO%COS aKovca, Kpivca John 5, 30 ; 
 with gen. of the person heard Acts 24, 4. 
 25, 22. 26, 3 ; c. Trapd TIVOS John 7, 51. 
 Sept. for yc\s 2 K. 15, 3. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 
 2. 14 ol 8e yepaiTfpoi dKovo~avT(s (KKpLvov- 
 criv. 
 
 d) Also to hear of a thing, to learn by 
 hearing, to be informed, to know, constr. as 
 nbove in lett. a. a) Absol. i. e. without 
 a case of the object ; Mark 6, 14 KOL TJKOV- 
 irfv 6 jSacrtXevs . . . Kal eXeyez/. Rom. 10, 18. 
 15, 21. Part. Matt. 14, 13. 22, 7. Mark 3, 
 21. /3) With ace. of object; Matt. 11, 2 
 UK. TCI epya TOV Xp. 24, 6 and Luke 21, 9 
 TroXffiovs KT\. Acts 23, 16 TTJV eveSpav. Gal. 
 
 1, 13. Eph. 1, 15. 3, 2. Philem 5. James 
 5, 11. (Hdian. 4. 4. 19. Xen. Cyr. 1.1.4.) 
 With ace. and particip. 3 John 4 tva UKOVCO 
 TO. t^ia TfKva ev oXrySeia TTfpnraTovvra. Luke 
 4, 23. Acts 7, 12. (Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 12 on 
 
 UKOVft TOVS 770\fflLOVS TTpOCTlOVTaS f(j> Tjp-ds.^ 
 
 Pass. 1 Cor. 5, 1 iKoverau ev vp!lv iropveia 
 fornication is heard of (reported) among 
 you, I hear of it. Matt. 28, 14. Also ace. 
 with Trepi TWOS, Luke 16, 2 TI TOVTO aKovco 
 Trepi trot). Luke 9, 9. So Xen. An. 7. 7. 
 
 30. y) With genit. of the object ; Rom. 
 10, 14 Tfcos 8( TTiOTfvcrovo-iv, ov OVK rjKOixrav. 
 So Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 9. 8) With Trepi 
 TIVOS of object ; Mark 5, 27 aKovcracra Trepi 
 TOV Irjo-ov. So Xen. An. 2. 5. 26. e) 
 With on, Matt. 2, 22. 4, 12. 5, 21. 27. 
 Mark 16, 11. Luke 1, 58. Gal. 1, 23. Phil. 
 
 2, 26. 1 John 2, 18. (Xen. CEc. 15. 5. 
 Vect. 4. 14.) Pass. c. on, Mark 2, 1. 
 John 9, 32* So with TIVOS of the source, 
 John 12, 34. ) With ace. and infin. 
 1 Cor. 11, 18. So Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 1. 77) 
 With d, followed by the indicative in an 
 indirect inquiry ; Acts 19, 2 ovSe d TrvevLia 
 %yiov ecrriv TjKovo-afjifv. See Winer {42. 4. 
 
 e) Spec, to hear and understand, to com 
 prehend ; absol. Mark 4, 33 KaZcos rjSvvavro 
 uKoveiv. 1 Cor. 14, 2. Sept. for SHUJ Gen. 
 11, 7. 42, 23. m V. H. 13. 45/ Por- 
 phyr. de Abstin. 3. 22. p. 248, "Apafifs 
 p.fv KopuKav UKOVOVO-IV, Tvppijvol 8e derati/. 
 Athen. 9. 383. a, eAeyei/ p^ara a oi/8f etj 
 r/Kovaev civ. -f~ 
 
 a/cpacna, as, 77, (aKpaTtjs.) incontinence, 
 inabstimnce, 1 Cor. 7, 5 ; also Matt. 23, 25 
 where Griesb. ddiKia. Jos. Ant. 8. 7. 5 
 TTJV TCOV d(ppo8io-ia)v cLKpaaiav. Xen. Mem. 
 4. 5. 6. 
 
 eos, ovs, 6, 77, adj. (a priv. 
 KpaTos,) incontinent, impotens sui, 2 Tim. 
 3, 3. Pol. 8. 11. 2. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 12. 
 
 
 , o, T], adj. (a priv. Kepuvvvfju,) 
 
 unmixed, undiluted, spoken of the wine of 
 God s wrath, as strong and intoxicating, 
 Rev. 14, 10. So Sept. for nann -j^n 
 wine of wrath Jer. 25, 15 ; for Ian Ps. 75. 
 9. Pr. 3 Mace. 5, 2. Xen. An. 5. 4. 29. 
 
 atcpipeia, as, f], (aKpi/Sijr.) exactness, 
 strictness, extreme accuracy. Acts 22, 3 
 7re7rai8evfj,fvos Kara TTJV dupLfteiav TOV ira- 
 rpwou VOP.OV, i. e. instructed in all the exact 
 ness, the precise discipline and observance, 
 of the traditional law. Ecclus. 42, 4. Jos. 
 Vit. 38 01 (<J>npto-cuoi) Trepi TO. Trarpia po /LU/za 
 So/coOcrt TCOV aXXwi/ a/cpi/3ei a 8ia<pe peiz/. Plato 
 Phaedr. 271. a, Trdo-rj a/cpi/3e/a ypd\^ei. 
 
 aKplpi]$) eos, ovs, 6, rj, adj. (Kpoy ; ) pr. 
 pointed; hence exact, strict, precise, Jos. 
 Ant. 2. 5. 1. Plato Rep. 342. d, 6 d^ffis 
 larpos. In N. T. Superl. dupiftfa-raTos, r], 
 ov, most exact, strictest ; Acts 26. 5 Kara 
 TTJV dKpififo-TaTTjv alpe&iv, i. e. strictest in 
 the exposition and observance rS>v &>v KOI 
 rjTT)p.dTa>v in v. 3. (Plato Farm. 134. c, 
 fX flv T *l v dKpipfo-Tdrrjv 7Ti(rrriiJ.r)v.*) Neut. 
 compar. aKpifieo-Tepov as Adv. more ac 
 curately, more perfectly, Acts 18, 26. 23, 15. 
 20. 24, 22. So Plato Phil. 57. c. 
 
 aKpipoo), w, f. coo-cu, (uKpi^rjs,) to know 
 or do accurately, Pol. 20. 22. 7. Plato 
 Charm. 156. a. In N. T. to inquire accu 
 rately, diligently ; with ace. and Trapd TI;OS 
 Matt. 2, 7. 16 ; comp. aKpificos e ^fra^w in 
 v. 8. So Xen. CEc. 20. 10 dupifiovvrfs us 
 yiyveTcu. 
 
 d/cpi,/36js, adv. (a/cpi/S^?,) with exact 
 ness, accurately, diligently, Matt. 2, 8. Luke 
 
 1, 3. Acts 18, 25. Eph. 5, 15. 1 Thess. 5, 
 
 2. So Xen. CEc. 2. 3. Plato Rep. 346. 
 b, d. Compar. aKpi/SeVrfpov, see in a^pt- 
 
?, /So?, r/, a locust, Matt. 3, 4. Mark 
 
 1, 6. Rev. 9, 3. 7. Sept. for na^S Ex. 10, 
 4. 12. 13 ; njn Lev. 11, 22 ; pV^ Jer. 51, 
 14. 27. al. So Horn. H. 21. 12. Theophr. 
 Fr. 14. 3-5. Plut. Sept. Sap. Conv. 2. p. 
 343. Locusts are one of the most terrific 
 scourges of oriental countries ; see Ex. 10, 
 1 -2 sq. Joel 1,4. 2, 2 sq. They are enume 
 rated in Lev. 11, 22 among the living things 
 which are ckan, and the use of which for 
 food was permitted to the Israelites ; comp. 
 Matt. 1. c. Mark 1. c. They are eaten in 
 the East to the present day ; Niebuhr Ara- 
 bien p. 171. Burckh. Trav. in Syria p. 239. 
 Plin. H. N. 9. 50. ib. 11. 35. Winer Realw. 
 art. Heuschrecken. 
 
 UKpoarr/piOV, lov, TO, (uKpoarijs-,) Lat. 
 auditorium, a place of hearing, place of 
 trial, Acts 25, 23. Among the Greeks 
 this word denoted the place where authors 
 recited their works publicly, Arr. Epict. 3. 
 23. 8. Lat. auditorium was also a place 
 where public trials were held ; see the 
 lexicons. 
 
 aKpoarr) 1 ?, ov, 6, (aKpoao/^at,) a hearer, 
 e. g. aKpoarf]s (pa)vr]s Jos. Ant. 3. 5. 3. In 
 N. T. aKpoarrjs rov v6fj.ov, TOV Xoyou, d 
 hearer of the law, of the word, i. e. one who 
 merely hears, but does not regard ; Rom. 
 
 2, 13. James 1, 22. 23. 25. So Plut. Lu- 
 Clill. 42. Thuc. 2. 35 aKpoar^s ^vvei8o)s 
 KOI evvovs- 
 
 aicpoftvcrria, as, 17, not found in Gr. 
 writers ; prob. a corrupt form for the com 
 mon dKpo7roo-3ia, (aKpov, TVOO-^TJ.) which has 
 the same signification ; see Aristot. de part. 
 Anim. 2. 18. 
 
 1 . the foreskin, prepuce ; Acts 11, 3 
 aKpofivo-Tiav e^ovres having the foreskin, 
 uncircumcised. Sept. for ^^ Gen. 17, 
 11. 14. Lev. 12, 13. Judith 14, 10. 
 
 2. Meton. uncircumcision, the state of 
 being uncircumcised, Rom. 2, 25. 26 ult. 
 4, 9. 10 bis. 11 bis. 12. 1 Cor. 17, 18. 19. 
 Gal. 5, 6. 6, 15. Col. 2, 13 ev...Trj dicpo- 
 pvo-Tiq TTJS crapKos vfuar, Abstr. for concr. 
 the uncircumcised, the gentiles, opp. 17 Trepi- 
 Top.r] the Jews ; so Rom. 2, 26 init. 27. 3, 
 30. Gal. 2, 7. Eph. 2, 11. Col. 3, 11. The 
 Jews called all other nations in scorn, the 
 uncircumcised; Judg. 14, 3. 15, 18. Is. 
 52, 1. 
 
 CLKpOyCOViatOS, ma, alov, (uKpov, ycovi a,) 
 forming the extreme corner; only of a 
 stone, 6 Xi 3o?, a corner-stone, laid first at 
 the foundation, and on which, as it were, 
 the whole building rests ; spoken of Christ, 
 Eph. 2, 20. 1 Pet. 2, 6 quoted from Is. 28, 
 
 27 a/ccov 
 
 16, where Sept. for FiSS "jSX ; comp. Job 
 38, 6. (Barnab. Ep. c. 6.) The same is 
 Heb. fiSQ ^K"l , Sept. Ke(pa\r) ycavias, Ps. 
 118, 22 ; comp. Matt. 21, 42. Mark 12, 10. 
 Luke 20, 17. Acts 4, 11. 1 Pet. 2, 7. The 
 word ^K~i here refers to the head or point 
 where two walls meet ; not to the highest 
 point or coping ; see Heb. Lex. ^5<"! no. 4. 
 ; , iov, TO, (aKpov, 3i ?,) mostly 
 3 1 v i a , pr. the top of the 
 heap, put for the first fruits of grain or 
 other things offered to the gods ; Hesych. 
 aKpo Siviov airap^rj TUIV %iva>v SiW s 8e elo~iv 
 ol craipol T>V irvpwv Kal Kp&Suv. Schol. ad 
 Eurip. Phosn. 213. [210.] In N. T. Plur. 
 the first of the spoils, Heb. 7, 4. In Gre 
 cian armies a portion of the spoils was con 
 secrated to the gods before the remainder 
 was divided ; this was called TO. aKpo^i- 
 via ; see Potter s Gr. Ant. II. p. 107, 108. 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Donaria. So Hdot. 8. 
 121, 122. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 35. Sing. Plato 
 Legg. 946. b. 
 
 ctfcpo$, a, ov, (UKT], ) pr. what is at the 
 end, extreme, uttermost, highest, Xen. Ven. 
 3. 4. ib. 5. 10. In N. T. only Neut. TO 
 aKpov as Subst. a point, end, extremity, 
 Matt. 24, 31. Mark 13, 27. Luke 16, 24. 
 Heb. 11, 21. Sept. for ^^ Deut. 4, 32. 
 Is. 13, 5. So Pol. 1. 42. 1. Xen. Cyr. 7. 
 
 3. 5. 
 
 A/cv\a<>, ov, 6, Aquila, pr. n. of a Jew 
 born in Pontus, who with his wife Priscilla 
 was banished from Rome with the other 
 Jews by a decree of Claudius ; comp. Suet. 
 Claud, c. 25. Being tent-makers, they es 
 tablished themselves at Corinth, where Paul 
 joined them ; and they would seem to have 
 been converted under his preaching. They 
 accompanied Paul from Corinth to Ephesus ; 
 and were afterwards in Rome. Acts 18, 2. 
 18. 26. Rom. 16, 3. 1 Cor. 16, 19. 2 Tim. 
 
 4, 19. 
 
 afcvpoaj, (, f. uxTca, (aKvpos , a priv. KV- 
 poy,) to invalidate, to make of no effect, to 
 annul, c. ace. fvroXrjv Matt. 15, 6; Xo yov 
 Mark 7, 13 ; SiaZfjKrjv Gal. 3, 17. Comp. 
 Sept. Prov. 1, 26. 1 Esdr. 6, 32. Diod. 
 Sic. 16. 24.. Plut. Lycurg. 9. 
 
 a/co)XuT&)9, adv. (a priv. KXu,) with 
 out hindrance, Acts 28, 31. Hdian. 8. 2. 1. 
 Plato Crat. 415. d. 
 
 aK(OV, ovo-a, ov, adj. (for atKav ; a priv. 
 CKO ,) unwilling, of one who acts against 
 his will, not spontaneously, 1 Cor. 9, 17. 
 Sept. Job 14, 17. Plut. Pomp. 32 fin. Xen 
 Mem. 2. 1. 17. 
 
akdBacnpov 28 
 
 akdftacrrpov, ov, TO , (also 6 aXd/3a- 
 o-rpoff,) alabaster, compact gypsum, the 
 alabastritos of Pliny, sometimes called also 
 onyx, as having the colour of the human 
 Hdian. 3. 15. 16. Pliny H. N. 3. 3. The 
 ancients used it for perfume-vases, in 
 the form of vials with long necks, the 
 mouths of which were sealed ; unguenta 
 optime servantur in alabastris Plin. H. N. 
 13. 3, Poll. Onom. 10. 120. Hence, an 
 alabaster, pr. a box or vase of alabaster for 
 perfumes, Hdot. 3. 20. Athen. 6. 19. ib. 
 15. 13. In N. T. in a wider sense, an 
 alabaster, genr. for a perfume-vase, an un 
 guent-box, made of any materials, as gold, 
 glass, stone; Matt. 26, 7. Mark 14, 3 bis. 
 Luke 7, 37. In Mark 14, 3, the woman 
 breaks the neck of the vase. So genr. JE1. 
 V. H. 12. 18. Theocr. Id. 15. 114 X pv- 
 a-fia dXa/3oo-T/5o. Etym. Magn. dXd/Sao-Tpov 
 (TKfvos Ti e ve Xov, fj p.vpo^TjKr]. See Poll. 
 On. 1. c. 
 
 a\a%OVla, as, 17, (a\acav, ) boasting, 
 ostentation, pride, James 4, 16. 1 John 2, 
 16. Wisd. 5, 8. Pol. 5. 33.8. Xen. Mem. 
 
 I. 7. 1. 
 
 a\tt(y(t)V, ovos, 6, (kindr. oX?;,) a boaster, 
 braggart, Rom. 1, 30. 2 .Tim. 3, 2. Sept. 
 for -nrn Hab. 2, 5. Hdian. 6. 2. 15. Xen. 
 Cyr. 2. 2. 12, where 6 aka&v is defined. 
 
 aXaXao), f. dw, (dXaX^,) to shout 
 0X0X17, to raise tlie battle-cry, Sept. for ? n-1 ^ 
 Josh. 6, 20. Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 9 ; hence 
 genr. to utter a cry, to cry aloud, e. g. in joy, 
 to shout, Sept. for ?^n Ps. 47, 2. 66, 1. 
 Judith 14, 9. Soph. Ant. 133. In N. T. 
 
 1. Of mournful cries, to lament aloud, to 
 wail, absol. Mark 5, 38. Sept. for b^in 
 Jer. 25, 34. 47, 2. Eurip. Elect. 848 ; of 
 a host in flight, Plut. Lucull. 28. 
 
 2. Of cymbals, Part. neut. dXoXd^oi/, 
 clanging, clattering, 1 Cor. 13, 1. 
 
 aXaX^TO?, ov, 6, ^, adj. ( priv. XoXe w,) 
 unspoken, unutterable, not to be expressed 
 in words, Rom. 8, 26. Anthol. Gr. ed. Jac. 
 
 II. p. 74. 
 
 aXaXoy, ov, 6, 17, adj. (o priv. XdXoy, 
 XaXf oj,) speechless, mute, dumb, Mark, 7, 37 
 rroiei . . . rovs dXdXovy XaXeu>. Symm. for 
 C*X Hab. 2, 18. Also Trvev/j-a c/XoXov a 
 dumb spirit Mark 9, 17. 25, i. e. obstinately 
 silent, contrary to their usual character, 
 comp. Mark 1, 24. 34. 5, 7. Luke 4, 34. 
 8, 28. So Plut. de defect. Orac. 51 oXoXov 
 
 KOI KdKOV 77J/eVJUOTOy TT\T]pr]S. 
 
 aXa?, TO, dat. oXoTt, (in the usage of 
 common life for 6 oXf,) salt, Matt. 5, 13. 
 
 Mark 9, 49. 50 bis. Luke 14, 34 bis. Sept. 
 for nbtt Lev. 2, 13. Judg.9,45. al. Trop. 
 as salt preserves and seasons food, so the 
 apostles were to have a wisdom from above 
 to direct their lives and teachings, so as to 
 save themselves and others; Matt. 5, 13 
 vfj.f~is e crre TO oXa? T?}? yijs. Mark 9, 50 ult. 
 Col. 4, 6 Xoyoy . . . oXcm rjprvpfvos. Comp. 
 Diog. Laert. 8. 1. 19. 
 
 d\6i(j)(i), f. i^ca, (a copul. XiVcs.) to oint, 
 to anoint, c. ace. TTJV KftpdXrjv Matt. 6, 17. 
 Luke 7, 46 ; TOVS Tr68as Luke 7, 38. 46. 
 John 12, 3 ; TOV Kvpiov, i. e. his feet John 
 11, 2; the sick Mark 6, 13. James 5, 14; 
 a dead body, Mark 16, 1. Sept. for rvio 
 Gen. 31, 13 ; r^o 2 Sam. 12, 20. So Ju 
 dith 16, 8. JE\. V. H. 3. 38. Xen. CEc. 
 10. 5. The Jews anointed the head at their 
 feasts in token of rejoicing ; see Ps. 23, 5. 
 45, 8. 104, 15. Ecc. 9, 8. Judith 16, 8. 
 The anointing of the feet was unusual ; 
 and testified to extraordinary respect and 
 devotedness. In respect to a dead body, 
 comp. Gen. 50, 2. John 19, 40. For the 
 sick, and also genr. see Lightfoot Hor. Heb. 
 ad Matt. 6, 17 et Mar. 6, 13. 
 
 a\eKTOpo(f)(i)i>ia, as, i], (akfKTQ>p,(j)(0vT).) 
 on the form SL J Lob. ad Phryn. p. 229 ; 
 cock-crowing, pr. /Esop. Fab. 79. In N. T. 
 cock-crowing, the third watch of the night, 
 from midnight to cock-crowing or dawn, 
 Mark 13, 35 ; see in art. (pv\aKrj. So Ni- 
 ceph. Greg. 9. 14. p. 284. c. 
 
 a\KTU>p, opos, 6, (aXfKTpos, \fKrpov,) 
 a poetic form, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 229 ; 
 a cock, gallus, Matt. 26, 34. 74. 75. Mark 
 14, 30. 68. 72 bis. Luke 22, 34. 60. 61. 
 John 13, 38. 18, 27. Aristoph. Vesp. 1490. 
 JSsch. Aam. 1656. 
 
 , ea>s, 6, an Alexandrian, 
 i. e. a Jew of Alexandria in Egypt, Acts 6, 
 9. 18,24. Alexandria was much frequented 
 by the Jews, so that 10,000 of them are said 
 to have been numbered among its inhabit 
 ants ; Philo. in Flacc. p. 971. c. Jos. Ant. 
 19. 5. 2. 
 
 A\e%avSplvo$, O v, 6, 17, adj. Alexan 
 drian, spoken of a ship of Alexandria in 
 Egypt, Acts 27, 6. 28, 11. 
 
 A.\eavopo$, ov, 6, Alexander, pr. n 
 a) A man whose father Simon was com 
 pelled to bear the cross of Jesus, Mark 15, 
 21. b) A former high priest, Acts 4, 6. 
 c) A certain Jew of Ephesus, Acts 19, 33 
 bis. d) A brazier or coppersmith, ,\a\K tvs, 
 1 Tim. 1, 20. 2 Tim. 4, 14. 
 
akevpov 29 
 
 a\evpov, ov, TO, (dX/co,) Jlour, fine meal, 
 Watt. 13, 33. Luke 13, 21. Sept. for naR 
 Num. 5, 15. Judg. 6, 19. Plut. Agesi. 36 
 pen. Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 5. 
 
 aXi f&eiCLi as, 17, (dXriSr;? q. V.) truth, 
 reality, opp. to what is false, unreal. 
 
 1 . Genr. the truth, conformity to Ihe na 
 ture and reality of things. a) Absol. of 
 what is true in itself ; Rom. 2, 2 TO api^a 
 TOU 3eou fart Kara dXt/Setai/. Opp. to mere 
 appearance, pretext, form; Phil. 1, 18 etre 
 Trpocpdcret fire dXr/Se/a Xpitrros KarayyeXXe- 
 rai. 1 John 3, 18. So John 4, 23. 24 lv 
 Trcev/xart Acat dX^Sfi a Set rrpoa-Kwdv, in spi 
 rit and in truth, i. e. with the heart and 
 with that true worship of which the exter 
 nal form is but the symbol ; comp. Heb. 
 10, 1. 9, 9 sq. 23. 24; see also Sept. and 
 Wax 1 Sam. 12, 24. 1 K. 2, 4. 3, 6. So 
 Xen. An. 7. 7. 24. Plato Legg. 730. b. 
 b) In relation to what is spoken, declared, 
 taught, known ; so Xeyftv v. XaXetV rf/v 
 aXfifiav, to speak the truth ; 1 Tim. 2, 7 
 aXi fifiav Xe yw, ou ^u3o/nat. John 16, 7. 
 Rom. 9, 1. Eph. 4, 25. Mark 5, 33 carev 
 avria TT. TTJV dXrjStiav. John 5, 33. 2 Cor. 
 12, 6 aX. yap e p5. Acts 26, 25. 2 Cor. 7, 
 14 ult. So fv akrftflq in truth, truly, ac 
 cording to the truth, Matt. 22, 16. 2 Cor. 
 7, 14. Col. 1, 6 ; eV aXrfitias id. Mark 12, 
 14. 32. Luke 20, 21 ; emphat. of a truth, 
 truly, Luke 4, 25. 22, 59. Acts 4, 27. 10, 
 34. Sept. for nax 2 Chr. 18, 15. 1 K. 22, 
 16. Sept. eV dXTiSet as for fiJEX Job 9, 2. 
 So Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 36. Plato Apol. 20. d. 
 33. c. c) Meton. truthfulness, the love 
 and practice of truth, sincerity, faithfulness. 
 John 8, 44 bis, eV TT; aXrjSfiq ov% eorr/^ei/, 
 on OVK ttrnv uXTjSeta ev auT<5, lie abode not 
 in the truth (as a rule of duty), because 
 there is no love of truth in him. Rom. 3, 7 
 17 dX^eta TOU 2eo{) the truthfulness of God, 
 comp. v. 3. 4. Rom. 15, 8. 1 Cor. 5, 8. 
 2 Cor. 11, 10. Eph. 5, 9. Sept. for nox 
 Josh. 2, 14; njilBX Ps. 36, 5. SoEcclus! 
 7,20. 
 
 2. Spec, in N. T. divine truth, religious 
 truth, the faith and practice of the true reli 
 gion ; so called as proceeding from the true 
 God and declaring what is true of himself 
 and of his counsels and will. Thus a) In 
 respect to God ; John 1, 14. 17 rj \apis KOL 
 17 dXr^fta 8ia I. X. eyeVeTO, i. e. the grace 
 or love of God and the truth of God s being, 
 character, and will, as fully revealed in the 
 gospel ; see v. 18. Rom. 1, 18, comp. v. 19. 
 20 ; see in dStKt a b. Rom. 1. 25 T^V dX. TOU 
 3foO, the true being and character of God. 
 
 aX.r/ &evQ) 
 
 So dX^Seta of God 1 Esdr. 4, 33-41. b; 
 Of Christ ; John 14, 6 e ytu ft/xt 7} 68os KOI 
 fj d\. Kai 77 0177 / am the way and the truth 
 and the life, i. e. I am the way to the Father 
 as being the personal manifestation of the 
 truth and life which are in him ; comp. Heb. 
 10, 19. 20. c) Of the Spirit; John 14, 17 
 TO m>Vfj.a Trjs dXriSetay the Spirit of truth, i. e. 
 the Spirit of God, which itself is truth, and 
 reveals all truth and guides believers into it. 
 John 15, 26. 16, 13 bis, TO rrvevfui TTJS dX. 
 oSriyrjcrfi u/iay els Trdcrav TTJV dXr;3eiai>. 1 
 John 4, 6. 5, 6. d) Of the truth shadowed 
 forth in the Mosaic dispensation, i. e. 77 p.6p- 
 (pcoo ts . . . TTJS dXri3et a s fv TOJ i>dp,a) Rom. 2, 
 20. e) Of the truth of God as revealed in 
 the gospel, gospel truth, as opp. to heathen 
 and Jewish fables ; John 8, 32 bis, /cat yi/co- 
 creo~3e TTJV dX. Kai 77 dX. eXeu3epa>o~ei vfids. 
 V. 40 TTJV dX. v[uv XeXuXri/ca. 771* rJKOvcra Trapa 
 TOU 3eou. V. 45. 46. 17, 17 bis, ayiatrov au- 
 Touy fv TTJ d\rfiflq crou * 6 Xoyos 6 o~oy dkrj- 
 Seta ecTTt, sanctify (and consecrate) them in 
 thy truth, in and through their relation to 
 thy truth as believers and preachers, see v. 
 18. John 17, 19. 18, 37 bis. 38 ri eariv 
 d\t)%fia what is truth 1 referring to religious 
 truth. Rom. 2, 8. 2 Cor. 4, 2. 13, 8 bis. 
 Gal. [3, 1.] 5, 7. Eph. 4, 21. 24 h... 
 ocnoTTjTi TTJS dXrj^eias in . . . holiness of the 
 truth, such as the gospel requires and im 
 parts. Eph. 6, 14. 2 Thess. 2, 10. 12. 13. 
 
 1 Tim. 2, 4. 7 ult. 3, 15. 4, 3. 6, 5. 2 Tim. 
 
 2, 18. 25. 3, 7. 8. 4, 4. Tit. 1, 1. 14. 
 Heb. 10, 26. James 3, 14. 1 Pet. 1, 22. 
 
 2 Pet. 1,12. 2, 2. 1 John 1,8. 2, 4. 21 bis. 
 
 3, 19. 2 John 1 bis. 2. 3. 3 John 1. 8. 12 
 UTT avTTJs Trjs dXr^Set aj by the truth itself, 
 personified. So 77 dXT^Seta TOU euayyeXtou 
 the truth of the gospel as fully understood 
 and received, Gal. 2, 5. 14. Col. 1, 5 ; o Xo- 
 yo? TTJS dXrj^fiaf the word of the truth, the 
 doctrine and preaching of the gospel, Eph. 
 1,13. Col. 1, 5. 2 Tim. 2, 15 ; Xoyo? dXr;- 
 3eia? id. 2 Cor. 6,7. James 1, 18. So Heb. 
 r 5 -i! , Sept. dX7j3aa, the true religion, Ps. 
 25, 5. 26, 3. 86, 11. Dan. 9, 13. f) Of 
 practical truth, a life and conduct conformed 
 to the truth of the gospel ; John 3, 21 6 6V 
 TTOIWV Trjv d\rj%fiav but he that doeth the truth 
 practises it, lives according to it ; opp. o 
 (pauXa 7rpao-o-a>i/ in v. 20. 1 John 1, 6. 1 
 Cor. 13, 6 opp. 77 dSt/ct a. James 5, 19. 2 John 
 
 4, 3 John 3 bis. 4. So Sept. for njsrax, 
 opp. dSiKi a, Ps. 119, 30 ; d n Prov. 28, 6. 
 
 a), f. tuo-w, (0X77317?.) to be truth 
 ful, to deal truthfully, in word and deed, 
 Eph. 4, 15 ; c. dat. to or with any one Gal 
 
30 
 
 aX.ievo) 
 
 4, 16. Sept. for rw nn Gen. 42, 16. Sept. 
 Prov. 21, 3. Plut. de cap. ex inimic. Util. 
 4. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 36. Comp. Plato De- 
 mod. 383 C, TroTfpov aXr/ Sfvei, f) ^euSerai. 
 
 aXtfzirjS, eos, ovs, 6, 77, adj. (a priv. 
 \i73co,) pr. unconcealed, open ; hence true, 
 real, opp. to false, unreal. 
 
 1. Genr. true, conformed to the nature 
 and reality of things, e. g. a) Of what is 
 true in itself, opp. to what is mere appear 
 ance ; Acts 12, 9 OVK j/Sei, on dXijSes tan 
 TO yivoptvov. So Plato Phasdr. 69. b, dX?;- 
 3i)y aperf]. b) Of what is spoken, de 
 clared, testified, etc. John 4, 18 TOVTO 
 dXrjZfs f iprjKas. 10, 41. 19, 35; so of a 
 proverb 2 Pet. 2, 22. Of testimony, 17 pap- 
 Tvpia, John 5, 32. 8, 14. 21,24. Tit. 1,13. 
 3 John 1 2 ; and hence of what is to be re 
 ceived as true, valid, credible, John 5, 31. 8, 
 13.17. Sept. for fiJSX Deut. 17,4. So Xen. 
 OZc. 8. 21. c) Meton. truthful, loving and 
 practising the truth, sincere, faithful ; Matt. 
 22, 16. Mark 12, 14. 2 Cor. 6, 8 coy wXaz/ot, 
 s. So Plato Hipp. min. 368. e. 
 
 2. Spec, in N. T. true in a religious 
 sense, conformed to the being and charac 
 ter of the true God, and to the faith and 
 practice of the true religion, a) Of God 
 and his gifts, e. g. 17 x^P ls rov % eov 1 Pet. 
 5, 12 ; also truthful, faithful to his word 
 and promises, John 3, 33. 8, 26. Rom. 3, 
 
 4. So Wisd. 1,6. b) Of Christ and his 
 decisions ; John 8, 16 77 Kplo-is 77 e^u) dAr^s 
 ioriv, opp. KOTO rrjv o~dpKa in v. 15; so of 
 liis anointing or teaching 1 John 2, 27 ; of his 
 oody as the true bread of life, John 6, 55 bis, 
 Lachm. c) In relation to the gospel and 
 its truth ; Phil. 4, 8 Sera ea-riv 0X772177, i. e. 
 conformed to the truth of the gospel. So 
 fvro\r) Kmvr) 1 John 2, 8. d) Of a person 
 whose conduct is thus conformed ; John 7, 
 18 OVTOS dXv Srjs ecrri, KOI dSiKt a ev avrca OVK 
 fvriv. Sept. for tlBX 2 Chr. 31, 20 ; p"HS 
 Is. 41, 26. 
 
 a\i7.Swo9, ,}, dV, (dX^y.) true, real; 
 opp. to false, unreal. 
 
 1. Genr. true, as conformed to the na 
 ture and reality of things, not false ; so 6 
 Xo yoy John 4, 37 ; ot Xo -yoi Rev. 19, 9. 21, 
 
 5. 22, 6; 77 paprvpia John 19, 35. Sept. 
 Xo yoy dX. for HX 1 K. 10, 6. Dan. 10, 1. 
 Ml V. H. 2. 3." Plato Rep. 522. a, \6yos 
 dKrj^ivos- 
 
 2. Spec, in N. T. true in a religious 
 sense, conformed to the being and charac 
 ter of the true God, and to the faith and 
 practice of the true religion ; e. g. a) Of 
 God, John 7, 28 eo-riv dXy^ivos 
 
 /jLf. 17, 3 TOI> /Jiovov u\T)%iv6v 3eoV. 1 Thess. 
 
 1, 9. [Heb. 9, 14.] 1 John 5, 20 ter. Rev. 
 6, 10. So of God s ways, at 6Sot Rev. 15, 
 3 ; his judgments, at Kpiaeis Rev. 16, 7. 
 
 19, 2. Sept. 6 3foj 6 dXjjSii/o? for "JEX x 
 Is. 65, 16 ; also Kpio-is dX. for "J^X I s - 
 59, 4. b) Of Christ, the Messiah, Rev. 3, 
 7.14. 19,11; of his decisions [John 8, 16]. 
 Trop. as ro <p>s TO d\n^ivov John 1,9; 
 also 77 afj.7Tf\os 77 aXrfiivi] John 15, 1 ; comp. 
 Jer. 2, 21. c) In relation to the gospel, 
 true as being conformed to the gospel and 
 its truth; so Luke 16, 11 ro dXjj^ivov 
 the true good, opp. to this world s goods. 
 Trop. ro </>&> ro dXrj^tvov the true light of 
 the gospel 1 John 2, 8 ; 6 apTos TOV ovpa- 
 vov the true bread from heaven, opp. to the 
 manna, John 6, 32 ; 77 o-KTivr) 77 dX^iv-f] Heb. 
 
 8, 2, and ra ayta ra d\r)%ivd 9, 24, the trite 
 tabernacle or sanctuary in heaven, from 
 which those on earth were copied ; comp. 
 Heb. 8, 5. Rev. 11, 19. 15, 5; also Wisd. 
 
 9, 8. Ecclus. 24, 8-12. d) Of persons, 
 whose heart and life are conformed to the 
 gospel truth, true, sincere, faithful ; e. g. 
 John 4, 23 ot dXtySiPoi Trpoa-KvvrjTai, comp. 
 in dXfofia no. 1. a. So of the heart, Heb. 
 
 10, 22. 
 
 aXrj^o), f. 0X770-0), a later pres. form for 
 Att. d\eco, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 151 ; to grind, 
 with a hand-mill, absol. Matt. 24, 41. Luke 
 17,35. Sept. for l^a Judg. 16, 21. Ecc. 
 12, 3. So Diod. Sic. 3. 13. The grinding 
 in the ea?t was mostly done by female 
 slaves : see Ex. 11, 5. Bibl. Res. in Palest. 
 
 11, p. 181. 
 
 a\?/^-ft)9, adv. (0X77377?,) truly, in very 
 truth, i. e. really, in very deed ; John 1, 48 
 t Se, dX7i3ws lo-pajiA/rTis. 4, 42. 6, 14. 55 
 bis. [7, 26 dX. 6 Xp.] 7, 40. 8, 31. 1 Thess. 
 
 2, 13. 1 John 2, 5. Sept. for fWBX Gen. 
 
 20, 12. So Hdian. 8. 3. 21. p lato Rep. 
 490. d. Hence truly, certainly, in very 
 truth; John 7, 26 dXrj^iws fyvaxrav. 17, 8. 
 Acts 12, 11. Emphat. before a declaration, 
 truly, of a truth, verily, Matt. 14,33. 26,73. 
 27, 54. Mark 14, 70. 15, 39; with Xeyw, 
 Luke 9, 27. 12, 44. 21, 3. Sept. for ia 
 Jer. 28, 6. 
 
 a\lVS, ecos, o, (oXr, oXtos,) a fisher, 
 fisherman, Luke 5, 2 ; trop. Matt. 4, 18. 19. 
 Mark 1, 16. 17. Sept. for ^ Jer. 16, 16 ; 
 M^ Ez. 47, 11. Plut. M. Anton. 29. Xen. 
 OZc. 16. 7. 
 
 a\tVCi), f. euo-o), (aXtfuj,) to fish, absol. 
 John 21, 3. Sept. for AW Jer. 16, 16. 
 Luc. Piscat. 47. Plut. M. Anton. 29. 
 
31 a\\d 
 
 d\/o>, f. iVw, (aX? ; ) to salt, to sprinkle 
 or season with salt; only Pass. Matt. 5, 13 
 iv rivi Xio-3r;o-fTai, wherewith shall it (the 
 salt) be sailed, i. e. recovered, made salt 
 again ; comp. Mark 9, 50. Trop. Mark 9, 
 49 bis, TTUS yap Trvpl aXicrStjcrfTai, KOL Tracra 
 Sucri a dXi aXia^rja-fTai, for every one shall 
 be sailed with fire, and every sacrifice shall 
 be Called with salt. Since aXio^a-erai ex 
 presses only a salting or seasoning in order 
 to preserve and make better, it follows that 
 TO irvp cannot here be the fire of eternal 
 punishment as in vv. 43-48, but rather the 
 purifying fire of the trials and conflicts of 
 the Christian life, including the self-denial 
 required in vv. 43-48; comp. 1 Pet. 1, 7. 
 Is. 10, 16. 17; and iras therefore stands for 
 every one who is approved, every Christian. 
 Hence we may paraphrase thus : Every be 
 liever shall be salted, seasoned, made accept 
 able to God, with the fire of conflict and 
 trial ; and every sacrifice, every one who 
 consecrates himself, shall he salted with the 
 salt of wisdom from above ; see in a\as. 
 The last clause is quoted from Lev. 2, 13, 
 where Sept. pr. for nbEFi nb_B3 . 
 
 a\l(7yrjfj,a, arcs, TO, (dXio-yew,) a pol 
 lution, an abomination, any thing polluted, 
 abominable; once Acts 15, 20 row (nre xe- 
 (T~ai emit TOW dXto-y?7/*dra>i/ ru>v fl8<b\u>v, 
 i. q. fiSwXoSura in v. 29 ; i. e. the flesh of 
 victims offered to idols, which remained over 
 and was eaten by the worshippers, or was 
 sometimes sold in the markets ; see Horn. 
 Od. 3. 470. Theophr. Char. 10. 1 Cor. 10, 
 25. Potter s Gr. Ant. I. p. 232 sq. Diet, of 
 Antt. art. Sacriftcium. To partake of this 
 knowingly was unlawful to the Jews, and 
 was prohibited to Christians; Ps. 106, 28. 
 Acts 15, 29. 1 Cor. 10, 20 sq. Rev. 2, 14. 
 Lightfoot and Schottgen Hor. Heb. ad 1 
 Cor. c. 8. Hesych. dXryj^tdra>v rfjs p.f- 
 raXTj^fco? ru)v fj.iapa>v Svcrtwi/. Not found 
 elsewhere. The verb 0X107/0) is found 
 only in Sept. for ^X? Dan. 1, 8. Mai. 1, 7. 
 12 ; also Ecclus. 40, 29. 
 
 ttXXa, part, adversative, but ; pr. for 
 a\\a. netit. plur. of aXXoy, and serving to 
 introduce a clause or sentence expressing 
 something else. According to the nature 
 of the preceding clause, dXXd marks either 
 the direct contrary and opposite of that 
 clause, as after a negative ; or it indicates 
 only something, different from what the first 
 clause expresses, and thus serves to modify 
 or limit it. See Buttm. *149. 16. Kiihner 
 1 322. 6. Id. Ausf. Gr. { 741. Rarely found 
 in Sept. 
 
 1. After a negat. clause it marks the 
 contrary, but, but on -the contrary, Germ. 
 sondern. Once with rovvavriov added, Gal. 
 2, 7 fpol ol ftoKovvrts ovdev TrpocravtSfvio, 
 dXXo TOVVO.VTIOV iSoires KT\. 
 
 a) Genr. Matt. 5, 17 OVK rjX^ov /caraXO- 
 crat, dXXa TrXqpwo-ai. V. 39. 7, 21. 10, 20. 
 34. Mark 9, 8. 37. 10,8. 13, 11. Luke 
 20, 38. John 3, 15. 36. 10,18. 11, 51. Acts 
 5, 4. Rom. 2, 13. 29. 1 Cor. 2, 4. 5. 2 Cor. 
 2, 4. 3, 3. Heb. 9, 24. al. saepiss. (Plato 
 Gorg. 452. e, ov% at>ro>, dXXa aw. Xen. Hi. 
 
 I. 8 ov% OVTCOS x ravra, dXX KrX.) Some 
 times in the clause after dXXd there is a 
 species of anacoluthon, e. g. in Paul s writ 
 ings where he introduces a scriptural quo 
 tation, as Rom. 15, 3 Kal 6 Xp. ovx eaimp 
 
 , dXXd, Ka%u>s yeypanrai oi opetdttr/xoi 
 . v. 21. 1 Cor. 2, 9 ; see Winer { 64. 
 
 II. 2. d, ult. In other cases the verb after 
 dXXd is to be supplied ; Matt. 20, 23 OVK 
 fcmv e/ioi dovvai, dXX ois rjToifj.ao-rai KT\. 
 supply SoSiTjo-erat. Mark 10, 40. John 1, 8. 
 9, 3. Eph. 4, 29. Sometimes the idea to 
 be supplied is the opposite of that in the 
 first clause ; 1 Cor. 7, 19 17 irepirop.}] oi6Vi> 
 fart . . . dXXa TrjpTjcris evroXStv 3eoC sc. eorf 
 Tt. See Winer 66. 1. The negative of 
 the preceding clause may be expressed by 
 an interrogative implying negation ; e. g. 
 John 7, 48. 49 p.rj ns (K ratv apxavrcov eVt- 
 crTfvcrfv fls avTov ; . . . dXX 6 6 ^Xos oSros 
 KT\. 1 Cor. 10, 19. 20 ; so too Luke 17, 7. 
 8, where dXXd is followed by an interroga 
 tion implying an affirmative. 
 
 b) Emphat. when preceded by ou povov, 
 so that oi povov . . . dXXd, not only . . . but, 
 marks gradation ; John 11,52 Kal ov% vnep 
 ToC eSfoCy /J.6vov, dXX Iva Kal KT\. 12, 9. 
 Acts 19, 26. 1 John 5, 6 ; with TroXXw /zdX- 
 \ov added Phil. 2, 12. (So without Kal, 
 Hdian. 3. 4. 19. Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 2. Plato 
 Phffidr. 228. a, ov fiovov a7ra . . . dXXu TroX- 
 \UKIS.) In like manner with Kal, e. g. ov 
 \iovov . . . dXXu Kat, not only . . . but also, 
 Matt. 21, 21. John 5, 18. Rom. 1, 32. 5, 11. 
 8, 23. 9, 10. 2 Cor. 7, 7. 8, 10. 19. 9, 12. 
 Phil. 2, 27. 2 Tim. 4, 8. 1 John 2, 2. So 
 Luc. D. Deor. 6. 3. Plato Gorg. 449. 6- 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 17. See in no. 3. c, 
 
 2. After a clause not negative, dXXu is 
 i. q. but, Germ, aber, and marks something 
 different, but not contrary ; implying a mo 
 dification or limitation of what the first 
 clause expresses, or a transition to some 
 thing else. See Kiihner 322. 6. Ausf. Gr. 
 741. 3. 
 
 a) Genr. as modifying, limiting, etc. Matt. 
 24, 6 8d yap irdvra yfvtcr Sai, XX 
 
32 
 
 tori TO TeXos. Mark 11, 32. 13,20. 14,28. 
 John 10, 8. 11, 42. 16, 20. Acts 7,48. 
 Rom. 4,2. 5,14.15. 10, 16 comp. v. 11-13. 
 1 Cor. 6, 12. Phil. 3, 7 comp. v. 5. 6. Heb. 
 4, 2. 1 Pet. 3, 14. al. sae piss. So in a pa 
 renthetic clause ; Rev. 2, 9 otSd aov . . . T^V 
 rrTa>xfLav (aXXa TT\OVO~IOS ft) Kai TIJV KT\. 
 Sometimes fj.ev stands in the first clause 
 and serves to prepare the antithesis ; Acts 
 
 4, 17 comp. 16. Rom. 14, 20 Trdvra p.ev Ka- 
 3a/ad, dXXa KT\. 1 Cor. 14, 17. So Luc. 
 D. Dear. 8 pen. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 16. Plato 
 Gorg. 448. d. Sometimes a word or phrase 
 drawn from the context is to be supplied 
 after dXXd, e. g. Mark 14, 49 dXX [TOVTO 
 yeyovev] Iva Tr\T)pa>%5>o-iv al ypafpai, comp. 
 Matt. 26, 56. Also John 13, 18. 14, 31. 
 15, 25. 1 John 2, 19 dXX [e JHJUOV t&\- 
 3oi/] iva KT\. The repetition of dXXd serves 
 for emphasis, 1 Cor. 6, 1 1 ; comp. Xen. An. 
 1. 3. 3. Winer 67. 2. b. For dXXd com 
 bined with other particles, see no. 3. 
 
 b) Spec, and frequently dXXd is employed 
 m abrupt transitions, where the discourse 
 or train of thought is interrupted or partially 
 broken off; see Winer 57. 4. Kiihn. 619. 
 
 5. Thus a) By an objection ; 1 Cor. 
 
 15, 35 dXX epel TIS. Rom. 10, 18. 19. So 
 Sept. Job 11, 5. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 11. /3) 
 By a correction of what precedes ; Mark 
 14, 36 TrapeveyKe TO TTOTrjptov drr ep.ov TOVTO 
 dXX ov Tt f yw 3/Xw. 2 Cor. 11, 1. Heb. 3, 
 
 16. See in lett. a. y) By an interroga 
 tion in like manner corrective ; Matt. 11,8. 
 9 TI f ^X3f Tf f Is fprj/jLov SfdcracrSat ; . . dXXa 
 Tt . . dXXa Tt KT\. Luke 7, 24. 25. 17, 8. 
 Heb. 3, 16. 8) By a phrase of incitement 
 or command, with the imperat. Acts 10, 20 
 dXXa dvao-rds Kcmz/S^St *TX. 26, 16. Matt. 
 9, 18. Mark 9, 22. 16, 7. Luke 7, 7. 22, 36. 
 So Sept. Job 12, 7. Xen. Cyr. 5. 5. 24 dXXa 
 Xt yf . An. 2. 3. 4. f) By an appeal to God 
 as the source of truth ; John 8, 26. 
 
 c) Genr. as marking transition to some 
 thing else, viz. a) Where something is 
 said to be or to be done notwithstanding 
 what precedes, but, yet, nevertheless. Mark 
 14, 28 dXXa /LtfTa TO eyep^vai p.f 7rpoda> 
 vfjidt els TTJV raXtXaiav, comp. v. 27 ; see 
 also Matt. 26, 32 where it is 8c. John 16, 7. 
 Acts 20, 24. 1 Cor. 4,4. 9,12. 10,5. 2 Cor. 
 13, 4. So Sept. Job 36, 10. /3) In an 
 antithetic clause expressing something ad 
 ditional, but, but now, but further. Mark 13, 
 24 dXX ev CKfivtus Tals rjfiepais ... 6 ijXios 
 o-KOTKr Srjo-fTai. Luke 6,27. 11,42. John 
 6,36.64. Gal. 2, 14. Eph. 5, 24. al. So 
 Jos. Ant. 5. 10. 4 dXXa o~rj/j.aive Tvpos avTov. 
 y) Emphat. like dXXa Kai, where there is a 
 
 gradation in the sense, but still more yea. 
 even ; see in no. 3. c. John 1 6, 2 aTroa-vva- 
 ya>yovs Trotrjcrova-iv vfias dXX ep^erat &pa 
 KT\. 2 Cor. 1,9. 7, 11 where the repetition 
 is intensive. 
 
 d) After conditional clauses with ft, e dv, 
 the apodosis is sometimes introduced by 
 dXXd, implying strong antithesis, yet, never 
 theless, yet at least ; Mark 14, 29 *cai ft TTUV- 
 TS o-Kai>8a\Kr%t]croi>Tai, dXX OVK tyu>. 1 Cor. 
 4,15 t dv yap pvpiovs TraiSayooyovs %X eTe 
 dXX ov KT\. 8, 6. 2 Cor. 4, 16. 5, 16. 11,6. 
 Col. 2, 5. Xen. Cyr. 5. 5. 33 /u) ravra, 
 dXXa TotaOra. An. 7. 7. 43. 
 
 3. Joined with other particles, viz. 
 
 a) dXXd yf or dXXdyf, found twice 
 in N. T. a) Implying modification or limi 
 tation, but indeed; see no. 2. a. Luke 24, 
 
 21. So Plato Phaed. 58. d, dXXa <rxo\dfa 
 ye. /3) After a conditional clause with ft, 
 yet at least, yet surely; see in no. 2. d. 1 
 Cor. 9, 2 ft XXoty OVK elfu aTrocrroXos , dX- 
 Xdyf vfj.1i> ft/it. So Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 6 ft 
 TOIVVV ovro) yiyvuHrKfLs, dXXa Kpea yf f uco^oC. 
 In Gr. writers dXXd and yf are usually 
 thus separated by one or more words ; Wi 
 ner ^ 65. 5. 
 
 b) dXX T), only after a negative clause, 
 other than, except, unless ; pr. for oXXo rj, 
 Winer 57. 4. a. note. Buttm. 150, 13. 
 Kiihn. j 619. 3. Ausf. Gr. 751. 5. Found 
 thrice in N. T. Luke 12, 51 ov^t, X/yco 
 ifuv, dXX i) 8ta/xfpto-/idv. [1 Cor. 3, 5.] 
 2 Cor. 1,13 ov yap aXXa ypd<pofj.fi> vfuv, 
 XX T) a dvayivd><TK(Tf rf KOI fViyti cocrKerf, 
 i. e. other than what ye read or also acknow 
 ledge. I Mace. 9, 6. Xen. An. 7. 7. 53 
 dpyvpiov fJ,V OVK e x<, dXX ?/ piKpov TI. 
 
 c) dXXa at, but also. a) After a 
 negative clause, as ou /JLOVOV . . . dXXa at, not 
 only ...but also, see above in no. 1 . b. Once 
 after uiy, Phil. 2, 4. /3) Without a preced 
 ing negative, and marking gradation, but 
 also, yea also, yea even ; see in no. 2. c. 
 Luke 12, 7 dXXa KOL al Tpi^es TIJS Kf<p. vfj.S) 
 Tracrai rjpl^^vTai. 16, 21. 24, 22. John 11 
 
 22. Phil. 1, 18. (Luc. D. Deor. 3. ]. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 7. 9.) Once after a conditional 
 clause with , see no. 2. d. Rom. 6, 5. 
 
 d) dXXa fjitv ovv, emphat. yea there- 
 fore, yea indeed ; see no. 2. c. y. Once Phil. 
 3, 8 dXXa fj.fi> ovv /cat f)yovp.ai KT\. yea as 
 suredly, and I count all things, etc. 
 
 e) dXX ov8e, but not even, but neither, 
 after a negative clause, and marking grada 
 tion; Luke 23, 15 dXX ov8e Hpcofyr, but nol 
 even Herod. 1 Cor. 3,2. 4,3. Where a pre 
 ceding negative is implied ; Acts 1 9, 2 dXX 
 ovde ft TTvev/jia dyiov e crri aKovtrap-fv. GaJ 
 

 2, 3. So Jos. B. J. 4. 2. 3. Xen. Mem. 
 
 2. 3. 8. OVK av 8vvaifj.rjv OVT (Z \tytiv, OVT fv 
 noiflv. oXX ovde Treipdvo/iai. -f- 
 
 aAAa<jcr&> v. -TT&>, f. a|o>, (aXAoj,) to 
 make otherwise, to aHer, to change, c. ace. 
 e. g. TTJV (pcovtjv Gal. 4, 20 ; ra <3i; ffte cus 
 toms, to do them away, Acts 6, 14. Sept. 
 for T|Eri J er . 13, 23. So Diod. Sic. 1. 73. 
 Plato Rep. 380. d. Pass, to Is changed, 
 either for the better 1 Cor. 15, 51. 52; or 
 for the worse, as oi ovpavoi, to grow old 
 and pass away, Heb. 1, 12, quoted from 
 Ps. 102, 27 where Sept. for fi^n ; oomp. 
 Is. 51 , 6. So Act. Wisd. 4,11. Luc. lX Deor. 
 4. 1. Also to change one thing for another, 
 to exchange; with iv, Rorn. 1, 23 rf\\aj-av 
 TTJV 8ut-av Sfov ev 6p.oiap.aTi KT\. they chang 
 ed the glory of God for the likeness, etc. 
 quoted from Ps. 106, 20, where Sept. for 
 So c. ev Soph. Antig. 945. 
 
 , adv. (uXXoy), from else 
 where, another way, John 10, 1. Sept. 
 Alex. Esth. 4, 14. JE\. V. H. 6. 2. Plut. 
 Fab. M. 6. 
 
 0\\r)jOpeo), . f. jjo-co, (d\\6s, dyo- 
 pev<a, ) to allegorize, Pass. Gal. 4, 24 arivd 
 fcrnv d\\r/yopovp.fva, ichich things are alle 
 gorized, spoken allegorically, i. e. may be 
 taken or used as an allegory. Jos. Ant. 
 Proem. 4. Clem. Alex. Protr. 1 1 ofpis d\\n- 
 yopdrai fjoovrj eirl yoortpa epirovtra. Plut. 
 de Is. et Osir. 32. Id. Tit. Horn. 96. 
 
 a\\ri\.ovia, indec. alleluia, Heb. ~^?1 
 n^ hallelujah, praise ye Jehovah, Rev. 19, 1. 
 
 3. 4. 6. Comp. Ps. 104, 35. Tob. 13, 18. 
 a\\?/\ft)v, Gen. plur. of the recipr. pro 
 noun ; Dat. ois, ais, ois , Accus. ovs, as, a , 
 each other, one another, Matt. 24, 10. John 
 15, 12. 17. al. SEE p. Buttm. 5 74. 4. Xen. 
 (Ec. 8. 13. + 
 
 aXXoyei/7/9, e os, ovs, 6, f], adj. (oXXor, 
 ytvos,) of another race or nation, a stranger, 
 not a Jew, Luke 17,18, comp. v. 16. Sept. 
 for it Ex.29, 33; 133-13 Ex - 12 > 43 - Is - 5 6, 
 3. 6. 1 Mace. 3, 36. 46! 
 
 aXXo/wit, f. aXovjuat, Mid. depon. aor. 1 
 fj\dfjL^v, Buttm. j 114, to leap, to spring, 
 intrans. Acts 3, 8. 14, 10. Sept. for ifeq 
 Job 6, 10 ; nbs 1 Sam. 10, 10. (Wisd . 
 5, 21. Plut. M. Crass. 31. Xen. Anab. 5. 
 9. 5.) Spoken of a fountain, John 4, 14 ; 
 so Lat. salio, Virg. Eel. 5. 47. 
 
 a\Xo?, 77, o, other, not the same ; used 
 with or without the article ; Buttm. { 127. 
 10. 
 
 1. Without the article, other, another, 
 some other, a) Simply, Matt. 2, 12 6Y oX- 
 3 
 
 Xqy ooov. 13, 33. 26, 71. 27, 42. Gal. 1, 7. 
 al. sacpiss. Olher, another of the same 
 kind, Mark 7, 4. 8. John 21, 25; another 
 besides, Matt. 25, 16. 17. Mark 12, 32. 15, 
 41. John 6, 22. 14, 16 aXkov TrapdK\r)Tov. 
 So as marking succession, i. e. in the sec 
 ond or third place, Mark 12, 4. 5. Rev. 12, 
 
 3. 13, 11. John 20, 30 TroXXa p.ev ovv (cat 
 nXXa many truly and other things, i. e. many 
 other also, not only these but also others ; 
 for this /cat see Herm. ad Viger. p. 835. 
 Sept. mostly for "inx , as Gen. 41, 3. Num. 
 23, 13. 1 K. 13, 10. So Hdian. 8. 5. 13. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 15. b) Distributively, 
 when repeated or joined with other pro 
 nouns ; e. g. OVTOS . . . aXXoy, this . . . that, 
 one . . . another, Matt. 8, 9 ; of pcv . . . aXXot 
 6V, some... others, Matt. 16,14; XXot... 
 aXXot, some ... others, Matt. 13, 5-8. Mark 
 
 4, 7. 8. 6, 15. 8, 28. 1 Cor. 12, 8. 9. 10. 
 So Acts 2, 12 aXXoy Trpos oXXov one to an 
 other. Acts 19, 32 and 21, 34 aXXot p.ev 
 ovv aXXo TI epKafrv, some cried one thing 
 and some another. Xen. An. 2. 1. 15 aXXoy 
 aXXa Xf-yft. Wisd. 18, 18 aXXoy cXXo^f). 
 
 2. With the article, 6 aXXor, the other, 
 Matt. 5, 39. 10, 23. 12, 13. John 18, 15. 
 16. al. saep. Rev. 17, 10 6 nXXor, the other, 
 the remaining one. So ot aXXot, the others, 
 the rest, 1 Cor. 14, 29. John 21, 8. al. seep. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 4. + 
 
 d\\OTptoe7rl(TK07ro$, 6nov, 6, (dXXd- 
 rpios, firia-KOTTos,) found only in N. T. once 
 1 Pet. 4, 15, pr. i. q. aXXoTptcov eVt cncoTros, 
 an overseer of other men s matters, perh. an 
 indiscreet zealot against heathen manners 
 and customs. 
 
 t a, tov, (aXXor,) anotlier s, 
 belonging to another; so of things Luke 
 16, 12. Rom. 14, 4. 15, 20. 2 Cor. 10, 15. 
 16. 1 Tim. 5, 22. Heb. 9, 25. Sept. for 
 in Hos. 8, 12. So ^1. V. H. 6. 1. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 1. 39. In the sense of strange, 
 foreign, e. g. a land, yrj, Acts 7, 6. Heb. 11, 
 9. Sept. for nsa Ex. 2, 22. 18, 3. Ecclus. 
 39, 4. Of persons not belonging to one s 
 family or country, a stranger, foreigner, 
 John 10, 5 bis. Matt. 17, 25. 26. Sept. for 
 iris Ps. 49, 11 ; 133 1 K. 8, 41. 43. 1 
 Mace. 15, 33. Once of foreign enemies, 
 gentiles, Heb. 11, 34. So Sept. for it I s . 
 1, 7. Adj. hostile Pol. 28, 4. 4 Xen. An 
 3. 5. 5. 
 
 ov, 6, f), adj. (XXoy, < 
 one of another race or nation, a foreigner, 
 stranger, not a Jew, Acts 10, 28. Sept. for 
 1D5",3 Is. 61, 5; "HM Is. 2, 6. 2 Mace 
 10,2. Plut. J. Caes. 56. Plato Legg. 629. d. 
 
34 
 
 a XX&>9, adv. (uXXos,) otlierwise ; 1 Tim. 
 5, 25 KOI TO (f pya) a XXcos f^ovra, and those 
 works rtatf are otherwise, i. e. not *aXa ep-ya. 
 Sept. Job 11, 12. Dem. 1466. 5. Xen. 
 An. 3. 2. 37. 
 
 ao), w, f. ijcra, (dXan/,) to irea<Z out 
 grain sc. by driving cattle round and round 
 upon the threshing-floor, to thresh with cat 
 tle ; spoken of the animal, absol. 1 Cor. 9, 
 9 and 1 Tim. 5, 18, quoted from Deut. 25, 
 4 where Sept. for liJ" 1 ^ . Also of the per 
 son, absol. 1 Cor. 9, 10 ; Sept. for tiW Is. 
 41, 15. For the modes of treading out 
 grain in Palestine, see Bibl. Res. in Palest. 
 II. p. 277, 371. III. p. 143, Xen. CEc. 18. 
 2, 3 ; comp. Schol. in Aristoph. Thesm. 2. 
 aXo<yo9, ov, 6, ^, adj. (a priv. Xoyo?,) 
 without reason, i. e. 
 
 1. irrational, brute, 2 Pet. 2, 12. Jude 10 
 aXoya 2>a. Wisd. 11, 15. Plut. Symp. 7. 
 5. 2. Xen. Hi. 7. 3. 
 
 2. unreasonable, absurd; Acts 25, 27 
 a\oyov yap pot ooKfl. Pol. 3. 15. 9. Xen. 
 Ag^ll.^1. 
 
 a\or), fjs, f), aloe, aloe-wood, once John 
 19, 39; i. q. Heb. BibttX Num. 24, 6 and 
 rnbnK p s . 45, 9 ; in Gr. writers dyaXhoxov 
 and later v\a\or). It is the name of a 
 ;ree, excozcaria agallochon Linn, growing in 
 India and other oriental regions ; the wood 
 of which is highly aromatic and is greatly 
 prized as a perfume. It is of course en 
 tirely different from the aloes of the shops. 
 See Dioscor. 1. 21. Celsius Hierobot. I. p. 
 168. Rosenm. Bibl. Alterthumsk. IV. i. p. 
 225-228. 
 
 X9, dXo y, 6, salt, once Mark 9, 49 ; see 
 in dXi o>, comp. S\as. Sept. for ri<a Lev. 
 2, 13. Plut. Symp. 5. 10. 1. Hdot. 4. 181, 
 183. 
 
 aXf#09, T], 6v, (oXf,) adj. salt, briny, 
 e. g. water, James 3, 12. Sept. for Fibs 
 Num. 34, 3. 12. Plut. Quaest. natural. 5. 
 Plato Tim. 65. e. 
 
 aXu7T09, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a priv. XVTH;,) 
 without sorrow ; Phil. 2, 28 Kay<a dXvTrore- 
 pos 2> and that I may be the less sorrowful. 
 Luc. D. Mort. 20. 4. Plato Ax. 372. a, 
 
 a\V<Tl?, ews, 17, (a priv. Xveo,) pr. aXv- 
 <TIS, Schafer ad Greg. Cor. p. 523 ; a chain, 
 Rev. 20, 1. Acts 21, 33. So Luc. Hist. 
 conscr. 55. Xen. Eq. 10. 9. Spec, for 
 binding prisoners, Mark 5, 3. 4 bis. Luke 8, 
 29. (Pol. 3. 82. 8. Dem. 778. 20.) In 
 Acts 28, 20, comp. v. 16, it refers to the 
 chain by which a prisoner was bound to a 
 
 soldier ; sometimes also to two soldiers, 
 Acts 12, 6. 7 ; see Jos. Ant. 18. 6. 7. Diet 
 of Antt. art. Catena. Trop. bonds, impris 
 onment, state of custody, Eph. 6, 20. 2 Tim. 
 1, 16; comp. Wisd. 17, 17. 
 
 aXu<TTeX?79, eos, ovs, 6, f], (a priv. Xv- 
 tnreXijy,) gainless, unprofitable, Xen. Vect 
 4. 6. In N. T. unprofitable, hurtful, 
 Heb. 13,17. So Pol. 3. 1 1 6. 1 3. Xen. Mem. 
 
 1, 7. 4. 
 
 4X(at09, at ov, 6, Alpheus, pr. n. of 
 two men in N. T. 
 
 1. The father of James the less, Matt. 
 10, 3. Mark 3, 18. Luke 6, 15. Acts 1, 13 ; 
 and husband of Mary the mother of James, 
 Matt. 27, 56. Mark 15, 40. Luke 24, 10; 
 who also was the sister of our Lord s mo 
 ther, John 19, 25. In this last passage the 
 husband of Mary is called KX&JTray, the two 
 names ( AXc^atoy and KXwray) being differ 
 ent modes of pronouncing in Greek the 
 Heb. name ^B^H . Matt, and Mark give it 
 without the aspirate, AX^aTos, as Sept. 
 Ayyaiosfor ""in Hag. 1, 1 ; while John ex 
 changes the n for the Gr. K, as Sept. in 
 (pacreK for HOB 2 Chr. 30, 1. 
 
 2. The father of Matthew or Levi, Mark 
 
 2, 14. 
 
 a\a)V, (ovos, f), a threshing-Jloor, area, 
 Sept. for T^ Gen. 50, 10. 11 ; in Gr. writers 
 usually 17 S\a>s, Dem. 1040. 23. Xen. CEc. 
 1 8. 6, 7, 8. In N. T. meton. the produce of 
 the threshing-floor, corn, grain, Matt. 3, 1 2. 
 Luke 3, 17. Sept. for T& Job 39, 12. Ruth 
 
 3, 2. See in dXoda. 
 
 aX<W7r?7f, (KOS, f], a fox, Matt. 8, 20 
 Luke 9, 58. Trop. of Herod Antipas, Luke 
 13, 32. Sept. for l>Si Judg. 15, 4. JEl 
 V. H. 1. 5. Xen. Ven. 3. 1 ; trop. Plut 
 Soil. 28. 
 
 f(os, f], (dXta-Kw,) a taking, cap 
 ture; 2 Pet. 2, 12 yfyfvr}jj.t va is aXwcrti/, 
 made for capture, to be taken, caught. 
 Aquil. for tfiU Job 24, 5. Of a city, 
 Hdian. 1.1.5. Plato Legg. 685. c. 
 
 apa, adv. (kindr. is a copul.) at one 
 time, at the same time, viz. 
 
 1. Genr. and simply, Acts 24, 26. 27, 
 40. Col. 4, 3. 1 Tim. 5, 13. Philem. 22. 
 So Pol. 3. 31. 2. Xen. An. 1. 8. 10. Of 
 persons doing any thing at the sariie time, 
 in company, i. e. together, alike; Rom. 3, 
 12 -rvavras ffK\wav, apa T]XP fl ^W av i ^ey 
 are together become unprofitable, all alike ; 
 quoted from Ps. 14, 3 where Sept for 
 
 "^H- 5 also Gen - 13 > 6 - 22 C. (Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 3. 10.) So a/net (rvv, together with, as 
 
35 
 
 S.UM. a-vv avTois 1 Thess. 4, 17. 5, 10. 
 Comp. Xen. Cyr. 8. 8. 12. 
 
 2. With dat. like a preposition, together 
 iri h, with, Buttm. \ 146. 3. Matt. 13, 29 
 urjTTOTf a/id aiirois eKpi^d><rr]T rov OTTOJ/. 
 Sept. for irn Deut. 33, 5 ; ^^1 Jer. 34, 
 
 24. So Jos. Ant. 5. 7. 4 a/*a yui/at^t /cai 
 TfKvois. Xen. Mag. Eq. 5. 13 a/x imrois. 
 Of time, Matt. 20, 1 e i)A3/ a/*a Trpan, with 
 <he dawn, at dawn. Comp. dp.a TJ/ ij/^epa 
 Mic. 2, 1. 1 Mace. 4, 6. Xen. An/4. 1. 5*; 
 aua eci) Jos. Ant. 6. 3. 5. 
 
 afJU&tf?, fos, our, 6, fj, adj. (a priv. pwftd- 
 i/a>.) unlearned, uninstructed, 2 Pet. 3, 16. 
 jEl. V. H. 2. 8. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 49. 
 
 apapdvrntOS, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. u.a- 
 paivopat, ) unfading, enduring, 1 Pet. 5, 4. 
 Philostr. Heroic. 19. Hesych. du.apdvri- 
 vov dtrrjirov. 
 
 dfj.dpavTOf, ov, 6, f], adj. (i. q. dpapdv- 
 TIVOS.) unfading, enduring, 1 Pet. 1, 4. 
 Wisd. 6, 12. 
 
 dfjiaprdva), f. du.aprrio-0) Buttm. 5112. 
 1 1 ; aor. 1 fjudprrjo-a, aor. 2 tfpaprov. The 
 forms dp.apTT]<r<a and f]p,aprr](Ta belong to 
 the later Greek ; the earlier fut. was d/xap- 
 Tijo-o^ai, Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 732. Buttm. 
 {114. Pr. to miss, to err front a mark or 
 way, Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 11. Horn. II. 8. 311. 
 In N. T. trop. and only in a moral or 
 religious sense, to err, to do wrong, to turn 
 away from the truth, i. e. genr. to sin, absol. 
 Matt. 27, 4. John 5, 14. 8, 11. 9,2. 3. 
 Rom. 2, 12 bis. 3, 23. 5, 12. 14. 16. 6, 15. 
 1 Cor. 7, 28 bis. 36. 15, 34. Eph. 4, 26. 
 1 Tim. 5, 20. Tit. 3, 11. Heb. 3, 17. 10, 
 26. 1 Pet. 2, 20. 2 Pet. 2, 4. 1 John 1, 10. 
 
 2, 1 bis. 3, 6 bis. 8. 9. 5, 16. 18. Sept. for 
 X2n Ex. 9, 28. 35. So dp-apravtiv dp.apri- 
 av, to sin a sin, 1 John 5, 16. Buttm. 131. 
 4. Kiihn. 278. 1. Sept. for nxan Xisn 
 Lev. 4, 14. Ex. 32, 29. 30. So Xen". Cyr* 
 
 3. 1. 40. Plato Rep. 336. e. ib. 379. d, d/nap- 
 riav dpaprdveiv. With els c. ace. to sin 
 against any one, to offend, to wrong, Matt. 
 18, 15. 21. Luke 15, 18. 21. 17, 3. 4. Acts 
 
 25, 8 ouTf fls rbv v6fj.ov ruiv lovdaiaiv . . . 
 ovTf els Kca crapa TI TJfiaprov. 1 Cor. 6, 18. 
 8, 12 bis. Sept. for b son Gen. 20, 6. 9. 
 1 Sam. 2, 25. So Xen." Hell. 2. 4. 21. 
 Plato Rep. 396. a. By Hebr. dpapravftv 
 fv&iriov TIVOS, to do evil before or in the 
 sight of any one, i. e. to sin against, to 
 wrong, as above, Luke 15, 18. 21. Sept. for 
 b X jn 1 Sam. 7, 6. 12, 23 ; also Susan. 
 23 fvunriov rov xvpiov. 
 
 afiaprrj/Jia, aros, TO. (d/xaprdi/ca,) pr. a 
 mistake, error, Polyb. 34. 3. 11. Thuc. 4. 
 
 afjiapna 
 
 89. In N. T. a fault, sin, Mark 3, 28. [29.J 
 4, 12. Rom. 3, 25. [5, 16.] 1 Cor. 6, 18. 
 [2 Pet. 1, 9.] Sept. for nx-JPl Gen. 31, 36 ; 
 1 ; .S Ex. 28, 38 ; 5CB I s . 58, 1. So Dem. 
 131. 4. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 27. 
 
 afiapna, as, 17, (d/xapravw,) a, miss, mis 
 take, error in judgment, Thuc. 1. 32 SO T/? 
 8e fj.aX\ov d/Ltapri a. Plato Crat. 437. b. In 
 N. T. only in a moral or religious sense, 
 sin, i. e. 
 
 1. Abstr. sin, i. q. TO dp.aprdvfiv, a sin 
 ning, the act of sinning, a voluntary depart 
 ure from right, duty, law, and including the 
 idea of exposure to penalty. Hence dpapria 
 differs from and includes dvou.ia transgres 
 sion of law ; and also ddiKta wrong-doing, 
 unrighteousness ; comp. 1 John 5, 17 ndo-a 
 ddiKia dfjMprLa eori all unrighteousness is 
 sin, is wrong in itself and exposes us to 
 penalty ; comp. 3, 4. John 8, 46 TLS eXe-y^f t 
 p.e Trepl dpaprias ; V. 34. 16, 8. 9. 2 Cor. 
 11, 7. 1 John 3, 4. 8. 9. So Ecclus. 25, 
 24 [20] tiTro yvvaiKos dp^r] apaprias. Spec, 
 in Rom. Paul uses dpapria for sin, sinful- 
 ness, as the ruling attribute in man ; partly 
 as a principle Rom. 7, 8 ; partly as the state 
 or condition of sinning described in Rom. 
 1, 18 to 3, 20. Thus Rom. 3, 9 jrdvras v(fi 
 dp-apriav elvai, to be all under sin, under its 
 power, sinful, i. q. iravres rjnaprov v. 23. 
 Rom. 5, 1 81 tvbs dv^punrov rj a^apria fls 
 TW Kocrfiov elcrfjX Sf. v. 13. 6, 1. 6 TO o-co/ia 
 TTJS dp-aprias, i. e. the body as the seat of 
 sin, in which sin rules, vv. 10. 11-14. 17. 
 18. 20. 22. 23. 8, 10. Gal. 3, 22. Heb. 3, 13. 
 Rom. 7, 7 6 vop.os au.apria ; is the law sin ? 
 i. e. the principle or cause of sinning ; or 
 perh. better, sinful, opp. dyios in v. 12. 
 The apostle in c. 7 rises also to a personifi 
 cation of auMprla as an indwelling princi 
 pie ; Rom. 7. 8 d<popp.rjv Se Xa/3ovo-a f] du.ap- 
 rla. VV. 9. 11. 13. 17 f] oiKovcra ev e ^tol 
 dfjLapria. vv. 20. 23. 25. 8, 2. 3. 1 Cor. 15, 
 56. A similar prosopopoeia see in James 
 1,15. Prov. 8, 1 sq. Also 2 Thess. 2, 3 6 
 aj/3p<o7ros TTJS dpaprias the man of sin, in 
 whom sin is personified and represented, as 
 is righteousness in Christ. 
 
 2. Meton. sin as committed, a sin, fault, 
 i. q. au.dpTT]u.a., spoken of actual transgres 
 sion ; comp. ap.apTia Trepl TOVS Sfov? Plato 
 Rep. 379. d. Thus Rom. 7, 5 rd Trcftf)- 
 u.ara TU>V dpapncav the affections of sins, 
 leading to sins, sinful. Matt. 12, 31 ird<ra 
 dfjuipria KOI ^i\acr(prjp.ia. Heb. 4, 15 ^coplf 
 dpaprias. So in phrases, as a<pf<rty d/iap- 
 Tiuv Matt 26, 28. Acts 2, 38 ; dfpievai rds 
 Afiaaruts Matt. 9, 2. 5. 6 ; cupeiv rds <S/x 
 
36 
 
 1 John 3, 5 ; dfpaipdv ras dp.. Rom. 11,27] 
 dvcvtyKtiv dp-apTtas to bear sins. i. e. their 
 punishment, Heb. 9, 28 ; see more fully 
 under art. a<pf<ns, cicpuy/ii, a lpa> no. 3, dcpai- 
 pa>, dvacpepui. So too K.a%apif(.v OTTO 7700-77? 
 dp.aprias to cleanse from all sins, 1 John 1, 7 ; 
 (ra>eii> GTTO rS>v dp. Matt. 1, 21. In most 
 of these expressions the sin is represented 
 as removed out of God s sight, and so not 
 punished, but pardoned. Opp. is Acts 7, 60 
 fifj (TTT)CTT)s avTols rfjv dp,apriav Tairrrjv, let 
 not this sin stand against them, lay it not to 
 their charge ; also John 9, 41 17 ovv dp.ap- 
 ria vp.(ov p.tvti, your sin remaineth, is not 
 taken away, but is punished. In other con 
 structions, e. g. ojJLO\ayeiv rds dp,. 1 John 
 
 I, 9. Matt. 3, 6 ; dp.apriav ex fLV to ^ ave szn > 
 to be a sinner, John 9, 41. 15, 22. 24. 19, 
 
 II. 1 John 1,8; epydecr3ai dp.apriav to 
 commit sin James 2, 9, comp. Ecclus. 27, 
 10 ; Troiflv dp-aprias id. James 5, 15 ; i. q. 
 dp.aprdvfiv dp-apriav 1 John 5, 16, see in 
 dp,apTdvu. Also 3u<ria inrtp dp.apTi.Siv a 
 sin-ojfering Heb. 5, 1. 3. 7, 27; 7rpoo-(popa 
 Trepl dp., id. Heb. 10, 18; Sucri a Trepi dp.ap- 
 rias id. Heb. 10, 26 ; ellipt. v. 6. 8, comp. 
 13, 11, quoted from Ps. 40, 7 where Sept. 
 ;repi apaprias for fixan . Further, John 
 9, 34 fv dp.apriais (rv fyevvrftrfs o\os, thou 
 wast wholly born in sins, wast infected from 
 the womb with the sins of thy parents ; 
 comp. Ps. 51, 7. 58, 4. 1 Cor. 15, 17 rt 
 OT (v rais dp,apTiais iip.coi>, ye are yet in 
 your sins, they are not taken away, for 
 given. Heb. 9, 28 X W P S dpaprias, i. q. 
 X&>piy ToO dvevejKfiv dp.aprl.as, see the con 
 text. 2 Cor. 5, 21 rov yap p.rj yvovra dp.ap- 
 riav inrep r)p.u>v dp.npriav fTroirj&fv, him who 
 knew no sin hath he made sin for us, i. e. 
 hath put him in the place of sin, hath laid 
 on him the burden of our sins ; opp. <Va 
 f][Jifls yivup.e%a StKaiocrwry Seov. Collect, 
 sometimes in John, sins; John 1, 29 6 ai- 
 po)v TTJV dp.apTiav TOV Ko(rp.ov, comp. 1 John 
 3, 5 rds dp.aprias fjp.u>v nprj, see in cupco no. 
 3. John 8,21, comp. v. 24. So Sept. 2 K. 
 21, 17. Sometimes the specific sins in 
 tended may be gathered from the context ; 
 e. g. unbelief, dina-rla, John 8, 21. 24. 15, 
 22 ; falsehood, deceit, John 8, 46 ; lewd- 
 ness, 2 Pet. 2, 14; apostasy, Heb. 11, 25. 
 12, 1. 4. etc. Sept. for xi?n Gen. 41, 9. 
 
 2 K. 14, 6. Lys. 694. 2. Plato Rep. 342. 
 b. Xen. Ag. 11. 6. + 
 
 apdpTVpos, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. pdp- 
 rvr,) without witness, unattested, Acts 14, 
 17. Jos. Ant. 14. 7. 2. Plut. de Solert. 
 Anim. 23. Thuc. 2. 41. 
 
 O v, 6, f/, adj. (dpapruvu,) 
 sinful, living in sin, wicked. 
 
 1 . Pr. as Adj, Mark 8, 38 eV 177 ytvt a 
 rfj ^lOt^oXt Si Kai d/AaprcoX<5. So dvrjp V. 
 a^SpcoTTos d/xaprcoXoy, a sinful man, a sin 
 ner, Luke 5, 8. 19, 7. 24, 7. John 9, 16. 24. 
 Also yvvfj d/iapTcoXo s Luke 7, 37. 39. Sc 
 Sept. for xan Num. 32, 14 ; Kan Is. 1,4 
 (Ecclus. 27^ 30. Plut. de audiend. Poet. 7.) 
 Luke 13, 2 dp.aprcoXol Trapa irdvras more 
 wicked than all others. 18, 13. Rom. 3, 7. 
 5, 8. 5, 19 d/zaprcoXot KaTfcrrd^crav ol TroX- 
 Xot, opp. diKaioi KOT. ol TToXXoi. 7, 13. Gal. 
 2, 17. 
 
 2. Subst. a sinner, Matt. 9, 10. 11. 13. 
 11, 19. 26, 45. Mark 2, 15. 16 bis. 17. 14, 
 41. Luke 5, 30. 32. 6,32.33.34.7,34. 15,1. 
 2. 7 . 10. John 9, 25. 31. Gal. 2, 15. 1 Tim. 1, 
 9. 15. Heb. 7,26. 12,3. James 4, 8. 5,20. 
 1 Pet. 4, 18. Jude 15. [Rev. 21, 8.] Sept. for 
 Nan Ps. 1, 1. 5. Is. 13, 9 ; sen Ps. 37, 12. 
 Ez. 33, 8. Others regard the plural as put 
 in the Jewish idiom directly for rd &vr), gen 
 tiles, heathen, in Matt. 26, 45. Mark 14, 41 
 Luke 6, 32. 33. 34. 24, 7. But this is not 
 necessary, nor probable in the mouth of our 
 Lord. 
 
 ou, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. p.d x r),) 
 Pass, unfought, unconquerable, Hdot. 1. 84, 
 Plato Menex. 240. d. Act. not fighting 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 1. 16. In N. T. intens. foi 
 not contentious, not quarrelsome, 1 Tim. 3, 
 3. Tit. 3, 2. 
 
 a/ia&), <, f. JJCTCO, (kindr. a/xa,) to gather 
 together, to collect, e. g. stalks, reeds, Horn. 
 II. 24. 451. In N. T. to gather the crops, 
 to harvest, to reap, c. ace. James 5, 4 ; 
 comp. Lev. 19, 13. Deut. 24, 14. 15. Sept. 
 for 1S Lev. 25, 11. So Hdot. 6, 28. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 14. 
 
 u, TJ, (a priv. p,e3va>,) an 
 amethyst, a precious stone of a deep purple 
 or violet colour, a variety of quartz ; Rev. 
 21, 20. Sept. for frabnx Ex. 28, 19. 
 The ancient Magi pretended that the ame 
 thyst was an antidote against drunkenness, 
 whence its name. Plin. H. N. 37. 40. Ro- 
 senm. Alterthk. IV. i. p. 39. 
 
 <zyLte\&)j o>, f. rjcrai, (ap.f\f]s , a priv. fie- 
 X,) to be careless, heedless, absol. Matt. 22, 
 5 ; c. infin. 2 Pet. 1,12. With a genit. not 
 to care for, to neglect, 1 Tim. 4, 14. Heb. 2, 
 3. 8, 9. Wisd. 3, 10. Luc. D. Deor. 20. 16. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 24. 
 
 ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. fie /i- 
 (pop,cu.) Act. not blaming, icell content, Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 5. 52. In N. T. Pass, blameless, 
 
without reproach, Luke 1, 6. Phil. 2, 15. 3, 
 6. 1 Thess. 3, 13. Heb. 8, 7. Sept. for 
 en Job 1, 1. 8; fiicn Gen. 17, 1. So 
 Diod. Sic. 17. 4. Xen. Cyr. 5. 5. 32. 
 
 ayue/47TTa>9, adv. (a/if/i7rroy,) unblam- 
 ably, blamelessly, without reproach, 1 Thess. 
 2, 10. 5, 23. Addit. to Esth. 13, 3. Plut. 
 an seni sit ger. Resp. 9. Plato Legg. 751 . d. 
 
 dpepipvos, ov, 6, TJ, adj. (a priv. pepip,- 
 j/a.) without care or anxiety, unconcerned, 
 1 Cor. 7, 32. Matt. 28, 14. Wisd. 6, 15. 
 Anthol. Gr. II. p. 51. Hdian. 2. 4. 3. 
 
 afjLera&TO$j ov, 6, ^. adj. (a priv. p.fra- 
 riS^/zi,) immovable, immutable, sure, Heb. 
 6, 18. Neut. ro u/ierd3eroi/ as Subst. rmmu- 
 tability, Heb. 6, 17. 3 Mace. 5, 1. 12. Pol. 
 30. 17. 2. Diod. Sic. 1. 25. 
 
 S, O v, 6, T), adj. (a priv. 
 fo), ) immovable, firm, 1 Cor. 15, 58. 
 Dion. Hal. 8. 74. Plato Ep. 343. a. 
 
 a/iera/<ie/\.??TO9, ov, 6, f], adj. (a priv. 
 fjL(Ta[if\ei), not to be repented of, unchange 
 able, Rom. 11, 29. 2 Cot. 7, 10. Pol. 21. 
 9. 11. Plato Tim. 59. d. 
 
 ov, 6, fj, adj. (a priv. p.e- 
 rafoe w,) Act. unrepentant, impenitent, e. g. 
 9 icapSia Rom. 2, 5. Test. XII Patr. p. 
 685. Pass. Luc. Abdic. 11. 
 
 , ov, 6, rj, adj. (a priv. ptrpov, ) 
 without measure, immoderate; hence els ra 
 ufjLfrpa immoderately, excessively, i. q. a^e- 
 rpwj, 2 Cor. 10, 13. 15. Jos. B. J. 4. 5. 5. 
 Theocr. 15. 45. Plato Legg. 716. c. 
 
 a/i^y, amen, Heb. l^tt , pr. adj. true, 
 faithful; then Subst. as ( nx in>X , Sept. 
 3f6? aXjjSii/o?,. Is. 65, 16. The Heb. T?X 
 occurs often in O. T. as an adv. truly, sure 
 ly, verily ; usually at the end of a sentence, 
 where it serves to confirm the words which 
 precede, so be it, fiat, Sept. dp.rjv or yei/otro. 
 So in oaths or imprecations, where the peo 
 ple answer T?X , and thus bind themselves, 
 Neh. 5, 13, Sept. drfv. Deut. 27, 15-26, 
 Sept. yfvoiTo. Or in praising God, when 
 the assembly respond "j^X } as Ps. 41, 14. 
 72, 19. 89, 53, Sept. d^v. Ps. 106, 48, 
 Sept. yfvoiro. Or lastly by individuals after 
 an imprecation, Num. 5, 22, Sept. ytvoiro ; 
 or to a command, 1 K. 1, 36, Sept. ytvoiro. 
 Rarely V?S< stands in O. T. at the begin 
 ning of a sentence, for emphasis, verily, in 
 truth, Sept. dXj3a>?, Jer. 28, 6 ; also fern. 
 njax . Sept. dXTjSoiy, Josh. 7, 20, comp. Job 
 19, 5. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Adj. as in Heb. true, faithful. Rev 
 J, 14 6 d/j.f]v, 6 pdprus 6 TTICTTOS KOI o 
 
 37 0/11/69 
 
 i>ds, the true, the faithful and true witness. 
 where the last words explain the first. See 
 Is. 65, 16 above. 
 
 2. Adv. at the end of a sentence, in 
 doxologies or ascriptions of praise, hymns, 
 etc. amen, so be it, Matt. 6, 13. Rom. 1,25. 
 9, 5. Rev. 1, 6. 5, 14. al. sasp. Comp. 
 Ps. 106, 48. 1 Chr. 16, 36. Neh. 8, 6. 
 Hence Xyj> ro dp-r/v, to respond amen, 
 1 Cor. 14, 16. Also after benedictions, in 
 vocations, Rom. 15, 33. 16, 24. 1 Cor. 16, 
 24. Heb. 13, 25. Strengthened by vai, Rev. 
 1, 7 vai dp.r)v, yea amen! 2 Cor. 1, 20 eV 
 aura) TO vai Kal tv avrw TO dp.rjv, are in him 
 yea and amen, i. e. are most true and faith 
 ful. So too before an ascription, Rev. 7, 12. 
 
 3. Adv. emphat. at the beginning of a 
 sentence, truly, verily, Matt. 5, 18. 16, 28 
 comp. Luke 9, 27 oAj^coj. Matt. 25, 40. 
 Luke 4, 24 comp. v. 25. In John it is re 
 peated, d[j.rjv, dp.r)v, John 3, 3. 5. 11. 5, 19. 
 8, 51. al. sap. + 
 
 afJ,r)T(i)p, opos, 6, f), adj. (a priv. /AIJTTJ/J,) 
 without mother, motherless, as the gods, 
 Eurip. Phoen. 676. Plato Conv. 180. d; an 
 orphan, Hdot. 4. 154; or one born of a 
 mean mother Eurip. Ion. 109; unmotherly, 
 spoken of a mother Soph. Elect. 1154. 
 In N. T. without mother, spoken of Melchi- 
 zedek, i. e. whose mother is not mentioned 
 in the genealogies, Heb. 7, 3. Though 
 Melchizedek was a priest, yet he was not so 
 by genealogical descent ; his ancestors can 
 not be traced ; see in dyeveaXoyrjTos. So 
 Philo de Temul. p. 248, 290 ; de Monarch. 
 p. 827. b. 
 
 a/iiai>T09, ov, o, 17, adj. (a priv. fiiaivca,) 
 unstained, unsoiled; trop. undefiled by sin, 
 e. g. a person, Heb. 7, 26. So Wisd. 8, 20. 
 Plato Legg. 777. e, dfiiavros TOV re dvocrioi 
 jrepl KOI dftiicov. Of worship, undefiled, 
 pure, James 1, 27; the heavenly inherit 
 ance, 1 Pet. 1,4. (2 Mace. 15, 34.) Also 
 of marriage, undefiled, chaste, Heb. 13, 4. 
 So Wisd. 3, 13. 
 
 A/jUvaSd/3, 6, indec. Aminadab, Heb 
 ^J 1 1 ?? (kindred of the prince), pr. n. of 
 an ancestor of Christ, Matt. 1, 4 bis. Luke 
 3, 33. 
 
 ov, 17, sand, Matt. 7, 26, Rom 
 9, 27. Heb. 11, 12. Rev. 12, 18. 20, 8. 
 Sept. for "iSS Gen. 13, 16; bin Gen. 22, 
 17. Diod. Sic. 5. 7. Plato Phaid. 110. a. 
 
 dfj,vo<?, ov, 6, a lamb; in N. T. only 
 trop. of Christ delivered over to death, as a 
 lamb to the sacrifice, John 1, 29. 36. 1 Pet. 
 1, 19. Acts 8, 32, comp. Is. 53, 7 where 
 
38 
 
 Sept. for irn . Sept. for tiM Ex. 12, 5 ; 
 1? Is. 16, l" Aristoph. Av. 1559. JE\. H. 
 A. 4. 15. So dpvos 3eou, the Messiah, 
 Test. XII Patr. p. 724, 725, 730. 
 
 d/iot/??;, TJS, T), (a/i6i /3<a,) change, Horn. 
 Od. 14. 521 ; requital for evil, indemnity, 
 Horn. Od. 12. 382. In N. T. requital for 
 good, for kind offices ; 1 Tim. 5, 4 d/ioi/Sas 
 dTToStSdVai to give full requital, to requite. 
 So Jos. Ant. 1. 16. 2. Diod. Sic. 1. 90. 
 Plato Conv. 202. e. 
 
 a/iTreXo?, O v, 17, a vine, Matt. 26, 29. 
 Mark 14, 25. Luke 22, 18. James 3, 12. 
 (Luc. D. Deor. 18. 2. Xen. CEc. 19. 12.) 
 Trop. John 15, 1. 4. 5 I am the true vine, 
 etc. i. e. Christ is the true, the real vine, of 
 which his disciples are the branches ; just 
 as with Paul Christ is the head and they 
 the members, comp. Eph. 5, 23. 30. Col. 2, 
 
 19. The figure expresses the closest union 
 and communion. In Rev. 14, 18. 19 17 ap.- 
 TTfXoy TTJS yjjs, the vine of the earth, denotes 
 the now prosperous enemies of the Messiah, 
 who are to be cut off as grapes are gathered 
 and cast into the wine press ; comp. Is. 63, 
 2. 3. Lam. 1, 15. 
 
 d/jL7re\ovp i yos, ou, 6, 17, (for d/wreXoep- 
 yd? ; a/wreXor, epyov,} a vine-dresser, Luke 
 13,7. Sept. for vys 2 Chr. 26, 10. Is. 61, 
 5. Plut. de Stoic, rep. T. VI. p. 88. Aris 
 toph. Pac. 189. 
 
 a/ATreXcov, wi/os, 6, (ajuTreXor,) a vine 
 yard, Matt. 20, 1. 2. 4. 7. 8. 21, 28. 33. 39. 
 40. 41. Mark 12, 1. 2. 8. 9 bis. Luke 13, 6. 
 
 20, 9. 10. 13, 15 bis. 16. 1 Cor. 9, 7. Sept. 
 for fi ja Gen. 9, 20. Is. 5, 1-7. Plut. pro 
 Nobil. 3. Diod. Sic. 4. 6. 
 
 A/J,7r\ia$, iov, 6, Amplias, pr. n. of a 
 Christian at Rome, Rom. 16, 8. 
 
 dfjivva)) f. wa>, (a euph. /xuw;,) to avert, 
 to ward off, c. ace. et dat. Horn. II. 1. 156; 
 to defend, Thuc. 3. 67. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 67. 
 Mid. to ward off from oneself, to repulse, 2 
 Mace. 10, 17. Xen. An. 3. 1. 14 ; to defend 
 oneself, Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 30. In N. T. only 
 Mid. dfj.vvop.ai,, to aid, to defend; absol. c. 
 dat. impl. Acts 7, 24 fjp-vvaTo sc. avrov. Sept. 
 c. ace. for S"iiai rt. So absol. Xen. Hell. 
 7. 5. 10 irokiv eprjiiov TUJV dp.vvovp.fvwv. 
 Plato Rep. 464. e, c. dat. ^Xti . . . rjXiKas 
 dp.vveo- Scu KaXoV. 
 
 a/jifaftaXkci), f. jSaXw, (/3dXXto,) to cast 
 around, as a garment, c. ace. et dat. Eurip. 
 Here. F. 465. In N. T. of a net, to cast 
 round about, so as to enclose fish, Mark 1 , 
 16 in later edit. Sept. Hab. 1, 17 ; comp. 
 Soph. Ant. 343. 
 
 dfJL(j)Lp\. r]a-TpOV, ov, TO, (dp.(pij3dX\a>t 
 pr. what is cast around, e. g. a garment 
 Eurip. Hel. 1088. In N. T. a fish-net, 
 drag, Matt. 4, 18. Mark 1, 16. Sept. for 
 rnaaa Hab. 1, 16 ; d-nn Hab. 1, 15. 17. 
 So H es. Scut. 215. Hdot."l. 141. Plut. de 
 Solert. Anim. 26. 
 
 d/j,(f>ievvv/J,i, f. dp,<pi(o-a>, (eWu/u, Buttm, 
 5 108. Ill,) to put on around any one, to 
 clothe; c. ace. et ovras, Matt. 6, 30 et 
 Luke 12, 28 TOV xop TOV o Seo? OUTOOS 
 dp.(pifvvvo-i, i. e. if God so clothe, adorn. 
 Pass, with ev c. dat. Matt. 11, 8. Luke 7, 
 25. Act. with two ace. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 17; 
 ace. et dat. Plato Prot. 321 . a. Pass. c. ace. 
 Luc. Nigrin. 11. Aristoph. Eccl. 820. 
 
 AfJi(f)l7ro\l$, ems, 17, Amphipolis, pr. n. 
 of a city of Macedonia, Acts 17, 1. It was 
 situated in a strong position near the mouth 
 of the river Strymon ; which flowed around 
 it on three sides, and gave occasion for the 
 name. Now called Marmara. See Leake s 
 Travels in Northern Greece, III. p. 183, 
 190 sq. 
 
 a/J,<f)0$ov, ov, TO, (dp.(pi, 686s,~) pr. a 
 way round; then, a street of a town or vil 
 lage, espec. as leading round a quarter or 
 block of dwellings, i. q. dyvid. Mark 11, 4. 
 Sept. TO. ap.(poo-a Jer. 17, 27. 49, 27. 
 Hesych. ap.<po8a al pvp.a.1, dyviai, 816801. 
 So 17 ap.(po8os Xen. An. 4. 2. 11. ib. 5. 2.7. 
 Greg. Cor. p. 505. 
 
 a/i^)orep09, e pa, epw, correl. pron. each 
 of two; in N. T. only Plur. a/u,<porepoi. 
 at, a, both, spoken of two, Matt. 9, 17. 
 13, 30. 15, 14. Luke 1, 6. 7. 5, 7. 38. 6, 
 39. 7, 42. Acts 8, 38. Eph. 2, 14. 16. 18 
 rovs dp,(j)orepovs, both, i. e. Jews and Gen 
 tiles. Acts 23, 8 TO. dn^orepa, both, i. e. 
 the resurrection, and the existence of angels 
 and spirits. Sept. for t^31IJ Gen. 21, 27. 
 Ex. 12, 22. Ecclus. 10, 7. Hdian. 3. 6. 8. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 5. 
 
 d/jUa/J. rjTOS, O v, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. jaw/udo- 
 p.ai,) unrebukable, blameless, Phil. 2, 15 
 2 Pet. 3, 14. Horn. II. 12. 109. Pind. Pyth. 
 2. 135. 
 
 ayii&>//-oi , ou, TO, amomum, a fragrant 
 plant or seeds brought by the ancients from 
 the east, and used in preparing precious oint 
 ment, Rev. 18, 13 in later edit. It was of 
 various qualities ; growing in Armenia and 
 Media, and also in Pontus ; with seeds in 
 clusters like grapes; Plin. H. N. 12. 28. 
 Theophr. H. PI. 9. 7. The modern amo 
 mum of the shops, sison amomum, is sup* 
 posed to be a different plant 
 
39 
 
 ?, uv, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. /x 
 without blemish, spotless, Heb. 9, 14. 1 Pet. 
 1,19 dfjivov ap.o3p.ov, trap, of Christ, a lamb 
 without blemish, as was required by the 
 Mosaic law in regard to all victims ; see 
 Lev. 22, 19-22 where Sept. for Qiap . Also 
 of the church as a bride, Eph. 5, 27. So 
 Theocr. Id. 18. 25 of a maiden. Anacr. 
 Fragm. 42. 2 nopys ifitffua> oVSoy. Trop. 
 faultless, blameless, Eph. 1,4. [Phil. 2,15.] 
 Col. 1, 22. Jude 24. Rev. 14, 5. So Wisd. 
 2, 22. Hdot. 2. 177. 
 
 AfMav, 6, indec. Amon, Heb. (I ttSJ 
 (^architect), pr. n. of a king of Judah, Matt. 
 1, 10 bis. See 2 K. 21, 8 sq. 2 Chr. 33, 
 20 sq. 
 
 AfM#>, 6, indec. Amos, Heb. "P^X 
 (strong), pr. n. of an ancestor of Jesus, 
 Luke 3, 25. 
 
 I. av, a conditional modal Particle, of 
 ten used in connection with the Indicative, 
 Subjunctive, and Optative ; differing from 
 av for edv, for which see the next article. 
 Its primary power is to modify the relation 
 expressed by the mood ; whence then arises 
 its secondary use. as subjoined to other 
 words. It shows that what the mood ex 
 presses is to be conceived of as dependent 
 on some condition ; which condition, how 
 ever, the particle does not point out, but 
 only causes it to be felt. Hence, in strict 
 ness, av in every case includes in itself the 
 idea of a whole conditional clause. In En 
 glish it may sometimes be rendered per 
 haps, possibly, or the like ; but is commonly 
 not to be expressed by any corresponding 
 word ; simply imparting to a sentence a 
 stamp of uncertainty and mere possibility. 
 Its place is usually after one or more words 
 in a clause ; it being thus distinguished 
 from av for tdv, which stands first in a 
 clause. On the nature, power, and use of 
 this particle, see generally Buttm. j 1 39. 3 sq. 
 Kiihner Gr. $ 260. Id. Ausf. Gr. 453 sq. 
 Winer Gr. J 43. Herm. ad Vig. p. 789, etc. 
 Herm. de part, av, Lips. 1831. 
 
 I. With the INDICATIVE, in the historical 
 tenses, but not in the Present or Future ; 
 since what actually is or has been, cannot 
 1 made conditional. With the Fut. Indie, 
 it is found in Gr. writers very rarely ; but 
 does not occur in N. T. See Buttm. 1. c. 
 {139. 3. 1. Kiihn. $260. R. 1. 
 
 1 . Mostly in the apodosis, after a condi 
 tional clause with d, signifying that if the 
 subject of the protasis had taken place, then 
 the subject of the apodosis would likewise 
 have taken place ; but that in fact neither 
 
 the one nor the other has taken j lace , 
 comp. in art. I. 2. e. Thus 
 
 a) With the Indie. Imperfect, to express 
 the idea : I would or might do. a) Where 
 the protasis also has the Imperf. Luke 7, 
 39 OVTOS fl TJV Trpo(f)T]Tr]s, fyivaHTKfv av, ris 
 Kal iroTanr) f) ywr), if this man were a pro 
 phet, he would know who and what this wo 
 man is ; but he is not a prophet, and he 
 does not know. Luke 17, 6. John 5, 46. 8, 
 42. 9,41. 15,19. 18.36. 1 Cor. 11, 31. 
 Gal. 1, 10. Heb. 8, 4. 7. (Luc. D. Deor. 
 
 18. 1. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 24. Plato Gorg. 
 516. e, fl fjaav av8pfs dyaSot . . . oi K at 
 Trore ravra ewtwr^w.) So Heb. 11, 15 fl 
 pfv fKfivrjs ffii>rjp.6vtvov . . . fl%ov av Kaipot, 
 dvaKafj.\^ai, where the writer speaks of the 
 past as if present ; comp. Pres. fp.<pavlovo-ii- 
 and opeyovrai in vv. 14. 16. Matt. 23, 30 d 
 ?7/ie3a fv rats rjutpais TWV frarc/MW rjp.a)v, OVK 
 av flfjLf 2a Koivavoi KT\. if ice were in the days 
 of our fathers, we would not be partakers, 
 etc. Sometimes av is omitted in this con 
 struction ; and in the later Greek was more 
 and more thus omitted ; Winer 43. 2 mid. 
 Kiihner 260. R. 3. John 9, 33 ft ^ r^v 
 OVTOS Trapa 3eo{), OVK rjdvvaro T>oitiv ovftev. 
 
 19, 11. Rom. 7, 7. In John 8, 8 the road- 
 ing varies. (Lycurg. Leocr. 154. 3 Reisk. 
 Plato Gorg. p. 514. C, 8e urjTf fitSutrra- 
 AOJ> fixopev . . . OVTGO 81} dvorjTov TJV KT\.) 
 So too after a Pluperf. in the protasis, Acts 
 26, 32. Sometimes also both av and the 
 verb of the apodosis are omitted, or absorbed 
 in an interrogation ; as 1 Cor. 12, 17 bis. 19. 
 /3) Where the protasis has the aorist ; Gal. 
 3, 21 et yap e SoSrj vufj.os ovrats av e vo- 
 fjMv TJV 17 diKaioo-vvrj. Heb. 4, 8. (Thuc. 1. 
 74. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 5 8rj\ov ovv. STI OVK 
 av TrpoeKeyev, fl p.r) fTTio~revfv d\rj^fv(rfiv.~) 
 Here too av may be omitted, as John 1 5, 22 
 By aposiopesis, the whole appdosis is some 
 times suppressed ; Luke 19, 42 tyvas 
 KOI (TV ... TO. Ttpbs flpfjvrjv crov, sc. Ka\u>s av 
 eixes. Heb. 7, 11. Winer 5 66. H. 
 
 b) With the Indie. Aorist, to express the 
 idea : / would or might hare done. a) 
 Where the protasis also has the aorist ; 
 Mutt. 11, 21 el (v Tvpo) tytvovTo at Si i- n/ms 
 . . . TraXat av p.(rfv6r)<rav, if these miracles 
 had been done in Tyre, they would have, rn 
 periled, v. 23. Luke 10, 13. Rom. 9. 29 
 1 Cor. 2, 8. Gal. 4, 15. Also Matt. 24. 22 
 and Mark 13, 20, referring to the eternal 
 counsels of God. So Plut. Moral. II. p. 65 
 ft yap UTJ o~v TTJV TTO\IV aW/SoAry, OVK av yo> 
 dvfXafiov. Xen. Apol. Socr. 8. /3) Where 
 the protasis has the Imperfect ; John 14, 2? 
 ft Tjyairdrf pf, fxaprjre av. V. 2. 18, 30 
 
av 
 
 40 
 
 Acts 18, 14. So Plut. Pomp. 2 fin. Plato 
 Phaed. 55. p. 106. a, OVKOVV fl KOI TO o3ep- 
 uov avayKoiov TJV . . . ov yap av aTTooXfro ye 
 xrX. y) Where the protasis has the Plu- 
 perf. Matt. 12, 7 el 8e eyvuxene . . . OVK av 
 KareSiKao-are. Matt. 24, 43. Luke 12, 39. 
 John 4, 10. 8) Where the protasis is im 
 plied in the context; Luke 19,23 dia r( 
 
 , .,- . , / , \ > V )>. 
 
 OVK eooiKas TO apyvpiov fj.ov . . . K<U eyw eA- 
 3obi> crvv TOKO) av eirpa^a avTO, i. e. if thou 
 hadst done this. Matt. 25, 27. Heb. 10, 2 
 eVet [et fdvvavro TeXeiwcrai] OVK av enav- 
 <ravro KT\. Comp. Xen. An. 4. 2. 10. 
 
 c) With the Indie. Pluperfect, to express 
 the idea : I would or might, have done ; e. g. 
 after a Pluperf. in the protasis, John 8, 19 
 ft fue f/8fiT, Kal rov irarepa aov TjfSeire av. 
 14, 7. Also after an Imperf. in the prota 
 sis, 1 John 2, 19 et yap rjaav e fjucov, ue- 
 p.evf)Kfio-av av p.e3 f]p.iav. John 11,21. Wi 
 ner 43. 2. b. So Plut. Mor. II. p. 34 
 TrXetora 8 av TOVTO>V flprjKfipev, el TrXfiova 
 
 2. In relative clauses, after relative pro 
 nouns and adverbs, (os, oorty,) oaos, KU^OTI, 
 OTTOV, o>y. Here av is followed by the Indi 
 cative, when a matter of fact is spoken of, 
 something certain in itself, but yet indefinite 
 in respect to time or other circumstances, 
 . e. happening repeatedly where occasion 
 offers ; Winer 43. 3. a . Herm. ad Viger. 
 p. 818 sq. So in N. T. with Indie. Imper 
 fect ; Mark 6, 56 bis, KOI OTTOU av eicrTropeu- 
 ero . . . Kal ocroi av fjrrTOvro avTov fcrw^ovro, 
 and whithersoever he entered . . . and as ma 
 ny as touched him were made whole, i. e. 
 however -many wherever he went; comp. 
 without av, Matt. 14, 36 Kai ocrot rj-^savro 
 8teo-u>^r]o-av, spoken definitely of one time 
 and place. Acts 2, 45 and 4, 35 KaSoYi av 
 
 TIS xp e Lav X e as a man a t an y ti me had 
 need. 1 Cor. 12, 2 a>s av fjyeo-^e as ye were 
 at any time led. So Aristoph. Acharn. 873. 
 Luc. Demon. 10 OTTOCTOI av edoKovv avTca. 
 With aor. Sept. Gen. 2, 19. Lev. 5, 3. Luc. 
 D. Mort. 9. 2. Dem. 1106. 1 ; and so always 
 in Gr. writers with a past tense. Hence in 
 text. rec. Mark 11, 24 oo-a av Trpocreii^op-e- 
 voi. aireio-3e, the Subjunctive atr^a-3e should 
 be read as in Mss. So too Luke 8, 18. 10, 
 8, in Mss. 
 
 II. With the SUBJUNCTIVE. Here strictly 
 av is unnecessary ; since the mood itself 
 expresses the relation of condition, and 
 so includes the idea of av. Yet where the 
 Subjunctive stands in a dependent clause 
 introduced by a relative word or conjunc 
 tion, usage requires that av should be 
 pvolv.d from the idea of the mood and con 
 
 nected, not with the verb, but with the rela 
 tive or other particle ; see Buttm. 139. 14. 
 Kuhn. \ 260. 3. Ausf. Gr. 454. c, Winer 
 43. 3. b. 
 
 1 . In relative clauses, where av subjoined 
 to the relative renders it general and indefi 
 nite, implying possibility but not certainty ; 
 Lat. cunque, Engl. ever, soever. In these 
 cases the later incorrect orthography some 
 times writes edv for av ; see in edv II. 
 
 a) After relative Pronouns, as os av, 
 oa-os av, oo-Tis av, i. q. Lat. quicunque, 
 Engl. whoever, whosoever, whatsoever. a) 
 Before the Subjunct. Present, expressing 
 what may have taken place or usually takes 
 place, or also what is customary and con 
 tinued; Winer 1. c. Matt. 7, 12 Travra ovv 
 oo-a av 3e Xj?re. 16, 25 os yap av Se Xfl TT)J> 
 ^vx^v avTov crcocrat. Mark 4, 25. Luke 8, 
 18. 10, 5. John 2, 5. 5, 19 a yap av e jcet- 
 vos 71-007. Rom. 9, 15. 16, 2. 1 Cor. 16, 2 
 on av fvooa>Tai. Gal. 5, 10. 17. Col. 3, 17. 
 
 I John 2, 5. al. So Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 14 o n 
 av 8vva>aai.. Plato Prot. 334. d, Trept ov av 77 
 6 Xdyoy. /3) Before the Subjunct. Aorist, 
 expressing what may hereafter take place ; 
 Matt. 5, 19 os 8 av 71-0177077. vv. 21. 22. 10, 
 
 I 1 els TIV 8 av TTO\IV . . . eiVe X37Tf into what 
 soever city ye shall enter. 12, 32. 26, 48. 
 Mark 3, 28. 29. Luke 10, 35. John 1, 33 
 
 4, 14. Acts 7, 3 (quoted from Gen. 12, 1). 
 Rom. 10, 13. Rev. 13, 15. al. So Plut. 
 Mor. II. p. 22 oo-ov av 011-77077. Xen. An. 2. 
 
 2. 20. Hi. 1. 26. 
 
 b) After relative Adverbs, e. g. a) OTTOV 
 civ, wheresoever, with Subj. Aorist, Mark 9, 
 18. 14, 9. (Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 41. An. 2. 3. 
 26.) Also whithersoever, with Subj. Pre 
 sent, Luke 9, 57. James 3, 4. Rev. 14, 4. 
 So Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 6. |3) co-axis av, as 
 often as, with Subj. Present; 1 Cor. 11, 25. 
 26. y) a>? av, as, in whatever way, with 
 Subj. Present; 1 Thess. 2, 7 obs av rpo(pos 
 30X7777 TO. TeKva. 
 
 c) After particles of time, imparting to 
 them the idea of indefiniteness ; Winer 43. 
 
 5. a) d^pi ov &v, till, until a time indefi 
 nite ; so with the Subj. Aorist, 1 Cor. 15, 
 25. Rev. 2, 25. So axpis av Xen. An. 2. 
 
 3. 2; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 14, 15. /3) 
 ecos av, till, until, id. with Subj. Aorist, Matt. 
 2, 13. 5, 18. 22, 44 (quoted from Sept. Ps. 
 110, 1). Mark 6, 10. 9, 1. Luke 9, 27. 1 
 Cor. 4, 5. James 5, 7. al. saep. So Plut. 
 Mor. II. p. 126. Xen. An. 5. 1. 11. y) 
 rjviKa av, whenever, as soon as, indef. with 
 Subj. Aorist, 2 Cor. 3, 16. So Xen. Cyr. 
 1*2. 4. 8) ore av, see orai/. e) cos av, 
 whenever, as soon as, with Subj. Aorist ; 
 
av 
 
 41 
 
 1 Cor. 11, 34 us av eX2oj. Rom. 15,24 
 Lachm. So Ceb. Tab. 4 <ur av etVeXSwo-tv 
 tls TOV fiiov. ib. 9. 
 
 2. After the final particle OTTUS, indi 
 cating a purpose of which the accomplish 
 ment is possible, though uncertain, and 
 dependent on circumstances ; Winer j 43. 6. 
 Acts 3. 19 OTTCOS av eXSoxnv Kaipol dvatyv- 
 ecas that so perhaps may come times of re 
 freshing. Matt. 6, 5. Luke 2, 35. Acts 15, 
 17 comp. Sept. Am. 9, 12. Rom. 3, 4 
 comp. Sept. Ps. 51, 6. So App. Exp. 
 Alex. M. 4. 22. 7. Xen. An. 5. 9. 17. 
 
 III. With the OPTATIVE. Here av sub 
 jects the wish or supposition expressed by 
 the mood to some condition, and thus marks 
 it as uncertain and merely possible ; W T iner 
 5 43. 1. b. Buttm. 139. 15. Kiihn. $ 260. 4. 
 Ausf. Gr. 5 467. Thus 
 
 1. In wishes, prayers, etc. Acts 26, 29 
 fvt-aip.rjv av r<5 3e<5, / could pray to God, 
 i. e. were I to follow out my feelings, 
 though it might be in vain. Themist. 6. p. 
 80. d, eyo> 5e fvaifj.rjv av, 011% i/pas, dXX 
 vKtp i /jius 8f8ifvai. Xen. Mag. Eq. 8. 6. 
 So fiov\oifj.r)v av Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 1. Plato 
 Ion 532. a. 
 
 2. In interrogative clauses, where the 
 thing inquired about is certain or possible, 
 but the inquirer is in doubt when or how 
 it is to take place ; e. g. a) Direct, with 
 Opt. Present, Acts 8, 31 TTWJ yap av 8vvai- 
 p.rjv ; i. q. OVK av 8vvaip.rjv. So Pint. Mor. 
 II. p. 170 TTOJS av o vvaip.f Sa. rjv. Xen. An. 
 7. 6. 6. b) Indirect, with Opt. Present, 
 Luke 1, 62 ri av 3Xot KaXetcr3ai UVTOV, 
 rchat (how) he might wish him to be catted ? 
 since he was to have some name. Luke 9, 
 46. John 13, 24. Acts 2, 12. 10, 17. 17, 
 18. 20. With Opt. Aorist, Luke 6, 11 
 av iroif)<Tfiav r<5 ITJ&OV. Acts 5, 24. See 
 Winer ; 43. 4. * So Luc. D. Deor. 20. 2. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 24. 
 
 IV. With the INFINITIVE, espec. after 
 8o o> and other like verbs, where it ex 
 presses what one thinks may possibly take 
 place ; and so gives to the Infin. Aorist or 
 Present the force of a Future ; see Buttm. 
 139. m. 17. Kiihn. $ 260. 5. Id. Ausf. Gr. 
 \ 455. Ast Lex. Plat. I. p. 135. Thus, 
 
 2 Cor. 10, 9 iva pr) 8do> o>r av eK<po/3eii> 
 vfJias Sta ru>v emcrroXuiv, that I may not seem 
 as if (perhaps) about to terrify you by letters. 
 Plato Crat. 391. a, dXXa 8oK&> p.oi &8e av 
 fiaXXov TmSqo-eerSai trot. Rep. 336. e, xat 
 fiot SOKCO . . . a(pa>vos av ytve cr3at. ib. 457. d. 
 
 V. Once av occurs in an exceptive clause 
 without a verb, which however is to be sup 
 
 plied from the preceding context. 1 Cor. 7, 5 
 ur) uTrooTfperre dXXrjXouy, ei p.t) TI av [ye- 
 VOITO] fK (rvfjicpoivov irpbs Kaipov, i. e. ex 
 cept perhaps it be with consent for a time. 
 See Hartung Lehre v. d. Part. II. p. 330. 
 Kiihn. 261. 4. Winer 43. 1. fin. -f 
 
 II. av, conjunct, for tdv, if; with the 
 Subjunct. John 20, 23 bis. Its place is at 
 the beginning of a clause or proposition ; 
 and it is thus distinguished from the modal 
 av of the preced. article ; Herm. ad Vig. 
 p. 819, sq. Jos. Ant. 4. 4. 4. Xen. An. 
 
 5. 7. 5 tav uev e ycb (paivu>fj.ai ... ai> 8 rjiuv 
 (patVcoirat KT\. 
 
 ova, prep, up, upon, on, pr. implying 
 motion upwards, opp. Kara. ; see the com 
 pounds and ava>. In Gr. poets, c. dat. Horn. 
 II. 1. 15; in prose only c. ace. a* dva rov 
 TToraubv TrXeuv, opp. Kara poov, Hdot. 2. 96, 
 Pol. 3. 75. 3 ; then, through, throughout, as 
 if from bottom to top, dva rfjv EXXdSa, Hdot. 
 
 6. 131 ; TrXavav dva ra oprj Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 
 27 ; trop. of mode and manner, as dva xpa- 
 TOS q. d. from weakness up to strength, i. e. 
 strongly, rigorously, Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 30. ib. 
 5. 3. 12. See Buttm. 147. n. 1. Kiihn. $ 290 
 1. Ausf. Gr. ^ 602. Hence in N. T. only 
 with the Accusative. 
 
 1 . Of place, through ; as dm uf<rov TLVOS 
 through the midst of, e. g. TOV a-irov Matt 
 13, 25 ; TWJ/ 6pia>v Mark 7, 31. Sept. Is. 57, 
 
 5. (Diod. Sic. 2. 4. Xen. An. 7. 4. 2 dm TO 
 TreSioi/.) Also of rest, in the midst of, e. g. 
 dm ue&ov TOV Spoi/ou Rev. 7, 17 comp. 5, 
 6 ev /zeVw. Trop. of persons, between, 1 
 Cor. 6, 5. Sept. Ex. 11, 7. 1 Mace. 7, 28. 
 
 2. Of manner, as dva p.tpos, pr. through 
 each share or turn, i. e. by course, by turns, 
 alternately, 1 Cor. 14, 27. Pol. 4. 20. 10. 
 Gr. writers use more commonly KOTO, ut pos, 
 Xen. Hell. 6. 2. 29. Plato Legg. 671. c. 
 Hence 
 
 3. In a distributive sense, pr. through ; 
 as dm TTO.V ero? through every year, i. e. 
 every year, annually, Hdot. 7. 106 ; di>a 
 TreVre Trapacrdyyas TTJS rf^pas Xen. An. 4. 
 
 6. 4. In N. T. through, by, signifying man 
 ner, and approaching to the nature of an 
 adverb ; Mark 6, 40 dmreo-oi/ Trpacnal irpa- 
 trtai dva (KUTOV KT\. i.e. by hundreds. Luke 
 9, 14. 10, 1 UTreoTetXei/ avTovs dva 8vo, i. e. 
 two and two. So Pol. 2. 10. 3. Xen. An. 
 3. 4. 21 firoii]<TavTo e \6%ovs dva (KUTOV 
 oVSpar. Elsewhere in N. T. dva becomes 
 still more an adverb, each, apiece, standing 
 between a verb and its accusative, and qua 
 lifying the former ; Matt. 20, 9. 10 ?Xa/3o 
 dva 8r)vdpiov, they received each a denarius 
 Luke 9. 3. John 2, 6 vdpt at . . . 
 
42 
 
 dva ueTprjTas 8vo ij Tpels. Rev. 4, 8. Also 
 once before a nominative ; Rev. 21, 21 dva 
 
 flS fKClCTTOS TU>V 7TV\<aVa>V TfV KT\. Comp. 
 
 Horn. II. 18. 562 dm /3orpvey rjo-av. Pol. 3. 
 104. 4 e l/Tre/x^e TTJS VVKTOS (Is ras firiTTj- 
 dfioTaras VTro/SoXas 1 dva Siaxoaiovs Kal rpta- 
 Kocriovs . . . nnre ls. ib. 2. 24. 13. 
 
 NOTE. In composition dva denotes : a) 
 up, upicards ; as dvaj3aiva>. b) re-, back, 
 again, as if up stream, implying return, 
 repetition ; as dva^a>pea>, dvaKaivifa. c) 
 Emphasis, intensity ; as dvayivu>o-Ka>. 
 
 ara/3aS/i09, ov, 6, (ui/a/3cu i>a>), an as 
 cent, i. e. a stair, a step, Plur. stairs, lead 
 ing up into the fortress Antonia, Acts 21, 35. 
 40. See Jos. B. J. 5. 5. 8. Biblioth. Sac. 
 1846. p. 622. Sept. for nb?a 1 K. 10, 19. 
 20. Jos. Ant. 8. 5. 2. M.~H. A. 6. 61. 
 I Idot. 2. 125. The Attic form was dva- 
 @a<ru6s, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 324. 
 
 avaftaljKO, f. /S^o-o/iat, Q3atVa>,) aor. 2 
 dvffirjv, imperat. dca^St, also apoc. dvdfia 
 Rev. 4, 1 ; see Buttm. J 114 in ftaiva>. 
 
 1 . to go or come up, to ascend, to go from 
 a lower to a higher place ; e. g. as into a cha 
 riot, absol. Acts 8, 31 TrapeKaXeae re rbv <i- 
 \nnrov dvafidvra KaSiVai avv ara>. So John 
 
 10, 1 dvaj3alvu>v dXXa^oSev, climbing up 
 some oilier way, sc. into the sheep-fold, not 
 by the door. The place whence one goes 
 up is put with OTTO c. gen. Matt. 3, 16 OTTO 
 TOV vdaros. Rev. 7, 2 ; with eVc c. gen. Acts 
 8, 39 eK TOV vSaros. Rev. 11, 7. 13, 11. 
 The place whither one goes up, is put 
 with els c. ace. as els TO opos Matt. 5, 
 
 1. 14, 23. 15, 29. Mark 3, 13; also Matt. 
 15, 39. Mark 6, 51. John 7, 14. [John 21, 
 3 els TO TrXoTov] ; with eVt c. ace. Luke 5, 
 19 enl TO Scoua. 19, 4. So with OTTO Xen. 
 Hell. 6. 5. 26 ; ib. 5. 4. 58. Pol. 10. 4. 6 ; 
 els ,Xen. Hell. 1. 4. 19. Dem. 799. ult. eVt 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 39. Dem. 567. 13. In a 
 wider sense, of those who go from a lower 
 to a higher region of country ; comp. the 
 dvdftao-is of Xenophon, and Xen. An. 1.1. 
 
 2. So to Jerusalem, as situated on the 
 mountains ; els lepotroX. Matt. 20, 17. 18. 
 Mark 10, 32. (Jos. Ant. 12. 7. 6.) Absol. 
 of persons going up to Jerusalem ; John 7, 
 8 where ds T^V eopTrjv marks the object of 
 the journey. John 7, 10. 12, 20. Acts 18, 
 22. 24, 11. So Sept. and fibs Ezra 7, 6. 
 7. Also tls lovSalav Luke 2, 4, sc. from 
 Galilee, with OTTO and e* of place whence. 
 Spoken of those who ascend into heaven, 
 either to dwell with God or to have inter 
 course with him ; so dv. els TOV ovpavov Rev. 
 
 11, 12 ; ds TO fyos Eph, 4, 8 (Sept. Ps. 
 
 68, 19) ; vTTfpdvo) . . . T>V oi/p. Eph. 4, 10 
 irpbs TOV iraTfpa John 20, 17 bis ; OTTOU rjv 
 TO TrpuTepov John 6, 62, comp. 1,2. 14, 28 ; 
 &Se Rev. 4, 1. 11, 12; absol. Eph. 4, 9. 
 So of those acquainted with things from 
 heaven, or known only in heaven, John 3, 
 13. Rom. 10,6; comp. Deut. 30, 12. Prov. 
 30, 4. Here too belongs John 1 , 52 : ye 
 shall see heaven open, and the angels of God 
 ascending (dvafiaivovras) and descending 
 upon the Son of man, i. e. ye shall behold 
 the Son of man receiving constant commu 
 nications of divine power and favour from 
 the Father. Angels are here put to repre 
 sent the medium of communication ; but 
 not as implying their visible appearance ; 
 the figure being drawn from Gen. 28, 12. 
 
 2. Of things, to go or come up, to rise, to 
 be brought up ; e. g. a fish out of the sea, 
 Matt. 17, 27. (^Esop. F. 95 Kapiavos dnb TJJS 
 SaAacra-Tjs dvafids. ) Of smoke, to rise up, 
 Rev. 9, 2. 14, 11. 19, 3 ; c. dat. Rev. 8, 4 *cal 
 aveftr] 6 Kanvos TUIV 3tyita/zara>i/ rals Trpocr- 
 evxais TUIV ayiuv, i. e.for or in behalf of the 
 prayers of the saints, along with them and 
 aiding them; see Winer 31. 3 ult. Of 
 plants, to rise up, to grow up, Matt. 13, 7. 
 Mark 4, 8. 32. Sept. and rfsy Is. 5, 4. 
 (Xen. OZc. 19, 18 a/wreXos 1 dvaftaivovo-a /* 
 eVi TO. SevSpa. Theophr. H. PI. 8. 3.) Trop. 
 of a rumour, Acts 21,31 dve^ (pda-is rw ^t- 
 Xmp^w u-ord came up to the chiliarch, he 
 being in the fortress Antonia. Also of 
 prayers, dv. Ivomiov TOV Sfou Acts 10, 4. 
 Spoken likewise of thoughts, purposes, 
 which come up, arise, in one s mind, e. g. 
 tv TV Kap8ia Luke 24, 38 ; eVl riyi/ KapSiav 
 Acts 7, 23. 1 Cor. 2, 9 (comp. Is. 64, 4). 
 So Heb. Sb bs r&S , Sept. dvafiaivfiv eVt 
 Trjv Kapoiav, Jer. 3, T 16. 32,35. 44,21. -f 
 
 avaftdXko), f. /3aXw, (/3aXXco,) to throw 
 or cast up, a mound Thuc. 4. 90 ; to throw 
 or put back, to put off, ae^\ov Horn. Od. 19. 
 584. In N. T. Mid. dvapd\\ 0f j.ai, to 
 put off, to defer, in a judicial sense, c. ace. 
 of pers. Acts 24, 22. Sept. Ps. 78, 21. So 
 Diod. Sic. 16. 79 TTJV Kokaviv els fTepov 
 di>e/3aXero Kaipov. Plato Phaed. 107. a. Xen 
 Cyr. 8. 1. 18. 
 
 dvaftiftdfa, f. dvco, (/3i/3aco,) to male. 
 go up, to cause to ascend, Xen. 4. 2. 28. 
 In N. T. to draw up, to drag pr haul in, 
 e. g. a net to the shore, c. ace. et eVt rt, 
 Matt. 13, 48. Sept. for nh rt Gen. 37, 28. 
 So of ships id. Xen. Hell. 1. i. 2 -n-pbs TTJ* 
 yrjv dveflifldfc ray eavTov Tpirjpets. 
 
 dvafiXeTToy, f. ^ m , 03Xra>,) 1. to 
 look up, to raise the eyes, ety TQV ovpavov 
 
Matt. 14, 19. Mark 6, 41. 7, 34. Luke 9, 
 16; els avrov Acts 22, 13; absol. Mark 8, 
 
 24. 16, 4. Luke 19, 5. 21, 1. So ds rbv 
 ovp. 2 Mace. 7, 28. Plato Ax. 370. b. 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 4. 9 ; npos >a Plut. de Ani- 
 mse procreat. 28. Xen. Cyr. 1.4. 12. 
 
 2. to see again, to recover sight, as the 
 blind, Matt/ 11, 5. 20, 34. Mark 8, 25. 
 
 10, 51. 52. Luke 7, 22. 18, 41. 42. 43. 
 Acts 9, 12. 17. 18. 22, 13 dj/d/3Xe^ov. 
 Of one blind from his birth, John 9, 
 
 11. 15. 18 bis. Sept. for aisri Is. 42, 
 18. Plut. adv. Stoic. 10. Plato Phsedr. 
 243. b. 
 
 az/a/3\6>Jri9, ear, 17, (dra/SAeVw,) a see 
 ing again, recovery of sight, Luke 4, 19 ; 
 comp. Sept. Is. 61, 1. jEl. H. An. 17. 13. 
 
 dva/3od(0, w, f. Tjcra, (/Soaco,) to cry 
 aloud, sc. by lifting up the voice, to cry 
 out, absol. Mark 15, 8. Luke 9, 38 ; c. dat. 
 intens. (fxavfj p.*y. Matt. 27, 46. Sept. for 
 pSt Ez. llj 13 ; p2S Num. 20, 16. Luc. 
 Asm. 26. Pol. 8. 32. 3. Xen. An. 5. 4. 31. 
 
 dva/3o\rj, ^y, 17, (dz/a/3dXXo>,) pr. earth 
 throicn up Xen. An. 5. 2. 5. In N. T. in 
 a judicial sense, delay, a putting off, Acts 
 
 25, 17. So Dem. 235. 11. Plato Conv. 
 201. d. 
 
 ) ov, TO, (dwz, yala, yrj.) i. q. 
 v, for which it is substituted in later 
 editions ; written also dvwyatov, dvdyeov, 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 297; pr. any thing 
 above ground ; hence, an upper room, in 
 the upper story or connected with the roof, 
 for the reception of guests, a receiving-room 
 or parlour, i. q. TO U7rfp<5oi> where see ; 
 Mark 14, 15. Luke 22, 12 ; comp. Acts 20, 
 8. See Bibl. Res. in Pal. III. p. 26, 417. 
 So dfcoyatov Xen. An. 5. 4. 29. 
 
 avayye\\a), f. y f X, (dyye XXoo,) aor. 1 
 di/jjyyetXa, also Pass. aor. 2 dvrryyf^nv Rom. 
 15, 21 (Sept. Is. 52, 15). 1 Pet. 1, 12. 
 Hdian. 3. 1. 12, comp. Buttm. $ 101. n. 4 ; to 
 bring u-ord or announce back, to report back, 
 to tell, with ace. and dat. Acts 16, 38. 2 Cor. 
 7, 7 ; dat. and on John 5, 15, comp. v. 12. 
 13; ace. Acts 14, 27. So Xen. An. 1. 3. 
 21. Thuc. 4. 122. Hence genr. to an 
 nounce, to declare, to tell, c. ace. Mark 5, 19. 
 Acts 15, 4. 19, 18. Pass. c. dat. et Trept 
 rivos Rom. 15, 21, comp. Sept. Is. 52, 15. 
 With els c. ace. of place Mark 5, 14. Sept. 
 for *P5)-i Deut. 26, 3. Spoken of teachers, 
 to declare, to show forth, with ace. and dat. 
 John 4, 25. 16, 13. Acts 20, 27. 1 John 1, 
 5; Pa.sp. 1 Pet. 1, 12; c. dat. John 16, 14. 
 15. Acts 20, 20 ; dat. and Trepi TWOS John 
 
 43 avay/caio$ 
 
 16, 25. Sept. for yr* Hiph. Deut. 8, 3 
 rrr; Hiph. Deut. 24, 8V 
 
 dvayevvdco, a>, f. 770-0), (yewdo>,) pr. to 
 beget anew; hence trop. to regenerate, to 
 renew, a person by a change from a carnal 
 to a Christian life, from sinful to holy affec 
 tions ; c. ace. 1 Pet. 1, 3. Pass. v. 23. 
 Kindred are : vlovs 3eoC elvca. Gal. 3, 26 ; 
 TfKva Seov yeveVSat John 1, 12. 13 ; e* SeoC 
 yfvvrj^rjvai 1 John 3, 9 ; avafttv yei/j/TjS/ji ai 
 John 3, 3. 
 
 avayiVCOCrKd), f. yi/coo-o/nat, (yii/a>cnca>,) 
 aor. 2 dveyvwv ; Pass. perf. dveyvcoo-[iai, 
 aor. 1 di>fyva>o-%r]v \ intens. to know accu 
 rately, precisely, Horn. H. 13. 734 ; also to 
 know again, to recognize, Hdot. 2. 91. In 
 N. T. pr. to know and distinguish accurate 
 ly ; spec, to know by reading, and hence, to 
 read a writing or book. 
 
 1. Genr. to read for oneself, to know by 
 reading, c. ace. John 19, 20 TW rtrXov ?roX- 
 Xoi dveyvaxrav. 2 Cor. 1, 13 ; C. aCC. of the 
 author of a book, Acts 8, 28. 30; absol. 
 Matt. 24, 15. Mark 13, 14. Acts 23, 34. 
 Rev. 1, 3. Trop. 2 Cor. 3, 2. So c. ace. 
 ./El. V. H. 14. 43. Xen. An. 1. 6. 4 ; absol. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 20. Aor. 2 dvtyvatv, to 
 have read, to know by reading, e. g. c. ace. 
 Tt Matt. 12, 3 ; ori Matt. 19, 4. 21, 16 ; eV 
 of place where, and OTI Matt. 12, 5. 21, 42. 
 
 2. Spec, to read before others, to reaa 
 aloud, c. ace. Acts 13, 27 ; ace. of the au 
 thor Acts 15, 21. 2 Cor. 3, 15. Pass. c. 
 dat. 1 Thess. 5, 27. Sept. often for SO 
 Deut. 31, 11. Neh. 13, 1. 1 Mace. 10,7. 
 Xen. Hell. 7. 1. 39. + 
 
 dvayKa^Q), f. do-ca, (di/dy/cr;,) to necessi 
 tate, to compel, to constrain, by authority, 
 threats, or also by persuasion ; constr. pr. 
 with ace. of pers. and inf. So with inf. 
 pres. Gal. 6, 12; ace. om. Acts 26, 11 ; 
 Pass. Gal. 2, 14. (Plato Prot. 326. c; ace. 
 om. 1 Mace. 2. 25. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 44.) 
 With inf. aor. Matt. 14. 22. Mark 6, 45 ; 
 ace. om. Luke 14, 23 ; inf. om. 2 Cor. 12, 
 1 1 ; Pass. Acts 28,19. Gal. 2, 3. So Hdian. 
 4. 9. 6. Xen. Conv. 3. 5. 
 
 avayfcalos, a, ov, (di/dy*?;,) Act. neces 
 sitating, compulsory, Horn. Od. 17. 399 ; 
 Pass, necessitated, compelled, Od. 24. 498. 
 In N. T. necessary, e. g. a) As depend 
 ing on the laws of nature and life ; 1 Cor. 
 12, 22. Tit. 3, 14 fir TO.S dvayKaias xpei as 
 for the necessary wants of Christian breth 
 ren. So Pol. 5. 56. 12. Xen. Mem. 4. 5. 9. 
 b) As connected by natural and necessary 
 ties, as kindred, friends, near ; Acts 1 0, 24 
 TOVS dvayxaiovs <f)iKovs. So Pol. 5. 71. 2. 
 
Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 14. c) Neut. dvayiauov 
 fivai, to be necessary, needful, i. e. to be 
 right, proper ; Acts 13, 46 vfj.lv rjv dvayKai- 
 ov, i. e. it was matter of duty. Heb. 8, 3 
 o&fv dvayKaiov sc. ecri. Phil. 1, 24. So 
 Pol. 6. 15. 9. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 25. Also 
 dvayKaiov rjyfop.at, to regard as necessary, 
 to think right and proper, 2 Cor. 9, 5. Phil. 
 2, 25. So 2 Mace. 9, 21. 
 
 avaytcaa TfOS, adv. (dvayKcurros, dvdy- 
 *7,) by constraint, unwillingly, opp. eKovaius, 
 
 1 Pet. 5, 2. Plato Ax. 366. a. 
 
 dvdjKf], rjs, t), (kindr. ayxo>,) 1. neces 
 sity, need, as arising : a) From the influ 
 ence of others, constraint, 1 Cor. 7, 37. 
 
 2 Cor. 9, 7. Philem. 14. So Xen. Cyr. 8. 
 1. 20. b) From the nature and circum 
 stances of the case, Matt. 18, 7. Heb. 7, 12. 
 27. 9, 16. 23. So Jos. Ant. 16. 9. 3. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1.2.15. c) From obligation, duty ; 
 e. g. dvayxrjv e^w, I have need, I must needs, 
 it is right and proper, Luke 14, 18. 23, 17. 
 Jude 3 ; dvdyia) eori c. inf. there is need, 
 Rom. 13, 5. 1 Cor. 9, 16 dvdyiaj yap fioi 
 fniKeiTai,for necessity is laid upon me, an 
 obligation which I cannot resist. So Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 8. 2. Cyr. 2. 4. 12. 
 
 2. Spec, difficulty, distress, straits, Luke 
 21, 23. 1 Cor. 7, 26. 2 Cor. 6. 4. 12, 10. 
 1 Thess. 3, 7. Sept. for pisa p s . 119, 
 143 ; ftj3n Ps. 25, 17 ; rns Job 27, 9. 
 Hdot. 1. 116. Diod. Sic. 4. 43. Xen. Mem. 
 3. 12. 2 fls ras dvdynas ras dXyftvordras 
 
 dvayvcopl^co, f. /oxo, (yvupifa,} pr. to 
 know again, to recognize, Plato Lach. 181. 
 c. In N. T. only Pass. aor. 1 dveyvwpla-^v 
 with Mid. reflexive signif. to let oneself be 
 recognized, to make oneself known, Acts 7, 
 13. Sept. for S Vinn Gen. 45, 1. See 
 Buttm. ^136. Kiihn. 250. R. 1. 
 
 avayvaxTlS) ems, fj, (dvayiva>cn<a>,) read 
 ing, for oneself 1 Tim. 4, 13; aloud in 
 public Acts 13, 15. 2 Cor. 3, 14. Sept. for 
 a^pa. Neh. 8, 3. Pol. 9. 1. 5. Plato Eu- 
 thyd. 279. e. 
 
 avayo), f. ao>, (ayw,) aor. 2 dvrryayov, 
 Pass. aor. 1 dvrjxfyv- 
 
 1 . to lead or conduct up, to bring up, from 
 a lower to a higher place ; so with ace. and 
 els c. ace. of place, Luke 2, 22 dvi]yayov 
 avrbv fls lepocroXu/ia, see in dva/3aiva> no. 1. 
 Luke 4, 5. Acts 9, 39. 16, 34 fls rov otxov 
 avrov, i. e. from the dungeon to his own 
 dwelling. Pass. Matt. 4, 1. Sept. for 
 fi-gri Gen. 50, 24. So Plato Rep. 533. d, 
 f\K(i Kal dvdyti avco Xen. Hell. 1. 4. 6. 
 
 44 dva^dco 
 
 As in Engl. to lead up before a tribunal, as 
 occupying a higher place ; Luke 22, 66 dv. 
 avrav els TO crvvedpiov they led him up into 
 (before) the Sanhedrim. Acts 12, 4 dvaya- 
 ytlv avrbv rm Xaw, to bring him up, sc. for 
 sentence and execution, to the people, i. e. 
 in the presence of the people ; comp. v. 6. 
 So 2 Mace. 6, 10. Xen. Hell. 3. 3. 11. Of 
 sacrifices, to offer, sc. by leading up the 
 victim or placing the sacrifice upon the al 
 tar ; Acts 7, 41 dvrjyayov Svcrt ov r<5 etSw 
 So Sept. and nbrn i K. 3, 1 5 ; and so 
 Sept. dvatpepco Lev. 14, 20. Hdot. 2. 60. 
 Also dvayaytlv CK veapaiv, to bring up from 
 the dead, from the grave, Rom. 10, 7. Heb. 
 13, 20. So Sept. and rfen p s . 30, 4. 
 71, 20. 
 
 2. Spec, as a nautical term, dvdyeiv vavv, 
 to lead up a ship, to put out to sea, since 
 from the shore the sea appears as an accli 
 vity, Hdot. 8. 57, 70, 83 ; vavv om. 8. 76. 
 Comp. in eVavayto. Hence in N. T. Mid. 
 or Pass, dvayopai, Aor. dvr)x%T)v, to put 
 to sea, to launch forth, to set sail, fully lv 
 TrXot w Acts 28, 11 ; absol. Luke 8, 22. Acts 
 21, 1. 2. 27, 2. 28, 10 ; with OTTO c. gen. 
 whence, Acts 13,13. 16,11. 18,21. 27, 
 21 ; fls c. ace. whiter, Acts 20, 3. 13 ; Acd*cel- 
 3ei/ Acts 27, 4. 12. So Plut. Cato Min. 56. 
 ib. Thes. 26. Xen. An. 5. 7. 17. 
 
 f. Sei w , (SetW/at.) to 
 show aloft, as a torch Pol. 8. 30. 10. In N. T. 
 to show forth, to declare, c. ace. Acts 1, 24. 
 (Pol. 2. 46. 5. Xen. Hell. 3. 5. 16.) Hence 
 to declare, to appoint, c. ace. Luke 10, 1. 
 So 2 Mace. 14, 12 o-Tparrryov. Diod. Sic. 
 1. 66. 
 
 iglS, fas, f), (avaSeucif/ii,) a show 
 ing forth, sign, Diod. Sic. 1. 85. In N. T. 
 a showing forth, manifestation, i. e. the pub 
 lic appearance t)f John the Baptist, Luke 1 , 
 80. So Pol. 15. 26. 7. Plut. Mar. 8. 
 
 t, f. o/iat, Mid. depon. ( - 
 t,) to take up, to catch, as a shield 
 catches darts, Horn. II. 5. 619 ; to take upon 
 oneself, 2 Mace. 8, 36. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 18. 
 In N. T. to take up, to receive, e. g. per 
 sons as guests, c. ace. Acts 28, 7. (So 
 SfXOfjLai Diod. Sic. 13. 4; inrodexo^ai JEA. 
 V. H. 4. 9.) Trop. to take to oneself, to re 
 ceive, e. g. ras fTrayyeXias Heb. 11, 17. 
 
 amSt 8a>/u, f. Sa>o-a>, (& &co/,) to give 
 up, to deliver up, e. g. a letter to any one, 
 c. ace. et dat. Acts 23, 33. Pol. 29. 10. 7. 
 Xen. Conv. 2. 8. 
 
 avaLfiw, oj, f. 770-0), (fao).) to revive, to 
 live again, intrans. Rom. 14,9 and Rev. 20 
 
45 
 
 5 Rec. Trop. of one lost and restored to 
 his friends, Luke 15, 24. 32. Trop. also of 
 sin, to revive, to gain strength ; Rom. 7, 9 
 T) 6fj.apria dvffytrcy. So trop. Artemid. 4. 82. 
 
 avatyjTeo), >, f. ijo-w, (aw intens. 7- 
 rew.) to seek diligently, again and again, to 
 inquire after, c. ace. Luke 2, 44. [45.] 
 Acts 11, 25. Sept. for ^ Job 3, 4; HJ3 
 Job 10. 6. ^El. V. H. 3. 28. Plato Apol. 1 8. b. 
 
 avafowvfju, f. o>o-a>, (a>wv/u,) to gird 
 up with a belt or girdle ; Mid. to gird up one 
 self, to be girded. The orientals dress in long 
 loose robes flowing down around the feet ; 
 so that when they wish to run, or fight, or 
 apply themselves to any business, they are 
 accustomed to bind their garments close 
 around them. Hence 1 Pet. 1, 13 trop. c. 
 ace. dvafacrdfjLfvoi TO.S ocrfyvas TTJS Stavoias, 
 having girded up the loins of your mind, 
 holding your minds in constant preparation. 
 So Sept. and itK Prov. 31, 17. 
 
 ava%(i)7TVpe(i)) >, f. TJO-CO, (^OOTTU/H CO, f- 
 Trvpov ; a>6s, Trvp,) to light up again, to 
 kindle up, pr. as fire ; in N. T. and else 
 where only trop. to kindle up, to stir up, to 
 excite to new life and vigour, c. ace. 2 Tim..l , 
 t>. Sept. intrans. for mn Gen. 45, 27. 
 Trans. Jos. Ant 8. 8. 5. Pass. Plato Rep. 
 527. d. Xen. Eq. 10. 16. 
 
 dva%d\\(0, f. oXw, (3dXXo>,) aor. 2 di/e- 
 SoXoi/ a rare form Winer } 15. Buttm. Ausf. 
 Sprachl. II. p. 195; to put forth anew, to 
 flourish again, to come into fresh leaf and 
 blossom, as a tree Horn. H. 1. 236. Wisd. 4,4. 
 Also trans, to make put forth anew, to make 
 flourish again, Sept. Ez. 17,24 e yw . . . 
 ^r/paivcov v\ov xXcopdf, Kal draSdAXwi v- 
 \oi> rjp6i>. Ecclus. 50, 10 ; trop. as flpf]vijv, 
 tvXoyiav, Ecclus. 1, 18. 11, 22. In N. T. 
 once trop. Phil 4, 10 on dvfSdXfTt TO vnep 
 e /xov (ppovflv, i. e. either trans, that ye hare 
 let your care for me put forth (flourish) 
 again ; or intrans. that ye have put forth 
 again (are again prospered) as to your care 
 for me. The former seems preferable on 
 account of the ace. TO (frpovflv. 
 
 avajfjia, O.TOS. TO, (dwm Sty/it,) pr. any 
 thing consecrated to the gods, a sacred gift 
 or offering, laid up or suspended in the tem 
 ple of a god, Plut. Pelop. 25 eVe^e/p^o-fi/ 
 dvd3f/ia Toidi/Se Troirycrat. Sept. forO"?.n Josh. 
 7, 11, comp. v. 23; comp. also 6, 19. 24. 
 A later form for the Attic dvdSr/jua, Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 249. But Heb. tnrt, Sept 
 dvctiffjLa, is said also of persons or ani 
 mals consecrated or devated to God, Lev. 27, 
 
 avaipecrts 
 
 28 comp. v. 29 ; and as every .iving thing 
 thus devoted could not be redeemed, but 
 was to be put to death, hence Q"jn and Sept 
 di/a3e/ia denote any thing devoted to death 
 or destruction, any thing accursed, on which 
 a curse is laid, as cities and their inhabit 
 ants which were to be destroyed, Josh. 6, 
 17. 18. 7, 1. etc. In Deut. 7, 26 it is pa 
 rallel with /38/Xuy/ia, an abominable thing 
 Hence in N. T. an anathema, curse, 
 Acts 23, 14 dw3e/MaTi di/a3ep.(mcra/x)/ tav- 
 TOVS we hare cursed ourselves with a curse, 
 have bound ourselves by a curse. Meton. 
 of persons, one accursed, i. e. separated from 
 God s favour and delivered over to destruc 
 tion ; 1 Cor. 12, 3 Xeyetv ITJO-OVV dva 
 16, 22. Gal. 1, 8. 9. Rom. 9, 3 ava 
 flvai diro TOU XptcrToO, to be accursed from 
 Christ, i. e. to be separated from Christ and 
 the benefits of his death, and devoted to 
 eternal destruction ; for this use of dno 
 comp. 2 Thess. 1, 9. 
 
 avaSfeparifa, f. i<ra>, (dwiSf/ia,) to 
 anathematize, to lay under a curse, to curse, 
 absol. Mark 14, 71 ; to bind by a curse, c. 
 ace. Acts 23, 12. 14. 21, see in di/dSf/ta. 
 Sept. for D"nnn Num. 18, 14. Josh. 6,21 
 so 1 Mace. 5, 5. 
 
 avaStecopeoo, f. ^o-w, (dvd intens. 3f- 
 pe ca,) to behold attentively, to consider dili 
 gently, c. ace. Acts 17, 23. Hob. 13, 7. 
 Diod. Sic. 14. 109. Luc. Vit. Auct. 2. 
 
 aros, TO, (diwi Sq/iu,) a gift, 
 offering, consecrated to God and laid up or 
 suspended in the temple, Luke 21,5. On 
 the form, see in dvd^fp.a. So Pol. 11, 4. 1. 
 Xen. Hell. 7. 3. 8. Votive offerings, such 
 as shields, chaplets, golden chains and can 
 dlesticks, and the spoils of enemies, were 
 common in the temples of the heathen; 
 Potter s Gr. Ant. I. p. 235. Adam s Rom. 
 Ant. p. 322. Diet, of Antt. art. Donaria. 
 The same custom was imitated in the Jew 
 ish temple ; see dmS^/m Jos. Ant. 15. 11. 3 
 ult B. J. 2. 17. 3. Judith 16, 19. 2 Maor 
 5, 16. 9, 16. 3 Mace. 3, 17. 
 
 avaioeuz, as, fj, (avails ; a priv. atSe o- 
 /zat,) pr. shamelessness, impudence ; put for 
 importunity Luke 11, 8. Ecclus. 25, 22. 
 Plato Legg. 841. a. 
 
 avaipe<ri$, ea>j, fj, (dj/atpeco,) a taking 
 up or away, of dead bodies for burial, Thuc. 
 3. 113. In N. T. a taking aicay from life, 
 i. e. death, a putting to death, Acts 8, 1. 
 [22, 20.] Sept. for ^ Num. 11, 15. So 
 2 Mace. 5, 13. Hdian. 2. 13. 1. Plut. M. 
 Crass. 4. 
 
46 
 
 avaipea), S>, f. rjcra, (alpeo),*) aor. 2 dvel- 
 \ov, whence instead of aj/ei Xere, Mid. avtl- 
 Xe, we have in later editions the Alexan 
 drine forms dveiXire, dmXaro, Acts 2, 23. 
 7, 21. Sept. Is. 38, 14; for which see 
 Phryn. et Lob. p. 183 ; JJuttm. } 96. n. 1 
 marg. Winer Gr. 5 13. 1. To take up, lift 
 up, from the ground, Horn. Od. 3. 453. 
 Sept. for Di nri Num. 16, 37. Mid. id. Xen. 
 An. 5. 7. 21. Also to take up for burial, 
 Dem. 1069. 2. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1 . Pr. to take up ; Mid. trop. to take up 
 Jor oneself, e. g. a child exposed, to adopt, 
 to bring up, c. ace. Acts 7, 21 avrbv dvei- 
 Xaro, i. e. Pharaoh s daughter took up Mo 
 ses, adopted him. Diod. Sic. 3. 58 draXe- 
 <r3ai TO fip((pos, comp. Sept. Ex. 2, 10. So 
 Lat. tollo, Cic. Div. 1. 21. 
 
 2. to take up and carry away, to take 
 away, to remove, e. g. a table and its dishes 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 8. 20. Hence in N. T. a) 
 Of things, sacrifices, to take away, to abol 
 ish, c. ace. Heb. 10, 9. So Pol. 32. 1. 3. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 1. 1. b) Of persons, to put 
 L . i. w. A3P ~ away, to put to death, to kill, to slay, c. ace. 
 Matt. 2, 16. Luke 22, 2. Acts 5, 33. 36. 7, 
 28 bis. 9, 23. 24. 29. 16, 27 eavrov dvai- 
 pftv. 23, 15. 21. 27. 25, 3. Spoken of a 
 public execution, Luke 23, 32. Acts 2, 23. 
 10, 39. 12, 2. 13, 28. 22, 20. 26, 10. So 
 Sept. for ninn Ex. 21, 29 ; inrt 2 Sam. 
 10, 18. Hdian. 2. 1. Plato Legg. 870. d. 
 
 avairioSj iov, 6, TJ, adj. (a priv. am a,) 
 blameless, guiltless, Matt. 12,5.7. Sept. for 
 n pj Deut. 19, 10. 13. ^Elian. V. H. 5. 18. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 10. 
 
 avaKcfeifo, f. lo-o), (KaSi fco,) pr. trans. 
 to set up ; in N. T. intrans. or with eavrov 
 impl. to sit up, Luke 7, 15. Acts 9, 40. 
 Plut. Philop. 20 poXis eavTov eV u 
 . Mid. Plato Phaed. 60. b. 
 
 ) f. icrco, (Kaiv/^o),) to renew, 
 to restore to a former state, c. ace. Sept. TO 
 Trpoa-toTTOv TTJS yrjs for ^ Hl Ps. 104, 30 ; rbv 
 vaov Jos. Ant. 9. 8. 2 ; rov Trokf^ov Plut. 
 Marcell. 6. In N. T. trop. to rengw els 
 pfTovoiav, sc*. apostates from the true faith 
 in Christ, to bring them back to repentance 
 and their former faith, c. ace. Heb. 6, 6. 
 Sept. trop. for tt^nnn Ps. 103, 5. So 1 
 Mace. 6, 9. Luc. Philopatr. 12 81 voaros 
 fjpds dvfKaivio-ev. Pass. Isocr. Areop. 3. p. 
 141. d. 
 
 avaKaivooo, , f. ebo-eo, (Kaii/o<,) to re 
 new, to renovate, to refresh, to invigorate, 
 Pass. 2 Co*. 4, 16. Trop. to renew, to 
 change from a carnal to a Christian life, 
 
 from sinful to holy affections, Pass. Col. 3i 
 10 ; comp, Eph. 4, 23. John 3, 5. Found 
 elsewhere only in ecclesiast. writers ; the 
 Attics employed avaauuvlfa q. v. H. Planck 
 de Nat. et Ind. p. 51. Winer 16. 1. 
 
 dvafCalvcCXTIS, ems, T], (dl/aKaet>o ffl,) a 
 
 renewing, renovation, trop. of the heart 
 from sinful to holy affections, Rom. 12, 2. 
 Tit. 3, 5. 
 
 dvaKO\,VTTT(0, f. ^w, (KoXvTTTto,) to 
 uncover, to unveil, Sept. for 1"&5 Deut. 22, 
 30. Xen. Conv. 1. 16. In N. T. trop. to 
 unveil, to remove a veil from the mind 01 
 heart, by which the truth is shut out ; Pass. 
 2 Cor. 3, 14 TO Ka\vfj,p.a pevci . . . p.rj dvana- 
 XvTTTOjjLfvov, the same veil remaineth un 
 veiled, not taken away, i. e. the blindness 
 and prejudices of their minds remain, v. 18 
 dj aKaXuTTTo/xe j Q) Trpoo-wTrw, with unveiled 
 face, the veil of blindness being taken 
 away; comp. v. 13. Sept. for !"!^5 Is. 22, 
 14 ; rns Is. 3, 17. So Pol. 4. 85!V 
 
 f. ^<B, (Ka/wrrw,) pr. 
 trans, to bend or turn back; in N. T. in 
 trans. to turn back, to return, c. irpos TWO. 
 Matt. 2, 12. Acts 18, 21 ; absol. Heb. 11, 
 15. Sept. for siti Ex. 32, 27. So Diod. 
 Sic. 3. 55. Plato Phaed. 72. b. Trop. Luke 
 10, 6 (; flprjvrj vp,a>v) e < vfjias dvaKa^a. 
 your peace (salutation) shall return to you 
 again, i. e. shall be without fruit, as though 
 it had never been given ; comp. Is. 45, 23. 
 55, 11. Farall. is Matt. 10, 13. 
 
 avcuceifACU,) f. Kflcro^ai, (*cei/iat,) to be 
 laid up, as offerings in the heathen temples, 
 Ceb. Tab. 1. Thuc. 3. 114; and also in 
 the Jewish temple, Jos. Ant. 3.1.7; comp. 
 in dvd%T)[jLa. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1 . to be laid out, as a dead body on a ta 
 ble or the like, Mark 5, 40 Rec. 
 
 2. to lie up at a table, to recline at table, 
 i. e. upon a couch or triclinium, which was 
 usually higher than the low table itself, in 
 the ancient manner of eating ; see Potter s 
 Gr. Antt. II. p. 376 sq. Adam s Rom. 
 Antt. p. 436. Diet, of Antt. arts. Tricli 
 nium, Ccena. Earlier Gr. writers used 
 Kel/wu simply, Lob. ad Phr. p. 216, 217. 
 Corresp. in Engl. is to sit at table, to sit at 
 meat; so absol. Mat. 26, 7. Mark 14, 18. 
 16, 14; Part. <5 dvaKfifj.evos, one at table, a 
 guest, Matt. 22, 10. 11. Luke 22, 27 bis. 
 John 6, 11. 13, 28 ; with ^rd TWOS Matt. 
 26, 20; with trw TIVI [John 12, 2] ; with 
 ev c. dat. of place Matt. 9, 10. Luke 
 7, 37. John 13, 23 dva/ce/juez/os Iv TO KoX- 
 TTW TOW Ir)<rov, lying in the bosom of Je 
 
47 
 
 sus, i. e. next to him on the triclinium ; so 
 Lat. in sinu recitmbo Plin. Ep. 4. 1 Esdr. 
 4, 10. Athen. 7. 35, 58. Pol. 13. 6. 8. 
 
 ava/C(:<f)d\CllOCi), &, f. cocrco, (*f (^aXcudw,) 
 to sum up, to recapitulate, as an orator at 
 the close of his discourse; Quinct. 6. 1, 
 " rerum repetitio et congregatio, qua? Grae- 
 cis dvaKf<pa\aiu<ns dicitur." Hence in N. 
 T. a) Pass, to be summed up, comprehended 
 hi one ; i. e. several precepts under one 
 more general, Rom. 13, 9. b) Mid. spoken 
 of God, Eph. 1, 10 dvaK((pa\ai<ao-a(r 5ai ra 
 ndvra ev TO> Xpicrrw, to gather together for 
 himself into one all things in Christ, i. e. 
 to bring together in Christ into one body all 
 the parts now severed and scattered ; espec. 
 the Jews and Gentiles, comp. Eph. 2, 14. 
 15. Comp. Aristot. wept Se TCOV dioXoyo>- 
 TaTatv ei> Ty yr) p.{p(ov vvv Xey&>/n.ei>, aura 
 TCI dvayKuia dt>aKf(pd^aiovp.fvoi,, quoted in 
 Wetst. N. T. ad Rom. 13, 9. 
 
 ava,K\lv(i), f. j/w, ((cXiVw,) to make re- 
 dine, to lei lean back against any thing, e. 
 g. rot-a TTOTI yair) Horn. II. 4. 113. Hence 
 in N. T. 
 
 1 . Pr. to make lean or lie back, to lay down, 
 as an infant for sleep, Luke 2, 7. Mid. of 
 a person asleep, Horn. Od. 18. 189. 
 
 2. In the later usage, to make lean back, 
 or recline in order to take a meal ; pri at 
 table upon the triclinium, Luke 12, 37; see 
 fully in dwiKei/iai no.. 2. Used also of those 
 reclining upon the grass for the same pur 
 pose, Mark 6, 39. Luke 9, 15. Mid. to lean 
 or lie back, to recline at table, i. q. di/d/eei- 
 fMi no. 2 ; absol. Luke 7, 36 ; also upon 
 the grass, eVi TOVS xP TOVS Matt. 14, 19. 
 Trop. Matt. 8, 11 and Luke 13, 29 dvaic\. 
 UfTO. Afipadfi . . . (v TTJ /3a(riXei a ratv ovp. i. 
 e. in splendid banquets with the patriarchs ; 
 under which image the later Jews typified 
 the happiness of the righteous in the king 
 dom of the Messiah ; comp. Matt. 22, 1 . 
 Luke 14, 15. 22, 30. Schoettgen Hor. Heb. 
 in Matt. 1. c. Pol. 31. 4. 5 ovs 8" dveK\ivf. 
 
 dvaKOTTTO), f. ^o>, (KOTTTO),) to beat or 
 drive back, the sea Jos. Ant. 2. 16. 2 ; an 
 assailant Time. 4. 12. Hence in N. T. to 
 hinder, to check, c. ace. Gal. 5, 7 Rec. ris 
 vfj.ds uviKo-^rf ; where later edit. eVeKo\|/-e. 
 So Wisd. 18, 23. Plut. J. Caes. 38. 
 
 dvcucpafa, f. co, (Kpao>,) to cry aloud, 
 to cry out, by lifting up the voice, intrans. 
 Mark 1, 23. 6, 49. Luke 4, 33 8, 28. 23, 
 18. Sept. for p?J l K. 22, 32 ; ^n Josh. 
 6,5; SOfc Judg. 7, 20. Pol. 36. 5. 3. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. T 3 T . 67. 
 
 ava/cpivco, f. V S>, (Kpiva),) pr. to separate 
 or divide up ; hence trop. 
 
 1 . to examine u-ell, to search carefully, to 
 inquire into, e. g. a) Genr. c. ace. Acts 17, 
 11 Tas.ypcxpds. 1 Cor. 10, 25.27 pySev 
 dvaKpivovTfs lit. searching out nothing, 
 asking no questions ; comp. in dXioyrjpa. 
 Sept. for "in 1 Sam. 20, 12. So Jos. Ant. 
 2. 6. 6. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 13. b) In a forensic 
 sense, to examine, as a judge, c. ace. Luke 23, 
 14. Acts 4, 9. 12, 19. 24, 8. 28, 18 ; so of 
 other persons 1 Cor. 9. 3. So Susann. vv. 
 48. 51. Plato Legg. 855. e. In Gr. writers 
 also of a previous private examination, to 
 determine whether an action would lie, 
 Dem. 1066. 9. 
 
 2. to judge of, to estimate, to understand 
 and appreciate, c. ace. 1 Cor. 2, 15. 4, 3. 4. 
 Pass. 1 Cor. 2,14. 15. 4, 3. 14, 24. Pha- 
 vorin. dvaKpivai TO Trpa^ev eeruo>, et KU- 
 Xwy 77 KUKUIS trrpdx%T]. 
 
 dvdfcpicris, f <oy, 77, (dvanpiva), ) exami 
 nation before a judge, Acts 25, 26. Pol. 12. 
 27. 3. Plato Legg. 855. e. Of a previous 
 private examination, see in dvaKpiva no. 1. b, 
 Dem. 1142. 10. 
 
 dvaKVTTTW, f. ^co, (KUTJTO),) to lift up 
 oneself from a stooping posture, to rise up, 
 intrans. Luke 13, 11. John 8, 7. 10; trop. 
 to be elated with joy, Luke 21, 28. Sept. for 
 S5K-I K^3 Job 10, 15. Luc. de Dom. 2. 
 Xen. Eq . 7, 10; trop. Pol. 1..55. 1. Xen. 
 CEc. 11. 5. 
 
 dva\afJ,(3dva), f. X^o/zat, (Xa/i/3dj/co,) 
 to take up, e. g. 
 
 1. Pr. from the ground, Sept. for rif5b 
 Judg. 19, 28 ; XC3 Josh. 4, 8. Hence 
 in N. T. dvf\r](p^ els ovpavov, to be taken 
 up, received up, into heaven, Mark 16, 19. 
 Acts 1, 11. 10, 16; simpl. di/eXrj(/>37 id. 
 Acts 1, 2. 22; ev Sogrj 1 Tim. 3, 16. So 
 Sept. and nb 2 K. 2, 9. 10. 1 Mace. 2, 58. 
 Ecclus. 48, 9. Philo Vit. Mos. II. p. 179. 5. 
 
 2. to take up with the idea of bearing ; 
 Acts 7, 43 dj/eXa/Sere TTJV a-KijvfjV TOV MoXo ^^ 
 quoted from Am. 5, 26, where Sept. for 
 Xtt33 ; referring to the time of the wander 
 ings in the desert. Also to take up arms, wea 
 pons, in order to bear or wear them, Eph. 6, 
 13. 16. Sept for MJ?b Num. 25, 7 ; ^ Deut. 
 1, 41. Hdian. 2. 6. 19. Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 6. 
 
 3. to take up as a companion, fellow- 
 traveller, to take along, Acts 20, 13. 14. 23, 
 31. 2 Tim. 4, 11. Sept. for n^b Gen. 24, 
 6!._Jos. Ant. 4. 5. 1. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 19. 
 
 dvd\r)-^n<>, ey, fj, (ava^a^dvat q. V.) 
 a taking up, into heaven, Luke 9, 51. 
 Test. XII Patr. p. 585. 
 
48 
 
 Avavias 
 
 dva\l(TKa), f. Xoxrco, (dAi o-Kopn,) ROT. 1 
 a;/ijXwcra and draXwcra, Matth. 166. n. 2. 
 Bultm. ^ 114 ; to use up in a bad sense, to 
 consume, to spend, e. g. money Xen. Mem. 
 2. 7. 11. In N. T. of persons, to consume, 
 to destroy, c. ace. Luke 9, 54. 2 Thess. 2, 8. 
 Pass. Gal. 5, 15. Sept. for ^3 Jer. 50, 7 ; 
 fibs Is. 32, 10. So 2 Mace. 2, 10. Xen. 
 Cyr. 2. 1. 8. 
 
 avaXoyia, as, fj, (dmXoyoy, Xo yos.) 
 analogy, proportion; Rom. 12, 6 Kara TTJV 
 dvdXoyiav Trio-Tews, i. e. according to the 
 proportion or measure of one s faith, like 
 fierpov Tncrretoy v. 3. Pol. 9. 20. 1. Plato 
 Polit. 257. b, Kara TTJV dvakoyiav TTJV TIJS 
 v/JifTepas Tfxvrjs. 
 
 dva\oyio/Aai, f. la-opai, (Xoyi fo/ttj) 
 
 to reckon up, to count up, arithmetically, 
 Plato Prot. 332. c. In N. T. trop. to reckon 
 up, to consider, Heb. 12, 3. So Jos. Ant. 
 4. 8. 46. Plato Rep. 330. e. 
 
 ava\os, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. aXj,) salt- 
 less, insipid, Mark 9, 50 eav TO okas tivdXov 
 yfvr)Tai, if the salt become saltless, lose its 
 saltness. Plut. Symp. 5. 10. 1 TOV ciprov 
 avakov, 
 
 avaXvo if, fa>s, f], (dva\va>,) an unloos 
 ing, releasing ; from evils, KaKa>v Soph. El. 
 142 ; a breaking up, departure, rov a-v/j.- 
 jroa-iov Philo in Flacc. 981. e. Jos. Ant. 19. 
 4. 1. In N. T. trop. departure from life, 
 2 Tim. 4, 6 ; comp. Phil. 1, 23. So dvdXv- 
 a-is fK TOV fiiov Phil, in Flacc. 991. c. 
 
 ava\V(o. f. vo-co, (Xuw,) to unloose, to 
 undo, e. g. the web of Penelope, Horn. Od. 
 2. 105 ; the fastenings of a ship for depart 
 ure, Od. 15. 548 ; a prisoner, to release, Od. 
 12. 200. In N. T. intrans. to make oneself 
 loose, to break up, to depart, a) Pr. eVc 
 TOW yd/io)!/ Luke 12, 36; here the idea of 
 returning home is implied. So 2 Mace. 9, 
 1. JE\. V. H. 4. 23 eK o-vp-TToo-lov. Pol. 2. 
 32. 3. b) Trop. to depart from life, to die, 
 Phil. 1, 23; comp. 2 Tim. 4, 6. So 075-0- 
 \v<* JE\. V. H. 5. 6. 
 
 S, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. 
 without fault or SMI, sinless, 
 J hn 8, 7. Sept. Deut. 29, 18. Plut. 
 comp. Pericl. et Fab. Max. 3. Xen. Mem. 
 4. 2. 26. 
 
 dvapevo), f. vw, (/ieV<a,) to wait up to 
 the time, to wait out, to remain waiting; 
 intrans. Judith 7, 12. Hdot. 7. 42. In 
 N. T. trans, to wail for, to expect, c. ace. 
 1 Thess. 1, 10. Sept. for WR Is. 59, 11. 
 So Judith 8, 17. Plut. Cato Min. 35. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 3. 23. 
 
 Pass. aor. 1 avpr()(rtiriv with Mid. signif. 
 to remind one of a thing, to put in mind of, 
 with two ace. of pers. and thing ; 1 Cor. 4, 
 17 os vfJ-ds dvafj.vrj(Tfi rds 68ovs pov. With 
 acc. of pers. and inf. to remind^ i. q. to ad 
 monish, 2 Tim. 1, 6. Sept. for ^2}?} 1 K. 
 17, 18. So with two acc. Diod. Sic. 17. 
 10. Xen. An. 3. 2. 11 ; see Buttm. 131. 5. 
 Kiihn. ^ 280. 3. Mid. to recall to mind, to 
 recollect, to remember; absol. Mark 11, 21 ; 
 with acc. of thing, 2 Cor. 7, 15 TTJV vTraKorjv. 
 Heb. 10, 32; with gen. of thing, Mark 14, 
 72 TOV pharos in text. rec. Others TO 
 pjjfj.a. Sept. c. gen. for "Ot Gen. 8,1. So 
 c. acc. Plut. de Superst. 7. Xen. An. 7. 1. 
 26; c. gen. Ecclus. 3, 15. Plato Rep. 
 516. c. 
 
 avafAV TJO lS) ems, f], (di/a/LU/^o-Kca,) a 
 recalling to mind, remembrance, Luke 22, 
 19. 1 Cor. 11, 24. 25 comp. v. 26. Heb. 
 10, 3. Sept. ThSt Num. 10, 10. Wisd. 
 16, 6. Pol. 9. 10. 10. Plato Phil. 34. b, 
 
 avaveoa), s>, f. wo-w, (i>eo &>,) usually 
 Mid. depon. dvaveo^ai, oi/zat. to renew, 
 C. acc. TT]V (piX iav 1 Mace. 14, 18. 22 ; TOV 
 opKov Thuc. 5. 18. In N. Test. Pass, to 
 be renewed, trop. Eph. 4, 23 dv. rw m/ei^icm 
 TOV vobs vfiu>v and be renewed in the spirit 
 of your mind, i. e. changed from a carnal to 
 a Christian spirit and life ; comp. Col. 3, 10. 
 Comp. M. Antonin. 4. 3 dvaveov o-eavTov. 
 
 dvavtf(f)a)) f. ^00, (j/^>*<,) to become sober 
 again, pr. ex jueStys Luc. Hermot. 83. Plut. 
 Camill. 23. In N. T. trop. to come to one s 
 sober senses, to recover oneself; 2 Tim. 2, 26 
 fK Tys TOV SiaftoXov TrayiSos. So Cebet. 
 Tab. 9. Jos. Ant. 6. 11. 10 ex Zpqvutv. 
 
 Avavfof, a, 6, Ananias, Heb. n ^an 
 (Jehovah hath bestowed) Hananiah, pr. n. 
 of three persons in N. T. 
 
 1 . A Jew at Jerusalem, who was struck 
 dead on being convicted of falsehood by 
 Peter, Acts 5, 1. 3. 5. 
 
 2. A Christian Jew at Damascus, through 
 whom Paul was restored to sight, Acts 9, 
 10 bis. 12. 13. 17. 22, 12. 
 
 3. A high priest of the Jews, before 
 whom Paul was brought, Acts 23. 2 (comp. 
 v. 4). 24, 1. He was son of Nebedsus; 
 and was made high priest by Herod king of 
 Chalcis about A. D. 48 ; Jos. Ant. 20. 5. 2. 
 Four years later (A. D. 52) he was sent as 
 a prisoner to Rome by Quadratus, procon 
 sul of Syria, and Jonathan appointed in his 
 place ; but Ananias having been discharged 
 
by the emperor Claudius, and Jonathan 
 being murdered through the treachery of 
 Felix, the former appears to have been 
 reinstated in the high-priesthood (comp. 
 Acts 23, 4. Jos. Ant. 20. 9. 2), which he 
 held until the appointment of Ismael the 
 son of Phabous to that office shortly before 
 the departure of Felix, A. D. 60 or 61 ; 
 Jos. Ant. 20. 6. 2. ib. 8. 5, 8, 11. Ananias 
 continued afterwards to exert great influ 
 ence ; and was at last murdered in a tu 
 mult ; Jos. Ant. 20. 9. 2 sq. B. J. 2. 17. 9. 
 Others suppose Ananias not to have been 
 reinstated as high-priest ; but to have offi 
 ciated as IJO or vicar while the office was 
 vacant. The Rabbins also speak of a "(JO 
 of this name ; see Lightfoot Hor. Heb. in 
 Act. 23, 2. Buxt. Lex. Chald. art. "J3& . 
 
 avavTipprjTOS, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. av- 
 Tt, C/>CG>,) not to be spoken against, not to be 
 contradicted, indisputable, Acts 19, 36. 
 Symm. Job 11, 2. Pol. 28. 11. 4. Plut. 
 Themist. 24. 
 
 a^avrippTJToyf, adv. (preced.) without 
 contradiction, without opposition, promptly, 
 Acts 10, 29. Pol. 23, 8. 11. 
 
 avd^io<f, ov, 6, f), adj. (a priv. a|toj,) 
 unworthy, inadequate, c. gen. 1 Cor. 6, 2. 
 Sept. Jer. 15, 29. Hdian. 2. 7. 6. Plato 
 Rep. 496. a. 
 
 ava^LO)<fj adv. unworthily, irreverently, 
 I Cor. 11, 27. 29. 2 Mace. 14,42. Hdian. 
 
 2. 7. 6. Plato Rep. 388. d. 
 
 avaTravcri?) ca>s, f/, (awMravw,) rest, 
 quiet, from care or sorrow; Matt. 11, 29 
 (vpf)(TfT{ dvdnav(Ti.v rats v^u^aly vp.>v. Rev. 
 14, 11. 4, 8 dvdiravcnv OVK e^ovcri . . . \eyov- 
 Tfs, they have no rest... say ing, i. e. they 
 cease not saying ; see Buttm. 144. 6. 
 Kiihn. 310. 4. f. Sept. for nrnaia Jer. 45,3; 
 nhatti Lev. 25, 8. So Jos. Arit. 3. 12. 3. 
 Pol. 5. 75. 6. Plato Tim. 59. c. Meton. 
 a resting-place, abode, Matt. 12, 43 comp. 
 v. 44. Luke 11, 24. Sept. for ni aa Ruth. 
 
 3, 1 ; nnw 1 Chr. 28, 2. Ecclus. 24, 7. 
 
 CLVCUTTCIVU), f. avcro), (dra intens. Travw,) 
 to make icholly cease or desist from any 
 thing, D. 17. 550 ; also to let rest, to give 
 rest to any one, c. ace. JEL V. H. 10. 4. 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 4. Hence in N. T. 
 
 I . Trap, to give rest to the mind from 
 .are or sorrow, to refresh, c. ace. Matt. 11, 
 28. 1 Cor. 16, 18. ~2 Cor. 7, 13. Philem. 
 7. 20. Sept. for rpsn Is. 14, 3. Ecclus. 
 3, 6. Pol. 3. 42. 9 dvanavftv tavrbv eVc TTJS 
 
 2. Mid. dva.Travofj.ai, to take rest, 1c 
 rest, from labour, care, sorrow ; absol. Mark 
 6, 31. Luke 12, 19. Rev. 6, 11; of those 
 who sleep, Matt. 26, 45. Mark 14, 41. Sept 
 for rjtt Deut. 5, 4. So Plut. Symp. 8. 7. 4. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 22. With eV c. gen. Rev. 
 14, 13 dv. (K. ra>v KOTTWV avrlav spoken of the 
 dead. Comp. Pol. 3. 42. 9 in no. 1 ; also 
 dvanavoiwi dno nvos Thuc. 7. 73. Matth. 
 355. n. 1. With eVt c. ace. of pers. to 
 rest upon, trop. of the Spirit of God de 
 scending and resting upon any one, 1 Pet. 
 4, 14. So Sept. and V? ms Is. 11, 2. 
 
 a^aTret^o), f. eiVw, (dvd intens. 7re/3o>,) 
 to persuade over sc. to evil, to seduce, c. ace. 
 et inf. Acts 18, 13. Sept. for x^ri Jer. 
 29, 8. 1 Mace. 1, 11. Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 8. 
 Genr. Hdian. 3. 15. 2. Plato Hipp. min. 
 370. a. 
 
 dvaTTefJLTTW, f. ^o>, (7re>7TW,) 1. to 
 send up before a higher tribunal, to remit, 
 c. ace. et Trpos nva Luke 23, 7. 15. [Acts 
 25, 21.] Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 14 rr}v SIKTJV tls 
 iepav ir6\iv. Pol. 1. 7. 12 fls rrjv Pco/i^i . 
 
 2. to send back again, c. ace. et dat. 
 Luke 23, 11; ace. Philem. 11. Plut. 
 Pomp. 36. 4.wi7t>7/a. fcJ riv*.,rwf 
 
 , .,, x ">. -t-a 
 
 avaTTijpoS, ov, o, TJ, adj. (ava, Trrjpos,) i 
 
 maimed, crippled, deprived of some member -~ > 
 or of the use of it, Luke 14, 13. 21. 2 
 Mace. 8, 24. JEl V. H. 11. 9. Plato Crit. 
 53. a. 
 
 avaTTLTTTO), f. ireo-ovpai, (Tr/Tireo,) aor. 2 
 dvfTTt<rov, Mid. aor. 1 dve7recra/j.7?> Luke 14, 
 10. 17, 7, in later editt. see Buttm. \ 96. n. 
 9. 5 114 TTiTrrco. Lob. ad Phr. p. 724; pr. 
 to fall back, to lie back, as rowers Xen. CEc. 
 8. 8 ; to fall back, to lie down, eVt nvos K\I- 
 vrjf Diod. Sic. 4. 59. In N. T. to fall back, 
 to recline, to lie at table, upon the tricli 
 nium in the ancient manner of eating ; see 
 fully in dvaKfinai no. 2 ; and for this late 
 usage of the verb see Lob. ad Phr. p. 216. 
 Corresp. in Engl. is to sit at tabk, to sit down 
 to a meal. Absol. Luke 11, 37. 17,7. 22, 
 14. John 13, 12; with els c. ace. of place 
 Luke 14, 10 ; with eVt c. ace. John 21, 20 
 rt TO (rrrftos Ir/crov, on his breast, i. e. 
 next to him on the triclinium ; comp. John 
 13, 23. Spoken also of those lying upon 
 the ground for the same purpose, m rrfv 
 yr]v Matt. 15, 35 ; eVi r^? yrjs Mark 8, 6 ; 
 absol. Mark 6, 40. John 6, 10 bis. So absol. 
 Tob. 2, 1. Luc. Asin. 23. 
 
 dvcnrKrjpOCi), >, f. o>cra>, (TrX^poco.) to 
 fill up, to fill full, e. g. a void, TO Kfvuftev 
 Plato Tim. 81. b ; a number Xen. Vect. 4. 
 24. In N. T. trop. to fill up, to fulfil, to 
 
complete, c. ace. a) Of iniquity, sin, to Jill 
 up; 1 Thess. 2, 16 els TO dvaTrKrjpuxrai av- 
 TOV ras dpaprias, comp. ]\Iatt. 23, 32 77X77- 
 paxrare TO furpov TOJV Trar/pwi/. Comp. also 
 Gen. 15, 16. 2 Mace. 6, 13-15. b) Of a 
 prophetic declaration, to fulfil, Pass. Matt. 
 13, 14. So ai/aTrXjjpcDO-iy 1 Esdr. 1,57. c) 
 Of a command, precept, to fulfil, TOV vofiov 
 TOV Xp. Gal. 6, 2 ; comp. John 13, 34. So 
 TrXrjpaio-ai eVroXdf Hdian. 3. 11. 9. d) Of 
 character; 1 Cor. 14, 16 6 dvcnr\r)pS)v TOV 
 TOTTOV TOV tSicorou he that filleth up (occu- 
 pieth) the place of the unlearned; sustains 
 that character in relation to the gift of 
 tongues. Comp. Jos. B. J. 5. 2. 5 orpa- 
 TitoTov Tagiv dvan\r)povv. Tac. Ann. 4. 38 
 si locum principem impleam. Rabb. J^JB 
 cn pTS Buxt. Lex. Chald. 2001. e) Of defi 
 ciency, to fill up or out, to supply, TO vp.a>v 
 vcrTfprjpM 1 Cor. 16, 17. Phil. 2, 30. So 
 Jos. Ant. 5. 6. 2 TO \eltvov. Plut. de Pue- 
 ris educ. 13 TTJV eXXei^ti/. 
 
 dva7ro\6yr)TOS, ov , 6, 77, adj. (a priv. 
 tOToXoyeo/iai,) without apology or excuse, 
 inexcusable, Rom. 1, 20. 2, 1. Pol. 12. 21. 
 10. Plut. Brut. 46. 
 
 ava-rrpda-aa) v. -TTO>, f. , (TrpdWw,) 
 to do up, i. e. to require, to exact a debt, in 
 some Mss. Luke 19, 23, instead of &v eVrpa- 
 a. Lys. 374. 3. Xen. An. 7. 7. 31. 
 
 dvaTTTVo-a-w, f. w , (TrnWw,) to unfold, 
 to undo, espec. a roll or volume, to unroll, 
 e. g. r6 /3i/3X/oj/ Luke 4, 17 ; see in i/3Xtoi>. 
 Sept. for she 2K. 19, 14. Hdot. 1. 125; 
 a garment Plut. Demetr. 42. 
 
 dvaTTTO), f. ^"o,, (f^Tco,) to light up, to 
 kindle, c. ace. Acts 28, 2. James 3, 5; 
 Pass. Luke 12, 49. Sept. for rT Sn Jer. 
 9, 12 ; art Mai. 4, 1. Pol. 14. 5. 1. Xen. 
 An. 5. 2. 24. 
 
 dvapfe/j,r)TO$, O u, 6, 77, adj. (a priv. 
 dpt3/iea).) not to be numbered, innumerable, 
 Heb. 11, 12. Sept. for -IB& -px Job 21, 
 33. Diod. Sic. 2. 12. Xen. An. "3. 2. 13. 
 
 avacreico, f. ei o-w, (crei a>,) to shake up 
 or back, e. g. the locks, Eurip. Bacch. 240 ; 
 to shake or wave up and down, as the hands 
 Thuc. 4. 38. In N. T. trop. to stir up, to 
 excite, TOV o^Xov Mark 15, 11. Luke 23, 5. 
 So Diod. Sic. 13. 91 TO. 77X77377. 
 
 dvaaKevdfo, f. do-a, (o-xevafa, ) pr. to 
 pack up baggage (TO. a-Kevrf) or any thing 
 as baggage, Xen. An. 5. 10. 8. Cyr. 8. 5. 4; 
 then to lay waste, to ravage, to destroy, by 
 collecting and carrying off every thing, Xen. 
 Cyr. 6. 2. 25. Thuc. 4. 116. Hence in 
 
 50 avacn acrt? 
 
 N. T. trop. to destroy, to subvert, ray \jsvxdt 
 Acts 15, 24. So Pol. 9. 31. 6 ow3jjjcas. 
 12. 25. 4 TTJV KOLVTJV (prjfj.rjv. 
 
 avacnraa), a>, f. do-a, (o-Trdco,) to draw 
 up or out, c. ace. Luke 14, 5 ; Pass. Acts 
 11, 10. Sept. for nbsn Hab. 1, 15. Pol. 
 5.110.4. Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 7. 
 
 fas, f), (dvlaTrjfu, ) Act, a 
 raising up, as of walls, Dem. 478. 24 ; of 
 suppliants from a temple, Thuc. 1. 133 ; of 
 the dead, Eurip. Eum. 648 a7ra "Savovros 
 OVTIS <TT dvd(TTa<ns. Pass, a rising up, 
 e. g. from a seat, Ast Plat. Rep. 4. 4. Sept. 
 for tip Lam. 3, 63 ; from ambush Pol. 5 
 70. 8. In N. T. only Pass. 
 
 1 . Trop. a rising up, opp. f] TTTWO-IS fall ; 
 Luke 2, 34 OVTOS Keirat fls TTTOXTIV KOI dvd- 
 crracrti/ TroXXaii ei> rco "icrpa^X, i. e. for the 
 fall of many and for the uprising of many ; 
 for the downfall and destruction of the great 
 and the wise through unbelief (Luke 1, 52. 
 1 Cor. 2, 6), and for the salvation of the 
 lowly and afflicted, the poor in spirit, through 
 faith ; comp. Rom. 9, 32. 33. 
 
 2. Spec, in N. T. the resurrection of the 
 body from death, the return of the dead bo 
 dy to life, viz. 
 
 a) Of individuals who have returned to 
 life on earth; Heb. 11, 35 women received 
 their dead e| dvao-Tao-fats, lit. out of or 
 through resurrection, raised again to life ; 
 comp. 1 K. 17, 17 sq. 2 K. 4, 20 sq. So 
 the resurrection of Jesus, Acts 1, 22. 2, 31. 
 4,33. 17,18. Rom. 6,5. Phil. 3, 10. 1 Pet. 
 3, 21 ; also dvdo-rao-is veupcov V. e/c vf<pu>v 
 id. Rom. 1, 4. 1 Pet. 1, 3. 
 
 b) Of the future and general resurrec 
 tion at the end of all things ; John 11, 24 
 lv TTJ dva(TTa.(TL ei> TTJ eV^aTT; fjfjifpq. Matt. 
 
 22, 30 ; also dvdarao-is veKptov Acts 17, 32. 
 
 23, 6. 24, 15. 21. 26, 23. 1 Cor. 15, 12. 
 13. 21. Heb. 6, 2; dv. TWV vfKpw Matt. 
 22, 31. 1 Cor. 15, 42 ; fj dvdo-Tao-is 17 e*c 
 vetcplav Acts 4, 2. With an adjunct, John 
 5, 29 bis, fls dvdo-TCHTiv {atrjs . . . fls dvd&Ta- 
 aiv Kplo-tas, resurrection of life, unto eternal 
 happiness ; resurrection of condemnation, 
 unto eternal misery. Heb. 11,35 tva xpfiT- 
 TOVOS dvao-Tao-ffos TI/XCOOTIV, that they might 
 obtain a belter resurrection, sc. than that 
 just before spoken of, i. e. the resurrection 
 unto life eternal. This general resurrec 
 tion the Sadducees denied, Matt. 22, 23. 28. 
 Mark 12, 18. 23. Luke 20, 27. 33. Acts 23, 
 8 ; and also certain Christians, 2 Tim. 2, 18. 
 
 c) Of the resurrection of the righteous, 
 
 , Luke 14, 14. 20, 35. 36 ; call 
 
 ed also the first resurrection, Rev. 20, 5. 6. 
 
51 
 
 Comp. 1 Cor. 15, 23. 24. 1 Thess. 4, 16. 
 See also 2 Mace. 7, 9. 14. 12, 43-45 ; 
 whence it would seem that the later Jews 
 believed only the true worshippers of God 
 would rise, and not the Gentiles ; see espec. 
 2 Mace. 7, 14, comp. Is. 26, 14. 
 
 d) Meton. the author of resurrection, John 
 11,25. 
 
 aVCKTTClTOCt), o>, f. o>cr&>, (avdoTOTOS, avi- 
 0-Tijp.t.) found only in later Greek, and equi 
 valent to dvda-raTov iroieiv in earlier writ 
 ers, Sturz de Dial. Alex. p. 146 ; pr. to let 
 be dvdaraTov, i. e. of persons, to drive out 
 from house and home, Aq. and Symm. for 
 rpjrt Ps. 59, 12 ; l Ps. 11, 1 ; of cities, 
 to lay waste, to ravage, like dvdoraTov iroielv 
 Thuc. 6. 76. Xen. Hell. 6. 5. 35. Hence 
 in N. T. to bring into confusion, to make 
 uproar, to turn upside down, c. ace. TTJV ol- 
 Kovp.evT]v Acts 17, 6 ; absol. 21, 38. Trop. 
 the minds of Christians, to trouble, to dis 
 turb, Gal. 5, 12 ; comp. 6 Tapd<T<Ta>v v. 10. 
 
 avatrravpowy <, f. axrw, (oraupoco,) to 
 crucify again, afresh, trop. c. ace. et dat. 
 Heb. 6, 6 dvaaravpovvTas eavrols TOV vibv 
 TOV 3fov. So all the Greek commentators ; 
 also Jerome ad Gal. 5, 24. E. g. Chrysost. 
 dvacrravpovvras avaftev Trd\iv crravpovvras. 
 Phot. dvcKTravpovvras eVi devTepav crrav- 
 PGHTIV . . . KaXovvras avrov. See Bleek Brief 
 an d. Heb. in loc. In Gr. w r riters dva<rrav- 
 poo> is to fasten up upon the cross, to crucify, 
 Jos. Ant. 11. 6. 10. Pol. 1. 11. 5. Xen. An. 
 3. 1. 17. 
 
 ), f. d, (<rrej>dfo>,) to fetch 
 up a deep sigh, to sigh deeply, absol. Mark 
 
 8, 12. Sept. for n?X5 Lam. 1, 4. 2 Mace. 
 6, 30. Xen. Gonv. 1.15. 
 
 avaa-Tpifyw, f. fya>, (o-rpe<u,) Pass. 
 aor. 2 dve&Tpdcpyv. 
 
 1 . Trans, to turn up, to turn upside down, 
 to overturn, c. ace. ras rpcnrefas John 2, 15. 
 Ecclus. 36, 12. Luc. Gall. 9. Xen. Yen. 
 
 9. 18. 
 
 2. Intrans. or with lavrov implied, to turn 
 back, to turn again, to return ; Acts 5, 22 
 dvavTpfyavTfs Se dir^yyeiXav. Sept. for 
 3^13 Gen. 8, 7. 9. al. So Hdian. 3. 11. 4. 
 Xen. An. 4. 3. 29. By Hebr. once like 3TO 
 it is to be translated by an adverb, again, 
 anew; Acts 15, 16 dvacrrptya xdi dvomo- 
 oofj.rjo o} TT]V arKTjvTjv AauiS, i. e. I will again 
 build up, etc. comp. Am. 9, 11. So 3*110 
 Gen. 30, 31. 2 K. 1, 13. 20, 5 ; see Heb. 
 Lex. art. 310. Heb. Gr. 139. 4. n. 1. 
 
 3. Mid. and aor. 2 Pass, to turn oneself 
 about in a place or among persons, to move 
 
 about, Lat. versari. a) As to place, to be 
 or abide in, to sojourn, with ev c. dat. Matt. 
 17, 22 dvaoTpe(pofjLeva>v 8e UVTUIV ev TJJ FoXi- 
 Xat a. Trop. of a state or condition, to be in, 
 to live in; so ev ir\dvrj 2 Pet. 2, 18. For 
 2 Cor. 1, 12 and Eph. 2, 3, see in lett. b. 
 So Sept. for ^n Josh. 5, 5. Xen. Cyr. 8. 
 8. 7 ; trop. Ecclus. 8, 8. Xen. Ag. 9. 4. b) 
 As to persons, to live among, to have con 
 verse with ; with ev c. dat. of pers. and also 
 ev c. dat. of state or condition, 2 Cor. 1, 12 
 OVK ev cro(pia crapKiKfj, dXX ev ^tiptrt 3eoC 
 dveaTpd(pT]fj.ev ev TM Acotr/ico. Eph. 2, 3. 
 Hence absol. to live, to walk, to conduct one- 
 self, with an adv. of manner, 1 Tim. 3, 15. 
 Heb. 10, 33. 13, 18 ; ev cpojSa of manner 
 1 Pet. 1,17. So Sept. for T^rt Prov. 20, 7. 
 avaa-rpocjir}, Jj r , ^, (dvaarpefa, ) a turn 
 ing about, Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 8. In N. T. 
 converse, manner of life, walk, conduct, Gal. 
 
 1, 13. Eph. 4, 22. 1 Tim. 4, 12. Heb. 13,7. 
 James 3, 13. 1 Pet. 1, 15. 18. 2, 12. 3, 1. 
 
 2. 16. 2 Pet. 2, 7. 3, 11. So 2 Mace. 5,8. 
 Arr. Epict. 1. 9. 11. Pol. 4. 82. 1. In Heb. 
 13, 7. 1 Pet. 1,15, others render it life, but 
 without necessity. 
 
 ava-rda-cra) v. -TTO>, f. rdo>, (rao-o-o),) 
 to set up in order, to arrange, Mid. c. ace. 
 Luke 1, 1 ai/ard^acrSat Si^yrfcrti . Hesych. 
 ai>ardacr3at firpeTTiVauSat. Comp. Plut. 
 de Solert. Anim. 12 dvararro^evos TO. jua3)j- 
 fJMTa KOL fJ.{\eTu>v. 
 
 amreXXw, f. rcXw, (reXXa,) aor. 1 ave- 
 reiXa, perf. avare raXm Heb. 7, 14. 
 
 1. Trans, to let uprise, to cause to rise, 
 as God the sun, TOV rj\iov Matt. 5, 45. 
 Sept. for rrasn of plants Gen. 3, 18. 
 Diod. Sic. 17. 7 opacrSat TOV ffXiov . . . dva- 
 reXXoira ray aKrlvas. Horn. II. 5. 777 of 
 plants. 
 
 2. Intrans. to uprise, i. e. a) Of hea 
 venly bodies, to rise from the horizon ; so 
 the sun Matt. 13, 6. Mark 4, 6. 16, 2 (see 
 in TJ\IOS). James 1, 11 ; the morning star, 
 trop. 2 Pet. 1, 19; light Matt. 4, 16; a 
 cloud Luke 12, 54. Sept. for nit o f the 
 sun and light Gen. 32, 31. Is. 58, 10 ; of 
 the morning star Job 3, 9. Is. 14, 12. So 
 Pol. 9. 15. 10. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 2 nplv rjXiov 
 JwrreXXeii/. Earlier Gr. writers use dva- 
 Tt\\eiv of the sun, and nTe XXi> of the 
 stars ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 124. b) Of 
 plants, to spring up, to arise, trop. of Christ s 
 descent from Judah, Heb. 7, 14. So pr. 
 Sept. for rras Ez. 17, 6. Jos. Ant. 1. 1 1. 
 Theophr. C. PI. 3. 7. 
 
 dvari^ rjfJ.t, f. zfaw, (ri 3>7/i<,) to set or 
 put up upon, as upon the cross Pol. 1. 86 
 
52 
 
 6 ; a load upon an animal Xen. Cyr. 8. 5. 
 4 ; to lay up, as a votive gift in a temple, 
 Judith 16, 19. Sept. 1 Sam. 31, 10. Xen. 
 An. 5. 3. 5, 6. In N. T. Mid. aor. 2 dvc- 
 SefjLTjv, to set up or forth in one s own be 
 half, to propound, to declare, for considera 
 tion, c. ace. et dat. Acts 25, 14. Gal. 2, 2. 
 So 2 Mace. 3, 9. Plut. Amat. Narr. 2. 
 Mor. IV. p. 5J7, 7-171 TTpagiv dft^ero rwv 
 traipcav rtcriV. 
 
 avctTO\r), JJj, 77, (aj/artXXco q. v.) an 
 uprising, the rising of the heavenly bodies 
 from the horizon, as of the sun Plato Polit. 
 269. a. Sept. Judg. 5, 31 ; of the stars JEl 
 H. An. 9. 17. On the use of araroXq and 
 eVtroX^, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 124 sq. 
 Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Meton. the day-spring, dawn, i. q. 
 (pus drreXXoj>. Luke 1, 78 fTTfcrKf-^faro 
 fjfjias dvaro\Tj et; v\jsovs, the day-spring hath 
 visited us from on high, i. e. the Messiah, 
 who is elsewhere spoken of as a light ; 
 comp. Is. 9, 1 [2]. 49, 6. 60, 1-3. 
 
 2. Meton. the east, the orient, the eastern 
 quarter of the earth or heavens ; Matt. 2, 1. 
 2. 9. Rev. 21, 13; also dvaroXfi f]\iov Rev. 
 7, 2. Plur. dvaro\ai id. Matt. 24, 27 ; also 
 .ii/aroXai fj\iov Rev. 16, 12. In Matt. 8, 11 
 and Luke 13, 29 dnb dvaro\o>v KCU BVCT/J-WV 
 from the east and west is put by synecd. 
 i. q. from every quarter. Sept. Plur. for 
 ":! Num. 32, 19; tH Gen. 2, 8. Sing. 
 Hdian. 3. 8. 13. Plato Locr. 96. d. Plur. 
 Diod. Sic. 2. 43. Plato Def. 411. b. 
 
 dvarpeTTO), f. ^ w , (rpeVw,) to turn up, 
 to turn upside down, to overturn, pr. Dem. 
 403. 7. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 5. In N. T. trop. 
 to overthrow, to subvert, c. ace. TTJV TTIO-TIV 
 2 Tim. 2, 18; TOVS O"KOVS Tit. 1, 11. So 
 Sept. Prov. 10, 3. Dem. 324. 27. Plato 
 Legg. 709. a. 
 
 dvarpe(f)(t), f. Spe ^o), (rpe ^ca,) to nour 
 ish up, to bring up a child, Mid. c. ace. et 
 dat. Acts 7, 21 ; Pass. v. 20. So Wisd. 7, 4. 
 Hdian. 5. 8. 3. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 10. Also 
 of mental training, to bring up, to train up, 
 Pass. Acts 22, 3. So Hdian. 1. 4. 8. Plut. 
 de Musica 31. 
 
 ), f. <ai/o>, (</>au/a>,) to light up, 
 to let shine, e. g. lamps Od. 18. 310; the 
 stars Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 4 ; to make appear, to 
 show, Xen. Conv. 4. 12. Hence in N. T. 
 Mid. to show oneself, to appear, e. g. the king 
 dom of heaven, Luke 19, 11. So Sept. Job 
 11,18 dvacpaiverai CTOL flprjvr}. Also pr. Pol. 
 10. 48. 7. Xen. Hell. 3. 5. 21. Pass, of 
 persons, to be shoicn, to be made to see: 
 
 Acts 21, 3 dvafpavevres TTJV Kinrpov, being 
 shown Cyprus, having it pointed out to us 
 in the distance ; instead of dvcxpavfio-Tjs 
 Tjp.iv TTJS K. For the construction, comp, 
 Rom. 3, 2. Buttm. 134. 5. Kiihn. j 281. 
 3. Winer $ 40. 1. So Theophan. p. 392 
 dvafpavfvrav 8f O.VTWV TTJV yrjv f!8ov avrovs 
 oi (TTpaTr/yoi. 
 
 (0, f. dvoi<ra>, 
 , aor. 2 dvfjveyKov. 
 
 1 . to bear upwards, to carry up, to lead 
 up, from a lower to a higher place ; e. g. of 
 persons c. ace. et tls c. ace.. as els opos 
 Matt. 17, 1. Mark 9, 2 ; Pass, els rbv ovpa- 
 vov Luke 24, 51. Sept. for nbsri i Chr. 
 15, 3. 12; K^art 1 Sam. 17, 54 . So Luc. 
 Dial. Deor. 20. 6. Xen. Conv. 8. 30. Of 
 things, as sacrifices, to bring up, to offer up t 
 by placing the victim or thing offered upon 
 the altar ; so with ace. and eVi TO Svo-taori?- 
 piov James 2, 21 ; ace. simply Heb. 7, 27 
 bis. 13, 15. 1 Pet. 2, 5. Sept. with eVi TO 
 3vcr. for !^sn Gen. 8, 20 ; simpl. Lev. 14, 
 9. Judg. 11, 31. 
 
 2. Trop. dveveyKflv ras afj.aprias r}fi(av, to 
 bear up our sins, to take upon oneself and 
 bear our sins, i. e. to bear the penalty of sin, 
 to make expiation for sin, spoken of Christ 
 1 Pet. 2, 24. Heb. 9, 28, quoted from Is. 
 53, 12 where Sept. for Xbj . Comp. Sept. 
 dvoicrovcri TTJV Tropveiav v/jicav for N^UJ Num. 
 
 14, 33. So dv. apapriav Antiph. 753. 10 ; 
 KivBvvovs Thuc. 3. 38. 
 
 dva(})0)ve(i), , f. ^o-w, (^wi/ew,) to 
 speak up or out, intrans. with dat. of man 
 ner, Luke 1, 42. Sept. for S^IZJCJ 1 Chr. 
 
 15, 28. Plut. Themist. 26 dvefp avTjo-e pi- 
 ro) TOVT I. Pol. 3. 33. 4. 
 
 ec os, rj, (ai/a^eco,) an out 
 pouring, as the estuary of a river, Strab. 
 3. p. 206, 374. In N. T. trop. outpouring, 
 effusion, excess ; 1 Pet. 4, 4 els TT/V avrr^v 
 rrjs do-arias dvdxyviv into the same outpour 
 ing (excess) of rioting. 
 
 dva^copew, <, f. ^ a6)) (^copeco, ) to give 
 place, to go bach, to draw back, e. g. 
 
 1. Genr. to withdraw from a place, to 
 depart, intrans. with ds c. ace. of place 
 whither, Matt. 2, 12. 14. 22. 4, 12. 14, 13. 
 15, 21. Mark 3, 7 (others Trpo y). John 6, 
 15; with fKftefv Matt. 12, 15, comp. 14, 
 13; absol. Matt. 2, 13. 9, 24 dvaxcopelre 
 withdraw, give place. 27, 5. Sept. with ds 
 for H-ja Hos. 12, 12. So with ds Hdian. 
 1. 12. 2. Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 7; absol. Plato 
 Conv. 175. a. 
 
 2. Spec, to withdraw, for privacy, to go 
 
53 
 
 aside, intrans. with /ear IBiav Acts 23, 19 ; 
 absol. 26, 31. Comp. Hdian. 1. 12. 12 V 
 TOIS dvaK()(a>pi]K6<ri TOTTOIS. 
 
 , f<B y, 77, 
 
 freshing, revival; Acts 3, 19 Kcupot di/a\^u- 
 f a>r Zimes of refreshing, i. e. of joy to come 
 in tho kingdom of Christ ; comp. v. 20. 21. 
 Sept. for nm-i Ex. 8, 11 [15]. Philo de 
 Abr. p. 371. d. Strabo 17. p. 1137. 
 
 ava-^v^Q), f. o>, O/ vxw,) to breathe 
 up, to take breath ; hence to revue, be re 
 freshed. Sept. for tiB? Ex. 23, 12; ni-n 
 1 Sam. 16, 23. Trans, to revive, to refresh, 
 with cooling, Od. 4. 568. Bion 1. 85. In 
 N. T. genr. to refresh, to cheer, c. ace. 2 
 Tim. 1, 16 on TroXXa/ct? pe dvtyv^f. So 
 Pass. Xen. Hell. 7. 1. 19. 
 
 dfSpaTJ-oSov,) a slave-dealer, man-stealer, 1 
 Tim. 1, 10; comp. Ex. 21, 16. Deut. 24, 
 7. Pol. 12. 9. 2. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 6. 
 
 AvopeaS) ov, 6, (di/^p,) Andrew, an old 
 Greek name Hdot. 6. 126; in N. T. pr. n. 
 of one of the Apostles, Mark 3, 18 ; the 
 brother of Simon Peter, Matt. 4, 18. 10, 2. 
 Mark 1,16. Luke 6, 14. John 6, 8. He 
 was from Bethsaida of Galilee ; and had 
 been a follower of Jolm the Baptist ; John 
 1, 41. 45. He was one of those mo?t 
 closely connected with Jesus, Mark 1, 29. 
 13, 3. John 6, 8. 12, 22 bis. Mentioned 
 also Acts 1,13; but not later. 
 
 avopi^w. f. (Vo), (di/iyp,) to make manly, 
 c. ace. Xen (Ec. 5. 4. In N. T. Mid. to 
 show oneself a man, to be manly, 1 Cor. 16, 
 13. Sept. for Pin Deut. 31, 6. 7; ?** 
 Josh. 1, 6. 9. So 1 Mace. 2, 64. Luc. Eun. 
 13. Xen. An. 4. 3. 34. 
 
 S, ov, 6, (dvr)p, Ktdcda),) An- 
 dronicus, pr. n. of a Jewish Christian, a 
 kinsman and fellow-prisoner of Paul, Rom. 
 16,7. 
 
 dvopO^OVOS, ov, 6, TI, adj. (avrfp, <po- 
 i/fvco,) manslaying ; as Subst. a manslayer, 
 murderer, 1 Tim. 1, 9. 2 Mace. 9, 28. Luc. 
 Asin. 21. Plato Euth. 9. a. 
 
 dvey/c\rjTOS, O u, 6, f), adj.- (a priv. eyna~ 
 \ea>.) not arraigned or accused; hence 
 blameless, unblamable, 1 Cor. 1, 8. Col. 1, 
 22. 1 Tim. 3, 10. Tit. 1, 6. 7. Jos. Ant. 5. 
 8. 8. Plut. Pericl. 15. Xen. Mem. 2. 8. 5. 
 
 OS, O v, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. 
 i,) not to be relafed, unspeakable, 
 unutterable, 2 Cor. 9, 15. Athenagor. 
 Apol. p. 10, of God. So dotfjyrjTos Xen. 
 Cyr. 7. 1. 32. 
 
 ai/e/cXaX,?;ro9, ov, 6,17, adj. (a priv. eVcXa. 
 Xe a>.) unspeakable, unutterable, 1 Pet, 1,8. 
 Eunap. Proaeres. <BS eVvSero rrjv oXoyoi/ rav- 
 T7]V KOI avfK\d\7)TOi> o~a>rr)piav. 
 
 ai/e/cXet7TT09, O u, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. eVXet- 
 7TW,) unfailing, inexhaustible, Luke 12,33. 
 Diod. Sic. 3. 23. Plut. de defect. Orac. 51. 
 
 ave/CTO$, 77, fa, (di/e^op-at,) tolerable, sup 
 portable ; in N. T. only Neut. compar. dven- 
 Torepov eo-rat Matt. 10, 15. 11, 22. 24. 
 [Mark 6, 11.] Luke 10, 12. 14. Pol. 12. 
 9. 5. Plato Legg. 907. a. 
 
 dveXeij/Acov, ovos, 6, f), adj. (a priv. eXe- 
 77/icoi/,) unmerciful, cruel, Rom 1, 31. Sept. 
 for ijax Prov. 5, 9. 11, 17. Wisd. 12, 5. 
 19, 1. Comp. dve\er)fj.6va)s Antiph. 114. 10. 
 
 aveiiiCpiiai, Pass, (ni/t/ior,) to be wind- 
 driven, tossed by the wind, James 1 , 6. Not 
 found in Sept. nor in Gr. writers. 
 
 ave/jio 1 ?, ov, 6 (aeo, arjui,) 1. wind, pr. a 
 breath or stream of air, Matt. 11,7. 14, 24. 
 Mark 4, 41. Luke 7, 24. Rev. 7, 1 prj irvfy 
 avffios. Spoken of violent, stormy winds, 
 Matt. 7, 25. 27. 8, 26. 27. 14, 30 rov aveuo* 
 la-xvpov. v. 32. Mark 4, 37. 39 bis. 6, 48. 
 51. Luke 8, 23. 24. 25. John 6, 18. Acts 
 27, 4. 7. 14. 15. James 3, 4 VTTO cncX^pcbi/ 
 dv([i.a>v. Jude 12. Rev. 6, 13. Sept. for 
 ^1 Job 21, 18. Is. 41, 16. al. So Pol. 9. 
 25. 3. Xen. CEc. 18. 1. Rev. 7, 1 01 reWa- 
 pe s avepoi, the four cardinal winds. Sept. for 
 nirvn Sa-iX Jer. 49, 36. Hence 
 
 2. Meton. ol Tto-o-apes avepoi, the four 
 winds, i. e. the four quarters of the earth or 
 heavens, whence the four cardinal winds 
 blow, Matt. 24, 31. Mark 13, 27; comp. 
 Luke 13, 29. Sept. for rnnil SS iX i Chr. 
 9, 24. Dan. 11, 4. Jos. Ant. 8. 3. 5. 
 
 3. Trop. as the emblem of instability, in 
 constancy ; Eph. 4, 14 avfp.os rfjs oioao-Ka- 
 \ias icind of doctrine, .i. e. varying and un 
 stable doctrines, vain opinions. Ecclus. 5, 
 9. So nil Job 15, 2. 
 
 , ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. eVSe- 
 Xerai.) inadmissible, impossible, Luke 17, 1 ; 
 comp. Matt. 18, 7. 
 
 dve^epevvrjro^ ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. 
 e^fpewaw,) unsearchable, inscrutable, Rom. 
 11, 33. Symm. for ">" Prov. 25, 3 ; - p5 
 Jer. 17, 9. Aristot. Eth. N. 
 
 , ov. 6, fj, adj. (dvexopai, KO- 
 KOJ,) enduring evil, patient under evils and 
 injuries, 2 Tim. 2, 24. Hierocl. ad Pythag. 
 Carm. Aur. 7. Luc. Jud. Voc. 9 ; comp 
 dve^LKOKia Wisd. 2, 19. Pint. Pelop. 25 
 
54 
 
 ?, ov, 6, f], adj. (a priv. 
 ei^i/idfa>,) no to ie traced out ; trop. ?2- 
 searchable, inscrutable, Rom. 11, 33. Eph. 
 3, 8. Sept. for ^ "pi* Job 5, 9. 9, 10. 
 Prayer of Manass. 6. 
 
 dveiralo- XVVTOS, ov, 6, fj, adj. (a priv. 
 eVaKT^wo/iai,) not to be made ashamed, iviih- 
 out cause of shame, irreproachable, 2 Tim. 
 2, 15. Jos. Ant. 18. 7. 1 ; so Adv. -us, 
 Agapet. 57. Wetst. in loc. 
 
 az/e7TiX?77rT09, O v, 6, rj, adj. (a priv. eVt- 
 \afij3dva>, ) not to be laid hold of or attacked, 
 Thuc. 5. 17. In N. T. not to be reprehend 
 ed, blameless, unblamable, 1 Tim. 3, 2 comp. 
 Tit. 1, 7 avey&ifros. 1 Tim. 5, 7. 6, 14. 
 So Plut. Pericl. 10. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 15. 
 
 CiVGp YpfJLCii, aor. 2 dvriX. Sov, (epyouat,) 
 to go wp, to ascend, from a lower to a higher 
 place, as els TO 6 poy John 6, 3 ; els lepoo-6- 
 Xvfia Gal. 1, 17. 18 ; see in dva^aivca no. 1. 
 Sept. for T^fi 1 K. 13, 12 ; ia Judg. 21,8. 
 Hdian. 3. 8. 11. Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 39. 
 
 y, ^, (dvirjfj.i, ) 1. a letting 
 up or Zoose, remission, relaxation, pr. from 
 close confinement ; Acts 24, 23 e^eiv avecriv, 
 to have relaxation, i. e. from actual bonds. 
 So Sept. 8ovvai aveaiv 2 Chr. 23, 15. Also 
 from exertion, obligation ; 2 Cor. 8, 13 ov 
 iva a XXoty avecns, i. e. from the duty of contri 
 buting. So from exertion, toil, Jos. Ant. 3. 
 10. 6. Hdian. 8. 5. 19. 
 
 2. Trop. remission, rest, quiet ; e. g. in 
 ternal 2 Cor. 2, 12 ; external 2 Cor. 7, 5. 
 2 Thess. 1, 7. Pol. 1. 66. 10. Plato Legg. 
 724. a. 
 
 :>; f. dam, (dvd intens. eYdco,) to 
 examine thoroughly, to inquire strictly, Sept. 
 for V-ft Judg. 6, 20. Susann. 14. In N. T. 
 in a judicial sense, to examine, to put to the 
 question, by scourging to force confession, 
 c. ace. Acts 22, 24. 29. 
 
 dvev, prep. c. gen. (kindr. dv- priv. 
 Engl. un- ,) without ; e. g. of things, imply 
 ing their absence, as avev yoyyvcrfimv with 
 out murmurings 1 Pet. 4, 9; avev Xoyov 
 without word, i. e. without preaching and 
 admonition, 1 Pet. 3, 1. Sept. for "pn Ex. 
 21, 11 ; xj;n Is. 55, 1. So Dem. u"l. 4. 
 Xen. An. 2. 6. 6. Of persons, praegn. 
 Matt. 10, 29 avev TOV irarpos without the 
 Father, without his knowledge and will; 
 comp. Luke 12, 6. Sept. for px Am. 3, 5. 
 So Horn. II. 15. 213. Dem. 1240. 30; avev 
 (3ao-iXoy Xen. Hell. 4. 8. 16. In Gr. wri 
 ters avev is found also as an adverb without 
 case ; Winer 58. 6. Buttm. 146. 4. 2. 
 
 ov, 6, f], adj. (a priv. efaeros,) 
 not well-situated, not commodious, Acts 27, 
 12. Hesych. dvevZeroV dxprja-rov. 
 
 avevpUTKO), aor. 2 dvevpov, (et>pt o-K<o,) 
 to find out, to trace out, by inquiry, c. ace. 
 Luke 2, 16. Acts 21, 4. Plut. Camill. 30. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 40. 
 
 ), f. Vco, (e x>,) to hold up, e. g. 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 1. 6. Horn. II. 3. 
 318 ; to hold up or back, as horses II. 23. 
 426 ; the rain from falling, Sept. for sja 
 Am. 4, 7. In N. T. only Mid. dj 
 f. dve^ofjLai, imperf. dveixopnv, also 771 
 P.TJV 2 Cor. 11, 1. 4 Rec. aor. 2 jjye 
 Acts 18, 14; for the double augm. see 
 Buttm. \ 86. n. 3, 4. Kiihn. $ 126. 1 ; pr. 
 to TioZd oneself up, and so to hold or iear 
 p against any thing, to endure ; constr. c. 
 gen. Matth. 5 359. n. 
 
 1. Of pers. to iear w^A, to have patience 
 with the errors and weaknesses of others ; 
 c. gen. Matt. 17, 17 ems Trore di>et-op.ai vpcov. 
 Mark 9, 19. Luke 9, 41. Acts 18, 14. 2 
 Cor. 11, 1 bis. 19. Eph. 4, 2. Col. 3, 13 ; 
 absol. 2 Cor. 11, 4. Sept. for pQxntl 
 Is. 63, 15. Pol. 3. 82. 5. Plato "Rep . 
 564. d. 
 
 2. Of things: a) to endure, to bear pa- 
 tifntly, as afflictions; 2 Thess. 1, 4 rats 
 SXi\^eo-/ als dvexfo-^ie, i. e. aiy for &>v by 
 attraction; absol. 1 Cor. 4, 12. 2 Cor. 11, 
 20. So c. gen. 2 Mace. 9, 12. Hdian. 8. 
 5. 9. Plato Apol. 31. b. b) to endure, to 
 bear with, i. e. to admit doctrine, exhorta 
 tion, 2 Tim. 4, 3. Heb. 13, 22. So Sept. 
 Job 6, 26. 
 
 aveyrios, ov, 6, a cousin, Lat. consobri- 
 nus, Col. 4, 10. Sept. Num. 36, 11. Plut. 
 Thes. 7. Xen. An. 7. 8. 9. 
 
 avrftov, ov, TO, dill, anethum graveolens 
 v. hortense, an aromatic plant, Matt. 23, 23. 
 Theophr. H. PI. 7. 1. 2. Dioscor. 3.461. 
 Plin. H. N. 19. 52, where anethum is dis 
 tinguished from anisum, anise. Celsii Hie- 
 rob. I. p. 494. 
 
 avrj/co), defect. (^KO>,) to have come up 
 or reached to any thing, Hdot. 7. 60. Xen. 
 An. 6. 2. 3, 5 ; to pertain or belong to, 1 
 Mace. 10, 42. Dem. 1390. 17. In N. T. 
 trop. to be pertinent, Jit, proper ; impers. 
 Col. 3, 18 coy dvrjKev ev Kvpia>. Part. neut. 
 TO dj^Koz/, TO dvfjKovra, that which is pro 
 per, becoming, Philem. 8. Eph. 5, 4. Com 
 pare Hdot. 6. 109. Suid. dz^Koj/ TO irpf- 
 
 ov, 6, T), adj. (a priv. 
 untamed, ungentle, fierce, of oersons 2 Tim. 
 
avrjp 
 
 3, 3. JSsch. Prom. 716. Arr. Epict. 1. 3. 
 7. Plut. Pomp. 28. 
 
 dvijp, avftpos, 6, (kindr. dprjv, 
 a man, one of the male -sex, Lat. xir. 
 
 1. Genr. as opp. to woman ; Luke 1, 27. 
 34 fTTtl uv8pa ou yip&jovcco. 5, 18. 7, 20. 
 John 1,13. Acts 2, 22. 9, 38. 10, 5. 30. 
 13, 21. Rom. 11, 4. James 1, 8. 2, 2. al. 
 saep. Xen. (Ec. 7. 30. Plato Conv. 191. e. 
 
 2. Spec, a man of adult years. a) As 
 distinguished from a youth, etc. Luke 19,2. 
 John 1,30; so where tivftpes, yvvaiKfs, irat- 
 dia are spoken of, Matt. 14, 21. 15,38. 
 Mark 6, 44. Acts 17, 12. So Plato Rep. 
 549. e. Xen. Conv. 4. 17. b). As mar 
 ried, a husband, Matt. 1,16. Mark 10, 2. 12. 
 Luke 2, 36. 16, 18. John 4, 16-18. 1 Cor. 
 7, 2-4. 13. 14. Gal. 4, 27. Col. 3, 19. al. 
 Sept. and izjix Gen. 2, 23. 3, 6. (Ecclus. 
 4, 10. Luc. D. Mort. 23. 3. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 
 3. 13.) Also a husband by anticipation, 
 one betrothed, a bridegroom, Matt. 1, 19. 
 Rev. 21, 2. Sept. and tfix Deut. 22, 23. 
 So of a bride, els dvftpbs [OIKIOJ/] tivai v. 
 e A3eu> Alciphr. p. 364. Liban. p. 556. c. 
 Comp. Greg. Cor. p. 45 Schaef. c) Plur. 
 of soldiers, or rather of the temple guards 
 under the direction of the Sanhedrim, men, 
 Luke 22, 63 ; comp. v. 47 and Matt. 26, 47. 
 So of soldiers 1 Mace. 3, 39. Xen. An. 1. 
 
 2. 1. d) With an adjunct ; e. g. with an 
 adj. as dvfjp (ppovipos Matt. 7, 24 ; dvrjp //.co- 
 cos v. 26 ; also Luke 5, 8. 12. James 1, 8. al. 
 So Hdian. 2. 15. 1. Xen. An. 1. 3. 20. With 
 pron. Tt j, where dv^p is pleonast. Luke 8, 
 27. Acts 10, 1. 16, 9. So Xen. An. 4. 8. 
 
 4. With a gentile noun, as Acts 8, 27 avr^p 
 Afoi o^ an Ethiopian. 10,^28. 22, 3. Plur. 
 Matt. 12, 41 avftpfs NjvfvtTai. Luke 11, 32. 
 Acts 11, 20. So Ml V. H. 12. 56. Xen. 
 An. 1. 8. 1 dvf]p IlepaTjs. e) In a direct 
 and respectful address, simply avftpfs, men, 
 sirs, Acts 14, 15. 19, 25. 27, 10. 21. 25. 
 (Xen. An. 1. 4. 14.) With a gentile noun; 
 Acts 1, 11 avbpes TaXtXalot. 2, 14. 22. 5, 
 35. 13, 16. 17, 22 avSpes AS^i/mot, Athe 
 nians. 19, 35. 21, 28. So Xen. An. 1. 7. 
 
 3. With aSeXcpoi, Acts 1, 16 ; comp. Sv- 
 8p (/u Aoi Xen. An. 1. 6. 6. f) Indef. for 
 dvr)p ris or simple ris, Luke 9, 38 dvrjp dirb 
 TOV oxXou. Acts 6, 11. So Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 
 22 dvrjp TOV 8rjp.ov. 
 
 3. Trop. a man in understanding, intel 
 ligence, true wisdom ; opp. a child 1 Cor. 
 13, 11 ; and so reXeioy dvfjp Eph. 4, 13. 
 James 3, 2. So a man worthy of the name, 
 Horn. II. 5. 529. Hdot. 7. 210. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 4. 2. 25. 
 
 4. Indef. a man, any man or person, one 
 of the human family, Lat. homo. Rom. 4, 8 
 paKapios dvrjp, w KT\. James 1,12. 20. 23. 
 Plur. Luke 11, 31 fiera rcoi/ dvBpmv rf/s yt- 
 vtiis Tav-njs. Acts 4, 4. Matt. 14, 35 oi 
 tivdpes TOV TOTTOV e/ceiVou the men of that 
 place, the people, the inhabitants. Sing. 
 Soph. CEd. Col. 567 or 573. Xen. Mem. 
 4. 5. 2. Plur. Luc. D. Mort. 24. 1. Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 3. 13. + 
 
 ai> jiCTT77/zt, f. O-TIJO-CO, (dvri, urr^/ii,) in 
 N. T. only perf. dv^ea-T^Ka, aor. 2 avrta-rnv, 
 Mid. impf. dv^LcrTa^v ; Act. intrans. to 
 stand against, Mid. to set oneself against ; i. e. 
 genr. to withstand, to resist, to oppose, c. dat. 
 Matt. 5, 39 p,rj dvri(TTr)vai r<a Ttovrjpio. Luke 
 21, 15. Acts 6, 10. 13, 8. Rom. 9, 19. 13, 
 2. Gal. 2, 11. 2 Tim. 3, 8 bis. 4,15. James 
 4, 7. 1 Pet. 5, 9 ; absol. Rom. 13, 2 ot dv- 
 Seo-rTjKoYey. Eph. 6, 13. Sept. for lay 
 Ps. 76, 8 ; rrn|5 Deut. 25, 18. Ildian. 2*. 
 10. 11. Plato Conv. 196. d. Absol. Xen. 
 An. 7. 3. 11. 
 
 dv&OfjLO\oyeofj,(U, ovjuat, Mid. depon. 
 (dvri, o/ioXoyfo),) pr. to utter in turn the 
 same things, said of a person or party as 
 over against another ; hence, to assent or 
 consent in turn, on one s part, c. dat. Pol. 
 28. 4. 4. ib. 17. 6 ; to make an agreement 
 Pol. 5. 105. 2; to confess in turn, on one s 
 part, e. g. TOS apapTias Jos. Ant. 8. 10. 3. 
 1 Esdr. 8, 91 ; c. dat. Pol. 30. 8. 7. In N. T. 
 to profess or declare in turn, to praise, to 
 laud, on one s part, c. dat. Luke 2, 38 *al 
 O.VTT) avScu/JoAoyeiTo rai Kvpia> and she too 
 (in turn, on her part) praised the Lord, i. e. 
 as Simeon had done just before, vv. 34. 35. 
 So Sept. for ^ rri-in Ps. 79, 13. Comp. Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 70 dy3o/zoAoyeur3ai ray aptray TOV 
 /SatrtAecoy. 
 
 aifeo$) eos, TO, (dvd, avco,) a flower, 
 James 1, 10. 11. 1 Pet. 1, 24 bis. Sept. for 
 "P* Num. 17, 8. Luc. Nigr. 30. Xen. 
 Ven. 5. 5. 
 
 dv&pa/cid, as, T), (ai/3pa,) afire of coals, 
 a heap of burning coals, John 18, 18. 21, 
 9. Ecclus: 11, 32. Dem. 423. 2. Plut. 
 Symp. 6. 7. 2. 
 
 , axes, 6, a coal; Rom. 12,20 
 o-apfvo-fis eVi TTJV Kf(JHi\i}v 
 avTov thou shall heap coals of fire on his 
 head, i. e. awaken feelings of shamo and 
 compunction ; quoted from Prov. 25, 22, 
 where Sept. for rbnj._Hdian 4. 7. 9, 
 Plut. C. Mar. 44. 
 
 ou, 6, 77, (ai/3po>7ro, 
 a word of the later Greek, Lob. 
 
56 
 
 ad Phryn. p. 621 ; Plur. as Subst. men- 
 pleasers, Eph. 6, 6. Col. 3, 22. Sept. Ps. 
 53, 6. Psalt. Salom. 4, 8. 10. p. 929. 
 
 dv^pdiTTWOS, 77, or, (i/3po>7roff,) per 
 taining to man, human, i. e. a) As distinc 
 tive of man ; James 3, 7 17 (pvo-is dv^pwirivr] 
 marts nature, opp. to that of beasts, etc. 
 So Hdian. 1. 13. 12. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 13. 
 b) As proceeding from or instituted by man, 
 e. g. a-ofpia dv^pwnivr], marts wisdom, not 
 the true, 1 Cor. 2, 4. 13. Also 1 Cor. 4, 3 
 dv^puiTivri fip.fpa a marts day, i. e. a judg 
 ment day of man s appointment ; antith. 
 fip-epa Kvpiov. 1 Pet. 2, 13. So Dem. 317. 
 23. Plato Apol. 20. d, di>3p. o~o(pia. c) As 
 common to man or to his experience ; 1 
 Cor. 10, 13 TTftpacr/ios ... uv^pannvos, i. e. 
 common to man, and therefore adapted to 
 his weakness ; opp. v-rrep 6 fiumo-Se. Neut. 
 as adv. Rom. 6, 19di/3po>7riVoi>Aeya> I speak 
 in the manner of men, in language and ex 
 amples drawn from common life, i. q. KOTO. 
 ttj/3p7TOi/ Xe yw Gal. 3, 15. So Pol. 3. 5. 8. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 40. 
 
 dv^pCOTTOKTOVOS, 0V, 6, r/, adj. (aiKpa>iTos, 
 KTfivw.) manslaying ; Subst. a manslayer, 
 murderer, John 8, 44. 1 John 3, 15 bis. 
 Comp. Wisd. 2, 24. Eurip. Iph. T. 390. 
 
 s, ov, 6, T), (kindr. dvd, ava>, 
 a man, one of the human family, 
 man or woman, a person, Lat. homo. Sept. 
 often forces; BJiS ; ttJ13X. 
 
 1. Pr. and definite or indefinite, as put 
 with or without the article or other ad 
 juncts. 
 
 A) Definite, with the art. 6 ai/3po>7ror, 
 
 01 ai>3pto7rot, and also in the Vocative. 
 
 a) Where the person spoken of is already 
 known, either from the context or in some 
 other way. a) Simply, e. g. Sing. 6 av- 
 3pa>7roy, Matt. 12, 13 Tore Ae yet TW di-3p&>7r6>, 
 comp. v. 10. 26, 72. 74. Mark 3, 3. 5 comp. 
 v. 1. 5, 8 comp. v. 2. 14, 71. Luke 6, 8 
 comp. v. 6. 8, 29. 33. 35 comp. v. 27. John 
 2, 25 bis, where 6 ai/Spwjroj is the particu 
 lar person with whom Jesus might at any 
 time have to do. John 7, 51 p) 6 v6p.os 
 rip-cov Kpivfi rbv av Spwirov doth our law con 
 demn the man? i. e. the person accused. 
 John 19, 5 tSe 6 ai/SpwTrof, i. e. the man 
 whose life ye seek. Matt. 12, 43 and Luke 
 11, 24 when the unclean spirit is gone out 
 OTTO TOV di/SpooTTov. i. e. the man in whom he 
 had dwelt. Acts 19, 16. 25, 22 comp. v. 14. 
 
 2 Thess. 2, 3. PLUR. of aVSpwTrot, the men, 
 the persons, already known ; Matt. 8, 27 
 of 8e ai3p<7rot &av[j.a<rai>, i. e. those in 
 the boat with Jesus. Luke 7, 31. John 
 
 4, 28 Totj di^p&JTrois, the men of the city, 
 the inhabitants. John 6, 10. 14 comp. v. 5. 
 2 Thess. 3, 2. Rev. 9, 6. 10. 15. 18. 20, 
 comp. v. 4. /3) With an adjunct render 
 ing the person more definite and distinct ; 
 e. g. ouroy, as 6 av Sp. OVTOS or OVTOS 6 
 <u/3p. Mark 14, 71. 15, 39. Luke 2, 25. 
 John 7, 46. Acts 5, 28. al. Plur. Acts 4, 16. 
 5,35. 38. 16, 17. 20. With cufivos, Matt. 
 12,45. 18,7. Mark 14,21. Luke 11,26. 
 James 1, 7. Plur. Acts 16, 35. Also with 
 TO i OVTOS, 2 Cor. 12, 3 ; us, o OTIS with its 
 verb John 9, 24. Acts 4, 22 ; Plur. John 17 
 6. Rev. 9, 4. So with a numeral, as 6 els av 
 3po)7roy the one man Rom. 5, 15. 19 ; or a 
 subst. with the art. in apposition, as ot av- 
 SpwTTot ot TToififves Luke 2,15; or a parti 
 ciple with the art. Luke 11, 44. John 5, 12. 
 Acts 4, 14. 21, 28. Rev. 16, 2. y) Vocat. 
 aySptBTre, addressed to a person standing 
 by, and less respectful than avrjp q. v. 
 Luke 5, 20. 12, 14. 22, 58. 60. Also & av- 
 SpwTre, addressed by a writer to the person 
 to whom he writes, or with whom he is dis 
 cussing or disputing ; 1 Tim. 6, 1 1 (TV 6V, &> 
 avZpanrf TOV Seou, but thou, O man of God. 
 Rom. 2, 1. 3. 9, 20. James 2, 20 comp. v, 
 18. So Plut. de sera Num. vind. 8. Xen 
 Cyr. 2. 2. 7. 
 
 b) Where the Sing. 6 avSpa-n-os, the man, 
 is used in a collective or generic sense, either 
 for all mankind or for a particular class of 
 men ; Winer 27. 1 . Matt. 4, 4 OVK eV apra 
 p,6vti> {rj&ertu 6 ai/SpwTro?. 12, 35 6 dyaSor 
 ai/3pco7roy. 15, 11 bis. 18. 20 bis. Mark 2, 
 27. Luke 4, 4. Rom. 7, 1. 10, 5. 1 Cor. 2, 
 11 bis. So with an adjunct for greater 
 definiteness, e. g. os with its verb Rom. 4, 
 6 ; a participle with the art. Rom. 14, 20. 
 
 c) Where the Plur. of ai/3po>7roi, the men, 
 is used in a generic sense, more or less 
 limited according to the context, a) As 
 referring mainly to those round about, the 
 people with whom we live, in comm. Engl. 
 the folks ; usually in Engl. without art. 
 men, people, folks, other men. Matt. 10, 17 
 TrpcxTfXfTe COTO TI> diftpunruv beware of men, 
 people, i. e. those with whom you are 
 brought in contact. Matt. 5, 13 KaraTrarel- 
 crSat VTTO rutv di/3pa>7r<Bi . V. 16. 19. 6, 1. 2. 
 
 5. 14. 15. 16. 18. 7, 12. 13, 25. Mark 8, 
 27. Acts 18, 13. al. : With a particip. with 
 out art. Mark 8, 24. ) Where of atftp. 
 refers to mankind as a whole, though with-* 
 out including every individual ; Engl. usu 
 ally without art. men, mankind. Matt. 12, 
 3 1 Tracra d/iaprt a . . . d0e3^o-eTat rotr dvSpa)- 
 irois. 19, 12. Mark 7, 21. John 3, 19. Acts 
 
57 
 
 15, 17. 24, 16. Rom. 14, 18. 1 Cor. 13, 1. 
 Eph. 4, 14. Col. 2, 22. 1 Tim. 6, 9. 2 Tim. 
 
 3, 2. Rev. 8, 11. 13, 13. al. With an adj. 
 implying a class of mankind, 1 Pet. 2, 15. 
 2 Pet. 3, 7. Opp. to God, and with a par 
 ticiple with the art. James 3, 9. y} Where 
 all mankind are included ; John 1 , 4 17 fcoi) 
 TJV TO <pu>s TOW dv^panratv. Acts 17, 30. 
 Rom. -2, 16. Heb. 9, 27. Rev. 16, 18. Matt. 
 9, 8 TOV 86ma fov(riav roiavrrjv rots ai 3pa>- 
 nois, i. e. they regarded the power exercised 
 by Jesus as something imparted to mankind 
 or to the human nature. Also where of 
 y3pa>7rot stands in antith. with 6 Sedy, in 
 cluding also the idea of frailty and imper 
 fection; Matt. 10, 32. 33. Mark 7, 8. Luke 
 
 12, 8. 9. 16, 15; comp. below in B. c. e. 
 B) Indef. without the art. av^pwros a 
 
 man, av^panroi men, i. e. an individual or 
 individuals of the human family. 
 
 a) In the predicate of a sentence ; Matt. 
 8, 9 KOI yap aiftpanros flpi inro f^oixriav. 
 Acts 10, 26. 28. James 5, 17. Plur. Acts 
 
 4, 13. 14, 15. Plato Crat. 399. c. 
 
 b) W T hen ai/3pw7ros is subjoined in appo 
 sition by way of explanation; so with Ss 
 after a pron. John 8, 40 ; after a noun 
 
 1 Tim. 2, 5. 
 
 c) Genr. and in various relations, viz. 
 it) For an individual in particular circum 
 stances, but not before known or referred 
 to, a man, a certain man ; Plur. men, cer 
 tain men. Matt. 13, 31 ov \aftvv av^panros 
 toTTfipev tv TOJ dyp< avrov. V. 44. 21, 28. 
 Mark 4, 26. l2, l . Luke 13, 19. 20, 9. 
 John 9, 1. Plur. of persons slain Rev. 11, 
 
 13. So where the writer does not wish to 
 specify the person more nearly ; 2 Cor. 12, 
 
 2 ol8a uv%pa>TTov eV Xpicrra). Rev. 13, 18 
 dpi3p,oy yap ai SpcoTrou eori. $) With an 
 adjunct expressing the character or circum 
 stances of a person or persons ; e, g. a prep, 
 with its case, Mark 1, 23 a/3p. tv irvevfjLaTi 
 aKaSdprw. 5, 2. John 3, 1 uv^p. t< TCOV 
 4>apacraicoi>. So with an appellative, where 
 we may render merely the latter; Matt. 
 11, 19 and Luke 7, 34 av3p. cpdyoy KOI 
 otwTTonjs, i. e. a glutton and a wine-bibber. 
 Matt. 13, 45 avZp. ep-rropoy. V. 52. 18, 23. 
 20, 1. 21, 33. Comp. Matth. } 430. 6. 
 With a gentile noun, Matt. 27, 32 c/3p. 
 Kvpnvalos, i. e. a Cyrenian. Acts 21, 39. 
 22, 25. Siftp. Pa>pxzloy a Roman. Plur. 
 Acts 16, 37. (Xen. An. 6. 2. 23.) With 
 an adj. John 9, 16 cu-3p. ap,apTo>Xoy. Mark 
 13, 34 a. dirodrjfws. Acts 4, 9 3i>3p. do-3f- 
 vr,s. Matt. 9, 32. 13, 28. Rom. 1, 23. 7, 
 24. Tit. 3, 10. Plur. Luke 24, 7. Acts 
 
 4, 13. With Tt y indef. a certain man, Matt. 
 18, 12. Luke 10, 30. 12,16. 14,2. John 5, 
 
 5. al. Plur. 1 Tim. 5, 24. Jude 4. With 
 relat. oy and its verb, Luke 2, 25. 5, 18. 
 John 4, 29 ; so with Kai instead of a relat. 
 Luke 6, 6 ; or also iva instead of a relat. 
 John 5, 7. With a participle having the 
 art. Rom. 1, 18. 2, 9. Jude 4; but usually 
 without art. Matt. 9, 9. 11, 8. 12, 10. Mark 
 3, 1. Luke 4, 33. John 9, 11. Acts 15, 26. 
 al. y) For any man or men, whoever 
 he or they may be, of whatever birth, age, 
 country, rank, character. Matt. 12, 12 TO O-W 
 ovv StcKpepet ai>3pa>7roy irpoftarov. Luke 18, 
 2. 4. John 5, 34. 41. 7, 46. Acts 12, 22. 
 1 Cor. 6, 18. 15, 21 where the expression 
 is general, though the individual referred to 
 is known, comp. Rom. 5, 15. 17. Gal. 3, 
 15. 6, 1. Phil. 2, 8. Rev. 4, 7. al. Plur. 
 wSpcoTTot men, Luke 1, 25. Acts 17, 26. 
 1 Cor. 3, 21 Kavxdo- Sai ev dv3pa>7roty, comp. 
 v. 32. 4, 9. 14, 2. 3. 2 Cor. 5, 11. 1 Tim. 
 2, 5. Heb. 5, 1. Rev. 9, 7. al. Sometimes 
 the genit. Plur. di-3pa>7rcoj/ approaches to the 
 nature of an adj. or compound idea ; e. g. 
 dXiely di SpcoTrwi men-Jishers Matt. 4, 19. 
 Mark 1, 17; eVrdXp-ara dv3p. human com 
 mandments Matt. 15, 9. Mark 7, 7 ; so 
 Luke 9, 56. Acts 17, 25. Phil. 2, 7. In 
 like manner the genit. Sing. df3po>7rou is 
 found instead of an adj. 2 Pet. 2, 16 eV dv 
 3pd)7rou (jxavtj with man s voice, i. e. a human 
 voice. Rev! 21, 17. So Sept. Is. 8, 1. 
 S) With an adjunct of number or quantity ; 
 e. g. a numeral, as els at>%p. John 1 1,50. 18, 
 14; Suo aj/3p. Luke 18, 10. John 8, 17. 
 So \vith IT as, as -rras <w3p. John 1, 9. Col. 
 1, 28 bis. James 1, 19; noires <u>3p. Luke 
 13, 4. Acts 22, 15. Rom. 5, 12. 18. 1 Cor. 
 7, 7. Phil. 4, 5. 1 Tim. 2, 1. 4. al. Neg. 
 ovSf if di/3pa>7ra>i> Mark 11,2. Luke 19, 30. 
 1 Tim. 6, 16. James 3, 8 ; p.rj8e Is di/Spw- 
 TTU>V Acts 4, 17. With TIS interrog. imply 
 ing a negat. TIS ai/Spwrros what man 1 Matt. 
 7, 9. 12, 11. Luke 15, 4. Acts 19, 35 ; T/S 
 dv%pdm<i>v I Cor. 2, 11. e) In antithesis 
 with Gdd, Christ, or with the operations of 
 the Holy Spirit, ai/Spcorros includes the idea 
 of frailty, imperfection, error, sin ; so opp. 
 God, Matt. 19, 6 6 oSv.6 3f6s (rvvffvcv, 
 av SptoiTos pf) xcopieTo>. 21, 25. 26. 22, 16. 
 Mark 10, 27. Acts 5, 29. Rom. 2, 29. al. Opp. 
 Christ, Gal. 1, 12 ov8e rrapa di/Spcorrcov . . . 
 dXXa 81 drroKaXv^ecoy I. Xp. Col. 3, 23. Heb. 
 7, 28. Opp. God and Christ, Gal. 1 , 1 bis. 10 
 bis. So too in respect to the agency of the 
 Spirit, as TJ/VXIKOS uiftpumos opp. o irvt v/ia- 
 TICCO S 1 Cor, 2, 14 comp, 15, f) In the 
 
58 
 
 phrase Kara av^punrov, according to 
 man, i. e. as a man, after the manner of 
 men; Gal. 1, 11 rb evayyeXiov . . . OVK ecrri 
 Kara av^punrov, i. e. not after the manner of 
 men, not such as men would make it, comp. 
 V. 12. 1 Cor. 3, 3 ov^l . . . Kara acSpcoTroi/ 
 TrapaTrareZre walk ye not as men ? parall. 
 crapK.iK.ol la-re. 1 Cor. 15, 32 see in 3?;pto- 
 /ua^e co. So \eyetv V. XaXai/ Kara avSpunrov 
 to speak after Jhe manner of men, i. e. either 
 as men speak, perh. inconsiderately, Rom. 
 3, 5 ; or by an example drawn from com 
 mon life, Gal. 3, 15 ; or from human in 
 sight or experience, 1 Cor. 9, 8. 
 
 2. Spec, avSpanros with or without the 
 art. stands in place of words expressing 
 various relations which are determined by 
 the context, e. g. a) For a man, xir, a 
 male adult person, Matt. 25, 24. Luke 19, 
 21. 22. John 1, 6. 3, 1. Acts 4, 13. al. So 
 oVSipooTros TOV 3ov, a man of God, his mi 
 nister or messenger, 2 Tim. 3, 17. 2 Pet. 
 1, 21. (Sept. for CPr^N WIN 1 K. 13, 1. 
 
 1 Esdr. 5, 49.) Also 6 aVSp. rfjs ap.aprias 
 
 2 Thess. 2, 3, see in ap.apria no. 1 . b) For 
 a husband, opp. a wife, Matt. 19. 3. 5. 10. 
 Mark 10, 7. 1 Cor. 7, 1. Eph. 5, 31. So 
 Sept. and ti^X Gen. 2, 24. c) Fora/iowse- 
 holder, master, pater-familias, opp. 01 oiKta- 
 KOI, Matt. 10, 36. d) For a son, opp. a fa 
 ther, Matt. 10, 35 ; and genr. for a male child, 
 John 7, 22. 23. 16, 21. So Ecclus. 3, 11. 
 Hdian. 1. 5. 15. e) For a sermnt, slave, 
 opp. a master, Luke 12, 36 comp. 37. Also 
 Rev. 18, 13 ^rv^al dz/3pa>7ra>i> men s persons, 
 i. e. slaves ; in allusion to Ez. 27, 13 where 
 Sept. for fix EB5 id. See in art. ^fvxn 
 no. 3. c. So Xen. Vect. 4. 14. Mem. 2. 1. 15. 
 
 3. Trop. in phrases, viz. a) Of the in 
 ner and outer man ; e. g. 6 eVco av^pmnos 
 the inner man, the mind, the soul, the ra 
 tional and moral nature, Rom. 7, 22. Eph. 
 3, 16 ; called also 6 KpvTrrbs TTJS KapSias 
 oVapcoTroy the hidden man of the heart 1 Pet. 
 3, 4. Opp. is 6 eo> aVSpoOTos the outer man, 
 the body, 2 Cor. 4, 16. b) Of the old and 
 new man ; e. g. 6 TraXaibs av^panros the old 
 man, the carnal unrenewed nature, Rom. 6, 
 6. Eph. 4, 22. Col. 3, 9. Opp. is 6 naivbs 
 nv^patiros the new man, i. e. renewed and 
 sanctified in Christ, Eph. 4, 24 ; impl. Col. 
 3, 10. So Christ is said to create in him 
 self the two (Jew and Gentile) els eva 
 Kmvbv av%pu>irov into one new man, who is 
 neither Jew nor Gentile, Eph. 2, 15 ; comp. 
 Gal. 3, 28. 6, 15. 
 
 4. In the phrase vf6y rov dvSpunrov, son 
 of man. 
 
 a) Without art. a son of man, i. q. a 
 man, one of the human race, parall. with 
 wSptaTToy, Heb. 2, 6 ri ecrriv oVSpcoTroy . 
 77 vlbs aV3po>7rov, quoted from Ps. 8, 5 
 where Sept. for cix ja. Spoken of the 
 Messiah as S/JLOIOS vim dv^punrov like unto a 
 son of man, in the likeness of man, Rev. 1, 
 
 13. 14, 14 ; in allusion to Dan. 7, 13, where 
 Sept. for Chald. t ; 3X "i2 . John 5, 27 see 
 in lett. b. Plur. 01 viol ra>v oVSpcoTrcoi the 
 s-ons of men, i. e. men, Eph. 3, 5. Mark 3, 
 28 irdvra d(pf %t](T(rai ra ap.aprrjp.ara rots 
 viols raiv diftpdnrmv, i. q. roty aVSpcoTroiy in 
 Matt. 12, 31. So Sept. for SON ">53 Gen. 
 11,5. Ecc. 2, 8. al. 
 
 b) With the art. 6 vlbs rov dv^pumov 
 the Son of man, pr. n. for the Messiah, used 
 by Jesus of himself, in allusion to Dan. 7,13; 
 see above in lett. a. Just as the Messiah 
 is called 6 vlbs rov SeoC the Son of God, as 
 partaking of the divine nature and sent 
 forth from God (see in VMS ) , so he calls 
 himself 6 vlbs rov di>3p. the Son of man, as 
 bearing the human form and nature, born 
 of a woman and made like unto his brethren 
 (Heb. 2, 17) ; Matt. 8, 20. 9, 6. 10, 23. 
 11, 19. 12, 8. Mark 2, 10. 28. Luke 5, 24. 
 
 6, 5. John 1, 52. 3, 13. 6, 27. 53. 62. al. 
 Once without art. John 5, 27 on vlbs dv- 
 3p&>77ou eoTi, i. e. because he hath taken 
 upon himself the human nature. In Dan. 
 
 7, 13. 14 the Messiah is represented as 
 coming with the clouds of heaven, and 
 this is repeated in Matt. 24, 30. Mark 13, 
 26. Luke 21, 27 ; also Matt. 26, 64. Mark 
 
 14, 62. Luke 22, 69. In all, Jesus uses 
 this appellation of himself in the Gospels 84 
 times ; elsewhere it is used of him only 
 once, by Stephen Acts 7, 56. Others : THE 
 Son of man,, in distinction from all other 
 men, THE MAN in the highest sense, the 
 model and archetype of man. + 
 
 va), f. eva-a, (oVSvTraro?,) to 
 be proconsul, to govern as proconsul, c. gen. 
 Acts 18, 12. Hdian. 7. 5. 2. Plut. Comp. 
 Demosth. c. Cic. 3 fin. 
 
 , O v, 6, (dvri, vrraroy.) a 
 proconsul, Acts 13, 7. 8. 12. 19, 38 /cat dv- 
 Sinraroi ela-iv, a generic Plur. for a procon 
 sul; Winer ^ 27. 2. So Pol. 21. 8. 11. 
 Plut. Galb. 3. For the rank and authority 
 of proconsuls, see in art. Tiyepwv no. 2. Cy 
 prus was originally a pretorian province, 
 o-rparijjLK^, and not proconsular ; but was 
 left by Augustus under the senate, and hence 
 was governed by a proconsul ; Strabo 14. 
 684, 685. Dion Cass. 54, 4. See Adam s 
 
59 "Avva? 
 
 Rom. Ant. p. 158. 165. Diet, of Antt. art. 
 Provincia. 
 
 l, f. di/?;o-o>, (iq/u,) aor. 2 avrjv, 
 Pass. aor. 1 dv&rjv, to send up or forth, 
 Od. 4. 568 ; to make spring up JEsch. Supp. 
 266. In N. T. to let up, to let go, i. e. 
 
 1. to slacken, to loosen, c. ace. ras (VKTT]- 
 pias Acts 27, 40. Pass Acts 16, 26 TO 
 Stcr/iei ai/e Sij. Wisd. 16, 24. Plut. M. Ant. 
 49. Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 7 opp. eVreiVw. 
 
 2. Zo Zeave o/f, to cease from, c. ace. r^v 
 aTTfiX^ Eph. 6, 9. (Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 75.) 
 Also to leave, not to care for a person, c. ace. 
 Heb. 13, 5 ov p.f] o-f dvfo, comp. Deut. 31, 6 
 where Sept. for ns^ Hiph. 
 
 avL\eci)?, co, 6, i], adj. (a priv. tXeco?, 
 without mercy, stern, only James 
 2, 13. 
 
 avtTTTOS, ov, 6, f], adj. (a priv. i//7rra>,) 
 unwashed, a. x e ~ l P es Matt. 15, 20. Mark 7, 
 
 2. 5. Horn. II. 6. 266. Hes. Op. 723. 
 Luc. Demon. 4. 
 
 avicn"r)fllj f. dvao-TTja-co, (ion;/u,) aor. 1 
 di/ecrnycra ; aor. 2 dvfarrjv, imper. dwo-njSt, 
 apoc. avdvra Acts 12, 7. Eph. 5, 14. The 
 tenses of this verb, as in i<rn;/H q. v. are 
 divided between the trans, and intrans. sig 
 nifications, viz. 
 
 I. TRANS, in Act. pres. impf. fut. and 
 aor. 1 ; to make stand up, to raise up, i. e. 
 
 1. Pr. from a sitting posture, c. ace. 
 Acts 9, 41. So Pol. 13. 7. 8, comp. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 4. 11. Of the dead, to raise up 
 sc. from the grave into life, c. ace. John 6, 
 39. 40. 44. 54. Acts 2, 24. 32. 13, 33; 
 also c. vfKpa>v Acts 13, 34. 17, 31. So 
 Horn. H. 24. 551. Xen. Yen. 1. 6. 
 
 2. Trop. to raise up, to cause to exist or 
 appear, e. g. TOV Xpurrov Acts 2, 30. 3, 26 ; 
 Trpo(pr]Tr]v Acts 3, 22. 7, 37, comp. Deut. 
 18, 18 where Sept. for E^pn. Also c. ace. 
 et dat. as o~irfpp.a rivi Matt. 22, 24, comp. 
 Sept. and tpptt Gen. 38, 8. Not else 
 where trans, in N. T. 
 
 II. INTRANS. in Act. perf. plupf. and 
 aor. 2 ; also in Mid. to stand up, to rise up, 
 to arise, viz. 
 
 1. Pr. from a posture or condition of 
 rest, e. g. a) Of persons sitting, Matt. 9, 
 9. 26,62. Mark 2, 14. 14,60. Luke 4, 16. 
 29. Acts. 9, 18 ; c. inf. 1 Cor. 10,7. Sept. 
 for Wp Ezra 9, 5. (Dem. 228. 18. Xen. An. 
 
 3. 2. 34.) Prsegn. Luke 4, 38 KOI avcurras 
 AC rijs (rvvayayyris, and he arose and went 
 out of the synagogue ; comp. Plato Pha^d. 
 116. a. di/urraro tls olicrjud TL. Once of a 
 person kneeling, Luke 22, 45 dvaoras djro 
 
 comp. v. 41. Sept. and nip 
 1 K. 8, 54. In the simplicity and particu 
 larity of ancient narrative, this verb (usually 
 Part, awards) is often put before verbs of 
 going, and also of undertaking or doing any 
 thing, like Heb. nip ; see Heb. Lex. nip 
 no. 1. b. Winer 67. 2. n. Mark 7, 24. 
 10, 1. Luke 1, 39. 15, 18. 20. 23, 1. Acts 
 
 8, 26. 27. 9, 11. al. So Sept. and nip Gen. 
 22, 3. 1 Sam. 26, 2. Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 14 
 dvao-ras egr/ei. b) Of persons lying down ; 
 e. g. those sleeping, Mark 1, 35. Luke 11, 
 7. 22, 46. So Xen. CEc. 11. 4. Plato Ax. 
 367. c. The Atticists disallow this word 
 in respect to sleep, preferring rjyep^v 
 or fgrjyfpSrji ; SO Ammon. rjyep^r) dtrb VTT- 
 vov, avftm) 8e dno KXiVrjy. Thorn. Mag. art. 
 dve(TTr)<Ta. Genr. of those lying down for 
 any cause, Mark 5, 42. 9, 27. Luke 17, 19. 
 Acts 9, 6. 34. 40. 12, 7. Sept. and nip 
 Prov. 24, 16. Mic. 7, 8. So Luc. D. Mort. 
 27. 5. Xen. An. 4. 5. 8. c) Of the dead 
 to rise up from the grave into life, to live 
 again ; with e* veicpwv Matt. 17, 9. Mark 9, 
 
 9. 10. Luke 16, 31. 24, 46. John 20, 9. 
 Acts 17, 3 ; trop. of those dead in sin, 
 Eph. 5, 14. Absol. id. Matt. 20, 19. Mark 
 12,23. Luke 18, 33. 24,7. John 11,23.24. 
 Acts 9, 40. 1 Thess. 4, 14. 16. al. So 2 
 Mace. 7, 9 comp. v. 14. Horn. II. 24. 756. 
 Palseph. 27. Luc. Philops. 26. Hdot. 3. 62. 
 d) With eiri TIVCL, to rise up against any one, 
 in a hostile sense, to assail, Mark 3. 26. 
 Sept. for fcx dip Gen. 4, 8. So c. f i s riva 
 Thuc. 8. 45. 
 
 2. Trop. to rise up, to arise, to appear, to 
 come into existence, e. g. a king Acts 7, 18 ; 
 c. inf. Rom. 15, 12 ; a high priest Heb. 7, 
 11.15. So Sept. for Clp Ex. 1, 8. Also 
 i. q. to appear, to stand forth, e. g. before a 
 tribunal Matt. 12, 41. Luke 11, 32. Mark 
 14, 57 ; genr. Acts 5, 36. 37. 6, 9. 20, 30. 
 Comp. Sept. and "IES 2 Chr. 20, 5. + 
 
 Avva, r]s, TJ, Anna, pr. n. of a prophet 
 ess, Luke 2, 36. 
 
 Avva?, a, 6, Annas, pr. n. of a high 
 priest of the Jews, dp^itpevs, Luke 3, 2. 
 John 18, 13. 24. Acts 4, 6. He is called 
 by Josephus "Avavos Ananus the son of 
 Seth. He was made high priest by Quiri- 
 nus (Cyrenius) proconsul of Syria about 
 A. D. 8 ; but was deposed by the procura 
 tor Valerius Gratus about A. D. 14 or 15. 
 His successor was Ismael, the son of Pha- 
 bus ; then followed not long after (p.(r ov 
 TroAu) Eleazar, a son of Annas ; then after 
 a year, Simon son of Kamithus ; and after 
 another year, in A. D. 26, Joseph or Caia- 
 
phas, the son-in-law of Annas (John 18, 
 13); see Jos. Ant. 18. 2. 1,2. As Caia- 
 phas held the office until A. D. 35, he was 
 the actual high priest at the time of our 
 Lord s trial ; but Annas is also there so 
 called, as having before held the office. His 
 great influence may be ascribed to this fact, 
 and to his family connection with Caiaphas. 
 Others suppose him to have been the vicar 
 (")?*?) f Caiaphas ; see in dpxiepevs no. 1 . 
 
 avorjros, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. roew,) Pass. 
 unthought r/, unheard of, Horn. H. Merc. 
 80 ; not to be conceived of Plato Phasd. 80. 
 b. Act. not thinking, incapable of thought, 
 Plato Parm. 132. c. In N. T. Act. not un 
 derstanding, unwise, foolish, Luke 24, 25. 
 Gal. 3, 1. 3. Tit. 3, 3; opp. o-o^oi Rom. 1. 
 
 14. Of lusts, foolish, sensual, 1 Tim. 6, 9. 
 Sept. for VilK Prov. 17, 28; nb|! Prov. 
 15,21. So Dem. 311. 11. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 
 I. 31. 
 
 avoia : as, f], (avoos, avovs,) want of un 
 derstanding, folly, Sept. for n^ Prov. 22, , 
 
 15. Dem. 195. 3. In N. T. intens. extreme 
 folly, madness, Luke 6, 11. 2 Tim. 3, 9. So 
 2 Mace. 14, 5. 15, 33. Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 13. 
 
 avoiya), f. ot a>, (oiyo>, oiyw/u,) aor. 1 
 tWo>a John 9, 14. 30, also later rjvoi^a 
 Matt. 2, 1 1. John 9, 17. 21. Pausan. 4. 26. 6 ; 
 perf. 2 dvecpya. Pass. perf. dvea>yp.ai, and 
 with triple augm. ^i/ewy^ai Rev. 4, 1 . 10, 8 ; 
 Pass. aor. 1 dvea>x%T)i>, later fjvoix^rjv, with 
 triple augm. tjvftaxtyv Rev. 20, 12 ; Pass, 
 aor. 2 rjvoiyrjv a later form Rev. 11, 19. 15, 
 5 ; Pass. fut. 2 dvoiyrjaop-ai.. For all these 
 forms and augments, see Buttm. } 114 oi yw. 
 Kiihner {187. 6. Winer 5 12. 6. b. To 
 open, pr. by throwing up or back the lid or 
 door by which any thing is closed ; also in 
 later usage Perf. 2 dveaya intrans. to be 
 open, to stand open, John 1, 52. 2 Cor. 6, 
 
 II. Luc. Navig. 4. Hdian. 4. 2/14; see 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 157, 158. Buttm. {113. 
 n. 3. Attic impf. dvtqyov is trans. Xen. 
 An. 5. 5. 20. 
 
 1. Pr. to open what is closed by a lid, 
 cover, door ; e. g. a) By a lid or cover, 
 C. ace. Matt. 2, 11 dvoiavres TOVS ^rjcrav- 
 povs avT&v, their treasures, i. e. in caskets 
 or boxes. So Eurip. Ion 923 or 936. Phi- 
 lostr. 47. Of a well or pit, as usually co 
 vered by a large stone ; Rev. 9, 2 f/vot^e TO 
 rppeap TTJS dftvo-o-ov. Comp. Gen. 29, 2. 
 b) Of a door or gate, c. ace. Acts 5, 19 
 fjvoi^e ras %vpas. 12, 14. Pass. Acts 12, 
 10. 16, 26. 27. Rev. 4, 1. (Hdian. 8. 6. 3. 
 Xen. Hell. 5. 1. 14.) So ace. impl. c. dat. 
 
 60 avotya 
 
 Matt. 25, 11 icvpif, avoi^ov rj/uv. Luke 12, 
 36. 13, 25. John 10, 3. Absol. Acts 5, 23. 
 12, 16. So Pass, impers. in a proverbial 
 phrase, c. dat. Matt. 1, 7 Kpovere, Kal dvoiyf]- 
 o-erai vp.1v. v. 8. Luke 11, 9. 10. Trop. 
 dvolyeiv TTJV %vpav, to open the door, 
 i. e. either in order to receive gladly, Rev. 
 3, 20 ; or to present opportunity for preach 
 ing or embracing the gospel, c. dat. Acts 
 14, 27. Col. 4, 3 ; intrans. 1 Cor. 16, 9 ; 
 Pass. 2 Cor. 2, 12 ; eVa>7rtoV <rov Rev. 3, 8 ; 
 also as expressing dominion, sovereignty, 
 absol. Rev. 3, 7 bis. Comp. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 67 dz/<u|e rols uXXoiy eSz/eo-t rot ... e /ZTro pta. 
 Spoken also of places closed by a door or 
 otherwise ; as the temple, 6 vaos, Pass. Rev. 
 11,19. 15,5; sepulchres, T a /ii/T^Ia, which 
 usually have an upright entrance, Pass. 
 Matt 27, 52. Trop. Rom. 3, 13 ra^oy 
 dvecpyptvos 6 Xapuy avrcov, i. e. as an open 
 sepulchre emits fetid and noisome smells, 
 so the throat of the wicked belches forth 
 noisome slanders against God and the right 
 eous ; quoted from Ps. 5, 10 where Sept. foi 
 
 2. Of the heavens, Pass, to be opened, 
 intrans. to be open; the firmament being 
 regarded as opened so as to permit the vi 
 sion of things in heaven, or also intercourse 
 between heaven and earth ; comp. Ez. 1, 1. 
 Is. 64, 1. Plur. c. dat. Matt. 3, 16 dvea-fiT 
 aav avrcp ol ovpavoi. Absol. Acts 7, 56. 
 Sing. Luke 3, 21 dvfcpxSfjvm TOV ovpavov. 
 Acts 10, 11. Rev. 19, li. Intrans. John 1, 
 52 TOV ovpavov dvfatyora. So Sept. for HHB 
 Ez. 1, 1 ; S-1J3 Is/64, 1. 
 
 3. Of a book in the ancient form, to open, 
 to unroll, sc. a volume rolled up, TO /3t/3Xt oi> 
 Luke 4, 17 in Mss. Also a sealed volume, 
 Rev. 5, 2. 3. 4. 5. 10, 2. 8. Pass. 20, 12 
 bis. So of the seals of a volume, ray afppa- 
 yiSas Rev. 5, 9. 6, 1. 3. 5. 7. 9. 12. 8, 1. 
 Xen. Lac. 6. 4 dvoit-avras TO, crrjfjiavTpa. 
 
 4. Of various organs of the body, which 
 may be closed and opened, e. g. 
 
 a) Of the mouth, dvoiyeiv TO a-Top-a, to 
 open the mouth, e. g. a ) Of persons who 
 begin to speak, i. q. to speak, to discourse, 
 Matt. 5, 2. 13, 35. Acts 8, 35. 10, 34. 18, 
 14. Rev. 13, 6. Sept. for nB nnfi Dan. 
 10, 16. (Ecclus. 15, 5. Luc. Philops. 33.) 
 Intrans. TO o-royua rjfj.a>v ai/ewye Trpos vp.a$, 
 our mouth is open towards you, we speak 
 freely, frankly, 2 Cor. 6, 1 1. Hence negat. 
 not to open one s mouth, not to complain, 
 Acts 8, 32 ; quoted from Is. 53, 7 where 
 Sept. for MS tins &&. /3) p ass . dvtcj>x%T) 
 8e TO a-Tofta O.VTOV, and his mouth teas open- 
 
61 
 
 ed, he again spoke, recovered the power of 
 speech, Luke 1, 64. Comp. Sept. and 
 MB-r.X nns Num. 22, 28. y) Of a fish, 
 Matt. 17, 27 ; comp. Sept. for MSQ p s . 22, 
 14. 8) Trop. of the earth, to open her 
 mouth, i. e. to open, to cleave open, Rev. 12, 
 16. So Sept. and OB nSD Num. 16, 30. 
 Deut. 11,6; nnB Num. 26, 10. 
 
 b) Of the eyes, dvoiyeiv TQVS <j<p%aXp.ovs, 
 to open the eyes, e. g. one s own, Acts 9,40. 
 Pass. v. 8 ; or those of one blind, i. q. to 
 cause to see, to restore sight, John 9, 14. 17. 
 21. 26. 30. 32. 10, 21. 11, 37. Pass. Matt. 
 9, 30. 20, 33. John 9, 10. So Sept. and 
 n pB Is. 35, 5. 42, 7. Trop. to open the 
 eyes of the mind, to cause to hear and un 
 derstand, Acts 26, 18. 
 
 c) Of the ears, to open the ears, to cause 
 to hear, to restore hearing, Pass. Mark 7, 
 35 in Mss. for the comm. Stavoiyofuu. 
 
 dvotKOoofjieo), S), f. Tjo-o), (oiKo8o/iew,) 
 to build again, to rebuild, c. ace. Acts 15, 
 1 6 bis ; comp. Am. 9,11, where Sept. for 
 ,133. Lycurg. 193. 10. Xen. Hell. 4. 4. 
 19. T 
 
 , (us, 17, (diWyco,) an opening, 
 the act of opening, e. g. eV di>oi row crro- 
 paros fj.ov, in the opening of my mouth, i. e. 
 whenever I am called to speak or preach, 
 Eph. 6, 19. Plut. Symp. 9. 2. 3 17 av. TUV 
 X(i\cov. Thuc. 4. 67 17 a.i>oiis riov TTV\U>I>. 
 
 */> >> 
 
 avofjua, as, ), (avofifon, avop.os,) pr. 
 
 lawlessness; then violation of law, trans 
 gression, referring in N. T. to the^ Jaw of 
 God ; 1 John 3, 4 bis, TTO.S 6 noiStv TTJV dp.ap- 
 rlav, KOI TTJV dvofjiiav iroifi KOL 77 ap.apria 
 e<rr\v 17 di/o/ua, whosoever committeth sin, 
 jommitteth also transgression ; for sin is the 
 transgression sc. of God s law ; here dp,ap- 
 rla is the more general term, and dvofila 
 the more definite and specific ; see in d/zap- 
 n a no. 1. So genr. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 44. 
 Hence commonly avopia is used as parall. 
 and nearly synonymous with dp.apria no. 2, 
 viz. transgression, unrighteousness, iniqui 
 ty ; e. g. as opp. 8iKaioa"(ivr], 2 Cor. 6, 14 ris 
 yap p-frox*! SIK. * dvop.ia. Heb. 1, 9; and 
 so Matt. 23, 28. 24, 12. Rom. 6, 19. 2 
 Thess. 2, 7. Tit. 2, 14. So of fpya6p.tvoi 
 v. TroiovvTf s rrjv dvop.iav, workers or doers 
 of iniquity, Matt. 7, 23. 13, 41. Sept. for 
 flX ibs>B Ps. 5, 6. Job 31, 3. Plur. ini 
 quities, coupled with dftapTiai; Heb. 8, 12 
 and 10, 17 TU>I> dp.apri(ai> avrotv KOL roil/ dvo- 
 p,i>v avTtov ov p.r) nvrj& Sui (TI, quoted from 
 Jer. 31. 34, where the Heb. has only 
 EnXIjn , Sept. dp.apria>v avrcov. Also Rom. 
 
 4, 7, quoted from Ps. 32, 1 where Sept. foi 
 S1I3B, parall. nsan, Sept. apapria. Opp. 
 diKaioo-vivi Hdot. 1. 96. Xen. Mem. 1 
 
 2. 24. 
 
 avo/J,o$, ov, 6, f], adj. (a priv. i/o/ios,) 
 icithout law, i. e. 
 
 1 . not under law, i. e. the Jewish law ; 
 spoken of Gentiles and of Paul as conform 
 ing to them, 1 Cor. 9, 21 quater. Hence 
 genr. avopoi, Gentiles, heathen, Acts 2, 23. 
 Wisd. 15, 7. 1 Mace. 2, 44. 
 
 2. lawless, wicked, a transgressor, 1 Tim. 
 1,9. 2 Pet. 2, 8. 2 Thess. 2, 8 6 aw/nor, 
 i. e. he in whom 17 dvopia is personified, 
 i. q. 6 atftptoiros rtjs dfiaprias v. 3. Mark 
 15, 28 and Luke 22, 37 KOI p-tra dvoncov 
 fXoyia-^n, quoted from Is. 53, 12, where 
 Sept. for DIJJIZJB. Sept. also for stri Ez. 
 18,24; -jix tt&i Is. 55, 7. Antiph. 791. 1. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 13. 
 
 tti/6/i&>9, adv. (avo/xor,) without law, not 
 under the Jewish laic, Rom. 2, 12 bis; 
 comp. v. 14. 15. Genr. Isocr. 4. 59 Bekk. 
 Thuc. 4. 92. 
 
 dvop^OO), w, f. 0)0-0), (opSo to,) to set 
 upright again, what is bowed down or 
 fallen ; e. g. TO. yovara ra irapa\fXvfj.fva, 
 i. q. to strengthen, Heb. 12, 12 ; quoted 
 from Is. 35, 3 where Heb. j/rx . (Comp. 
 eVai/opSdw Xen. Mem. 2. 4. 6.) Pass. aor. 
 1, Luke 13, 13 Kal . . . di>a>p^o)^Tj and she 
 was set upright again, was made straight, 
 stood erect. Sept. for Tlisnn Ps. 20, 9 ; 
 ppT Ps. 145, 14. Of a tent or building in 
 ruins, to set up again, c. ace. Acts 15, 16 ; 
 quoted from Am. 9, 11 where Heb. n:a 
 Sept. di/otKoSo/if w. So Hdot. 1. 19. Xen. 
 Hell. 4. 8. 12. 
 
 avocrios, O v, 6, f/, adj. (a priv. 8<rios,) 
 unholy, ungodly, wicked, 1 Tim. 1,9. 2 Tim. 
 
 3, 2. Jos. Ant. 2. 3. 1. Plut. Pomp. 5. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 11. 
 
 rjs, f], (ave^a), dv/^o/iat,) a hold 
 ing hack, delay, e. g. a truce Jos. Ant. 6. 5. 
 1. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 17 ; or for doing any 
 thing, time, opportunity, 1 Mace. 12, 25. 
 Hdian. 3. 6. 21. In N. ^.forbearance, long- 
 suffering, Rom. 2, 4. 3, 26. So Hesych. 
 dvo\r) p.aicpo Svp.la. 
 
 dvTaya)vl%o/j,(U : f. ia-op-ai, Mid. depon. 
 (dm, dyuwfo/iat,) to struggle against, to 
 strive against ; with irpos nva Heb. 12, 4. 
 With dat. M. V. H. 2. 8. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 6. 8. 
 
 aVT(JL\Xcuy^CL, aros, TO, (dwoXXdcrcrci),) 
 pr. what is exchanged against any thing, 
 
avravaTrXrjpoot 
 
 1. e, an equivalent, a price. Matt. 16, 26 
 and Mark 8, 37 dirdXXay/za TTJS "^vx^s the 
 price or ransom of Ms life ; comp. Ps. 49, 8 
 where Heb. 1S3, Sept. e|i Xao-p.a. Sept. 
 genr. for T^rT 1 K. 21, 2. Ecclus. 6, 15. 
 Jos. B. J. 1. is. 3. Eurip. Or. 1157. 
 
 oa)) , f. a>cra>, (dvri, dva- 
 to fill up instead of another, c. 
 ace. Col. 1, 24 dvravaTT\rjpS) ra vcrrepfifiara 
 rS)V 3\l\l/fG)v TOW Xp. / jlll up instead (of 
 you) what is wanting of the afflictions of 
 Christ, i. e. instead of you and for you ; 
 see the last clause of the verse. Dem. 182. 
 22. Dion Cass. 44. 48. 
 
 aVTa7To8i$U>/ji[,, f. 8&><ro>, (dvri, dirodi- 
 Scop-t,) to give back instead of something 
 received, to repay, to recompense ; e. g. 
 good, c. ace. et dat. 1 Thess. 3, 9 ; ace. 
 impl. Luke 14, 14; Pass. c. dat. Luke 14, 
 14. Rom. 11, 35. Sept. and i=a 1 Sam. 
 24, 18. So Ecclus. 3, 31. Plato Parm. 
 128. c. Also evil, to requite, to avenge, c. 
 ace. et dat. 2 Thess. 1, 6 ; absol. Rom. 12,. 
 19 and Heb. 10, 30, quoted from Deut. 32, 
 35 where Sept. for bitti . So Sept. also 
 for baa 1 Sam. 24, 18. Judith 7, 15. 
 Comp. Thuc. 1. 43. 
 
 aVT(l7rooofJ,a : O.TOS, TO, (dircm-oS/Scop.^) 
 recompense, requital, of good Luke 14, 12; 
 of evil Rom. 11,9. Sept. for btoa Ps. 28, 
 4. Joel 4, 4. Ecclus. 12, 2. 14, 6. 
 
 dvTa7r68o(Tl,S, ems, T), (dircm-oSi Scop-i,) 
 a giving back in turn Pol. 6. 5. 3. Thuc. 
 4. 81. In N. T. compensation, recompense, 
 reward, Col. 3, 24. Sept. for ?*P Ps. 94, 
 
 2. Is. 59, 18. So Diod. Sic. lib. 34. p. 197 
 Tauchn. Plut. de San. tuend. Prase. 23. 
 
 aVTOTrOKpivopai, (dvri, divoKpivo^ai,} 
 to answer again, to reply against, c. dat. 
 Rom. 9, 20 ; dat. and -rrpbs ravra Luke 14, 
 6. So Sept. for njS Judg. 5, 29. Job 16, 8. 
 
 avretTrov aor. 2, (dvri, flnov,} to speak 
 against, to gainsay, c. dat. Luke 21, 15; 
 absol. Acts 4, 14. Sept. for l^ Gen. 24, 
 50 ; a^lfln Job 20, 2.JEI. V. H. 3. 26. 
 Xen. Hell. 1.. 4. 20. For the present 
 tense, diTtXeya> is used, Buttm. J 114 d- 
 nflv. Kiihn. 167. 7. n. 
 
 avre^O), f. di/Se^co, (dvri, ex&>,) -to hold 
 against, over against, e. g. the hand against 
 the head Soph. CEd. Col. 1651 ; intrans. to 
 hold out against, to withstand, Hdian. 6. 3. 
 13. Mid. to hold before oneself over against 
 any thing, Horn. Od. 22. 74. In N. T. only 
 Mid, Avrtxofiai, f. dv%eofwi, pr. to hold 
 any thing over against oneself, i. q. to hold 
 fast to, to cleave to, c. gen. Matt. 6, 24. 
 
 62 dvri 
 
 Luke 16, 13. Tit. 1, 9. Trop. to care for, 
 not to neglect, e. g. TWV do-Sev&v 1 Thess. 
 
 5, 14. Sept. for pin Is. 56, 2. 4. 6 ; tf^J 
 Zeph. 1,6. So Pol. 5. 1. 8. Xen. Cyr. 2* 
 2. 27. 
 
 avTi, prep. c. genit. over against, pr. of 
 place, Xen. An. 4. 7. 6 ; in war, Horn. II. 
 8: 233. ib. 15. 415. Trop. as implying 
 corresponding worth or value, something 
 equivalent to, Horn. Od. 8. 546. II. 9. 116. 
 Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Of exchange or requital, for, in return 
 for, e. g. a) Of price, for, Heb. 12, 16 
 ami Ppaxreas p-ias. Sept. for S]bn Num. 
 18, 21. 31. (Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 12. Plato Rep. 
 371. d.) Also of persons for or in behalf 
 of whom a price is paid, by which they are 
 released from a penalty, Matt. 17, 27. 20, 
 28. Mark 10, 45. So Soph. Elect. 537. 
 OZd. Col. 1326. b) Of retribution, against, 
 for ; Matt. 5, 38 bis, o<pSiaX/i6s dvr\ o<p3aX- 
 PLOV KT\. Rom. 12, 17 KaKov dvri KUKOV. 
 
 1 Thess. 5, 15. 1 Pet. 3, 9 bis. Sept. for 
 ^53 Jer. 11, 17. So Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 12. 
 c) Of the motive, moving cause, for, on 
 account of, because of; Heb. 12, 2 dvrl TTJS 
 TrpoKfifj.ei>rjs avro) x a P as - Eph. 5, 31 dvrl 
 TOVTOV because of this, for this cause. Luke 
 12, 3 dv3 i/ because of which things, 
 wherefore. So Wisd. 18, 3. JEsch. Prom. 
 
 31. Xen. Cyr. 8. 4. 1. An. 1. 3. 4. But 
 
 usually di/3 wi> is for dvr\ rovrcw on, lit. 
 because of these things that, i. q. because 
 that, or ernpl. because; Luke 1, 20 di/3* 
 Ifiv OVK eni(rTfv<ras. 19, 44. Acts 12, 23. 
 
 2 Thess. 2, 10. Sept. for "HB^ 2^5 Gen. 
 22, 18; ^S b? Jer. 22,9. So Jos. Ant. 
 7. 6. 2. Luc. D. Mort. 22. 1. Comp. Xen. 
 Cyr. 6. 1. 48. 
 
 2. Of substitution, in place of, instead of. 
 a) Genr. Luke 11, 11 dvrl IX^VQS o<f>iv. 
 1 Cor. 11, 15. James 4, 15. So 1 Mace. 
 2, 11. Luc. D. Mort. 16. 2. Xen. Cyr. 4. 
 
 6. 5. Mem. 1. 2. 64. b) Implying succes 
 sion ; Matt. 2, 22 Ap^eXaos /Sao-iXewi dvrl 
 HpcbSou. (Xen. An. 1. 1. 4.) So John 1, 
 16 x^P lv "^ x^P lTOS grace instead oj 
 grace, i. e. grace for grace, grace upon 
 grace, intensive. Comp. Theogn. Sent. 
 344 CLVT dviwv dvlas. Chrysost. de Sacerd. 
 6. 13 fTfpav di/3 erepas (ppovrida. 
 
 NOTE. In composition dvrL denotes : a) 
 over against; as dvTirdcrcra). b) against, 
 contrary to ; as dvriXeya, dvri8iKos. c) 
 Requital, in return, again ; as dvranoSi.- 
 8a>fjii, avriKoXea). d) Substitution ; as dv- 
 SvTraroy. e) Equivalency, correspondence ; 
 as 
 
63 
 
 tXvrpov 
 
 f. /3aX, Q3dXAa>,) to cast 
 back and forth, e. g. weapons Thuc. 7. 25. 
 In N. T. trop. of words, to bandy, to ex 
 change, C. ace. Luke 24, 17 ovs dvrifiaXXfTe 
 rrpbs d\\r)\ovs, i. q. to discourse. Comp. 
 2 Mace. 11, 13 Trpos favrbv avriftaXXcnv TO 
 ycyovos. 
 
 Siart Sij/M,) to set or 
 
 dispose over against ; Mid. to set oneself 
 over against, to oppose oneself, absol. once 
 Part. 2 Tim. 2, 25. 
 
 dvTlBlKOSj ov, 6, T], (SiKq,) an adversary 
 in a suit, the adverse party ; e. g. the plain 
 tiff, complainant, Matt. 5, 25 bis. Luke 12, 
 58. So Dem. 226. 4. Xen. Apol. Soc. 10. 
 25. Also genr. an adversary, enemy, Luke 
 18, 3. 1 Pet. 5, 8 6 dvri8iKos vp.>v 8id/3oXor, 
 i. e. Satan is perh. so called as the accuser 
 and calumniator of men before God ; comp. 
 Rev. 12, 10. Zech. 3, 1. Job 1, 6 sq. So 
 Sept. Jer. 50, 34; for a-no 1 Sam. 2, 10 ; 
 n-n anx is. 41, n. 
 
 dvT&ea tSi eats, T), (dj/rm SqjLu,) antithe 
 sis, opposition ; once 1 Tim. 6, 20 diriSe- 
 (rtis TTJS ^fvb. yvaHr(a>s, i. e. antitheses, 
 contrary positions or doctrines. Luc. D. 
 Mort. 10. 10. Plato Soph. 258. b. 
 
 avTLKcfeicrrriiJU,, aor. 2 avriKaTfarvv, 
 (m3ton7/u,) trans, to set down over against, 
 to oppose, G. g. an army Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 
 43 ; to put in place of another Sept. Josh. 
 5, 7. Pol. 22. 15. 11. In N. T. only aor. 
 2 intrans. to stand firm against, to resist, 
 absol. Heb. 12, 4. So Plut. T. Gracch. 10. 
 Thuc. 1. 74. 
 
 OJTt/CaX,e&>, >, f. eoia, (*aXeco,) to in- 
 vite in return, again, e. g. to a feast, c. ace. 
 Luke 14, 12. Xen. Conv. 1. 15. 
 
 avTiiceifJiai,, f. Kflo-opai, (/ceZ/xai,) to lie 
 over against, opposite to, as a country, c. 
 dat. Hdian. 6. 4. 8. In N. T. trop. to be op 
 posed, contrary to, c. dat. Gal. 5, 17. 1 Tim. 
 1,10. Part. 6 dvriKfifjLfvos, one opposing him 
 self, the opposer, adversary, c. dat. Luke 13, 
 17. 21, 15; absol. 1 Cor. 16, 9. Phil. 1, 
 28. 2 Thess. 2, 4. 1 Tim. 5, 14. Sept. for 
 i Ex. 23, 22 ; a^ S Is. 66, 6. So Sext. 
 Emp. Hyp. 2. 14. Plato Soph. 258. b, jrpos 
 
 aimKpv, adv. (dt/rt ,) over against, c. 
 gen. Acts 20, 15. Jos. Ant. 7. 10. 2. Pol. 
 4. 43. 4. Xen. Hell. 6. 2. 22. 
 
 to take in turn, again,Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 12. In 
 N. T. only Mid. dvTi\ap.j:ldi>onai,tolake 
 or lay hold of any thing over against oneself. 
 
 1. Of persons, as supporting them, i. q 
 to help, to aid, c. gen. Luke 1, 54. Acts 20, 
 35. Sept. for Hiph. of pm Lev. 25, 35 , 
 It? 2 Chr. 28, 23. So Diod. Sic. 11. 13. 
 Thuc. 2.61. 
 
 2. Of things, to lay hold of, i. e. to take 
 part or share in, to engage in, c. gen. 1 Tim. 
 6, 2 on TricrToi fla-i Kal dyanrjToi, ol TTJ$ 
 evfpyfcrias dvrt\ap.^avonevoi, because tliey 
 (the masters) are faithful and beloved, par 
 takers in well-doing, i. e. engaged in doing 
 good, fulfilling Christian duties. So Jos. 
 Ant. 5. 4. 3 rf}? e\tv%tpias. Plut. de Liber, 
 educ. 10 TTJS <pi\o<ro(pias. Plato Rep. 534. 
 d, TT)S 7rai8eias. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 6. See Kyp- 
 ke in loc. Others here translate : the parta 
 kers of the benefit rendered by the servants, 
 i. e. enjoying this benefit ; comp. Porphyr. 
 de Abst. 1. 46 p.t)Te ecr^ifov 7r\fi6va>v fjftovaiv 
 dvTi\rj\lsfTai. See Eisner Obs. in loc. 
 Others still take cvepyto-ia i. q. x<*P ls T v 
 3eoC, but against the usus loquendi. 
 
 MTiA, i y&>j f. fa, (Xeyco,) to speak 
 against, to gainsay, to contradict, c. dat. 
 Acts 13, 45; absol. Acts 13, 45. 28, 19. 
 22. Tit. 1,9; c. inf. praggn. Luke 20, 27. 
 (Ecclus. 4, 25. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 39 ; c. inf. 
 Thuc. 3. 41.) Also to contradict, to resist, to 
 disobey, in word and deed, c. dat. John 19, 
 12;aj^ol. Luke 2, 34. Rom. 10,21. Tit. 2,9. 
 Sept. for ^-\n Hos. 4, 4 ; T^O Is. 65, 2. So 
 Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 2. Luc. D. Deor. 8 fin. 
 
 a taking in turn, again, Thuc. 1. 120; a 
 laying hold of, seizure, by disease Thuc. 2. 
 49. In N. T. help, aid, relief, afforded to 
 the sick and poor, Plur. 1 Cor. 12, 28. This 
 duty devolved on the 8taKovoi, both male and 
 female; comp. Acts 6, 1 sq. Rom. 16, 1. 
 Sept. for niT5 Ps. 22, 19; TWO p s . 108, 
 9. So Ecclus. 11, 12. 51, 7. Jos. B. J. 4 
 3. 10 init. 
 
 avri\oyia, as, 17, (din-iXeycu,) contra 
 diction, controversy, Heb. 6, 16. 7, 7. (Pol. 
 28. 7. 4. Plato Rep. 539. b.) Also contra 
 diction, opposition, disobedience, in word and 
 deed, Heb. 12, 3. Jude 11. Sept. for 
 r-Q^ Num. 20, 13. So Xen. Hell. 6. 
 3. 20. 
 
 dvTl\Ol8ope<j), u, f. ^o-o), (XotSope o),) 
 to revile in turn, again, absol. 1 Pet. 2, 23 
 Luc. Conv. 40. Plut. M. Anton. 42. 
 
 dirri\vrpov, ov, TO, (Xvrpoj/,) pr. an 
 equivalent for redemption, i. e. a ransom, 
 1 Tim. 2, 6 ; comp. Matt. 20, 28. Anon. 
 Vers. V. T. Ps. 49, 9 ; where Sept. f) 
 
 TTJS 
 
S>, f. rjo-u, (p.frpea, ) to 
 measure out in turn, again, Pass. c. dat. 
 Luke 6, 38. [Matt. 7, 2] ; a proverbial phrase, 
 i. q. to render like for like. Luc. Amo- 
 rcs 19. 
 
 ia, ay, fj, (/<r3of,) retribu 
 tion, recompense ; spoken of penalty, Rom. 
 1, 27 ; of reward, 2 Cor. 6, 13 TTJV 8e UVTTJV 
 avTifj-io^iav Tr\aTviftr]Tf KOL v/jLels now by 
 way of a like (corresponding) recompense, 
 be ye also enlarged, i. e. let your hearts be 
 opened towards me, as mine towards you ; 
 com p. v. 1 1 . Found only in N. T. 
 
 , as, TJ, Antioch, the name 
 of two cities in N. T. 
 
 1 . Antioch of Syria was situated on the 
 southern bank of the river Orontes, about 
 15 miles above its mouth, and was the royal 
 residence and metropolis of all Syria ; Jos. 
 B. J. 3. 2. 4. It was founded by Seleucus 
 Nicanor, and called by him after the name 
 of his father Antiochus. This city is cele 
 brated by Cicero in his oration pro Archia, 
 as being opulent and abounding in men of 
 taste and letters. It was also a place of 
 great resort for the Jews, Jos. B. J. 7. 3. 3. 
 A large Christian church was early gather 
 ed in Antioch, Acts 11, 19 sq. and the dis 
 tinctive name of Christians was here first 
 applied to the followers of Jesus. * The 
 modern city is greatly contracted ; its former 
 extent being marked by ruins. It still 
 bears the name Antakia. See Miss. Herald, 
 1841, p. 237. Biblioth. Sacra, 1848, p. 455. 
 Acts 11, 19. 20. 22. 25. 26. 27. 13, 1. 
 14, 26. 15, 22. 23. 30. 35. 18, 22. Gal. 
 2,11. 
 
 2. Antioch of Pisidia, was prob. so called, 
 as being then attached to that province ; 
 though Strabo places it. in Phrygia, and 
 Ptolemy in Pamphylia. It was founded by 
 Seleucus Nicanor, and so named after his 
 father ; afterwards it enjoyed, the title and 
 rights of a Roman colony ; Strabo 12. 577. 
 Ptol. 5. 5. Plin. H. N. 5. 24. Its site has 
 recently been identified near the modern 
 town of Yalobatch ; see Arundell s Discov. 
 in Asia Minor, I. p. 268 sq. Hamilton s 
 Res. in As. Minor, I. p. 472 sq. Acts 13, 
 14. 14, 19. 21. 2 Tim. 3, 11. 
 
 fo>s, 6, a man of Antioch, 
 an Antiochian, Acts 6, 5. 
 
 aor. 2 fj\%ov, Mid. 
 depon. (Trapep^o/iai,) to pass along oxer 
 against, to pass along by turning out of the 
 way; absol. Luke 10, 31. 32. Wisd. 16, 
 10. Strato 7, in Anth. Gr. III. p. 70. 
 
 aVTLTVTTOS 
 
 a, 6, Antipas, pr. n. of a 
 martyr, Rev. 2, 13. Contracted for Avri- 
 Trarpos, Jos. Ant. 14. 1. 2. 
 
 Avrnrarpk, /Soy, f/, Antipatris, pr. n. 
 of a city of Palestine, situated on the western 
 plain on the military road from Jerusalem 
 to Cesarea, Acts 23, 31. It was built by 
 Herod the Great on the site of a former 
 place called Ka<apo-a/3a, and was so named 
 by him in honour of his father Antipater ; 
 Jos. Ant. 16. 5. 2. At the present day a 
 village called Kefr Sdba is found in the 
 same region, the ancient name having sur 
 vived that of Herod s city ; though it may 
 be doubtful whether the modern village oc 
 cupies the precise site of Antipatris ; see 
 Bibl. Res. in Palest. III. p. 45 sq. Biblioth. 
 Sac. 1843, p. 493 sq. Traces of the an 
 cient Roman road still exist between Gophna 
 and Kefr Siiba ; ib. p. 480-482. 
 
 avriTrepav, adv. (irepav), over against, 
 opposite to, c. gen. Luke 8, 26. Some Mss. 
 have dvrtTTfpa id. Jos. Ant. 2. 16. 3. Pol. 
 9. 41. 11. Xen. Hell. 6. 2. 9. 
 
 aVTlTrlTTTO), f. Treo-oC/icti, (TTiTma,) to 
 fall against or upon, in a hostile sense. 
 Hdian. 6. 3. 13. In N. T. trop. to strive 
 against, to resist, c. dat. Acts 7, 51. So 
 Sept. Num. 27, 14. Pol. 25. 9. 5. 
 
 dvna-rparevo^aL, Mid. depon. (a-rpa- 
 Tfvco, ) to make war against, c. dat. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 8. 26. In N. T. trop. to war 
 against, to oppose, c. dat. Rom. 7, 23. So 
 Hesych. diTi(TTpaTfv6p.fvov dv^icrra^ievov. 
 
 avrirdaa-w v. -rr&), f. ga>, (rao-o-co,) to 
 range in battle against, to array against^ c. 
 dat. Xen. An. 4. 8. 5 ; Pass. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 
 42. In N. T. Mid. dvTtTao-o-o/iai, trop. 
 to array oneself against, to resist, to oppose, 
 absol. Acts 18, 6 ; c. dat. Rom. 13, 2. James 
 5, 6. 4, 6 and 1 Pet. 5, 5 quoted from Prov. 
 3, 34, where Sept. for V*bi. So Sept. 
 Hos. 1, 6. Dem. 507. pen. 
 
 avriTVTTOS, ov, 6, i}, adj. (avri of cor- 
 resp. TWOS,) antilypical, like, corresponding 
 to a type or model ; Neut, as Subst. TO 
 avTiTvirov, an antitype, likeness, that 
 which corresponds to a type or model, Heb. 
 9, 24 comp. 8, 5. 1 Pet. 3, 21. Hesych. 
 dvTiTVTros icros, o/iotof. So the bread and 
 wine in the eucharist are called uvrlrvrra 
 of the body and blood of Christ, Macar. Ho- 
 mil. 27. Greg. Naz. Orat. 11. p. 187. In 
 Gr. writers avrirvrros (ami of opp. TUTTTOO) 
 signifies : struck back, repelled, as by a hard 
 body, echoed, Soph. Phil. 695, 1460 ; also 
 Act. striking back, repelling, as a hard body 
 
65 
 
 resisting, solid, Xen. Mag. Eq. 1. 4. Plato 
 Tim. 62. c. Comp. Eisner in 1 Pet. 1. c. 
 
 ov, 6, (XptoTo r,) an anti 
 christ, i. e. one who denies that Jesus is the 
 Messiah and that the Messiah is come in 
 the flesh; found only in John s epistles, 
 I John 2, 18 bis. 22. 4,3. 2 John?. What 
 class of persons the writer had in view is 
 unknown ; probably Jewish adversaries. 
 Often in the fathers ; see Suicer Thes. s. 
 voc. 
 
 az/rXeco, J>, f. jjo-to, (ajrXor,) pr. to bale 
 out water from the hold of a ship, Theogn. 
 673. In N. T. to draw out, e. g. water 
 from a well, wine from a jar, c. ace. John 
 2, 9. 4, 7; absol. 2, 8. 4, 15. Sept. for 
 2XC Gen. 24, 13. 20; n!rf Ex. 2, 16. 19. 
 So Xen. CEc. 7. 40. Platc/Tim. 79. a. 
 
 aros, TO, (airXe w.) what is 
 drawn out, Dioscor. 4. 64. In N. T. a 
 vessel for drawing water, a bucket, John 4, 
 11. So Pint, de Solert. Anim. 21. 
 
 ), , f. ,jo-&>, ( 
 fws, o<3oX/idf,) to look 171 the face, Barnab. 
 Ep. C. 5 els aKrlvas rov 17X1011 cWoc^SaX/iij- 
 <rat. In N. T. trop. of a ship, to look the 
 wind in the face, to bear up against, to with 
 stand, c. dat. TO di>fp.q> Acts 27, 15. So 
 genr. Wisd. 12, 14. Pol. 2. 47. 1. 
 
 avvftpos, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. vficop,) wa 
 terless, dry, e. g. awSpot TO TTOI dry places, i. e. 
 barren, desert, the abode of evil spirits ac 
 cording to the Jews, Matt. 12, 43. Luke 
 11, 24; comp, Rev. 18. 2. Tob. 8, 3. Ba- 
 ruch 4, 35. Sept. for *** Hos. 2, 3 ; -13-ia 
 Is. 41, 19. So 2 Mace. 1, 19. Pol. 5. 80. 
 2. Trop. Tr^-yai awdpot wells without wa 
 ter 2 Pet. 2, 17, also i/e^e Xat airuSpoi clouds 
 without water Jude 12, i. e. wells or clouds 
 that promise water, but yield none ; put as 
 an emblem of those who promise much and 
 perform little, boastful deceivers ; comp. 
 2 Pet. 2, 18. 19. 
 
 avvTTOtcplTO?, ov,6,q,adj. (a priv. \moKpi- 
 wtywu,) without hypocrisy, unfeigned, sincere, 
 Rom. 12, 9. 2 Cor. 6,6. 1 Tim. 1,5. 2 Tim. 
 1, 5. James 3, 17. 1 Pet. 1, 22. Wisd. 5, 
 18. 18, 16. 
 
 ov, 6, i], adj. (a priv. 
 unsubjected, unsubdued, i. e. 
 a) Of things, not made subject to any one, 
 c. dat. Ileb. 2, 8. b) Of persons, insub 
 ordinate, unruly, disobedient, 1 Tim. 1,9. 
 Tit. 1, 6. 10. So Symm. for ^?5^a 1ZJ\X 
 1 Sam. 2, 12. Arr. Epict. 2. 10. 1. Philo 
 Rer. div. Her. T. I. p. 473. 
 5 
 
 j adv. (ui/a.) up, upwards, above, i. e. 
 
 1. Of motion, up, upwards, John 11, 41. 
 Heb. 12, 15. Sept. for ^Sab I s . 8, 21. 
 1 Chr. 22, 5. Plut. de Def/Orac. 26. 
 Xen. CEc. 19. 10. 
 
 2. Of place where, up, above, lv rw ov- 
 pawa tivca Acts 2, 19. [Rev. 5, 3.] John 2, 
 7 eooy acco up to the highest part, to the 
 brim, brimful. Sept. for ?5?E Deut. 4, 39 ; 
 rb?.^. ~V. , Sept. ?cos 5va>, 2 Chr. 26, 8. 
 So Pol. 3. 6. 10. Xen. An. 5. 4. 25. 
 Hence 6. 17, ro ai/co as Adj. rehat is above, 
 the upper, Buttni. 5 125. 6 ; (genr. Diod. 
 Sic. 4. 55. Xen. Eq. 1. 2 TJJV oiKias ra 
 avco. An. 7. 4. 11 ;) in N. T. referred only 
 to heaven, i. q. (jrovpavios, heavenly, celes 
 tial ; so ra ava> things above, i. e. either 
 heaven itself John 8, 23 comp. 3, 13; or 
 also heavenly things, divine things, Col. 3, 
 1. 2 ; 17 avd) lfpovcra\ri/j. Gal. 4, 26 ; 17 avta 
 K\fj(Tis Phil. 3, 14, i. q. 17 K\. frrovpdvios 
 Heb. 3, 1. 
 
 avcbyaiov v. dvwyeov, O v, TO, see in 
 
 avdyaiov. 
 
 avo&ev, adv. (ai/o>,) from above, i. e. 
 
 1. Of place, e. g. OTTO uvaftev ecas Karoo from 
 above to below, from the top to the bottom, 
 Matt. 27, 51. Mark 15, 8 ; e/c ra>v avufttv 81 
 oXou from the parts above throughout, from 
 the top throughout, John 19, 23. Sept. 
 for i>? Ex. 25, 22. So Hdian. 8. 4. 20. 
 Plato Phaed. 110. b. Elsewhere from 
 above, i. q. from lieaven, and so from God; 
 John 3, 31 6 ova&ev (pxop-evos. 19, 11. 
 James 1, 17. 3, 15 17 o~o<pia avn Sfv Kartp- 
 %op.fVT), for which v. 17 17 avtaftev o-o<pia, 
 Buttm. { 125. 6. Here too belongs John 3. 
 3. 7 yfvvrftr]vai cbwScv to be born from above, 
 i. e. from God, eV rov 3eov (i. q. IK TOV 
 Trvfi/p-aros -v. 6. 8), in accordance with 
 John s usage; comp. 1, 13. 1 John 2, 29. 
 3, 9. 4, 7. 5, 1. 4. 18. Sept. for i>523S3 Job 
 3, 4. So Philo de Profug. I. p. 571. 2, 
 fvptiv <ro<$>iav ava&fv . . . dir ovpavov. Xen 
 Mem. 4. 3. 14. 
 
 2. Of time : a) from the first, from the 
 beginning, Luke 1, 3. Acts 26, 5 irpoyivd>- 
 o-Kovres p.f avv Sfv, from the first, from my 
 earliest years. So Hdian. 8. 6. 12. Dem. 
 1 125. 24. b) i. q. anew, afresh ; Gal. 4, 9 
 ois TraXii/ tivufcfv 8ov\fvd.v StXerf. where 
 avu Zev strengthens irdXiv. So Wisd. 19, 6. 
 
 av(i)repLKo<f, fj, 6t>, (ai/w, dvurfpos,) up 
 per, higher; Acts 19, 1 dvatTfpiKa ^fprj the 
 higher parts, the inland mountainous parts 
 of Asia Minor; comp. Acts 18, 23. Hip- 
 pocr.-50. 44. 
 
dvciirepos 66 
 
 aV(i)Tpo$, a, ov, (ai/w,) com par. higher, 
 superior, Hippocr. 520. 45. Dio Chrys. 74. 
 In N. T. Neut. avarepov as adv. corn- 
 par. of afo>, Buttm. 5 115. 5; i. e. a) 
 higher, in p lace, dignity, Luke 14, 10. 
 Sept. for ^>?Ba Lev. 11, 21. b) above, 
 before, in a book or passage, Heb. 10, 8. 
 So Pol. 3. 1. 1. 
 
 ?,6,i7,adj. (apriv. ax^eXe w.) 
 useless, unprofitable, Tit. 3, 9. Heb. 7, 18 
 TO ... dvc>)(j)f\es, unprofitableness. Sept. 
 Prov. 28, 3. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 2. Xen. (Ec. 
 1. 20. 
 
 olv*h I*, V> ( a euphon. eo>,) an axe, 
 Matt. 3, 10. Luke 3, 9. Sept. for l^a 
 Deut. 19, 5. Ml V. H. 12. 5. Xen. An. 
 1. 5. 12.. 
 
 at09, la, lov, (ayco, ao>, to weigh,) pr. 
 of /? A:e weight or ret/we ; hence o/ Zi/ce worth, 
 worthy. 
 
 1 . Spoken of value, price, of like worth, 
 worthy to lie compared with any thing, usu 
 ally c. genit. but in N. T. with rrpos TI, e. g. 
 Rom. 8, 18 OVK ia TO 7ra3^/xaTa TOV fCv 
 Kaipov rrpos TTJV /ieXXoucrai b~6av, i. q. aia 
 . . . TT;? /^. 86gi]s. So c. gen. Sept. for i"fittj 
 Prov. 3, 15. Horn. II. 8. 234. Plato Eryx. 
 393. b. Comp. dvdgios irpos TI, Plato Prot. 
 356. a, TIS a\Xrj dva^ia T]8ovr] Trpos \VTTTJV 
 
 (ffTLV. 
 
 2. Genr. worthy, deserving, either of good 
 or evil, a) Of good ; spoken of persons, 
 absol. Matt. 10, 11. 13 bis. 22, 8. Luke 7, 4. 
 Rev. 3, 4. With genit. of thing, worthy of, 
 Matt. 10, 10 TTJS Tpo(prjs. Luke 10, 7 and 
 1 Tim. 5, 18 ToC ^icrSoO. Acts 13, 46. 
 1 Tim. 6, i. Heb. 11,8; gen. of pers. 
 OVK agio s fj.ov not worthy of me, not worthy to 
 be my disciple, friend, Matt. 10, 37 bis. 38. 
 (Wisd. 3, 5.) With an infin. aor. Luke 
 15, 19. 21 OVK aios K^^rjvai vlos. Acts 
 13, 25. Rev. 4, 11. 5, 2. 4. 9. 12. Once 
 with Iva, John 1, 27. Of things, c. gen. 
 1 Tim. 1, 15. 4, 9. So c. gen. Wisd. 6, 16. 
 Hdian 2. 3. 16. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 62 ; c. inf. 
 Wisd. 1, 16. Xen. CEc. 21. 12 ; c. Iva 
 comp. Dem. 279. 8 d^iovv Iva ftorfifja-T], 
 b) Of evil, penalty, spoken of persons,. 
 absol. Rev. 16, 6 ; c. gen. Rom. 1, 32 3awi- 
 rov. Of things, deeds, c. gen. a. TrXrjyuv 
 Luke 12, 48; Zavdrov Luke 23, 15. Acts 
 
 23, 29. 25, 11. 25. 26, 31. So Dem. 345. 
 
 24. Xen. Mem. 1.1.1. ib. 1. 2. 62 Zavdrov. 
 
 3. Of things, worthy of, suitable to, fit, 
 meet, due, c. gen. as Kaprrovs dt-iovs rrje 
 ptTavoias Matt. 3, 8. Luke 3, 8. Acts 26, 
 20; tigia yap u>v ewpd^a^fv Luke 23,41. 
 So 1 Mace. 10, 54. Plut. adv. Colot. 17 fin. 
 
 Xen. O3c. 12. 19. Hence agiov tori, it 
 is meet, jit, proper, 2 Thess. 1, 3; c. inf. 
 1 Cor. 16. 4. So Dem. 82. 9. Xen. CEc. 
 4. 43. 
 
 aglow, o>, f. coo-w, (aios,) 1. to deem or 
 count worthy of any thing ; c. ace. et gen. 2 
 Thess. 1, 11. Pass. c. gen. 1 Tim. 5, 17. 
 Heb. 3, 3. 10, 29. With ace. and infin. 
 Luke 7, 7. So JEl. V. H. 3. 24. Xen. An. 
 
 3. 2. 7 ; c. inf. Sept. Gen. 31 , 28. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 4. 10. 
 
 2. to deem proper, to think good, c. inf. 
 Acts 15, 38. 28, 22 d^iovfiev de irapa trov 
 aKovaai, we think it right to hear from thee, 
 etc. So Jos. 3. 8. 10. Xen. Cyr. 7. 2. 11. 
 Others in Acts 11. cc. to desire, to wish ; 
 as Sept. for tti^a Dan. 1, 8. Xen. An. 1. 
 7. 8. 
 
 aW9, adv. (oioy,) ivorlhily, suitably, 
 becomingly, in a manner worthy of any one, 
 C. gen. Rom. 16, 2 dgicas ru>v ayiw. Eph. 
 
 4, 1. Phil. 1, 27. Col. 1, 10. 1 Thess. 2, 12. 
 3 John 6. Wisd. 7, 15. Plut. de Exil. 4. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 5. 9. 
 
 aoparos, O v, 6, rj, adj. (a priv. 6pdu,) 
 unseen, invisible, e. g. God Col. 1, 15. 1 
 Tim. 1, 17. Heb. 11, 27; T d6para Col. 1, 
 16 ; TO dop. TOV SfoC i. e. his spiritual attri 
 butes Rom. 1, 20. 2 Mace. 9, 5. Plut. Ro- 
 mul. 29 ; of God Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 13. 
 
 f. yeXw, (ayyeXXw.) aor. 
 a, Pass. aor. 2 aji^yyeX?;!/ Luke 
 8, 20. See Buttm. j 101. n. 4 ; to bear or 
 bring away word, a message, tidings, pr. 
 from one person or place to another. 
 
 1. Of tidings, intelligence, i. q. to an 
 nounce, to tell, to show, to relate ; c. ace. et 
 dat. Matt. 28, 1 1 Tivts . . . e XSdn-f s tls TTJV 
 TroXij aTTTjyyeiXai/ rols dp^ifpevcriv airavra 
 TO. yevopeva. Acts 23, 17; ace. simpl. Matt. 
 8, 33. Acts 4, 23. 15, 27 ; dat. simpl. Matt. 
 28, 8. 10. Acts 5, 25 ; Pass. c. dat. Luke 8, 20. 
 With dat. of pers. and jrepl TWOS of things, 
 Luke 7, 18. (Xen. An. 1. 7. 2.) With irepi TI- 
 vos of pers. and ace. of thing, 1 Thess. 1, 9. 
 With dat. of pers. and OTI, Luke 18, 37. John 
 20, 18 ; els c. ace. of place, Mark 5, 14. 
 Luke 8, 34. (Xen. An. 6. 4. 25.) With ace. 
 of thing and irpos Tiva, Acts 16, 36 ; with an 
 infin. simpl. Acts 12, 14; absol. John 4,51. 
 So genr. Sept. for T^fJ Judg. 13, 10. 1 
 Sam. 25, 37. Hdian. 3. 10. 16. Xen. An. 2. 
 3.4; c. inf. Plut. Mor. II. p. 17. 
 
 2. Of messengers or others who return 
 with an answer, to bring back word, to re 
 port ; but the idea back lies in the circum 
 stances and not in the prep, diro in compo- 
 
67 
 
 ration. So c. ace. et dat. Matt. 11,4. Luke 
 7, 22. 14, 21 ; c. dat. Matt. 2, 8. Acts 22, 
 26 ; absol. Acts 5, 22. Sept. for T^H Ruth 
 3, 16. Hdian. 5. 4. 1. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 8. 
 3. Genr. of any thing not before known, 
 
 1. q. to announce, to tell, to declare, to make 
 known; c. ace. et dat. Matt. 12, 18 Kpia-tv 
 ToTs eZveaiv aVayyeXei. 1 John 1,2. 3. Heb. 
 
 2, 12 aTrayyeXui TO oro/id o-ou ToTs d8f\(pois 
 P.OV, quoted from Ps. 22, 23 where Heb. 
 ~iSD Sept. Sirjyrjo-ofMt. With dat. of pers. 
 and inf. Acts 26, 20 ; 6Yi 1 Cor. 14, 25. 
 Sept. for ^an Gen. 24, 49 ; 1BO Ps. 78, 4. 
 6. Pol. 1. 14. 1. Plato Protag. .87. p. 345. 
 c. + 
 
 aTrdy^a), f. o>, (ayx<>) to quite choke 
 or strangle, i. e. to death, Od. 19. 230. Pol. 
 16. 34. 9. In N. T. Mid. dirdyxofj.ai, to 
 strangle oneself by hanging, to hang oneself, 
 Matt. 27, 5 ; comp. in \da-Kco. Sept. for 
 p:n.3 2 Sam. 17, 23. So ^El. V. H. 5. 8. 
 Xen. Hi. 7. 13. 
 
 aTTaycOj f. <o, (ayo>,) aor. 2 dirriyayov, 
 Pass. aor. 1 dirf)x^ 1 ] v - 
 
 1. to lead off or away, to conduct away ; 
 with ace. of perS. and Trpo s riva, Acts 23, 
 17 ; ace. impl. Luke 13, 15 ; T&>Z> ^eipwj/ 
 rjp.u>v Acts 24, 7. Pass. trop. Trpos TO el ScoXa 
 1 Cor. 12, 2. Sept. for 5^3 Gen. 31, 18 ; 
 TpbiPi 1 K. 1, 38. So ^El. V. H. 1. 6. Plato 
 Phaed. 3. p. 60. a. In a judicial sense, to 
 lead away before a judge, with ace. and ?rpo s 
 nro:, Mark 14, 53 *ai dn^yayov rbv irj&ovv 
 Trpos rbv dp^iepea. John 18, 13 ; ace. impl. 
 Matt. 26, 57. Mark 14, 44. John 19, 16 ; 
 ace. simpl. Matt. 27, 2. Also to lead away 
 to prison or to execution, e. g. avrbv tls TO 
 crravpSxrai Matt. 27, 31 ; (avrbv) els rr^v 
 7rapefi^o\f]v Acts 23, 10 ; avrbv eao) T^S 
 aiiXijs Mark 15, 16 ; ace. simpl. Luke 23, 26. 
 Pass, absol. aTra^S^i/ai, to be led away to 
 death, to be put to death, Acts 12, 19. 
 Sept. ciTnjy/ieros for Heb. "libs a prisoner, 
 Gen. 39, 22. Ep. Jerem. 18 dw. eVi T 3a- 
 ro>a>. Plato Legg. 879. d, Trpos Tiro;. Gorg. 
 486. a, fts TO 8f<r[j.a>TT]piov. 
 
 2. Intrans. comp. in 5ya> no. 2 ; spoken 
 of a way, to lead away to a place, with eis 
 c. ace. trop. Matt. 7, 13. 14. So uyca Jos. 
 Ant. 8. 7. 4. Philo de Viet p. 841. a. 
 
 aTTOi SevTO?, O v, 6, rj, adj. (a priv. TTCU- 
 6Vv&>.) untaught, uneducated, ignorant, Jos. 
 Ant, 2. 13. 3. Xen. Mem. 4. 1.4; unwise, 
 foolish, of persons, Sept. for 523 Prov. 17, 
 22; ^03 Prov. 8, 5. 15, 15. In N. T. of 
 things, foolish, empty, trifling ; 2 Tim. 2, 
 21? aTraiSevTous T)TTJ<TIS. So yEschin. 7. 12 
 
 jj-aprvpla. Plato Phaedr. 269. b, pij/id rt - 
 
 f. a p>, (cupw,) to take or lift off, 
 to take away, uXa Hdot. 1. 186 ; to take or 
 lead away, Hdot. 8. 57. Intrans. to tafcc one- 
 self off , to go away, Sept. for SO 3 Gen. 12, 
 9. Xen. Hell. 6. 5. 32. In N. T. only Pass. 
 aor. 1 aTTTjp^rjv, to be taken away, c. dno 
 Tiros Matt. 9, 15. Mark 2, 20. Luke 5, 35. 
 
 aTraiTeoj, >, f. TJO-W, (aiYea>,) to asfc or 
 demand from any one, to require from or ai 
 one s hands, Germ, abfordern ; c. ace. et 
 OTTO TITOS Luke 6, 30. 12, 20 rfjv ^v^ijv 
 crov aTraiTovcriv OTTO crov, i. e. 3 plur. indef. 
 for Pass, they shall require thy life of thee, 
 
 1. q. thy life shall be required of thee ; Buttm. 
 129. 19. Winer 49. 1. Sept. for b53 
 Deut. 15,2. 3. ^El. V. H. 1. 24. Xen 
 An. 7. 7. 39 ; TI napd TIVOS Diod. Sic. 1 1 . 66. 
 
 aTTaXyetw, , f. rjvco, (d\ye a>,) to grieve 
 out, to leave off grieving for any thing, c. 
 ace. Thuc. 2. 61. In N. T. to be apathetic, 
 to be past feeling, i. e. past any feeling of 
 shame, of conscience, or the like ; absol. 
 Eph. 4, 19. So Heliodor. 5. p. 213 aTraX- 
 yovires Trpbs TTJV TV^TJV. Pol. 9. 40. 4. 
 
 airaX^dacrw v. -TT&), f. d, (dXXdo- 
 <r,) pr. to change from one condition or 
 place to another. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1 . to set free, to deliver from a state of 
 fear, bondage, or the like ; c. ace. Heb. 2, 
 l5 aTroAXd^j; TOVTOVS ocroi <pd/3cp Saparov 
 *rX. Pass. c. OTTO Tiros, Luke 12,58 a7nj\- 
 Xa^3ai air avrov, SC. from thy opponent, 
 creditor, by private adjustment. So c. ace. 
 et gen. Jos. Ant. 11. 6. 12. Diod. Sic. 16. 
 22. Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 12 ; of a litigant Plato 
 Legg. 915. c. 
 
 2. Mid. to remove oneself from any one, 
 to depart, c. d^d Tiros Acts 19, 12. Act. 
 to put away or remove from? Xen. An. 3. 
 
 2. 28; intrans. to depart, Sept. Ex. 19, 
 22. Plato Legg. 938. a. Mid. id. c. dn6 
 Tiros Xen. An. 7. 1.4. 
 
 aTTaXXorpiOCi), <, f. oxrco. (dXXoTpideo,) 
 pr. to abalienate, spoken of persons, to alien 
 ate or estrange from ; only Pass, to be alien 
 ated from, to be a stranger to, c. gen. Eph. 
 2, 12. 4, 18; absol. Col. 1, 21. Sept. for 
 "ilT Ps. 68, 4. So c. OTTO Tiros Diod. Sic. 
 11. 48. ^Eschin. 29. 20. 
 
 O.7ra\O9, ij, ov, (kindr. dnr<a, n(prj,) soft 
 to the touch, lender, as a shoot, sprout, Matt. 
 24, 32. Mark 13, 28. So of raiment Hdian. 
 5. 8. 2 ; of fruit Xen. (Ec. 19. 18. 
 
 aTravrdto, , (dwdw,) f. fjcrco Mark 14, 
 13. Diod. Sic. 18. 15; usually f. 170-0/10* 
 
68 
 
 Thuc. 4. 77. Xen. Hell. 1. 6. 3 ; pr. to come 
 over Against from the opposite direction, 
 to come or go to meet, to encounter, to meet ; 
 c. dat. pers. Matt. 28, 9. Mark 5, 2. 14, 13. 
 Luke 17, 12. John 4,51. Acts 16, 16. Sept. 
 for ssa 1 Sam. 10, 5. So Plut. Demetr.36. 
 Xen. An. 2. 3. 17. In a hostile sense, to 
 meet, to encounter, c. dat. Luke 14, 31. Sept. 
 for siQ Judg. 8, 21. So Xen. Hell. 5. 
 4. 10." T 
 
 aTTavrqcris, e& >y, 17, (oVai/raw,) a meet 
 ing, encountering ; only in the construction 
 (Is dirdvTTjo-iv for meeting, after a verb of 
 motion, instead of the inf. diravrav to meet ; 
 so c. dat. Acts 28, 15 ; c. gen. Matt. 25, 1. 
 6. 1 Thess. 4, 17. Sept. for nsnpb, c. 
 gen. 1 Sam. 9, 14; c. dat. Jer. 41, 6. 
 Pol. 5. 26. 5. Diod. 18. 59. 
 
 aTrag, adv. of time, once, one time, 2 
 Cor. 11, 25. Heb. 9, 26. 12, 26 en 
 a7ra. v. 27 ; c. gen. Heb. 9, 7 a7ra TOV 
 eviavTov. Sept. for nHS Ex. 30, 11. 
 (Hdian 1. 10. 8. Plato Conv. 185. e.) So 
 a7ra KCU Sis once and again, several times, 
 Phil. 4, 16. 1 Thess. 2, 18. Sept. for 
 o?niri DSQ Neh. 13, 20. 1 Mace. 3, 30. 
 Emphat. once and no more, once for all, 
 already, Heb. 6, 4. 9, 27. 28. 10, 2. 1 Pet. 
 3, 18 [20.] Jude 3. 5. Sept. for nnx Ps. 
 89, 36. So Jos. Ant. 5. 3. 2. Plato Legg. 
 711. a. 
 
 O u, 6, T), adj. (a priv. 
 /rapa/3cuVc<>,) a word of the later Greek, Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 313 ; Act. not having trans 
 gressed, not a transgressor, Jos. Ant. 18. 8. 
 2. contr. Ap. 2. 41 ; oftener Pass, not to be 
 transgressed, inviolable, Plut. de Fat. 1 Xd- 
 yoy SeToy a7rapd/3aroy. Id. Symp. 9. 14. 6 
 cd/zoy. Hence in N. T. unchangeable, per 
 petual, spoken of Christ s priesthood as ever 
 remaining to him inviolate, never passing 
 from him to another, dStdSo^oy, Heb. 7, 24. 
 So Plut. ascribes to the sun TTJV ra^iv drra- 
 pafiarov, de Defect. Orac. 3. 
 
 a,7rapa(TKevacrTO<>, O v, 6, f], adj. (a priv. 
 7rapao-/ceud,) unprepared, 2 Cor. 9, ^T; 
 comp. v. 3. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 41. Hdian. 3. 
 9. 19. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 15. 
 
 aTrapveop,di, ovp.ai, f. tjcropai, Mid. de- 
 pon. (apWo/icu.) Pass. fut. 1 aTrapir^cro/Liat 
 in Pass, signif. Luke 12, 9. Soph. Phil. 527 ; 
 see Buttm. 113. n. 6. Winer 39. 7. d. 
 To deny utterly, to deny, e. g. things, c. 
 infin. Luke 22, 34 npiv r) rpty dTrapvfjcrr) fj.fi 
 floevai p.t. (Eurip. Hipp. 1280. Plato 
 Gorg. 461. c.) Also persons, to deny, to 
 disown, not to acknowledge ; so of Peter 
 
 denying his Lord, c. ace. Matt. 26, 34. 35. 
 75. Matt. 14, 30. 31. 72. Luke 22, 61. 
 John 13, 38; comp. Luke 22, 34 above. 
 Of those whom Christ does not acknow 
 ledge, Pass. Luke 12, 9. Sept. for oxa 
 Is. 31,7. So Plato Rep. 468. c. Demi 
 575. 25 TO ovofjLa. Also c. eavrov, to deny 
 oneself, to abstain from gratifying one s own 
 appetites and desires, Matt. 16, 24. Mark 8, 
 34. Luke 9, 23. Comp. Phil. 3, 7. 8. 
 
 cnrapri, adv. of time, i. q. an apri, for 
 which it is put in later editions ; from now, 
 i. q. OTTO TOV vvv. 
 
 1. Referring to a future more or less re 
 mote, henceforth, hereafter, Matt. 23, 39. 26, 
 29. 64. John 1, 52 ; comp. Luke 1, 48. 
 
 2. Referring to the future as immediately 
 connected with the present, from now on, 
 even now, John 13, 19. 14, 7. Rev. 14, 13 
 ot fv Kvplij) dno^vTjcrKovTfs aTrdpri, who die 
 in the Lord from now oif, i. e. just now un 
 der the trial of heavy persecutions. The 
 Attics prob. did not use dndpri in respect to 
 time ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 20, 21. 
 
 aTrapTicraof, O v, 6, (diraprifa, a verb 
 of the later Greek, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 447,) 
 a finishing off, completion; Luke 14, 28 d 
 f xei TO. Trpos dpTicr[ji6v, whether he have 
 wherewith to finish. Dion. Hal. de Comp. 
 24. p. 370 ed. Schaef. 
 
 aTrap^r], y S , T), (aTrdpxofjMi,) the beg .n- 
 ning, first-fruits, viz. 
 
 1 . Of things, the first part or portion, the 
 earnest of any thing ; Rom. 8, 23 TTJV dnap- 
 XTJV TOV TTvevparos the first-fruits of the 
 Spirit, the earnest (dppaj3a>v) of future and 
 higher gifts ; comp. 2 Cor. 1, 22. Eph. 1,14. 
 So of the first-fruits offered to God, Sept. 
 for masn Lev. 23, 10. Plur. Sept. Ex. 
 
 23, 19. ^E1. V. H. 1. 31. Xen. CEc. 5. 10. 
 2. Concr. of persons, the first in time or 
 
 of whom any thing may be predicated ; 
 Rom. 11, 16 T) aTrapxri (TOV (pvpa/JLaros) the 
 first-fruits of the mass or lump, trop. for 
 the patriarchs of the Jewish people, parall. 
 f) pia. Rom. 16, 5 os (crriv OTrap^j) TTJS 
 Aa-ias els XpioToi/, i. e. the first to believe 
 on Christ. 1 Cor. 16, 15. James 1, 18. Rev. 
 14, 4. So Christ is rj drrapxr/ TO>V KfK.oip.rj- 
 p.evu>v the first-fruits of them that slept, the 
 first to rise from the dead in the gospel 
 sense, 1 Cor. 15, 20. 23. 
 
 ajras, a <ra, av, (apa, TTCS,) strengthened 
 for Tray, quite all, all together, e. g. a) 
 Sing, before a subst. with the art. Luke 3, 
 21 anavra TOV \aov. 8, 37. 21, 4. Acts 25, 
 
 24. Sept. for }>S Ps. 22, 24. (Hdian. 3. 8. 
 4. Plato Rep. 442. b.) After a subst. with 
 
69 
 
 the art. Mark 16, 15. Luke 4, 6. 19, 48. 
 So Plato Phil. 21. a, b) Plur. before a 
 subst. or participle with the art. Matt 28, 
 1 1 anavra TO. yfvofMfva. (Plato Rep. 338. e. 
 463. d.) With pron. of 2 pers. v/xety Gal. 
 3 28; 1 pers. fatis impl. Acts 16. 28. 
 James 3, 2 ; 3 pers. absol. airavres all, 
 dnavra all things, Matt 24, 39. Mark 11, 
 32. Luke 3, 16. 5, 1126. 28. Acts 2, 44. 
 Eph. 6, 13. al. Both in Sing, and Plur. 
 anas (like mzj) is spoken indefinitely of a 
 large number, without necessarily including 
 every individual of that number ; see Mark 
 8,25. 11,32. Luke 3, 21. 8,37. 19,48. + 
 
 a7nz<T7rab/aai, Mid. depon. (da-Trafo- 
 f*ai.) to finish taking leave of, c. ace. Acts 
 21, 6 in Mss. Himer. 194. 
 
 aTTarttO), , f. TJ<TG>, (arma, afprj, Buttm.) 
 to deceive, to beguile, to lead astray, c. ace. 
 Eph. 5, 6. James I, 26 ; Pass. 1 Tim. 2, 14 
 bis. Sept. for JOlsn Gen. 3, 13. Hdian. 
 2. 7. 2. Xen. Mem. 1. 7. 5. 
 
 j, rjs, rj, (aTraraco.) deceit, deceit- 
 fulness, as an attribute e. g. rov TT\OVTOV 
 Matt. 13, 22. Mark 4, 19 ; -rijs doiKias 2 
 Thess. 2, 10; -njs <fyia/m ar Heb. 3, 13. 
 Also Eph. 4, 22 at eViSu/xi at TTJS cmarrfs 
 deceitful lusts, propensities, Col. 2, 8. 2 Pet. 
 2, 13. Judith 9, 10. Pol. 2. 56. 12. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 2. 6. 
 
 aTrdrwp, opos, 6, f), adj. (a priv. Trar^p.) 
 fatherless, orphan, Eurip. Orest. 304 ; as 
 disowned by the father, Plato Legg. 929. a. 
 In N. T. without father, i. e. whose father 
 is not mentioned in the genealogies, Heb. 
 7, 3 ; see fully in d/i^rcop. 
 
 aTravyacrp^Ctj aros, TO, (aTravydfa to 
 flash forth rays or brightness, Callim. H. 
 in Del. 181,) a flashing forth, radiance, efful 
 gence ; Heb. 1, 3 dnavyaa-fia TTJS 86^rjs (rov 
 3eoD) the effulgence of God s glory, i. e. in 
 whom, as proceeding from the Father, the 
 divine majesty is manifested ; comp. Col. 1 , 
 15. So Wisd. 7, 26 dnavyacrfj.a (pcoros d i- 
 t ou. Philo de Concup. {11. T. II. p. 356 
 Mang. Hesych. anavyaa-yLO. rjXi ou (peyyos. 
 See Bleek Br. an d. Heb. in loc. Others : 
 reflected brightness ; but against both the 
 etymology and the tisus loquendi. 
 
 aTretSoy aor. 2, (el8ov, ci8o>,) used as 
 aor. of d(popaw, Buttm. { 114 ei8a>, 6pda> ; 
 to look away from where one is, at or upon 
 any thing, Trpos ri Thuc. 7. 71 ; to look at, 
 to have respect to, Trpos TI Jos. Ant. 2. 6. 1. 
 Plato Soph. 250. b. In N. T. to see fully, 
 i. e. to the end, to know certainly, c. ace. 
 Phil. 2, 23 o)s av tzTTt So) TU Tvtpl ep.. So 
 
 Sept. Jon. 4, 5 ea>s ov dni8r] rl ecrrai TTJ 
 7roX, fornjn. 
 
 as, 17, (aTreiS?^,) unpersuada- 
 bleness, unbelief, disobedience, unwillingness 
 to receive and obey the truth, Rom. 11, 30. 
 32. Heb. 4, 6. 11 ; ot viol rrjs direfteias the 
 children of unbelief or disobedience, i. e. un 
 believers, Eph. 2, 2. 5, 6. Col. 3, 6 ; see in 
 vlos A. 4, and comp. Heb. Gr. { 104. 2. 
 Lehrg. p. 647. Jos. Ant. 3. 15. 2. Plut. 
 Sertor. 25. Xen. Mem. 3: 5. 5. 
 
 >j <a, f. 7)0-0), (a7T6i3ijy,) to be un 
 persuadable, unbelieving, disobedient, e. g. 
 a) In respect to Christ and the gospel, not 
 to believe, to reject, c. dat John 3, 36 6 8e 
 arrei Swv TO) t>3. Rom. 2, 8. 1 Pet. 2, 8. 
 3, 1. 4, 17 ; absol. Acts 19, 9. Rom. 11, 
 31 ; Part. dtreftovvres unbelieving Acts 14, 
 
 2. 17,5. Rom. 15, 31. In respect to God, 
 TO> 3eo3 Rom. 11, 30; absol. Heb. 3, 18. 
 11, 31*. So Plato Phaedr. 271. b, r, pep 
 (V rv X )) s**"tanB*> j 8f a7T3et. b) Strong 
 er, noZ to obey, to disobey, pr. in consequence 
 of unbelief; Part. direfcaiv, aTmSlqo-ay, dis- 
 obedient, rebellious, 1 Pet. 2, 7. 3, 20. Rom. 
 10, 21 quoted from Is. 65, 2 where Sept. 
 for TJ to. So c. dat. Baruch 1, 18. Diod. 
 Sic. 5.71. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 2. 
 
 a7Tt J*7?) fos, ovs, 6, f], adj. (a priv. 7m - 
 Sopxu.) unpersuadable, unbelieving, disobe 
 dient, c. dat. Acts 26, 19. Rom.-l, 30. 2 
 Tim. 3, 2; absol. Luke 1, 17. Tit. 1, 16. 
 
 3, 3. Sept. for TVIO Deut. 21, 18 ; iTiio 
 Num. 20, 10. So c. dat. Hdian. 2. 4. 10. 
 Plato Legg. 936. b. 
 
 ttTreiXety, >, f. 770-0), to threaten, absol. 
 1 Pet. 2, 23 irafTxwv OUK ^Trei Xei. So Ec- 
 clus. 19, 17. Hdian. 6. 8. 13. Xen. Mem. 
 1.1. 18. Later also Mid. depon. aTretXe- 
 ofjiai, ov/j-ai, f. r)<roficu, to threaten; once 
 c. dat. of pers. and a noun of like signif. as 
 dat. of manner, intens. Acts 4, 17 aTreiX^ 
 fiTmXrjo-w/xeSJa avTols let us strongly threaten 
 them. So Polyaen. 7. 35. 
 
 ttTretX^j 77?, f), (oTretXeo),) a threat, 
 threatening, Acts 4, 17 see in armX/co. 4, 
 29. 9, 1. Eph. 6, 9. Sept. Prov. 19, 12. 
 Hdian. 1. 10. 5. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 18. 
 
 aTret/Ltt, f. fcrofuu, (flp.i to be,) to be 
 aicay, absent, Col. 2, 5. Part. dird>i>, absent, 
 1 Cor. 5,3. 2 Cor. 10, 1. 11. 13, 2. 10. 
 Phil. 1, 27. Wisd. 9, 6. Hdian. 2. 7. 8. 
 Xen. Conv. 8. 18. 
 
 cnreifAi, (dpi to go,) impf. dirytiv Buttm. 
 5 108. V. Kiihn. { 226 ; to go away to a 
 place, once et? rr)v (rvvaya>yf]i> Acts 17, 10. 
 
70 
 
 Jos. Ant. 1. 2. 1. Plut. de cap. ex inim. 
 util. 5; c. els Xen. Conv. 1. 2. 
 
 aTreiTTOV aor. 2, (elnovl) Mid. apr. 1 
 aTrfindfJL^v, Btittm. H4 elirelv. Kiihn. 
 167. 7 ; to spea/c o/f or owi!, in full, bluntly, 
 Horn. II. 7. 416; to /oritd Hdot. 1. 155. 
 In N. T. Mid. to speak or declare oneself off 
 from any thing, to renounce, to disown, c. 
 ace. 2 Cor. 4, 2. Sept. for ONE Job 10, 3. 
 So Bern. 1133. 7. Diod. Sic. 18. 39. Plato 
 Legg. 928. d. . 
 
 a,7rei,paarTO$, O v, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. Tmpa- 
 fa>,) untried, untempted, not temptable, instead 
 of the earlier atrelparos. James 1, 13 6 Seos 
 aTTfipaaTos ecrrt KO.K.O>V, ireipd^fi fie avros 
 ovo eva, God cannot be tempted in respect of 
 evils (i. e. to do evil), and himself tempteth 
 no man : for the gen. see Buttm. 132. 10. d. 
 Kiihn. } 273. 5. g. Winer 30. 4. So Ig- 
 nat. Ep. ad Philipp. ri neipd^fis TOV dnfipa- 
 (3eoV). Constit. Apost. 1. 8 Xeyet 17 
 T)- dvrjp dSoKt/ios- dneipacrTos irapa Sew. 
 
 Others less well : God is untried (inex 
 perienced) in respect of evils, i. q. cnreipoKa- 
 KOS Thuc. 5. 105; comp. Jos. B. J. 5. 9. 3 
 OVK aTTfipacTTov fo-Tiv avTois. Comp. also 
 aTtfipcLTos KO.KWV Diod. Sic. 1. 1 ; drrflparos 
 Ka\S>v Find. Ol. 11. 19. See Wetstein in 
 loc. 
 
 cnreipos, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. Tretpa,) 
 untried, unskilled, ignorant, c. gen. Heb. 5, 
 13 cirrfipos \Syov diKaioo-vvrjs unskilled (ig 
 norant) as to the doctrine of righteousness 
 before God ; for the gen. see in dneipao-Tos. 
 Sept. for fi&? &> 1 Sam. 17, 39. Wisd. 
 1 3, 18. Hdian. 5. 5. 1. Xen. Mem. 4. 7. 1, 3. 
 
 dTretcSexpfAcu, f. e o/u, Mid. depon. 
 (eKSe ^o/iat,) to wait out, to wait long for, to 
 await, to expect, c. ace. Rom. 8, 19. 23. 
 1 Cor. 1, 7. Gal. 5, 5. Phil. 3, 20. Heb. 9, 
 28 ; absol. Rom. 8, 25. [1 Pet. 3, 20.] 
 Heliod. 106. 296. ed. Cor. 
 
 aTre/cSuo/icw, f. guo-ojuai, Mid. (eVSva,) 
 to put off wholly, to strip off a garment or 
 the like/rom oneself; c. ace. trop. Col. 3,9 
 aTTfKO vcrdiJLfvoi TOV TraXaiov av^pa>Tvov. So 
 Act. Jos. Ant. 6. 14. 2 cureK$vs TTJV jSatrtXi- 
 KTJV eo-3 ^ra. Also to strip any one for one 
 self, to despoil ; c. ace. ras dpxds Col. 2, 15. 
 Comp. Act. eK8va, Plut. Lucull. 33 e / 
 TOVS /3ao-iXfTs. Dem. 763. 26. 
 
 f co?, 17, (aTreKSw/iai,) a put- 
 Ling off, of a garment or the like ; trop. Col. 
 2, 11 aTre/cSvcris TOV uco/iaros TTJS (rap/cos. 
 Only in N. T. 
 
 aTre\avva>, f. eXao-w, (AmW,) to drive 
 off or away, c. ace. et OTTO, Acts 18, 16 KOI 
 
 O.VTOVS OTTO roC /S^/zaroy. Sept. 
 for - Bn Ez. 34, 12. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 12; 
 c. gen. Plut. C. Mar. 17 dnt\a\ivwv TOV /3ij- 
 IHO.TOS. 
 
 O v, 6, (aTreXeyxw to refute 
 fully, Antiph. 131. 35,) refutation; Acts 
 19, 27 els cnrf\fyp.bv eXSetv to co?ne znio 
 refutation, i. e. into disrepute, contempt. 
 Not found in Gr. writers. 
 
 , O v, 6, 17, adj. 
 set free from bondage, afreed-man, 1 Cor. 7, 
 22. Jos. Ant. 7. 11. 2. ^Eschin. 59. 25. 
 Xen. Athen. 1. 10. 
 
 A jreXX. fjs, ov, 6, Apelles, pr. n. of a 
 Christian, Rom. 16, 10. 
 
 a7reA,7T/w, f. t Vo>, (eXTrifw.) to 7iope 
 fully, to expect, sc. /rom others ; c. ace. 
 Luke 6, 35 dyaSoTroielre Kai Savet ^ere [rrap 
 Si/] fj.rj8ev d7Tf\Trioi>Tfs, do good and lend 
 expecting nothing in return, i. e. lend to 
 those from whom (Trap* a>v) ye can expect 
 nothing ; see Trap lav in v. 34, and comp. 
 there a7roXa/3e . The idea back which 
 some insert, belongs to the circumstances, 
 and not to OTTO in composition. Others, 
 against the analogy of v. 34, to hope out, 
 i. e. to have done hoping, to despair ; hence : 
 lend never despairing, not doubting of re 
 quital from God, as in the next clause. So 
 2 Mace. 9, 18. Pol. 1. 19. 12 ; irepi TWOS 
 Diod. Sic. 2. 25. 
 
 aTrevavTl, adv. (eVairt,) pr. over againsi 
 from a person or place, i. e. 
 
 1. over against, opposite to, c. gen. Matt 
 21,2. 27, 61 Ka"^r]fj.fvai cnrtvavTi TOV T(i(pov. 
 Sept. for nMa Gen. 2, 16 ; 1M Neh. 7, 3. 
 Pol. 1. 86. 3. 
 
 2. before, in the presence of, c. gen. Matt. 
 27, 24 dntvavTi TOV o ^Xov. Acts 3, 16. 
 Sept. for ^aeb Lev. 6, 14. Josh. 7, 13. 
 Trop. Rom. 3, 18 OVK etrn (po/Bos Seoi) OTre- 
 vavn TU>V o(p3aX/iooi avTutv, quoted from Ps. 
 36, 2 where Sept. for fc^S ^ . 
 
 3. against, contrary to, c. gen. Acts 17, 
 7 d?r. TOJV Soy/idrcov Ka/crapos 1 . Comp. Ec- 
 clus. 37, 4. 
 
 a-TTeTTCt), see aTrelTroi . 
 
 aTTepavTOS, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. Trepai- 
 j/a>, Tr/pa?,) boundless, endless; 1 Tim. 1, 4 
 yevedXoyiai aTrepairoi. Sept. for ^f?.F] N? 
 Job. 36, 26. Pol. 1. 57. 3. Plato Parm. 
 144. b. 
 
 aTrepwrTracrTft)?, adv. (a priv. irtpi- 
 0-7raa>,) without distraction, not distracted 
 about worldly things, 1 Cor. 7, 35 ; comp. 
 vv. 32-34. Pol. 2. 20. 11. Arr. Epict. 1. 
 29. 59. 
 
71 
 
 d7replTfJ,T)TO$, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. ire- 
 piTep.va>,) uncircumcised, pr. Sept. for VlS 
 Gen. 17, 14. 2 Mace. 1,51. In N. T.trop. 
 
 ActS 7, 51 aTTfplTfJLrjTOI. TTj KdpSict Kdl TQIS 
 
 vcriv rtncircioncised in heart and ears, 
 whose heart and ears are still covered so 
 that they neither understand nor hear; 
 comp. Sept. and 3b-ibns Le v . 26, 41. Ez. 
 44, 7; tp:tjp^ns J er . 6, 10. 
 
 aTrepXp/MU, aor. 2 dirfjXZov, (ep^o/zai,) 
 f. dnfXfvo-opat Matt. 25, 46. Rom. 15, 28. 
 Sept. Gen. 19,2; also in epic and later 
 prose writers for the Attic airfip.i, Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 37, 38. Buttm. { 108. V. 5. Wi 
 ner 515. 
 
 1. to go away, to depart from a place or 
 person. 
 
 a) Pr. and genr. construed : a) Absol. 
 Matt. 13,25 ffTTffipe idvia ... KOI uTrJJXSei . 
 v. 28. 46. 16, 4. 18, 30. 19, 22. Mark 5, 
 20. Luke 17, 23. John 16, 7. al. (Dem. 283. 
 8. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 39.) Of one departing by 
 water, John 6, 1. 22 ; comp. on horseback 
 Palaeph. Fab. 1. /3) With dno c. gen. 
 Mark 5, 17. Luke 1, 38. 8, 37. y) With 
 fls c. ace. of place whither; Matt. 8, 33. 
 14, 15 els ras xco/iaj. 16, 21. 22, 5 fls rbv 
 18iov dypov ... (Is TTJV ffiiropiav avrov 
 (others rt nyi> eprropiav). 25, 46. 28, 10. 
 John 4, 8. Rom. 15, 28. Gal. 1, 17. (Sept. 
 Josh. 2, 16. Luc. D. Deor. 16. 1.) Also 
 Matt. 10, 5 fls 68ov e3i/o>i> pr/ dirf\%T)Te go 
 not away into the way of the gentiles, i. e. 
 leading to their territories. 8, 32. Mark 9, 
 43. So too by water, Matt. 8, 18. Mark 8, 
 13. John ^0, 40; with TW TrXo/w added 
 Mark 6, 32. S) With ri c. ace. of place 
 whither; Luke 23, 33 eVi TOV TOTTOV KT\. 
 24, 24 eVl ro p-wmdov. So Luc. D. Deor. 
 17. 1. e) With irpos c. ace. of pers. to 
 go away to any one; Matt. 14, 25 uTrfyXSe 
 irpos avTovs. John 6, 68. Rev. 10, 9. So 
 Xen. An. 1. 9. 29. ) With S-rrov of 
 place, Matt. 8, 19. 77) With irtpav c. 
 gen. John 6, 1 ; with els c. ace. of place 
 added John 10, 40. 3) From the Heb. 
 with oTrt cro) TWOS, to go away after a person 
 or thing, to follow, e. g. a person Mark 1, 
 20. John 12, 19; things, a-apKos IT f pas 
 Jude 7. So Heb. "nnx rfc*, Sept. rropev- 
 op.cu oTTi erw, Judg. 2. 12. 1 Sam. 6, 12. 
 
 b) Spec, to go au-ay apart, to go aside, 
 Matt. 26, 36. Acts 4, 15. 
 
 c) Of those who go back to the place 
 whence they came ; but the idea back, when 
 so expressed, arises from the circumstances, 
 and not from the force of diro in composi 
 tion; Matt. 8, 21. Luke 7, 24. (Xen. 1. 4. 
 
 29.) With els c. ace. of place, Matt. 9, 7. 
 Mark 7, 30. Luke 1, 23. John 4, 3. 28. 
 (Hdian. 8. 8. 18. Xen. An. 4. 8. 6.) With 
 diro TWOS added Luke 2, 15. With els ra 
 oTruroo, to go away backward from a person, 
 pr. John 18, 6 ; trop. 6, 66. With f <f1 Matt. 
 2,22. 
 
 2. Trop. of things : a) logo away, to de 
 part from any one, with diro c. gen. as le 
 prosy, Mark 1, 42. Luke 5, 13; enjoy 
 ments, Rev. 18, 14. So Luc. D. Mort. 3. 
 2. b) Of a report, fame, to go forth, to 
 be spread abroad, Matt. 4, 24. c) to pass 
 away, aor. 2 to be past, ended; e. g. a woe 
 Rev. 9, 12. 11, 14; the present order oi 
 things Rev. 21,1.4. So Sept. 6 vrroy dirrjX- 
 3ei> for C]Vn Cant. 2, 11. Plato Legg. 954. 
 d, aTreXSoiroy eviavTov. -f~ 
 
 flj7re^&)j f. d(pfa), (e^a>.) to hold off or 
 keep off, e. g. a ship from land Horn. Od. 1 5. 
 33 ; to hold back, to withhold, Horn. II. 1. 97. 
 Hdot. 8. 22. Sept. for S3 a Joel 1, 13. 
 Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Mid. aTre ^o/icu, to hold oneself off 
 from any thing, to abstain, with diro c. gen. 
 of thing, Acts 15, 20 an-f^eo-Sai diro T>V 
 d\Layr)p.dTa>v. 1 Thess. 4, 3. 5. 22 ; genit. 
 simply Acts 15, 29 direxfvZai etScoXoSurwi/. 
 1 Tim. 4, 3. 1 Pet. 2, 11. So c. diro Sept. 
 Job 1, 1. Ecclus. 28, 8 ; c. gen. Hdian. 4 
 7. 10. Xen. Mem. 4. 6. 11. 
 
 2. Act. intrans. or with tavTov impl. to 
 hold off, to keep away, to bs far off, distant; 
 with diro c. gen. Luke 7, 6 rjdr) 8f OVTOV ou 
 p.axpav direxovros diro -rfjs OLKLOS. 24, 13 ; 
 absol. 15, 20. Trop. of the heart. Matt. 15, 
 8 and Mark 7, 6 17 8e icapoia avT&v ir6pp< 
 dirextt dir euov, quoted from Is. 29, 13 
 where Sept. for -,-3 prn . So c. diro 2 
 Mace. 12, 29. Xen. An. 4. 3. 5 ; c. gen. 
 Diod. Sic. 5. 42. Xen. An. 2. 4. 10. 
 
 3. Act. to have or receive in full, (diro of 
 compl.) to have all that one can expect ; of 
 things c. ace. as /xio-Soi/ Matt. 6, 2. 5. 16; 
 irapdK\r)o-w Luke 6, 24; rruvra Phil. 4, 18. 
 Of a person, to have for good, c. ace. Phi- 
 lorn. 15 tva tdmnov avTov drrfxjjs. So Sept. 
 Num. 32, 19. Jos. B. J. 1. 30. 6. Plut. 
 Solon 22 TOV fjuo-^ov. Hence impers. dire- 
 %ei, lit. it has in full, it is enough, su/icit, 
 Mark 14, 41 ; comp. Luke 22, 46. So 
 Anacr. 28. 33 dirfxtt, t3\ir< yap avTrjv 
 Hesych. direx* 1 """OXP 7 ? 
 
 a7TlCTT(i), Si, f. ^o-o), (aTTtoroy.) not to 
 
 believe, to disbelieve, e. g. persons testifying, 
 c. dat. Luke 24, 11 ; testimony or the like, 
 absol. Mark 16, 11. Luke 24, 41. Acts 28, 
 24; the gospel, absol Mark 16, 16. So 
 
aTTicrr 
 
 la 
 
 72 
 
 dTTO 
 
 Wisd. 1, 2. Palaeph. Procem. 1. Xen. An. 
 2. 5. 6. Also, to be unfaithful, disobedient, 
 comp. amo-Tos no. 2. a; absol. Rom. 3, 3. 
 2 Tim. 2, 13. So Wisd. 10, 7. Xen. Conv. 
 4.48. 
 
 aTTtcrrta, as, rj, (tnnoTos,) unbelief, dis 
 belief, i. e. want of faith in God, in Christ, 
 in the gospel, Matt. 13, 58. 17, 20. Mark 
 
 6, 6. 9, 24. 16, 14. Rom. 4, 20. 11, 20. 23. 
 
 1 Tim. 1, 13 ei> diritrruf, i. e. Sirurrog &v. 
 Heb. 3, 12. 19, comp. 4, 2 sq. So genr. 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 4. 3. Dem. 291. 11. Plato 
 Phsed. 88. c.- Also, unfaithfulness, disobe 
 dience, comp. aTTHTTos no. 2. a. Rom. 3, 3. 
 So Pol. 3. 99. 7. Xen. An. 2. 5. 21. 
 
 a7TtcrT09, ou, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. jriartr.) 
 
 1 . Act. unbelieving, disbelieving, without 
 
 faith, genr. John 20, 27. So of want of 
 
 faith in Christ and his gospel, Matt. 17, 17 
 
 yevea UTTIO-TOS. Mark 9, 19. Luke 9, 41 ; also 
 
 2 Cor. 4, 4. Tit. 1,15. So genr. Hdot. 9. 98. 
 Dem. 349. 15. Spec, an unbeliever, not a 
 Christian, a gentile, heathen, 1 Cor. 6, 6. 
 
 7, 12.13. 14 bis. 15. 10,27. 14, 22 bis. 23.24, 
 see in o-rjp.f iov no. 2. a. 2 Cor. 6, 14. 15. 1 Tim. 
 5, 8. Sept. for it Is. 17, 10. 
 
 2. Pass, not to be believed or trusted, e. g. 
 
 a) Of persons, unfaithful, faithless, false; 
 Rev. 21, 8. Luke 12, 46 /j.era ran/ imio-To>v, 
 parall, pera TU>V vTroKpiT&v Matt. 24, 51. 
 So Plut. Dion 47. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 19. 
 
 b) Of things, incredible ; Acts 26, 8 ri 
 (iTTKTTOv Kpivfrai. So Jos. Ant. 6. 10. 2 ep- 
 yov arrurrov. Xen. Hi. 1. 9. 
 
 a7rXoo9 ovs, or\ rj, 6ov ovv, (kindr. a/ia,) 
 one-fold, single, Lat. simplex ; opp. oWXdos 
 two-fold, double, Lat. duplex, Xen. Cyr. 4. 
 5. 41 ; simple, not complex, Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 
 27. In N. T. of the eye, simple, unclouded, 
 i. e. not affected with disease, clear, sound; 
 opp. irovrjpos diseased ; Matt. 6, 22. Luke 
 11, 34. Comp. Themist. Or. 22. p. 281 
 8\(fj.p.a cnrXovv KOI yevvaiov. 
 
 aTrXoTT??, 7771-0?, 77, (cbrXoof,) singleness 
 of mind, simplicity, genr. 2 Cor. 1, 12. 11, 
 
 3 So eV aTrXoTTjTt KapSi as in singleness of 
 heart, mind, Eph. 6, 5. Col. 3, 22. Sept. for 
 tDFi 2 Sam. 15, 11 ; Sib *\W* 1 Chr. 29, 17. 
 So Wisd. 1, 1 cwrX. KapSias. Jos. B. J. 5. 7. 
 4. Pol. 1. 78. 8. Spec, as implying kind 
 ness, benevolence, liberality, Rom. 12, 8. 
 2 Cor. 8, 2. 9, 11. 13. So Jos. Ant. 7. 
 13. 4. 
 
 ?, adv. (oTrXooy,) simply, with sin 
 gleness of mind, i. e. kindly, liberally, see in 
 tbrXoTT/s lilt. James 1, 5 TOV SiSozros 3eo! 
 rracrtj/ cnrXcos . Pol. 32. 13. 14 TOLS (f)i\ois 
 
 /cat yevvaicos. Also sin 
 cerely, Dem. 328. 3. 
 
 airo, a prep, governing only the geni 
 tive, i. q. Lat. ob, obs ; pr./rom, away from 
 any place, person, object, from which a per 
 son or thing goes away, is parted, or is de 
 rived. It marks in strictness the separation 
 of such objects only as were before on, at, 
 by, near, with another, externally ; not in 
 or within another, for in respect to such en 
 is used. The relation implied by is 
 therefore nearer ; that by OTTO remoter. See 
 note 1 below, Kiihner { 288. 1 . Ausf. Gr. 
 598. Winer 5 51. p. 443. ed. 5. 
 
 1. Of PLACE, which is the primary signi 
 fication. 
 
 a) Before a genit. of place or person, and 
 implying external motion from, away from, 
 e. g. a) After verbs of separating ; Matt. 
 25, 32 bis, KOL dcpopiel CLVTOVS air aXX^Xcoz* 
 KT\. 1 Thess. 2, 17 dwopcpavio- SevTfs d(j> 
 v/j,a>v. So Plato %tpieiv drro Phaed. 45. p. 
 97. b. /3) After verbs of going away, de 
 parting from a place or person ; so with 
 gen. of place, e. g. TropeiWSlai ano TOV lepov 
 Matt. 24, 1 ; a^u orao-Sat UTTO rov lepov Luke 
 2, 37 ; after a7ro/3aiW/ Luke 5, 2 ; (pevyeiv 
 Mark 16, 8. So dvaftaivciv dirb TOV vdaros 
 from the water Matt. 3, 16. Mark 1, 10; 
 fj.era^aiv(iv Matt. 8, 34, comp. 9, 1. Praegn. 
 egepxeo-%ai OTTO, to go out and away from a 
 place, to go out from, to depart from, Matt. 
 13, 1 e^eXSwi 6 irjaovs dnb rfjs oiKias- 28, 
 
 8. Mark 11, 12. Heb. 11,15; e /OTopeueo-Sai 
 aTroid. Matt. 20,29. Mark 10, 46. Oftener 
 with gen. of pers. e. g. after%a7repx for3ai 
 Luke 1, 38. 2, 15. 8, 37 ; aTroo-TracrSat Luke 
 22, 41. Acts 21, 1 ; d^t crratrSai, diroo-Trjvai, 
 Luke 4, 13. 13, 27. Acts 12, 10. 15, 38. 
 19, 9; cmox^pflv Matt. 7, 23. Luke 9, 39. 
 Acts 13, 13; a7rox<Bpi ecr3af Acts 15, 39; 
 SiaoT-iywu Luke 24, 51 ; Sia^copt ^ecrSat Luke 
 
 9, 33 ; e pxetrSat John 3, 2 ; TropeuecrSai Matt. 
 25, 41. Luke 4, 42. Acts 5, 41 ; favyeiv 
 Mark 14, 52. John 10, 5. James 4, 7. Rev. 
 9, 6. (Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 11. An. 7. 1. 4.) 
 Praegn. e|ep^ecr3ai OTTO TWOS, to come or go 
 out from any one, e. g. cnro 3fou John 13, 3. 
 16, 30 ; eeX3e COT e/nou Luke 5, 8. So of 
 evil spirits, e |/p^eo-3ai diro TWOS to go out 
 from a person Matt. 12, 43. 17, 18. Luke 
 4, 35. 41. 8, 2. 29. 11, 24. Acts 16, 18. 
 Also eyfipeo- Sai drrb TO>V vexpaiv to rise from 
 with or among the dead Matt. 14, 2. 27, 64. 
 28, 7. Praegn. atcr^ui/eo-3at dno TIVOS to be 
 ashamed from any one, i. e. to turn away 
 from him with shame, 1 John 2, 28. Sept. 
 for -ja ttj-Ja Jer. 22, 22. (Ecclus. 41, 17.) 
 Also of those avoiding any one, after cwro- 
 
tlTTO 
 
 73 
 
 trnjvai 1 TJTI. 6, 5 ; fKK\ivciv Rom. 16, 17 ; 
 rrpoo-fxtus Matt. 7, 15. Mark 10, 17. Luke 
 20, 46 ; crreXXfo-Sai 2 Thess. 3, 6 ; or of 
 those turning back or forsaking any one, as 
 after an-oor^i/at Acts 21, 21. Heb. 3, 12 ; 
 p.eT<m 3ecr3ai Gal. 1, 6. (Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 1.) 
 Trop. of diseases departing from any one, 
 as leprosy, after aTroXXafnrecrSat Acts 19, 
 12; a7rrpxfo-3ai Mark 1, 42. Luke 5, 13. 
 y) After verbs implying motion downwards, 
 or the like ; e. g. with a genit. of place, as 
 dTTOTriTTTdv Acts 9, 18 ; anoTivda-o-fiv Luke 
 9, 5 ; Karapaivfiv Matt. 8, 1. 14, 29. 27, 
 40. 42 ; KOTepxecrSai Luke 9. 37 ; KaSaipiiv 
 Luke 1, 52. Acts 13, 29 ; ir nrreiv Matt. 15, 
 
 27. 24,29. Luke 16, 21. Acts 20, 9; o-uX- 
 \(yiv Matt. 7, 16 bis. (So with dfyaipfiv 
 Theophr. Char. 2 ; Karafiaivfiv Pint. Pericl. 
 
 28. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 10.) With gen. of 
 pers. as naTafiaivfiv OTTO TOV 3eoi) James 1, 
 
 17. Rev. 3, 12. 20, 9. 8) After verbs of 
 rising up, returning from a place ; with 
 genit. of place, e. g. inroarrptfyfiv Luke 4, 1. 
 24, 9. Acts 1, 12; eye/pecrSai OTTO TTJS yrjs 
 Acts 9, 8. So inravicrracr Sai OTTO ra>v 3a- 
 KU>V Xen. Hi. 7. 2. e) After verbs of tak 
 ing or driving away, removing, and the 
 like ; with gen. of place, as aipeiv Matt. 9, 
 16; of pers. Luke 19, 24 ; and so aipeiv diro 
 TTJS yrjs, to take away from the earth, see in 
 atpw no. 4, Acts 8, 33. 22, 22 ; dnaipeiv c. 
 gen. of pers. Matt. 9, 15. Mark 2, 20 ; dire- 
 \avveiv Acts 18, 16 (Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 12); 
 d-!roKv\ifiv Matt. 28, 2. Luke 24, 2 ; dcpai- 
 peii drro TOV v\ov TTJS faijs Rev. 22, 19 ; 
 SicoKfij/ Matt. 23, 34; with gen. of pers. 
 after jtnkuffUam* Acts 1, 11. 22. Also 
 exftdXXeiv OTTO to cast out from, c. gen. pers. 
 Mark 16, 9 ; gen. of place Matt. 7, 4. Acts 
 13, 50; after ega\ei<peiv Rev. 21, 4; e<u- 
 3e> Acts 7, 45. () After verbs of leading 
 or casting away, receiving from, and the 
 like ; with gen. of place after eiravdyetv 
 Luke 5, 3 ; gen. of pers. after uytiv John 
 
 18, 28 ; dno\ap.pdvfiv Mark 7, 33 ; /SoXXeii/ 
 Matt. 5, 29. 30 ; vnokapfiavfiv Acts 1, 9. 
 TJ) After verbs of loosing, letting go, e. g. 
 c. gen. of thing after \veiv Luke 13, 15. 16. 
 [Acts 22, 30.] Sept. Jer. 40, 4. After 
 aTroXiifcrSat c. gen. pers. Acts 15, 33 ; so 
 Plato Phaedo 9. p. 65. a. Comp. Matth. Gr. 
 J 353. n. 
 
 b) Before a genit. of person, thing, event, 
 or the like, and implying separation or re 
 moval of any kind, not merely external ; 
 from, away from. Several classes of words 
 which sometimes take OTTO for the sake of 
 clearness, are also construed with the sim 
 
 ple genitive ; see Buttm. 132. 3. Winer 
 $ 61. 1. a) After verbs of separating, 
 loosing from, and the like ; as aT 
 drro dvdpos Luke 16, 18 ; 
 Rom. 7, 2. 6. Gal. 5, 4 ; x^P t"" 1 Cor. 
 7, 10. Rom. 8, 35. 39. (Plato Phaedo 12. 
 p. 67. C.) Praegn. dra3ep.a flvai dno TOV 
 Xp. to be accursed from Christ, i. e. sepa 
 rated from his love, Rom. 9, 3, comp. 8, 35. 
 39 ; ajro SirfjcrKfiv UTTO TLVOS to be dead from 
 any thing, i. e. delivered from by death, 
 trop. Col. 2, 20 ; <p3etpecr3ai OTTO TWOS to be 
 corrupted away from 2 Cor. 11, 3 ; vare- 
 povv diro TIVOS to fall short from, to fail of, 
 Heb. 12, 15. /3) After verbs of departing 
 from, acoiding, abstaining, desisting from, 
 and the like ; with gen. of thing, as dire- 
 XecrSat UTTO TU>V aXto-yr//xaTwj/ Acts 15, 20 ; 
 also 1 Thess. 4, 3. 5, 22 ; dnocrrrivai. mro 
 dbiKias 2 Tim. 2, 19 ; id. c. gen. pers. Acts 
 5, 38. 22, 29. 2 Cor. 12, 8 ; (3XeVi/ c. 
 gen. of thing, to beware of, Mark 8, 15; 
 gen. of pers. 12, 38 ; fnxXiveiv c. gen. of 
 thing, 1 Pet. 3, 11 ; Traveiv 1 Pet. 3, 10; 
 KaTcnraveiv Heb. 4, 4. 10. (Plut. Alex. 25. 
 Thuc. 7. 73.) After Trpoo-e x"" Matt. 16, 6. 
 11. 12 bis; Trpoo-exeiv e avra Luke 12, 1. 
 Sept. for in b ln 2 Chr. 35, 21. Ecclus. 6, 
 13. So after <puXa<rcreo-3ai Luke 12, 15, 
 and (pvXd&o-fiv eavrov 1 John 5, 21. Sept. 
 for t v -lEtTCri Ps. 18, 24. (Xen. Cyr. 2. 
 3. 9.) Also after (pfvyeiv c. gen. of thing, 
 i. q. to avoid, 1 Cor. 10, 14. y) After 
 verbs of rising up from, going forth, re 
 turning, with gen. of that with which one 
 was occupied ; as dnocrrrivai. diro TTJS tvpoa-- 
 fvxijs Luke 22, 45 ; inroa-rpffpfiv Heb. 7, 
 1 ; Siryei pe<r3ai drro TOV vnvov Matt. 1, 24. 
 With gen. of pers. from whom any thing 
 proceeds ; so of thoughts eWopeiiecrSai OTT 
 avTov Mark 7, 15 ; healing power, tepxf- 
 o-3ai Luke 8, 46. 5) After verbs of ask 
 ing, requiring, forbidding, with gen. of 
 pers. as diraiTfiv Luke 6, 30. 12, 20 ; eVSi- 
 Ktiv Luke 18, 3. Rev. 6, 10 ; (K^Tflv Luke 
 11, 50; K<a\vfiv Luke 6, 29. f ) After 
 verbs of taking away, removing, depriving, 
 and the like ; sometimes with simple genit. 
 Matth. ^ 418. n. So with gen. of pers. after 
 aipfiv Matt. 13, 12. John 10, 18. Eph. 4, 
 31 ; dcpaipeiv Luke 10, 42. 16, 3; dn6\e- 
 tr3at diro, praegn. to perish away from, Rev. 
 18, 14 ; comp. Sept. for -p ^ns Jer. 18, 18. 
 Also a(pavros yiWcr3ai dno TLVOS to disap 
 pear from any one, L^Jfe 24, 31. With 
 gen. of thing, as aipfiv Luke 8, 12 : Trapep- 
 X(r3ai dn6 to pass away (be taken away) 
 from Matt. 5, 18 ; /jfraicii eurSai Col. 1, 23 ; 
 
airo 
 
 74 
 
 ttTTO 
 
 2 Thess. 2, 2. ) After verbs 
 of turning away, averting, and the like ; 
 sometimes with the simple gen. Matth. \ 
 354. y. So with gen. of pers. after 071-0- 
 crTpftpfiv Rom. 11,26; K\deiv TCI anXdy^va 
 dno TWOS 1 John 3, 17 ; eiriorpeffxiv Acts 
 15, 19. With gen. of tiling, after dno- 
 OTpe <pi/ Acts 3, 26; Staorpecpeti/ Acts 13, 
 8 ; enio-Tpffaiv 1 Thess. 1, 9. Acts 14, 15; 
 also 26, 18. 2 Tim. 4, 4. Prasgn. p.era- 
 voflv euro to repent and turn from, Acts 8, 
 22. Heb, 6, 1. 77) After verbs of hiding, 
 concealing, and the like ; with gen. of pers. 
 after dnoKpvnTfiv Matt. 11, 25. Luke 10, 
 21. 18, 34; K pvnTfiv Luke 19, 42. John 
 12, 36; gen. of thing Rev. 6, 16; napa- 
 Ka^vnTetv dno of pers. Luke 9, 45. Sept. 
 for -JE ^fion Gen. 4, 14; ,2 n^Srt 
 2 K. 4, 27. So Ecclus. 17, 15. 20. Horn! 
 Od. 23. 110. 3) After adjectives and verbs 
 of freeing from, cleansing, healing, escap 
 ing, and the like, which are also construed 
 by Gr. writers with the simple genitive ; 
 Matth. 353 and note. Winer 30. 6. So 
 after adjectives, dno c. gen. of thing, as 
 a3o>os Matt. 27, 24 ; na-mXos James 1, 27 ; 
 Rom. 7, 3 ; fcaSapd? Acts 20, 26 ; 
 rjs Mark 5. 34. After verbs, with gen. of 
 thing ; as SiKaiow Acts 13, 39. Rom. 6, 7 ; 
 (KKaZaipeiv 2 Tim. 2, 21 ; eXevZepovv Rom. 
 6, 18. 22. 8, 2. 21 ; Zepanewv Luke 5, 15. 
 7, 21. 8, 2 ; Ido-Zai Mark 5,29. Luke 6, 17 ; 
 Kcttapi&iv 2 Cor. 7, 1. Heb. 9, 14. 1 John 1, 
 7. 9 ; \oveiv Rev. 1,5; Xvrpovv Tit. 2, 14 ; 
 pavTi&iv Heb. 10, 22 ; pveo-Sai Matt. 6, 13. 
 
 1 Thess. 1, 10. 2 Tim. 4,18; o-u&iv Matt. 
 
 I, 21. Rom. 5. 9; (ptvyfiv dno to Jlee or 
 escape from Matt. 3, 7. 23, 33 ; (pv\dao-fiv 
 
 2 Thess. 3, 3. With gen. of pers. after 
 aTraXXacro-fo-Scu Luke 12, 58 ; pi/ecrSat Rom. 
 15, 31. 2 Thess. 3, 2 ; <rd>fiv Acts 2, 40. 
 Praegn. eV8wap.o{5cr3ai OTTO dcrSeveias to be 
 made strong (healed) from weakness Heb. 
 
 II, 34. Acts 16, 33 fXovcrev (UVTOVS) dno 
 T&V nXrjycav he washed (cleansed) them from 
 their stripes, from the blood and filth of their 
 wounds. So perh. once Heb. 5, 7 elcraKov- 
 o-%fls dno TTJS evXa/Seias being heard and de 
 livered from his fear; but see in eiXa/3eta, 
 and below in no. 3. e. 
 
 c) Before a genit. of place or person 
 from which one goes or comes away, sets 
 off, or the like, and expressing the terminus 
 a quo. a) Pr. and genr. implying the 
 direction from which one goes or comes to 
 another place ; after verbs of departing or 
 going, coming, rising, sending, following, 
 and the like. So with gen. of place, after 
 v. Luke 2, 4 avf^rj 8e KOI 
 
 OTTO TTJS FaXiXaiay . . . eiy rf]V lovSaiav, see 
 below in note 1. Acts 25, 1 ; di>ayeo-3ai 
 Acts 13,13. 16, 11 ; dvare\\fiv Luke 12, 
 54; dnoo-T(\\fiv Acts 11, 11; Step^eo-Sai 
 Acts 13, 14 ; eKnXe iv Acts 20, 6 ; e^ep^f- 
 o-3<u Rev. 16, 17 bis ; eVepxea-Sai Acts 14, 
 19; epxeo-3ai Mark 1,9. 7, 1. 2 Cor. 1, 
 16 ; impl. Mark 7, 4 KOL [e XSoWes] diro 
 dyopas, see in dyopd. So after fJKeiv Matt. 
 8, 11. Luke 13, 29 bis; impfl. Rev. 16, 12; 
 Karafiaiveiv Mark 3, 22. Luke 10, 30 ; 
 Karavrav Acts 21, 7 ; KaTep^fa^ai Acts 
 11, 27. 12, 19. 15, 1 ; prrai peti/ Matt. 19, 
 1 ; Trapaylvfo-^ai Matt. 3, 13 ; TrtfiTreiv 
 Acts 20, 17 ; a-vvavapaivfv Zai Acts 13, 31 ; 
 o-ufep^eo-Sai Acts 21, 16 ; (rvi^-pe^eii/ Mark 
 6, 33. So aKo\ov^eiv diro to follow one 
 from a place, Matt. 27, 55. Luke 23, 49. 
 Trop. after /neTap-opcpouo-Scu, 2 Cor. 3, 18 
 OTTO o~6rjs fls 86-av. With gen. of pers. id. 
 as 01 aTreoraX/zeVoi OTTO TOV KopvrjXiov Acts 
 10, 17 ; after e^ X flo-^ai 1 Thess. 1,8; <f- 
 ep^eo-Sat 1 Cor. 14, 36 ; ep^fa-3ai Mark 5, 
 35. Gal. 2, 12. 1 Thess. 3, 6 ; impl. Matt. 
 26, 47 ; enxpe pea-Sat Acts 19, 12. So Luc. 
 D. Deor. 14. 2. ib. 24. 2 fJKovra fj.e dno 
 2t8<woy. Xen. Hell. 6. 4. 3. /3) By He 
 braism, iike Heb. "JO , it once marks the 
 quarter or direction in or towards which a 
 thing is ; Rev. 21, 13 quater, dno dvaroXrjs 
 7rv\a>ves Tpels, OTTO /3opp a KT\. lit. from the 
 east, from the north, etc. where we say on 
 the east, on the north. The oriental passes 
 in mind/?-o?n the place specified to himself: 
 we from ourselves to the place specified. 
 So Heb. TiBSa Sept. OTTO /Soppa Judg. 7, 1 ; 
 B 7^ Sept. tear dvaroXds Gen. 2, 8. 12, 8 ; 
 see Heb. Lex. ")> no. 3. h. Comp. Diod. Sic. 
 1. 31 init. Comp. also Lat. a fronte, a ter- 
 go ; Fr. dessons, dessus, dkhors, tfedans. y~) 
 Spec, with gen. of the place from which 
 any thing proceeds, begins, is done, and the 
 like ; as Acts 15, 38 TOV aTrooraira dif av- 
 Tcav drro Ha/jKpvXias. So after np^eo-Sai 
 Luke 24, 27 ; Se xf<r3ai TL Acts 28, 21 ; rpe- 
 <peo-3ai Acts 12, 20. Also diro . . . eas, after 
 ffpXfo-%at Matt. 24, 27 ; eirio-uvdyeiv v. 31. 
 Mark 13, 27 ; diro . . . p-e ^pi after irXrjpovv 
 Rom. 15, 19. (So diro . . . ecor Diod. Sic. 
 
 I. 31 ; diro . . . a xpt Xen. An. 5. 5. 4.) In 
 the phrase OTTO TOV ovpavov, air ovpavov, 
 from hearen, Mark 8, 11. Luke 21, 11. 22, 
 43. Acts 9, 3. Rom. 1, 18. 2 Thess. 1, 7. 
 1 Pet. 1, 12. al. Sometimes, as in poetic 
 and later usage, diro is prefixed to an adv. 
 of place in -3e>,e. g. ai/w3ez/, Matt. 27,51 dno 
 ava)%fv(a>s KOTO). Mark 15, 38. Comp. Horn. 
 
 II. 8. 365 an ovpavo^ev. ib. 24. 492. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 45 sq. Winer } 54. 7. n. 1. 
 
ttTTO 
 
 75 
 
 kitfmer s Ausf. Gr. { 512. n. 3. Hence 
 8) Trop. of order or succession, i. e. as 
 marking the person or place from which 
 the order begins to be reckoned ; so with 
 gen. of pers. Jude 14 e)3Sop,oy dirb A8d/i. 
 Matt. 2, 16 dirb Sierouy /cat (carcorepa). So 
 with ecoy, Acts 8, 10 dirb piKpov ecoy fifyd- 
 Xou. Matt. 20, 8. John 8, 9. Heb. 8, 11. 
 Also apxfo-Sai diro c. gen. of place or 
 thing, Luke 24, 27. Acts 8, 35. 10, 37 ; 
 with ey Luke 23, 5. So with dpgdp.fvos 
 impl. after 8taXe yeo-3at, irefeeiv, Acts 17, 2. 
 28, 23 ; comp. Luke 24, 27. Comp. Plato 
 Pha;dr. 228. d, dpdfj,ft>os dirb TOV Trpwrov. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 1. 
 
 d) Implying distance of one object from 
 another, with or without the idea of previ 
 ous motion ; from, away from, far from ; 
 so OTTO TrpocrcoTTov TIVOS far from the pre 
 sence o/any one 2 Thess. 1,9. Rev. 12, 14. 
 (Xen. An. 3. 3. 9.) After dirf X fiv Matt. 15, 
 8. Mark 7, 6. Luke 7, 6. 24, 13 ; so Diod. 
 Sic. 5. 42. Xen. An. 4. 3. 5. Also paicpav 
 diro Matt. 8, 30. Mark 12, 34. John 21, 8. 
 Acts 17, 27 ; so Pol. 5. 99. 3. Arr. Alex. 1. 
 1 . 5. In the later Gr. manner diro is likewise 
 prefixed to the noun of measure marking 
 the distance, as John 11,18 r/v 8f ftrfiavia 
 eyyvy TUV lfpoo~o\vp.<av, <ay dirb crraS/coc 
 8fKairevTf, instead of d>y crraSiovy 8fK. dirb 
 lepoy. in Luke 24, 13 ; also John 21,8. 
 Rev. 14, 20. So Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 4. Plut. 
 Philop. 4 TJV dypos . . . dirb OTa6Va>i> f"iK.oo-i 
 rr)s Tro Xewy. Diod. Sic. 1.51. See Winer 
 65. 4 ult. Put before adv. of distance in 
 -Sev, e. g. dirb /xa/cpoSei/ from afar, afar off, 
 Matt. 26, 58. 27, 55. Mark 5, 6. 14, 54. 
 15, 40. Luke 16, 23. Rev. 18, 10. 15. 17. 
 Sept. for pf^ 5 ?? Ps. 138, 6. Also Sept. 
 Ps. 139, 2. Ezra 3, 13. Polemo Physiogn. 
 1. 6. See Lob. ad Phryn. p. 45 sq. Winer 
 554. 7. n. 1. 
 
 e) Before a genit. expressing a whole 
 from which a part is taken away ; i. e. in a 
 partitive sense, like eVc and Heb. "JE . a) 
 With a gen. of the number or class to 
 which a person belongs ; e. g. Matt. 27, 9 
 6 fTip-fjo-avTo (rives) dirb viav \a-parjK. V. 21 
 rim . . . dnb T>V 8vo. Luke 6, 13. 9, 38. 16, 
 30. 19, 39. Heb. 7, 2. 13. So Sept. and 
 1? Ex. 17, 5. Hdot. 6. 27. Thuc. 1. 116 
 XajScuv ff-rjKovra vavs OTTO ra>v f(f)opp.ovo~ci)v. 
 But usually Gr. writers here employ the 
 simple genitive; Buttm. c 132. 5. Kiihner 
 { 273. 3. a. /3) After the verbs e o-3/eii , 
 nif iv, to eat or drink of (front) any thing, 
 to partake of it, Matt. 15, 27. Mark 7, 28. 
 Luke 22, 18. Sept. eVSietf diro for "j^-l ??X 
 
 Lev. 11,40 ; iriveiv diro for "jO ftHttJ Jer. 51 
 7. So diro\avei.v diro TIVOS Plato Apol. 
 Socr. 10. p. 31. b. But the usual con 
 struction of these verbs in Greek writers 
 is with the simple genitive; Buttm. 132. 
 10. i. Kiihner } 273. 4. c. 7) After verbs 
 ofgiring, imparting, receiving, taking away, 
 and the like, i. e. to give or take of any 
 thing, a part of it ; e. g. after aipuv Mark 
 
 6, 43 ; d(paipflv, as d<p. dirb ru>v \6ya>v KT\. 
 Rev. 22, 19; 8i86vai Luke 20, 10. Rev. 2, 
 17; fKxeeiv Acts 2, 17. 18; eViStSoVai 
 Luke 24, 42 ; Aap,/3ai/eij/ Mark 12,2 ; vo<r<pi- 
 feo-Sai Acts 5, 2. 3; (pepeiv John 21, 10. 
 So Sept. \ap.pdvfiv airo Ex. 12, 7 ; comp. 
 Gen. 25, 30. Greek writers employ here 
 only the simple genitive ; see Matth. } 323. 
 Buttm. 5 132. 5. c. Kuhner 273. 3. b. 
 Winer j 30. 7. 
 
 NOTE 1. The mutual relation of e /c as 
 the nearer and OTTO as the remoter preposi 
 tion, the former referring to what is inner 
 and special, and the latter to what is outer 
 and general, is seen in Luke 2, 4 dvfftrj 
 8e Kal la)<rr)(p OTTO Tr/s FaXtXaiay eK TroXetus 
 NaapY, comp. also Acts 23, 34. On the 
 other hand OTTO and e * are used apparently 
 without distinction John 11, 1 : .\dapos 
 OTTO BrjSavias fK Tijs Ka>p.r]s Mapt ay KT\. 
 comp. also Rev. 9, 18. 1 Thess. 2, 6. In 
 other instances drro is employed inter 
 changeably with f< in the same construc 
 tions, either because the more general is 
 put for the special as including it, or be 
 cause of less precision on the part of the 
 writer ; comp. Winer 51. 5. Thus Matt. 
 
 7, 4 eK/3aXoj ro Kapfpos dno rov o<p3aX/iov, 
 comp. v. 5 e /c TOW o(p3. Luke 9, 5 t ^ep^o- 
 p.fvov drro rrjs TroXewy, comp. John 4, 30 fK 
 TTJS TroXecoy. Luke 4, 35 of an evil spirit : 
 eeX3f tK avrov . . . e ^XSev an- avrov, and 
 so Matt. 17, 18 comp. Mark 1, 25. 26. 
 Matt. 1 , 24 8ityf pSeiy OTTO rou VTTVOV, comp. 
 Rom. 13, 11 f VTTVOV fyepSrjvai. Matt. 14, 2 
 fiyep^rf OTTO ru>v vfKp&v and so 27, 64. 28. 7, 
 comp. Mark 6, 14. 16 fK vfKp&v and so John 
 12, 1. 9. Acts 3, 15. 13,30. etc. So Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 7. 2 \ap.fidvop.fv ovre fK rijs yrfs 
 ov8tv . . . ovrf dno TOIV OIKIMV. Hi. 1. 38. 
 
 2. Of TIME, as marking the point or 
 epoch from which time is reckoned. 
 
 a) Before the genit. of nouns, from, e. g. 
 a) With gen. of a noun implying time, as 
 drro TTJS <Spay eKfivrjsfrom that very /iour Matt. 
 9,22. 15,28. 17,18; a7r6r^sTv;yc5pafMatt. 
 27, 45 ; air fKfivrjs rrjs rjp.fpas Matt. 22, 
 46. John 11, 53. (Xen. An. 7. 5. 6.) Acts 
 20, 18. Phil. 1, 5. Acts 15, 7-mp fi 
 
0.7TO 
 
 76 
 
 7TO 
 
 v. (Diod Sic. 1. 6.) Luke 8, 43 dnb 
 (To>v SwSe/ca. Rom. 15, 23. Also an aluvos 
 Luke 1, 70. Acts 3, 21; OTTO TO>V al&vcov 
 Eph. 3, 9. Col. 1, 26; air dpx^js Matt. 19, 
 4. 8. Luke 1, 2. John 8, 44. 2 Pet. 3, 4. al. 
 So Dem. 288. 10. Plato Crit. 112. e, obs air 
 dpxys tyevfTo. /3) With a gen. of pers. 
 from whom time is reckoned ; Matt. 1,17 
 OTTO A/3pcta/i, . . . OTTO AatnS. Acts 3, 24. 
 Rom. 5, 14. (Hdian. 6. 2. 5.) Also aTrojSpe- 
 (f)ovs from a child 2 Tim. 3, 15; so OTTO 
 iraiSav Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 11. y) With gen. 
 of an event or condition from which time 
 counts ; as OTTO TOV aip-aros "A/3eX Matt. 23, 
 
 35 ; OTTO KaTa^oXfjs KOCT/MOU Matt. 13, 35. 
 25. 34. Luke 11, 50. al. Matt. 1, 17. Acts 
 1, 22. Rom. 1, 20. Of a condition, Luke 2, 
 
 36 OTTO TTJS TrapSfvias O.VTTJS. Comp. Thuc. 7. 
 
 43 OTTO TOV TTpCOTOU VTTVOV. 
 
 b) Before the gen. of a relat. pronoun, 
 with or without the antecedent expressed ; 
 as T]jjipa d(p i)s Acts 20, 18 ; d(p f/s f]p-tpas 
 from what day or time, since, Col. l,-6. 9 
 (Plato Rep. 461. d) ; simpl. dfi TJS id. Luke 
 7, 45. Acts 24, 11. 2 Pet. 3, 4 ; so Plut. 
 Pelop. 15. Xen. Hell. 4. 6. 6. Also d(p 
 ov (xpovov~) from what time, since, Luke 24, 
 21. Rev. 16, 18 ; d</> ov av from whatever 
 time Luke 13, 25. Sept. for tX Ex. 5, 
 23. So Luc. D. Mort. 26. 1. Xen. Conv. 
 4. 62. 
 
 c) Before adverbs of time, e. g. ,- a) 
 With the art. where the adv. then becomes 
 an adjective ; Buttm. 125. 6. Matth. 272. 
 So OTTO TOW injv (xpovov) from now, hence 
 forth, Luke 1, 48. 5, 10. Acts 18, 6. al. 
 |3) Without the art. as OTTO nepvarifrom a 
 year ago, since the past year, 2 Cor. 8, 10. 
 9, 2 ; dnb Trpati Acts 28, 23 ; dnb rare from 
 then, from that time, Matt. 4, 17. 16, 21. 26, 
 16. Luke 16, 16. This is a later usage, 
 not found in the best Gr. writers ; eee 
 Sturz de Dial. Alex. p. 210. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 47. Winer 54. 7. n. 1. 
 
 3. Of ORIGIN, SOURCE, CAUSE, that from 
 which a person or thing proceeds or is deri 
 ved. Here too OTTO marks the remoter, me 
 diate, ultimate origin or cause; while the 
 nearer, immediate, direct source or cause is 
 expressed by , VTTO, irapd ; see Herm. ad 
 Soph. Electr. 65. Winer 51. p. 437, 444, 
 edit. 5. 
 
 a) Of the person from whom or the 
 place whence any one is derived or comes. 
 a) With genit. of the person from whom 
 one is descended bv birth, after yewdcr^ai, 
 Heb. 11, 12 d(p tvbs eyevvrfiycrav /crX. /3) 
 With genit. of place, i. e. of the home, city, 
 country, people, whence one comes, where 
 
 he belongs ; so after elvai, John 1 , 45 r/v 8e 
 6 $i\nnros OTTO B^So-ai &a ; elsewhere often 
 with part. &v impl. as Matt. 2, 1 /wzyoi OTTO 
 dvaroXSjv. 4, 25. 15, 1. 27, 57. Luke 23, 
 51. John 11, 1. Acts 2, 5. 23, 34. 24, 18 ; 
 after ep^eo-Sat John 7, 42. Once of a cove 
 nant, Gal. 4, 24 /jLia [itv dno opovs 2ira. 
 (Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 17. Comp. Lat. pastor 
 ab Amphryso, Virg. Georg. 3. 2.) With 
 the art. inserted before UTTO, as Matt. 21, 11 
 6 7rpo(prjTT]s 6 OTTO Na^aper. Mark 15, 43. 
 John 1, 46. 12, 21. 19, 38. Acts 6, 9. al. 
 So Pol. 5. 70. 8. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 5. y) 
 With gen. of a collective noun, expressing 
 the body or sect to which one belongs ; Acts 
 12, 1 T>V aTro TTJS fKK\r)crias. 15, 5 TO>V dnb 
 TTJS alpeo-ecas KT\. So Plut. Brut. 2. Hdian. 
 7. 1. 11 TCOV dno TTJS jBov\rjs. 7. 9. 2. Of 
 things, e. g. with gen. of a ship, TO. ano TOV 
 7T\oiov things from the ship, i. e. the broken 
 pieces, furniture, Acts 27, 44 ; of a gar 
 ment, Luke 5, 36 TO dirb TOV KO.IVOV. 
 
 b) Of a person or thing as the source of 
 information or knowledge, i. e. from whom 
 one hears, learns, knows any thing. So with 
 gen. of pers. after aKoveiv Acts 9, 1 3. 1 
 John 1, 5. (Thuc. 1. 25.) Luke 22, 71 
 OTTO TOV o-To/JiaTos (ivTov, i. ([. dif avTov. Also 
 after yu>a>o-Kfii> Mark 15, 45 ; pav Sdvfiv 
 Matt 11, 29. Gal. 3, 2. Col. 1,7. (Plato 
 Ion 537. e.) So Xarpfveii/, 2 Tim. 1, 3 J 
 Xar/jetico OTTO Trpoyovcov whom I serve from 
 my forefathers, as I have received and 
 learned from them. (Pol. 5. 55. 9.) With 
 gen. of thing, after fniyivwo-Kfiv Matt. 7, 16. 
 20; fjiavZaveiv Matt. 24, 32. Mark 13, 28. 
 Heb. 5, 8. 
 
 c) Of a person as the ultimate cause or 
 agent from whose will or efficiency any 
 thing proceeds, comes, is done, or the like ; 
 strictly through some intervening agency 
 or means, i. e. mediately. a) With gen. 
 of pers. from or by whose will, power, au 
 thority, any thing takes place ; Matt. 12^ 
 38 SfXo/iez/ OTTO o~ov arjfjLflov I8flv. Gal. 1, 1 
 aTrocrroXos OVK an diftpwTrcov. So dif f/iav- 
 TOV, d(f) eavTov, of myself, of oneself, i. e. of 
 one s own will or accord, without authority 
 or command from another, e. g. after fpx*- 
 o-Sat John 8, 42; \a\e1v 7, 17. 18. 14, 10. 
 16, 13 ; Troiftv 5, 19. 30. 8, 28 ; rtSeVai 10, 
 18 ; also, without help from others, after 
 yivuxTKeiv Luke 21, 30 ; elire iv John 11, 51 ; 
 \eyeiv 18, 34; Xoyi ffo-3cu 2 Cor. 10, 7. So 
 Thuc. 5. 60. Xen. Mem. 2. 10. 3. /3) 
 With gen. of pers. from whom one asks, 
 receives, has, or becomes any thing ; so after 
 diroXauPdveiv Col. 3, 24. 3 John 7 ; Sai/et- 
 feo-3at Matt. 5, 42; f X eiv 1 Cor. 6, 19. 2 
 
C17TO 
 
 77 
 
 Cor. 2, 3. 1 Tim. 3, 7. 1 John 2, 20. 4, 21. 
 (Plut. Mor. II. p. 398.) After epxfo-3ai, Acts 
 3, 19 ; frrdv 1 Thess. 2, 6, see in note 1 ; 
 \appdvtiv Matt. 17, 25. 26, see Winer 51 
 p. 444. edit. 5 ; ^eraXap.j3di>eii> Heb. 6, 7 ; 
 irapaXaft/3dVeti> 1 Cor. 11,23; in anacolu- 
 thon Gal. 2, 6. (Piut. JEm. Paul. 5. Moral. 
 
 11. p. 100.) In all such cases dno implies 
 pr. a receiving by means of some interve 
 ning person or thing ; see Winer 1. c. Also 
 after twai, ytVfcrSai, Rom. 13, 1. 1 Cor. 1, 
 30. So Xen. Hi. 1. 38. y) After passive 
 and neuter verbs, where diro c. gen. marks the 
 remote author or source of the action, not 
 the immediate and direct agent ; the latter 
 idea being denoted by vno or napd, Winer p. 
 444. edit. 5 ; comp. note 2 below. After 
 passive verbs, as dvanaveo-^ai, 2 Cor. 7,13; 
 dnoo fiKvvcr Sai Acts 2, 22 ; StKatouerSeu 
 Matt. 11, 19. Luke 7, 35; e rot/idfeo-Sat 
 Rev. 12, 6 ; /irra/zop<po>cr3ai, Kcftdnep dno 
 Kvpiov nv(vfj,a.TOS 2 Cor. 3, 18 ; 7retpdecr3at 
 James 1, 13. So Jos. Ant. 7. 14. 5 Iva yv& 
 6 Xaoy dno8f8fi /p.evov air^v OTTO TOV na- 
 Tpbs |3acrtXea. Comp. Thuc. 3. 36 yi to/zat 
 dcp ficdo-T&v fXtyovro. See note 2 below. 
 After neuter verbs, as nda-^eiv Matt. 1 6, 21. 
 (Luc. D. Deor. 6. 4.) So yiVeo-3at OTTO TOV 
 3fou 1 Cor. 4, 5 ; also with yfvoiro or the like 
 implied in the formula : x^P is * a "P 1 ? 1 "? 
 a7ro 3eou KT\. Rom. 1,7. 1 Cor. 1, 3. 2 
 Cor. 1, 2. Gal. 1, 3. Eph. 1, 2. 6, 23. 
 Phil. 1,2. al. Here belongs also (po|3eta-3ai 
 dno TWOS to be put in fear from any one, i. e. 
 to be afraid of, to fear, Matt. 10, 28. Luke 
 
 12, 4. Sept. for *) nnn Jer. 1, 17. So 1 
 Mace. 8, 12 ; (poftos dno TWOS Xen. An. 7. 
 2. 37. 
 
 d) Of the motive or inciting cause, espe 
 cially an emotion of mind,/rom, by reason 
 of; so OTTO ToC (popov Matt. 14, 26. Luke 
 21,, 26 ; dno TTJS x a p<*s Luke 24, 41. Acts 
 12, 14. Matt. 13, 44. So Sept. and 1? Ex. 
 2, 23. Plut. Mor. II. p. 101 ^ dno SfiXtW 
 
 TC""- 
 
 e) Of the occasion or incidental cause, 
 from, i. e. because of, by reason of, on ac 
 count of; so after passive verbs, as 071-0- 
 KreiVecrSai Rev. 9, 18 ; Siacrrm peo-Sat Acts 
 11, 19; Karacpepeo-Sat Acts 20, 9; <rfU- 
 trSat Matt. 28, 4 ; o-TrtXouo-Sai Jude 23. 
 Heb. 5, 7 etsakovcrSfis dno Tr/s evXafifias 
 was heard because of his fear of God, his 
 piety ; others as in no. 1. b. 3; see in tv- 
 Xo/3eta. After neuter verbs, as Kot/i<up,a<r3at 
 dno TJJS Xvnrjs Luke 22, 45 ; after (pfvyeiv 
 i. q. to vanish away, Rev. 20, 1 1 ; after verbs 
 implying inability, Luke 19, 3. John 21, 6. 
 Acts 22, 11. So Jos. Ant. 9. 4. 3 a^Xw 
 
 d(p i]s dyvor]o-fw avrov e/ieXXov. Once, 
 oval TCO KocTficf dno TCOV o~Kav8d\<ai> Matt. 
 18, 7. 
 
 f ) Of the instrument or means from or 
 with which any thing is done ; so after 8ia- 
 Kovelv Luke 8, 3 ; yepl^fw 15, 16; ^oprd- 
 feo-3ai 16, 21 ; Tr\ovT(lv Rev. 18, 15 oi 
 irkovTr]o~avTfs dn aurJ)y. Ecclus. 11, 18. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 9. An. 1. 1. 9. 
 
 g) Of the material from or of whicli any 
 thing is made ; Matt. 3, 4 ej/Sv/ia OTTO rpi- 
 X&v Ka/^jyXou. 1 Esdr. 8, 57. Luc. D. Deor. 
 7. 4. Hdot. 7. 65 et/xara dno t-v\a>v mnoir)- 
 fj.eva. 
 
 h) Of the manner; as Matt. 18, 35 tav 
 prf d(pr]Te ... dno T&V KapBiajv vp.a>v, if ye 
 forgive not from your hearts. So OTTO ^u^^j 
 (piXni/ Theophr. Char. 17 or 19. 1. Luke 
 14, 18 rlpf-avro dno /J,ids TrapatretcrSat, i. e. 
 either for OTTO fj.ids yi>u>fj.r]s with one consent, 
 as Philo de Legg. spec. II. p. 311. b ; or for 
 OTTO pids fywvris rvith one voice, as Diod. 
 
 Sic. 16. 10 TO ?rX^3o? <ScT7rep dno p.ias 
 (pavrjs di/e/So^tre. Hence OTTO [itpovs, Lat. 
 ex parte, in part, partly, Rom. 11, 25. 
 15, 15. 24. 2 Cor. 1, 14. 2, 5. So Diod. 
 Sic. 13. 108. 
 
 NOTE 2. In a few instances dno after a 
 passive verb is thought to stand for vno as 
 denoting the immediate agent ; so Luke 9, 
 22 8f I TOV viov TOV di3pa)7rov TroXXa TraSfiv 
 /cat dno8oKip.ao-^fji>ai dno rail/ np(O-{3vTepa>v 
 KT\. 17, 25. Mark 8, 31. But here it is 
 implied that he was to suffer and be reject 
 ed on the part of the elders. i. e. through 
 their machinations and emissaries. James 5, 
 4 6 juicrSo? ... 6 dneo-TfprjfjLfvos d(f) vp.u>v, 
 i. e. by your agents or orders. Rom. 13, 1 
 ft fifj dno 3eoO, see above in no. 2. c. /3. In 
 Luke 6, 18 ot o^Xou/nei/oi ctTro [VTTO] nvfVfjui- 
 T(ov a/caSdprwi , the reading is doubtful, and 
 vno is to be preferred. Very often dno and 
 vno were confounded by copyists ; see 
 Bast ad Greg. Corinth, ed. Schaef. p. 794, 
 823. Schweigh. Not. ad Pol. 1. 34. 8. Wi 
 ner p. 444. n. edit. 5. 
 
 NOTE 3. In composition dno implies : a) 
 Separation, from, off, asunder ; as dnoXvca, 
 dnoTffj,va>. b) Removal, departure, from, 
 away from ; as dnoj3d\\u>, dno[Ba{va>. c) 
 Cessation, leaving off"; as dna\ye co. d) 
 Completeness, in full, thus strengthen 
 ing the simple verb ; as ant^o, dnoXap- 
 /3di/o>, dvroSi/ijo-Ka). e) Almost like a priv. 
 it sometimes reverses the signification of 
 the simple word ; as czrro&oKi/idfo), dnoKa- 
 XVTTTO). Some assign also to dno in comp. 
 the meaning back again, and cite oTroSt Sw/it, 
 dnepxop.ai, and the like. But this sense 
 
78 
 
 lies in the context and circumstances, and 
 not in OTTO itself, -j- 
 
 dTTO/Balvco, f. j3f]crop.ai, (j3aiv(o,~) to go 
 away, to depart, c. OTTO Pol. 23. 11.4. Xen. 
 Mag. Eq. 1. 16. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1 . Spec, to go away from a ship or boat, 
 to disembark, to land, e. g. CTT avruv (ra>v 
 ir\oi<av) Luke 5, 2 ; els rf]v yrjv John 21,9. 
 Pol. 3. 19. 2. Xen. Hell. 1. 1. 18. 
 
 2. Trop. like Lat. evenire, to turn out, to 
 result, c. fls, Luke 21,13 aTrofirjcreTai vp.lv els 
 naprvpiov. Phil. 1,19. Sept. for \ *b ^^\ 
 Job 13, 5. Pol. 1. 71. 2. Xen. Mem. 4. 
 8. 8. 
 
 a.7ro/3aXX, aor. 2 eW/3aXoi/, (/3dXXa>,) 
 .o cast away, to throw off, c. ace. TO I/JLUTLOV 
 Mark 10, 50. So Sept. Is. 1, 30. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 20. 6. Plato Conv. 179. a, TO. Sn\a. 
 Trop. i. q. to lay aside, to lose, e. g. rrjv Trap- 
 prja-iav Heb. 10, 35. So Plato Crit. 44. e, 
 iracrav TTJV ovcriav. Xen. Hell. 6. 2. 9 p.eya 
 dycftov. 
 
 ctTrofiXeTrco, f. ^, ^SXeVo),) to look 
 away, c. tls towards any person or thing, 
 to look steadfastly upon, Pol. 6. 50. 3. Plato 
 Euthyd. 273. b. In N. T. trop. to regard, 
 to have respect to, fls TTJV p.i<T%cnro8ocriav 
 Heb. 1 1, 26. Sept. for nm Ps. 1 1, 4 ; nja 
 Hos. 3, 11. So Pol. 2. 39. T 10. Plato Rep*. 
 545. c. 
 
 dTropXijTOS, ov, 6, 17, adj. (aTrojSdXXw,) 
 to be cast away as worthless ; trop. to be 
 rejected, refused, despised, 1 Tim. 4, 4. 
 Horn. II. 3. 65. Luc. Tim. 37 OVTOI diro- 
 8\rjrd fieri TO. <>pa rd irapd rov Atdy. Plato 
 Phsedr. 260. a. 
 
 a7ro/3oX?7, fj S , T), ((iTj-o^aXXw,) a casting 
 away, e. g. T>V oTrXwj/ Plato Rep. 943. e. 
 In N. T. trop. a casting away, rejection, 
 Rom. 11, 15. Spec, loss of life Acts 27, 22. 
 So Hdian. 4. 14. 8. Plato Phaedr. 246. d. 
 
 aTToyivopai, aor. 2 aweyfvo^v, (yLvo- 
 /LIOI,) to be away from, c. gen. TTJS p-ax^s 
 Hdot. 9. 69 ; to become absent, to depart, 
 Plato Tim. 82. b ; hence to depart from life, 
 to die, Thuc. 2. 34. In N. T. trop. to die 
 to any thing, to renounce, c. dat. rais dp.ap- 
 riais 1 Pet. 2, 24 ; comp. Rom. 6, 4 sq. 
 
 d,7ro<ypa(f>r) : f) s , f), (a7roypd<&>,) a writ 
 ing off, a register, enrolment, as of property, 
 Plato Legg. 745. d ; of persons capable of 
 military service Pol. 2. 23. 9 ; of citizens, 
 their names and property, a census, Jos. 
 Ant. 18. 1. 1. Hence in N. T. an enrol 
 ment, census, Luke 2, 2. Acts 5, 37. In 
 the latter passage it included persons and 
 oropertv, Jos, 1. c. In the former it may 
 
 have been a mere enumeration of persons ; 
 see more in art. Kvprjvios. 
 
 diroypd(f)w, f. ^ w , (ypd^w,) to write 
 off, to copy, to delineate a coast, Hdot. 3. 
 136; to write down, Sept. for aro Judg. 8, 
 14. In N. T. to write off in a register, to 
 inscribe, to enrol; Pass. part. Heb. 12,23 
 uTToyeypanfifvcuv lv ovpavols, in allusion to 
 the book of life, d^n "iBO Ps. 69, 29. 
 (Hdot. 7. 100. Xen. Hell, s" 3. 11.) Mid. 
 to enrol oneself, to give one s name to tho 
 census, Luke 2, 1. 3. 5. So Pol. 2. 17. 10. 
 Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 8. 
 
 dTToSet/cvvfjii, f. a | to> (8e/ Kro/Uj ) to 
 point away from other objects to or at one, 
 to point out, to show, Sept Job 33, 21. Xen. 
 Hell. 4. 4. 8. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1 . Of persons, to show forth, to set forth, 
 to declare, with two ace. of object and pre 
 dicate ; see Winer 5 32. 4. b. Kiihner 5 280. 
 4. 1 Cor. 4, 9 6 Seos fip.ds rovs aTrocrrdXous 
 eo-xdrovs dnedftgfv KT\. With ace. and STL, 
 2 Thess. 2, 4 aTrofteiKvvVTa. tavrov ori earl 
 Seo y. So c. dupl. acc. Jos. Ant. 6. 3. 3. 
 Hdian. 3. 9. 1. Xen. An. 1. 1. 2. 
 
 2. Genr. to show forth by arguments, to 
 prove, c. acc. Acts 25, 7 a OVK i o-xi>oi> dno- 
 dflgai. Pass. part. aTroSeSeiy/neVos Swa/ieo-i 
 approved by miracles, proved to be what he 
 claims to be, Acts 2, 22. Plut. non posse 
 suav. vivi sec. Epic. 2. Xen. Hell. 7. 1. 23. 
 
 a.7TOO6t^9j fats, 17, (arroSf IKW/J.I,) a show 
 ing forth, manifestation, demonstration, 1 
 Cor. 2, 4. Pol." 5. 16. 7. Xen. Mem. 4. 
 6. 13. 
 
 dTroSeKaTOCOj , f. wo-ta, (SeKaroco,) to 
 tithe off, i. e. 
 
 1. Of things, to pay or give tithes of, c. 
 acc. Luke 18, 12 aTroSeKarw irdvra Sera KTCO- 
 pai. 11,42. Matt. 23, 23. Sept. for *\uy 
 Pi. and Hiph. Gen. 28, 22. Deut. 26, 12* 
 
 2. Of persons, to take or levy tithes of 
 any one, Heb. 7, 5, comp. v. 8. Comp. Sept. 
 for *iia3> 1 Sam. 8, 15. 17. 
 
 aTToSe/cro?, ov, 6, rj, adj. (ojrofie xo/wu,) 
 accepted, acceptable, 1 Tim. 2, 3. 5, 4. 
 Hesych. dnoSfKrov firalverov. 
 
 i, f. 8e|o/xat, Mid. depon. 
 i,) pr. to accept or receive as in full; 
 hence 
 
 1. Of persons, to receive gladly, to wel 
 come, c. acc. Luke 8, 40. Acts 15, 4. 18, 
 27. 28, 30. 2 Mace. 3, 9. Pol. 3. 66. 8. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 18. 
 
 2. Of things, to receive, to approve, c. acc 
 as TOV \ayov Acts 2, 41 ; acc. impl. fiera 
 
 Acts 24, 3. 1 Mace. 9,71. 
 
79 
 
 Diod. Sic. 4. 42, 46. Plato Phaed. 41. p. 
 92. a. 
 
 aTTO&Jj/iea), 5, f. faa), (dTro Sq/ior,) to be 
 away from one s people or country, Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 3. 12. In N. T. genr. to go abroad, 
 to go on one s travels, absol. Matt. 21, 33. 
 25, 14 (comp. Luke 19, 12). Matt. 25, 15. 
 Mark 12, 1. Luke 20, 9; with eiy n of 
 place Luke 15, 13. So Jos. Ant. 8. 13. 5. 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 5. 1 ; ds c. ace. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 67. Plato Crit. 54. a. 
 
 aTToSrjfJios, ov, 6, f], adj. (8J}/ior,) away 
 from one s people or country, absent in for 
 eign lands, abroad, Mark 13, 34. Pind. 
 Pyth. 4. 8. Artemid. 2. 8. 
 
 aTTO&i&afu, f. Swo-o), (S/Sw/it,) impf. 3 
 pers. plur. dirf8i8ow Acts 4, 33, see Winer 
 5 14. 1. c. Buttm. 5 106. n. 5; aor. 1 dne- 
 flwAca Luke 9, 42, see Buttm. 106. 11. 
 5 107. n. I. 8 ; aor. 2 drreoW, Opt. aTroSw^j/ 
 2 Tim. 4, 14, a late form, Buttm. 5 107. n. 
 I. 3. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 345 sq. 
 
 1 . to give away, to give up or over to an 
 other, e. g. 
 
 a) Pr. to deliver to any one, with ace. 
 and dat. Luke 4, 20 TO /3ij3Xi oi> dnoSovs r<3 
 {rrrrjpeTTj. 9, 42. In these two passages 
 some find the idea of back, again; but this 
 lies in the circumstances, and not in OTTO. 
 Pass. Matt. 27, 58 eVeXeuo-fi/ dnoSoSfjvai TO 
 vo)[j.a. Trop. OTffpavov TTJS 8iKatocrvv7]s 2 
 Tim. 4, 8. Sept. for -jnj 2 Sam. 3, 14. 
 Gen. 30, 26. So Pol. 1. 13. Xen. Cyr. 
 4. 5. 26. Hell. 2. 2. 9. Trop. of testimony, 
 to give forth, to give, to render, c. ace. TO 
 fiapTvpiov Acts 4, 33. (So SpKovs d-rrod. 
 Dem. 234. 5.) Also djro8i86vai \6yov to give 
 account, to render an account, pr. Luke 1 6, 
 2; trop. Matt. 12, 36. Acts 19, 40. Heb. 
 13, 17. 1 Pet. 4, 5. [Rom. 14, 12.] So Sept. 
 pr. Dan. 6, 2. Plut. Mor. II. p. 40 \6yovs . 
 
 b) Of trees, to give forth fruit, to yield, 
 c. ace. Rev. 22, 2. Trop. Heb. 12, 11. 
 Sept. pr. for ( n3 Lev. 26, 4. Of the earth, 
 Hdot. 1. 193. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 38. 
 
 c) Mid. to give away of one s own, sc. for 
 a price, to sell, with ace. and gen. of price, 
 Acts 5, 8 (I Toaovrov TO ^topiov a7r &ocr3f. 
 Also with ace. and dvri c. gen. of price 
 Heb. 12, 16 ; ace. et fls Acts 7, 9. Sept. 
 for "isa c. ace. et gen. Am. 2, 6 ; ace. et 
 dat. Gen. 37, 27 ; c. fls v. 36. So c. ace. 
 et gen. Dem. 349. 24. Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 48 ; 
 ace. et tls Hdot. 2. 56. 
 
 2. to give in full, to render fully, to pay 
 off, e. g. 
 
 a) In a pecuniary sense, with ace. and 
 dat. as wages, Matt. 20, 8 djr68os avrois 
 
 TOV fiurZov. Sept. for -,n3 Deut. 24, 15. 
 (Xen. 1. 2. 12.) Of rents, TOVS Kapnovs 
 Matt. 21, 41 ; of tribute and the like, Matt. 
 22, 21. Mark 12, 17. Luke 20, 25. Rom. 
 13, 7. (So TOVS (popovs Jos. Ant. 9. 13. 3. 
 Xen. Hell. 3. 1. 11.) Of debts, to pay off 
 or up in full, c. ace. et dat. Matt. 18, 28. 29. 
 Luke 10, 35; ace. simpl. Matt. 5, 26. 18, 
 25 bis. 26. 30. 34. Luke 7, 42. 12, 59. 19, 
 8. Sept. for 2^cn Num. 5, 7. 8. So Dem. 
 911. 10. Trop. of duties, obligations, c. 
 ace. et dat. 1 Tim. 5, 4 d/ioi/3as d-n-o8i86vai 
 TO~IS -rrpoyovois, see in art. dp-oiftf). 1 Cor. 7, 
 3. (Hdian. 3. 6. 6 dp.oipds. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 2. 13 xaptv.) Of vows, Matt. 5, 33 aTroSw- 
 o-ets TW Kupi w TOVS o/3Kovs o~ov. Sept. for 
 eittj Deut. 23 , 22. So Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 10. 
 
 b) Trop. to render to any one good or 
 evil, to requite, to reward. o) Of God or 
 his minisers, with dat. and KOTO TI, Matt. 
 16, 27 aTToSwcrei e /cdo-Tw Kara TTJV Trpaiv 
 avToC. Rom. 2, 6. Rev. 22, 12. Sept. for 
 niltjri Prov. 24, 12. (Ecclus. 11, 26.) So 
 in the sense of rewarding, with dat. and eV 
 TW 0ai/epw Matt. 6, 4. 6. 18 ; in the sense 
 of punishing, c. dat. et KOTO 2 Tim. 4, 14 ; 
 dat. or absol. Rev. 18, 6 bis, coaip. Is. 40, 2. 
 61,7. Sept. for a^li Ps. 94, 23. Ecclus. 
 12, 6. y3) Genr. of evil, to render, to re 
 quite, with ace. and dat. and also dvri c. 
 gen. Rom. 12, 17 p.rj8evl KUKOV dvri KUKOV 
 dno8i86vTfs. 1 Thess. 5, 15 ; dat. once 
 1 Pet. 3, 9. 
 
 aTToblopL^O)) f. io-a>, (Scop/fto,) pr. to 
 set off by drawing a boundary through or 
 between; hence to divide off, to separate, 
 i. e. to create schism, c. ace. eavTovs Jude 
 19. Comp. dfpoplfa Gal. 2, 12. Found 
 only in N. T. 
 
 reject on proof or trial, to disapprove, to dis 
 allow ; so of things, c. ace. Matt. 21,42 
 Xfeop ov dnf8oKip.acrav ol oiKo8op.ovvTts, and 
 so Mark 12, 10. Luke 20, 17. 1 Pet. 2, 7, 
 quoted from Ps. 118, 22, where Sept. for 
 OXtt ; also 1 Pet. 2, 4. So Hdian. 4. 3. 21. 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 16. Of persons, to reject, 
 to refuse ; so of Jesus rejected by the Jews, 
 Pass, with dno c. gen. see art. OTTO note 2. 
 Mark 8, 31 aTroSoKt/iacrSfJi at dno TU>V rrpfo~- 
 pvTe pvv. Luke 9, 22. 17, 25. Absol. of 
 Esau Heb. 12, 17. Sept. for 05 J er . 6, 
 30. So Pol. 3. 86. 3. Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 36. 
 
 aTTOOO^/, ijs, 17, (aVro&exo/iat,) a receiv 
 ing in full Thuc. 4. 81 ; reception of a 
 guest Diod. Sic. 4. 51. In N. T. trop. 
 
80 
 
 reception, acceptance, I Tim. 1, 15. 4, 9. 
 So Pol. 1. 5. 5. Diod. Sic. 4. 84. 
 
 oy, T], (a7rori 377/ii,) a putting 
 off, a laying aside, trop. 1 Pet. 3, 21. 2 Pet. 
 1, 14. Plato, a laying by for preservation, 
 Legg. 844. d. 
 
 dTrcferjKr/, ys, TJ, (aTTort S^t,) place of 
 laying by or up, a repository, e. g. of arms, 
 an arsenal Hdian. 7. 11. 14. Thuc. 6. 97; 
 a treasury Sept. 1 Chr. 29, 8. In N. T. a 
 storehouse for grain, a granary, barn, Matt. 
 3, 12. 6, 26. 13, 30. Luke 3, 17, 12, 18. 
 24. So Sept. for 0X Jer. 50, 26. 
 
 a7ro&rja-avpl&, f. ia-ca, (Svo-avpifa, ) 
 to treasure away, to lay up in store, trop. c. 
 ace. 1 Tim. 6, 19; comp. Matt 6,20. Pr. 
 Ecclus. 3, 4. Diod. Sic. 5. 40. 
 
 aTTo^Tu /Stw, f. ^co, (3Xi /3co,) to press 
 wholly, from every side, to crowd, c. ace. 
 Luke 8, 45. Sept. for ynls Num. 22, 25. 
 Plut. JEm. Paul. 14 ; comp. Jos. Ant. 2. 
 5. 2 fiorpvs . . . aTToSXiflfiv els (pid\rjv. Diod. 
 Sic. 3. 62. 
 
 f. Sai/oO/wu, (3i7<rKa>,) 
 aor. 2 dnfSavov, to die off or out, to become 
 quite dead ; stronger than Swjo-Kca and com 
 monly used instead of it, i. e. to die. 
 
 1. Pr. and genr. a) Of persons who 
 die a natural death, absol. Matt. 9, 24. 22, 
 24. 27. Mark 9, 26. 15, 44. John 4, 47. 
 Phil. 1, 21. al. saep. Luke 8, 42 (cat avrrj 
 dir(%vr)<rKv and she was dying ; so from the 
 force of the imperfect tense. Heb. 7, 8 
 aTroSj^o-Koirey uVSpwTroi dying men, mortal. 
 Rev. 14, 13 ot ev Kvpico dncftvTjcrKOVTes those 
 who die in the Lord, believing and tmsting in 
 him, i. e. as true Christians. Sept. for p.sin 
 Gen. 2, 17. 3, 3. 4. So ^Eschin. 20. 23. 
 Xen. Hell. 3. 1. 10. b) Of a violent 
 death, to die, to be put to death ; of persons, 
 Acts 21, 13. 25, 11. Rom. 5, 6. 7. 8. 14, 
 15. 1 Thess. 5, 10. Heb. 11, 37. So as a 
 punishment, John 19, 7. Heb. 10, 28. With 
 dat. Rom. 6, 10 777 dpapria djrf^avfv e 0a- 
 7ra he died for sin once, i. e. on account of 
 sin. With c. gen. of cause, Rev. 8, 1 1 
 aTr&avov (K rwv iiddrmv. Sept. for rVlM 
 Deut. 17, 6. 12. (Hdian. 3. 15. 8. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 8. 9 ; comp. 6 e /c TrXnyfjs ^dvaros 
 Plut. Arat. 26.) Matt. 26, 35 K&V der, M f a-vv 
 trot a7ro3ai/eii/ though I should die with thee ; 
 so Luc. Tim. 43 ty 8frj dno^avelv. Jos. 
 Ant. 6. 6. 2 KO.V dircftaveiv Se ot. Spoken of 
 animals, Matt. 8, 32. Rev. 8, 9. 16, 3. 
 c) Of any kind of death ; c. dat. Rom. 14, 
 7. 8 ovSelj eavT<a aTroSv^crKft . . . TOJ Kvpia) 
 KT\. for oneself, for the Lord, 
 
 i. e. not as his own but as the Lord s, i. q. 
 TOV Kvpiov eV/neV. 1 Cor. 15, 22. Heb. 9, 27. 
 11,4. d) Implying constant exposure to 
 death; 1 Cor. 15, 31 *a3 ^ e paj dno Svr]- 
 O-KW. 2 Cor. 6, 9. Comp. Sept. and n*a 
 Gen. 48,21. 
 
 2. Trop. of eternal death, comp. the 
 second death Rev. 20, 14. So John 1 1, 26 
 6 Tri.(rTfvo)v (Is (p.e ov pr) dno^avr) els rot 
 aluiva, comp. v. 25, John 6, 50 comp. v. 51. 
 Rom. 7, 10 comp. v. 9. Rom. 8, 13. 
 
 3. Trop. c. dat. to die to any thing, to 
 renounce it, to be no longer under its influ 
 ence and power ; Rom. 6, 2 dnf^dvofj-fv rrj 
 duaprla. Gal. 2, 19 vofua. So with dat. 
 impl. Rom. 6, 7 6 yap diro Savtov (sc. TJJ 
 afjiapria V. 2. 6) SefiiKai wrai GTTO rrjs a/jiap- 
 rias, he icho is dead to sin is alone freed 
 from sin. Col. 3, 3 direZdvere yap sc. rols 
 eVt rr/s yrjs, comp. v. 2 ; absol. Rev. 3, 2. 
 Once with diro c. gen. to die from any 
 thing, to be delivered from it, Col. 2, 20. 
 See in dno no. 1. b. a. 
 
 4. Of vegetable nature, to die ; e. g. 
 trees, Jude 12 SeVSpa . . . 8ls diro^avovra 
 twice dead. Of seeds, trop. i. q. to be decom 
 posed, dissolved, John 12, 24. 1 Cor. 15, 
 36. + 
 
 f. diroKaTao-Trjo-a, (KCL- 
 , la-njfj.i, ) Pass. aor. 1 dnoKaTfa-Td- 
 ^rjv, or dTT(KaTTTd%rjv with double augm. 
 Buttm. { 86. n. 5. Kiihner 5 126. There 
 is likewise a form of the Pres. contr. in 
 -dot Mark 9, 12 ; comp. KaSiora Dan. 2, 21, 
 urra. Hdot. 4. 103. Buttm. j 106. n. 5. 
 5 107. I. 2. Also a Pres. in-ai/w Acts 1,6. 
 Pol. 3. 98. 9, found only in late writers, 
 Buttm. ^ 112. 10. To set or put down 
 fully ; and so to bring fully into any state 
 or condition; to make, constitute, establish 
 fully ; see in /caS/crr^t. In N. T. only 
 trans, and Pass, and spoken of recovery 
 from a state of disease, decay, or the like ; 
 hence i. q. to restore, to re-establish, viz. 
 a) From disease; Pass. Luke 6, 10 xal 
 aTTOKarecrraS^ rj %t\p avrov vyirjS las fj &X\rj, 
 lit. and his hand was established (made) quite 
 whole as the other, i. q. was restored whole. 
 Matt. 12, 13. Mark 3, 5. 8, 25. Sept. for 
 asittS Ex. 4, 7. So Diod. Sic. 1.25. Xen. Lac. 
 6. 3. b) Of the expected restoration and 
 glory of the Jewish theocracy in the times 
 of the Messiah; Act. c. ace. Matt. 17, 11. 
 Mark 9, 12. Acts 1, 6. Sept. for 21^ Ez. 
 16, 57. So 1 Mace. 15, 3. Pol. 25. 1. 1. 
 c) Of restoration to one s friends and 
 country, Pass. Heb. 13, 19. Sept. for 
 n Jer. 16, 15. So Jos. Ant 11. 1. 
 
81 
 
 1 tls TTJV TTorptov yfjv. Pol. 8. 29. (J els 
 olxov. 
 
 ), f. ^/-co, (KuXwrno,) to 
 uncover, Sept. for fiba Ruth 3, 1. 7. Hdian. 
 7. 4. 10. In N. T. trop. 
 
 1. to reveal, to bring to light, to make 
 known or manifest ; so of God or Christ as 
 revealing what was before unknown, c. ace. 
 et dat. Matt. 11, 25 dneKaXv^as aura vrjirl- 
 ois. Luke 10, 21. Phil. 3, 15; dat. c. ace. 
 impl. Matt. 11, 27. 16, 17. Luke 10, 22. 
 1 Cor. 2, 10. Also Gal. 1, 16 dtroKaXv^ai. 
 TW vlbv avTov ev (p.oi, i. e. in my soul, spi 
 rit, consciousness. Sept. for ^ 5 J er - H> 
 20. So genr. Plato Gorg. 455. d. 460. a. 
 Pass, of things, to be revealed, made known, 
 absol. Matt. 10, 26. Luke 12, 2. Rom. 1, 
 18. Gal. 3, 23. 1 Pet. 1,5. 5, 1 ; c. dat. 
 John 12, 38. Spec, from God, c. dat. 1 Cor. 
 14, 30. Eph. 3, 5. 1 Pet. 1, 12. Also c. 
 TWOS of place whence, Luke 2, 35 ; eV c. 
 dat. of instr. 1 Cor. 3, 13 ; fls TJ^US in our 
 behalf Rom. 8, 18. With eVc and ds, Rom. 
 1, 17 dinaiocrvvr} 3foO . . . aTTOKaXinrTfTai (K 
 7>i(TT(u>s tls Tricrriv, where tK Trurrecoy from 
 or through faith marks the condition ; and 
 fls TT KTTIV unto faith marks either the ob 
 ject, i. q. (Is TOVS TrioTfvovras, comp. 3, 22 ; 
 or, better, the purpose, i. q./or the further 
 ance of faith, comp. rfj dvopia fls rr/v dvo- 
 liiav 6, 19 ; also 2 Cor. 2, 16. 
 
 2. Pass, of persons, to be revealed, to ap- 
 j)ear, e. g. the Son of man Luke 17, 30 ; 
 antichrist 2 Thess. 2, 3. 6. 8. Sept. for 
 nba of Jehovah 1 Sam. 3, 21. 
 
 uncovering, Sept. 1 Sam. 20, 30. Plut. JEmil. 
 Paul. 14. In N. T. only trop. 
 
 1. a revealing, revelation, manifestation; so 
 from God of things before unknown, Rom. 
 16, 25 Kara duoKaXv^nv fivorrjpiov. 1 Cor. 
 14, 6. 26. 2 Cor. 12, 1. 7. Gal. 1, 12. 2, 2. 
 Eph. 3, 3. (Comp. Ecclus. 11, 27. 42, 1.) 
 Eph. 1, 17 irvfvfj.a tz7roKaXv\^ecos a spirit (f 
 revelation, i. e. which can fathom and un 
 fold the deep things of God. Rom. 2, 5 eV 
 ilfj-fpa . . . dvoKaXv^fcas SiKaioKpivias TOV 
 SeoO. 8, 19 f] dTroicd\v\lsis TOJI/ vlu>v TOV 3eoC, 
 put for f) UTTOK. rrjs 86rjs TOIV via>v TOV 3fo{5, 
 comp. v. 18. 21. Of the Messiah, Luke 2, 
 32 (pws (Is a7roKd\v\j/iv f3va>i> a light for re 
 velation to the Gentiles, to reveal to them the 
 will of God in the gospel. Once of future 
 events, revelation, apocalypse, Rev. 1,1. 
 
 2. Of persons, manifestation, appearance, 
 BO of Christ s future coming, 2 Thess. 1, 7. 
 I Cor. 1,7. 1 Pet. 1,7. 13. 4, 13. 
 
 CnrOKOTTTOJ 
 
 dTTOfcapaSoKM, as, fj, earnest expecta 
 tion,Rom. 8, 19. Phil. 1, 20. It comes 
 from diroKapa8oKfto, i. q. 777 K(pa\jj 7jy>o/3Xe - 
 Treii> Etym. Mag. i. e. to look away towards 
 any thing with the head bent forward ; 
 hence to await, to expect earnestly, Aquil. 
 for bbinnn p s . 37, 7. Jos. B. J. 3. 7. 26. 
 Pol. 18. 31. 4. 
 
 aTTo/caraXXacrcrco v. -rrtu, f. w , (*a 
 raXXatro-co.) to reconcile fully, c. ace. Col. 1, 
 21 ; ace. and dat. Eph. 2, 16 ; ace. and fls 
 eavrov Col. 1, 20; comp. Eph. 1, 10. So 
 /caroXXao-o-to c. dat. Xen. An. 1. 6. 2; c. 
 
 oy Tiva Jos. Ant. 14. 11. 3. 
 
 f(as , 17, 
 
 fu.) pr.full establishment ; hence restoration, 
 restitution, from decay or ruin ; Acts 3, 21 
 Xpovoi cnroKaTfKrrdo-eats Trdvraiv, i. q. Kaipoi 
 dva^vgecos in v. 19 ; cornp. Heb. 9, 10. 
 Jos. Ant. 11. 4. 6. Pol. 4. 23. 1. Plato Ax. 
 370. b. 
 
 aTTOKlfJiai, f. Kfiao^ai, (j<e?fiat,) to be 
 laid away, laidup, in store or for preserva 
 tion; Luke 19,20 dnoKfipfvrjv v crovSap/o). 
 So Dem. 1040. 26. Xen. An. 5. 4. 27 a-lrov 
 dnoKflfjifvov. Trop. of things, c. dat. of 
 pers. to be laid up, prepared, appointed, for 
 any one, Col. 1,5. 2 Tim. 4, 8. (2 Mace. 
 12, 45. Pint. Lucull. 24.) Of death, Heb. 
 9, 27 aTTuKfiTcu Tols dv^panrois arra^ d;ro3a- 
 vtlv. So Dion. Hal. Ant. 5. 8 TO IS Kaxovpyois 
 
 0aX)j.) to behead, c. ace. Matt. 14, 10. Mark 
 6, 1 6. 27. Luke 9, 9. Arr. Epict. 1 . 1 . 29 imb 
 TOV N/poj^or aTroKecpaXtcrSiji/ai. Dion Cass. 
 71. 28. Not found in Attic writers, Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 341. 
 
 tt7TOK\e/a>, f. e/o-o), ((cXeiw,) to shut off" 
 from, to exclude, TIVO. irvXtw Hdot. 5. 104. 
 In N. T. to shut fully, to shut fast, e. g. 
 TTJV Svpav Luke 13, 25. Sept. for 150 Gen. 
 19. 10. So Hdian. 1. 12. 16. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 1. 16. 
 
 aTTO/coTTTG), f. i^-aj, (KOTTTQ),) to cut off, 
 e. g. a member of the body, c. ace. Mark 9, 
 43. 45. John 18, 10. 26 ; the ropes of a boat 
 Acts 27, 32. Sept. for rvnS 1 Sam. 31,9. 
 So ^El. V. H. 2. 9. Xen. Cyr. 7. 3. 8. 
 Mid. Gal. 5, 12 o<pe\ov nal dnoKu^ovrai, 
 spoken of Judaizing teachers, would that for 
 themselves they icould (not only circumcise 
 but) even cut off sc. the parts usually cir 
 cumcised, i. e. make themselves eunuchs 
 comp. the allusions to their impurity in vv. 
 13. 19. 24. So Chrysost. d fiovXovrai, /iq 
 U.QVOV, aXXa KOI 
 
irreV3a>o-ai>. Jerome : Si putantsibi hoc pro- 
 desse, non solum circumcidantur, sed etiam 
 abscindantur. Si enim exspoliatio membri 
 proficit, multo magis abolitio. So Sept. and 
 rn? Deut. 23, 1. Arr. Epict. 2. 20. 19 ol 
 aTTOKOTvrofJLevoL ras ye Trpcfivfiias TO.? 
 TU>V dvdpatv aTroKo^acrSat ov Svvavrai. Lu- 
 cian Eun. 8. Hesych. rdXXos, 6 diroKonos, 
 fjroi 6 (vvovxos. Others : would that they 
 might cut themselves off sc. from the Chris 
 tian community, separate themselves. But 
 this is feeble ; and besides, KOI here implies 
 antithetic gradation from \. 11. 
 
 arcs, TO, aTroKpii/o/iai, a 
 response, sentence, Jos. Ant. 14. 10. 6. JEl. 
 H. An. 9. 15. In N. T. TO aTroKpi/xa rov 
 Samrou, the death-response, sentence of ckath, 
 i. e. utter despair of life, 2 Cor. 1,9; comp. 
 v. 8. So Hesych. 
 
 a,7TOKpivofj.ai, Mid. depon. (*piW) from 
 Act. air o K p iv a to separate from some 
 thing else, Theophr. de Caus. Plant. 1. 
 6 oivos ooyxr/i \afj.j3dvfi orav direKpfaT) TI 
 v8a.Tmbfs avrov. Plato Polit. 303. d ; to 
 distinguish, to make different, Hdot. 1. 194 ; 
 to select or choose out from, Hdot. 6. 130 ; 
 to judge off , i. e. to reject after inquiry, Plato 
 Legg. 751. d. Mid. to give response, as ex 
 pressing one s judgment or sentence after 
 inquiry and deliberation, e. g. kings to sup 
 pliants Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 37 ; magistrates or 
 others to ambassadors Xen. An. 2. 1. 9, 10 ; 
 an oracle Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 16. Hence in 
 N. T. Mid. genr. to respond, to answer ; 
 with aor. 1 dirfupivdp.^ Luke 23, 9. al. 
 Pass. aor. 1 an-f^p/Styi , fut. 1 a7roKpi3ijo-o- 
 pai, the two latter forms being found only 
 in late writers (Diod. Sic. 4. 31. Luc. De 
 mon. 26), and censured by the grammari 
 ans, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 108. 
 
 1 . Pr. to answer, to reply, e. g. a) As a 
 judge, or to complaints, charges, etc. c. inf. 
 Acts 25, 4 6 fifv ovv $rj<TTOs dneKptirj, TTJ- 
 oe7o-3cu TOV Hai/Xov KT\. (Xen. Hell. 2. 2. 
 18.) With Trpos nva on Acts 25, 16 ; dat. 
 John 5, 17. Col. 4, 6; dat. and \tyovrfs 
 Matt. 25, 37. b) To an inquiry, e. g. c. 
 dat. Mark 11, 30. 12, 28. 34. Luke 22, 68. 
 (Plato Farm. 137. b.) So with ace. and dat. 
 Matt. 15, 23 6 8e OVK drreKpfer) avrfj Xo yoi . 
 22, 46. Mark 14, 40 ; ace. simpl. ovdtv 
 Matt. 26, 62. 27, 12. Mark 14, 61. (Ace. 
 and dat. Xen. An. 1. 4. 14.) So with dat 
 of pers. and Trpos TI. Matt. 27, 14 OVK dire- 
 cpiST/ avT<n Trpos ovSe Iv pfjfj.a. (Trpos TI Plato 
 Gorg. 447. c.) Other constructions are : 
 anf Kptir) Koi eiTTfv nvTols John 2,19; UTTO- 
 
 eiy fl-rrev Matt. 16, 16. 17, 17; di 
 Seir fiTTtv avTols Matt. 11,4. 13, 11. 19, 
 4 ; dnoKp&fls Ti-pos OVTOVS fine Luke 6, 3. 
 c) To a request, entreaty, exhortation, or 
 the like, in various phrases : d-rroKpftf Is X- 
 ycav Matt. 25, 9. Luke 23, 40; d-n-oxpftds 
 (iTTfv Tivi Matt. 12, 39. 48. 13, 37. Mark 
 10, 20 ; dTTOKptifls el-rre (e^jj) Matt. 4, 4. 
 8, 8. 15, 13; drrfKptir) KOI \eyei (flnev) 
 avTM Mark 7, 28. John 2, 18. 3, 9 ; GTTO- 
 Kp&fls elirev TTpos avTov Matt. 3, 15 ; inrfupi- 
 37 Trpos avrov X/yo>j/ Luke 4, 4 ; diroKpiSf Is 
 Trpos avTovs f?n( 14, 5. 
 
 2. By Hebr. like H3S>, to speak up, to be 
 gin to speak, to speak, perh. with reference 
 to what has been said by another, but not 
 recorded ; see Heb. Lex. art. <"!35> I. no. 2. 
 So c. dat. John 5, 17 ; Trpos TWO. Acts 3, 
 12; also dnoKpftfls erne (Xe y) Matt. 11, 
 25. Mark 12, 35. Luke 1, 60 ; id. c. dat. 
 Matt. 17, 4. 26, 63. 28, 5. Mark 9, 5. 10, 
 51. 11,14; diTfKpi^rj Xe ywi/ p.oi Rev. 7, 13 ; 
 drroKpi?5e\s etrre Trpos nva Luke 14, 3. So 
 Sept. and Si Deut. 26, 5. 27, 14. Cant. 
 2, 10. Is. 14, 10. al. 1 Mace. 8, 19. -f 
 
 i. an an 
 
 swer, a reply, Luke 2, 47. 20, 26. John 1, 
 22. 19, 9. Sept. for HWa Job 32, 5. 
 Diod. Sic. 14. 25. Xen. OZc. 12. 20. 
 
 ), f. -^cu, (*cpv7rr<B,) to hide 
 away, to conceal ; c. ace. TO dpyvpiov Matt. 
 25, 18. So 2 Mace. -10, 37. Xen. An. 4. 4. 
 11. Trop. to hide, i. e. not to reveal or 
 make known, e. g. TO p-vo-T^piov TO dnoKf- 
 Kpvnp.(vov Eph. 3, 9. Col. 1, 26.; 17 <ro<pia rj 
 dTTOKfKp. 1 Cor. 2, 7. (Plato Theaet. 155. e.) 
 With ace. and UTTO c. gen. of pers. Matt. 
 11, 25 drrfKpvijfas Tdvra UTTO <ro<p)v. Luke 
 10, 21. (Comp. eKpvftrj UTT avTov Ecclus. 
 42, 20.) Sept. for D^sn 2 K. 4, 27; 
 l^non p s . 119, 19. So Dem. 73. 17. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 4. 1. 
 
 d7ro/cpv<j)0<>, ov, 6, f], adj. (aTroKpvTrrw,) 
 hidden away, hid, pr. Eurip. Here. F. 1071. 
 In N. T. trop. a) not revealed, not 
 known, Mark 4, 22. Luke 8, 17. So Sept. 
 Dan. 2, 22. Xen. Conv. 8. 11. b) laid 
 up, treasured up, Col. 2, 3. So Sept. and 
 jiaBB Is. 45, 3 ; pr. 1 Mace. 1, 23. 
 
 aTTOKTelvco, f. KTfva, (AcretVo).) also Pres 
 d.TroKTvva> in later editions Rev. 6, 11, as 
 elsewhere in Mss. and Sept. Dan. 2, 13. 
 Hab. 1,17: 1 Esdr. 4, 7. Wisd. 16, 14, a 
 form used by the later Greeks, who often 
 resolved tiv into tw, see Greg. Corinth, ed. 
 Schaef. p. 588, 597. Sturz de Dial. Alex. p. 
 119, 128. Winer p. 94. ed. 5. Part. plur. 
 
83 
 
 genit. aTroKTfiKJVTcav Matt. 10, 28. Luke 12, 
 4 in some editions, is prob. corrupted for 
 diroKT(iv6vT(i>v, or better for diroKTfvvovTuv 
 as found in some Mss. and editions ; see 
 Winer 1. c. Pass. aor. 1 aneKrav^v Matt. 
 16, 21. Mark 8, 31. al. is also a late form; 
 comp. Dion Cass. 65. 4 ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
 36,756. Buttm. {101. n. 6. {114 /cretW 
 Ausf. Sprachl. II. p. 227. Winer 1. c. 
 
 1. to kill off, to slay outright, i. q. KTfivco 
 strengthened ; so of persons, to kill, to slay, 
 c. ace. Matt. 10, 28. Mark 12, 5. 8. Luke 
 
 13, 31. John 16, 2. Acts 21, 31. al. saep. 
 John 8, 22 prjTi dnoKTevfl tavrov ; will he 
 kill himself? Subj. Matt 21, 38 dTro/cretW 
 p.fv avrov lei us kill him. Mark 12, 7. Luke 
 20, 14 ; see Buttm. 139. m. 3. Pass. Rev. 
 9, 18 see in -OTTO no. 3. e, and note 1. Once 
 of a falling tower, Luke 13, 4. Sept. for 
 ^ Gen. 4, 8 ; n^ari Gen. 18, 25 ; ^SH 
 Jo?h. 11, 11. So Hd ian. 2. 12. 1. Xen. 
 An. 2. 3. 19. Spoken of death as a punish 
 ment, to kill, to put to death, c. ace. Matt. 
 
 14, 5. Mark 8, 31. Luke 9, 22. John 5, 18. 
 Acts 3, 15. Rom. 11, 3. 1 Thess. 2, 15. al. 
 saep. With eV 3aj>dra> added like Heb. inf. 
 absol. Rev. 2, 23. Sept. for rnari Num. 
 35, 19. 21. So Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 18. Plato 
 Gorg. 24. p. 468. d. 
 
 2. Trop. to kill, to destroy, e. g. a) 
 With ace. ^vxnv Ifa Mark 3, 4. With 
 ace. TT)v "^VXTIV the soul, ,i. q. to bring under 
 sentence of eternal death, Matt. 10, 28, 
 comp. Luke 12, 5 ; also Rom. 7, 11. 2 Cor. 
 3, 6. b) With ace. rr,v e xSpdi/ Eph. 2, 
 16. ^ + 
 
 aTTOKvea), fa, f. r/o-w, ((cvew,) to breed out 
 or forth, lo bring forth offspring, 4 Mace. 
 
 15, 17. Hdian. 1. 5. 14. In N. T. trop. 
 a. g. Sdraroj/ James 1 , 15; so God his 
 children, to beget, rj^us Xoyo> dkrjSdas James 
 1, 18. 
 
 aTTOtcvXui), f. iVw, (KvXuB.) to roll away, 
 ft. g. TOV Xi Sop dirb rrjy Svpar Matt. 28, 2, 
 and Pass. Luke 24, 2 ; TOV X. /c rrjs 3. 
 Mark 16, 3 ; Pass, absol. 16, 4. Sept. for 
 ITS bba Gen. 29, 3. Judith 13, 9. Apollod. 
 Bibl. 3. 14. 7. 
 
 d7ro\a/J,/3dv), f. X^o/xat, (Xa/t/3di/w,) 
 aor. 2 uTTf\a^oi>. 
 
 1 . to take or hare from any one, to receive. 
 a) Genr. c. ace. of thing; Luke 6, 34. 18, 
 30. 23, 41 ; id. c. irapa. nvos 6, 34 ; ace. 
 of pers. 15, 27. Sept. for n^b Num. 34, 
 13. So rt irapd nvos Diod. Sic. 13. 31. 
 Thuc. 5. 30 ; ace. Plato Legg. 956. d. b) 
 Spec, of those who receive what is laid up 
 or prepared for them ; c. ace. of thing, Gal. 
 
 4. 5 rfjv viotlfcriav. 2 John 8 ; with eV av 
 rois Rom. 1, 27 ; with diro c. gen. Col. 3, 24. 
 c) Of persons, to receive as a guest, c. ace. 
 3 John 8. 
 
 2. to take apart or aside, Mid. with OTTO 
 TOV ox\ov HUT I8iav Mark 7, 33. 2 Mace. 
 6, 21. Jos. B. J. 2. 7. 2. Hdot. 1. 209. 
 
 3. to receive in full, (diro of compl.) c, 
 ace. Luke 16, 25 dirfXaftes TO. dya3d <rov. 
 Comp. aTre ^w no. 3. 
 
 a/TToXaucrt?, fa>s , ^ (diroXava,) enjoy 
 ment ; with gen. of object, Heb. 11, 25 
 irpovKmpov %X lv apapTtas diro\avcriv to have 
 the enjoyment of sin for a season, i. e. to en 
 joy the sinful pleasures of the Egyptian 
 court. Absol. 1 Tim. 6, 17 irdvra TrXoixriW 
 fls dnoKavcriv all things richly for enjoy 
 ment, i. e. richly to enjoy. Jos. Ant. 2. 7. 
 
 3. Hdian. 6. 3. 8. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 33. Hi. 
 1. 26. 
 
 a7roXet7ra>, ^Q), (XfiVw,) to leave mvay 
 from oneself, i. e. 
 
 1. to leave behind, with ace. and eV of 
 place, 2 Tim. 4, 13 6 aTreXwroi eV TpcodSt. 
 
 4, 20. Tit. 1, 5 Lachm. Pass, to be left, to 
 remain, Heb. 4, 6. 9. 10, 26. Sept. Pass. 
 for iXUJa Ex. 14, 28. Comp. Jos, Ant. 4. 
 8. 21. Xen. An. 6. 5. 4. Pass. Pol. 3. 39. 12. 
 Plato Tim. 19. a. 
 
 2. to forsake, to abandon, TO "8iov OIKT?;- 
 piov Jude 6. Sept. for -tS Prov. 2, 17. 
 Luc. D. Deor. 5. 2. Xen. Ag. 2. 29. 
 
 ttTToXet^w, f. &>, (Xet xcu,) to lick off, 
 c. ace. Luke 16, 21 ol Kvvts ... drrf \fixov 
 TO. e\KTj aiiTov. Aristoph. Vesp. 27. Athen. 
 6. p. 250. a. 
 
 a,7r6\\v/ji,t, f. oXw 1 Cor. 1, 19, (oXXv- 
 fj.t, ) also later fut. aTroXe o-eo Matt. 21,41.al. 
 Luc. Asin. 33. Longin. 3. 17 ; see Buttm. 
 Ausf. Sprachl. II. p. 254. Aor. 1 dndiXfo-a, 
 Perf. 2 part. dTroXwXw?. Imperat. aTroXXuf 
 Rom. 14, 15 is from a Pros. diro\\va>. Mid. 
 f. uTroXov/Ltat, aor. 2 aTraiXofjiijv. 
 
 1 . to destroy utterly, (d-rro of compl.) i. q. 
 oXXv/ii strengthened ; Mid. to perish utter 
 ly, to perish. 
 
 a) Of persons e. g. a) i. q. to put to 
 death, to kill, to slay; c. ace. Matt. 2, 13 
 TOV a7roXeVat avrdv. 12, 14. 22, 7. 27, 20. 
 Mark 3, 6. 9, 22. 11, 18. 12, 9. Luke 17, 
 27. 29. 19, 47. 20, 16. Mid. to perish, to 
 be kitted, to die, Matt. 8, 25. Mark 4, 38. 
 Luke 8, 24. 11,51. 13,33. Acts 5, 37; 
 so aTroXeVSai eV /ia^mpa Matt. 26, 52 ; air. 
 Xt/xw Luke 15, 17 ; vS<m 2 Pet. 3, 6 ; viru 
 TWOS 1 Cor. 10,9. 10 ; also \nrtp TWOS John 
 18, 14. Sept. for lax Esth. 9, 12 ; rnrr 
 
84 
 
 Esth, 9, 16. So r Mace. 2, 37. Xen. Cyr. 
 4. 6. 5. Mid. Jos. Ant. 1. 2. 1. Xen. An. 
 7. 4. 5 rw Xi/iw. /3) Genr. to destroy, to let 
 perish, to put an end to ; c. ace. Mark 1, 24. 
 Luke 4, 34. 6, 9. 9, 56. Jude 5; absol. 
 John 10, 10. Intens. KCIKOVS KCIKCOS aTroXeVcu 
 aiiTovs Matt. 21,41. (Comp. 7roXXvrat KO.KOS 
 xaK&s Ceb. Tab. 32. Plut. Cic. 26.) Mid. 
 to perish, to come to an end, John 1 1 , 50 p.fj 
 o\ov TO eSvoy aTToX^rat. Luke 13, 3. 5. 2 
 Cor. 4, 9. Jude 11. Sept. for nnjt Jos. 23, 
 .13 ; matin Jer. 48, 35. So Ecclus. 10, 3. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 38. Plato Rep. 421. a. 
 y) Of eternal destruction, the second death ; 
 see in an-oSi^o-KM no. 2. So c. ace. Matt. 
 10, 28 comp. 5, 29. Rom. 14, 15. James 4, 
 12. Mid. John 3, 15. 16. 10, 28. Rom. 2, 
 12. 1 Cor. 8, 11. 15, 18. 2 Pet. 3, 9. So 
 oi u7ro\\vfjifvoi, those that perish, who are 
 exposed to eternal death, the lost, 1 Cor. 1, 
 18. 2 Cor. 2, 15. 4, 3. 2 Thess. 2, 10. 
 
 b) Of things, to destroy, to bring to an 
 end or to nought; c. ace. 1 Cor. 1, 19 dno- 
 X&> TTJV aoepiav TUV o-o<jf>ojz/, quoted from Is. 
 29, 14 where Sept. for "OK . (Pol. 1. 43. 7.) 
 Mid. to perish, to come to an end, to pass 
 away, e. g. tv T>V p.f\<av <rov Matt. 5, 29. 
 30 ; f) evTrpfTTfia James 1,11; ftpSxns John 
 G, 27 ; xpvo-iW 1 Pet. 1,7. So oi aovcoi 
 Matt. 9, 17. Mark 2, 22. Luke 5, 37; oi 
 ovpavoi Heb. 1,11, quoted from Ps. 102, 27 
 where Sept. for lajj. Rev. 18, 14 ra Xap,- 
 Trpa aTTobXero OTTO trot), see in OTTO no. 1 . b. e. 
 Dem. 262. 19. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 14. Hell. 
 1. 1. 36. 
 
 2. to lose utterly, to lose; Mid. to lose 
 oneself, to be lost. 
 
 a) Pr. of things, c. ace. as TOV fiurSov 
 Matt. 10, 42. Mark 9, 41 ; irpo^arov Luke 
 J 5, 4 ; Spaxwv v. 8. 9 ; also 2 John 8. 
 Mid. TO TrpojBarov TO aTroXojXoy Luke 1 5, 4. 
 6 ; 3p/ Luke 21,18. Acts 27, 34 ; T! John 
 6, 12. Sept. for 13X Prov. 29, 3. So Ec 
 clus. 6, 4. JEL. V. H. 5. 10. Xen. Hell. 1. 
 1. 25. Spec. TTJV TJrvxrjv in sententious say 
 ings, Matt. 10, 39 bis. 16, 25 bis. Mark 8, 
 35 bis. Luke 9, 24 bis. 17, 33 bis. John 
 12,25. 
 
 b) Of persons, e. g. a) Of the prodigal 
 son, Mid. Luke 15, 24 GTroXcoXwy rjv KCU 
 (vpe^rj. v. 32\ So Israel forsaking God is 
 likened to a flock wandering and lost, Mid. 
 Matt. 10, 6. 15, 24. 18, 11. 14. Luke 19, 
 10 ; so in O. T. comp. Sept. and rvpkn 
 Ez. 34, 4. 16. Jer. 50, 6. Ps. 119, i76 
 3) Of those lost eternally, exposed to the 
 second death; comp. in no. 1. a. y. Luke 
 9, 25 eW6V. John 6, 39. 18, 9. Mid. John 
 
 17, 12. Comp. Ecclus. 20, 22. Here too 
 might be referred Part, ot dno\\vp.(voi the 
 lost ; see in no. 1 . a. y. 
 
 A7ro\\VQ)v, ovros, 6, (aTroXXvco, pres. 
 part.) Apollyon, pr. the destroyer, i. q 
 A/3aS8o>j/ where see. Rev. 9,11. 
 
 as, 17, Apollonia, a city 
 of Macedonia in the province Mygdonia, 
 situated nearly midway between Amphipolis 
 and Thessalonica, Acts 17, 1. See Plin. 
 H. N. 4. 17. Itin. Antonin. ed. Wess. p. 
 320, 330. Leake s Trav. in Northern Greece, 
 III. p. 458. 
 
 4 7ro XAa>9, , 6, Apollos, pr. n. of a 
 Jewish Christian, born at Alexandria, dis 
 tinguished for his eloquence and for the 
 influence of his preaching upon the Jews. 
 For his history and character as given by 
 Luke, see Acts 18, 24 sq. 19, 1 ; he is men 
 tioned also by Paul^ 1 Cor. 1, 12. 3, 4. 5. 6. 
 22. 4, 6. 16, 12. Tit. 3, 13. 
 
 d7rO\Oyeo/J,ai, ovpai, f. ijo-o^ai, Mid. 
 depon. (Xoyoy,) to talk oneself off, to plead 
 or answer for oneself, to defend oneself, be 
 fore a tribunal or elsewhere ; absol. Luke 
 21,14. Acts 26, 1. Rom. 2, 15; c. on 
 Acts 25, 8 ; ace. of thing uttered Luke 12. 
 11. Acts 24,- 10. 26,24. (So absol. Jos. 
 Ant. 4. 7. 3 ; c. on Xen. CEc. 11. 22 ; ace. 
 Dem. 407. 19. Xen. Mem. 4. 8. 4.) Also 
 with Trfpi c. gen. of thing charged, Acts 26, 
 2 ; with dat. of pers. to or before whom one 
 speaks, Acts 19, 33. 2 Cor. 12, 19. So c. 
 TTtpl Dem. 407. pen. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 13 ; 
 c. dat. Plato Prot. 359. a. 
 
 O y, TJ, (tiTroXoyeo/iat,) a plea, 
 defence, before a tribunal or elsewhere , 
 absol. Phil. 1, 7. 16 [17]. 2 Cor. 7, 11. 
 2 Tim. 4, 16; with irepi c. gen. of the 
 charge Acts 25, 16; with dat. of pers. to 
 or before whom, 1 Cor. 9, 3. 1 Pet. 3, 15; 
 c. Trpos Tiva id. Acts 22, 1. So absol. Wisd. 
 6, 10. Xen. Mem. 4. 8. 4 ; irpos riva ib. 4. 
 8. 5. 
 
 f. \ova-co, (Xovw,) to wash off 
 or away, to wash clean, e. g. gore Horn. II. 
 18. 345. Mid. Luc. Lexiph. 2 et 4. In 
 N. T. trop. to wash away sin, to cleanse 
 from sin ; c. ace. ray a/zapn ay Acts 22, 16 ; 
 Mid. 1 Cor. 6, 11. So Sept. Job 9, 30. 
 Plato Crat. 405. *b, 6 KaZaipow 3e6? KO\ 6 
 
 a7ro\VTp(t)a-lS, ea>s, TJ, 
 a letting off for a ransom, i. e. redemption, 
 deliverance on account of a ransom paid ; 
 Hesych. cmo\\iTpa><nv dirokvo-iv. In N. T. 
 
 1 . redemption, e. g. from the power and 
 
ttTToAuft) 85 
 
 consequences of pin through Cnrist, who 
 gave his life as a ransom, \vrpov (Matt 20, 
 28); Rom. 3, 24. Eph. 1, 7. Col. 1, 14. 
 Heb. 9, 15. Meton. the author of redemp- 
 lion 1 Cor. 1, 30. 
 
 2. Genr. deliverance, the idea of a ransom 
 being dropped ; e. g. from calamities and 
 death, Luke 21, 28. Heb. 11, 35; of be 
 lievers from the body and from the power 
 of this world, Rom. 8, 23 (comp. 7,. 24). 
 Eph. 1, 14. 4, 30. 
 
 ), f. IHTU, (Xvco,) to loose from, 
 to loosen, to unbind, c. ace. et gen. pr. Horn. 
 Od. 21. 46. In N. T. to free from, to set 
 free, i. e. 
 
 1. to loose or relieve from any evil, as 
 disease ; Pass. c. gen. TTJS do-Ztvdas Luke 
 13, 12. 2 Mace. 6, 30. Diod. Sic. 4. 11. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 1.5. 
 
 2. to let go free, to set free, to release from 
 bonds or arrest ; with ace. of pers. Luke 
 22, 68. 23, 16. 20. 22. John 19, 10. 12 bis. 
 Acts 3, 13. 4,21. 5,40. 16,35. 17,9. 28, 
 18; ace. and dat. of pers. Matt. 27, 15. 17. 
 21. 26. Mark 15, 6. 9. 11. 15. Luke 23, 17. 
 !8. 25. John 18, 39 bis. Once from arrest 
 for debt, Matt. 18, 27. Pass. Acts 4, 23. 
 16, 36. 26, 32; also Heb. 13, 23 Ti/idSeoi/ 
 dno\f\vp.( vov, where others : is let go, is 
 gone away, as in no. 3. So 2 Mace. 12, 
 25. Plut. Phocion 18. Xen. Hell. 4. 8. 21. 
 Trop. i. q. to forgive, absol. and Pass. 
 Luke 6, 38 bis. Comp. 2 Mace. 12, 45 rrjs 
 
 3. to let go, to dismiss, to send away from 
 attendance on any one, from a person or 
 from any place. a) Pr. and with ace. of 
 pers. Matt. 14, 15 dnoXvcrov TOVS o^Xovj. 
 v. 22. 23. 15, 23. 39. Mark 6, 36. 45. 8, 9. 
 Luke 8, 38. 9, 12. Acts 15, 30. 19, 41. 
 23, 22 ; ace. impl. Luke 14, 4. Acts 13, 3. 
 With ace. and predic. Mark 8, 3 euc aTroXva-co 
 avTovs vT]<TTtis. Matt. 15, 32. (Sept. Ps. 
 37, 1. Jos. Ant. 5. 2. 8. Xen. Hell. 6. 5. 
 21.) Pass, to be let go, to go away, to de 
 part, Acts 28, 25; OTTO TWOS 15, 33. So 
 Jos. Ant 5. 1. 25. Pol. 2. 34. 12. b) 
 Spec, to let depart this life, to let die ; c. 
 ace. Luke 2, 29 vvv aTroXveiy rbv 8ov\6v 
 crou tv flprjvr]. Sept. Pass, for 51S Num. 
 20, 29. So 2 Mace. 7, 9. Plut Consol. ad 
 Apoll. 13. T. I. p. 251. Pass. Ml V. H. 
 13. 19. 
 
 4. to let go, to put away, to divorce from 
 the marriage tie ; c. ace. r^i/ yvvaina Matt. 
 5, 31. 32. 19,3. 7. 8. 9. Mark 10, 2. 4. 11. 
 Luke 16, 18; once of a woman betrothed, 
 Matt. 1,19. Pass. part. OTroXeXv/xei/Tj Matt. 
 
 5, 32. 19, 9. Luke 16, 18. Once vice 
 versa, c. ace. rovtivSpa Mark 10, 12. Diod. 
 Sic. 12. 18 i>6fj.os 6 8i8ovs t^ovaiav TTJ yv- 
 OI> livSa. 
 
 v. -TT<U, f. , (p.d<rcra>,) to 
 wipe off, TO. 8dicpva Pol. 15. 26. 3. In N. T. 
 Mid. to icipe off from oneself; c. ace. et 
 dat incommodi, Luke 10, 11 TOV Kovtoprov 
 
 a7rovefj,a), f. p.u, (/>,) to divide off or 
 out, to distribute, to assign, Sept. for p;H 
 Deut. 4, 19. Pol. 14. 4. 2. In N. T. sim 
 ply, to assign, to bestow, c. ace. 1 Pet. 3, 7 
 dirovefjLOVTts Ti\i.r)V. So Jos. Ant. 1. 7. 1 
 ri/jLrjv. Plato Prot. 341. e. 
 
 a-TTOf 17TTO), f. ^ta, (wrra>,) to wash off, 
 e. g. alfut Sept. 1 K. 22, 38. In N. T. 
 Mid. to wash off oneself, to wash ; c. ace. 
 of the members, Matt. 27, 24 dirtvfyaTa 
 Tas x ( ^P as he washed his own hands, as a 
 symbol of his innocence ; see Deut. 21,6.7. 
 Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 16. Schol. in Soph. Ajac. 
 663. Horn. Od. 22. 478 x"P a s- Absol. 
 Plato Conv. 223. d. 
 
 aTTOTTiTTTey, aor. 2 dire-nfcrov, (TrtTrrtD,) 
 to fall off from, with dno c. gen. Acts 9, 18. 
 Sept. Job 24, 24. Xen. Hell. 1. 6. 33. 
 
 aTTOTrXavda), ,, f. TJO-W, (TrXovaca,) to 
 make wander away, to cause to go astray, 
 Sept. for aniti Jer. 50, 6. In N. T. trop. 
 to lead astray, to seduce, c. ace. Mark 13, 
 22. Pass, to go astray, to err, dno TTJS 
 Tj-icrrfcor 1 Tim. 6, 10. Sept. for Man 
 Prov. 7, 21. So Pol. 3. 57. 4. JEschin. 
 79. 6. Pass. Ecclus. 4, 19. Plato Ax. 
 369. d. 
 
 ttTTOTTXetO, f. TrXevao), (TrXe co,) to sail 
 away, with s c. ace. of place whither, 
 Acts 13, 4. 14, 26. 27, 1 ; naMtefv of 
 place whence, Acts 20, 15. Dem. 932. 17. 
 Xen. An. 5. 4. 12. 
 
 ), f. j/w, (TrXvvw,) to wash off 
 or out, to rinse, e. g. nets, c. ace. Luke 5, 2. 
 Sept. for 033 2 Sam. 19, 24. Jos. Ant. 8. 
 15. 6. Plato Tim. 65. d. 
 
 aTTOTTVLja), f. o>, (Tm yw.) to quite choke 
 or strangle, i. q. irviy<a strengthened ; e. g. 
 by drowning, Pass. Luke 8, 33. Trop. of 
 plants, c. ace. Matt. 13, 7. Luke 8, 7. 
 Tob. 3, 8. Hdian. 1. 17. 24. Xen. Hell. 3. 
 1. 14. 
 
 aTropea), i, f. Tjcro), (airopos : a prh 
 Trdpor,) to be without way or means, to be at 
 a loss, Jos. Ant. 1. 21. 1. JE\. V. H. 8. 5. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 5. In N. T. Mid. diropov- 
 p. a i , to be at a loss wilh oneself, to be in dcw!>t, 
 
(nropia 
 
 86 
 
 perplexed; absol. John -13, 22. 2 Cor. 4, 8 ; 
 (v vfiiv as to you Gal. 4, 20 ; ds c. ace. id. 
 Acts 25, 20 ; -ntpl c. gen. Luke 24, 4 Lachm. 
 So Sept. Gen. 32, 7. Pol. 20. 5. 8. Xen. 
 An. 7. 3. 29. 
 
 aTTOpia, as, 77, (aTropeta,) the being at 
 a loss, i. e. doubt, perplexity of mind, Luke 
 21, 25. Sept. for rns Is. 8, 22. Hdian. 
 2. 12. 5. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 13. 
 
 airoppiTTTO), f. -^w, (piTrrco,) to /Tirow 
 o^" or away, TO. oTrXa Hdian. 8. 4. 27. Sept. 
 for tpblfir! Ex. 22, 31. In N. T. reflex, 
 with e auroj/ impl. to throw oneself off, e. g. 
 from a ship into the sea ; Acts 27, 43 W- 
 Xeucre TOVS . - . diroppfyavras [tavrovy] Trpeo- 
 rouy KrX. So. Luc. V. Hist. 1. 30 KOI 
 
 iyWj f. icrco, (op(pavifta,~) to 
 make wholly orphan, to bereave wholly, Pass. 
 JEschyl. Choeph. 247. In N. T. Pass, 
 trop. to be wholly bereaved, prasgn. c. OTTO 
 TIVOS, 1 Thess. 2. 17, dnopfpavio-^Sevrfs d<p 
 vp.S)v being bereaved and separated from you. 
 
 }* f t / >- ~ 
 
 ttTTOOVCcUttyMj I. acrw, (<7Kfuaco, (TKfv- 
 
 of.) to j^acfc away, to clear away, Sept. for 
 !"12S Lev. 14, 36 ; TTJV 6po<pr)v Lycurg. 166. 
 9. Mil. id. in respect to oneself, Jos. Ant. 
 14. 6. 2. B. J. 1. 13. 5 TTJV inro-^iav. ib. 1. 
 31. 1. Hdian. 1. 9. 1. Pol. 2. 26. 6. InN. 
 T. Mid. Acts 21, 15 drrocrK(vacrdp.(voi dve- 
 fiaivOfifv (Is lepov(TaXf]fjL, lit. having packed 
 away we went up to Jerusalem, i. e. prob. 
 having deposited or stored away in Cesarea 
 the luggage which had been necessary on 
 a long sea-voyage. Later editions read eVt- 
 (rKeva<rd/ie!/ot q. V. 
 
 a7TOcr/ciacr//,a, OTOS, TO, (aTroo-Kidfco,) a 
 shading off, shadow, obscuration; James 1, 
 17 OVK evi TrapaX\ayr) rj TpOTrrjs aTrocna aer/xa, 
 in whom is no alternation neither shadow 
 from change, i. e. obscuration connected 
 with the changes or revolutions of a hea 
 venly body, as the moon, or as in the case 
 of eclipses. Sea Wetst. in loc. 
 
 a7roa"7rao), w, f. do-o), (oTrdo),) to draio 
 from or out, to draw away, viz. 
 
 1. Of things, to draw out, e. g. a sword 
 from the scabbard, TTJV /j-dxaipav, Matt. 26, 
 51. Comp. Dem. 845, 18 TO Svpw/iara. 
 
 2. Of persons, e. g. disciples, to draio 
 away from any one, c. ace. et OTTI O-W TIVOS 
 Acts 20, 3. (jEl. V. H. 13. 31.) Pass, 
 aor. 1 aTT(O Trdo %T)v in Mid. sense, to draw 
 off oneself, to go away, to depart; with dno 
 c. gen. Luke 22, 41. Acts 21, 1. So 2 
 Mace. 12, 10. 17. Diod. Sic. 20. 39. Act. c. 
 ice. Xen. An. 1. 8. 13. 
 
 airocnacna, as, fj, (d^tVr^t,) aposla 
 sy, defection, a falling away, Acts 21, 21. 2 
 Thess. 2, 3. Sept. for rno Jer. 29, 32 
 Plut. Galb. 1. A later word for the earlier 
 dTroo-rao-is, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 528. 
 
 a7TOO"Tao"tov, iov, TO, (a^ior^/ii,) de 
 fection, desertion, e. g. of a freedman from 
 his patron Dem. 940. 15. In N. T. a put 
 ting away, divorce ; hence ftifiXiov aTroara- 
 o-i ov a bill of divorce, Matt. 19, 7. Mark 
 10, 4. Meton. simply aTroorao-tov id. Matt. 
 5, 31. So Sept. /3t/3At oj/ diroa-Taa-iov for "lE.O 
 nni-13 Deut. 24, 1. 3. Is. 50, 1. 
 
 a7ro<7Teya&>, f. ao-co, (o-rryd^aj,) to un 
 roof, i. e. to dig through (e ^opvercreii ) the 
 flat roof of an oriental house, c. ace. TTJV O-TC- 
 yrjv Mark 2, 4 ; comp. Luke 5, 19. Strabo 
 4. p. 303. a. ib. 8. p. 542. e, dnoa-Teydo-fiv 
 TOV vf<av. 
 
 , f. eX&j, (oreXXw,) aor. 1 
 , Perf. dnevTaXita, Pass. aor. 2 
 
 1. to send off or away, to send forth. a) 
 Genr. of persons, as sent with a message or 
 commands, i. e. a messenger, agent, or the 
 like; c. ace. Matt. 10, 5 TOVTOVS TOVS 8o>Se- 
 Ka dVe oTeiXei/ 6 IjycroCs. V. 16. 40. 24, 31. 
 Mark 9, 37. 11,1. Luke 10, 3. 16. John 
 
 3, 34. 7, 29. Acts 3, 20. al. saep. Pass. 
 John 1, 24. Rom. 10, 15. al. Sept. for 
 r&OJ Gen. 28, 5. (Diod. Sic. 11. 28. Thuc. 
 1. 91. Xen. Hell. 5. 4. 9.) Mark 6, 7 fjpa- 
 TO avTovs a7rooTf XXeij> 8vo 8vo to send them 
 forth tzvo and two. So with two accus. of 
 pers. and predic. Acts 7, 35 TOVTOV 6 3e6s 
 apxovra KOI \VTpaiTrjv aTreoreiXei . 1 John 
 
 4, 10. Acts 3, 26. Mark 12, 3. With ace. 
 and an adjunct of pers. to whom or of place 
 whither ; e. g. ace. and dat. of pers. Matt. 
 22, 16 aTrocrreXXotxnz/ airw TOVS /xaS^rar 
 avTvv (see Winer \ 31. 2. par. 2). So with 
 ace. and els c. ace. of place Matt. 20, 2. 
 Luke 1, 26. John 3, 17. Acts 7, 34. al. or 
 els c. ace. of pers. Matt. 15, 24. Luke 11, 
 49 ; or fls c. ace. of purpose, Pass. Luke 
 4, 43. Heb. 1, 14. With ace. and trpos c. 
 ace. of pers. Matt. 23, 34 aTroo-rf XXco Trpos 
 vfias 7rpo<p;?ray Mark 12, 6. Acts 8, 14. 9, 
 38. 2 Cor. 12, 17 ; Pass. Matt. 23, 37. Luke 
 13, 34. With ace. and rrpb TrpocratTrov TIVOS 
 Matt. 11, 10 (comp. Mai. 3, 1). Mark 1, 2. 
 Luke 7, 27. 10, 1. (Sept. Ex. 23, 20.) Also 
 e/iTrpocrSei TIVOS John 3, 28 ; oTriVo) TIVOS 
 Luke 19, 14. Also with ace. and an ad 
 junct of place whence; e. g. ace. and CK c. 
 gen. of place, John 1,19; or OTTO c. gen. of 
 place 1 Pet. 1,12; also c. Trpos Tiva Acts 1 1 , 
 11 ; or OTTO c. gen. of pers. Acts 10. 17 ; 
 
aTroarepeci) 
 
 87 
 
 also with irapa c. gen. of pers. John 1, ; 
 &> c. gen. of place Mark. 5, 10. Further, 
 with ace. and infin. of purpose, Matt. 22, 3 
 dirt oretXe TOVS 8ov\ovs airrov KoAfcrat KT\. 
 Mark 3, 14. Luke 1, 19. 4, 18. John 4, 38. 
 1 Cor. 1, 17. al. and so infin. after ace. and 
 (Is Tiva Acts 26, 17; also after ace. and 
 rrpoy Tiva Matt. 21, 34. With ace. of pers. 
 and mi, John 7, 32 ; also Iva after ace. and 
 jrpos riva Mark 12, 2. 13. Luke 20, 10. 
 With ace. of pers. and SITUS, Acts 9, 17; 
 also twrcdy after ace. and irpos nva Luke 7, 3. 
 b) Spec, to send away a prisoner to another 
 tribunal ; with ace. and irpos nva, John 18, 24 
 aWoretXei ovv avTov 6 "Away 8e8efj.evov irpbs 
 Kdid(pav, i. e. Annas had sent him ; see 
 Buttm. J 137. 3. Winer 41.5. c) Intrans. 
 or with ace. impl. to send off or forth, to dis 
 patch a messenger or agent for some pur 
 pose ; Matt. 2, 16 ical aTrooreiXay dveiXe 
 irdvras TOVS iral8as KT\. and sending forth 
 he slew all the children. Mark 6, 17. Acts 7, 
 14. Rev. 1,1. (Comp. Plut. de Puer. educ. 
 14 pen. irep. fyus dvdXe TOV QeoK.pt.Tov. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 1. 6.) With fly c. ace. of place, 
 Matt. 14, 35. Acts 5, 21. 11, 13; npos c. 
 ace. of pers. Matt. 27, 19. Mark 3, 31. John 
 5, 33. 11, 3. Acts 11, 30. 13, 15; Iva Acts 
 16,36. So Sept. intrans. Gen. 20, 2. 1 Sam. 
 16, 11. 12. al. ss:p. d) i. q. to dismiss, to 
 let go ; C. ace. et els, Mark 8, 26 aTre oreiXei; 
 avrbv fls TOV OIKOV avTov.- Matt. 8, 31 
 Griesb. drrooreiXov r)p.ds els TTJV dyf\rjv. 
 Also Luke 4, 19 [18] tnroorelXai reSpav- 
 crfj.vovs tv d<pfcrfi, quoted from Is. 58, 6 
 where Sept. for D-nton O- StWi ni JJ. So 
 Pol. 5. 10. 4. Xen. An. 2. 1. 5." 
 
 2. Of things, to send away, to send forth, 
 e. g. from one person to another ; as a 
 beast, c. ace. Matt. 21, 3. Mark 11, 3. (So 
 TT]V eVio-roXjjv ^El. V. H. 12. 51 ; TO. TrXoTa 
 Xen. Hell. 5. 1. 23.) Mark 4, 29 diro- 
 ore XXet TO Speiravov, he sendeth forth the 
 sickle ; comp. Joel 4, 9 [3, 13], where Heb. 
 >T3 nb J , Sept. e a7rooTeXX&> 8ptirava. 
 Sept. UTrooreXXco TTJV \fipa for "P l" ? ^ 
 Ex. 9, 1 5. Also John 9, 7 SiXcoa^i 6 epp.e- 
 eeveTcu dirTTa\fjLfvos, i. e. Heb. rVbl2 pr. a 
 sending forth of water, a conduit, aqueduct ; 
 see in 2iXo>a/i. With ace. and dat. of pers. 
 lo send any thing to a person ; Acts 10, 36 
 rbv \oyov ov dirfo~Tfi\f roTy viols Io~pai]\. 
 Pass. c. dat. Acts 13, 26. 28,28. Also 
 with ace. and eVi riva, as a thing promised, 
 rf)v (irayyf\ ! .av . . . f <p vp-ay Luke 24, 49. 
 JE\. V. H. 12. 57 ot p.fv 3fot OTy/ieta av- 
 Tols KOI repara aW<7TeXXoi>. + 
 
 aTTOcrrepea), f. yo-a>, (orep/a>,) to deprive, 
 to defraud, to despoil, diro being thus ex- 
 
 pressed by Lat. dt in composition ; absol. 
 Mark 10, 9 ; c. ace. of pers. 1 Cor. 6, 8 dno- 
 crrfperre . . . dS(\<povs. 1 Cor. 7, 5, Comp. 
 Ex. 21, 10. Mid. or Pass, to let defraud 
 oneself, to be defrauded ; absol. 1 Cor. 6, 7 ; 
 with gen. of thing, 1 Tun. 6, 5 dnfcrrrjpr]- 
 p.(vu>v Tys dX^Seias defrauded (destitute) of 
 the truth. So with ace. of pers. Hdot. 7. 
 
 1 55 ; ace. of pers. and gen. of thing Ecclus. 
 29, 6. Dem. 207. 9. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 63. 
 Also pr. with ace. of thing ; Pass. James 5, 
 4 6 /LucrSoy ... 6 dn(o-rrjprjp.fvos, the hire . . . 
 kept back by fraud. So Act. c. ace. /uo-36V, 
 Sept. for p $ Deut. 24, 14. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 
 38. Plut. Demosth. 4. 
 
 a7rocrro\rj, fj s , 17, (dTroareXXo),) a send 
 ing off, expedition, of ships Thuc. 8. 9 ; of 
 a person Plut. Timol. 1 . In N. T. apostk- 
 ship, the office of an apostle, Acts 1, 25. 
 Rom. 1, 5. 1 Cor. 9, 2. Gal. 2, 8. 
 
 aTTOcrroXo?, ov, 6, ((ZTTooreXXco,) one 
 sent forth, a messenger, apostle. 
 
 1. Genr. of any messenger, John 13, 16. 
 
 2 Cor. 8, 23. Phil. 2, 25, comp. 4, 18. Sept. 
 for n&O 1 K. 14, 6. Hdot. 1. 21. 
 
 2. Of messengers or ambassadors sent 
 from God, joined with Trpo^^rat, Luke 1 1 , 
 49. Eph. 3, 5. Rev. 2, 2. 18, 20. So of the 
 Messiah, Heb. 3, 1 . 
 
 3. Spec, an apostle of Christ, e. g. a) 
 ot 8a>8fKa ajroo-roXoi, the twelve apostles, 
 Matt. 10, 2. Luke 6, 13. 9, 10. 22, 14. 
 1 Cor. 12, 28. 2 Pet. 3, 2. Jude 17. Rev. 
 21, 14. al. These are called by Paul oi 
 virepkiav aTrdoToXot, 2 Cor. 11,5. 12,11; 
 and are also spoken of after the fall of Judas 
 as oi ev8(Ka dir. Acts 1, 26, comp. Mark 
 16, 14. So of Paul, as being /car t^ox^v 
 the apostle of the gentiles, Rom. 11, 13. 
 1 Tim. 2, 7. 2 Tim. 1, 11 ; also Rom. 1, 1. 
 Gal. 1,1. Eph. 1, 1. al. /3) In a wider 
 sense of the helpers and companions of the 
 twelve or of Paul ; e. g. of Paul and Bar 
 nabas Acts 14, 4. 14; perh. of Andronicus 
 and Junias, Rom. 16, 7. + 
 
 a7TO(TTO/iaTift>, f. t o-w, (o-TO/xa.) lit. tc 
 mouth it off, pr. i. q. diro oro/zaroy t intiv, tc. 
 speak or repeat from the lips, by heart, off 
 hand ; so of teachers dictating to their pu 
 pils, as was the custom at Athens, Plato 
 Euthyd. 276. c. 277. a ; comp. Ruhnk. ad 
 Plat. Tim. p. 43, 44. So too of teachers 
 causing their pupils to repeat by heart ; 
 Suid. diroo~TOfj.aTi^eiv <pao~l TOV 8i8do~Ka\ov, 
 
 OTUV K\Vfl TOV TTOlSa \fyflV OTTO OTTO OTO- 
 
 /iaroy. Also of the Sybil repeating or dic 
 tating an oracle or response, Plut. Thes. 
 24 fin. Hence in N. T. to make one ansio 
 
88 
 
 off hand, to draw out by artful questions, 
 c. ace. Luke 11, 53. 
 
 7rOOTpe<&), f. ^o), (o-rpe(/>co,) 1. to 
 turn away or aside ; c. ace. et airo c. gen. 
 2 Tim. 4, 4 dno rrjs dXj/Seiay ryv aKorjv 
 dnocrTptyovtriv. Luke 23, 14 diroo-Tpe<j)ovTa 
 rov \aov sc. OTTO TOV Kaicrapos V. 2. Trop. 
 Acts 3,26. Rom. 11,26 diroo-Tpe\l/ei dStKiay 
 a?ro la-paqX, quoted from Sept. Is. 59, 20 
 where Sept. for sda iatt5 . Sept. for "Pon 
 Ex. 23, 25. Prov. 4, "27. 1 Mace. 3, 8 ; 
 c. ace. Diod. Sic. 4. 35. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 25. 
 
 2. Mid. aTToo-Tpefpofj-ai, Pass. aor. 2 
 aTrto-Tpdfprjv with Mid. signif. to iwra orce- 
 self away from, c. ace. see Buttm. $ 113. 4. 
 Kiihner J 197. 3. Hence genr. to <urn artaz/ 
 /rom, to refuse, to re/ec, c. ace. Matt. 5, 42. 
 Tit. 1, 14. Heb. 12, 25; to forsake, c. ace. 
 2 Tim. 1,15. Sept. for nat Hos. 8, 3 ; CD3 
 Jer. 15, 6. Jos. Ant. 2. 4. 3. Plut. Cato 
 Maj. 24 pen. Pol. 9. 39. 6. 
 
 3. Spec, and from the context, to turn 
 away back, to return, see in diro note 3 ; 
 c. ace. et els, Matt. 26, 52 dnoo-Tpe-^ov a-ov 
 rifV pd^aipav fls TOV TOTTOV avrrjs. So ace. 
 et dat. Matt. 27, 3 TO. dpyvpia rots Ifpevcri. 
 Sept. for nivsn Gen. 24, 5. 28, 15. Comp. 
 Dem, 1491. 9 fls Kpdkrjv airu>v aTrocrrpe- 
 ty-eiav ol Seoi. 
 
 a7TOO-TL"ye&), , f. ^a-co, (o-rvye co,) to 
 hate utterly, to abhor, c. ace. Rom. 12, 9. 
 Eurip. Ion 500 TOV airaida S drrocrTvyS) fiiov. 
 Hdot. 6. 129. 
 
 a7roavvd>ya)<yo<;, O v, 6, fj, adj. (o-vva- 
 ycayf]. ) put away, out, from the synagogue. 
 exr,o?nmunicated,3ohn$,2 2. 12,42. 16,2. 
 The Rabbins speak of three kinds of ex 
 communication, called isftjj C iri, fctpratti. 
 The first continued for 30 days ; the person 
 might not bathe, nor shave his head, nor 
 approach another nearer than four cubits ; 
 he was as a mourner, but might be present 
 at public assemblies. If he remained ob 
 stinate at the end of the 30 days, the second 
 kind was superadded ; by which he was laid 
 under a heavy curse, was excluded from all 
 assemblies, and from all intercourse with 
 others. The third species is mentioned 
 only by the later Rabbins, who describe it 
 as an utter and perpetual exclusion from all 
 the privileges of the Jewish people, both 
 civil and religious. SeeBuxtorf Lex. Chald. 
 col. 1303, 827, 2466. Lightfoot Hor. Heb. 
 in Joh. 9, 22 et 1 Cor. 5, 5. Winer Realw. 
 art. Bann. 
 
 aTTordcraw v. -TT<W, f. o>, (rdo-o-w.) 
 to set off in a certain order, to assign sepa 
 rately, to separate, 1 Mace 11.3. Jos. B. J. 
 
 3. 4. 2. Plato Theset. 153. e. In N. T- 
 Mid. (iTTordcrcro/iai, f. o/iai, to separate 
 oneself, and so to take leave, to bid- farewell, 
 a signif. of the Alexandrian dialect and 
 espec. in Josephus and Philo ; see Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 23, 24. a) Pr. of a person who 
 himself goes away, c. dat. Luke 9, 61, Acts 
 18. 18. 21. 2 Cor. 2, 13. So Jos. Ant. 8. 
 
 13. 7. Liban. Decl. 30. p. 699. a. b) Ot 
 one who sends others away, i. q. to send 
 away, to dismiss, c. dat. Mark 6, 46 ; parall. 
 is dTroXua) Matt. 14, 23. So Jos. Ant. 11. 
 8. 6. c) Trop. i. q. to forsake, c. dat. Luke 
 
 14, 33. So Jos. Ant. 11. 6. 8. Jamblicb 
 Vit. Pyth. 28. p. 145. 
 
 aTTOreXeft), , f. eVa, (reXew,) to finish 
 off. to complete fully, 2 Mace. 15, 39. Xen. 
 Hell. 3. 2. 10. In N. T. Pass, to be finished 
 off, completed; James 1, 15 rj 8e a/xapn a 
 aTroreXeo-Seura dnoKvei SdvaTov, sin when 
 completed, i. e. brought out into full exer 
 cise ; comp. Tt\flv fTr&vniav crapKos Gal. 
 5, 16. So Plato Gorg. 503. d, ras eVtSw- 
 Hias dwoTfXflv. Xen. Conv. 8. 34. 
 
 affDr&ty/M, f. Sjjo-co, (n 377/ii.) to put. 
 off or away, a crown Sept. Cod. Alex, for 
 C^v] Ez. 21, 31 [26] ; to expose a child. 
 Plato Thecet. 161. a. In N. T. only Mid! 
 to put off from oneself, to lay aside, c. ace. 
 TO. f/idria Acts 7, 58. (2 Mace. 8, 35. JE1. 
 V. H. 3. 3. Xen. Cyr. 4. 4. 11.) Trop. to 
 put off" or awdy, to renounce, c. ace. Rom. 
 13, 12 TO. epya TOV O~KOTOVS. Eph. 4, 22. 25. 
 Col. 3, 8. Heb. 12, 1. James 1, 21. 1 Pet. 
 2, 1. So Luc. D. Mort. 10. 8 TO -^eOSor. 
 Dion. Hal. 9. 33 TTJV opyrjv. 
 
 airoTivdcrcra), f. &>, (nmo-o-co,) to shakt 
 off", c. ace. et a-no Luke 9, 5 ; ace. et fls 
 Acts 28, 5. Sept. Mid. for iyj Niph. Judg. 
 16, 20. Eurip. Bacch. 253 OVK. dnoTivdgfis 
 
 f. i<ro>, (riVco,) to pay off or in 
 full, and so to repay, absol. Philem. 19. 
 Sept, for tD^ttJ Prov. 22, 27. Hdian. 2. 11. 
 14. Xen. Mem. 2. 9. 5. 
 
 a7TOToA//,a&), , f. r)o-a>, (roX/nuco,) to 
 have full courage, to be quite bold, very bold, 
 i. q. ToX/xdw strengthened; absol. Rom. 10, 
 20 Hcraiay Se aTroroX/ia KCU Xe yet but JEsaias 
 is very bold and saith, conies out boldly. 
 JSschin. 72. 17 iwroroX/xai \tyeiv. Diod. 
 Sic. 12. 17. Plato Rep. 503. b. 
 
 CUTTOTOfJLia, as, f], ((I7roro/i0f, aTrore/ij/o),) 
 pr. a cutting off", and hence steepness, comp. 
 oprj diroTofia Xen. An. 4. 1. 2. In N. T. 
 trop. decisiveness, severity, Rom. 11, 22 bis. 
 So Diod. Sic. 12. 16 air. TOIV VO/JLUV. Plut. 
 de Puer. educ. 18. 
 
89 
 
 a7roTO/za>9, adv. (un-drop-or,) pr. with a 
 nutting off", utterly, Wisd. 5, 22 ; absolutely 
 Dem. 1402. 16. In N. T. trop. decisively, 
 severely, 2 Cor. 13, 10. Tit. 1,13. So Pol. 
 
 17. 11. 2. 
 
 aTTOTpeTra), f. ^o>, (rp/Trw,) to Zurn 
 way or crsjffe, trans. Ecclus. 20, 29. Xen. 
 Conv. 4. 7. In N. T. only Mid. to turn 
 oneself away from any one, i. q. to turn 
 away from, to avoid, c. ace. 2 Tim. 3, 5 ; 
 see Buttm. } 135. 4. Kiihner 250. 1. b. 
 So jEschyl. Sept. adv. Theb. 1060 cpo/Sovpu 
 KctTroTpf Trop.cu bflfui TToXiraJj . Antiphon. 72 1 . 
 6. Pint. Cleom. 9. 
 
 aTTOfcria, a?, f], (a7rei/,) absence, Phil. 
 2, 12. Jos. Ant. 2. 4. 5. Dem. 10. 5. Xen. 
 Vect. 9. 10. 
 
 ctTTCKpepa), (<pfp&>.) aor. 1 dn^veyKa 
 Mark 15, 1 ; aor. 2 infin. aTTfj/eyKftv 1 Cor. 
 16, 3; Pass. aor. 1 inf. uirevf^rivai Luke 
 1 6, 22 ; to bear or carry away from one 
 place or person to another ; with ace. and 
 ds of place, 1 Cor. 16, 3. Rev. 17,3 ; Pass. 
 Luke 16, 22; ace. and eVt c. ace. of place 
 Rev. 21,10. [Acts 19, 12] ; ace. impl. Mark 
 15, 1. Sept. for N^ 2 Chr. 36, 7. Lys. 
 395. 2. Xen.yr. 2. 4. 19. 
 
 a.7ro<f)ev<ya), f. , ((pevyco,) tojlee away, 
 l( escape from any thing, c. ace. 2 Pet. 2, 
 
 18. 20. (Plato Tim. 44. c. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 11. 8.) Once with gen. because of OTTO in 
 comp. 2 Pet. 1, 4 TTJS (pZopas. See Winer 
 $ 56. 4. c. 
 
 f. p,at, Mid. depon. 
 forth, to speak out, to 
 declare, absol. Acts 2, 4 ; ace. of thing Acts 
 26, 25 ; dat. of pers. Acts 2, 14. Sept. for 
 K33 1 Chr. 25, 1. Diog. Laert. 1. 63. 
 Philo de Mos. II. p. 139. 32. 
 
 a7TO(f>opTL^o^ai, f. t o-o/ttu, Mid. ((pop- 
 Ti,) to unload one s own burden, to unlade, 
 so of a ship, c. ace. Acts 21, 3 a7ro<popnd- 
 p.evov TOV yd/ioi/, i. e. about to unlade HER 
 burden. Philo de Praem. p. 915. b. Dion. 
 Hal. 3. 44 at Se pfi^ovs (vrjei) . . . dno(popTi- 
 foirat ovcdxpat?. 
 
 fM s, f], (aTroxpaop-ai.) a 
 using up, consumption by use ; Col. 2, 22 
 a ecrri Tfdvra els <p3opai/ rtj airo-^prja-d, 
 which all are to perish with the using, i. e. 
 all which things so forbidden perish in be 
 ing used up, consumed. The clause is 
 parenthetic ; and the next words, Kara TO. 
 eWoX/iara KT\. are then to be connected 
 with v. 20. (Plut. Quzest. Rom. 18 -^alpfiv 
 rals roiavrais aTro^prjo fcrt KCU crvcrroXals 
 r&> TTfpirriov. Dion. Hal. 1. p. 47.) Others 
 
 connect Kara TO. eVraXp-ara directly with TJJ 
 aTroxprja-fi, thus : which all are for perdition 
 in the using (comp. Gal. 6, 8), according to 
 the precepts of men; see Kypke, De Wette, 
 in loc. 
 
 aTTO^Wpe&J, a), f. 770-0), (^copea),) to give 
 way from, to go away, to depart ; with OTTO 
 c. gen. Matt. 7, 23 (comp. Ps. 6, 8). Luke 
 9, 39. Acts 13, 13. Sept. for *io; Jer. 46, 
 5. Pol. 1. 11. 15. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 3. 
 
 aTTO^wpi^o), f. iVoj, (xwpi ,) to sepa 
 rate off or out, Plato Soph. 226. d ; to set 
 apart, to appoint, Sept. Ez. 43, 21. Lys. 
 147. 17. In N. T. genr. to separate, to part 
 asunder ; Pass. aor. 1 dTrfxapia- Srjv with 
 Mid. signif. Rev. 6, 14 (cat 6 ovpavbs dnex^- 
 piVS?; w? |3t/3Xioi> etXio-cro/j.ei oi , and the 
 heavens parted asunder as a scroll rolled up, 
 i. e. the heavens were rent and the parts 
 rolled away as a scroll ; comp. Is. 34, 4. 
 With drro c. gen. Acts 15, 39 aT 
 i/ai avrovs OTT 
 
 f. &>, 0|xw>) to leave off 
 breathing, and so to faint, to swoon, Od. 24. 
 348. Jos. Ant. 19. 1. 15 ; to expire, to die, 
 Thuc. 1. 134. In N. T. trop. to faint, to 
 fail at Jieart; absol. Luke 21, 26 diro^rvxv- 
 TCOV aV3pco7r<Bi OTTO <p6&ov, parall. is d><m 
 venpoi Matt. 28, 4. So Lat. expiro Senec. 
 Nat. Quaest. 2. 59. 
 
 "ATTTTIOS, ov, 6, Appius, i. e. Appius 
 Claudius Coecus, a censor of Rome, who 
 built the celebrated Appian way leading 
 from Rome to Brundusium ; portions of 
 which remain at the present day in many- 
 places. In N. T. ATTTTI OU (popov, Lat. 
 Appii Forum, Acts 28, 15 ; the name of a 
 small town on the Appian way, 43 Roman 
 miles from Rome according to the Itin. 
 Anton, p. 107, or 37 R. miles according to 
 the Itin. Hieros. p. 611, ed. Wesseling. It 
 lay in the Pontine marshes ; and is de 
 scribed by Horace as differtum nautis, cau- 
 ponibus atque malignis, Sat. 1. 5. 4. The 
 place called Tpelr Taftepvat, Lat. Tres 
 Taberwc, Engl. the Three Taverns, Acts 
 1. c. lay on the same road, 10 R. miles 
 nearer to Rome ; Itin. Anton. 1. c. Cicero 
 writes, ad Att. 2. 10 Ab Appii Foro, hora 
 quarta; dederam aliam paulo ante Tribus 
 Tabernis. ib. 2. 12 Emerseram commode 
 ex Antiati in Appiam ad Tris Tabernas. 
 
 airpoaLTOf, ov, 6, TJ, adj. (a priv. Trpdcr- 
 ei/it.) not to be approached, unapproachable ; 
 1 Tim. 6, 16 0a>s dnpoffirov light unap 
 proachable, excessive; comp. Ez. 1, 4. 26- 
 28. Pol. 3. 49. 7 aTrpdo-tra oprj. Diod. Sic. 
 19. 96. 
 
90 
 
 apa 
 
 O v, 6, 37, adj. (a priv. 
 ),) not striking against, not stum 
 bling, i. e. 
 
 1. Act. not causing to stumble ; trop. not 
 causing to fall, not leading into sin, 1 Cor. 
 10, 32. Pr. of a way, Ecclus. 35, 21. 
 
 2. Pass, not made to stumble ; trop. not 
 falling into sin, faultless, Acts 24, 16. 
 Phil. 1, 10. 
 
 u7rpoa-(07ro\iJ7rTa)<f. adv. (a priv. Trpoo- 
 o>7roX?;7rTea),) without respect of persons, im 
 partially, 1 Pet. 1, 17. For this Hebraism 
 see in Xa/i/Sdvco and Trpocrayrrov. 
 
 " r f J- .. 
 
 aTTTaia TOS) ov, o, i), adj. (a pnv. 
 Tmu w,) not stumbling, of a horse Xen. Eq. 
 1. 6. In N. T. trop. not falling into sin, 
 faultless, paroll. apayfios, Jude 24. So 3 
 Mace. 6, 39. Luc. Amor. 46 81 aTrra/orov 
 KU! aKXiwCr /3t ov. 
 
 UTTTO), f. -^co, to ac%tf, to appZy one 
 thing to another, to Jj-r or fasten upon, pr. 
 Horn. Od. 21. 408. In N. T. 
 
 1. Of fire as applied to any thing, to set 
 fire to, to Idndle, to light, c. ace. \v%vov 
 Luke 8, 16. 11, 33. 15, 8; Trvp 22,55; 
 rv/aai/ Acts 28, 2 Lachm. Judith 13, 13 
 mp. JEschin. 27. 7. Thuc. 4. 100. 
 
 2. More freq. is Mid. aTrro/nai, to a^Z^ 
 oneself to, i. q. to touch, constr. with a gen. 
 of pers. or thing, or of the part touched ; 
 Buttm. \ 132. 5. e. Kiihner 273. 3. b. 
 
 a) Pr. and genr. c. gen. of pers. some 
 part of whom is touched ; Matt. 8, 3 tj-^aro 
 OVTOV 6 Irjvovs. 17. 7. Mark 1, 41. 3, 10. 
 
 5, 31. 6, 56. 8, 22. 10, 13. Luke 5, 13. 6, 
 
 19. 7, 39. 8, 45 bis. 46. 47. 18, 15. John 
 
 20, 17 pfj nov airrov, comp. Matt. 28, 9. 
 With gen. of the member touched, Matt. 8, 
 15 fj\l/a.To rrjs x fl P" s avrfjs. 9, 29. 20, 34. 
 Mark 7, 33. Luke 22, 51. With gen. of a 
 garment, TOU lp.ariov Matt. 9, 21. Mark 5, 
 27. 28. 30 ; also roO Kpa<nrf8ov TOV Ifiariov 
 Matt. 9, 20. 14, 36. Mark 6, 56. Luke 8, 
 44 ; id. impl. Matt. 14, 36. Once rfjs cropov 
 Luke 7, 14. Sept. for SM 2 K. 13, 21. Is. 
 
 6, 7. So Antiphon. 785. pen. e^ov. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 1. 24. Spec, to touch in order to 
 do harm or violence, c. gen. 1 John 5, 18. 
 Sept. for SS3 1 Chr. 16, 22. So ^Eschin. 
 73. 30. Plato Conv. 221. b. 
 
 b) In the Levitical sense, to touch, to come 
 in contact with ; see Lev. 5, 2. 3, where 
 Sept. for 553. So c. gen. 2 Cor. 6, 17 
 tiKc&dpTov /j.r) n7rreo-3f, in allusion to Is. 52, 
 11 where Sept. for "?3 . Absol. Col. 2, 21 
 fj.7] 0x^77, pr)8e yeva-T), p.rj8e 3t y???, sc. forbid 
 den food or other like things ; a precept 
 of Judaizing teachers ; see in dn6xprj<ris. 
 
 (Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 5.) Others : to touch food, 
 i. q. to eat; so Kypke in loc. comp. Horn. 
 Od. 4. 60 a-Lrov 3 aTrrea^ov. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 1. 2. Diog. Laert. 8. 1. 19 dXeicrpvoW ^17 
 dTrreo Sai \fVKov. 
 
 c) Spec. emTeo-3at yvvamos, to touch a 
 woman, to have carnal intercourse with her, 
 1 Cor. 7, 1. Sept. for 553 Gen. 20, 6 ; ^ 
 Gen. 20, 4. Jos. Ant. 1. 8. 1. Plut. Alex! 
 M. 21. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 8. 
 
 ATTCpia, as, TJ, Apphia, Appia, pr. n. 
 fem. Philem. 2. According to Chrysostom 
 and Theodoret she was the wife of Phi 
 lemon. 
 
 , f. d7ra>o-a>, (&>3<?co,) to thrust 
 away, to cast off, Sept. for f13T p s . 43, 2. 
 Hdot. 1. 173. In N.T. Mid. aTrcoSeo/xat, 
 ov/xai, aor. 1 u.-Kuxra\t.r]v (in Attic writers 
 always with the augment, eco- Thuc. 7. 52. 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 26. Thorn. Mag. p. 403,) 
 to thrust away from, oneself, i. e. a) Genr. 
 to thrust away, to drive off, c. ace. Acts 7. 
 27. Sept. for pn-inEz.il, 16. SoHdian. 
 4. 14. 18. Pol. 12. 23. 4. b) Spec. i. q. 
 to reject, to refuse, c. ace. of pers. or thing, 
 Acts 13, 46. Rom. 11, 1. 2. 1 Tim. 1, 19; 
 ace. impl. Acts 7, 39. Sept. for OXa Hos. 
 9, 17. Jer. 6, 19. So Plut. J. CJES. 61. Xen. 
 Cyr. 6. 1. 26. 
 
 a7ra)\et,a, as, >;, (an-oXAv/it,) utter de 
 struction, perdition, viz. 
 
 1. Of persons : a) Pr. destruction, 
 death ; Acts 25, 16 R. ^ap/^ecrSa/ riva . . . 
 els dira>\fiav. Sept. for iSttJri Esth. 7, 4 ; 
 enn Is. 34, 5. So Hdian. 8. 8. 9. ^Esop. 
 Fab. 48. b) Spec, eternal destruction, per 
 dition, the second death ; see in aTroXXv/it 
 no. 1. a. y, and aiTc&vri O-KCO no. 2. Matt. 7, 
 13 T/ 68as fj a.Trdyov(Ta els TTJV aTva>\fiav, opp. 
 els TTJV fa^v v. 14. Acts 8, 20. Rom. 9, 22. 
 Phil. 1, 28. 3, 19. 1 Tim. 6, 9. Heb. 10,39. 
 2 Pet. 2, 1 fin. 3. 3, 7. 16. Rev. 17, 8. 11. 
 So 2 Pet. 2, 1 alpttreis aTrwXei ay destructive 
 heresies, destroying the soul. Meton. id. v. 
 2, where later edit, rais do-eXye/aty. Also 
 6 vlos TTJS uTTwXfias the son of perdition, by 
 Hebr. one doomed to perdition, John 17, 
 12. 2 Thess. 2, 3. So Sept. reKva r^y a7ra>- 
 Xet as for S1SB ^b^ I s . 57, 4. 
 
 2. Of things, destruction, a consuming, 
 Hdian. 1. 14. 11 ; and so loss, waste, Matt. 
 26, 8. Mark 14, 4. Sept. for !Ti3X l oss , a 
 thing lost, Lev. 5, 22. 23 [6, 3. 4]. 
 
 apa, as, 17, prayer, supplication, Horn. 
 H. 15. 598. Hdot. 6. 63. In N. T. impre 
 cation, execration, cursing, Rom. 3, 14. 
 Sept. for rb* Num. 5, 23. Is. 24, 6. So 
 Pol. 9. 40. 6. Plato I^gg. 742. b. 
 
apa 
 
 apa, pr. an illative particle ; see Buttm. 
 5 149. 2. m. 26. Kiihner 324. 3. Herm. 
 ad. Vig. p. 820 sq. 
 
 1. In a direct conclusion, therefore, then, 
 now, marking transition to what naturally 
 follows by inference from what precedes. 
 Thus 
 
 . n) As in Gr. usage, not first in a clause, 
 Winer 65. 5. Rom. 7, 21 fvpia-Kca apa rbv 
 v6fj.ov KT\. 8, 1. Gal. 3, 7 ; rel apa since 
 then, since in that case, 1 Cor. 5, 10. 7, 14. 
 So Wisd. 6, 20. Luc. D. Mort 13. 1. Xen. 
 Hell. 4. 8. 4. Plato Lys. 213. a. 
 
 b) Contrary to Gr. usage apa stands also 
 first in a clause; Winer 1. c. So genr. 
 Luke 11,48 apa /iaprvpttre Kal KT\. Rom. 
 
 10, 17. 2 Cor. 7, 12. Gal. 4, 31. Heb. 4, 9. 
 (So Sept Ps. 139, 11. Xen. Ephes. 1. 11.) 
 After in a conditional clause, apa begins 
 the apodosis,then, Matt 12,28. Luke 11, 20. 
 1 Cor. 15, 18. 2 Cor. 5, 14. Gal. 2, 21. 3, 
 29. 5, 11. Heb. 12, 8. Once apa in apo- 
 dosis does not stand first, 1 Cor. 15, 14. 
 
 c) With other particles subjoined, e. g. 
 a) apa yt or apaye, i. e. apa strength 
 ened, therefore then, so then, at the beginning 
 of a clause, Matt. 7, 20. 17, 26. Acts 11, 
 18; see also in no. 2. /3, apa ovv, 
 therefore then, so then, wheref p, at the be 
 ginning of a clause, often used by Paul, 
 Rom. 5, 18. 7, 3. 25. 8, 12. 9, 16. 18. 14, 
 12. 19. Gal. 6, 10. Eph. 2, 19. 1 Thess. 5, 
 6. 2 Thess. 2, 15. In Gr. writers Up ovv 
 does not stand first in a clause ; or, if so, is 
 to be changed to ap ovv interrogative ; see 
 Herm. ad Vig. p. 821. Buttm. } 149. 2. marg. 
 
 2. In an indirect conclusion, after inter 
 rogative words, and expressing only a slight 
 consequence or reference to what precedes, 
 then, indeed, perhaps; sometimes not ren 
 dered in English ; see Kiihner { 324. 3. So 
 after TIS,TI, as ris apa who then? who? 
 Matt. 18, 1. 19, 25. 24, 45. Mark 4, 41. 
 Luke 8, 25. 12, 42. 22, 23 ; ri apa what 
 then? what? Matt. 19, 27. Luke 1, 66. 
 Acts 12, 18. (Eurip. Iph. in Aul. 797. Luc. 
 Amor. 520.) So 1 1 apa if perhaps, in an 
 oblique clause, Mark 11, 13. Acts 7, 1. 8, 
 22 ; once fiTrep apa id. 1 Cor. 15, 15. Once 
 strengthened, ei apayf if perhaps, if haply, 
 Acts 17, 27. (Sept Gen. 18, 3. Num. 22, 
 
 11. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 2.) Also OVK Spa in- 
 terrog. Acts 21, 38 ; /i^n apa 2 Cor. 1, 17. 
 
 apa, interrog. part, (apa with the accent 
 strengthened,) i. q. Lat. num, marking an 
 interrogation to be answered in the nega 
 tive, like Engl. then ; see Kiihner $ 344. 5. b. 
 Ausf. Gr. 5834. 2. Winer 5 61. 2. n. So 
 
 91 apyos 
 
 Luke 18, 8 apa fvpr;(ret TTJV TT UTTIV eVi TTJS 
 yys ; Gal. 2, 17. Sept. for n Neh. 3, 34 
 [4, 2]. So Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 1 1. Plato Ph<ed. 
 103. d. Once strengthened, apa ye, Acts 
 8, 30 upa ye yivuicrKfts a dvayivuxrKfts , un- 
 derstandesl thou then ichat thou readest J 
 Sept. for rt Gen. 18, 13. 26, 9. So Xen. 
 OZc. 1.1. Plato Conv. 192. d. 
 
 Apaftia, as, 17, Arabia, (Heb. 3"i3>.) 
 the name of a vast region, including, as used 
 by geographers, the desert and peninsula 
 extending between Syria, Palestine, and the 
 Red Sea on the one side, and the Indian 
 ocean, the Persian gulf, and Babylonia on 
 the other. It is usually divided into Arabia 
 Felix occupying the peninsula in the South ; 
 Arabia Petrcca, so called from the city Pe- 
 tra (Jos. B. J. 1. 6. 2), south of Palestine, 
 along the Arabah, and including the penin 
 sula of Sinai ; and Arabia Deserta, the great 
 inland tract of desert, extending from Ara 
 bia Petrasa and Palestine to the Persian gulf 
 and Babylonia. In the O. T. the name 
 Arabia seems to have comprised only the 
 two latter divisions ; comp. Jer. 25, 23. 24. 
 Gesen. Comm. in Is. 21, 13. So also appa 
 rently in N. T. for Eusebius in the fourth 
 century says of Midian : Kflrai tneKfiva TTJS 
 Apa/3/ay Trpos VOTOV fi> e p^w rSav SapaKr/vcav 
 rrjs epvSpaj SaAducn;? eV uvaTO\rjs, Ono- 
 mast. art. MaSidv. For Arabia Petnea, see 
 Bibl. Res. in Pal. II. p. 559 sq. In N. T. 
 spoken : a) Of Arabia Petraea, Gal. 4, 
 25. b) Prob. of Arabia Deserta, i. e. the 
 northern portion adjacent to the territory of 
 Damascus, Gal. 1, 17. 
 
 apaye, see in apa no. 1. c. 
 
 ^Apdfj,, indec. Aram, Heb. d"i (high), 
 pr. n. of an ancestor of David, Matt. 1, 3. 4. 
 Luke 3, 33. Comp. Ruth 4. 19. 
 
 "Apaty, afios, 6, an Arabian, Acts 2, 1 1 
 
 dpyea), S), f. 770-0), (dpydr.) not to work, 
 to be idle, Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 57. Plato Rep. 
 561. d. In N. T. trop. to be inactive, slow, 
 to linger ; absol. 2 Pet. 2, 3 ols TO Kpipa . . . 
 OVK dpyeT. Sept. for ^?2 Ecc. 12, 3. So 
 1 Esdr. 2, 30. Pol. 3. 5. 8. 
 
 apyo$, T;, 6v, (dtpyos , a priv. tpyov,) 
 a later form occurring in Plut. Aristid. 16 
 f]p.pa apyj}. Aristot H. An. 10. 27. Arts~ 
 mid. 1. 32 ; instead of the earlier 6, fj dp- 
 yos, Xen. Cyr. I. 6. 17 (rrpartav dpyov. 
 Plato Euthyd. 272. a, /wx / dpyos. See 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 104. 
 
 1. not working, unemployed, idle ; of per 
 sons, Matt. 20, 3. 6 bis. With the idea of 
 choice, habit, 1 Tim. 5, 13 bis. So Lycurg. 
 
apyvpeos 
 
 172. 8. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 57. Hence, indo 
 lent, slothful, slow, e. g. in Christian duty 
 2 Pet. 1, 8. Trop. Tit. 1, 12 yao-repey ap- 
 yai slow bellies, lazy gormandizers. So 
 Ecclus. 37, 11. JEL. V. H. 10. 14. Plato 
 Rep. 421. d. 
 
 2. Of things, idle, useless,fruilless ; so pr. 
 of land untilled Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 2 ; of mo 
 ney lying without interest Dem. 815. 15. 
 Hence in N. T. trop. Matt. 12, 36 nav pi}- 
 fj.a dpyw erery idle word, i. e. morally use 
 less, and so by force of the context, evil, 
 
 1. q. TTovrjpov in v. 35, which is read in some 
 Mss. for dpyoV. So Symm. for ^^Q Lev. 
 19, 7 where Sept. cfavTov. Ci mp. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 57 TO p-eV epyarrjv eivai, oxpe Xi- 
 uov re dv%pu>na> KOI dyc&bv tlvai TO 8e dp 
 yov, /3Xa/3epoV Te *at KOKOV. Comp. also the 
 sophism, dpyos Xoyoy, Cic. de Fat. 12. 
 Also James 2, 20 Lachm. 17 TU O-TIS x^P * 
 T&v tpytav dpyr) eWt, where other editt. 
 
 VfKpd. 
 
 apyvpeos ovs, e a d, tov ow, adj. (apyv 
 pos, ) silver, of silver, Acts 19, 24. 2 Tim. 
 
 2, 20. Rev. 9, 20. Sept. Gen. 24, 53. 
 Xen. An. 4. 7. 27. 
 
 apyvpiov, iov, TO, (dim. apyvpos,) sil- 
 *er, genr. Sept. for ?i03> Job 28, 1. Xen. 
 /ect 4. 10. Ag. 8. 6. In N. T. meton. 
 tZcer for silver money. 
 
 1. Genr. Matt. 25, 18.27. Mark 14, 11. 
 Luke 9, 3. 19, 15. 23. 22, 5. Acts 7, 16. 8 
 20 ; also Acts 19, 19, see in no. 2 fin. 
 Sept. for t)03 Gen. 23, 9. 12. So Hdian. 
 
 2. 13. 12. Xen. An. 7. 3. 5. Coupled with 
 gold, TO xpvo-i oi/, Acts 3, 6. 20, 33. 1 Pet. 
 1, 18. So Sept. Gen. 13, 2. Xen. Athen. 
 
 3. 3. 
 
 2. Spec, a siherling, a piece of silver, a 
 silver coin, put usually for the Jewish shekel, 
 t |5tB, O-LK\OS, siclus, only Plur. ra dpyvpia 
 Matt. 26, 15. 27, 3. 5. 6. 28, 12. 15. So 
 Matt. 27, 9, comp. Zech 11, 13 where 
 Sept. Toiif TptaKoira dpyvpovs for Heb. 
 ?jD3n D^tti. The Jewish shekel was 
 originally a weight ; and both gold and sil 
 ver in bars or bits passed current by weight, 
 and not by tale; Gen. 23, 15. 16. Ex. 21, 
 32. Josh. 7, 21. The first mention of 
 coined money among the Hebrews is in the 
 time of the Maccabees ; when Simon re 
 ceived authority from Antiochus king of 
 Syria to stamp money in his own name ; 
 1 Mace. 15, 6. Silver coins equivalent to 
 the shekel and its parts, were accordingly 
 struck, bearing the inscription : ViXITa 1 bp\!3 
 shekel of Israel; specimens of which are 
 still extant in modern cabinets ; Boeckh 
 
 92 
 
 apyvpos 
 
 Metrolog. Untersuchungen p. 56. Bayer de 
 nummis Hebr. Samar. p. 171. Valent. 1781. 
 The LXX often translate the Heb. %& by 
 oiopaxp-ov a double drachma Josh. 7, 21. 
 Neh. 5, 15; and this compares well with 
 the ancient didrachm of JEgina. ; the heavi 
 est specimen extant of the shekel weighing 
 271 J Paris grains, and the calculated weight 
 of the yEginetan didrachm being 274 Par. 
 grains ; Boeckh 1. c. p. 55-57. But Jose- 
 phus and later writers give the value of the 
 shekel at four Attic drachmae ; Ant. 3. 8. 2 
 6 fie (TIK\OS, j o/xio p.a E/Spaitof a>i>, "Am/car 
 Several 8pa^as rtcrcrapas. This statement 
 is reconciled with the usage of the LXX, 
 by the fact that the Attic drachma was ori 
 ginally less than that of ./Egina ; and that 
 after the East came under the sway of the 
 Roman emperors, the Roman denarius was 
 regarded and became current as equiva 
 lent to the Attic drachma. Under Augustus 
 the denarius averaged 71.2 Par. grains of 
 silver ; under Tiberius 69.5 ; under Nero 
 65.85 ; and under Vespasian, when Jose- 
 phus wrote, 63.45 Par. grains ; while the 
 fourth part of the shekel, as also the fourth 
 part of the ./Eginetan didrachm, was 68.5 
 Par. grains ; Boeckh 1. c. p. 62, 63, 299. 
 Comp. Plin. H. N. 21. 109 Drachma At^ 
 tica denarii argentei habet pond us. From 
 these data the value of the earlier denarius 
 is reckoned at 8^d. sterling, or 17 cents ; the 
 later denarius at 1d. or 15 cents. The latter 
 value is that of the time of Josephus ; and the 
 shekel is therefore rightly estimated at 2s. 6d. 
 sterling, or 60 cents ; CQmp. Diet, of Antt. 
 art. Denarius. In Acts 19, 19 KOI evpov dp- 
 yvpiov p.vpido as TreVre i. e. ffiy thousand (if 
 money, prob. not the shekel, but the drach 
 ma or denarius is to be understood, making 
 an amount of 1562| sterling, or $7.500. 
 Others understand the shekel ; which would 
 quadruple the amount. In any case we 
 must take into account the very high price 
 of all ancient books ; and especially of those 
 prepared by the yonres or magicians. 
 
 apyvpoK07ro$, O v, 6, (apyvpos, 
 a worker in silver, a silver-smith, Acts 19, 
 24. Sept. Jer. 6, 29. Plut. de vitand. JErc 
 alien. 7. 
 
 apyvpos, ov, 6, (kindr. dpyos white.) 
 silver, as wrought, e. g. a) siher work, 
 shrines, plate, vessels, Acts, 17, 29. 1 Cor. 
 3, 12. James 5, 3. Rev. 18, 12. Sept. for 
 t)03 Is. 60, 9. So Hdian. 1. 14. 4. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 7. 25. b) silver money, Matt. 10, 
 9. So Jos. Ant. 9. 4. 4. Hdian. 2. 6. 11. 
 Pol. 16. 31. 3.5. 
 
*Apio? 93 
 
 "ApeioSj ov, 6, T), adj. ("Aprjs,} consecrat 
 ed to Mars, of Mars ; in N. T. only "Apeios 
 Tray os, Gen. Apeiov irdyov, Areopagus, 
 Mars Hill, pr. n. of a hill in Athens, where 
 the supreme judicial tribunal, instituted by 
 Solon, was held in the open air, Acts 17, 
 19. 22; see Potter s Gr. Antt. I. p. 101 sq. 
 Diet, of Antt. sub voc. So Dem. 641. 17. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 20. The hill of the Areo 
 pagus is a narrow ridge of naked limestone 
 rock, rising gradually from the northern 
 end, and terminating abruptly on the south 
 over against the west end of the Acropolis, 
 from which it bears about north ; being se 
 parated from it by an elevated valley. This 
 southern end is fifty or sixty feet above the 
 said valley ; though yet much lower than 
 the Acropolis. On its top are still to be 
 seen the seats of the judges and parties, 
 hewn in the rock ; and towards the S. W. 
 is a descent by a flight of steps, also cut in 
 the rock, into the valley below. See more 
 in Bibl. Res. in Palest. I. p. 10 sq. 
 
 ov, 6, an Areopagite, 
 a judge of the court of the Areopagus, Acts 
 17,34; seethe preced. art. ^Eschin. 11. 
 ult. Luc. Hermot. 64. For other less ap 
 proved forms, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 599, 
 698. 
 
 apecTKGiCt, as, TJ, (apeo-nos, dpeovcw,) act 
 of pleasing, a pleasing of any one ; Col. 1, 
 10 ds irao-av dpemutav unto all pleasing sc. 
 of him, the Lord. Sept. for ",n of a pleas 
 ing person and address, Prov. 31, 30. Philo 
 de Opif. Mundi p. 33. c, ds dpfo-Keiav TOV 
 norpos Ka\ j3ao-i\fa>s. Pol. 6. 2. 12 TOV /3a- 
 
 (Tt\fO>S. 
 
 f. ptVco, (apa>,) aor. 1 f/peo-a, 
 comp. Buttm. 114; to please, to gratify, 
 to make oneself acceptable ; c. dat. to any 
 one, Matt. 14, 6. Mark 6, 22. Rom. 8, 8. 
 15, 1. 3. 1 Cor. 7, 32. 33. 34. Gal. 1, 10 bis. 
 1 Thess. 2, 15. 4, 1. 2 Tim. 2, 4. Pres. de 
 conalu, Rom. 15, 2. 1 Cor. 10, 33. 1 Thess. 
 2, 4. Sept. for TJI Josh. 22, 30. 33. So 
 JEl V.. II. 2. 6. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 47. 
 Once with eVcorrtoi/ TWOS, id. Acts 6, 5. So 
 Sept. for 15153 SBi Deut. 1, 23. 1 K. 3, 
 10; also 1 Mace. 8, 21. 
 
 T), ov, adj. (dpeo-Kw,) pleasing, 
 acceptable ; c. dat. to any one, John 8, 29 TO. 
 dptfTTa TO> 3ew. (Ecclus. 48, 25. Plut. 
 Fab. M. 14. Xen. Conv. 8. 42.) With 
 fvwriov TWOS, id. 1 John 3, 22 ; comp. in 
 dpeo-Kct). So Sept. for 21:3 Is. 38, 3 ; visi 
 Ezra 10, 11. Hence, dpta-Tov eVri, 
 placet, to be pleasing, to please, c. dat. Acts 
 
 12, 3 ; with ace and inf. to be well, right t 
 Acts 6, 2. Sept. for 151312 aia Gen. 16, 6. 
 
 - - : 
 
 a, 6, Aretas, pr. n. of a king 
 of Arabia Petraca, whose daughter Herod 
 Antipas married, but afterwards repudiated 
 in order to marry Herodias ; see Matt. 14, 
 
 3. 4. Mark 6, 17. 18. Luke 3, 19. Upon 
 this Aretas made war upon Herod and to 
 tally defeated him. Vitellius, then procon 
 sul of Syria, undertook to chastise him ; but 
 on the death of Tiberius withdrew his 
 troops and went to Rome. It was probably 
 about this time, in A. D. 38 or 39, that 
 Aretas made an incursion into Syria and 
 seized upon Damascus ; which he held for 
 a time under the rule of an ethnarch, as re 
 lated by Paul, 2 Cor. 11, 32; comp. Acts 
 9, 24. 25. See Jos. Ant. 18. 5. 1-3. Bibl. 
 Res. in Palest. II. p. 560 sq. 
 
 dperr), fj s , 77, (apns, apprjv, ) manliness 
 valour in war, Lat. virtus, Xen. Ag. 10. 2 ; 
 good quality, excellence, of any kind, as of 
 land Jos. Ant. 4. 5. 3 ; of a chariot Xen. 
 Hi. 2. 2. In N. T. virtue, i. e. a) i. q. 
 efficacy, power; 2 Pet. 1, 3 8ia 80^? KM 
 dpfTTJs through his glory and power. Plur. 
 
 1 Pet. 2, 9. So plur. of deity Diod. Sic. 5. 
 71. b) Genr. moral goodness, excellence, 
 Phil. 4, 8. 2 Pet. 1, 5 bis. Comp. Wisd. 
 
 4, 1. Xen. Mem. 4. 8. 11. ib. 2. 6. 39. 
 apqv obsol. nom. whence gen. dpvos* 
 
 dat. dpvi, ace. apva, by sync, for dpevos, etc. 
 Buttm. 5 58 ; a lamb, trop. Luke 10, 3. 
 Sept. for iaas Gen. 30, 32. ^El. V. H. 1. 
 29. Plato Phsedr. 241. d. Others derive 
 the forms from an obsol. nom. lips. 
 
 dpfo/Jbeo), 5), f. 770-0), (upi3/ioj,) to num 
 ber, to count, c. ace. Rev. 7, 9. Pass. 
 Matt. 10, 30. Luke 12, 7. Sept. for iSB 
 Gen. 15, 5. Dem. 1303. 1. Xen. Com/. 
 4. 43. 
 
 dpfefJ,6$, ov, 6, number, a number, 
 Luke 22, 3. Acts 4, 4. 5, 36. 6, 7. 11, 21. 
 16, 5. Rom. 9, 27. Rev. 5, 11. 7, 4. 9, 16 
 bis. 20, 8. So John 6, 10 01 avbpes TOV 
 dpiS/itu/ u>(Tf\ iTfTaKicr\i\ioi, i. e. in number, 
 Buttm. 131. 7. Rev. 13, 17 and 15, 
 
 2 6 dpftp-bs TOV ovopaTos the number of the 
 name, i. e. which the letters of the name 
 make out. 13, 18 ter, dpi3/*6? dv3po>7rov a 
 man s number, made out by the letters of a 
 man s name. Sept. for IBOn 1 Sam. 6, 4. 
 Hos. 1, 10. Hdian. 7. 2.* 2. Xen. An. 1. 
 7. 10. 
 
 Apipcfeaia, as, 17, Arimaihea, pr. n. 
 of a town in Palestine, Ileb. rcQ,*\ Ramah; 
 perh. the Ramah of Samuel, called also 
 
94 
 
 Haramaihaim-zophim, 1 
 Sara. 1,1, whence the Gr. Api/iaSaia is 
 readily derived. But the position of this 
 place is yet unsettled ; see Heb. Lex. art. 
 """9*2 no. 2. b. Eusebius and Jerome men- 
 * nn an Armatha-sophim near to Lydda, 
 prob. towards the east, and regard it as the 
 Arimathea of Scripture ; but they also sup 
 pose it to be the Ramah of Samuel in Mount 
 Ephraim, which is impossible; Onomast. 
 sub v. The same is doubtless the f Pa/xa3/* 
 of 1 Mace. 11, 34, and the PajuaSa of 
 Jos. Ant. 13. 4. 9. It may have been 
 the Arimathea of the N. T. Its site has 
 not been found ; but it was not the same 
 with Ramleh, as some suppose ; this latter 
 being a modern place. See Bibl. Res. in 
 Palest. III. p. 33, 40, 43, 44. Matt. 21, 57. 
 Mark 15, 43. Luke 23, 51. John 19, 38. 
 
 Apia-Tap-frOS, ov, 6, (apurros, px<o,) 
 Aristarchus, pr. n. of a Thessalonian, one 
 of Paul s companions, who was seized in 
 the tumult at Ephesus, and was afterwards 
 carried as a prisoner with Paul to Rome ; 
 Acts 19, 29. 20, 4. 27. 2. Col. 4, 10. Phi- 
 lem. 24. 
 
 apto"To.a>, <, f. rjaco, (apio-rop,) to break 
 fast, to lunch, i. e. to take an early meal 
 before the ^^TTVOV or chief meal, John 21, 
 12. 15, comp. v. 4 ; also Luke 11, 37. See 
 in apio-Tov. Sept. for tanb iox Gen. 43, 
 25. So of an early breakfast, Xen. Cyr. 6. 
 3. 21 ; of a later lunch, JEl. V. H. 9. 19. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 12. 
 
 dpicrrepo?, d, 6v, left, Iccrus ; Matt. 
 6, 3 ?] dpiorTfpd sc. x f L P- (Xen. Cyr. 8. 4. 
 3.) Plur. Luke 23, 33 e dpia-repwv sc. 
 p.epa>v. 2 Cor. 6, 7. So Xen. Eq. 7. 11. 
 
 ?, ov, , 
 
 Aristobulus, pr. n. of a Christian, Rom. 16, 
 10. 
 
 apicrrov, ov, TO, (kindr. ypi, ear-ly,) 
 breakfast, a morning meal, at sunrise Horn. 
 IL 24. 124. Od. 16. 2. Later, breakfast, 
 lunch, Lat. prandium, taken about the mid 
 dle of the day ; the principal meal being the 
 Sflrrvov dinner, taken late in the afternoon 
 or early in the evening, after the heat and 
 business of the day were over ; as at the 
 present day in London and Paris ; see Pot 
 ter s Gr. Ant. II. p. 352 sq. Adam s Rom. 
 Ant. p. 433. Diet, of Antt. art. Deipnon. 
 In N. T. breakfast, lunch, Luke 11, 38. 14, 
 12. Matt. 22, 4. So Sept. 2 Sam. 24, 15. 
 Thuc. 4. 90. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 11 ; comp. 1. 
 2. 11 ; espec. Plut. Symp. 8. 6. 4. 
 
 dp/ceras, TJ, 6v, (ap/ceco.) sufficient, 
 enough ; c. dat. 1 Pet. 4, 3. Matt. 10, 25 
 
 v ro> [jiaSrjTfj, iva KT\. enough for the 
 disciple, that, etc. 6, 34 dpnerbv rrj fipepa fj 
 KaKia avTrjs, where for the neut. see Buttm. 
 5 129. 8. Kiihner 5 241. 2. Aquil. for ^ 
 Deut. 25,^2. Anthol. Gr. III. p. 110 dpne- 
 TOV o ivca bcffSoi KpaSirjv. Athen. 113. b. 
 
 ap/eea), &, f. eVw, to keep off, to ward 
 off, something from a person, TIVI Horn. 
 II. 6. 16. ib. 15. 534; to help, to assist, c. 
 dat. Horn, II. 21. 131. Od. 16. 261. In 
 N. T. to avail, to suffice, to be enough for 
 any purpose or thing, a) Genr. with nom. 
 of thing and dat. of pers. 2 Cor. 12,9 dpccei 
 o-ot TI xaptr P- ov - J nn 6, 7. Matt. 25, 9 p.jj- 
 TTOTf OVK dpKeo-Tj (TO ZXaiov) TJ/JUV KOL vfuv. 
 So Sept. 1 K. 8, 27. Hdian. 4. 7. 9. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 6. 12. b) Impers. dp net rip.1v, 
 it sufficeth us, we are content, John 14, 8. 
 Sept. Prov. 30, 16. Plato Prot. 355. a. 
 c) Pass. dpKov fi a i, to be sufficed, satisfied, 
 content, with any thing ; c. dat. Luke 3, 14. 
 1 Tim. 6, 8. Heb. 13, 5; with rt c. dat. 
 3 John 10. So c. dat. 2 Mace. 5, 15. Pol. 
 13. 2. 4. Plato Ax. 369. e. 
 
 apicof, ov, 6, f), a bear, Rev. 13, 2 
 Griesb. see in apKros. 
 
 ap/cros, ov, 6, f], a bear, Rev. 13, 2. 
 Sept. for ai 1 1 Sam. 17, 34. So JEl V. H. 
 13. 1. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 7. Griesbach and 
 others read SpKos id. as Jos. Ant. 6. 9. 3. 
 JEl. H. An. 1. 31. 
 
 , arcs, TO, (kindr. apw,) a chariot, 
 Acts 8. u8. 29. 38 ; for war, Rev. 9, 9. 
 Sept for ^ ?3-in Gen. 41, 43. Joel 2, 5. 
 JEl. V. H. 2. 27^ Hdian. 4. 7. 11 ;. for war 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 3. 8. 
 
 Ap/jLaye88a)v or Ap/uiayeScav, indec 
 Armageddon, pr. n. of a place, Rev. 16, 16. 
 The corresponding Heb. is I ^B ""!! mount 
 of Megiddo, prob. a Tell or acropolis near 
 the city Megiddo ; comp. YttM ri?p?3 plain 
 of Megiddo 2 Chr. 35, 22. Zech. 12, 11. 
 This latter was a part of the great plain of 
 Esdraelon adjacent to Megiddo, the present 
 Legio or Lejjun, where king Josiah was 
 slain and great mourning was made* 2 Chr. 
 35, 22-25. Zech. 12, 11. The nftme Ar 
 mageddon therefore stands emblematically 
 for a place of slaughter and mourning. 
 For Megiddo, see Bibl. Res. iu Pal. III. p. 
 177-180. 
 
 , f. oVco, (dp/io y,) for which the 
 Attics used apfj.6rru, Greg. Cor. p. 154. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 241 ; to fit or join toge 
 ther, T L nvt Horn. Od. 5. 247 ; spec, to join 
 together in marriage, to marry to any one. 
 e.g. a daughter, Sept. Prov. 19, 14. Hdo 
 
ap/409 
 
 95 
 
 9. 108 ; Mid. to marry, to take to wife, Hdot. 
 5.32. InN. T. Mid. app.6Cop.ai, spoken 
 of one who woos for another, to cause to be 
 married to any one, to espouse to any one ; 
 trop. c. ace. et dat 2 Cor. 11, 2 ripp.oa-dp.rjv 
 yap vp.ds (vl dv8pi. 
 
 dp/Ms, ov, 6, (pw,) a joining, joint, of 
 the body, Heb. 4, 12. Ecclus. 27, 2. Plut. 
 conjugal. Pracc. 3. Xen. Ven. 5. 29. 
 
 dpveo/Jiai, ovpai, f. r)o-op.ai, Mid. depon. 
 
 1 . to deny, e. g. followed by \tywv, Matt. 
 26,70 6 Se rjpvfjcraro . . . \eya>v. Mark 14, 
 68 ; impl. Matt. 26, 72. John 1, 20 ; by KCU 
 tlnfv John 18, 25; absol. Mark 14, 70. 
 Luke 8, 45. John 18, 27. (Sept. Gen. 18, 
 25. JE\. V. H. 14. 28.) Followed by or* 
 ov, 1 John 2, 22 6 dpvovp.evos, on 6 irjo-ovs 
 OVK fo-riv 6 Xp. for the negat. comp. Luke 
 20, 27. (Xen. Ath. 2. 17 ; o>s ov Dem. 124, 
 ult.) With an ace. of pers. to deny any 
 one to be what he claims to be ; 1 John 2, 
 22 6 dpvovp.fvos TOV rrarepa KOI TOV viov, i. e. 
 denying God to be the Father of Christ, and 
 Christ to be the Son of God. v. 23 ; ace. 
 impl. Tit. 1, 16. Also of things, ace. impl. 
 Acts 4, 16 ov &Wa/*e3a dpi/j?o-a<r3at SC. avro. 
 
 So Dem. 955. 10 T^V StaS^i/. Xen. Mem. 
 4. 2. 10 TOVTO. 
 
 2. Spec, to deny, to disown, to reject, not 
 to acknowledge, a) With ace. of pers. 
 Acts 7, 35 TOV Mcavo-Tjv, ov rjpvrjcravTo. So 
 Christ as master Luke 22, 57. John 13, 38 
 Lachm. or oftener as the Messiah, Matt. 10, 
 33. Luke 12, 9. Acts 3, 13. 14> 2 Pet. 2, 1. 
 Jude 4 ; ace. impl. 2 Tim. 2, 12 ; also TO 
 uvop.a avrov Rev. 3, 8. Also Jesus is said 
 to deny any one, i. e. not to acknowledge 
 him as his disciple and friend, Matt. 10, 33. 
 2 Tim. 2, 12. Further, tavrov dpvtlo-^ai, 
 to deny oneself, i. e. either to refrain from 
 the gratification of one s own appetites and 
 desires, Luke 9, 23 ; or, to be untrue to 
 one s own character and declarations, to be 
 inconsistent with oneself, 2 Tim. 2, 13. 
 b) With ace. of thing, i. q. to renounce, to 
 abjure, e. g. TTJV avffttiav Tit. 2, 12; rr)v 
 TT IO-TIV lr]<rov, i. e. practically to disown 
 and forsake it, 1 Tim. 5, 8. Rev. 2, 13; 
 TIJV 8vvap.iv TTJS fvo-fftflas 2 Tim. 3, 5. 
 r) With an infin. i. q. to refuse, Heb. 1 1, 24. 
 So Wisd. 16, 16. Antiph. 123. 12. Hdot. 
 6. 13. 
 
 dpviov, ov, TO, (dim. dpr]v,} a lamb, 
 lambkin, Sept. for to 23 Jer. 11, 19. Lys. 
 906. 2. In N. T. only trop. of Christians 
 John 21, 15 ; of Christ himself, only in the 
 Apocalypse, Rev. 5, 6. 8. 12. 13. 6, 1. 16. 7, 
 Q. 10. 14. 17. 12,11. 13,8.11. 14, 1.4 bis. 
 
 10. 15, 3. 17, 14 bis. 19, 7. 9 bis. 21, * 
 14. 22. 23. 27. 22, 1. 3. 
 
 apvo$ genit. see dptjv. 
 
 aporplCUO, &, f. do-a>, (apoTpov,) to 
 plough, absol. Luke 17, 7. 1 Cor. 9, 10 bis 
 Sept. for tthn Deut. 22, 10. Ecclus. 6, 19. 
 Theophr. de Caus. Plant. 4. 14. The At 
 tics preferred the form dpoco, Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 254. 
 
 aporpov, ov, TO, (tzpow,) a plough,mihe 
 proverb Luke 9, 62 ; comp. Wetst. N. T. 
 in loc. Sept. for nx Is. 2, 4. Luc. Con- 
 tempi. 24. Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 5. 
 
 dpjrayfy fj s , f], (apTrdfa,) seizure, pil 
 lage, spoiling, i. e. the act, Heb. 10, 34. 
 So Sept. Ecc. 5, 7. Hdian. 7. 9. 22. Xen. 
 Cyr. 7. 2. 11, 12. Trop. of a disposition, 
 ravening, rapacity, parall. rrovrjpia, dicpao-ia, 
 Luke 11,39. Matt. 23, 25. (Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 
 17.) Others less well, prey, spoil ; as Sept 
 Is. 3, 14. Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 26. 
 
 dp7ray/J,6s, O v, 6, (apirdfa, ) pr. seizure, 
 spoiling, robbery, i. q. apirayr). Phil. 2, 6 
 ov;^ apTra.yii.bv rjyfjcraTO TO eivat icra 3e<a i. C. 
 not as an act of robbery, not as the appro 
 priation of something not his own. So Plut. 
 de Puer. educ. 15 <a\ TOVS (j.ev 6/7/3/70-4 /ecu 
 TOVS "HXtSt (pfVKTfov fpwTas Kal TOV ex 
 KprjTrjs KoXovfitvov apTrayp.6v. Comp. Wetst. 
 N. T. in loc. Others meton. something 
 seized, booty, i. q. apTray/jLa, i. e. something 
 to be eagerly coveted and held fast ; comp. 
 Buttm. J 119. n. 4. Ausf. Sprachl. { 119. n. 
 
 11. So the Greek commentators ; comp. 
 Cyrill Alex, de Adorat. 1. p. 25, in Wetst. 
 ad loc. 
 
 apTra^B, f. do-a>, Pass. aor. 1 ^pivdo-^v 
 Rev. 12, 5 ; but Pass. aor. 2 fjpTrdyrjv, a 
 later form Buttm. $ 114, comp. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 241. 
 
 1. to seize and bear off, to catch up or 
 away, to carry off; e. g. of spoilers, or also 
 beasts of prey, c. ace. John 10, 12 6 Xi/Kos 
 uprrd&i aliTii. Trop. Matt. 13, 19. Sept. for 
 Cl"ia Ez. 22, 25. 27. So of spoilers Luc. 
 Hermot. 22. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 15, 17; of 
 wolves ib. 2. 7. 14. With ace. and TIJS 
 Xfipos TIVOS, John 10, 28. 29. So Sept. 2 
 Sam. 23, 1 1 ; comp. jrapd TIVOS Xen. Cyr. 
 4. 6. 4. 
 
 2. Without the idea of prey; lo catch- 
 away, to carry off, for safety, for one s be 
 nefit, etc. John 6, 15 apird&iv avrov, iva. 
 Troir]0~ojo-LV aiiTnv J3acri\a. Acts 8, 39. (Xen. 
 An. 4. 3. 6.) With ace. and e < c. gen. of 
 place, Acts 23, 10; ace. impl. Jude 23. 
 Pass, with an adjunct of place whither, e. g. 
 
96 
 
 rfjos c. ace. Rev. 12, 5; fls c. ace. 2 Cor. 
 12, 4. 1 Thess. 4, 17; ewy c. gen. 2 Cor. 
 12,2. 
 
 3. Trop. and without the idea of bearing 
 off, to seize, to take eagerly for oneself ; e. g. 
 TT/V fBacri\(iav TU>I> ovpavSiv Matt. 11, 12, im 
 plying the eagerness with which multitudes 
 embraced the gospel ; comp. TTO? fls avTrjv 
 Biderai Luke 16, 16. Comp. Hdian. 2. 6. 
 10. Plato Rep. 521. b, rdyaSoV. 
 
 apTTa^ ayos, 6, rj, adj. (dp7raco,) raven 
 ing, ravenous, of wild beasts, Matt. 7, 15 
 Xwcoi apirayes, an emblem of wicked men. 
 Sept. for ?na Gen. 49, 27. Subst. a robber, 
 extortioner, Luke 18, 11. 1 Cor. 5, 10. 11. 
 6, 10. So Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 6. 
 
 dppa/3<t)V, &vos, 6, Heb. "P^S, a pledge, 
 earnest, a mercantile term adopted from the 
 Phenicians as the founders of commerce, 
 Sept. and Heb. Gen. 38, 17. 18. 20. Isaeus 
 71. 20, 22. Plut. Galb. 17. In N. T. trop. 
 of the Holy Spirit imparted to Christians, as 
 the pledge, earnest, of their reception into 
 the kingdom of Christ and its privileges, 2 
 Cor. 1,22. 5, 5. Eph. 1, 14. 
 
 appa(f)o$, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. pdirra), ) 
 unsewed, without seam; John 19, 23 rjv 6 
 XITVV appcxpos, the tunic was icitliout seam, 
 i. e. not made of two parts sewed together 
 with seams on the shoulders and sides 
 (wore panros elvaC), but woven whole ; like 
 the tunic of the high priest, as described 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 7. 4. 
 
 fvos, 6, neut. TO appev, adj. later 
 Att. for apoyv q. v. Buttm. 16. n.3 ; male, 
 of the male sex, Rom. 1, 27. Rev. 12, 5. 13. 
 Sept. for i=t Lev. 27. 7. Hdian. 1. 2. 1. 
 Xen. (Ec. 7. 18. 
 
 " 
 
 apprjTOS, ov, 6, fj, adj. (a priv. faros, 
 
 epeiv,} unsaid, unspoken, Horn. Od. 14. 466; 
 not to be said or told, secret, Hdot. 5. 83. 
 In N. T. not to be spoken, unspeakable, unut- 
 lerable, e. g. p^ara 2 Cor. 12, 4. 
 
 appa>CTTO$, ov, 6, T), adj. (a priv. puvvv- 
 fu,~) infirm, weak, feeble, of the sick, Matt. 
 14, 14. Mark 6, 5. 13. 16, 18. 1 Cor. 11, 30. 
 Sept. for nVn 1 K. 14, 5. Ecclus. 7. 37. 
 Xen. GEc. 4. 2. 
 
 " > i 11 
 
 a p?: apvos, see uprjv. 
 
 ov , 6, (apa^v, /com?,) a 
 sodomite, one who lies with a male as with 
 a female, 1 Cor. 6, 9. 1 Tim. 1, 10 ; comp. 
 Rom. 1, 27. Diog. Laert. 6. 65. 
 
 M 
 
 apaijv, (vos, 6, neut. TO aparev, adj. Horn. 
 and old Att. for the later upfav q. v. Buttm. 
 5 16. n. 3 ; male, of the male sex, Matt. 19, 
 
 4. Mark 10, 6. Luke 2, 23. Rom. 1, 27 bis. 
 Gal. 3, 28. [Rev: 12, 5.] Sept. for "OJ 
 Gen. 1, 27. Horn. II. 8. 7. Soph. GEd. Col 
 339. 
 
 a, 6, Artemas, pr. n. of a 
 Christian, Tit. 3, 12. 
 
 os v. to?, fj, Artemis, Lat. 
 Diana, the goddess of hunting in the hea 
 then mythology, Acts 19,. 24. 27. 28. 34. 
 35. For the celebrated temple of Diana at 
 Ephesus, see "Efpecros. 
 
 apTefjiwv, ovos, 6, (dprdw,) prob. a top 
 sail, Lat. supparum, Acts 27, 40. Others, 
 a jib, Lat. dolon ; and others still, the miz- 
 zen-sail, Ital. artimone. Comp. Diet, of 
 Antt. arts. Ships, Malum. 
 
 apri* adv. of time, (perh. apw,) now, i. e. 
 
 a) just now, even now, spoken of a time just 
 elapsed, Matt. 9, 18. 1 Thess. 3, 6. This 
 is the prevailing usage among Attic writers ; 
 see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 18, 20. So 2 Mace. 3, 
 28. Died. Sic. 19. 102. Xen. Mem. 3. 6. 10. 
 
 b) now, at present, at this moment ; Matt. 
 
 3, 15 a(pes npri, suffer now, i. e. for the pre 
 sent. 26, 53. John 9, 19. 25. 13, 7 opp. 
 p-era ravra. 13, 33. 37 opp. vcrrfpov. 16, 12. 
 31. 1 Cor. 13, 12 bis, apri . . . rorf . 16, 7. 
 Gal. 1, 9. 10. 4, 20. 2 Thess. 2, 7. 1 Pel. 
 
 1, 6. 8. Rev. 12, 10. So Jos. Ant. 1. 6. 1 
 Ka7nra8oKai p.ev apri KfK\r]iTai. Xen. An. 
 
 4. 6. 1. Hence f) apn &pa the present hour 
 
 1 Cor. 4, 11 ; comp. Buttm. } 125. 6. So 
 eats apn until now, i. e. up to the present 
 moment, Matt. 11, 12. John 2, 10. 5, 17. 
 16, 24. 1 Cor. 4, 13. 8, 7. 15, 6. 1 John 
 
 2, 9. c) air apn, from now, henceforth, 
 see art. dndpTi. 
 
 dpTLyevi>7]TOS. ov, 6, f), adj. (apri, yev- 
 VTJTOS,) just now born, new born ; trop. of 
 those who have just embraced the Chris 
 tian faith, 1 Pet. 2, 2. Pr. Luc. Alex. 13. 
 ib. D. Mar. 12. 1. 
 
 aprios, ov, 6, i}, adj. (apa>, a/m,) com 
 plete, perfect in its kind ; so of a religious 
 teacher, who should be wanting in nothing, 
 
 2 Tim. 3, 17. Theophr. Hist Plant. 2. 7. 
 Philo Legat. ad Cai. p. 1000. Etymol. M. 
 aprios <TT][j.aii>{i TOV vyif) KOI 7rf7T\rjpa>fJ.(Vov. 
 
 a/3T09, ov, 6, bread, Sept. for Heb. crt? . 
 
 1. Pr. as made of flour, bread, a loaf, 
 Plur. iiproL loaves, usually in the form oi 
 round cakes or sheets, but of no regular 
 size or thickness ; see Bibl. Res. in Palest. 
 II. p. 444, 496. III. p. 76. Winer Realw. 
 art. Backen. a) Genr. Matt. 4, 3. 7, 9 
 14, 17. 19. 15, 33. 34. 36. Mark 6, 41. 
 John 21, 9. 13. al. Sept. for nr> 1 Sam. 
 
aprva) 97 
 
 17, 17. So Hdian. 4. 7. 9. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 7. 5. b) Of the skew-bread in the taberna 
 cle, oi op-rot TIJS TrpoSecrecoy Matt. 12, 4. 
 Mark 2, 26. Luke 6, 4 ; comp. 1 Sam. 24, 
 47. Also f) npoSfcris TU>V apru>v Heb. 9, 2. 
 See genr. Lev. 24, 6-9. Heb. Lex. Drib 
 no. 2. c) Of the bread in the Lord s sup 
 per, Matt. 26, 26. Mark 14, 22. Luke 22, 
 19. Acts 20, 7. 1 Cor. 10, 16. 17. 11, 23. 
 26. 27. 28. 
 
 2. By Hebr. like Drib, meal, food of any 
 kind. a) Pr. Matt. 15, 26 rov aprov TWV 
 renvuiv the children s food, intended for them. 
 Mark 7, 27. Luke 15, 17. John 6, 31. 32. 
 34. 41. al. Sept. for nob Gen. 43, 31. 32. 
 Is. 8, 7. al. So (p aye i v aprov Mark 3,20. 
 Luke 14, 1, also to-Zteiv aprov Matt. 15, 2. 
 Mark 7, 5, to eat meat, i. e. to take food, to 
 take a meal, to eat, generally ; so Sept. and 
 nnb b=X Gen. 37, 24. 1 K. 13, 8-23. al. 
 Luke 7, 33 p-ijre aprov eVS/coi/ /ujre olvov TTI- 
 vaiv neither eating (usual) food nor drinking 
 wine, i. e. living abstemiously as a Nazarite. 
 Also John 13, 18 6 Tpa>yu>i> p-er e /zov TOV 
 aprov, i. e. my table-friend, familiar com 
 panion; quoted from Ps. 41, 10 where Heb. 
 " Onb bsiX , Sept. 6 fv Siw aprovs pov. 
 Hence aprov (payelv Trap a TIVOS to eat meat 
 from any one, to be sustained by, 2 Thess. 3, 
 8 ; opp. TOV favTutv apron eVStetv, to sustain 
 themselves, v. 12 ; comp. Sept. and Heb. 
 2 Sam. 9, 7. 10. Trop. Luke 14, 15 /ia/ca- 
 pios, os (payerai aprov eV rfj /3a<riXe/a 
 TOW 3foO, the joy and bliss of the kingdom 
 of heaven being represented under the em 
 blem of a feast; comp. Matt. 8, 11. Luke 
 13, 28. 29. 22, 16. Rev. 19, 9. b) In a 
 wider sense, i. q. provision, sustenance, living, 
 Matt. 6, 11. Luke 11, 3. Sept. for cnb 
 Ecc. 9, 11. Neh. 5, 14. 15; so anb, Sept 
 ra SeWa, 1 K. 5, 2 [4, 22]. c) Trop. of spi 
 ritual food. 6 apro? (K TOV ovpavov \. TOV 3foi) 
 v. TTJS Cco^?, i. e. that divine aliment presented 
 to the life and soul of Christians in the per 
 son of Christ, John 6, 32. 33. 35. 48. 51. 
 58 ; contrasted with the manna, v. 49. 58. 
 Comp. 6 apTos <ro<pias Prov. 9, 5. Ecclus. 
 15,3. + 
 
 aprvco, f. vo-a>, (apw,) to fitly arrange, 
 to prepare, e. g. an army for battle, Horn. 
 II. 15. 303. In later writers and N. T. a 
 culinary word, to season, to flavour food or 
 the like ; c. ace. Mark 9, 50 eV T/I/I ai/To 
 dpTvo-fT ; wherewith will ye season it 1 i. e. 
 recover the salt. Pass. Luke 14, 34 ; comp. 
 Matt. 5, 13 and oXi fia. Trop. of discourse, 
 6 \6yos . oXari fjpTvp.fvos Col. 4, 6. So 
 genr. Symm. f/pTvp-evov for np"i Cant. 8, 2. 
 7 
 
 Soph. Fragm. 601. Athen. 2. p. 67 CV 
 saub. 
 
 Ap(j>aj;d8, 6, indec. Arphaxad, Heb 
 lubD-iN, a son of Shem, Luke 3, 36. 
 Comp. Gen. 10, 22. 24. 11, 10. 12. 
 
 dpXayye\o?, O v, 6, (dpxv, ayyeXos,) 
 an archangel, 1 Thess. 4, 16. Jude 9. 
 Sept. ds T&V dpx<jvru>v, Heb. D^n^Jn IMS 
 fiiiVJi in , Dan. 10, 13 ; also 6 apx^v 6 /* - 
 yas, Heb. bilJri l ; ^n, Dan. 12, 1. Of the 
 archangels there are said to be seven, who 
 stand immediately before the throne of God, 
 Rev. 8, 2. Luke 1, 19. Tob. 12, 15 ; who 
 have authority over other angels, Rev. 12 1 , 
 7 ; and are the patrons of particular nations, 
 Dan. 10, 13. 12, 1. The names of three only 
 are found in the Jewish writings ; Michael, 
 the patron of the Jewish nation, Jude 9. Rev. 
 12, 7. Dan. 10, 13. 21. 12, 1 ; Gabriel, 
 Luke 1, 19. 26. Dan. 8, 16. 9, 21; and 
 Raphael, Tob. 12, 15. The book of Enoch 
 adds that of Uriel; Lib. Henoch. p. 187 
 ot reVaapes /xeyaXoi dp^ayyeXot, Mi^aijX, 
 KCU Ovpirj\, KOI Pa<paijX, Kal Fa/3pi?jX. p. 
 190, 191, 193. 
 
 ap%atO<?, aia, a iov, (dp%T],) ancient, old, 
 of former days, of old; Matt. 5, 21. 27. 33, 
 where Christ is speaking of Jewish tradi 
 tions. Luke 9, 8. 19. Acts 15, 7. 21. 21, 
 16. 2 Cor. 5, 17. 2 Pet. 2, 5. Rev. 12, 9. 
 20, 2. Sept. for nn^ 1 K. 4, 30 ; ^tfiE 
 Is. 43, 18. 2 Macc. V 6, 22. Diod. Sic. l/e", 
 31. Xen. Mem. 2. 8. 1. 
 
 ApxeXao?, ov, 6, Archelaus, a son 01 
 Herod the Great, by Malthace his Samari 
 tan wife, Jos. Ant. 17. 1.3. B. J. 1. 28. 4. 
 Herod bequeathed to him his kingdom pro 
 per (Ant. 17. 8. 1, 2, 4. B. J. 1. 33. 8) ; 
 but Augustus confirmed him in the posses 
 sion of only the half of it, viz. Idumea, Judea, 
 and Samaria, with the title of ethnarch, f 3- 
 vdpxrjs, ib. 17. 11. 4. B. J. 2. 6. 3. After 
 about ten years, he was banished, on ac 
 count of his cruelties, to Vienne in Gaul, 
 Jos. B. J. 2. 7. 3 ; and his territories were 
 reduced to the form of a Roman province 
 under the procurator Coponius, ib. 2. 8. 1. 
 In N. T. he is said /3ao-iXevj/ to be king 
 Matt. 2, 22, referring to the interval imme 
 diately after the death of his father, when 
 according to Herod s testament he was king ; 
 comp. Ant. 17. 8. 4. 
 
 "PX 7 ? *) s > V a beginning, what is first 
 in time or place. 
 
 1 . Of time, the beginning, commencement, 
 Matt. 24, 8. Mark 1, 1. 13, 9. John 2, 11. 
 Heb. 7, 3. Sept. for rnm 1 ] Job 40, 14 ; 
 
98 
 
 tn Hos. 1,2. So Hdian. 1. 5. 26. Xen. 
 Cyr. 5. 5. 16. Hence dpx^v Xap./3d- 
 vf iv, to take beginning, to begin, Heb. 2, 3. 
 (Ml V. H. 2. 28.) Also Heb. 3, 14 rr^v 
 apxnv Trjs vTroa-rda-ecas the beginning of our 
 confidence, i. e. our first confidence, our 
 faith as at first. Heb. 5, 12 ra oroi^eTa TTJS 
 dpxfjs, i. e. the first rudiments ; and so 6, 1 
 6 \6yos TIJS dpxfjs T v Xp. With Preposi 
 tions, etc. a) an dpx^js, from the begin 
 ning, from the first. So from eternity, from 
 everlasting ; as of God s purposes of grace, 
 2 Thess. 2, 13 ; of the Logos 1 John 1,1. 
 
 2, 13. 14 ; comp. John 1,1. Also from the 
 beginning of the world, of creation, of old; 
 fully an dpxfjs TOV Kocrp-ov V. rf/s KTiueuis, 
 Matt. 24, 21. Mark 10, 6. 13, 19. 2 Pet. 3, 
 4; absol. id. Matt. 19, 4. 8. So of Satan, 
 from the beginning of his existence or 
 agency as such, John 8, 44. 1 John 3, 8. 
 (Sept. for d"i|3a Hab. 1, 12 ; ttixia Ecc. 
 
 3, 11. Hdot. 104, 113.) Further, from 
 the beginning of the gospel history, Luke 1 , 
 
 2. John 15, 27; of the gospel as preached, 
 1 John 2, 7 bis. 24 bis. 3, 1 1. 2 John 5. 6 ; of 
 one s life Acts 26, 4. b) eV dpxfj, inthebe- 
 ginning, in the very first, before the world 
 began, from eternity, John 1,1.2; comp. 17, 
 
 5. 24. (Sept. and n^ias nS of the creation 
 Gen. 1, 1.) Also of any event, in the be 
 ginning of the gospel, Acts 11, 15. Phil. 4, 
 15. So genr. Diod. Sic. 19. 110. Pol. 8. 
 
 3. 1. c) e d p x^i s, from the beginning, 
 from the first, sc. of Christ s ministry, John 
 
 6, 64. 16, 4. So genr. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 5. 
 d) KOT dpxds, at the beginning sc. of the 
 world, of old, Heb. 1, 10 ; quoted from Ps. 
 102, 26 where Sept. for t^ssb. So genr. 
 Plut. Solon 3. Plato Legg* 780. b. e) 
 Ace. TTJV dpxyv, adv. at first, first, Sept. 
 for rdnria Gen. 43, 18. 20. (Hdian. 3. 1. 15. 
 Plato Conv. 1 90. b.) Hence, first of all, alto 
 gether, wliolly , John 8, 25 rrjv dpxrjv S,rt KOI 
 XoXo> vfuv first of all (altogether) that which 
 I also say unto you ; so Euthym. oXws. Plato 
 Lysis 215. b, nats ovv ol dyaSot Tols dya- 
 3ots fjiuv (f>i\oL ecrovrai TTJV dpxrjv, KT\. Philo 
 de Abrah. p. 366. c. Oftener with a negat. 
 i. q. Lat. omnino non, not at all, Philo de 
 spec. Legg. 796. a. Hdot. 4. 25, 28. Plato 
 Theaet. p. 185. d. 
 
 2. Meton. of a person, the first, primus ; 
 e. g. Christ, Col. 1, 18 os ea-riv dpxrj, Trpco- 
 TOTO KOJ eK rcav vetptov. (Comp. Sept. dp%r] 
 Tiaav first-born for *ti& niffix-n Gen. 49, 
 3. Deut. 21, 17.) Rev. 3, 14 17 dpxv ^ 
 KTia-fws, comp. Prov. 8, 22. Also 17 dpxrj 
 Koi TO reXof the beginning and the end, the 
 
 first and the last, Rev. [1,8.] 21, 6. 22, 13 
 where it is i. q. npatros KOI ecr^aroy. So 
 Jos. C. Ap. 2 22 Seos . . . dpxr) KOI p.taa not 
 reXos Trdvrcnv. 
 
 3. Of place, a beginning, extremity, cor 
 ner, e. g. of a sheet, Acts 10, 11. 1], 5. 
 Sept. for nsj3 Ez. 48, 1 ; ns(3 Ex. 28, 23 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 35. Hdot. 4. 60. 
 
 4. Of rank, dignity, the first place or 
 poicer. a) Genr. i. q. power, dominion, 
 rule ; Luke 20, 20 els TO napa^ovvai avrov 
 TTJ dpxfj TOV rj-yffj,wos. Jude 6. Sept. for 
 HbiDaa Mic. 4, 8. So Pol. 3. 40. 9. Xen. 
 Mem. i. 1. 16. b) Meton. in Plur. or col 
 lect. rulers, magistrates, princes, potentates, 
 or the like ; so of civil rulers, Luke 12, 11. 
 Tit. 3, 1. (Sept. for nix*) Mic. 3, 1. Pol. 
 23. 10. 2. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 12.) Of the 
 chief powers or potentates among angels, 
 Eph. 1, 21. 3, 10. Col. 2, 10; among de 
 mons,! Cor. 15,24. Eph. 6, 12. Col. 2, 15; 
 genr. of the powers of the other world, Rom. 
 8, 38. Col. 1, 16. Comp. in fgovo-ia no. 4. c. 
 
 ov, , pxr], aya> or yyeopai.) 
 pr. one first leading, i. e. a leader, founder, 
 author, c. gen. of thing, Acts 3, 15. Heb. 2, 
 10. -12, 2. So Sept. Mic. 1, 13. Hdian. 7. 
 1. 22. Xen. Hell. 3. 3. 5. Absol. a leader, 
 chief, a prince, Acts 5, 31. Sept. for "i&? 
 Is. 30, 4. So Dem. 1378. 6. Thuc. 1. 132. 
 
 a PX i ~ mse P- P ar t- ("PX 7 ? ) Engl. arch-, 
 i. e. first, chief, prefixed to names of office 
 or dignity. 
 
 apftiepaTlKOS, 77, 6v, (dp^tepevy,) of the 
 high priest, high priestly ; Acts 4, 6 IK ye- 
 vovs dpxiepaTiKnv. Jos. Ant. 4. 4. 7 dp^te- 
 paTiKrj (TTo\rj. ib. 6. 6. 3. 
 
 ap^iepeiX), {cos, 6, (lepevs,) a chief priest, 
 the high priest, Heb. >"il^ ]^r\ ; for 
 which Sept. once dp^iepevs Lev. 4, 3 ; but 
 usually 6 ifpevs 6 p.eyas Lev. 21, 10. Num. 
 35, 25. al. So dpxiepevs 1 Mace. 10, 20. 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 7. 1 ; comp. Pol. 23. 1 2. ib. 
 32. 22. 5. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Sing, the high priest of the Jews, Matt. 
 26,3.62.63.65. Mark 2, 26. 14,47.53. Luke 
 22, 50. John 11, 49. 51. al. According to 
 the divine appointment, the high priest wfas 
 to be of the family of Aaron, Ex. 29, 9. 
 He held office for life, and was succeeded 
 by his son; comp. Jos. Ant. 20. 10. p. 978 
 Haverc. Herod the Great first gave the 
 office to other and even obscure priests; 
 and his example was followed by the Ro 
 mans ; Jos. 1. c. p. 980. The latter made 
 it venal and temporary ; bestowing it even 
 on foreio-n Jews ; 2 Mace. 4, 7. Jos. Ant. 
 
99 
 
 15. 3. 1 Hence there were often several 
 persons living at one time who had borne 
 the office, and still retained by courtesy the 
 title of high priest; Jos. B. J. 4. 5. 2. 
 Ant. 20. 9. 2, comp. 15. 3. 1. In the O. 
 T. we find a Fi^E^ "j^P) the second priest, 
 2 K. 25, 18. Jer. 52, 24; he was prob. the 
 priest next in rank to the high priest. From 
 him seems to have been derived the more 
 doubtful "(JO or "j?0 of the Rabbins, i. e. 
 a vicar or substitute for the high priest, to 
 perform his duties on certain occasions ; as 
 when accidentally unclean ; see Buxtorf. 
 Lex. art. "J5D. Lightfoot Hor. Heb. ad Luc. 
 3, 2. Reland Antt p. 89. Winer Realw. 
 art. Hoherpriester,vlt. Comp. Jos. Ant. 17. 
 
 6, 4. For one or more of these reasons, 
 Annas is called high priest, Luke 3, 2. 
 John 18, 13. Acts 4, 6 ; see "Away. Other 
 high priests mentioned in N. T. are Abia- 
 thar, Gaiaphas, and Ananias ; see in Apid- 
 3a/j, Kaid(pas, Avavias. The chief and pe 
 culiar duty of the high priest in the times of 
 the N. T. was to go alone once a year into 
 the holy of holies in the temple to make ex 
 piation for the people on the great day of 
 atonement; Lev. 16, 1 sq. Heb. 9, 7. 25. 
 He might also take part in all the ordinary 
 services of the priests ; but seldom did so 
 except upon the sabbath or a high festival ; 
 Jos. B. J. 5. 5. 7. He had the oversight of 
 the service and treasures of the temple (2 
 K. 22, 4. 2 Mace. 3, 4-12) ; and was the 
 presiding officer in the earlier supreme court 
 of the priests and of the later Sanhedrim ; 
 Deut. 17, 8-12. Matt. 26, 57. Acts 5, 21. 
 
 7, 1. 23, 2. The high priest was thus the 
 ecclesiastical head of the nation, even for 
 the Jews li ving out of Palestine ; Acts 9, 1 . 
 2. 14. Jos c. Ap. 2. 23. Spec, in the 
 Epist. to the Hebrews, Christ is called dp- 
 Xitpevs, as having offered up himself as an 
 atoning sacrifice ; the true and great high 
 priest, of whom those of the Jewish dispen 
 sation were only types and shadows ; Heb. 
 2, 17. 3, 1. 4, 14. 5, 5. 10. 6, 20. 7, 26. 
 
 8, 1. 9, 11 ; comp. 8, 2. 5 sq. 
 
 2. Plur. the chief priests, as members of 
 the Sanhedrim, Matt. 2, 4. 16, 21. 26, 3. 
 Mark 8, 31. 14, 1. Luke 9, 22. 22, 2. John 
 7, 32. 18, 35. Acts 4, 23. 26, 10. al. These 
 included those priests who were of the im 
 mediate kindred of the high priest, Acts 4, 
 6 ; as also the heads of the twenty-four 
 classes of priests, 1 Chr. c. 24 ; who are 
 there called E^n sb ninxn *UX*\, Sept. 
 upxovrfs To)i> Trarpicoi/ ra>v iepeSiv, V. 6. 31. 
 Others, with the Rabbins, include also the 
 
 heads of the families of priests in each class ; 
 and, further, those who were set over the 
 different parts of the temple service ; Light- 
 foot Hor. Heb. ad Matt. 2, 4. So genr. dp- 
 XKpfls Jos. Ant. 20. 8. 8. B. J. 4. 3. 6. 
 Different phrases, of which ol ap^ifpeiy al 
 ways forms part, are used by periphrasis for 
 the Sanhedrim ; see Matt. 2,4. 16, 21. 20, 
 18. 26, 3. 59. 27, 1. + 
 
 ap^i7TOi/i77Z>, ej/oy, 6. (Trotyl/,) a chief 
 shepherd ; trop. of Christ as the chief teach 
 er and head of the church, 1 Pet. 5, 4. 
 
 "Ap%i7T7ro$) ov, 6, Archippus, pr. name 
 of a Christian, Col. 4, 17. Philem. 2. 
 
 dpXKrvvdywyos, O v, 6, (mwnywyqO the 
 ruler of a synagogue, the chief director, 
 Mark 5, 35. 36. 38. Luke 8, 49. 13, 14. 
 Acts 18, 8. 17 ; synon. is 6 apxav rfjs crvv 
 ayayfjs Luke 8, 41. There were TrpearjBv- 
 repoi, elders, in each synagogue (Luke 7, 3), 
 who had the general oversight of all mat 
 ters ; and these apparently are called dpxt- 
 o-wdya>yoi Mark 5, 22. Acts 13, 15. But 
 the name seems usually applied to their 
 chief or presiding elder. See Vitringa de 
 Synag. Vet. 2. 11. ib. 3. 1. 9. 
 
 dp%lTfCTO)V, ovos, 6, (reKTov,) an ar 
 chitect, a master-builder, 1 Cor. 3, 10. Sept. 
 for tinn Is. 3, 2. Pol. 13. 4. 6. Xen. Mem. 
 4. 2. 10. 
 
 ap^tTeXaJiT??, ov, 6, (reXcoj^y.) a chief 
 publican, a chief collector or agent of the 
 farmers of the taxes, having authority over 
 subordinate collectors, Luke 19, 2. See in 
 
 Si ov, 6, (rpiKXivos, Lat. 
 triclinium,) the master of a feast, Lat. magis- 
 ter comirii, who had the direction of an en 
 tertainment, arranged the guests, and the like, 
 John 2, 8. 9 bis. See Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 
 456. Diet, of Antt. art. Symposium; and for 
 the triclinium see Adam, ib. p. 436. Diet, of 
 Antt. art. Triclinium. In Ecclus. 35 [32], 1 
 he is called rj-yovpevos ; by the Greeks, a~vp.- 
 Troaiapxos, CTV/ITTOCTIOV {VtfieA^T^y, rpairf^o- 
 Troto y, etc. See Potter s Gr. Ant. II. p. 386. 
 apxp), f. <a, (dpxr],) to begin, to be first 
 in any thing, Horn. II. 1. 495. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 3. 14. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Act. to be first in rank, power, i. q. to 
 rule, to reign, c. gen. Mark 10, 42. Rom. 
 15, 12, quoted from Sept: Is. 11, 10. Sept 
 for felfl Gen. 1, 18. 1 Mace. 1.4. Hdian. 
 8. 8. 1/Xen. An. 6. 6. 9. 
 
 2. Mid. depon. ap^o^iai, fut. ap^ofuii 
 once Luke 13,26, aor. 1 f]pgdfj.yv, to begin, 
 construed : a) With an infin. expressing 
 
100 
 
 d(re\,yeia 
 
 what one begins to do, be, or suffer ; Matt. 
 4, 17 ijffa.To 6 irjo-ovs Kijpvaa fiv Kal \(yeiv. 
 11, 7. 20. 12, 1. Mark 5,20. 8, 11. Luke 
 
 4, 21. 7, 15. John 13, 5. Acts 2,4. 11,15. 
 2 Cor. 3, 1. al. ssep. Sept. for bnn Gen. 
 6, 1; ^Xl n Deut. 1, 5. (^Eschin. 4. 16. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 6. 3.) In the simplicity and 
 particularity of the ancient manner, a per 
 son is often said to begin to do what he is 
 to be understood as having actually done ; 
 Matt. 16,22 6 IleVpoy rjp^aro eViri/xaj/ avrw. 
 26, 74. Mark 4, 1. 5, 17. 6, 2. 7. 34. 8, 31. 
 32. 10, 32. Luke 5, 21. 7, 49. al. Comp. 
 in di/iVr^/u II. 1. a. b) Particip. with infin. 
 e. g. Pres. Luke 21, 28 dpxopevuv TOVTWV 
 ytVeo-3at. Aor. 1, Matt. 14, 30 dpt-dp.fvos 
 Kara7rofri eo-3at. 18,24. Absol. aor. 1 , Acts 
 11, 4 dp^dfjifvos 8e 6 Ilerpos [sc. Xeyfiy] 
 J er/3eTo. Pres. Luke 3, 23 KOI avrbs r]v 
 6 ITJCTOVS axrel eruiv rpiaKovra dpxopevos 
 and Jesus himself was about thirty years old 
 as he began sc. his public ministry, i. e. by 
 his baptism and the descent of the Spirit 
 upon him," v. 22 ; so Euthym. Zig. dpx6p.f- 
 vos TJJS (Is TOV \aov dvaSdf-f&s avrov 777-01 
 Trjs 8iSao-KaX/ay. Others here connect yv 
 dpxopfvos and make it govern (T>V, q. d. 
 he ivas beginning about thirty years; but 
 though apx(o-%ai trovs TpiaKocrTov might be 
 allowed, yet not op^fo-Sai erS>v TpiaKovra. 
 and still less with cbcret. c) Constr. with 
 OTTO c. gen. of that from or at which one 
 begins ; so 1 Pet. 4, 17 6 Katpbs TOV apja- 
 trSai TO Kpifj.0 OTTO TOV QLKOV rov 3eoi, i. e. 
 at the house of God, the church ; comp. 
 1 Tim. 3, 15. (Sept. Ez. 9, 6.) Elsewhere 
 only Part, dp dfj.evos OTTO TWOS, as Matt. 
 20, 8 dpd[j.ei>os OTTO TU>V ecrxdraiv eats TU>V 
 trpwTooi/. Luke 23, 5. 24, 27. 47. John 8, &. 
 Acts 1, 22. 8, 35. 10, 37. So Sept. Gen. 
 44, 12. Theophr. Char. 2. 1. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 1.1. + 
 
 apxatv, OVTOS, 6, (apx&>,) pr. one first in 
 power, authority, dominion ; hence a ruler, 
 lord, a chief person, a magistrate, Matt. 20, 
 25. Acts 4, 26. 7, 27. 35. 16, 19. 23, 5. 
 Rom. 13, 3. 1 Cor. 2, 6. 8 ; of a judge, i. q. 
 6 Kpirrjs, Luke 12, 58 ; of Moses as the 
 leader of Israel Acts 7, 35 ; of Christ as 
 King of kings Rev. 1, 5. Sept. for V>ffin 
 Is. 14, 5; "to Gen. 12, 15; Tfea Gen. 49, 
 20. So Hdian. 4. 2. 8. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 2, 
 
 5. Mem. 3. 9. 10, 11. Elsewhere in a 
 Jewish usage, e. g. a ruler of a synagogue, 
 Luke 8, 41. Matt. 9, 18. 23. So of per 
 sons of weight among the Pharisees and 
 other sects, who were members of the San 
 hedrim. Luke 14, 1. 18, 18. 23, 13. 35. 
 
 24, 20. John 3, 1 (comp. 7, 45. 50). 7, 26. 
 48. 12,42. Acts 3, 17. 4, 5.8. 13,27. 14, 
 5 ; comp. Sept. for E" 1 ?^ magnates Neh. 4, 
 8. 13. 5,7. Jos. Ant. 20. 1. 2 qovovrfy Ifpo- 
 o-o\vp.iTa>v. Also of Satan as prince, of the 
 fallen angels, apx^v TIOV Sai/xoz/uoi/ Matt. 9, 
 34. 12, 24. Mark 3, 22. Luke 11, 15; ap~ 
 XQ>V TOV Kocrp.ov TOVTOV John 12, 31. 14, 30 
 16, 11 ; apxav rf/s eov<rias TOV depos Eph 
 2, 2, see in drjp. 
 
 apatfjba, arcs, TO, aroma ; Plur. dpw- 
 paTci, aromatics, spices, spicery, e. g. myrrh 
 and aloe, John 19, 40 comp. 39. Mark 16, 
 1. Luke 23, 56. 24, 1. Sept. for Ctoa 
 Cant. 4, 10. 16. Hdian. 3. 15. 16. Xen. 
 An. 1. 5. 1. 
 
 Acrd, 6, indec. Asa, Heb. NOX (perh. 
 physician), a pious king of Judah, Matt. 1, 
 7. 8. See 1 K. 15, 9 sq. 2 Chr. c. 14-16. 
 
 aaaXevros, O v, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. o-a- 
 Aevw,) unshaken, immovable, Acts 27, 41. 
 Trop. firm, enduring, Heb. 12, 28. Plut. 
 Pericl. 39 do-fpaXes (8os Kal dtrdXevTcv. 
 Trop. Diod. Sic. 2. 48. Plato Ax. 370. d. 
 
 acr/3ecrroy, O v, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. o-#eV 
 i/t>p,) unquenched, unextinguished, e. g. 
 lamps Strabo 9. p. 606. c. In N. T. un 
 quenchable, eternal, of fire, Matt. 3, IS 
 Mark 9, 43. 45. Luke 3, 17 ; comp. Mat*. 
 18, 8. So Horn. Od. 4. 584. JSschy 
 Prom. 531. 
 
 aa-epeia, ay, 17, (ao-*/3ijf,) irreverent* 
 towards God, ungodliness, in heart or deed, 
 Rom. 1, 18. 11, 26. 2 Tim. 2, 16. Tit. -2, 
 12. Jude 15 TO epya da-efBf ias the icorks oj 
 ungodliness, i. q. ungodly works ; also v. T8. 
 Sept. for SOB Jer. 5, 6; ^. Prov. 4, 17. 
 m. V. H/5. 12, 19. Xen. Cyr. 8. 8. 7. 
 
 tttre/3e&), 5, f. jjo-w, (do-e/3^p,) to be ir 
 reverent, to live ungodly, absol. 2 Pet. 2, 6. 
 Also c. ace. to do or commit irreverently, 
 wickedly, by attract. 2>i> for a Jude 15 ; see 
 Winer 5 32. 1. Sept. for S05Q Zeph. 3, 12 ; 
 5^7 Dan. 9, 5. Diod. Sic. 1. 77. Xen. 
 Cyr. 5. 2. 9 ; c. ace. Plato Legg. 910. c, 
 
 jS) eoy, ovs, 6, f), adj. (a priv. trtjSw, 
 irreverent towards God, ungodly, 
 wicked, Rom. 4, 5. 5, 6. 1 Tim. 1,9. 1 Pet. 
 4,18. 2 Pet. 2, 5. 3,7. Jude 4. 15 bis. Sept. 
 for ?tt>9 Hos. 14, 10 ; SSJn p s . 1, 1. Dem 
 786. 12. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 2. 
 
 ay, 17, (do-eXyr;y,) excess, in 
 temperance, in any thing, e. g. language, 
 conduct, insolence, Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 12. Dem. 
 131. 11. In N. T. excess in lust, lascivi- 
 
101 
 
 Acrid* 
 
 ntsness, lewdness, debauchery, Mark 7, 22. 
 2 Cor. 12, 21. Gal. 5, 19. Eph. 4, 19. 2 
 Pet. 2, 7. Jude 4. Plur. Rom. 13, 13. 
 1 Pet. 4, 3. 2 Pet. 2, 18 ; also v. 2 in later 
 editions, comp. Jude 4. So Wisd. 14, 26. 
 Alciphr. Ep. 3. 69. Pol. 37. 2. 4. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 184. 
 
 a<T77/i09, ou, 6, i), adj. (a priv. a-fj^a,) 
 without sign or mart, as cattle Sept. Gen. 
 30, 42 ; uncoined, as money Sept. Job 42, 
 11. Diod. Sic. 19. 46. In N. T. trop. un 
 distinguished, unknown, mean; Acts 21, 39 
 OVK. do-fipov TroXewr n-oXiYr/y. So Hdian. 2. 
 
 3. 3. Plut. Fab. M. 14. 
 
 Acnjp, 6, indec. Asher, Heb. I^S 
 (blessed), the eighth son of Jacob, born of 
 Leah, Luke 2, 36. Rev. 7, 6. See Gen. 
 30, 13. 
 
 da*&eveia, as, 17, (do-Sei^r,) 1. want 
 of strength, weakness, in a physical sense, of 
 the body ; 1 Cor. 15, 43 o-Tm perac tv d<r3e- 
 vtia sc. TO o-oyuz. 2 Cor. 13, 4. (Sept. Job 
 37, 7. Plato Phaed. 17. a.) Spec, infirmity, 
 disease, sickness, Matt. 8, 17. Luke 5, 15. 
 
 8, 2. 13, 12. John 5, 5. 11, 4. Acts 28, 9. 
 Gal. 4, 13. 1 Tim. 5, 23. Heb. 11, 34. Luke 
 13, 11 TTvevfui dcrSeveias, i. e. an evil spirit 
 causing disease ; comp. v. 16. So 2 Mace. 
 
 9, 21. 22. Hdian. 1. 4. 16. Xen. Hell. 6. 
 
 4. 18. 
 
 2. In a moral sense, weakness, frailty, 
 infirmity : a) As seated in man s carnal 
 nature, liable to error and sin, Heb. 4, 15. 
 
 5. 2. 7, 28. So Rom. 6, 19. 8, 26 ; comp. 
 1 Cor. 3,1. b) In respect to mind, purpose, 
 character, as manifested in fears, doubts, or 
 prejudices ; 1 Cor. 2, 3. 2 Cor. 11, 30. 12, 
 5. 9 bis. 10. Comp. Xen. Ag. 9. 5 6Y d<r3e- 
 
 >, f. ^o-o>, (do-Sei//;?,) to be 
 without strength, to be weak. 
 
 1. Of persons, to be weak, feeble, e. g. 
 a) Genr. and absol. 2 Cor. 13, 3 bs [Xpi- 
 OTOf] els vfjius OVK dorSei/ei, dXXa Swaret Iv 
 v\iiv, who towards you is not weak (so that 
 he cannot punish), but is mighty anwng you, 
 BC. in the power of the Spirit, in wonders 
 and judgments, v. 4 /cat yap ripels do-3e- 
 voiififv tv avTio for we also are weak in him, 
 i. e. as mere men in our union with him ; 
 and so v. 9 ironically. Comp. Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 
 28. b) Spec, of the body, to be sick, ill, to 
 have disease ; also part. 6 do-3ei/o>i , ol do-3e- 
 vovvrts, a sick person, the sick ; absol. Matt. 
 10, 8 do-Sfvovvras SepaTreuere. 25, 36. [39.] 
 Mark 6, 56. Luke 4, 40 da^fvovvras vucrots 
 n-oiKiXaif. 7, 10. 9, 2. John 4, 46. 5, 3. 7. 
 6. 2. 11, 1. 2. 3. 6. Acts 9, 37. 19, 12. 
 
 Phil. 2, 26. 27. 2 Tim. 4, 20. James 5, 14. 
 Sept. for rbn J u dg. 16, 7. 11. So Dem. 
 13. 2. Xen. An. 1. 1. 1. c) Trop. of the 
 poor ; Part, ot da-^evovvres the weak, feeble, 
 sc. in this world s goods, Acts 20, 35. So 
 Aristoph. Pac. 636 TOVS irevqras do-%evovv- 
 TCLS. Comp. Dem. 555. 10 ot Trevfo-raroi 
 Ka\ do-3ez>eo-rarot. Lys. 5. 8. Eurip. ap. 
 Stob. 145 o re yap da-^Sevecrrepos, 6 irXovcrios 
 re, rf)v SIKTJV "0-771 e^et. 
 
 2. Of persons, in a moral sense, to be 
 weak, frail, infirm, sc. in mind, purpose, 
 character, as manifested in fears, doubts, or 
 prejudices ; 2 Cor. 11, 21 opp. roX/idw. 
 v. 29 bis (comp. 1 Cor. 9, 22). 2 Cor. 12, 
 10. Spec, in faith, dcr3ei>eu> rfj Tri orei, to 
 be weak in faith, i. e. either, to want con-fi 
 dence, to distrust, Rom. 4, 19 ; or, to be in 
 doubt, wavering, hesitating, as to the law 
 fulness of doing any thing, Rom. 14, 1 ; 
 and so with rfj Tn o-rei impl. Rom. 14, 2. 21. 
 1 Cor. 8, 9. 11 ; spec, of conscience, v. 12. 
 
 3. Trop. of things, to be weak, not adapt 
 ed to the proposed end ; e. g. the Mosaic 
 law, absol. Rom. 8, 3. 
 
 aa Vjez^/ia, O.TOS, TO, (do-Sei/e co,) weak 
 ness, infirmity, as manifested in doubts and 
 scruples, Rom. 15, 1 ; see in daSevev no. 2. 
 
 CKTjrevrjs, eos, ovs, 6, fj, adj. (a priv. 
 o-3eVoy,) without strength, weak. 
 
 1. Physically, e. g. woman, 1 Pet. 3, 7 <us 
 ao-Sei/eoWpw (TKfvei rat yvvaineLca. Also of 
 members of the body, 1 Cor. 12, 22. So 
 Plato Rep. 455. e, eVi Trao-t . . . do-Sej/eo-Tepov 
 ywf] dvSpos. Xen. Mem. 1 . 6. 7 ; also ib. 1 . 4. 
 6 da-^evf/s rj oijsis. Spec, infirm in body, 
 sick, diseased, Matt. 25, 39. 43. 44. Luke 
 [9,2.] 10,9. Acts 4, 9. 5,15.16. 1 Cor. 11, 
 30. Comp. in curScma, d<r%fv<a. 
 
 2. Morally, weak, feeble, infirm. a) Of 
 mind, purpose, character, as manifested in 
 fears, doubts, or prejudices, 1 Cor. 4, 10 
 (comp. 2, 3). 2 Cor. 10, 10. Spec, in re 
 spect of conscience, 1 Cor. 8, 7. [9.] 10. 
 9, 22 ter. 1 Thess. 5, 14. b) Of any thing 
 without moral power, whether as connected 
 with a carnal nature, or not adapted to the 
 proposed end; Matt. 26,41 and Mark 14, 
 38 17 Se <rap dcr^evr/s, comp. Rom. 7, 22. 
 23. Gal. 4, 9 do-Sei/?) Kal Tirana oroi^eTa. 
 Neut. ro d<r%eves as Subst. weakness, Heb. 7, 
 18. 1 Cor. 1, 25 TO dtrSeves TOV 3oi), i. e. 
 what the world would call weakness, v. 27. 
 c) Spec, weak, helpless, in sin and misery ; 
 Rom. 5, 6 ovroiv T)p.u>v d& Sevaiv, parall. do~e- 
 /3o>i , also afiapTco\a>v V. 8. 
 
 Aaut, as, f], Asia, i. e. in N. T. Asia 
 Minor, comprehending the provinces of 
 
Aaiavo? 
 
 102 
 
 Phrygia, Cilicia, Pamphylia, Caria, Lycia, 
 Lydia, Mysia, Bithynia, Paphlagonia, Cap- 
 padocia, Galatia, Lycaonia, and Pisidia. On 
 the western coast were more anciently the 
 countries of ^Eolia, Ionia, and Doris, the 
 names of which were retained among the 
 people, although the countries were includ 
 ed in the later provinces of Mysia, Lydia, 
 and Caria. Many Jews were scattered 
 over these regions ; see Acts 2, 9. 6, 9. 
 19, 10. Jos. Ant. 12. 2. 3. ib. 14. 10. 11 sq. 
 *b. 16. 2. 3. In N. T. Asia stands for : 
 
 1. Asia Minor, generally, Acts 19, 26. 
 27. 21, 27. 24, 18. 27, 2. 
 
 2. Proconsular Asia, of which Ephesus 
 was the capital, comprehending the western 
 provinces of Mysia, Lydia, Caria, and part 
 of Phrygia. i. e. Asia cis Taurum, or f) 
 I8ia>s KaXovpeif) Atria, Ptol. 5. 2. Strab. 12. 
 p. 577. Cic. pro Flacc. 27 "namque, ut 
 opinor, Asia vestra constat ex Phrygia, My 
 sia, Caria, Lydia." It was made a procon 
 sular province by Augustus. So prob. 
 Acts 2, 9. 6, 9. 16, 6. 19, 10. 22. 20, 4. 
 16. 18. [Rom. 16, 5.] 1 Cor. 16, 19. 2 Cor. 
 1, 8. 2 Tim. 1, 15. 1 Pet. 1, 1. Rev. 1, 
 4. 11. 
 
 Acnavos, O v, 6, rj, adj. CAo-t a,) Asiatic, 
 an Asiatic, an inhabitant of proconsular 
 Asia, Acts 20, 4. 
 
 ov, 6, ( Ao-i a, a/j^w,) an 
 AsiarcJi, Acts 19, 31. So Strabo 14. p. 960. 
 In the eastern provinces of the Roman 
 empire, persons of wealth were annually 
 appointed to preside over the worship of the 
 temples, and to exhibit games and theatrical 
 amusements at their own expense in honour 
 of the gods, in the manner of the Roman 
 sediles. These officers received their titles 
 from the province to which they belonged, 
 as HvTrpiapxys, 2 Mace. 12, 2, Svpidpxys, 
 AvKidpxys, <boiviK<ipxr)s, Kapidp^s, and the 
 like ; and of course, in proconsular Asia, 
 they were called Aa-idpxai. They were 
 ten in number, selected apparently by the 
 cities and approved by the proconsul. One 
 was the chief Asiarch and would seem to 
 have resided at Ephesus the capital ; the 
 others were his colleagues and advisers. 
 Comp. Euseb. Hist. Ecc. IV. 15. Wesseling 
 Diss. de Asiarchis, Ultraj. 1753. Wetstein 
 N. T. ad loc. Diet, of Antt. art. Asiarcluc. 
 
 aaiTia, as, f), (ao-iToy,) abstinence from 
 food, fasting, Acts 27, 2 1 ; comp. v. 34 sq. 
 Jos. Ant. 12. 7. 1. Plut. de tuend. Sanit. 
 20 pen. Aristot. Eth. 10. 9. 
 
 acriro9, ov, 6, f], adj. (a priv. crtroy ; ) ab 
 staining from food, fasting, Acts 27, 33. 
 
 Jos. Ant. 6. 14. 6. Plut. Eumen. 19. Xen 
 Cyr. 8. 1. 43. 
 
 acrtcew, >, f. ^a-w, to work up raw mate 
 rials, e. g. eipia Horn. II. 3. d88 ; to prac 
 tise, to exercise an art, e. g. TTJV nnriKrjv 
 Xen. Mag. Eq. 1. 19 ; and so to train, e. g. 
 TO crco/ia Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 19 ; faxas irpbi 
 dpfTTjv Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 41. In N. T. absol. 
 to practise, to exercise or train oneself in 
 any thing ; with / c. dat. Acts 24, 16. So 
 Symm. Judg. 3, 1. Xen. GEc. 11. 13; c. 
 iff pi TWOS Pol. 9. 20. 9. 
 
 aovco?, ov, 6, a wine-skin, water-skin, a 
 bottle, made of the skin of an animal taken 
 off whole ; see Bibl. Res. in Pal. II. p. 440. 
 Matt. 9, 17 quater. Mark 2, 22 quatei 
 Luke 5, 37 ter. 38. Sept. for 1X3 Josh 
 9, 4; ^23 Jer. 13, 12. Plut. Pomp. 35 
 Xen. An. 3. 5. 9. 
 
 , adv. (^So/xat, part. perf. j 
 vo?,) gladly, joyfully, Acts 2, 41. 21, 17. 
 2 Mace. 4, 12. Hdian. 3. 14. 3. Plato Rep. 
 475. c. 
 
 acro^>09, ou, o, 17, adj. (a priv. cro (or.) 
 unwise, foolish, i. e. without true wisdom in 
 Christ, Eph. 5, 15. Pind. Oi. 3. 81. Plut. 
 de Alexand. Orat. 1. 8. Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 4. 
 
 dcr7rab/iai, f. do-opai, Mid. depon. (as 
 if for djLi(icr7rdo/u.) 
 
 1. to welcome, to greet, to salute; e. g. of 
 persons meeting or separating, c. ace. a) 
 On meeting, where the Jewish formulas 
 were : ^b DiPtti Judg. 19, 20 ; nptx tl b^n 
 2 Sam. 20, 9, comp. 1 Sam. 25, 6; nirp 
 r ( B9 Ruth 2, 4 ; and in N. T. elp^ iful 
 Luke 24, 36, comp. 10, 5. So genr. c. ace. 
 of those one happens to meet, Matt. 5, 47. 
 Luke 10, 4 p.rjo fva Kara rrjv odov dcr7rd(n?(r3e, 
 i. e. lose no time in salutations ; comp. 
 2 K. 4, 29. Oftener with ace. of pers. whom 
 one salutes on coming to him, Matt. 10, 12. 
 Mark 9, 15. Luke 1, 40. Acts 21, 19. Sept. 
 for ta-ftlfib bxttj Ex. 18, 7. Judg. 18, 15. 
 (1 Mace. 7, 29. 33. ISOBUS 232.7. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 3. 2.) With the adjunct V (pi\q- 
 pan, to salute with a kiss, Rom. 16, 16. 
 1 Cor. 16, 20. 2 Cor. 13, 12. 1 Thess. 5, 
 26. 1 Pet. 5, 14. As connected with a brief 
 sojourn or visit, i. q. to pay one s respects, 
 Acts 18, 22. 21, 7. 25, 13. (Jos. Ant. 6. 11. 
 
 1 .) Once of the salutation or homage paid 
 to a king, Mark 15, 18, comp. v. 19 ; so Jos. 
 Ant. 10. 10. 5. Hdian. 5. 8. 14. b) On 
 separating, where the Jews said : C"i^3 T$> 
 
 2 Sam. 15, 9 ; Olb^b rfe Judg. 18, 6 ; and 
 in N. T. vrrayf els fiptjvrjv Mark 5, 34. 
 Here d<T7rdbjuai is i. q. to take leave of, to 
 
103 
 
 bidjarewell, c. ace. Acts 20, 1. 21, 6. So 
 Plut. jEm. Paul. 29. Xen. An. 7. 1. 40. 
 c) Of salutations sent by letter, Rom. 16, 
 3. 5-16. 21-23. 1 Cor. 16, 19 bis. 20. 2 
 Cor. 13, 12.- Phil. 4, 21 bis. 22. Col. 4, 10. 
 12. 14. 15. 2 Tim. 4, 19. 21. Tit. 3, 15bis. 
 Philem. 23. Heb. 13, 24 bis. 1 Pet. 5, 13. 
 2 John 13. 3 John 15 bis. 
 
 2. Of things, to welcome, to embrace, e. g. 
 ras eVayyeX/ay Heb. 11, 13. Jos. Ant. 7. 
 8. 4 TOVS \6yovs. Arr. Epict. 4. 7. 5. Plato 
 Rep. 475. a. 
 
 acr7racr/i09, oC, 6, (uo-7rab/xai,) a greet 
 ing, salutation, by word or letter, Matt. 23, 
 7. Mark 12, 38. Luke 1,29. 41. 44. 11,43. 
 20, 46. 1 Cor. 16, 21. Col. 4, 18. 2 Thess. 
 
 3, 17 Theogn. 858. Plut. JEm. Paul. 2. 
 Plato Legg. 919. e. 
 
 a<77TiXo9, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a priv. 0-771X0?,) 
 spotless, without blemish, pr. of a victim, 1 
 Pet. 1,19. Trop. spotless, pure, of doctrine 
 1 Tim. 6, 14 ; of one s life and conduct, 
 James 1,27. 2 Pet. 3, 14. Hdian. 5. 6. 16. 
 Anthol. Gr. II. p. 156. 
 
 dcrTriV, t Sof, 17, an asp, a serpent of the 
 most deadly venoin, Rom. 3, 14; quoted 
 from Ps. 140, 4, where Sept. for aViiaS. 
 See Plin. H. N. 8. 35. Hasselq. Reise p. 
 239, 367. So Hdot. 4. 191. JEl. H. An. 1. 
 54. In Sept. and Gr. writers da-iris is also 
 usually a shield. 
 
 a<T7roz/oo9, ov, 6, f], adj. (a priv. o-TiwSij,) 
 without truce or treaty, Thuc. 1. 37. ib. 2. 
 22. In N. T. granting no truce, implaca 
 ble, Rom. 1,31.2 Tim. 3, 3. So Jos. Ant. 
 
 4. 8. 24 tjfipovs dcnrovo ovs. Pol. 1. 65. 6. 
 ^Eschin. 38. 38. 
 
 iov, TO, (dimin.) Lat. as, 
 Rabb. " O 1 !*) assarion, a Roman coin of 
 copper or ccs, equal to one tenth part of the 
 denarius or later 8paxp-rj, i. e. 3 farthings 
 sterling or 1~ cents; see in dpyvpiov no. 2. 
 Adam s R. Antt. p. 492 sq. Diet, of Antt. 
 art. As. In N. T. put for the most trifling 
 value, like Engl. farthing, mite, Matt. 10, 
 29. Luke 12, 6. So pr. Plut. Cato M. 4 bis. 
 Dion. Hal. 9. 27. 
 
 acrcrov, adv. (compar. of ay^i,) nearer, 
 close by, Acts 27, 13. Jos. Ant. 1. 20. 1. 
 Luc. Tragod. 283. Hdot. 3. 52. 
 
 Acrcros, ov,rj, Assos, a maritime city of 
 Mysia in Asia Minor, called also Apollonia, 
 situated on the ^Egean about nine miles 
 south of Troas, and having the island of 
 Lesbos over against it towards the south ; 
 Acts 20, 13. 14. See Plin. H. N. 5. 32. 
 Strabo 13. p. 581, 614. O. v. Richter, p. 
 
 465 sq. The site is now occupied oy a 
 miserable village called Beiram. 
 
 acrrarect), , f. jjo-co, (o-raror ; a priv. 
 to-ra/iai,) to be unsteady, uncertain, pr. of the 
 sea agitated by winds, App. Bell. Syr. p. 
 221 en dcrTaTovcrrjs ^ei^owi rr/s SaXuatr^s. 
 Anthol. Gr. III. p. 225. In N. T. to be un 
 settled, "homeless, to have no fixed abode, 1 
 Cor. 4, 11. 
 
 acrret09, O v, 6, rj, adj. (ao-ru,) urbane, 
 polite, Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 12. In N. T. good 
 in appearance, fair, e. g. a child, Heb. 11, 
 23 (comp. Ex. 2, 2). Acts 7, 20 do-reios 
 T&) Sew fair unto God, God being judge, 
 i.e. intens. exceedingly fair ; comp. for the 
 idiom, Sept. fj,eyd\ij TW Sew for CTpxb 
 Jon. 3, 3. Gesen. Lehrg. p. 693. d. Winer 
 537. 3. Sept. for aio Ex. 2, 2. So Judith 
 11, 23. Aristacnet. 1. 4, 19; of a garment 
 Hdian. 4. 12. 4. 
 
 acrrrjp, epos, 6, a star, spoken of the 
 fixed stars, planets, comets, etc. Matt. 2, 2. 
 7. 9. 10. 1 Cor. 15, 41 ter. Rev. 8, 12. 12, 
 1. 4. In Matt. 24, 29. Mark 13, 25. Rev. 6, 
 13, the stars are said to fall from heaven, 
 a symbol of great civil commotions and 
 judgments; comp. Joel 2, 10. Ez. 32, 7. 
 Is. 13, 10. 34, 4. al. Horn. II. 17. 366. 
 OvidMetam. 15. 782 sq. SeeBiblioth. Sac. 
 1843, p. 545-8. Sept. for ^313 Gen. 1, 
 16. Hdian. 1. 14. 1. Xen. Mem. 4. 7. 5. 
 Trop. a) To Christ is ascribed 6 do-Tr/p 
 6 itpaiivos, the morning star, as the symbol 
 of majesty and glory, Rev 2,28. 22, 16; 
 comp. Is. 14, 12. Dan. 12, 3. b) Put 
 symbolically for an angel, Rev. 9, 1 ; perh. 
 also 8, 10. 11; comp. Luke 10, 18. c) 
 As the symbol for the prophet or chief teacher 
 in a church, Re^. 1, 16. 20 bis. 2, 1. 3, 1. 
 Hence also of false and erring teachers, 
 Jude 1 3 dvTfpfs irXavrJTai wandering stars, 
 meteors, soon to be quenched. 
 
 aOT?/pi/CT09, ov, 6, T], adj. (a priv. o-n;- 
 />/&>,) not made steadfast, unstable, trop. of 
 character, 2 Pet. 2, 44. 3, 16. Longin. de 
 Subl. 2. 2. 
 
 acrropyo?, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. 
 without natural affection, spec, towards one s 
 parents or children, Rom. 1, 31. 2 Tim. 3, 
 3. ^Eschin. 47. 29. Athen. 14. p. 655 
 ii&Topyov Trpbs TO. tKyova. 
 
 aOTO^eo), <, f. Tjo-(0, (noToxos , a priv. 
 OTOXOS .) to miss the mark, and genr. to miss, 
 to err, to swerve from, c. gen. 1 Tim. 1,6; 
 irtpi c. ace. 1 Tim. 6, 21. 2 Tim. 2, 18. 
 So c. gen. Ecclus. 8, 9. Pol. 7. 14. 3. Plut. 
 de def. Orac. 10 ; irtpi c. ace. Plut. Symp. 
 
104 
 
 a<TCOTta 
 
 7. 5. 3 TTfpl e &CoSij .. Kdl TTOTOVS d(TTOXOVV- 
 TfS. 
 
 da-Tpairr], fjs,Tj, lightning, Matt. 24, 27. 
 28, 3. Luke 10, 18. 17, 24. Rev. 4, 5. 8,5. 
 11, 19. 16, 18. Sept. for p^a Ex. 19, 16. 
 Nah. 2, 4. So Diod. Sic. 3. 34. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 I. 6. i. Trop. a shining, brightness, Luke 
 
 II, 36 coy oTav 6 Xv^vos Trj do-Tpanrj (^cort j^ 
 o-f. Comp. Sept. and p-ia Deut. 32, 41. 
 Soph. Fr. 421 dorp. o/x/iarcoi>. 
 
 da-TpaTTTO), f. ^co, (da-Tpcnnj,) to lighten, 
 to flash, as lightning, absol. Luke 17, 24. 
 Sept. for p-ia Ps. 144, 6. So Horn. H. 2. 
 353. Trop. to give forth light, to shine; 
 Part. do-TpaTTTaiv shining Luke 24, 4. So 
 of the eyes Wisd. 11, 18 ; of brass Xen. 
 An. 1. 8. 8. 
 
 a&TpoV} ov, TO, any heavenly body, a 
 constellation, Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 4. In N. T. 
 a star, L q. da-Trjp, Luke 21, 25 Iv 17X10) KOI 
 o-(\r]vr) KOI cicrTpois. Acts 27. 20. Heb. 11, 
 12. Sept. for 3513 Ex. 32, 13. (Plato 
 Rep. 488. d. Hesych. acrrpa Arrt/col TOVS 
 doW/jay.) Acts 7, 43 TO acrrpov rov 3eoC 
 vfjLaiv Pfp.(pdv the star of your god Rem- 
 phan, i. e. as an emblem of the planet-god 
 thus worshipped ; see in MoXo x and Pe/i- 
 (pdv. 
 
 ov, 6, Asyncritus, p. n. 
 of a Christian, Rom. 16, 14. 
 
 acrvfj,(])(i)vo$, ov, 6, fj, adj. (a priv. crv/x- 
 c^covoj.) not symphonious, discordant, Wisd. 
 18, 10. In N. T. genr. not agreeing, dis 
 agreeing ; Acts 28, 25 do-vfj.(pa)voi ovres 
 irpbs aXX^Xovy. So Diod. Sic. 4. 1 irpos 
 dXX^Aouy. Plato Gorg. 482. c, eavr<a. 
 
 acrweroy, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. a-weros, 
 (rwi77/Lu,) ivithout tinder standing, foolish, 
 Matt. 15, 16. Mark 7, 18. Sept. for ^03 
 Ps. 92, 7. So Ecclus. 27, 12. Thuc. 2. 3V. 
 By Hebr. wicked, ungodly, neglecting the 
 true wisdom and cleaving to sin, Rom. 1, 
 21. 31. 10, 19, quoted from Deut. 32, 21 
 where Sept. for baa. So too ^23, Sept. 
 fypuv, Ps. 14, 1. Job 2, 10. 
 
 dcrui^eToy, ov , 6, rj, adj. (a priv. <rvv- 
 beros, o-uiT/3f/mi,) uncompounded Plato 
 Phaed. 78. c. In N. T. not bound by cove 
 nant, faithless, a covenant-breaker, Rom. 1, 
 31. Sept. for 153 Jer. 3, 7. 8. So Dem. 
 383. 6. 
 
 dcr<f)a\,eia, as, f), (do-<j)aXr)s,*) firmness, 
 stability, security, e. g. of a prison Acts 5, 
 23. Sept. for -psa Ps. 104, 6. (Hdian. 1. 
 14. 4.) Also of condition, security, safety, 
 1 Thess. 5, 3. Sept. for ni33 Lev. 26, 5. 
 
 So Pol. 3. 27. 3. Xen. 3. 12. 7. Trop. 
 surety, certainty ; TWV Xoycoi Luke 1,4. So 
 Thuc. 2. 11. 
 
 tos, ovs, 6, TJ, adj. (a priv. 
 o-$aXXo/u,) not liable to fall or fail, firm, 
 steadfast, e. g. an anchor Heb. 6, 19. (Sept. 
 Prov. 8, 28. Xen. An. 3. 2. 19.) Also of 
 condition or character, safe, secure ; Phil. 3, 
 1 v[uv Se dcr(pa\es. So Plato Legg. 672. b. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 39. Trop. neut. TO do-(pa- 
 \es, surety, certainty, Acts 21, 34. 22, 30. 25, 
 26. So ^Eschin. 24. 14. 
 
 l, f. urco, (do-cpaXjj?,) to make 
 firm, fast, c. ace. Pol. 18. 13. 3. In N. T. 
 only Mid. depon. do-<aXi o/icu, f. /<ro- 
 pai, id. Acts 16, 24 TOVS Tro Sa? els TO v\ov. 
 (Sept. for pimn Neh. 3, 15. Pol. 1. 22. 10.) 
 Also to make safe, secure, by seals, guards, 
 e. g. TOV Tafpov Matt. 27, 65. 66 ; Pass. v. 
 64. So Wisd. 10, 12. Diod. Sic. 18. 53. 
 
 , adv. (do-c/mXjjs,) firmly, se 
 curely, Xen. Mag. Eq. 8. 3. In N. T. se 
 curely, safely, sc. against escape, Mark 14, 44. 
 Acts 16, 23. Sept. for MDa Gen. 34, 25. 
 (Hdian. 2. 9. 7. Xen. Mag. fiq. 6. 2.) Also 
 assuredly, certainly, Acts 2, 36. So Wisd. 
 18, 6. Xen. Cyr. 6. 3. 18. 
 
 da")(TjfJiOVea) : ,, f. r)0-a>, (da-xhpw, ) to 
 be deformed, JEA. V. H. 11. 4. In N. T. to 
 behave unseemly, to act indecorously, impro- 
 perlij, absol. 1 Cor. 13, 5; also 7, 36 et e 
 eVi TTJV Trap Sevov OVTOV vo- 
 
 p a, but if any man think that he behaveth 
 unseemly (acteth improperly) in respect to 
 his fcirg-i n-daughter, i. e. by not giving her 
 in marriage. So Sept. Ez. 16, 7. 22. ^El. 
 V. H. 2. 15. Xen. Eq. 11. 6. Others less 
 well in 1 Cor. 7, 36 : to suffer shame or re- 
 proach; as Sept. Deut. 25, 3. Diod. Sic. 
 14. 10. 
 
 da-^rjfJ,ocrvVT], rjs, f], (aaxwav,) pr. de 
 formity ; hence unseemliness, indecorum, 
 Plut. Mor. II. p. 169. Plato Rep. 401. a. In 
 N. T. indecency, shame, Rom. 1, 27. (Ecclus. 
 26, 8. Jos. Ant. 16. 7. 6.) By euphemism, 
 shame, for nakedness, pudenda, Rev. 16, 15 ; 
 so Sept. for rms Ex. 20, 26. Lev. 18, 6. 7. 
 
 T : . 
 
 do-^/icoi/, ovos, 6, TI, adj. (a priv. <rxrj- 
 fj.a,~) deformed, ugly, Pcxpals dcrxfmomr 
 Hdian. 5. 6. 24. In N. T. unseemly, unbe 
 coming, uncomely, I Cor. 12, 23. Sept. for 
 fi^S Deut. 24, 1. So Plut. Mor. II. p. 171. 
 Xen. Apol. Socr. 7. 
 
 CKTttiTia,, as, i], (acraiTos , a priv. o-co<a,) 
 the life of an aauTos , i. e. debauchery, re 
 velry, riot, Eph. 5, 18. Tit. 1, 6. 1 Pet. 4, 
 
105 
 
 avjij 
 
 4. Sept. Prov. 28, 7. Hdian. 2 5. 2. Plato 
 Rep. 560. e. 
 * , 
 ewramt>9, adv. (ao-coroy,) with revelry, 
 
 riotously, Luke 15, 13. Jos. Ant. 12. 4. 8 
 et Dem. 1025. 19 ua-corwy fjv. 
 
 ara/rrea), S>, f. qo-a), (aVaKToy,) to Je eft s- 
 orderly, of soldiers not keeping the ranks, 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 2. 6. In N. T. trop. to walk 
 disorderly, to lead a disorderly life, 2 Thess. 
 3, 7. So Xen. (Ec. 5. 15. ib. 7. 31. 
 
 ara/CTO?, ou, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. Tacr<r,) 
 disorderly, not in array, of soldiers not 
 keeping the ranks, Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 7. Jn 
 N. T. trop. disorderly, unruly, leading a 
 disorderly life, 1 Thess. 5, 14. So Plut. 
 de Puer. educ. 7 arawot rjSoval. Plato Legg. 
 806. c. 
 
 aTtt/CTW?, adv. (araKToy,) disorderly, 
 without order, Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 7. In N. 
 T. trop. drd/cTcoy Trepnrarelv, to walk disor 
 derly, to lead a disorderly life, 2 Thess. 3, 
 6. 11. So drdicrcoy nv Isocr. ad Nicod. p. 
 46. ed. Wolf. comp. Plato Phileb. 29. a. 
 
 are/a/09, ou, 6, rj, adj. (a priv. reicvov, ) 
 childkss, Luke 20, 28. 29. 30. Sept. for 
 " Tl* Gen. 15, 2. Ecclus. 16, 3. Enrip. 
 Hec. 514. 
 
 CLTCVlLfi), f. icrfo, (arevTis , a intens. reiVa>.) 
 to look at intently, steadfastly, earnestly, to 
 fix the eyes upon; with dat. see Matth. 
 5 401. 2; Luke 4, 20. 22, 56. Acts 3, 12. 
 10, 4. 14, 9. 23, 1. So enaTfvi&iv rols 
 ftpffaaiv Synes. Ep. 1. With els c. ace. 
 Acts 1, 10. 3, 4. 6, 15. 7, 55. 11, 6. 13,9. 
 2 Cor. 3, 7. 13. So Jos. B. J. 5. 12. 3. 
 Pol. 6. 11. 7. 
 
 arep, adv. c. gen. without, in ilie absence 
 of, mostly poetical, Luke 22, 6. 35 ; see 
 Buttm. \ 146. 1, 3. 2 Mace. 12, 15. Plut. 
 de cap. ex inim. utilit. 1. Horn. Od. 7. 325. 
 
 arifld^Q), f. ao-o), (arifioy.) to dislionour, 
 e. g. 
 
 1. Pr. by withholding the honour and re 
 spect due, i. q. to contemn, to despise, c. ace. 
 as God Rom. 2, 23 ; Christ John 8, 49 ; 
 " collect. James 2, 6, comp. v. 2. 
 
 3. Sept. Mic. 7,6. Gen. 16,4. Plato Rep. 
 551. a, TOV TTfvrjra. Xen. An. 1. 9. 4. 
 
 2. Intens. i. q. to treat with indignity, 
 shamefully, c. ace. Luke 20, 11 ; Pass. Acts 
 5, 41. Mid. with ace. of thing, Rom. 1, 24 
 TO aro)fiaTa avra>v, where others Pass, and 
 avruv. Sept. Prov. 22, 22. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 
 20. Comp. Plato Phaed. 65. c, TO 
 
 ay, ^, (artjitoy.) dishonour, i. e. 
 
 1. Pr. absence of honour, i. q. vileness, 
 meanness, sc. of condition 1 Cor. 15,43; 
 of use, as vessels, Rom. 9, 21. 2 Tim. 2, 20. 
 
 2. Genr. i. q. shame, reproach, 1 Cor. 11, 
 14. 2 Cor. 6,8. 11, 21 Kara drip-iav Xya>, 
 / say it to my reproach, spoken ironically. 
 So Rom. 1, 26 TrdSq dri/iiay, i. e. shameful 
 passions. Sept. Jer. 23, 40. Hdian. 2. 4. 9. 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 13. 
 
 tm/409, ou, 6, fj, adj. (a priv. TI^TJ,) 
 without honour, unhonoured, Matt. 13, 57. 
 Mark 6, 4. 1 Cor. 4, 10 ; of parts of the 
 body 1 Cor. 12, 23. Sept. for nbpa I s . 3, 
 5. Ecclus. 10, 19. Diod. Sic. 17. 66. Xen. 
 An. 7. 7. 46, 50. 
 
 dri/iOft), w, f. cocrco, (oYi/ioy,) to dishon 
 our, to treat with indignity, shamefully, like 
 dri^dfa>, Pass. Mark 12, 4. Sept. 2 Sam. 
 10, 5. Hermog. p. 347. 5, ex Demosth. 
 
 ar/ii?, /Soy, f), (kindr. dr/j,dy, arjfj.i, ) va 
 pour, James 4, 14 ; comp. Wisd. 2, 4. Also 
 Acts 2, 19 Kal dr/zi Sa KUTTVOV, quoted from 
 Joel 3, 3 [2, 30], where Sept. for rvha-W 
 jUJS. Sept. for 1 Lev. 16, 13. Hdian. 1. 
 6/5. Plato Tim. 87. e. 
 
 aro/i09, ov, 6, 17, adj. t (a priv. ropj, 
 Tep.va>.) uncut, as a meadow Soph. Trach. 
 200 ; not to be cut, indivisible, Plut. Phoc. 3. 
 Plato Soph. 229. d. In N. T. of time, neut. 
 aro/xoi/, an atom, a moment ; 1 Cor. 1 5, 52 
 eV drd/zco. So Hesych. Iv drd/iov eV pnvr]- 
 
 fJMTl, tV TU^ei. 
 
 aro7T09, ou, 6, ^, adj. (a priv. Torroy,) 
 out of place, i. e. 
 
 1. Of conduct or the like, amiss, wrong, 
 Luke 23, 41. Acts 28, 6 p.r)8ev UTOTTOV no 
 thing amiss, i. e. no harm. [25, 5.] 2 Mace. 
 14,23. Hdian. 4. 11. 7. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 11. 
 
 2. Of persons, wrongful, wicked, 2 Thess. 
 3, 2. Athen. 7. p. 279. d ; see Wetst N. 
 T. in loc. 
 
 -4-rrttXeta, ay, 17, Attalia, a maritime 
 city of Pamphylia in Asia Minor, Acts 14, 
 25. It lay near the mouth of the river 
 Catarrhacte, not far from the border of Ly- 
 cia ; and was built by Attalus Philadelphus, 
 king of Pergamus. Now Adalia or Antali. 
 Strabo 14. p. 667. Leake s Asia Minor p. 
 193. 
 
 avydfo, f. do-co, (avyf), ) to shine upon, 
 to illumine, c. ace. Eurip. Hec. 636. In 
 N. T. intrans. to shine, to be radiant ; trop. 
 c. dat. in some editt. 2 Cor. 4, 4. So Sept. 
 pr. Lev. 13, 24-26. 
 
 avyr/j fjs, rj, light, radiance, brightness, 
 as of the day, the sun ; Acts 20, 1 1 a 
 
Avyovaros 
 
 106 
 
 avyrjs, until day-light. Sept. for W55 Is. 59, 
 9. PolyEcn. 4. p. 386 Kara TTJV Trpdorrjv av- 
 yf)i> rf/s r)fj.epas. Xen. Mem. 4. 7. 7 livtv 
 ifkiov avyrjs. 
 
 Avyov(TTO$, ov, 6, Augustus, the sur 
 name conferred by th3 Roman senate upon 
 Octavlanus, the nephew of Julius Caesar, 
 and the first Roman emperor ; under whose 
 reign Christ was born; Luke 2, 1. See 
 Flor. 4. 12. Sueton. Octav. 7. Augustus 
 died A. D. 14, at the age of 76 ; and was 
 succeeded by Tiberius, whom he had al 
 ready admitted to the throne as co-regent ; 
 Sueton. Oct. 99 sq. ib. Tib. 21. Tac. Ann. 
 1. 3. 
 
 fos, ovs, 6, 17, adj. (avros, 
 i, ) self-complacent; hence self-willed, 
 stubborn, Tit. 1, 7. 2 Pet. 2, 10. Sept. for 
 13> Gen. 49, 3. 7. Pol. 27. 8. 8. Plato Legg. 
 692. a. 
 
 ov, 6, 77, adj. (avros, alpf- 
 roV, cupe w,) self-chosen, self-elected, a-rpaTT]- 
 yoi Xen. An. 5. 7. 29 ; voluntary, ^dvaros 
 Xen. Hell. 6. 2. 36. In N. T. acting from 
 :hoice, spontaneous ; in place of an adv. 
 coluntarily, spontaneously, 2 Cor. 8, 3. 17 ; 
 see Buttm. $ 123. 6. So Lucian. Catapl. 4 
 ftTrero ateaiperos pot. Plut. de Garrul. 4. 
 
 av jVT(t), u>, f. ?7<7CB, (afaevnjs ; avros, 
 eirea,) to have authority over, c. gen. 1 Tim. 
 2, 12. Only in N. T. and eccl. writers; 
 Hesych. al^evrflv fov<nd{iv. Basil. M. 
 Ep. 52, 86. Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 120. 
 
 avXew, w, f. jjo-o), (aiXos,) to pipe, to 
 play on the pipe, c. dat. commodi, Matt. 1 1 , 
 17. Luke 7, 32. Pass. part. neut. TO av\ov- 
 lievov 1 Cor. 14, 7. JEl V. H. 14. 8. Xen. 
 GEc. 1. 10. 
 
 av\r), fjy, fj, (kindr. aa>, arjp.t, ) pr. a yard, 
 a court, any enclosed space in the open air 
 exposed to the weather ; in Horn, the court 
 yard before the house, surrounded by out 
 buildings and serving also for the cattle, II. 
 4. 433, Od. 9. 185. In N. T. 
 
 1 . a fold for sheep; into which the flocks 
 are driven at night, John 10, 1. 16. So of 
 the circle in which nomadic shepherds pitch 
 their tents, Jos. Ant. 1. 11. 2; comp. Bibl. 
 Res. in Palest. II. p. 201. 
 
 2. the court of an oriental house, the 
 quadrangle around which the house itself 
 was built, which served also as a place of 
 waiting for visitors and attendants ; Matt. 
 26, 58. 69. Mark 14, 54. 66. 15, 16. 
 Luke 22, 55. John 18, 15. Sept. for isn 
 2 Sam. 17, 18. Esth. 1, 5. Jos. Ant 12.4. 
 11. M}. V, H. 3. 4, Plato Conv. 212, d, 
 
 3. the outer court of the Jewish temple 
 known as the court of the gentiles, Rev. 
 11, 2. Sept. and ISO 2 Chr. 29, 16. 33,5. 
 Neh. 13, 7, comp. v. 5 ; rnW 2 Chr. 6, 13. 
 1 Mace. 4, 38. 
 
 4. Synecd. a house, mansion, palace, 
 Matt. 26, 3. Luke 11, 21. Comp. Sept. 
 and 1? Esth. 4, 2. Hdian. 1. 14. 8. Pol. 
 5. 26. 9. 
 
 O v, 6, (auXeco,) a piper, min 
 strel, Matt. 9, 23. Rev. 18, 22. For min 
 strels employed in mourning, see Jos. B. J. 
 3. 9. 5 ; comp. Jer. 9, 17. Buxtorf Lex. 
 Ghald. 766, 1524. Ml V. H. 14. 8. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 7. 2. 
 
 av\lofjuu } f. la-ouai, Mid. depon. (av- 
 Xi/,) also Pass. aor. 1 rjvXicrSriv, to lie in a 
 fold, to be folded, so cattle Horn. Od. 12. 
 265. ib. 14. 412 ; of an army, to bivouac 
 for the night, to rest upon their arms, Pol. 8. 
 34. 2. Xen. An. 4. 1. 11. In N. T. to pass 
 the night, to lodge, absol. Matt. 21, 17. 
 Luke 21, 37. Sept. for -jifc Judg. 19, 6. 7. 
 So Jos. Ant. 1. 19. 1. Xen. An. 4. 5. 21. 
 
 C&IM.09, ov, 6, (kindr. a co, arj^i-. ai ,) a 
 pipe, tibia, 1 Cor. 14, 7. It had a gene 
 ral resemblance to the hautboy or flageo 
 let; see Diet, of Antt. art. Tibia. Sept. 
 for ^bn 2 Sam. 10, 5. Hdian. 5. 3. 15. 
 Xen. Conv. 6. 4. 
 
 av^dvco and avi;a>, f. avgr)o-a>, aor. 1 
 7]vr)o-a, Pass. aor. 1 r]vt)%r)v, Matt. 13, 32. 
 
 1 Pet. 2, 2. The form av<B occurs twice, 
 Eph. 2, 21. Col. 2, 19; also in the Greek 
 poets, and Jos. 4. 4. 1. Xen. Cyr. 5. 5. 33. 
 Plato Tim. 82. d. Lat. augeo, i. e. to aug 
 ment, to increase, both trans, and intrans. 
 
 1 . Trans, i. q. to make grow, to give in 
 crease ; so of plants or fruits, trop. c. ace. 
 
 2 Cor. 9, 10 i ace. impl. 1 Cor. 3, 6. 7. 
 Pass, to grow, to grow up, to be increased, 
 as plants Matt. 13, 32 ; trop. 2 Cor. 10, 15. 
 Col. 1, 6 in later editt. So Pass. trop. with 
 tls c. ace. Col. 1,10. 1 Pet. 2, 2 in later 
 editt. Sept. for srsin Is. 61, 11. Hdian. 
 3. 8. 9. Xen. Eq. 5. 7. Plato Prot. 320. e. 
 
 2. Intrans. to grow, to grow up, to re 
 ceive increase ; only in late writers, Wetst. 
 N. T. I. p. 335. Winer J 31. 1. AbsoL 
 Matt. 6, 28 ra Kpiva rov dypov TTCOS av^dvfi. 
 Mark 4, 8. Luke 1, 80. 2, 40. 12, 27. 13, 
 19. John 3, 30. Acts 6, 7. 7, 17. 12, 24. 
 19, 20. Col. 2, 19 avfi TTJV av^rjcriv row 
 3eoO increaseth (with) the increase of GocL, 
 which God imparts ; comp. John 17, 26 in 
 art dyanda) no. 2. With ei y ri, to grow up 
 into any thing, Eph. 2, 21 ; (s p^os Xen. 
 
1 07 
 
 avros 
 
 Lac. 2. 5;) also ds riva, Eph. 4, 15 au)j- 
 <rufj.(v (Is avrov (Xpto-ToV) ra irdvra, we 
 should grow up unto him in all things, i. e. 
 for him as the head, comp. 1, 5. With tv 
 TIVI 2 Pet. 3, 18. Jos. Ant. 4. 4. 1. ^Esop. 
 Fab. 48. Diod. Sic. 4. 64. Comp. Lucian. 
 Pseudosoph. 4. 
 
 avfycris, ecos, TI, (avai>a),) increase, 
 grow/h, Eph. 4, 16. Col. 2, 19 see in avd- 
 va> no. 2. 2 Mace. 5, 16. Pol. 17. 6. 4. 
 Xen. (Ec. 5. 1. 
 
 avo) : see avgdva. 
 
 avpiov, adv. (avpa, aca, ar//,) Z/KJ mor- 
 row, to morrow, absol. Matt. 6, 30. Luke 12, 
 28. Acts 23, 15. 20. 25, 22. 1 Cor. 15, 32. 
 Sept. for 1HB Ex. 8, 10. 2 Sam. 11, 12. 
 (Antiph. 775. 5. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 31.) 
 Hence of fut. time indefinite, James 4, 13 
 o~fjp.epov 77 avpiov KT\. Luke 13, 32. 33 trij- 
 fiepov Kal avpiov Kal rrj f^ofievrj to day and 
 to morrow and the day following, i. e. for a 
 brief season. With the article fj avpiov 
 (r/fitpa), as adjective, Buttm. 5 125. 6; the 
 morrow, the next day, Matt. 6, 34 bis, els TTJV 
 avpiov KT\. Luke 10, 35. Acts 4, 3. 5. James 
 4, 14. So Pol. 1. 60. 5. Xen. An. 6. 4. 15 ; 
 comp. CEc. 11. 6. 
 
 avcrrrjpo^ d, 6v, (kindr. aw, ava>, o>,) 
 austere, i. e. pr. rough, astringent to the 
 taste, Dioscor. 5. 6 ; vSwp Plato Phil. 61. c. 
 In N. T. trop. austere, harsh, in a moral 
 sense, Luke 19, 21. 22. So 2 Mace. 14,30. 
 Pol. 4. 20. 7. Plut. Quaest. Gr. 40 <rxppvv 
 KO\ avoTrjpos- 
 
 avrapfceia, as, TJ. (avrdpKrjs^ sufficiency 
 in oneself, spoken : a) Of a mind satis 
 fied with its own lot, contentment, 1 Tim. 
 6, 6. So Diog. Laert. 10. 130. Diod. Sic. 
 lib. 33. p. 183 Tauchn. b) Of things, a 
 sufficiency, competency, 2 Cor. 9, 8. 
 
 eo?, ovs, 6, 77, adj. (avrdj, 
 dpKtw.) self-sufficing, self-competent, npos 
 TI Xen. Mem. 4. 8. 11. In N. T. content, 
 satisfied with one s lot, Phil. 4, 11. So Ec- 
 clus. 40, 18. Pol. 6. 48. 7. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 6.2. 
 
 s, ov, 6, fj, adj. (auroy, 
 KaraKpivu>.) self -condemned, Tit. 3, 11. 
 Epiphan. p. 704. b. Photius : oi ao-ejSfty au- 
 TOKaraKpiToi. 
 
 auTO/U,a,TO9, 77, O v, adj. (avros, /now, p.e- 
 /iaa,) self-acting, self-moving, as tripods 
 Horn. II. 18. 376. In N. T. spontaneous, 
 of oneself, of one s own accord, in place of 
 an adverb, Buttm. 123. 6. Mark 4, 28 
 -drTi yap f/ yrj Kap7ro(pop(1. Acts 12, 
 
 10. So Wisd. 17, 6. Diod. Sic. 1. 8. Plato 
 Poiit. 272. a, avrofj.drr}s dva8i8ovo-ijs TTJI 
 
 ov, o, (OVTOS, oTrro/xat,) see 
 ing for oneself, an eye-witness, Luke 1,2. 
 Pol. 1. 46. 4. Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 18. 
 
 auroy, 17, o, pron. emphat. self; in the 
 oblique cases often him, her, it ; with the 
 art. 6 avros the -eery one, the same; see 
 Buttm. 5 127. 2. Kuhner 5 303. 3. 
 
 1. Self, oneself, marking emphatically a 
 person or thing as distinguished from a>. 
 others. 
 
 a) Joined with a noun or pronoun, as if 
 in apposition ; and put either before the 
 noun and its article, or after them both ; 
 the article being omitted only before pro 
 per names, or at most before nouns de 
 noting individuals, a) With proper names, 
 e. g. with the art. Acts 8, 13 6 Se 2t- 
 fjuav Kal avros. Luke 24, 15 avros 6 irj- 
 a-ovs. John 4, 44. Matt. 3, 4. Mark 6, 
 17. al. (Plut. Mor. II. p. 3 avros ... 6 Za>- 
 Trv/joy.) Without the art. John 4, 2 !?;- 
 aovs avros. Heb. 11, 11 avrrj 2dp pa. 
 Mark 12, 36. 37 avros Aavt8. Luke 20, 42. 
 al. So Plut. J. Gas. 7 avros Kuctpcov. Luc. 
 D. Mort. 29. 2. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 6. (3) 
 With other nouns, usually with the art. 
 John 5, 36 aura TO. epya. 14, 11 Sta TO. fpya 
 aura. Gal. 6, 13 ot 7repiTefj.v6fj.fvoi avroi. 
 Rom. 8, 21. 1 Cor. 11, 14. 15, 28. 2 Cor. 
 11, 14. 1 Thess. 4, 16. Rev. 21, 3. al. 
 (Hdian. 3. 13. 10. Xen. An. 1. 8. 14. Hi. 6. 
 4.) In Luke we find the formulas : avrff 
 \. ev avrfi TTJ fjfJiepa V. &pa, eV avrw ra> 
 Kaipw, emphat. in that very day or time, 
 Luke 2, 38. 7, 21. 10, 21. 12, 12. 13, 1. 
 31. 20, 19. 23, 12. 24, 13. 33. Acts 16, 
 1 8. Spec, once i. q. of oneself, of one s own 
 accord ; John 1 6, 27 avros yap 6 Trarrjp 
 (ptXet vfj.ds. So Luc. D. Deor. 20. 10. Xen. 
 An. 2. 1 . 5. y) With pronouns ; e. g. 
 pron. personal, as auroy e-yw Luke 24, 39. 
 Rom. 15, 14. 2 Cor. 10, 1 ; /wycb avro r 
 Acts 10, 26. (Hdian. 2. 3. 10. Xen. Mem. 
 
 I. 6. 14.) So vfj.t~is avrol Mark 6, 31. 1 
 Thess. 4, 9 ; aurot vfj.f is John 3, 28 ; vp.<av 
 avru>v Acts 20, 30. 1 Cor. 5, 13. 11, 13. 
 Eph. 6, 9. (Hdian. 1. 4. 14. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 
 
 II. Hi. 1. 24.) With a relat pron. Matt. 
 27, 57 os Kal avros who himself also. Mark 
 15, 43. 1 Pet. 2, 24. (Plut. J. Caes. 5. 
 Hdian. 7. 1 . 24.) With a pron. demonstr. 
 as auroC 8 rovrow Acts 25, 25 ; avrol ov- 
 TOI .Acts 24, 15. 20; so Hdian. 3. 13. 7. 
 Thuc. 6. 33 ASf/valct avrol ovrot. 
 
 b) Where the noun to which auras refers 
 
ai/ro? 
 
 108 
 
 afro? 
 
 is followed by a clause or by several words ; 
 here avrds is inserted after the clause for 
 the sake of distinctness or emphasis. a) 
 Genr. Matt. 4, 16 rots Ka%r]p.fvois ... <j>a>s 
 dveT(L\fv avrols. 5, 40. 12, 36. 25, 29. 
 Luke 1, 36. John 6, 15 avr6s p.6vos. 15, 2 
 bis. Rev. 2, 7. 26. 6, 4. So Palaeph. Fab. 
 20. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 15. ib. 3. 3. 38 av 
 ros fiovos. /3) Spec, where avros takes 
 up again the subject (or object) of the verb, 
 in apodosis or elsewhere, emphat. i. q. 6 av 
 ros or OVTOS. Matt. 6, 4 KUL 6 TraTrjp aov 
 ... avros KT\. John 7, 4. 14, 10. Matt. 12, 
 50 OO-TIS yap av TTOLTJO-T) . . . avros p.ov aSeX- 
 (pos, comp. Mark 3, 45 where it is OVTOS. 
 So in apodosis, Xen. An. 1. 9. 29 6i> wero 
 TTIOTOV . . . ra^v avTov evpe KT\. 
 
 c) Where the personal pronoun to which 
 avTos refers, is implied in the form of the 
 verb, and not expressed ; here avrds thus 
 standing alone in the nominative (very rare 
 ly in an oblique case) is i. q. myself, thyself, 
 himself, and the like ; or at least for /, thou, 
 Tie, etc. pronounced with emphasis. a) 
 Genr. and so too KOI avros, / myself also, I 
 also ; Matt. 1, 21 avTosyap troxrei TOV \aov 
 avTov,for HE shall save his people. 3, 11 
 OVTOS v/xas QaTtrio-fi, HE shall baptize you. 
 25, 17 eKfpo~T]o~e Kal avros aXXa Svo, HE also 
 gained other two. Mark 1, 8. 2, 25. 3. 13. 
 Luke 1, 17. 22. 6, 35. 42 euros- TTJV ... 80- 
 KOV ov /3Xe7r<B!> thyself not beholding the beam, 
 etc. 10, 1. 11, 14. 15, 14. John 9, 21 bis. 
 Acts 2, 34. 21, 24. 1 Cor. 3, 15. Phil. 2, 
 24 OTI Kal avTos Taverns e Xevo-o/iat, i. e. I 
 myself also. Heb. 5, 2. Rev. 21,7. al. saep. 
 Rev. 19, 12 fl pf) avro s. With a parti 
 ciple, Acts 17, 25 ovSe VTTO xfip&v dv%p<a- 
 TTCOJ/ 3( pairevfTai . . . avros SiSovs Trao~i farfv 
 KT\. So genr. Hdian. 1. 8. 3. Plut. J. 
 Caes. 2. Xen. Cyr. 1. 8. 10 ; Kal avro s Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 6. 2 ; with particip. Plut. Mor. II. 
 p. 9 avTos . . . KeXevo-as. Thuc. 6. 5. 
 PLUR. nom. Luke 11,4 Kal yap avTol d(pie- 
 p.fv, for WE also forgive. 22, 71. Gal. 2, 
 
 17. Luke 11, 46 KOI avroi . . . ov Trpoo-^rav- 
 ere, and ye yourselves, v. 52. Acts 2, 22. 
 
 18, 15. 20, 34. Rom. 15. 14. 1 Thess. 5, 
 2. Heb. 13, 3. Matt. 5, 4 OTI avroi TrapaKXrj- 
 %f)o-ovrai,for THEY shall be comforted, v. 5- 
 9. Luke 14, 1. 12. John 4, 45. Acts 13, 14. 
 1 Thess. 1, 9. Heb. 8, 9. Rev. 21, 3. al. 
 So 1 and 2 pers. Xen. Cyr. 8. 1.4; 3 pers. 
 Hi. 2. 8. ib. 5. 2. /3) Spec, of a person 
 not named, but well known ; like Engl. 
 He emphatic; e. g. of God, Heb. 13, 5 
 avros yap ftprjKtvfor He hath said. So of 
 Jesus, He, i. q. the Master, the Lord, Mark 
 4, 38. Luke 5, 17. 10, 38. Acts 10, 42. 
 
 (Comp. the avTos .f<f>r), ipse dixit, of the 
 Pythagoreans, Jamblich. Vit. Pythag. 18. 
 Cic. Nat. Deor. 1.5.) Genr. of any one 
 some time before spoken of; e. g. John the 
 Baptist, Matt. 11, 14; Zaccheus, Luke 19, 
 
 9. Also in epanorthosis, as Mark 2. 25 TI 
 eVoiijo-e AainS, ore . . . eirfivao-tv OVTOS Kal 
 of fj,T avTov. Luke 6 : 3. John 2, 12. y) 
 With an ordinal number; Rev. 17, 11 av- 
 ror oySoo? eVri himself is the eighth, i. e. 
 there are himself and seven others, he (av- 
 ros) being the chief; comp. 2 Pet. 2, 5. So 
 Thuc. 1. 46. Xen. Hell. 2. 2. 17. 8) 
 Rarely in an oblique case, and only when it 
 begins the construction ; Buttm. 1 27. 2. b. 
 Luke 24, 24 avr6i> 8e OVK eldov. John 9, 21 
 avTov epcorTjcrare. Eph. 2, 10 avTov yap 
 eV/ief Troirjpa. So Plato Lys. 204. a, avrov 
 TrpaiTov f)8ea>s aKovo~atyx av. Xen. Hi. 6. 10. 
 
 2. For the simple pers. pronoun of the 
 third person, he, she, it ; but only in the 
 oblique cases, never in the nominative, and 
 never at the beginning of a clause ; Buttm. 
 5 127. 2. 
 
 a) Genr. as Matt. 3, 16 dvfwx%T)o~av avroi 
 of ovpavoi. 6, 26 bis, avra . . . avrwi . v. 34 
 avT%. 7, 9. 10. Mark 1, 10. 4, 36. 12, 19. 
 Luke 1, 22 bis. avrots. 4, 41. John 1, 5. 6. 
 4, 39. 40. Acts 5, 9. Rom. 1, 20 avrowr. 
 Rev. 2, 18. al. saep. Rom. 10, 5 et Gal. 3, 
 
 10. 12 6 Troirjo~as avra rjo~fTai fv avroly, 
 quoted from Sept. Lev. 18, 5, where avra 
 refers to ra Trpoaray/iara Kal ra /cpi^ara 
 rov Seov. So Plut. J. Cses. 2. Xen. Mem. 
 3. 1.3, 4. Sometimes genit. avroi) is put 
 before the noun governing it, but without 
 emphasis ; John 2, 23 Secopovi/rey avrov ra 
 o-r^fla, a eVot ei. 3,. 19. 21. 4, 47. 12, 40. 
 2 Cor. 8, 2. Rev. 18, 5 ; also before two 
 nouns, Acts 3, 7. Tit. 1, 15. Occasionally 
 the pronoun is two or three times repeated, 
 where it may either refer to the same per 
 son, as Matt. 26, 71. Mark 10, 33. 34 ; or 
 to different persons, as Mark 8, 22 Kal 
 <pfpovo-ii> avr<5 [ ir/axiv] ru<p\6i>, Kal TraptKa- 
 Xovo-fi> avrov [ l^o-ovv] , Iva avrov [rov TV- 
 
 (p\ov] ah/^rai. 9, 27. 28. In other examples 
 the first pronoun belongs to the construction 
 of the case absolute, as Matt. 8,1.5. Mark 
 5, 2. Acts 7, 21. al. 
 
 b) Where there is no direct grammatical 
 subject or antecedent expressed, but the 
 pronoun refers to one implied, e. g. a) To 
 a gentile noun or the like implied in the 
 mention of a place, country, region ; Matt. 
 4, 23 and Luke 4, 15 f8i8ao-Kev ev rats 
 o-vraywyais avraiv sc. T&V Ta\i\ala>v. 9, 35. 
 11,1 (comp. Luke 9, 6). 12, 9 avTav, i. e. 
 the people of that place, comp. v. 1. Acts 
 
109 
 
 OfTO? 
 
 8, 5 (KT)pvo~o-(v avTols TOV XpicrroV, sc. rois 
 2afj.apeiTais. 20, 2. 2 Cor. 2, 13 comp. V. 
 12. So Lucian. Tim. 9. Dial. Mort. 12.4. 
 Time. 1. 136 6 8( Qep.Lo-TOK\r]s (ptvyd en 
 HfXoTrowrjcrov cs K.epKvpai>, &v OVTOIV fvtp* 
 ytTTjs. See Winer 22. 3. /3) To a noun 
 implied in a preceding one ; e. g. an ab 
 stract in a concrete, John 8, 44 on \jsev- 
 crn/s e oTi KCU 6 irarfjp UVTOV sc. rov \^ev8ovs- 
 Vice versa, Rom. 2, 26 tav fj aKpoftvo-Tia 
 . . . oi/x\ T) d/cp. avTov [TOV diepofivcrTov] tls 
 TrfpiTofj.Tjv \oyicr 5r)<TfTai. Also Luke 23, 51, 
 where mirSav refers to the Sanhedrim, as 
 implied in the Sing. QovXtvT-fjs v. 50. Comp. 
 Sept. Jon. 1, 3 Kal fvpe n\olov /3a&/bi> els 
 Qapcris . . . Kal dvffirj ds avTO TOV TrXf varai 
 per avTcav. See Winer 1. c. y) To a 
 subject implied in a preceding verb or other 
 words; Luke 18, 15 eVeri/nT/crai/ avrols, 
 SC. rols irpoo-(ppovo-iv TO. fipefyrj. 1 Pet. 3, 
 14 TOV 8( (po^ov avTcov fj.Tj (pof3rj?jf)Te , sc. 
 d(j) d)j/ Tracr^otre. Eph. 5, 12 ra yap Kpv(pfj 
 yivop.(va irrr avTatv, SC. TO>V TO. (pya TOV 
 CTKOTOVS TTOIOVVTCOV v. 11. Winer 1. c. Here 
 some include also Acts 12, 21 : 6 HpcoS^y 
 (8r]p.T]y6pf i trpbs avTOvs, as if i. q. Trpoj TOV 
 Srjuov ; but aiiTovs refers rather to those 
 sent by the Tyrians and Sidonians in v. 20, 
 to whom Herod gave audience before the 
 people; see Winer $ 21. n. 1. 8) When 
 the subject is presupposed as known, or 
 must be gathered from the whole context ; 
 Luke 2, 22 ai ij/iepat TOV Ka%apio~p.ov av- 
 rwv, i. e. of both mother and child. 5, 17 
 fls TO tacr3at avrovs, i. e. those present 
 who needed healing, without reference to 
 V. 15. John 20, 15 d crv /3aaracras avroV, 
 SC. TOV Kvpiov i*.ov V. 13. Acts 4, 5 crvva- 
 ^rjvai. avTwv TOVS ap^ovras, i. e. of the 
 Jews, TOV Xaov v. 1 ; so Heb. 4, 8. 8, 8. 11, 
 28. So too Matt. 8, 4 TO 8>pov, 6 irpocre- 
 TCI( Mcovcr^r, (Is papTvpiov avTols, i. e. to 
 the Jews, on whom this law of Moses was 
 binding ; Winer $ 22. 3. 4. Spec. auroV 
 refers sometimes to Jesus as the Messiah, 
 the Lord and Master, though he is not 
 named ; Luke 1, 17 Kal avros TrpoeXevcrerat 
 tvumiw avTov, comp. v. 76. So Mark 5, 
 2. Jonn 9, 22 eav TIS avTov 6p.o\oyT)<rT). 
 1 John 2, 12. 27. 28. 2 John 6. al. A like 
 use of the pronoun without an antecedent 
 is frequent in Hebrew ; see Lehrg. p. 
 740. 
 
 c) In or after a relative clause with or, 
 e. g. a) Where the relative construction 
 might properly be continued, but the writer 
 falls out of it; Acts 3, 13. 1 Cor. 8, 6 
 ou ri TroVra KOI T)p.ds fls OVTOV, for KOI tls 
 
 s. ibid. 81 ov ra.TraWa Kal rjfj.(1s 61 
 avTov. 2 Pet. 2, 3 ols TO Kpip.a funaXcu OVK 
 dpytl Kal f) oTTcoXeia avTatv ov wo-Ta(i, 
 for Kal <av f) oTrcoXeia KrX. See also Rev. 2, 
 18. So Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 38 ; comp. JEl V. 
 H. 12. 18. Strabo 8. p. 371. Kiihner334. 
 1 . /3) In a following clause, for distinct 
 ness or explanation ; Luke 12, 8. 10. 48 
 Kal w 7rape 3ei/ro TroXv, Trepicrcrorepoi atrTj- 
 o-ovo-iv avTov. John 6, 39. 17, 2. But 
 here do not belong Matt. 3, 12 and Luke 3, 
 
 17: OV TO TTTVOV fl> Trj ^flpl aVTOV whoSR 
 
 winnowing-fork is in his hand, i. e. ready 
 for use ; comp. Matt. 3, 10. Matth. $ 472. 
 3. Winer 5 22. 4. a. y) In the simpli 
 city of ancient expression, avrov etc. is 
 put by pleonasm after a relative in the 
 same clause and in the same case ; Mark 1 , 
 7 and Luke 3, 16 ov OVK eijiu IKUVOS Kv\jsas 
 \vo~ai TOV ip.dvra TO>V vTroS^juarwi avTov, 
 comp. Matt. 3, 11 where avTov is not in 
 serted. Mark 7, 25 r/s ei^e TO SvyaTpiov 
 avTTJs 7rvfvp.a aKc&apTov. Acts 15, 17. Rev. 
 3, 8. 7, 2. 13, 12 ; once with a relat. ad 
 verb, Rev. 17, 9 OTTOU 77 yvvf) xaS^rat eV 
 auraJv. This is the well-known Hebrew 
 construction of the relat. "i^X with a pro 
 noun following ; so Sept. for SS . . . "VSiX 
 or the like, Josh. 3, 4. Judg. 18, 5. 6 ; also 
 Sept. Is. 1,21. Judith 10, 2 ; see Heb. Gr. 
 j 121. 1. Lehrg. p. 743. But a like con 
 struction is sometimes found in Gr. writers ; 
 so Soph. Phil. 316 ots...3eol 8olft> iror 
 avTols dvTmoiv efjiov Tra^fiv. Diod. Sic. 
 1. 97 fls ov.,.Ka3 fKdo~Tr)v T)p.epav v8a>p 
 (fiepfiv (Is avTov (K TOV Nei Xov. Matth. 
 1 472. 3 ult. Winer J 22. 4. b. 
 
 d) Sometimes there is a transition from 
 the pron. of the first or second pers. to 
 that of the third, or vice versa ; e. g. from 
 the first to the third, Sing. Luke 1 , 45 comp. 
 44; Plur. Rev. 5, 10 comp. 9; also from 
 the second to the third, Rev. 18, 24 comp. 
 v. 22. 23. Vice versa, from the third to 
 the second, Matt. 23, 37. This is freq. in 
 Hebrew; see Heb. Gr. 134. n. 3. Lehrg; 
 p. 742. 
 
 e) Rarely aurou, OVTUV, is found where 
 the reflex. avTov, avT&v, might also stand ; 
 e. g. Matt. 21, 45 01 <apicraloi eyvu>o-av ort 
 Trepi avrcoi/ [airau/] Xeyft. John 4, 47 Kal 
 f]pa>Ta avTov Iva ara/3# Kal taoT/rat OVTOV 
 [avroG] TOV vlov. But here the writer 
 expresses the idea in his own person, and 
 not in reference to the preceding subject. 
 Comp. Buttm. 127. 3, and n. 4. Kiihner 
 $ 302. 5. Winer $ 22. 5. n. So Jos. Ant. 5. 
 2.11 T)TraTi)fj.(Vovs OVTOVS [avrovs} fj< 
 
110 
 
 Diod. Sic. 17. 64 rr\v Trpbs avrbv evvolav, 
 comp. \ 65 o-Topyrjv Trpbs eavrov, 
 
 f) In rare instances the oblique case of 
 the pron. is omitted, where it must be sup 
 plied in thought; Acts 13, 3 KOI empires 
 Tas ^eipay avTols dneXvcrav sc. avTovs. Mark 
 6,5. Luke 14,4. John 10, 29. Eph. 5, 11. 
 2 Thess. 3, 15. 1 Tim. 6, 2. Dem. 1259. 
 
 11. Xen. Hell. 3. 4. 3. See Buttm. $ 130. 
 5. Winer 22. 1. 
 
 3. With the article, 6 UVTOS, 17 avrrj, 
 TO avTo, the same, not different ; Buttm. 
 1 127. 2. III. 
 
 a) Genr. and with a subst. Rom. 10, 12 
 6 avrbs Kvpios. Phil. 1, 30 rbv avrbv dycava. 
 1 Cor. 12, 4 TO avrb rrvevpa. v. 5. 8. 9. 11. 
 Matt. 26, 44. Mark 14, 39. Luke 6, 38. 
 Rom. 9, 21. Neut. TO alto, ra avrd, 
 the same, the same things, Matt. 5, 46. Luke 
 6, 33. Acts 15, 27 TO. avrd. Rom. 2, 1. 
 1 Cor. l , 10. Eph. 6, 9. al. Sept. for "ins 
 Job 31, 15. So 2 Mace. 3, 33. Xen. Mem.V. 
 
 4. 6, 7. NEUT. adverbially : a) TO avro, the 
 same, in like manner, Matt. 27, 44. 1 Cor. 
 
 12, 25. So Plut. Mor. II. p. 6 pen. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 8. 5. /3) C TT! TO avro, e. g. of 
 place, in the same place, in one place, toge 
 ther, Matt. 22, 34. Acts 2, 1. 44. 1 Cor. 
 11, 20. Acts 4, 26, quoted from Ps. 2, 2 
 where Sept. for in|] ; also 2 Sam. 10, 15. 
 (Pol. 2. 32. 6. Comp. t Is ralro Jos. Ant. 
 
 5. 2. 11. Xen. An. 3. 1. 30.) Also of 
 time, at the same time, together, Acts 3, 1. 
 Luke 17, 35. Sept. for 1^1 Ps. 37, 38. 
 Deut. 32, 10. y) Kara TO UVTO, at the 
 same time, together, Acts 14, 1. Sept. and 
 tnn^ l Sam. 31, 6. 2 Sam. 2, 16. So Ml. 
 V. H. 14. 8. Diod. Sic. 20. 76. 
 
 b) Implying likeness, the same with any 
 thing, c. dat. 1 Cor. 11,5 li> yap eart KOI 
 TO avTo TJ7 fgvpr/pevr}. 1 Pet. 5, 9. See 
 Buttm. ^ 133. 2. f. Plato Euthyd. 298. a, 
 6 avTos TCO Xi Sco. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 35. 
 
 c) Implying stability, ever the same, un 
 changeable; Heb. 13, 8 I. Xp. x^es KOI <rr)- 
 fiepov 6 avTos. 1, 12 (TV Se 6 avTos e?, quoted 
 from Sept. Ps. 102, 28. So of mind or 
 purpose, Thuc. 2. 67 eyw pev 6 avTos ei/u 
 . . . vp.f Is 8e p.eTa/3dXXeTe. + 
 
 avrov, adv. (gen. of CUTO ,) in this or 
 that place, here, there, Matt. 26, 36. Acts 
 15, 34. 18, 19. 21, 4. Sept. for nta Ex. 
 24, 14 ; fib Num. 32, 6. Pol. 3. Vs. 2. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 5. 
 
 aVTOV, ys, ov, Att. for eavrov, rjs, ov, 
 reflex, pron. 3 pers. himself, herself, itself, 
 see Buttm. J 74. 3 ; so Matt. 1, 21. 3, 12. 
 Luke 5, 25. 9, 14. Acts 15, 26. 2 Tim. 2, 
 
 19. Rev. 16, 17. al. ssep. On avToC for 
 avTov, see in O.VTOS no. 2. e. So Hdian. 1 . 
 17. 26. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 28. Hell. 2. 4. 26. 
 In Matt. 23, 37 some for Trpbs avTrjv read 
 Trpbs avTTjv, which would then be for 2 pers. 
 Trpbs <TfavTT]v, comp. Buttm. 127. n. 5. 
 Kiihner } 302. 8. But see in aiiros no. 
 2. d. + 
 
 avr6(f>a)po$, ov, 6, 17, adj. (OVTOS, </>&>p,) 
 pr. caught in the xenj theft, and genr. caught 
 in the very act, Thuc. 6. 38. Usually and 
 in N. T. Neut. eV avTo^copo), in (upon) 
 the very act, e. g. of adultery, John 8, 4 
 ywrj KaTfi\r)(p %r) eV adrocpcopw p.oL^fvop.evr}. 
 So ^El. H. An. 11. 15 p.oixeuo/zeV?;! ywdiKa 
 eV. avT. KaTaAa/3coi/. Antiph. 605. ult. Xr/tpSe t- 
 (rav . . . eV avT. /LtTj^a^co/iei^i . Dem. 378. 12. 
 
 avro^eip, pos, 6, fj, adj. (alros, x p>) 
 lit. self-handed, own-handed, i. e. doing with 
 one s own hands ; Acts 27, 1 9 avTo^etpev 
 TTJV o-Kfvrjv . . . eppn^a/iei/, with our own hands 
 we cast out. For this adverbial use, see 
 Buttm. ^123. 6. Soph. Elec. 1019; c. 
 gen. Hdian. 7. 2. 17 avTo^etp T/Js paxys. 
 Dem. 321. 17; comp. Xen. Hell. 7. 3. 7. 
 
 UVXJATJpOS, a, ov, (ai>xpos, au^/zeaj,) 
 dusty, dirty, squalid, Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 31 ; 
 Torrot Plato Rep. 761. b. In N, T. genr, 
 for dark, dismal, 2 Pet. 2, 19. So Luc 
 Prometh. 14 TTJV yijv ovutri avxp-rjpav KO.I 
 overall. Hesych. av^/ijjpdi/ r]pov, 
 
 a<f)aipea), a>, f. TJO-OJ Rev. 22, 19 Rec. 
 (dvro, atpso).) fut. 2 a<pfXa> ib. Griesb. Aor. 2 
 d(pfl\ov, Mid. aor. 2 d(pei\6p.r)v. 
 
 1. to take from, to take away, from any 
 one ; c. ace. Luke 1, 25 TO omSd? p.ov, 
 comp. Sept. for fjbX Gen. 30, 23 ; so Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 6. 23 TOV (p%6vov. Also dfyaipeiv 
 Tr]v dpapTiav to take away sin, i. e. either to 
 expiate, to make atonement for, as by sacri 
 fices, Heb. 10, 4 (Sept. and xtoa Lev. 10, 
 17) ; or of God, to forgive, to pardon, Rom. 
 11, 27; so Sept, and x^3 Ex. 34, 7 ; *i53 
 Is. 27, 9. Ecclus. 47, 1 L Construed with 
 ace. and OTTO c. gen. of pers. Mid. Luke 16, 
 3 ; Pass. Luke 10, 42. So with and of 
 thing, Rev. 22, 19 bis ; also with id. 
 Rev. 22, 19. So c. and Sept. Gen. 31,31. 
 Sext. Empir. adv. Phys. 1. 280 el yap d(pai- 
 
 pflTai Tl OTTO TIVOS, TJTOl O~)fia flTTO O~dnp.aTOS 
 
 d(paipelTM. Theophr. Char. 2 ; c. e * Sept. 
 Judg. 21, 6. Xen. Ven. 12. 9. 
 
 2. Spec, to take off", i. q. to cut off, e. g. 
 TO o3Tiov, TO ovs, Matt. 26, 51. Mark 14,47. 
 Luke 22, 50. Sept. for rvnS 1 Sam. 17, 51. 
 ^El. V. H. 3. 1 TOV K\d$ov. Comp. Hdian. 
 3. 7. 16. 
 
111 
 
 rfi, fos, ovs, 6, f), adj. (a priv. cpai- 
 (.) not apparent, unseen, hidden, Heb. 
 4, 13. 2 Mace. 3, 34. Antiphon. 673. 2. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 2. 
 
 a<f>avi^(i), f. jo-<a, (d(f>avrjs,) 1. to make 
 disappear, to hide from sight; Pass, to dis 
 appear, to vanish away; e. g. a vapour, 
 Pass. James 4, 14. Philo de Char. p. 714 TO 
 ITKOTOS a<f)avi(Tai. Plato Rep. 855. a. Act. 
 Diod. Sic. 2. 20. Xen. An. 3. 4. 8. 
 
 2. Spec, to consume, to destroy, as earthly 
 treasures, absol. Matt. 6, 19. 20 ; comp. 
 Luke 12, 33. Pass, of persons, to be con 
 sumed, to perish, Acts 13, 41, quoted from 
 Sept. Hab. 1, 5. Sept. for rvnsf] Jer. 47, 
 4; ECX Joel 1, 18. Pol. 1. 81. 6. ib. 34. 
 
 14. 6." Xen. An. 3. 2. 11. 
 
 3. Trop. to darken, to disfigure, e. g. the 
 countenance by dust and ashes, opp. to a 
 cheerful aspect, Matt. 6, 16. Stob. Serm. 
 72. p. 445 yvvrj dcpai/i jjW ras o^eiy SC. with 
 pigments. JEi. H. A. 1. 41. Jos. Ant. 9. 
 3. 2. 
 
 d(f)avt,crfio^, ov, 6, (d(pai>i.) a disap 
 pearing, vanishing away, destruction ; e. g. 
 of a covenant, annulment, abrogation, Heb. 
 8,13. Genr. Sept. Zeph. 1,16. Diod. Sic. 
 
 15. 48. Comp. Test. XII Patriarch, p. 581 
 
 ov, 6, f], adj. (a priv. (patVo- 
 /iat.) not apparent, unseen, i. q. dcpavr/s , 
 hence a(pavros yeveo^ai, to disappear, to be 
 no longer seen, c. diro TWOS Luke 24, 31. 
 Diod. Sic. 3. 60 f^aifyvrfs VTTO Trvfvp.a.TO)v 
 ov a(pai/roi/ y 
 
 PlufdeDef. Orac. 1. 
 
 a<f)OpQ)V) ail/or, 6, (diro, eSpa,) pr. 
 place of sitting apart ; hence a privy, 
 draught, Matt. 15, 17. Mark 7, 19. Flo- 
 rent. in Geopon. 6. 2. 8. The word be 
 longs to a late age ; Sturz de Dial. Alex. 
 p. 150. Comp. in Sept. afadpos for n^S 
 menses, Lev. 15, 19. 20. 24. al. Psalt. Sa- 
 lom. 8, 13. 
 
 d<f)l8la, as, TI, (d<f)(i8fjs ; a priv. (pei- 
 fio/iat.) unsparingness, austerity ; Col. 2, 
 23 tv ... d<pei8i a TOV (rco/xaroj , in austerity 
 of body, i. e. harsh bodily discipline, asce- 
 tism. JE\. V. H. 14. 34. Comp. Thuc. 2. 
 
 OT779, TTJTOS, TI, (d(pe\j;s ; a priv. 
 ew.) simplicity, sincerity, Acts 2, 46. 
 So d<pe Xa id. J\. V. H. 3. 10. Pol. 6. 
 48.4. 
 
 a(e<7t9, tuts, f], (dtpir/p-i (\. v.) a letting 
 go, a freeing, e. g. 
 
 1. Of persons from bondage or service, 
 
 deliverance, liberty, Luke 4, 18 [19] bis. 
 Sept. for ifflan Is. 58, 6. Pol. 1. 79. 12. 
 Plato Polit. 273". c. 
 
 2. From the guilt and consequences of 
 sins, remission, forgiveness, pardon ; so a<pe- 
 o-ts TUV apstpriuv Matt. 26, 28. Mark 1, 4. 
 Luke 1,77. 3,3. 24,47. Acts 2, 38. 5,31. 
 10,43. 13,38. 26,18. Col. 1,14; a<peo-is TUV 
 7rapa7rra>/iaT&>i> id. Eph. 1, 7 ; also simply 
 Sheens id. Mark 3, 29. Heb. 9, 22. 10, 18. 
 So from debt, punishment, Sept. Deut. 15, 
 3 ; Trjs ripcapias Difed. Sic. 36. p. 222 ; row 
 (povov Plato Legg. 869. d. 
 
 <i<f> y h T}S, r], (aTTTu,) a joining, a joint, 
 e. g. of the body, trop. Eph. 4, 16 see in 
 mxopr]yia. Col. 2, 19. Plut. M. Anton. 
 27. Plato Ax. 365. a, o-wei\fyp.evov .ras 
 a(pds, KOI rw <ru>p.aTL p(afj.aXfov /crX. 
 
 aff^apcna, as, 17, (a03aproy,) incorrup- 
 tion, exemption from decay ; so of the bodies 
 of the saints after the resurrection, opp. f) 
 </>3opa, TO (fiapTov, 1 Cor. 15, 42. 50. 53. 
 54. Hence genr. immortality, the future 
 life and bliss of the saints in heaven, Rom. 
 2, 7. 2 Tim. 1, 10. So Wisd. 2, 23. Plut. 
 Aristid. 6. Trop. incorruptness, sincerity, 
 Eph. 6, 24 ev dffiapo-ia. So in M^s. Tit. 
 2, 7 ev TT) SiSacrAcaXia d8ia<p3opt ai/, cre/ij o- 
 
 afi$rapTO<>, ov , 6, 17, adj. (a priv. <p3ei pa>.) 
 incorruptible, undecaying, enduring; e. g. 
 of things, 1 Pet. 1,4. 3, 4 ; opp. <p3apror, 
 1 Cor. 9, 25. 1 Pet. 1, 23 ; so of the future 
 bodies of the saints, 1 Cor. 15, 52. Of God, 
 immortal, 1 Tim. 1, 17 ; opp. <p3apr6s av- 
 SpcoTTos, Rom. 1, 23. Wisd. 12, 1. Diog. 
 Laert. 10. 123. Plut. de Def. Orac. 19 eVi 
 (Sew) di Sto) Kai d<p%dpTa>. 
 
 as, T], (tifpZopos ; a priv. (p3ei- 
 pco,) incorrupt ion ; trop. incorruptness, pu 
 rity of doctrine ; in Mss. for dSuj<^3opia 
 Tit. 2, 7. 
 
 . f. d(p^o-o), (OTTO , ir/p-i,) aor. 2 
 d^)^!/, aor. 1 dcprjxa , Pass. aor. 1 d(pe%rjv 
 Pass. fut. 1 d(pe3ijo-o/xat. See Buttm. { 108. 
 
 I. Anomalous forms are : Pres. 2 p. d (p I s 
 from d(j)f<o, Rev. 2, 20 in later edit. comp. 
 Ex. 32, 32. Buttm. 5 106. n. 5. Winer} 14 
 3. Imperf. fjtyiov from d(pia>, Mark 1,34. 
 
 II, 16 ; comp. Ecc. 2, 18. 5, 11. Philo Leg 
 ad Cai. p. 1021. Buttm. { 108. I. 5. Winei 
 1. c. For the augm. see Buttm. } 86. n. 2 
 Perf. Pass. 3 plur. d (pew IT at Matt. 9, 2 
 5. Mark 2, 5. 9. al. from a form of the Perf. 
 Act. d<peo>Ka, Buttm. } 108. I. l,marg. note. 
 } 97. n. 2. Winer 1. c. To send forth 01 
 away, to let go away ; e. g. 
 
112 
 
 1. Pr. to send away, to dismiss; c. ace. 
 a) Genr. of persons, e. g. TOVS o^Xovy, TOV 
 o x \ov, Matt. 13, 36. Mark 4, 36. So Pol. 
 33. 1. 6. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 8. b) Spec, of a 
 wife, to put away, to divorce, 1 Cor. 7, 11. 
 12. 13. So Jos. Ant. 15. 7. 10. Hdot. 5. 39. 
 c) Of the voice, to send forth, to utter ; Mark 
 15, 37 dfpels (pcavrjv p.fyd\r)v, uttering a loud 
 cnj. Sept. for bi p "jna Gen. 45, 2. (Lu- 
 cian. Jup. Trag. 15. Plato Rep. 475. a.) 
 Also of the spirit, life, i. q. to give up; 
 Matt. 27, 50 afprjue TO -Trvevp-a he gave up 
 the gTios^expired. So d(p. TTJV fyvxh" Sept. 
 Gen. 35, 18. JEl H. An. 2. 1. Hdot. 4. 190 ; 
 of the breath Thuc. 2. 49. In the follow 
 ing significations the primary idea of send 
 ing away is retained only in a modified 
 sense : 
 
 2. to dismiss from one s attention or care. 
 to let be, to leave, i. e. a) to leave by going 
 away, departing, from a person, place, or 
 thing, to forsake, to quit; c. ace. Matt. 4, 11 
 Tore dfpirjaiv avroy 6 SiajSoXoy. V. 20 d<pev- 
 res TO. 8i K Tva. v. 22. 18, 12. 22, 22. 19, 27. 
 29. Mark 10, 28. 29. 14, 50. Luke 5, 11. 
 10, 30. John 4, 3 d(prJKe TTJV lovSaiav. 16, 
 28. al. Trop. Rom. 1, 27. Rev. 2, 4. 
 (WisdJO, 14. Ecclus. 6, 27. Lucian. D. 
 Deor. 672.) With an ace. and predicate, 
 to leave a person in any state, e. g. alone, 
 IJLOVOV, John 8, 29. 16, 32. (Comp. Lucian. 
 1. c.) Trop. of disease, a fever ; Matt. 8, 
 15 ital d(pTJKfv avTTjV 6 irvpfTos. Mark 1, 31. 
 Luke 4, 39. John 4, 52. b) to leave be 
 hind, to let remain ; Pass, to be left, to re 
 main ; c. ace. Matt. 5, 24 a<pes e*f I TO o>- 
 pw crov. John 4, 28. Luke 19, 44 ; Pass. 
 Matt. 24, 2. Mark 13, 2. Luke 21, 6. Matt. 
 24, 40. 41. Luke 17, 34. 35. 36. So to 
 leave behind at death, c. ace. Mark 12, 19. 
 20. 21. 22 ; ace. et dat. Matt. 22, 25. John 
 14, 27. With an ace. and predicate, to 
 leave or let remain in any state, e. g. John 
 14, 18 OVK d(pT)o-a> vp.ds op(pavovs. Acts 14, 
 17. Heb. 2, 8 ; also Pass, with dat. of pers. 
 Matt. 23, 38. Luke 13, 35. So Sept. 2 Chr. 
 28, 14. 1 Mace. 1, 48. c) to leave unheed 
 ed ; e. g. of persons, to let be, to let alone ; 
 Matt. 15, 14 a(f)fTe OVTOVS let them alone, 
 heed them not. (Comp. Xen. An. 5. 4. 7.) 
 Of things, to omit, i. e. not to dwell upon, 
 Heb. 6, 1 ; or also to leave undone, to ne 
 glect, Matt. 23, 23 bis, d^Tj/care TO /BapvTfpa 
 TOV vop.ov KT\. Mark 7, 8 dfpevres yap TTJV 
 fVTo\rjv TOV SeoO. Luke 11, 42. So Eurip. 
 Androm. 393. Soph. CEd. C. 1537 TU Sfta. 
 Dem. 11. 8 TOV Kaipov. 
 
 3. to let go from, to let off, pr. a person 
 from debt or accusation, as dcp. TWO. TOV 
 
 (povov Dem. 983. 22. In N. T. with ace. 
 of thing and dat. of pers. to remit, to for 
 give, e. g. debts or the like, Matt. 18, 27. 
 32; absol. Mark 11, 25. 26. So Sept. 
 Deut. 15, 2. JEl V.H. 14. 24. Dem. 1480. 
 11. Hence of sins, transgressions, to remit, 
 to forgive, to pardon; e. g TO.S a^aprias 
 Matt. 9, 6. Mark 2, 7. 10. Luke 5, 21. 7, 
 
 49 ; ace. et dat. Luke 11,4 afas TJ/JUV TO.S 
 apapTias. 1 John 1,9; Pass. Matt. 12, 31. 
 James 5, 15. John 20, 23 (see in Sa) ; 
 and SO d(pta>VTai voi (trou) at apapriai 
 Matt. 9, 2. 5. Mark 2, 5. 9. Luke 5, 20. 7, 
 47. 48. 1 John 2, 12. Also TO. a/j.apTT]paTa, 
 Pass. c. dat. Mark 3, 28. 4, 12 ; al dvofj.iai, 
 Pass. Rom. 4, 7 ; TJ /SXao-^/zta, Pass. Matt. 
 12, 31. 32 bis ; 17 Inivoia TTJS K. Pass. Acts 
 8, 22 ; TO 6(pfi\T)p,aTa Matt. 6, 12 ; TO, 
 Trapcmrco/iara Matt. 6, 14. 15 bis. 18, 35. 
 Mark 11, 25. 26. With dat. simpl. and 
 genr. Matt. 18, 21 KOI d^o-co aura*. Luke 
 
 12, 10. 17, 4. 23, 34. Sept. for IBS Is. 
 22, 14 ; xtoj Gen. 50, 17. Ps. 24, is". So 
 Jos. Ant. 6. 5. 6 TI]V ap.apTiav. Hdot. 6. 30 
 d.7rrJK T av aur<5 TTJV aiTirjv. 
 
 4. to let, to permit, to suffer, construed 
 a) With an Infin. e. g. inf. pres. Matt. 13, 
 30 ticpeTe (ruvavt-dvtcr Sai dptpoTtpa. Mark 1, 
 34. 10, 14. John 11, 44. 18, 8; inf. aor. 
 Matt. 8, 22 and Luke 9. 60 afpes TOVS ve- 
 Kpovs SoX/fcn TOVS (OVTWV vfxpovs. Matt. 23, 
 14. Mark 5, 37. 7, 12. 27. Luke 8,51. 12, 
 39. Rev. 11,9. Sept. c. inf. pres. for rPSfJ 
 2 Sam. 16, 11 ; c. inf. aor. -jpi Ex. 12, 23. 
 
 50 c. inf. pres. Lucian. Tim. 13. Thuc. 2. 
 
 13, Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 14. This infin. is of 
 ten implied; Matt. 3, 15 rdre dtpirja-iv av- 
 TOV sc. /3a7m eo-3at. 19, 14. Mark 5, 19 
 OVK d(pfJKev aitTov sc. flvai p.fT avTov. 11,6. 
 
 14, 6. John 11, 48 eav d^w/ifi/ avTov OVTO) 
 SC. Troiflv. 12, 7. Rev. 2, 20 on d(pf1s TTJV 
 yvvaiKa crov lea/3eX sc. StSucrKcw. So with 
 dat. of pers. Matt. 5, 40 afas OVTW KOI TO 
 l/jidTiov sc. Xa/3eiV. b) With Iva and the 
 Subjunct. Mark 11, 16 OVK fj(pi(v, Iva TIS 
 SifVfyKT) o-Kfvos 8ia TOV lepov. c) Imperat. 
 a(pes, afpeTe, let, permit, suffer; absol. Matt. 
 3, 15 acpes apTi suffer now. Elsewhere fol 
 lowed by the Subjunct. without Iva, in a 
 hortative sense ; Matt. 7, 4 and Luke 6, 42 
 a(pes, eKJ3d\a> TO Kap(pos, suffer that / cast 
 out. Matt. 27, 49 a<fxs, tSw/iev. Mark 15, 
 36 acpfTe, ?8a>nfv. So Arr. Epict. 1. 9 a(pes, 
 ftet<u/icy. 3. 12 a<pfs tfiw TIS ei. See Matth. 
 5 516. B. Winer } 42. 4. b. + 
 
 a(f)iKV0/jiai, ov/j-ai, f. t |o/iai, Mid. de- 
 pon. (OTTO, (Kveojuai.) to come or go away to 
 a place, to arrive at, to reach, with els c. 
 
113 
 
 ice. Hdian. 2. 13. 6. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 2. 
 (n N. T. trop. of a report, to go forth, to 
 spread abroad, c. els Rom. 16, 19. So Ec- 
 clus. 47, 16. 
 
 , ov, 6, }, adj. (a priv. <pi- 
 Kos, aya3o y,) not loving the good, 2 Tim. 3, 
 3 ; i. q. e^3poj Travrbs ayaSou, Tlieophyl. 
 
 d(j)t\.dpyvpo<f, ov, 6, TI, adj. (a priv. $1- 
 \os, apyvpos,) not loving money, not covetous, 
 1 Tim. 3,3. Heb. 13, 5. 
 
 ct<ptt9} ecos, T), (dfpiKVfofj.ai, ) arrival, ad- 
 rent, Hdian. 1. 7. 2. Plato Ep. 327. a. In 
 N. T. departure, Acts 20, 29. So 3 Mace. 
 7, 18. Hdian. 3. 1. 1. Dem. 58. pen. 
 
 d<f>la-Tr)/j,i, f. ^o-o,, (a^o, to-nj/Lit q. v.) 
 aor. 1 czTreoTTjcra ; aor. 2 direfmjv, imper. 
 iirotrTTjSi. As in Icrrr^^i, the tenses of this 
 verb are divided between trans, and intrans. 
 significations ; seeButtm. { 107. II. 
 
 I. TRANS, in Act. pres. impf. fut. and 
 lor. 1 ; pr. to make stand away or off, to put 
 iway, to remove, Sept. 1 Sam. 18, 13. Xen. 
 Hell. 7. 5. 23. In N. T. once of persons, to 
 draw away, to seduce, e. g. a people from 
 their allegiance ; Acts 5, 37 direo-rrja-ev \a- 
 ov licavbv orrla-Q) avrov. Sept. for "l^P^ 
 Deut. 7, 4. So Hdian. 1. 9. 2. Xen. An. 
 
 6. 6. 34. 
 
 II. INTRANS. in Act. perf. plupf. and aor. 
 2, also in Mid. to stand off or away, to keep 
 aloof, to depart from ; viz. 
 
 1. Genr. to desist from, to refrain from, 
 to leave, to let alone ; with OTTO c. gen. 
 Acts 5, 38 dir6(TTT]Tf OTTO T&V av Spunrcov TOV- 
 ra>v. 22, 29. 2 Cor. 12, 8. Sept. for Vin Job 
 
 7, 16 ; -rto 2 Sam. 2, 22. 23. So c/ gen. 
 Pol. 5. 46. 4. Dem. 78. 21. 
 
 2. Spec, to depart, to go away from, with 
 OTTO C. gen. Luke 2, 37 OVK. iXpio-raTo dnb 
 TOV iepov. 4, 13. Acts 12, 10. 19, 9. Also 
 Luke 13, 27, quoted from Ps. 6, 8 where 
 Sept. for "UD ; parall. airox^pfiv Matt. 7, 
 23. Sept. also Num. 12, 10 ; c. gen. Hdian. 
 6. 4. 8. Pol. 1. 88. 12. Hence i. q. to for 
 sake, to desert, c. OTTO Acts 15, 38. Comp. 
 Sept. Jer. 6, 8. 
 
 3. Trop. to withdraw from, to avoid, with 
 dno c. gen. 1 Tim. 6, 5 a$iWao-o dno TU>V 
 ToiovTcav. 2 Tim. 2, 19. So c. gen. Sept. 
 for 11D Lam. 4, 15. Diod. Sic. 1. 80. Xen 
 Cyr. 5.5.18. 
 
 4. Trop. to depart from, to fall away, to 
 apostatize ; absol. Luke 8, 1 3 ; c. gen. rrjs 
 Tr/o-7-fa>y 1 Tim. 4, 1 ; a-rro c. gen. Heb. 3, 
 12 tv rep aTTOOTT/vcu OTTO 3eoC. Sept. c. dno 
 for "no Dan. 9, 9; STion Ex. 20,8. So c. 
 gen. Hdian. 6. 2. 19. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 11 
 
 c. OTTO Arr. Exp. Alex. 1.7. 2. Xen. Cyr. 
 5. 4. 1. 
 
 a<j)va), adv. (kindr. ai^vrjs, dfpavrjs,) un 
 awares, suddenly, Acts 2, 2. 16, 26. 28, 6. 
 Sept. for OHnfi Josh. 10. 9. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 57. Thuc. 2. 90. 
 
 a<o/3&>?, adv. (a pnv. </>o/3oy,) without 
 fear, with confidence, Luke 1, 74. 1 Cor. 
 
 16, 10. Phil. 1, 14. Jude 12. Sept. for 
 inea p ro v. 1, 33. Hdian. 7. 2. 1. Xen. 
 Hi. 7. 10. 
 
 a(po/4Oioo>, w, f. eoa-o), (OTTO, 6/xotoo),) to 
 make fatty like, Pass. c. dat. Heb. 7, 3. 
 Diod. Sic..l. 86. Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 2. 
 
 tMpOpaw, S>, f. aTro^o/Acu, (OTTO, 6paa>,) 
 to look away, with tls or npos towards 01 
 upon any person or thing, to look steadfastly 
 upon, c. els Lucian. D. Deor. 6. 2 ; trpos 
 Plato Rep. 585. a. Comp. ane 18ov, a7ro/3Xe - 
 TTO). In N. T. trop. to look upon, to consider 
 attentively, with els c. ace. Heb. 12, 2 d(po- 
 ptavres els . . . TOV lr)<rovv. So C. els 4 Mace. 
 
 17, 10 els TOV 3eoi>. Plut. Lycurg. 7 ; Trpos, 
 Jos. Ant. 8. 12. 1 irpos TO 3eioi>. 
 
 d<f>op%o), f. i a-co, (COTO, 6pt o>,) Att. fut. 
 d(f>opiS> Matt. 13,49. 25, 32; seeButtm. 
 I 95. 7, 9 sq. Winer 5 13. 1. c ; to mark 
 off by bounds, to bound off, Sept for ^-.?rj. 
 Ex. 19, 12. 23. Pol. 17. 5. 7. InN. T. to 
 set off, to set apart, i. e. 
 
 1. to separate, c. ace. Gal. 2, 12 afpvpigev 
 eavTov. Acts 19, 9 ; ace. and dno, Matt. 25, 
 32 bis ; ace. and CK peo-ov Matt. 13, 49. 
 Pass. aor. 1 with Mid. signif, 2 Cor. 6, 17 
 8ib e e X3ere eV fj.ecrov ai Ta>v Kal dfyopia- SrjTe, 
 quoted from Sept. Is. 52, 11. Comp. Dem. 
 719.17. Plato Rep. 501. d. 
 
 2. to set apart, for any purpose ; wi^li 
 ace. and els, Acts 13, 2 d<popia-aTe 817 /not 
 . .. TOV 2a{)Aoi> els TO epyov. Pass. Rom. 1, 
 
 I. With ds c. ace. impl. i. q. to choose, 
 Gal. 1, 15. Sept. for ^?2rt Lev. 20, 26. 
 
 3. to separate, to shut out, sc. from rolt 
 gious and social intercourse, Luke 6, 22. 
 Eurip. Her. 931 ACCU p drrb yas &pi(rev lXi- 
 Sos. 
 
 a(popfAJ], jjs, rj, (d(popfj.da>,) a starthiu- 
 place, base of operations, Thuc. 1. 90. In 
 N. T. trop. a starling-point, an occasion. 
 opportunity, Rom. 7, 8. 11. 2 Cor. 5, 12. 
 
 II, 12 bis. Gal. 5, 13. 1 Tim. 5, 14. So 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 10. 1. Diod. Sic. 1. 83. Isasus 
 138. 12. 
 
 d<f)plc0, f. /o-o), (d(pp6s,~) to froth, tc 
 foam, absol. Mark 9, 18. 20. Soph. El. 
 719. Diod. Sic. 3. 10. 
 
114 
 
 a XP l 
 
 d(f)p6<f, ov, 6, froth, foam, Luke 9, 39. 
 Jos. Ant. 6. 12. 2. Plut. Sept. Sap. Conv. 
 18. Plato Tim. 83. d. 
 
 s, f], (ci<ppa>v,) pr. want o 
 mind or intelligence ; hence want of wisdom, 
 folly, 2 Cor. 11, 1. 17. 21. Sept. for n^S 
 Prov. 18, 13. So Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 4L 
 By Hebr. want of true wisdom, i. e. wick 
 edness, evil, unbelief, Mark 7, 22. Sept. and 
 n^,X Ps. 38, 6; !-&=3 Deut. 22, 21. Judg. 
 19, 23. So Wisd. 12, 23. 
 
 a(f)pwv, ovos, 6, f), adj. (a priv. (pprjv,) 
 pr. mindless, unintelligent ; hence, unwise, 
 simple, foolish, Luke 11,40. 12,20. 1 Cor. 
 15, 36. 2 Cor. 11, 16 bis. 19. 12,6. 11. 
 Sept. for b^ Prov. 12, 15. 16 ; ^ Prov. 
 30, 22. So Hdian. 5. 7. 1. Plato Rep. 598. 
 c. By Hebr. without true wisdom, i. e. 
 wicked, evil, unbelieving, Rom. 2, 20. Eph. 
 5, 17. 1 Pet. 2, 15. So Sept. and ^X Job 
 5, 3 ; ^OS Prov. 15, 20 ; ^ Ps. 14, 1. 
 
 a(f)V7rvoci), co, f. oxrw, (afpvTTvos,) to be 
 come afpvTrvos, to awake from sleep, Anth. 
 Gr. II. p. 103. In N. T. to fall away into 
 sleep, to fall asleep, absol. Luke 8, 23 ; par- 
 all. KaSevSo) Matt. 8, 24 and Mark 4, 38. 
 Sept. Aid. for Mti Judg. 5, 27. So Nicet. 
 Ann. II. 6. 48. B. See Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
 224. 
 
 CKpwvos, ov, 6, f], adj. (a priv. ^oii/ij,) 
 voiceless, speechless, i. e. 
 
 1 . dumb, not having the power of speech ; 
 e. g. beasts 2 Pet. 2, 16 ; idols 1 Cor. 12,2, 
 comp. Ps. 115, 5 sq. Hab. 2, 18. 19. JEs- 
 chin. 88. 37. 
 
 2. mute, silent, in patient suffering, Acts 
 8, 32 ; quoted from Is. 53, 7 where Sept. 
 for ESXS . So from surprise, JEl. V. H. 
 1^. 41. Plato Rep. 336. d. 
 
 3. Trop. unexpressive, without meaning, 
 1 Cor. 14, 10; comp. v. 11. 
 
 AyaC,, 6, indec. Ahaz, Heb. tn (p OS . 
 sessor), an idolatrous king of Judah, Matt. 
 1 . 9 bis. See 2 K. c. 1 6. 2 Chr. c. 28. 
 
 as, 17, Achaia, a region of 
 Greece ; pr. a province lying in the north 
 ern part of the Peloponnesus, including Co 
 rinth and its isthmus, and put by the poets 
 for the whole of Greece ; whence A^atot, 
 the Greeks. In a wider sense, Achaia com 
 prehended the Peloponnesus and the whole 
 of Hellas or Greece properly so called. 
 Augustus divided the whole country into 
 two proconsular provinces, viz. Macedonia 
 and Achaia ; the former of which comprised 
 Macedonia proper, with Illyricum, Epirus, 
 and Thessaly ; and the latter, all which lay 
 
 southward of the former. Corinth was the 
 capital of Achaia, and the residence of the 
 proconsul. In N. T. the name Achaia is 
 always employed in this latter acceptatfon ; 
 Acts 18, 12. 27. 19, 21. Rom. 15, 2fi. [16. 
 5.] 1 Cor. 16, 15. 2 Cor. 1, 1. 9,2. 1,10. 
 1 Thess. 1, 7. 8. See Plin. H. N. 4. 6. 
 Strabo 17. p. 840. Tacit. Ann. 1. 76. Suet. 
 Claud. 25. 
 
 ov, 6, Achaicus, pr. name of a 
 Christian, 1 Cor. 16, 17. 25. 
 
 a%dpia-TO$, ov, 6, f], adj. (a priv. ^apt- 
 o/xai,) unthankful, ungrateful, Luke 6, 35. 
 2 Tim. 3, 2. Ecclus. 29, 17. Hdian. 1. 9. 
 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 1. 
 
 o, indec. Achim, pr. n. of a 
 man, Matt. 1, 14 bis. 
 
 ov, 6, 17, adj. (a priv, 
 ^ei/3, 7roi(fco,) not made with hands, Mark 14, 
 58. 2 Cor. 5, 1. Col. 2, 11. 
 
 / 
 
 vos, T], a mist, darkness, which 
 shrouds objects, Horn. Od. 7. 41 ; or comes 
 over the eyes of the dying, II. 5. 696. In 
 N. T. a mist before the eyes, Acts 13, 11 
 a^Xvy /cat <TKOTOS. So Jos. Ant. 9. 4. 3. 
 Plut. Alex. M. 45. 
 
 a XP io< >i ot; ) o, 77, adj. (a priv. XP 6 ";) 
 useless, unprofitable, spoken of oneself, Luke 
 17,10. Sept. for ^euj 2 Sam. 6, 22. Sogenr. 
 Dem. 604. 13. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 21. Em- 
 phat. i. q. good for nothing, wicked, Matt. 25, 
 30 ; comp! v. 26. So Achill. Tat. 5. p. 32] ; 
 comp. dxpfioTijs Tob. 4, 13. 
 
 a XP eloo} ) *> 4>crco, (a^peioy,) to make 
 useless, to spoil, to destroy, Sept. 2 K. 3, 
 19. Pol. 1. 54. 8. ib. 3. 64. 8. In N. T. trop. 
 to make unprofitable, to corrupt ; Pass. Rom. 
 3, 12 afj-a ^peubStycroy, quoted from Ps. 14, 
 3 and 53, 4, where Sept. for fibxs . 
 
 a^prfcrro^ ov, 6. f], adj. (a priv. xp*)- 
 O-TOS,) useless, unprofitable, Sept. Hos. 8, 8. 
 Hdian. 8. 4. 21. Plato Rep. 332. e. In 
 N. T. emphat. unprofitable, good for nothing 
 injurious, c. dat. of pers. Philem. 11, comp. 
 v. 18. So Ecclus. 16, 1 axprja-Toi, paralJ. 
 o-ej3ar. Wisd. 3, 11. 
 
 "-XP 1 and &xpL?, (kindr. a/epos-,) the 
 latter occasionally before a vowel, Buttm. 
 5 26. 4. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 14 ; a particle of 
 time and place, until, even unto. See /if ^pt 
 init. 
 
 1 . Of time : a) As Prep. c. gen. until ; 
 so with nouns, Luke 4, 13 and Acts 13, 11 
 axpi- Kaipov until a season, i. e. for a sea 
 son. Acts 20, 1 1 ("xpi-s avyrjs (so &xpi TIJS 
 eco Jos. Ant. 6. 11. 4). Af,ts 2, 29. 3, 21. 
 
115 
 
 22, 22. 23, 1. 26, 22. Rom. 5, 13. 1 Cor. 
 
 4, 11. 2 Cor. 3, 14. Gal. 4, 2. Phil. 1, 6. 
 Heb. 6, 11. Rev. 2, 26. Acts 20, 6 S x pi 
 fjftpwv nfirrf until Jive days se. were passed, 
 in Jive days. So a^pi Sawirou or the like, 
 marking time or extent, Acts 22, 4. Rev. 2, 
 10. 12, 11 ; also Heb. 4, 12. With the 
 gen. of the art. before particles of time ; 
 Rom. 1,13 axpi TOV bfvpo hitherto. 8, 22 
 and Phil. 1,5 axpi TOV vvv. Comp. 2 Mace. 
 
 14, 15. Xen. Conv. 4. 37 &xpi TOV p-f/ nei- 
 vffv. With a relat. pron. and noun, e. g. 
 tixpi rjr Tiptpas until what day, until the day 
 that, Matt. 24, 38. Luke i, 20. 17, 27. 
 Acts 1, 2. For axpis ov see in lett. b. . 
 
 b) As a Conj. before verbs : u) Simply 
 xpt, until; so before a verb in the Sub- 
 junct. Luke 21, 24 a^pi TrXrypeoScoo-t icaipoi. 
 Rev. 15, 8. 20, 3. 5. Once c. fut. Rev. 17, 
 17 XP* TfXfcrSrjcroiTai ot Xoy<n TOV 3eov. 
 So c. Opt. Jos. Ant 12. 7. 6. /3) In the 
 form ilxpts ov, until that, until, pr. for 
 axpi XP OVOV v un til the time that ; so 
 before a verb in a past tense, e. g. Indie. 
 Acts 7, 18 i*XP ls v avecrnj ftacriXevs fTfpos. 
 27, 33 ; Subjunct. Rom. 11, 25 uxp<-s ov TO 
 7r\f]p<ap.a TOIV f%v>v tlrf&g. 1 Cor. 11, 26. 
 
 15, 25. Gal. 3, 19. 4, 19. Rev. 2, 25. 7, 3. 
 (Indie. Heliodor. 3. 7. Xen. Hell. 6. 4. 37. 
 Subj. Plut. Artax. 19. Theophr. H. Plant. 
 
 5. 2.) Before a verb in the present tense, 
 as long as, while; Heb. 3, 13 axpis ov TO 
 crfffifpov KoXctrat. So (*xp<- simpl. 2 Mace. 
 14, 10. 
 
 2. Of place, as Prep. c. gen. Acts 11, 5 
 
 uxpis fp.ov. 13, 6 axpi Hd<pov. 20, 4. 2b, 
 15. 2 Cor. 10, 13. 14. Rev. 14, 20. 18, 5. 
 Lucian. D. Deor. 7. 4. Plato Tim. Locr. 
 100. e. ib. 101. a. 
 
 ov, TO, (kindr. ax w ) straw, as 
 cut down, Xen. (Ec. 18. 1, 2. In N. T. 
 chaff, short straw, the chaff and straw as 
 broken up by treading out the grain, ant! 
 separated by winnowing, Matt. 3, 12. Luke 
 
 3, 17. Sept. for ya Is. 17, 13; 1M) Gen. 
 24, 25. 32. Judg. 19, 19. So Pol. 1. 19. 13. 
 Xen. (Ec. 18. 6,7,8. Such straw or chaff 
 was used as fodder, and also for fuel ; see 
 Gen. and Judg. 1. c. also Matt. 6, 30. Luke 
 12, 28\ See Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. p. 277. 
 
 atyevSijs, eos, ovs, 6, fj, adj. (a priv. tyev- 
 do/*at,) without lie, that cannot lie, xerax, of 
 God, Tit. 1, 2. Wisd. 7, 17. Hdian. 2. 9. 
 
 4. Plato Rep. 382. e, ndvrj] d 
 8ai/j.6i>i.6v Tf KOI 
 
 , ov, 6, wormwood, (i. q. d-fylv- 
 3toi/, Aquil. for ^f?^ Prov. 5, 4. Xen. An. 
 1. 5. 1,) as the symbol of bitter poison, and 
 as the name of a star causing death ; so Rev. 
 8,11 bis, KOI yivfTM TO TpiTov TO>V v8aTu>v 
 fls a^nv^ov KT\. For the poisonous char 
 acter ascribed to wormwood and other bitter 
 plants, see Jer. 9, 15. 23, 15. Lam. 3, 15. 
 19; comp. Deut. 29, 18. Heb. 12, 15. Ex. 
 15, 23. 
 
 atyvxp?, ov, 6, T), adj. (a priv. -fi^J 
 without life, lifeless, e. g. musical instru 
 ments, 1 Cor. 14, 7. Wisd. 14, 29. Pol. fi 
 47. 10. Plato Soph. 227. a. 
 
 Bda\, 6, indec. Baal, Heb. ^?? (lord), 
 Chald. ^?2 , ^? , Bel, the chief domestic 
 and tutelary god of the Phenicians, and 
 particularly of the Tyrians, representing 
 either the sun, or more probably the planet 
 Jupiter. Rom. 11, 4 OUK fKap^av yow 777 
 [fiKovi] BaoX, quoted from 1 K. 19, 18 
 \vhere it is TW BaaX ; comp. Buttm. 125. 
 5. The Israelites were often seduced to 
 the worship of this god; Judg. 2, 11. 13. 
 3, 7. 8, 33. 1 K. 16, 31. 2 K. 10, 18. See 
 Heb. Lex. art. ^?? no. 5. Gesen. Comm. 
 on Isai. II. p. 335 sq. 
 
 Baflvhwv, >vos, fj, Babylon, Heb. ^2 
 Babel (i. e. confusion, contr. for ?2 3 from 
 ^2 Gen. 11, 9,) the celebrated metropolis 
 of Babylonia and the seat of the Chaldean 
 
 empire. For a full account of it, and of the 
 present ruins, see R. K. Porter s Travels 
 II. p. 283 sq. C. J. Rich Memoirs on Baby 
 lon and Perse polis, Lond. 1839. Ritter s 
 Erdkunde Th. XI. p. 865 sq In N. T. pr. 
 Matt. 1, 11. 12. 17 bis. Acts 7, 43. 1 Pet. 
 5, 13. Poetically and symbolically Babylon 
 is put for the capital of heathenism, the 
 chief seat of idolatry, prob. pagan Rome, as 
 being the successor of ancient Babylon in 
 this respect; Rev. 14,8. 16,19. 17,5. 18, 
 2. 10. 21. Comp. Is. 21, 9. Jer. 50, 23 sq. 
 51, 7. 8. 
 
 ou, 6, OaiVw,) a step of a stair- 
 case or door. Ecclus. 6, 36. Sept. 1 Sam. 5, 5. 
 Plut. Romul. 20. In N. T. a step of dig 
 nity, degree, 1 Tim. 3, 13. So Artemidor. 
 
 /a - 
 
116 
 
 2. 42. Lucian. Amor. 53. The Attic form 
 was [3ao-u.6s, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 324. 
 
 ^a^09, eos, ovs, TO, (fioSvs, ) depth, Matt. 
 
 13, 5. Mark 4, 5. Rom. 8, 39. Eph. 3, 18. 
 Luke 5, 4 TO /3d3os the depth, the deep, i. e. 
 the deep water of the lake. Sept. for 
 D^jsasa EZ. 27, 34 ; ^nnn EZ. 31, 14. So 
 Diod. Sic. 5. 36. Xen. (Ec. 19. 14. Trop. 
 a) depth, for fulness, greatness; Rom. 11, 
 33 fidZos TT\OVTOV KT\. (Sept. Prov. 18, 3 
 8d3os KctK&v, comp. jEl. V. H. 3. 18 TT\OV- 
 ro? /SaStiff.) 2 Cor. 8, 2 17 Kara /3a3ovy TTTG)- 
 ^fia, lit. poverty down to the depth, i. e. 
 deepest poverty ; comp. Strabo 9. 419 avrpov 
 KolXov Kara /3d3ovs. b) Plur. ra /3d3?7, 
 depths, deep things, the secret, unrevealed 
 counsels of any one, e. g. TOV 3eoD 1 Cor. 
 2, 20 ; of Satan, mysteries Rev. 2, 24 Rec. 
 Sept. for pES Ecc. 7, 4. Comp. Judith 8, 
 
 14. Plato Thecet. 183. e. 
 
 , f. vj/w, (/3a3vy,) to deepen, to 
 make deep, absol. Luke 6, 48 eer/ca^e KCU 
 (fiaSvvf, lit. he dug and made deep, i. e. 
 he dug deep ; where by Hebr. e/3d3ui>e sup 
 plies the place of an adverb, i. q. eovca\//-e 
 (SaSe ws ; see Gesen. Lehrg. p. 823. Heb. 
 Gr. 139. n. 1 ; comp. Buttm. 5 144. n. 6. 
 Sept. fiaSiivaTf (Is KC&IO-IV for P 5^ P^Sfi 
 Jer. 49, 8. Horn. II. 23. 481. Anacr. 6d . 
 17. 6. 
 
 ySa^i^, ela, v, adj. deep, e. g. a well 
 John 4, 11. Sept. for pa? p r0 v. 22, 14. 
 So Hdian. 3. 3. 2. Xen. An. 5. 2. 3. Trop. 
 a) Of sleep, Acts 20, 9 imvq> ta3et. So 
 Theocr. 8. 65. M. V. H. 9/13. b) Of 
 the dawn ; Luke 24, 1 opSpou /3a3e or deep 
 twilight, day-break, the first dawn, i. q. 
 Xi av Trpvt Mark 16, 2. So Plato Prot. 310. 
 a, tTi /3a3e os opSpov. c) Neut. Plur. TO 
 /SaSe a, the deep things, mysteries, of Satan, 
 Rev. 2, 24 Griesb. comp. in jSdSoy lett. b. 
 Comp. jEschyl. Supp. 405. Hdot. 4. 95. 
 
 /3aioVj ov, TO, (dim. ftais, ) Plur. ra 
 /3ai*a, palm-branches, the pendulous twigs 
 and boughs of the palm-tree ; John 12, 13 
 ra /3ata TO>V (poiviicav. Symm. for B^OSO 
 Cant. 7, 9. 1 Mace. 13, 51. Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 668. 
 
 .BaXaa/u., 6, indec. Balaam, Heb. B ^ra 
 (non-populus, foreigner,) pr. n. of a sooth 
 sayer of Pethor in Mesopotamia, who was 
 hired by Balak, king of the Moabites, to 
 curse the Israelites ; see Num. c. 22. 23. 
 Deut. 23, 4. Josh. 24, 9. Jos. Ant. 4. c. 6. 
 In N. T. put as the emblem of false and 
 seducing teachers, 2 Pet. 2, 15. Jude 11. 
 Rev. 2, 14. See also 
 
 Ba\d/c, 6, indec. Balak, Heb. P^2 
 (spoiler), a king of the Moabites, Rev. 2, 
 14. See Num. c. 22. Josh. 24, 9. Jos. Ant. 
 4. c. 6. 
 
 /3a\dvTloVj ov, TO, written also TO |3aX- 
 \avnov, a bag, purse, Luke 10, 4. 12, 33. 
 22, 35. 36. Sept. for ThS Job 14, 17 ; CH3 
 Prov. 1, 14. Hdian. 5. 4. 4. Xen. Conv. 4. 2. 
 
 ), f. aX, perf. /Se /SX^a, aor. 2 
 e/3oXoi> ; Pass. perf. /Sc jSXij/uu, aor. 1 e /3X)j- 
 Sqz/, fut. 1 jSX^o-o/iai ; to throw, to cast, 
 with a greater or less degree of force, as 
 modified by the context ; in Gr. usage often 
 of weapons, stones, and the like, Sept. 
 2 Chr. 26, 15 dXXeti> /3e Xeo-i *ai X/3otj. 
 Hdian. 3. 3. 9. Xen. An. 5. 4. 23. In N. T. 
 1 . Pr. to throw, to cast, to a distance, with 
 force and effort, e. g. a) At a person ; as 
 stones, c. ace. et eVt rtw, John 8, 7 rrpwros 
 TOV Xi Soi/ eV air?; /3aXerw. Ace. impl. with 
 eVi Tiva, v. 59. (Dion Cass. 817. 3. Pol. 
 ,1. 48. 8.) With ace. of pers. and dat. of 
 instr. to throw at, to hit ; Mark 14, 65 pairio-- 
 P.OO-IV avTov e/SoXXoi/, lit. they threw at (hit) 
 him with slaps, slapped him with their open 
 hands. So pr. Lys. 140. 1 e/3oXXe p.e Xt- 
 Soir. Jos. Ant. 2. 15. 4. Hdian. 7. 11. 17. 
 b) Genr. to throw or cast in any direction ; 
 e. g. to or before any one, c. ace. et dat. 
 Matt. 15,26 TOV apTov . . . /3aXeii/ roly Kvva- 
 piois. Mark 7, 27 ; epTrpoo-Sev TWOS Matt. 
 7, 6. Or from any orie, with OTTO, as /3dX* 
 dno o-ov, Matt. 5, 29. 30. 18, 8. 9 ; with e*, 
 as vSwp fK TOV o-Top.aTos Rev. 12, 15. 16 , 
 with eco, to cast out or away, Matt. 5, 13. 
 13, 48. Luke 14, 35; trop. John 15, 6. 
 1 John 4, 18. Also upon any thing, with 
 firi C. ace. Rev 7 . 18. 19 efidXov -^ovv eVi ras 
 Kf(p. avT&v. Or into any thing, with etj 
 c. ace. as noviopTov tls TOV depa Acts 22, 23 ; 
 fls TTJV SdXao-o-ai/ Matt. 4, 18. 13, 47. 17, 
 27. 21, 21. Mark 9, 42. 11, 23. Rev. 8, 8. 
 
 18, 21 ; fls TO TTvp Matt. 3, 10. Mark 9,22. 
 Luke 3, 9. John 15, 6 ; els rr)i> yeevvav Matt. 
 5, 30. 18, 9 ; tls TTJV Kafjuvov Matt. 13, 42. 
 50; fls K\i@avov Matt. 6, 30. Luke 12, 
 28 ; also Rev. 8, 7. 12, 4. 9. 13. 20, 3. 
 10. 14. 15. al. Sept. c. fls Dan. 3, 21. Is. 
 
 19, 8 ; comp. ^Esop. F. 130. Jos. Ant. 6. 
 9. 5. c) Of seed, to cast, to sow, e. g. 
 o-nopov tnl TTJS yijs Mark 4, 26 ; KOKKOV ds 
 TOV KTJTTOV Luke 13, 19. Sept. /SdXXovres 
 (TTT/p/Liara Ps. 126, 6. Of manure, to cast 
 in, Luke 13, 8. d) Spec, of lots, to cast 
 sc. into an urn or vessel, from which they 
 were then drawn out ; Potter Gr. Ant. I. 
 p. 333. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 302. So 
 Matt. 27, 35 bis. Mark 15, 24 /3aXXoj/r 
 
117 
 
 K\rjpov eV aura. Luke 23, 34. John 19,24. 
 Sept. for b^en Neh. 11, 1 ; ,-n 1 ? Ob. 11. 
 Ecclus. 37, 8. Plut. Lucull. 2? eV irai8ia 
 e^aAXowo K\rjpov. e) So to cast money 
 into the treasury or chest ; els TOV topftavav 
 Matt. 27, 6 ; els TO yao(pv\aKiov (see this 
 art) Mark 12, 41. 43. Luke 21, 1. 4 ; ab- 
 sol. id. Mark 12, 44. Luke 21, 3. 4; also 
 John 12, 6. So Jos. Ant 6. 1.2. f) Of 
 persons, /3oXXo> TIVU els K\ivrjv, to cast 
 into a bed, to lay upon the bed, to afflict 
 with disease, Rev. 2, 22. (Intrans. id. Arr. 
 Epict. 2. 20. 10.) Hence Pass. perf. /3e- 
 j3At7/iai enl K\IVTJS, to be laid upon the bed. 
 to lie ill, Matt. 9, 2 ; Pfpxrjpai absol. id. 
 Matt. 8, 6. 14. Simpl. to be laid, to lie, 
 Mark 7, 30 ; npos TI Luke 16, 20. Comp. 
 Buttm. $ 113. 7. g) Spec. /SoXXca TWO. 
 els (pvXaKfjv, to cast into prison, implying 
 the use of force, Matt. 18, 30. Luke 12, 58. 
 Acts 16, 37. Rev. 2, 10. So Arr. Epict. 
 
 I . 29. 6. h) Of a tree, to cast its fruit ; 
 Rev. 6, 13 as crvicrf /3dXXei TOVS oXui>3ouy 
 avnjs. i) Of a city, to cast down, to over 
 throw, J. q. Karaj3aXXco. Rev. 18, 21 OVTODS 
 - . . ft\rfir]o-fTai Ba/3vXa>i/. So Kara/3aXXa) 
 Xen. Hell. 4. 5. 10. ib. 6. 4. 27. k) Re 
 flex. ftdXXeiv tavTov, to throw or cast 
 oneself, e. g. with Kara) down, Matt. 4, 6. 
 Luke 4, 9; fls .TTJV SaXacrcrav John 21, 7. 
 1) Intrans. or with eavToV impl. Buttm. { 130. 
 n. 2 ; to cast oneself, to rush ; and of a wind, 
 to blow, to storm; Acts 27, 14 e/3oXe KOT 
 avTT)s [K.pr]TT]s] avfjj.os TvfpwiKos. So Horn. 
 
 II. 11. 722 TTora/nos tls aXa jSaXXeof. Plato 
 Hipp. Maj. 293. a. 
 
 2. In a modified sense, to cast, the idea 
 of distance and force being dropped, i. q. 
 to put, to place, to lay, to thrust, e. g. /3. TO 
 dpyvpiov TOIS rpairf^irais, to put money to 
 the exchangers, to place it upon their tables, 
 Matt. 25, 27. With ace. and tls c. ace. to 
 put or thrust into ; e. g. TOVS 8a.KTv\ovs fls 
 TO. S>ra Mark 7, 33, and so John 20, 25. 27 ; 
 Tr)V paxatpav fls TTJV ZfjKrjv John 18, 11 ; 
 gdXlwws (Is TU crrofMTa. James 3, 3 ; TO 
 Bptiravov fls TTJV yrjv Rev. 14, 19 ; Tiva els 
 TTJV <o\vn$rfipav John 5, 7. Trop. jSaXXe i v 
 els TTJV Kapoiav TWOS, to put into tJie 
 heart of any one, to suggest, John 13, 2. 
 So Jos. Ant. 6. 13. 4 a p-^Tf fls vow e /3uXo- 
 yujv. Pind. Ol. 13. 22 rroXXa 8 eV Kapftiais 
 . . . (fiaXov. Plut. Timol. 3 els vovv f/x/3dX- 
 Keiv. With aC. and eVi c. ace. to put or 
 lay upon any one ; Rev. 2, 24 ou /3aXXo> 
 tip upas aXXo /Sapor. Also of a sickle. /3. TO 
 ipeVarov fVl Tr)v yijv to thrust in the sickle 
 upon the earth Rev. 14, 16. Trop. j3. elprj- 
 mqv tTri TTIV yrjv to send ("introduce) peace 
 
 upon the earth ; and so ft. p.dxaipav ib. 
 With ace. and eVcoTrtoV TIVOS, to lay or place 
 before any one ; e. g. TO a-KtivSaXov Rev. 2, 
 14. So Rev. 4, 10 TTfaovvrai, . . . KOI Trpoer- 
 K.vvf)<Tov<ri, . . . Kal j3a\ov(ri TOVS crTffpdvovs 
 avTcav evanriov TOV Spovov, they fall down . . . 
 and worship . . . and lay their crowns before 
 the throne, i. e. in the manner of potentates 
 doing homage to a superior ; so Tigranes 
 in Plut. Comp. Cim. et Lucull. 3 TO StaS/y/xa 
 TTJS Kf(pa\rjs d(pf\6p.fvos eSr/Ke Trpo T>V TTO- 
 d>v. Cic. pro Sext. 27. Jos. Ant. 15. 6. 
 6, 7. 
 
 3. Spoken of liquids, to put, to pour, e. g. 
 wine or water ; with ace. and els, to put or 
 pour into; Matt. 9, 17 ouSe /3aXXova-ii> oiw> 
 MOV els dcrKovs TraXatovy. Mark 2, 22. Luke 
 5, 37. 38 ; John 13, 5 /SoXXei vSeop els TOV 
 viTTTTJpa. Once of ointment, with ace. and 
 eTri c. gen. to pour upon; Matt. 26, 12 /3u- 
 
 XoUQ-a O.VTT) TO [JLVpOV TOVTO tTTt TOO 0~&>/iaTOS 
 
 yiov, comp. v. 7. So c. els. Horn. Od. 4. 
 220. Anacr. 36. 10. Arr. Epict. 4. 13. 12 
 olvov "iva ftdXio fls TOV TT&OV. With eVt, 
 Eurip. Orest. 297 Xoi/Tpa T eVi 
 /SaXf. + 
 
 , f. ura>, (/3a7rTa).) a frequenta 
 tive in form, but apparently not in sig 
 nification ; to dip in, to sink, to immerse, 
 in Gr. writers spoken of ships, galleys, etc. 
 C. ace. Pol. 1. 51. 6 Kal vroXXa T>V VKcXpav 
 fftdTrri&v. ib. 8. 8. 4. ib. 16. 6. 2. Epict. 
 Fragm. 14. Jos. B. J. 3. 8. 5 KujSepj/^njr, 
 ooTts ^et/uwva 8f8oiKu>s Trpo TTJS %ve\\rjs 
 f{3dTmo-fv tKuiv TO o~Kd(f)os. Ant 9. 10. 2. 
 Vit. 3. Of animals, Diod. Sic. 1 . 36 TCOV 8e 
 Xfpo~aia>v ^Srjpicov TO TroXXa p,fv viro TOV TTOTO- 
 fj.ov TTfpL\rj(p^S(in-a Siacp^fiptTai /SaTTTtfo /ieva. 
 Pol. 5. 47. 2 of horses sinking in a marsh. 
 Also of men, Jos. Ant. 15. 3. 3 
 dfl Kal ftaTrri^ovrfs u>s eV TratSta 
 B. J. 1. 22. 2. Diod. Sic. 16. 80 ; or partially, 
 to the breast, Pol. 3. 72. 4 tcos TO>I> (JMO-TJOV 
 ol ire ^ol P<nm6p.fvoi.. Strab. 14. p. 667. a, 
 fJ-fXP 1 o/i^oXoC /SaTTTtfo/ieVcBi . Also to dip 
 in a vessel, to draw water, Plut. Alex 
 M. 67. In N. T. 
 
 1. to wash, to lave, to cleanse by washing, 
 Mid. and Pass. aor. 1 in Mid. sense, to wash 
 oneself, i. e. one s hands or person, to per 
 form ablution; Luke 11, 38 fSavfjiao-ev OT> 
 ov TrpuiTOV e /3a7m o-3r; 77po TOV apiarou, comp. 
 the like circumstances in Mark 7, 2. 3, 
 where it is i/iTmyiat, and see in Truy/xij. 
 Also Mark 7, 4 lav /XT) fiaTrTto-fovrai, comp. 
 v. 2. 3. Sept. for ^3 J 2 K. 5, 14, comp. v. 
 10 where it is ^nn Sept. Xouw. Judith 12, 
 7 rat (Judith) e^aTrri^fTo tv TJJ 
 
118 
 
 ttrl Ti]s Trrryris TOV vdaros- Ecclus. 31, 25 
 jSaTmfo/iei os OTTO veKpov, where comp. Lev. 
 11, 25. 28. 40. Num. 19, 18. 19. 
 
 2. to baptize, lo administer the rite of 
 baptism, either that of John or of Christ ; 
 Pass, and Mid. to be baptized or to cause 
 oneself to be baptized, i. e. genr. to receive 
 oaplism ; see note below. Thus 
 
 a} Pr. and a) Absol. Matt. 3, 6. 13. 14. 
 16. Mark 1, 4. 5. 16, 16. Luke 3, 7. 12. 
 21 bis. 7, 30. John 1, 25. 28. 3, 22. 23 bis. 
 26. 4, 1. 2. 10, 40. Acts 2, 41. 8, 12. 13. 
 36. 38. 9, 18. 10, 47. 16, 15. 33. 18, 8. 
 22, 16. 1 Cor. 1, 14. 16 bis. 17. So Mark 6, 
 14 latdvvrjs 6 /SaTm fcoi i. q. 6 /SaTmor/jy. 
 /3) With an adjunct of manner ; e. g. with 
 ace. of the kindred noun, Acts 19, 4 Icodi - 
 VTJS eftdTTTicre (BdTTTicrp.a peTavoias, John bap 
 tized a baptism of repentance, i. e. by which 
 those who received it acknowledged the 
 duty of repentance. Luke 7, 29. Comp. 
 Buttm. ^ 131. 4. In Luke s writings with a 
 dat. of the instrument or material employed, 
 e. g. vdaTi, WITH water, Luke 3, 16. Acts 
 1,5. 11,16. Elsewhere with eV v8an, IN 
 water, Matt. 3, 11. Mark 1, 8. John 1, 26. 
 31. 33. Comp. Matt. 3, 6 ev TO lopbdvca. 
 See Matth. $ 396. n. 2. Winer 31. 5. Once 
 /3. els TOV Iop8dvijv, baptized into the Jordan, 
 Mark 1,9. So genr. c. els Plut. de Su- 
 perstit. 3. Jos. Ant. 4. 4. 6. y) With ad 
 juncts marking the object and effect of the 
 rite of baptism ; chiefly with e i s c. ace. to 
 baptize or to be baptized INTO any thing, i. e. 
 into the belief, profession, observance of any 
 thing ; Matt. 3, 1 1 tig peTdvotav. Acts 2, 
 38 els a(peo-iv dp.apTia>v. 19, 3 els TO iwdv- 
 vov /3a7rrio-/xa, i. e. the repentance into which 
 John baptized. 1 Cor. 12, 13 els ev o-S)p.a, 
 i. e. that we may become one body. Rom. 6, 
 3 els ZdvaTov. With els c. ace. of person, 
 to baptize or to be baptized INTO any one, i. e. 
 into a profession of faith in any one and sin 
 cere obedience to him ; Rom. 6, 3 and Gal. 
 3, 27 els Xpio-Tov. Trop. 1 Cor. 10, 2 els TOV 
 MU>VO~T)V. So els TO ovop.d TLVOS, into the 
 name of any one, in a like sense ; Matt. 28, 
 19. Acts 8, 16. 19, 5. 1 Cor. 1, 13. 15, 
 Also in the same sense, ri TW OVO/MOTI Ii;- 
 crov Acts 2, 38 ; and ev r&> oVo/zari TOV KV- 
 piov Acts 10, 48. With virep, 1 Cor. 15, 
 29 bis, 01 /SaTmfdjU.ei oi virep TU>V veitpwv, 
 those baptized on account of the dead, i. e. 
 why baptized into a belief of the resurrec 
 tion of the dead, if in fact the dead rise not ? 
 See also in lett. b. 
 
 b) Trop. and with allusion to the sacred 
 rite : a) Direct, e. g. ^airri^eiv ev jrvev- 
 pa.Tt dyita KCU irvpi, to baptize in (wi/li) the 
 
 Holy Ghost, and in (witK) Jire, i. e. to over 
 whelm, richly furnish, with all spiritual 
 gifts, and to overwhelm with fire unquench 
 able, Matt. 3, 11. Luke 3, 16 ; for the con 
 struction see above in lett. a. /3. So with 
 ev irvevp.aTi dy iq> alone, Mark 1, 8. .John 
 1, 33. Acts 1, 5. 11, 16. /3) Genr. and 
 with indirect allusion to the rite, to baptize 
 with calamities, to overwhelm with suffer 
 ings, [Matt. 20, 22 bis, 23 bis.] Mark 10, 
 38 bis. 39 bis, TO /3a7rrior/j.a, 6 e-yco /3a7TTib- 
 fuu, /3a7rrio-3^rat, to receive the baptism with 
 which I must be baptized, i. e. can ye endure 
 to be overwhelmed with sufferings like 
 those which I must endure ? For the con 
 struction see above in lett. a. /3. Luke 12, 
 50. With vTrep TLVOS, 1 Cor. 15, 29 bis, 
 TI TroiT)o~ovo-iv ol /3a7mojLiei oi inrep TOIV veK- 
 putv . . . rt KOI {3aTTTiovrai vnep atiTuvj 
 i. e. if the dead, 01 veicpoi, do not rise, why 
 expose ourselves to so much suffering in 
 the hope of a resurrection ? comp. v. 30. 
 31, where Kivbvveva and diro%vr)o-K<0 are 
 substituted for /3a7rri fo/iat. So some ; others 
 better as above in lett. a. y. So trop. 
 Sept. (for TS3) Is. 21, 4 77 dvop.la fix /3a- 
 mrjfci. Jos. B. J. 4. 3. 3 ot 8rj vcrTepov e/3d- 
 TTTiaav TTJV ivukiv, i. e. the robbers who had 
 broken into Jerusalem afterwards baptizea 
 the city, filled it with confusion and distress. 
 Plut. de Puer. educand. 13 ^xv T0 ff M" 
 o-vp-p-eTpois aveTai. TTOVOIS, Tols $e inrep- 
 pdXXovaiv j3<nrTieTai. Plut. Galb. 21 O^XTJ- 
 p.acn ftfjScnrTi(Tfi,fvos overwhelmed with 
 debts. Diod. Sic. 1. 73 tfitcbray /3a7m eii> 
 rats ela-cpopais. Jos. Ant. 10. 9. 4 /3e/3a7rrt- 
 crfievois els dvaicr^Tjcriav xal VTTVOV VTTO TIJS 
 P&TJS. Evenus 15, in Anthol. Gr. ed. Jac. 
 I. p. 99, jSaTm jfei v-rrvat. Also Plato Conv. 
 176. b, TU>V x%es /3e/3cmTtoyte z &>i>, Lat. vino 
 madidi. Euthyd. 277. d, peipaKiov fianTi- 
 6p.evov a boy overwhelmed with ques 
 tions. 
 
 NOTE. While in Greek writers, as above 
 exhibited, from Plato onwards, /3a7rri &> is 
 every where to sink, to immerse, to over 
 whelm, either wholly or partially ; yet in 
 Hellenistic usage, and especially in reference 
 to the rite of baptism, it would seem to have 
 expressed not always simply immersion, 
 but the more general idea of ablution or af 
 fusion. This appears from the following 
 considerations : a) The circumstances 
 narrated Luke 11, 38, compared with those 
 in Mark 7, 2-4 where rtWco is employed, 
 implying according to oriental custom a 
 pouring of water on the hands, see in viirra 
 and 2 K. 3, 1 1 ; likewise the use of |3a- 
 nT<.rrp.6s Mark 7, 4. 8 ; as also the passages 
 
119 
 
 from the Sept. quoted above in no. 1. The 
 idea of private baths in families in Jerusalem 
 and Palestine generally is excluded ; see in 
 lett. b. b) In Acts 2, 41 three thousand 
 persons are said to have been baptized at 
 Jerusalem apparently in one day at the sea 
 son of Pentecost in June ; and in Acts 4, 4 
 the same rite is necessarily implied in re 
 spect to five thousand more. Against the 
 idea of full immersion in these cases there 
 lies a difficulty, apparently insuperable, in 
 the scarcity of water. There is in summer 
 no running stream in the vicinity of Jeru 
 salem, except the mere rill of Siloam a few 
 rods in length ; and the city is and was sup 
 plied with water from its cisterns and public 
 reservoirs ; see Bibl. Res. in Palest. I. p. 
 479-516. From neither of these sources 
 could a supply have been well obtained for 
 the immersion of 8000 persons. The same 
 scarcity of water forbade the use of private 
 baths as a general custom ; and thus also 
 further precludes the idea of bathing in the 
 passages referred to in lett. a. c) In the 
 earliest Latin Versions of the N. T. as for 
 example the Itala, which Augustine regard 
 ed as the best of all (de Doctr. Christ. 2. 15), 
 and which goes back apparently to the se 
 cond century and to usage connected with 
 the apostolic age, the Greek verb /3a7rrio> 
 is uniformly given in the Latin form bap- 
 tizo. and is never translated by immergo or 
 any like word ; showing that there was 
 something in the rite of baptism to which 
 the latter did not correspond. See Blanchini 
 Evangeliarium quadruplex,etc.Rom. 1749. 
 d) The baptismal fonts still found among 
 the ruins of the most ancient Greek churches 
 in Palestine, as at Tekoa and Gophna, and 
 going back apparently to very early times, 
 are not large enough to admit of the bap 
 tism of adult persons by immersion; and 
 were obviously never intended for that use. 
 See Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. p. 182. III. 
 p. 78. 
 
 /Sa.TTTlO fia, aroj, TO, (/Scwmfco,) pr. 
 any thing dipped in or immersed ; in N. 
 T. baptism, i. e. the rite, e. g. John s bap 
 tism, Matt. 3, 7. 21, 25. Mark 1,4. 11,30. 
 Luke 3, 3. 7, 29. 20, 4. Acts 1,22. 10,37. 
 13,24. 18,25. 19,3.4; Christian baptism, 
 Rom. 6, 4. Eph. 4, 5. Col. 2, 12. 1 Pet. 3, 
 21. Trop. baptism for calamities, afflictions, 
 with which one is overwhelmed, Matt. 20, 
 22. 23. Mark 10, 38. 39. Luke 12, 50; see 
 in $a7m f no. 2. b. 
 
 /3a7TTi<T/z69, ov, 6, (/SaTm fw,) pr. a 
 dipping, immersion ; in N. T. 
 
 1 . a washing, ablution, of vessels, couches 
 Mark 7, 4. 8. Heb. 9, 10. Comp. Lev. 11, 
 32. 
 
 2. baptism, the rite, Heb. 6, 2. Jos. Ant 
 18. 5. 2, of John s baptism. 
 
 /3a7rT4<7T?79> ov, 6, (/3a7m fa>,) a bap- 
 tizer, i. e. the Baptist, as a surname of John. 
 the forerunner of our Lord, Matt. 3, 1. 11, 
 11. 12. 14,2. 8. 16, 14. 17, 13. Mark 6 ; 
 24. 25. 8, 28. Luke 7, 20. 28. 33. 9, 19. 
 Jos. Ant. 18. 5. 2. 
 
 pa7TT<u, f. r^co, 1. to dip in, to immerse ; 
 c. ace. John 13, 26 ftafyas TO \Jfa>/itoi/, sc. 
 fls TO Tpvft\iov comp. Mark 14, 20. Sept. 
 c. ace. et els for bDO Lev. 4, 6. So c. ace. 
 Xen. An. 2. 2. 9 ; ace. et els Ml. V. H. 14. 
 39. Plato Tim. 73. e. Also with ace. and 
 gen. of a fluid ; Luke 16, 24 tva /3d\|/77 TO 
 aKpov TOV 8ciKTv\ov avrov vSaros, comp. 
 Winer $ 30. 5. 2. b. So Arat. de Cepheo 
 sidere, TO. p.ti> fls KtcpdXriv /xdXa navra ftdir- 
 TWV <oKfavoio, Wetst. 
 
 2. Spec, to dip, to dye, Pass. c. dat. of 
 instr. Rev. 19, 13 ipdnov ^fj3ap.p.fvov aipm. 
 Sept. Ps. 68, 24. Jos. Ant. 3. 6. 1. Plato 
 Rep. 429. d, e. Horn. Batrach. 223 ed- 
 iTTfro 8 aifiari Xifj-vrj. 
 
 /3dp, Heb. "13 , son ; see Bapir)o-ovs,Bap- 
 
 .Bapa/3/3a9, a, 6, Barabbas, Aram. 
 N3X 13 (son of the father), pr. name of a 
 robber, whom Pilate released to the Jews, 
 Matt. 27, 16. 17. 20. 21. 26. Mark 15, 7. 
 11. 15. Luke 23, 18. John 18, 40 bis. 
 The name was not unusual among the 
 Jews ; see Lightfoot Hor. Heb. in Matt. 
 27, 16. 
 
 Bapd/c, 6, indec. Barak, Heb. pi 3 
 (lightning), pr. n. of a Hebrew, who with 
 Deborah delivered Israel from the Canaan- 
 ites; Heb. 11, 32. See Judg. c. 4. 5. Jos. 
 Ant. 5. 5. 2 Bapaxor. 
 
 Bapa^ias, ov, 6, Barachias, pr. n. of 
 the father of Zacharias, who was slain be 
 tween the temple and the altar, Matt. 23, 
 35 ; see in art. Za^apias no. 2. 
 
 fidp(3apo$, ov, 6, a barbarian, i. e. pr. 
 simply a foreigner, one who does not under 
 stand or speak the language of a particular 
 people. Strabo regards it as an onomato- 
 poaetic word imitating a difficult and harsh 
 pronunciation ; 14. p. 662. Perh. derived 
 from Berber, the name of a formidable na 
 tive race in northern Africa. 
 
 1. Genr. of one who uses a different 
 tongue, 1 Cor. 14, 11 bis. Sept. for ts^ 
 Ps. 114, 1. 2 Mace. 2, 21. Hdot. 2. 158 
 
/3apea> 
 
 120 
 
 /3apv$ 
 
 dapBdpovs Trdvras of AtyuTrrtot fcoXeoucri 
 rovs [J.T] crfpicri 6p.oy\<acrcrovs. Hdian. 7. 3. 2. 
 
 2. Spec, one who does not speak Greek, 
 one not a Greek fey language or nation ; 
 Acts 28, 2. 4, where the inhabitants of Me- 
 lita (Malta) are so called, as speaking a dia 
 lect of the Phenician language. Rom. 1,14 
 "EXkijari re Kal fiapfidpois, to the Greeks and 
 to those not Greeks, to other nations. So Col 
 3,11 ^EXX^z/ Kal lovftalos . . . fidpftapos, "Suv- 
 %T)S, where /3ap/3apoy seems to refer to those 
 nations of the Roman empire who did not 
 speak Greek, as the Jews, Romans, Span 
 iards ; and SKvStyj to nations not under the 
 Roman dominio n. Jos. B. J. prosm. 5 *EX- 
 \rj<ri Kal fBapfidpois, i. e. the Romans, Jews, 
 and others, ib. 5. 1. 3. So of the Romans, 
 Pol. 5. 104. 1. ib. 9. 37. 5; of the Syrians, 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 1. 
 
 papeco, >, f. JJO-CB, (/3apoy,) to iceigh 
 down, to be heavy upon ; found in early and 
 Attic writers only in the perf. participles 
 /3e/3ap77?, ftfj3aprip,evos, Horn. Od. 3. 139. 
 ib. 19. 122. Plato Conv. 203. b. Other 
 forms occur in later writers ; as fut. /3apij- 
 o-ft Luc. D. Mort. 10. 4 ; see Thorn. Mag. 
 p. 141 sq. Matth. 227. Buttm. Ausf. Spr. 
 114. In N. T. only Pass. /3ape o/xai, 
 oOp-ai, aor. 1 efiaprfiriv, perf. part, ^f^aprj- 
 fj.(vos, to be weighed down, to be heavy, op 
 pressed, only trop. a) By sleep, e. g. /3e/3a- 
 pr/fAfvoi vrrvca Luke 9, 32 ; absol. id. Matt. 
 26, 43. Mark 14, 40. So c. VOTW Anthol. 
 Gi. IV. p. 177. b) By surfeiting, etc. 
 Luke 21, 34 fj-rj^ore ftaprfiSxriv (/3apw3cocr 
 Rec.) at /cap8/ai vua>v fv KpanrdXrj KT\. 
 So Horn. Od. 19. 122 OIJ/M fieftaprjoTa. c) 
 By evils, calamities, 2 Cor. 1, 8. 5, 4 a-revd- 
 ofj.fv ^apovfifvoi. So Dion. Hal. Ant. 1.14 
 TroXety VTTO Tro\efj,(av Kal aXXcav KaKtav fiaprj- 
 SeTcrat. d) By expense, i. q. to be burdened, 
 charged ; 1 Tim. 5, 16 fj.f] /3apei o-3co fj fKK\rj- 
 <ria. Comp. in dfiaprjs and eVt/Sapew. 
 
 /3apea>9, adv. (/Sapur,) heavily, with diffi 
 culty, trop. Matt. 13, 15 and Acts 28, 27 
 Tols axri j3apea>s rJHowav, tney heard heavily 
 with their ears, i. e. are dull of hearing ; 
 quoted from Is. 6, 10, where Sept. for 
 ^?^ . Comp. jSapews (pepeiv Sept. Gen. 
 31/35. Dem. 1103. 17. Xen. An. 2. 1. 4. 
 But Xen. An. 2. 1. 9 ftapecas aKovfiv to 
 hear indignantly. 
 
 Bap^dXo/jicuos, ov, 6, Bartholomew, 
 Heb. ^bft 12 (son of Tolmai), the patr,o- 
 nymic of one of the twelve apostles, Matt. 
 10, 3. Mark 3, 18. Luke 6, 14. Acts 1, 13. 
 Ilis pr. name was prob. Nathanael ; see John 
 1 4(1 21, 2. So Jude is also called Leb- 
 
 beus and Thaddeus ; and Peter is some 
 times Barjonas. 
 
 BapiTjcrovs, ou, 6, Barjesus, Heb. "12 
 SlttJ 1 ] (son of Jeshua), pr. n. of a Jewish 
 magician, Acts 13, 6. 
 
 Bapicovas, a, 6, Barjonas, Heb. ~"i3 
 fjl" 1 (son of Jonas), the patronymic of the 
 apostle Peter, Matt. 16, 17. Others write 
 it /3ap lavas. 
 
 aS) a, 6, Barnabas, surname of 
 Joses, a Levite, born in Cyprus, who be 
 came the first associate of Paul in his 
 labours. The name Barnabas, Aram. ~i? 
 ! " 1! $ ! :: ? ( son f P r ph ec y) s is explained by 
 Luke (Acts 4, 36) as i. q. vlos irapaK\T]<rea>s, 
 see in vlos. Acts 4, 36. 9.27. 11, 22. 25. 
 30. 12, 25. 13, 1. 2. 7. 43. 46. 50. 14, 12. 
 14. 20. 15, 2 bis. 12. 22. 25. 35. 36. 37. 39. 
 1 Cor. 9, 6, Gal. 2, 1. 9. 13. Col. 4, 10. 
 
 eos, ovs, TO, weight, Xen. Cyr. 
 3. 3. 42. In N. T. only trop. 
 
 1. weight, i. e. a burden, load; put for 
 heavy labour, TO ftdpos TTJS rj^tpas Matt. 20, 
 12 ; for burdensome precepts, Acts 15, 28. 
 Rev. 2, 24 ; for sins and weaknesses which 
 weigh one down, Gal. 6, 2. 2 Mace. 9, 10. 
 Pol. 5. 72. 10. Plato Legg. 925. d, TO rS>v 
 TOIOVTCOV v6p.a>i> . . . fidpos. Pr. Xen. CEc. 
 17. 9. 
 
 2. weight, i. e. influence, authority, hon 
 our ; 1 Thess. 2, 6 8vvdp.evoi ei> fidpei fivai 
 cor Xp. aTroo-ToXot. SoDiod. Sic. 4. 61. ib. 31. 
 p. 155 T^XiKoCTO ftdpos oiKias Kal yevovs. 
 Others less well, burden, in a pecuniary 
 sense ; comp. in ^Sape oo lett. d. 
 
 3. u-eight, i. e. abundance, greatness, ful 
 ness ; 2 Cor. 4, 17 aluiviov ftdpos 8orjs, an 
 eternal fulness of glory. Soph. Aj. 130 
 paKpov TT\OVTOV ftdpfi. Diod. Sic. 17. 52 
 /3ao-/Xeta . . . %avp.a<TTa Kara TO ueyeSos Kal 
 (Sdpoy TUIV epycav. 
 
 Bapcra{3a$, a, 6, Barsabas, surname 
 of two men : a) Of Joseph mentioned in 
 Acts 1, 23; see lojo-^. b) Of Judas 
 mentioned Acts 15, 22 ; see lovdas. 
 
 ov, 6, Bartimeus, Heb. 
 " X53L2 13 (son of Timeus), pr. n. of a blind 
 man, Mark 10, 46. 
 
 papvvcO) f. !/,. QSapuy,) to weigh down ; 
 in N. T. trop. once Pass. aor. 1 e^apw^v, to 
 be weighed down, to be heavy, dull, Luke 21, 
 34 Rec. where others read ape o> q. v. 
 Sept. Is. 33, 15. Diod. Sic. 4. 38. Xen. 
 Lac. 2. 5. 
 
 la, v, (/3apo?.) 1. heavy, e. g. 
 Matt. 23, 4 (poprla /3ape a, spoken of bur- 
 
121 
 
 aensome precepts. So Sept. for *nS Ps. 
 38, 5. Ecclus. 40, 1. Xen. Hi. 1. 5. 
 
 2. Trop. weighty, grave; Matt. 23, 23 
 Ta fiapvTfpa TOV vop.ov. Acts 25, 7 /Sape a 
 arriw/iara. 2 Cor. 10, 10 at ^ei/ rioToXai 
 . . . $apetai, weighty, impressive. Sept. Dan. 
 2, 11. Hdian. 2. 14. 7. Plato Legg. 717. d. 
 
 3. Trop. grievous, burdensome, e. g. pre 
 cepts 1 John 5, 3. So Sept. Neh. 5, 18. 
 Ecclus. 29, 28. Xen. Hi. 8. 10. Also Acts 
 20, 29 \VKOI ftapt is, grievous wolves, fierce, 
 causing mischief. So Wisd. 17, 21. JEl. 
 V. H. 1 . 34 3awxTov Tpoirov ftapvTaTov. Xen. 
 Hell. 3. 2. 1. 
 
 ?, ov, 6, 17, adj. (/3apu?, 
 of great price, precious, Matt. 26, 7 ; parall. 
 TToXvri/iof John 12, 3. Heliodor. 2. p. 113. 
 Trop. venerable ^Esch. Suppl. 25. 
 
 @a(ravi(i), f. t o-w, (/Sao-ows.) pr. to 
 rub on the touch-stone, to test, Plato Gorg. 
 486. d. Trop. to put to the test, to examine, 
 either by questions Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 16; or 
 by torture Hdian. 3. 5. 13. Isaeus 202. 10. 
 Thuc. 7. 86. Hence in N. T. genr. to tor 
 ment, to put in pain, e. g. a) Of pun 
 ishment, c. ace. Matt. 8, 29. Mark 5, 7. 
 Luke 8, 28. Rev. 1.1, 10 comp. v. 6. Pass. 
 id. Rev. 14, 10. 20, 10. So Wisd. 11, 9. 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 14. 4. b) Pass, to be tor 
 mented. pained, e. g. as a woman in travail 
 Rev. 12, 2 ; by disease, Matt. 8, 6 ; by 
 plagues, Rev. 9, 5. So Wisd. 16, 1. Lu- 
 cian. Pseudosoph. 6. Plato Legg. 922. d, 
 Pao-avKTSevTes IKUVCOS ft> vocrots. c) Also to 
 torment, i. q. to vex, to trouble ; 2 Pet. 2, 8 
 V//-VXTJI> SiKaiav . . . (fiacrdvicrfv. (Arr. Epict. 
 2. 22. 35 ftaawdftOf eauro i/.) Pass, of per 
 sons toiling, Mark 6, 48 ; of a vessel tossed 
 by the waves, Matt. 14, 24. 
 
 o, , /ao-aj/ia), pr. 
 test, trial, by the touch-stone, etc. In 
 N. T. torture, torment, pain ; Rev. 9, 5 bis. 
 14, 1 1 tcdrrvos fiacravicrfiov, the smoke of their 
 torment, i. e. of the fire in which they are 
 tormented. 18, 7. 10. 15. So 4 Mace. 9,6. 
 
 fiacravicmfi, ov, 6, (fiaa-avlfa, ) pr. a 
 torturer, inquisitor, Dem. 978. 1 1 ; see Diet. 
 of Antt. art. Basanos. In N. T. a prison- 
 keeper, jailer, i. q. o~f<rp.o(pv\a, Matt. 18,34. 
 
 /3o<rai 09, ov, f), pr. a touch-stone, lapis 
 Lijdius, for trying metals, etc. Pind. Pyth. 
 10. 106 et ibi Scholia. Then, examination, 
 trial, Pol. 22. 3. 7. Plato Gorg. 486. d ; tor 
 ture, Pol. 15. 27. 7. JE\. V. H. 7. 18. In 
 N. T. torment, pain, inflicted as punishment 
 Luke 16, 23. 28 ; by disease Matt 4, 24. 
 So Wisd. 3, 1 . Lucian. Tragodop. 282 -nav- 
 
 oo^ewu ftd&avoi. Aiso of parturi 
 tion Anth. Gr. II. p. 205. 
 
 /3acri\.eia, as, i], (jSao-tXevr,) kingdom, 
 the rule and dominion of a king, e. g. 
 
 1. dominion, reign, rule, the exercise of 
 kingly power, [Matt. 6, 13.] Luke 1, 33. 
 Heb. 1, 8. Rev. 17, 12. 17. 18. al. Meton. 
 abstr. for concr. kings, Rev. 1, 6 in later 
 editions. Sept. for naiba i Sam. 10, 16. 
 25. Wisd. 6, 4. Hdian. 2. 4. 7. Xen. Mem. 
 4. 6. 12. Ag. 1. 4. 
 
 2. a kingdom, dominions, realm, a people 
 and country under kingly rule, Matt. 4, 8. 
 12,25. 24, 7 bis. Mark 6, 23. Luke 11, 17. 
 18. Heb. 11, 33. Rev. 11, 15. 16, 10. al. 
 Sept. for nsi3ba Esth. 2, 3 ; ns^B Gen. 
 10, 10. Hdian. 4. 3. 11. yEl. V. H. 4. 5. 
 
 3. In the phrase fj ftao-iXeia TOV Seov, 
 the kingdom of God, Matt. 6, 33. Mark 1, 14. 
 15. Luke 4, 43. 6, 20. John 3, 3. 5. al. 
 also f] /Sao-. TOV XpiaroD, Matt. 13, 41. 
 20,21. Rev. 1,9; or TJ /3. TOV X. /cat 
 3eov Eph. 5, 5 ; or TJ j3. TOV AauiS, as the 
 ancestor and type of the Messiah, Mark 1 1 , 
 10; further, f) /Sao-. TU>V ovpavcav, the 
 kingdom of heaven, only in Matthew, as 3, 2. 
 4, 17. al. for which we find in 2 Tim. 4, 18 
 % /Sao-. T) firovpdvtos; and likewise absol. 17 
 /Sao-iXct a, Matt. 8, 12. 9,35. al. i. q. later 
 Heb. D^K ni^JB or n^EH r^sba . All 
 these expressions are in N. T. synonymous, 
 and signify the divine spiritual kingdom, ike 
 glorious reign of the Messiah. The idea of 
 this kingdom has its basis in the prophecies 
 of the O. T. where the coming of the Mes 
 siah and his triumphs are foretold ; e. g. 
 Ps. 2 and 110. Is. 2, 1-4, comp. Mich. 4, 1 
 sq. where in v. 7 the Targ. has nisba 
 D-vaOCrl. Is. 11, 1 sq. Jer. 23, 5 sq. 31,31 
 sq. 3 T 2, 37 sq. 33, 14 sq. Ez. 34, 23 sq. 
 37, 24 sq. and espec. Dan. 2, 44. 7, 14. 27. 
 9, 25 sq. His reign is here figuratively 
 described as a golden age, when the true 
 religion and with it the Jewish theocracy 
 should be re-established in more than pri 
 meval purity, and universal peace and hap 
 piness prevail. All this was doubtless to be 
 understood in a spiritual sense ; and so the 
 devout Jews of our Saviour s time appear 
 to have received it; as Zacharias, Luke 1, 
 67 sq. Simeon, 2, 25 sq. Anna, 2, 36 sq. 
 Joseph, Luke 23, 50. 51. But the Jews at 
 large gave to these prophecies a temporal 
 meaning : and expected a Messiah who 
 should come in the clouds of heaven, and 
 as king of the Jewish nation restore the 
 ancient religion and worship, reform the 
 corrupt morals of the people, make exoia- 
 
j3acn\eia 
 
 122 
 
 tion for their sins, free them from the yoke 
 of foreign dominion, and at length reign 
 over the whole earth in peace and glory ; 
 comp. in aliov no. 2. b. See Schoettgen 
 Diss. de regno ccelor. in Hor. Heb. I. p. 
 1147. Wetstein N. T. I. p. 256. Keil Hist. 
 Dogm. de regno Mess, in Opusc. Acad. p. 
 22 sq. Storr Opusc. I. p. 253 sq. Tholuck 
 Bergpr. zu Matt. 5, 3. Referring to the 
 O. T. idea, we may therefore regard the 
 kingdom of heaven in the N. T. as denoting 
 in its Christian sense, the Christian dispen 
 sation, comprising those who receive Jesus 
 as the Messiah, and who, united by his Spi 
 rit under him as their head, rejoice in the 
 truth and live a holy life in love and in com 
 munion with him. This spiritual kingdom 
 has both an internal and an external form. 
 As internal, it already exists and rules in 
 the hearts of all Christians, and is therefore 
 present. As external, it is either embodied 
 in the visible church of Christ on earth, and 
 in so far is present and progressive ; or it 
 is to be perfected in the coming of the Mes 
 siah to judgment and his subsequent spirit 
 ual reign in bliss and glory, in which view 
 it is future. But these different aspects 
 are not always distinguished ; the expres 
 sion often embracing both the internal and 
 external sense, and referring both to its 
 commencement in this world and its com 
 pletion in the world to come. Hence 
 
 a) In the Jewish temporal sense, by Jews 
 and by the apostles before the day of Pente 
 cost, Matt. 18, 1. 20, 21. Luke 17, 20 init. 
 19, 11. Acts 1, 6. 
 
 b) In the Christian sense, as announced 
 by John the Baptist, where also some 
 thing of the Jewish view was intermingled, 
 Matt. 3, 2 ; comp. also Luke 23, 51. As 
 announced by Jesus and others, Matt. 4, 17. 
 23. 9, 35. 10, 7. Mark 1, 14. 15. Luke 10, 
 9. 11. Acts 28, 31. al. In the internal spi 
 ritual sense, Rom. 14, 17 ov yap ea-nv fj /3. 
 TOV 3. ftpaxns Kal TTOO~IS, dXXa 8iKaiocrvvr) 
 Aral tlpr]vr] Kal X a P a * v TrvevfJ-aTi dyiw. Matt. 
 6,33. Mark 10, 15. Luke 17, 21. 18,17. 
 John 3, 3. 5. 1 Cor. 4, 20. In the external 
 sense, i. e. as embodied in the visible church 
 and the universal spread of the gospel, Matt. 
 6, 10. 12,28. 13, 24. 31. 33. 41. 47. 16, 
 28. Mark 4, 30. 11,10. Luke 13, 18. 20. 
 Acts 19, 8. al. Or as perfected in the fu 
 ture world, Matt. 13,43. 16,19. 26,29. 
 Mark 14, 25. Luke 22, 29. 30. 2 Pet. 1,11. 
 Rev. 12, 10. al. In this view it denotes 
 especially the Hiss of heaven, eternal life, 
 which is to be enjoyed in the Redeemer s 
 kingdom, Matt. 8, 11. 25, 34. Mark 9, 47. 
 
 Luke 13, 28. 29. Acts 14, 22. 1 Cor. t>, 9. 
 10. 15, 50. Gal. 5, 21. Eph. 5, 5. 2 Thess. 
 1, 5. 2 Tim. 4, 18. Heb. 12, 28. James 2, 
 5. al. Spoken generally, Matt. 5, 19 bis. 
 8, 12 01 viol TIJS fBacn\fias, the sons of the 
 kingdom, i. e. the Jews, who thought the 
 Messiah s reign was destined only for them ; 
 but in Matt. 13, 38 01 viol rr)s /3ao-iXei ay are 
 the true citizens of the kingdom of God. 
 Matt. 11,11. 12 see in dpTrdfa no. 3. 13, 11. 
 19.44.45/52. 18,4.23. 19,12.24. 20, l.al. 
 Spoken also genr. of the privileges and re 
 wards of the divine kingdom both here and 
 hereafter, Matt. 5, 3. 10. 20. 7, 21. 18, 3. 
 Col. 1, 13. 1 Thess. 2, 12. + 
 
 j3acri\,eios, O v, 6, 17, adj. (/3ao-tXevj.) 
 kingly, royal ; 1 Pet. 2, 9 /3ao-i Xeioi> lepd- 
 Tfvpa, a royal priesthood, consecrated to 
 God as were kings and priests ; quoted from 
 Ex. 19, 6 where Sept. for D^fiS PO^aa. 
 So Wisd. 18, 15. Lucian. Quoin. Hist! 5. 
 Xen. An. 1. 10. 12. Subst. TO (Ba<TL\eiov 
 (Soyia) , Plur. ra /3 a o- 1 X e i a , a royal man 
 sion, palace, Luke 7, 25. [Matt. 11, 8.) 
 Sept. Plur. for ^o iva Esth. 2, 13 ; rva 
 ni3ba Esth. 1,9. So Plur. Luc. Necyom. 
 10. Xen. Cyr. 1. 1. 5; Sing. ib. 8. 7. 2. 
 
 ySacrtXeWj e wy, 6, 1 . a king, one who 
 rules with sovereign authority ; Sept. every 
 where for Heb. ^ba . E- g- David, Matt. 
 1, 6. Acts 13, 22"; "Pharaoh, Acts 7, 10. 18. 
 Heb. 11, 23. 27 ; the Roman emperor, John 
 19, 15; ancient Jewish kings, Luke 10,24. 
 So Hdian. 4. 10. 4. Pol. 3. 33. 3. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 2. 1. Also Jesus as the Messiah is often 
 called king, king of Israel, king of the Jews, 
 Matt. 2, 2. 21, 5. 25, 34. 40. Luke 19, 38. 
 John 1, 50. 12, 13. 15. al. Sept. and T|^ 
 Ps. 2, 6. Spoken of God, 1 Tim. 1, 17. 
 Rev. 15, 3. 17, 14 J3acn\fvs Pa<ri\eu>v, also 
 1 Tim. 6, 15 6 flacriXevs TU>V (3acriX(v6i>Tcai>, 
 emphat. king of kings, supreme Lord ; so 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 55 j3acn\evs /3acriXea>i/ Kal 8e- 
 CTTTOTTJS 8f<rTroTa>i>, Comp. (iv a^ dvdicratv ^Es- 
 chyl. Suppl. 533. Matth. 430. 5. Gesen. 
 Lehrg. p. 692. c. Sept. and 7&B genr. of 
 God, Ps. 5, 3. 29, 10. al. Also Matt. 5, 35 
 TroXis TOV fj.fyd\ov /3ao~iXea>, sc. of God, 
 i. e. Jerusalem as the seat of his worship ; 
 so Sept. and riba Ps. 47, 2. 
 
 2. In a more general and lower sense, as 
 a title of the highest honour, a prince, ruler, 
 viceroy, or the like. Thus Herod the Great 
 and his successors had the title of king, but 
 were dependent for the name and power on 
 the Romans ; Matt. 2, 1. 3. 9. Luke 1, 5. 
 Acts 12, 1. 25, 13 sq. 26, 2 sq. But He 
 rod Antipas was in fact only a tetrarch 
 
123 
 
 Qacrra^a 
 
 (Matt. 14, 1. Luke 3, 1. 19. 9, 7), though 
 he is called /Sao-tXeuy Matt. 14, 9. Mark 6, 
 
 14. So Aretas, king of Arabia Petnea, 
 2 Cor. 11, 32 ; see Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. 
 p. 559, 560. Also when joined with ijye- 
 IMVfs, Matt. 10, 18. Mark 13, 9. Luke 21, 
 12. Sept. and Tjba Ps. 2, 2. 102, 16. 
 Genr. Matt. 17, 25. 18, 23. Acts 4, 26. 9, 
 
 15. 1 Tim. 2, 2. 1 Pet. 2, 13. 17. Rev. 9, 
 11. Sept. and ^a Josh. c. 12. So Horn. 
 Od. 1. 394. Spoken of the sons of the em 
 peror Severus, Hdian. 3. 13. 3; comp. 7. 
 10. 3, and 8. 8. 6, 15. Trop. of Christians, 
 as about to reign with the Messiah in glory, 
 Rev. 5, 10. 1, 6 Rec. See Rev. 20, 6; 
 also in /3ao-tXev<o no. 2. + 
 
 /3(KTt\VCi), f. o-co, (/3ao-iXfvy,) 1. to be 
 king, to reign ; e. g. of earthly kings, with 
 firi c. ace. to reign over, Luke 19, 14. 17 ; 
 ri c. gen. id. of Archelaus, Matt. 2, 22 ; 
 see in Apx&aos. Absol. 1 Tim. 6, 15 6 
 jSao-tXfiij TU>V pao-i\(v6vT<nv, king of kings, 
 see in fia<n\evs no. 1. Sept. for r.btt 
 1 Sam. 8, 9. 11. So c. gen. Hdian. 3. l.V. 
 Thuc. 2. 15. Xen. Mem. 3. 2. 2. Of God 
 as exercising universal dominion, absol. 
 Rev. 11, 17. 19, 6. Sept. for rjba Ps. 93, 
 1. 96, 10. 97, 1. al. Of Christ, once with 
 CTTI c. acc. as eVl rov OLK.OV lu/cw/j Luke 1, 
 33 ; absol. 1 Cor. 15, 25. Rev. 11. 15. 
 
 2. Trop. a) Of Christians, who are to 
 reign with Christ, i. e. to enjoy the highest 
 privileges and happiness, the regal honours 
 and glory, of the Messiah s kingdom ; and 
 who thus are represented as sharing with 
 Christ in his power and office as king and 
 judge (comp. Luke 22, 30. 1 Cor. 6, 2. 3. 
 Wisd. 3, 8. Ecclus. 4, 15) ; so Rom. 5, 17. 
 Rev. 20, 4 f{3a.(ri\fvo~v /xera TOV X|>KTTOV. 
 v. 6. 22, 5 ; once c. ri rfjs yf)s over the 
 earth Rev. 5, 10. Also of Christians on 
 earth, i. q. to be like kings, to enjoy honour 
 and prosperity, 1 Cor. 4, 8 bis. Comp. vivo 
 et regno Hor. Ep. 1. 10. 8. b) Of death ; 
 to reign, to have dominion, to prevail, absol. 
 Rom. 5, 14. 17. Of sin and grace, Rom. 
 5, 21 bis. 6, 12. Comp. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 
 14 17 v/ i X ? /3a(nXeuft eV r^iiv. 
 
 /3a<7iXi/C09, rj, 6v, 03a<rtAevs,) kingly, 
 royal, belonging to a king, e. g. a territory 
 Acts 12, 20 ; a robe 12, 21. Sept. for Tjba 
 .Num. 20, 17; nssb?? Esth. 8, 15. So 
 Hdian. 1. 16. 8. Xen." Cyr. 8. 5. 3. Of a 
 person attached to a court, a royal attend 
 ant, courtier, nobleman, John 4, 46. 49. So 
 Hdian. 1. 12. 8. Polyb. 4. 76. 2. Trop. 
 noble, excellent, pre-eminent, becoming to a 
 king, James 2, 8 vouos f3a<n\iKos. So Jos. 
 
 Ant. 6. 4. 5. Xen. Conv. 1. 8 (3ao-. *d) 
 Plato Phileb. 30. d. Comp. regalis Cic. 
 Off. 1. 13. 
 
 pacrtA.t<T(7a, TJS, f], (/3ao-iXevr ; ) a queen, 
 Mat!. 12, 42. Luke 11, 31. Acts 8, 27. 
 Rev. 18, 7. Sept. for roba 1 K. 10, 1. 
 Pol. 23. 18. 2. Diod. Sic. 20.~41. Xen. (Ec. 
 9. 15. The earlier and better form waa 
 /3ao-t Xeta or /Sao-tXi?, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 225 
 Wetst. N. T. ad Matt. 12, 42. 
 
 pacny, e^ ^ (/3aiVa>,) a step, pace, 
 Hdian. 6. 5. 12. Plato Tim. 33. d. In N. 
 T. the foot, as the instrument of walking, 
 Acts 3, 7. So Wisd. 13, 18. Jos. Ant. 7. 
 5. 5. Plato Tim. 92. a. 
 
 1 (jBda-Kciva, also tf3do-Kr)va Hdian. 2. 4. 11 ; 
 see Buttm. $ 101. 4. n. 2; to talk, to tattle, 
 maliciously ; to backbite, to slander, c. acc. 
 Pint. Pericl. 12. Dem. 291.21 ; c. dat. JEL 
 V. H. 2. 13. In N. T. to talk or prate in 
 order to mislead, insidiously ; to beflatter, to 
 bewitch, c. acc. Gal. 3, 1 T IS VIMS tfido-Kavt. 
 So Hdian. 2. 4. 11. Diod. Sic. 4. 6. Theocr. 
 6.39. See Lob. ad Phryn. p. 462 sq. Wetst. 
 N. T. ad Gal. 1. c. 
 
 /3a<7Tao>, f. o-o), 1. to lift up, to take 
 up, as from the ground, c. acc. e. g. X/Souf 
 John 10, 31. Jos. Ant. 7. 11.7. Hdian. 4. 
 2. 11. Lucian. Asin. 44. 
 
 2. to bear, to carry, pr. what has been 
 taken up. 
 
 a) Genr. and c. acc. Matt. 3, 11 TO vrro- 
 of]fj.aTa Pao-rdo-ai to bear one s sandals, 
 which was the office of a servant ; so Ktpd- 
 Hiov vSaTos Mark 14, 13. Luke 22, 10 ; nji* 
 o-6pov Luke 7, 14 ; TOV o-ravpov John 19, 17 
 (trop. Luke 14, 27) ; John 12, 6. Rev. 17, 
 7." Pass. Acts 3, 2. 21,35. So Ecclus. 6, 25. 
 Hdian. 4. 7. 11. Pol. 2. 24. 6. Trop. of 
 moral burdens, e. g. vyov Acts 15, 10 ; dX- 
 \t]\a>v TCI fidpr) Gal. 6, 2 ; TO 18iov (popTiov 
 v. 5. Also with fvwriov TWOS, to bear or 
 bring before any one, e. g. TO ovo^d pov 
 
 1. q. to declare, to publish, Acts 9, 15. 
 
 b) Spec, to bear aioay, to take away, c. 
 acc. John 20, 15 et o-ii ffldo-rao-as avTov. 
 Jos. Ant. 8. 2. 2. Pol. 1. 48. 2. 
 
 c) Also to bear up, to sustain, c. acc. 
 a) Pr. Rom. 11, 18 ov o-v TTJV piav j3aoT- 
 fetf, dXX 17 pi fa o-(. Trop. Matt. 20, 12 0. 
 TO fidpos TTJS rjiLtpas KT\. John 16, 12 ov 
 bvvao- Zf $a<rrdet/ iipTi, i. q. to receive, to 
 understand. Comp. Arr. Epict. 3. 15. 9 
 i 8vva(rai paordo-ai TO irpayfia. |3) to 
 bear with, to endure, e. g. TCI da-^evfjp.aTa 
 TUIV ddwdraiv Rom. 15, 1 ; Kaxovs Rev. 2, 
 
 2. 3. So Arr. Epict. 1. 3. 2. y) to bear 
 
124 
 
 to suffer, to undergo, e. g. TO Kpip.a Gal. 5, 
 10 ; also Matt. 8, 17 raj vocrovs eftda-racrfv, 
 he bore our sicknesses, i. e. suffered the pu 
 nishment of our sins ; for Heb. ^50 Is. 53, 
 4. So Sept. for XiUJ 2 K. 18, 14. 
 
 d) Spec, to bear with or upon oneself, to 
 carry about, c. ace. e. g. a purse, fiakavnov, 
 Luke 10, 4 ; oriy/iara ... ev rw au>p,a.Ti Gal. 
 6, 17 ; and so of the womb, Luke 11, 27 
 17 /cotXt a T] /3ao-Tao-ao-d <re. Symm. for X(D3 
 Ps. 89, 51. Comp. Horn. II. 6. 59 ov riva 
 yrtfTTtpi fJ.rjTT]p Kovpov fovra (pepoi, where 
 Schol. Ms. ov (v yao-rpl 17 prjTijp veov ovra 
 &zorabi. Wetst. N. T. ad Luc. 1. c. 
 
 I. /3aTO$-, ov, 77, also 6 ^dro? Mark 12, 26 
 in later editions, and this was held to be the 
 better form, Moeris p. 99. Thorn. Mag.p. 148; 
 a thorn-bush, bramble, any prickly shrub ; so 
 eVt TOV /3dYou Mark 12, 26 ; eVi TTJS /SoYou 
 Luke 20, 37. Acts 7, 35 ; eV jSdrov Luke 
 6, 44. Acts 7, 30. Sept. 77 /3. for rwft Deut. 
 33, 16 ; Sept. Vat. 6 /3. Ex. 3, 2. 3/4. So 
 >7 )8. Pol. 3. 71 i. Theophr. H. PI. 3. 18. 2. 
 
 II. /3aro9, uu, 6, a toft, Heb. na, a He 
 brew measure for liquids, equal to the 
 ephah for things dry, Luke 16, 6; comp. 
 Ez. 45, 10. 11. Is. 5, 10. The ephah con 
 tained according to Josephus 72 sextarii 
 (Ant. 8. 2. 9), equal to the Attic nerp^s, 
 or to 1993.95 Paris cubic inches, equiva 
 lent to about l bush. English ; hence the 
 bath was about 8| gallons. See Boeckh 
 Metrol. Untersuch. p. 259, 278. Heb. Lex. 
 
 arts, ns^x , na . 
 
 fidrpaxo?, ov, 6, a frog, Rev. 16, 13. 
 Sept. for?-nB* Ex. 8, 2. 3. ^El. V.H. 1. 
 3. Plato Phsed. 109. b. 
 
 {3aTTO\oye(0, , f. fact, (Xe yw, Xoyos ,) 
 pr. i. q. /Sarrapi^co, to stutter, to slammer, 
 Hippon. 108. Luc. Jup. Trag. 27 ; both 
 verbs being prob. onomatopceetic. In N. T. 
 /SarroXoyeu , to babble, to be loquacious, to 
 use many words and empty repetitions, absol. 
 Matt. 6, 7 ; parall. TroXuXoyi a. So Simpl. 
 in Epict. 312 [340] TTfpl KaSj/KoVrcoz/ 8e 
 /3aTToXoyi> vvv. The ancients derived the 
 word from a certain Battus. According 
 to some he was a king of Libya, who stut 
 tered, Hdot. 4. 155. Eustath. in Od. to, p. 
 833. 43 Barroy /SacnXevs At/3vs ... of 8oKfl 
 irapoipiav 8ovvai TOV ftarrokoyeiv. Accord 
 ing to others he was a garrulous poet, who 
 made long hymns full of repetitions ; Suid. 
 /3arroXoyi a Jj TroXi/Xoyi a, diro BaTrov TWOS 
 
 fJMKpOVS KCU. TToXvOTt ^OU? VfJiVOVS TTOir)<Ta.VTOS 
 
 rawroXoyia? e^oj^-aj. See Wetst. N. T. 
 ad Matt. 1. c. 
 
 aTos,To, OSeXvo-o-o),) I. an 
 abomination, any thing abominable or de 
 testable ; Luke 16, 15 /SSeXvy^a eixamov 
 TOV Seov, opp. TO ev avSpwTroty v\^Tj\6v. 
 Sept. c. eVcoTrtov for ^3?1P1 Prov. 11, 1 ; c. 
 dat. Prov. 15, 8. 9. 
 
 2. Spec, impurity, uncleanness, in the 
 Jewish sense ; particularly idols, idolatry, 
 abominable apostasy, Rev. 17, 4. 5. 21, 27. 
 So Sept. of idols, 17 "AorapT?; /38e Xuy/*a 2t- 
 daviw for S ^n ^X 1 K. 11, 5 ; TO /3SeXvy- 
 fjLUTa rS>v &vav for riia^ in 2 K. 16, 3 ; 
 also Test. XII Patr. p. 615. Matt. 24, 15 
 and Mark 13, 14 TO jSSeXvypa TIJS eprj- 
 puo-fcos, quoted from Dan. 9, 27, comp. 
 11, 31. 12, 11, where Sept. for pplO 
 QTaitia p r . the abomination causing deso 
 lation, applied by our Lord to the Roman 
 armies under Titus, with their standards, 
 surrounding the Holy city for its siege and 
 destruction; these as heathen conquerors 
 were of course an abomination to the Jews : 
 see Luke 21, 20, also Jos. Ant. 10. 11. 7. 
 In 1 Mace. 1, 54 the phrase /3Se Xvy/ia TTJS 
 eprjfjiuo-fas refers to the pollution of the 
 temple by Antiochus Epiphanes, who set 
 up in it the statue of Jupiter Olympius ; see 
 2 Mace. 6, 2-5. 1 Mace. 6, 7. 
 
 17, ov, (jSSeXvo-o-w,) abomina 
 ble, detestable, Tit. 1, 16. Sept. forttasipi 
 Prov. 17, 15. 2 Mace. 1, 27. Ecclus. 4^, 5. 
 
 /3SeXucro-&>, f. v a>, (/3So,) to cause dis 
 gust by stench, Aristoph. Plut. 700.-: In 
 N. T. Mid. depon. /SSeXvo-o-o/^at, to feel 
 disgust at, to abominate, to abhor, c. ace. 
 Rom. 2, 22 6 po fXvo-o-op.evos rd et ScoXa. 
 Pass. perf. particip. e /SSeXvy/xeVof, abhorred, 
 abominable, Rev. 21, 8. Sept. for S?P? 
 Deut. 23, 7. Am. 5, 10. Pass. perf. part. 
 for 2^n3 Is. 14, 19. So Pol.. 33. 16. 10. 
 Lucian. Philopatr. 26. 
 
 a/a, aiov, (/3aa>, /3atVa>,) stead 
 fast, firm, sure ; e. g. ay<vpa Heb. 6, 19 ; 
 ATI-IS 2 Cor. 1,7; eVayyeXt a Rom. 4, 16; 
 Sia^KT) Heb. 9, 17 ; Xoyos Heb. 2, 2. 2 Pet. 
 
 1, 19; also Heb. 3, 6. 14. 2 Pet. 1, 10. 
 Wisd. 7, 23. Diod. Sic. 3. 7. Xen. Cyr. 3. 
 
 2. 23. 
 
 /3e/3aiO&>, a,, f. wo-w, (/3e/3atos,) to make 
 steadfast, to establish, to confirm ; with ace. 
 of thing, Mark 16, 20 TOV \6yov Peftaiovvros. 
 Rom. 15, 8. Pass. 1 Cor. 1, 6. Heb. 2, 3. Sc 
 Jos. Ant. 1. 18. 6. Hdian. 4. 15. 9. Thuc. 3. 
 12. With ace. of pers. 1 Cor. 1, 8. 2 Cor. 
 1, 21. Pass. Col. 2, 7. Heb. 13, 9. Sept. for 
 &3fe Ps. 119, 28; ^sn Pa. 41, 13. So 
 Thuc. 1. 33 o-(frds avTovs /3ej3aia><racr3at. 
 
125 
 
 y, fj, (/3e/3ato a>,) confirma- 
 llm, establishment, Phil. 1,7. Heb. 6, 16. 
 Wisd. 6, 18. Plut. Solon 14. Thuc. 4. 87. 
 
 $6/3?7Xo?, ov. 6, T), adj. (/3aiVo>, #77X0 ?,) 
 accessible, open to all, and hence common, 
 profane, pr. of place ; ra /3 j3^Xa unconse- 
 crated places, opp. Xo-ef 3eo>i/, Soph. CEd. 
 Col. 10. Thuc. 4. 97. Of persons, uncon- 
 secrated, uninitiated, and so profane, Plato 
 Conv. 218. b. In N. T. profane, unholy ; so 
 of persons regardless of God and divine 
 things, 1 Tim. 1, 9. Heb. 12, 16. So Sept. 
 for Sbn Ez. 21, 5. (3 Mace. 2, 14. JEL. V. H. 
 3. 9 ^fjBrjXos KOL drfXeoros rw 3fa>. Plut. de 
 Def. Orac. 16.) Trop. of vain disputes, tra 
 ditions, etc. 1 Tim. 4, 7. 6, 20. 2 Tim. 2, 16. 
 
 /3e/3?7Xo6>, , f. COO-CD, (/3e 7?Xoy,) /o pro- 
 /a/ze, /o violate, c. ace. TO a-afifiaTov Matt. 
 12, 5 ; rov iepw Acts 24, 6. Sept. for b|n 
 Lev. 19, 8. 12. al. Heliodor. 10. p. 513. 
 Julian. 7. p. 228. c. 
 
 Bee\^/3ov\, 6, indec. Beelzebul, i. q. 
 Satan, the prince of demons, ap-^aiv TO>V 
 Sm/xow coi/, Matt. 12, 24. 27. 10, 25. Mark 
 3,22. Luke 11, 15. 18. 19. The Aramaean 
 form is ^137 bS2 deus stercoris, from r. 
 bat , bat , Buxt. Lex. Chald. 641. It was 
 prob. in the mouth of the Jews a by-name 
 of aversion and contempt ; but is not else 
 where found in Jewish writings. Some 
 editions (Complut. Beza, Bengel), also the 
 Vulgate and Peshito, read BefXfe/3ou/3, 
 Beelzebub, which occurs 2 K. 1, 2. 3. 16, in 
 the Heb. form Slat b?a (Aram. SlSt b$a) 
 lord of flies, fly-god, Sept. BdoX pvlav, as 
 the name of a god of the Philistines at 
 Ekron ; comp. the Zevs A.n6p.vios of the 
 Greeks, Pausan. 5. 14. 2 ; and the Deus 
 Myagrius of the Egyptians and Romans, 
 Plin. H. N. 10. 4. Solin. Polyhist. c. 1. 
 That the later Jews, in their strong aversion 
 to heathenism, should transfer to Satan the 
 name of a neighbouring idol and oracle men 
 tioned in the O. T. was not unnatural ; and 
 then by the slight change (of a single let 
 ter) into Beelzebul, they expressed still more 
 strongly their abhorrence of the prince of 
 unclean spirits ; comp. a like instance in the 
 name 2vx<V q- v. See Buxt. Lex. 333 cq. 
 Lightfoot Hor. Heb. in Matt. 12, 24 et Luc. 
 11, 15. Winer Realw. art. Beelzebub. 
 
 BeXtaX, 6, indec. Belial, Heb. bs^ba 
 (wickedness), used as a name for Satan, 
 i. q. 6 novripos, 2 Cor. 6, 15 ; comp. 1 Sam. 
 25, 25. Heb. Lex. s. voc. Griesbach and 
 some others read BeXi ap, Beliar ; the b be 
 ing changed to *i by Syriasm. So Test. 
 XII Patr. p. 539, 587, 619. al. 
 
 /3eXoi>77, rjs, f], (/3e Xoj,) pr. the point of 
 a weapon, Eupol. Tax. 11. In N. T. a nee 
 dle, Luke 18, 25 Lachm. for the comm. pa- 
 tpis. So JE\. V. H. 9. 8. ^Eschin. 77. 27 ; 
 see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 90. 
 
 1 , tos, ovs, TO, (/3dXX<o,) a missile, 
 esp. a dart, javelin, arrow; trop. Eph. 6, 16 
 ra jSe XTj rov Trovrjpov ra Treirvpcap-eva, the fiery 
 darts, i. e. fitted with combustibles. Arr. 
 Exp. Alex. 2. 18. 12 nvpfpopa P&T). ib. 2. 
 21.3 /3eXeo-i . . . KOI irvp(p6pois oi arolj. Thuc. 
 2. 75 ; comp. Xen. An. 5. 2. 14. 
 
 /3e\TiQ)V, ovos, 6, f], better, compar. of 
 dyaSd? good, Buttm. 68. 1. In N. T. only 
 Neut. fie XT i o v as adv. 2 Tim. 1, 18 /3eX- 
 T IOV yivoMTKfis, thou knousest better sc. than 
 I. Buttm. ^ 115. 5. So Xen. Hi. 1. 1 /3eX- 
 
 LV, 6, indec. Benjamin, Heb. 
 ja ija ( S on of my right hand), pr. n. of the 
 youngest son of Jacob by Rachel ; comp. 
 Gen. 35, 18 sq. Hence (pv\rj Rfvuipiv, the 
 tribe of Benjamin, Acts- 13, 21. Rom. 11,1. 
 Phil. 3, 5. Rev. 7, 8. 
 
 T)S, T], Bernice, eldest daughter 
 of Herod Agrippa first, and sister to the 
 younger Agrippa, Acts 25, 13. 23. 26, 30 
 She was married to her uncle Herod king 
 of Chalcis ; and after his death, in order tc 
 avoid the merited suspicion of incest with 
 her brother Agrippa, she became the wife 
 of Polemon king of Cilicia. This connec 
 tion being soon dissolved, she returned to 
 her brother, and afterwards became mistress 
 of Vespasian and Titus. Jos. Ant. 19. 5. 1. 
 ib. 20. 7. 2, 3. Tac. Hist. 2. 81. Sueton. 
 Tit. 7. 
 
 as, T], Berea, a city of Macedo 
 nia, situated five miles north of the river 
 Haliacmon or Astraeus, on the roots of 
 Mount Bermius, southwest of Pella ; Acts 
 17, 10. 13. Now called Verria, after the 
 form Efppoia Thuc. 1. 61. See Leake s 
 Trav. in North. Greece III. p. 290 s-\. 
 
 Bepoicuos, a , ov, of Berea, a Berean, 
 Acts 20, 4. 
 
 Brftaftapd, as, 17, Belhabara,He}).^^ 
 rnas (house or place of the ford), John 1, 
 28 ; where the best Mes. and later editions 
 read BrjSav/a. The reading Br;3a/3a/)d seems 
 to have arisen from the conjecture of Ori- 
 gen, who found in his day no such place as 
 B^aj/ui, but saw a town called Bv^aftapd, 
 (perh. the same with -"HS. rP3 Belh-barah 
 Judg. 7, 24, near Jordan,) where John was 
 said to have baptized ; and therefore took 
 
126 
 
 the liberty of changing the former reading. 
 See Origen Opp. ed. de la Rue, IV. p. 140. 
 Liicke Comm. zu Joh. 1. c. Wetstein in loc. 
 
 as, f), Bethany, Aram, rv3 
 TH (house of dates), comp. * n n x : an 
 unripe date Buxtorf Lex. 38. Lightf. Cent. 
 Chor, Matt. c. 41. 
 
 1. A village about fifteen furlongs E. 
 from Jerusalem (John 11, 18) on the east 
 ern slope of the mount of Olives. It was 
 the residence of Mary, Martha, and Laza 
 rus ; and Jesus often went out from Jeru 
 salem to lodge there. At present it is a 
 miserable village. Matt. 21, 17. 26, 6. Mark 
 11, 1. 11. 12. 14, 3. Luke 19, 29. 24, 50. 
 John 11, 1. 18. 12, 1. See Bibl. Res. in 
 Palest. II. p. 100 sq. 
 
 2. A place on the east of Jordan, where 
 John baptized; the exact position of it is 
 not known; John 1, 28 in the best Mss. 
 and editt. where others read Bn3a/3apa q. v. 
 Some derive it here from <"i*?X HIS 
 house or place of ships ; but without pro 
 bability. They suppose it to have been the 
 same place as Bethabara. 
 
 , f], indec. Bethesda, Aram. 
 X^jon n^a (house of mercy) Buxt. Lex. 
 Ch. Rab. 798, a pool or fountain at Jerusa 
 lem, to whose waters a healing virtue was 
 ascribed, with a building over or near it 
 for the accommodation of the sick ; John 5, 
 2. See Bibl. Res. in Pal. I. p. 489, 507. 
 
 BrfSteeji, f,, indec. Bethleliem, Heb. 
 anb rP3 (house of bread) Gen. 35, 19 ; 
 pr. n. of a celebrated city, the birthplace of 
 David and Jesus. It was situated in the 
 tribe of Judah, and lies about six miles south 
 by west of Jerusalem. It probably received 
 its appellation from the fertility of the cir 
 cumjacent country. Matt. 2, 1. 5. 6. 8. 16. 
 Luke 2, 4. 15. John 7, 42. See Bibl. Res. 
 in Pal. II. p. 158 sq. 
 
 Bij^craioa, fj, indec. also Br/So-ai Sai/ 
 in text. rec. in Matt, and Mark, Bethsaida, 
 Aram. i"^" 1 ? ^ 1>1 ? (place of hunting or fish 
 ing) Buxt. Lex. 1894; pr. n. of two cities 
 or towns in N. T. 
 
 1 . Bethsaida of Galilee (John 12, 21), so 
 called perhaps in distinction from the other 
 Bethsaida, probably lay near Capernaum, 
 being mentioned in connection with it, Matt. 
 11,21.24. Luke 10, 13.15; comp. also Mark 
 6, 45 with John 6, 17. Eusebius says only 
 that it lay on the lake of Gennesareth, i. e. 
 on the western shore ; as its name also 
 would imply. It was the birthplace of Phi 
 lip, Andrew, and Peter, John 1, 45. Matt. 
 
 II, 21. Mark 6, 45. Luke 10, 13. John 1, 
 45. 12, 21. See Bibl. Res. in Palest. III. 
 p. 294 sq. comp. p. 251. 
 
 2. The other Bethsaida lay in Gaulonitis 
 at the N. E. extremity of the lake, near 
 where the Jordan enters it and on the east 
 side of that river. This town was enlarged by 
 Philip, tetrarch of that region (Luke 3, 1). 
 and called Julias, in honour of Julia the 
 daughter of Augustus ; Jos. Ant. 18. 2. 1. 
 B. J. 2. 9. 1. ib. 3. 10. 7. Plin. H. N. 5. 15. 
 In the uninhabited tract southeast of this 
 town, Jesus miraculously fed the five thou 
 sand, and afterwards departed by ship to the 
 other side of the lake, Luke 9, 10 ; comp. 
 Matt. 14, 13 sq. Mark 6, 31 sq. John 6. 1. 
 2. 5-13. 17. 22. 24. So too Mark 8, 22 ; 
 comp. v. 13. 27. See Bibl. Res. in Palest. 
 
 III. p. 308. 
 
 ^ indec. Bethphage, Aram. 
 XSB r,ia (house of figs) Buxt. Lex. Ch. 
 Rab. 1691, pr. n. of a village, *&>/*;, east of 
 the mount of Olives, and near to Bij3aw a, 
 Matt. 21,1. Mark 11,1. Luke 19,29. The 
 exact site is not known ; see Bibl. Res. in 
 Pal. H. p. 103. 
 
 ^a, error, TO, (jSaivca,) a step, i. e. 
 
 1. a pace, foot-step, Acts 7, 5 ov8e fit) pa 
 oy, i. e. not a foot-breadth. So Sept. for 
 ^T*)? 1P1 Deut. 2, 5. Plut. Demetr. 
 21. Xon. Cyr. 7. 5. 6. 
 
 2. iSpec. like Engl. steps, i. e. any ele 
 vated phoo to which the ascent is by steps ; 
 as a stage or tribune for a speaker or reader, 
 Sept. for *natt Neh. 8, 4. 1 Esdr. 9, 42. 
 Thuc. 2. 34. TI In N. T. spoken: a) Of 
 an elevated seat or throne in the theatre at 
 Cesarea, on which Herod sat, Acts 12, 21 ; 
 comp. Jos. Ant. 19. 8. 2. So Jos. Ant. 7. 
 15. 9 OTCIS (<f) v\lrT]XoT(iTOV ftr]f*.aTos 6 /3a<rt- 
 \tvs. Plut. Poplicol. 17. b) Oftener the 
 tribunal of a judge or magistrate, Matt. 
 27, 19. John 19, 13. Acts 18, 12. 16. 17. 
 25, 6. 10. 17. Rom. 14, 10. 2 Cor. 5, 10. 
 See Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 123; also in 
 AiSoVrpwror. So 2 Mace. 13, 26. Hdian 
 1. 5. 4. Xen. Mem. 3. 6. 1. 
 
 pr)pv\\o$, ov, 6, r), beryl, a precious 
 stone of a sea-green colour, Rev. 21, 20. 
 Tob. 13, 17. Jos. Ant. 3. 7. 5. Plin. H. N. 
 37. 20. Sept. ftrjpvXXiov or fir]pv\\os for 
 t=*> Ex. 28, 20. 39, 11. 
 
 pia, as, rj, strength of body, Horn. II. 7 
 197. ib. 8. 103. In N. T. genr. force, vio 
 lence, Acts 5, 26. 21, 35. 24, 7. 27, 41. 
 Sept. for pros Ex. 14, 25. So Wisd. 4, 
 4. Diod. Sic. "4l 78. Thuc. 1. 102. 
 
127 
 
 (a, f. ao-a), 03<a,) to /orce, to ocer- 
 Horn. Od. 12. 297. Usually Mid. 
 depon. fiidop.ai, to fores, to subdue, 2 
 Mace. 14, 41. Thuc. 1. 55; also as Pass. 
 to be forced, to suffer violence, Xen. Mem. 1. 
 2/10. .See Buttm. Ausf. Sprachl. 5 114. 
 Hence in N. T. a) Mid. depon. with els 
 c. ace. Luke 16, 16 irds fls avrtjv /3idfrai, 
 lit. every one forces himself into it, i. e. uses 
 force to enter it, presses into it, implying 
 the eagerness with w T hich the gospel was 
 received by multitudes ; comp. Matt. 11,12, 
 and dpirdfa no. 3. Sept. for onn Ex. 19, 
 24. So Pol. 1. 74. 5 fls rtjv Trapfp.f}o\T)v. 
 Arr. Exp. Alex. 6. 9. 4 els rf/v aKpav. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 3. 69. b) Pass. Matt. 11, 12 17 y3a- 
 o-iXei a rcav ovpavcav /3iaerat, the kingdom of 
 heaven is forced, taken by force, suffers vio 
 lence ; as in lett. a. So Xen. Hell. 5. 2. 
 23 ray TroXfis ras ftfftia.(rp.fvas. 
 
 /3/ai09, aia, mov, (jSi a,) forceful, violent, 
 of a wind, Acts 2, 2. Sept. for t? Ex. 14, 
 21. Wisd. 19,7. Ildian. 3. 3. 11. Plato 
 Def. 415. e. 
 
 /3icrT7?9, ov, 6, (/3ida>,) one who uses 
 force, one violent, trop. Matt. 11, 12 ; cornp. 
 in /3tdfo> lett. a. Philo de Agric. p. 200. c. 
 .[312.] Comp. Wetst. N. T. ad loc. 
 
 {3i/3\apl8iov. ov, TO, (dim. ftijSXos.. fii- 
 fiKdpiov.) a small roll or -colume, a little 
 scroll, Rev. 10, 2. 8. 9. 10. Comp. Pollux 
 Onom. 7. 210 fiifiXos, /3i/3Xt o/, /3i/3Xdpiot> 
 -rapa 8e A.pi<TTO(piivei |3t/3Xt5dpto . 
 
 (3l,/3>\lov, ov, TO, (dim. /3t/3Xos,) a roll, 
 scroll, i. e. a volume, book, such being the 
 ancient form of books ; Luke 4, 17 bis, 
 Pifi\iov Ho-cuou TOU irpo^Tov nr\. V. 20 
 TTTvgas TO j3ij3Xiov. John 20, 30. 21, 25. 
 Gal. 3, 10. 2 Tim. 4, 13. Rev. 5, 1-5.7-9. 
 6, 14 (see in dnoxupifa )- 22,7. 9. 10. 18 bis. 
 19 bis. Sept. for ISO Ex. 17, 14. al. So 
 Hdian. 7. 8. 5. Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 14. Spec, 
 a) Of the pentateuch or the Mosaic law, 
 Heb. 9, 19. 10, 7. Sept. and -iB<3 Ps. 40, 
 8. 1 Mace. 12, 9. b) TO jSt/SX/bv fo^? 
 Rev. [13, 8.] 17, 8. 20, 12. 21, 27. [22, 
 19] ; also TO /3i/3Xi a sc. TJJJ Kpureco? Rev. 
 20, 12 bis; see in /;3Xoy. c) Of epis 
 tles, which were also rolled up, Rev. 1, 
 11 ; perh. 2 Tim. 4, 13. Sept. and "iE.0 
 2 Sam. 11, 14. So 1 Mace. 1, 46. d) Of 
 documents, e. g. a Jewish bill of divorce, 
 Matt. 19, 7. Mark 10, 4. Comp. Deut. 24, 
 
 1 . 3, where Sept. and "iBO . 
 
 /3t/3\09, ou, 17, (lie inner bark of the pa 
 pyrus, anciently used for writing, Jos. Ant. 
 
 2. 10. 2. Theophr. II. PI. 4. 8. 4. In N. T. 
 
 a roll, scroll, i. e. a volume, book, such being 
 the ancient form, Acts 19, 19 ; so Luke 3, 4. 
 20,42. Acts 1,20. 7, 42. Rev. 22, 19 R. Sept 
 for ISO Josh. 1, 8. al. So Dem. 313. 14. 
 Plato Phajdo 98. b. Spec. a) Of the 
 pentateuch or law of Moses ; Mark 12, 26 
 ev rrj ;3i/3Xa> Moovo-ewy. Sept. for Chald 
 ISO Ezra 6, 18. b) Of a genealogical 
 catalogue, Matt. 1,1. Sept. and 1BD Gen. 
 5, 1 . c) So fj $t/3Xor rr t s C w ^) i- 1- ISO 
 Din, Sept. |3i /3Xor fwi/rwi/, Ps. 69, 29, 
 comp. Ex. 32, 32. 33 ; i. e. God is repre~ 
 sented as having the names of the right 
 eous, who are to inherit eternal life, in 
 scribed in a book ; Phil. 4, 3. Rev. 3, 5. 
 [13, 8.] 20, 15. 22, 19 Rec. comp. Luke 
 10, 20. So Sept. and nso Dan. 12, 1. 
 Different from this is the book in which 
 God has inscribed the destinies of men, Ps. 
 139, 16, comp. Job 14, 5 ; and also the 
 books of judgment, in which the actions of 
 men are recorded, TO. /3t/3Xi a, Rev. 20, 12 
 bis ; comp. Dan. 7, 10. 4 Esdr. 6, 20. 
 
 ftiPpaHTKW) f. /3po>o-o/icu, perf. j3 /3po>Ka, 
 to eat; absol. John 6, 13 ToZy ftfftpa>K.6<rtv. 
 Sept. for tex Josh. 5, 12. al. Pol. 3. 72. G 
 Xen. Hi. l.~24. 
 
 Bfevvia, as, 17, Bithynia, a province o. 
 Asia Minor, on the Euxine sea and Pro- 
 pontis, bounded W. by Mysia, S. and E by 
 Phrygia and Galatia, and E. by Paphlagonia. 
 Acts 16, 1. 1 Pet. 1, 1. 
 
 /3i o9, ou, 6, 1. life, the present life, Luke 
 8, 14. 1 Tim. 2, 2. 2 Tim. 2, 4. 1 Pet. 4, 3. 
 Sept. for nini Job 7, 6. 8, 9. al. jEl. 
 V. H. 3. 29. Xen. Mem. 1.2.8. 
 
 2. Meton. means of life, living, sustenance, 
 Mark 12, 44. Luke 8,43. 15, 12. 30. 21,4. 
 Sept. for &nb Prov. 31, 14; rP3 yin Cant. 
 8, 7. Pol. 2! 15. 3. Xen. Mem. 3. 11. 4. 
 
 3. Spec, possessions, wealth, 1 John 2, 16. 
 3, 17. Diod. Sic. 12. 40. Plato Gorg.486 
 C, jSi oj Kal &oai. 
 
 plOCi), u>, f. coo-a), (/3i of,) aor. 1 e/3t &>cra 
 rarely ; more comm. aor. 2 (fiiav, Buttm. 
 Ausf. Sprachl. 5 114. Matth. 5 227; to live, 
 to pass one s life ; 1 Pet. 4, 2 J3iu>crai -^povov. 
 Sept. TTO\VV xP vov jSicoo-w for EiJ3^ i" 1 ^""! 
 Job 29, 18 ; n^n p rov . 7, 2. So <F/3iWa, 
 Lucian. Macrob. 12, 17. Xen. CEc. 4. 18. 
 Plato Phsedr. 249. b. 
 
 , , .MS, 17, (/3to w,) life, tiring, mode 
 
 of life, Acts 26, 4. Prol. to Ecclus. Sin TTJC 
 
 /3i&)Tt/co9, i], oV, (/Sidco,) pertaining to 
 this life, temporal, Luke 21, 34. 1 Cor. 6, 3. 
 
128 
 
 4. Diod. Sic, 2. 29 /Si. xp a- Pol. 4. 73. 8. 
 The later Greeks used /SiomKoy instead of 
 the earlier TOV .Qiov, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 355. 
 
 , v, /anra), 
 
 harmful, 1 Tim. 6, 9. Sept. Prov. 10, 26. 
 Plut. de aud. Poet. 14. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 11. 
 /3Xa7TT<y, f. ^<B, to disable, to weaken, to 
 hinder, Horn. Od. 13. 22. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 18. 
 In N. T. to hurt, to harm, to injure, c. ace. 
 Mark 16, 18 ; with two accus. Luke 4, 35. 
 So 2 Mace. 12, 22. Pol. 1. 79. 13. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 3. 8. 
 
 ), f. ^o-w, QSAaaToy,) later aor. 
 
 1 (j3\d(TTT]cra. Buttm. Ausf. Sprachl. 114. 
 Matth. 227 ; to germinate, to put forth, i. e. 
 
 1. Intrans. to sprout, to spring up, Matt. 
 13, 26. Mark 4, 27. Heb. 9, 4. Sept. for 
 "IS Num. 17, 23 [8]. Plut. de Pyth. 
 Orac. 12. Xen. CEc. 19. 2,8. 
 
 2. Trans, to. put forth fruit, to yield, c. 
 ace. TOV Kapirov James 5, 18. Sept. for 
 Xttj? Hiph. Gen. 1, 11. Ecclus. 24, 17. 
 ^Eschyl. Fr. p. 619. Apoll. Rhod. 1. 1131. 
 
 -BXacrro?, ov, 6, Blastus. pr. n. of a 
 man who was chamberlain (cubicularius) to 
 Herod Agrippa, i. e. had charge of his bed 
 chamber, Acts 12, 20. Such persons usu 
 ally had great influence with their masters ; 
 see Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 526. Diet, of Antt. 
 art. Cubicularii. 
 
 /3\aG-(j)r]fj,(t), w, f. jjo-w, (/3Aao-<pJ7/ios>,) 
 to hurt the good name of any one, i. e. 
 
 1 . to speak evil of, to rail at ; spoken both 
 of persons and things, i. q. to slander, to re 
 vile, absol. Acts 13, 45. 18,6. 1 Tim. 1, 
 20. 1 Pet. 4, 4. (2 Mace. 10, 34. 12, 14. 
 Hdian. 1. 6. 20.) With ace. of pers. or 
 thing, Acts 19, 37. Tit. 3, 2. James 2, 7. 
 
 2 Pet. 2, 10. Jude 8. 10 ; so 2 Pet. 2, 12 ev 
 ols, for ravra Iv ofy. Pass. Rom. 3, 8. 14. 
 16. 1 Cor. 4, 13. 10, 30. 2 Pet. 2, 2. Sept 
 for Sfta 2 K. 19, 6. 22. (Jos. Ant. 6. 9. 2. 
 Hdian. 2. 7. 8. Plato Legg. 934. d.) With 
 an accus. of the abstract noun, Mark 3, 28 ; 
 see Buttm. 131. 3. So Plato Legg. 800. 
 3. Spoken in reference to Jesus while on 
 earth, c. a.ccus. Matt. 27, 39. Mark 15, 29. 
 Luke 23, 39 ; absol. Luke 22, 65. Acts 26, 
 1 1 . comp. v. 9. 
 
 2. Spec, of God and his Spirit, or of di 
 vine things, to blaspheme, c. ace. Rom. 2, 
 24. Tit. 2, 5. 1 Pet. 4, 14. Rev. 13, 6. 16, 
 9. 11. 21. Pass. 1 Tim. 6, 1. Sept. for 
 yxsrT! i s . 52, 5. So Jos. Ant. 6. 9. 3. 
 Diod. Sic. 2. 21. With ds c. ace. to blas- 
 plieme against, Mark 3, 29. Luke 12, 10. 
 So Bel. and Drag. 9. Plato Rep. 381. e. 
 
 Absol. Matt. 9, 3. 26, 65. John 10, 36. St> 
 Plato Alcib. 149. c. 
 
 traction, evil speaking, i. e. 
 
 1 . Genr. of persons and things, i. q. slandei , 
 railing, reviling, Matt. 12,31 Traaa d/xapr/a 
 Kal pXao-Qrjfjiia. 15, 19. Mark 3, 28. 7, 22. 
 Eph. 4, 31. Col. 3, 8. 1 Tim. 6, 4. Jude 9 
 Kpio~tv j3\ao~<prjn{a$, i. q. ^\do~(pr]fj.ov Kpio~iv 
 2 Pet. 2, 1 1. Sept. for MM Ez. 35, 12. 
 2 Mace. 10, 35. Dem. 141. 2. Plato Legg. 
 800. c. 
 
 2. Spec, of God and his Spirit, or of di 
 vine things, blasphemy, Matt. 12, 31 17 Se TOV 
 7rvfVfj.aTos /3Aao-(p?7/u a. 26, 65. Mark 2, 7. 
 14, 64. Luke 5, 21. John 10, 33. Rev. 2,9. 
 13. 5. 6. So ovofiaTa jSAacr^/it ay, i. q. ovop.. 
 ^Adcr07//ia, Rev. 13, 1. 17, 3. Sept. for 
 Chald. ftyb Dan. 3, 29. 2 Mace. 8. 4. 
 Plato Legg. 800. d. 
 
 {3\d(T(j>r/fAO?, ov, 6, 17, adj. (/3Ad v. 
 jSXdfTTco, (j)rjp.rj,) hurtful to the good name of 
 any one, detractive. 
 
 1 . Genr. of words against persons, i. q. 
 slanderous, railing ; 2 Pet. 2,11 /SAdo-^- 
 p.ov Kpiaiv, a railing sentence. So ^El. V. 
 H. 12. 57. Plut. Otho 4. Dem. 110. 9. 
 Subst. a slanderer, reviler, 2 Tim. 3, 2. So 
 2 Mace. 10, 36. 
 
 2. Spec, of words against God and di 
 vine things, blasphemous, Acts 6, 11. [13.] 
 Subst. a blasphemer, 1 Tim. 1, 13. Wisd. 
 1, 6. 
 
 /jXeytiyita, OTOS, TO, (/3Ae7ro>,) a seeing, 
 looking, the act of seeing ; 2 Pet. 2, 8 
 /3Ae/i/iari Kal OKO?/. Eurip. Here. F. 305, 
 a look, glance. Plut. Tib. Grace. 2. 
 
 /SXeTTCO, f. T|/-O>, 1. to look, i. e. to direct 
 the eyes upon any thing in order to see ; to 
 look at or upon, to behold. 
 
 a) Of persons ; so with els c. acc. to look 
 upon, as els uAA^Aous John 13, 22. Acts 3, 
 4 /SAe^op els f]i*as. Luke 9, 62. Sept. for 
 B^sri Gen. 19, 17. (^El.V.H. 14.42. Xen. 
 An. 4. 1. 20.) With acc. Matt. 5, 28 TTOS 
 6 j3\fircov yvvaina KT\. Sept. Cant. 1, 6. 
 (^Esop. Fab. 129 jSXeTraiv TOV p,eyav 8elTrvov.) 
 So c. acc. to look at or into a roll or book, 
 Rev. 5, 3. 4. Trop. to look at in mind, i. e. 
 a) to look to a thing, to consider, to give 
 heed; absol. Mark 13, 33 ^AeVere, aypu- 
 TrveiTe KT\. Also c. acc. 1 Cor. 1, 26 /3Ae?rere 
 yap TTJV K\rjo~iv vpcov. 10, 18. Col. 2, 5. 
 (Jos. B. J. 3. 10. 2. Plato Rep. 921. a.) 
 With TI or TTwy, how, c. indicat. Mark 4, 24. 
 Luke 8, 18. 1 Cor. 3, 10. /3) to look at, 
 i. q. to regard, to have respect to, with els 
 c. acc. as /3A. fls TTPOO-COTTOV TIVOS to regard 
 
129 
 
 the person of any one, to have respect to 
 his external rank or condition, Matt. 22, 16. 
 Mark 12, 14; see in art. Trpoo-omov. (So 
 genr. c. els Luc. D. Mort. 11.4. Dem. 124. 
 7.) With ace. 2 Cor. 10, 7 TO. Kara irpo- 
 O-COTTOI/ ^XeVerf. (Jos. Ant. 6. 8. 1.) Also 
 lo look to it, to care for any thing ; with ir&s 
 c. indie. Eph. 5, 15 ; with era c. subjunct. 
 1 Cor. 16, 10 ; c. ace. by attraction, Col. 4, 
 17 /3XVe TTJV SiaKoviav . . . tva avTrjvTrXjjpdis. 
 j) Imperat. by way of caution, jSXeVe, 
 pXtTJ-eYco, P\fnfTf, look to it, take heed, be 
 ware ; so with accus. reflex, eavrovs, look 
 to yourselves, beu-are, Mark 13, 9. 2 John 
 8 ; with an ace. genr. beicare of, Phil. 3, 2 
 ter, /SXtVere TOVS KVVOS KT\. Mostly fol 
 lowed by P.TJ. /j.T)TTOT(, p.t)ir(i)s, take heed that 
 not, beware lest ; so with aor. subjunct. 
 Matt. 24, 4. Mark 13, 5. Luke 21, 8. Acts 
 13, 40. 1 Cor. 8, 9. 10, 12. Gal. 5, 15. Heb. 
 12, 25 ; c. aor. impl. Mark 13, 23 /3XeWe 
 sc. p.fj irio-Tfvo-rjTf ; comp. v. 21. (Comp. 
 opa pri Luc. D. Deor. 22. 4. Xen. Cyr. 3. 
 1 . 27.) Also with fut. indicat. Col. 2, 8 
 jBXttrfTf fj.T] Tts ifJLas fcrTai <rv\ay(tsyu>v. Heb. 
 3, 12. With dno c. gen. beware of any 
 thing, so as to separate oneself from it ; see 
 in OTTO no. 1. b. ft. Mark 8, 15 /3XeVere OTTO 
 TT/y Cvfjirjs TU>V <ap. 12, 38 jSX. OTTO TCOV 
 
 b) Once of a place ; /SXeVeii/ Kara TI, to 
 look towards any quarter, i. e. to lie towards, 
 to face ; Acts 27, 12 \ip.tva r^y KPTJTT/S 
 f3\firovra Kara Ai jSa. So C. Kara. TI Sept. 
 Ez. 46, 6. 13. 22 ; ri TI Hdian. 2. 11. 16 ; 
 npos TI Xen. Mem. 3. 8. 9. 
 
 2. to see, as the consequence of looking ; 
 to perceive with the eyes, to behold. 
 
 a) Genr. and with ace. as TO icdp(j>os Matt. 
 7, 3. Luke 6, 41 ; also Matt 11,4. 13, 17. 
 
 24, 2. Mark 8, 23. 13, 2. Luke 7, 44. John 
 1, 29. Acts 8, 6. Rev. 1, 11. al. So c. ace. 
 impl. Matt. 13, 16. Acts 1, 9. 1 Cor. 13, 12. 
 Sept. c. ace. for nsn 2 K. 9, 17. (Luc. 
 D. Mort. 24. 2. Hdian. 5. 4. 16. Pol. 12. 24. 
 6 ; ace. impl. Jos. Ant. 6. 6. 2.) Rev. 1, 12 
 KOI fTTf<TTpf^a ftXfTTfiv Tifv <j)a>vT)v, and I 
 turned to see the voice, i. e. whose voice it 
 \vas. Also Matt. 18, 10, 01 ayyeXoi avrau/ 
 StaTrairor /3Xe7rot!O~t TO irpocranrov TOV TraTpo? 
 P.OV, their angels do always behold the face 
 of my Father, i. e. they have constant access 
 to him, are admitted to his privacy as his 
 friends, in allusion to the custom of oriental 
 monarchs; so Heb. T^n *$ ^ "i, Sept. 
 ol (yyvs TOV /3ao-iXecof, Esth. 1. 14 ; also 01 
 opcovrfs TO Trpua-anrov TOV jScunXctff 2 K. 
 
 25, 19 ; 01 lv Trpoo-coTTO) TOU /3ao-iXuj Jer. 
 52,25. In other constructions : a) Pass. 
 
 particip. TU /SXfTro/xej/a, the things seen, 
 visible, 2 Cor. 4, 18. Heb. 1 1, 1. 3. 7 ; negat. 
 TO M P\(ir6p.(t>a 2 Cor. 4, 18. #) With 
 an ace. and a particip. of another verb as 
 adjunct; comp. Buttm. 144. 6. b. Mark 
 5, 31 /SXeVets TUV o^Xof o-w3Xi /3oi/T(i art. 8, 
 24. Jolm 20, 1 /SXeVet TUV Xt Soi/ yppfvov f< 
 TOV p.vT]p.fiov. Matt. 15, 31. Luke 24, 12. 
 John 5, 19. 20, 5. 21, 9. 20. Acts 4, 14. 
 With particip. impl. 2 Cor. 12, 6 vntp o 
 /3Xe7ret ftf sc. oVra v. irpdatrovTa. Matt. 14, 
 30 /SXfVeoi TUV avfp.ov Ia~xyp6i>. So Jos. 
 Ant. 6. 14. 2 /3XeVeii flirev dv(\%6vra 3eo> 
 Tiva TT]V fj.op(pf]v ofj.oiov. y) In antith. 
 with \TTLS, A7ri f<a, where to see is i. q. to 
 have before the eyes, lo have present before 
 one ; Rom. 8, 24 6 yap /SXeVm TIS, TI /cm 
 f\iriei, for what a man seeth (has present 
 before him), how can he yet hope for it ? ib. 
 f\T7\s 8e ^fk(irojj.fvrj OVK (CTTIV {\TTLS. Comp. 
 Jos. Ant. 6. 8. 2 auTw fiXtTrofjLfvw nal Tra- 
 POVTL. S) Absol. of God, 6 ^\fna>v fv TO> 
 KpvTTTto, who seeth in secret, whose eyes 
 penetrate the most hidden recesses, Matt. 6, 
 4. 6. 18. Trop. with its own particip. in- 
 tens. Winer 5 46. 10; so fiXeirovTfs 
 /SXe ^eTe, seeing ye shall see, ye shall in 
 deed see, Matt. 13, 14. Mark 4, 12. Acts 
 28, 26 ; opp. fSXtnovres ov /SXeVoucri, seeing 
 they see not, are dull, stupid, Matt. 13, 13 ; 
 jSX. P.TJ /SXeWo-i id. Luke 8, 10 ; all refer 
 ring to Is. 6, 9 where Sept. for Heb. siso 
 1 iO. Comp. Pol. 12. 24. 6 P\tirovras ^ 
 fiXtntiv. 
 
 b) Intrans. to see, i. e. to have or recover 
 the faculty of sight, absol. Matt. 12, 22 wo-Te 
 TOV Tv(p\bv . . . fiXiTreiv. 15, 31. John 9, 7. 
 15. 25. Acts 9, 9. Rom. 11, 10. Rev. 3, 18. 
 al. Sept. for nxn 1 Sam. 3, 2. (^El. V. H. 
 6. 12. Antiph. 696. 1. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 4.) 
 Hence TO /3Xe 7Tf iv subst. sight, the sense 
 of sight, Luke 7, 21 ; negat. TO fj.fi ft\f7reiv 
 Rom. 11, 8. Trop. John 9, 39 iva ol p.f) 
 
 fSXfTTOVTfS ft\fTT<00~l Kal Ol j3\fnOVT(S TV(f}\O\ 
 
 ytvcavrai. V. 41. 
 
 3. Trop. to see, to perceive in mind ; so 
 with ace. and particip. as in no. 2. a. j3. 
 Rom. 7, 23 /3X/7ro> S tTtpov vopov . . . dvri- 
 (TTpaT(v6fj.Vov TO) v6fj.(a TOV voos [J.ov. Heb. 
 2, 9. 10, 25. So Sept. for Hxn Neh. 2, 17. 
 Comp. Jos. Ant. 6. 10. 2 Aaiu^y . . . 8tu- 
 irpayu>v ffS\frrfTo. With 6Vi, 2 Cor. 7, 8 
 /3XeV<B yap OTI T) eVtcrToX)} KTX. Heb. 3, 19. 
 James 2, 22. -f 
 
 {3\r/Teo$i a, ov, OoXXco.) a verbal im 
 plying necessity, propriety, or the .ike,./a- 
 ciendits, something to be thrown or put, i. q. 
 one must put ; Mark 2, 22 and Luke 5, 38 
 dXXa olvov Vfov els aeneous Kaivovs j3\rjToi>, 
 
Boavepyes 
 
 130 
 
 Bordvr) 
 
 comp. /3oAXo> no. 3. See Buttm. 134. 10. 
 Matth. 447. 
 
 BoavepyeSj indec. Boanerges, Mark 3, 
 17, explained by vioi Ppovrrjs sons of thun 
 der ; Heb. Tip h 53, Aram. TV} 153, sons 
 of noise or commotion. Applied by Jesus 
 as a surname to James and John, perh. on 
 account of their power as preachers ; or also 
 because of their impetuous spirit ; comp. 
 Luke 9, 54. 
 
 /3oa&>, co, f. TJO-CO, OOT},) to cry, to cry out 
 or aloud ; absol. Luke 18, 38 ; c. ace. Acts 
 21, 34 <zXXoi 8e aXXo ri efioav. With on 
 Acts 17, 6. Sept. for p?S 2 K. 2, 12. So 
 Luc. D. Marin. 1. 4. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 37. 
 Spec, of a cry of joy, Gal. 4, 27 /So rjo-oi/ 77 
 oti* &>SiVovo-a, quoted from Is, 54, 1 where 
 Sept. for bttS . So Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 26. 
 Or of terror, pain, as /3. (pavf) p.eyd\rj Acts 
 8, 7. Mark 15, 34. Sept. for p?T i Sam. 
 8, 18. So Dem. 784. 19. Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 
 28. Spec, a) Of a cry for help, to cry 
 out to any one, to call upon, c. Trpo y nva 
 Luke 18, 7. Sept. for ^S p?t Judg. 10, 
 14; bx Nlp3 Joel 1, 19. So c. ace. Luc. 
 D. Marin. 6. 3. Xen. Cyr. 7. 2. 5. b) Of 
 an exhortation or command, as by a herald, 
 to cry, to call aloud, to proclaim, absol. Matt. 
 3, 3. Mark 1. 3 Luke 3, 4. [9, 38.] John 
 1, 23 ; all referring to Is. 40, 3. 6, where 
 Sept. for X1J3 . So Plut. Coriolan. 25 ; genr. 
 Plato Apol. 32. b. 
 
 /3o77, Jjy, 77, a cry, outcry, a. g. for help, 
 James 5, 4. Sept. for Pip,?,S 1 Sam. 9, 16. 
 Genr. JElian. V. H. 13. 45. Xen. An. 4. 
 7. 23. 
 
 jBoifSreia, ay, 77, (/SoTjSeco.) succour, help, 
 Heb. 4, 16. Sept. for ITS Ps. 121, 1 ; PHTS 
 Judg. 5, 23. So Hdian. 2. 5. 5. Xen. Hell . 
 5. 4. 10. Spec. Acts 27, 17, at fiorfieuu, 
 helps, means of help, e. g. ropes, cables ; see 
 in VTTOCOVWIJ.I. Comp. \rist. Rhet. 2. 5. 
 
 porfjea), a>, f. TJO-CO, (Qov Sos.) pr. to run 
 up al a cry for help, to come m a?W of any 
 one, Pol. 5. 76. 5. Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 1 .In 
 N. T. genr. to succour, to help, c. dat. Matt. 
 15, 25. Mark 9, 22. 24. Acts 16, 9. 21, 28. 
 2 Cor. 6, 2. Heb. 2, 18. Rev. 12, 16. Sept. 
 for S/llJiPl Josh. 10, 6 ; ITS Gen. 49, 25. So 
 Hdian. 6. 7. 17. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 25. 
 
 /3o77^09, {), 6, 77, (/3o7j3ooy ; 017. 3/co,) 
 pr. running up al a cry for help, succour 
 ing ; Subst. a succourer, helper, Heb. 13, 6 ; 
 comp. Ps. 118,7. Sept. for "TS Job 29, 
 12. Luc. Tyrann. 20. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 14. 
 
 /36^-JJZ/09, ov, 6, (/3d3poy,) a pit, ditch, 
 as an emblem of destruction, Matt. 15, 14. 
 
 Luke 6, 39. Sept. for PiPjfi Is. 24, 18. So 
 Theophr. H. PI. 4. 2. 2. Xen. CEc. 19. 3. 
 Spec, a cistern, in the fields, Matt. 12, 11, 
 i. q. (ppeap Luke 14, 5. So Sept. e.nd Pitt? 
 2 Sam. 18, 17. 
 
 /3oA,?;, fj s , 17, 03aXX&>,) a cast, a throw ; 
 spoken of distance, Luke 22, 41 oboVt Xt Sov 
 fio\r]v about a stone s throw ; for the ace. 
 comp. Buttm. 131. 9. Sept. Gen. 21,16. 
 Thuc. 5. 65 p-fXP L pev Xi3ov K.OL aKovriov 
 Mpnaav. Xen. Hell. 4. 5. 15. 
 
 f. lo-co, (/3oXi y.) to 
 lead, to sound, absol. Acts 27, 28 bis. 
 Eustath. ad II. e, p. 427. 49. 3, p. 615. 53. 
 Wetst. N. T. in loc, 
 
 Soj, T), (/3aXXo>,) pr. something 
 thrown, as the lead in sounding, whence 
 |3oXi a> q. v. In N. T. a missile, e. g. a 
 javelin, dart, Heb. 12, 20. Sept. for nblti 
 Neh. 4, 17 ; yn Num. 24, 8. So Plut. De- 
 metr. 3. Paul. Sil. 68, 69, in Anthol. Gr. 
 IV. p. 62, 63. 
 
 Boo, 6, indec. Boozor Boaz,IIeb. TSia 
 (alacrity), pr. n. of a man celebrated in the 
 book of Ruth, Matt. 1, 5 bis. Luke 3, 32. 
 
 fiopftopos, ov, 6, dirt, mire, filth, pr. 
 such as accumulates where animals are 
 kept ; so proverb. 2 Pet. 2, 22. Sept. for 
 2^ Jer. 38, 6. Dem. 1259. 11. Arr. Epict. 
 
 4. 11. 29 cwreXSe KOI ;(oi /)a> StaX/you, iv lv 
 /3op/3o /3cp P.TJ KvXirjrai. Plato Phasd. 69. c. 
 
 /3o/3/3a?, 5, 6, (Att. contr. for fiopeas,} 
 pr. the north or N. N. E. wind, Sept. Prov. 
 27, 16. Xen. An. 4. 5. 3. In N. T. meton. 
 the north, the northern quarter of the heav 
 ens, Luke 13, 29. Rev. 21, 13. Sept. for 
 T SS Job 37, 22. So Theophr. H. PI. 5. 1. 
 11. Plato Crit. 112. b. 
 
 poCTKO), f. KTJO-CO, to feed, to pasture, to 
 tend while grazing or feeding ; of persons, 
 c. ace. Luke 15, 15 poo-Kfiv xoipovs. Mark 
 
 5, 14 ; absol. ot fioaKovres swine-herds Matt. 
 8, 33. Luke 8, 34. Mid. to feed, to be feed 
 ing or grazing, of a flock or herd, Matt. 8, 
 30. MarkS, 11. Luke 8, 32. Sept. for rw 
 Gen. 29, 7. 9. Mid. Job 1,14. So Horn 
 Od. 14. 103. ^sop. F. 131. Mid. Plut. non 
 posse suav. viv. sec. Epic. 14. Plato Rep. 
 586. a. Trop. of a teacher, to feed, to in 
 struct and care for, John 21, 15. 17. Sept. 
 and ttSI Ez. 34, 2. 3. 
 
 Bocrop, 6, indec. Bosor, Heb. "11*3 
 (torch) Beor, Sept. Bewp, Num. 22, 5 ; pr. 
 n. of the father of Balaam, 2 Pet. 2, 15. 
 
 ftoTavr), r)s, 77, (/3o o-Kco,) pr. pasturage, 
 i. e. herbage, grass, plants, Heb. 6, 7. Sept. 
 
131 
 
 for Kto Gen. 1, 11. 12. Ml V. H. 2. 40. 
 Plato Prot. 321. b. 
 
 vos, 6, a cluster of grapes, Rev. 
 14, 18. Sept. for Vstix Gen. 40, 10. Num. 
 13, 25. Luc. Bacch. 2. Xen. (Ec. 19. 18. 
 
 ?, oO, 6, (/3ovXevo>,) a counsel 
 lor. senator; spoken of a member of the 
 Jewish Sanhedrim, Mark 15, 43. Luke 23, 
 50. Sept. for fS h Job 3, 14. Dem. 1208. 
 5. Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 23. 
 
 ftov\ev(0, f. fva-co, (/3oiAi7,) to be a 
 counsellor or senator, Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 18 ; 
 to lake counsel, to deliberate, to determine 
 after consultation, Sept. for y?; Is. 23, 8. 
 Xen. Ath. 2. 17. In N. T. only Mid. /3ou- 
 Xeuo/iai, to tote counsel with oneself, i. e. 
 
 1. to consult, to deliberate; e. g. Sing. 
 followed by , Luke 14, 31. Plur. with 
 iva, John 12, 10 ejSouXevo-airo . . . Iva KOL TOV 
 \aapov airoKTfivaxTiv. [11,53.] Sept. for 
 yr-ia l K. 12, 28. So c. fl Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 7 ; 
 c. mrtas Xen. An. 4. 3. 14 ; absol. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 6. 8. 
 
 2. to determine after deliberation, to ie 
 minded, to purpose, c. ace. 2 Cor. 1, 17 ter; 
 r. inf. Acts 5, 33 e/3ovXeuoi/ro aveXeiv av- 
 rovj. 15, 37. 27, 39. Sept. c. ace. for 7?? 
 Is. 19, 12. So c. ace. Xen. An. 1.1.7; c. 
 inf. Hdian. 1. 16. 8. Xen. An. 3. 2. 8. 
 
 f3ov\tj, ijs, 77, a council, senate, 1 Esdr. 
 2, 17. Xen. Hell. 1. 7. 3. In N. T. cown- 
 sc/, i. e. 
 
 1. counsel given, advice; Acts 27, 12 ot 
 n-Xei ou? eSevro jSovXrji/. Sept. for FlSS 2 
 Sam. 16, 20. Plut. J. Caes. 21 /SovXiji/ 3e- 
 
 t. Xen. Cyr. 7. 2. 26. 
 
 2. counsel taken, e. g. spoken of God, 
 determination, purpose, decree, Luke 7, 30. 
 Acts 2, 23. 4, 28. 13, 36. 20, 27. Eph. 1, 
 11. Heb. 6, 17. Sept. for rtX? Prov. 19, 
 21. Is. 5, 19. So Horn. II. 1. 5. Find. Ol. 2. 
 137. Of men, i. q. purpose, plan, project, 
 Luke 23, 51. Acts 5, 38. 27, 42. Plur. 
 purposes, thoughts, 1 Cor. 4, 5. Sept. for 
 ns? HOS. 10,6; rqttjns i s . 55, 7. 8. So 
 
 JE\. V. H. 2. 4 Koivcavbs TTJS jSouXijr. 
 
 pOV\,TJfMl : GTOJ, TO, (/3ovX<tyiat,) pr. 
 what is willed ; hence, will, purpose, of 
 God Rom. 9, 19; of men Acts 27, 43. [1 Pet. 
 4, 3.] 2 Mace. 15, 5. Dem. 1109. 15. Plato 
 Le. 769. d. 
 
 f. pov\r](Top.ai, Pass, depon. 
 2 pers. /3ouXet Luke 22, 42-, see Winer $ 13. 
 2. Buttm. 13. III. 3 ; imperf. f^ov\6^v ; 
 aor. 1 ffiovXTjZrjv James 4, 4, also ^JovXi 
 2 John 12, see Buttm. 83. n. 5 ; to 
 
 to MJi sTi, to cfesj re. According to Buttmann, 
 the distinction between /3ouXo/nai and Se Xco 
 is, that the latter expresses an active choice 
 and purpose, the former a mere passive in 
 clination or willingness ; Lexilog. I. p. 26. 
 Or, /3ovXo/iat expresses the inward predis 
 position and bent from which the active 
 choice proceeds : see Tittm. de Synon. N. 
 T. p. 124. Hence /3ovXo//<u is never used 
 of brutes. In speaking of the gods, Homer 
 uses ovXo/im for 3<fXa>, since with them 
 will is also effect ; Buttm. 1. c. p. 27. In 
 N. T. 
 
 1 . Of men, to will, to be willing, to be dis 
 posed or minded, to desire, a) Genr . and with 
 an infin. of object ; e. g. infin. aor. Mark 15, 
 15 J3ov\6[j.vos TO) o^Xo) TO iKcivov TTOLrjcrai. 
 Acts[l5, 37.] 17,20. 18,27. 19,30. 22,30. 
 23, 28. 25, 22. 27, 43. 28, 18. Sept. for 
 na 1 Sam. 15, 9 ; V?n Deut. 25, 7. (1 
 Mace. 7, 30. Hdian. 7. 7. 8. Xen. Mem. 4. 
 7. 6. An. 3. 4. 20.) With infin. present, 
 Acts 25, 20 el (BovXoiTO 7ropevf&?Sai els if p. 
 
 1 Tim. 6, 9. Philem. 13. Sept. for rax 
 Is. 30, 9. 15. (Hdian. 7. 8. 18. Pint, de Sa- 
 nit. tuend. 1. Plato Soph. 244. a.) With 
 emu, and a predicate of the subject in the 
 nominative; Acts 18, 15 KpiTrjs yap <ry<a 
 rovnm ou /3ovXo/iai flvai. James 4, 4. 
 (Pint. Cato Min. 65. Plato Conv. 200. b.) 
 With an inf. impl. James 3, 4. 2 John 12. 3 
 John 10. Once with aor. Subjunct. John 
 18, 39 ; see Matth. 5 516. 3. Buttm. 5 139. 
 n. 1. Kiihner 5 259. 1. b) Also to be 
 minded, to intend, to purpose, c. inf. aor. 
 Matt. 1,19 e/SovXyja?; XaSpa aTroXvcrat avrfjv. 
 Acts 5, 28, 12, 4. 2 Cor. 1, 15. Sept. for 
 V?? Ezra 4, 5. So Plato Gorg. 460. c. 
 Xen. O3c. 13. 10. c) As used by one 
 having authority, and thus implying com 
 mand ; SQ with ace. and infin. pres. Phil. 
 
 1, 12 yivaxrKfiv fie vp.as fiov\op.ai. 1 Tim. 
 
 2, 8. 5, 14 ; ace. and inf. perf. for pres. 
 Tit. 3, 8 ; inf. aor. simpl. Jude 5. So Plato 
 Conv. 184. a. Xen. An. 1. 1. 1. 
 
 2. Of God, and so i. q. St Xo), see above ; 
 to will, to be pleased, to choose, to determine ; 
 absol. James 1, 18; c. infin. aor. Luke 22, 
 42 Trdrep, fl flovXfi TrapfVfyKflv TO TTOTr/piov 
 TOVTO an tfj.ov. Heb. 6, 17; ace. et infin. 
 
 2 Pet. 3, 9. Also of Jesus as the Son of 
 God, c. inf. aor. Matt. 11, 27. Luke 10, 22. 
 Once of the Holy Spirit, c. inf. impl. 1 Cor. 
 12, 11. Horn. II. 1. 67. ib. 13. 347. 
 
 /3owo9, ov, 6, a hill, Luke 3, 5. 23, 20. 
 Sept. for nsaa Ex. 17, 9. 10. Pol. 3. 83, 
 1. Plut. Sulla 16. A word of the later 
 Greek, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 355. 
 
132 
 
 J3o6s, 6, fj,anox or cow, an animal 
 of the ox kind ; Plur. oxen, cattle ; Luke 13, 
 15. 14, 5. 19. John 2, 14. 15. 1 Cor. 9, 9 
 bis. 1 Tim. 5, 18. Sept. for "i&a Gen. 13, 5; 
 fTiQ Gen. 41, 2. 3. 4. Luc. D. Mort. 6. 2. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 32. 
 
 /3pa/3eiov, ov, TO, (ftpaftevs,) a prize in 
 the public games, as a wreath, garland, or 
 the like ; 1 Cor. 9, 24. Trop. of the re 
 wards of the future world, Phil. 3, 14. 
 Plut. Symp. 9. 13. 2. 
 
 ppapevco, f. evcro), pr. to be 6 fBpaftevs, 
 i. e. to be a director, arbiter, in the public 
 games ; see Potter Gr. Ant. I. p. 441. Diet, 
 of Antt. art. Agonotheta ; then, to decree 
 victory, to give the prize, Wisd. 10, 12. He- 
 liodor. 4. 1. In N. T. to administer, to rule, 
 absol. and trop. Col. 3, 15 17 elpTjvr] TOV Xpi- 
 (TTOV ftpafievfTO) ev rats Ka.p8ia.is vp.a>v. So 
 pr. Diod. Sic. 13. 53. Pol. 2. 35. 3. Plut. 
 Pomp. 55. 
 
 fipaSvvw, f vv >, Q3pa8us,) to be slow, 
 slack, to delay, absol. 1 Tim. 3, 15. 2 Pet. 3, 
 9 ov fipaovvfi 6 Kvpios TTJS eVayyeXt ay, the 
 Lord will not be slack (draw back) from his 
 promise; Winer 30. 6. n. Buttm. $ 132. 4. 
 Sept. for ^HX Deut. 7, 10. Ecclus. 32, 18. 
 -Ml. V. H. 3. 43. Plato Rep. 528. d. 
 
 /3pa8v7T\oea), ^f.qo-co, (/SpaSvr, TrXe w.) 
 to sail slowly, Acts 27, 7. Artemid. 4. 32. 
 
 ppaovs, da. v, slow, not hasty, James 1 , 
 19 bis. So Dem. 777. 5. Plato Apol. 39. b. 
 Trop. slow of understanding, heavy, dull, 
 Luke 24, 25. So Dion. Hal. de Rhet. At 
 tic. PpaSvs TOV vow. Pol. 4. 8. 7. 
 
 /3paSuT?79, T^JTos, 17, OpaSvj-,) slowness, 
 tardiness, 2 Pet. 3, 9 &s Tives j3paovTiJTa 
 ijyovvra.1, as some count it tardiness, i. e. 
 that the Lord delays in respect to his pro 
 mise ; see in j3paovva>. Jos. Ant. 7. 4. 1 . 
 Hdian. 3. 4. 15. Xen. Hell. 4. 6. 5. 
 
 j3pa%Ui)V, ovos, 6, the arm, Lat. bra- 
 chium, Plut. Eumen. 7. Xen. Eq. 7. 8. 
 In N. T. by Hebr. like si"it , put for strength, 
 might, power, Luke 1, 51. John 12, 38. 
 Acts 13, 17. So Sept for Silt Deut. 5, 
 15. Is. 51, 5. 
 
 Spa^y?) eTa, v, short, small, little ; e. g. 
 
 1. Of time, Luke 22, 58 /xera Ppaxv af 
 ter a little while. Acts 5, 34 fipaxv TI (for) 
 a little while. Sept. irapa /3pa^u for BSS3 
 Ps. 94, 17. So fipaxv TI Pol. 14. 7. 5; 
 fipaxel Luc. Somn. 2. Plato Conv. 217. a. 
 
 2. Of space. Acts 27, 28 fipaxv oiao~rt]- 
 cravres, i. e. having gone a little further. 
 Sept. and ttJJa 2 Sam. 16, 1. So Diod. Sic. 
 
 3. 3. Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 47. Trop. of ram? 
 or dignity, Heb. 2, 7. 9, fipaxv TI Trap" dyye- 
 Xovs, a little lower than the angels, i. e. Jesus 
 during his life on earth ; quoted from Ps. 8, 
 6, where Sept. for asja necessarily of rank, 
 as the antith. in Heb. 2, 9 also requires. 
 
 3. Of quantity or number, small, few ; 
 John 6, 7 ftpaxv TI, a little. Sept. and ES53 
 1 Sam. 14, 29. 44. So ^Eschin. 56. 2~6. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 8. Also Heb. 13, 22 8ia 
 Ppaxemv sc. \6ya>v, i. e. in few words, brief 
 ly ; so Luc. Tox. 56. Plato Prot. 336. a. 
 
 /3pe(o?, for, ovs, TO, a child, e. g. yet 
 unborn, a fcetus, Luke 1, 41. 44. (Ecclus. 
 19, 11. Horn. II. 23. 266.) Usually an in 
 fant, babe, Luke 2, 12. 16. 18, 15. Acts 7, 
 19. 2 Tim. 3, 15 dno Pp(<povs,from a child, 
 from the cradle. So 1 Mace. 1, 61. Luc. 
 D. Deor. 9. 2. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 5. Trop. 
 of those just entering on the Christian life, 
 1 Pet. 2, 2 ; comp. 1 Cor. 3, 1. 2. Heb. 5. 
 12. 13. 
 
 /3/3e^&>, f. o>, 1 . to wet, to moisten, to 
 sprinkle ; c. ace. of obj. Luke 7, 38. 44 ; 
 absol. Rev. 11,6 tva p.rj VCTOS ftpeXTl sc - r n v 
 y^v. Sept. for norn Ps. 6. 7. Diod. Sic. 
 3. 25. Xen. An. 4". 3. 12. 
 
 2. to rain, to cause to rain, i. q. veiv, 
 found in the Attic poets and later prose 
 writers, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 291. a) Genr. 
 and with eVi Tiva, Matt. 5, 45 (6 3e6?) 
 fipeX eL e>7 " SIKO/OVS KT\. (Sept. for "P a 7311 
 Am. 4, 7.) With ace. of material, Luke 
 17, 29 (6 3f6sO f/3pef irvp KOI 3eToi/. Sept. 
 Gen. 19, 24. Ez. 38, 22 ; comp. Ex. 9, 24. 
 So c. ace. of thing Xen. (Ec. 17. 2. Pass. 
 Pol. 16. 12. 3. b) With indef. subject, 
 /iJpe ^ei, like vet, Lat. pluit, it rains, James 
 5, 17 bis, iTpo<rr)vaTO TOV p.f) j3pe cu, xal OVK 
 fftpf&v eVi TTJS yrjs. See Matth. 295. 2 pen. 
 Buttm. 129. 17. 
 
 js, 17, thunder; Mark 3, 17 
 viol Ppovrrjs, see in Eoavepyts. John 12, 
 29. Rev. 4, 5. 6, 1. 8, 5. 10, 3. 4 bis. 11, 
 19. 14, 2. 16, 18. 19, 6. Sept. for d?n 
 Job 26, 14. Ps. 77, 19. Horn. E. 21. 19V. 
 Luc. D. Deor. 9. 2. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 3. 
 
 PpoXV ^> >?> Op***) rain > Matt. 7, 
 25. 27. Sept. for Dffia Ps. 68, 10. 105, 32. 
 Geopon. 2. 39. 191. Found only in latt 
 usage, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 291. 
 
 (3po%o?, ov,6, a noose, snare; trop. 1 Cor 
 7, 35 OVK Iva ppoxov vp.1v eVi/3dXa>, not that 1 
 would cast a noose over you, i. e. impose on 
 you any necessity. Sept. for \S5j5ia Prov. 
 22, 25. Plut. Amator. 13. Xen. Ven. 2. 
 5,6. 
 
133 
 
 ftpvyfJ.6?, ov, 6, (/3pvx<,) a 
 gnashing of the teeth, in pain or rage, Matt. 
 
 8, 12. 13,42. 50. 22, 13. 24, 51. 25, 30. 
 Luke 13, 28; comp. Acts 1, 54. Ecclus. 
 51, 3. Suid. (3pvy/j.6s rpiap-os oSojTcov. 
 Comp. Wetst. N. T. in Matt. 8, 12. 
 
 j3pi>)(a), f. |o), to grate, to gnash the 
 ceeth in rage, c. ace. Acts 7, 54 fftpv^ov 
 TOVS ofioVra? fir avrov. Sept. for p nn 
 Job 16, 9. Ps. 35, 16. aL Comp. Horn. IL 
 13. 393. Soph. Trach. 1074. 
 
 ftpvca, f. o-co, to be full, to swell out with 
 any thing, to overflow, Diog. Laert. 1. 122. 
 Plut. de Adulat. et Amic. 32. In N. T. 
 trans, to make overflow, lo pour or send forth, 
 as a fountain its waters, c. ace. James 3, 11. 
 So absol. Act Thorn. 37 7777717 (3pvov<ra. 
 Xen. Ven. 5. 12 orav 77 yr} ftpvy. 
 
 ppcu/titt) aroy, TO, (/3(/3pa>ov<a>,) 1. eat 
 ables, food, i. e. solid food opp. to milk 1 
 Cor. 3, 2 ; so Matt. 14, 15. Mark 7, 19. 
 Luke 3, 11. 9, 13. 1 Cor. 6, 13 bis. 8, 8. 
 Sept. for bax Gen. 41, 35. 36 ; iaxa Gen. 
 6, 21. So jfel. V. H. 3. 20. Plut. de Sanit. 
 tuend. 6. Xen. Mem. 3. 11. 13. Spoken 
 of meats permitted by the Mosaic law, Heb. 
 
 9, 10. 13, 9. Also of meats of which Jew 
 ish Christians scrupled to eat, Rom. 14, 15 
 bis. 20. 1 Cor. 8, 13. 1 Tim. 4, 3. 
 
 2. Trop. for aliment, sustenance, nourish 
 ment ; John 4, 34 fpov /Spco/ia, i. e. that by 
 which I live, in which I delight. 1 Cor. 3, 2 
 yaXa vp.as (ironva, ov |3pa>p.a, i. e. solid 
 spiritual food or instruction, i. q. crrepea 
 rpocpt) Heb. 5, 12. 1 Cor. 10, 3 /3pa>p.a irvtv- 
 fjMTiKov, spiritual food, i. e. miraculous, and 
 so the emblem and source of spiritual nou 
 rishment. 
 
 , ou, 6, 77, adj. Opwo-ir,) eat 
 able; Luke 24, 41 x re Tl fipuxn-pov, have 
 ye any food? Sept. for bax Lev. 19, 23. 
 Ez. 47, 12. ^Eschyl. Proni.~479. 
 
 /3p&>0Y?, ewf, 77, Oi/SpoxTKca,) 1. aneat- 
 ing, i. e. the act of eating, 1 Cor. 8, 4. 2 Cor. 
 9, 10 apros (Is PpaxTiv, bread for eating, 
 bread to eat, quoted from Is. 55, 10 where 
 Sept. for bax. So Jos. Ant. 1. 20. 2. 
 Plato Rep. 619. c. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 15. 
 Trop. corrosion, rust; Matt. 6, 19. 20 O-TJS 
 KOI fipaxTis, moth and rust, the latter said of 
 alloyed money ; comp. James 5, 2. 3. So 
 Aquila for tjs moth Is. 50, 9. 
 
 2. Meton. that which is eaten, food, 
 i. q. /3po>/za. John 6, 27 TTJV /3pa>aii> rrjv 
 ajio\\vp.fV7]t>, i. e. food for the body. Heb. 
 12, 16. So Ppaxris Kai noa-is. food and drink, 
 Rom. 14, 17. Col. 2, 16. Sept. for bax Gen. 
 
 47, 24 ; baXB Jer. 7, 21. So Plut. de Virt 
 et Vit. 2. Plato Legg. 783. c. Trop. foi 
 aliment, nourishment ; John 4, 32 jSpwcnv 
 ?X&) (payeiv, i. q. /3pcop.a in v. 34 ; see in 
 /3pa>/ia no. 2. In John 6, 27. 55, Jesus uses 
 PpSxris in the sense of food for the soul, 
 i. e. that true spiritual aliment from above 
 presented in and through him to Christians. 
 Comp. Clem. Alex. Strom. 5. 10 ^p&>o-ts KM 
 Troo is TOV 3ei ou Xoyou 77 yvuxris eon TTJS 
 Set ay overlay. 
 
 /Spooavco) obsol. lends its forms to j3t- 
 j3pa)o-(c<u q. v. 
 
 /Sl/^/fa), f. I CTW, (/3^3ov,) to sink in the 
 deep, to cause to sink ; Pass, to sink, Luke 
 5, 7. So 2 Mace. 12, 4. Diod. Sic. 5. 4. 
 Pol. 2. 10. 5. Trop. 1 Tim. 6, 9 fls oXe- 
 3po!/; comp. Ps. 69, 2. 3. 124, 4. 5. 
 
 /Su^-o?, ou, 6, depth, the deep; 2 Cor. 11, 
 25 vv%% r] /jLfpov tv r<a /3u3<a SC. TTJS SaXao-- 
 o-77f. Sept. for nblSia Ps. 107, 24. ./El. 
 H. An. 8. 3. Luc/D. Marin. 10. 2. Diod. 
 Sic. 3. 21. 
 
 pvpaevs, ecos, 6, (j3vpo-a.) a tanner, Acts 
 9, 43. 10, 6. 32. Artemid. 4. 56. 
 
 /3v(T(T(,vo$j 77, ov, (/3uo-o-or,) byssine, of 
 linen, see in ftva-o-os. Neut. TO ftv(r<rivot> 
 Rev. 19, 8, also fivavivov, linen, i. e. cloth 
 or raiment of byssus, Rev. 18, 12 Griesb. 
 v. 16. 19, 8 bis. 14. Sept. for jna and la 
 1 Chr. 15, 27 ; ttJO Gen. 41,42. Jos. Ant". 
 3. 7. 2. Diod. Sic. 1. 85 fivcro-iva TrepifiepXr)- 
 p-tiyv. Hdot. 2. 86. 
 
 /5?J<rcroy, ou, 77, byssus, linen, spoken of 
 the finest and most precious stuffs, as worn 
 by the rich, or as an article of commerce, 
 Luke 16. 19. Rev. 18, 12 Rec. Comp. also 
 1 Chr. 15, 27. 2 Chr. 5, 12. Esth. 1,6. 8, 
 15. Sept. for -pa 2 Chr. 2,14. 3, 14 ; ttiir 
 Ex. 26, 1. Ez. 27, 7. al. So Theocr. 2. 73. 
 Pausan. 5. 5. ib. 6. 26. Jos. Ant. 3. 6. 1. 
 ib. 3. 7. 2. Strabo 15. p. 693. The word 
 comes from Heb. ynz, pr. the Syrian 
 byssus, Ez. 27, 16, distinguished from the 
 Egyptian byssus or E51U v. 7 ; though else 
 where "pa is often put for VV in the 
 later Hebrew, 1 Chr. 4, 21. 2 Chr. 3, 14 ; 
 comp. Ex. 26, 31. It has been long dispu 
 ted whether the byssus was linen or cotton ; 
 see Celsii Hierob. II. p. 169 sq. Forster de 
 ByssO antiquor. Lond. 1776. Herodotus 
 affirms that the mummies of Egypt were 
 wrapped in bandages of byssus (o-iv86vos 
 ^vacrivr/s Te\ap.uHTi Hdot. 2. 86 ; comp. Xt- 
 vov ftva-o-os Jos. Ant. 3. 6. 1) ; and many of 
 these have been of late years subjected to 
 minute examination with the microscope, 
 and have proved to be composed of threads 
 
134 
 
 of linen ; see Wilkinson s Mann, and Gust. 
 of the Anc. Egyptians, III. p. 115. This 
 would seem to decide the controversy so 
 far as it relates to mummy-cloths, and pro 
 bably likewise as to sacred vestments. It 
 is however still a question with some, whe 
 ther the term pvo-aos may not perhaps have 
 been sometimes used more widely, so as to 
 include also cotton fabrics ; since these were 
 much worn by the ancient Egyptians, as 
 well as by the moderns ; and the Arabic 
 
 term sliash, shashiyeh, (Heb. ^j) now de 
 notes a fine muslin of cotton ; see Wilkin 
 son 1. c. p. 116 sq. Plin. H. N. 19. 2. 3 
 Poll. Onom. 7. 75. 
 
 p(0(J,o$, ov, 6, (/3aa>,/3tuVa>,) a step, stand, 
 base, Horn. II. 8. 441. In N. T. and usu 
 ally, an altar, pr. to which the ascent was 
 by steps, Acts 17, 23. Sept. for Hats 
 Ex. 34, 13. So Hdian. 7. 11. 5. XPP 
 Mem. 1. 1. 2. 
 
 r. 
 
 a or yaftcfea, rj, indec. Gab- 
 batha, Aram. Nnaa (the back, a ridge ; 
 fern, of 35 back, boss), pr. n. of a place in 
 Jerusalem where Pilate gave sentence 
 against Jesus, John 19, 13 ; called in Greek 
 XiSdorpwroi , where see fully. It was near 
 the castle or residence of Pilate. Comp. 
 Heb. Lex. art. 3?. Buxt. Lex. Chald. 377. 
 Others derive it from r. fi?J to be high, 
 as if for 
 
 ri\ 6, indec. Gabriel, Hebrew 
 lO"iaa (man of God), pr. n. of an arch 
 angel, Luke 1, 19. 26. See in a 
 
 ryayypawa, TJS, 17, (ypaw> ypaiVo),) gan 
 grene, mortification, which spreads by de 
 grees over the whole body, 2 Tim. 2, 17. 
 Plut. de Adul. et Amic. 24 trop. yayypat- 
 vais . . StajSpwSety AXeai>Spoy. Poll. On. 
 4. 207. Wetst. N. T. in loc. 
 
 6, indec. Gad, Heb. "lj} (good for 
 tune), pr. n. of the seventh son of Jacob, 
 born of Zilpah, Gen. 30, 10 sq. In N. T. 
 the tribe of Gad, Rev. 7, 5. 
 
 S) ov, 6, a Gadarene, i. e. an 
 inhabitant of the city Gadara, TaSapd, the 
 fortified capital of Peraea or the region east 
 of the Jordan, Jos. B. J. 4. 7. 3. Accord 
 ing to Eusebius and Jerome (Onomast.) it 
 was situated over against Tiberias and Scy- 
 thopolis. Josephus calls Gadara a Greek 
 city, TTO\IS E\\r]vis, Ant. 17. 11. 4; and 
 says it had many wealthy inhabitants, B. J. 
 4. 7. 3. When first taken from the Jews, 
 it was annexed by the Romans to Syria, 
 Jos. B. J. 1. 7. 7; Augustus gave it to 
 Herod the Great, ib. 1. 20. 3 ; but it was 
 restored to Syria after Herod s death, Ant. 
 17. 11. 4. The site of Gadara has been 
 recognized at Urn Keis, a place with exten 
 sive ruins visited by Seetzen, Burckhardt, 
 and others ; situated near the crest of the 
 
 chain of mountains which bound the valley 
 of the Jordan on the east, and overlooking 
 the lake of Tiberias, the southern end of 
 which bears from it N. W. An hour north 
 of this spot is the deep valley of the Hiero- 
 max ; in which are hot sulphur springs, 
 also mentioned by Eusebius and Jerome. 
 On the east of the ruins are many sepul 
 chres hewn in the rock ; as also great num 
 bers of sarcophagi lying about. See Re- 
 land. Palaest. p. 773 sq. Seetzen in Zach s 
 Monatl. Corr. XVIII. p. 417 sq. Burckh. 
 Trav. in Syr. p. 270, 276. In N. T. ruv 
 Ta8apr)v>v Mark 5, 1. Luke 8, 26. 37 ; also 
 in Mss. Matt. 8, 28 for rwv repyeo^i/oij/ or 
 TWV Tepacrr]v)i>, q. V. 
 
 rd^a, 779, 17, Gaza, Heb. FIJ? (strong), 
 a celebrated city of the Philistines, situated 
 partly on elevated ground not far from the 
 coast of the Mediterranean, near the south 
 ern limits of the territory of the Israelites, 
 and constituting the key between Egypt 
 and Syria. It is one of the earliest of the 
 Canaanitish cities mentioned ; Gen. 10, 19. 
 It was assigned by Joshua to the tribe of 
 Judah, who subdued it ; but the possession 
 of it was retained or soon recovered by the 
 Philistines ; Josh. 15, 47. Judg. 1, 18. 16, 
 1 sq. After having destroyed Tyre, Alex 
 ander the Great laid siege to Gaza also, 
 which was then held by a Persian garrison, 
 and took it after two months ; Arr. Exp. 
 Alex. 2. 26, comp. Strabo 16. 2. 30. p. 759. 
 He left the city standing ; but about B. C. 
 95, Alexander Jannaeus took it after a siege 
 of a year and destroyed it. Gabinius after 
 wards rebuilt it, and Augustus bestowed it 
 on Herod the Great, after whose death it 
 was annexed to Syria. See Jos. Ant. 1 1 . 
 8. 3, 4. ib. 13. 5. 5. ib. 13. 13. 3. ib. 14. 5. 
 3. ib. 15. 7. 9. ib. 17. 11. 4. Reland Pa 
 laest. p. 788-800. For other notices, and 
 for the present condition of Gaza, see Bibl. 
 
135 
 
 Res. in Palest. II. p. 9W-363. In N. T. 
 Acts 8, 2> fVt TTJV 68ov TT)i> KaTaftalvov<rav 
 UTTO lfpovcraXf)fi els Tti^av avrrf earlv (prj- 
 p.os, the way leading from Jerusalem to Gaza, 
 which [way] is desert, i. e. which leads 
 through the uninhabited country east of 
 Gaza, where Philip met the eunuch. Others 
 refer tpr^ios to Gaza itself ; but against the 
 historical testimony. See more fully in Bibl. 
 Res. in Palest. II. p. ttQ. 
 
 yaa, T)S, f], the treasure, treasury, of a 
 king or state, Acts 8, 27. Sept. for T55 
 Ezra 5, 17. Esth. 4, 7. Plut. Alex. M. 36. 
 Diod. Sic. 17. 64. Lat. gaza Cic. de Off. 2. 
 22. Mela 1. 11 gaza Persa? serarium vo- 
 cant. 
 
 ov, TO, yaa, <vaKij, 
 a treasury, Strabo 7. p. 319; comp. yao- 
 <uXa Plut. Demetr. 25. In the Scriptures 
 and Josephus, the treasury of the temple, 
 tv av\fj OIKOV 3eoi} Neh. 13, 7 ; comp. Sept. 
 for HStib Neh. 10, 37. 13, 4. 5. 8 ; T3* 
 Esth. 3, 9. Jos. Ant 19. 6. 1. B. J. 5. 5. 2. 
 According to the Rabbins the treasury was 
 in the court of the women, where stood 
 thirteen chests, called rrhBl ia trumpets from 
 their form ; into which the Jews cast their 
 offerings, Ex. 30, 13sq. See Buxt. Lex. 
 2506. Lightf. Chorogr. Marco praem. c. 3. 
 So in N. T. Mark 12, 41 bis. 43. Luke 
 21,1. Meton. of the court itself, John 8, 20. 
 
 aio?, ov, 6, Gams, Lat. Cains, pr. n. 
 of several men in N. T. a) A Macedo 
 nian, and fellow-traveller of Paul, who was 
 seized by the populace at Ephesus, Acts 
 19, 29. b) A man of Derbe who accom 
 panied Paul in his last journey to Jerusa 
 lem, Acts 20, 4. c) An inhabitant of Co 
 rinth with whom Paul lodged, and in whose 
 house the Christians were accustomed to 
 assemble, Rom. 16, 23. 1 Cor. 1, 14. d) 
 A Christian to whom John addressed his 
 third epistle, 3 John 1. 
 
 <yaXa, OKTOS, TO, milk, 1 Cor. 9, 7. Sept. 
 for abn Gen. 18, 8. So Luc. D. Marin. 
 
 1. 2. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 10. Trop. for the 
 first rudiments of Christian instruction, 
 1 Cor. 3, 2. Heb. 5, 12. 13. But in 1 Pet. 
 
 2, 2, milk is the emblem of pure spiritual 
 nourishment, or of Christian instruction in 
 general. 
 
 JaXaT???, O u, 6, a Galatian, Gal. 3, 1. 
 
 1 dXarui, as, fj, Galatia or Gallogra- 
 cia, a central province of Asia Minor, lying 
 S. and S. E. of Bithynia and Paphlagonia; 
 W. of Pontus ; N. and N. W. of Cappado- 
 cia ; and N. and N. E. of Lycaonia and 
 
 Phrygia. The chief cities were Ancyra, 
 Tavium, and Pessinus. Its name was de 
 rived from the Gauls, TaXarai ; of whom 
 two tribes, the Trocmi and Tolistoboii, witli 
 a tribe of the Celts, Tectosages, migrated 
 thither about 278 B. C. and mingling with 
 the former inhabitants, the whole were 
 called Gallograeci. The Celtic language 
 continued to be spoken by their descendants 
 at least until the time of Jerome, 600 years 
 after the migration; see Jerome ad Gal. 1, 
 2. Under Tiberius, about A. D. 26, tin s 
 country became a Roman province. Gala 
 tia was distinguished for the fertility of its 
 soil and for its trade. It was the residence 
 of many Jews ; and from these and the other 
 inhabitants Paul appears to have gained 
 many converts to Christianity. See Strabo 
 4. p. 187. ib. 12. 566. Pausan. Phoc. 10. 
 23. 9. Liv. 38. 16, 18. Tacit. Ann. 15. 6. 
 Comp. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. I. ii. p. 210. 
 Winer Realw. s. v. In N. T. 1 Cor. 16, 1. 
 Gal. 1, 2. 2 Tim. 4, 10. 1 Pet. 1, 1. 
 
 JTaXari/co?, rj, 6v, Galatian; Acts 16, 
 6 raXariKTjv x<*>p av i i- e - Galatia. 18, 23. 
 
 yaX^iA??, rj Si rj y tranquillity, e. g. of the 
 sea, a calm, Matt. 8, 26. Mark 4, 39. Luke 
 8, 24. Horn. Od. 7. 319. Luc. V. Hist. 2. 
 40. Xen. An. 5. 7. 8. 
 
 TaXtXa/a, ay, 17, Galilee, a region of 
 Palestine, which in the time of Christ in 
 cluded all the northern part of Palestine 
 lying between the Jordan and Mediterra 
 nean, and between Samaria and Phenicia. 
 Before the exile the name seems to have 
 been applied only to a small tract bordering 
 on the northern limits around Kedesh of 
 Napntali; Heb. b^a 1 K. 9, 11; fi^ia 
 2 K. ! 15, 29. It was anciently called also 
 Galilee of the Gentiles, D^ art b^a Is. 8, 
 23, roXtXa/a d\\o<pv\a>v 1 Mace. 5, 15, be 
 cause many foreigners from Egypt, Arabia, 
 Phenicia, etc. were mixed with the popula 
 tion, as is expressly stated by Strabo, 16. 2. 
 34. p. 760; comp. 1 Mace. 5, 15. 21-23. 
 Galilee in the time of Christ was divided 
 into Upper and Lower, ; avu> KCU r} KOTO 
 ToXiXa/a ; the former lying north of the 
 territory of Zebulun and having many 
 mountains; the latter being less hillv, fer 
 tile, and very populous, with many cities 
 and villages. According to Josephus, Lowor 
 Galilee extended to Carmel and Scythopo- 
 lis, and apparently also to Ginaea ; in wlu ch 
 case it included the great plain of Esdra- 
 elon ; Jos. B. J. 3. 3. 1 ; comp. Ant. 20. 6. 
 1. But he also specifies Xaloth (mod. 
 IksS.1) as its southern limit ; and this woulil 
 
136 
 
 yap 
 
 exclude the plain ; B. J. 3. 3. 1. The chief 
 cities were Tiberias and Sepphoris ; but 
 Capernaum and Nazareth are most fre 
 quently named in the N. T. See Strabo 
 1. c. Jos. B. J. 3. 3. 1-3. Rosenm. Bibl. 
 Geogr. II. ii. p. 42. Winer Realw. s. v. 
 In N. T. Mark 1, 9. Luke 2, 39. 4, 14. 8, 
 26. John 7, 52. al. saep. In Matt. 4, 15 
 ToXtXata TMV eSvcov is quoted from Is. 8, 23 
 [9,-l], for which see above. So 17 SdXao-o-a 
 TTJS FaXtXa/ay, the sea of Galilee, the lake 
 of Tiberias, Matt. 4, 18. 15, 29. + 
 
 ittXtXat09, a, ov, Galilean; Subst. a 
 Galilean, a native or inhabitant of Galilee ; 
 Matt. 26, 69. Mark 14, 70. Luke 13, 1. 2 bis. 
 22, 59. 23, 6. John 4, 45. Acts 1, 11. 2, 7. 
 5, 37. The Galileans were brave and in 
 dustrious, Jos. B. J. 3. 3. 2 ; though the 
 other Jews regarded them as stupid, unpol 
 ished, and seditious, and therefore proper 
 objects of contempt; John 1, 47. 7, 52. 
 Acts 2, 7. They had a peculiar dialect, by 
 which they were distinguished from the 
 Jews of Jerusalem, Mark 14, 70. See Bux- 
 torf Lex. 434 sq. Lightf. Cent. Chorogr. 
 Matt, praem. c. 86, 87. 
 
 a\\ia)V, a>vos, 6, Gallio, a Roman 
 proconsul of Achaia, Acts 18, 12. 14. 17. 
 fie was the younger brother of the philoso 
 pher Seneca, and was called Marcus An- 
 naeus Novatus ; but took the name of Gallio 
 after being adopted into the family of L. 
 Junius Gallio. Like his brother Seneca, he 
 was put to death by order of Nero. Senec. 
 Ep . 104. Id. Q. Nat. 4. praef. Tacit. Ann. 15. 
 73. ib. 16. 17. Wetst. N. T. in loc. 
 
 I a/jia\ir)\, 6, indcc. Gamaliel, Heb. 
 bx^aa (benefit from God) Num. 1, 10. 2, 
 20, a distinguished Pharisee and teacher at 
 Jerusalem, under whom Paul was educated, 
 Acts 5, 34. 22, 3. According to the Tal 
 mud, he was the son of Simeon and grand 
 son of the celebrated Hillel (Buxt: Lex. 
 617) ; was distinguished for piety and Jew 
 ish learning ; and for a long time was pre 
 sident of the Sanhedrim. See Lightf. Hor. 
 Heb. in Act. 5, 34. 
 
 <ya/ie&), &>, (ya/xos,) aor. 1 (yrjp.a from 
 ya/io>) Luke 14, 20, also the later form 
 eydp.r)<ra Mark 6, 17. al. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
 742. Buttm. Gr. and Ausf. Spr. J 114 ; Im- 
 per. 3 plur. ya^e iTaxrav 1 Cor . 7, 36, and 
 yanTjcrdrao-av v. 9, see Winer 13. 2. e. 
 Buttm. Ausf. Spr. 88. n. 8. To marry, 
 to wed, i. e. 
 
 1. Of men, c. ace. to marry a woman, to 
 1akf as wife., Luke 14, 20 ywaiKa ey^/io. 16, 
 
 18 bis. Matt. 5, 32. 19, 9 bis. Mark 6, 17 
 on avTTjv fydnrja-fv. 10, 11. So Jos. Ant. 1. 
 15. 1. Diod. Sic. 4. 72. Xen. Mem. 1. 1.8. 
 Absol. and neut. to marry, to take a wife ; 
 Matt. 19, 10 oi a-vfji(f)pfi ya/jLTJo-at. 22, 25. 
 30. 24, 38. Mark 12, 25 otfre yap-ova-iv. 
 Luke 17, 27. 20, 34. 35. 1 Cor. 7, 28 lav 
 fie yfjfjirjs. v. 33. So 2 Mace. 14, 25. Ml V. 
 H. 4. 1. Xen. Hi. 1. 27. 
 
 2. Of females, absol. to marry, to get 
 married, 1 Cor. 7, 28 ea.v yr]fj.rj f) 7rap3eW. 
 v. 34. 36. 1 Tim. 5, 11. 14. Comp. Eurip. 
 Med. 606 ficov ya/ioi)cra ml Trpo8ov<rd ere. 
 Pass. aor. 1 eyap.^r]v, to be married, to 
 get married, c. dat. Mark 10, 12 *ai yaprfir) 
 aXX. 1 Cor. 7, 39. So Plut. Romul. 2. Id. 
 Demetr. 2 f) p-qr^p r<u Avriyovca ya/^Selcra. 
 
 3. Genr. of both sexes, absol. to marry, 
 to get married, 1 Cor. 7, 9 bis. 10. 1 Tim. 
 4, 3 KoXf OVTKIV yafjiflv. Plut. Conjug. Prase. 
 20. ib. 34. 
 
 J, f. lo-co, (yap,or,) to marry, to 
 give in marriage, e. g. a daughter, 1 Cor. 
 7, 38 bis, Lachm. for the common fKyapifa ; 
 and so Matt. 22, 30. Mark 12, 25. Luke 
 17, 27. 20, 35. 
 
 ya/^KT/co), i. q. yap,i co, to marry, to give 
 in marriage, Pass. Mark 12, 25. Aristot. 
 Pol. p. 22. 
 
 v, 6, 1. a wedding, marriage, 
 nuptials; e. g. ev8vp.a ydp.ov a wedding- 
 garment Matt. 22, 11. 12; TO StTnvvov TOV 
 ydpov the marriage-supper, wedding-feast, 
 Rev. 19, 9, see below. So 1 Mace. 9, 37. 
 41. Hdian. 4. 11. 10. Xen. Ag. 3. 3. Spec. 
 the wedding-feast, marriage-festival, which 
 continued seven days ; see Judg. 14, 12. 
 15. Tob. 11, 19. Winer Realw. art. Hocli- 
 zeit. So Matt. 22, 2 eVo^o-e yap-ovy. v. 3. 4. 
 8. 9. 10. 25, 10. Luke 12, 36. 14, 8. John 
 2, 1. 2. Sept. for riMfin Esth. 2, 18. So 
 Tob. 6, 12. Luc. D. Deor. 20. 14. Xen. 
 Ven. 1. 8. Hence trop. the rejoicings and 
 happiness of the Redeemer s kingdom are 
 represented under the figure of a wedding- 
 festival, Rev. 19, 7. 9; comp. Matt. 25, 
 1 sq. 
 
 2. Meton. marriage, matrimony, the mar 
 riage state, Heb. 13, 4. Wisd. 14, 24. 26. 
 Hdian. 3. 10. 10. Xen. Hi. 1. 27. 
 
 conj. (ye , apa,) for, because, a cau 
 sal particle, put always after one or more 
 words in a clause, and expressing the rea 
 son of what has been before affirmed or im 
 plied; comp. Buttm. 149. m. 17. Kiihner 
 $ 324. 2, and Gr. Gram. $ 754. Hartung 
 Lehre v. d. Partikeln I. p. 457-480. 
 
jap 
 
 137 
 
 yap 
 
 1. CAUSAL and ARGUMENTATIVE: a) 
 After an antecedent clause expressed, for; 
 Matt. 1,20/iq (po^Sf;? 7j-upaXa/3eTi/ Mapiap. 
 TO yap eV auriy ytvvrfiev KT\. v. 21 KaXftrei? 
 TO ovoua avrov Irjcrovv avros yap (raxrei 
 KT\. Mark 1, -22. 6, 18. Luke 1, 15. al. sae- 
 piss. So too after a clause of prohibition or 
 caution, Matt. 3, 9. 24, 5. Luke 7, 6. al. 
 We find yap put after two words closely 
 connected in a clause, Matt. 2, 6. Mark 1, 
 38. Luke 6, 23. John 12,8. Acts 4, 20. al. 
 Often also yap is found in two consecutive 
 clauses, viz. where the same idea is ex 
 pressed twice, i. e. affirmatively and nega 
 tively, or generally and specially, John 8, 
 42. "l Cor. 16, 7. 2 Cor. 11, 19. 20; or 
 where the latter clause is dependent on the 
 former, Matt. 10, 19. 20. Mark 6, 52. John 
 5, 21. 22. Acts 2, 15 ; or where two different 
 causes are assigned, Matt. 6, 32. 18, 10. 1 1 . 
 Rom. 16, 18. 19. In similar circumstances, 
 yap is also found in three consecutive 
 clauses, Mark 9, 39. 40. 41. Matt. 16, 25. 
 27. Luke 9, 24. 25. 26. Acts 26, 26. 1 Cor. 
 9, 16. al. So Matt. 26, 10-12, where tpyov 
 yap and fiaXovaa yap refer to the act of the 
 woman, and irdvroTf yap to the objection of 
 the disciples. The yap is also sometimes 
 repeated, where the writer again takes up a 
 sentence which began with yap and was 
 interrupted, as Rom. 15, 26. 27. 2 Cor. 5, 
 2. 4. Very often also yap stands in con 
 nection with other particles, where however 
 each particle retains its own separate force 
 and signification ; so eav ydp, for if, Matt. 5, 
 46. 6, 14 ; ei yap, for if, Rom. 3, 7. 4, 14 ; 
 I8ov ydp,forlo,forbehold,liuke 1,44. 48. 
 17, 21. 2 Cor. 7, 11 ; Kal yap, for also, for 
 . . . too, for even, Matt. 26, 73. Mark 10, 45. 
 Luke 6, 32-34. John 4, 23. 45. Acts 19, 
 40. Rom. 11, 1. al. (Luc. D. Mort. 22. 2. 
 Xen. An. 2. 5. 5. ib. 3. 3. 4.) Or also yap 
 icat. for also, Acts 17, 28 rov yap Kal ytvos 
 ca-pfv. 2 Cor. 2, 9; p.fv yap, for indeed, 
 Acts 28, 22. 2 Cor. 9, 1. 11,4. Heb. 8, 4. 
 6, 16; or also followed by e adversative, 
 Acts 23, 8. 1 Cor. 11, 7 dvfjp utv yap 
 (comp. v. 4) ... yvvr) 8e KT\. Heb. 12, 20 ; 
 but 8e omitted Rom. 3, 2. 1 Cor. 11, 18 ; 
 HTJ yap c. imperat. for let not, James 1,7; 
 ou yap, for ... not, Matt. 10, 20. Mark 6, 
 52. Luke 8, 17. John 3, 17. 34. 7, 1. Rom. 
 2, 11. 1 Cor. 2, 2. Gal. 4, 30. Heb. 4, 15. 
 Rev. 3, 2. al. saep. (Palaeph. F. 31. Xen. 
 An. 3. 4. 36.) ouS yap, for neither, John 
 5,22. 7, 6. 8, 42. Rom. 8,7. Gal. 1, 12. 6, 
 13. (Hdian. 8. 4. 24.) ovre yap, for nei 
 ther, Luke 20, 36. 1 Cor. 8, 8. 1 Thess. 2, 5. 
 b) Elliptical ly, where the clause to which 
 
 yap refers is omitted and is to be supplied in 
 thought ; comp. Buttm. 1. c. In this case 
 it merely assigns the motive for an opinion 
 or judgment, etc. Matt. 2, 2 ivhere is he 
 who is lorn king of the Jews 1 [he must be 
 already born.] etSo/i y ap avrov TOV dart pa, 
 FOR we hare seen his star. Matt. 22, 28 [we 
 cannot tell,] -ndvres yap f&xov avrrjv, FOR they 
 all had her. Mark 5, 42 [and this she might 
 well do,] rjif yap truiv 8&>8eKa, FOR she was 
 twehe years old. Luke 9, 26 [and so will it 
 be with him who cometh not after me.] os 
 yap an arpatjfmfftg p.e KT\. FOR whosoever 
 shall be ashamed of me, etc. John 4, 44 he 
 departed into Galilee, [not indeed at first to 
 Nazareth his Trarpij,] avros yap irjcrovs 
 KT\. FOR Jesus himself testified, comp. Luke 
 4, 16 sq. John 9, 30 [why speak ye thus ?] 
 lv yap TOUTW Savuacrrov e<TTiv KT\. (Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 2. 6.) Acts 4, 27 [and all this 
 has now been fulfilled,] <rvvf)x%T]a-av yap 
 eV dXrj^fias KT\. 19, 37. 22, 26. Rom. 2, 
 24 [yea, all these things ye do.] TO yap ovo- 
 p.a rX. 4, 2. 8, 18 [yea, I say, suffer with 
 him,] Xoyibp.ai -yap KT\. v. 20. 14, 10 
 [this ought not so to be,] ivavres yap KT\. 15, 
 4. 1 Cor. 10, 1 [in like manner take ye 
 heed,] ov Se Xw yap KT\. 2 Cor. 9, 7 [dXX 
 tXapair,] iXapoi/ yap /crX. 12, 6 [I might 
 indeed do this,] e av yap *crX. 1 Thess. 2, 1 
 (comp. 1,9). 2 Thess. 3, 11. Heb. 7, 11 [as 
 some may have thought,] 6 Xaos yap KT\. 
 for under it the people received the laic. v. 13 
 [and truly this change has taken place,] 
 e <p ov yap KT\. James 3, 7. al. saep. So Plato 
 Conv. 194. a, [crv p.ev 8vvacrat Sappeli/,] xa- 
 \a>s yap avros qyawcrat. With other parti 
 cles, each retaining its own separate force 
 and signification ; comp. above in lett a. 
 So Kal yap, for also, for . . . too, for even ; 
 Matt. 8, 9 and Luke 7, 8 [and this I know 
 from my own case.] KOI yap eyo> aiftpanros 
 flat, FOR / too am a man under authority. 
 Matt. 15, 27 and Mark 7, 28 vat, Kvpte, KOI 
 ydp TO. Kwdpta KT\. yea, Lord, [yet deny me 
 not,] FOR even the dogs do eat, etc. 2 Cor. 3, 
 10 [and so it is,] Kal yap ov8e KT\. 5, 2. 13, 
 4 [and so it is with us,] KOI yap rjue is KT\. 
 Phil. 2, 27 [and ye heard truly,] Kal yap 
 rio-%tvr]<T(. 1 Thess. 3, 4. Also at v ydp 
 for indeed; Rom. 2,25 [in vain then thou 
 claimest to be a Jew, v. 17 sq.] Treptro/u) 
 fitv yap oxpeXtl KT\. Acts 1 3, 36 [now this 
 is not said of David,] AauiS pev yap KT\. 
 1 Cor. 5, 3. 2 Cor. 9, 1 ; with 8<f following, 
 Heb. 7, 18. 19 [there is then such a change,] 
 d?StTT)(Tts p-fv ydp . . . eTTticrayatyf) 8e *rX. 
 FOR indeed there is an annulment, etc. Also 
 ov ydp, for .. . not, Matt. 9,13 [and for this 
 
138 
 
 ye 
 
 end am I also come,] ov yap ?/\Zov KT\. 
 Mark 9. 6 [he spake this unwittingly,] ov 
 yap rj8fi ri XaX 770-77, /or he knew not what to 
 say. Luke 6, 43. Acts 4, 20 [and forbid us 
 not,] ov fiwa/ie3a yap KT\. Rom. 8, 15. 
 
 2. EPEXEGETICAL or explanatory, where 
 it introduces in more detail what has been 
 before announced; like Engl. namely, to 
 wit, that is to say, for example ; Buttm. 
 149. m. 17. Kiihner $ 324. 2. Gr. Gram. 
 754. 1 . /3. a) After demonstr. ovrws, as in 
 classic Greek ; Matt. 1, 18 rov Se I. X. 77 
 yeveo~is ovrcas fjv fj.vrja Tfv Sfimis yap KT\. 
 So Jos. B. J. 7. 3. 3 init. Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 6. 
 Ag. 3. 2. Plato Protag. 320. c. b) Less 
 strictly, where it introduces by way of ex 
 planation the reason or motive of what pre 
 cedes, that is to say, for, since ; Matt. 3, 3 
 the kingdom of heaven is at hand, ovros ydo 
 fOTiv KrX.for this is he, etc. 24, 38. Luke 8, 
 40. John 6, 64. 20,9. Acts 28, 20. Rom. 1, 
 18.6,19. iCor. 7, 7. Gal. 2, 12. Phil. 2, 5. 
 Heb. 1,5. 2,8. 7, 1 . al. ssep. So p,j) yap 1 Pet. 
 
 4, 15. In this way too ydp serves to intro 
 duce parenthetic explanatory clauses ; Mark 
 
 6, 14 Km r/Kovcrev 6 j3a<n\(vs trlpmSrjs (<pave- 
 f>6v yap eyevero TO ovop.a avrov) Kal fXeyev. 
 
 7, 3. John 4, 8. 9. Acts 13, 8. 18, 3. 18. 
 Rom. 7, 1. 1 Cor. 16, 5. 2 Cor. 5, 7. al. 
 Soph. Antig. 178. Xen. An. 7. 1. 29. Plato 
 Phaedo 116. c. 
 
 3. INTENSIVE, where it merely serves to 
 strengthen a clause, like Engl. why, then, 
 truly; Matth. $ 615. Buttm. 5 149. m. 17. 
 a) With interrogatives and in questions, 
 where originally yea or nay may have been 
 implied; e.g. /AT) yap, John7,41 fj.rjyap e< 
 TTJS TaX. 6 Xpia-ros epxerai, doth then Christ 
 come out of Galilee ? 1 Cor. 11,22; ir>s 
 ydp, how then? Acts 8,31; ris ydp, 
 Acts 19, 35 ris ydp ecrriv av^panros, what 
 man is there then, etc. ri ydp, what then? 
 Rom. 3, 3. Phil. 1, 18 ; and so ri yap KUKW 
 eitoirjo-fv, what evil then hath he done, or : 
 why, what evil hath he done, Matt. 27, 23. 
 Mark 15, 14. Luke 23, 22. But very often 
 ydp here retains its primary sense, as in no. 
 1 ; so 1 Cor. 10, 29. James 4, 14. Matt. 9, 
 
 5. 16, 26. al. b) In responses, some word 
 of assent or dissent having been implied 
 before it, as assuredly, not at all, or the like ; 
 1 Cor. 9, 9. 10, ev yap TW VO/JLCO . . . fit f)p-as 
 yap fypd(prj. Gal. 1, 10. 1 Thess. 2, 20. 
 (Luc. Hermot. 10. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 9.) 
 Also ov ydp, no then, no indeed, Acts 16, 
 37. So Luc. D. Mort. 24. 3. + 
 
 jaaTijp, repos, rpos, 17, the belly, genr. 
 Sept. for -jtsa Num. 5, 22. Xen. Mem. 1. 
 3. 6. Hence in N. T< by synecd. 
 
 1. the stomach, paunch, as the receptacle 
 of food ; (pr. Sept. for "|23 Job 15, 2 
 Hdian. 1. 6. 2 ;) meton. a glutton, gorman 
 dizer, so in the hexameter of Epimenides, 
 Tit. 1, 12 : 
 
 KpTJTfs ael \l/evCTai KO.KO. bypia. yaffrfpes apyai, 
 
 the Cretans are always liars, evil beasts, 
 slow bellies, i. e. lazy gormandizers. So 
 yaorp/p-apyos Plato Eryx. 405. e ; yao-rpis 
 Ml V. H. 1. 28; yaa-rpi8ov\os Diod. Sic. 
 II. p. 549. Wess. Hesych. yao-repes olov 
 
 TpOtpf/S p.OVT)S eVl/LieXoup.ei Ot. 
 
 2. the womb, Luke 1, 31. Sept. for "JE3 
 Gen. 25, 23. So Diod. Sic. 4. 33. Plato 
 Legg. 792. e. Hence ev yao-rpl e^eu/, 
 to lie with child, Matt. 1, 18. 23. 24, 19. 
 Mark 13, 17. Luke 21, 23. 1 Thess. 5, 3. 
 Rev. 12, 2. Sept. for fTiri Gen. 16, 4. 2 K. 
 8, 11. So Pausan. 4. 9. 5. Hdot. 3, 32. 
 
 ye. an enclitic particle, which serves to 
 strengthen or render more emphatic the word 
 to which it is appended, by placing it in 
 antithesis to other words, and thus fixing 
 the attention upon it ; e. g. a part in refer 
 ence to a whole, a single object in refer 
 ence to many, a less in reference to a greater, 
 and vice versa. Hence it often cannot be 
 rendered in English, but must be expressed 
 by a stronger emphasis in pronunciation, or 
 by the tone of voice ; though its general 
 meaning may be frequently given by at 
 least, at any rate, indeed, even, or the like. 
 See Passow s. v. Herm. ad Vig. p. 824 sq. 
 Buttm. 149. m. 25. Kiihn. $ 317. 2. Gr. 
 Gram. 703. Matth. 602. 
 
 1. Simply, as connected with a noun, 
 pronoun, or verb. a) As giving emphasis 
 to the less in antith. with the greater ; 
 Luke 11, 8 though he will not rise and give 
 him because he is his friend, Sid ye TTJV dvai- 
 Sfiav avrov KT\. yet because of his impor 
 tunity indeed, he will rise, etc. 18, 5 8id ye 
 TO Trapfx fiv M KOTTOV, yet because indeed 
 this widow troubleth me. So Sept. Job 30, 
 24. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 4 8id ye KT\. b) Vice 
 versa, the greater in antith. with the less ; 
 Rom. 8, 32 os ye rov idiov viov OVK. e<pei- 
 a-aro KT\. he who indeed spared not his own 
 Son . . . how shall he not with him, etc. So 
 Eurip. Med. 1358. Luc. D. Deor. 17. 2. 
 c) In wishing ; 1 Cor. 4, 8 KCU 6(p(\6v ye 
 e jSao-iXeuo-are, and I would indeed (or at 
 least) ye did reign. See Hartung Lehr. v. d. 
 Part. I. p. 372. Herm. ad Vig. p. 825. 
 
 2. More freq. ye is connected with other 
 particles, viz. 
 
 a) aXXa ye, see in aXXa no. 3. a. 
 
 b) apoye, apa ye, see in apa and apa 
 
139 
 
 c) f i y e , i/ / Zeas/, ?/ indeed, spoken of 
 what is taken for granted ; Henn. ad Vig. 
 p. 831. a) Simply, with the indie. Eph. 
 3, 2 eiyc T)Kov<raTf KT\. if indeed ye have 
 heard, as I take for granted, etc. 4, 21. 
 Col. 1, 23. So Luc. Jup. Trag. 36. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 5. 3. ib. 2. 1. 17. /3) With KM 
 added, dye Kai, if indeed also, c. indie. 
 2 Cor. 5, 3 tiye KOI evSvcrdfifvot ov yvp-vol 
 (vp&Tjo-on&a, if indeed also (as we may 
 take for granted, i. e. since) being thus 
 clothed we shall not be found naked ; see in 
 yvp.vos. Gal. 3, 4 eryf KOI fiKrj, if indeed 
 also it is in rain, sc. as we must suppose. 
 So ^El. V. H. 12. 9 etyf KOI oi TralSey avrbv 
 atcroCo-t. 
 
 d) ft 8f firj yf , i. q. et fie fir], but 
 stronger, but if not so indeed, if otherwise, 
 else ; serving to annul the antecedent pro 
 position, whether affirmative or negative ; 
 Herm. ad Vig. p. 830 sq. Buttm. 5 151. IV. 
 7. Kiihn. j 340. 4. So after an affirma 
 tive, but if not, otherwise, Matt. 6, 1. Luke 
 10, 6. 13, 9. (Plato Rep. 425. e.) After 
 a negative, where it consequently affirms ; 
 if otherwise, else, Matt. 9, 17. Luke 5, 36. 
 37. 14,32. 2 Cor. 11, 16. So Se ^ 
 Xen. An. 4. 3. 6. Cyr. 3. 1. 35. 
 
 e) Kaiye, and indeed, see above in no. 1. 
 a) As referring to the less, and at least, 
 and even; Luke 19, 42 Kaiye ev rfj fjp.fpa 
 a-ov TavTT). So Luc. D. Deor. 4. 1. Plato 
 Rep. 335. b. ft) As referring to the great 
 er, what is more, and even, yea even ; Acts 
 2, 18 Kaiye eVi TOVS 8ov\ovs p.ov. So Luc. 
 Tragod. 251. Xen. An. 7. 7. 51. 
 
 f) xairoiyf, and yet indeed, although 
 indeed, i. q. ican-oi, but stronger ; John 4, 2 
 AtatYoiye irjcrovs avTos OVK ejSaTrrtfei . Acts 
 14, 17. 17, 27. Comp. Herm. ad Vig. p. 
 837 sq. Luc. D. Deor. 20. 10. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 2. 3. 
 
 g) fjLfvovvyt, i. q. p.e vovv, but stronger ; 
 see in its order. 
 
 h) prjTiye, i. q. fj.r)Ti, but stronger; 
 see in -fTi. 
 
 i/os, 6, Gideon, Heb. ^1* (a 
 cutter off), the deliverer of Israel from the 
 power of the Midianites, Heb. 11, 32. See 
 Judg. c. 6-8. 
 
 yeewa, rjs, fj, Gehenna, hell, i. e. the 
 place of punishment in Hades or the world 
 of the dead, i. q. Taprapos 2 Pet. 2, 4 ; \lfivrj 
 TOV Trvpos Rev. 20, 14. 15; TO nvp TO alta- 
 viov Matt. 25, 41. Jude 7 ; see in art. afys, 
 and comp. Judith 16, 17. Ecclus. 7, 17. 
 Fabric. Cod. Pseud. V. T. I. p. 194, 645. 
 Hence it is a place of eternal fire and thick 
 
 est darkness; comp. Jude v. 6. 13. The 
 name yeewa is the Heb. C3n SO a , the valley 
 of Hinnom, Josh. 15, 8, the narrow valley 
 skirting Jerusalem on the south, running 
 down from the west into the valley of Je- 
 hoshaphat, under Mount Zion. Here the 
 ancient Israelites established the idolatrous 
 worship of Moloch, to whom they burned 
 infants in sacrifice ; 2 K. 23, 10. Jer. 7, 31 . 
 32. 32,35; comp. Jer. 2,23. 19,6.13. Heb. 
 Lex. art. ^ . The valley was also called 
 PB n , Tophet, 2 K. 1. c. Jer. 11. cc. prob. from 
 "1PSFI place of burning. It was appa 
 rently in allusion to this detested and abom 
 inable fire, that the later Jews employed 
 the name of this valley (Gehenna) to denote 
 the place of future punishment or the fires 
 of Tartarus. There is no evidence of any 
 other fires having been kept up in the val 
 ley, as some have supposed ; see Bibl. Res. 
 in Palest. I. p. 404. Buxtorf Lex. 395, 
 2623. Wetst. N. T. I. p. 299. Tholuck 
 Bergpred. zu Matt. 5, 22. So els TTJV yeev 
 vav, els TO irvp TO ao-fieaTov, Mark 9, 43. 45, 
 comp. v. 44. 46. 48 ; els rr)v yeevvav TOV Trv 
 pos, Gehenna of fire, hell-fire, Mark 9, 47. 
 Matt. 5. 22. 18, 9 ; or simply els TTJV yeewav 
 Luke 12, 5 ; et? yetwav Matt. 5, 29. 30 ; ev 
 yeevvr) Matt. 10, 28 ; t>7ro TTJS yffvvrjs James 
 3, 6. Spec, vlos yffvvTjs, a child of Gehenna, 
 belonging to Gehenna as his proper place 
 and portion, Matt. 23, 15 ; comp. Sept. vibs 3a- 
 VCLTOV for Heb. ^^""i^. 2 Sam. 12, 5. Also 
 fj Kpio-Ls TTJS ye(i>vT]s, the condemnation of 
 (to) Gehenna, Matt. 23, 33 ; comp. Jude 
 v. 7. 
 
 indec. Gethsemane, pr. n. 
 of a garden or plot of ground near Jerusa 
 lem, beyond the brook Kidron, Matt. 26, 36. 
 Mark 14,32; comp. John 18, 1. Tradition 
 still points it out at the foot of the mount of 
 Olives ; see Bibl. Res. in Pal. I. p. 346. De 
 rived perh. from Aram. Fi* press, and 
 oil, i. e. an oil-press. 
 
 yeiTCOV) ovos, 6? y, (kindr. yfj, 
 a neighbour, Luke 14, 12. 15, 6. 9. John 9, 
 8. Sept. for p. JJ Jer. 6, 21. Diod. Sic.13. 
 84. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 12. 
 
 ye\da), , f. do-a> Luke 6, 21, earlier 
 f. do-op.ai, Buttm. j 1 1 3. 4. n. 7 ; to laugh, 
 in joy or triumph, intrans. Luke 6, 21. 25. 
 Sept." for ?ns Gen. 17, 17. .El. V. H. 14. 
 36. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 5. 
 
 )?, UTOS, 6. (yeXaw,) laughter, in joy 
 or triumph, James 4, 9. Sept. for pHS Gen. 
 21,6. Luc. Bis ace. 10. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 15. 
 
<ye/u o> 140 
 
 ye/u a>, f. iVa>, (y<=Va>,) to fill, to make 
 full, with ace. of thing and gen. of that 
 with which it is filled; Mark 15, 36. John 
 
 2, 7 bis. 6, 13. Pass, absol. Mark 4, 37. 
 Luke 14, 23. So Pol. 1. 18. 9. Xen. Hell. 
 6. 2. 25. Construed also with ace. and OTTO 
 TWOS, see in OTTO no. 2. f ; Luke 15, 16 ye- 
 /LuVat r?)j/ Koi\iav O.VTOV OTTO Tail Kepariaiv. 
 With ace. and e*c TIJ/OJ Rev. 8, 5. 15, 8 ; 
 so Heb. "jifl x|tt , Sept. TrXqpdo) e*c, Ps. 
 127, 5. 
 
 ye^w, f. nS>, to le full of, to be filled 
 with, c. gen. Matt. 23, 27. Luke 11, 39. 
 Rev. 4, 6. 8. 5, 8. 15, 7. 17, 3. 4. 21, 9. 
 Rom. 3, 14 quoted from Ps. 10, 7, where 
 Sept. for xba c. accus. So Diod. Sic. 13. 
 
 3. Pol. 4. 65. 2. Plato Crit. 117. e. Con 
 strued also with e *c, Matt. 23, 25 ; like Heb. 
 V? ^ Is. 2, 6. Ez. 32, 6. 
 
 yevea, as, fj, (yivopai, ye wo,) birth, Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 2. 8. In N. T. 
 
 1. a generation, pr. the interval of time 
 between father and son, a single step or 
 succession in natural descent; Matt. 1, 17 
 quater, Tracrai ovv yeveal . . . yeveai SeKare cr- 
 vapes. Sept. for Tfo Gen. 15, 16. Deut. 
 23, 3. So Jos. Ant. 1. 7. 2. Pint, de Def. 
 Orac. 11. Plato Phil. 66. c. The ancient 
 Hebrews at first reckoned the generation at 
 a hundred years ; see Gen. 15, 16, com p. v. 
 13 and Ex. 12, 40. But at a later period, 
 like the Greeks and modern chronologers, 
 they appear to have counted from thirty to 
 forty years as a generation, Job 42, 16; 
 more exactly, three generations for every 
 hundred years; Hdot. 2. 142 yeveal yap 
 rpels dvSpav fKarov ered eWi, comp. Pint, 
 de Defect. Orac. 11. Sir I. Newton s Chro- 
 nol. p. 53. Lond. 1728. Hence 
 
 2. Genr. and less definitely, a generation, 
 an age, put for the average duration of hu 
 man life, the period in which the population 
 of the earth is supposed to be successively 
 renewed ; only in Plur. ages, generations, 
 times. So of past ages, Acts 14, 16 eV rals 
 Trapco^Tjuevais y f veals, ?tt times past. 15, 21 
 tK yeveatv dpxaicov, from ancient times, 
 of old time. Eph. 3, 5 erepais ytveals in 
 other ages. Col. 1, 26 OTTO ra>v alavwv KOI 
 OTTO ra>v yeve&v. Of time future, in inten 
 sive phrases to denote never ending dura 
 tion; Eph. 3, 21 els Trdcras ras yeveds rov 
 alfavos TO>V aUmof, comp. in ala>v no. 2. a. /3. 
 Luke 1, 50 tls yeveds yevecov, generations 
 of generations, ages of ages ; comp. in alav 
 and Rev. 1,6. So Sept. for B nifl Tto Ps. 
 72, 5. 102, 25. Is. 51, 8. Comp. Gesen. 
 L^hrg. p. 692. c. Matth. 430. Hdian. 3. 
 
 8. 18. Diod. Sic. 1. 24. Plato Tim. 23. c. 
 Thuc. 2. 68. 
 
 3. Meton. a generation of men, the men 
 of any age, those living in any one period ; 
 so fj yevea avrr) this present generation Matt. 
 11,16. 12,41.42. 24,34. al. yevea irovrjpd 
 a wicked "generation Matt. 12, 39. 45. 16,4. 
 al. yevea aTTtcrro? Matt. 17. 17. Mark 9, 19 ; 
 yevea ovcoXia Acts 2, 40. Phil. 2, 15. Luke 
 16, 8 (ppovi/j.u>Tepoi . . . els Ti]v yeveav TTJV 
 eavruiv, wiser . . . in respect to (heir own 
 generation, those with whom they live and 
 have to do. Acts 8, 33 ryv 8e yeveav avrov 
 T IS 8ir)yr)o-eTai ; who shall declare his gene 
 ration ? i. e. set forth the wickedness of 
 that generation ; quoted from Is. 53, 8, 
 where Sept. for TVn ; comp. Jos. B. J. 5. 
 1 3. 6. Spoken of a former generation, Acts 
 13, 36. Heb. 3, 10 ; of the future, Luke 1, 
 48. Sept. for nin Deut. 32, 5. 20. Jos. 
 B. J. 5. 13. 6. Luc. de Astrol. 20. Dem. 
 1390. 25. + 
 
 <yevea\0y0), >, f. fan, (yevea, Xeyo) ; ) 
 to trace one s genealogy, Sept. Ezra 2, 62. 
 Xen. Conv. 4. 51. In N. T. Pass, yevea- 
 \oyeofjiai, ov/j,ai, to be traced in genealogy, 
 i. e. to be reckoned by descent, to derive one s 
 descent, absol. Ihb. 7, 6. Sept. for ttJrrjrvi 
 1 Chr. 5, 1. 9, 1. 
 
 <yevea\ojLa, as, 77, (yei/eaXoyew,) a gene 
 alogy, a genealogical descent or table, 1 
 Tim. 1, 4. Tit. 3, 9. Sept. for inf. ^rPnn 
 1 Chr. 7, 5. 7. Pol. 9. 2. 1. Plato Crat. 
 396. c. 
 
 yevecrta, &v, rd, (yei/eVtos,) pr. in earlier 
 Greek writers, solemn rites for the dead, fe 
 rine denicales, offered perh. on the birth-day 
 of the deceased, Hdot. 4. 26 ; comp. Cic. 
 Leg. 2. 22. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 485. 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Funus. Later and in 
 N. T. a birth-day celebration, birth-day fes- 
 *m*Z,Matt. 14, 6. Mark 6,21. SoAlciphr. , 
 Ep. 3. 18, 55. Dion Cass. 47. 18. &)3. ib. 
 56. 46. 843. In this sense earlier writers 
 used TO. yev&Xta, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 103 sq. 
 
 ryeveat, 1 ), ecoy, fj, (yiVo/iat.yeVw.) genera 
 tion, procreation, Xen. Lac. 2. 1. In N. T. 
 
 1. birth, nativity, origin, Matt. 1, 18. 
 Luke 1,14. (Rec. yevvrjo-ts.) James 1, 23 TO 
 TrpoVcoTrov TTJS yeveaecos, i. e. native or natural 
 face. . Sept. for n^Mo Gen. 3 1,1 3. SoDiod. 
 Sic. 1. 6, 8. Hdian. 7. 1. 5. Plato Tim. 
 27. d. Spec, of descent, lineage ; so /3//3Xo? 
 yevfo-ea>s, book of descent, i. e. genealogy, 
 genealogical table, Matt. 1, 1. Sept. and 
 nilMFi 1BD Gen. 5, 1 ; nilbin Gen. 2, 4. 
 10, 1. 32. 
 
yeverrj 
 
 2. Meton. origin of tilings, for creation, 
 nature; James 3, 6 (^Awyi foucra TOV Tpo%bv 
 rrjs yevfcreios. felling on fire the ivheel (circle) 
 of nature, the whole creation. Plato Tim. 
 29. e, yevtcre cos KCU Kocrp-ov . . . ap^rjv. Id. 
 Phaedr. 245. e. iravra re ovpavbv iracrdv ye 
 ytvt(Tiv. 
 
 yeverij. ijs. 17, (yivopai, yei/w,) birth; 
 fohn 9, 1 (< yfVfTrjs,from his birth. Sept. 
 Lev. 25, 47. Luc. Hale. 5. Pol. 3. 20. 4. 
 
 yevr)/jui) UTOS, TO, (yivofiai, ytymffuu^ 
 produce, fruit, sc. of the fields, Luke 12, 18. 
 Trap, of the fruits and rewards of Christian 
 virtue, 2 Cor. 9, 10. Text. rec. has in both 
 places yewrj/jui, q. V. 
 
 &>, f. Jjo-o), (ye wz poet, for ye- 
 
 141 
 
 1. to beget, as a father, c. ace. Matt. 1, 2 
 A/3pau/i fyewrja-f TOV icraaK. v. 216. Acts 
 7,8. 29 ; also with e* c. gen. of the mother, 
 Matt. 1, 3. 5. Pass. Matt. 1, 20 TO tv avTfj 
 ytvvrfitv that begotten (conceived) in her, 
 the foetus. Sept. for ^ and "nVin Gen. 
 5, 3 sq. So Luc. D. Deor. 22. 2. Pint. 
 Symp. 3. 4. 3. Plato Conv. 206. d. Trop. 
 a) to gender, to occasion, e. g. /xa^as 2 Tim. 
 2, 23. So Diod. Sic. 18. 54. Plato Rep. 496. 
 a. b) Of a Christian teacher, to beget in 
 a spiritual sense, to be the instrument of 
 one s conversion to a new life in Christ, c. 
 ace. 1 Cor. 4, 15. Philem. 10. Comp. Philo 
 Leg. ad Cai. p. 1000. b, /naXXoi/ OVTOV 77 
 ov% TITTOV Ttav yovecav yfyfvvrjKa. c) Of 
 God, to beget in a spiritual sense, to impart 
 a new life and a new spirit in Christ, to 
 renew spiritually, absol. TOV ytwrjo-avra 1 
 John 5, 1 ; hence believers are said to be 
 born of God (see in no. 3. b), and are called 
 the sons of God; comp. John 1, 12. Rom. 
 8, 14. Gal. 3, 26. Also in respect to the 
 Messiah, the Son of God, the object of his 
 paternal love and care, God is said to have 
 begotten him, i. e. to hare constituted or de 
 clared him to be his Son, espec. by his re 
 surrection and exaltation, Acts 13, 33. Heb. 
 1,5. 5, 5 ; all quoted from Ps. 2, 7 where 
 Sept. for 1- Comp. in art. vlos. 
 
 2. to bear, to bring forth, as a mother, c. 
 ace. Luke 1 , 57 *cal eyewijtm viov. John 1 6, 
 21; ace. et dat. Luke 1, 13; absol. Luke 
 
 23, 29. Trop. (Is SorXeiW yewoxra Gal. 4, 
 
 24. Sept. and *&* Gen. 46, 15. Luc. 
 Sacrif. 6. Xen. Lac. 1. 3. 
 
 3. Pass. aor. 1 eyfvvrfir)V. perf. yfytwrj- 
 pai, to be born, to be brought into life, to 
 come into life, as from parents generally. 
 a) Pr. Matt. 2. 1. 4 irov 6 Xp. ytvvaTai. 19, 
 12. 28, 24. Mark 14, 21. Luke 1, 35. 
 
 John 3, 4 bis. Acts 7, 20. Rom. 9, 11. Heb. 
 11, 23. Sept. for *^i3 Job 3, 2; ^ Ps. 
 87, 4-6. (Hdian. 1. 7. 5. Plato Legg. 958. 
 c.) With adjuncts : so with a predicate in 
 the nom. as rv(p\6f John 9, 2. 19. 20. 32 ; 
 Pa^aZor Acts 22, 28. With OTTO c. gen. of 
 ancestor, to spring from, Heb. 11, 12 ; e*e c. 
 gen. of mother, Matt. 1, 16. (Plut. Agesi. 
 3.) Also f< c. gen. of source or manner, 
 as fK o-apKos John 3, 6 ; ex Tropvdas 8, 41. 
 With f I s c. ace. as tls TOV /coV/iov John 16, 
 21 ; also as marking purpose or end, eij 
 TOIITO John 18, 37 ; &>a ... yfytvvrjp.fi a 
 (Is aAaxrti/. i. e. born (made) for capture, 2 
 Pet. 2, 12. With ev c. dat. of place or con 
 dition, Acts 22, 3. John 9, 34. Acts 2, 8. 
 With KCLTO. c. ace. as KOTO. crdpKa after 
 the flesh Gal. 4, 23. 29. b) Trop. and only 
 in John s writings, IK. 3eov yevvrfirivai \. 
 yeyfvvrjfjifvos to be born of God, see in no. 1 . 
 c. John 1,13. 1 John 2, 29. 3, 9 bis. 4, 7. 
 5, 1 bis. 4. 18 bis. In the same sense, 6 ye- 
 yivvrmevos f K TOV TrvevpoTos John 3, 6. 8 
 f vSaros Kal TrvevpaTos V. 5 ; also yevvrfir)- 
 vai uvca^ev V. 3. 7, see in ava Se v no. 1 . 
 
 yevVT)fJ,a, aroy, TO, (yewaw,) pr. some 
 thing born or produced, a product, i. e. 
 
 1. Of men, offspring, progeny, Matt. 3, 
 7 ytvvfjfiaTa e ^tSveoi , progeny of mpers . 1 2, 
 34. 23, 33. Luke 3, 7. Sept. for l* 1 ^ 
 Josh. 15, 14. Ecclus. 10, 18. 1 Mace. 1, 
 38. Plato Tim. 24. d. 
 
 2. Of trees and plants, fruit, produce, 
 Matt. 26, 29. Mark 14, 25. Luke 22, 18. 
 So Luke 12, 18 Rec. where others yeV^a. 
 Trop. of the/r? s and rewards of Christian 
 virtue, 2 Cor. 9, 10 Rec. Diod. Sic. 5. 17. 
 Pol. 1. 71. 1. ib. 3. 87. 1. Put in this sense 
 for Kaprros only by late writers, Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 286. 
 
 Fevvrja-aper, fj, indec. Gennesareth, Heb. 
 rnss (lyre) Deut. 3, 17, or rrhsa i K. 15, 
 20, later Heb. "O35, Josephus Tewrja-ap B. 
 J. 3. 10. 8 ; pr. n. of a small region of Ga 
 lilee on the western shore of the lake, de 
 scribed by Josephus (1. c.) as nearly four 
 Roman miles in length and two and a half 
 in breadth, and as distinguished for its ferti 
 lity and beauty. It was so called from an 
 ancient city, Josh. 19, 35, which also gave 
 name to the adjacent lake, ri^i3"D j Num. 
 34, 11. See Bibl. Res. in Pal. III. p. 282. 
 290. This lake is also called the Sea of 
 Galilee, Matt. 4, 18 ; the Sea of Tiberias, 
 John 21,1. It is about twelve miles long 
 and five or six broad, and is still celebrated 
 for the purity and salubrity of its waters, 
 and the abundance of its fish. It presents 
 
142 
 
 indeed a beautiful sheet of limpid water in 
 a deep depressed basin, with a continuous 
 wall of hills on the sides ; but the hills are 
 rounded and tame ; and although after the 
 rainy season the verdure of the grass and 
 herbage gives them a pleasing aspect, yet 
 later in the year they become naked and 
 dreary. Its position exposes it to gusts of 
 wind ; but these are not more frequent on 
 the surface of the lake than in the region 
 round about. See Jos. B. J. 3. 10. 7. Bibl. 
 Res. in Pal. III. p. 253 sq. 261 sq. 312 sq. 
 Irby and Mangles Trav. p. 294. [89.] In 
 N. T. f) yff Tevvrja-apfT Matt. 14, 34. Mark 
 6, 53 ; 17 \ifivr) Few. Luke 5, 1. 
 
 yewr)(Ti$, ew j, 17, (yei/ww,) birth, nati 
 vity, Matt. 1, 18 et Luke 1, 14 Rec. where 
 others yeveais. Sept. for "^H Ecc. 7, 1. 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 9. 3. Plato Polit. 274. a. 
 
 r], 6v, (ytvvdw,) born, brought 
 forth ; Matt. 11,11 et Luke 7, 28 ev yevvr]- 
 Tols yvvaiK&v. So Sept. and Heb. ^^ 
 fTSX Job 14, 1. 15, 4. al Diod. Sic. 1. 6. 
 Plato Legg. 923. e. 
 
 yevoS) tos, ovs, TO, (yivo^ai, yeWo,) a 
 race, stock, lineage, in various senses and 
 modifications, e. g. 
 
 1. offspring, posterity, Acts 17, 28. 29. 
 Rev 22, 16. Sept. for 3ni Jer. 36, 31. 
 Horn. II. 19. 124. Hdot. ~3. 159. Xen. 
 Hell. 6. 3. 4. 
 
 2. a family, kindred, stock, Acts 4, 6. 7, 
 
 13. 13, 26. Phil. 3, 5. Sept. and SHJ Jer. 
 41, 1. Hdian. 5. 1. 17. Xen. Cyr. 1/2. 1. 
 
 3. a nation, people, Mark 7, 26. Acts 4, 
 36. 7,19. 18,2.24. 2 Cor. 11.26. Gal. 1, 
 
 14. 1 Pet. 2, 9. So Sept. for D? Gen. 11, 
 6. Esth. 2, 10. Diod. Sic. 1. 4, 19 ult. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 2. 
 
 4. a kind, sort, genus, Matt. 13, 47. 17, 
 21. Mark 9, 29. 1 Cor. 12, 10. 28. 14, 10. 
 Sept. for V Gen. 6. 20. Wisd. 19, 6. 
 Plut. Gryllus 6. Xen. CEc. 7. 19. 
 
 l epacnjvoSi oC, 6, a Gerasene, i. e. a 
 native or inhabitant of the city or district of 
 Gerasa, now Jerash. This city was situated 
 in the eastern part of Perea or Gilead near 
 the confines of the Arabian desert, on the 
 parallel of Samaria, and was one of the ci 
 ties of the Decapolis. It was large, opulent 
 and splendid ; as is apparent from the mag 
 nificent ruins still remaining, which have 
 been described by Burckhardt and others. 
 It is mentioned by Josephus, B. J. 1. 4. 8. 
 ib. 3.. 3. 3. ib. 4. 9. 1. See Reland Palaest. p. 
 806. Seetzen in Zach s Mon. Corr. XVIII. 
 p. 424 sq. Burckhardt s Syria, p. 252 sq. 
 
 Several Mss. and editions read Y 
 va>v Matt. 8, 28, where Rec. has Tfpye 
 and other Mss. Ta8apr]vu>v, which last is 
 read also Mark 5, 1. Luke 8, 26. 37. Ge 
 rasa itself lay so far from the lake, that the 
 miracle could not have been wrought in its 
 vicinity ; if therefore the reading Tepaoyvaw 
 be correct, it must be because the city, as a 
 provincial capital, gave its name to a large 
 extent of territory, including Gadara and its 
 environs ; and then Matthew only uses a 
 broader appellation where the other evange 
 lists employ a more specific one. This is 
 not improbable ; since Jerome says (ad 
 Obad. 1) that ancient Gilead was in his day 
 called Gerasa. Origen testifies that Ttpa- 
 (n)vu>v was the ancient reading, though he 
 did not follow it ; see in Tfpyea-rjvos. 
 
 Fepjearivo?, ov, 6, a Gergesene, Heb. 
 ittJrnj and Sept. Tepyfa-aios Gen. 15, 21. 
 Deut. 7, 1. Josh. 24, 11 ; pr. n. of one of 
 the ancient tribes of Canaan destroyed by 
 Joshua, and of which JosepHus says nothing 
 remained but the name, Ant. 1. 6. 2. Ori 
 gen however says, that a city Tepyea-a an 
 ciently stood on the eastern shore of the 
 lake of Tiberias, and that the precipice was 
 still pointed out, down which the swine 
 rushed; Opp. ed. de la Rue, IV. p. 140. 
 But in the silence of all other testimony 
 this tradition can have little weight ; and 
 the reading TepyfOT)v>i> in Matt. 8, 28, 
 which rests on Origen s conjecture, is 
 therefore l~ss probable than Tepaa-qv^v, or 
 Ta8aprjvS)i>, both of which he testifies to 
 have been ancient readings ; comp. in Tepa- 
 <TT)v6s. Wetst. N. T. in Matt. 1. c. 
 
 yepOVGM) as, f], (yfpovcnos, yepcov,) a 
 council of elders, a senate, Plut. J. Caes. 
 28. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 6. Also the eldership, 
 i. e. collect, the elders runong the Jews, ei 
 ther of the whole people, Sept. for E^E? 
 Ex. 3, 16. 18. Deut. 27, 1 ; or of particular 
 cities, Deut. 19. 12. 21. 2 sq. and later the 
 Sanhedrim, Judith 4, 8 15, 8. 1 Mace. 12, 
 6. al. In N. T. once, Acts 5, 21 TO oW- 
 8piov Kal jracrav TTJV yepcvfriav Ttav viwv l<r- 
 parj\, the Sanhedrim ard (especially) the 
 whole eldership of the chiHren of Israel, i. e. 
 all the elders as being members of the San 
 hedrim, i. q. -irav TO irpfo-ftveoiov Acts 22, 
 5, and ol 7rpecr/3urepoi TOV itrflarjX 4, f>. 8. 
 25, 15. 
 
 yepatv, ovros, 6, an old man, senex, John 
 3, 4. Sept. for "J5J Prov. 17, 6. Hdian. 
 3. 15. 4. Xen. Conv. 4. 17. 
 
 yeuo), f. evo-co, to let taste, to cause to 
 taste, Sept. for Bisbfi Gen. 25, 30. Hdot 
 
yeojpyeh) 143 
 
 7. 46. Plato Legg. 634. a. In N. T. and 
 usually (also in Horn ) only Mid. depon. 
 yevofiai, f. evtro/iat. 
 
 1. to taste, pr. and absol. Matt. 27, 34 
 KOI yevcrdp.fvos OVK ijfeeXe nifty. Col. 2, 21 
 see in art. aWco no. 2. b. With ace. ro 
 v8ap John 2, 9. Sept. c. ace. for B5O i K. 
 4, 29. Ecclus. 36, 19; absol. Luc. D. Deor. 
 4. 4. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 5. 
 
 2. Spec, to taste, to partake of, to eat, 
 absol. Acts 10, 10. 20, 11 ; c. gen. Acts 
 
 23, 14 ni]8fv6s yevcracrSat. Luke 14, 24 
 TOV Sfijrvov. Sept. c. gen. aprov for D2L3 
 1 Sam. 14, 24. So absol. Jos. Ant. 6. 14 T . 
 3; c. gen. Plut. Symp. 8. 8. 1, 3. Xen. 
 An. 1. 9. 26. Trop. i. q. to partake of, to 
 experience, to try ; c. ace. as naXbv pfjp-a 
 3eoC Heb. 6, 5 ; c. gen. as TTJS dcopeas TTJS 
 (Trovpaviov v. 4 ; with ort, 1 Pet. 2, 3 eijrep 
 e yevtrao-Se OTI xpj/oro? 6 Kvpios, in Jillusion 
 to Ps. 34, 9 where Sept. so for CSB ; comp. 
 Prov. 31, 18. (So c. gen. Jos. Ant. 2. 10. 
 1 TU>V ayaSatv. Luc. Catapl. 13. Plato Rep. 
 586. a, ouSe /3e/3ai ou . . . rjdovrjs fyevcrnvro.) 
 Spec. yfvtcr Sai Sai/arou, to taste of 
 death, to die, Matt. 16, 28. Mark 9, 1. Luke 
 9, 27. John 8, 52. Heb. 2, 9. Comp. Talm. 
 nnia CSI3 id. Buxt. Lex. art. c2B col. 895. 
 
 yewpyeo), >, f. ria-co, (yewpyo r,) p^. to 
 till the ground ; then. genr. to till, to culti 
 vate, e. g. rfv yfjv, Pass. Heb. 6, 7. Sept. 
 for rnto rtW i Chr. 27,26. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 33. Dem. 175. 11. Plato Theag. 121. b. 
 
 yewpyiov, iov, TO, (yftopyew,) tilled land, 
 a field, farm, trop. of believers, $eot) yecop- 
 ytov 1 Cor. 3, 9. Pr. Sept. for .Tlia Prov. 
 
 24, 30. 31, 16. Dion. Hal. 1. 93. 
 yecopyof, oC, 6, (yjj, yea, epyaj,) a tiller 
 
 of the ground, husbandman, 2 Tim. 2, 6. 
 James 5, 7. Sept. for "OX Jer. 14, 4. So 
 Luc. Parasit. 14. Xen. (Ec. 5. 16. Spec, 
 also for a/i7reXoupyo y, a vine-dresser, keeper 
 of a vineyard, Matt. 21, 33. 34. 35. 38. 40. 
 41. Mark 12; 1. 2 bis. 7. 9. Luke 20, 9. 10 
 bis?. 14. 16. Trop. of God, John 15, 1 ; 
 comp. Is. 5. 1 sq. Comp. Dion Cass. 595. 
 77 OVK fXaiov, OVK oivov yewpyovcrtv. So 
 T<at. agricolfc Cic. de Senect. 15. 
 
 y>7, yrjs, fj, (yea, yala.) earth, land, viz. 
 
 1. As tilled and productive, earth, soil; 
 yrj ?roXX)7 Matt. 13, 5. Mark 4, 5 ; yrj 17 ^0X17 
 Matt. 13, 8. Mark 4, 20 ; so Luke 13, 7. 
 14, 35. Heb. 6, 7. James 5, 7. al. Sept. for 
 V3X Gen. 1, 11. 12. Dem. 794. 26. Xen. 
 (Ec. 4. 8. 
 
 2. As the surface on which we live, 
 move, and tread, the earth, the land. a) 
 
 Genr. the earth, the ground ; so fK%vi>6p.fvov 
 err! TTJS yrjs Matt. 23, 35 ; Trinrfiv eVl TTJV 
 yrjv Matt. 10, 29. Mark 8, 6. Acts 9, 4. al. 
 Matt. 27, 51 17 yrj e crer2/. 25, 18. 25 expu- 
 ^a . . . eV 777 yfj. Luke 6, 49 otKoS. ol<Lav 
 fir\ rifv yrjv. John 8, 6. 8 typcHpfv els rijv 
 yrjv. Acts 9, 8 ^ye pS;; tz?ro TTJS yijs. Luke 
 22, 44. 24, 5. al. Sept. for Ma-iK Ex. 3, 5 ; 
 TO 1 Sam. 26,7. So Hdian. l. 13. 2. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 3. b) Opp. the sea or a 
 lake, the land, terra Jirma, Mark 4, 1 npos 
 TTJV SaXaircrai eVt TTJS yf/s. 6, 47. John 6, 
 21. Acts 27, 39. 43. 44. al. Sept. for rTi^ 
 Joel 1, 13. So Hdian. 2. 11. 7. Xen. An. 
 1. 1. 7. c) Spec, a land, country, territo 
 ry ; so coupled with a gentile noun, yr/ icr- 
 paijX Matt. 2, 20. 21 ; yfj Xavadv Acts 13, 
 19 ; yf) Iov8a Matt. 2, 6 ; Zo/3ouXcoi> 4, 15 ; 
 yrj AlyvTTTOv Acts 7, 11. 36. 40. al. yfj XaX- 
 8ai(ov Acts 7, 4 ; also Matt. 14, 34. Mark 
 6, 53. al. Sept. and TO Ex. 11, 5. Josh. 
 14,1. (Hdian. 4.11.12. Xen. An. 1 . 3. 4.) 
 With an adj. yJ; aXXorpt a Acts 7, 6 ; yrj 
 eKflvrj Matt. 9, 26. 31. With gen. of pers. 
 one s own country, native land, Acts 7, 3. 
 Synecd. a land for the inhabitants, Matt. 10, 
 15. 11, 24 ; comp. Sept. and "fiX Is. 11,4. 
 Spec, and simply, the land of Israel, Pa 
 lestine, Luke 4, 25. 21, 23. 35. Eph. 6, 3. 
 James 5, 17. Rom. 9, 28 comp. Is. 10, 23 ; 
 also Matt. 27, 45. Mark 15, 33. Luke 23, 
 44. So Matt. 5, 5 ort avrol K\npovop.Tja-ovo-i 
 TTJV yrjv, for they shall inherit (possess) the 
 land sc. of Promise, quoted from Ps. 37, 11, 
 comp. v. 9. 22. 29. 25, 13. Is. 60, 21, where 
 Sept. for y^ U-P ; gee Lev. 20, 24. Deut. 
 1 6, 20. The quiet possession of the earthly 
 Canaan, early promised to the Jews, became 
 afterwards an emblem of the peace and re 
 wards of the righteous and of the Messiah s 
 spiritual kingdom ; see Tholuck Bergpred. 
 ad loc. 
 
 3. the earth, orbis terrarum, the world, 
 the terraqueous globe. a) In antith. with 
 6 ovpavos heaven; Matt. 5, 18 eu>s av Trap- 
 eX37 6 ovpavos Kal 17 yf/. v. 35. 16, 19. 
 Luke 21, 33. Acts 2, 19. Heb. 1, 10. 2 Pet. 
 3, 5. 7. 10. 13. Rev. 21, 1. al. So ra l 
 TOIS ovpavols Kal ra fTrl TTJS yrjs, i. e. all 
 things, the whole universe, Eph. 1,10. Col. 
 1, 16. Sept. and 7^X Gen. 1, 1. 2, 4. So 
 Hdian. 2, 11. 8. Plato Conv. 211. a. b) 
 Spec, the earth as inhabited, the world, i. q. 
 f) oiKOVfJifvrj, Acts 1, 8 fcos ecr^drov TTJS yr/s. 
 4, 26 ot /3ao-iXeIs TTJS yrjs . 10,12. 11,6. 17, 
 26. Heb. 11, 13. Rev. 3, 10. Sept. for 
 TO Gen. 6, 5 ; ^* Gen. 6, 1. 7. (Hdian. 
 1. 2. 9. Xen. Ag. 9. 7.) Hence atpeti/ nji* 
 
144 
 
 C<arjv (TOV TOLOVTOV) OTTO TTJS yrjs,to take 
 away one s life (a person) from the earth, to 
 put him to death, Acts 8, 33. 22, 22. Also 
 Col. 3,2 TO. eVt TTJS yrjs, things on the earth, 
 earthly things, v. 5 ra fj,e\rj TO. eVt TTJS yfjs, 
 i. e. carnal members, i. q. i} <rdp. So with 
 the idea of moral infirmity ; John 3, 31 6 &>v 
 (K TTJS yijs . . . f< TTJS yfjs XaXeT, opp. 6 avu>- 
 3ev fpx6fj,fi>os. So where any thing is said 
 to be done or take place on earth, in the 
 world, i. e. among men, Matt. 5, 13 vp.els 
 fcrTf TO d\as TTJS yrjs. 6, 10. 10, 34. Luke 
 12, 49. John 17, 4. Rom. 9, 17. 10, 18. 
 Synecd. for the inhabitants of the earth, men, 
 mankind, Rev. 6, 8. 11, 6. 13,3. 19,2. 
 So Sept. and fW Gen. 11, 1. + 
 
 yrjpas, aos, coy, TO , dat. yfjpa i yrjpa, 
 also yrjpf i yi ipet after the Ionic manner, 
 Winer j 9. 1. Buttm. 54. n. 4; age, old 
 age, as eV yrjpa Luke 1, 36 Rec. where later 
 editions have eV yrjpei. Sept. tv yrjpa for 
 n ? 1 ^3 Gen. 15, 15; also eV yrjpei Ps. 92, 
 15. So tv yfjpet Ecclus. 8, 6 ; lv yr]pa 
 Hdian. 7. 5. 9. Xen. Yen. 1. 10. 
 
 yr/pa(7K(i), f. dcrw, (yrjpas,) to grow old, 
 to become old and infirm, absol. John 21, 18. 
 Heb. 8, 13. Sept. for -jt Gen. 18, 13. 
 Luc. V. Hist. 2. 12. Xen! Vect. 4. 22. 
 
 rywofjiai, (obs. yevco, earlier and Attic 
 form yiyvopai,) f. yevr]crop.ai, aor. 2 fyevo- 
 fjLTjv, perf. part. -yeyey^eVoy, perf. 2 yeyova. 
 plupf. 2 eytyovav Acts 4, 22 ; also in later 
 writers and in N. T. Pass. aor. 1 fyfvfj^rjv, 
 used like ty(i>6p.T)v, Acts 4, 4. Heb. 6, 4. al. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 1. Pol. 2. 67. 8; comp. Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 108 sq. Buttm. 114. Ausf. 
 Spr. ^ 114. Mid. depon. intrans. pr. to be 
 gin to be, to come to be, fieri, i. e. to come 
 into existence or into any state ; also in aor. 
 and perf. 2, to have come into existence, 
 i. q. simply to be, esse; so that eyevofiyv, 
 eyevrfirjv, and ytyova, often serve likewise 
 as past tenses of elvai. Comp. Buttm. 1. c. 
 and 113. 7. 
 
 I. To begin to be, to come into existence, 
 i. q. to arise, to happen, to become; imply 
 ing origin, either from natural causes or 
 through special agency, result, and also 
 change of state or condition, place, etc. 
 
 1 . Implying origin in the ordinary course 
 of nature, e. g. a) Of persons, to be born, 
 John 8, 58 ; with ?K TWOS, to be born of, to 
 be descended from, Rom. 1, 3 C K o-7repna.Tos 
 Aavi8. Gal. 4, 4 eVc yvvaiKos. Sept. for 
 ^ Gen. 21, 3. 5. 9. So Wisd. 7, 3. Dem. 
 296. 16. Xen. An. 3. 2. 13 eV my v/*s eye- 
 vecr St Kal fTpdcprjTe. Mem. 2. 2. 4 TLVOS. 
 b) Of plants, fruits, to be produced, to grow, 
 
 1 Cor. 15, 37 ; e* TWOS Matt. 21,19. So JEl 
 V. H. 6. 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 9. 4. c) Of the 
 phenomena of nature, to arise, to come, to 
 come on, to happen ; e. g. creta-p-os, Matt. 8, 24 ; 
 XalXaA//- Mark 4, 37 ; yoXjjw; Matt. 8, 26. 
 Mark 4, 39 ; O-KOTOS Matt. 27, 45. Mark 15, 
 33 ; ve(pe\T] Luke 9, 34. Mark 9, 7 ; 
 John 12, 29. (Xen. An. 3. 1. 11 
 So of a voice or cry, tumult, silence ; e. g. 
 <j>avf) John 12, 30. Acts 2, 6. 19, 34; 
 KpavyT] Matt. 25, 6 ; Sopvfios Matt. 26, 5. 
 27, 24 ; o-rdo-ty Luke 23, 19 ; o^icr/Aa John 
 
 7, 43 ; T}TT)O-LS John 3, 25 ; tnyrj Acts 21, 
 40. Rev. 8, 1. (Xen. An. 3. 4. 35 3dpv/3oy.) 
 Of emotions, etc. Luke 15, 10. 22, 24. 
 1 Tim. 6, 4 ; SXtyiy Matt. 13, 21. d) Spo 
 ken of time, as day, night, evening, to come, 
 to come on, to approach ; so T)p,tpa Mark 6, 
 21. Luke 4, 42. 6, 13. Acts 12, 18. al. 
 Trpcota Matt. 27, 1. John 21,4; rj &pa Mark 
 
 15, 33. Luke 22, 14 ; ctye fyeWo Mark 11, 
 19; fyla Matt. 8, 16. 14, 15. 23. John 6, 
 
 16. al. vvg Acts 27, 27. So Jos. Ant. 4. 
 
 8. 41 xpofos. Plato Conv. 223. d, jJ8ri rjp,e- 
 
 2. Implying origin through some agency 
 specially exerted, to be made, created, to be 
 done, like Troielv, e. g. a) Of the works 
 of creation; 1 Cor. 15,45 eyeiHTo 6 Trp&iroy 
 ai/3po>7Toy KT\. Heb. 4, 3. James 3. 9. John 
 1,3; with 8id TWOS John 1,3. 10 ; with 
 c. gen. of material, Heb. 11, 3. Sept. for 
 ana? Gen. 2, 4. Is. 48, 7. Plato Euthyd. 
 296. d, jrplv ovpavbv Kal yrfv ytveo-^ai. b) 
 Of works of art; Acts 19, 26 3eo! oi 8ia 
 Xd-p&i 1 yiv6p.fvoi. So Diod. Sic. 1 . 43 TOV e cc 
 TOV XCOTOV ywo/jifvov apTov. c) Of miracles 
 and the like, to be done, wrought, perfonned; 
 Matt. 11,20 ray troKtis ev ais eyevovro oi 
 TrXeurrat 8vvdp.eis O.VTOV. V. 21. 23. Luke 
 4,23. Acts 8, 13; with 8id c. gen. of 
 pers. Acts 2, 43. 4, 16. 12, 9; 8ia x fl P&v 
 TWOS Mark 6, 2. Acts 14. 3 ; 8ia TOV 6v6- 
 P.O.TOS ITJO-OV Acts 4, 30 ; 8ia TTJS O-TJS Trpo- 
 volas Acts 24. 3; also with VTTO c. gen. 
 Luke 9, 7. 13, 17. 23, 8. Eph. 5, 12. d) 
 Of waste, a plot, a promise, to be made; 
 as diru>\eia Mark 14, 4; eVtjSouX^ Acts 20, 
 3 ; firayyeXia Acts 26, 6. So Xen. Hi. 9. 
 1 1 8aTrdvai. e) Of the will or pleasure of 
 any one, to be done, fulfilled ; Se X^a Matt. 
 6, 10. 26,42. Luke l"l, 2. Acts 21, 14; 
 aiTT]p.a Luke 23, 24. f) Of any occasion, 
 e. g. a repast, to be prepared, made ready, 
 John 13, 2; a judicial investigation, to be 
 made, to be set on foot, Acts 25, 26 ; a change 
 of law, to be made, Heb. 7, 12. 18. So 
 Hdian. 1. 8. 17 yevop.evT]s 8 e^erdcrecoy. 
 g) Of persons advanced to any station or 
 
145 
 
 office, to become, to be made, constituted, ap 
 pointed, Col. 1, 23. 25. Heb. 5, 5. 6 : 20. 
 7, 16. 21. 23 ;, c. dat. commodi, 1 Cor. 1, 
 30. Also ytWo-3at firdvca, Luke 19, 19. 
 So Hdian. 2. 6. 12. Plut. Agesi. 21. 
 Thuc. 1. 104. h) Of customs, institutes, 
 to be appointed, instituted, Mark 2, 27 TO 
 trdfiftarov. Gal. 3, 17 6 ytyovais VO/JLOS. So 
 Xen. An. 1. 1. 8. i) Of what is done to 
 or in any one ; Luke 23, 31 eV rw ^pw TI 
 yfinjTai ; what shall be done in the dry ? 1 
 Cor. 9, 15. Gal. 3, 13 Xptoros 1 yvop.fvos 
 vnep TJ/J.03V Kardpa, being himself made a 
 curse for us, i. e. suffering the penalty to 
 which we were subject. k) Of time, one s 
 life, to be passed, spent ; Mark 6, 35 S>pas 
 TToXXiJr y(vofj.(VT]s. Acts 26, 4 TTJV /3/oxnV 
 /now. 1) Of particular days, festivals, to be 
 kept, held, celebrated, Matt. 26, 2 TO Trao-^a 
 ylvfTai. John 2, 1. 10, 22. Sept. for niS3 
 2 K. 23, 22. So ^Eschin. 89. 42. Xen! 
 Hell. 4. 5. 1. 
 
 3. Implying an event, result, which takes 
 place in any way ; to happen, to come to 
 pass, to take place, to be done, or the like. 
 
 a) Genr. Matt. 1, 22 TOVTO Sc SXov ytyo- 
 vfv. 18, 31. Mark 5, 14. Luke 1, 20 a^pi 
 rjs yfinjTai ravra. 2, 15 TO prjpa TOVTO TO 
 yeyovos. 8, 34. John 3,9. Acts 4, 21. 1 
 Cor. 15, 54. 1 Thess. 3, 4. Rev. 1, 1. 19. 
 al. saep. Heb. 9, 15 SOWTOU yevopevov, 
 death having taken place, i. e. through his 
 death. (Dem. 248. 6. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 25.) 
 In the phrase of aversion: p.fj yevoiro, 
 let it not happen, let it not be, Luke 20, 16. 
 Rom. 3,4. 6. 31. 6, 2. 15. 7, 7. 13. al. 
 Sept. for tibibn Gen. 44, 7. 17. So Luc. 
 D. Deor. 1.2. T Arr. Epict. 1. 1. 13. Plato 
 Legg. 918. d, 6 p.f) irore ytvoiro. Comp. 
 Sturz de Dial. Alex. p. 204. 
 
 b) Followed by a dative of pers. to hap 
 pen to any one. a) With an infin. ex 
 pressing that which takes place, Acts 20, 
 16 OTTCOS fJLTj ytvrjTcu avrw xpoi/oTpt/ST/aat ev 
 T/7 Ao-t a. Gal. 6, 14. So Sept. Gen. 44, 17. 
 Dem. 33. 25. Xen. Cyr. 6. 3. 11. 0) With 
 an adv. Mark 5, 16 Trots fyfvtro TO> Sai/io- 
 vi^ofifva. Eph. 6, 3 Iva ev <rot yevrjTat. With 
 a>s, Matt. 8, 13. 15, 28 ; also Kara n Matt. 
 9. 29. Luke 1, 38. So ^El. V. H. 9. 36 ^ 
 yevoiTo croi OVTO> K(IK)S. Plut. Mor. II. p. 20. 
 y) With a nominative of that which takes 
 place, to happen to, to come upon ; Mark 9, 
 21 <ur TOVTO ytyovfv at>T<i>, since this hap 
 pened unto him, came upon him. John 5, 14 
 iva p.r] "^fipuv T L trot ytvrjTai, lest a worse 
 thing come upon thee. Acts 7, 40. 2 Cor. 
 1, 8. 2 Tim. 3, 11. 1 Pet. 4, 12. Rom. 11, 
 
 10 
 
 25 TTtapaxris UTTO pepovs TW lo~paj)X yeyovtv 
 Acts 2, 43 fytvfTO 8e Tracrrf ^v^fj (pofios. 
 Luke 19, 9. So Horn. II. 1. 188 n^Xfiww 
 8 a%os ytvtro. Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 32 (froftos, 
 os avrols eyeixro. Spec, to come to any 
 one as his possession, to become his own, so 
 that he may be said to get or to have what 
 thus comes to him ; Matt. 18, 12 eav yevr)- 
 rai TIVI di>3po>7r&> e<arbv Trpo^ara, if a man 
 have a hundred sheep. \. 19. Luke 14, 12. 
 John 15,7. 1 Cor. 4, 5 ; with dat. of pers. 
 imp]. John 1, 17 sc. rjpiv. Heb. 9, 22 sc. 
 ov8(i>i. So Xen. Hi. 4. 7. Cyr. 2. 2. 2. 
 
 c) With, prepositions, e. g. en-t riva, to 
 take place or be done on any one, as a cure, 
 Mark 5, 33 ; eis Tiva, in respect to any one, 
 as evil, Acts 28, 6 p.r)8(i> arorrov els avrov 
 yti>6p.fvov. 
 
 d) With an infin. and accus. as subject, 
 i. q. to happen that, to come to pass that ; 
 Mark 2, 23 KCU tytvero 7rapa7ropeue!T3ai a\>- 
 ToV KT\. and it came <.o pass that, etc. Luke 3, 
 2 1 tyevfro 8e . . . dvew^S^z ai TOV ovpavov. 6, 
 1. Acts 4, 5. 11, 26. 14, 1. 22, 6. 17. 28, 
 8 ; ace. impl. Matt. 18, 13. Comp. Alciphr. 
 Ep. 1. 26. Theogn. 639 no\\aKi . . . yiyve- 
 rai evpeiv epy av$pu>v. See Winer J 45. 2. 
 n. Also 
 
 e) By Hebr. /cat eyevero, eytvfTo 
 Se , and it came to pass, in historical narra 
 tive, corresponding to Heb. "Wil ; always 
 with a notation of time expressed by 6Ye, 
 cbr, eV, a genit. absol. or the like, and fol 
 lowed by a finite verb with or without /cat. 
 a) With KOI following, like } VnU ; Matt. 
 9,10 Koi (yevfro avrov dvaKfifj.(vov . . . KOL 
 I8ov KT\. Mark 2, 15 *at rycwro eV TW 
 KaTaKfTo-Sat avrov . . . *at TroXXoi TeXcoi/at 
 KT\. Luke 2, 15. 5, 1. 12. 17 *at eyevero tv 
 fj.ia TO>I> f)fj.fpa>v, KOI avrbs rjv SiddcrKcov. 8. 
 1. 22. 9, 28. 14, 1. Acts 5, 7. al. sxp. 
 Sept. for } T-73 Gen. 39, 7. 13. 19. 43, 1. 
 al. ssep. /3) Without KOI following ; Matt. 
 7, 28 K.a.1 fyevfro 6Ve . . . feTr\T]cro-ovTO ot 
 oxXot. 13, 53. 19, 1. 26, 1. Mark 1,9. 4, 
 
 4. Luke 1,8. 2, 1. 6, 12. al. saep. Sept. 
 for } ^l! Gen. 22, 1. 41, 1. Josh. 3, 2. 
 al. saep. 
 
 4. Implying change of state, condition, 
 place, i. e. a coming into any state, etc. to 
 become, to be made this or that, to come. 
 
 a) Genr. of persons or things which take 
 a new character or form, to become, to be 
 made. a) With a subst. as predicate ; 
 Matt. 4, 3 Iva oi Xt Sot ovrot tiproi ytvavrai. 
 
 5, 45 ono)s yfvrjv Se vloi TOV irarpns. 13, 32 
 ylvtTfii SV8poj>. Mark 1.1 7 Trotijo-co vfius ye- 
 vicr^ai dXtets dv^putnatv. Luke 4, 3. 6, 16. 23, 
 
JLVOfJitti 
 
 146 
 
 12. John 1, 12. 14 6 Xoyor <rap eyevtro. 2,9. 
 Acts 26, 28. Rom. 4, 18. Heb. 2, 17. Rev. 
 8, 8. al. saep. (JEl. V. H. 2. 23. Diod. Sic. 
 2. 20. Plato Phaed. 114. a.) Of a person, 
 Acts 12, 18 TI (ipa o Herpes eyevero, what 
 Peter was become, instead of ri apa rw Ile- 
 Tpcp eyevero, comp. in no. 3. b. y ; so Thuc. 
 
 2, 52 TI yevapai. JEschyl. Sept. c. Th. 297 : 
 comp. Matth. 488. 5. Schafer Mel. p. 98. 
 Also where the predicate is qualified by 
 a particle; Matt. 10, 25 Iva yevrjrai u>s 81- 
 dd<TKa\os avrov. 18, 3. 28, 4; c. dat. corn- 
 modi, 1 Cor. 9, 20. 22. /3) By Hebr. with 
 e is n as predicate; see in els, also Ge- 
 sen. Lehrg. p. 816. Winer j 29. n. 1. So 
 OVTOS (6 XiSoy) eyevrftt] els Ke(pa\rjV ycovias 
 Matt. 21, 42. Mark 12, 10. Luke 20, 17. 
 Acts 4, 11. 1 Pet. 2,7 ; all quoted fromPs. 
 118, 22, where Sept. for tt ttJXlb fi^H . 
 Rom. 11,9 quoted from Sept. for ^ f^rt 
 Ps. 69, 23. Luke 13, 19 eyeveroels bevbpov 
 p-eya. John 16, 20. Acts 5, 36. 1 Thess. 
 
 3, 5. Rev. 8, 11. 16, 19. y) With an adj. 
 or particip. as predicate; Matt. 6, 16 /JLTJ 
 ytWo-Se aK.v Spcanoi. 10, 16 yivecr%e ovv <ppo- 
 vifj.oi. 12, 45 KOI ylverai ra ecr^ara. . X et ~ 
 pova T>V Trpwrcoj/. 17, 2. 23, 26. 24, 32 
 orai/ rjr) 6 K\d8os O.VTTJS yevrjrai aTraXor. 
 Mark 9, 3. John 9, 39. Acts 7, 32 evrpop.os 
 8e yev6p.evos MwucrJ}?, i. e. Moses trembling. 
 10, 4 ep.<pol3os yevop-evos, becoming afraid. 
 Rom. 3, 19. Heb. 5, 12. James 5, 2. Rev. 
 16, 10. al. ssep. So Luc. Nigrin. 38. Hdian. 
 1. 11. 6. Plato Epin. 974. b. 5) With a 
 gen. or dat. of pers. as predicate, implying 
 the coming into one s possession, to come to 
 be of or to any one, to become his, etc. So 
 with genit. Luke 20, 14 Iva rjp.S>v yevyrai rj 
 K\r]povop.ia, that the inheritance may become 
 ours. v. 33 TWOS avr>v yiverai yvvrj (parall. 
 eo-rai Matt. 22, 28. Mark 12,23). Rev. 11, 
 15 eyevero rj /3a<riXfia TOV Kocrp.ov rov KVptov 
 rjp.5)v. So Plut. Agesi. 7 TOVTO A.vo-dv8pov 
 yevrjrai. Xen. Hell. 4. 3. 20 errel 8e r) fj.ei> 
 viKi] AyecrtXdou eyeyevijTO. With dat. Rom. 
 7, 3 bis, yeve crSai dv8pl erepca, to become 
 (married, to belong) to another man. v. 4. 
 So Sept. for ttJ"S$ n^n Lev. 22, 12. Jer. 3, 
 1. So Luc. Gallus 19 noXXaKis A.<nrao-iav 
 yevfaZai TW rvpdvvca. Achill. Tat. 5. p. 323 
 Iva crv, o yeyovas dXXj; yvvaiKi KT\. Plut. 
 Agesi. 11 rrdvra . . . xpu<ri a p,oi yevecrSat. 
 
 b) With prepositions or adverbs implying 
 motion, it marks a change or transition to 
 another place or state, to come, to arrive, 
 etc. a) With eisc. ace. to come to or 
 into, to arrive at; Acts 20, 16. 21, 17 yevo- 
 8e f]fjiS)v els lepo<r. 25, 15. Trop. 
 
 of a voice, rj cpcavrj Luke 1, 44 ; of good, TO 
 evayyeXiov 1 Thess. 1, 5; evXoyta Gal. 3, 
 1 4 ; of evils, eXxos Rev. 16,2. So pr. Hdot. 
 5. 38 ; Kpavyr] y. els Tr6\iv Xen. Hell. 7. 2. 7. 
 /3) With ex c. gen. e. g. to come from a 
 place, e. g. of a voice, <j)a>vt), Mark 1, 11 
 Kal <pa>vT] eytvero t< ro>v ovpav>v. Luke 
 3, 22. 9, 35 ; en impl. Luke 9, 36. John 
 12, 30. Spec. eK p,e<rov yeve<T%ai, to 
 withdraw from the midst, (e. g. from society 
 Plut. Timol. 5,) put for Lat. tolli e media, 
 to be put out of the way, 2 Thess. 2, 7. 
 y) With ev c. dat. to come to or into any 
 state, to become or be made, to fall into ; 
 Acts 22, 17 yevfa-^ai /*e ev K<TTd<rei. Phil. 
 2, 7 eV o/iotwynart aj/S/jcoTrcoi yevop.evos. Acts 
 12, 11 yevo/JLevos ev eavrw, being come to 
 himself, comp. Luke 15, 17. So Pol. 1. 49. 
 8 TU%V 8e ev eavr<a yevopevos. Xen. An. 1. 
 5. 17. 8) With 67rt, to come to or upon, 
 to arrive at ; e. g. rt c. gen. Luke 22, 40. 
 John 6, 21. Also eVt c. ace. Luke 24, 22. 
 Acts 21, 35. Trop. of persecution, Acts 8, 
 1 ; of fear Luke 1, 65. 4, 36. Acts 5, 5. 11. 
 Of an oracle, Luke 3, 2 eyevero pfjp.a 3eoC 
 eVt l<odwT)v. So Sept. for B~^ fTjfi Jer. 
 1, 2. e) With Kara c. gen. of place, to 
 come or go throughout, Acts 10, 37. Also 
 c. ace. of place, to come upon, near to, to 
 wards, Luke 10, 32. Acts 27, 7. So Hdian. 
 1. 9. 23. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 15. f) With 
 irpos c. acc. of pers. to come to; 1 Cor. 2, 
 3 eyev6p.rjv7rpbsvp.as. 2 John 12. Of the 
 word or promise of God, to come to or upon 
 any one ; John 10, 35 irpbs ovs 6 Xoyos. rov 
 SeoO eyevero. Acts 7, 31. 10, 13. 13, 32. 
 So Sept. for irbtj mn Gen. 15, 1. 4. Hos. 
 
 1, 1. 77) With adverbs, e. g. eyyvs, to 
 come or draw near, John 6, 19 ; trop. Eph. 
 
 2, 13. (Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 7.) Also &8e,to 
 come hither, John 6, 25 ; CKCI, to go thither, 
 Acts 19, 21. So e<el Hdian. 4. 11. 13. 
 
 II. In the Aorists eyevonrjv, eyevrj^rjv, 
 andPerf. yeyova, to have begun or come to 
 be ; hence simply i. q. to be, to exist ; so 
 that these serve also as past tenses of elvai ; 
 see Buttm. 114. Ausf. Sprachl. } 114. 
 Perf. yeyova may sometimes also be trans 
 lated as present, / am ; see Buttm. 5 1 13. 7 
 Matth. ^ 505. III. 
 
 1 . Genr. to be, to exist ; Mark 1 , 4 eyeve- 
 TO la>dvvT]s /3a7m o>i . . . fcal Krjpva-a-av, there 
 ivas John baptizing and preaching ; where 
 others take eyevero fiairTifav as i. q. imp f. 
 ej3d7TTie, but less well. Mark 9, 7 eyevero 
 ve(pe\T) eino-Ki.dovo~a avrols. John 1 , 6. Rom. 
 11, 5 \etp.p.a Kar exXoyrjV ^apiros yeyovev. 
 2 Pet. 2, 1. 1 John 2, 18 dvrixpio-roi, TroXXol 
 
147 
 
 yfjovatnv. Rev. 16, 18 a<fi ov ol 
 tytvovro eVi TTJS yrjs. Matt. 11, 26. Luke 10, 
 21. John 1, 15. 30. Plato Rep. 963. c, 
 Ttrrapa dptTris ttdrj ytyovtvai. 
 
 2. As the copula, connecting a subject 
 and its predicate ; see Buttm. { 129. init. 
 Kiihner J 238. 5. 
 
 a) Where the predicate is a subst. or adj. 
 a) In the nominative ; e. g. a subst. Luke 
 1, 2 01 air dpxys vrrrjptTai yev6p.evoi TOV 
 \ayov. 13,2.4. 24,19 os tytvtTo oW/p irpo- 
 (p^-rrjs. Acts 1, 22. 5,24. Rom. 11,34. 
 15,8. 16,2. 1 Cor. 10, 6. 2 Cor. 1,18. 19. 
 James 2, 11. al. (Plato Conv. 218. c.) An 
 adjective ; Luke 2, 2 avrrj fj diroypcXpT] 7rpo>- 
 T7) tytvtTo. 19, 17 OTI tv f\a\i<rrtp TTKTTOS 
 eyivov. Phil. 2, 15. 1 Thess. 2. 1. 7. Heb. 
 12, 8. 1 Pet. 1, 15. 16. Rev. 1, 18. al. So 
 Luc. D. Mort. 13. 1. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 13. 
 With a dat. of person added, to, for, in re 
 spect of whom ; 1 Thess. 2, 8 8i6ri dya-m)- 
 rul T]P.LV tytvrftrjTf. Luke 11, 30 tytvtTo Ico- 
 vds o Tjp.f iov TOIS Nti/eufrais. Col. 4, 11. So 
 in the infin. construction; 1 Thess. 1, 7 
 (Sore yfvto-^at vp.as TVTTOVS Train KT\. /3) 
 In the genitive, denoting age ; Luke 2, 42 
 ore tytvtTO tTwv 8a>8fKa. 1 Tim. 5, 9. See 
 Buttm. 5 132. 7. Matth. } 316. e. So c. 
 ace. err) Plut. de sanit. tuend. 24. Plato 
 Legg. 721. d. 
 
 b) With an adverb as predicate ; Mark 4, 
 10 ore 8f tytvtTo Ka.Tap.6vas. Luke 10, 36 
 ris ovv . . . ir\rj(jLov ytyovtvai TOV tp.Trto-6v- 
 TOS KT\. Acts 15, 25 e8o(v Tjp.lv yevoptvois 
 op.o Svp.abov. 20, 18 nS>s . . . tytvop-rfv. With 
 a dat. of pers. added, 1 Thess. 2, 10 ; with 
 trpos c. ace. added, 1 Cor. 16, 10 Iva d(p6fia>s 
 ytvrjTai irpbs iipMS. 
 
 c) \Vhere the predicate is a preposition 
 with its case, implying a being or remaining 
 in any place or state, e. g. a) With iv c. 
 dat. to be in a place or state ; Matt. 26, 6 
 ytvop-tvov tv B^Sai/i a. Mark 9, 33 evrfj oliciq.. 
 Acts 13, 5. 2 Tim. 1, 17. Rev. 1, 9. (J5L 
 V. H. 4. 16. Xen. An. 4. 3. 29.) So of a 
 state or condition, as iv dyuvia Luke 22, 44 ; 
 iv irvtvp-aTi Rev. 1, 10. 4, 2 ; eV 86r) 2 
 Cor. 3, 7 ; Iv Xprn5, in Christ, i. q. to be 
 a Christian, Rom. 16, 7 ; iv irapafido-ti 1 
 Tim. 2, 14; tv Xoya> 1 Thess. 1, 5. 2, 5. 
 With irpos Tiva added, 1 Cor. 2, 3 KO\ ty<o 
 tv do-%ev(iq . . . tytvop-rfv irpbs vpMs. ^) 
 With p. era c. gen. of pers. to be wilh any 
 one, Acts 9, 19. 20, 18; so 01 ytvopcvoi 
 ptT avrov, his companions, Mark 16, 10. 
 So Xen. Hell. 4. 1. 35. y) With o-vv 
 C. dat. of pers. Luke 2, 13 e yeVero <rvv TW 
 ayye X<u TrX^Sor KT\. + 
 
 f. yva><rop*ii, (obs. yvodt; ear 
 lier and Att. form -yiyj/oxTKo),) aor. 2 eyvatv, 
 perf. eyvtoxa; Pass. perf. fyvao-p-ai, aor. 1 
 fyvd>(T%T)v. fut. 1 yvcoa-^o-op-ai ; see Buttm. 
 \ 114. For Perf. 3 plur. tyvaxav instead of 
 eyvuKacri John 17, 7, see Winer .5 13. 2. c. 
 Buttm. ^ 103. V. 3. 7 o know, both in an 
 inchoative and completed sense ; comp. 
 Heb. S"]? and Heb. Lex. sub voc. 
 
 1. to know, in an inchoative sense, to 
 come to know, to gain a knowledge of, to be 
 come acquainted urith ; where again the Perf. 
 implies a completed action, and may there 
 fore often be rendered as a Present, to knou; 
 as in no. 2; see Buttm. 113. 7. Matth. 
 5 505. III. Pass, to become known ; perf. to 
 be known. 
 
 a) Genr. and construed : a) With an 
 ace. of thing ; e. g. ra p.varr)pta Matt. 13, 
 11. Mark 4, 11. Luke 8, 10 ; TO Se X^a 
 Luke 12, 47 ; ri n-otija-a) 16, 4 ; T<Z irpbs 
 TTJV flprjvrjv 19, 42 ; also John 8, 32. Acts 
 1,7. Rom. 7, 7. 1 Cor. 4, 19. 8, 2. Eph. 3, 
 
 19. 1 John 4, 16. al. Ace. impl. Mark 6, 
 38. Luke 12, 48. 1 Cor. 13, 9. 12 ; also in 
 an indirect inquiry, Matt. 12, 7. Luke 19, 
 15. Sept. and S^n 2 Sam. 24, 2. (Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 8. Xen. An. 1. 6. 7.) With adjuncts ; 
 e. g. e/c TWOS, to know from or by any thing ; 
 Matt. 12, 33 *c yap TOV Kapnov TO 8ev8pov 
 yivojo-KCTai. Luke 6, 44. 1 John 3, 24. 4, 6. 
 (Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 44.) Also ev rourw in or 
 by this, hereby, 1 John 3, 16. 19. 4, 2 ; Kara 
 TI, by what, whereby, Luke 1, 18, So Sept. 
 (v TovTO) Gen. 24,- 14 ; icara ri Gen. 15, 8. 
 /3) With ace. of pers. e. g. TOV SeoV John 
 14, 7. 17, 3. 25. Rom. 1, 21. Gal. 4, 9. 1 
 John 2, 13. 3, 1. 4, 6. 7. 8. 5, 20 ; ino-ovv 
 Xpio-rov, also TOV dti dpxqs, John 1,10. 14, 
 7. 17, 3. 2 Cor. 5, 16. 1 John 2, 3. 4. 13. 
 14; f]p.ds 1 John 3, 1. Pass. (yva>o-p.ai 
 v. (yvd>o~%r]v VTTO TOV 3eo{5, to be known of 
 God, to be the object of God s perfect know 
 ledge and contemplation, with the accessory 
 idea of acknowledgment and approval, 1 
 Cor. 8, 3. Gal. 4, 9. Sept. and ?T r 1 Sam. 
 
 20, 32. (Diod. Sic. 1. 92. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 
 24 yj/oJ3t o-auToi/.) With ace. and tv c. dat. 
 Luke 24, 35 cu? eyj/cocrS?; avTols tv TTJ K\do-fi 
 TOV dprov. With acc. and OTI, by attrac 
 tion, Buttm. J 151. 1. 6 ; Matt. 25, 24 tyviov 
 o-e, OTI o-K\ripbs tl. John 5, 42. y) With 
 OTI and its clause ; John 6, 69 tyvu>Kap.fv, 
 OTI o-v tl 6 Xpio-ros. 7, 26. 8, 52. 14, 20. 
 19, 4. James 2,20. al. (Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 22.) 
 So where o3ej/, whence, precedes, 1 John 2, 
 18 ; or iv TOVTW, by this hereby, John 13, 
 35. 1 John 2, 3/5. 3, 24. al. Comp. Xen. 
 
148 
 
 Cyr. 1. 6. 21. 8) In a judicial sense, to 
 know by examination, trial, to ascertain, c. 
 &CC. Acts 23, 28 fiov\6p.(vos 8e yvutvai TTJV 
 alriav. John 7, 51. So Xen. Cyr. 1.2. 6, 
 7. e) Pass, to become known, ascertained, 
 distinguished, as the sounds of a musical 
 instrument, 1 Cor. 14, 7. 
 
 b) Of things or events, to know from or 
 by means of others, i. q. to learn, to find out^ 
 Pass, to be made known, to be found out; so 
 c. ace. as rovro Mark 5, 43 ; ro do-<pa\fs 
 Acts 21, 34. 22, 30 ; ra trtpi vpStv Col. 4, 
 8 ; TT/V TTIO-TIV 1 Thess. 3, 5. Pass. Matt. 
 10, 26. Luke 8, 17. 12, 2. Acts 9, 24 
 fyvaxr^rj 8f r 2avXo> r] eVi/3otiX)) avrcav. 
 Sept. and JTJ 1 Sam. 21, 2. (Hdian. 1. 9. 
 4. Xen. Cyr. 8. 8. 3.) Absol. or c. ace. 
 impl. Matt. 9, 30 /^Seiy yii/&>o-/cera>. Mark 9, 
 30. Luke 9, 11 comp. v. 10 ; with diro n- 
 vos Mark 15, 45. With on. and its clause, 
 John 4, 1 a>s ovv eyj/co 6 Kvpios, ort rJKovcrav 
 ol Gap. 12, 9. Acts 24, 11. So JEl V. H. 
 10. 15 (iTrcftavcav yap eyvcaa Sr) . . . OTI irtvrjs 
 fa 
 
 c) Of things, words, etc. to know, i. q. 
 to understand, to comprehend, c. ace. as ray 
 TrapaftoXds Mark 4, 13; ra Xeyop-e va Luke 
 18, 34 ; TOV vop.ov John 7, 49. Rom. 7, 1 ; 
 TTJV (ro(piav (ra) row Seou 1 Cor. 2, 8. 14 ; 
 ras 68ovs p.ov Heb. 3, 10, quoted from Ps. 
 95, 10 where Sept. for 511 ; also John 3, 
 10. 8,43. 12,16. 13,7. Acts 8, 30. Ab 
 sol. Matt. 24. 39 KOI OVK eyvaxrav, comp. 
 Sept. and :rn Is. 1, 3. (Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 28.) 
 So in an indirect clause, John 10, 6 OVK 
 eyvcaaav n ra rjv a eXaXet. 13, 12. 28. With 
 ort and its clause, Matt. 21, 45 eyvaxrav, 
 Sri Trepi CWTWV Ae yet. 24, 32 yti/coovcerf, on 
 tyyvs TO 3/pof. Mark 12, 12. Luke 21. 30. 
 John 4, 53. 8, 27. 28. 2 Cor. 13, 6. al. 
 Xen. Vect. 1. 2. 
 
 d) Of things, actions, etc. to know, i. q. 
 to percehe, to discover, to be aware of, c. ace. 
 as Tr)v TTOvrfpiav avT<av Matt. 22, 18. Absol. 
 or c. ace. impl. Matt. 16, 8. 26, 10. Mark 
 7, 24. 8, 17. (Xen. Hell. 3. 4. 8 eyvu r6 
 yiyvop-evov.) With an ace. and participle, 
 Luke 8. 46 e yo> yap eyvaiv 8vvap.iv e^fXSov- 
 <rav an ffjLov. So Plut. Mor. II. p. 19. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 40. With on, Mark 5, 
 29 eyvco ra> crw/iart, ort tarat. 15, 10. John 
 6, 15. 16/19. Acts 23, 6. So Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 3. 5. 
 
 e) By euphemism, to know carnally, to 
 lie with, c. ace. of a woman Matt. 1, 25; 
 ace. of a man Luke 1, 34. So Sept. and 3)11 
 c. ace. of woman Gen. 4, 1. 17; ace. of a 
 man Num. 31, 17. 35. Plut. Romul. 5. 
 Cato Min. 7. Isaeus 20. 5. So Lat. nmi, 
 
 cognosce, Justin 5. 2. ib. 27. 3. Ovid. Met. 
 
 4. 594. 
 
 2. to know, in a completed sense, to. have 
 a knowledge of, to be acquainted with. 
 
 a) With ace. of thing, or other like ad 
 junct. a) Genr. c. ace. Luke 16, 15 6 dc 
 Seoy ywoMTKfi ras Kapftias vp.S>v. Rom. 2, 18 
 /cat ytvuo-Kfis TO SeX^a. 1 Cor. 8, 2. 2 Cor. 
 
 5, 21. 8, 9. 1 John 3, 20. 2 John 1. Rom. 
 7, 15 6 yap Karepyafo/iat, ov yivuxrKw, for 
 what I do, I know not, i. e. I do it not know 
 ingly, not because I know it to be right. 
 Matt. 24, 50. Luke 12, 46. Absol. Luke 
 2, 43. Rom. 10, 19; and so in an indirect 
 clause, Luke 7, 39. 10, 22. John 2, 25. 7, 
 27. Sept. for y^ Job 20, 4. Jer. 3, 13. 
 (Luc. D. Deor. 1. 2. Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 6.) 
 Also by attr. with ace. and ort, 1 Cor. 3 
 20 ; see above in no. 1. a. /3. With an ace. 
 and particip. Acts 19, 35 or ov yij/woTcei rr/i 
 EfpfcriGov TTO\IV veuiKopov ovcrav TIJS p.fyd\T]s 
 Apre /uSor. (Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 20.) With an 
 infin. as object, Matt. 16, 3 ; also infin. with 
 an ace. implied, Heb. 10, 34 yivcaa-Kovrfs 
 fX fiV (vp.ds) favrols Kptirrova inrap^iv lv 
 ovpavols, knowing that ye have for yourselves 
 a better possession in heaven. /3) With ort 
 and its clause; John 15, 18. 21, 17 o-u 
 yivtao-Keis, on (pi\> &(. Phil. 1, 12. James 
 1,3. 2, 20. 2 Pet. 1, 20. 3, 3. Rev. 3, 3. 
 Eph. 5, 5 roCro yap tare yivaxTKOvrts, ort 
 KT\. for this (v. 3) ye are aware of, know 
 ing that, etc. not like yvovres yvuxrecr Se 
 Sept. Jer. 42, 19 ; comp. Winer 5 46. 10. 
 n. edit. 5. (Plato Rep. 366. c.) Imperat. 
 yivcao-KfTe ort, know ye that, be assured, 
 Matt. 24, 33. 43. Mark 13, 29. Luke 10, 
 11. 12,39. 21,31. Acts 2, 36. So yivu- 
 crxfTe a>s Luc. D. Mort. 2. 2. y) With a 
 gentile adv. Acts 21, 37 EXX^i/tort yivu- 
 a-Kfis ; dost thou know Greek 1 Comp. Sept. 
 Neh. 13, 24 OVK fTriyivaxTKovres XoXeZi> lov- 
 Sai o-ri. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 31 eVurrao-Sai 2v- 
 pio-rt. Cic. de Fin. 2. 5 Greece scire. 
 
 b) With ace. of pers. to know any one, 
 to have full knowledge of him ; John 1 , 49 
 TroSev p.e yivuo-Keis , 2, 24 Sta ro ai>r6i> 
 ( l^croOj ) yivaxTKfiv Trdvras. 10, 14. 15. 27. 
 Acts 19, 15. 2 Tim. 2, 19 quoted from 
 Num. 16, 5, where Sept. for 3n;i . So Matt. 
 7, 23 oi SeVore eyvuv v^ds, I never knew you 
 sc. as my disciples. Dem. 539. 25. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 1. 21 ; comp. Hell. 3. 4. 7. -f 
 
 *yXeu/co9, f0 s, ovs, TO, (yXvKvs,*) must, 
 grape-juice unfermented, Plut. Quaest. nat. 
 27. Luc. Epist. Sat. 22. In N. T. sweet 
 wine, fermented, and intoxicating, Acts 2, 
 13 ; comp. v. 15. Sept. for ^ Job 32, 19. 
 So Athen. 4. p. 176. d. 
 
149 
 
 ta, v, sweet, Rev. 10, 9. 10. 
 James 3, 11. 12 vo>p yXu/ev, sweet water, 
 fit for drinking, not brackish. Sept. for 
 pl nn Judg. 14, 14. Theophr. C. PI. 6. 17. 
 2. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 5. 
 
 , rjs,r], (Att.yXwrra,) the tongue, 
 both of men and animals. 
 
 1. Pr. as a part of the body Rev. 16, 10 ; 
 the organ of taste Luke 16, 24. Spec, as 
 the organ of speech, Mark 7, 33. 35. Luke 
 1,64. 1 Cor. 14, 9. James 3, 5. 6 bis; 
 hence to bridle or refrain the tongue, James 
 
 1, 26. 3, 8. 1 Pet. 3, 10 ; comp. Ps. 34, 14. 
 Ecclus. 28, 17 sq. To the tongue is then 
 sometimes ascribed what refers to the whole 
 person, espec. in passages cited from the 
 Heb. poets, where Sept. for -p sib ; e. g. 
 Rom. 14, 11 and Phil. 2, 11 Traera yXcoo-o-a 
 fop.o\oyf)o-erai, comp. Is. 45, 23 ; Acts 
 
 2, 26, comp. Ps. 16, 9 ; Rom. 3, 13, 
 comp. Ps. 5, 10. Sept. genr. for ",i a5b 
 Judg. 7, 5. ^Eschin. 24. 32. Xen. Mem* 
 1. 4. 5. 
 
 2. Meton. tongue, for speech, language. 
 
 a) Genr. 1 John 3, 18 p.rj ayaniafj-ev Xoyw 
 /iTjSe rfi yXw<r077, let us not love in word nor 
 in speech only. Sept. for "p ttib Prov. 25, 
 15. So JEL. V. H. 14. 22. Xen. (Ec. 13. 8. 
 
 b) For an idiom, dialect, spoken by a par 
 ticular people, Acts 2, 1 1. 1 Cor. 13, 1. Sept. 
 and -j-itib Gen. 10, 5. 20. So Plut. The- 
 mist. 29. Xen. Mem. 3. 14. 7. c) For a 
 nation, people, having a tongue or language 
 of their own, e. g. <f>v\ai, Xaoi, KOI yXaicrcrat, 
 Rev. 5, 9. 7,9. 10,11. 11,9. 13,7. 14,6. 
 17, 15. Sept. and Tfeft Is. 66, 18. Chald. 
 ,^? Dan. 3, 4. 7. So Judith 3, 8. d) 
 Spec, in the phrases yXoxrcraiy erepaty 
 v. Kaivals XaXfiv, to speak in or with 
 other or new tongues, Acts 2, 4. Mark 16, 
 17; yXoxrcraiy XaXeiv, to speak in or 
 with tongues, Acts 10, 46. 19, 6. 1 Cor. 
 12, 30. 14, 2. 4. 5 bis. 6. 13. 18. 23. 27. 39 ; 
 Trpocrev^e crSat yXaxro j;, to pray in a 
 tongue, 1 Cor. 14, 14; Xoyot ev yXwcrcr?;, 
 discourse in a tongue, 1 Cor. 14, 19 ; or 
 simply yXcocra-ai, tongues, 1 Cor. 12, 10 
 bis. 28. 13, 8. 14, 22. 26. Here, accord 
 ing to the two passages in Mark and Acts, 
 the sense obviously is, to speak in other 
 living languages; comp. Acts 2,6. 8-11. 
 Others, taking the passages in 1 Cor. as 
 the basis, suppose the sense to be, to speak 
 another kind of language, referring it to a 
 person in a state of high spiritual excite 
 ment or ecstasy from inspiration, uncon 
 scious of external things and wholly ab 
 sorbed in adoring communion with God 
 
 and breaking forth into abrupt expressions 
 of praise and devotion, which are not cohe 
 rent and therefore not always intelligible to 
 the multitude ; comp. 1 Cor. 14, 2. 4. 6. 7 sq. 
 Most interpreters have correctly adopted the 
 first meaning ; while some again suppose a 
 reference to two distinct gifts. See Neand. 
 Hist, of the Planting of the Chr. Church, I. 
 p. 14-19, 155-160. [Germ. ed. 2. I. p. 10- 
 15, 178-180.] De Wette, Handb. on Acts 
 2, 12. 
 
 3. Trop. for any thing resembling a 
 tongue ; e. g. Acts 2, 3 yXoio-a-at o><m TTU- 
 po y, tongues as of fire ; see in diapepifa no. 
 1. Comp. Heb. tt> "p rib Is. 5, 24. In Gr. 
 writers also a tongue, reed, mouth-piece of 
 a musical instrument, ^Eschin. 86. 29. 
 
 yXacra-OKOfjiOV, ov, TO, (yXojo-cra, KO- 
 /* ,) a tongue-box, reed-case, for keeping the 
 reeds or mouth-pieces of wind instruments, 
 i. q. yXaxnroKo/ietoi Lysipp. Bacch. 4. Pol 
 lux Onom. 10. 153, 154. In N. T. genr. a 
 box, sack, bag, e. g. for money, John 12, 6. 
 1 3, 29. Sept. for Th the ark 2 Chr. 24, 
 8. 10. So genr. Jos. Ant. 6. 1. 2. Longin. de 
 Subl. 43. 9. [44.] Plut. Galb. 16. Found 
 only in late writers, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 98. 
 Sturz de Dial. Mac. p. 155. 
 
 yvcufrev?, eW, 6, (yvdfas,) a clothier 
 fuller, one who dressed new cloths, or 
 washed and scoured soiled garments, Mark 
 9, 3. See Diet, of Antt. art. Fullo. Sept. 
 for OM 2 K. 18, 17. Is. 7, 3. Theophr. 
 Char. 19 [10]. 4. Xen. Mem. 3: 7. 6. The 
 earlier form was i/a<pevy, from nvdco. 
 
 i j- / \ 
 
 yvrjcriOSi ia ; ov, adj. (ytvos, yevecnos.) 
 
 genuine, legitimate, not spurious, e. g. chil 
 dren, Hdian. 3. 6. 11. Xen. Cyr. 8. 5. 19. 
 In N. T. trop. genuine, true, sincere ; e.g. 
 of a spiritual child, a disciple towards hj^ 
 master, yvr)(riov T*KVOV tv morei V. Kara 
 TTLO-TIV, 1 Tim. 1, 2. Tit. 1, 4. Also genr. 
 of a companion, fellow-labourer, Phil. 4. 3 
 crvijjyt yvrfcrit. Neut.ro yvrjcriov, genu 
 ineness, sincerity, 2 Cor. 8, 8. 3 Mace. 3, 
 
 19. Pol. 4. 30. 4. Plato Gorg. 513. b. 
 ryvrjaioy?, adv. (yvfjo-ios,*) truly, sincere 
 ly, Phil. 2, 20. 2 Mace. 14, 8. Dem. 1353. 
 28. Plato Phaed. 66. b. 
 
 yvo(f>o$, ov, 6, thick darkness, black 
 clouds, as in a tempest ; Heb. 12, 18 yi/ocpw 
 KOI o-KOT(f KOI SueXX??. Sept. for ^Sn5 Ex. 
 
 20, 21 ; (35 Deut. 4, 11. Ecclus. 45, 5. 
 Luc. de Mort. Peregr. 43 lv peo-a TO> Atyai a 
 yvo(f)ov Kara/Sdwoy. 
 
 yv(t)/J.ri, rjs, 17, (yii>Q>cncco,) >ne mind, thaJ 
 with which we know, Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 10 
 
jvcapi^a 
 
 150 
 
 Mem. 11.7, 9. In N. T. mind, as exert 
 ing itself in various ways, e. g. 
 
 1. mind, judgment, opinion; 1 Cor. 7, 40 
 Kara TTJV ep.rjvyvMp.rji . Philem. 14 x^P * &* 
 njs o-rjs yvtoinrjs. 1 Cor. 7, 25 and 2 Cor. 8, 
 10 yv<afj.T)v Se 8i8a>p.i, I give my opinion, 
 my advice. Ecclus. 6, 23. Hdian. 1. 6. 1. 
 Plato Soph. 225. d. 
 
 2. mind, purpose, plan, Acts 20, 3. Plut. 
 Mor. II. p. 2. Xen. An. 1. 8. 10. 
 
 3. mind, will, disposition of mind ; 1 Cor. 
 1, 10 (v rfj avTfj yva>p.r), in the same mind 
 or will. Rev. 17, 13. 17 bis. Hdian. 2. 7. 
 9. Thuc. 1. 122. Xen. Mag. Eq. 6. 1. 
 
 yvmpL^d), f. tVco, (yva>pip.os, yvaxris,) 
 Att. f. yva>pi> Col. 4, 9. Buttm. $ 95. 7 sq. 
 
 1. to make known, to declare, a) Genr. 
 with ace. and dat. Luke 2, 15 TO yeyovos, o 
 6 Kvpios eyvu>pi(Tv fjfjuv. Acts 2, 28, quoted 
 from Ps. 16, 11 where Sept. for ^"]^- 
 Gal. 1, 1 1 by attract, see Buttm. 151. 1. 6. 
 Sept. for S H ifi 1 Sam. 16, 3. Ps. 25, 4. 
 (^Eschyl. Prom, vinct. 487.) With ace. and 
 npos Tiva Phil. 4, 6 ; ace. simpl. Rom. 9, 
 22. 23. Also c. dat. before an indirect 
 clause, Col. 1, 27. b) Of persons nar 
 rating, to declare, to tell, with ace. and dat. 
 2 Cor. 8, 1 . Eph. 6, 21 . Col. 4, 7. 9. Comp. 
 1 Mace. 14, 28. c) Of a teacher unfold 
 ing divine things, i. q. to declare, to proclaim, 
 c. ace. Eph. 6, 19 ; ace. et dat. John 15, 15. 
 17, 26. Eph. 1,9. 3, 5. 10. 2 Pet. 1, 16. 
 Also by way of putting again in mind, c. 
 ace. et dat. 1 Cor. 15, 1 ; dat. and on 1 Cor. 
 12,3. Sept. for ?T n Ez. 20, 11. d) 
 Pass, to be made known, revealed ; TO P.VQ-TTJ- 
 piov Rom. 16, 26. Eph. 3, 3. 
 
 2. to know, to come to know, to find out ; 
 C. ace. Phil. 1, 22 ri alpfjo-o/j-ai ov yva>pia>. 
 Sept. for "nn Job 34, 25. Hdian. 2. 1. 23. 
 Jfieehin. 11. 8. Plato Phaedr. 262. b. This 
 is the usual signif. in Gr. writers. 
 
 yvoMTlS, f<as, f), (yivcoo-Kco,) knowledge. 
 
 1. a knowing, comprehension, the power 
 of knowing; Eph. 3, 19 yvcbvai T TTJV virep- 
 (3aX\ovo-av TTJS yvaxrtcas aydirrjv TOV Xp. to 
 know the love of Christ ivhich passeth know 
 ledge, i. e. is beyond the comprehension of 
 the natural man ; comp. 1 Cor. 2, 14. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 8.11. 
 
 2. Subjectively, knowledge which one has, 
 the act and result of knowing ; Rom. 11,33 
 <7o(pt a KOI yv<ao-is Seov, the wisdom and know 
 ledge of God, as among his attributes ; comp. 
 Ps. 139, 6 where Sept. for r^ ; as also Ps. 
 73; 1 1 . Hos. 4, 6. So Diod. Sic. 5. 67. Plato 
 Theaet. 193. d. Spec, in believers, the 
 knowledge of religion, of divine truth, of the 
 
 gospel in its various relations ; Rom. 15, 14. 
 1 Cor. 1,5. 8, 1 bis. 7. 10. 11. 2 Cor. 8, 7. 
 11, 6. So with a gen. of thing or pers. of 
 whom we have knowledge, Luke 1, 77. 
 Phil. 3, 8. 2 Pet. 3, 18. Also of practical 
 religious knowledge, e. g. insight, discre 
 tion, 2 Cor. 6, 6. 1 Pet. 3, 7. 2 Pet. 1, 5. 6 ; 
 comp. Sept. and M? 1 ? Prov. 13, 16. 
 
 3. Objectively, knoicledge, that which is 
 known, science, doctrine ; spoken only of 
 religious knowledge, relating to God and 
 divine things ; e. g. as held or taught by 
 Jesus, Luke 11, 52. Rom. 2, 20. 1 Tim. 6, 
 20 ; or also by Christians, where it denotes 
 the clear and certain perception and persua 
 sion of divine truth as revealed in the gos 
 pel, a spiritual knowledge not attainable 
 except as a ^apio-p.a or gift of the Spirit ; 
 1 Cor. 12, 8 co fift> . . . 8i8oTai \6yos o~o(pias, 
 aXXw 8e Xdyoj yvaxTfws Kara TO avrb irvfv- 
 /JM, i. e. the gift of teaching as combined 
 with spiritual wisdom, or as combined with 
 spiritual knowledge, and so Col. 2, 3 ; here 
 yvuMTis seems to refer to the deep and clear 
 perception of and acquaintance with truth, 
 <ro(pia to the higher power of practical illus 
 tration and application ; so the Greek com 
 mentators. 1 Cor. 13, 2. 8. 14, 6. So with 
 a gen. of the object of this knowledge, 2 
 Cor. 2, 14. 4, 6. 10, 5. Genr. Plato Rep. 
 508. e. Id. Phil. 58. a. 
 
 ryV(o<TTr]<;, ov, 6, (yii/a>o-K&>,) a knower ; 
 Acts 26, 3 fir i o~o v . . . p.a\io~Ta yvaxTTTjv 
 ovra ere KT\. by anacoluthon. Hist, of Sus. 
 42. Plut. Flamin. 4. 
 
 77, ov, (yiv<oo-Ka>, eyva>o-p,ai,) 
 known, well-known. a) Of things ; Acts 
 4, 16 yap yvuo-Tov o-rjp.f iov yeyove $1 aiiTuiv. 
 15,18. Also y v to cr T o v tyeve TO, became 
 known, was known, c. dat. of pers. Acts 1, 
 19. 19, 17; with KOTO. c. gen. of place, 9, 
 42 ; yvwo-Tov eorco, be it known, c. dat. 
 of pers. Acts 2, 14 ; TIVI, em 4, 10. 13, 38. 
 28,28 ; rivl nepi TWOS, OTI 28, 22. Neut. TO 
 yvcoo-Tov TOV Seov, what may be known 
 of God sc. without revelation, knowledge 
 of God, i. q. yvaxns, Rom. 1, 19; so Sept. 
 for n? 1 -) Gen. 2, 9. So genr. Sept. Ezra 4, 
 12. Soph. OZd.R. 361. Plut. de primo Frig. 
 4. Xen. Cyr. 6. 3. 4. b) Of persons, yvca- 
 OTOV Tivt John 18,15.16. Subst. 6 yva>- 
 O-TOS, one known, an acquaintance, Luke 
 2, 44. 23, 49. Sept for s^a 2 K. 10, 11. 
 Ps. 88, 9. 19. 
 
 , f. vo-to, Ionic form for Att. 
 or Tov%pva>, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
 358 ; pr. to murmur, in coo. as doves, Pol 
 lux Onom. 5. 89. In N. T. to murmur, i. e, 
 
151 
 
 a) to whisper, to talk over in a low voice, 
 privately, c. ace. et nepi TWOS, John 7, 32. 
 
 b) Oftener with the idea of complaint, in 
 dignation, to murmur, to grumble, to utter 
 sullen discontent; absol. 1 C6r. 10, 10 bis; 
 KOTO TLVOS Matt. 20, 1 1 ; jripi TWOS John 6, 
 41. 61 ; Trpo y Tii>a to any one, Luke 5, 30 ; 
 /irr aXX^Xcoj John 6, 43. Sept. absol. Num. 
 11, 1 ;. (card TIVOS for "pbrt Ex. 16, 7 ; rrepi 
 TWOS Num. 14, 27. So Arr. Epict. 1. 29. 
 55. Luc. Ocyp. 45. M. Antonin. 2. 3 /LU) 
 
 O v, 6, (yoyyufw,) a mur 
 mur, i. e. a) Genr. whispering, low and 
 suppressed discourse, John 7, 12 ; comp. v. 
 13. b) Oftener, murmuring, the expres 
 sion of sullen discontent, complaint, Acts 
 6, 1. So xoapls yoyyvo~iJ.a>v, without mur- 
 murings, cheerfully, Phil. 2, 14. 1 Pet. 4, 9. 
 Sept. for MMbn Ex. 16, 7. 8. Wisd. 1,10. 
 11. M. Antonin. 9. 37. Comp. Phryn. ed. 
 Ix>b. p. 358. 
 
 O v, 6, (yoyyufco.) a mur- 
 murer, Jude 16. Theodot. for "i^J Prov. 
 26, 22, where Sept. \oi8opos, Aquil. TOV 
 
 TITOS, 6, (yoaeo,) a wizard, juggler, 
 Plato Conv. 203. d. In N. T. a deceiver, 
 seducer, 2 Tim. 3, 13. So Jos. c. Apion. 2. 
 14, 16. Plut. de Adulat. et Amic. 22. Dem. 
 374. 20 amo-Tos, yorjs, Trovrjpos. 
 
 ToKyo&d, indec. Golgotha, Chald. 
 Nnbaba, Heb. rtaba 2 K. 9, 35, i. e. a 
 skull, TO Kpdviov, caharia ; see Buxt. Lex. 
 Chald. 440. Hence in N. T. as pr. n. of 
 a place, i. q. icpaviov TOTTOS (Matt. 27, 33), 
 Skull-place, Calvary, a spot just out of Je 
 rusalem, where malefactors were commonly 
 executed, and where also Jesus suffered ; 
 Matt. 27, 33. Mark 15, 22. John 19, 17. In 
 later times this spot has been called a mount, 
 but without any historical grounds ; see Bibl. 
 Res. in Palest. II. p. 17, 18. 
 
 FofJiOppa, as, 17, and Plur. Fop-oppa, av, 
 TO., Gomorrha, pr. n. of one of the cities 
 which formerly stood on the once fertile 
 plain now covered by the southern part of 
 the Dead Sea; Matt. 10, 15. Mark 6, 11. 
 Rom. 9, 29. 2 Pet. 2, 6. Jude 7. Heb. 
 rrviBS . See Gen. c. 1 9. Bibl. Res. in Palest. 
 II. p. 602 sq. 
 
 <yo/A09, ov, 6, (ye p.<i>,) a load, e. g. of an 
 animal, Sept. for K73 Ex. 23, 5. In N. T. 
 the lading, of a ship, Acts 21, 3. So Plut. 
 Quaest. Nat. 7. Dem. 1283. 21. Meton. 
 merchandise, wares, Rev. 18, 11. 12. 
 
 fu>s, 6, (yiVo/xai, ytyova,) a ja- 
 ther, progenitor, Hdot. 1. 94.. Plato Rep, 
 457. d.- In N. T. only Plur. of yovels, 
 parents, Matt. 10, 21. Mark 13, 12. Luke 
 2,27.41. 8,56. 18,29. 21,16. John 9, 2. 
 3. 18. 20. 22. 23. Rom. 1, 30. 2 Cor. 12, 14 
 bis. Eph. 6, 1. Col. 3, 20. 2 Tim. 3, 2. 
 The ace. yowls Matt. 10, 21. al. was used 
 by the KOIVOI, Buttm. { 52. n. 1. Winer $ 9. 
 2. Judith 5, 8. Pol. 12. 10. 3. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 2. 3, 6. 
 
 <yovv, yomTos, TO, (also poet, genit. yov- 
 vos, Buttm. 5 58,) the knee ; Plur. TO. yd- 
 vdTd, the knees, Heb. 12, 12. Sept. for 
 B> ??13 Gen. 30, 3. 40, 12. So Hdian. 7. 
 2. 11. Xen. Cyr. 7. 3. 5. Hence in 
 phrases : a) 3eiy, 3* vTfs, TiZevrfs TO 
 yovdTd, lit. placing the knees, i. e. kneeling 
 down, in prayer or supplication, Luke 22, 
 41. Acts 7, 60. 9, 40. 20, 36. 21, 5. So 
 of the mock homage offered by the soldiers 
 to Jesus, Mark 15, 19. b) Luke 5, 8 
 TrpocreTTfO-e TOIJ yovaai : lr}o~ov, lit. 
 fell at his knees, i. e. embraced them by 
 way of supplication. c) Ka^^TfLv yovv 
 v. yovaTa, to bend the knee or knees, to 
 kneel, e. g. in supplication, Trpos TOV miTepa 
 Eph. 3, 14 ; also in homage, adoration, c. 
 dat. Trf BaoX Rom. 11, 4, quoted from 1 K. 
 19, 18 where Sept. for intrans. DiS-ian-bs 
 Wi3-Xb llfl^. So also intrans. Phil. 2, 10 
 iva ev TG> UVO/JLCITI lr)o-ov TVO.V yovv Kcifi^f, 
 that in the name of Jesus (confessing his 
 name, v. 11) every knee should bow. Rom. 
 14, 11 e /iioi ndfji^rei irav yovv, quoted 
 from Is. 45, 23 where Sept. for S^an -b 
 
 yOVV TTereft), w, f. Tjo-co, (yoW, TTITTTW, TTf- 
 o-eiv,) to fall upon the knees, to kneel to or be 
 fore any one ; so in supplication, c. ace. a- 
 TOV Matt. 17, 14 (Rec. aurw). Mark 1, 40 ; 
 in reverence, c. avrov Mark. 10, 17 ; in 
 mock homage, e^7rpoo-3ei> airoi) Matt. 27, 
 29. Eurip. Phoan. 300. Pol. 15. 29. 9. 
 
 <ypafjLfAa, error, TO, (ypacpw,) a drawing, 
 picture, Ml. V. H. 2. 3, 44. In N. T. lit. the 
 graven or written, i. e. something written or 
 cut in with the stylus, in the ancient man 
 ner of writing. 
 
 1 . a mark, sign, letter of the alphabet ; 
 Luke 23, 38 ypappacn EXX^i/tKoiy. Peril. 
 Gal. 6, 11, see in Tn/XiW. Sept. for P^ro 
 Lev. 19, 28. Diod. Sic. 1. 81. Plato Crat. 
 393. d. 
 
 2. a writing, any thing written, Esdr. 3. 
 9. 13. In N. T. a) Plur. ypap,/xara, 
 letters, i. q. an epistle, letter, like Engl. let 
 ters, Acts 28, 21. Gal. 6, 11, see in 7n;Xt- 
 
152 
 
 KOS. So Plur. 1 Mace. 5, 10. Hdian. 4. 10. 
 3. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 26 Kvagdpei Se arro^owm 
 TO. ypdp.p.aTa . . . evjjv 8e rrj firi(TTO\T) rd8e. 
 b) a bill, bond, note, Luke 1 6, 6. 7. So Jos. 
 Ant. 18. 6. 3 ; of accounts of expenses, etc. 
 Dem. 1202. 2. Lys. 906. 12. c) Also 
 ypdp.p.ara, writings, a book, books, e. g. of 
 Moses, John 5, 47 ; of the O. T. the Scrip 
 tures, 2 Tim. 3, 15. Sept. for ISO Esth. 6, 
 1. So Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 17. ib. 10. 10. 4 ult. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 1. d) Trop. the writing, 
 the letter, i. e. the literal or verbal meaning, 
 in antith. to the spirit, TO Trvevp-a ; spoken of 
 the Mosaic law, Rom. 2, 27. 29. 7, 6. 2 
 Cor. 3, 6 bis. 7. 
 
 3. letters, literature, learning, as contained 
 in books, Acts 26, 24 ; in the Scriptures, 
 John 7, 15. Sept. for "iBO Dan. 1, 4. 
 Ceb. Tab. 34. Plato Apol. 26. d. 
 
 rypapfJ,aTvS) ens, 6 (ypu</><,) a writer, 
 scribe. 
 
 1. Among the Greeks, a public officer in 
 the Grecian cities, whose duty it seems to 
 have been to preside in the senate, to enrol 
 and have charge of the laws and decrees, 
 and to read what was to be made known to 
 the people ; a public clerk, secretary, Acts 19. 
 35. Dem. 485. 18. Xen. Hell. 7. 1. 37. 
 Thuc. 7. 10 6 ypa/i/iaTevy rrjs TroXewy. The 
 office of ypa/i/icn-euy varied much in differ 
 ent places. See Potter s Gr. Ant. I. p. 78, 
 88. Boeckh Staatshaush. der Ath. I. p. 
 198 sq. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 176. Diet, 
 of Antt. art. Grammateus. 
 
 2. Among the Jews, in Sept. like Heb. 
 "iBb the king s scribe, secretary of state, 2 
 Sam. 8, 17. 20, 25 ; a military scribe, secre 
 tary of war, 2 K. 25, 19. 2 Chr. 26, 11. 1 
 Mace. 5, 42. Later, in Sept. and in N. T. 
 a scribe, one skilled in the Jewish law, an 
 interpreter of the scriptures, a lawyer. The 
 scribes had the charge of transcribing the 
 sacred books ; whence naturally arose 
 their office of interpreting difficult pas 
 sages, and deciding in cases which grew 
 out of the ceremonial law. Their influence 
 was of course great ; and since many of 
 them were members of the Sanhedrim, we 
 often find them mentioned with ot irpecrftv 
 repoi and 01 dpxiepfls. Matt. 2, 4. 5, 20. 7 
 29. 12, 38. 20, 18. 21, 15. al. They are 
 also called vop-iKoi, vofj.oo io da-K.aXoi, comp 
 Mark 12, 28 with Matt. 22, 35. Sept. for 
 Heb. fii-iSiO 1 Chr. 27, 32. Ezra 7, 6. 
 Neh. 8, 1. So Ecclus. 10, 5. 2 Mace. 6 
 18. Hence genr. a scribe, one instructed, a 
 scholar, a learned teacher of religion, Matt 
 13,52. 23,34. 1 Cor. 1,20. + 
 
 ij, oV, (ypa<o>,) written, in 
 scribed, trop. upon the heart, Rom. 2, 15. 
 omp. Jer. 31, 33. Eurip. Hyp. Fr. 11.2 
 
 /pdTTTOVS TUTTOVy. 
 
 , T], (ypa0w.) a picture, ML 
 V. H. 2. 2, 44 ; a writing, 1 Mace. 12, 21. 
 Hdian. 1. 17. 9. Thuc. 1. 134. In N. T. 
 fj y p a (p r] , Plur. a I y p a (p a i , Scrip- 
 lure, the Scriptures, of the Old Test. Matt. 
 21, 42. John 5, 39. Acts 8, 32. Rom. 9, 
 17. Gal. 3, 8. 22. 2 Tim. 3, 16. al. Rom. 
 1, 2 ypcxpal ayiai. (Sept. for -H3 Ezra 
 6, 18.) In 2 Pet. 3, 16 some of the writings 
 of the N. T. may be include.1. Synecd. 
 put for the contents of Scripture, scripture 
 declaration, promise, Matt. 22, 29 Mark 
 12, 24. John 10, 35. Acts 1, 16. James 2, 
 23 ; scripture prophecy, Matt. 26, 54 56. 
 Luke 4, 21. Rom. 16, 26. + 
 
 <ypa<o>, f. \lsa, to grave, to scratch, to 
 insculp, Sept. for S^ 1 K. 6, 28. Horn. II. 
 6. 169 ; to sketch, to picture, M\. V. H 2. 
 3. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 13. In N. T. 
 
 1. to ivrite, to form letters, which was 
 usually done with a stylus, so that the let 
 ters were graven or scratched upon the ma 
 terial ; so with els c. ace. John 8, 6 T&J 8am- 
 TvX&> eypa(pev els rf]v yijv. V. 8 ; absol. 2 
 Thess. 3, 17 ourco ypa0co so / write, this is 
 my hand-writing. So Dem. 121. 22. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 2. 20. With an ace. of thing 
 written upon ; i. q. to write upon, to fill with 
 writing, q. d. to bewrite, Pass. Rev. 5, 1 
 /St/SXiov yeypa/xjuei oi ecra>3ei/ KOI onia^ev, a 
 book (roll) written within and on the back. 
 So Hdian. 1. 17. 4 ypd<peiv ypap.p.arf1ov. 
 Eurip. Iph. in Aul. 34 SeXrov. Phoen. 583 
 crKvXa. 
 
 2. With an ace. of the thing written, to 
 write, to write down any thing. a) Genr. 
 John 19,22 6 ytypa(pa, y(ypa(pa. 21, 24 Kal 
 ypd^as TOVTO. 1 Cor. 4, 14. 9, 15. 2 Cor. 
 13, 10. Rev. 1, 19. 10, 4. Pass. John 20, 
 30. 31. (Hdian. 1. 17. 1. Luc. Vit. Auct. 6 
 TovVo/ia. Plato Phil. 39. a, a\rfiri yp.) With 
 other adjuncts : ace. and e t y fiifthiov Rev. 
 
 1, 11 ; ace. and eVt n, as rt TO 
 Rev. 17, 8 (see in /3i /3Xos), r! TTJV 
 
 2, 17, eV OVTUV 3, 12, eVt TO /xeVa>7roi> 14, 1. 
 17, 5, eVi rov p.r)pov 19, 16; also yeypap.- 
 pevos ev TIVI, as Iv ai/rfj (TTpo^TfLa) Rev. 
 1,3; yfyp. eV T<B /3i/3Xi <a v. rrj /3t/3Xw T?;? 
 fcofjs, inscribed in the book of life (see in 
 /3//3Xor), Rev. 13, 8. 20, 12. 15. 21,27; 
 eV T ^Xi o) TOVTW 22, 18. 19. (Plut. Cic. 
 37 TO; ev rdis eTrio-roXals 1 yeypa/i/xeVa.) Also 
 followed by the words or clause written, 
 sometimes with Xeycav, Luke 1, 63 
 
153 
 
 \tyav itodwris e ort TO ovop.a avTov. John 
 19, 21 P.TI ypd<pf 6 jSaaiXevj T(i>v lov8aiu>v. 
 Luke 16, 6. Rev. 14, 13. 21, 5. Absol. 
 Rev. 10, 4. Once c. dat. commodi, Luke 
 1, 3. b) Spec, of declarations, promises, 
 prophecies, ivritten and contained in the 
 Scriptures of the O. T. Pass. 1 Cor. 10, 11 
 TO.VTU . . . typd(pjj Trpos vov Sfcriav vp.(av. Luke 
 
 21, 22. 1 Cor. 4, 6 JJ.TJ vnep o yfypmrrm 
 (ppovflv, comp. 1, 31 and Jer. 9, 24. So 
 with adjuncts ; c. ace. to write about or of, 
 to describe; John 1, 46 ov eypcn|/-e Mwvo^r. 
 Rom. 10, 5 Mo>. ypd(pei rf/v 8<.K<uocrvvr]v KT\. 
 (Comp. scribere aliquem Cic. ad Attic. 
 12. 49.) With on, Pass. Rom. 4, 23. 
 1 Cor. 9, 10. (Xen. An. 2. 3. 1.) With 
 8ta TU>V T?po<f)T]T(av c. dat. incomm. Pass. 
 Luke 18, 31 ; ire pi c. gen. of pers. to write 
 about, John 5, 46. Pass. Matt. 26, 24. 
 Mark 14, 21. Acts 13, 29 ; em c. ace. of 
 pers. to write upon or of, Pass. Mark 9, 12. 
 
 13 ; also eVi c. dat. id. John 12, 16 ; ev c. 
 dat. of place or book, Luke 24, 44. Acts 24, 
 14. Gal. 3, 10. Here belong the formulas 
 of quotation from the O. T. e. g. yeypa- 
 nrai, with 8id c. gen. Matt. 2, 5 ; ntpt c. 
 gen. Matt. 11, 10. Luke 7, 27; also with 
 eV c. dat. of book, Mark 1, 2. Luke 2, 23. 
 3, 4. 10, 26. John 8, 17. Acts 1, 20. 7,42. 
 1 Cor. 9, 9. Heb. 10, 7 ; absol. Matt. 4, 4. 
 6. 7. 10. Luke 19, 46. Rom. 1, 17. al. saep. 
 yeypap.p.tvov ecrri, with eV c. dat. of 
 book, John 6, 45. 10, 34 ; with ov of place 
 Luke 4, 17; absol. John 2, 17. 6, 31. 12, 
 14; TO yfypanp.ei>ov, absol. Luke 20, 
 17.22,37. 2Cor.4,13; 6 Xoyoy 6 ytypap.- 
 p.evos, sc. ev T&> vofKa John 15, 25; absol. 
 
 1 Cor. 15, 54. c) Also to write down or 
 out, to prepare in writing, c. ace. as jSt/SXiov 
 dnocrTaa-Lov Mark 10, 4 ; alriav Matt. 27, 
 37 ; (T7iypa(j)fiv Luke 23, 38 ; rir\ov John 
 19, 19 ; fmcrroXfjv Acts 23, 25. Rom. 16, 
 
 22. 2 Pet. 3, 1 ; /3i/3Xi o John 21, 25. Sept. 
 for =^3 Ezra 3, 8. (Plut. Cic. 37 emaro- 
 \r)v. Id. CECS. 54 bis. Plato Legg. 923. c, e.) 
 Also ypdfptiv (vroXrjv nvi, to write a 
 commandment to or for any one, Mark 10, 
 5. 1 John 2, 7. 8. 2 John 5 ; with fvro\r)v 
 impl. Mark 12. 19. Luke 20, 28. Sept. and 
 2n3 2 K. 17, 37. Comp. vop.ov ypdfaiv 
 JEl V. H. 6. 10. Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 52 ; 
 impl. Mem. 1. 2. 43, 44. 
 
 3. to write to any one, to send or make 
 known in writing. a) Genr. e. g. absol. 
 
 2 Cor. 2, 9 fls rovro KOL eypcr^a. 2 John 
 12. 3 John 13 ; c. ace. of thing, 1 Cor. 4, 
 
 14 ravra. 2 Cor. 13, 10 ; c. dat. of pers. 
 U Pet. 3, 15 KaSSus . . . IlaOXof . . . 
 
 vp.lv. 1 John 2, 21. 3 John 13 TroXXa dx ov 
 ypdfyeiv. Jude 3. Rev. 2, 1.8. 12. 18. 3, 
 1.7. 14 ; c. ace. et dat. 1 Cor. 14, 37 eVt- 
 yivoHTKfTco a ypd(p(o vp.lv. 2 Cor. 1, 13 ov 
 yap aXXa ypd(pop.ev vp.lv. Gal. 1, 20. Phil. 
 3, 1. 1 Tim. 3, 14. 1 John 1, 4. 2, 1 ; dat. and 
 TTfpi nvos 1 Thess. 4, 9. 5, 1. (With dat. 
 Plut. Pomp. 29 ; ace. and dat. Plut. Cic. 37 
 TroXXa Kaiaapi ypd(pa>v.) Aor. eypa^a, 
 I wrote or I have written, referring either 
 to a former epistle, 1 Cor. 5, 9. 2 Cor. 2, 
 
 3. 4. 7, 12. 3 John 9 ; or to the epistle in 
 hand, Rom. 15, 15. 1 Cor. 5, 11. 9, 15. 
 Philem. 21. 1 Pet. 5, 12. 1 John 2, 13. 14. 
 26. 5, 13 ; c. dat. of manner Gal. 6, 11, see 
 in TrjyXtKoy. b) Spec, of letters of informa 
 tion or inquiry ; Acts 15, 23 ypd^ravres Sia 
 Xftpos avT<av rd8f. 18, 27. 25, 26 bis, dcr(pa- 
 \es TI. ypd^rai rc5 Kvpica OVK e^a> . . . OTTCO? o^ai 
 TI ypd\lsai. Also 1 Cor. 7, 1 Trepl 3e 5>i/ 
 eypa^are p.oi. 2 Cor. 9, 1 . + 
 
 ypacaor]<>, eos, ov?, 6, 17, adj. (ypavy,) 
 old wife s, old-womanish, silly, 1 Tim. 4, 7. 
 Strabo 1. p. 16 or 32. a, ypad>8rj p,v3oXo- 
 yiav. 
 
 S>, f. jjo-w, (eyeipa, perf. 2 
 ,) only in the later Greek ; Buttm. 
 5 114 eyei pw. Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 118, 119. 
 Sturz de Dial. Alex. p. 157. To wake, to 
 keep awake, to watch, intrans. Matt. 24, 43. 
 26, 38. 40. 41. Mart 13, 34. 14, 34. 37. 
 38. Luke 12, 37. 39. Sept. for l^ Neh. 
 7, 3 ; igiB Jer. 5, 6. So 1 Mace." 12, 27. 
 Jos. Ant. 11.3. 4. Plut. Mor. II. p. 20. 
 Trop. to watch, i. e. to be watchful, vigilant, 
 attentive, Matt. 24, 42. 25, 13. Mark 13, 
 35.37. Acts 20, 31. 1 Cor. 16, 13. 1 Thess. 
 5, 6. 1 Pet. 5, 8. Rev. 3, 2. 3. 16, 15 ; so 
 tv rfj irpoa-evxfj, to be watchful in prayer, 
 Col. 4, 2. Sept. for ipaj Jer. 1,12. Dan. 
 9, 14. Once trop. by antith. i. q. to live ; 
 
 I Thess. 5, 10 re yprjyopcop,ev ("re KaSev- 
 8a>/xei>, whether we wake or sleep, live or die. 
 
 yvfjLVafo, f. ao-a), (yvp.i o y,) to exercise 
 oneself naked, to practise gymnastic train 
 ing, as one of the athlete, Arr. Epict. 4. 4. 
 
 I 1 ; to take exercise, to train oneself, ib. 4. 4. 8. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 10. In N. T. only trop. to 
 exercise, to train, in any thing, c. ace. 1 Tim. 
 
 4, 7 yvp.vaf (reavrbv irpos (ucrtfifiav. Pass. 
 Heb. 5, 14. 12, 11. (Jos. Ant. 3. 1. 4. Arr. 
 Epict. 1. 26. 3 yvp-vd^ovcriv rjp.ds ol <piXo- 
 o-o0oi eVi TTJS Sfwpi a?.) Pass. c. gen. 2 Pet. 
 2, 14 (capfit av y(yvp.va<rp.fiv]v 7r\(ov(i-iat, 
 exercised, trained, in covetousness. So Phi- 
 lostr. Her. 10. 1 ; see Wetst N. T. ad loc. 
 Matth, } 346. n. l, 
 
154 
 
 JYoy 
 
 yv/J,vacn,a, as, fj, (yvpvafa,} gymnastic 
 exercise, JEl. V. H. 2. 5. In N. T. genr. 
 exercise, training ; 1 Tim. 4, 8 o-oyiariK)) 
 yvp.vacria, bodily exercise, ascetic training, 
 in antith. with v. 7 ; comp. v. 3 and Col. 2, 
 23. So pr. Arr. Epict. 1. 27. 6. Pol. 4. 7. 
 6. Hesych. yvfivacria acrKT)<ns, /xeXer?/. 
 
 <yv/jLwr)TVQ), f. fva-a), (yu/ii/jjn/s, yv/i- 
 rdy,) to be naked, i. e. as in Engl. to be half- 
 naked, poorly clad, absol. 1 Cor. 4, 11. 
 Nicet. Ann. 10. 6 yvpv. on\ov to be un 
 armed. Plut. ^Emil. Paul. 16 yvp.vr)Tfvov- 
 Tts light-armed troops. 
 
 yvfAVos, tj,6v, 1. naked, bare, stripped; 
 pr. of the body, a) Of one quite naked ; 
 Mark 14, 51 eVi yvp-vov upon the naked 
 body. v. 52. Trop. Rev. 16, 15. 17, 16. Sept. 
 for 0-hS Gen. 2, 25. Job 1, 21. So Hdian 8. 
 8. 14. Xen. Ag. 1. 28. b) Of one partly 
 unclad, having on no outer garments, but 
 only the tunic, ^ITOHV, John 21,7. Acts 19, 
 16. Sept. for BinS 1 Sam. 19, 24. Is. 20, 
 2. So Ml. V. H. 6. 11. Xen, An. 1. 10. 3. 
 c) Like Engl. half-naked, i. e. poorly clad, 
 implying poverty and want, Matt. 25, 36. 
 38.43.44. James 2, 15. Trop. Rev. 3, 17. 
 So Sept. and Bins Job 24, 7. Is. 58, 7. 
 
 2. Of the soul, naked, as by possibility 
 existing without body of any kind ; 2 Cor. 
 5, 3 if indeed also (since) being clothed sc. 
 with our house from* heaven, ov yv^voi ev- 
 prj%r}<r6p.(%a, we shall not be found naked, i. e. 
 without a body, implying that our house 
 from heaven will also be a body ; see in ye 
 no. 2. c. Comp. Plato Crat. 20. p. 403. b, 
 fj v/ i X ? yvp-vrj rpv crco/xarov. 
 
 3. Of any thing alone, separate from 
 every thing else, naked, mere, bare, e. g. 
 yvp.vbv KOKKOV 1 Cor. 15, 37. Comp. Clem. 
 Rom. Ep. 1 ad Cor. 24 crrrep/nara anva 
 TTfTTToiKtv els TTJV yfjv ^rjpa KOI yvfj-vd. 
 
 4. Trop. naked, open, exposed to view ; 
 e. g. Tvavra yvfiva TOLS ofp SaXfj.ois avrov 
 Heb. 4, 13. So Sept. and Bins Job 26, 6. 
 Jos. Ant. 6. 13. 4. Heliodor. 10. p. 601 
 yvp-vfj KOL dTrapaKaXvTTTOS KaTr/yopia. 
 
 jv/jiVOTrjf, T T]Tos,f], (yvp-vos.) nakedness, 
 the state of one poorly clad ; see in yvp.v6s 
 no. 1. c. Rom. 8, 35. 2 Cor. 11 ,.27. So 
 Sept. and trus Deut. 28, 48. By euphem. 
 put for the parts of shame, trop. Rev. 3, 
 18. So Heb. ft^? , Sept. yvp-vaxris, Gen. 9, 
 22. 23. 
 
 yvvcuKapiov, ov, TO, dimin. (yuwj,) a 
 little woman, muliercula ; in contempt, a 
 weak silly woman, 2 Tim. 3, 6. M. Anto- 
 nin. 6. 11. Diocl. a> Bekk. Anecd. 87. 
 
 ryvvai/ceios, f [ a , eiop, (yvvf),) womanly, 
 female; 1 Pet. 3, 7 crvvoiKovvrfs Km a yva>- 
 (riv cos cxtrSej/eorepo) crufiifi rw yvvaiKeto), 
 dwelling according to your better knowledge 
 with the female -vessel as the weaker ; comp. 
 in o-Kfvos. Sept. for gen. M1EX Deut. 22, 
 5. Luc. Philops. 14. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 5. 
 
 ywr], iy, gen. yvvamos, vocat. o> yvmi. 
 
 1. a woman, female, one of the female 
 sex ; e. g. without respect of age, Matt. 14, 
 21 ^copiy yvvainutv KOL 7rai8ia>v. 15,38. Acts 
 5, 14. 8, 3. 22, 4. al. Sept. and B^BS 1 Sam. 
 30, 2. (Hdian. 7. 9. 19. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 
 30.) Also of a maiden, TraiStV/cT?, Luke 22, 
 57 comp. 56 ; and so Sept. for ST^SS Esth. 
 
 2, 4. Of an adult woman genr. Matt. 5, 28. 
 9, 20. 22. 11, 11. Rev. 12, 1. 4. al. 
 
 2. After t^eti , or with a genit. masc. or 
 the adj. vnavSpos Rom. 7, 2, it implies the 
 conjugal relation, e. g. a) Put for one 
 betrothed, a bride, but not yet married, Matt. 
 1, 20. 24 (comp. v. 18). Luke 2, 5. Trop. 
 of the church as the bride of Christ, Rev. 
 19, 7. 21, 9. Sept. and !" Deut. 22, 24 
 comp. 23. So Xen. Hell. 4. 1. 7. b) Usu 
 ally a wife, a married woman, Matt. 5, 31. 
 32. 14, 3. 18, 25. Mark 6, 18. Luke 1, 18. 
 24. Rom. 7, 2. 1 Cor.7,2.al. 1 Cor. 5,1 wore 
 yvvaiKa TWO. rov Trarpbs fX flv i his father s 
 wife, his stepmother. Sept. for ^^S Gen. 
 24, 3. al. SEep. 3X Wfl Lev. 18, 8. So 
 Hdian. 1. 8. 9. Xen. An. 1. 2. 12. c) 
 Also a widow, with x*lP a Luke 4, 26 ; ab 
 sol. Matt. 22,24. Mark 12, 19. Luke 20, 
 29; comp. Sept. Deut. 25, 4. So Plut. 
 Mor. II. p. 33. 
 
 3. Vocat. & yvvai, in a direct address, 
 expressing courtesy, kindness, respect ; 
 Matt. 15, 28 o> yvvai, comp. 9, 22 Zvyarfp. 
 Luke 13, 12. John 2, 4. 4, 21. 20, 13. 15. 
 1 Cor. 7, 16. Jos. Ant. 1. 16. 3. Horn. I]. 
 
 3. 204. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 26. + 
 
 , indec. Gog, Heb. 513, a name 
 applied in Ez. c. 38. 39 to the king of a 
 country and people called Magog (SfaB), 
 situated in the farthest regions of the north 
 (Ez. 38, 15), who are about to invade the 
 holy land. By Magog, ancient writers ap 
 pear to have intended the barbarous north 
 ern nations generally ; whom they also 
 called "S,Kv%ai, Scythians, Jos. Ant. 1.6.1; 
 see Heb. Lex. art. SIW . Winer Realw. art. 
 Magog. Hence in N. T. Gog and Magog 
 are put for remote heathen nations and 
 their kings, who in like manner are to war 
 against the Messiah and his people ; Rev. 
 20, 8. 
 
ywvut 
 
 as, T], a corner, an angle, e. g. 
 a) Exterior, a projecting corner ; Matt. 6, 5 
 (V rats ya>viais runs TrXaTeiwv, i. e. where 
 streets meet, the most public places. Sept. 
 for PI2Q Ex. 27, 2. (Pol. 1. 42. 3. Xen. Lac. 
 12.1.) So at rfffcrapts ycoviai TTJS yijs, 
 the four corners (quarters) of the earth, Rev. 
 
 155 Saiuoviov 
 
 7,1.20,8. Also f] Kt (paXrj yavias, the 
 head of the corner, see in aKpoywidios , Matt. 
 21, 42. Mark 12, 10. Luke 20, 17. Acts 4, 
 
 11. 1 Pet. 2, 7. b) Interior, for a dark 
 corner; Acts 26, 26 ev ycwia, in a corner, 
 secretly. So Hist. Sus. 38. Arr. Epict. 2. 
 
 12. 17. Plato Gorg. 485. d. 
 
 , 6, indec. or AavtS, as in Sept. 
 (AaviS^y, ov, 6, Jos. Ant. 6. 8. 1, 2,) David, 
 Heb. *m (beloved), later 1^-J j pr. n. of 
 the celebrated king of the Israelites and 
 founder of the Jewish dynasty, (r. 1055- 
 1015 B. C.) renowned for his warlike deeds 
 as also for his piety and sacred songs. His 
 history is found in the books of Samuel, 
 from 1 Sam. c. 16 onward ; also 1 Chr. c. 
 12-30. In N. T. pr. Matt. 1, 6. 17. 12, 3. 
 22, 43. 45. al. Heb. 4, 7 ev Aa/3/8, in the 
 book of David, the Psalms. So 6 vibs 
 Aa/3t S, the son of David, descended from 
 him ; e. g. Joseph the husband of Mary, 
 Matt. 1, 20; elsewhere only of Jesus as 
 a title of the expected Messiah, Matt. 9, 
 27. 12, 23. 15, 22. 20, 30. 31. Mark 10, 
 47. 48. al. saep. but not in John s writings. 
 Also 17 pi fa Aa/8, in the same sense, 
 Rev. 5, 5. 22, 16; comp. Is. 11, 1. 10. 
 Hence the kingdom and rule of the Messiah 
 are in like manner referred to David ; as f/ 
 (3ao-iXei a TOV A. Mark 11, 10 ; 6 Spo wy A. 
 Luke 1, 32; 17 O-KJJVTJ A. Acts 15, 16 comp. 
 Am. 9, 1 1 ; 17 /cXeiy TOV A. Rev. 3, 7, comp. 
 Is. 22. 22 and Matt. 16, 19. -f 
 
 at/iOi>tb/Aat, Pass. (8cu /xo>j>,) aor. 1 
 part. Sat^ioi/to-Seij, used in later Greek as 
 Mid. and Pass, of baniovduo, Blomfield ad 
 jEschyl. Choeph. 558. Sept. c. Th. 1003 ; 
 to be possessed with a demon ; Philem. ap. 
 Stob. Ed. p. 196 aXXo? KCtr aXXfp 8aip.ovi- 
 ferai Tvfflv. Plut. Symp. 7. 5. 4 uxnrfp ol 
 /xayot roils daip.oviop.evovs Kf\evov<ri KT\. 
 In N. T. i. q. 8aip.6viov fx (iv ^ t have a demon 
 or devil, to be a demoniac, to be possessed, 
 afflicted, with an evil spirit ; found only in 
 the Gospels, Matt. 4, 24. 8, 16. 28. 33. 9, 
 32. 12, 22. 15, 22. Mark 1, 32. 5, 15. 16. 
 18. Luke 8, 36. John 10, 21 comp. 20. On 
 the diseases connected with such posses 
 sions, see in 8aip.6vi.ov no. 2. 
 
 SaifAoviov, ov, TO, (neut. of adj. Scu/io- 
 vtos,) a demon, L e. 
 
 1. Genr. a deity, a god, spoken of hea 
 
 then gods, Acts 17, 18. JEl V. H. 12. 57. 
 Plut. Theseus 15. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 1. 
 
 2. Spec, a demon, genius, e. g. tutelary 
 and good, like that of Socrates, Xen. Mem. 
 4. 8. 1, 6, comp. Dem. 415. 29 ; or also 
 adverse and evil, Dem. 124. 46. Dinarch. 
 24. 4. Hence in N. T. a demon, devil, an 
 evil spirit, i. q. irvtvp-a axaSapTov, an un 
 clean spirit, Luke 8, 29. 30. These spirits 
 are represented as fallen angels, 2 Pet. 2, 4. 
 Jude 6 ; and are now subject to Satan as 
 their prince, Matt 9, 34. 25, 41. 2 Cor. 
 12, 7. Rev. 12, 9. They were held to have 
 the power of working miracles, but not for 
 good, Rev. 16, 14, comp. John 10, 21 ; to be 
 hostile to mankind, John 8, 44 ; to utter the 
 heathen responses and oracles, Acts 16, 17 ; 
 and to lurk in the idols of the heathen, 
 which are hence called 8aip.6via, devils, 
 1 Cor. 10, 20 bis. 21 bis. Rev. 9, 20 ; comp. 
 Sept. Deut. 32, 17. Ps. 95, 6. 106, 37. Ba- 
 ruch 4, 7. They are likewise represented 
 as the authors of evil to mankind ; both 
 moral, 1 Tim. 4, 1, comp. Eph. 6, 12 ; and 
 also physical, 2 Cor. 12, 7 ; espec. by en 
 tering into a person, thus rendering him a 
 demoniac, and afflicting him with various 
 diseases ; e. g. epilepsy Luke 9, 39. Matt. 
 17, 15 ; loss of speech Matt. 9, 32, con 
 nected also with blindness 12, 22 ; raving 
 insanity Matt. 8, 28 sq. Mark 5, 2 sq. Luke 
 8, 27 sq. Comp. Jos. Ant. 6. 8. 2. ib. 6. 
 11. 3. Fabr. Cod. Pseud. V. T. I. p. 538. 
 These evil spirits are spoken of as wander 
 ing in desert and desolate places, Matt. 1 2, 
 43. Luke 11, 24 ; comp. Is. 31, 21. 34, 14. 
 Baruch 4, 35 ; or sometimes as inhabiting 
 the air or atmosphere, Eph. 6, 2. 6, 12. 
 Luke 10, 18, comp. Fabr. Cod. Pseud. V. T. 
 I. p. 759 ; or also as confined in the abyss, 
 Luke 8, 31. 2 Pet. 2, 4. Jude 6. See 
 genr. Stuart on Angelology in Biblioth. 
 Sacra, 1843, p. 117-144. We have in 
 N. T. the following phrases : a) e 10-77 X- 
 3ei/ TO. 8a.ip.6via (is riva, demons had 
 entered into him, Luke 8, 30 comp. v. 33. 
 
Comp. Jos. Ant. 6. 11. 2 TU>V 8aifj.ovio>v ey- 
 HaArfopcyw. Fa.br. Cod. Pseud. V. T. I. 
 p. 673 6 8ia/3oXos oiKfiovrai avTov cos I8iov 
 (TKfvos. b) 8ai[j.6viov f xeiv, to have a 
 devil, to be a demoniac, i. q. Sai/xow e<r3ai, 
 Luke 4, 33. 8, 27. Said by the Jews of 
 Jesus, John 7, 20. 8, 48. 49. 52. 10, 20 ; 
 and of John the Baptist, Matt. 11, 18. Luke 
 
 7, 33. c) e^ep^ecrScu CK or OTTO n- 
 vos, to come out of, Matt. 17, 18. Mark 7, 
 29. 30. Luke 4, 35. 41. 8, 2. 33. 35. 38. 
 
 11, 14. d) eicpdXXfiv ra Sat/idcta, 
 to cast out devils, Matt. 7, 22. 9, 34. 10, 8. 
 
 12, 24. 27. 28. Mark 1, 34. 39. 3, 15. 22. 
 6, 13. 7, 26. 9, 38. 16, 9. 17. Luke 9, 49. 
 11, 14. 15. 18. 19. 20. 13, 32. Pass. Matt. 
 9, 33. This was done by Christ in his own 
 authority, and by the apostles in his name, 
 (Luke 11, 15. 9, 1. 10, 17, comp. Acts 19, 
 13 sq.) but the Jews charged him with do 
 ing it by authority of Satan, who is called 
 apxcov TU>V 8aip.ovi<*>v, Matt. 9, 34. 12, 24. 
 Mark 3, 22. Luke 11,15. The Jews them 
 selves also professed to cast out demons, 
 Matt. 12, 27. Luke 11, 19 ; see the form of 
 exorcism in the name of Solomon, Jos. Ant. 
 
 8. 2. 5. e) Where the words or acts of de 
 mons thus dwelling in persons are spoken of, 
 Mark 1, 34. Luke 9, 1. 42. 10, 17. John 10, 
 21. f) As believing on God, James 2, 19. 
 
 NOTE. It has been strongly urged by 
 some commentators, that the diseases refer 
 red to above as caused by the presence of 
 evil spirits, were only such as arose from 
 natural and ordinary causes ; and that our 
 Lord and his apostles employed this mode 
 of expression only in compliance with popu 
 lar belief and usage ; just as we now use 
 the word lunatic without assenting to the 
 old opinion of the moon s influence ; see 
 Wetst. N. T. in Matt. 4, 24. Winer Realw. 
 art. Besessene. Yet it would seem hardly 
 a matter of question, but that the sacred 
 writers themselves held fully to that same 
 belief; since Satan and his emissaries are 
 also elsewhere represented as inflicting phy 
 sical evil and disease, Luke 13, 16 comp. 
 11. 1 Cor. 5, 5. 2 Cor. 12,7. 1 Tim. 1,20 ; 
 . and those possessed are every where said 
 at once to^acknowledge and address Jesus 
 as the Me ssiah, Matt. 8, 29. Mark 1, 24. 
 5, 7. Luke 4, 34. See Storr Opuscc. Acad. 
 I. p. 53 sq. Neander Leben Jesu, ed. 3, p. 
 281-312. [Engl. p. 145-150.] Comp. Jos. 
 Ant 6. 8. 2. ib. 8. 2. 5. 
 
 SaifAov 10)87)$, tos, ovs, 6, f], adj. (8aip.6- 
 wov,) pr. godlike, divine ; in N. T. demon- 
 like, devilish, James 3, 15. Symm. for Tiuyi 
 Ps 91, 6, where Sept. 8aip.6viov. 
 
 ovos, 6, j, i. q. TO 8aifj.6i>iov, a 
 god, deity, Horn. D. 1. 222. Xen. Conv. 8. 
 1 In N. T. a demon, an evil spirit, devil, 
 Matt. 8, 31. Mark 5, 12. Luke 8, 29. Rev. 
 18, 2 : also 16, 14 Rec. See 8aip,6mov no 
 2. So Act. Thorn. $ 12, 20, 40. 
 
 8d/cva), f. 8r)gop.ai, to bite, to sting, 
 c.acc. ./Elian. V. H. 14. 4. Xen. An. 3. 2. 
 
 18. In N. T. trop. i. q. to vex, to thwart ; 
 c. ace. Gal. 5, 15 et 8e aXXijXovs daKvere. 
 So Arr. Epict. 2. 22 8di<veiv dXXijXovs KOI 
 
 ai. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 13. 
 
 vos, TO, a tear, i. q. 8di<pvoi> q. v. 
 found only in Dat. plur. rols 8uKpva-iv Luke 
 7, 38. 44. Sept. eV 8d K pvo-i for ftfa ia 
 Ps. 6, 7. Lam. 2, 11. Dem. 872. ult. Time 
 7. 75. 
 
 oa/cpvov, ov, TO, a tear, e. g. irav 8aKpvov 
 Rev. 7, 17. 21, 4 ; Ta 8a.Kpva, tears, iveep- 
 ing, 2 Tim. 1,4; Sia TTO\. Saxpiiav 2 Cor. 
 2, 4 ; p,fTa 8aK.pvcav Mark 9, 24. Acts 20, 
 
 19. 31. Heb. 5, 7. 12, 17. Dat. plur. 8d- 
 Kpvo-i is from TO 8di<pv q. v. Sept. TU 8d- 
 Kpva for fiSs 1 ? 2 K. 20, 5. Lam. 1, 3. vEl 
 V. H. 14. 22." Xen. (Ec. 10. 8. 
 
 oa/cpva), f. vcTQ), (8aKpv,~) to shed team, 
 to weep, intrans. John 11, 35 f8dKpvo-ev 6 
 Irjo-ovs. Sept. Job 3, 24. Hdian. 6. 4. 3. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 7. 
 
 ov, , aKruo?, a rng, 
 pr. a finger-ring, Luke 15, 22 ; given as a 
 mark of honour, comp. Gen. 41, 42 and 
 Esth. 8, 2, where Sept. for nsarj . 1 Mace. 
 6, 15. Hdian. 3. 8. 9. Xen. Aii. 4. 7. 27. 
 
 Sa/cruXo9, ov, 6, a finger, Matt. 23, 4. 
 Luke 11, 46. 16, 24. John 8, 6. 20,25.27. 
 Plur. TOVS 8aKTi>\ovs Mark 7, 33. Sept. for 
 sas Lev. 4, 6. Cant. 5, 6. So Luc. D 
 Deor. 5. 4. Xen. Eq. 6. 8. Meton. 6 8d- 
 KTV\OS TOV 3f ou, for the power of God, Luke 
 11, 20; comp. Matt. 12, 28 where it is 
 TTVfvua TOV 3. Sept. and D^rt ^S 3. 32X 
 Ex. 8, 15. Ps. 8, 4. 
 
 AaXpavov^d. fj, pr. n. of a city or vil 
 lage near Magdala, on the western shore 
 of the lake of Gennesareth, north of Tibe 
 rias ; Mark 8, 10, comp. Matt. 15, 39. 
 
 Aa\parla, as, 17, Dalmatia, a province 
 of Europe on the eastern coast of the Adri 
 atic sea, forming part of Illyricum, and lying 
 south of Liburnia. Hither Titus was sent 
 by Paul to spread the knowledge of the 
 Gospel ; 2 Tim. 4, 10. 
 
 8a/mdfo, f. do-a>. (Sa/^acB,) to overpower, 
 to subdue, to tame ; c. ace. Mark 5, 4. Pass. 
 James 3, 7 bis. Trop. TTJV y\5>o-a-av James 
 
157 
 
 3, 8 ; comp. Ecclus. 28, 18 sq. Sept. Dan. 
 2, 40. Plut. Agesi. 1. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 10. 
 
 Sa/iaAt?, ecos, TJ, (8a/*aa>,) a heifer, Heb. 
 9, 13 ; comp. Num. 19, 2 sq. where Sept. 
 for rnD._Luc. D. Deor. 3. 1. ^Eschyl. 
 Suppl. 348. 
 
 Adfj,apL$i tgoy, 17, Damaris, a woman 
 of Athens who believed under Paul s preach 
 ing ; Acts 17, 34. 
 
 AafJ.aa Krjvo^ -fj, 6v, of Damascus, a 
 Damascene, 2 Cor. 11, 32. 
 
 AafJiaaKOS-, ov, 17, Damascus, Heb. 
 pb^ . a celebrated city of Syria, first men 
 tioned Gen. 14, 15, and now probably the 
 oldest city on the globe. It stands on the 
 river Chrysorrhoas, now el-Barada, (the 
 Amana or Abana of 2 K. 5, 12,) in a beau 
 tiful plain on the E. and S. E. of Anti- 
 Lebanon, open to the S. and East, and bound 
 ed on the other sides by the mountains. The 
 region around it, including probably the 
 valley between the ridges of Lebanon and 
 Anti-Lebanon, is called in the Scriptures 
 Syria of Damascus, piaa n DTi* 2 Sam 8, 
 5 ; and by Strabo, C&lesyria, 16. p. 1095. a. 
 In the days of Paul, the city was so much 
 thronged by Jews, that according to Jose- 
 phus 10,000 of them were here put to death 
 at once ; and most of the females of the city 
 were converts to Judaism ; Jos. B. J. 2. 20. 
 2. At this period the city was properly 
 under the Roman dominion ; but was held 
 for a time by Aretas ; see in ApeVay. It 
 is still called by the Arabs Dimeshk, but 
 usually esh-Shum. See Cellar. Notit. Orb. 
 II. p. 372. Rosenm. Bibl. Geog. I. ii. p. 284. 
 Winer Realw. s. v. Acts 9, 2. 3. 8. 10. 
 19. 22. 27. 22, 5. 6. 10. 11. 26, 12. 20. 
 dCor. 11,32. Gal. 1, 17. 
 
 Adv, o, indec. Dan, Heb. *fi (a judge), 
 pr. n. of the fifth son of Jacob, born of Bil- 
 hah, and head of one of the tribes, Gen. 30, 
 6. In the list of the tribes, Rev. 7, 5. 6, 
 that of Dan is found only in a few Mss. 
 
 oavet^co, f. fla-ca, (Sai/eioi/,) to lend mo 
 ney, to loan, in N. T. without interest. 
 
 1 . Genr. and absol. Luke 6, 34 bis, 35 ; 
 see in a7rfX7n f&>. Sept. for rnb Dent. 28, 
 44. Ecclus. 29, 1. 2. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 34. 
 
 So firl TOKOIS Dem. 13. 19. 
 
 2. Mid. 8ai>e/fo^ai, to let lend to one 
 self, i. e. to borrow money, Matt. 5, 42. 
 Sept. and JT& Neb.. 5, 4. Theophr. Char. 
 16 (9). 3. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 2. See also 
 Iiob. ad Phryn. p. 468. 
 
 SdvetoVj ov, TO, (neut. of adj. 8awoy, 
 8dvos,) a debt, for money lent, Matt. 18, 27. 
 
 Sept. for nd3 Deut. 24, 11. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 79. Dem. 911. 3. 
 
 , ov, 6, (Sai/e/o>,) a lender, 
 creditor, Luke 7, 41. Sept. for fill s 2 K. 
 4, 1. Hdian. 7. 7. 7. Plut. Corioi . 5 bis. 
 Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 468. 
 
 Aavnj\, 6, indec. Daniel, Heb. ^3 n 
 v. bxJ n ( a judge from God), pr. n. of the 
 celebrated Jewish prophet who lived and 
 wrote at Babylon in the time of the cap 
 tivity. Matt. 24, 15. Mark 13, 14. 
 
 oaTTavaco, >, f. 770-0), (danavrj.) to Spend, 
 to be at expense, c. ace. Mark 5, 26 ; absol. 
 2 Cor. 12, 15. (Bel and Dr. 3. Plut. de Su- 
 perst. 3. Xen. An. 1. 3. 3.) So with eVt 
 c. dat. to be at expense, charges, upon or 
 for anyone; Acts 21, 24 Barrdvrjo-ov V 
 avTols- see more in cvxfi no. 2. So Jos. 
 Ant. 19. 6. 1. B. J. 2. 15. 1. Wetst. 
 N. T. ad loc. In a bad sense, i. q. to 
 waste, to consume, c. ace. Luke 15, 14 ; c. 
 ev nvi James 4, 3. So Dem. 1023. 14. 
 Thuc. 7. 47. 
 
 s, 17, (kindr. SaTrrw,) expense, 
 cost, Luke 14, 28. Sept. for Chald. NnpBI 
 Ezra 6, 4. 6. Luc. Ep. Sat. 33. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 6. 6. 
 
 AaviS, see Aa/3i S. 
 
 oe, a particle put after one or more 
 words in a clause, and denoting that the 
 wrd or clause with which it stands is to 
 be distinguished from something preceding. 
 It thus marks a transition to something else; 
 whether opposed to what precedes, so that 
 6V is then adversative, but ; or simply con- 
 tinuative or explanatory, where 6V may be 
 rendered but, and, also, namely, or the like. 
 See Buttm. 149. m. 9. Kiihner 322. Matth. 
 616. Winer J 57. 4, and 6. n. Hartung 
 Lehre v. d. Part. I. 156-190. 
 
 1 . Adversative, but, on the contrary, etc. 
 a) Genr. and simply ; Matt. 6, 1 el 8e ufaf. 
 v. 6. 15 comp. 14. 9, 17. 23, 25. Luke 5, 
 36. 12, 9. 10. John 1, 12. 8, 40. Acts 4, 
 4. 9, 7. Rom. 4, 4. 5, 8. 6, 17. 18. 22. 
 1 Cor. 7, 2. al. saep. (Plato Gorg. 522. b.) 
 As introducing an answer implying con 
 tradiction, Luke 12, 14. 13, 8. Acts 12, 15. 
 19, 2. (Plato Menex. 246. c.) Sometimes 
 8V is repeated in a succession of like clauses, 
 Matt. 1, 2-17. 2 Pet. 1, 5-7. b) After a 
 negative, but, but rather ; Matt. 6, 33 comp. 
 31. Luke 10, 20. Acts 12, 9. 14. Rom. 3, 
 4. Eph. 4, 15 comp. 14. Heb. 4, 13. 15. 
 6, 12. 9, 12. 12, 13. So Xen. (Ec. 20. 14. 
 c) Also fia\\ov 8f, but rather, yea ra 
 ther, by way of correction ; Gal. 4, 9 /xo> 
 
158 
 
 Set 
 
 \ov de yvcocr StVTfs VTTO Seou. With /cat 
 added, Rom. 8, 34. (Plut. de sera Num. 
 vind. 17. Xen. Mem. 3. 8. 34.) Also after 
 a negative, Se /iaXXoi/, Zmi rather, Matt. 
 10, 6. 28. So Thuc. 1. 123. d) Very 
 often corresponding to p,ev in a preceding 
 clause, p,ev . . .8e, indeed . . . but, though 
 sometimes not to be expressed in English ; 
 Acts 9, 7. 23, 8. Rom. 2, 7. 8. 1 Cor. 1, 
 12. 15, 39. 2 Cor. 10,1. al. saep. See more 
 fully in art. pev. e) In the apodosis after 
 el, where the subject is contrasted with the 
 subject of the protasis ; Acts 11, 17 e yo> Se 
 T LS T/MV, who then was 1? So Plato Apol. 
 28. c. Comp. Matth. 616. 3. Herm. ad 
 Viger. p. 783. 
 
 2. Continuative, but, now, and, further, 
 and the like. a) Genr. Matt. 1, 18 TOV Se 
 I. X. yevinjo-is ovras rjv, now the birth of J. 
 C. was thus. 2, 9. 3, 1. Mark 16, 9. Luke 
 12, 11. 16. 13, 6. 10. 15, 11. Acts 6, 1. 9, 
 10. 1 Cor. 14, 1. 16, 1. 15, 17. al. saep. 
 Comp. Hdian. 1. 1. 3. Plato Rep. 368. b. 
 b) Where something is added by way of 
 explanation or example, and, namely, to wit ; 
 Matt. 23, 5 TrXarvvovcri 8e ra (pvXaKTfjpia 
 avT&v. Rom. 3, 22. 9, 30. 1 Cor. 15, 56 
 bis. Eph. 5, 32. Phil. 2, 8. So in paren 
 thetic clauses, e. g. with TOVTO Se . . . ye- 
 yovtv Matt. 1, 22. 21, 4. 26, 56 ; or where 
 there is a notation of number or time, Mark 
 5, 13. 15, 25. John 9, 14. Acts 12, 3 ; or 
 where some new circumstance is added, 
 Mark 7, 26. Luke 23, 17. John 6, 17. 11, 
 2. 19, 23. Comp. Plato Gorg. 461. d. c) 
 Where the train of discourse is taken up 
 again, after having been interrupted ; so 
 Luke 4, 1 comp. 3, 23. Matt. 3, 4. 2 Cor. 
 
 10, 2. So Plato Phasd. 80. d. Xen. An. 
 
 7. 2. 18, 19. d) With u in the sense 
 of also ; hence K a I . . . 8 e, and also, see 
 Buttm. 1. c. Matt. 16, 18. Mark 4, 36 /cat 
 XXa Se TrXota rjv /ner avrov. John 6, 51. 
 
 8, 16. 17. 15,27. Acts 5, 32. 2 Tim. 3, 12. 
 Heb. 9, 21. 1 John 1, 3. al. So Xen. Cyr. 
 I. 4. 26. -f 
 
 .Se?7cri9j ewy, f], (Se o/u,) want, need, Plato 
 Eryx. 405. e ; a wanting, asking, entreaty, 
 Dem. 515. 17. Plato Crat. 329. c. In N. 
 T. request, supplication, prayer to God ; 
 Luke 1, 13 fla-TjKova-^T) 17 Seven s crou. 2, 37. 
 5, 33. 2 Tim. 1, 3. James 5, 16. 1 Pet. 3, 
 12 ; f] 8. 17 Trpbs TOV %f6v Rom. 10, 1. Also 
 with vTtep TWOS, for any one, 2 Cor. 1, 
 
 11. 9, 14. Phil. 1, 4 init. impl. Phil. 1, 4 
 fin. 19; with Trept TWOS id. Eph. 6, 18 
 fin. Joined with Trpoaevxri, which also sig 
 nifies prayer, but rather as an act of wor 
 ship, Acts 1,14 Rec. Eph. 6, 18 init. Phil. 4, 
 
 6. 1 Tim. 2, 1. 5, 5 ; also Seijtrety KOI iK 
 Heb. 5, 7. Sept. for f Sriln i K. 8, 28. 30 ; 
 r*BB 1 K. 8, 45. 1 Mace. 7, 37. Baruch 
 4, 20. Genr. Hdian. 8. 4. 25. Plato Legg. 
 768. d. 
 
 Set, impers. verb, (Sew,) impf. eSet, Subj. 
 8trj, Part. 8eov ; pr. it is binding on any one, 
 it behooves one to do, i. e. one must, one ought, 
 followed by an infinitive ; also in Gr. writers, 
 it needs, there is need of, c. gen. Pol. 3. 6. 3. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 3. 10. In N. T. only pr. it 
 behooves, it is necessary, it must needs, one 
 must or ought, c. infin. Spoken 
 
 1. Of what is required by the nature and 
 circumstances of the case, the fitness of 
 things, a sense of duty, or the like. Pres. 
 Set c. inf. pres. Luke 2, 49 on eV rots . . . 
 Set fivat jue, that I must be. John 3, 30 fueivov 
 Set avi-aveiv, he must increase. 1 Cor. 11, 
 
 19. Col. 4, 6. 1 Tim. 3, 7 ; c. inf. aor. 
 Matt. 17, 10 HXi ai> Set eXSetv TrpuTov, Elias 
 must first come. Luke 4, 43. John 10, 16. 
 
 20, 9. 1 Cor. 15, 53. Heb. 11, 6. al. (So 
 c. inf. pres. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 4; inf. aor. 
 Hdian. 1. 17. 27. Thuc. 2. 45.) Subj. dep, 
 after iav, Kav, c.inf. aor. Matt. 26, 35. Mark 
 14, 31. Impf. e Set, it was necessary, he 
 must needs, John 4, 4. Heb. 9, 26. Part. 
 8eov eVrt, it is necessary, one ought ; Acts 
 19, 36 8eov eaT\v vp.as . . . inrdp^fiv, ye 
 ought to be; absol. 1 Pet. 1, 6 ei 8eoi> e cm , 
 if need be. So Hdian. 5. 4. 23. Also of 
 what is unavoidable, what must in the na 
 ture of things take place ; with inf. pres. 
 2 Cor. 11, 30 ei Kav^aa^ai Set. Inf. aor. 
 Matt. 24, 6 Set yap Trdvra yevea Zai. Mark 
 13, 7. Luke 21, 9. Acts 21, 22. al. Spec, 
 of what is made necessary by appointment 
 of God ; c. inf. pres. 1 Cor. 15, 25 ; inf. aor. 
 Matt. 16, 21. 26, 54. Mark 8, 31. Luke 9, 
 22. John 3, 14. Acts 9, 16. 14, 22. Impf. 
 eSet, c. inf. aor. Luke 24, 26. 46. Acts 1, 
 16. 17, 3. 
 
 2. Of what is right in itself, or prescribed 
 by law, custom, reason ; it is right or proper, 
 one must or ought, one should ; c. inf. pres. 
 Luke 13, 14 / als Set e pyaecr3at. 18, 1. 
 John 4, 20. 24. 9, 4. Acts 5, 29. Rom. 12, 
 3. al. Inf. aor. Mark 13, 10. Acts 3, 21. 
 18,21. Inf. impl. Mark 13, 14 co-robs OTTOU 
 ov Set, sc. O-TTJVCU. (Pol. 7. 5. 2. Thuc. 3, 
 47 ; inf. impl. Sept. Job 15, 3.) Impf. e 8e i, 
 c. inf. pres. Luke 22, 7 e Sei Swo-Sai TO ?ra- 
 <rxa. Acts 24, 19. 27, 21. 2 Cor. 2,3 ; inf. 
 aor. Matt. 18, 33. 23, 23. Luke 13, 16. al. 
 Inf. impl. Rom. 1, 27 fjv e Set, sc. a7roXa/*/3a- 
 vfiv. Part. TO. /J.T] 8eovTa, things not right, 
 not proper, 1 Tim. 5, 13 ; so Xen. Mem. 1 
 2. 22. + 
 
159 
 
 t, aros, TO. (8fLKt>vp.i, 8e8f ty/ta.) pr. 
 what is shown, a sample, specimen, Pol. 
 6. 58. 1. Plato Legg. 718. b. In N. T. an 
 exampk, warning, Jude 7 ; comp. 2 Pet. 2, 
 6. Comp. Jos. Ant. 8. 2. 2. ^El. V. H. 6. 12. 
 Seiy/JiaTlfo, f. ia-a, (Sety/ia,) to make a 
 show or example of, c. ace. impl. Col. 2, 15. 
 [Matt. 1, 19.] Found only in N. T. 
 
 SeiKi>v/j,i and Seitcvvo), f. 8ei &> ; the 
 former is the usual Attic form, Buttm. 106. 
 n. 5. Ausf. Spr. 5 107. n. 8 ; the.latter occurs 
 Matt. 16, 21. John 2, 18. Rev. 22, 8 ; also 
 Hesiod. "Epy. 421, 472. Ceb. Tab. 4. To 
 shou; to let see, to point out, to present to 
 view ; so with ace. of thing and dat. of pers. 
 Matt. 4, 8 and Luke 4, 5 KOI 8ciKwo-iv aurc3 
 irdcras ras ftacriXfias TOV KOCT/XOV. Acts 7, 
 
 3, comp. Gen. 12, 1. Mark 14, 15 and Luke 
 22, 12 vfjiiv 8tifi dvdyaiov. Luke 24, 40 
 
 and John 20, 20 tfteigev avrols ray xelpay. 
 Luke 20, 24. John 2, 18. 5, 20 bis. 10, 32 ; 
 ace. simpl. 1 Tim. 6, 15. Pass. Heb. 8, 5. 
 Sept. for rtion Deut. 1, 33. 34, 1. 4. (Ceb. 
 Tab. 4. Hdian. 5. 4. 4. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 33.) 
 Of things shown in vision, Rev. 1,1. 4, 1. 
 17, 1. 22, 1. 6. 8; Sept andfixnri Ez. 40, 
 
 4. With ace. of pers. and dat. as Selgov 
 o-favTuv rep lepei, show thyself to the priest, 
 Matt. 8, 4. Mark 1,44. Luke 5, 14; comp. 
 Lev. 14, -2 sq. So John 14, 8. 9 ; in vision, 
 Rev. 21, 9. 10. Sept. for nx*Fi Judg. 4, 
 22. So Hdian. 5. 4. 4. Trop. a) to 
 shore, to manifest, to prove, as dci6v fiot 
 TT]v TTIO-TIV a-ov James 2, 18 ; with e< TWOS 
 ibid, rl TWOS 3, 13. So Thuc. 1. 37, 74. 
 b) to show by words, i. q. to teach, to declare, 
 c. ace. et dat. 1 Cor. 12, 31 ; dat. et ort 
 Matt. 16, 21 ; dat. etinf. Acts 10, 28. Sept. 
 for trni n i Sam. 12, 23 ; lab Deut. 4, 5. 
 So c. dat. et on. Hdian. 1. 13. 12. Xen. Hell. 
 1. 6. 11 ; dat. et inf. Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 21. 
 
 oet\ia, as, 17, (SftXo s,) timidity, fear ; 
 
 2 Tim. 1, 7 irvfiipa 8ei\ias, a spirit of ti 
 midity, i. q. TTV. 8fi\6v. Sept. for "iBiX p s . 
 55,4. Hdian. 2. 1. 22. Plat. Pha:dr. T 254. c. 
 
 Ol\t,ao), w, f. ao-eo, (SetAoy,) to be timid, 
 to be afraid, absol. John 14, 27. Sept. for 
 
 003 I s . 13, 7 ; nn? Deut. 1, 21. 2 Mace. 
 15, 8. Diod. Sic. 20. 78 init. The com 
 pound dTroSeiXtda) is more common in Gr. 
 writers. 
 
 r), 6v, (Sei Sa),) timid, fearful, 
 Matt. 8, 26. Mark 4, 40. Rev. 21,8. Sept. 
 for 1*n Judg. 7, 3. Dem. 405. 18. Thuc. 
 2. 62. 
 
 Setva, 6, fj, TO, gen. dflvos, ace. 8dva, 
 some one, such an one ; spoken of a person, 
 
 whom one cannot or will not name, Matt 
 26, 18. See Buttm. 5 73. Herm. ad Vig. p. 
 21, 704. Dem. 167. 24. Luc. Pise. 38. 
 
 adv. (Seti/o?,) greatly, vehemently, 
 Matt. 8, 6. Luke 11, 53. Wisd. 17, 3. 
 .Eschin. 32. 22. Xen. Hell. 6. 2. 26. 
 
 ea)) S>, f. 170x0, (SeiTTi oi .) to dine or 
 sup, to take the chief meal of the day, Luke 
 17, 8. Sept. for CH.b Prov. 23, 1. (Tob. 8, 
 
 1. Plut. Symp. 8. 6. 3, 4. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 
 7. 12.) Spoken of the paschal supper, 
 Luke 22, 20. 1 Cor. 11, 25; so Jos. Ant. 
 
 2. 14. 6. Trop. i. q. to eat, to banquet, as 
 figurative of the Messiah s kingdom, Rev. 
 
 3. 20 ; see in yd^os no. 1. 
 
 SeiTrvov, ou, TO, in Homer breakfast, II. 
 
 8. 53. Od. 9. 311 ; in Attic writers and in 
 N. T. dinner or supper, i. e. the chief meal 
 of the Jews, and also of the Greeks and 
 Romans, taken towards or at evening, after 
 the labours of the day were over, and often 
 prolonged into the night, see fully in Spi- 
 CTTOV ; hence genr. a banquet, feast, in gene 
 ral; Matt. 23, 6. Mark 6,21. 12,39. Luke 
 14, 12. 16. 17. 24. 20, 46. John 12, 2. Me- 
 ton. 1 Cor. 11,21. So Sept. for Chald. cnb 
 Dan. 5, 1. (^El. V. H. 1. 26. Plut. Symp. 
 8. 6. 4 ro Se ftcoDW [cofo/ido-Sat] on T<ai> 
 irovtov 8iavcnrav(i. Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 38.) 
 Spoken of the paschal supper, John 13, 2. 
 4. 21, 20 ; of the Lord s supper, 1 Cor. 11, 
 20. Trop. of a marriage-feast, as figu 
 rative of the Messiah s kingdom, Rev. 19, 
 9 ; see in ydpos no. 1. fin. Also of heaps 
 of the slain as a feast for birds of prey, Rev. 
 19, 17; comp. ^Eschyl. Suppl. 798 opvto-i 
 
 O vos, 6, f], adj. (8d8<o, 
 8atfj.au>. ) fearing the gods, religious, pious ; 
 e.g. the Athenians, comparat. Acts 17, 22 
 ws 8fi(n8aifj.ovf(rTfpovs v/xaj Sfcopco (sc. aX- 
 Xwv), more than others ; see Winer 5 36. 3, 
 and n. 3. Comp. Pausan. Att. c. 24 ASq- 
 valots TTfpi(ro~dTp6v TI fj Tols oXXots ts TO. 
 Seta eo~Ti o-TTouS^f. Xen. Ath. 3. 8 xal (01 
 1 ASnvaloi) (iyovcri /J.ev fopTas 8in\acriovs rj 
 oi aXXot. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 58. Ag. 11. 8. 
 In Gr. writers also in a bad sense, super 
 stitious, bigoted, Theophr. Char. 25 [16]. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 52. 
 
 SeurtScufAovia, as, 17, (Seio-tSeu /iwi/,) pr. 
 fear of the gods ; then religiousness, reli 
 gion, Acts 25, 19 Trepl Tr)s I8ias 8fio~i8aifj.o- 
 vias.Jos. Ant. 10. 3. 2. Diod. Sic. 1. 70. 
 Pol. 6. 56. 7. In Gr. writers also in a bad 
 sense, superstition, bigotry, Theophr. Char. 
 25 [161. Pol. 12. 24. 5. 
 
Se/ca 
 
 160 
 
 t, ol, al, rd, indec. card. num. ten, 
 Matt. 20, 24. Mark 10, 41. al. Often put 
 as a small round number, Matt. 25, 1-. 28. 
 Luke 15, 8. 19, 13. 17. al. So Sept. and 
 STiiy? Am. 5, 3. Rev. 2, 10 3Xn/n? fjp.epS)v 
 8tKa, of ten days, for a short time. So Sept. 
 and rrntos Dan. 1, 12. + 
 
 8efca8vo, indec. card. num. twelve, Acts 
 19. 7. 24, 11. So Sept. for "nfc?S Qinn5 
 Ex. 28,21 ; ^? D n .^ 1 Chr. 15, 10. The 
 more usual form is 8d>8fKa, Buttm. 70. 
 
 Se/caTrevre, indec. card. num. fifteen, 
 John 11,18. Acts 27, 28. Gal. 1,18. Sept. 
 for !-nto5> Uhm Qen. 7, 20. The more 
 usual form is TvevTKai8fKa, Buttm. 70. 
 
 Decapolis, i. e. ^e Ten Cities, a district so 
 called embracing ten cities, all except Scy- 
 thopolis lying in the country east of the 
 Jordan, and south of the lake of Tiberias. 
 Pliny names in the Decapolis eight cities " 
 lying in this region, viz. Scythopolis, Hip 
 pos, Gadara, Dion, Pella, Gerasa, Philadel 
 phia, Canatha ; and adds, with less proba 
 bility Damascus and Raphana ; prefixing 
 indeed the remark, " in quo non omnes ea- 
 dem observant;" H. N. 5. 17 or 19. Jose- 
 phus virtually excludes Damascus, when he 
 calls Scythopolis the largest city of the De 
 capolis ; B. J. 3. 9. 7. Ptolemy compre 
 hends the Decapolis in the southern part 
 of Coale-Syria, and enumerates the same 
 eight cities mentioned by Pliny, subjoining 
 with more probability Capitolias and Adra 
 (Edrei) ; and adding also a Gadora otherwise 
 unknown; Geogr. 5. 17. It is not unlikely 
 that other cities may have joined themselves 
 later to the original ten, from which the 
 name was derived. See Reland Falsest, p. 
 203, 458. Rosenm. Bibl. Geog. II. ii. p. 11. 
 Winer Realw. s. voc. In N. T. Matt. 4, 
 25. Mark 5, 20. 7, 31. 
 
 8e/carecrcrap69, o>v, ol, al, card. num. 
 fourteen, Matt. l,17ter. 2 Cor. 12,2. Gal. 
 2, 1. Comp. Buttm. 70. 
 
 Se/CaT?7, rjS; f], (Sexaros,) for f) SfKarrj 
 p-epi s, a tenth part, tithe, e. g. of spoils, Heb. 
 7, 2. 4 ; comp. Gen. 14, 20, where Sept. 
 for "itoST?. So Diod. Sic. 4. 21. Xen. An. 
 5. 3. 4, 13. Spec, the tithes, which by the 
 Jewish law were to be paid both from the 
 produce of the earth and from the increase 
 of the flocks, Heb. 7, 8. 9 ; see Lev. 27, 30. 
 
 31. 32, where Sept. for ^a. So Ecclus. 
 
 32, 9. Jos. Ant. 1. 19. 3. 
 
 9, ?;, ov, ordin. the tenth, John 1, 
 40. Rev. 21, 20. Neut. TO SeWoi/, the tenth 
 
 part, Rev. 11, 13. Sept. Ez. 45, 11 bis. 
 Luc. Cronos. 14. 
 
 Se/caTO&), , f. coo-to, (SeKtm;,) to tithe, to 
 take tithes of any one, c. ace. Heb. 7, 6, i. q. 
 SeKaras \ap,pdveiv in v. 9. Pass, to be tithed, 
 to pay tithes, Heb. 7, 9. Sept. for *i S 
 Neh. 10, 38. A later form for the earlier 
 SeKarevo) Xen. An. 5. 3. 9. 
 
 Se/cro?, 77, 6v, (Se ^o/zat,) accepted, ap 
 proved, acceptable ; e. g. a person, Luke 4, 
 24 ovSfls Tfpocprjrrjs SEKTOS e ort. Acts 10, 
 35 ; a sacrifice, Phil. 4, 18. Sept. for Tisn 
 Prov. 14, 37. Is. 56, 7. So Ecclus. 2, 5. 
 32, 7. Hesych. Sejcros opeoTos. Of time, 
 propitious, favourable, Luke 4, 19, from Is. 
 61, 2 ; also 2 Cor. 6, 2, from Jer. 49, 8 ; 
 where Sept. in both cases for "p^. 
 
 SeXea^d), f. da-co, (SeXeap,) to bait, to en 
 trap, Pass. pr. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 4. In N. 
 T. trop. to entrap, to entice, to beguile, c 
 ace. 2 Pet. 2, 14. 18. Pass. James 1, 14. 
 So Philo de Agric. p. 202. e. Hdian. 1. 12. 
 11. Pol. 38. 3. 11. 
 
 SevSpov, ov, TO, a tree, Matt. 3, 10. 7, 
 17. Mark 11,8. al. Mark 8, 24 /3XeVco rovs 
 di>3p. a>s 8ev8pa, I see men as trees, i. e. not 
 distinctly, perh. larger than natural. Sept. 
 for f? Gen. 18, 4. 8. Hdian. 1. 12. 3. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 4. 7. + 
 
 Be^id, jjs, fj, see in Sextos no. 2. a. 
 
 SetoA,a/3o9, O v, 6, (Sextos, Xa/^/Sai/w,) pr. 
 one taking the right ; hence prob. a guard, 
 body-guard, referring apparently to some 
 kind of light-armed troops ; Acts 23, 23 
 eroifjuicraTe (rrpaTKaras Kat ITTTTCIS 
 r. Suid. iraa<) 
 
 Vulg. lancearii ; Engl. Vers. spearmen. 
 Not found in classic writers ; but occurs in 
 Theophyl. Simoc. 4. 1. Const. Porphyr. 
 Themat. 1.1. See Wetst. N. T. in loc. 
 
 Se^t09, a, ov, right, on the right side or 
 hand, opp. left. 
 
 1. Adj. with a subst. expressed, e. g. r; 
 
 Seia x p Matt - 5 > 30 Luke 6 6> Acts 3 7 
 Rev. 1, 16. 17. [10, 5.] 13, 16 ; TTOVS Rev. 10, 
 2 ; ocpSaXjuo s Matt. 5, 29 ; ovs Luke 22. 50. 
 John 18, 10 ; aiayuv Matt. 5, 39 ; TO Sfta 
 /ie pr; John 21, 6. 2 Cor. 6, 7 oVXa ra 8e|ta 
 KoL dpto-repd, arms for the right and left, i. e. 
 of every kind, offensive and defensive. Sept. 
 for V 1 ?! Gen. 48, 14. Ex. 29, 22. Plato 
 Rep. 617. c. Thuc. 1. 48. 
 
 2. Subst. or with a subst. implied. a) 
 Fern. 77 Se|id sc. x p> the right hand, Matt 
 6, 3. 27, 29. Rev. 1, 20. 2, 1. 5, 1. 7. 
 Sept. for "pa? Gen. 48, 18. Ex. 15, 12. al. 
 
161 
 
 (Hdian. 7. 5. 10. Xen. Eq. 7. 3.) Plur. Gal. 
 2, 9 eiar (8a>Kav e p.oi Kal B. Koivutvias, they 
 gare us the right hand of fellowship, in 
 confirmation of a pledge or agreement ; so 
 1 Mace. 6, 58 ; comp. Ezra 10, 19. Jos. 
 Ant. 18. 9. 3. Xen. An. 1. 6. 6 KOI 8fiav 
 thafiov KCU f ScaKa. Put for the right hand or 
 side ; in N. T. only in respect to God, as 
 5eia TOV 3eoi), at the right hand of God, 
 on his right, the place assigned to the Mes 
 siah as that of the highest honour and dignity, 
 comp. below in b. /3 ; Rom. 8, 34. Eph. 1, 
 20. Col. 3, 1. Heb. 10, 12. 1 Pet. 3, 22. 
 (Sept. for TO Ps. 16, 11.) Also rf, Seia 
 TOV 3. id. Acts 2, 33. 5, 31 ; tv 8eta TOV 
 3pdi/ou T. 3. Heb. 8, 1. 12, 2 ; tv Seia TTJS 
 fj.fya\(,)o-vvrjs, id. Heb. 1, 3. Comp. Xen. 
 An. 5. 2. 24. 
 
 b) Neut. Plur. TO. eta sc. p.e p7, the 
 right parts, the right, in general, e. g. e /c 
 fagttov, c-n the right, see in art. e <, Matt. 27, 
 38. Mark 15, 27. Luke 23, 33. Matt. 25, 
 33. 34. Luke 1, 11 ; eV TO LS 8fio~is Mark 
 16, 5. Sept. for "pa? Gen. 48, 13. Ex. 14, 
 22.29. So Diod. Sic. 1 . 47. Xen. Hell. 4. 2. 
 18,1 9. Spec, in phrases : a) e AC 8 e t > v 
 TWOS eivai, to be at one s right hand, i. e. as 
 a helper, protector, Acts 2, 25, quoted from 
 Ps. 16, 8 where Sept. for "pa^ ; comp. Ps. 
 109. 31. /3) iit&ei&v TOV 3eov KU- 
 3i?o-3ai v. e<rrw?, to sit or stand at the 
 right hand of God, on his right, as the place 
 of highest honour and dignity, and ascribed 
 only to the Messiah ; e. g. a3ou e x 8egiwv 
 uov, quoted from Ps. 110, 1 where Sept. 
 for T^ 3ti, Matt. 22, 44. Mark 12, 36. 
 Luke 20, 42. Acts 2, 34. Heb. 1, 13 ; and 
 so Matt. 26,64. Mark 14, 62. 16, 19. Luke 
 22, 69. So earrats Se. T. 3. Acts 7, 55. 
 56. In like manner 8eio>i> TOV Xpt- 
 a-Tov Ka3r)<r3at, to sit at Christ s right 
 hand, in a like sense. Matt. 20, 21. 23. 
 Mark 10, 37. 40. Comp. 1 K. 22, 19; also 
 2, 19. Jos. Ant. 8. 1. 2. 
 
 f. Sf >jcrop,ai, Pass, depon. (Seta,) 
 aor. 1 (o-ft)3r)v, Buttm. 5 113. 4; Impf. 3 
 pers. Ion. e Seero, Luke 8, 38. Sept. Job 19, 
 16. Xen. Hell. 6. 1. 6 ; comp. Buttm. 5 114 
 Se w. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 220 ; to need, to 
 want, c. gen. Hdian. 2. 8. 14. Xen. Mem. 1. 
 6. 10. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. to want. of any one, to ask, to make re 
 quest, to pray, pr. c. gen. of pers. from 
 whom one asks ; also with an adjunct of 
 the thing asked for, e. g. a) With ace. of 
 thing ; 2 Cor. 8, 4 8e6p.tvoi fjp,S)v TT/V x^P lv 
 KT\. So c. gen. impl. 2 Cor. 10, 2 fieo/iai 
 (sc. vfjiuv) TO pi) irapvv Sapp^trat KT\. So 
 11 
 
 Luc. Timon 35. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 1, 2. b) 
 With an infin. and its clause ; Luke 8, 38 
 e Seero 8f CIVTOV 6 dvrjp . . . flvai crvv ai>T<a. 
 Acts 26, 3. So JEl V. H. 2. 42. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 5. 4. c) Followed by a direct 
 clause, Luke 8, 28 8eop.cu crov, \a\ p-e /3acra- 
 vioys. 9, 38. Acts 8, 34. 21, 39. Gal. 4, 
 1 2 ; with Xeytav added, Luke 5, 12; with 
 gen. impl. 2 Cor. 5, 20. Comp. Sept. for 
 jSnnn 2 K. 1 , 1 3. d) With Iva, Luke 9, 40 
 Kal fSerj^rjv TUV pa3jrcoi/ o~ov, tva KT\. 
 
 2. Spec, to pray to God ; c. gen. TOV 3f ov 
 Acts 10, 2 ; and so with apa Acts 8, 22 ; 
 with OTTWS Matt. 9, 38. Luke 10, 2. Also 
 deop.ai irpbs TOV Kvpiov, C. virep TLVOS et OTTCO?, 
 Acts 8, 24. With TOV 3eoi) impl. Acts 4, 
 31 ; and so with fls of purpose, 1 Thess. 3, 
 10 ; or iva Luke 21, 36 ; or also jrepi TIVOS 
 and Iva Lijke 22, 32 ; or ewrcoff Rom. 1, 10. 
 Sept. for l.?ririri, c. TOV 3eoO Dan. 6, 11 ; 
 nrpos Kvpiov Job 8, 5 ; npos TOV 3eoV Ps. 30, 
 9. Comp. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 4 ep^opat irpbs 
 Seoi/s 8fTjo-6p.fvos. 
 
 oeov } ovros, TO, participle neut. of im- 
 pers. get, Acts 19, 36. 1 Tim. 5, 13. 1 Pet 
 
 1, 6 ; see in art. SeT. 
 
 Seo?, Seovs, TO, fear, Heb. 12, 28 in some 
 Mss. for aldovs. 2 Mace. 3, 17. Xen. Ath. 
 
 2. 3, 15. 
 
 AepjBaios, ov , 6, of Derbe, a Derbatan, 
 Acts 20, 4. 
 
 ), fjs,f], Derbe, a city of Lycaonia 
 in Asia Minor, situated within the confines 
 of Isauria, Acts 14, 6. 20. 16, 1. Perh. 
 mod. Divle ; see Hamilton Res. in Asia M. 
 II. p. 313. Strabo 12. p. 569. 
 
 Sep/ia, CITOS, TO. (Se p<B,) a skin, hide, of 
 an animal, Heb. 11, 37. Sept. for Tis 
 Lev. 13, 48. Pol. 7. 1. 3. Xen. Anab. 1. 
 2. 8. 
 
 Sepf^dnvo^ 77, O v, made of skin, leathern, 
 Matt. 3, 4. Mark 1, 6. Sept. for vis 2 K. 
 1, 8 where see. Strabo 16. p. 1124. c. 
 Plato Eryx. 400. e. 
 
 Sepa), f. Sfpw, aor. 1 eSetpa ; Pass. aor. 2 
 fddprjv, f. 2 8apr]0"ofjLai , to skin, to Jlay. 
 Sept. for BidBn 2 Chr. 29, 34. Horn. II 
 1. 459. Plato Euthyd. 285. d. In N. T. to 
 beat, to smite, to scourge, pr. so as to take 
 off the skin ; c. ace. of pers. Matt. 21, 35. 
 Mark 12, 3. 5. Luke 20, 10. 11. Acts 16, 
 37. 22. 19. John 18, 23 TI p-e Sepetr ; i. q. 
 f8a>Kf paTTio-fJia v. 22. 2 Cor. 11, 20 et ns 
 V/J.US fls Trpoo-oJTTov S/pei, smites you in 
 (upon) the face. With ace. impl. Luke 22, 
 63. Acts 5, 40. So Aquila for aabi Prov. 
 10, 8. Diog. Laert. 7. 23. Plut. Lycurg. 30. 
 
Secr/ieucu 
 
 162 
 
 Sevpo 
 
 Pass. Saprjo-fo-Sf, Mark 13, 9 ; also c. 
 ace. of manner, Luke 12,47 daprja-erai 
 rroXXds sc. TrXvyds, Tie shall be beaten with 
 many stripes, v. 48 Sap^o-erai oXryay. See 
 Winer 32. 2. n. J 66. 4. Buttm. 5 134. n. 
 2. Kiihner 278. n. 3. Comp. Dem. 403. 4 
 aivfLv Kara i/corou TroXXdj. Xen. An. 5. 8. 
 12 jraieiv 6\iyas. For the phrase de pa 
 1 Cor. 9, 26, see in art. drjp. 
 
 f. eva-co, (Sftr/xoy,) to bind, 
 e. g. a prisoner, c. ace. impl. Acts 22, 4 ; 
 bales, burdens, (popria, trop. Matt. 23, 4. 
 Sept. for "IDX of a prisoner Judg. 16, 11 ; 
 C^X of sheaves Gen. 37, 7. Of pers. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 50 ; of things. Judith 8, 3. Plut. 
 de Lib. educ. 16. 
 
 Sea-pea), , f. 770-0), (oVo-p.ds,) to bind, 
 i. q. 8e<rp.eva>, e. g. with chains, Pass. Luke 
 8, 29 eSetr/xetro dXvcrecrt. Aquil. Job 40, 20. 
 Philip. 45, in Anth. Gr. II. p. 207. The 
 Atticists refer Setr/ieco to the common dia 
 lect ; Moeris p. 122. Thorn. Mag. p. 199, 
 821. 
 
 deer//-?;, T}?, 17, (6Vco,) a bundle, sTieaf, 
 Matt. 13, 30. Sept. for rnSX Ex. 12, 22. 
 Dion. Hal. Ant. 3. 61. Plut. Mor. II. p. 8. 
 
 oeoyuo9j tov, 6, (Seoyte w,) one bound, a 
 prisoner, captive, Matt. 27, 15. 16. Mark 
 15, 6. Acts 16, 25. 27. 23, 18. 25, 14. 27. 
 28, 16. 17. Heb. 13, 3. So Paul calls him 
 self decrp-ios TOV Xpicrrou or ev Kvpi<a, 
 a prisoner of Christ or in the Lord, i. e. the 
 Lord s prisoner, a prisoner for the sake of 
 Christ and his cause, Eph. 3,1. 4,1. 2 Tim. 
 1,8. Philem. 1.9; and so of other prisoners 
 for Christ, absol. Heb. 10, 34 Griesb. Sept. 
 for -HOS Zech. 9, 11. 12. Hdian. 1. 6. 16. 
 Plut. Phllopoem. 21. Soph. Ajax 299. 
 
 SecyioV, oC, 6, (Sa,) a band, bond; 
 Plur. by metapl. 01 Secr/^ot and TO. Sea^d, 
 Buttm. j 56. 6. 
 
 1. Sing, of any ligament or impediment 
 by which a member of the body is lamed, a 
 band; Mark 7, 35 6 8ea-p.6s rfjs yXwa-orj?. 
 Luke 13, 16 comp. 11. Pr. and genr. Sept. 
 for *viex Judg. 15, 13. Hdian. 8. 4. 11. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 24. 
 
 2. Plur. Moeris p. 127, Secr/id, ot*Sere - 
 pcas, ATTIKCOS Setr/ioi, dpcrevincos, EXX?;- 
 vixcas. Thorn. Mag. p. 204, Secr^a AcdXXtov 
 77 Secr/ioi. Yet Plato uses generally ot 8e- 
 07101. TOVS Secr/iovy, once ra 8ecrp,d, see Ast s 
 Lex. Plat. s. v. a) ol deo-p-oi Phil. 1, 
 13, and so prob. elsewhere in the epistles, 
 Phil. 1,7. 14. 16 [17]. Col. 4, 18. 2 Tim. 2, 9. 
 Philem. 10. 13 eV r. decrp-ols TOV euayyeXi ou, 
 in bonds for the gospel s sake. Heb. 11,36 
 
 10, 34 Rec. Jude 6. Sept. for -isiDS Judg. 
 15, 14 ; ibia Job 39, 5. So Hom. Od. 8. 
 340. Eurip. Bacch. 518. Plato Grit. 6. p. 
 46. c. b) TO Seo-p-d, in Luke s writings, 
 Luke 8, 29. Acts 16, 26 ; and so prob. Acts 
 20, 23. 22, 30. 23,29. 26, 29. 31. So Jos. 
 Ant. 2. 5. 1. Luc. D. Deor. 15. 3. Plato 
 once Euthyphr. 10. p. 9. a. 
 
 a prison-keeper, jailer, Acts 16, 23. 27. 36. 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 5. 1. Luc. Tox. 2, 30. Dion 
 Cass. 1279. 9. 
 
 Secr/AWTijpiov, [ O v, TO, (Setr/xdo),) a pri 
 son, Matt. 11, 2. Acts 5, 21. 23. 16, 26. 
 Sept. for -isnb r^3 Gen. 40, 3. Dem. 764. 
 22. Plato P~haed. 59. d. 
 
 ou, 6, (Secr/idw,) a prisoner, 
 Acts 27, 1. 42, i. q. SeV/nos in 28, 16. Sept. 
 for *iit5X Gen. 39, 20. Jos. Ant. 2. 5. 1. 
 Dem. 764. 22. Plato Rep. 514. b. 
 
 SecrTroTT??, ov, 6, I. a master, as opp. 
 a servant, the head of a family, paterfami 
 lias, 1 Tim. 6, 1. 2. 2 Tim. 2, 21. Tit. 2,9. 
 1 Pet. 2, 18. Wisd. 18, 11. Plut. Sept. 
 Sap. Conv. 12 bis. Xen. Cyr. 1. 1. 1. 
 
 2. As denoting supreme authority, Lord ; 
 spoken of God, Luke 2, 29. Acts 4, 24. 
 Rev. 6, 10 ; of Christ 2 Pet. 2, 1. Jude 4. 
 Sept. for -pix Is. 1, 24; rrjrn Prov. 29, 
 26. Jos. Ant. 1. 3. 1. So T of" a king or 
 emperor, a despot, Hdian. 1. 6. 4. Xen. Cvr. 
 1. 3. 18. 
 
 Sevpo, adv. here, hither, i. e. to this 
 place or time. 
 
 1. Of place, here, hither, pr. with a verb 
 of motion, Jos. Ant. 2.6.3 rjp,f1s Sevpo fj\- 
 3o/*ei/. Xen. An. 7. 6. 9. In N. T. as an 
 exclamation or sort of imperative, here ! 
 hither ! come hither ! and having a Plur. 
 8evTf, which see in its order ; Buttm. 5 115. 
 n. 8. John 11,43 SeCpo eo>, come forth ! 
 Acts 7, 3 SfOpo els y^v. Sept. for ^b 
 1 K. 1, 53. 2 K. 9, 1. So Aristoph. Pac". 
 1329. Plato Rep. 445. d. Before an im- 
 perat. ftfvpo, aKoAot&ei p.oi, Matt. 19, 21. 
 Mark 10. 21. Luke 18, 22. So Sept. and 
 iK-ia 2 Sam. 13, 11 ; ^ Judg. 9, 10. 12., 
 Luc. Vitar. Auct. 15. Plato Crat. 422. c. 
 Before 1 pers. fut. Indie. Acts 7, 34 Ktu vvv 
 Sevpo. dn-oorrfXw ere els Aty. Rev. 17, 1 SeOpo, 
 8ei o> croi TO Kpip,a KT\. 21, 9. So Sept. 
 and "$ 1 Sam. 16, 1. Judg. 19, 11. 13. 
 Horn. II. 23. 485. 
 
 2. Of time, now, up to this time ; so a^pi 
 rov Sevpo (xpo /ou )j unt - this time, Rom. 1, 
 13._S 0/ ie xpt Sevpo Plut. Pomp. 24. Thuc, 
 3. 64. 
 
163 
 
 Sevre, adv. pr. SeCp ITC, Buttm. $ 115. 
 n. 8, used as Plur. of Sevpo q. v. but only 
 in exclamations, here ! hither ! come Cither ! 
 spoken to several ; e. g. e{)re fls, come to, 
 Matt. 22, 4. Mark 6, 31 ; 8evre irpos, come 
 to, Matt. 11, 28 ; SeCrf m urut p.ov, come af 
 ter, follow me, Matt. 4, 19. Mark 1, 17; so 
 Sept. for -nnx sob 2 K. 6, 19. Before 
 an imperat. or the like ; e. g. SeOre, 0770- 
 KTfivvfJLfv avTov, Matt. 21, 38. Mark 12, 7. 
 Luke 20, 14. (Sept. and sob Gen. 37, 19.) 
 So SfvTf, Serf, Matt. 28, 6. John 4, 29 ; 
 also Matt. 25, 34. John 21, 12. Rev. 19, 17. 
 Sept. for sob 2 K. 7, 14. So Wisd. 2, 6. 
 Plut. Coriolan. 33. 
 
 Seure/3ato9, ai a, aloi , (SevTfpos,) mark 
 ing succession of days, and used only in an 
 adverbial sense, on the second day ; Acts 28, 
 13 SfvTfpaiot fp^ofifv. See Buttm. $ 123. 6. 
 Kiihner } 264. 3. Jos. Ant. 1. 10. 1. Pol. 
 2. 70. 4. Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 2. 
 
 SevTepo-TrpwTos, O u, 6, ^, adj. pr. the 
 second-first, only in Luke 6, 1 o-dfiftarov TO 
 SfVTfpoTrptoTov, prob. the second-first sabbath, 
 as pr. n. for the first sabbath after the second 
 day of unleavened bread connected with 
 the passover. The paschal lamb was to be 
 killed near the close of the 14th day of Ni- 
 san, and was eaten the same evening, i. e. 
 the evening which was reckoned to and 
 began the 15th day, Lev. 23, 5. Gr. Harm, 
 p. 211, 212 ; on the 15th was the first day 
 of the festival of unleavened bread, a day of 
 rest or sabbath Lev. 23, 6. 7, and, when 
 coinciding with the weekly sabbath, called 
 fjL(yd\r] T]fi(pa TOV (ra/3/3arou, a great sab 
 bath or high festival, John 19, 31 ; on the 
 morrow of this sabbath, or the 16th of Ni- 
 san, the sheaf of the first-fruits was to be 
 presented, Lev. 23, 10. 11 ; and from this 
 day, the 16th, were to be counted seven 
 full weeks to the day of Pentecost, Sept. 
 OTTO Tijs SfVTfpas TOV ivd(j")(a, Lev. 23, 15. 16. 
 Tlie sabbath of the first of these weeks was 
 probably the crdfilBaTov 8fVTfpoTrpa>Tov, being 
 the first of the seven, but the second in re 
 spect to the first day or sabbath of unlea 
 vened bread. See Scaliger de Emend. Temp. 
 6. p. 557. Casaub. Exercit. Antibar. p. 272. 
 Winer Realw. art. Sabbath, fin. 
 
 SeurepO9, a , ov, ordin. adj. (Svo,) second, 
 the second, e. g. 
 
 1 . In time or order of succession, Matt. 
 22, 26. Luke 19, 18. John 4, 54. Acts 13, 
 33 Rec. 1 Cor. 15, 47. Heb. 8, 7. 10, 9. 
 2 Pet. 3, 1. al. Sept. 1 K. 15, 25. Hdian. 
 1. 15. 7. Thuc. 2. 6. 
 
 2. In place ; Acts 12, 10 Trpomji/ <pv\a- 
 
 KTJV KCU 8evTpav. Heb. 9, 3. 7. So Plato 
 Rep. 523. c. Trop. in rank or importance, 
 Matt. 22, 39. Mark 12, 31. So Plato. PhiL 
 66. a. 
 
 3. Neut. adverbially, e. g. a) SCUT? - 
 pov, the second time, again, John 3, 4. 
 Rev. 19, 3 ; with Trd\iv John 21, 16. Sept. 
 for mati Gen. 22, 15. (Pol. 8. 1. 7. Plato 
 Polit. 260. d.) Also secondly, in the second 
 place, I Cor. 12, 28; so Pol. 2. 139. 6 
 Plato Phil. 15. e. b) With art. TO 8ev- 
 Tepov, the second time, again, 2 Cor. 13,2. 
 Jude 5. Sept. for fH3tt!> Gen. 41, 5. So 
 ^Esop. Fab. 5. Thuc. l . 131. c) eV 8*v- 
 Ttpov, the second time, again, Mark 14, 
 72. John 9, 24. Acts 11,9. Heb. 9, 28 ; 
 with TrdXiv Matt. 26,42. Acts 10, 15. Sept. 
 for rn3ttj John 5, 2. So Luc. Amor. 50. 
 d) ev r<a Seurepo), in (at) the second 
 time, Acts 7, 13. Comp. Luc. Bis. ace. 20 
 fv Seirrepw. + 
 
 f. /iat, Mid.depon. alsoperf. 
 with Mid. signif. Buttm. } 136. 3. 
 
 1. Of things, to take, to receive, to accept, 
 pr. what is offered. a) Pr. of what one 
 takes to himself, into his hands, etc. c. ace. 
 Luke 2, 28 e Se^aro avTo fls TO.S dyKaXas 
 avTov. 16, 6. 7 8fai (rov TO ypdp.fj.a, i. e. 
 take it back from me. 22, 17. Eph. 6, 17. 
 Sept. for ^?p? 2 Chr. 29, 16. 22. So Horn. 
 II. 5. 227 fidoriya KOI fjvia. Luc. Tim. 34. 
 Xen. Eq. 7. 9. b) Genr. e. g. TTJV x<*P lv i 
 the gift, i. e. the collection, 2 Cor. 8, 4 ; 
 Aoyta a>vra Acts 7, 38 : ra Trap vp.u>v Phil. 
 4, 18 ; and so eVioroAaj irapd TWOS Acts 
 22, 5, or aTTo TIVOS 28, 21. Sept. for npb 
 Gen. 33, 10. So Plut. Themist. 28. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 4. 10. c) Trop. to receive, to ad 
 mit, to embrace, c. ace. as TTJV ftao-i\eiav 
 TOV 3eo> Mark 10, 15. Luke 18, 17; x^P lv > 
 grace, 2 Cor. 6, 1 ; TOV \6yov Luke 8, 13. 
 Acts 8, 14. 11, 1. 17, 11. 1 Thess. 1, 6. 
 2, 13. James 1, 21 ; (vayytXtov 2 Cor. 11, 
 4 ; also 1 Cor. 2, 14. 2 Cor. 8, 17. 2 Thess. 
 2, 10; ace. impl. Matt. 11, 14. Sept. for 
 f|3b Prov. 10, 8. So Hdian. 2. 3. 12. Plut 
 Themist. 12. Thuc. 4. 16. 
 
 2. Of persons, to receive, to admit, to wel 
 come, c. ace. a) Genr. as a guest, friend, 
 teacher ; so with ace. and ds TOV OIKOV Luke 
 16, 4. 9. (Arr. Epict. 3. 26 fls olniav. Xen. 
 An. 5. 5. 20 fls TOS o-Teyas.) Ace. simply, 
 Matt. 10, 14. 40 quater. 41 bis. 18, 5 bis. Mark 
 6, 11. 9, 37 quater. Luke 9, 5. 48 quater. 
 53. 10, 8. 10. John 4, 45. Gal. 4, 14. Col. 
 4, 10; with do-^eVwj Acts 21, 17; with 
 p.tTa c. gen. of manner, 2 Cor. 7, 15. Heb. 
 11, 31. So Hdian. 7. 5. 4. Xen. An. 4. & 
 
164 
 
 23 ; AcaXuj Sex- ib - 5 - 6 - 2 - s P ec> * ? e " 
 erne into heaven, TO irvtvp-d pov Acts 7, 
 59 ; SO 3, 21 6i/ Set ovpavbv Seao-3at. b) 
 Also to receive or adwn i to one s presence, 
 where one is ; e. g. rovy 6 xXovs Luke 9, 11. 
 With ace. and predicate, to receive as any 
 thing, q. d. to bear with; 2 Cor. 11, 16 as 
 afppova 8e ao-3e p.f. 
 
 Sea), to need, to want, see arts. Sei and 
 Seo/nai. 
 
 Sea), f. STJO-W, aor. 1 e Srjo-a, perf. Se Sexa, 
 Pass. perf. S/Sejuai, comp. Buttm. 95. n. 
 4 ; to iind, e. g. 
 
 1. Of things, to bind, to tie, to make fast, 
 C. ace. Matt. 13, 30 Sr)<rare avra fls 8eo~p,as. 
 Pass. Acts 10, 11. Matt. 21, 2 ovov SeSe/ze- 
 w/i/. Mark 11, 2. 4. Luke 19, 30. Sept. for 
 IS?]? Josh. 2, 21. So Pol. 1. 23. 6. Xen. 
 An. 3. 5. 10. ib. 5. 8. 24. Spoken of dead 
 bodies which are bound around with grave- 
 clothes ; John 11,44 SeSe/xeVoy rovs irodas 
 Keipiais. 19, 40 e^rjaav avro ev faovlois. 
 So 8eSeo-3ai ev TIVI Xen. An. 4. 3. 8. Trop. 
 > Matt. 16, 19 bis, and 18, 18 bis, 6 lav 8770775 
 (oo-o (civ 8r)o-r7Te) eVi TTJS yrjs, eorai Se8e/ie- 
 vov ev TOIS ovpavols KOI o eav \vo~rjs (oo~a 
 eav \vo-r]Tf) firl rf/s yrjs, e crrai \e\vp-evov ev 
 rois ovpavols, whatsoever thou shall (ye shall) 
 bind on earth, shall be bound in heaven, etc. 
 Here Matt. 18, 18 refers to the order and 
 discipline of the church and to offences 
 against these ; comp. v. 15-17. It is there 
 fore parallel to John 20, 23, where the like 
 idea is expressed literally by xparelv and 
 d(pievai; and hence Matt. 16, 19 is to be 
 understood in the same way. The apostles 
 as Christ s representatives are to have the 
 power of administering this order and disci 
 pline ; and whatever they thus do in his 
 name and through his spirit, he will con 
 firm; comp. John 16, 13. To express this 
 idea, Christ here makes use of the later 
 Hebrew proverbial phrase, iTiiTi *iOx , or 
 iTlttJI "lOX , to bind and to loose, i. q. to for 
 bid and to permit ; while in John 20, 23 he 
 speaks without figure. See Lightf. Hor. 
 Heb. in Matt. 16, 19 ; comp. \veiv d^apriav 
 Sept. Is. 40, 2. 
 
 2. Of persons, to bind with chains, mana 
 cles, fetters, to put in bonds or confinement 
 as a prisoner. 
 
 a) Pr. and genr. c. ace. of pers. Matt. 
 
 12, 29 877077 TOV to-xvpov. 27, 2. Mark 3, 
 27. 15, 1. John 18, 12. Acts 9, 14. 21, 11 
 fin. 22, 29. Pass. John 18, 24. Acts 9, 2. 
 21. 21, 13. 22, 5. Col. 4, 3. Rev. 9, 14. 
 Trop. of Satan as causing disease, Luke 
 
 13. 16 comp. 11 ; see in 8aip.6vi.ov, note. 
 
 Sept. for "it?!* Gen. 42, 24. (Dem. 745. 12. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 49.) With ace. of the 
 part hound ; Matt. 22, 13 Sr)o-airey avrov 
 7r68as KOI x f W a s- Acts 21, 11 init. With 
 dat. added, dXvo-ecri, with chains, Mark 5, 3. 
 4. Acts 21, 33 ; so Thuc. 3. 104. Also to 
 be bound in prison ; with ace. and ev (pv- 
 XdKfj Matt. 14, 3. Mark 6,17; absol.Mark 
 15, 7. Acts 24, 27. Rev. 20, 2 comp. 3 ; 
 with aXvo-fo-i Acts 12, 6. Sept. and "lOX 
 2 K. 17, 4. So Dem. 745. 18. Plato Rep". 
 579. b. 
 
 b) Trop. Pass. perf. 8e8ep.ai like Prea. 
 to be bound,coTmp. Buttm. ^ 113. 7. Kiihner 
 5 255. n. 5. a) With dat. of pers. to be 
 bound to any one, i. e. in the conjugal bond, 
 Rom. 7, 2 yvvrj . . . avftpl SeSerai. 1 Cor. 7, 
 27 ; dat. impl. v. 39. So Achill. Tat. p. 41 
 aXXfl yap SeSe/iat TrapSeVw. Jamblich. Py- 
 thag. 11. 56. /3) Acts 20, 22 8e8ep,evos 
 TO> irvevjiari, bound in spirit, i. e. impelled 
 in mind, constrained ; comp. 18, 5. 23. So 
 Find. Pyth. 3. 96. Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 12 SeSf- 
 p.evovs . . . dvdyKTj. y) Once of the gospel ; 
 2 Tim. 2, 9 dXX" 6 Xoyos TOV 3eov ov Se Se- 
 rai, i. e. the preaching of the gospel is not 
 hindered because I am in bonds. 
 
 &7, (?7 8>7,) a particle found eight times 
 in N. T. put after one or more words in a 
 clause, and denoting in general what is 
 sure, certain, settled, known. Its use is to 
 define more exactly and to render more- 
 emphatic the word with which it stands, 
 indeed, truly, surely. See Kiihner 315. 
 Ausf. Gr. $ 691. Hartung Lehre v. d. Part. 
 I. p. 245 sq. Buttm. $ 149. m. 28. 
 
 1. Genr. indeed, truly, doubtless; Matt. 
 13, 23 6s Sr) Kap7ro(popf1, who indeed beareth 
 fruit. 2 Cor. 12, 1 Kavxdcr^ai Sr} ov o-vp.(pe- 
 pfi p.oi. Sept. Job 15, 17. Hdian. 1. 17. 22. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 21 ontp Sr) KOI TrXe/o-rois 
 eVtSeiKwrac. QEc. 1. 14. 
 
 2. With an Imperat. or Subjunct. it is 
 emphatic or hortative, indeed now, now, then ; 
 Luke 2, 15 St/XSco/zfi/ Sr) W B^SXfe^j let 
 us indeed now go even unto Bethlehem. Acts 
 13, 2. 15, 36. 1 Cor. 6, 20. Sept. Gen. 18, 
 4. Hdian. 1. 4. 8. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 9. 
 
 3. With enclitic TTOTC and TTOV. a) Sr) 
 TT o T e , indeed ever, or ever indeed, added to a 
 relative or other word to render it more 
 general and comprehensive; Buttm. 116. 
 9. John 5, 4 w Sr) Trore Kareixero vocrr]p.ari, 
 whatsoever disease indeed he had. So Luc. 
 Jup. Trag. 15. Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 26. b) Srj 
 TTOV, certainly indeed, verily ; Heb. 2, 16 ov 
 yap 8rj TTOV dyye\a>v eTTtXa/z/Sai/erat. Buttm. 
 5 149. m. 31. Kiihner $ 315. 2. So Plut. 
 Phocion 8. Xen. Cyr. 5. 12. 
 
77X09 ] 
 
 077X09, rj, ov, (kindr. tSeij>,) clear, evident, 
 manifest ; Matt. 26, 73 for thy speech 8fj\6v 
 ere TToiei maketh thee manifest, known. Also 
 8fj\ov (eoTt) it is evident, manifest, 1 Cor. 
 15, 27. Gal. 3, 11. 1 Tim. 6, 7. Luc. D. 
 Mort. 25. 1. Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 37. 
 
 77X60), co, f. coo-to, (SijXoy,) to manifest, 
 to make known, e. g. a) Of things nar 
 rated, i. q. to declare, to tell; c. ace. et dat. 
 Col. 1,8. Pass. c. dat. et n-epi TIVOS, 1 Cor. 
 1, 11. Sept. for ?Tin Esth. 2,22. So 
 Hdian. 7. 7. 11. Xen. An. 2. 1. 1. b) Of 
 things future or unknown, to declare, to 
 show, to reveal ; c. ace. Heb. 9, 8 TOVTO 
 8rj\ovvTos TOV TrvfVfJiaTos. So C. ace. impl. 
 1 Cor. 3, 13 ; c. dat. 2 Pet. 1,14; c. ety riva 
 Kaip6v,for what time, 1 Pet. 1,11. Sept. for 
 IPT 1 " 1 Ex. 6, 3. So Hdian. 2. 8. 8. Plato Rep. 
 365. c. c) Ofwords,tos/g7ii/y,c. ace. Heb. 
 12, 27 TO 8f, eTi aira, 8r]\ol . . . TTJV p,era3f- 
 (riv. So Jos. Ant. 3. 7. 1 TOV ^.avao-a^v Xe- 
 yo/Mfvov /3ovXerai Se crvvaKTrjpa p.ev 8rj\ovv. 
 
 Ar^ia^ a, 6, Demas, pr. n. of a man 
 who was with Paul at Rome, but afterwards 
 deserted him ; Col. 4, 14. Philem. 24. 2 Tim. 
 
 4, 10. 
 
 Sr7yLi7? yOpe<i), co, f. JJCTCO, (Sijp-oy, dyopevco,) 
 to address the people, to harangue, in a pub 
 lic assembly ; with Trpo y c. ace. Acts 12, 21. 
 Sept. Neh. 8, 4. Hdian. 6. 3. 5 ; Trpo y 
 Ttva Plato Legg. 817. e. 
 
 Ar/fj,r]TploS) ov, 6, Demetrius, pr. n. 
 a) A silversmith at Ephesus, Acts 19, 24. 
 38. b) A Christian mentioned with com 
 mendation, 3 John 12. 
 
 ov, 6, (8ijp.os, epyov ; poet. 
 one working for the public, a 
 workman, craftsman, Horn. Od. 17. 383. 
 Dem. 1123. 14. Plato Rep. 598. b ; a maker, 
 author, ^Eschin. 84. 37. Plato Prot. 327. c. 
 In N. T. of God, the author, creator, of 
 the universe, Heb. 11, 10. So Jos. Ant. 7. 
 14. 11. Plato Rep. 530. a. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 7. 
 
 877^09, ov, 6, the people, the public, popu- 
 lus, Acts 12, 22. 19, 33 ; tls TOV 8^ov, to 
 the people, assembled in the forum, Acts 17, 
 
 5. 19, 30. JEl V. H. 2. 1. Xen. Mem. 4. 
 2. 37 sq. 
 
 Srjuocria, adv. (SqjuoVioy,) publicly, in 
 public, Acts 16, 37. 18, 28. 20, 20. See 
 Buttm. 115. 4. 2 Mace. 6, 10. Hdian. 1. 
 14. 14. Xen. Mem. 3. 12. 5. 
 
 877/^60-409, ia, ov, (Srjp-oy.) public, belong 
 ing to the public, common ; e. g. <V Trjpfio-fi 
 877/^00-10, in the public ward, common prison, 
 Acts 5, 18. Plut. Lucull. 29 fin. Ta 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 11. 16. 
 
 5 Std 
 
 Srjvdpiov, iov, TO, Lat. denarius, (deni,) 
 a Roman silver coin equivalent at first to 
 ten asses (as its name imports), and after 
 wards to sixteen, the as being reduced ; 
 Plin. H. N. 33. 13. When Greece became 
 subject to the Romans, and especially under 
 the emperors, the denarius was regarded 
 and became current as of equal value with 
 the Attic drachma, i. e. earlier at 8^d ster 
 ling, or 17 cents ; later at 1\d or 15 cents. 
 Boeckh Metrolog. Untersuch. p. 299, 452 
 sq. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 443. Diet, of Antt. 
 s. v. See fully in dpyvpiov no. 2. Matt. 
 18, 28. 20, 2. 9. 10. 13. 22, 19. Mark 6, 
 37. 12, 15. 14, 5. Luke 7, 41. 10, 35. 20, 
 24. John 6, 7. 12, 5. Rev. 6, 6 bis. 
 
 S^TTore, SIJTTOV, see in art. 8r) no. 3. 
 
 Sta, prep, governing the genitive and 
 accusative, with the primary signif. through, 
 throughout ; see Buttm. 147. Kiihner 
 ^291. Winer $51. i. 53. c. 
 
 1. With the GENITIVE. 1. Of Place, 
 implying motion through^ place, and put 
 after verbs of motion, e. g. of going and 
 coming, as dva^pflv, Matt. 2, 12 Si aXXr/s 
 68ov dve^<apr]o~av. So with Sta/3atWtc, Heb. 
 11, 29 ; 8ia7ropeveo-3at, Luke 6, 1 ; Sie p^f- 
 o-3ai, Matt. 12, 43. 19, 24. Luke 4, 30 ; 
 fla-epx- Matt. 7, 13 bis. John 10, 1. 9 ; eWo- 
 pevco-Sai Matt. 4, 4 ; ep^eo-Sai Mark 10, 1 ; 
 Trapcnropfv(o~ 5ai Mark 2, 23. 9, 30 ; Trapep^. 
 Matt. 8, 28 ; vTroo-rpe cpeu/ Acts 20, 3. (Diod; 
 Sic. 20. 111. Xen. Hi. 2. 8 coy Sta TroXep ay 
 TTOpfvovrai.) Also fit v/icov dTrep^ecrSai or 
 fitfXSetj/, i. e. through your city, Rom. 15, 28. 
 2 Cor. 1, 16. So Xen. An. 4. 8. 1. With 
 many other verbs implying motion ; 2 Cor. 
 8, 18 ov 6 enaivos 8ia Tratrcoz/ TO>V fKK\r)o-i<oi> 
 SC. Stayye XXerat. So after / 8Xe7reti 1 Cor. 
 13, 12 ; Sta(p/pj/Mark 11, 16. Acts 13, 49 ; 
 KaSifvai Luke 5, 19 ; xoXao-aJji/at 2 Cor. 
 1 1, 33 ; coy 81.0. nvpos sc. o-ca^fjvat, to be saved 
 as through fire, i. . as if passing through 
 fire, 1 Cor. 3, 15 ; see in nvp no. 1 ult. 
 So after KaSuvai Palaeph. Fab. 13 ; Ka%ifj.av 
 Jos. Ant. 5. 1.2; 8iappveiv Luc. D. Mort. 
 17. 1 ; n\f1v ib. 20. 2 ; ayeiv Xen. An. 4. 
 5. 36 -, f\avveiv ib. 7. 3. 43, 
 
 2. Of Time, e. g. a) Continued time, 
 time how long, through, throughout, during ; 
 Acts 1,3 81 rjp.fpa>v Tfo-o-api iKovra, during 
 forty days. Heb. 2, 15 Sta iravrbs TOV fjv, 
 during their whole life. So Luc. Icarom, 
 24 8ia TTfvre o\a>v ercov. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 61 
 Sia iravros TOV /3tov. Cyr. 2. 1. 19. So 8ia 
 TTJS VVKTOS through the night, during the 
 night, Acts 23, 31 ; Sta oX^y i-fjy v. Luke 
 5, 5. (Charit. 1. 5. Xen. An. 4. 6. 22 Sta 
 wKTo y.) Also less definitely, Sta rrjs vv- 
 
Sia 
 
 166 
 
 KTOS, during the night, i. e. at some time in 
 the night, by night ; Acts 5, 19 8ia rrjs v. 
 ijvoil-f Tas %vpas TTJS <fiv\aKrjs. 16,9. 17,10; 
 comp. Palaeph. 1 Karafiaivovres 8id WKTOS 
 (Is TO. TT(8ia. Hence adverbially, 8ia irav- 
 TOS sc. xpovov v. Kaipov, (written also 8ia- 
 n-avros,) throughout all time, i. e. continually, 
 always; Mark 5, 5. Acts 2, 25. 24, 16. 
 Rom. 11, 10. 2 Thess. 3, 16. Heb. 13, 15; 
 also of what is done at all stated or proper 
 times, Luke 24, 53. Acts 10, 2. Heb. 9, 6. 
 Sept. for !& Deut. 11, 12. So Diod. 
 Sic. 2. 16. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 3, 4. b) Of 
 an interval of time elapsed, after, e. g. Acts 
 24, 17 81 eTwv TT\ei6va>v, after many years, 
 i. e. many years being through, elapsed. 
 Gal. 2, 1 8id 8fKaTo~o-dpuv e rcoj/. Mark 2, 1 
 81 f)p.fpS)v sc. Tivcav. Matt. 26, 61. Mark 
 14, 58. See Winer 5 51. i. So Sept. for 
 PIS ? Deut. 9, 11. 15, I. Ml. V. H. 13. 
 41 [42]. Diod. Sic. 5. 28. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 
 28 fJKto 8ia xpovov. 
 
 3. Of the intermediate cause, the instru 
 ment or means ; that which intervenes be 
 tween the act of the will and the effect, 
 and through which the effect is produced ; 
 through, by, by means of; see Winer j 51. i. 
 
 a) With a gen. of thing, through, by, by 
 means of. a ) Genr. 2 John 12 and 3 John 
 13 ypdfaiv . . . 8ia ^aprou /cm peXavos. 1 Pet. 
 
 I, 7 8ia irvpbs 8e SoKipagopevov. 3, 20 Sie- 
 o-wZrjo-av 81 vSaros. 2 Pet. 3, 5. Mark 16, 
 20 TOV \6yov (3{IBaiovvTos 8id crrj^eiav. John 
 
 II, 4. Acts 8, 20. Heb. 12, 15. al. So 8ia 
 Xfipds V. 8ia xeipatv TWOS, by the hand 
 or hands of any one, as the instrument with 
 which he acts ; Mark 6, 2. Acts 5, 12. 11, 
 30. 14, 3. 15, 23. al. Winer 5 67. 2. Also 
 8ia rov (TTopaTos TWOS, Acts 1, 16. 3, 
 18. 21. 4, 25. (Plato Phjedr. 242. d, bs 8ia 
 TOII fp.ov (TTop-aTos . . e Xe ^3^.) 1 Cor. 14, 9 
 8id TTJS y\axrcrT)s, by or with the tongue, v. 
 19 8ia TOV voos p-ov, through or with my 
 understanding. 1 Cor. 16, 3 81 eVio-roAcoi/ 
 TOVTOVS TTffJL^oa, these I will send (introduce) 
 through letters, comp. Winer 51. i, note b ; 
 and so 2 Cor. 10, 9. 11. 2 Thess. 2, 2. 15. 
 3vl4. So8ia TOV aipaTos I. Xp. through 
 the blood of Jesus, i. e. Ms life as an atoning 
 or expiatory sacrifice, Acts 20, 28. Eph. 1, 
 7. Col. 1, 20. Heb. 13, 12 ; and in the same 
 sense, 8ia TOV Snrarou TOV vlov Rom. 5, 10. 
 Col. 1, 22. Heb. 2, 14 ; 8ta TOV crd>p.aTos TOV 
 Xp. sc. 3ai aTa>3eVros Rom. 7, 4 comp. 1 Pet. 
 3, 18 ; 8ia TOV o-Tavpov Eph. 2, 16 ; 8ia TTJS 
 Svcri ar avrov Heb. 9, 26 ; 8ia TTJS jrpocnpo- 
 pas TOV crco/iaros Heb. 10, 1 ; 8ia TraS^/aarcoi/ 
 Heb. 2, 10 ; also in a similar reference, 1 Pet. 
 1, 3 8C dvao-T<i(Tf(os I. Xp. 3, 21. 2 Tim. 1, 
 
 10. Gal. 1,12. Rom. 6, 4. al. Also bib 
 TTJS iria-Tf (os, through or by faith, Rom. 
 1, 12. 3, 22. 25. 30. 31. Gal. 2, 16. Phil. 3, 
 9. al. saepe; 8ia Trjs ^apiTos Acts 18, 
 27. 15, 11. Heb. 12, 28; 8ia SeXVaros 
 Seov Rom. 15, 32. 1 Cor. 1, 1. 2 Cor. 1, 1. 
 al. So of things by or through which one 
 is hindered : Rom. 8, 3 eV < ^o-SeWt 8ta T^S 
 crap/coy. 1 Cor. 1, 21 OVK eyi/co 6 Koo-p-os 8ia 
 TTJS o-o(pias TOV Sew, i. e. by its own wisdom, 
 because of it. Comp. genr. Palasph. 1, 2. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 31 Sav/xacrra 8ia TTJS TroXi^ei- 
 pias KaTao-KevdaavTes. JEA. V. H. 2. 5 fin. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 5. 6 T>V 8id TOV o-utpaTos 
 fj8ovcav. /3) Also through, i. q. because of, 
 by reason of, by occasion of; Rom. 12, 3 
 Xeyco 8id TTJS xdpiTOs TTJS 8o%fio-r)s p.oi. 2 Cor. 
 8,8. 9, 13. Gal. 1, 16. 3,18. 4,23. Philem. 
 
 22. So Pol. 7. 17. 4. Xen. An. 3. 2. 8. y) 
 In entreaty or exhortation, through or by any 
 thing ; Rom. 12,1 jrapctKaXw vjj.ds 8id TU>V 
 oLKTipfiuv TOV 3eo{). 15, 30 8ia TTJS dydnrjs 
 TOV TTV. 1 Cor. 1, 10. 2 Cor. 10, 1. 
 
 b) Of persons through whose hands as it 
 were any thing passes, through or by whose 
 agency or ministry an effect is produced, 
 the efficient cause. a) Genr. as TO p^tv 
 . .. 8ta TOV Trpo(prjTov Matt. 1, 22. 2, 15. 
 
 23. 4, 14. Acts 2, 16. al. Luke 18, 31 TO 
 yfypappfva Sia TU>V Trpo(prjTu>v. Acts 28, 25. 
 Rom. 1, 2. John 1, 17 and Heb. 3, 16 Sia 
 ManJo-eW Heb. 7, 9 81 A/3paa/x. 2 Tim. 2, 2 
 Sta TroXXcoT napTvpcov. Gal. 3, 19 and Heb. 2. 
 2 81 dyye Xo)!/, by or through angels, i. e. the 
 giving of the law (comp. Sept. Deut. 33, 2. 
 Jos. Ant. 15. 5. 3 TO. 6<rio>rara TU>V Iv TOIS 
 vocals 81 ayyeXtoj/ Trapa TOV SeoC p-aSovTotv). 
 Acts 2, 43. 4, 16. 12, 9. Rom. 15, 18. 1 
 Cor. 11, 12 6 dvr/p 8ia TTJS yvvaiKos. 2 Cor. 
 1, 11. 19 bis. Gal. 1, 1. Eph. 3, 10. al. 
 saep. So through the fault of any one, 
 Matt. 18, 7. 26, 24. Rom. 5, 12. 16. 19. 
 
 1 Cor. 15, 21. al. Sept. for & *^a 2 Chr. 
 29, 5. So Hdian. 1. 8. 17. Xen. (Ec. 21. 
 
 11. Plato Tim. 41. c. /3) Spec, of Christ 
 and the Holy Spirit, as the agents and 
 ministers through or by whom the coun 
 sels of God are accomplished. Of Christ, 
 genr. 1 Cor. 15, 57 TW Sew . . . rw StSoVn 
 T)[UV TO vlKos 8ia TOV Kvpiov I. Xp. Rom. 2 
 1 6 fv rjp-epq ore xpivti 6 Seos . . . Sta I. X 
 
 2 Cor. 4, 14 f]fj.ds 8ia irja-ov e yepet. Acts 3 
 16 77 rrio-Tisr] 81 avTov. Rom. 5, 17. 2 Cor 
 5, 18. Gal. 1, 1. 4, 7. Eph. 1, 5. Col. 1, 20 
 bis. Heb. 2, 3. al. As he through whom 
 we receive forgiveness of sin and salvation ; 
 Acts 1 3, 38 OTI 8id TOVTOV vp.lv a(peo-is dp.ap- 
 TIMV (carayyeXXerai. Rom. 5, 1. 2. 9. 11. 17. 
 21. 2 Cor. 1, 5. 3,4. Eph. 2, 18. 1 Thess 
 
167 
 
 Std 
 
 4, 14. al. As our intercessor, through or by 
 whom we give thanks ; Rom. 1,8 et>xapio-ro> 
 TW 3ea> p.ov Sid I. Xp. inrep KT\. 7, 25. Col. 3, 
 17. H*eb. 13, 15. 1 Pet. 2, 5. In exhorta 
 tion or command, through or by his authori 
 ty, Rom. 15, 30. 1 Thess. 4, 2. 2 Thess. 
 3, 12. Also of the Holy Spirit ; Acts 1, 2 
 fVTfihdfJifvos rots aTiwrrdXoiy Sid Trvfvfiaros 
 dyiov, 11. 28. 21, 4. Rom. 5, 5. 1 Cor. 2, 
 10. Eph. 3, 16. Heb. 9, 14. al. y) In 
 this construction Sid may also refer to the 
 author or first cause, when the author does 
 any thing through himself instead oT ano 
 ther ; e. g. of God, Rom. 11, 36 on e av- 
 TOV, KCU Si avTov, KOI fls O.VTOV TO. irdvra. 
 Heb. 2, 10. 1 Cor. 1,96 3e6y, Si ov fK\rj- 
 SrjTe. So of Christ, e. g. as 6 \6yos and 
 creator, John 1, 3 Trdvra fit avTov eyevtTo. V. 
 10. Col. 1, 16 TO. Trdvra Si aiirov KOL fls av- 
 TOV fKTurrai. Heb. 1,3. Com p. Heb. 1, 2. 
 Dem. 1234. 14 iravra 81 avrav iroiovvrai. 
 Xen.Mem. 1. 2. 14. Hi. 9. 3. 
 
 4. Of the inanner, condition, circum 
 stances, through which any thing as it were 
 passes, i. e. takes place, is produced. 
 
 a) Of manner, where Sid with its genit. 
 may often be rendered in Engl. by a corres 
 ponding adverb. Luke 8, 4 elire Sid Trapa- 
 /3oXijj, lit. through a parable, i. e. by means 
 of, with a parable, 7rapa/3oXiKo>?. Acts 15, 
 27 Sid Xoyou, by word, i. e. orally. Rom. 8, 
 25 et Heb. 12, 1 Si v7Top.6vr]s, through or 
 with patience, i. e. patiently. Rom. 14, 20 
 Sid 7rpocrKo/i/iaTor, i. e. so as to give offence. 
 Acts 15, 32 Sid Xoyov TroXXou through many 
 words, with much discourse. Eph. 6, 18. 
 Rom. 14. 14 ov8fv KOIVOV 81 O.VTOV, through 
 itself, in and of its own nature. John 19, 
 23 Si oXov, throughout. Also Sid /3pa^ecov, 
 Si o\iyuv, briefly, Heb. 13,22. 1 Pet. 5, 12. 
 So Sid TUX* quickly JEl V. H. 1. 8. 
 Thuc. 3. 13; Si a7roppijT&>i> secretly Diod. 
 Sic. 11. 44. Plato Rep. 378. a ; Sid /Spa^e- 
 wv Luc. Tox. 56. Plato Gorg. 449. a ; genr. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 20. 
 
 b) Of the condition, circumstances, state 
 of mind, through, by, in which any thing is 
 done ; where Engl. often with. Rom. 2, 27 
 <re TOV Sid ypdpp.aTos KOI Trepirop^j 7rapa/3d- 
 TJ\V vdpov. 4, 11. 2 Cor. 2, 4 Sid TroXXaJi/ 
 8aiepva>v. 3, 11. 5, 7 Sid Tr/crews yap rrepi- 
 TraTovpifv KT\. 6, 7. 8. Gal. 5, 13. Phil. 1, 
 20. 2 Pet. 1,3 Sid SOT?J KT\. Heb. 9, 12 
 ov8f Si aifjLaros rpdyutv KO.L p-ocr^cav . . . eter- 
 }A3ei fls TO. ayia. 1 John 5, 6 OVTOS tcrriv 
 6 e XSoji/ Si v8aros KOI alp-aTos, by water and 
 blood, i. e. baptism and his atoning death, as 
 accompaniments of his mission. Symm. 
 Ps. 55, 126 Sid /iiVous p.oi, Sept. 6 
 
 Luc. Macrob. 22 a-vyypcxpevs Sid 7roXXd 
 /xaS^/idrwi yfv6/j.fvos. Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 6 Sid 
 Tre fSov? TO yfjpas 8idy<av. An. 2. 5. 9. 
 
 c) Of the standard by which any tiling is 
 judged, through, by, according to ; so with 
 Kpivnv, Rom. 2, 12 Sid vnp.ov /cpi3ij(rovrai. 
 James 2, 12. 
 
 II. With the ACCUSATIVE ; used of place 
 by the poets, through, as fyevytiv Sid KV^ 
 aXioi> ./Eschyl. Suppl. 15, comp. above in 1. 1 ; 
 also of time, during, as Sid VVKTO. Horn. Od. 
 9. 143, 404 ; comp. in I. 2. Usually and in 
 N. T. of the moving cause, motive, occa 
 sion, i. e. according to the signif. of the 
 accus. that through which one is led to do 
 any act ; very rarely of the efficient cause 
 or means, as in I. 3. b. See Buttm. 147. 
 Kiihner 5 291. 2. Ausf. Gr. $ 605. 2. Wi 
 ner 5 53. c. 
 
 1. Of the moving cause, the motive or 
 occasion, because of, on account of, for the 
 sake of. 
 
 a) Of an internal motive or emotion; 
 Matt. 27, 18 and Mark 15, 10 on Sid <p3d- 
 vov TrapedtoKav avrov. Phil. 1, 15 Sid (pSoVov 
 KOI fptv. Luke 1, 78 Sid crn\dyxva eXcour 
 3eoi. Eph. 2, 4 and Philem. 9 Sid TI]V T>. 
 dyaTrrjv. Diod. Sic. 1. 8 Sid TOV (poftov. 
 Xen. Lac. 4. 6 Sid TTJV fpiv. 
 
 b) Of external circumstances operating 
 as a motive, cause, or occasion; Matt. 13, 
 21 and Mark 4, 17 ytvofJLfin]s Se 3Xn//-f 6>s . . . 
 Sid TOV \6yoi>. Matt. 13,58 Sid rr]v aTria-Tiav 
 avrcav. 14, 3 Sid HpwSidSa TTJV yvvaiKa 
 
 ^iXlTTTTOU. V. 9 Sid TOVS SpKOVS. 15, G. 17, 
 
 20. 19, 12. 24, 22. 27, 19. Mark 2, 4. 27 
 bis. Luke 5, 19. 8, 47. Acts 4, 21. 10,21. 
 Rom. 2,24 Si vp.ds because of you, because 
 of your evil deeds. 3, 25. 8, 10 bis. 20. 
 15, 15. 2 Cor. 4, 5. 11. 15 bis. Gal. 2/4. 
 4, 13 Si dcrSfvfiai rrjs crapKos, because of 
 weakness. Heb. 5, 12 Sid TOV xpovov because 
 of the time, i. e. the long time already spent, 
 v. 14 Sid TTJV fiv, by reason of habit. 2 Pet. 
 2, 2. 3, 12. 1 John 2, 12 Sid TO oVop,a av- 
 TOV, for his name s sake. 2 John 2. Rev. 1, 
 9. 4, 11. 12, 11. al. saep. (So Sept. Deut. 
 15, 10. JE1. V. H. 12. 6. Diod. Sic. 1. 7. 
 ib. 2. 16. Xen. An. 1. 9. 22 Sid TroXXd.) 
 Also 3avpvdffii> Sid TI, to mar id be 
 cause of or at any thing, Mark 6, 6. John 7, 
 22; TTKTTfvfiv 8 id TOV Xoyov TWOS to 
 believe because of the word of any one, John 
 4, 39. 41 ; x ai P flv ^ " rt to rejoice be 
 cause of any thing, John 3, 29 ; but ^. Si 
 vp.ds, to rejoice for your sakes, John 11,15; 
 /iio-e!o-3ai Sid TO ovopd pov, to be hated 
 for my name s sake, because of the profes 
 sion of mv "?rmp Matt. 10,22. 24,9. Mark 
 
Sid 
 
 168 
 
 13, 13. Luke 21, 17. Also where the cir 
 cumstance or motive is expressed by the 
 art. TO before an infin. clause ; e. g. inf. 
 simpl. Luke 23, 8 Sia TO axoveiv TroXXa Trepl 
 avTov. Heb. 7, 23 ; with p?, Matt. 13, 5 
 Sta TO pri exew fic&os yrfs. V. 6. Mark 4, 5. 
 6. Luke 8, 6. Pass. Luke 9, 7. (Xen. Hi. 
 
 1. 37 ; pj, Mem. 1. 3. 5.) Or inf. with ace. 
 of subj. Luke 11,8. 18, 5 Sia ye TO Trape- 
 
 %flV p.01 KOTTOV TT]V XnP aV TCIVTTJV. ActS 4, 2. 
 
 18, 2. 27, 4. 9. 28, 18. Phil. 1, 7. Heb. 7, 
 24. 10, 2 ; with p,f/ James 4, 2. Pass. 
 Matt. 24, 12. Mark 5, 4. Acts 12, 20. 18, 
 
 2. So Palasph. 2. Diod. Sic. 2. 16. Xen. 
 Cyr. 5. 5. 34. Spec, in phrases with a 
 pronoun : a) S i a T i , written also Start , 
 on what account 1 wherefore ? why ? Matt. 
 9, 11. 14. 13, 10. Mark 2, 18. Luke 5, 30. 
 33. John 7, 45. Rev. 17, 7. al. Sept. for 
 n^ Num. Jl, 11. So Xen. Mem. 3. 11.7. 
 /3) 8 1 d , for Si o, on account of which, and 
 then as illative conjunct, wherefore, there 
 fore, Matt. 27, 8. Luke 1, 35. 7, 7. Rom. 
 
 1, 24. 15, 7. Heb. 3, 7. 6, l.al. SoHdian. 
 
 2. 8. 5. Plato Gorg. 518. a. Strengthened, 
 Siorrep, on which very account, wherefore, 
 1 Cor. 8, 13. 10, 14. 14, 13. Comp. Buttm. 
 575. 3. So Judith 8, 17. Hdian. 1. 1. 10. 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 13. y) SIO TI, for Sia 
 TOVTO 6Yi, pr. on this account that, and then 
 conjunct, because that, i. q. simpl. because, 
 for; Luke 2, 7 SioYt OVK rjv avTols TOTTOS 
 ev TW KaTa\vfjLo.Ti, because there was no 
 placet 21, 28. Acts 17, 31. Rom. 1, 19. Gal. 
 2, 16. al. Sept. for ** Zeph. 2, 10. So 
 Luc. Tox. 16. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 15. S) 
 Sia TOVTO, on this account, for this cause 
 or reason, therefore, referring to what pre 
 cedes ; Matt. 6, 25 Sia TOVTO \eyco vfuv. 12, 
 27 . 31. Mark 6, 14. Luke 11, 19. 49. John 
 5, 16. 18. Acts 2, 26. Rom. 1, 26. 2 Cor. 
 4, 1. Rev. 18, 8. al. (Palseph. 33. Luc. 
 Abdic. 1. Xen. An. 7. 1. 9.) Also as refer 
 ring to what follows ; e. g. with JW. OTTOK, 
 that, in order that, 2 Cor. 13, 10 Sta TOVTO 
 TavTa cnra>v ypdcpco, iva KT\. 1 Tim. 1,16. 
 Philem. 15. Heb. 9, 15; inverted, John 1, 
 31. With 6Vi, because, John 5, 16. 18. 8, 
 47. 10, 17. 12, 18. 39. 1 John 3, 1 ; in 
 verted, John 15, 19. So c. Iva yEschin. 
 73. 1. 
 
 2. Rarely of the efficient cause or means, 
 through, i. e. because of, by reason of, as in 
 I. 3. b. So c. ace. of pers. John 6, 57 bis, 
 eyu> o> Sta rbv Trarepa . . . xal eKflvos fro~e- 
 rat Si f /ze. With ace. of thing, Rev. 13, 14 
 Kai TrXaw TOVS KaToiKOvvras eirl Trjs ytjs Sia 
 TCI a-rjp.f ia a KT\. See Winer 53. C. Horn. 
 Od. 8. 520 i/iK^o-ai Si ASii/jv. ^Eschin. 48. 
 
 14. Xen. Mem. 3. 3. 15. An. 7. 7. 7. JEs- 
 chyl. Sept. c. Th. 579 [561] Xe yet Se TOVT 
 CTTOS Sia o-TOfia. 
 
 NOTE. In composition Sta retains its 
 general signification, through, throughout, 
 e. g. a) Of space, through, over, Lat. 
 trans ; as 8iafiaiva), SiaTrXeco. b) Of time, 
 duration ; as SiayiVoynat, Siajaeva), Siaia<cre- 
 pevco. c) Of substance, through, through 
 out, permeating and intermingling with it ; 
 as StaXevKoy, Sia^putror ; not in N. T. 
 d) It marks the action of a verb as directed 
 through any thing, or between its parts, so 
 as to divide and separate them, Lat. dis ; as 
 SiaXe/TTO), Siaynepi co, 8iappr)ywp.i. e) In a 
 distributive or mutual sense, of persons, 
 throughout all, among or to all ; also among 
 or with one another; as Siayye XXa, SiaSi- 
 Sa)/ii, SiaXaXe co, SiaXeyo/xai. f) Intens. 
 through to the end, throughout, quite, com 
 pletely, thus strengthening the idea of the 
 simple verb ; as Sia/3e/3aid<, Sia/3XeV&>, Sta- 
 
 , f. ^o-opzt, (/3amo,) 1. to 
 pass through, c. ace. TTJV SaXao-o-ai/ Heb. 
 11, 29. Sept. for ^ Gen. 31, 21. Jos. 
 Ant. 7. 9. 7 TOV lopSa^i/. Hdian. 4. 11. 3. 
 Xen. Venat. 5. 16. 
 
 2. Intrans. to pass through or over to a 
 place ; with els c. ace. Acts 16, 9 ; TT/JO S c. 
 ace. Luke 16,26. Sept. for "O3>, c. els 
 1 Sam. 26, 13 ; npos 14, 8. So c. s Xen. 
 An. 7. 2. 9 ; irpos Thuc. 7. 82. 
 
 St,aftd\\(o, f. /3aXw, (/3aXX,) to Zftrowj 
 ewer or across, to transport, c. ace. Hdot. 5. 
 33. Thuc. 2. 83. In N. T. like Lat. tra- 
 duco, pr. to lead or git>e orer to any one ; 
 hence trop. to report, to traduce, to accuse ; 
 Pass. c. dat. Luke 16, 1 OVTOS SifjSXijS^ 
 avT<p a>s KT\. Sept. c. acc. et dat. Dan. 3, 
 8. So Hdian. 5. 6. 1 Sia/SX^SeVray airw <as 
 AcrX. Thuc. 5. 45. 
 
 Siafie@at6o[Aai : ofywu, f. wo-o/xat, Mid. 
 depon. (Sia intens. /3e/3aio a>,) pr. to ma/ce 
 quite firm ; hence to q^rm strongly, c. Trept 
 rives 1 Tim. 1, 7. Tit. 3, 8. Pol. 12. 12. 6. 
 Dem. 220. 4. 
 
 >, f. ^a>, (Std intens. /3XeV,) 
 to Zoofe intently, Plato Pheed. 37. p. 86. d. 
 In N. T. to see thoroughly, clearly, c. inf. 
 Matt. 7, 5. Luke 6, 42. 
 
 Sia/3oXo9, ov, 6, ij, (Sia/3aXXw,) a Jra- 
 ducer, accuser, slanderer, 1 Tim. 3, 11. 2 
 Tim. 3, 3. Tit. 2, 3. Sept. for is Esth. 
 7, 4. So Plut. de Adulat. 17. Xen. Ag. 
 11. 5. Spec. c. art. 6 Sia/3oXor, the de 
 vil, the accuser, i. q. 1^"^ j o SaTaray, Satan, 
 
169 
 
 the prince of the fallen angels, 6 apx^v T>V 
 daifjLoviw Matt. 9, 34. According to the 
 later Hebrews, he acts as the accuser and 
 calumniator of men before God, Job 1,7. 12. 
 Zech. 3, 1. 2, comp. Rev. 12, 9. 10 ; seduces 
 them to sin, 1 Chr. 21, 1 ; and is the author 
 of evil, both physical and moral, by which 
 the human race is afflicted ; see in Sai/xo- 
 viov no. 2. In N. T. 6 Sia/3oXo? appears as 
 the constant enemy of God, of Christ, of the 
 divine kingdom, of the followers of Christ, 
 and of all truth ; full of falsehood and ma 
 lice, and exciting and seducing to evil in all 
 possible ways ; Matt. 4, 1. 5. 8. 11. 13, 39. 
 25, 41. Luke 4, 2. 3. 5. 6. 13. 8, 12. John 
 13,2. Acts 10, 38. Eph.4,27. 6,11. 1 Tim. 
 
 3, 6. 7. 2 Tim. 2, 26. Heb. 2, 14. James 
 
 4, 7. 1 Pet. 5, 8. 1 John 3, 8 bis. Jude 9. 
 Rev. 2, 10. 12, 9. 12. 20, 2. 10. Hence 
 1 John 3, 8 f< TOV 8. eVriV, Tie is of the de 
 vil, is like him, belongs to him. So TO. 
 TfKva rov 8. v. 10, and vie Sta/3oAou Acts 
 13, 10, the children (son) of the devil, i. e. 
 like him, doing his commands. John 8, 44. 
 Sept. for i^tan 1 Chr. 21, 1. Job 1, 6 sq. 
 Zech. 3, 1. 2. "So Wisd. 2,24. Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 672,691. Meton. once, John 6, 70 
 KOI t vfj.(av els StajSoXds evTiv, and one of 
 you is a devil, i. q. vibs 5ia/3oXov Acts 13, 
 10 ; comp. Matt. 16, 23. Mark 8, 33. 
 
 SiayyeX\&), f. yeXeo, (8id intens. ay- 
 yt XXw,) to announce fully, i. e. generally, 
 every where, to publish, to declare ; c. ace. 
 Luke 9, 60. Pass. Rom. 9, 17. Sept. for 
 1Q& Ex. 9, 16. So Dem. 163. 8. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 6. 36. Also to announce, to give 
 notice, publicly, c. ace. Acts 21, 26. So 
 Hdian. 2. 5. 5. Xen. An. 1. 6. 2. 
 
 Bidye, Luke 11,8; see in ye no. 1 . a. 
 
 BiayiVOfxai. (yiVojuai q. v.) to become or 
 to be through all time, i. e. continually, al 
 ways, 2 Mace. 11, 26. Xen. Mem. 2. 8. 5. 
 In N. T. aor. 2 Sieyei/o/xjjK, of time, to be 
 through, to be past, particip. Mark 16, 1 KOI 
 8iay(vop.tvov rov (ra/3|3arou. Acts 25, 13. 
 27, 9. So Hdian. 1. 10. 1. Pol. 2. 19. 7. 
 
 BiayiVfOCTKO), f. jv^a-opai, (yii/axT-Kco,) 
 to know through and through, fully, accu 
 rately, Sept. Deut. 2, 7. Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 
 9. In N. T. in a judicial sense, to know 
 thoroughly, to inquire into fully, c. ace. 
 Acts 23, 15. 24, 22. So Dion. Hal. Ant. 
 2. 14. Thuc. 6. 29. 
 
 , f. icro), (yi/o)pia>,) to make 
 knoivn throughout all places, every where, 
 to tell abroad, to publish, c. ntpi TWOS Luke 
 2, 17. 
 
 ea?, ^, (Stayii/too-Ko),) pr. 
 full knowledge ; in N. T. in a judicial 
 sense, examination, trial, Acts 25, 21. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 60. Plato Legg. 936. a. 
 
 Biayoyyvfa. f. vo-w, (yoyyvo> q. v.) 
 to murmur through the whole time, con 
 tinually, to keep murmuring, absol. Luke 
 15, 2. 19, 7. Sept. for ^ Ex. 15, 24. 
 Ecclus. 24, 34. Heliodor. 7. 27. See Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 358. 
 
 Siayprjyopeo), S>, f. ^crco, (ypr/yope o),) 
 to wake through the night, to keep awake, 
 Hdian. 3. 4. 8. In N. T. to be fully awake, 
 Luke 9, 32. 
 
 BidyWj f. |o), (uyo>,) to lead or bring 
 through or over, Sept. for TOSri 2 Sam. 
 
 12. 31. Wisd. 10, 18. Xen. AnTal 4. 28. 
 In N. T. of time, to bring through, i. e. to 
 lead, to pass, c. ace. TJO-U^IOI/ /3/oi> 1 Tim. 2, 
 
 2. With TOV fiiov impl. i. q. to live, fv TIVI 
 Tit. 3, 3. So 8. TOV 0iov ML H. An. 16. 
 23. Xen. Hi. 7. 10 ; absol. c. tv TIVI Plut. 
 Timol. 3. Xen. Venat. 12. 15. 
 
 f. degopat, Mid. depon. 
 i,) to receive through a series of per 
 sons, to receive by succession, to succeed to ; 
 C. ace. Acts 7, 45 TJV [O-KIJVT/V] . . . 8ia8e- 
 ^dfMevoi ol Trarepey. Hdian. 4. 2. 20. Diod. 
 Sic. 11. 7. 
 
 8id8r)/J,a, O.TOS, TO, (SiaSf w,) pr. some 
 thing bound quite around ; hence a diadem, 
 the symbol of royal dignity, Rev. 12, 3. 
 
 13, 1. 19, 12. Sept. for -ins Esth. 1, 11 ; 
 tpS Is. 62, 3. Hdian. 6/2. 3. Xen. 8. 
 
 3. 13. 
 
 oiaoiow/u, f. Scoo-co, (St Sco/ii,) to give or 
 deliver over through various hands, i. e. 
 
 1. to deliver over as to a successor, c. ace. 
 Rev. 17, 13 Rec. T^V egova-lav avTcov TW 
 37pi a> StaSiScoo-oiwi . Others here read 
 simpl. SMacriv. Thuc. 1. 76. Plato Rep. 
 328. a. 
 
 2. to deal out, to distribute, with ace. of 
 thing and dat. of pers. Luke 18, 22 irdvra 
 . . .8id8os TTTCOXO IS. John 6, 11 ; dat. impl. 
 Luke 11, 22. Pass. c. dat. Acts 4, 35. 
 Pol. 3. 76. 13. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 10, 11. 
 
 ioo^o?, ou, , 17, iae^o/xai, a suc 
 cessor in office, Acts 24, 27. Ecclus. 46, 1. 
 Hdian. 3. 2. 6. Thuc. 3. 115. 
 
 f. a>o-<a, (fcowu/ii,) to gird 
 quite around, i. e. firmly, tightly ; with ace. 
 of pers. John 13, 4 Ste ^Wfj/ tavrov. Pass. 
 perf. v. 5. Mid. to gird tightly around one 
 self, with ace. of garment, John 21,7; see 
 in ava^u>vw}ii. Sept. Ez. 23, 15. Luc 
 Quom. Hist, conscr. 3. Thuc. 1. 6 
 
170 
 
 j, TJS, f), (8tari 3jj/u,) pr. a dis 
 position, arrangement. Hence 
 
 1. Of a testamentary disposition, a testa 
 ment, a will, Heb. 9, 16. 17. Plut. de 
 Adulat. 28. Dem. 1136. 12. Plato Legg. 
 922. c. 923. c, e. So usually in Greek 
 writers. 
 
 2. a covenant, i. e. a mutual arrangement, 
 embracing mutual promises on mutual con 
 ditions ; Gal. 3, 15. Sept. and ni"i2 1 Sam. 
 18, 3. 23, 18. al. ssep. So Aristoph. Av. 
 [434] 439. Suidas, StaS?^ a-w^Kr]. 
 Spec, in N. T. of God s covenants with 
 men, i. e. the divine promises on condition 
 of obedience, viz. 
 
 a) The Abrahamic covenant, confirmed 
 also to the other patriarchs, of which cir 
 cumcision was the sign ; see Gen. 15, 1-18. 
 
 17, 1-19. So Luke 1, 72 comp. 73. Acts 
 3, 25. Gal. 3, 17 ; called also fj Sta3. Trepi- 
 Top,ijs, Acts 7, 8. Sept. and fvna Gen. 15, 
 
 18, 17, 2. 4. al. Comp. 2 Mace/ 8, 15. 
 
 b) The Mosaic covenant, entered into at 
 Mount Sinai, with sacrifice and the blood 
 of victims ; see Ex. 24, 3-12. Deut. 5, 2 sq. 
 where Sept. for W\$ . So Heb. 8, 9 bis. 
 
 9, 20 ; called also rj irpwTrj StaStyK?;, the first 
 covenant, i. e. the old or Jewish dispensa 
 tion, in antithesis to the gospel, Heb. 9, 15. 
 Heb. 9, 4 bis, TTJV Kift&rbv TTJS SiaSTj/o;? . . . 
 /cat al TrXdKes rrjs B. the ark which was the 
 symbol of God s presence under the Mosaic 
 covenant, and the tables of the law which 
 the people had covenanted to obey. Rev. 1 1 , 
 
 19, comp. Heb. 8, 5. (So Sept. and n""i3 
 Num. 10, 33. Deut. 9, 9. 11.) The Mosaic 
 covenant was strictly the renewal or con 
 firmation of the Abrahamic ; hence Paul 
 uses the plural 8ta3i}/cai, Rom. 9, 4. Eph. 
 2, 12. Meton. the ancient covenant being 
 contained in the Mosaic books, StaS^K?? is 
 put for the book of the covenant, the Mosaic 
 writings, the law, Heb. rni fi ; 2 Cor. 3, 14 
 avdyvacris TTJS TraXatar S. Sept. and ni ia 
 Deut. 4, 13. So Ecclus. 24, 23 /3t/3Xoj 
 8ia%r]Kr)s. For Gal. 4, 24 see in lett. c. 
 
 c) The new covenant, promised of old 
 and sanctioned by the blood of Christ, the 
 gospel dispensation; comp. Jer. 31, 31 sq. 
 where Sept. for n^a- So Heb. 8, 10 et 
 
 10, 16 et Rom. 11, 27, quoted from Jer. 31, 
 33. 34, comp. Is. 27, 9. Heb. 10, 29 ; called 
 also vea 8. Heb. 12, 24 ; Kaivrj 8. Matt. 26, 
 28. Mark 14, 24. Luke 22, 20. 1 Cor. 11, 
 25. 2 Cor. 3, 6. Heb. 8, 8. 9, 15 ; Kpelrrov 
 5. Heb. 7, 22. 8, 6 ; 8. al&vios 13, 20 ; 8. 
 favTcpa (impl.) 8, 7. Hence, Gal. 4, 24 
 8vo Statical, the two covenants^ the old and 
 the new. 
 
 Oiaipeo l$ : ews, r), (Siatpew,) division, act 
 of dividing, Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 55. In N. TV 
 distinction, difference; 1 Cor. 12,4. 5. 6. 
 diaipeaeis, diversities^ differences, classes of 
 gifts, etc. Sept. for ri^ brra O f the classes 
 or sections of the priests, 2 Chr. 8, 14. Ezra 
 6, 18. So Diod. Sic. 2. 31 Stai peo-ts T>V 
 Plato Soph. 267. b. 
 
 , aor. 2 8iei\ov, (8id of sep. 
 atpew,) to take apart, to separate, to divide 
 into parts, Sept. for "ilnla Gen. 15, 10. al. 
 Luc. D. Mort. 16. 3. Plato Soph. 221. e. 
 In N. T. to divide out, to distribute, c. ace. 
 et dat. Luke 15, 12. 1 Cor. 12, 11. Sept. 
 for p^n Josh. 18, 5. So Plut. ^Em. Paul. 
 16. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 51. 
 
 SiaKaSrap%a), f. iVco, (KaZapifa,) Att. 
 fut. -t&>, Buttm. 95. 7, and n. 14 ; to cleanse 
 thoroughly, c. ace. Matt. 3, 12 et Luke 3, 
 17 rrjv akwa, by throwing up the grain 
 against the wind with a fork, TO TTTVOV; 
 hence i. q. \iKp.qv TT/V SXaiva Ruth 3, 2. 
 See Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. p. 277. Comp. 
 8iaKa%aipeii> TTJV aXo>, Alciphron. 3. 26. 
 
 Sta/careXey^o/xat, f. gopai, Mid. de- 
 pon. (8id intens. /careXeyxoo,) to confute ut 
 terly, c. dat. Acts 18, 28. 
 
 $ICUCOV6(0, o>, f. Jjo-to, (Sta/coz/oy,) impf, 
 8ir)Kovovv, aor. 1 SnjKoV^cra, Pass. aor. 1 8ir)- 
 Kovr)%nv ; for the augm. see Buttm. 86. n. 
 4. To wait or attend upon, to minister, to 
 serve. 
 
 1 . Of persons, to wait upon, to serve any 
 one, pr. with dat. of pers. a) Genr. as a 
 master or guest ; Matt. 8, 15 /cat Si^/coVei nv- 
 rols. Mark 1, 31. Luke 4, 39. John 12, 26 
 bis. Philem. 13 ; absol. Luke 22, 26. Matt. 
 20, 28 bis. Mark 10, 45 bis. (Dem. 362. 
 ult. SiaKovelv Sea-TTOTrj. Plut. Symp. 1. 10. 
 2 T) 8ia.K.ovovaa. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 8.) Spec, 
 of those who wait at table, c. dat. Luke 12, 
 37. 17, 8 ; absol. Luke 10, 40. 22, 27 bis. 
 John 12, 2. So Diod. Sic. 5. 28, 40. Xen. 
 An. 4. 5. 33. b) In a wider sense, to mi 
 nister to the wants of any one, to supply 
 one s wants, e. g. food, clothing, c. dat. 
 Matt. 4, 11. 25, 44. Mark 1,13; Matt. 27, 
 55. Mark 15, 41 ; also with drro c. gen. 
 Luke 8, 3 BITJKOVOVV avrco aV6 TU>V inrap ^ov- 
 TCOV avrais. So by means of alms collected 
 by the churches, the distribution of alms, 
 Rom 15, 25. Heb. 6, 10 bis. 1 Pet. 4, 11. 
 c) Also to be the attendant or minister of 
 any one ; as Timothy and Eratosthenes are 
 said to be SiaKovovvres r& IlavXw Acts 
 19, 22. Comp. Heb. rVitfla josh. 1, 1. Ex. 
 24, 13; where Sept. vnovpyos and irapf- 
 d) Tn the primitive church, to 
 
fill the office of a 8id.Kovos, to perform the du 
 ties of a deacon, i. e. to have charge of 
 the sick and the poor, absol. 1 Tim. 3, 10. 
 13. 
 
 2. In respect to tilings ; to minister any 
 thing to any one, to administer, to provide ; 
 c. ace. of tiling, 2 Tim. 1, 18 oa-a tv E<peVa> 
 SiJ/KoVrjo-f . Pass. 2 Cor. 3, 3 eVtoroX^ Xpt- 
 CTTOV 8iaKovT]^flaa v<p rjp.5>i>, ministered by 
 us, i. e. written by our aid or ministry, by 
 us. (Anacr. 9. 14 Ai/aKpeoiri 8taKov5> TO- 
 cravTa. Theophr. Char. 2. 4.) Also to mi 
 nister any thing to one s wants ; c. fls, 1 Pet. 
 4, 10 tls tavTovs [i. q. (Is aXXijXous] euro 
 8iaKovovvTfs, comp. v. 11. So of alms, %d.- 
 pis, collected by the churches, to adminis 
 ter, to distribute, Pass. 2 Cor. 8, 19. 20. 
 (Comp. Lucian. Asin. 53.) Spoken of pro 
 phets who minister, i. e. announce, deliver 
 the divine message, c. ace. et dat. 1 Pet. 1, 
 12 ; so Jos. Ant. 6. 13. 6. Once with dat. 
 of thing, Acts 6, 2 SiaKoveiv rpanfais, to 
 serve tables for the poor, comp. v. 1 ; i. e. to 
 have charge of the alms and the supply of 
 the poor. So Heliodor. 5. p. 218 ; comp. 
 ministrare velis Virg. ^En. 10. 218, where 
 see Heyne s note. 
 
 ouiKOVLa, as, f), (SiaKoj/os,) 1 . attendance, 
 ministry, service, e. g. as towards a guest, at 
 table or in hospitality, Luke 10, 40. 1 Cor. 
 16, 15. So Xen. CEc. 7. 41. Also genr. as 
 to a friend or master, 2 Cor. 11, 8. 2 Tim. 
 4, 11. Heb. 1, 14. So Plut. de Adulat. 3. 
 Thuc. 1. 133. 
 
 2. Spec, ministry, ministration, in the 
 offices and duties of religion, a) Chiefly 
 of apostles and teachers ; Acts 1, 17. 25. 6, 
 4 8iaK. TovXayov. 20,24 21, 19. Rorn. 11, 
 13. 1 Cor. 12,5. 2 Cor. 3, 8 rj 8. TOV nvtv- 
 fiaros- v. 9 fj 8. TTJS 8iKaiocrvvrjs. 4, 1. 5, 18 
 17 8. TTJS KaTaXXayTjy. 6, 3. Eph. 4, 12. Col. 
 4, 17. 1 Tim. 1, 12. 2 Tim. 4, 5. Also by 
 antith. spoken of the ministration of the old 
 dispensation, 17 8. rov Sai/drov V. TTJS /eara- 
 Kpi o-ew? 2 Cor. 3, 7. 9. Once of the office 
 of a SICIKOVOS q. v. the administration of the 
 external affairs of the church, Rom. 12, 7 
 bis ; comp. Acts 6, 1 sq. Comp. genr. Plut. 
 Aristid. 21. Plato Rep. 371. c. b) In re 
 lation to the sick or the poor, ministry, ser 
 vice, spec, in collecting and distributing alms 
 and contributions. Acts 6, 1. 12, 25 comp. 
 11, 30. Rom. 15, 31 rj fiiatovta p.ov f/ fls 
 ifpovo-aXjj/x, comp. v. 26. 2 Cor. 9, 12. Rev. 
 2, 19. Melon, i. q. aid.relirf, Acts 11,29 tig 
 8iaKoviav TTc/x^at. 2 Cor. 8, 4. 9, 1. 13. So 
 Act. Thorn. 56 eVcd/u<rai ^pij/zara rroXXa els 
 8iaKoviav Totv TjcSj/. 
 
 171 Sia/cpiva) 
 
 ota.KOVO<?, ov, 6, 17, a waiter, attendant, 
 servant, minister. Usually derived from 6\d, 
 KOVIS, one dusty from running, comp. lyKo- 
 ve<a ; better with Buttmann from an obsol. 
 8iaKto or 8irjKca, to run, to hasten, kindr. with 
 8i(OK(a ; pr. a runner, messenger. Buttm. 
 Lexil. I. p. 218-221. 
 
 1 . Pr. of those who wait on guests or at 
 table, a waiter, attendant ; John 2, 5. 9. 
 Pol. 31. 4. 5. Xen. Mem. 1. 5. 2. Among 
 the Greeks, ot 8id.Koi>oi were a higher class 
 than ot SovXoi; so Athen. 10. p. 192. b. 
 8ov\os ov8fls fy 6 8iaKovri(rcov, dXX oi vtoi 
 T&V e XeuSf pajj/ avoxoovv. Comp. Xen. 1. c. 
 Buttm. Lexil. I. p. 220. 
 
 2. Genr. and with a gen. of the master 
 or person served, a minister, servant ; Matt. 
 20, 26. 23, 11. Mark 9, 35. 10,43. So 
 Luc. Merc. cond. 26. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 8. 
 Also a servant, attendant of Christ, a disci 
 ple, John 12, 26 ; of a king, Matt. 22, 13 ; 
 and so 3f ov SIUKOVOS, the servant or minister 
 of God, Rom. 13, 4 bis. Sept. for mtaa 
 Esth. 2, 2. 6, 3. 
 
 3. Spec, in relation to the gospel and to 
 the church, a minister, a teacher, e. g. a) 
 With gen. of pers. for whom one ministers ; 
 so 8idicovos TOV 3eoC 1 Cor. 3, 5. 2 Cor. 3, 
 6. 6, 4. 1 Thess. 3, 2 ; 8iaK. TOV Xpia-rov 
 2 Cor. 11, 23. Col. 1, 7 ; 8. eV jcvpup Eph. 
 6, 21. Col. 4, 7 ; 8. T^S fKK\n<rias Col . 1, 25. 
 Also by antith. ftidicovos TOV o-aTava 2 Cor. 
 11, 15, comp. v. 14. b) With gen. of the 
 thing to be done or promoted by one s ser 
 vice and ministry ; Rom. 15, 8 SIOKOVOS TTC- 
 PLTO^JLTJS, a minister of circumcision, i. e. to 
 the Jews. 2 Cor. 11, IS&d*. 8iKaioa-vinjs. 
 Gal. 2, 17. Eph. 3, 7. Col. 1, 23. c) An 
 officer in the primitive church, one who has 
 charge of the alms and money of the church, 
 an overseer of the sick and the poor, an almo 
 ner, Phil. 1,1. 1 Tim. 3, 8. 12. 4, 6 ; see 
 Acts 6, 1-6. Also of a female, 17 8tdicovos, 
 who had charge of the female sick and 
 poor, Rom. 16, 1. Hence the English word 
 deacon, but in a different sense. 
 
 oia/coo ioi, at, a, (8is, f KaroV.) card. num. 
 two hundred, Mark 6, 37. John 6, 7. 21,8. 
 Acts 23, 23 bis. 27, 37. Rev. 11, 3. 12, 6. 
 
 StaKOVO), f. ovo-opai, (OKOVCO,) to hear 
 through or out, Plut. Demosth. 31 fin. Xen. 
 OZc. 11. 1. In N. T. to hear fully, in a ju 
 dicial sense, c. gen. Acts 23, 35. So Sept 
 and aw Deut. 1, 16. 
 
 oia/cpivco, f. i/oi, (*pu/ M .) 1. to sepa 
 rate throughout, wholly, completely, e. g. 
 Mid. to wholly separate oneself; absol. Jude 
 22 ots p-fv fXeerrf 8iaKpiv6fjLevoi, on some 
 
(the unbelievers) have compassion, separat 
 ing yourselves wholly from them. Others 
 read ScaKpivofj-evovs, the doubting, as in 
 no. 3.b; comp. De Wette in loc. SoHdian. 
 3. 1. 9 6 Tavpos 8iaKpivd TO. f%vr). Plut. de 
 Def. Orac. 39. Trop. to cause to differ, to 
 make a distinction, as between persons ; 
 c. ace. 1 Cor. 4, 7 rls yap ere SiaKplvei. 
 Acts 15, 9 ov8ei> 8ieKpive fjLfra^v. t)p,>v. 
 Comp. Luc. D. Deor. 26. 1. Plut. de Adu- 
 lat. 3. 
 
 2. to discern clearly, to distinguish ; and 
 so to estimate or judge of. 
 
 a) Pr. c. ace. of thing, Matt. 16, 3 TO p.ev 
 npocranrov TOV ovpavov yti/oxr/cere SiaKpivfiv. 
 1 Cor. 11, 29 /zj) diaKpivcov TO <ru>p.a TOV KV- 
 ptov, sc. as represented in the bread ; comp. 
 
 10, 16. Plut. Conjug. Prsec. 20 w Se 8ia- 
 Kplvat TO iftiov r) TO dXXdrptoi>. Plato Charm. 
 171. c. 
 
 b) Trop. to estimate, to judge of, to form 
 an opinion or conclusion ; absol. 1 Cor. 14, 
 29, comp. 1 John 4, 1. With ace. of pers. 
 1 Cor. 11, 31 el yap tavTovs 8ieKpivofji(i>, OVK 
 av eKpivojj.&a, for if we judged ourselves, 
 formed a right estimate of ourselves ; comp. 
 v. 28. Sept. for ^3 Job 12, 11. Plato 
 Legg. 742. c. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 9. 
 
 c) In a judicial sense, to judge, to decide, 
 between parties ; so 1 Cor. 6, 5 BiaKplvai 
 dva /jifo-ov TOV d8f\(f)ov avTov. Sept. for 
 BB1 Ex. 18, 16 Luc. D. Mort. 30. 1. 
 Plato Legg. 847. b. 
 
 3. Mid. BiaKpivopai, with Pass. aor. 1 
 8iKpfar]v, pr. to separate oneself from, to 
 be at variance with ; and so, to contend with 
 in arms Pol. 2. 22. 11. Xen. Ag. 1. 33. 
 Hence in N. T. 
 
 a) Trop. to contend or strive with, to dis 
 pute with, c. dat. Jude 9 ; c. Trpos Tiva, Acts 
 
 11, 2. Sept. c. dat. for "jiTa Jer. 15, 10 ; 
 c. Trpos for BBC g Z- 2 0, 35. Luc. Pseu- 
 dosoph. 5 ; c. dat. Pol. 18. 35. 4. 
 
 b) Tiop. to be at variance with oneself, 
 to doubt, to waver ; absol. Matt. 21, 21. 
 Rom. 4, 20. 14, 23. James 1, 6 6 yap 8ia- 
 Kpivofifvos. With ace. of manner, fj,r)8ev 
 8iaKpiv6p.fvos, nothing doubting, Acts 10, 
 20. 11, 12. James 1, 6. Also emphat. ^ 
 8taKpi%rjvai eV TTJ Kap8iq Mark 11, 23 ; and 
 so James 2, 4 Kal ov Ste/cpi Sr/re eV eavTots, 
 do ye not then doubt in yourselves 1 are ye 
 not then become doubtful in the faith ? 
 comp. v. 1. 
 
 oid/cpiai,?, fa >s, {], (diaKpivo),) a discern 
 ing clearly, a distinguishing ; and hence, a 
 judging of, estimation, see in 8iaicpiva> no. 
 2. So Heb. 5, 14 -rrpos 8ia.Kpio-iv KoXoC re 
 
 KCU KdKov. 1 Cor. 12, 10 Siaicpio-fis Trvevpa- 
 TWV, comp. 14, 29 and 1 John 4, 1. Rom. 
 14, 1 prf els diaKpicrfis SioXoyio-jucoi/, not to 
 judgments of thoughts, i. e. not so as to 
 make oneself the judge of their doubts or 
 scruples. Apoll. Rhod. 4.1169. Plato Legg. 
 937. b. Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 27. 
 
 SiaK(0\va), f. va-v, OoAvw,) to Under 
 throughout, to forbid utterly ; c. ace. Matt. 
 3, 14 6 fie laidvvrjs 8ifKu>\vev ai>Tov, the impf. 
 here expressing an action not completed, de 
 conatu, Winer 41. 3. c. Matth. 497. c. 
 Judith 12, 7. Pol. 3. 19. 4. Xen. Hell. 1. 6. 
 28, 36. 
 
 , f. ^o-co, (XaXew,) 1. to 
 speak with others, to converse, to commune ; 
 see did note, lett. e. Luke 6, 11 SteXdXovi/ 
 Trpos d\\t)\ovs. Pol. 23. 9. 6 Trpbs d\\rj- 
 \ovs. Eurip. Cycl. 175 8iaXa\rjo-op.fv TL o~oi. 
 Diod. Sic. 14. 64. 
 
 2. to talk of every where, to tell abroad ; 
 Pass. Luke 1, 65. Symm. for "^ Ps. 51,16. 
 
 ia\.eyofj,ai, f. Xe|o/*at, Mid. depon. 
 (Xe yw,) Pass. aor. 1 8if\f^r]v with Mid. sig- 
 nif. Buttm. 113. n. 5 ; to lay out separately 
 before the mind of any one ; hence, to dis 
 course, to reason, fo dispute, with any one. 
 a) With an adjunct, of person ; c. dat. Acts 
 
 17, 2 SteXeyero avTols dirb T5)vypa(f)S)i>. V. 17. 
 
 18, 19. 20, 7 ; with Trpos Tiva Mark 9, 34 
 Acts 24, 12 ; absol. Acts 18, 4. 19, 8. 9. 
 20, 9. So c. dat. Pol. 15. 9. 1. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 6. 11 ; Trpos Tiva Plut. Coriol. 27. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 6. 1. b) With an adjunct of 
 thing ; e. g. <nepi TWOS, about or of any 
 thing, Acts 24, 25 ; and so Jude 9 TU> 8. 
 8iaKpiv6fJ.evos SieXeyero rrept TOV M. cra>/i<z- 
 TOS, he disputed about the body of Moses, 
 strove for it ; comp. Sept. StaXeyo/nat for 
 ^Ij Judg. 8, 1. So c. mpi Plut. Pomp. 
 4. Plato Legg. 686. d. Xen. Hell. 2. 2. 11. 
 c) Simply of exhortation, to speak to, to talk 
 with, c. dat. Heb. 12, 5 TJTIS V/MV as viols 
 SiaXe yerat. So Hdian. 1. 5. 2. Thuc. 8. 93 
 dvf/p di>8pl 8ie\fyoVTO. 
 
 Sia\et7rc0, f. ^co, (XetVo),) to leave be 
 tween, to leave an interval, e. g. of space, 
 TrevTT]KovTa Tr68as Pol. 6. 30. 1 ; of time, 
 o\iyov xpoVoi/ Plato Phaed. 118. a. Hence 
 in N. T. of time, intrans. to intermit, to de 
 sist, to cease ; with particip. Luke 7, 45 ov 
 SieXtTre KaTa<pi\ovo-a, she hath not ceased 
 kissing my feet ; see Buttm. 144. 6. Sept. 
 for ^n Jer. 44, 18. So Luc. Vit. auct. 13. 
 Xen. Apol. Socr. 16. 
 
 StaXe/cro?, O v, 17, (SiaXeyo/iat,) discourse, 
 Plato Conv. 208. a ; mode of speech, diction, 
 
173 
 
 Plalo Therct. 183. b.In N. T. language 
 of a country or district, a dialect, idiom, Acts 
 1, 19. 2, 6. 8. 21, 40. 22, 2. 26, 14. So 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 1. 6. Pol. 1. 80. 6. Plut. Numa 
 10. 
 
 SiaXXacrcro) v. -TT&), f. co, (aXXao-o-co,) 
 to change between, to change for another, to 
 exchange, 2 Mace. 6, 27. Xen. Hell. 1. 6. 4. 
 In N. T. trop. to change the feelings 
 towards any one, to reconcile; only Pass. 
 aor. 2 imperat. c. dat. Matt. 5, 24 SioXXay?;- 
 2t r<u u8eX<pa> a~ov, be reconciled to thy bro 
 ther . So Sept. 1 Sam. 29, 4. Thuc. 8. 70 ; 
 Act. c. ace. Plut. Mor. II. p. 135. Xen. Hell. 
 1. 6. 7. 
 
 8id\oji^OfJiai : f. ia-opuu, Mid. depon. 
 (Xoyi b/Mu.) to reckon through, to settle an 
 account, c. rrpos TWO. Dem. 1236. 17. In 
 N. T. trop. to take account of, to consider, to 
 reason with. a) Genr. and so with trap 
 tavrois, with themselves, Matt. 21, 25 ; irpos 
 eavrovs id. Mark 11,31 Lachm. Luke 20, 14 ; 
 fv tavro is id. Matt. 16, 7. 8. Mark 2, 8. Luke 
 12, 17 ; tv rais Kap8iais avrutv M^rk 2, 6. 8. 
 Luke 5. 22 ; so with Trtpi TWOS added, Luke 
 3, 15; absol. Luke 1, 29. 5, 21. Mark 8, 
 16. Also with OTI, because that, Mark 8, 17 ; 
 on thai, John 11, 50. Sept. c. ace. for 
 Ps. 77, 6. So jEl. V. H. 14. 43; irpos t> 
 Isaeus 191. pen. Plato Soph. 231. c. b) 
 Also to reason, to discuss, to dispute, irpos 
 tavrovs Mark 9, 33, comp. v. 34. So Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 5. 1. 
 
 O v, 6, (SiaXoy/^o/xai,) a 
 reckoning through, settlement of accounts, 
 Dem. 951. 20. In N. T. consideration, rea 
 soning, thought. a) Genr. Matt. 15, 19. 
 Mark 7, 21. Luke 2, 35. 5, 22. 6. 8. 9, 47. 
 24, 38. Rom. 1,21. 14, 1 (see in 8taK/>m)- 
 1 Cor. 3, 20. James 2, 4 Kpiral SioXoyt- 
 <Tp.wv ITOVT]PCJV, judges of (having) evil 
 thoughts, unjust, partial. Sept. for fS^ri ? 
 Prov. 21, 18. Is. 59, 7. So Arr. Epict. 1. 9. 
 10. Pol. 3. 17. 8. Plato Ax. 367. a. b) 
 Spec, reasoning, discussion, dispute ; Phil. 
 2, 14 x^pts yoyyvcr/iwi (cat SiaXoyicr/icof. 
 1 Tim. 2, 8 ; so Luke 9, 46, comp. Mark 
 9, 33. 34. So Ecclus. 9, 15. Plut. Mor. II. 
 p. 23. 
 
 otaXuto, f. VO-GJ, (Xuw,) to loose through 
 out, to dissohe, i. e. to disperse, to break up, 
 a multitude, Pass. Acts 5, 36. So an as 
 sembly Hdot. 7. 10. 4 ; an army Hdian. 5. 
 2. 6. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 6, 10. 
 
 SiapapTVpoiJuii, f. ovpai, Mid. depon. 
 (fiapTvpop.ai, ) to call throughout to witness, 
 i. e. God and man, to protest solemnly, Sept. 
 
 Deut. 4, 26. Dem. 275. 17. Xen. Hell. 3. a 
 13. In N. -T. to testify fully. 
 
 1 . Genr. and implying strong affirmation, 
 to testify fully, to declare openly ; c. dat. 
 1 Thess. 4, 6 Ka3w? . . . vp.lv /cat 8ifp.aprvpd- 
 p,%a. Acts 20, 23 TO 7rvfvp.a . . . Sta/xaprvpe- 
 TCLL p.oi \f-yov. With acc. Acts 8, 25. 20, 24. 
 23, 11. With acc. and dat. Acts 18, 5 8ia- 
 p.apTvpop,evos rois louSaicxs TOV I. X. 20. 21. 
 28, 23. Once c. OTI Acts 10, 42. Of a sa 
 cred writer, with Xey<oi>, Heb. 2, 6 
 
 paro 8e TTOV TIS Xeycov. Sept. for 
 Deut. 32, 46. Jos. Ant. 9. 8. 3. Plato 
 Phaedr. 260. e, 8iap.. on. . 
 
 2. In exhortations, i. q. to admonish, to 
 charge earnestly ; absol. Acts 2, 40 8itp.apTv- 
 ptTo Kal Trape/caXf t \eya>v. With dat. of pers. 
 and Iva p.f], Luke 16, 28. Emphat. with eVco- 
 TTIOV TOV Seov v. TOV Kvpiov, and dat. of pers. 
 impl. 1 Tim. 5,21. 2 Tim. 2, 14. 4, 1. Sept. 
 forT Sn Ex. 19, 21. Pol. 1. 37. 4. Plut. 
 Cimon 16. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 17. 
 
 S(,afj,d%o/j,ai, f. rjo-opcu, Mid. depon. (p.a- 
 Xop.ai,) to fight with another, see in Sta note, 
 lett. e ; c. dat. Xen. An. 7. 4. 10. In N. T. 
 trop. to contend in words, to strive; Acts 
 23, 9 oifpaxovro \fyovres. So Ecclus. 8, 1. 
 Luc. Hermot. 36. Plato TheaeL 178. e. 
 
 oiafjieva), f. vo>, (jueixo,) to remain 
 through, to continue in the same place, Xen. 
 An. 7. 1. 6. In N. T. of state, condition, 
 to remain without change, to continue, to 
 endure; absol. Heb. 1, 11 8iap.eveis, from 
 Ps. 102, 27 comp. 28, where Sept. for 
 T?5. 2 Pet. 3, 4 Trdvra OVTO> 8iap.evfi, comp. 
 Ps. 119. 90 where Sept. for "ia. \Vith an 
 adj. Luke 1, 22 8ifp.fve Kaxpos. So with 
 Trpos Tiva, to remain unto, Gal. 2, 5 ; p-trd 
 TWOS, to remain with any one, i. e. constant 
 to him, Luke 22, 28. Pol. 1. 18. 6. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 7. 7 ; c. adj. Plut. Symp. 7. 4. 1 ; 
 c. dat. Xen. Hell. 7. 1. 44. 
 
 Siafj,epia), f. t o-w, (pfpifa,) to dispart, 
 to divide up, to cut up, Plato Legg. 849. d. 
 In N. T. 
 
 1 . to part or portion out, to divide up or 
 out, to distribute ; c. acc. et dat. Acts 2, 45 
 KOI 8iep.piov avTa Trdira. Luke 22, 17 ; 
 acc. Mark 15, 24 Rec. Sept. for f^n Judg. 
 5, 30. 2 Sam. 6, 19. So Plato Phil. 15. e. 
 Xen. An. 7. 1. 40, where others 8iap.fTp(1v. 
 Mid. plur. to divide among themselves, 
 e. g. TO. IfjLaTia Matt. 27, 35. Mark 15, 24 G. 
 Luke 23, 34; with dat. e avTotr added Matt. 
 27, 35 and John 19, 24, quoted from Ps. 22, 
 19 where Sept. for P^H. Pass, or Mid. 
 particip. Acts 2, 3 8iap.fpi.6iJifvai yXtocrcrat 
 axm nvpos, tongues as of fire divided out or 
 
174 
 
 dividing themselves out to all ; and it (the 
 fire, or a tongue) sat upon each of them. 
 
 2. Trop. of discord, dissension, only in 
 Pass, to be divided ; c. ri riva against any 
 one, Luke 11, 17. 18 ; also eVi TIVI id. 12, 
 52. 53. 
 
 SiafiepicrfAos, ov, 6, (8tap.epto>,) a word 
 disapproved by the grammarians, Poll. Onom. 
 8. 136. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 511 ; division, dis 
 tribution, Diod. Sic. 1 1 . 47. Plato Legg. 
 771. d ; a part, portion, Sept. Ez. 48, 29. 
 In N. T. division, dissension, Luke 12, 51. 
 
 oiavefJ,Q), f. pa, (ye /iw,) to distribute 
 throughout, to Till, Sept. Deut. 29, 26. 
 Hdian. 2. 11. 13, 14. Xen. Mem. 3. 14. 1. 
 In N. T. trop. to spread abroad, to publish, 
 Pass, els TOV \aov Acts 4, 17. 
 
 Siaveva), f. evo-u, (vfva>,) to nod or wink 
 repeatedly, to beckon, to continue nodding or 
 making signs with the head and eyes ; c. 
 dat. Luke 1 , 22 KOI avrbs r\v Siavevcov avTols. 
 Sept. for "p? yy> Ps. 35, 19. Ecclus. 27, 
 22 Siavfvav oc|>3aX/ia>. Diod. Sic. 3. 18 
 TCUS Kf<pdkcus. Luc. D. Meretr. 3. 2. 
 
 BiavorjfACt,) aros,ro, (iavoeop,ai,) thought, 
 purpose, what has passed through one s 
 mind, Luke 11, 17. Sept. for ttatiria 
 Is. 55,9. Plut Phocion5. Plato Prot. 348. d. 
 
 otavota,) as, rj, (8iavoe o/u,) a thinking 
 through, thought, purpose, Hdot. 1. 90. 
 Thuc. 5. 9. In N. T. the faculty of thought. 
 
 1. the mind, the understanding; Matt. 
 22, 37 ev o\7 rfj diavoiq (TOV. Mark 12, 30. 
 Luke 10,27. Eph. 1, 18Rec. 4, 18. 1 Pet. 
 1, 13. 2 Pet. 3, 1. Heb. 8, 10 and 10, 16, 
 quoted with variation from Jer. 31, 33 
 where Sept. for 3nj3 Sept. for ^b Gen. 17, 
 17. Hdian. 2. 9. 15. Xen. Mem. 3. 12. 6. 
 
 2. Meton. understanding, insight, 1 John 
 
 5, 20. Sept. for ^ Ex. 35, 25. 36, 1. 
 
 3. Meton. mind, for the mode of thinking 
 and feeling, disposition of mind, the feel 
 ings; Col. 1, 21 ex^pol rfi ftiavoiq. Plur. 
 Eph. 2, 3 ra SeAjj/iara . . . rS>v 8iavoiS>v. So 
 2 Mace. 5, 17. Plato Rep. 503. c. Xen. 
 OEc. 10. 1. Luke 1, 51 vTrepytpavoi 8ia- 
 voiq xapSias, those proud in the disposition 
 of their heart ; comp. Heb. Sb ^SN Is. 46, 
 
 12. Sept. 1 Chr. 29, 18 eV tiuivoia Kap8ias. 
 Baruch 1, 22. 
 
 St,avolya>, f. <a, (oWy<,) to open 
 through, to lay quite open ; e. g. gates, Pass. 
 Plut. Timol. 12. In N. T. only in phrases, 
 
 6. g. a) TTO.V apcrev 8iavolyov TTJV p-rjrpav, 
 every male opening the womb, i. e. the first 
 born, Luke 2, 23. Sept. for crn 1125 Ex. 
 
 13. 12. 34, 19. b) 8iavoiyetv ras anoas, 
 
 to open the ears, to cause to hear, to restore 
 the hearing, Pass. Mark 7, 34. 35. So Heb. 
 D-iatx nns j s . 35, 5, Sept. dvoiyv. c) 
 
 Trop. 8iavoiyeiv TOVS o<p3aA/iovs, to open 
 the eyes of any one, to cause to see what 
 before was not seen, Luke 24, 3 1 . Sept. and 
 BT? tt|5<? 2 K. 6, 17. So pr. Plato Lys. 
 210. a. d) Trop. 8iavoiyeiv rbv vovv, rrjv 
 Kap8iav, to open tlie mind, the heart, to make 
 able and willing to understand and receive, 
 Luke 24, 45. Acts 16, 14. So Sept. Hos. 
 2, 15. 2 Mace. 1, 4. Themist. 2. p. 29. a. 
 e) Trop. footoiytot ras ypa(pds, to open the 
 Scriptures, i. q. to unfold, to explain, Luke 
 24, 32. Acts 17, 3. So Heb. fins p s . 119, 
 130, Sept. 87jXa)(riy Xdycoi/. 
 
 SuLVVKTepevo), f. o-w, (Wrepevw, j/v,) 
 to pass the whole night, intrans. with eV of 
 manner, Luke 6, 12. Sept. Job 2, 9. Hdian. 
 5. 8. 15. Diod. Sic. 13. 62. 
 
 oiavvct), f. o-ct), (di/vo),) to bring through 
 to an end, to complete, to finish, c. ace. TOV 
 TT\OVV Acts 21, 7. 2 Mace. 12, 17. ^El. 
 V. H. 2. 3. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 28 686v. 
 
 Siairavro?, see in 8td I. 2. a. 
 
 continued rubbing, disputing, wrangling, 
 
 1 Tim. 6, 5 ; so in Mss. and later editions, 
 instead of TrapaSiarptjSjj in Rec. q. v. See 
 Winer 16. 4. n. Tittm. Syn. in N. T. p. 
 233. 
 
 StttTTepaft), , f. do-a, (Trepaw,) to pass 
 through or over, to cross over, e. g. a lake, 
 absol. Matt. 9, 1. 14, 34. Mark 5, 21. 6, 
 53 ; a gulf, with npos riva to any one, Luke 
 16, 26 ; the sea, with els c. ace. of country, 
 Acts 21, 2. Sept. 8. TOV lopddvrjv for 1?5 
 
 2 Sam. 19, 15; TTJV ZaXda-aav Is. 23, 2. 
 Pol. 11. 18. 4. Xen. Yen. 9. 18. 
 
 SiarrXeo), f. tvo-ca, (jrAe co,) to sail 
 through or over, c. ace. TO TreXayoy Acts 27, 
 5. Hdian. 8. 6. 1 1 ; c. fig Xen. An. 7. 8. 1. 
 
 SiaTTOveo/jiai, ovp.ai, f. ^o-o/jat, Mid. 
 depon. (TToveco,) to labour through, to work 
 out, to produce with labour, Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 
 28 ; to exercise, to practise. Plato Phaedr. 
 273. e ; to suffer pain, to be hurt, Sept. for 
 MS? Ecc. 10, 9. In N. T. trop. to be 
 pained, grieved, indignant, Acts 4, 2. 16, 18. 
 So Hesych. 8iaTrovr)%fis- "hvirw Seis. Comp. 
 Trot>eofj.ai to be in distress, anxiety, Horn. II. 
 9. 12. 
 
 &ia 7ropevo/J,(U, f. o-op,ai, Pass, depon. 
 (Tropetlco,) to go or pass through a place ; c. 
 ace. TO.S TroXetf Acts 16, 4 ; 8ta c. gen. 
 Luke 6, 1 ; Kara c. ace. 13, 22; absol. 18, 
 36. Rom. 15, 24. Sept. for "OS Zeph. 2, 
 
Siairopea) 
 
 175 
 
 15. So c. ace. Xen. An. 2. 5. 18 ; 8td Pol. 
 
 3. 68. 12; absol. Xen. An. 2. 2. 11. 
 
 oiaTropea), &, f. 770-00, (dnopfo),) to be 
 quite at a loss, to be greatly perplexed, to be 
 in much doubt, absol. Luke 9, 7. Acts 2, 
 12 ; eV lav 10, 17 ; with irepi c. gen. Acts 
 5, 24. So Diod. Sic. 2. 18. Plato Legg. 
 777. c. JE\. V. H. 4. 17 inrep rti/o?. Mid. 
 id. c. TTtpi, Luke 24, 4. So Plato Soph. 
 217. a. 
 
 8ia7rpaj/J,aTvofJ,ai, f. o-o/im, Mid. de- 
 pon. (n-payfJMTfvofj.ai, ) to work out or treat 
 of thoroughly, Plato Phaed. 77. d. 95. e. 
 In N. T. to work out in business, to gain by 
 traffic, c. ace. Luke 19, 15 ris ri 8ifjrpayp.a- 
 Tfvcraro. Comp. in Trpay/wzrevo/iai. 
 
 8ia7rpL03, f. tVa), (Trpi co,) to saw through 
 or asunder, Sept. for -iito 1 Chr. 20, 3. 
 Plut. de Solert. Anim. 25. Plato Conv. 193. 
 a ; also 8. roiis oSovras, to sqw or gnash tlie 
 teeth, Luc. Calumn. 24. In N. T. Mid. 
 t}iairpiop.ai, trop. to exasperate oneself, to 
 be enraged, absol. Acts 5, 33 ; rals Kap8iais 
 7, 54. So Hesych. 8ifrrpiovro- &vp.ovvro. 
 Comp. 7Tpirp.vr] KaXXei Tawp.r]8fos "Hp?/, 
 Antip. Thess. 43, in Anth. Gr. II. p. 107. 
 
 oiapTra^ct), f. dcro), (apirdfo),) to seize 
 and tear in pieces Horn. II. 16. 355. In 
 N. T. to seize and carry off, to plunder, to 
 spoil, Ijat. diripio ; c. ace. ra a-nevr), TTJV 
 oliciav, Matt. 12, 29 bis. Mark 3, 27 bis. 
 Sept. for tta Gen. 34, 27. 29; bt Deut. 
 28, 29. So Diod. Sic. 4. 66. Xen. An. 1. 
 2. 26. 
 
 Siappriyvvfjii, $iapptfcrcra>, f. w , (pijy- 
 wp.i q. v.) to tear through, to rend or break 
 asunder, c. ace. as I/xdrta Matt. 26, 65. Acts 
 14, 14 ; xircbi>a Mark 14, 63 ; SIKTVOV Luke 
 5, 6 ; 8f<rpA Luke 8, 29. Sept. for S^g 
 Gen. 37, 29. 34 ; pW Ps. 2, 3.- So Plut. de 
 Prof, in Virt. 11. Plato Phaed. 86. a. The 
 Jews and other nations were accustomed 
 to rend their garments from the bosom to 
 the girdle (yvp.vol 8e ra <rrtpva TU>V e crSijTcoj/ 
 TTfpLfpprjyfj.eva>i> Jos. B. J. 2. 15. 4 ; veste a 
 pectore discissa, Suet. GEES. 33) in token of 
 grief or indignation ; see Gen. 37, 29. 34. 
 44, 13. Num. 14, 6. Josh. 7, 6. 2 Sam. 3, 
 31. al. 1 Mace. 11, 71. Jos. B. J. 2. 15. 2, 
 
 4. Philo de Joseph, p. 528, 557. 
 otacrcKpeci), <, f. 170-00, (a-a<pf)s, ) to make 
 
 quite clear, i. q. to make known, to tell, c. 
 ace. et dat. Matt. 18, 31. 2 Mace. 1, 18. 
 20. Pol. 1. 46. 4. Plato Legg. 754. a. 
 
 otacreifc), f. ti<ra>, (<re i a>,) to shdkethrough- 
 out, vehemently, ./El. V. H. 2. 14 ; irvpyov 
 Died. Sic. 20, 87 ; the bones from terror, 
 
 Sept. for vnBrl Job 4, 14. In N. T. trop. 
 to do -violence to any one, to terrify, to op 
 press, Lat. concutio; c. ace. Luke 3, 14. 
 So 3 Mace. 7, 21. Pol. 10. 26. 4. 
 
 Stacr/copTT/^o), f. lcra>, (avcoprr/fw.) found 
 only in late writers, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 218 ; 
 to scatter throughout all places, i. e. 
 
 1. Genr. to scatter abroad, to disperse, 
 e. g. people, a flock, c. ace. Luke 1, 51. 
 Pass. John 11, 52. Acts 5, 37. Matt. 26, 31 
 and Mark 14, 27 ra irpo^dra, quoted from 
 Zech. 13, 7 where Sept. for yijiri , also 
 Deut. 30, 3 ; rnt Zech. 1, 19. 21. So M. 
 V. H. 13. 45. T pol. 27. 2. 10. Trop. of 
 property, to dissipate, to squander, c. ace. 
 Luke 15, 13. 16, 1. 
 
 2. Like Heb. mt : to scatter abroad grain 
 to the wind, to winnow, Matt. 25, 24. 26 ; 
 here $ia<TKopTrieiv is put in contrast to 
 a-vvdyeiv, instead of the usual \tKp.dv q. v. 
 So rnj Ruth 3, 2 and Is. 30, 24, where 
 Sept. \iKfiav; but Mlb rTnt, Sept. 8ia- 
 
 r< Trvevp-ari., Ez. 5, 2. 10. 12. 
 
 &, f. do-w, (o-n-dco,) to draw 
 or pull asunder, to pull in pieces, Pass. Mark 
 5, 4. Acts 23, 10. Sept. for pM Judg 
 16, 9. 12. JE1. V. H. 3. 42. Xen. Eq. 5. 4. 
 
 Ota<77Teip&), f. ep, (o-Tretpaj.) pr. to sow 
 throughout, then to^scatter abroad as seed, 
 to disperse, e. g. persons, Pass. Acts 8, 1. 4. 
 11,19. So Sept. for rnt Lev. 26, 33; 
 pan Gen. 11,9. Pol. 3. T 19. 7. Xen. An 
 1. 8."25. 
 
 QiacrTropa, as, fj, (Siao-Trfipw.) the dis 
 persion, i. e. the state of dispersion in which 
 multitudes of the Jews lived after the cap 
 tivity, in Chaldea, Persia, and chiefly in 
 Egypt, Syria, and Asia Minor ; Sept. Jer. 
 34, 17. Judith 5, 19 ; comp. Jos. B. J. 7. 3. 
 3, TO yap Iov8atwi> yevos TTO\V pev Kara 
 Trd<rav rrjv oiKovp,fvr)v TrapeaTrapTai TOLS fTTi- 
 ^coptoiy TrXficrrov Se 777 Supi a dvap.ep.iyfj,e- 
 vov . In N. T. meton. the dispersion, for 
 the dispersed, i. e. the Jews living in dis 
 persion, James 1,1.1 Pet. 1,1. John 7, 35 
 fj 8iacnropu T&V E\\T)i>a>v, i. e. the Jews 
 dwelling among the Gentiles generally, or 
 among nations that use the Greek language, 
 e. g. in Egypt and Asia Minor, the Hellen 
 ists. Sept. Ps. 147, 2 for Heb. D^rna 
 2 Mace. 1, 27. 
 
 8tacrT\\(t), f. eXw, (oT/XXw.) to set, 
 place, put asunder, e. g. TTJV a-Krjvrjr. to sever 
 or open, Plut. Mor. II. p. 29 ; to set apart, 
 Sept. for b-nan Deut. 10, 8. 19, 2. 7 ; to 
 distinguish, plato Euthyd. 295. d ; Mid. to 
 set forth distinctly, to determine, Pol. 3. 23 
 
176 
 
 0. Plato Rep. 535. b. In N. T. Mid. to 
 admonish, to charge, to command, c. dat. of 
 pers. Mark 7, 36. Acts 15, 24 ; dat. and "iva, 
 Matt. 16, 20. Mark 7, 36. 9, 9; dat. and 
 Xey7/, Mark 8, 15 ; dat. and TroXXd, much, 
 straitly, Mark 5, 43 ; Pass. part, absol. Heb. 
 12, 20. Sept. ^ntri Ez. 3, 18-21. So 
 Judith 11, 12. Pol . : 16. 28. 5. 
 
 Otao"T?7yU.<Z, arcs, TO, (SiacrTTJvai, Siam;- 
 P.I,) a distance, interval, of time, Acts 5, 7. 
 Pol. 9. 1. 1. Plut. Platon. Quajst. 8. 4; 
 of place Xen. Ven. 2. 5. 
 
 oia(TTO\.rjj ijy, ]j, (giaoreXXco,) distinc 
 tion, difference, Rom. 3, 22. 10, 12. 1 Cor. 
 14, 7. Pol. 16. 28. 4. Plut. adv. Stoic. 38. 
 
 SiacTTpe^a)) f. ^ w , (o-rpe$o>,) to turn 
 or twist throughout, wholly, to distort, Xen. 
 Conv. 7. 3. In N. T. to pervert, e. g. a) 
 Persons, i. q. to turn away, c. ace. Luke 
 23, 2. Acts 13, 8. Sept. for S^H Ex. 
 5, 4. So Plut. de Stoic, repug. 31, 33. Pol. 
 5. 41. 1. b) Things, i. q. to wrest, c. ace. 
 Acts 13, 10 ras ooovs Kvpiov, i. e. to wrest 
 divine truth. Sept. for cjss Prov. 10, 9. 
 So Pol. 8. 24. 3. Dem. 1453. 13. c) Pass, 
 perf. part. difo-Tpappevos, see Buttm. 
 \ 98. n. 3. Kiihner 140. 6 ; perverted, i. e. 
 perverse, wicked, of persons Matt. 17, 17. 
 Luke 9, 41. Phil. 2, 15 ; of things Acts 20, 
 30. Comp. Buttm. $ 113. 7. Kiihner 5 255. 
 n. 5. Sept. for VninS Deut. 32, 5 ; pr. 
 Plato Gorg. 524. c. 
 
 otacr&>&), f. dxrcu, (o-a>co,) to save 
 through any thing, to bring safe through, 
 to preserve; Pass, to be saved or brought 
 safe through, to escape. a) Genr. and c. 
 ace. Acts 27, 43 @ov\6p.tvos Siacrwcrai TOT 
 ILav\ov. Pass, absol. Acts 28, 1 ; ex TWOS 
 V. 4 ; Sid TWOS, 1 Pet. 3, 20 dieo-^rjaav 8t 
 v8a.Tos, were saved through the waters, were 
 brought safely through ; comp. 1 Cor. 3, 15. 
 Sept. for oin Job 29, 12. (Dem. 1053. 26. 
 Thuc. 4. 120.) Prsegn. with the idea of 
 motion, to bring safe through to any one ; 
 e. g. Trpdy Tiva, Acts 23, 24 iva . . . TOV Hav\ov 
 Siacroxrcocrt Trpbs $ijXtKa. Pass, to escape 
 safe to land, eVi TTJV yrjv Acts 27, 44. Sept. 
 c. ds for D^a? Gen. 19, 19. Is. 37, 38. So 
 c. trpos Tiva Diod. Sic. 11. 44 ; em rt Arr. 
 Exp. Alex. 1. 5. 19. b) Spec, of the sick, 
 to bring safe through, to restore to health, 
 to heal, c. ace. Luke 7, 3 on-wy eX3cbi/ Sta- 
 OXOCTT/ TOV 8ov\ov O.VTOV. Pass. Matt. 14, 36. 
 Sept. for Bbaa Jer. 8, 20 comp. 22. So 
 Xen. Mem. 2/10. 2. 
 
 Siarayrj, ^ s , rj, (Siardcnra,) a dis 
 posing in order, disposition, arrangement ; 
 
 Acts 7, 53 eXd/3ere TOV vop.ov els Siarayas 
 dyyeXmv, i. e. according to (by) the arrange 
 ments of angels ; comp. Gal. 3, 19 6 vopos 
 SiaTajfls St dyyeXav. Heb. 2, 2 ; for thia 
 use of els comp. Matt. 12, 41. Winer 53. 
 a, fin. For angels as present at the giving 
 of the law, (not mentioned Ex. 20, 1. 19. 
 22,) see Sept. Deut. 33, 2 oeia>v UVTOV 
 ayyeXoi fier UVTOV for l ab i-fl IBS I S^aia , 
 Jos. Ant. 15. 5. 3 Sdyp-ara ra ev Tols vop.ois 
 8t dyyeXcov vrapa TOV 3eov /ua3eWa. Spec, 
 in the sense of ordinance, institute, Rom. 
 13, 2. Elsewhere only Sept. Ezra 4, 11. 
 
 Stdrajfjia, arcs, TO , (Stardo-o-co,) an 
 ordinance, edict, Heb. 11, 23. Sept. Ezra 
 
 7, 11. Plut. Marcell. 24 fin. 
 SiaTapdaaa) v. -TTCD, f. w , (rapdo-o-o),) 
 
 /o sitr up throughout ; trop. of the mind, to 
 disturb, to trouble, Pass. Luke 1, 29. Dion. 
 Hal. 7. 35. Plato Legg. 757. a. 
 
 StaTacrcro} v. -TTCO, f. <, (rdo-o-a,) to 
 arrange throughout, to dispose in order, e. g. 
 trees Xen. CEc. 4. 21, 22; troops 2 Mace 
 12, 20. Xen. An. 1. 7. 1. In N. T. 
 
 1. to set fully in order, to arrange, to ap 
 point; e. g. Pass. Gal. 3, 19 6 VO/JLOS 5m- 
 Taytls 6V dyyeXooi>, see in Starayij. Pol. 3. 
 19. 11. Plato Legg. 746. e. 
 
 2. Spec, to appoint, to ordain, to com 
 mand ; c. dat. of pers. Matt. 11, 1. 1 Cor. 
 9, 14. 16, 1 ; with inf. of object, Luke 8, 
 55. Acts 18, 2. Pass. part. TO Stareray/xe- 
 vov, what is appointed, c. dat. Luke 3, 13. 
 Acts 23, 31 ; also ra Stara^SeWa id. absol. 
 Luke 17, 9 ; c. dat. v. 10. Sept. for c^an 
 Ez. 21, 19. 20. Pol. 3. 33. 6. Xen. Cyr! 
 
 8. 5. 5. 
 
 3. Mid. Siardo-o-o/iai, pr. to arrange 
 for oneself, in one s own behalf, Plato Phasdr. 
 271.b; hence, to arrange, to appoint, to 
 command, absol. Acts 20, 13 OVTW yap yv 
 Stareray/ieVos (TiaiiXos), for so Paul had 
 arranged for himself, appointed ; for the 
 Pass. perf. in Mid. signif. see Buttm. 136. 
 3. Winer $ 40. 3. So absol. Acts 7, 44. 
 1 Cor. 7, 17. 11, 34; c. dat. of pers. Tit. 
 1, 5. Acts 24, 23. Pol. 5. 21. 1. 
 
 oiareXea), o>, f. eo-o>, (reXew,) to bring 
 quite to an end, to complete, Xen. Hell. 7. 3. 
 4 ; of time, to spend wholly, to pass, Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 2. 6. In N. T. intrans. c. adj. to 
 continue throughout, to remain so and -so ; 
 Acts 27, 33 ao-iToi StareXeTrf, comp. in did- 
 y, giarpt /3a>. So 2 Mace. 5, 27. Ml. V. 
 H. 10. 6. Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 2. See Winer 
 46. 1. pen. 
 
 StariypeQ), >, f. TJO-W. (rqpeX) to watch 
 closely, to keep carefully, c. ace. Pol. 1 . 7. 7. 
 
Start 
 
 177 
 
 Dem. 238. 9. In N. T. trop. to keep care 
 fully e. g. a) In the mind, c. ace. Luke 
 
 2, 51 Travra ra pr]fj.aTa ravra tv TTJ Kapbiq. 
 Sept. for "53SJ Gen. 37, 11. So Ecclus. 
 28, 5. b) With tavrov ex. TWOS, to keep 
 oneself Carefully from any thing, Acts 15, 29. 
 Comp. Sept. with pt) n-oteiv for \Q "IBIIJ 
 Is. 56, 2 ; also Dem. 115. 26 8. p,r; n TTO- 
 Soxri. 
 
 Start, see in Sui II. 1. b. a. 
 
 Start s/At, f. StaSijo-aj, (T&TJ/W,) to set, 
 put, place apart, in a certain ortler, to ar 
 range, to dispose, e. g. troops, Sept. for 
 c^rn i Sam. 11, 11. Thuc. 1. 126 ; events, 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 27. In N. T. only Mid. 
 8 1 a T i 3 f fj. a i , f. Tjcro/zat^ fa arrange or dis 
 pose for oneself, in one s own behalf, e. g. 
 
 1. Of what belongs to oneself. a) 
 Genr. i. q. to appoint, to assign, c. ace. et 
 dat. Luke 22, 29 bis, KOI Stan Sf/xai vfuv . . . 
 8acrt\fiav. Comp. Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 7 rfjv Se 
 Svyarepa ravrrjv (<roi) eTTirpeVrfi) Sta3eV3at, 
 OTTCOS a/ av /3ovA>;. b) Spec, by will or tes 
 tament, to devise, to bequeath ; hence 6 dia- 
 Zfltevos, a testator, Heb. 9, 16. 17. So 
 Jos. Ant. 13. 16. 1. Dem. 1067. 1. Plato 
 Lcgg. 924. a, b, c, e. 
 
 2. Of a covenant, to arrange mutually, to 
 covenant with another party ; hence Start- 
 Sf/xa SiaSijK?;! nvi \. Trpos TWO., to make a 
 covenant with any one, Acts 3, 25. Heb. 8, 
 10 and 10, 16, quoted from Jer. 31, 33 
 where Sept. c. dat. for l"^2 H lS j also c. 
 irpos riva, Ex. 24, 8. Aristoph. Av. 439 
 jv p.T) SiaStoircu y ot8f 8iaZfjKrjv ffioi. 
 
 Siarpi/Bo), f. ^<, (rpia>,) to rub apart 
 or zra pieces, Horn. II. 11. 847; to rub or 
 wear away, to consume, Theogn. 917 [921]. 
 Hdot. 7. 120. In N. T. of time, to wear 
 away, to pass, to spend. a) Pr. c. ace. 
 e. g. XP OVOV Acts 14, 3. 28 ; ry/zepay Acts 
 16, 12. 20, 6. 25, 6. 14. Sept. 8. r^epas 
 for 2 r; Lev. 14, 8. So 8. xpwoi/ Pol. 4. 
 57. 3. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 15. b) Absol. to 
 spend time in a place, i. q. to remain, to con 
 tinue, to abide, simpl. Acts 12, 19 ; tv Av- 
 Ttoxfia 15, 35; e /m John 3, 22. 11, 54. 
 Sept. for -IW Jer. 35, 7. So Hdian. 8. 8. 
 
 3, 14. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 12. 
 
 ctarpo(j)rjj jjs, rj, (Siarpe <p<B,) nourish 
 ment, food, 1 Tim. 6, 8. 1 Mace. 6, 49. 
 Pint. Cimon 10. Xen. Vect. 4. 49. 
 
 Otai"ya&>, f. do-a, (at/yafw,) to shine 
 through a crevice, c. dat. Plut. de Placit. 
 Philos. 3. 3. p. 272. In N. T. to shine forth, 
 to dawn, intrans. 2 Pet. 1, 19 ewy ou vM f/ P a 
 toiavyuo-Tj. So Pol. 3. 104. 5 ap.a T<U Stav- 
 ya*tx. 
 
 12 
 
 cos, ovs, 6, f), adj. (avy^,) shin 
 ing through, i. e. pellucid, transparent, Rev. 
 21,21 Grb. for Suxpavys in Rec. Aquil. for 
 7jt Prov. 16, 5. Luc. V. Hist. 1. 7 S. olvos. 
 Plut. de Placit. Philos. 3. 5. p. 274. 
 
 &ia(f)aw]S, fos, ovs, 6, f], adj. (Siucpawa,) 
 diaphanous, trans-parent, Rev. 21, 21 Rec 
 where others 8iavyrjs. Sept. for T\l Ex. 30, 
 34. Diod. Sic. 36. p. 239 Tauchn. [609 
 Wess.] Plato Phsdr. 229. b. 
 
 8ui(f>epa), f. 8ioiVo>, ((pe pw,) aor. 2 8tj 
 veyKov, Buttm. ;, 114 (pepco. 
 
 1 . to bear or carry through or over any 
 place, to transport ; c. ace. et Sia, Mark 11, 
 16 Kal OVK rjffiifv, Iva TLS Sieveyicr) cntevos Sia 
 TOV If pov. 1 Esdr. 5, 55. Eurip. Suppl. 382 
 [384]. Thuc. 8. 8. 
 
 2. Lat. . d ijfero, to bear apart, to carry 
 different ways, viz. 
 
 a) Pass. e. g. of persons in a ship, to be 
 borne hither and thither, to be driven about, 
 up and down, eV roi ASpt a Acts 27. 27. So 
 Luc. Hermot. 28 eV rw ntXayei 8ta<p/pe<r3at. 
 Plut. de Def. Orac. 17 rrjv vavv Sta<pfpop.e- 
 vr)v. Lat. differo, Hor. Epod. 10. 6. Trop. 
 of doctrine, to be carried abroad, to be pub 
 lished, c. 8id, Acts 13, 49 8if(f)cpfTo 6 Xoyor 
 TOV Kvpiov 81 o\r]s TTJS ^tupa?. So \Visd. 
 18, 10. Plut. Sept. Sap. Conv. 20 (p^rj. 
 
 b) In^rans. pr. to bear apart, trop. to differ, 
 Lat. differo ; genr. Sept. Dan. 7, 3. 7. Xen. 
 Hi. 1.2. Hence in N. T. a) Part. neut. 
 plur. TO. 8ia(j>fpovTa, things different; 
 Rom. 2, 18 et Phil. 1, 10 [9] dompafcui TO 
 dicxpf povra, to distinguish things that differ ; 
 so Theodoret in loc. TO Ivavria d\\rj\ols, 
 8iKaioo~vvT]v KOI dSiKtav. Theophyl. tcplvtis TI 
 8fl Trpaai Kal TL /J.f) dd 7rpaai. (Andocid. 
 121. 14 Reisk. Xen. Hi. 1. 3.) Others, 
 things more excellent, as in y below ; comp. 
 Pol. 6. 39. 2. ) Impers. Sta<pepet, it 
 differs, it makes a difference ; c. dat. Gal. 2, 
 
 6 ovtitv fJLOi 8ia(pep(i. So JEl V. H. 1. 25 
 ffiol yap ovftfit 8ia<ptpti. Pol. 3. 21. 9. On 
 this late use of the dat. see Lob. ad Phryn 
 p. 394. y) With a gen. to differ from, to be 
 other than ; and so to be more or better than, 
 to surpass, to excel ; Matt. 6, 26 ov^ v/xety 
 /iaXXov Stacpepere aiiTuiv. 10, 31. Luke 12, 
 
 7 ; and with further adjuncts, as TTOO-W Matt. 
 12, 12. Luke 12, 24; tv Sd&j 1 Cor. 15, 
 41 ; ov8ti> Gal. 4, 1. So c. gen. Xen. (Ec. 
 20. 17 ; with TOO-OVT<O added Hell. 3. 1. 10 ; 
 fv TIVI Diod. Sic. 5. 57. Xen. Hi. 1.8; ov- 
 8(i> Xen. Vect. 4. 25. 
 
 Sta^evycu, f. <B, (<pevya>,) to flee through 
 or away, to escape, absol. Acts 27, 42. Sept. 
 for BbB Josh. 8, 22. Pol. 1. 21 11. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 12. 4. 
 
178 
 
 i), f. i g-a>, (<f>T)ptga>, (pfj^rj, ) to 
 fame abroad, to report publicly ; with ace. 
 of thing, e. g. TOV \6yov Mark 1, 45. Pass. 
 Matt. 28, 15. With ace. of pers. to spread 
 one s fame abroad, Matt. 9, 31. So of things 
 Dion. Hal. 11. 46. Diod. Sic. 36. p. 225 
 [532] UToX/jiiav avrov Stacp^p.icrcu rfs. 
 
 SicKJ&eipa), f. epo>, (<p3et po>,) Pass. aor. 
 2 8if^dprjv, part. perf. Su<p3app,ei>or ; to 
 corrupt throughout, to destroy utterly ; Pass. 
 to decay utterly, to perish; c. ace. Rev. 11, 
 18 bis, Sia<p3eipai TOVS SimpSe/povray TTJV 
 y^v. Absol. Luke 12, 33. Pass. 2 Cor. 4, 
 16. Rev. 8, 9. Sept. for rnntin Judg. 6, 
 4. 2 Sam. 11, 1. So Hdian. 4/9. .2. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 4. 7. Trop. in a moral sense, to 
 corrupt wholly, to pervert, to destroy ; so of 
 idolatry, Rev. 19, 2 rjris 8ie<p3eipe (Rec. 
 ecpSetpe) rrjv yrjv ev rrj Tropvfiq avrrjs. (Sept. 
 for rrj Judg. 2, 19.) Genr. 1 Tim. 6, 5 
 8if(p^npfjLvoi TOI> vovv, corrupted as to their 
 mind, men of perverse minds ; for the ace. 
 see Buttm. 131. 7. Kiihner $ 297. 7. So 
 Pol. 12. 23. 2 8i/cp3aprcu rj/ ^vxfj- Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 1. 1. 
 
 Sia(f&opd, as, fj, (8ia<p3fi pa>,) corrup 
 tion, destruction; Acts 2, 27 and 13, 35 
 I8f1v StacpSopai , quoted from Ps. 16, 10 
 where Sept. for f^n dJ ni X nb , pr. to see the 
 pit or grave, to die and be buried (comp. 
 Sept. Ps. 49, 10) ; hence I8flv StacpSopdv is 
 here i. q. to see destruction, death, regarded 
 as a permanent state, opp. to see life. So 
 too in the argumentation of Peter and Paul, 
 Acts 2, 31. 13, 34. 36. 37 ; comp. Sept. Job 
 33, 28. Ps. 30, 10. See Heb. Lex. art. 
 ^rite . Hengstenb. Comm. on Ps. 16, 10. 
 So Hdot. 4. 164. Pol. 2. 20. 6. Plato Gorg. 
 484. c ; and in a moral sense, Xen. Mem. 
 1. 2. 8. In all the above passages 8ta(p3opa 
 is commonly rendered corruption, as arising 
 from putrescence ; but this signif. is not 
 found in the Sept. nor in Greek writers, 
 and is here unnecessary. 
 
 8ld<f>opo$, ov, 6, 17, adj. (Sta^e pco.) dif 
 ferent, various, Rom. 12, 6. Heb. 9, 10. So 
 Sept. Deut. 22, 9. Hdian. 3. 12. 2. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 3. 2. Spec, superior, excellent, see 
 in Siacpepw no. 2. b. y ; hence Compar. Sia- 
 (popcbrfpoy, more excellent, letter, Heb. 1,4. 
 8, 6. So Sept. Ezra 8, 27. Pol. 6. 23. 7. 
 Plato Legg. 779. b. 
 
 8ia(j)v\,d<rcr(i) v. -TTCO, f. o>, (Sia in- 
 tens. <vXacro-&>,) to ivatch closely, to keep care 
 fully, to protect, c. ace. Luke 4, 10 TOV 8ia- 
 <pvXdai o-f, quoted from Ps. 91, 11 where 
 Sept. for "lEKi ; for TOV c. inf. see Buttm. 
 
 } 140. n. 10, 11. Kiihner 308. 2. b. Winer 
 j 45. 4. b. Dem. 922. 18. Xen. Mem. 1. 
 5. 2. 
 
 > 5 f. i (Tw, (xeip/fco,) to have 
 through the hands or in hand, to administer, 
 Plato Gorg. 526. b. In N. T. Mid. to lay 
 hands on, to kill, to slay, c. ace. Acts 5, 30. 
 26, 21. So Hdian. 3. 12. 2. Pol. 8. 23. 8. 
 Diod. Sic. 18. 46. 
 
 o), f. do-a>, (8a intens. ^Xeu- 
 d,) to deride greatly, to mock, absol. Acts 
 2, 13 for xXeudfw in Rec. Pol. 30. 13. 12. 
 Dem. 1221. 16. 
 
 f. io-a>, (xp/c<0 to sepa 
 rate throughout, wholly, Sept. for i 1 1 1 !? ! 
 Gen. 1, 4. 6. 7. Xen. (Ec. 8. 11. In N. T 
 Mid. to separate oneself wholly, to withdraw, 
 to depart, c. OTTO TWOS Luke 9, 33. Sept. 
 for "i^EH Gen. 13, 9. 11. So Diod. Sic. 
 4. 53. Plato Tim. 59. c. 
 
 ], 6v, (StSdo-Koo,) didactic, 
 apt to teach, 1 Tim. 3, 2. 2 Tim. 2, 24. 
 Philo de Pram, et Poen. p. 914. c, SiScum/o/ 
 ij Trpbs Tf\(iwcriv. 
 
 , y, 6v, (StSao-Kw,) taught, of 
 things imparted by teaching; 1 Cor. 2, 13 
 bis, OVK ev StSa/crots dv SpanrivTjs cro<pi ar Xo- 
 yois KT\. So Dem. 1413. 24. Plato Prot. 
 319. b. Of persons, taught, instructed; 
 John 6, 45 waives foSaKroi SeoO, see for the 
 gen. Matth. 5 345. Winer 30. 4. Buttm. 
 J 132. 8. So Sept. 1 ^isb Is. 54, 13. 
 
 SiSaatcaXia, as, f], (StSdo-Kw,) 1. teach 
 ing, instruction, i. e. the act or office ot 
 teaching, Rom. 12, 7. 1 Tim. 4, 13. 16. 5, 
 17. Tit. 2, 7. So Plut. de aud. Poet. 1 1 fin. 
 Plato Rep. 493. b. As applied to oneself, 
 instruction, admonition, 2 Tim. 3, 16. Rom. 
 15, 4; comp. 1 Cor. 10, 11. 
 
 2. Meton. what is taught, instruction, 
 doctrine, precept ; as coming from men, per 
 verse, Matt. 15, 9. Mark 7, 7. Eph. 4, 14. 
 Col. 2, 22. 1 Tim. 4, 1. Sept. and n^jabo 
 Is. 29, 13. As coming from God, divine, 
 1 Tim. 1,10. 4, 6. 6, 1. 3. 2 Tim. 3, 10. 
 4, 3. Tit. 1,9. 2, 1. 10. Genr. Sept. Prov. 
 2, 17. Plut. Cato Maj. 19. Xen. GEc. 14. 3. 
 
 oioacrA:aXo9, O u, 6, (SiSdo-Kw,) a teacher, 
 instructer, master; genr. Rom. 2,20. Heb. 
 5,12. Of Jewish teachers or lawyers, Matt. 
 9,11. 10,24. 25. Luke 2, 46. 6,40. John 3, 
 10; hence i. q. pa/3^/, John 1,39. 20,16; of 
 John the Baptist, Luke 3, 12 ; of Jesus, Matt. 
 8, 19. 12, 38. 17, 24. Mark 5, 35. 14, 14. 
 John 11. 28. 13, 13. 14.al. of Paul, 1 Tim. 2, 
 7 ; and of other Christian .eachers, 1 Cor. 
 
179 
 
 12, 28. 29. al. 2 Mace. 1, 10. Diod. Sic. 
 1. 8. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 2. + 
 
 ), f. |o>, (obs. 8ao>, Sdry/xt.) 1. to 
 teach, to instruct, with ace. of pers. or of 
 thing, or of both ; Buttm. $ 131. 5. Kiihner 
 5 280. 3 ; so c. ace. of pers. Matt. 5, 2 e Si- 
 8a<ricev OVTOVS Xey&v. Mark 1, 22. 9, 31. 
 John 7, 35. 8, 2. 2 Tim. 2, 2. al. Sept. for 
 y^in Job 13, 23. So Dem. 390. 8. Xen. 
 Hi. 8. 6. With ace. of thing ; Mark 6, 30 
 KOI oo-a e8/Saai>. 1 Tim. 4, 11. 6, 2. Tit. 
 1,11; also Matt. 15, 9 and Mark 7, 7 StSa- 
 (TKovrfs SiSaovcaAt as, eWaX/xara di/2pa>7ra>i , 
 quoted from Sept. Is. 29, 13 q. v. Sept. for 
 isi Ecc. 12, 9. So Dem. 315. 7. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 6. 20. With two ace. of pers. and 
 thing; John 14, 26 ticflvos v/iay Si8dei 
 iravra. Mark 6, 34. Acts 21, 21. Heb. 5, 
 
 12. Pass. 2 Thess. 2, 15 a? f8t8d x ^Te, 
 comp. Buttm. $ 134. 6. Sept. for 5 v ? in 
 Prov. 22, 21 : 1*& Deut. 11, 19; Pass. 
 1 Chr. 5, 18. (Plut. de Puer. educ. 9. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 1. 5 bis. Pass. c. ace. Xen. Conv. 
 9. 6.) Instead of the ace. of thing, other 
 adjuncts are sometimes put ; e. g. infin. 
 Matt. 28, 20. Luke 11, 1. Rev. 2, 14 Rec. 
 or on Mark 8, 31. 1 Cor. 11, 14; or Kepi 
 rivos 1 John 2, 27. So c. inf. Xen. Cyr. 1 . 
 2. 8 ; on Xen. Hi. 1.10; irepi c. gen. Dem. 
 198. 7. Once in Griesb. with dot. of pers. 
 and infin. (Rec. has ace.) Rev. 2, 14 c8i- 
 8acrKf TO) BaXax /SaAeii/ KT\. like Heb. 
 b iBb Job 21, 22 ; or ^ rnfri Deut. 33, 10. 
 Absol. Matt. 21,23 Trpovrjk Sov avrw 8i8d- 
 O-KOVTI. Mark 1, 21. 6, 6. 11, 17. Luke 5, 
 17. John 7, 14. Acts 5, 21. Rom. 12, 7. 
 1 Tim. 2, 12. al. So Dem. 130. 2. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 17 01 SiSdo-Koiref. With any 
 of the above constructions may be joined an 
 adjunct of place, time, or manner ; so of 
 place, c. e<, as eVc TOV TT\OLOV Luke 5, 3 ; 
 ev C. dat. Matt. 4, 23 ev rats crvvayatyais. 
 Mark 6, 2. 12, 35 eV r<5 Upa. Luke 13, 10. 
 26. John 6, 59. Acts l s, 11*. 1 Cor. 4, 17; 
 Kara c. ace. Luke 13, 22; c. gen. 23, 5; 
 Trap a c. ace. Mark 4, 1. Of time ; as ev 
 c. dat. Luke 4, 31 ev rots o-dfiftao-i. 12, 12. 
 
 13, 10; ace. TUS fipfpas Luke 21, 37; adv. 
 Luke 19,47. John 18,20. Of manner; 
 (v c. dat. Mark 4, 2 ev 7rapo/3oXcu?. Col. 1, 
 28 ev irdajj tro^i a. 3, 16. Matt. 22, 16; 
 C TTI C. dat. Acts 4. 18 eVt TW uvofiari avrov. 
 5, 28; c. gen. eV d\v%eias Mark 12, 14. 
 Luke 20, 21 ; pe rd c. gen. Acts 28, 31 ; 
 adv. Acts 18, 25 dupi^s. Matt. 5, 19. Luke 
 11,1. John 8, 28. Acts 20, 20. 1 John 2, 27. 
 
 2. Spec, to teach, i. q. to direct, to admo 
 nish, to advise ; c. ace. of pers. John 9, 34 
 
 KOI <rv 8i8d<rKeis fjpds; Rom. 2, 21 bis. 
 1 Cor. 11, 14. Heb. 8, 11. Rev. 2, 20. Pass. 
 Matt. 28, 15. Jos. Ant 2. 11. 1. Xen. 
 Apol. 24. Plat Prot 323. d. + 
 
 otoa^?;, fjs, f], (St8dcrKa>.) teaching, in 
 struction, i. q. 8i8ao-KaXt a. Suid. 8480^17 
 avri ToC SiSao-KoXi a. 
 
 1 . The act or office of teaching ; Mark 
 4, 2 and 12, 38 e\eyev avTois ev rrj 8180%$ 
 avrov. Matt. 7, 28 comp. 29. Mark 1, 22. 
 27. 11, 18. Luke 4, 32. John 18, 19. Acts 
 5, 28. 1 Cor. 14, 6. 26. 2 Tim. 4, 2. Tit. 1, 
 9. Plato Rep. 399. b. Thuc. 4. 126. 
 
 2. Meton. what is taught, instruction, 
 doctrine; Matt 16, 12 irpoa-exeiv . . . OTTO 
 TTJS 8i8a X T)s ra)v 3>apicrai<i>v. Spec, of in 
 struction in the religion of Christ, in the 
 principles of the gospel, Christian doctrine ; 
 Matt 22, 33. John 7, 16. 17. Acts 2, 42. 
 13, 12. 17, 19. Rom. 6, 17. 16, 17. Heb. 
 6. 2. 13, 9. 2 John 9 bis. 10. Rev. 2, 14. 
 15. 24. Plut de Puer. educ. 4. Plato 
 Phaedr. 275. a. 
 
 , ov, TO, (Sir, 8paxp4) a di- 
 drachm, a double drachma, a silver coin 
 equal to two Attic drachma? ; and in the 
 times of the N. T. and of Josephus eqvia. 
 also to the Jewish half shekel, i. e. Is. 3d. 
 sterling, or 30 cents ; see fully in art. dpyv- 
 piov no. 2. So Matt. 17, 24 bis, spoken of 
 the yearly tribute to the temple paid by 
 every Jew; comp. Ex. 30, 13 sq. 2 Chr. 
 24, 6. Jos. Ant. 18. 9. 1. Jos. 1. c. Dion 
 Cass. 1082. 80. Sept. everywhere for Heb. 
 ^ Gen. 23, 15. 16. Neh. 10, 32; the di- 
 drachm of Alexandria being apparently 
 of twice the value, and equal to that of 
 ^Egina ; see in dpyvptov no. 2. 
 
 JtSu/^o?, ov, 6, 77, (Svo, & r,) pr. adj. 
 ticain, double, twin, Sept. for CXFl Cant. 4, 
 5. Plato Tim. 77. d ; a twin, Plur. twins, 
 Sept. for CXn Gen. 25, 24. Luc. D. Mort. 
 16. 4. In N. T. Didymus, the Twin, as a 
 surname of the apostle Thomas, John 11, 
 16. 20, 24. 21, 2. 
 
 St S&yu, f. Soxrw, aor. 1 eSoxa, aor. 2 
 e8ui>, perf. 8e8d)Ka, plupf. e8e8u>Keiv ; see 
 Buttm. ^ 1 07. Less usual forms are : Pres. 
 Splur. Attic StSoao-i Rev. 17, 13 in later 
 edit Buttm. } 107. n. 1, 1. Winer 5 14. 1. b. 
 Aor. 1 Subj. 3 pers. SOXTJ? John 17, 2. 
 Rev. 8, 3, from an obsol. aor. 1 tSaxra, only 
 in late writers ; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 72 1 . 
 Winer { 14. 1. n. Aor. 2 Opt. 3 pers. 8a,rj 
 later for 80/77, Rom. 15, 5. Eph. 1, 17. al. 
 see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 346. Winer 5 14. 1. 
 g. Buttm. 5 107. n. I, 3. Plupf 8e8ci- 
 without angm. Mark 14. 44. John 11. 
 
ISO 
 
 57 ; see Buttm. J 83. n. 7. Winer J 12. 12. 
 The primary signif. is every where to 
 give, pr. of one s own accord and with good 
 will. 
 
 1. Pr. to give, to bestow. a) Genr. c. 
 ace. et dat. Matt. 4, 9 ravra Trdvra aoi 8o>- 
 o-co. 7,11. 14,7. 19,21. Mark 6, 2. 22. 
 23. 10, 21. Luke 10", 35. al. sasp. Pass. 
 Matt. 26, 9. Mark 14, 5. Luke 8, 18. al. 
 Sept. for (PJ Gen. 24, 53. 25, 5. 6. al. saep. 
 So^Eschin. 88. 1. Xen. Hi. 7. 8. Pass. Plut. 
 Mor. II. p. 16. With dat. and eVc c. gen. 
 partitively ; Matt. 25, 8 Sore rjfuv eV TOV 
 eXaiov vp.o)v. So impl. Mark 2, 26. Luke 
 6,4. 
 
 b) Spec, of sacrifice or homage, to give, 
 to offer, c. ace. et dat. Rev. 4, 9 ; ace. Luke 
 2. 24 dovvai Svcri ai/. Sept. 8dre 86av ra> 
 Sew for ins Ps. 68, 35. Horn. Od. 1. 66 ipa 
 Zfoicriv eSaJice. II. 12. 6. 
 
 c) Of a person who is the source, author, 
 cause of a favour or benefit to any one, to 
 give, i. q. to grant, to impart, to permit, to 
 cause, etc. a) Genr. c. ace. et dat. Matt. 
 21, 23 T LS <roi (8a>Kf TTJV f^ovcriav Tavrrjv. 
 Mark 11, 28. Luke 20, 2. Acts 8, 19. John 
 4: 1 2 os e8a>Kfv r]p.lv TO (ppeap. 2 Thess. 3, 
 9 ; ace. simpl. 8. yvwp.r]v 1 Cor. 7, 25. 2 
 Cor. 8, 10. So Hdian. 2. 3. 10. Xen. Ag. 
 2. 3 ; 8. yv(ap.7)v Dem. 704. 5. In phrases : 
 d(popp,r)v 8i86vai TIVI, to give occasion to 
 any one, 2 Cor. 5, 12. 1 Tim. 5, 14 ; (Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 83 ;) TOTTOV 8. TIVI, to give place to 
 any one, to yield, Luke 14, 9. Rom. 12, 19. 
 Eph. 4, 27. 2 Thess. 3, 9. (Arr. Epict. 4. 1. 
 106. Plut. C. Gracch. 13. Lat. dare locum 
 Cic. de Nat. Deor. 2. 23.) Often also when 
 the idea of the verb and its accus. may be 
 expressed by a verb kindred to the accus. 
 e. g. 8i86vai alvov rw Sew i. q. alvelv to 
 praise, Luke 18, 43 (comp. Palceph. 43); 
 fii S. dwoitpio-iv, i. q. to answer, John 1, 22 
 (Plut. Mor. II. p. 83) ; 8i8. 86av r<5 3e<a, 
 i. q. 8odeiv to glorify, to praise, Luke 17, 
 18. John 9, 24. Acts 12, 23. Sept. for 
 TiM *,n: Josh. 7, 19. Jer. 13, 16 ; 818. e y*o- 
 Trrjv, i. q. to hinder, 1 Cor. 9, 12 ; 8i8. eWo- 
 \TJV. i. q. to command, John 11, 57. 12, 49 ; 
 (Dem. 250. 13 ;) 8/8. Trpoa-KOTrrjv, i. q. to of 
 fend, 2 Cor. 6, 3 ; 8/8. puma-pa, i. q. to strike, 
 to slap, John 18, 22. 19, 3; (so pa-n-ifciv 
 Dem. 787. 23 ;) 8/8. <pi\r)p.a, i. q. to kiss, 
 Luke 7, 45 ; 8/8. xdpayp.a, i. q. ^apaa-o-w, 
 Rev. 13, 16 ; so Diod. Sic. 34. p. 205. [599 
 Wess.] Trdvras xapdrrovrfs rols or/y/iao-t. 
 Also 8tS. fvo-7)p.ov Xdyoi , i. q. fv<Tr)fJ.a>s Xtya>, 
 to speak distinctly, 1 Cor. 14. 9. /3) Spoken 
 of God or of Christ as the author or source 
 of what one has, receives, etc. to give, to 
 
 grant, to bestow, to impart, c. ace. et dat. 
 Matt. 6,11 TOV apTOV fjp,u>v TOV fTTiovcriov 86s 
 f] fj.lv o-f]p.tpov. 9, 8 Seoi TOV 86vra e oucr/ai> 
 ToiavTTjv Tols dv%pu>Trois. Luke 12, 32. John 
 17, 22. 24. Acts 7, 5. 11, 17. 2 Cor. 9, 9. 
 Eph. 4, 8. 2 Tim. 2, 7. Rev. 2, 28. al. 
 Pass. Matt. 12, 39. Mark 13, 11. John 3, 
 27. Gal. 3, 22. So 8ovvai xdpiv or fj %d- 
 pis f] 8 o 3 e I a- a, to give or confer grace or 
 favour, the grace given, benefit conferred, 
 James .4, 6. Rom. 12, 3. 6. 1 Cor. 3, 10. 
 Eph. 3, 8 ; also fj x- q 8e8op.evr, id. 2 Cor. 8, 
 1. (^Eschyl. Prom. 821 [827] ; comp. Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 18.) Rev. 2, 21 e8w/ca av-rfj 
 Xpovov I gave her time, respite. (Pol. 6. 17. 
 5. Dem. 399. 19.) So of rulers whom God 
 gives to a people, Acts 13, 20. 21 e Sco/cev au- 
 TO"IS 6 3e6s TOV SaovX. (Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 4.) 
 Also in various constructions; so c. gen. 
 partitively, Rev. 2, 17 Scocrw avr<a TOV pdwa 
 (Buttm. 5 132. 5. c), also c. e x TWOS in the 
 same sense, 1 John 4, 13. With els or eVi, 
 as 8i8ovs (avroty) vopovs pav its TTJV 8idvoiav 
 V. eVt raj Kap8ias, Heb. 8, 10. 10, 16. Rev. 
 17, 17 ; also els vp.ds id. 1 Thess. 4, 8. (Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 2. 20 ds TO.S -ty-vxas.) Construed 
 often with the dat. and infin. instead of an 
 accus. comp. Buttm. 140. 5, and n. 8. Matt. 
 13, 11 vp.lv Se Sorat yvfavat. TO. p.vo~Trjpia, to 
 you it is given, granted, to know, etc. Luke 
 1, 73 TOV 8ovvai fjp.lv d<f>6j3(i>s\aTpfVfii avTca. 
 John 5, 26 eSeoKe T<B vtw <ar]v fx flv 6>I/ e a v- 
 TW. Acts. 2, 4. Rom. 15, 5. 2 Tim. 1, 18. 
 Rev. 6, 4. (m. V. H. 13. 36. Xen. Cyr. 5. 
 
 1. 29.) This infin. is sometimes implied ; as 
 Matt. 19, 11 ols Se Sorai sc. ^wpeij/. John 19, 
 11. Rev. 11, 3. With <W instead of the 
 infin. Mark 10, 37. So c. ace. et infin. to 
 permit, to suffer, to grant, Acts 2, 27 et 13, 
 35 oi>8e Scocrety TOV oaiov crew I8elv Suxfr Sopdv. 
 
 10, 40. 14, 3. So Horn. II. 3. 322. Luc. D. 
 Mort. 9. 2. Spoken of evil or punishment 
 divinely inflicted, to give, to inflict, to lay 
 upon; 2 Thess. 1, 8 e /cS/K^o-tz/. Rev. 18, 7 
 j3ao-avio-p,6v Kal Trev Sos. 2 Cor. 12, 7 e SoSty 
 pot. (TKoXo^ 177 o-apKi, where for the dat. of 
 manner, comp. Buttm. 5 133. 4. b. So Horn. 
 
 11. 19. 270. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 7. 
 
 d) Trop. of things which are the cause, 
 source, occasion, of any thing ; to give, to 
 impart, to cause, etc. Acts 3, 16 Kal rj TT KTTIS 
 f8u>Kfv avT<n TTjV oXoK\rjptav. So Hdian. 2. 
 
 2. 18. Eurip. Iph. Taur. 722. [728.] With 
 an accus. where the idea may also be ex 
 pressed by the verb kindred to the accus. 
 see above in lett. c ; James 5, 18 veTov 818. 
 i. q. vav. Matt. 24, 29 TO (ptyyos 818. i. q. 
 (peyyeiv. 1 Cor. 14, 7. 8 <pa>VTjv 818. i. q. 
 
2. to give, to give up, to deliver over, to 
 present, to commit to, i. e. to put into the 
 hands, power, possession, of any one. 
 
 a) Genr. and with ace. and dat. as a per 
 son, Luke 7, 15; things Matt. 5, 31 8o ro> 
 avrfj curo(TTd<Tiov. 19, 7. 14, 8 86s p.oi o>8e 
 TTJV Kpa\rii> Iwdw/ou. 24. 45. Mark 6, 41. 
 John 13, 26. 18, 11. Rev. 15, 7. Acts 9, 
 41 Sot f Se av-rfj x f ~ l P a - a ^ sae P- (Hdian. 3. 
 
 11, 20. Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 10.) So c. dat. 
 impl. Matt. 19, 7. Luke 7, 44. John 6, 51 ; 
 ace. impl. Matt. 26, 26. 27. Luke 11, 7. 8. 
 (Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 11.) Pass, absol. Matt. 
 14, 9. Acts 1, 26 f8(aKav K\fjpovs avrtav, 
 they gave their lots, sc. to be placed in the 
 urn. Luke 15, 22 86re 8aKTv\ioi> ds T^V 
 \fipa avTov, give or bring a ring for his 
 hand ; others under no. 4 below, like Heb. 
 ^? 1^3 Gen. 41,42, where Sept. 7repm 3/;/it. 
 (Xen. An. 1 . 2. 27.) With dat. of pers. and 
 infin. e. g. 818. avrois (paytiv V. TriWif , Matt. 
 14, 16. Luke 8, 55. 15, 16. John 4, 7. 6, 
 31. Rev. 16, 6. (Comp. Luc. D. Deor. 7. 
 
 4. JEL V. H. 9. 15.) So 8i8. TO IS KV<TI, 
 Matt. 7, 6; comp. Horn. II. 23. 21. Xen. 
 Yen. 7. 12. 
 
 b) Also to commit, to intrust, e. g. to the 
 charge or care of any one ; spoken of things, 
 Matt 16, 19 Scocro) (roi ray K\f1s TTJS /3acri- 
 \eias raw ovp. 25, 15. Mark 12, 9. Luke 
 
 12, 48. 16, 12. 20, 16. John 3, 35. 5. 22. 
 
 13, 3. al. Sept. and "nj Cant. 8, 11. (Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 7. 11.) Of a work or duty to be 
 done, John 5, 36. 17, 4. 8. 11. 14. Acts 7, 
 38 ; so Xen. (Ec. 7. 6. Spoken of per 
 sons who are given to Christ as his disci 
 ples, who are to receive eternal life ; John 
 10, 29 6 TraTTjp pov, os 8e8u>K p.oi (sc. aiira 
 v. 28). 17, 6. 9. 22. 24. Heb. 2,13. So 
 Xen. An. 7. 3. 30. Hence 
 
 c) Spec. 8i86vai eavTov, to give one 
 self, to deliver oneself, i. e. a) to conse 
 crate or devote oneself, 2 Cor. 8, 5. So 
 Hdot. 3. 19. Dem. 301. 20. /3) With vnep 
 v. Trfpi TWOS, to give or devote oneself for 
 any one, i. e. to death, Gal. 1,4. Tit. 2, 14 ; 
 with predic. dirriXvTpov, 1 Tim. 2, 6. So 
 TO cru>fj.a avrov Luke 22, 19 ; TT/V crdpua av- 
 TOV John 6, 51. Also 8i8. TJJ/ ^v^r/v avrov 
 \vrpov dvrl TroXXcov Matt. 20, 28. Mark 10, 
 45. So 1 Mace. 2, 50. 6,44. Eurip. Herac. 
 551. Phcen. 1012. y) Constr. with ds c. 
 accus. of place, to betake oneself to any place, 
 to go ; Acts 1 9, 3 1 p.rj 8ovvai eavrov tls TO 
 "Siarpov. So Jos. Ant. 15. 7. 7. et Diod. 
 Sic. 5. 59 8i8ovs avrov tls TUS fprjfjiias. Pol. 
 
 5. 14. 9. 
 
 3. to give, i. e. to give forth, to render up, 
 
 to yield, especially in return for any thing 
 bestowed, as a gift, labour, attention ; hence 
 often found where a7roSt 8o>/ii might have 
 stood. a) Genr. e. g. of persons, c. ace. 
 Rev. 20, 13 bis, (8a>Kfv rj SdXacrcra TOVS vf- 
 Kpovs tv avTjj KT\. Of things, Luke 6, 38 
 8o37]<reTai vp.1v p-erpov. . .Scocroucru fls TOV 
 K.6\nov \!fj.<av. Trop. \6yov Saxrei rca 3e<u, 
 shall render an account to God, Rom. 14, 
 12 ; so Pint, de Puer. educ. 14. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 I. 4. 3. b) Spoken of what is given as a 
 reward, recompense, to give, to reward, to 
 pay, Matt. 20, 4. 14. Mark 14, 11. Rev. 
 
 II, 18. Or of the price of any thing, tri 
 bute, tithes, Matt. 16, 26 et Mark 8, 37. 
 Matt. 22, 17. 27, 10. Luke 20, 22. 23, 2. 
 Heb. 7, 4. Sept. for sen Zech. 11, 12. So 
 Xen. Conv. 1. 5 apyvpiov. Palaeph. 38 8i8. 
 (popov. c) Of the earth, to give forth, t? 
 yield, e. g. Kapnov, Matt. 13, 8. Mark 4, 7 
 8. Sept. and ,P3 Zech. 8, 12. So czTroSi- 
 
 Xen. Cyr. 8^ 3. 38. 
 
 4. From the Heb. used in the sense of 
 , like "jnj for BliU , to put, to set, to 
 place ; see Heb. Lex. art. "jH? no. 2, 3. 
 
 a) Pr. and with em c. ace. to place or 
 put upon any thing ; e. g. TO apyvpiov eVt 
 TT)v Tpdirefav, to place money upon the table 
 of the broker, i. e. to place at interest, Luke 
 19, 23, comp. Matt. 25, 27; comp. also 
 Sept. and "HJ Lev. 25, 37. So 8i8. TO. Su- 
 fji.iap.aTa eV! TO %v(Tiao-Tr]pioi>, i. e. to offer in 
 sacrifice, c. dat. of manner TU LS Trpoa-ev^als, 
 Rev. 8, 3; comp. Ecclus. [32] 35, 16. 17. 
 Sept. and 1^3 Ez. 7, 3. 4. al. comp. I"} 
 Gen. 1,7. 9, 13, where Sept. rt Sq/zi eV. 
 So perh. with els Luke 15, 22 ; see in no. 2. 
 a. Once c. tvumiov TWOS, Rev. 3, 8 SeScoKa 
 evunriov crow 3upai> avfayp.fvr]v. So Sept. for 
 iJSb -jW Neh. 9, 35. Trop. in the Latin- 
 ism 8ovvai epyao-iav, dare operam, to 
 give labour or diligence, to make effort, to 
 endeavour, c. infin. Luke 12, 58. So Her- 
 mog. de Invent. 3. 5. 7 tpyao-iav rep eVt^st- 
 prjp.aTi 8i8ovs. See dare operam, Ernesti 
 Clav. Cic. art. Opera. Comp. <nrov8r;v TI- 
 3e i/ai Find. Pyth. 4. 492 ; ponere operam, 
 Cic. pro Mur. 22 ; pro Cluent. 57. 
 
 b) Of miracles, to do, to perform, to ex 
 hibit, Matt. 24, 24. Mark 13, 22. Acts 2, 
 19 quoted from Joel 3, 3 [2, 30], where 
 Sept. for |f]3 , as also Ex. 7, 9. Deut. 13, 1 ; 
 comp. Sept. Tferfpi for ovi) Deut. 6, 22. 
 
 c) With a doub. ace. of person, to appoint, 
 to constitute, as any thing, where the last 
 ace. is by apposition; Eph. 1, 22 avTov 
 eScuKf Kpa\r]v inrfp Trdvra. 4, 11. Sept. and 
 
 jrs Ex. 7, 1 ; also "jna Gen. 17, 5, Sept, 
 
Biejelpco 
 
 182 
 
 i. So Sept. 8i86vai els for fntos Ez. 
 37, 22. Comp. Gesen. Lehrgeb. p/813. 
 Matth. 420. 
 
 d) Of a law, ordinance, or the like, to 
 give, i. e. to appoint, to ordain, to prescribe ; 
 e. g. v6p.ov John 7, 19. Gal. 3, 21 ; SiaSyy- 
 KTJV 7TfpiTOfj.rjs Acts 7, 8 ; TrepiTOfjirjv John 7, 
 22. Sept. for "jins Lev. 26, 46 ; for ta^ton 
 Josh. 24, 25 ; H^ Ezra 9, 11. Sept. 818. 
 dia^rjKrjv for "jM Num. 25, 12 ; also Heb. 
 IM Gen. 17, 2. Lev. 26, 1, where Sept. 
 Tfarjiu. The classic form is Setvai vopov, 
 whence VO^O^TTJS a lawgiver ; see the Gr. 
 Lexicons in Ti 3>7/. + 
 
 OteyetpO), f. tpw, (eyetpco,) to U>afce Tip 
 
 fully, to rouse, c. ace. pr. persons from 
 sleep, Matt. 1, 24. Mark 4, 38. 39. Luke 
 8, 24. So Jos. Ant. 2. 5. 5. Hdian. 2. 1. 
 13. Plut. Dion 26. Trop. e. g. the sea, to 
 arouse, to agitate, Pass. John 6, 18 ; comp. 
 Heb. *i20 and Sept. fgeyeipa Jon. 1, 13. 
 Also of the mind, or in mind, to excite, in 
 cite, stir up, 2 Pet. 1, 13. 3, 1. So 2 Mace. 
 15, 10. Plut. Cato Min. 48. 
 
 i, Pass, depon. (eV- 
 3v/ieo/iat,) to revolve throughout in mind, 
 to consider carefully, c. irepi TWOS Acts 10, 
 19 in later edit, for eVSv^eoiai in Rec. 
 
 , aor. 2 
 
 i, ) to ^pass ow/ through, absol. Acts 28, 
 3 Grb. f xi8va . . . 5ie|eX3o{icra KaSJ^e KrX. 
 Luc. Tox. 55. Plato Prot 315. a. 
 
 Sie^oSos, ov, f], (eoos,) a way out 
 through, a passage out, a pass, Hdian. 8. 1. 
 11. Thuc. 3. 98; comp. Sept. for xsi a 
 2 K. 2, 21. In N. T. a thoroughfare, cross 
 ing, fork of the roads, not in the city 
 (comp. v. 7), but in the country, where 
 many resort or pass ; Matt. 22, 9 eVi ras 
 8te68ovs TOIV oScoi , q. d. cross-roads. 
 
 O v, , 
 interpreter, 1 Cor. 14, 28. 
 
 SieplAyveva), f. fiia-co, (8id intens. eppr)- 
 vev(o,~) to interpret fully, to explain, to ex 
 pound, c. ace. et dat. Luke 24, 27 ; absol. 
 Acts 9, 36. 1 Cor. 12, 30. 14, 5. 13. 27. 
 2 Mace. 1, 36. Pol. 3. 22. 3. 
 
 i,, f. SteXevo-o/iat Luke 2, 35, 
 i,) impf. 8ir)px6p,r]v Luke 5, 15. 17, 
 1 1 ; aor. 2 8irj\^ov ; see in ep^o/mt. 
 
 1. to go or come through, to pass through, 
 with 8id c. gen. of place ; Matt. 12, 43 and 
 Luke 11, 24 Stepxerat 81 dvv8pa>v. Luke 4, 
 30. 17, 11. John 4, 4. [8, 59.] Acts 9, 32. 
 1 Cor. 10, 1 ; 81 eKfivrjs sc. o8ov, Luke 19, 
 4 ; 81 vpav, 2 Cor. 1, 16 ; Sta rpv^futros 
 pa<pt 8osMatt. 19,24. Mark 10,25. [Luke 18, 
 
 25.] Comp.Buttm. 5 147. n. 9. Sept. for NIB 
 2 Chr. 23, 15 ; ^35 1 Sam. 9, 3. 4. (Trop. 
 Plato Soph. 255. e.) With ace. of place ; 
 Luke 19, I 8ir]pxfTo TTJV Ifpt^co. Acts 12, 10. 
 13,6. 14,24. 15,3.41. 16,6. 18,23. 19, 
 1. 21. 20, 2. 1 Cor. 16, 5 bis. Heb. 4, 14 
 o ieX.rjXv SoTa rovs ovpavovs, who has passed 
 through the heavens, i. e. all the heavens, 
 quite up to the throne of God, comp. 2 Cor. 
 12, 2. 4. Eph. 4, 10. Heb. 7, 26. Sept. for 
 Tj^ Josh. 18, 4; 13? Gen. 41, 47. So 
 Hdian. 8. 1. 7. Xen. An. 3. 5. 17. Absol. 
 but with accus. impl. as TTJV yrjv, rrjv iroXiv, 
 TTJV %(bpav, i. e. through the adjacent coun 
 try, the region round about ; Acts 8, 4. 40 
 8ifpx6p.evos fvayyeXigero ras TroXets Trdvas. 
 10, 38. 17, 23. 20, 25 ; with Kara nupas 
 Luke 9, 6. So with eW c. gen. of place, 
 to go or travel through the country as far 
 as, Acts 11, 19. 22; and hence simply, to 
 go or pass to a place, c. eW, Luke 2, 15. 
 Acts 9, 38. Trop. els irdvras dv^pdnrovs 6 
 Sawro? SirjX Sev, Rom. 5, 12. Sept. pr. c. 
 els for jsia 2 Sam. 17, 24 ; c. cVt for -,25) 
 Jon. 2, 4. So Xen. An. 6. 3. 16. Spoken 
 of things, e. g. a sword, to pierce through, 
 c. ace. Luke 2, 35. (So c. gen. Horn. II. 20. 
 100.) Trop. of a rumor, Xo yoy, to go out 
 through the country, to be spread abroad, 
 absol. Luke 5, 15 ; so Plut. Galba 26. Xen. 
 An. 1. 4. 7 SiTjXSe Xoyoy. 
 
 2. Of those who pass over a river, lake, 
 sea ; Mark 4, 35 et Luke 8, 22 Sie XSw/ifj/ 
 els TO Trepav. Acts 18, 27. 13, 14 SieXSoWes 
 OTTO Tr)s Ilfpyvs, i. e. passing over by water 
 from Perga to Antioch ; comp. v. 13. Sept. 
 for tfia Deut. 4, 21 ; IS? Jer. 2, 10. Xen. 
 An. 6. 3. 16. 
 
 oiepwrdat, >, f. faa, (<fp&>raa>.) to in 
 quire throughout, carefully ; to inquire out, 
 c. ace. TTJV olniav Acts 10, 17. Pol. 5. 50. 
 12. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 15. 
 
 oierrjf, e os, ovs, 6, rj, adj. (Sty, eros,) of 
 two years, two years old; Matt. 2, 16 diro 
 8iTovs [TraiSos] KOI Kcmorepw, from the 
 child of two years old and under. So Sept. 
 
 OTTO TpifTovs KOL ecu co for 
 
 ^ S T T V 
 
 1 5? ? ? ! j from the child of three years old 
 and upward, 2 Chr. 31, 16 ; OTTO et/cocrae- 
 roCs 1 Chr. 27, 23. Ezra 3, 8. Pollux On. 
 2. 2. 8. Also Surfs xpovos 2 Mace. 10, 3. 
 Hdot. 2. 2. 
 
 Sieria, as, 17, (Ster^y,) the space of two 
 years, biennium, Acts 24, 27. 28, 30. 
 
 StTjjeo/jiai, o\>p.ai, f. Tjo-op-ai, Mid. depon. 
 (ijyeop-at ,) pr. to lead or conduct through ; 
 hence trap, to go through with, to recount, 
 to tell, to declare the whole of any thing ; 
 
183 
 
 SIKCUO? 
 
 c. ace. et dat. I\Iark 9. 9 iva p.rj8(v\ 8inyr]- 
 (ruvrai a d8oi>. Luke 9, 10 ; ace. simpl. 
 Luke 8, 39. Acts 8, 33 TTJV 8e ytveav avrov 
 ris dirjyrjcrfTai. quoted from Is. 53, 8 where 
 Sept. for ftHl to ; se e in ye vtd no. 3, and 
 aipca no. 4. With dat. and TTW?, Mark 5. 16. 
 Acts 9, 27 8iT)yr)<raTo avTcils TTCOS. 12,* 17 ; 
 also c. TTfpi TWOS Heb. 11,32. Sept. for *i50 
 Gen. 24, 66. 1 Mace. 8, 2. Hdian. 2. 15 . 
 13. Xen. CEc, 7. 9. 
 
 8trjyr)(Ti<? fvs , fj, (StTjye o/xai,) narration, 
 history, Luke 1,1. Sept. for 1*99 Judg. 
 7, 15. 2 Mace. 2, 32. Pol. 3. 36/4. Plato 
 Rep. 392. d. 
 
 SirjveKrjs, eos, ovs, 6, 17, adj. (TJVCKTIS, 
 8iT]VfyKa, Sia^epco,) pr. carried .through, ex 
 tended, protracted, e. g. roots Horn. II. 12. 
 134; a ditch Diod. Sic. 4. 11. Of time, 
 e. g. the night, Luc. V. H. 1. 19. Trop. of 
 a la\v, j/o /ior, continual, perpetual, Plato 
 Rep. 839. a. In N. T. only of time, Neut. 
 ro SinvfKfs, pr. continuance, perpetuity; 
 and so adv. ds TO dtrjvfKes, continually, for 
 ever, Heb. 7, 3. 10, 1. 12. 14. So Symm. 
 for 151 C&iS p s . 48, 15. App. B. Civ. p. 
 632 SiKTCLTup fls TO 8iT]VfKfs jjp&T], i. q. es 
 del p . 601. Heliod. 1. p. 25. 
 
 Si^aXacrcro?, O v, o, r/, adj. (8is, 3aXa<r- 
 <ra,) divided into two seas, Strabo p. 11. a. 
 In N. T. between two seas, bimaris ; Acts 
 27, 41 ds TOTTOV 8ftd\a<ro-ov, a place between 
 two seas, at the meeting of two opposing 
 currents, forming a shoal or sand bank. So 
 Dion Chrys. 5. p. 83. d, /Spa^ea /cat StSaXarra. 
 Conip. bimaris Corinthus Hor. Od. 1. 
 7. 2. 
 
 SlLKveOfJiai, ovp.ai, f. 8uofiat, ( iKveopai, ) 
 to go or pass through, to pierce through, c. 
 axpi TWOS Heb. 4, 12. Sept. pr. for rna 
 Ex. 26, 28. 36, 33. Hesych. ^ 
 
 i,) aor. 1 8ifcm)ara, 
 trans, to place asunder, to separate ; aor. 2 
 8ifo-Trjv, intrans. to separate, to go away ; 
 see in 1<rrrjfj.i, and Buttm. $ 107. II. 1. (m. 
 21.) InN. T. a) As to place, intrans. c. 
 OTTO. Luke 24, 51 dUarrj cm avTo>v. Acts 
 27, 28 ftpaxv 8e Siaorqo-aiTfs (eaurovs), 
 departing a litlle, going a little further. So 
 Ecclus. 28, 14. Pol. 10. 3. 6. Tbuc. 4. 74. 
 b) Of time, intrans. to pass away, to elapse, 
 Luke 22, 59. 
 
 f. t cro/im, Mid. depon. 
 t.) to affirm through and through, 
 to affirm confidently ; with Xeycov Luke 22, 
 59 ; c. inf. Acts 12, 15. Jos. Ant. 2. 6. 4. 
 Dem. 447. 25. Plato Phaed. 100. d. 
 
 as, /, i/caioj, icpais, 
 righteous judgment, Rom. 2, 5 ; comp. 
 
 1 Thess. 1, 5. Gr. Anon, for BKJa Hos. 
 G, 5. Test. XII Patr. p. 547, 581. Comp. 
 8iKmoKpiTT]s 2 Mace. 12, 41. 
 
 8t/cat09, aia, ov, (Si ^a Aristot. Eth. Nic. 
 5. 2 ; others SI KJ;,) right, just, pr. physi 
 cally, i. e. even, equal, like, comp. la-os ; 
 e. g. numbers Hdot. 2. 149 ; app.a ov St /c. 
 an uneven going chariot, Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 26 ; 
 then, just as it should be, Jit, proper, good, 
 as soil, yrj Poll. On. 1. 227; yf]8ioi> Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 3. 38 ; comp. justissima tellus Virg. 
 Geor. 2. 460. Hence in a moral sense, 
 right, just, e. g. 
 
 1. Of one who acts alike to all, who prac 
 tises even-handed justice, just, equitable, im 
 partial; spoken of a judge, e. g. Christ or 
 God, 2 Tim. 4, 8 6 8iicaios KptTrjs. Rev. 16, 
 5. Of a judgment, decision, John 5, 30 17 
 Kpicris f) f[j.r) SiKaia e crrt. 7,24. Luke 12,57. 
 
 2 Thess. 1, 5. 6. Rev. 16, 7. 19, 2. Sept. 
 for na Jer. 42, 5 ; p"JS Ps. 7, 12. 119, 
 137. Plut. de rect. rat. Aud. 13. Time. 3. 
 44. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 17. Plato Gorg. 523. e, 
 Iva diKaia f] Kpiais r/. 
 
 2. Of character or conduct, just as it 
 should be, upright, righteous, virtuous ; also 
 good in a general sense ; but 6 BLKUIOS is 
 strictly one who does right, while 6 dyaSo s 
 is one who does good, a benefactor ; comp. 
 Tittm. de Syn. N. T. p. 20, 21. Comp. 
 also Cic. Off. 2. 10 justitia, ex qua una 
 virtute boni viri appellantur. De Fin. 5. 23 
 justitia . . . cui adjuncta sunt pietas, bonitas, 
 liberalitas, benignitas, comitas, quaeque sunt 
 generis ejusdem. Sept. usually for P" 1 ^ ; 
 see Heb. Lex. s. v. no. 3. 
 
 a) Of things, e. g. epya 1 John 3, 12 ; 
 eVroXij Rom. 7, 12. Neut. ro 8iKaiov, 
 ivhat is right, just, Jit ; e. g. wages Matt. 
 20, 4. 7 ; also genr. Col. 4, 1. Eph. 6, 1. 
 Phil. 1, 7. 2 Pet. 1, 13. Hdian. 4. 5. 12. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 25. Plato Gorg. 457. c. 
 
 b) Of persons : a) In the language of 
 common life ; Matt. 5, 45 /3p x rt 8i<ai- 
 ovs Km d8iKovs. Mark 2, 17. Luke 5, 32. 
 18,9. 20,20. Acts 10, 22. Rom. 6, 7. 1 Tim. 
 1, 9. 2 Pet. 2, 7. 8. al. Sept. and p^S 
 Gen. 18, 23 sq. Ecc. 3, 17. (Dem. 742. 6. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 8. 11.) Sometimes the idoa 
 of mildness, clemency, predominates, Matt. 
 1, 19. 1 John 1, 9; or also that of inno 
 cence, Matt. 27, 19. 24 ; so Sept. for 5^p; 
 Job 9, 23. Prov. 6, 17. 0) Spec, of those 
 whose hearts are right with God, right 
 eous, pious, godly ; Matt. 13, 43 rdrf ol 8lx. 
 
 cos o ^Xiof. v. 49. 23, 29. 
 
184 
 
 35 alua 8iKaiov, i. e. blood of the righteous. 
 25, 46. Mark 6, 20. Luke 14, 14. 23, 47. 
 Rom. 2, 13. 3, 10. 5, 19. Heh, 11, 4. al. 
 Rom. 1, 17 and Gal. 3, 11 and Heb. 10, 38 
 6 8e diKaios eK TricTTecas {rjarerai, the just shall 
 live (be saved) by faith, quoted from Hab. 
 2, 4 where Sept. for p^S ; as also Ps. 1, 5. 
 118, 15. al. Test. XII Patr. p. 571, 609. 
 y) Used in the highest and most perfect 
 sense of God, John 17, 25. Rom. 3, 26. 
 1 John 2, 29 ; of Christ, Acts 3, 14, 7, 52. 
 22, 14. 1 John 2, 1. 3, 7. Sept. for P^B 
 Ex. 9, 27. Deut. 32, 4. Comp. Xen. Mem. 
 
 4. 4. 25. + 
 
 SiKCUoarvvr), rjs, f], (SiWos,) pr. the do 
 ing or being what is just and right, e. g. 
 
 1. The doing alike to all, i. e. justice, 
 equity, impartiality ; spoken of a judge or 
 magistrate, Acts 17, 31 Kplveiv TTJV OIKOU/IC- 
 vr)v tv SLKCIIOO-VVT]. Rev. 19, 11. Heb. 11,33 
 flpydcravro 8iKaio<rvvr)v, wrought justice, dis 
 pensed justice to the nations. Rom. 9, 28, 
 quoted from Is. 10, 22, where Sept. for 
 ^IvJ 2 ? 5 see * n 0-vvrefj.va). Sept. also for 
 P7* Ps. 9, 9. 35, 24. Ecclus. 45, 26. 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 4. 1. Dem. 199. 5. Plato Gorg. 
 464 c. 
 
 2. Of character, conduct, and the like, 
 the being just as one should be, i. e. recti 
 tude, uprightness, righteousness, virtue, like 
 the Heb. PtJS , fi^riS ; see in SiWos no. 
 2. init. 
 
 a) Of actions, duties, etc. i. q. TO S/Katoz/, 
 what is right, proper, Jit; Matt. 3, 15 TrXr/- 
 pcacrai Tracrav 8iKaio(rvvnv. 
 
 b) Of disposition, conduct: a) In the 
 language of common life, Eph. 5, 9. 1 Tim. 
 6, 11. 2 Tim. 2, 22. Heb. 7, 2. Rev. 22, 11 
 in later edit. Sept. for P^S p s . 15, 2; 
 Hp^S Prov. 8, 18. 20. (.Eschin. 25. 42. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 24.) Hence the doing 
 right, uprightness, as manifested in kind 
 ness, beneficence, bounty, 2 Cor. 9, 9. 10 ; 
 perh. 2 Pet. 1,1; see in 8iKaios no. 2. b. a. 
 So Sept. for "ton Gen. 20, 13 ; ttp^S 1 
 Sam. 12,7. Ps. 24,5; also Tob. 2, 14/Bar. 
 
 5, 9. ) Spoken of that righteousness 
 which has regard to God and the divine 
 law, viz. either (I) merely external and 
 consisting in the observance of external 
 precepts, as SiKcuoa-vivj f/ eV vo^a V. ex vo- 
 IJLOV, Rom. 10, 3. 5. Phil. 3, 6. 9, where it 
 is contrasted with 77 SLK. 8ia Triareats ; or 
 (2) internal, where the heart is right with 
 God, piety towards God, and thence right 
 eousness, godliness, vital religion ; genr. 
 Matt. 5, 6. 10. 20. 6, 33. 21, 32. Luke 1, 
 75. A its 10, 35. 24, 25. Rom. 6, 16. 18 sq. 
 
 Heb. 1, 9. 5, 13. James 3, 18. al. s?ep. 
 Sept. and p^2 Ps. 17, 15; fip^S 1 K. 3,6. 
 Ez. 14, 14. So Jos. Ant. 1. 2* 1. ib. 8. 4 
 4. Spec, it is said : w Seos Xoyi erat 8i*at- 
 ocrvvT]v %c0p\s epyav Rom. 4, 6 ; and e Xoyt- 
 o-3r; ro> Aj3paa/j. 77 TV KTTLS els 8iKaio(Tvv7)v V. 
 3. 5.- 9 ; also v. 22. Gal. 3, 6. James 2, 23 ; 
 all in allusion to Gen. 15, 6 where Sept. for 
 np^S ; comp. Ps. 32, 1. 2. Similar in the 
 case of Noah is 77 8iKaioo-vvrj Kara iriaTiv 
 Heb. 11,7. Hence in Paul s writings, 77 
 8 iKaiocrvvT) (e /c) SeoO 77 CK (8ia) Tri 
 o-re cos Xpio-Tov, the righteousness oj 
 (from) God which is of (through) faith in 
 Christ, i. e. the righteousness which God 
 reckons or imputes to believers because of 
 their faith in Christ, Rom. 1, 17. 3,22. 
 Phil. 3,9. The same is fj 8iKaio<rvvr) 
 , Rom. 9, 30. 10, 6. Gal. 5, 5 ; 
 
 also 77 8iKaioo-vvr) (rov) SeoC, Rom. 
 3, 21. 10, 3 bis. 2 Cor. 5, 21 Iva yivu>p&a 
 8iKaio<rvvr] 3eov eV aura, that we may become 
 the righteousness of God in him, i. e. the 
 embodiment and manifestation of this right 
 eousness. (Comp. Sept. and " irp np_TS 
 Ps. 5, 9.) So too simply 17 8iKaioa-vvr) 
 id. Rom. 5, 17 77 8a>pea TT)S 8iKaio(rvvr]s. V. 
 21. 10, 4. 2 Cor. 3, 9. Gal. 2, 21. 3, 21. 
 Meton. of Christ as the mediator through 
 whom this righteousness is thus reckoned, 
 1 Cor. 1, 30. This 8iKaio<rvvr] <FK TnWecoy, 
 so reckoned to believers, is according to 
 Paul the ground or occasion of their jus 
 tification before God; comp. Rom. 5, 1. 8, 
 1 sq. Hence the doctrine of justification by 
 faith. y) In the highest and most perfect 
 sense as an attribute of God, referring par 
 ticularly to his truth, Rom. 3, 5 comp. v. 4 ; 
 spec, of his judicial righteousness, Rom. 3, 
 25. 26. Of Christ, John 16, 8. 10. -f 
 
 OlKaiOO)) oo, f. cbcro), (Si /catoy,) to hold 
 right, to think right or fit, Hdot. 1. 89, 133 ; 
 to do right or justice to any one, for his 
 benefit, Pol. 3. 31. 9.; also to condemn, Thuc. 
 3. 40. In N. T. to hold as righteous, to de 
 clare righteous, to justify, e. g. 
 
 1. As a matter of right, in a forensic 
 sense, to justify, to absolve, to clear from 
 any charge or imputation; Pass. Matt. 12, 
 37 e/c TJV \6ya>v <rov SiKatcoS^cr^, KCU fK T. 
 X. o-ou KaraSiKacrST^cr^. 1 Cor. 4, 4 ; with 
 OTTO TIVOS, Rom. 6, 7 6 yap diro^avatv 8f8i- 
 Kaicorai OTTO rrjs ap.aprias, i. e. is freed from 
 its power and influence ; comp. v. 18 and see 
 in dTro 3vr]o-K<i> no. 3. Sept. for p^S Ex. 23, 
 7. Deut. 25, 1. Also diKaiovv lavrov, to 
 justify oneself, sc. from the charge of put 
 ting an unnecessary question, Luke 10, 29. 
 
SlKCUOd) 
 
 4 185 
 
 SifCIJ 
 
 So Sept. for p-!Srt Gen. 44, 16. Comp. 
 Ecclus. 10, 29 OTTO nvos 26, 29. 
 
 2. to declare to be just as one should be; 
 to pronounce upright, righteous, good ; see 
 in SiKaioy no. 2. Hence 
 
 a) Genr. to justify, i. e. to do justice to, 
 to acknowledge and vindicate, to honour, to 
 glorify ; c. ace. Luke 7, 29 TOV %(6v. Pass. 
 
 I Tim. 3, 16 Seos . . . e SiKcuwSq eV 7rvfvp.an. 
 Rom. 3, 4 quoted from Ps. 51, 6 where 
 Sept. for P^S . So Matt. 11, 19 and Luke 
 
 7, 35 f SiKaia>3/7 ^ cro<pia OTTO rail/ Tewuv 
 avTrjs, i. e. the true wisdom is justified, ac 
 knowledged, honoured, by those who receive 
 her; comp. Kypke I. p. 240. Sept. and 
 p^S Ez. 16, 52. Psalt. Salom. 2, 16. 
 3, 5. 
 
 b) Spec, in relation to God and his law, 
 to justify, to declare righteous ; see in 81- 
 KCUOS no. 2. b. /3, and SiKaioo-uvr) no. 2. b. /3. 
 a) Externally, in accordance with the Jew 
 ish law ; Luke 16, 15 01 SiKaiovvres fav- 
 TOVS evwrriov TU>V dv^pdairav, i. e. who profess 
 yourselves righteous. /3) God is said to 
 justify a person, to regard and treat him as 
 righteous, by reckoning or imputing to him 
 faith (Tr/o-rt?) as righteousness ; see in 81- 
 Kaioo-vvr) no. 2. b. /3. So genr. where faith 
 is manifested in works, Pass. c. e epycov 
 James 2, 21. 24. 25; absol. Luke 18, 14. 
 Oftener in Paul s writings, where faith in 
 Christ is the ground or occasion of justifi 
 cation, i. e. justification by faith ; c. ace. et 
 en (Siu) nlcrreais, Rom. 3, 26. 30 6s SiKatco- 
 tm Trepiro/ij/i fK iricrTecas KM OKpoftv<mav 
 8ia rrjs Trurrfa)?. Gal. 3, 8 ; ace. Rom. 4, 5. 
 
 8, 30 bis ; absol. 8, 33. Pass, absol. Rom. 
 
 2, 13 ; 8iK. 8apfdv 3, 24 ; rfj ^apm Tit. 3, 
 7 ; Sitt Tn orews I. X. Gal. 2, 16 ; fK 
 
 Xp. Rom. 5, 1. Gal. 2, 16. 3, 24; 
 
 X&>ptr tpyuv j/o/iov Rom. 3, 28 ; ev r<a aifian 
 
 aiirov 5, 9 ; eV ro> ovopaTi I. X. 1 Cor. 6, 
 
 II ; eV XpioToi Gal. 2, 17; with OTTO rii/of, 
 Acts 13, 39 OTTO TroWo)!/ . . . tv rovra) Tray 6 
 iri<rT(va)v 8iKaiovTai. Also by works or by 
 the law none can be justified ; so tv vopcp, 
 Gal. 3, 11 on Se V id/i< ou8el? StKaiovrai 
 Trapa r<5 3fa5. 5, 4 ; with aTro TIVOS added, 
 Acts 13, 39; also e tpyuv (i/d/xou) Rom. 
 
 3, 20. 4, 2. Gal. 2, 16 bis. 
 
 3. Mid. to wa/ce oneself upright, right 
 eous ; hence to 6e upright, righteous ; Pass, 
 aor. 1 in Mid. signif. Buttm. 5 113. n. 5. 
 Rev. 22, 1 1 Rec. 6 8t /<atos SiKaicoS^Tco JTI, 
 Tie 2/ja is righteous, let him lie righteous 
 still ; but later editions read : 8iKaioa-vvrjv 
 TrotJjo-drw. Sept. c StKai wcra TTJV Kapftlav pov, 
 
 St; p s . 73, 13. 
 
 OtKai(t)[J,a, aTos, TO, (StKatdce ) 1 . a 
 right or just act, righteous deed ; Rom. 5, 
 18 81 tvos SiKatco/wiTor, i. q. 8ta TT/S jnaKof/s 
 v. 19. Rev. 19, 8. Bar. 2, 19. 
 
 2. A declaration of what is right and fit, 
 a decree, ordinance, precept ; e. g. TOV Kvpiov 
 Luke 1, 6. Rom. 1, 32; TOV j/d/zov Rom. 2, 
 26. 8, 4. Also Heb. 9, 1 8. rr)s Aarpe/ar, 
 
 1. e. respecting worship. 9, 10 8. r)s o-apKo y, 
 carnal. Sept. for ph Ex. 15, 25. 26 ; OBttSn 
 Ex. 21, 1. Num. 36, 13. So Jos. B. J. 7. 5. 
 
 2. Also of God s judgments decreed, ra 81- 
 K<uaVara,Rev. 15,4. So Heb. BBttJa Ps. 1 19, 
 75. 137, where Sept. Kpipa. Comp. Plato 
 Legg. 864. e, T&V a\\a>v 8lKa^c^)/iarca^ 
 a0ft<r3a). 
 
 3. Of a justifying act, justification, Rom. 
 5, 16 ; opp. KaTaKpi/j-a. See in StKaidcu no. 
 
 2. b. 0. 
 
 St/cattoy, adv. (SiVatoy,) rightly, justly, 
 i. e. a) Pr. with strict justice, Luke 23, 
 4. 1 Pet. 2, 23. Sept. for p^S Prov. 31,9. 
 So Wisd. 19, 13. Xen. Mem/3. 1. 2. b) 
 in the right way, as one ought, 1 Cor. 15, 
 34. So Xen. Hi. 4. 10. c) righteously, 
 piously, 1 Thess. 2, 10. Tit. 2, 12. 
 
 Sifcalcocris, ems, 17, (SiKdtdw,) the act of 
 declaring righteous, justification, which 
 God bestows on believers, Rom. 4, 25. 5, 
 18 ; see in 8ucai6a no. 2. b. /3. So genr. 
 Jos. Ant. 18. 1. 3 VTTO ^Sowr 8iKM<acreis re 
 Kal Tifj.as ols operas fj KUKIOS (7nrr]8fvcns lv 
 rt3 /3io) ytyove. 
 
 oC, o, (StKafa),) a dispenser of 
 justice, a judge, Luke 12, 14; also Acts 7, 
 27. 35, quoted from Ex. 2, 14 where Sept. 
 for BS&5. So Hdian. 7. 7. 6. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 3. 17. The difference between 6 SiKacm^ 
 and 6 Kpmj? appears to have been, either 
 that 6 Kptrfjs was the presiding judge and ot 
 SiKao-Tai the side judges ; or that d 8tKa<TTrjs 
 had respect only to law, while 6 Kpiri^r was 
 a judge in law and equity ; see Wyttenb. 
 Ep. crit. p. 219. Herm. Polit. Antt. 5 134. 
 Diet, of Antt. arts. Critce, Dicastes. 
 
 SlKiji 77?, 17, custom, manner, Horn. Od. 4. 
 691 ; prescription, right, Horn. II. 16. 388 ; 
 right, justice, spec, a judicial process, law 
 suit, trial, Dem. 298. 2. Xen. Mem. 2. 9. 1. 
 In N. T. of the result of an action or 
 trial, i. e. 
 
 1 . judgment, sentence of condemnation, to 
 be followed by punishment; Acts 25, 15 
 aiTovfifvoi (car* avrov 8iKT)v. Antiph. 751. 
 4. ib. 752. 2 dvayKij 8e rrjs Si /c^s w*a<r3ai 
 Trapa r6 aXr^ey. See Reiske ad loc. 
 
 3. penally, punishment, vengeance ; so 
 
&CKTVOV 
 
 186 
 
 2 Thess. 1, 9 8iKi]v TIO-OVO-LV, see in rt co. 
 Jude 7 Trvpbs alcoviov 8iKijv inrexovo-ai, see in 
 vTre xo). Sept. for QS Deut. 32, 41. Ez. 
 25, 12. So Hdian. 178. 12. Plut. de sera 
 Num. vind. 8. Xen. An. 5. 8. 1. Spec, of 
 the divine vengeance, either personified, or 
 perh. referring to the heathen goddess f) 
 AIKJJ, Nemesis ; Acts 28, 4 ov ... 17 8iKr) fjv 
 OVK f iao-fv. Comp. 2 Mace. 8, 11. 13. Dem. 
 772. 25. Arr. Exp. Alex. 4. 9. 9. 
 
 SLKTVOV, ov, TO, a net, for fishing, Matt. 
 4, 20. 21. Mark 1, 18. 19. Luke 5, 2. 4. 5. 
 6. John 21, 6. 8. 11 bis. Luc. Hermot. 65. 
 Plut. de Solert. Anim. 26 ; genr. Xen. Mem. 
 3. 11.8. 
 
 ov, 6, TJ, adj. (Sty, Xeyw.) pr. 
 uttering twice, repeating, so SiXoyeiv Diod. 
 Sic. 20. 37. Xen. Eq. 8. 2. In N. T. double- 
 tongued, speaking one thing and meaning 
 another, 1 Tim. 3, 8. So Theophyl. in loc. 
 oXXa (ppovajv Kal aXXa \f-ycov. 
 
 Si>6, conj. see in Std II. 1. b. /3. p. 168. 
 
 SioSeva), f. fvo-o), (odevco,) to travel 
 trough, to pass through, c. ace. of place 
 Acts 17, 1 ; with Kara TI distributive!} 7 , Luke 
 8, 1 8ia>8eve Kara 7r6\tv Kal Ka>nr]v. Sept. for 
 T|ton Gen. 13, 17. Plut. Flamin. 5. Pol. 
 2. 15! 5. 
 
 , 6, Dionysius, an Areopa- 
 gite of Athens, converted under Paul s 
 preaching, Acts 17, 34. 
 
 conj. see Sid, in Sid II. 1. b. /3. 
 
 eos, ovs, 6, T), adj. (Ai os, irl- 
 TTTCO,) fallen from Jove, heaven-descended ; 
 Acts 19, 35 TOV tiioTTfTovs sc. dydX/iaros, i. e. 
 the image worshipped in the temple of Di 
 ana at Ephesus; see Plin. H. N. 16. 79. 
 Eurip. Iph. in Taur. 86-88. Wetst. in loc. 
 Hdian. 1. 11. 2 ayoA/ia SioTrere s. Plut. 
 Numa 13. 
 
 Siop^iCOfjia, OTOS, TO, (StopSdto,) pr. a 
 making straight throughout ; hence reform, 
 improvement, Mss. Acts 24, 3 [2], where 
 Rec. Kardp3cB/ia. Plut. Numa 17. 
 
 top^&)crt9j ecoj, f), (StopSo co,) pr. a ma 
 king straight throughout ; hence, right ar 
 rangement, Aristot. Polit. 8. Plato Legg. 
 642. a. In N. T. amendment, reformation ; 
 Heb. 9, 10 Kaipos SiopSwcrecoy, i. e. the time 
 of a new and better dispensation under the 
 Messiah ; comp. in aironaTao-racris.- Jos. 
 B. J. 1. 20. 1. Diod. Sic. 1. 75. Pol. 3. 
 118. 2. 
 
 SlOptHTO Ct) V. -TTft), f. co, (dpiWco,) to 
 dig through, e. g. TOV OIKOV, TTJV oiKiav, the 
 walls of houses, which in the East are often 
 built of sun-dried bricks, clay, earth, or also 
 
 loose stones ; Pass. Matt. 24, 43. Luke Ik 
 39 ; absol. Matt. 6, 19. 20. Sept. and IBH 
 Job 24, 16 ; so Ez. 12, 7 TOV i-ol^oi/. Xen* 
 Conv. 4. 30 ; Tol X ov Luc. Gall. 22. Thuc. 2. 3. 
 A toar/covpoi) o>v, ol, (Aids, Kovpos, Kopos,) 
 written also AioV/copoi, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
 235 ; the Dioscuri, i. e. Castor and Pollux, 
 in heathen mythology the s6ns of Jupiter by 
 Leda, and the patrons of sailors, Acts 28, 11. 
 Plut. T. Gracch. 2. Xen. Conv. 8. 29. 
 Comp. Hor. Carm. 1. 3. 2. ib. 4. 8. 31. 
 
 ;, conj. see in Sid U. 1. b. y. p. 168 
 
 eos, ovs, 6, (Aids, rpe<po>,) 
 Diotrephes, pr. n. of a person elsewhere un 
 known, 3 John 9. 
 
 o7rAoo9 ovs, or) rj, 6ov ovv, (Buttm. 
 60. 5. b,) two-fold, double; pr. Sept. for 
 fi?.tia Gen. 43, 15. Ex. 16, 5. Xen. An. 7. 
 6. 7. In N. T. trop. double, put for any 
 greater relative amount, as of honour, 1 Tim. 
 5, 17; of punishment, Rev. 18, 6 bis. Sept. 
 and Ji.JEa J er . 16, 18. So Hdian. 6. 7. 7. 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 23. Comparat. 8in\6- 
 Tfpov as adv. two-fold more, Matt. 23, 15. 
 
 OtTTAOO)) 5), f. ebo-w, (SiTrXo os,) to double, 
 trans. Rev. 18, 6 SiTrXwo-are avTrj Sin-Xa lit. 
 double to her double, L e. render back to her 
 two-fold punishment. Pr. Plut Camill. 41. 
 Xen. Hell. 6. 5. 19. 
 
 St9, num. adv. twice, Mark 14, 30. 72. 
 Luke 18, 12. Jude 12 Sis diro^avovra, twice 
 dead, i. e. utterly. So airag Kal Si s, once 
 and again, often, Phil. 4, 16. 1 Thess. 2, 18. 
 Sept. for B^BSa Num. 20, 11. Pol. 31. 
 19. 5. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 7. 
 
 oiara^a), f. do-co, (Si s,) to doubt, to be 
 uncertain, intrans. Matt. 14, 31. 28, 17. 
 Diod. Sic. 4. 62. Plato Legg. 897. b. 
 
 S/crTO/i09, ov, 6, 17, adj. (Si s, oro>a,) 
 double-mouthed, e. g. Trora/nds Pol. 34. 10. 5. 
 In N. T. of a sword, two-edged, Heb. 4, 
 12. Rev. 2, 12. [19, 15 Mss.] Trop. for 
 piercing words, Rev. 1, 16; comp. Heb. 4, 
 12. Is. 49, 2 et ibi Gesen. Comm. Sept. for 
 
 rri*B yyn p s . 149, 6. Prov. 5, 4. Ecclus. 
 
 21, 3. Eurip. Hel. 983. [992.] 
 
 Stcr^/XiOi, at, a, ord. adj. two thousand, 
 Mark 5, 13. 
 
 oii)\i%a}, f. lo-G), (iXio>,) to filter or 
 strain any thing through a sieve or strainer ; 
 hence, to strain out, c. ace. Matt. 23, 24 01 
 SiuXifbi/res TOV KowwTro. For the proverb 
 see Buxt. Lex. 1516. Pr. 8. TOV olvov Ar- 
 temid. 4. 50. Plut. Symp. 6. 7. 1. 
 
 St^a^ft), f. do-a), (Si ^a,) to divide in two, 
 Artemid. 2. 24. Plato Pol. 264. d. In N. 
 
/oaracria 
 
 187 
 
 T. trop. to disunite, to set at variance, c.acc. 
 Matt. 10, 35 ; comp. Luke 12, 52. 53. 
 
 Si^ocrracrta, as . ; ,}, (Si ^a, orao-ts.) pr. 
 a standing apart ; hence dissension, discord, 
 Rom. 16, 17. 1 Cor. 3, 3. Gal. 5, 20. 
 1 Mace. 3, 29. Pint. Comp. Lysand. et Sylla 
 1. Plato Le. 630. a. 
 
 re /ipo),) to cu/ i too, Jos. Ant. 8. 2. 2. Pol. 
 6. 28. 2; to cuC in pieces, Pol. 10. 15. 5. 
 Plut. Pyrrh. 24. This was a cruel kind of 
 punisliment practised among the Hebrews 
 and other ancient nations; see 1 Sam. 15, 
 33. 2 Sam. 12, 31. Dan. 2,5. 3,29; comp. 
 Heb. 11, 37. Hdot. 2. 139. ib. 3. 13, 16. 
 ib. 7. 39. Diod. Sic. 17. 83. Sueton. Calig. 
 27. Wetst. ad Matt. 24, 51. In N. T. trop. 
 to cut in pieces, to punish severely, c. ace. 
 Matt. 24, 51. Luke 12, 46. Comp. Hist, of 
 Sus. 55. 59. 
 
 Si-v^ao), co, f. ija-co, the contraction being 
 into T} instead of a, like faco, Buttm. { 105. 
 n. 5 ; the form St^a instead of 8i-^fj be 
 longs to the later Greek, John 7, 37. Rom. 
 12, 20. Athen. 3. 474. JSschin. Dial. Soc. 
 3. 5; comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 61. Winer 
 5 13. 3. 
 
 1. to thirst, to be athirst, absol. Matt. 25, 
 35. 37. 42. 44. John 4, 13. 15. 19, 28. 
 Rom. 12, 20. 1 Cor. 4, 11. Rev. 7, 16. 
 Sept. for jtES Judg. 15, 18. Hdian. 1. 17. 
 19. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 6. 
 
 2. Trop. to thirst after, to long for, c. ace. 
 as TTJV 8iKaiocrvvr)i>, righteousness, piety to 
 wards God and its attendant privileges, Matt. 
 6, 6 ; comp. Winer Gr. 30. 10. b. So 
 Sept. c. dat. for aoas Ps. 63, 2 ; c. ace. 
 Jos. B. J. 1. 32. 2 ult/ c. gen. Plut Cato 
 Maj. 11. Plato Rep. 562. c. Hence absol. 
 to thirst sc. after the disposition and privi 
 leges of the children of God, of the Mes 
 siah s kingdom, John 4, 14. 6, 35. 7, 37. 
 Rev. 21,6. 22, 17. Sept. and NES Ps. 42, 
 3. Comp. Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 1 OVTCOS e yco vfj.lv 
 
 fos, ovs, TO, (Snjraco,) thirst, 
 2 Cor. 11, 27. Sept. for xns Ex. 17, 3. 
 Luc. D. Mort. 17. 1. Xen/Mem. 1. 4. 13. 
 
 ov, , 17, a. ir, * 
 double-minded, inconstant, wavering, James 
 1.8. 4, 8. Clem. Rom. 1. 23. Constitut. 
 Apost. 7. 11. 
 
 SiaiyfJ,6$, ov, 6, (Sto>Ko>.) pursuit of ene 
 mies, Plut. Arat. 28. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 21. 
 In N. T. persecution, Matt. 13, 21. Mark 
 4, 17. 10, 30. Acts 8, 1. 13, 50. Rom. 8, 
 35. 2 Cor. 12, 10. 2 Thess. 1, 4. 2 Tim. 
 
 3, 11 bis. So Sept. Prov. 11, 19. 2 Mace. 
 12, 23. ^Eschyl. Suppl. 1044. [1046.] 
 
 OM&KTrp) ov, 6, (SicoKco,) a persecutor, 
 1 Tim. 1, 13. Symm. Hos. 6, 8. 
 
 SKOKCO, (Sua,) f. 8t6>co Luke 21, 12. 
 John 15, 20. Xen. An. 1. 4. 8. Cyr. 6. 
 
 3. 13. Dem. 989. 11 ; Att. oftener fut. Sico- 
 op,m, Winer $ 15. Elmsl. Ach. 278. Pr. 
 to cause to flee ; hence genr. to pursue after 
 flying enemies, Sept. for ji ii Lev. 26, 7. 
 Hdian. 7. 11. 11. Xen. Cyr ." 3. 2. 10 ; to 
 chase animals in hunting, Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 5 
 Hence in N. T. 
 
 1 . to pursue with evil intent, to persecute, 
 to harass, c. ace. of pers. Matt. 5, 12 ourw 
 yap f8i<oav TOVS Trpcxprjras. V. 44. 10, 23 
 bis. John 5, 16. 15, 20 bis. Acts 7, 52. 9, 
 
 4. 5. 22, 7. 8. 26, 14. 15. Rom. 12, 14. 
 
 1 Cor. 15, 9. Gal. 1,13. 23. 4, 29. Phil 
 3, 6. Rev. 12, 13; ace. impl. Matt. 5, 11. 
 Luke 21, 12. Pass. Matt. 5, 10. 1 Cor. 4, 
 12. 2 Cor. 4, 9. Gal. 5, 11. 2 Tim. 3, 12. 
 Gal. 6, 12 TW crravpw rov Xp. /LIT) StcoKcoirai, 
 i. e. on account of the cross, dat. of cause or 
 occasion, Winer J 31. 3. c. Matth. 398. b. 
 Sept. for fSTj Ps. 7, 1. Jer. 17, 18. So 
 
 2 Mace. 5, 8. Plut. Philopoem. 21. Thuc. 
 1. 137. With an adjunct implying man 
 ner or extent ; Matt. 23, 34 e avrav . . . 
 8i<bfTf drro TroXewy eis noXiv. Acts 26, 11 
 e8ia>KOV (O.VTOVS) (u>s Kal fls ras e^w TroXetr. 
 Acts 22, 4 Tavrrjv 68ov e8i<oga a^pt Sai/arov. 
 Comp. 1 Mace. 5, 21. 
 
 2. to pursue, to follow after, in order to 
 find or overtake ; e. g. a person, absol. Luke 
 17, 23 p.rj OTreXS^rf, /ZTySe Stco^Tf. So Ec- 
 clus. 27, 20. Xen. Hell. 1.1. 13. Trop. 
 of things, to pursue after, to follow earnestly, 
 C. ace. Rom. 9, 30 biKaiotrvvqv. V. 31 VO\LOV 
 8iKaio<rvvr]S. 12, 13 rrjv <pi\o-fviai>. 14, 19. 
 
 1 Cor. 14, 1. 1 Thess. 5, 15. 1 Tim. 6, 11. 
 
 2 Tim. 2, 22. Heb. 12, 14. 1 Pet. 3, 11, 
 comp. Ps. 34, 15. Sept. and Cf?7 Deut. 
 16, 20. Prov. 15, 9. So Diod. Sic. 2. 59. 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 39. Trop. absol. to follow 
 on, to press on, as in a race ; Phil. 3, 12. 14 
 Kara (TKOTTOV SICOKCB eVt TO /3pa/3etov KT\. 
 Comp. Luc. Hermot. 77 6 ... TroXXot Kal 
 dyaSol . . . 8ia>Kovrfs ov KaT Xa/3oi>. 
 
 ooyfict, aros, TO, (SoKe w,) a decree, edict, 
 ordinance, e. g. of a prince, Luke 2, 1. 
 Acts 17, 7 ; of the apostles, Acts 16, 4 ; of 
 the Mosaic law, i. e. external precepts, Eph. 
 2, 15. Col. 2, 14, comp. v. 16. 20. Sept. for 
 Chald. rn Dan. 2, 13 ; tB Dan. 3, 10. 
 Hdian. 1. 2. 6. Xen. An. 3. 3. 5. 
 
 SoyfJ,aTici), f. t o-co, (8oyp.a,) to decree, 
 to make a decree, Sept. for ;n3 Esth. 3, 9. 
 
So/ceca 
 
 188 
 
 Diod. Sic. 4. 83 fin. In N. T. Mid. 
 Tiop.ai, to let prescribe to oneself, to be 
 subject to ordinances, sc. under the Mosaic 
 law, Col. 2, 20. Comp. Buttm. } 135. 8. 
 
 8o/ce(O, co, f. 86a>, aor. 1 e 8oa, 1. to 
 think, to suppose, to presume ; construed : 
 a) With an infin. having the same sub 
 ject ; e. g. Infin. present, expressing con 
 tinued action, Matt. 3, 9 fj.rj 86r)T \eyeiv 
 ev tavTols, think not to say in yourselves. 
 Luke 8, 18. 24, 37. John 5, 39. 16, 2. 
 Acts 12, 9. 1 Cor. 3, 18. 7, 40. 10, 12. 
 14, 37. Gal. 6, 3. James 1, 26. Once c. 
 dat. e/iavrco, to think for or with oneself, 
 Acts 26, 9 eyco p.ev ovv eoa e/iauTco, 8flv 
 73-oAXa Trpdgai KT\. (2 Mace. 9, 8. 10. Plut. 
 Pelop. 21. Xen. An. 2. 2. 14; c. dat. pol 
 Luc. Sacrif. 1. Xen. Hi. 1. 6.) Infin. per 
 fect, implying an action completed ; Winer 
 45. 8 ult. Acts 27, 13 ftogavres TTJS irpo- 
 Secrecoj KfKpar^Kevai. 1 Cor. 8, 2. Phil. 3, 4. 
 So Hdian. 6. 7. 7. Xen. Cyr. 1.1.6. b) 
 With an infin. and ace. of a different sub 
 ject ; Winer $ 45. 2. Mark 6, 49 edogav 
 <f)dvraa-[j.a elvai. 1 Cor. 12, 23. 2 Cor. 11, 
 
 16. Sept. for stjn Gen. 38, 15. So Luc. 
 Hale. 4. Xen. An. 1. 7. 1. c) With Sri 
 instead of the ace. and infin. Winer 57. 
 5. Matt. 6, 7 SoKovcri yap OTI KT\. 26, 53. 
 Luke 12, 51. 13, 2. 4. 19, 11. John 5, 45. 
 
 11, 13. 13, 29. 20, 15. 1 Cor. 4,9. 2 Cor. 
 12, 19. James 4, 5. d) Absol. Luke 17, 9 
 ov SOKCO. Matt. 24, 44 and Luke 12, 40 f, 
 &pa ov SoKftre. Once inserted for vivid 
 effect, Heb. 10, 29 TroVco, doKelrf, ^ei povoy 
 KT-X. So Anacr. 40. 15 TTOO-OV, So/ceiy, KT\. 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 31 a>s e yco So/cw. 
 
 2. Intrans. to be thought, supposed, held. 
 a) Pr. and with an infin. having the same 
 subject, and then the adjuncts (if any) are in 
 the same case, Buttm. 142. 2. a. Mark 10, 
 42 oi 8oKovvTfs apxfiv (parall. oi ap^ovTfs 
 Matt. 20, 25). Luke 22, 24 TO TLS avra>v So- 
 K.el eivai fjLtifav. Gal. 2, 6 oi doKovvrts eivat 
 ri, those accounted to be something, persons 
 of note, leaders ; and so v. 9 ; absol. v. 2. 6 
 oi SoKovvTfs, id. Hist, of Sus. 5. Plut. 
 Arat. 43 ot SoKovvres apxew. Hdian. 2. 5. 
 10. Xen. An. 6. 6. 30. 
 
 b) Genr. to seem, to appear, with an infin. 
 having the same subject, see in lett. a. Acts 
 
 17, 18 fva>v Saip-oviw Soxei KaTayyeXevs 
 fivai. 1 Cor. 12, 22. 2 Cor. 10, 9. Heb. 4, 1. 
 
 12, 11. (Hdian. 7. 6. 20. Xen. Hi. 2. 1, 5 
 fin.) With dat. added ; Luke 10, 36 rls 
 ovv SoKfl trot TT\T)(riov yeyovevai. Acts 25, 
 27. Here too we find the urbanity and 
 moderation of the Greek manner, Buttm. 
 } 1. n. 1 ; so 1 Cor. 11, 16 el 8e ns OK 
 
 (pi\6veiKos elvai, but if any one SEEM to be, 
 contentious. Heb. 4, 1. Comp. Sturz Lex. 
 Xen. art. SoKtlv no. 11. Hence 
 
 c) Impers. Soxet fioi, o-oi, it seems to 
 me, thee, etc. a) Genr. it seems good to 
 me, it is my pleasure, i. q. to determine, to 
 resolve, c. inf. Luke 1, 3 eoe Kapoi . . . o-oi 
 ypd-^ai. Acts 15, 22. 25. 28. 34. Particip. 
 neut. TO SOKOVV TIVI, what seemeth good to 
 any one, i. e. his pleasure, will ; Heb. 12, 10 
 Kara TO doKovv avrols, after their own pleas 
 ure, as seemed good to them. So 1 Mace. 
 15, 20. Hdian. 1.11.1. Xen. An. 1. 10. 17. 
 Part. Thuc. 1. 84 Trapa TO SOKOVV v/uv. fi) 
 Interrog. ri bowl o~oi v. v/juv ; i. q. what think- 
 est thou ? what think ye ? Matt. 17, 25 ri (rot 
 8oKf1, St /icDv. 18,12. 21,28. 22,17.26,66. 
 John 11, 56; c. Vcpi rivos Matt. 22,42. 
 So wy e/uoi So/<et Pol. 1. 15. 6. Plato Conv. 
 173. b; SoKel pot Xen. Mem. 4. 6. 8. 
 
 So/a/iao>, f. ao-a), (SoKt/xos,) 1. to try, 
 to prove, to examine, e. g. as with fire, c. 
 ace. 1 Cor. 3, 13 emorou TO epyov. . .TO 
 TTvp SoKip-da-ft. Pass. 1 Pet. 1, 7. Sept. 
 for ins Zech. 13,9. (Ecclus. 2, 5. Theophr. 
 Frag. 2. 45 TO -nvp 8oKi/xaei TOV ^pv(r6v^) 
 Genr. by use or observation; Luke 14, 19 
 (vyr] j3oS)v. Rom. 12, 2 els TO 8oKt.fjidfiv 
 vp.as T L TO %e\r)p.a TOV Seo. 1 Cor. 11, 28. 
 2 Cor. 8, 8. 22. 13, 5. Gal. 6,4. Eph. 5, 10. 
 1 Thess. 2, 4 TUS KapMas. 5, 21. 1 John 4, 
 1 ; Pase. 1 Tim. 3, 10. Sept. for fta Ps. 
 17,3. Jer. 11, 20. (Wisd. 11, 10. Arr. Epict. 
 
 1. 1. 6. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 1.) Once in re 
 spect of God, to put to the proof, to tempt, 
 by doubt and unbelief, i. q. ireipdeiv, Heb. 
 3, 9 quoted from Ps. 95, 9, where Sept. for 
 
 fta- 
 
 2. As the result of examination and trial : 
 a) to judge of, to distinguish, to estimate ; 
 c. ace. Luke 12,56 bis, parall. Siaapivfiv 
 Matt. 16, 3. Rom. 2, 18 and Phil. 1, 10 see 
 in 8ia<pepa no. 2. b. Comp. Sept. for 1J5* 
 Zech. 11,13. b) to approve, to judge Jit ; 
 of persons, c. ace. 1 Cor . 1 6, 3. Pass. 1 Thess. 
 
 2, 4 ; of things, Rom. 14, 22 ; c. inf. Rom. 
 1, 28. So of pers. Plut. Dion 30. Plato Legg. 
 767. d ; of things Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 4, 8 i c. 
 inf. Plut. Thes. 12. 
 
 SoKi/Aacria. as, 17, (SoKi/idfco,) trial, pro 
 bation, Pol. 6. 34. 2. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 13. 
 In N. T. in respect of God, trial, tempta 
 tion, in Mss. Heb. 3, 9 eV 8oKip.ao-ia, for e So- 
 KLj.ao dv jie Rec. 
 
 s, f], (8oKifj.os,~) 1. trial, pro 
 bation, the state of being tried ; 2 Cor. 8, 2 
 ev 7fo\\rj 8oKififj SXtyeco?, in great trial of 
 (through) affliction. Dioscor. 4. 186 
 
189 
 
 2. proof, approval, tried integrity, the re 
 sult of trial ; Rom. 5, 4 bis, 17 8e vTvopovr] 
 (Kareypaferat) 8oKip,T]v KT\. 2 Cor. 2, 9. 9, 
 13. Phil. 2, 22. Comp. SoKi/xdC no. 2. b. 
 
 3. a proof, test, that by which any tiling 
 may be tried ; 2 Cor. 13, 3 SOKI^V frrdre 
 TOV tv e /xoi \O\OVVTOS \pio~rov, comp. 12, 12. 
 
 Soict/Jiiov, iov, TO, (SoKt/ior,) a proof, 
 test, Hdian. 2. 10. 12. Plut. Mor. II. p. 155. 
 In N. T. 
 
 1. trial, probation, i. q. SOKI/LHJ no. 1. 
 James 1,3. 
 
 2. proof, approval, tried integrity, i. q. 
 SoKt/ii] no. 2, 1 Pet. 1, 7. 
 
 &6/a/iO9, ov, 6, 17, adj. (Se ^o/xai,) re- 
 ceh-able, current, of money as having been 
 tried, assayed, and so approved, Sept. for 
 "03> Gen. 23, 16 ; pjjn 1 Chr.29,4. Plut. 
 adv. Colot. 32. Hence in N. T. trop. of 
 persons, tried, proved, approved, Rom. 16, 
 
 10. 1 Cor. 11, 19. 2 Cor. 10, 18. 13, 7. 
 2 Tim. 2, 15. James 1, 12 ; c. dat. Rom. 14, 
 18 8oKifjios rots dvSpanrois, approved, es 
 teemed, of men. So Plut. C. Mar. 46. Xen. 
 Ag. 1. 23 ; vapd TIVI Hdot. 7. 117. 
 
 So/coy, ov, fj, (Se^o/iat,) a beam, joist, 
 Matt. 7, 3. 4. 5. Luke 6, 41. 42 bis. Sept. 
 for Fn p Gen. 19, 8. Diod. Sic. 2. 10. 
 Thuc/2. 76. 
 
 80X10$, ia, iov, (SoXos,) guileful, deceit 
 ful, 2 Cor. 11, 13. Sept. for nana p rov . 
 
 11, 1. Pol. 22. 17. 1. Xen. An. i. 4. 7. 
 SoKioci), w, f. wo-ca, (SoXoj,) to use guile, 
 
 to deceive, intrans. Rom. 3,13 rais yXcoo-o-ms 
 avTiav e SoXiovcrai , for e SoXiow, quoted from 
 Ps. 5, 10, where Sept. for p^rjfi . So for 
 ^33 Num. 25, 18. For this Alexandrine 
 form of the 3d plur. of the hist, tenses, see 
 Buttm. 5 103. V. 1. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 349. 
 86X09, ov, 6, (*Xw, Se Xeap,) bait, Horn. 
 Od. 12. 252. Hence genr. fraud, guile, 
 decei-, Matt. 26, 4. Mark 7,22. 14, 1. John 
 
 I, 48. Acts 13, 10. Rom. 1, 29. 2 Cor. 12, 
 16. 1 Thess. 2, 3. 1 Pet. 2, 1. 22. 3, 10. Rev. 
 14, 5 Rec. Sept. for rra-ia Is. 53, 9 ; ri;a-j 
 Job 13, 7. Luc. D. Mort. 12. 6. Xen. An. 
 5. 6. 29. 
 
 ooXoco, >, f. dxro), (SoXor,) to deceive, 
 trans. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 28. In N. T. to fal 
 sify, to corrupt, e. g. TOV \6yov TOV 3eou, 
 perh. by Jewish traditions, 2 Cor. 4, 2; 
 comp. 2", 17. So JE\. H. An. 16. 1. Luc. 
 Hermot. 59. 
 
 S6/ia, (iros, TO, (Si Sw^O a gift, Matt. 7, 
 
 II. Luke 11, 13. Phil. 4, 17. Eph. 4, 8; 
 comp. Ps. 68, 19 where Sept. for 
 
 as also Gen. 25, 6; "jRa Prov. 18, 16. 
 Plut. Mor. II. p. 29. Plato Def. 415. b. 
 
 86a, TJS, 17, (SoKe w,) opinion, what one 
 thinks of any thing, Hdot. 1. 79. Pol. 2. 39. 
 10. Xen. Mern. 4. 8. 10 ; in respect to per 
 sons, good opinion, estimation, honour, Diod. 
 Sic. 2. 29. Xen. Cyr. 8. 8. 3. Also a seem . 
 ing, an appearance, Jos. Ant. 1. 11. 2; o 
 fancy, MschylCho. 1049. [1053.] InN.T 
 
 1. ho7iour, glory, as due or rendered, e. g 
 a) To men, honour, praise, applause, Luke 
 14, 10 Tore ecrrai (rot Soa eVcoTTtoi TU>V crvv- 
 avaKfifj.evMv o~oi. John 8, 54. 2 Cor. 6, 8. 
 John 5, 41. 44 \ap.{3dvfi.v 86av napu ai>3pco- 
 TTUV, and 1 Thess. 2, 6 rrreiv S6av eg 
 av*5p. applause from men. John 12, 43 TTJV 
 86f-av dv%pa>Tra>v the applause of men. So 77- 
 Ttiv TTJV 86av TIVOS, to seek that one may re 
 ceive honour, John 7, 18. 8, 50. al. b) As 
 due or rendered to God, e. g. els 86t-av TOV 
 Seou, to the honour, glory, of God, i. e. that 
 God may be honoured, glorified, Rom. 3, 7. 
 15,7. Phil. 1, 11; so npbs 8nt-av T. 3to{5, 
 2 Cor. 1, 20 ; virfp -njs 86^s T. 3. John 11, 
 
 4. Also Xa/3eti> Tr/v 86av KOI TJJV TiprjV *cai 
 rfv 8vvafj.iv, i. e. to receive ascriptions of 
 glory, honour, power, Rev. 4, 11. For the 
 phrase 8ovvai 86av TO> Sew, see in Si Sco/xt 
 no. 1. c. a. So in ascriptions, Luke 2, 14 
 86a tv vtyicrTois Sew. Rom. 11, 36. Gal. 1, 
 
 5. 1 Pet. 4, 11. al/ Sept. for Ti33 1 Chr. 
 16,28. 29; &? ^H Ps. 104, 35. 106, 48. 
 So Wisd. 10, 14. Diod. Sic. 1. 23. Thuc. 
 4. 17. Xen. Mem. 3. 12. 4. c) Meton. 
 of the ground, occasion, source, of honour 
 or glory, 1 Cor. 11, 15. 2 Cor. 8, 23. Eph. 
 3, 13. 1 Thess. 2, 20. Comp. decus Hor. 
 Od. 1. 1. 2. 
 
 2. glory, that which is the object of admi 
 ration, honour, praise, e. g. 
 
 a) Of external condition, glory, dignity, 
 splendour, majesty ; 1 Pet. 1, 24 iraa-a 86a 
 TTJS o-apKos cos <u-3oy. Heb. 2, 7, quoted from 
 Ps. 8, 6 where Sept. for 1133. Meton. that 
 which reflects, expresses, manifests, this 
 dignity, glory, etc. 1 Cor. 11,7 bis, dvfjp ... 
 tiKcav Kai 86a Seov virdpxaiv yvvr/ 8e 86a 
 dv8p6s fo-Ti. So Ecclus. 1, 19. 1 Mace. 2, 62. 
 Jos. Ant. 4. 2. 2; meton. 1 Mace. 2, 12. 
 Spoken of kings, regal majesty, splendour, 
 pomp; e. g. of the expected temporal reign 
 of the Messiah, Mark 10, 37 comp. Matt. 
 20, 21 where it is /3ao-iXe/a ; and so of his 
 Doming for the destruction of Jerusalem an 
 ehe Jewish state, Matt. 24, 30. Mark 13, 
 26. Luke 21, 27 ; also of his final coming 
 to judgment, Matt. 19, 28. Luke 9, 26. Tit. 
 2, 13. Sept. and Ti33 1 Sam. 2,8. Is. 8,7 ; 
 
190 
 
 Tin 1 Chr. 29, 25. Dan. 11, 21. Also of 
 the accompaniments of royalty, e. g. of 
 splendid apparel, Matt. 6, 29. Luke 12, 27. 
 Sept. for rnxSFi Ex. 28, 2. 40 ; INft Is. 
 61, 3 ; comp. Sept. Esth. 5, 1. 1 Mace. 14, 
 9. Of the wealth, treasures, power of king 
 doms, Matt. 4, 8. Luke 4, 6. Rev. 21, 24. 
 26. Sept. and Ti 3.3 Gen. 31, 1. Is. 10, 3. 
 Meton. in Plur. of persons in high honour. 
 2 Pet. 2, 10 and Jude 8 86as 8e /SXao-^- 
 P.OIKTIV, tliey speak evil of dignities, i. e. ei 
 ther kings, princes, magistrates (so Ecclus. 
 29, 27 ; comp. Tias I s . 5, 13) ; or perh. 
 better angels, comp. Philo de Monarch. II. p. 
 218 Mang. where at nepl %ebv 8opv(j)6povo-ai 
 8vvdp,(is are called 86a 3foi. 
 
 b) Of moral character or attributes, glory, 
 excellency, perfection, e. g. a) Of God, 
 implying his infinite perfection and holiness ; 
 Rom. 1, 23 fj\\aav TTJV 86av TOV dffidpTov 
 3eov. Eph. 1, 17 6 Trariyp TIJS 86rjs, i. e. pos 
 sessing infinite perfections. Heb. 1,3; so 
 of the divine perfections as manifested in the 
 power of God, John 11, 40. Rom. 6, 4. Col. 
 1, 11. 2 Pet. 1, 3 see in apery ; or in his 
 \dpif, i. e. benevolence and beneficence, Rom. 
 9, 23. Eph. 1, 6. 12. 14. 18. 3, 16. So of 
 Jesus, as the aTravyaa-p-a (Heb. 1, 3) of the 
 divine perfections, John 1, 14. 2, 11 ; of the 
 Spirit, 1 Pet. 4, 14. (Comp. Just. Mart. p. 
 284.) /3) Of things, in place of an adjec 
 tive, excellent, glorious, 2 Cor. 3, 7 el 8e 
 17 Siaxovta eyevfer] ev 86grj. v. 8. 9 bis. 
 
 c) Of that state of glorious perfection, 
 bliss, and dignity, which is the portion of 
 those who dwell with God in heaven ; e. g. 
 spoken of Christ, including also the idea of 
 his regal majesty as Messiah, Luke 24, 26. 
 John 17, 5. 22. 24. 2 Thess. 2, 14. 1 Tim. 
 3, 16. 1 Pet. 1,11. Of glorified saints, i. q. 
 salvation, eternal life, Rom. 2, 7. 10. 8, 18. 
 
 1 Cor. 2, 7. 2 Cor. 4, 17. 1 Thess. 2, 12. 
 
 2 Tim. 2, 10. Heb. 2, 10. 1 Pet. 5, 1 ; also 
 17 So a TOV SeoC, the glory which God will be 
 stow, Rom. 5, 2. 1 Pet. 5, 10. Meton. the 
 author or procurer of glory to any one, i. e. 
 the author of salvation, Luke 2, 32, i. q. 
 Kvpios TJ)S 86gr;s 1 Cor. 2, 8 comp. v. 7. 
 
 3. glory, brightness, splendour, dazzling 
 light. a) Pr. Acts 22, 1 1 OVK evefiXfirov OTTO 
 TTJS 86r]s TOV (pa>Tos. 1 Pet. 5, 4. So of the 
 sun and stars, 1 Cor. 15, 40. 41 quater; 
 also of Moses face, 2 Cor. 3, 7, see Ex. 34, 
 29. 30. 35. Of the celestial light which 
 surrounds angels, Rev. 18, 1 ; or the glori 
 fied Messiah and saints, Phil. 3,21. Luke 
 9.31.32. iCor. 15,43. Col. 3,4. So Ecclus. 
 43, 9. 50, 7. Bar. 4, 24. b) Spec, of the 
 celestial splerdour hi which God sits en 
 
 throned, the divine effulgence, dazzling ma- 
 jesty, radiant glory, (Rabb. ^2 Buxt 
 Lex. 2394,) genr. 2 Thess. 1, 9. Rev. 15, 
 
 8. 21, 11. 23, comp. 22, 5; as visible to 
 mortals, Luke 2, 9. Acts 7, 2. 5. John 12, 
 41 comp. Is. 6, 1 ; also as manifested in the 
 Messiah s second coming, Matt. 16, 27. 
 Mark 8, 38. So Sept. for MifTj Tias Ex. 16, 
 10. 24, 17 where see. 1 K/8, 11; comp. 
 Ps. 104, 1 sq. Ez. 1, 26. 27. 28. 1 Tim. 6, 
 16. Bar. 5, 9 T <pa>Ti TTJS 86rjs avTov. So 
 Xfpovfilp. 86grjs, cherubim of glory, i. e. the 
 representatives of the divine presence, Heb. 
 
 9, 5 ; comp. Ex. 25, 22. Num. 7, 89. 2 Sam. 
 6,2. Song of 3 Childr. 31. + 
 
 ooga^a), f. daw, (8da,) to be of opinion, 
 to think, Luc. D. Mort. 3. 1. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 9. 6. In N. T. pr. to think highly of, e. g. 
 
 1. to honour, to glorify, i. e. to ascribe 
 honour or glory to any one, to praise, to laud, 
 to magnify; c. ace. John 8, 54 eav e yw 80- 
 d<o ffj,avTov. Acts 13, 48. Rev. 18, 7. 
 Pass. Matt. 6, 2 OTTOS 8oga<T%><Tiv VTTO TU>V 
 dvSpwncov. Luke 4, 15. Sept. for "123 Lam. 
 1,8. So Pol. 6. 53. 10. Diod. Sic. 1. 82. 
 Thuc. 3. 45. So 8ogdeiv TOV Seo v, to 
 glorify God, i. e. to praise, to worship, to ex 
 tol, Matt. 5, 16. 9, 8. 15, 31. Mark 2, 12. 
 Luke 5, 25. 26. 7, 16. 13, 13. 17, 15. 18, 
 43. 23,47. Acts 11, 18. 21, 20. Rom. 1, 
 21. 15, 6. 9. 1 Cor. 6, 20. 1 Pet. 2, 12. 4, 
 1 1 ; with tv Tim, in behalf of, tv marking the 
 occasion, Gal. 1, 24. 1 Pet. 4, 16; eVt TIVI, 
 on accou:;! of, Luke 2, 20. Acts 4, 21. 
 2 Cor. 9, 13. Also 8ogdeiv TO ovop.a 3fou 
 Rev. 15, 4; irvevp-a TOV 3eou 1 Pet. 4, 14. 
 Sept. for "133 Ps. 22, 24. 86, 9. 12. So Ec 
 clus. 43, 28. 30. 
 
 2. to honour, to glorify, i. e. to bestow 
 honour upon, to exalt in honour and dignity. 
 
 a) Externally; Pass. 1 Cor. 12, 26 em 
 8oderat ev p.e\os. Sept. for "123 1 Chr. 
 19, 3 ; ^ Esth. 6, 6. 8. 1 Mace. 2, 64. 
 
 b) Morally, to glorify, e. g. a) God 
 and Christ, i. q. to show forth and render 
 glorious the divine character and attributes ; 
 e. g. of God as glorified by the Son, John 
 
 12, 28 ter, TO ovop.a 3eoC. 13, 31. 32. 14, 
 
 13. 15, 8. 17, 1. 4 ; or by Christians, John 
 21, 19. Of Christ as glorified by the 
 Father, John 8, 54. 13, 32 bis. 17, 1. 5. 
 Acts 3, 13; or by the Spirit, John 16, 14; or" 
 by Christians, John 17, 10 ; or genr. John 11, 
 4. 13, 31. Heb. 5, 5. So Sept. and l!?3 Lev. 
 10, 3; ^t? Is. 5, 16. /3) Of things, to 
 make excellent, glorious, to show forth as 
 glorious; Rom. 11, 13 TT]V SiaKoviav p.ov 80- 
 !d(Ja>, sc. through my devoted zeal and 
 
191 
 
 effort. Pass. 2 Cor. 3, 10 bis. 2 Thess. 3, 1. 
 1 Pet. 1, 8 xapa 8(8o^aa-p.(vrj, with joy ... 
 full of glory, in the feeling and hope of glory. 
 c) Spoken of Christ and his followers, 
 to glorify, i. e. to advance to that state of 
 bliss and glory which is the portion of those 
 who dwell with God in heaven ; e. g. of 
 Christ as the Messiah, John 7, 39. 12, 16. 
 23 ; comp. Is. 52, 13 where Sept. Pass, for 
 N ; 3 . Of Christians Rom. 8, 30. So Bar- 
 
 T 
 
 nab. Ep. 21 6 iroifav ravra ev rfi /3acr. TOV 
 3eoi) 
 
 d8os, T], Dorcas, pr. n. of a 
 female, Acts 9, 36. 39. Pr. i. q. Heb. 132, 
 Syr. XPH3::, Tabitha, i. e. antelope, ga 
 zelle, Cant. 2, 7. 9. 
 
 86cri9, eco?, T], (Si Sco/it,) 1. a gift, James 
 1, 17 ira<ra 86(Tis dyaZr}. Sept. for -jFra 
 Prov. 21, 14. Plut. C. Mar. 46. Plato Phil. 
 16. c. 
 
 2. a giving, giving out, expenditure. 
 Phil. 4, 15 els \6yov SoVewj <a\ ~\ityecos, in 
 respect to an account of giving and receiv 
 ing, of expense and receipt, q. d. opened an 
 account with me ; in allusion to the aid 
 sent to Paul v. 16 ; comp. tls \6yov vfj.>v 
 v. 17. Ecclus. 42, 7 SoVts KOI AJ^tr. Plato 
 Euth. 14. c. Lat. ratio acceptorum et dato- 
 rum, Cic. Lsel. 16. 
 
 SOTT;?, ov, 6, (8iS<u/nt,) a giver, 2 Cor. 9, 
 7. Sept. for T? aia Prov. 22, 9. Dion 
 Cass. 67. 39. 
 
 OOt/X/Z/y<i) ye<U, >, f. rjcrca, (SouXo?, ayw,) 
 to lead as a slave, to make a slave of, Diod. 
 Sic. 12. 24. In N. T. trop. to bring into 
 subjection, to subdue, absol. 1 Cor. 9, 27. 
 
 BovXeia, as, T], (SovXevw.) bondage, 
 slavery, Sept. for rnioS Ex. 6, 6. Dem. 
 196. 3. Xen. An. 7. 7. 32. In N. T. trop. 
 a) The condition of those under the Mosaic 
 law, Gal. 4, 24. 5, 1 ; and so Rom. 8, 15 
 Wei/pa 8ov\flas, a slavish spirit, opp. TTV. 
 vioZfa-tas. b) The condition of those who 
 are subject to death, Rom. 8, 21 ; or to the 
 fear of death, Heb. 2, 15 (po/3( Saj/arou 
 tvo^oi SouXeias. 
 
 &ov\eva), f. fva-o), (SoOXoj,) 1. to be a 
 slave or servant, to serve ; see in SotJXo? II, 
 init. pr. of involuntary service ; c. dat. Matt. 
 6, 24 et Luke 16, 13 Svcri Kupi ots 8ov\fveiv. 
 Eph. 6, 7. 1 Tim. 6, 2. Sept. for 135 
 Lev. 25, 39. (Luc. D. Deor. 13. 2. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 2. 33 ter.) Spoken of a people, to 
 serve, to be subject to, c. dat. John 8, 33. 
 Acts 7, 7. Rom. 9, 12, comp. Gen. 25, 23 
 et 27, 40 where Sept. for 13S ; also Gen. 
 
 14, 4. Judg. 3, 8. 14. So Hdian. 2. 9. 17. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 13. Trop. of those sub 
 ject to the Mosaic law, Gal. 4, 25. 
 
 2. Trop. of voluntary service, to serve, to 
 obey, to be devoted to ; c. dat. Luke 15, 29. 
 Phil. 2, 22. Gal. 5, 13. Rom. 12, 11 Grb. 
 r<5 Katpo) 8ov\fvovTs, i. e. doing what the 
 occasion demands ; but Rec. has ro> Kvpiat. 
 Sept. and 135 Gen. 29, 15. 18. 20. 25. 29. 
 In a moral sense, to serve or obey God or 
 Christ, 8. ro> Sew Matt. 6, 24. Luke 16, 13. 
 Acts 20, 19. Rom. 7, 6. 1 Thess. 1, 9; TO> 
 Xpto-rw, Rom. 14, 18. 16, 18. Col. 3, 24*; 
 TW vopa Seot), Rom. 7, 25. Sept. and 135 
 Deut. 13, 4. Judg. 2, 7. Mai. 3, 18. (Ec 
 clus. 2, 1.) Spoken of false gods, Gal. 4, 
 8. Sept. and 135 Ex. 23, 33. Of things, 
 to serve, to obey, to pursue, c. dat. e. g. p.a- 
 fjivvq Matt. 6, 24. Luke 16, 13 ; a^apria 
 Rom. 6, 6 ; rw v6p.a> TT)S a^iaprias Rom. 7, 
 25 ; rrj KoiXia Rom. 16, 18 ; rots crroi^eiois 
 Gal. 4, 9 ; (irftvpiais Tit. 3, 3. So eViSu- 
 fiiais Jos. Ant. 15. 4. 1 ; rais rjdovals Hdian. 
 1.17. 22. Xen. Mem. 1. 5. 5 ; ycurrpi 1.6.8. 
 
 oovX,?), rjs, f), (SoCXor,) a bondmaid, hand 
 maid, a female slave or servant, Acts 2,- 18. 
 Sept. for nax Lev. 25, 44 ; nriBttJ 1 Sam. 
 8,16. So f Mace. 2, 11. Luc! Xsin. 54. 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 4. In the oriental style 
 used by a female in addressing a superior, 
 instead of the first, pers. pron. /, me, Luke 
 1, 38. 48. Sept. and naij 1 Sam. 25, 41. 
 1 K. 1, 13. 17 ; nnaai 2 Sam. 14, 6. Comp. 
 Gesen. Lehrg. p. 741 sq. 
 
 I. SoOXo?, 77, ov, adj. (Se ca,) bond, bouna 
 to serve, subject, c. dat. Rom. 6, 19 bis 
 irapacrrr]crarf TCI fj.f\rj vfj.S)v SoCXa rfj dxa- 
 Sapcrt a. . . SouXo rfj SiKaiocrvvrj . Wisd. 15, 
 7. Hdian. 3. 2. 15. Plato Rep. 577. c, d. 
 
 II. SouXo?, ov, 6, subst. (8e<u,) a bond 
 man, slave, servant, pr. by birth ; diff. from 
 dv8pdiro8ov one enslaved in war ; comp. 
 Xen. An. 4. 1. 12 at^/xaXcora uv8paTro8a. 
 Hell. 1. 6. 15. Thuc. 8. 28 TO. disSpdnoSa 
 Trdvra, KOI SovXa, KOI eXev3epa. But such a 
 captive is sometimes called SoOXoy, Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 1. 11, 19. ib. 4. 4. 12. Diff. also 
 from 6 StaKovos, see that art. no. 1. In a 
 family the SovXos was one bound to serve, a 
 slave, and was the property of his master, 
 a living possession as Aristotle calls him, 
 Polit. 1.46 SoOXoy KTTjpd TI ffj.^v^ov , 
 comp. Gen. 17, 12. 27. Ex. 12, 44. Ac 
 cording to the same writer a complete 
 household consisted of slaves and freemen, 
 Polit. 1. 3 oiVt a Se re\eios tK 8ov\a>v Kai 
 
 The SovXos therefore was ne- 
 
192 
 
 ver a hired servant ; the latter being called 
 pi& Sios, p-io-^coTos, q. v. See Potter s Gr. 
 Ant. I. p. 58 sq. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 35 sq. 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Servus. Bceckh Staatsh. 
 der. Ath. p. 73 sq. [100.] 
 
 1. Pr. of involuntary service, a slave, 
 servant, opp. e Xet&epoy, 1 Cor. 7, 21. Gal. 
 
 3, 28. Col. 3, 11. Rev. 6, 15; also genr. 
 Matt. 13, 27. 28. John 4, 51. Eph. 6, 5. 
 Acts 2, 18 ol 8ov\oi p-ov, i. e. the servants 
 among my people. Sept. for ^qs Lev. 25, 
 44. Josh 9, 23. Judg. 6, 27. So Hdian. 5. 
 2. 4. Xen. (Ec. 5. 16. Phil. 2, 7 p.op(pr,v 
 8ov\ov \afi<av, i. e. appearing in a humble 
 and despised condition. 
 
 2. Trbp. spoken of voluntary service, a 
 servant, implying obligation, obedience, de- 
 votedness, John 15, 15. Rom. 6, 16. 1 Cor. 
 7, 23. Gal* 4, 7 ; also in modesty, 2 Cor. 
 
 4, 5 ; or in praise of modesty, Matt. 20, 27. 
 Mark 10, 44. So JE1. V. H. 9. 19 oi pr]- 
 ropes 8ov\oL TOV TrXfaovs eltrl. Plato Legg. 
 715. d. Spoken of the true followers and 
 worshippers of God, e. g. 8ov\os TOV 3eo{), 
 either a minister sent from God, as Moses, 
 Rev. 15, 3, and so Sept. and 155 Josh. 1, 1 
 (Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 13) ; or prophets, Rev. 10, 
 7. 11, 18, and so Sept. and 123 Josh. 24, 
 29. Jer. 7, 25 ; or simply the worshippers 
 of God, Rev. 2, 20. 7, 3. 19, 5. al. Sept. 
 and 133> Ps. 34, 23 134, 1. al. Spoken of 
 the followers and ministers of Christ, e. g. 
 8ov\os TOV Xpio-Tov V. Kvpiov, Eph. 6, 6. 
 2 Tim. 2, 24 ; espec. of the apostles and 
 other teachers, Rom. 1,1. Gal. 1, 10. Col. 
 4, 12. James 1, 1. 2 Pet. 1,1. Jude 1. Rev. 
 22, 3. In the oriental style used in address 
 ing a superior instead of the pers. pron. I, 
 me, Luke 2, 29. Acts 4, 29. Sept. and 
 OS 1 Sam. 3, 9. 10. Ps. 19, 12. al. Comp. 
 in 8ov\r). Spoken also of one who is llie 
 slave of any thing, is addicted to it, subject 
 to it, e. g. 8ov\os TTJS ap.apTias John 8, 34. 
 Rom. 6, 16. 17; rfs $3op5y 2 Pet. 2, 19. 
 So ./El. V. H. 2. 41 pen. TOV niveiv 8ov\os. 
 Xen. fEc. 1. 22. 
 
 3. f rop. a minister, attendant, spoken of 
 the c Jicers and attendants of an oriental 
 couri vvho are often strictly slaves, Matt. 
 18, 23. 26-28. 32. 22, 3. 4. 6. 8. 10. al. 
 So of a Persian satrap, Xen. An. 1. 9. 29. 
 ib. 2. 5. 38. + 
 
 ooLXo&), w, f. oxrco, (8ov\os,) to make a 
 slave of, to enslave ; Pass. perf. 8f8ov\u>pai 
 with present signif. to be enslaved, to be in 
 bondage; see Buttm. 113. 7. 
 
 1. Pr. c. ace. Acts 7, 6 KOI 8ov\a>a-ovo-tv 
 nvTo, from Gen. 15, 13 where Sept. for 
 
 Pass. c. dat. 2 Pet. 2, 19. So 
 Plut. Flamin. 5. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 11. 
 Trop. Pass. Gal. 4, 3 ; perf. as pres. 1 Cor. 
 7, 15. Comp. Plut. Numa 8. 
 
 2. Trop. 8ov\ovv tavTov nvi,tomake 
 oneself a servant to any one; 1 Cor. 9, 19 
 Tracriv fpavTov e SouXcocra, i. e. I have con 
 formed, accommodated myself, to all. Pass. 
 to be made or become a servant to any one, 
 c. dat. rw Sew Rom. 6, 22 ; also to things, 
 in devotedness, e. g. 777 8ncaioo-vvr) Rom. 6, 
 18 ; in indulgence, to be enslaved or given 
 to, e. g. o ivca TroXXw Tit. 2, 3. Porphyr. de 
 Abst. 1. 42 edovXa&rip.ev ro> TOV (pvpov (ppo- 
 vr)p.a.Ti. Thuc. 4. 34 777 yva>p.n- 
 
 Xfy fa ^> (Se xo/icu,) pr. a reception of 
 guests ; hence a banquet, feast, Luke 5, 29. 
 
 14, 13. Sept. for Htjttja Gen. 26, 30. 
 Esth. 1, 3. Athen. 8. p. 348. f. 
 
 opaKWVj OVTOS, 6, (prob. 8fpKop.ai, 8pa 
 Kflv,) a dragon, a huge serpent, Sept. for 
 HJnj Job 26, 13 ; T3n Jer. 9, 11. Jos. Ant. 
 2. 12. 3. JEl V. H. 13. 45. Plato Ion 539. 
 c. In N. T. a dragon, symbolically for 6 
 Zarav, Rev. 12,3.4. 7 bis. 9. 13. 16. 17. 13, 
 2. 4. 11. 16, 13. 20, 2 ; comp. Gen. 3, 1 sq. 
 So Act. Thorn. J 30. Psalt. Salom. 2, 29. 
 
 Spdcrcrof^ai v. -rro/uLat, f. g p.ai, Mid. 
 depon. to grasp, pr. with the hand, to seize, 
 to take; c. ace. 1 Cor. 3, 19 6 8pao-o-6p.fvos 
 TOVS crocpovs fv TIJ Ttavovpyiq avTu>v, quoted 
 from Job 5, 13 where Heb. W?, Sept. 6 
 KaTa\ap.^dfo}v. Sept. pr. for Y^ Num. 5, 
 26. Pr. and c. ace. Jos. B. J. 3. 8. 6 8pao-- 
 <r6fj.fvos TTJV 8f^uiv. Hdot. 3. 13 ; c. gen. 
 Judith 13, 7. Plut. Alex. M. 74. 
 
 opa^ir}, rj s , fj, (Spacro-Q),) a drachma, 
 drachm, an Attic silver coin worth at first 
 9|rf. sterling, or 19^ cents ; but in the times 
 of the N. T. current among the Romans and 
 Jews as equal to the denarius, of which the 
 value was then l^d. sterling, or 1 5 cents ; see 
 fully in art. dpyvpiov no. 2 ; also in 8i8pa- 
 XP-OV. Diet, of Antt. art. Drachma. Luke 
 
 15, 8 bis. 9. 
 
 opeTravov, ov, TO, (SpeVw,) a sickle, 
 reaping-hook, Mark 4, 29 see in aTroo-reXXo) 
 no. 2. Rev. 14, 14-17. 18 bis. 19. Sept. for 
 i>a Joel 3, 13. Plut. Mor. II. p. 165. 
 Plato Rep. 353. a. 
 
 opo/zo?, ov, 6, (8pep,a>, rpe ^w.) a run 
 ning, a race, course, Sept. for Hsma 2 Sam. 
 18, 27. Hdian. 4. 2. 19. Xen. An. l. 2. 17. 
 In N. T. trop. course, career, of one s life 
 and ministry, Acts 13, 25. 20, 24. 2 Tim. 
 4,7. 
 
193 
 
 Apovcri\\.a, TJS, f), Drusilla, youngest 
 daughter of Herod Agrippa I, sister of the 
 younger Agrippa and of Bernice, celebrated 
 for her beauty. She was first betrothed to 
 Epiphanes prince of Comagena ; but was 
 afterwards married to Azizus king of Eme- 
 sa, whom Felix persuaded her to abandon 
 in order to become his wife. She bore him 
 a son, who perished in an eruption of Vesu 
 vius. Acts 24, 24. See Jos. Ant. 19. 9. 1. 
 ib. 20. 7. 1, 2. Tacit. Hist. 5. 9. 
 
 SO/^i, see 8vvo). 
 
 Svvafj,ai, f. t]o-op.ai, Pass, depon. 2 pers. 
 sing. 8vvao-ai 1 Cor. 7, 21, also Svvy Rev. 
 2, 2. Anacr. 7. 11. M\. V. H. 13. 31 ; see 
 Buttm. $ 107. n. 2, and note. Winer 13. 2. 
 b. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 359. Impf. e8wd- 
 /*;>, Matt. 22, 46, and with doub. augm. 
 f)8vvdp.T)v, Matt. 26, 9. Luke 1, 22; as 
 also Aor. 1 f}8vvTi^rjv, Matt. 17, 16. 19; 
 comp. Buttm. $ 83. n. 5. Winer 12. 1. b. 
 To be able, I can, and ov 8vvap.ai, to be un 
 able, I cannot, both in a physical and moral 
 sense, and whether depending on the dispo 
 sition and faculties of mind, on the degree 
 of strength or skill, or on the nature and 
 external circumstances of the case. It is 
 always followed by an infin. expr. or impl. 
 belonging to the same subject, viz. 
 
 1. With an infin. expressed, e. g. a) 
 Infin. present, as implying continued action, 
 Buttm. $ 137. 5. Matt. 6, 24 ov 8vvao-^e 
 o~ov\eveiv %? KT\. 7, 18. Mark 2, 7. 19. 
 Luke 6, 39. John 5, 19. 30. 6, 60. Acts 27, 
 15. Rom. 15, 14. 1 Cor. 10, 21. 1 Thess. 
 2, 6. al. Sept. for ^ Gen. 37, 3. 43, 32. 
 So Pol. 6. 53. 13. Xen. An. 3. 1. 11. b) 
 More commonly, Infin. aorist, implying tran 
 sient or momentary action, either past or 
 present, espec. in narration, Buttm. j 137. 5. 
 Winer j45. 8. b. Mark 1, 45 oWe /^K/TI 
 avruv 8vvao-%ai (pavepfos (Is mj\iv fiVeXSfii . 
 Luke 8, 19 OVK r)8vvavro crvvTv^elv avrui. 
 Matt. 3, 9 8vva.T(ii 6 2eov eVc rfav Ai Scay e yei- 
 pai tfKva KT\. 10, 28. Mark 6, 5. Luke 5, 
 12. John 7, 34. 36. 10, 35. Acts 4, 16. 17, 
 19. 1 Cor. 2, 14. James 4, 2. Rev. 3,8. al. 
 Sept. for bbi Gen. 15, 5. 19, 19. So Diod. 
 Sic. 2. 26. Xen. An. 1. 9. 27. Also where 
 the action in itself might be expressed either 
 as continued or transient, but the writer 
 chooses to express it as transient, or as a 
 single instance embodying the general idea ; 
 see Kiihner 256. 4. b. Buttm. $ 137. 5 ult. 
 Matt. 5, 14 ov 8vvarai iru\is Kpvfirjvai. Luke 
 1, 20. 22. John 3, 3. Acts 13, 39. Rom. 8, 
 7. Heb. 9, 9. Rev. 2, 2. 1 3, 4. al. c) Infin. 
 of the perfect, to express completed action 
 
 13 
 
 in reference to the present time, Bnttm. 
 {137. 1. Winer 45. 8 ult. Acts 26, 32 
 uTroAeAucrSai e8vvaro 6 av^pcunos ft KT\. this 
 man could have been now freed, etc. 
 
 2. Absol. or with an infin. implied and 
 readily suggested by the context ; e. g. 
 Matt. 16, 3 ov 8vvaa^e sc. 8iaKpivfiv. Mark 
 6, 19. Luke 9, 40. Acts 27, 39. 1 Cor. 3, 2. 
 al. So Sept. for ^ 1 K. 22, 22. Constr. 
 with an accus. neut. depending on the infin. 
 Troielv implied, or as accus. of manner, Buttm. 
 ^ 131. 8. Luke 12, 26 d ovv ovre eXa^icrroi 
 ftuj/acr3e. Mark 9, 22 ei n 8vva<rai. 2 Cor. 
 13, 8 ov 8vvdp.f3d n. So Luc. D. Mort. 9. 
 2 arravra e8vvdp.r)v. Xen. Conv. 4. 46, 48. 
 Thuc. 6. 25 ff 8* 8vvcavrai. Xen. Hell. 7. 
 5. 15. + 
 
 ovva/M5, ens, f], (8vvap.ai^) ability, power, 
 might, strength ; see in 8vvap.ai init. 
 
 1. Innate or inherent power, whether 
 physical or moral, e. g. 
 
 a) Of the body, strength ; Heb. 11,11 
 Sdpjja 8vva.fj.iv els Ka.Taf3o\r)v o~7Tfpp.aTOs e\a- 
 /3e. 1 Cor. 15, 43 TO o~5>p,a . . . eyet /jerai ev 
 8vvdp.fi, i. e. for adj. dvvarov, opp. to eV 
 do-%evetq ; so Heb. n sa and Sept. ev tV^vt 
 Ps. 29, 4 ; comp. Gesen. Lehrg. p. 646. 4. 
 Trop. of spiritual strength or life, Rev. 3, 8. 
 Sept. for m t wa Job 39, 19. So Pol. 1. 69. 
 4. Plato Phaedr. 246. d. 
 
 b) Genr. Matt. 25, 15 eKaar<a Kara ri)v 
 I8iav 8vvap.iv. 1 Cor. 15, 56. 2 Tim. 1, 7 
 7rvfvp.a 8vi>dp,eci)s, i. e. a spirit of strength, 
 manly vigour, opp. to TTV. 8ei\ias. Heb. 
 
 I, 3 TO prjfia rrjf 8vvdp.fo>s UVTOV i. e. his 
 powerful word (comp. Trvevpa 8vvdp.eas, 
 a strong wind, Wisd. 5, 23). Heb. 7, 16. 
 
 II, 34. Rev. 1, 16 u>s 6 jyXtoy (paivei ev 
 TT) 8vvdp.fi avTov. Sept. and "l 1 ^-? 2 K. 
 18, 20 ; nb 1 Chr. 29, 2 ; ;J5 1 Chr. 13, 8. 
 So Diod. Sic. 4. 45. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 16. 
 Also in various constructions : Kara 8vva- 
 P.IV, according to one s power, as far as one 
 can, 2 Cor. 8, 3. (Diod. Sic. 14. 81 ult. Xen. 
 Mem. 1.7.4.) inrfp 8vvap.iv,beyondone s 
 strength, power, 2 Cor. 1,8. 8, 3. (Dem. 
 292. 25.) ev 8vvdp.ei, icilh power, i. e. 
 adv. powerfully, mightily, Luke 4, 36. Col. 
 1, 29. 2 Thess. 1, 11 ; and so dat. 8wd- 
 p.f i, Acts 4, 33 ; comp. Buttm. 133. 4. c. 
 So 8wdp.fi and eV 8vvdp.fi as intensive with 
 a synon. verb, Eph. 3, 16. Col. 1, 11. 
 
 c) Spoken of God and Christ, e. g. f) 
 8vvap.is TOV SeoO, the power of God, his 
 almighty energy, genr. Matt. 22, 29. Mark 
 12, 24. Luke 1, 35. 5, 17. Rom. 1, 20. 9, 
 17. 1 Cor. 6, 14. 2 Cor. 4, 7. 13, 4 bis. 
 Eph. 1, 19. 3, 7. 20. 2 Tim. 1, 8. 1 Pet 
 
194 
 
 SlWOOTTJ? 
 
 1,5. 2 Pet. 1,3. Rom. 1,4 /ou 
 . . ev 8vvdp.fi, comp. above in lett. b. Sept. 
 for V?n Ps. 59, 12; TS Ps. 21, 14. 74, 12. 
 Joined with So a it implies the omnipotent 
 majesty of God, Rev. 15, 8 ; and hence as 
 abstr. for concr. omnipotence for the Omni 
 potent, the Almighty, Matt. 26, 64 et Mark 
 14, 62 et Luke 22. 69 e 8eio>i> T^S 8vvd- 
 s, comp. Heb. 1,3 ev 8eta TTJS /xeyaXw- 
 KT\. like the Rabb. rniaa as a name 
 of God, Buxt. Lex. 385. So Sept. and ti> 
 Ps. 63, 3. 68, 35. 150, 1. Meton. of a 
 person or thing in whom the power of God 
 is manifested, i. e. the manifestation of the 
 power of God, Acts 8, 10 OVTOS fcrriv TJ 
 8vvapis TOV 3eoC. Rom. 1,16. 1 Cor. 1,18. 
 24. Also where the gen. TOV Seou expresses 
 the source, i. e. power from God, 1 Cor. 2, 
 
 5. 2 Cor. 6, 7. Of Jesus, as exercising a 
 power to heal, Mark 5, 30. Luke 6, 19. 8, 
 46; or as the Messiah, f/ 8vvap.is Xpi- 
 o-ToC, genr. 2 Cor. 12, 9 bis. In the sense 
 of power, omnipotent majesty, Matt. 24, 30 
 et Luke 21, 27 p.fTa 8vvdp.fa>s KOL o"6r;. 
 Mark 9, 1. 13, 26. 2 Thess. 1, 7 p.fT dyye- 
 \cw TTJS 8vv. avTov, i. e. the angels who are 
 the attendants of his majesty. 2 Pet. 1,16. 
 Of the Spirit, fj 8vvap,is TOV Trvevp.a- 
 TOS, the power of the Spirit, i. e. imparted 
 by the Spirit, Lu.ke 4, 14. Rom. 15, 13. 19. 
 Of prophets and apostles as inspired by 
 the Holy Spirit, Luke 1, 17. 24, 49. Acts 
 1, 8. 6, 8; comp. Acts 2,4. 
 
 d) Spec, of miraculous power, 8vvap.is 0-77- 
 p.ficov KOI TfpaTcov, i. e. the power of working 
 miracles Rom. 15, 19, explained by 17 8vv. 
 r. irvevu-aros in the next clause. Acts 10, 
 38. 1 Cor. 2, 4, comp. 2 Cor. 12, 12 ; so 
 2 Thess. 2, 9. Meton. of effect for cause, 
 Plur. 8vvdp.eis, i. q. mighty deeds, mira 
 cles, Matt. 7, 22. 11, 20. 21. 23. 13, 54. 58. 
 14, 2. Mark 6, 2. 5. 14. 9, 39. Luke 10, 13. 
 19,37. Acts 2, 22. 8, 13. 19,11. 1 Cor. 12, 
 10. 2 Cor. 12, 12. Gal. 3, 5. Heb. 2, 4. So 
 Sept. for ni >^8? Job 37, 14. (Just. Mart, 
 de Resurr. p. 225.) Hence abstr. for con 
 crete, i. q. a worker of miracles, 1 Cor. 12, 
 28. 29 8vvdp.fis, i. q. ols St Sorat eWpyij/^ara 
 8vvdp.fu>v V. 10. 
 
 e) Put for the essential power, true na 
 ture and efficacy, reality, of any thing ; Phil. 
 3, 10 yvoivai TT/V bvvajj.iv TTJS dmtrrdtreoos 
 avTov. 2 Tim. 3, 5 f^ovrfs p.6p(f>a>o~iv tvo~f- 
 jSei as 1 , Tr)v 8e 8vvap.iv avrrjs f]pvrjp.fvoi. Heb. 
 
 6, 5 8vvdp,fis Tf /ue XXoiTor alcavos. So as 
 opp. to \6-yos, speech merely, 1 Cor. 4, 19. 
 20. 1 Thess. 1, 5. (Plut. de Def. Orac. 46. 
 Xen. CEc. 9. 2.) Of language, the power 
 
 e. g. of a word or sound, meaning, signifi 
 cation; 1 Cor. 14, 11 rrjv 8vvap.iv rrjs <f)a- 
 vf} s . So Plut. Consol. ad Apoll. 28. Plato 
 Crat. 394. b, c. 
 
 2. Outward power, as resulting from ex 
 ternal sources and relations. 
 
 a) Genr. power, authority, might, Luke 
 9, 1. Acts 3, 12. 2 Pet. 2, 11. Rev. 13, 2. 
 17, 13. (Ecclus. 44, 3. Hdian. 5. 1. 3. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 24.) Spoken of omnipotent 
 sovereignty as belonging to God, e. g. in 
 ascriptions, Matt. 6, 13. Rev. 4, 11. 5, 12. 
 7, 12. 11, 17. 12, 10. 19, 1. So Sept. and 
 rnica l Chr. 29, 11. Joined with ovop.a 
 Acts 4, 7. 1 Cor. 5, 4, i. e. authority, war 
 rant. Meton. abstr. for concr. 8vvap.is for 
 6 lv 8vvdp.fi 2>v, one in authority, and Plur. 
 8wdp.fis, like Engl. authorities, i. e. persons 
 in authority, the mighty, the powerful, the 
 powers of the other world, hierarchies of 
 angels whether good or evil, Rom. 8, 38. 
 1 Cor. 15, 24. Eph. 1,21. 1 Pet. 3, 22. So 
 of temporal powers, Sept. Esth. 2, 18. 
 
 b) As in vulg. Engl. a power, a quan 
 tity, abundance ; Rev. 18, 3 e* TTJS 8vvdp.fa>s 
 
 avTTJs. Here some refer Rev 
 
 3, 8; better under no. 1. a. Jos. Ant. 3. 
 2. 4 TT\OVTOV p.fyd\ov 8vvap.iv 7rpocreXa/3oi 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 4. 34 TTJV bvvap.iv, parall. TC 
 ovra. Thuc. 1. 25 xprip-aTcav 8vvdp.fi ovrfg 
 
 c) Of warlike power, like Engl. force 
 forces, i. e. a host, army. Luke 10, 19 ri 
 Trdcrav TT/V 8vvap.iv avTov, i. e. over the whole 
 host of Satan, comp. v. 20. Sept. for b^M 
 Ex. 14, 28 ; X3S 2 Sam. 10, 7. al. So Diod". 
 Sic. 14. 81 med. Pol. 8. 28.5. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 6.9. ByHebr. 8vvdp.fis r>v ovpavcav, 
 the hosts of heai-en, i. e. the sun, moon, and 
 stars, Matt. 24, 29. Mark 13, 25. Luke 21, 
 26 ; comp. Rev. 6, 13. So Sept. and Heb. 
 n-jaisn X3S Is. 34, 4. Dan. 8, 10. al. See 
 Gesen. Lex. art. N3* no. 2. a ;. also Comm. 
 on Is. 1. c. 
 
 StWaytiOft), >, f. axTW, (8vvap.is,) to 
 strengthen, Pass. Col. 1,11 ev irdo-r) 8vvdp.fi 
 8vvap.ovp.evoi, see in 8vvap.is no. 1. b. Sept. 
 for tts Ps. 68, 29; "i?a Ecc. 10, 10. Dan. 
 9, 27. Synes. de Prov. p. 100. b. Not 
 found in classic writers ; comp. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 605. n. 
 
 8vvdo Tr]S : ov, 6, (8vvap.ai,) pr. one in 
 power, i. e. 
 
 1. a potentate, prince, Luke 1, 52. 1 Tim. 
 6, 15. Sept. for IP Prov. 8, 16 ; bOE Prov. 
 23, 1. Pol. 9. 1. 4. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 40. 
 
 2. one in authority under a prince, a high 
 officer, minister, Acts 8, 27. Sept. ot 8vvd- 
 o-Tai $apaa> for Q n^a Gen. 50,4; fciia Lev, 
 
Svvarew 
 
 195 
 
 19, 15. Plut. de Def. Orac. 21 6Wora: KOI 
 8acri\t<av. Xen. An. 1. 2. 20. 
 
 , , f. 170-0), 
 
 mighty, intrans. 2 Cor. 13, 3 OVAC d<r3fi>fi, 
 dXXa Suj/aret eV v/itf. Rom. 14, 4 Lachm. 
 where Rec. has Svvaros. 
 
 1. able, 
 
 strong, mighty, powerful; e. g. a) Of 
 things ; 2 Cor. 10, 4 orrXa . . . 8vvara rw 
 3ea> Trpos KT\. mighty unto God, God be 
 ing judge, i.e. intens. exceedingly mighty; 
 for the idiom comp. Acts 7, 20, and see in 
 doreTof. So. Pol. 10. 31. 8. Xen. CEc. 7. 
 23 TO cra>p.a bvvarov Trpos TI. b) Of God, 
 6 8war6s,the Mighty, the Almighty, Luke 
 1 , 49. Sept. and lisa Ps. 24, 8. So genr. 
 of pers. Eurip. Bacch. 270. Thuc. 1. 9. 
 c) Trop. of pers. strong, firm, established; 
 Rom. 15, 1 oi Svvaroi sc. eV irtorei. Also 
 Sui/ardf dpi, to be strong, spiritually, in 
 Christ, 2 Cor. 12, 10. 13, 9. d) Spec. 
 8 war 6s fl/J.i, i. f[. 8vvafj.m, to be able, I 
 can, followed by an inf. (comp. Swa/xat init.) 
 e. g. Infin. present, Tit. 1, 9. Heb. 11, 19. 
 (Pol. 1. 53. 3. Plato Phscdr. 273. e.) Infin. 
 aorist, Luke 14, 31. Rom. 4, 21. 11,23. 14, 
 4. 2 Cor. 9, 8. 2 Tim. 1, 12. James 3, 2. 
 Acts 11, 17 ryw Se TIS 7W ftvvaros xa>\v- 
 o-ai TOV 3 oi>, i. e. who was I ? was I able ? 
 a junction of two questions. Sept. for bs^ 
 Num. 22, 38. Plato Phajdr. 275. e. 
 
 2. Spec, of ftvvaToi, the poicerful, the 
 mighty, spoken of persons in authority or 
 of influence, 1 Cor. 1, 26. [Rev. 6, 15] ; 
 of members of the Jewish sanhedrim, Acts 
 25, 5. Sept. for Chald. "paw Dan. 3, 27. 
 Jos. Ant. 12. 4. 9 ot irapa TTJV ai\Tjv 
 8waroi. Pol. 9. 23. 4. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 8. 
 Comp. Krebs Obs. p. 260. 
 
 3. Also 8vvaros ev TIVI, poicerful in 
 any thing, able, skilful, mighty; Luke 24, 
 19 8vv. (i> fpy<? KOL Xoya. Acts 7, 22. 18, 
 24 ev rals ypa<pais, i. e. skilled in expound 
 ing and applying the Jewish Scriptures. 
 Ecclus. 21, 7 8vv. eV yXeoo-oT;. Diod. Sic. 
 13. 101 8vi>. Xoyw. 
 
 4. Neut. ro 8vvar6v as Subst. power, 
 might ; Rom. 9, 22 TO 8vvarov avrov sc. 
 SeoC, i. q. 17 8vi>afj.Ls \ . 17; comp. Buttm. 
 123. 5. Without art. 8vvarov as adj. 
 able to be done, possible, in several construc 
 tions : a) Absol. ei 8 war 6 v (tort), if 
 possible, if it be possible, Matt. 24,24. 26, 
 39. Mark 13, 22. 14, 35. Rom. 12, 18. 
 Gal. 4 ; 15. So Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 45. Xen. Mem. 
 3. 7. 9. b) With dat. of pers. possible 
 for (with) any one, Mark 9, 23. 14, 36. Acts 
 20, 16. So Jos. Ant. 3. 8. 1. Luc. D. Deor. 
 
 24. 2. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 13. c) With Tra- 
 pd TIVI, possible with any one, Matt. 19, 26. 
 Mark 10, 27. Luke 18, 27. d) With ace. 
 and infin. Acts 2, 24 KaSoYi ov/c rjv SVVUTOV 
 /cpaTei(72at avrov irrf aiirov, 
 
 Svvo), aor. 2 f8vv, (i. q. v<u.) to sink, to 
 go down, intrans. e. g. the sun Mark 1, 32. 
 Luke 4, 40. Sept. and SO3 Gen. 28, 11. 
 2 Chr. 18, 34. jEl. V. H. 4. 1. Dem. 197. 
 7. Xen. An. 2. 2. 3. The form 8v/a> is a 
 new Present from Suto, see Buttm. \ 114 
 8vu>. 
 
 ovo, ol, at, rd, card. num. two, Lat. duo > 
 indec. in Attic writers, and so found in N. T. 
 in the nominative, genitive, and accusative, 
 e. g. Norn. Matt. 9, 27 8vo Tv(p\ol. 20, 21 
 ot 8vo vloi fjiov. Luke 7, 41. John 1, 37. al. 
 Gen. Matt. 18, 16 8vo naprupav. 20, 24. 
 Luke 12, 6. John 1, 40. al. Accus. Matt. 
 4, 18 ete 8vo d8f\<f>ovs. Luke 3. 11. al. 
 For the dative is found the irreg. and later 
 form Suo-t. Matt. 6, 24 Sucrt Kvpiois. 22,40. 
 Luke 12, 52. Acts 12, 6 ; also Pol. 4. 32. 3. 
 Aristot. H. An. 4. 1. 131. Thuc. 8. 101 ; 
 see Buttm. 5 70. 2. Winer { 9. 2. b. Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 210. The comm. Gen. and 
 Dat. 8voiv does not occur in N. T. In 
 phrases: 8vo rj rpfls, two or three, some. 
 a few, Matt. 18, 20. 1 Cor. 14, 29. (Xen. 
 An. 4. 7. 5.) dva 8vo, Kara 8vo, by 
 two s, two and two, distributively, Luke 9. 3. 
 10. 1. 1 Cor. 14, 27; eis 8v o, in two, 
 e. g. rx 10-377 els 8vo (nepri), Matt. 27, 51. 
 Mark 15, 38 ; so Luc. D. Deor. 8. 1 S/eXe 
 fiov rr]V Kt(pdh.f)v es 8vo. Pol. 2. 16. 11 o-^t- 
 erni fls 8vo (J.fpr). By Hcbr. 8vo 8vo, two 
 and two, distributively, Mark 6, 7 ; so Sept. 
 and Heb. C?3!1J n^fd Gen. 7, 9. 15 ; for 
 Q 1 ??^ Gen. 6, 19. 20. Gesen. Lehrg. p. 669, 
 703. Heb. Gr. $ 118. 5. -f 
 
 &/$, an insep. part, implying difficulty, 
 adversity, the contrary ; like Engl. mis. un, 
 in; Buttm. 5 120. 5. 
 
 Svo-flda-Ta/CTOs, O v,6, r/,adj. (/3ao-Tao>,; 
 hard to be borne, oppressive, e. g. cpoprla, 
 Matt. 23, 4. Luke 11,46. Sept. for bas 
 Prov. 27, 3. Plut. Quaest. Nat. 16 8va-pd- 
 crraKToi yap dcri . . . 8ia (tey&Qg* 
 
 Svaevrepia, as, 17, (emtpov intestine.) 
 dysentery, flux, Acts 28, 8. Jos. Ant. 6. 1* 
 1. Pol. 32. 25. 14. Plato Tim. 86. a. 
 
 8v(TepfJt,riVVTO<>, ov, 6, 77, adj. (ep/ir/i/evw.) 
 hard to explain, so as to be understood. Heb. 
 5, 11. Artemid. 3. 67. Diod. Sic. 2. 52. 
 
 8v crKciXos, ov, 6, f], adj. (KO\OV food,) pr. 
 difficult about food ; hence genr. hard to 
 please, morose, peevish, Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 2 ; 
 
19b 
 
 Swpov 
 
 Neut. any tiring unpleasant, difficulty, cala 
 mity, Sept. for T 1 ^ Jer. 49, 8. Dem. 291. 21. 
 In N. T. spoken of things, hard to accom 
 plish, difficult, Mark 10,24. So Jos. Ant. 6. 
 3. 6. Diod. Sic. 1. 84. Xen. (Ec. 15. 10. 
 
 &va-/c6\(i)S, adv. (Svo-KoAos,) with diffi 
 culty, hardly, Matt. 19, 23. Mark 10, 23. 
 Luke 18, 24. Jos. Ant. 4. 5. 2. Pint. Con- 
 sol, ad Apoll. 28. 
 
 Sucr/i?7, y s , fj, (SiW,) usually only Plur. 
 at 8vcrp.ai, the going down, the setting of 
 the sun, as 8vo~p.al TOV ijXi ov, Sept. for K12 
 Gen. 15, 12. al. iaa Deut. 11, 30. al. Xen. 
 An. 6. 4. 26. Hence in N. T. the west, 
 Matt. 8, 11. 24, 27. Luke 12, 54. 13, 29. 
 Rev. 21, 13. Sept. for a^n Ps. 75, 6. Is. 
 43,5 ; Sftoa Ps. 50, 2. Mai. 1,11. So Pol. 
 2. 14. 4. Plato Def. 411. b. 
 
 BvcrvoyTO?, ov, 6, fj, adj. (voijTor, voeco.) 
 /iard /o fe understood, 2 Pet. 3, 16. Diog. 
 Laert. 9. 13 SVCTVOTJTOV re KOL 8vcrer]yr]Tov. 
 Luc. Alex. 54. 
 
 Svcrf^Tjfjieo), co, f- 770-00, ((prjp.r), ) to speak 
 evil, to utter words of ill omen, maledictions, 
 Soph. Elect. 950. Plut. Cic. 22. In N. T. 
 to defame, to revile, 1 Cor. 4, 13 in Mss. for 
 8\ao-(pr]p.ovp.fvoi. So 1 Mace. 7, 41. Soph. 
 Elect. 1182. 
 
 Sucr0?7/ua, as, fj, (Sucr^ry/ie co,) evil- 
 speaking, pr. ill-omened words, malediction, 
 Soph. Phil. 10. Plut. Pelop. 8. In N. T. 
 reproach, contumely, ill-report, 2 Cor. 6, 8. 
 So 1 Mace. 7, 38. Dion. Hal. 6. 48. Hesych. 
 8uo-(p77/xiay KaKofprj/jiias. 
 
 ova), see Sww. 
 
 ScoSe/ca, ol, al, TO. card. num. indec. 
 twelve, Matt. 9, 20. 14, 20. al. saep. Spec. 
 01 StoSeKa, the twelve sc. apostles, corre 
 sponding to the twelve tribes, Matt. 26, 14. 
 20. 47. Mark 14, 10. 20. al. Comp. Matt. 
 19, 28. Rev. 7, 5 sq. 21, 12 sq. 22, 2 ; also 
 Ex. 28, 17. Num. 17, 2. Josh. 4, 5. 1 K. 7, 
 25. -f 
 
 8a>Se/caT09, r/, ov, ord. adj. the twelfth, 
 Rev. 21, 20. 
 
 8&)Sea^>fXoV, ov, TO, (ScoSfAca, (piAr;,) 
 collect, rte twelve tribes of Israel, the people 
 of Israel, Acts 26, 7. 
 
 Sw/ia, arcs, TO, (8ep.oD,~) a building, a 
 house, Hdian. 7. 12. 11. Plato Rep. 380. a. 
 Synecd. a hall, chamber, Horn. II. 1. 600. 
 InN. T. only in the phrase errl TOV Sco/xa- 
 TOS-, upon the house, i. e. upon the house-top, 
 roof, Matt. 24, 17. Mark 13, 15. Luke 17, 
 31. Plur. Krjpv^are eVi rtav 8cop.aTa>v, pro 
 claim ye upon the house-tops, i. e. publicly, 
 Matt. 10, 27. Luke 12, 3 ; comp. 2 Sam. 
 
 16, 22. Also avaftaiveiv err! TO 6 co/ia, to 
 go upon the house-top, to ascend to the roof, 
 Luke 5, 19. Acts 10, 9. Sept. for M roof 
 Deut. 22, 8. Josh. 2, 6. 8. al. So Jos. Ant. 
 6. 4. 1. Hdian. 2. 6. 19. The roofs of orien 
 tal houses are flat, and covered usually with 
 a composition or cement. The inhabitants 
 spend much time upon them, especially at 
 evening, to enjoy the open air ; and often 
 sleep there. SeeBibl. Res. in Pal. III. p. 26, 
 32. Winer Realw. arts. Dach, Hauser. 
 
 Scaped, as, f), (Seopoi/,) a gift, John 4, 10. 
 Acts 8, 20. 11, 17. Rom. 5, 15. 2 Cor. 9, 
 15. Heb. 6, 4. Eph. 4, 7 Kara TO p-erpov TTJS 
 Scopeas TOV Xpi<rTo{), according to the mea 
 sure of the gift of Christ, i. e. according as 
 Christ has measured out to him the gift. 
 With gen. of that in which the gift con 
 sists ; Acts 2, 38 and 10, 45 8. TOV ay. irvev- 
 P,OTOS. Rom. 5, 17 8. TT)$ 8iKaioo-vvr)s. Eph. 3, 
 
 7 8. TTJS x a p l Tos TOV 3fov. Sept. for Chald 
 !12]23 Dan. 2, 6. 2 Mace. 4, 30. Pol. 23. 
 3. 4. Xen. Hi. 11. 12. 
 
 Scopedv, adv. (ace. of Scopea,) gratis, 
 gratuitously ; see Buttm. 115. 4. 
 
 1. Pr. freely, without requital, Matt. 10, 
 
 8 bis. Rom. 3, 24. 2 Cor. 11, 7. 2 Thess. 
 3, 8. Rev. 21, 6. 22, 17. Sept. and c>n 
 Gen. 29, 15. Num. 11, 5. Pol. 18. 17. V. 
 Dem. 394. 20. 
 
 2. Spec, groundlessly, without cause ; 
 John 15, 25 ep.to-r)<rdi> pe 8a>pfdi>. Gal. 2,21 
 pa XptoTos 1 Scopeai oV/Saw, i. e. then there 
 was no cause why Christ should suffer ; see 
 Tittm. de Synon. N. T. p. 161. Sept. and 
 C|n Ps. 35, 7. 1 Sam. 19, 5. 
 
 ocopeoyU-at, ovp.ai, f. rja-op-ai, Mid. depon. 
 (Scope co, Scopov,) to make a gift of, to give, 
 c. ace. Mark 15, 45. Pass. perf. as Mid. 
 c. ace. 2 Pet. 1, 3. 4. Sept. for inj Esth. 
 8, 1. Prov. 4, 2. Hdian. 1. 5. 2. Xen. Cyr. 
 5. 2. 8. 
 
 aros, TO, (Stopew,) a gift, Rom. 
 5, 16. James 1, 17. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 47. 
 Xen. Hi. 8. 4. 
 
 owpov, ov, TO, (Si &ctyu,) a gift, present, 
 Matt. 2, 11. Eph. 2, 8. Rev. 11, 10. Sept. 
 for iat Gen. 30, 20 ; Tr]iu Ex. 23, 8. So 
 Hdian. 2. 8. 14. Luc. V. H. 1. 27. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 4. 26. Spec, a gift dedicated to 
 God, an offering, sacrifice, Matt. 5, 23. 24 
 bis. 8, 4. "23, 18. 19 bis. Heb. 5, 1. 8. 3. 4. 
 9, 9. 11,4; so Matt. 15, 5 and Mark 7, 11 
 8u>pov sc. fo-Ti, i. e. it is consecrated to God. 
 Also of money contributed in the temple, 
 comp. in 8i8paxpov ; Luke 21, 1.4 ffia- 
 \ov els TU 8<opa TOV Seoi), they cast in unto 
 
197 
 
 edv 
 
 (among) the offerings of God. Sept. for 
 firjDS Gen. 4, 4. 1 Chr. 16, 29; l^l? 
 Lev. 1, 2. 3. Is: 66, 20. So Horn. II. 6. 
 293. ib. 8. 203. 
 
 la, as, fj, (8a>po(popea ; deupoi, 
 <pepa>,) a bringing of gifts i Horn. 15, 31 
 Lachm. tva r; 8u>po(popia p.ov KT\. Rec. 8ia- 
 Kovia. Alciphr. 1. 6. 
 
 z, interj. (Ida, imperat. eae,) pr. let 
 be ; genr. ah, aha, expressing surprise and 
 displeasure, Mark 1, 24. Luke 4, 34. Arr. 
 Epict. 2. 24. jEschyl. Prom, vinct. 298. 
 Plato Protag. 315. d. 
 
 I. eai>, conjunct, (pr. et av,) if, if so he 
 that, in case that ; contr. sometimes into av, 
 see in av II ; also into rjv in Gr. writers. 
 The form el implies a condition merely hy 
 pothetical, a mere supposition, to which av 
 subjoins the idea of possibility ; so that lav 
 implies a condition which is possible and 
 may be expected to be realized, though still 
 dependent on circumstances ; see Herrn. 
 ad Vig. p. 832 sq. Kiihner \ 339. II. b. 
 Usually lav is construed with the Subjunc 
 tive ; in later writers also with the Indica 
 tive ; and very rarely in classic writers with 
 the Optative ; see Buttm. \ 1 39. m. 68. Herm. 
 1. c. p. 819. Matth. \ 523. 
 
 I. Used alone, 5. e. without being joined 
 with other particles. 
 
 1. With the Indicative, but only in late 
 writers ; in N. T. only once, and followed 
 in the apodosis by a perf. Indie, in a present 
 sense ; 1 John 5, 15 lav oi8ap.fi>, on UKOIKI 
 ijp.u>v o av atrto^eSa, o"i8ap.fv, on f^op.fv TO. 
 aiTT)p.aTa KT\. comp. in no. 2. a. y. So 
 Sept. Job 22, 3. ^El. V. H. 4. 24 lav rets 
 dXAjjXwf dpyals e^i oracrSe KT\. See Winer 
 542. 2. d. note. Herm. ad Vig. p. 820. 
 Matth. \ 525. d. In Mss. lav is also found 
 with Indie, pres. Rom. 14, 8. Gal. 1, 8. 
 1 Thess. 3, 8 ; Indie, flit. Luke 11, 12. John 
 8, 36. Comp. Winer 1. c. 
 
 2. Mostly with the Subjunctive, implying 
 uncertainty with the prospect of decision, 
 and referring therefore to something future ; 
 Buttm. 139. m. 24. Winer 42. 2. b. 
 
 a) With the Subj. present, and followed 
 (or preceded) in the apodosis : a) By an 
 Indie, future ; Matt. 6, 22. 23 lav ovv 6 
 d(p^a\p.6s crov aTrXous ?], o\ov TO crco/id crov 
 (f)u>reivuv form lav Se KT\. 17, 20. Mark 
 14, 31. Luke 10, 6. John 7, 17. Acts 5, 38. 
 Rom. 2, 26. Gal. 5, 2. 1 John 5, 14. al. saep. 
 (Sept. Job 9, 15. 20. JE\. V. II. 4. 16. Plut. 
 Mor. II. p. 14. Plato Apol. Soc. 18. p. 30. e.) 
 Sometimes the fut. stands in the apodosis 
 
 for the Imperat. see in j3. Luke 19, 31 Kal 
 lav TIS vp.ds Ipatra . . . ovru>s epdre avr<a. 
 Winer } 44. 3. Kiihn. $ 255. 4. Also the 
 aorist Subj. is put after ov p.rj instead of the 
 fut. Indie. Acts 13, 41 epyov, w ov arj TTioTfv- 
 a-rjre, lav TIS fK8irjyT]TaL v/juv. John 8, 51 ; 
 comp. Buttm. 139. m. 46. Or sometimes 
 either the whole apodosis or its verb is to be 
 supplied ; John 6, 61. 62 TOVTO vfj.ds o-Kav8a- 
 Xi ; lav ovv SecopJjre TOV vlov TOV dv Sp. 
 dvafiaivovTa KT\. suppl. TTOCTW p.a\\ov TOVTO 
 o-Kav8a\io-fi vaas. Acts 26, 5. 1 Cor. 4, 15. 
 IB) By an Imperat. e. g. present, John 7, 
 37 lav TIS 8i\lsa, e /r^etrSe Trpos p.f. 12, 26.- 
 Rom. 12, 20. 13, 4. Gal. 1, 8. Col. 3, 13 ; 
 aorist, Matt. 10, 13 lav p.lv fi rj oi/cta dt-ia, 
 ASeVa) KT\. Mark 9, 43. 45. 47. John 14, 
 
 15. So c. Imp. pres. Epict. Ench. 43 ; 
 perf. ib. 33. 6. y) By an Indie, present, 
 either in a future sense or denoting some 
 thing permanent or general, Winer 42. 2. 
 b. Matt. 18, 13. John 8, 16 *cai lav Kpivu 
 81 eyu>, f] Kpifris fj e /ni) aXf/S^? e ort. 13, 17. 
 1 Cor. 12, 15. 16. 1 Thess. 3, 8. 1 Tim. 1, 
 8. 2 Tim. 2, 5. 1 John 1, 7. 9. 10. al. seep. 
 Matt. 8, 2. Mark 1, 40. Luke 5, 12. (Luc. 
 D. Mort. 6. 3. Plato Apol. Socr. 21. p. 33. 
 b.) So 1 Tim. 3, 15 eav 8e Ppa8vva, [suppl. 
 raiira. o-oi ypdfpco,] Iva tl8fjs KT\. Also by 
 a perf. in the sense of the pres. John 20, 23 
 ai> [e dv] Tiva>v KpaTrJTf [ras aaapTias] , xeicpd- 
 TrjvTai, parall. d(pievrai. Rom. 2, 25. 8) 
 By an Indie, aorist, referring to a transient 
 act ; 1 Cor. 5, 1 1 wvl 8e lypa^ra vp.iv fj.r) 
 (Tvvavap.lywcr Sai, lav TIS d8e\<pos dvoua6- 
 p.evos ff iropvos KT\. 
 
 b) With the Subj. aorist, which thus near 
 ly corresponds to the Lat. fut. exactum, or 
 Engl. second future ; comp. Buttm. } 139. m. 
 
 1 6. Kiihn. 339. n. 2. It is then followed (or 
 preceded) in the apodosis : a) By an Indie, 
 future ; Matt. 4, 9 ravra ndvra croi Scixrco, 
 
 lav TTf(TU>V TTpOO-KVVr]O-T]S UOl. 5, 13. 28, 14. 
 
 Mark 8, 3. 36. John 8, 36. Rom. 10, 9. 
 
 1 Cor. 4, 19. 2 Cor. 12, 6. 1 Tirn. 2, 15. 
 
 2 Tim. 2, 21. James 4, 15. al. saep. (Sept. 
 Job 8, 18. ^El. V. II. 2. 36 lav a7ro3di>co, 
 eco KT\. Plato Lysid. 2 1 0. c.) So by fut. for 
 Imperat. comp. above in lett. a. a ; Matt. 21, 
 
eav 
 
 198 
 
 3. 22, 24. 1 John 5, 16. Or instead of fut. 
 Indie, is put the aorist Subj. after ov urj, 
 comp. in lett. a. a ; John 8, 51. 52. (Xen. Hi. 
 11.15.) Spec. Mark 11.32 a XX eav etVw/iei 
 e av%p<aTra>v l(polBoi>vTo rov Xaof, here the 
 apodosis is lost in the transition from the 
 first to the third person, the writer continu 
 ing in his own language ; Winer 64. HI. 2. 
 Also the apodosis is involved, but not lost, 
 in Rom. 11, 22. Comp. JEl V. H. 1. 34 ult. 
 Luc. D. Mort. 3. 1. )3) By an Imperat. 
 e. g. present, Matt. 18, 17. Mark 13, 21. 
 1 Cor. 10, 28. Gal. 6, 1. al. (Epict. Ench. 
 7.) Aorist, Matt. 18, 15. 17. Mark 11, 3. 
 Luke 17, 3. Col. 4, 10; aor. and pres. 
 
 1 Cor. 7, 1 1 . So in prohibitions expressed 
 by ur) before the aor. Subj. instead of the 
 Imperat. comp. Buttm. 148. 3. Kiihner 
 259. 5. Matt. 24, 23 Tore lav TIS vfuv fare 
 ...fj.f) Tno-revo-rjre, comp. parall. Imper. p) 
 Trio-revere Mark 13, 21 ; so Heb. 3, 7. 15. 
 
 4, 7. So Epict. Ench. 7. y) By an Indie, 
 present, comp. above in lett. a. y. Matt. 18, 
 13. Mark 3, 24. John 8, 31. Rom. 7, 3. 15,24. 
 
 2 Cor. 5, 1. al. (Cebet. Tab. 3. Xen. Hi. 
 
 1. 28.) Also by an Indie, perf. in pres. 
 sense, comp. above in lett. a. y. John 20, 23. 
 Rom. 7, 2. 14,23. 8) By an Indie, aorist, 
 comp. in lett. a. 8. Matt. 18, 13. 1 Cor. 7, 28 
 bis, el Se Kal yfi/jLTjs, ova rjfiapres KT\. James 
 
 2, 2-4. e) By a Subj. aorist implying ex 
 hortation or precept ; James 4,15 Grb. eav 
 6 Kvpios %e\T)o~r] . . . Kal Troir)o~a>p,ev roCro rj 
 eKelvo. 2 Cor. 9, 4; also Mark 12, 19 and 
 Luke 20, 28. John 9, 22. 11, 57. Acts 9, 2. 
 
 3. Like Heb. dX , it passes over into a 
 particle of time, referring to an event cer 
 tain in itself but uncertain in time, when, 
 whenever; put with the Subj. aorist, and 
 followed in the apodosis by an Indie, fut. 
 John 12, 32 Kaya> eav v^coSw ex. rrjs yr]s, 
 Trdvras eXKucrco 71736? fpavrov. 1 John 3, 2 ; 
 or by a pres. in fut. sense John 14, 3. So 
 Sept. for tJX Prov. 3, 24. Is. 24, 13. Am. 
 7, 2 ; comp. Heb. Lex. ex C. 4. So Lat. 
 si, Hor. Epist. 1. 7. 10. Virg. ^En. 5. 64; 
 comp. ubi, 4. 118. 
 
 II. Used along with other particles ; 
 where, for the most part, each retains its 
 own separate force and signification ; as 
 eav yap, eav 8e, eav (cat, eav ovv, ori eav, etc. 
 Only the following require to be noted ; all 
 construed with the Subjunctive as in no. 2 
 above. 
 
 1. eav 8e Kai, and if also, but if also, 
 Matt. 18, 17. 1 Cor. 7, 11. 28. 2 Tim. 2,5. 
 nonal. Sept. Job 31, 14. 
 
 2. lav prj, if not, i. q. unless, except; 
 comp. above in I, no. 2. a) With Subj. 
 
 present, and having in the apodosis an Indie, 
 fut. Luke 13, 3. 5 ; or an Imperat. Matt. 10, 
 13. 1 Cor. 14, 28 ; or an Indie, pres. John 
 3, 2. 5, 19. Acts 15, 1. 1 Cor. 9, 16. James 
 
 2, 17 ; ellipt. Gal. 2, 16 eav ur) [SiKaiwrotl 
 8ia Trio-Teas I. X. Septi Ex. 3, 19. 4, 1. 8. 9. 
 Comp. Pol. 3. 38. 2. Xen. An. 5. 7. 30. 
 
 b) With Subj. aorist, having in the apodosis 
 an Indie, fut. Matt. 6, 15. 18, 35. John 8 
 24. Rom. 11, 23. 1 Cor. 14, 11. Rev. 3,3- 
 and so in the aposiopesis 2 Thess. 2, 3 ; or 
 an Indie, pres. Mark 3, 27. 7, 3. 4. John 
 
 3, 3. 5. 6, 44. 53. 7, 51. Acts 27, 31. 1 Cor. 
 8,8; or an Indie, aorist, John 1 5, 6 ; or a 
 Subj. aorist after ov /mj expressing strong 
 negation, Matt. 5, 20. 18, 3. John 4, 48. 
 20, 25; or an Opt. pres. c. av, Acts 8, 31. 
 
 c) With Subj. perfect, having in the apo 
 dosis an Indie, pres. once John 3, 27. 
 Spec, except that, but that ; Mark 4, 22 ov 
 yap ecrri ri Kpvnrov, o eav p,rj (pavepta^fj, pr. 
 if not what shall be revealed, i. e. but that 
 it shall be revealed ; parall. is oAX tva in 
 the other clause. Matt. 26, 42 eav /*r) avro 
 TT/CO, except that (unless) 1 drink it. Mark 
 
 10, 30. Comp. Matth. 5 617. d. Winer 59 
 fin. So rjv fir) Eurip. Med. 30. 
 
 3. eav Trep or IdvTrep, if indeed, if 
 now, Heb. 3, 6. 14. 6, 3. non al. 2 Mace. 
 3, 38. Plut. Lycurg. civrrep. Xen. Cyr. 4. 
 6. 8 fjvrrfp. 
 
 4. lav re, and if; repeated eav re... 
 lav re, i. q. whether .. .or, Rom. 14, 8 qua- 
 ter. So Sept. for CX Ex. 19, 13. Lev. 3, 1. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 17. Also lav re Kai, 
 and if also; 2 Cor. 10, 8 lav re yap Kal, 
 for though also. + 
 
 II. eav, conjunct, for av, if, with the 
 Subjunctive in relative clauses and with re 
 lative words ; usually regarded as merely a 
 wrong orthography, and therefore corrected 
 to av in editions of Greek writers, but not 
 in N. T. see Herm. ad Vig. p. 516, 833. 
 Winer { 43 fin. Such words are thus ren 
 dered general and indefinite, implying pos 
 sibility but not certainty ; Lat. cunque, Engl. 
 ever, soever ; see in av I. no. II. 1. 
 
 1. After relative Pronouns, as 6s lav, 
 ocros eav, Saris lav, Lat. quicunque, Engl. 
 whoever, whosoever, whatsoever, a) Before 
 the Subjunct. present, expressing what may 
 have taken place ; see in av I, no. II. 1. a. a. 
 Matt. 11, 27. 20, 26. 27. Luke 4, 6. 10,22. 
 John 15, 7. Gal. 6, 7. Col. 3, 23. 1 John 
 3, 22. Rev. 3, 19. Sept. Gen. 21, 22. 44, 1. 
 b) Before the Subj. aorist, expressing what 
 may hereafter take place ; see in av I, no. 
 
 11. 1. a./3. Matt. 10, 14. 42. 11,6. 12,36. 
 
eavrov 
 
 199 
 
 Mark 7,11. 9, 37. Luke 18, 17. Acts 7, 7. 
 
 1 Cor. 6, 18. al. Sept. Gen. 15, 14. 
 
 2. After relative Adverbs, e. g. a) OTTOU 
 fdv, wheresoever, with Subj. present, Matt. 
 24, 28 ; with Subj. aorist, Matt. 26, 13. 
 Mark 6, 10. 14, 14. Also whithersoever, 
 with Subj. present, Matt. 8, 19. b) ol fdv, 
 whithersoever, with Subj. present, 1 Cor. 16, 
 6. c) oa-aKis fdv, as often as, with Subj. 
 aorist, Rev. 11, 6. d) a>s fdv, as if, in 
 whatever way, with Subj. aorist, Mark 4, 
 26. Sept. Job 37, 10. e) a36 fdv, ac 
 cording to whatsoever, with Subj. present, 
 
 2 Cor. 8, 12. 
 
 3. After a particle of time, see in i> I, 
 no. II. 1 . c ; so as fdv, whensoever, at what 
 ever time, with Subj. present; Rom. 15, 24 
 
 fls rtjv ^Traviav. -f- 
 
 fjs, ov ; dat. eauTw, fj, a> ; ace. 
 tavrov, TJV, 6v ; only in the oblique cases, as 
 also in Plural ; reflexive pron. of the 3d 
 pers. himself, herself, itself; Plur. them 
 selves ; see Buttm. 74. 3. Kiihner } 88. 
 A contracted form is avrov, tjs, ov, which 
 see in its order. 
 
 1. Pr. i. e. in 3 pers. Sing, and Plur. 
 Matt. 8, 22. 12, 45. 23, 12. 37. 27, 42. 
 Luke 9, 25. 19, 35. John 5, 18. al. saepiss. 
 Pol. 1. 79. 2. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 61. 
 
 2. As a general reflexive, put also for the 
 first and second persons ; Buttm. } 127. n. 5. 
 Kiihner } 302. 8. Winer $ 22. 5. a) As 
 1 pers. e. g. Plur. for rjp.S)v avrcav, our 
 selves ; Rom. 8, 23 rjfitls avrol tv tavrols 
 (rrfvd^fv. 1 Cor. 11, 31. 2 Cor. 1, 9. 10, 
 12. 14. 1 John 1, 8. So Pol. 2. 37. 2. 
 Plato Phaedon 25. p. 78. b. b) As 2 pers. 
 e. g. Sing, for a-f avrov, thyself; Rom. 13, 9 
 dyaTTTjcrfis rbv ir\r)(riov o~ov <aj favrov. John 
 18, 34. OE1. V. H. 1. 21. Xen. Mem. 1. 
 4. 9.) Plur. for vp.a>v avra>v, yourselves, 
 Matt. 3, 9. 23, 31. 25,9 dyopdo-arf favrals. 
 26, 11. Acts 13, 46. 1 Cor. 6, 19. Heb. 
 10, 34. So Pol. 18. 6. 4. Xen. Cyr. 6. 
 2. 41. 
 
 3. Plur. in a reciprocal sense, for aXX?j- 
 Xwi/, one another, each other ; Kiihn. 302. 7. 
 Mark 10, 26 \fyovres -rrpbs eavrovs, saying 
 to (among) themselves, one to another. John 
 12, 19. Rom. 1, 24. Col. 3, 13. 16. Jude 
 20. al. Xen. Cyr. 3. 5. 2, 16. 
 
 4. With Prepositions : a) d<p iavrov, 
 see in OTTO no. 2. c. a. b) 81 favrov, Rom. 
 14. 14, see in Sta I. 4. a. c) fls tavrbv 
 ep^f cr3ai, to come to oneself, to recover one s 
 self-possession, consciousness, Luke 15, 17; 
 so Arr. Epict. 3. 1. 15. Diod. Sic. 13. 95; 
 comp. redire ad se, Hor. Epist 2. 2. 138. 
 
 d) fv tavra \tyfiv v. tnrfiv, tc say within 
 oneself, L q. to think, to suppose, Matt. 3, 9. 
 
 9, 3. 21. Sept. for tnbs ISX Esth. 6, 6. 
 Ps. 36, 1 ; see Heb. Lex. art. lax no 2. 
 So in other phrases: f x flv Tl (V fcivr^, 
 to have in oneself, i. e. either in one s nature 
 or power, Matt. 13, 21. John 5, 26. 6, 53 ; 
 or i. q. fv rfj AcapSt g avrov ex fiv t ^ have in 
 one s mind, Mark 9,50. John 5,42. 1 John 
 5, 10 ; fX fLV crvftrrjcriv tv eavrols, to have 
 dispute among themselves, one with another, 
 Acts 28, 29 ; fl8evai v. eTTiyiv&CTKdv fv tav- 
 T<5, to knoiv or perceive in oneself, John 6, 61 . 
 Mark 5, 30 ; and so John 11, 38. Acts 10, 
 17; also of God, 8odfiv riva eV eaurw, 
 in himself, i. e. in oneness with himself, in 
 like glory, John 13, 32 ; of Christ, KTL fi v 
 8vo fis fva tv tavrco, in himself, in the com 
 munion of the one spiritual life in him, Eph. 
 2, 15. Also ytW(T3at eV tairrw, to come to 
 oneself, to recover one s self-possession, 
 Acts 12, 11 ; so Pol. 1. 49. 8. Xen. An. 1. 
 5. 17; comp. above in lett. c. e) e eav- 
 TWV, from or of ourselves, i. q. d0 IUVTCOV 
 q. V. 2 Cor. 3, 5. f) Aca3 tavrov, by 
 oneself, alone, Acts 28, 16 comp. 30. James 
 2, 17. So Pol. 1. 24. 4. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 
 10. 12. g) /xe3 tavTov, with (along 
 with) oneself, Matt. 12, 45. Mark 8, 14. 
 h) Trap eavr<5, by or icith oneself, in one s 
 house, at home, Fr. chez soi, 1 Cor. 16, 2. 
 So Xen. Mem. 3. 13. 3. i) irpbs eav- 
 TOV, to oneself, i. e. to one s own house or 
 home; Luke 24, 12 drrrfX^fv Trpbs eavrov. 
 Plur. id. John 20, 10. (Sept. Num. 24. 25. 
 Pol. 5. 93. 1 irpbs aiiTovs.) Also to or 
 with oneself, in mind; Luke 18, 11 npbs 
 tavrbv ravra Trpocrrji/xfTo. Mark 14, 4. 
 (Comp. Aristaen. 1. 6 StfXoytfo/ifyi/ Se irpbs 
 tfjLavTTjv.) Plur. recipr. Trpbs favrovs, to 
 (among) themselves, to or with one another ; 
 see above in no. 3. Mark 10, 26 \eyovres 
 irpbs tavTovs. 11, 31. 12, 7. 16, 3. Luke 
 20, 6. 14. + 
 
 6a&), u>, f. fdcro), impf. t"a>v, aor. flacra, 
 for the augm. see Buttm. 5 84. 2 ; to let, to 
 let be or happen. 
 
 1. Pr. i. q. to permit, to suffer, not to 
 hinder, c. ace. et infin. Matt. 24, 43 OVK av 
 fiauf Siopvyrjvai TT/I> oiKiav avrov. Luke 4, 
 41. Acts 14, 16. 27, 32. 28, 4. 1 Cor. 10, 
 13. Rev. 2, 20 Rec. So infin. impl. Acts 
 16, 7. 19, 30. Sept. for rcn imper. Gen. 
 38, 16; -jna Job 9, 18. (Loc.*D. Mort. 13. 
 5. Hdian. 3. 15. 9. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 9.) 
 Ellipt. Luke 22, 51 fdrt teas TOVTOV, suffer 
 thus far, addressed to the officers. Spec, to 
 let go on with any thing, to leave in trust ; 
 
Acts 23, 32 fdcravres rovs nrnfls iropevfcr Zai 
 crvv aurw. Praegn. Acts 27, 40 ras ayxvpas 
 TrepifXofres ( LU>V els rrjv SaXatrcraf, taking 
 (cutting) away the anchor s they left them to 
 fall into the sea; comp. Diod. Sic. 5. 33 
 eXdcr/iara yap crio rjpov KaraKpvTTTOVcriv fis 
 TT]V yr^v. KOL ravra e aicrt, [le^pis av orou KT\. 
 2. to let be, to let alone, to leave ; c. ace. 
 of pers. Acts 5. 38 KCU e dcrare avrovs. Sept. 
 for HB in Judg. 11, 37. Dem. 983. 7. 
 Plato Conv. 201. c ; rt Ml. V. H. 2. 38. 
 Xen. Conv. 6. 8. 
 
 e/38o/jirJKOVTa, O l, at, rd, indec. seventy, 
 Acts 7, 14. 23, 23. 27, 37. Luke 10, 1. 
 17 oi e r /38o/ar;Koi>ra, the Seventy, sent out by 
 Christ as teachers. 
 
 e/3So/jirjKOVTdias, adv. seventy times; 
 Matt. 18, 22 e /38. eVrd, seventy times seven, 
 a frequent general expression for any large 
 number ; comp. Gen. 4, 24. 
 
 e^3So/i09, r], ov, ord. adj. the seventh, 
 tohn 4. 52. Heb. 4, 4 bis. Jude 14. Rev. 
 8, 1. 10,7. 11, 15. 16, 17. 21, 20. 
 
 E/3ep, 6, indec. Eber, Heber, Heb. 123> 
 (over, beyond), one of Abraham s ancestors, 
 Luke 3, 35; comp. Gen. 10, 21. 24. 25. 
 
 EQoaiKOS, 17, ov, adj. Hebrew, Luke 
 23, 38. Jos. Ant. prorem. 3. 
 
 Eftpalos, ov, 6, a Hebrew, from Heb. 
 "n^S (pr. one passing over), applied to 
 Abraham Gen. 14, 13, and to his descend 
 ants, the Israelites generally, Gen. 39, 14. 
 Ex. 1,15. Deut. 15, 12. al. saep. In N. T. 
 oi E /Spa tot, the Hebrews, are the Jews of 
 Palestine, who use the Hebrew (Aramaean) 
 language, to whom the language and coun 
 try of their fathers peculiarly belong, the 
 true seed of Abraham ; in opp. to oi EXXr;- 
 via-rai, the Hellenists, i. e. Jews born out of 
 Palestine and using chiefly the Greek lan 
 guage; comp. Hug Introd. II. 10. penult. 
 Winer Realw. art. Hellenisten. So 2 Cor. 
 11, 22. Phil. 3, 5 EjSpaTo? e E/3patW, 
 emphat. comp. in jSao-tXeus no. 1 . In Acts 
 6, 1 Hebrew Christians, in distinction from 
 Hellenistic Christians. 
 
 r .E/3patV, tSoj, 77, sc. SidXeKTos, the He 
 brew language, i. e. the Aramaean, or Syro- 
 Chaldaic, the vernacular language of the 
 Palestine Jews in the time of Christ and 
 the apostles ; Acts 21, 40. 22, 2. 26, 14. 
 See Bibl. Repos. 1831, p. 309 sq. 317 sq. 
 
 EfipaicrTi) adv. Hebraice, in Helrew, 
 \. e. later Hebrew, Aramaean, John 5, 2. 19, 
 13. 17. 20. [20, 16.] Rev. 9, 11. 16, 16. 
 For adverbs in -tort, see Buttm. 119 15. c. 
 
 j f. t cro), (e yyvs,) Att. flit. tto 
 James 4, 8. Buttm. 95. 7. 9 ; to inng 1 
 Tiear, to cawse to approach, trans. Sept. for 
 83>sn Gen. 48, 10 ; a-njsn Is. 5, 8. Pol. 8. 
 
 6. 7 eyyicravres ry yfj ras vavs. More 
 comm. and in N. T. intrans. to draw near, 
 to approach ; and perf. ijyyiKa, to have drawn 
 near, i. e. to be near, to be at hand. comp. 
 Buttm. 113. 7. 
 
 1. Pr. to draw near, perf. to be near, e. g. 
 a) Of persons, absol. Matt. 26, 46 and Mark 
 14, 42 rjyyiK.fv 6 7rapa8t8ouj p.f. Luke 12,33 
 
 07TOU K\fTTTTJS OVK fyyifl. 18, 40. 19, 41. 
 
 24, 15. Acts 21, 33. 23, 15. With dat. 
 Luke 7, 12 w? 8e f/yyio-f rfj 7^X77. 15, 1. 
 
 25. 22, 47. Acts 9, 3. 10, 9. 22, 6. Sept. 
 c. dat. for 1553 Gen. 27, 21. 26; a-nfc Ex. 
 32, 19. (Absol. Plut. M. Anton. 33. Pol. 12. 
 
 7. 1 ; c. dat. 17. 4. 1.) With els c. ace. of 
 place, Matt. 21, 1 KOI ore rjyyi<rav els lepo- 
 o-oXupi. Mark 11, 1. Luke 19, 29. 24, 28. 
 Sept. for 2J3 Jer. 51, 9. Trop. fyyifiv 
 T &> 3 e a) , to draw near to God, i. e. in Sept. 
 to offer sacrifice in the temple, for 83 S3 Ex. 
 19, 22. Ez. 44, 13 ; in N. T. to do rever 
 ence and homage, to worship God with pious 
 heart, Heb. 7, 19 comp. 4, 16. James 4, 8. 
 Matt. 15, 8 quoted from Is. 29, 13, where 
 Sept. for 1~>% . So God is said fyyifciv 
 rols aVSpwTTou, to draw near to men, e. g. 
 by the aids of his Spirit, by his grace, James 
 4, 8. Sept. and 11% Deut. 4, 2 ; comp. Ps. 
 145, 18. b) Of things, time, etc. Matt. 3, 
 2 fjyyiKf fj /3ao~iXez ratv ovpavaiv. 4, 17. 10, 
 7. Mark 1, 15; so Matt. 21,34. 26,45. 
 Luke 21, 8. 20. 28. 22, 1. Acts 7, 17. Rom. 
 13, 12. Heb. 10, 25. James 5, 8. 1 Pet. 4, 
 7. With t TT i c. ace. of pers. Luke 1 0, 9. 1 1 . 
 
 2. Spec, as in Sept. usage, to be near, to 
 be nigh ; so Sept. often for 3"n near, nigh, 
 e. g. 1 K. 21, 2 of Naboth s vineyard, or* 
 eyylfav euros rw ot jco) fiov. Deut. 21, 3 r} 
 TrdXis 77 tyyi^ovcra ro> rpavpm g. V. 6. 22, 
 22; also trop. Jer. 23, 23. Ruth 2, 20. 
 2 Sam. 19, 42. Hence in N. T. Luke 18, 
 35 e yeVero 8e Iv r<a eyyifciv auTov fis lept- 
 X&>, while he was yet nigh unlo Jericho ; 
 comp. Matt. 20, 29 and Mark 10, 46, where 
 the same is said to have taken place as Je 
 sus went out (eWopeTjo/ieVou avrov} from 
 Jericho ; see Gr. Harm. 5 109 and note. 
 Luke 19, 37 eyyifrvros Se airou 77877 irpbs 
 rfi Kara/3do-ei row opovs, and when he was 
 now near, at the descent of the mount of Ol 
 ives ; see Winer 52 ult. e. Trop. Phil. 2, 
 30 p-e xpt Savarov rjyyia-e, he was nigh unto 
 death ; comp. Sept. for 11% Job 33, 22 ; 
 S^HPs. 88,4. 107,18. Arr.Epict.3. 10.14. 
 
eyypdfa 
 
 201 
 
 eyeipa) 
 
 )(o, f. ^o,, (eV, ypd<po>,) to grave 
 ii}, to write in or on, trop. with eV TIVI, 2 Cor. 
 
 3, 2 >7 fTTicrroAi) . . . tyyfypafj.fj.fvr) ev rals 1 
 Kapdiais f)p.a>v. \. 3. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 12 
 yyp. rovy vopovs rals \Jx<ns. So pr. Hdot. 
 
 4. 91. Time. 1. 128. 
 
 ov, 6, 17, adj. (tyyvr) ; eV, yuici/,) 
 giving security, yielding a pledge, 2 Mace. 
 10, 28. Lys. 902. 3. In N. T. Subst. a 
 surety, sponsor, trop. Heb. 7, 22. So pr. 
 Ecclus. 29, 15. 16. Pol. 5. 27. 1. Xen. 
 Vect. 4. 20. 
 
 eyyvs, adv. near, nigh, of both place 
 and time. 
 
 1. Of place, absol. John 19, 42. With 
 gen. John 3, 23. 11, 18. 54. 19, 20; and 
 so Luke 19, 11. Acts 1, 12; also eyyvs yl- 
 j/etrSat v. ep^ecrSat, to draw nigh, to come 
 near, c. gen. John 6, 19. 23 ; comp. Buttm. 
 \ 146. 3. Sept. for 3iij3 Gen. 45, 10. Ez. 
 23, 12. (1 Mace. 4, 18. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 1.) 
 With dat. Acts 9, 38 eyyvs 8e ovarjs Avd8rjs 
 rfi loWfl. 27, 8. So Sept. trop. Ps. 33, 
 19. Diod. Sic. 1. 41 eyyia-ra TIJ d\r]%eia. 
 Comp. Matth. } 386. 6. Trop. near, nigh, 
 with gen. Heb. 6, 8. 8, 13. Rom. 10, 8 ey 
 yvs <TOV, near thee, i. e. close at hand, near 
 by, quoted from Dent. 30, 14 where Sept. 
 for -1115. So c. art. ot eyyvs as adj. 
 (Buttm. $ 125. 6,) the near, those who are 
 near, the Jews, as having the knowledge 
 and worship of the true God, opp. ol paxpav, 
 the Gentiles, Eph. 2, 17 ; so Sept. and Sinj? 
 Is. 57, 19. Also eyyvs yiVecrSat, to become 
 near to God by embracing the gospel, Eph. 
 2, 13; comp. Wisd. 6, 19. 
 
 2. Of time, absol. eyyvs TO Sepoy Matt. 
 24,32. Mark 13,28. Luke 21, 30; also 
 with eVt Supais Matt. 24, 33. Mark 13, 29 ; 
 6 Kaipos Matt. 26, 18. Rev. 1, 3. 22, 10; 
 TO Traced John 2, 13. 6, 4. 11, 55 ; ^ eoprf] 
 John 7, 2 ; 17 /3acriXei a TOV Seou Luke 21,31; 
 6 Kvpios as judge, by way of encouragement, 
 Phil. 4, 5, comp. Heb. 10, 37. Luke 21, 28 ; 
 comp. also Sept. Ps. 34, 19. 145, 18. So 
 Sept. eyyvs 17 rjp.tpa for 3i"i|5 Ez. 30, 3. 
 Joel 1, 15. 2, 1. al. Horn. II. 22. 453 ; 
 c. dat. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 2 6 p.tv dya>v rjp.1v 
 eyyvs. 
 
 eyjvrepov, adv. compar. of eyyvs, (pr. 
 Neut. of eyyvrepos, Buttm. j 115. 5, 7,) 
 nearer, spoken of time, Rom. 13, 11. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 7. 21 of likeness. 
 
 eyetpa), f. eytpS>, aor. 1 f/yetpa, trans, to 
 awaken, to wake up, to rouse up ; Mid. in- 
 trans. to awake, to rouse up, to arise, Buttm. 
 { 135. 3. Also Pass. perf. eyr}ytpiMn and 
 
 aor. 1 r)yfp%r)v, to have beta roused, and 
 hence to arise, to have risen. 
 
 1 . to awake from sleep, to rouse up, im 
 plying strictly a rising up from the posture 
 of sleep ; Mid. intrans. to awake, to rise up. 
 a) Pr. c. ace. Matt. 8, 25 fjyeipav avrov. 
 Acts 12, 7. Mid. Mark 4, 27 KaZevdy KCU 
 eyeiprjTai. Matt. 25, 7. Luke 8, 24. 54. 13, 
 25 ; Imperat. eye/peo-Se, awake, arise, Matt. 
 26, 46. Mark 14, 42. Sept. for ppn Prov. 
 6, 22 ; YP-1 Gen. 41, 4. 7. So Plut. Pomp. 
 36. Xen. (Ec. 5. 4. b) Trop. from a state 
 of insensibility, torpor, death ; c. ace. Mark 
 9, 27 ; Mid. Matt. 9, 25 ; in a moral sense 
 Rom. 13, 11 comp. Eph. 5, 14. (So of a 
 state Dem. 439. 1.) Spec, from death, of 
 which sleep has ever been an emblem among 
 all nations ; e. g. the Hebrews, Job 3, 13. Ps. 
 13, 4. Dan. 12, 2. Matt. 27, 52 ; the Greeks, 
 Horn. II. 14. 231. Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 21 ; the 
 Romans, Virg. Mn. 6. 278. Thus lyei- 
 peiv veKpovs, toraise the dead; Matt. 10, 
 8 vfKpovs tyeipeTf. John 5, 21. Acts 26, 8. 
 2 Cor. 1, 9; Mid. 1 Cor. 15, 15. 16. Also 
 eyeipetv e< veKputv, to raise from the dead, 
 and Mid. with eV (also OTTO) to rise from the 
 dead ; John 12,1 ov rjyeipev e< ve<pu>v. v. 9. 
 17. Gal. 1, 1. 1 Thess. 1, 10. al. Mid. c. 
 aTrd Matt. 14, 2. 27, 64. 28,7. al. e /c Mark 
 6, 14. 16. Luke 9, 7. John 2, 22. al. Ab 
 sol. Matt. 16, 21. 17, 23. 27, 63. Mark 16, 
 
 14. Acts 5, 30. Rom. 4, 25. 2 Cor. 4, 14. 
 So Sept. and ppn 2 K. 4, 31. Is. 26, 19. 
 
 2. The idea of sleep being dropped, to 
 cause to rise lip, to raise up, to set upright ; 
 Mid. to rise up, to arise. a) Of persons, 
 e. g. sitting, Acts 3, 7 ; reclining at table, 
 John 13, 4 ; prostrate or lying down, Acts 
 10,26. Matt. 17,7. Luke 11,8. Acts 9, 8. 
 al. (Sept. and ppn 2 Sam. 12, 17.) So of 
 sick persons, Matt. 8, 15. Mark 1, 31. 2, 12 ; 
 and including the idea of convalescence, to 
 raise up, to set up again, to heal, James 5, 
 
 15. b) In the simplicity of ancient narra 
 tive this verb (usually Part. e yepSe/y) is 
 prefixed to verbs of going, of undertaking 
 or doing any thing, and the like, see in dvi- 
 arrrjp,t II. 1. a ; Matt. 2, 13. 14 eyfp^els na- 
 pa\a/3f TO Traio-iov. 2, 20. 21. 9, 19. John 
 11, 29. 14, 31. al. Sept. and c>ip 1 Chr. 
 22, 19 ; comp. in dvi<rn)fj.i 1. c. c) Trop. 
 Mid. to rise up against an adversary, with 
 itri Tiva, Matt. 24, 7. Mark 13, 8. Luke 21, 
 10. Sept. Act. for iiyn Is. 10, 26. Jer. 50, 
 9. (Jos. Ant. 8. 7. 6.) So eyeipeo-Zai V 177 
 Kpla-ei p.(Ta TIVOS, Matt. 12,42. Luke 11, 31. 
 d) Of things, to raise up, e. g. out of a pit, 
 Matt. 12, 11, comp, Luke 14, 5. Also in 
 
eyepcrt? 
 
 later usage, to erect, to build, e. g. vaov John 
 2, 19. 20. So Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 5 fia>p.ovs. 
 Hdian. 8. 1. 12 Tflxs. 8. 2. 12 n-vpyovy. 
 Plut. Camill. 31 TroXiz . 
 
 3. Trop. to raise t^. to cause to arise, or 
 exisZ; Mid. to arise, to appear; Luke 1, 
 69 eyapev Kpas a-mnjpias, i. e. a saviour. 
 Acts 13. 22. [23.] Mid. spoken of prophets, 
 Matt. 11, 11. 24, 11. 24. Mark 13, 22. 
 Luke 7, 16. John 7, 52. Sept. and T SS] 
 Is. 41,25. 45, 13; y^ Judg. 3,9.15. 
 So Ecclus. 10, 4. Spec, to raise up child 
 ren, to Ze? be born to any one ; c. ace. et dat. 
 Matt. 3, 9. Luke 3, 8. 
 
 4. Intrans. or with eavrov implied, to 
 awake, to arise; Buttm. 130. n. 2. Thus 
 to awake from sleep, trop. sluggishness, 
 Eph. 5, 14 eyeipai 6 KaSfcv8a>v. Also, to 
 rise up, to arise, from a sitting or recumbent 
 posture, Mark 2, 9. 11. 3, 3. 5, 41. 10, 49. 
 Luke 5, 23. 24. 6, 8. John 5, 8. In classic 
 writers only poetic in this usage ; Aristoph. 
 Ran. 340. Eurip. Iph. in Aul. 627. + 
 
 i$yp<ri, ews, 17, (e yei poo,) a waking up 
 from sleep, Pol. 9. 15. 4 ; a rising up, Sept. 
 for Elp Ps. 139, 2 ; comp. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 294. In N. T. resurrection from the 
 dead, Matt. 27, 53. 
 
 eyKa&eros, ov, 6, 77, adj. (ey/KaSt ^/u,) 
 suborned, one suborned, a spy, Luke 20, 20. 
 Jos. B. J. 6. 5. 2. Dem. 1483. 1. Plato 
 Ax. 368. e. 
 
 ey/auWa, t W, ra, (eV, Kaivos,} pr. ini^i- 
 aiion or dedication of something new, Sept. 
 for nsan Ezra 6, 16. Neh. 12, 27. Dan. 3, 
 2. In N. T. a festival of consecration, sc. 
 of something new or renewed; genr. the 
 festival of dedication, John 10, 22. This 
 festival was instituted by Judas Maccabseus 
 to commemorate the purification of the tem 
 ple and the renewal of the temple worship, 
 after the three years profanation by Antio- 
 chus Epiphanes. It was held for eight days, 
 commencing on the 25th day of the month 
 Kislev pl?O3), which began with the new 
 moon of December. Josephus calls it <pa>ra, 
 i. e. the festival of lights or lanterns. See 
 1 Mace. 4, 52-59. 2 Mace. 10, 5-8. Jos. 
 Ant. 12. 7. 6, 7. Wetst. on John 1. c. 
 
 ey/caiVi^a), f. icru, (eV, Kam fco,) pr. to 
 renew, Lat. innovare, Sept. for ^H 2 Chr. 
 16, 8. Ecclus. 33, 6. In N. T. to initiate, 
 i. e. to dedicate, to consecrate, Heb. 9, 18. 
 10, 20. Sept. for ^ati Deut. 20, 5. 1 K. 8, 
 64 ; comp. Sept. and ti^H 1 Sam. 11, 14. 
 
 ey/caXect), >, f. 770-0), (ev, KaXeco,) to call 
 in a debt, to demand, Xen. An, 7. 7. 33. 
 
 202 
 
 In N. T. to caZZ wpon by way of accusation, 
 to accuse, to bring a charge against ; with 
 dat. of pers. Acts 19, 38 ; and 8id c. ace. 
 23, 28. (Ecclus. 46, 19. Luc. Asin. 4. 
 Xen. Hi. 5. 3.) Pass, with irepi c. gen. of 
 thing, Acts 19, 40. 23, 29. 26, 2. 7 ; so c. 
 gen. Plut. Aristid. 10. Diod. Sic. 11. 83; 
 eVt c. dat. 4. 55. Once with Kara c. gen. 
 Rom. 8, 33. 
 
 ey/CGtraXeiTTCt), f. i^co, (eV, KaraXeiVco,) 
 pr. to leave behind in any place or state ; 
 hence 
 
 1. to Zeate behind, to leave, e. g. in a place, 
 c. ace. Acts 2, 27 OVK eyKaraXen/my TTJV 
 ^vx^v JJLOV tls aSov, quoted from Ps. 16, 10 
 where Sept. for 3tS. So Dem. 1316. 25.- 
 Also to Zeare, to let remain over and above, 
 c. ace. et dat. Roin. 9, 29 eyKarf\nrfv ->]p.lv 
 <nrepp.a, quoted from Is. 1,9 where Sept. 
 for HrYin. So Hdian. 1. 4. 18. Plato Phae- 
 don 91. c. 
 
 2. to Zeaue, to forsake, c. ace. Matt. 27, 46 
 and Mark 15, 34 Iva ri p.e eynaTf\mfs, quo 
 ted from Ps. 22, 1 where Sept for at 5 
 2 Cor. 4, 9. 2 Tim. 4, 10. 16. Heb. 10,25. 
 13, 5. Sept. for MS Deut. 31, 6. 8. Plut. 
 Galb. 14. Xen. Cyr. 8. 8. 4. 
 
 eyKCLTOlKeO), o>, f. ^crco, (eV, KaroiK/ft),) 
 to aWZZ in or among ; with eV c. dat. of pers. 
 2 Pet. 2, 8. Hdot. 4. 204. Pol. 18. 26. 13. 
 Enrip. Antiop. Fr. 27 e lav Kevoiaiv eyca- 
 
 f. icrw, (ei/, Kevrpifa, ) to 
 prick in spurs, to spwr on, trop. Wisd. 16, 
 11. In N. T. to insert, to ingraft, trop. c. 
 ace. Rom. 11, 23 ; Pass. v. 17. 19. 23. 24 
 bis. So pr. Theophr. H. PI. 2. 2. 5. M. An- 
 tonin. 11. 8. 
 
 ey/cX^/iCtj aros, TO, (eyKaXew,) a charge, 
 accusation, Acts 23, 29. 25, 16. Pol. 2 
 52. 4. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 6, 7. 
 
 eyKOfjiftoo/jiai, ovpai, f. WO-O/MZI, only 
 Mid. and derived from eyKo/ij3w/xa, the long 
 coarse apron or frock worn by slaves ; Poll. 
 4. 119 TT/ Se TWJ> SovXcuv e co/ii Si *at (juari- 
 8ioi> TI TrpotrKeirai XevKoi , 6 e yKO/*/3cop.a Xe- 
 yerai. Hesych. Koa-a-v^rj eyKo/*/3a>/ia *a! 
 Tre/nfcojua AiyvTrrtov. Hence Mid. f y;co/i- 
 /SoO/iai, to ptZ on as an eyKo/i^aj/xa, to wear 
 as a ia%e of service ; trop. c. ace. 1 Pet. 5, 
 5 rrjV Ta7Tivo<ppo<Tvvr)v e yKO/i/3coo-ao-3f , comp. 
 Phil. 2, 7. So genr. Hesych. f yKo/ijScoSek, 
 83fi y eyo/i/3ocr3at, eVetXflaSat. Nicet. 
 3. 8. p. 288 eyKo/i|3a)cretj rwi/ ecrStj/iara)!/. 
 
 eyKOTTrj, fjs, 17, (e yKOTTTw,) an impedi 
 ment, hindrance, 1 Cor. 9, 12. Diod. Sic, 
 1.32. 
 
203 
 
 ey/co7rra), f. ^o). (ev, KOTTTCD,) to s/n fce 
 hi, to cut. in ; trop. to impede, to hinder ; C. 
 ace. Acts 24, 4. Gal. 5, 7. 1 Thess. 2, 18. 
 Pass. 1 Pet. 3, 7 Grb. With gen. Rom. 15, 
 22; see Buttm. } 132. 4. Pol. 24. 1. 12 
 c. dat. 
 
 ey/cpaTeia, as, f), (eyKparrjs,) continence, 
 temperance, self-control, Acts 24, 25. Gal. 5, 
 23. 2 Pet. 1, 6 bis. Ecclus. 18, 29. Pint. 
 Lycurg. 15. Xen. Mem. 1. 5. 1. ib. 4. 5. 1 sq. 
 
 ejKparevo/jiai,, f. evcrop.ai, Mid. depon. 
 (eyKpar^y,) to be continent, temperate, absti 
 nent, to hare self-control, 1 Cor. 7, 9. 9, 25. 
 Sept. for WH$fjn Gen. 43, 31. Not found 
 in classic writers, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442. 
 
 eyKparrfi, eos, ovs, 6, fj, adj. (eV, icpd- 
 TOS,) strong, powerful, Xen. Eq. 7. 8 ; hav 
 ing power over, master of, c. gen. 2 Mace. 
 10, 15. 17. Xen. Hi. 5. 2. In N. T. master 
 of oneself, continent, temperate, abstinent, 
 Tit. 1,8. So Ecclus. 26, 15. Xen. Mem. 4. 
 5. 11. Plato Phcedr. 256. b. 
 
 eyicpiva), f. iva, (eV, /cpu/co,) to judge in 
 or among, to reckon among, c. dat. 2 Cor. 
 10, 12. See Lob. ad Phryn. p. 385 sq. So 
 c. els Jos. B. J. 2. 8. 7. Plut. Lycurg. 25. 
 Xen. Hell. 4. 1. 40. 
 
 ejKpvTTTW, f. vjfto, (eV, Kpt/nTO),) to hide 
 in any thing, by covering, mixing, etc. as 
 Sept. ev rrf "/ft for l^ia Josh. 7, 21. Hence 
 in N. T. of leaven mixed and kneaded with 
 flour; Matt. 13, 33 and Luke 13, 21 rjv . . . 
 (VfKpv\l/ev els aXevpov crara rpia. Sept. for 
 MS Ez. 4, 12. Genr. c. els TI Diod. Sic. 1. 
 80 ; dat. Horn. Od. 5. 488. 
 
 eyuo?, ov, fj, (e yKvco,) with child, preg 
 nant, Luke 2, 5. Ecclus. 42, 10. Jos. Ant. 
 4. 8. 33. Diod. Sic. 4. 2. 
 
 * f. t o-w, (eV, xp w,) to rwi m, e. g. 
 oXrjv fls TOVS 6(p^!aXp.ovs Tob. 11, 8. 
 In N. T. to rub in with any thing, to anoint ; 
 Rev. 3, 18 KoXXouptoi , e yxptVat TOVS o03aX- 
 fiovs. So Sept. Jer. 4, 30. Tob. 6, 8 ; see 
 Wetst. in loc. 
 
 eya), gen. e /zow, /ioO ; dat. tfioi, pot. ; ace. 
 e /ie, /ie ; Plur. fipels, etc. pers. pron. of the 
 first person, I, me. ; Buttm. { 72. 3. Kiihn. 
 87. The monosyllabic forms pov, pot, fie, 
 are usually enclitic, but not after preposi 
 tions, except irpos pe ; Buttm. ib. n. 2, 3. 
 The following may be noted : 
 
 1. Nom. eyo>, Plur. fipels, Matt. 8, 7. 
 Acts 17, 3. Matt. 28, 14. Mark 14, 58. al. 
 saepiss. So with a certain emphasis, Matt. 
 3, 11. 14. 5, 22. 28. 32. 34. John 4, 26. al. 
 Matt. 6, 12. 17, 19. 19, 27. al. sasp. Used 
 sometimes by Paul KOIVO>VIKU>S, i. e. where the 
 
 speaker puts himself as the representative of 
 all, or vice versa ; e. g. eyo> for fjpels, Rom. 
 7, 9. 10. 14. 17. 20 bis, 24. 25. 1 Cor. 10, 30, 
 comp. 13, 1 sq. Or fjpeis for eyo>, 1 Cor. 
 1, 23. 2, 10. 12, comp. v. 4. ib. 4, 8. 10. 
 In the phrase I8ov e yw, Kvpie, Acts 9, 
 10, and eyw Kvpie Matt. 21, 30, put by 
 Hebraism instead of an affirmative adverb ; 
 so Sept. and "^n i Sam. 3, 8. Gen. 22, 1. 
 11 5 ^bx Gen/27, 24. 2 Sam. 20, 17 ; see 
 Gesen. Lehrg. p. 829. 6. 
 
 2. Gen. pov (not e /zoO) and Plur. gen. 
 f)p)v, are often used instead of the corres 
 ponding possessives ep.6s, f]p,tTepos, Buttm. 
 { 127. 7 ; e. g. pov Matt. 2, 6. Luke 7, 46. 
 John 6, 54. al. r)p.S)v Matt. 6, 12. Luke 1, 
 55. Rom. 6, 6. al. So pov as passive, John 
 15, 10 ev rfj dyaTrrj p.ov, i. e. love of or to 
 wards me. 
 
 3. Dat. in the phrase ri tpol Kal croi; 
 what is to me and thee in common 1 what 
 have I with thee ? implying disapprobation 
 or also displeasure ; Mark 5, 7. Luke 8, 28. 
 John 2, 4. Matt. 8, 29. Sept. and Ib-fia 
 M^3 Judg. 11, 12. 2 Sam. 16, 10. 19, 23"; 
 Heb. Lex. art. ia no. I.e. So Arr. Epict. 
 2. 19. 16. ib. 1. 1. 16; see Matth. 5 389 fin. 
 Wetst. in Matt. 1. c. + 
 
 >, f. t o-ca, (eSa<poj,) to level with 
 the ground, to raze, to destroy, c. ace. Luke 
 1 9, 44 (8dfpiov(rl (re Kal TO. re/era crou ev cro/, 
 Att. fut. Sept. for BJ?^ Niph. Amos 9, 14. 
 Pol. 6. 33. 6. 
 
 eoo.(pO9, (os, ovs, TO, (?5oy,) pr. a seat, 
 foundation, Time. 1.10; bottom of a river 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 18 ; of a ship Horn. Od. 5. 
 249 ; floor of a room, Sept. for Sjs ng Num. 
 5, 17, 1 K. 6, 15. In N. T. the ground, 
 Acts 22, 7. Sept. for "f^ Ez. 41, 16. 20. 
 So Ecclus. 11, 5. Pol. 4. 65. 4. Thuc. 3. 68. 
 
 eopat09j ai a, aloi , (eSpa, eSoy,) sitting, 
 sedentary, Xen. Lac. 1.3; fixed, firm, Plut. 
 de primo Frig. 21. In N. T. trop. firm, 
 steadfast, settled, in mind and purpose, 1 Cor. 
 7, 37. 15, 58. Col. 1, 23. So Symm. for 
 "(IDS Prov. 4, 18. Plut. de occulte vivendo 
 4. Plato Tim. 64. b. 
 
 eopai(i)fJ,a, aros, TO, (e8patoo>, eSpatoy,) 
 a basis, foundation, 1 Tim. 3, 15. 
 
 .E^e/aa?, ou, 6, Hezckiah, Heb. *n*pm 
 or i" 1 ;!? ! ! ? (Jehovah strengthens), a king of 
 Judah, r. 728-699 B. C. Matt. 1,9. 10. See 
 2 K. c. 18-20. 2 Chr. c. 29-31. Is. c. 36-38. 
 
 as, f/, (e 3eXco, Spq- 
 crKfia.) voluntary worship, will-worship, be 
 yond what God requires, supererogatory ; 
 Col. 2, 23 fv e 3eXo3p?;o-Ket a Kal ramivocppo- 
 
204 
 
 (Tiivrj, prob. referring to the phrase %e\u>v ev 
 rair. /cat SprjaKfiq TCOV ayy&aw, in v. 18. 
 Comp. for the worship of angels, Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 657, eyyi&Tf rw 3ew /cat ra> dyye Xa> 
 T< 7rapaiTOVp.fi>q> vuas ort O^TOS e crrt p.ecri- 
 TTJS %eov KOI ai SpcoTrcoi . So prob. the Es- 
 senes, Jos. B. J. 2. 8. 7. Comp. Rev. 19, 
 10. 22, 9. This worship of angels contin 
 ued more or less till the 4th century, and 
 was forbidden by the council of Laodicea in 
 A. D. 354 ; Can. 35. See Wetst. in Col. 2, 
 18. 23. Comp. e SeXoSouXet a Luc. Nigrin. 
 23. 
 
 see 
 
 >, f. t crw, (eSoff,) to accustom, Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 2. 10 ; Pass, to be accustomed, Xen. 
 CEc. 11. 14; of things, to &e customary, 
 2 Mace. 14, 30. Plato Legg. 717. d. In 
 N. T. Pass. perf. particip. neut. TO ei3i- 
 o-p.fvov, what is customary, and as a subst. 
 a custom, rite, Luke 2, 27. Buttm. 128. 2. 
 Comp. Pol. 4. 34. 1. Xen. Hi. 9. 7. 
 
 i, pr. ruler of a people ; hence genr. 
 a prefect, ruler, chief, 2 Cor. 11, 32. So of 
 Simon Maccabseus, as head of the Jewish 
 nation, 1 Mace. 14, 47. 15, 1. 2. Jos. Ant. 
 
 13. 6. 6 ; of Archelaus, Jos. B. J. 2. 6. 3 ; 
 of the head of the Jews in Egypt, Jos. Ant. 
 
 14. 7. 2. So Luc. Macrob. 17. 
 e^i/co?, 77, 6v, (eSi/oy,) national, popu 
 
 lar, Pol. 30. 10. 6. In N. T. in the Jewish 
 sense, gentile, heathen ; hence o favucoi, the 
 gentiles, the heathen, Matt. 6, 7. 18, 17 ; in 
 Mss. Matt. 5, 47. 3 John 7. See in e3i/oy. 
 
 e^vwcco?, adv. (eSj/tKoj,) in the manner 
 of the gentiles, Gal. 2, 14. 
 
 e^vo$ : cos, ovs, TO, a multitude, people, 
 race, belonging and living together. Homer 
 uses it also of animals, a flock, swarm, II. 2. 
 87, 459, 469. 
 
 1. Genr. Acts 8, 9 TO e^vos TIJS 2a/ota- 
 peias, the people, inhabitants, of Samaria, 
 COmp. V. 5. 17, 26 -nav e Si/os nySpwjrwi/. 
 1 Pet. 2, 9. al. Sept. for Tisn 2 Chr. 32, 
 7. Is. 13, 4. Horn. II. 7. 115 &vos eraipuiv. 
 13. 495. 
 
 2. Oftener a nation, people, as distinct 
 from all others, Matt. 20, 25 ap^ovres T>V 
 eZvuv. Mark 10, 42. Luke 7, 5 dycmq TO 
 eZvos fjuvv. John 11, 48. 50 sq. Acts 7, 7. 
 10, 22. al. Sept. and i-ia Gen. 12, 2 ; cS 
 Ex. 1, 9. Hdian. 2. 7. 13. ^1. V.H. 3. 13~. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 1. 
 
 3. In the Jewish sense, TO e%vrj, the na 
 tions, i. e. gentile nations, the gentiles ; spo 
 ken of all who are not Israelites, and imply 
 ing ignorance of the true God and idolatry, 
 
 the heathen, pagan nations ; e. g. in antith. 
 with the Jews, Luke 2, 32. Acts 26, 17. 20. 
 23. Rom. 9, 24. 30. al. Also genr. Matt. 
 4, 15. 10, 5. Mark 10, 33. Acts 4, 27. Rom. 
 2, 14. 3, 29. al. saep. So Sept. and e^a 
 Neh. 5, 8. 9. Is. 9, 1 ; d^BS Ez. 27, 33. 
 36. + 
 
 e J09 3 tos, ovs, TO, a custom, usage, man 
 ner, whether established by law or other 
 wise, Luke 1,9. 2, 42. 22, 39. John 19, 40. 
 Acts 6, 14. 15, 1. 16, 21. 21, 21. 25, 16. 
 26, 3. 28, 17. Heb. 10, 25. 2 Mace. 11, 
 25. 13, 4. Pol. 4. 67. 4. Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 1. 
 
 e^6>, found in prose only in perf. 2 etco- 
 Sa, with pres. signif. to be accustomed, to be 
 wont ; see Buttm. 114 e 3o>, comp. J 113. 7. 
 Hence in N. T. plupf. e t &> 3 e i v as impf. 
 Matt. 27, 15. Mark 10, 1 ; so Hdian. 1. 17. 
 7. Xen. An. 7. 8. 4. Also Particip. KOTO. 
 TO etwSoy OUTW, according to his custom, 
 as he was wont, Luke 4, 16. Acts 17, 2 ; 
 so Sept. Num. 24, 1. Thuc. 4. 17. Plato 
 Phcedr. 238. c. 
 
 et, a conditional particle, if, ichether, usu 
 ally at the beginning of a clause, and im 
 plying a condition merely hypothetical, a 
 mere supposition in the mind and separate 
 from all experience ; thus differing from lav 
 q. v. init. Herm. ad Vig. p. 832. Winer 
 42. 2. Comp. also ft and lav used together, 
 1 Cor. 7, 36. Rev. 2, 5. Put sometimes 
 with the Optative ; oftener with the Indica 
 tive ; and rarely with the Subjunctive. 
 
 I. As a conditional particle, if; used alone, 
 i. e. without other particles. 
 
 1. With the Optative, implying that the 
 thing in- question is possible, but uncertain ; 
 it may happen, or it may not ; Buttm. 139. 
 in. 26. Kiihner 339. II. Winer 42. 2. c. 
 The apodosis has then (in N. T.) only the 
 Indie, affirming something definite ; thus 
 with Indie, pres. 1 Pet. 3, 14 dXX et *cai 
 Tracr^oiTf Sta 8iKaioavi>r]v, /j.aKiipioi (e trre), 
 but if also ye suffer, as is very possible ; see 
 below in no. III. d. Or with Indie, praet. 
 Acts 24, 19 ovs eSft r! crov Traptlvai /cat 
 KaTrjyopflv, et Tt f%oifv irpos pe. Comp. 
 Buttm. ^ 139. m. 30. So Horn. II. 9. 389. 
 Luc. Tox. 11. Plato Prot. 329. b. Else 
 where only in parenthetic clauses, and the 
 apodosis in such case lies in the affirmation ; 
 Acts 27, 39 els ov ffiovXtvcravro. el dvvaivro, 
 e coo-at TO TrXotov. 1 Pet. 3, 17 et Se Xoi KTX. 
 So et TV\ 01, if so happen, it may be, per 
 haps, 1 Cor. 14, 10. 15, 37 ; see in Tvyx<i- 
 va> no. 2. a. 
 
 2. With the Indicative, implying that the 
 condition being true, that which results 
 
205 
 
 from it is to be regarded as real and cer 
 tain; Buttm. J 139. m. 22. Kiihner 5 339. 
 
 I. a. Winer $ 42. 2. a. 
 
 a) With the Indie, present, and followed 
 (or preceded) in the apodosis : a) By an 
 Indie, present; Matt. 19, 10 tl OVT&S etrriv 
 f) aiTia TOV av^pumov, . . . ov <rvp.<j)tp(i yav.r)- 
 trai. Acts 5, 39. Rom. 8, 25. 1 Cor. 9, 17. 
 So Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 13. /3) By an Impe- 
 rat. Matt. 4, 3 el vibs el TOV 3eov, fine KT\. 
 19, 17. 27, 42. John 7, 4. 1 Cor. 7, 9. So 
 Xen. Hi. 9. 1 1 . y). By an Indie, fat. Mark 
 
 II, 26 (I de Vfj.f1s OVK dcpi ere, ovSe 6 narfjp 
 dtyo-fi KT\. Acts 19, 39. Rom. 8, 11. Heb. 
 9, 13. (Xen. An. 7. 2. 14.) Or instead of 
 fut. Indie, is put the aorist Subj. after ov HTJ, 
 1 Cor. 8, 13 ; comp. Buttm. 139. m. 46. 
 8) By an Indie, aorist, Matt. 12, 26. 28. Gal. 
 2, 21 . e ) By an Indie, perf. including also 
 the idea of the present, Buttm. 5 113. 7; 
 1 Cor. 15, 13. 16 ei VfKpol OVK e yei poircu, ovSe 
 Xpicrros fyrjyfprat. Rom. 4, 14. 1 Cor. 9, 17. 
 f) By a Subj. aorist, implying exhortation. 
 Buttm. } 139. in. 3. 1 Cor. [5, 32 et vfKpol 
 OVK tyfipovrai, (pdyapev KO.\ Tricafifi/. Gal. 
 5,25. 
 
 b) With the Indie, future, and followed 
 in the apodosis : a) By an Indie, present, 
 1 Pet. 2, 20. Also by an Indie, perf. as pres. 
 Bnttm. 5 113. 7. James 2. 11 ei ov p.oi%ev- 
 cretr, (povfvo-fis 8e, ytyovas Trapa/Sdrr;? vop.ov. 
 ) By an Indie, fut. Matt. 26, 33 et Trdvrfs 
 (rKavb aXicr SrjaovTaj. tv crot, e yco ovSeVore 
 CTKai SaXto S rj o~op.ai . 
 
 c) With the Indie, perfect, followed in 
 the apodosis : a) By an Indie, present ; 
 1 Cor. 15, 19 ft fv TT] fay TavTy ^XTTtKore? 
 eo~fJifv (v Xp. p.6vov, e Xeeirorepoi jrdvratv 
 dvZp. fo-pfv. v. 14. 17. 2 Cor. 5, 16. Acts 
 25, 11. /3) By an Imperat. Acts 16, 15 
 (I KfKptKOTf p,e irurn]v . . . utivaTf . y) By 
 an Indie, fut. John 11, 12 ei KfKoifj.Tjrai, 
 o-wSjjtrerai. Rom. 6, 5. 8) By an Indie. 
 
 perfect, 2 Cor. 2, 5. 
 
 d) With the Indie, aorist, followed in the 
 apodosis : a) By an Indie, present ; Rom. 
 4, 2 fi A|3paa/x e epyuv e8iKcua>3>;, e^ei 
 Kavxnua. 15, 27. 1 John 4, 11. ) By an 
 Imperat. John 18, 23. Rom. 11, 17 sq. 
 Col. 3, 1. Philem. 18. y) By an Indie, 
 fat John 13, 32. 15, 20. Rom. 5, 10. 17. 
 8) By an Indie, aorist, Rom. 5, 15. 
 
 e) With the Indie, of the historic tenses, 
 followed in the apodosis by the Indie, of a 
 like tense with av. Here it is affirmed, that 
 something could have taken place under a 
 certain condition ; but did not, because the 
 condition was not fulfilled ; Kiihner } 339. 
 I. b. Bnttm. } 139. m. 28. Winer 43. 2. 
 
 See examples in full, embracing the imper 
 fect, aorist and pluperfect, under art. ilv I, 
 no. I. 1. a, b, c. In this construction civ is 
 sometimes omitted in the apodosis ; see ex- 
 jimples under av 1. c. lett. a. 
 
 f) Sometimes et takes the Indicative 
 where the Optative might be expected ; as 
 where a thing is uncertain though conceiv 
 ed of as possible ; comp. above in no. 1 . 
 Winer 42. c. ult. Herm. ad Vig. p. 903. 
 So JE\. V. H. 12. 40 fKr)pvx%rj TO) crrparo- 
 Tre Sw, e? TIJ f^fi v8a>p fK TOV Xodcnrov, Iva 
 8w /Saa-iXfl Triflv. Horn. II. 12. 59. In N. 
 T. only in the formula : el SWCITOV e cm (^/) 
 Mark 14, 35. Acts 20, 16 ; c. e cm impl. 
 Matt. 24, 24. Mark 13, 22. 
 
 g) In the urbanity of Attic discourse, ei 
 with the Indie, is spoken of things not 
 merely possible, but certain, and dependent 
 on no condition ; Buttm. 139. m. 60. Vi- 
 ger. p. 504. Matth. $ 617. f, mid. Thus : 
 a) After certain words signifying an emo 
 tion of mind, it is equivalent to OTI, tliat; 
 so after anivTov, Acts 26, 8 TL UTTKTTOV 
 KpivfTai Trap vfj.1v, et 6 3eos vfKpovs e yetpet, 
 IF (that) God should raise the dead ; so 
 Luc. D. Mort. 13. 1 7rapd8oov. After 
 3au/j.dfco, Mark 15, 44 e Sav/mcrei , et fj8r) 
 T&VT)K, IF (that) he were already dead 
 1 John 3, 13 ; so Plut. Mor. II. p. 20 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 13. After Se Xco, Luke 
 12, 49 Kal Tt SeXco, ei ^877 dvrj<p?irj ; comp. 
 Hdot. 1. 24. After p,aprvpop,at, Acts 
 26,22.23. After /xe ya (e cm ), it is some 
 thing great, 1 Cor. 9, 11. 2 Cor. 11, 15; 
 so JEschin. 485. 7 8fiv6v. /3) Also some 
 times equivalent to eVet, since, as, inas 
 much as; Matth. 617. f, ult. So with 
 Indie, present ; followed in the apodosis by 
 an Indie, present, John 13, 17 raura otSa- 
 re, /zaAcdptot eore edv KT\. 7, 23. 10, 35 KOI 
 (ei) ov 8vvaTai KT\. Matt. 6, 30 et Luke 12, 
 28? ; by an Imperat. present, Acts 4, 9 ei 
 ij/iety OTJfttpOf dvaKpiv6fj.f%a . . . yvaxrrov ecrro) 
 KT\. or aorist 1 Pet. 1, 17. With Indie. 
 aorist ; followed in the apodosis by an Indie, 
 present, John 13, 14. Rom. 6, 8. 15, 27. 
 Col. 2, 20. 1 John 4, 11 ; by a future, John 
 13,32. Rom. 11,21 ; (Xen. An. 7.1. 29;) 
 or by an aorist, 2 Cor. 5, 14. y) So ei 
 TIS, ft TI, if any one, with the Indie, is 
 used with a sort of emphasis for oorty, who 
 soever, whatsoever, etc. Buttm. 149. m. 5. 
 Matth. ^ 617. f, init. So with Indie, pre 
 sent ; followed in the apodosis by a present, 
 Luke 1 4, 26 ei TIS ep^erat irpus p.f /cat OVK 
 fjLicrd ...ov SuVarat fjiov ^a^^rij? etW. Rom 
 8, 9. 1 Tim. 3, 1. James 1, 23. Rev. 13, 
 10; by an Imperat. pres. Mark 11, 25. 
 
206 
 
 et, 
 
 1 Cor. 7, 36. 14, 37. 38. 16, 22. 2 Thess. 
 3, 10 ; by a future, 1 Cor. 3, 12. 17 ; or a 
 future for an Imperat. Mark 9, 35 ; by a 
 perf. 1 Cor. 8, 2. 3 ; or a perf. and pres. 
 1 Tim. 5, 8. With the Indie, future ; fol 
 lowed in the apodosis by a future, 1 Cor. 3, 
 14. 15 ; (Xen. An. 7. 2. 13 ;) by a present, 
 Rev. 13, 10 e i TIS tv paxaipa aVroKrei/ei KT\. 
 With the Indie, perfect, the apodosis having 
 a present, 2 Cor. 10, 7 ; or an aorist, 7, 14. 
 With the Indie, aorist, the apodosis having 
 also an aorist, Rev. 20, 15 KOI ei TIS oi>x 
 evpe 3;; . . . f(3\r)?}i) KT\. 
 
 h) With the Indie, before an aposiopesis, 
 i. e. where the apodosis is suppressed in 
 consequence of emotion, thus rendering the 
 protasis more emphatic ; see Buttm. 151. 
 V. 2. Winer 66. II. Herm. ad Vig. p. 
 868. a) Genr. Luke 19, 42 ei eyvws KM 
 crv . . . ra irpos flpfjvrjv crov, if thou hadst 
 known, even thou, the things belonging unto 
 thy peace ! suppl. far better had it been for 
 thee ! Acts 23, 9, the clause pr) 3eo^a^w- 
 p.fv in Text. rec. being probably a gloss. 
 Rom. 9, 22 ei 8e Se Xwi/ 6 3eo? eVet acr3ai 
 rfjv opyrjv KT\. if then God, suppl. what 
 then ? or as Engl. Vers. what if God, 
 etc. So Plato Conv. 220. d. 0) By He 
 braism, in oaths and affirmations, the apo 
 dosis or imprecation being omitted, el like 
 Heb. EX comes to imply a negative, not ; 
 6. g. Heb. 3, 11 w? a>p,o<ra eV rr) opyfj fj.ov 
 fl etaeXevcroiTat els TTJV KardTrava-iv fiov, i. e. 
 they shall not enter. 4, 3. 5. Mark 8, 12 
 dp-rjv Xeyw u/wi/ et 8o3)jcrerat, i. e. there 
 shall not be given. Heb. 3,11 quoted from 
 Sept. Ps. 95, 11 where Heb. ipisaias 
 EX 15383. Comp. Ps. 89, 36. Gen. 14, 23 . 
 Num. 14, 30 comp. v. 28. 1 Sam. 3, 14. 
 The full phrase is EX E Wbx i* fijusp-rra, 
 
 Sept. raSe Troir](rai p.oi 6 3eo? et KT\. 2 K. 
 6, 31 ; comp. 1 Sam. 3, 17. 2 Sam. 3, 35. 
 See Heb. Lex. Btf C. no. 1. c. Lehrg. p. 
 844. Winer $ 59. 8. n. 
 
 3. With the Subjunctive, rarely, both in 
 N. T. and early Greek writers, and only 
 where an action depends on something fu 
 ture, if, if so be, supposing that ; and with 
 a negative, unless, except, comp. ei ^ below 
 in no. III. 2. e ; see Winer 42. 2. n. a. 
 Matlh. ^525. b. Herm. ad Vig. p. 828, 
 001. Kiihner Ausf. Gr. 5 818. So Luke 9, 
 13 ei prjTi Trop. f]p,f1s dyopdfrapfv, where 
 others read dyopd.a-op.ft>. 1 Cor. 14, 5 ftrbs 
 fl pri o~ifpp.r)vfvr), others Steppji/evet. Phil. 
 3, 12 SICOKW be, fl KOI KaraXa/3a>, comp. ei 
 Kai below in no. HI. 2. d. Rev. 11,5 bis, ei 
 TIS SeXi;, others Se Xet. More frequent it- 
 later prose writers ; see Winer 1. c 
 
 II. As having an interrogative power, 
 whether, Lat. an; mostly after verbs or 
 words implying question, doubt, uncertain 
 ty : and put with the Optative and Indicative, 
 as in classic writers ; Buttm. $ 139. m. 60. 
 Kiihner $ 344. 5. i. Matth. } 526. Thus 
 
 1. Pr. and strictly in indirect questions, 
 depending on preceding words, as above. 
 
 a) With the Optative, comp. in no. I. 1. 
 Acts 17, 11 dvaKpivovTfs Tas ypafpds, fl e^ot 
 TO.VTO. OVTCCS. 25, 20. Also et apayf, if 
 perhaps, whether perhaps, Acts 17, 27 ; see 
 in apa no. 2. Plut. J. Caes. 14. Xen. An. 
 
 1. 8. 15. ib. 2. 1. 15. 
 
 b) With the Indicative, comp. in no. I. 2. 
 a) With Indie, present, after etVetv Matt. 
 26, 63; after eirepurav Mark 10, 2. Luke 
 23, 6; tSw/iev Matt. 27, 49. Mark 15, 36; 
 TJsr)(j)ig(tv Luke 14, 28 ; /SorXeuecrSat Luke 
 14, 31 ; OVK ofSa John 9, 25 ; Kpiveiv Acts 
 4, 19; 7rw3ai/ea-3at Acts 10, 18 ; aKotWSiai 
 Acts 19, 2 ; Trtipdfiv 2 Cor. 13, 5 ;. yva>vai 
 8oKip.r]v 2 Cor. 2, 9. etc. So Luc. D. Mort. 
 20. 3. Xen. Hi. 1. 7. 0) With Indie, fu 
 ture, Mark 3, 2 Traper^pow avrov et 3epa- 
 Treuo-ei. 1 Cor. 7, 16 rt otSay. et KT\. ex 
 pressing a possible hope, as Sept. for simpl. 
 S 1 ]^ in 2 Sam. 12, 22. Joel 2, 14. Jonah 
 3, 9. Genr. Xen. An. 1. 3. 5 et p.eV 8fj SiVata 
 iroiTjcro), OVK otSa. y) With Indie, aorist, 
 Mark 15, 44 e Tr^pcor^crej avrov, et TroXat 
 dK&avf. Acts 5, 8. 1 Cor. 1,16. 8) Also 
 et apa if perhaps, whether perhaps, see in 
 apa no. 2 : so with Indie, future, Mark 1 1 , 
 13 rj\%ev, d apa fvpfjo-ei n. Acts 8, 22. So 
 c. pres. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 2 ; comp. An. 3. 
 
 2. 22. 
 
 2. Like Heb EX, used in a direct ques 
 tion, Lat. num, ne, implying some doubt or 
 uncertainty in the mind of the interrogator, 
 and not easily expressed in English. It 
 is doubtful whether et is thus employed 
 by any classic writer ; but it would seem to 
 have become current in this sense in the 
 later language of common life, the preced 
 ing words of inquiry or doubt (see above) 
 being suppressed ; and is frequent in the 
 usage of the LXX ; see Winer 61. 2. 
 Thus : a) With the Indie, present ; Matt. 
 12, 10 Xe yoires et eecm TOLS a-dftfiacn 3e- 
 pairfvftv. 19, 3. Luke 13, 23 e^e TIS dvTcp 
 Kitpie, fl oXt -yot ol o-a>^6fj.fvoi. 14, 3. Acts 1, 
 6. 21, 37. 22, 25. Sept for &X i K. 1, 27. 
 Job 6, 6; n 1 K. 13, 14. Ruth 1, 19. Dan. 
 2, 26. 3, 14. So Tob. 5, 5. b) With the 
 Indie, future ; Luke 22, 49 fiTrov avrw- KV- 
 pte, et TraTa^ojLtei/ ev /la^at pa. Sept. for EX 
 Gen. 17, 17. Job 6, 5 ; n Gen. 17, 17. Job 
 6, 6. c) With the Indie, aorist ; Acts 19 
 
207 
 
 2 fine irpbs avrovs fl irvevpa ayiov t\d~ 
 
 fTf. 
 
 HI. With other Particles ; where, for the 
 most part, each retains its own separate 
 force and signification ; as Ston-ep ft, on , 
 ft yap., tl p.fv. fl ovv, etc. Only the following 
 require to be noted. 
 
 1. Preceded by another particle : a) 
 ical tl, and if, even if, e. g. a) Where 
 jcai is merely copulative, and fl with the 
 Indie, implies a condition, and if, also if, 
 Matt. 5, 30. 11, 14. 12, 26. 27. 18, 9. 
 Luke 6, 32. 16, 12. 19, 8. al. Also Kai eT 
 TIS, and if any, Rom. 13, 9. Phil. 3, 15. 4, 
 8. Rev. 11,5; also, and whosoever, 1 Tim. 
 
 1, 10. Rev. 14, 11 ; see above in no. I. 2. 
 g. y. /3) Spec, even if, though, where <ai 
 refers to the condition, which it leaves un 
 certain ; Kiihner \ 340. 7. Herm. ad Vig. 
 829 sq. So with Indie, future, Mark 14, 29 
 Kai f I Trdvres cncai SaXio-Sjjcroi rat, dXX owe 
 eya>. Indie, pres. 1 Pet. 3, 1. Also KOI yap 
 tl 2 Cor. 13, 4. Strengthened by jrep, e. g. 
 Kal yap f infp, for though indeed, 1 Cor. 8, 5. 
 
 b) &s fl or o- ei, as if, see in its order. 
 
 2. Followed by another particle : a) 
 ft apa, see above in no. II. 1. b. 8; also in 
 apa no. 2. 
 
 b) e tye, see in ye no. 2. c. 
 
 e) et 8t, where 8e has its usual adversa 
 tive or continuative power, but if, and if, 
 Matt. 12, 7. Luke 11, 19. John 10, 38. al. 
 saep. It is also strengthened by KOI, i. e. 
 ft 8 e Kai, and if also, comp. in 8e no. 2. d ; 
 Luke 11, 18. 1 Cor. 4, 7. 2 Cor. 4, 3. 5, 
 16. 11, 6. non al. With a negat. tl 8e 
 ^r], but if not, or else, always standing ellip- 
 tically, Winer 66. 1. n. pen. a) Pr. only 
 after an affirmative clause, of which it then 
 expresses the contrary or negative ; e. g. 
 John 14, 2 tv TTJ ol<ia TOV Ttarpos p.ov p.oval 
 TToXXat flaw et 8e p.r], elnov ay vp.lv. V. 1 1 
 
 TTKTTfVO-fTf fJLOl fl 8f (J.T) KT\. ReV. 2, 5. 16. 
 
 non al. Sept. Gen. 24, 49. 30, 1. al. So 
 Xen. Hell. 1. 4. 4. CEc. 15. 2. /3) Some 
 times also after a negative clause, of which 
 it then necessarily expresses the contrary 
 and therefore affirms, if otherwise, else; 
 Mark 2, 21 ov8fls (TripXwpa eVtppaTrret enl 
 i/urrto) TraXato) ei 8t p.r), tupei KT\. v. 22. 
 non al. Comp. Buttm. J 151. IV. 7. Kiihner 
 $ 340. 4. Matth. $ 617. b. So Hdot. 6. 56. 
 Thuc. 2. 5. Xen. An. 7. 1. 8. y) Strength 
 ened by ye, i. e. et 8e P.TJ yf, see in ye no. 
 
 2. d. 
 
 d) fl Kai, if also, if even, e. g. a) 
 Where ft marks condition, and Kai refers to 
 the subsequent clause, each retaining its 
 own seoarate power, if also ; Herm. ad 
 
 Vig. p. 829 sq. So with Indie, present, 1 Cor. 
 7, 21. 2 Cor. 11, 15, comp. in no. I. 2. g. a. 
 With the Opt. 1 Pet. 3, 14, see above in no. 
 I. 1. With the Subjunct. Phil. 3, 12, comp. 
 above in no. I. 3. /3) Spec. Where Kai 
 refers to the condition, if even, i. e. though, 
 although, implying the reality and actual ful 
 filment of the supposition ; thus differing 
 from Kai fl, which leaves it uncertain ; see 
 above in no. 1. a. /3. Herm. ad Vig. p. 829 sq. 
 Buttm. 149. m. 4. Only with the Indie, e. g, 
 present, Luke 18,4 ei Kai TOV 2e6v ov (po- 
 ftoSpm. 2 Cor. 4, 16. 12, 11. 15. Phil. 2, 
 17. Col. 2, 5. Heb. 6, 9 ; imperf. 2 Cor. 7, 
 8 ; future, Matt. 26, 33 Rec. Luke 11, 8 ; 
 aorist, 2 Cor. 7, 8 bis. 12. non al. So Lu- 
 cian. D. Mort. 9. 1. Xen. An. 6. 6. 27. 
 
 e) ei p.T], if not, i. e. unless, except, only, 
 where p.rj refers to the whole clause, and 
 then fl P.TJ expresses an exception to a pre 
 ceding proposition or clause ; thus differing 
 from et ov, where ov refers only to a parti 
 cular word or part of a clause ; see ei ov 
 in lett. f. Winer 5 59. 6. Buttm. $ 148. 2. b. 
 a) Very rarely after an affirmative clause ; 
 C. Indie. Acts 26, 32 dn-oXeXvcrSai e Swaro 
 6 avSp. OVTOS, fl P.TI fTTfKfK\r]TO Kaiarapa. 
 Pleon. with eVro s, 1 Cor. 15, 2 8t ov <ra>- 
 ff<r3e . . . fKTos fl p.f] tlKJ) fmcrrfvcraTf. [3) 
 Usually put after a negative clause, or an 
 interrogative, implying a negative ; so with 
 Indie. Matt. 24, 22 Kai fl fj.f] eKoXo/S^uSjyaav 
 at 17/xepat fKflvai. OVK av eVwSr; Tracra crdp. 
 Mark. 6, 5. 13, 20. John 9, 33 et p) r,v OV 
 TOS Trapa 3eov, OVK e Swaro woteti/ ov8fv. 15, 
 22. 19, 11. Rom. 9, 29. Gal. 1, 7 6 OVK 
 f(rrij> aXXo, et [JLTJ rives flcriv KT\. only there 
 are certain, etc. With on c. Indie, after an 
 interrog. 2 Cor. 12, 13. Eph. 4, 9. With 
 a Subjunct. and pleon. euros, 1 Cor. 14, 
 5, comp. in no. I. 3 ; also with Iva. c. Subj. 
 John 10, 10 ; Srav Mark 9, 9. With an 
 Infin. c. ace. Matt. 5, 13 et? ov^ev to-^vet 
 en, ft p.T) pXnZrivai e|<u. Acts 21, 25. So 
 Xen. Hell. 2. 2. 10. Oftener followed by a 
 noun simply, . sometimes in construction, 
 unless, except ; Matt. 1 1 , 27 ovoel s eVtyi>d>- 
 ovcft rov vloi>, et p.fj 6 Trarrjp. 12, 24 OVTOS 
 OVK eV/3dXXet TO. 8aip,6vta, fl ftij eV TU> BeeX- 
 (fpov\. v. 39. 13, 57. 17, 21. Mark 2, 7. 
 26. 5, 37. 8, 14. Luke 4, 26. 27. 10, 22. 
 John 3, 13. 6, 22. Rom. 11, 15. 1 Cor. 1, 
 14. 2,2. 2 Cor. 12,5. Gal. 1, 19. Heb. 
 3, 18. Rev. 9, 4. 21, 27. al. saep. (Xen. An. 2. 
 1. 12.) Difficult is 1 Cor. 7, 17 et ^ eVd- 
 crrw o)f e p.e pio-ei 6 Kvpios . . . OVTU> TTfpnra- 
 TftVoo, where the phrase doTa) . . . TreptTra- 
 reiTo) may be taken together as a noun, 
 and then et p.r) may best be referred back to 
 
208 
 
 ov SeSovAcorat KT\. in v. 15 ; others before 
 ft P.T] supply another ri oloas or ovotv oI8as. 
 Pleon. with p.6vos or povov added ; Matt. 12, 
 4 ft JJ.TI TOLS lepevcri povois. 17, 8. 21, 19 ei 
 P.TJ (pvXXa /J.OVQV. 24, 36. Mark 6, 8. Luke 
 5, 21. 6,4. Acts 11, 19. Phil. 4, 15. (Hdot. 
 1. 200.) So fKTos fl M 1 Tim. 5, 19, see 
 in fKTos no. 2. y) Also strengthened el 
 P.TI TI, unless perhaps, with Indie. 1 Cor. 7, 5. 
 2 Cor. 13, 5 ; with Subj. Luke 9, 13 ; see 
 HTJTI in its order. 8) tl Be p-rj, see above 
 in el 6V, lett. c. 
 
 f) el ov, if not, where each particle 
 retains its own separate power, and ov is 
 referred to some particular word or part of 
 the clause ; hence el ov never implies an 
 exception, nor is rendered unless, and it 
 thus differs from d p.r), see above in letter 
 e, init. Winer 59. 6. Buttm. $ 148. 2. 
 a, b. and marg. Herm. ad Vig. p. 831. 
 Matth. 1 608. Thus : a) Where ov is so 
 referred to a word or construction as to 
 give it the contrary sense ; comp. Buttm. 
 
 1. c. n. 2, 3. So c. Indie. Matt. 26, 42 fl ov 
 Swarm, i:e. if it be impossible. Luke 12, 
 26. 16, 11. 12. 31. Rom. 8, 9 Se TIS... 
 OVK e xei, i.e. is without. 1 Cor. 7, 9. 11, 6. 
 16, 22. 2 Thess. 3, 10. 14. 1 Tim. 3, 5. 
 James 2, 11. 2 John 10. So Sext. Empir. 
 adv. Mathem. 2.111 el p.ev ATy/M/iara nva e^ei 
 ...el Se OVK f xfi- ib. 9. 176. /3) Where 
 the negative is direct and emphatic, always 
 with the Indicative; genr. John 1, 25. 10, 
 37. 1 Cor. 15, 13. 14. 16. 17. 32. Heb. 12, 
 25. Rev. 20, 15.; so espec. in antith. where 
 ei ov denies what another clause affirms, 
 Mark 11, 26 comp. v. 25. Luke 11, 8 comp. 
 v. 7. John 5, 47 comp. v. 46. 1 Cor. 9, 2. 
 So Sept. Judg. 9, 20. Judith 5, 21. Sext. 
 Empir. adv. Math. 12. 5 ei pep aycftov ICTTIV 
 . . . fl 8e OVK f o-Tiv ayaSoV. M. Antonin. 11. 
 18. 3. 
 
 %) e lTTfp, if indeed, if so be, assuming 
 the supposition as true, whether justly or 
 not; Herm. ad Viger. 831. With the 
 Indie, e. g. a) Genr. Rom. 8, 9 eiWp 
 Trvevpa SeoC oiKei ev v/uv. v. 17. 1 Cor. 15, 
 15. 1 Pet. 2, 3. So Xen. An. 1. 7. 9. /3) 
 Spec, since, seeing that, the supposition be 
 ing taken for granted ; comp. eiye in ye no. 
 
 2. C. /3. 2 Thess. 1,6 eiVep SIKCUOV Trapa 
 Sew. y) Ko.1 f lKfp, though indeed, 1 Cor. 
 8, 5 ; see above in KOI el, no. III. 1. a. /3. 
 
 h) f lTrtos, if by any means, if possibly ; 
 with the Opt. Acts 27, 12 ; comp. above in 
 no. I. 1. Matth. $ 526. So Sept. 2 Sam. 16, 
 12. Xen. An. 2. 5. 2. With Indie, fut. Rom. 
 1, 10. 11, 14. Phil. 3, 11. non. al. So Sept. 
 i K. 19, 4. 1 Mace. 4, 10. 
 
 i) eire. ..etre, whether ... whether ; whe 
 ther. ..or; Viger. p. 515. Matth. 5 617. 5 fin. 
 a) In the enumeration of particulars ; fol 
 lowed by a verb, e. g. in Indie. 1 Cor. 12, 
 26. 2 Cor. 1,6. 5, 13. (Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 
 28.) Subjunct. 1 Thess. 5, 10 ; comp. above 
 in I. 3. Also without any verb, Rom. 12, 
 6-8. 1 Cor. 3,22. 8,5. 13,8. 15,11. 1 Pet. 
 2, 14. al. /3) As expressing doubt, uncer 
 tainty, 2 Cor. 12, 2. 3. Comp. Herm. ad 
 Vig. p. 831. So Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 13. Thuc. 
 7.1. + 
 
 eto09j eos, ovs, TO, (obs. etSeo,) pr. what 
 is seen, what appears, i. e. 
 
 1. appearance, shape, form; Luke 3, 22 
 0-cap.ariKia et Set. 9, 29. John 5, 37. 2 Cor. 
 
 5, 7 Sta 7rlo-Tfa>s yap TreptTraroC/iei/, ov Sia 
 e idovs, i. e. not according to what is seen. 
 Sept. for fijoa Gen. 41, 2 sq. ixh 1 Sam. 
 25, 3. Hdiari. 5. 5. 4. Xen. Cyr" 1. 2. 1. 
 
 2. form, manner, kind; 1 Thess. 5, 22 
 OTTO iravrbs e idovs 7rovr>pov. Sept. fortinBilJa 
 Jer. 15, 3. Jos. Ant. 10. 3. 1 irav eloos iro- 
 vr)pias. Pol. 6. 10. 2. Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 6. 
 
 etoo), pr. to see, to perceive by the senses, 
 corresp. to Heb. 3*1* , Lat. video ; wholly 
 obsol. in the Pres. Act. which is supplied 
 by 6pd(o. The tenses from e ida form two 
 families, one taking exclusively the signif. 
 to see ; the other, to know, like S 1 ^ > see 
 Passow sub v. Buttm. 109. III. 113. n. 
 
 10. 51148o>. 
 
 I. To see, viz. aor. 2 eiSov, Opt. i Soi/u, 
 Subjunct. i Sco, Infin. I Setf, Part. Iduv. For 
 Imperat. Att. I8e Rom. 11, 22. Gal. 5, 2, 
 later form 1 Se Matt. 25, 20. Mark 3, 34. 
 John 1, 29, see Winer { 6. 1. a. Buttm. 
 5 103. I. 4. c. All these forms are used as 
 the aorist of 6pau>, (Buttm. \ 1 14 ei Sco, 6pa<a,) 
 in the signif. I saw ; implying not the mere 
 act of seeing, but the actual perception of 
 some object, and thus differing from /3Ae- 
 TTfiv ; comp. Tittm. Lex. Syn. N. T. p. 1 14, 
 116. 
 
 1. Pr. to see, with ace. of person or thing : 
 Matt. 2, 2 ei So/iez/ yap avrov TOV daWpa. 5, 
 1 locov fie TOVS o^Aovr. 21, 19. Mark 9, 9. 
 
 11, 13. 20. John 1, 48. 4, 48. Acts 8, 39. 
 Heb. 3, 9. Rev. 1, 2. al. sa?p. Sept. for JiiO 
 Gen. 9, 23. Ex. 39, 44. (Hdian. 1. 15.7. 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 47. An. 2. 3. 15.) So ac- 
 cus. with particip. Matt. 3, 7 i 8o>i/ 8e ?roA- 
 Aois fpxopevovs. 8, 14. 24, 15. Mark 6,33. 
 Luke 5, 2 KCU eie Svo vrAota eWeura. 12, 
 54. al. Also with an adj. ovra being implied, 
 Matt. 25, 38. 39. al. Comp. Buttm. { 144. 
 
 6. b. (Hdian. 4. 9. 7. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 18.) 
 So by Hebr. with particip. of the same verb 
 
209 
 
 by way of emphasis, 18 uv tlbov, Acts 7 
 34, quoted from Ex. 3, 7 where Sept. for 
 Wan nio ; see in /3XrVc no. 2. a. 8. (Luc. 
 D. Marin. 4. 3 fin. I8o>v etSoi/.) With on c. 
 Indie. Mark 9, 25. John 6, 22. Rev. 12, 13. 
 Absol. Matt. 9, 8. Luke 2, 17. Acts 3, 12. 
 al. Hence ol l86vTfs, those seeing, they 
 lhat saw, the spectators, Mark 5, 16. Luke 
 8, 36. Before an indirect question, Matt. 
 27, 49 tiofap-ev, tl ep\frai KT\. Mark 5, 14. 
 Gal. 6, 1 1. al. So Xen. Conv. 2. 15. Also 
 in various modified senses : a) to behold, 
 to look upon, to contemplate, Matt. 9, 36. 28, 
 6. Mark 8, 33. Luke 24, 39. John 20, 27. 
 al. saep. Sept. for WJin Num. 12,8. (So 
 Philostr. Vit. Sophist. 2. 32. Xen. An. 2. 1. 
 9.) Hence Imper. i8e, behold, lo, as a 
 particle ; see in its order. b) to see, in 
 order to know, to look at or into, to examine, 
 Mark 6, 38. 12,15. Luke 8, 35. 14, 18. John 
 
 1, 40. 47. Also c. irtpi TWOS Acts 15, 6. 
 So Wisd. 2, 17, parall. ireipdfa. c) to see 
 face to face, lo see and talk with, to see and 
 know, i. e. to have personal acquaintance 
 and intercourse with ; Luke 8, 20. 9, 9. 
 John 12,21. Acts 16, 40. Rom. 1,11. 1 Cor. 
 16, 7. Gal. 1,19. Phil. 1, 27. 2, 28. al. In a 
 like sense, Ibelv TO irpoa-umov TWOS, 1 Thess. 
 
 2, 17. 3, 10. Also of a city, Pu^nv Acts 
 19, 21. So Luc. D. Deor. 9. 1. Xen. An. 
 2. 4. 1 5. d) to see take place, to behold in 
 person, to lice to see; Matt. 13, 17. 24, 33. 
 Mark 2, 12. Also ISelv TTJV Tj/j.epav TIVOS, 
 to see one s day, to witness the events of his 
 life and times, etc. Luke 17, 22. John 8, 56. 
 So Pol. 10. 4. 7. Soph. Trach. 140 ; comp. 
 video Hor. Od. 1. 2. 12. 
 
 2. Trop. of the mind, to perceive by the 
 senses, to be aware of, to remark ; Matt. 9, 
 2 I8uv TTJV irioTtv avT<av. V. 4 Iftuv TOS fv- 
 Sujuijcrfi? aiiTa>v. Luke 17, 15. John 7, 52. 
 Rom. 1 1 , 22. With 6ri Matt. 2, 1 6. 27, 24. 
 Mark 12, 34. Acts 12, 3. 16, 19. Gal. 2,7. 
 14. al, Sept. and HiJ-n Eccl. 2, 12. 13 ; 3H? 
 Josh. 8, 14. 
 
 3. By Hebr. to see, i. e. to experience, viz. 
 either good, to enjoy; or evil, to suffer ; c. 
 accus. e. g. 3ai/aroi/ Luke 2, 26. Heb. 11, 
 5 ; Heb. ***} Sept. oVro/iai, Ps. 89, 49; 8ta- 
 (pZopdv Acts 2, 27. 31. 13, 35 sq. Sept. 
 and "SO p s . 16, 10 ; TrevZos Rev. 18, 7; 
 fjjj.(pas dyaSds 1 Pet. 3, 10 ; so Sept. and 
 "IXT Ps. 34, 12. Also io f tv TJ]V pa<ri\dav TOV 
 SfoC, i. e. to see and enjoy the privileges of 
 the divine kingdom, John 3, 3 ; comp. Sept. 
 and nsn Ps. 27, 13. Ecc. 6, 6. So Fabr. 
 Ood. Ps. V. T. I. p. 607 d(ppo(rvyr]v OVK 
 ti8ov. -f- 
 
 14 
 
 II. To know, viz. perf. 2 o!8a, Subjunct. 
 etfiui, Infin. ddtvai, Particip. ei 5o>y, pluperf. 
 fiSftv, fut. fldfjo-w Heb. 8, 1 1 ; see Buttm 
 } 109. III. The plur. forms, oiSa/xei/ John 
 9, 20 sq. oiSare 1 Cor. 9, 13, oiSaeri Luke 
 1 1 , 44, belong to the later Greek, instead of 
 the earlier ta/xev, i<rre Heb. 12, 17, tcrao-i 
 Acts 26, 4; see Winer } 15 eifiaj. Buttm. 
 
 1. c. no. 2, 4, 5. Matth. } 231. The signif. 
 of olda is pr. to have seen, perceived, appre 
 hended ; hence it takes the present sense to 
 know, and the pluperf. becomes an imper 
 fect; Buttm. 1. c. and { 113. n. 10. 
 
 1. Pr. and genr. to know, to have know 
 ledge of, to be acquainted with, c. accus. e. g. 
 spoken of things, Matt. 25, 13 OVK. o"8arf 
 TT)v fjpfpav. Mark 10, 19. Luke 18, 20. 
 John 4, 22. Rom. 7, 7. 13, 11. Jude 5. 10. 
 al. saep. Sept. and y^ Ex. 3, 8. Job. 8, 9. 
 (Hdian. 8. 4. 6. Xen/ (Ec. 20. 14 y^v 6e 
 irdvrfs oiSeurt.) In attract. 1 Cor. 16, 15 
 oi Sare TTJV oiKiav 2re$ai/a, ort KT\. I Thess. 
 
 2, 1 ; see Buttm. { 151. I. 6. Xen. Mem. 4. 
 2. 36 ult Of persons, Matt. 25, 12. Mark 
 1, 34. John 6, 42. Acts 7, 18. Heb. 10, 30. 
 al. 1 Pet. 1,8 ov OVK fldvTes, sc. by sicrht, 
 personally. So Heb. 5?^ Gen. 29, 5, Sept. 
 yuxao-KO). (Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 26. Conv. 4. 
 35.) So c. ace. with an adj. the particip. 
 ovra being implied, Mark 6, 20 eldats avrbv 
 avdpa SIKOIOV. Buttm. J 144. n. 7. (Hdian. 3. 
 12. 2. Xen. An. 1. 10. 16.) In attract. Mark 
 1, 24 olda o-e rls d Luke 13, 25. John 7, 27; 
 see Buttm. { 151. 1. 6. Sept. and sn? 2 Sam. 
 17, 8. So Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 20. With ace. 
 and infin. Luke 4, 41. 1 Pet. 5, 9 ; or 
 6Vi with the Indie, instead of accus. and 
 .infin. Matt. 15, 12. Mark 12, 14. Luke 8, 53. 
 Acts 3, 17. al. saep. With irtpi TIVOS, Matt. 
 24, 36. Mark 13, 32. Absol. Luke 11, 44. 
 2 Cor. 11, 11. Before an indirect question, 
 with the Indie. Matt. 24, 43 jji8 6 oiVo- 
 dfo-no-rrjs, TToia <pv\aKTJ 6 KXeVn/y ep^erat. 
 Mark 13, 35. Luke 12, 39. 1 Thess. 4, 2. 
 2 Thess. 3, 7. Col. 4, 6. al. With Subjunct. 
 Mark 9, 6 OVK fj8fi T I XoX^oT;. 
 
 2. to perceive, lo be aware of, to under 
 stand; c. accus. of thing, e. g. ray fiftvp.r)- 
 <Tis Matt. 12, 25 ; inroKpia-iv avTiov Mark 
 12, 15 ; 8iavor][j.aTa Luke 11, 17 ; rt]t>napa- 
 $o\l]v Mark 4, 13. With ort c. Indie. Mark 
 2, 10. Luke 5, 24. John 6, 61. 1 John 5, 
 13 ; TTO>S c. Indie. 1 Tim. 3, 15. Before an 
 indirect question, Eph. 1, 18 els TO tldtvcu 
 
 as, T IS fcrnv TJ f\nis KT\. 
 
 3. Spec, to know how, i. e. to be able, etc. 
 c. infin. Matt. 7, 11. Luke 12, 56. Phil. 4, 
 12. 1 Thess. 4, 4. 1 Tim. 3, 5. James 4, 
 17. 2 Pet. 2, 9. With infin. impl. Matt. 27, 
 
210 
 
 et/u 
 
 65. Hdian. 3. 4. 19 ; comp. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 6.46. 
 
 4. By Hebr. with the idea of volition, to 
 know and approve, e. g. a) Of men, to 
 care for, to take an interest in ; 1 Thess. 
 5, 12 (I8evai TOVS KoiritoVTas ev vp.1v. So 
 Sept. and 3H? Gen. 39, 6. Prov. 27, 23. 
 Comp. in yivd>cno no. 1. a. /3. b) Of 
 God, to know God, to acknowledge and 
 adore God, Gal. 4, 8. 1 Thess. 4, 5. 
 2 Thess. 1, 8. Tit. 1, 16. Heb. 8, 11. So 
 Sept. and S TJ Jer. 31, 34. 1 Sam. 2, 12. 
 Job. 18,21. -f 
 
 el8(i)\eiov, ov, TO, (eiSwAov,) an idol- 
 temple, fane, 1 Cor. 8, 10. 1 Mace. 1, 47. 
 10, 83. 
 
 el8to\6^VTOV, ov, TO, (f i8a>\ov, 3vo),) 
 idol-sacrifice, any thing sacrificed to idols, 
 i. e. in N. T. the flesh of victims offered to 
 idols, which remained over and was eaten or 
 sold ; see in oXt<ryi?/*a. Acts 15, 29. 21, 25. 
 1 Cor. 8, 1. 4. 7. 10. 10, 19. 28. Rev. 2, 
 14. 20. 4 Mace. 5, 1. Clem. Rom. Homil. 
 7. 8. 
 
 et SwXoXarpeta, as, f], (tftaXatr, Xa- 
 rpet a,) idol-worship, idolatry, pr. and genr. 
 Gal. 5, 20 ; also of partaking of things of 
 fered to idols, TO. eta)Xo3vra q. V. 1 Cor. 10, 
 1 4 ; and of the vices usually connected with 
 idolatry, 1 Pet. 4, 3. Comp. Test. XII Patr. 
 p. 615 do-eXydat, yor/Tftai, KOI eificoAoAa- 
 Tpelai. Just. Mart. Dial. c. Tryph. p. 322. 
 Trop. of covetousness, Col. 3, 5. 
 
 eta>XoXaT/37?9, ov, o. (eiSooXoi , Xdrpts.) 
 an idol-worshipper, idolater, genr. 1 Cor. 
 5,10. 6,9. Rev. 21,8. 22,15. Also of one 
 who partakes of things offered to idols, TO. 
 eWcoXoStrra q. v. 1 Cor. 5, 11. 10, 7. Trop. 
 of a covetous person, Eph. 5, 5 ; comp. Col. 
 3,5. 
 
 etSo)Xoy, ov, TO, (el8os,) an image, spec 
 tre, shade, Horn. II. 5. 449. Luc. D. Mort 16. 
 1 ; an image, figure, uEschin. 20. 28. Xen. 
 Mem. 1.4.4. In N. T. 
 
 1. an idol, idol-image, Acts 7,41. 1 Cor. 
 12, 2. Rev. 9, 20. Sept. for ^OB 2 Chr. 
 33, 22. Is. 30, 22. Pol. 31. 3. 13. 
 
 2. Meton. an idol god, a heathen deity, 
 
 1 Cor. 8, 4. 7. 10, 19. Sept. plur. for S^K 
 Num. 25, 2. 2 K. 17, 33; S fyh 2 K. 17, 
 12. Hence Plur. TO. ei ScoXa, idols, for idol- 
 worship, idolatry, Acts 15, 20. Rom. 2, 22. 
 
 2 Cor. G, 16. 1 Thess. 1,9. 1 John 5, 21. 
 
 ei/a/, adv. (etKatos,) without plan or pur 
 pose, i. e. 
 
 1. inconsiderately, idly, without cause, 
 Matt. 5, 22. Col. 2, 18. Pol. 1. 52. 2. Xen. 
 Ag. 2. 7. 
 
 2. to no purpose, in vain, Rom. 13, 4. 
 
 1 Cor. 15, 2. Gal. 3, 4. 4, 11. Arr. Epict. 
 
 I. 4. 21. Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 12. 
 
 et/cocri, 01, at, Ta, indec. card. num. 
 twenty, Luke 14, 31. Acts 27, 28. + 
 
 I. eiKO), f. co, to yield, to give place, to 
 give way, c. dat. Gal. 2, 5. Wisd. 18, 25. 
 Pol. 6. 58. 8. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 8. 
 
 II. etKO), obsol. whence perf. 2 eota 
 with pres. signif. to be like, c. dat. James 1, 
 6. 23. See Buttm. $ 114 etKoo. 84. n. 6. 
 Kiihn. 230. Sept. Job 6, 25. Hdian. 2. 2. 
 5. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 7 bis. 
 
 MC(i)V, ovos, rj, (etfcw, ebtKa,) likeness, i. e. 
 
 1. a likeness, image, figure, Matt, 22, 20. 
 Mark 12, 16. Luke 20,24. Rom. 1, 23. 
 Sept. for C&3 Ez. 23, 14. So Wisd. 14, 15. 
 17. Pol. 6/53. 4. Xen. Ag. 11. 7. Spec. 
 an idol-image, statue, Rev. 13, 14. 15 ter. 
 14, 9. 11. 15, 2. 16, 2. 19,20. 20,4. 
 Sept. for ^C? Deut. 4, 16 ; i&B Is. 40, 18. 
 20. So Plato Legg. 931. a. 
 
 2. an image, copy, representation, 1 Cor. 
 
 II. 7. Of Christ as the image of God, 2 
 Cor. 4, 4 et Col. 1,15 eiKaiv TOV 3eoi), comp. 
 Heb. 1, 3. (Philo de Monarch. 2. 5. p. 823. 
 b, Xoyos Se ecrnv fl*.u>v 3eoC.) Heb. 10, 1 TJ 
 ai>TTj tiKwv T>V Trpay/idro)! , i. e. the real and 
 perfect representation, opp. to ^ o-*aa. 
 Wisd. 2, 23. 7, 26. Diog. Laert. 6. 51. Luc. 
 Imag. 28. 
 
 3. Abstr. likeness to any one, resemblance, 
 similitude, Rom. 8, 29. 1 Cor. 15, 49 bis. 
 
 2 Cor. 3, 18. Col. 3, 10. Sept. for MB n Gen. 
 5, 1; As Gen. 1, 26. 27. 9, 6. Ecclus. 
 17, 3. Hdian. 5. 2. 5. 
 
 elXi/fpiveia, as, rj, (eiAucpti/qs,) clearness, 
 pureness. Theophr. Fragm. 20. 14. InN. T. 
 trop. pureness, sincerity, 1 Cor. 5, 8. 2 Cor. 
 1, 12. 2, 17. 
 
 el\.lKplvrj$, eos, ovs, 6, 17, adj. (etAi?, eAr;, 
 Kpivu,) pr. judged of in sun-light ; hence 
 cZear, manifest, Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 3 fl\iicpivr)s 
 TIS av ftr) dSiKt a 77 d^aptcrria. Also pure, 
 unmixed, Wisd. 7, 25. Plato. Conv. 211. e. 
 In N. T. trop. pure, sincere, Phil. 1, 10. 
 2 Pet. 3, 1. So Pol. 4. 84. 7 <pi\ta. Pint. 
 de Virtut. mor. 5 vovs- 
 
 eiklcrcra), f. /<>, (Ion. and poet, for eXtcr- 
 o-o),) to roll up or together, as a scroll ; Pass. 
 Rev. 6, 14. Horn. II. 22. 95. Anth. Gr. 
 
 III. p. 79 ; comp. Hdot. 2. 38. 
 
 et/u, f. f(Top.ai, (obs. eta,) impf. qv, Impe- 
 rat. i o-St Matt. 2, 1 3. al. 3 pers. eo-rw Matt. 5, 
 37. al. Buttm. 108. IV. Less usual forms 
 are: Imperf. 2 pers. T)S Matt. 25, 21. 23, 
 instead of the more usual ^o-3a Matt. 26, 69. 
 
211 
 
 ti/uil 
 
 Mark 14, 67; see Buttm. 5 108. IV. 1, 
 marg. Winer 5 14. 2. c. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
 149. Imperf. rj^r, v Matt. 23, 30. Gal. 1, 
 10. 22 ; Luc. D. Marin. 2. 2. Xen. Cyr. 6. 
 1.9; see Buttm. 108. IV. 2. Winer $ 14. 
 2, b. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 152. Imperat. ^ra 
 1 Cor. 16, 22. James 5, 12. Plat. Rep. 361. 
 c ; see Buttm. $ 108. IV. 1, marg. Winer 
 } 14. 2. a. So 2 pers. plur. ^re for evre 
 1 Cor. 7, 5, where Text. rec. o-wepxeo-%e . 
 For the persons of the present as enclitic, 
 see Buttm. $ 108. IV. 3 The verb >t is 
 the usual verb of existence, to be ; and also 
 the usual logical copula, connecting subject 
 and predicate ; Buttm. j 129. init. 
 
 I. As the verb of existence, to be, to exist, 
 to have existence. 
 
 1. Pr. and genr. a) In the metaphy 
 sical sense, John 1,1 ev dpxfj *\v 6 \6yos. 
 8, 50. 58. Mark 12, 32. Acts 19, 2. Heb. 
 
 11, 6. al. Of things, John 17, 5. 2 Pet. 3, 
 
 5. Rev. 4, 1 1 . For &v, ra ovra, see below 
 in no. 4. (Philo de Charit. p. 709 yevvrjo-is 6Y 
 rjs TO /J.TI ov ayeTai els TO flvai. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 1. 14. ib. 2. 2. 3 ovs [Tral&ay] ot yovels 
 fK p.ev OVK ovTtav fTToirjcrav eiVat.) Spoken 
 of life, to exist, to live, Matt. 2, 18. 23, 30 ; 
 not to die, Acts 17, 28. So Jos. Ant. 7. 10. 
 5 OIK CT ovras. Xen. Ven. 1.11. b) Genr. 
 to be, to exist, to be found, as of persons, 
 Luke 4, 25 TroXXat \*IP M *jo~av. v - 27. Matt. 
 
 12, 11. John 3, 1. Rom. 3, 10. 11. (Luc. 
 D. Mort. 22. 1. Xen. Hell. 5. 4. 25.) Also 
 of things, to be, to exist, to have place, Matt. 
 
 6, 30. 22, 23. Mark 7, 15. Luke 6, 43. 
 Acts 2, 29. Rom. 13, 1. al. sjep. So <r o-rt , 
 elari, there is, there are, Rom. 3, 23. 1 Cor. 
 12, 4. 5. 6. Acts 27, 22. John 7, 12. Rev. 
 
 10, 6. 21, 4. al. saep. John 7, 39 OVTTG> yap 
 TJV Ti-vei fM ayiov, i. e. the giving of the Holy 
 Spirit had not yet taken place. Hence, to 
 be present, i. q. Trapfi/w, but this sense lies 
 only in the adjuncts, Matt. 12, 10. 24, 6. 
 Mark 8, 1 . Comp. Jos. Ant. 7. 1 1 . 6 nji> ov- 
 <rav 8vvap.iv. Xen. An. 4. 2. 3. c) Of time, 
 genr. Luke 23, 44 r\v 8e were! u>pa Hurt]. 
 John 1, 40. Acts 2, 15. 2 Tim. 4, 3. Mark 
 
 11, 13. (Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 18 rj8r] & pa fy. 
 Hell. 4. 5. 1 fa 6 p.riv. ) Of festivals, etc. 
 Mark 15, 42. Acts 12, 3 ; so Xen. Conv. 
 1. 2. 
 
 2. As modified by the context or by ad 
 juncts, to come to be, to come into existence, 
 i. q. yivopai, i. e. a) Genr. to come to pass, 
 to take place, to be done; so in the fut. 
 eo-rat, Matt. 27,7. 21. Luke 12, 55. 21, 
 11.25. Acts 11, 28. 27,25. Acts 23, 30. al. 
 Luke 22, 49 TO eo-6p.evov, i. e. what was 
 about to happen. Matt. 24, 3. Luke 1,34. al. 
 
 With dat. of pers. Mark 16, 22. Luke 14, 
 10. (Xen. Mem. 3. 2. 1 TOUT* eorat. Cyr. 
 2. 3. 3 1 .) Impers. KU\ eo-rat, like Heb. 
 "C^} an d *t shall be, shall come to pass, 
 followed by a future, Acts 2, 17. 21, quoted 
 from Joel 3, 1-5 [2, 28-32], where Sept. 
 for JTW . Acts 3, 23 (comp. Deut. 18, 19). 
 Rom. 9, 26, quoted from Hos. 2, 1 [1, 10], 
 where Sept. for ^^ . b) From the Heb. 
 tlvai els TI, like Heb. b rpn, to be for 
 any thing, i. e. to become any thing ; Matt. 
 19, 5 et Eph. 5, 31 Kal eo-ovrai ot 8vo els 
 o-dpKa fj.iat>, quoted from Gen. 2, 24 where 
 Sept. for }> r^n . Luke 3, 5 comp. Is. 40, 4. 
 Acts 13, 47 comp. Is. 49, 6. Eph. 1, 12. 
 Col. 2, 22. al. (Gesen. Lehrg. p. 816. 2.) 
 With dat. of pers. 1 Cor. 14, 22. 2 Cor. 6, 
 18. Heb. 1, 5. 8, 10. James 5, 3. al. 
 
 3. eVri c. infin. it is proper, is in one s 
 power or convenience, one can; Heb. 9, 5 
 TTfpl &v OVK earn vvv \eyeiv, of which we 
 cannot now speak. Ecclus. 39,21. Ml V. 
 H. 13. 33. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 11. 
 
 4. Particip. pres. a>v, ovo-a, ov, being, 
 e. g. a) Joined with a noun or pronoun, 
 it is used in short parenthetic clauses, by 
 way of emphasis, to indicate an existing 
 state, condition, character ; and may be ren 
 dered by the case absol. or by being, as 
 being, as, etc. Matt. 7, 1 1 i ovv tyiety, TTO- 
 1/77/301 cures, otSare /crX. John 3, 4. 4, 9. 9, 
 25. Acts 16, 21 ci OVK f^eoTiv f)piv Troielv, 
 Pup-aiois ovo-i. Rom. 5, 10. 11, 17. Gal. 6, 
 4. Eph. 2, 4. Tit. 3,11. James 3, 4. al. 
 See Buttm. 5 144. 7. So Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 
 3. Mem. 2. 3. 1. b) With the art. 6 uv, 
 TO. ovTa, it implies real and true exist 
 ence ; thus in the phrase 6 &v Kal 6 rjv Kai 
 6 epxapevos, which is used as a compound 
 indec. proper name of God and governed by 
 an6 Rev. 1,4, in allusion probably to the 
 Heb. rrirri. v. 8. 11, 17. 16, 5. Comp. 
 Winer } 10 ult. (Wisd. 13, 1 OVK la^vo-a? 
 elSfvai TOV ovra, i. e. God.) Also ra ovra, 
 TO. IJLT) OUT a, things existing, things non- 
 existing, pr. Rom. 4, 17 ; trop. 1 Cor. 1, 28. 
 So 2 Mace. 7, 28. Philo de Great, princip. 
 p. 728 ra yap p.rj ovra fKa\eo-ev els TO eivai. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 6. 1 bis, 7. 
 
 II. As the logical copula, connecting the 
 subject and predicate, to be ; where the pre 
 dicate specifies who or what a person or 
 thing is in respect to nature, origin, office, 
 condition, circumstances, state, place, ha 
 bits, disposition of mind, etc. etc. But these 
 ideas all lie in the predicate, and not in the 
 copula, which merely connects the predicate 
 with the subject. The predicate may be 
 expressed by various parts of speech. E. g. 
 
et/u 
 
 212 
 
 1. With an adjective as predicate ; which 
 is strictly the more logical construction. 
 Matt. 2, 6 av B^SXef/j. . . . ov8ap.u>s eAa^i onj 
 fi eV TO IS rjy. KT\. 18, 8. Mark 1, 7. John 
 4, 12. 5, 32 77 p.aprvpia OVK tanv akrftijs. 
 Acts 7, 6. Rom. 8, 29. 1 John 1, 9. al. ssep. 
 (Hdian, 8. 2. 6. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 1.) With 
 a neg. adj. ov8ev, it is nothing, Matt. 23, 16. 
 1 Cor. 7, 19. 13, 2 ; pjSeV Gal. 6, 3, comp. 
 above in I. 4. a ; so Plut. de Exil. 6. Xen. 
 An. 6. 2. 10. With numerals ; Mark 5, 13 
 rfo-av 8t a>s Sio-^i Xioi. So in the phrase 
 els (I v) fivat, spoken of two or more, to 
 be one in mind and purpose, John 10, 30. 
 17, 11. 22; or to be one in rank, right, 
 
 1 Cor. 3, 8. 12, 12. Gal. 3, 28. In this 
 construction, ei/u with an adject, sometimes 
 forms a periphrasis for the kindred verb ; 
 e. g. SvvaTos flp.i i. q. o~vvap.cu, Luke 14, 31. 
 Acts 11, 17. Rom. 4, 21 ; exSjjXoV tlp.i i. q. 
 fKO-r]\ovp.ai, 2 Tim. 3, 9. So Hdian. 8. 1. 2 
 Kpvfaos flp-i. i. q. upvirro^ai. 
 
 2. With a substantive as predicate, in 
 the same case with the subject. a) Pr. 
 Matt. 3, 4 17 Tpocpf) avTov rjv dicpi8(s. 3, 17 
 OVTOS eo-Tiv 6 vlos p.ov. 15, 14. Mark 2, 28. 
 10, 47. Acts 2, 32. 3, 25. 28, 6. Rom. 8, 
 124. Heb. 11, 1. al. sa;p. Matt. 7, 12 OVTOS 
 fo-Tiv 6 v6p.os, i. e. is contained in the law. 
 So Hdian. 3. 10. 10. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 27. 
 (Ec. 14. 7. Sometimes the noun (or pro 
 noun) of the predicate is not directly ex 
 pressed, but only implied ; Matt. 14, 27 e yw 
 elfju, I am he, i. e. it is I. John 13, 13 flp.1 
 yap SC. 6 SiSaovcaXoy. 18, 5 e ya> ei/u SC. 
 Irjo-ovs. So OVTOS fo~Tiv, Mark 6, 1 6. Luke 
 7, 27. John 7, 25. 9, 9. al. With dat. of 
 pers. or thing for or in respect to whom the 
 predicate is asserted; Acts 1, 8 KU\ eVeo-Se 
 p,oi p-dprvpes. 9, 15. Rom. 1, 14. 1 Cor. 9, 
 
 2 fl aXXois OVK flp.1 dnocrToXos, uXXdye vp.1v 
 flp.i. 1, 18. 2, 14. b) Trop. and meton. 
 the Subst. of the predicate often expresses, 
 not what the subject actually is, but what 
 it is like, or is accounted to be, or signifies, 
 either by comparison, substitution, or as 
 cause or effect ; so that flp.1 may be ren 
 dered to be accounted, to be like or in place 
 of, to signify; Matt. 5, 13. 14 vp.fls eWe TO 
 a\as TTJS yfjs, TO (pcos TOV Kooyxou. 12, 50 
 avTos p.ov d8f\(pos KOI d8f\<pT) Kal p-rjTTjp 
 fo-Tiv. 13, 37. 38. 39. 19, 6. Luke 8, 11 6 
 o~7ropos foriv 6 \6yos- 12, 1. John 1. 4 77 
 a>f) TJV TO (pas Ttav dv^pa>Tru>v. V. 8. 4, 34. 
 6, 33. 35 e yco flp.i 6 apTos Trjs faijs- v. 41. 
 48. 50. 51. 55. 11, 25. 12, 50. 15, 1. 5. 
 Acts 4, 11. iCor. 3, 10. 4,17. 10,4. Eph. 
 6, 8. James 4, 14. Rev. 4, 5. 21, 22. al. saep. 
 So in the words of Christ, TOVTO tart TO 
 
 et/u 
 
 ;, TOVTO e ori TO alp.d pov, Matt. 26, 
 26. 28. Mark 14, 22. 24. Luke 22, 19. 
 1 Cor. 11, 24. The Romish church takes 
 these passages literally. See Xen. An. 3.1. 
 
 13. Hell. 1. 4. 3. Plato Gorg. 459. a. c) 
 Here too / with the Subst. of the predi 
 cate, sometimes forms a periphrasis for the 
 corresponding verb ; comp. in no. 1 fin. e. g. 
 f7ri%vp,r)Tr]s dp.i for f7r&vp.fa>, 1 Cor. 10, 6; 
 rj\a)Tr]s flp.i for jjXo , 1 Cor. 14, 12. etc. 
 
 3. With a pronoun as predicate, in the 
 same case with the subject; e. g. OVTOS, 
 this, the following, Matt. 10, 2 TO. 6v6p.aTa 
 fo-Ti Ta\>Ta. John 1, 19 avTrj fo~T\v f) papTv- 
 pia. 15,12. 17,3. Acts8,32.al. avTos, 
 Luke 24, 39. Heb. 1, 12; T\S, T\, indef. 
 some one, any thing, 1 Cor. 10, 19; trop. 
 of moment, important, Acts 5, 36. 1 Cor. 3, 
 7. Gal. 6, 15. al. T is, T I, interrog. who, 
 what, John 5, 13. Rom. 14, 4. 1 Cor. 9, 18. 
 Heb. 12, 7. James 4, 12. Acts 21, 22 ri ovv 
 to-Ti, what is then ? sc. to be done. 1 Cor. 
 
 14, 15/26; Ti-oios Mark 12, 28; 7700-0$ 
 Mark 9, 21 ; irorcmos Luke 1, 29; onolos 
 Acts 26, 29 ; oor Gal. 5, 10. 19. etc. etc. 
 So the possessive pronouns ; as tp.6s, crop, 
 John 17, 10 ; vp.fTfpos Luke 6, 20. etc. So 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 3. 3. Trop. as with nouns 
 (no. 2. b, above) the predicate often express 
 es, not what the subject actually is, but what 
 it is accounted to be or signifies ; e. g. ri 
 fo-Tiv, TO KT\. what that means, etc. Matt. 9, 
 13. Mark 9, 10. Luke 20, 17. Eph. 4, 9. 
 Mark 1, 27 T L eVrt TOVTO; John 18, 38 T< 
 ecrTiv d\rfi(ia ; Luke 1 5, 26 ri f ir} TavTa 
 Acts 2, 12. 1-0, 17. 17, 20. Luke 8, 10 ris 
 fir] f] TrapajBoXr) OVTTJ. Also TOVT eo-Tt, 
 that is, that signifies, Matt. 27, 46. Acts 19, 
 
 4. Rom. 1, 12. al. o e o-Tt, which is, which 
 signifies, Mark 7, 11. Heb. 7, 2. al. 
 
 4. With the genitive of a noun or pro 
 noun as predicate ; spoken a) Of quality, 
 character, etc. Luke 9, 55 OVK otSctTe otou 
 Trvfvp.aTos tore vp-els. Acts 9, 2. Heb. 12, 
 11. Buttm. 132. 7. So Xen. Hell. 2.4. 
 36. b) Of age, Mark 5, 42 ?,v yap eVwi/ 
 SwSa. Acts 4, 22. al. Buttm. 1. c. So 
 Xen. An. 2. 6. 20. Mem. 1. 2. 40. c) Of 
 a whole, of which the subject is a part, Acts 
 23, 6 TO ev p,epos e orl Sa&SouKauoj/ KT\. 
 1 Tim. 1, 20. 2 Tim. 1, 15. Buttm. } 132. 
 
 5. So Xen. An. 1. 2,. 3. d) Of pos 
 session, property; pr. Matt. 5, 3. 10 avratv 
 fo~Tiv tj jBacriXfia TOIV ovpavuv. Mark 12, 
 7. 23. Luke 4, 7. John 10, 12. 19, 24. 
 Acts 21, 11. al. sacp. Matth. 315. 1. So 
 Isocr. ad Nicocl. p. 19. b. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 
 73. Trop. of persons (or things) to whom 
 the subject belongs, appertains, or on whom 
 
et/u 
 
 213 
 
 it is in any way dependent ; e. g. of God, 
 2 Cor. 4, 7. 1 Cor. 3, 23 ; of a master, 
 teacher, guide, Acts 27, 23. Rom. 14, 8. 
 1 Cor. 1, l 3, 4. 6, 12. 2 Cor. 10, 7. al. 
 (Xen. An. 2. l.-ll.) Of tilings which one 
 follows after, 1 Thess. 5, 5. 8. As imply 
 ing fitness, propriety ; Acts 1 , 7 oi>x i>p.a>v 
 (<m yv&vai %pdvovs KT\. Heb. 5, 14 TeAeuov 
 8( (cmv f] crTfpfa Tpo(f)rj. Matth. 316. So 
 Xen. An. 2. 1. 4. 
 
 5. With the dative of a noun or pronoun 
 as predicate, to be TO any one, implying 
 possession, property ; John 17, 9 on <roi 
 dcri, for they are thine. Luke 12, 20. Acts 
 2, 39. 1 Cor. 9, 16. 18. 1 Pet. 4, 11. al. 
 So Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 4. By inverting the 
 construction it may be rendered to have ; as 
 Luke 7, 14 8vo xpeoxpeiAeYai rfvav iafttfTg 
 TIW, a certain creditor had two debtors. 6, 
 32. 33. 34. John 18,39. Acts 8, 21. 21,23. 
 Eph. 6, 12 OVK fcmv rjfuv fj irdXrj irpos, we 
 hare not a struggle against, we wrestle not 
 against, etc. (Hdian. 1. 13. 11. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 2. 3.) Or to receive, Matt. 19, 27 TI Spa 
 (o-Tai fjp.lv, what then shall we receive ? So 
 Xen. An. 1. 7. 8. ib. 7. 6. 1. 
 
 6. With a participle of another verb as 
 predicate ; e. g. a) Without the article, 
 and then dpi often forms with the participle 
 a periphrasis for a finite tense of the same 
 verb, expressing however a continuance or 
 duration of the action or state, like the cor 
 responding construction in English ; Luke 
 
 5, 1 Kai avTos riv eorwy, and he was stand 
 ing, instead of imperf. ta~nj, he stood. Matt. 
 24, 9 KOI (T6(r3e fiicrov^voi. IITTO navrutv. 
 Mark 2, 6 rjcrav 8( nvfs Ka Srjfi.evoi. V. 18. 
 13, 25 01 d(rr(p(s (crovrat fKninrovrfs. 9,4. 
 15, 43. Luke 3, 23. 5, 17. 24, 32. Acts 1, 
 10. 2, 2. 42. al. saep. So with the particip. 
 of the perf. Pass, which however assumes 
 nearly the nature of an adjective ; Matt. 9, 
 36 rjcrav eo-KiA/itVoi KOI eppt/zeVot KT\. Mark 
 
 6, 52 TJV yap Tj KapSia avTwv 7T(iTa>pa>p.evT]. 
 1 John 1, 4. Also in impersonals, as 8eoi/ 
 f<rri for 8d, Acts 19, 36; TrpeVoj/ e o-ri for 
 irptnd, 1 Cor. 11, 13. al. See Winer 46. 
 8. Matth. j 559 ; comp. Gesen. Lehrg. p. 
 792. 2. So Eurip. Here. Fur. 312 sq. Hdian. 
 1. 3. 5. Diod. Sic. 2. 5. Xen. An. 2. 2. 13. 
 In some cases the particip. is not the pre 
 dicate, and then dpi is not thus an auxiliary, 
 e. g. Mark 10, 32 rja-av tv rfj 6S<i) dvaftaivov- 
 T(S els lepocr. where tv rfj 6&<5 is the predi 
 cate, and dvaftaivovTfs is an adjunct. Luke 
 
 7, 8. al. b) With the article, where the 
 participle may then be regarded as equiva 
 lent to a noun, or as an emphatic shorter 
 construction instead of a personal tense of 
 
 the verb ; Matt. 3, 3 OVTOS ydp e cm 6 pj3if 
 VTTO Ho-aibu, i. e. the person spoken of, the 
 predicted, instead of 6s (ppfftn. 13, 19. Mark 
 7, 15 (K(lvd e crrt TO. Koivovvra TOV ai>%pa>7roi>. 
 John 4, 10. Acts 2, 16. Rom. 3, 11. 1 John 
 
 5, 5. Jude 19. Rev. 2, 23. 14, 4 OVTOI dtrtv 
 01 aKo\ov%ovvT(s, where comp. the preced 
 ing construction, ovroi dcriv, ot OVK (p.o\vv- 
 Zrja-av. al. saep. Comp. Buttm. J 125. 3, and 
 n. 2. Winer } 19. 1. c. $ 46- 4. Matth. 5 270. 
 Hdot. 9. 70. Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 43. 
 
 7. With an adverb as predicate ; e. g. of 
 quality or character, as ovrcas, John 3, 8 
 OVTOIS e crrl Tray KT\. Matt. 19, 10. So ovrcos 
 eo-rat, Rom. 4, 18. Matt. 24, 27. Luke 17, 
 24. 26; with dat. Matt. 12, 45. Luke 11, 
 30. al. ravra as adv. i. q. ovrwr, Luke 17, 
 30. 1 Cor. 6, 11 ; comp. Buttm. 115. 4. 
 J 128. n. 5; as, according as, Rev. 22, 12. 
 Of likeness or manner as o>r, Matt. 22, 
 30. 28,3. Luke 6, 40. al. axnrep, Matt. 
 
 6, 5. Luke 18, 11 ; c. dat. Matt. 18, 17; 
 Ka3caj- 1 Thess. 2, 13. 1 John 3, 2. Of 
 plenty or want ; Trfpto-o-wrepco? 2 Cor. 7, 
 15 ; x^P 5 Heb. 12, 8. Of place, viz. place 
 where, e yyv? Rom. 10, 8. John 11, 18. al. 
 ( K (l Matt. 18, 20. Mark 3, 1. al. (Xen. Hell. 
 4. 8. 14.) p. aK pdv Mark 12, 34. John 21,8; 
 orrou Mark 5, 40. John 18, 1. 7, 34. al. 
 (Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 31.) TTOV Matt. 2, 2. John 
 
 7, 11. (Plut. de Adul. et Amic. 31.) wSe 
 Matt. 12, 6. 41. Rev. 13, 9. etc. etc. Also 
 place whence, origin ; as 7ro3ei> Matt. 21, 25. 
 John 7, 27. 2, 9 ; evreteev John 18, 36. 
 So Xen. An. 5. 6. 24. ib. 6. 6. 14. Of 
 time, (yyvs Matt. 26, 18. 
 
 8. With a preposition and its case as 
 predicate, viz. a) OTTO, John 1, 45; 
 comp. OTTO no. 3. a. . b) ds c. ace. viz. 
 as marking that which any thing becomes ; 
 comp. above in I. 2. b. As denoting direc 
 tion, object, end, (is TI, Luke 5, 17 KOJ. 8v- 
 vap.is Kvplov TJV ds TO iao-3cu O.VTOVS. Of a 
 person, eis Tiva, 1 Pet. 1,21 coo-re TTJV trtOTUi 
 v[j.u>v Kal (\Tri8a dvai ds 3eoV, i. e. be or 
 rest in God. Adverbially, 1 Cor. 4, 3 eynol 
 8e fls eXa^to-roV eortv Iva KT\. comp. Buttm. 
 5115. n. 5. Spoken of place, whither or 
 where, Mark 2, 1 on ds OIK.OV am. 13, 16. 
 Luke 11, 7. John 1, 18. al. c) IK c. gen. 
 always implying origin, see in (< no. 3 ; 
 e. g. spoken of place, John 1 , 47 IK NafcrpeY 
 8vj>arai TI dyaSbv (ivai ; Acts 23, 34. John 
 4, 22 ; so of family, race, Luke 2, 4. Acts 
 4, 6. Of persons or things as the source, 
 author, cause ; Mark 1 1 , 30 e ovpavov rjv 
 fj ({ itfcpwaw. John 8, 23 v/ifTy eV TUIV K.d- 
 
 TO) (<JT(, eyw (K TUIV (IVCi) *t/Zt. 15, 19. 17, 
 
 14 bis, (K TOV Kocrp-ov (Ivai. Acts 19, 25. 
 
214 
 
 eiTTOV 
 
 Gal. 3, 21. Matt. 1, 20 e /c nvevpaTos ecrnv 
 Ayiov. 5, 37. John 7, 17 17 StSa^ij rov 
 Seoi) corn/. Acts 5, 38. 1 John 2, 16. Hence 
 trop. of a person on whom one is dependent, 
 to whom one is devoted as a follower ; e. g. 
 John 8, 47 eVc TOV 3eou oi*c e crre, ?/e are not . 
 o/" God, i. e. not his true followers, adhe 
 rents. 1 John 3, 10. 4, 6. 6, 19. So John 
 8, 44 vpels eK TOV 8iafB6\ov eVre. Of things, 
 as fK TTJS d\n%eias John 18, 37. 1 John 3, 
 19 ; e e pyvv TOV vopov Gal. 3, 10 ; also 
 Gal. 3, 12 6 vopos OVK eo~Tiv SK Tn crrecoy, i. e. 
 the law depends not on faith, has no con 
 nection with it. So of a whole in relation 
 to a part ; 1 Cor. 12, 15 OVK elpl eK TOV o-co- 
 paTos. v. 16 ; of persons, Luke 22, 3 ovra 
 fK TOV dpftpov T&V SwSfKa. Matt. 26, 73 o-v 
 t avTuv el. John 1, 24. 10, 16. 18, 17. 25. 
 Col. 4, 9. 2 Tim. 3, 6. Of the material, 
 Rev. 21, 21 r/v e ems papyapiTov. Matth. 
 374. b, note. d) ev c. dat. implying a 
 being in a place, thing, person ; e. g. of 
 place, part, etc. Mark 1, 3 eV TJJ ep-fjpa. 
 John 2, 23 ev Tois lepocroX. Acts 5, 12. 
 Rev. 9, 10. al. (Hdian. 8. 8. 10. Xen. An. 
 5. 6. 13, 15.) Of tilings ; ev TOVTU, in this, 
 herein, John 9, 30. 1 John 4, 10 ; or hereby, 
 1 John 2, 3. So eV TOVTOIS itrSi, be wholly 
 in these things, occupied with them, 1 Tim. 
 4, 15. (Jos. Ant. 2. 16. 4. ./El. V. H. 1. 31. 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 5.) So ev o-apKi eivai, to be 
 in the flesh, i. e. followers of the world, 
 aliens from God, Rom. 7, 5 ; Iva 77 nio-Tis 
 v[j.u>vp.Tj fj ev crotpia dv%p<anu>v, aXX ev 8vvd- 
 fj.fi 3eoi), i. e. consist in, depend on, 1 Cor. 
 2, 5. Of a state, condition, as ev pvo-ei at- 
 P.UTOS ovo-a Mark 5, 25 ; so Luke 23, 40. 
 Phil. 4, 11. 1 John 2, 9. (Jos. Ant. 7. 10. 
 1 .) Of persons, to be in any one, viz. where 
 the subject is a thing, Acts 25, 5 TI ecrriv 
 ev ro> dv8pi rovrw, in or on this man, i. e. 
 in his conduct. John 11, 10 TO (peas OVK eo-- 
 TIV ev at>Tw, i. e. in his path, around him.; 
 and so of faculties, virtues, vices, which are 
 in any one, John 1, 4. 48. Acts 4, 12, 20, 
 10. Where the subject is a person, to be 
 near and in intimate union with, to be one 
 with, in mind, purpose, feeling ; so God 
 and Christ, John 14, 10. 11 ; Christ and his 
 followers, John 15, 4 ; Christ in his follow 
 ers, 2 Cor. 13, 5 ; the Spirit in Christians, 
 John 14, 17 ; Christians in Christ, Rom. 8, 
 1. 16,11. 1 Cor. 1,30. 1 John 5, 20. With 
 dat. plural, to be among, Matt. 27, 56 ; to be 
 in the midst of, 1 Cor. 14, 25. e) en I, c. 
 gen. of place, upon, Luke 17, 31. John 20, 
 7 ; trop. of dignity, station, over, Acts 8, 
 27. Rom. 9, 5. With dat. of place, upon, 
 in, at., Mark 4, 38. Matt. 24, 33. With 
 
 accus. of place, as elvai enl TO avTo, spoken 
 of conjugal intercourse, 1 Cor. 7, 5 ; of per 
 sons, elvai eni Tiva, to be or rest upon, me- 
 taph. Acts 4, 33. f) /card c. gen. elvai 
 Kara TWOS, to be against any one, Matt. 12, 
 30. Gal. 5, 23. With accus. of thing, eivai 
 Kara TI, to be according to, in accordance 
 with, 2 Cor. 11,15. Rom. 2, 2. Luke 17, 30. 
 g) pfTa C. gen. elvai p.eTa TWOS, to be with 
 any one, i. e. present with, in company with, 
 Matt. 17, 17. Mark 2, 19. Luke 23, 43. al. 
 Also to be for or on the side of any one, as 
 an adherent, helper, Matt. 12, 30. John 3, 2. 
 Acts 7, 9. 18, 10. Phil. 4, 9. (Jos. Ant. 15! 
 5. 3.) So to be imparted to any one, 2 John 
 2, 3. h) napd C. gen. eivai irapd TIVOS, 
 to be from any one, i. e. sent by any one, 
 John 6, 46. 7, 29 ; or received from any 
 one, John 17, 7. With accus. of place, to 
 be by, on, at, Mark 5, 21. i) npo c. gen. 
 of place, to be before, Acts 14, 13 ; trop. of 
 dignity, Col. 1, 17. k) npos c. accus. of 
 place, eivai npos TI, to be near to, by, Luke 
 24, 29. Mark 4, 1. Of persons, to be near, 
 with, among, Matt. 13, 56. Mark 9, 19. 1) 
 <rvv c. dat. elvai crvv TIVI, to be with any 
 one, i. e. present with, in company with, 
 Luke 24, 44. Phil. 1, 23. Col. 2, 5. 1 Thess. 
 4, 17 ; or as a follower, disciple, Luke 8. 
 38. Acts 4, 13 ; or as a partisan, Acts 14, 4. 
 So Xen. Hell. 3. 1. 18. m) vnep c. gen. 
 eiVai vnep TIVOS, to be for any one, on his 
 side, Mark 9, 40. With accus. of pers. 
 vnep Tiva, to be above any one, trop. Luke 
 6,40. n) v n 6 c. accus. to be under, spo 
 ken of place, John 1, 49. 1 Cor. 10, 1 ; of 
 person or thing, to be subject to, Rom. 3, 9. 
 Gal. 3, 10. 1 Tim. 6, 1. 
 
 NOTE. As copula, the forms of dpi are 
 very frequently not expressed ; e. g. Matt. 
 9, 37. 13, 54. Mark 9, 23. 1 Cor. 10, 26. 
 11, 12. al. sajpiss. See Buttm. 5 129. 20. 
 Matth. 5 306. + 
 
 et/u, to go, in Mss. for dpi John 7, 34. 
 35. See Buttm. 5 108. V. 
 
 eive/ca, see IWra. 
 
 elirep, see in el III. 2. g. 
 
 etTTOV, aor. 2 ; Imper. elne, Opt. e lnoipi, 
 Subjunct. 6i7rw, Inf. elnelv, Particip. etVcoi/. 
 Also Ion. aor. 1 etn-a, Matt. 26, 25. 
 Mark 11,3. al. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 8. Imperat. 
 elnov Acts 28, 26; elnaTa>o-av 24, 20; 
 used likewise by the Attics, comp. Buttm. 
 J96. n. 1. 5114 flntiv. Winer j 15 einov. 
 With these aorists from an obsol. theme 
 enct> or ftna>, the Greeks employed (prjp, 
 as a present, Buttm. 114 and 5 109. I. 2 ; 
 likewise, as also in N. T. the fut. epS> 
 
17TOV 
 
 215 
 
 from etpw (only poetic) ; also the perf. 
 tlpnua from obsol. pea, with pluperf. 
 Kftv; Pass. perf. e Ipnp.ai, aor. 1 ep 
 or less usual eppeSqi/ Matt. 5, 33. al. Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 447 ; fut. 1 /Jij3>}<ro/M, fut. 3 
 dpTjo-ofjiai, Buttm. 1. c. Winer 1. c. To 
 say, to speak, i. e. to utter definite words, and 
 hence implying more than XoXeri/, but less 
 than \eytw ; see Tittm. de Syri. N. T n 
 79, 80. 
 
 1. Genr. to say, to speak, with an ace. of 
 the thing said : Matt. 26, 44 TW avrov \6yov 
 etVwy. Luke 12, 3. John 2, 22. Acts 1, 9. 
 2 Cor. 12, 6 aXfaiav yap epo>. Rom. 3, 5 
 et 6, 1 TI o\iv (povfifv; (Dem. 384. 16. Xen. 
 Apol. Socr. 15.) Heb. 7, 9 is eW Vi/, 
 so to speafc ; Matth. { 545 init. so Plut. Ro- 
 mul. 9. Dem. 226. 24. Plato Pheedon 10. p. 
 66. a. The accus. is often supplied by the 
 words or clause spoken, as Matt. 2, 8. 4, 3. 
 Luke 5, 13. John 4, 27. 6, 59. al. Hence 
 tine is inserted like tyr) in the middle of a 
 clause, Luke 7, 42. With an accus. of per 
 son, once, John 1,15 6v flirov, as in Engl. 
 whom I said, i. e. of whom I spoke, i. q. 
 jrepl ov in v. 30. Along with the accus. 
 expr. or implied, are also further construc 
 tions of the person to whom, the manner, 
 r-nd the like ; e. g. a) With dat. of pers. 
 John 16, 4 Tavra 8e ifuv e apxys OVK elnov. 
 Matt. 16, 8. Mark 2,9. Luke 4, 3. John 14, 
 26. Rev. 17, 7. Luke 7, 40 e^co aoi TI d- 
 nfiv, comp. Luc. Tim. 20. Aristaen. 2. 1. 
 /3) With els c. accus. of pers. to speak 
 against, Luke 12, 10. y) With Kara c. 
 gen. of pers. to speak against, Matt. 5, 11. 
 12, 32. 8) With vrepi c. gen. of pers. or 
 thing, to speak of or concerning, John 7, 39. 
 10,41. 11,13; c. dat. of pers. Matt. 17, 13. 
 John 18, 34. e) With irpos c. ace. 
 pers. to speak or say to any one, Luke 11,1. 
 12, 16. John 6, 28. Acts 2, 37. Heb. 1, 13. 
 al. (Luc. D. Mort. 1.1. Xen. Cyr. 1.4. 13.) 
 In the sense of /or, with reference to, Mark 
 12, 12. Also c. ace. of thing, to say in re 
 spect to, Rom. 8,31. f ) With an adverb, or 
 a prep, with its case, implying manner ; e. g. 
 o/iotcov Matt. 26, 35 ; wo-aurcoy 21, 30 ; Ka3a>y 
 28, 6 ; so AcaXco? e mas , thou hast well said, 
 i. e. rightly, correctly, Luke 20, 39; and 
 absol. with Ka\cas implied, Matt. 26, 25. 64, 
 <TV diras. Hence with an ace. of pers. *a- 
 Xa>? dirtlv TIVU, to speak well of any one, 
 Luke 6, 26; and KUKOIS flirelv TWO, to 
 speak evil of, Acts 23, 5 ; see Buttm. 5 131. 
 5. Matth. ^ 41 6. So too tlirelv ev irapa/Bo- 
 \ais, Matt. 22, 1 ; 8ia -rrapapoXfjs Luke 8, 4. 
 Also tiTTflv Trpos eavrovs or trpbs aXXi^Xovy, 
 to say among themselves or to one another, 
 
 Mark 12, 7. John 7, 35. Luke 2, 15. John 
 16, 17. 19, 24. al. Further, <? eWoT f , 
 among themselves, Matt. 21, 38; and trop. 
 from the Heb. elireiv ev rfj Kapoia av- 
 TOV, to say in one s heart, i. e. to think, Matt. 
 24 48. Luke 12, 45. Rom. 10, 6; so 1N 
 and Sept. Ps. 10, 6. 11. 14, 1. Is. 4V, 
 21 ; comp. Gesen. Lex. TDK no. 2. In the 
 same sense also, el^lv V W<5, Matt. 9, 3. 
 Luke 7, 39. 16, 3. 18, 4. Sept. for lax 
 W> Esth. 6, 6. ,) With infin. and ac 
 cus. Rom. 4, 1 ; accus. implied Matt. 1612 
 So Xen. Hell. 1 . 6. 6. 3) With Sri, Matt. 
 
 5, 31. John 8, 55. 1 Cor. 1, 15. (Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 4. 25.) So after a dat. Mark 16, 7. John 
 
 6, 65. 
 
 2. As modified by the context, where the 
 sense often lies not so much in eiVeTv as in 
 the adjuncts ; e. g. a) Before interroga 
 tions, for to ask, to inquire ; Acts 8, 30 K al 
 fiTTfv ("paye yivaxrKfis KT\. Matt. 9,4. 11, 
 3. 13, 10. John 8, 10. Acts 19, 2. 3. So 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 16. b) Before replies, for 
 to answer, to reply, e. g. to a direct question, 
 Matt. 15, 34. Mark , 5. Luke 8, 10 ; and 
 so preceded by faoKpiSifig or &rcpt 3i7 /cat, 
 Matt. 11, 4. 15, 13. John 7, 20. Acts 5, 29. 
 Without a preceding question, Matt. 14, 18. 
 Acts 5, 9. 11, 8; with dTroicpftds, Matt. 4, 
 4. 12, 39. Mark 6, 37. al. c) Of narra 
 tion, teaching, for to tell, to make known, to 
 declare, Matt. 8, 4. 16, 20. 18, 17. Mark 
 11,29. 16,7.8. JohnS, 12. 12,49. Rev. 
 17, 7. al. saep. Sept. for T^n 2 K. 22, 10 ; 
 Job 12, 7. d) Of predictions, for to 
 foretell, to predict, Matt. 28, 6. Mark 14, 16 
 Luke 22, 13. John 2, 22. al. Here used 
 especially in the passive forms, e. g. epprftn 
 Rom. 9, 12.26. Rev. 6, 11; f l pr , TM Luke 
 4, 12. Heb. 4, 7 ; TO flprjp.fvov Luke 2, 24. 
 Acts 2,^16. ah 6 prfifis, lit. the foretold, Matt. 
 3, 3 ; TO prfttv, that foretold, etc. Matt. 1, 22. 
 2, 15. 17. 22, 31. al. sa3 P . e) Of what is 
 said with authority, for to direct, to bid, to 
 command, Matt. 8, 8. Mark 5, 43. 10, 49. 
 Luke 7, 7. 17,7.8. 19,15. 2 Cor. 4, 6. James 
 2, 11. al. With Iva, Matt. 4, 3. Mark 3, 9. 
 Rev. 9, 4. Sept. for njs Ex. 35, 1. Lev. 
 9, 6. f ) With two ace. of pers. for to 
 caZZ, to name; John 10, 35 et fKtivovs e<Ve 
 Seovj. 15, 15 ovKert vp,as Xeyco 5ouXour, 
 . . . v/iay 8e fiprjKa (pi\ovs. 1 Cor. 12, 3 
 ouoYiy SvvaTai tlnflv Kvpiov irja-ovv, et un 
 eV irvevp-an dyt w. So Xen. Apol. Socr. 
 1 5 TTOTepa 3eoV ere eiTTO), fj av^pmirov. Agesi 
 2. 12 Ayqeri Xaoj/ dvdptlov fj.tv eearij> - 
 ireiv. -f- 
 
 et7r&)?, see in ei III. 2. h. 
 
ftprjvevo) 
 
 216 
 
 et? 
 
 f. fva-co, (elprjvr), ) to make 
 peace, to be at peace, Sept. for o^biUrt l K. 
 22, 44. Pol. 5. 8. 7 x^P a >K ^ a ^- ai0 ^ e P 7 7 
 vfvop.evT). Plato Theaet. 180. a. In N. T. 
 to lire in peace, harmony, concord, absol. 
 2 Cor. 13, 11 ; ev eavTots 1 Thess. 5, 13 ; 
 ev dXXijXots Mark 9, 50 ; /xera TTUVTCOV Rom. 
 12, 18. So Ecclus. 6, 6. 28, 9. 13. 
 
 elprjvr), TJS, rj, peace, 1. Pr. in a civil 
 sense, the opposite of war and commotion, 
 Luke 14, 32. Acts 12, 20. 24, 2. Rev. 6,4. 
 (^1. V. H. 14. 11. Xen. Ag. 1. 7.) Heb. 
 7, 2 /3ao-tXeiif etp^y, king of peace, pacific ; 
 comp. Is. 9, 5. Zech. 9, 9. 10. Also among 
 individuals,>eace, coneord, Matt. 10,34. Luke 
 12, 51. Acts 7, 26. Rom. 14, 19. Heb. 12, 
 
 14. 1 Pet. 3, 11. al. Trop. peace of mind, 
 quietness, tranquillity, arising from recon 
 ciliation with God and a sense of the divine 
 favour, Rom. 5, 1. 15, 13. Phil. 4, 7. Col. 3, 
 
 15. 2 Tim. 2, 22. Comp. Is. 53, 5. 
 
 2. peace, i. e. a state of peace, rest, quiet, 
 safety ; Luke 11, 21 Iv elprjvrj eWi TO. \map- 
 XOVTO. avTov. John 16, 33. Acts 9, 31. 1 Cor. 
 14, 33. 1 Thess. 5, 3. Sept. for d-ftfli Judg. 
 6, 23 ; n-J3 Is. 14, 30. Ez. 38, 8. 11. 
 
 3. Like Heb. D"ib&3 , peace, welfare, pros- 
 
 , happiness, every kind of good. Luke 
 
 1, 79 68os elprjvrjs, way of peace, happiness. 
 
 2, 14. 10, 6 vibs elprjvrjs, a son of peace, hap 
 piness, i. q. one worthy of it. 19, 42. Rom. 
 8, 6. Eph. 6, 15 tvayyt\iov TTJS elprjvr)s, the 
 gospel of peace, i. e. which leads to eternal 
 happiness. 2 Thess. 3, 16. Also 6 Seos flprj- 
 vrjs, i. e. God the author and giver of all good, 
 Rom. 15, 33. 16, 20. Phil. 4, 9. 1 Thess. 5, 
 23. 2 Thess. 3, 16. Heb. 13, 20. Comp. --itt) 
 
 aJ } Sept. &pxa>v elpr)VT]S, Is. 9, 5. So 
 vp.a>v, the good or blessing which you 
 have invoked by way of salutation, your 
 benediction, Matt. 10, 13. Luke 10, 6. John 
 14, 27. flence p.eT elpf)i>r)s, with good wishes, 
 benediction, kindness, Acts 15,33. Heb. 11, 
 31 ; ev elprjvr], 1 Cor. 16, 11. So Sept. and 
 Heb. DibajSJ Gen. 26, 29. Ex. 18, 23. 
 Hence also in the formulas of salutation, 
 either at meeting or parting ; see in ao-Trd- 
 fo/uai. Heb. Lex. fi-ftai , B. 1. Thus on 
 meeting, elp r/vr) vp.lv, peace unto you, i.e. 
 every good, Luke 24, 36. John 20, 19. 21. 
 26 ; also in epistles, Rom. 1,7. 2, 10. 1 Cor. 
 1, 3. 2 Cor. 1, 2. Gal. 1, 3. al. Luke 10, 5 
 tlprjvr) TO) O IKCO TOVTO>. So Sept. and Heb. 
 Cab , rf> Dfeti Judg. 19, 20. 1 Chr. 12, 18. 
 Dan. 10, 19. At parting, viraye els tlpfpnjf, 
 go away into peace, Mark 5, 34 ; VTT. ev el- 
 pf)vri, go in peace, James 2, 16 ; jropevov els 
 Luke 7, 50. 8, 48 ; irop. ev 
 
 Acts 16, 36 ; comp. in ds no. 4. Sept. for 
 Heb. nibajb $ J u dg. 18, 6. 1 Sam. 1, 17. 
 20, 42. + 
 
 eifrrjviKOS, 17, ov, (eip^wj,) peaceful, re 
 lating to peace, Xen. CEc. 1. 17 flprjviKm 
 e7n<rrr;/iat. In N. T. 
 
 1 . peaceable, i. e. pacific, disposed to peace, 
 James 3, 17. Sept. for DlbllJ tthx Ps. 37, 
 37 ; comp. Deut. 2, 26. Plato Legg. 829. a. 
 
 2. From the Heb. healthful, wholesome, 
 happy, Heb. 12, 11 Kaprrbs elprjvLKos. Comp. 
 elprjvr] for nibttJ in elprjvr) no. 3. 
 
 elpyvoTTOieo), >, f. 770-0), (i. e. elpfjvrjv 
 TToteco,) to make peace, to make reconcilia 
 tion, Col. 1, 20. Sept. Prov. 10, 10. 
 
 flprjVOTTOiOS, ov, 6, a peace-maker, paci 
 ficator, an ambassador to treat of peace, 
 Plut. Nicias 11. Xen. Hell. 6. 3. 4. In N. 
 T. trop. one disposed to peace, peaceful, op 
 posed to strife, Matt. 5, 9. 
 
 eipai, f. fpS>, see in ftirov. 
 
 et?, a prep, governing only the accusa 
 tive, with the primary idea of motion into 
 any place or thing, and then also of motion 
 or direction to, towards, upon, any place or 
 object. The antithesis is expressed by ex, 
 out of. Sept. every where for 3 , ? , ?*$ . 
 See Winer $ 53. a. Matth. $ 578. Kiihnei 
 290. 2. Buttm. 147. 
 
 1. Of PLACE, which is the primary and 
 most frequent use, into, to, viz. 
 
 a) After verbs implying motion of any 
 kind into, or also to, towards, upon, any 
 place or object ; e. g. verbs of going, com 
 ing, leading, following, sending, throwing, 
 placing, delivering over, and very many 
 others of the like general signification ; 
 e. g. a) Pr. c. ace. of place ; Matt. 2, 12 
 dvexa>pT]O-av fls TTJV xaipav avToav. 4, 8. 5, 1 
 dveftr] els TO opos. 6, 6 eiVeXSe els TO Tap.Lfl.6v 
 (rov. 8, 18 direX Se iv els TO nepav. 12, 44 
 eiricrrpfijrm fls TOV olnov p.ov. 15, 11. 17 
 
 TTO.V TO flO TTOpeVOp.fVOV IS TO ffTO/jM, Kdl 
 
 fls d(pe8pa>va eKjSaXXerat. 20, 17 ovafiaiwu 
 fls lepocr6\vfj.a. 21, 18. Mark 1, 38. 5, 
 21. 6, 45. 9, 31 7rapa8i8oTdi els ^etpar 
 aiftpa>-rra>v. 13, 14 (peiryeiv tls TO. oprj, as in 
 Engl. to flee into the mountains. Luke 8, 23. 
 26. John 1, 9. 7, 14. Acts 16, 16. 26, 
 14. Rom. 5, 12. 10, 18. Rev. 2, 22 (see 
 in /3dXX no. 1. f). 8, 5. al. sxp. (Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 2. 1. Cyr. 5. 4. 5. An. 1. 3. 17.) 
 So in constr. praegn. John 16, 21 eyewfj^iij 
 els TOV Kocrp.ov. 1 Pet. 3, 20 els r)v [KifJco- 
 TOV] oXtyal v^v^al &if<r&>3r;a - ai fit {Jfiaroy. 
 Matt. 5, 22 fvo^os eorai els TTJV yeevvav, is 
 liable to be cast into hell ; Winer } 31. 2. 
 (Xen. An. 2. 3. 18 dirocraxTai, vp.ds els rnv 
 
217 
 
 EXXaSa.) So ds c. ace. of thing, implying 
 place ; as John 18, 6 a?r^X3ov ds TO. OTTICTCO. 
 
 7, 8. 10 ds TTJV (opTTjv sc. at Jerusalem. 
 Mark 13, 16. 4, 22 els (pavepov (\%TJ. John 
 1, 11 ds ra iSta TJ\%(. Acts 15, 38 ds TO 
 tpyov. 21, 6. John 16, 32. /3) With ac- 
 cus. of person; e. g. Mark 7, 15. 18 rrav 
 (oiSec) dcnrop(v6p.(vov ds TOV av Spwrrov, 
 for dcrTTop. ds TO arofia in Matt. 15, 17. 
 Also Matt. 27, 30 /cat (^Tfrvcravres ds avTOv, 
 for fir TO Trpoo-coTrov avTov in 26, 67. Of 
 evil spirits entering into the bodies of per 
 sons, Mark 9, 25. Luke 8, 30 ; comp. Luke 
 
 8, 32. Matt. 8, 31 ; trop. of Satan entering 
 into the mind or heart, Luke 23, 3. John 
 13, 27. Trop. ds favTov eXScoi/, having 
 come to himself, to his right mind, Luke 15, 
 17; comp. in eavrov no. 4. c. Elsewhere 
 referring to the place where the person 
 dwells or is, and implying to, among ; Luke 
 10, 36 epTTfcrcov ds TOVS \rjcrrds. 21, 24. 
 Acts 18, 6 ds TO. e%vTj Trope va-0/j.ai. 20, 29 
 (l<r(\ev<TovTai Xwcot f3apeis ds vfj.ds. 22, 21. 
 Rom. 5, 12 ds Trdvras ui>3pco7rous. 16, 19. 
 2 Cor. 9, 5. 10, 14. 1 Thess. 1, 5. Rev. 
 16, 2. al. See Winer 53. a. Matth. 5 578. 
 So Horn. II. 15. 402. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 6. 
 Mem. 1. 1. 14. 
 
 b) After verbs implying direction upon 
 or towards any place or object ; e. g. verbs 
 of hearing, calling, announcing, snowing, 
 and many others similar. Matt. 10, 27 et 
 Acts 11,22 aKovdv ds TO. 3)Ta. Luke 7, 1 . 
 Matt. 22, 3 KoXtcrat ds TOVS ydftovs. v. 4. 
 Mark 5, 14 oV^yyeiXav ds TTJV TvoKiv. 11, 8 
 (TTpu>crav ds TTJV 68oV. 13, 10 ds iravra ra 
 e3i/77 Set KTjpvx^T)vai. Luke 24, 47. John 8, 
 26 ravra Xe ya> ds TOV Koup-ov. Acts 7, 39 
 f<TTpd<pTj(rav TOIS napbiais avrfav ds Aijv- 
 irrov. 27, 6. 1 Cor. 14, 9 ds at pa XaXoOi/rer. 
 2 Cor. 8, 24 els ai/Tovs eVSei ao-3e. 11, 6. 
 al. saep. (Xen. An. 5. 6. 28, 37.) Espe 
 cially after verbs of looking, beholding, and 
 the like ; Acts 1, 10 dT(viovrfs ds TOV ov- 
 pavov. 3. 4. Matt. 22, 16 ov /3XeVets ds 
 TTpocrtoTrov av Spamav. John 13, 22. 19, 37. 
 Acts 1, 11. Heb. 11, 26. al. Matt. 5, 35 
 6p.6<rai ds lepoo-oXv/na, towards Jerusalem, 
 i. B. turning or looking towards it. So 
 Horn. II. 9. 373 ds 2ma tSe o-3at. Also af 
 ter nouns, e. g. Acts 9, 2 eVioroXar ds Aa- 
 fjMo-Kov, i. e. directed to Damascus. Rom. 
 15, 31 f) ftiaxovia pov TJ ds lepovo-oXTj/z. al. 
 
 c) Trop. of a state or condition into which 
 one cornes, after verbs of motion, direction, 
 and the like ; Matt. 25, 46 aTreXeuo-omu ds 
 Ko\ao~Lv aitovtov, ds farjv alu>viov. Mark 5, 
 26 ds TO xdpov e X3oi)(ra. 9, 43. Luke 22, 
 33. 24, 20. John 4, 38. 5,24. 16,13. Acts 
 
 26, 18. 2 Cor. 10, 5. Gal. 1, 6. Phil. 1,12. 
 3, 11. 1 Tim. 2, 4. 3, 6. 9. Heb. 2, 10. al. 
 
 sa?p. For waye V. iropcuov ds dprjVTiv, go 
 into peace, see below in no. 4. So Xen. 
 Ath. 1. 9. Mem. 1. 2.22. In constr. praegn. 
 paTTTifctv ("is Tiva v. ds ovo/j-d TIVOS, see in 
 /3a7rTi a> no. 2. a. /3, y. 
 
 2. Of TIME, viz. a) Time when, as 
 marking a term or limit until when, to, up 
 to, until ; Acts 4, 3 ds TTJV avpiov, till the 
 morrow. Matt. 10, 22 ds WXoy. Phil. 1, 10 
 ds rjp-fpav XptoroC, i. e. against the day of 
 Christ. 2, 16. 2 Pet. 3, 7. Acts 13, 42. 
 1 Thess. 4, 15. 2 Thess. 2, 6. 2 Pet. 2,4. al. 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 6. CEc. 17. 10. 
 
 b) Time how long, marking a period of 
 duration, for, etc. Matt. 21, 19 ds TOV alcava, 
 for ever. Mark 3, 29. John 8, 35. 2 Pet. 
 3, 18. Luke 1, 50 ds yeveas yeveciv. 12, 19 
 ds e-nj Tj-oXXa. 1 Tim. 6, 19. Heb. 7, 3. 
 Rev. 9, 15. al. Pol. 32. 13. 6. Xen. Mem. 
 3.6. 13. 
 
 3. Trop. as marking the END or PUR 
 POSE to or towards whjch any thing aims 
 or tends. Spoken 
 
 a) Of a result, effect, consequence, mark 
 ing that which any person or thing tends 
 to, becomes, or is made. Matt. 13, 30 &/ 
 (rare avTovs ds 8rp.ds. 27, 51 ecr^iVSi; ds 
 ovo Oe>?). (Sept. Ez. 37, 22. Pol. 2. 16. 
 
 11. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 4.) John 17, 23 rere- 
 Xeico/j./oi ds (v. Acts 2, 20 jueraorpa(i7<re- 
 rat ds O-KOTOS . ds aip.a. Rev. 11,6. Rom. 
 10, 10 KapSia Trioreverai ds St(catocri/w;v. 
 15, 2. 1 Cor. 11, 17 owe ds TO KpdTTov dXX 
 ds TO rjTTOv <ruvepx(cr 5(. 12, 13 ds ev traj/ia 
 J3aTTTi(rZT)fj.(v, i. e. such is the effect of true 
 baptism. 15, 54. Acts 10, 4 al Trpoo-fv^ai 
 crov dvff:lr](rav ds p.vrjfj.oo vvov KT\. Eph. 2, 
 21. 22. Heb. 6, 6. 8. 1 Pet. 1, 22. al. sajp. 
 So Horn. II. 9. 102. Hdian. 1. 11. 6. Plato 
 Legg. 867. b. With an Infin. as subsL 
 Rom. 7, 4 ds TO yemrSai v/zar KTX. v. 5. 
 
 12, 3. 1 Cor. 9, 18. Gal. 3, 17. Heb. 11,3. 
 al. saep. Comp. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 5. So from 
 the Heb. where els corresponds to Heb. i ; 
 see Lehrg. p. 816. Thus Xoy/fo/iat [rira,Tt,] 
 eis TI, to reckon or count FOR, AS, any thing, 
 Pass. Acts 19, 27. Rom. 2,26. 9,8. Sept. 
 for b aian 1 Sam. 1, 13. Is. 29, 17. (Wisd. 
 9, 6 ; two accus. Wisd. 5, 4. 15, 15.) Also 
 Xoyi fecrSai TIVL (is TI, to reckon or impute 
 to any one FOR, AS, Pass. Rom. 4, 3 ds St- 
 Kaioo-vvrjv. v. 5. 9. 22. Gal. 3, 6, all quoted 
 from Gen. 15, 6 where Sept. for b 3l2Jn, 
 as also Ps. 106, 31. (1 Mace. 2, 52.) So 
 after verbs of constituting, making, becom 
 ing, and the like; Acts 13, 22 rjyttp(v av- 
 Tols TOV Ac/SIS ds /SaouXea. v. 47 Te3ftu <rt 
 
218 
 
 els (pas. (Sept. and ^ nb Ez. 37, 22.) 
 With eivai, as eaovrai els o~dpKa piav, 
 instead of eV. o-ap| p.ia, Matt. 19, 5. Mark 
 
 10, 8. al. comp. Gen. 2, 24 where Sept. for 
 ? i" 1 ^- Luke 3, 5 comp. Is. 40, 4 ; and so 
 i Cor. 14, 22. 2 Cor. 6, 18. Heb. 1, 5. al. 
 saep. With ylvea^ai, as Luke 13, 19 
 eyevfTO els 8ev8pov p.eya. Acts 5, 36. Rom. 
 
 11, 9, quoted from Ps. 69, 23; and so 
 1 Cor. 15, 45. John 16, 20. Rev. 8, 11. al. 
 sacp. 
 
 b) Of measure, degree, extent, chiefly by 
 , way of periphrase for an adverb ; W iner 
 
 5 55. 1. b. Matth. $ 578. d. Luke 13, 11 els TO 
 navTe\es, pr. to completeness, i. e. complete 
 ly, wholly, perfectly. Heb. 7, 25. (JE\. V. 
 H. 7. 2.) 2 Cor. 4, 17 tls vrrep^oXfjv, ex 
 ceedingly. (Luc. D. Mort. 27. 9.) 2 Cor. 
 10, 13 els TU afieTpa, immoderately. 2 Cor. 
 13, 2 els TO iraXiv, again. 2 Tim. 2, 14 els 
 ov8ev, for nothing, not at all. Also els Kevov, 
 in vain, 2 Cor. 6, 1. Gal. 2, 2. Phil. 2, 16. 
 So Diod. Sic. 19. 9. Comp. Hdot. 8. 144 es 
 TO. fjieyio-Ta. Pol. I. 20. 7 els TeXos. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 3. 4 fls TO 8vvaTov. 
 
 c) Of a direction of mind, i. e. as mark 
 ing an object of desire, good will, or also of 
 aversion. a) In a good sense, toivards, 
 for, in behalf of ; Rom. 10, 1 77 ev8oKia TTJS 
 ep-fjs Kap8las vnep avrwv eaTiv els o-a>TT]piav. 
 Judo 21 TO fXeos TOV <vp. irjcrov X. els ^corjv 
 alaviov. Rom. 1, 27 ev Trj 6peei avTcav els 
 dXXrjXovs. 14, 19. Phil. 1, 23 eVtSu/Lu a fls 
 TO dvaXixrai. Matt. 26, 10 epyov naXov elp- 
 ydaraTO els e p,e . Rom. 12, 16. 1 Thess. 4, 
 10. 5, 15. 2 Pet. 3, 9. al. (Judith 6, 17. 
 Thuc. 1. 38.) So after nouns, e. g. ayaTn) 
 ei s Tiva, Rom. 5, 8. 2 Cor. 2, 4. 8. Eph. 1, 
 15. al. 2 Cor. 1, 11 e"s vp,ds ^opio-pa. Acts 
 20, 21. 2 Cor. 9, 13. 1 Pet. 3, 21. (2 
 Mace. 9, 26.) After adjectives, xprjo-Tol els 
 dXXijXovs Eph. 4, 32 ; <pi\6evoi els dXX^- 
 Xovj 1 Pet. 4, 9 ; so Pol. 1. 16. 10. Here 
 belongs the construction of e XTri fw and 
 irio-Tfv w with eZs, (ordinarily c. dat.) these 
 verbs implying an affection or direction of 
 mind towards a person or thing, i. e. to 
 place hope or confidence IN or UPON ; e. g. 
 John 5, 45 et 2 Cor. 1, 10 els ov rjKn iKap.ev, 
 comp. Acts 24, 1 5 e XTT/Sa tj^tev els TOV Seoi/. 
 (Hdian. 7. 10. 1 ets ov r/XiviKeo-av. Plut. 
 Galb. 19.) Matt. 18, 6 T&V Tn&Tevovratv els 
 efjie. John 2, 11. al. saep. So eXnls KOL TTIO-TIS 
 ets Tiva, 1 Pet. 1, 21 ; TTIO-TIS Acts 20, 21. 
 24, 24. al. 7re7r<x 3j;o-ts 2 Cor. 8, 22. 0) 
 fn an unfriendly sense, towards, against ; 
 e. g. Matt 18, 15 et 1 Cor. 6, 18 apaprdveiv 
 els- Luke 12, 10 of epel Xoyoi; els TOV vibv 
 TOV av Zp, . , . fly TO ay. Tn-ev/ia. Mark 3, 29 
 
 6s 8" av pXao-<pr)prio-rj els TO nvevpa TO ayiov. 
 Luke 22, 65. Acts 9, 1. 2 Cor. 10, 1. Col. 
 3, 9.al. (JEl. V. H. 11. 10. Thuc. 1. 130. ib. 
 3. 85. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 2.) After nouns, 
 Heb. 12, 3 aj/rtXoyi a els avTov. Acts 23, 3G 
 eTn^ovXf] e is Tiva. Rom. 8, 7 e^Spa els 3eoV. 
 So Xen. Hell. 7. 4. 34 ly^X^a el s roij 
 %eovs. 
 
 d) Of an intent, purpose, aim, end, i. e. 
 els final. a) In the sense of unto, in or 
 der to or for, i. e. for the purpose of, for the 
 sake of, on- account of; Matt. 8,4 TO Scopes 
 els papTvpiov avTols. V. 34 17 TroXty e^XSev 
 els (rvvdvTT)<riv TW irjcrov. 27, 7 rjyopaaav 
 TOV dypov ds Tcxprjv. v. 10. Mark 1, 4 fidim- 
 <rfj.a p.eTavoias els a(peo-iv d/iapTKuf. Luke 5, 
 4 xaXdaaTe TO. 8 iKTva els aypav. 22, 19 TOVTO 
 TroieiTe els TTJV fp.r)v dvap-vrjo-iv. 24, 20. John 
 
 I, 7. 9, 39. Acts 4, 30. 11,29. 14,26. 
 Rom. 1, 16. 17. 5, 21. 6, 19. 9, 21. 10, 4. 
 15, 18. 1 Cor. 2, 7. 2 Cor. 2, 12. Gal. 3 
 17. Eph. 4, 12 bis. 1 Tim. 1, 16. al. ssep! 
 So Matt. 3, 1 1 /BaTTTi^eiv els fieTavoiav, unto 
 repentance. Matt. 18, 20 o-vj^-yp-ej/ot els TO 
 ep.6v 6Vo/ia, i. e. on my account, for my sake, 
 in order to promote my cause. Before an 
 infinit. c. art. in order to, in order that, etc. 
 Matt. 20, 19 els To,ep.Tvai^ai. Mark 14, 55 et s 
 TO %avaTcao-ai CLVTOV. Luke 20, 20. Rom. 1 , 
 
 II. 11, 11. James 1, 18. al. seep. So 
 Hdian. 1. 6. 20. Xen. An. 6. 5. 14 ; c. infin. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 6. 2. Hence els TI, to what 
 end? wherefore? why? Matt. 14, 31. Mark 
 15, 34 al. els TOV TO, to this end, for this 
 purpose, therefore, Mark 1, 38. Acts 9, 21. 
 Rom. 9. 17. al. els o, to ichich end, where- 
 unto, 2 Thess. 1, 11. 1 Pet. 2, 8. (3) In 
 the sense of to or for, implying use, advan 
 tage, benefit ; thus approaching the nature 
 of the dat. commodi et incommodi, but more 
 emphatic ; Matt. 10, 10 ^17 KT^o-7/o-3e irrjpav 
 els 686v. 20, 1 e^?yX3ei/ pio Soxrao Sat epyd- 
 Tas els TOV dfjiTt-eXmva OVTOV. Mark 8, 19. 20 
 oTe TOVS cipTovs e/<Xao-a els TOVS TTevTaKio-^i.- 
 \iovs KT\. Luke 9, 13. 12, 21. 14, 35 oi/Ve 
 els yrjv, oi/Yf els Konpiav ev SteToV e ort. Matt. 
 5, 13. John 6, 9. Acts 2, 22. Rom. 11, 36 
 et 1 Cor. 8, 6 els avTov,for him, i. e. for his 
 honour and glory. Rom. 13, 14. 15,26. 16, 
 5. 6. 2 Cor. 8, 6. Gal. 4, 11. 6, 4. Eph. 1, 
 5 els UVTQV. 3, 2 ^apts So3eto-a fj.oi els vfj.ds- 
 
 1 Pet. 1, 4 K\T)pOVOfJLiaV TeTT]pr]IJ.(VT]V (It 
 
 vp.ds. al. saep. (Diod. Sic. 2. 57. Xen. An. 
 1. 2. 27. ib. 3. 3. 19. Plato Conv. 184. e. 7 
 So Luke 7, 30 TTJV /3onX?jj/ TOU %eov ^SeYi^- 
 o-av fls eavTovj, i. e. to their own detriment. 
 e) As marking the object of any reference, 
 relation, allusion, into, unto, towards, i. e 
 with reference to, etc. a) Pr. in accoid- 
 
219 
 
 efc 
 
 ance with, conformably to; Matt. 10. 41. 
 42 6 8txop-fvos Trpo(pr)T7]v fls ovop.a npofprj- 
 TOV KT\. i. e. in accordance with the charac 
 ter of a prophet, or as a prophet. Matt. 12, 
 41 et Luke 11, 32 pfTfvorjcrav fly TO xfjpvy- 
 p.a Iwva, i. e. conformably to or at the 
 preaching of Jonah. Acts 7, 53 e Xd/3ere TW 
 vop.ov fls diciTayas dyyeXwj , i. e. according 
 to, by ; see in diarayr). /3) Genr. as to, in 
 respect to, as, concerning, etc. Acts 2, 25 
 Aaj31S yap Xe yei tls avTov concerning him ; 
 so Eph. 5, 32 et Heb. 7, 14. Acts 25, 20 
 dnopovfifvos eyi) fls rrfv r)Tr)o~iv. Rom. 4, 
 20 fls TTJV fTrayyf\iav ov Step/cp^S?;. 16, 19 
 <ro(povs jj.fi> fls TO uyaSov, aKfpaiovs 8e fls TO 
 KOKOV. 2 Cor. 2, 9 fl fls Trdvra invrjuooi eVre. 
 Eph. 3, 16. al. So Luc. Imag. 23. Xen. 
 An. 2. 6. 30. 
 
 4. Sometimes tls c. accus. is found where 
 the natural construction would seem to re 
 quire tv c. dat. as after verbs which imply 
 neither motion nor direction, but simply 
 rest in a place or state. In such cases the 
 idea of a previous coming into that place or 
 state is either actually expressed, or is im 
 plied in the context ; Winer } 54. 4. b. 
 Matth. ^ 596 ; comp. Buttm. 5 151. 1. 8. So 
 Matt. 2, 23 eX3o>j/ /carw/c^o-ei fls TroXiv. 
 Mark 1, 39 KOI TJV Krjpvo-(ra>v fls TO.S a~uva- 
 ycoyds, comp. v. 38 where is Sytapev fls TO.S 
 f^op-evas Kcop-OTToXfis. Mark 2, 1 /cat eio^X- 
 3ei/ fls Kurrtpvaov/j., KOI TJKOIXT ^T] on els oi- 
 KOV e crri, i. e. that he was come into the 
 house. 13, 9. 16. Luke 11, 7 ra TraiSi a p.ov 
 p,fT tp.ov fls Trjv KOITTJV l(Tiv, as in collo 
 quial Engl. my children are to bed. 21, 37. 
 John 9, 7 wayf, vtyai fls TTJV Ko\vp.j3f)%pav 
 TOV StXwdp,. Acts 7, 4. 8, 39. 40 nvfvp.a 
 Kvp tov jjpTracre TOV &i\imrov, fvpfSr/ fie fls 
 "A.a)Tov. 18, 21. 21, 13, comp. dvaftaiveiv 
 in \. 12. 23, 11. al. So Horn. II. 15. 275 
 <pdvrj Xiy fls 686v. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 4 v6p.<n 
 fls TIIS favTuiv x&>pay eKaorot TOVTCOV ndpfi- 
 <TIV. -2.1.5. An. 1. 2. 24. Ml V. H. 7. 8 
 OTI H(paio-Tt(i)v fls EK/Sdrai/a dntSavf. Diod. 
 Sic. 5. 84 Siarp /3a>p els ray VT]<TOVS. Here 
 belongs also in N. T. the apparent con 
 struction of fls with a genitive through the 
 omission of its noun ; as e I s a 8 o v , Acts 
 2, 27. 31, i. e. for tls Sayia a8ov; see in 
 aSrjs. Buttrn. $ 1 32. n. 30. Matth. J 578. g. 
 The phrase in Acts is, eyKaTaXeiVeti/ fls 
 aSou, quoted from Ps. 16, 10 where Sept. 
 for > 3TS } i. e. to leaxe or abandon TO the 
 grave or Sheol ; not strictly to leave IN it. 
 Comp. Gen. 44, 31. In other instances fls 
 and tv are used alternately, according to the 
 different shape of the thought ; e. g. John 
 20, 19. 26 rjX Sfv 6 l^crovs KOI ecmj fls TO 
 
 fjLfarov avTmv, but Luke 24, 36 ravra Se av- 
 TUIV \dkovvTatv avTos 6 ir/crovs fo-rr) tv p.ecr(f> 
 avT&v. Here the attention of John is fixed 
 more on Jesus coming and standing ; that 
 of Luke on his actual presence. John 21, 4, 
 comp. 8, 3. 9. Acts 4, 7. (Xen. Cyr. 4. 1. 1 
 (TTCLS fls TO fjita-ov.) So Ka3J5<r3ai fls Mark 
 13, 3, comp. Matt. 13, 2 ; and Ka3)o-3<n eV, 
 Matt. 26, 69, al. Also, Mark 1, 9 ^X3ei> 
 Ir/o-ovs KOI f/3a7rri (r3j; vrro ivdvvov fls TOV 
 lop8dvr)v ; but Matt. 3, 6 /cat Trao-a 77 irepl- 
 X<apos TOV lopSdj/ou . . . ffiaTrri^ovro fv rw 
 lop8dva> VTT O.VTOV, i. e. the attention in the 
 latter case being fixed upon the act of bap 
 tism ; in the former, also on the coming of 
 Jesus to the Jordan. So too in the phrases 
 vnayf V. Tropfvov fls flprjvrjv or eV flprjvrj, go 
 aicay INTO peace or IN peace, i. e. INTO or IN 
 the enjoyment of peace, welfare, good, the 
 idea being at bottom the same, but expressed 
 under different aspects ; Mark 5, 34. Luke 
 7, 50. James 2, 16. Acts 16, 36 ; see in 
 flprjvr] no. 3. 
 
 NOTE. In composition fls retains its gene 
 ral signification, e. g. a) Of motion into 
 a place ; as eurdyoj, flo-ep^op-ai, eto^/poo. 
 b) Of motion or direction to or towards a 
 place or person ; as flo-aKovca. + 
 
 64?, /u a, tv; gen. fvos, pids, fvos , one, 
 the first cardinal numeral; see Buttm. 70. 
 
 1. Pr. one; thus a) Genr. e. g. with 
 out subst. Luke 18, 19 oi>8f\s dya3oy, fl /LJ 
 fls, 6 3eo r. 1 Cor. 9, 24. Gal. 3, 20. al. 
 Matt. 25, 15 eSco/ce rdXai/ra, <u 8e fiuo, w 8f 
 ?v. al. With a subst. Matt. 6, 27 Tr^w era. 
 John 11, 50. al. Mark 10, 8 8vo fls o-dp/ca 
 fuav. I Cor. 10, 8. al. Matt. 5, 41 p,/Xiov eV. 
 Acts 17, 26. al. (Xen. An. 6. 6. 14.) With 
 a negative, equivalent to not one, none ; 
 Matt. 5,18 IwTa ev rj p.ia Kfpaia ov p.rj TrapeX- 
 3)/. Rom. 3, 12 OVK f&Tiv f&s fvos, not so 
 much as one, not even one, quoted from Ps. 
 14, 3 et 53, 4, where Sept. for irjirca -px ; 
 and so Sept. and inj* 1? xb Judg. 4, 16, 
 comp. Ex. 9, 7. Lehrg. p. 840. So ov8e 
 els, ov8e ei>, not one, not even one, more 
 emphatic than ovo fis, Buttm. $ 70. 1. Matt. 
 27, 14 Trpor ov8e tv pfj[j.a. John 1, 3. Acts 
 4, 32 /cat ov8f fis eXeyej/. Rom. 3, 10 OVK 
 tcTTi Si /catos ov8f fls. 1 Cor. 6, 5. al. So 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 10. Mem. 1. 6. 2. With 
 the art. 6 fls, TO /, the one; Matt. 25, 18. 
 24 TO tv Ta\avrov. 1 Cor. 10, 17 tK TOV 
 fvos apTov. (Xen. An. 5. 4. 11.) Followed 
 by a genit. partitively, Buttm. j 132. 5. a. 
 Matth. 318 sq. Matt. 5. 19 pW ra>v eWoXwt 
 TOVT&V. Mark 6, 15 fls TU>V irpo(pT)Ta>v. 
 Luke 5, 3. John 12, 2. al. So with e /c c. 
 gen. Matt. 18, 12 tv e| avrwi/. Mark 9, 17 
 
efc 
 
 220 
 
 Acts 11, 28. Rev. 5, 5 els 
 
 b) Used distributively, viz. a) e is ... 
 els, one . . . one, i. e. one. . . the other, Matt. 
 20, 21. 24, 41 pa . . . p a. 27, 38. John 20, 
 12. al. Also 6 fls...6 fls, the one... the 
 other, Matt. 24, 40 ; els TOV era 1 Thess. 5, 
 11; els vnep TOV evos 1 Cor. 4, 6. So els 
 ...els... els, Mark 4, 8. Matt. 17,4. Luke 
 
 9, 33. al. Sept. for injO 1HX Lev. 12, 8. 
 2 Chr. 3, 17 ; for inso* inxi /k inx 1 Sam. 
 
 10, 3. 13, 17. 18. So Ecclus! 31," 23. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 2. 4. In like manner, els... 6 ere- 
 pos, one ...the other, Matt. 6, 24 ; 6 fls... 6 
 eTepos, the one ...the other, Matt. 6, 24. Luke 
 
 7, 41. Acts 23, 6 ; 6 els. . . 6 SXXos, Rev. 17, 
 10. /3) els eitao-Tos, each one, every 
 one, Acts 2, 6. 20, 31. Col. 4, 6. al. (Xen. 
 An. 6. 6. 12.) With a gen. partitively, 
 Luke 4, 40. Acts 2, 3. Eph. 4, 7. al. For 
 dva els eKacrros Rev. 21,21, see in dvd no. 3. 
 y) K<z3 eva, *a3 ev, one by one, singly, 
 stnctly for els *a3 era, John 21, 25. 1 Cor. 
 14, 31 ; ot Ka3 era Eph. 5, 33 ; *a3 ev 
 fKcicrTov, each one singly, *a3 ev here quali 
 fying CKOO-TOV, Acts 21, 19. (Xen. Ven. 6. 
 14; K. e. enaa-Tov Cyr. 1. 6. 22. Apol. 15.) 
 So fv *a3 ev, one by one, one after an 
 other, singly, Rev. 4, 8. From the analogy 
 of this correct form has sprung in N. T. 
 the anomalous els ceaS* fls, one by one, 
 instead of els *a3 eva, Mark 14, 19. John 
 
 8, 9. Also 6 Se Ka3 els, Rom. 12, 5. See 
 Lucian Pseudosoph. 9. 
 
 c) Emphatic, one, i. e. a) even one, one 
 single, only one, Matt. 5, 36 ov Svrao-ai play 
 Tpixa \evKTjv fj p.e\aivav Troi^crai. 21, 24. 
 Mark 8, 14. 10, 21. 12, 6. John 7, 21. 
 1 Cor. 10, 17. 2 Pet. 3, 8. al. For OTTO 
 pas Luke 14, 18, see in OTTO no. 3. h. 
 (Xen. An. 4. 7. 9.) Also i. q. only, alone, 
 Mark 2, 7 et p; els 6 3eos. James 4, 12 ; 
 els eva TOTTOV John 20, 7. So Xen. Cyr. 4. 
 1. 17. /3) For one and the same, Rom. 3, 
 30 els 6 3eos, 6s SiKaioxm KT\. 1 Cor. 3, 8. 
 Phil. 2, 2. Sept. and in it Gen. 41, 25. 26. 
 (Wisd. 17, 17. Plut. "A lex. 22.) Fully 
 written, ev KOI TO OVTO, 1 Cor. 11,5. 12, 11. 
 So Diod. Sic. 11. 47. Pol. 2. 62. 4. 
 
 2. Indef. i. q. T\S, one, some one, any one, 
 a certain one; Matt. 19, 16 els irpoe\%>v. 
 With Subst. Matt. 8, 19 els ypaptarevs, 
 i. q. ypapzarevs TLS. Mark 12, 42 p a x*IP a > 
 i. q. x*lP a Tls - J nn 6, 9. Rom. 9, 10. al. 
 With gen. partit. Luke 5, 3. 20, 1. Sept. 
 for in Gen. 22, 2. 42, 16; also inx 
 Sept. Vis, Gen. 26, 10. 27, 44. So Luc . 
 Demonax 15. Hdian. 2. 12. 11. Thuc. 1. 
 
 85. Also fls Tts, a certain; Mark 14, 51 
 els TIS veavio-Kos, and with gen. v. 47 ; e/c c. 
 gen. Luke 22, 50. John 11,49 ; so Diod. Sic. 
 11- 47. In. this use efs sometimes has the 
 force of our indef. article a or an ; as Mati. 
 21,19 O~VKTJV p.iav. James 4, 13 eviavTov eva. 
 Rev. 8, 13. 9, 13. al. So Sept. and ins 
 Ezra 4, 8. Dan. 2, 31. 8, 3. Comp. Gesen" 
 Lehrg. p. 655. Heb. Lex. art. mx no. 4. 
 
 3. From the Heb, as an ordinal, the first, 
 mostly spoken of the first day of the week ; 
 Matt. 28, 1 els p-iav (fjpepav) TU>V vafifidruiv. 
 Mark 16, 2. Luke 24, 1. Acts 20,7. 1 Cor. 
 16, 2. al. So Sept. and ins of the first of 
 the month, Gen. 1,5. 8, 13". Ex. 40, 2. 17. 
 al. See Gesen. Lehrg. p. 701 sq. Heb. Lex. 
 art. in no. 2. (Jos. Ant. 1. 1. 1 av-rrj p.ev 
 av e ir] rj Trpatrr) Tjfjifpa ~Ma>vcnjs S avTrjv 
 fj.tav eiVe.) Joined with devrepos, TpiTos, 
 Rev. 9, 12 fj oval 17 p.la, comp. 11, 14 ; so 
 Hdot. 4. 161. Eurip. Bacch. 680 sq. + 
 
 ela-dyw, f. ^ w , (ya>,) to lead into, to 
 bring in or into, constr. with accus. and els 
 c. ace. of place. Thus of person, Luke 22, 
 54 elo-rjyayov avTov els TOV OIKOV TOV dp%ie- 
 pecos. Acts 9, 8. 21, 28. 29. Pass. v. 37 ; so 
 with els TT)V av\rjv impl. John 18, 16, comp. 
 v. 15; fls TO tf/jdi/ Luke 2, 27; [Acts 22, 24.] 
 Also eltraye iv els TTJV OIKOV ]j.evr)v, i. e. to bring 
 in, to introduce, into the world, Heb. 1, 6. 
 With &8e, Luke 14, 21. Sept. for so^n 
 Gen. 8, 9. 2 K. 9,2. So Plut. Sept. Sap". 
 Conv. 3. Plato Amat. 5. p. 136. c. Of 
 things, Acts 7, 45 ; so Xen. Athen. 2. 3. 
 
 etcra/COfO), f. ov<ropzt, (a/cova),) 1. to 
 hear to, to give heed to, c. gen. 1 Cor. 14, 
 21 ovb~ ovTcas el<raK.ovo-ovTai p.ov. Sept. and 
 yvv Deut. 1, 43. 4, 30. al. Ecclus. 3, 6. 
 Plut. Alcib. 4. Plato Epin. 989. e. 
 
 2. From the Heb. spoken of God s hear 
 ing prayer, to hear, i. e. to hear favourably, 
 to grant, in N. T. only in Pass. Matt. 6, 7. 
 Luke 1, 13. Acts 10, 31. Heb. 5, 7. So 
 Sept. and SJaoj Ps. 4, 2. 4. 6, 9 ; n;5 Ps. 
 4, 2. 13, 4. 
 
 etO-Se^O/Xtti, f. 0/ iat, (Se xo/iat,) Mid. 
 depon. to receive into one s house, city, 
 country, or to oneself, in hospitality, etc. 
 Wisd. 19, 16. Xen. Hell. 1. 1. 21 IleptVStoi 
 flo~eo eavTO es TO &O~TV TO orpaTonedov. 
 Sept. every where for Heb. ^3^ , where 
 God is said to gather, to collect, the exiles of 
 Israel into their own land, Jer. 23, 3. Ez. 
 11, 17. 20, 34. 41. al. Hence in N. T. 
 2 Cor. 6, 17 Kayo) elo-8f^op.ai vfj.as, and I 
 will receive you, sc. into my favour; ap 
 parently in allusion to Jer. 32, 37. 38, where 
 
221 
 
 Sept. o-vvdya> for y?j3 ; comp. Zeph. 3, 20, 
 where Heb. 1 f ?f3 > Sept. eta-Se^o/nat. 
 
 eicreifAi, imperf. fl&jjeiv, (et/u to go, 
 Buttm. ^ 108. V.) to into, to enter, constr. 
 with els c. ace. of place, Acts 3, 3. 21, 26. 
 Heb. 9, 6 ; with irpos c. ace. of pers. Acts 
 21, 18. Scot, for Kta Ex. 28, 29. 35. 
 Hdian. 8. 7. 22. Xen. Apol. 15; c. npos 
 Mem. 3. 11. 1. 
 
 etorep^O/iat, f. elo-f\fvo-op.ai, (ep^o/zat.) 
 aor. 2 flurfk^ov, to go or come into, to enter. 
 
 1 . Of persons, constr. with tls c. ace. of 
 place, Matt. 6, 6 ereX3e fls TO Tapie iov. 24, 
 38. Mark 3, 27. Luke 9, 34. John 18, 28. 
 Acts 11, 20. Rev. 22, 14. al. saep. With 
 fls c. ace. implied, Matt. 9, 25. Mark 13, 15. 
 Luke 14, 23. 17, 7. 24, 3 comp. v. 1. 24, 
 29. 1 Cor. 14, 23. 24. al. Sept. for tfia 
 Gen. 6, 18. 19, 3. al. saep. So Hdian. 1. 
 
 15, 15. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 57 dtripyenu fls 
 ra |3a<n Xfia. With tls c. ace. of pers. Acts 
 
 16, 40 Rec. fls TTJV AvSiW, i. e. into her 
 house ; but later edit, -rrpos. Acts 19, 30 
 tls TO o~TJp.ov, i. e. unto the people, into the 
 assembly. (Pol. 3. 44. 10.) Acts 20, 29 fls 
 vp,as, among you. Also of demons entering 
 into the bodies of persons, Mark 9, 25. Luke 
 8, 30. 22, 3. al. or into swine Mark 5, 12. 
 13. Luke 8, 32. 33. With els implied, 
 Matt. 12, 45. Luke 11,26. With V c. dat. 
 of pers. Rev. 11, 11 Trvfv/J.a fcor/s etcrr)A3ei/ 
 tv avrois, (Rec. eV aurovs,) i. e. life entered 
 and remained in them ; see in eV no. 4, and 
 comp. Winer $ 54. 4. Matth. $ 577. With 
 irapd c. dat. of pers. to enter in by or with 
 any one, to lodge with, Luke 19, 7 ; irpos 
 c. ace. of pers. to enter to any one, i. e. into 
 his house, etc. Mark 15, 43. Acts 10, 3. 
 
 17, 2. Rev. 3, 20. (Ceb. Tab. 29. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 10. 1.) With VTTO, c. ace. of 
 place, e. g. inro TTJV tmyijv, Matt. 8, 8. So 
 c. adv. eo-o) Matt. 26, 58 ; STTOV Mark 14, 
 14; wSf Matt. 22, 12. 
 
 2. Trop. of persons, with els c. ace. of 
 state or condition; Matt. 18,8. 9 fls TTJV 
 <afjv. Mark 9, 43. 45 ; fls TTJV /3acriXeiai> TOV 
 SeoC, Matt. 5, 20. 18, 3. 19, 24. Mark 9, 47. 
 John 3, 5. Acts 14, 22 ; els TTJV ^apav TOV 
 Kvpiov. Matt. 25, 21. 23 ; els TT\V Karcnravcriv, 
 Heb. 3, 11. 4, 1. 3. With els implied, Matt. 
 7, 13. 23, 14. Luke 11, 52. 13, 24. So 
 Matt. 26, 41 tlo-fpxfo-^ai fls TTfipao-fJLov, to 
 enter into temptation, i. e. to fall into it. 
 John 4, 38 iifiels fls TOV KOTTOV ai/Ttav eicre- 
 Xj;Xv3aT , ye have entered into their labours, 
 i. e. ye follow them and reap the fruits of 
 their labours. 
 
 3. Of things, to enter in or into, equiva 
 
 lent to el(r(pfpop.ai, to be brought fir put 
 into ; so of food, fls TO ord^a, Matt. 15,11. 
 Acts 11, 8; comp. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 17 TO 
 elo-iovra. With Bid c. gen. of that through 
 which any thing enters; Luke 18, 25 8ia 
 rpv/zaXtay pa(pio bs eicreXSeTi/. Matt. 19, 24 
 Grb. comp. Plato Tim. 78. e. Trop. Rom. 
 5, 12. Luke 9, 46 eio^XSe SiaXoyioyzo? ev 
 avTols i. e. there arose a dispute among 
 them. (Jos. Ant. 14. 14.4 A.VTUVIOV O!KTOS 
 flo-fpXfrai. Eurip. Iph. in Aul. 1385; see 
 Herm. ad Vig. p. 758.) James 5, 4 at /3oat 
 fls TO. &>Ta Kvpiov flo~f\rj\v %ao-iv. So hope, 
 Heb. 6, 19 tlafpxop-fvov els TO fo~u>Tfpov 
 KT\. entering in, i. e. extending even unto. 
 
 4. From the Heb. eicrep^o/^at K a I e - 
 e pxop.ai, to go in and out, spoken of one s 
 daily walk and life ; e. g. of Jesus, Acts 1, 
 21 e $ r)p.as, i. e. among us, in our com 
 pany. Trop. John 10, 9. Comp. eiW. KM 
 fKnopfvop.ai Acts 9, 28. So Sept. and Heb. 
 KS 1 ;} Sta, 2 Chr. 1, 10; for which Sept. 
 ei cr7r. KOI fKTropfvop.ai, Deut. 31, 2 ; euroSoy 
 *cat eoSor, 1 Sam. 29, 6. -f 
 
 etovcaXed), w, f. eVco, (xaXea),) to call 
 in, to invite in, Luc. Pseudol. 23. Xen. OZc. 
 4. 15. In N. T. only Mid. to call in, to in- 
 vile in, sc. unto oneself, into one s house, 
 Acts 10, 23. 
 
 etcroSo9, ou, %, (6Sor,) pr. way into a 
 place, entrance, Horn. Od. 10. 90. Sept. for 
 Kl aa Judg. 1, 24. 25. In N. T. entrance, 
 the act or power of entering, with tls c. ace. 
 of place 2 Pet. 1, 11 ; c. gen. Heb. 10, 19 ; 
 with TJ-pos c. ace. of person, entrance to any 
 one, access, 1 Thess. 1,9. 2, 1 ; absol. 
 Acts 13, 24. Sept. and xla 1 Sam. 16, 4. 
 Mai. 3, 2. So Hdian. 1. 13. 2. Plato Tim. 
 61. a. 
 
 ao-7T7?Sacw, w, f. TJO-CO, (7n?8da>,) to leap 
 in, to spring in, e. g. fls TOV o^Xot among 
 the people Acts 14, 14 ; absol. Acts 16, 29. 
 Sept. for soa Am. 5, 19. Dem. 539. 27. 
 Xen. An. 1. 5. 8. 
 
 eicnropevo/j,a(,, f. evcro/zat, Pass, depon. 
 
 1 . to go in, to enter ; of persons, with e Is 
 c. ace. of place, Mark 1, 21. 6, 56. 11, 2. 
 Acts 3, 2 ; tls impl. Luke 8, 16. 11, 33. 19, 
 30, comp. Mark 11,2. Sept. for 503 Gen. 
 23, 10. 40, 29. al. So Ceb. Tab. 4 ; absol. 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 21. With Trpos c. ace. of 
 pers. to enter to any one, i. e. into his house, 
 Acts 28, 30 ; so Sept. for &fia Gen. 44, 30. 
 Esth. 2, 14. With adv. onov Mark 5, 40 5 
 ov Luke 22, 10 ; also KOTO TOVS O*KOVS, from 
 house to house, Acts 8, 3. 
 
222 
 
 K 
 
 2. Of tilings, to enter in, 
 
 no. 3. So with els, Matt. 15, 17. Mark 7, 
 15. 18. 19. Trop. i. q. to arise in the mind, 
 Mark 4, 19. 
 
 3. From the Heb. flo~jropevofj.ai Kal e/wro- 
 pevofiai, to go in and out, spoken of one s 
 daily life and walk, Acts 9, 28 ; see fully in 
 eio~ep^op.ai no. 4. 
 
 eicrrpe^a), aor. 2 elo-f8pap.oi>, (rpe ^w,) 
 to run in, e. g. into a house, absol. Acts 12, 
 14. 2 Mace. 5, 26 els nji> TroXu/. Hdian. 
 1. 17. 7. Xen. An. 5. 2. 16. 
 
 eicryepco, (<e pco,) aor. 2 etonji e yKoi , aor. 
 1 elo-r)veyKa, to bear into, to bring into, con- 
 str. with ace. and els c. ace. of place, 1 Tim. 
 6, 7 ov8fv elo-r)VfyKafj.ev els TOV Koo-p.ov. Heb. 
 13, 11 ; els imp]. Luke 5, 18. 19. Sept. for 
 X-qn Num. 31, 54. al. (Plut. Mor. II. p. 24. 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 8. 10.) Of persons, with els 
 c. ace. of state, condition, i. q. to lead into, 
 e. g. els 7reipao-p.6v, Matt. 6, 13. Luke 11, 
 4- Trop. elo-(pfpetv n els ray aKods TWOS, 
 to bring to (into) the ears of any one, to an 
 nounce, Acts 17, 20. Comp. Eurip. Bacch. 
 649 TOVS \6yovs yap elacpepeis Kaivovs del. 
 Soph. Aj. Flagell. 149 tls 3>rca (pepeiv. 
 
 elra, adv. then. 1. Of time, i.e. after 
 wards, after that, Mark 8, 25 etra TrdXiv eVre - 
 SIJK*. Luke 8, 12. John 13, 5. 19,27. 20,27. 
 James 1,15. So Plut. Mor. II. p. 19. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 2. 13. Emphat. with a participle, 
 Mark 4, 17 eira yfvop.evrjs SXtyewy KT\. 
 comp. Buttm. j 144. n. 13. 149. m. 19. 
 Kiihner $ 312. n. 8. So Xen. An. 1. 2. 25. 
 
 2. Of order and succession, as Trparov... 
 tira, 1 Tim. 2. 13. 3, 10. Mark 4, 28 bis ; 
 TTOUITOV, 8evTepov, rpt roi/ . . . etra, 1 Cor. 1 2, 
 28 ; eWra . . . etra 1 Cor. 15, 7. 24 ; invert 
 ed, v. 5. So TrputTov . . . etra Xen. Mem. 1. 
 2 1. An. 1. 3. 2. 
 
 3. As a continuative particle, then, so 
 then, consequently, Heb. 12, 9 ; comp. Buttm. 
 5 149. m. 19. Plut. de esu Cam. 2. 2. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 13. 
 
 el re, see in el III. 2. i. 
 
 eto^a, see e2to. 
 
 K : and e before a vowel (Buttm. { 26. 
 6), a prep, governing only the genitive, with 
 the primary signif. out of, from, of; Lai. e, 
 ex ; spoken of such objects as before were 
 iTi or wilhin another, (see in OTTO init.) but 
 are now separated from it, either in respect 
 of place, time, source or origin, etc. It is 
 the direct antithesis of ds. Sept. chiefly 
 for ft. See Winer $ 51. Kiihner j 288. 2. 
 Matth. $ 569. 
 
 1. Of PLACE, which is the primary and 
 most frequent use, out of, from, viz. 
 
 a) After verbs implying motion of any 
 kind out of or from any place or object, e. g. 
 verbs of going, coming, sending, throwing, 
 falling, gathering, separating, removing, and 
 very many others of like meaning. Matt. 2, 
 6 Koi crv BTjSXee/z, (K crov yap e ^eXeuo-erat 
 fiyovp-tvos. Mark 5, 2. Matt. 7, 5 e /c/SaXe TTJV 
 doKov etc TOV 6(p%a\p.ov (TOV. 13, 52. John 2, 
 15. Luke 2, 4 dvelBrj la>o~ri(p fK noXecas Na- 
 fapeV els TT)V lovdaiav. Mark 1, 11 <pwf] 
 lyevfTo fK TU>V ovpavuv. 9, 7. Matt. 17, 5. 
 Luke 10, 18 fK TOV ovpavov ireaovra. 17, 24. 
 23, 55. John 1, 19 aTTfVreiXai e lepcxroX. 
 13, 1. Heb. 3, 16. Matt. 2, 15 e AlyvnTov 
 e/caXecra TOV mov p.ov. 13,49 d(popiovo-i TOVS 
 
 TTOVrjpOVS fK. fJLfO-OV T. SlK. Mark 11,8 fKOITTOV 
 
 fK TWV dfvopojv. Rom. 11, 24. Mark 13, 27 
 fnio-vva^fi, TOVS fK\fKTovs fK TU>V recrcr. Qve- 
 pcov. 2 Thess. 2, 7 e /c p.fo-ov yfvrjTai, i. e. 
 be taken away. Rev. 2, 5. Mark 13, 15 apai 
 TI fK Trjs oiKias. Matt. 24, 17. (Xen. Cyr. 
 7. 2. 5.) Mark 16, 3 TIS dtroKvXio-ei TOV Xi- 
 3oi/ eK -rijs Zvpas. Acts 23, 10. 27, 29. 30 
 (pvyflv fK TOV TrXotov. al. saepiss. Comp. "(B 
 Heb. Lex. no. 2. So Hdian. 1. 15. 2. Xenl 
 Hell. 1. 1. 32 (pvyetv eK. An. 2. 3. 26 Xa/i- 
 fidvfiv fK. With a gen. of person, out of or 
 from whose presence, number, or the like, 
 any person or thing proceeds, etc. John 8, 
 42 eyo) yap fK TOV SeoO e ^^XSoi/. Acts 3, 
 22. 23. 19, 34. 20, 30. 1 Cor. 5, 13. Heb. 
 
 5, 1. 1 John 2, 19. al. Mark 7, 20 TO eVc TOV 
 dv Sp. TTopevopevov. So Xen. Ven. 1 2. 9. Also 
 of person? out of whom demons are cast, or 
 depart; T\Lirk 7, 26. 29. 9, 25. Luke 4, 35. 
 Here it is interchanged with oVd, as Luke 
 4,41. 8, 3. 33; see in OTTO note 1. So 
 by Hebr. e ep^ecr3ai eK TTJS oo-(pvos TIVOS, to 
 come forth out of the loins of any one, i. e. 
 to be born to him, Heb. 7, 5, comp. v. 10. 
 Sept. and fbna XS^ Gen. 35, 11. 2 Chr. 
 
 6, 9. 
 
 b) After verbs implying direction out of 
 or from any place or object ; thus marking 
 the terminus de quo, the point from which 
 the direction sets off or tends. Luke 5, 3 
 
 Sao-Kev fK TOV irXoiov. John 19, 23 e /c TWV 
 avca^fv ixpavTos. Mark 11, 20 o~uKrjv ff-rjpap.- 
 
 Tjv eK pia>v. (Sept. Kore crrpe\^e fK pifav 
 Spy for ttJ iCJa Job 28, 9.) Acts 28, 4 K pe- 
 fj.dfj.evov TO Srjpiov fK Trjs ^etpor avTov. (Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 10. 13.) v. 17. Rev. 9, 13. Comp. 
 Matth. -J 574. p. 1133. So Jos. Ant. 14. 7. 
 1. Xen. An. 1. 8. 10 elxv TO. SpeVara e x 
 d6vuv els TrXdyiov aTrorera/xeVa. By 
 Hebraism, Rev. 18, 20 eKpivfv 6 Seoj TO 
 Kp ip.a vp.<av e l avr^s, and 19, 2 f^e8iKT](re TO 
 alfj,a TU>V 8ov\a>v avTov fK TTJS xeipbs avTTjS, 
 ;. e. God has avenged or taken vengeance 
 
223 
 
 of or from her. Sept. eVcSt/ce^a e /c for cpj 
 I*? Cn 2 K. 9, 7 ; Sept. e /cftre a) e /c for 13 VJ 
 1*3 M Gen. 9, 5 ; Sept. 8i/caa v. /cpiVw e 
 for p? BSti 1 Sam. 24, 16. 2 Sam. 18, 19. 
 So in constr. pnegn. Rev. 15, 2 TOVS vt- 
 Kcavras e /c TOV Sqpi ou KT\. i. e. those who 
 come off conquerors from or over the beast. 
 As marking the direction in which one 
 person or thing is placed from or in respect 
 to another, as KaStVat, iardvai, fivm, eic 
 e t a r , tK dei&v, e fdmvfMWj /rom /ie 
 right, from the left, where in Engl. we use 
 at or on the right, etc. Matt. 20, 21. 23. 
 22, 44. 25, 33. 26, 64. Mark 10, 37. Luke 
 1,11. Acts 2, 25. 34. Heb. 1, 13. So Sept. 
 and ")? Ex. 14, 22. 29. 1 Sam. 23, 19. 24. 
 Ps. 16, 8. See Heb. Lex. "jo no. 3. h. So 
 Pol. 5. 7. 12. Xen. Cyr. 8. 5. 15 SeiSy 
 % dpio-rtpds. An. 4. 8. 2. Eq. 7. 3. Comp. 
 also Lat. a dextra, a fronte ; Fr. dessus, 
 dessous, etc. In such constructions the 
 mind passes from the place specified to it 
 self; we in Engl. pass from ourselves to 
 thej)lace specified ; comp. in diro no. 1. c.jS. 
 Winer 5 51, e /r. 
 
 c) Trop. of a state or condition out of 
 which one comes, is brought, or tends ; after 
 verbs of motion, direction, and the like. John 
 10. 39 e i)A3ev e /c TTJS x fl pos avrfov, i. e. out 
 of their power, v. 28. Rom. 13, 11 e VTTVOV 
 eytp%r)vcu. Rom. 6, 4 riytp^r) Xptoroy e /c 
 vfKpuiv. v. 9. 7, 4. al. Acts 17, 3 dvaarfjvat 
 f< vfKp&v. v. 31. 4, 2. Rom. 6, 13 Z>vras 
 
 fK VfKptoV. 11, 15. Col. 1, 18 TTpCHTOTOKOS fK 
 
 vtKpw. Rom. 7, 24 TIS pe pvo-fTai e /c /crX. 
 Luke 1, 74. 2 Cor. 1, 10. 5, 8. Gal. 3, 13 
 Xp. jjp.us f^rfyopao-fv fK TTJS Kardpas. John 
 12, 27 (TUMTOV fj.e fK TTJS wpas TOVTTJS. Heb. 
 5, 7. Luke 1, 71. (Xen. An. 3. 2. 11.) John 
 17, 15 Iva. TTiprjo-ys OVTOVS fK TOV Trovrjpov. 
 Rev. 3, 10. 2, 21 p-fravofjcrai e /c TTJS Trop- 
 vfias. V. 22. 9, 20. 21. Acts 1, 25 avrooroXj) 
 e TIS irapfftr) Iov8aj. Also John 5, 24. 
 2 Tim. 2, 26. James 5, 20. 1 Pet. 1, 18 et 
 1 Cor. 9, 19. 1 Pet. 2, 9. 2 Pet. 2, 21. Rev. 
 14, 13 dv(nrav<Ta>vTai eVc TUV KOTTW avnav. 
 al. saep. Horn. II. 10. 107. Hdian. 7. 12. 13. 
 Lys. 179. 27. 
 
 d) Before a genit. expressing a whole 
 out of or from which a part is taken or is 
 spoken of, i. e. in a partitive sense ; comp. in 
 OTTO no. 1. e. Thus a) Of a whole class, 
 number, genus, or the like, out of which 
 one is taken, of which he forms part ; Sing. 
 Luke 22, 3 ovra fK TOV dpi3fj.ov rv 8<a8fKa. 
 John 15, 19 bis. 1 Cor. 12, 15. 16 OVK ei/xt 
 (fcrri) f< TOV o-u>p.aros. Acts 10, 1. So 
 c. gen. of a noun Plur. or collect, where 
 Greek writers usually have the simple gen 
 
 itive, (comp. Acts 23, 6. 1 Tim. 1, 20,; 
 Winer } 30. 5. Matth. 5 322. Buttm. 5 132. 
 
 5. a ; so after dvai expr. or impl. Matt. 26. 
 73 Koi (rv f avTwj/ et. John 1, 24. 6, 7i. 
 
 10, 26. 18, 17. 25. Acts 21, 8. 2 Tim. 3, 
 
 6. al. Comp. in /u II. 8. c. (Xen. Mem 
 3. 6. 17.) After a numeral or pronoun ; e. g. 
 fls etc. Matt. 10, 29 fv e avrw. Mark 9, 
 17. Luke 15, 4. al. S^o Mark 16, 12. John 
 1, 35 ; Tre ire e avrav Matt. 25, 2 ; Trpcoroy 
 e Acts 26, 23 ; 8fKaTtjv <k Heb. 7, 4. (Xen. 
 Hell. 1. 2. 9.) After T \s indef. Heb. 4, 1 
 SoKfj Tts f vfjitov. James 2, 16 ; Ttves Luke 
 
 11, 15. Acts 11, 20. Rom. 11, 14. (Hdian 
 3. 2. 18. Dem. 1265. 28.) After T ls inter- 
 rog. Matt. 21, 31 TIS TV 8vo. Luke 11, 
 5. John 8, 46. al. After ov8fis John 7, 19. 
 etc. With Tivfs impl. John 16, 17 ; rives 
 v. TroXXoi Rev. 11.9. /3) After verbs sig 
 nifying to eat, drink, or partake of any thing ; 
 where the usual construction in Greek 
 writers is with the simple genitive ; Buttm. 
 5 132. 10. i. Kiihner 273. 4. c. So after 
 eVSiW 1 Cor. 9, 7. 11, 28; (paye iv Luke 
 22, 16. John 6, 26. 50. 51. Rev. 2, 7 ; TrtW 
 Matt. 26, 29. John 4, 13. 14. Rev. 14, 10. 
 18, 3 ; fjifTfxfiv 1 Cor. 10, 17 comp. 11,28. 
 Sept. e o-atW fK for p b?X 2 Sam. 12, 3. 
 2 K. 4, 40; (pdyopai e* Ecclus. 11, 19; 
 nivfiv fK for "fi nnffl 2 Sam. 12. 3. Gen. 9. 
 21. y) After verbs of giving, receiving, 
 destroying, and the like ; as d-rroKTfiixa, Matt 
 23, 34 KOI f avTcSv diroKTfVfiT KT\. Luke 
 11, 49 ; d7roXXv/Lu John 6, 39 ; /3aXXw Rev. 
 2, 10 ; 8ia8i8vpi John 6, 11 ; S/Sw/xt Matt. 
 25, 8. 1 John 4, 13. Rev. 3, 9; et>piWo 
 2 John 4 ; Sararoco Luke 21, 16 ; Xa^jSdi/w 
 Rev. 18, 4 ; /*aoriyd&> Matt. 23, 24 ; crvvd- 
 ya> 13, 47. (Plut. Cim. 5 Xa/3o>i/ e /c TWV . . . 
 aa-m Sui/.) In such cases an accus. would 
 imply the whole ; and Gr. writers to ex 
 press a part usually put the simple genitive 
 (comp. Rev. 2, 17) ; Buttm. { 132. 5. c. 
 Matth. ^ 323. 
 
 NOTE 1 . On the mutual relation and occa 
 sional interchange of e /c and dno, see in drrd 
 init. and note 1, p. 75. 
 
 2. Of TIME, as marking the beginning 
 of a period of time, a point from which on 
 ward any thing takes place ; so e /c KoiXias 
 
 Tpos, Matt. 19, 12. Luke 1, 15. al. (Sept. 
 for "53X IBM Ps. 22, 11 ; BX 15BT3 p s . 
 49, 1.) e /c vtoTrjTos Matt. 19, 20.; e /c xp6i><ov 
 IKOVUV Luke 8, 27 ; e apx^s John 6, 64 ; 
 tK yfVfTTjs 9, 1 ; e /c TOV aiatvos 9, 32 ; also 
 Acts 9, 33. 15, 21. 24, 10. al. So J51. 
 V. H. 3. 4. Hdian. 6. 2. 7. Plato Men. 234. 
 e. Hence it may sometimes be rendered 
 after, as Rom. 1,4 e dvao-rdo-tatv 
 
224 
 
 Rev. 17, 11 e /c TCOV eVrd e ori, after the se 
 ven, i. e. their successor. So by Hebr. 
 2 Pet. 2, 8 jjp.epai e r]p-fpas, pr. day cmZ of 
 <&zy, or as in Engl. day after day ; so Sept. 
 for fii i Dl" 1 Gen. 39, 10 j comp. Lev. 25, 
 50. Deut. 15, 20. With an adject, or pron. 
 it forms sometimes an adverb of time, e. g. 
 e avTTjs sc. &pas, from this time, immedi 
 ately, Mark 6, 25 ; e inavov sc. xpdVou, of 
 a long time, of old, long, Luke 23, 8 ; e /c 
 TOVTOV sc. -%p6vov,from this time, afterwards, 
 John 6, 66 ; e /c Sevrepov, a second time, 
 again, Acts 10, 15 ; e /c rpirov Matt. 26, 44. 
 al. Winer 555. 1. c. Diod. Sic. 15. 43 f| 
 avTrjs. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 8 e /c TOUTOU. Mem. 
 2. 9. 8. 
 
 3. Of the ORIGIN, SOURCE, CAUSE, that 
 from which any thing proceeds or is deri 
 ved. Here e /c marks the nearer, immediate, 
 direct source or cause, in distinction from 
 OTTO ; see in OTTO no. 3 init. and the authors 
 there cited. This is strictly the primary 
 sense of the genitive case itself, which is 
 also so used both in N. T. and in Greek 
 writers ; e. g. 2 Cor. 4, 7. 1 Thess. 5, 8. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 1 ter. Spoken 
 
 a) Of persons, viz. of the place, stock, 
 family, condition, out of which one is deri 
 ved, or to which he belongs ; e. g. a) 
 Of the place, circle, community, whence 
 one is, where one resides ; Luke 8, 27 avrjp 
 TIS fK TTJS TroXewy. 23, 7 on e /c TTJS eovo-ias 
 HpcoSou e o-ri. John 1, 47. Acts 23, 34. al. 
 So 6 e vp.a>v, of you, i. e. of your city, com 
 munity, Col. 4, 9. 12. So Hdian. 6. 7. 7. 
 Luc. D. Mort. 27. 9. Diod. Sic. 16. 61 ult. 
 So Luke 11,13 6 irarrjp 6 e ovpavov, 
 heavenly Father ; elsewhere usually eV ov- 
 pawa Matt. 5, 45. 6, 9. 7, 21. al. Further, 
 Acts 6, 9 of e /c rrjs crvvayatyrjs KrX. Rom. 
 16, 10 ot e /c TO>V AptoTo/3otiXov. Phii. 4, 22 
 of e /c rf/s Kaicrapos olidas. John 10, 16. 
 Comp. Xen. An. 1. 2. 18 of e/c TTJS dyopas, 
 the market-people. Epict. Fragm. J61 of e /c 
 TraXaio-rpa?, the athletae. Viger. p. 601. 
 /3) Of family, race, ancestors, and the like. 
 Luke 1, 5 lepevs TIS e f(prjfj.epias Aftta. 
 V. 27 et 2, 4 e at/cou Aa/3t 6 . Acts 4, 6. 13, 
 21. Rom. 9, 5. 24. Heb. 7, 14. Acts 15,23 
 SeX<pot of e &v<v, i. e. gentile Christians. 
 Rom. 9, 6 of e lo-paijX, i. e. Israelites. 
 Acts 17, 26 e evbs at/iaroy. John 3, 6 yeyev. 
 e/c Tr)s crapKos. Matt. 3, 9 e /c TV XiStoi eyet- 
 pai TfKva TCO A/3paa/i. Hcb. 7, 6. So e /c 
 a-Trepp-aros TWOS, of or from the seed, i. e. 
 family, race, of any one, John 7, 42. Rom. 
 1,3/2 Tim. 2, 8. (So Sept. for 5 > in- ja 
 Ruth 4, 12. 1 K. 11, 14.) With gen. of 
 the mother, -yewao-Sat e /c yvvautos, Matt. 1, 
 
 3. 5. 6. 16. Gal. 4, 4. 22. 23. So Arr. Exp. 
 Alex. 2. 16. 2. Hdian. 5. 7. 1 ; comp. Horn. 
 II. 5. 896. y) Of condition or state ; John 
 8, 41 f]fj.f~is fK Tropvfias ov yeyewjj/xe3a. So 
 of e /c Treptro/ii;? Tricrrot, i. e. believers out of 
 the circumcision, Jewish Christians, Acts 
 10, 45. Rom. 4, 12. Gal. 2, 12. 
 
 b) Of a person or thing as the source out 
 of or from which any thing proceeds, is de 
 rived, to which it pertains or is to be as 
 cribed. Thus a) Of any source of in 
 formation or knowledge; Matt. 12, 33 e /c 
 yap rov KapTrov TO Sevdpov yivaxr/cerat. Luke 
 6, 44. John 12, 34 fjfjiels rjKoixrafjiev e/c row 
 Popov. Rom. 2, 18. (Xen. An. 7. 7. 43 bis.) 
 Or of proof, James 2, 18 Set ^w o-oi e /c TU>V 
 f pycav p.ov TTJV TT KTTLV p.ov. 3, 13. Or from 
 which any judgment is drawn, from, out of, 
 where in Engl. by, according to; Matt. 12, 
 37 e /c yap TUV Xo ycov crou 8iKaia>%f]<TT] /crX. 
 Luke 19, 22 e /c TOV OTop-ards crov Kpivfa (re. 
 Rev. 20, 12. So Sept. e /c TOV K\rjpov p,epteis 
 TT]V K\jjpovofjLtav Num. 26, 56, where e * for 
 >1 ?~^?. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 21 e /c TUV epyuv /cat 
 aiiTol Kpivofjifvoi. ib. 2. 3. 6. /3) Gerir. 
 Mark 11, 30 ro /3a7rrtcrp.a Iwdwou e ^ ovpa 
 vov TJV, 77 e ^ df3pa)7TQ)j . V. 31. Matt. 21,19 firj- 
 KCTI fK (rov Kapnos yfvrjTai. Luke 1 , 78 dra- 
 TO\TJ e | v^jsovs. John 4, 22 17 o-wrqpm e /c rwt 
 lovfiatw// ea-Tiv, i. e. is first revealed to the 
 Jews and proceeds from them to others. 
 Luke 10, 11. John 10, 32. 1 Cor. 15, 47. 
 2 Cor. 5, 2 TO e ovpavov, i. e. heavenly. 
 John 3, 25 ^r^o-if e /c ran; p.aS^rcoj , i. 6. 
 proceeding from the disciples of John. v. 
 27. 7 S 22. Acts 5, 38. 19, 25. Rom. 2, 29. 
 
 10, 17. 12, 18 ro e vp.a>v, i. e. so fargs it 
 is q/" or from you, depends on you. (Horn. 
 
 11. 1. 525.) Heb. 2, 11. 1 John 4, 7. Rev. 
 15, 8. al. saep. So 1 Cor. 2, 12 ro wvevfjui 
 TO e /c Sieoi), i. e. divine. 2 Cor. 8, 7. 9, 2. 
 Spoken of an affection or state of mind out 
 of which an emotion flows, 1 Tim. 1, 5 
 dyaTTT) e/c /caSapa? /capS/ar. 1 Pet. 1, 22. 
 2 Cor. 2, 4 e /c TroXX^y SXi ^ewy /cat crwo^j;? 
 Kapftias eypo v/m up.?!/ Sta /crX. Comp. Xen. 
 An. 7. 7. 43 crot e /c T^? ^u^ijy (pt Xoy i^. 
 Spec. 1 Cor. 9, 13 eVSt eti/ e * rou fepov, to 
 ea< /?-o7w if/ze temple, of the sacrifices, v. 14 
 fjv e /c TGI) fvayyeXiov. Heb. 13, 10. y) 
 As marking not only the source and origin, 
 but also the character of any person or thing 
 as derived from that source, and implying 
 connection, dependence, adherence, devo- 
 tedness, likeness, etc. John 7, 17 yi>&>o-era 
 Trept TTJS 8i8axrjs, TTOTfpov e /c TOV 3eov ecrTiv. 
 8, 47 6 cov e /c TOV Seoi) TO. pffiaTa TOV 3eov 
 a/covei, KT\. 1 John 2, 29. 3, 9. 10. 4, 1. 2. 
 3. 4. 6. al. John 8, 44 e /c roO 5ta/3oXov. 
 
fC 
 
 225 
 
 etc 
 
 1 John 3, 8. John 3, 6. 8 rfjs <rapKos. 
 3, 31 tK TTJS yrjs, bis. 8, 23 e /c TQ>J> ara), 
 K Ttov iivci). John 17, 14. 16 en TOV Ko(rp.ov. 
 1 John 2, 16. 4, 5. al. Trop. of the source 
 of character or quality, implying adherence 
 to, connection with, that source ; John 18, 
 37 TTUS 6 toy tK TTJS uX^Se/ay. 1 John 2, 21. 
 3, 19. Gal. 3, 10 oaot yap ft- epycoj/ VOULOV 
 flviv. \. 126 8f v6fj.os OVK tarriv e< TriVrewy. 
 Hence : with its gen. preceded by the 
 article, forms a periphrasis for an adj. or 
 particip. e. g. 6 c trio-revs, he of faith, a be 
 liever, i. q. 6 TTioTfvccv, Rom. 3, 26. Gal. 3, 
 7. 9. Rom. 4, 16 6 iriareas Aftpadp., one 
 of Abraham s faith, who has faith like him. 
 So 6 fK i/d/iov, one of the law, i. e. under the 
 law, an adherent of it, Rom. 4, 14. 16. 
 Also Rom. 2, 8 oi e epfteias, i. q. epl 
 V. 27 17 eK (pvo-fu>s aKpo/3voTta, i. q. 
 Tit. 2, 8 6 e fvavrias, i. q. 6 evavrlos. 
 
 c) Of the efficient cause or agent, that 
 from which any action or thing directly pro 
 ceeds, is produced, effected, from, by, etc. 
 Rom. 9, 11 et Gal. 5, 8 e /c TOV KaXovvros. 
 1 Cor. 8, 6 e | ow ra iravra. 2 Cor. 1, 11 
 TroXXcov ... ro eiy i^ay ^aptcr/ia. So e 
 v/iavrov, of myself, John 12,49. Likewise 
 Matt. 1,18 (v yatrffu e^oucra e/c TTV. ay. V. 20 
 ro eV avTjj ytv. fK trvtii JJ.OTOS tcmv dyiov. 
 Rom. 9. 10 f fvos KOLTTJV f^ovcra, comp. in 
 <olrrj no. 2. So espec. for v-rro or rrapd after 
 passive verbs, where in the active construc 
 tion the gen. after fK would become the no 
 minative ; Buttm. J 134. 3. Matth. 574. p. 
 1 1 35. John 6, 65 eav p.f] y bttoopfvov avrw 
 tK TOV irarpos p.ov. 2 Cor. 2, 2 6 \vnovp.fvos 
 * tp-ov. 7, 9. Eph. 4, 16. Phil. 1, 23. Rev. 
 2,11.8,11.9,2.18. So Horn. Od. 7. 70. 
 Hdot. 2. 151 TO iroirfifv x TIVOS. ib. 7. 175. 
 Xen. Conv. 8. 22 e p.fv rcoi/ . . . (^MXov/uVwp 
 oi/Sfv ^aXfTrov yfytflJfUVOV, e/c 5e r^y avai- 
 fioi5s ofjuXlas TroXXa . . . irfT7payp.eva. For a 
 like use of OTTO, see in OTTO note 2. p. 77. 
 
 d) Of the motive or inciting cause, espec. 
 an emotion of mind, out of, from; Phil. 1, 
 16. 17 oi fjLev e dyaTTTJs . . . oi 8e t tpftdas 
 TOV Xp. Karayye XXou<rn . Xen. An. 2. 5. 5. 
 
 e) Of the occasion or incidental cause, 
 out of, from, i. e. because of, by reason of, 
 on account of; John 4, 6 KaconiaKms e TJJS 
 oSoiTropiay. James 4, 1 OVK tirtv^ev en TUV 
 fjbovav KT\. Rev. 8,11. 13 oval T<OV XomSiv 
 <$>u>v>v KT\. 16, 10. 11. 21. So 2 Cor. 13, 4 
 e <rraupco37 e dcrSevetaf, dXXa fi/ K fiwd/ie- 
 cos- SfoG, KT\. 1 Tim. 6, 4. Heb. 7, 12 ^ 
 avayK^r. So Hdian. 1. 4. 12. Xen. Mem. 1. 
 2. 31. Conv. 8. 22 * u>v. Hence SIKOIOVP 
 v. St/caico3^i/at e K Tri a-rewy to justify or 
 be justified from failh, i. e. on account of, by, 
 
 Iff 
 
 through faith, this being the occasion of jus 
 tification, Rom. 3, 30 us SiKaiuxrfi Trepirojii^H 
 (K TriOTfo)? Kal UKpofiv&Tiav 8ia TIJS TTicrrewy. 
 5, 1. Gal. 2, 16. 3, 24 ; (elsewhere c. dat. 
 TTiWet, Rom. 3, 28 ;) St*. e tpywv, Rom. 
 3,20. 4,2. Gal. 2, 16 bis ; diicaios e< Trio-Teas 
 Rom. 1, 17 ; SiKaiocrvvr) < Tri crrfcos Rom. 
 9, 30. 10, 6. 
 
 f) Of the instrument or means, from, by, 
 with which any thing is done ; Luke 1 6, 9 
 TroiTjaaTe eavTols (j)i\ovs fK TOV p.ap.cova, i. e. 
 by means of it. John 3, 5 tav ^ TIS yev^fj 
 
 4 CSaroy. John 9, 6. Heb. 11,35. Rev. 3, 
 18 xpvcriov neTrvpovfifvov fK Trvpos. 17, 2. 6 
 18, 3. 19. With verbs of filling, being full 
 Matt. 23, 25 ecrcoSei/ yejuoucrij e dpTruy^s 
 Kal dSiKias. John 12, 3. Rev. 8, 5. Comp 
 Matth. J 396. n. 2. 574. p. 1133. Judith 
 9, 10. Ecclus. 13, 11. Eur. Hec. 573. Xen. 
 CEc. 13. 6. 
 
 g) Of the material, out of or from which 
 any thing is made ; Matt. 27, 29 o-Tefpavov e 
 aKav%u>v. John 2, 15 (ppaytXXtov e* (r^oivimv, 
 Rom. 9, 21. 1 Cor. 11, 8. Eph. 5, 30. Heb. 
 
 11, 3. Rev. 18, 12. 21, 21. Comp. Matth. 
 
 5 374. b. n. Winer } 51, en init. Hdian. 8. 
 4. 27. Diod. Sic. 1. 20. Xen. Conv. 8. 32. 
 
 h) Of the manner in which any thing is 
 done, out of, from, in Engl. in, with ; Mark 
 
 12, 30. 33, dyairav e oX?;y TTJS KapSias Kal e 
 5\T]s TTJS \lsvxijs-KT\. Luke 10, 27. Acts 8, 
 37. Rom. 6, 17tK KapSias, heartily. Eph. 6, 
 
 6 fK ^VMS. (Xen. OZc. 10. 4.) Rom. 14, 
 23 bis, OVK CK Trio-Teas, not out of faith, i. e. 
 not in or with faith. 1 Thess. 2, 3 OVK e /c 
 7T\dvr)s, ov8f e dKa^apaias, ovTf ev SoXw. 
 So where in Engl. of, according to, comp. 
 Winer 55. 1. c, 2 Cor. 8, 11 TOV ?x. flv t 
 according to your ability, v. 13 e IO-OTTJTOS. 
 (Hdot. 7. 135 eg to-ou.) John 3, 31 CK TTJS 
 y^s XoXt?. 8, 44. 1 John 4, 5. 1 Pet. 4, 1 1 
 e i<rxvos r/s KT\. So Arr. Epict. 1. 22. 1. 
 Hdian. 1. 4. 21. JEl V. H. 1. 21 TO. TOV 
 iHjpov ftpav. Xen. An. 4. 2. 23. Also in an 
 adverbial sense, e. g. fK Trepicro-ou, abundant 
 ly, exceedingly, Mark 6, 51. 14, 31 ; tK p.t- 
 povs, ex parte, in part, partly, 1 Cor. 12, 27. 
 
 13, 9. 10. 12 ; eK p*Tpov, measurably, mode 
 rately, John 3, 34 ; K o-u/zcpcofov, by mutual 
 consent, 1 Cor. 7, 5. Comp. Winer J 55. 1. 
 c. So Pol. 2. 46. 1 fK TOV (pavepov, openly. 
 Xen. Ag. 2. 6. Thuc. 3. 67, 92. Plato Legg. 
 743. a. 
 
 i) Of the price, out of, from, ivith which 
 any thing is acquired ; Matt. 20, 2 crvp-fpcavfj- 
 o~as p.eTa TO>V fpyaTuv tK Srjvapiov, comp. V. 
 1,3. 27, 7 rfyopaaav tg avTcav (dpyvpiow) TOV 
 dypov. Acts 1,18. Here K c. gen. is equi 
 valent to the simple gen. which is the usual 
 
226 
 
 construction; Buttm. 5132. 3, and 10. c. 
 Matth. I 364. Winer 51. p. 441. ed. 5. 
 Ep. Jer. 25. Palaeph. 46. 3, 4. 
 
 NOTE 2. In composition en retains its 
 general signif. out of, from, and implies : 
 a) Removal, out, from, off , forth ; as eV 
 /SaiVco, K/3aXXw, eV^epca. b) Extension, 
 continuance ; as eVretVo), eicrpc$0. c) 
 Completeness, in full ; as en^aivavau). d) 
 Intensive genr. as 6x877X0?, e a7raracu, e /cra- 
 pdcro~a>. -\- 
 
 eicacrTO$, 77, oj/, correl. adj. (kindr. eKa?,) 
 eacft, erery one, each one of any number 
 separately ; Buttm. 78. 3. 
 
 1. Genr. Matt. 16, 27 oTroSoxTfi cKdcrr<p 
 Kara ri^ 7rpaiv avrov. Luke 6, 44 ewxrTOV 
 o-fvo-pov. John 7, 53. Rom. 2, 6. al. With 
 gen. plur. Matt. 26, 22 exao-Tos avr&v. John 
 6, 7. Rom. 14, 12. al. So ^Eschin. 33. 23. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 6 ; c. gen. plur. Luc. D. 
 Mort. 15. 4. Plato Rep. 341. d. This idea 
 of separation or singling out is expressed 
 still more strongly by els enao-Tos, each 
 one, Acts 20, 31 vov%eT<oi> era enatrrov. Eph. 
 4, 16. Rev. 21, 21. al. With gen. plur. 
 Luke 4, 40. Acts 2, 3. al. (Xen. An. 6. 6. 
 12.) Also in Ko3 fK.d<rTr)v ^epav, where it 
 strengthens the distributive force of Kara, 
 Heb. 3, 13. Rev. 22, 2; so Xen. Hell. 2. 
 
 1. 27. 
 
 2. Distributively, in construction with 
 plur. verbs, e. g. where it is in apposition 
 with a plur. noun or pron. implied ; Matt. 
 18, 35 edv p.r/ dcpTJre eKacrTos rw a8eX<o> 
 KrX. John 16, 32. Heb. 8, 11. al. With 
 gen. plur. Acts 11, 29 ; also els eKaaros Acts 
 
 2, 6. So Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 3 ; els e/c. Xen. 
 An. 6. 6. 12. In apposition with a plur. 
 noun or pron. expressed ; Luke 2, 3 eVo- 
 pfvovro Trdvres, ettaa-ros els rrjv KT\. Acts 
 2, 8 Eph. 5, 33 ; also els Znao-Tos 1 Cor. 
 
 12, 18. So Xen. Hell. 7. 1. 22. + 
 
 eKaarore, adv. (eVao-rc?,) at each and 
 every time, always, 2 Pet. 1, 15. Hdian. 3. 
 10. 6. Xen. Conv. 1. 14. 
 
 kicaTQV) 01, al, TO, indec. a hundred, Matt. 
 18, 12. 28. Luke 15, 4. John 19, 39. al. Matt. 
 
 13, 8 KOI e St Sov Kapirov, 6 per ewiTov sc. 
 Kapnovs. Mark 4, 8 ; comp. Luke 8, 8. + 
 
 ou, 6, 17 ; or eos, ovs, , 
 f] ; adj. (eKurov, eVos,) a hundred years old, 
 Rom. 4, 19. Sept. for nsU) nsn "jS Gen. 
 17, 17. On the form and flexion, comp. 
 Buttm. J 56. n. 4. 70. n. 2. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 407. 
 
 KaTOVTcnr\acria>v : ovos, 6, fj, adj. 
 CButtm. 71. 3,) a hundred-fold, Luke 8, 8 
 
 Kaprrbv eW. Matt. 19, 29. Mark 10, 30. 
 Sept. for t^nse risa 2 Sam. 24, 3. Xen. 
 CEc. 2. 3. 
 
 v. -^09, ou , 6, (e 
 apx0 a centurion, a captain over a hun 
 dred men ; see Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 370. 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Exercitus, p. 504. In 
 -77 s, Acts 10, 1.22. 24,23. 27,1.31. So 
 Plut. Camill. 32. Hdian. 5. 4. 12. In -os , 
 Matt. 8, 5. 8. 13. 27, 54. Luke 7, 2. 6. 
 23, 47. Acts 21, 32. 22, 25. 26. 23, 17. 
 23. 27, 6. 11. 43. 28, 16. Sept. for ito 
 m NB Ex. 18, 25. Deut. 1, 15. So Plut. 
 Lucull. 35. Hdian. 2. 13. 3. Xen. Cyr. 5. 
 3. 41 bis. 
 
 eKJ3a&Ot, aor. 2 e|e /3jv, (j3mVa>,) to go 
 out; so Lachm. Heb. 11, 15 a< rj? e ^f /Sij- 
 a-av, for e ^XSoj/ in Rec. Sept. for r&y 
 Josh. 4, 16 sq. Pol. 1. 55. 2. Xen. Helf. 
 7. 1. 29. 
 
 K/3dX\.a), (/3aXXco,) aor. 2 eefta\ov, 
 plupf. without augm. eKpejSXrjKfiv Mark 16, 
 9, comp. Buttm. 83. n. 7 ; to throw out, to 
 cast out ; comp. in /SaXXw. 
 
 1 . Genr. and with the idea of force and ef 
 fort. a) Pr. and with ace. and els c. ace. oi 
 place ; Mid. Acts 27, 38 eK^d\\6p.evoi rot 
 trlrov els TTJV Zdkdo-crav. Pass. Matt. 15, 17. 
 Sept. for Tp^ri Lev. 14, 40. (Ceb. Tab. 
 14. Thuc. 1. 126 ; c. fls Plato Polit. 298. b. 
 Pass. Xen. Vect. 4. 2.) So a person bound 
 or wounded, Matt. 8, 12. 22, 13. 25, 30. 
 Luke 20, 12; with e|o) c. gen. of place, 
 Matt. 21, 39. Mark 12,8. Luke 20,15; 
 with e|w simpl. Pass. John 12, 31 vvv o 
 apx<*>v TOV Kocrfiov TOVTOV eK^X^rjaeTai f%a>, 
 shall be cast out, i. e. either with Euthym. 
 e co TTJS dpxfjs, or genr. repulsed; comp. 16, 
 11. Also eK^d\\eiv ea>, to cast out of the 
 synagogue, to excommunicate, John 9, 34. 
 35, comp. 22. Trop. to cast out to scorn 
 and reproach, to reject, Luke 6, 22 orav e<- 
 jBdXuxTi TO ovop,a vp.u>v a>s jrovrjpbv evfKa 
 KT\. i. e. when they shall falsely slander 
 you, i. q. etTroocri jrav Trovrjpbv pr/fia. Ka3 vp.a>v 
 ^evoo^fvoi evtuev KT\. in Matt. 5,. 11. So 
 JE\. V. H. 13. 16 of a rejected actor. Dem, 
 449. 19. b) Also with a greater or less 
 degree of force and effort, to put forth or 
 out, to thrust out, to drive out ; Mark 9, 47 
 TOV offiaXpov. Mark 1, 12 TO livei/pa O.VTOV 
 6K/3aXXei fls TTJV eprjpov. John 10. 4 7rpo/3ara 
 eKJ3d\rj, comp. egdyei in v. 3. With etc c. 
 gen. of place, John 2, 15 ndvTas ef@- 
 TOV lepov. 3 John 10. (Thuc. 8. 108.) With 
 e|a) c. gen. Luke 4, 29 ?|a> TTJS voXeois. 
 Acts 7, 58 ; e|c0 c. gen. impl. Luke 8, 54. 
 John 6, 37. (So ? c. gen. Plato Legg. 873. 
 
227 
 
 b.) With d^o c. gen. of place, Acts 13, 
 50 e e/3. drro TO>J> 6pia>v. Absol. Matt. 9, 25. 
 Luke 19, 45. Acts 16, 37. Gal. 4, 30. Of 
 demons, to cast or rfrtre out, to expel, from 
 the body of any one, e. g. drro TIIW Mark 
 16, 9 ; f K TWOS Mark 7, 26 ; genr. Matt. 7, 
 22. Mark 1,34. 39. Luke 9, 40. c) Hence, 
 to send out or forth, with the idea of urgency, 
 haste ; e. g. epydras els TOV SepKr/ioV Matt. 
 9, 38. Luke 10,2; avrov Mark 1,43; TOVS 
 dyytXovs, the messengers, James 2, 25. 
 
 2. The idea of force being dropped : a) 
 to pull or draw out, to remove ; Matt. 7, 4 
 eK/3dXo) TO Kapfos dno TOV 003. V. 5 e< TOV 
 o03. Luke 6, 42. b) to bring out or forth, 
 Luke 10, 35. Matt. 12, 35 bis. v. 20 eW av 
 fKJ3a\Tj (Is vinos TTJV Kpia-iv, quoted from Is. 
 42, 3, where Sept. els d\r)Z(iat> egoia-fi Kpi- 
 
 o-tj/forHeb.aBaa soxi i nsxlj. c) Also, 
 to throw out, i. e. not to include, to leave out, 
 Rev. 11,2 Tr)V av\T]V TTJV ea> 5fv e/c/3oAe eo), 
 so the writer explains it by adding the neg. 
 Kal HTJ avTTjV p.erpr]<rr]s. -f- 
 
 e/cpacrif, f a>s, 17, (VK/3aiVa>,) a going out, 
 landing, from a ship ^Eschyl. Suppl. 768 ; 
 from a river Pol. 4. 64. 5. In N. T. of life, 
 exit, end; Heb. 13, 7 eK^acris TTJS dvaa-rpo- 
 <PTJS. (So Wisd. 2, 17; genr. and opp. apxf) 
 Plut. de Mus. 33.) Trop. end, issue, result, 
 e. g. of a temptation, 1 Cor. 10, 13. So 
 Wisd. 8, 8. Epicl. Ench. 32. 3. 
 
 q s , ), (eVcjSdXAo),) a casting out, 
 sc. of the lading of a ship in order to lighten 
 her, \jaLjactura ; Acts 27, 18 ficpoXfjv rot- 
 OVVTO. Sept. for b^ttri Jon. 1, 5. Dem. 
 926. 17. ^Eschyl. Theb. 769. 
 
 efcyafiifai f. /o-o), to marry out, to give 
 in marriage, absol. 1 Cor. 7, 38 bis ; others 
 ya/j/fo). Pass. Matt. 22, 30. 24, 38. Luke 
 17, 27. 
 
 e&fapia-KW, i. q. eVya/itfoi, Pass. Luke 
 30, 34. 35 ; others yapifa. 
 
 KJOVO$, ov, 6, TI, adj. (eicyivofJLai, perf. 2 
 e/cye yofa.) lit. sprung from ; hence a de 
 scendant of any degree, offspring, Ammonius 
 p. 47. Horn. II. 5. 813. ib. 20. 206. al. 
 In N. T. Plur. neut. TO eityova, descend- 
 trSs, spec, grandchildren, 1 Tim. 5, 4 rfxva 
 } fKyova. Sept. genr. for t]B Deut. 29, 10 ; 
 ^Q Deut. 7, 13. So genr. Hdian. 5. 7. 1. 
 Xen. Lac. 1 . 4 ; spec. Hesych. exyova 
 ffKva TfKviav. 
 
 K8a7ravdw, , f. 770-0), (SaTramw,) to 
 t/pand out, i. e. utterly, to consume; Pass. 
 (o be consumed, to be utterly spent, spoken 
 of one s life and strength, vnep TWOS 2 Cor. 
 12, 15. Pol. 17. 11. 10. 
 
 , f. gofuii, (&F XO/M,) to take 
 or receive from any one, Ecclus. 18, 14. 
 Hdot. 2. 166; also in succession, Horn. II. 
 13. 710. Hdot. 4. 39. InN. T. inchoative- 
 ly, to be about to receive from any quarter, 
 and hence to wait for, to expect, Lat. exci- 
 pere ; c. ace. John 5, 3 e /coY^- Trjv TOV uSaros 
 Kivrja-iv. Acts 17, 16. 1 Cor. 11,33. 16,11. 
 Heb. 11, 10. James 5, 7; absol. Heb. 10, 
 13. [1 Pet. 3, 20.] So Pol. 3. 45. 6. ib. 20. 
 4. 5. Plut. C. Mar. 24. 
 
 6^77X09, ov, 6, 77, adj. i. q. 8fj\os but 
 stronger, quite plain, manifest, conspicuous, 
 2 Tim. 3, 9. 3 Mace. 6, 5. Pol. 3. 12. 4. 
 Dem. 24. 10. 
 
 e/eo77ju,ea>, S>, f. TJO-CO, (e/cS^/ioy,) to go out 
 of one s country, to go abroad, to travel; 
 Jos. Ant. 9. 4. 6 fx^ri^cravTos 8f els Aa- 
 IMKTKOV E\icrcratov TOV Trpo(j)r)TOv. Arr. 
 Epict. 1. 4. 22. In N. T. genr. to be ab 
 sent from any place or person, 2 Cor. 5, 6. 
 8. 9. Comp. in arrcS^e co. 
 
 eVcSl<8&>/U, f. eVSaxro), (8t So>/u,) to give 
 forth or up, to deliver out, Pol. 3. 8. 8, 10. 
 Thuc. 1.115; to give out on hire, to let out, 
 Pol. 6. 17. 2. Xen.Vect.4. 15,16. Hence 
 in N. T. Mid. exSt So/ici, to let out, to hire 
 out for oneself, for one s own profit ; e. g. 
 TO d/iTreAwra yecopyols Matt. 21, 33. 41. 
 Mark 12,1. Luke 20, 9. Comp. Plato Legg. 
 806. d, yeiapyiai eK8e8op.fvai 8ov\ois. 
 
 e/cSt-rjjeo/j.ai, oO/xm, f. ^o-o/xat, Mid. 
 depon. (oir)yeop.ai,) to tell out, to declare in 
 full, c. ace. Acts 13, 41. 15, 3. Sept for 
 iBt? Ez. 12, 16. Hab. 1, 5. Ecclus. 42, 
 17. Jos. Ant. 5. 8. 3. B. J. 5. 13. 7. 
 
 e /eSi/ee a>, <, f. 770-0), (StKos,) pr. to 
 carry out right and justice ; hence 
 
 1 . to do justice to, to maintain the right 
 or cause of any one, to vindicate; Luke 18, 
 5 (K.8iKT](r<a avTrjv , and so in constr. pragn. 
 V. 3 fKmi6f&6v /j.f drro TOV dimSucou pov. 
 Sept. Ps. 37, 28. 1 Mace. 6, 22. 13, 6. 
 
 2. to avenge, to take penal satisfaction 
 for injury ; c. ace. Rom. 12, 19 /IT) tavTovs 
 (KiKovt>res, comp. v. 17. 20. By Hebr. the 
 person of or from whom vengeance is taken 
 is put with dno or eVc ; as eVcStjtf 1v TO alp.a 
 dno (<x) TIVOS, to avenge blood from or at 
 the hand nf any one, Rev. 6, 10. 19, 2. So 
 Sept. for 6^3 2 K. 9, 7 ; comp. also for 
 ja irnrj Deut. 18, 19. So c. ace. Hdian. 
 2. 6. 13. Plut. Comp. Ag. et Cleom. cum 
 Gracch. 5 fin. Hence to punish, simply, 
 2 Cor. 10, 6 ira&av TrapaKorjv. So Sept, 
 and cpj Ex. 21, 20. Ecclus. 23, 21. Dem 
 801. 24. 
 
228 
 
 s, 17, (eKoWu,) \.main- 
 (enance of right, vindication; hence noielv 
 fK8iKr)(TLv TWOS, i. cj. fK$iKflv, to main 
 tain the right or cause of any one, to vindi 
 cate, Luke 18, 7. 8. Also c. dat. of pers. 
 for whom, Acts 7, 24 ; comp. for this dat. 
 Sept. Judg. 11, 36. 2 Sam. 22, 48. Comp. 
 iitbuojtrai TroieurSai Pol. 3. 8. 10. 
 
 2. avengement, vengeance, i. e. penal sa 
 tisfaction for injury, retribution, Rom. 12, 
 19. Heb. 10, 30; comp. Deut. 32, 35. 
 Sept. for !-raS 2 Sam. 4, 8 ; H-JJ3B Hos. 
 9, 7. Hence, vengeance, for vindictive jus 
 tice, punishment; Luke 21, 22 i^e pai e /c- 
 diKTjo-ecos. 2 Thess. 1, 8. 1 Pet. 2, 14. 
 2 Cor. 7, 11 referring to the evil doer, 
 comp. v. 12. Comp. Sept. for ops Mic. 5, 
 15. SoEcclus. 7, 17. 47, 25. 
 
 e/cot/co?, ov, 6, fj, adj. (, Sue?;,) pr. exe 
 cuting right and justice ; hence an avenger, 
 punisher, Rom. 13, 4. 1 Thess. 4, 6. 
 Wisd. 12, 12. Aristaen. 1. 27. Hdian. 2. 
 14. 6. 
 
 tcSia)Kc0, f. w , (Sta>Ko>,) to pursue out, to 
 drive out from a place, to expel, Sept. for f]"ift 
 Deut. 6, 19. Dem. 883. 27. Thuc. 1. 24. 
 Hence in N. T. to persecute, i. q. SIUKCO, but 
 stronger, c. ace. 1 Thess. 2. 15 ; with 
 partit. Luke 11, 49. Sept. for t^ Ps. 
 119, 157. SoEcclus. 30, 19. 
 
 eSoro9, ov, 6, 77, adj. (8t 8o>/,) deZt- 
 wed OM or wp, Acts 2, 23. Jos. Ant. 6. 
 13. 9. Hdian. 5. 4. 17. Pol. 3. 20. 8.- 
 
 a recevng 
 from, succession, JEschyl. Ag. 299 ; a re 
 ceiving in a certain sense, interpretation, 
 Pol. 3. 29. 4. In N. T. a waiting for, ex 
 pectation, Heb. 10, 27. 
 
 e/cofo), f. va-a), (Sv,) intrans. to go or 
 come out of, exSv? /neyapoto Horn. Od. 22. 
 334 ; trans, to put off clothing ; comp. 
 Buttm. \ 114 8v(o. In N. T. to put off, to 
 strip one of clothing, to unclothe ; with two 
 accus. Matt. 27, 31 c^fSvcrav avrov rrjv x^a- 
 fjiiiba. Mark 15, 20 ; ace. of pers. Matt. 27, 
 28. Luke 10, 30. See Buttm. 131. 5. 
 Sept. for tscJB Gen. 37, 22. So Dem. 763. 
 26. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 17. Mid. to put off 
 one s own clothes, to unclothe oneself, trop. 
 of the mortal body, 2 Cor. 5, 4 ; see in 
 yv/jivos no. 2. 
 
 e/cet, demonstr. adv. of place, there; 
 Buttm. ^ 116. 6. 
 
 1. Pr. of place where, there, in that place ; 
 Matt. 2, 13 KOI i o-3t eVel ecas KT\. V. 15. 5, 
 24. 6, 21. 8, 12. 12, 45. Mark 2, 6. Luke 
 2, 6. 6, 6. James 2, 3. al. saep. So c. art. 
 
 01 fuel, those there, Matt. 26, 71. Sept. 
 genr. for taj Gen. 2, 8. *2. So Luc. Ni- 
 grin. pref. Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 14 ; ol em Luc. 
 D. Deor. 3. 1. Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 2. By 
 Hebr. joined with the relat. OTTOV, as OTTOI; 
 fuel, where, Mark 6, 55. Rev. 12, 6. 14. 
 So Sept. for Dttj . . . ^iffix 1 Sam. 9, 10. Gen. 
 13, 4 ; comp. Heb. Gr. 121. 1. Lehrg. p. 743. 
 2. By attract, with verbs of motion, for 
 fKflcre, thither, to that place, as we often say 
 in Engl. there for thither; Buttm. 5 151. 1. 8. 
 Winer 58. 7. Matt. 2, 22 tyoprfiij e im 
 d7reX36>. Mark 6, 33. Luke 12, 18. 17,37. 
 John 11, 8. 18, 3. al. Also Matt. 17, 20, 
 comp. 21, 21. So Sept. and dtli Deut. 1, 
 37. Judg. 18, 3 ; for rvnti Deut. 1 4, 42. 
 Hdian. 4. 8. 9. Arr. Epict. e /el Tre f 
 Xen. Hell. 7. 1. 27. + 
 
 demonctr. adv. (< /!, Buttm. 
 5 116. 6,) thence, from that place, Matt. 4, 
 21 Trpopas e /cel3ej/. 5, 26. 9, 9. 27. Acts 13, 
 4. 20, 13. al. So c. art. ot excISei , those 
 from thence, i. e. those who belong there, 
 Luke 16, 26. Sept. for D^ : 3? Gen. 28, 2. 6. 
 Hdian. 3. 3. 6. Xen. An. 5. 6. 24; ol 
 fKeteev Hdian. 4. 3. 14. Eur. Hec. 721 . -f- 
 
 77, o, pron. demonstr. (e /cel,) 
 that, that one there, Plur. those ; equiv. to an 
 emphat. he, she, it, or to he there, she there, 
 it there. In an antithesis or opposition, it 
 usually refers to the person or thing more 
 remote or absent ; elsewhere to the next 
 preceding, which it thus often renders more 
 definite and emphatic. Matth. 471. 
 
 1. In antithesis, and referring to the more 
 remote subject ; e. g. with OVTOS, Luke 18, 
 
 14 KUTfjSr] OVTOS 8e8iKaia>fifvos rj yap K(lvos- 
 James 4, 15. So genr. Matt. 13, 11 v/juv 
 8e8oTai . . . fKfivois Se ov SeSorat. Mark 16, 
 20. John 5, 35. 47. 8, 42. Heb. 12, 25. al. 
 saep. Also Luke 13, 4 cornp. v. 2. 19, 27 
 comp. v. 14. 26. Plut. Sept. Sap. Conv. 
 
 15 TavTrjs...eKfii>T]s. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 3. 
 An. 3. 1. 21, 29. 
 
 2. Without antith. referring to the definite 
 person or thing immediately preceding or 
 just mentioned, a) Genr. Matt. 17, 27 fvprj- 
 <reis (TTaTrjpa. eKflvov Xa/3o>i/ Soy KT\. Acts 
 3, 13 IliXarov, Kpivavros fuelvov. Mark 3, 
 24. 16, 10. 13. John 4, 25. 5,19.43. 7,45. 
 13, 6. 27. Rom. 14, 14. 2 Cor. 8, 9. James 
 1, 7 6 ai/3pw7ros eKflvos. 2 Pet. 1,16. 1 John 
 5, 16. al. Comp. Winer 5 23. 1. Matth. 
 
 1. c. So Luc. D. Deor. 6. 4. Xen. Conv. 
 
 2. 25. With a Subst. of time, and referring 
 to a time more or less definite, e. g. / rats 
 rjpfpais eKfivcus Matt. 3, 1. Luke 2, 1. 4,2. 
 al. ev fKeivais rais fjy.. Matt. 24, 19. Mark 
 
229 
 
 1,9. 2, 20. al. ev TT, rip.. iKfivr, Matt. 7, 22. 
 13, 1. al. eV eWi/fl 777 ij/i. Matt. 22, 23. 
 Mark 4, 35. al. d-rr fKfivrjs rrfs TH*. Matt. 
 22, 46. (Xen. An. 1. 7. 18.) Also Matt. 
 8, 13. 9, 22. 10, 19. 11, 25. 12, 1. Acts 
 12, 1. 19, 23. b) Emphatic, like the 
 Engl. that one, he emph. where however the 
 emphasis lies in the construction, and not 
 in the word itself. Thus where it is put 
 instead of (or by way of) repeating the 
 subject or object ; comp. in avros no. 1 . b. 
 Mark 7, 15 ra fKnopev6fj.eva cm avrov, e- 
 Kflva ea-Ti KT\. V. 20. John 1, 186 p-ovoyevrjs 
 vios . . eKelvos rjyr)o~aTo. 5, 1 1 6 7roir]o~as 
 l*f vyif/, fKflvos p.oi eiTrfv. 9, 37. 10, 1. 12, 
 48. 14, 26. Rom. 14, 14. 2 Cor. 10,l8.al. 
 (Plut. T. Gracch. 4. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 17. 
 ib. 6. 2. 33.) Or where it introduces a 
 following clause, e. g. before a relative, 
 John 13, 26 fKelvos tori, o> KT\. Rom. 14, 
 15. John 10, 35. Heb. 6,7. 11,15. So 
 Neut fKflvo before on, Matt. 24, 43 e /mi/o 
 yi.vuio-K.fTe, ort KT\. (Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 3, 21.) 
 Especially of persons well known and cele 
 brated ; comp. in avros no. 1. c. /3. Matt. 
 27, 63 eKf tvos 6 TrXavoy. So of Jesus, like 
 He in Engl. John 7,11 TTOU to~Tiv eKflvos , 
 2 Tim. 2, 13. 1 John 3, 3. 5. 7. (Luc. D. 
 Deor. 11. 1. JEl. V. H. 2. 14. Dem. 301. 
 18.) In like manner TJ rjfj.epa eKeivrj re 
 fers to the time of Christ s second coming, 
 Matt. 7, 22. 26, 29. Acts 2, 18. 2 Thess. 
 1, 10. Rev. 16, 14. 
 
 3. Genit. em i/^y, as an adv. for fKfivrjs 
 68av, that way; Luke 19, 4 OTI eKfivrjs fjp.f\\f 
 dupxevSai, where Rec. has 81 eWwjy. See 
 Buttm. J 115. n. 3. Matth. $ 377. 1. + 
 
 e/cetcre, demonstr. adv. (e /m Buttm. 1 16. 
 6,) thither, to that place, Hdian. 3. 6. 18. 
 Xen. Hell. 2. 2. 2. In N. T. by attract, 
 instead of eVet, there, in that place ; comp. in 
 eVc no. 2. Buttm. } 151. 1. 8. Acts 21, 3. 22, 
 5 KOL TOVS fKelo-e ovras. So Sept. Job 39, 
 29. Hdian. 2. 9. 15. Pol. 5. 51. 3. Thuc. 
 6. 77. Rare except in late writers. 
 
 e/c^reo), , f. jjVw, (^rew,) to seek out, 
 to search out, e. g. any thing lost, Sept. for 
 ti-nn Ez. 34, 11 ; Iga Ez. 34, 12; also 
 1 Mace. 9, 26. al. In N. T. trop. 
 
 1. to seek out, to search out or after, pr. 
 in order to find out any thing, i. q. to search 
 out diligently; c. Trepi TWOS 1 Pet. 1, 10, 
 parall. egepfwdco. Sept. for *i)3tt Ps. 44, 
 22. Ecclus. 39, 3. 
 
 2. In order to get or gain any thing, i. q. 
 to seek after diligently, carefully ; c. ace. Heb. 
 12, 17 (jLfra. SaKpixav eVj^rj /cray avrf)v. Sept. 
 for 113)33 Ps. 122, 9; sn^ 1 K. 14, 5. 
 
 Hence by Hebr. i. q. to require, to demand, 
 
 as fK^TJTflv TO aljJLO. TWOS OTTO TWOS, to T6- 
 
 quire a person s blood from any one, i. e. to 
 avenge Ids death, to punish bloodshed, Pass. 
 Luke 11, 50. 51. So Sept. and tlijsa Ez. 
 3, 18. 20 ; un^j Gen. 9, 5. 42, 22. 
 
 3. By Hebr. fK^Teiv TOV Seov, to 
 seek after God, i. e. to seek unto him for 
 aid, to turn to him as a humble and sin 
 cere worshipper; Acts 15, 17. Rom. 3,11. 
 Heb. 11,6. So Sept. and tfjsa Deut. 4, 29. 
 Jer. 29, 13; aj-nn Deut. 4, 29. 2 Chr. 15, 
 2. 13. Ecclus. 24, 34. 
 
 e S-a/i/3e o>, s>, f. ^cu, (?/c3a/z)3or,) tc 
 astonish outright, to amaze, Aquil. for n^2 
 Job 33, 7. Ecclus. 30, 9. In N. T. Pass . 
 e *:3a/z/3e o/jcu, ovpai, to be greatly amaz 
 ed, astonished, e. g. from admiration, Mark 
 9, 15 ; from terror, Mark 16, 5. 6 ; from 
 distress of mind, Mark 14, 33, where it is 
 parall. with \vneio-%ai Matt. 26, 37. Comp. 
 Tittm. de Synon. N. T. p. 134. 
 
 6K&afJ,fios, ov, 6, 17, adj. (3a/i/3os,) quite 
 astonished, greatly amazed, Acts 3, 11. 
 Pol. 20. 10. 9. 
 
 f&TOS, ov, 6, f], adj. (fKTfarjfjLi q. v.) 
 exposed, as an infant ; hence Acts 7, 19 TTOI- 
 flv eVSera TO. @pf<pr], i. q. eKTiZevai TO. /3pe- 
 (j)rj, to expose ; see Ex. c. 2. Eurip. An- 
 drom. 70 ei&eTov yovov. Comp. ^El. V. H. 
 2. 7 fK^eivai, Traidiov. 
 
 eKKcfeaipci), f. apoi, (Ka3cu /3,) to cleanse 
 out, to clear away, Sept. Deut. 26, 13. Plato 
 Euth. 3. a ; to cleanse thoroughly, Pass. TCLS 
 do-7ri8as fKKeKa^apfjievas, burnished, Xen. 
 An. 1. 2. 16. In N. T. trop. a) With 
 ace. of thing, to cleanse out, to put away, 
 e. g. TT]V TraXaiav vp.Tjv 1 Cor. 5, 7 ; comp. 
 Ex. 12, 19. 13, 7. So Dinarch. 79. 15 eVa3. 
 TTjV 8o3po8oKiav ft TTJS 7roXecos. Plut. de 
 Adulat et Amic. 27 vftpiv. b) With ace. 
 of pers. and dno TLVOS, to cleanse thoroughly 
 from any thing, to purify from ; 2 Tim. 2, 
 21 lav ovv TIS KKo%dpT) eavTov drrb TOVTOW. 
 Sept. for spa Judg. 7, 4. So Xen. Conv. 
 1. 4. Plato Rep. 361. d. 
 
 eKKaiw, f. Kctvo-co, (Ktu co,) to make burn 
 or flame out, to light up, to kindle, Sept. for 
 133 Ex. 22, 6. Hdot. 4. 134; trop. TOP 
 iroKftiov Plut. Agesi. 31 mid. In N. T. 
 Pass, to be lighted up, to be kindled; trop. 
 to be inflamed, to burn ; Rom. 1 , 27 e - 
 fKav^Srjcrav tv TTJ ope et CLVTCOV. So Ecclus. 
 23, 16. Alciphr. 3. 6, 7 $ epwra. Of an 
 ger, Sept. for "l?a Ps. 2, 12. Pol. 9. 10. 10. 
 
 e/c/cae&), o>, f. rjo-u>, (/ca/cos,) to turn out 
 bad, cowardly, to prove recreant, Pol. 4. 1 Q 
 
230 
 
 10. In N. T. genr. to be fainthearted, to 
 faint, e. g. in view of trial and difficulty, 
 C. eV, Eph. 3, 13 810 alTovpfp fJ-fj eKKaKflv 
 (V Tails SXn^erri pov vrrep vp.a>v. Absol. 
 2 Cor. 4, 1. 16. In respect of duty, to faint, 
 to be weary, to fail, Luke 18, 1. Gal. 6, 9. 
 2 Thess. 8, 13. In all these passages 
 Lachm. has eyKaKfu, see end of the volume. 
 
 co, f. TJO-CD, (Kcvrea>,) to prick 
 out, to pierce out, e. g. TOVS 6(p%a\p.ovs, ./El. 
 H. A. 17. 20. In N. T. to pierce through, 
 to transfix, c. ace. John 19, 37. Rev. 1,7; 
 comp. Zech. 12, 10, where Sept. for ^^ 
 as also Judg. 9, 54. So 2 Mace. 12, 6. 
 Pol. 5. 56. 12. 
 
 6KK\da>, (5, f. d<rco, (fcXato,) Pass. aor. 1 
 egfKXdaZvv Buttm. 98. n. 6. 95. n. 3 ; to 
 break out or off, Pass. e. g. a branch, Rom. 
 11, 17. 19. 20. Sept. for SSttS Lev. 1, 17. 
 Plato Rep. 611. d. 
 
 e/e/cXeta>, f. eiVco, (KXe/co,) Pass. aor. 1 
 eX <r3i7 Buttm. j 98. n. 6. $ 112. 20 ; to 
 shut out, to exclude, c. ace. pr. Pol. 25. 1. 
 10. In N. T. trop. to exclude, e. g. from the 
 intercourse and instruction of any one, c. 
 accus. Gal. 4, 17. (So awo/cXe/co Plut. A\- 
 cib. 4.) Pass, to be excluded, to have no 
 place, Rom. 3, 27. 
 
 e/c/eAT/cria, as, 17, (eKKkrjros, fKKaXfo) to 
 call out, to summon,) a convocation, assem 
 bly, congregation. 
 
 1 . Pr. of a popular or other assembly com 
 posed of persons legally summoned ; Acts 
 19, 39 tv TTJ ewofiua eKKXrjcria sc. of the peo 
 ple ; hence too of a tumultuous assembly not 
 legal, Acts 19, 32. 40. So Judith 6, 16. M. 
 V. H. 5. 12. Dem. 1455. 1. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 7. 6. In the Jewish sense, a congregation, 
 assembly, of the people on solemn occasions 
 or for worship, e. g. in a synagogue, Matt. 
 18, 17; or genr. Acts 7, 38. Heb. 2, 12, 
 quoted from Ps. 22, 22 where Sept. for 
 V>n, as also Deut. 18, 16. al. So 1 Mace. 
 2, 56. 4, 59. 
 
 2. In the Christian sense, an assembly of 
 Christians; genr. 1 Cor. 11, 18 avvep^o- 
 pfvoi iv eKK\T)a-[q. Hence, a church, the 
 Christian church, e. g. a) A particular 
 church, as in Jerusalem, Acts 8, 1. 11, 
 22. al. in Antioch, Acts 11, 26. 13, 1. al. 
 in Corinth, 1 Cor. 1, 2. 2 Cor. 1, 1 ; of 
 Asia Minor, 1 Cor. 16, 19 ; of Galatia, Gal. 
 1, 2 ; at Thessalonica, 1 Thess. 1, 1. 
 2 Thess. 1,1; at Cenchrea, Rom. 16, 1. 
 etc. So at fKK\. TWV &vmv, i. e. churches 
 gathered among the gentiles, Rom. 16, 4. 
 Also T) /car oiKov TIVOS eK/cX^crta, 
 the church or Christian circle which met at 
 
 the house of any one, Rom. 16, 5. 1 Cor. 
 
 16, 19. Philem. 2. So e K /cX. TOV Xpiarov 
 Rom. 16, 16; f KK \. TOV SeoC 1 Cor. 1, 2. 
 10, 32. al. b) The church universal, 
 Matt. 16, 18. 1 Cor. 12, 28. Gal. 1, 13. 
 Eph. 1, 22. 3, 10. Heb. 12, 23. al. So f KK \. 
 TOV Zfov, 1 Cor. 11, 22. 15, 9. 1 Tim. 3, 
 15. al. Comp. Sept. e /cKX. Kvpiov for 1=^|3 
 fili-P Deut. 23, 2. 4. -f- 
 
 K/c\iva), f. vm, (jcXtVo),) to bend out, to 
 turn aside or away, intrans. e. g. ex TTJS 
 68ov, Sept. for JiBJ Num. 22, 23 ; in flight, 
 Pol. 1. 19. 2. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 23. In N. T. 
 trop. to turn away, to decline from piety and 
 virtue, Rom. 3, 12 ; quoted from Ps. 14, 3. 
 53, 4, where Sept. for "WO. With diro c. 
 gen. to turn away from, to avoid, Rom. 16, 
 
 17. 1 Pet. 3, 11 ; so Sept. for "p Itt) Ps. 
 37, 28. Prov. 3, 7. 
 
 eKKO\Vfi/3da>, , f. rj<ra>, (>oXv/x/3ao>,) 
 to swim out, e. g. to the land, Acts 27, 42. 
 Diod. Sic. 20. 86, 88. Eurip. Hel. 1639. 
 
 eKKO/Aifo, f. /o-co, (KO/ CO,) to bear out, 
 to carry out, e. g. a dead body for burial, 
 Luke 7, 12. Hdian. 2. 1. 5. Pol. 35. 6. 2. 
 Wetst. in loc. 
 
 e/C/COTTTtUj f. >//, (KOTTTW,) to strike out 
 or off, to cut out or off, e. g. a branch or 
 scion, C K TWOS Pass. Rom. 11, 24 ; absol. v. 
 22, parall. with e /c/cXdw in v. 17. 19. 20. Of 
 a tree, devo pov, to cut down, c. ace. Luke 13, 
 7. 9 ; Pass. Matt. 3, 10. 7, 19. Luke 3, 9. 
 Also of the hand, to cut off , e. g. TT}I> 8(giav 
 Matt. 5, 30. 18, 8. Sept. for rns J er . 6, 6. 
 22,7. So M\. V. H. 5. 17. Xen. An. 1. 4. 
 10 ; TOV o</>3aX^di/ Dem. 744. 13, 20. 
 
 Trop. TTJV d(pOpfJLrjV (KKOTTTfiV, tO Cllt off OCCtt- 
 
 sion, to remove it, 2 Cor. 11, 12. Sept. e /c/c. 
 rrfv e\7ri8a for *D3 Hiph. Job 19, 10. (Hi- 
 erocl. Carm. aur. Pyth. e/cKOTrrei ray d<pop- 
 u.ds. Pol. 5. 104: 10). So 1 Pet. 3, 7 Rec. 
 els TO fj,rj e/cKo7rrecr3ai ray Trpocrev^ay vp.(av, 
 that your prayers be not cut off, hindered, 
 made fruitless by your sin ; in later edit. 
 
 , Mid. intrans. of W/>e/zai/- 
 vvp.1 (Buttm. ^ 114 Kpepavvvpi), to hang 
 from, to depend, Plato Legg. 733. a. In N. 
 T. trop. to hang from or upon a person, 
 spec, a person speaking, as in Engl. to hang 
 on the lips of any one, to be attentive to his 
 words ; c. gen. of pers. Luke 19. 48 6 Xaos 
 f^iKpf/JiUTO avTOv dKOva>v. Comp. Sept. 
 Gen. 44, 30. Philo de Abr. p. 373. e, 6 fie 
 TToSw dXexrw TOV TraiSos fKKpffj.dfj.evos- Plut. 
 de Curios. 13. Themist. 2. 58. So Virg 
 ^En. 4. 79 pendetque iterum narrantis ab 
 ore. Wetst. in loc. . 
 
231 
 
 ftc\a\ea), <5, f. ijcrco, (Xa)o>,) to speak 
 out, to tell, to disclose ; c. dat. of pers. Acts 
 23, 22 fjLijBfvl en\a\rjo-ai, where for the 
 infin. instead of the imperat. see Buttm. 
 } 140. 7. Winer 45. 7. Judith 11, 9. 
 Dem. 354. 23. 
 
 t ? #/Va/u,7T&>, f. \^<, (Xa/iTTta,) to shine out 
 or forth, to be resplendent, Matt. 13, 43 ; in 
 allusion to Dan. 12, 3 where Sept. for 
 n^nil-j ; comp. Wisd. 3, 7. Ecclus. 43, 
 4. 8. Pol. 15. 29. 3. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 2. 
 
 eKXajfedvCi), f. XTJO-WJ (Xai/Sai/o),) to 
 make forget entirely, Horn. II. 2. 600. Tn 
 N. T. Mid. eicXav Sdvofj.ai, Pass. perf. in 
 Mid. signif. eKkeXTja-pat, to forget entirely, 
 to be quite forgetful of, c. gen. Heb. 12, 5. 
 See Buttm. 114 Xai/Sai/w. 136. 3. So Jos. 
 Ant. 4. 3. 3. Pol. 5. 48. 6. Plato Ax. 369. e. 
 
 e/cXeyco, f. o>. (Xt yw.) pr. to lay out, 
 to pick out single things, to gather out; 
 hence to choose out, to select, c. ace. Pol. 3. 
 114. 1. Xen. Hell. 1. 6. 19. In N. T. Mid. 
 f K\eyop.ai, f. o/uu, to choose out for one 
 self; and so genr. to choose, to select, 
 
 1. Genr. of things, c. ace. Luke 10, 42 
 rr)i> dya^fjv fiept &a e(\egaro. 14, 7 ; with 
 "(va of purpose, 1 Cor. 1, 27 bis. 28. Sept. 
 for ina Gen. 13, 11. So Dem. 314. 5. 
 Xeu. Mem. 1. 6. 14. Of persons, c. ace. 
 simply, John 6, 70. 15, 16 bis. Acts 1, 2. 
 6, 5. Sept. for ina i Sam. 8, 18. 10, 24. 
 (So Dem. 1120. ult. Xen. Cyr. 8. 6. 7.) 
 With prepositions; e. g. OTTO c. gen. Luke 
 G, 13 fK\fdpfvos arr aircoi/ ScoSexa (Ecclus. 
 45, 16) ; fK c. gen. Acts 1, 24. John 15, 19 
 f< TOV KocTfiov. Acts 15, 22. 25, Tore eSoe 
 Toiy dnouTokois . eK\eap.tvovs iiv^pas e 
 avrSiv irep^ai ds A.vTi6^tiav KT\. then it 
 pleased (he apostles . . . hating chosen out 
 men froin themselves, to send them to Anli- 
 och ; here eKXea/iVovr belongs not to av- 
 8pas, but to the subject-ace, of inf. Tre /i^ai, 
 comp. 22, 17. Winer $ 39. 5. Matth. $ 530. 
 n. (Ecclus. 45, 4.) With ev, among, Acts 
 15, 7 6 3eor eV fiplv e eXe aro Sia TOV erro- 
 fjuiTos psv aKovcrai TO f Svrj KT\. i. e. God 
 made choice among us, that etc. comp. Wi 
 ner J 32. 3. a. 
 
 2. By Hebr. to choose out, with the idea 
 of approval, favour, love; so of God and 
 Christ, as choosing those in whom they de 
 light ; c. ace. Mark 13, 20. John 13, 18. 
 Acts 13, 17. Also with ace. and inf. ep- 
 exeget. Eph. 1,4 e eXeaTO Tjfjuis . . . fivai 
 f)pds dyiovs *crX. So with dvai or ds TO 
 tlvai impl. James 2, 5. Sept. for ina Deut. 
 4, 37. Ps. 65,5. Also in Mss. e /cX 
 
 Luke 9, 35, for dyaTnjTo y in Rec. 
 
 . f. v//o), (Xf tVoj,) trans, to leaie 
 out or off, to omit, JEschyl. Prom. 826. Plato 
 Legg. 779. d ; to forsake, to abandon. Pol. 4. 
 62. 2. Xen. An. 4. 1. 8. In N. T. intrans. 
 to leave off. 
 
 1. Genr. i. q. to cease, to fail, e. g. fj TTI- 
 orif Luke 22, 32 ; rd en? Heb. 1,12, quoted 
 from Ps. 102, 28 where Sept. for con iNiph. 
 Sept. also for *iax Jer. 7, 28 ; nb3 Gen. 21, 
 
 15. Plut. Pomp. T 30. Plato LeVg- 918. a. 
 So of the sun or moon under eclipse, Time. 
 2. 28. ib. 7. 50. 
 
 2. Spec, to cease to live, to fail, to die, 
 absol. Luke 16, 9. Sept. for 515 Gen. 49, 
 32 ; Ma Jer. 42, 17. 22. Jos. B. J. 4. 1. 9 
 Xdprjs KaraKfifJifVos (cat i>ocrri\fvofj.f vos eVcXei - 
 n-ei. Apollodor. Bibl. 3. 4. 3 Se^eX^y 8e did 
 TOV (frofiov fK\nrovo-rjs. Fully and strictly 
 trans. e/cXeiVetv TOV /St ov Luc. Macrob. 12. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 58 ; fK^dneiv TO i)v Pol. 2. 
 41. 2. 
 
 eXe/CT09, jj, 6v, (fK\eya>,) chosen out, 
 elect, i. e. 
 
 1 . Genr. select, chosen ; e. g. of persons, 
 1 Pet. 2, 9 yevos fK\fKTov. 1 Tim. 5, 21 
 T<OV tK\. dyyt\(ov, comp. Jos. B. J. 2. 16. 
 4 fin. Sept. for i-ma. Is. 43, 20. Comp. 
 Plato Legg. 946. d, ds TOVS e *X. StKao-rds 
 daayfTca. Of things, select, choice, e. g. 
 Xfeoi 1 Pet. 2, 4. 6, quoted from Is. 28, 16 
 where Sept. for ",02 , comp. Ezra 5, 8. So 
 Lib. Henoch. Fabr. Cod. Ps. V. T. I. p. 184, 
 Xi 3ot eVcXeKToi ; gems. 
 
 2. With the idea of approval, favour, de 
 light, comp. in exX/yco no. 2 ; chosen, i. q. 
 cherished, beloved; Luke 23, 35 6 Xpioror 6 
 TOV 3eoO fK\eKTos. Rom. 16, 13, comp. v. 12. 
 Sept. and i^nS Is. 42, 1. Ps. 105, 6. 1 Chr. 
 
 16, 13. So Fabric. Cod. Pseud. V. T. I. p. 
 747, (Messias) ejcXeKros 3eov. Spec, oi 
 fxXfKToi, the elect, those chosen of God 
 unto salvation, or as members of the king 
 dom of heaven, and who therefore enjoy his 
 favour and lead a holy life in communion 
 with him, i. q. saints, Christians; comp. in 
 enXoyrj no. 2. So with gen. TOV 3eou, Matt. 
 24, 31. Luke 18,7. Mark 13, 27. Rom. 8, 
 33. Col. 3, 12. Tit. 1, 1 ; absol. Matt. 20, 16. 
 22, 14. 24, 22. 24. Mark 13,20. 22. 2 Tim. 
 2, 10. Rev. 17, 14. Also with a subst. 
 1 Pet. 1, 1. 2 John 1. 13. 
 
 K\oyrj, ^ s , ^, (eVcXeyo),) choice, election, 
 selection. 
 
 1. Genr. Acts 9, 15 aricevos e Xoyjjy, i. e. 
 a chosen vessel. So Pol. 5. 63. 11. Diod. 
 Sic. 13. 72. Plato Legg. 802. b. Hence 
 also, free choice, free will, libera voluntas ; 
 Rom. 9, 11 f) KUT fK\oyr]v 7rpo3e<ns, the 
 
K\V(O 
 
 232 
 
 e/CTTlTTTtt) 
 
 purpose according to free choice, i. e. the 
 free, spontaneous purpose of God, uninflu 
 enced by motives from without. So Jos. 
 B. J. 2. 8. 14 eV oVSpcoTTcoi fK\oyfj TO re xa- 
 \6v Koi TO KdKov TrpoKflrai. Psalt. Salom. 9, 
 7 Ta epya r]fj.a)v ev fK\oyfj KOI e^ovcr iq TTJS 
 ^HlXT* Wtov. Comp. Raphel. Annot. in loc. 
 
 2. Spec, election, the benevolent purpose 
 of God by which any are chosen unto sal 
 vation, so that they are led to embrace and 
 persevere in the religion of Christ and the 
 enjoyment of its privileges and blessings 
 here and hereafter. Rom. 11,5 KO.T Ao- 
 yf/v xapiros. 11, 28. 1 Thess. 1, 4. 2 Pet. 
 1, 10. Meton. abstr. for concr. i. q. 01 e /c- 
 XeKTOt, Rom. 11,7. 
 
 e/eXu<w, f. vcrco, (Xu&>,) to loose out of, to 
 set free from, Ceb. Tab. 24 KOKVV e S>v ov 
 dvvavTai fK\vcrai eavTovs. Pol. 16. 6. 12; 
 to loosen out, to relax, to weary, Sept. for 
 n$>ft Jer. 12, 5. Diod. Sic. 13. 77. Xen. 
 Ven. 5. 5. In N. T. Pass. exXvojuai, to 
 be wearied, exhausted, to faint; Gal. 6, 9 you) 
 K\v6p.ei>oi, i. e. in well-doing, parall. with p.rj 
 eKKdKwp.ev. Spoken of the body, Matt. 15, 
 32. Mark 8, 3 ; also Matt. 9, 36 Rec. where 
 later edit. eV/cuX/zeVoi. Sept. for t)Si 1 Sam. 
 14, 28 ; Cs 2 Sam. 16, 14. (Jos. Ant. 5. 2. 
 7. Pol. 20. 4. 7 rols o-w/iao-t.) Of the mind, 
 to faint, to despond, Heb. 12, 3 ^vxais vfJLwv 
 fK\v6fievoi. Absol. v. 5, quoted from Sept. 
 Prov. 3, 11. Sept. for ^ Dent. 20, 3. 
 So Judith 14, 16. Pol. 20. 4/7 rals i^ais. 
 29. 6. 14. Diod. Sic. 20. 1. 
 
 e tf/iacrcrft> v. -arT<w, f. <B, to zcipe o/f, 
 to wipe dry, c. ace. John 11,2. 12, 3 ; ace. 
 impl. Luke 7, 38. 44. John 13, 5. Ep. of 
 Jer. 13, 24. Aristot. H. An. 9. 40. Soph. 
 Elect. 446. Eurip. Here. F. 1404. Found 
 in this sense only in the poets and later 
 prose writers ; the Attics said dno^opyvvfjn 
 and (gofiopyvvp.1, Thorn. Mag. p. 649. Mreris 
 p. 249. Sturz de Dial. Alex. p. 163. 
 
 KfJ,VKT7Jpl^O), f. t o-w, (fJiVKTT)pia>, to 
 
 turn up the nose at, to deride,) to deride out 
 and out, to scoff at, c. ace. Luke 16, 14 ; ace. 
 impl. 23, 35. Sept. for y$ p s 2 , 4. 22, 8. 
 1 Esdr. 1, 51. 
 
 e/cvevci). f. o-ca, (i/evw,) to nod out, e. g. 
 as a horse, to throw out the head,. Xen. Eq. 
 5. 4. ib. 10. 12 ; then genr. to incline out 
 with the head, rfj Kpa\fj eKvevcras Xen. 
 Ven. 10. 12 ; also trans, to avoid, to parry 
 by inclining the head or body, Diod. Sic. 15. 
 87 /3fXo>i/ TO p.ev feveve KT\. conip. Sept. 
 Mic. 6, 14. Hence in N. T. intrans. to turn 
 aside or away; John 5, 13 6 yap irjaovs 
 eei>V(Ttv, o ^Xov ovros ev TGJ roVo>, i. e. he 
 
 had turned away, withdrawn. Sept. for 
 -Kb Judg. 4, 18 ; n;a 18, 26. So Philo Vit. 
 Mos. 690. e, iroi TIS rpdTnjTai, Trot TIS e /c- 
 veva-rj. Jos. Ant. 7. 4. 2 AavtSqr etcvfixras 
 e"s n x^piov. Plut. de Gen. Socr. 4 fKvev- 
 a-as piKpbv TTJS 68ov. Find. Ol. 13. 163. 
 
 e/ci>r)(pci), f. -v^co, (vi]<pa>, ) to sober out, to 
 become sober out of drunkenness, Sept. for 
 p5 XS 1 ; 1 Sam. 25, 37 ; -j-ija ^{5^ Gen. 9, 
 24. Plut. Demost. 20. In N. T/ trop. to 
 rowse wp, to awake, from a state of delusion 
 and torpor, intrans. 1 Cor. 15, 34. Comp. 
 Sept. Ps. 78, 65. 
 
 e/covcnos, O v, 6, rj, adj. (aiv 5 ) willing, 
 voluntary, acting of one s own free will, 
 Pol. 6. 14. 7. Thuc. 1. 32. In N. T. Neut. 
 TO fKoiKTiov, willingness, free-will ; Phi- 
 lem. 14 Kara eKovcriov, willingly, of free-will, 
 i. q. fKovo-ias. Sept. Ka3 eKovo-iov for ii^SSl 
 Neh. 15, 3. So Neut. TO ex. Plut. de recY. 
 rat. Aud. 1 fin. 
 
 eKOVcricof, adv. (eKovo-to?,) willingly, 
 voluntarily, of free-will, Heb. 10, 26. 1 Pet. 
 5, 2. Sept. for n^33 Ps, 54, 8. Hdian. 
 3. 8. 4. Xen. Mem/2/1. 18. 
 
 e/CTraXat, adv. (TraXcu,) /rom of old, 
 long since, 2 Pet. 2, 3. 3, 5. Jos. Ant. 16. 
 8. 4 init. Arr. Exp. Alex. 1. 9. 15. Plut. 
 Aristid. 17. Found only in late writers ; 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 45 sq. 
 
 e/CTreipdfa, f. da-a, (7r/)du,) pr. to 
 make full trial of; hence to try, to prove, to 
 tempt, c. ace. of pers. Luke 10, 25. 1 Cor. 
 10, 9. So Matt. 4, 7 and Luke 4, 12, comp. 
 Deut. 6, 16 where Sept. for M&5 ; also 
 Deut. 8, 16. Ps. 78, 18. 
 
 eKireflTTO), f. ^a, (T^TTO),) to send out 
 or forth, c. ace. of pers. Acts 13, 4 ; acc.-et 
 els 17, 10. Sept. for nlbttj Gen. 24, 54. 5G. 
 59. Pol. 5. 103. 7: Xen. Hell. 1. 1. 32. 
 
 eWe/3to-crw9, adv. (7repto-o-p,) abund 
 antly, exceedingly, vehemently, Mark 14, 31 
 Lachm. for ex: 7repi<ro-ov. , 
 
 eKTreravvvfJ-t, f. do-to, (VeTawv/u Buttm. 
 5 114,) to spread out, to stretch forth, e. g. 
 the hands in supplication, Rom. 10, 21, quot 
 ed from Is. 65, 2 where Sept. for Pi. tona ; 
 also Ex. 9, 30. 34. Ecclus. 48, 20 ; genr. 
 1 Mace. 3, 48 TO frp\iov. Pol. 1. 44. 3. Plut. 
 Themist. 30. 
 
 eKTTijSda), , f. r}o-a, (Tr^Sdw,) to leap 
 out, to rush forth; Acts 14, 14 Grb. e ^eTnj- 
 8i)(rav els TOV o^Xoj/, for flo-fnrjdrjo-av in Rec. 
 Judith 14, 17 ef7rr]T)<rfv els TOV Xaov. 
 Jos. Ant. 6. 9. 5. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 8. 
 
 e/CTTtTTTO), f. e /CTreo-otyitM, (7T/7mu.) perf. 
 exTreVrcoKa, aor. 2 et-eTrecrov, aor. 1 e ^eVeo-a 
 
233 
 
 Gal. 5, 4, comp. Buttm. {96 n. 9. 114 
 WITI-TO). Lob. ad Phryn. p. 724 ; to fall out 
 of, to fall from or off, intrans. 
 
 1. Pr. of things which fall outoforfrom 
 their former place ; e. g. stars from heaven, 
 Mark 13, 25; comp. Matt. 24, 29, and Is. 
 14, 12 where Sept. iruis ffirfo-ev e< TOV ov- 
 pavov 6 eoioxpo pos, for ?S3. Of flowers, to 
 fall ojf, James 1, 11 and 1 Pet. 1, 24 av%os 
 avrov ffTTfo-(, comp. Sept. for >2J Is. 28, 
 1. 4. Also of chains from the hands, Acts 
 12, 7 ; a boat from a ship, Acts 27, 32. So 
 genr. Hdian. 3. 7. 8. Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 8. 
 Spoken of a ship, to fall out or to be driven 
 out of its course, usually with fls c. ace. of 
 place, to be driven upon; Acts 27, 17 (pofi. 
 p.}/ fls TTJV Svpriv e /ore croocrt. V. 26. 29. So 
 Diod. Sic. 2. 60 TO TrXoidpiov . . . fKneo-fiv 
 fls Sp.fj.ovs. Pol. 1. 51. 11. Xen. An. 7. 5. 
 12 ; comp. eW. eVc rfjs 68ov Xen. An. 5. 2. 
 31. 
 
 2. Trop. to fall off or away, e. g. a) to 
 fall from any state or condition, to lose one s 
 part or interest in that state ; c. gen. TTJS 
 \dpiTos Gal. 5, 4 ; TOV I8iov o-rr]piyp.ov 2 Pet. 
 3, 17 ; also 7ro3ei> eW. Rev. 2, 5 Rec. where 
 others TreVroxcar. So Luc. D. Deor. 1. 2. 
 Thuc. 8.81. b) Also i. q. to fail, to be with 
 out effect, as TJ dydirrj 1 Cor. 13, 8 ; 6 Xdyoy 
 Sfov Rom. 9, 6. So ^23, Sept. TT/TTTW Josh. 
 23, 14. 2 K. 10, 10 ; 8ianiirra> Josh. 21, 45. 
 So Plut. de rect. rat. Aud. 3 \6yos \nvr)Vfp.ios 
 fKTriirTuv. Plato Phil. 13. d. 
 
 e/crrXeet), f. eva-op-ai, (n-Xecu.) to sail out, 
 lo sail away, from a port or harbour ; c. OTTO 
 Acts 20, 6 ; fls c. ace. of place whither, 1 5, 
 39. 18, 18. So c. aTrd Xen. An. 5. 6. 23 ; 
 c. (Is .Eschin. 4. 27. Xen. Hell. 4. 8. 32. 
 
 ) ), f. coo-ci), (7rXr;po o>,) to Jill 
 out, to make up in full, e. g. in measure or 
 number, c. ace. 2 Mace. 8, 10. Xen. Cyr. 
 5. 4. 32. In N. T. trop. to fulfil, to accom 
 plish in full, e. g. a promise, Acts 13, 33. 
 So Pol. 1. 67. 1 rar f\Tri8as KOI ras eVayye- 
 Xi af. 
 
 e/C7rX77/9&)<Ti9, *&>?> f), (eWX^pdo),) a Jill- 
 ing out, completion, 2 Mace. 6, 14. In N. T. 
 of time, fulfilment ; Acts 21, 26 Sia 
 
 TTjV fKTT\TjpO)(TlV TU1V T]p.fpU>V TOV &yV. 
 
 nouncing the fulfilment (full observance) of 
 the days, i. e. that he was about to keep in 
 full the proper number of days, comp. v. 27 ; 
 see Num. 6, 9 sq. Jos. B. J. 2. 15. 1. So 
 fKir\r]p6a>, Diod. Sic. 2. 57 vup.ifj.ov 8 avToT? 
 e oTt r)v (Tojv a>pio-p.tva>v, /cat TOV \povov 
 
 TOVTOV 
 
 TdV. 
 
 v. -TT&>, f. 
 Pass. aor. 2 (ffnXdyrjv (a instead of t;) in 
 
 such compounds as signify to terrify, 
 Buttm. ^ 114 77X170-0-0); pr. to strike out, to 
 force out by a bloio ; but found only trop. 
 to strike one out of his senses, his self-pos 
 session, i. e. to strike with astonishment, 
 terror, admiration, Pol. 3. 47. 6. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 3. 1. 1. In N. T. only Pass, to be struck 
 with astonishment, admiration, etc. i. q. to 
 be astonished, to be amazed, genr. Matt. 19, 
 25. Mark 10, 26. Sept. for DS 1 ^ Ecc. 7, 
 16. (Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 67.) Spec, of admira 
 tion, comp. Tittm. de Syn. N. T. p. 134; 
 so absol. Matt. 13, 54. Mark 6,2. 7,37. 
 Luke 2, 48 ; with n c. dat. Matt. 7, 28 
 7rl TJJ 8i8a X fj- 22, 33. Mark 1, 22. 11, 18. 
 Luke 4, 32. 9, 43. Acts 13, 12. So with 
 eVi c. dat. JEl. V. H. 12. 41. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 
 4. 27. 
 
 e/C7rz/e&), w, f. euo-o), (TiWo).) to breathe 
 out or forth, c. ace. Diod. Sic. 3. 46 ; Trvev- 
 na Plato Phaed. 16. p. 112. b. In N. T. to 
 expire, to die, intrans. Mark 15, 37. 39. Luke 
 23, 46. So Soph. Ajax 1046. Plut. Aristid. 
 20. Diod. Sic. 15. 87 fin. Fully. eWi/eW TTJV 
 ^VXTIV Eurip. Orest. 1162. 
 
 e/CTropevofiai, f. tvo-op-ai, Pass, depon. 
 (Tropevop.a.1.) 
 
 1. to go out of, to go or come forth ; so 
 of persons, constr. with IK c. gen. of place 
 whence, Mark 13, 1 fK.iropevop.evov UVTOV e/c 
 ToC ffpoC. With dTrd, Matt. 20, 29 eWopeu- 
 op.evu>v avTuiv d-rro lepi^ci. Mark 10, 46 , 
 eo> c. gen. Mark 11,19; Ke1%ev Mark 6,11, 
 Trapa c. gen. of person from whom, John 15, 
 26 ; absol. Luke 3, 7. Acts 25, 4. Spoken 
 of demons, absol. Matt. 17, 21. [Acts 19, 12.] 
 Sept. c. CK for 1? NS? Ps. 19, 6; c. a 
 Ex. 5, 20 ; c. eWISiei/ Deut. 11, 10. So c. 
 tK Pol. 6. 58. 4 ; absol. Xen. Ag. 2. 25. 
 With tls c. ace. of place whither, Mark 
 10, 17 fK7ropevop.(vov CIVTOV els 686v. John 
 
 5. 29; firi c. ace. of pers. Rev. 16, 14; 
 Trpo r c. ace. of pers. Matt. 3, 5. Mark 1, 5. 
 Sept. c. els for XS 1 ^ Ex. 33, 7 ; c. eVi Ex. 
 7, 15 ; c. Trpo y Judg. 9, 33. So c. fls Xen. 
 An. 5. 6. 33. 
 
 2. Of things, to go forth from, to proceed 
 out of; with eVc, as e x TOU uV3po>Vou Mark 
 
 7, 20 ; fK TTJS Kap8ias 7, 21 ; TO eWop. K 
 TOU a-T6p.aTos Matt. 15, 11. 18. Luke 4, 22. 
 Eph. 4, 29. Also symbolically of a sword, 
 c. fK Rev. 1, 16. 19, 15. 21 ; (comp. 2, 16. 
 Is. 49, 2. Hos. 6, 5 :) of lightning, Rev. 4, 
 5 ; fire, 9, 17. 18. 11, 5 ; a river, 22, 1. 
 With OTTO Mark 7, 15 ; Sid c. gen. Matt. 4, 
 4 ; eo-o>2j> Mark 7, 23. Sept. c. for x^i 
 Num. 32, 24. Ez. 1, 13 ; for ^B XS1S D eu Y. 
 
 8, 3. 23, 24. With tls c. ace. of place 
 whither; spoken of rumour, Luke 4, 37 
 
ef-firop. T/XOS irfpi. avrov els Trdvra TOTTOV 
 Spec. i. q. to be ejected, fls TOV d 
 Mark 7, 19. 
 
 3. From the Heb. in the phrase tl 
 ofMi KOI eKTropevo/j-ai, to go in and out, i. e. 
 to perform one s daily duties, Acts 9, 28 ; 
 see in ela-Tropevo^ai. no. 3 ; and espec. in 
 ai no. 4. 
 
 CKTropvevo), f. eva-a, (iropvevco, ) q. d. 
 to whore it out, to give oneself over to fornica 
 tion, absol. Jude 7. Sept. for Jnat Gen. 38, 
 24. Ex. 34, 16. Test. XII Patr p. 653. 
 
 K7TTV<o, f. vo-o), TTTVO), to spit out, Horn. 
 Od. 5. 322. In N. T. trop. to loathe, to reject, 
 c. ace. Gal. 4, 14 ; comp. Rev. 3, 16. So 
 Plut. de Alex. Virt. 5 ; comp. aTroTrruco 
 Eurip. Androm. 607. 
 
 etcpi^oa), w, f. o>cr<o, (pifoco,) to root out 
 or up, c. ace. Matt. 13, 29. 15, 13. Luke 17, 
 6. Jude 12 SevSpa e /cpifcoSei/Ta, i. e. the same 
 as rooted up. Sept. for dSina Jer. 1, 10 ; ijsj) 
 Zeph. 9,, 4. Wisd. 4, 4. 
 
 KC r racn?, fa>s, y, (e^/or^/it,) pr. a put- 
 ti~\g away or removal of any thing out of a 
 pHce, displacement, Plut. de primo Frig. 1 
 a? re rS>v Stpp.&v Kara^rv^fis ov8ffj,ias nap- 
 ovcriq yivovrai Swa/iecoy, dXX fKcrrdafL 3ep- 
 ponjTos. c. 2. In N. T. and commonly 
 trop. ecstasy, i. e. the state of being out of 
 one s usual mind ; Hesych. fypevbs eKcrra- 
 <ris, o fls eavrov p,rj u>v. Thus 
 
 1 . Genr. as arising from any strong emo 
 tion, astonishment, amazement, e. g. from 
 admiration, Mark 5, 42. Luke 5, 26. Acts 
 3, 10 ; from terror, Mark 16, 8. Sept. for 
 p riBS) Deut. 28, 28 ; n^n Gen. 27, 33 ; 
 inQ 2 Chr. 14, 14. Plut. de rect. rat. 
 Aud. 2 tKcrrdcrfis K.al rapa^as Kal Trroias 
 enKpfpfiv. Pol. 2. 55. 6. Longin. de Subl. 1. 
 2. Spec, an ecstasy, a trance, i. e. a state 
 in which the soul is unconscious of present 
 objects, being rapt into visions of distant or 
 future things, Acts 10, 10. 11, 5. 22, 17; 
 comp. 2 Cor. 12, 2 sq. Ez. 1, 1. Artemid. 
 2. 37. Comp. Sept. for fraTntn Gen. 2, 21. 
 Kcrrpe<j)0), f. ^a>, (o-rp^a,) to turn or 
 twist out, e. g. a tree or post TTJS yqs, 
 Arr. Exp. Alex. M. 3. 29 ; to turn inside 
 out, e. g. ra @\f(papa Aristoph. Plut. 721 ; 
 trop. to turn about, to comert, to change, 
 one s life and ways, Aristoph. Nub. 89 
 fKcrrpf^rov o)s ra^tcrra rovs creavTov rpo- 
 TTovy. In N. T. trop. to evert, to subvert, 
 sc. in faith, religious character ; Pass. perf. 
 Tit. 3, 1 1 e^foTpanrai 6 TOIOVTOS, comp. 
 Buttm. J 98. n. 3. Kiihner 140. 6. Sept. 
 for T^sn Am. 6,12; Pass. Deut. 32, 20. 
 So genr. Plut. adv. Stoic. 28. 
 
 I 
 
 Krapda-a-(o v. -TTW, f. 
 
 to stir up wholly, to disturb greatly, trop. 
 e. g. TTJV TroXtz/ Acts 16, 20, Sept. for nS3 
 Ps. 18, 4. Andocid. de Mjbter. 6 Se TTJV 
 o\T)i> eKTapdgas. Plut. Gfcriol. ] 9 TOV 
 
 KTIVC0, f. revco, (retVai,) to stretch out, 
 to extend, e. g. the body for sleep, Xen. 
 Conv. 4. 31. In N. T. 
 
 1. Of the hand, TTJV x e ^P a fKreiveiv, to 
 stretch forth the hand, genr. Matt. 12, 13 bis. 
 26, 51. Mark 3, 5 bis. Luke 6, 10. Sept. 
 for I? noa Josh. 8, 19 ; ^ n^d Gen. 19, 
 10. So Ceb. Tab. 30. Xen. Eq. 7. 2. 
 Spec, for the purpose of healing, Matt. 8, 3. 
 Mark 1,41. Luke 5, 13. Acts 4, 30; of 
 helping, Matt. 14, 31 ; of entreaty, John 21, 
 18; as an orator, Acts 26, 1. With ri 
 c. ace. of pers. to stretch out one s hand 
 upon, i. e. towards any one, Matt. 12, 49. 
 Also i. q. to lay hands upon in a hostile 
 manner, Luke 22, 53 ; so Sept. for 11 naj 
 Ex. 7, 5. Jer. 6, 12; also 1 Mace. 12, 
 39, 42. 
 
 2. Of an anchor, ayKvpas fKTflveiv, to 
 stretch out anchors, to let go the anchors 
 with their cables at full length, Acts 27, 30. 
 
 eVreXew, s>, f. eVo>, (reXe w,) to finish 
 out or ojf, to complete fully, absol. Luke 14, 
 29. 30. Sept. for nibs Deut. 32, 45. Pol. 
 10. 26. 1. Xen. Lac/ 10. 7. 
 
 as, r], (eVmVw,) extension, 
 extent, Hdian. 7. 2. 8. In N. T. trop. in- 
 tentness, earnestness ; Acts 26, 7 ev eKrevtiq, 
 i. e. intently, zealously. So 2 Mace. 14, 38. 
 Phalar. Ep. 68. A word of the later Greek, 
 Lob. adPhryn. p. 311. 
 
 KTVr)$, fos, ovs, 6, T], adj. (eKTeiVa,) 
 pr. stretched out, strained ; trop. intent, 
 earnest, fervent ; Acts 1 2, 5 Trpoo-ev^i) exr. 
 1 Pet. 4, 8 ay dm]. So 3 Mace. 5, 29. 
 Pol. 22. 5. 4. Found chiefly in later wri 
 ters, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 311. Neut. comp. 
 eKTfve crrepov as adv. more earnestly, 
 Luke 22, 44. See Buttm. $ 115. 5. 
 
 adv. (eWei^r,) intently, ear 
 nestly,- 1 Pet. 1, 22. Acts 12, 5 Lachm, 
 Sept. for MptnS Jon. 3, 8. Diod. Sic. 2. 
 24. Pol. 8. 21/1. A late word, Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 311. 
 
 e /m ^/U, f. (K%r)(ra>, (rferjp.i, ) 1. to 
 place out, to expose, e. g. spec, an infant 
 that it may perish, Acts 7, 21 6*cre3eWa Se 
 avrov, in particip. aor. 1 Pass. comp. Buttm. 
 ^ 107. n. I, 16. Wisd. 18, 5. ffl. V. H 
 2. 7. Diod. Sic. 3. 58. 
 
 2. Mid. eKri3e/iai, to set forth, to ex 
 
235 
 
 pound, to declare, Acts 11, 4. 18, 26. 28, 
 23. Sept. for nba Job 36, 13. Jos. Ant. 
 1. 12. 2. Athen. T p. 278. Pol. 31. 19. 3. 
 
 eKTivdaa-aj v. -TT&>, du, (rtwio-a-co,) 
 to shake out or off, e. g. TOV novioprov TUV 
 TTo8a>v Matt. 10, 14. Acts 13, 51 ; TOV xvv 
 VTTOK. T. TroS. Mark 6, 1 1 ; TO. lp.a.Tia Acts 
 18, 9. These were symbolical acts, signi 
 fying the total breaking off of all further 
 intercourse ; comp. Lightfoot Hor. Heb. ad 
 Matt. 10, 14. Plut. Cato Maj. 14. 
 
 e/CTO9, 77, ov, ordin. num. (e,) the sixth, 
 as eAcn, ipa, the sixth hour, i. e. in the Jew 
 ish reckoning, noon, Matt. 20. 5. 27, 45. 
 Mark 15, 33. Luke 23, 44. John 4, 6. 19, 
 14. Acts 10, 9. Also Luke 1,26. 36. Rev. 
 6, 12. 9, 13. 14. 16, 12. 21, 20. Sept. for 
 "tSB Gen. 1, 31. 30, 19. Hdian. 5. 8. 19. 
 Plato Rep. 616. e. 
 
 A p T09j adv. (eV) out of, without, i. e. 
 
 1. Pr. of place, with the art. TO CKTOS, 
 pr. that without, the outside, Matt. 23, 26 TO 
 fKTos avTvv. Buttm. { 125. 6, 7. So Plut. 
 adv. Colot. 25 ; TO. ficros Pol. 3. 46. 2. 
 As Prep, with a gen. out of, 2 Cor. 12, 2. 3 
 eire tKTos TOV crupjtTos. 1 Cor. 6, 18 TTO.V 
 a/j.dpTr]fj.a fKTos TOV cra>paTO? COTt, is outside 
 of the body, affects it (so to speak) only ex 
 ternally. So Horn. Od. 12. 219. Xen. Mag. 
 Eq. 7. 4. 
 
 2. Trop. without, i. e. except, besides, as 
 Prep. c. gen. Acts 26, 22 ov8ev IKTOS Xe ycoi/ 
 &v KT\. 1 Cor. 15, 27. Sept. for lab 1 K. 
 4, 23 ; -n^a 1 K. 10, 13. So Xen. Hell. 
 1. 2. 3. Plato Gorg. 474. d. Pleon. pre 
 fixed to et fir), as fKTos ei p.r], except if. . . not, 
 i. q. except, unless; see Winer 5 67. 1. n. b. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 459. 1 Cor. 14, 5 CKTOS 
 d p.T] 0-ifpp.fvfvjj. 15, 2. 1 Tim. 5, 19. So 
 Luc. D. Mort. 16. 4. D. Meretr. 1. 2. Plut. 
 Demosth. 9. fin. 
 
 /crp7ro), f. \^o>. (rp/Tro).) to turn out, 
 off, aside, from a place, way, course, trans. 
 e. g. TO vSwp e<?Tpe7re Thuc. 5. 65. Mid. 
 with aor. Pass. fgeTpdTnjv as Mid. to turn 
 oneself aside from a way or course, i. e. 
 to turn aside from, to deflect, intrans. e. g. 
 tys 68oC Ml. V. H. 14. 49 ; absol. Xen. 
 An. 4. 5. 15. Hence in N. T. Mid. trop. 
 to turn aside or away, intrans. 
 
 1. Genr. from the true course ; spoken 
 of those who abandon the truth and em 
 brace error, 1 Tim. 1, 6 t^fTpaTrrjo-av els 
 fMTaioXoyiav. With tiri c. ace. 2 Tim. 
 4, 4 ; O7rio-<a TIVOS 1 Tim. 5, 15 ; absol. 
 Heb. 12, 13 Iva pr) TO xwXoi (KTpcnrij, i.e. 
 make straight and level paths, that the lame 
 turn not aside into by-paths, but may be 
 
 healed. Others here render (KTpaTrfj, be 
 wrenched, dislocated; this accords better 
 with the figure, but is wholly without au 
 thority. So c. els, Polyb. 6. 10. 2, 7 els 
 KaKias. Jos. Ant. 8. 10. 2 ; c. eVi Plut. 
 PhilopO3m. 9. 
 
 2. With ace. of person or thing, to turn 
 away from, to avoid ; 1 Tim. 6, 20 e/crpe- 
 Trofjifvos TCIS pej3ri\ovs Kevo(pcovias. ^El. V. 
 H. 13. 25. Plut. adv. Stoic. 10. Dem. 411. 
 12. 
 
 , f. fuZptyo), (Tpe 0a),) to nou 
 rish out in full, to nourish up, to bring up 
 from childhood, Sept. for bia Kal and Piel, 
 1 K. 12, 8. 10. Is. 23, 4. Xen. An. 7. 2. 
 32. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Genr. to nourish up, to cherish, e. g. 
 TTJV eavTov crap/ca Eph. 5, 29. Sept. for 
 bsbs Gen. 41, 11. ^El. V. H. 2. 14. Xen. 
 CEc. l7. 10. 
 
 2. Spec, to bring up, to train up in any 
 manner ; c. ace. Eph. 6, 4 eVrpe cpeTe OVTO. 
 eV TraiSft a KT\. Sept. Prov. 23, 24. Pol. 1. 
 65. 7 ev TraiSeiais /cat vopois KT\. 
 
 eKTpWfJtCl, O.TOS, TO, (fKTlTpd>0-KO> tO CaUSG 
 
 abortion,) an abortion, one born out of due 
 time, trop. 1 Cor. 15, 8. Sept. for bEJ Job 
 3, 16. Eccl. 6, 3 ; comp. Num. 12, *12. 
 Aristot. H. An. 10. 27. Philo Leg. Alleg. 
 p. 54. c. Found only in medical and late 
 writers ; the Attics used a/i/3\w/ia ; see 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 208 sq. Thorn. Mag. p. 
 318. 
 
 K<f>6pa), f. fgoio-a, (<pe po),) aor. 1 e ij- 
 vtyKa, aor. 2 f^rjvfyxov. 
 
 1. to bear or carry out, to bring forth, 
 e. g. out of a place, c. ace. Luke 15, 22 TTJV 
 OTO\f]V. Acts 5, 15 TOVS dcr3ei>els, sc. out of 
 the houses. 1 Tim. 6, 7. Sept. for x^n 
 1 Sam. 5, 1 ; fcOSin Gen. 14, 18. So Hdian". 
 2. 1. 3, 4. Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 7. Spec, of a dead 
 body for burial, Acts 5, 6. 9. 10. So Pol. 1. 
 80. 10. Xen. An. 6. 1. 6. Mem. 1. 2. 53. 
 
 2. Of the earth, to bring forth, to yield, c. 
 ace. Heb. 6, 8 Tas aKaiftas. Sept. for sosin 
 Gen. 1, 12. Hag. 1, 11. Diod. Sic. 2. 47. 
 Xen. CEc. 17. 10. 
 
 K(f>evjCO, f. evop,ai, ((peuyw,) to Jlee 
 out of a place, to flee away; c. IK. Acts 19, 
 16 fK<pvye1v fK TOV OIKOV. Absol. Acts 16, 27. 
 So Ecclus. 27, 20. Luc. Anachar. 29. Xen. 
 Cyr. 6. 1. 40. With an ace. to Jlee from, 
 to escape, e. g. calamities, Luke 21, 36 ; TOS 
 Xeipdy TIIW, i. e. out of the power of any 
 one, 2 Cor. 11, 33 (Susann. 22. 2 Mace. 6, 
 26) ; TO xpip.0. TOV 3eou, Rom. 2, 3 (2 Mace. 
 7, 35 Kpio-iv). Also c. ace. impl. 1 Thess. 
 5,3 KOI ov P.TJ fK(pvyct)o-iv. Heb. 2,3. 1 J, 25 
 
236 
 
 Lachm. comp. Ecclus. 16, 13. Sept. for ito 
 Job 15, 30; Vin Prov. 10, 19. So Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 31. Plato Apol. 39. a. 
 
 6K(f>o/3e(0, u>, f. 170-0), (0o/3eo),) to frighten 
 out or away, to terrify, c. ace. 2 Cor. 10, 9. 
 Sept. for Tnnn Lev. 26, 6. Pol. 14. 10. 
 3. Plato Gorg. 483. c. 
 
 e0o/3o9, ov, 6, 17, adj. (eVc$o/3 a>,) fright 
 ened out of one s senses, greatly terrified, 
 affrighted, Mark 9, 6. Heb. 12, 21. Sept. 
 <. ei/u for 151 Deut. 9, 19. Plut. Fab. 
 M&x. 6. 
 
 eif(pvo), f. tio-a), ((/>vo>,) to ZeZ grow oztf, 
 ro >wZ /ortfc, as a tree its leaves or fruit ; c. 
 ace. Matt. 24, 32 and Mark 13, 28 orav fjdr) 
 o K\d8os . , . TO. (f)v\\a fK<pvT), when noio the 
 branch . . . putteth forth leaves ; here eK(pvrj 
 is pres. Subjunct. So Symm. for sosi ln Ps. 
 104, 14 where Sept. eayayeli>. Plut. Symp. 
 7. 2. 1 KapTrov fK<f)vfiv. Others in these 
 passages read fK<pvfj, which is Subjunct. 
 of aor. 2 egf>vr]v, a later form for Att. 
 *.f<j)vi>, intrans. as is also the perfect ; 
 (o grow out, to put forth, i. e. TO. <pv\\a e*- 
 $vfj, the leaves put forth; see Buttm. J 114 
 <uu>. Winer J 15. So Jos. Ant. 2. 5. 5 
 c-raxvas eufpvevras. Luc. Tim. 29. Plut. 
 Arat. 50. 
 
 e/c^eco, (xe&>,) also CK^VVCO a later form 
 disapproved by the grammarians, Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 726. f ut. <? K% f w instead of Att. 
 fKxew, for e<x\i<Ta>, Buccm. 5 95. n. 9. 5 114 
 Xf<a. Ausf. Spr. II. p. 489. Kiinner 151. 
 n. 1. Aor. 1 e^e^ea, Buttm. 96. n. 1 ; on 
 the 3 pers. aor. 1 e e xfe John 2, 15, see 
 Buttm. J 105. n. 2 marg. Pass. perf. e*- 
 Kexvpai, Buttm. 98. n. 4 ; aor. 1 egexv- 
 %TJV, iut. 1 eV^ii377<ro/iai. 
 
 1. to jjour owZ from a vessel or the like ; 
 c. ace. John 2, 15 e^e^ee TO Ke p/ia, he poured 
 out the money, sc. from the tables upon the 
 ground. Pass. Matt. 9, 17 6 oivos e ^etrat, 
 the wine is poured out, spilled. Mark 2, 22. 
 Luke 5, 37. Acts 1, 18 egexv^r] -iravra TO. 
 (nr\dyxva avrov, his bowels gushed out. 
 Sept. for "nsai Ex. 4, 9 ; of ashes and dust 
 Lev. 4, 12. 14, 41 ; comp. 2 Sam. 20, 10. 
 So Horn. II. 3. 296 olvov. Luc. Anachar. 
 17, 29. Xen. Hell. 6. 5. 50 TO eVmjSeia. 
 Spec, alfia eK^eo), to pour out blood, to 
 shed blood, to kill, Acts 22, 20. Rom. 3, 15. 
 Rev. 16, 6. Particip. ai/za eK^vvo^evov, 
 Matt. 23, 35. Luke 11, 50. Spoken of the 
 blood of Christ shed or poured out as a sacri 
 fice for sin, irfpl (vTrep) 7roXXo>i>, Matt. 26, 
 28. Mark 14, 24. Luke 22, 20. Sept. for 
 Cfl Tj? Gen. 9, 6. 2 K. 21, 16 ; comp. 
 
 Deut. 19, 10. Ps. 79, 10. Meton. the con- 
 tainer put for the contents, eV^- rrjv <pia\r)v, 
 Rev. 16, 1. 2. 3. 4. 8. 10. 12. 17. 
 
 2. Trop. to pour out, to shed abroad, to 
 bestow largely; so with ace. and eVt c. ace. 
 of pers. e. g. TO nvevfia, Acts 2, 17. 18. 
 (Joel 3, 1. 2.) v. 33. Tit. 3, 6; Pass. Acts 
 10, 45. Pass. c. ev, Rom. 5, 5 fj aycnrrj rov 
 SeoCi fKKexvrai ev rais KapSiais vpSiv. Sept. 
 for ^fito Jer. 14, 16. Zech. 12, 10. Ecclus. 
 18, 11/24, 33. 
 
 3. Trop. of persons, Pass, or Mid. to be 
 poured out, or as in Engl. intrans. to pour 
 or rush forth ; Sept. Vat. for wija Judg. 20, 
 37. Horn. Od. 8. 515. Plut. Pomp. 27 Trap- 
 res eexv%Ti<rav. Hence in N. T. and late 
 writers, to rush into any mode of thinking 
 or acting, to give oneself up to any error or 
 the like ; c. dat. of direction, Jude 1 1 77; 
 irXdvr) TOV BaXaa/i . . . ie)(ter)irap. So Ec- 
 clus. 37, 39. Pol. 32. 11. 4. Plut. M. An 
 
 ton. 21 fls TOV JjSvTTaSJJ KOL aKO\a<TTOi> /3l oi> 
 
 e/c^vvca, see in eKxeca. 
 
 K%0)pe(0) 5), f. 170-0), (^copeco,) to go out 
 or away, to depart out, absol. Luke 21, 21, 
 Sept. for rna Am. 7, 12. Ml. V. H. 3. 21, 
 Diod. Sic. 4/64. 
 
 f. 0,, O/^xoO to breathe out, 
 to expire, to die, absol. Acts 5, 5. 10. 12, 23. 
 Sept. Ez. 21, 7 [12]. 
 
 e/e&w, ovo-a, o i>, willing, voluntary, usu 
 ally in an adverbial sense, Rom. 8, 20. 1 Cor. 
 9, l7. See Buttm. 5 123. 6. Kiihner 264. 
 3. Sept. Ex. 21, 13. Hdian. 2. 4. 5. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 1. 12. 
 
 eXata, as, 17, an olive, i. e. 1. The 
 tree, an olive-tree, symbolically, Rom. 11, 
 17. 24. Rev. 11,4. Sept. for MM Judg. 9, 
 8. 9; symb. Zach. 4, 3. 11. 12. (Xen. An. 
 6. 4.6.) Elsewhere, TO opos rfov e Xai- 
 wi>, the Mount of Olives, the high ridge ly 
 ing east of Jerusalem parallel to the city, 
 and separated from it by the valley of the 
 Kidron ; it is still sprinkled over with olive- 
 trees, but less thickly probably than of old. 
 The elevation is 2556 Paris feet above the 
 sea, and 416 Par. feet above the valley of 
 the Kidron. Matt. 21,1. 24,3. 26,30. Mark 
 11, 1. 13, 3. 14, 26. Luke 19, 29. 37. 21, 
 37. 22, 39. John 8, 1. Sept. for D^wn "in 
 Zeph. 14, 4 ; comp. 2 Sam. 15, 30. So Jos. 
 Ant. 20. 8. 6. B. J. 5. 2. 3. See Bibl. Res, 
 in Pal. I. p. 347 sq. 405 sq. 
 
 2. The fruit, an olive, James 3, 12. 
 Plut. de aud. Poet. 6. p. 55. Xen. An. 7. 
 1.37. 
 
237 
 
 eXaiOV, ov, TO, (e Xai a,) olive-oil, oil, of 
 various qualities and uses ; e. g. for lamps, 
 Matt. 25, 3. 4. 8 ; for wounds and anointing 
 the sick, Mark 6, 13. Luke 10, 34. James 
 5, 14; as mixed with spices for anointing 
 the head and body in token of honour, Luke 
 7, 46. Heb. 1,9; see in dXe/cpco. Oil was 
 also an article of traffic, Luke 16, 6. Rev. 
 18, 13. Sept. for -jnlfl 1 Sam. 16, 1. 13. al. 
 So Xen. An. 4. 4. 13. Conv. 2. 4. Meton. and 
 genr. oil is put for the tree and its produce, 
 Rev. 6,6; comp. Jer. 40, 10. Hag. 1, 11. 
 
 eXauav, was, 6, (e Xat a,) an oliceyard, 
 olive-orchard, pr. Sept. for n?t Ex. 23, 11. 
 2 K. 5, 26. In N. T. Olivet, as a name of 
 the Mount of Olives, Acts 1, 12; see in 
 tXaia no. 1. So Jos. Ant. 7. 9. 2. 
 
 -EXa/uT?;?, ov, 6, an Elamile, an in 
 habitant of Elam (0^5) or Elymais, a 
 region of Persia adjacent to the northern 
 extremity of the Persian |ulf, forming part 
 of the district of Susiana or the modern 
 Khiisistan, of which Susa was the ancient 
 capital, Acts 2, 9 ; comp. Is. 21, 2. Jer. 49, 
 34 sq. Dan. 8, 2. See Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. 
 I. i. p. 300 sq. Winer Realw. art. Elam. 
 Ritter Erdk. XI. p. 154. 
 
 eXdcra-atv v. -TTCOV, ovos, 6, fj, adj. pr. 
 compar. of eXa^t;? an old epic word ; but 
 used as compar. of pticpos, Buttm. $ 68. 4 ; 
 less, the kss, minor, e. g. in quality, in 
 ferior, worse, as wine, John 2, 10 ; in age, 
 younger, Rom. 9, 12 (Sept. for TVS* Gen. 
 25, 23) ; in dignity, Heb. 7, 7. So Hdian. 
 5. 1. 14. Thuc. 1. 8. Neut. eXarrov, 
 adverbially, c. gen. less than, 1 Tim. 5, 9 ; 
 comp. Buttm. $ 115. 5. So Diod. Sic. 1. 32. 
 Plato Legg. 764. e. 
 
 eXoTTOZ e&), ei>, f. TJO-CO, (eXaTTcof,) to make 
 less, to diminish, c. ace. Sept. Prov. 14, 34; 
 also for o Wnn Lev. 25, 16. Pass, for ^OH 
 Gen. 8, 3. 5. In N. T. intrans. like Heb. 
 Hiphil, to have less, to lack, to fall short, 
 absol. 2 Cor. 8. 15 6 TO oXi yov, OVK e Xarro- 
 vr](Tf, quoted from Ex. 16, 18 where Sept. 
 for 1">0nn ; also Sept. for aiSEH Ex. 30, 
 15. Comp. Pass. Ecclus. 19, 5. i. 
 
 eXtXTTOft), c5, f. coo-co, (eXaTTcoj/,) to make 
 kss, e. g. in dignity, to make lower than 
 another, Heb. 2, 7 ^XaTTcocray avrbv [ Iij- 
 erovj>] ftpaxy TI Trap dyytXovs, also Pass, 
 v. 9 ; quoted from Ps. 8, 6 where Sept. for 
 1SH ; also for tt^afl Num. 26, 54. So 
 Phiio de Opif. p. 20. a. Plut. Agesi. 9. Xen. 
 Hell. 1. 4. 16. Pass, to become less, to de 
 crease, John 3, 30. Sept. for "ion Jer. 44, 
 18. So Plut. Pyrrh. 26 init. Plato Rep. 
 649 c. 
 
 , f. e Xdo-co, perf. e\r]Xaica, to drive, 
 to drive on, to impel; e. g. oxen Ecclus. 38, 
 28 ; horses Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 29. In N. T. 
 
 1. Of ships and clouds, Pass, to be driven 
 about by winds, James 3, 4. 2 Pet. 2, 17 
 So Jos. Ant. 5. 5. 3 TW vfrov fjXavve ai/e- 
 p>y. Plut. de Fortuna 2. Trop. of a per 
 son, Luke 8, 29 r/Xai/vfro inro rov dalunvos 
 KrX. So Wisd. 16, 18. Pol. 3. 70. 7. Plato 
 Phaedr. 240. d. 
 
 2. Spec, to impel with oars, to row. ab 
 sol. Mark 6, 48. John 6, 19. Sept. for o^ 
 Is. 33, 21. Dem. 1223. 9. Thuc. 3. 49. 
 Xen. Hell. 6. 2. 29 ; fully, TTJV vmiv Xen. 
 Ath. 1. 2. 
 
 eXa<f>pia, ay, 17, (e XcKppos,) lightness, pr. 
 in weight ; trop. of mind, lightness, incon 
 stancy, 2 Cor. 1, 17. Hesych. e Xacppia 
 /icopi a. A word of the later age, Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 343. 
 
 oy, d, 6v, light, not heavy, opp 
 Plato Tim. 63. c, d. In N. T. light, 
 easy to bear; Matt. 11, 30 (fropriov fiov e Xa- 
 cppoV la-riv, i. e. trop. my precepts, require 
 ments, are light. Neut. TO eXafypov as 
 Subst lightness, 2 Cor. 4, 17 TO tXatppyv rtjs 
 SXn/fecoy, i. q. TJ eXacppa 3Xi\^ir, comp. Buttm. 
 5 123. 3. Winer 34. 2. So genr. Antiphon. 
 677. pen. Plut. Nicias 9 eXacpporepaf ciroici 
 TTJV aTV^iav. 
 
 eXa^t<TT09, rj, ov, pr. superl. of the old 
 epic eXax*>s, but used as superl. of fintpos 
 (comp. in e Xdcro-coi ), Buttm. j 68. 4 ; the 
 least, minimus, e. g. in magnitude, James 
 3, 4 ; in number and quantity, Luke 16, 10 
 bis. 19, 17 ; in rank or dignity, Matt. 2, 6. 
 5, 19 tXdx- /cX^Sj/o-eTcu. 25, 40. 45. 1 Cor. 
 15, 9 ; in weight or importance, Matt. 
 
 5, 19 eiroXeu eXax- Luke 12, 26. 1 Cor. 
 
 6, 2, 4, 3 see in / II. 8. b. Sept. of dig 
 nity for 1*** 1 Sam. 9, 21 ; "jaj? 2 K. 18, 
 24 ; of importance, for 1^J5 Prov. 30, 24. 
 Of weight and importance, Plato Legg. 
 854. e ; of dignity, Wisd. 6, 6. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 1. 6. 
 
 e\a^t(TTorepo<), -q, ov, (compar. from 
 the superl. eXa^to-roy.) less than the least, far 
 less, Eph. 3, 8. Comp. e Xa^to-ToVaroy Sext. 
 Empir. 9. 406. Such double comparisons 
 though used by the poets, are elsewhera 
 found only in the prose of a late age 
 Buttm. J 69. n. 3. Winer $11. 2, b. Lob 
 ad Phryn. p. 136. See Wetst. N. T. in loc 
 
 eXao), a rare poetic form, whence f. e Xd- 
 o"co used as flit, of e Xavvco q. v. 
 
 -EXea^iz/^cSjindec. Eleazar,Ueb. ^jsbij 
 (whom God helps, Germ. Gotlhi/f), pr 
 name of a man, Matt. 1,15 bis. 
 
238 
 
 eXeo? 
 
 j ov. 6, (eXeyx<,) conviction, 
 reproof, 2 Tim. 3, 16 Lachm. where Rec. 
 s. Sept. Lev. 19, 17. Ecclus. 21, 6. 
 
 fa >y, V (^ e yX <B >) conviction, 
 reproof; 2 Pet. 2, 16 eXey^ e^eu i- q- 
 fXtyxeo-SJat, to Tiare conviction, i. e. to be 
 convicted, reproved. Sept. Job 21, 4. 23, 2. 
 
 ^ e 7% 9 ou > O^Vx^j) convincing 
 argument, proof. Sept. for nnDlFl Job 23, 4. 
 JS1. V. H. 7. 19. Plato Prot 344. b. In 
 N. T. conviction, i. e. 
 
 1. The act of convincing, i. q. confutation, 
 reproof, 2 Tim. 3, 16 Rec. Sept. for mo Sin 
 Prov. 5, 12. 29, 15. Long. Fragm. 3. 11 
 
 2. The state of being convinced, convic 
 tion, persuasion, firm belief, Heb. 11,1. 
 
 eXey^w, f. Q>, to shame, to disgrace, 
 only in Homer, as Od. 21. 424. II. 9. 518 or 
 522. Usually and in N. T. to convince, to 
 confute, to refute, to prove one in the wrong, 
 and thus to shame him, e. g. 
 
 1. to convince, to convict; c. ace. Tit. 1, 
 9 KOI TOVS dvriXeyovras e\eyxf<-v. Pass. 
 John,8, 9. 1 Cor. 14, 24. James 2, 9 ; also 
 with TTtpi TIVOS John 8, 46. 16, 8. Sept. for 
 lyairt Job 32, 12. Ps. 50, 21. ^El. V. H. 
 12. 51. Xen. Mem. 3. 8. 1. Hence 
 
 2. Spec, to admonish, to reprove, to rebuke, 
 c. ace. of pers. Matt. 18, 15 vrraye KOI eXcy- 
 o/ avrov KT\. 1 Tim. 5, 20. Tit. 1, 13. 
 Rev. 3, 19. [Jude 15, 22] ; ace. impl. 2 Tim. 
 4, 2. Tit. 2, 15. Pass. Luke 3, 19. Heb. 12, 5, 
 quoted from Prov. 3, 11. 12, where Sept. for 
 nnsitn. Also with the idea of openness, 
 plainness, c. ace. of thing, Eph. 5, 11 ; 
 Pass. v. 13. John 3, 20. Sept. genr. for 
 n-Oitt Prov. 9, 8. Of pers. ^El.V. H. 13. 
 24. Xen. Mem. 1. 2.47. Of things, Hdian. 
 3. 12. 11. Xen. Conv.8. 43. 
 
 ?, 77, 6v, (eXcoy,) pitiful, merciful, 
 Hdian. 1. 4. 3 ; pitied, Horn. II. 24. 309. 
 Usually and in N. T. pitiable, wretched, mi 
 serable, 1 Cor. 15, 19. Rev. 3, 17. So Diod. 
 Sic. 13. 28. Plato Gorg. 469. a. The purer 
 Attic form was e\e ivos , Lob. ad Phryn. p. 87. 
 
 eXeew, , f. fjcrco, (eXeor,) to pity, to take 
 compassion, to have mercy on any one ; 
 Pass, to be pitied, to obtain mercy ; implying 
 not merely a feeling of the evils of others, 
 (sympathy, oi/crtp/aos,) but also an active 
 desire of removing them ; see Tittm. de 
 Synon. N. T. p. 69 sq. 
 
 1. Genr. and Act. c. ace. Matt. 9, 27 
 t\ei)<Tov fjp.as, vie Aa/3/8. 15, 22. 17, 15. 
 18, 33 bis. 20, 30. 31. Mark 5, 19. 10, 47. 
 48. Luke 16, 24. 17, 13. 18, 38. 39. Phil. 
 
 2, 27. Jude 22 see in 8iaKpiva> no. 1. 
 Sept. for }in 2 Sam. 12, 22 ; crn Deut. 
 13, 17. (Dem. 753. 11. Plato Conv" 173. c.) 
 In Rom. 12, 8 spoken of those who had 
 charge of the poor, or perh. of private bene 
 volence ; comp. Sept. and ")3fi p r0 v. 14, 21. 
 28, 8. Pass. Matt. 5, 7. 1 Cor. 7, 25 us 
 rj\er][jLfvos inro Kvpiov TTIOTOS fivai, as one 
 that hath obtained mercy of the Lord to be 
 faithful (i. e. believing) ; here TTIOTOS elvat 
 is epexegetical. 2 Cor. 4, 1. 1 Tim. 1, 13. 
 16. Sept. for JiarVl Hos. 1, 6. So Lys. 257. 
 ult. Plato Rep. 337. a. 
 
 2. Spec, in N. T. of God s mercy through 
 Christ, or salvation in Christ, to have mercy 
 on, i. q. to give salvation, to save, c. ace. 
 Rom. 9, 15 e Xerjo-co ov av e Xeoj, quoted from 
 Sept. Ex. 33, 19 where" Sept. for "^; in 
 Ex. spoken generally, but applied by Paul 
 in the gospel sense. So v. 16 aXXa TOV eXe- 
 ovvros Seov, where Lachm. eXewiror as if 
 from a Pres. eXeaw. v. 18. 11, 32 ; Pass. 11, 
 30. 31 ; also 1 Pet. 2, 10, comp. Hos. 2, 23. 
 eXe?7/iocrw?7, ^ ^ ( f r \ f r ] ^ a > v ,~) mercy, 
 compassion, Sept. for lOH Prov. 21, 21 ; 
 HBX Is. 38, 18. Callim. Hymn, in Del. 152. 
 In N. T. meton. act of mercy, alms, 
 charity, money given to the poor ; Matt. 6, 
 1 Rec. where the better reading is 8iKmo- 
 a-vvrj. Matt. 6, 2. 3. 4. Luke 11,41. 12,33. 
 Acts 3, 2. 3. 10. 9, 36. 10, 2. 4. 31. 24, 17. 
 Sept. for Chald. ^^ Dan. 4, 24 [27]. So 
 Ecclus. 3, 14. 12/3. Diog. Laert. 5. 17 
 
 ovos, 6, 77, adj. (eXfos,) pitiful, 
 merciful, compassionate, i. e. actively so, 
 Matt. 5, 7. Heb. 2, 17. Sept. for ^Sr] Ex. 
 22, 27; CWn p s . 145, 8. Horn. Od. 5. 
 191. Lysias 168. 40. 
 
 e Xeo?, ov, 6, also eovs, TO, (kindr. iXaos, 
 rXewy,) pity, mercy, compassion, i. e. active 
 pity, comp. in eXeeo) init. Tittm. de Syn. 
 N. T. p. 69 sq. The forms of 6 eXeos 
 are usual in classic writers ; those of TO 
 eXeos are found only in Sept. the N. T. and 
 ecclesiastical writers. Thus 
 
 1. Masc. 6 eXeoy, Matt. 23, 23 a0r)rare 
 . . . TTJV Kpicriv Kal TOV f\eoi> Kal TTJV Tricmv. 
 Tit. 3, 5. Heb. 4, 16 ; also Matt. 9, 1 3 and 12, 
 7 e\eov Se Xo) Kal ov Svtrt ai;, quoted from Hos. 
 6, 6 where Sept. TO e\eos for i&rl piety, 
 goodness ; parall. with Q : 1% ! " l ? 3> Sept. 
 tTriyvKXTLs 3eov. Sept. also 6 eXeos for T^ 
 Is. 60, 10. Luc. D. Deor. 13. 1. Dem. 
 735. 1. Plato Rep. 539. a. 
 
 2. Neut. TOfXeos, genr. Luke 1 , 50. 78. 
 Rom. 9, 23. 15, 9. Eph. 2, 4. 1 Pet. 1, 3. 
 
239 
 
 eX/co? 
 
 James 2, 13 (see in KaraKauxao/iai). 3, 17. 
 Sept. for ion Neh. 13, 22. Ps. 51, 1 ; 
 crn Deut. 13,7. So IT 01 el v eXeoy fifrd 
 TWOS, to do mercy with any one, to show 
 mercy to, i. q. e Xeeu>, e. g. Luke 1, 72. 10, 
 37. James 2, 13. Sept. for ES 1DH ntoS 
 Gen. 24, 12. 1 Sam. 15, 6. al. Also ^ya- 
 \vvtiv fXeoy /iera TIIW, Luke 1, 58. In the 
 phrase fj.i>Tjo-%f)vai f\eovs,to remember 
 mercy, Luke 1, 54, i. e. to give anew proof 
 of mercy and favour to Israel, in allusion to 
 God s ancient mercies to that people ; comp. 
 Ps. 25, 6. 89, 29. 50. Sept. for Ton ISt 
 2 Chr. 6, 42. Jer. 2, 2. Spec, of the mercy 
 of God through Christ, i. e. salvation in the 
 gospel sense ; Jude 21 TO eXeor irjo-ov, i. e. 
 the salvation of or through Christ. Rom. 11, 
 31. So in benedictions, including the idea 
 of mercies and blessings of every kind ; 
 e. g. 8a>rj eXeos 6 Kvpios, 2 Tim. 1, 16. 18 ; 
 also joined with flprjvrj and the like, Gal. 6, 
 16. 1 Tim. 1, 2. 2 Tim. 1, 2. Tit. 1, 4. 
 2 John 3. Jude 2. 
 
 e\ev^repia, as, f], (e XevSfpos-,) freedom, 
 liberty, i. e. personal liberty, freedom from 
 restraint, 1 Cor. 10, 29 (Diog. Laert. 7. 
 121. Plato Ep. 354. e) ; from the yoke of 
 the Mosaic law, Gal. 2, 4. 5, 1. 13 bis. 
 2 Cor. 3, 17, comp. v. 6. 7 ; hence vopos 
 f\(vZepias, the law of liberty, the gospel, 
 opp. to the yoke of the Jewish law, James 
 
 1, 25. 2, 12 ; comp. Gal. 5, 1. Rom. 8, 2. 
 2 Cor. 3, 17. Also freedom from the yoke 
 of external observances in general, 1 Pet. 
 
 2, 16. 19 ; from a state of calamity and 
 death, Rom. 8, 21. Comp. Xen. Mem. 4. 5. 2. 
 
 \eifeepo$ : fpa, ov, perh. one who can 
 go where he will, from obsol. e Xev3<B i. q. 
 fpxofj.cu ; hence, free, at liberty, not under 
 restraint or bondage, Lat. liber. 
 
 1. In a civil sense : a) free-born, 1 Cor. 
 7, 22. 12, 13. Gal. 3, 28. 4, 22. 23. 30. 31. 
 Eph. 6, 8. Col. 3, 11. Rev. 6, 15. 13, 16. 
 19, 18. Trop. of the heavenly Jerusalem, 
 Gal. 4, 26 ; comp. v. 24. Sept. for fi nn 
 Neh. 13, 17. Ecc. 10, 17. So Dem. 752. 
 13. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 3, 4, 6. b) freed, 
 made free, John 8, 33. 1 Cor. 7, 21. Sept. 
 for ISBn Ex. 21, 2. 26. 27. 
 
 2. Genr./ree, exempt, from an obligation, 
 law, duty, Matt. 17, 26. Rom. 7, 3 and 
 1 Cor. 7, 39, comp. Sept. for Vtt}> Deut. 
 21, 14. (Luc. Asin. 23.) Also free from 
 external obligations in general, so as to act 
 as one pleases, 1 Cor. 9, 1. 19, comp. v. 4. 5. 
 (Xen. Hi. 1. 16.) Or from the yoke of the 
 Mosaic law and all other external observ 
 ances, 1 Pet. 2, 16 ; comp. Gal. 5, 13. 
 
 Trop. free from the bondage of sin and 
 death, John 8, 36. Also Rom. 6, 20 ore 
 yap SovXot rJTf TTJS dpaprias, e XewSepot rjre 
 rfj 8iKaio(TvvT], ye were free AS TO righteous 
 ness, did not yield yourselves to its require 
 ments, opp. v. 18 ; here e XtvSepoi is put for 
 the sake of antithesis with SoOXoi and im 
 plies an unreal freedom ; for the dat. see 
 Winer $31. 3. 
 
 e\V^ep6o), , f. cbcrw, (eXeuSepor,) to 
 free, to set at liberty, in a civil sense, Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 1. 28. In N. T. trop. to make free, 
 e. g. from the power and penalty of sin, 
 John 8, 32. 36 ; with OTTO c. gen. Rom. 6, 
 
 18. 22 ; from the yoke of the Mosaic law, 
 Gal. 5, 1 ; or its condemnation, c. oVd Rom. 
 8,2; from a state of calamity and death, Rom. 
 8, 21. Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 21 17 ^v^J? /ioXtora 
 
 So pr. C. drro Hell. 5. 2. 12. 
 
 CQ>S, 17, (e Xevo-o^ai,) a coming, 
 Acts 7, 52. Dion. Hal. I. p. 565. ed. Reisk. 
 Act. Thorn. 5 28. 
 
 e\.e<j)dvTlVO$, TJ, ov, (eXe$ar,) of ivory, 
 ivory, Rev. 18, 12. Sept. for 1^ 1 K. 10, 
 18. Hdian. 4. 2. 3, 13. Plato Crit. 116. d. 
 
 E\iaKeifjLj 6, indec. Eliakim, Heb. 
 ^J?? i^v (God appointed), pr. n. of a man : 
 a) Matt. 1,13 bis. b) Luke 3, 30. 
 
 EXtee/3, <5, indec. Eliezer, Heb. ItS^S 
 (God his help), pr. n. of a man. Luke 3, 29. 
 
 JEXtouS, 6, indec. Eliud, pr. n. of a 
 man, Matt. 1, 14. 15; prob. compounded 
 from Heb. ?8J God, and Tin praise, but not 
 found in O. T. 
 
 E\l<7a(3T : 17, indec. Elisabeth, Heb. 
 satins (God her oath), Elisheba, Sept. 
 Vat. EXi<ra|3e3, pr. n. of the wife of Zacha- 
 rias, the mother of John the Baptist, Luke 
 1, 5. 7. 13. 24. 36. 40. 41 bis. 57. Comp. 
 Ex. 6, 23. 
 
 E\icr(Taio$) ov, 6, Eliseus, Elisha, Heb. 
 Sd*^X (God his deliverance), a celebrated 
 prophet of the O. T. Luke 4, 27. See 1 K. 
 
 19, 16 sq. 2 K. c. 2. c. 4 sq. c. 13, 14 sq. 
 eXlWftJ V. -TTCO, f. <a, (eXi, eiXe cu, 
 
 etXw,) to roll up, to fold up, as a garment to 
 be laid away ; trop. of the heavens Heb. 1, 
 12, quoted from Ps. 102, 27 where Sept. 
 for Heb. Cp^"". Pass. Rev. 6, 14 Lachm. 
 comp. Is. 34, 4, where Sept. for bba Plut. 
 Mor. II. p. 140. Plato Tim. 73. a. 
 
 6\AX>9. eos, ovs, TO, (eX/ew,) a icound, 
 Horn. II. 1 1 . 812. In N. T. an ulcer, a sore, 
 Luke 16, 21. Rev. 16, 2. 11. Sept. for 
 pntt| Ex. 9, 9. Job 2, 7. So Pol. 1. 81. 5. 
 Thuc. 2. 49. 
 
eX/co&> 
 
 240 
 
 eX/eo&>, >, f. o>o-{0, (eX/cos,) to ZeZ ulcer 
 ate ; Pass, to be ulcerated, to be full of ul 
 cers, sores, Luke 16, 20. Plut. Phocion 2. 
 Xen. Eq. 1. 4. ib. 5. 1. 
 
 e\,KVO), a late form, whence f. eX/cvo-co 
 used as fut. of eXfcco q. v. 
 
 e X/y, f. eXo>, later fut. eXKucrco Buttm. 
 5 114; aor. 1 eiXKuo-a ; to draw, to drag , 
 c. ace. e. g. a net, John 21, 6. 11 ; a sword, 
 John 18, 10. Sept. for T|tia Ps. 10, 9; 
 niZJio 2 Sam. 22, 17. So (\Kvo-avrfs Xen. 
 Hell. 7. 1. 19 ; eX Hdian. 4. 9. 14. Xen. 
 An. 5. 2. 15. Of persons, to drag, to force 
 away, e. g. before magistrates, Acts 16, 19 
 e lXKvo-av. James 2, 6 \KOV<TLV , or out of a 
 place, Acts 21, 30 elXnov. So Plut. de vit. 
 Pudore 15. Xen. Mem. 3. 6. 1. Trop. to 
 draw, by a moral influence, John 6, 44. 12, 
 32. Sept. and TjWa Cant. 1,4. So Plut. 
 M. Ant. 66. Xen. Conv. 1. 9. 
 
 "JEXXa?, aSos, f], Hellas, Greece, once 
 Acts 20, 2. At first this was the name of 
 a city in Thessaly founded by Hellen the 
 son of Deucalion, Horn. II. 2. 683 ; then of 
 the adjacent portion of Thessaly inhabited 
 by the Myrmidons ; afterwards of the whole 
 central part of continental Greece, as far 
 north as to Thesprotia, excluding the Pelo 
 ponnesus and islands, Hes. Op. 655. Hdot. 
 8. 44, 47. Thuc. 1. 3. Plin. H. N. 4. 11. In 
 this sense it seems to be used in Acts 1. c. 
 where it is distinguished from Macedonia ; 
 comp. Arr. Exp. Alex. M. 2. 10. 11. ib. 4. 
 11.14. See in Axaia. Elsewhere Hellas 
 is also put for the whole extent of Greece, in 
 cluding the Peloponnesus and the islands, as 
 also Macedonia, Xen. Vect. 1.6; and so as 
 opposed to Asia Minor, Xen. Hell. 3. 4. 5 ; 
 but sometimes also including Ionia, Hdot. 
 1. 92, where Ephesus is said to be tv rfj 
 EXXdSi. The Heb. name for Greece is "j^ 
 (Javan) Icovia, Sept. Ia>vav Gen. 10, 2 ; but 
 the Sept. translate it also by "EXXas, Is. 66, 
 19. Ez. 27, 13. 
 
 "EX\t]V, nvos, 6, Hellen, pr. n. of the 
 son of Deucalion, Hes. Fr. 28 ; then of his 
 descendants, "EXXrji/es, the early inhabitants 
 of the Thessalian Hellas, Horn. II. 2. 684 ; 
 afterwards a general name for all the Greeks, 
 Hdian. 3. 2. 14. Xen. Cyr. 6. 3. 11. Hence 
 in N. T. "E\\r)v, a Greek ; ol "EXXrji/fr, the 
 Greeks. 
 
 1 . Pr. as opp. to ot /3dp/3apoi, under which 
 term are comprised all who are not Greeks, 
 Rom. 1,14; where the polished Greeks are 
 -the ot 0-0^)01. Philo de Conf. Ling. p. 347. 
 e. Xen. Vect. 1. 4. Comp. Lresner Obs. 
 e Phil. p. 243. 
 
 2. Spec, as opp. to 01 louSmot it means 
 a Greek, the Greeks, in the broadest sense, 
 
 1. e. all those who use the Greek language 
 and customs, whether in Greece, Asia Mi 
 nor, or other countries ; and as this was 
 then the prevailing language, the Greeks 
 were often put as the representatives of the 
 whole heathen world, comprising all those 
 who were not Jews, i. q. gentiles; Acts 
 16, 1. 3. 18, 17 Rec. 19, 10. 17. 20, 21. 
 21, 28. Rom. 1, 16. 2, 9. 10. 3, 9. 10, 12. 
 
 1 Cor. 1, 22. 23. 24. 10, 32. 12, 13. Gal. 
 
 2, 3. 3, 28. Col. 3, 11. So Acts 11, 20 in 
 later dit. for EXX^wo-rds in Rec. John 7, 
 35 bis, where 7) 8iacnropa ra>v E\\r)va>v is 
 the dispersed among the gentiles. Comp. 
 Sept. for fi^li&B Is. 9, 11. 1 Mace. 8, 18. 
 
 2 Mace. 4, 36. Jos. Ant. 12. 5. 1. 
 
 3. Spoken of a gentile convert to Juda 
 ism, a Greek proselyte, John 12, 20. Acts 
 14, 1. 17, 4. 18, 4 ; comp. 13, 43. 
 
 E\\r)viKO$, rj, 6v, Greek, Grecian, 
 Luke 23, 38. Rev. 9, 11. Sept. Jer. 46, 
 16. Hdian. 5. 5. 6. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 28. 
 
 EXXyvk, iSoy, 77, (fern, of adj. "EXXr/i/,) 
 pr. Greek, in fern. 2 Mace. 6, 8. Xen. An. 5. 
 1. 1. In N. T. a female Greek, a gentile ; 
 Mark 7, 26 yvvrj EXX. Acts 17, 12 ; comp. 
 in "E\\r)v no. 2. So Palaeph. 35. 
 
 EX\i]vicrTr)$, ov, 6, (f\\r)via> to Hel- 
 lenize, i. e. to speak Greek, Thuc. 2. 68. 
 Xen. An. 7. 3. 25. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 379,) 
 a Hellenist, i. e. a Jew by birth or reli 
 gion who speaks Greek ; used chiefly of 
 foreign Jews and proselytes, whether con 
 verted to Christianity or not ; Acts 6, 1 eye- 
 vfTO yoyyv<rp.6s rc3i> EXXrjvicrTuiv Trpos TOVS 
 Efipaiovs, i. e. against those speaking He 
 brew or Aramaean. 9, 29. 11, 20 Rec. 
 where later edit. "E\\ijvas. Winer 3. p. 
 33. ed. 5. Wetst. N. T. in Act. 6, 1. 
 
 , adv. (eXXrjvifa, ) i n Greek, 
 i. e. in the Greek tongue, John 19, 20. 
 Acts 21, 37. Plut. Cato Maj. 14. Xen. 
 An. 7. 6. 8. Comp. Buttm. $ 119. m. 82. 
 
 eXXoyett, to, f. r^o-w, (/,. Xoyos,) to 
 reckon in or to, to put to one s account, 
 Philem. 18. Trop. of sin, to impute, Rom. 
 5, 13. Boeckh Inscr. 1. 850. 
 
 .EX/Aoooa//., 6, indec. Elmodam, pr. 
 name of a man, Luke 3, 28. 
 
 eXTTt^Ct), f. tVo), (f\7ris, eXTTO),) Att. fut. 
 
 ATTIW Buttm. 95. 7. 
 
 1. to hope, to hope for, to expect, pr. 
 and c. Ka3o>? 2 Cor. 8, 5 ; with infin. aor. 
 Luke 6, 34 irap a>v eX7r/ere aTroXa/Seii . 23, 
 8. Acts 26, 7. Rom. 15, 24. 1 Cor. 16, 7 
 
241 
 
 Phil. 2, 19. 23. 1 Tim. 3, 14. 2 John 12. 
 3 John 14 ; infin. perf. 2 Cor. 5, 11. (Hdian. 
 1. 12. 9. Thuc. 7. 21. Xen. Ag. 7. 6.) 
 With OTI and pres. Indie. Luke 24, 21 ; fut. 
 Indie. Acts 24, 26. 2 Cor. 1, 13. 13, 6. 
 Philem. 22 ; comp. Winer { 45. 2 et ult. 
 So c. inf. fut. Luc. D. Deor. 25. 1. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 6. 4. With accus. of thing, to hope 
 for, Rom. 8, 24. 25. 1 Cor. 13, 7; hence 
 Pass, ra (\Tri6fifva, Heb. 11, 1. So Hdian. 
 1. 4. 6. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 17. 
 
 2. to hope in or on any one, i. q. to trust in, 
 to confide in, e. g. a) Genr. c. dat. Matt. 
 12,21 TO) OVO/JLUTI O.VTOV f^vr] t\inov<Ti, in la 
 ter edit, but Rec. eV TW 6v. as below. With 
 1 1 s c. ace. John 5, 45 els ov rXwfaar*. Sept. 
 fori>ni Is. 51,5. (Hdian. 7. 10. 1.) With etri 
 rift, Rom. 15, 12 tif avrta i!%i>r) tXTriovert. 
 1 Tim. 6, 17. Sept. for nba Judg. 9, 26. 
 Ps. 44, 7 ; comp. Matth. 399. n. 1. (Pol. 
 1. 82. 6 t(j) als fl^ov . . . cXar&or.) Also ejri 
 n 1 Pet. 1, 13; Sept. for TTJ2 p s . 62, 11. 
 b) Spec, of those who put their trust in 
 God or Christ ; so with els c. ace. 2 Cor. 1 , 
 10; eVi c. dat. 1 Tim. 4, 10. (Sept. for 
 H32 p s . 26, 1 ; comp. Is. 11, 10.) With 
 fni c. ace. 1 Tim. 5, 5. 1 Pet. 3. 5 ; Sept. 
 for naa Ps. 37, 3, 5. So in Christ, with 
 tv c. dat. 1 Cor. 15, 19.. Sept. c. eV for 
 3 HI23 2 K. 18, 5. Ps. 33, 21. So Am So 
 f xtiv tv TIVI, Epict. Ench. 40. Xen. Mem. 
 4. 2. 28. 
 
 , [8os, TJ, hope, the expectation of 
 future good. 
 
 1 . Genr. Rom. 8, 24 rfj f\iri8i fa-^rjfifv, 
 in hope are we saved, as yet only in expecta 
 tion, not in full fruition ; dat. of manner. 
 2 Cor. 10, 15. Phil. 1, 20. With a gen. of 
 the thing hoped for, Acts 27, 20 Trao-a i\irls 
 TOV o-wffcrSai. 16. 19. 26, 6. 7. 23, 6 ?repi 
 \7fi8os KOL ava<rT<icr(a>s, instead of nepl e X- 
 jridos TTJS avacrrdtrftos. Also c. gen. of the 
 person hoping, Acts 28, 20. 2 Cor. 1, 7. 
 Sept. for nym Job 14, 7. Ez. 37, 1 1. So 
 genr. Hdian. 2. 7. 9. Pol. 3. 69. 4. Xen. 
 Hell. 4. 8. 38. Also irap \iri8a, against 
 hope, i. e. without ground of hope, Rom. 4, 
 18; tn e \iri8 1, lit. on hope, Engl. in or 
 u-ilh hope, full of hope and confidence, Acts 
 2, 26. Rom. 4, 18. 8. 20. 1 Cor. 9, 10 bis. 
 Sept. for noab Ps. 4, 9. 16,9. Melon, the 
 object of hope. Rom. 8, 24 bis, e\nls 8t |3Xe- 
 
 TTOfJLfVr] OVK flTTlV (\TTIS, SCO in fSXfTTOI HO. 2. 
 
 a. y. 1 Cor. 9, 10 Rec. TJ;? eArn Sor ^ere^etj/. 
 
 Sept. and S11J5PI Job 6, 8. So Callim. Ep. 20. 
 
 2. Spec, of the Christian s hope, 1. e. the 
 
 hope of salvation through Christ, of eternal 
 
 life and happiness ; Rom. 5, 2 tXrrls Trjs 
 
 16 
 
 8oqy TOV 3foO. 5, 4. 5. 12, 12 TZJ (\irifSi: 
 \aipovrfs. 15, 4. 13 bis, 6 3eoy rrjs ATI-. i. e. 
 God the author and source of hope. 1 Cor. 
 13, 13. 2 Cor. 3, 12. Eph. 2, 12. 4,4. 
 1 Thess. 4, 13. 5, 8. 2 Thess. 2, 16. Tit. 
 1,2. 3,7. Heb. 3, 6. 6,11. 10,23. 1 Pet. 1, 
 3. 3, 15. With gen. of the thing or person 
 on which this hope rests, Eph. 1, 18. Col. 1, 
 23. 1 Thess. 1, 3. Meton. the object of 
 this hope, i. q. salvation, Col. 1, 5. Gal. 5,5 
 C K Tri orecos t\iri8a 8iKaioa-iiv7]s, the hope of 
 righteousness by faith, i. e. the salvation thus 
 bestowed. Tit. 2, 13. Heb. 6, 18. 7, 19. 
 Meton. also of the source, ground, author 
 of hope, Christ, Col. 1, 27. 1 Tim. 1, 1 ; 
 genr. 1 Thess. 2, 19. Sept. Ps. 22, 10. 
 
 3. hope in or on any one, trust, confi 
 dence ; so c. els, Acts 24, 15 eXmSa fx a>v 
 (Is rov Seoj/. 1 Pet. 1, 21 ; c. tVi TIVI, 
 1 John 3, 3. Comp. in eXn-tfa) no. 2. So 
 c. eVt rtra Sept. for fia213 Prov. 22, 19; 
 meton. Ps. 65, 6. 
 
 a , 6, Elymas, i. q. 6 pdyos, 
 the magician, as explained by Luke, Acts 
 13, 8. It appears to come from the Arabic 
 aZzm, wise, learned. 
 
 E\c0t, indec. Eloi, Aram. " 1 ta ^?*, my 
 God, Mark 15, 34; quoted from Ps. 22, 2 
 where Sept. 6 5e6s ^ou for Heb. "^!*. Mat 
 thew writes it ^Xi, Matt. 27, 46. 
 
 e/j,avTov, rjs, ov, reflex, pron. of 1 pers. 
 found only in Sing. gen. dat. ace. of my 
 self, to myself, myself; Luke 7, 7. John 
 5, 31. 8, 14. 18. 54. 1 Cor. 4, 3. 2 Cor. 2, 
 l.al. For UTT f/iavTov and e e /nauToC, see 
 in OTTO no. 3. c ; no. 3. c. Sometimes 
 in accus. used merely as the simple e /ae , 
 Matt. 8, 9. Luke 7,8. John 12, 32. Philem. 
 13. al. See Matth. $ 148. n. 2. Kiihner 
 $ 302. + 
 
 e/i/3atW, (<?, (3aiVa>,) in N. T. only 
 in aor. 2 evffirjv, inf. tfj.^rjvai, part, tafias: 
 to go in, to enter, absol. John 5, 4, sc. fls 
 TO v8a>p. So Pol. 1. 20. 8. Xen. An. 4. 3. 
 20. Elsewhere only as followed by tls TO 
 TrXotoi or the like, to go on board, to em- 
 bark, Matt. 8,^3. 9,1. 13,2. 14,22. 32. 
 15, 39. Mark 4, 1. 5, 18. 6, 45. 8, 10. 13. 
 Luke 5, 3. 8, 22. 37. John 6, 17. 22. 24. 
 21,3. So 1 Mace. 15, 37. Pol. 1. 25. 2. 
 Xen. An. 1.3. 17. 
 
 e/x/3aXX, f. aXw, (e i>, /3dXXa>,) to cast 
 in; Luke 12, 5 /i/3aXeij/ fls TT\V ylfvvav. 
 Sept. for TpJ?jn Gen. 37, 21. al. Hdian. 
 4. 9. 14. Xen. Hell. 1.17. 21. 
 
 >j f. v/fw, (tv, /3u7rr,) to dip ra, 
 pr. into any thing, c. ace. Matt. 26, 23 i. 
 
242 
 
 e/io? 
 
 tfi/3. TI})/ x ( ^P a e>1/ T( ? Tpv(3\ia>. Mid. c. ace. 
 impl. Mark 14, 20 6 e/n/SaTrro/^ei oy fty TO 
 rpvj&lov. Also John 13, 26 e/Lt/5. TO \^w- 
 /xioi> sc. els TO rp. Aristoph. Nub. 150 
 fveftcrjre ds TOV Krjpov TOO Trd&e. Athen. 9. 
 p. 367. b. 
 
 efA/Sareva), f. evo-co, (tv, /3areva> i. q. 
 /3atW) pr. to g-o in, to enler, e. g. y TO 
 opos Jos. Ant. 2. 12. 1. jEschyl. Pers. 449 ; 
 in a hostile sense, ds rrjv ^copai/, i. e. to in 
 vade, 1 Mace. 12, 25. 15, 40 ; els TTJV vavv 
 Dem. 894, 7. In N. T. trop. to go into a 
 matter, to search or pry into, and in a bad 
 sense to intrude into, c. ace. Col. 2, 18 a ^77 
 (<apaK(v e/i/SaTevcoi/. So 2 Mace. 2, 30. Philo 
 de Opif. p. 16. Xen. Conv. 4. 27. 
 
 epftlfldfo, f. ao-o), (eV, t/3ao,) to cause 
 to go in, mostly into a ship, to embark, to 
 put on ship-board; c. ace. Acts 27, 6 fve/Bi- 
 @a(T(v f]iJ.as (Is avTo SC. TO TrXoioi . Pol. 1, 
 49. 5. Xen. An. 5. 3. 1. 
 
 e/z/3A,e7r&>, f. ^o>, (V, jSXeVw,) to look in, 
 pr. into a place, Bel and Drag. 40. Hence 
 in N. T. to look in the face, to look at or 
 upon, to behold; c. dat. Mark 10, 21 irjcrovs 
 ep.(3\tyas avru. v. 27. 14,67. Luke 20, 17. 
 22, 61. John 1, 36. 43. Matt. 19.26. (Pol. 
 15. 28. 3. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 2.) With ety 
 c. ace. Acts 1,11 ds TOV ovpavov, parall. is 
 aTtvi^ovTfs v. 10. Also to look at, to consi 
 der, Matt. 6, 26 ds TO. ir(T(ivd, comp. Luke 
 12, 24. Sept. and oian Is. 51, 1. 2. 6. 
 So Ecclus. 2, 10. With an ace. to look a/, 
 to see ; KOI eV/3Xe\/^e Trj\avy>s airavras 
 Mark 8, 25 ; absol. id. Acts 22, 11. 
 
 efj,flpi/uido/j(,ai, ipji, f. Tja-ofjuu, Mid. 
 depon. (ev, /3pi/ido/u.ai v. -o o/iai,) pr. to be 
 rvroth at, to be moved with indignation 
 toivards any one ; hence in N. T. 
 
 1 . In words, i. q. to murmur against, to 
 blame, c. dat. Mark 14, 5 evfftpin&vTo airy. 
 Suid. (V(^pi/J.rj(raTO JUCT opyrjy s XdX^crei . 
 Spec, to admonish sternly, to charge strictly, 
 i. e. to threaten with one s indignation for 
 disobedience ; c. dat. Matt. 9, 30 ei/ejSpt/zTj- 
 o-aTo ai>Toty. Mark 1, 43. So Symm. for 
 3 n y5 Is. 17, 13. Hesych. e /i/Spip/o-cu eVi- 
 Tijj.f]arai, K(\(vcrai. Id. ( 
 
 2. Like Heb. ]? J , spoken also of ny 
 great perturbation of mind, e. g. grief, to be 
 greally moved, to be troubled, with dat. of 
 manner, John 11, 33 Ve/3p. T<B TrvwpaTi, 
 parall. (rdpa^ev eavTov. v. 38 eV eavTW. So 
 c^SSt , Sept. T(Tapayp.ei>oi, Gen. 40, 6 ; 
 Sept. o-KvSpwTToi J)an. 1, 10. 
 
 ef.iea), m, f. (<T<I>, to spue out, to vomit, 
 trop. to express loathing, c. ace. Rev. 3, 16. 
 
 Sept. for srp Is. 19, 14. JEl V. H. 9. 26 
 Xen. An. 4. 8. 20. 
 
 eppaiVOfMCU, f. oO/zat, (/, /naiVo/xa*,) 
 to be mad at or against any one, to Z>e /u- 
 r^s against, c. dat. Acts 26, 11. So adj. 
 (p.fj.avr)s, furious, raging, Wisd. 14, 23. 
 Plato Tim. 86. c. 
 
 . 6,indec. Emmanuel,lleb. 
 DES (God with us) Immanuel, a symbo 
 lical name, once Matt. 1, 23 ; see Is. 7, 14. 
 8, 10. 
 
 E fj,/j,aov$, rj, indec. Emmaus, a village 
 60 furlongs or about 7| Rom. miles from Je 
 rusalem, but in what direction is uncertain ; 
 Luke 24, 13. A place of this name is men 
 tioned by Josephus at a like distance from 
 Jerusalem ; Jos. B. J. 7. 6. 6, ^apt ov o 
 mu fiev A/i/xaoCy, aTre^ei 8( TU>V lepo- 
 crraS/ovy e^jj^ovra. A city Em 
 maus lay also in the plain of Judah, 160 
 stadia from Jerusalem, towards Joppa, and 
 was called by the Romans Nicopolis, now 
 Amwds; it is not mentioned in N. T. but 
 often elsewhere, as 1 Mace. 3, 40. Jos. 
 Ant. 14. 11. 2. B. J. 2. 20. 4. See Bibl. 
 Res. in Pal. III. p. 65 sq. Rosenm. BibL 
 Geogr. II. ii. p. 198. 
 
 6//.//.6I/&), f. f (/, (eV, p.evca,) to remain in 
 a place, c. eV Xen. An. 4. 7. 18. In N. T. 
 trop. to remain in, to continue in any course 
 of conduct, with eV c. dat. Gal. 3, 10 Tray 
 oy OVK (fjLfjLevfi. (v Trcun Tols ycyp- Heb. 8, 9. 
 Sept. Is, 30. 18. (Pol. 3. 70. 4 eV 177 7rrm. 
 Plut. Artaxerx. 23 init.) With dat. simply, 
 Acts 14, 22 rfi irta-Tfi. Sept. for C^pfl 
 Deut. 27, 26. So Pol. 1. 43. 3 TTJ mtrrei. 
 Xen. Ag. 1. 11. 
 
 Ep/J,6p, 6, indec. Emmor, Heb. Ti>"! 
 (an ass) Hamor, Acts 7, 16 ; comp. Gen. 
 
 33, 19. Josh. 24, 32. Lachm. E/i/xwp. 
 
 e/io?, rj, 6v, possessive adj. of 1 pers. 
 Sing, my, mine. 
 
 1 . Pr. marking possession, property, etc. 
 Matt. 18, 20 TO cpvv ovona. John 3, 29. 4, 
 
 34. Rom. 10, 1. a!. sa;p. (Xen. Conv. 5. 5.) 
 So TO e /zoV, TO. (fj.d, my own, i. e. what is 
 mine, my property, Matt. 25, 27. 20, 15. 
 Luke 15, 31. Emphat. T^ (fj.fj x fl P^ w ^ 
 my own hand, 1 Cor. 16, 21. Gal. 6, 11. 
 Col. 4, 18. Implying power or office, as 
 OVK ( (TTLV Ifjiov sc. dovvai, it is not mine to 
 give, Lat. meum nan est, Matt. 20, 23. Mark 
 10, 40. Comp. Jos. Ant. 2. 16. 1 aov (<rr 
 
 2. Of things which proceed from any one 
 as the source, author, agent ; Mark 8, 38 
 Xo yovy. Luke 9, 26. John 6, 38. 
 
243 
 
 7, 16. 8, 16. 14, 27. Rom. 3, 7. al. saep. So 
 TO e/ioj/, i. e. my doctrine, John 16, 14. 15. 
 3. In a passive or objective sense, Winer 
 $ 22. 7. n. 3. Matth. 5 466. 2 ; e. g. of that 
 which is appointed, destined, for a person, 
 as 6 Kaipbs 6 (pas John 7, 6. 8 ; f) r)p.ipa TJ 
 (fir) John 8, 56 ; Kaipos TIJS e /i / 5 dwiXvcrecos 
 2 Tim. 4, 6 ; or of that which is done to or 
 in respect to a person, as els TTJV e^v avd- 
 (ivricriv, in my remembrance, i. e. in remem 
 brance of me, Luke 22, 19. 1 Cor. 11, 24. 
 25 ; dydirr) f] e pjj, love of me, John 15, 9 
 comp. v. 10. Jos. Ant. 1. 3. 8 evfipiov 
 (Is rrjv tp-Tjv (\HTfft(iav, i. e. ds (p.(, towards 
 me. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 28 <iXt a rfj (py. 8. 3. 
 32 Tys (^s Supeay, i. e. the gift to me. + 
 
 e/j,7rai<y/jiovyj, fjs, 17, (e/rai ftt,) mockery, 
 scoffing; in later edit. 2 Pet. 3, 3 tv f /x- 
 Kaiyjiovfi e/iTraiKrat, scoffers in mockery, 
 intens. for shameless scoffers ; comp. Gesen. 
 Lehrg. p. 671. 3. Not found in Sept. or 
 Greek writers. 
 
 epTTaiyfAos, ov, 6, (e /iTrai fu,) a mock 
 ing, scoffing, Heb. 11, 36. Sept. forno^f? 
 Ez. 22, 4. Wisd. 12, 25. Ecclus. 27,* 28. 
 A form of the Alexandrine age, Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 241. n. 
 
 e /A7rai<D, f. a/a>, (V, iraifa, ) aor. 1 
 (venaif-a, a later form instead of eVeVaicra, 
 Buttm. $ 114 Trai fw. Phryn. et Lob. p. 240. 
 To sport in, with, against any one, Lat. 
 illudere, Engl. to illude, i. e. 
 
 1. to mock, to scoff at, to deride, c. dat. 
 Matt. 27, 29 iveircu^ov airoi, Xeyoirey. v. 31. 
 Mark 10, 34. 15, 20. Luke 14, 29. 22, 63. 
 
 23, 36; absol. Matt. 20, 19. 27, 41. Mark 
 
 15, 31. Luke 18, 32. 23, 11. Sept. for pns 
 Gen. 39, 14. 17; b^SPn Ex. 10, 2. Arr. 
 Epict. 4. 1. 47. Luc. Lexiph. 5. Hdot. 4. 
 134. 
 
 2. Spec, to delude, to deceive, Pass. Matt. 
 2, 16. Sept. Jer. 10, 14. Soph. Ant. 799. 
 
 e/i7raiT?79, on, 6, (e /Mrai fo>,) a mocker, 
 scoffer, spoken of impostors, false prophets, 
 deceivers, 2 Pet. 3, 3. Jude 18. See Matt. 
 
 24, 24 sq. A word of the Alexandrine age, 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 241. n. 
 
 efiTrepLTrareo}, <i, f. TJO-W, (eV, TTfpnra- 
 rc co.) to walk about in or on a place, e. g. 
 rf]v y9]v, Sept. for T^n^rj Job 1,7. 2, 2 ; 
 also Luc. Conv. 13. In N. T. trop. to walk 
 in or among a people, to live among, to be 
 habitually conversant with ; absol. 2 Cor. 6, 
 
 16. Sept. and Tjinntt Lev. 26, 12. Deut. 
 23, 14. 
 
 yU.7Ti7rX77/ii, f. f /iTrXiytro), (V, nlp.n\ri[u, 
 
 the /i in TH/A- being dropped after tp,, Buttm. 
 
 114. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 95,) aor. 1 eve- 
 TrXrjo-a, Pass. aor. 1 ei/en-X^o-Sqi/ ; also par- 
 ticip. pres. (fnnn\o)v Acts 14, 17, from a 
 form e/i7rt7rXaa> less usual and not Attic, 
 Buttm. 114 Trip.-rr\rjiJii. $ 106. n. 5; to 
 Jill in, Lat. implere, i. q. to fill up, to make 
 full, c. ace. Sept. for x^>3 Gen. 42, 25. 
 Hdian. 1. 12. 5. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 6. In 
 N. T. spoken only of food, to fill with food, 
 to satisfy, to sate, absol. John 6, 12 w? 8e 
 (vrn-\T)a- 5r]<Tai>. Sept. for saia Lev. 28, 6. 
 (Plut. Symp. lib. 8 init. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 4.) 
 Trop. to Jill, to satisfy, e. g. one s desire 
 with good, absol. Luke 6, 25. With ace. 
 and gen. Luke 1, 53. Acts 14, 17; comp. 
 Buttm. ^ 132. 10. a. Sept. for xb^a Is. 27, 6. 
 Ps. 107, 9; saiu Jer. 31, 14. (Ecclus. 16, 
 30.) Pass. trop. to be filled with any per 
 son or thing, i. e. to fully enjoy the society, 
 intercourse of any one; Rom. 15, 24 lav 
 v}j.a)v f/iTrXjjo-Sco. Comp. Hist, of Susann. 32. 
 
 e/i7Tl7TT&), f. 7rea-ovp.ai, (eV, Trirrro),) aor. 
 2 fvftrea-ov, to fall in, and with ds c. ace. of 
 place, to fall into ; Matt. 12, 11 els fto^vvov. 
 Luke 6, 39 Lachm. Luke 14, 5 ds (ppeap. 
 Sept. and ^33 Ex. 21, 33. Prov. 26, 27. 
 (j^Esop. F. 117 fjLvla (p.7rcrovcra ds xy T P av - 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 64 ds rafypovs.) Of per 
 sons, to fall in with, to fall among, to meet 
 with, Luke 10, 36 ds rovs X^orar. So Arr. 
 Epict. 3. 13. 3 orav ds X^crrar e /i7rV<B/iei>. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 4. Trop. to fall into any 
 state or condition, to come into, c. ds, 1 Tim. 
 3, 6 ds Kpifj-a. v. 7 ds oixidKrp.ov. 6, 9. 
 Sept. and i>B3 Prov. 17, 21. 28, 10. (jEl. 
 V. H. 5. 2. Xen. Hell. 7. 5. 6.) Also e>7re- 
 (Tfiv ds x f ip as ~fov, to fall into the hands of 
 God, into his power, for punishment, Heb. 
 
 10, 31. Sept. and bB3 2 Sam. 24, 14. So 
 Ecclus. 2, 18. 
 
 /J,7T\eKO), f. /co. ( V, TrXeKto,) to plait 
 or braid in, to interweave, JEA. V. H. 13. 1 
 
 (VfTT\fKOVTO Ol KITTol floXdKols 8fv8pOlS. 
 
 In N. T. trop. to entangle ; Mid. to entangle 
 oneself in, c. dat. 2 Tim. 2, 4 ; Pass. c. dat. 
 2 Pet. 2, 20. So Pol. 1. 17. 3. Plato Legg. 
 814. b. 
 
 e/z.7rX7^&), see the forms of ffjLnin\ijp.i. 
 
 efjnf\OKT), ^y, ij, (e^iTrXfKta,) a plaiting, 
 braiding, intertwining, sc. of the hair in 
 ornament, 1 Pet. 3, 3. Comp. 1 Tim. 2, 9 
 Judith 10, 3. 
 
 efATTvea), w, f. evo-o), (eV, TiWw,) to blow 
 in or upon, to breathe in or on, intrans. Horn. 
 
 11. 17. 502 ; also aCXoIy e/xTrvelv, to play upon, 
 Anth. Gr. II. p. 103; hence genr. to draw 
 breath, to breathe, i. e. to live, Pint. Eumen- 
 
244 
 
 5 ult. Eurip. Phoen. 1436. In N. T. trop. 
 and intrans. to breathe, to respire, and with 
 gen. to breathe of any thing, i. q. to be full 
 of; Acts 9, 1 ffj-TTvecav aTTfiXrjs Kal (povov. 
 See Matth. J 376. Winer 5 30. 9. c. So 
 irvfu, Aristaenet. I. Ep. 5 irveav 3v/iou. 
 Achill. Tat. 2. p. 65 epcoros irvii. Aristoph. 
 Eq. 435 KaKias irvfi. Comp. Heb. nfii Ps. 
 21, 12. 
 
 e/LiTropevopal, f. evo -op.ai, Pass, depon. 
 (eV, TTopfvopai, ) to go in, to enter in, c. ace. 
 nji/ TrvXrjv Sept. Gen. 34, 24 ; rrpos riva, to 
 any one, to have intercourse with, Plut. de 
 aud. Poet. 12. p. 76 ; to travel about in, to 
 journey, Soph. Elect. 405. Pol. 28. 10. 5. 
 In N. T. and usually, to travel about as a 
 merchant or trader on a large scale, i. q. to 
 trade, to traffic; absol. James 4, 13. Sept. 
 for nnG Gen. 34, 10. 42, 34. (Diod. Sic. 5. 
 39. Xen. Lac. 7. 1.) With an ace. to traffic 
 in, to make merchandise of; 2 Pet. 2, 3 vpas 
 ffiiropeva-ovrai, i. e. they will deceive you for 
 their own gain. So Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 8 (vir 
 gins) OVK. ffj.7ropfvcr6p.fvaL TTJV topav TQV crco- 
 y. Athen. 1 3. p. 569. f. See Winer 5 32. 
 
 1. n. 
 
 as, f), (ffjLTropos,*) a journey 
 for traffic, Arr. Epict. 3. 24. 80. In N. T. 
 trade, traffic, commerce, Matt. 22, 5. Sept. 
 for rnhb Ez. 27, 15 ; n^ Ez. 28, 5. So 
 Pol. 3. 23. 4. Xen. Hi. 9? 9. 
 
 /A7roploV) ov, TO, (e/xTropoy,) an empo 
 rium, market, mart ; John 2, 16 OIKOV e /wro- 
 piov, a 7tta7to-7ioMse. -Sept. Is. 23, 17. Pol. 
 16. 41. 5. Xen. Vect. 3. 3. 
 
 /J/7TOpO$, ov, 6, (ev, iropos, Treipct, Tre- 
 pao>,) pr. a passenger from one place to an 
 other, a traveller, 6 V Tro pw <2v, Soph. CEd. 
 C. 25, 303 ; espec. a passenger by ship who 
 pays fare ; and this indeed seems to have 
 been the earliest use of the word, (later 
 fVi/SarTjs,) Horn. Od. 2. 319. ib. 24. 300. 
 In N. T. and usually, a merchant, trader, 
 i. e. one who trades by sea or land, a whole 
 sale dealer ; distinguished from the KairrjXos 
 or dyopaios, who purchased his wares of the 
 ( unopos and dealt them out at retail ; see 
 Boeckh Staatshaush. I. p. 336. Xen. Vect. 
 3. 12, 13. Rev. 18, 3. 11. 15. 23. Matt. 13, 
 45 avSpanros e/Z7ropoy, see in aV3pco7ros,l. B. 
 c. j3. Sept. for inb Gen. 37, 27 ; ^o -i Ez. 
 27, 15. 20 sq. So Hdian. 4. 10. 9." Xen. 
 Hell. 1. 6. 38. 
 
 e/jL7rprfta>, f. TJO-CO, (eV, Trp^Sw.) Lat. in- 
 cendo, to inflame, to set on fire, i. e. to destroy 
 by fire, TTJV iroXiv Matt. 22, 7. Sept. for 
 tj-nto Judg. 18, 27. Hdian. 3. 7. 16. Xen. 
 Helf. 1. 2. 4. 
 
 jji7rpoa*&ev, adv. and prep. (eV, irpo- 
 ,) before, e. g. 
 
 1. Adv. of place before, in advance of 
 any one, Luke 19, 4. 28. (Pol. 2. 27. 4. 
 Xen. An. 5. 6. 9 ; comp. Cyr. 2. 2. 7.) So 
 ra ffjLTrpoa-^ev, things before, Phil. 3, 14; 
 comp. Buttm. } 125. 6, 7. (Xen. An. 6. 3. 
 14.) In respect of the body, before, in front. 
 Rev. 4, 6. So Sept. and 013 B Ez. 2, 10. 
 Xen. An. 5. 4. 32. In Sept. and Gr. writers 
 spoken also of time, Ruth 4, 7. Judg. 1, 11. 
 al. Ml V. H. 2. 41. Xen. Vect. 4. 28. 
 
 2. Prep, with the genitive, before; see 
 Buttm. 5 146. 3. Thus 
 
 a) Of place, with gen. of person, after 
 verbs of motion and the like, before ; John 
 3, 28. 10, 4 ffjijrp. avTcav Tropeverat. Matt. 
 6, 2. 11, 10. Mark 1, 2. Luke 7,27. Sept. 
 for -vjab Gen. 32, 3. 16. (Xen. Cyr. 3. .2. 5.) 
 Genr. before, in the presence of, Matt. 5, 16. 
 6, 1. 10, 32 bis. 33 bis. 17,2. 25,32. 26,70. 
 27,11.29. Mark 9, 2. Luke 5, 19. 12,8 
 bis. 14, 2. 19, 27. 21, 36. John 12, 37. 
 Gal. 2, 14. 1 Thess. 2. 19. So Matt. 7, 6 
 /3aXXeip ep.7rp. x- 23, 1 3 or 14 KAet ere TTJV /3ao". 
 TG)V ovp. fp-np. TO>V uv Sp. 7/6 sliut up before 
 them, so as to prevent them from entering ; 
 comp. Sept. awn o> e/wrp. avrov %vpas, for 
 \3S^ Is. 45, 1. Hence and from the Heb. 
 ffj.Trpocr Sfv TOV 3eo{), before God, in the sight 
 of God, God being witness, God knowing 
 and approving, 1 Thess. 1, 3. 3, 9. 13. 
 1 John 3, 19; comp. Heb. "i 
 
 Sept. Si 
 
 1 1. 26 et Luke 10, 21 ovr<as eyeWro eiSo/a o 
 ffj.Trpocr Sfv crov. Matt. 18, 14 SeA^/wi f p.irp. 
 rov. [Acts 10,4.] So Heb. "^ Vtb ^, 
 Sept. fv8oKia fvatTTiov SeoC Ps. 19, 15; 
 8tKTov tvavri Kvpiov Ex. 28, 38 ; comp. Heb. 
 Lex. art. MSB D. 1. b. Lehrg. p. 820. 9 ult. 
 With gen. of thing, before, at; Matt. 5, 
 24 e fj.Trp. TOV Zvo-icHTTTjpiov. Acts 18, 17. 
 
 2 Cor. 5, 10. Rev. 19, 10. 22, 8. Comp. 
 Sept. and *\3S^ Neh. 8, 3. 2 Chr. 5, 6. So 
 Ceb. Tab. 1. 
 
 b) Of time, before, with gen. of pers. 
 John 1, 15. 27. 30. Sept. and ijfii 2 K. 
 17, 2. 23, 25. al. Hdot. 7. 144. : Dem. 
 51. 15. 
 
 .. 
 
 tvavriov, Gen. 7, 1. So Matt. 
 
 ), f. vo-(o, (eV, Trrvca, ) to spit in, 
 to spit upon, e. g. ds TO Trpoo-anrov, to spit 
 in one s face, Matt. 26, 67 ; genr. 27, 30. 
 Sept. tls TO -rrp. for p^i Num. 12, 14. 
 (Plut. Mor. II. p. 46, ffj.77Ti>fiv Tivl els TO 
 TrpoVoMToi .) With dat. Mark 10, 34. 14, 
 65. 15, 19. Pass. Luke 18, 32. So ^El. 
 V. H. 1. 15. Galen, de Theriac. 1. 8. See 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 17. Thorn. Mag. p. 507. 
 
245 
 
 T)Sj eos, ovs, 6, 17, adj. ( 
 pr. appearing in any thing ; hence genr. 
 apparent, and efj.(pavi}s yivop-ai, to be 
 come apparent, to appear, to be seen openly, 
 i. q. f ufavifrnai, Acts 10, 40. So JEl V. 
 H. 1. 21. Plato Alcib. 141. a; comp. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 7. 23. Trop. to become manifest, 
 known; Rom. 10, 20, quoted from Is. 65, 1 
 where Sept. for Bl 15 . Sept. for snia 
 Ex. 2, 14. So Pol. 22/i5. 7. Plato TheasL 
 206. d. 
 
 fJ,<f>avi(i), f. i 0-a>, (ep.(pavf)s, ) to make 
 apparent, to cause to be seen, to show ; Pass. 
 to appear, to be seen openly; Matt. 27, 53 
 tfj-fpaviff^irjo-av TroXXoiV. Heb. 9, 24 ep<pavt- 
 o~^r]vai TO) TrpcxreoTTG) rov Seou vvrep tjp.a)v, 
 
 1. e. in our behalf; for the construction 
 efitp. T<B Trp. comp. Sept. and Heb. Ps. 42, 
 3. Trop. to manifest, to make known, to 
 declare, to show, c. dat. Acts 23, 15 ifttfrevf- 
 crare rw ^iXtap^w onus KT\. With ace. 
 and irpos, 23, 22 ravra irpos p-e. With on 
 Heb. 11, 14. Sept. nvi TI for -IE it Esth. 
 
 2, 22. (So c. TIM TI Jos. Ant. 8. 4. 2. Diod. 
 Sic. 14. 11. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 4; TOVTO OTI 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 26.) In a judicial sense, 
 c. dat. et Kara TWOS, to inform against, to 
 accuse, Acts 24, 1. 25, 2 ; irepi TWOS, 25, 15. 
 (Jos. Ant. 10. 9. 3 Kara. 14. 10. 12 irepi ) 
 Of a person, ep.<pavieiv eavrov TIVI, to mani 
 fest oneself to any one, i. e. to let oneself 
 be intimately known and apprehended, John 
 14, 21. 22. Sept. for 5-Hl n Ex. 33, 13. 
 So Wisd. 1, 2. 
 
 e/Z(/>o/3o9, ov, 6, 17, adj. (V, <pd$o?,) pr. 
 in fear, i. e. terrified, affrighted, Luke 24, 
 5. 37. Acts 10, 4. 22, 9. 24, 25. Rev. 11, 
 13. 1 Mace. 13, 2. Theophr. Char. 24 or 
 25. 1, ep.(pof3os VTTfilS Trjs tyvxr/s. 
 
 efjtfkvcrda), o>, f. JJCTW, (V, (/>ucraco,) to 
 blow in or on, to breathe on, absol. John 20, 
 22. Sept. for nS3 of a wind Ez. 37, 9 ; of 
 wrath 22, 21. Dioscnr. 5. 99 KaieTai ep.<pv- 
 vrfiev. Comp. Horn. II. 19. 159. 
 
 6/A0UTO9, ou, o, f], adj. (epxpuo),) im 
 planted by nature, inborn, innate, Wisd. 12, 
 10. Pol. 9. 11. 2. Xen. Mem. 3. 7. 5. In 
 N. T. trop. implanted, engrafted, from an 
 other source, e. g. TUV tfXpvrov \uyov James 
 1, 21, the gospel being here represented as 
 a shoot implanted or engrafted; as else 
 where by seed sown, comp. Mark 6, 14 sq. 
 So Barnab. Ep. c. 9, 17 ep.(p. Swpeo ri}s St- 
 Saxfjj T. Seov. Hdot. 9. 94 /cat /iera ravra 
 avriica ep.<pvTov fjLavriKrjv et ^e KT\. 
 
 V, a prep, governing only the dative, 
 with the primary idea of rest in any place 
 or thing ; or also in contact with, on, at, by. 
 
 Compared with els and eV, it stands between 
 the two, els implying motion into, tv the 
 being or remaining in, and tie. motion out of. 
 See Winer J 52. a. Matth. I 577. Kiihner 
 5 289. 1. Buttm. { 147. n. 1. 
 
 1. Of PLACE, which is the primary and 
 most frequent use ; spoken of every thing 
 which is conceived as being, remaining, 
 taking place, within some definite space or 
 limits, in, on, at, by, etc. Sept. usually for 
 Heb. 3. 
 
 a) Pr. in, within; Luke 11, 1 eV rorrw 
 ni/t. Matt. 8, 6 ev TJJ otKia. Acts 2, 46 V 
 TO) ffpoi. Luke 22, 55 eV jueoxa rtjs auXi/s. 
 Malt. 4, 23 ev Tats awaya-ycus. 4, 21 eV TK> 
 77X010). 11,2. Mark 5, 3. John 5,28. 11, 
 17. 19, 41. Phil. 1, 13. Luke 9, 57 et 19, 
 36 ev TTJ 6Sa>. Matt. 6, 2. 5 eV raty pvp.ais. 
 11, 16 (v ayopais. Luke 7, 32. Matt. 20, 
 23 ev TJI TroXei. 13, 24. 27 eV TW aypa. al. 
 saep. (Hdian. 1. 9. 7. ib. 1. 12. 12! Xen. Cyr. 
 1.4.5.) With the names of cities, coun 
 tries, places ; Luke 2, 43 ev lepova-aXrjfj,. 
 Matt. 2, 1. 5 eV Bj3Xee^. Rom. 1, 7 ev Po>- 
 fj.fl. Matt. 2, 19 ev AlyvnTeo. Acts 7, 36 eV 
 y^ Aty. Matt. 9, 31. 3, 1. 3 ev 777 epTjfto) 
 Tijs Iov8aias. 4, 13. 6, 4. Acts 9, 36. 
 10, 1. 1 Thess. l r 7. 8. al. saep. (Hdian. 
 3. 2. 7. Thuc. 7. 21.) So V rw aS>/ Luke 
 
 16, 23, comp. Matt. 10, 28. Rev. 21, 8; eV 
 ovpava, ev rots ovpavoils, Matt. 6, 10. 20. 
 Luke 15, 7. Matt. 5, 12. 16, 19; also of 
 God, 6 iraTrjp 6 ev TOIS ovp. as adj. i. q. 6 
 enovpdvios, heavenly Father, Matt. 5, 12. 45. 
 7, 1 1, comp. 18, 35 ; ev Ty fta<ri\eiq. TU>V ovp. 
 Matt. 5, 19. 8, 11 ; ev ivaaj] Ty yfj, Rom. 9, 
 
 17. Matt. 25, 18. 25; ev rw /cdo-p-w, John 
 13, 1. Col. 1, 6; ev TTJ ZaXda-o-rj Mark 5, 
 13; ev pea-a) Trjs 3aX. 6, 47. 1 Cor. 11, 
 25. Of a book, writing ; Mark 12, 26 eV 
 TV /3i /3Xw Mafio-eus. Luke 2, 23. 20, 42. 
 Acts 13, 33 ev ra> ^aX/zw rw Seur. Heb. 4, 5. 
 5, 6. So Heb. 4 , 7 ev Aa/8, i. e. in the book" 
 of David, the Psalms. John 6, 45 eV TOIS 
 irpotpTjTais. Rom. 11,2 ev HX/a, i. e. in the 
 section respecting Elijah. Of the body and 
 its parts ; Rom. 6, 12 ev TW Si/qi-w o-to/xart. 
 2 Cor. 12, 2. Matt. 3, 12 ev 777 x"P avTov. 
 Rev. 6, 5. 11,9. al. (Xen. An. 6. 1. 9.) 
 Matt. 7, 3. 4 ev TW o(p3oXp.w. Matt. 1,18. 23 
 ev yao-Tpl fX elv > see ^ n yo" r ^P no - 2. Luke 
 1, 44 ev Trj KocXi a. Trop. ev Tols p.e\e(ri 
 Rom. 7, 5. James 4, 1 ; ev TJJ >cap8ta, iv 
 Ta is icapSiais, Matt 5, 28. Luke 2, 51. Matt. 
 9, 4. Mark 2, 6. 8 ; ev orrd^uirt 1 Pet. 2, 22. 
 Spoken of persons, pr. in one s body ; 
 Matt. 1,20 TO ev avTrj yevvrftev. 6, 23. Acts 
 20, 10; of a demoniac Acts 19, 16. Trop. 
 Rom. 7, 17. 18. 20. al. 
 
246 
 
 b) Spoken of elevated objects, a surface, 
 or the like, in, i. e. on, upon ; as of a fig- 
 tree, ev avrrj Mark 11, 13; a mountain, ev 
 TW opei, Luke 8, 32. John 4, 20. Heb. 8, 5. 
 (Sept. and nna Ex. 31, 18. Luc. D. Deor. 
 4. 3. Xen. An! 4. 3. 31.) Matt. 8, 24 a-ei- 
 cr/jios ev Ty ^a\d(ro-rj, on the lake. Luke 12, 
 51. John 20, 25. Acts 7, 33. 2 Cor. 3, 7 
 fvTeTVTT(i}p.evrj ev Xi Sots. Rev. 3, 21 ev TW 
 SpoVw. (Horn. Od. 8. 422.) Rev. 13, 12*. 
 18, 19. Trop. Jude 12 ev TOIS dydirais 
 
 c) In a somewhat wider sense, implying 
 simply contact, close proximity, in, i. e. on, 
 at, by, near, with, equivalent to napd ; e. g. 
 ev 8eia TWOS, Heb. 1, 3. 8, 1. 10, 12. 
 Rom. 8, 34. al. (Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 2.) So 
 Matt. 6, 5 ev TO.IS ycaviais TwV n\a.Tei(ov. 24, 
 36 et Acts 2, 19 eV TW ovpavw, in or on the 
 sky. (Horn. II. 22. 318.) Luke 13, 4 6 nvp- 
 yos ev TW SiXcoa/z, at or near the fountain, 
 comp. Jos. B. J. 5. 4. 1. Luke 16, 23 et 
 John 13, 23, see in dvaKeipai no. 2. Matt. 
 7, 6 fj.Tj7TOTf KaTcnraTr)<ra>(riv ev TOIS irocrlv 
 avTfov, i. e. at or under their feet. John 15, 
 4 eav fir) (TO K\JJHO) peivy ev TW a/iTreXw, 
 i. e. remains on, attached to, the vine. 19, 
 41. Rev. 9, 10. John 11, 10 oTt TO (p&sovK 
 eo-Tiv ev avT&, i. e. by him, around him, in 
 his path ; also trop. 1 John 1,5. So Hdot. 
 
 1. 76. Pol. 2. 66. 10. Xen. An. 4. 8. 22. 
 Trop. c. dat. of person, i. e. a) Spoken 
 of those with whom any one is in near con 
 nection, intimate union, oneness of heart, 
 mind, purpose ; especially of the union by 
 faith of Christians with Christ, who are 
 then in Christ, as a branch in or on a vine, 
 John 15, 2. 4. 5 ; so John 6, 56. 14, 20. 
 Rom. 16, 7. 11. 1 Cor. 1, 30. 9, 1. 2. 
 2 Cor. 5, 17. Eph. 2, 13. al. sajp. 1 Thess. 
 4, 16 ot vfKpol ev Xpto-Tta, i. e. who died in 
 union by faith with Christ, as Christians. 
 1 Cor. 15, 18. Rev. 14, 13. Hence oi ev 
 Xpi<rrw as adj. Christians, i. q. oi Xpiariavol, 
 Rom. 8, 1. 2 Cor. 12, 2. Gal. 1, 22. 1 Pet. 5, 
 
 14. al. So genr. i. e. in connection with 
 Christ, in the Christian faith, Rom. 12, 5. 
 Gal. 3, 28 Trdvres vfiels els eo~Tf ev Xp. 5, 6. 
 6, 15. Phil. 4, 1. 7. 1 Thess. 3, 8. 1 John 
 
 2, 24. al. Vice versa of the union of Christ 
 with Christians in consequence of their faith 
 in him; John 6, 56. 14/20. 15,4. 5. 17, 
 23. 26. Rom. 8, 9. Gal. 2, 20. al. Of a 
 like union with God, and vice versa, 1 
 Thess. 1, 1. 1 John 2, 24. 3, 6. 24. 4, 13. 
 
 15. 16. al. Of the mutual union of God 
 and Christ, John 10, 38. 14, 10. 11. 20. al. 
 Of the Holy Spirit in Christians, John 1 4, 
 17. Rom. 8, 9. 11 bis. 1 Cor. 3, 16. 6, 19. 
 
 1 . Pet. 1 , 1 1 . al. /3) Of those in, with, tm 
 whom, i. e. in whose person or character, 
 any thing exists, is done, (comp. Trapu,) c. g. 
 in external life and conduct, John 18, 38 
 et 19, 4. 6, ov% evpi<TK<o ev a\iT<a ulriav. 
 Acts 24, 20. 25, 5. 1 John 2, 10. 1 Cor. 
 4, 2. So genr. of any power, influence, 
 efficiency, e. g. from God, Christ, the Holy 
 Spirit, Matt. 14, 2 did TOVTO at 8vvdfj.eis ev 
 epyovo-iv ev QVTW. John 1, 4. 14, 13. 17,26. 
 1 Cor. 12, 6. Gal. 4, 19. Phil. 2, 5. 13. Col. 1, 
 
 19. Heb. 13, 21. 1 John 3, 9. 15. al. Of 
 Satan, John 14, 30 eV e/ioi OVK e^ei ovoev, 
 in me he hath nothing, can do nothing, effect 
 nothing. Of evil influence genr. 2 Cor. 4, 
 4. 12. 6, 12. Also ev eavTw, in, with, of 
 oneself, Matt. 13, 21. John5,2e! 6,53. iCor. 
 11,13. 2 Cor. 1 , 9. al. y) Of those in or 
 with whom, i. e. in whose mind, heart, 
 soul, any thing exists or takes place, (comp. 
 Trapa.) e. g. virtues, vices, faculties, etc. 
 John 1, 48 ev at SoXoy OVK etrri. 4, 14 evav- 
 TW, i. e. in his soul. 17, 13. Rom. 7, 8. 
 1 Cor. 2, 11. 8, 7. 2 Cor. 11, 10. Eph. 4, 
 18. Philem. 6. al. So upvirTev^ai ev Sew, 
 
 1. e. in the mind and counsels of God, Col. 
 3, 3. Eph. 3, 9. So ev eavTw, ev eav- 
 Tols, in or with oneself, themselves, i. e. in 
 one s heart, Matt. 3, 9. Luke 7, 39. 49. 
 John 5, 42. Rom. 8, 23. Eph. 1, 9. James 
 
 2, 4. al. 
 
 d) Of a number or multitude, as indica 
 ting place, in, among, with, equivalent to 
 ev p.ecra> in the midst of; Matt. 2, 6 e Xa^t- 
 <TTT] ev Tols rjyep.6(Tiv lovSa. 11,11 OVK eyrj- 
 yepTai ev yewnrols yvvaiK<av. V. 21 ot yevo- 
 pevoi ev iyui>. 20, 27. Mark 10, 43. Luke 1, 
 
 1. John 1, 14. 11, 54. Acts 2, 29. 20, 32. 
 Rom. 1, 5. 6. 1 Cor. 11, 18. Eph. 5, 3. 
 1 Pet. 5, 1. 2. 2 Pet. 2, 8. al. sajpiss. So 
 ev eauTois, among themselves, Matt. 16,7. 
 21, 38. Acts 28, 29. (Thuc. 7. 67.) ev d\- 
 \TJ\OIS, with one another, Mark 9, 50. 
 John 13, 35. Rom. 15, 5. (Luc. Asin. 19.) 
 So with a dat. sing, of a collective noun ; 
 Luke 4, 25. 27 ev TW icrparjX. 1, 61. 2, 44. 
 John 7, 43. Acts lo , 35. Eph. 3,21. 2 Pet. 
 
 2. 1. al. Sept. genr. for a 2 K. 18, 5; 
 "Hin? Gen. 23, 6. Lev. 16, 29. So JE1. V. 
 H. l . 31. Luc. D. Deor. 23. 1. Xen. An. 2. 
 
 3. 15. Hence with dat. plur. of persons by 
 whom one is accompanied, escorted, or the 
 like; Luke 14, 31. Jude 14 ^X3e Kvpios ei> 
 ayiats pvpido-iv avTov. Sept. and a Num. 
 
 20, 20. (1 Mace. 1, 17. 7, 28.) With a 
 dat. plur. of things ; 1 Cor. 15, 3 eV irpaTois, 
 among the first, i. e. adv. first of all ; so 
 Xen. CEc. 4. 4. Cyr. 1. 6. 24. 
 
 e) Of persons, among, i. e. tw the pre 
 
ev 
 
 247 
 
 fence of, before; Mark 8, 38 os av Vat- 
 o-^vi/3^ p.e eV rfj yevea rainy. Luke 1, 25. 
 Acts 6, 8. 24, 21 eo-rcbs 1 eV avroiy, 6e/<jre them 
 as judges. 1 Cor. 2, 6. Col. 1, 23. Trop. 
 and from the Heb. Luke 4, 21 ev ro is too-ii/ 
 vfivv, comp. Sept. and ^ Deut. 5, 1. So 
 genr. Judith 16, 1. Pol. 17. 6. 1. Plato 
 Legg. 886. e, Karrjyope iv ev d(rej3e(riv dz>3/)o>- 
 TTOIS. Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 6. Trop. in the sight 
 of any one, he being judge; Luke 16, 15 
 TO *v dv%pa>irois {j^frj\6v, i. e. in the sight, 
 judgment, of men. 1 Cor. 14, 11 6 XoXcov, 
 ev e/ioi ftdpftapos. Col. 3, 20. (Demosth. 
 764. 15. ib. 813. 10. Eurip. Hipp. 1335.) 
 So by Hebraism, eV ocpSaXp-ois vp-av, in i. e. 
 before your eyes, in your judgment, Matt. 
 21,42. Mark 12, 11. Sept. and B WS$ 
 Ps. 118, 23; comp. Gesen. Lehrg. p. 820. 
 So 1 Mace. 1, 12. 
 
 f ) Spoken of that in which one is en 
 closed, by or with which one is surrounded ; 
 Matt. 16, 27 fpxtvZai ev rfj dogrj. 25, 31. al. 
 Mark 13, 26 ev ve<pe\ais. Luke 21, 27. al. 
 Acts 7, 30 ev (p\oyl irvpos. (Horn. II. 15. 
 192 ovpavos tv afoepi Kal ve(pe\rjcri.) Of 
 clothing, Matt. 11, 8 tv p.a\aKols Ip-ariois 
 77/i(pteo>ieW. 6,29. 7,15. Mark 12, 38. Heb. 
 11, 37. James 2, 2; of ornaments, 1 Tim. 
 2,9; of bonds, Eph. 6,20. So tv o-apict, 
 .n the flesh, i. e. clothed in the flesh, in the 
 body, 1 John 4, 2. 2 John 7 ; f jji/ ev a-apul, 
 Gal. 2, 20. Phil. 1, 22. Sept. and a Deut. 
 22, 12. Ps. 147, 8. So Jos. Ant. 18. 6. 7 
 6 tv rfj iroptpvpiSi. Hdian. 1. 13. 5. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 11. 4. Hence of that with which 
 one is furnished, which he carries with him, 
 or the like ; 1 Cor. 4, 21 ev pd/38o> eX3a>. 
 Heb. 9, 25. Trop. Luke 1, 17 tv -rrvevp-ari 
 Kal o-vvdp.fi HXt ov. Rom. 15, 29. Eph. 6,2. 
 Sept. and a Gen. 32, 1 1 tv pd/38c. Josh. 
 22, 8. So Jos. Ant. 6. 9. 4 <ni p.ev tirfpxn 
 poi ev pop.(paia KT\. Diod. Sic. 18. 16 ult. 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 3*. 14. 
 
 2. Of TIME, e.g. a) Time when, a defi 
 nite point or period, in, during, on, al which 
 any thing takes place ; Matt. 2, 1 ev f)p.epais 
 HpiSov. 3, 1. 8, 13. 12, 1. 2 ev o-afipdrca. 
 Acts 20, 7. 1 Cor. 11,23. al.saepiss. John 11, 
 9. 10 tv rfj rjp-fpa, tv rfj WKTI, i. e. by day, by 
 night. (Palaeph. 52. 1. Hdian. 1. 5. 1. Xen. 
 An. 1. 5. 16.) With a neut. adj. Acts 7, 
 13 ti> r<f fVTepa>. 2 Cor. 11, 6 tv iravri 
 sc. XP V <P- Pllil - 4 6. So Acts 26, 28 ev 
 oXi -yw (xpovw) shortly, and V. 29 ev oXi yw 
 Kal ev TroXXw, in short or in long. (Luc. D. 
 Deor. 9. 1. Vlut. Coriolan. 9. Xen. Hell. 4. 
 4. 12 ev oXi -yw TroXXoi enecrov, comp. Xen. 
 Cyr. 2. 4. 2 ev oXryw xpo""?-) With a relat. 
 pron. e. g. ev J sc. XP V( ? ^ al "k 2, 19. John 
 
 5, 7. (Thuc. 7. 29. Xen. An. 1. 10. 10.) 
 With art. and adv. Luke 7, 1 1 ev rrj tgrjs. 
 8, 1. John 4, 31 ev TW p.era^v. So Xen. 
 Conv. 1. 14. Spoken of an action or event 
 which serves to mark a definite time ; Matt. 
 22, 28 tv TTJ dvaa-rda-ei. Luke 11, 31. 32 ev 
 TT) Kpicrei. John 21, 20 ev rea SeiTTfo). 1 Cor. 
 15, 52 tv rrj f(rx- crdXTTtyyt. 2 Thess. 1, 7 
 1 John 2, 28. al. saep. So ev ols sc. ivpdy- 
 p-aa-i, i. e. during which things, meanwhile, 
 Luke 12, 1. (Luc. Alex. 36 ev TW Xotjuw. 
 Diod. Sic. 14.68. Xen. Mem. 2. 1.32. Hdian. 
 5. 1. 8 ev ols.) Spec, with dat. of art. and 
 infin. in, i. e. on or at an action or event, 
 while it is taking place ; Luke 9, 36 ev r<a 
 yeveo-%ai TTJV (pcavrjv. 1,8. 2, 6. 5, 1. 24, 51. 
 Acts 8, 6. al. saep. So Sept. 1 Sam. 1, 7. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 21. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 5. 
 
 b) Of time how long, i. e. a space or pe 
 riod within which any thing takes place, in, 
 within ; e. g. tv rpio-lv rjp.fpais, in three days, 
 Matt. 27, 40. Mark 15, 29. al. So Sept 
 and 2 Is. 16, 14. JEl V. II. 1.6. Diod. Sic 
 
 20. 83 ult. Xen. Ag. 1. 34 ev bvoiv erolv. 
 
 3. Trop. of the STATE, condition, circum 
 stances, in which one is, moves, acts ; as 
 also of the occasion, ground, means, in, on, 
 by, through, which one is affected, moved, 
 acted upon. 
 
 a) Of the state, condition, circumstances, 
 a) Genr. either external or internal ; comp. 
 Winer $ 52. a. 3. Matth. 577. 3. E. g. of 
 an external state ; Luke 7, 35 tv rpv(pfj 
 vTrapxdvrts. 8, 43 yvvrj ovcra ev pixrei aip.a- 
 TOS. 2, 29 et 11, 21 ev elprjvr), comp. James 
 2, 16 inrdyere ev flpfjvrj for which see in els 
 no. 4. Luke 16, 23 ev fiao-dvois. 23, 12 tv 
 ex^pa- v. 40 ; perh. Rom. 1,4 ev 8vvdp.ei. 
 8, 37. 1 Cor. 7, 18. 20. 24. 15, 42. 43. 
 2 Cor. 6, 4. 5. Gal. 1, 14 ev TW lovSaio-/zw. 
 Philem. 2, 7. 2 Thess. 3, 16 V iravrl rp6- 
 TTOJ, i. e. in every state, at every turn. 1 Tim. 
 2, 2. al. saep. So Hdian. 1. 3. 3. Pol. 8. 10. 
 4. Xen. Mem. 3. 3. 9 ev j/oVo). An. 2. 5. 38. 
 Of an internal state, as of the mind and 
 feelings; Acts 11, 5 ev eKcrrd&ei. Rom. 15, 
 32 tv x a P9- 1 Cor. 1, 10 eV TW OUTO> vol 
 KT\. 2, 3 tv dcr^fveia Kal ev <po/3a>. 2 Cor. 
 11, 17. 21 tv d(ppoa-vvT]. Eph. 3,12. 5,21. 
 1 Tim. 1, 13. 2, 11. Heb. 3, 11. James 1, 
 
 21. 2, 1. Jude 24. al. So Hdian. 2. 12. 6. 
 Xen. An. 7. 6. 3. Cyr. 5. 2. 5. In this 
 usage tv with its dative is often equivalent 
 to an adjective; Rom. 4, 10 &v ev aKpoftv 
 aria, ev Tfepirop,^, i. e. as uncircumcised 01 
 circumcised. 2 Cor. 3, 7. 8 et Phil. 4, 19 
 tv So!?; i. q. ev8oos. 1 Tim. 2, 7. 12. 14 
 Tit. 1, 6 tv Karrjyoptq, i. e. accused. 3, 5 
 e/rya ra ev 8iKaio<ri/i>r], i. q. ra 8iKaia. (Luc. 
 
248 
 
 Amor. 50. Xen. Cyr. 8. 5. 15.) Also ad 
 verbially, Acts 5, 23 eV irao-fj dcr<pa\eiq. 
 Rom. 2, 28. 29 ev TW (pavepcp, ev TW KpvTrrw. 
 Eph. 6, 24. SoPlatoGorg. p. 512. c. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 1. 31. /3) Of the business, em 
 ployment, actions, in which one is engaged ; 
 Winer $ 52. a. 3. a. Thus Matt. 21, 22 ev 
 npecrevxf). Mark 4, 2 ev TT; SiSa^f; OUTOU, 
 i. e. as he taught. 8, 27 et Luke 24, 35 eV 777 
 6w, i. e. in the walk or journey. Luke 16, 
 10. John 8, 3 eV poi^eta Karei\r]p.ei>r]v. Acts 
 6, 1. 24, 16. Rom. 1,9 ev Tw euayyeXiw, 
 
 1. e. labouring in the gospel. 14, 18. 1 Cor. 
 
 15, 1. 58. 2 Cor. 7, 11 ev iravri. Col. 1, 
 10 eV Travrl epyw. 4, 2. 1 Tim. 4, 15 ev 
 TOVTOIS i o-3i. 5, 17. Heb. 6, 18 ev ols. 11, 
 34. James 1, 8. 4, 3. al. So Matt. 20, 15 
 TTOirja-aL 6 3eXw eV rots e/ioly, i. e. in my 
 own affairs. 22, 15. 23, 30 Koivmvol ev TW 
 at/urn, i. e. in slaying the prophets. (Hdot. 
 
 2. 82 01 ev Troirjo-ei. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 1 6 
 Kvpos ev rovrois rjv. Plato Prot. 22. p. 317. 
 C, elp.1 ev rij Te^wy.) With dat. of person, 
 in the work, business, cause of any one ; 
 Rom. 16, 12 TJTIS eKOTriaaev ev Kvpi w. Eph. 
 6, 21. al. Rom. 6, 3 TOVS (rvvepyovs pov ev 
 XptcrTw. 1 Cor. 4, 17. al. y) Implying in 
 the reach or power of any one ; Matth. 577. 
 6. Acts 5, 4 ev rfj <rfj e^ovaiq, comp. 1, 7 
 et John 3, 35. Acts 4, 12 OVK ea-rtv ev uXXw 
 ov8evi fj craiTTjpia. So ev Trvevpari, in 
 the Spirit, i. e. under the power and in 
 fluence of the Holy Spirit, inspired, Matt. 
 22, 43. Mark 12, 36. Luke 2, 27. 4, 1. 9, 
 1. 1 Cor. 12, 3 ; also Matt. 12, 28. 1 Pet. 3, 
 19. Rev. 1, 10. 4, 2. 17, 3. al. Of demo 
 niacs, ev 7rvevfj.ari aKoSapTW, 5. e. in the 
 power of an unclean spirit, possessed, Mark 
 1, 23. 5, 2. Also yevopevos ev e avTW, 
 having come to himself, Acts 12, 11 ; Matth. 
 577. 6 ult. Jos. Ant. 3. 1. 5. Aristoph. 
 Av. 1677 ev TW Tpi/3aXX<a TTO.V TO Trpuypa. 
 Hdot. .6. 109. Xen. CEc. 7. 14 ev vol mivra 
 eoriV. 
 
 b) Of manner, i. e. the circumstances, 
 external or internal, by which any action, 
 condition, or event is accompanied ; in, with, 
 in respect to which it exists or is per 
 formed, a) Genr. of manner, comp. in 
 eK no. 3. h: Matt. 22, 37 dyatrav ev 0X77 
 TTJ KapSiq KT\. quoted from Deut. 6, 5 
 where Heb. a , Sept. e* ; as also Mark 1 2, 
 30. 33. Mark 4, 2 8i8d<TKeiv ev TrapajBo- 
 Xouj. Luke 2, 36 ev eov<ria KOI bvvapei ITTI- 
 Tacrtm. 21,25 awo-ftr] eSvcav ev diropiq. John 
 
 16, 25 ev Trapoi/u aiy \a\e"iv. 23, 24 irpoa-KV- 
 velv ev WtVftOTl KOL dXjjSeia. Acts 2, 46. 
 Rom. 1,9 ev rw irvev^ari p.ov. 9, 22. 15, 6. 
 1 Cor. 2, 4 TO Krjpvyfid pov OVK ev 7ret3oT? 
 
 Xo yoif- v. 7. 14, 6. 21. 2 Cor. 3,7 tv ypdp.- 
 fMcriv. Col. 3, 22. 2 Tim. 4, 2. 2 Pet. 3, 3. 
 1 John 5, 6 e XSwi/ ev TW uSart KM TCO at- 
 paTi. (Eurip. Bacch. 1167. Hdian. 2. 13.8. 
 Palajph. 32. 2 eXSwi/ oTTtaw OVTWI/ ev rjpe- 
 fj.aim /3aStcr/iaTt. Thuc. 7. 67 OVK ev TW 
 avraiv TpoTrw Kivovp.evoi.) In an adverbial 
 sense; Matt. 22, 16 ev aX?j3a a 8ibd<TKeis, 
 i. e. truly, in reality. Mark 9, 1 ev SoXw. 
 Acts 12, 7 et 22, 18 ev rdxfi- (Thuc. 6. 
 92 init.) Acts 17, 31 et Rev. 19, 11 icpivtiv 
 ev diKaicxrvvr), i. e. righteously. 26, 7 ev e<- 
 revfiq, continually. Col. 4, 5. Eph. 6, 9 ev 
 Trapprja-iq, boldly. Rev. 18, 2 Rec. eitpagev ev 
 la-^vi. Prob. Rom. 1, 4. So Judith 1, 11. 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 1 . 1 1 ev TW p-epet ndXiv, vicissim. 
 /3) Of a rule, law, standard, in, by, according 
 to, conformably to ; comp. Winer 52. a. 3. b. 
 Matth. ^ 577. 3 ult. So Matt. 7, 2 ev w xpt - 
 fiari Kpivere, KpiSjjcreo-Se. Luke 1,8 ev rfj 
 rdgei, comp. 1 Cor. 15, 23. 1 Thess. 4, 15 ev 
 \6yq> Kvpiov. 1 Tim. 1, 18 ev avrais sc. Trpo- 
 (prjreiais. Heb. 4, 11. So of a rule of life, 
 Luke 1 , 6 7ropev6p.evoi ev irdcrais rdls evro- 
 Xaty. (Pind. Pyth. 4. 105 ev TOUTW Xo yw. 
 Thuc. 1. 77 ev rols ofioioLs vopois ras Kpi- 
 a-eis TToielv. Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 1.) With dat. 
 of person ; 2 Cor. 10, 12 ev eavrols eavroiis 
 p-eTpovvres. Also in conformity with the 
 will, law, precept of any one ; John 3, 21 
 ev Sfw ecrnv elpya<rp,eva. 1 Cor. 7, 39 ev 
 Kvpiia. Eph. 6, 1. y) Spec, in, in respect 
 to, as to; Luke 1,7. 18 TrpojBeprjKevai ev 
 T]p.epais. Eph. 2, 11 eSvjj ev crapia. Tit. 1, 
 13 "iva vyiaivcocriv ev rrj Triarei. James 2, 10 
 et3, 2 Trraieiv ev evi, ev Xo-yw. So ev irav- 
 ri, in every respect, 2 Cor. 8, 7. 9, 8. 11 ; 
 ev fj.r)8evL, in no respect, 2 Cor. 7, 9. James 
 1, 4; ev ov8evi Phil. 1, 20. Also after 
 words signifying plenty or want, Rom. 15 
 13 Trepicrcreveiv ev rrj e\Ttidi. 2 Cor. 3, 9. 
 8, 7. Col. 2, 7 et Eph. 2, 4 TrXouaios ev 
 e\eei. 1 Cor. 1, 5. 1 Tim. 6, 18. al. 1 Cor 
 1, 7 iorepetcrSlat ev [irj8ev\ ^apicr/xaTt. Pa- 
 Iffiph. 28. 2 imep(pepa>v ev. Diod. Sic. 5. 57 
 Stacpe pw ev, and so Xen. Hi. 1. 8. 
 
 c) Of the occasion, ground, basis, in, on. 
 upon which any thing rests, exists, takes 
 place, e. g. a) Of a person or thing in 
 or on which as a substratum any thing 
 rests, exists, is done ; see Matth. 577. 1 . 
 Winer 52. a. 3. a. So with dat. of thing, 
 1 Cor. 2, 5 Iva rj TTUTTIS vpfav p.rj rj ev (ro(piq 
 dvZp. KT\. 2 Cor. 4, 10 et Gal. 6, 17 ev TW 
 (TcopaTt. Gal. 4, 14. Eph. 2, 11 Trepironrj ev 
 vapid. With dat. of pers. i. e. in the person 
 or case of any one, in or by his example ; 
 Luke 22, 37 TOVTO Set TfXeo-SJjwu ev ep-ot. 
 John 9, 3. Acts 4, 2 /caTayyeXXeif ev TW I;;- 
 
ev 
 
 249 
 
 trov ri]v dvao-rao-iv. Rom. 9, 17. 1 Cor. 4, 6 
 iva (v fip. iv pa^re. 2 Cor. 4, 3. Eph. 1, 20. 
 Phil. 1, 30. (Plato Meno 82. a, eni8eiKw 
 o-3at ev TIVI. Xin. Cyr. 1. 6. 29.) So after 
 verbs implying to do any thing in the case of 
 any one, i. e. to or for him, where the ace. or 
 dat. might stand ; Matt. 17, 12 eiroirjerav ev 
 avr<a &ra rScXiprow. Luke 23, 31. 1 Cor. 9, 
 15. 1 Thess. 5, 12 TOVS KOTTIUVTOS ev vfj.lv, 
 in your behalf. So too 6/xoXoyfii> ev 
 TIVI, to confess in behalf of , i.e. to acknow 
 ledge, Matt. 10, 32. Luke 12, 8; comp. 
 Winer } 32. 3. b. Also <rKav8a\ i fe- 
 o-3 at ev TIVI, to take offence in any one, 
 i. e. in his case or cause, Matt. 11,6. 13, 
 57. 26, 31. 33. al. (Luc. Philopatr. 18 pr) 
 erepolov n Troirjcrrjs ev epoi.) Spoken also of 
 that in which any thing consists, is com 
 prised, fulfilled, manifested, or the like ; 
 John 9, 30 ev yap rovr<a 3au/*acrroj ecrnv. 
 Rom. 13, 9 ev rourw r<5 Xdya> dva.Ke(f>a\ai- 
 ovrai. Gal. 5, 14 6 iras vofios ev evl Xdyw 
 7r\r]povTai. Eph. 2, 7. 5, 9. Heb. 3, 12. 
 1 Pet. 3, 4. 1 John 3, 10 et 4, 9 ev TOVTC* 
 ecpavepvZr]. 4, 10. 17. al. So from laxness 
 of expression, Matt. 22, 40 ev ravrais rais 
 8vcrlv evro\ais o\os 6 vop.os K. ol rrp. Kpe- 
 fj-avrai. Also Acts 7, 14 ev v^v^uty e/35. 
 Trevre, consisting in 75 souls ; comp. Deut. 
 10, 22 where Sept. for 3. (Hdian. 2. 3. 17 
 ov yap ev rrj Kc&e8piq 17 TrpoeSpi a, dXX ev rols 
 epyois. ) Here too we may refer the use of ev 
 by Hebraism after verbs of swearing, to mark 
 the. ground or object, on which the oath 
 rests, in Engl. by, sometimes upon; Matt. 
 5, 34. 35. 36, //r) o/nocrat ev r<a ovpavw, ev rfj 
 yfj, ev rrj Kf(pa\fj crov. 23, 16. 18. 20 sq. 
 Rev. 10, 6. al. Sept. for 2 52^3 1 Sam. 
 24, 22. 2 Sam. 19, 8. /3) Of the ground, 
 motive, exciting cause, in consequence of 
 which any action is performed, in, on, a/., 
 by, i. q. because of, on account of, propler ; 
 Winer J 52. a. 3. c. Matt. 6, 7 on ev rfj TTO- 
 XvXoyi a aiiruiv eicraKouSjjo-oiTai. Acts 7, 29 
 efpvyev ev rw Xdya> rovrw. 1 Cor. 11, 2 ev 
 rovTcp OIIK fTraivi). 2 Cor. 6, 12 ev rjfj.lv. 
 1 Pet. 4, 14 el 6v(i8iea%e ev oi/o /xan X/at- 
 crrov, comp. Mark 9. 41 tvav6fiart on Xpi- 
 o-roG eo-re. Sept. and 3 2 Chr. 16, 7. (Ec- 
 clus. 11,2 bis. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 19 ev nio-Tei. 
 An. 3. 1. 1 etThuc. 5. 3 ev rdis cnrovSais.) 
 So ev TOUTW, herein, liereby, i. q. on this 
 account, therefore, John 15, 8. 16, 30. 
 Acts 24, 16. 1 Cor. 4, 4 ; (Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 
 17;) ev rovTot yivuxrueiv, to know hereby, 
 by this, John is, 35. 1 John 2, 3. 5. al. So 
 tv (a, equivalent to tVrourw on, herein that, 
 i. q. in that, because, Rom. 8, 3. Heb. 2, 
 18 1 Pet. 2, 12 ; comp. Thuc. 8, 86 ; also 
 
 wherefore, Heb. 6, 17. (In this sense of 
 propter, ev does not occur with a dat. of 
 person, Winer 52. a. 3. c.) Spoken also of 
 the authority in consequence of which any 
 thing is done, in, by, under, by virtue of; 
 Matt. 21, 23 et Luke 20, 2 ev noia egovaia 
 Tcivra iroieis. Acts 4, 7 ev iroiq 8vvd/j.fi, rj 
 ev TTOUB ov6fj.ari. John 5, 43 et 10, 25 ev rut 
 ov. Tovnarpos. Matt. 21,9. John 12, 13. H, 
 26. 1 Cor. 5, 4. 2 Thess. 3, 6. al. So at- 
 re co ev rw dvofJMTi irja-ov, to ask in the name 
 of Jesus, i. e. under his authority and sanc 
 tion, as his ministers, John 14, 13. 14. 15, 
 16. 16, 23. 24. 26. y) Of the ground or 
 occasion of an emotion of mind, after words 
 expressing joy, wonder, hope, confidence, 
 etc. and the reverse ; so with dat. of thing, 
 Luke 1,21 e%avfiaov ev rw xpovi^eiv avrov. 
 Rom. 2, 23 or ev vd/iw Kav^acrai. (Sept. and 
 3 Jer. 9, 22. 23.) Acts 7, 41 el^pa tvero tv 
 rois epyois. Luke 10, 20 ev TOVTM p,r) X a W e ~ 
 re. Eph. 3, 13 fjirj eKKaKeiv ev rats 3Xi \^ecri 
 /zou. So Matt. 12, 21 ev r<a ov. avrov eSvr) 
 e XTrtoOo-t. (Sept. for 2 H-J3 p s . 33, 21.) 
 Phil. 3, 3. 4 TreTTotSeVat ev aapKt, and so 
 Sept. for 3 naa Jer. 48, 7. (Epict. Ench. 
 40. Pol. 1. 59. 2.) With dat. of person, 
 Rom. 2, 7 et 5, 11 /cau^ao-at ev 3fw. 1 Cor. 
 15, 19 et r)\7rtKOTes eo-fiev ev Xptcrrw. Eph. 
 1, 12. 1 Tim. 6, 17. 2 Cor. 7, 16 3ap/ja> 
 ev ifjuv. Vice versa Gal. 4, 20. Sept. 
 f\iri{eiv ev for 3 MU3 Hos. 10, 13. 2 K 
 18, 5. So Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 28. 
 
 d) Of the means or circumstances by the 
 aid or intervention of which any tiling takes 
 place, is done ; in, by, through, by means of. 
 a) With dat. of person, by whose aid or in 
 tervention any thing is done ; Winer j 52. 
 a. 3. d. Matt. 9, 34 eK/3dXXet TO. Sat/xoi/ia ev 
 rw dpxovTi rcav 8. Acts 4, 9 ev TIVI OVTOS 
 a-fcruHTTai. 17, 28. 31 ev dv8pi. Gal. 3, 8 
 ev\oyr)%r]<TOVTai ev 0*01 Trdvra TO. e^vrj, IN and 
 through thee, comp. Acts 3, 25 ; also Heb. 
 1, 1. 1 John 5, 11. al. So Dem. 31. 10. 
 Thuc. 7. 8 ev rw dyye\<p. /3) With dat. 
 of thing, but used strictly only where the 
 object is conceived of as actually in or sur 
 rounded by the thing in question ; pr. in a)id 
 through ; comp. Passow ev no. 4. Winer 
 } 52. a. 3. d. Matth. $ 577. 7. So Matt. 8, 
 32 GTrtSai/ov ev rols vSao-i, in and by the 
 waters. 1 Cor. 3, 13 evnvpl drroKaXvirreTai. 
 Rev. 14, 10. 16, 8. al. Sept. and 2 Lev. 
 8, 32. (1 Mace. 5, 44 et 6, 31 ev irvpi 
 Horn. II. 24. 38 Kaitiv ev nvpi.) Hence genr. 
 where the object is conceived as being in, 
 or in contact or connection with the means 
 Matt. 3, 11 /3a7m oj ev v8ari. 5, 13 ev TIVI 
 dXt<r3r;crTai. 17, 21 ev Trpoaev}(TJ. 25, 16. 
 
250 
 
 evavrlas 
 
 Luke 21. 34 ev KpamaXri KrX. Acts 11, 14. 
 20, 19. Rom. 10, 5. 9 ihv opok<rfh a T) s fv T< ? 
 orofjLari <rov. 12, 21. 1 Cor. 6, 20. Heb. 10, 
 29. 13, 20. Rev. 1, 5. al. So ev ^t ipi row, 
 in or by the hand of any one, Acts 7, 35. 
 Gal. 3, 19. Sept. and a Judg. 16, 7. Num. 
 36, 2. 1 Esdr. 1, 40. Thuc. 7. 11 to-re ev 
 aXXaiy fTTto-roXatj. Xen. An. 4. 3.8 edogev ev 
 Tre Saiy SeSeVSat. id. Ath. 1. 2,4. y) Also 
 in N. T. and later writers simply of the in- 
 slrument, where classic writers usually em 
 ploy the dative alone, Winer -1. c. Matth. 
 I 577. 9. I 396. n. 2. Luke 22, 49 el Trard- 
 op.ev (v fjia^aipa ; Rom. 16, 16. James 3, 
 9 ev avTr} (TTJ yXuxrcrrf) evXoyov fj.fi>. Rev. 6, 
 8 a.TTOKTflva.1 ev pop.(pala KT\. 12, 55. 13, 10. 
 al. Sept. and a Gen. 48, 22. Hos. 1,7. So 
 Judith 2, 19. Ecclus. 46, 6. Plato Tim. 81. 
 C, re Spnp.p.fvrjs ev yd\aKTi. S) From the 
 Heb. spoken of price or exchange, of that 
 by means of which, with or for which, 
 any thing is purchased or exchanged ; Wi 
 ner { 52. a. 3. e. Rev. 5, 9 r]yopr](ras r<a Sew 
 rjpds ev rw aip.aTi (rov. Sept. and 2 Lam. 5, 
 4. 1 Sam! 24, 24. So Rorn. 1, 23 fj\\agav 
 r/v 8av 3eov ev 6p.oiu>p.aTi, for an image. 
 v. 25. Sept. for a -nsn p s . 106, 20. 
 Comp. the dat. of price or exchange, Lys. 
 c. Epicr. 810. ult. Horn. II. 7. 472; also ev 
 C. dat. Soph. Ant. 945 (ptas dXXdai ev ;\;aX- 
 KOQCTOIS avXals. Matth. j 364. n. 365. n. 2. 
 4. Sometimes ev c. dat. is found where 
 the natural construction would seem to re 
 quire els c. accus. as after verbs which im 
 ply not rest in a place or state, but motion 
 or direction into or towards a place or ob 
 ject. In such cases, the idea of coming to 
 and subsequent rest in that place or state is 
 either actually expressed or is implied in 
 the context ; see the converse of this in els 
 no. 4. Passow ev 6. Winer 54. 4. Matth. 
 5 577. p. 1141. So after verbs of motion, 
 Matt. 10, 16 aTrotrreXXco vp.as ev p-eva) \v- 
 KO>V, in the midst of wolves, by whom ye 
 are already surrounded. Luke 5, 16 yv 
 vTrox&p&v ev Tals eprjp.ois, i- e. he withdrew 
 and abode in deserts. 7, 17 e;}X3ei> 6 Xo yoy 
 ev 0X17 TiJ lovftaia, i. e. went out, spread 
 abroad, in the whole land. John 5, 4 Kare- 
 ftaivev ev Ty KoXvpfiifipq KOI erdpaaa-e. 
 Rev. 11, 11. al. So Matt. 14, 3 eSero eV 
 (pv\axfi, as in Engl. to put in prison, for 
 into. Mark 15, 46 et Luke 23, 53 Kare^Kev 
 avrov ev p.vrjp.eia, as in Engl. they placed 
 him in the tomb. Mark 1, 16 jSaXXoira? 
 an$>ifi\r]<TTpov ev rfj SaXXno-o-?/, cornp. Matt. 
 4, 18 els rfjv 3. John 3, 35 irdvra SeSaKev 
 ev ry x fL P l avrov, has given, i. e. has put, 
 
 placed, all things in his hand. Trop. Luke 
 1, 17. Sept. and 3 Judg. 6, 35. Ezra 7, 10. 
 So ^El. V. H. 4. 18 ore cari)X3e IlXcmoi> tv 
 SiKfXt a. Dion. Hal. Ant. 1. 73 irplv Pdveiav 
 e XSeu/ ev iraXi a. Arr. Epict. 1. 11. 32. 
 ib. 2. 20. 23. Xen. Hell. 4. 5. 5 ol ev rw 
 Hpai w KaraTrefpevyoTfs, for es TO "Hpatov 
 Kare(pvyov ib. iriit. Metaph. after words 
 expressing an affection of mind tcwards 
 any one ; e. g. dydnr) ev rjp.1v 2 Cor. 8, 7. 
 1 John 4, 9. 16; opyr) ev TW Xaw Luke 21, 
 23 Rec. Comp. Sept. and a 2 Sam. 24, 17. 
 So Lib. Henoch. in Fabr. V. T. Pseudep. 
 p. 161. 
 
 NOTE. In composition ev implies : a) 
 The being or resting in a place, person, 
 thing ; as eWt/Lu, e /x/uVco. b) Motion into, 
 when compounded with verbs of motion ; as 
 ep.^aiva>, ep.iropevop.ai. c) The possession 
 of a quality, as eyKparys, evdXios, evftiKOs, 
 
 f. to-opai, Mid. depon. 
 (dyicaXiop.ai,*) to take in one s arms, c. ace. 
 Mark 9, 36. 10, 16. Sept. for pan Prov. 6, 
 10. 24, 33. Plut. Camill. 5. Diod. Sic. 
 3. 58. 
 
 ou, 6, 17, adj. (eV, aXs,) belong 
 ing in the. sea, marine ; James 3, 7. Horn. 
 Od. 5. 67. Plut. Symp. 4. 4. 4. 
 
 " i / > < \ "* 
 
 evavTi, adv. (ai/ri,; pr. over against, 
 
 hence, in presence of, before, c. gen. Luke 
 1, 8. Acts 8, 21 Grb. Sept. for iJBb Ex. 
 28, 26. 29 ; 13^53 Gen. 38, 7. 
 
 evavnov, adv. (eVavrtor,) pr. over a- 
 gainst ; hence, before, in the presence of, 
 C. gen. Mark 2, 12 e ^iJXSei/ evavriov Trdvra>v. 
 Luke 20, 26. Acts 8, 32. Sept. for r:ab 
 Gen. 20, 15. 41, 46; 13153 Ex. 7, 20. "^o 
 Pol. 2. 59. 9. Xen. Mem. 2. 5. 1. From 
 the Heb. before, in the sight of, c. gen. Acts 
 7, 10 e8a>Kev avr<a x^P lv ^ vavr l - ov &apaa>, 
 i. e. with him; comp. Ex. 11, 3. 12,36. al. 
 where Sept. for "Vpsa/. Luke 24, 19 8wa- 
 TOS evavriov rov SeoO KT\. in the sight of 
 God, i. e. God being witness and judge ; 
 comp. Sept. for 13153 Gen. 21, 11. 12 ; ipsb 
 Gen. 10, 9. See Gesen. Lehrg. p. 693. d. 
 p. 820. 9. 
 
 evavTiOS, a, ov, (dvrios, am,) over a- 
 gainst, opposite. 
 
 1. Pr. Horn. II. 9. 190. Thuc. 1. 93 ; in 
 N. T. of a wind, contrary, adverse, absol. 
 Matt. 14, 24. Acts 27, 4 ; c. dat. Mark 6, 
 48. So Luc. D. Deor. 25. 1. Xen. An. 4. 
 5. 3. Also e evavrias or eevavrtas, as 
 adv. over against, c. gen. Mark 15, 39 ; comp. 
 
251 
 
 Buttm. } 123. 5. 5 115.n. 5. Sept. for 153 
 Josh. 8,11; 1530 \eh.3, 27. SoThuc.4.33u 
 
 2. Trop. contrary, adverse, hostile ; c. dat. 
 1 Thess. 2, 15. Acts 28, 17 ; also eWna 
 jrpdo-o-eii , constr. with irpos c. ace. Acts 
 26, 9; comp. Sept Ez. 18, 18. So Time. 
 7. 11. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 22. Hence o e 
 fvavTias, i. q. 6 tvavrios, an adversary, 
 an enemy, Tit. 2, 8 ; comp. Buttm. 125. 6. 
 So Xen. Eq. 11. 3. 
 
 evdpfto/JLaij f. /*at, Mid. depon. (5px<>- 
 fiai.) to make beginning in, i. q. to begin ; 
 C. ace. Phil. 1,66 evapd[ievos tv vp.lv ep- 
 yov ayaSov KT\. see Matth. $ 336. n. 1. Kiihn. 
 Ausf. Gramm. J 512. n. 5. With dat. of man 
 ner, Gal. 3, 3 tvap^dfjLfvoL nvevpaTi. With 
 Ko3o>? 2 Cor. 8, 6 Lachm. Sept. c. inf. for 
 bnn Deut. 2, 24. 25. Usually c. gen. Luc. 
 Somn. 3. Plut. Cic. 35. Pol. 3. 54. 4. 
 
 ovs, 6, 17, adj. (eVStw,) in want, 
 needy, destitute, Acts 4, 34. Sept. for T^2X 
 Deut. 15, 4. 7. Pol. 5. 1. 6. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 2. 10. 
 
 OTOS, TO, eeiKW/xi, an n 
 dication, token, proof, 2 Thes?. 1, 5. Dem. 
 423. 23. Plato Crit. 110. b. 
 
 f. 8ei w, ( Of tV.-y^t.) 
 ouJ in any thing, to s/iow i?i any thing, c. 
 ace. Sept. Josh. 7, 15. 16. Plato Polit. 287. 
 b. In N. T. only Mid. ivSriavv^a^, to 
 show forth, to manifest, pr. what is one s 
 own, any thing relating to or depending on 
 one s self; c. accus. Rom. 2. 15 tvo dx. TO 
 epyov TOV vop.ov ypairrov fv Tais KapSiais 
 avruiv. 9, 17 TTJV 8vt>afj.ii> p.ov. V. 22. 2 Cor. 
 
 8, 24. Eph. 2, 7? 1 Tim. 1,16. Tit. 2, 10. 
 3, 2. Heb. 6, 10. 11. Sept for rtipn Ex. 
 
 9, 17. So Wisd. 12, 17. Pol. 2. 4. V. Xen. 
 An. 6. 1. 19. With ace. and dat. of pers. 
 to show towards any one, i. e. to do to any 
 one ; 2 Tim. 4, 14 TroXXd p.oi KCLKU fi>(8fiaTO. 
 Sept. for baa Gen. 50, 15. 17. So Diod. 
 Sic. VI. p. 237 p.yd\rjv vjBpiv TIJ 7rpecr/3e/a 
 iv(8eiaTo. Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 3. 
 
 evoei^ts, tcos, 17, (fv8fiKwp,i,) a pointing 
 out, pr. with the finger, Pol. 3. 38. 5. In 
 N. T. trop. 
 
 1. a showing forth, declaration, Rom. 3, 
 25. 26. Plut. Cato Min. 37 fin. Plato Legg. 
 966. b. 
 
 2 an indication, token, proof, i. q. /- 
 8 f iyp.a, 2 Cor. 8, 24. Phil. 1, 28. Philo de 
 Op. Mund. I. p. 20. a, ds ti>8fi^iv TOV p.r)8ev 
 
 evoeKd, 01, at, TO, card. num. eleven ; 
 in N. T. of the eleven disciples, after the 
 
 apostasy of Judas, Matt. 28, 16. Mark 16 
 
 14. Luke 24, 9. 33. Acts 1, 26 ; or beside 
 Peter, Acts 2, 14. 
 
 evSetcaros, rj, ov, ordin. the eleventh, 
 Matt. 20, 6. 9. Rev. 21, 20. 
 
 v8e^ofj,ai, f. o/xat, Mid. depon. (8/xo- 
 juat,) to take or receive in, to admit, Luc 
 Eun. 9. Thuc. 3. 31 .In N. T. only impers. 
 (vSe^fTai, it is admissible, possible ; c. infin. 
 Luke 1 3, 33 OVK evStx^Tat, it is impossible, 
 it cannot be. So Hdian. 4. 8. 8. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 2. 23. 
 
 evSrjfj,ea), , f. ^o-w, (evS^os,) pr. to bg 
 among one s people, to be at home, Plut. de 
 Gen. Socr. 6 fin. In N. T. to live in, to be 
 present in any place, with eV c. dat. 2 Cor. 
 5, 6 ; or with any person, with Trpos c. ace. 
 v. 8 ; absol. v. 9 ; comp. Phil. 1, 23. Comp. 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 11. 3. Lys. 320. 1. 
 
 evoiovcrKO), [. q. eVSiia) q. v. by redupl. 
 and change of ending, Buttm. $ 112. 14; 
 to clothe in a garment, with two ace. Mark 
 
 15, 17 Lachm. evSiSva-Kovcriv ai/Tuv nopipv- 
 pav, for evbvovo-iv Rec. Mid. to clothe one 
 self in, to loear, c. ace. Luke 8, 27. 16, 19. 
 Sept. for dab 2 Sam. 1, 24. 13, 18. Ju 
 dith 9, 1 . Not found in Gr. writers. 
 
 evSiKO?, ov, 6. 17, adj. (eV, S/KT;,) ac 
 cording to right, i. e. right, just, of things, 
 Rom. 3, 8. Heb. 2, 2. Pind. Pyth. 5. 138. 
 Plato Hipp. maj. 292. a, TTO\IS. 
 
 V$6/J,T)<Tl$, ewy, i], (eVSo/ie a>,) pr. some 
 thing built in, e. g. a mole in a harbour, 
 Jos. Ant. 15. 9. 6. In N. T. genr. a struc 
 ture, building, Rev. 21, 18. 
 
 evSo^d^o), f. do-to, (i/Sooy,) to make 
 glorious, to glorify, i. q. Sod&> q. v. Pass. 
 2 Thess. 1, 10. 12. Sept. for 1333 Ex. 
 14, 4. Ez. 28, 22. Ecclus. 38, C. 
 
 eVSo^oy, ov, 6, f), adj. (eV, So a,) pr. in 
 honour, in glory, i. e. 
 
 1. Of persons, honoured, noble, 1 Cor. 4, 
 10. Sept. for 1333 1 Sam. 9, 6. Is. 23, 8. 
 So Hdian. 1. 6. 18. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 56. 
 Of deeds, TO evdoga, glorious, memorable, 
 Luke 13, 17. Sept. for ni stba? Ex. 34, 10. 
 Job 5, 9. So Pol. 12. 5. 6. ^Eschin. 86. 42. 
 
 2. Of external appearance, splendid, glo 
 rious, e. g. raiment, Luke 7, 25. Sept. for 
 i23J Is. 23, 9 ; rtB3S Is. 22, 18. So Hdian. 
 1. 16. 7. Trop. (KK\j]<rta ev8oos, i.-e. the 
 church as a bride, adorned in pure and 
 splendid raiment, Eph. 5, 27 ; comp. v. 25 
 etRev. 19, 7. 8. 21, 9 sq. 
 
 v8vjui, OTOS, TO, (eVSuo),) clothing, rai 
 ment, a garment, Matt. 6, 25. 28. 28, 3. 
 
252 
 
 Luke 12, 23. Sept. for 153 2 Sam. 1, 24. 
 Prov. 31, 22 ; nJSQba Zeph". 1, 8. So Anth. 
 Gr. IV. p. 141. Plut. Solon 8. Id. an seni 
 sit ger. Resp. 4. Spec, the outer gar 
 ment ; Matt. 3, 4 ev8vp.a drro rpix<*>v Kap.fj- 
 Xou, the usual garment of the ancient pro 
 phets ; comp. 2K. 1,8. Zech. 13, 4. (Sept. 
 for 153 2 Sam. 20, 8 ; so Wisd. 18, 24.) 
 Also tfv8vp.a ydp-ov, a wedding garment, 
 Matt. 22, 11. 12, presented to guests in 
 token of honour, according to oriental cus 
 tom; comp. Gen. 45, 22. Judg. 14, 12 sq. 
 2 K. 5, 5. 22 sq. Trop. Matt. 7, 15 / eV 
 Su/zao-t 7rpo/3ar<j>, zn sheep s clothing, i. e. 
 externally with the meekness and gentle 
 ness of lambs. 
 
 , s>, f. O>O-G>, (8wa/io a>,) pr. 
 to strengthen in, i. e. to give strength, to 
 make strong; Pass, or Mid. to be made 
 strong, to acquire strength, to be strong; 
 spoken of the body, as made strong out of 
 weakness, Heb. 11, 34. Trop. of the mind, 
 the inner man, Acts 9, 22. Rom. 4, 20. 
 Eph. 6, 10. Phil. 4, 13. 1 Tim. 1, 12. 
 2 Tim. 2, 1. 4, 17. Sept. for ttS Ps. 52, 9. 
 Aquila for ^ Gen. 7, 20. 24. Act. Thorn. 
 10. Not found in the classics. 
 
 i ovv(i3, a secondary present form for 
 -8v<o q. v. Buttm. 5 114 8vco ; to go in, to 
 enter into ; once, els TO.S otKias 2 Tim. 3, 6. 
 Aristoph. Vesp. 1024. Hdot. 2. 121. 2. 
 Plato Tim. 62. b, els TUS . . . f8pas ev8vvai. 
 
 evovcri?, ecus, fj, (eVSvw,) a putting on, 
 wearing, e. g. of clothing, 1 Pet. 3, 3. 
 Athen. 550. d. 
 
 VOVW : f. vo-o), (Svw.) aor. 1 evedvtra ; 
 Pass. perf. ev8e8vp.ai, aor. 1 ev(8v%r]v ; Mid. 
 aor. 1 fvf8v<rdfjirjv ; see Buttm. 114 Suo>. 
 A secondary form fv8vva> see in its order. 
 To inwrap, to envelope ; hence 
 
 1 . to put on a garment, to clothe in ; Act. 
 c. dupl. ace. Matt. 27, 31 (ve8vo-av avrov TO. 
 Ifidna avTov. Mark 15, 17. 20. Luke 15, 
 22 ; ace. of pers. Matt. 27, 28 Lachm. for 
 (K8va> Rec. Sept. for 033-3 Gen. 41, 42. Ex. 
 29, 8. So Aristoph. Th esm. 1044. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 3. 3. Mid. to clothe oneself in, to 
 put on, to be clothed; c. ace. of thing, Matt. 
 6, 25 T I fv8vo-r]o-^f ; Mark 6, 9. Luke 12, 
 22. Acts 12. 21 ; so of armour, Rom. 13, 12 
 Kal eVSww/ieSa ra oVXa TOV (parroy. Eph. 6, 
 11. 14? 1 Thess. 5, 8. Sept. for Oinb Lev. 
 6, 3. 4 [10. 11]. So 1 Mace. 3, 3. * Plut. 
 Mor. II. p. 39. Xen. Cyr. 6. 4. 2. Part. 
 Pass. fv8t8vp.vos, clothed in, c. ace. Matt. 
 22, 1 1 OVK ev8e8v/j.fvov ev8v/jia ydp.ov. Mark 
 1.6. Rev. 1,13. 15,6. 19,14. Part. Mid. 
 
 2 Cor. 5, 3 etye KOI fv8vo-dfj.fvoi sc. TO OIK.TT] 
 piov TO e ovpavov, comp. in yvp.vos no. 2, and 
 ye no. 2. c. Sept. perf. part, for a5 iiab Dan. 
 10, 5. Zech. 3, 3. So Plut. Numa 13. 
 
 2. Trop. to put on, to be clothed in or with 
 any disposition of mind, any character or 
 condition ; so c. ace. of thing, Luke 24, 49 
 ecor oti ev8v<TT)<T%( 8vvap.iv e y-^rovs. 1 Cor. 
 15, 53 bis. 54 bis. Col. 3, 12 evo vo-ao- Se ovv 
 . . . o-TrXdy^z/a oiKTippov. Sept. for ttJab Ps. 
 93, 1. Job 29, 14. So Ecclus. 17^3. 
 With ace. of pers. Col. 3, 10 and Eph. 4, 
 24 eVSucrao-Sai TOV KO.IVOV tiiftpamov, to put 
 on the new man, assume a new life and 
 character. Gal. 3, 27 and Rom. 13, 14 eV 
 Suo-ao-5e TOV K. irjcrovv, put ye on the Lord 
 Jesus, implying the closest spiritual union 
 and likeness. So Dion. Hal. 11.5 TOV Tap- 
 KVVIOV fKfivov ev8v6p.evoi. Liban. Ep. 956 
 
 eVf8v TOV O~O(plO~TTjV. 
 
 eveopa. as, f], (eV, e8pa,~) a lying in wait. 
 in order to kill any one, Acts 25, 3 ; also 
 Acts 23, ] 6 in later editions for eve8pov Rec. 
 Pr. in war, ambush, Sept. for S1NB Josh. 
 8, 9. Pol. 4. 59. 3. Xen. Cyr. l.V! 23. 
 
 eveSpeva), f. evaco, (eVSpa,) to lie in 
 wait for, in order to kill, c. ace. Acts 23, 21. 
 Sept. for a-nx Deut. 19, 11. So Dem. 1011. 
 3. Pr. in war, to lie in ambush, Diod. Sic. 
 12. 47. Xen. An. 1. 6. 2. Trop. i. q. to 
 watch insidiously, in order to ensnare, c. 
 ace. Luke 11, 54. So Ecclus. 5, 14. Hdian. 
 3. 12. 18. 
 
 eveSpOV, ov, TO, (fveSpos,) i. q. eVe Spa, 
 a lying in wait, in order to kill. Acts 23, 16 
 Rec. where later editions have IvtSpa. Sept. 
 for a-nxo Judg. 9, 35. lMacc. 1, 36. 
 
 Vt\0), >, f. Tjcrw, (eiXw, fiXo), ei XXw,) 
 to roll up in, to wrap up in, c. ace. and with 
 dat. of instr. Mark 15, 46. Sept. for cflb 
 1 Sam. 21, 9. Artemid. 1. 13 or 14. Plut. 
 Symp. 4. 2. 2. 
 
 eveifit,^ f. evfo-ofj-ai, (e< /u,) to be in or at 
 a place, Pol. 4. 63. 2. Xen. An. 2.4. 21. 
 27 ; trop. to be in or with a person, as an 
 attribute, Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 28. Hence in 
 N. T. only in two forms. 
 
 1. Sing. 3 pers. eveo-Ti, there is in. 
 with, among ; but only in the shortened 
 form fvt, pr. the Ionic form of the prep. 
 (v, the verb itself being dropped, Buttm. 
 J 117. 3. 2. Winer 5 14. 2. n. Thus Gal. 
 3, 28 ter, OVK evi (eV Xpiorw) lov8aios ov8e 
 "EXX^i/ KrX. Col. 3, 11 OTTOU OVK e vi "EXX^v 
 KT\. James 1, 17 Trap w OVK evi TrapaXhayr) 
 KrX. Palaeph. 14. 1. Plato Crat. 412. c 
 also pr. Xen. An. 5. 3. 11 
 
eveica 
 
 253 
 
 2. Part. Plur. neut. ra (vovra, the 
 things within, what is within, pr. 1 Mace. 
 6, 5. Dem. 1113. 6. Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 7. 
 Hence Luke 11, 41 ir\r)v TO. fvovra Sore 
 f\erjfj.o(rvvr]v KT\. comp. v. 39 ; and for the 
 sense comp. the parall. passage, Matt. 23, 
 26. According to this latter we may here 
 render : but give what is (belongs) within 
 the cup and platter in alms (instead of 
 making the inside full of ravening and 
 wickedness) ; and behold, all things (inside 
 and outside) are clean unto you ; i. e. shew 
 forth works of mercy out of a sincere heart ; 
 so shall your outward life be pure, aside 
 from your ceremonial observances ; comp. 
 Hos. 6, 6. Luke 16, 9. James 1, 27. Others 
 assume irony, and regard our Lord as. ex 
 posing the perverse teachings of the Phari 
 sees : ye say, give your unjust gains in 
 alms ; and behold, all things are clean unto 
 you ; but against both the parallelism in 
 Matt. 1. c. and the probable fact that the 
 Pharisees would have said, not TO. (vovra, 
 but etc TO>V fvovraiv. Others render : (/cara) 
 Ta (vovra, according to what you have ; but 
 then too the more usual construction would 
 be tK TUIV (vovraiv, as Epict. Fragm. 108 
 f-tvois fieraSi Sou >cai TO IS Seopevois fK ruv 
 
 tVOVTUV. 
 
 eve/cci, oftener eveicev, poet, eiveicev, 
 (see Buttm. Q 1 17. 2. Kiihner 5 288. n,) prep. 
 c. genit. on account of, for the sake of, be 
 cause of ; soevtita Luke 6, 22. Acts 26, 21. 
 Rom. 8, 36 Rec. ftvenev Luke 4, 18 Grb. 
 2 Cor. 7, 12 ter; elsewhere evfKfv Matt. 
 5, 10. 11. 10, 18. 39. 16,25. 19,29. Mark 
 8, 35. 10, 29. 13, 9. Luke 9, 24. 18, 29. 
 21, 12. Acts 28,20. Rorn. 14, 20. 2 Cor. 
 3, 10 evKfv Tr,s VTT. o6vs, because of, by 
 reason of. Sept. for -a^ris Gen. 20, 11. 
 18. So Pol. 28. 9. 5. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 13. 
 Hence. evenfv T ov TO v, for this cause, there 
 fore, Matt. 19, 5. Mark 10, 7. Acts 26, 21 ; 
 ov fivfxev, for which cause, wherefore, Luke 
 4, 18 ; TWOS fv(ica,for what cause, wherefore, 
 Acts 19, 32. So flveKtv TOV before an 
 infin. 2 Cor. 7, 12 elvfKtv TOV <pavfpu>^ijvai, 
 in order that. But TOV c. infin. as marking 
 purpose, often occurs without ZveKa, which 
 some then unnecessarily supply ; see Buttm. 
 $ 140. n. 10. J 130. 4. Kiihner 308. 2. b. 
 
 6I/6O9, see evveos. 
 
 evepyeia, as, 17, (eVepy?;?,) a working, 
 operation, energy; Eph. 1, 19. 3, 7. 4, 16. 
 Col. 1, 29. Spec, as manifested in mighty 
 works, miracles; e. g. of God, Phil. 3, 21. 
 Col. 2, 12 ; of Satan 2 Thess. 2, 9. 11 eVp- 
 ytiav Tr\uvT]s, a mighty working of delusion, 
 
 referring to v. 9. Wisd. 7, 26. Pol. 1. 57. 
 2. Plut. de Tranq. animi 19. 
 
 eVepyeo), &, f. TJO-W, (eVtpyjjs,) pr. to be 
 at work, i. e. to work, to do, to be active, e. g. 
 
 1. Intrans. Matt. 14, 2 et Mark 6, 14 at 
 8vvdp.(is fvepyovcriv tv avrai. Eph. 1,20 rjv 
 (fvepyeiav) tvepyrjaev ev T<B Xp. which (work 
 ing) he wrought ; see Buttm. 131. 4. Eph. 
 2, 2. Phil. 2, 13 TO evepyelv. So c. dat 
 of pers. in or for whom ; Gal. 2, 8 bis, 6 
 evfpyrjcras HeVpoj fls eV^pyjycre KOI e/ioi 
 els TO. eZvrj, comp. v. 7. Sept. c. dat. yw>j 
 dv8peia evepyel TO> dvSpl els dyaSa, for ?t!5 5 
 Prov. 31, 12. Wisd. 16, 17. Pol. 4. 40^4. 
 Diod. Sic. 4. 38. 
 
 2. Trans, to work, to do, to produce, to 
 effect, of persons ; c. ace. 1 Cor. 12, 6 tvep- 
 yuv TfnrdvTa.. v. 11. Gal. 3, 5. Eph. 1, 11. 
 Phil. 2. 13 6 fvepyvv ev Tjp.lv TO Se Aeiv 
 KT\. Sept. for b?B Is. 41, 4. Jos. B. J. 4. 
 6. 1. Diod. Sic."l3. 95 ult. Pol. 17. 14. 8. 
 
 3. Mid. to show oneself at work, active, 
 i. e. to work, to be active, intrans. spoken 
 only of things, Winer 39. 6 ult. Rom. 7, 
 5 evfpyeiTo ev TOIS p.t\fcriv fjp.u>v. 2 Cor. 1, 
 6. 4, 12. Gal. 5,6. Eph. 3, 20. Col. 1, 29. 
 1 Thess. 2, 13. 2 Thess. 2, 7. So Pol. 9. 13. 
 9. Part. evfpyovp.evos inworking, be 
 ing in work, in exercise, activity, operative, 
 effective, James 5, 16 Sena-is eWpyou/ie wj. 
 
 Vepyrj/jia, OTOS, TO, (eVepyew,) pr. what 
 is wrought, i. e. effect produced, operation ; 
 1 Cor. 12, 6. V. 10 fVfpyrjp-aTa 8vi>dp.(a>v, 
 operations of miracles, i. e. miraculous ef 
 fects, the gift of working miracles. Pol. 2. 
 42. 7. Diod. Sic. 4. 51 pen. 
 
 evepyrj?, fos, ovs, 6, 17, adj. (ev, epyoi/,) 
 pr. at work, i. e. working, operative, active, 
 effective, Heb. 4, 12. 1 Cor. 16, 9 3vpa pot. 
 dvfayf fjL(yd\r) KOI evfpyfjs, effective, pre 
 senting opportunity for great effects. Phi- 
 lem. 6. Isocr. p. 282. c. Pol. 2. 65. 12. 
 Diod. Sic. 17. 85. 
 
 6ve<TT(i)$, see 
 
 evevXoyew, , f. TJO-CO, (eiXoye co,) to bless 
 in or through any one ; in N. T. only Pass. 
 with (v c. dat. Acts 3, 25 ev TW <nripp.a.T 
 <TOV tvv\oy. Tra(TM at Trarpial. Gal. 3, 8 
 Grb. See in fv no. 3. d. a ; comp. Gen. 12, 
 3. 18, 18. 26, 4. 28, 14, where Sept. for 
 3 r^3, as also Ps. 72, 17. 
 
 ve%&), f. o>, (ex 40 )) to have or hold in, 
 within, viz. 
 
 1. to hare in oneself a disposition of mind 
 towards a person or thing, e. g. favourable, 
 Jambl. Vit. Pyth. 6 eV^wf [vovv] irpos TO 
 iv. In N. T. unfavourable, c. dat. 
 
evvoia 
 
 Mark 6, 19 HpcoStas eVei^ei/ [^oXov] airw. 
 Luke 11,53 Sfivtas eW^etv, to />e very angry, 
 Sept. for C-J iJ Gen. 49, 23. Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 682 eW^ " r< ? lao ijc/). Hesych. 
 fvel^ov eftoXovv, <apyiovTO. In full, Hdot. 
 
 1.118 KpVJTTUlV TOV 01 tftljftf ^oXol . 6. 1 19 
 
 cvei^c crfpi Seivw xoXov. 
 
 2. Pass, fve%ofj.ai, to be held in or by 
 any thing ; trop. to be entangled in. subject 
 to, c. dat. Gal. 5, 1 juij itakiv fwy<a SouXe/as 
 eV/xfo-Sf. Hdot. 2. 121. 2. Plut. Symp. 2. 
 3. 1 eV^ecrSai Sdy/iaa-tz/. Plato Grit. 52. a. 
 
 ez/^ooe, adv. demonstr. of place ; a 
 strengthened form foreVSa, Buttm. 116. 7. 
 
 1. Place where, here, in this place, Luke 
 
 24, 41. Acts 10, 18. 16, 28. 17, 6. 25, 24. 
 Arr. Epict. 1. 29. 44. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 
 9, 17. 
 
 2. Place whither, hither, to this place, 
 after verbs of motion, as in Engl. come here ; 
 Buttm. Ausf. Sprachl. 116. n. 24. Kiihner 
 Ausf. Gr. 5 571. n. 3. John 4, 15. 16. Acts 
 
 25, 17. Horn. Tl. 1. 367. Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 8. 
 Xen. Hell. 1. 7. 16. 
 
 adv. demonstr. (eV) Buttm. $ 116. 
 6, hence, from this place; Matt. 17, 20 and 
 Luke 16, 26, for eVrev3ei> in Rec. Horn. 
 Od. 6. 6. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 48. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 2. 2. 
 
 eifevfJ,eo/J,cu, ovpai, f. jjo-o/xat, Pass, de- 
 pon. (ei>, Su/io s,) Pass. aor. 1 part. fv^vp.rj- 
 3 s with Mid. signif. Buttm. } 113. n. 5 ; to 
 have in mind, to revolve in mind, to think up 
 on, c. ace. Matt. 1, 20. 9, 4; with irepi c. 
 gen. Acts 10, 19 Rec. where later edit. 
 8iei>3v/ae o/wu. So c. ace. Wisd. 3, 14. Luc. 
 Nero 2. Xen. Mem. 1. 7. 2 ; c. Trept Wisd. 
 6, 15. Plato Rep. 595. a. 
 
 , ea>s,f], (eVSu/i/o/iat,) thought, 
 cogitation, Matt. 9, 4. 12, 25. Heb. 4, 12. 
 So Luc. de Salt. 81. Thuc. 1. 132. Spec. 
 a thinking out, invention, device, Acts 17, 
 29. 
 
 VL for eVeort, see eVet/u. 
 
 eviavTOS, ov, 6, a year, John 11,49. 51. 
 18, 13. Acts 11, 26. 18, 11. Gal. 4, 10. 
 Heb. 9, 7. 25. 10, 1. 3. James 4, 13. 5, 17. 
 Rev. 9,15. Sept. for nati Gen. 17,21. Ex. 
 12, 2. al. So Hdian. 2. 7. 15. Xen. Ath. 3. 
 4. By Hebr. put for any definite time, an 
 era; Luke 4, 19 eVtauroi Kvpiov SCKTOV, 
 quoted from Is. 61, 2, where Sept. for"!32J. 
 
 evia-TrjfjLi, f. o-njo-co, (to-n^t,) in N. T. 
 only fut. Mid. eWr^o-o/icH 2 Tim. 3, 1 ; perf. 
 Act. fveo-TTjKa 2 Thess. 2, 2 ; part. eVecrr^- 
 iriy Heb. 9, 9, elsewhere contr. *Ve<rrcor 
 
 Buttm. 5 110. 10; intrans. to stand in or 
 upon, Buttm. $ 107. m. 21 __ In N. T. trop. 
 to stand near, i. e. to be at hand, to impend, 
 2 Thess. 2, 2. 2 Tim. 3, 1. (So 2 Mace. 
 4, 43. Pol. 2. 28. 9. Dem. 255. 9.) Part. 
 perf. eve err cos, instant, present, Rom. 8, 
 38 oure eVecrrcora, oi re /ie XXoi/ra. 1 Cor. 3, 
 22. 7,26. Gal. 1,4; not contr. Heb. 9, 9 
 TOV Kaipbv roi> fvecrrnKOTa. So contr. Jos. 
 16. 6. 2. Plato Legg. 878. b; not contr. 
 ^Eschin. 35. 27. Xen. Hell. 2. 1. 6. 
 
 j f. v<ra>, (tV^vo),) to be strong 
 in or by any thing, e. g. 
 
 1 Pr. i. q. to be strengthened in or by; 
 Acts 9, 19 XajScov rpo(pr]v evltrxva-fv, having 
 taken food he was thereby strengthened. 
 Sept. for pm 2 Sam. 16,21. Dan. 11, 5. 
 Theophr. de caus. PI. 5. 9. 3. Trop. Diod. 
 Sic. 5. 28 fvicrxvfi Trap avrois 6 IluSayopou 
 Xdyoy. 
 
 2. Trans, and causat. only in Sept. and 
 N. T. to make strong, to strengthen, c. ace. 
 Luke 22, 43 ayyeXor . . . evi(rxv<ioi> avrov 
 So Sept. for pm Dan. 10, 18. Judg. 3, 12 ; 
 "^N 2 Sam. 22, 40. On the causative sig 
 nif. see Buttm. J 113. 2, and n. 1. 
 
 evvaros, 77, ov, ord. adj. (e zWa,) the ninth, 
 Rev. 21, 20. Elsewhere only rj >pa f) Iwarrj, 
 the ninth hour, i. e. in the Jewish mode of 
 reckoning, i. q. 3 o clock P. M. the hour of 
 evening sacrifice and prayer (see Acts 3, 1), 
 Matt. 20, 5. 27, 45. 46. Mark 15, 33. 34. 
 Luke 2:-!. 44. Acts 3, 1. 10, 3. 30. Some 
 Mss. read tvaros in Matt. 20, 5. Acts 10, 
 30 ; see Winer $5. 1, note b. 
 
 evvea, ol, al, TO, card. num. nine, Luke 
 17, 17. See the next article. 
 
 evvevriKovraevvea, O f, at, ra, ninety- 
 nine, Matt. 18, 12. 13. Luke 15, 4. 7. Some 
 Mss. and Lachm. read eVei^/coira twea, 
 which is better ; Winer \ 5. 1, note b. Buttm. 
 Ausf. Sprachl. } 70. 4, marg. 
 
 evveos, a, 6v, better eveof, Winer 5. 1, 
 note b, (prob. i. q. iivecos from aco, av co,) 
 speechless, dumb, with amazement, Acts 9-, 
 7 ; comp. 22, 9. Pr. dumb by nature, also 
 a deaf-mute, Sept. for C&N Is. 56, 10. Jos. 
 Ant. 4. 8. 32. Aristot. H. A. 4. 9. 16. Xen. 
 An. 4. 5. 33. 
 
 VVVO), f. eva-fo, (i/euco,) to nod or wink 
 towards any one, Lat. innuo, i. e. to make 
 signs with the head or eyes ; c. dat. of pers. 
 Luke 1, 62. Sept. e wevet o(^3aX^ic3 for 
 PE Prov. 6, 13. 10, 10. Luc. D.Meretr. 
 12. 1. ed. Jacobitz. 
 
 evvoia, as, 17, (eV, vovs,) pr. what is in 
 the mind, e. g. a thought, idea, notion, Diog. 
 
255 
 
 Laert. 3. 79 emua /caXoO. Pol. 1. 15. 13. 
 In N. T. thought, intent, purpose, Heb. 4, 
 12. 1 Pet. 4, 1. Sept. for fiata Prov. 3, 
 21 ; comp. 23, 19. So Susann. 28. Isocr. 
 112. d. Xen. Cyr. 1. 1. 1. 
 
 ewo/z,09, ou, 6, 17, adj. (eV, i/u/ior.) pr. 
 within (lie law, i. e. 
 
 1. Of things, lawful, legal, Acts 19, 39 
 iv rf) twofjua eKKhrjcria. Lucian. Cone. Deor. 
 14 fKK\r)crias fvvop.ov dyop.(ir)s. Pol. 2. 47. 
 3. Plato Legg. 932. a. 
 
 2. Of persons, under law, subject to law, 
 1 Cor. 9, 21 tvvopos Xptorw. Plato Rep. 
 424. e. 
 
 evvvxps, ov, 6, 17, adj. (V, a<,) in the 
 night, nocturnal, Horn. II. 11. 715. Eurip. 
 Hec. 72. In N. T. Neut. fvvv-^ov, adv. 
 in the night, by night, Buttm. {115. 4. 
 Mark 1, 35 TT/J&H fi>wx.ov Xiav, very early ) 
 yet in the night, i. q. opSpou ;3a3eoy Luke 
 
 24, 1. So 3 Mace. 5, 5. 
 
 evoi/ceaj, >, f. jjcrw, (oiVV) to dwell in, 
 to inhabit, c. c. eV, Sept. for 3 ^ Jer. 49, 1. 
 Xen. CEc. 4. 13. In N. T. trop. to dwell 
 in or with any one, to be in or with, foil, by 
 iv c. dat. and spoken of the indwelling of 
 the Holy Spirit in Christians, Rom. 8, 11. 
 2 Tim. 1, 14; of the divine presence and 
 blessing, 2 Cor. 6, 16 ; comp. 1 Cor. 3, 16. 
 Ex. 29, 45. Ez. 37, 27. Also of f] iri<ms 
 2 Tim. 1, 5; 6 Xoyoj rov Xp. Col. 3, 16. 
 So Jos. B. J. 6. 1. 6. Plato Rep. 540. b. 
 
 evovra. T d, see eWt/u. % -; 
 
 evop/CL^o), f. t o-oj, (6p/aco.) to swear in, 
 to adjure, c. dupl. ace. 1 Thess. 5, 27 Lachm. 
 for Rec. opidfa q. v. 
 
 ewT7?9, TTji-oy, 17, (els,} oneness, unity, 
 Eph. 4, 3. 13. Test. XII Patr. p. 642. 
 Pint, de Amicor. mult. 5. Id. de Def. Orac. 
 13. p. 152. 
 
 evO^Xed), &>, f. JJCTCO, (o^Xf co, o^Xoj,) to 
 excite a crowd or tumult in ; hence genr. 
 to disturb, to trouble, e. g. a person or a 
 community ; absol. Heb. 12, 15. Xen. Cyr. 
 8. 3. 9 ; c. ace. 1 Esdr. 2, 22. 29. Pol. 2. 
 
 25. 6. Xen. Mem. 3. 8. 2. 
 
 evo%p<;, ov, 6, fj, adj. (eVe ^o/wu,) i. q. 
 fVf^op-fvos, pr. held in, contained in. fastened 
 in or on any thing, Anth. Gr. I. p. 179 eV 
 dykvprjs fvoxovftdpos. Usually and in N. T. 
 trop. 
 
 1 . held or bound by, liable to, subject to, 
 mostly c. dat. but sometimes c. gen. Matth. 
 370. n. 4. So c. dat. of a tribunal, by me- 
 ton. for the punishment inflicted by that tri 
 bunal ; Matt. 5.21. 22 bis, tvo-^oy TJJ Kpicrei, 
 ro> orvpfdpio). Sept. fvo\os TW Sdwna for 
 
 nis Gen. 26, 11. (^Eschin. 2. 36 
 tvo%. rw v6p.a>. Pol. 12. 14. 1. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 2. 64 eW^. rfi ypcxpf/.) Once with els 
 C. ace. Matt. 5, 22 IW^oy eiy rr/v yetvi^av, 
 for (vo^os ^aXXeo3a^ els rf/v ytfvvav, comp. 
 Num. 35, 31 tvo^os dvaipe^vai. ; see in els 
 no. 1. a. Winer 31. 2. With a genit. 
 Heb. 2, 15 fvoxoi 8ov\flas, Engl. subjects of 
 bondage. So of punishment, evo^os Savarou, 
 a subject of death, i. e. guilty of (unto) death, 
 Matt. 26, 66. Mark 14, 64; ei/o^os alutv. 
 Kpio-eas Mark 3,29. So Dem. 1229. 11 
 
 2. Spec, liable to be charged with, i. e. 
 guilty of any thing; c. gen. 1 Cor. 11, 27 
 evo^os roii <ro>/x. K. rov cup. rov Kvpiov. 
 James 2, 10 ndvrcav fvo^os. 2 Mace. 13, 6. 
 Philo de Joseph, p. 558 rrjs K\OTTTJS eW^o?. 
 Lys. 520. 10. Lycurg. 239. 12 eVo^oy TTJS 
 irpoSoo-ias. Plato Legg. 914. e. 
 
 TOS, TO, (eWe XXopat,) a com 
 mandment, precept, i. q. eVroX^, Matt. 15, 9. 
 Mark 7, 7. Col. 2, 22. Sept. for n^a Job 
 
 23, 12. Is. 29, 13. 
 
 eVTa<f)ld%(O, f. da-w, (evrdfpios, rdfpos, ) 
 to swathe in the eVracpta, to prepare for bu 
 rial, e. g. by swathing in bandages with 
 spices (see John 19, 40. Acts 5, 6) ; c. ace. 
 Matt. 26, 12. John 19, 40. Sept. for a?n 
 Gen. 50, 2. 3. Test. XII Patr. p. 619 p0- 
 deis IJLC fvrafpidcrr) TroXvreXel eVibJjrt KT\. 
 Plut. Dion 44. Id. de esu Cam. ,J. 5 ult. 
 
 evrafaacr/jLos, ov, 6, (eWa^tafco,) burial, 
 i. e. preparation for burial, a swathing, em 
 balming, Mark 14, 8. John 12, 7. Not 
 found in Gr. writers. 
 
 VTe\\o/jiai, f. rt\ovfj.aL, Mid. depon. 
 (re XXw,) Pass. perf. tWeroXpai with Mid. 
 signif. Acts 13, 47. Hdian. 1. 9. 23. Buttm. 
 136. 3. Pr. to make arise in any one; 
 hence, to enjoin, to command ; absol. Matt. 
 15, 4 6 yap Seoy e jrreiXaro Xtycov. Mark 11, 
 6 ; c. dat. of pers. Matt. 17, 9. John 14, 31. 
 Acts 1,2. 13, 47 ; dat. of pers. and ace. of 
 thing, Matt. 28, 20 oa-a eVeretXa/iqj vp.lv. 
 Mark 10, 3. John 15, 14. 17 ; dat. of pers. 
 and Trepi nvos Matt. 4, 6 and Luke 4, 10, 
 quoted from Sept. Ps. 91,11; dat. of pers. and 
 infin. John 8, 5 ; dat. of pers. and Iva Mark 
 13, 34 ; also c. Trepi TWOS simpl. Hebr. 11, 
 22; infin. simpl. Matt. 19, 7, comp. Deut. 
 
 24, 1. Sept. for njS Gen. 2, 16. 21, 4. al. 
 So c. dat. of pers. Plato Charm. 157. b ; 
 dat et ace. Hdian. 3. 12. 5; dat. et inf. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 12 ; va Jos. Ant. 8. 14. 2. 
 By Hebr. Heb. 9, 20 8i^Kns TJS (V) 
 evtrtiXaro irpos vfjids 6 Seor, which God en 
 joined upon you, quoted from Ex. 24, 8 
 
evreifeev 
 
 where Sept. Sia3. rjs SteSero irpbs v 
 for Heb. 03533 PH3 ; but elsewhere Sept. 
 often Hiia%r)Kr)v fverfiXaro vfuv for Heb. 
 
 eenx rvn:: nis, e . g. Deut. 4, 13. Josh. 
 
 23/16. 
 
 evrev^sev, adv. strengthened from ev^ev, 
 Buttm. ^ 116. 7 ; hence, thence, from this or 
 that place, Matt. 17, 20. Luke 4, 9. 13, 31. 
 16, 26 Rec. John 2, 16. 7, 3. 14, 31. 18, 
 
 36. (Palzeph. 21. 1. Xen. An. 1. 2. 7 ; 10, 
 11. al.) So evrev^fv Kal evrev Sfv, hence 
 and hence, on this side and that side, on 
 each side, John 19, 18. Rev. 22, 2. Sept. 
 for n-rai rura Num. 22, 24; nsni nsn 
 Dan. 12, 5. Trop. of the cause or source, 
 hence, James 4, 1. So Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 18. 
 Hdian. 2. 10. 13. 
 
 VTVJ;lS, eco?, rj, (fvrvyxdva*, ) pr. a fall 
 ing in with, meeting with, JE\. V. H. 4. 20. 
 Plato Polit. 298. c ; a colloquy, audience, 
 jEschin. 34. 19. Pol. 16. 21.8; petition, 
 Jos. Ant. 15. 3. 8. Diod. Sic. 16. 55. 
 Hence in N. T. entreaty, prayer, sc. to God, 
 
 1 Tim. 2, 1. 4, 5. So Plut. Numa 14 pen 
 ult. TroteicrSat ras Trpbs TO Sleioz evrev^eis- 
 
 evT(yU,09, ou, 6, T], adj. (lv, Tipr],) pr. in 
 honour, i. e. 
 
 1. Of persons, honoured, estimable, dear, 
 Luke 7, 2. 14, 8. Phil. 2, 29. Sept. for 
 fi-nh Neh. 2, 16. 4, 14 ; ^333 Num. 22, 15. 
 --Hdian. 2. 1. 10. Xen. Cyr! 8. 2. 4. 
 
 2. Of things, precious, costly, e. g. a 
 stone, trop. 1 Pet. 2, 4. 6 ; comp. Is. 28, 16 
 where Sept. for ipv Dem. 1285. 18. 
 
 evToX.71, ijj, 77, (e l/re XXo/wu,) a?i injunc 
 tion, command, i. e. 
 
 1. Pr. of a specific command, charge, di 
 rection; John 10, 18 evroKrjv fXajBov trapa rov 
 irarpos. 12, 49. 50. Acts 17, 15. Col. 4, 10. 
 Heb. 7, 5. al. Sept. for njsa 2 K. 18, 36. 
 
 2 Chr. 8, 15. (Hdian. 3. 5. 8". Xen. Cyr. 
 2. 4. 30.) Spec, of a public charge, edict, 
 from magistrates, John 11, 57. Sept. for 
 fttxn 2 Chr. 35, 16. 
 
 2. Genr. precept, commandment, laic ; 
 e. g. a) The traditions of the Rabbins, 
 Tit. 1,14. b) The precepts and teaching 
 of Jesus, John 13, 34. 15, 12. 1 Cor. 14, 
 
 37. 1 John 2, 8. al. c) The precepts and 
 commandments of God, in general, 1 Cor. 
 7, 19. 1 John 3, 22. 23. al. Sept. and fTlXtt 
 Deut. 4, 2. 40. al. ssep. d) The precepts 
 of the Mosaic law, in whole or in part, 
 Matt. 5, 19. 19, 17. 22, 36. 38. 40. Mark 
 10, 5. 19. Rom. 7, 8 sq. al. e) Genr. and 
 collect, f] ftroXrj, T] fi>ro\T) 3foO, put either 
 for the law, the Mosaic law, Matt. 15, 3. 6. 
 
 256 
 
 Mark 7, 8. 9. Luke 23, 56; (Sept. foi 
 rniti 2 K. 21, 8. 2 Chr. 12, 1 ;) or, foi 
 precepts given to Christians, embracing 
 Christian doctrines and duties, 1 Tim. 6, 14. 
 2 Pet. 2, 21. 3, 2. + 
 
 ez/T07T09, ov, 6, TJ, adj. (eV, rorroy,) pr. 
 in or of a place, i. e. a resident, an in 
 habitant, Acts 21, 12. Porphyr. de Abst. 
 1. 14. Soph. (Ed. Col. 843. Plato Phaedr. 
 262. d. 
 
 vros, adv. (e i/,) in, within ; also as prep, 
 c. gen. Luke 17, 21 rj /SatrtXet a rov Sect) 
 evros vp.uv fa-Tiv, the kingdom of God is 
 within you, i. e. its seat is in your heart and 
 affections, not external. So TO ei>Tos,the 
 inside, Matt. 23, 26. Buttm. 125. 6, 7. 
 Sept. for 3-if?a Ps. 39, 4. 109, 22. Luc. 
 D. Deor. 14. 5 TO tiros. Hdian. 2. 5. 15. 
 Plato Soph. 226. e. 
 
 evrpeTTO), f. ^co, (rpeVa,) Lat. inverlo, 
 to turn about, e. g. TCI vara Hdot. 7. 211 ; 
 to turn back, Diog. Laert. Socr. 11. 29. 
 Trop. to turn about, to bring back to one s 
 senses, i. q. to move, to make ashamed, ^El. 
 V. H. 3. 17 pen. Horn. II. 15.554. Hence 
 in N. T. 
 
 1. to shame, to put to shame, c. ace. 
 1 Cor. 4, 14 OVK eVrpeTrtoi/ -upas ypd(f>(i) 
 Tavra. Pass. 2 Thess. 3, 14. Tit. 2, 8. 
 Sept. for ntn Ps. 35, 26. 40, 15. Ecclus. 
 4, 25. Plut. Vit. Horn. 167 TOVS TroXXovs 
 eVrpeVm. 
 
 2. Mid. evrpeTTop-at, to turn oneself 
 towards any one, i. e. to heed, to respect, to 
 reverence; in N. T. and in late writers c. 
 accus. Matt. 21, 37 et Mark 12, 6 eWpaTrjj- 
 o-oi Tat TOV vlov pov, i. e. Pass, with Mid. 
 signif. comp. Buttm. 136. 2. Luke 18, 2. 
 4. 20, 13. Heb. 12, 9. Wisd. 2,10. Diod. 
 Sic. 19. 7 ou Seoiiy eWpeTrd/xei/oi. Plut. In- 
 stit. Lacon. 10. Earlier c. gen. Plato Grit. 
 52. c. Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 33. 
 
 evrpetfxt), f. eVs/je-v^w, (rpe^co,) to nou 
 rish or bring up in a place, Eurip. Phcen. 
 379. In N. T. trop. to nourish or train up 
 in any thing ; Pass. c. dat. 1 Tim. 4, 6 eV 
 Tpefpopfvos TOLS \6yois. So Philo de Alleg. 
 p. 59 rats dpfTais evrp. Hdian. 5. 3. 5. 
 Plato Legg. 798. a, eVrp. vopois. See Lres- 
 ner Obss. e Phil. p. 399. 
 
 VTpo/jiOS, ov, 6, f], adj. (eV, rpop.os, ) pr. 
 in trembling, i. e. trembling with fear, ter 
 rified; hence evrpo^os yivopai v. /*/, i. q 
 to tremble, Acts 7, 32. 16, 29. Heb. 12, 21 
 Sept. for Ti"ia Dan. 10, 11. 1 Mace. 13, 
 2. Plut. Fab! Max. 3 ; genr. Anth. Gr. L 
 p. 23. p. 211. 
 
257 
 
 evrpOTrrj, ij f , q, (eVrpeVa>,) rcspecl, re 
 verence, Soph. (Eil. Col. 299. In N. T. 
 shame, a putting to shame ; 1 Cor. 6, 5 
 jrpos eVrp. vp.lv Xtyco. 15, 34. Sept. for 
 nb3 Ps. 35, 26. 69, 8. 20. 
 
 CVTpV(f)Wi), o>, f. ijo-w, (Tpvcpda), ) to live 
 delicately, to indulge in, to revel in, e. g. tv 
 Tais (Unarms avrStv, revelling in their own 
 frauds, 2 Pet. 2, 13 ; where some Mss. and 
 Lachm. road eV TOIS dydwais avrvv. Sept. for 
 5?snn Is. 55, 2. So c. dat. Hdian. 2. 3. 22. 
 Diod. Sic. 19. 71. 
 
 , f. Ti>{-opMi, (rvyxciixa,) to 
 hit or light upon, to fall in with, Xen. An. 
 4. 5. 19 ; to meet and talk with, Xen. Mem. 
 
 3. 2. 1. ib. 3. 6. 2. Hence in N. T. to 
 apply to, to deal with, to entreat, c. dat. 
 Acts 25, 24 Kfpl ov irdv TO TrXrjSoy (vtrvxdv 
 P.OI. So 2 Mace. 4, 36. ^El. V. H. 1. 21. 
 Plut. Pomp. 55. Pol. 4. 30. 1. Spec, to 
 entreat for or against, to make intercession, 
 e. g. a) For any one, c. dat. impl. et vrrep 
 TWOS, Rom. 8, 27 on Kara %ebi> evrvyxdvei 
 inrep dyicav. v. 34. Heb. 7, 25. So Jos. Ant. 
 14. 10. 13. Plut. de Alex. Virt. 2. 2. b) 
 Against any one, i. q. to complain of; c. 
 dat. et KdTa TWOS, Rom. 11,2 a>s evrvyxdvei 
 TW 3f<a Kara TOV lo-paijX. So 1 Mace. 10, 
 61. 63. 
 
 etTfXtcrcra) V. -TT6), f. co, (rvXio-trw,) 
 <rt ro/Z i/p i?z, to inwrap, c. ace. et dat. Matt. 
 27, 59 cvfTv\ifv OVTO a-d/SaVi. Luke 23, 
 53. Also to wrap or fold together, John 20, 
 7. Aristoph. Plut. 692. 
 
 ei/TUTTOO), , f. a>o-co, (rvTnJco,) /o enstamp, 
 to engrave, Pass. 2 Cor. 3, 7 fWerwrcojuej^ 
 VXi3oir. Aristot. deMund. 6. Plut. Symp. 
 
 4. 6. 2. 
 
 evvfipifo, f. iVco, (v/3pico,) to Jo despite 
 to or lipon any one, to insult, to outrage, c. 
 ace. Heb. 10, 29 TO irt>fvp.a Ttjs xapiToy eVu- 
 Ppiaas. So c. ace. Jos. Ant. 5. 8. 12 ; c. 
 dat. Hdian. 8. 5. 3. Pol. 10. 26. 3. 
 
 evvTTVid^o/J-ai, Pass, and Mid. depon. 
 (ewTTviov.) to dream ; either c. dat. of man 
 ner intenn. Acts 2, 1,7 bnmnots fwrrvtaa-^r]- 
 o-ovrai ; or as in Rec. c. ace. of the kindred 
 noun, fjnnrvia (WTrviaaZiio-ovTai, as quoted 
 from Sept. Joel 2, 28 where Sept. for cbn ; 
 comp. Butt. ^ 131. 4. Trop. Part, (wnvia- 
 up.(voi, dreamers, i. e. holding vain and 
 empty opinions, deceivers, Jude 8. Sept. 
 genr. for cbn Gen. 28, 11. Judg. 7, 13. 
 Absol. Plut. Cato Maj. 23 ult. Id. Brut. 24. 
 Act. fwnvtafa id. Aristot. H. An. 4. 10. 
 
 evvTTVlOV, lov, TO, (tv, vTTTOf.) pr. what 
 is seen in sleep ; hence a dream, a vision 
 17 
 
 in sleep, Acts 2, 17 ; see in fvvm>idop,Ht. 
 jEl. V. H. 3. 11. Plut. de Def. Orac. 50. 
 Xen. Conv. 4. 48. 
 
 lov, 6, T), Neut. eeoTTtoi/, ( e V, 
 <i\^,) in one s presence, face to face, Sept. Ex. 
 33, 11. Theocr. 22. 152. In N. T. only 
 Neut. fvanriov as adv. or rather as prep. 
 c. genit. in the presence of, before ; comp. 
 Buttm. ^ 146. 2, 3. Sept. every where for 
 ijab, 13153 ; in N. T. used chiefly by Luke, 
 Paul, and in the Apocalypse ; not found in 
 Matt, and Mark. 
 
 1. Pr. of place, e. g. in reference to 
 things, as eVwTrtop TOV 3poi/ov, before, in front 
 of, Rev. 1, 4. 4, 5. 6. 10. 7, 9. 11. 15. al. 
 Sept. and TJSb Josh. 6, 4. 1 Sam. 5, 3. 
 Elsewhere in reference to persons, before, 
 in the presence of, in the sight of; Luke 1, 
 17 TrpoeAevcrerai tvutmov avrov, as a herald, 
 i. q. TTjOo TrpcxrcoTTov O.VTOV in Mark 1, 2. 
 Luke 1,19 ra/SptijX, p Trapto-rrjKats fva 
 TOV Sfou, comp. in dp^ayyeXoy. So 
 vflv (TTiTTTeiv) (vunriov TWOS, to prostrate one 
 self before any one, Luke 4, 7. Rev. 3, 9. 4, 
 10. 5, 8. 15, 4. (Sept. for TJria Ps. 22, 30.) 
 Acts 9, 15 fvairiov tevwv KT\. Luke 13, 26 
 e(j)dyop.fi> fvunriov o~ov, see in e crS/w no. 2. d. 
 Luke 5, 18. 25. Acts 6, 6. 10,4. 31. al. Sept. 
 for "inra Ez. 15, 26. Jer.7,10; SBb Lev. 
 4, 4. Num. 17. 10. Plut. Probl. Rom. K al TO 
 fi> V7rai3po), /iaXtora TTW? tlvai 8oKfl TOV Aios 
 
 2. Implying manner, and espec. the sin 
 cerity in which any thing is done ; evn-mov 
 TOV 3eoC, 7?i the sight of God, i. e. God being 
 present and witness, Rom. 14, 22. 2 Cor. 
 
 4, 2. 7, 12. Comp. Sept. and ^Sb 1 Sam. 
 12, 7. 23, 18. So in obtestations, before 
 God, God being witness, Gal. 1,20. 1 Tim. 
 
 5, 21. 6, 13. 2 Tim. 2, 14. 4, 1. 
 
 3. Trop. in the sight of, i. e. in the view 
 or judgment of any one ; Luke 1, 6 OLKMOL 
 evunriov TOV 3eou. v. 15 p.eyas tvannov Kvpiov. 
 V. 75. 15, 18. 21 rjp.apTov eVcoTTiov crov. (Sept. 
 and "VSSb i Sam. 20, 1.) Luke 16, 15 8iKai- 
 ovvTfs tavTOvs evomiov dv%pu>7Ta>v. Acts 8, 
 21. Rom. 12, 17. 2 Cor. 8, 21. al. Sept. 
 and T?3 Deut. 4, 25. 1 K. 11, 33. 38. al. 
 "SSb Neh. 9, 28. Ps. 5, 9. From the Heb. 
 eVcoTnov TWOS, where Greek writers usually 
 put the dative ; e. g. Luke 15, 10 xpa yi- 
 t>(Tcii tvunnov TO>V ayyeXwi , for ^. yiv. TO!S 
 dyyt\ois, i- e. there is joy TO the angels, they 
 rejoice. 24, 1 1 ((pavrjcrav fVoorrtoc avTtav 
 wo-f I XJjpoj, i. e. seemed to them. Acts 6. 5 
 f/pfo-fv 6 Xoyoj tvuTtiov iraiTos KT\. i. e. was 
 pleasing to all. (Sept. and T^a Num. 13. 
 34. Deut. 1, 23.) Also in the phrase eupi- 
 
258 
 
 cncci) X"*P lv fvaniov TWOS, to find favour in 
 the sight of any one, Acts 7, 46 ; elsewhere 
 rrapd TIW, Luke 1, 30. Sept. for "^53 Ex. 
 33, 13. 17. Num. 11, 11. + 
 
 .Ez/ci>9, 6, indec. Enos, Heb. ^13X (man), 
 pr. n. of a man, Luke 3, 38 ; comp. Gen. 
 4, 26. 
 
 f. t o-o/iat, Mid. depon. (eV, 
 ovs COTO J,) to take in loiih the ear, i. e. to give 
 ear, lo hearken, c. ace. Acts 2, 14. Sept for 
 ptxfi Gen. 4, 22; a^RH Jer. 8, 6. Wisd. 
 6, 2. Test. XII Patr. p. 520. Alex. Com- 
 nen. 3. 9. Found only in the later Greek, 
 Sturz de Dial. Mac. p. 166. 
 
 Ei>(i)% 6, indec. Enoch, Heb. T^H (in 
 itiated), the patriarch who walked with God, 
 Luke 3, 37. Heb. 11, 5. Jude 14. Comp. 
 Gen. 5, 8 sq. 
 
 e|-, prep, see ecc. 
 
 , ot, at, TO, card. num. six, Matt. 17, 1. 
 Mark 9, 2. + 
 
 e^ayyeXX.d), f. X&>, (eK,uyy<- XAa>,) to give 
 out news, to publish, to announce, Plut. 
 Thes. 13. Xen. Hell. 1.1. 8. In N. T. to 
 announce abroad, to show forth, i. e. by Hebr. 
 10 make widely known, to celebrate, e. g. ras 
 ilpfTas TOV 3eov 1 Pet. 2, 9. Sept. for *i?& 
 Ps. 9, 15. 79, 13. SoEcclus. 44, 15. 
 
 , f. do~a>, (eV. ayopafcu,) to 
 purchase out, to buy up out of the posses 
 sion or power of any one, Plut. M. Crass. 2. 
 Pol. 3. 42. 2. In N. T. to redeem, to set 
 free, sc. out of service or bondage; Gal. 3, 
 13 fK TTJS KdTapas TOV VOJJLOV. 4, 5. Comp. in 
 dyopdfa, no. 2. Mid. pr. to redeem for one 
 self, trop. Eph. 5, 16 etCol. 4,5 egayopu6- 
 f.ifvoi TOV Kaipov, redeeming the time, i. e. 
 rescuing and improving every opportunity 
 for good. Comp. Marc. Antonin. 4. 28 
 KepSavTfov TO irapov. 
 
 o/y&>, f. a<a, (fK, ayoo,) to lead out, to 
 conduct out, i. e. out of any place, c. accus. 
 of pors. e. g. out of prison, Acts 5, 19. 16, 
 37. 39; also with 12, 17. (Sept. for 
 JTSin Ps. 142, 8. Is. 42, 7.) Also out of 
 Egypt, Acts 7, 36 ; with e /c v. 40. 13, 17. 
 Heb. 8, 9. (Sept. for K^iM Ex. 6, 7. Lev. 
 25, 38.) Genr. Mark 15, 20. Acts 21, 38 ; 
 with eo> Mark 8, 23. Luke 24, 50. (Sept. 
 fa> Gen. 15, 9.) As a shepherd his flock, 
 John 10, 3. Dem. 1090. 10. Xen. Hell. 
 6. 4. 37 ; c. Dem. 845. 17. Xen. Hell. 
 6. 5. 18 ; c. eo> Dem. 1278. 3. 
 
 e^aipew, >, f. 770-0), (eV, afp<=V) aor. 2 
 e eiXoi/ Mid. aor 2 irreg. e et Aaro Acts 7, 
 
 10 et 12, 11 in some editions ; see in dvai- 
 peo). To take out, i. e. 
 
 1. lo pluck out, to teai-put, e. g. an eye, 
 Matt. 5, 29 TOV o</)3uXp,oi/. 18, 9. Plut. de 
 Is. et Osir. 55 TOV oc/>3. Xen. An. 2. 3. 16. 
 
 2. to take out from a number, to select ; 
 Mid. to select for oneself, to choose, c. ace 
 Acts 26, 17. Sept. for ina Deut. 31, 11. 
 Jos. Aut. 4. 8. 5. Xen. T An. 2. 5. 20. 
 Act. Xen. An. 5. 3. 4. 
 
 3. Mid. trop. to take out of the power ol 
 any one to oneself, to rescue, to deliver, with 
 ace. and fK, Acts 12, 11 e et Aero /*e e* x- 
 pbs HpcoSou. 7, 10. Gal. 1, 4; fK impl. 
 Acts 7, 34. 23, 27. Sept. for ViBfi Gen. 32, 
 11. 37,20. Isaeus 310. 1. Dem. 256. 2. 
 Pol. 1. 11. 11. 
 
 * f* / 
 
 egaipco, f. apw, (e*, aipai,) to take up out 
 of any place, to lift up from, Plut. Marcell. 
 15 med. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 19. In N. T. to 
 take away out of or from, to remove, with 
 ace. and /c c. gen. 1 Cor. 5, 13 eupuTe TOV 
 irovrjpbv ft- vficov, i. e. expel, excommuni 
 cate. So v. 2 Rec. Sept. for l^On Josh. 
 7, 13; MS Ez. 14, 8. 1 Mace. 14, 36. 
 m V. H. 2. 24. Plut. Nicias 18. 
 
 to, f. ij<ra>, (e /c, aire w,) to ask 
 for out of the hand or power of any one, to 
 demand, Germ, ausbitten ; c. ace. Diod. 
 Sic. 11.33. Plato Menex. 245. b. InN.T. 
 Mid. to ask or demand for oneself, c. ace. 
 Luke 22, 31 ; comp. Job 1,11. 12. 2, 4-6. 
 Test. XII Patr. p. 729. So Palaeph. 41. 
 
 2. Dem. 546. 21. Lys. 444. 6. 
 
 e^atyvr]?, adv. (eVc, at^wjs, a(pva>, ) on 
 a sudden, suddenly, Mark 13, 36. Luke 2. 
 13. 9, 39. Acts 9, 3. 22, 6. Sept. for cxriB 
 Prov. 24, 2 ; 5^ Is. 47, 9. Plut. Thes. 13. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 6. See on the form, Buttm. 
 115. n. 5. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 18. n. 
 
 ej;atco\ov^e(0, ,, f. ^orw, (e /c, n/coXov 
 Sew,) to follow out or up ; trop. to copy after, 
 to conform to, c. dat. 2 Pet. 1, 16 ov . . ./uv- 
 Sot? e^aKoXouSrycrairey. 2, 2. 15. Sept. for 
 M3Q Is. 56, 11. Jos. Ant. prorem. 4. Pol 
 17. 10. 7; pr. Plut. Alex. M. 24. 
 
 e^aKocrioi, at, a, six hundred, Rev. 13. 
 18. 14, 20. See Buttm. $ 70. 
 
 ^aXet <jta>, f. -v/, ( e , dXei (pa>.) 1. to 
 otn/ or smear out, to blot out ; c. ace. Rev. 
 
 3, 5 ou /LIT) e^aXei -v/^o) TO oVo/xa avTOv fK TTJS 
 /3i /3Xov r^y ta^f- Sept. for nna Ps. 69, 29. 
 (Luc. pro Imag. 26. Xen. Hell 2. 3. 51.) 
 Spec, of an ordinance, to blot out, to abolish 
 c. ace. TO ^ftpoypa^oi/ Col. 2, 14. So Dem. 
 468. 1 TOV vofjLov. Lys. 48. 2. Trop. to blot 
 
259 
 
 out sins, i. q. to pardon, Pass. Acts 3, 19. 
 Sept. and nniQ Ps. 51, 11. So Lys. 237. 1. 
 2. Spec, to wipe away, e. g. tears, c. ace. 
 Rev. 7, 17. 21, 4. 
 
 f. oXoC/Mu, Mid. depon. (, 
 i o, e. g. from a house Plut. 
 Agesi. 34 ; from a chariot Xen. Cyr. 8. 8. 
 25. In N. T. to leap forth, sc. from one s 
 place, Acts 3, 8. Sept. for 1J3H Joel 2, 5. 
 So Plut. Pelop. 32 pen. Id. Pomp. 58 pen. 
 
 rising up out of a place, Pol. 3. 55. 4. In 
 N. T. the resurrection from the dead, Phil. 
 3, 11. 
 
 efarareAAo), f. X, (V, dvare XXw,) to 
 make spring up out of the ground or else 
 where, e. g. plants, Sept. for rPEJtn Gen. 
 2, 9. Apoll. Rhod. 4. 1423 ; Zopvfiov Plut. 
 Pericl. 3. In N. T. intrans. to spring up 
 out of any thing, i. e. to spring up, to shoot 
 forth, of plants, Matt. 13, 5. Mark 4, 5. 
 Sept. of light, for rnt Ps. 112, 4. 
 
 eaz/lCTT77/U, f. o-rija-a), (ex, dvi<mjfjii,) 
 only in Act. aor. 1 fgavftrrrjara, aor. 2 e a- 
 vfarTrjv. On the trans, and intrans. signifi 
 cations, see in dvitrnjiu and Buttm. } 107. II. 
 
 1 . Trans, to make rise up out of a place, 
 to rise up out of, c. ace. e. g. soldiers out of 
 ambush Thuc. 7. 77 ; beasts from their lairs 
 Xen; Cyr. 2. 4. 20. In N. T. Act. aor. 1, 
 from the Ileb. to raise up seed (offspring) 
 from a woman ; c. ace. Mark 12, 19 et Luke 
 20, 28 KOL (a.vacrTT)(rr] (nr(pp.a rw dSeXcpw 
 auToC sc. tK TTJS yvvaiKos, comp. Deut. 25, 
 5. 6. Sept. for rTsn Geri. 19, 32. 34; rmu 
 Gen. 4, 25. 
 
 2. Intrans. Act. aor. 2, to rise up out of 
 a place, to stand forth, Acts 15,5. Sept. 
 for wp Gen. 18, 16. ^Eschin. 45. 3. Plato 
 Plued. 117. d. 
 
 e^aTraraajj j>, f. ^o-o>, (e /c intens. dira- 
 Taw.) to deceive out and out, to beguile wholly, 
 c. ace. Rom. 7, 11. 16, 18. 1 Cor. 3, 18. 
 2 Cor. 11,3. 2 Thess. 2, 3. 1 Tim. 2, 14 
 Lachm. Susann. 56. Luc. de Merc. cond. 
 5 ult. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 19. 
 
 e^ttTTira, adv. a later form for e^airiv^s 
 i. q. fai(pvr)s, on a sudden, suddenly, Mark 
 9, 8. Sept. for e xPQ Josh. 11, 7. Zonar. 
 7. 25. ib. 10. 37. (Jomp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
 18. n. 
 
 e^aTTOpeca, o>, f. rjao), (C K intens. 071-0- 
 p*co.) to be utterly at a loss, perplexed, Pol. 
 4. 34. 1. In N. T. Mid. to be utterly at a 
 loss with oneself, to be in despair, c. gen. 
 TOV tf)v 2 Cor. 1,8; absol. 4, 8. Sept for 
 pB Ps. 88, 16, So Plut. Alcib. 5. 
 
 ), f. (rreXw, (a7ro<rreXXa>,; 
 
 1. to send away out of a place, to send 
 forth, as an agent, messenger, friend, c. ace. 
 Acts?, 12. 11,22. 12,11. 17,14. Gal. 
 4, 4 ; with ds c. ace. of place whither, 
 Acts 9, 30. 22, 21. Gal. 4, 6. Sept. for nbaJ 
 Gen. 24, 40. Dem. 251. 5. Plut. Coriolau 
 6; c. etsPol. 21. 14. 9. 
 
 2. Emphat. to send away peremptorily, to 
 dismiss, c. ace. et adj. Luke 1, 53 TrXou- 
 TOVVTO.S e ^aTreVreiXe Ktvovs. 20, 10. 11. So 
 Sept. and nbttj Gen. 31, 42. Pol. 15. 2. 4 
 Toi/s Trpecrfifis avvnoKpirovs e a7rooTe XXeii/. 
 
 egapTL^CO, f. i cra>, (eVc, aprifa, liprios,) 
 to complete fully, to finish out, e. g. time, 
 c. ace. ras f/p-fpas Acts 21, 5. Also of a 
 teacher, i. q. to furnish thoroughly, Pass. 
 2 Tim. 3, 17. So T^V ol<iav Luc. Ver. Hist. 
 1. 33 ; TrXoia, to equip, Arr. Peripl. 11 ; of 
 persons, Jos. Ant. 3. 2. 2 no\fp.flv irpus 
 dv^p. TOIS aTratri KaXco? f 
 
 ), f. ^a>, (eVc, da-Tirdirra).) 
 to flash out, as lightning, Sept. Ez. 1, 4. 
 Tryphiodor. 10. 2. In N. T. of raiment, to 
 shine out, to glitter, absol. Luke 9, 29 ; comp. 
 Matt. 17, 2. So Sept. of weapons? for p*ia 
 Nah. 3, 3. 
 
 adv. (for e avrfjs wpar,) from 
 this time, i. e. forthwith, presently, imme 
 diately, Mark 6, 25. Acts 10, 33. 11, 11. 
 
 21, 32. 23, 30. Phil. 2, 23. See in no. 
 2. Pol. 2. 7. 7. Diod. Sic. 15. 43. 
 
 egeyetpw, f. f/J w, (, eye/pw,) trans, to 
 wake or rouse out of sleep, pr. implying the 
 rising up from the posture of sleep, Ecclus. 
 
 22, 7. Pol. 18. 2. 5. Xen. Hell. 6. 4. 36. 
 In N. T. trop. 
 
 1. to raise up from the dead, i. q. iyeipat 
 (< TU>V vfKptav, see in rye/pa no. 1 . b ; so c. 
 ace. 1 Cor. 6, 14 q/iuj egfyeptt Sept. and 
 "PP 1 ; Dan. 12, 2. 
 
 2. to raise up, to cause to arise or exist ; 
 spoken of Pharaoh Rom. 9, 17, quoted from 
 Ex. 9, 16 where Ileb. T^arri , Sept. SKTT)- 
 
 /. Jos. Ant. 8. 11. 1 f3aa-i\{vs yap 
 
 I. e fei/u, (eK, (lp.i to be,) see fgeo-ri. 
 
 II. !e/u, ((K, fip,i to go,) to go out 
 of& place, intrans. c. , Acts 13, 42 e< TTJS 
 <rvvaya)yfjs- With tVi c. ace. of place whi 
 ther, 27, 43 eVi TT]V yrjv, i. e. out of the 
 water. So c. eV, Luc. Eun. 6 ; absol. Sept. 
 Ex. 28, 35. IIdian.7. 9. 8. Plato Conv. 196. 
 a. Genr. to go away, to depart out of a 
 place, absol. Acts 17, 15. 20, 7. So Jos. 
 Ant. 5. 2. 8. Mid. c. gen. Hdian. 3. 15. 12. 
 
, f. co, ( intens. 
 ? convict fully, to show to be wholly wrong, 
 Dem. 233. 3. Xcn. CEc. 2. 9. In N. T. to 
 rebuke sternly, to condemn, to punish, c. ace. 
 Jude 15. Sept. and rpS irt Is. 2, 4. Mic. 
 4,3. 
 
 e^eX/co), f. KVO-W, (, eXxco q. v.) to draw; 
 oizJ, to drag out of a place, Sept. for ^Qia 
 Gen. 37, 28. Hdian. 8. 8. 14. In N. T! 
 trop. to draw out of the right way, i. e. to 
 draw away, to carry away, Pass. James 1, 
 14 vTrorrjs I8ias nrilvfilctf f^e\KOfj.evos- So 
 Test. XII Patr. p. 702 els rropveiav p.e eeX- 
 Kvo-aro ; comp. ^El. H. An. 6. 31 VTTO rrjs 
 
 aros, TO, (e|epao>,) vomit, what 
 is vomited ; 2 Pet. 2, 22 eVl TO "8iov e e pa- 
 ,ua. Comp. Prov. 26, 1 1 where Heb. ^8" ? > 
 Sept. eVt TOP eauroi) efierov. So the verb, 
 Dioscor. 6. 19 ; see Gataker Adverss. Misc. 
 p. 853 sq. 
 
 e^epevvdw, &>, f. f)a-a>, (CK, epevwco,) to 
 search out, to explore, i. e. assiduously, dili 
 gently, c. TTfpi TIVOS 1 Pet. 1,10. Sept. for 
 ban Prov. 2, 4; "^n 1 Chr. 19, 3. 
 1 Mace. 3,49. Pol. 14. 1. 13. Plut. Luculi. 19. 
 
 t, f. e eXev<rojuai, (E K, ep^op-ai 
 q. v.) aor. 2 e jjX3oi>, 2 pers. plur. e^XSare 
 Luke 7, 24. 25. 26 in some editions, see in 
 cp^o/iai init. To go or come out of any 
 place ; Sept. every where for 6*^?- 
 
 1 . Of persons, to go or come forth, intrans. 
 a) With adjuncts noting the place out of 
 which ; so c. gen. Matt. 10, 14 eepxop.ez/oi 
 rrjs olKias. Acts 16, 39 ; comp. Matth. 354. 
 8. With ex c. gen. of place, Matt. 8, 28 e< 
 - John 4, 30. Acts 16, 
 
 40. 1 Cor. 5, 10. al. So e /c c. gen. of pers. 
 implying place, Acts 15, 24 rives e fjp.S>v 
 (geXZovrfs. Trop. John 10, 39 e ^XSev ex 
 TTJS x L P f avT&v, lie departed out of their 
 hand, escaped from their power. (Sept. 
 for KS? Gen. 8, 16. 19. al. Xen. Hell. 6. 5. 
 16.) T \Vith ew, Matt. 26, 75. John 19, 4. 
 Rev. 3. 12 ; eo> c. gen. Matt. 21, 17 eo) 
 rfjs TrdXecoy. Heb. 13, 13. (Eurip. Phren. 
 486.) With dno c. gen. of place, to depart 
 from, Matt. 13, 1 e ^eXScbi OTTO TTJS oiKias. 
 24, 1. Mark 11, 12. al. Also c. adv. Matt. 
 5, 26 eKelZev. 12, 44 o%ev. Comp. ^Esop. 
 Fab. 129. b) With an adjunct of person 
 out of or from whom ; so of those out of 
 whose bodies demons depart, with K c. gen. 
 Mark 1, 25. 26. Luke 4, 35; drro Matt. 
 12, 43. Luke 4, 35 ; absol. Acts 16, 18. Of 
 those from whom, from whose presence, 
 
 one goes forth with authority, i. q. to be 
 sent out by any one ; so with diro c. gen. 
 John 13, 3 OTTO Seov e i}XSe. 16, 30. (Sept. 
 for h .35feo Gen. 4, 16 ; a??: KS 1 ; Ex. 8,8.) 
 With Trapd c. gen. John 16, 27 -rrapa rov 
 3&>D e liJXSov. 17, 8 ; comp. Sept. Num 
 16, 35. So genr. to depart from any one, 
 i. e. from his presence or intercourse, Luke 
 5, 8 e|eX3e drf ejuoO. 2 Cor. 6, 17 e ^XSere 
 en fjieaov O.VTWV. c) The place whence 
 being not expressed but implied, to go out. 
 
 1. e. to go away, to depart; Matt. 9, 31 o 
 de e eX3ojrej 8t((f>r]p.i<Tav KT\. Mark 2, 12. 
 Luke 4, 42. Acts 7, 7. Rev. 6, 2. al. So 
 of demons departing out of the body, Matt. 
 8, 32. Acts 8, 7. d) With an adjunct of 
 the place whither; so c. els, Matt. 11,7 
 TI e^XSere els rr)v epnpov KT\. Mark 8, 27. 
 Luke 10, 10. John 1, 44. Acts 11, 25. al. 
 saep. (Palseph. 38. 5. Xen. Hell. 7. 4. 24.) 
 So c. els final, Mark 1, 38 els TOVTO. Matt. 
 8, 34 els drrdvrrja-iv. With eVi C. ace. Luke 
 8, 27 eeX3oiTi eVi rf]v yrjv, sc. from a ves 
 sel. Acts 1, 21. With Trapd c. ace. Mark 
 
 2, 13 er)\%ev Trapa. TTJV SaXacrcraj/. Acts 16, 
 13. With Trpos c. ace. of pors. John 18, 
 29. 2 Cor. 8, 17. 
 
 2. Trop. of persons : a) to go forth 
 from, to proceed from, Matt. 2,6 eVc crow 
 yap f{\(v<reTai. f)yov[j.fvos. Also by He 
 braism, e^ep^ecrSat e* TTJS ocr(pvos TWOS. 
 to come forth out of the loins of any one, i. e. 
 to descend from, Heb. 7, 5. So Sept. and 
 Heb. Oisbnr NS^ Gen. 35, 11. 1 K. 8, 
 19; comp. Gen. 15, 4. Lib. Henoch. in 
 Fabr. Cod. pseud. V. T. I. 196. b) 1 John 
 4, 1 TroXXoi ^fv8oTrpo(pT)Tai e^e\Tfkv^a(riv 
 els TUV Kooyxoj , i. e. have gone forth, have 
 arisen and gone abroad, into the world. 
 
 3. Of things, to go or come forth, to pro 
 ceed from, e. g. a) Of liquids, i. q. to flow 
 out; John 19, 34 e /}X3ei/ cu/ia KOL vo~u>p. 
 Rev. 14, 20 ex TTJS \rjvov. So Sept. and 
 NS? Ex. 17, 6. b) Of lightning, to come 
 forth out of, to appear from ; as cm dvaro\S>v 
 Matt. 24, 27. Sept. and NS? Zcch. 9, 14. 
 c) Trop. of a voice, and the like, Rev. 16. 
 17 e ^jJXSf (pcavi) OTTO rov vaov. 19, 5. So 
 of teaching, or a rumour, to go forth, to 
 spread abroad, 1 Cor. 14, 36 d<j) vp.a>v 6 
 Xoyoy rov Sfou (gfjX Zev ; also with an ad 
 junct of place, e. g. els c. ace. Matt. 9, 26 
 e^rjXSev T) (prjp-f] avrr] els O\TJV rrjv yrjv fKei- 
 vr)v. Rom. 10, 18. John 21, 23 ; ev c. dat. 
 Luke 7, 17. 1 Thess. 1, 8; Kara c. gen. 
 Luke 4, 14. d) Trop. of thoughts, words ; 
 as eK rrjs Kapdias Matt. 15, 18 ; e * rov ord- 
 p.aros James 3, 10 ; of healing power or 
 virtue, to go forth, e tavrov Mark 5, 30, 
 
261 
 
 nap avTov Luke 6, 19 ; of an edict, to be 
 published, promulgated, napa Kaicrapos Luke 
 2, 1. e) Trop. of a hope, to depart, i. e. 
 to be at an end, to vanish, Acts 16, 19. So 
 of time, Sept. r}X3f TO tros, for can Gen. 
 47, 18. Xen. An. 7. 5. 4. 
 
 4. From the Heb. eio-epxo/xai /cat e- 
 rpxopai, Acts 1,21. John 10,9; see fully 
 in flfffp^ofj-ni no. 4. -f- 
 
 ee<T77, 3 pers. of eet/u, (eV, et/w to be,) 
 and the only person in use ; Impers. as also 
 Part, fgov ; it is possible, one can, referring 
 to moral possibility or propriety, i. e. it is 
 lawful, it is right, it is permitted, one may, 
 Buttm. { 150. in. 23 ; construed with dat. of 
 pers. and infin. expressed or implied. E. g. 
 with infin. pres. marking prolonged or cus 
 tomary action, Matt. 14, 4 OVK effort <roi 
 (X"v avT^v. Mark 6, 18. Acts 16, 21. 22, 
 25 ; dat. impl. Matt. 12, 2. 10. 12. Luke 6, 
 2. (Luc. Jud. Voc. 3. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 9.) 
 With infin. aor. marking transient action, 
 Matt. 20, 1 5 OVK ft-fcrri /xot Troirjcrai 6 Se Xco 
 KT\. 19, 3. Mark 2, 26. 10,2. Luke 20,22. 
 John 5, 10. 18, 31. Acts 21, 37 ; so Part. 
 fbv rfv Matt. 12, 4; t6v sc. eort, i. q. 
 eeo-ri 2 Cor. 12, 4. (JEl V. H. 2. 7. Xen. 
 (Ec. 7. 41 bis.) With the dat. impl. Matt. 
 
 22, 17. 27, 6. Mark 3, 4. 12, 14. Luke 6, 
 4. 14, 3 ; and so with Part, egov sc. ecrru 
 Acts 2, 29. With the infin. implied, Mark 
 2, 24 6 OVK ft-fcrri sc. avToly TTOK IV. Luke 6, 
 9. Acts 8, 37. 1 Cor. 6, 12 bis. 10, 23 bis. 
 
 egfTaiJco. f. d<ra>, (e< intens. eYaw, eYedr, 
 fVos-,) pr. to verify out, i. e. to examine fully 
 whether any thing is true or not, i. q. - 
 but stronger and more in use. Hence 
 
 1 . Genr. to inquire out, i. e. to seek out 
 the truth by inquiry ; so with -n-fpi c. gen. 
 Matt. 2, 8 ; with ris interrog. 10, 11. Sept. 
 for IB^ Deut. 19, 18. Ecclus. 11,7. Dem. 
 
 23. 29/Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 35. t 
 
 2. With ace. of pers. to inquire of, to ask, 
 John 21, 12. Arr. Epict. 3. 3. 14. Plut. 
 de Cons. Apoll. 33. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 36. 
 
 f&pyeojjuit, ovfjuii, f. TjVo/iai, Mid. depon. 
 (tK, ijyo/iai,) to lead out, to take the lead, be 
 leader, Xen. An. 6. 6. 34. In N. T. to lead 
 or bring out, to make known, i. e. 
 
 1. Genr. to declare, to tell; c. ace. of 
 thing, Luke 24, 35. Acts 15, 12. 21, 19; 
 ace. and dat. of pers. Acts 10, 8; KaSus 
 Acts 15, 14. Sept. for ">CO Judg. 7, 13. 
 Pol. 4. 22. 7. Thuc. 5. 26. 
 
 2. Spec, of a teacher, to declare, to make 
 known ; c. ace. Toy 3fdi/ John 1, 18 ; comp. 
 Matt. 11, 27. Sept. for Sin-in Lev. 14. 57. 
 Pol. 6. 3 3. Xen. Mem. 4. 7. 6. 
 
 O l, <rf, rd, sixty, Matt. 13, 3. 
 23. Mark 4, 8. 20. Luke 24, 13. 1 Tim. 5, 
 9. Rev. 11, 3. 12, 6. 13, 18. 
 
 6^7}?, adv. (e^co, ew,) one after another, 
 successively, in order, Sept. Deut. 2, 34. 
 Xen. Ath. 1. 6. In N. T. only with art. 
 6, 17 (i)s, as adj. the next after, the follow 
 ing ; Buttm. J 125. 6, 7. So Luke 9, 37 ev 
 nj ff)s f]fj.epa. 7, 11 fv rf) fr)s sc. fffupq. 
 Acts 21, 1. 25, 17. 27, 18. So in full, Jos. 
 Ant. 4. 8. 44; impl. ib. 3. 5. 6; genr. 
 2 Mace. 7, 8. Pol. 1. 52. 4. 
 
 e b 7 ?X e&) ) w> f- ti<ra>, (fK, ^e w,) to sound 
 out, to sound abroad, Sept. for "pan Joel 4, 
 14 ; c. ace. Pol. 30. 4. 7. In N. T. Pass. 
 to be sounded abroad; trop. of the gospel, 
 to be proclaimed, 1 Thess. 1 , 8 a( vp.wv yup 
 6 \6yos KT\. So Hesych. >?x e ~ 
 
 f eft?, ewy, 77, (ex&>, eco,) habitude of body 
 Xen. CEc. 7, 2 ; of life, habit, Mem. 1. 2. 4. 
 In N. T. habitude, practice, use, as the 
 result of long exercise, Heb. 5, 14. So 
 Ecclus. Prol. Arr. Epict. 1. 4. 22. Pol. 10. 
 47. 7. 
 
 etCTT?7/U, f. (Kcrrrja-a), (e /c, ttrnj/it,) aor. 
 
 1 {fo-TT)(Ta, aor. 2 fgfo-rrjv ; also Pres. 
 contr. eg to- ran Acts 8, 9 ; comp. in diro- 
 Ka^ta-Trmi. and Buttm. 5 106. n. 5. On the 
 trans, and intrans. signif. see in urny/it and 
 Buttm. ^ 107. II. Trans, to put out of place, 
 to displace, e. g. enemies, to discomfit, Sept.. 
 for con Ex. 23, 27. Josh. 10, 10 ; to clumge, 
 to alter, Plut. Sertor. 10. Intrans. to be out 
 of place, displaced, e. g. the joints, Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 653 ; to recede from, Thuc. 2. 63 ; 
 to depart, Xen. An. 1. 5. 14. In N. T. 
 only trop. 
 
 1. Trans, in the present, aor. 1, and later 
 perf. (gfo-TaKa Buttm. 5 107. II. 5 ; to put 
 out of oneself, to cause to be beside oneself, 
 Sept. for ^to Job 12, 17. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 
 12 rovs dv SpdjTrovs TOV (ppovflv e^Larr^jLi, 
 comp. Pol. 11. 27. 7. Hence genr. to aston 
 ish, to fill with wonder, c. ace. Luke 24, 22 
 ff(TTT]<Tav fj^as. Acts 8, 9. 11 . Arr. Epict. 
 1. 18. 21. Luc. de Dom. 19. Dem. 537. 29 
 TavTa f^icrTrjcri diftponrovs avratv. 
 
 2. Intrans. in the aor. 2, perf. and in 
 Mid. to be out of one s mind, to be beside 
 oneself; Mark 3,21 eXeyov yap, on egtvri]. 
 
 2 Cor. 5, 13 e4T6 yap e^eoT^juei/, PC. as is 
 said of us. So Jos. Ant. 10. 7. 3 (gfa-TTj- 
 Kora TU>V (pptviav. Pol. 15. 29. 7 ft-earr) ru>v 
 (ppevcav. Diod. Sic. 14. 71. Hence genr. 
 to be astonished, amazed, filled with wonder, 
 Matt. 12, 23 f^icrravTo irdvrts oi o\\oi. 
 Mark 2 ; 12. 5, 42 e 
 
 e(C(7Tocret 
 
262 
 
 , comp. in dyaXXtao/iat. (Sept. Gen. 
 27, 33. Ez. 26, 16.) Mark 6, 51 tv eavrols. 
 Luke 2, 47 t^ia-ravro eVi 777 crvvtai fcrX. 
 Matth. J 399. n. (Sept. Ex. 18, 9.) Luke 
 8, 56. Acts 2, 7. 12. 8, 13. 9, 21. 10, 45. 
 12, 16. Sept. for flan Gen. 43, 33. Job 
 26, 11. So Arr. Epict. 2. 22. 6. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 1. 4. 
 
 e^icr^yo), {. vo-o), (eVc intens. iV^vo),) 
 to le in full strength, to be fully able, c. inf. 
 Eph. 3, 18. Ecclus. 7, 6. Pint. Reip. ger. 
 Prsec. 5. 
 
 eo&09, ou, 17, (eK, oSo r,) pr. a way out, 
 exit, Hdian. 7. 12. 14. Plut. Flamin. 20 
 med. In N. T. exodus, journey out, depar 
 ture, Heb. 1 1, 22. Sept. for nXS inf. of KS? 
 Ex. 19, 1. Num. 33, 38. al. (Jos. Ant. 5. 
 1. 20. Xen. An. 6. 4. 9.) Trop. departure 
 from life, exit, decease, Luke 9, 31. 2 Pet. 
 1, 15. So Wisd. 7, 6. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 2 
 
 ), f. eucreo, (CK intens. 0X0- 
 to destroy utterly, Pass. Acts 3, 23 
 ?racra ^v^r/ . . . e ^oXoSpevSjjcrerai ex roi) XaoC. 
 So Sept. c. CK for pns Ex. 30, 33. 31, 13. al. 
 Test. XII Patr. p. 541. Jos. Ant. 8. 11. 
 1. Not found in classic writers ; see Sturz 
 de Dial. Alex. p. 166 sq. 
 
 %o/jLO\oyea>, &, f. f)tra>, (eVc intens. 6/io- 
 Xoye co,) pr. to speak out the same things as 
 another ; hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Mid. to admit, to acknowledge, to con 
 fess fully, C. ace. e. g. TCIS apaprias, Matt. 
 
 3, 6. Mark 1, 5. Acts 19, 18. James 5, 1C. 
 Sept. and rn-in Dan. 9, 24. (Jos. Ant. 8. 
 
 4. 6 Tas apaprias. B. J. 5. 10. 5. Plut. M. 
 Anton. 59 pen. rr^v a\rfieiav.} Spec, to 
 acknowledge openly, to profess, e. g. TO wopd 
 TIVOS Rev. 3, 5 Rec. So c. ort Phil. 2, 11; 
 comp. Tob. 11, 17. Hence to make acknow 
 ledgment for benefits, i. q. to give thanks, 
 to praise, c. dat. of pers. Matt. 11, 25. Luke 
 10, 21. Rom. 14, 11. 15, 9, quoted from 
 Ps. 18, 50 where Sept. for rnin ; also Ps. 
 57, 10. 1 Chr. 16, 4. So Act" Thorn. \ 25. 
 Philo de Alleg. p. 1105; c. ace. Tob. 12, 
 22. 
 
 2. Act. to assent fully, to agree, to pro 
 mise, absol. Luke 22. 6 e ^w/ioXo yr/cre. So 
 ojuoXoye w, Jos. Ant. 6. 3. 5. ib. 8. 4. 3. 
 Xen. An. 7. 4. 13, 22. 
 
 e%6v, see egfo-Tt. 
 
 t^opKL^O), f. itro), (fK, 6/>Ki fci>,) to exact 
 an oath, i. e. to put to an oath, to adjure, c. 
 ace. et KOTO TIVOS, Matt. 26, 63. Sept. for 
 Siairri Gen. 24, 3. Diod. Sic. 1. 21 med. 
 Dem. 1265. 6. 
 
 ov, 6, (e opKt o>,) an exor 
 cist, pr. one who binds by an oath ; genr. 
 one who by adjuration and incantation pro 
 fesses to expel demons, Acts 19, 13. So 
 Anth. Gr. III. p. 23 ult. or Luc. Epigr. 23 
 See for the process of exorcism, Jos. 
 Ant. 8. 2. 5. Suicer. Thes. in v. 
 
 v. -TTCO, f. |co, (eV, opvo-- 
 <ra>,) to dig out ; Mark 2, 4 t^opvgavrfs sc. 
 TT/V o-Tf-yvv, digging out or removing the 
 tiles or earth ; comp. in a7rooreyaa>. (Xen. 
 CEc. 19. 4.) Trop. Gal. 4, 15 o^SaX/zovs 
 v/xcoi/ fgopvgavTts, implying entire devoted- 
 ness. Sept. pr. for np: Judg. 16,22. 1 Sam. 
 11, 2. So Jos. Ant/6. 5. 1. Plut. Artax. 
 14 ult. See Wetst. N. T. in loc. 
 
 gOVOVCi) : u>, f. TJCTW, (fK, ot>8evea>, ow- 
 >,) to set out at nought, Pass. Mark 9, 12 
 Lachm. Also Pass. part. e lovSti/Tj/ieVos, 
 despised, contemptible, 2 Cor. 10, 10 Lachm. 
 Ecclus. 34, 22 or 31, 25. 
 
 J;OV$v6ci), >, f. d>(7co, (fK, ovSej/oo),) to 
 set out at nought, to make nought of, to de 
 spise, Pass. Mark 9, 12. So Sept. for oxn 
 1 Sam. 15, 23. 26; nj3 Ecc. 9, 16.~ 
 1 Mace. 3, 14. Test. XII Patr. p. 564. 
 Basil. Ep. 61. 91. See Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 182. 
 
 efou^e^ew, w, f. jjo-co, (, ofafvfa, 
 ofaev later form for ovbev, Buttm. 5 70. 1 . 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 181 sq.) to set. out at 
 nought, to make nought of, to despise, c. ace. 
 Luke 18, 9 ft-ov Sfvovvras TOVS \onrovs. 23, 
 11. Rom. 14, 3. 10. 1 Cor. 6,4. 16, 11 
 Gal. 4, 14. 1 Thess. 5, 20. Acts 4, 11, 
 comp. Matt. 21, 42 and Ps. 118, 22. Pass. 
 part. 1 Cor. 1, 28 et 2 Cor. 10, 10 e ov3e- 
 vrjfjifvos, despised, contemptible. Sept. for 
 H3 Prov. 1,7; ma Ez. 22, 8. 2 Chr. 36, 
 16. Euseb. H. E .S. 1. 209. Comp. Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 182. 
 
 us, T), eeort. power, . e. 
 moral power, ability, see in e^eo-rt. Thus 
 
 1. power to do anything, ability, faculty, ; 
 Acts 8, 19 Sore KU/XOI TTJV fov<riav TCIVTVV, 
 iva KrX. Matt. 9, 8 ScWa f^ovcriav TOICIVTTJV 
 Tols di/3pa)7roij. With gen. Luke 10, 19 
 e^oucria TOV iraTtiv KT\. With inf. aor. 
 Luke 12, 5 e ^ova-lav t^ovra e/z^aXeli/ KrX. 
 who hath power, is able. John 10, 18 bis. 
 Spec, strength, force, efficiency, Rev. 9, 3 bis. 
 19. Thuc. 4. 39; c. gen. Ecclus. 9, 13; 
 c. inf. Thuc. 7. 1 2. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 24. 
 
 2. power to do or not to do, i. e. license, 
 liberty, leave, right; Acts 1,7 eV T!J tSi a. 
 f^ovo-ia. 5, 4. Rom. 9, 21. 1 Cor. 7, 37 e|- 
 ovcrlav e^ei nepl TOV tdiov SfX^juaros 1 , i. e. if 
 
263 
 
 it stands in his own free will. 8, 9. 9, 4. 5. 
 6. 12 bis. 18. 2 Thess. 3, 9. Rev. 22, 14. 
 So John 1, 12. Ecclus. 25, 25. J21. V. H. 
 3. 35. Dem. 111. 12. Xen. Hi. 5. 2. 
 
 3. power as entrusted, i. e. commission, 
 full-power, authority; Matt. 21, 23 bis, tv 
 iroia ouiri a Tavra Troitls , v. 24. 27. Mark 
 11/28 bis. 29. 33. Luke 20, 2 bis. 8 ; also 
 Mark 3, 15. John 19, 11. Acts 9, 14. 26, 
 10. 12. 2 Cor. 10, 8. 13, 10. With infin. 
 e. g. pres. John 5, 27 f^ovcriav e&coKei/ avrta 
 KOI Kpicriv iroiiiv. Matt. 9, 6 t^ovcrlav e^ei 
 6 vlos dcpievai KT\. Mark 2, 10. Luke 5, 
 24; inf. pres. and eVt c. gen. Rev. 11, 6; 
 inf. aor. John 19, 10 bis, OVK o?Sa? on e ou- 
 <riav t^o) crravpuxrai ere KT\. Heb. 13, 10. 
 Rev. 9, 10. 11, 6. 13, 5; Matt. 7, 29 
 and Mark 1, 22 rjv yap 8i8d<TK(av avrovs as 
 (ov(Tiav f\(^v, as one having authority, sc. 
 from God to teach. Luke 4, 32 on eV e- 
 oucri a rfv o \6yos avrov, his discourse was 
 with authority, authoritative. So eV e ov- 
 tri a, KO.T f^ovtriav, adv. with authority, au 
 thoritatively, Luke 4, 36. Mark 1, 27. Jos. 
 Ant. 2. 9. 5. Diod. Sic. 17. 54 pen. Plut. 
 Camill. 1 ; c. inf. 1 Mace. 10, 6. Pol. 5. 
 56. 8. 
 
 4. power over persons and things, domi 
 nion, authority, rule. a) Pr. and genr. 
 Matt. 28, 18 eSo3rj (JLOI. irdcra fovcria eV ot>- 
 pav& Acal eVi yf]s. Matt. 8, 9 et Luke 7, 8 
 \mo t^ovaiav fivai, i. e. subject to authority, 
 rule. Mark 13, 34 rrjv ^ovaiav sc. avrov. 
 Judo 25. Rev. 13, 2. 4. 12. 17, 12. 13. 18, 
 1. Sept. for nljajaa Ps. 136, 8. 9. (Ecclus. 
 17,2. Diod. Sic! 1* 58. Hdiari. 7. 10. 4.) 
 With gen. of pers. to whom the power be 
 longs, Luke 20, 20 . rov rjyfp.6vos. Rev. 
 12, 10 e. TOV Xp. Acts 26, 18 e. TOV 
 aaravus. Luke 22, 53 e. roO CTKOTOVS. Col. 
 1,13. With gen. of the object subjected to 
 the power, Mark 6, 7 ^ovo~ia TG>V jrvtv/j,. 
 T&V d<ca3. i. e. power over unclean spirits. 
 Matt. 10, 1. John 17, 2. With eVi c. gen. 
 Rev. 2, 26 |. Vt TWI/ (%v>i>, i. e. power 
 orer. 14, 18. 20, 6. With eV/ c. ace. in 
 the same sense, Luke 9, 1. Rev. 6, 8. 13, 
 7. 16,9. With eVavw c. gen. Luke 19, 17. 
 b) Melon. what is subject to one s rule, 
 dominions, .jurisdiction, Luke 4, 6. 23, 7 
 K rfjs eg. HpcoSov. Sept. and n^UJBO 2 K. 
 20, 13. Ps. 1 14, 2. So Hdian. 3.V 4.* Plut. 
 Reip. ger. Pra?c. 19. c) Meton. in plur. 
 or collect. those invested with power, as in 
 Engl. the powers, authorities, i. e. rulers, ma 
 gistrates, Luke 12, 11. Rom. 13, 1 ter. 2. 3. 
 Tit. 3, 1. (Ecclus. 10, 4. Jos. B. J. 2. 8. 
 7.) So for the powers of the other world, 
 princes, potentates ; e. g. celestial, as angels, 
 
 archangels, Eph. 1, 21. 3, 10. Col. 1. 16. 2, 
 10. 1 Pet. 3, 22 ; comp. Test. XII Patr. p. 
 547, 548. Or demons, Eph. 6, 12. Col. 2. 
 1 5. Eph. 2, 2 see in d^p ; comp. Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 547. So genr. of the powerful ad 
 versaries of the gospel, 1 Cor. 15, 24. Comp. 
 in dpxr) no. 4. b. d) 1 Cor. 11, 10 <50etXei 
 
 rovs dyyfXovs, prob. emblem of power," 
 i. e. a veil or covering (comp. v. 13. 16). as 
 an emblem of subjection to the power of a 
 husband, a token of modest adherence to 
 duties and usages established by law or 
 custom ; see more in uyyeXo? no. 2. Comp. 
 Sept. TT)V TtfjLTjv TOV Tvpoo~a>Trov for P"D3 
 ^r? Gen. 20, 16 ; see Heb. Lex. art. M03 . 
 ^OV(7ta^O)j f. dcro), (eovcria,) to have 
 power over any person or tiling, to exercise 
 authority over; c. gen. Buttm. 132. 5. 3. 
 Luke 22, 25 ot fovo-tdoi>rfs avT<av, i. e. 
 their rulers, princes. 1 Cor. 7, 4 bis, TOV 
 I8iov o~a>[J.aTos OVK eovo-idfi, hath not power 
 over his (or her) own body, i. e. the wife is 
 not mistress of her own body, nor the hus 
 band master of his own body, in this respect. 
 Sept. for b(BT3 Neh. 9, 37 ; abiti Neh. 5, 15. 
 So Dion. Hal. 9. 44. Trop. to be brought 
 under the power of any thing, to be in bond 
 age to, Pass. c. VTTO nvos 1 Cor. 6, 12. 
 
 e S% 7 ? *l s > V ( e / X <B >) an y thing stand 
 ing out, a projection, as an angle or point. 
 Sept. for -,03 Job 39, 28. Hdian. 4. 15. 6. 
 In N. T. trop. prominence, eminence ; Acts 
 25, 23 avftpfs ol nar eoxf]V ovrts, i. q. ol 
 
 , the prominent men, principal. 
 
 e%U7rvL%<o, f. t o-ca, (fK, ZTTVOS,} to wake 
 out of sleep, to awaken, trans. Sept. Pass, for 
 yp^ 1 K. 3, 15 ; iw Job 14, 12. Marc. An- 
 tonin. 6. 31. Plut. Anton. 30. A later form 
 instead of the earlier d(pvm>ifa, Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 224. In N. T. trop. to wake one 
 from the dead; John 11, 11 Iva < 
 
 , ov, 6, f], adj. (, VTTJW,) out 
 of sleep, i. e. wakened, awake ; Acts 16, 
 27 (gimvos 8f yfvofjLfvos, becoming awake, 
 awaking. 1 Esdr. 3, 3. Test. XII Patr. p. 
 562. 
 
 e &), adv. of place, (eV, e ,) also pr* p 
 c. gen. Buttm. $ 146. 3 ; out, without. 
 
 1. Of place where, ivithout, out of doors, 
 foris, after verbs and words not implying 
 motion. a) Adv. John 18, 16 Tltrpos fl- 
 o-TT]Kfi Trpos rfj 3upa ea>. Matt. 12, 46. 47. 
 26,69. Mark3, 31.32. So genr. without a 
 place or city, abroad, Mark 1 , 45 ew tv e pij- 
 ftois TOTTOIS. Luke 1,10. Re i . 22, 15. Sept 
 
264 
 
 for pna Gen. 24, 31. Ezra 10, 13. (Plut. 
 de Superst. 7. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 31.) So 01 
 ? w as adj. those without, outside, outward, 
 Buttm. 125. 6, 7. Acts 26, 11 ds ras eo> 
 noXety, even to foreign cities. (Sept. 2 K. 16, 
 
 18. Xen. Hell. 6. 1. 5.) Trop. of those not 
 belonging to one s community or church, 
 not Christians, 1 Cor. 5, 12. 13. Col. 4, 5. 
 1 Thess. 4, 12 ; of those not among the 
 more privileged disciples, Mark 4, 1 1 . (Xen. 
 CEc. 10. 8.) So 6 eo) rjjj.S)v av%pa>iTOS, 
 our outward man, the body, 2 Cor. 4, 16. 
 b) Prep. c. gen. out of, outside of, Luke 
 13,33 f<o lepovo-aX^/i. Heb. 13,1 1. 12. 13. 
 So JEL V. H. 2. 10. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 14. 
 
 2. Of place whither, oitf, forth, out of 
 doors, foras, i. e. from a place, after verbs im 
 plying motion or direction. a) Adv. John 
 
 19, 4 ayu> vfuv avrov eo). Matt. 5, 13 et /i?) 
 e\r]^vai aj. 13, 48. Luke 14,35. 1 John 
 4, 18. John 11, 43 Sevpo e<a. Acts 5, 34 
 Troirjcrai fa). 16, 30 7rpoayay<ov eco. So af 
 ter verbs of motion compounded with e c, as 
 ayco Luke 24, 50 ; cepxopai Matt. 26, 75. 
 John 19,4. 5; e /c/3dXXo) Luke 8, 54. Acts 
 
 9, 40. So genr. Pol. 1. 50. 2. Xen. Hell. 
 
 4. 4. 16. b) Prep. c. gen. Matt. 21, 17 
 t ^XSep e|oo TTJS TroXewy. v. 39. Mark 5, 10. 
 8, 23. Acts 4, 15. 14, 19. So Hdian. 4. 2. 
 II. Xen. An. 5. 7. 15. + 
 
 ^(t)^fVj adv. of place, ((&.) from with 
 out, i. e. 
 
 1. outwardly, externally, Matt. 23, 27. 
 28. Luke 11, 39. 2 Cor. 7, 5. Sept. 
 for vsina Gen. 6, 14. al. So Hdian. 2. 8. 
 
 10. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 14. Also 6 eco3ej/ 
 as adj. outward, external, 1 Pet. 3, 3. Rev. 
 11,2; TO e o> 3 e i/ the outside, Matt. 23,25. 
 Luke 11, 40 ; that from without, Mark 7, 18. 
 (Thuc. 2. 13.) Trop. oi eco3e/, those from 
 without, i. e. not Christians, 1 Tim. 3, 7. 
 Comp. Buttm. j 125. 6, 7. So Xen. Hell. 
 
 5. 1. 22. 
 
 2. Sometimes i. q. tgco, out of, tvithoul, 
 as prep. c. gen. Mark 7, 15 e. roC uz>3p- 
 trov. Rev. 14, 20 e^coSep TTJS TroXeoosv. in la 
 ter edit. Sept. for fine Ex. 40,20 ; niSHn 
 Jer. 11,6. Soph. Elect. 1449. Xen. An. 5. 
 7. 21. 
 
 g(0 J6O), co. f. Tjcrco and e^axro). (fK, &>3f o) 
 Buttm. J 114.) to thrust out, to drive out from 
 a place ; e. g. a nation, with ace. and ano, 
 Acts 7, 45. Sept. for n^n Jer. 8, 3; 
 pvnn Joel 4, 6. So Luc. Tim. 12. Pol. 2. 
 69. 9. Plato Tim. 62. b. Spec, as a naval 
 term, to drive out of the sea, to drive ashore, 
 e. g. a ship, c. ace. Acts 27, 39 arytoXoi , 
 fls ov fftavXevo-avTo fa>crai TO TrXoioi . So 
 
 Plut. Nicias 20. Thuc. 7. 52 ras irdo-at 
 vavs iJ5r) ra>v A^wvaiuv ffa>3ot;i> ts rrjv yyv, 
 Xen. Hell. 4. 3. 12 bis. 
 
 a, ov, adj. compar. (?<u,) 
 outer, Matt. 8, 12 TO OTCOTOS TO (^urepov 
 outer darkness, i. e. remote from the light 
 and splendour of the feast within (v. 11). 
 put for the place of punishment or Tartarus 
 22, 13. 25, 30. Sept. for "Jl STl outer Ez. 
 10, 5. 40, 20. Adv. e |a>Tepw jEschyl. 
 Choeph. 1021. 
 
 eoprd^o), f. ao-o>, (eopT^,) to keep a fes 
 tival, to keep holyday, intrans. 1 Cor. 5, 8. 
 Sept. for 5?n Ex. 5, 1. Hdian. 5. 6. 12. Plato 
 Alcib. 121. c. 
 
 tcpnj, tjs, 17, a feast, festival, holydai/, 
 Col. 2, 16 JJLT) TIS vfjias Kpivtro) tv p.tpei eop- 
 rf]s i] vovp-rjvias. Acts 18, 21, where it is un 
 certain what festival is meant. Sept. for 5H 
 Ex. 10, 9; ISia Lev. 23, 2. So Hdian. 3. 
 10. 3. Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 1. Spec. a) The 
 passover and the festival of unleavened 
 bread connected with it, the paschal festival, 
 see in (ivp.os and SevrepoTrputros. So rj foprrj 
 TOV Trdcrxa, Luke 2, 41. John 13, 1 ; Iv TW 
 7ruo~x& fv TTJ fopTTJ John 2, 23 ; ij top. TWV 
 dv/j.wv Luke 22, 1 ; rj toprrj simply Matt. 
 26, 5. 27, 15. Mark 14, 2. 15, 6. Luke 2, 
 42. 23,17. John 4, 45 bis. 6, 4. 11,56. 
 12, 12. 20. 13, 29 ; and so most prob. John 
 
 5, 1, see Gr. Harm. p. 190. Sept. for 5H 
 Ex. 12, 14. 34, 23 ; and e f . TU>V aviia>v Ex. 
 23,15. 34,17. b) The feast of tabernacles, 
 rj fopTr) f] (TKrjvorrrjyia, John 7, 2. 8 bis 
 10. II. 14. 37. Sept. for an Deut. 16, 16 
 31, 10. 
 
 eTTa/yyeXta, as, /;, (eVayye Xo/xai,) 1. ajt 
 announcement, message, 1 John 1, 5 Rec. 
 where others ayyeX/u. Sept. for nsiBtt) Ez. 
 7, 26. Arr. Exp. Alex. 1. 18. Pol. 24. 10. 
 8 si sana lect. 
 
 2. a command, order, Acts 23, 21. Pol. 
 9. 38. 2. 
 
 3. a promise, i. e. a) Pr. 2 Cor. 1 , 20 
 oVai yap eTrayyeXtat TOV Seou. Eph. 6, 2 eV- 
 TO\T) TrpcoTT) tv (TrayytXio.. Eph. 1, 13 TW 
 7rvVfiaTi TTJS eVayyeXiaf, the spirit of pro 
 mise, i. e. the promised spirit. 1 Tim. 4, 8. 
 2 Pet. 3, 4. v. 9 see in ppabvvai. Sept. for 
 nilinB Esth. 4, 7. So 1 Mace. 10, 15. Diod. 
 Sic/l! 5 ult. Pol. 1. 72. 6. Of special pro 
 mises, e. g. made to Abraham, Acts 7, 17 
 comp. v. 6. Rom. 4, 20 comp. v. 18. Heb. 
 
 6, 15 comp. v. 14. Heb. 7, 6. 11,9 bis, -fy 
 eVayyeXi a? i. e. the promised land; so in 
 respect of Isaac, Rom. 9, 9. Gal. 4, 23 ; of 
 a spiritual seed, Rom. 9, 8. Gal. 4, 28. Or 
 
as made to Abraham and the Jewish patri 
 archs and prophets in general, e. g. of a fu 
 ture Saviour, Acts 13, 23. 32. 26, 6; of 
 future blessings and the enjoyment of God s 
 favour, Acts 2, 39. Rom. 4, 13. 14. 16. 9, 
 4. 15, 8. 2 Cor. 7, 1. Gal. 3, 16. 17. 18 
 bis. 21. 22. 29. Eph. 2, 12. 3, 6. Heb. 6, 
 12. 17. 11, 17; of the salvation in Christ, 
 2 Tim. 1, 1 aTToo-roXoy . . . tear tirayytKiav 
 <t>rjs, an apostle in respect to the promise of 
 eternal life in Christ, i. e. appointed to an 
 nounce it. Heb. 4, 1. 8,6. 9, 15. 1 John 
 2,25. 
 
 b) Meton. a promise for the thing pro 
 mised, Heb. 11, 13. 33. 39; so of the sal 
 vation in Christ, 10, 36 ; of the Holy Spirit, 
 rfjv tirayy. rov trarpos Luke 24, 49. Acts 
 
 I, 4. So TTJV fVayy. TOU irvtvparos Xa/3<ui/, 
 i. q. TO TTV. TO 7rayyeXXoju.ez/of, i. e. having 
 received the promised outpouring of the 
 Spirit, Acts 2, 33. Gal. 3, 14 ; see Buttm. 
 5 132. n. 12. Test. XII Patr. p. 725. Psalt. 
 Sal. 12, 8 00-101 Kvpiov /cXr/poj/o/i^o-atei/ eVay- 
 yeX/ay Kvpiov. 
 
 7ra yyeAA&>, f. eXco, (dyyeXXw,) to bring 
 word to or up to, to announce, e. g. events, 
 Pol. 6. 13. 6. Hdian. 1. 6. 23; to give 
 orders, to command, Dem. 1041. 5. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 1. 10. In N. T. Mid. depon. eVay- 
 ye XXo/xat, to announce oneself as doing or 
 about to do any thing, i. q. to promise; with 
 Pass. perf. eVijyyeX/wu in Mid. signif. Rom. 
 4, 21. Buttm. J 136. 3;but also as Pass. 
 Gal. 3, 9. 2 Mace. 4. 27. Buttrn. 113. n. 6. 
 
 1. Genr. to promise, c. ace. Rom. 4, 21. 
 Tit. 1,2; ace. and dat. James 1,12 a-re<pa- 
 rov TIJS tcof/y ov f7rrjyyfi\aro 6 Kvpios rols 
 ayaTTUxTiv avrov. 2, 5. 2 Pet. 2, 19. 1 John 
 V, 25. Heb. 6, 13 ; dat, and infin. Mark 14, 
 
 II. Acts 7, 5; absol. Heb. 10, 23. 11,11. 
 12, 26. Pass, impers. c. dat. Gal. 3, 19 w 
 fVjjyyfXrat, i. e. to whom the promise was 
 made. Sept. and iS Esth. 4, 6. Pol. 5. 
 89. 6. Xen. An. 5. 6. 26. 
 
 2. Spec. i. q. to profess, to make profession 
 of, c. ace. 3eoo-e /3eiai/ 1 Tim. 2, 10 ; yvaxriv 
 6, 21. Wisd. 2, 13. Dem. 938. 7. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 7. 
 
 eTTttyyeX/XO., TO?, TO, (eVayye XXojuat,) a 
 promise, 2 Pet. 1, 4. 3, 13. Dem. 397. 3. 
 Plato Prot. 27. p. 319. a. 
 
 eTrdya), f. d, (ayu,) aor. 1 part. eVd- 
 a? 2 Pet. 2, 5, on which form of the fut. 
 and aor. see in Sya ; to lead up to, to bring 
 upon, to introduce to a place, Sept. Ez. 14, 
 15. Thuc. 2. 2. In N. T. to bring upon 
 any one, c. ace. et dat. 2 Pet. 2, 1 f-rrdyovrfs 
 tavrols ra\ivr}v d.Tr<a\ciav. V. 5. Sept. C. eVt 
 
 for N^n Gen. 6, 17. Ex. 11, 1. (Philo 
 Leg. ad Cai. p. 1018 KivSwov en ay. Palasph. 
 6. 7. Plato Tim. 33. a.) With eVt c. ace. 
 Acts 5, 28 fTrayayeiv e (p TJ/JLUS TO alp.a, to 
 bring upon us, i. e. to make us answerable 
 for. Sept. for fifon Gen. 20, 9 ; 1RB Ex. 
 34, 7. So Dem. 548. 24. 
 
 eTrayaJvi^ofjUii, f. t o-o/xai, Mid. depon. 
 (uyeow fo/iai,) to contend upon, i. e. for 01 
 about, c. dat. of thing for which, Jude 3. 
 Plut. Num. 8 ; c. dat. of pers. with whom, 
 Pint. Fab. Max. 23. 
 
 eVa^ypot^u, f. ourw, (dSpoi fo),) to gather 
 together in crowds upon or to any place ; 
 Mid. intrans. eVa3poi o^at, to gather together 
 to or upon, tn crowd together upon, Luke 11, 
 29. Plut. M. Anton. 44. 
 
 Eiraivero 1 ?, ov, 6, Epenetus, pr. n. of 
 a Christian, Rom. 16, 5. 
 
 eTraivea), u>, (eVi intens. alve<a,} fut. tVw 
 1 Cor. 11, 22. Xen. An. 5. 5. 8 ; but Att 
 more usually fut. eVo/u Rom. 15, 11. Xen. 
 Hell. 3. 2. 6 ; see Buttm. \ 113. 5, and n. 7. 
 To praise much, to applaud, to commend, 
 c. ace. Luke 16, 8. 1 Cor. 11,2. 17. 22 bis. 
 Rom. 15, 11 quoted from Ps. 117, 1, where 
 Sept. fortiaoJ. Sept. also for ^H Ps. 10,3. 
 Ceb. Tab. 31. Xen. Mem. 3. 2. 2. 
 
 emu^o?, ov, 6, (eVt intens. atvos,) muck 
 praise, applause, commendation; Eph. 1,6 ds 
 f rraivov rf/s o~6r]s ccrX. V. 1 2. 1 4. -Rom. 2, 29. 
 13, 3. 1 Cor. 4, 5. 2 Cor. 8, 18. Phil. 1, 11. 
 1 Pet. 1, 7. 2, 14. Meton. object of praise, 
 something praiseworthy, Phil. 4, 8. Sept. 
 for nbnn l Chr. 22, 24 ; TJrt 16, 27. Pol. 
 2. SS. ll . Xen. Hi. 1. 14. 
 
 eTTCUpa), f. apco, (ai /jco,) 1. to take or 
 lift up, to raise up ; e. g. a sail, to hoist up, 
 c. ace. Acts 27, 40. (Luc. V. H. 2. 38. 
 Plut. Thes. 17, 22.) Pass, of a person, to 
 he taken up into heaven, Acts 1,9; comp. 
 Mark 16, 19 et Luke 24, 61. Spec, in 
 phrases, like Heb. ^3. see Heb. Lex. art. 
 N1T3 no. 1. a) eVat p. ras -%f I pas, to lift 
 up the hands, in prayer or benediction, Luke 
 24, 50. 1 Tim. 2, 8. Sept. for Nb3 p s . 
 134, 2 ; 0-nn Ex. 17, 11. Comp. Xen. Eq. 
 1 2. 6. b) firaip. rrj v KfpaXrjv, to lift 
 up the head, trop. to take courage, Luke 21, 
 28. So Heb. xia;), Sept. aipw, Zech. 2, 4. 
 c) (iraip. rovs o(^3aXftouf,/o lift up the 
 eyes, before verbs of looking or seeing, by a 
 kind of verbosity as in Heb. Matt. 17, 8 e TTCI- 
 pavrfs roiis o(p3. avTa>v ovStva (I8ov. Luke 
 16, 23. John 4, 35. 6, 5 ; c. tts rwa, upon a 
 person, Luke 6", 20 ; e"y ri, to or towards a 
 place, Luke 18, 13. John 17, 1. Sept. for 
 
266 
 
 NCJ3 Gen. 13, 10. 14; c. els Gen. 39, 7. 
 d) eVm p. rijv (ptovrjv, to lift up the voice, 
 i.e. to cry out with a loud voice, Luke 11, 
 27. Acts 2, 14. 14, 1 1 . 22, 22. Sept. for NU3 
 Judg. 2, 4. 9, 7. So Dem. 449. 13. Phi- 
 lostr. Yit. Apollon. 5. 33. e) eVat p. r^v 
 irTepvav erri Tiva, to lift up the heel against 
 any one, i. e. in order to attack and injure, 
 the figure being taken from a horse, John 1 3, 
 18 ; translated from Ps. 41, 10 where Heb. 
 b? 3J3S i^Srl . Comp. Sept. eTTJ/pe TO Sopv 
 eVi, for ^an 1 Sam. 20, 32. 
 
 2. Mid. to Zi/i! up oneself, to rise up, e. g. 
 against any thing ; so of a lofty fortress, 
 trop. C. Kara TWOS, 2 Cor. 10, 5 irav v\}ra)ua 
 {jraipouevov Kara TTJS yv. TOV 3eoi). Sept. for 
 Xttttnn Ezra 4, 19. Dan. 11, 14. Trop. to 
 exalt oneself, to become elated, proud, 2 Cor. 
 11, 20 where supply KO% vu&v. Sept. for 
 Xtea prov. 19, 18; *?* Jer. 13, 15. So 
 Ml V. II. 8. 15. Xen. Cyr. 8. 5. 24. 
 
 eTraicr^wo/iat, Mid. depon. 
 Pass. aor. 1 iirji<rx\n&rp> and fut. 1 ei 
 5rj<rofj.ai, both in Mid. signif. Buttm. 
 4, and n. 5 ; to shame oneself upon, in, at any 
 thing; to be ashamed of, c. accus. Mark 8, 
 38 bis, os yap av tiraurxytftj) pe KT\. Luke 
 9, 26 bis. Rom. 1, 16. 2 Tim. 1, 8. 16 ; 
 absol. 2 Tim. 1,12. Also c. infin. Heb. 2, 
 1 1 OVK eiraia"xyveTai do e\(povs avTovs KaXelv. 
 With both constructions, Heb. 11, 16 OVK 
 rai avrovs 6 Sfoj, 3eoy eVtKaXei- 
 avraiv, where the latter clause is ep- 
 exegetical; see Matth. 5 414. 12. 532. d. 
 So absol. Sept. Job 34, 19 ; c. ace. Xen. 
 Hell. 4. 1. 34. Plato Soph. 247. c ; c. infin. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 83. Plato Pheed. 85. b. Once 
 with fjri c. dat. Rom. 6, 21 e <p ols vvv sVai- 
 crxvveo-Ze, comp. Matth. \ 399. n. 1. Sept. 
 for -isn Is. 1, 29. 
 
 d), f. TJO-CO, (fVt, aireo),) pr. to 
 
 ask thereto, i. e. for more ; hence to leg, to 
 ask alms, absol. Luke 16, 3. [18, 35.] Sept. 
 for ^XV Ps. 109, 10. Ecclus. 40, 28. Horn. 
 II. 23. 593. Soph. CEd. Col. 1364. 
 
 eTra/coXoi&eo), , f. }o-w, (dxoXovSe co,) 
 to follow upon or c/ter, to accompany ; absol. 
 Mark 16, 20 8ia TU>V (TraKoXov SovvTwv crrjuei- 
 (av, through the accompanying signs. With 
 dat. 1 Tim. 5, 24 rial 8e KOI eVaKoXovSovo-ii/ 
 sc. ai &fi.apTiai, and some they follow after, i. e. 
 become known only afterwards ; see in Kpi- 
 ms no. 2. b. Sept. for -ins r,bn Job 31, 7. 
 Prov. 7, -22. So Plut. Timol. 3^ Plato Legg. 
 667. e. Trop. 1 Pet. 2, 21 Iva eVax. rols 
 iXVf&iv avrov, that ye should follow upon his 
 footsteps, i. e. follow his example. (Sept. 
 
 for -nr Deut. 12, 30.) 1 Tim. 5, 10 ir 
 e pyw dyaSw tTraKo\ov%T)o-f. has followed close 
 upon every good work, i. e. been studious 
 of, devoted to. Sept. for "nns N^E Josh. 
 14, 8. 9. So Luc. Parasit. 3. Dem. 805. 
 24 ToTs 7rd3ecrti . 
 
 eTra/covw, f. ovo-oo, (d/covco,) a late form 
 of the fut. see in d/couco ; to hear to, i. e. to 
 hear any thing at which one is present, 
 Xen. An. 7. 1. 14. In N. T. to hear to, to 
 hearken to, i. e. to hear and answer prayer, 
 c. gen. 2 Cor. 6, 2 tirijuovord o-ov. Sept. for 
 fi Gen. 35, 3; 2><lj Gen. 17, 20. Luc. 
 Timon 34. Hdian. 4. 5. 9. 
 
 ^at, Mid. depon. (d*po- 
 do/zai,) to hear to, to hearken to, i. q. eVa/covo) 
 q. v. So c. gen. Acts 16, 25. Test. XII 
 Path p. 710. Plato Comic. Tpvjr. 2. Comp. 
 Sept. eVaKpoWtr for ^iL pn 1 Sam. 15, 22. 
 
 CTTCIV, ccnj. (eVei ai>,) whenever, so soon 
 as, with Subjunct. comp. in av II. 1. c. 
 Matt. 2, 8 firav Se eup^re. Luke 11, 22. 34. 
 Hdian. 3. 10. 15. Xen. An. 1. 4. 13. 
 Comp. Herm. ad Vig. p. 784. Matth. {521. 
 
 e?rava y/ce9, adv. (di/ayxi/,) on necessity. 
 necessarily, i. q. eV dvdyKrjs , hence ra 
 fTra.vayK.es, things necessary, Acts 15, 28 
 7r\T)v TU>V firdvaytus TOVTCOV. Comp. Buttm. 
 5 125. 6. J 115. 4, and n. 5. Arr. Epict. 2. 
 20. 1. Dem. 706. 21. 
 
 eTravdyo), f. dga>, (di/dyw,) 1. to lead 
 up upon or to, e. g. before a tribunal, Plato 
 Legg. 846. b. In N. T. as a nautical term, 
 to lead (a vessel) up or out upon the sea, to 
 put out, see in dvdyu no. 2 ; so els TO /3d3or 
 Luke 5, 4 ; absol. v. 3. So 2 Mace. 12, 4. 
 Plut. Alcib. 35. Xen. Hell. 6. 2. 28. 
 
 2. to lead back upon or to a place, to cause 
 to return, c. ace. Hdian. 6. 6. 4. Thuc. 7. 3. 
 In N. T. intrans. to return, e. g. elg TTJV 
 Tro Xii/ Matt. 21, 18; see in yw no. 2. 
 So 2 Mace. 9, 21. Pol. 33. 5. 5. Xen. Cyr. 
 4. 1. 3 bis. 
 
 67rava/jiL/uiVlj(TK(i), f. p.w}o-o>, (dvaai- 
 uvi]o-Ka>. ) to remind one further, to put one 
 further in mind, i. e. in addition to one s 
 present state of mind ; c. ace. of pers. Rom. 
 15, 15 cor eTTavafjLifj.vrjO Kuiv iuas, comp. v. 
 U._Dem. 74. 7. Plato Legg. 688. a. 
 
 eTravaTravo), f. avo-w, (di>a7rai/co.) to let 
 rest upon, Eustath. Prscf. II. 1. 20 TIJI> Kefpa- 
 \TJV eTravmravatv avTij. Mid. to rest oneself 
 upon, to lean upon, Sept. c. eVi TI for "JXCS 
 2 K. 7, 2 ; c. dat. v. 17. Hdian. 2. 1. 3. 
 In N. T. only Mid. trop. to rest upon, to 
 abide with, c. eVi Tiva, Luke 10, 6 eirava* 
 
267 
 
 eV alrbv T) flpr)vrj vp.>v. (Sept. 
 and nw Num. 11, 25. 26. 2 K. 2, 15.) 
 Also to rest upon, i. q. to trust in, c. dat. 
 Rom. 2, 17 (nava.Tra.vT) ro> v6fj.ea. So c. dat. 
 1 Mace. 8, 12. Arr. Epict. 1. 9. 
 
 eiravep xpfjiai, (dnjpgofuuO aor. 2 Vaj^ 
 r)X3oi/, to came iadc to a place, to return 
 hither, thither; absol. Luke 10, 35. 19, 15. 
 Sept. for nitti Gen. 50, 5. Hdian. 6. 6. 2. 
 Xen. An. 6. 5. 32. 
 
 tiraVKTTr/fJU, f. OT^O-W, (aKurnj/ii q. V.) 
 in N. T. only Mid. intrans. firavio-Tapai, 
 f. oTiyo-o/xat, to rise w/? upon or against any 
 one, c. em nva Matt. 10, 21. Mark 13, 12. 
 Sept. for ^y Dip 1 Sam. 17, 35 ; a cip 
 Mic. 7, 6. So c. dat. Pol. 2. 53. 2. f hue. 
 8.73. 
 
 (a >s, ), (eiravopZoa,) pr. 
 a setting again upright, i. e. reparation, re 
 storation, e. g. of a city 1 Mace. 14, 34 ; of 
 laws Dem. 707. 7; of a loss Pol. 1. 11. 2. 
 In N. T. trop. of the heart and life, refor 
 mation, correction, 2 Tim. 3, 16. So eV. 
 TOV &iov Arr. Epict. 3. 21. 15. Pol. 1. 35. 1. 
 Plato Tim. Locr. 104. a. 
 
 eircivw, adv. (awa,) also prep. c. gen. 
 Buttm. 5 146. 3. Pr. up above, i. e. above, 
 over, upon. 
 
 1. Adv. of place, Luke 11, 44. Matt. 2, 
 9. So Plato Rep. 534. e. Also cf number, 
 zbove, more than, 1 Cor. 15. 6. Mark 14, 5 
 where the gen. is that of price. Sept. for 
 nbrTS Ex. 30, 14. Lev. 27, 7. 
 
 2. Prep. c. gen. of place, above, over, 
 Matt. 27, 37 firdva> TTJS KftyaXrjs avrov. Luke 
 4, 39. Rev. 20, 3. Sept. for ^? Is. 14, 14; 
 353313 Is. 14, 13. (Plut. de Def. Orac. 25. 
 Plato Phaed. 109. d.) Also upon, Matt. 5, 
 14 (nave* opovs KfifievT}. 21, 7 bis. 23, 18. 
 20. 22. 28, 2. Luke 10, 19. Rev. 6, 8. 
 Sept. for *? Qen. 40, 17 ; ^B i? Gen. 1, 
 29. 7, 18. So 1 Mace. 6, 46. Trop. of 
 office, dignity, over, Luke 19, 17. 19 yivov 
 (TTavat TTivre TToXecov. John 3, 31 bis. So 
 Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 14. Arr. Epict. 1. 12. 34. 
 
 eTTaparos, ou, 6, fj, adj. (errapdo/iat.) 
 accursed, laid under a curse, John 7, 49 
 Lachm. Thuc. 2. 17. Plato Legg. 877. a. 
 
 eTrapfcew, w, f. eVco, (dpjG>,) to keep off 
 withal, to ward off, nvi TI Horn. II. 2. 873. 
 In N. T. to help withal, to relieve, c. dat. 
 1 Tim. 5, 10. 16 bis. So Pol. 1. 51. 10. 
 Ken. Mem. 2. 7. 1. 
 
 e7rap%ia, as, t), (fnapxos, dpxrj,) a pre 
 fecture, province, e. g. of the Roman em 
 pire, Acts 23, 34. 25, 1. Arr. Epict. 3. 3. 
 12. Pol. 2. 19. 2. 
 
 wy, f], (av\is,~) a fold, stall, 
 for cattle at night, Sept. for rma Num. 32. 
 16. 24. Pol. 5. 35. 13 ; a farm-house, cot 
 tage, hut, Sept. for "iacn Josh. 15, 44. 47. 
 Diod. Sic. 12. 45. In N T. genr. a dwell 
 ing, habitation, house, Acts 1, 20; quoted 
 from Ps. 69, 26 where Sept. for rnip. 
 So Judith 3, 3. 
 
 eTravpiov, adv. (avpiov,) upon the mor 
 row, to-morrow ; hence in N. T. ij enaiipiov 
 sc. TjfjLfpa, the morrow, the next day, Buttm 
 5 125. 6, 7 ; so Matt. 27, 62. Mark 11, 12. 
 John 1, 29. 35. 44. 6, 22. 12, 12. Acts 10. 
 9. 23. 24. 14, 20. 20, 7. 21, 8. 22, 30. 32. 
 25, 6. 23. Sept. for rnnaa Gen. 19, 34. 
 Lev. 23, 11. 16. 
 
 o)) see in avr6(pa>pos. 
 
 ?, 5, 6, Epaphras, pr. n. o* a 
 Christian teacher of Colosse, Col. 1,7. 4, 
 
 12. Philem. 23. Contracted from ETra^no- 
 Siror q. v. as Ai/riVcts for AvriTrarpos , but 
 prob. not the same person with Epaphrodi- 
 tus of Philippi. 
 
 7ra(J3pl(i), f. t <ro>, (d<pi fo>.) to fown 
 upon, to foam out ; trop. to pour out like 
 foam, c. ace. Jude 13 ; comp. Is. 57, 20. 
 Pr. Mosch. Id. 5. 5. 
 
 E7ra(f)pootTO<>, ov, 6, Epaphroditux. 
 pr. n. of a Christian teacher of Philippi, the 
 companion and helper of Paul, Phil. 2. 25. 
 4, 18. Comp. in Enatypas. 
 
 eTreyeipw, f. epo>, (yeipo>,) to wake up, 
 to rouse up out of sleep, trans. Xen. An. 4. 
 3. 10; trop. Plut. Brut 1. In N. T. trop. 
 to rouse up upon or against any one, to stir 
 up against, c. ace. et em nva Acts 1 3, 50 ; 
 ace. et KOTO. TWOS 14, 2. Sept. for T 1 :?" 
 2 Chr. 21, 16 ; n"pn 1 Sam. 22, 8. 
 
 7rei, conj. (em,) since, of time and alsc 
 causal. 
 
 1 . Of time, since, after that, when, with 
 Indie, aor. Luke 7, 1 eVel e tVXjjpoxre 
 irdirra KT\. Sept. for "^HX Gen. 46, 30. 
 Luc. D. Deor. 6. 2. Xen/Cyr. 6. 2. 21. 
 
 2. Of cause or motive, since, seeing that, 
 because ; always in the apodosis, which may 
 however stand first; so with the Indie. Kiih- 
 ner { 338. 1. Matt. 18, 32 e rret irap(Ka\f(rds 
 fie. 27, 6. Mark 15, 42. Luke 1, 34. Jonn 
 
 13, 29. 19, 31. 1 Cor. 14, 12. 2 Cor. 11, 
 18. 13, 3. Heb. 2, 14. 5, 2. 11. 6, 13. 11, 
 11. (3 Mace. 2, 16. Palaeph. 32. 11. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 4. 6.) With other particles; as 
 fir d a pa, since then, since in that case. 
 1 Cor. 5, 10. 7, 14; eirel /i^Trore, since 
 never, Heb. 9, 17, comp. Winer } 59. 5 ulL 
 
268 
 
 t o Z v, since therefore, Heb 4,6. Spec, 
 before questions implying a negative, and 
 sometimes after a negative or conditional 
 clause, it takes the sense for then, for else, 
 for otherwise, see Buttm. 149. m. 5. Matth. 
 j 618 ; so Rom. 3, 6 ret TT&JS icpivcl 6 3eo? 
 rov Koa-p-ov ; 1 Cor. 14, 16. 15,29. Heb. 10, 
 2 ; also Rom. 11, 6 bis, r 17 X"P ls oujceVt 
 yivfTM \apis KrX. i. e. for tlien,for otherwise, 
 v. 22. Heb. 9, 26. So Sept. Job 35, 7. Luc. 
 D. Deor. 4. 2. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 31. 
 
 7ret,8ij con}. (eVet &?,) in Gr. writers 
 usually of time, since ; after that, Luc. D. 
 Deor. 9. 2. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 1. In N. T. 
 only causal, si?zce indeed, since now, because 
 now, inasmuch as, always in the apodosis, 
 which however may stand first ; so with the 
 Indie. Matt. 21, 46 eVetfiij us irpocprjrriv av- 
 TOV flxov. Luke 11, 6. Acts 13, 46. 14, 12. 
 15, 24. 1 Cor. 1, 21. 22. 14, 16. 15, 21 
 tirei8r] yap 81 ai/3pco7rou 6 Sdz/aros KT\. 
 [2 Cor. 5, 4.] Phil. 2, 26. Sept. Jer. 48, 7. 
 Hdian. 4. 4. 4. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 4, 6, 9. 
 
 eVaS^Trep, conj. i. e. eVetfiij strength 
 ened by irep, since now, inasmuch as now, 
 Luke 1, 1. Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 20. JSschin. 
 Dial. Socr. 2. 12. Plato Prpt. 357. a. 
 
 eirel&ov, aor. 2 referred to pres. e\opa<a, 
 see in eifico ; to look upon, to behold, Sept. 
 for MX n Jon. 4, 6. Plut. Pomp. 18 ult. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. T 7. 7. In N. T. from the Heb. to 
 look upon, to regard, e. g. with kindness, 
 for good ; Luke 1, 25 eV rj^tpais ais eVel&ej/ 
 d(pf\(lv, i. q. f TTCtSeV p.f a<peXe/ KT\. (Sept. 
 and rtX i Ex. 2, 25. Ps. 31, 8.) Also with 
 disfavour, for evil ; with rf c. ace. Acts 4, 
 29 f7ri8e TCIS direiXas awrcoi/. Sept. and i"l&J"l 
 Ex. 5, 21. 
 
 eTret/u, (eijui to go.) to g-o or come upon 
 or towards, to come on, to approach, Hdian. 
 7. 5. 2. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 61 ; of time, Xen. 
 Hell. 1. 2. 14. In N. T. part, finwv, fern. 
 firiova-a, Buttm. $ 108. V, spoken only of 
 the succeeding day or night, the coming, 
 the following, the next ; Acts 7, 26 rfj fie 
 firiova-j] rjp-fpa, and with 7j/*p a impl. Acts 
 16,11. 20, 15. 21, 18. (Comp. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 464.) Acts 23, 11 riy fie eV. WKTI. 
 Sept. for wn Prov. 27, 1. So Hdian. 2. 14. 
 5. Xen. An. 1. 7. 2. 
 
 eVetVep, conj. i. e. eVei strengthened by 
 n-ep, since indeed, since now, Rom. 3, 30. 
 See Herm. ad Vig. p. 403, 784. Hdian. 1. 
 12. 12. Plato Rep. 529. c. 
 
 GTreicraywyrj, fjs, f], (eio-aycoyi?,) pr. a 
 leading in upon, i. e. the bringing in, intro 
 duction of some thing additional, trop. Heb. 
 
 7, 19 eVeto-. Kpeirrovos Ajr&of. Pr. Jos, 
 Ant. 11. 6. 2. 
 
 evretcrep^o/iat, f. e Xeuo-o/iat, (eio-e pxo- 
 p.ai,) to come in upon, to come upon, Luke 21 , 
 35 Lachm. 1 Mace. 16, 16. Dem. 1155. 
 
 8. Plato Prot. 316. a. 
 
 adv. (etra,) marking the sequence 
 of one thing upon or after another in time, 
 thereupon, thereafter, then, next ; see Passovv 
 s. v. Matth. ^603 ult. Luke 16, 7 reira 
 eVe pw fiirfv. Gal. 1, 21. James 4, 14. Sept. 
 for "inx Prov. 20, 17. (Palaeph. 6. 1. Xen. 
 An. 4. 8. 11.) Emphat. before a verb after 
 a preceding participle, Buttm. $ 144. n. 13; 
 so Mark 7, 5 comp. v. 2, KCU I86vres eWei- 
 ra (TrepatTaxriv avrov. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 1. 2.) 
 Also with a more definite note of time added ; 
 John 11, 7 fnfiTa \j.era TOVTO. Gal. 1, 18 
 eVmra fifra err] rpia. 2, 1; Spec, as mark 
 ing the order of time in a series ; e. g. Trpco- 
 TOV . . . fneira, first . . . then, next, afterward. 
 1 Cor. 15, 46. 1 Thess. 4, 17. Heb. 7, 2. 
 James 3, 17. (Palaeph. 5. 4. Xen. Mem. 1. 
 7. 2.) Or also irp&rov . . . Sfimpov . . . rpi- 
 TOV . . . fTTfira . . . tlra, 1 Cor. 12, 28. 16, 
 6. 7. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 14.) So too irportpov 
 . . . fTTfira Heb. 7, 27 ; cmapxr] evretra 
 1 Cor. 15, 23. 
 
 eTre/ceiva, adv. (eV fKflva Buttm. 115. 
 n. 5,) on that side of, beyond, c. gen. Acts 7, 
 43 (ireKdva BafivXavos. Sept. for ttXSrl a 
 Am. 5, 7. Pol. 3. 22. 5. Xen. Hell. 5. 1. 10. 
 
 eTTKT6lV(i), f. Tfvu>, (e /cretVco.) to stretch 
 out upon, to extend further, e. g. TOVS \6yovs 
 Plut. de Mus. 44. In N. T. Mid. to stretch 
 out oneself towards, to reach forth towards, 
 c. dat. Phil. 3, 13 [14]. 
 
 ov, 6. (eVei/Si^o), an upper 
 garment, tunic, John 21, 7; i. e. the usual 
 tunic, Att. ^ITOJJ/, in distinction from the in 
 ner garment next the skin, v, hich was called 
 iiTroSvTTjy, Att. xira>i>i a-Kor, Lat. indusium ; 
 comp. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 418. Diet, ot 
 Antt. art. Tunica. Sept. for b^Sa 1 Sam. 
 18, 4. 2 Sam. 13, 18. Moeris, 
 Kal xirtov ArrtKa vnobvrrjs KM (Trf 
 
 v. -vvu>, f. ^o-w, (ev8va> v. -wo 
 q. v.) to put on over, trans. Jos. Ant. 5. 1 . 
 12. In N. T. only Mid. intrans. to put on 
 over one s other garments, to be clothed upon, 
 trop. of the new spiritual body, c. ace. 2 
 Cor. 5, 2 ; absol. v. 4 ; comp. in yv/ipo y no. 2. 
 Pr. Plut. Pelop. 1 1 tirev8. fcr^fJTas yvrai- 
 Kfias TOIS 3o>pai. 
 
 eTTepXpfAaif f. fVeXevcro/nai, (tp^o/iat,) 
 aor. 2 fVrjXSoi . to go or come vpon or over 
 
269 
 
 eiri 
 
 any place ; e. g. with ace. dypoV Plut. 
 Pomp. 30. Xen. An. 7. 8. 25 ; 6 NeiXos 
 fTrepx- TO Ae Xra Hdot. 2. 19. Sept. and 
 R1 3 Ez. 47, 9. In N. T. to come on, upon, 
 to, any place or person, e. g. 
 
 1. Of place, to come to, to come thither, to 
 arrive, absol. Acts 14, 19 fTrfjX^ov 8e OTTO 
 Avrioxftas. Sept. for xi 2 Jiulg. 18, 17. 
 Pol. 2. 7. 3. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 13. 
 
 2. Of persons, to come upon in a hostile 
 manner, to fall upon, to attack, absol. Luke 
 11, 22. Sept. and xia 2 Sam. 30, 23. So 
 Hdian. 8. 4. 8. Plut. Cons, ad Apoll. 21 ; c. 
 dat. Xen. Hell. 7. 4. 24. Trop. of evils, 
 calamities, to come upon, to befall, with eVi 
 c. ace. Luke 21,35. Acts 8, 24. 13,40; 
 c. dat. Luke 21, 26; absol. James 5, 1. 
 Sept. and Ki a Judg. 9, 57. Mic. 3.11. So 
 Luc. Amor. 23. Hdot. 1. 30. Spec, of the 
 Holy Spirit as resting upon and operating 
 in a person, with eVi c. ace. Luke 1, 35. 
 Acts 1, 8. Comp. Sept. for ^B3 1 Sam 
 11,7. 
 
 3. Part. f7repxofj.fvos, spoken of times, 
 ages, destiny, coming on, impending, fu 
 ture ; Eph. 2, 7 tv Tols aluxn rots fTrepxo- 
 (ifvois. Sept. TO. eVepxo/iera for H1S3 Is. 
 41, 22 ; rvi nx I S . 44 } 7. Fabr. Cod. pseud. 
 V. T. p. 191 Tt\os ijrfpx.6fji.fvav. Comp. 
 Hdot. 6. 2. Pol. 6. 19. 6. 
 
 eVepcoTa&J, &>, f. 7/o-w, (eparrdw,) to ask 
 at or of any one, to inquire of. 
 
 1. Genr. and c. dupl. ace. Mark 11, 29 
 e7rep<BT>]<ra> vp.as Kuya> eva Xoyoy. Luke 20, 
 40. Sept. for^X ^ 2 Sam. 14, 18. (Hdot. 
 9. 93. Plato Soph. 250. a.) With ace. and 
 rrepi c. gen. of thing, Mark 7, 17 firtipvTcw 
 di/Tov TTfpl TTJS Trapa/SoX?)?. (Hdot. 1. 32. 
 Diod. Sic. 3. 59 pen.) With ace. of person 
 and Xeycuf or the question itself, Matt. 12, 
 10 Kai fTTT]p<aTT)crav avTov, \eyovrfs. Mark 
 5, 9. Luke 3, 10. 14. Acts 1, 6. 1 Cor. 14, 
 35 ; absol. Matt. 22. 35. Acts 23, 34. Sept. 
 for bxa Gen. 38,21. 43,7. (2 Mace. 3. 37. 
 Xen. (Ec. G. 6.) With ace. of pers. and 
 infin. to ask, to require, Matt. 16, 1 ; so 
 Sept. and b Ps. 137, 3. 
 
 2. In a judicial sense, to question, to inter 
 rogate, c. dupl. ace. John 18, 21 ; c. ace. 
 of pers. and Xtywi/, Matt. 27, 11. Acts 5, 
 27 ; absol. Luke 23, 6. 
 
 3. From the Heb. eVeptBTaoj rov 3eoi>, 
 to ask or inquire after God, i. e. to seek God, 
 comp. in &ip-< <B no. 3. Rom. 10, 20, quoted 
 from Is. 65, 1 where Sept. for laps. + 
 
 eTrepdlTTJfjia, arcs, TO, (eVfpwraco,) a 
 question, inquiry, Hdot. 6. 67. Thuc. 3. 53. 
 In N. T. spoken of questions put to a 
 
 convert at baptism, pr. a questioning, exa 
 mination ; or rather by meton. of the whole 
 process and result, including the answers ; 
 1 Pet. 3, 21 fiaTmo-fJia, o-vvfibTjcrems ay. 
 fVepcoTT^a tls 3w . So Lat. interrogatio 
 for sponsio, Senec. de Benef. 3. 15. Others 
 render eVfpwrTj/ia els SeoV, inquiry or seek 
 ing after God, eomp. cVfpa>rua> f is TI 2 Sam. 
 11, 7; so Winer 5 30. 2 pen. Contra, 
 Neand. Gesch. d. Pfllanz. u. Leit. der chr. 
 Kirche, I. p. 212. ed. 2. [Engl. I. p. 188.] 
 
 CTTe^ft), f. e 0/&>, (?x w :) aor - 2 fTrfcrxov, 
 to have or hold upon, e. g. "Sprjw i TroSas r- 
 eT^e Horn. Od. 17. 410 ; to hold out towards, 
 to direct upon, e. g. TOOV CTKOTTO) orc^ct* 
 Pind. Ol. 2. 160. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Trop. of the mind, to fix the mind up 
 on, to give heed to, to mark, with ace. vovv 
 impl. and with dat. Acts 3, 5 6 Se eVelxfJ 
 avToIs. 1 Tim. 4, 16; foil, by TTWS, Luke 
 14, 7. Aristoph. Lysist. 490. Hdot. 6. 96. 
 Pol. 10. 41. 8 ; fully Luc. Alex. 4 ult. ud 
 
 TOIS /J-fyiCTTOlS eTTf^elV TOV VOVV. 
 
 2. As in comm. Engl. to hold up or on, 
 i. e. to hold back, to detain any one, Hdian. 
 6. 5. 18. Thuc. 1. 129 ; hence in N. T. in- 
 trans. or with eavrov impl. to hold oneself 
 back, i. e. to remain, to stay, to wait ; Acts 
 19, 22 avros eVeV^f xpovov els TTJV AcrtW. 
 Sept. for brn Gen. 8, 10 ; Viri 2 Chr. 18, 
 5. 14. 2 Mace. 5, 25. Pol. 2. 36. 4. Xen. 
 Hell. 1. 6. 6. 
 
 3. to hold on upon, to hold fast ; trop. 
 C. ace. Phil. 2, 16 Xoyov fays fTrexovres, 
 holding fast the word of life, persevering in 
 the Christian faith and life ; here firfxovrts 
 connects back with a/zf/i7rroi /cat axe patot 
 in v. 15. So Artemid. 1. 5, 16 TUV UVTOV 
 fW^ft Xdyoi/ davfito ij ^Svydrnp. Hesych. 
 (nfxovTfs KpaTovyres. Others here render 
 eirexovres, having in possession, possessing, 
 and refer it to the subject of <paivfo-%e in v. 
 15; so Luc. Zeux. 4. Xen. Conv. 8. I 
 Others again translate : holding forth, pre 
 senting, exhibiting; so Horn. Od. 16. 444 
 olvov. II. 22. 83 fjM^ov. But neither oi 
 these fully suits the context. 
 
 7ry)pea(i), f. ao-w, (fVr/pf ia, Horn, dpcta,) 
 to threaten, Hdot 6. 9 ult. In N. T. to use 
 despitefully, to abuse, to insult, c. ace. Matt. 
 5, 44. Luke 6, 28. (So absol. Hdian. 7. 7. 
 7; c. dat. Dem. 519. 13. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 
 16.) Spec, to accuse falsely, to slander, c. 
 ace. 1 Pet. 3, 16. So absol. Hdian. 7. 3.4. 
 Pass. ib. 2. 4. 16. 
 
 eVt, a prep, governing the genitive, da 
 tive, and accusative, with the primary signif. 
 077, upon. 
 
270 
 
 1. With the GENITIVE. 1. Of Place, 
 in a variety of relations, which yet may 
 be comprehended under two leading ones, 
 viz. rest upon, on, in, at ; and motion upon, 
 to, towards ; comp. Passow rt I. A. Buttm. 
 } 147. n. 1. Kiihner 296. Matth. $ 584. 
 Winer 51. g. 
 
 a) Of place where, after words implying 
 rest upon, on, in, at, and the like. a) Genr. 
 and c. gen. of place ; Matt. 4, 6 eVl x L P v 
 dpov<ri (re. 9, 2 eVri K\IVT]S /Sf/SX^/Luj/oi/. 16, 
 19 bis, eVi T^S yrjs. 18, 19. 24, 30 ep^o- 
 jj.tvov eVl TO>V v((pf\a>v. 27, 19 Ka^rjfjifvov 
 avTov eVt TOU /3^/xaros. (Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 12.) 
 Mark 8, 4 eV cp^/uar, on or m the desert. 
 v. 6. 14, 51. Luke 4. 29 opous (/> ov 17 
 noXis (OKo8. (Diod. Sic. 3. 47.) Luke 5, 18. 
 12, 3. John 6, 19 TrfpiiraTovvra eVt TTJS 3a- 
 \do-(TT]s, walking on the lake. 19, 31 tva /xi) 
 p-fivy firl TOV cTTavpov. 20, 7. Acts 8, 28. 
 20, 9 eVi TTJS %vpi8os, upon or z n the win 
 dow. 21,40. James 5, 5. Rev. 1, 20 eVi -njs 
 8f^ids pov, on or in the hollow of my hand, 
 comp. v. 16. 4, 9 /ca3. eVl TOU SpdVov. 5, 10. 
 1 3 tirl T/Jy SaXdo-o^s 1 eo~Ti, i. e. on the bot 
 tom of the sea, in the deep. 7, 3. 10, 1. 19, 
 19 KaSrj^t. eVl TOV "ITTTTOV. 20, 11. al. So 
 Luke 22, 21 f] x e P A 161 " f/*oC eVl T?;? rpa- 
 Tre fijff upon the table ; and so v. 30 Iva eVSi- 
 jTe KOI TvivrjTe eVl T^y TpaTrefas fJ-ov, i. e. of 
 the things upon my table, in Engl. at my 
 table ; comp. Winer 51. g. Also Matt. 21 , 
 19 i8o>i> crvKrjv p.iav tnl TTJS 68ov, upon the 
 way, i. e. by the way-side. John 21, 1 Vi 
 TTjS SaXacro-T/j, on //ie shore of the lake ; so 
 Sept. and bs 2 K. 2, 7. Dan. 8, 2. (Pol. 1. 
 44. 4 eVi Tr]s SaX. fo-TTjo-av. Xen. An. 4. 
 3. 28.) Trop. Matt. 18, 16 eVt (rro>aros 
 Suo papTvpav ij Tpi>v trraS^ TTUZ/ prjfji.a. Mark 
 12, 26 et Luke 20, 37 eVi -rijs /3arov, i. e. 
 on or in the section of the bush ; comp. 
 Rom. 11.2 in eV no. 1. a. With gen. of 
 pers. Acts 21, 23 avSpfs fvx^v e^oi/rey e^) 
 tavTwv, having a vow upon them. /3) Spec. 
 before, in presence of, chiefly of judges, wit 
 nesses, or the like r as is said in Engl. to be 
 led or brought up before, to stand before a 
 court ; comp. Matth. 584. 77. Winer $ 51. 
 g. c. So c. gen. of pers. Matt. 28, 14 tav 
 itKovaftfj TOVTO eVl TOV Tfyefjiovos. Mark 13, 
 9. Acts 23, 30. 24. 19. 20 <rrdvros pov eVi 
 TOV crvveb piov. 25, 9 KpiVecrSat eV euov. v. 
 26. 26, 2. 1 Cor. 6, 1. 6. 1 Tim. 6, 13. So 
 genr. 2 Cor. 7, 14 17 K.a\>xn<r is V e>7 " TiVou, 
 i. e. our boasting before Titus, comp. et TI 
 HVTW KeKai/xfj^ciL ibid. Once c. gen. of tri 
 bunal, Acts 25, 10 eVl TOU ftr;p.aTOS KaiVa- 
 pos. So.Dem. 1367. 17 eVi TOV diKacrrrjpiov. 
 Diod. Sic. 11. 55 eVl rou KoiroG trweSpiou 
 
 ov. Luc.Philops. 22. Xen. Hell 
 6. 5. 41 owe eV o\iya>v p.a.prupa>v. 
 
 b) Of place whither, after words imply 
 ing motion or direction upon, to, towards, or 
 the like, with subsequent rest upon. Matt. 
 26, 12 /3aXoCo-a TO p.vpov enl TOV rrco/taToy 
 pov. Mark 4, 26 /3dX?7 TOV <nv6pov enl TJJS 
 yqy. 9, 20. 14, 35. Luke 8, 16. 22, 40 ye- 
 
 VO/JLfVOS 8e fTTl TOV TOTTOV. John 6, 2 <TT]p,fl(l 
 
 a HRMCI eirl TWV dcr^fvovvrcov, which he did 
 upon or to the sick. (Act. Thorn. 16.) John 
 6, 21 TO TrXotov eyevtTo ejrl TTJS yrjs, at the 
 land, i. e. on the shore. 19, 19 eSrjKfv eirl 
 TOV a-Tavpov. 21, 11. Acts 5, 30 /cpeyzd- 
 a-avTfs eirl v\ov. (Sept. for bs> Gen. 40, 1 9.) 
 Acts 10, 11. Heb. 6, 7. Jame s 5, 17. Rev. 
 10, 2. 13, 16 iva 8axTiv avTols ^dpay/ia eVt 
 T^y xpo y KTX. Trop. enl xapS/ay Heb. 8, 
 10. 10, 16. Sept. Job 17, 16. Hdian. 6. 3. 
 4 eVi [3r ][j.aTos d^eXScoi/. Thuc. 1. 116 ir\flv 
 eirl 2dpov. Xeri. Cyr. 7. 2. 1 eirl 
 
 2. Of Time, i. e. time w)7ze, as in Engl. 
 upon a time, i. q. on, at, in, during ; Heb. 
 1, 2 et 2 Pet. 3, 3 V eV^drou TOU/ ij/xepw; . 
 (Luc. D. Mort. 11.2 eVi /itay fjfjifpas. Hdot. 
 5. 117.) Of time as marked by cotempo- 
 rary persons or events, Buttm. 5 147. n. 1. 
 Matt. 1,11 rt TTJS fjifTOiKfa-ias Ba/3. a< rte 
 time of. Acts 11, 28 Vl KXawSt ou, in the 
 days of, under. Mark 2, 26. Luke 3, 2. 4, 
 27. (Sept. Zech. 1,1. Diod. Sic. 17. 14. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 31. ib. 8. 8. 15.) So of 
 actions <;T specifying time, e. g. Vi T>V 
 Trpoaevx^v /JLOV, in my prayers, i. e. when I 
 pray, Rom. 1, 10. Eph. 1, 16. Philem. 4. 
 So Diod. Sic. 4. 3 eVi TU>V Sfiirvav. 
 
 3. Trop. spoken : a) Of power, au 
 thority, dignity, upon, oxer; Matt. 2, 2^ 
 /3a<rtXevei eVi TTJS lovStu ay, oxer Judca. 
 Rom. 9, 5 et Eph. 4, 6 6 u>v eVt Travrani Sfoy. 
 Acts 8, 27 os TJV eVt Trdarjs TTJS ydrjs avTijs. 
 
 12, 20 TOV eVt TOU KOITUVOS- (Arr. Epict. 3. 
 22. 15 01 Vi KoiTooi or. (So KaSt o-T^t eVri 
 Ttwr Matt. 24, 45. Luke 12, 42. Acts 6, 3. 
 (Sept. for 3 ^pS?? Gen. 39, 5.) Rev. 2, 26 
 Saxrw e^ovaiav enl T>V f%va>v. 9, 11. 17, 18. 
 20, 6 ; comp. in (t-ovo-ia no. 3. a. So genr. 
 Sept. and i? Gen. 44, 1. 4. Dan. 6, 7. 
 Athen. 13. 7 6 eVt TI)S E<p(crov. Diod. Sic. 
 
 13. 47 of firl T>V tpyaiv. Dem. 238. 13 6 
 eTri TU>V OTT\O>V cTTpaTTjyos. Xen. An. 3. 2. 36. 
 Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 164, 474. 
 
 b) Of a topic of discourse, upon, of, con 
 cerning, only after verbs of speaking or 
 writing; Gal. 3, 16 ov Xey o>? eVt TroXXcot 
 aXX is > e vof. .Cl. V. H. 1. 30. Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 1 2 eTTt TOV SeoO Xyovra. Dem. 1392, 
 1 23. Plat. Charmid. 155. d. 
 
TTl 
 
 271 
 
 c) Of manner, where ri c. gen. forms 
 a periphrase for an adverb, e. g. *V 0X77- 
 Sft ac, upon the truth, i. e. of a trutli, truly, 
 
 1. q. d\r)^s, Mark 12, 14. 32. Luke 4, 25. 
 Acts 4, 27. 10, 34. Sept. for OSBX Job 9, 
 
 2. 19, 4. 1 Esdr. 6, 10 eVt <nrov8js. Jos. 
 Ant. 5. 1. 2 eV dfttias i. q. aSewy. Diod. 
 Sic. 13. 12 <: < ijo-vx/af. Dem. 484. 20 eVt 
 *catpoG. 
 
 II. With the DATIVE. 1. Of Place, in 
 the same sense and circumstances as eVt c. 
 gen. so that the Greek poets often use the 
 gen. and dat. with em interchangeably for 
 the sake of metre, while in prose the dat. is 
 more usual ; see Passow in n II. A. Buttm. 
 9 147.11.1. Kuhnerj296.il. Winer 52. c. 
 Matth. ^ 585 sq. 
 
 a) Of place where, after words implying 
 rest upon, on, in, at ; comp. above in I. 1. a. 
 a) Pr. Matt. 14, 8. 11 eVi TTIVCUU. Mark 2, 
 4 t(f> (a KdTfKfiro. 4, 38. 6, 39 enl TW xP~ 
 TO) avaK\lvai. v. 55 eVt TOIJ Kpa/3/3aTotr. 
 11, 7. Luke 19, 44 Xt 3oz> eVi Xi3a>. 21, 6. 
 John 11, 38. Acts 27, 44. Rev. 19* 14 $ 
 TTTTrots XfVKots. al. saep. So Hdian. 8. 1. 8 
 eVi TreSio). Hdot. 5. 12 ayyos eVi 777 KecpaXy 
 f)(ovcrav. Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 1 Kvpos <p ITTTTW. 
 /3) As implying close proximity, contact, 
 tt/wn, at, close by, Matt. 24, 33 eyyvs eo-ri 
 tTTi 3upai?. John 4, 6 eVaSefero eVt 77; Tnjyj/, 
 by the fountain, i. e. on the side of the well. 
 5, 2. Acts 3, 10 eVi TV/ TruX;?. v. 11. 5, 9 
 ri 777 3upa. Rev. 21, 12. Comp. Matth. 
 586. y. Winer 1. c. So Hdian. 8. 2. 6 
 TroXiy eVi 3aXaT777 rrpoKfip.fvrj. Xen. An. 1. 
 2. 8 eVl Taty Trrjyals. Cyr. 1. 3. 2. y) 
 With dat. plur. of persons, i. q. with, among, 
 
 \Acts 28, 14 fir avrols enififlvai. 2 Cor. 7, 7 
 e <p v/uv sc. u>v. So Eur. Ipli. in Aul. 660. 
 Diod. Sic. 14. 113 Swaros &>v firl rols 77X77- 
 3riv. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 27. 
 
 b) Of place whither, after words implying 
 motion or direction upon, to, towards, with 
 the idea of subsequent rest upon. a) 
 Genr. Matt. 9, 16 et Mark 2. 21 oiSets 
 on/3uXXei eVi/3Xr7/ia errl t/icmw TraXatw. 
 John 8, 7 Xi 3oj> eV CVT^ /3aXVa>. Acts 8, 
 16. Matt. 16, 18. So Mark 5,33 6 ytyo- 
 vtv eV avrrj. Acts 5, 35 eVl rots uvSp. rov- 
 TOIS ri p.f\\erf Trpdcrcrfiv. Sept. SaKruXoi/ 
 f-m^evTfs eVi ord/tart, Ileb. 5, Job 29, 9. 
 So Hdian. 2. 9. 7 apupfvov Vl roiy cuiroty. 
 Horn. II. 1. 55 eVi <ppf(T\ 3eli>ai. Luc. Toxar. 
 23 fTrpagfv V avroly. Xen. An. 5. 2. 12. 
 #) Trop. of a direction of mind towards any 
 one, e. g. in a friendly sense, 2 Cor. 9, 14 
 Xapiv rov 3foC e tp vp.lv. Luke 18, 7 paicpo- 
 Zvp-iov en avTois. (Sept. and 3? 2 Sam. 
 14, 1. Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 27.) Also in a hos 
 
 tile sense, against, Luke 12, 52. 53 
 p.tpicrp.fvoi rpels firl 8v<rl KOL 8vo eVt rpicri 
 irarrip (p vlw (cat vto? eVi irarpi. Rev. 12, 
 17 topytVS?; TT! r^ yui/aiKt. So Ecclus. 7, 
 12. Dem. 665. 15. J3L V. H. 4. 5 eWa tVi 
 e^aty. Comp. Matth. 5 586. S. 
 
 2. Of Time, i. e. time w/ien, chiefly aa 
 marking a definite period, upon, at, in. 
 
 a) Genr. Heb. 9, 26 C TTI trwreXeta TWV 
 aicavwv. As marked by cotemporary events, 
 actions, institutes ; 2 Cor. 3, 14 eVi 777 dva- 
 y^axret T/^f TraX. 8ia%r]Krjs, i. e. during the 
 reading, whenever it is read. Phil. 1, 3 eVi 
 7rao77 777 p-veia vp.>v, at every mention, as 
 often as I think of you. Heb. 9, 15 eVi 777 
 TrpcaTTj o~ia%r)Kr), during the first covenant, 
 while it was in force. Also implying merely 
 co-existence in time, 2 Cor. 7, 4 eVt TRICT^ 
 777 3Xt\^et 77/xcoi/, i. e. upon, in, during, all 
 our affliction. Eph. 4, 26 6 17X10? p.rj eViSve- 
 ro> 7rt rw Trapopytcr/iO) vp,a>v, upon (during) 
 your wrath, while your wrath continues ; 
 comp. Deut. 24, 15 where Sept. for is. 
 Mark 6, 52 ou yap <rvpi}Ma> eVi rot? aprois, 
 for they understood not at the time of /fie 
 bread, comp. v. 41 sq. Judith 1, 16 e <p 
 Tjp-fpais (KaTov. Pol. 3. 51. 12. Hdian. 2. 6. 
 19 eVt 777 TTop-Trfj, during. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 
 12 eVi T-<B SetTrvw. Mem. 1. 5. 2. 
 
 b) Spec, after, immediately following rip- 
 on ; Acts 11, 19 SXt ^eojf rfjs yevop.fvrjs eVt 
 Sre^uvw, i. e. immediately after the death of 
 Stephen, comp. Acts 8, 1 ; others here ren 
 der on account of, as in no. 3. f, below. 
 John 4, 27 eVt TOVTW, upon this, thereupon. 
 Dem. 927. 3. Xen. Hell. 4. 4. 9. Cyr. 
 
 2. 3. 7 dvecrTT) 8 eV ai>ro> <I>fpavXa?. An. 
 6. 1. 11, 12 eVt rovTca. 
 
 3. Trop. spoken : a) Of power, author 
 ity, care over, upon, over ; Matt. 24, 47 et 
 Luke 1 2, 44 eVt Traai TOLS vTrdp^ovcriv avrov 
 Karaa-TTja-fi avrov. Comp. Matth. $ 586. . 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 164, 474. Dem. 21. 19. 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 3. 28. An. 4. 1. 13. 
 
 b) As marking addition or accumulation 
 upon or to something already mentioned or 
 implied, upon, unto, besides. Matt. 25, 20. 
 22 aXXa raXaira eWpS/jcra V auroT?. Luke 
 
 3, 20. 16, 26 eVi TraVt rouroi?, besides all 
 this. Eph. 6, 16. Col. 3, 14. 1 Cor. 14, 16 
 Trcoy tptl TO iip.i)v eVt 777 077 (vxapicrria. Phil. 
 2, 27 Rec. Xv-rrr) eVi \v-rrrj. Heb. 8, 1. Comp. 
 Matth. 586. y, ult Test. XII Patr. p. 
 523 rl Tracrt TOVTOLS. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 38. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 25 eVi Se TTOO-I rovrotf. Eur 
 Iph. Tanr. 197 (povos eVl fpova. Luc. D 
 Mort. 1. 3. 
 
 c) Of that upon which any thing rests 
 as a last s, foundation, support ; comp. Wi- 
 
272 
 
 7Tl 
 
 net ^52. c. c. a) Genr. Matt. 4, 4 et 
 Luke 4, 4 rjv OVK fir aprco povio, dXX eVi 
 Trairi prjfMTi. rX. io Zive upon, i. e. to sus 
 tain or support life upon, quoted from Dcut. 
 8, 3 where Sept. for >? n;n. (Athen. 10. 
 43. Max. Tyr. 27. 6 Pionvfiv eVi ro3 oiVw. 
 Plato Alcib. 1. 4. 105. e, OIK ai/ av p,oi fio/cets 
 t SeXeti 7rt Touroiy /xdVoty 17 P.) After words 
 implying hope, trust, confidence upon or iw 
 any p erson or thing ; Rom. 15, 12 eV avrw 
 f%vr] eXmova-iv. 1 Tim. 6, 17. (2 Mace. 2, 
 18.) Mark 10, 24 TreTroiSorar eVi rot? x/"?- 
 fjiacriv. Luke 11, 22. 24, 25 TricrTfVfiv eVt 
 Tracrii ofy KrX. 1 Pet. 2, 6. Acts 14, 3 Trap- 
 pr](na6fJL(voi eVt ra> Kvpio). Also in the 
 phrase eV e \iri8i, upon or in Tiope, i. e. 
 resting upon hope, Acts 2, 26. Rom. 4, 18. 
 8, 20. Tit. 1, 2. al. So Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 18 
 eV dya^ifj fairl&t TTOVKIV. /3) Spec. eVi 
 ro> ovofjLari TWOS, upon the name of any 
 one, i. e. to do any thing upon or in the 
 name of a person, his name being the foun 
 dation oft which the act rests ; comp. Winer 
 ^52. c, ult. marg. Acts 4, 17. 18 di8da-Keiv 
 eVt TM 6v6p.aTL irjaov, to teach upon the name 
 of Jesus, i. e. resting upon his name, upon 
 him as the ultimate teacher and author. 5, 
 28. 40. Luke 24, 47. So Luke 9, 49 eVl 
 TO> ov. (TOV K/3uXXoi/ra ra Sai/ioVta, casting 
 out demons upon thy name, i. e. resting the 
 efficacy of their exorcism upon thy name. 
 Also Matt. 24, 5. Acts 2, 38 /SaTmo-ST? eVi 
 r<a ov. 1. Xp. be baptized upon the name of 
 Christ, i. e. the baptism being administered 
 upon the profession of his name. Matt. 18, 
 5 6s fdv 8fr]Tai Traidiov tv eVi TO> ovo/j-arl 
 P.OV, i. e. as himself resting upon and profess 
 ing my name, as a Christian, from Christian 
 principle. Mark 9, 37. Luke 9, 48. Sept. 
 for trttfa Deut. 18, 20. So Luc. Pise. 15 yof,- 
 TCIS eVi ro> r/p.fTepo) ovofj.a.Ti, TroXXa xul /xtapa 
 TrpaTTovras. Dem. 495. 7 ravr tVt TW TU>V 
 Sfcov ovopm Troiflv. 917. 28. Under the 
 same general idea of rest upon a basis may,, 
 likewise be included all the following speci 
 fications. 
 
 d) Of a topic of discourse, upon, of, con 
 cerning ; John 12, 16 on ravra V aurw 
 
 Luke 23, 38. Rev. 10, 11 
 eVt Xaoly KrX. 22, 16 fiaprv- 
 eVi TOLS eKK\r)(riaLs. Heb. 11, 4. 
 Comp. Winer 52. c. y. Matth. ^ 586. e. 
 Barnab. Ep. 5 6 irporpr/rfvcov eif avra. 
 Hdot. 1! 66. Luc. D. Mort. 10. 12 riTa</>t- 
 ovj Xo yofy eVi Ttw. Thuc. 2. 34. 
 
 e) Of a condition, provision, analogy, law, 
 upon or under which alone any thing takes 
 place. 1 Cor. 9, 10 eV e XTrt St aporpiav KT\. 
 Rom. 4, 18. 5, 12 see fully in lett. f. Heb. 
 
 7, 11. 8,6 StaS^Kj; rjris eTTt Kpe iTTOViv t-rray- 
 yeXiais vevofjLO^fTtjrai. 9, 17 Bia^rjKrj yap eVi 
 vexpols fiffta ia, i. e. a testament is only valid 
 the testator being dead. 10, 28 eVi 8va-li> f] 
 rpial fuipTvcriv UTroSf^o-Ket, i. e. was put to 
 death under two or three witnesses, upon 
 their testimony; comp. Deut. 17, 6 where 
 Sept. for h 3"^?, also Deut. 19, 15 where 
 Sept. eVt (rro /iaTor for * | 5~ 5 ? . See Winer 
 5 52. c. a. Matth. 585. /3. Hdian. 3. 12. 20 
 <p frfpais fcreXSuiv f\Tri(riv. Luc. D. Deor. 
 1. 2 ult. Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 23 eVi Ttwroty 
 f8o(rav Kill fXaftov rravres TCI Tricrrd. Hell. 
 
 3. 2. 19. 
 
 f ) Of the ground or motive, the exciting 
 cause of any action, upon, at, i. e. on ac 
 count of, because of. Matt. 19, 9 ^17 eVi Trop- 
 Vfiq. Luke 2, 20 alvovvres TOV Seen/ eVt tra- 
 <TIV KT\. 5, 5 eVi r&> pr]p.aTi crov ;^AaG r < T o 
 ft iKTvov. Acts 4, 21 fftot-a^ov TOV Seoi/ eVl 
 TW yeyoj/drt. Rom. 10, 19. 1 Cor. 1, 4. 
 2 Cor. 9, 15. al. See Matth. $ 585 ult. 
 Winer $ 52. c. /3. So Hdot. 1. 137. Luc, 
 Hermot. 80. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 12 eVi ra e av- 
 TO>I> Kepdei. Plato Conv. 206. b. Hence 
 f<f> y 10 , for eVt roi;r< ort, ora i7iis account 
 that, for that, because; 2 Cor. 5, 4 o-T6i>db- 
 /j.ei (BapoviJLfvoi, e(f> to ov SeXo/xev KrX. 
 (Thorn. Mag. e <p w, CIITI rou SioTt, eir Trap- 
 ^ too usually Rom. 5, 12 e cp 
 rj/jiapTov, for that (because) all 
 have sinned. Others here regard e<p <a as 
 for eVi rovrw ws v. wcrre, on //ie condition that 
 in that, thereioith that, with Indie, or Infin 
 Buttm. 5 150. m. 9. Kiihn. Ausf. Gr. 828. 2. 
 Matth. ^ 479. a ; comp. above in lett. e. So 
 Synes. Ep. 73. p. 221. c. ed. Petav. KOI TOV 
 fjXiov fidev eVt pr]Tois liv^panros f<p o ) Tev- 
 vabiov eypafyfv, on condition that (in that) 
 lie accused Gennadius. According to this 
 view Paul here affirms the universal co-exist 
 ence of sin and death, without making the 
 sin of each individual to be the direct cause 
 of his own death ; see De Wette in loc. 
 
 g) Of the occasion, the incidental cause, 
 upon or al which, by reason of which, any 
 thing takes place, upon, at, over, by reason of, 
 on account of. a) Genr. Acts 4, 9 et ;;/xe!s 
 o-jy/iepov dvaxp twfyzeS a eVi evepyecn cr KT\. 
 3, 16. 26, 6. 1 Cor. 8, 11 KCU aTroXelrat 6 
 datStVco* d8(\(p6s eVt TIJ 077 yvaxrei. Phil 
 2, 17. 3. 9. al. So Jos. Ant. 4. 5. 9 eW 
 P.VOV e-rrl fii ^et. Xen. Mem. 3. 14. 2 Vi TTO/W 
 TTOTe fpycj) avSpwTTOf d^o(pdyos KaXflTat. 
 /3) Spec, after words signifying an emotion 
 of mind, as joy, sorrow, astonishment, and 
 the like, upon, at, over ; comp. Matth. 399. 
 n. 1. Matt. 18, 13 ^cupei eV aurw 
 KrX. Luke 1, 14. 47 ^yaXXiWe eVi rw 
 
7Tl 
 
 273 
 
 15, 7. Rev. 11, 10. al. Mark 3, 5 orAXv- 
 novfjifvos enl TJ; 7rcopcoo-ei T/y K. 10, 22. 24. 
 Luke 19, 41 exXavo-ev en avrtj. Acts 8, 2. 
 James 5, 1. Rev. 18,9. 11. al. .Matt. 14, 14 
 e <Tn\ayxvi<T^Sr] V avrois. Mark 6, 34. al. 
 Matt. 18, "26 fj.aKpo^vfJirjcrov en c/ioi. V. 26. 
 Luke 18, 7. Matt. 7, 28 egvrXrjo-o-oiTo Vt 
 777 SiSaxi? avToC. 22, 33. Luke 1, 29 8if- 
 Tapa^Sj; enl T Xoyco. 5, 9. 9, 43. Acts 3, 
 12. (Jos. Ant. 6. 6. 3 17 enl 777 vi /c?; x a P<*- 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 35 -^aipetv eVi TIM. Luc. 
 D. Deor. 12. 1. ib. 25. 3 en aurw Saicpv- 
 ovcra. JEtl. V. II. 12. 41 tKTrXayeiy enl TIVI. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 27.) Likewise of the oc 
 casion of penitence and shame, 2 Cor. 12, 
 21 p.r] p.(Tavo7]crdvT(i)v enl rfj aKaSapo-iq. 
 Rom. 6, 21 ecp ois vvv enaia-^vve^e. So 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 8 ecp fio-xv^rj. 
 
 h) Of the purpose or end of any action, 
 etc. upon, unto, for ; comp. Winer 52. c. 8. 
 Matth. 585. /3. Gal. 5, 1 3 fytets yap en 
 e XeuSfpia eK\rj%T)Tf. 1 Thess. 4, 7. Eph. 2, 
 1.10. 2 Tim. 2, 14. Phil. 3, 12 < <j>, 
 (that) for which. 4, 10 ecp co, /or which; 
 interrog. Matt. 26, 50 Rec. <?< w,/w what? 
 wherefore? others < o. Also Acts 15, 14 
 Rec. enl rw ovopan avrov, where later edit, 
 omit eni. With dat. of pers. Acts 21, 24 
 Kal $(.ind.vrj<Tov en" O.VTOIS, see in 8anavda>. 
 Wisd. 2, 23. Hdiaii. 2. 1. 18 en oX3pco, 
 orl o-coTTjpt a. Thuc. 1. 73. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 3. 19. 
 
 i) Of the rule or model upon or In which 
 any thing is conformed, upon, aflsr, accord 
 ing to. Luke 1, 59 tKaXovv avrb enl TCO 
 ovonar- TOV narpbs avTov. Sept. and ^2 
 Ezra 2, 61. Neh. 7, 63. (1 Esclr. 4, 63". 
 Plut. Rom. 19 ult. KuXeio-3at p.i> Pw/jujv eVi 
 "Pw/iuXw Ti7i 770X11*. Plato Parm. p. 147. d.) 
 Also Rorn. 5, 14 ou a^apriycrdi/raj eVl rw 
 6/io:d>/xari r^y *crX. 2 Cor. 9, 6 bis, 6 OTre/- 
 peav en tvXoyiais, adv. bountifully. So 
 ^Eschyl. Supp. 625 eV oX?;3eta. 
 
 III." With the ACCUSATIVE. 1 . Of Place, 
 usually combining the ideas of motion and 
 subsequent rest upon ; comp. Winer 5 53. 1. 
 Kiihner j 296. III. Matth. 586. c. 
 
 a) As denoting motion (and subsequent 
 rest) upon or over any thing ; marking an 
 extension or spreading out in one or more 
 directions, i. q. along upon, along oier ; 
 e. g. a) Genr. Matt. 27, 45 O-KOTOS tytv- 
 (To (jrl Ttacrav rf/v yrjv. 10,34 /3aXfIi/ flpjjvr/v, 
 pdxaipav, eVi rfjv yrjv. 14. 19 TOVS o^Xovs 
 (ivciK\i:}r)vai errl rovs ^dprovs . \. 26 eVi rfjv 
 3uXacrcrai TrfpiTraroiJrra. v. 28. 29. 15, 35. 
 18, 12 eVi ra oprj iroptv^fis about upon the 
 mountains. 22, 9. 24. 16. Mark 4, 33 Vi 
 TO npo(TKr e pt iXaioi> KoSevScav i. e. stretched 
 18 
 
 upon. Luke 5, 36 eVi /3X;/za eVi^aXXet TTTI 
 t ^anoi . John 9, 6. Acts 7, 11. 21, 5. Rev 
 2, 17. 7, 1. 11. 8. 20,4 OVK f\a@ov TO x d- 
 pay/ia eVi ro fj.eTa>Trov. v. 9. al. So Matt. 13. 
 2 6 o^Xoy eTTi TOV aiyia\bv elcrTrjKfi, stood 
 or had stationed themselves along upon the 
 shore. Rev. 15, 2. Matt. 19, 28 ica3/o-f o-3e , 
 vjueiy eVi Sto&exa Spawns , i. e. along upon 
 the row or circle of thrones, as in Rev. 4, 4. 
 20, 4. (Horn. Od. 11. 577 tV twia Keiro 
 TTf XtSpa. 14. 120 or! TroXXa dXrj^Srjv. Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 27 6 crTpaTcucras eVi Tracrai/ xuipav. 
 Hdian. 4. 11. 12. Xen. Hell. 6. 5. 21.) 
 With ace. plur. of persons upon, over, to 
 wards all of whom, Matt. 5, 45 bis, eVi TTO- 
 vrjpoiis *a\ dyaSovy KT\. 12, 49 fKTfivas TT/V 
 X^pa Vt rovy /^aS^ray. Acts 19, 12. Rev. 
 14, 6 in some edit. So Horn. II. 10. 213 
 /cXeoy Trapray eV ai/3pa>7rouy. ^) Wliere 
 the motion is directed to a higher place, im 
 plying elevation or placing upon, i. e. up 
 upon, up ove.r, up to, out upon, also simply 
 upon, over. Matt. 4, 5 to-r/jo-o/ avrbv Vi 
 TTTfpvyiov TOV iepov. 5, 23. 9, 18. 13, 48 
 avaftifidcravrts enl TOV aiyioXoV. 21, 5 eVt- 
 (3f[3T)Ka>s eVi ovov, i. e. mounted upon. 22, 
 16 <pevytT<i>crav eVi ra oprj. 27, 29. Mark 8, 
 25. 10, 16 rtSeiy ray ^elpay eV aira. 11,2. 
 Luke 5, 11. 19 dva&dvres eVt TO Scop,a. 8, 27. 
 Acts 17, 19. 20, 13. 27, 43. 44 see in Sta- 
 o-cifa). Rom. 12, 20. (Palaeph. 1. 9 dvafr- 
 Pdcravrfs enl TOVS trnrovs, and so Xen. Conv. 
 9. 7. Palasph. 1. 10 dnfTpe^ov enl TCI oprj. 
 Cyr. 3. 1.4 eVt \6(pov KdTcxpevyei. Thuc. 7. 
 37 eVi TO Tei^rj-) Of a yoke, burden, taken 
 up and placed upon any one; Matt. 11, 29 
 (ipaTf TUV fvytfo /iov e<p v/j.ds. Acts 15, 10. 
 3latt. 23, 4 <popTia . . . eVmSeacrti eTrl Tovy 
 mp.ovs TOIIS ai/3p. ileb. 8, 8 trop. of a cove- 
 vant. Trop. of fear, evil, guilt, punishment, 
 which come upon any oue as a burden, as 
 something laid upon one ; so after ytVetrSai, 
 enepxea-^ai, fp^fo-3at, enininTfiv, and the 
 like ; Matt. 23, 35 on-coy eX3?; (p vp.as irav 
 alp.a SiKaioi . v. 36. Luke 1, 12. 65 Kal eye- 
 vero enl ndiras (pofiof. 21,, 34. 35 oby Trayiy 
 eVeXf vcre-at enl ndvTas. John 3, 36. 1 8, 4. 
 Acts 5, 28. 8, 1. 13, 11 ^eip Kvpiov enl a-e. 
 18, 6. Rom. 1,18. 15, 3. 1 Pet. 5, 7. In 
 like manner of good, prosperity, favour; 
 Matt. 10, 13 tXStVco TI elpfjvr) V/JLOIV en av- 
 TT\V sc. Trjv oiKiav. Luke 10, 6. Gal. 6, 16. 
 Acts 4, 33 x c l P ls %" * 7r Traway. Rom. 3, 22. 
 Also of a lot, any thing imposed by lot. 
 Acts 1, 26 enecrev 6 /cXr/poy errl MarSi aj/. 
 Sept. for b b-n-in bS3 J on . 1,7; for a nbs 
 i? Lev. 1 6, 9. y) W T here the motion is 
 directed to a lower place; Matt. 10, 29 ev 
 e avTaji ov necrflToi enl T^V yrjv- 1 3, 5. 7. 
 
ITT 
 
 274 
 
 eV/ 
 
 21, 44. 26, 7 KaTfxfev 6>7 T *]" wp^*!"- 
 Luke 22, 44. Acts 2, 3. Rev. 8, 10. 16, 2. 
 
 22, 5 6 2f6y $omel eV avTov?, i. e. like the 
 sun. (Diod. Sic. 2. 19 01 /iei/ firl rrjv yijv 
 fTwrrov. Xen. CEc. 18. 7.) Trop. of the 
 divine Spirit or power descending and abi 
 ding upon any one; Matt. 3, 16 TO irvtvua 
 cciTa{3cuvov Kal epx^fJ-fvov V avToV. 12, 18. 
 Luke 1, 35. 2, 25. 24, 49. al. 2 Cor. 12, 9. 
 Rev. 7, 15. 
 
 b) Of place whither, implying motion up 
 on, to, towards, any place or object as a 
 limit, aim, end, with subsequent rest there 
 upon, a) Pr. and genr. e. g. after TTITTTW, 
 tTrtTrtTTTo), as iriiTTfiv eirl irpoo-&>irov, to fall 
 upon one s face, i. e. forwards, Matt. 26, 39. 
 Luke 5, 12. Rev. 7, 11. al. (Xen. Yen. 10. 
 13 irliTTfiv firl o-To>a.) Matt. 15, 20 eVeVe- 
 aev (irl TOV Tpdxrf^ov aiirov. John 21, 20. 
 Acts 10, 25 irecrwv eVi roiis iroftas, at his 
 feet. Luke 9, 62 firiftdXav rf]v x f ~ l P a (7T> 
 (IpnTpov. (Jos. Ant. 6. 11. 8 d<cdi/rta /SaXaw 
 eTTi TOV OTKOTTOV. Diod. Sic. 2. 19 err avr^v 
 Togcvoras. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 29 eVt (ritoirbv 
 /SaXXeii/.) So after verbs of going, coming, 
 conducting, collecting, and the like, where it 
 is equiv. to irpos c. accus. Matt. 3, 13 rare 
 napayivfTai 6 ir/o-oCr OTTO TTJS F. errl TOV lop- 
 Sui/jjf, upon the Jordan, i. e. to the region of 
 Jordan. 12, 28 effiao-ev ((ft v^as 17 jSatriXet a 
 T. 3. 5, 21 (rvvrjx^l X^ OS TT^? 6> "" avrov. 
 27, 27. Mark 11, 13. Luke 24, 24. John 6, 
 16. Acts 1, 21. 21, 32. 35. 2 Thess. 2, 1. 
 2 Tim. 4, 4. Heb. 6, 1. Rev. 7, 17. 18, 17. 
 al. So o~ura;(3J)i <u V. o-vvepxecr Sui em TO 
 avTo, upon or to the same place, together, 
 Matt. 22, 34. Acts 4, 26. 1 Cor. 11, 20; 
 also 1 Cor. 7, 5, see in elpi II. 8. e. (Pa- 
 laeph. 2. 10. Luc. D. Deor. 4. 1 ult. Hdian. 
 8. 5. 13 eVi TijV Pup-rjv ^cop^trai. Xen. An. 
 
 I . 4. 11 fVTtv^fv f(\avvei eVi TTJV ~Eii(ppd- 
 TT]v.~) Also of magistrates, judges, tribu 
 nals, upon, unto, i. e. up before. Matt. 10, 
 18 Kal tin. ^yf/ioVa? KUI /3acriXei? d^S^o-fo-Se. 
 Luke 12, 11. 58. Acts 16, 19. (Hdot. 3. 
 156. Xen. Lac. 4. 6 ayei avrbv eirl rovj 
 E(popovs, comp. An. 6. 6. 6 ayeiv npos r/a.) 
 Of an oracle, miracle, testimony, as coming 
 or Inking place upon, unto; Luke 3, 2 
 tyivfTO pij/J-a 3eoi) eVi Ia>avvr]v. Acts 4, 22 
 e(p y ov eyfyovei TO crrjy.fl.ov. 2 Thess. 1,10 
 TO napTvpiov f]iJ.>v [yevu^fvov] e vpas. 
 So ^? "Sn Ti in 1 Chr. 22, 8, Sept. dat. 
 fjioi ; usually Heb. ^X, Sept. irpos, Jer. 1,4. 
 
 II. al.) Also as implying addition, Matt. 6, 
 27 et Luke 12, 25 Trpoo-Seli/at eVi rr\v f]\iKiav 
 
 avrov n?ix vv ^ va - K ev - 22 > 18 ^ Wnere 
 the motion or direction upon implies also 
 an affect on of the mind for or against. 
 
 E. g. favourable, kindly, Luke 1, 48. 9, 
 38 eVi /3Xe\|/-ai eV! TOV vlov pov. 1 Pet. 3, 12 
 ot o03. Kvpiov firl TOVS SiKaiovs, i. e. are di 
 rected upon, quoted from Ps. 34, 16 where 
 Sept. for ^N ; comp. Ps. 31, 8. So of dis 
 favour, upon, against, Acts 4, 29 comp. in 
 eVeTSof. 1 Pet. 3, 12 TrpocruTrov Kvptait en t 
 noiovvras Kaxd, i. e. is against, quoted from 
 Ps. 34, 17 where Sept. for 2- In a hostile 
 sense, Matt. 10, 21 fnavacrTfjcrovTai rWa 
 eVi yovtls. Luke 14, 31 fp^o^icvw iif O.VTOV. 
 22, 52. 53. John 13, 18. Acts 7. 57 &pprj- 
 trav eV avTov. 13, 50. 51. 19, 16. 2 Cor. 10, 
 2. 2 Thess. 2, 4. So Sept. and 3 Gen. 16, 
 12. (Diod. Sic. 2. 19 eV OVT^V f@idfTo. 
 Hdian. 7. 1. 13, 16. Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 3, 4.) 
 Trop. of conduct or testimony against any 
 one, Mark 10, 11 /^ot^arat eV avTyv. Luke 
 9, 5 ei? fj.apTvpiov fir O.VTOVS. So in an im 
 precation. 2 Cor. 1 , 23 pdpTvpa TOV 3eov eVt- 
 KaXovfiai f-rrl TTJV 6/^.17 v^fvx^v. y) Of mea 
 sure, extent, upon, unto, i. e. ?/p to, about, 
 Rev. 21,16 f[j.fTpr]craTfjv iroXiv eVi o-raSi ovr 
 ScoSf/ca x XtdSwi . Comp. Matth. { 586. c. p. 
 1169 mid. (JEl. V. H, 3. 1 init. TO ^KOS eVt 
 Tfo-crapaKovTa 8if]Kfi <TTa8Lovs. Pol. 4. 39. 4. 
 Xen. An. 1. 7. 15.) Hence e $ oo-ov, i?i 
 so far as, in as much as, Matt. 25, 40. Rom. 
 11, 13; eVt ir\f iov, further on, further ; 
 the more, Acts 4, 17. 2 Tim. 2, 16. 3, 9; 
 comp. Vig. p. 628. (So < oo-ov Diod. Sic. 
 
 I. 93. Luc. Amor. 13; eVi ir\(lov JE\. V. 
 H. 1. 30 ult. Plato Phaedr. 261. b.) Trop 
 2 Tim. 3, 13 irpoKo^ova-iv erri TO ^eipoz/, 
 i. e. shall grow worse and worse. 
 
 c) Rarely of place where, after words 
 signifying rest upon, on, in, at, where how 
 ever the idea of previous motion upon is 
 implied. Rev. 5, 1 eVi TTJV be^idv, upon, 
 i. e. in his right hand. 20, 1. (Horn. II. 7. 
 238. Pol. 3. 34. 4. Xen. An. 6. 4. 1.) Spec, 
 after verbs of sitting or standing, upon, at, 
 by, near ; Matt. 9, 9 tuStrfiuvw eVi TO TeXw- 
 viov. Acts-10, 17 TTf(TTT](Tav firl TOV TTvXaiva. 
 
 II, 11. Rev. 3, 20. 8, 3. (Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 
 12 Ttapfivai fin TO.S %vpas. ib. 3. 3. 68 (TTO.V- 
 Tfs firl TUS flaoSovs.) So o~T^vai eVi TOVS 
 TToSa?, to stand up upon the feet, Acts 14, 10. 
 26, 16. Rev. 11, 11. Hence elvai eirl TO 
 avTo, upon the same place, i. e. adv. toge 
 ther, Luke 17, 35. Acts 1, 15; comp. in 
 avTos no. 3. a. /3. 
 
 2. Of Time, viz. a) Time how long, 
 during, for, Luke 4, 25 ^KXetVSi? 6 ovpavbs 
 eVt en; T/JIO. 13, 31. 18, 20. 19, 8. 10. 
 Heb. 11, 30. Comp. Winer 5 53. 1. 2. 
 Matth. 586. c. p. 1169. So Palaeph. 28. 2. 
 Pol. 4. 63. 8. Xen. An. 6. 6. 36. Hence, 
 firl XP OVOV > f or a ^ me Luke 18, 4 (Hdot. 
 
67TI 
 
 275 
 
 9,22); i(f> oo-oi xP ovov so 
 Gal. 4, 1 ; e< oo-oi/ sc. xpoVoi/, so Zong- as, 
 Matt. 9, 15 (Arr. Epict. 4. 10. 16) ; ecp IKOVOV 
 sc. xpovov, a long while, long, Acts 20, 11. 
 Adverbially, em TroXv, tnnroXv, long, Acts 
 28, 6 ; em TrXetoi/, longer, furtJier, Acts 20, 
 
 9. 24, 4. So (TrinoXv Luc. Toxar. 20. 
 Thuc. 2. 64 ; Vi irXeov Hdian. 8. 6. 7. 
 
 b) Of a term or limit of time upon the 
 coming of which any thing is done, upon, 
 at, about. Mark 15, 1 eu3 cos tVt TO Trpon. 
 Luke 10, 35 eVi TJJI> avpiov. Acts 3, 1 eVt 
 TTfv u>pav TTJS irpocrfvx^s. So Arr. Alex. M. 
 3. 18. 11 tmTijv ew. Horn. Od. 7.288. Pol. 
 
 10. 8. 7. Joined with an adverb in later 
 usage, e. g. eirl Tpis up to thrice, i. e ; 
 thrice, Acts 10, 16. 11, 10; see Winer 
 554 fin. n. 1. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 46, 48. 
 Comp. els rpis Jos. Ant. 5. 10. 4. Xen. 
 Cyr. 7. 1. 4. 
 
 3. Trop. spoken :. a) Of power, autho 
 rity, care over, upon, over; Luke 1, 33 j3a- 
 0-iXevcrfi eVt rbv OIKOV laKw/3. 9, 1 Svvaii.iv 
 Acai f^ova- iav eVt 8at/*owa. 10, 19. Acts 7, 
 10. Rom. 5, 14. Heb. 2, 7. 3, 6 X/>. is- 
 vlos errl TOV OIKOV avrov. Rev. 13, 7. al. So 
 Luke 2, 8 <f)v\do-<rovTf s (pv\aicas eVt T^f TTOI- 
 jiwp ai Tcoi . Sept. and bs Gen. 39, 5. Comp. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 474. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 58 
 Vi TOVJ Trefoils (caSio-rurai. Hell. 3. 4. 20. 
 
 b) As marking addition or accumulation, 
 upon, over; Phil. 2, 27 XUTTT; rt \irmjv, 
 where Rec. has eVi c. dat. see above in II. 
 3. b. 
 
 c) Of the object upon which an action or 
 discourse is directed, upon, over, in respect 
 to. a) Of an act, Mark 15, 24 aXXoirf? 
 K^rjpov eV aura. (Plato Rep. 617. e, pfyai 
 K\t)povs em Tii/a.) 1 Cor. 7, 36 see in acrxn- 
 fiaveoi. James 5, 14 irpoa-fv^do- Sua-av eV 
 avTov, let them pray OVER him, i. e. in his 
 behalf, in allusion also perhaps to the pos 
 ture. Winer 53. 1. marg. 0) Of the 
 subject of discourse or writing, upon, of, 
 concerning; Mark 9, 12 ytypaTrrai em TOV 
 vibv TOV avSp. v. 13. Rom. 4, 9. 1 Tim. 1, 
 18. Heb. 7, 13. Sept. for ^>? Jer. 25. 13. 
 So Palaeph. 49. 3 $ w aa-pa fTroirja-f. 
 
 d) Of that upon which the mind, heart, 
 feelings are directed, upon, towards, in ; 
 e. g. a ) With the idea of rest, after words 
 signifying trust, confidence, hope, upon, in; 
 Matt. 27, 43 Trenofifv eVt TOV 3edV. Acts 9, 
 42 TroXXoi tnicrTfvarav eVi TOV Kvpiov. 11, 
 17. Rom. 4, 5. 2 Cor. 2, 3. Heb. 6, 1 TU- 
 <7Tf V1 Seoi*. 1 Tim. 5, 5 iJ\TriKev eVi TOV 
 Sew. 1 Pet. 1, 13. 3, 5. So Sept. for n^2 
 2 K. 18, 21. 22. Ps. 37, 3. 5. 0) In kind- 
 Bess, upon, towards; Matt. 14, 14 e 
 
 eV ai/Tovs. 15, 32. Luke 6, 35 xpq- 
 o y eo~Tiv eVt rovy a^. (crX. Rom. 9, 23. 
 
 11, 22. Eph. 2/7. Sept. for cs Gen. 47, 
 29. So Theophil. ad Autol. I. p. 71 XP*)- 
 (TTOS fcrnv (6 Seoy) eVi TOVJ ayoTrwtTas av- 
 TOV. Not used in this sense in earlier classic 
 writers. y) In hostility, against ; Matt. 
 
 12, 26 < e awr/j/ e/^epio-Sty. Mark 3, 26. 
 Luke 11, 17. Acts 7, 54 tftpvxov TOVS 686v- 
 TOS fir avTov. So Dem. 73. 27. ib. 537. 5 
 e^ TJ/V dpyrjit eVi MetSt ai . Xen. Mem. 2. 
 3. 10. S) Of the occasion or object wpora 
 or over which joy or sorrow is felt ; Rev. 
 18,20 Rec.-fvfppalvov eV avTrjV, others eV 
 avTrj. Luke 23, 28 /^IT; KXaiVre eV e/ie. Rev. 
 1,7. So Sept. of joy, for S Is. 61,10. 
 Ps. 32, 11 ; of sorrow, for i? Zech. 12, 10. 
 
 e) Of that upon which the will or inten 
 tion is directed, the purpose, end, aim of an 
 action, upon, for, for the sake of, after. Matt. 
 3, 7 fpxop.fvovs 67rl TO /3a7rrKr/xa avTov, 1. e. 
 
 in order to be baptized. 26, 55 as eVi X/- 
 CTTTJV. Luke 7, 44 vScup eVi TOV? TrdSar /^ou. 
 water FOR my feet. 15,4. 23,48. Heb. 12.10; 
 comp. Buttm. J 147. n. 1 eVt ult. Matth. 
 5 586. c. Palaeph. 19. 1. ib. 40. 4. Hdot. 
 3. 14 Ifvai tnl v8ap. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 12. 
 
 f ) From the Heb. spoken of persons upon 
 or over whom the name of God is called, as 
 being God s people, his worshippers, James 
 2, 7. Acts 15, 17 ftp* ovs eVtKeKX^rat TO 
 ovop.d p.ov, quoted from Amos 9, 12 where 
 Sept. for b Dtt) tf-ipS, as also 2 Sam. 12, 
 28. Jer. 14, 9 ; comp. Heb. Lex. art. jop 
 Niph. no. 2. /3. Bar. 2, 15. 
 
 NOTE. In composition em implies : a) 
 Motion or direction upon, to, towards, a- 
 gainst ; as eVayw, artpxppai, eVt/3aiVa>. 
 b) Rest upon, over, at; as eVe ^o), enavu- 
 Travca, fTriKfLfiat. c) Sequence, order ; as 
 fTTfifit, (7nTdo-cru>. d) Addition, accession ; 
 as (iraiTfca, em<T\ivayu>. e) Renewal or 
 repetition ; as (iravop ZuMTis. f) Some 
 times it is merely intensive, expressing a 
 closer relation between the verb and its 
 object, which cannot well be rendered in 
 English ; as eiraiveo*, tmyivuicrKui. -f- 
 
 eTTt/Satl/O), f. rio-OfJMi, (/3aiVa),) to go 
 upon, to tread upon, Sept. yrjv t 0* rjs eirfftrj 
 for ^ n Deut. 1, 36. Hdian. 1. 12. IS. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 61. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1 1 . to set fool upon, to come upon or into, 
 to arriie in a country or province ; e. g. 
 els TTJV Aa-tav Acts 20, 18; TJ; eirapxiq 
 25, 1. Diod. Sic. 14. 84 init. els Botomav. 
 16. 66 pen. Trj St/ceXia. Oftener c. gen. 
 Hdian. 7. 8. 18. Thuc. 1. 103. 
 
 2. to go up upon, to mount; e. g. ri 
 
276 
 
 tvov Matt. 21, 5 ; upon a ship, to embark, 
 (Is TO 77X0101; Acts 21, 6 ; TW TT\O M 27, 2 ; 
 absol. 21, 2. Sept. for nbs Jer. 46,9; iS n 
 
 I Sam. 25, 20. Gen. 24/61. Hdian. 4. 1~2*. 
 
 I 1 TOV apfiaTos. Plut. C. Mar. 37 eVi ri]v 
 vavv. Xen. Hell. 3. 4. 1 eVi TO TrXoTov. 
 
 f. /3aXw, (/3dXX,) to cas/ 
 or orer, to Zay w^on. 
 
 1 . Trans, a) Pr. and with ace. and dat. 
 Mark 11, 7 eVe/3. avrw ra t/xana. 1 Cor. 7, 
 35 ftpoxov v/jilv eVi/SaXo). Sept. with CTTL 
 c. ace. for fcna Num. 4, 6. 7. Hos. 7, 12 ; 
 nbrri Num. 19, 2. (Hdian. 6. 8. 11. Xen. 
 An. 3. 5. 10.) In the sense to put upon, 
 I. e. to sew on, e. g. a patch, Matt. 9, 16. 
 Luke 5, 36. So Hesych. eVt/iJaXei empptyei 
 seu f7rippd\ls(i. b) Spec. eTrt/SdXXeii/ 
 rfjv xeipa V. TO.S ^elpas, with eVt nva 
 or dat. to lay hands upon, i. e. a) to seize, 
 to do violence to a person, c. ri rtva Matt. 
 26, 50. Mark 14, 46. Luke 20, 19. 21, 12. 
 John 7, 30. 44. Acts 5, 18. 21, 27; c. dat. 
 Acts 4, 3 ; also by a species of attraction, 
 Acts 12, 1 67r6/3aXev ras ^elpay KaKwcrui 
 Tivas, for eVi rivas wore KaKoxrai CLVTOVS. 
 Sept. for I? nVttj , c . eVt ni/a Gen. 22, 12 ; 
 c. dat. Esth. 6, 2. So c. dat. Diod. Sic. 
 lib. 38 init. p. 256. Pol. 3. 2. 8. ) Also, 
 to ^JWi! //ie hand to any thing, to lay hold of; 
 Luke 9, 62 eVt/S. T. x- CTT aporpov. Sept. 
 for nbuja Deut. 12, 7. 18. 
 
 2. Intrans. a) Genr. with tavrov im 
 plied, to casi oneself upon, i. q. to ? sA. or 
 fall upon ; see Winer 39. 1. Buttm. 5 130. 
 n. 2. Matth. 496. i. Hence a) Of waves, 
 to beat upon or into, e. g. iy TO TrXoioi Mark 
 4, 37. So of persons falling upon or 
 against, c. TIVI Plato Phaedr. 248. a ; in a 
 hostile sense, c. TTI TIWZ 1 Mace. 4, 2 ; 
 c. dat. Diod. Sic. 18. 14 med. Plut. Cleo- 
 men. 5. /3) to fall to any one, as his 
 portion; Part. neut. Luke 15, 12 86s p.oi 
 TO cVijSaXXoi p,fpos TIJS ovcrt ar. So 1 Mace. 
 10, 30. Dem. 312. 2. Diod. Sic. 5. 45 pen. 
 
 b) With TOV vovv implied, to fix the mind 
 upon,to think upon ; absol. Mark 14, 72 KOL 
 67n/3aX<uj/ fK\aif , and when he thought there 
 on he wept. So c. dat. Plut. Cic. 4. M. 
 Antonin. 10. 30; t</> ols Pol. 1. 80. 1; 
 absol. Sept. Empir. adv. Math. p. 2 1 3 el ITTI- 
 $uXwi 6 (ro<pos lcrxyo~fi. \tyfiv aSiaTrrwrw?. 
 Fully, Asterius H. 3 eVi jSaXXc 8e KOL TW 
 fjieXXovTi xpovQ Tov v vv- Galen, de Pals. 
 Cans. 3 ; see Wetstein and Kypke in loc. 
 Others here refer e 7n/3oX&>v to lett. a. a, 
 above ; and render : rushing forth, parall. 
 with eeX3<i < in Matt. 26, 75 and Luke 
 22, 62. But fTrtf3d\\eiv, as in the exam 
 
 pies above cited, with a dat. or eVt, signifies 
 to rus/i UPON or AGAINST ; never absol. to rush 
 OUT. Vulg. ccepit flere, but without phi 
 lological ground. See Lresner, De Wette, 
 Meyer, in loc. 
 
 7ri/3ctpeci}) >, f. 770-0), (/Sapeco,) to weigh 
 doicn upon, to burden ; in N. T. only trop 
 to be burdensome upon, e. g. a) In a pecu 
 niary sense, to be chargeable to, c. ace, 
 1 Thess. 2, 9. 2 Them. 3, 8. b) Genr. 
 and absol. 2 Cor. 2, 5 OI>K e/ze XfXvTr^Kei/, 
 aXX OTTO p.epovs (iva firj eVt/3ap&>) Trd^ras 
 v/taj, 7;e 7ia//i not grieved me ; but in part 
 (that I be not too heavy upon him) you all. 
 Others, unsuitably to the context : he hath 
 not grieved me, but in part ; that I may not 
 overcharge you all So c. dat. App. Bell. 
 Civ. 4. p. 978 tirifiaptiv Tols TJTVXTJKOO-I. Id. 
 Syr. p. 180. 
 
 eViy3i/3acy, f. data, (/3tj8afa>0 to make 
 go upon, to let mount, to set one upon, e. g. 
 upon an animal for riding ; with ace. and 
 eVt c. ace. Luke 10, 34 ea-ift^dtras e avrbv 
 eiri TO loiov KTTJVOS. So c. ace. simpl. Luke 
 19, 35. Acts 23, 24. Sept. for m:nn 
 1 K. 1, 33. 2 K. 9, 28. Hdian. 3. 7. 12 
 avTov TOV ITTTTOU iTTtfiiftacrav. Thue. 4. 31 
 TIVII cirl vavv. 
 
 f. -^w, OXeVo),) to look 
 upon, to fix the eyes upon, Sept. with tVt 
 c. ace. for ts^an Num. 21, 9; ace. Hdian. 
 5. 3. 15 ; els TJIJMS Plato Phaed. 63. a. In 
 N. T. trop. to look upon, to have respect to, 
 with eVi c. ace. as in kindness, favour, 
 Luke 1, 48. 9, 38 ; in partiality, James 2, 
 3. Sept. for ns*i 1 Sam. 1, 11 ; n;Q Lev. 
 26,9. So Judith 13, 4. 
 
 e7T//3X?7/za, aroy, TO, (fVtjSdXXco,) pr. 
 that which is cast upon or over, e. g. a 
 cover, Nicostr. K\iv. 1 ; a rug, carpet, ta 
 pestry, Sept. Is. 3, 21. Plut. Cato Maj. 4. 
 Arr. Exp. Alex. M. 6. 29. 8 TavrjTa eiri^Xrj- 
 paTtov BapvXaivitov. In N. T. a patch, piece 
 sewed on, Matt. 9, 16. Mark 2, 21. Luke 
 5. 36 bis ; comp. eVt/3dXX no. 1. a. 
 
 e7Ti/3oa&>, w, f. 770-00, (/Sodw,) to cry out 
 upon or to any one, to exclaim upon ; absol. 
 Acts 25, 24 fTtifiouivTfs (sc. pot), firj be"it> 
 KT\. So c. dat. Pol. 10. 12. 5. Thuc. 5. 65. 
 
 7n/3ov\i], r] S , TJ, (jSovX?;,) pr. counsel 
 against ; hence a plot, conspiracy, Acts 9 
 24. 20, 3. 19. 23, 30. Sept. Esth. 2, 22. 
 Hdian. 3. 5. 9. Xen. Hell. 3. 3. 4, 5. 
 
 /3pos.) to make affinity with, to intermarry 
 with, genr. Sept. for |nnnn Gen. 34, 9 
 
277 
 
 spec, as a son-in-la\v, 1 Sam. 18,21.22. 
 1 Mace. 10, 54. 56. In N. T. spec, of a 
 husband s brother, to act the husband s bro- 
 tlier towards, to marry a woman as a bro 
 ther s widow ; c. ace. T^V yvval<a Matt. 22, 
 24; comp. Mark 12, 19 and Luke 20, 28. 
 The allusion is to the marriage of a bro 
 ther s widow, i. e. a levirate marriage, ac 
 cording to the Jewish law ; see Deut. 25, 
 5 sq. comp. Gen. 38, 8 where Sept. for 
 cat . So Test. XII Patr. p. 599. 
 
 eViyew, ov, 6, 17, adj. (on, yf/0, upon or 
 of ike earth, i. e. earthly, terrestrial, e. g. per 
 sons, Phil. 2, 10 TTO.V yow Kaptyfl f-rrovpavLcav 
 KCU firiyeiw. (Diod. Sic. 1. 13 init. Plato Ax. 
 368. b.) Of things, ra <ra>/rra 1 Cor. 15, 
 40 bis. 2 Cor. 5, 1. James 3, 15 crotyia eVi- 
 ytios, earthly wisdom, pertaining to earth, 
 worldly, perverse. Neut. TCI eVi yeta, 
 earthly things, worldly, Phil. 3, 19; also, 
 things on earth, i. e. already known as re 
 vealed in the Scriptures, opp. ra tnovpdvia, 
 things of heaven, not yet revealed, John 3, 
 12; comp. v. 13 sq. also Ps. 51, 12. Jer. 
 31, 33. Ez. 18, 31. 36, 24 sq. So M. An- 
 tonin. 6. 3 els KUOTTOS TTJS firiytiov fa)?)?. 
 Plut. de sera Num. Vind. 22. p. 42. 
 
 -jnyivo/4(U, (yiVo/wu,) aor. 2 eirtyevo- 
 pr}v, to arise upon, to come on ; e. g. of a 
 wind, to spring up, absol. Acts 28, 13. Pol. 
 1. 54. 6. Thuc. 3. 74 ei iiveuos fireytvero. 
 
 eTTVyiVOHTKO), f. yi/wo-o/zcu, (ytvdKTKco,) 
 pr. to know thereupon or thereby, i. e. by 
 looking on as a spectator, Horn. Od. 18. 
 30 ; c. gen. Find. Pyth. 4. 497. In N. T. 
 (iri in firiyivao-icco cannot for the most part 
 well be rendered in English, and becomes 
 simply intensive, see in ri note, lett. f ; to 
 know fully, both in an inchoative and com 
 pleted sense ; comp. in yiva>(TKa> init. 
 
 1. to know fully, inchoative, i. e. to come 
 to know, to gel full knowledge of, to become 
 fully acquainted with. 
 
 a) Genr. and c. ace. of thing, Luke 1 , 4 
 ivn firiyvMS Tr)V dcr^oXeiai/ KT\. 1 Cor. 14, 
 37. 2 Pe t. 2, 21 bis ; so with ntpl TWOS 
 Acts 24, 8 ; foil, by an indirect clause, Acts 
 22, 24 ; absol. 1 Cor. 1 3, 12. Sept. for y^ 
 Jer. 5, 5. Jon. 1,7. So Pol. 2. 11. 3. Xen. 
 CEc. 9. 12. With ace. of pers. e. g. TOV 
 vl6v, TOV iraTtpa, Matt. 11,27 bis ; also with 
 duo TWOS, to know one from or by anything, 
 Matt. 7, 16. 20. So Plato Theaet. 192. e ; 
 comp. ex TWOS Pol. 1. 65. 6. 
 
 b) Spec, in various senses : a) to know 
 from others, i. q. to find out, to learn, foil, by 
 art, Luke 7, 37 eniyvovo-a on avaie.fi.Tai KT\. 
 J3, 7. Acts 22, 29. 28, 1 ; absol. 9, 30. So 
 
 1 Mace. 6, 17 ; absol. Thuc. 1. 132. /3) t(, 
 know from one s own perception, i. q. to per 
 ceive, to be aware of ; c. ace. Luke 5, 22 
 eViy. TOVS SioXoytoyiour. So c. ace. et par- 
 ticip. Mark 5, 30 ; see Buttm. $ 144. 6. b. 
 (Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 33.) With on, Mark 2, 8. 
 Luke 1, 22. Acts 19, 34. y) to knoiu by 
 sight or person, to recognize, c. ace. of pen-.. 
 Matt. 14, 35. Mark 6, 33. 54. Luke 24, 16. 
 31. Acts 3, 10 et 4, 13 eireyivvo-Kov re au- 
 TOVS OTI KT\. where for the attraction, see 
 Buttm. $ 151. I. 6, 7. With ace. of thing, 
 Acts 12, 14 emy. TTJV (poivrfv TOV EL 27, 39 
 TT]v yrjv OVK. enfyivacrKov, i. e. they did not 
 know it from any other, did not recognize it. 
 Sept. for -visn Gen. 42, 7. 8. 1 Sam. 26, 17. 
 So Plut. Agesi. 21 pen. Xen. Hell. 5. 4. 12. 
 2. to know fully, in a completed sense, 
 i. e. to have full knowledge of. 
 
 a) Genr. and c. ace. of thing, Rom. 1 , 32 
 TO diKaicapa TOV 3eov firiyvoirfs- Col. 1, 6. 
 1 Tim. 4, 3 ; absol. Acts 25, 10. With 
 ace. of pers. and OTI, 2 Cor. 13, 5 ; see in 
 no. 1. b. y. Pass. 1 Cor. 13, 12 KaSobr xal 
 fTVfyvuxj^v sc. vno TOV 3eou, see in yivuxj-Kui 
 no. 1. a. 0. Sept. for V^ton Job 34, 27; 
 I"?? Ez. 6, 7. 
 
 b) Spec. i. q. to acknowledge as being 
 what one is or professes to be, as a prophet, 
 apostle, teacher; Matt. 17, 12 HXi ar rjSri 
 ijXSf, KOI OVK (TTfyva>o~ai> avTov. 2 Cor. 1, 
 14. 6, 9. Of an epistle, doctrines, 2 Cor. 1, 
 13 bis. Sept. and 511 of a prophet, Jer. 28, 
 9. So Ecclus. 44, 2*3. Hdian. 2. 1. 24. 
 Emphat. to acknowledge well, to take know 
 ledge of, c. ace. of pers. 1 Cor. 16, 18 eVi- 
 ytrcixTKere ovv TOVS TOLOVTOVS- So Sept. and 
 rv; Num. 16, 5; "^H Ruth 2, 10. 19. 
 
 eTriyVGHTlS, ecos, 17, (eViyifcoo-Kw,) pr. 
 full knowledge, i. e. 
 
 1. Pr. the act of coming to a full know 
 ledge, a knowing, knowledge, acknowledg 
 ment ; e. g. fir iyvoMTis Trjs dXr;3eiaj 1 Tim. 
 2, 4. 2 Tim. 2, 25. 3, 7. Tit. 1,1; r. aya- 
 3oO Philem. 6; eV. TOV Kvpiov 2 Pet. 1, 3. 
 2, 20 ; also eVr. TTJS dpi/mar Rom. 3, 20. 
 Hdian. 7. 6. 15. Pol. 3. 7. 6. 
 
 2. Meton. that which is known, full know 
 ledge, knowledge, spoken in N. T. of God. 
 Christ, divine things ; Rom. 1 , 28 TOV 3eo 
 eYeii> fv fTTiyvcacrfi, to retain God in Icnoni- 
 ledge, i. e. to retain a knowledge of him. 10. 
 2. Eph. 1, 17. 4, 13. Phil. 1, 9. Col. 1, 9. 
 10. 2, 2. 3, 10. 2 Pet. 1, 2. 8. Heb. 10, 26 
 fiTa TO Xa/3eii/ TTJV eV. Trjs dXrj^fias. Sept. 
 for nS n Prov. 2, 5. Hos. 4, 1. 6, 6. 
 
 e7Tiypa(j)ij, 77?, 17, (eViypd^xa,) an in 
 scription, superscription, e. . on coin, Matt, 
 
278 
 
 t 77x60) 
 
 22, 20 Mark 12, 16. Luke 20, 24 ; on the 
 breast or over the head of one crucified, 
 giving his name and crime, Mark 15, 26. 
 Luke 23, 38. For this Roman custom, see 
 Sueton. Dom. 10. Calig. 32. Dion Cass. 54. 
 
 3. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 274. Pol. 3. 56. 
 
 4. Thuc. 2. 43. 
 
 eTTtypCKpa). {. *//&>, (ypd<po>,) to make a 
 mark upon, to graze upon, as a weapon, 
 Horn. II. 4. 139. In N. T. to inscribe, with 
 a stylus or the like ; e. g. of a public in 
 scription, Pass. Mark 15, 26. Acts 17, 23. 
 Rev. 21, 12. Sept. for 2113 Num. 17, 2. 3. 
 So Ml V. H. 2. 33. Xen Cyr. 7. 3. 17. 
 Trop. to impress deeply upon, e. g. vopovs 
 tVi KopSi ay avTwv Heb. 8, 10 ; also vopovs 
 (irl TO>V 8iavoi5>v 10, 16; both quoted from 
 Jer. 31, 33 where Heb. 3F12 , Sept. ypa<co. 
 Sept. e7riypa<a> for "H3 Prov. 7, 3. 
 
 emSei/cz u/u, f. Se/o>, (SeiVw/u,) to 
 show forth, to show to any one, to exhibit, 
 pr. with the idea of motion or presentation 
 to or towards any one. 
 
 1. Pr. c. ace. et dat. Matt. 22, 19 eVtSei- 
 t-are poi TO vd/n<r^a. Luke 20. 24. 24, 40. 
 Mid. Acts 9, 39 firi8eiKvvp.fvai ^irwvay, i. e. 
 showing their tunics. So Luke 17, 14 eViS. 
 (avTovs TOIS itpois, show yourselves, i. e. 
 present yourselves before the priests. So 
 Pint. Sept. Sap. Conv. 2. Xen. An. 1. 2. 14. 
 Mid. Jos. Ant. 10. 4. 1. Diod. Sic. 13. 27 
 wit. Also lo show, to point out, as edifices, 
 c. ace. et dat. Matt. 24, 1 eVtSei^at aurw ras 
 olKo8ofjLns. (Hdot. 3. 135. Xen. GEc. 9. 4 
 Tr)v olidav. ) Spec, of deeds, miracles, Matt. 
 16, 1. So Luc. Somn. 10. JSschin. 60. 8. 
 
 2. Trop. to show forth by arguments, to 
 prove, c. ace. Heb. 6, 17 ; ace. et infin. Acts 
 18, 28. ^El. V. H. 3. 7. Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 
 11 bis. 
 
 eVtSe^o^tat, f. 8e o/i<u, Mid. depon. (Se- 
 Xop,at,) to receive upon or to oneself, i. e. 
 genr. to receive, to admit ; e. g. in kindness, 
 hospitably, c. ace. 3 John 10. (1 Mace. 12, 
 8. Pol. 22. 1. 3.) Trop. to receive, to ad 
 mit, e. g. the admonitions of a teacher, c. 
 ace. 3 John 9. So Ecclus. 51, 26. Pol. 6. 
 24. 7. 
 
 eTTtS^/ieco, o>, f. TJO-CO, (ori Sjj/ior,) to be 
 among one s people, to be at home, Xen. Cyr. 
 7. 5. 69 etre fni8r] p-toi/ . . . (Ire KCU arroS^/ioii/. 
 In N. T. to come among a people as a 
 stranger, to sojourn, absol. Acts 2, 10 of 
 firto Tjp.ovvTfs Poi/zaZoi, i. e. Roman resi 
 dents at Jerusalem. 17,21 oi firio vpovvrfs 
 eVot, i. e. resident foreigners, sojourners. 
 So Jos. Ant. 5. 7. 3. Hdian. 8. 2. 9. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 61. 
 
 v. -rroytiat, f. do- 
 fj.a.1, (Mid. Siaraaero/wu,) to arrange upon of 
 oneself, to superadd thereto, e. g. other and 
 further conditions, trop. and absol. Gal. 3, 15. 
 
 tViSi &o/u, f. 8o>o-a>, (Si &a/u,) to give 
 upon or besides, Horn. II. 23. 559. Xen. Cyr. 
 8. 5. 19. In N. T. to give forth upon or to 
 another, to give over, to deliver over, to put 
 into one s hands ; c. ace. et dat. Matt. 7, 9 
 fj.f) XiSoi/ fViSwo-ei avT<3. v. 10. Luke 11, 11 
 bis. 12. Luke 4, 17 eVeSoSty airw /3t/3Xi oj> 
 Her. 24, 30. 42. John 13,26. Acts 15, 30. 
 So Luc. D. Mort. 7. 1. Diod. Sic. 14. 47 
 TT]V (7ri<rTo\T)v. Plato Legg. 944. a. Spec. 
 Acts 27, 15 eTTiSdiTf s e<pepd/ie3a, lit. giving 
 up we were driven, i. e. either supplying from 
 the context : eTuSoWej [TO TrXoioi TO> tW/ia>] 
 committing the ship to the wind; comp. 
 Ptut. de Fortun. Rom. 6 eTTiSi Sou rfj TVXJJ ra 
 i(TTia, KOI 8t%ov TO irvevp.a, TW Trvfovri TTI- 
 <TT(vwv, or, as reflexive or intrans. eViSw- 
 Tf s [eavTovs] giving ourselves up ; comp. 
 Luc. Hermotim. 28 ffv tnral eViSw rfj Trveov- 
 077 (vulg. TrXeouoT?) TIS avrov. Arr. Epict. 
 4. 9. 14 of a?ra eVSoircy (l<ra.irav eW8a>Kcn> 
 eavrovs, Kai cas inrb pevpaTos 7rapf(rvpT)<rav. 
 
 7Tt8iop^f6co, f. a)o-o), (SiopSda),) to ar 
 range or set in order further ; Mid. c. ace. 
 Tit. 1, 5 TO \eiTTovra eVtStopScoo-?;. Comp. 
 Philo in Flacc. II. p. 535 irtp\ rfjs T&V X- 
 
 o- / 
 
 evrtofG), f. vo-co, (8uw,) to go down upon ; 
 e. g. of the sun, lo set upon or during any 
 thing, as eVt TW Trapopyto-p-w Vfioav Eph. 4. 
 26. So Sept and jfia Deut. 24, 15. Jer. 
 15,9. 
 
 7TieiKl(l) as, 77, (eVtetKijy,) propriety, 
 fairness, moderation, Dem. 919. 4. Plato 
 Legg. 735. a. In N. T. mildness, gentle 
 ness, clemency, Acts 24, 4. 2 Cor. 1C, 1. 
 So 2 Mace. 2, 22. Hdian. 5. 1. 12. Pol. 5. 
 10. 1. 
 
 7Ttet/C^9j tos, ovs, 6, rj, adj. (ei/co r, eotKa.) 
 fitting upon, meet, suitable, proper ; henct 
 Neut. TO fTTifiKts, i. q. eViet /ceta, proprie 
 ty, fairness, moderation, Phil. 4, 5. So Act 
 Thorn. 20 TO ttTrXovj/ OVTOI) KOI TO eViftKes 
 Thuc. 1. 76. Spec, mild-, gentle, clement 
 1 Tim. 3, 3. Tit. 3, 2. Jarnes 3, 17. 1 Pet 
 2, 18. Sept. for r&O Ps. 86, 5. So J1. V 
 H. 13. 2 init. vrpaoy *ai eVteiK^y. Hdian 
 1. 2. 5. 
 
 eco, w, f. jjo-co, (fi/Teto,) 1. to seeJ 
 /or or a/ier, to inquire after, c. ace. Acts 
 12, 19 fTTir)Ti ]<ras avrov Kal pr] fvpu>v. Luke 
 4, 42 in later edit. Sept. for ^a Ecc. 7. 
 28. So Dem. 271. 16. Xen. Cyr. 2 4. 25. 
 
279 
 
 Also to seek at the hands of any one, to ask 
 for, to demand, c. ace. Matt. 12, 39 oTj/ieiw 
 infant 16,4. Mark 8, 12. Luke 11,29. 
 Acts 19, 39 ri Trepi tTfpav. So 1 Mace. 7, 
 \3. Pol. 1. 5. 3. 
 
 2. Spec, to seek after, to seek to gel. to 
 strive after, to long for, c. ace. Matt. 6, 32 rav- 
 ra TU e3i/7j eVt^Tft. Luke 12, 30. Rom. 11,7. 
 Phil. 4, 17 bis. Heb. 11, 14. 13, 14. (Ec- 
 clus. 40, 26; comp. Diod. Sic. 17. 101.) 
 With an infin. to desire earnestly, Acts 13,7 
 t7Tf^T]Tr)o-fv aKovcrai T!>V \6yov T. 3eoG. So 
 Pol. 3. 57. 7. 
 
 eTrfoavdrios, O v, 6, 17, adj. (Sai/a?,) 
 nigh upon death, i. e. anointed to death, 
 condemned, 1 Cor. 4, 9. Dion. Hal. Ant. 
 7. 35. 
 
 e7T/^ecrt9, fa , s , ^, (tVcri S^t,) a placing 
 upon, laying on, imposition, e. g. of hands, 
 the emblem through which the Holy Ghost 
 was imparted, Acts 8, 18. 1 Tim. 4, 14. 
 2 Tim. 1, 6. Heb. 6, 2. Comp. Num. 27, 
 18. 23. Deut. 34, 9. Gen. 48, 14. So genr. 
 Plut. Cons, ad Apoll. 1. 
 
 eVi^f/ieo), a, f. f)o-<a, (Silo s,) 1. to set 
 one s mind upon, to desire earnestly, to long 
 for; genr. and c. gen. Acts 20, 33 dpyv- 
 piov . . . ovbfvos eVeSv/iiycra. 1 Tim. 3, 1 ; 
 see Buttm. 132. 9. So 1 Mace. 11,11. 
 Pol. 4. 33. 12. Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 5. With 
 infin. aor. Matt. 13, 17 eVeS. iSeu/. Luke 
 15, 16. 16, 21. 17, 22. 1 Pet. 1, 12. Rev. 
 
 9, 6. Luke 22, 15 7rt3v/ii a eVeSu/n^cra TOU- 
 TO TO ird(Tx a (paytlv. With infin. pros. Heb. 
 6,11. (Susann. 15, aor. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 6, 
 pres. ib. 1. 4. 25, aor.) With KOTO. TWOS 
 Gal. 5, 17; absol. 1 Cor. 10, 6. James 4, 
 2. Sept. genr. for MX Deut. 14, 26. Prov. 
 21,10. 
 
 2. Spoken of unlawful desire, to covet, 
 absol. Rom. 7, 7 et 13, 9 OVK eViSv/iijo-eiy, 
 comp. Ex. 20, 17 where Sept. for ^H, also 
 Deut. 5, 1 8 for MJK. In respect to a wo- 
 man, to lust after, c. gen. Matt. 5, 28. So 
 Plut. de Solert. animal. 18. Xen. An. 4. 
 1. 14. 
 
 eVi^u/iTJT?^, ov, 6, (eVtSv/itca.) a desi- 
 rer, luster, one eager for any thing, 1 Cor. 
 
 10, 6 fTr&vp.r]Tai KOKUV. Sept. for " rjxria 
 Num. 11,34. Diod. Sic. 16. 55. Xen. Ap. 
 Soc. 28. 
 
 CTTt^f/ita, as, T), (eVi3u/xea>.) earnest de 
 sire, longing. 
 
 1. Genr. Luke 22, 15 comp. in eVtSv/iew 
 no. 1. Phil. 1, 23 ryv firi%vp.iav e^atv ds TO 
 dva\vo-ai. 1 Thess. 2, 17. Rev. 18, 14. Sept. 
 for J1JX Hos. 10, 10 ; f^xn Prov. 10, 24. 
 Pol. 3. 63. 6. Xen. Cyr. 1. 1. 5. 
 
 2. Oftener in a bad sense, irregular and 
 inordinate desire,concupiscence,appetite, lust, 
 e. g. a) Genr. Col. 3, 5 em%vp.iav KO.KI]V. 
 Mark 4, 19. Rom. 6, 12. 7, 7. 8. 13, 14 fls 
 cnftvp.iasfor its lusts, i. e. to satisfy the carnal 
 appetites. 1 Tim. 6, 9. 2 Tim. 3, 6. 4, 3. 
 Tit. 3, 3. James 1, 14. 15. 1 Pet. 1, 14. 4, 
 2. 3. 2 Pet. 1, 4. 3, 3. Jude 16. 18. So 
 eViSiYu ai aapKo j, i. e. carnal desires, appe 
 tites, Gal. 5, 16. 24. Eph. 2, 3. 2 Pet. 2, 18. 
 
 1 John 2, 16; onS. o-apxiKai, 1 Pet. 2, 11 ; 
 r. Kocrp-iKai, worldly desires. Tit. 2, 12 ; eV. 
 r<av o<p3aA|u.a>i>, 1 John 2, 16 ; eV. p-ian-p-ov, 
 
 2 Pet. 2, 10. All the above refer to those 
 desires which are fixed on sensual objects, 
 as pleasures, profits, honours, and the like. 
 Further, ort3vp,uu rfjs dirdrr^s, deceitful lusts. 
 Eph. 4, 22 ; eV. vfutTtpmai, youthful lusts, 
 2 Tim. 2, 22. Sept. for rtj HjS) Prov. 21,25. 
 26. So m. V. H. 3. 18 pen. Plat. Pheed. 
 p. 82. C, ot opScoy (piXocro(pot dnfxovrai. TO>I/ 
 Kara TO cra>fj.a eVtSu/itwi mracraiv. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 24, 64. b) Spoken of impure 
 desire, lewdness, Rom. 1, 24. 1 Thess. 4, 
 5. So Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 6, 7. Xen. Cyr. 1 . 6. 
 34. c) Meton. desire, lust, i. e. object of 
 wrong desire, that which is lusted after, 
 John 8, 44 ras onSv/uc* rov Trarpos vp-tav. 
 1 John 2, 17 T) tirOvjifa TOV KOCT/XOV. So 
 Sept. and iTn Dan. 11, 37. 
 
 famccfytifa f. lo-o), (Ka3t o>,) to cause to 
 sit upon, to seat or set upon; c. ace. impl. 
 Matt. 21, 7 Rec. fVeAcuSttrai/ [avroi ] eVa^a) 
 avTtov, they set him upon them. So Sept. 
 for aisnn 1 K. 1, 38. 44. Comp. in aS^ftt, 
 Or intrans. to sit upon, i. e. as others 
 here read. eVe/caSterey eVai/cu avrtoj , he sat 
 upon them. So Sept. for ^ Gen. 31, 34. 
 Lev. 15, 20. Comp. Pol. 4. 61. 6. Buttm. 
 5 113. 2. 
 
 e7Tt/caXe&), >, f. eVw, to call upon, in 
 various senses. 
 
 1 . to call upon for aid ; in N. T. only 
 Mid. to call upon for aid or protection in 
 one s own behalf, to invoke, to address in 
 prayer. 
 
 a) Pr. of invocation addressed to Christ 
 for aid, c. ace. impl. Acts 7, 59 Si-e^pai/of. 
 fTriKah.ovp.fVov [TOV Kvpiov] Ka\ Ae yoira. 
 Sept. for sn 1 Sam. 12, 17. 18. 2 Sam. 
 22, 7. So Diod. Sic. 5. 73 3eoi/. Xen. Cyr. 
 7.1.35 TOVS 3eous. Hence genr. to invoke, 
 to pray to, to worship; spoken of God, c. 
 ace. TOV Kvpiov, Rom. 10, 12. 14. 2 Tim. 2, 
 22 ; TO ovop.a Kvpiov, Acts 2, 21. 9, 14. Rom. 
 10, 13. Sept. genr. for " Deut. 33, 19. 
 Dtia snjs Joel 3, 5. Gen. 26, 25. al. Also 
 of Christ, c. ace. TO oVopi TOV Kvpiov lijcroi 
 
280 
 
 X/j. 1 Cor. 1, 2. Acts 22, 16; also Acts 
 9, 21. 
 
 b) In adjuration, to call upon, to invoke 
 God as a witness ; 2 Cor. 1, 23 pdpTvpa TOV 
 "Sfbv eViAcaXov/nai eVt TTJV f/j.rjv ^rvx^v. 
 Polyb. ed. Gronov. 874 pen. vp-fls 8e TOTS 
 TOVS Seovy eViKoAfVaaSe p.apTi>pus. Plato 
 Legg. 664. c. Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 55. 
 
 c) In a judicial sense, to call upon, to ap 
 peal to a higher tribunal or judge, c. ace. 
 c. g. Kaia-apa, Acts 25, 11. 12. 26, 32. 28, 
 19; TOV Zfpao-Tov 25, 25; c. inf. 25, 21 
 ITafXoti eViKaXetra/xf vov TriprjSfjvai. avTov els 
 KT\. having appealed to be reserved, etc. 
 Plut. Marcell. 2 pen. TOVS 8r]fj.dpxovs eiriKa- 
 \ovfj.fi>os. Id. J. Caes. 4. 
 
 2. to call a name upon, to name in addi 
 tion, to surname. a) Act. c. dupl. ace. 
 Matt. 10, 25 eVf/fdXeo-ai/ in later edit. Sept. 
 and &n Num. 21,3. Judg. 6, 32. b) Mid. 
 c. dupl/acc. 1 Pet. 1, 17 Trarepa eVira- 
 Xelo-Sf TOV Kpivovra KT\. i. e. if ye call him 
 your Father; comp. Jer. 3, 19 where Sept. 
 Mid. for 8OJ3 . c) Pass, to be surnamed ; 
 Matt. 10, 3 6 fTnK\rfte\s QadSaios. Luke 
 22, 3. Acts 1, 23. 4, 36. 10, 5. 18. 32. 11, 
 13. 12, 12. 25. 15, 22. Also Heb. 11, 16. 
 So Sept. for 5np3 Dan. 10, 1 ; Nip im- 
 pers. Mai. 1, 4. (Hdian. 1. 7. 6. DiocL Sic. 
 3. 60 fin. Xen. Mem. 1 . 4. 2.) Spec, from 
 the Heb. James 2, 7 et Acts 15, 17 e<f> ovs 
 firiKfK\T)Tai TO ovop.d HQV, upon wlwm my 
 name is called, i. e. who are called or sur 
 named by my name, implying that they are 
 God s property, his worshippers, quoted 
 from Am. 9, 12 where Sept. for b2 cab x*ipD , 
 as also 2 Sam. 12, 28. Jer. 14, 9~. See Heb. 
 Lex. art. snj5 Niph. no. 2. /3. So Baruch. 
 2, 15. 
 
 7TlKd\VfJ.fJ.a, aros, TO, (eWaXvTTTco.) 
 a covering, Sept. for FiOSE Ex. 26, 14 ; 7^0 
 2 Sam. 17, 19. In N. T. trop. a cloak, pre 
 text, 1 Pet. 2, 16 fTriKoXvp-fj-a TTJS KOKLOS. 
 So Menand. Frag. p. 33 TT\OVTOS fie TroX- 
 
 \0>V fTTLKaXv/JifL (TT\V KdKOlV. Comp. 7T/3O- 
 
 AcdXv^i/xa id. Luc. de Merc. cond. 5 ; see 
 Kypke II. p. 431. 
 
 eTri/caXuTTTtw, f. ^co, OaXvTTTw,) to co 
 ver up or over, pr. Sept. for HS3 Num. 4, 
 11. Xen. Yen. 8. 1. In N. T. trop. to co 
 ver over sins, i. e. to forgive, to pardon, 
 Pass. Rom. 4, 7 quoted from Ps. 32, 1, 
 where Sept. for ^ss. Comp. Plut. So 
 lon 15. 
 
 O v, 6, jj, adj. (icaTdpa- 
 ros.) pr. one upon whom a curse rests, 
 i. e. accursed, doomed to punishment, John 
 
 7, 49. Gal. 3, 10. Sept. for ispx Gen. 9, 
 25. Deut. 27, 15 sq. (Wisd. 3, 13. 14, 8.) 
 Also Gal. 3, 13 eViKardparoy iras 6 Kpffj.d 
 ftevos eVt vXov, quoted from Deut. 21, 23, 
 where Heb. n^bp, Sept. /ceKaTjjpa/ieW. 
 
 eTTWCe/./iai, f. eiVo/iat, (Ke1p.ai.) 1 . to lie 
 upon, to be laid upon; c. eVi TIVI, John 11, 
 38 X/3or fTTfKeiTo eV airw. Absol. John 21, 
 9. So 2 Mace. 1,21. Xen. CEc. 19. 13rm . 
 Trop. to be laid upon, imposed, e. g. neces 
 sity 1 Cor.^9, 16; by law, Heb. 9, 10 & Kat - 
 ci/iara . . . eVtKet^era. So Thuc. 8. 15 of a 
 fine. 
 
 2. Spec, to lie heavy upon, to press upon, 
 C. dat. Luke 5, 1 eV TW TOV o^Xov eVtAceto-Sat 
 avrw. Of a tempest, absol. Acts 27, 20. 
 So Jus. Ant. 6. 14. 2 TOVS 7roXe/W eVt- 
 Kflo-Zai ftape is OVTW. Pol. 1. 19. 3. Xen. 
 Cyr. 7. 1. 28. Trop. to press upon, to be 
 urgent with entreaties, absol. Luke 23, 
 23. So Jos. Ant. 18. 6. 6. Plut. Mor II 
 p. 172. 
 
 e TU/ceXXo), f. ^eXo-w, (/c/XXw,) to drive 
 or thrust upon, e. g. a ship upon the land, 
 to run aground; so 3 pers. Plur. of anom. 
 Aor. eTTfKfi\av TI}V vavv Acts 27, 41 Lachm. 
 for eVwKeiXai/ Rec. So vrjas f7TiKe\<rai 
 Horn. Od. 9. 148. 
 
 HiTTitcovpeio?, ov, 6, an Epicurean, a 
 follower of Epicurus the Athenian philoso 
 pher, Acts 17, 18. 
 
 7TlKOVpia, as, (eV/Kovpor, Kovpos,) help, 
 Acts 26, 22. Wisd. 13, 18. Pol. 29. 8. 5, 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 53. 
 
 CTTiKpiva), f. VM, (xpti/co,) to judge upon. 
 i. e. to confirm by a like judgment, Plut. 
 Lycurg. 6. Hdian. 6. 1. 4. In N. T. to 
 give judgment upon, to adjudge, c. infin. 
 Luke 23, 24. So 3 Mace. 4, 2. Dem. 238. 
 13. Plato Legg. 768. a. 
 
 eiri,\afj,/3dva), f. X^ /u, (\an$dva>,} 
 to take hold upon, to seize upon, to surprise, 
 c. accus. Hdot. 8. 115. JEL V. H. 7. 8. 
 Thuc. 4. 27. In N. T. only Mid. eVt- 
 Xap.pdvoiJi.ai, to take hold upon, to lai ; 
 hold of, pr. in order to hold or detain to or 
 for oneself. 
 
 1 . Genr. and construed : a) With a 
 gen. of the part laid hold of, Buttm. 132. 
 5. e. Matth. \\ 330-, 331. Winer $ 30. 8. d ; so 
 c. gen. Trjs x fi pos, i. q. to take by the hand, 
 Mark 8, 23. Acts 23, 19; trop. of God. 
 Heb. 8, 9. Sept. for p^tnn Jer. 31, 32^ 
 Zech. 14, 13. So Xen. Ath. 1. 18 rfs *f(- 
 pos. Diod. Sic. 17. 30 T^J- fwi^f. b) With 
 gen. of pers. implying that some part only, 
 as the hand, arm, shoulder, is laid hold of, 
 
281 
 
 Winer 1. c. So in order to lead or con 
 duct ; Luke 9, 47 6 Se l^o-oCy . . . eViXajSo- 
 fievos TratSiou. Acts 17, 19 ; with violence, 
 by force, Luke 23, 26. Acts 21, 30. 33. 
 Sept. for pimn Judg. 19, 25. (Arr. Epict. 
 3.24.75. Polls . 22. 5. Plato Gorg. 527. a.) 
 Also for succour, Matt. 14, 31 irjcrovs eV- 
 reivas rrjv x ( ^P a fVeXaJro CIVTOV. Impl. 
 Luke 14, 4. Hence trop. i. q. jo help, to 
 succour ; Heb. 2, 16 bis, ov yap dfjnov ay- 
 ye Xooi fTnXauPdvfTai KT\. comp. v. 18. So 
 <n.veiriXaua.vf<r 5ai Plut. Themist. 12 pen. 
 comp. Bleek Brief a. d. Heb. II. p. 345, 346. 
 c) With an ace. of person, where the idea 
 of the whole person is implied, as led away ; 
 Winer 1. c. So the Particip. Acts 9, 27 
 BapwijSar Se f7nXa/3d/iei/oy avrov rjyaye /crX. 
 Also with violence, by force, Acts 16, 19. 
 18, 17. Others here make the ace. depend 
 on the subsequent verb ; comp. Matth. 
 5 632. 7. d) With two genitives, one of 
 pers. and the other of the part by which ; 
 Buttm. J 132. n. 10. Trop. Luke 20,20 Tra 
 fViXa/Scoirai O.VTOV Xdyov, that they might 
 lay hold of him by his icords. \. 26. So pr. 
 Plut. Mor. II. p. 94 eViXa/3djLiei os avrov rrj: 
 X f1pos. Plato Prot. 335. c. Xen. An. 4. 7. 
 12 eViXa/^uirrai avTov TTJS ITVOS. 
 
 2. Trop. to lay hold of in order to obtain 
 and possess ; c. gen. 1 Tim. 6, 12 eViXa/Soi) 
 TTJS aiWou tcof/s. v. 19. Test. XII Patr. 
 p, 595 TU>V v^rj\(av eVeXajSd^ieSa. JEil. V. H. 
 14. 27. Plato Rep. 425. e. 
 
 7ri\aifedva), f. X^crw, (Xai/Saj/eo,) to 
 make forget withal, Horn. Od. 20. 85. Mid. 
 to let oneself forget withal or thereby, to lose 
 thought of, Horn. Od. 1. 57. Hence in X. 
 T. only Mid. to forget, i. e. 
 
 1 . Pr. without purpose ; c. inf. aor. Matt. 
 16, 5 et Mark 8, 14 t-rreXuZovTo aprovs Xa- 
 &tlv. With onolos indirect, James 1, 24. 
 Sept. c. gen. for nanj Gen. 40, 23. al. So 
 c. inf. ^El. V. H. 3." 31. Plato Rep. 563. b; 
 c. gen. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 21. 
 
 2. Spec, with purpose, to forget, to neg 
 lect, not tocarefor; c. gen. Heb. 6, 10 eVi- 
 Xa3<r3at TOV epyou vp.av. 13, 2. 16 ; C. ace. 
 Phil. 3, 14 TO. pev onicrut fm\av?Sav6fj.(vos, 
 see Buttm. 132. 10. d. Kiihner $ 273. 5. e, 
 and n. 18. Sept. for nsttJ , c. gen. Deut. 
 4, 23 ; c. ace. 2 K. 17, 8. So c. gen. Luc. 
 Nigrin. 4. Xen. Hell. 4. 2. 3 ; c. ace. Luc. 
 D. Meretr. 1. 1. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 28. Pass, 
 part. perf. Luke 12, 6 tv 1 avratv OVK t<mv 
 f7ri\(\T](riJ.fvov fvamiov TOV SeoC, not one 
 of them is forgotten, neglected, before God. 
 Sept. Pass. part, for n3Q33 Is. 23, 16. So 
 Pass. Ecclus. 3, 14. 44* ib. 
 
 f. o>, (Xeyu.) 1. to speak 
 or call a name upon ; Pass, to be spoken or 
 called upon, i. q. to be called by name, to be 
 surnamed ; John 5, 2 KoXv/z/S^Spa, fj eVtXe- 
 yofj.evr] E/3paVcrrl Br^ecrSa. Hdot. 5. 70. 
 Plato Legg. 700. b. 
 
 2. to choose thereupon, i. e. besides or in 
 place of another ; Mid. to choose for oneself, 
 c? ace. Acts 15, 40 eVtXe^a^iei/os 1 Si Xai . 
 Sept. for ina Ex. 17,9. Mid. 2 Sam. 10, 
 9. Mid. Hdian. 4. 7. 3. Time. 7. 19. 
 
 f. \^co, (XetVoj;) to fail upon 
 or to any one, not to suffice, c. ace. of pers. 
 Heb. 11,32 e7rtXet \|rei yap /ze SiTjyovfjLffov 6 
 Xpovos. Isocr. p. 4. a, eVtXtTrot 8 av Tjp.us 
 o TTUS xpovos. Dem. 324. 17 eTTtXetA^ei p. 
 TJ rjufpa \tyovra. 
 
 eTTtXet^o), f. w , (Xfi ^o),) to lick over, 
 c. ace. Luke 16, 21 Lachm. for aT 
 in Rec. q. v. Long. Past. 1. 24. 
 
 forgetfulness ; James 1, 25 aKpoarrj: eVi- 
 \i](TfjLov^s, a forgetful hearer, by Hebr. for 
 a.Kp. eiriXrja-fJiuv. Buttm. J 132. n. 12. 
 Ecclus. 11, 27. So eVtX^o-p.coi Plato Prot. 
 334. c. 
 
 CTTiXotTTOy, ov, 6, TJ, adj. (XoiTrdr.) re 
 maining over, remaining, spoken of time, 
 
 1 Pet. 4, 2. Sept. for -in? Is. 38, 10 ; ini"3 
 Lev. 27, 18. Isocr. 39. a, TOV eVi X. xpovov. 
 Pol. 15. 10. 3. Plato Legg. 628. a. 
 
 eTTtA-fO iy, 0)?, 17, (eViXvco,) solution, 
 release from, ^Eschyl. c. Theb. 134. In 
 N. T. trop. explanation, interpretation ; 
 
 2 Pet. 1, 20 Traara TrpofpijTfia ypa(prjs Iditis 
 fVtXvcrecBy ov yiveTat, no prophecy of Scrip 
 ture comcth of private (particular) interpreta 
 tion, i. e. is not an interpretation of the will 
 and purposes of God by the prophets them 
 selves ; it comes not SeX^/ian ai2p&>7i-oi , 
 but VTTO jrvevp.aTos ayiov, V. 21. Comp. 
 Philo Quis Haeres p. 510. 28 TrpotpjjTr;? yap 
 tfitoi/ ovSeV an-o(p3fyyeTat KT\. See Wetst. 
 in loc. So Aquil. for liiriQ Gen. 40, 8. 
 Philo de Vit. cont. p. 901. a. Heliodor. 1. 
 18 oveipaTutv eni\v(ns. ib. 4. 9. 
 
 eTTtXfw, f. IHTO>, (Xuo>,) to let loose upon, 
 e. g. dogs upon a hare, Xen. Ven. 7. 8. ib. 
 9. 18 ; to let let go free, to release, Plato Grit. 
 43. c. Also of letters, to break open further, 
 Hdian. 4. 12. 14. In N. T. trop. to solve 
 furtlier, i. e. a) Of parables, to expound, 
 to interpret, c. ace. Mark 4, 34. Sept. for 
 *ina Gen. 41, 12 Alex. So Jos. Ant. 8. 6 
 5. Athen. 10. p. 449. f; see Wetst. in loc. 
 b) Of a doubtful question, to determine 
 upon, to decide, Pass. Acts 19, 39. 
 
282 
 
 7r(,/jt,apTVpea), <, f. ^o-co, (p-aprvpto), ) 
 to testify upon or fartJier, to attest, c. ace. 
 et inf. 1 Pet. 5, 12 (Trip.aprvpa>v ravrrjv 
 (tvai aXrfiri X^P iV T v Sfov. Jos. Ant. 7. 
 
 14. 4. Plut. Lysand. 22 med. Plat. Crat. 
 397. a. 
 
 7T4/ieXeta, as, fj, (eVt^eXo/Aat,) care for, 
 attention ; Acts 27, 3 Trpos rovs (pi Xovs TTO- 
 pfvSeVra (Trip.f\fias rv^flv, i. e. to receive 
 kind attentions. 2 Mace. 11, 23. Isocr. 
 113. d, eVi/ifXeias rvy^dvfiv. Xen. Mem. 4. 
 8. 10. 
 
 7rip,e\opai v. -A,eo/zat, ov/xai, f. q<nr 
 /nai, Mid. depon. (/xe Xco, p,e Xopu,)) to Tiaue 
 rare wjaon or oi;er, to take care of, c. gen. 
 e. g. of the sick, Luke 10, 34. 35 ; of the 
 church, 1 Tim. 3, 5: Sept. for D^Si? tria* 
 fc? Gen. 44, 21. Palaeph. 26. Pol. 5. 47. 7. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 19. 
 
 e7Ti/ieXw9, adv. (eVt/ieX^s,) carefully, 
 diligently, Luke 15, 8. Sept. Ezra 6, 8. 
 Pol. 3. 79. 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 4. 2. 
 
 eTTlfAevo), f. I/A, (/xeVo),) aor. 1 eVe/mi/a, 
 to stay or?, to torn/ sii/Z, to remain, to abide, 
 to continue. 
 
 1. Pr. in or a/ a place, or with a person ; 
 o with auTov <7iere, Acts 15, 34. 21, 4 ; eV 
 5. dat. of place, 1 Cor. 16, 8. Phil. 1, 24; 
 eiri c. dat. of pers. Acts 28, 14 ; Trpos c. 
 ace. of pers. 1 Cor. 16, 7. Gal. 1, 18; ace. 
 of time how long, Acts 10, 48. 21, 10. 28, 
 12. 14. Sept. for ftsfianrt Ex. 12, 39. 
 So c. eV Hdian. 4. 5~ I/ Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 52 
 on eVt rfj o&c3 nrtfMHM 8rj eV TO> Trpo crSej 
 
 TOW (TTpaTCVp.aTOS. 
 
 2. Trop. to continue on in any state or 
 course ; c. dat. e. g. rfj TT/O-T Col. 1, 23 ; 
 Tt) ^tipiTi Acts 13, 43 ; rfj a/jLapria Rom. 6, 
 1 ; so Rom. 11, 22. 23. 1 Tim. 4, 16 eVi- 
 fj.fi>f avrols, i. e. in one s duties. So Jos. 
 Ant. 8. 7. 5. Xen. CEc. 14. 7. With par- 
 ticip. Acts 12, 16 firfp.fi>e Kpovcav, as in 
 Engl. he continued knocking. John 8, 7. So 
 Philo de Agric. p. 197. d, tav 8 dirftt&v 
 eVifiew;. Plato Men. 93. d. See Buttm. 
 5 144. 6. a. 
 
 eTTivevo), f. fva-o), (wvo),) to nod to, to 
 nod assent, Horn. II. 15. 75. Luc. D. Deor. 
 20. 2. In N. T. genr. to assent, to consent, 
 intrans. Acts 18, 20. So 2 Mace. 14, 20. 
 Pol. 21. 3. 3. Plato Rep. 351. c. 
 
 e-jrivoia, as, 17, (firi, vovs,} a thinking 
 upon, thought, purpose, Acts 8, 22. Wisd. 
 
 15, 4. Pol. 3. 6. 7. Thuc. 3. 95. 
 
 7Ttop/ce&), w, f. ^o-o), (eV/o/JKOf,) comm. 
 fut. firiopKr)o-ofj.ai, Buttm. 113.4, and n. 7 ; 
 to forswear oneself, to sivear falsely, absol. 
 
 Matt. 5, 33. Wisd. 14, 28. Hdian. 3. 6. 16. 
 Xen. An. 2. 5. 38, 41. 
 
 eTTLOpKOS, ov, 6, TI, adj. (eVi, opKoy,) for 
 swearing, swearing falsely, perjured, Aris- 
 toph. Ran. 150 fniopKov opuov a>p.oa-e. In 
 N. T. subst. 6 fTrlopKos, aforsicearer, a per 
 jurer, 1 Tim. 1, 10. Hesych. emopKov 
 opKov fj.fi (ppovri^ovra. ^Eschin. 83. 39. 
 Xen. Ag.U. 12. 
 
 fem. part, see in eTrei^t. 
 ) ov, 6, 17, adj. Matt. 6, 11 et 
 Luke 11, 3 apTov T]pu>v rov (TTiovcriov, a 
 word found only in N. T. and formed by 
 the evangelists, according to Origen de 
 Orat. c. 27. One class of interpreters- de 
 rive it from the particip. eViovo-a sc. ij^e pa, 
 and then apros eniova-ios would be to-mor 
 row s bread, bread for the coming day, q. d. 
 daily bread. Others, because this apros 
 fjriovaios is asked not for tomorrow, but 
 to-day, crr]p.epov, derive eViovaios from Vt 
 and oi>o-/a being, existence, and translate, 
 bread for sustaining life, i. e. sufficient, ne 
 cessary. So Origen, TOV fls rrjv ovcriav 
 o-v/ijSoXXo p.ei oi aprov. Jerome, panem su- 
 persubstantialem. Suidas, 6 eVt rfj ova-la 
 TIP-UIV npfio^av, rj 6 KaSrjp.fpivos. See Tho- 
 luck Bergpred. in Mat.t. 1. c. De Wette in 
 loc. 
 
 ), f. 7reo-oi;/j.cu, (TriVrco,) aor. 2 
 , perf. fTrnreVrcoKa, to fall upon, in 
 N. T. only upon persons. 
 
 1 . Pr. i. q. to throw oneself upon, c. dat. 
 Acts 20, 10 eTTfirfo-fv avrw, i. e. upon his 
 body; comp. 1 K. 17, 21. 2 K. 4, 34 sq. 
 With eVt c. ace. Luke 15, 20 eVeVeo-fv V 
 TOV Tpa^TjXov avTov, i. e. embraced him. 
 Acts 20, 37. Sept. and bfi3 Gen. 46, 30. 
 50, 1. (Philo de Joseph, p/ 563, c. dat.) 
 John 13, 25 (Tmr(o-u>v eVi TO crrJJSos at>TOv, 
 i. e. throwing himself back on Jesus breast 
 as he reclined at table ; see in oVa/cetp-ai no. 2. 
 Spec, to rush or press upon, c. dat. Mark 
 3, 10 too-T6 fTnir nTTiv OVTM. So in a hostile 
 sense, c. dat. Pol. 1. 24. 4. Xen. An. 4. 5. 
 17. 
 
 2. Trop. to fall upon, to come upon or over 
 any one ; with eVi c. ace. of pers. e. g. d)o/3o$ 
 Luke 1, 12. Acts 19, 17. Rev. 11,11 (Sept. 
 and ^23 Ex. 15, 16) ; e/corao-ts Acts 10, 10 
 (Sept. and bsj Dan. 10, 7) ; o^Xus 13, 11 ; 
 oVetSfo-p-oi Rom. 15, 3, comp. Ps. 69, 10 
 where Sept. and bs3 . So Hdian 1.4. 15. 
 Thuc. 3. 87 vocros eVeV. TOIS ASjjrat ois- OI 
 the Spirit, TO Trvevp-a, to descend upon, c. 
 eVi riva, Acts 10, 44. 11, 15 ; eVt nvi 8, 16. 
 So ^SJ Ez. 11, 5, Sept. fTTfaf fir e p-e irv. 
 
 KVpiOV. 
 
283 
 
 e7Ti7rX?/<7cr&) v. -TTCO, f w , (77X170-- 
 ro>,) to strike upon, to beat, Horn. II. 10. 500. 
 In N. T. trop. to chastise with words, to 
 reiide, c. dat. 1 Tim. 5, 1. So Pol. 5. 25. 
 5. Xen. CEc. 13. 12. 
 
 67ri7TVLja}, f. |o>, (TTi/t yaj,) to c/iofce upon, 
 to strangle, c. ace. Luke 8, 7 in some Mss. 
 for arroTTviyo) q. v. 
 
 eTTlTTO jeo), , f. 770-0), (7ro3eco, 7ro3oy,) 
 to desire upon or besides, Plato Protag. p. 
 329. d. In N. T. intens. to desire earnestly, 
 to long far, c. infin. Rom. 1, 11 eVt7ro3o> 
 yap toVti> v/iay. 2 Cor. 5, 2. 1 Thess. 3, 6. 
 2 Tim. 1, 4. With ace. of thing, TO yciXa 
 1 Pet. 2,2. (Sept. for njx Mic. 7, 1 ; axn 
 Ps. 119, 174. Plato Leg g. 855. e.) With 
 ace. of person, to long after, 2 Cor. 9, 14. 
 Phil. 1, 8. 2, 26. So Diod. Sic. 17. 101 ; 
 comp. Ecclus. 25, 21. With irpos ri, to 
 have desire towards or for, to long towards ; 
 James 4, 5 irpos (p3oVoi> eVtTroSel TO Trvevp.0. 
 KT\. doth the Spirit . . . long "(tend) toicards 
 envy ? i. e. to encourage strife and envy or 
 worldly affections ; comp. v. k 2. 3, 14-16. 
 Sept. tirinaftfiv Trpbs tifov for *5tf jnS Ps. 
 42,2. 
 
 e7H7ro^7Jcr9, f& ) f) f], (fVi7ro3e&>.) ear 
 nest desire, strong affection, 2 < or. 7, 7. 11. 
 Aquila for naas Ez. 23, 11. 
 
 eTTtTTO^TjTO?, ov, 6, 17, adj. (eViTroSea),) 
 rm/c/i desired, longed for, Phil. 4, 1. 
 
 aj, 77, (e7ri7ro3ea>.) i. q. eVt- 
 r, earnest desire, Rom. 15, :!3. 
 
 t, f. evo-opai, Pass, depon. 
 to gv or co?ne upon or to a 
 place or person, e. g. Trpos avrov, Luke 8, 4. 
 Sept. for -i25 Ez. 39, 14. So c. eVi TIW 
 Pol. 4. 9. 2; ace. Plut. Mor. II. p. 169; 
 dat. Id. Lycurg. 28. 
 
 eTTlppaTTTO), f. r^co, (paTrrco,) to SC10 
 
 upon, with ace. and Vt c. dat. Mark 2, 21 
 t7rt /3XT;pa f-mppdirrfi Vl i/ifrnw TraXaiw. 
 Comp. Sept. pdiTTdv firi for *>$ -ien Job 
 16, 15. 
 
 eTrippnrra), f. \J/-a), (pi7rT&>,) to rtrow or 
 cas/ 7//)on, with ace. and Vi c. ace. Luke 
 
 19, 35 fTTtpp. TO 1/iOTia eVl TOI/ TTCoXoi , COttlp. 
 
 Matt. 21 , 7 et Mark 11,7. Sept. for "n^H 
 Num. 35, 20. So Hdian. 5. 6. 19. Xen. An. 
 5. 2. 23. Trop. of care, to cast off upon, in 
 filial confidence 1 Pet. 5, 7, quoted from Ps. 
 55, 23 where Sept. for Tp^H . 
 
 eTTlcrrjp.oS, ov, 6, f], adj. (e rrt, er^/ia,) 
 marked upon, e. g. money, stamped, coined, 
 Pol. 23. 9. 3. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 40. In N. T. 
 trop. noted, in a good sense, distinguished, 
 
 eminent, Rom. 16, 7. (3 Mace. 6, 1. Pol. 
 15. 34. 3. Hdot. 2. 20.) In a bad sense : 
 notable, notorious, Matt. 27, 16. So Pol. 18 
 38. 1. Plut. Fab. M. 14. . 
 
 e7TK7mcryu,09, ov, 6, (rt(rm co,) a sup 
 ply of food, food, victuals, Luke 9, 12. Sept. 
 for rnis Josh. 9, 5. 11. Hdian. 6.7. 3. 
 Xen. An. 7. 1. 9. 
 
 t, f. ^ /u, Mid. depon. 
 t,) the present and imperf. rarely 
 found in early Attic writers, Buttm. Ausf. 
 Sprachl. II. p. 291 ; to look upon, to look at, 
 i. e. genr. to view, to inspect, Dem. 113. 25. 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 3. 21. In N. T. 
 
 1 . to look at in order to select, to look out, 
 to seek out, e. g. persons for office, c. ace. 
 Acts 6, 3. Sept. for -iga Lev. 13, 36 ; ttin n 
 Ez. 20, 40. Diod. Sic" 12. 11 otW Se eVt- 
 
 2. to look after, to go to see, to visit, c. 
 ace. a) Pr. Acts 7, 23 eVitrKf^ao-Sat TOVJ 
 dSeXcpovj. 15, 36. Sept. and ips Judg. 15, 
 1. (Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 10.) Of those who visit 
 the sick or poor, Matt. 25, 36. 43. James 1, 
 27. So Ecclus. 7, 35. Hdian. 4. 2. 7. Xen. 
 Mem. 3.11.10. b) From the Heb. spoken 
 of God, who is said to visit men, to care for 
 them, to give them relief and aid, c. accus. 
 Luke 1, 68. 78. 7, 16 eTreovceS/ aTO 6 Seor 
 TOJ> \abv avrov. Acts 15, 14 6 3eos (TTTK(- 
 \lsaTo [TO. e3i/r;] Xa/3eu> KTX. Heb. 2, 6 6Yt 
 fawmirqp avrov, quoted from Ps. 8, 5 where 
 Sept. for ipe , as also Gen. 50, 24. 25. Ps. 
 106, 4. So~E T cclus. 46, 14. Test. XII Patr. 
 p. 549. In Sept. often also to visit in order 
 to punish, for lge Ps. 89, 33. Jer. 14, 10. 
 Ecclus. 2, 14. 
 
 , f. ao-o>, (o-Keuafa),) to make 
 ready for any thing, to furnish out upon, to 
 equip, e. g. a ship, Pol. 3. 24. 11. Xen. Hell. 
 1. 5. 10; horses, Xen. ib. 5. 3. 1 ; pack- 
 horses, i. e. to load, ib. 7. 2. 18 ; a temple, 
 Xen. An. 5. 3. 13. Tn N. T. only Mid. to 
 make oneself ready for a journey, to pack or 
 load up one s baggage, absol. Acts 21, 15 in 
 later edit. See in uKocrKtvafa. Comp. Xen. 
 Cyr. 7. 3. 1. 
 
 CTTLO K TJVOG), o>, f. cocrco. (OVCT/VOO),) pr. to 
 pilch tent upon ; genr. to come and dwell in, 
 firl ras olicias Pol. 4. 18. 8. In N. T. trop. 
 of a divine influence, to abide upon, to rest 
 upon, e. g. eV e p- e 2 Cor. 12, 9. 
 
 ejnffKidty), f. do-<a, (o-Ktdfo).) to cast a 
 shadow upon, to overshadow, c. ace. Matt. 
 17, 5. Luke 9, 34 ; c. dat. Mark 9, 7. Acts 
 5, 15. Sept. c. dat. for Tp.O Ps. 91, 4 ; c. 
 c irf n for l=1j Ex. 40, 32. (Anth. Gr. I. p. 
 
7Tl(7K07re(i) 
 
 284 
 
 114 Tvp-fios tirfCTKiacrev. JEA. V. II. 3. 1 
 med.) Trop. of a divine power and influ 
 ence, to overshadow, to rest upon; Luke 1, 
 35 dvvafJLis v^lffTov eVicrKia(rei ere. So Just. 
 Mart. Apol. 2. p. 75 ^ yap 8vvap.is ia/a- 
 trrou eTrcASovaa rfj TrapSeva), tmoldcurcv av- 
 
 TTJV KT\. 
 
 eTTicrKOTrea)) <J>, f. TJO-&J, (a-KOTrew,) to too/c 
 upon, to ie/zoW, Xen. Yen. 12. 21 ; to t n- 
 specZ, Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 1 1 ; to visit, e. g. the 
 sick, Xen. (Ec. 15. 7 In N. T. to took af 
 ter, to oversee, to take care of; absol. 1 Pet. 
 5, 2 firi(TKOTrovvr(s taking care of, sc. TO 
 noip.viov. With negat. /ziij rty, to take care 
 lest, Heb. 12, 15. Sept for ^ Deut. 11, 
 12. So Lycurg. 159. 33. Xen. (Ec. 9. 14. 
 Lac. 2. 2. 
 
 eTTtcr/coTT//, j)y, fj, (e7rto7co7re<B.) visita 
 tion, i. e. 
 
 1. The act of visiting or being visited or 
 inspected ; in N. T. trop. of God, who is 
 said to visit men for good, comp. in eVrio-Ke- 
 rrTOfj.at, no. 2. b. Luke 19, 44 TOV Kaipov 
 eVto-KOTT?}? o-ov, the time of thy visitation, 
 when God visited thee, was present to fa 
 vour thee. 1 Pet. 2, 12. [5,6.] Sept. for n^Q 
 Job 10, 12 ; iil-n Job 34, 9. So 1 Esdr. 6, 
 5. In Sept. also for evil, in order to punish, 
 Ex. 13, 19. Is. 10, 3. Wisd. 14, 11. 
 
 2. The duly of visiting, inspecting, i. e. 
 charge, office, genr. Acts 1, 20 quoted from 
 Ps. 109, 8, where Sept. for >Tnj5B, as also 
 Num. 4, 16. Spec, the office of an eVi o-Ko- 
 TTOS, i. e. the care and oversight of a Chris 
 tian church, 1 Tim. 3, 1. 
 
 ou, o, (eVio-KeVro/xai,) an 
 inspector, overseer, guardian, e. g. of trea 
 ties, Horn. II. 22. 255. Hdian. 7. 10. 6 ; of 
 laws, Plut. Solon 19 ; of wares, Horn. Od. 
 8. 163; of public works, Sept. for ^BE 
 2 Chr. 34, 12. 17 ; of cities, e. g. a prefect, 
 Sept. for tiM Is. 60, 17. Jos. Ant. 10. 4. 1 ; 
 or a patron, as Minerva of Athens, Dem. 
 421. 27. Hence at Athens eVi o-Korrot were 
 magistrates sent out to tributary cities to 
 organize and govern them ; see Schol. in 
 Aristoph. Av. 1023. Boeckh Publ. Econ. I. 
 p. 211, 319. [Staatsh. I. p. 168, 256.] Ne- 
 ander Hist, of the Plant, and Tr. of the Chr. 
 Ch. I. p. 167 sq. [Germ. ed. 2. 1. p. 187 sq.] 
 In N. T. spoken of officers in the primi 
 tive churches, an overseer, superintendent, 
 Acts 20, 28. Phil. 1,1.1 Tim. 3, 2. Tit. 1, 
 7. Trop. of Jesus, 1 Pet. 2, 25. This was 
 originally simply the common Greek name 
 of office equivalent to 7rpeo-/3vrepor, which 
 latter was a. Jewish term ; see Neander 1. c. 
 
 and comp. Acts 20, 17. 28. Tit. 1, 6. 7. 
 1 Pet. 5, 1. 2. So Jerome Ep. 82 (83) ad 
 Oceanum : " Apud veteres iidem episcopi 
 et presbyteri, quia illud nomen dignitatis 
 est, hoc setatis." See Gieseler KG. I. c. 1. 
 5 30, n. a. 33, n. b. In later ecclesiastical 
 usage, a bishop. 
 
 7Tl<T7ra(i), d>. f. do-o>, (Waw,) to draw 
 upon, to draw to, e. g. TTJV Zvpav, to shut, 
 Xen. Hell. 6. 4. 36. In N. T. Mid. to 
 draw upon or over in respect to oneself, 
 viz. to draw over the prepuce again ; ab 
 sol. 1 Cor. 7, 18 fir) firicnrda^o), i. e. let 
 him not become as if uncircumcised. The 
 allusion is to a mode of removing the mark 
 of circumcision, described by Celsus (7. 25), 
 and practised by Jews who abandoned their 
 religion and national customs ; 1 Mace. 1 , 
 15. Jos. Ant. 12. 5. 1. The Rabbins call 
 such persons B^StoSo, overdrawn, see Bux- 
 torf Lex. Rab. Ch. 1274sq. Schoettg. Hor. 
 Heb. Diss. 3. p. 1159 sq. Hesych. /xi) eVi- 
 CTTracrSa) (JLTJ &CVCTW TO 8ep/j.a. 
 
 eTTlCTTreipa), f. epw. (a-7m p<a ; ) to sow 
 upon, tlierelo, in addition; c. ace. Matt. 13, 
 25 Lachm. eVeWetpe i<ivia, Vulg. super- 
 seminavit, for Rec. e<nrfipe. Theophr. C. 
 PL 2. 17. 3. 
 
 7T terra fj,ai, f. eVto-Dyo-op-at, either Ionic 
 Mid. of e<icrnj/u (instead of etpiWa/xat) in 
 the signif. e <pi o-T77/ii rov voiiv, Matth. } 234. 
 Passow s. v. or else a distinct root kindr. 
 with "(r7)ij.i, ol8a, Buttm. Ausf. Sprachl. 
 5 1 14. p. 173. To fix one s mind upon, Lat. 
 animum advertere ; hence, to understand, to 
 knoio liow to do any thing, c. inf. Luc. I). 
 Mort, 10. 1. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 9 bis. In 
 N. T. 
 
 1 . to know well, to have knowledge of, with 
 ace. of thing, Acts 18, 25 fTriardfj-tvos JM- 
 vov TO /SaTTTtor/ia "l<u. James 4, 14 ; ace. of 
 pers. Acts 19, 15 HavXov fnia-ra^ai. With 
 TTtpi TOVTGJI/ Acts 26, 26 ; u>s Acts 10, 28 ; 
 OTI Acts 15, 7. 19, 25. 22, 19 ; TTWS 20, 18; 
 TToiJHeb. 11,8. Sept. for^ Deut. 28, 36. 
 Josh. 2, 5. 9. (So c. ace. Luc. D. Deor. 25. 
 2. Xen. An. 1. 3. 12; wy Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 
 22 ; OTI Hdian. 2. 5. 15. Xen. An. 1. 4. 8.) 
 With ace. and particip. Acts 24, 10 oVra o-f 
 KPITTJV eVio-Ta/iei/oy, comp. Buttm. 144. 6. 
 b. So Luc, D. Mort. 9. 2. Xen. An. 6. 6. 17. 
 
 2. Spec, to understand, to comprehend, c. 
 accus. Mark 14, 68 OVK ol8a,ovde firi(rrap.ai 
 TI (TV Xeyeir. 1 Tim. 6, 4. Jude 1 0. Sept. 
 for biBton Is. 41, 20. So Xen. Conv. 3. 6. 
 
 fa > s , ^, (e ipi oTTj/it,) pr. a 
 causing to stand by, a stopping, staying, 
 
285 
 
 concourse; roO o^Aou Acts 24, 12; p.ov 
 2 Cor. 1 1 , 28. So Lachm. for eVio-vorao-t? 
 Rec. Plut. de Solert. Anim. 19. Xen. An. 
 2. 4. 26. 
 
 eTTtcrraT?;?, ov, 6, (e<pi oTa/iai,) pr. one 
 set over, a prefect, master, spoken of a king, 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 1.8; of the commander of a 
 ship, Xen. QEc. 21. 3 ; of a military officer, 
 Sept. for f^B 2 K. 25, 19 ; of a director in 
 gymnastics, Traioorpifirjs, Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 
 18 ; also of other officers, see Boeckh Publ. 
 Econ. of Ath. I. p. 272. [Germ. I. p. 218. II. 
 p. 199, 411.] In N. T. a master, i. q. a 
 teacher, only in the vocat. addressed to Je 
 sus as having the authority of a teacher, 
 paQfii, among his disciples ; Luke 5, 5. 8, 
 24.45. 9,33.49. 17,13. Parall. with pa- 
 t and Kvpios, comp. Luke 9, 33 and Mark 
 
 9, 5. Matt. 17, 4; with SiSaovcaAor, comp. 
 Luke 8, 24 and Mark 4, 38. Diod. Sic. 3. 
 71. ib. 16. 2 Hv Sayoptiov f^aiv (pi\6a-o(pov 
 
 v. Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 282. 
 
 ), f. eX&j, (or/AAco,) to send 
 to any one, in send word to, verbally Xen. 
 Cyr. 1.4. L 6. In N. T. to send word by 
 letter, to write to any one; absol. Acts 21, 
 25; C. dat. Heb. 13, 22 oia fipaxfvv eVe- 
 a vp.1v. So c. dat. et inf. Acts 15, 20 
 avroTy ToO a7re xfcr3ai KT\. where 
 the genit. follows a verb of command, Wi 
 ner 45. 4. p. 378. ed. 5. So JE.L V. H. 
 2. 5. Hdian. 4. 12. 7. Plato Ep. 358. d. 
 Xen. Hell. 1. 5. 3, 5. 
 
 eTTKmjfjitoV, ovos, 6, 17, adj. (en-iora/iai,) 
 knowing, endued with knowledge, James 3, 
 13. Sept. for "paj Dent. 1, 13. Ecclus. 
 
 10, 25. Plut. Sulla 4 fin. Xen. CEc. 21. 5. 
 e7T6<7T?7/3ta>, f. i o-<a, (<m7p/f&>,) to set 
 
 or place firmly upon, to let lean upon ; Pass, 
 or Mid. to lean upon, Sept. for "jSii 3 2 Sam. 
 1, 6. Luc. Philops. 13. In N. T . trop. to 
 confirm, to strengthen, c. ace. Acts 14, 22 
 ras i^v^us 1 TCOI> /xaS^rwi . 15,32.41. 18,23. 
 eTT/.CTToX^, T;?, 17, (eViOTeAAo),) word 
 sent, message, Thuc. 7. 11, comp. 8. In 
 N. T. an epistle, letter, Acts 15, 30. 23, 25. 
 33. Rom. 16, 22. 1 Cor. 5, 9. 16, 3. 2 Cor. 
 3,1. 7, 8 bis. 10, 9. 10. 11. Col. 4, 16. 
 
 1 Thess. 5, 27. 2 Thess. 2, 2. 15. 3, 14. 17. 
 
 2 Pet. 3, 1. 16. Trop. 2 Cor. 3, 2. 3. Sept. 
 for snsx Ezra 4, 8. 11 ; rviax Neh. 6, 5. 
 17. (Diod. Sic. 1. 95. Plut. Demetr. 18 init. 
 Xen. An. 1. 6. 3.) Spec, a letter of author 
 ity, despatch, Acts 9, 2. 22, 5. Sept. for 
 rnas Xeh. 2, 7. 8. So Xen. Ag. 8. 3. 
 
 e7nCTTO/Lu&>, f. tVco, (eVt, oro/ia,) pr. to 
 put upon the mouth, to stop the mouth with 
 
 a bit or curb, Phitostr. Icon. 2. 18 ; to check, 
 to curb, Plut. de Gen. Socr. 22. p. 102. 
 In N. T. trop. to stop the mouth, to put tc 
 silence, c. ace. Tit. 1,11. So Dem. 85. 4 
 fmorop.if iv TOVS avrw dvriXfyoiTas. Luc. 
 Icarom. 21. Plato Gorg. 482. e. 
 
 e7TLcrTpe(f)a>, f. \l/u, (o-Tpf(pc0,) Pass, 
 aor. 2 fTTftrrpdfpTjv with Mid. signif. Buttm. 
 5 136. 1, 2 ; to turn upon, to turn towards, 
 trans. Horn. II. 3. 370 ; trop. TO vorjpa eiy TI 
 Theogn. 1079 [1083] ; ras fyeis els tav- 
 TT,V Hdian. 5. 3. 15. In N. T. 
 
 I. Trans, in a moral sense, to turn upon 
 or to, to convert unto ; with ace. and eVi 
 riva, Luke 1, 16 TroAAovf (Tnarptyfi Vt rov 
 Kvpiov. V. 17 fTTio-rpf \lsai KapSias -rrarepav 
 fVl TfKva. Sept. for son Ezra 6, 22 ; comp. 
 Mai. 3, 24 [4, 6]. (Ecclus. 48, 10.) Spec. 
 to turn back again upon, to convert from 
 error, with eVi rf)i> dXfaiav or the like im 
 plied, James 5, 19. 20. Sept. pr. for :rirn 
 1 K. 13, 18. 19. 20. Pr. Xen. Hell. 6. 4/9". 
 
 II. Intrans. in Act. with iavrov implied, 
 Buttm. 113. n. 2. { 130. n. 2. Matth. 
 5 496. 1 ; also in Mid. to turn oneself upon 
 or towards, i. e. to turn towards or unto. 
 
 1 . Act. intrans. a) Pr. Acts 9, 40 rt- 
 crrpt^ras Trpos TO <rcofj.a. Trop. eVicrrpe <e^ 
 eVi TOV 3eoV v. Kvpiov, to turn to the service 
 and worship of the true God, Acts 9, 35. 
 11,21. 14,15. 15,19. 26, 18. 20; Trpos 
 Kvpiov 2 Cor. 3, 16. 1 Thess. 1, 9; eVt rbi 
 TToi^va 1 Pet. 2, 25. Sept. for n:Q Deut. 
 31, 18 ; pr. Gen. 24,49 ; 2V1J Josh/19, 34. 
 Hos. 5, 4. So Ecclus. 17, 25 ; pr. Susann. 
 47. Pol. 7. 11. 4. Thuc. 1. 61. b) Also 
 to turn about upon or towards; Rev. 1, 12 
 bis, KOI enecTTpcifm fiXenfiv rfjv (fratvfjv p.fT" 
 tfjiov KT\. Acts 16, 18. Sept. for njQ Judg. 
 18, 21. So Plut. M. Anton. 45. Xen. Yen. 
 10. 15. c) Spec, to turn back upon, to 
 return, pr. and with onicrca Matt. 24, 18 
 (JEl V. H. 1. 6) ; fls ra OTTI O-OJ Mark 13, 
 16. Luke 17, 31 ; with fls c. ace. Matt. 12, 
 44 ; eVi c. ace. 2 Pet. 2, 22 ; eVt <re or Trpos 
 ae Luke 17, 4 ; absol. Luke 2, 20 Rec. Acts 
 15, 36. So of the breath or spirit returning 
 to a dead body, Luke 8, 55. Sept. for 2T^ 
 Ruth. 1,7. 10. (Pol. 1. 47. 8. Xen. Hell. 
 4. 5. 16.) Trop. of a return to good, to re 
 turn, to be converted, absol. Luke 22, 32. 
 Acts 3, 19; so Matt. 13, 15. Mark 4, 12. 
 Acts 28, 27, all quoted from Is. 6, 10 where 
 Sept. for 2Tii. Also to evil, to turn back 
 unto, c. (TTi TI, Gal. 4, 9 rru>s tVtcrrpe cpfT* 
 TroAtv eVi TO TTTco^ik o-TOi^fta. 2 Pet. 2, 21 
 eTTifrrpe^ai (K TJJS eWoAfjy sc. ri n}v (p3o- 
 pav, comp. v. 19. 
 
286 
 
 2. Mid. intrans. withaor. 2 eT 
 see above init. a) to <urn about upon or 
 (awards, absol. Matt. 9, 22 o fie iT/o-ouy - 
 <rrpa<j)(is. Mark 8, 33. John 21, 20 ; eV. eV 
 TU> o^Xo), Mark 5, 30. Sept. for aitti Num. 
 
 23, 6. So Wisd. 16, 7. Xen. Cyr. 6. 4. 10. 
 b) Spec, to turn back upon, to return unto ; 
 C. Trpos Tiva. Matt. 10, 13 rj dprjvr) Trpos 
 vfj.us (TricrTpa(pr]T<a. Sept. for yfft Ruth. 1, 
 11. 12. 15. (Plut. de Lib. educ. 17 mid.) 
 Trop. to return to good, to be converted; 
 John 12, 40 eVioTpcKpdxrt, comp. Is. 6, 10 
 and in no. 1. c, above. So Dem. 133. 24. 
 
 7riCTTpO(f)r), fj S , 17, (eVto-rpe cpco,) a turn 
 ing about, conversion, Pol. 5. 72. 8. In 
 N. T. trop. conversion to good, to the gos 
 pel, Acts 15, 3. So Ecclus. 18, 21. 
 
 eTrio-vvdya), f. dw, (o-urayw,) to lead 
 or bring together upon a place, to gather to 
 gether, to assemble, c. ace. Matt. 23, 37 bis. 
 
 24, 31. Mark 13, 27. Luke 13, 34. Pass. 
 Mark 1, 33. Luke 12, 1. Sept. for t)GX 
 Is. 52, 12 ; ^T!l? 2 Chr. 20, 26. 2 Mace. 
 2, 14. 18. Pol. 5. 95. 7. 
 
 eTTiavvaycoyr], Jjy, rj, (eVto-wayw,) act 
 of assembling, a gathering together, 2 Thess. 
 2, 1. Heb. 10, 25. Meton. 2 Mace. 2, 7. 
 
 e7TiavVTpe%a) : f. 3pe o/u, (<rvi>rpe x&>,) 
 to run together upon or to the scene of any 
 action, Mark 9, 25. 
 
 7TO"f O"TO.O"4y, ecoy, 17, (eVtcrvi /orTa/iCH,) 
 pr. a coming together upon a place ; hence 
 a concourse, crowd ; e. g. iroiflv eTricrvo-Ta- 
 :rn> to make a concourse, to raise a tumult, 
 Acts 24, 12. Sept. for "rtS Num. 16, 40.. 
 (Jos. c. Ap. 1. 20. Sext. Empir. Eth. 127. 
 See Wetst. N. T. II. p. 209.) Spec, a con 
 course, crowd of persons coming to any one, 
 2 Cor. 11,28 TJ fTTia-va-Taa-ls p-ov 77 Ka3 i^e - 
 pav, i. q. quotidiani hominum impetus, Cic. 
 pro Arch. 6. 
 
 X?79j e oy, ovs, 6, 17, adj. (o-<pdX- 
 ,) pr. nigh upon falling, i. e. re<z<fy 
 Z, unsteady ; trop. insecure, dangerous, 
 Acts 27, 9 eVtoxpaXovy rot) TrXody. Jos. 
 Ant. 5. 1. 16. Pol. 1. 66. 12. Plato Rep. 
 497. d. 
 
 eTTtcr^uft), f. vo-w, (lo-xvo),) to strengthen 
 upon, i. e. in addition, to make stronger, e. g. 
 Ti t v nokiv Xen. CEc. 11. 13. Intrans. to 
 grow stronger, Theophr. de Cans. PI. 2. 1. 4. 
 Diod. Sic. 5. 59. In N. T. of persons, to 
 grow stronger in manner, to be more vehe 
 ment, fierce ; Luke 23, 5 (iria-xvov \eyovres. 
 So in power 1 Mace. 6, 6. Ecclus. 29, 1. 
 
 7ncr<wpeu&>, f. (v<ra>, (o-wpeuco,) to heap 
 upon, to heav up, c. ace. rouy veitpovs Plut. 
 
 Pyrrh. 22 pen. In N. T. trop. SiSa 
 
 2 Tim. 4, 3. So trop. Plut. de vitand. Mr 
 
 alien. 6. Artemid. 3. 66. 
 
 jy, ^ (eVtrdo-o-w.) a charge, 
 injunction, command, e. g. of Christ, 1 Cor. 
 7, 6. 25. 2 Cor. 8, 8 ; of God, i. q. for will, 
 decree, Rom. 16, 26. 1 Tim. 1, 1. Tit. 1, 3 ; 
 genr. Tit. 2, 15 /icra Trdcrjjy eVira^s with 
 all injunction, i. e. strongly, severely. 
 Wisd. 14, 16. Pol. 13. 4. 3. 
 
 eirndacrw v. -TTO>, f. <B, (rao-o-w,) to 
 set in order upon or after one another, e. g. 
 soldiers, to arrange in ranks one after ano 
 ther, with ace. and dat. Pol. 1. 26. 12. Xen. 
 Hell. 1. 6. 29. In N. T. to order, to enjoin 
 upon, to charge, to command ; so c. dat. 
 Mark 1, 27 rots Trveu/ioo-i rois uKa3. eVt- 
 rdo-o-ei. Luke 4, 36. 8, 25. Sept. for n>!2 
 Gen. 49, 32. (2 Mace. 9, 8. Xen. Cyr. 4/2 . 
 33.) With ace. and dat. Philem. 8 eVtrdo-- 
 a-fiv aoi TO dvrJKov. (Pol. 8. 27. 2. Xen. CEc. 
 
 7. 23.) With dat. and infin. aor. Mark 6, 
 39. Luke 8, 31 ; inf. pres. Acts 23, 2. (Xen. 
 Cyr. 7. 3. 1 3.) With ace. and inf. Mark 
 6, 27 (rreTaj-fv fVfx^fjvai TTJV Kftyakrjv. (Sept. 
 Dan. 6, 9. Xen. Lac. 5. 8.) Absol. Luke 
 14, 22 ; foil, by the direct words, Mark 
 9,25. 
 
 eTTtTeXeeo, ,, f. tVa>, (eVi intens. reXea),) 
 to bring through to an end, to finish, to ac 
 complish. 1o perform, to do. 
 
 1. 1 r. of any work, business, course, c. 
 ace. Lvko 13, 32 lavtis. Rom. 15, 28. 
 2 Cor. 7, 1 eV. ayiaHTvvrjv, i. q. to practise. 
 
 8, 6. 11 bis. Phil. 1, 6. Heb. 8, 5 r. r> 
 <TKT)vf]v, i. q. to make. Sept. for 2?S2 Zech. 
 
 4, 9 ; i=?5 Num. 23, 23. (Pol. 1. 37. 7. 
 Xen. Hell. 1. 1. 26.) Heb. 9, 6 Tay Xarpfi ay 
 eVrreXovirey, accomplishing the services, i.e. 
 performing or celebrating the sacred rites. 
 So Philo de Somn. p. 653 eVireXeu/ Xeiroup- 
 yias. Hdian. 4. 1. 8 ray lepovpyias. 
 
 2. Mid. intrans. to come to an end, to 
 finish, to leave off ; with dat. of manner, 
 Gal. 3, 3 fvap^dfj.(i>oi 7rvcup.aTi, vvv (rapid 
 eVireXelo-Se ; having begun in the Spirit, 
 do ye now end in the flesh f i. e. in attach 
 ment to carnal ordinances. So Sept. ilpgo- 
 p.at Kai tTrtr/Xeo-co for f |3 1 Sam. 3, 12. 
 
 3. Trop. to accomplish afflictions, suffer 
 ings, i. e. to undergo, to endure, Pass. 1 Pet. 
 
 5, 9. Mid. eVireXficrSat rov Sdvarov Xen. 
 Apol. Socr. 33. 
 
 eTTiTijSeio?, a, ov, (eVtr^Sey,) made for 
 an end or purpose, fit, adapted, Wisd. 4, 5. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 17. In N. T. proper, ser 
 viceable, needful ; James 2, 1 6 TCI eVn-^Seta 
 TOW o-a>juaroy, things needful for the body 
 
287 
 
 L .. the necessaries of life. So 1 Mace. 14, 
 34. Hdian. 8. 6. 6. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 10. 
 
 , f. Siycrw, (rt Sty/it,) aor. 1 
 , aor. 2 eVe Styc. For pres. 3 plur. 
 eWi3 ao-i Matt 23, 4, see Buttm. 5 107. 
 n. I, 1 ; for Imperat. pres. eVirfect 1 Tim. 
 5, 22, see Buttm. 1. c. n. I, 5 ; and for the 
 accent in Imperat. aor. 2 cVfee? Matt. 9, 18, 
 see Buttm. 1. c. n. I, 13. 
 
 1 . to set, put, place, or lay upon ; with 
 various adjuncts. a) Pr. with ace. and 
 firi c. ace. Matt. 23, 4 (popria iwmSti&Tif 
 firi rovs &P.OVS TUIV di/3p. Luke 15, 5. Acts 
 15, 10 faficiWM vybv firi rovrpd^rfkov KT\. 
 Mark 4, 21 \v%vov tirl rfjv X^i/iai/. Matt. 
 27, 29. John 9, 15. Acts 28, 3. Sept. for 
 B^ton Gen. 21, 14; ", Gen. 25, 20. 30. 
 (Palaeph. 32. 14. Xen. Cyr. 7. 3. 14.) 
 With ace, and dat. Acts 15, 28 eVm 3eo-3<u 
 iifi.lv fidpos . Luke 23, 26. John 19, 2. Trop. 
 of a name, Mark 3, 16. 17. Sept. for aitori 
 Dan. 1, 7. 5, 13. (Hdian. 4. 7. 12. Xen" 
 (Ec. 17. 9.) With ri c. gen. Luke 8, 16 
 \\>-^yov firi Xv^j/i ay. Also firdva> C. gen. 
 Matt. 21,7. 27, 37. b) Spec, in the phrase 
 firiTiSevai TTjv xdpa V. rds Xflpas, to 
 lay the hand or hands upon, as the symbol 
 of healing power, or the like ; with eiri c. 
 ace. Matt. 9, 18. Mark 8, 25. 16, 18. Acts 
 9, 17; c. dat. Matt. 19, 13. 15. Mark 5, 23. 
 6, 5. 7, 32. 8, 23. Luke 4, 40. 13, 13. 
 Acts 9, 12. 28, 8; or also for benediction, 
 consecration, with eVi c. ace. Acts 8, 17 ; 
 with dat. Acts 6, 6. 8, 19. 13, 3. 19, 6. 
 1 Tim. 5, 22 ; comp. in entifcris. So Rev. 
 1, 17 Rec, fW3. rr]V &fiav aiirov tir (jj.e. 
 Sept. e. em n for 7(SO Lev. 3, 2. 13. c) 
 Of stripes, to lay on, to inflict, e. g. 77X7770? 
 eVtSeWtf Luke 10, 30 ; c. dat. Acts 16, 23 ; 
 c. firi nva Rev. 22, 18. So of punish 
 ments Diod. Sic. 11.19. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 2 ; 
 comp. Cic. pro Sext. 19 plagas impono. 
 d) Trop. of gifts, to lade with, to supply with, 
 Mid. e. ace. et dat. Acts 28, 10 dvayoptvois 
 firtZfiro TO. irpos TTJV xpfiav. Comp. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 2. 4. 
 
 2. Mid. to set oneself upon or against 
 any one, to set upon, to assail, c. dat. Acts 
 1 8, 1 ov8f\s firiSTjatTai croi. So Sept. for 
 52:rn Gen. 43, 18; "W% 2 Chr. 24, 21. 
 2!j.JE\. V. H. 3. 19 med. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 1. 15 ; in war, Xen. An. 2. 4. 3. 
 
 3. to put to, to add to, to superadd, with 
 irpos c. ace. Rev. 22, 18 tdv ris (irfifj irpos 
 ravra. Horn. H. 7. 364. Pint. Aristid. 24. 
 
 ), w, f. r;o-a>, (rt/iao),) pr. to set 
 a value upon, to estimate ; hence, to show 
 honour to, e. g. one dead, Hdot. 6. 39 ; to 
 
 raise in price, e. g. grain, Dem. 918. 22 ; to 
 lay as an estimate (penalty) upon any one. 
 to award, to adjudge, e. g. TTJV dpxa!.T}v SI KJJV 
 tTriTip.<av Hdot. 4. 43 ; to reprehend, to find 
 fault with in any one, c. ace. et dat. Plato 
 Phaedr. 237. c, o aXXois eVm/iw/iev . Hence 
 in N. T. 
 
 1. to rebuke, to reprove, to admonish, c. 
 dat. of pers. Matt. 16, 22. 19, 13 oi Se pa- 
 S^rai firiTLfjirjcrav OVTOLS. Mark 8, 32. 33. 
 10, 13. Luke 9, 55. 17, 3. 18, 15. 19, 39. 
 23, 40 : absol. 2 Tim. 4, 2. Sept. for l?a 
 Gen. 37, 10. Ruth 2, 16. So Isocr. 170. a. 
 Dem. 558. 27. Xen. CEc. 11. 24. Spec, 
 with the idea of restraining from evil ; e. g. 
 Satan, Jude 9 rrtrt/x/;crat (rot Kvpios, quoted 
 from Zech. 3, 2 where Sept. for "i?*> ; comp. 
 Wetst. in loc. Also demons, Matt. -17, 18. 
 Mark 1, 25. 9, 25. Luke 4, 35. 41. 9, 42. 
 Of things, e. g. a fever, c. dat. Luke 4, 39 ; 
 winds and waves, Matt. 8, 26 eVcn /ir/cre role 
 dvepots KT\. Mark 4, 39. Luke 8, 24. So 
 Sept. and 155 p s . 106, 9. 
 
 2. Emphat. to admonish strongly, to charge 
 strictly, with the idea of rebuke in case of 
 disobedience ; c. dat. Luke 9, 21 6 8e eViri- 
 p.rj(ras avrols TrapiyyyeiXe *rX. With dat, 
 and tm, Matt. 16, 20 Lachm. 20, 31. Mark 
 10, 48. Luke 18, 39 ; dat. and Iva w, Matt. 
 
 12, 16. Mark 3, 12. 8, 30. 
 
 evrtTi/ilO., as, T), (firirifJLOs, eVirt/xao),) 
 the condition of an fTrinpos, full citizenship, 
 Diod. Sic. 18. 18. ^Eschin. 39. 42. In N. T. 
 a penalty, punishment, 2 Cor. 2, 6. So 
 W T isd. 3, 10 ; but classic writers usually 
 ra firirifua, as Dem. 229 ult. 
 
 7rirpe7ra), f. ^o>, (rptVo),) Pass. aor. 1 
 firfrpdmjv Acts 28, 16 ; to turn over upon, 
 to throw upon, e. g. ts Ke<pa\r)v rjp.lv eVe- 
 Tpene TOI/S uvSpcucay Luc. Lexiph. 8 ; oftener 
 to give over to, to commit to, c. ace. et dat. 
 Pol. 20. 9. 10. Xen. An. 6. 1. 31. In N. T. 
 to permit, to suffer ; e. g. c. dat. of pers. 
 Luke 8, 32 *a! eVeVprv//-^ avrols. Mark 5, 
 
 13. Usually with dat. of pers. and infin. 
 of object; e. g. dat. and inf. aor. Matt. 8,21 
 f7virpf\l/ 6i> p.oi irptorov aTreXStti/ KT\. \. 31. 
 19, 8. Luke 8, 32. 9, 59. 61. Acts 21, 39 
 dat. and inf. pres. 1 Tim. 2, 12 yvvaiici Se 
 SiSucrKfiv OVK eVtrpeVo). Pass. Acts 26, 1. 
 28, 16. 1 Cor. 14, 34. (So dat. et inf. aor. 
 Hdian. 7. 9. 24. Xen. An. 1. 2. 19; inf. 
 pres. ^El. V. H. 2. 5. Xen. Cyr. 8. 4. 29.) 
 With inf. aor. simply, Mark 10, 4 Mwv o-fjy 
 tir(Tpr*fs( /StjQXi ov aTrocrracri ou ypd^lrai Ka\ 
 dTroXCo-ai. Acts 27, 3. (Hdian. 8. 6. 4. X 
 An. 7. 7. 8.) Absol. John 19, 38. A 
 21, 40. 1 Cor. 16, 7 tav 6 Kvptos e 
 
288 
 
 if the Lord permit. Heb. 6, 3. So Xen. 
 Cyr. 5. 5. 22. 
 
 GTrtTpOTTT], 77$-, rj, (fVfrpeTrcu,) commis 
 sion, charge, full power, Acts 26, 12. Arr. 
 Epict. 2, 8. 5. Pol. 3. 15. 7. Plut. Reip. 
 gerend. Praec. 18. 
 
 eiriTpoTros, ov, 6, (eVirpeVco,) pr. one 
 to whom a charge is committed. 
 
 1 . a steward, manager, agent, pr. Matt. 20, 
 8. Luke 8, 3 Xotia eVirporrou HpwSov, i. e. 
 the manager of his private affairs. Jos. 
 Ant. 18. 6. 6, where king Agrippa makes 
 the freedman Thaumastus r^s ova-ias Vi- 
 rpmov. Paleeph. 31. 8. Xen. GEc. 12. 2. 
 
 2. a tutor, guardian, curator, i. q. 6 TTCU- 
 tiaycoyos q. v. usually a slave or freedman, 
 to whose care the boys of a family were 
 committed, who trained them up, instructed 
 them at home, or accompanied them to the 
 public schools, Gal. 4, 2. Plut. Cic. 38 ri 
 ovv OVK firiTpojrov avrbv rols Ttamf (pv\da- 
 a-fis; M\. V. H. 13. 43 [44]. Xen. Mem. 
 
 I . 2. 40. In Gr. writers oftener a guardian 
 of orphan children ; see Diet, of Antt. art. 
 Epilropus. 
 
 eirCTVy^dvO), (rvyxdvca,) aor. 2 eVe rv- 
 XQV, to light upon, to chance to meet, c. dat. 
 Time. 8. 14. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 5 ; to hit the 
 mark, Arr. Epict. 4. 6. 28 ; to attain one s 
 aim, Arr. Epict. 2. 17. 12. In N. T. genr. 
 to attain unto, i. e. to obtain, to acquire, c. 
 gen. Heb. 6, 15 eWrvxe TIJS eVayytXiay. 
 
 II, 33 ; c. ace. TOVTO Rom. 11, 7 in later 
 edit, (where Rec. c. gen.) see Herm. ad Vig. 
 p. 760. Absol. James 4, 2. So c. gen. Sept. 
 Prov. 12, 27. Dem. 1168. 1. Xen. (Ec. 2. 3 ; 
 absol. Thuc. 6. 38. 
 
 eTTKJXliVCi), f. (pai/to, (cpatVa),) aor. 1 eW- 
 (prjva, Pass. aor. 2 eTrefpavvv ; pr. to cause 
 to appear upon or to, to show forth, to dis 
 play, trop. 3 Mace. 2, 19. Theogn. 359. 
 Plut. Marcell. 1 . In N. T. intrans. or with 
 tavrov implied, and also Mid. or Pass, to 
 show oneself upon or to, i. e. to appear upon 
 or to, spoken of light, to shine upon ; comp. 
 Buttm. J113. n. 2. 130. n. 2. Matth. 
 $496. 1. 
 
 1 . Pr. in pres. Act. absol. Acts 27, 20 
 f;re (icrrpcav tTrKpatvovrcav. Aor. I, c. dat. 
 Luke 1 , 79 dvaroXri e fyovs . . fTrxpavai 
 TOIS eV a-KOTfi, where for the form tmtftaim, 
 instead of eVt^wu (Act. Thorn. $ 30 pen.) 
 see Buttm. $ 101. n. 2. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
 24 sq. .-El. V. H. 13. 1 pen. KOI aTrpooVrcor 
 fTTf(j)T]vf. coo-TTtp dcrrqp. Pol. 5. 6. 6 (ipri TTJS 
 rjfj.fpas tTTKpaivovo-qs. 
 
 2. Trop. in Pass. aor. 2, to be conspicu 
 ous, to be known and manifest ; Tit. 2,11 
 
 T) xapiy. 3, 4. So pr. Sept. for i~t^?3 Gen. 
 35, 7. Ep. Jer. 61. 
 
 eTTKpaveia, as, f], (eVt<paiVo>,) an ap 
 pearing, appearance, spoken of the advent 
 of Jesus, 2 Tim. 1, 10 ; of his future ad 
 vent, 2 Thess. 2, 8. 1 Tim. 6, 14. 2 Tim. 
 4, 1. 8. Tit. 2, 13. Comp. Luke 1, 78. 79. 
 So of celestial appearances in aid of Is 
 rael, 2 Mace. 3, 24. 5, 4 ; genr. Pol. 3. 94. 
 3. Diod. Sic. 1. 25. 
 
 i eoy, ovs, , 17, a. fT 
 
 /nai.) appearing upon or to, risible, Thuc. 
 7. 19; clear, manifest, Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 10. 
 In N. T. trop. illustrious, memorable, no 
 table ; Acts 2, 20 rrjv f]p.fpav xvpiov TTJV /ie- 
 yaXrjv /cat eirKpavrj, quoted from Joel 2, 31 
 where Sept. for K^iS, as also v. 11. Hab. 1, 
 7. So Pol. 1. 36. 3. Plato Legg. 829. c ; of 
 persons Xen. Ag. 3. 2. 
 
 eVt^auo), f. avaa>, (<pava>, <paw.) to ap 
 pear unto, to shine upon ; trop. to ghe light 
 to, to enlighten, c. dat. Eph. 5, 14. Act. 
 Thorn. J 34 eVe cpaticre yap p.oi arro (ppovridos- 
 Not found elsewhere ; comp. o~ia(pava> Sept. 
 Gen. 44, 3. 1 Sam. 14, 36. al. See Buttm. 
 Ausf. Sprachl. II. p. 312. Winer $ 15 
 
 7ri<J3epa>, f. eVoiVco, (<pe pco,) aor. 2 orq 
 veyKov, to bear or bring upon or to a person. 
 
 1 . Genr. to bring to any one, Pass, with 
 firi C. ace. Acts 19, 12 wore eVi rovs dcr Sc- 
 vovvras eVicpe pecrSai OTTO rot) xpwros airou 
 erovSapta. Jos/ Ant. 4. 8. 22. Diod. Sic. 
 11. 86. Plato Ep. 354. b. 
 
 2. Spec, to add upon, to superadd to ; c. 
 ace. et dat. Phil. 1, 16 [17] olopevoi SXn/ap 
 emftipeat rots Secr/xoTr p.ov. Philo Leg. ad 
 Cai. p. 1009 Ttvp fTTKpepw irvpi. Aristot. 
 Rhet. 3. 6. 
 
 3. In a judicial sense, to bring upon or 
 against, e. g. an accusation, c. ace. as at- 
 riav Acts 25, 18 ; *piW Jude 9. So Jos. 
 Ant. 4. 8. 23 post init. Pol. 5. 41. 3. Plato 
 Pheed. 98. a. Of wrath or punishment, 
 Rom. 3, 5 eVi^e pcoy n]v opyrjv, i. e. inflict 
 ing punishment. So Jos. Ant. 2. 14. 2 X- 
 Xryv roty AiyvTrriois TTi(p(pfi irXrjyrjv. 
 
 67T(,(j)0)ve(i), >, f. TJO-CO, ((p&Wo> : ) to cry 
 out upon, tliereupon, Luke 23, 21 ; in accla 
 mation, Acts 12,22. So 1 Esdr. 9,47. Plut. 
 de Herodot. malig. 34. With dat. of person 
 upon or against whom outcry is made, Acts 
 22, 24; c. ace. 21, 34 Lachm. So Luc. 
 Philopatr. 28. Plut. Timol. 36. 
 
 light upon, to dawn upon, intrans. of the 
 day, Matt. 28, 1 ry (m(pc>)(TKova~rj sc. 
 
289 
 
 eTTOvpavio? 
 
 Trop. of the Jewish day, beginning at sun 
 set, to begin, Luke 23, 54. Diod. Sic. 13. 
 18 in some edit. Comp. fj^prj Se Suxpav 
 Hdot. 3. 86. 
 
 , f. r;<ra>, (x fl/ P-) to ^ a V 
 hands upon, e. g. Seiirvca, cr/ro), Horn. Od. 
 24. 386, 395 ; to attack, Jos. de Vita sua 44. 
 In N. T. trop. to put the hand to, to lake in 
 hand, to -undertake, c. infill. Luke 1, 1 TroX- 
 Xol anjftlfajmat dwmiuo-3ai 8iTjY r t CTl1 - Acts 
 9, 29. 19, 13. So 2 Mace. 2, 29. Pol. 1. 
 47. 3. Xen. Mem. 3. 6. 1. 
 
 eTTtyecu, f. tvo-io, (x* <>;") io pour upon, 
 e. g. upon wounds, c. ace. Luke 10, 34. 
 Sept. for PS? Gen. 28, 18. Hdian. 4. 9. 
 14. Xen. CEc. 17. 9. 
 
 e7Tt^Op77 ye&>, , f. TJO-W, (xopqyeco,) to 
 furnish besides, in addition, to supply further, 
 to minister, c. ace. et dat. 2 Cor. 9, 10 6 
 fTTixopyyuv cnreppM. r<a cnreipoiTi, in allusion 
 to Is. 55, 10 where Heb. "j^J, Sept. St Sco/ii. 
 Gal. 3, 5 ; ace. et eV c. dat. 2 Pet. 1, 11 ; 
 Pass. v. 5. So Ecclus. 25, 22 of a wife who 
 brings with her a large dowry. Mid. in a 
 reciprocal sense, to supply one another, to 
 furnish aid mutually, Col. 2, 19 TO crw/zu 
 fTrixopriyovfj.vov KOI crujLt/St/Sa^o/iecof, where 
 ro (rcapa is put collectively for all the farts 
 or members; comp. Eph. 4, 16 TO o-co/ia 
 
 as, f], (firixopiiyeu,) sup 
 ply, aid, help, Phil. 1, 19. Eph. 4, 16 dia 
 nda-rjs cxfrfjs rrjs fmxoprjyias, through every 
 joint of (/or) supply, as binding together 
 all the members and thus diffusing the 
 grace supplied from Christ the head : comp. 
 Col. 2, 19 and Gal. 3, 5. 
 
 eTri%pl(i), f. t o-w, (xpt o>.) to rub or smear 
 upon, io anoint upon, c. ace. et eVt c. ace. 
 John 9, 6 cTre xpicrf rov -nrjXov Vi TOVS o0- 
 SoXfioij?. With ace. of the thing anointed, 
 
 V. 11 (TTtXpt-ff f JLOV TOVS O(p^J(l\fJ.OVi SC. TW 
 
 TnyXw. Horn. Od. 21. 179. Lucian. Quom. 
 Hist. C.onscr. 62 tmjfpifOS S Tirdvat sc. TO 
 
 ), >, f. fja-co, (oi 
 t t build upon as a foundation, Pass, with 
 or/ c. dat. Xen. An. 3. 4. 11. In N. T. 
 trop. to build upon, spoken of faith and a 
 life of faith in Christians and in the whole 
 church as built upon the only foundation, 
 Christ ; and implying the constant growth 
 and development of the kingdom of God in 
 the heart and in the visible church, like a 
 holy temple built up on its foundation ; 
 comp. 1 Cor. 3, 9. 10. So with ace. and eVi 
 c. ace. 1 Cor. 3, 12 e< Se ns tVoiKoSo/iei 
 ri TOV ifueXiov TOVTOV xpvo-ov K.T\. or ace 
 19 
 
 sitnpl. v. 14 ; absol. v. 10 bis. Acts 20, 32. 
 Also c. ace. et dat. Jude 20 ; Pass, with 
 fVi C. dat. Eph. 2, 20 eVoiKoSo/iTjSfVres eVi 
 TW SfyneXi w ru>v drrocrToXtoV KT\. Col. 2, 7 
 eV auTw. So of education, Plut. de Mo 
 narch. et Demoo. 1 init. 
 
 7TOKe\\0), f. eXcS, (oWXXw, K XXw,) to 
 
 drive or force upon, e. g. a ship upon the 
 land, i. q. to run aground, c. ace. Acts 27, 
 41 e TTowcetXai TIJV vavv. Hdot. 7. 182 rf]v 
 via. Pol. 4. 41. 2. Thuc. 4. 26. 
 
 7TOVOfJ,dw, f. aero, (ofo/iafw,) to name 
 upon or after, in allusion to some other 
 name or circumstance. Sept. for ^^ Gen. 
 4, 17. 24. 25. In N. T. Pass, to be named 
 in addition to some other title or predicate, 
 to be also called, Rom. 2, 17 o-v louSatos eVo- 
 
 a. So Pol. 1. 29. 2. Xen. GEc. 6. 17. 
 
 vw, f. eva-co, (oVrevw,) to look 
 upon, i. e. to oversee, to inspect, c. ace. ra 
 tpya Horn. Od. 16. 140. Hes. Op. 765. 
 In N. T. genr. to behold, to contemplate, c. 
 ace. 1 Pet. 3, 2 eVoTrrevcrai/Tes rfjv . . . dva- 
 o-rpofyrjv vfjL&v. Absol. 1 Pet. 2, 12. So 
 Dem. 168. 13. Plato Phasdr. 250. c. 
 
 7r07TT?79, ov, 6, (fTro-^ofiai, e^>opaa),) a 
 looker-on, eye-witness, 2 Pet. 1, 16 eVam-ai 
 yfVTjZfvrts. 3 Mace. 2,21. Plut. Agesi. 14. 
 Plato Locr. p. 105. 
 
 eTTOy, eos, ovs, TO, (dirov, ejro),) a word , 
 Heb. 7, 9 cos firos flirfiv so to speak, see in 
 fiTTov no. 1 init. 
 
 eTTOVpaviOS, iov, 6, 17, adj. (eVi, ovpa 
 voy.) pr. on or in heaven, i. e. 
 
 1. heavenly, celestial, spoken of those who 
 dwell in heaven ; Matt. 18,35 6 Trarfjp 6 
 (Ttovpdvios. Phil. 2, 10 of ejrovpdvioi, i. e. 
 angels. (2 Mace. 3, 39. Horn. Od. 17. 484. 
 Luc. D. Deor. 4. 3.) Of those who t;ome 
 from heaven, 1 Cor. 15, 48 bis. 49, comp. 
 \. 47 and Phil. 3, 21. Of the heavenly bo 
 dies, the sun, moon, etc. 1 Cor. 15, 40 bis, 
 comp. v. 41. 
 
 2. Neut. plur. T<J eirovpdvia, the hea 
 venly places, i. e. the heavens, heaven; Eph. 
 
 1, 3. 20 f v 8fiq avrov ev TOIS tnovpaviois. 
 
 2, 6. 3, 10. So of the lower heavens, the 
 sky, the air, as the seat of evil spirits, Eph. 
 6, 12; comp. in ovpavos and dfjp. Test. 
 XII Patr. p. 546 sq. 
 
 3. Of the kingdom of heaven and whatever 
 pertains to it, see in /3aouXfi a no. 3. E. g. 
 of the kingdom itself, 2 Tim. 4, 18 tls r^v 
 j3ao-. rfjv (irovpdviov. So Heb. 3, 1 i&T)<ns 
 tirovpdvios. 6,4. 8,5. 9,23. 11,16. 12,22, 
 comp. Rev. 21, 2. Also ra firovpdvia. 
 things of heaven, not yet revealed, John 3, 
 
290 
 
 epyacria 
 
 1 2, opp. ra (irlyfta where see. Comp. Plato 
 Apol. 19. b, (T/TCOV ra errovpavia. 
 
 eTrra, ot, at, rd, card. num. indec. seven, 
 Matt. 15, 34. 36. 37. Acts 20, 6. al. The 
 number seven was often put by the Jews 
 for an indef. round number, Matt. 12, 45. 
 22, 25. Luke 11, 26. al. Comp. Gen. 41, 2. 
 3. Ruth 4, 15. 1 Sam. 2, 5. Is. 4, 1. Prov. 
 26, 25. Zech. 3, 9. Likewise as a sacred 
 number, of good omen, as also among the 
 Egyptians, Arabians, Persians, etc. Acts 6, 
 3. Rev. 1, 4. 12. 16. 2, 1. al. Comp. Gen. 
 21, 28. Ex. 37, 23. Lev. 4, 6. 17. al. See 
 Heb. Lex. art. 53tti . -f- 
 
 e7rra/a9, num. adv. (fVrd,) seven times, 
 put for an indef. round number, Matt. 18, 
 21. 22. Luke 17, 4 bis. Sept. for S?QJ Ps. 
 119, 164; Diad saai 2 K. 5, 10. 14 
 Pind. Ol. 13. 56. 
 
 at, a, (x i 7u0 seven 
 thousand, Rom. 11, 4, quoted from 1 K. 19, 
 18 where Sept. fVra xiXtdSey. Sept for 
 B-iBiK PSatti Num. 3, 22. 1 Chr. 29, 4. 
 Hdot. 2. 43 . 
 
 "Epacrros, ov, 6, (epdcu,) Erastus, pr. 
 name of a Christian, Acts 19, 22. Rom. 16, 
 23. 2 Tim. 4, 20. 
 
 pydo/Jbai, f. do-o/zat, Mid. depon. (tp- 
 yov, obs. epyco,) impf. elpya6p.T]v, aor. 1 
 elpyaa-dfjir)v, Pass. perf. e"pyao-fj,ai as depon. 
 2 John 8. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 6, comp. Buttm. 
 136. 3 ; but also in Pass, signif. John 3, 21. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 9, comp. Buttm. 113. n. 
 6. For the augm. see Buttin. \ 84. 2. To 
 work, to produce an effect. 
 
 1. Intrans. to work, to labour, i. e. a) 
 Pr. in any trade or employment" ; absol. Acts 
 18, 3*(fj.fvf Trap avTois KOI etpydjjero. 1 Cor. 
 9, 6. 1 Thess. 2, 9. 2 Thess. 3, 10. 12. 
 With adjuncts, e. g. ralj x 6 P" 1 * Cor. 4, 12, 
 1 Thess. 4. 1 1 ; ace. of time, VVKTO. ical ij^ie- 
 pav 2 Thess. 3, 8 ; ev c. dat. of time, Luke 
 13, 14; lv c. dat. of place, Matt. 21, 28. 
 Sept. for 153? Ex. 5, 18. Deut. 5, 13. So 
 absol. Luc. adv. Indoct. 25. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 7.12; fvrois tpyois Dem. 1048. pen. b) 
 Spec, to do business, i.. e. to trade, to traffic ; 
 Matt. 25, 16 eipydtraro ev aiiTois. So c. 
 dat. Dem. 957. 27; OTTO TIVOS Pol. 12. 13. 
 2. c) Also to work, to be active, to do, 
 opp. to be inactive, idle, to rest; John 5, 17 
 bis, b TTCLTTJP epyd^eTai *crX. 9, 4 fin. In a 
 moral sense of the works of the law, Rom. 
 4, 4. 5. Comp. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 57 bis. 
 
 2. Trans, to work, to form by labour, i. e. 
 to do, to perform to make. 
 
 a) Genr. of things wrought, done, per 
 formed, e. g. miracles, John 6, 30 rt tpyd^ 
 sc. <rrjp.el.ov. Acts 13, 41 epyov, comp. Hab. 
 1, 5 where Sept. for b?te . Of sacred rites, 
 ra if pa e pyaf. 1 Cor. 9, 13. So genr. Eph. 
 4, 28. Col. 3, 23 ; epya rot) Seov epyd^ea^at 
 John 6, 28. 9, 4 ; epyov TOV Kvpiov 1 Cor. 
 16, 10 ; epya ev 3f&5 tlpycurfMtt, wrought 
 in God, i. e. in communion with God, in 
 conformity to his will, John 3, 21. Sept. 
 for 13 Num. 3, 7; bSB Job 33, 29. So 
 Hdian. 8. 1. 14. Luc. Pseudol. 24. Xen. 
 An. 6. 3. 17. Also with adjuncts; as ep- 
 ydop.ai epyov na\bv e"s Tiva Matt. 26, 10. 
 3 John 5 ; ev e /ioi Mark 14, 6 ; TO dycftbv 
 Trpbs Ttdvras Gal. 6, 10 ; TO KUKOV rtz/t Rom. 
 13, 10, comp. Prov. 3, 30 where Sept. for 
 bior So c. f"s Tiva Dem. 1252. 20. Palaeph. 
 1. 11; Ttvd TI Luc. D. Mort. 2. 1. Xen. 
 Conv. 4. 30. Trop. to work good or evil, 
 to do, to practise, to commit, c. ace. e. g. TO 
 ayaSoV Rom. 2, 10 ; TTJV 8iKaioa-vvrjv Acts 
 10, 35, but Heb. 11, 33 see in ducaioo-vvr) 
 no. 1. [James 1, 20.] pfTavoiav 2 Cor. 7, 
 10 Lachm. Also Tr^v dvop-iav Matt. 7, 23 ; 
 dfiapTiav James 2, 9. Sept. dvo/j.lav tpy. for 
 i?B Ps. 5, 6. Job 34, 32. So Jos. Ant. 5. 
 1. 18 (povov. Plut. Agesi. 23 med. epyov 
 Sfti/oV. Thuc. 3. 66. 
 
 b) Spec, to work at, e. g. TTJV yrjv, to till, 
 Sept. for W Gen. 2, 5. 15. Xen. (Ec. 
 1. 8. In N. T. only of the sea, riyi/ 3aXa<r- 
 <rav epyafeo-Sai, o work at the sea, as in 
 Engl. to ply the sea, to follow the sea, as an 
 occupation; Rev. 18, 17 otrot TTJV ZdXaao-av 
 fpyd^ovrai. App. Hist. Rom. 8. 2 vav<ri re 
 Xpa>p.evoi, Kal TT]V SdXaacrav ola QoiviKts 
 fpya6p.fvoi. Plut. de Solert. An. 23. See 
 Wetst. N. T. in loc. 
 
 c) Also to work out, to labour for, to get 
 by labour, c. ace. e. g. T^V /3pa><rti> TTJV 
 tiTToXX. John 6, 27 ; genr. 2 John 8. Sept. 
 for -intD Prov. 31, 18. Palaeph. 21. 2. Dem. 
 1358. 12. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 5. 
 
 epyacrta, as, fj, (e f pydbpzt,) work, la 
 bour, Hdot. Vit. Horn. 3 dnb fpyaa-irjs x fl 
 puv. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 7. In N. T. 
 
 1. labour, i. e. trop. pains, effort, in the 
 Latinism tpyaa-iav 8Mvai, operam dare, 
 Luke 12, 58 ; see fully in 8i8a>fj.i no. 4. a. 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 1.7 P.TJ criiv TTOI/W p.T/S epya- 
 o-t ct. Pol. 5. 100. 4. 
 
 2. a working, doing, \. e. practice, per 
 formance, e. g. of evil, with els final, Eph. 
 
 4, 19 els epyatrlav a/ca3. Trda^?, i. e. so as 
 to work all uncleanness. Comp. Sept. for 
 nsxbri i Chr. 6,49. 28, 20. ^Eschin. Dial. 
 2. 36 irpbs (pyaarias TrpayfjiaTotv 
 
291 
 
 Plato Eryx. 404. c, irpbs oyaSoO TWOS e pya- 
 ffiav. ib. 404. b. 
 
 3. icork, i. e. occupation, a trade, craft, 
 Acts 19, 25. Sept. for Hrxbtt Jon. 1, 8. 
 Dem. 503. 17. Xen. (Ec/S.V, 9. 
 
 4. Melon, earnings, gain, from labour, 
 Acts 16, 16. 19. 19, 24. Dem. 1283. 28. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 1. 
 
 pjdrr]f, ov, 6, (e pydfopxu,) 1. a 
 worker, labourer, e. g. in the fields, Matt. 9, 
 37 6 p.fv 2ept(rpo? TroXvy, oi 8f e pyorai 0X1- 
 yoi. v. 38. 10, 10. 20, 1. 2. 8. Luke 10, 2 
 bis. 7. 1 Tim. 5, 18. James 5, 4. So Ec- 
 clus. 19, 1. Plut. Cato Maj. 4. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 6. 11. Trop. by Paul of labourers in the 
 church, teachers, preachers, 2 Tim, 2, 15 
 (pydrrjv dvfiraia"xyvTov. So with censure, 
 2 Cor. 11, 13. Phil. 3, 2. 
 
 2. With a gen. a worker, doer of any 
 thing, i. q. 6 tpyagop-tvos, Luke 13, 27 e p- 
 ydrai Trjs dSmias, workers of iniquity, evil 
 doers. I Mace. 3, 6. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 27. 
 
 3. a workman, craftsman, artisan, Acts 
 19, 25. Luc. Somn. 2. Xen. Hi. 6. 11. 
 
 epyov, ov, TO, (obsol. epyw,) work, i. e. 
 
 1. labour, business, occupation, employ 
 ment, something in doing or to be done, 
 a) Genr. Mark 13, 34 KOL 8ovs fKao-rcp TO 
 tpyovavTov. Eph. 4, 12 ds epyov SiaKow ay. 
 
 1 Tim. 3, 1. Sept. for n=!*ba Gen. 2, 2. 
 Ex. 35, 2. So Luc. D. Deor. 17. 1 tv epyw 
 ri<rav. Xen. CEc. 20. 16, 19. b) Spec, of 
 the work which Jesus was sent to fulfil on 
 earth; TO epyov John 17, 4; TO. epya John 
 5, 20. 36. 10, 38; TO epyov TOV iraTpos sc. 
 6 88coice p.ot Iva 7roi?j<7&>, John 4, 34. 9, 4 ; 
 comp. 17, 4. So TO tpyov TOV Kvpiov, the 
 work, of the Lord, i. e. which he began and 
 left to be continued by his disciples, the 
 cause of Christ, the gospel-work, 1 Cor. 15, 
 58. 16, 10. Phil. 2, 30. Also of this work 
 as committed to apostles and teachers, 
 
 2 Tim. 4, 5 tpyov TTOITJO-OV tvayy (\HTTOV. 
 Acts 13, 2. 14, 26. 15, 38. Phil. 1, 22. 
 Further, epyov TOV SeoC, the work of God, 
 i. e. which God requires, duty towards him, 
 John 6, 28. 29. Rev. 2, 26. c) In the 
 sense of undertaking, attempt, Acts 5, 38. 
 2 Tim. 4, 18. Sept. for KVXv Deut. 15, 
 10 ; T|73 Job 34, 21. So Wisd. 2, 12. 
 
 2. a work, i. e. a deed, act, action, some 
 thing done, e. g. 
 
 a) Genr. as tpyov e pyafeo-3ai, to work a 
 work, to do a deed, Acts 13, 41 bis, quoted 
 from Hab. 1, 5 where Sept. for bs a bS3; 
 comp. Buttm. $ 131. 4. So Hdian. 7. 5. 15, 
 16. Xen. Conv. 1. 1. Spec, of the works 
 of Jesus, miracles, mighty deeds, Matt. 11,2. 
 
 John 7, 3. 21. 14, 10. 11. 12. 15, 24; also 
 of God, Heb. 3, 9 t!8ov TO. epya p.ov, from 
 Ps. 95, 9 where Sept. for "^2.;a . 
 
 b) Where \6yos and tpyov, word and 
 deed, stand in contrast. Luke 24, 19 8wa- 
 TOS tv fpya> Kal ev Xoyw. Col. 3, 17 eV X6yo> 
 ff tv epyw. Acts 7, 22. Rom. 15, 18. 2 Cor. 
 
 10, 11. tit. 1, 16. So Ecclus. 3, 8. Luc. 
 Toxar. 35. Xen. Hi. 7. 2 ; comp. Jos. Ant. 
 4. 2. 3. With \6yos impl. James 1, 25 OVK 
 axpoaTT]! . . . dXXtt iroirjTrjs tpyov, not a hearer 
 of the word only, but a doer of the deed. 
 
 c) Of the works of men in reference to 
 right and wrong, as judged by the moral 
 law, the precepts of the gospel. a) Genr. 
 Matt. 23, 3. 5 ndvra TO. epya avTutv iroiovai 
 Trpbs TO %fa%rjvai TOI? di/Sp. John 3, 20. 21. 
 Acts 26, 20. Rom. 3, 27. Gal. 6, 4. So 
 /caret Ta epya aTroSi&owu, to reward accord 
 ing to one s works, Rom. 2, 6 ; also 2 Cor. 
 
 11. 15. 1 Pet. 1, 17. Rev. 20, 12. So Sept. 
 and b5b Prov. 24, 12. Jer. 50, 29. /3) Of 
 good works, with epithets, e. g. tpyov 
 dya Sov, epya dya3a, a good deed, good 
 works, i. e. either benefit, kindness, Acts 9, 
 36. 1 Tim. 6, 18 ; or, well-doing, virtue, 
 piety, Rom. 2, 7. 13, 3. Eph. 2, 10. 2 Thess. 
 2, 17. Heb. 13, 21. (Comp. Xen. Cyr. 8. 
 
 1. 12. Mem. 2. 1. 20.) So tpyov na\6v, 
 epya KaXa, a good deed, good works, i. e. a 
 pious act, well-doing, virtue, Matt. 5, 16. 
 Mark 14, 6. Tit. 2, 7. Heb. 10, 24. 1 Pet. 
 
 2, 12. (Comp. Xen. 1. c. et Mem. 2. 6. 35.) 
 Also TO epya eV SiKaioavyrj i. q. Ta Strata, 
 Tit. 3, 5 ; epyov TfXfiov, perfect work, i. e. 
 full, complete in well-doing, James 1, 4. 
 Without epithet, John 8, 39 Ta epya TOV 
 Aftpadfj.. James 3, 13. y) Of evil works, 
 with epithets, e. g. epya irovrjpd, wicked 
 works, eril deeds, John 3, 19. Col. 1, 21. 
 1 John 3, 12 ; epya veicpd, dead works, i. e. 
 not proceeding from a living faith in God, 
 Heb. 6, 1 ; epya livop.a 2 Pet. 2, 8 ; tpya 
 a<rf/3ei ay Jude 15 ; epya TOV (TKOTOVS, i. e. 
 of moral darkness, sin, Rom. 13, 12; epya 
 Trjs (rapx6s, carnal works, Gal. 5, 19. (Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 2. 3 epy. Trovripbv <a\ alcr^pov. An. 
 5. 7. 32 epya aae/if).) So without epithet, 
 Rev. 2, 6 OTI p.i(Tfls TO. epya TWI/ NtKoXaiYau . 
 v. 13. 22. 3. 1. 18, 6. 1 Cor. 5,2. John 8, 
 41, comp. v. 44. S) Of works of the law, 
 epya TOV vofiov, i. e. required by or 
 conformable to the Mosaic moral law ; so 
 of a course required by this law, Rom. 2, 15 
 TO tpyov TOV vop.ov , or conformable to this 
 law, Rom. 3, 20. Gal. 2, 16. With TOV 
 vop.ov implied, in Paul s writings, Rom. 4, 
 2. 6. 9, 11. 11, 6. Eph. 2, 9. 2 Tim. 1, 9. 
 al. e) Of works of faith, epya Tri 
 
292 
 
 i. e. springing from faith, combined with 
 faith, e. g. epya trio-revs, I Thess. 1. 3. 
 2 Thess. 1, 11. With rfjs iriareas implied 
 Heb. 6, 10. James 2, 14. 17-26, comp. 
 espec. v. 22. 26. Hence, where Paul and 
 James speak of TO. epya simply, the former 
 means epya TOV vopov, and the latter epya 
 Trio-revs v. diKaioavvrjs , see passages in 
 lett. d, e. 
 
 3. a work, i. e. a tiling icrought, something 
 done, made, created, a) Genr. of men, Acts 
 7, 41 (v Tols epyois TU>V -^eipaiv, i. e. idols. 
 1 Cor. 3, 13. 14. 15. 9, 1. Sept. for titoJa 
 Deut. 27, 15. 2 K. 19, 18 ; *>SB Ps. 9, "7" 
 SoHdian. 8. 4. 4. Xen. Meim. 3. 10. 7. 
 b) Of the works of God, genr. Acts 15, 18 
 yvoora r<u Sew iravra TO. epya avTov. Rom. 
 14, 20. Phil, i, 6. 2 Pet. 3, 10. Rev. 15,3. 
 Heb. 1,10 fpya TU>V %fip>v o-ov elo~lv ol ov- 
 pavoi, quoted from Ps. 102, 26 where Sept. 
 for niBSB , as also Ps. 103, 22. 104, 32 ; for 
 fc?a Is. 45, 11. So Horn. II. 19. 22. c) 
 Of works implying power, and put for 
 power, might, e. g. of God, John 9. 3 "iva 
 (pave po>3 fj ra epya TOV 3fov ev avT<a. Of 
 Satan, 1 John 3, 8 Iva \vo~r] TO. epya TOV 
 Sia/3dXou, i. e. destroy his power. + 
 
 ), f. j o-ca, (p3a>, epir,) to stir up, 
 to rouse, espec. to anger, to proioke, c. ace. 
 Col. 3, 21 TO. TfKva vp.i>v. (1 Mace. 15, 40. 
 Pol. 1. 19. 2. Plato Eryx. 392. b.) Also 
 genr. to action, to provoke, to stimulate, 
 2 Cor. 9, 2. So Arr. Epict. 2. 23. 13. 
 Dem. 1411. 9. 
 
 pei8(i3, f. euro), to let lean against, c. 
 ace. Horn. II. 22. 112; to prop, to stay, 
 ^Esehyl. Prom. 350. Plato Tim. 43. e ; to 
 Jix firmly, Pind. Pyth. 10. 79. Pol. 3. 46. 
 1. On epfido) see Buttm. Lexil. I. p. 112 sq. 
 In N. T. intrans. or c. eavrov impl. to be 
 come fixed, to stick fast, as. a ship upon a 
 sandbank Acts 27, 41 ; see Buttm. } 130. 
 n. 2. 
 
 epevyopai, f. |ojuai, Mid. depon. to 
 spew out, to wmit, to disgorge, Horn. Od. 9. 
 374. II. 16. 162; trop. of a volcano, Pind. 
 Pyth. 1. 40; of a river discharging itself, 
 App. Bell. Mithr. 103 ; in aor. 2 fjpvyov of 
 a cry of man or animals, to belch out, to bel 
 low, Theocr. 13. 58. Horn. II. 20. 403. 
 Hence in Sept. and N. T. trop. to pour forth, 
 to speak out, to utter, c. ace. Matt. 13, 35 
 epvop.ai KfK.pvp.peva KT\. quoted from Ps. 
 78, 2 where Sept. for jian ; as also Ps. 
 19,2. 119,171. 145, 7. On this signif. 
 see Sturz. de Dial. Alex. p. 167. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 63 sq. 
 
 epevvaa), >, f. 770-0), to search into, to 
 seek out, to explore; c. ace. ras ypa(f)ds 
 John 5, 39. 7, 52 ; TOS Kapbias Rom. 8, 27. 
 Rev. 2, 23 ; ra /3d3r? TOV 3eoO 1 Cor. 2, 10 ; 
 c. iroios 1 Pet. 1, 11. Sept. for ttSsn Gen. 
 44, 12 ; ipn 2 Sam. 10, 3. Dem. 788. pen. 
 Plato Legg/821. b. 
 
 epeco, see in tlnov. 
 
 ptjfAia, as, fj, (eprjfjios,) a solitude, de 
 sert, wilderness, i. e. an uninhabited tract of 
 country, see in ep^os no. 2 ; Matt. 15, 33. 
 Mark 8, 4. 2 Cor. 11, 26. Heb. 11, 38. 
 Sept. for Main Ez. 35, 4. Jos. Ant. 3. 
 10. 3. Arr. Epict. 4. 11. 16. Xen. Hell. 5. 
 4. 41. 
 
 6/377/^09, ov, 6, 77, adj. solitary, desert. 
 
 1. Pr. of a place or region uninhabited 
 and usually uncultivated, though not neces 
 sarily sterile, see in no. 2. Matt. 14, 13 eh 
 eprjp.ov TOTTOV. v. 15. Mark 1, 35. 45. 6, 31. 
 32. 35. Luke 4, 42. 9, 10. 12. Sept. for 
 =0n Jer. 33, 10. 12. So Hdian. 2. 11. 9. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 1. In the sense of deserted, 
 desolate, laid waste, uninhabited, Matt. 23, 
 38 et Luke 13, 35 6 OLKOS vfj.ci)v epijp.os. 
 Acts 1, 20, comp. Ps. 69, 26 where Niph. 
 i" 15 ?^? j Sept. T]prjfj.o>fjievr]. Acts 8, 26 see in 
 rda. Sept. and S nn Neh. 2, 17 ; na nn 
 Lev. 26, 31. 33. So eprjp.os TTU\IS Pof. 9 . 
 8. 9. Xen. An. 1. 5. 4. Spoken of a fe 
 male, solitary, destitute of a husband, un 
 married, Gal. 4, 27 TToAXa ra TCKVU TIJS eprj- 
 P.OV KT\. quoted from Is. 54, 1 where Sept 
 for naai ttJ. Comp. Diod. Sic. 16. 37 ep-q- 
 p-oi o-v/ijua^wi/. Xen. Cyr. 7. 3. 12. 
 
 2. Subst. 77 epijp-os sc. ^&>pa, a solitude, 
 desert, wilderness, i. q. epr^u a, i. e. an un 
 inhabited tract of country, usually unculti 
 vated and often sterile, but not necessarily 
 so ; see Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. p. 391, 641. 
 I. p. 281 sq. 
 
 a) Genr. Matt. 3, 3 (paivfj J3oa>vros ev TJJ 
 epr]p.a>, and so Mark 1, 3. Luke 3, 4. John 
 1, 23, all quoted from Is. 40, 3 where Sept. 
 for ^a ln . Matt. 11, 7. 24, 26. Luke 5, 16 
 inro^aipuv tv TOLS epfjuois. 7, 24. 8, 29. 
 Rev. 12, 6. 14. 17, 3. (Hdot. 3. 102.) Of 
 a region uninhabited and untilled, but yield 
 ing pasturage, Luke 15, 4, comp. Matt. 18, 
 12 ra oprj. So Sept. and "la^a Joel 2, 22. 
 Ps. 65, 13. See Bibl. Res . ! in Palest. I. 
 p. 271, 281 sq. 
 
 b) Spec, the desert of Judea, lying on the 
 high ground west of the Dead Sea and the 
 valley of the Jordan, mostly uninhabited 
 and untilled, and in great part sterile ; see 
 Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. p. 202, 310 sq. Por- 
 
293 
 
 tions of this desert were: a) That in 
 which John the Baptist grew up, prob. west 
 of the Dead Sea, Luke 1, 80. 3, 2. )8) 
 That where he baptized, i. e. the uninhabit 
 ed tract along the Jordan, Matt. 3, 1. Mark 
 1,4 comp. v. 5. y) That where Jesus 
 was tempted, perh. the high desert west of 
 Jericho, Matt. 4, 1. Mark 1, 12. 13. Luke 
 
 4, 1. 8) The tract between the Mount of 
 Olives and Jericho, prob. referred to in Acts 
 21, 38 ; see Jos. Ant. 20. 8. 6. e) The 
 tract adjacent to the city Ephraim, prob. 
 Taiyibeh, towards the Jordan, John 11, 54 ; 
 see in Ecppafp,. 
 
 c) Also the desert of Sinai, in which the 
 Israelites wandered forty years, including 
 Sinai itself and the desert towards Pales 
 tine ; Acts 7, 30 lv rff cp^/ia> TOV opovs Sii/at. 
 v. 36. 38. 42. 44. 13, 18. John 3, 14. 6, 31. 
 49. 1 Cor. 10, 5. Heb. 3, 8. 17. So Sept 
 and la ]*? Ps. 78, 15. 19. 136, 16. See 
 Bibl. Re s, in Palest, Vol. I. 
 
 eprj/JLOO), o>, f. wcrco, (epryp-or,) to make 
 solitary or desert, to desolate, to lay waste, 
 c. ace. Sept. for 3-nnn Is. 37, 18. Thuc. 
 
 5. 4. In N. T. only Pass, to be made deso 
 late, to be laid icaste, e. g. /SacrtXem Matt. 12, 
 25. Luke 11, 17 ; TTO\IS Rev. 18, 19 ; TT\OV- 
 ros, i. e. to be destroyed, to come, to nought, 
 Rev. 18, 16. (Ecclus. 21, 4.) So of a per 
 son, Rev. 17, 16 f]prifj.cfj.evr]v iroif)(TOV(riv 
 rfjv -rropvjjv, i. e. shall make her desolate ; 
 shall despoil her. Sept. for nnn Jer. 26, 9 ; 
 Niph. C3 Is. 54, 3. Plut. Pomp. 28 fin. 
 Xen. Ag. 1. 20 x^P a - 
 
 eprifjuacriS, etor, r;, (epTjpo w.) desolation, 
 a laying waste, Luke 21, 20. Matt. 24, 15 et 
 Mark 13, 14 TO 8eXvyp,a TTJS eprj/xtuo-ftoy, see 
 in /38<TXvypxi no. 2. Sept. for nann Jer. 7, 
 34; f"3tU Jer. 4, 7. Arr. Alex. M. 1. 9. 13. 
 
 epifo, f- >> (epis,) to strive, to wrangle, 
 Horn. II. 1. 277. Luc. D. Deor. 13. 1. In 
 N. T. spec, to cry out, to be vociferous, like 
 a wrangler, intrans. Matt. 12, 19 OVK e puret 
 ovSt Kpavyda-d, quoted from Is. 42, 2- where 
 Heb. ^ Nbn pyyp 8&, Sept. ov Kpafe- 
 rai, ovSe dvf](rei, i. e. he shall not cry, neither 
 lift up his voice. 
 
 epfeeut, as, 17, (epftfvu, pt3oy.) pr. a 
 being mercenary, venality in striving for 
 office, Lat. ambitus ; hence genr. party- 
 strife, faction, contention, Phil. 1, 16 [17] 
 ot nfv fptidas. 2, 3. James 3, 14. 16. 
 Rom. 2, 8. Plur. 2 Cor. 12, 20. Gal. 5, 20. 
 Aristot. Pol. 5. 2. 6. ib. 5. 3. 9. Hesych. 
 tptSeia 17 Sia Xaywf (j)i\ovdKia. 
 
 eptov, iov, TO, ((pos, eipoy,) dim. in form 
 only, wool, Rev. 1, 14. Heb. 9, 19, where 
 
 see Lev. 14, 4 sq. 49 sq. Jos. Ant. 4. 4. 6. 
 Sept. for is* Is. 1, 18. Hdian. 5. 5. 6. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 12, 13. 
 
 ept9 ; i8os, 17. ace. tptv Phil. 1, 15, see 
 Buttm. {44; Plur. eptSts 1 Cor. 1, 11, also 
 tptis 2 Cor. 12, 20, see Winer $ 9. p. 75. 
 Matth. 80. n. 8 ; strife, contention, wrang 
 ling, Rom. 1, 29. 13. 13 ^ tptSt KOI n\<a. 
 1 Cor. 1, 11. 3, 3. 2 Cor. 12, 20. Gal. 5, 
 20. Phil. 1,15. 1 Tim. 6, 4. Tit. 3, 9. 
 Ecclus. 40, 5. 9. Hdian. 3. 2. 13. Xen. 
 Cyr. 2. 3. 15. 
 
 epL(f)ioV) ov, TO, (dim. ep/>o?,) a young 
 kid, hidling, Matt. 25, 33 ; comp. v. 32. 
 Athen. 661. b. 
 
 epi(o9, ov, 6, f), a kid, young goat, MatL 
 25, 32. Luke 15, 29. Sept. for "^a Gen. 
 27, 9. 38, 17; T? Ex. 12, 5. Theocr. Id. 
 8. 50. Luc. Bacch. 1. 
 
 , a, 6, Hernias, pr. n. of a Chris 
 tian, Rom. 16, 14. 
 
 ep/j,r]veui, as, 17, (Ip/opvwH) interpreta 
 tion, explanation, 1 Cor. 14, 26 ; so epp-f?- 
 veia yXcotro-o)! as a charisma, 1 Cor. 12, 10. 
 Ecclus. 47. 17. Luc. Quom. Hist, conscr. 
 45. Plato Rep. 524. b. 
 
 epfjbrjvevTijs, O v, 6, (epp-^i/evw,) an inter 
 preter, 1 Cor. 14, 28 Lachm. for Swyyapcv- 
 T,]S Rec. Sept. Gen. 42, 43. Plato Polit. 
 290. c. 
 
 epfirjveva), f. t{icra>, CEp/zq?,) to inter 
 pret, to ex plain, Luc. Abdic. 18. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 2. 52. In N. T. spec, to interpret from 
 one language to another, to translate ; Pass. 
 John 1, 39. 43, K^cpay, o epp-^i/everat Ile- 
 Tpos. 9, 7. Heb. 7, 2. Sept. for Chald. n&nn 
 Ezra 4, 7. So Luc. Alex. 51. Xen. An. 
 5. 4. 4. 
 
 ov, 6, Hermes, pr. n. a) A 
 Christian at Rome, Rom. 16, 14. b) In 
 Greek mythology i. q. Mercury, the son of 
 Jupiter and Maia, the messenger of the 
 gods, the patron of eloquence, learning, and 
 traffic. Acts 14, 12. 
 
 Ep/J,oyevr)$, eos, ovs, 6, Hermogenes, pr. 
 n. of a man who deserted Paul, 2 Tim. 1,15. 
 
 epTTTOV) ov, TO, (ep7ro>, pr. neut. of tp- 
 TreToj.) a creeping animal, reptile, Acts 10, 
 12. 11, 6. Rom. 1, 23. James 3, 7. Sept. 
 for fc"! Gen. 1, 24; Y~l Gen. 1, 20. 
 Luc. Philops. 9. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 11. 
 
 epv^pos, d, 6v, red, Plato Tim. 80. c. 
 In N. T. only of a sea, 17 epuSpa SaXacrcra, 
 the Red Sea, Acts 7, 36. Heb. 11, 29. On 
 the passage of this sea by the Israelites, see 
 Bibl. Res. in Palest. I. p. 81 sq. Sept. for 
 
294 
 
 ? Ex. 10, 19. 13, 8. al 1 Mace. 4, 
 9. Diod. Sic. 3. 18. Strabo p. 765, 779. 
 
 epxp/jiai, f. f\evcrofj.ai, aor. 2 TJ\%OV, 
 perf. eXqXuSa, plupf. e\Tj\v%eiv. For the aor. 
 2 plur. )?X3are Matt. 25, 36 in some copies, 
 see Winer 13. 1. a. Sturz. de Dial. Alex, 
 p. 61. In the common Greek the forms of 
 eifu were more used for the Imperat. the 
 impf. and the future ; but in N. T. we find 
 Iniper. cp^ov, plur. epxeo-Se, Matt. 8, 9. John 
 
 I , 40. al. instead of i3i, Ire ; Impf. qpx&ftrjv 
 Mark 1, 45. al. Plato Legg. 3. p. 685. a, 
 instead of r/eiv or rja ; Put. eXevo-opai Matt. 
 9, 15. 1 Cor. 4, 19, instead of the more At 
 tic elp.i, as also in Hdot. 1. 142. ib. 5. 125. 
 See Button. $ 114. 5 108. V. 4, 5. Winer 
 15. Kiihner 167. 2. To come, to go, to 
 move or pass along, in any direction, as 
 marked by the adjuncts or often simply by 
 the context. The forms from e X3eii/, how 
 ever, more frequently signify to come, so 
 that e. g. T)\%fv is rarely used of one who 
 goes away from a place (Luke 2, 44), while 
 the forms from ep^co-Sai are used indiffer 
 ently of both directions ; see Buttm. Ausf. 
 Sprachl. II. p. 183. edit. 2. 
 
 1. to go, with adjuncts implying motion 
 from a place or person to another. a) 
 Present and Impf. with els c. ace. of place, 
 John 6, 17 TJpxovro irepav rrjs SoXacrcr^y els 
 YMnfpvaovp.. With ace. 686v, to go one s 
 way, Acts 9, 17; comp. Buttm. 131. 4. 
 (Xen. An. 2. 2. 10.) With vvv nvi John 
 21, 3. Present instead of a past tense, 
 Heb. 11, 8 ; see Buttm. $ 137. n. 7. b) 
 Improperly, Aor. 2 TJXSov, once c. ace. of 
 distance, 68ov rjp-fpas, Luke 2, 44. So Xen. 
 An. 3. 1. 5. See above. 
 
 2. to come, with adjuncts implying motion 
 to or towards any person or place ; spoken 
 of persons. a) Genr. and absol. Matt. 8, 
 9 Xe yco rourw, TropeuS^ri, KOI Tropeverai KOI 
 aXXw, epxov, Ka fpx e - Mark 4, 4. 6, 31. 
 
 II, 13. John 1, 40. Acts 5, 15. al. SEE piss. 
 (Xen. An. 1. 3. 10.) So the Pres. in an 
 historical sense, i. e. instead of the aorist, 
 Buttm. 137. n. 7. Kiihner 5 255. 1. Winer 
 541. 2. b. Matt. 25, 11 vcrrepov fie epxovrcu 
 Kal al XOITTCU 7rap3eVoi, comp. v. 10. Matt. 
 25, 19. Mark 2, 18. John 20, 18. 3 John 3. 
 Also the Pres. apparently in a future sense, 
 but only of what is certainly to take place, 
 Winer 5 4 1. 2. a. Matth. 504. 3. Luke 3, 
 16 epxerai fie 6 Icrxyporepos p.ou. John 4, 
 25. 14, 3. 30. 1 Cor. 4, 5. Rev. 1,7. So 
 espec. in the phrase 6 epxop-evos, the 
 coming one, he who shall come, the Mes 
 siah, Matt. 11, 3. Luke 7, 19. 20. John 6, 
 14. 11, 27; also in the periphrase of the 
 
 name Jehovah, 6 a>v KOI 6 TJV KCU 6 ep%6fj,evor 
 Rev. 1, 4. 8. 4, 8 ; see in elp.i 1. 4. b. But 
 in other examples, 6 tpxfyurot with adjuncts 
 has the present sense, Matt. 21,9. John 12, 
 13. By a species of pleonasm, the particip. 
 e X3ei>i> is prefixed to other verbs in which 
 the idea of coming is already presupposed, 
 and thus gives to the expression more ful 
 ness and vivacity ; see in dvi(m)p.i II. 1. a. 
 Matt. 2, 23 ical e X3o>j> KarcaKrjcrfv els iro\tv 
 Xey. Nafape r, as in Engl. he came and dwelt. 
 
 8, 2. Mark 5, 23. 12, 14. 16, 1. Luke 7, 3. 
 Eph. 2, 17. al. See Winer j 67. 2. n. 
 Matth. ^557. n. 1. p. 1102. So Horn. II. 
 16. 521. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 6. b) With an 
 adjunct marking object or purpose ; so c. 
 infin. Matt. 2, 2 ^XSop.ei Trpoovcw/jcrai avT<a. 
 Mark 2, 17. Luke 4, 34. al. With particip. 
 fut. Matt. 27. 49 el epxerai tiXlas O-OHTWV 
 avTov. Acts 8, 27. Buttm. $ 144. 3. (Plato 
 Euth. 2. c. Xen. An. 7.1. 28.) So with part, 
 pres. implying purpose and manner, Luke 
 13, 7 Tpia errj ep^opai frruiv Kapirov. (Plato 
 Phaed. 100. b.) With iva, John 10, 10. 12, 
 
 9. 46. 47. c) With dat. of pers. to whom 
 one comes; Matt. 21, 5 6 Pa<ri\evs crov 
 fpxfrai o-oi, quoted from Zech. 9, 9 where 
 Sept. for "V Ni^ T,3^ fisn . So Rev. 2, 
 5. 16 epxopai croi raxv. (Fabr. Pseudep. 
 V. T. I. p. 594 cos fie ^X3op.ev TTJ TrdXet av- 
 ra>i>. Hdian. 3. 1. 6 Arprfvol Se iyXSoi avrw 
 rot-oral (ruppa^oi.) With dat. of manner 
 or means, John 21, 8 ol fie XXot p.a3?;ral 
 T<5 TrXotapia) ijXSoi/. d) With adv. of 
 place, Matt. 8, 29 ^X3ej wfie KT\. Mark 5, 
 27. Luke 10, 1. John 4, 16. 8, 14. So 
 with adv. and inf. of purpose, John 4, 15 
 p-TjSe tpx^pai eVSafie avrXelv. Also ep^. 
 a>Se els TOVTO Acts 9, 21. e) With Pre 
 positions ; e. g. afro .c. gen. of place, Acts 
 18, 2 e X^Xr3dra OTTO rrjs iraXiay. Mark 1, 
 9. 7, 1. al. (Palaeph. 6. 6.) Also c. gen. 
 of pers. from a person, Mark 5, 35. Gal. 2, 
 12. With e I s c. ace. of place, to come into, 
 e. g. els rf]i> oiKiav, to enter, Matt. 2, 11. 
 Luke 14, 1 ; a country or city, to come to 
 or into, Mark 5, 1. 8, 10. John 11, 38. Acts 
 8,40. Gal. 2, 11. 1 Tim. 1, 15. al. So 
 with ace. of purpose, i. e. els final, John 1. 
 7 OVTOS rjX^lfv els fJLaprupiav. 4, 45 fls TT)J> 
 eoprfjv, i. e. to attend the feast. 11, 56. 
 With els repeated, both of place and final, 
 John 9, 39. 2 Cor. 2, 12. With e x c. gen. 
 of place whence, Luke 5, 17. John 3, 31. 
 7,41 ; eVc et els John 4, 54. With ev c. dat. 
 of manner, Luke 23, 42. With eVi c. gen. 
 of thing, implying rest upon, Matt. 24, 30 
 eVl r>v ve(pe\(ii>v. So with ace. of place 
 upon or to which one comes, Mark 6, 53 
 
295 
 
 eirl TTJV yfjv Tew. Luke 19, 5. 24, 1. Acts 
 12, 10 ; ace. of object or purpose, Matt. 3, 
 7 enl TO ftdirricrfJLa avrov. Also eni C. ace. of 
 person, to come to or before any one, Acts 
 24, 8 ; to come upon any one, e. g. TO irvev- 
 pa, Acts 19, 6. Matt. 3, 16; (Test. XII 
 Pair. p. 545 ;) also, to come against, Luke 
 
 14, 31 ; so Xen. An. 3. 1. 24. With ecas 
 avroG, Luke 4, 42. With KOTO. c. ace. to 
 move to, toward, along by, Acts 16, 7. Luke 
 10, 33. With OTTIO-W c. gen. of pers. to 
 come after, to follow, trop. to become the 
 follower, disciple, of any one, Matt. 16, 
 24. Luke 9,23. 14, 27. With napd c. 
 gen. of person, to come from any one, i. e. 
 as sent, Luke 8, 49 ; c. ace. of place, at, 
 near, along, IT. TTJV SoXao-trai/ Matt. 15, 29. 
 With Trpos c. ace. of person to whom one 
 comes, and this is the more usual construc 
 tion, Matt. 7, 15. Mark 2, 13. Luke 7, 7. 
 
 15, 20. John 3, 2. 11,19. 14,6. 23. al. saep. . 
 Also npos c. ace. of thing, John 3, 20. 21. 
 
 3. Spec, to come forth before the public 
 or the world, to appear, to make one s ap 
 pearance ; Matt. 11, 14 OVTOS f<mv H\ias 
 6 p,e\\a>v epxeo-Zcu. v. 19. Mark 9, 11. 12. 
 Gal. 3, 19. 2 Pet. 3, 3. al. Pres. in fut. 
 sense, Matt. 17, 11. Luke 3, 16. 1 Cor. 15, 
 35 ; comp. above in no. 2. a. With part, 
 pres. of manner, comp. above in no. 2. b. Matt. 
 11,19. Luke 7, 33. John 1 , 3 1 . With a dat. 
 of manner, 1 Cor. 15, 35 TTOICO 8e cro>/iart 
 epxovrai,. Also with a prep, of manner; 
 e. g. 8 i a c. gen. 1 John 5, 6 6 f X3a>i/ fit 
 vbaTos Kal alfJMTOs, see in 8id I. 4. b. So 
 fv crap*! epxop-fvov, i. e. come, appeared, 
 in the flesh, spoken of Christ, 1 John 4, 2. 
 2 John 7. (Ep. Barnab. e. 5.) With other 
 prepositions ; e. g. diro c. gen. of pers. 
 John 3, 2 OTTO Seov. With eic c. gen. of 
 place, John 7, 41. 42. With /xtra c. ace. 
 of pers. to come after in time, to appear later, 
 Acts 13, 25. 19, 4. With OTTIO-W c. gen. 
 of pers. to come after in time, to appear 
 later, Matt. 3, 11. Mark 1,7. John 1, 27. 30. 
 
 4. Sometimes i. q. io come again, a se 
 cond time ; but this sense lies in the con 
 text, never in epxop&i itself; so absol. Rom. 
 9, 9 *car roc xaipbv TOVTOV eXeucro/iai, Kal 
 eorai Trj Sdppa vios. John 21, 22 ; also to 
 come back, to return, Luke 15, 30. 19, 13. 
 (Xen. Hi. 2. 9. An. 7. 7. 30.) So e X3a>./ 
 pleonastic, see above in no. 2. a. Matt. 5, 24. 
 Luke 18, 8. With inf. of purpose, 2 Thess. 
 1, 10 ; also with particip. pres. of manner, 
 see above in no. 2. b. John 9, 7 ^X3e ^XeVwv, 
 he came back seeing. With els c. ace. of 
 place, Matt 2, 21 ; Trpos c. ace. of pers. 
 John 7, 45. 14, 18. 28. 
 
 5. Trop. of persons, e. g. with prep, elt 
 c. ace. to come to or into any state or cir 
 cumstances ; so els eavTov e X3o>i>, coming Ic 
 himself, i. e. recovering his right mind, 
 Luke 15, 17; els x f ~ l P v f XSouo-a, growing 
 worse, Mark 5, 26 ; els dnf\eyp.6v Acts 19, 
 27 ; els Kpio-iv, i. e. to be condemned. John 
 5, 24 ; els fTriyvaxnv 1 Tim. 2, 4 ; els cmra- 
 crias 2 Cor. 12, 1 ; els Ti]V Stpav ravrnv John 
 12, 27. So Cebet. Tab. 12 els T^V aX^u/j^ 
 iraibiav ftet iv. Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 29. With 
 e* c. gen. to come out of, Rev. 7, 14 oi ep- 
 Xop.fvoi e< rffs 3Xtyea>y, i. e. who have es 
 caped from. 
 
 6. Trop. of things, e. g. a) Of time, 
 as e\euo-ovrai T]p.fpai Matt. 9, 15 ; ^X3ep v. 
 f\ri\v^ev f) &pa, John 16, 4. 32. Acts 2,20. 
 3, 20. al. (Xen. CEc. 17. 2.) So Pres. in 
 a future sense, of a time near and certain, to 
 be coming, to be near, comp. above in no. 2. a. 
 Luke 23, 29 I8oi> epxovrai r]p.fpai. John 4, 
 35. 9,4. Heb.8,8. So part. fpx<Jp.evos , 
 coming, i. e. future, as ala>v Mark 10, 30. 
 Luke 18, 30 ; ra epxopeva uTrayyeXet John 
 16, 13 (Sept. for SO3 Is. 44, 7) ; eoprf] Acts 
 18, 21. So Jos. Ant. 6. 9. 1. ib. 6. 11. 9. 
 
 b) Of the kingdom of God, to come, i. e. to 
 be established, Matt. 6, 10. Mark 11, 10. al. 
 
 c) Of good or evil, e. g. a good result, 
 Rom. 3, 8 ; with els n to result, to fall out, 
 Phil. 1, 12 ; with eVt riva, to come upon, 
 e. g. 17 elprjVT) Matt. 10, 13. So of evil, 
 guilt, wrath, with ri rti/a, to come upon. 
 i. e. to happen to, to be laid upon, e. g. 
 Trdvra John 18, 4 ; opyr) Eph. 5, 6, and so 
 Rev. 11, 18. 18, 10; rj opyr) rj epxpfifftf, the 
 wrath to come, 1 Thess. 1, 10; of guilt, 
 alfj.a, Matt. 23, 35. So of offences, to come, 
 to arise, Matt. 18, 7. d) Genr. of a voice, 
 c. e< Mark 9, 7 ; of a star, Matt. 2, 9 ; of 
 floods, Matt. 7, 25. 27; of rain, Luke 12, 
 54. Heb. 6, 7 ; of wind, John 3, 8 ; of uten 
 sils, to be brovght, Mark 4, 21. (Xen. CEc. 
 3. 15.) So of a law, faith, doctrine, to 
 come, i. e. to be announced, made known, 
 Rom. 7, 9. Gal. 3, 23 ; epx- fls TO (pavepav, 
 to come abroad, to be manifested, Mark 4, 22 ; 
 orai/ Se eXSty TO r/Xeiov, when that which i.s 
 perfect is come, 1 Cor. 13, 10. -f 
 
 e /3<u, see in flnov. 
 
 epayrda), &>, f. TJO-W, (kindr. epo/zai,) to 
 ask, i. e. 
 
 1. Pr. to ask for information, to inquire 
 of, to interrogate ; with accus. of pers. Matt. 
 16, 13 ^pcora TOVS ^aSfjruy ai>rov \tycov. 
 John 1, 19. 16, 5; ace. impl. Luke 22, 68. 
 Sept. for bRto Gen. 24, 47. 32, 17. So 
 Luc. D. Deor.*7. 1. Xen. Cyr. 8. 5. 19. 
 
296 
 
 With two ace. of pers. and of thing, Matt. 21, 
 24 tpu>rf](r(i> v/xay Xoyov W. Mark 4, 10. 
 Luke 20, 3. Sept. for bstU Jer. 38, 14. So 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 48. With* ace. of pers. and 
 nepi c. gen. of thing, Luke 9, 45. Sept. and 
 bXtti Jer. 45, 11. So eVepcordw Hdot. 1. 
 32" init. 
 
 2. From the Heb. lo ask a favour or the 
 like, lo request, to beseech, to entreat, i. q. 
 aire co. So with ace. of pers. Matt. 15, 23 
 fjpojTcov OVTOV, \tyovrfs. Luke 14, 18. 19. 
 John 12, 21. Phil. 4, 3. So Heb. bjtai Is. 
 7, 11, Sept. aiTfco. (Jos. Ant. 5. l". 14.) 
 With ace. of thing, ra irpbs rfjv elprjvrjv, 
 Luke 14, 32. Sept. and bxtti Ps. 122, 6. 
 With ace. of person and prepositions, e. g. 
 Trtpi TWOS Luke 4, 38. John 16, 26; inrep 
 rivos 2 Thess. 2, 1. Comp. Heb. jj bxuJ 
 1 K. 2, 22, Sept. atVeo). With ace. of pers. 
 and other adjuncts ; as Iva, Mark 7, 26 
 TjpwTo. avTov iva KrX. Luke 7, 36. John 4, 
 47. 1 Thess. 4, 1 ; OTTWJ Luke 7, 3. Acts 
 23, 20 ; infin. aor. Luke 5, 3. John 4, 40. 
 Acts 3, 3; inf. pres. 1 Thess. 5, 12. + 
 
 ecr rJJJ?, TJTOS, f], (tmrvfu, eo-Srjv,) a gar 
 ment, vestment; collect, clothing, raiment, 
 Luke 23, 11. Acts 1, 10. 10,30. 12,21. 
 James 2, 2 bis. 3. 1 Esdr. 8, 73. Pol. 6. 
 5. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 22. 
 
 cos, 17, (eVSe o), ecrSTjr.) a gar 
 ment ; Plur. raiment, Luke 24, 4. Aquil. 
 tor ns?B Is. 23, 18. 
 
 ), a strengthened form of obsol. 
 eSw, found only in pres. and impf. rja-^iov, 
 other tenses in use are : Aor. 2 e(payov 
 from obsol. (pdyu>, see Buttm. 114 cV3ia>. 
 Matth. J 234. $ 183 ; later Fut. (pdyo/xat, 
 (instead of Att. f. eSopu.) Winer J 15 (pa- 
 yflv. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 327, 347. Buttm. 
 Ausf. Sprachl. 95. n. 21 ; 2 pers. fut. (pd- 
 yea-ai Luke 17, 8, see Buttm. 5 103. III. 1. 
 To eat, to take food, spoken both of men 
 and animals. 
 
 1 . Genr. as of persons, a) Absol. eV3i- 
 tiv, Matt. 12, 1 TiXXetf (rrdxvas Koi ecrSieii/. 
 
 14, 21. 26, 21. 26. Mark 7, 3. Luke 6, 1. 
 Acts 27, 35. 1 Cor. 10, 28 ; (paydv, Matt. 
 
 15, 37. 26, 26. Mark 6, 42. 8, 8. Luke 9, 
 17 ; as infin. of purpose, Sido wu rivl (paydv, 
 Matt. 14, 16. 25,35.42. Mark 5, 43. al. 
 Buttm. 140. 3. Sept. for V>3 , eVSiW 
 1 Sam. 1, 7. 8; (payelv Gen. 3*, *13. 18, 8. 
 So eVSiW JE\. V. H. 2. 17. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 7. 7 ; (payeli> Luc. Parasit. 12. Xen. Mem. 
 2. .1. 18. With /zero c. gen. to eat with 
 any one at table, to take a meal with, Luke 
 7, 36 fjpdnTa Se ns ai/Tov, Iva (pdyr] p.er av 
 
 rov. Matt. 9, 1 1 fcrZieiv. So tvanriov rivot, 
 to eat before any one, in his sight, Luke 24, 
 43. Sept. (payelv for bDX , c. fierd 1 Sam. 
 
 I, 18 ; c. fvu>TTiov 2 Sam. 11, 13. 
 
 b) With an adjunct of the object, or thing 
 eaten. a) With gen. perhaps once, Luke 
 15^16 K.fpariu>v a>v rj& Ziov ol ^oipoi i. e. of 
 which they eat, Buttm. $132. 10. i; comp. 
 Matth. } 327. (Pint. Gryll. 9. Plato Legg. 
 845. c.) But the gen. is here more prob. 
 by attraction instead of the accus. as be 
 low. ]3) With e K c. gen. to eat of any 
 thing, to partake of it, by Hebraism instead 
 of the Attic simple gen. comp. Buttm. 1. c. 
 Matth. 327. So eV3. e* TOV aprov 1 Cor. 
 
 I 1, 28 ; (pay. Luke 22, 16. John 6, 26. 50. 
 Rev. 2, 7. (Sept. for -,B ^qx , eV3. 2 Sam. 
 12, 3. 2 K. 4, 40 ; (pay. Num. 6, 4. Ecclus. 
 
 11. 19.) Spec, to live from, 1 Cor. 9, 7. 13. 
 Heb. 13, 10 ; comp. Jos. B. J. 5. 13. 6 
 avrov rpe^eaSat. y) With an 6 c. gen. 
 to eat from i. e. of any thing, as in /3, 
 comp. Matth. 1. c. So eo-%Uu>, spoken 
 of dogs, Matt. 15, 27. Mark 7, 28 ; <paydv 
 Rev. 2, 17 Rec. Sept. (payelv for -jo b:x 
 Gen. 3, 1. 2. 5. Lev. 7, 8. 11. 8) with 
 accus. of the thing eaten ; e. g. genr. as 
 <paye~iv TO TracT^a Matt. 26, 17. Mark 14, 
 
 12. 14. al. Kap-n-ov Mark 11,14; also Mark 
 
 2, 26. Rev. 10, 10. So of birds or beasts 
 of prey, a-dpKas (payelv lo devour, Rev. 19, 
 18 ; trop. Rev. 17, 16. Sept. for b=X Gen. 
 
 3, 14. Ex. 12, 8. (;E1. V. H. 1.1 ~nav ort- 
 ovv (pay. Plut. de Solert. Anim. 26. Plato 
 Prot. 337. c.) 1 Cor. 1 1 , 20 KvpiaKov 8- 
 TTVOV (payflv, i. e. to celebrate. From the 
 Heb. apTov ta^sifiv \~. (paytlv, to eat 
 bread, i. e. to take food, to take a meal, e. g. 
 eo-3. Matt. 15, 2. Mark 7, 5; (pay. Matt. 15, 
 20. John 6, 23. al. Sept. for cnb bax , 
 e o-3. IK. 21, 5; (pay. Gen. 37,24. 2K. 4, s! 
 Trop. of a banquet in the kingdom of God, 
 Luke 14, 15 ; see in dvaK\ii>a> no. 2. b. For 
 the phrases aprov (payelv rrapd TIVOS 2 Thess. 
 3, 8, also TOV eavToiv apTOv eVSt etv 2 Thess. 
 3, 12, see in upTos no. 2. a. Spec, to eat 
 in order to support life, lo use as food, to 
 live upon; Mark 1, 6 e crStW a/cpt Say KOI 
 /jL\i aypiov. John 6, 31 TO pdvva. Rom. 14, 
 2. 3. 6. 1 Cor. 10,.3. 25. 27. al. Trop. John 
 6, 53. With a negat. Luke 4, 2. 1 Cor. 8, 
 
 13. So Xen. Ag. 9. 3. Cyr. 8. 1. 44. 
 Also, to eat of, to partake of, for 6* v. ajro 
 TIVOS as above, 1 Cor. 8, 7. 10. 1], 26. 27 
 Rev. 2, 14. 20. 
 
 2. From the Heb. in the phrase eVSi f iv 
 v. (payelv na\ iriveiv, to eat and drink, 
 absol. or c. ace. a) Simply, i. q. to take a 
 
297 
 
 meal, Luke 10, 17. 17, 8 bis. Sept. for 
 nncn b=X l K. 19, 6. 8. 2 K. 6, 23. So 
 Bel ard Drag. 6. b) Also i. q. to live, in 
 the usual manner, Matt. 11,18 fitjTf eo-2i o>j/ 
 JUIJTC TriVcoi/, i. e. not living as other men ; 
 comp. Matt. 3, 4. Matt. 11, 19 ^\3ei/ 6 vios 
 TOV dv3p. ccr Siwv KOI TTIVUV, i. e. like other 
 men. Luke 7, 33. 34. 1 Cor. 9, 4. Hence 
 in antith. with vr]<rrtvtiv, it signifies not to 
 fast, Luke 5, 33 ; but with a neg~. ov <pa- 
 yelv ovSe nifiv, not to eat or drink, to abstain 
 from food, to fast, Acts 9, 9. 23,12.21. 
 So Sept. Ex. 34, 28. 1 K. 13, 8. 9. c) 
 Spec, to feast, to banquet, Luke 12, 19 dva- 
 iravov, <pdye, Trif, tv<ppaivov. 1 Cor. 10, 7. 
 15, 32. With the idea of luxury, revelling, 
 Matt. 24, 49. Luke 12, 45. 17, 27. 28. 
 1 Cor. 11,22, comp. v. 21. So Sept. for 
 nnei b=X i Sam. 30, 16. Job 1, 4. 18. al. 
 d) With fvamiov TIVOS, to cat and drink in 
 the presence of any one, i. e. to live in ac 
 quaintance and intercourse with him, Luke 
 13, 26. Trop. Luke 22, 30 Iva tv^inrt KUI 
 
 TTl l/T/Te 67TI TTJS TpaTT(t]S p-OV (V TTf fta(T. p.OV, 
 
 i. e. that ye may feast at my table, live in 
 familiar intercourse with me ; comp. in 
 dvuK\ii tt) no. 2. 
 
 3 Trop. to devour, to consume, c. ace. 
 so of fire. Heb. 10, 27 ; of rust, James 5, 3. 
 Sept. and iox of fire, Is. 10, 17. Of 
 fire, Horn. II. 23. 182; comp. Plato Rep. 
 589. a. -f- 
 
 Ecr\i, 6, indec. Esli, pr. n. of a man, 
 Luke 3, 25. 
 
 eCTOTTTpOV, ov, TO, (fiVoi^ojuat, for eto- 
 oTrrpoi ,) looking-glass, mirror ; James 
 1 , 23 toiKtv dv8p\ KaravoovvTi . . . tv eo-oVrpw. 
 1 Cor. 13, 12 ftXtij-o/jifv 6V fVoVrpou tv al- 
 viynaTi, i. e. we now see only an image 
 behind the metallic surface, dimly, obscure 
 ly, and not face to face as we shall see 
 hereafter. So Ecclus. 12, 11. Anacr. 11. 3. 
 Plut. de Fac. in orbe Lun. 23 bis. The 
 mirrors of the ancients were usually made 
 of polished metal, see Ex. 38, 8. Job 37, 18 ; 
 comp. Gesen. Comm. on Is. 3, 23. Diet, of 
 Antt. art. Speculum. 
 
 ea-jrepa, as, fj, (pr. fern, of eWcpor,) 
 evening, Lat. vespera, Luke 24, 29.. Acts 4, 
 3. 28, 23. Sept for yiy Gen. 1, 5. 8. al. 
 Hdian. 3. 12. 23. Xeii. Cyr. 1. 4. 17. 
 
 EcrpojfA, 6, indec. Esrom, Heb. "piSH 
 (walled in) Hezron, pr. n. of the grandson 
 of Judah, Matt. 1, 3 bis. Luke 3, 35. See 
 1 Chr. 2, 5. 
 
 e<T%aT09, dry, TOV, (prob. e^w, t<r\ov,} 
 the last, the furthest, uttermost, extreme; 
 spoken of place and time, viz. 
 
 1 . Of place, a) Pr. the furthest, remotest ; 
 also Neut. as subst. TO ea-^arov, (he extre 
 mity, etui; Acts 1, 8 et 13. 47 eo>j eV^uTou 
 TTJS yrjs. Sept. for &ss Jer. 16, 18; nsp 
 Deut. 28, 49. So JEl V. k. 3. 1 8 med. Dem*. 
 1488. 9. Xen. Vect. 1.6. b) Trop. of 
 rank or dignity, the last, lowest, least ; Luke 
 
 14, 9. 10 fls TOV eo~x- TOTTOV. So genr. Matt. 
 
 19, 30 bis, TroXXoi to-ovrai 7tpu>Toi ecr^aTOt, 
 KOI ecrxuTot TrpwTot. Mark 9, 35. 10, 31 bis. 
 Luke 13, 30 bis. John 8, 9. 1 Cor. 4, 9. 
 Comp. homines postremi, Cic. pro Rose. Am. 
 47. c) Of order or number, the last, ut 
 most, Matt. 5, 26 TOV fcrx- KoSpavrr/v. Luke 
 12, 59. 
 
 2. Of time, the last, the latest, only in the 
 later Greek. a) Genr. of persons, Matt. 
 
 20, 8. 12 of ecr^aTot, i. e. the labourers 
 latest hired, v. 14. 16 bis. 1 Cor. 15, 26. 45 
 6 eo-^aToj "ASd/z, i. q. 6 devrtpos in v. 45. 
 (Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 135 to-^aTOf p-dprupa 
 n-apexfiv.) Adverbially, Mark 12, 6. 22 
 ecrxdnj irdvruiv aTT&ave Kcii r/ yvvrj, comp. 
 Buttm. 123. 6. Also of things, the last, 
 and in reference to two, the later, latter, e. g. 
 TO coward TIVOS, the latter state or condition 
 of any one, Matt. 12, 45. Luke 11, 26.. 
 2 Pet. 2, 20. Sept. and rvnrix Job 8, 7. 
 42, 12. So 17 ea-x- -rrXdvr) Matt 27, 64 ; ra 
 fo~x- fpy a Rev. 2, 19 ; eo^. irXqyai Rev. 15, 
 1. 21,9. Also, tv TTJ (&x- <rd\7Ti.yyi 1 Cor. 
 
 15, 52, i. e. the trumpet of the last day. 
 Neut. <rxaTov as adv. 1 Cor. 15, 8 eo-^. 
 Trdvrav. b) With a noun of time, as 17 
 ecrxdTr) f]p.epa, the last day, e. g. of a 
 festival, John 7, 37 ; or of the w T orld, the 
 day of judgment, John 6, 39. 40. 44. 54. 
 11,24. 12,48. Further, in the phrases v 
 ftrxaTais f]fj.tpais, in the last or latter 
 days, Acts 2, 17. 2 Tim. 3, 1. James 5, 3 ; 
 eV ecr^aTou TO>V T)fj.fpu>v, Heb. 1.1. 2 Pet. 
 3, 3 ; tv Katpw eV^aT<u, in the last time, 
 1 Pet. 1,5; tv ecr^aTO) ^poi/a), in the last 
 time, Jude 18; eV eV^uTwi/ TU>V xpdvcav 
 1 Pet. 1, 20 ; to-xdrrj.&pa tori, it is the last 
 hour, 1 John 2, 18 bis; all which refer to 
 the last times of 6 alu>v ovros, the times 
 since the coming of Christ, in which the 
 Jewish dispensation has come to an end, and 
 the power of this world is in part broken, 
 though it will be wholly destroyed only at 
 his second advent, i. q. Ta TtXrj TU>V alu>- 
 vcav 1 Cor. 10, 11 ; comp. in alvv no. 2. b, 
 and ao-iAfi a no. 3. These expressions 
 seem therefore strictly to cover the whole 
 interval between the first and final advent 
 of Christ ; but they commonly refer more 
 particularly to the period in which the sa- 
 cred*writers lived, adjacent to the first com- 
 
298 
 
 erepo? 
 
 ing, in the last days of the old dispensation, 
 as Acts 2, 17 Hcb. 1,1. James 5, 3. 1 Pet. 1, 
 20. 2 Pet. 3, 3. 2 Tim. 3, 1 . Jude IS. 1 John 
 
 2, 18 bis ; elsewhere more to later times, 
 before the second coming, as 1 Pet. 1, 5. 
 See Bleek Br. an d. Hebr. II. p. 27. c) 
 In the phrase 6 irpu>ros Kal 6 ecr^aTos, 
 the first and the last, spoken of the Messiah 
 in glory, Rev. 1, [11.] 17. 2, 8.22, 13 ; prob. 
 in the sense of eternal, the beginning and 
 the end ; comp. Heb. "pin;* 13x5 -jlttJiO ^3X 
 Is. 44, 6 et 48, 12, comp. Is. 41, 4; see 
 Gesen. Comm. on Is. 41, 4. 48, 12. 
 
 eV^ar&)9, adv. (eerxaros,) at the utter 
 most, in extremity ; so eV^drcos e%fii>, Lat. 
 in extremis esse, to be at the last gasp, at 
 the point of death, Mark 5, 23. Artemidor. 
 
 3. 61. Diod. Sic. VI. p. 31 (II. p. 554 Wess.) 
 
 7TV%6p.{VOS TOV QrjpfKVO rjV ...fV A^Xo) VOfTflV 
 
 KOI reXecos eV^arcoj e^fiv. So ecr^aYcos 5m- 
 Kdfjiai Diod. Sic. 18. 48. Pol. 1. 24. 2. See 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 389. Kypke in Marc. 
 1. c. 
 
 ecra), adv. of place, (els, pr. eio-w,) into, 
 in, within, opp. eco. 
 
 1. Pr. implying motion into a place; 
 Matt. 26, 58 KOL etVeX3o>i/ ecrw. Mark 14, 
 54; with gen. 15, 16 4 o-w rfjs av\^s, into 
 the hall, Sept. for fis^B 2 Chr. 29, 16. 18. 
 Hdot. 5. 20. Soph. : (Ed. R. 461 ; euro) 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 20; c. gen. Xen. Hi. 2. 10: 
 
 2. Of place where, within, John 20, 26. 
 Acts 5, 23. Sept. for rraa Gen. 39, 11. 
 So Dem. 421. 16, 18. Aristot. H. An. 8. 9. 
 Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 128. Hence 6, rj, 
 
 as adj. inner, interior, Buttm. 125. 
 
 6 ; trop. 6 ro> avSpaiiros the inner man, 
 the mind, soul, Rom. 7, 22. Eph. 3, 16; 
 see in m SptoTros no. 3. [2 Cor. 4, 16.] So 
 ol eo-co, those within the church, Christians, 
 
 1 Cor. 5, 12. So Dion Cass. 122. 15. 
 Xen. Ven. 10. 7 TO ro>. Luc. Navig. 38 TO 
 euro). 
 
 eaca&ev, adv. of place, (eo-co,) from 
 within. 
 
 1 . Pr. implying motion from within out 
 wards ; Mark 7, 21 eo-o>3fj> CK TTJS KapSias 
 <T\. v. 23. Luke 1 1 , 7. Arr. Epict. 4. 1 . 
 57 ; pr. Plut. Poplic. 20. Hdot. 8. 37. 
 
 2. Also of place where, within, like eVo) ; 
 so of persons Matt. 7, 15 eo-coSev 8e da-i Xv- 
 KOI KT\. 23, 25. 27. 28. 2 Cor. 7, 5. Rev. 
 4, 8. 5, 1. Sept. and P^n Gen. 6, 14. Ex. 
 25, 11 ; OP 1 ;? Ex. 39, 18. So Arr. Epict. 
 2. 8. 14 ; pr. Xen. An. 1. 4. 4. Hence 6, 
 17, TO fcraftev as adj. the inner, the inside, 
 trop. for the mind, heart, Luke 11, 39. 40. 
 
 2 Cor. 4, 16. Comp. Buttm. $ 125. 6.^ 
 
 ) ov , (t o-&),) compar. inner, 
 interior, inmost, Acts 16, 24. Hence Neut. 
 TO fo-<aTepov, the interior, that within, Heb. 
 6, 19; comp. Lev. 16, 15 where Sept. for 
 
 erapos, ov, 6, (kindr. fr^,) a compa 
 nion, comrade, friend, MM. 11,16. Sept. 
 for I? 1 } 2 Sam. 13, 3. 16, 17. So Hdian. 2. 
 1. 10. Xen. Cyr. 5. 1 1. Mem. 2. 6. 15. 
 Also in a direct address, voc. eraipe, friend, 
 as in Engl. my good friend, Matt. 20, 13. 
 22, 12. 26, 50. So Aristoph. Vesp. 1239. 
 Plato Gor. 473. a. 
 
 O v, 6, 17, adj. (ertpos, 
 yXeoo-o-a,) other-long ued, of another language ; 
 
 1 Cor. 14, 21 (v f.Ttpoy\G)<Tcrois (Xo-yoi?), in 
 allusion to Is. 28, 11. Aquil. for IS b Ps. 
 114, 1. Pol. 24. 9. 5. 
 
 Tepo$l$acrKa\(iC>, , f. ^O-<B, (erepos, 
 8i8dcrKa\os,} to teach otherwise, other doc 
 trine, error, 1 Tim. 1,3. 6, 3. Ignat. ad 
 Polyc, 5 3. Euseb. H. E. 3. 32. Not found 
 in classic writers. 
 
 erepo^vjeco, s>, f. ^o-o>, (eYtpo^vyoj,) to 
 be yoked helerogeneously, pr. with an ani 
 mal of another kind, to be yoked unequally ; 
 in N. T. only trop. of Christians living in 
 familiar intercourse with pagan idolaters. 
 
 2 Cor. 6, 14 ; comp. v. 15 sq. Comp. Sept. 
 tTp6vyos for C^xbs, i. e. animals of differ 
 ent kinds, Lev. 19, 19. Also <rTa3/x6s eVe- 
 po^vyos Phocyl. Sent. 13. 
 
 erepos. a , ov, correl. pron. the other, 
 other, one of two, Buttm. 5 78. 4. } 127. 10. 
 
 1 . Pr. and defin. 6 crepes, with the arti 
 cle, the other, sc. of two, where one has been 
 already mentioned, as Matt. 6, 24 TOV tva 
 /j.icn ](rci, Kal rov erepov ayanrjcrei. Luke 5, 
 7. 7, 41. 23, 40. al. Luke 4, 43 eV rais eVe- 
 pais 7roXeo-iv, in those other cities where 
 the gospel has not yet been preached. In dis 
 tinction from oneself, another person, i. q. 
 TOV ir\T]o-iov, Rom. 2, 1. 1 Cor. 4. 6. 14, 
 17. Gal. 6, 4. James 4, 12. (Hdian. 5. 7. 1. 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 17.) Hence 17 eVe pa sc. 
 fjp-tpa, the other i. e. the next day, the day 
 after, Acts 20, 15. 27, 3. So Xen. Cyr. 4. 
 6. 1 771* avpiov lys Trpcoi, Ttj eTepa av av\i- 
 bto Trap rjfjilv. 
 
 2. Indef. and without the art. other, another, 
 some other, i. q. aXXoy, but with a stronger 
 expression of difference ; Buttm. f 127. 10. 
 
 a) Pr. Matt. 8, 21 tTtpos Se TWI> p.a^TjTuv. 
 Luke 8, 3. John 19, 37. Acts 1, 20. al. 
 Eph. 3, 5 eV trepan yevtais, i. e. former.. 
 Sept. for IPX Gen. 4, 24. 8, 10. al. So 
 Hdian. 5. 7. 13. Xen. Cyr. 6. 3. 5. Joined 
 
299 
 
 with T\S iudel. ere/jo? rir, some o^er one, 
 any other, Acts 8, 34. 27, 1. Rom. 8, 39. 
 1 Tim. 1,10. Also distributive]} , either re 
 peated, as 1 Cor. 15, 40 trepa p.fv . . . trepa 
 fit; or with other pronouns, Matt. 16, 14 
 01 p.iv . . . uXXoi 8f . . . erepoi 8f KT\. Luke 
 11, 16. 14, 19. 20. 1 Cor. 12, 9. 10. Sept. 
 for tiix Gen. 31, 49; nirx Ex. 26, 3. 
 Matth. $ 288. n. 6. 
 
 b) Of another kind, another, different, i. q. 
 dXXoZor, e. g. tv tTfpa nop<f>fj Mark 16, 12; 
 vopos Rom. 7, 23; flayyt\iov Gal. 1,6; 
 686s James 2, 25. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 2.) So 
 of a priest out of a different line or family, 
 Heb. 7, 11. 15 ; prob. also of a king from 
 another race, Acts 7. 18; comp. Jos. Ant. 
 
 2. 9. 1. Spec. Jude 7 dirfXZovo-ai OOT O-W 
 a-apKos fTtpas after other flesh, i. e. of a dif 
 ferent sex, male ; comp. Gen. 19, 5. For 
 the phrase trepais yXcacrcrair v. tv ^fi\f(nv 
 tTfpois XaXt iv Acts 2, 4 et 1 Cor. 14, 21, see 
 in yXwcrcra no. 2. d. Comp. Is. 28, 11. -4- 
 
 ere/xw?, adv. (fWpof,) otherwise, Phil. 3, 
 15. Luc. Hermot. 44. Plato Phagdr. 235. a. 
 
 eri, adv. yet, still, implying the continu 
 ance or increase of something existing ; 
 comp. Hartung Lehre von dor Partik. I. 
 p. 123. 
 
 1. Of continuance in tiir.o : a) The 
 present in relation to the past, yd, still, hi 
 therto, Lat. adliuc ; Matt. 12, 46 en avrov 
 XaXovjTos. 27, 63 fKelvos 6 TrXavos tlirtv en 
 fav. Luke 9, 42. 24, 6. John 20, 1. Rom. 
 5, 6. al. (Hdian. 4. 9. 15. Plut. Mor. II. p. 
 39 ult. Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 9.) Spec, of a 
 former state of mind or condition still un 
 changed, Mark 8, 17. Luke 24, 41. Acts 9, 
 1. Rom. 3, 7. Gal. 1,10. al. So eri vvv, 
 yet now, even now, 1 Cor. 3, 2. (Hdian. 3. 
 
 4. 6 eri vvv. Xen. Cyr. 1.2. 16 vvv 8 en.) 
 In the sense even now, even then, already ; 
 Luke 1, 15 irvtv/J-aros ayiov TrX^crSijcreTat 
 rrt (< KoiXias p.T)rpbs avrov. Heb. 7, 10. 
 Comp. Plut. Consol. ad Apoll. 6. p. 242, 17 
 Tf aSf/Xoj avTT) ri>XT) Tr6ppa>^ev f) p.lv Kai eri 
 air" dpxn s r]Ko\ov^T]Ktv. b) The future in 
 relation to the present, yet, still, further, 
 longer, henceforth ; Mark 5, 35 ri en <TKV\- 
 \tis TOV 8i8da-Ka\ov. John 4, 35. 7, 33. 1 4, 
 19. Rom. 6, 2. 2 Cor. 1, 10. al. (Hdian. 2. 
 13. 16. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 20. Apol. Soc. 33 
 TOV en fiji>.) With a negative, no further, 
 no more, no longer, Lat. non amplius ; Luke 
 16, 2 ov -yap 8vvf](rr] en oiKovonelv. Matt. 
 
 5, 13 (Is ov8ev l<rx vfl tri. Heb. 8, 12. Rev. 
 
 3, 12. 7, 16. al. For ovKtri see in its or 
 der. So Hdian. 3. 11. 13. Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 
 26 ov8eva ?rt. 
 
 2. Genr. as marking accession, increase, 
 yet, still more, further, besides; Matt. 18, 
 16 napaXafie fj.fra crov tri tva f) 8vo. Luke 
 18, 22 tn tv trot XetVft. John 16, 12. 1 Cor. 
 12,31. Heb. 11,32. 36. al. So In Se *cai, 
 and further also, moreover also, Luke 14, 
 26. Acts 2, 26 ; en re Kai id. Acts 21, 28. 
 So Hdian. 5. 2. 13. Xen. GEc. 6. 12 ; ?rt 8e 
 Kai Hdian. 2. 3. 9. Xen. Hell. 4. 2. 18. 
 Spec, it strengthens a comparative ; Phil. 1 , 
 9 ert /iaXXov /cat /xaXXoi/, yet more and more. 
 Heb. 7, 15. So en /x5XXo/ Jos. Ant. 20. 
 4. 2. Xen. Hi. 2. 18. See Winer 5 36. 3. 
 n. 1. + 
 
 erot/iatja), f. acrco, (eroi/ior,) 1. to make 
 ready, to prepare. a) Of things, as a 
 meal, banquet, c. ace. Matt. 22, 4. Luke 17, 
 8 ; TO Trdo-xa Matt. 26, 17. 19. Mark 14, 12. 
 15. 16. Luke 22, 8. 9. 12. 13. Sept. for "pan 
 Gen. 43, 16. (Horn. II. 19. 197. Plut. de 
 Virt. et Vit. 4.) Also a place, domicile, to 
 prepare, to provide ; c. ace. et dat. e. g. ro- 
 irov John 14, 2. 3. Rev. 12, 6 ; TroXtv Heb. 
 11,16; tviav Philem. 22 ; ace. impl. Luke 
 
 9, 52. Sept. for "pan 1 Chr. 15, 3. So 
 genr. of things, to prepare, to provide, c. ace. 
 uputfj-ara Luke 23, 56. 24, 1 ; dyaStz Luke 
 12, 20 comp. v. 19. Sept. and V=tt 2 Chr. 
 26, 14. Spec, to prepare a way, rr/v 686t?, 
 by leveling and straightening, as was cus 
 tomary before oriental monarchs on their 
 journeys and marches ; see Jos. B. J. 3. 6. 
 2. Arr. Alex. M. 4. 30. 12. Diod. Sic. 2. 
 13 ; so Pass. pr. Rev. 16, 12 ; trop. of the 
 Messiah, Matt. 3, 3. Mark 1, 3. Luke 1, 
 76. 3, 4, all quoted from Is. 40, 3 where 
 Sept. for !"IJS. b) Of persons, c. ace. 
 e.g. e r. Kvplcp \a6v Luke 1, 17; comp. 
 Sept. 2 Chr. 27, 6. Ecclus. 2, 18. So of 
 soldiers, Acts 23, 23 ; a bride, kavn\v Rev. 
 19, 7. 21,2; a servant or minister, tavroi 
 Rev. 8, 6. 9, 15. Luke 12. 47. Pass, par- 
 ticip. T/Toifiao-p-fvos, prepared, i. e. ready, 
 filled, 2 Tim. 2, 21 ; of horses, 177-. ds Tro Xf- 
 fiov, Rev. 9,7. So genr. 1 Mace. 13, 22. 
 Pol. 1. 38. 3. Thuc. 6. 34. 
 
 2. Trop. of God, as having in his coun 
 sels made ready good or evil for men, i. e. 
 to prepare, to appoint, c. ace. 1 Cor. 2, 9 a 
 ijToi/iatrfj 6 3eos rois ayairSxriv CIVTOV. Luke 
 2, 31. Pass. Matt. 20, 23. 25, 34. 41. Mark 
 
 10, 40. Sept. for V3ri Ex. 23, 20. Is. 41, 
 21 ; rpsn Gen. 24, 14. 44. Tob. 6, 17. 
 
 eTO/z.a<rta, as, f), (erot/ioj.) preparation) 
 i. e. readiness, alacrity; Eph. 6, 15 vnoSr)- 
 (rd/j.fvoi TOVS TroSas tv erot^iatrt a TOV fvayye- 
 X/ov, having your feet shod with preparation 
 (alacrity) for the gospel ; comp. 2 Tim. 2, 
 
eroi/io? 300 
 
 21. Sept. for "PStt p s . 10, 17. Jos. Ant. 
 10. 1. 2. Artemid. 2. 57. 
 
 y, rj, ov, once at ero/zot Matt. 25, 
 10. Thuc. 8. 26; ready, prepared, e. g. 
 a) Of things, as a banquet, Matt. 22, 4. 8. 
 Luke 14, 17; a chamber, Mark 14, 15; a 
 contribution, 2 Cor. 9, 5 ; so of time, John 
 7, 6 ; of things done, made ready, TO. croi/xa 
 2 Cor. 10, 16. (Thuc. 7. 60, 65.) Also c. 
 inf. ready to be done, o-u>rrjpiav iroi^v dno- 
 KaXu03JJvai, 1 Pet. 1,5. So Wisd. 16, 20. 
 Hdian. 2. 12. 1. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 10. b) Of 
 persons, Matt. 25, 10 at erot/xot etVfjXSoi/. 
 Also with Trpos TI, ready for any thing, Tit. 
 3, 1. 1 Pet. 3, 15; c. infin. ready to do or 
 act, Luke 22, 33. Acts 23. 15 ; inf. impl. v. 
 21. So eroipos yivopai, to become ready, be 
 prepared, Matt. 24, 44. Luke 12, 40. Sept. 
 for "pas fPn Ex. 19, 15. 34, 2. So c. irpos 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 5. 12 ; c. inf. Luc. Asin. 23. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 1. 1. Hence, ev tVoi /io) fx flv > 
 to have or hold in readiness, c. inf. 2 Cor. 
 10, 6. So Pol. 2. 34. 2. 
 
 y, adv. (erot/ioy,) ready, in readi- 
 ntss ; hence frtJftttt fX fLV > * hold oneself 
 ready, to be ready, c. inf. Acts 21,13. 2 Cor. 
 12, 14. 1 Pet. 4, 5. Sept. for Tins irpx 
 Dan. 3, 15. Jos. Ant. 12. 4. 2. JEl. V.~H. 
 
 4. 13. Diod. Sic. 16. 28. 
 
 eroy, eos, ovs, TO, a year, Luke 3, 1. 
 Acts 7, 30. Heb. 1, 12. al. Sept. for njllj 
 1 K. 15, 1. Jer. 1, 2. 3. So Hdian. 1. 16* 
 
 5. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 12. Dat. plur. as mark 
 ing a period in or during which, John 2, 20. 
 Acts 13, 20 ; Plato Tim. 23. d. Accus. plur. 
 of time how long, Matt. 9, 20. Luke 2, 36. 
 John 5, 5. al. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 9. In the 
 phrase eiVat v. yivopai erwv, to be of so many 
 years, of such and such an age ; Matt. 5, 42 
 rfv yap (TU>V So>8a, i. e. twelve years old. 
 Luke 2, 37. 42. Acts 4, 22. al. (Sept. Gen. 
 5, 32. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 40.) So John 8, 
 57 TrevTrjKovTa ?TTJ OUTTW < f x elf > thou hast not 
 yet forty years, i. e. art not forty years old. 
 With prepositions, e. g. air 6 c. gen. from, 
 since, Rom. 15, 23 ; Sta c. gen. as Si er>v 
 nXfiovuv, after many years, Acts 24, 17. 
 Gal. 2, 1 ; els c. ace. for, Luke 12, 19; ev 
 c. dat. in, Luke 3, 1 ; ex c. gen. from, since, 
 Acts 9, 33. 24, 10; eVt c. ace. upon or 
 for, Acts 19, 10; Kara c. ace. as HOT eras, 
 year by year, every year, Luke 2, 41 (Jos. 
 Ant. 7. 5. 1) ; perd c. ace. after, Gal. 1, 
 18. 3, 17: TTpo c. gen. before, so many 
 years ago, 2 Cor. 12, 2. -f 
 
 eu, adv. (pr. neut. of vj,) well, good, 
 in N. T. only with verbs or absol. 
 
 1. Pr. with a verb; Eph. 6, 3 Iva tv aot 
 yevrjrat, that it may be well with thee, that 
 thou mayest prosper ; quoted from Deut. 5, 
 16 where Sept. for 301-1 . (Arr. Epict. 2. 5. 
 30.) Mark 14, 7 ev iroirjcrai Tiva, to do one 
 good, to do good to any one. Sept. for 310!! 
 Gen. 32, 9. 12. (Jos. Ant. 14. 14. 3. Xen" 
 Mem. 2. 1. 19.) Acts 15, 29 tv irpdo-a-fiv^t ) 
 do well, i. e. to do right, to act well ; so Jos 
 Ant. 4. 8. 38. Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 14. 
 
 2. Absol. in commendations, i. q. vyt, 
 well! well done! Matt. 25, 21 fv, SoCXe 
 a-ya2e. v. 23. Luke 19, 17. Xen. Yen. 6. 
 20; comp. tvye ib. 19. 
 
 NOTE. In composition, ev is well, good ; 
 hence often intensive. 
 
 Eva, as, f,, Ere, Heb. Mr] (life), pr. 
 name of the first woman, 2 Cor. 11, 3. 
 1 Tim. 2, 13. 
 
 evayyeXtfa, f. tcrw, (eudyyeXoy,) aor. 1 
 VTjyyf\icra, for the augm. see Buttm. j 86. 
 3 ; to bring good news, to announce glad 
 tidings ; Act. only twice, Rev. 10, 7. 14, 6 ; 
 elsewhere Mid. and Pass. Not found in 
 Mark, nor in John s gospel and epistles ; 
 only once in Matthew, and twice in the 
 Apocalypse. 
 
 I. ACT. with ace. of pers. comp. Buttni. 
 5 131. 5 ; to bring or announce glad tidings 
 unto; Rev. 10, 7 Grb. obr evrjyye\io-f TOVS 
 tavTov 8ov\ovs TOVS Trpo<prjras, where Rec. 
 has dat. rotr SovXoty KT\. 14, 6 et ayyeXiVat 
 TOVS KaSrjiJLfvovs tnl TTJS yfjs KT\. where 
 some editions read eVt TOVS Ka%r]p.tvovs KT\. 
 Sept. c. dat. for -i ; ^3 1 Sam. 31, 9. 2 Sam. 
 18, 19. 20. Dion Cass. 61. 13. (993. 30.) 
 Polyaen. 5. 7 (vr]yye\ie rols 2tipa*eoucrt oi?. 
 The Active form is not found in early 
 writers ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 268. 
 
 II. MID. in earlier writers (Lob. 1. c.) and 
 in N. T. to bring good news, to announce or 
 publish glad tidings; in various construc 
 tions. 
 
 1. Genr. and c. ace. of thing, Acts 10, 36 
 fvayyf\iop.fvos elprjvrjv. Rom. 10, 15 bis 
 quoted from Is. 52, 7 where Sept. for -1^3 ? 
 as also 1 K. 1 , 42. With ace. of thing and 
 dat. of pers. which was the more usual con 
 struction, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 268. Winer 
 5 31. 1. n. Luke 1, 19 dneo-Takrjv evayytXi- 
 o-ao-Sat o-ot raCra. 2, 10. Eph. 2, 17. 1 Thess. 
 3, 6. Sept. for VJ33 1 Chr. 10, 9 ; ev TKTI 
 1 Sam. 1, 20. Ps. 40, 10. So Jos. Ant. 5. 
 1. 5. Luc. Icarom. 34. Lycurg. 150. 3 ; TH>\ 
 irepi TIVOS Jos. Ant. 15. 7. 2. Plut. Quaest. 
 Rom. 9. With dat. of pers. Luke 4, 18 tv- 
 ayyeXi o-aorSat Trrco^oty, quoted from Is. 61, 1 
 where Sept. for -1^2 . So Aristopb Eq. 
 
301 
 
 643. Dem. 332. 9. With two ace. of pers. 
 and tiling, in the later usage; Acts 13, 32 
 Kal ijfifls vp.as et>ayyeXio/ie3a TTJV fVayye- 
 X/av . . . ort KT\. comp. Buttm. 151. I. 6. 
 So Alciphr. Ep. 3. 12. Heliodor. 2. 16. p. 
 64. Euseb. Vit. Const. 3. 26. 
 
 2 ?peo. of the gospel of Christ and all 
 that pertains to it, to bring glad tidings of 
 salvation ; hence to show forth, to declare, 
 to preach, including always the idea of glad 
 Mings; e.g. a) With ace. -rip $aa-i\eiav 
 TOV 3eou V. TO TTfpl TTJS ftaaiXfiav r. 3. to shoiv 
 forth the glad tidings of the kingdom of God, 
 to preach the kingdom, Luke 3, 1 . Acts 8,12; 
 c. dat. of pers. Luke 4, 43. b) With ace. 
 irjo-ovv Xp. v. TOV Kvptov irjo-ovv, Acts 5, 42. 
 11, 20. 17, 18 ; c. dat. of pers. Acts 8, 35; 
 also fv ro is fZvto-i Gal. 1,16. So Eph. 3, 8 
 TOV TrXovToi TOU Xp. ev TQIS fSvecri. c) 
 Genr. C. ace. TO dayytXiov. ruv Xoyoi>, rrjv 
 TficrTiv, etc. Gal. 1, 23 rfjv TTIOTIV. Acts 8, 
 4 TOV \ayov. 15, 35; c. dat. of pers. 1 Cor. 
 15,1.2 dayytXiov vftiv. 2 Cor." 11,7; ace. 
 impl. Gal. 1, 8 bis. d) Simply, dayyeXt- 
 (Jeo-Sat, to preach the gospel ; absol. Luke 9, 
 6. 20, 1. Acts 14, 7. Rom. 15, 20. 1 Cor. 
 1, 17. 9, 16 his. 18 ; \\ith tls c. ace. mark 
 ing extent, 2 Cor. 10, 16. With dat. of 
 pers. Rom. 1, 15. Gal. 4, 13. With ace. 
 of pers. Luke 3, 18. Acts 16, 10. Gal. 1, 9. 
 1 Pet. 1, 12 ; ace. of place for pers. Acts 8, 
 25. 40. 14, 21 ; ace. and infin. Acts 14, 15. 
 Comp. Winer 5 32. 1. n. 
 
 III. PASS, with aor. 1 eCr/yyeXurST/v, perf. 
 part. drjyyf\io-fivos, with a nominative of 
 thing or person, e. g. a) With a nom. of 
 the thing announced, corresp. to the accus. 
 in the Active construction, Buttm. 134. 1, 
 5 ; to be announced as glad tidings, to be 
 preached; Luke 16, 16 17 /3ao-iXe/a TOV 3eou 
 fi>ayyeX( erai. Gal. 1, 11 TO dayytXiov. 
 1 Pet. 1, 25 TO pf)p.a xvpiov. Impers. c. 
 dat. of pers. 1 Pet. 4, 6 icoi vfKpols drjyye- 
 XiffZrj, comp. Buttm. J 129. 16. b) With 
 a nom. of person, corresp. to the dat. or ace. 
 of pers. in the Active construction, Buttm. 
 134. 5; to have good tidings brought to 
 one, to receive glad tidings, e. g. of God s 
 promise, Heb. 4, 2 KOI yap eo-p.tv drjyye- 
 \urfurot, KoSantp KUKtlvoi. v. 6. Sept. for 
 isnnn 2 Sam. 18, 31. Spec, of the gospel, 
 to have the gospel preached to one, to hear the 
 gospel preached, Matt. 11, 5 and Luke 7, 22 
 TrTw^oi dayyf\[ovrai. 
 
 evayye\iov. ov , Tc $, (ddyytXos, ) a re 
 ward for good news, given to the messen 
 ger, Horn. Od. 14. 152, 166. Plut. Agesi. 
 33 ; then good news, glad tidings, Sept. for 
 
 evayye\ioi> 
 
 2 Sam. 18, 20. 22. Luc. Asin. 26. 
 Plut. Pomp. 41. App. B. Civ. 4. 20. In 
 N. T. the glad tidings of Christ and his 
 salvation, the gospel. Not found in Luke, nor 
 in John s gospel and epistles, only twice in 
 Acts, once in Peter, once in Rev. 
 
 1 . Pr. the gospel, in the sense of glad 
 tidings ; so in the four evangelists, e. g. 
 a) In respect to the kingdom of the Messi 
 ah, as TO tvayyeXiov Trjs /3ao-iXe/as TOV 3fot), 
 Mark 1, 14. Matt. 4, 23. 9,35. 24,14: 
 and so impl. Mark 1, 15. 13, 10. 14, 9. 
 Matt. 26, 13. b) In respect to the com 
 ing and life of Christ himself; Mark 8, 35 
 et 10, 29 fVfKev fp.ov Kal TOV dayye\iov. 
 16, 15. Meton. the preaching of the gospel, 
 annunciation of the glad tidings respecting 
 Christ, sc. as begun by John the Baptist, 
 Mark 1, 1. Hence later gospel, i. q. gospel- 
 history, the record of Christ s life and teach 
 ing ; so in the titles of the first four books 
 of the N. T. 
 
 2. Later, after the day of Pentecost, tJu 
 gospel, i. e. the gospel scheme, the plan of 
 redemption through Christ, comprising all 
 its doctrines, precepts, promises, privileges ; 
 so in Paul s writings, and also Acts 15, 7 
 20, 24. 1 Pet. 4, 17. Rev. 14, 6. Thus 
 a) Genr. Rom. 2, 16 KOTO. TO ei;ayyeXtoV 
 p.ov, i. e. the gospel which I preach. 11, 28. 
 16, 25. 2 Tim. 2, 8. 1 Cor. 9, 14 Toly TO 
 evay. Kcn-ayye Xoucrii . v. 18. 15, 1. 2 Cor. 
 4, 3. 4. Gal. 1, 11 TO fvay, TO euayyeXio-3ei/ 
 VIT {/J.OV. 2. 2. 5. 14. Eph. 1, 13. 3, 6. 6, 
 19. Phil. 1, 5. 7. 17. 27 bis. Col. 1, 5. 23. 
 2 Tim. 1, 10. Acts 15, 7. 20, 24. Rev.. 14, 
 6 fuayye Xtoi almviov, i. e. the eternal truths 
 and blessings of the gospel. SoToevayy. 
 TOV Xpio-Tov, the gospel of Christ, the 
 glad tidings of Christ and his salvation, 
 Rein. 15, 29. 2 Cor. 9, 13. Gal. 1, 7. Also 
 TO fvayy/Xtoi ToO Sfov, i. e. of which God 
 is the author through Christ, Rom. 15, 16. 
 2 Cor. 11,7. 1 Thess. 2, 2. 8. 9. 1 Tim. 
 1, 11. Hence by antith. eTepov dayyt- 
 \iov, another gospel, different, not the true 
 one, 2 Cor. 11, 4. Gal. 1, 6. b) Meton. 
 the gospel, for the gospel-work, labour in the 
 gospel, the preaching of the gospel ; Rom. 
 1, 1 afpwpiap.fi os fls fvayyi\ioi> 3eou. v. 9. 
 16. 1 Cor. 4, 15. 9, 14 eVc TOV day. &v. \. 
 23. 2 Cor. 2, 12. 8, 18. Eph. 6, 15 see in 
 Phil. 1, 12. 2, 22. 4, 3. 15. 
 1 Thess. 1,5. 2, 4. 2 Thess. 2, 14. 2 Tim. 
 1, 8. Philem. 13 eV ToTy 6W/JoZ? TOV day. 
 in bonds on account of labours in the gos 
 pel. Gal. 2, 7 TT(TT L<TT fvfjiai TO day. TTJS aKpo- 
 J3vo-rias, the gospel of the uncircumcision, 
 i e. the preaching of the gospel to the gen- 
 
302 
 
 tiles. Rorj . 10, 16 ov rrdvres vrrr]Kov(rav r<u 
 ei ayyeXio), all hare not obeyed the preaching 
 of the gospel, i. e. the gospel as preached. 
 So too TO (vayycXiof rov Xpio-rov, sec above 
 in lett. a; Rom. 15, 19. 1 Cor. 9, 12. 18. 
 2 Cor. 10, 14. 1 Thess. 3, 2. 2 Thess. 1, 8. 
 1 Pet. 4, 17. 
 
 ov, 6, (evayyeXi o/iai,) 
 pr. a messenger of good tidings ; in N. T. 
 an evangelist, a preacher of the gospel, not 
 fixed in any place, but travelling as a mis 
 sionary to preach the gospel and establish 
 churches, Acts 21, 8. Eph. 4, 11. 2 Tim. 
 4, 5. See Neander Hist, of the Plant. 
 and Tr. of the Chr. Church I. p. 173. 
 [Germ. ed. 2, I. p. 194.] Theodoret ad Eph. 
 4, 1 1 eKflvoi TTfpiiovres fKrjpvrrov. Euseb. 
 H. E. 3. 37. 
 
 Teo), . f. fja-ca, (evdpeo-ros.) perf. 
 
 , for the augm. see Buttm. 86. 
 3 ; to please well, c. dat. Heb. 11,5 tvrjpe- 
 arnKevai r<a 3e, quoted from Sept. Gen. 5, 
 24. Absol! v. 6. So Ecclus. 44, 16. Diod. 
 Sic. 4. 4. Pass, to be pleased with any thing, 
 c. dat. of cause, Heb. 13, 16. So Diod. Sic. 
 3 55. ib. 20. 79. 
 
 evdpeCTTOS, ov, 6, rj, adj. (ev, dpeVKco,) 
 well-pleasing, acceptable, approved, c. dat. 
 Rom. 12, 1 fvdpevrov rw 3e. 14, 18. 
 2 Cor. 5, 9. Eph. 5, 10. Phil. 4, 18 ; absol. 
 Rom. 12, 2 ; ei> nvi of manner, Tit. 2, 9. 
 (Wisd. 4, 10.) With cVomdV TWOS instead 
 of a dat. Heb. 13,21 ; comp. in fvamiov no. 
 
 3. With Iv Kvpia Col. 3, 20, where Rec. 
 has ro> KV/H W, comp. in eV no. 1. e ; comp. 
 Wisd. 9, 10 Trapd aoi. 
 
 evapecrT(t)<>, adv. (evapeo-ror,) so as to 
 please, acceptably, Heb. 12, 28. Arr. Epict. 
 1. 12. 21. 
 
 Ev{3ov\o$i ov, 6, Eubulus, pr. n. of a 
 Christian, 2 Tim. 4, 21. 
 
 evyevr]^ / O j, ov?, 6, f/, adj. (ev, ytvos,) 
 well-born, noble, of high rank, Luke 19, 12. 
 1 Cor. 1, 26. Sept. for biia Job 1, 3. So 
 Hdian. 1. 8. 10. Xen. Hell. 4. 1. 7. Trop. 
 noble-minded, generous, Acts 17, 11. So 
 Jos. Ant. 12. 5. 4 ray A//v^as cvyevfls. Plato 
 Rep. 375. a. 
 
 evSla, as, 77, (ev Sioy, Aio r,) serene sky, 
 fair iceather, Matt. 16, 2 evSi a sc. eo-rai. 
 Ecclus. 3, 15. Pol. 1. 60. 8. Xen. Hell. 2. 
 
 4. 14. 
 
 >, f. ^o-a>, (ev, fioKe co,) aor. 1 
 , also jjvSd^o-a Luke 3, 22, see 
 Buttm. 86. 3 ; to think well of, to think 
 good; hence genr. to be well disposed, to 
 favour, c. dat. of pers. Diod. Sic. 17. 47 ; 
 
 to assent to, to approve, c. dat. of thing 
 1 Mace. 1, 43. Diod. Sic. 4. 23. Found 
 only in the later Greek, Sturz de Dial. Alex, 
 p. 168. In N. T. 
 
 1 . to be well pleased, to take pleasure in , 
 with eV c. dat. of pers. Matt. 3, 17 6 vlos 
 fiov, tv co tvSoK^cra. 17, 5. Mark 1,11. 
 Luke 3, 22. 1 Cor. 10, 5. Heb. 10, 38 ; tv 
 c. dat. of thing, 2 Cor. 12, 10. 2 Thess. 2, 
 12. Sept. for a yBH 2 Sam. 22, 20. Is. 
 62, 4 ; 3 !-isn Ps. 44, 4. 1 Chr. 29, 3. 
 (1 Mace. 8, 1. Ecclus. 31, 19. Polyb. 2. 12. 
 3.) With els c. ace. of pers. implying di 
 rection of mind, Matt. 12, 18 els w evSoKijcra 
 f) tyvx*) p-ov. 2 Pet. 1, 17. With ac&. of 
 thing, by Hebr. Heb. 10, 6. 8 6XoKav/ia 
 K. TT. d. OVK evBoKijcrag. So Sept. for ""^^i 
 Ps. 51, 18 ; 72^ Ps. 51, 21. 
 
 2. Spec, to think good to do any thing, 
 c. inf. a) i. q. to be willing, ready, desir 
 ous, c. inf. 2 Cor. 5, 8 evSoKov/xef p.aX\ov 
 fK8rjfj.rj(rai (K rov crco/iaroy KrX. 1 Thess. 2, 
 8. So Ecclus. 25, 16. 1 Mace. 6, 23. Pol. 
 
 I. 8. 4. b) Implying purpose, will, deter 
 mination, i. q. to please or be pleased, c. inf. 
 1 Thess. 3, 1 evSoKijcra/iei KaTaXet03^i/at ev 
 ASiji/ats. Roin. 15, 2t> ; inf. hnpl. v. 27. 
 (1 Mace. 14, 46. 47.) So of the good plea 
 sure of God, c. inf. Luke 12, 32 eiiboK^a-tv 
 6 TraTr/p vfjiutv 8ovvai v^lv rf]V /3acriXet aj . 
 
 1 Cor. 1, 21. Gal. 1, 15. Col. 1, 19. 
 
 evo/aa, a?, 17, (evSoKt w,) a being well 
 pleased, pleasure, i. e. 
 
 1. Pr. delight in in any person or thing, 
 and hence good-will, favour. Luke 2, 14 eV 
 dv%pa>7rois ev&o/a a, sc. on the part of God. 
 Sept. and "px-i Ps. 5, 13. 19, 15. (Ecclus. 
 
 II, 17.) Of men, good-will, kind intent, 
 Phil. 1, 15 81 evftoKiav rbv Xp. Krjpvcrarov- 
 <TIV. Spec, pleasure in any thing, desire ; 
 
 2 Thess. 1,11 Kal n^rjpdxrT] Tracrav fv8oKi.av 
 dyaScocrvi jjs Kal epyov Tri crreco?. Rom. 10, 1. 
 Comp. evSoK/co 2 Cor. 5, 8 ; also Ecclus. 
 18, 31. 
 
 2. Spec, of God, good pleasure, will, pur 
 pose, always with the idea of benevolence ; 
 Eph. 1, 5 Kara TTJV evSoKi ai/ rov SeX^/iarof 
 avroC. v. 9. Phil. 2, 13. Matt. 11, 26 et 
 Luke 10, 21 ovrw? e yeWro evSoKi a (fjiTrpo- 
 o-3eV (rov, such was thy good pleasure ; see 
 in e /wrpoo-aei no. 2. a. So "p^, Sept. 
 
 , Ps. 40, 9. 103, 21. 
 
 ia, as, f], (fvepye-njs.) well-doing, 
 good conduct, 1 Tim. 6, 2 ; see in di/riXa/i- 
 (3di/a) no. 2. So Horn. Od. 22. 374. Theogn. 
 548. Spec, a good deed, benefit, done to 
 another, Acts 4, 9. So 2 Mace. 9. 26 
 Hdian. 3. 12. 21. Xen Mem. 2. 7. 9. 
 
303 
 
 ), , f. TJO-W, (euf/yyenjr.) to efo 
 /, to confer benefits, absol. Acts 10, 38. 
 Sept. for baa Ps. 13, 6. .El. V. H. 12. 59. 
 Xen. Cyr. 8* 2. 9, 10. 
 
 euepyerrjs, O u, 6, (tu, obsol. epyw,) a 
 well-doer, benefactor, 2 Mace. 4, 2. Xen. 
 Ag. 4. 4. In N. T. as a title of honour, 
 Euergeles, benefactor, corresponding to the 
 Lat. paler patriot ; Luke 22, 25 o! e ouo-ta- 
 ovT(s (VfpytTai KuXovvrai. Comp. Ptolemy 
 Euergetes, king of Egypt, Ecclus. Prol. 
 and also Jos. B. J. 3. 9. 8 arwrrjpa KOI evep- 
 ytrrjv dva.Ka\oviTfs. Diod. Sic. 11. 26 a?ro- 
 KaXflv (vepyerrjv teal (Tcor^pa. Xen. An. 7. 
 6. 38. 
 
 9, ou, 6, 17, adj. (eS, Tt Sjj/it,) well- 
 situated, convenient, Diod. Sic. 2. 57 irrjyas 
 els \ovrpa euSfVouf. In N. T. fit, meet, 
 proper, Luke 9, 62 OVK e u3. ds TTJV /3aer. r<av 
 ovp. 14, 35. Heb. 6, 7. So Sept. Ps. 32, 6. 
 Diod. Sio. 5. 37. Dioscor. 2. 65. 
 
 ?, adv. (fuSuy,) straightway, im 
 mediately, forthwith, Matt. 8,3. 13,5. Mark 
 1, 31. Acts 12, 10 ; shortly, 3 John 14. 
 Matt. 24, 29. Sept. for ckr.Q Job 5, 3. 
 Hdian. 1. 1. 7. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 18. + 
 
 eifevSpopea), o>, f. TJO-W, (eu3u?, 8p6p.os, 
 Tpe ^co.) /o run straight, e. g. of a ship, to 
 sail a straight course, with etr c. ace. of 
 place, Acts 16, 11. 21, 1. Philo 2 Alleg. 
 p. 102. c. Id. de Agric. p. 213. a. 
 
 eifev/JLea), , f. T;O-O>, (eu3u/xoy,) to be of 
 good chf.er, to be.-of cheerful rnind, absol. Acts 
 27, 22. 25. James 5, 13. Symm. for nb-nia 
 Prov. 15, 15. Plut. de Tranq. Anim! 2, 9. 
 Enrip. Cycl. 530. Mid. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 19. 
 
 ey^V/ioy, ov, 6, 17, adj. (eiJ, 3u/idr,) well- 
 minded. i. e. well-disposed, kind, Horn. Od. 14. 
 (J3. In N. T. of good cheer, cheerful. Acts 27, 
 36. (2 Mace. 11,26. Hdian. 6. 6. 13. Xen. 
 Ag. 8. 2.) Hence Neut. of comparat. ei3u- 
 p-orepov adv. the more cheerfully, Acts 24, 
 lORec. So Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 27. 
 
 eifovpcas, adv. (fu3u/xor,) cheerfully, 
 Acts 24, 10 Lachm. see in tfovpos. Pol. 
 3. 34. 9. Plato Ax. 365. b. 
 
 ), f. vvu>, (et>3uy,) 1. to make 
 straight; e. g. a way, to make straight and 
 level, c. ace. rr)j/ 68oV, John 1, 23; comp. 
 Matt. 3, 3. and see fully in froi/iufco no. 1. 
 a._Trop. Ecclus. 2, 6. 37, 15. 
 
 2. to lead or guide straight, e. g. a ship, 
 to steer ; hence 6 ttevvw, a steersman, pi 
 lot, James 3, 4. Luc. D. MorL 10. 10. 
 Eurip. Cycl. 15; horses, Plut. de Genio 
 Sor.r. 23. p. 104. 
 
 la, v, 1. straight, pr. as adj. 
 Matt. 3, 3 et Mark 1, 3 et Luke 3, 4, euSeiaj 
 TrotetTe ras rpiftovs avrov, i. e. make the 
 ways straight and level before the king, 
 quoted from Is. 40, 3 where Sept. for "iffi" ; 
 see fully in eYot/iao> no. 1. Luke 3, 5, from 
 Is. 40, 4 where Sept. for Tia il a . Acts 9, 1 1 . 
 So Luc. Zeux. 10. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 4. 
 Trop. of the heart and life, straight-forward, 
 right, true; Acts 8, 21 17 xap8ia. 13, 10 
 68ovs Kvpiov tv^eias. 2 Pet. 2, 1 5. So Sept. 
 and id; 1 Sam. 12, 23. Hos. 14, 10. 
 
 2. As adv. of time, evZvs, straightway, 
 immediately, forthwith, i. q. ev3e <?, Matt. 
 3,16. 13,20.21. Mark 1, 12. 28. John 
 13, 32. 19, 34. 21, 3. Acts 10, 16 Lachm. 
 Comp. Buttm. \ 115. n. 4. J 117. 1. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 144 sq. Jos. Ant. 1 1. 6. 9. Hdian. 
 1. 7. 12. Xen. Cyr. 8. 8. 2. 
 
 eifowr/?, -rrrros, rj, ((teiis,) straightness, 
 Aristot. Meteor, comp. Ecclus. 51, 15 [21]. 
 In N. T. trop. rightness, rectitude ; Heb. 
 1, 8 pdpSos (v%vTT)Tos, i. q. pdj38os ev3euz, a 
 right sceptre, quoted from Ps. 45, 7, where 
 Sept. for "n aia; Sept. also for "^ p s . 
 Ill, 8 ; "IBM K. 9, 4. See Bottm. l3S. 
 n. 12. 
 
 evKdipeo), w, f. jjo-w, (evKdipos,) impf. 
 fvKalpovv and rjvKaipovv, for the augm. see 
 Buttm. J 86. 3 ; a word of the later Greek, 
 Lob. ad Phryn. 125 ; to have good time, to 
 hare leisure, opportunity; c. inf. Mark 6, 31 
 ot>Se (payelv TjvKaipovv. Absol. 1 Cor. 16, 12. 
 (Pol. 20. 9. 4. Plut. Mor. II. p. 138.) With 
 et? final, to hare leisure for, i. e. to spend 
 one s time in any thing ; Acts 17, 21 A3?;- 
 vaioL els ov8ev ertpov evicatpovv, fj Xe yetj/ KT\. 
 So irpoa-tvKaipeiv nvi Arr. Epict. 3. 22. 72. 
 Plut. Parall. 41. 
 
 evKaipia, as, rj, (efoaipo?,) fit time, op 
 portunity, Matt. 26, 16. Luke 22, 6. 
 
 1 Mace. 11, 42. ^El. V. H. 12. 10. Plato 
 Phaedr. p. 272. a. See Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 126. 
 
 yf 
 
 ev/caipos, ou, 6, r), adj. (eu, Kaipos,} well- 
 timed, seasonable, opportune; Mark 6, 21 
 yfvo/jLttnjs ij/Ltepa? evKaipov, comp. v. 19. 
 Heb. 4, 16. 2 Mace. 14, 29. Hdian. 1. 4. 
 7 Kaipbs fvKaipos. Plut. de Lib. educ. 14. 
 p. 22. 
 
 evrcaipws, adv. (evicaipos,) in good tiiM, 
 seasonably, opportunely, Mark 14, 1 1. 2 Tim. 
 4, 2 see in dtcaipas. Ecclus. 18, 22. Pol. 
 1. 42. 6. Xen. Ag. 8. 3. 
 
 ey/co?ro9, ou, 6, fj, adj. (tv, KOITOS,) of 
 easy labour, i. e. easy, facile, 1 Mace. 3, 18. 
 Pol. 18. 1. 2. In N. T. only Neut. of com- 
 
tv\u/3eia 304 
 
 parat. evKOTrwrepov, easier, lighter, Matt. 
 9, 5. 19, 24. Mark 2, 9. 10, 25. Luke 5, 
 23. 16, 17. 18, 25. 
 
 evXoyia 
 
 , as, TJ, (eiXa/3^,) caution, 
 circumspection, Dem. 1403. 1. Plato Rep. 
 539. a; timidity, fear, Wisd. 17, 8. Hdian. 
 5. 2. 5. In N. T. fear of God, reverence, 
 piety ; Heb. 12, 28 fit ^y Xarpev&>/iei> tvape- 
 CTTCOS T< 3e(j> /xera atSovr /cat evXapelas. 5, 
 7 KCU etVaKoua-Self OTTO rf;? fiXa/Se/as, was 
 heard because of his fear of God, his piety ; 
 see in OTTO no. 3. e. So all the Greek com 
 mentators ; others less well, pragn. was 
 heard and delivered FROM his fear, see in 
 UTTO no. 1. b. 3. Philo de Cherub, p. 113 
 ev\. Seou. Pint. Camill. 19, 21 irpbs TO Seioi/ 
 ev\. Diod. Sic. 13. 12 ult. See Tittm. de 
 Synon. N. T. p. 146. 
 
 ey\a/3eo/tiat, O vp.ai, f. ijo-o/u, Pass, de- 
 pon. (ei>Xa/3ijs.) aor. 1 (v\afir)%r)v, Buttm. 
 ^ 113. 4. $ 136. 1, 2; to act with caution, 
 to be circumspect, ~X.cn. Mem. 3. 6. 8. In 
 N. T. to fear, c. p.r], Acts 23, 10 ev\a^f\s 
 6 ^tX. ^17 Stao-Trao-Sfl 6 Hav\os. Sept. for 
 &n? 1 Sam. 18, 29. (1 Mace. 3, 30. Pol. 1. 
 16. 7. Diod. Sic. 4. 73.) Spec, towards 
 God, to fear, to reverence, absol. Heb. 11,7. 
 Sept. for en Zech. 2, 17 [13] ; non Nah. 
 1, 7. See Tittm. de Synon. N. T. p. 146. 
 
 euXa/3^9, eos, our, 6, f], adj. (ev, \ap.j3d- 
 va>, Xa/3eti>.) pr. taking well hold, i. e. care 
 fully, circumspectly, comp. evXajBus -^El. 
 H. An. 3. 13 ; hence, cautious, circumspect. 
 AIT. Epict. 2. 1. 17. Plato Polit. 311. a; 
 timid, fearful, Jos. Ant. 6. 9. 2. Pol. 3. 17. 
 5. In N. T. from the Sept. spoken in refe 
 rence to God, God-fearing, pious, devout, 
 Luke 2, 25. Acts 2, 5. 8, 2. [22, 12.] Sept. 
 for TW Mic. 7, 2. See Tittm. de Synon. 
 N. T. p. 146. 
 
 w, f. 170-0), (e, Xoyos,) impf. 
 , aor. 1 evXoyrjcra, for the diff. augm. 
 see Buttm. 86. 3 ; pr. to s/jea/c well of, to 
 commend, Isocr. 191. b, TOVS dya3our uvSpas 
 fv\oyflt>. Polyb. 1. 14. 4. Plato Minos 320. 
 o ; i. q. ev Xe yco, which is preferred by Thorn. 
 Mag. p. 389, comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 200. 
 In N. T. to bless, e. g. 
 
 1. Of men towards God, to bless, i. e. to 
 praise, to celebrate, with ascriptions of praise 
 nnd thanksgivings ; c. ace. Luke 1, 64 eiJXo- 
 ywv TOV 3eoV. 2, 28. 24, 53. James 3, 9. 
 Sept. and Ttf? 1 Chr. 29, 10. 20. Ps. 16, 7. 
 al. saep. 2 Mace. 3, 30. Jos. Ant. 7. 14. 11. 
 
 2. Of men towards men and things, to 
 bless, i. e. to invoke God s blessing upon, 
 with the idea of praise and thanksgiving. 
 
 a) With ace. of pers. i. q. to pray for orio a 
 welfare ; Matt. 5, 44 etXoyetre TOVS Karapu}- 
 pevovs ifJLas. Mark 10, 16 rftels [ Ino-ovs] 
 ras x^pas fir avra (TO. TraiSt a) yvXoyt i avrd. 
 Luke 2, 34. 6,28. 24, 50. 51. Rom. 12, 
 14 ; absol. Rom. 12, 14. 1 Cor. 4, 12. 
 1 Pet. 3, 9. So Melchisedec Abraham, 
 Heb. 7, 1. 6 ; Pass. v. 7 ; Isaac and Jacob 
 their descendants, 11, 20. 21. Sept. for 
 Tpa Gen. 14, 19. 27, 23. 27. 48, 9. 15. 20. 
 So Jos. B. J. 6. 5. 3 pen. /3) With ace. 
 of thing ; in N. T. only of food, a meal, a 
 cup, to bless, i. e. to ask God s blessing up 
 on, genr. e. g. fyrovs Luke 9, 16; ace. 
 impl. Matt. 14, 19 evXdy^o-f, KOL K\dtras KT\. 
 Mark 6, 4 1 . 8,7. So of the Lord s supper, 
 to bless, to consecrate with prayer and 
 thanksgiving ; Matt. 26, 26. Mark 14, 22. 
 Luke 24, 30. 1 Cor. 10, 16 TO irorfpiov 6 
 fi>\o-yovp.fv. So Sept. and T|^3 of a sacri 
 fice and feast, 1 Sam. 9, 13. For the Jew 
 ish formulas of benediction at the paschal 
 supper, see Lightfoot Hor. Heb. ad Matt. 
 26, 26. 
 
 3. Of God towards men, to bless, i. e. to 
 mark wiih favour, to prosper, to make happy, 
 C. ace. Acts 3, 26 OTrea-TftKev avrov [ Irja-ovv] 
 fvXoyovvra vp.cif. Eph. 1,36 3eor, 6 evXo- 
 yfjcras TJ^US ff 770077 fi!Xoym TrvfVfjtaTiKij. 
 Heb. 6, 14 euXoyow eOXoyijo-co o-e, quoted 
 from Gen. 22, 17 where Sept. for Heb. 
 M^-7^ "H^?! f which this is an imitation ; 
 Winer $ 46. 1 0. Gesen. Lehrg. p. 778. Pass. 
 to be blessed of God, Gal. 3, 8. 9. Sept. 
 genr. for Tfta Gen. 24, 1. 35. Ps. 45, 3. 67, 
 2. 7. Pass. Is. 61, 9. Hence Pass, particip. 
 perf. fv\oyr]fifvos, blessed, favoured, sc. 
 of God, happy ; so in joyful salutations and 
 the like. e. g. of the Messiah and his reign. 
 eiAoy. 6 fpx6[j.fi>os cV oVo/zan Kvpiov, Matt. 
 21, 9. 23, 39. Mark 11, 9. 10. Luke 13, 35. 
 19,38. John 12, 13. So Matt. 25, 34 of 
 tv\oyT]ptvoi TOV TraTpos. Luke 1, 28 fv\o- 
 yr]/j.<=irr] <rv <iv yvvai^iv, i. e. blessed above 
 all women, v. 42 bis, KOI evXoy. 6 Kaptrbs 
 TTJS K. 0-ov. So Sept. and ^^2 Deut. 28, 3. 
 Ruth 3, 10. 1 Sam. 26, 25. -f 
 
 euA,0<y??TO?, O v, 6, fj, adj. (fv\oyea>.) 
 blessed, in N. T. only of God, i. e. worthy 
 of all praise, adorable. Lat. renerandus, 
 Mark 14, 61. Luke 1, 68. Rom. 1, 25. 9, 5^ 
 2 Cor. 1, 3. 11, 31. Eph. 1, 3. 2 Pet. 1, 3. 
 Sept. and TJ113 Gen. 9, 26. Ex. 18, 10. al. 
 So Tob. 8, 5. 15: In Sept. spoken also of 
 men, for r^ia Deut. 33, 24. Ruth 3, 10. 
 
 evXoyia, as, rj, (fv\oy(o>.) eulogy com 
 mendation, Lycurg. 153. 35. Thuc. 2. 42. 
 
 In N. T. 
 
305 
 
 1. good speaking, good icords, i. e. in a 
 bad sense, fair speech, Rom. 16, 18. Genr. 
 Plato Rep. 400. d. 
 
 2. Spec, bkssing, e. g. a) From men 
 towards God, blessing, praise, in ascriptions, 
 implying also thanksgiving; Rev. 7, 12 77 
 ( v\ayia KOI 17 86a . . . T 3f<H T]pS>v. 5, 12. 
 13. Jos. Ant. 11. 4. 2. 
 
 b) From men towards men and things, 
 blessing, benediction, invocation of good from 
 God ; upon persons, Heb. 12, 17. James 3, 
 10 evXoyi a jcai Kardpa. Sept. and ^3^3 
 Gen. 27, 12. 35 sq. So Ecclus. 3, 8. 9. 
 Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 44, 48. Upon things, 1 Cor. 
 10, 16 TO TTOTT]pt.ov (vXoyias o fii\oyov[j.fv, 
 the cup of blessing, i. e. of benediction, con 
 secration, in allusion to the ""97^ c>13 
 drunk at the paschal supper ; comp. Light- 
 foot Hor. Heb. ad Matt. 26, 27. Gr. Harm, 
 p. 214. 
 
 c) Meton. bkssing, i. e. favour conferred, 
 gift, benefit, bounty. a) From God to 
 men ; Rom. 15, 29 eV TrX^pcu^iart i5\oyi ar 
 TOV way. r. Xp. i. e. in the full, abundant, 
 blessings of the gospel. Gal. 3, 14 f/ fv\oyia 
 TOV Afipadfi., the blessing promised of God 
 to Abraham and his seed. Eph. 1, 3. 1 Pet. 
 3, 9. Sept. and Ma^a Gen. 49, 25. Is. 65, 
 8. (Act. Thorn. 526.) So Heb. 6, 7 17 -fy 
 fjLfraXap.^dvfi. evXoyias dirb TOV 3eov. Comp. 
 PI3~3 "^CS, Sept. verbs tvXoyias, Ez. 34, 
 26 . ) From men to men, a gift, bounty, 
 present ; 2 Cor. 9, 5 TTJV irpox. evXoytav 
 vp.S>v, i. e. your gift, contribution. Sept. 
 and n=n3 Gen. 33, 11. 1 Sam. 25, 27. 
 Hence i. q. bounty, liberality ; 2 Cor. 9, 5 
 is fiiKayiav, KCL\ p.f) uis 7r\fov(iav. V. 6 bis, 
 eir fiiXnylais fir fv\oyiais as adv. liberally, 
 bountifully ; comp. in n II. 3. i. 
 
 ev/Aera8oT09, ou, 6, TJ, adj. (tv, p.trao i- 
 S&yu.) ready to impart, i. e. liberal, bounti 
 ful, 1 Tim. 6, 18. M. Antonin. 1. 14 TO 
 tvp-frddorov Kcii fviroirjTiKov. ib. 6. 48. * 
 
 Evvi/cr/, TJ, Eunice, pr. n. of the mother 
 of Timothy, 2 Tim. 1, 5. 
 
 eufoeft), f. 770*0), (f vvoos, your,) to be well- 
 minded, well-disposed, c. dat. Matt. 5, 25 
 ur2t fvvoaiv TO> uiriSiKw o~ov Ta%v, i. 6. be 
 reconciled. Hdian. 8. 8. 11. Xen. Cyr. 8. 
 2. 1. 
 
 evvoia, as, 77, (fvVoeV) good will, a will 
 ing mind ; Eph. 6, 7 per fvvoias 8ov\evov 
 Tts. By euphemism for conjugal duty, 
 1 Cor. 7, 3 Rec. 1 Mace. 11, 33. 53. Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 54. Plato Legg. 642. b. 
 
 evvov%io)i f. tVco, (tvvovxos,) to eunuch, 
 to make a eunuch ; Pass, to b? made a eu- 
 20 
 
 nuch, pr. Matt. 19, 12. So Jos. Ant. 10. 2. 
 2. Luc. Cronosol. 12. Trop. evi/ou^i ^ti/ 
 tavrov, to make oneself a eunuch, i. e. to live 
 like a eunuch in voluntary abstinence, Matt 
 19, 12. 
 
 ou, , fvvr}, x w P r - e- 
 keeper, keeper of the bed-chamber ; hence 
 a eunuch, one who has been emasculated, 
 such persons only being employed as the 
 keepers of oriental harems ; so Matt. 1 9, 1 2 
 tvvovxoi oiTives evv. vnb ru>v dv%p. Acts 8, 
 27. 34. 36. 38. 39. Sept. for O n ")0 Is. 56, 
 3. 4. Esth. 2, 14. 15. So Luc. Eun. 6, 9. 
 Hdot. 8. 105. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 60. Trop. 
 Matt. 19, 12 bis, of those impotent from 
 birth, and also of those who live like eu 
 nuchs in voluntary abstinence. So Clem. 
 Alex. Paed. 3. 4 evvov^os aXv^s, oi>% 6 ^ 
 8vvdp.fvos, dXX 6 pr) @ov\6[j.fvos (pikr/delv. 
 Id. Strom. 3. 1. 
 
 NOTE. As eunuchs in oriental courts oft 
 en rose to stations of power and trust, some 
 have supposed that the word evvovxos was 
 sometimes applied to a high officer of court, 
 though not emasculated ; hence they render 
 it in Acts 1. c. a court-officer, minister. But 
 passages like Gen. 37, 36. 39, 1, determine 
 nothing ; for many eunuchs are not wholly 
 impotent, and sometimes live in matrimony ; 
 Ter. Eun. 4. 3. 24. Juv. Sat. 6. 366 sq. 
 See Gesen. Heb. Lex. art. O^O. Thesaur. 
 p. 973. Yet this opinion as to Potiphar is 
 of early date ; comp. Test. XII Patr. p. 716 
 
 i>xos Trapa r<a <ap 
 KOI TraXXaKas Koi Ttan, 
 
 Evo8ia, as, f], Eitodia, pr. name of a 
 female Christian, Phil. 4, 2. 
 
 euoooft), w, f. wo-6), (fvoftos ; tv, oSo s,) 
 to put or lead in a good way, to help one on 
 his way, pr. Sept. for rin: Gen. 24, 27. 48. 
 Theophr. de Caus. Plant. 5. 6. 7, 8. Trop. 
 (o make prosper, to give success to, Sept. for 
 rpbsn Gen. 24, 21. 40. Neh. 2, 20. In 
 N. T. only Pass. trop. to be prospered, to 
 prosper ; 1 Cor. 16,2 Sija-avpifav, o,ri tvo- 
 ScoTat. 3 John 2 bis. Rom. 1, 10 if I shall 
 be prospered, permitted, to come unto you. 
 Sept. for rrbsn i Chr. 22, 13. So Test. 
 XII Patr. p. 864. Hdot. 6. "73 ; comp. 
 Wetst. N. T. in Rom. 1. c. 
 
 ov. 6, 17, adj. (eu, irdpedpos,) 
 pr. sitting diligently by, .i. e. assiduous ; 
 hence Neut. TO fvirdpf8pov, assiduousness, 
 devotedness ; c. dat. only 1 Cor. 7, 35 irpbs 
 TO fvmipfO pov TO) Kvpia>. Rec. has tvirpocrt- 
 8pov q. v. Hesych. et Suid. 
 KoXws irapapevov (cat 
 
306 
 
 VpL(7KCi) 
 
 ?;?, eos, ovs, 6, f], adj. (ev, 
 p.ai,) east/?/ persuaded, yielding, James 3, 
 17. Plut. Solon 12 pen. Plato Epin. 989. b. 
 ev7repi<TTaTO<>, O u, 6, 17, adj. (tv, Trept- 
 larap-cu.) pr. standing well around, i. e. 
 easily besetting, once einrtp. d/xaprta, Heb. 
 12, 1. So Chrysost. rijj ewcdXco? Trepiicrra- 
 pei/Tji/ )7/*as. Comp. Eisner Obss. Sac. in loc. 
 Bleek Br. an d. Heb. in loc. 
 
 evTroua, as, 17, (evTroieca,) well-doing, 
 i. e. a doing good, beneficence, Heb. 13, 16. 
 Jos. Ant. 19. 9. 1. Arr. Alex. M. 7. 28. 8. 
 Luc. Abdic. 25. This word is questioned by 
 Pollux. 5. 140 ; comp. Lob. ad Phr. p. 353. 
 
 evTropeWj , f. TJCTCO, (eviropos ,) to hate a 
 good journey or voyage, Thuc. 6. 44 ; trop. 
 to prosper, to thrive, Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 4. 
 In N. T. Pass, to be prospered, to prosper, 
 absol. Acts 11, 29 /caSooy rjinropeirn TIS, as 
 any one was prospered, according to his abili 
 ty ; for the augm. see Buttm. 86. 3. Sept. 
 for ytyFl Lev. 25, 26, 49. So Luc. Bis ace- 
 27. Pol. 1. 66. 5. 
 
 evTropia, as, i], (euTTopew,) prosperity, 
 success, genr. Xen. An. 7. 6. 37, comp. 38. 
 In N. T. abundance, wealth, Acts 19, 25. 
 So Diod. Sic. 1. 45, 55. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 7. 
 
 eirrrpeTretG., as, f], (ei/TrpeTnjs, TrptVm,) 
 gracefulness, grace, beauty, James 1 , 11.. 
 Sept. for "1^ Lam. 1, 7. Dem. 1404. 21. 
 Thuc. 6. 31. 
 
 ei/7rp6crSe/CT09, ov, 6, fj, adj. (ev, -rrpoo-- 
 Se^o/iat,) iL-ell-received, acceptable, approved, 
 c. dat Rom. 15, 31. 1 Pet. 2, 5; absol. 
 Rom. 15, 16. 2 Cor. 8, 12. So Plut. Praec. 
 Reip. ger. 4 fin. Spec, accepted, favourable, 
 as Kaipos ev?rp. 2 Cor. 6, 2, i. e. a time of 
 favour, from Is. 49, 8 where Heb. "p S? PiS, 
 Sept. Kaipos 8eKTos. 
 
 ev7rp6(re8po$, ov, 6, rj, adj. (ev, irpoa-f- 
 fipor.) pr. i. q. evirdpeftpos, assiduous ; hence 
 Neut. ro fuirpoa-eo pov, assiduousness, devo- 
 tedness, c. dat. 1 Cor. 7, 35 Rec. See in 
 fV7rdpt8pos. 
 
 ev7rpocro)7reu>, c5, f. TJO-CO, to look we ll, to 
 make a fair show, absol. Gal. 6, 12. Not 
 found elsewhere. Derived from evTrpocrco- 
 TTOS of fak countenance, beautiful, Sept. 
 Gen. 12, 11. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 10; spe 
 cious, Hdot. 7. 168. Dem. 277. 4. 
 
 Evpa/cv\(t)V, twos, Vulg. Euroaquilo, 
 the E. N. E. wind, Acts 27, 14 Lachrn. for 
 Rec. EvpoK\v8u>v where see. 
 
 evpiaKCi), f. evpfja-a), (root evp,) perf. ev- 
 prjKa, aor. 2 tvoov , Pass. aor. 1 tvp&iqv. 
 Unusu.V. and later forms are : aor. 1 
 
 <ra Rev. 18, 14. Msop. Fab. 131, comp, 
 Winer } 15. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 721 ; Mid. 
 aor. 1. evpdp.r)v Heb. 9,12. Andocid. 9. 7. 
 Pausan. 7. 11. 1, comp. Buttm. $ 96. n. 1 
 marg. Winer $ 13. 1. a. Lob. ib. p. 139. It 
 takes no augment in N. T. and rarely else 
 where, Buttm. ^ 84. 5. Winer 12. 3. Lob. 
 ib. p. 140. To find, with or without seeking, 
 
 1 . Genr. and without seeking, to find, to 
 meet with, to light upon. a) Pr. and c. 
 ace. of pers. Matt. 18, 28 evpev eva TUV vvv- 
 Sov\uv. John 1, 42. 44. 46. 2, 14. Acts 9, 
 33. 28, 14. al. Pass. Heb. 11,5. With ace. 
 of thing, Matt. 13, 44. Luke 4, 17. 18, 8. 
 John 12, 14. Acts 21, 2. Rom. 7, 18. Sept. 
 for X^o of pers. 1 Sam. 10, 2. 3 ; of thing 
 Gen. 44, 8. So Hdian. 3. 2. 7. Plato Legg. 
 754. b ; of thing, Hdian. 3. 8. 12. Xen. An. 4. 
 4. 13. b) Trop. to find, i. e. to perceive, to 
 learn by experience, sc. that a person or 
 thing is or does so and so ; the accusative 
 usually having with it a participle or adjec 
 tive, e. g. a) With accus. and particip. 
 comp. Buttm. 144. 6. b. Matt. 12, 44. 
 Mark 7, 30 evpe TO 8aifj,ui>iov e ^eX^XiOo? 
 Luke 8, 35. 24, 2. John 11, 17. Acts 9, 2 
 2 John 4 ; in Pass, construction, Matt. 1 
 18 (vp&ij tv yaarpl e^ovcra. Luke 17, 18 
 So Hdian. 8. 5. 2. Plut. Lucull. 13. Xen 
 Cyr. 2. 2. 14. /3) With ace. and adj. or 
 a like adjunct; Acts 5, 10 01 i/eaj/tV/coi ev 
 pov avTr]v vfKpdv. 24, 5. 2 Cor. 9, 4. Rev 
 2, 2 ; in Pass, construction, Luke 9, 36 ev 
 pe 37 novas- Acts 5, 39. Rom. 7, 10. 1 Cor 
 4, 2. 2 Cor. 5, 3. 1 Pet. 1, 7. Rev. 5, 4. al. 
 So Hdian. 2. 1. 8 ovBtva ovrats tTrirrjo fiov 
 evpurKov. Xen. Hell. 7. 4. 2. 
 
 2. to find, by search or inquiry, to find 
 out, to discover. a) Pr. and absol. Matt. 
 7, 7 f^reZre KOI fvprjcrtTe. v. 8. (Arr. Epict. 
 4. 1. 51 r)Tfi KOL evprjo-fis.) With ace. ot 
 pers. expr. or impl. Mark 1, 37 Karf8i coai> 
 avrov, KOI evpovrfs avrov. John 7, 34. 35. 
 Acts 5, 22 ; ace. impl. Luke 2, 45. 2 Tim. 
 1, 17 ; Pass. Acts 8, 40. With ace. of thing, 
 Matt. 7, 14 oXtyoi flo-\v ol evplo-Kovres avrrjv 
 sc. rriv TTV\T]V. 12, 43. 13, 46. Mark 11,13. 
 Luke 15, 4. Joh n lO, 9. Acts 7, 11. al. So 
 of a judge, after examination, John 18, 38 
 tya> ov8ep.iav alrlav fvpia-Ko) eV awrw. 19, 4. 
 6. Acts 13, 28. 23, 9. al. Sept. and xsa 
 of pers. Josh. 2. 22. 1 Sam. 9, 13 ; of things, 
 1 Sam. 9, 4. 2 K. 12, 10. 18. So Luc. Asin. 
 45. Xen. Mem. 3. 11. 8; of things, Luc. 
 Tim. 24. Xen. Hell. 5. 3. 23. b) Trop. 
 in different senses; a) tvpio-Keiv 2e- 
 di , to find God, i. e. to find him propitious, 
 to find access to him, comp. in e /f^rew no. 3. 
 Acts 17, 27 rjTflv TOV 3edi/, (I apaye 
 
307 
 
 <al tvpoifv. Pass. Rom. 10, 20, quoted 
 from Is. 65, 1 where Sept. and NSE3 5 as 
 also 1 Chr. 28, 9. /3) Spoken of compu 
 tation, measurement, to find, to make out, 
 Acts 19, 19 evpov upyvpwv p.vptd8as irttre. 
 27, 28 bi?, tvpov opyvias eiKocri KT\. So 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 18. Hell. 3. 2. 10. y) to 
 Jind out by thinking, to invent, to contrive; 
 so before an indirect clause with TO, Luke 
 19, 48 OVK (vpiaKov TO, TI Troiria-oHTiv. Acts 
 
 4, 21 ; without TO, Luke 5, 19 p.r) eupoi/rey 
 Troias flcrfVfyKoxriv avrov. So Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 637 tvpov, rl ("ira>fj.fv. Palaeph. 
 16. 2, c. ace. et dat. 
 
 3. Mid. and also Act. to find for one 
 self, i. e. to get, to acquire, to obtain; so 
 once Mid. c. ace. Heb. 9, 12 alvviav \v- 
 rpciMTiv (vpdp.fvos. So Jos. Ant. 1. 19. 1 
 [2] 86gav apfrrjs (vpapfvos. Arr. Alex. M. 
 1.7. 16. Xen. An. 7. 1. 31. So in the Act. 
 in N. T. but less often in classic writers, 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 140 ; to find, i. e. to ac 
 quire, to obtain, to get, for oneself or an 
 other; c. ace. Matt. 10, 39 6 eupwi/ T^V 
 KT\. Luke 9, 12 KOI evpaxriv eVicrt- 
 ov. John 21, 6. Rom. 4, 1. Heb. 12, 17. 
 Rev. 9, 6. 18, 14; c. ace. et dat. Matt. 11, 
 29 tvpf](rfTe ava.Tra.va- w rals ^u^aiy v/xcoi>. 
 Acts 7, 46 fvptlv crKT)t>(ofj,a TW 3f<, comp. 
 Sept. and b XSTD Ps. 132,5. So Luc. Asin. 
 35. Xen. Mem. ^2. 1. 24; ace. et dat. Plato 
 Prot. 321. d. By Hebr. in the phrase ei- 
 pia-Kfiv xdpiv irapa TO> 3e<a, to find grace, 
 to obtain favour, with God, Luke 1, 30 ; Va>- 
 TTIOJ/ TOV 3eot) Acts 17, 46; absol. Heb. 4, 
 16. So tvptiv tXfos napa xvpiov, 2 Tim. 
 
 1, 18. Sept. and - ( n XSE Gen. 6, 28. 32, 
 
 5. 47, 25. + 
 
 EvpOK\voa>v, wj/or, 6, Euroclydon, a 
 tempestuous wind, Acts 27, 14 ; from Eupo?, 
 Evrus, the east-wind, and K\v8a>v a wave ; 
 see Wetst. in loc. Comp. Heb. C^p , Sept. 
 7rvfvp.a ftiaiov, Ps. 48, 8. Heb. Lex. art. 
 n^p . Other Mss. read EvpvK\v8<ov, Eu- 
 ryclydrm, from evpvs broad, and K\v8a>v. 
 But Cod. Alex, and Vulg. have Evpa<v- 
 \u>s>, Euroaquilo. ^ ci^.B v 
 
 f, ov, 6, fj, adj. (evpvs, x&pos , 
 pr. well-spaced, i. e. broad, spa 
 cious, as 17 686s, Matt. 7, 13. Sept. for 3H"i3 
 Is. 30, 23. 1 Esdr. 9, 41. Jos. Ant. 1. 18. 
 
 2. Pint, de Exil. 10 mid. 
 
 eucre/3eta, as, 17, (eva-f^s,) piety, reve 
 rence, in N. T. only as directed towards 
 God ; denoting the spontaneous feeling of 
 the heart, and thus differing from eiXd/foa, 
 see Tittm. de Synon. N. T. p. 146 ; hence, 
 
 godliness, religiousness, Acts 3, 12. 1 Tim 
 2, 2. 4, 7. 8. 6, 3. 5. 6. 11. 2 Tim. 3, 5 
 Tit. 1, 1. 2 Pet. 1, 3. 6. 7. 3, 11. Sept. for 
 rrirn nin^ Prov. 1, 7. Is. 11, 2. So Jos. 
 Ant/S. 2/3. Diod. Sic. 19. 7. Plato Rep. 
 615. c. Metpn. godliness, religion, the gos 
 pel scheme, 1 Tim. 3, 16. Comp. Jos. c. 
 Apion. 1. 12 T) Kara TOVS vop.ovs 7rapa8f8o- 
 fj-fyrj (vvtfteui. 
 
 evcre/Bea), i, f. ^o-w, (fio-e^?,) to l>e 
 pious towards any one, c. accus. Matth. 
 ^ 41 3. 11 ; e. g. towards God, to reverence, 
 to worship, Acts 17, 23 ; towards parents. 
 to respect, to honour, TOV 18iov OIKOV, 1 Tim. 
 5, 4. Jos. Ant. 10. 3. 2 TOV 3eoV. Isocr. 26. 
 b, Ta wept T. Seouj. Genr. Xen. Hell. 1. 
 7. 26. 
 
 e or, oi}?, 6, 17, adj. (ey, o-/3o- 
 /iat,) pious, reverent, Plato Phil. 39. c. In 
 N. T. only towards God, religious, devout, 
 Acts 10, "2. 7. 22, 12. 2 Pet. 2, 9. Sept. 
 for p-ns Is. 24, 16. 26,7. So Pint. Consol. 
 ad Apoll. 34 fin. 35. Xen. Mem. 4. 8. 11. 
 
 evcreftoy;, adv. piously, religiously, god 
 ly, 2 Tim. 3, 12. Tit. 2, 12. Jos. Ant. 8. 
 
 12, 3. Dem. 1460. 9. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 13. 
 
 6UCT77/A09, ov, 6, /, adj. (*v, tnj/ia,) of 
 good sign or omen, favourable, Plut. J. Caes. 
 43. Soph. Antig. 1021. In N. T. easy to 
 be seen or known ; trop. of speech, easy to 
 be understood, distinct, significant, 1 Cor. 
 14, 9. So Plut. Symp. 8. 3. 1. Pol. 10. 44. 
 3. Porphyr. de Abstin. 3. 4. 
 
 ei/o-TrXay^z/oy, O v, 6, 17, adj. (eS, a-rrXdy- 
 Xvov,) tender-hearted, full of pity, compas 
 sionate, Eph. 4, 32. 1 Pet. 3, 8. Prayer of 
 Manass. 6. Test. XII Patr. p. 537. 
 
 evcr^rjfjiovco^ adv. (eio-^^/itoj ,) becom 
 ingly, decorously, in a proper manner, Rom. 
 
 13, 13 (vo-xnp Ovas TrfptTrar^o-co/iez . 1 Cor. 
 
 14, 40. 1 Thess. 4, 12. Plut. Symp. 9. 
 14. 7. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3.8,9. 
 
 eva-x^fioa-vvTj, Vf , ,7, (fva-x^av,) be- 
 comingness, decorum, decorous and comelv 
 appearance, e. g. of dress, 1 Cor. 12, 23. 
 Diod. Sic. 5. 32. Xen. Cyr. 5. 1.5. 
 
 eua-^ijfiwv, ovos, 6, fj, adj. (, o^fta.) 
 
 1 . icell-fashioned, well-formed, comely ; 
 1 Cor. 12, 24 Ta dcrx^p-ova j]p.u>v sc. p.e\rj. 
 (Plut. Parall. 30. Xen. Eq. 1. 17.) Neut. 
 TO fvax^p-ov, decorum, propriety, 1 Cor. 7, 
 35. So Arr. Epict. 4. 1. 63. Luc. de Sal- 
 tat. 83. 
 
 2. Trop. in the later Greek, of good stand 
 ing, honourable, noble; Mark 15,43 fvo-^ij- 
 nav [3ov\fiiTr)s. Acts 15, 30. 17, 12. Jos. 
 
UTOV(i)<> 
 
 308 
 
 to Vita s. } 9. Pint. Parall. 15. Comp. Phryn. 
 et Lob. p. 333. 
 
 eurovcos, adv. (tvTovos , TeiVw,) intensely, 
 i. e. powerfully, vehemently, Luke 23, 10. 
 Acts 18, 28. Sept. Josh. 6, 8. Diod. Sic. 
 11. 65. Xen. Hi. 9. 6. 
 
 ewrpa7Te\ia : as, TJ, (evrpdneXos, TpeVw,) 
 courtesy, urbanity, Jos. Ant. 12. 4. 3. Cic. 
 Ep. ad Div. 7. 32 ; humour, wit, Plut. M. 
 Anton. 43. Diod. Sic. 15. 6. In N. T. in 
 a bad sense, levity, jesting, frivolous and 
 indecent discourse. Eph. 5, 4. So Aristot. 
 Ethic. 1. 31. Diod. Sic. 20. 63 rr,v ev TO IS 
 TroYotf flrpanekiav. Comp. Plato Rep. 563. a. 
 
 EVTV%O$, ov, 6, Eutychus, pr. n. of a 
 youth, Acts 20, 9. 
 
 V<j)rnJ,ia, as, fj, (e&p^p-oy,) icords of 
 good import or omen, Jos. 10. 11. 7. Plut. 
 de cohib. Ira 16 fin. applause, acclamation, 
 Hdian. 1. 13. 13. In N. T. good report, 
 good fame, 2 Cor. 6, 8. So Diod. Sic. 1. 2. 
 .El. V. H. 3. 47. 
 
 V<pr)/J,of, ov, 6, f], adj. (ev, ^/J-TJ, <;/,) 
 pr. well-spoken ; hence, of good import, 
 auspicious, Soph. Elect. 630 ; fv<j)fip.ois ouu- 
 viols Dion. Hal. Ant. 1. 16 ; laudatory, e. g. 
 Xo yovy Pol. 31. 14. 4. In N. T. of good re 
 port, praiseworthy, Phil. 4, 8. So Anthol. 
 Gr. IV. p. 183 mVxpa" V etxpij/xois Soai> 
 
 e(i)) w, f. 7}crw, (fv<popos, (pepoo,) 
 lo bear or bring forth well, to yield abun 
 dantly, intrans. e. g. of the earth, Luke 12, 
 16. Jos. B. J. 2. 21. 2 ovoys fie rfjy ToXi- 
 \aias e Xcucpdpov, /laXiora Kal Tore fv(popn- 
 Kvias. So ev(f)opos fertile, Hdian. 1. 6. 3. 
 
 6V(j)pCtLV(i), f. avco, (ev(f)pa)v, <j)pi)J>,} to 
 make well-minded, i. e. to make glad, to cause 
 to rejoice ; Mid. and Pass. aor. 1 in Mid. sig- 
 nif. to be glad, to rejoice, Buttm. $ 136. 1, 2. 
 
 1. Genr. in Act. once, 2 Cor. 2. 2 Kal 
 T LS fffTiv 6 fv(ppaivu>v pe ; Sept. for nfi i) 
 Ps. 19, 9. So Luc. Somn. 1. Xen. Cyr. 8. 
 7. 12. Mid. absol. Luke 15, 32 fvfbpavZrj- 
 
 vai fie /cat x a P^ vai $ Acts 2 26< ^ om - 
 15,10. Rev. 11,10. 12,12. Gal. 4, 27, comp. 
 Is. 54, 1 . With ev nvi Acts 7, 41 ; eVt TIVI, to 
 rejoice over, Rev. 1 8, 20. Sept. for "^ Deut. 
 32,43 ; nato 1 Chr. 16, 10. 31 ; c. e /l Sam. 
 2, 1. So absol. JEA. V. H. 2. 21. Xen. (Ec. 
 9. 12; c. eV ib. Hi. 1. 16; c. ri TIVL ib. 
 Conv. 7. 5. 
 
 2. As connected with feasting, Mid. lo 
 rejoice, to be merry ; Luke 12, 19 (pdye, 
 B-ie, eixbpaivov. 15,23.24. 29. 16, 19. Sept. 
 for rrato Deut. 14, 26. 27, 7. Horn. Od. 
 2. 311/jEl. V.H. 10. 9. Xen. Conv. 1. 15. 
 
 ov, 6, Euphrates, Heb. trit? 
 Gen. 2, 14, a large and celebrated river ot 
 western Asia, rising in the mountains of 
 Armenia ; it flows through Syria and Me 
 sopotamia, and after uniting with the Tigris 
 below Babylon, falls into the Persian gulf. 
 Its course before entering Syria was firsx 
 fully explored in 1838. Rev. 9, 14. 16, 12. 
 See Ritter s Erdkunde, Th. X. $ 37-40. 
 XI. $5 53, 56. 
 
 V<j>pO(TVV7], T)S, i), (ei) $p&>j>,) gladness, 
 joy, Acts 2, 28. 14, 17. Sept. for finafc 
 Ps. 4, 8. Plut. Cato Maj. 14 fin. Xen 
 Cyr. 3. 3. 7. 
 
 ev^apia-rea), , f. ^o-<a, (evxdpta-Tos,) 
 aor. 1 eii^apior^o-a and Tyv^api crnjfra Rom. 
 1, 21 in later edit. Buttm. 86. 3 ; pr. i. q. 
 dovvat x**p lt> > to grutifyt to please, to do some 
 thing to please another, Dem. 257. 2. Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 18. In later Greek and in N. 
 T. i. q. tldevai xup tv i t S^ ve thanks, to 
 thank ; see Lob. 1. c. 
 
 1. Genr. and c. dat. of pers. Luke 17, 16 
 ei/xapicrTfav avrw ("l^crou). Rom. 16, 4 ols 
 OVK e ya) p.6vos ev^aptcrrco, aAAa KT\. Jos. 
 Ant. 14. 10. 7. Artemidor. 3. 14. Plut. 
 de Garrul. 7 pen. Pol. 18. 26. 4. 
 
 2. Elsewhere only in respect to God, to 
 give thanks to God, to thank God, e. g. a) 
 Genr. and c. dat. T<U 3e<5 or the like ; Acts 
 28, 15 ovs I8u>v 6 IlavXos eii^aptor^tray TO> 
 Sew eXa/3e 3ap(roy. 1 Cor. 14, 18. Col. 1,12. 
 Philem. 4. Rev. 11, 17. So with adjuncts 
 expressing manner or cause, e. g. 8 id c. 
 gen. Rom. 7, 25 eu^aptoroi TW Sew Sia 
 ir/o-oC Xp. 1, 8. Col. 3, 17; eVt c. dat. 
 Phil. 1, 3; Trept c. gen. 1 Cor. 1, 4. Col. 
 
 I, 3. 1 Thess. 1, 2. 2 Thess. 1,3. 2, 13 ; 
 vTre p c. gen. Rom. 1, 8. Eph. 5, 20, and 
 so with TW Sew impl. Eph. 1, 16. 1 Thess. 
 5, 18; OTI, Luke 18, 11. John 11, 41. 
 1 Cor. 1, 14. 1 Thess. 2, 13. Pass, of a 
 thing, to be thanked for, to have thanks ren 
 dered for it to God ; 2 Cor. 1,11 tva e /c 
 TroXXcov Trpoo coTrcoj TO els f]fJ.as ^apio~/xa Sta 
 TroXXaw et ^apicm/S^ v?rep fjpcov, that tne gift 
 upon us from (the prayers of; many per 
 sons may be thanked for by many on out 
 behalf. So genr. c. TW 3e<a Judith 8, 25. 
 Arr. Epict. 1. 4.. 32. Diod . Sic, 16. II. 
 b) Spec, of giving thanks before taking 
 food or drink, comp. Deut. 8, 10 ; so c. T<U 
 Sew, Rom. 14, 6 bis. Acts 27, 35 ; absol. 
 Matt. 15, 36. 26, 27. Mark 8, 6. 14, 23. 
 Luke 22, 17. 19. John 6, 11. 23. 1 Cor. 
 
 II, 24; c. i-Tre p TIVOS 1 Cor. 10, 30. c) 
 As an act of worship ; to render llianksgiv- 
 ing and praise to God ; absol. Rom. 1, 21 
 
ev^aptcrrta 
 
 1 Cor. 14, 17 cru p.tv yap xaXms fi ^a 
 parall. with (vhoyrja-ys v. 16. 
 
 ev%apt(TTia, as. 17, (tiixapio-roy,) 1 . gra- 
 litude, thankfulness, Acts 24, 3. Philo de 
 Plant. Noe p. 231. d. Dem. 256. 19. Pol. 
 8. 14. 8. 
 
 2. In Paul s writings and the Apocalypse, 
 thanksgiving, thanks, i. e. the expression 
 of gratitude to God ; c. dat. T 3eo> or the 
 like, comp. in evxapioreo), and Matth. $ 390 ; 
 so 2 Cor. 9, 11. 12. Rev. 4, 9. 7, 12 ; ab- 
 sol. 1 Cor. 14, 16. 2 Cor. 4, 15. Eph. 5, 4. 
 Phil. 4, 6. Col. 2, 7. 4, 2. 1 Thess. 3, 9. 
 1 Tim. 2, 1. 4, 3. 4. Aquil. for rryin Am. 
 4, 5. Wisd. 16, 28 ; genr. Jos. T Ant. 4. 
 8. 25. 
 
 ev%apicrTO$, ov, 6, 17, adj. (eS, x^P ls 
 Xcpifo/iai,) grateful, i. e. graceful, pleasing, 
 externally, Sept. yvvrj (1%. for "|H niSJt 
 Prov. 11, 16. Luc. Asin. 28; trop. W^ 
 Xen. (Ec. 5. 10 ; Xdyoi ib. Cyr. 2. 2. 1. 
 In N. T. grateful, thankful, full of gratitude 
 to God, Col. 3, 15. So Jos. Ant. 16. 6. 2. 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 49. 
 
 V%r], fj S , fj, (ffyo/jat,) 1. prayer to 
 God, James 5, 15 ; comp. v. 16. Sept. for 
 nisn Prov. 15, 8. 29. Horn. Od. 10. 526. 
 Paleeph. 53. 1. Xen. Conv. 8. 15. 
 
 2. a vow, e. g. of the Nazarite, Acts 21, 
 23 ; see Num. c. 6. Sept. for -ns Num. 
 6, 2. 21. (Genr. Diod. Sic. 1. 83. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 2. 10.) In the case of indigent 
 Nazarites, it was customary for others to be 
 at the expense of the sacrifice by which 
 their vow was terminated, who thus be 
 came partners in their vow ; see the pas 
 sages from the Rabbins cited by Wetstein on 
 v. 24 ; also Jos. Ant. 19. 6. 1. Lightf. Hor. 
 Heb. ad Luc. 1, 24. Acts 18, 18 /cetpd/ie- 
 vos "HIV Kf(pa\fiv tv Key^peaiy, fix* yap 
 tvxf\v, prob. a xolum chile, usual among 
 the Jews as well as the gentiles, by which 
 persons in distress or danger or any neces 
 sity, vowed in case of deliverance to cut off 
 their hair and offer sacrifices in honour of 
 God; see Artemidor. 1. 23. Luc. de Merc, 
 cond. 1. Id. Hermotim. 86. Diod. Sic. 1. 18; 
 comp. Wetstein in loc. Some, supposing 
 such a vow to be inconsistent with Paul s 
 views, refer ic.fipap.tvos to AKV\US, but a- 
 gainst the natural construction. Others 
 suppose the vow of a Nazarite to be meant ; 
 but this, although it might be entered upon 
 in a foreign land, could only be perfected 
 and terminated by cutting off the hair and 
 an offering in the temple at Jerusalem ; see 
 Num. 6, 18. Jos. B. J. 2. 15. 1. Mishna. 
 
 309 
 
 Nasir 3. 6. ib. 7. 2. Edvioth 4. 11. Reland 
 Antt. Sac. 2. 10. 5. Wetst. in loc. Winer 
 Realw. art. Nasiraer. 
 
 f. O/LMU, Mid. depon. impf. 
 et TjvxdfiTjv, Buttm. J 84. 5 ; to 
 pray to God, Xen. An. 4. 3. 13 ; to vow sc. 
 in prayer, Xen. An. 4. 8. 25 ; to boast, Pol. 
 5. 43. 1. In N. T. only to pray, e. g. 
 
 1. Pr. to God, c. dat. ro 3fo>, Acts 26, 
 29, see in av III. 1 ; with Trpos TUV 3eov 
 
 2 Cor. 13, 7 ; with vrrtp TWOS James 5, 16. 
 Sept. for bifDnn Num. 11, 2. 21, 8. So 
 c. dat. Dem." 225. 1. Xen. An. 4. 3. 13; 
 Trpos TOI/S %(ovs Xen. Mem. 1 . 3. 2. 
 
 2. Spec, with ace. and infin. to pray for, 
 i. q. to wish for, to desire earnestly, to long 
 for ; Acts 27, 29 rjvxovro rjp.tpav ytvecr^ai. 
 
 3 John 2. Rom. 9, 3 rjvxop-rjv yap avros eyo> 
 dvc&(p.a tlvai, I was wishing, for / could 
 wish, comp. (povXop-Tjv Acts 25, 22. With 
 ace. TOVTO, 2 Cor. 13, 9. Sept. for ^SH 
 Jer. 42, 22. ^Eschin. Dial. 3. 6. Lysias 
 708. ult. Xen. Conv. 4. 33. 
 
 evxpTjcrros, ov, 6, 17, adj. (ev, xpa/im,) 
 easy to be used, useful, profitable, 2 Tim. 2, 
 21. 4, 11. Philem. 11. Sept. Prov. 11, 16. 
 Diod. Sic. 5. 40. Xen. Mem. 3. 8. 5. 
 
 ), &j, f. JJCTW, (fin 
 to be of good mind, courage, comfort, absol. 
 Phil. 2, 19. Anth. Gr. IV. p. 275. So ev- 
 tyvxia good spirits, courage, Dem. 1408. 15. 
 Plut. M. Crass. 25. 
 
 eytoia, as, f/, (evwSr/r, o&>, perf. o 
 good odour, sweet smell, fragrance, pr. Ec- 
 clus. 24, 15. Xen. Conv. 2. 3. In N. T. 
 trop. of persons or things well-pleasing to 
 God, 2 Cor. 2, 15. Eph. 5, 2. Phil. 4, 18. 
 Comp. Sept. and rll n^S rpn Lev. 1,9. 13. 
 17. Num. 28, 13; also Test. XII Patr. 
 p. 547. 
 
 evcavvfAOS, ov, 6, 17, adj. (eu, wop.a, ) pr. 
 of good name, honoured, Hes. Theog. 409 . 
 Pind. Ol. 2. 13; spec, of good omen, lucky, 
 Plato Polit. 302. d. Hence used by way 
 of euphemism instead of apiorepd?, the left, 
 which was a word of ill omen, since all 
 omens on the left were sinister or regarded 
 as unfortunate by the Greeks, and in part 
 by the Romans ; see Potter s Gr. Ant. I. 
 p. 323. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 301. In N. 
 T. the left, spoken chiefly of the left hand. 
 in opp. to the right, Matt. 20, 21. 23. 25, 
 33. 41. 27, 38. Mark 10, 37. 40. 15, 27 ; 
 of the left foot, Rev. 10, 2. Adv. Acts 21, 
 3 /urrnXtrroiTf? avrr]v evaiwpov, i. e. on the 
 left hand. Sept. for Vx72lU Josh. 23, 6 
 Neh. 8, 6. Pol. 5. 7. 11. Xen. Yen. 10. 12. 
 
310 
 
 f. aXov/zat, Mid. depon. 
 (em, aAAo/iai,) to leap or spring upon, to 
 assault, with eVi c. ace. Acts 19, 16. Sept. 
 for r&S 1 Sam. 10, 6. 16, 13. Horn. II. 
 11. 421 T ; so to leap upon a horse, c. dat. 
 Plut. conjug. Prsec. 8 ; upon a threshold, 
 c. e m TI Plato Ion 535. b. 
 
 e^dira^, adv. (on, <wra,) once for all, 
 Rom. 6, 10. Heb. 7, 27. 9, 12. 10, 10. So 
 1 Cor. 15, 6 once, \. e. not several times. 
 Luc. Dem. Enc. 21. Dion Cass. 1091. 91. 
 
 77, ov, Ephesian, ofEphesus, 
 Rev. 2, 1 Rec. 
 
 jE^>eo"tO9j ov, 6, Ephesian, an Ephesian, 
 Acts 19, 28. 34. 35 bis. 21, 29. 
 
 ".E(e(ro9, ou, T), Ephesus, a celebrated 
 city, the capital of Ionia, near the western 
 coast of Asia Minor, between Smyrna and 
 Miletus. It contained a temple of Diana, 
 so splendid as to be reckoned one of the 
 seven wonders of the world. When this 
 was burnt by the fool Herostratus in A. C. 
 356, in order to immortalize his name, it 
 was rebuilt at the common expense of all 
 Greece. See Pausan. 7. 2. 4. Plin. H. N. 
 5. 31. Strabo 14. 640. Here was also ga 
 thered one of the chief Christian churches 
 of the apostolic age; Acts 18, 19. 21. 24. 
 19, 1. 17. 26. 20, 16. 17. 1 Cor. 15, 32. 
 16, 8. Eph. 1,1.1 Tim. 1, 3. 2 Tim. 1, 18. 
 4, 12. Rev. 1,11. [2, 1.] The ruins of Eph 
 esus are near the modern Turkish village of 
 Aiasuluk ; see Pococke Descr. of the East, 
 II. 2. p. 45 sq. Schubert s Reise, I. p. 294 
 sq. Hamilton s Res. in Asia Minor, II. p. 
 22 sq. 
 
 e<evper^9, ov, 6, (e<eupio-Ka>,) a finder 
 out, an inventor, contriver ; Rom. 1 , 30 
 e cpevperas KaK&v. Anacr. Od. 41. 3 Ba^o" 
 TOV efavptrav xpei as. Comp. Tratnjr Koalas 
 fvperfjs 2 Mace. 7, 31 ; KCLKVV fi/perai Philo 
 in Flacc. p. 968. 
 
 etyrjpepia, as, f], (ffprjp-tpos,) not found 
 in the classics ; Sept. pr. the daily service of 
 the priests in the temple, for rM*V? 2 p hr - 
 13, lOcomp.v. 11. lEsdr. 1,16. Suid. rj rfs 
 rjnepas \fiTovpyia. Hence in N. T. meton. 
 a course, class, into which the priests were 
 divided for the daily temple-service, each 
 class continuing for a week at a time, Luke 
 1, 5. 8 ; see in A/3m. See also 1 Chr. c. 
 24. 2 Chr. 8, 14. Jos. Ant. 7. 14. 7. Sept. 
 for t^rra 1 Chr. 23, 6. 28, 13; "ifattSa 
 Neh. 12, 24 ; n^n 2 Chr. 25, 8. Neh. 
 12, 9. So Esdr. 1, 2. 
 
 etyrjpepos, ov. 6. 17, adj. (em, ^f p a >) P r> 
 for the day, <> e </> r^epav a>v, i. e. epheme 
 
 ral, short-lived, Time. 2, 53. Plato Ep. 356. 
 a. In N. T. daily, James 2, 15 rrjs f(pr)p.e- 
 pov rpocprjs. So Diod. Sic. 3. 32 ras f(pr)}i.e~ 
 povs rpo(pds. 
 
 e<j)ioe, an anomalous form for Imperat. 
 emSe from eireidov, Acts 4, 29 Lachm. 
 
 efafcveofjiai, ovp.ai, aor. 2 (<piK6p.vv, (em, 
 iKveop,ai,) to come upon, or to any one, to 
 arrive at, to reach unto ; with &xpi c. gen. 
 2 Cor. 10, 13 ; ds c. ace. 2 Cor. 10, 14. 
 Pol. 3. 81. 2. Xen. Cyr. 1. 1. 5. 
 
 e(icrT77/i, f. firi(TTT]<T(0, (e m, to-TTjpi,j 
 to place upon or over, Hdian. 5. 6. 15. 
 Xen. Hell. 3. 1 . 7 ; to set over, Xen. Lac. 
 2. 1. In N. T. only in the intransitive 
 forms, Act. aor. Ziirivrij*, perf. parti cip. 
 e<pf(TTu>s, and Mid. efpio-rapat, to place 
 oneself upon or near, to stand upon, by, near ; 
 see in umj/u and Buttm. 107. II. 1 and 3. 
 
 1. Pr. of persons, to stand l>y or near; 
 genr. Luke 2, 38 KM avrr) avrfj rfj &pq e m- 
 o-Tao-a KT\. Acts 22, 13. 20 ; c. dat. of pers. 
 Acts 23, 11 ; em TI Acts 10, 17. 11, 11 ; 
 fTrdva> TWOS, to stand by and over, Luke 4, 
 39. Sept. for "^S Zech. 1, 10. 11 ; c. Va- 
 va> 2 Sam. 1,9; for 32X3 Gen. 24, 43. Amos 
 9, 1. Dem. 346. 2. Xen. Conv. 2. 7 ; c. dat. 
 Luc. D. Deor. 17. 2 ; c. em Pol. 4. 40. 1. 
 
 2. Spec, with the idea of approach, to 
 come and stand by, to come to or upon any 
 person or place ; Luke 20, 1 eVeVrrjo-ar ol 
 dpxitpfis KT\. 10, 40. Acts 23, 27. (Dem. 66. 
 
 23. Hdian. 3. 12. 18.) With the idea of sud 
 den appearance, as a vision ; Acts 12, 7 ay- 
 yeXos Kvpiov eVeonj. So C. dat. Luke 2, 9. 
 
 24, 4. (Plut. Amat. Narr. 3 pen. Luc. Phi- 
 lops. 25, 31. Hdot. 5. 56.) In a hostile 
 sense, to come upon by surprise, to assail. 
 genr. Acts 6, 1 2 Kal iTnaravrts o-vi>r)p7ra<rov 
 CLVTOV KT\. So c. dat. Acts 4, 1. 17, 5. 
 Sept. for &ni53 Jer. 21, 2. So Jos. Ant. 11. 
 7. 1. ^Eschin. 15. 22. 
 
 3. Trop. e. g. of persons, to standfast by, 
 i. e. to be instant, pressing, earnest ; 2 Tim. 
 4, 2 tifl<mfSl fVKaipa>s ciKiupats sc. KrfpvcrfTatv 
 TOV \6yov. (So Dem. 70. 16.) Of things, 
 e. g. evil, to come upon, to fall upon, to be 
 fall; with f-rri c. ace. Luke 21, 34; c. dat. 
 I Thess. 5, 3. So of rain, Acts 28, 2 Sia 
 TOV vfTov TOV e ^earwra, because of the rain 
 that had come upon us. (Wisd. 19, 1 ; d- 
 <pos Pol. 18. 3. 7.) Also to impend, to be at 
 hand, 2 Tim. 4, 6 6 xaipbs e<peo-TTjKe. So 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 4. 3. Dem. 287. 5. 
 
 E<J3patjji, 6, indec. Ephraim, pr. n. of a 
 town or city near the desert, to which Je 
 sus retired, John 11, 54. Eusebins says it 
 was 8 Rom. miles north of Jerusalem, 
 
311 
 
 while Jerome with more probability makes 
 the distance 20 Roman miles; Onomast. 
 arts. Ephraim, Ephron. Josephus mentions 
 Ephraim and Bethel as being small towns, 
 apparently near each other, B. J. 4. 9. 9. It 
 was the same with Ephraim or Ephron 
 (T.^.^j "P" 1 ??) 2 Chr. 13, 19 ; and perh. 
 identical with Ophrah ( n ^25) of Benja- 
 mhi, Josh. 18, 23. Prob. i. q. the modern 
 Taiyibeh, lying 7 Roman miles N. E. ot 
 Bethel on the border of the desert ; see 
 Biblioth. Sac. 1845, p. 398 sq. Gr. Harm. 
 p. 203 sq. Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. p. 121 sq. 
 From the city Ephraim our Lord seems 
 to have passed over the Jordan into Perea, 
 and returned to Jerusalem by Jericho ; see 
 Gr. Harm. p. 201. 
 
 (f)(f)a^id, Ephphatha, an Aramean Im 
 perative, i. q. Staj/oi xSjjri, be opened Mark 
 7, 34. It comes from the verb ririB to open, 
 and is either for Imper. Niphal rinsn, O r 
 Imper. Ithpael ttnEX. 
 
 e^69, adv. yesterday, i. q. x3 where 
 see ; so Lachm. for x^ s in Rec. John 4, 52. 
 Acts 7, 28. Heb. 13, 8. Sept. for ^anx 
 1 Sam. 4, 7. Hdian. 7. 3. 6. Xen. Cyr. V. 
 5. 53. 
 
 e^pa, ay, 17, (e x3pos,) enmity, hatred, 
 Luke 23, 12. Rom. 8,7. James 4, 4; Plur. 
 Gal. 5, 20. Meton. eause of enmity, Eph. 2, 
 15. 16. Sept. for HX3b Num. 35, 20. Prov. 
 26, 26. Hdian. 3. 6. 10. Xen. Mem. 3. 3. 
 17; Plur. ib. 1. 2. 10. 
 
 a, 6v, (ex 3os O 1 . Pass, hated, 
 hateful, an object of enmity; Rom. 11, 28 
 f x3poi 81 v^as, in antith. with d-yam/Toi. 
 Wisd. 15, 18 ; rots Seals x3por &\. V. H. 
 2. 23. Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 35. 
 
 2. Act. haling, hostile. a) Pr. as adj. 
 Matt 13, 28 e x3po? uv^pumos, i. e. an ene- 
 mv. Rom. 5, 10 x3pol ovres. Col. 1, 21. 
 Sept. Esth. 7, 6. Lysias Fragm. p. 37. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 15. 
 
 b) Subst. 6 e xSpor, an enemy, adversary, 
 Buttm. \ 123. 5. a) Genr. and with gen. 
 of pers. Matt. 5, 43. 44. 10, 36. 13, 25. 
 Luke 1, 71. 74. 6, 27. 35. 19, 27. 43. 
 Rom. 12, 20. Gal. 4, 16. 2 Thess. 3, 15. 
 Rev. 11,5. 12 ; c. gen. of thing, Acts 13, 
 10. Sept. for 3^X Gen. 49, 8. Lev. 26, 7. 
 al. saep. So Dem. 1121. 12. Thuc. 6. 18. 
 ) Of the adversaries of the Messiah, c. gen. 
 Matt. 22, 44 wr av 3w TOVS f x3povs trov 
 VTTMTOOIOV *CT\. Mark 12, 36. Luke 20, 43. 
 Acts 2, 35. 1 Cor. 15, 25. Heb. 1, 13. 10, 
 13 ; also 1 Cor. 15, 26. Phil. 3, 18 rov arav- 
 pov. So ()( rov 3eoG James 4, 4. y) 
 
 Spec. 6 { xSpoy, the enemy, the adcersary, 
 Satan, Matt. 13, 39. Luke 10, 19 eVi Ttaa-av 
 TTJV dvvafjiiv TOV e xSpoC, comp. V. 18. So 
 Test. XII Patr. p. 657, 658. 
 
 , rjs, T), (ex l *>) a viper, Acts 28, 
 3. (Luc. Alex. 10. Plato Conv. 218. a.) 
 Trop. of wicked men, -yew^para tjftMtv, 
 progeny of vipers, Matt. 3, 7. 12, 34. 23, 33. 
 Luke 3, 7. So Soph. Ant. 5. 31. ^Eschyl. 
 Choeph. 247. 
 
 e^&), f. eo>, also f. (rxijcrco, impf. etx " 
 aor. 2 f(rxov, perf. eo-x^a, see Buttm. 114; 
 to have, to hold, i. e. to have and hold, imply 
 ing continued having or possession. 
 
 1. Primarily, to hate in one s hand, in 
 hold in the hand; Rev. 1, 16 ex* " " T .V 
 Seta ai/rov x et P darepas tVra. 6, 5. 10, 2. 
 17, 4. (Horn. II. 1. 14 eV x f P<rw ex 03 "- Luc. 
 D. Deor. 11. 2 777 Xaia p-eV ex 03 "- Plato 
 Theaet. 198. d ; comp. Hdot. 7. 16. 2.) Also 
 with in the hands impl. Matt. 26,7. Rev. 
 3, 1. 5, 8. 6, 2. 8, 3. 6. 9, 14. al. So Horn. 
 
 11. 2. 279. 
 
 2. Genr. and most frequently, to have, to 
 hold, to possess, of outward possessions or 
 property. 
 
 a) With ace. of things in one s posses 
 sion, power, charge, control. a) Simply, 
 e. g. property, Matt. 13, 12 o<ms ... 6 ex f{ - 
 19, 21. 22 rjv yap ex&ji Kr^p-ara TroAXa. 
 Mark 10, 22. 23. Luke 18, 24. 21,4; ^bev 
 fX flv > have nothing, to be poor, 2 Cor. 6, 
 
 10. (Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 9.) Hence in later 
 usage, fx fLV simply, with TO. xpwara or 
 the like impl. to have much, to be rich, and 
 ov v. fj.rj fx fiv i " have not, to be poor, Matt. 
 13, 12. 25, 29. 1 Cor. 11, 22. 2 Cor. 8, 11. 
 
 12. James 4, 2. So Palaeph. 49. 1. Dem. 
 1123. 25. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 44, comp. 45. 
 Of flocks, Trpofiarov ex ei " Matt. 12, 11; 
 (Luc.* D. Deor. 4. 2 ult.) of produce, es 
 tates, Luke 12, 19. 13, 6 ; K\rjpovop.iav trop. 
 Eph. 5, 5 ; p.fpos p-era TIVOS John 13, 8, 
 comp. Gen. 31, 14. Deut. 12, 12. So of 
 arms, utensils, Luke 22, 36 bis. Rev. 18, 19 ; 
 (Luc. D. Mort. 11, 1 ;) garments, Luke 3, 
 
 11. 9, 3; provisions, Matt. 14, 17. Marks, 
 
 I. 2. 5. 7. John 2, 3. 1 Tim. 6,8. (Hdian. 
 3. 9. 17. Xen. An. 2. 3. 27.) Of a home, 
 a place, Matt. 8, 20. Mark 5, 3. Luke 12, 17 ; 
 members or parts of the body, as wra Matt. 
 
 II, 15; o<p3oXp.ov? Mark 8, 18. (Palaeph. 
 32. 1.) Luke 24, 39. Rev. 9, 10 ; aKpopv- 
 (rriav fxovrts, uncircumcised, gentiles, Acts 
 11,3; power, faculty, dignity, John 4, 44. 
 6, 68. 17, 5. Heb. 2, 14. 7,24. Rev. 9, 11. 
 16, 9. 17, 18 ; so Pakeph. 29. 3. Plut. Cato 
 Min. 16 mid. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 11. Of anv 
 
312 
 
 good, advantage, benefit, e. g. perSoi/ Matt. 
 5, 46 ; x"P J/ wpoy TOV \a6v, i. e. favour with, 
 Acts 2, 47. (Sept. for jua Ex. 33, 12.) 
 Acts 24, 16. Rom. 4,2. 5,2*9,10; TrurriK 
 faith, as a gift, 14, 22. 1 Cor. 13, 2. James 
 2, 1. 14. 18 ; (a>r)v aluviov John 3, 36. 6, 40. 
 47. 53. 54. al. Of a law, precept, John 19, 
 7. 1 Cor. 7, 25. 1 John 4, 21. (Plut. Cato 
 Min. 16 init.) Of age, years, John 8, 57. 
 9, 21 ; so Jos. Ant. 1. 13. 2. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 6. 34. Of a ground of complaint, or the 
 like, with Kara TWOS or irpos nva, Matt. 5, 
 23. Acts 19, 38. 24, 19. 25, 19. 1 Cor. 6, 1. 
 Rev. 2, 4. 14. 20; or a ground of reply, 
 2 Cor. 5, 12. Of a definite beginning and 
 end, Heb. 7, 3 /xi^re dpxrjv fjp.fpu>v fJ-r)T fafjs 
 rtXoy ^(av. /3) With an adjunct quali 
 fying the accusative, e. g. an adj. or parti- 
 cip. in the accus. Acts 2, 44 fl^ov anavra 
 Koivd. Acts 20, 24 ov8e e^co TTJV ^fv\r]v p.ov 
 Tijiiav nor do I hold my life dear. Luke 1 9, 
 20; trop. Mark 8, 17. 2 Pet. 2, 14. Also 
 with a noun in apposit. 1 Pet. 2, 16 p.f/ 
 
 &>$ fTTlKakvfJifJia fXOVTfS TTjS KaKiaS TT)V f XfV- 
 
 Sepiav. So Luc. D. Deor. 9. 1 TO<d8a yap rrjv 
 K((pa\rji> txfi- y) Spec, with the notion 
 of charge, trust; Rev. 1, 18 e^< ray 
 TOV Sararou. 12, 12 fin. 15, 1. 6 
 TrXnyas eVra KT\. So Dem. 1153. 4. 8) 
 Spec, to have at hand, to have ready, 1 Cor. 
 14, 26 eKttcrror -v//aX/xoi/ e^ei KrX. 
 
 b) With accus. of person, implying some 
 special relation or connection. a) Genr. 
 and simply, e. g. of a husband or wife, Matt. 
 14, 4 ov f^ecrri croi *x flv a ^ r ^] v sc - as a wife. 
 22, 28. Mark 12,23. al. John 4, 17 17 yvvr^ 
 fiiTfv OVK ex 03 iiv&pa. V. 18. So Schol. 
 Ven. ad II. 6. 398 r) yap yvvrj e^ero, 6 fie 
 dvrjp fX fL - Horn. Od. 4. 569. Luc. D. Mort. 
 16. 1. Also d8f\<povs fxftv Luke 16, 28; 
 dpXifpea Heb. 4, 14 (VTTO.TOV Plut. Cat. Min. 
 21) ; SeoTrora? 1 Tim. 6, 2 ; oiKov6p.ov Luke 
 
 16, 1 ; TtKva Tit. 1, 6 ; vlovs Gal. 4, 22; 
 <pi\oi> Luke 11,5; x*IP as 1 Tim. 5, 16. etc. 
 etc. Matt. 9, 36. 27, 16. 65. Luke 4, 40. 
 John 5, 7. Rev. 2, 14. 15. al. So Dem. 440. 
 27. Xen. An. 3. 4. 13. j8) With an 
 adjunct qualifying the accus. e. g. a noun 
 in apposit. Matt. 3, 9 iraTtpa e^o/xei TOV 
 Afipadp,. John 8, 41. Acts 13, 5 flxov 8e 
 Kai laidwrjv vTTTjpeTrjv. Phil. 3, 17. Philem. 
 
 17. Heb. 12, 9. (Diod. Sic. 4. 61 mid.) 
 With an adj. or particip. in the accus. Luke 
 17, 7 8oii\ov fx a>v dpoTpiSjvra. 14, 18. 19 
 (?Xe p.f TraprjTTjfjifvov. 1 Cor. 7, 12. 13. Phil. 
 2, 20. 29. (Hdian. 1. 16. 9.) So with a 
 prep, and its case, Acts 25, 16 irp\v rj Kara 
 Trpoo-coTToi/ fx oi TOVS Karrjyopovs. Matt. 26, 
 11 TTTU>XVS ?x ere M 6 - 5 tavT&v. John 12, 8. 
 
 (Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 17.) So f\fiv TWO. inr 
 tavTov Matt. 8, 9. Luke 7, 8 ; e <^> eavrov 
 Rev. 9, 11. 
 
 c) Where the subject is a thing, to hare, 
 implying an object or quality in or in close 
 relation to the subject; c. ace. of thing, 
 Matt. 13, 5 OVK eixe yrjv 7roXX?ji/. . . Sia TO 
 pr] exfiv /3a3oy yrjs. v. 6. 27. Luke 11, 36. 
 20, 24. Acts 27, 39. So Acts 1, 12 Spos 
 <ra,3/3drov fx ov o86v, having a sabbath day s 
 journey, i. e. being thus far from the city. 
 1 Cor. 12, 23. 1 Tim. 4, 8. 2 Tim. 2, 17 
 vop.f)v (ei, shall have eating, i. e. shall eat 
 around, spread. Heb. 9, 8 fxovo-rjs o-Tacriv, 
 having yet a standing. James 1, 4. Rev. 4, 
 7. 8. Plut. Cato Min. 5. Diod. Sic. 5. 13. 
 
 <]) Trop. of what one is said to have in 
 or 07?, by, with himself, i. e. of any condi 
 tion, circumstances, state, external or inter 
 nal, in which one is. a) Genr. of any 
 obligation, duty, course, etc. Acts 21, 23 
 i>X>}c fxovres ((f) tavTuv. 18, 18. Rom. 12, 
 4 irpagiv. 2 Cor. 4, 1 SiaKovlav. Phil. 1 , 30 
 et Col. 2, 1 dyvva. (Plut. Cato Min. 24.) 
 Luke 12, 50 /SaTrrtcr/ia 8f e^a) /3a7rno-S^at, 
 see in /3a7m a> no. 2. b. . Of sin, guilt, 
 e. g. afjiapTiav exeiv John 9, 41. 15, 22; 
 tyKkvua Acts 23, 29 ; Kpifw. 1 Tim. 5, 12. 
 But KplpaTa e x"! , to have lawsuits, 1 Cor. 
 
 6, 7. (Lat. lites habeo, Hor. Sat. 1. 7. 5.) 
 v. 4. Acts 28, 29. Also reXos f x flv > * o 
 have an end, pr. to come to an end, be de 
 stroyed, as 6 Sarawir Mark 3, 26 ; trop. to 
 have an accomplishment, be fulfilled, as 
 prophecy, Luke 22, 37 ; so pr. Diod. Sic. 
 16. 91 ; trop. Horn. II. 18. 378. So of ef 
 fects or results depending on the subject as 
 a cause or antecedent; Heb. 10, 35 TJTIS 
 fX fl fuo&UFofoowp fjnyaXrjv, i. e. which has 
 or brings with it great reward. 1 John 4, 
 186 (poftos Kokacnv ex. /3) Of any con 
 dition or affection of body or mind, where 
 one is said to have such and such an affec 
 tion ; e. g. of the body, as ^acrriyas v. oV3e- 
 vfias f x (iv > 1 have disease, infirmity, Mark 
 3, 10. Acts 28, 9. Heb. 7, 28; wounds, 
 Rev. 13, 14 ; Sai/idwov V. irvevpa a/caSaproi/ 
 ?X fLV > t have a devil, an unclean spirit, to 
 be possessed, Matt. 11, 18. Mark 3, 22. 30. 
 9, 17. Luke 13, 11. Acts 16, 16. 19, 13. 
 Of the mind, as uyanriiv *x eiv J nn 5, 42. 
 13,35; awryKTji/LukeH, 18. 23,17. 1 Cor. 
 
 7, 37 ; (Jos. Ant. 16. 9. 3. Plut. Cato Min. 
 24 fin.) uvdnavo-iv Rev. 4, 8 ; tlpTjvqv John 
 16, 33. Acts 9, 31 ; (comp. Dem. 13. 12 ;) 
 f\iri8a Acts 24, 15 (Hdian. 2. 3. 24) ; n- 
 Sujuiaj/ Phil. 1, 23; SXtyii/ 1 Cor. 7, 28 ; 
 Su/ioi Rev. 12, 12 ; vovv X/JJOTOU 1 Cor. 2, 
 16; Trapprjaiav Eph. 3, 12 ; iri(mv, as an 
 
313 
 
 affection of mind, Matt. 17, 20 ; 
 X/xoToC Rom. 8, 9 ; nv. ayiov 1 Cor. 6, 19 ; 
 irveifjM Jude 19 ; irovov Col. 4, 13 ; 
 1 Tim. 5, 20 ; ^apdv 3 John 4. So f 
 \apiv nvi, to have gratitude towards any 
 one, Lat. gratias habeo,to be thankful. Luke 
 17, 9. 1 Tim. 1, 12. (Dem. 12. 11. Xen. 
 " Cyr. 5. 1. 1.) Also xpe/av e^eti/, to 
 have need, to be in want, c. gen. Matt. 6, 8 
 &>v xpfiav fx fTf - Luke 5, 31. 1 Cor. 12,21. 
 Heb. 5, 12 ; genr. Mark 2, 25. Acts 2, 45. 
 4, 35 ; c. infin. Matt. 3, 14. 1 Thess. 1,8; 
 Iva, John 2, 25. 16, 30. 1 John 2, 27. So 
 Arr. Epict. 1. 29. 29. Pol. 9. 12. 1. By 
 an inversion of the subject and predicate 
 such an affection or emotion is in Greek 
 writers often said to hare, to possess a per 
 son ; in N. T. only Mark 16,8 e?^e 8 avras 
 Tp6p.os Kal K(TTa(Tis. So Horn. II. 18. 247 
 irdirras yap e^e Tpdpos. Hdot. 4. 115 (f)6j3os. 
 Xen. Hell. 7. 2. 9 /cXavo-iyeXwy. 
 
 3. to have, to keep, to hold fast, to retain 
 in or about oneself. 
 
 a) Pr. of what one has in, on, or about 
 himself, i. q. to bear, to carry. a) So in 
 oneself, as lv yacrrpl ?x eu/ to ^ e pregnant, 
 Matt. 1, 18 et Rev. 12, 2 ; see in yavrr^p. 
 Trop. 2 Cor. 1, 9. 4,7. Phil. 1,7. /3) 
 Also on oneself, of garments, arms, orna 
 ments, etc. i. q. to bear, to wear ; Matt. 3, 4 
 (t\e TO (v8vfia. John 12, 6 TO yXcocrcro/co/xoi 
 iX f - 18, 10 fj.dx<iipav. Rev. 9, 17 %d>pa<as. 
 With firi c. gen. 1 Cor. 11, 10. Rev. 9, 4. 
 14, 1. 14 ; firi c. ace. 19, 16. (Luc. D. Deor. 
 2. 2. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 26. ib. 7. 5. 29 ; c. ri 
 TWOS Luc. D. Deor. 26. 1 .) 1 Cor. 11,4 
 fX flv Kar K((pd\rjs, to hate upon the head, 
 pr. so as to hang down from it, like a veil 
 or toga ; comp. Plut. Quaest. Rom. 14 I8uv 
 Kara K((pa\fjs TO IpaTiov. Once of a tree 
 having leaves, Mark 11, 13. Trop. of per 
 sons wearing an appearance, etc. Col. 2, 23. 
 2 Tim. 3, 5. Rev. 3, 1 on. ovofta exr- So 
 Hdot. 7. 138. y) Also to have within one 
 self, to contain, where the subject is a thing, 
 Heb. 9, 4 bis. Rev. 21, 11. Trop. X (iv 
 piav (v tavra, Matt. 13, 21. Mark 4, 17. 
 
 b) Trop. and emphat. to hare firmly in 
 mind, to hold to, to hold fast, e.g. a) 
 Genr. as of things, John 14, 21 6 C^CDJ/ ray 
 (vro\ds p.ov KOL Trjpatv avTas. 1 Cor. 11, 16. 
 Phil. 3, 9. 1 Tim. 3, 9. 2 Tim. 1,13. Heb. 
 6, 19. Rev. 2, 24. 25. So too t X e iv 3e 6v, 
 TOV irarepa, TOV viov, to have God, Christ, 
 to hold them fast, i. e. to acknowledge with 
 love and devotedness, 1 John 2, 23 bis (i. q. 
 tv TV irciTpl fj.fvftv v. 24). 5, 12 bis. 2 John 
 9 bis. ]3) Spec, to hold for or as, to re 
 gard, to count, c. ace. of pers. with a noun 
 
 in apposit. Matt. 14, 5 ws Trpocprjrrjv atrov 
 [ iMtmp ] flx ov > they counted him as a pro 
 phet. 21, 26. 46; also Mark 11, 32, where 
 for the attraction, see Buttm. } 151. 1. 7. So 
 Isocr. p. 239. a, rivas ovv e^w TTfTratSei^e- 
 vovs icrX. Theogn. Sent. 487. 
 
 4. to have means or power, to be able ; 
 constr. with an infin. and strictly c. ace. 
 Tt, ov&tv, e. g. fx<i> Tt fiirdv v. Troiija-ai, as 
 in Lat. habeo dicere, Engl. to have something 
 to say or do, i. e. to be able to say or do 
 something, I can, implying only an objective 
 or external ability, and thus differing from 
 8vvafjLai q. v. Usually c. infin. aor. Luke 
 7, 40 e^co o-oi TI fiTTfiv. 12, 4 p; e ^oWcoi/ 
 TTfp. TL Trot^crai. Acts 4, 14 ovo~ei> fi\W dvr- 
 fiirtlv. Acts 23, 17. 18. 25,26. 28,19; 
 c. infin. pres. 2 John 12. So ^El. V. H. 2. 
 23 flx ov " ftirflv. Hdian. 6. 1. 24. Palsph. 
 32. 10. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 42 ov8tv av fxoip-fv 
 Hf/jL^aa-^ai. Infin. pres. Xen. An. 2. 2. 11. 
 More direct is the meaning to be able, 1 
 can, when the accus. is suppressed, e. g. 
 with infin. aor. Matt. 18, 25 ^ tx ovTOS Se 
 avTov dnobovvai, lit. he not having to pay, 
 i. e. not being able to pay. Heb. 6, 13 ; c. 
 infin. pres. John 8, 6 Iva e^wo-i KaTrjyopflv 
 ai>Tov. 2 Pet. 1, 15. So c. inf. aor. Luc. 
 D. Deor. 26. 1 ex eis M fiireiv iroTfpos KT\. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 1 1 oi>x Q< d-no^ovvai. Inf. 
 pres. Sept. Prov. 3, 27. Luc. D. Deor. 17. 1 
 wr Kal fxco vyye\qv. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 7 
 d(p a>v Tifj.av ^o/j,ev ovs KT\. Also where 
 the infin. is suppressed ; Mark 14, 8 6 eo-^fv 
 avTtj (jroir)(rai) , tirotijm. Acts 3, 6 6 Se e^eo 
 (StSo wu), TOVTO croi 8io"(opi. So Dem. 425. 
 
 10 OuS O.Tl XpT] TTOlflV ffT. HoiTl. II. 17. 
 
 354 XX" ovTTGis fTi fix e - 
 
 5. Intrans. or with iavrov impl. Buttm. 
 J130. n. 2. Matth. ^496; always with an 
 adverb or adverbial phrase, to hare oneself 
 so and -so, to be circumstanced, to be, etc. 
 Buttm. 5 150. m. 39. E. g. tVot/ncoy ?^, to 
 be ready, Acts 21,13. 2 Cor. 12, 14 ; comp. 
 in fTolfuos. (^El. V. H. 4. 13.) So eV^a- 
 TU>S fX fl -> io be at extremity, Mark 5, 23 ; see 
 in fV^dro)?. Also KCIKWS fx fiv i " be sick, 
 Matt. 4, 24. Luke 7, 2 ; (Xen. CEc. 3. 11 ;) 
 oiy fx eiv bc well, i. e. to recover from 
 sickness, Mark 16, 18 (genr. Xen. Cyr. 7. 
 5. 47) ; Kofj.\lf6repov (x fiv ^- John 4, 52 ; 
 oi/rw? x ftl/ to ^ e so > Acts 7, 1. 12, 15. al. 
 
 s 15, 36; XXwy 1 Tim. 5, 25. (Xen. 
 An. 3. 1. 32 ovTcas. Ml. V. H. 2. 36 TTWJ.) 
 Acts 24, 25 TO vvv fx^v, as it now is, as the 
 matter now stands, i. e. adverbially, for the 
 present ; see Viger. p. 9. (Tob. 7, 11. Luc. 
 Anachar. 40 ult. ^El. H. An. 2. 11 init. 
 Plut. Amatcr. 1.) With c. dat. adver- 
 
314 
 
 bially ; John 5, 5. 6, ev daSevda e^en/. 
 2 Cor. 10, 6. Also of place, t^av eV, to ie 
 m a place, John 11,17 e^ovra eV TO> pvr]- 
 Hflqt. So Jos. Ant. 7. 1. 1 ; comp. Arr. 
 Alex. M. 6. 17. 9. 
 
 6. Mid. exop.ai,to hold oneself to, to adhere 
 to, Horn, II. 7. 248 ; c. gen. of person, Sept. 
 for pa n Deut. 30, 20. Theogn. Sent. 32 ; 
 also of place, to be near or close to, adjacent, 
 c. gen. Diod. Sic. 2. 49 init. Xen. Hell. 7. 
 1. 20. In N. T. only Particip. pres. e ^d- 
 p.(vos, T], ov, near, next, e. g. a) Of 
 place, Mark 1, 38 (Is TCJ.S e ^o/zeVaf KCO^IOTTO- 
 Xety, i. e. next, adjacent. So Jos. Ant. 6. 
 1. 1. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 10. b) Of time, 
 777 (xofjL(vr) yp.(pa, the next day, Acts 21, 
 26; with jy/if pa impl. Luke 13, 33. Acts 
 20, 15; TW 8( ex- <ra$3aT(j> Acts 13, 44. 
 So Sept. 1 Chr. 10, 8. 2 Mace. 12, 39. Jos. 
 Ant. 5. 9. 2. Pol. 3. 112. 1 ; comp. Thuc. 
 6. 3 TOV (xo/j-fvov (TOVS- c) Trop. Heb. 
 6, 9 rot e^d/newi a-corrjplas, things pertaining 
 to salvation, connected with and accompa 
 nying it. So Luc. Hermot. 69 ravr ATTI- 
 b~os ov p.LKpas (\6/j.(va Xe yetr. Plato Rep. 
 362. a. Trpaypa dX^Setay xop-fvov. Xen. An. 
 6. 3. 17. 4- 
 
 ea)9, conjunct, also as adv. and prep. 
 c. gen. till, until, unto, of time and place ; 
 Buttm. 5 146. 3, 4. 
 
 I. Conjunct, marking the continuance of 
 an action up to or during the time of an 
 other action ; and followed by the Indica 
 tive or Subjunctive (in Gr. writers also 
 the Optative) according as the latter action 
 is certain or uncertain ; Buttm. 139. m. 40. 
 Kiihner $ 337. Matth. $ 522. 1. Winer 
 $ 42. 3. 
 
 1. until, i. e. so long as until, marking 
 continuance up to the time of another ac 
 tion, a) Followed by the Indicative, e. g. 
 of a past action or event, Matt. 2, 9 eW 
 (o-TT). 24, 39. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 7 (cos 
 Trdvra Kpta.) Of a future action or 
 event regarded as certain ; here earlier wri 
 ters prefer the Subjunctive, while later ones 
 use the Indie, future ; see Herm. ad Vig. 
 p. 925. So with ep^o/xai in a future sense, 
 see in ep^o/icu no. 2. a; Luke 19, 13 ecor 
 (pxop-ai. John 21, 22. 23. 1 Tim. 4, 13 
 comp. 3, 14. So Plut. Lycurg. 29 5eti> 
 tKtlvovs (p.p.fv(iv . . . ecos (TrdvfKTiv ex 
 AeX^on/ avros, where for the fut. signif. see 
 Buttm. 108. V. 5. b) With the Sub 
 junctive aorist, with or without av, where 
 the latter action is not certain, but probable, 
 depending on circumstances ; here in Latin 
 we find the fut. exactum, and in Engl. either 
 the first or second future ; Matth. 1. c. p. 
 
 1010. Winer j 42. 3. b. Thus: a) With 
 av, e. g. preceded by a present, James 5, 7 
 p.aKpo%vp.<ov . . . (cos av \ap7) itrov. (Xen. An. 
 5. 1. 11.) Prec. by an Imperat. Matt. 2, 
 13 /cat io~3e ntfi, (cos civ eiVco (rot. 10, 11. 
 Mark 6, 10. Luke 17, 8. 1 Cor. 4, 5. Heb. 
 
 1, 13. al. (Xen.. Cyr. 3. 3. 46.) Prec. by 
 a future, as OVK e pt (ret... (cos av tK^aXrj tls 
 vinos rr]v Kpio-iv, Matt. 12, 20 ; and so after 
 a Subj. aorist in a fut. sense with the em- 
 phat. negative ov pr), as Matt. 5, 18. 26 ou 
 pr] ee\%r]s eKtl^fv, ea>s av dno8<as TOV eo-^a- 
 TOV Koo pdvTTjv. 10.23. 16,28/23, 39. 24, 
 34. Luke 13, 35. 21, 32. al. See Winer 
 5 60. 3. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 722 sq. /3) 
 Without av, see Winer J 42. 3. b. Matth. 
 5 522, note. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 14. So 
 preceded by a present, Luke 15, 4 KCU 77-0- 
 pevfrai . . . ceo? fvprj avro. 2 Thess. 2, 7. 
 Heb. 10, 13. (Plato Eryx. 392. c.) Prec. 
 by an Imperat. Mark 14, 32 Ka3/<rarf &8e, 
 ea>s Trpoo-e^w/Liat. (Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 39.) 
 Prec. by an aor. Indie. Rev. 20, 5 Rec. see 
 W T iner { 42. 3. b. fin. Prec. by an aor. 
 Indie, implying an imperative sense Mark 
 6, 45 ; also by an aorist Subj. in a fut. sense, 
 Rev. 6, 11. " 
 
 2. so long as, while, marking continuance 
 during another action, till its end ; followed 
 by the Indicative in the statement of a fact ; 
 see Winer 42. 3. a, marg. Kiihner 5 337. 
 John 9, 4 (p.f Set e pycifecrSai . . . eios- ypepa 
 e crrtV. 12, 35 TrepiTmretre, ecus TO (pas fX fTf - 
 v. 36. Ecclus. 30, 20. Dem. 15. 5 ecos 
 e oTt Katpos, uirtXa/3e<T3e KT\. Plato Phffid. 
 38 ult. p. 39. c, ecos ?Tt (peas e ori. Xen. An. 
 
 2. 6. 2. 
 
 II. Adverb, till, until; to, unto; Lat. 
 usque ; of time and place, but found only 
 before another adverb or a preposition. 
 
 1. Of time, followed by another adverb 
 of time, with or without TOV (TT??), which is 
 omitted especially by late writers ; Winer 
 5 58. 6, fin. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 45 sq. So 
 ewj api-t, until now, Matt. 11, 12. John 
 2, 10. 5, 17. 16, 24. 1 Cor. 4, 13. 8, 7. 
 15, 6. 1 John 2, 9; ewr rov vvv, until 
 now, Matt. 24, 21. Mark 13, 19; (Sept for 
 npj2-1S Gen. 46, 34. Luc. Hale. 4;) o> s 
 fmaKis, until (up to) seven {fines, Matt 
 18, 21. 22 bis; ecus Trore, until iclienl 
 how long ? Matt. 17, 17 bis. Mark 9, 19 bis. 
 Luke 9, 41. John 10, 24. Rev. 6, 10. (Sept. 
 for r"J$ Ps. 13, 2 ; "^-l? 2 Sam. 2, 
 26; comp. (cos ore Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 25.) 
 So (cos rr)s <rt]p.(pov, unto this day, Matt. 
 27, 8 ; but ecoy a-rj^epov 2 Cor. 3, 15. 
 
 2. Of place, to, unto ; followed : a) By 
 another adverb of place, e.g. (a>s uva>, up 
 
315 
 
 to the brhn, John 2, 7 (comp. Sept. 2 Chr. 
 26, 8) ; ws fo-o>, /o within. Mark 14, 54 ; 
 e&>y aro), to the bottom, Matt. 27, 51; 
 fats o>8f , to tfn s ptoce, Luke 23, 5. b) 
 By a prep, and its case; so ewy fls Bj3a- 
 v( ai>, as far as unto Bethany, quite thither, 
 Luke 24, 50 ; SO Acts 26, 1 1 ecoy KCU fls ray 
 e&> 7roXy, asfar as even un/o foreign cities. 
 (1 Mace, 2, 58. ^El. V. H. 12. 22. Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 27. Pol. 2. 52. 7 ewy fls 9eTToXi ai>.) 
 So ecoy eco rf/s TroXfcoy, till out of the city, 
 quite out of the city, Acts 21,5. Also e co s 
 fir I ri]i> 3aXacro-ai>, quite to the sea, Acts 17, 
 
 14 Lachm. so Pol. 1. 29. 2. 
 
 III. Preposition c. gen. until, unto, of 
 time and place, espec. in later writers ; 
 Winer \ 58. 6. 
 
 1. Of time, e. g. a) With a gen. of a 
 noun of time ; Matt. 26, 29 W rfjs fj^epas 
 (Ktiv^s. 27, 45. Mark 15, 33. Luke 1, 80. 
 23, 44. Acts 28, 23. Rom. 11, 8. 1 Cor. 
 1,8. 16, 8. al. (Sept. 2 Sam. 6, 23. Ezra 
 9, 4.) With gen. of a person or event 
 marking time; e. g. of pers. Matt. 1, 17 
 ecoy AaviS. ..fats TOV Xp. 11, 13. Luke 16, 
 16. Acts 13, 20 ; of event, Matt. 1, 17. 2, 
 
 15 teas TTJS reXfirn/y TOV HpcoSov. 23, 35. 
 28,20. Luke 11, 51. Act? 8. 40. James 
 5, 7. So Pol. 5. 10. 3. jKscnin. 3. 18. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 4 eW TTJS AXfai>dpuv rXev- 
 TJjy. b) With a gen. of a pron. ov, OTOU, 
 and then ecoy c. gen. became in late writers 
 a conjunction and is put before the Indie, 
 and Subj. as above in no. I. 1. Thus a) 
 ecoy ov sc. xpovov, pr. until what lime, 
 until when, hence simply i. q. until ; so be- 
 
 fore the Indie. Matt. 1, 25 ecoy ov ere** TOV 
 mw KT\. 13,33. Acts 21, 26. (Palaeph. 4. 
 2.) Before the Subjunct. aor. without 5i>, 
 see above in I. 1. b. /3. Winer 5 42. 3. b. 
 Matt. 14, 22 ecoy ov a.Tro\v<Trj TOVS o^Xovs, 
 comp. Mark 6, 45. So Matt. 26, 36 comp. 
 Mark 14, 32; also Matt. 17, 9. 18, 30. 
 Luke 12, 50. 59. 24,49. John 13, 38. Acts 
 23, 12. 14. 21. al. So Sept. Ecc. 12, 2. 
 Act. Thorn. 516; c. Opt. Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 3. 
 ) ecoy OTOV sc. xpovov, until when, until; 
 before the Indie, as above, John 9, 18 ecoy 
 OTOV f(p(avr]a-ai> KT\. Matt. 5, 25. (1 Mace. 
 14, 10.) Before the Subjunct. without av, 
 see above ; Luke 13, 8 ecoy OTOV crKa\|/-a> Trept 
 av-ri}v. 15, 8 comp. v. 4. 22, 16. 18. 
 
 2. Of place, to, unto, as far as to. a) 
 Pr. and with gen. of place; Matt. 11, 23 
 teas TOV ovpavov, unto (up to) lieaven. 24, 
 31. 26, 58 ecoy TTJS avXfjs TOV apx- Luke 2, 
 15 ecus Bi;3Xe>. 4, 29. Acts 1, 8. 11, 22. 
 17, 15. Also c. gen. of pers. marking place, 
 Luke 4, 42 jca! rfk^ov ecos avTov. So genr. 
 1 Mace. 14, 10 fa>s uKpov TTJS yijy- -^El. 
 V. H. 3. 18 mid. Diod. Sic. 1. 27 eW a>*ea- 
 vov. b) Trop. c. gen. marking a term or 
 limit of extent ; Matt. 26, 38 ecus Samrov. 
 (Sept. Jon. 4, 9. Jos. de Mace. 14 ult.) 
 Mark 6, 23 ecus iffUOWS TT)? /SacrtXetay ji.ou. 
 Luke 22, 51 eare ea>y TOVTOV, suffer ye thus 
 far. With gen. of pers. in a like sense, 
 Matt. 20, 8 ecoy TCOV TrputTtov. 22, 26. John 
 8. 9. Acts 8, 10 TTavrfs OTTO [UKpov ecas fJ.f- 
 yciXoi;. Rom. 3, 12 OVK tcrTiv eats evos, not 
 so much as one. So Dion. Hal. Ant. 6. 37 
 -f- 
 
 z. 
 
 ZaftovXcav, 6, Zabulon, Heb. *^2t 
 (dwelling) Zfbulun, pr. n. of the tenth son 
 of Jacob, born of Leah, Gen. 30, 20. In 
 N. T. meton. the tribe of Zabulon, Matt. 4, 
 13. 15. Rev. 7, 8. 
 
 Zaic%alo$, ov, 6, Zaccheus, Heb. prob. 
 n ?I (pure) Zacchai, pr. n. of a chief pub 
 lican, or sub-farmer of the taxes, Luke 19, 
 2. 5. 8. See in reXww/y. 
 
 Zapd, 6, indec. Zara, Heb. rnt (dawn, 
 rising) Zerah, pr. n. of a son of Judah by 
 Tamar, Matt. 1, 3; comp. Gen. 38, 30. 
 
 Za%apia<;, /ov, 6, Zacharias, Heb. 
 fl^?! (whom Jehovah remembers) Zecha- 
 riah, pr. n. of two men in N. T. 
 
 1 . The father of John the Baptist, a priest 
 of the class of Abia; see A/3ta. Luke 1, 5 
 12. 13. 18. 21. 40. 59. 67. 3, 2. 
 
 2. A person killed in the temple, Matt. 
 23, 35 eo>y TOV aifiaTos Za^aptou vlov Bapa- 
 Xiov. The allusion is probably to Zecha- 
 riah the son of Jehoida, who was stoned by 
 order of Joash, 2 Chr. 24, 20-22. In Luke 
 11, 51 we read only : ecoy TOU aifj.. Za^apiov, 
 and so it prob. was originally in Matthew ; 
 but a transcriber having in mind Zechariah 
 the prophet, who was the son of Barachiah 
 (Zech. 1, 1), added this name in the text; 
 see a like case in art. A^paa^t. Or it may 
 be that Jehoida was also called Barachias ; 
 comp. the apostle Jude-, called likewise Leb- 
 
316 
 
 beus and Thaddeus ; Matthew called also 
 Levi; Nathan ael called also Bartholomew. 
 Others refer the passage to the prophet 
 Zechariah son of Barachiah, Zech. 1, 1 ; 
 but history gives no account of his death. 
 Others again make it refer to Zacharias the 
 the son of Baruch, who was slain by the 
 Zelotae in the temple just before the de 
 struction of Jerusalem, Jos. B. J. 4. 5. 4 ; 
 but this happened some thirty years later. 
 
 ao>, w, (fjs, 7, infin. ffiv, Buttm. 5 105. 
 n. 5. Kiilmer 5 137. 3; fut. )jcra> Rom. 
 6, 2. Heb. 12, 9. Aristoph. Plut. 263 ; also 
 later fut. ^a-ofiai Matt. 4, 4. al. Dem. 
 794. 19; aor. 1 efj/o-a Rev. 2, 8. Ml. V. 
 H. 3. 23. Hdian. 3. 12. 26. The Attics 
 rarely used this verb except in the pres. and 
 imperf. supplying the other tenses from 
 8i6a>, Buttm. 5 114. Kiihner $ 192. 10. 
 To live, to have life, e. g. 
 
 1. Genr. to live, spoken of physical life 
 and existence, as opp. to death or non-exis 
 tence, a) Pr. of human life ; Acts 17, 
 28 ev avrco yap (op.fv. 22, 22. Rom. 7, 1. 
 2. 3. 1 Cor. 15, 45. Heb. 9, 17 ; m S>v 
 Matt. 27, 63 ; 5>vres KOI venpoi Acts 10, 
 42. Rom. 14, 9. 1 Pet. 4, 5. Hence TO tfv, 
 subst. Zi/e,Phil. 1, 21. 22. 2 Cor. 1, 8. Sept. 
 for TO Gen. 2, 7. 9 ; *TO Gen. 42, 2. 
 (Hdian. 4. 6. 9. Xen. Cyr. 7. 3. 3 ; TO ifiv 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 3. 1. Pol. 40. 3. 5.) Of per 
 sons raised from the dead; Matt. 9, 18 17 
 3vy. p.ov apri eT(\evrr)crev dXXa eX3o)i> . . . 
 K al focrai. Mark 16, 11. Luke 24, 23. 
 Acts 1, 3. 9, 41. Rev. 20, 4. 5. al. (Sept. 
 and HTO 2 K. 13, 21.) Spoken also of those 
 restored from sickness, to live, i. e. not to 
 die, to recover, to be wdl ; John 4, 50 6 vios 
 a-ov rj. v. 51. 53, comp. 52. So Sept. and 
 PiTO 2 K. 8, 8. 9. b) Hence, to exist, 
 absolutely and without end, now and here 
 after, to live forever ; so of human beings a 
 immortal, Matt. 22, 32 owe ecrnv 6 3e6s ve<- 
 pS>v, dXXa &VTUV. Mark 12, 27. Luke 20, 
 38. (Jos. de Mace. 16 ult.) Heb. 7, 8. Of 
 Jesus, John 6, 57. 14, 19. Rom. 6, 10. 
 2 Cor. 13, 4. Heb. 7, 25. Rev. 1, 18. 2, 8. 
 Of God, John 6, 57 6 S>v Trarrip, i. q. 6 
 exa>v u>r]v ev eavrw 5, 26 ; also by Hebr. in 
 an oath, Rom. 14, 11 a> eyw, Xe yei Kvpios 
 as Hive; so Sept. and ^S TO Num. 14 
 21. 28; comp. Judg. 8, 19. 1 Sam. 17, 56 
 Part. )v,ever living, eternal, 6 Seos o 
 fwi>, Matt. 16, 16. Rom. 9, 26. 1 Tim. 6 
 . 17. Heb. 3, 12. 12, 22. Rev. 4, 9. 10. 10 
 6 ; and as opp. to idols, which are dead 
 non-existing, Acts 14, 15. 2 Cor. 6, 16 
 1 Thess. 1, 9. Sept. and TO Deut. 5, 26. 
 
 2 K. 1 9, 1 6. So Bel and Drag. 5. c) Trop. 
 of things, only in particip. (av, ovo-a, 
 *<3v, living, lively, active, also enduring, 
 opp. to what is dead, torpid, inactive, and 
 also transient; e. g. Rom. 12, 1 Sno-ta . a 
 living spiritual sacrifice, opp. to the material 
 sacrifice of slaughtered victims. Heb. 4, 12 
 v yap 6 \6yos r. 3eoC, the word of God, 
 his promises and threatenings, are living, 
 sure, never in vain ; also 1 Pet. 1, 23 6 Xoyos 
 . 3. the living, efficient, enduring word of 
 God. By Hebr. Part. <Sv, life-giving, like 
 Pi. i" 1 * 1 " 1 j e. g. John 6, 51 6 apros 6 u>v, liv 
 ing, i. e. life-giving bread, which imparts 
 eternal life, comp. the foil, clause. Acts 7. 
 38 Xoyia fvra. Heb. 10, 20 6Soy c3a-a. 
 1 Pet. 1, 3 ATI-IS 3o-a. 2, 4 Xi Soj &v, of 
 Christ as having and giving life in himself 
 (comp. John 5, 26. 6, 57). v. 5 Xt Soi fwi/rer, 
 of Christians as having life in and from 
 Christ ; comp. in lett. d. So Sept. trans. 
 tf<r6v p,e KT\. for ?i*n p s . 119, 25. 37. 40. 
 50. al. Ez. 13, 22. d) Spec, v 8 top fwv, 
 living water, i. e. the water of running 
 streams and fountains, opp. to that of stag 
 nant cisterns, pools, marshes ; but also life- 
 giving in a spiritual sense, John 4, 10. 11. 
 7, 38. Rev. 7, 17. So pr. Sept. and ain 
 Oi*n Gen. 26, 19. Zch. 14, 8. 
 
 2. As to the means of living, to live on 
 or by any thing, with eni nvi and e* TWOS. 
 Matt. 4, 4 OVK en apra> judVo) fto-erai 6 ui>3p. 
 1 Cor. 9, 14 fK TOV evayyeXiov ffiv. So c. 
 e K Dem. 1309. 26 ; c. did Xen. Mem. 3. 
 3. 11. 
 
 3. Of the manner of living, to live in any 
 way, to pass one s life in any manner ; Luke 
 15, 13 <ov dcruiTGis. Acts 26, 5 e^rjcra <bapi- 
 o-alof. Gal. 2, 14 e%viKa>s rjv. 2 Tirh. 3, 
 12 evo-e8s tfv. Tit. 2, 12 f. <ra>(pp6vas KT\. 
 Luke 2, 36 ^crao-a err) pera dv8pos. So 
 Wisd. 14, 28. Luc. Char. 17. Xen. Ag. 11. 
 8. Hence rj v TIVI, ev TIVI, Kara rivt, to live 
 to, in, according to any one, i. e. to be devo 
 ted to, to live conformably to the will, pur 
 pose, precepts, example, of any person or 
 thing; e. g. TJI> TW 3ew, Luke 20, 38. 
 Rom. 6, 10. 11. Gal. 2, 19; TW Kvpi<a, 
 Christ, Rom. 14, 8. 2 Cor. 5, 15 ; T W irvev- 
 fiari Gal. 5, 25 ; eWw Rom. 14, 7. 2 Cor. 
 5,15; TTJ Sucaioo-vvT) 1 Pet. 2, 24. (Alciphr. 
 1. 37. Dern. 80. 26 3>tXiW<i> favres Kal ov 
 rff eavriav rraTpi Si.) So ev ap-aprla, under 
 the power and in the practice of sin, Rom. 
 6, 2 ; ev Tn oTft, full of faith, under the 
 power of faith, Gal. 2, 20 ; ev Ko<rp,a>, in con 
 formity to the world, Col. 2, 20 ; iv avrois 
 3, 7. (./El. V. H. 3. 13 C ev ow. Comp. 
 vivo in litteris, Cic. ad Div. 9. 26.) Also 
 
317 
 
 77X00) 
 
 /cara o-dpica iji>, to live after, according to, 
 tkejlesh, Rom. 8, 12. 13. So Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 
 44 prj Kara TOVS vopovs. 
 
 4. Spec, to live in favour with God, to 
 live and prosper, to be happy, blessed; genr. 
 Rom. 10, 5 et Gal. 3, 12 6 Troirjcras avra fj- 
 o-fTai fi> avrois, comp. Lev. 18, 5 where 
 Sept. for ""H . 1 Thess. 3, 8 on vvv fw/iei/, 
 for now we live, feel ourselves happy. Rom. 
 7, 9 e yw 8e ea>v XP S v6fj.ov, I was alive, 
 self-satisfied, happy ; opp. e yo> 5 tarf^atnv 
 v. 10. Sept. and ^n Dent. 8, 1. Ps. 22, 
 27. So Dem. 434. 6. Comp. vivo Catull. 5. 
 1. Hence, to have eternal life, to be admit 
 ted to the immortality and bliss of the Re 
 deemer s kingdom ; Luke 10, 28 TOVTO Troi et, 
 KM 7)077. John 5, 25. 6, 51. 58. 11,25. 
 14, 19. Rom. 1, 17. 8, 13. Gal. 3, 11. 
 1 Thess. 5, 10. Heb. 12, 9. 1 Pet. 4, 6. 
 1 John 4, 9 Iva f))(ro/j.ei> 81 avrov sc. TOV 
 viov. -j- 
 
 Ze/3eSat09, ou, 6, Zebedee, Heb. ^t 
 i. q. !~!*^2! (Jehovah s gift) Zabdi, pr. n. of 
 the husband of Salome and father of the 
 apostles James and John, Matt. 4, 21 bis. 
 10, 2. 20, 20. 26, 37. 27, 56. Mark 1, 19. 
 20. 3,17. 10,35. Luke 5, 10. John 21, 2. 
 
 7), 6v, (fe co,) boiling, hot, Dios- 
 cor. feo-Tw v8a>p. In N. T. trop. hot, fer 
 vid, fervent, Rev. 3, 15 bis. 16. 
 
 ^eOyo?, fos, ovs, TO, (fetfyj/u/ii,) a yoke 
 of animals, i. e. two or more animals yoked 
 or working together, Luke 14, 19 feuy/j /3o- 
 <ai> riyopacra. rrevre. Sept. for IBS 1 K. 19, 
 19. Is. 5, 10. So Ml V. H. 9/25. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 4. 5. Hence genr. a pair, couple, 
 e. g. of doves, Luke 2, 24. Sept. for t^nttS 
 Lev. 5, 11. So Pol. 31. 3. 5. Xen. (Ec. 
 7. 18. 
 
 as, 77, ({fVKTrjpios, tvyw- 
 fu,) pr. fem. adj. yoking, binding, connect 
 ing, ^Eschyl. Pers. 736 yefpvpav yaiv Svolv 
 {(VKTTjpiav. In N. T. subst. a band, fasten 
 ing, Acts 27, 40. Comp. TO feuKTrjpioi/ a 
 yoke, ^Eschyl. Ag. 529. 
 
 Zev$, gen. A i 6 s, 6, Jupiter, the supreme 
 god of the heathen mythology ; Acts 14, 
 12. 13 Atoj TOV OVTOS irpb TTJS TrdXfwr, i. e. 
 whose temple was outside of the city. 
 
 e<u. f. feVw, to boil, to be hot, of water, 
 Horn. II. 21. 365. Plut. Demetr. 24. In 
 N. T. trop. to be fervid, fervent, T irvtvpaTi 
 Acts 18,25. Rom. 12, 11. So Plut. an seni 
 sit ger. Resp. 13. Plato Tim. 70 b. ib. 85. 
 e. The forms of fe w are not usually con 
 tracted, Buttm. 5 105. n. 2. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 220 sq. 
 
 ty]\6V(i) } f. evow, (fJJXor,) to be zealous, 
 i. q. 77X000, e. g. for good, Rev. 3, 19 Lachm. 
 Comp. Simpl. in Epict. 26. p. 131 ed. Sal- 
 mas, ovoels ru>v TO dycftbv r)TOvvrcav (^Soi/et 
 i) ^r/Xfvfi TroTf. 
 
 ?}\09, ov, 6, (few, for feeXos,) zeal, fer 
 vour, enthusiasm, vehement passion. 
 
 1. Genr. and for good, zeal, ardour, fer 
 vent mind, for any cause or person; c. gen. 
 John 2, 17 6 fj\os TOV O IKOV o-ov. Rom. 
 10, 2 (fjXov 3eou e^ovo-iz/. With virep TWOS 
 2 Cor. 7, 7. Col. 4, 13 ; absol. 2 Cor. 7, 11. 
 9, 2. Phil. 3, 6 KOTO }Xoi>, as to zeal sc. for 
 Judaism, comp. v. 5. Sept. for f!N5p Ps. 
 69, 10. 119, 138. 1 Mace. 2,58. Luc. adv. 
 Indoct. 17. Plut. Lycurg. 4 mid. 
 
 2. By Hebr. jealousy, as of a husband ; 
 c. gen. 2 Cor. 11, 2 ^Xw -yap v/xuy 3eoO 
 frpXw, for I am jealous over you with godly 
 jealousy, i. e. such as God has. The rela 
 tion of Israel to God is every where shad 
 owed forth by the prophets under the em 
 blem of the conjugal union ; Is. 54, 5. 62, 
 
 5. Jer. 3, 1 sq. Ez. 16, 8 sq. 23, 1 sq. Hos. 
 c. 2. Paul here applies the same to the 
 relation of the Corinthians to Christ, to 
 whom he had espoused them. Sept. pr. foi 
 fi!$3j3 Prov. 6, 34. 27, 4. 
 
 3. In a bad sense: a) heart-burning, 
 emulation, envy, Acts 13, 45. Rom. 13, 13. 
 1 Cor. 3, 3. James 3, 14. 16; Plur. 2 Cor. 
 12, 20. Gal. 5, 20. Sept. for nX2p Eccl. 9, 
 
 6. So 1 Mace. 8. 16. Hdian. 3.*2. 16. Plato 
 Phil. 47. e ; plur. Plato Legg. 679. c. b) 
 By Hebr. indignation, anger, wrath, Acts 
 5, 17. Heb. 10,27 KOI nvpos fi)Xoy, and fiery 
 indignation; comp. Zeph. 1,18. 3, 8, where 
 Sept. eV Trupt fr)Xou for MX3p ^N3. So 
 genr. Sept. and nx3p Ez. 5, 13. 35, 11. 
 
 77X00), w, f. cixrw, (fJjXor,) to be zealous 
 towards, i. e. for or against any person or 
 thing. 
 
 1. Genr. for a person or thing, e. g. for 
 good, absol. Rev. 3, 19 Rec. With an ace. 
 of thing, i. q. to desire ardently, to be eager 
 for; 1 Cor. 12,31 f^Xoire 8e TO. ^apicru.aTa 
 TO. KoeiTTova. 14, 1. 39. Pass, to be zeal 
 ously affected, to show oneself zealous, tv 
 KoXw Gal. 4, 18. Sept. for ^na Prov. 3, 
 31. So Ecclus. 51, 18. Diod. Sic. 1. 95 
 mid. Dem. 500. 2 f. aperr]v. For persons, 
 i. q. to have ardent affection for, to love ; 
 e. g. externally, to zealously ajfect, to make 
 a show of zeal for, c. ace. Gal. 4, 17 bis. 
 Sept. pr. for N?H? 2 Sam. 21, 2. Prov. 24, 1. 
 So Soph. Electr. 1027. 
 
 2. By Hebr. to be jealous over any one, 
 as a husband, c. ace. trop. 2 Cor. 1 1 , 2 ; see 
 
318 
 
 fully in fiXos no. 2. Sept. pr. for x*p Num. 
 5, 14. 
 
 3. In a bad sense, against a person, to be 
 jealous of. to envy, c. ace. Acts 7, 9 fj?Xo>- 
 travrfs TOV laxrrjip. Absol. to be envious, 
 moved with envy, Acts 17, 5. 1 Cor. 13, 4. 
 James 4, 2 (povevfTf *ai ^Xovre, ye fo7/ anJ 
 Aat-e (deadly) envy. Hes. Op. 1. 23. Horn. 
 H. in Cer. 168,223; comp. Plut. conjug. 
 Prase. 41. 
 
 77X60x779, ov, 6, (^Xdw,) 1. a zealot, 
 
 1. e. one zealous for any thing, eagerly desi 
 rous of, c. gen. 1 Cor. 14, 12 ^Xwrai eVre 
 MfvpaTuv. Tit. 2, 14. 1 Pet. 3, 13 Lachm. 
 So Hdian. 6. 8. 5. Pol. 10. 25. 2. Plato 
 Prot. 343. a. Spec, a zealot in behalf of the 
 Jewish law and institutions, Acts 21, 20 
 fTjXcorai TOV VQJJ.OV. (2 Mace. 4, 2.) Acts 22, 
 3. Gal. 1, 14. Comp. Num. 25, 13. 1 Mace. 
 
 2, 43. Jos. c. Ap. 1. 22. p. 456 Haverc. 
 
 2. With the art. 6 ZJ/XWTTJ?, Zeloles, the 
 Zealot, in the Jewish sense above, as the 
 surname of Simon one of the apostles, 
 Acts 1,13. Luke 6, 15 ; elsewhere called 6 
 Kawi/iYjjy, the Cananit.e, from Heb. NSJ3 , 
 Aram. "jXJp , zealous, of which j^Xwrijf is 
 the translation, Matt. 10, 4. Mark 3, 18. 
 See in 2t/io>i> no. 2. Prob. there were al 
 ready extant, in the time of Christ, the 
 germs of the sect or party afterwards called 
 ZrjXwTai, Zealots ; the members of which 
 professed great attachment to the Jewish 
 institutions, and undertook to punish with 
 out trial those guilty of violating them ; un 
 der which pretext they committed the great 
 est excesses and crimes for several years 
 before the destruction of Jerusalem. See 
 Jos. B. J. 4. 3. 9. ib. 4. 5. 1-4. ib. 4. 6. 3. 
 ib. 7. 8. 1. 
 
 a?, 17, (kindr. fia/ndco, Sa/xwj/u, Lat. 
 damnum,) loss, damage, Acts 27, 10. 21. 
 Phil. 3, 7 Tavra TJyrjp.ai . . . rjp.lav, these 
 things I counted loss. v. 8. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 
 29. Luc. Lexiph. 24. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 6. 
 
 j oj, f. oxrco, (7/ua,) to cause loss, 
 to do damage, to any one, .-El. V. H. 3. 23. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 30; pr. with two accus. 
 Buttm. 5 131. 5. Kiihner 280. 2. In 
 N. T. only Pass, or Mid. to suffer loss, to 
 eceive damage, 1 Cor. 3, 15 ; V prj^fvi 
 2 Cor. 7, 9. Phil. 3, 8 TO. Trdvra e^twSijv, 
 I have suffered the loss of all things, where 
 for the ace. retained in the Pass, constr. see 
 Buttm. 134. 6. (Plato Legg. 916. d. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 1. 16.) Pass. aor. 1 e^/uwStyv in 
 Mid. signif. to bring loss upon oneself, to 
 lose, e. g. TTJV fyvx^v Matt. 16, 26. Mark 8, 
 
 36 ; tavTov Luke 9, 25. See Buttm. 135. 
 4. { 136. 1, 2. 
 
 Z?)va<?, a, 6, Zenas, 6 vopiicos, prob. a 
 Christian teacher, Tit. 3, 13. 
 
 77x60). w, f. 770-0), 1. to seek, to search 
 after, pr. in order to find out or discover, 
 e. g. what is lost, c. ace. Matt. 18, 12 f^rel 
 TO TrXavajfjLfvov. Luke 19, 10. John 1, 39. 
 4, 27 ; ace. impl. Luke 15, 8. With ace. of 
 pers. Matt. 2, 13 ^e XXei yap H. fjjretj/ TO 
 iraiSiov. Mark 3, 32. Luke 2, 45. John 7, 1 1. 
 2 Tim. 1,17. al. Sept. for tflga Gen. 37, 
 15. 16. 1 Sam. 10, 2. 14. So Hdian. 2. 6. 
 2. Xen. An. 2. 3. 2. Vect. 4. 4. Also 
 {rjTfiv nuts, to seek how, to seek opportu 
 nity, Mark 11, 18. 14, 1. 11. 
 
 2. Genr. to seek for oneself, i. e. in ordei 
 to find, get, acquire ; absol. Matt. 7, 7 7- 
 TfiTf Km fiipfjcrfTf. v. 8. (Arr. Epict. 4. 1. 
 51.) With ace. Matt. 12, 43 frrovv dvd- 
 Travaiv. 26, 59 ^fvSo/ji.apTvpiav. Mark 14, 
 55. Luke 13, 6. 7 maprrov tv airy. 22, (i. 
 1 Cor. 7, 27. Rev. 9, 6 TOV Sawzroi/. (Luc. 
 Hermot. 49. Hdian. 4. 12. 8. Xen. Mem. 4. 
 
 2. 5.) Also with the idea of earnestness 
 and anxiety, to seek, to strive after ; c. ace. 
 Matt. 6, 33 {rjTflre Se npuiTov TTJV jStunXfiov 
 TOV 3eoi) KTX. Luke 12, 29 ^ (^TOT* ri (pd- 
 yj/Te KTX. John 5, 30. 44. 7, 18. 8, 50. 1 Cor. 
 10, 24. 33. 2 Cor. 12, 14. Phil. 2, 21. Col. 
 
 3, 1. Pont, for ttj^a Ps. 4, 3. 34, 15. So 
 Luc. Plialar. pr. 5. Plut. Mor. II. p. 40. 
 Spec, to w7c to buy, e. g. papyaptTas Matt. 
 13, 45. So Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 26. 
 
 3. Spec, to seek to find out, to inquire, to 
 ask; c. jrepi TIVOS, John 16, 19 irep\ TOVTOV 
 j^Teire /XT dXX^Xwi . So C. ace. to ask for, 
 Acts 9, 1 1 ^Tfjcrov (v oiKia KT\. ^El". V. H. 
 2. 13 pen. Xen. Cyr. 8. 5. 13. 
 
 4. Spec, to seek, i. q. to look for, to re 
 quire ; c. ace. of pers. John 4, 23 ; ace. of 
 thing, 1 Cor. 1, 22 ol "EXXrji/er <ro<piav 7- 
 Tovo ti . 2 Cor. 13, 3 ; ace. et Trapd TIVOS, 
 Mark 8, 11 ^rjTovvrfs Trap CIVTOV cnj/ietoi/. 
 Luke 11, 16. Pass. Heb. 8, 7; c. napd 
 TIVOS Luke 12, 48; c. ei> TLVL, 1 Cor. 4, 2 
 ^ijTetTOt eV TOIJ OLKov6fj.ois iva KT\. Sept. for 
 tti]33 Neh. 5, 12. 18. Aristot. de Gen. et 
 corrupt. 2. 5; c. Trapd TIVOS Dem. 374. 16. 
 
 5. With an infin. to seek to do or effect 
 any thing. a) Genr. i. q. to endeavour, to 
 strive; c. inf. aor. Matt. 21,46 faTovvres 
 OVTOV xpaTTJo-ai. Luke 5, 18. 11,54. 17,33. 
 John 10, 39. 19, 12. Acts 13,8. 16,10. 
 Rom. 10, 3 ; c. inf. pres. Luke 6, 19: Gal. 
 1,10. Also c. iva, instead of an inf. pres. 
 1 Cor. 14, 12 ^TetTe Iva Trepio-crevrjTe. Sept. 
 c. inf. for (15)33 Dent. 13, 10. 1 Sam. 19, 10 
 
319 
 
 So Plut. Thes. 35 mid. Xen. An. 5. 4. 33. 
 b) Also i. q. to desire, to wish ; c. inf. Matt. 
 12, 46. 47 ijjTovvTfs airw XaArJaai (comp. 
 Luke 8, 19). Luke 9, 9 . John 7, 4. Acts 
 27, 30. So Palscph. 53. 5. Xen. Ven. 13. 5. 
 6. By Hebr. a) fqreij/ rbv SeoV, 
 to seek God, i. e. to turn to him, as a humble 
 and sincere worshipper ; comp. eVfr/re a) no. 3. 
 Acts 17, 27. Rom. 10. 20, quoted from Is. 
 65, 1 where Sept. for cpa ; and so Ex. 33, 
 7. Ps. 24, 6. b) fjjreii/ rfjv -^-VXTJV TWOS, 
 to seek the life of any one, to plot against 
 him, to seek to kill him, Matt. 2, 20. Rom. 
 11, 3, quoted from 1 K. 19, 10 where Sept. 
 for B i s E3"nx ttJpa ; also Ex. 4, 19. Jer. 
 44, 30. T + " 
 
 aros, TO, rjTfO), an nqury, 
 question, i. e. topic of inquiry or dispute; 
 Acts 15, 2 irtp\ TOV ^nj/xaToy TOVTOV. 18, 
 15. 23, 29. 25, 19. 26, 3. Sept. Ez. 36, 
 37. Soph. (Ed. R. 278. Plato Rep. 368. c. 
 
 tyrr/cris, ecas, jy, (f^Te w,) the act of seek 
 ing, search, Thuc. 1. 20 . rrjs a\rj^tias. 
 In N. T. inquiry, discussion, dispute; John 
 3, 25 lytvfTo ^Trjo-is. Acts 15, 2 Grb. 1 Tim. 
 1,4. 6, 4. (Hdot. 2. 54. Luc. Demon. 28. 
 Plato Polit. 266. d.) Meton. i. q. ^nj/xa, 
 question, i. e. topic of inquiry or dispute, 
 Acts 25, 20. 2 Tim. 2, 23. Tit. 3, 9. Comp. 
 Plato Apol. 29. c. 
 
 "C^aviov, ov, TO, zizanium, Suid. f/ eV 
 TW crtVo) aipa, Lat. lolium, ( infelix lolium 
 \ irg. Geor. 1. 153,) Engl. darnel, i. e. lo 
 lium temulentum, bearded darnel, a weed or 
 grass growing among wheat and other kinds 
 of grain, and at first having a close resem 
 blance to them; Plur. Matt. 13, 25. 26. 27. 
 29. 30. 36. 38. 40. The Rabbins call it T?it 
 bastard, bastard w r heat ; the Arabs zawAn ; 
 see Buxtorf Lex. Rabb. 680. Wetst. in 
 Matt. 13, 25. Rosenm. Alterthumsk. IV. i. 
 p. 120. Engl. vers. tares. 
 
 Zopo{3d/3e\ 6, indec. Zorobabel, Heb. 
 baa^T Zerubbabel, pr. n. a) The leader 
 of the first body of Jewish exiles from Baby 
 lon to Jerusalem, Matt. 1, 12. 13. Comp. 
 Ezra 2, 2. 3, 2. 8. 1 Chr. 3, 19. b) An 
 ancestor of Jesus, Luke 3, 27. See Gr. 
 Harm. p. 186. 
 
 b009, ov, 6, (kindr. yvo<pos, i^ cpoj,) 
 (1 trkness, blackness, thick gloom; Heb. 12, 
 18 Lachm. o0w, for O-KOTW in Rec. Else 
 where of the darkness of Tartarus or Ge- 
 heiuia, see in a8rjs , e. g. 2 Pet. 2, 4 empaly 
 o0ot> raprapclxra? nap(8a>Kev KT\. thrust 
 ing them down to Tartarus in chains of 
 tw\ i. e. where darkness lies like 
 
 chains upon them. Jude 6. Intens. 
 TOV O-KOTOVS, blackness of darkness, thickest 
 darkness, 2 Pet. 2, 17. Jude 13 ; see Gesen. 
 Lehrg. p. 671. d. Horn. II. 15. 191. Pol. 
 18. 3. 7. Luc. Contempl. 1. D. Mort. 15. 2. 
 
 i,) a yoke, serving 
 to couple any two things together, e. g. 
 cattle, Ml. V. H. 5. 14. Sept. for Vi? 
 1 Sam. 6, 7. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Trop. a yoke. a) As an emblem ol 
 servitude, 1 Tim. 6, 1 virb vyov SovXoi. 
 Sept. and bl S Lev. 26, 13. So Dem. 322. 12 
 vybs 8ov\oa-vvT]s. Plato Ep. 354. d. b) 
 Denoting severe precepts, moral bondage, 
 e. g. of the Mosaic law, Acts 15, 10. Gal. 
 5, 1. Hence by antith. of the gentle pre 
 cepts of Christ, Matt. 11, 29. 30. Sept. for 
 ii Jer. 5, 5. 
 
 2. the beam of a balance, which unites 
 the two scales ; hence by synecd. a balance, 
 scales, Rev. 6. 5 e%a>v vybv lv Ttj x- Sept. 
 for oi3Txa Lev. 19, 36. Hos. 12, 7. &\. 
 V. H.To. 6. Plato Tim. 63. b. 
 
 rjs, T], (prob. few,) leaven, sour 
 dough. Matt. 13, 33 et Luke 13, 21 6/zoi a 
 f<TT\v fj (3ao~. TO>V ovp. vp.r), KT\. Matt. 16, 
 
 12. Sept. for ixto Ex. 12, 15. 13, 7. 
 (Jos. Ant. 3. 10. 6. Plut. Quaest. Rom. 109.) 
 And as leaven causes to ferment and turn 
 sour, hence proverbially, 1 Cor. 5, 6 et Gal. 
 
 5. 9 fJUKpa vp.rj okov TO <^vpap.a fv/*ol, a 
 little leaven leavens the whole mass, i. q. a 
 few bad men corrupt a multitude. Trop. 
 for impurity, corruptness, perverseness of 
 life, doctrine, heart, Matt. 16, 6. 11. Mark 
 
 8, 15 bis. Luke 12, 1. 1 Cor. 5, 7. 8 bis. 
 
 y//.6&>, oj, f. clxrca, (fv/i?;,) to leaven, to 
 make ferment, Pass. Matt. 13, 33 et Luke 
 
 13, 21. Proverbially, 1 Cor. 5, 6 et Gal. 5, 
 
 9. see in frw. Sept. for f^n Ex. 12, 34. 39. 
 Hos. 7, 4. Plut. Symp. 3. 10. 3. p. 256. 
 
 cftwypeci), w, f. Tjerco, ({coor, dypeuco,) to 
 take aliie, to take prisoner in war, Horn. II. 
 
 6. 46. Xen. An. 4. 7. 22. In N. T. trop. 
 to take, to capture, i. q. to win over, c. ace. 
 Luke 5, 10 drtpanrovs eo-rj ftuypobi/, comp. 
 v. 11. Pass. part. perf. 2 Tim. 2, 26 e fw- 
 ypijfjievoi VTT avTov, taken captive by him, 
 Satan, i. q. ensnared, seduced. 
 
 &)?;. Tjy. 17, (a,) life, the being alive. 
 
 1 . Pr. of physical life and existence, as 
 opp. to death and non-existence. a) Genr. 
 of human life etc. Luke 16, 25. Acts 17, 25 
 StSov? Trao-i fw^. 1 Cor. 3, 22. 15, 19. 
 Heb. 7, 3. James 4, 11. Rev. 11,11. 16,3 
 Grb. Truo-a tyvxT) C"^) * 3- V^X 1 ? fwo a in 
 Rec. every liiinn: soul. Sept. for o^n Gen. 
 
320 
 
 2,7. 25,7. (Luc. Tox. 38. Plato Phsed. 16. 
 p. 71. d.) Of life or existence after rising 
 from the dead, a living again; only of 
 Christ Rom. 5, 10. 2 Cor. 4, 10. 11. 12 ; 
 trop. of the Jewish people, Rom. 11, 15. 
 b) Spec, existence, life, absolutely and with 
 out end; Heb. 7, 16 Kara 8wafj.iv fays d- 
 KaroXvrov. So gvXov fays, tree of life, which 
 preserves from death, Rev. 2, 7. 22, 2. 14 ; 
 comp. Sept. Gen. 2, 9. 3, 22. Also apros 
 fays, bread of life, John 6, 35 ; {/Scop fays, 
 water of life, Rev. 21, 6. 22, 1. 17. But 
 eVi fays Tryyas vSuTwv Rev. 7, 17 Grb. is 
 equivalent to cVi faa-as Tryyas vftaTav in 
 Rec. to living fountains of water, i. e. peren 
 nial ; see in a no. 1 . d. Comp. below 
 in no. 3. b. Melon, of the Logos, life, ab 
 solutely, for the source of all life, John 1, 4. 
 
 I John 1, 1. 2. 
 
 2. Also life, way of life, manner of living, 
 conduct, in a moral respect ; Rom. 6, 4 eV 
 KmvorrjTi fays 7rfpnraTyo-a>fj.fv. Eph. 4, 18 
 TTJS fays TOV 3eot), i. e. which God requires, 
 ag-oe%life. 2 Pet. 1, 3. 
 
 3. Spec, life, i. e. welfare, happiness. 
 a) Genr. Luke 12, 15. John 6, 51 inrep rys 
 TOV Koo-fj.ov fays. Acts 2, 28 68ovs fays, 
 the ways of life and happiness, from Ps. 16, 
 
 II where Sept. for c^Ti. 1 Pet. 3, 10 6 
 yap SeAcoi/ fayv dyanqv, from Ps. 34, 13 for 
 Q "? r ] b) In the gospel sense, eternal life, 
 salvation, i. e. the bliss and glory in the 
 kingdom of God, which awaits the true dis 
 ciples of Christ after the resurrection, and 
 of which Christians have the hope and fore 
 taste here on earth ; so fay alwvios Matt. 
 19, 16. 17. John 3, 15. 16. 5,24.al. y fat, 
 y /xeXXovtra 1 Tim. 4, 8 ; 17 oircoy fay 6, 
 19; absol. y fay, Matt. 7, 14. 18, 8. 9. 
 John 5, 40. 6, 33. 53. Acts 5, 20 TO. pypara 
 Tys fays TavTys, the words, doctrine, of eter 
 nal life. Rom. 5, 17 eV fafj Pao-i\evo-ovo-i. 
 v. 18. 7, 10. 8,2.6.10. Phil. 2, 16. 2 Tim. 
 
 1, 1. 1 John 3, 14. 5, 12. 13. 16. al For 
 8ip\os v. pifiXiov o>ys, see in /3//3Xoy. 
 So 6 o~Tf(f>avos Tys fays, the crown of life, 
 the reward of eternal life, James 1,12. Rev. 
 
 2, 10 ; x<*P l * TTJS fays* the gift of eternal 
 life, 1 Pet. 3, 7 ; ao-py fays fls fayv 2 Cor. 
 2, 16. Meton. for the author and giver 
 of eternal life, John 5, 26. 11, 25. 14, 6. 
 Col. 3, 4. 1 John 1,2. 5, 20. Also for the 
 cause, source, means of eternal life, John 5, 
 39. 12, 5J. 17, 3. + 
 
 y s , y, (favw/j.1,) a zone, belt, gir 
 dle, Matt. 3,4. 10, H. Mark 1, 6. 6,8. Acts 
 21, 11 bis. Rev. 1, 13. 15, 6. Sept. for-ax 
 2 K. 1, 8 ; man 1 K. 2, 5. So Hdian. 1. 
 
 11. 13. Xen. An. 1. 4. 9. The girdle waa 
 worn by both sexes among the Jews, be 
 cause of their long flowing dress. It was 
 sometimes of linen or other fine material, 
 Jer. 13, 1. Prov. 31,24. Ez. 16, 10; or also 
 of leather, 2 K. 1, 8. Matt. 3, 4. In it was 
 worn the sword, 1 Sam. 25, 13. 2 K. 20, 8 , 
 as also the writer s inkstand, as at the pre 
 sent day, Ez. 9, 2. Niebuhr s Arabien p. 64. 
 Shaw s Travels p. 227. The folds of the 
 girdle served also as a pocket or purse for 
 money, Matt. 10, 9. Mark 6, 8 ; in this sense 
 the Rabbins call it xn^Q and m:"X , see 
 Buxtorf Lex. Rab. 1753. So Pliit. Symp. 
 4. 2. 3, favyv ^aX/covy exovo-av. Liv. 33. 
 29 argentum in zonis habentes. Hor. Ep 
 
 2. 2. 40. 
 
 fybvvVfJit v. fcozWo), f. faa-m, to gird, 
 to put on a girdle, c. ace. John 21, 18 bis. 
 [Acts 12, 8.] Sept. for itX Job 38, 3 ; -ian 
 Ex. 29, 9. Horn. Od. 18/76. Theocr. 16. 
 81. Pausan. 9. 17. 3. 
 
 (i)0<yov(i), &, f. yo-a>, (faoyovos , fa6*, 
 obsol. yeVco,) to bring forth alive, to engen 
 der living animals, Diod. Sic. 1. 7, 10, 88. 
 In N. T. to preserve alive, c. ace. Luke 
 17, 33 ; Pass. Acts 7, 19. [1 Tim. 6, 13.] 
 Sept. and rnn Pi. Hiph. Ex. 1,17. Judg. 8, 
 19. 1 K. 20, 31. So Theoph. ad Antol. I. 
 p. 74, 17 Trvoy T. SeoC faoyovd TO TTCLV. 
 
 tjeooz , ov, TO, (faos, fa<,) a living thing, 
 an animal, beast, Heb. 13, 11. 2 Pet. 2, 12. 
 Jude 10. Symbolically, Rev. 4, 6. 7 quater. 
 8. 9. 5, 6. 8. 11. 14. 6, 1. 3. 5. 6. 7. 7, 11. 
 
 14, 3. 15, 7. 19, 4. Comp. Dan. 7, 3 sq. 
 Ez. 1,5 sq. Sept. for n*n Ez. 1. c Ps. 68, 
 11. Hdian. 1. 15. 7. Xeii. Mem. 4. 3. 10. 
 
 tJ&JOTTOieto, ci, f. T]<TU>, (faoTTOLOS , faos, 
 
 7roiw,) to make alive, to give life to, to 
 quicken. 
 
 1. Pr. c. ace. 1 Tim. 6, 13 TOV %eov TOV 
 faonoLovvros TCI TTcivTa. Sept. for Fi*)! Pi. 
 Hiph. 2 K. 5, 7. Neh. 9, 6. So Act. Thorn. 
 10 6 3e<jr TOV Kocrp-ov faonoilav. Of the 
 dead, to make alive again, to quicken, c. ace. 
 John 5, 21 bis. Rom. 4, 17. 8, 11. 1 Cor. 
 
 15, 22 ; Pass. 1 Pet. 3, 18. So Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 679 TOVS veicpovs faovoiyo-ai. Of 
 seeds, Pass, to be quickened, to sprout, 1 Cor. 
 15, 36. 
 
 2. Spec, to give eternal life, to make alive 
 forever, sc. in the bliss and privileges of 
 Christ s kingdom, of which the hope and 
 foretaste are enjoyed here, comp. in ^77 no. 
 
 3. b; absol. John 6, 63. 1 Cor. 15, 45. 
 2 Cor. 3, 6. Gal. 3, 21. Comp. Sept. and 
 fi*n Ecc. 7, 12. 
 
321 
 
 ^f, a particle disjunctive, interrogative, 
 comparative ; see Matth. { 619. Buttm. 149. 
 m. 7. Kiihner 5 323. 1, 2. 5 344. 5. Winer 
 $ 07. 3. 
 
 I. DISJUNCTIVE, or, Lat. out. a) Genr. 
 Matt. 5, 17 TOV v6p.ov fj TOVS TrpcxprjTas, V. 
 36. Mark 4, 30. Luke 9, 25. John 6, 19. 
 Acts 3, 12. Heb. 2, 6. al. saepiss. Hdian. 
 3. 15. y. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 18. Hell. 3. 
 3. 9. 
 
 b) Repeated, rj . . . fj, either . . . or, Lat. out 
 . . . aut, marking strong distinction or anti 
 thesis ; 3Iatt. 6, 24 *j yap TOV tva p.ia-Tjcrfi 
 ...77 (vos dv%e(Tat. Luke 16, 13. 1 Cor. 
 14, 6. 2 Cor. 1, 13. Luc. D. Deor. 18. 
 1 pen. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 16. 
 
 II. INTERROGATIVE, where however the 
 primary signif. or is strictly retained, or whe 
 ther ? or if perhaps ? an forte 1 comp. Buttm. 
 I.e. Winer 5 61. 1. b. 
 
 a) Pr. indirect, in the latter clause of a 
 double interrogation after -n-oTtpov, whether 
 ... or, e. g. John 7, 17 yi/axTfrai irorepov eVc 
 T. 3ecG torn/, T) eya> KT\. Winer 1. C. Matth. 
 619. 2. So Luc. D. Deor. 20. 3. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 3. 2, 15. Also genr. without TTOTC- 
 pov expressed, Matt. 9, 5. 22, 17. Luke 7, 
 19. 20. Acts 8, 34. Rom. 2, 4. So Xen. 
 Conv. 4. 52. 
 
 b) Genr. and in a direct question, where 
 the interrogation implies a negation of some 
 thing preceding. Matt. 7, 9 77 ris eorti/ e 
 vfj.o)v avZpviros ; 20, 15. Rom. 3,29. 1 Cor. 
 
 1, 13. 9, G. 8. 10. 2 Cor. 1, 17. al. 
 
 III. COMPARATIVE, than, e. g. a) Af 
 ter comparatives and words implying com 
 parison ; Matt. 10, 15 avaa-oTtpov . . .*] rfj 
 7ToA (Kflvrj. Mark 10, 25. Luke 16, 17. 
 John 4. 1. Rom. 13, 11; /xaXAov fj, more 
 than, rather than, Matt. 18, 13. John 3, 19. 
 Acts 4, 19; irplv fj, sooner than, before, 
 Matt. 1, 18. Mark 14, 30. Luke 2, 26. Acts 
 
 2, 20 ; comp. Buttm. $ 149. m. 7. So af 
 ter 3 A<u, 1 Cor. 14, 19 SeXco nfvre Aoyouj 
 810 TOV voos fJiov AoAi5<rat . . . 77 pvpiovs Xoy. 
 KT \. Luc. D. Deor. 18. 1. Xen. CEc. 10. 
 6. Conv. 2. 3 ; after 3eXo> Arr. Epict. 3. 1. 
 Comp. Buttm. 1. c. Kiihner 323. 2. Matth. 
 ^691. 3. 
 
 b) After oXXor, trepos, and the like ; 
 Acts 17, 21 A^T/VOIOI tls ovSeV fTfpov tv- 
 Kaipovv, TJ \tytiv rrX. Comp. Matth. 1. c. 
 So Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 17. CEc. 3. 3. With 
 oXXor or the like implied, John 13, 10 6 
 XfXovMVos ov xpdav [a\\ijv] e^et 77 TOVS 
 21 
 
 KT\. Acts 24, 21 rt d&Kr^a [aXXov] 
 77 TTf/n /iias KT\. 
 
 c) After the positive degree, or other 
 like word, where it may be rendered rather 
 than, more than, i. q. pa\\ov fj, so that thn 
 positive with fj is equivalent to the com 
 parative. The grammarians supply ^loXXoj . 
 but the construction is found also in classic 
 writers, perhaps from negligence, and in 
 N. T. would seem to come rather through 
 the Sept. from the Heb. mode of comparison 
 with -,a ; see Winer 36. 1. Matth. 457. 
 n. 1. Herm. ad Vig. p. 882. Matt. 18, 8 
 KaXoi/ croi fcrrtv etcreXSeii els TTJV a>r)V ^<u- 
 \6v 77 *iAXoi>, T) 8vo xflpas e^ovra ft\rfir)vai. 
 (Is TO Ttvp TO altoviov. v. 9. Mark 9, 43. 45. 
 47. Luke 15, 7. 17, 2. Sept. and -,73 Gen. 
 38, 26. Ps. 118, 8. Jon. 4, 3. al. Ecclus. 
 22, 15. Menand. KaXw TO p.rj fji>, 77 ijv 
 aSXt ws. Phocyl. 77. S6ph. Ajax 966. Diod. 
 Sic. 11. 11. Thuc. 6. 21. Hdot. 9. 26. 
 Comp. Plaut. Rud. 4. 4. 70, tacita mulier 
 est bona semper, quam loquens. 
 
 IV. Joined with other particles, viz. 
 
 a) dXX fj, unless, except, see in dXXd 
 no. 3. b. 
 
 b) 77 (ecu, or also, or even; Luke 18, 11 
 OTI OVK flp.1 Sxrtrtp ol \onrol . . . fj KCU wr 
 ovroy rX. 1 Cor. 16, 6. 2 Cor. 1, 13. In 
 terrogatively, Luke 11,11.12. 12,41. Rom. 
 4, 9. 14, 10. non al. 
 
 c) fJTTtp, than perhaps, than indeed, once 
 after pa\\ov, John 12, 43. So 2 Mace. 14, 
 42. Luc. D. Mort. 6. 3. 
 
 d) fJTot, i. q. 77, or, but stronger; in 
 N. T. only fJToi . . . fj, wliether indeed ... or, 
 once Rom. 6, 16. See Herm. ad Vig. 
 p. 785, 410. So Menand. XIII, in Poet. 
 Gnom. p. 155. ed. Tauchn. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 12. 2. ib. 4. 6. 13. -f 
 
 ?7, a particle of confirming or strength 
 ening, truly, assuredly, certainly ; in N. T. 
 only once in the connection 77 pr)i>, the 
 usual intensive form of oaths, most certain 
 ly, most surely ; Heb. 6, 14 r} p.rjv eii\oyuv 
 (v\oyr]<Ta> (re, quoted from Gen. 22, 17 
 where Sept. for 12, as also Gen. 42, 16. 
 [Lachm. ei p.f)i>.] Sept. for ex Num. 14. 
 23 ; B>{ -<3 Judg. 15, 7. See Buttm. 149. 
 m. 29. Kiihner } 316. 2. Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 2 
 <jp.6<ravTfs % P.TJV truxTfiv avTr]v. Xen. An. 2. 
 3. 26. Cyr. 6. 1. 3. In the classics f} is 
 used also as an interrogative, Buttm. {149 
 m. 7 fin. Kiihner { 344. 5. 
 
322 
 
 ), f. cv<ra>, (vye/icov,) to go be 
 fore, to go first, c. dat. Horn. Od. 3. 386. ib. 
 8. 4 ; to lead, to be a leader, chief, c. gen. JE\. 
 V. H. 12. 17. Xen. Ag. 1. 3. In N. T. to be 
 governor, e. g. of a Roman province ; either 
 as a legatus Cccsaris, c. gen. rijs Supt a?, 
 Luke 2, 2 ; or as a procurator. Luke 3, 1 
 rrjs lovdaias. See fully in T/ye/icoi no. 2. 
 
 rjyefAOVui) as, 17, (fjyefjuav,) leadership, do 
 minion, reign ; Luke 3, 1 77 lyye/xoWa Ti/3e- 
 piov Kaicrapos. Jos. Ant. 18. 2.2. Ildian. 
 2. 9. 12. Xen. Hell. 7. 1. 33. 
 
 6vos, 6, (^yfop-at.) a leader, 
 guide, Horn. Od. 10. 505. Hdot. 8. 31 177. 
 r^f 68ov. Xen. An. 4. 2. 1 ; a leader, com 
 mander of an army, i. q. orpar^yo s, Hdian. 
 2. 7. 10. Xen. Mem. 3. 2. 4. Sept. for ito 
 Jer. 42, 1. 8. In N. T. 
 
 1. a leader, chief, head ; Matt. 2, 6 eV TOIT 
 f]yffio<n.v louSa, quoted from Mic. 5, 1 
 where Heb. STiIrT? Sbxa, Sept. evx^iaaiv 
 "lovSa. But E^bx in Mic. 1. c. is pr. the 
 families into which each tribe was divided, 
 the heads of which were called E^sibx 
 Zech. 12, 5. 6; and Matthew by meton. 
 puts j jy(fj.6vfs chiefs of families, for the fa 
 milies themselves, as also for the cities in 
 which they dwelt. So Sept. ^yep-coi/ for 
 =p-X Gen. 36, 15. 16 sq. Jos. Ant. 11. 4. 
 4 oi T<UV Trarpiu>v Tjyfpovfs T>V icrparjXi- 
 rlav. Of Lacedzemon as the leading state in 
 Greece. Xen. An. 6. 1. 27. Conv. 8. 39 ; 
 genr. Ag. 1. 3 uxrre ov btVTtpstf 7rpa>Tfvov- 
 (riv, dXX T]yfjj.6i>a>v rjyffiovfvovcriv. 
 
 2. a governor, president, prefect, of a Ro 
 man province, whether proconsul, legate, or 
 procurator. Augustus made a new parti 
 tion of the provinces of the Roman empire, 
 into provincial senaloriic and provincial im- 
 peratoriac vel Cccsarum, eirapxiai TOV SIJ/MOU 
 v. Kaicrapos, the former being left under the 
 nominal care of the senate, while the latter 
 were under the direct control of the empe 
 ror. Of the latter kind was Syria, inclu 
 ding Phenicia and Judea. To the former 
 the senate sent officers for one year, called 
 proconsuls, avSirrraToi, though sometimes 
 nnly of praetorian rank ; they had only a 
 civil power, and no military command nor 
 authority over the taxes, both these latter 
 being under the care of persons appointed 
 by the emperor. Those sent to command 
 in the provincial Casarvm were called le- 
 gati Cccsaris pro consule,proprcctores, legali 
 consulares, etc. They were usually, but 
 not always, chosen from among the senators, 
 during the pleasure of the emperor, and had 
 much greater powers than other proconsuls. 
 
 Such were Cyrenius (Lat. Quirinus) Luke 
 2, 2, and Vitellius, Jos. Ant. 18. 4. 2. For 
 a list of all the presidents of Syria in that 
 age, see Bibl. Repos. 1832, p. 381. In all 
 these provinces, of both kinds, there was, 
 besides the president, an officer called pro 
 curator C< saris, who had charge of the 
 revenue, and had also a judicial power in 
 matters pertaining to the revenue ; they 
 were chosen usually from the equites, but 
 occasionally were freedmen. Sometimes a 
 procurator discharged the office of a govern 
 or or president, especially in a small pro 
 vince, or in a portion of a large province 
 where the president could not reside ; as 
 did Pilate, who was procurator of Judea 
 which was annexed to the province of Sy 
 ria, Suet. Vesp. 4. Tacit. Ann. 12. 23. 
 Hence he had the power of punishing ca 
 pitally, which the procurators did not usu 
 ally possess, ib. 15. 4. ib. 4. 15. So also 
 Felix, Festus, and the other procurators of 
 Judea, for a list of whom see Bibl. Repos. 
 1832, p. 382. See Strabo 17. p. 840. 
 Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 165 sq. Diet, of 
 Antt. art. Provincia. Hence 
 
 a) Genr. of a proconsul, legate, president, 
 Matt. 10, 18. Mark 13, 9. Luke 21, 12. 
 1 Pet. 2, 14. Hdian. 2. 9. 12. Plato Rep. 
 520. b. 
 
 b) Of the procurator of Judea, e. g. Pi 
 late, Matt. 27, 2. 11 bis. 14. 15. 21. 23. 27. 
 28, 14. Luke 20, 20 ; Felix, Acts 23, 24. 
 26. 33. 34. 24, 1. 10 ; Festus, Acts 26, 30. 
 Jos. Ant. 18. 3. 1 mAai-o? o T^S lovSaias 
 f]yep.a>v. The usual Greek word for procu 
 rator is eViYpoTror, e. g. of Pilate, Jos. B. J. 
 
 2. 9. 2 ; genr. Hdian. 7. 4. 5, 11. ib. 4. 6. 8 
 fjyffjiovas re KOL eVirporrouj. 
 
 rjyeopat, ov/xat, f. 770-0/101, Mid. depon. 
 (ay&),) to lead, i. e. to go before, to go first, 
 to lead the way, Horn. Od. 10. 263. Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 5. 13 ; to be leader, chief, in war, 
 i. q. a-Tpanjyfa, Hdian. 7. 8. 8. Xen. Mem 
 
 3. 2. 4 ; of a navy, Xen. An. 1. 4. 2. 
 Hence in N. T. 
 
 I. to be a leader, chief, only in Part. 
 f/yovp.fvos, 6, a leader, chief, i. q. rjyfp.a)v. 
 So Acts 14, 12 6 Tjyovfjifvos rov Xo yov, the 
 chief-speaker. (Comp. Jamblic. de Myster. 
 init. Seof o TCOJ/ XcJycoi ryye/xwi/ 6 Ep/ij^y. 
 Luc. Pseudolog. 24.) Genr. of those who 
 have influence and authority, Luke 22, 26. 
 Acts 1 5, 22 ; of officers and teachers in the 
 churches, Heb. 13, 7. 17. 24; of a chief 
 magistrate, as Joseph in Egypt, Acts 7, 10 ; 
 of the Messiah, a ruler, prince, Matt. ^, 6, 
 quoted from Mic. 5, 1 where Heb. 
 Sept. ilpxav. Sept. rjyovfj.ft>os for 
 
323 
 
 2 Chr. 7, 18. 9, 26; "$* Ez. 43, 7. 9; 
 ito 2 Sam. 3, 38. Ecclus. 32 [35], 1. 
 Diod. Sic . 1 . 4 /ca3 ov fryovfUVOt Td ios lov- 
 Xtof Kaicrap. Pol. 1. 15. 4 ; comp. Xen. 
 Lac. 14. 5. 
 
 2. Trop. pres. 17 you/* at, also perf. 77777- 
 fjuu, with pres. signif. Acts 26, 2. Phil. 3, 
 7. Buttm. 5 113. 7 ; like Lat. ducere, to lead 
 out before the mind, i. e. to regard as being 
 so and so, to esteem, to count, to reckon ; 
 e. g. of things, c. ace. 2 Pet. 3, 9 o>r rives 
 PpaSvTiJTa T/yovvrai. With ace. and infin. 
 Phil. 3, 8 bis, fjyovpai ndvra frpiav tlvai . . . 
 KOI fjyovfjLai VKvjBaXa fivai. (Luc. D. Mort. 
 13. 5. Hdian. 3. 12. 7. Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 7.) 
 With ace. c. fivai impl. 2 Cor. 9, 5 avay- 
 KOIOV ovv T)yr]<Tdfj.r)v TrapaKaXecrai KrX. Phil. 
 2, 25. 2 Pet. 1, 13. James 1, 2 iracrav 
 XOftav f)yT)<Ta<T%f, orav KT\. (Diod. Sic. 
 13. 55. Xen. Hell. 5. 1. 20.) With two 
 ace. c. fivai imp\. ijyelcr3at TI TI, to think to 
 be such and such, to esteem as any thing, 
 Phil. 2, 6. 3, 7 Tavra i)yr)p.ai rj/j.iav. Heb. 
 10, 29. 11, 26. 2 Pet. 2, 13. 3, 15. Sept. 
 for SSin Job 41, 19. So Jos. Ant. 7. 2. 1. 
 Plato Tim. 18. e. Of persons, to hold or ei- 
 teem one as such and such ; so c. ace. with 
 an adj. Acts 26, 2 rjyrjuai epavTov [umdpiov. 
 Phil. 2,3. 1 Tim. 1, 12. 6, 1. Heb. 11, 11 ; 
 V) ff e xSpoV 2 Thess. 3, 15. Sept. for 2<lJn 
 Job 19, 11. 33, 10. (Hdian. 3. 11. 9. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 1. 20.) With accus. and adv. 1 Thess. 
 5, 13 rjyeurSai avrovs virfpfKirfpicrcrov tv 
 dydwr), i. e. to regard them as very highly 
 deserving of love. 
 
 7706(0?, adv. (f]8vs,} sweetly, pleasantly, 
 i. e. with relish, of eating and drinking, Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 3. 5. In N. T. trop. with plea 
 sure, gladly, Mark 6, 20. 12, 37. 2 Cor. 11, 
 19. So 2 Mace. 6, 30. Hdian. 7. 5. 4. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 4. 10. 
 
 ^S?/, adv. now, even now, already, mark 
 ing an action as already or soon to be com 
 pleted ; Matt. 3, 10 fj8r) 8f KCH f] d^ivrj /ca 
 rat KT\. 5, 28 rj8r] tfioi^evcrfv avri]v. 24, 32. 
 Mark 15, 42. 44. Luke 7, 6. John 3, 18. 4, 
 35. al. sa?p. With another particle, 1 John 
 4, 3 vvv rjorj now even already. Phil. 4, 10 
 987 Trore, note at length. So Tob. 3, 6. 
 Hdian. 1. 9. 10. Xen. Cyr. 4. 1. 4 ; fjdr] vvv 
 Plato Phil. 30. e ; r/Sr; Trore Dion. Hal. Ant. 
 7. 51. Also of the immediate future, now, 
 presently, soon ; see Viger. p. 413 sq. Rom. 
 1,10 (Irrats ij8rj Trore euoSco3r;cro/zat KT\. if 
 perhaps I may shortly or at length be pros 
 pered to come to you. So Jos. Ant. 3. 14. 1 
 
 rt)V fJLfV 77877, fX ere > T *l v &* tfft*! ^ V/ f o~3e. Luc. 
 
 D. Deor. 4. 2 bis. Xen. An. 2. 2. 1. -f 
 
 , adv. pr. ace. plur. neut. of ijSt- 
 o-TOf superl. of f]o~vs, Buttm. 5 115. 5, lit. 
 most sweetly, i. e. with high relish, of eating 
 and drinking, Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 5. In N. T. 
 trop. most gladly, 2 Cor. 12, 9. 15. S - 
 Luc. Scyth. 8. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 10. Com^ 
 in rj 8 ta>s. 
 
 r r\ / ^ f 
 
 IJOOVI], T]S, T], (r)8os, TJSopai, avSdvca,) 
 pleasure, gratification, enjoyment, in N. T. 
 only of the pleasures of sense ; Luke 8, 14 
 viro f)8ovcov TOV /3t oi>. Tit. 3, 3. James 4, 3. 
 2 Pet. 2, 13. So Jos. Ant. 3. 12. 1. Hdian. 
 1. 13. 15. Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 4. Meton. de 
 sire, appetite, lust, James 4, 1. So Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 23. 
 
 , O v, TO, (tySiWuoy sweet- 
 scented ; fjdvs, 007*17,) mint, mentha viridis 
 Linn. i. q. piv^rj, garden or spear mint, 
 Matt. 23, 23. Luke 11, 42. The Rabbins 
 call it xns^a ; it was strewed by the Jews 
 on the floors of their houses and synagogues. 
 Buxt. Lex. Rab. 1228. Dioscor. 3. 41 
 T]8vo(rp.oi>, ol 8e /JLIV^TJV, yvtopipov jBordviov. 
 
 ros, fos, ovs, TO, (kindr. ?3oy, eS 
 accustomed seat, haunt, dwelling, of animals 
 and men, Horn. H. 6. 511. Hes. Op. 166. 
 Hdot. 1. 15. In N. T. wont, custom, usage ; 
 Plur. TO. rj%r), manners, morals, character, 
 1 Cor. 15, 33, quoted from Menander in 
 Sentent. Comicor. Gr. p. 248 ed. Steph. or 
 Poet. Gnom. p. 187. Tauchn. So in Sing. 
 Ecclus. 20, 26. Luc. Phalar. pr. 7 xPW - 
 ftos. Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 3. Plur. Hdian. -2. 
 6. 1. Plato Rep. 402. d, aXa fin. 
 
 rJKO), f. TJ^OJ, later aor. 1 ^a Rev. 2, 25. 
 3, 9, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 743 sq. Buttm. 
 Ausf. Sprachl. 5 114 ; to come, i. e. to have 
 come, to be here, in the sense of a preterite, 
 Buttm. 1. c. in iKVfop.ai. Gram, j 1 37. n. 8. 
 Kiihner 255. n. 2. Matth. 504. I. 2. So 
 genr. of persons, with OTTO c. gen. of place 
 whence, Matt. 8, 11 et Luke 13, 29 OTTO 
 dvaroXcav KOI 8vaiJ.u>v fjov<ri,. Mark 8, 3 ; 
 with fK c. gen. John 4, 47, and in the sense 
 to come forth, to arise, Rom. 11, 26; with 
 TTpos c. ace. of pers. Acts 28, 23 TJKOV Trpos 
 avrov els TT]V tviav. (Sept. for X13 Ex. 
 20, 24. .El. V. H. 3. 19 pen.) Trop. John 
 6, 37. With firi nva, to come upon one, in 
 a hostile sense, Rev. 3, 3 bis. (Sept. for 
 N ia 2 Sam. 17, 12. Dem. 319. 7.) Absol. 
 Matt. 24, 50 rjgfi 6 Kvpios TOV 8ov\ov eW- 
 vov. Luke 12, 46. 15, 27. John 8, 42 en 
 fov 3eou frjX %ov Kal TJKO), i. q. e ^eXSwf TJKG&. 
 Heb. 10, 7. 9 (Sept. for xia Ps. 40, 8). v. 
 37. 1 John 5, 20. Rev. 2, 25. 3, 9. 15, 4. 
 Sept. for xia 1 K. 8, 42. Zech. 8, 20. 22. 
 
HXi 
 
 324 
 
 So Hdian. 1. 7. 2. Xen. An. 2. 1. 3. Trop. 
 ot things, e. g. of time, John 2, 4 >pa rJKei. 
 Luke 13, 35. 2 Pet. 3, 10. (Sept. and Kin 
 Ps. 102, 14. Dem. 11.26.) Also of the end 
 or consummation of any thing, Matt. 24, 14 ; 
 evils, calamities, Rev. 18, 8. So with eVt 
 Tiva, to come upon any one, e. g. evil times, 
 Luke 19, 43 ; of guilt and its punishment, 
 In be laid upon, Matt. 23, 36. So Dem. 
 (i24. 19. 
 
 *H\l or HXei, 6, indec. Heli, Heb. ^? 
 Eli, pr. n. of the father of Joseph the hus 
 band of Mary, Luke 3, 23. 
 
 7) A L ^ l/ indec. eli, my God ! i. e. Heb. "^>$ 
 
 ifi in Greek letters, Matt. 27, 46, from Ps. 22, 2. 
 
 HX/ay, ov, 6, JSZws, Heb. fj^x and 
 ^T^ (my God is Jehovah) Elijah, the 
 celebrated prophet of the O. T. whom the 
 Jews expected to reappear before the com 
 ing of the Messiah ; Matt. 17, 12. Mark 9, 
 13. Luke 1, 17. 4, 25. 26. al. See 1 K. 
 c. 17-19. 21. 2 K. c. 1. 2. Mai. 3, 23. 
 [4,5.] ,-f 
 
 i^Xt/aa, as, f), (^At,) 1. age, full age, 
 manhood, the prime of life ; John 9, 21 av- 
 TOS fj\iKiav e^fi. v. 23. Heb. 11, 11. So 
 2 Mace. 7, 27. Pol. 6. 6. 2. Diod. Sic. 2. 5 
 init. Plato Lys. 209. a, ^XtKtW f\ lv Spec. 
 age, life ; Matt. 6, 27 et Luke 12, 25 Trpoa- 
 Sctwu eVt TT/V fj\iKiav TTTJ^VV * va - (-^El- V. 
 H. 2. 23 o-^e TTJS fjXiKias. Xen. Apol. 6, i. q. 
 tfios. ) Others stature, but against the con 
 text ; comp. Matt. 6, 25. 26. Luke 12, 26. 
 
 2. stature, growth, as marking age, Luke 
 2, 52. 19, 3 777 jjXtKia p.iKp6s. Trop. Eph. 
 4, 13. Sept. for fW ip Ez. 13, 18. Plut. 
 Philop. 11. Dem. 1204. 26. Hd ot. 3. 16. 
 
 ?}X/O9, 77, ov, correl. pron. (r)Ai,) how 
 great, quantus, Col. 2, 1. James 3, 5. Jos. 
 Ant. 8. 7. 7 fin. Diod. Sic. 1. 55. Pol. 1. 71. 
 7. See Buttm. 79. 5. 
 
 r/Xto?, ov, 6, (eA?7,) 2/ie stm, Matt. 13, 
 43. Mark 1, 32. al. Sept. for Jti Gen. 
 15, 12. 17. (Dem. 197. 7. Xen. Mem. 3. 8. 
 9.) Meton. light, daylight, Acts 13, 11 ; 
 comp. Ps. 58, 9. So Mark 16, 2 ai/aretAai/- 
 ros TOV f/Xtov, daylight having risen, the 
 day having dawned, parall. with \iav Trpcai, 
 comp. Luke 24, 1. John 20, 1 ; see Biblioth. 
 Sac. 1845. p. 167. Gr. Harm. p. 230. + 
 
 97X0?, ov, 6, a nail ; John 20, 25 bis, TOV 
 rttnov TUV fjXav. Sept. 1 Chr. 22, 3. Ml. 
 V. H. 9. 3 init. Xen. Ven. 9. 12. 
 
 77//-619, pers. pron. 1 Plur. see in e yw. 
 
 r}/j,epa, as, fj, I. a day, i. e. the time 
 
 from one sunrise or sunset to another, i. q. 
 
 a.) Genr. Matt. 6, 34 dpKtTov rfj ^/ie p? 
 r) KaKia aiJTTjs. Mark 6, 21. John 11, 9 
 Spat TTJS fjfjifpas. Acts 2, 15." 21, 26. 
 Rom. 14, 5. 6. al. Luke 9, 28 wo-et rjp.fpai 
 OKTW, a parenthetic clause ; and so Matt. 
 15, 32. Mark 8, 2; see Winer 64. 1. 
 (Comp. 6<rr)p.(pai, Arr. A. M. 3. 26. 3 ; also 
 Luc. D. Meretr. 10.1 ov yap ecopara, TTO\VS 
 tjdr/ xpovos, OVTOV Trap fip.1v.) Luke 24, 21 
 rpirtjv TavTijv fj/jLtpav <iyei, see in ayas no. 3. 
 As marking what is brief and transient , 
 2 Pet. 2, 13 TTJV fv fjp-epa Tpv(prjv, i. Q. for a 
 day, ephemeral. (So efi rj^tpav Hdot. 1. 
 32.) Rev. 2, 10 SXtyty ijntpvv 8fKa, afflic 
 tion of or for ten days, i. e. for a short sea 
 son. With a genit. Luke 1, 23 at fj/j.epai 
 TTJS \eiTovpytas aiirov, the eight days of his 
 official duty. James 5, 5 obr tv ijp-epa o-<pa- 
 yrjs, as for a day of slaughter. So c. gen. 
 of a festival or the like, as r t rmtpa TWV <ra/3- 
 /3ara)i/ v. TOV traftpdrov, the sabbath-day, 
 Luke 4, 16. John 19, 31. (Sept. for d"> 
 na^n J er . 17, 24. 27.) Acts 12, 3 jj/i. rS>v 
 dvp.wv, the day or days of unleavened bread. 
 the passover. 20, 6. Luke 22, 7 ; see in av- 
 p.os no. 2. Acts 2, 1 jj^/pa TTJS TTfvrfKocrTijs, 
 the day of Pentecost. 20, 16. Often in spe 
 cifications of time, viz. a) In the Geni 
 tive, of time when indefinite, the time within 
 which any thing happens, e. g. TTJS yp-(- 
 pas, in a day, every day, Luke 17,4; comp. 
 Buttm. 132. 14. Kiihner 273. 4. b. So 
 Xen. An. 1. 7. 18. ) In the Dative, of 
 time when definite ; Matt. 16, 21 TTJ Tpirti 
 TjlJ.fpa fyep^rjvai. Mark 9, 31. Luke 9, 22. 
 13, 14. John 2, 1. Acts 7, 8. al. Buttm 
 133. 4. e. (Xen. An. 4. 7. 21.) By Hebr. 
 2 Cor. 4, 16 fjfjLfpa at J^/pa, day by day, 
 every day, daily ; so Heb. Di n J El " 1 , Sept. 
 Ka3 fKao-TJjv fjfj,pav, Esth. 3, 4; dV 1 EV\ 
 Sept. rjp.epav Ka3* f]p.fpav, Ps. 68, 20 ; see 
 Gesen. Lehrg. p. 669. y) In the Accu 
 sative, of time how long, implying duration ; 
 Matt. 20, 6 ciX??! TT]V rjfiepav dpyoi. 28, 20 
 rrda-as ray rj/jifpas i. e. always. Mark 1,13. 
 John 1, 40. Acts 9, 9. Gal. 1, 18. Rev. 11, 
 9. So Matt. 20, 2 o-vp.<pwi/7j<ra? . . . e /c 8rjva- 
 piov TTJV rj/jifpav, for a denarius the day, i. e. 
 for a day s work. Acts 5, 42 Traardv re ^e- 
 pav, every day, i. e. the whole time. 2 Pet. 
 2, 8 fj/jLepav f ripe pas, see in c no. 2. See 
 Buttm. 131. 9. Matth. 425. 2. So Xen. 
 An. 6. 4. 1. 8) In these and similar spe 
 cifications of time, yuepa is very often con 
 strued with a preposition, viz. in the gen. 
 afteraTrd, ap^pt, 8 id, ecos, rrpd ; in the 
 dat. after ev ; in the ace. after els, (iri. 
 Kara, /xera, irpos ; for which construc 
 tions see these prepositions 
 
i/pepa 
 
 325 
 
 b) Emphat. a certain day, set day. Acts 
 17, 31 Stort fcrrrjcrfv iflUpcat ev 77 /ze XXft Kpi- 
 v.v KT\. Heb. 4, 7. 1 Cor. 4, 3 see in dv- 
 ZpvTrivos lett. b. So Dem. 1072. 27. Spec. 
 17 fjpepa TOV Kvpiov, the day of the Lord, 
 when the Saviour will come to judge the 
 world and fully establish his kingdom, 1 Cor. 
 l.Bcomp. v. 7. 5,5. 2 Cor. 1,14. 1 Thess. 
 5, 2. 4, comp. 4, 13sq. 2 Pet. 3, 10. al. 
 Luke 1 7, 24 6 vibs TOV dv%p. ev fafpa avrov, 
 comp. v. 30 rj fafpa o vios TOV oVSp. aTro- 
 raXurrrfrot. Absol. l Cor. 3, 13. Heb. 10, 
 25. So fKfivTj 77 77/xepa, that day, the 
 great day of judgment, Matt. 7, 22. Mark 
 13, 32. 2 Thess. 1, 10. With a gen. of 
 what is then to take place, e. g. faepa Kpi- 
 o-fws Matt. 10, 15. 11, 22. 24. 36. al. comp. 
 Rom. 2, 16 (V 77/iepa ore Kpivfl 6 3eoy KT\. 
 and Jude 6 els Kpio-iv /iryoXr}y qpipms. Also 
 77/1. opyrjs Rom. 2, 5. Rev. 6, 17 ; TJ/J,. dno- 
 Xvrpcoo-ecay Eph. 4, 30. Further, 77 eo-^drj; 
 77p.e pa, John 6, 39. 40. So in the constr. 
 7 ijp-epa TOV SeoO, the day of God, by 
 whose authority Christ sits as judge, 2 Pet. 
 
 3, 12. Once 77 faepa Kvpiov, of Jehovah, 
 Acts 2, 20, quoted from Joel 3, 4 [2, 31], 
 where Sept. for ""ty"^ E^, the day of God s 
 retribution, in general; comp. Joel 1,15. 
 Is. 2, 12. 13, 6. Ez. 13, 5. 30,3. Zeph. 1, 
 7. 14. Also 77 yp,. 77 (JL(yd\Tj TOV 2foC Rev. 
 16, 14. 
 
 2. day, day-light, from sunrise to sunset, 
 the day, e. g. in antith. with vv%, as in Gen. 
 cf time when, rjp.pas KOI WKTOS or WKTOS 
 KOI f]fj.epas, by day and by night, Luke 18, 7. 
 Acts 9, 24. Mark 5, 5. 1 Thess. 2, 9 ; 
 comp. above in no. 1. a. a. (Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 
 23.) Or in Accus. of time how long, Matt. 
 
 4, 2 vrjarrfvo-ns fafpas recrtr. rat VVKTO.S rfcrtr. 
 and so VVKTO KOI qftepear, night and day, i. e. 
 continually, incessantly, Mark 4, 27. Luke 
 
 2, 37. Acts 20, 31. 26, 7; comp. above in 
 no. La. y. (Xen. An. 6. 1. 14.) Genr. 
 Rev. 8, 12 17 ij/t. /xr) (paivr] . . . rat 77 i>v 6/iet- 
 <ay. Simply, e. g. ray ^ftipas, the days, i. e. 
 during the day time, every day, Luke 21, 
 37. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 12.) So ^cpas pe- 
 (rrjs, at. mid-day, Acts 26, 1 3 ; faepas yevo- 
 p.fvrjs, day being come, when it was day, 
 Luke 4, 42. Acts 12, 18. 16, 35. al. (Xen. 
 An. 7. 2. 34.) Also 17 fatpa K\ivti, the day 
 declines, Luke 4, 42. (Comp. Arr. Alex. M. 
 
 3. 4. 4.) John 9, 4 ewy ij/xepa eort, so long 
 as it is day. 11,9 TrfpiTrareii ev TTJ fipepq. 
 Trop. for tlie light of true and higher 
 knowledge, moral light, Rom. 13, 12. 
 1 Thess. 5, 5. 8. 2 Pet. 1, 19. 
 
 3. time, in general, nearly i. q. xpovos. 
 a) Sing, of a point or period of time ; 
 
 Matt. 13, 1 ev &e Trj fjiMepa (KfivT 
 6 I. John 14, 20. Eph. 6, 13 eV 777 r//i. rij 
 irovrjpa. (Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 17.) With gen. 
 of pers. Luke 19, 42 tv Trj rjpfpa crov Tainy. 
 in this tliy lime, whilst thou yet livest 
 John 8, 56 Iva "iby TTJV f)p.tpav fjj.r)v, my time. 
 the time of my manifestation. With gen. 
 of thing or event, e. g. W i )p.epas dvaSei- 
 fu>s Luke 1, 80 ; 77^. o-wTTjpias 2 Cor. 6, 2 ; 
 fjfji. TOV TTfipao-fiov Heb. 3, 8 ; rjfj.. fTuo-Konrjs 
 1 Pet. 2, 12, see in eVtoxoTny no. 1. 2 Pet. 
 3, 18 ds Tjpepav alvvos i. e. for time eternal, 
 for ever. 
 
 b) From the Heb. Plur. fjp.(pai, days, 
 
 1. e. time. a) Genr. Matt. 9, 15 eXeuo-oi/- 
 rat Se fafpai. Mark 2, 20. 13, 20. Luke 
 17, 22. So c. adj. Acts 15, 7 d<p y rjfj.(p>v dp- 
 Xaia>v. Acts 2, 17 et James 5, 3 / TOIS fo-\d- 
 TCIIS Tj/j-fpais, see in eo-^arof no. 2. b. Acts 
 3, 24 /wmzyy. TCLS fjfj.epas raurar. 11, 27. al. 
 Matt. 3, 1 ev TOIS fa. eKtivais- Mark 13,24. 
 Rev. 9, 6 ; also Heb. 10, 32. 12, 10. With 
 gen. of pers. Matt. 11, 12. Luke 4, 25 eV 
 TOLS f)p.. HXiou. Acts 7, 45 eo>y TUIV r}/u. 
 Aaftid. With gen. of an event, e. g. Luke 
 
 2, 6 at rjfj,. TOV TeKfiv avTr^v. Acts 5, 37 ev 
 TOIS fa. TTJS diroypa(f)ris. Heb. 5, 7. Matt. 
 24, 38. So Heb. tra; and Sept. Ex. 2, 11. 
 Judg. 18, 1. 2 Sam/21, 1. al. /3) Spec. 
 the time of one s life, i. e. one s days, years, 
 age, life, e. g. fully, Luke 1, 75 if do-as 
 ray faipas TTJS C <u ^ s 5 comp. Gen. 47, 8. 
 9. Absol. Luke 1, 7 irpo^e^rjKOTes ev rats 
 r)fj.pais avrwf, advanced in years, in age, 
 and so v. 18. 2, 36 ; genr. Heb. 7, 3. Sept. 
 and Heb. n^a; Gen. 6, 3. Job 32, 7 ; xa 
 D-naja Gen. 24 T , 1. Josh. 13, 1. + 
 
 >}/u,erep09, a , ov, (;/ieiy,) possess, pron. 
 of first pers. plur. our, our own, Acts 2, 1 1. 
 24, 6. 26, 5. Rom. 15, 4. 1 Cor. 15, 31. 
 2 Tim. 4, 15. Tit. 3, 14. 1 John 1, 3. 2, 2. 
 Hdian. 7. 8. 18. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 4. Comp. 
 Bnttm. J 72. 4. 
 
 79, eoy, ovs, 6, 77, adj. (y/xt-, 
 half-dead, Luke 10, 30. Jos. de 
 Mace. 4. Diod. Sic. 12. 62. More freq. is 
 the form rjfj.i^vrjs id. Hdian. 4. 9. 15. Thuc. 
 2. 52. 
 
 rj/iKTuy, eta, v, Att. genit. fy, Plur. 
 neut. ea; half, dimidius, a, um, Xen. Hell. 
 5. 3. 21. In N. T. only Neut. TO rjnio-v. 
 as Subst. a half, gen. falcrovs Mark 6, 23 ; 
 Plur. TO. faio-rj Luke 19, 8 ; both being 
 forms of the later Greek, Buttm. 5 51. n. 5. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 246 sq. Also Mark 6, 
 23 eoiy TJ/JLLO-OVS Tr\s /SacriXet ay. Luke 19, 8. 
 Rev. 11,9 f]fj.fpas rpety rat 17/4101*. V. 1 1 . 
 12, 14. Sept. for ""Sn Ex. 24, 6. Zech 
 
326 
 
 14, 2. So Jos. Ant. 7. 6. 1 ra jj/iurr; T&>I> 
 evfivv. Dem. 691. 16. Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 10. 
 
 ov, TO, (fjp-i.-, pa,) a half- 
 hour, half an hour ; only Rev. 8, 1. 
 
 fjvuca, correl. adv. when, whatever, 
 Buttm. 116. 4; before the Indie. 2 Cor. 
 3, 15 ; before the Subj. with Sv v. 16. So 
 c. Indie. Sept. Gen. 31, 10. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 
 27 ; c. Subj. Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 2. Plato Phasdr. 
 247. b. 
 
 see in rj IV. c. 
 
 ov, 6, 17, adj. mild, gentle, kind, 
 1 Thess. 2, 7. 2 Tim. 2, 24. Hdian. 2. 6. 3. 
 Hdot. 3. 89. Thuc. 8. 93. 
 
 "Hp, o, indec. Er, Heb. "i? (awake), pr. 
 n. of a man, Luke 3, 28. 
 
 r)pfAO<>, ov, 6, T], adj. placid, quiet, tran 
 quil, 1 Tim. 2, 2 fjpffjiov KOI TJO-VXIOV fiiov. 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 63 ^pe/xeVrfpoi ylyvovrai 
 sc. oi aj>3pco7rot. The positive is not used 
 by Gr. writers, who write ypepaios , see 
 Passow in rjpepa. Comp. Tittm. de Synon. 
 N. T. p. 65. 
 
 Hpa>8r)$, ov, 6, Herod, pr. n. of four 
 persons in N. T. of the Herodean family, 
 Idumeans by descent, who were success 
 ively invested by the Romans with authority 
 over the Jewish nation in whole or in part. 
 Their history is related chiefly by Josephus, 
 as cited below ; comp. also Noldius de vita 
 et gestis Herodum appended to Joseph. Opp. 
 Tom. II. ed. Haverc. Reland Palaest. p. 
 174 sq. Jost Gesch. der Israelilen, 1. 160 sq. 
 
 1. Herod, surnamed the Great, Matt. 2, 
 1. 3. 7. 12. 13. 15. 16. 19. 22. Luke 1, 5. 
 Acts 2 3 , 3 5. He was the son of Antipater an 
 Idumean in high favour with Julius Caesar, 
 and at the age of fifteen was made procura 
 tor of Galilee, Jos. Ant. 14. 9. 2-5 ; in which 
 he was confirmed by Antony with the title 
 of tctrarch, about B. C. 40 ; ib. 14. 13. 1 sq. 
 Being driven out by the opposite faction, 
 he fled to Rome, where by the influence of 
 Antony he was declared king of Judea ; ib. 
 14. 13. 10. ib. 14. 14. 4. He now collect 
 ed an army, recovered Jerusalem, and ex 
 tirpated the Maccabean family, B. C. 37 ; 
 ib. 14. 16. 1 sq. ib. 15. 1. 2. After the bat 
 tle of Actium he joined the party of Octa- 
 vius, who confirmed him in his possessions, 
 and gave him others; ib. 15. 6. 7. ib. 15. 
 10. 1, 3. He now rebuilt and decorated 
 the temple at Jerusalem (ib. 15. 11. 1), 
 built and enlarged many cities, especially 
 Cesarea, and erected theatres and gymnasia 
 in both these places. He was notorious for 
 his jealousy and cruelty, having put to death 
 
 his own wife Mariamne and her two song 
 Alexander and Aristobulus. He died at the 
 age of 70 years, A. U. C. 750, four years 
 before the beginning of the common era, 
 after a reign of about 36 years as king ; ib. 
 17. 8. 1. See also genr. for Herod s life, 
 Jos. B. J. 1. c. 13-33. It was near the 
 close of Herod s life that Jesus was born, 
 and the massacre of infants took place in 
 Bethlehem, Matt. 2, 16 ; comp. Macrob. 
 Saturn. 2. 4. At his death, half his king 
 dom, viz. Idumea, Judea, and Samaria, was 
 given by Augustus to his son Archelaus 
 with the title of ethnarch (see in Ap^f Xaor) ; 
 the remaining half being divided between 
 two of his other sons, Herod Antipas and 
 Philip, with the title of tetrarchs, Jos. Ant. 
 17. 8. 1. ib. 17. 11. 4; the former having 
 Galilee and Perea, and the latter Batanea, 
 Trachonitis, and Auranitis (Hauran) ; Luke 
 3, 1. Jos. Ant. 17. 11. 4. 
 
 2. Herod Antipas, Avriiras, often called 
 Herod the Tetrarch, Matt. 14, 1. 3. 6 bis. 
 Mark 6, 14. 16. 17. 18. 20. 21. 22. 8, 15. 
 Luke 3, 1. 19 bis. 8, 3. 9, 7. 9. 13, 31. 
 23, 7 bis. 8. 11. 12. 15. Acts 4, 27. 13,1. 
 He was the son of Herod the Great by Mal- 
 thace, and own brother to Archelaus, Jos. 
 Ant. 17. 1. 3. After his father s death, 
 Augustus gave him Galilee and Perea with 
 the title of Tetrarch, Luke 3, 1. Jos. Ant 17. 
 11. 4, comp. above ; whence also he is call 
 ed by the very general title /3ao-tXevj Matt. 
 14, 9. Mark 6, 14; comp. in fiaa-ikevs no. 
 2. He first married a daughter of Aretas, 
 whom he dismissed on becoming enamoured 
 of Herodias ; see in Aperas. Jos. Ant. 18. 5. 
 1, 4. This latter, his own niece and the 
 wife of his brother Philip Herod, he induced 
 to leave her husband and live with him ; 
 and it was for his bold remonstrance on 
 this occasion that John the Baptist was put 
 to death, through the arts of Herodias ; see 
 Mark 6, 17 sq. Luke 3, 19. 20. Matt. 14, 3 
 sq. Herod went to Rome at the instigation 
 of Herodias, to ask for the title and rank ot 
 king; but was there accused before Cali 
 gula at the instance of Herod Agrippa her 
 own brother, and banished witJi her to Lug- 
 dunum (Lyons) in Gaul, about A. D. 39 ; 
 his territories being given to Herod Agrip 
 pa; Jos. Ant. 18. c. 7. He afterwards 
 made an unsuccessful attempt to regain his 
 former station ; and was sent as an exile to 
 Spain, where he died ; Jos. B. J. 2. 9. 6. 
 In Mark 8, 15 HpwSijr is put collectively for 
 peoSiavoi q. v. 
 
 3. Herod Agrippa, the elder, called by 
 Josephus only Aypi-mras, Acts 12, 1. 6. 11 
 
327 
 
 IJTTGJV 
 
 19. 20. 21 . He was grandson of Herod the 
 Great and Mariamne, and son of Aristobu- 
 lus ; Jos. Ant. 17. 1. 2. On the accession 
 of Caligula he received with the title of 
 King the provinces which had belonged to 
 his uncle Philip and to Lysanias ; see above 
 in no. 1, and in AfiiXrjvT). To these were 
 added those of Herod Antipas, see in no. 
 2"; and Claudius afterwards gave him in 
 A. D. 41 all those parts of Judea and Sama 
 ria which had belonged to Herod the Great ; 
 Jos. Ant. 19. 5. 1. ib. 19. 6. 1. He died 
 suddenly and miserably at Cesarea, A. D. 
 44; Acts 12, 21. Jos. Ant. 19. 8. 2. 
 
 4. Herod Agrippa, the younger, so named 
 by modern writers as belonging to the He- 
 rodean family ; but called in N. T. and by 
 Josephus only Agrippa, Aypiwiras, Acts 
 25, 13. 22. 23. 24. 26. 26, 1. 2. 7. 19. 27. 
 28. 32. He was the son of the elder Herod 
 Agrippa, and at his father s death was 17 
 years old ; four years later (A. D. 48) he 
 received from Claudius the kingdom of 
 Chalcis under Lebanon, (prob. mod. An- 
 jar, ) which had belonged to his uncle 
 Herod; Jos. Ant. 19. 9. 1, 2. ib. 20. 5. 2. 
 In A. D. 52 he was transferred with the 
 title of king to the provinces which his 
 father at first possessed, viz. Batanea, Tra- 
 chonitis, Auranitis, and Abilene ; to which 
 other cities were afterwards added ; Ant. 
 20. 7. 1. ib. 20. 8. 4. It. was before him 
 that Paul was brought by Festus ; Acts c. 
 25. 26. 
 
 >v, ol, Herodians, Matt. 
 22, 16. Mark 3, 6. 12, 13. Prob. partisans 
 of Herod Antipas, and therefore supporters 
 of the Roman dominion in Palestine ; which 
 the Pharisees were not. It was consequent 
 ly a political rather than a religious party ; 
 though it would seem to have embraced 
 many Sadducees; comp. Mark 8, 15 with 
 Matt. 16, 6. Comp. also Jos. Ant. 14. 15. 
 10 rovs TO. HpwSou (fipovovvras. 
 
 Jfpwotay, dSos, 17, Herodias, grand 
 daughter of Herod the Great and sister of 
 Herod Agrippa the elder. She was first 
 married to her uncle Philip (Herod), but left 
 him to live with Herod Antipas ; see in 
 Hp&j&Tjr no. 2. Jos. Ant. 18. 5. 1, 4. 
 Matt. 14, 3. 6. Mark 6, 17. 19. 22. Luke 
 3, 19. 
 
 Hpto&LUtv, 6>i/or, 6, Herodion, a Chris 
 tian whom Paul calls his kinsman, a-vyytvrjs, 
 Rom. 16, 11. 
 
 Hcratas, O v, 6, Esaias, Heb. Iri "JS2J 1 ? 
 (help of Jehovah) Isaiah, the celebrated 
 Hebrew prophet, Matt. 3, 3. 4, 14. Mark 7, 
 
 6. al. Meton. for the book of Isaiah, Acu 
 
 8, 28. 30. + 
 
 Hcrav, 6, indec. Esau, Heb. "&? (hairy), 
 pr. n. of the elder son of Isaac and brother 
 of Jacob, the ancestor of the Edomites, Rom. 
 
 9. 13. Heb. 11, 20. 12, 16. See Gen. 25, 
 25 sq. 27, 6 sq. 
 
 ij(7V%da), f. ao-ca, (fja-uxos, ) to be quiet, 
 still, at rest, intrans. spoken of life, 1 Thess. 4, 
 11. So of a land or people in peace, Sept. for 
 Vp.ti Judg. 3, 11. 30. Hdian. 3. 9. 17. Thuc. 
 1. 12. Spec, to rest, from labour or action, 
 Luke 23, 56 (Hdian. 7. 5. 5) ; or from 
 further cavil, discussion, i. q. to hold one s 
 peace, to be silent, Luke 14,4. Acts 11, 18. 
 21, 14. Sept. for ti^nn Neh. 5, 8. So 
 Jos. Ant. 1. 21. 1. Luc. Jup. Tr. 18. Hdian. 
 8. 3. 7. 
 
 as, 77, (qa-vxos,) quiet, stillness, 
 rest, e. g. quiet life, 2 Thess. 3, 12. So 
 1 Mace. 9, 58. Dem. 145. 20. Plato Rep. 
 575. b. Spec, stillness, silence, Acts 22, 2. 
 1 Tim. 2, 11. 12. So Sept. Job. 34,29. 
 Hdian. 3. 12. 13. Plut. Symp. 7. 6. 3 init. 
 
 rjffV^LOS, ov, 6, f/, adj. (rjcrvxos.) quiet, 
 still, at rest, undisturbed from without, 
 1 Tim. 2, 2. 1 Pet. 3, 4. Sept. Is. 66, 2. 
 Dem. 150. 11. Plato Charm. 160. b. 
 
 r)TOi, see in rj IV. d. 
 
 J]TTaofJ,at, copal, f. TJT-njS^o-o/iai, Pass. 
 depon. (TJTTCHV, rja-o-av, ) to be less, weaker, in 
 ferior, genr. 2 Cor. 12, 13 rt . . . 6 jjrrr/Srjrf 
 imp ras X. e/c/cX. So JE\. V. H. 2. 30. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 4, 5. Hence, to be overcome, 
 to be vanquished by any one, c. dat. 2 Pet. 
 2, 19 <u yap ns rJTrrjrai KrX. Absol. 2 Pet. 
 
 2, 20. So Jos. Ant. 1. 19. 4 epom -firrrftfis. 
 In war, Hdian. 5. 4. 10. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 24. 
 An Act. rjTTafa, to subdue, is found in a 
 few late writers, Sept. Is. 54, 17. Pol. 1. 75. 
 
 3. ib. 3. 18. 5; see Passows. voc. Buttm. 
 Ausf. Sprachl. j 114. s. voc. 
 
 rjTTT)/Ji(l, error, TO, (ijTrdo/iai,) a being 
 inferior, a worse state, as compared with any 
 other or former state or duty ; Rom. 11,12 
 fjmjpa avTu>v, their worse estate, i. e. their 
 being brought into a worse condition. 
 Hence, failure, fault, 1 Cor. 6, 7. Sept. 
 Is. 31, 8 defeat 
 
 rjTTQ)V or i~i<T(T(i)v, ovos, 6, 17, used as an 
 irreg. comparative to KOKOS, i. e. ivorse, weak 
 er, inferior ; see Buttm. $ 68. 2. In N. T. 
 only Neut. TO TJTTOV, e. g. 1 Cor. 11, 17 tls 
 TO rjTTov,for the worse. So Luc. Somn. 18 
 ei TIS Trpos TO. IJTTW aTroK\ivti. Plato Gorg. 
 483. d. Adv. 2 Cor. 12. 15 TJTTO 
 
328 
 
 the less am lined. So Lys. 206. 1. Thuc. 
 1. 8. 
 
 soun d> t ring, 
 intrans. 1 Cor. 13, 1 ^oX/coy f]X^ v - So 
 Sept. Ex. 19, 16. Hes. Theog. 42. Plato 
 Prot. 329. a. Of the sea, to roar, Luke 21, 
 25 Rec. Sept. for nsn J er . 50, 42. 51,50. 
 So Horn. II. 1. 157. 
 
 on, 6, (i. q. 77^77,) a 
 
 Acts 2, 2 ^oj Qxnrfp (pfpop.evr)s irvor)s KT\. 
 
 Heb. 12, 19. Sept. for 5)55 Ps. 150, 3. 
 So Hdian. 4. 8. 19. Plut. de rect. rat. 
 And. 2. Trop./ame, rumour, Luke 4, 37 ; 
 comp. Mark 1, 28 0*017. 
 
 t t . 
 
 ?7%0?, eos, ovs, ro, i. q. o 77x0?) sound, 
 noise. Luke 21, 25 eV airopiq fj^ovs SoXdo-- 
 0-77?, Vulg. p? < confusions sonitus maris. 
 So Griesb. for Rec. j^ovo-r;? SoXdo-o^s. 
 J. Malal. 5. p. 121. ib. 18. p. 436. e d. 
 Bonnens. 
 
 0. 
 
 ov, 6, Thaddeus, a surname 
 of the apostle Jude, also called Lebbeus, 
 the brother of James the Less, Matt. 10, 3. 
 Mark 3, 18 ; comp. Luke 6, 16. See in 
 lovfias no. 4. 
 
 , Att. akarra^ rjs, f), (3X S 
 salt,) the sea, a sea, genr. and as implying 
 the vicinity of land, Matt. 13, 47 o-ayrjvr) 
 fiXifiti&T) ds rfjv SaXacrcrav. 18,6 ro Tre Xa- 
 yos rr)s 3aX. the depth of the sea. Mark 9, 42. 
 Luke 21, 25. Rom. 9, 27. 2 Cor. 11, 26. 
 Rev. 18, 17 see in epydb/iat no. 2. b. Sept. 
 for t^ Gen. 22, 17. Is. 5, 30. So ^El. V. H. 
 
 9. 16. Xen. An. 5. 1. 2. For the ocean, Rev. 
 20, 13. 21, 1 ; f) yfj KOI 77 SaXao-cra, the land 
 and the sea, for the whole earth, Rev. 7, 1. 
 2. 3. 12, 12. (Jos. Ant. 1. 19. 1.) Also 6 
 ovpavos, 77 yrj, KOI r] 3dXacro-a, the heaven, the 
 earth, and the sea, for the universe, Acts 4, 
 24. 14, 15. Rev. 5, 13. Sept. and tn Ex. 
 20, 11. Hag. 2, 7. So Jos. Ant. 4. 3. 2 init. 
 Poet, of the shining celestial pavement 
 on which the throne of God is said to be 
 founded, 3dXacro-a vaXivrj, a glassy (trans 
 parent) sea, Rev. 4, 6. 15, 2 ; comp. Ex. 24, 
 
 10, also Ez. 1,22. 26. Spec, of particular 
 seas and lakes, viz. 
 
 a) The Mediterranean sea, Acts 10, 6. 
 32. 17, 14. al. Sept. and tfl Gen. 13, 14. 
 Jon. 1, 4. 
 
 b) The Red sea, f] tpv^pa 3dXao-o-n, fully 
 Acts 7, 36; absol. 1 Cor. 10, 1. 2. Sept. 
 and ei Ex. 13, 18. 14, 2. al. See in e>- 
 3po j. 
 
 c) The sea of Galilee or Tiberias, TJ 3dX. 
 T^S roXiXat a? 77 rr> Tt/3fpi aSoj, fully Matt. 
 4, 18. Mark 1, 16. John 21, 1. al. Absol. 
 Matt. 4, 15. John 6, 16. 17. 18. 19. al. Sept. 
 and fci Num. 34, 11. See the description 
 of. this lake under Ttvvrjo-apeT. Aristot. 
 Meteor. 1.13, VTTO TOV KavKavov \ip.vr), vv 
 Ka\ova-iv ol fKtl SdXarrai/. -f 
 
 J, f. i^w, (kindr. SdXXo),) to warm, 
 to make warm, by fire, Horn. Od. 21. 179, 
 246 ; by warmth imparted, Sept. 1 K. 1, 2. 
 4. Jos. Ant. 7. 14. 3 ; of a fowl brooding, 
 Sept. Deut. 22, 6. Plut. de Solert. anim. 4. 
 In N. T. trop. to cherish, to foster, c. ace. 
 1 Thess. 2, 7 a>s av rpoipbs SdXn-T/ ra fav- 
 rr> TeKva. Eph. 5, 29. So Jos. B. J. 4. 3. 
 14. Theocr. 14. 38. 
 
 77, indec. Thamar, Heb. 
 (palm-tree) Tamar, the widow of Er, and 
 daughter-in-law of Judah, Matt. 1, 3. See 
 Gen. c. 38. 
 
 , w, f. 770-03, (3d/i/3or,) to be 
 astonished, to be amazed, intrans. Acts 9, 6 
 rpffiatv re Kal 3a/i/3coj/. So Sept. 1 Sam. 
 14,15. Horn. II. 8. 77. Plut. Paul. ^Em. 34. 
 Later also c. ace. to astonish any one, 
 i Sept. 2 Sam. 22, 5 ; and hence Pass. 3a/i- 
 Peopai, to be astonished, to be amazed, 
 Mark 1, 27. 10, 24. 32. So Wisd. 17, 3. 
 1 Mace. 6, 8. Plut. J. Caes. 45. Id. Brut. 20. 
 
 j/ipO9, tor, ovs, TO, (Sdo^iat.) astonish 
 ment, amazement, from admiration, Luke 4, 
 36. 5, 9. Acts 3, 10. Horn. II. 4. 79. Luc. 
 Amor. 14. Thuc. 6. 31. 
 
 ov, 6, fj, adj. (Sdmroj,) 
 deadly, e. g. poisonous, Mark 16, 18. Jos. 
 Ant. 4. 8. 34. Theophr. H. PL 9. 5. 2. 
 Plato Rep. 406. b. Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 651. 
 
 ^avaTTjtpopos, ov, 6, f/, adj. (Sdvaros 
 (ep&>,) death-bringing, deadly, James 3, 8 
 p.fo-TT] lov Savarrjfpopov. Sept. for rf,ab 
 Num. 18, 22. Luc. Hermot. 62. Hdian. 3* 
 12. 7. Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 32. Comp. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 651. 
 
 ^ai/aT09, ov, 6, (SI^O-KGO, Saveii/,) death 
 the extinction of life, naturally or by vio 
 lence. 
 
 1. Genr. and of natural death, John 11, 4 
 
329 
 
 "Sapped) 
 
 avTi) rj dcr3Wia ot /c eort irpus Savarov. V. 
 
 13. Rom. 8, 38. Phil. 1,20. Heb. 7,23.al. 
 So yfvf cr3ai V. Iftflv rov Sai/urov, see in yeuco 
 no. 2 and e?S<u I. 3. Also Matt. 26, 38 et 
 Mark 14, 34 TrepiXvTroy eW Savarou sorrow 
 ful even unto death, comp. Engl. to grieve 
 oneself to death. Rev. 13, 3 ds ^dvarov. 
 ib. 17 irXrjyf] Savdrou, the deadly wound. John 
 12, 33 TToiw 2ai>dr&> ^jueXXef diro^vfio-Kfiv, by 
 what death he should die. 18,32. 21,19. Sept. 
 for nj72 Judg. 13, 7. al. seep. (So Epict. 
 Ench. 5. Xen. Ag. 10. 3 ; Savdrw Sa.vflv 
 Horn. Od. 11. 412.) Plur. 3di/aToi, deaths, 
 i. e. exposures to death, 2 Cor. 11, 23. So 
 Plut. Romul. 24, Xoijuos "Savdrovs p.ev alfyvi- 
 ftiovs dv^panrois tivtv vucrutv fTrKptpatv. Pol. 
 6. 54. 4. Meton. for plague, pestilence, Rev. 
 6,8. 18,8. Sept. and nia Ex. 10, 17. Jer. 18, 
 21 ; Sept. for -or; 1 k 8, 37. Jer. 21, 7. al. 
 
 2. Of a violent death, e. g. as a punish 
 ment, evokes Saiwrou Matt. 26, 66. Mark 
 
 14, 64; agios 3ai>. Luke 23, 15. Acts 23, 
 29. al. KaraKpivtiv riva Sai/drop Matt. 20, 
 18. Mark 10, 33; Sdvaror aravpov Phil. 2, 
 8 ; and so genr. Matt. 10, 21. Mark 13, 12. 
 Luke 23, 22. 24, 20. Acts 22,4. 2 Cor. 1, 
 9. 10. Rev. 2, 10. al. Of the death of Je 
 sus, 1 Cor. 11, 26. Phil. 2, 8. Heb. 2, 9. 
 5, 7; as piacular, Rom. 5, 10. Col. 1, 22. 
 Heb. 2, 14. 9, 15. By Hebr. Matt. 15, 4 et 
 Mark 7, 10 3ai/dr<a reXevrdrco, quoted from 
 Ex. 21, 17 where Sept. for na^P fria 
 (comp. v, 16). Rev. 2, 23 TCI TCKVU av-rijs 
 dKOKTtvat ti> 3ai/dr, and so Sept. for Jrra 
 par Ex. 22, 18. Hdian. 2. 2. 14. Xen. 
 An. 2. 6. 29 bis. 
 
 3. Spec. Heb. nja and Sept. Zdvaros 
 often have the sense of destruction, perdi 
 tion, misery, implying both physical death 
 and exclusion from the presence and favour 
 of God, in consequence of sin and disobedi 
 ence, opp. to o^n , Sept. fojij, life and happi 
 ness; so Deut. 30, 19. Prov. 11, 19. 12,28. 
 Is. 25, 8 ; comp. Ps. 16, 1 1 et Acts 2, 28. In 
 N. T. this notion is applied with more defi- 
 niteness to the gospel scheme ; and as faf) 
 is used to denote the bliss and glory of the 
 kingdom of God, including the idea of a 
 joyful resurrection (see fco^ no. 3. b), so " 
 3di>aroj is put for the opposite, viz. rejection 
 from the kingdom of God, including the 
 idea of physical death as aggravated by 
 eternal condemnation ; the idea of physical 
 death being sometimes more prominent, and 
 sometimes that of subsequent perdition. John 
 8, 51 ^dvarov ov /JLT) Zftoprjcrrj fis rov alwva. 
 Rom. 6, 16 SoC Xoi a^aprLas el s Zdvarov. v. 
 21 TO yap re\os (Keivw, Sdwiror. v. 23. 7, 
 
 5. 10. 8, 2. 6. 2 Cor. 2, 16. 3, 7. 2 Tim. 1 
 10 Karapyf]cravTos p.ev rov ^dvarov, (pwrf)- 
 (ravTos Se u>T)v 8ta TOV fvayyfXiov. Heb. 
 
 2, 15. James 5, 20. 1 John 3, 14. 5, 16. 17. 
 al. Called also 6 Sevrepos Zdvaros, the 
 second death, Rev. 2, 11. 20, 6. 14. 21, 8; 
 comp. in dno%i>f]o~K<i> no. 2. In this sense 6 
 Sdi/aroy is sometimes used in a species of 
 half-personification, the idea of physical 
 death being prominent, Rom. 5, 12. 14. 17. 
 21. 1 Cor. 15, 26. 54. 55. 56 ; comp. Is. 25, 
 8. Hos. 13, 14. 
 
 4. Poet. 6 ZdvaTos, death, personified 
 as the king of Hades, Rev. 6, 8. 20, 13. 14. 
 21, 4 ; also 1, 18. Acts 2, 24. So Sept 
 
 and rvra Ps - 49 > 15 5 com P- Job 18 > I 3 - 
 Meton. for qdi]s itself, Matt. 4, 16 et Luke 
 1 , 79 eV . . . oTcta Sai/drou, death-shade, the 
 shades of Hades, i. e. intens. thickest dark 
 ness, quoted from Is. 9, 1 where Sept. for 
 Pjabs ; comp. Prov. 7, 27. + 
 
 ^avaroa), w, f. &>o-o>, (Sdvaroy,) to put 
 to death, to slay, e. g. with one s own hands, 
 Hdot. 1. 113. In N. T. to cause to be put 
 to death, to deliver over to death, c. ace. 
 Matt. 10, 21 %ava.TG><rovcnv avrovs. 26, 59. 
 27, 1. Mark 13, 12. 14, 55. Luke 21, 16. 
 Pass. 2 Cor. 6, 9. 1 Pet. 3, 18 ; also hyper- 
 bol. Rom. 8, 36, quoted from Ps. 44, 23 
 where Sept. for :nrt. Sept. for mart i K. 
 11,40. Jer. 38, 15. So Plut. Themist. 22,23. 
 Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 15, 51. Trop. to mortify, 
 to subdue evil desires, appetites, c. ace. Rom. 
 8, 13. Pass, to become dead to any thing, to 
 be freed from its power, c. dat. Rom. 7, 4. 
 
 S-aTTTW, f. -^a), Pass. aor. 2 ^rd(prjv, to 
 perform funeral riles, pr. including burning 
 and burial, Horn. Od. 12. 12. II. 21. 323. 
 In N. T. genr. to bury, to inter, c. ace. Matt. 
 8, 21. 22. 14, 12. Luke 9, 59. 60. Acts 5, 
 
 6. 9. 10. Pass. Luke 16, 22. Acts 2, 29. 
 
 1 Cor. 15, 4. Sept. for 13J3 Gen. 23, 4 sq. 
 So Hdian. 4. 3. 19. Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 23. 
 
 Qdpa, 6, indec. Thara, Heb. rnri Te- 
 rah, pr. n. of the father of Abraham, Luke 
 
 3, 34. See Gen. 11, 24 sq. Josh. 24, 2. 
 
 Srappe o), i, f. jjo-w, (3dppor later Att. 
 for 3upo-oj,) to be of good cheer, of good cour- 
 age, to be bold, full of hope and confidence ; 
 
 2 Cor. 5, 6 Sappovires ovv rtuvrore. V. 8. 
 Heb. 13, 6. (Sept. Prov. 1, 21. Ceb. Tab. 
 30. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 32.) With tv TIVI, to 
 have hope and confidence in any one, 2 Cor. 
 
 7. 16. Sept. Sapp ft eV air;; for 3 rras 
 Prov. 31,11. (Pol. 5. 29. 4 M TIM.) With 
 etr nva, to be bold towards any one, 2 Cor. 
 10, 1. 2. 
 
330 
 
 >, f. ijo-<a, (3dpo-oy,) to be of 
 good cheer, courage, comfort, i. q. Sappe w 
 q. v. Hdian. 8. 7. 21. Time. 2. 88. In N. T. 
 only imperat. 3dpo-ei, Sap ere Ire, ie o/" 
 g ooa cheer, courage, comfort, spoken by way 
 of encouragement, Matt. 9, 2. 22. 14, 27. 
 Mark 6, 50. 10, 49. Luke 8, 48. John 16, 
 33. Acts 23, 11. Sept. for K^tV^S Gen. 
 35, 17. Joel 2, 21. 22. So Horn. II. 4. 184. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 18. 
 
 ^dp(7O<f, fos, ovs, TO, cheer, i. e. a cheer 
 ful mind, courage, good courage ; in N. T. 
 only Xap/Sdi etj 3ap<rof, to take courage, 
 
 1. e. to be encouraged, to be full of hope 
 and confidence, i. q. Sappew, Acts 28, 15. 
 So Xap/3. 3. Jos. Ant. 5. 5. 4 ; also Sdpcroy 
 Xap/3dm Tivd Thuc. 2. 92 ; genr. Diod. Sic. 
 14. 59. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 5. 
 
 ^au/ia, O.TOS, TO, (prob. 3dopai T ) a won 
 der, Xen. An. 6. 3. 23. In N. T. wonder, 
 admiration, Rev. 17,6 e Savpao-a 3aipa peya, 
 Buttm. ^ 131. 4. [2 Cor. 11,14.] So Sept. 
 Job 17, 8. Hdian. 1.1.8. Xen. Ag. 2. 27. 
 
 ^raVfld^d), f. do-op.au (Savpa,) aor. 1 
 e 3aupao-a. For the fat. Mid. Rev. 17, 8, 
 see Buttm. j 113. 5 and n. 7. To wonder. 
 
 1. Intrans. to wonder, to be astonished, 
 to be amazed, absol. Matt. 8, 10 6 irj. e Sav- 
 pao-e xat erne. v. 27. 9, 8. 33. 15, 31. 21, 
 20. 22, 22. 27, 14. Mark 5, 20. 6, 51. 15, 
 5. Luke 1, 63. 8, 25. 11, 14. 24, 41. John 
 5,20. 7,15. Acts 2, 7. 4,13. 13, 41. Rev. 
 17,7.8. Sept. for WBCrt Is. 41,23. So 
 2 Mace. 1, 22. Luc, Nigrin. 38. Xen. Cyr. 
 7. 1. 6. With adjuncts, e. g. ace. of the 
 kindred noun, Rev. 17, 6; see in 3ai)pa. 
 With Std TI Mark 6, 6. John 7, 21 ; ev TIVI 
 Luke 1, 21 ; eVt TIVI Mark 12, 17. Luke 
 
 2, 33. 4, 22. 9, 43. 20, 26. Acts 3, 12 ; 
 Trepi TWOS Luke 2, 18. With 6Yt, to won 
 der that, because, Luke 11, 38. John 3, 7. 
 
 4, 27. Gal. 1, 6. (Xen. Yen. 1. 3.) With 
 ei, to wonder if, utielher, Mark 15, 44. 
 1 John 3, 13. So Hdian. 7. 1. 14. Xen. 
 An. 3. 2. 35. 
 
 2. Trans, to wonder at, i. e. a) to be 
 astonished at ; c. ace. of pron. or part. John 
 
 5, 28 p.)) Savp,. TOUTO. Luke 24, 12 ; comp. 
 Buttm. J 131. 8. So Luc. D. Deor. 23. 1 
 prjo~v 3avp. b) to admire, to marvel at, 
 c. ace. Luke 7, 9 6 I?;. f%avp.acrfv OVTOV. 
 Acts 7, 31. Pass. 2 Thess. 1,10. So Diod. 
 Sic. 4. 31 TT?I> apeTriv. Luc. D. Deor. 16. 2. 
 Xen. Lac. 1.2. c) From the Heb. Jude 1 6 
 3avpdbiTey TrpoVoMra, admirers of persons, 
 i. e. having respect to persons, partial; so 
 Sept. for C^Q KTB5 Is. 9, 15. Job 13, 10. 
 22, 8 ; TW Lev. 19, 15. d) Pragn.Rev. 
 
 13, 3 Savpd^eiv OTTIO-W rot) Srjpiov, to wonder 
 after the beast, i. e. to admire and folJow him, 
 to become his worshipper ; comp. v. 4. 
 
 ^au/zacrto?, ov, 6, 17, adj. (3avpdf,) 
 wonderful, marvellous, Luc. D. Mort. 20. 5. 
 Xen. An. 2. 3. 15. In N. T. Neut. TO 3av- 
 pdo-tov, a wonder, miracle, Matt. 21, 15. 
 Sept. for a6e p s . 77, 12. 15; 
 Josh. 3, 5. So Ecclus. 48, 4. 
 
 rj, 6v, (3avp,do>,) wonder 
 ful, marvellous ; 1 Pet. 2, 9 tls TO Savpa- 
 trrov OVTOV <pa>v. Rev. 15, 1. 3, a-n/iflov V. 
 epya Sav/*. John 9, 30. 2 Cor. 11, 14 *at 
 ov Saupao-roV, and no wonder. Matt. 21,42 
 et Mark 12, 11 avTrj [for TOVTO] ICTTI 3at>- 
 pao-r?) fv o<p3. ?}p. quoted from Ps. 118, 23 
 where Sept. for nxbsa N^fi , comp. Gesen. 
 Lehrg. p. 661. Heb . Gr. 105. 3. b. Sept. 
 for li ns* Ps. 8, 1 ; jjni s Ex. 15, 11. 34, 10. 
 Luc. Somn. 9, 10. Hdian. 2. 4. 11. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 6. 7. Mem. 1. 1. 17. 
 
 jea, ay, r), (fern, of 3eos,) a goddess, 
 
 e. g. Diana, Acts 19,^27; also v. 35 and 
 
 37 in Rec. Luc. pro Imag. 23. Xen. Ven. 
 1. 6. 
 
 , f. daopai, Mid. depon. (3/a. 
 Sdopat.) Pass. perf. reSe apat as Mid. John 
 
 1, 32. Buttm. I 136. 3 ; aor. 1 e SeaSijv in 
 Pass, sense, Buttm. j 113. n. 6. 
 
 1. to see, to look at, to behold, pr. with 
 intentness, desire, pleasure ; see Tittm. de 
 Syn. N. T. p. Ill, 120. So c. ace. Matt. 
 1 1, 7 et Luke 7, 24 TI e ^XSere Sedaao-Sat ; 
 Matt. 22, 11. Luke 23, 55. John 1, 14. 4, 
 35. 11, 45. 1 John 1, 1. 4, 14. Pass. aor. 1, 
 Trpoy TO SfaSjiJi/ai avTols, in order to be seen 
 of (by) them, Matt. 6, 1. 23, 5. So 2 Mace. 
 
 2, 4. Hdian. 3. 4. 11. Xen. An. 3. 5. 13. 
 Spec. i. q. to go to see, to visit, Rom. 15, 24. 
 Sept. and MJO 2 Chr. 22, 6. So Jos. Ant. 
 16. 1. 2. Luc" Nigrin. 2. 
 
 2. Simply, to see, to perceive with the 
 eyes, i. q. I8e1v, c. ace. John 8, 10 p^SeVa 
 3eao-dpei>oy. Acts 21, 27. 22, 9. 1 John 4, 
 12. Pass. e SedSr; VTT aiiTrjs Mark 16, 11. 
 (Jos. Ant. 1. 11. 2. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 31. 
 CEc. 8. 11.) With an ace. and particip. 
 Mark 16, 14. Luke 5, 27 eSfdo-aTo TfXuvrjv 
 ...KaSrinevov KT\. John 1, 32. 38. Acts 1, 
 11. (Hdian. 2. 1. 13. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 17.) 
 With OTI John 6, 5. Acts 8, 18. 
 
 f. iVo>, (3 aTpoi>,) to be an actor 
 in the theatre, Suid. sub v. ^SoXo yo?. Trans. 
 to bring upon the theatre, to make a specta 
 cle of; in N. T. trop. Pass. Heb. 10, 33 
 Kal 3Xtyfo-t 3eaTptb pei oi. Criminals were 
 sometimes exposed and punished in the 
 
331 
 
 theatre; see Philo Leg. ad Cai. p. 1043. 
 Plut. de sera Num. vind. 9. Theophylact. 
 h. 1. 3eaTpiop.ei/oi, rovriimv uxrufp tirl 
 SfaTpov TrapaSfiypaTijJo/^ei ot. So eVSeaTpi- 
 fw Pol. 3. 91. 10. ib. 5. 12. 2. 
 
 ^iarpov, O v, TO , (3f(io/xat,) pr. place 
 for seeing, a theatre, where dramatic and 
 other public spectacles were exhibited, ^El. 
 V. H. 3. 8. Xen. Hell. 4. 4. 3. In N. T. 
 a) a theatre, as a place of public assembly, 
 Acts 19, 29. 31. Here the people were 
 accustomed to convene on various occa 
 sions, to hear harangues, to hold public 
 consultations, and the like ; see Xen. Hell. 
 6. 5. 7. Diod. Sic. 16. 84. Pol. 29. 10. 2. 
 Jos. Ant. 17. 6. 3. B. J. 7. 3. 3. Cic. pro 
 Flacc. 7; comp. Kypke II. p. 100. Wetst. 
 II. p. 585. b) Meton. a spectacle, public 
 show, trop. 1 Cor. 4, 9; comp. Heb. 10, 
 33. So ^schyl. Dial. Socr. 3. 20 SeWpa 
 
 : ov, TO, (perh. neut. of Seloy,) sul 
 phur, brimstone ; Rev. 19, 20 TTJV Kaiofj.evr]v 
 tv TCJ 3ei<B. So Trvp KOI Seloi , fire and 
 brimstone, i. e. sulphurous flames, Luke 
 17, 29. Rev. 14, 10. 20, 10. 21,8; Trvp ml 
 Kcmvbs KOI Setoi , sulphurous flames and 
 smoke, Rev. 9, 17. 18. Sept. and rvnsa 
 Gen. 19, 24. Ez. 38, 22. Eduni. 8. 4. 26\ 
 Plato Tim. Locr. 99. e. 
 
 ^609, a, ov, (3eo s,) godlike, divine, per 
 taining to God, 2 Pet. 1, 3. 4. Sept. Trvevpa 
 3. for DT&X Ex. 31, 3. 35, 29. So Hdian. 
 1. 11. 10. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 32. Neut. TO 
 Seioi/, the divine nature, dicinily, Godhead, 
 Acts 17, 29. So Diod. Sic. 16. 60. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 4. 18. 
 
 ^eiorr/S, TJTOS, 17, (Seo s,) Godhead, deity, 
 i. e. the divine nature and perfections, Rom. 
 1, 20. Wisd. 18, 9. Luc. Calumn. 17. 
 Plut. de Pyth. Orac. 8, 9. 
 
 ^eia)$rj<>, fos, our, 6, 77, adj. (Seloi ,) of 
 sulphur, made of sulphur, Rev. 9, 17. Phi- 
 lostr. Imag. I. 27. p. 802. A form only of 
 the later Greek, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 228. 
 
 *&e\,i]fACt, CITOS, TO, (3eAu,) will ; a word 
 not Attic, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 7. For the 
 signif. of the form, see Buttm. \ 119. 7. a. 
 Kiihner 5 233. 1. b. 
 
 1 . Pr. will, the thing willed, what one 
 wills to do or to have done; Matt. 7, 21 
 aXX 6 TTOifav TO 3e X77p.a TOV ircnpos. 12, 50. 
 21, 31. Mark 3, 35. John 5, 30 bis. 6, 38 
 bis. Acts 13, 22. Rom. 12, 2. Eph. 6, 6. 
 Heb. 13, 21. al. Eph. 2, 3 TO. SeX^aTa TTJS 
 vapxos. Sept. and fB.n 1 K. 5, 8. 9 ; "p S-i 
 Ps. 103, 21. 143, 10. Hence will, i. q. 
 
 purpose, counsel, decree; Matt. 18, 14 ov- 
 Tcoy OVK eoriv StX^/za fp.irp. TOV irarpos. 
 John 6, 39. 40. Acts 22, 14. Heb. 10,7. 9 
 10. 36. Collect. TO 3e X77p,a TOV 3eov, the 
 counsels, the eternal purposes of God, Matt. 
 6, 10. Luke 11,2. 
 
 2. Abstr. will, the act of willing, wish, 
 good pleasure; Matt. 26, 42 yenj3ijT<o TO 
 3eX7p.a o-ov. Acts 21, 14. 1 Cor. 16, 12 
 OVK rjv SeX^ia. Eph. 5, 17. 1 Pet. 2, 15. 3, 
 17. 4,2.3.19. Uohn5,14. So Se Xjj/za o-ap- 
 KOS, the will of the flesh, carnal desire, John 
 1,13. Sept. for fan Ps. 1,2 ; yisn Dan. 
 8,4. 11, 3. Ecclus. 8, 15. 
 
 3. Meton. wn7Z, the faculty of willing, 
 free-will. 1 Cor. 7, 37 e|ovcriai> e^ei Trepi 
 TOU i Si ov SeX^aToy. 2 Pet. 1, 21. So of 
 God, Eph. 1, 5. 11. + 
 
 ^eX.rja-if, eos, f], (3eXw,) will, good- 
 pleasure of God, Heb. 2, 4. Sept. Ez. 18, 
 23. 2 Mace. 12, 16. A word not Attic. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 7. 
 
 ^eXto, f. SeXjjo-w, inf. 3 Xeii>, part. 3*- 
 \u>v ; also impf. ^fSeXoi/, aor. 1 ^3e X?;cra ; 
 the latter two from e Se Xw, of which 3eXu 
 is merely a synonymous shortened form. 
 The earlier e 3e Xo> is alone found in Homer 
 and the epic poets, as also in Pindar ; but 
 never in the tragedians, except impf. Tjfoe- 
 Xoi . In Attic prose e Se Xw is the prevail 
 ing form ; and the only impf. and aor. are 
 r/3eXoi> and ^Se XTjo-e. In N. T. these two 
 forms only are from tSe Xw ; all the rest 
 from Se Xw. See Lob. ad Phryn. p. 7, 332. 
 Passow in e 3e Xw fin. To will, to wish, to 
 desire, pr. implying active choice and pur 
 pose, and thus differing from /3ovXop.ai ; see 
 in /3ovXojuai init. 
 
 1 . Pr. to will, to be willing, to be pleased 
 to do any thing, to purpose, to choose, e. g. 
 
 a) Of God and Christ ; c. inf. aor. Rom. 9, 
 22 et oe Se Xcoi/ 6 3e6f eVStt ao-3ai KTX. Col. 
 1, 27. 1 Tim. 2, 4. (Horn. II. 13. 743. 
 Hdot. 2. 13. Xen. Mag. Eq. 9. 9.) Absol. 
 c. inf. impl. John 5, 21. Acts 18, 21 TOU 
 3eou 3e Xoj/roy. 1 Cor. 4, 19. James 4, 15. 
 So Horn. II. 20. 243. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 19 ult. 
 
 b) Of men, c. infin. e. g. aor. Matt. 5, 40. 
 Mark 6, 19 KOI rj%f\fv UVTOV airoKTt ivai. 
 John 1, 44. Acts 7, 28. al. Inf. pros. Matt. 
 19, 21 ei 3 Xeu TeXftos (ivai. Luke 1, 62. 
 John 6, 67. Acts 10, 10. 14, 13. 24, 6. al. 
 Absol. c. inf. impl. Matt. 8, 2 tav SeX^?. 
 Mark 3, 13. 1 Cor. 7, 36. Rev. 11, 6. al. 
 (Palscph. 24. 4. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 10.) So 
 in antith. of to ivill and to do, Rom. 7, 18. 
 2 Cor. 8, 10. 11. Phil. 2, 13 ; comp. Winer 
 \ 65. 6. Also c. negat. ov Se Xw, not to 
 
332 
 
 rcill, not to haie in mind; hence Lo will not, 
 to determine not to do this or that, to refuse ; 
 so c. inf. aor. Matt. 2, 18 OVK jjfofXe irapa- 
 AcX7?3r>ai. Mark 6, 26. Luke 15, 28. al. 
 Inf. pres. John 7, 1. 2 Thess. 3, 10. Absol. 
 R. inf. impl. Matt. 18, 30. 21, 29. Rom. 7, 
 15 sq. (So Palseph. 2. 6. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 
 iO.) Further, with a negative, the idea of 
 3e Xo> sometimes approaches that of ovva/j.a.1, 
 to be able, I can; e. g. Luke 18, 13 OVK 
 fjSfXfv ouSe rovs o(^>3. tTtapai, he would not, 
 could not, dared not. See Passow in e 3e Xco. 
 Greg. Cor. p. 135. Schzef. So Horn. II. 13. 
 106. Plato Pheedr. 230. d. Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 
 16. c) Trop. of the wind, John 3, 8 Sirov 
 Se Xet, nvel, the wind bloweth where it listeth. 
 So Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 19 o,rt rj^eKev, of an 
 eagle. ., " 
 
 2. Genr. to will, i. q. to wish, to desire, to 
 choose; c. infin. e. g. aor. Luke 8, 20 I8elv 
 o-e Se Xoires. 23, 8. Mark 7, 24. Inf. pres. 
 John 16, 19. Gal. 4, 20. 1 Cor. 7, 7. 11, 3. 
 14, 5. (Hdian. 1. 2. 3.) Absol. c. inf. impl. 
 Matt. 15, 28 yei/TjSijrco crot a>s Se Xeij. Mark 
 9, 13. John 15, 7. 1 Cor. 4, 21. (Paleeph. 
 28. 3.) Sometimes apparently c. ace. where 
 however an infin. is strictly implied, e. g. 
 Luke 5, 39 ovdels TTIMV TraXaiov fv^ecas 3e- 
 X vtov sc. iriveiv. 2 Cor. 11, 12 ru>v SeXov- 
 TU>V d<popp.r]v sc. evpelv. Also c. neg. ou 
 3eXo>, to will not, to be unwilling, to choose 
 not, c. infin. aor. Luke 19, 14 ov 3tXo/jei/ 
 TOVTOV j3aa-i\fvcrat e< TjfjLas. 1 Cor. 10, 20. 
 (Palaeph. 39. 3.) Inf. pres. Rom. 1, 13. 
 1 Cor. 10, 1. 2 Cor. 1, 8. (Luc. D. Mort. 2. 
 1 ult.) Absol. c. inf. impl. John 21, 18. 
 Followed by particles, e. g. et, Luke 12, 49 
 ri 3eXo>, d 77877 dvrjfp^T) ; with i va C. Sub- 
 junct. Matt. 7, 12 ocra uv %e\T]Te iva iroiwcriv 
 {ifj.lv ol i/3p. Mark 6, 25. John 17, 24. So 
 in interrogations, c. fut. Indie, or more pro 
 perly aor. Subjunct. pr. with Iva implied ; 
 e. g. Matt. 20, 32 r( Se Xere [iva] Troiqcrco 
 ifuv ; as in Engl. what will ye [that] I should 
 do unto you? 26, 17. Mark 14, 12. 15, 9. 
 12. Luke 9, 54. al. Winer 42. 4. b, and 
 note. (Anacr. 12. 1. Soph. (Ed. R. 651 ; 
 c. fut. Luc. Navig. 4 et 26.) Once with 77 
 i. q. to choose rather, to prefer, 1 Cor. 14, 19 ; 
 see in ij III. a. Sometimes imperf. ^ SeXoi/ 
 (in Att. writers also pres. 3e X<a,) when fol 
 lowed by an infin. is to be rendered as an 
 adverb before a finite verb, willingly, gladly ; 
 as John 6, 21 fj^eXov ovv Xafte iv avrbv els 
 TO Tr\o1ov, they gladly received him into the 
 vessel. 2 Pet. 3, 5 Xai Sdi/ei yap UVTOVS TOVTO 
 3Xoiras, on KrX.for this escapes them with 
 their own will, of this they are willingly ig 
 norant, that, etc. See Buttm. $ 150. m. 36. 
 
 Winer $58. 4. So Plato Thezet. 143. d. 
 Xen. Hi. 7. 9. Cyr. 5. 1. 20. 
 
 3. Spec. 3eXo> c. infin. sometimes (like 
 /ie XXo)) serves merely as a sign of the fu 
 ture, like Engl. will or shall, and gives to 
 the infin. a future sense ; but only of ina 
 nimate things, e. g. Acts 2, 12 et 17, 20 ri 
 av 3e Xot TOVTO fivat. ; what then will this be ? 
 or as in comm. Engl. what is this going to 
 be ? Hdot. 1. 109. ib. 2. 11, 14. Plato Rep. 
 370* b. See Passow in e 3e Xa>. Viger. p. 
 263 sq. 
 
 4. By Hebr. like Heb. ^Bfl , to delight in, 
 lu have pleasure in, to desire, to lore, i. q. 
 (pi\f(a. So c. ace. Matt. 27, 43 ei 3e X aw- 
 TOV, quoted from PS. 22, 9 where Sept. for 
 113 7?0 > an d so Sept. and ^Sn c . ace. Ez. 
 18, 23. Also Matt. 9, 13 eXeoz/ 3<fXo>, Kal 
 ov 3u<n ai>, quoted from Hos. 6, 6 where 
 Sept. for ysn c . ace. Heb. 10, 5. 8 quoted 
 from Ps. 40, 7 where Sept. for "} B^ c. ace. 
 With an inf. and parall. with <pi\f(o, Luke 
 20, 46 TCOV SeXoiTo)! TrepnraTfiv tv crroXais 
 Kal (piXovvTcav dcrTrao-fjiovs. With both con 
 structions, inf. and ace. Mark 12, 38 T>V 
 < 5e\6t>TQ)V tv (TToXais Trfpiirarelv KCU d<nra~ 
 0-p.ovs. Sept. and ySH c. inf. 1 K. 9, 1. 
 Esth. 6, 6. 11. Once c. / Tifi, to delight 
 in any thing, Col. 2, 18 3eXwi> lv Taneivo- 
 <ppoo-vvr) KT\. delighting in (affecting) hu 
 mility. Sept. and 3 fan p s . 112, 1. 147, 
 10. + 
 
 S-e/ie\i09, ov, 6, fj, adj. (Se /ia, n Sjj/it,) 
 belonging to the foundation, e. g. X/3ot Aris- 
 toph. Av. 1137. In N. T. as Subst. a foun 
 dation, e. g. 
 
 1. Masc. 6 3e/xe Xtoy sc. Xi 3or, pr. a 
 foundation-stone, foundation; Heb. 11, 10 
 TTJV TOVS 3f/i. e^ovcrav Tro\iv. Rev. 21, 14. 
 19 bis. Sept. for W 1 K. 5, 17 ; ^ Job 
 22, 16. So Plut. Poplic. 15. Pol. 1. 40. 9. 
 Thuc. 1. 93 ot 3e/ieXtoi Travroi&v \tia>v. 
 Trop. of elementary doctrine and instruc 
 tion, the foundation, 1 Cor. 3, 10 Seyue Xiov 
 T&(iKa. Eph. 2, 20. Rom. 15, 20. Heb. 6, 
 1 ; of a fundamental doctrine or principle, 
 e. g. Christ 1 Cor. 3, 11. 12. Also 1 Tim 
 6, 19 SfpeXiov KaXoV, a good foundation, 
 on which hope and salvation may rest. 
 Meton. 2 Tim. 2, 19 6 Sejue Xtor TOV 3eov, 
 that which God hath founded, God s build 
 ing, the true believers or church of God ; 
 com p. 1 Cor. 3, 9. 16. 
 
 2. Neut. TO Se ^eXtoj/, a foundation, ir. 
 Luke s writings, Acts 16, 26 TCI 
 
 Luke 6, 48. 49. 14, 29. Sept. for 
 
 Prov. 8, 29. Is. 58, 12; ib"] Mic. 1, 6. 
 
 Diod. Sic. 5. 66. Xen. Hell. 5. 2. 5. Mceris, 
 

 3ep.Xta Kal Se/ie Xioi ouSeTepaK, arriKcos 
 3e/i/Xioi Kai 3ep,e Xioy, KOLVWS- 
 
 ^efieXlOQ), f. axro), (3e/ie Xtor,) to Zay Z/ie 
 foundation of any thing, to found, c. ace. 
 Heb. 1,10 Tfjvyfjv e 3ep.eXiWar, quoted from 
 Ps. 102, 26 where Sept. for ^ . Pass. 
 Matt. 7, 25 et Luke 6, 48 reSep-eXiwro yap 
 eVt TIJI/ TttTpav, where for the omission of 
 the augm. in plupf. see Buttm. { 83. n. 7. 
 So Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 11. Trop. to ground, to 
 establish, to confirm, c. ace. 1 Pet. 5, 10. 
 Pass. Epli. 3, 17. Col. 1, 23 rfj ir urrti 
 Te3e fj.f\ia>nevov. So Diod. Sic. 11. 68. 
 ib. 15. 1. 
 
 ?, ov, 6, ^, adj. (3eo s. StSu- 
 ,) taught of God, 1 Thess. 4, 9 ; comp. 
 ol TOV 3eoC John 6, 45. Theophil. ad 
 Autol. II. p. 87. 
 
 ^eoXoiyo?, ov, 6, (Seo j, Xe yco,) a theo- 
 logue, one who treats of God and divine 
 things ; as Epimenides, Diod. Sic. 5. 80 ; 
 Pherecydes, Plut. Sylla 36 In N. T. 
 spoken of John, the divine, the theologian, 
 in the inscription of the Apocalypse ; perh. 
 as maintaining the divine nature and attri 
 butes of the Logos, comp. Rev. 1,2. 17. 18. 
 22, 13. 
 
 ^eo/za^CO), w, f. 170-0), (3eo/iax*,) to 
 fight or contend against God, Acts 23, 9 
 Rec. 2 Mace. 7, 19. Plut. de Superst. 7. 
 Xen. (Ec. 16. 3. 
 
 09, ov, 6, f), adj. (2edr, 
 fighting against God, contending with God, 
 Acts 5, 39. Symm. for c^sn Prov. 9, 
 18. 21, 16. 
 
 ^, ov, 6, 17, adj. (3eds, TiWo),) 
 God-inspired, inbreathed of God, 2 Tim. 3, 
 16 iraaa ypafpr] SfOTTJ/euo-ros. Pint, de Pla- 
 cit. Philosoph. 5. 2, TOVS oveipovs TOVS Seo- 
 irvvo~rovs- Phocylid. 121 rfjs fie SeoTryev- 
 OTOU o-offr iTjs Xdyos (<TT\V liptcrros. Comp. 
 Jos. C. Ap. 1 . 7 [at ypa(pat] ra>v 7rpo(pr]T<Sv 
 Kara TI]V tirimnua TTJV O.TTO TOV SeoC p.a.Sdi - 
 Ttov. Cic. pro Arch. 8, poetam . . . quasi 
 divino quodam spiritu inflari. 
 
 @09) ov, 6, God, the deity ; for the deri 
 vation see note below. On the voc. 3ee 
 Matt. 27, 46. Sept. Judg. 21, 3. Wisd. 9, 
 1 , instead of the Attic voc. 3edr, see Buttm. 
 $ 35. n. 2. Winer 5 8. 2. c. 
 
 1. Genr. God, the supreme Lord and 
 Father of all, Jehovah ; so 6 3e 6s, Matt. 
 1, 23. 3, 9. 5, 8. 6, 30. John 4, 24. 9, 24. 
 Rom. 11,2. 16, 26. James 2, 19. al. saepiss. 
 Without the art. 3e 6s Matt. 6, 24. 19, 26. 
 Luke 2, 14. 52. 3, 2. John 1, 6. 18. 3, 2, 
 Acts 5, 29. Rom. 1, 7. 18. 1 Cor. 4, 1. al. 
 
 sa?p. Comp. Winer 518. 1. v. 3eoV. Sept. 
 everywhere for n^ffbx Gen. 1, 1. 2 sq. 
 SEE piss. Also Kvpios 6 3fdr, Matt. 4, 7. 
 10. 22, 37. Mark 12, 29. 30. Luke 1, 16. 
 3->. 1 Pet. 3, 15. Rev. 4, 8. 11,17. So 
 Acts 2, 39 Kvpios 6 Sedj V[JL>V. 7, 37. Sept. 
 for CvAx rnrrj Gen. 2,^15. 16. 18 sq. 3, 
 14 ; oftener c. gen. for "B irt bx rvii-n I s . 
 43,3. Jer. 3, 13. Ez. 44, 3. al. See Ge- 
 sen. Heb. Lex. ! " |> ] a. In construction . 
 a) Before a genitive, e. g. of person, 6 3eo s 
 TWOS , the God of any one, i. e. his protector, 
 benefactor, the object of his worship. Matt. 
 22, 32 6 3e6? A/3pao> KT\. Mark 12, 26. 
 Luke 1, 68. Acts 5, 30. 7, 32. 46. al. So 
 the voc. Matt. 27, 46 See /iou, See pov, and 
 Mark 15. 34 6 Seds /xou, 6 3eds /iou, quoted 
 from Ps. 22, 2 where Heb. ^ "bx, Sept 
 6 3e6s 6 3eds /xov. With gen. of thing, i. e 
 God as the author and giver, the source of 
 any thing, e. g. 3eoy TTJS vnop.ovr)s nal rrjs 
 Trapa/cXijaecay Rorn. 15, 5 ; 3. TIJS f\ni8os V. 
 13 ; 3. T-JJy ei pi^s 16, 20. Phil. 4, 9. Heb. 
 13, 20; 3. aKarao-rao-iW 1 Cor. 14, 33; 
 3. TraoT/y xapiroy 1 Pet. 5, 10. b) Genit. 
 rov 3 e o v after other nouns, e. g. as active 
 or subjective, denoting what comes forth, is 
 sent, given, appointed from God, Matt. 3, 16 
 Trvfvfia TOV 3. Luke 11, 49 17 crocpia TOU 3. 
 3, 38 (vlos) rov 3eou. 9, 20 6 Xpioroy TOV 3. 
 Acts 23, 4 TOV dpxiepea TOV 3. Matt. 6, 33 
 17 jSaatXei a TOU 3. 2 Tim. 3, 17 6 ai/3p. TOV 
 3eoi the man of God, taught, furnished of 
 God. 1 Thess. 4, 16 o-dX7riy 3eoC the trump 
 of God, which sounds by command of God, 
 i. q. TJ eV^drj; o-dX7ny 1 Cor. 15, 52 ; see 
 Winer $ 37. 3. Also in a passive or objective 
 sense, Winer $ 30. 1. Luke 11, 42 17 dydirr] 
 TOV 3eoO love TO God, see more in aydin] 
 no. 1 . Luke 6,12 -n-poo-ev^r) TOV SeoO prayer 
 to God. Mark 11, 22 TT KTTIS TOV 3. faith in 
 God. So O?KOJ TOV 3. i. e. consecrated to 
 God, Luke 6, 4. 1 Cor. 3, 9. Rev. 15, 2 *i- 
 Sapai T. SeoC harps for the praise of God, 
 comp. 1 Chr. 16, 42. Winer 5 37. 3. Fur 
 ther, TO. TOV 3eot! the things of God, e. g. 
 his counsels, purposes 1 Cor. 2, 1 1 ; or things 
 pkasing to him, Matt. 16, 23. Mark 8, 33 ; 
 or things belonging, pertaining, to him, 
 Matt. 22, 21. Mark 12, 17. Luke 20, 25. 
 (Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 20.) In this last sense alsc 
 we find TO. rrpos TOV 3eoV things pertaining 
 to God, his service and worship, Rom. 15. 
 17. Heb. 2, 17. 5, 1. c) Dat. rw Sew, 
 e. g. by Hebr. after adjectives, as dorelos 
 TW 3eo> Acts 7, 20, also Sucara TW Sew 
 2 Cor. 10, 4, intens. exceedingly, see in 
 ao-retos and SVVOTOS no. 1. a. Winer 5 37. 3. 
 Elsewhere after verbs, to or for God, e. g. 
 
334 
 
 Rom. 6, 10 et Gal. 2, 19 ji/ T Sew i. e. to 
 his honour and praise, in accordance with 
 Ills will. 2 Cor. 5, 13. 9, 11. al. 
 
 2. Of the Logos, Christ, who is declared 
 to be 6 3edy, e. g. John 1,1 KOI Seoy TJV 
 6 Xdyor. Rom. 9, 5. Phil. 2, 6. 1 Tim. 3, 1 6. 
 Heb. 1,8. 1 John 5, 20 ; also in the excla 
 mation of Thomas, John 20, 28. So Christ 
 is called 6 Seds in Test. XII Patr. p. 542, 
 6 Sfoy <Tu>fj.a Aa/3&>i> f&axTfV CIVTOVS dvaaTT]- 
 (Tfi yap Kvpios [TOV crcoTTJpa] 2fw KOL i/3paj- 
 TTOV. p. 644, 645, m^ecrSe Sew tv o~xr]fj.a.Tt 
 dv^pumov. p. 672 6<p%f]o-fTai 3ed?, Karoixtov 
 tv ai/SpcoTrois 1 eVt TT/J yi^r. p. 696 3eoy fty y- 
 Spa vTroKpivop-tvos. Also Justin Mart. Dial. 
 C. Tryph. p. 276. C, TOV ical irpo 7rou;o-eo>y 
 Koo-p-ov ovra 3eo f. p. 281. d, Seoy Kakelrai 
 KOI %fos earl KOI earai. Called likewise by 
 Justin M. 6 3eds, ib. p. 276. c. p. 300. d. p. 
 340. c. Comp. Origen c. Cels. 5. 39. ib. 
 6. 60. See Semisch, Justin der Mart. II. 
 p. 284 sq. [Engl. II. p. 187 sq.] 
 
 3. From the Heb. spoken of kings or 
 chief magistrates, as the representatives of 
 God in the Jewish theocracy. John 10, 34. 
 35 eyo> etVa, Seat tore ; et (Kfivovs fine 3e- 
 ovs KT\. quoted from and in allusion to Ps. 
 82, 1. 6, where Sept. and Heb. QirVbs ; 
 comp. v. 7. See also Ex. 22, 7. 8. 
 
 4. In the Greek sense, 6 3fdr, a god, the 
 deity; ol 3fot, the gods, i. e. tbe heathen 
 gods. Acts 7, 43 6 Seos- fyioii/ Pep.<pdv. 12, 
 22. 14, 11 of Sect. 19, 26. 28, 6. 1 Cor. 8, 
 4. 5. Gal. 4, 8. Satan too is called 6 3eo s 
 TOV alwi>os TOVTOV, the god of this world, its 
 leader, ruler, instigator, 2 Cor. 4, 4. Indeed 
 the Jews regarded all the heathen gods 
 as evil spirits, see in 8aip.6viov no. 2. (Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 9. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 18, 19. ib. 4. 7. 
 6.) Once fern. 17 3edy, a goddess, Diana, 
 Acts 19, 37 Grb. So Luc. D. Deor. 17. 2. 
 Xen. An. 3, 2. 12 T!J Aprefj.i8i . . . rfj Sew. 
 ib. 5. 3. 6, 7, 9. Meton. an idol, image, Acts 
 7.40. Sept for V>OQ bs Is. 44, 17; C^sss 
 2 Sam. 5, 21. 
 
 NOTE. The earliest derivation of 3eds 
 is from ri 377/xt, e. g. Hdot. 2. 52 Seovs 8e 
 Trpocra>i>6p.a(rdi> crfptat dno TOV TOLOVTOV, on 
 Ki xr/Jiu> Sei/rej rd irdirra 7Tpr]yp.aTa /cat Trd- 
 <ras vop.ds fl^ov. So Clem. Alex. Strom. I, 
 Sf6s 8e Trapd rrfv ~{<TIV f ipTjrai KCU rdiv, 
 TIJV 8iaKO(rp.T](Tiv. Plato derives it from 3/o> 
 to run, regarding the deity as having been 
 first recognized in the sun and moon and 
 earth and stars and heavens, art yovv alrd 
 opuivres irdvra del lovra 8pop.q> KOI Seov- 
 ra, ano ravTTjs TIJS <pvcr(a>s TTJS TOV 3fii/, 
 Seovr avTovs (novop-dcrai, Plato Crat. 16. p. 
 397. d. This idea is paraphrased by Theo- 
 
 phil. ad Autol. I. p. 71, i. q. rp^ft 
 fvepytlv, Tpefpeiv, irpovoeiv KOI Kvfifpvqv, KOI 
 faoTToiflv TO irdvra. But more prob. 3eo s 
 is of the same family with Zfvs, Ato r, ^Eol. 
 Aeuy, Lat. dena, Sanscr. dera. + 
 
 , as, TJ, Zeoo-efiijs, ) reverence 
 towards God, godliness, 1 Tim. 2, 10. Sept. 
 for tmbjj! n ^^"? Gen 20 11- Baruch 5, 
 3. Plato lipin. 985. d. Xen. An. 2. 6. 26. 
 
 f OS , ovs, 6, TJ, adj. (3edy, o-e- 
 .) reverencing God. godly, a worshipper 
 of God. John 9, 31. Sept. for trrViJX K^i 
 Ex. 18, 21. Job 1, 1. 8. Plut. Romul. 22 . 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 25. 
 
 ^reoa-TVj^ f OS , ovs, 6, ^ adj. (3 eo y, 
 o-Tuyew,) hated of the gods, Eurip. Troad. 
 1221 [1213]. Cycl. 396, 602. So in N. T. 
 hated of God, implying the highest degree 
 of reckless wickedness. Rom. 1 , 30. Others 
 Act. hating God; but without example in 
 Gr. writers. Suidas, Seoorvyeis 
 rot, of VTTO 3eoi) fuo-ovp,ei>oi Kal of 3e6z/ 
 
 TTJTOS, 17, (Seo s-,) deity, Godhead, 
 the divine nature and perfections, i. q. 3eio- 
 TTJS, Col. 2, 9. Luc. Icarom. 9. Plut. de 
 def. Orac. 10 fin. 
 
 0e6(f)i\of, ov, 6, Theophilus, pr. n. of a 
 person 4 of distinction, Kpdno-ror, prob. living 
 out of Palestine, to whom Luke inscribed 
 his Go?pel and the book of Acts, Luke 1, 3. 
 Acts 1,1. Elsewhere unknown. 
 
 o, a waiting 
 
 on, service, attendance, ministry, genr. Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 21. Xen. Cyr. 5. 5. 29. In N. T. 
 
 1 . attendance and care of the sick ; hence 
 relief, healing, Luke 9, 11 xp f iav f xovras 
 Zepandas toro. Rev. 22, 2. Jos. Ant. 19. 
 1. 16. Pol. 15. 25. 6. Xen. Hi. 8. 4. 
 
 2. Meton. and collect, service, i. e. at 
 tendants, domestics, retinue, Matt. 24, 45. 
 Luke 12, 42. Sept. for D^ns Gen. 45, 16. 
 Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 4 o-uv SepaTrei a 
 Hdian. 7. 1. 10. Xen. Mem. 3. 11.4. 
 
 , f. evo-a>, (SepaTrcof.) to wait 
 upon, to minister unto, to serve, i. e. to ren 
 der service and attendance, at first without 
 the idea of subjection ; see Passow sub v. 
 
 1. Pr. e. g. God, to serve, to worship, 
 Pass. Acts 17, 25 ov8e (6 3eos) vnu ^etpcoK 
 ai>2!pco7rG>z> SepaTreveTat. Hes.Op.134. Hdot. 
 
 2. 37 ; genr. Diod. Sic. 2. 20. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 
 3. 7. 
 
 2. to take care of the sick, to lend, genr. 
 Xen. An. 7. 2. 6. Hi. 8. 4. In N. T. spec. 
 to relieve, to heal, to cure ; absol. Matt. 1 2, 
 
335 
 
 JO et Luke 6, 7 lv T<B <ra/3/3uT(a 3epa7reui>. 
 With ace. of pers. Matt. 4, 24 TrapaXvTt- 
 KOVS Kal fSfpaTTfvo fv avrovs- Mark 1 , 34. 
 Luke 10, 9. Acts 4, 14. al. With ace. and 
 ajro, Luke 7, 21 & f pair f vat iro\\ovs dno 
 i/o o-ooj/. 8, 2. So Tob. 12, 3. Palaeph. 2. 4 ; 
 of a physician, Thuc. 2. 47. Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 
 1-2. With ace. of disease, Matt. 4, 23 3epa- 
 nfvcav iravav vocrov. Pass. Rev. 13, 3 
 
 evZii. So Arr. Epict. 2. 21. 23. Plut. 
 de Superst. 7. + 
 
 ^pdiro)V, OVTOS, o, (kindr. Sepw,) pr. a 
 waiting-man; hence an attendant, minis 
 ter, at first implying free and honourable 
 service, and therefore different from SouXov, 
 see Passow s. v. Once of Moses, Heb. 3, 5. 
 Sept. for i-s of Moses Ex. 14, 31. Num. 
 12, 7. 8 ; of Job, c. 1, 8. Hdian. 3. 10. 7. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 16. 
 
 S-epio>, f. iW, (3e poy,) to summer, to 
 pass the summer, Xen. An. 3. 5. 15. In 
 N. T. 
 
 1. to harvest, to reap; absol. Matt. 6, 26 
 ou OTTfipovo-iv, ov8e 3fpt fov(rii/. Luke 12, 24. 
 James 5, 4 ot Sepurairf y the reapers. Sept. 
 for nsj3 Ruth 2, 3 sq. So Plut. Mor. II. p. 
 27. X en. CEc. 18. 1. Trop. to cut down, to 
 destroy; absol. Rev. 14, 15 bis. Pass. v. 16 
 Kal f] yr/ eZfpivbr), i. e. the \vickedness of 
 the earth is destroyed, punished ; comp. 
 Joel 4 [3], 13. So ^Eschyl. Suppl. 634 
 [638]. 
 
 2. Trop. to reap the fruits of one s la 
 bours, to receive in recompense, c. ace. 
 1 Cor. 9, 1 1 TII a-apKLKa. Gal. 6, 8 bis. 9. 
 Sept. and nsps Prov. 22, 8. (Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 576.) Also of a Christian teacher 
 gathering in converts into the kingdom of 
 God, John 4, 36 bis. 38 e yo> dntarfiXa vp.as 
 Ztpifiv o oi/x vp-fls KfKOiridKaTe, comp. 
 Matt. 9, 37 et Luke 10, 2. Hence in pro 
 verbial expressions : a) Gal. 6, 7 o lav 
 OTTfipr] (tKSpoOToy, TOVTO Kal 3epi <m, i. e. lie 
 will be rewarded according to his works ; 
 and in a similar sense 2 Cor. 9, 6 bis. Comp. 
 Sept. and 1X Jer. 12, 13. See in o-n-eipw 
 no. 2 fin. j3) Matt. 25, 24 Sfptfav OTTOV 
 ot< etnreipas, i. e. turning the labours of 
 others to one s own profit, v. 26. Luke 19, 
 -2\. -2-2. In a like sense John 4, 37 XXor 
 ((TT\V 6 cnrfipwv, KOI uXXos 6 Sfpi jjW. Comp. 
 Job 31, 8. Mic. 6, 15. 
 
 oO, 6, (3epi o>,) a harvesting, 
 harvest ; John 4, 35 bis, 6 3epio>i6r ep^fTat, 
 . . . XfVKai eiVi Trpoy Sfpto-p.oz . Matt. 13.30 
 bis. 39. Mark 4, 29. Sept. for -nxfj Gen. 
 8, 22. Jer. 50, 16. So Pol. 5. 95. 5." Xen. 
 (Ee. 18. 3. Meton. the harvest to be ga- 
 
 thered, produce of the harvest, pr. Sept. for 
 l^p Jer. 5, 17 ; in N. T. trop. for the con 
 verts to be gathered into Christ s kingdom, 
 Matt. 9, 37. 38 bis. Luke 10, 2 ter. Also 
 of those whose iniquity is fully ripe for 
 punishment, Rev. 14, 15; comp. in 3epi f<a 
 no. 1. 
 
 ^epiarrjf, O t>, 6, (3epi fo>,) a harcest- 
 mnn, reaper, Matt. 13, 30. 39. Bel and 
 Drag. 40. Plut. C. Grace. 13. Xen. Hi 
 6. 10. 
 
 ^eppaiVO), f. ava, (3epp,o y, 3e po>.) to 
 warm, to heat, c. ace. Horn. II. 14. 7. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 3. 8. In N. T. only Mid. 3ep- 
 p.aivofj.ai, to warm oneself, e. g. by a fire, 
 Mark 14, 54 Kal rjv 3eppai> o/xei o? Trpo? TO 
 (pas. v. 67. John 18, 18 bis. 25 ; with cloth 
 ing, to become warm, James 2, 16. Sept. for 
 tnn Is. 44, 15. 16. So Hdian. 8. 4. 27. 
 Xen. CEc. 19. 11. 
 
 )s, 17, (3fpp,o f, 3ep<u.) icarmth, 
 Acts 28, 3. Sept. for ch Job 6, 17. Luc. 
 D. Mar. 11. 2. Thuc. 2. 49. 
 
 , eos, our, TO, (3e po>,) summer, i. c. 
 the warm season, in Palestine extending 
 from May to October without rain ; see 
 Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. p. 98 sq. Matt. 24, 
 32. Mark 13, 28. Luke 21, 30. Sept. and 
 pj3 Prov. 6, 8. 30, 25. So Diod. Sic. 5. 
 30. Xen, Mem. 1. 6. 2. Elsewhere also 
 summer-fruits, harvest, Sept. for ni^J5 Prov 
 26, 1. Dem. 1253. 15. JSschyl. Pers. 822. 
 
 ecrcraXoz/t/ceu9, cos, 6, a Thessaloni- 
 an, Acts 20, 4. 27, 2. 1 Thess. 1,1.2 Thess. 
 1,1. 
 
 Qecra-aXoviKrj, TJS, 17, Thessalonica, 
 now Saloniki, a city of Macedonia at the 
 head of the Sinus Thermaicus. It was an 
 ciently called Therma, but was named 
 Thessalonica by Cassander, after his wife, 
 the daughter of Philip. Under the Romans 
 it was the capital of one of the four divi 
 sions of Macedonia, and the usual station 
 of a Roman praetor and quaestor. The Jews 
 had here a synagogue ; and it was to the 
 church gathered here that Paul wrote his 
 earliest epistles. The modern population 
 is about 70 ; 000, including many Jews. Acts 
 17. 1. 11. 13. Phil. 4, 16. 2 Tim. 4, 10. 
 Comp. Diod. Sic. 19. 52. Strabo VII. p. 509. 
 Plin. II. N. 4. 17. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. III. 
 p. 395 sq. Leake s Trav. in Northern Greece. 
 III. p. 235-257. 
 
 @euSa?, a, o, Theudas. an impostor who 
 excited tumult among the Jews, Acts 5, 36. 
 He is probably to be placed during the in 
 terregnum immediately after the death of 
 
336 
 
 Herod the Great, when Judea was disturbed 
 by frequent seditions ; see Jos. Ant. 17. 
 10. 2-10. Judas too, who came after him 
 (Acts 5, 37). appeared under Cyrenius and 
 Coponius, A. D. 6-9; see Jos. Ant. 18. 1. 
 1, 6. ib. 20. 5. 2. B. J. 2. 8. 1. Some hold 
 Tlieudas to have been, under another name, 
 either the Judas or the Simon of Jos. Ant. 
 17. 10. 5, 6. See Sonntag, Theudas, in 
 Theol. Stud, und Krit. 1837. p. 622 sq. 
 [Engl. in Biblioth. Sac. 1848, p. 409 sq.] 
 Usher Ann. p. 571. Josephus mentions 
 another Theudas, an impostor, under Clau 
 dius, while Cuspius Fadus was procurator 
 of Judea, about A. D. 45 ; Ant. 20. 5. 1. 
 
 ), w, f. JJCTW, (Sewpos,) pr. to be a 
 spectator of, to look on or at, to behold ; not 
 much different from 3eoop.at, see Tittm. de 
 Syn. N. T. p. 120. 
 
 1. Pr. including the notion of attention, 
 surprise, wonder. a) Genr. c. ace. of 
 thing, Luke 23, 48 %ea>povvTfS TO. yev6p.eva. 
 John 2, 23. 17, 24. Acts 8, 13; ace. of 
 pers. Rev. 11,11. 12 ; with TT&S, TTOV, Mark 
 
 12, 41. 15, 47; absol. Matt. 27, 55. Mark 
 15, 40. Luke 14, 29. 23, 35. Acts 19, 26. 
 Sept. for rim p s . 27, 4 ; for Chald. fijn 
 Dan. 5, 5. 7, 21. So Theophr. Char. 6 or 
 
 13, Plato Pha3dr. 247. c. Xen. Cyr. 4. 3. 3 ; 
 of public spectacles Luc. Tim. 50. Arr. 
 Epict. 1. 25. 27. b) to look at, to view 
 with attention, c. ace. Matt. 28, 1 3. TOV 
 ra(poi/. (Cob. Tab. 1.) Trop. to consider, 
 indirect. Heb. 7, 4 Sfwpeire 8, TnjXiW ov- 
 TOS. So Dem. 19. 23. c) to behold, i. q. 
 to discern, to acknowledge, c. ace. of pers. 
 John 6, 40 iras 6 3ecapcoi/ TOV viov. 12, 45 bis. 
 
 14, 17. So Wisd. 13, 5. Diod. Sic. 19. 52 
 TOVS \6yovs. 
 
 2. Simply to see, to perceive with the eyes, 
 to behold, nearly i. q. i Seti>. a) Genr. and 
 c. ace. of pers. Mark 3, 11. Luke 24, 37. 
 John 9, 8. 14, 19 bis. 16, 10. 16. 17. 19. 
 Acts 3, 16. 9,7. 25, 24; with ace. and 
 particip. Luke 10, 18 &e<apovv TOV Saramv 
 irco-ovra. 24, 39. Mark 5, 15. John 6, 19. 
 62. 20, 12. 14. With ace. of thing Luke 
 21,6. John [6, 2.] 7, 3. Acts 20, 38 ; ace. and 
 part. John 10, 12 3. TOV \VKOV epxapfvov. 
 20, 6. Acts 7, 56. 10, 11. Sept. for nso 
 Ps. 22, 8. 31, 12. So 1 Mace. 13, 29* 
 Diod. Sic. 13. 57. b) to perceive, to mark, 
 to note, with on Mark 16, 4. John 4, 19. 
 12. 19. Acts 27, 10; TTOO-OS Acts 21, 20. 
 With ace. of thing Mark 5, 38 KCU Sewpei 
 3dpv/3oi>. Acts 4, 13; ace. and part. Acts 
 17. 16. 28. 6. \Vith ace. of pers. and part. 
 1 John 3, 17 ; ace. and adj. Acts 17. 22. 
 
 So 2 Mace. 9, 23. Diod. Sic. 13. 28. c) 
 From the Heb. to see, i. q. to experience, e. g. 
 TOV 3dVaroi> John 8, 51 ; see in etSw I. 3. 
 
 as , {], (3epea>,) a beholding, 
 viewing, Diod. Sic. 1. 94. Thuc. 6. 16. 
 In N. T. a sight, spectacle, Luke 23, 48. 
 So 3 Mace. 5, 24. Arr. Epict. 1. 2. 12. 
 Plato Pha3d. 58. b. 
 
 TJS, 77, (n 3r7p,i,) pr. place to put 
 or set any thing, a repository, receptacle, 
 e. g. for a sword, a sheath, John 18, 11. 
 Jos. Ant. 7. 11. 7 ; a cell, chamber, Xen. 
 CEc. 8. 17 ; oftener a sepulchre, Plato Legg. 
 947. c. Xen. Cyr. 7. 3. 5. 
 
 rTT^A^zys). f. ucrco, (377X77.) 1. to suckle, 
 to give suck, absol. Matt. 24, 19 oval TUIS 
 %T]\aovo-ais. Mark 13, 17. Luke 21, 23. 
 23, 29. Sept. for p^rt Gen. 21, 7. Ex. 
 2, 1.JEL V. H. 13. 1 init. Mid. id. Plato 
 Rep. 460. d. 
 
 2. to suck at the breast, for which more 
 usually Mid. Sr/Xa^at, Lob. &d Phryn. 
 p. 468. With ace. Luke 11, 27 p.a<rroi ovs, 
 e SjjXao-ay. Part. ZvXdfav, a suckling, Matt. 
 21,16, quoted from Ps. 8, 3 where Sept. for 
 P.?1 n . Sept. pao-Tovs e ST/Xao-a for pS^| Job 
 3, 12. Cant. 8, 1. Theocr. 3. 15 
 e STiXaff. Pint. Romul. 6. 
 
 ijXeta, 3?}Xv, adj. female ; in 
 N. T. 
 
 1. Fern, as Subst. 77 3r;Xeta, a female, 
 a woman, Rom. 1, 26. 27. So Sept. for 
 ^53 Lev. 27, 4 sq. Hdian. 1. 14. 16. 
 Xen. Lac. 1. 4. 
 
 2. Neut. TO 377X1;, only in the phrase 
 apcrev Kal SfJXv, male and female, Matt. 1 9, 4. 
 Mark 10, 6. Gal. 3, 28. Sept for mga 
 Gen. 1, 27. 6, 19. Luc. de Salt. 12. Hdot! 
 2. 85 TO 3i)Xu yevos. 
 
 &rjpa, as, T), (3>jp,) hunting, the chase, 
 Horn. II. 5. 49. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 5; prey, 
 game, Od. 9. 158. Xen. Ven. 6. 13. In 
 N. T. melon, i. q. destruction, cause of de 
 struction, Rom. 11, 9 yfVT)%rjTa> 77 Tpafj.fa 
 avT&v els irayida Kal els Srjpav KT\. quoted by 
 reminiscence from Ps. 69, 23 where there is 
 no corresponding word in the Heb. text 
 Sept. for nan net Ps. 35, 8. 
 
 co, f. evo-w, (Sijpa.) to hunt, to take 
 in hunting, Xen. An. 1. 2. 7. ib. 5. 3. 9. 
 In N. T. trop. to hunt after, to catch at one s 
 words, to lay hold of, c. ace. Luke 11, 54 
 forovvres ^rjptvcrai TI fK TOV o-rofiaTos aii 
 TOV. Comp. Sept. for 215* to lie in wait 
 Ps. 59, 4. Pol. 23/8. 11 TTJV evvoiav. Xen, 
 Cyr. 8. 2. 2 T^V (piXiav. 
 
337 
 
 ), u>, f. ijor 
 
 i.) to fight with wild beasts, like condemn 
 ed persons in the public spectacles ; see 
 Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 344. Diet, of Antt. 
 art. Bestiarii. So pr. Artemid. 2. 59. Diod. 
 Sic. 3. 43 pen. In N. T. trop. of conflict 
 with strong and bitter adversaries ; 1 Cor. 
 
 15, 32 (I KOTO, av^pamov e^piop-d^a-a ev 
 *E0(7a>, if after the manner of men (as a 
 man, a mortal, without hope of the resur 
 rection), I have fought with beasts at Ephe- 
 ms, referring perhaps not to any single ex 
 ample, but to his continued conflict with 
 Jewish and other opposers ; comp. 1 Cor. 
 
 16, 9. 2. Cor. 1, 8. Comp. Ignat. Ep. in 
 Rom. C. 5 ano Svpi aj p-fXP^ Pw/^ /s %r)pio- 
 /la^ai. Others refer it to the uproar occa 
 sioned by Demetrius, Acts 19, 29 sq. though 
 it does not appear that Paul was there in 
 any danger of his life ; so Theophyl. in loc. 
 3^pio/xa^elj/ KaXei TTJV Trpos lovSaiovs KOI 
 
 , ov, TO, (317/3,) dimin. in form, 
 but not in usage, a beast, wild beast, Mark 
 1, 13. Acts 10, 12. 11, 6. 28, 4. 5. Heb. 
 12, 20. James 3, 7. Rev. 6, 8. Sept. for 
 nana Deut. 28, 6 ; ^ Gen. 1, 24. Deut. 
 7, 22. So Hdian. 1. 13. 17. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 .4. 5, 7. Trop. of brutal, savage men, Tit. 
 
 1, 12. (Jos. Ant. 17. 5. 5 ult. Xen. Mem. 
 3. 11. 11.) Also symbolically in the Apo 
 calypse, e. g. Rev. 11, 7. 13, 1 sq. 14, 9. 
 
 11. al. ssep. + 
 
 ^rrjaavpL^cOj f. iVco, (Sr/o-avpo y,) to trea 
 sure up, to lay up in store, c. ace. et dat. 
 Matt. 6, 19. 20 Sj/o-avpi ^re vp.lv "Srjcravpovs. 
 Luke 12, 21. 2 Cor. 12, 14; absol. 1 Cor. 
 16, 2. James 5, 3 e^rjcravpia-aTe ev eV^drais 1 
 T)p.(pai.s, ye have laid up treasure in these 
 last days, comp. v. 5. Pass, to be kept in 
 store, reserved, c. dat. 2 Pet. 3, 7. Sept. 
 for isx 2 K. 20, 17. Am. 3, 10 ; -OS 
 Zech.~9* 3. So Hdot. 2. 121. 1. Ml. V. H* 
 6. 12. Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 24. Trop. of evil, 
 punishment, Rom. 2, 5 3. o-eavrw opyrjv. 
 Sept. for -jsx Prov. 1, 18. 
 
 ^r/aavpo^) ov, 6, (kindr. TI SIJ/II,) 1 . treas 
 ure, any thing laid up in store, wealth, e. g. 
 temporal, Matt. 6, 19. 21. 13, 44. Luke 
 
 12, 34. Heb. 11, 26. Sept. for irix 1 K. 
 14, 26 ; Tinea Gen. 43, 23. So Hdian. 3. 
 9. 20. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 33. Trop. of spirit 
 ual treasures, pertaining to the mind or to 
 eternal life, Matt. 6, 20. 19, 21. Mark 10, 
 21. Luke 12, 33. 18, 22. 2 Cor. 4, 7. Col. 
 
 2. 3 eV w fieri Trdvrts ol %r)<ravpol TIJS o~o(j)ias 
 Kal yvuo-fcos KT\. So Ecclus. 20, 30. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 6. 14. 
 
 22 
 
 2. a treasury, a place where treasures 
 stores, are laid up, a store-house, store-room ; 
 Matt. 13, 52 otKoSecTTroTTj? oo"ris e /c/3uXXei 
 CK TOV STJO-. avTOv Kaivd KT\. Trop. of the 
 storehouse of the mind, where the thoughts, 
 feelings, counsels are laid up, Matt. 12, 35 
 bis. Luke 6, 45 bis. Sept. pr. for -isist 
 Neh. 13, 12. 1 K. 7, 51. So pr. Diod. Sic. 
 17. 71. Xen. An. 5. 4. 27. Hence a chest, 
 box, casket, in which precious things are 
 kept, Matt. 2, 1 1 dvoi^avrts TOVS "Sr/a-avpovs 
 avTav. So Jos. Ant. 9. 8. 2 v\ivov Styomi- 
 pov, comp. 2 K. 12, 10. 
 
 ^ijjdvo), f. 3i o/*oi, aor. 2 e3tyoi>, a 
 lengthened present form instead of St yw, 
 which latter does not occur, Buttm. 112. 
 
 11. ^ 114; Ausf. Sprachl. { 112.14. 114. 
 To touch, Lat. tango, c. gen. Heb. 12,20 
 Kav Srjpiov 3/yj; TOV Spovs, comp. Ex. 19, 12 
 where Sept. for 553 ; absol. Col. 2, 21. (So 
 Diod. Sic. 3. 57. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 5.) Spec. 
 to touch a person, to do him harm or vio 
 lence, to harm, c. gen. Heb. 11, 28 Iva fj.rj 6 
 oAoSpeiW Sty?; avTaii>. So Heb. 3>J5 Gen. 
 26, 11. Josh. 9, 19. Sept. anTop.ai. So 
 Act. Thorn. 1 2 Z>v at /3Xa/3at aural ov 3ry- 
 ydvova-i. 
 
 ^Xi/Sft), f. *//&>, to press, to press upon, 
 e. g. the lips- by a kiss, Theocr. 20. 4. In 
 N. T. 
 
 1. to press upon a. person in a crowd, to 
 crowd, to throng, c. ace. Mark 3, 9 tva p,rj 
 3Xi/3wo- avTov. So Ecclus. 16, 28. Arte 
 mid. 2. 37. Plut. Pyrrh. 33. Spec, to press 
 together, to compress ; hence Pass. part. 
 reSXi/z/ne i/oj, pressed together, made narrow ; 
 Matt. 7, 14 Tf^\ifip,evr] T) 6o6s narrow is the 
 way. Comp. Wisd. 15, 7 Kfpap.fvs a7ra\r)v 
 yyv 3Xt /3wi/. Plato Tim. 60. c. 
 
 2. Trop. to oppress with evils, to afflict, 
 to distress, c. ace. 2 Thess. 1, 6 Tols 3X- 
 ftovaiv vp.ds. Pass. 2 Cor. 1,6. 4, 8. 7, 5 
 1 Thess. 3, 4. 2 Thess. 1, 7. 1 Tim. 5, 10. 
 Heb. 11, 37. Sept. for p^sn Deut. 28, 
 53. .55 ; -n* Hiph. 1 K. 8, 37. Diod. Sic. 
 
 12. 66. Plut. Nicias 21. 
 
 ea>s, ?/, (3Xi/3a),) pressure, com 
 pression, straitness, Artemid. 1. 79. Hesych. 
 3Xn//is oreVaxm. In N. T. trop. pressure 
 from evils, straits, ajfliction, distress, 2 Cor. 
 2, 4 e/c vroXX^y SXt^eco? KOI o-wo^J)? KapSt ay 
 typa^ra. Phil. 1, 16. Of a woman in tra 
 vail, John 16, 21. Sept. for "IS Deut. 4, 30 ; 
 rrna Neh. 9, 37. (1 Mace. 5, 16. 2 Mace. 
 1 , 7.) Melon, evils by which one is pressed. 
 affliction, distress, calamity, Matt. 13, 21 
 y(vop.evr]s 8e SXi^fcoy. Acts 7, 10. 11. Rom. 
 5, 3. 2 Cor. 1, 4. Heb. 10, 33. al. In ap- 
 
338 
 
 posit. Mark 13, 19 tcrovrai rjp.epai fKtlvai 
 3Xn//-ty. With a synon. word, as SXtyis 
 Kal <TT{voxo>p ia Rom. 2, 9 ; 3X. KOI avaynr] 
 2 Cor. 6, 4. 1 Thess. 3, 7. Sept. for is 
 Ps. 119,143; n-ns 1 Sam. 10, 19. Is. 8, 22. 
 So Ecclus. 51, 3. 1 Mace. 12, 13. + 
 
 ^vtfa-KO), f. Savovjuat, aor. 2 eSai/ov, perf. 
 rt 3 1/77*0, Buttm. ^114; to die, in N. T. only 
 perf. TfSvrjKa, inf. reSi/arat, to Tiare died, 
 i. e. to ie dead, in a present sense, Buttm. 
 5113.7. Ktihner255. n. 5 ; so Matt. 2, 
 20. Mark 15, 44 77877 re Si^Kf. Luke 7, 12. 
 8,49. John 11, 21. 39. 41. 44. 12,1. 19, 
 33. Acts 14, 19. 25, 19. Trop. 1 Tim. 5, 
 6 o>cra T&irqKt, though living is dead, i. e. 
 as good as dead. Sept. for nia 2 Sam. 12, 
 18. 1 K. 21, 15. Hdian. 8. 8. 19. Xen. 
 An. 2. 1. 3. 
 
 S, 77, 6i>, (a^o-Kw,) mortal, e. g. 
 o-w/ia Rom. 6, 12. 8, 11 ; o-dp| 2 Cor. 4, 
 11. Neut. TO %vT)Tov,lhe mortal nature, 
 mortality, 1 Cor. 15, 53. 54. 2 Cor. 5, 4. 
 Sept. Is. 51, 12. Luc. D. Deor. 20. 7. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 7. 19. bis. 
 
 $opv/3d%d), f. do-tt, (3dpu/3os.) to confuse 
 by noise, to disturb, to trouble, Pass. Luke 
 10, 41 Lachm. where Rec. rup/Sdfo). Not 
 found elsewhere. 
 
 >, w, f. Tjo-w, (3o pv/3os,) to 
 a r?o?se, uproar, clamour, spoken of a crowd 
 or multitude, genr. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 8 ; as 
 applauding or dissenting, Diod. Sic. 1. 72. 
 Dem. 60. 27. In N. T. 
 
 1. Mid. spoken of loud lamentation, wail 
 ing, to make a noise together, among them 
 selves, to wail together, Matt. 9, 23 I8(av av- 
 XrjTas Kai o^Xoi Sopvfiovfjifvov. Mark 5, 39. 
 Acts 20 ; 10. See 1 K. 13, 30. 2 Chr. 35, 
 
 25. Jer. 34, 5. 2 Sam. 1,12. Potter s Gr. 
 Ant. II. p. 206. Lane s Mod. Egyptians, II. 
 p. 286. 
 
 2. Trans, to set in an uproar, to excite 
 tumult in, e. g. a city, TTJV iroXiv Acts 17, 5. 
 Dion. Hal. Ant. 9. 68 /cat l^opv^no-av 
 iKavcas TTJV TrdXti . Pass. Soph. Aj. 164. 
 
 ^6pf/3o9, ov, 6, (kindr. Spoor,) noise, 
 uproar, clamour, as of a crowd or multi 
 tude. 
 
 1. Genr. Matt. 27, 24 p.3\\ov 3dpu/3os 
 rtWat. Acts 21, 34. 24, 18. Sept. for 
 PiSipiPi Jer. 49, 2. So Luc. D. Deor. 12. 
 1. Xen. An. 1. 8. 16 ; of applause or disap 
 proval Diod. Sic. 17. 15. Dem. 242. 26. 
 Spec, of loud lamentation, wailing, Mark 5, 
 38 ; see in Sopu/S/w no. 1 . 
 
 2. Of a popular commotion, tumult, Matt. 
 
 26, 5 tra fir) Sdpv/So? yfvrjrai eV ro> Xaw. 
 
 to weep 
 
 Mark 14, 2. Acts 20, 1, cornp. ordo-u in 
 19, 40. Hdian. 5. 8. 15 TOVS alriovs ord- 
 o-0s Kai 3opv/3ov. 
 
 ^pavto, f. o-ca, Pass. perf. T&pavo-fiat, 
 to break in pieces, to crush, e. g. TOVS Xt Sous 
 Pol. 16. 1. 5. Hdot. 1. 174. In N. T. trop. 
 to break, to crush, sc. the strength of any 
 one ; hence Pass. perf. part. T&pavo-pfvos 
 crushed, bruised, oppressed ; Luke 4, 18 
 OTroo-reiXat r&pavo-fj.fvovs ev d(pe cret, quoted 
 generally from Is. 61, 1. 2, but with this 
 clause inserted from Is. 58, 6 where Sept. 
 for 7^ . So trop. of hope Hdian. 3. 2. 4. 
 
 zrpefA^a, ros, TO, (rpe cpo),) pr. nursling, 
 thing bred ; hence cattle, flocks, herds, John 
 
 4, 12. Jos. Ant. 7. 7. 3. Hdian. 3. 9. 17. 
 Xen. (Ec. 20. 23. 
 
 i^prfvea), S>, f. 770-0), 
 aloud, to wail, to mourn, e. g. 
 
 1. Intrans. and absol. John 16, 20 K\av- 
 crere KOI Sp^o-ere v/xei?. Sept. for ^ix 
 Ez. 7, 12 ; t^n Joel 1, 5. Zeph. 1, 12^ 
 So Ml V. H. 3. 18. Hdian. 4. 13. 14. 
 Spec, of hired mourners wailing for the 
 dead, see in 3opv/3e w no. 1. Matt. 11, 17. 
 Luke 7, 32. Sept. for nns Mic. 2, 4 ; 1.51 p 
 Jer. 9, 16. So Horn. II. 24. 722. 
 
 2. Trans, in later usage, to bewail, c. ace. 
 Luke 23, 27 /cat f^prjvovv avrov. Sept. for 
 ^^ Jer. 51, 8; l^p Ez. 32, 16. Luc. 
 Haley. 1. Hdian. 3. 4. 13. 
 
 ^pf)VO$, ov, 6, (3pe , Spe o/wu,) loud 
 vjeeping, wailing, Matt. 2, 18, quoted from 
 Jer. 31, 15 where Sept. for ifra ; also for 
 fi^p Am. 8, 10. Diod. Sic. i. 72. Xen. 
 Ag. 10. 3. 
 
 jp^<7/ceia, ay, -fj, (3prjo-/ceveo, SpiyVKOs,) 
 a worshipping, worship, service, e. g. a) 
 With the idea of strictness or superstition, 
 Acts 26, 5. Col. 2, 18 Zprja-Kfia T<OV dyye- 
 Xa>i>, for which see fully in eZfXoZprjo-Kfia. 
 So Wisd. 14, 27. Luc. Sacrif. 10. Hdian. 5. 
 3. 12, 17.. b) Genr. of God, i. q. religious 
 ness, religion, piety, James 1, 26. 27. So 
 Jos. Ant. 1. 13. 1. 
 
 ^pfjCTKOS, ov, 6, fj, adj. (Speco, Spe opit, 
 or rpeo),) fearing God, pious, religious, 
 James 1, 26. Hesych. Sprjo-Kos- evn-f Srjs 
 V. tvXajBrjs, 8fio-i8aip.(i)i>. 
 
 *&pia/J,/3ev(t), f. o-co, (3pi a/i/3o?,) to tri 
 umph, to hold a triumph, Pint. ^Emil. Paul. 
 
 5. Hdian. 1. 6. 16. In N. T. 
 
 1. to lead in triumph, to triumph over, c. 
 accus. Col. 2, 15. Plut. Comp. Thes. c. 
 Romul. 4, /3ao-tXetv e 3pta/a/3evo-e /cat fjyefjio- 
 vas. Id. Arat. 54 fin. 
 
 2. Causat. to cause to triumph, like Heb. 
 
339 
 
 Hiph. c. ace. 2 Cor. 2, 14 ; comp. 
 
 no. 2. Comp. Plut. Camili. 30 6 8e Kap.tX- 
 
 \os eSpta/x/3eucre . . . TOJ/ cratTrjpa Trarpt So? 
 
 o?, 17, a Tuztr; Plur. 
 dat. 3ptt, tfie hair, e. g. a) Of the 
 head ; so Sing. Matt. 5, 36. Luke 21, 18 et 
 Acts 27, 34 ; comp. 1 Sam. 14, 45 et l K. 
 1, 52. Plur. Matt. 10, 30. Luke 7, 38. 44. 
 12, 7. John 11, 2. 12, 3. 1 Pet. 3, 3. Rev. 
 1, 14. 9. 8. Sept. for "ttto Num. 6, 5. 18. 
 Ezra 9, 3. So Hdian. 4. 8. 13. Plato Polit. 
 270. e. b) Of the hair of animals, Matt. 
 3, 4. Mark 1, 6. Rev. 9, 8. Sept. for ei 
 Ex. 25, 4. 35, 6. 24. So Luc. Alex. 12. 
 Xen. Yen. 4. 6. ib. 5. 10. 
 
 , co, f. jjo-w, (Spooy, 3peo>,) to make 
 a noise, clamour, tumult, ^Eschyl. Prom. 
 609. Jos. Ant. 19. 1. 16. In N. T. and 
 late usage, trans, to disturb, to trouble, to 
 frighten ; Pass. Matt. 24, 6 /*>) 3poelo-3e. 
 Mark 13, 7. 2 Thess. 2, 2. Sept. for fran 
 Cant. 5, 4. So Test. XII Patr. p. 651. 
 
 Syj6/i/3o?, ou, 6, a large drop ; Luke 22, 
 44 I8pu>s cocrel 3po/i/3ot aip.aros, his Siceat 
 was as it were great drops of blood. Hdot. 
 1. 179. ^Eschyl. Choeph. 531. Plato Grit. 
 120. a. 
 
 ^povo?, ov, 6, (obsol. 3pdo>, comp. 3pa- 
 vos, Spjjwy,) a seatf, pr. a high seat with a 
 footstool, Horn. Od. 1." 145. ib. 16. 408. 
 Xen. Conv. 9. 2, 3. Later and in N. T. a 
 throne, as the emblem of regal authority. 
 
 1. Pr. as ascribed to kings, Luke 1, 52. 
 Acts 2, 30. Sept. for NS3 1 K. 10, 18. 
 Job 36, 7. (Hdian. 1. 8. 8. Xen. An. 2. 1.4.) 
 Also to God, as the sovereign of the uni 
 verse, Matt. 5, 34. 23, 22. Acts 7, 49 (comp. 
 Is. 66, 1). Heb. 4, 16. 12, 2. al. Sept. and 
 N&3 Ps. 47, 9. 103, 19. al. To Jesus as 
 the Messiah, Matt. 19, 28. 25, 31. Rev. 3, 
 21 . 20, 1 1 . al. To the apostles in the king 
 dom of God, see in /SacrtXevw no. 2, Matt. 
 19, 28. Luke 22, 30. Rev. 20, 4 ; also sym 
 bolically to the elders around God s throne, 
 Rev. 4, 4. 11, 16. Further, to Satan Rev. 
 2,13. 13,2. (Act. Thorn. 5 32.) Symbol 
 ically to the beast, Rev. 16, 10. 
 
 2. Meton. i. q. a) supreme power, do 
 minion ; Luke 1 , 32 KOI Scocrei avraJ TOV 
 "Spovov Aa^i S. Heb. 1, 8 quoted from Ps. 
 45, 7 where Sept. for K53 , as also 2 Sam. 
 3, 10. 7, 13. 16. So Wisd. 7, 8. b) a 
 potentate, higher power ; Col. 1, 16 eire 
 SpoVoi KT\. where 3poVoi is spoken gene 
 rally of earthly or of celestial potentates 
 i. e. archangels. So Test. XII Patr. p. 548, 
 where the seven heavens and classes of an 
 
 gels are described, in the seventh are said 
 to be SpoVot, t^ovcriai, ev <a (oupai w) del 
 
 V/JLVOl TO) 3e TTpOCnp/pOirai. -}- 
 
 vdreipa, uv, rd, Thyatira, a city of 
 Asia Minor, anciently called Pelopia and 
 Euhippia (Plin. 5. 31), now Ak-hissar, situ 
 ated on the confines of Lydia and Mysia, 
 near the river Lycus, between Sardis and 
 Pergamus ; Acts 16, 14. Rev. 1, 11. 2,18. 
 24. It was a Macedonian colony (Strabo 
 1 3. p. 625) ; and was famous for the art of 
 dyeing purple ; see the inscription found 
 there, in Spon Miscell. erud. antiq. p. 113, 
 and in Kuinoel on Acts 1. c. See Rosenm. 
 Bibl. Geogr. I. ii. p. 179, 221 sq. O. v. Rich- 
 ter Wallf. p. 509. 
 
 ^vyarrjp, repos, rpos, 17, see Buttm. 47. 
 
 1. a daughter, Matt. 9, 18. 10, 35. 37. 
 14, 6. 15, 22. 28. Mark 5, 35. 6, 22. 7, 26. 
 29. 30. Luke 2, 36. 8, 42. 49. 12, 53 bis. 
 Acts 2, 17. 7, 21. 21, 9. Heb. 11, 24. Sept. 
 for na Gen. 5, 4. 7. al. sa3piss. (Xen. Cyr. 
 3. 3. 3.) Trop. as expressing a relation of 
 kindness and tenderness ; 2 Cor. 6, 18 els 
 vioiis Kal Svyarfpas sc. 3eoC, comp. Jer. 31, 
 1. 9. Also the vocat. in a direct address, 
 Matt. 9, 22 Sapo-ei Zvyarep. Mark 5, 34. 
 Luke 8, 48. So Sept. and na Ruth 2, 8. 
 3, 10. 11. 
 
 2. From the Heb. a daughter, i. q. a fe 
 male descendant. Luke 13, 16 3vy. A/3paa/z. 
 1,5 eK TO>V 3try. Aapcov. So Sept. and Fi3 
 Gen. 36, 2. Ex. 2, 1. al. 
 
 3. Fcom the Heb. put before names of 
 places, e. g. Luke 23, 28 Suyarepey lepov- 
 o-aXij/i daughters of Jerusalem, i. e. born 
 and living there, female inhabitants. So 
 Sept. and "^ rriaa Cant. 2, 7. 3, 5 ; fviaa 
 ji S Is. 3, 16. 17. 4, 4. Hence Sing. 3v- 
 yarrjp "S,ia>v daughter of Sion, pr. collect. 
 for the inhabitants of Sion, and in poet, per 
 sonification put for Sion itself i. e. Jerusa 
 lem, Matt. 21, 5 et John 12, 15, quoted 
 from Zech. 9, 9. See Gesen. Comm. on 
 Is. 1, 8. Heb. Lex. na no. 5. Sept. and 
 Heb. liS na Zech. l. c. Is. 1, 8. 10, 32. 
 
 ou, TO, (dimin. 
 a little daughter, female child, Mark 5, 23. 
 7, 25. Athen. 13. p. 581. c. 
 
 ^yeXXa, rjs, fj, (3vo>,) a tempest, whirl 
 wind, Heb. 12, 18. Sept. for b^S Deut. 
 4, 11. Horn. Od. 5. 317. Luc. Contempl. 7. 
 Plut. Camili. 33. 
 
 ^vivof, T), ov, (3uia,) ihyine, Rev. 18, 12 
 gv\ov 3viVoi , thyine wood, citron wood- ; see 
 Wetstein ad loc. The 3vi*a or 3va was an 
 evergreen African tree with aromatic wood, 
 
340 
 
 from which statues and costly vessels and 
 ceilings were made, Lat. citrus ; prob. the 
 Thuja articulata. of Linn. See Celsii Hie- 
 rob. II. p. 22 sq. Rosenm. Alterthk. IV. i. 
 p. 251. 
 
 OTOS, TO, 
 
 burnt in religious worship, Rev. 5, 8. 8, 3. 
 4. 18, 13. Sept. for rntsjs Ex. 30,7. 8. al. 
 So Diod. Sic. 1. 62. Plato Rep. 373. a. 
 Meton. Luke 1, 10 &pa TOV 3u/i. and v. 11 
 %v<na<TTT)piov TOV 3v/i. the hour and altar of 
 incense, i. e. for burning incense. Sept. 
 TOV 3v/t. for Fl IPp Ex. 30, 
 
 1. 27. 
 
 ^VfJ,iarr)plov, iov, TO, (3v/uao>,) the al 
 tar of incense, Heb. 9, 4 ; comp. Ex. 37, 
 25 sq. This altar, which was in the outer 
 sanctuary, is here reckoned to the inner 
 sanctuary, as standing directly before and 
 pertaining to the ark, Ex. 40, 5. So Jos. 
 Ant. 3. 6. 8. Others, a censer, which 
 however is nowhere mentioned ; Sept. for 
 rntipa 2 Chr. 26, 19. Ez. 8, 11. So Jos. 
 Ant. 3. 8. 3. Diod. Sic. 13. 3. Thuc. 6. 46. 
 
 S-f/uaa), , f. aa-w, (30/xa, 3uo>,) to 
 burn incense, absol. Luke 1, 9 eXa^f TOV 
 Su/xiao-at. Sept. for T^n Ex. 30, 7. 8. al. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 84. Plut. de Fac. in Lun. 
 24 fin. 
 
 , f. 170-0), 
 
 .) to fight wraihfully, desperately, Diod. 
 Sic. 17/33. Pol. 9. 40. 4. In N. T. to be 
 indignant at, to be enraged against, c. dat. 
 Acts 12, 20. So npos Tiva Plut. Themist. 
 16 init. 
 
 ov, 6, (3vo>, see Plato Cratyl. 
 419. e,) pr. mind, soul, e. g. as the principle 
 of life Horn. II. 4. 470, 524. ib. 16. 743 ; as 
 the seat of the will, desire, II. 6. 439, 444. 
 Hdot. 1. 1 ; or of the emotions, passions, 
 H. 1. 196. Od. 4. 366. ib. 14. 361. Theocr. 
 2.61. Hence genr. and in N. T. passion, 
 i. e. violent commotion of mind, indignation, 
 anger, wrath ; differing from opyrj in that it 
 denotes the mind roused to anger, while op- 
 yf) is anger itself, the emotion, including 
 the desire of revenge ; see Tittm. de Syn. 
 N. T. p. 131 sq. Luke 4, 28 fTr\r)<T%r]o-av 
 TrdiTfs Zvnov. Acts 19, 28. Eph. 4, 31 3u- 
 ubs KOI opyr). Col. 3, 8. Heb. 11, 27. Rev. 
 12, 12. Sept. for S)$ Gen. 49, 6. 7; nan 
 1 K. 11, 20. (Hdian. 3. 11. 17. J\. V. H. 
 1. 14. Xen. Eq. 9. 2.) Plur. 3up.oi, bursts of 
 wrath, 2 Cor. 12, 20. Gal. 5, 20. So Jos. 
 B. J. 4. 5. 2. init. Plut. Coriolan. 1. Plato 
 Prot. 323. e. Spoken of God, and inclu 
 ding the idea of punishment, punitive judg 
 
 ments, Rev. 15, 1. Rom. 2, 8 Zvpos KOI op- 
 yr/, indignation and wrath, the direst judg 
 ments ; comp. Sept. and Heb. t]N Jer. 36, 
 
 7. Ez. 5, 13 ; ^n Gen. 27, 44. Further, 
 by the Heb. prophets Jehovah is represented 
 as giving to the nations in his wrath an in 
 toxicating cup, so that they reel and stagger 
 to destruction ; hence also in N. T. olvos TOV 
 Zvpov TOV Seov, the wine of the wrath of God, 
 Rev. 14, 10, 16, 19, also 14, 8. 18, 3 ; and 
 with olvos impl. Rev. 15, 7. 16, 1. See 
 Sept. and Heb. Jer. 25, 15. 49, 12. 51, 7. 
 Is. 51, 17. Job 21, 20. Ez. 23, 31. 32. 33. 
 al. Heb. Lex. art. 0^3 . By a similar figure, 
 fj \rjvbs TOV 3v/ioC TOV 3eof>, the wine-press 
 of the wrath of God, Rev. 14, 19 et 19, 15 
 in allusion to Is. 63, 3 ; where see Gesen. 
 Comm. 
 
 jf/iOO), 5, f. oxrw, (3v/ids,) to provoke 
 to anger, Pass, to be angry, to be wroth, 
 Matt. 2, 16. Sept. for !Tin Judg. 14, 19. 
 Pol. 5. 16. 4. Xen. Cyr. 5. 5. 11. 
 
 ^vpa, as,fj,a door, Germ. Thiir ; comp. 
 Sanscr. dvara, Lat. fores. Plur. at Siipat, 
 doors, perh. double or folding doors. 
 
 1 . a door, forming and closing the entrance 
 into a house or other building, or into an 
 apartment or enclosure. a) Pr. and genr. 
 Matt. 6, 6 K\euras TTJV %vpav <rov. 25, 10. 
 Luke 11, 7. 13, 24. 25 bis. Acts 12, 13 
 TT)i> Svpav TOV TTV\U>VOS, i. e. a small door, 
 wicket, in a larger. Plur. John 20, 19. 26. 
 Acts 5, 19. 16,26.27. 21,30. Symbolical 
 ly, Rev. 3, 20 bis. 4, 1. Sept. for M^. 
 Gen. 19, 6. 9. 10 ; nnB Ez. 8, 8. 40, 12. 
 (Diod. Sic. 18. 71. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 22. Ag. 
 
 8. 7.) With prepositions: Bia TIJS Zvpas 
 John 10, 1. 2; eVi TTJ Svpa Acts 5, 9; 
 also eVi 3i>pat?, at the doors, trop. near at 
 hand, Matt. 24, 33. Mark 13, 29; irpb T^S 
 %vpas Acts 12, 6 ; also npb TU>V Svpwi/ Acts 
 5, 23 ; trop. James 5, 9 ; Trpbs TTJV "Svpav 
 Mark 1, 33. 11, 4. Acts 3, 2; also TO. 
 Ttpos TT)i> ^vpav, i. q. TO 7rp6%vpov, the vesti 
 bule, porch, Mark 2, 2 (comp. TO TrpdSupa 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 22) ; also Trpbs 777 Supa 
 John 18, 16. b) Trop. a door, i. q. access, 
 opportunity, e. g. avolyeiv TTJV %vpav to set 
 open a door, to give free access, opportunity, 
 Acts 14, 27. Col. 4, 3 ; Pass. 1 Cor. 16, 9. 
 2 Cor. 2, 12. Rev. 3, 8 3upa dveayfj-evr], an 
 open door, i. e. free and abundant access to 
 privileges and blessings. See in dvolya 
 no. 1. b. Meton. one who is the medium of 
 access or approach, John 10, 7. 9 fya> /u 
 77 Supa TO>V Trpo/Sarwi/, comp. Ignat. ad Phi- 
 lad. 9 (Xpto-Tos) T) 3upa TOV TraTpos, 81 fjs 
 
 - "A/3paa/i nal ol irpo(pr)Tai. 
 
341 
 
 2. Meton. a door, door-way, the entrance 
 or passage into any place, e. g. into a cave 
 or sepulchre, i. q. the mouth, Matt. 27, 60. 
 .28, 2 . Mark 15, 46. 16,, 3. Jos. Ant. 10. 
 11. 6. Horn. Oct. 9. 243. ib. 13. 109,370. 
 
 ^upeo9, ov, 6, (3vpa,) pr. a door, i. e. 
 a stone for closing the entrance of a cave, 
 Horn. Od 9. 240, 313, 340. In later 
 Greek and in N. T. a shield, large and of 
 an oblong shape like a door, trop. Eph. 6, 
 16 TOV Svptbv TTJS Tri orecor. Sept. for I-JM 
 2 Sam. 1, 21 ; *$* 1 Sam. 17, 42. Pol. 6. 
 23, 2. Diod. Sic. 5. 30. Plut. Romul. 17. 
 See Lob. ad Phryn. p. 366. 
 
 S-upt9, /Soy, fj, (dimin. %vpa,) a litlle 
 door, aperture, Pol. 12. 25. 3. Plato Rep. 
 359. d. In N. T. a window, Acts 20, 9 K.CL- 
 %f]ntvos eVi TT}? Svpi Soj, Engl. IN a window. 
 2 Cor. 11, 33. Sept. for "j^n Josh. 2, 15. 
 Judg. 5, 28. So Plut Cato Min. 2. Luc. 
 Asin. 45. 
 
 ^vpcopos, ov, 6, 17, (3upa, oupoy,) a door 
 keeper, porter, male or female, Mark 13, 34 
 63up. John 18, 16. 17 17 Sup. Of a shep 
 herd keeping watch at the door of a fold, 
 John 10, 3. Sept. 2 Sam. 4, 6. Luc. Na- 
 vig. 22. Xen. Cyr. 8. 8. 20. 
 
 Shyer ia, ay, r], (3uw,) sacrifice, i.e. 1 . The 
 vict and rite of sacrificing, sacrifice, mac- 
 tation, Matt. 9, 13 et 12, 7 eXeoi/ Se Xeo KOI 
 ov Svcriav, quoted from Hos. 6, 6 where 
 Sept. for tt?t . Heb. 9, 26 Sia i-fjs 3vo-tW 
 avrov. 11, 4. So Heb. 10, 5. 8, quoted from 
 Ps. 40, 7 where Sept. for ft3T. (Hdian. 
 5. 6. 21. Luc. Sacrif. 1. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 
 34.) Of an expiatory sacrifice for sin, Eph. 
 5, 2. Heb. 5, 1 3uo-i a virtp apapricov. 7, 27. 
 8,3. 9,9.23. 10,1.11.12.26. So Heb. 
 nxnn comp. Lev. c. 4. c. 9 ; see in d//ap- 
 Tt a no. 2. 
 
 2. Meton. the thing sacrificed, a sacrifice, 
 victim, the flesh of victims, part of which 
 was burned on the altar, and part given to 
 the priests, see Lev. c. 2. c. 3. Mark 9, 49 
 irao~a Sucrt a aXl dXtcr3jj(reTat, comp. Lev. 2, 
 13 where Sept. for nnsn. Mark 12, 33. 
 Luke 13, 1. Acts 7, 41. 42. 1 Cor. 10, 18 
 ot (ff^iovTfs ray Svcrias who eat of the vic 
 tims, as was done by the priests and per 
 sons offering the sacrifice, see Lev. 8, 31. 
 Deut. 12, 6. 7. 18. 27. 1 Sam. 2, 13 sq. 
 (Sept. and nst Deut. 12, 27. Ex. 34, 15.) 
 Of birds as a sin-offering, Luke 2, 24 ; 
 comp. Lev. 12, 6. So genr. Hdian. 8. 6. 14. 
 Luc. Sacrif. 12. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 3. Trop. 
 1 Pet. "2, 5 nvfVft.aTi.Kai 3uo-i ai, comp. Ps. 51, 
 19. Rom. 12, 1 TrapaoTijo-ai ra (ra>p.aTa 3u- 
 o\av u><rav, see in aa> no. 1. c. 
 
 3. Trop. of service, obedience, praise, of 
 fered to God, offering, oblation, Phil. 2, 17 
 3vcria rrjs Triarewy. 4, 18. So Sucri a uive- 
 (Teas, an offering of praise, Heb. 13, 15. 16. 
 Sept. for rnin rot p s . 107, 22. 116, 17 : 
 comp. 50, 23. 
 
 ^va-iaa-rripiov, ov, TO, (3uo-tdoo,) an 
 altar, genr. Matt. 5, 23. 24. 23, 18. 19. 20. 
 Rom. 11, 3. Heb. 7, 13. James 2, 21. 
 Sept. for n?.ta Gen. 8. 20. 12, 7. al. saep. 
 So Philo de Vit. Mos. III. p. 151. 13, TOV S 
 tv vTratSpa /3co/i6i> ei co3e KaXflv Sucriaarij- 
 piov. Spec, of the alter for burnt offerings 
 in the temple, before the outer sanctuary, 
 Matt. 23, 35. Luke 11, 51 ; so 1 Cor. 9, 13 
 bis, et 10, 18 Koivatvol TOV 3vo-. and Heb. 13 
 10 (paytlv fK TOV Stitr. i. e. of the victims 
 laid upon the altar. Symbolically in heaven, 
 Rev. 6, 9. 11, 1. 14, 18. 16, 7 TJKOVO-II TOV 
 3uo-. \eyovros i. e. a voice from the altar. 
 (Sept. and r^f? Ex. 30, 28. 35, 16. Jos. 
 Ant. 8. 4. 1.) Of the altar of incense in 
 the temple, overlaid with gold, comp. Ex. 
 37, 25 sq. 1 Mace. 1, 21 ; so pr. Luke 1, 
 11; symbolically in heaven, Rev. 8, 3 bis. 
 5. 9, 13. Sept. and n3T33 Ex. 30, 27. 
 35, 15. 
 
 ^vco, f. vcro), Pass. perf. WSu/icu, aor. 1 
 eVuSijv, Buttm. 5 18. n. 2. 95. n. 4. 
 
 1. to sacrifice, to kill and offer in sacri 
 fice, to slay victims; absol. Acts 14, 13 
 ^3e\e Sveii/. With dat. v. 18; ace. and dat. 
 1 Cor. 10, 20 bi# Sept. for rot Gen. 46, 
 
 1. Ex. 3, 18. al. saep. So Hdian. 2. 13. 4. 
 Luc. D. Deor. 4. 1. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 3. ib. 
 
 2. 2. 13. Spec. TO 7rao-^a Sveiv, to kill 
 the passover, the paschal lamb, as a species 
 of sacrifice, Mark 14, 12. Luke 22, 7. 1 Cor. 
 5, 7. Sept. and Heb. TOBfi rat Deut. 16, 
 2. 4. 5. 6 ; also Sept. for HDSn -JfidS Ex. 
 12,21. 
 
 2. Simply to kill, to slaughter, e. g. ani 
 mals for a feast, inasmuch as sacrifices 
 were connected with feasting ; see in Suo-t a 
 no. 2, and comp. Gen. 31, 54. 1 Sam. 9, 12. 
 So Matt. 22, 4. Luke 15, 23 TOV fioa-xov 
 TOV o-tTfVTov 3uo-are. v. 27. 30. Acts 10, 13. 
 11, 7; genr. John 10, 10. Sept. and ret 
 1 Sam. 28, 24. 1 K.- 19, 21. Deut. 12, 15^ 
 
 0&)/ia9, a, o, Thomas, (Heb. C:xn twin,) 
 one of the twelve apostles, also called Ai Su- 
 p.os q. v. Matt. 10, 3. Mark 3, 18. Luke 6, 
 15. John 11, 16. 14, 5. 20, 24. 26. 27. 28. 
 29. 21,2. Acts 1, 13. 
 
 ^a)pa^ aKos, 6, a lireast-plate, cuirass, 
 Lat. lorica, i. e. armour covering the body 
 from the neck to the thighs, consisting qf 
 
Iaei/30? 
 
 two parts, one covering the front and the 
 other the back. Potter Gr. Ant. II. p. 29. 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Lorica. So pr. Rev. 9, 
 9 bis. 17. Sept. for -p-ntf 1 Sam. 17, 5. 
 Neh. 4, 16. So m. V. H.V. 24. Xen. Mem. 
 
 342 
 
 3. 10. 9.-^-Trop. Eph. 6, 14 TOV 3cop. n -i 
 8iKaio<rvvT)s. 1 Thess. 5, 8 Seop. Trio-revs 
 Comp. Sept. Is. 59, 17. Wisd. 5, 18. ID 
 late writers 3cfy)a is also the breast, chest 
 thorax, see Passow. 
 
 Ideipos, ov, 6, Jairus, Hebrew ^^ 
 (whom God enlightens) Jair, a ruler of a 
 synagogue, Mark 5, 22. Luke 8, 41. 
 
 Ia/cco/3, 6, indec. Jacob, Heb. 3 pS 1 ] 
 (heel-catcher, supplanter, Gen. 25, 26. 27, 
 36), pr. n. of two persons in N. T. 
 
 1. The patriarch of the Jewish nation, 
 Matt. 1, 2. Luke 13, 28. Acts 7, 8. 12. 14. 
 al. Trop. for the posterity of Jacob, the 
 Jewish people, Rom. 11, 26. Josephus 
 writes the name id/cco/Sos, Ant. 1. 18. 1 sq. 
 
 2. The father of Joseph the husband of 
 Mary, Matt. 1, 15. 16. -f 
 
 Id.KC0/3os, ov, 6, pr. i. q. la/cw/3 q. v. 
 James, pr. n. of three persons in N. T. in 
 cluding two of the apostles. 
 
 1. James the son of Zebedee, the elder 
 and own brother of John, Matt. 4, 21. 10, 2. 
 Mark 3, 17. Acts 1,13. al. He was put 
 to death by the elder Herod Agrippa about 
 A. D. 44, Acts 12, 2. 
 
 2. James the Less, 6 fjuxoos, Mark 15, 40, 
 the brother of Jude, lovdas 6 d8f\<pbs TOV 
 laKuftov Jude 1. Acts 1, 13. Luke 6, 16; 
 and like him the son of Mary sister to our 
 Lord s mother and wife of Clopas or Al- 
 pheus, Matt. 27, 56. Luke 24, 10, comp. 
 John 19, 25; hence called the son of Al- 
 pheus Matt. 10, 3. Mark 3, 18. Luke 6, 15. 
 Acts 1,13; and also once the brother i. e. 
 kinsman of our Lord, 6 d8(\<p6s TOV icvpiov 
 Gal. 1, 19. So also Acts 12, 17. 15, 13. 
 21, 18. Gal. 2, 9. 12. James 1,1; prob. also 
 1 Cor. 15, 7. According to Josephus, Ant. 
 20. 9. 1, James 6 dSeX06s l^croC TOV Xeyo- 
 Hfvov Xpio-Tov, (prob. the apostle.) was put 
 to death by the younger Ananus, who was 
 high priest after the death of Festus and 
 before the arrival of his successor Albinus, 
 about A. D. 64. 
 
 3. James, a son of Mary and uterine bro 
 ther of Jesus, Matt. 13, 55. Mark 6, 3 ; 
 comp. John 2, 12. Others refer these pas 
 sages to no. 2 ; taking d8eX<oi in the wider 
 sense of kinsmen ; but the mention of 
 dSeX^ai, sisters, restricts the signification. 
 Jesus also is spoken of as the first-lorn of 
 
 Mary, never as her only son, Matt. 1, 25. 
 Luke 2, 7 ; and his brethren are said not to 
 have believed in him long after his kinsmen 
 James and Jude were among the apostles ; 
 John 7, 5. Mark 3, 21. -f 
 
 " 
 
 ta/ia, arcy, TO, (mo/jai.) healing, cure; 
 
 as xap/oymi lapaTav 1 Cor. 12, 9. 28. 30. 
 Sept. for ,-ixiiS n Jer. 46, 11 ,- XQ"ia Jer. 33, 
 6. Pol. 7. 14. 2. Plato Tim. 66. c. 
 
 , ov, 6, Jambres, see lavvrjs. 
 
 lavvd, 6, indec. Janna, pr. n. of a man, 
 Luke 3, 24. 
 
 lai>V7]$, ov, 6, Jannes, and Iapj3pf)s 
 Jambres, pr. names of two of the Egyptian 
 magicians who withstood Moses, 2 Tim. 3, 
 8 ; comp. Ex. 7, 1 1 sq. Not found in O. T. 
 but derived by Paul from a popular tradition, 
 preserved in the Targums, Talmud, and 
 Rabbins. See Buxtorf Lex. Rab. Talm. 945. 
 Fabric. Cod. Pseud. V. T. I. p. 816. Wetst. 
 N. T. in loc. 
 
 iaofiat,, S>fiat,, f. da-opal, Mid. depon. to 
 heal, to cure, in the present, impf. la/jinv, 
 and aor. 1 Zao-d/xjji ; while Pass. perf. i a- 
 fjLat, aor. 1 Id3r]v, and fut. 1 tcfiqcro/uit, have 
 the passive sense, Buttm. 5 113. n. 6. So 
 C. ace. Luke 5, 17 els TO ld<r%ai UVTOVS. 
 6, 19. 9, 2. 11. 42. 14, 4. 22, 51. John 4, 
 47. Acts 10, 38. 28, 8. Pass. Matt. 8, 8 
 6 Trais p,ov. V. 13. 15, 28. 
 
 Luke 7, 7. 8, 47. 17, 15. John 5, 13. Acts 
 3, 11. 9, 34. Pass, with dno TWOS, to be 
 healed from or of any thing, Mark 5, 29. 
 Luke 6, 17. Sept. for XS 1 ! Gen. 20, 17. 
 2 K. 20, 8. So Pol. 5. 11. Y. Xen. Yen. 1. 
 6. Mem. 3. 1. 4. Trop. of moral diseases. 
 to heal, to save, sc. from the consequences 
 of one s sins, Matt. 13, 15 /xjjTrore . . . eVi- 
 peS^cout KOI tdcrcojiiat avTovs. John 12,40 
 et Acts 28, 27 quoted from Is. 6, 10 where 
 Sept. for xS i . So Luke 4, 18 (comp. Is. 
 61, 1). Heb/12, 13. James 5, 16 evx ea " 3e 
 vnep dXXjjXcoi , oTrcas j aStyre. 1 Pet. 2, 24 ov 
 TO) ^iwXwTTi OVTOV ld%nTf, comp. Is. 53, 5. 
 Sept. for NS 1 } Is. 53, 5. 61, 1 ; and parall. 
 with o-a>fiv Jer. 17, 14. 
 
343 
 
 , 6, indec. Jared, Heb. T^ 1 ?. (de 
 scent), pr. n. of a man Luke 3, 37. 
 
 ta<n$, toDf, 17, (tuo/iat,) healing, cure, 
 Luke 13, 3-2. Acts 4, 22. 30. Sept. for 
 niXS- Prov. 3, 8 ; Ktna Prov. 4, 22. 
 Plut! Gryll. 9. Plato Phaser. 248. d. 
 
 lacrTTis, t8os, 17, jasper, (Heb. fiB JJ? ,) a 
 precious stone of various colours, as purple, 
 cerulean, but mostly green; Rev. 4, 3. 21, 
 
 11. 18. 19. See Rosenm. Bibl. Alterthk. 
 IV. i. p. 43. Sept. for nBar Ez. 28, 13. 
 Plato Phaedo 110. d. 
 
 Idacov, ovos, 6, Jason, a kinsman of 
 Paul, Rom. 16, 21 ; and his host at Berea, 
 Acts 17, 5. 6. 7. 9. 
 
 larpo?, ov, 6, (ido/u,) a physician, 
 Mark 5, 26 TroXXa 7ra3oO<ra VTTO TroXXeov to 
 rpid Matt. 9, 12. Mark 2, 17. Luke 4, 23. 
 5, 31. 8, 43. Col. 4, 14. Sept. for KB I 2 Chr. 
 16, 12. Hdian. 3. 15. 4. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 51. 
 
 I Se, once I8e Gal. 5, 2 Rec. ?Sf being 
 the later form instead of I8e Imperat. aor. 2 
 of e* T oi> to see; comp. in ei8o> I. init. In 
 N. T. as a particle of exclamation, see, lo, be 
 hold, e. g. a) As calling attention to some 
 thing present, Matt. 25, 20. 22. 25. Mark 
 11,21. Addressed to several or many, Mark 
 3, 34. John 1, 29. 48. 7, 26. 11,36. 19,4. 
 5. 14. b) In the sense of behold, observe, 
 Consider! Mark 15,4. John 5, 14. Gal. 5, 2. 
 c) With an ace. retaining its verbal power, 
 John 20, 27 i8e ras x e ~ l P<*s M ou - R m - 1J > 
 22. + 
 
 tSea, as, f], (etSo),) aspect, appearance, 
 Matt. 28, 3. Sept. for nsoa Dan. 1, 13. 
 15. Diod. Sic. 1. 12. Thuc.~6. 4. 
 
 iS(09, t a, ov, own, one s own, i. e. 
 
 1. one s own, as pertaining to a private 
 person and not to the public, private, parti 
 cular, individual ; opp. to 8r t fjnos Horn. Od. 
 
 3. 82; to S^o crtos Xen. Vect. 4. 21 ; to 
 Kou/oY Jos. B. J. 4. 4. 1. Xen. Hi. 11. 1. 
 Hence in N. T. adverbially; a) Dat. 
 18 iq, individually, severally, (opp. S^ocria 
 Xen. Hi. 11.9; KOIVTJ Mem. 2. 6. 38,) 1 Cor. 
 
 12, 11 8iaipovv I8ia eKacrra) Ka3ws /3ovXe- 
 rat. See Buttm. 1 1 5. 4. So Luc. Tox. 49. 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 34. b) *ar I8iav, pri- 
 rately, by oneself, apart from others ; so of 
 an individual, alone, Matt. 14, 13. 23 dvffirj 
 fls TO opos tar I8iav. 17, 1. Mark 6, 31. 
 al. Of several as apart from all others, 
 Matt. 17, 19. Mark 4,34. 9,2.28. Acts 23, 
 19. Gal. 2, 2. al. So Jos. B. J. 4. 5. 5. Pol. 
 
 4. 84. 8 ; opp. noiiy 2 Mace. 4, 5. 
 
 2. one s own, as belonging to oneself and 
 not to another, own, proper, peculiar ; opp. 
 
 to dXXorptor Epict. Ench. 1. 3. Plut. de 
 Defect. Orac. 34 init. Thus 
 
 a) Implying ownership, that of which 
 one is himself the owner, possessor, pro 
 ducer, my own, thy own, his own, etc. a) 
 Of things Matt. 22, 5 els TOV "iSioy dypov. 
 25, 15 eKacrra) Kara rrjv ISiav 8vvafjiiv. Mark 
 15, 20 (Vfftvcrav avrbv ra i/idrta ra ?&ta. 
 Luke 6, 41. 44. John 5, 43 lv uvop-ari ra> 
 i S/a). 7, 18. 10, 3. 4. Acts 20, 28. 28, 30*. 
 Rom. 10, 3 TTJV I8iav 8iKaiocrvvT)v. 14, 5. 
 
 1 Tim. 3, 4. 5. 2 Pet. 1, 20 I8ias eViXiWwr 
 (see in eViXucris). 3, 17. al. So els T^V 
 I8iav irokiv, one s own city, where one re 
 sides Matt. 9, 1 ; or the seat of one s family 
 Luke 2, 3 ; t v TJJ I8ia Trarpidt John 4, 44. 
 Pleonast. with a genit. of person added. 
 John 10, 12 ov OVK eurt ra TTpojSara i8ia. 
 
 2 Pet. 3, 3. 16. (Sept. Job 2, 11. Hdian. 4. 
 11. 8. Xen. Cyr. 1. 1. 1 ; with gen. added, 
 Dem. 1244. 24. Plato Menex. p. 247. b. 
 Gorg. p. 502. e. See Lob. ad Phryn. p. 441.) 
 Hence ra iSia, one s own things, genr. 
 possessions, property, Luke 18, 28 in Mss. 
 (Xen. Hi. 10. 5.) Spec, one s own house, 
 home, John 19, 27 f\afiei> 6 fJLa^rrjs OLTJJI/ 
 fls TO. TSia. 16, 32. Acts 21, 6. (Sept. for 
 I rna Esth. 5, 10. Pol. 2. 57. 5.) Also, own 
 nation, people, John 1, 11 r;X3ei/ fls ra i Sta. 
 Further, Trpdo-o-fiv ra iSta to do one s own 
 business, duties, 1 Thess. 4, 11 (comp. 
 Phryn. et Lob. p. 441) ; XaXeZv ex TCOV ISiav 
 to speak out of one s own thoughts, heart, 
 character, John. 8, 44. /3) Of persons, 
 marking with emphasis their peculiar rela 
 tion; e. g. iSto? do~f\<pus John 1, 42 ; i Stos 
 dvr]p own husband 1 Cor. 7, 2 ; Sfo-iroTijs 
 1 Tim. 6, 1 ; 8ov\os Matt. 25, 14; Kvpios 
 Rom. 14, 4; ira-r^p John 5, 18 ; vio y Rom. 
 8, 32 ; (TV[jL<pv\eTai own countrymen 1 Thess. 
 2, 14 ; 18. 7rpo<J)rat their own prophets, 
 of their own country, 1 Thess. 2, 15 ; and 
 with a genit. added, 18ios avrcav npo(pi jrr]s 
 Tit. 1. 12; comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 441. 
 Winer $ 22. 7. (Palaeph. 31. 5. Hdian. 2. 
 6. 19.) Hence of tStot, one s own house 
 hold, family, 1 Tim. 5, 8 ; own friends, com 
 panions, John 13, 1. Acts 4, 23. 24, 23; 
 own people, countrymen, John 1, 11. Neut. 
 collect. TO ?5tof, its own, of persons. John 
 15, 19. So genr. 2 Mace. 12, 22. Jos. B. 
 J. 4. 4. 6. Sometimes TSto? is thus put in 
 stead of a possessive pronoun, without em 
 phasis, e. g. Matt. 22, 5 (parall. auroC). 
 25, 14. John 1, 42. 1 Pet. 3, 1. 5. See 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 441. Winer 5 22. 7. 
 
 b) own, in the sense of peculiar, particu 
 lar, as distinguishing one person or thing 
 from others, e. g. I8ia SidXeKror Acts 1, 19, 
 
344 
 
 2, 6. 8 ; 18. 8fi(ri8ai:fjLovia 25, 19; 18. \d- 
 pia-fia 1 Cor. 7, 7. Hdot. 4. 18. Diod. Sic. 
 11. 26. Plato Gorg. 481. c. 
 
 c) As denoting that which in its nature 
 or by appointment pertains in any way to a 
 person or thing, own, proper, appropriate ; 
 e. g. Acts 13, 36 Aa/3i5 p.ev yap I8ia yeveq 
 {nrr]p(Tf](ras, his own generation, in which 
 he lived. 1 Cor. 3, 8 TOV idiov pia%6v . . . KO- 
 TTOV. 15, 23. Jude 6. Acts 1, 25 els TOV 
 18iov TOTTOV to his own place, i. e. appropriate 
 and appointed for him. (Tgnat. ad Magn. \ 5, 
 
 els rov {8iov TOTTOv /if XXet 
 So Kaipbs t Sioy, Kaipol 18101, own time, i. e. 
 due, proper time, as determined of God, Gal. 
 6.9. 1 Tim. 2, 6. 6, 15. Tit. 1, 3. -f- 
 
 40&)T?79, ou, 6, (i Sior,) a private citizen, 
 opp. to one in a public station, JE[. V. H. 
 4. 5. Xen. Ag. 11. 6; a private soldier, 
 Xen. An. 1. 3. 11. In N. T. one untaught, 
 unlearned, ignorant; Acts 4, 13 i/3p. a- 
 ypa/xjLiarot Kal i8ia>rai. 1 Cor. 14, 16. 23. 
 24; c. dat. 2 Cor. 11, 6 l8i6i>Tijs r Xo yw, 
 rude in speech. So Ml. V. H. 4. 15. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 7. 7 ; c. gen. Plato Prot. 345. a. 
 Xen. Mag. Eq. 8. 1. See Wetst. N. T. II. 
 p. 161, 206. 
 
 icov, a demonstr. particle, lo! behold! 
 (pr. for I8ov imperat. of aor. Mid. el86pr]i>,) 
 serving to call attention to some fact, action, 
 or event ; usually put at the beginning of 
 a clause or only with nal before it, but some 
 times in the middle of a clause before words 
 which are to be particularly noted, e. g. 
 Matt. 23, 34. Luke 13, 16. Acts 2, 7. 
 
 1. Usually before a nominative and finite 
 verb, Matt. 1, 20 I8ov ayyeXos KVpiov KO.T 
 oKip ffpdvr] avTa. 2, 1. 13. Mark 3, 32. 
 Luke 2, 10. John 4, 35. Acts 9, 11. al. saep. 
 So in quotations from the O. T. Matt. 1, 23. 
 21, 5. Mark 1,2. Rom. 9, 33 ; comp. respect 
 ively Is. 7, 14. Zech. 9, 9. Mai. 3, 1. Is. 28, 
 16, in all which Sept. and ftSft Luc. D. 
 Deor. 20. 10. Plato Rep. 440. a. 
 
 2. From the Heb. with a nominative sim 
 ply, where however the verb of existence 
 is implied ; Matt. 3, 17 I8ov (pwvr) CK T&V 
 ovpavvv. Luke 5, 12. John 19, 26. 27. Acts 
 8, 27. 36 I8ov v8a>p. 2 Cor. 6, 2. Rev. 6, 2. 
 So Sept. and nsn Josh. 9, 25, and so MS!"? 
 Num. 23, 17. Gen. 47, 1. al. where Sept. in 
 serts elvai. Before e yw or an equivalent 
 word, expressing resignation, obedience, 
 Luke 1, 38 I8ov, 17 8ov\j] wpiov. Heb. 2, 13 
 quoted from Is. 8, 18 where Sept. for Fijfrt 
 " ? 3 ?. So in answers, Acts 9, 10 I8ov ryw. 
 Sept. for issn Gen. 22, 11. 1 Sam. 3, 8. 
 
 s. 6, 8. + 
 
 as, T], Idumea, only Mark 
 3, 8. Heb. trtX Edom, and iiJJia ^rt 
 Mount Seir, the name Idumea being the 
 softened Greek pronunciation for tahx , Jos. 
 Ant. 2. 1. 1. This country lay to the S. E. 
 of Palestine along the great valley el-Ara- 
 bah, which extends from the Dead Sea to 
 the gulf of Akabah, and chiefly on its eastern 
 side which is rough and mountainous. Here 
 dwelt the descendants of Esau, who were 
 always hostile to the Jews ; they were con 
 quered by David, 2 Sam. 8, 14 ; but were 
 first completely subdued by John Hyrcanus 
 about 125 B. C. Jos. Ant. 13. 9. 1. During 
 the Jewish exile they had taken posses 
 sion of the southern parts of Palestine as 
 far as Hebron, so that the later name Idu 
 mea sometimes includes this region ; comp. 
 
 1 Mace. 5, 65 with Ez. 36, 5. Jos. Ant. 12. 
 8. 6. B. J. 13. 9. 1. c. Ap. 9 [10]. For a 
 description of Idumea, see Reland Palaest. p. 
 66 sq. Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. p. 506-580 ; 
 espec. p. 555 sq. Ritter s Erdkunde, Th. 
 XII. p. 111-140. Th.XIV.p. 11031141. 
 
 iSp(b$, &TOS, 6, (ZSos,) sweat, Luke 22, 
 44. Sept. for rot Gen. 3, 19. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 15. 1. Xen*"Mem. 1. 4. 6. 
 
 Iea/3eX, ^, indec. Jezebel, Heb. Vap 
 (non-cohabited, intacta, comp. mod. Agnes,~) 
 pr. n. of the impious and idolatrous queen 
 of Ahab ; put in N. T. as the emblem of 
 false and idolatrous teachers, Rev. 2, 20. 
 Comp. 1 K. 16, 31. 18, 4. 19, 2. 21, 5 sq. 
 
 2 K. 9, 30 sq. Some compare the mod. 
 Isabella, Germ. Isabel ; which however 
 prob. comes from Elisabeth, corrupted in 
 Germ, into llsebee, Use ; see Adelung s Lex. 
 
 Jepa7ro7U9, tea?, 17, Hierapolis, a city 
 of Phrygia celebrated for its warm baths, 
 now called Pambuk Kaleh; Col. 4, 13. It 
 was situated above the junction of the rivers 
 Lycus and Meander, not far from Colosse 
 and Laodicea, towards the north. See Strabo 
 13. p. 629. Plin. H. N. 2. 95. ib. 5. 29. 
 Hamilton s Res. in Asia Minor, I. p. 514, 
 517 sq. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. I. ii. p. 207, 229. 
 
 lpaTl(lj as, T], (tepareuw,) priesthood, 
 priesfs office, Luke 1, 9. Heb. 7, 5. Sept. 
 for nsns Ex. 29, 9. Num. 3, 10. Aristot 
 Polit. 7. 8. 
 
 aros, TO, (ffpareuca.) priest- 
 hood,*meton. and collect, for priests, i. e. 
 Christians, who are said dveveyKai. Trvet^a- 
 TIKO.S Sva-ias 1 Pet. 2, 5 ; and also are called 
 @ao-i\fiov lfpaTfvp.a v. 9, in allusion to Ex. 
 19, 6 where Sept. for Wffa nsbaa ; 
 comp. Is. 61, 6. Rev. 1, 6. 5, 10. 20, 6. 
 
345 
 
 lepov 
 
 f. evo-w, (iepev?,) to le a 
 priest, to act as priest, Luke 1, 8. Sept. for 
 1^3 Ex. 28, 1. 3. 4. Jos. Ant. 3. 8. 1. 
 Hdian. 5. 6. 6. 
 
 Jepe/ua?, iov, 6, Jeremias, Jeremiah, 
 Heb. S"I;BV or IfTJ 5 ?-^ (whom Jehovah 
 setteth up), a celebrated prophet of the O. 
 T. Matt. 2, 17. 16, 14. In Matt. 27, 9 a 
 quotation is referred to Jeremiah, Sia lepe- 
 piov TOV 7?po(pT)Tov, which is not found in his 
 writings, but in Zech. 11, 12. 13. Some 
 Mss. here read Za^api ou, others simply Sta 
 ToC TTpo<pr)Tov. This last is prob. the cor 
 rect reading ; to which some early copyists 
 added Zaxapiov, while others inserted lepe- 
 P.IOV, in allusion to Jer. 18, 2 sq. 
 
 lepevs, e w? , 6, (ifpds,) a priest, one who 
 performs the sacred rites, TO. iepd. So of 
 heathen priests, 6 Se lepevs TOV Ato s Acts 
 14, 13. Sept. I. TOV BdoX for "ftS 2 K. 
 11, 18. 2 Chr. 23, 17. So Hdian. 1. 9. 5. 
 Xen. Conv. 8. 40. Of the Jewish priests, 
 the descendants of Aaron, genr. Matt. 8, 4 
 (TtavTov 8f1ov TW if pel. 12, 4. 5. Mark 1, 
 44. 2, 26. Luke 1, 5. 5, 14. 6, 4. 10, 31. 
 17, 14. John 1, 19. Acts 6, 7. Heb. 9, 6. 
 Acts 4, 1 ot lepels, the priests then on duty. 
 They were divided into 24 classes for the 
 service of the temple, 1 Chr. c. 24 ; and the 
 heads of these classes were sometimes call 
 ed dp^iepelf , see in dp^iepfvs no. 2. Sept. 
 every where for VlJS, as Lev. 1, 5 sq. 
 Spec, of the high priest, 6 iepevs, or 
 ieptvs fityas (Heb. 10, 21), Acts 5, 24. 
 Heb. 7, 21. 23. 8, 4 bis. 10, 11. Sept. and 
 TP Ex. 35, 18 ; 38, 21 6 f. 6 p.eyas for 
 ina -jn s Lev. 21, 10. Num. 35, 25. 28. So 
 of Melchisedec as a high priest of God, Heb. 
 7, 1. 3. Of Jesus as a spiritual high priest, 
 Heb. 5, 6 comp. v. 5. 7, 11. 15. 17. 21. 10, 21. 
 Trop. Christians also are called iepety ro> 
 Sew, priests unto God, as yielding him spi 
 ritual sacrifices, Rev. 1, 6. 5, 10. 20,6. 
 Comp. 1 Pet. 2, 5, and see in tepartv/na. 
 
 lepi^d), fj, indec. Jericho, Heb. "in 1 ^ 
 pr. n. of a city in the tribe of Benjamin, 
 about 20 miles east of Jerusalem and 5 from 
 the Jordan, situated at the foot of the moun 
 tains which border the valley of the Jordan 
 and Dead Sea on the west It was destroyed 
 by Joshua, Josh. 6, 26 ; but was afterwards 
 rebuilt 1 K. 16, 34, and became the seat 
 of a school of the prophets 2 K. 2, 5. 15. 
 The land around Jericho was exceedingly 
 fertile, abounding in palm-trees and roses, 
 (D^EPi "H3 , TroXtf <poii>iK<ov, city of palm- 
 trees, Deut. 34, 3 ; <uj <pvra p68ov tv Itpt- 
 X<a Ecclus. 24, 14,) and yielding large quan 
 
 tities of the opobalsnm, or balsam of Gilead, 
 so highly prized in the East ; Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 
 1, lepi^o) TroXtr ev8aifj.ci)v O.VTT), (poiviKas T( 
 (peptiv dyaSiy, Kal /SdXcrap.oi vtvopevr]. Its 
 site is still occupied by a miserable village 
 called Riha ; and only a single palm-tree 
 now remains to the ancient City of Palms. 
 See Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. p. 272-302. 
 Reland Palaest. p. 829. Matt. 20, 29. Mark 
 10,46 bis. Luke 10, 30. ,18, 35. 19, 1. 
 Heb. 11, 30. 
 
 S, ov, 6, f], adj. (lepos, 3v,) 
 offered in sacrifice, sacrificed, spoken of the 
 flesh of victims, 1 Cor. 10, 28 Lachm. for 
 the common ei8coXo3uroi . Aristot. OEc. 2. 
 20. Plut. Symp. 8. 8. 3. See Lob. ad 
 Phryn.p. 159. 
 
 iepov, ov, TO, (neut. of fepo y,) a temple, 
 i. e. a consecrated place, including the proper 
 temple or fane, vaos, and all its courts and 
 appurtenances ; comp. Diod. Sic. 1. 15. 
 Tittm. de Syn. N. T. p. 178 sq. Thus of a 
 heathen temple, once Acts 19, 27 Apre /uSoy 
 Itpov. So 1 Mace. 10, 84. Luc. Ver. Hist. 
 1. 32. Xen. Ag. 11. 1. Elsewhere only of 
 the temple in Jerusalem, Heb. "tt T? f 1 " 1 ? 
 Sept. olxos Kvpiov 1 K. 6, 1. 37. 7, 12. Is. 
 66, 1 ; CHrt^n tV<S Sept. OIKOS TOV SeoO 
 Ezra 3, 8. In N. T. always in reference 
 to the temple as rebuilt by Herod the Great, 
 and minutely described by Josephus, Ant. 
 15. 11. 3 sq. B. J. 5. 5. 1-6 ; see also genr. 
 Bibl. Res. in Palest. I. p. 416-452. The 
 temple stood up on a rocky eminence on the 
 eastern part of the city, the hill Moriah, over 
 against Zion towards the northeast, and se 
 parated from Zion by the valley of the Ty- 
 ropoeon. On three sides of this hill walls of 
 huge stones were" built up from the bottom, 
 and filled in with cells or earth, quite to a 
 level with the summit of the hill ; so as to 
 form an area on which to erect the temple. 
 These external walls, or at least their sub 
 structions, remain to this day; and are in 
 some places towards the south still sixty feet 
 in height. The enclosure thus formed was a 
 quadrangle, measuring according to Jose 
 phus, a stadium on each side, or four stadia 
 in circumference. The interior of this en 
 closure was surrounded by porticos or lofty 
 covered colonnades, along the walls ; and 
 the open part was laid or paved with varie 
 gated stones. This large outer court was 
 a great place of resort for Jews and stran 
 gers ; and here animals and things necessary 
 for the sacrifices and worship of the temple 
 were exposed for sale; Matt. 21, 12. Luke 
 19, 45. This is sometimes called bv Chris- 
 
tepov 
 
 346 
 
 dan writers the Court of the Gentiles ; 
 Lightf. Opp. I. p. 415, 590. Not far from 
 the middle of this court an ornamented wall 
 or balustrade of stone, three cubits high, 
 formed the boundary of the second and 
 smaller interior enclosure ; beyond which 
 limit neither foreigners nor the unclean 
 might pass. Within it an inner wall, forty 
 cubits high from its foundation, surrounded 
 the second or inner court (TO Sevrtpov ie- 
 pov Jos. B. J. 5. 5. 2) ; but was encom 
 passed on the outside by fourteen steps, 
 leading up to a level area around it ten cu 
 bits wide ; from which again five other steps 
 led up through the gates to the interior. 
 This is called by Josephus 1. c. ayiov, since 
 none but the clean were permitted to enter 
 it. The principal gate of this second court 
 was on the east; and there were several 
 others on all the sides except the west. A 
 portion of it was set off as the court of the 
 women ; to which there was access by 
 three gates. Still within this second court 
 and yet more elevated was the third or most 
 sacred enclosure, which none but the priests 
 might enter (comp. Luke 1, 9. 10) ; con 
 sisting of the vaos or fane itself, and the 
 small court before it, where stood the altar 
 of burnt offerings; Jos. Ant. 15. 11. 5 ult. 
 comp. Matt. 23, 35. To this there was an 
 ascent from the second court by twelve 
 steps ; Jos. B. J. 5. 5. 4. The vaos or fane 
 was divided into two parts, viz. the outer 
 sanctuary (TO ayiov) with the candelabra, 
 the altar of incense, and the table of shew- 
 bread ; and the inner sanctuary, the holy of 
 holies (ayia ayla>v), separated from the 
 former by a vail, and containing the ark. 
 Into the outer sanctuary the priests entered 
 daily to burn incense, Luke 1 , 9. Heb. 9, 
 6 ; while into the holy of holies only the high 
 priest entered once a year, Heb. 9, 7. On 
 the north of the whole precincts of the tem 
 ple, and connected with them, was the for 
 tress Antonia (jrapt^o^ Acts 21, 34), a 
 quadrangle equal in extent to the enclosure 
 of the temple itself; see Bibl. Res. in Pa 
 lest. I. p. 431-436. Biblioth. Sac. 1846. p. 
 616 sq. Hence in N. T. TO lepov is put: 
 1. Genr. for the whole temple and its 
 precincts ; Matt. 24, 1 bis, TUS ci/coSo/iay 
 TOV lepov. Mark 13, 1. 3. Luke 21, 5. 22, 
 52. Prob. Matt. 4, 5 et Luke 4, 9 TO Tire- 
 pvyiov TOV If pov, the pinnacle of the temple, 
 referring to the elevation of the middle por 
 tion of the triple portico or colonnade along 
 the southern wall, which at its eastern end 
 impended over the valley of the Kidron ; so 
 that " if from its roof one attempted to look 
 
 down into the gulf below, his eyes became 
 dark and dizzy before they could penetrate 
 the immense depth;" Jos. Ant. 15. 11. 5. 
 The actual height above the bottom of the 
 valley was prob. not less than 310 feet ; see 
 Bibl. Res. in Palest. I. p. 429. Josephus also 
 describes the eastern colonnade, the work 
 of Solomon, as rising 400 cubits above the 
 same valley ; which doubtless is merely an 
 exaggerated estimate ; Ant. 20. 9. 7. 
 
 2. Synecd. a) For the courts gene 
 rally, Matt. 12, 5 ot lepels ev TW tepw TO cra/3- 
 PO.TOV /3e/3?Xov<n. Mark 11, 11. Luke 2, 27. 
 37. 18, 10. Acts 2, 46. 3, 1 sq. 21, 26 sq. 
 al. b) For the outer court, where things 
 were bought and sold, Matt. 21, 12 TOVS TTU>- 
 \ovvras KOI dyopd^ovTas tv TO> lep<a. V. 14. 
 15. Mark 11, 15. 16. al. Here too Jesus 
 disputed and taught, Matt. 21, 23. 26, 55. 
 Mark 1 1, 27 ev TW iepc3 TrepnraTovvros avTov. 
 Luke 2, 46. John 5, l4. 7, 14. 28. al. So 
 the apostles Acts 5, 20. 21. 25. 42. + 
 
 lepoTrpeirrj^ e or, ovs, 6, jj, adj. (iepos, 
 jrpeVa),) pr. becoming to a sacred place or 
 person; hence becoming to religion, holy, 
 reverent. Tit. 2, 3 lv /caTao-T^aTt ifpofrpe- 
 TTtls, i. e. in their conduct adorning the 
 Christian profession ; comp. 1 Tim. 2, 2. 
 Jos . Ant. 11. 8. 5. init. Plut. de Lib. educ. 
 
 14 fin. Xen. Conv. 8. 40. 
 
 <e/oo?, d, 6v, sacred, consecrated to God, 
 Hdian. 5. 5. 5. Xen. An. 4. 7. 21. In N. T. 
 
 1. sacred, given from God; 2 Tim. 3, 
 
 15 TO if pa ypdjujnaTa, the sacred writings, 
 holy Scriptures, i. e. the O. Test. comp. v. 
 16. 2 Mace. 8, 23. Jos. Ant. 2. 16. 5 lv 
 Tals lepals /3i /3Xoiy. Plato Tim. 27. b, ff 
 T<OV ifpuiv ypa/jL/JLaTcov (p^pr). 
 
 2. Neut. TO if pa, sacred things, sacred 
 riles; 1 Cor. 9, 13 ot ra it pa fpya6p.fvoi, 
 those performing the sacred riles, minis 
 tering in holy things. Luc. Pseudol. 12. 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 1. 
 
 Iepcxro\V[Aa, Hierosolyma, Jerusalem, 
 see in l 
 
 u, 6. a Jerusalemile, 
 one from Jerusalem, Mark 1, 5. John 7, 25. 
 Jos. de Vita sua 65. 
 
 >, f. rjo-a>, (tepdcruXos,) tc 
 rob temples, to commit sacrilege, trop. to rob 
 God of what belongs to him, as sacrifice, 
 honour, worship, obedience, Rom. 2, 22 ; 
 comp. v. 23, and Mai. 1, 8. 12. 13. 14. 3, 8. 
 9. Jos. Ant. 18. 3. 5. Others refer it lite 
 rally to the robbing of heathen temples, i. e. 
 the stealing of their ai/a3e^aTa, which was 
 forbidden by the Mosaic law, Deut. 7, 25 
 
347 
 
 jos. Ant. 4. 8. 10 ; comp. Acts 19, 37. 
 So pr. Pol. 31. 4. 10. Plato Rep. 575. b. 
 
 tepO<7lA,09, ov. 6, 17, adj. (iepov, (ruXda),) 
 robbing temples, sacrilegious ; as Subst. a 
 temple-robber, Acts 19, 37. 2 Mace. 4, 42. 
 Pol. 13. 8. 2. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 62. 
 
 o>, f. 170-0), (iepovpyos , lepov, 
 obsol. e/)yw,) i. q. TO if/act fpydgca, to per 
 form sacred rites, espec. sacrifice, to offici 
 ate as priest, Jos. Ant. 6. 6. 2. Hdian. 5. 
 5. 13. Plut. Numa 14. In N. T. trop. in 
 the Christian sense; Rom. 15, 16 lepovp- 
 yovvra TO tvayyfXiov ministering as a priest 
 [in respect to] the gospel. Buttm. } 131. 7. 
 So Jos. de [4] Mace. 7. 8 TOVS itpovpyovvras 
 TOV v6[iov iSio) aifian. 
 
 lepovcraXrjfji, ^, indec. Jerusalem, 
 Chald. dblfisn 1 ] , Heb. fibtlJTP (for dbUisn 1 ] 
 dwelling of peace, Heb. Lex. s. v.) in the 
 earlier books ; so once in Matt. 23, 37 and 
 Mark 11,1, often in the writings of Luke 
 and Paul, and usually in Sept. Also le- 
 poa-6\vfjia, a>v, TO, Heb. dual d^flJIli in 
 the later books ; so in all the Gospels, in 
 Acts, and thrice in Galatians ; also in Jose- 
 phus. Further lepoo-oXv/ia, 17, indec. 
 only Matt. 2, 3. 3, 5, meton. for the inhab 
 itants. This celebrated city, the capital of 
 Palestine, was the seat of the true religion 
 under the Jewish theocracy, and also the 
 chief scene of our Saviours ministry and 
 the central point from which his gospel w y as 
 promulgated. Hence it is often called the 
 Holy City (Is. 48, 2. Neh. 11,1. Matt. 27, 
 53), and among the Arabs of the present 
 day its current name is el-Kuds, the Holy. 
 It is situated near the middle of Palestine, 
 upon the mountains, about thirty-five miles 
 distant from the Mediterranean, and some 
 twenty-five from the Jordan and Dead Sea. 
 The mean geographical position is Lat. 31 
 47 N. and Long. 35 13 E. from Green 
 wich. Its elevation is 2610.5 feet above 
 the Mediterranean, and 3927.2 feet above 
 the Dead Sea, as determined by the level of 
 Lieuts. Lynch and Dale ; see their Sect. Map. 
 It lay on the confines of Judah and Benja 
 min, mostly within the limits of the latter, 
 but was reckoned to the former. Its most 
 ancient name was Salem, Heb. dbtti , Gen. 
 14, 18. Ps. 76, 3 ; then Jebus, OSD/, as be 
 longing to the Jebusites, Judg. 19, 10. 11. 
 David first reduced it, 2 Sam. 5, 6. 9, and 
 made it the capital of his kingdom ; whence 
 the hill Zion is also called the city of David, 
 TVn n^S , 1 K. 3, 1. 8, 1. It was destroyed 
 by the Chaldeans, 2 K. e. 24, 25, but rebuilt 
 Vy the Jews on their return from exile ; and 
 
 at a later period Herod the Great expended 
 large sums in its embellishment. Jerusa 
 lem, as it existed in the age of Christ, is de 
 scribed by Josephus, B. J. 5. 4. 1 sq. The 
 city was built chiefly on three hills : Zion on 
 the south, which was the highest, and con 
 tained the citadel, the palace, and the upper 
 city, called by Josephus 17 atxa ir6\is (B. J. 
 5. 4. 1) ; Moriah, on which stood the tem 
 ple, a lower hill on the northeast quarter of 
 Zion, and separated from it by the ravino o " 
 of the Tyropoeon ; Acra, lying north of "/A 
 on, separated from it also by the Tyropoaon, 
 and covered by 17 Karw TroXis, the most con 
 siderable portion of the whole city. After 
 the destruction of Jerusalem by the Romans 
 about A. D. 70, they endeavoured to root out 
 its very name and nature as a sacred place, 
 from the hearts and memory of the Jewish 
 nation. The emperor Adrian, about A. D. 
 136, after having utterly subjugated the 
 Jews in the revolt of Barcochba, driven 
 them from their land, and forbjflden even 
 their approach to their ancient capital, re 
 built the city and erected a temple of Jupiter 
 on the site of the Jewish temple. The city 
 was now called after the emperor, JElia 
 Capitolina ; and it was only in the begin 
 ning of the fourth century, after Constan- 
 tine had embraced Christianity, that the 
 name Jerusalem was again restored. See 
 Jos. B. J. lib. 5, 6. Reland Falsest, p. 832 sq. 
 Miinter Der Jiid. Krieg unter Traj. u. Hadr. 
 Altona 1821 ; Engl. in Biblioth. Sac. 1843, 
 p. 393 sq. For a full account of the ancient 
 topography of Jerusalem, of its subsequent 
 history, and of the modern city, see Bibl. Res. 
 in Palest. I. p. 371 sq. II. p. 1 sq. Bibh oth. 
 Sac. 1846, p. 413 sq. 605 sq. In N. T. 
 
 1. Pr. the city itself, as fj lepovo-. Mark 
 11, 1. Luke 2, 25. 38. Rom. 15, 19. 25. al. 
 Also ra le/3. Matt. 2, 1. 4, 25. Mark 3, 8. 
 Gal. I, 17. 18. 2, 1. al. 
 
 2. Meton. for the inhabitants of Jerusa 
 lem, in fern. Matt. 2, 3 naa-a lepocroXv/za. 
 Also 17 ifpovo-aXrjfj. Matt. 23, 37. Luke 13, 
 34. So once lepoo-oXv/na without art. or 
 adj. Matt. 3, 5. 
 
 3. Trop. Jerusalem for the Jewish stale, 
 church, dispensation, e. g. a) Of the for 
 mer or Mosaic dispensation, Gal. 4, 25 17 
 vvv lfpova-ahriii:. b) Of the latter or Chris 
 tian dispensation, the Redeemer s kingdom, 
 of which the spiritual Jerusalem is the seat ; 
 Gal. 4, 26 17 liva ifpovcraXrjp.. Heb. 12, 22 
 lepovcr. enovpdvios. Rev. 3, 12 77 Kaivrj ifp. 
 21,2.10. + 
 
 lepcocrvvi], rjs, 17, (ffpds,) priesthood, 
 priest s office, Heb. 7, 11. 12. 14. 2*4. 
 
348 
 
 IKOVLOV 
 
 1 Mace. 2, 54. Hdian. 5. 7. 2. Plato Legg. 
 759. d. 
 
 t, 6, indec. Jesse, Heb. ^ (firm, 
 strong,) pr. n. of the father of David, Matt. 
 
 1, 5. 6. Luke 3, 32. Acts 13, 22. Rom. 
 15, 12. 
 
 Ie^)^-ae, 6, indec. Jephthah, Heb. fiftS 1 ? 
 (he sets free), a leader or judge (oB&i) f 
 Israel, whose rash vow fell upon his daugh 
 ter, Heb. 11, 32. See Judg. c. 11. 12. 
 
 Ie%oviab ou, 6, Jeclionias, Heb. ^.^] 
 and siFHW 1 ! Jechoniah, fully "pail iTi (whom 
 Jehovah appoints) Jehoiachin, a king of Ju- 
 dah about B. C. 600, son of Jehoiakim and 
 grandson of Josiah, Matt. 1, 11. 12. See 
 1 Chr. 3, 15, 16. 2 K. 24, 8 sq. 2 Chr. 36, 
 8 sq. 2 K. 25, 27. In Matt. 1. c. he is said 
 to be the son of Josiah ; the name of Jehoia 
 kim, icoaKfi/j., being omitted in the gene 
 alogy ; see Gr. Harm. p. 184. 
 
 JT^CTOV?, ou, 6, dat. ou, ace. ovv, Jesus, 
 Heb. y ^ vJeshua, Joshua, (see note below,) 
 pr. n. of three persons in N. T. 
 
 1. Jesws, the Messiah, the Saviour of 
 men, Matt. 1, 1. 16. saepiss. See in la/cw- 
 POS no. 3. -f 
 
 2. Joshua, the successor of Moses and 
 leader of Israel, twice Acts 7, 45. Heb. 4, 8. 
 
 3. Jesus, surnamed Justus, a fellow-la 
 bourer with Paul, once, Col. 4, 11. 
 
 NOTE. The original name of Joshua was 
 SttJl ii (he saves) Hoshea Num. 13, 8. 16. 
 This was changed by Moses into SSil STi 
 (Jehovah his help or salvation), Engl. Vers. 
 Jehoshua Num. 13, 16. 1 Chr. 7,27; else 
 where Joshua. After the exile he is call 
 ed ysittji Jeshua Neh. 8, 17 ; whence the 
 Greek IT)<TOVS. This last form 5iaji differs 
 little from the abstr. nysitth help, deliverance, 
 salvation, and seems to have been so un 
 derstood; since in Matt. 1, 22 the name 
 lya-ovs is said to be given to the Messiah 
 for this reason : avrbs yap <ro>cr TOV \abv 
 avrov OTTO T>V ap-apncov avriov. In like 
 manner in Ecclus. 46, 1 it is said of Joshua : 
 os eyevero Kara TO ovopa avrov peyas 
 eVt cruiTrjpia fK\fKTa>v avrov. 
 
 /tfaz/09, 17. 6v, (iK<o, iKava),) pr. coming 
 to, reaching to. Hence 
 
 1. sufficing, sufficient, e. g. a) Of per 
 sons, sufficient, adequate, able ; so c. irpos 
 TI, 2 Cor. 2,16 irpbs ravra ris IKUVOS , (Pol. 
 23. 17. 4.) With an inf. aor. 2 Cor. 3, 5 ov x 
 OTI IKOVO L eo-fiev . . . Xoyt crcKrSat ri. 2 Tim. 
 
 2, 2. (Jos. Ant. 1.1.1. Xen. (Ec. 5. 8.) 
 Spec, competent, worthy, c. inf. aor. Matt. 
 
 3, 1 1 ov OVK fl[u iKavbs TO. VTT. jSaordercu. 
 
 Mark 1, 7. Luke 3, 16; inf. pres. 1 Cor. 
 
 15, 9 ou et/it iKavbs KoXeio-3ai aTroaroXor. 
 (Hdot. 8. 36 ; absol. Isocr. 260. a.) With 
 iva, Matt. 8, 8. Luke 7, 6. b) Of things, 
 sufficient, enough, 2 Cor. 2, 6 IKOVOV T< 
 ToiovTcp f] fTTiTifiia avrr], where for the adj. 
 neut. see Buttm. 5 129. 8. Luke 22, 38 
 IKOVOV eo-Ti, it is enough, i. e. enough of this, 
 ye understand me not. Sept. for ** Is. 40. 
 
 16. Ex. 36, 5. So Luc. D. Deor. 10. 1 
 Epict. Ench. 24. 4. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 38. 
 c) Neut. TO iKavov, sufficiency, satisfac 
 tion, e. g. TO iKavov Troieiv TIVI, to make satis 
 faction to any one, to satisfy, Mark 15, 15. 
 (Pol. 32.7. 13. App. Punic. 5 74.) Also 
 TO iKavov Xa/3eii/, to take satisfaction or secu- 
 rity, Lat. satis accipere, Acts 17, 9. 
 
 2. abundant, great, much, in Plur. many, 
 e. g. a) Of number or magnitude ; Matt. 
 28, 12 dpyvpia luavd. So o^Xor IKOI/OS 
 a great multitude Mark 10, 46. Luke 7, 12. 
 Acts 11, 24. 26. 19, 26; Xaoy tWo s Acts 
 5, 37 ; also Luke 7, 11. 8, 32. 23, 9. Acts 
 12, 12. 14, 21. 19, 19. 20, 8. 37. 22, 6. 
 
 I Cor. 11, 30. Sept. for an Ez. 1, 24. So 
 TT\rftos IKUVOV Jos. Ant. 5. 7. 4. Pol. 1. 53. 
 8 ; Plur. 1 Mace. 13, 49. Xen. An. 4. 8. 25. 
 b) Of time, iKaval f)p.epai, many days, Acts 
 9, 23. 43. 18, 18. 27, 7 ; iKavos xP ovos t a 
 long time, gen. Acts 27, 9 ; dat. Acts 8, 
 
 II ; ace. 14, 3 ; Plur. ace. xpoVou? iKavovs 
 Luke 20, 9. So e* xpovuv iKav&v of long 
 time Luke 8, 27 ; e IKOVOV id. Luke 23, 8 ; 
 ecp iKavov a long while- Acts 20, 11. So 
 Palaeph. 28. 2. Hdian. 1. 14. 9 ; IK. X p6vos 
 Plato Soph. 234. d. Legg. 736. c. 
 
 iKavorrj<f : TJTOS, fj, (iKavos,) sufficiency, 
 competency, ability, 2 Cor. 3, 5. Lysias 
 Frag. 27. 35. Plato Lys. 215. a. 
 
 u>, f. coaco, (IKUVOS,) to make 
 sufficient, competent, worthy ; c. ace. 2 Cor. 
 3, 6. Col. 1, 12. Pass, to be sufficient, sa 
 tisfied, Sept. for ">*! Mai. 3, 10. Dion. Hal. 
 Ant. 2. 7. 4. 
 
 iK6TT)pia, as, f], (iKfTrjpios, iKfTTjs,^ pr. 
 the suppliant-branch, i. e. the olive-branch 
 which suppliants bore in the hand, e Xm a or 
 pcz/3&o being impl. Hdot. 5. 51. Diod. Sic. 
 
 17. 22, 102. In N. T. supplication, Heb. 
 5, 7 8fTjcrfis KOI iKfrrjpias. So 2 Mace. 9, 
 
 18. Luc. Tox. 48. Pol. 3. 112. 8. 
 
 d8os, fj, moisture, e. g. of the 
 earth, Luke 8, 6. Sept. for ^^ Jer. 17, 8. 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 1. 3. Hdot. 4. 185. Plut 
 Symp. 8. 10. 3 pen. 
 
 IKOVCOV^ ou, TO, Iconium, a large and 
 populous city of Asia Minor, now Konwh 
 
349 
 
 or Koniyeh. It lay near the confines of 
 Phrygia, Lycaonia, and Pisidia, and is reck 
 oned to Phrygia, Xen. An. 1. 2. 19; to 
 Lycaonia, Strabo 12. p. 568. Plin. H. N. 5. 
 25 ; to Pisidia, Amm. Marc. 14. 2. 6 ; pro 
 bably on account of the shifting boundaries 
 of these provinces. See Rosenni. Bibl. 
 Geogr. I. ii. p. 201, 227. Hamilton s Res. 
 in Asia M. II. p. 205 sq. Acts 13, 51. 14, 
 
 1. 19. 21. 16,2. 2 Tim. 3, 11. 
 
 i\apo$, a, 6i>, (tXaoy,) Lat. hilaris, i. e. 
 cheerful, joyous, e. g. iX. SOTTJS 2 Cor. 9, 7. 
 Sept. for I 1 ?? Sl a Prov. 22, 8. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 18. 2. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 12. 
 
 i\apOTr)$, TJTOS, f), (iXapo y,) cheerfulness, 
 alacrity ; Rom. 12, 8 iv i\aporrjTi, i. q. tXa- 
 paiy, cheerfully. Sept. for "("iST Prov. 18, 
 22. Diod. Sic. 16. 11 init. Plut. Agesi. 2. 
 
 iXdcrrco/JLCU, f. ao-o/zat, (i\aos,) a Mid. 
 verb without an Active except .in a late 
 age, see Passow ; to reconcile oneself to any 
 one by expiation, to appease, to propitiate, 
 TOV %t6v Jos. Ant. 6. 6. 4 ; TOVS %fovs Xen. 
 CEc. 5. 20. In N. T. C. ace. ray a/iapri ar, 
 to propitiate AS TO sins, to make propitiation 
 for sins, Heb. 2, 17. (Sept. c. dat. for 
 1B3 Ps. 65, 4. 79, 9.) Pass. aor. l,Impe- 
 rat. i\do~%T]Ti in the pass, sense, be propi 
 tious, be merciful, c. dat. Luke 18, 13 ; 
 comp. Buttm. $113. n. 6. Sept. for nbo 
 Ps. 25, 11. Dan. 9, 19. So Phavorin. JXd- 
 (T^JTJTI rXea>y fJ-oi yevoio. 
 
 iXacrfJiOS, ov, 6. ((Xdo-Ko/iat.) propitiation, 
 expiation, for concr. a propitiator, 1 John 2, 
 
 2. 4, 10. Sept. pr. for Sin^O Ps. 130, 4 ; 
 d nBS Num. 5, 8; rxan Ez. 44, 27. 
 2 Mace. 3, 33. Plut. Solon 12 pen. 
 
 l\aa"TY]pio$, a, ov, (tXdo-Ko/iat,) propi 
 tiatory, expiatory, e. g. IX. p.v^p.a Jos. Ant. 
 16. 7. 1. In N. T. only Neut. TO IX a 0-7-17- 
 p i o v as Subst. 
 
 1. an expiatory sacrifice, propitiation; 
 Rom. 3, 25 ov Trpoe Srro 6 3eoy iXaorqpioj/ 
 KT\. Comp. Heb. 9, 15. 26. 1 Cor. 5, 7. 
 Eph. 5, 2. Dion Chrysost. Orat. 11. 1. 
 p. 355 ed. Reisk. tXacrrrjpiov Amatol rfj 
 ASTjj/a Trj iXtdSi. Hesych. iXao-TTjpiov Ka- 
 Sdpcrioi , ^vcriaa-TTjpiov. 
 
 2. From the Sept. the mercy-seat, Heb. 
 9, 5 ; pr. the lid or cover of the ark, over 
 which appeared 17 Sda TOU xvplov Ex. 25, 
 17-22 ; and on which the high priest once 
 a year sprinkled the blood of an expiatory 
 victim, Lev. 16, 13-16. Heb. niB3, Sept. 
 
 i/, Ex. Lev. 11. cc. see Heb. Lex. 
 
 ), 6, 17, adj. (Att. for tXaoy.) ap 
 peased, propitious, of the gods, Xen. Cyr. 
 
 IflUTiOV 
 
 2. 1. 1 ; of men, kindly, cheerful, JEL V. H. 
 2. 10. In N. T. of God, propitious, merci 
 ful, c. dat. Heb. 8, 12 tXecor to-opai rais 
 ddiiciais i. e. I will pardon them. Sept. 
 tXfo>? elfti for nbo Jer. 31, 34. 36. So c. 
 dat. of pers. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 3. From the 
 Heb. iXewy a 01 sc. eoroj 6 3eo s, God be 
 merciful to thee, God forgive thee, i. q. p.f] 
 yfvoiTo, be it far from thee ! as an excla 
 mation of aversion, Matt. 16, 22. Sept. for 
 b nbibn 2 Sam. 20, 20. 23, 17. 1 Chr. 
 11,19. So 1 Mace. 2, 21. 
 
 I\\,vpiKov, ov, TO, Illyricum, now 11- 
 lyria, a country of Europe on the eastern 
 shore of the Adriatic gulf, north of Epirus 
 and west of Macedonia. It was a province 
 of the Roman empire ; and Dalmatia formed 
 a part of it. Rom. 15, 19. 
 
 t/ia9; avros, 6, a thong, strap, of leather, 
 genr. Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 32. In N. T. spec. 
 
 1. a shoe-latchet, the thong by which a 
 shoe or sandal was fastened to the foot, 
 Mark 1, 7. Luke 3, 16. John 1, 27. Sept. 
 for tpfo Is. 50, 27. Plut. Symp. 4. 2. 3. 
 Xen. An . 4. 5. 14. 
 
 2. Plur. the thongs, i. q. a whip, a scourge, 
 made of leather thongs, and often having 
 two or more lashes ; Acts 22, 25 a>s 8e 
 irpofreivav avrbv rols tyxacri, as they extend 
 ed him for (before) the scourge; see below. 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Flagrum, Flagellurn ; 
 comp. horribile flagellum Hor. Sat. 1. 3. 
 119. So Artemid. 2. 53 altl 8e dycftbv gv- 
 \ois T) X f P TratfcrSat, Trovrjpbv 8e i/idcri. 
 Plut. Cato Maj. 21. Dem. 402. ult. The 
 person to be scourged was sometimes sus 
 pended with weights at his feet ; or other 
 wise was bound with thongs to a post or the 
 like ; see Adam s Rom. Antt. p. 38, 272. 
 Jos. de Mace. 9. 1 1 Siapprjgavrfs TOV ^irwva, 
 0~if8r)<rav ray %fipas avTov Kal TOVS j3pa%iovas 
 ip-aaiv tKGTf pco3ei/ <uy Se Tvirrovres Tols (J.6.- 
 O-TI^IV eKOTriacrav KT\. Hence some prefer 
 to render in Acts 1. c. as they extended him 
 with thongs. But in this way the force of 
 irpo in TrpofTeivav is lost ; while also TOIS 
 
 with the art. is definite. 
 
 , f. urco, (1/j.aTiov, ) to clothe; 
 Pass. perf. part. IfmTia-^evos, clothed, Mark 
 5,15. Luke 8, 35. Suid. f/iartij/ntVor 1/id- 
 ria evdfSvp.fVO :. 
 
 IflttTLOV, ov, TO, (lfJ.a, fl/ia. fvw/j.1,) a 
 garment, e. g. 
 
 1. Genr. any garment, Matt. 9, 16 eVt 
 i/j.aTi<*> TraXmw. 11, 8. Mark 2, 21. Luke 5, 
 36. 7, 25. Heb. 1, 11. al. Plur. TO. >a- 
 T/a, the garments, clothing, raiment, includ 
 ing the outer and inner garment, mantle 
 
350 
 
 ami tunic ; Matt. 17, 2 TO 8e ludna auroO 
 f yevero Xevxa. 24, 18. 27, 31. 35. Mark 
 15, 24. James 5, 2. Rev. 4, 4. al. So in 
 the phrase to rend the clothes, Matt. 26, 65. 
 Acts 14, 14. 16, 22. 22, 23; see in 8iap- 
 prj-yvv/ju. Sept. Sing, for iaa Ps. 102, 27. 
 Is. 50, 9. Plur. Gen. 27, 27. " 2 Sam. 1, 2. 
 
 3, 31. Luc. Dial. Meretr. 8. 1. ^Eschin. 
 26. 14. Xen. An. 7. 5. 5. 
 
 2. Spec, the outer garment, mantle, pal 
 lium, different from the tunic or xir&v and 
 worn over it ; comp. Acts 9, 39. JEL V. H. 
 
 4. 22. Diod. Sic. 4. 38 init. It was a large 
 piece of woollen cloth, nearly square, which 
 was wrapped around the body or fastened 
 about the shoulders, and served also to wrap 
 oneself in at night ; hence it might not be 
 taken by a creditor, Ex. 22, 26. 27 ; see 
 Jahn s Archseol. J 122. Diet, of Antt. art. 
 Pallium. Miiller Arch. d. Kunst 337. 
 So Matt. 9, 20. 21. 14, 36. John 19, 2. 
 Acts 12, 8. al. Plur. ra Iparia, outer 
 garments, which were often laid aside, Acts 
 
 7, 58. 22, 20. John 13, 4. 12. Matt. 21, 7. 
 
 8. al. Sept. for rtato and fiabiC Ex. 22, 
 26. 27. Is. 3, 6. 7. Luc. D. Mort. 10. 11. 
 Palaeph. 52. 6. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 5. + 
 
 C, 6, (t/Lwm fw,) clothing, 
 raiment, i.e. genr. clothes, garments, Luke 
 7, 25 01 ev ijuaricryio) eV8da> inrdp^ovrfs. 
 9, 29 comp. Mark 9, 3. Acts 20, 33. 1 Tim. 
 2, 9. So Matt. 27, 35 et John 19,24 quoted 
 from Ps. 22, 19 where Sept. for ttJwJj; 
 Sept. also for fii iM 1 K. 22, 30. 2 K. 7, 8. 
 Pol. 6. 15. 4. Plut. Alex. M. 39 pen. 
 
 IfJtetpto and IjJieipofiaL depon. (J^fpos,) 
 a defective verb, see Passow in voc. Buttm. 
 Ausf. Sprachl. 1 14 ; to long for, to have a 
 strong affection for ; c. gen. 1 Thess. 2, 8 
 Rec. Ipfipofjifvoi VIJL)V. Others 6p.fip6p.fvoi 
 q. v. Sept. for nan Job 3, 21. So c. gen. 
 Horn. Od. 1. 41. Act. Pol. 1. 66. 8. Dem. 
 422. 6. Plato Crat. 418. c. 
 
 iva, that, a particle final and demonstra 
 tive ; construed usually with the Subjunc 
 tive, seldom with the Optative, often with 
 the Indicative ; pr. TeXiKoJj or final, as 
 marking the end or purpose for or on ac 
 count of which any thing is done, TO THE 
 END THAT, IN OKDHK. THAT it might or may 
 be so and so ; but also eK/3art/cwy, ecbatic, 
 as marking simply the event, result, upshot 
 of an action, that in which the action ter 
 minates, so THAT it was, is, will be so and 
 so. Of late some writers have denied this 
 ecbatic use of iva, e. g. Fritzsche Comm. 
 iti Matt. p. 836. Beyer in Winer s Neue 
 
 krit. Journ. IV. 418. Lehmann ad Luclan, 
 T. I. p. 71. Meyer and De Wette on Matt. 
 1, 22. On the other hand it has been main 
 tained by Steudel in Bengel s Neue Archiv 
 IV. p. 504 sq. Ewald Apoc. p. 233 ; and 
 especially by J. A. H. Tittmann De usu 
 Particularum in N. T. subjoined to his 
 work De Synon. in N. T. Lib. II. Lips. 
 1832. p. 32 sq. English in Bibl. Repos. for 
 Jan. 1835. See genr. Matth. 620. Kiih- 
 ner 330 ; Ausf. Gr. $ 772-774. Herm. ad 
 Vig. p. 847 sq. p. 556 sq. Winer Gr. ed. 5. 
 5 42. b. p. 332. 5 57. p. 537. That the ec 
 batic use has sometimes been pressed too 
 far, there can be no doubt ; still, to deny it 
 altogether is to go to an opposite extreme. 
 The two significations are sometimes near 
 ly related ; and the distinction may then be 
 said to consist mainly in a different mode 
 of conception. 
 
 I. Pr. TeXtKws, as marking the final end 
 or purpose, to the end that, in order that ; 
 and with a negat. t va prj,in order that not, 
 lest. 
 
 1 . With the SUBJUNCTIVE : a) Preceded 
 by the present, or. an aorist of any mood ex 
 cept the Indicative, or by the perfect in a 
 present sense, John 6, 38. Here the Sub- 
 junct. marks what it is supposed will really 
 take place ; comp. Winer 42. b. p. 333. 
 Matth. 518. Herm. ad Vig. p. 791, 848. 
 So Matt. 9, 6 Iva 5 e t tS^re . . . Tore Xeyet, to 
 the end that ye may know, comp. Mark 2, 10 
 et Luke 5, 24. Matt. 18, 16. 19, 16. Luke 
 8, 10. 12, u6. John.l, 7 OVTOS ^X3ei> cis 
 paprvpiav, "iva p.aprvprjcrr] ntpi KT\. 5, 34 
 ravra \fya>, Iva \jp,fls crwS^re. 6, 38 Kara- 
 fK TOV ovpavov, ovx Iva TTOIW TO 3e- 
 TO (uov. 11, 4. 17, 21 "iva 6 Kocrpos 
 va-rj. Acts 1C, 30. Rom. 1, 11. 1 Cor. 
 9,12. 2Cor.4,7. 10. 11. Gal. 6, 13. James 
 4, 3. al. saep. Neg. iva pr] Luke 8, 12. 
 John 7, 23. Rom. 11, 25. al. Horn. Od. 2. 
 111. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 9. 
 
 b) Preceded by the Imperative, the Sub- 
 junct. signifying as in lett. a. E. g. after 
 an Imper. pres. Luke 21, 36 aypvirveire . . . 
 Iva Kara^Lca^rJTe KT\. John 7, 3. 1 Cor. 7, 
 5 bis. Eph. 4, 28. 6, 3. 1 Tim. 5, 7. al. So 
 iva pr) Matt. 7, 1. John 5, 14. 1 Cor. 11, 
 34. al. After an Imper. aor. Matt. 14, 15 
 a7roXvcroi> roiis o^Xovs, Iva aTreXSocrf s dyo- 
 pdaao-iv KT\. Mark 15, 32. Luke 16, 9. 
 1 Cor. 3, 18. Eph. 6, 13. al. So "iva pr} 
 Matt. 17, 27. John 4, 15. Heb. 12, 13. al. 
 Further, after an exhortation, e. g. ayw/ift 
 Mark 1, 38; also Luke 20, 14. Rom. 3, 8. 
 After an Imperat. implied Matt. 26, 5. John 
 1, 22. 1 Pet. 4, 11. Sept. for -ftm}> Josh. 
 
iva 
 
 35] 
 
 4, 6. Horn. Od. 1. 302. ib. 5. 91. Pint. Mor. 
 II. p. 26. 
 
 c) Preceded by the future, the Subjunct. 
 signifying as in lett. a. Luke 16, 4 eyvav rl 
 TTOITJCTW, iva dt^cavrai p.e KT\. 1 Cor. 16, 6. 
 2 Cor. 12, 9. Eph. 6, 21. 2 Thess. 2, 12. al. 
 Interrog. Matt. 19, 16. John 6, 5. Also 
 Iva prj Luke 18, 5. Horn. Od. 2. 307; 
 comp. Iva fiTf Luc. de Dom. 21. 
 
 d) Preceded by a past tense ; here the 
 Subjunct. strictly stands instead of the Opt. 
 and marks an action which in itself or its 
 consequences is still continued, or which 
 the speaker regards as certain ; comp. Wi 
 ner J 42. b. p. 333, 334. Matth. 518. 1. 
 Herm. ad Vig. p. 848. a) Genr. Mark 
 3, 14 iroir)o-e ScoSeKa, Iva 3)(ri per avrov 
 Kal iva KT\. Luke 1,4 eSot . . . trot ypd^ai, 
 iva fniyvcas KT\. Matt. 12, 10. John 1, 31. 
 
 3, 16. 17. 8, 6. Acts 27, 42. Rom. 1, 13. 
 1 Cor. 1, 27. 28. 2 Cor. 2, 4. Gal. 1, 16. 2, 
 
 4. 5. Heb. 2, 14. 17. al. saep. Neg. 1 va p.r] 
 1 Cor. 12, 25. Eph. 2, 9. Heb. 11,28. El- 
 liptically, John 1, 8 dXX [^X3ei>] "iva KT\. 
 9. 3 aXX [rovro eyeveTo] Iva (pave potty KT\. 
 So Horn. II. 1. 203. Od. 3. 77. Hdian. 8. 5. 
 
 11. |3) In simple narrative, where Thu- 
 cydides and later writers employ also the 
 Subjunct. Winer 1. c. Matth. 5 518. p. 996. 
 Matt. 27, 26 irja-ovv Tra/j/Soo/cez/, "iva crrav- 
 pu>%fj. Mark 6, 41 Kal e St Sov rois /iaStyraly, 
 iva TrapaSaxriv avrois. 9, 18. 22. 10, 13. 
 Luke 19, 4 dWjSr; tin. o~VKouopeav, Iva i8rj 
 OVTOV. v. 15. John 1, 19. al. saep. Neg. 
 iva fir, John 18,28. 19,31. So^El.V.H. 
 
 12. 3, 30. Hdot. 1. 29. 
 
 2. With the OPTATIVE, preceded by the 
 present, where purpose or intent is ex 
 pressed ; see Passow iva no. 2. Here are 
 often referred Eph. 1, 17 and 3, 16 ; where 
 however Iva does not mark purpose, but 
 belongs under III. 1. b, below; where see. 
 Winer 1 42. p. 336. 
 
 3. With the INDICATIVE, but in N. T. 
 only the Indie, future and present, and not 
 with a past tense as often in classic writers ; 
 see Matth. 5 519. Herm. ad Vig. p. 848. 
 Passow in Iva no. 3. 
 
 a) With an Indie, future, in the same 
 sense as the Subjunctive in no. 1. a, above, 
 and preceded only by the present. 1 Cor. 
 13,3 eav irapa&at TO 0-up.a pov iva KauSijcro/iai 
 or xav Srjo-wp.ai , where Kav^rjo-cop.ai, as also 
 1 Pet. 3,1 Iva... Kcp8r)%ri<ruvTai, is a corrupt 
 form of the later Greek, as if of a future Sub 
 junctive, Winer $ 13. I.e. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
 72J . Also \v\thfut. and Sub/, together, Rev. 
 22, 14 Iva o~Tai rj t^ovcria avTcav . . . KOI do~- 
 eA2<BcriJ tls rfjv iroXiv. Eph. 6, 3 iva ev voi 
 
 yfvr]Tai, Kal 6077 p-uKpoxpovios, where how 
 ever some take evy independently of Iva, 
 i. e. and tliou shall live long, etc. Winer 
 5 42. p. 335. Act. Thorn. }} 7, 37, 39, 45 ; 
 comp. Thilo ad p. 61. Epiphan. II. p. 332. 
 b. Classic writers here oftener use onus, 
 Winer $ 42. p. 335. 
 
 b) With the Indie, present, in the same 
 sense, preceded by the present ; twice, Gal. 
 4, 17 {rjXovcriv vp.as . . . iva avTovs r]\ovr(. 
 1 Cor. 4, 6 Iva uf, (pvo-iovvZe. This is a 
 corruption of the later age, not found in 
 classic Greek, Winer 1. c. Herm. ad Vig. p. 
 849. Geopon. 10. 48. 3 "iva p.fj fls TOVTO 
 do~xoh.ovvTai. Himer. 15. 3. 
 
 II. Spec. eK/SariKwy, ecbatic, as marking 
 simply the event, result, upshot of an action, 
 so that, so as that, in N. T. only with the 
 SUBJUNCTIVE implying something which ac 
 tually takes place ; in classic writers oftener 
 with the Indie, of a past tense ; Tittmann 
 1. c. p. 37. See note below. 
 
 a) Preceded by the present ; Luke 22, 30 
 Kal 8iarfaffj.ai vp.lv . . . pacriKtiav, iva e crSi^re 
 Kal TvivrjTe eirl rrjs Tpaire^s uov KrX. here 
 the feasting is not the end or purpose of the 
 kingdom to be given, but a result or conse 
 quence. John 6, 7 apToi OVK dpKovcriv av- 
 TOIS, "iva CKacrros avru>v /3pa^u TI \d3rj. 
 Mark 4, 12 et Luke 8, 10, comp. Matt. 13. 
 13 where it is OTI. Rom. 3, 19 6 vop.os rols 
 ev TO> v6p.a> XaXet, iva irdv crro/ia (ppayf/. 15, 
 6. Rev. 14, 13 Kal, Xe yet TO irvevfia, "iva dva- 
 Travo-cavTai KT\. comp. Winer $ 57. p. 542. 
 Negat. i va fir,, Gal. 5, 17 ravra 8t dXXij- 
 Xoir dvriKdrai, Iva p,jj cl av SeX^re, ravra 
 TTOirjre. Acts 2, 25 on eV 8(icov p.ov fcrriv, 
 "iva p.rj craXev3a, quoted from Sept. Ps. 16, 8 
 where there is no particle in the Heb. 
 Sept. iva orav for 153 Josh. 4, 6 ; for pob 
 Jer. 44, 8. Horn. Od. 13. 157. Jos. B. J*. V. 
 3. 10 (p. 276 ult. ed. Haverc.) irpos TOO-OV- 
 TOV fJKOpev <rvfj.(popu>v, "iva rjp.as f\cf]cra>cri 
 Kal iro\(uioi. Marc. Antonin. 11. 3 TO 8e 
 fToip.ov TOVTO, Iva diro l8iKrjs /cpt trecos fpX ?" 
 rat, p.T, Kara \lfi\rjv Trapara^iv KT\. Sext. 
 Empir. Pyrrh. HI. 50 fnip-iywrai TO 
 
 navrl fitpei TOV v8aTos, Kal TrapfK 
 
 avT<a oXw, Iva OVTMS r, Kpdcris ytvrjTai. Just. 
 
 Mart. p. 508. See Tittm. 1. c. p. 39. 
 
 b) Preceded by the Imperative ; Acts 8, 
 19 Sore Kup.ol rr)V f^ovcriav Tavrrjv, iva... 
 \ap.pdvrj KT\. James 1,4. 1 Pet. 4, 13. 
 Aristoph. Nub. 58 8(vp ?X3 "iva K\drjs. 
 Comp. Tittm. 1. c. p. 37. 
 
 c) Preceded by the future ; John 5, 20 
 p.iova TOVTO>V 8fifi avTw fpya. "iva vp.fls 
 Savud^riTf. Luke 11, 50 e avTatv dnoKTe- 
 vovari Kal e /cStco^ovcrit , iva e<riTrfiij TO ai^a 
 
iva 
 
 352 
 
 irdvrcov -luiv Trpocp. John 16, 24. Phil. 1, 26. 
 al. Marc. Antonin. 7. 25 irdvra oo-a opas 
 /ifra/3aXei r) ra oXa SioiKoucra (pvcris . . . Iva 
 aii vfapos 77 6 Koa-p-os. Just. Mart, p. 504 
 011% OVTCHS forai crov TO BVVUTOV, iva p.ov KI- 
 VTjo-ys Ttjv Trpoaipecriv. Tittmann 1. c. 
 
 d) Preceded by a past tense ; comp. above 
 in I. 1. d. John 9, 2 ris rjp,apTfv . . .Iva 
 Tv(p\bs jfvvrfifi; Rom. 5, 20. 11, 11 p.rj 
 (TTTaicraV) "iva Trecraxri; V. 31. So Aristoph. 
 Vesp. 311, 312. Marc. Antonin. 2. 11 77 
 ro>v okajv (f)v<ris ovre TrapelBev ovre rjaapTfv 
 . . . iva ra aya3a KOI TO. KUKCI ITT KTTJS rois re 
 dyaSiots Kal rois KaKoly jrf(pvpu(va>s crvuflai- 
 vy. Agath. Ep. 74 (Anthol. Gr. IV. p. 31) 
 ov ris d\oirjTT]pas I8flv TfT\r]Kfv o86vras vp.e- 
 rtpovs, iva (rois ev peydpois Tre\do~r]. Here 
 belongs the frequent phrase iva TrXrjpco- 
 3J? 17 ypa(pf], TO prj^ev, or the like, used as a 
 formula of quotation, and implying that 
 something took place, not in order that a pro 
 phecy might be fulfilled, but so that it was 
 fulfilled ; not in order TO MAKE the event 
 correspond to the prophecy, but so that the 
 event WOULD AND DID correspond to the 
 prophecy; comp. Tittm. 1. c. p. 43, 44. 
 Matt. 1, 22 TOVTO 8e o\ov yeyovtv, iva TrX?;- 
 owSJ; ro prfiev. 2, 15. 4, 14. 21, 4. 26, 56. 
 27, 35. John 12, 38. 15, 25. 17, 12. 19, 
 36. With a past tense implied, Mark 14, 
 49. John 13, 18. 18, 9. 32. 19, 24. See 
 in 7r\rjp6a>. 
 
 NOTE. Passages like the above would 
 seem to place the ecbatic use of iva in the 
 N. T. beyond reasonable doubt. Those 
 who urge in all cases the telic use, are con 
 strained to admit that the supposed purpose 
 is often not that of the subject of the clause, 
 but the eternal purpose of God ; e. g. Rom. 
 11,11 fir} eTTTaicraV) Iva Tretraxri. But this is 
 to introduce a new element of interpreta 
 tion, and destroy the force of language. In 
 Iva Tr\rjp(o^fj, in like manner, it is said 
 that Iva is telic ; since the fulfilment must 
 take place (Acts 1, 16) in accordance with 
 the divine plan ; the later event having been 
 as it were fixed and predestined by the ear 
 lier prophecy or declaration ; see De Wette 
 on Matt. 1, 22. But even could this view 
 be admitted (unnecessarily) in the case of 
 direct prophecy ; yet it has no bearing upon 
 the more frequent instances of historical or 
 typical parallel in which the phrase occurs ; 
 e. g. Matt. 2, 15. John 18, 32. 19, 36. 
 Comp. contra, Winer $ 57. p. 537. 
 
 III. In the later Greek iva came to be 
 used after various classes of words, not as 
 marking either purpose or event, but sini- 
 nly as a demonstrative particle, like Engl. 
 
 that, i. e. merely pointing out that to which 
 the preceding words refer, or introducing 
 some thing already implied in the preceding 
 words. In this way Iva with the Subjunct. 
 was often employed (and twice with the 
 Opt.) where earlier writers used the Infini 
 tive or other particles, e. g. 
 
 1. Instead of the construction with the 
 Infinitive, originally perhaps because the 
 Infin. also often implies purpose ; comp. 
 Buttm. ^ 140. 3. Matth. 5 531. 1. Thus 
 
 a) After words and phrases implying 
 command and the like, as in Engl. I com 
 mand that you do it, for, I command you 
 to do it ; comp. Matth. 1. c. Winer 45. 2. 
 a. 45. 9. a ; comp. 5 44. 4. Tittm. 1. c. p. 
 46 sq. E. g. eVre XXo/wu, Mark 13, 34 TO> 
 Svpcupo) eVeret Xaro, iva ypyyopf). John 11, 
 57 8f8a>Keio-av evTo\r]v, "iva KT\. 13, 34. 
 Acts 17, 15 Xa/3oVrey (VToXrjv, Iva KT\. So 
 .tva after dyyapeva) Matt. 27, 32 ; aTrayyeXXw 
 Matt. 28, 10 ; ciTroo-reXXw Acts 16, 36 ; ypd- 
 <pu Mark 12, 19 ; 8ia<rreXXo/*ai Mark 13, 34 ; 
 fmov Matt. 4, 3. Mark 3, 9. Rev. 6, 1 1 
 (c. inf. Mark 5, 43. 10, 49. Luke 12, 13) ; 
 ft-opicifa Matt. 26, 63 ; eVm/idoo Matt. 12, 
 16. Mark 3, 12; Xe yca Acts 19, 4. John 
 13, 29. 1 John 5, 16; Trapayye XXw Mark 
 6, 8 (c. inf. Mark 8, 6) ; (rvvrtifuai 
 John 9, 22. So also e8o3?; avTols "iva 
 Rev. 9, 5; OVK fjfpiev iva Mark 11, 16. 
 With some word of exhortation implied 
 Eph. 5, 33. Test. XII Patr. p. 543, 671 
 evTf\\ouai iva. p. 529 Trpoo-Tao-a-fi Iva. An 
 thol. Gr. I. p. 3 eirre Iva. Arr. Epict. 4. .11. 
 29 iwreXSe KOI X L PV SiaXeyov, tv ev /3op/3op< 
 P.TJ KvXirjTai. 
 
 b) After verbs of entreating, persuading, 
 and the like ; where there is a slighter 
 trace of purpose ; see Winer 45. 9. b. 
 Matth. 1. c. Tittm. 1. c. E. g. Stofjuu, Luke 
 
 9, 40 Km f8fr)%riv TU>V na SrjTwv crov iva fitBd- 
 Xao-iv avro. 22, 32. (So c. inf. 2 Cor. 8, 4. 
 
 10, 2.) After 8iap.apTvpop.ai 1 Tim. 5, 21 ; 
 epwraca Mark 7, 26. Luke 7, 36. John 17, 
 15 bis. al. jrapaKaXect Matt. 14, 36. Mark 5, 
 10. Luke 8, 31. 32. al. Trpoo-fvxop.ai Matt. 
 24, 20 ; also Rom. 15, 31. 32. (So evxouai 
 c. inf. 2 Cor. 13, 7.) So 8eop.ai c: "iva 1 Esdr. 
 4,46. Jos. Ant. 12. 3. 1, 2. Dion. Hal. II. 
 p. 666 ; c. infin. 3 Mace. 1, 16. Jos. Ant. 
 9. 14. 3. Dion. Hal. Ant. 8. 46 ; c. OTTWS 
 Thuc. 5. 36. Hdot. 9. 117 ; jrapaKaXw iva 
 Clmriton. 3. 1. Also after n-ei 3 to Matt. 27, 
 20, where Greek writers usually put a>s or 
 the infin. see Matth. 531. n. 1. 5 533. 3. 
 Twice iva after words of entreaty is fol 
 lowed by the OFT. as the modus optandi ; 
 Eph. 1, 17 et 3, 16 "iva 6 3e6s 8<arj vp.1v. Bui 
 
353 
 
 In 3, 16 Lachmann reads . See Winer 
 542. 6. 1 ult. p. 336. 
 
 c) After verbs of desire, and the like ; 
 eomp. as above, and Winer $ 45. 9. c. E. g. 
 SeXco, Matt. 7, 12 irdvra oo~a av Se X^re Iva 
 iroioHTiv vp.1v KT\. Mark 6, 25. Luke 6, 
 31. 18, 41. John 17, 24. al. So 2e Xr;/xa 
 fo-ri Iva, Matt. 18, 14. John 6, 39. 40. 
 1 Cor. 16, 12; ^rtlrat iva 1 Cor. 4, 2. 
 With Se Xtu or the like impl. Gal. 2, 10. 
 So Se Xco iva Test. XII Patr. p. 704. Arr. 
 Epict. 1. 18. 14. Also /SouXfrm iva, Dion. 
 Hal. de Comp. Verb. p. 296 sq. and eVi3u- 
 p.flv Iva, Teles ap. Stob. 95. p. 524. Comp. 
 Schaefer Melet. p. 121. 
 
 d) After n-oiew in the sense to cause, 
 where in earlier Greek the infin. is used, 
 Matth. 5 531. 1. Herm. ad Vig. p. 759 ; or 
 also OTTCOJ Hdot. 1. 209. ib. 5. 109. In this 
 use of Iva there lies perhaps a trace of its 
 ecbatic power. John 1 1 , 37 OVK e8waru ov- 
 TOS Troirjaai, "iva Kal OVTOS p-fj inro^dvrj ; Col. 
 4, 16. So in an attraction, Rev. 3, 9. 13, 
 12. 15. 16 ; comp. Buttm. $ 151. I. 6. In 
 Rev. 3, 9 the future also is joined with the 
 Subj. after iva. 
 
 e) After words implying fitness, suffi 
 ciency, need, and the like ; where also there 
 is perhaps a trace of ecbatic power ; e. g. 
 dios, John 1 , 27 eyo> OVK agio s flp.i Iva \v- 
 vu> KT\. After itcavos Matt. 8, 8. Luke 7, 
 6 ; dpKfTos Matt. 10, 25 ; %peiav ex flv " iva 
 John 2, 25. 16, 30. TJohn 2, 27. Rev. 21, 
 23. For the construction of all these with 
 an infin. see Matth. $ 533. 3, also in dior, 
 iKavos, ex w no - 2- d. /3. Abo after impers. 
 trvp.<pep(i, Matt. 5, 29 <rvp.(p. yap crot, iva 
 dTroXrjTai ev KT\. V. 30. 18, 6. John 11,50. 
 16, 7 ; c. infin. see in o-up.(pepco. After 
 Xuo-n-fXfZ Luke 17, 2 ; c. infin. Tob. 3, 6. 
 Comp. Matth. 532. d. 
 
 f) After a word or phrase followed by a 
 defining or explanatory clause, this latter is 
 sometimes introduced by Iva, where the 
 classic construction would be with the infin. 
 see Matth. 532. d. comp. $ 280. E. g. 
 John 4, 34 tp.bv (3p<ap.d e<m, Iva TTOICO TO 
 %e\r)p.a TOV Trep.\lsavTos p-f. John 18, 39 eerri 
 8e crwrfifia i>p.1v, Iva eva vp.lv aTroXvcra}. 
 1 Cor. 4, 3 e /ioi fls eXa^tcrrdi tcrriv, iva 
 v(f) vp.>v dvaKp&S). Espec. after OVTOS, 
 avTrj, TOVTO, used emphatically or &IKTIKU>S 
 in reference to a following clause ; comp. 
 Winer 5 45 pen. p. 394. Luke 1, 43 Trfotv 
 p.oi TOVTO, iva eX3?7 ?; p->]TT)p r. AC. Trpoy p.f ; 
 more usual in John e. g. 6, 29 TOVTO e ori TO 
 (pyov TOii 3eoO, Iva Tno-Tfvo-rjrf. v. 39 TOVTO 
 de ecrTi TO %(\rip.a . . . Iva nuv KT\. 17, 3. 
 1 John 3, 11. 23. 4, 21. 2 John 6. (Test. 
 
 23 
 
 XII Patr. p. 606.) So eV TOVTCB "iva, 1 John 
 4, 17. John 15, 8 ev TOUTW e do^aa-Sj; 6 jra- 
 Tijp, Iva icapirbv (peprjTf, i. q. classic tv TW 
 va. Kapirbv cpfpeiv. Also John 15, 1J p.f[- 
 ova TavTrjs uydnrjv ov8f\s X l > ^ va Tis **!! 
 KT\. 3 John 4. So with OVTO? or ev TOVTW 
 implied, 1 Cor. 9, 18 TIS ovv p.oi eo-riv 6 
 p.io-%6s ; [OVTOS V. fv TOUTW] Iva KT\. 
 Comp. Wisd. 13,9 et yap TOCTOVTOV io~xvo-av 
 flSfvat, iva KT\. Arr. Epict. 2. 1 . 1 d aX^Ser 
 e o~Tt ToSe, Iva rj KT\. 
 
 2. Instead of OTTWJ, after verbs of taking 
 care, endeavouring, and the like, Matth. 
 ^ 531. n. 1, 2. ^ 623. 2; comp. 519. E.g. 
 j3\eTTiv, 1 Cor. 16, 10 /3XeVeTf, Iva d(po^o)s 
 ytvTjTai. Col. 4, 17. 2 John 8 ; ^Xo w 1 Cor. 
 14, 1 ; r)T(a> 1 Cor. 14, 12 ; p.epip,vda> 1 Cor. 
 
 7, 34 ; (pvXdo-o-ecr^e Iva p.rj 2 Pet. 3, 17. 
 So with a verb of this kind implied, 2 Cor. 
 
 8, 7. Comp. o-Trov8r]v e^co with OTTCOS and 
 iva Dion. Hal. de Comp. Verb. p. 398 ; &- 
 TC IV O7r<ar Luc. de Merc. Cond. 41. 
 
 3. Instead of 6Yt, e. g. after ypdcpa, Mark 
 
 9, 12 Kal TJ-UJS yeypa-rrTai . . . "iva TroXXu 7ra3?; 
 KT\. So c. OTI Rom. 4, 23. 1 Cor. 9, 10. 
 Xen. An. 2. 3. 1. Comp. Winer $57. p. 
 542. Prob. to be so taken after dyaXXtaw, 
 John 8, 56 ^yaXXtaeraTO, "iva iSrj TTJV fjp.pav 
 TTjv f p,r]v. Comp. the frequent construction 
 Xaipo) OTI in N. T. Luke 10, 20. John 11, 
 15. al. also Sept. Ex. 4, 31. 
 
 4. Of time, but only in John, after oSpa 
 instead of the more usual 6Ve or <-V rj. John 
 12, 23 f\Tj\v%tv T] &pa, iva 8oao-%fj 6 vibs 
 TOV di/SpwTrov. 13, 1. 16, 2. 32. So in 
 Engl. the hour is come THAT the son of man 
 should be glorified, for when or in which. 
 With ST John 4, 21. 23. 5, 25 ; eV rj 5, 28, 
 Or we may take iva here as ecbatic, so 
 thai he shall be glorified ; comp. Tittm. 1. c. 
 p. 49 sq. Winer $ 45. p. 394. Others regard 
 Iva here as an adverb of place, used trop. of 
 time, like Engl. wherein; comp. Aristoph. 
 Nub. 1235. Horn. Od. 6. 27. Tittm. 1. c. 
 Passow iva B. -f- 
 
 ivari, or iva TI, as an interrog. parti 
 cle, elliptically for Iva T I yevrjTai, in order 
 that what may take place ? i. q. to what 
 end? why? wherefore? Buttm. 149. m. 2. 
 Winer 25. 1 ult. Herm. ad Vig. p. 847. 
 Matt. 9, 4 ivaTi vp.f is fv%vp.( itrSe irovrjpd ; 
 27, 46. Luke 13, 7. Acts 4, 25. 7, 26 
 1 Cor. 10, 29. Sept. for nsab p s . 2, 1 
 nc-br Num. 22, 32. Aristoph. Eccles. 
 718. Arr. Epict. 1. 24. Plato Apol. Soc. 14. 
 p. 26. c. 
 
 loTnrrj, r)s, T), Joppa, so in N. T. and 
 Josephus, in classic writers IWTTTDJ, Heb. 
 
IopSdv?]$ 
 
 354 
 
 ^ or IS? Japlio, now Jafa, Yafa, a cele 
 brated and very ancient city and port of Pa 
 lestine on the Mediterranean, about W. N. W. 
 of Jerusalem. Acts 9, 36. 38. 42. 43. 10, 
 5. 8. 23. 32. 11, 6. 13. Sept. Josh. 19,46. 
 Jos. B. J. 1. 20. 3. Strabo 16. 2. 28. p. 759. 
 See Reland Falsest, p. 864. Rosenm. Bibl. 
 Geogr. II. ii. p. 339. 
 
 lopSdvys, ov, 6, Jordan, Heb. TH^ 
 (the flowing), now esh-SherVah, the water 
 ing-place, the celebrated river of Palestine. 
 Its remotest perennial source is a large 
 fountain near H&sbeiya in the valley west 
 of Mount Harmon ; but it is usually descri 
 bed as rising from two far more copious 
 fountains in the vicinity of Banias, the an 
 cient Paneas or Caesarea-Philippi, at the 
 southeastern base of the same mountain. 
 The streams very soon enter the vast rnarsh 
 on the north of the lake Huleh, the ancient 
 Merom of Scripture (Josh. 11, 5. 7), and 
 Samochonitis of Josephus (Ant. 5. 5. 1) ; 
 the lower end of which lake is some twelve 
 miles from Banias. Thence the river runs 
 through a narrow and rocky ravine, with a 
 very rapid descent, about eight miles to the 
 lake of Tiberias ; see art. Tfvvr)<rapeT. From 
 the southern end of this lake in Lat. 32 
 42 2l" N. the Jordan flows through its 
 own proper valley to the Dead Sea ; which 
 it enters in Lat. 31 45 46" N. The di 
 rect distance between the two lakes is there 
 fore 56 T 7 2 geogr. miles ; along which the 
 river winds extremely, with many strong 
 rapids ; so that the length of its actual 
 channel is estimated at more than 150 miles. 
 Its breadth is usually from 80 to 100 feet ; 
 the depth is various, but in many places 
 great. It receives from the east the ancient 
 Hieromax ; and the much smaller stream 
 of the torrent Jabbok. The first descent of 
 the Jordan in a boat was partially made by 
 Lieut. Molyneux of the British navy in 
 1847 ; the next and more successful one 
 was accomplished in 1 848 by Lieuts. Lynch 
 and Dale of the U. S. navy, in metal boats, 
 for the express purpose of making a sur 
 vey of the river and the Dead Sea. The 
 valley of the Jordan bears in Arabic the 
 name el-Ghor ; and the same general de 
 pression continues on towards the south 
 beyond the Dead Sea, under the name of 
 el- Arabah, quite to the eastern gulf of the 
 Red Sea. It is every where skirted by 
 mountains ; which in some parts are high 
 and abrupt, while in others they sink down 
 to hills. The Ghor between the two lakes 
 is in general five or six miles in breadth. 
 Through this broad plain the Jordan flows 
 
 in a still deeper valley ; which is usually 
 from 80 to 100 rods wide, and from 40 to 
 60 feet lower than the rest of the Ghor. In 
 many places there is yet another slight de 
 scent from this lower valley to the actual 
 banks of the stream, by a strip of alluvia or 
 marshy ground covered with canes or other 
 vegetation. The course of the river is 
 skirted by a narrow border of trees and 
 bushes on each side ; never extending be 
 yond the outer banks of the lower valley ; 
 and sometimes confined to the marshy tracts. 
 The river rarely, if ever, overflows its banks 
 beyond the border of vegetation ; and in no 
 possible case do its inundations rise beyond 
 the lower valley. The general surface of 
 the Ghor, above this lower valley, is there 
 fore a desert ; except where watered by the 
 many fountains which burst forth at the 
 foot of the mountains on each side. These 
 occasion in many parts luxuriant vegetation 
 and fertility ; as for instance around Jeri 
 cho. Recent investigations, begun in 1837 
 and continued by different persons almost 
 yearly since, have brought to light the re 
 markable fact, that the whole great valley 
 of the Jordan with its two lakes lies in a 
 deep depression below the level of the Me 
 diterranean. In respect to the Dead Sea, 
 the measurement of the English engineers 
 in 1841, by vertical angles, showed a de 
 pression of 1312.2 feet ; and the engineer s 
 level run by Lieuts. Lynch and Dale in 
 1848, from the Dead Sea to the Mediterra 
 nean at Joppa, gave the same at 1316.7 feet. 
 Various observations with the barometer 
 afford results differing from these by less 
 than 100 feet. For the lake of Tiberias, 
 the like measurement of the English engi 
 neers brought out a depression of only 
 328. 1 feet. Here however later barometrical 
 measurements display a greater discrepancy. 
 That of Mr. Wildenburch gives the depres 
 sion at 793.3 Paris feet ; that of Lieuts. 
 Lynch and Dale, as reckoned back from the 
 Dead Sea, at 735.4 feet. The difference of 
 level between the two lakes, as found by 
 each of these three observations, is 984.1 
 feet; 558.3 feet; 581.3 feet. This gives 
 for the fall of the Jordan in each mile of 
 the direct distance, the respective proximate 
 amounts of 17 feet, 10 feet, and IQi feet. 
 These results and the analogy of other ra 
 pid streams would seem to make it doubtful, 
 whether the true level of the lake of Tibe 
 rias is yet ascertained. See genr. Bibl. Res. 
 in Palest. II. p. 257 sq. III. p. 309 sq. 347 sq. 
 Biblioth. Sacra, 1848, p. 397 sq. 764 scj. 
 Lynch and Dale s Sect. Map. Matt. 3, 5. 
 
o? 
 
 355 
 
 6. 13. 4, 15. 25. 19, 1. Mark 1, 5. 9. 3,8. 
 10, 1. Luke 3, 3. 4, 1. John 1, 28. 3, 26. 
 10, 40. 
 
 to?, ov, 6, (trjfjn, or urai,) pr. something 
 sent out, emitted ; hence a missile weapon, 
 arrow, Horn. II. 15. 451. Sept. Lam. 3, 13. 
 In N. T. 
 
 1. rust, as emitted on metals, James 5, 3. 
 Sept. for nxbn Ez. 24, 6. Theogn. 451. 
 Pol. 6. 10. 3 . Plato Tim. 59. c. 
 
 2. poison, venom, as emitted espec. by ser 
 pents, James 3, 8. Rom. 3, 1 3 16s da-Triftwv, 
 quoted from Ps. 140, 4 where Sept. for 
 n-onJEl H. A. 5. 31. Luc. Fugit. 19. 
 
 Iov8a, fj, indec. Juda, perh. a softened 
 form for Heb. fia^, no j, Jutah, Jultdh, a 
 city assigned to the priests, and therefore 
 the residence of Zacharias ; Luke 1, 39 els 
 rro\iv louSa. Comp. Josh. 15, 55. 21, 16. 
 Reland Palaest. p. 870. Now Yulta, see 
 Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. p. 190, 195, 628. 
 Usually taken as genit. of lovdas. 
 
 JouSata, ay, 17, ( lov&alor,) Judea, Heb. 
 fTl iTi Judah, pr. n. strictly of the territory 
 of the tribe of Judah, the boundaries of 
 which are given in Josh. c. 15 ; but usually 
 employed in a broader sense. After the 
 secession of the ten tribes, it was applied to 
 the dominions of the kingdom of Judah, in 
 distinction from that of Israel ; and of course 
 included the whole southern part of Pales 
 tine, comprising the territories of Judah 
 and Benjamin, and apparently also that of 
 Simeon. After the captivity, as most of the 
 exiles who returned were of the kingdom of 
 Judah, the name Judea (Judah) was given 
 generally to the whole of Palestine west of 
 the Jordan, Hag. 1, 1. 14. 2, 2. Under the 
 Romans, in the time of Christ, Palestine 
 was divided into Galilee, Samaria, and Ju 
 dea, (John 4, 4. 5.) which last included the 
 whole southern part west of the Jordan, and 
 constituted a portion of the kingdom of 
 Herod the Great. It afterwards belonged 
 to Archelaus (q. v.) and was then made a 
 Roman province dependent on Syria and 
 governed by procurators ; see in Tjyfpav. 
 For a time also it belonged to Herod Agrip- 
 pa the elder ; comp. in HpiSjjs no. 3. See 
 Jos. B. J. 3. 3. 5. Reland Palaest. p. 31, 
 174, 178. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. II. ii. p. 
 149. Matt. 2, 1. 5. 22. 3, 1. 4, 25. 19, 1. 
 Luke 1, 65. al. Meton. the people of Judea, 
 Matt. 3, 5. + 
 
 , f. iVco, flovSmoy.) to Juda- 
 ize, to lite like the Jews, to follow their man 
 ners. customs, rites, Gal. 2, 14; parall. to 
 
 iv. Sept. for ^Hrj Esth. 8, 
 17. Ignat. ad Magnes. 10. Plut. Cic. 7. 
 For such verbs see Buttm. } 119. 3. d. 
 
 Jouoai/eoy, 17, 6v, Jewish, current among 
 the Jews, e. g. /iv3oi Tit. 1, 14. 2 Mace. 8 
 11. Jos. Ant. 20. 11. 1, 4. 
 
 IoySat/cw9, adv. Jewishly,in the Jewish 
 manner, Gal. 2, 14. Jos. B. J. 6. 1. 3. 
 
 ai a, ov, ( lovSa, Iov8ay,) pr. 
 adj. Jewish ; e. g. TOITOS louSmoy, 3 Mace. 
 3, 29. In N. T. 
 
 1. Fern. a) Pr. adj. fj lov8aia x>P a 
 v. yr), the land of Judah, Judea, i. q. simpl. 
 17 lovSai a, Mark 1 , 5. John 3, 22. So Jos. 
 Ant. 11. 1. 1. b) Subst. a Jewess, in 
 appos. with 17 yvvr], Acts 16, 1. 24, 24. non 
 al. So Sept. 1 Chr. 4, 19. 
 
 2. Masc. o lovftalos, Subst. a Jew, pr. 
 one of the country or kingdom of Judah, 
 Sept. 2 K. 16, 6 ; but in later usage applied 
 to all the inhabitants of Judea or Palestine 
 and their descendants, Esth. 3, 6. 10. Dan. 
 3, 8. 2 Mace. 9, 17. So in N. T. John 4, 9. 
 Acts 18, 2. 24. al. (Sept. Esth. 2, 5. Plut. 
 Cic. 7.) Usually Plur. ol lou&cuot, the 
 Jews, Matt. 2, 2. 28,15. John 19, 21. Acts 
 10,22. 20, 19. al. seep. louSawt Kal"E\\r}- 
 vts Acts 14, 1. 18, 4. 19, 10. 1 Cor. 1, 23. 
 24 ; see in^EXX?;!/ no. 2. lovSalot KOI irpotr- 
 T)\VTOI Acts 2, 5. Spec, and by synecd. o I 
 "lovSouoi is put in John for the chief men, 
 elders, leaders, of the Jews, John 1, 19. 5, 
 15. 16 sq. 7,1.11.13. 9,22. 18,12.14. 
 Acts 23, 20, comp. v. 14 sq. Sing, in app. 
 with another noun, e. g. dvrjp lovSaios Acts 
 10, 28. 22, 3 ; Plur. 2, 14 ; ^tv8oirpo(p^- 
 TTJS Acts 13, 6 ; dpxitpfvs Acts 19, 14. -j- 
 
 JouSai oy/,09, ov, 6, Judaism, the Jew 
 ish religion and institutes, e. g. as opposed 
 to heathenism, 2 Mace. 2, 21. 14, 38. In 
 N. T. as opp. to Christianity, Gal. 1, 13. 14. 
 
 TouSa?, a , 6, Judas, Heb. rnirn (re 
 nowned) Judah, Sept. Iov8a, Engl. Vers. 
 Judah, Judas, Jude, pr. n. of nine persons 
 in N. T. 
 
 1. Judah, the fourth son of Jacob and 
 head of the tribe of Judah, Matt. 1, 2. 3. 
 Luke 3, 33. Meton. the tribe or posterity of 
 Judah, Matt. 2, 6 bis. Heb. 7, 14. Rev. 5, 
 5. 7, 5. Also oiKos lovSa, the house (king 
 dom) of Judah, opp. to that of Israel, Heb. 8, 
 8. For Luke 1, 39 see art. lovSa. 
 
 2, 3. Judas or Judah, two of the ances 
 tors of Jesus, elsewhere unknown, Luke 3, 
 26. 30. 
 
 4. Jude, an apostle, called also Lebbeus and 
 Thaddeus (Matt. 10, 3), brother of James 
 the Less and cousin of our Lord, see in la- 
 
356 
 
 tafias no. 2. He also wrote the Epistle of 
 Jude. Luke 6, 16. John 14, 22. Acts 1, 13. 
 Jude 1. 
 
 5. Judas, a son of Mary and brother of 
 Jesus, Matt. 13, 55. Mark 6, 3. Others re 
 fer these passages to no. 4 ; but see in Id- 
 Kco/3os no. 3. 
 
 6. Judas, surnamed Iscariot i. e. man of 
 Kerioth, an apostle, and the traitor who be 
 trayed our Lord. He seems previously to 
 have been dishonest, though he had the con 
 fidence of the other apostles ; comp. John 
 12. 6. On the manner of his death, see in 
 art. \do-Ka>. Matt. 10, 4. 26, 14. 25. 47. 27, 
 3. Mark 3, 19. 14, 10. 43. Luke 6, 16. 22, 
 3. 47. 48. John 6, 71. 12, 4. 13, 2. 26. 29. 
 18, 2. 3. 5. Acts 1, 16. 25. 
 
 7. Judas, surnamed Barsabas, a Chris 
 tian teacher sent from Jerusalem to Anti- 
 och with Paul and Barnabas, Acts 15, 22. 
 27. 32. 
 
 8. Judas, a Jew living in Damascus, 
 with whom Paul lodged at his conversion, 
 Acts 9, 11. 
 
 9. Judas, surnamed the Galilean, 6 rXt- 
 \a1os, Acts 5, 37. So called also by Jose- 
 phus, Ant. 18. 1. 6. ib. 20. 5. 2. B. J. 2. 8. 1, 
 but likewise 6 ravXowr^y Ant. 18. 1. 1. In 
 company with one Zadok or Sadducus, he 
 attempted to raise a sedition among the 
 Jews, but was destroyed by Cyrenius (Qui- 
 rinus) then proconsul of Syria and Judea. 
 See Josephus 11. cc. 
 
 JouXfca, ay, 17, Julia, pr. n. of a female 
 Christian, Rom. 16, 15. 
 
 JofXto?, ov, 6, Julius, pr. n. of the cen 
 turion who conducted Paul to Rome, Acts 
 27, 1. 3. 
 
 a9, a, 6, Junias, pr. n. of a Jew 
 ish Christian, a kinsman and fellow-prisoner 
 of Paul, Rorn. 16,7. 
 
 IoucrT09, ov, 6, Justus, 1. Pr. n. of a 
 Christian at Corinth, with whom Paul 
 lodged, Acts 18, 7. 
 
 2. As surname : a) Of Joseph called 
 also Barsabas, nominated as an apostle, 
 Acts 1, 23. b) Of Jesus a friend and fel- 
 ow-labourer of Paul, Col. 4, 11. 
 
 (TTTTeu?, eus, 6, (iTrjroy,) a horseman ; 
 Plur. uTitfis, horsemen, cavalry, Acts 23, 23. 
 32. Sept. for He Gen. 50, 9. Ex. 14, 9. 
 Hdian. 4. 13. 13. Xen. Mem. 3. 4. 1. 
 
 T], 6v, (ITTTTOJ,) equestrian, opp. 
 to Tre&Kos Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 18; skilled in 
 riding, a horseman, Xen. Mag. Eq. 1. 6, 
 12. In N. T. Neut. TO ITTTTIKOV, collect. 
 the horsemen, cavalry, as in Engl. the horse, 
 
 Rev. 9, 16. So Pol. 2. 66. 7. Xen. Ag. 1. 
 15, 23. 
 
 tWo9, ov, o, a horse, James 3, 3. Rev. 6, 
 2.4.5.8. 9,7. 9. 17 bis. 19. 14,20. 18,13. 
 19, 11. 14. J8. 19. 21. Sept. for bto Gen. 
 47, 17. al. Hdian. 3. 7. 8. Xen. Cyr. 5. 
 2. 1. 
 
 ipi?i i8os, 77, Clpts a goddess,) ace. 
 ipifta and Ipiv, comp. Buttm. 44 ; a rain- 
 low, iris, Rev. 4, 3. 10, 1. JEL V. H. 4. 
 17. Luc. de Dom. 11. Plut. de Pyth. orac. 
 30. 
 
 Tcraa/c, 6, indec. Isaac, Heb. pHX 1 ? 
 (sporting), pr. n. of the son of Abraham by 
 Sarah, Matt. 1,2 . 8, 11. 22, 32. al. Comp". 
 Gen. c. 21 sq. -f 
 
 tcrttyyeXo?, O v, 6, 17, adj. (IVoy, ayyeXos,) 
 like to angels, angel-like, Luke 20, 36. 
 Clem. Alex. Strom. 7. 12. Comp. the Ho 
 meric tVo Seoy II. 2. 565. 
 
 or aaa-^p, 6, indec. Is- 
 
 sachar,Ileb. "Ob^?, Keri ^ty (there is 
 reward), pr. n. of the ninth son of Jacob by 
 Leah, Gen. 30, 18. In N. T. meton. the 
 tribe of Issachar, Rev. 7, 7. 
 
 tcr77/zt, an old root to which the forma 
 ia-fjifv, tort , "cracrt, were formerly referred ; 
 see in ol8a under art. et Sw II. Comp. Pas- 
 sow s. v. 
 
 O v, 6, Iscariot, surname 
 of Judas the traitor, Heb. rri ! np 5"^, 
 man of Kerioth, a town in the territory of 
 Judah, Josh. 15, 25. Matt. 10, 4. 26, 14. 
 Mark 3, 19. 14, 10. Luke 6, 16. 22, 3. 
 John 6, 71. 12, 4. 13, 2. 26. 14, 22. 
 
 t<T09, 10-77, Ivov, equal, like, alike, spoken 
 of measure, quantity, condition, and the like. 
 Matt. 20, 12 icrovs TJJLUV avrovs firoirjcras. 
 Luke 6, 34 "iva aTroXajScocri ra icra. Acts 11, 
 17. Rev. 21, 16. Sept. for inj* Ez. 40, 
 5. 6. So Diod. Sic. 1. 20. Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 
 1 . Also of nature and condition ; John 5, 
 18 Io~ov eavTov TTOIU>I> ro> 3fo>. Phil. 2, 6 
 ov% apnaynov . ..TO eivai lo~a 3eo3, where 
 plur. ura may be either for neut. sing, see 
 Matth. 5 443. 1. Buttm. J 129. 7. Greg. 
 Cor. ed. Schaefer p. 130, 1055; or adverb 
 ially, Matth. J 446. 7. Buttm. 5 115. 4 ult. 
 Winer 27. 3 ult. See in apiraypos. Comp. 
 era Seols Horn. Od. 11. 303. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 89. Spec, alike, consistent, e. g. 
 Mark 14, 56. 59. 
 
 , TJTOS, f], (to-oy,) equality, like 
 ness, i. e. like state or proportion, 2 Cor. 
 8, 13 e IO-OTT)TOS. v. 14. So Luc. Zeux. 5. 
 Plato Legg. 684. d. Spec, equity, what is 
 
tcrori/409 
 
 357 
 
 HTTTjfAl 
 
 equitable, Col. 4, 1 . So Plut. de Fortuna 1 
 oiidf &iKaioo-vvr], otS IVOTTJS. 
 
 LCTOTifAO?, ov, 6, 17, adj. (la-os, rt/nj,) 
 Zi&e honoured, held in equal honour, Luc. 
 D. Mort. 24. 3. Xen. Hi. 8. 10. In N. T. 
 aZiTre precious, having like honour and pri 
 vilege, c. dat. 2 Pet. 1 , 1 TOIS iVort/ioi/ ij/ui> 
 Xogovcrty fri<my. Buttm. j 133. 2. f. Cornp. 
 Jos. Ant. 12. 3. 1 IvoTifjiovs U7re 8fte Ma/cf- 
 $6criv KT\. 
 
 tcro^tn^o9, ov, 6, 17, adj. (ia-os, ^i^,) 
 /"Zt A;e spirit, like-minded, Phil. 2, 20. Sept. 
 Ps. 54, 14. ^Eschyl. Ag. 1470. 
 
 Icrpa.7/X, 6, indec. Israel, Heb. ^ " ^ 
 (warrior of God), a name given to Jacob 
 after wrestling with the angel, Gen. 32, 
 24 sq. In N. T. spoken only in reference 
 to his posterity, e. g. 6 OIKOS I. Matt. 10, 6. 
 Acts 7, 42 ; 6 \aus I. Acts 4, 10. 13, 17 ; 
 wo! I. Acts 7, 23. 37. 9, 15. al. Also 
 genr. Israel for the Israelites, the children 
 if Israel, spoken in O. T. of the kingdom 
 of Israel in opp. to that of Judah ; but in 
 N. T. applied to all the descendants of Is 
 rael then remaining, and synonymous after 
 the exile with of louSatot, see in lovSalo? 
 no. 2. Matt. 2, 6. 20. 21. 8, 10. 15, 31. 
 Rom. 10, 1. 19. + 
 
 I(Tpari\iTri<$, O v, 6, an Israelite, in N. 
 T. i. q. 6 lovSaior, see in lo-paijX. John 1, 
 48. Acts 2, 22. 3, 12. 5, 35. 13, 16. 21, 
 28. Rom. 9, 4. 11, 1. 2 Cor. 11, 22. 
 Genr. Jos. Ant. 2. 9. 1. 
 
 l, f. OTIJO-W, aor. 1 fonjcra, aor. 2 
 jv, perf. (O"rr)Ka, plupf. itrn}Ktiv Luke 8, 
 20 and eiorjjKfii/ Matt. 12,46, Buttm. 107. 
 n. I, 7 ; perf. infin. t<m>]Ktvai, contr. eVru- 
 vai , perf. part. eor^Kobf , contr. eoTcor, oxra, 
 a>s, Buttm. \ 107. II. 3 ; Pass. aor. 1 eWa- 
 2;j>, fut. 1 oraSrjo-o/iat. See in general, 
 Buttm. \ 107. A less usual form is pres. 
 i(rrao> Rom. 3, 31 Rec. Buttm. $ 106. n. 5. 
 5 107. n. I, 2. Hdot. 4. 103; in later edi 
 tions also iardvco Rom. 1. c. a late form, 
 Arr. Epict. 3. 26. 17. Buttm. 112. 10; 
 comp. in aTroKaSumj/u. Pluperf. 3 pers. 
 plur. f(TTf)Kf(rav Att. for (<TTr]K(icrav Rev. 
 7, 11 ; see in Mattaire Dial. p. 65, ed. Reitz. 
 The significations of this verb are divid- 
 
 O 
 
 ed between the trans, to cause to stand, to 
 place, and intrans. to stand; see Buttm. 
 107. m. 21. 
 
 I. TRANS, in the Act. present, imperfect, 
 fut. and aor. 1, to cause to stand, to set, to 
 place. 
 
 1. Pr. c. ace. and with an adjunct im 
 plying place where ; e. g. etj avrovs before 
 them. Acts 22, 30 IJav\ov eonjcrai ds av- 
 
 TOVS. So K 8fta>v Matt. 25, 33 ; tv 
 /ieVa, comp. in / no. 4, Matt. 18, 2. Mark 9, 
 36. John 8, 3. Acts 4, 7 ; also eV T trvveftpio) 
 Acts 5, 27 (Dem. 1370. 25*) ; evtairiov TWOS 
 Acts 6, 6. Jude 24 (comp. Lev. 27, 1 1) ; eiri 
 C. ace. Matt. 4, 5 tarrjcrw ai/rov eVt TO Trrepv- 
 yiov. Luke 4, 9 ; (tVi TLVI Palasph. 9 ;) 
 Trapii c. dat. Luke 9. 47. Genr. to cause 
 to Stand forth, Acts 1, 23 /cat ea-rr]crav 8vo. 
 6, 13. Trop. to cause to stand upright, opp. 
 to falling, Rom. 14, 4. Sept. for T^asn 
 Gen. 47, 7. 1 K. 6, 14 ; n^n Ex. 407*2! 
 16. Josh. 4, 9. Hdian. 1. 14. 18. Xen. 
 Cyr. 2. 2. 6. 
 
 2. to make stand fast, to establish, to con- 
 firm, c. ace. Rom. 3, 31 VO/JLOV. 10, 3. Heb. 
 10, 9. Acts 7, 60 fir/ <rrr]crrjs avrols rrjv ap.ap- 
 Tiav Tai/TT]v, establish not this sin to them, 
 lay it not to their charge. Sept. for O^pC! 
 Ex. 6, 4. 1 K. 6, 12. So of time, to fix, to 
 appoint, f/fiepav Acts 17, 31. 
 
 3. to place in a balance, i. q. to weigh, 
 c. ace. et dat. Matt. 26, 15 eonjo-az/ avrta 
 rpiaKovra apyvpia, they weighed out to him. 
 Sept. for bpW Ezra 8, 25. 26. 33. Is. 46, 6. 
 Diod. Sic. l. 83. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 9. 
 Fully icrracri <rra2tyic3 npbs dpyvpiov ras 
 Tpf^as Hdot. 2. 65. Trans, non al. 
 
 II. IXTRANS. in the Act. perfect, pluperf. 
 and aor. 2 ; in the Mid. and also in Pass, 
 aor. 1 and fut. 1 as Mid. (comp. Buttm. 
 ^113. n. 2,3.) to stand; and so perf. fa-rrj- 
 KO. as present, whence plupf. e onjKttv as 
 impf. Buttm. 5 107. II. 2. 
 
 1. Pr. and absol. e. g. as opp. to falling, 
 1 Cor. 10, 12 6 8oK<av tcrravaif /3Xf7reVw ^17 
 TTt o-jy. So in prayer or sacrifice Matt. 6, 5. 
 Heb. 10, 11. With an adjunct implying 
 place where, e. g. an adv. Matt. 12, 46 eco. 
 Mark 11,5 . 13, 14. Luke 9, 27. 17, 
 12. 18, 13. al. With tls c. ace. see in etr 
 no. 4 ; tls TO pecrov John 20, 19; IK. fte^i&v 
 Luke 1,11 (Sept. 1 Chr. 6, 39) ; eV c. dat. 
 of place, Matt. 20, 3 ev TT) dyopa. John 11, 
 56. Acts 5, 20. 7, 33 ; impl. Matt. 20, 6 
 comp. v. 3. John 7, 37 comp. v. 28 ; (Xen. 
 Cyr. 6. 2. 17 ;) eV avTols among i. e. before 
 them Acts 24, 21 ; evumov TWOS Acts 
 10,30. Rev. 7, 9 ; eVi c. gen. of place 
 Luke 6, 17 eon; tVl TOTTOV TreSti/ou. Rev. 
 10, 5 ; (Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 66 ;) and so eVt in 
 the sense before, Acts 25, 10 eVi rov /3^a- 
 TOS. 24, 20 eVi rov <rvv(o piov. Mark 13, 9 ; 
 7ri c. ace. of place Matt. 13, 2. Rev. 7. 1 : 
 (Sept. 2 Chr. 23, 19;) also ri TOVS Tro Say 
 to stand upon the feet, Acts 26, 16; impl. 
 Acts 3, 8. (Sept. 2 Chr. 3, 12.) nera TWOS 
 John 18, 5; Trap a c. ace. Luke 5,1. 7,38. 
 (2 Chr. 9, 18.) ireoav TJS 3oA. John 6 
 
wrropetu 
 
 358 
 
 22 ; Trpo T>V 3vpo>i> Acts 5, 23 ; irpbs rrj 
 3vpa John 18, 16 ; (Sept. Judg. 9, 35 ;) c. 
 ace. Trpoy TO /iwj/xfioi/ 20, 11 ; vvv avroly 
 Acts 4, 14. Also KvtfXw TWOS round about 
 any one Rev. 7, 1 1 ; /iecroy vfj.S>v fo-rrjKtv 
 John 1, 26. Without an adjunct of place 
 expressed, but in the sense to stand by, near, 
 to stand there, according to the context, i. q. 
 to be present; Matt. 26, 73 Trpoo-eXSoWey 
 oi eoreoTfy flirov r<5 IleTpw. Luke 19, 8. 
 23, 35. John 1, 35. 3, 29. 18, 18. Acts 2, 
 14. al. Joined with an adj. or pajticip. 
 Acts 9, 7 (i<TTT)Kfi<rav fvvfoi. Eph. 6, 14. 
 (Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 8.) Spec, of persons 
 standing before a judge ; either as accusers 
 Luke 23, 10 ; or as accused, Acts 26, 6 
 fa~njKa KpivofjLtvos. Matt. 27, 11 (pirpov Sfv 
 TOV fjyt/jiovos , comp. also above in constr. 
 with eVi. So before Christ as Judge, where 
 it is i. q. to stand erect, firm, in the conscious 
 ness of acquittal and final approval, Luke 21, 
 36 ; comp. v. 28. Spoken of fishing-boats, 
 to stand, to be stationed, in Engl. to lie, Luke 
 5,2. 
 
 2. Trop. to standfast, i. e. to continue, to 
 endure, to persist, e. g. of things, f] /3a<r(Xe/a 
 Matt. 12, 25. Luke 11, 18 ; 3ep,e Xioy 2 Tim. 
 2, 19. Of persons, Acts 26, 22 a X pt lys 
 fjfjipas TavTTjs (ffTtjKd. 1 Cor. 7, 37 f(mjKa 
 e Spaioy. Col. 4, 12. John 8, 44 Iv TTJ aX?/- 
 **fia ovx ZcTTrjKfv. Rom. 5, 2. 1 Pet. 5, 12 
 ds fjv ((TTrjKdTf, comp. in ei y no. 4. 2 Cor. 
 
 1, 24. So Sept. and ia 2 K. 23, 3. Is. 
 66, 22 ; eip Is. 46, 10. Josh. 2, 11. So 
 Xen. Hell. 5. 2. 23. Spec, to stand fast 
 against an enemy, opp. to (pfvyco, Eph. 6, 
 13 ; c. Trpdy ri v. 11. Sept. for inS Ex. 9, 
 12. Nah. 2, 8. (Pol. 1. 19. 15. Xen. An. 1. 
 10. 1.) So against evils, i. q. to endure, to 
 sustain, Rev. 6, 17. In the sense to be es 
 tablished, confirmed, Matt. 18, 16 et 2 Cor. 
 13, 1 tva firl crTOfjLdTos bvo /zaprvpwv 77 rpia>i> 
 o-TaSfi -jvav pfjua, in allusion to Deut. 19, 15 
 where Sept. for dip 
 
 3. In the Aorists ea-Trjv and ea-TdSrjv, 
 to stand still, to stop, e. g. of persons, Matt. 
 20, 32 Kal oray 6 Iqo-ouy. Mark 10, 49. 
 Luke 7, 14. 18, 40 craSely 8e 6 Iqo-ovy. 
 Of things, Matt. 2, 9. Acts 8, 38 ; to cease, 
 Luke 8, 44. Sept. for To* Hat). 3, 11. 
 Jon. 1, 15. Hdian. 1. 13. To. Xen. Cyr. 
 7. 1. 3. -f 
 
 larTOpew, >, f. rja-co, (tcrrcop, eiSeWu,) to 
 learn or know by inquiry and personal ex 
 amination, Pol. 9. 14. 3. ib. 10. 7. 1 ; to 
 know, to have seen personally, Jos. Ant. 8. 
 
 2. 5. Palaeph. prooem. 7. In N. T. to see, 
 o go to see, to visit a person in order lo 
 
 make his acquaintance; Gal. 1, 18 I 
 (Tdi ILfTpov. So Jos. B. J. 6. 1. 8. Arr. 
 Epict. 2. 14. 28. Hesych. ioropei- opq. 
 See Wetst. in loc. More freq. to narrate, 
 to tell what one has seen, Pol. 1. 37. 3. 
 Hdian. 3. 7. 15. 
 
 d, 6v, (tVxvw,) strong, mighty, 
 powerful, e. g. 
 
 1. Of persons, spoken of the powers both 
 of body and mfcid, physical and moral. Matt. 
 3, 11 la-xvporepos pov (<rrlv. Mark 1, 7. 
 Luke 3, 16. Heb. 11, 34 tV^vpol eV TroXt- 
 p.(f>, and so Matt. 12, 29 bis tio-e XSeti/ etj 
 Trjv oiKiav TOV l(rxvpov. Mark 3, 27 bis. 
 Luke 11, 21. 22. 1 Cor. 10, 22 ; also 1 Cor. 
 1, 25. 1 John 2, 14 strong, i. e. firm in 
 faith. Of angels Rev. 5, 2. 10, 1. 18, 21 ; 
 of God Rev. 18, 8. Sept. for m aa Judg. 5, 
 
 13. Josh. 10, 2; of God Deut. 10, 17; bx 
 of God Neh. 1,5. 9, 32. So ^El. V. H. 2". 
 24. Xen. Mem. 1. 7. 4. ib. 1. 6. 7. Trop. 
 strong in influence and authority, mighty, 
 honourable, 1 Cor. 4, 10. Rev. 6, 15 Grb. 19, 
 
 18. 1 Cor. 1, 27 TO. lo-xvpd for concr. ot 
 lirxypoL Sept. oi Icrx- T^S yrjs for D n ^x 
 2 K. 24, 15 ; also for iia 1 Chr. 7, 7. 40~ 
 So Xen. Ath. 1. 14. 
 
 2. Of things, strong, vehement, great, as 
 ttvtpos Matt. 14, 30; \ip,6s Luke 15, 14; 
 Kpavyrj Heb. 5, 7; (pavf) Rev. 18, 2 Grb. 
 Ppovrai Rev. 19,6. Sept. Gen. 41, 31. Ex. 
 
 19, 19. Dan. 6, 20. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 39 
 Xipa>v. Hell. 4. 2. 11 pevp-a.) Trop. _/jrwi, 
 sure, as l&x- 7rapdK\rja-is Heb. 6, 18 (Pol. 
 31. 20. 8) ; powerful, grave, severe, e. g. 
 eVtoToXal la-x- 2 Cor. 10, 10 ; so Xen. Cyr. 
 3. 3. 48. Of a city, strong, fortified, Rev. 
 18, 10 Ba/3. rj TroXis fj la-x- Sept. for pin 
 Ez. 26, 17. So Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 7, 8. 
 
 icr^u?, voy, f), (?$, to-^co,) strength, might, 
 power, spoken of the powers both of body 
 and mind, physical and moral ; e. g. once 
 physical, Rev. 18, 2 Rec. fKpat-tv / l<rxvi 
 i. e. mightily, vehemently; comp. Sept. Is. 
 58, 1. Sept. for *>>in Dan. 3, 4. 4, 11. So 
 Hdian. 6. 8. 2 l<rx- <ro>p,aroy. Xen. Ven. 13. 
 
 14. Of mental and moral power, might, 
 ability, faculty. Mark 12, 30 e oXr;y TTJS 
 to-^voy o-ov with all thy might, v. 33. Luke 
 10, 27. 1 Pet. 4, 11. (Sept. for ns Gen. 
 
 31, 6 ; " fcE 2 K. 23, 25.) Also genr. pow 
 er, potency, pie-eminence; e. g. along with 
 Swa/uy, 2 Pet. 2, 1 1 ayyeXoi iV^vi *cat Swa- 
 /iet fifl^ovts. Eph. 1, 19 et 6, 10 Kpai-oy TTJS 
 lo~xvos i. q. Kparoy Ivyvpov, mighty power. 
 2 Thess. 1, 9. Spec, in ascriptions to God, 
 Rev. 5, 12. 7, 12. Sept. for n 3 Jer. 10, 12. 
 
 32, 17; rnisa Is. 11,2. 
 
359 
 
 f. vo-a, (iVxur,) to be strong, 
 i. e. to have strength, ability, power, both 
 physical and moral, e. g. 
 
 1. Pr. physical, to be strong, robust; 
 Matt. 9, 12 et Mark 2, 17 oi lo-xvovrts the 
 strong, i. e. the well, not the weak and sick. 
 Sept. for pm Josh. 14, 11. Ecclus. 30, 14 
 vytrjs KM io-xvw. Xen. Mem. 3. 12. 4. 
 
 2. Genr. to be able, I can, c. infin. Matt. 
 6, 28 oxrre prj tVxvftv nva TvapeK^tlv. 26, 
 40. Mark 5, 4. 14, 37. Luke 6, 48. 8, 43. 
 14, 6. 29. 30. 16, 3. 20, 26. John 21, 6. 
 Acts 6, 10. 15, 10. 25,7. 27, 16 ; inf. impl. 
 Mark 9, 18. Luke 13, 24. Phil. 4, 13 jrdv- 
 ra lo-xvay, / can do or endure all things. 
 Better perhaps navra as ace. of manner etc. 
 Buttm. 131. 7. Sept 2 Chr. 2, 6. Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 83 ult. 
 
 3. Spec, to have efficacy, to avail, to have 
 force and value; Gal. 5, 6 et 6, 15 ot/re 
 irfpiToprj n iV^vet. Heb. 9, 17. James 5, 
 16 ; (Is ov8fv lo~x vfl it has no value, is good 
 for nothing, Matt. 5, 13. (,E1. V. H. 2. 38. 
 Plato Polit. 294. a.) Spec, to prevail, e. g. 
 Kara nvos, against or over any one, Acts 
 19, 16 ; absol. Rev. 12, 8. So Sept. with 
 irpos for bin Dan. 7, 21. Ps. 13, 5. So 
 1 Mace. 10, 49; comp. Ivxyfiv virep Luc. 
 Navig. 42. Trop. to prevail, to spread 
 abroad, to gain strength and efficacy ; Acts 
 19, 20 6 \6yos TOV K. rjv^ave Kal Lcrxytv. 
 
 f<7&>9 adv. (tcror,) pr. equally, alike, Dem. 
 35. 26. Plato Legg. 805. a ; equitably, fairly, 
 Dem. 59. 19. In N. T. as it would seem, 
 it may be, perhaps, Luke 20, 13. Sept. for 
 i^ix Gen. 32,21 ; -jn Dan. 4, 24 [27]. So 
 2E1. V. H. 11. 8. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 13. 
 
 IraXta, ay, f), Italy, Acts 18, 2. 27, 1. 
 6. Heb. 13, 24. 
 
 JraXt/co?, f), 6v, Italian, e. g. crneipa 
 q. v. Acts 10, 1. Arr. Tactic, p. 73. 5. 
 See Wetst. N. T. in loc. 
 
 Irovpala, as, f/, Iturea, Heb. ~W\ Je- 
 tur (1 Chr. 5, 19), a region which made 
 part of Cojle-Syria in its wider acceptation, 
 Plin. H. N. 5. 19. Luke 3, 1 
 Tpapxovvros TTJS iTovpaias KOI 
 X&pas, Philip being tetrarch of Iturea and 
 Trachonitis. But Josephus describes Phi 
 lip s tetrarchy as composed of Trachonitis, 
 Batanea, and Auranitis, without any men 
 tion of Iturea, Ant. 15. 10. 1 ; comp. 17. 11. 
 4. B. J. 2. 6. 3. Hence Reland and others 
 supposed Iturea to be the same with Aura 
 nitis ; Rel. Palaestina p. 106 sq. Cellarii No- 
 tit. Orb. II. p. 529. More prob. it was nearly 
 the same with the modern Jeidur, a province 
 lying south of the territory of Damascus, 
 
 and bounded east by Trachonitis and Hau- 
 ran ; south by Bashan ; and west by Gau- 
 lonitis and Mount Hermon ; see Burck- 
 hardt Trav. in Syr. p. 286. Bibl. Res. in 
 Palest. III. App. p. 149. The Itureans 
 were celebrated as skilful archers and dar 
 ing robbers, Cic. Phil. 2. 44. ib. 13. 8. 
 Virg. Georg. 2. 448. Strabo 16. 2. 18. p. 
 755 ra fjifv ovv opfiva f%ovcri -navra irov- 
 paloL re Kal "Apafifs, Kaxovpyoi Truvrts. See 
 also Miinter de Reb. Ituraeor. Hufniae 1824. 
 
 , ov, TO, (dim. of Ix.Zvs, ) a 
 small fish, Matt. 15, 3"4. Mark 8, 7. Plut. 
 de Solert. anim. 27 mid. 
 
 , vos, 6, a fish, Matt. 15, 36. 17, 
 27. Luke 5, 6. John 21, 6. 9. al. Sept. for 
 y\ Gen. 9, 2. Luc. D. Mar. 11. 2. Xen. 
 Hell. 4. 1. 16. + 
 
 l^yof) (os, ovs, TO, (IKO), iKveofJuu,) a 
 footstep, Xen. An. 7. 3. 42. In. N. T. only 
 trop. in the phrase to walk or follow in one s 
 footsteps, i. e. to imitate his example ; Rom. 
 4, 12 oroixovcrt rois i^veo-i TOV A/Spad/i. 
 2 Cor. 12, 18. 1 Pet. 2, 21. So Ecclus. 21, 
 6. Pol. 4. 42. 7. 
 
 , 6, indec. Jotham, Heb. 
 (Jehovah is upright), pr. n. of a king of 
 Judah, the son and successor of Uzziah, r. 
 759-743 B. C. Matt. 1, 9 bis. See 2 K. 15, 
 7. 32 sq. 2 Chr. c. 27. 
 
 6, indec. Joachim, Heb. 
 (Jehovah hath set up) Jehoiakim, 
 pr. n. of a king of Judah, r. 611-600 B. C. 
 added in some Mss. after Josiah, Matt. 1, 
 11 bis. See 2 K. 23, 34. 36. 24, 1. 
 
 TJS, f), Joanna, fern, of la>dv- 
 vrjs, pr. n. of the wife of Chusa, steward of 
 Herod Antipas, Luke 8, 3. 24, 10. 
 
 Iwavvas, a, 6, Joannas, i. q. Iwai/i^y, 
 one of the ancestors of Jesus, Luke 3, 27. 
 
 , ov, 6, John, Heb. W<* Joha- 
 nan (for prrirP > whom Jehovah hath gra 
 ciously given, comp. GeoScopo?), pr. n. of 
 four persons in N. T. 
 
 1. John the Baptist Matt. 3, 1, the son of 
 Zacharias and forerunner of Christ, be 
 headed by order of Herod Antipas, Luke 1 , 
 13. 60. 63. Matt. 3, 4. 13. 14. 14, 2. 3. 4. 
 8. 10. al. sa?p. Comp. Jos. Ant. 18. 5. 2. 
 
 2. John the apostle, the son of Zebedee 
 and brother of the elder James, especially 
 beloved of our Lord, Matt. 4, 21. 10, 2. 17, 
 1. Mark 1, 19. 29. Luke 5, 10. al. saep. 
 
 3. John, one of the kindred of the high 
 priest and a member of the Sanhedrim ; 
 once Acts 4, 6. 
 
360 
 
 4. John surnamed Mark, the companion 
 of Paul and Barnabas, and writer of the 
 second Gospel; only Acts 12, 12. 25. 13, 
 5. 13. 15, 37. -f 
 
 o, indec. Job, Heb. -t**? (the per 
 secuted.) the patriarch of the O. T. whose 
 afflictions and patience are celebrated in the 
 book of Job. James 5, 11. 
 
 J&>?;\, 6, indec. Joel, Heb. ^-"i" 1 (Jeho 
 vah is his God), one of the minor Hebrew 
 prophets, Acts 2, 16. Comp. Joel 1,1. 
 
 Icovdv, 6, indec. Jonan, i. q. lavas, one 
 of the ancestors of Jesus, Luke 3, 30. 
 
 Jwm?, a , 6, Jonas, Heb. Wl " 1 (dove) 
 Jonah, pr. n. of two persons in N. T. 
 
 1. The noted prophet of the O. T. Matt. 
 12, 39. 40. 41 bis. 16, 4. Luke 11, 29. 30. 
 32 bis. See Jon. 1 , 1 sq. 
 
 2. The father of the apostle Peter, John 
 1, 43. 21, 15. 16. 17. Comp. in Eapuovas. 
 
 Iwpdfju, 6, indec. Joram, Heb. E^" 1 "" 1 ^ 
 (whom Jehovah exalted) Jehoram, pr. n. of 
 a king of Judah, the son and successor of 
 Jehoshaphat, r. 891884 B. C. Matt. 1, 8 
 bis. See 2 K. 8, 16 sq. 
 
 Iaypei/J,. 6, indec. Jorim, perh. i. q. 
 loopap, one of the ancestors of Jesus, Luke 
 3,29. 
 
 ar, 6, indec. Josaphat, Heb. 
 I] (whom Jehovah judgeth, sustain- 
 eth) Jehoshaphat, a pious king of Judah, 
 ihe son and successor of Asa, r. 914 889 
 B.C. Matt. 1, 8 bis. See 1 K. 15, 24. 22, 
 41 sq. 
 
 Iwcnj, 6, indec. Jose, i. q. laxrijs, one 
 of the ancestors of Jesus, Luke 3, 29. 
 
 I(y<T?79, 6, indec. Joses, pr. n. of three 
 persons in N. T. 
 
 1 . A brother of James the Less, a kins 
 man of Jesus, Matt. 27, 56. Mark 15, 40. 
 47. 
 
 2. A son of Mary and brother of Jesus, 
 Matt. 1 3, 55. Mark 6, 3. Others refer these 
 passages to no. 1 ; but see in laKa>/3os no. 3. 
 
 3. Of Barnabas, the companion of Paul, 
 Acts 4, 36. 
 
 Ia)arij(f), o, indec. Joseph, Heb. C]G1 ^ 
 (he will add), pr. n. of seven persons in 
 N. T. 
 
 1. The patriarch, the eleventh son of 
 Jacob and head of the half-tribes of Manas- 
 seh and Ephraim, John 4, 5. Acts 7, 9. 13 
 bis. 14. 18. Heb. 11, 21. 22. Rev. 7, 8 0u- 
 Xij lcoo-170, put for the half-tribe of Ephraim, 
 com;), v. 6. See Gen. 30, 22 sq. 
 
 2, 3, 4. Three of the ancestors of Jesus, 
 Luke 3, 24. 26. 30. 
 
 5. The husband of Mary the mother of 
 Jesus, Matt. 1, 16. 18. 19. 20. 24. 2, 13. 
 19. Luke 1, 27. 2, 4. 16. 33. 43. 3, 23. 4, 
 22. John 1, 46. 6, 42. 
 
 6. Joseph of Arimathea, a member of the 
 Sanhedrim, /SovAevrijr, a disciple of Jesus, 
 who assisted at his burial, Matt. 27, 57. 59. 
 Mark 15, 43. 45. Luke 23, 50. John 19, 38. 
 
 7. Joseph, called also Barsabas and Jus 
 tus, nominated as an apostle in the place ol 
 Judas, Acts 1, 23. 
 
 lojcrtay, ov , 6, Josias, Heb. WJttJiO 
 (whom Jehovah heals) Josiah, pr. n. of a 
 pious king of Judah, the son and successor 
 of Amon, r. 642611 B. C. Matt. 1, 10. 11. 
 See 2 K. 22, 1 sq. 2 Chr. c. 34, 35. 
 
 iwra, TO, indec. iota, Heb. yodh (?) 
 the smallest letter of the Heb. alphabet , 
 trop. for the minutest part, Matt. 5, 18. For 
 the Rabbinic usage see Wetstein N. T. ad 
 Matt. 1. c. 
 
 K. 
 
 /cay d) crasis for KCU e yco, dat. Kapoi, 
 ace. Kap.f, and I, and to me, and me; the 
 <ai every where retaining its own distinct 
 power, just as if written separately ; see in 
 <<u. Matt. 2, 8. Luke 2, 48. John 1, 34. 
 2 Cor. 11, 22. al. Dat. Luke 1, 3. Acts 8, 
 19. 1 Cor. 15, 8. non. al. Ace. John 7, 28. 
 1 Cor. 16, 4. non al. It is often written 
 with iota subscript, Kayu>, but improperly ; 
 see Buttm. 29. n. 2. b, and n. 7. + 
 
 tfaSo?, ov, o, Lat. cadus, a pail, jar, cask; 
 Luke 16, 6 Lachm. tKciTuv Kaftovi cXcutw, for 
 
 Rec. fiarovs. Anacr. Fr. 16. 3. Plato Rep 
 616. d. 
 
 dj adv. for KO% a, Buttm. $ 115. n. 
 5 ; lit. according to what things, i. e. ac 
 cording as, or simply as, Matt. 27, 10 *a3 
 ovverage noi 6 K. Sept. for 11BSS Gen. 7. 
 9 ; for 3 Gen. 19, 8. Pol. 3. 107. 10. Xen. 
 CEc. 15. 3. 
 
 (a>s, 17, (KaSaipew,) a putt- 
 iny down, demolition, e. g. of a fortress, 
 2 Cor. 10, 4. So Pol. 23. 7. 6. Xen. He- 
 
361 
 
 2. 2. 15. Trop. in respect to religious 
 knowledge and experience, demolition, de 
 struction, opp. to oiKo8op.t], 2 Cor. 10. 8. 13, 
 10. Com p. 1 Mace. 3, 43. Hdian. 2. 4. 9. 
 
 KajiClipea), &>, f. TJCTCO, (Kara, aipe co.) aor. 
 2 KaSeiXoi/. 
 
 1 . to lake down, sc. from a higher place, 
 e. g. from the cross, c. ace. Mark 15, 36 el 
 tpXtrai HXia? Ka%t\eiv avrov. V. 46. Luke 
 23, 53. Acts 13, 29. Sept. for Plin Josh. 
 
 8, 29. 10, 27. Philo in Flacc. p. 977. a. 
 Poll. 86.6. 
 
 2. With the idea of force, violence, to 
 pull down, to demolish, c. ace. as buildings 
 Luke 12, 18. (1 Mace. 5, 65. Xen. Cyr. 
 6. 1. 20.) So a people, to overthrow, to con 
 quer, lo destroy, c. ace. Acts 13, 19 KaSeXwi 
 &iT) eVra. (Sept. for 01H J er . 24, 6. 42, 
 10. Hdian. 6. 2. 3.) Also princes, potentates, 
 to cast down from their thrones, to dethrone, 
 Luke 1, 52. So JE\. V. H. 2. 25. Hdot. 2. 
 152. Trop. to subvert, to destroy, as rrji 
 /ieyaAeto -njra Acts 19, 27 ; Xoyia-povs 2 Cor. 
 10, 4. Sept. *ca3. TTJV v@piv for FH2 Zech. 
 
 9, 6. So Jos. Ant. 6. 9. 2 TTJV d 
 Diod. Sic. 4. 8. 
 
 f. ap>, (*a3apo?,) to cleanse 
 from filth, c. ace. e. g. a pers. Luc. Necyom. 
 7 ; grain by winnowing, Sept. 2 Sam. 4, 6. 
 Xen. (Ec. 18. 6. In N. T. 
 
 1 . to cleanse a tree or vine from useless 
 branches, to prune, c. ace. John 15, 2. 
 Philo de Agric. p. 189. a. Id. de Somn. p. 
 1116. e. Comp. Lcesner Obs. p. 155. 
 
 2. Trop. to cleanse from sin. to purify, by 
 expiation, Heb. 10, 2. Sept. for" 1 ?} 1 ? "} Jer. 
 13, 27. Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 14. Xen. An. 5. 
 7. 35. 
 
 Ka^ctTrep adv. (a3a strengthened by 
 rrep,) according as, i. q. as, even as, Rom. 4, 
 6 KoSdirfp Kai Aa/3i8 Xy. 2 Cor. 1, 14. 3, 
 13. 18. 1 Thess. 2, 11. 3, 6. 12. 4, 5. Heb. 
 4, 2. 5, 4. In a protasis, followed by OVTUS 
 or OVTU, so, Rom. 12, 4. 1 Cor. 12, 12. 
 2 Cor. 8, 11. Sept. for itiK? Gen. 12, 4. 
 Ex. 7, 6. 10. Luc. de Mort. peregr. 25. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 29. 
 
 ), f. d^(a, ((cara, aTrrco,) to adapt, 
 to fit down upon any thing; and so to bind 
 or fasten upon, c. ace. Pol. 8. 8. 3. Xen. 
 Ven. 6. 9. In N. T. intrans. or with eau- 
 roV impl. i. q. Mid. KaSdnrofiat, to fix oneself 
 upon, to fasten on, c. gen. Acts 28, 3 e^iSm 
 . . . Ko^rj^lff TTJS x fl P os avTov, Buttm. 132. 
 5. e. Comp. also in iiya> no. 2. This is a 
 later Active to the earlier and more usual 
 Mid. depon. KaSaTrrofieu, Passow sub v. 
 
 f. t o-o), (Ka2apoy,) a later 
 verb instead of the earlier /caSai pw. 
 
 1 . to make clean, to cleanse ; c. ace. Matt. 
 23, 25 Ka%apifTe TO e^ooSey rov TfOTrjpLov. 
 v. 26. Luke 11, 39. (Sept. Ps. 12, 7.) 
 Spec, of lepers afflicted with a filthy dis 
 ease and accounted as unclean, to cleanse, 
 to heal, c. ace. Matt. 8, 2. 10, 8. Mark 1, 
 40. Luke 5, 12. Pass. Matt. 8, 3 bis, *a3a- 
 picrStyTt /cat eifte ajy eKaSupt crS?; avrov 17 
 \tirpa, his leprosy was cleansed, i. e. was 
 healed (comp. Luke 5, 13 et Mark 1,42), 
 Matt. 11, 5. Mark 1, 41. 42. Luke 4, 27. 5, 
 13. 7, 22. 17, 14. 17. So Sept. and ing 
 Lev. 14, 7. 8, 11. 15, 27. 
 
 2. Trop. to cleanse, in a moral sense, i. e. 
 a) From sin or pollution, by expiation, to 
 purify, Pass. Heb. 9, 22. 23 ; c. ace. et ano 
 TWOS, 1 John 1, 7 TO af/xa Irjcrov . . . *a3a- 
 pi(i fjpas duo Trdcrrjs ap-aprias, i. e. from the 
 guilt of sin and its consequences, v. 9. 
 (Sept. for in inu Ps. 51, 4 ; 153 Ex. 29, 
 37.) With ace. and dat. Tit. 2, 14 iva KU- 
 ZapitTT) eauraj Xaov, that he might purify, 
 sanctify, for himself. b) Genr. and with 
 out expiation, to cleanse, to purify, lo free from 
 moral uncleanness ; c. ace. et dno TWOS, 
 2 Cor. 7, 1 KC&apicr(t)p.ev eavToiis dno Travros 
 fMo\vo-p.ov arapKos. With ace. simply, Acts 
 15, 9. Eph. 5, 26. Heb. 9, 14. James 4, 8. 
 So c. UTTO Ecclus. 38, 10 ; simpl. Jos. Ant. 
 11. 5. 4 ult. de Mace, j 1. 
 
 3. In the Levitical sense, to cleanse, to 
 make lawful* c. ace. a) Genr. Mark 7, 
 1 9 TCOV TO e ^wSej/ el<nroptv6n(vov ... f is rov 
 afpfSptova eKTTOpfVfrat, Ka%apiov Travra ra 
 Pp<afj.ara, cleansing all meats, by separating 
 what is unclean, and thus making what re 
 mains clean and lawful ; here the part. 
 Kcftapi^ov refers to the preceding clause by 
 way of apposition ; comp. Winer 48. 1. b. 
 Buttm. I 131. n. 13. b) Spec, to declare 
 clean, C. ace. Acts 10, 15 a 6 3for eVaSapio-e, 
 crv P.TJ Koivov. 11,9. So Sept. and ~,FJU 
 Lev. 13, 6. 23. 28. 34. 
 
 Kd&apl<TfJ,6s, ov, 6, (KaSapi fw,) 1. a 
 cleansing, purification; e. g. of the Jewish 
 washings before meals, John 2, 6 ; comp. 
 Matt. 15, 2. Trop. of the ceremonial puri 
 fication of lepers, Mark 1, 44. Luke 5, 14 ; 
 see Lev. c. 14. Also of a woman after 
 child-birth, Luke 2, 22; see Lev. c. 12. 
 Sept. for inb Lev. 14, 32 ; nina Lev. 15, 
 13. So of baptism as a rite of purification, 
 John 3, 25 e yeWro ovv TJTT](TIS . . . TTC/H iea- 
 Sapioyiov. Clem. Alex. Strom. 6. 6. 
 
 2. Trop. in a moral sense, purification 
 from sin, expiation, Heb. 1, ?. 2 Pet. 1, 9. 
 
362 
 
 Sept. Ex. 30, 10. Job 7, 20; an expiatory 
 offering Luc. Asin. 22. 
 
 os, d, 6i>, clean, pure, i. e. un- 
 soiled, unalloyed ; see Tittm. de Syn. N. T. 
 p. 26. It is a primitive word having no 
 affinity with ai pco, Passow s. v. Comp. 
 Sanscr. cudh to be purified ; also Lat. casl- 
 us, Engl. chaste, Germ, keusch. 
 
 1. clean, pure, physically, Matt. 23, 26. 
 27, 59 evrv\ieiv avrb o~iv86i>i xaSapq. Heb. 
 10, 22 uSari xaSapw. Rev. 15, 6. 19, 8. 14. 
 21, 18 bis. 21. 22/1. Trop. Luke 11, 41, 
 see in tWi/u. Sept. for Tina Ez. 36, 25. 
 Ex. 25, 31. 36. So Jos. Ant. 3. 8. 5 ovpa- 
 vos. Ml V. H. 13. 1 mid. vdara. Xen. 
 CEc. 10. 7, 12. Trop. in a Levitical or 
 symbolical sense, John 13, 10 eWl Kcftapbs 
 oXor. So of meats, clean, lawful, not for 
 bidden, Rom. 14, 20. Tit. 1,15 bis, -jravra 
 
 2. In a moral sense, clean, pure, i. e. 
 a) guiltless, innocent, Acts 18, 6 KaSapbs 
 ey<a. With diro TIVOS, Acts 20, 26 *a3. eya> 
 OTTO rot) at/xaroy. Sept. for h p2 Gen. 44, 
 13; c. dn6 for ) n^5 Gen. 24, 8. So 
 .1. V. H. 8. 5. Dem. 122. 17. b) sin 
 cere, upright, void of evil. Matt. 5, 8 ot KO- 
 Sapo, rfi Kapbla. John 13, 10 vp.fis KaSapoi 
 tore. v. 11. l*Tim. 1, 5. 3, 9. 2 Tim. 1,3. 
 2,22. Tit. 1, 15 rots KoSapols. James 1,27. 
 1 Pet. 1, 22. So John 15, 3, the figure 
 being taken from the vine, cleansed, pruned; 
 see in KaScu pco. Sept. for "13 Ps. 24, 4 ; 
 Til-ID Ps. 51, 11 ; eft Gen. 20, 5. 6. So 
 Xen Cyr. 8. 7. 20, 23. 
 
 KcfeapOTTT?, TJTOS, 17, (*a3apos,) clean 
 ness, pureness, in the Levitical sense, Heb. 
 9, 13. So phys. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 22 ; mor. 
 Arr. Epict. 4. 11. 5. Plato Legg. 778. c. 
 
 KcfoeSpa, as, f;, (KcftefrfjMi,) a seat; 
 Matt. 21, 12 et Mark 11, 15 ras K. rvv TTO- 
 \ovvra>v. Trop. Matt. 23, 2 KaSi&iv eVt 
 TTJS KaSic pas MwuWoor to sit in Moses seat, 
 i. e. to occupy his place as an expounder of 
 the law. Sept. for nffiia 1 Sam. 20, 17. 24; 
 ratf 1 K. 8, 13. Pol. 1. 21. 2. Hdian. 2. 
 3/17. 
 
 /ca^e^O/ittt, (<cara, eb/uii,) impf. eVca- 
 Ze6p.r)v, for the augm. see Buttm. $ 86. n. 2 ; 
 pr. to seat oneself, i. e. to sit down, to sit, 
 Matt. 26, 55. Luke 2, 46. John 4, 6. 20, 
 12. Acts 6, 15. [20, 9.] John 11, 20 eV r 
 O"KW eKa3e fro i e. continued sitting, Buttm. 
 ^137. 4. Sept. for ^ Ez. 26, 16. 
 Hdian. 4. 2. 5. Xen. Conv. 1. 8. 
 
 i. e. a3 ely, see in els no. 1 . b. y. 
 
 adv. (Kara, efjs,) in succes 
 sion, in order, i. e. successively, consecutive 
 ly ; Luke 1, 3 Kcftfgrjs <roi ypd^ai, i. e. to 
 write a connected narrative. Acts 11, 4. 
 18, 23. (So Ml V. H. 8. 7. Plut. Symp. 
 1. 1. 5 fin.) With the art. 6 KaSt^s, 
 successive, i. e. subsequent, following, oi 
 pers. Acts 3, 24 xal T>V KaSe^iJy sc. irpo(pn- 
 ro>v. Of time Luke 8, 1. Classic writers 
 prefer ((pffjs, see Passow. Plut. 1. c. pen. 
 KcfeevSa), (KUTU, euSw,) impf. (KaSevbov, 
 for the augm. see Buttm. 86. n. 2 ; pr. 
 to lie down to sleep, Horn. II. 1. 611. Od. 4. 
 304. Sept. for 2DBJ 1 Sam. 3, 2. 3. 5 sq. 
 In N. T. genr. to sleep, to go to sleep, 
 and impf. to be asleep, intrans. a) Pr. 
 Matt. 8, 24. 13, 25. 25, 5. 26, 40. 43. 45. 
 Mark 4, 27. 38. 13, 36. 14, 37 bis. 40. 41. 
 Luke 22, 46. 1 Thess. 5, 7 bis. Sept. for 
 jtih Cant. 5, 3; astfl Gen. 28, 13. So 
 Hdian. 7. 1. 22. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 42. b) 
 Spec, to be in a deep sleep, in a state of un 
 consciousness like one dead ; Matt. 9, 24 
 ov yap aiTf^ave . . . dXXa KcfteiiSfi. Mark 5, 
 39. Luke 8, 52. Hence once of those really 
 dead (like Koi/iaw), 1 Thess. 5, 10 etre ypq- 
 yopa)p.cv erre Ka3et>8ayiei>. So Sept. for "jtJi 
 Dan. 12, 2. c) Trop. i. q. to be slothful, 
 secure, not vigilant, Eph. 5, 14 eyetpe 6 
 Ka3(i>8av. 1 Thess. 5, 6. So Xen. An. 1. 
 3. 11. 
 
 C, 6, (KaS^yeo/iai,) a lead 
 er, guide ; in N. T. in the sense of teacher, 
 master, i. q. pa$3/, Matt. 23, 8. 10 bis. 
 Diog. Laert. 1. 13, 27. Plut. Alex. M. 5. 
 
 KajriKG), (/cara, fJKcn,) to come or reach 
 down to, as mountains to the sea, Hdian. 8. 
 
 1. 12. Xen. Hell. 5. 4. 17. In N. T. im- 
 pers. KaSrjKd, it is becoming, it is Jit, 
 right, absol. Acts 22, 22 ov Ka^tJKfv (Rec. 
 Ka^iJKov) avrbv rjv. Part. neut. TO KaSi}- 
 K o v, what is meet, right ; Rom. 1 , 28 TO. p.fj 
 Ka%r)Kovra, things not meet, i. e. abominable. 
 So Ecclus. 10, 23. Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 4. Part. 
 2 Mace. 6, 4. Luc. Gall. 10. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 
 2. 5. 
 
 Kdarrj/Jiai, (Kara, 7?/xat,) 2 pers. Kcfey 
 Acts 23, 3 and imperat. KU%OV Heb. 1, 13, 
 later forms instead of Kc&rja-ai and KaStyo-o, 
 Buttm. I 108. II. 3. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 359. 
 
 1. to sit down, to sit still, to sit, intrans. 
 and more common than TJfiai, Buttm. 1. c. 
 a) Pr. to sit down, Matt. 15, 29. 27, 36. 
 John 6, 3. al. Sept. for 3^ Gen. 21, 16. 
 So Horn. II. 1. 569. b) Genr. to sit, ab 
 sol. i. e. to sit there, to sit by, Matt. 13, 2. 
 Luke 5, 17. 1 Cor. 14, 30. " With an ad 
 junct of place, e. g. W Mark 2. 6 ;. ov Acts 
 
363 
 
 2, 2 ; wSe James 2, 3 ; also with a prep. 
 e. g. direvavri TWOS Matt. 27, 61 (Sept. Gen. 
 21, 16) ; fir c. ace. of place Mark 13, 3, 
 comp. in els no. 4 ; e /c dtgiuv Matt. 22, 44. 
 Acts 2, 34, comp. in * no. 1 . b ; <f v c. dat. 
 of place Matt. 11, 16. Mark 4, 1. Luke 10, 
 13 (Sept. 2 K. 6, 32. Xen. Hell. 4. 4. 3) ; 
 iv Bfia v, tv TOIS depots Col. 3, 1. Mark 
 16, 5 ; firdva TIVOS Matt. 28, 2. Rev. 6,8 ; 
 firi c. gen. Matt. 24, 3. Acts 8, 28. Rev. 
 4, 2. 9, 17 (Sept. 1 Sam. 1, 9. Diod. Sic. 
 1. 52) ; ri c. dat. of place Acts 3, 10 (Sept. 
 Is. 36, 12. Xen. An. 4. 2. 6) ; c. ace. Matt. 
 9, 9. Mark 2, 14. John 12, 15. Rev. 6, 2 
 (Sept. Jer. 25, 30) ; fjard c. gen. of pers. 
 Matt. 26, 58; irapd c. ace. of place Matt. 
 13, 1. Mark 10, 46; jrepi c. ace. of pers. 
 around whom, in whose circle, one sits, 
 Mark 3, 32. 34 (Xen. An. 4. 2. 5 dpQi 
 Trvp) ; Trpbs TO (>>s Luke 22, 56 ; vrro TO 
 vrroTToStoi/ James 2, 3 ; so Sept. Judg. 4, 5. 
 1 K. 13, 14. c) Of a dignitary who sits 
 in public, e. g. a judge Matt. 27, 19. Acts 
 23, 3 ; a queen, jSao-tXio-o-a, Rev. 18, 7. So 
 Sept. Ex. 18,14. Dem. 507. 26. Plato Apol. 
 35. c. 
 
 2. Spec, to abide, to dwell, to be ; with ev 
 c. dat. of place, Matt. 4, 16 bis, rots KaS^/ie- 
 vois (V X^P9 * a O" K 9 Sawirov. quoted from 
 Is. 9, 1 where Sept. KaroiK<r a> for stli^ . 
 Luke 1, 79. Acts 14, 8. (So Sept. for nttJ J 
 Neh. 11, 6. 25. Ecclus. 50. 26; so sedeo 
 Cic. ad Div. 16. 7.) With ri c. gen. of 
 place Rev. 14, 6 *a3. eVt TTJS yiyy, where 
 Rec. KdToiKovvras , also with or/ c. ace. 
 Luke 21, 35 ca3. eVt irpoa-amov TTJS yrjs. 
 So Alciphr. I. Ep. 25 eVt TIVI. + 
 
 Kcfernj,eplVO<S) j], 6v, (/card, f)fj.epa,) dai 
 ly ; Acts 6, 1 iv TTJ SiaKoviq TTJ Ka3. in the 
 daily ministration of alms. Judith 12, 15. 
 Polyaen. 4. 2. 10. Plut. Pyrrh. 14. A word 
 of the later Greek, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 53. 
 
 Kcfei^O), (*ard, tfco,) f. KaSicrw Matt. 25, 
 31, instead of fut. Ka3iqcra> or Att. Ka3io>, 
 seeButtm. 114ifa>. Matth. 181. n. 3. Pas- 
 sow sub v. Aor. 1 e/cdSio-a, for the augm. 
 see in Buttm. 86. n. 2. Trans, to cause to 
 sit down, to seat ; also intrans. to sit down, 
 to sit. 
 
 1. Trans, to cause to sit down, to seat, to 
 set; with ev of place, Eph. 1, 20 K<U eVedSt- 
 trtv [avroi/1 tv fte^ia avroi). Sept. for aittSl n 
 1 K. 2, 8. 2 Chr. 23, 20. So Luc. Nigr. 18. 
 Xen. Hell. 5. 4. 6. Spec, to cause to sit, to 
 set, as judges, 1 Cor. 6, 4 TOVTOVS /caStfere 
 sc. KpiTas v. SiKaordr. So fully Luc. Tox. 
 62 ov yap cKa3icra/ici/ Tiva StKaor^i TOV Xo- 
 yov. Plato Legg. 873. e. 
 
 2. Intrans. or with eavrov impl. and also 
 Mid. to seat oneself, i. e. to sit down, to sit ; 
 see in oyw no. 2, and Buttm. } 130. n. 2. 
 
 a) Pr. and genr. Matt. 5, 1 dvffZr) els TO 
 opos KCU KoSicravros OVTOV KT\. 13, 48. 
 Mark 9, 35. Luke 4, 20. 5, 3. 14, 28. 31. 
 16, 6. John 8, 2. Acts 13, 14. 16, 13. 1 Cor. 
 10, 7. Sept. for 2^ Gen. 37, 24. Neh. 1, 
 4. So Xen. Cyr. 8. L 2. With an adjunct 
 of place, e. g. auroO here Matt. 26, 36 ; &8f 
 Mark 14, 32. So with prepositions, els 
 TOV vabv TOV 3. 2 Thess. 2, 4, comp. in els 
 no. 4 (Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 1); IK 8eicav 
 Matt. 20, 21. 23. Mark 10, 37. 40. 16, 19; 
 tv c. dat. ev TW 3po f&> Rev. 3, 21 bis; ev 
 g f m Heb. 1, 3. 8, 1. lO, 12. 12, 2 (Sept. 
 Jer. 39, 3) ; eVt c. gen. eVl SpdVou Matt. 
 19, 28 bis. 25, 31. Luke 22, 30. Acts 2, 30 
 (Sept. 1 K. 2, 12. 8, 20. Xen. Eq. 7. 5) ; 
 ri TOU jSij/xaros, of a judge, etc. John 19, 13. 
 Acts 12, 21. 25, 6. 17; (Diod. Sic. 1. 92. 
 Plato Legg. 659. b ;) eVt TTJS Mttvmtt <a- 
 Se Spay Matt. 23, 2, see in (caSe Spa ; also rt 
 c. dat. eVi avra sc. TU> TrcoXw Mark 11, 7; 
 eVt c. ace. ecp ov Mark 11, 2. Luke 19, 30. 
 John 12, 14. Rev. 20, 4 ; trop. Acts 2, 3. 
 (Sept. Gen. 48, 2. Thuc. 1. 136.) Kare- 
 vavTi TIVOS Mark 12, 41 ; perd nvorRev. 
 3, 21 bis ; <rvv TIVI Acts 8, 31. 
 
 b) Spec, to abide, to continue, e. g. eV r^ 
 TrdXei Luke 24, 49; absol. Acts 18, 11. 
 Sept. for isia Jer. 49, 32 ; n iJJ Ex. 16, 29. 
 Judg. 9, 41. 1 Mace. 2, 7. 29 ; comp. se 
 deo Cic. de Div. 16. 7. 
 
 ij f. KaSijo-oo, (/card, ;/,) aor. 1 
 , Buttm. ^ 108. 1 ; pr. to send or throw 
 down, i. e. in N. T. to Ze down, c. ace. et eir, 
 Luke 5,19 Ka^irJKav UVTOV . . .els TO p.ecroi>. 
 Acts 9, 25 *ca3. 8ia TOV Teixovs. (Palzeph. 
 13. 3.) Pass, or Mid. part. Ka^u^evos foil. 
 by ri TTJy yrjs Acts 10, 11 ; TOV ovpavov 
 1 1, 5. Sept. 1 Sam. 2, 16. Jos. Ant. 2. 3. 
 4, c. els. Plato Phaed. 61. c. 
 
 Kcfeia-TTjLLt,, also xaSio- TOW Acts 17, 
 15. Plut. Cato Min. 70 fin. (comp. in to-Tijp.1 
 init.) fut. KaTaoTTjo-ca, aor. 1 KaTfaTr)(Ta. 
 To set down, i. q. genr. to set, to place, in N. T. 
 found only in the trans, forms ; also Pass. 
 or Mid. to be set, to be, etc. See in la-njp-i, 
 and comp. Buttm. 5 106. n. 5. 
 
 1 . to set down, to place, to cause to stand, 
 pr. Horn. II. 9. 202. Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 10. 
 Mid. or Pass, to set or place oneself, to be 
 placed, to stand, Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 2. Hence 
 in N. T. Act. Ka3i on;p,t, to cause to be, to 
 render, to make ; c. ace. impl. et adj. 2 Pet. 1, 
 8 TaiJTa . . . OIIK dpyovs [v/xaf] . . . KaSi crrr/onv 
 rrX. Pass, to be or become, to be rendered, 
 
364 
 
 /cat 
 
 made; James 3, 6 OVTOS f] yKaxrvi] /ca3t- 
 crrarai Iv rois p.(\fcriv. 4, 4. (Time. 4. 92 
 /caSiorarat.) Rom. 5, 19 bis, a/xaprcoXot /ca- 
 recrraSjjaai ot TroXXoi KrX. Act. Jos. Ant. 
 6. 5. 6 TOV Stop avrois fi>nfvr} /caraar^crai. 
 Xen. An. 6. 3. 18. 
 
 2. to se/, to constitute, to appoint, sc. per 
 sons ; so c. ace. et tiri c. gen. to set one 
 over any thing, Matt. 24, 45 ov Karearncrev 
 o Kvpios avrov errt rrjs Sepewretas avrov. 25, 
 21. 23. Luke 12, 42. Acts 6, 3 ; eVi c. dat. 
 Matt. 24, 47. Luke 12, 44 ; eVi c. ace. 
 Heb. 2, 7. So eVt c. gen. Sept. for jfo 
 Gen. 41, 41. 43; eVt c. ace. Sept. Jer. 1, 
 10. Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 9. With two ace. of 
 pers. and station, to constitute, to make; 
 Luke 12, 14 TIS p-e KarecTTTjcre 8iKaaTf]v f) 
 pepia-Trjv f(j) vp.as ; Acts 7, 10. 27. 35. 
 Heb. 7, 28. So with ace. of pers. omitted 
 Tit. 1, 5. (Xen. An. 3. 4. 30.) Pass. c. 
 ace. of manner Heb. 5, 1, see Buttm. 131. 
 8 ; c. f ls TI 8, 3. Sept. for trtfo Ex. 2, 14. 
 Gen. 47, 6. al. So genr. Palaeph. 23. 4. 
 Diod. Sic. 19. 15. Xen. Ag. 3. 5. 
 
 3. to set one down on a journey, i. e. to 
 accompany, to conduct, out of respect or for 
 security, c. ace. Acts 17, 15 ot Ka^io-Trnvres 
 iov TiavKov. Sept. for JOSH 2 Chr. 28, 15. 
 Hdian. 2/8. 10. Xen. An. 4. 8. 8. 
 
 KoSxo adv. (for Ka3 o,) lit. according 
 to what, i. e. according as, as, i. q. a3a. 
 Rom. 8,26 *a3o Set 2 Cor. 8, 12 bis, *a36 
 eav fXTI Tt * KT ^- tn proportion as. 1 Pet. 4, 
 13. Sept. for lois fix Lev. 9, 5. Plut. 
 comp. Agesi. cum Pomp. 4. Comp. Phryn. 
 et Lob. p. 425. 
 
 Kcfoo\tKO$, ,7, ov, (Kara, oXoj.) catholic, 
 i. e. general, universal, found in many edi 
 tions in the titles to the epistles of James, 
 Peter. John, and Jude, i. e. the catholic epis 
 tles ; so called as being addressed not to 
 any particular church, but to Christians at 
 large.- -Arr. Epict. 2. 20. 2. Pol. 8. 4. 11. 
 
 Kcfookov adv. (Ka3 6 Xov,) pr. through 
 out the whole, i. e. wholly, entirely ; and *a- 
 SdXou fj.r/, not at all, Acts 4. 18. Sept. c. 
 neg. for ipftab Ez. 13, 3. 22. 17, 14. Diod. 
 Sic. 4. 5. Xen. Eq. 8. 1. 
 
 /ca^07rXift), f. urco, (Kara intens. oTrXi- 
 w,) to arm fully, to equip ; Pass, to be fully 
 armed, equipped, Luke 11,21. Sept. Jer. 
 46, 9. JEshin. 75. 33. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 11. 
 
 tecfeopdai, , (KUTU, opaco.) to look down 
 upon, from a higher place, to behold, Sept. 
 for ttSO Num. 24, 2. Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 10. 
 In N. T. genr. and trop. to perceive, to see 
 clearly, Pass Rom. 1 20. So 3 Mace. 3, 
 
 11. Luc. Pseudom. 25; pr. Hdian. 4. 15. 
 14. Xen. An. 1. 8. 26. 
 
 adv. (a3 o TI,) lit. according 
 to what, i. e. how, in what manner, Thuc. 
 4. 118. InN. T. 
 
 1 . according as, as, Acts 2, 45 et 4, 35 
 KdSort uv TIS xP f ^ v f ?X f - Sept. for ""lUJXID 
 Ex. 1,1 2. 17; 3 Lev. 27, 12. Diod. Sic. 4. 5. 
 
 2. for that, because that, inasmuch as, 
 Luke 1, 7 KaSori r/ EX. ?)v (rreipa. 19, 9. 
 Acts 2, 24. [17, 31.] Sept. for Chald. i*j 
 Dan. 2, 8. Pol. 18. 21. 6. Thuc. 6. 8. 
 
 , adv. (/cara, wy,) a later form in 
 stead of /ca3a, Phryn. et Lob. p. 425 sq. 
 Sturz de Dial. Alex. p. 74 ; according as, 
 as ; comp. the simple coy. 
 
 1 . Pr. implying manner : a) Genr. 
 Matt. 21, 6 Ka3o>s Trpocrfra^ev avrols 6 I. 
 Mark 11, 6. Luke 11, 1. John 1, 23. Acts 
 
 10, 47. 1 Cor. 4, 17. Gal. 2, 7. al. ssepiss. 
 Praegn. Mark 15, 8 ^ p|aro an-eto-Sai. KaScos 
 del fTToifi avrols, began .to demand [that he 
 should do] as he had ever done to them. John 
 6, 58. With elfj.1, i. q. such as, 1 Thess. 2, 
 13 dXXa, Ka3a>? e cm aX^Soos 1 . 1 John 3, 2 ; 
 comp. in et/it II. 7. In a protasis, with ov- 
 rcos in the apodosis, John 3, 14. 2 Cor. 1, 
 5. 1 Thess. 2, 4; also 6/ioiW Luke 6, 31. 
 Sept. for "i? Ex. 10, 29, comp. 1 Chr. 24, 
 31. 26, 12. So Palaeph. 52. 7. Plut. de 
 Pyth. Orac. 21. Comp. Greg. Cor. p. 319. 
 ed. Schaef. b) After verbs of speaking, 
 etc. how, Acts 15, 14 2vp.(wv e^rjyrja-aTo, 
 KaSwy TrpSirov KT\. 3 John 3. c) In the 
 sense of proportion, comparison, Mark 4, 33 
 KaSoj? r)o~vvavTO aKovfiv. John 5. 30. Acts 
 
 11, 29. 1 Pet. 4, 10. So Sept. Num. 26, 
 54. Pol. 7. 9. 15. 
 
 2. In a causal sense, as, i. e. exen as, 
 inasmuch as, since ; John 17, 2 Ka3a>s ?Sco- 
 K.O.S au7-cS KT\. Rom. 1, 28. 1 Cor. 1,6. 5, 7. 
 Eph. 1/4. Phil. 1, 7. 
 
 3. Of time, as. when, Acts 7, 17 Ka3a>s fie 
 
 o XP" VOS - ^ Mace. 1, 31. -f- 
 
 fcai,, conjunct, and, also, one of the most 
 frequent words in the Greek language ; and 
 as used in N. T. taking a strong colouring 
 from the Hebrew ; see Winer 57. 2, 3. 
 Matth. 620. Buttm. 149. m. 8. Kiihner 
 321. 
 
 1. Simply copulative, and. a) Connect 
 ing single words and clauses ; e. g. Nouns, 
 Matt. 2, 1 1 xpvcrbv Kal \iftavov KOI crfJLiipvav. 
 13, 55. 23, 6. 7. Luke 6, 38 ; and so when 
 the latter noun is in place of a genitive, by 
 Hendiadys, Acts 23, 6 irepl (\iridos KOI 
 . Rom. 2, 20. (Sept. Gen. 1, 14. 
 
/cat, 
 
 365 
 
 3, 16.) Pronouns, Matt. 8, 29 rt e /*ot /cat 
 <roi, sec in e yo> no. 3. Adjectives, Rom. 7, 12 
 T) tvro\i] dyia /cat SiKdia KU\ dyaSr;. Veris, 
 Mark 4, 27 /caSevSj; /cat e yeipTjrai . . . /3Xa- 
 <rrdvT] /cat P.TJKVVTJTCH. Acts 1,21. 7, 17. 9, 
 28 ; and so where one verb is taken adverb 
 ially, Luke (>. 48 fa-Ka^e KOI ej3d%vvf, see 
 fully in /SaSui/a. John 8, 59. Rom. 10, 20. 
 Col. 2, 5. al. A<?rerl>s. Hcb. 1, 1 7n>Xv//epa>j 
 /cat TroXvrpoVoK. Also clauses, Matt. 7, 25 
 /cat KaTffirj rj /3pox7/, KOL r;X3oi> ot Trorafioi, 
 /cat firvfixrav ol itvepoi, /crX. Matt. 1, 17. 
 John 1,1. Rom. 14, 7. al. Hence /cat is 
 mostly n simple continuative, marking the 
 progress of a consecutive discourse ; e. g. 
 Matt. 1, 23 tv yacrrpl eet, KOI reerat vlov, 
 /cat /caXfVovo-t KT\. 2, 11. Mark 4, 32. Luke 
 
 2, 34. il, 44. 1 Cor. 12, 5. 6. al. (Hdian. 
 
 3. 12. 5. Xen. An. 4. 1. I5sq.) In like 
 manner as connecting negative clauses, 
 where the negative particle may be omitted 
 in the latter, which is then rendered nega 
 tive by the continuative power of /cat, e. g. 
 James 3, 14 /XT) /caTOKau^ucrSe /cat ijsfvSfcr Sf 
 KT\. 2 Cor. 12, 20. Gal. 3, 28 OVK eVt apo-ei/ 
 /cat 3r}Xu. Matt. 13, 15. Mark 4, 12. John 
 12, 40. Acts 28, 27 ; comp. Sept. Is. 6, 9 sq. 
 See Winer 59. 7 pen. Passow no. 13. [VII.] 
 (Jos. Ant. 2. 15. 5 init.) But in two ex 
 amples alter ovre, the /cat does not thus 
 carry forward the negative ; as John 4, 1 1 
 ovre iivr\rjp.a ex etf Ka (ppeap ecrri /3a2Ju. 
 3 John 10. So Luc. D. Mar. 14. 1 oure rr)i> 
 nai8a rj8iKT](Tfv, KOI avro rjdri re Si/rj/ce. Arr. 
 Alex. M. 4. 7. 6. See Winer 1. c. The 
 use of /cat in this continuative sense takes a 
 strong colouring from the Heb. use of } , 
 espec. } conversive both of fut. and prat, 
 which is also continuative, see Heb. Lex. 
 arts. 1 and -1 . Heb. Gr. 48 b. Ewald Heb. 
 Gr. p. 547. Thus : a) The simple /cat 
 is put very frequently in N. T. particularly 
 in the narrative style, where classic writers 
 either put nothing, or use some other parti 
 cle, as Se, uXXd, rare , and the like ; so es- 
 pec. in Matt. Mark, Luke, and Rev. e. g. 
 Matt. 14, 9sq. 27, 28 sq. Mark 1, 31 sq. 
 3, 13 sq. Luke 2, 25 sq. 4, 14sq.*Rev. 11, 
 7 sq. al. sacp. So } and Sept. /cat 1 Sam. 
 15, 3 sq. Is. 11, 12 sq. Ez. 5, 1 sq. comp. 
 1 Mace. 1, 1 sq. For /cat eyeixTo, see be 
 low in lett. b. /3) From the simplicity of 
 the Heb. /cat with a demonstr. pron. is some 
 times written where* Greek usage employs 
 the relative ; e. g. Luke 6, 6 /cat rjv eVet V- 
 3pa>7roy. /cat fj ^eip avrov 17 8e ia TJV r)pd. 
 11, 44. 16, 19. 1 Cor. 7, 13. So Sept. 
 and * Is. 13, 14 ; so } , Sept. 6s, Job 29, 12. 
 
 See Heb. Lex. art. J no. 1. ee. The case 
 where /cat with a demonstr. pron. follows a 
 relative clause, instead of another relative, is 
 a frequent Greek construction ; see Matth. 
 ^ 472. 3. Kiihner } 334. 1. Buttm. 5 151. II. 
 4. Winer $22. p. 173. So Luke 17, 31. 
 Acts 3, 13 ov vp.fls p-ev TrapeSw/carf, /cat fjp- 
 i/ijcracrSe avrov /crX. 1 Cor. 8, 6. 2 Pet. 2, 3 
 Rev. 2, 18. 17, 2. So Dem. 123. 7. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 1. 38. 
 
 b) Continuative in respect to time, i. e 
 connecting clauses and sentences in tht 
 order of time. Thus a) At the begin 
 ning of a sentence, where any thing is nar 
 rated as done immediately or soon after that 
 which the preceding context narrates ; here 
 /cat is equivalent to the more usual rare, 
 then, after that, Matt. 3, 16. 4, 3. 21 /cat 
 7rpo/3af fKfftfv. 10, 1. 14, 12. 14. Mark 1, 
 29. 4, 21. 24. 26. al. comp. Tore Matt. 15, 
 12. (Xen. Hi. 1. 8. Cyr. 1. 3. 11.) Here 
 belongs the phraso /cat fyevero and (then) 
 it came to pass, corresponding to the Heb. 
 **"!!, see Heb. Lex. art. fpn no. 1. Heb. 
 Gram. 126 b. 2. Usually with a nota 
 tion of time ; e. g. with ore Matt. 7, 28. 
 10, 1. 19, 1 ; w? Luke 2, 15; iv c. dat. 
 Mark 1,9. 4, 4. Luke 1, 59. 9, 18. 14, 1 
 al. /xera Luke 2, 46 ; with gen. absol. Matt 
 9, 10 ; with ace. and inf. Mark 2, 23. Else 
 where e yei/ero 8e id. Luke 3, 21. 5, 1. 6, 1. 
 /3) In an apodosis, e. g. where any thing is 
 said to follow at once, immediately upon 
 that which is contained in the protasis, i. q. 
 and immediately ; Mark 1 , 27 rols Trvevp.. 
 d/ca3. eVtraercrei /cat VTrciKOiiovcriv aurco. Luke 
 8, 25. Matt. 8, 15. Mark 2, 14. Luke 4, 36. 
 Matt. 26, 53. Also where the time is less 
 definite, i. q. and then, and afterwards, with 
 out any notation of time, Mark 12, 1 /cat 
 (fdoro CIVTOV yecopyoty. Luke 1, 56 ffj.eive 
 8e . . . P.TJVCIS rpfls, /cat vTffcrrpf^fv /crX. John 
 4,40. Acts 5,7. (Theocr. Id. 7. 10-12; 
 comp. Passow in /cat no. 5.) So with a 
 notation of time, Matt. 28, 9 as 8e tiropev- 
 OVTO . . . /cat I8ov 6 Irja-ovs KT\. (Xen. An. 
 1.10. 15 ore.) After *at e yeWro or e y- 
 vero 8e with a note of time, see above in a. 
 Matt. 9, 10 /cat I8ov. Mark 2, 15. Luke 
 5, 1. 2, 15. 21. 9. 28. 51. .Spec, in the 
 construction ijyyiKtv TJ wpa /cat /crX. Matt. 
 26, 45 ; also rjv 8e &pa Tplrrj /cat /crX. Mark 
 15, 25. Luke 23, 44 ; where some need 
 lessly take /cat as in the place of a relative. 
 So Thuc. 1. 50 rjStj 8e rji> ctye . . . (cat o r 
 KopiVStot /crX. Xen. An. 6. 4. 26 jJ8r} p.ti 
 djacpt ijXt ou 8vcrp.as TJV, xal ol *E\\r)i>(s KT\ 
 See Matth. f>20 p. 1257 
 
real 
 
 366 
 
 d 
 
 c) Continuative in respect to sense, i. e. 
 before the apodosis are! connecting it as a 
 consequent with the protasis as its antece 
 dent, e. g. a) Where the apodosis affirms 
 what will take place provided that is done 
 which is contained in the protasis, i. q. and 
 so, and thus, and then, usually followed by 
 a fut. or pres. in a future sense. So with 
 Irnperat. in the protasis ; Matt. 4, 1 9 SeCre 
 OTri cro) uov, Kal TfoirjcrciO vfids aXfeij aV3p&>- 
 iTcav. 5, 15. 7, 7. 9, 18 eVt Ses- rrjv X f ^P a 
 arou eV O.VTTJV, KOI fijtrtTat. 11, 29. Mark 6, 
 22. 11, 29. Luke 6, 35. John 2, 19. 4, 35. 
 7,33. Acts 9, 6. 2 Cor. 13, 11. James 1, 
 
 5. al. saep. (Sept. and } 1 Sam. 15, 16. 
 Epict. Ench. c. 21, 23. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 
 16 P.TI oKvti. ..Kai KrX.) Also genr. Matt. 
 27, 64 Kai eorai rj f(T\arr] Tr\dvr) -^dpaiv rrjs 
 jrpa>Tris. Luke 12, 19. Heb. 3, 19 KCU /3Xe- 
 nofifv. 12, 9. (Sept. and ] Gen. 24, 40.) 
 After ft or tdv in the protasis, then ; James 
 4, 15 fuv 6 Kvpios SeXijcrT; KOI r)(rci)p.ev, Kal 
 noir]o-a>fjifv KT\. if God will and we live, 
 THEN we shall do this or that. Rev. 3, 20 
 tav . . . nai. Sept. lav . . . Kai for 1 DX 
 Lev. 26, 3. 4 ; . . . <ai Judith 5, 20. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 7. 22. Once followed by an Im- 
 perat. John 7, 52 epevvrjtrov Kai iSe, where 
 the second Imperat. is equiv. to a fut. and 
 so ihou shall see ; Winer 44. 2. Gesen. 
 Heb. Gr. } 127. 2. So Baruch 2. 21 ; 
 comp. Luc. D. Deor. 2. 2 /3au/e Kai 6S|m. 
 Lat. divide et impera. 0) Where the apo 
 dosis affirms what is or will be done in con 
 sequence of, because of that which is con 
 tained in the protasis, i. q. and so, and there 
 fore, i. q. so that, therefore, wherefore. 
 E. g. foil, by a fut. Acts 7, 43 *ai fj.froi.KiS) 
 ifids Ki-X. quoted from Amos 5, 27 where 
 Sept. and "l . Rom. 11, 35. Foil, by a pres. 
 Matt. 11, 18. 19 Kai Xe yovo-iv. John 7, 22. 
 Foil, by a praet. Rom. 4, 3. Gal. 2, 16. 3, 
 
 6. James 2, 23. Sept. and "] 1 Sam. 15,23. 
 So Xen. (Ec. 7. 22. 
 
 d) As an explicative copula, i. q. namely, 
 to wit, even, between words and clauses, 
 see Viger. et Herm. p. 525, 835. a) Be 
 tween nouns which are strictly in apposi 
 tion, e. g. Matt. 21, 5 eVi ovov Kai TrcoXov 
 vlw inrovyiov. So in 6 Seos Kai Trarijp 
 when alone, 1 Cor. 15, 24. James 1, 27. 
 3, 9 ; but in the phrase 6. 3. K. Trarrjp rov 
 Kvpiov I. X. it is merely copulative, 2 Cor. 
 1, 3. 11, 31. Eph. 1, 3. al. Also Matt. 
 13, 41 Kavra TO. o-KoVSoXa KOI TOVS KrX. 
 Rom. 1, 5. Comp. 1 1 Sam. 28, 3. 17, 40. 
 So Luc. Tox. 26. Xen. An. 4. 5. 9 yvvai- 
 KO.S Kal Kopas. jB~) Before a clause added 
 by way of explanation, (KOI enexegetical,) 
 
 e. g. Matt. 1, 25 enoirja-fv uts 7rpoo~(Tatv 
 avrcp . . . Kal 7rape Xa/3e TTJV yvz/aiKa. Luke 5, 
 35 fXfvcrovrui fie typcpcu KOI orav dnap^f/ KT\. 
 John 2, 16 KOI x^P lv avT ^ x^P lTOS - ^ Cor. 
 3, 5. So Xen. An. 2. 5. 38 e^ei n]v 8iKT)v 
 Kal r&vr]Kv. Comp. Winer \ 57. 2. note c. 
 
 e) It has an intensive or cumulative force, 
 viz. a) Where two or more words are 
 connected by Kai, and *at is then also in 
 serted emphatically before the first word. 
 Kai . . . Kai, Lat. et . . ; et, Engl. both . . . and. 
 Matt. 10, 28 (po^r)^T]Tf TQV Svva.fj.fvov Kal 
 ^rvxyv Kal traifjia oVoXeVat. Mark 9, 22. 
 Acts 26, 29. Rom. 14. 9 bis. Phil. 4, 12. 
 16. So Hdian. 3. 6. 15. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 15. 
 ib. 2. 3. 1. /3) Before comparatives, and 
 even ; Matt. 11,9 vai, Kal Trepicrcrorepoi irpo- 
 (f>T]Tov. Luke 7, 26. John 10, 10. Comp. 
 Passow xat no. 6. Matth. { 620. p. 1258. d. 
 So Horn. II. 10. 556. Xen. An. 6. 6. 35. 
 y) Before interrogations, where in strict 
 ness it is simply copulative, and, but serves 
 to add strength and vivacity to the question. 
 and, and then, then ; comp. Viger. p. 524. 
 Matth. ^ 620. p. 1258. c. So before a pron. 
 or adv. Mark 10, 26 \eyovrfs Kal ris 8vva- 
 rai o-to^rivai ; who then (in that case) can 
 be saved? Luke 3, 14. 10, 29. 2 Cor. 2, 2 ; 
 Kal TroSfv Mark 12, 37; KOI TTCO? Luke 20, 
 44. John 14, 9; genr. Acts 23, 3. 1 Cor. 
 5, 2. So Luc. D. Deor. 1. 2 Kal ri trXtov 
 fgco ; Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 10, 11 ; /cat TTW? Hi. 
 7. 11. S) Before an Imperat. Kai is often 
 intensive in the classic writers ; see Viger. 
 et Matth. 1. c. Some apply this also to 
 several passages in N. T. as Matt. 23, 32. 
 Mark 11, 29. Luke 12, 29. 1 Cor. 11, 6. 
 But in all these Kai is simply copulative, 
 and may be referred to some of the signifi 
 cations above given ; see Winer 5 57. 2. 
 note a. t) Where a part is subjoined to 
 a whole by way of emphasis, Kai may be 
 rendered and especially, imprimis. Mark 1, 
 5. 16, 7 e?7raT6 TOIS /iaSr/ralr avrov Kal r3 
 Ilerpa). Matt. 8, 33. Comp. Passow KOI 
 no. 6*ult. [II. 3.] So JSschyl. Pers. 749 
 3eot icai Hoo-fi$S>v. Vice versa, where a 
 whole is. subjoined to a part, as in a sum 
 ming up of particulars, i. q. and in a word, 
 yea. Matt. 26, 59 oi dpxifpfis Kal ol npfcrftv- 
 repot Kai TO crvve8piov 0X01* the chief priests 
 and the elders, and [yea] the whole Sanhe 
 drim. Mark 15, 1. See Winer 5 57. 2. 
 note d. So Dem. 36 ult Comp. Plato Phsed. 
 13. p. 69. b, KOI dv8pfia Kal craxppoo-vvrj Kal 
 SiKaiocrvvr) Kal v\\r)fi8r)V aX^Sijr dpfTTj. 
 
 f ) Apparently adversative, but only where 
 the antithesis of the thought is clear in itself, 
 without the aid of an adversative oarticle 
 
tcai 
 
 367 
 
 E. g a) and yet, and nevertheless ; Matt. 
 
 6, 26 or( OV (TTTfipOVO lV . . . KO.I 6 TTdTrjp Up.COI 
 
 Tpffpet aura. 10, 29. 12, 5 ot if pels TO craft- 
 /Sarop f$(f$rj\ov<Ti, Kai aVat rtoi fieri. John 1, 
 10. 6, 70. 7, 19. 9, 30. 17, 25 warep StW, 
 cat 6 Koa-fj-os <re oi>/c eyvco, righteous Father, 
 and yet the world hath not known thee, has 
 not acknowledged thee as such ; Winer 
 } 57. 4. p. 522. Gal. 4, 14. 1 John 2, 4. 
 Rev. 3, 1. Sept and } 2 Sam. 3, 8. Mai. 2, 
 14. (Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 45. Mem. 1. 2. 32.) 
 So Heb. 3, 9 f8oKip.ao~dv fit, Kal tTSov TO. 
 epya (JMV, they proved me, and yet (al 
 though) they saw my works, quoted from 
 Ps. 95, 9 where Sept. KOI for ca ; comp. 
 Heb. Lex. ca no. 4. /3) Where it con 
 nects a negative antithetic clause with a 
 preceding positive one, where we often 
 though not necessarily use but ; e. g. Matt. 
 12, 39 a-rfp.f iov imfqtti KOI orj/xeioi ov 80- 
 Sqcrerat avrfj. 13, 14. 17. 17, 16. 26, 60 
 Kal oi>x evpov. Mark 9, 18. 14,55.56. John 
 10, 25. al. sjep. In all these passages the 
 rendering but is admissible but not neces 
 sary ; in others it would destroy the true 
 sense, e. g. tXeov 3eX&> Kal ov 3uo-tai> i. e. 
 I will have mercy and not merely sacrifice 
 Matt. 9, 13 et 12, 7, quoted from Hos. 6, 6 
 where Heb. i and Sept. ad sensum, eXeor 
 3Xco [p-aXXoi/] 77 Si/o-iW. See Passow in 
 Kai no. 13. [VII.] Winer $ 57. 2. note b. 
 y) Rarely in a strong antithesis without a 
 negative, /cat may be given by but, though 
 not necessarily, e. g. Acts 10, 28 /cat e /xo! 
 6 Sear e8ete. Mark 12, 12 ffrrovv avrov 
 Kparfia-ai, Kal e cpo/S^Sqcrai rbv o^Xoi/, where 
 we may also render and yet, and neverthe 
 less, as in a. 1 Cor. 12, 5, comp. v. 6. 
 Winer 1. c. 
 
 2. Copulative and emphatic, also, too; 
 implying increase, addition, something more ; 
 e. g. always so in the connection 8e Kai or 
 KOI 8e, and also, i. e. and in addition, and 
 likeicise, see in 8e no. 2. d. Buttm. } 149. 
 m. 10. Kiihner 321. n. 5. Comp. Passow 
 KCU. no. 3. [II.] 
 
 a) Genr. Matt. 5, 39 crrptyov aurcp Kal 
 TTJV aXXr/i/. 6, 12. Mark 2, 16. 28. Luke 1, 
 35. 6, 16 or neat. John 8, 19 e>e jjiSeire, 
 Kal rov Trare pa p.ov iySetre av. Rom. 1, 15. 
 1 Cor. 14. 12. al. saep. So Hdian. 1. 1.4. 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 2 to KOI rrjv oToX^z/ eVcfivs 
 e5co/ce. Mem. 2. 3. 1. For TroXXa Kal uXXa 
 v. Urtpa, see aXXoj no. 1 . a. 
 
 b) In comparisons, e. g. ovra> KOI, so aZw, 
 after w?, uxrn-fp, HaStus, 1 Cor. 11,12 uxmtp 
 yap fj yvvrf .. . ovra> Kal 6 dvtjp. 15, 22. 
 With OUT-CO impl. Matt. 6, 10 tas ev ovpavta, 
 Kal f-rrl TTJS yrjs. Luke 6, 31. John 13, 15. 
 
 Acts 7, 51. Gal. 1,9. So Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 
 3 ; ouTw impl. Hdot. 7. 128 u>s fie 7re3i)/i^- 
 o-f, icat (noiee Tavra. Plut. Mor. II. p. 9. 
 Thuc. 8. 1 ult. Also jcaSw? Kai, as also, 
 even as also, 1 Cor. 13, 12. 14, 34; coy 
 xai, as also, 1 Cor. 7, 7. Acts 11, 17. So 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 1. 
 
 c) In interrogations, e. g. ri nai ; why 
 also? why too? 1 Cor. 15, 30; WZTI Kai, 
 why moreover? Luke 13, 7. Jos. Ant. 18. 
 6. 6 ri KOI e^ot Xeytti/. Eurip. Phoan. 1373 
 Trcoy /cat. Comp. Herm. ad Vig. p. 834. 
 
 d) Before a participle *at implies an em 
 phatic antithesis with what precedes, and 
 may be rendered even, although ; Matt. 26, 
 60. Luke 18, 7 Kal paKpo^vp.cav eV auTots, 
 though he bear long with them. 1 Cor. 16, 9. 
 Comp. Passow /cat no. 4. [II. 2.] Herm. ad 
 Vig. p. 835. ^El. V. H. 1.21 nal pr, npoa- 
 Kvvrjo-avri. Theogn. 1114 aiiv (rol, Kal Ka- 
 KOS coy, yiyvofiai eVSXos dvfjp. Xen. Cyr. 4. 
 1. 17 fpeuyouori Kal TroXXai ouVat. 
 
 e) Intensive, even, even also, yea. Matt 
 10, 30 vfj.S>v 8f Kal al rpi%s, i. e. the very 
 hairs, etc. Mark 1, 27 /cat roty irvevp.a(Ti. 4, 
 25 et Luke 8, 18 /cat 6 e^ei a/>3jjo-erai. Rom. 
 8, 23 /cat fjp.f is avroi. 1 Cor. 2, 10 /cat ra 
 /3a3?;. 11,6 Kal K ipao-3co let her be even also 
 shorn. 2 Cor. 8, 3 on Kara Supa/itv, /cat v/rep 
 fiuj/ap-ti/. yea above their ability. Mark 9, 13 
 ort /cat HXtay eXi^XuSe that Elias is even al 
 ready come. Sept. Esth. 7, 8. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 5. 4. Xen. CEc. 18. 9 ema-rdp-fvos 
 /cat TraXat. Mem. 4. 2. 12. Comp. Winer 
 5 57. 2. note e. Passow /cat no. 6. [II. 3.] 
 
 3. With other particles, chiefly /cat Se 
 and also, but also ; likewise 8 e /cat, but also, 
 Matt. 3, 10. John 15, 24 ; see in 8e no. 2. d. 
 Buttm. ^149. m. 10;- re /cat, see in re, 
 Buttm. { 1 49. m. 8. Others are : d X X a /cat 
 but also, see in aXXa no. 3. c ; yap Kai see 
 in yap no. 1 ; eav Se /cat, see in edv II. 1 ; 
 ft Kai, d yap Kai, ft ye Kai, tl 8e Kai, 
 see in d III. 2. c. d, and ye no. 2. c. ft ; 
 fj Kai, see in rj IV. b ; /cat yap see in yap 
 no. 1 ; /cat ye, see in ye no. 2. e ; Kal 8f 
 see above; /cat et, >cai yap et, Kal yap e?- 
 Trep, see in et III. 1. a. /3. + 
 
 Kaid(f)a<?i a, 6, Caiaphas, Aram. ^^3 
 (depression, Buxt. Lex. Ch. 1076.) pr. n. of 
 a high priest, lua-rjrros 6 Kal Ka idfpas Jos. 
 Ant. 18. 2. 2. He was appointed by Vale 
 rius Gratus the predecessor of Pilate, A. D. 
 26, and deposed by Vitellius in A. I). 35 ; Jos. 
 Ant. 18. 4. 3. See fully in "Anitas. Matt. 
 26, 3. 57. Luke 3, 2. John 11, 49. 18, 13. 
 14. 24. 28. Acts 4, 6. 
 
 tcatye, see in y7 no. 2. e. 
 
Kaiv 
 
 368 
 
 Kaiv, 6, indec. Cain, Heb. "P12 (pos 
 session), pr. n. of the first-born of Adam 
 and the first homicide, Heb. 11, 4. 1 John 
 3, 12. Jude 11. See Gen. c. 4. 
 
 Kalvdv, 6, indec. Cainan, Heb. "ip^ 
 (possession) Kenan, pr. n. a) A son of 
 Enos, Luke 3, 37 ; comp. Gen. 5, 9 sq. 
 b) A son of Arphaxad according to the 
 Sept. Gen. 10, 24. 11,12; but not found in 
 the Hebrew. Luke follows the Sept. c. 3, 
 36, where several Mss. omit Ka ivdv. 
 
 Kaivo<$, rj, 6v, neiv, not old. 1 . Pr. newly 
 made, not impaired by time or use, as do-Koi 
 Matt. 9, 17. Mark 2, 22. Luke 5, 38 ; (Sept. 
 and Sl ifi Josh. 9, 13 :) /zi/^elov Matt. 27, 
 60. John 19, 41 ; i^dnoi/ Luke 5, 36. (Sept. 
 1 K. 11, 29 sq.) So Matt. 13, 52 KCLIVO. KOI 
 irdXaid, pr. garments new and old. Mark 2, 
 21. Luke 5, 36 bis. 2 Mace. 2, 29. Xen. 
 Hell. 3. 4. 28. 
 
 2. Also new, newly introduced, not before 
 known or current, novel, strange ; e. g. fii- 
 60^17 Mark 1, 27. Acts 17, 19 ; eWoX?) John 
 
 13, 34. 1 John 2, 7. 8. 2 John 5. (Hdian. 
 3. 13. 15. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 10.) Comparat. 
 
 ActS 17, 21 \iyflV Tl KCll CLKOVflV KdlVOTfpOV 
 
 to tell or hear something newer ; comp. Wi 
 ner $ 36. 3. So Dem. 43. 7. ib. 160. 2 ; 
 COmp. Hdot. 1. 27 et TI e lr) vearepov vrept rr)v 
 EXXdSa. In the sense of other, foreign ; 
 Mark 16, 17 yXuxrcrais XaXr;<rovo-t Kaivals, 
 with new (other) tongues, new to them. So 
 Xen. Mem. 1.1.3. 
 
 3. Spec, new as opp. to old or former (TO 
 TroXcuoV, TO 7rpo>Toi/),and hence better ; e. g. 
 naivr] SiaSijKTj, a new and better covenant, 
 see in StaS^r? no. 2. c ; Matt. 26, 28. Mark 
 
 14, 24. Luke 22, 20. 1 Cor. 11, 25. 2 Cor. 
 3, 6. Heb. 8, 8. 13. 9, 15. (Sept. for ti in 
 Jer. 31, 31.) So olvov Trivtiv KULVOV, to drink 
 wine new, in reference to the future renova 
 tion of all things at Christ s coming, in opp. 
 to present imperfection, Matt. 26, 29. Mark 
 14, 25; comp. Luke 22, 16. 30. Rom. 8, 
 21. So too mSr) Kaivf) a new song, a no 
 bler, loftier strain in the Redeemer s king 
 dom, unheard before, Rev. 5, 9. 14,3. Sept. 
 and ti"jn p s . 33, 3. 40, 4. Is. 42, 10. Also 
 ovopa Kdivov, a new name, unknown under 
 the old dispensation, Rev. 2, 17. 3, 12. 
 Sept. for ti^n Is. 62, 2. Further, in the 
 sense of renewed, made new, and therefore 
 superior, more splendid ; e. g. Kaivol ovpa- 
 vo\ Kdl Kdivr; yrj 2 Pet. 3, 13 bis. Rev. 21,1; 
 Sept. Is. 65, 17. 66, 22 ;) 77 KOIVTJ ifpov- 
 o-aXTj/x Rev. 3, 12. 21, 2. So Rev. 21, 5 
 Kdiva TTdVTd TTOIW. Trop. of Christians as 
 renewed and changed from evil to good by the 
 
 Spirit of God ; 2 Cor. 5, 17 bis, Kaivf) KT KTIS. 
 Gal. 6, 15 K. nfSpwTi-or. Eph. 2, 15. 4, 24. 
 Sept. KapSi a Kdivrj for ^H ^?. Ez. 18, 31. 
 36, 26. 
 
 KaivoT 1 ?) 1 ), TJTOS, f], (<div6s,) newness, e. g. 
 in a moral sense, Rom. 6, 4 eV KOII/OTT/TI 
 farjs comp. in 017 no. 2. Rom. 7, 6. Pr. 
 Luc. Zeux. 1, 2. Thuc. 3. 38. 
 
 KaLirep conjunct, i. e. KOI strengthened 
 by Tre p, and indeed, used in antithesis before 
 a participle, though, indeed, although ; see 
 in Kdi no. 2. d. Matth. { 566. 3. So Phil. 3, 
 4. Heb. 5, 8. 7, 5. 12, 17. 2 Pet. 1, 12. 
 Once before a finite verb, Rev. 17, 8 Rec. 
 o-Tiv, where later editt. read *ai Trap- 
 i. With part. Xen. Ag. 1. 11. Conv. 
 2. 12. 
 
 Kaipo?, oO, 6, pr. right proportion, just, 
 measure, Theogn. 401. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 6, 
 7. In N. T. only of time, season, i. e. 
 
 I. a Jit measure of time, Jit time, proper 
 season. a) Genr. i. q. opportunity, occa 
 sion, Acts 24, 25 Kdipbv fie p.eToXa/3&>j/. Rom. 
 
 12, 11 Grb. Kaipco SovXevoiTfs, see in 8ov- 
 Xfvu no. 2. Gal. 6, 10. Eph. 5, 16 et Col. 
 4, 5 see in e ayopdo>. Heb. 11, 15. 1 Mace. 
 15, 34. Pol. 1. 36. 4. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 8. 
 
 b) an appointed time, set time, certain sea 
 son, i. e. a fixed and definite time or season : 
 SO C. gen. Matt. 13, 30 lv Kaip<a TOV 3epi- 
 ap.ov in the time of harvest, i. e. the usual 
 season. 21, 34. 41. Mark 11, 13 Kaipbs <rv- 
 KVI>. Luke 1, 20. 8, 13. Acts 3, 20 Kcupol 
 avatyv!-eu>s times of refreshing appointed of 
 God. Luke 19, 44. 2 Tim. 4, 6. Heb. 9, 10. 
 11, 11. (Sept. for n? Ecc. 3, 1 sq. Xen. 
 Apol. Socr. 7.) With gen. of pers. or a 
 pron. as 6 naipos pov v. 6 e/nor, my time, as 
 appointed of God, e. g. in which I arn to suf 
 fer, Matt. 26, 18 ; or fulfil any duty, John 7, 
 6. 8 ; also v. 6 v^t-repos naipos. Luke 21, 
 24 Kdipol e Si/coj/. 2 Thess. 2, 6. Rev. 11, 
 18. So idios Kdipos one s own due time, 
 Gal. 6, 9. 1 Tim. 2, 6. 6, 15. Tit. 1, 3. 
 With the art. or pron. demonstr. as 6 vvv, 
 OVTOS, (Kfivos, this present lime, that time, 
 definitely marked out and expressed, Matt. 
 11,25. 12, 1. 14, 1. Mark 10, 30. Luke 
 
 13, 1. 18, 30. Acts 12, 1. Rom. 3, 26. 8, 
 18. 11, 5. 2 Cor. 8, 14. Eph. 2, 12. Also 
 
 Kdipos e rr^dTOS 1 Pet. 1 , 5 ; K. iHTTtpoi 1 
 Tim. 4, 1 ; K. fvecrrnums Heb. 9, 9. Genr 
 Acts 17, 26 TrpoTfTdyfj.evovs Kdipovs. 2 Cor. 
 6, 2 bis, Kcit/Kp 8fKTw . . Kaipbs fiirpocrb fKTos, 
 quoted from Is. -\Q, 8 where Sept. Kaipbs 
 SCKTOS for "pin n? . Gal. 4, 10. 2 Tim. 4, 3 
 t<TTdi yap Kdipos, sc. appointed of God 
 Rev. 12, 12. Dat. TW /catpw, at the propel 
 
Kalcrap 
 
 369 
 
 season, Mark 12,2. With Prepositions, e. g. 
 uxpl Kaipov, for or during a certain season, 
 Luke 4, 13. Acts 13, 11. (So ^xpi Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 3.) ev Kcttpcp in due time Matt. 24, 45. 
 Luke 12, 42. 20, 10. 1 Pet. 5, 6 ; eV /cai- 
 ou Acts 7, 20. (Xen. Hell. 7. 2. 8.) Kara 
 *eeupdi> at the set time John 5, 4. Rom. 5, 6 ; 
 :ara TOV K. TOVTOV Acts 19, 23. Rom. 9, 9. 
 (Palaeph. 41. 6. Xen. Hell. 1. 1. 32.) irpb 
 naipov before the proper time 1 Cor. 4, 5 ; 
 /rpoj Kaipov for a season Luke 8, 13. 
 
 1 Cor. 7, 5 ; Trpoy K. wpar, i. e. for a short 
 time, 1 Thess. 2. 17. Spec, of the set time 
 for the coming of the Messiah in his king 
 dom or for judgment, Matt. 8, 29. 1G, 3. 
 Mark 1, 15. 13,33. Luke 12, 56. 21,8. 
 Acts 1, 7. Rom. 13, 11. 1 Cor. 7, 29. Eph. 
 1, 10. 1 Thess. 5, 1. 1 Pet. 1, 11. 4, 17. 
 Rev. 1, 3. 22, 10. Plur. /ecu pot, times, 
 seasons, circumstances, appointed of God, 
 
 2 Tim. 3, 1. 
 
 2. time, season, generally, i. q. xpoVor. 
 a) Pr. Luke 21, 36 / Trairt KatpoJ 8e6p.fvoL. 
 Eph. 6, 18. b) Spec, a season of the year, 
 as xatpoi Kapjrcxpopoi fruitful seasons Acts 
 14, 17. c) In the prophetic style put for 
 a year ; Rev. 12, 14 ter, /catpos xai xaipol KOI 
 fjuicrv Kaipov, i. e. three years and a half 
 (comp. v. 6) ; in allusion to Dan. 7, 25 
 where Sept. for Chald. "^ , and where /cat- 
 pot stands as here for the dual, two years; 
 comp. Winer $ 27. 2 fin. So xP v s in later 
 writers for a year, see Passow in xp"os no. 
 4. [Ill] Winer 1. c. 
 
 Kalcrap, apos, 6,Cccsar, pr. the surname 
 of the Julian family at Rome, but applied, 
 after Julius Crcsar, to his successors of the 
 same family as the usual title of imperial 
 dignity ; hence Germ. Kaiser. At a later 
 period, it became the title of the heir appa 
 rent; see Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 170. In 
 N. T. the title Cccsar is applied to Augustus 
 Luke 2, 1 ; to Tiberius Luke 3, 1. 20, 22. 
 24. 25 ; to Claudius Acts 11, 28 ; to Nero 
 Acts 25, 8 sq. Phil. 4, 22. Caligula who 
 succeeded Tiberius is not mentioned. -f- 
 
 Kaicrdpeia, as, f), Ccesarea, pr. n. of 
 two cities in Palestine. 
 
 1. Cccsarea Philippi, a city of Upper 
 Galileo, near the sources of the Jordan at 
 die foot of Mount Hermon, called also Pa- 
 neas; Matt. 16, 13. Mark 8, 27. It was 
 rebuilt and enlarged by Philip the tetrarch, 
 and named in honour of himself and Tibe 
 rius, Jos. Ant. 18. 2. 1. It bore afterwards 
 for a time the name of Neronias, in honour 
 of Nero, Jos. Ant. 20. 9. 4. At present the 
 village Banias occupies the site of its ruins. 
 24 
 
 The more ancient Leshem or Laish, after 
 wards Dan, (Josh. 19, 47. Judg. 18, 27-29,) 
 lay further west, at the other fountain of 
 the Jordan, the modern Tell el-K&dy. See 
 Biblioth. Sacra, 1846, p. 187 sq. 211 sq. 
 Burckhardt s Travels in Syria, p. 38 sq. 
 Reland Palaest. p. 918 sq. 
 
 2. Cccsarea of Palestine, on the coast of 
 the Mediterranean, southward from Mount 
 Carmel. Its ancient name was Srparcocos 
 Trvpyos Jos. Ant. 15. 9. 6. Strabo 16. 2. 27. 
 p. 758; Stratonis turns Plin. H. N. 5. 14. 
 Herod the Great rebuilt it with great splen 
 dour and strength ; created an artificial har 
 bour ; and named it Cccsarea, in honour of 
 Augustus, Jos. 1. c. and 16. 5. 1. Josephus 
 calls it one of the largest cities in Pales 
 tine, and says the inhabitants were mostly 
 Greeks ; B. J. 3. 9. 1 . It was the seat of 
 the Roman procurator, and after the de 
 struction of Jerusalem became the capital 
 of Palestine. See Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. II. 
 ii. p. 326 sq. Reland Palasst. 670 sq. Acts 
 8,40. 9,30. 10,1.24. 11,11. 12,19. 18, 
 22. 21, 8. 16. 23, 23. 33. 25, 1. 4. 6. 13. 
 
 KdlTOi or (cat rot, and yet, nevertheless, 
 although ; Heb. 4, 3 ft fto-eXf vcrovrai fls TTJV 
 v /xov Acatrot T&V fpycov OTTO Ka- 
 
 Ta/3oXf;y icdcrp-ov yfvrfievra>v, they shall not 
 enter into my rest, the works nevertheless 
 having been finished from the foundation of 
 the world, i. e. the reason why they did not 
 enter into God s rest was not that this rest 
 did not then exist ; for it had existed from 
 the foundation of the world, v. 4. Gen. 2, 2. 
 As they did not enter in, God ever renews 
 his invitation, v. 6. 7. Luc. D. Deor. 12. 2. 
 Xen. Ag. 8. 8. Comp. Kiihner \ 322. 7. 
 Herm. ad Vig. p. 837. 
 
 see in ye no. 2. f. 
 
 Kditi), f. icavcra, Pass. aor. 1 fKavSrjv, 
 comp. Buttm. {114; for the anom. fut. 
 Subj. KavSijo-co/icH 1 Cor. 13, 3 in some edi 
 tions, a corrupt form of the later Greek, see 
 Winer $ 13. I.e. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 721. 
 
 1. to burn, i. e. causat. to make burn, to 
 kindle, to light, e. g. a fire, lamp, light ; Pass. 
 part. Kaiop-evos burning, flaming. So c. 
 ace. Matt. 5, 15 oi/Se Kaiovut \vxyov. Pass. 
 Heb. 12, 18 opei KfKavfj.(va> trupl, the mount 
 which burned with fire, comp. Deut. 9, 15. 
 Pass. part. pres. Luke 12, 35. Rev. 4,5. 8, 
 8. 10. 19, 20. 21, 8. Sept. Lev. 24, 3. 4; 
 Pass, for i?3 Deut. 4, 11. 5, 23. So 
 Plut. Lucull. 15. Xen. An. 4. 1. 11. Pass. 
 part. Plut. C. Mar. 22. Trop. Pass. Xv^oj 
 /caiop.ei or *at (paivcw, a burning and shin 
 ing light, spoken of John the Baptist as a 
 
370 
 
 distinguished teacher, John 5, 35 ; comp. 
 Ecclus. 48, 1. Also to burn, i. q. to be 
 greatly moved, of the heart, Luke 24, 32 ; 
 comp. Sept. and i?S Ps. 39, 4. Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 671 fKaio^jjv Tols cnr\dyxvois. 
 
 2. to burn, to burn up, to consume with 
 fire; Pass. John 15, 6 KOI Kaierai sc. TCI 
 KX^ara. Matt. 13, 40 Grb. 1 Cor. 13, 3. 
 Sept. for cj-ito Lev. 4, 12 ; iox Is. 5, 24. 
 Luc. Tim. 9/Xen. Cyr. 4. 2~ 33. 
 
 Ka/cet, crasis for xat e/cei, and there, each 
 word retaining its own signification ; see 
 Kai and *. Buttm. 29. n. 7. ib. n. 2. b. 
 Matt. 5, 23. 10, 11. 28, 10. Mark 1, 35. 38. 
 John 11, 54. Acts 14, 7. 17,13. 22,10. 25, 
 20. 27, 6. Sept. for dl^l Ruth 1, 17. Xen. 
 Hell. 1. 2. 9. 
 
 crasis for KOI eKe &ev, and 
 thence, and .from thence ; comp. in Ka/m 
 above. Mark 10, 1. Acts 7, 4. 13, 21. 14, 
 26. [16, 12.] 20, 15. 21, 1. 27,4. 12. 28, 
 15. Sept for dlEai 2 K. 2, 25. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 7. 4. Xen. Hell. 1. 6. 8. 
 
 KaKlVO$) T], o, crasis for KCU ftdvos, rj, 
 
 0, where each word retains its own separate 
 pwer ; see KOI and tKflvos. Buttm. 29. n. 
 7. ib. n. 2. b. Matt. 15, 18. 20, 4. 23, 23. 
 Luke 20, 11. 22,12. John 7, 29. 14,12. 
 al. Luc. D. Deor. 2. 2. Xen. Cyr. 5. 5. 
 29. + 
 
 KCUCtO^e T], (KOKO S,) badness, bad quali 
 ty, e. g. of water Jos. Ant. 3. 1. 1, 2 ; of a 
 soldier, cowardice, Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 27. In 
 N. T. badness, evil, in a moral sense. 
 
 1. Subj. evil of heart, life, character, 
 wickedness, depravity; Acts 8, 22 pfravor]- 
 <rov ovv arro ri]s KUKias crov ravTrfs. James 
 
 1, 21. 1 Pet. 2, 16. 1 Cor. 14, 20 rfi KUKLO. 
 vrjTrid^fTf, opp. rats (ppecri, comp. Matt. 18, 
 3. Sept. for nsn Ex. 32, 11. 13; - ( 15< Is. 
 29, 20. Luc. q uom. Hist. 6. Plato Crat. 
 386. d. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 28. 
 
 2. Act. evil, i. e. malice, malignity, the 
 desire of evil to others ; espec. where joined 
 with Trovripia, Rom. 1, 29. 1 Cor. 5, 8 eV 
 u/xj7 KaKias KOI TTOvrjpias. Eph. 4, 31. Col. 
 3, 8. Tit. 3, 3. 1 Pet. 2, 1. Sept. for sn 
 Prov. 1, 16; fijn Nah. 3, 19. Diod. Sic 
 
 1. 1 ult. Soph.CEd. R. 512. 
 
 3. Pass, evil suffered, i. e. trouble, care; 
 Matt. 6, 34 apKfrov rfj TjfJ.epa 17 KOKia avrf/s. 
 So Sept. and ntn Eccl. 7, 14. 1 Mace. 
 10, 46. Thuc. 3.58. 
 
 KaKOrf&eid) as. 17, (KaKorjZrjs , KCLKOS, 
 ^3oj,) mischief, malice, malignity, the desire 
 of evil to others, Rom. 1, 29. 3 Mace. 3, 
 22. Arr. Epict. 4. 8. 1. Plut. de Curios. 1. 
 
 In the sense of bad morals, wickedness, Xen. 
 Yen. 13. 16. 
 
 , >, f. qo-co, (jcaKoAoyoy ; xa- 
 KOS, Xe yw,) to speak evil of, to revile, c. ace. 
 Mark 9, 39. Acts 19, 9. So 2 Mace. 4, 1. 
 Plut. de Herodot. malign. 3. Isocr. p. 136. 
 c. Spec. opp. ri/xao), i. q. to dishonour, to 
 contemn, c. ace. Matt. 15, 4 et Mark 7, 10 
 6 /caKoXoyooi/ Trarepa fj p.r]Tepa, quoted from 
 Ex. 21, 17 where Sept. for b|p to curse; 
 as also Prov. 22, 20. Ez. 22, 7. The ear 
 lier form was KOKWS Xe yco, see Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 200. 
 
 KaKOTTaSreia, as, 17, (KaKOTraSeoo,) a suf 
 fering of evil ; hence genr. suffering, afflic 
 tion, James 5, 10. Sept. for nx^Pi Mai. 1, 
 13. Dem. 1412. 25. Thuc. 7. 77/ 
 
 KaKOTTa^feo), w, f. TJCTW, (/ca/co7ra3^s ; 
 Kates, TraSos, 7rao-x&>)) to suffer evil, to be 
 afflicted, intrans. 2 Tim. 2, 9. James 5, 13. 
 So Jos. Ant. 1. 10. 3. Lys. 226. 6. Xen. 
 Mem. 1 . 4. 1 1. Spec, of soldiers and others, 
 to endure hardships, trop. 2 Tim. 2, 3 KUKO- 
 Tra%r)croi> wf KaAos crTpaTidiTrjs. 4, 5. So 
 Jos. Ant. 10. 11. 1. Hdian. 8. 7. 14. Diod. 
 Sic. 19. 16. 
 
 /Cd/COTTOtecOj w, f. rjcru, (KaKOTTOtds,) Id 
 do evil, e. g. 
 
 1. To others, i. q. to injure, to harm, ab- 
 sol. Mark 3, 4. Luke 6, 9 ; comp. Matt. 12, 
 12. Sept. for 3";n Gen. 31, 7. 1 Sam. 25, 
 4. So c. ace. Diod. Sic. 15. 45; absol. 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 8. 14. 
 
 2. Genr. and absol. i. q. to do wrong, to 
 commit sin, 1 Pet. 3, 17. 3 John 11. Sept. 
 for rnsn 2 Sam. 24, 17. M. Antonin. 1. 3. 
 Xen. (Ec. 3. 11. 
 
 /ca/COTTOt09, ov, 6, f], (KO.KOS, Troiew,) an 
 evil-doer, 1 Pet. 2, 12. 14. 3, 16. 4, 15 ; a 
 malefactor, John 18, 30. Sept. Prov. 24, 
 18. Pol. 15. 25. 1 ; adj. Plut. de Anim. pro- 
 creat. 6 bis. 
 
 Kctfeos, rj, 6v, bad, worthless, of bad qua 
 lity, e. g. a breastplate, Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 
 14 ; soil CEc. 16. 7 ; of a soldier, coward, 
 craven, Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 27. In N. T. bad. 
 ill, evil. 
 
 1. In a moral sense, evil, wicked, bad, in 
 heart, conduct, character. Matt. 21, 41 *a- 
 KOVS KaKas oTroXeVet, see in KUKWS no. 1. c. 
 24, 48. Phil. 3, 2. Rev. 2. 2 KUKOVS, i. e. 
 impostors. Of thoughts, words, deeds ; 
 Mark 7, 21 StaXoytcr/ioi 01 HUKO I. Rom. 13, 
 3 KctKtov sc. epyoov. 1 Cor. 15, 33 opXt ai 
 Kaxm. Col. 3, 5. Sept. for 3>7 Prov. 15, 3 ; 
 T!X Prov. 6, 18. So Luc. Parasit. 1. Xen. 
 Mem. 1.2. 20 bis. Neut. TO KOKOV, Plur 
 
fcatcovpyos 
 
 371 
 
 KO,\CO 
 
 ra KaKa, evil, evil tilings, i. e. wickedness, 
 icrong, crime, Matt. 27, 23 rl yap KUKOV enoi- 
 qo-fv. Mark 15, 14. Luke 23, 22. John 18,23. 
 Acts 23, 9. Rom. 1, 30. 2, 9. 3, 8. 7, 19. 
 21. 9, 11. 13, 4 bis. 16, 19. 1 Cor. 10, 6. 
 2 Cor. 5, 10. 13, 7. 1 Tim. 6, 10. Heb. 5, 
 14. James 1, 13. 1 Pet. 3, 12. 3 John 11. 
 Sept. for 3n i K. 3, 9. Prov. 3, 7. al. So 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 4. 
 
 2. Act. causing evil, i. e. hurtful, nox 
 ious ; Rom. 14, 20 dXXa KUKOV raJ ai/3pa>7rw 
 KT\. Rev. 16, 2 f\Kos KCUCOV. Tit. 1, 12 a- 
 KCI Zrjpla evil beasts, ravenous. Sept. for srn 
 Am. 6, 3. Prov. 16, 5. So Xen. Mem. 4* 
 1. 4. Neut. TO KOKOV, evil, i. e. cause or 
 source of evil, James 3, 8 ; evil done to any 
 one, harm, injury, Acts 16, 28. 28, 5. Rom. 
 12, 17 bis. 21 bis. 13, 10. 1 Cor. 13, 5. 
 I Thess. 5, 15 bis. 1 Pet. 3, 9. 11. In 
 words, evil-speaking, 1 Pet. 3, 10. Sept. 
 for 3n Mic. 7, 3. Also Plur. TO. KUKO, 
 evils, i. e. troubles, afflictions, Luke 16, 25 
 Adapos 6p.oi<us TCI KUKI I sc. ujre Xa/Se. Acts 
 9, 13 oa-a KOKO. fTToirjo-f. 2 Tim. 4. 14. Sept. 
 for Sn Gen. 44, 34. 48, 16 ; rnx Is. 46,7. 
 Jer. 14, 8. So Epict. Ench. 27. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 8. 4. 14. 
 
 Kcucovpyo?, ov, 6, 17, (KOKOS, obsol. epyco,) 
 an evil-icorker, malefactor, genr. 2 Tim. 2, 
 
 9. Sept. for %& bsb Prov. 21, 15. So 
 Hdian. 1. 10. 2. Xen. An. 1. 9. 13. Spec. 
 Plur. robbers, Xijorm, Luke 23, 32. 33. 39 ; 
 comp. Matt. 27, 38. So JE1. V. H. 3. 44. 
 Diod. Sic. 20. 81. 
 
 KClKOV%ea>. &>, f. rja-ca, (KCIKOS, ?X W >) to 
 hold or treat ill, to maltreat ; in N. T. only 
 Pass. part. KaKov^ovp-fvos, maltreated, afflict 
 ed, Heb. 11, 37. 13, 3. Sept. for ^35 1 K. 
 2, 26. 11, 39. Diod. Sic. 3. 23 ult. Plut. 
 Consol. ad Apoll. 26. 
 
 KaKOd), <, f. cio-w, (Kouco y.) to affect with 
 evil, i. e. 
 
 1. Physically, to do evil to any one, to 
 maltreat, to afflict ; c. ace. of pers. Acts 7, 
 6. 19 eKa/ccocre rovs Trartpas fj/jicav. 12, 1. 
 18, 10. 1 Pet. 3, 12. Sept. for Jnn Ex. 5, 
 22 ; MS Gen. 15, 13. Hdian. 6. 6. 10. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 23. 
 
 2. In N. T. and Josephus in a moral 
 cense, to make evil-affected, to exasperate, 
 c. ace. e. g. TUS tfrvxas Acts 14, 2. Jos. 
 Ant. 16. 1. 2. ib. 16. 7. 3 Hpwfys eWoCro 
 {mortals, ib. 16. 8. 6. See Krebs Obs. e 
 Jos. p. 224. 
 
 KatcoJSi adv. (*a*or,) badly, ill, evil, etc. 
 
 I. Physically, in phrases : a) KCIKCOS 
 
 t\tii>, to he sick, see in ?xo> no. 5 ; Matt. 
 
 4, 24. 8, 16. 9, 12. 14, 35. Mark 1, 32. 34. 
 2, 17. 6, 55. Luke 5, 31. 7, 2. So JEl 
 H. An. 11. 34. Xen. OEc. 3. 11. b) Ka - 
 Koir Trdcrxfiv, to suffer badly, i. e. griev 
 ously, Matt. 17, 15. So Horn. Od. 16. 275. 
 Pol. 3. 90. 13. c) KaKOvs Ka/coJs 1 dno- 
 \fo-at, malos male perdere, i. e. to destroy 
 miserably, utterly, Matt. 21, 41. For the 
 paronomasia see Winer 62. i. So Jos. 
 Ant. 12. 5. 4 ult. KUKOI KCKUI? aTrcoAoiro. 
 Ceb. Tab. 32 dnoXkvTai, KOKOS KOKUS. Luc. 
 Icar. 33. d) Genr. in the sense of griev 
 ously, Matt. 15, 22 KaK&s 8aip.ovi(Tai. So 
 Hesych. /ca/wy 8ftvus. 
 
 2. Morally, e. g. a) KUKUS fpe"iv,to 
 speak evil of any one, to revile, c. ace. Buttm. 
 5 131 . 5. Acts 23, 5 ap^ovra TOV XaoG <rov OVK 
 (pels KaKo)s, quoted from Ex. 22, 28 where 
 Sept. for "n; also Is. 8, 21. So Luc. 
 Pise. 6. Xen. Ath. 2. 18. Cpmp. in tmov 
 no. 1. . b) Genr. KOK^S \d\fj,v, to 
 speak evil i. e. amiss, absol. John 18", 23. 
 James 4, 3 KCLKWS atreio-3e, ye ask amiss. 
 Comp. Luc. Merc. cond. 5 KUKUS 
 (r3at. 
 
 a)?, f], (KaKow,) evil condition, 
 affliction ; Acts 7, 34 ddov TTJV K. TOV \aov 
 P.OV, quoted from Ex. 3, 7 where Sept. for 
 ^> 5 also v. 17. Hdian. 6. 6. 11. Thuc. 
 
 7. 82. 
 
 Ka\d/J.r/, TJS, TJ, a stalk, e. g. of grain, 
 Xen. An. 5. 4. 27. In N. T. collect, stalks, 
 stubble, straw, after the ears are removed, 
 1 Cor. 3, 12. Sept. for Vf> Ex. 15, 7. Joel 
 2, 5. So Theocr. 5. 7. Xen. Yen. 5. 18. 
 
 , ov, 6, a reed, cane, calamus, 
 i. e. a plant with a jointed hollow stalk 
 growing in wet grounds. 
 
 1. Pr. the plant itself, a reed, Matt. 11, 
 7. Luke 7, 24. Matt. 12, 20 KaXapov o-vvre- 
 Tpip-pfvov, quoted from Is. 42, 3 where 
 Sept. for ""i?!? Luc. Hermotim. 68. Xen. 
 An. 1. 5. 1. 
 
 2. Of the stalk as cut for use, a reed, i. e. 
 a) As a mock sceptre, Matt. 27, 29. 30. 
 Mark 15, 36. b) a stalk or stem of hys 
 sop, Matt. 27, 48. Mark 15, 19 ; comp. 
 John 19, 29. c) A measuring reed, meas 
 ure, Rev. 11,1. 21, 15. 16. Sept. and ^ 
 Ez. 40, 3. 5. 6. d) A reed for writing, 
 calamus, 3 John 13. Sept. for 135 p s . 45, 2. 
 Lat. calamus, see Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 508. 
 So Themist. II. 31. c. Liban. Ep. 849. Plato 
 Phcedr. 276. c. 
 
 aj, f. eVw, aor. 1 eVoXeo-a, perf. 
 ; Pass. aor. 1 eVcA^iji/ ; see Buttm. 
 114. 110. 11. 2. 
 
372 
 
 1. to call, i. e. to call to any one, in order 
 that he may come or go, or the like. 
 
 a) Pr. with the voice, as a shepherd his 
 flock, c. ace. John 10, 3 TO. TSia irpofiara 
 KaXfl KCIT ovopa. So too Luke 19, 13 KCL- 
 XeVay 8e 8eKa 8ov\ovs eavTov i. e. calling 
 them together. Matt. 20, 8. Matt. 4, 21 et 
 Mark 1, 20 e ccdXeo-ei/ avrovs, SC. to follow 
 him and become his disciples. 1 Mace. 1, 6. 
 Hdian. 3. 11. 20. Xen. Conv. 2. 12. 
 
 b) Genr. to call in any way, e. g. a) to 
 call for, to cause to come, to send for ; c. ace. 
 Matt. 2, 7 Xd3pa noXcotif TOVS Mdyovs. 
 With en c. gen. of place, Matt. 2, 15 e 
 AlyvTTTov. Pass. c. e/c impl. Heb. 11, 8. 
 Comp. S<np Hos. 11, 1, Sept. peraKaXew. 
 So Xen. An. 1. 3. 4. Mem. 2. 10. 5. /3) 
 With the idea of authority, to call forth, to 
 summon, e. g. before a judge, c. ace. Acts 
 
 4, 18. Pass. 24, 2. (Hdian. 7. 3. 5. Dem. 
 406. 27. Xen. Apol. Socr. 1 els rrjv S/K^J/.) 
 Trop. of God, Rom. 4, 17 KO\OVVTOS TO. fir/ 
 OVTCL las ovra, calling forth and disposing of 
 things that are not, even as though they 
 were, i. e. calling them into existence. 
 Sept. and x*fe Is. 41, 4. 48, 13. So Philo 
 de Great. Princip. p. 728. b, ra p.rj Zvra 
 fudXfcnv els TO elvai. See more in Lcesner 
 Obss. e Phil, in loc. 
 
 c) Spec, to call, i. q. to invite, c. ace. 
 as els TOVS ydfjLovs Matt. 22, 3. 9 ; tls TOV 
 ydp.ov Pass. John 2, 2 ; ace. simpl. Luke 7, 
 39. 1 Cor. 10,27; Pass, absol. Matt. 22,8. 
 Luke 14, 8 bis. 17. So Dem. 402. 15. Luc. 
 Jup. Trag. 15; Vi Sdrrvov Xen. Mem. 2. 
 3. 11. Trop. to call, to invite, to any course 
 of life or conduct, to privileges, or the like ; 
 e. g. of Jesus, K. ds p.fTavoiav to call to re 
 pentance, i. q. to exhort, Matt. 9, 13; and 
 so Mark 2, 17. Of God, Rev. 19, 9 els TO 
 $(iiTvov TOV yd.fj.ov TOV dpviov Ke/cXr?/ieVoi, 
 see in ydpos no. 1. 1 Tim. 6, 12 ds TTJV 
 farjv alvmov. 2 Thess. 2, 14. 1 Pet. 2, 9. 
 
 5, 10i Pass. 1 Cor. 1, 9. So Ka\e~iv els 
 TI}V ftaaiXfiav TOV 3eov, to the duties, 
 privileges, and final bliss of the Christian 
 life here and hereafter, 1 Thess. 2, 12 ; and 
 so impl. Rom. 9, 24. 1 Cor. 7, 15. 17 sq. 
 Gal. 5, 8. 13. 2 Tim. 1, 9. Heb. 9, 15. 
 1 Pet. 2, 21. al. 
 
 d) Spec, to call to any station, i. q. to ap 
 point, to choose, c. ace. impl. Gal. 1,15. Pass. 
 Heb. 5, 4 dpxifptvs . . . Kokovp-evos VTTO TOV 
 Seov. Comp. Sept. and jnj? Is. 49, 1. 
 51,2. 
 
 2. to call by name, i. q. to name, to give 
 name to any person or thing. 
 
 a) Pr. and genr. a) Of a proper name 
 or surname, foil, by TO oVo/z and the name 
 
 in apposit. Matt. 1, 21 KoXeVety TO oVo/io 
 avTov irjcrovv, thou shalt call his name Jesus. 
 v. 23. 25. Luke 1, 13. 2, 21. Rev. 19, 13. 
 Pass, with TI (wend) Luke 1, 62. Comp, 
 Matth. J 420. b. p. 769. Sept. and &n)3 
 Gen. 27, 36. 29, 34. (Comp. Plato Cratyf. 
 init. 383. a.) With ace. of pers. and the 
 name in apposit. Matt. 10, 25 Rec. d TOV 
 BeeXe/3oi>X eVaXecrai , others 
 ai/. Pass. Luke 1, 60 dXXa K\TJ^- 
 o-Tai ladvvrjs. Acts 1, 23. Rev. 12,9. So 
 of places, Matt. 27, 8. Luke 2, 4 qrty /caXel- 
 TM Bj;3Xef>. Acts 3, 11. 28, 1. Rev. 1, 9. 
 Sept. for &p|3 Gen. 31, 47. 2 K. 18, 4. 
 (Jos. B. J. l.\. 1. Hdian. 4. 12. 2. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 1. 26.) With eVt r<5 ovo/mri added, 
 
 1. e. after the name of any one, Luke 1 , 59 ; 
 see in eVi II. 3. c. /3. Pass, with dat. TW 
 oVo /iari, by name, Luke 1, 61. 19, 2 ; with 
 tv TIVI, Rom. 9, 7 et Heb. 11, 18 eV icradx. 
 K\rj%r)(T(Ta.i (rot tnrfp^a, i. e. in and through 
 Isaac, in his line, shall thy seed bear name, 
 quoted from Gen. 21, 12 where Sept. for 
 ? K ^i? 5 comp. in eV no. 3. d. a. $) Of 
 an epithet or appellation, e. g. of persons, 
 Matt. 2, 23 Nao>paTos K \rj^o-Tai. 22, 43 
 Trwy ovv AajSiS Kvpiov avTov KaXfl ; 23, 7. 8 
 P.T) K\T]ZfJTf papiBL v. 10. Luke 6, 15. 15, 
 19. 21. Acts 14, 12. Rom. 9, 26. James 2, 
 23. 1 John 3, 1. Of a band, cohort, Acts 
 
 10, 1. So Palseph. 12. 2, 3. Xen. CEc. 7. 
 
 2, 3. Cyr. 1. 2. 13. Hence 
 
 b) Pass, to be called, i. q. to be ; since 
 men and things are called that which they 
 are, or at least seem to be ; Matt. 5, 9. 19 
 bis, eXa^to-Toy K\n%T)(rfTai ev Ty /3a<r. TCOV 
 ovp. KT\. Luke 1, 32. 35. 36. 76. 2, 23. 
 15, 19. 1 Cor. 15, 9. Heb. 3, 13. Matt. 21, 
 13 et Mark 11, 17 OIKO? Tipoo-ev^y K\TJ%T)- 
 o-fTai, quoted from Is. 56, 7 where Sept. for 
 !!0p3 ; also Is. 35, 8. 47, 1. 5. 48, 8. See 
 Heb. Lex. K^ Niph. no. 2. y. Passow in 
 /caAf a) no. 2 ult. Horn. II. 4. 61. Od. 7. 
 313. Find. Pyth. 3. 119. Soph. Elect. 
 366. + 
 
 Ka\\ie\aiOf, O v, 6, 17, adj. (*oXXi- i. q. 
 KaXo y, eXaiov.) pr. rich in oil, and hence 
 f) xaXXteXatos (e Xai a), a good olive-tree, 
 the garden olive, opp. to dypieXaios, Rom. 
 
 11, 24. Aristot. de Plant. 1. 6. 
 Ka\\iU>V : ovos, 6, fj, adj. (compar. of *a- 
 
 Xo y,) better ; inN.T. Neut. KaXXtovonceas 
 compar. of KaX&s, Buttm. 5 115. 4, 5. So 
 Acts 25, 10 ws Kal (rv KoXXioi/ finyiva>o-Kis, 
 as thou also better knowest, 5. e. better than 
 thou seemest to know. Comp. in /SeXTiW. 
 , ov, 6, fj, adj. (na\6s 
 teaching that which is good, 
 
Ka\ol X 
 
 373 
 
 and as Subst. a teacher of good, Tit. 2, 3. 
 Comp. Buttm. 123. 5. Not found in the 
 classics. 
 
 Ka\ol \tfj,eve<f, (KO\I>S, Xi^r/i/,) Plur. pr. 
 n. Fair Havens, a port on the southern coast 
 of the island of Crete, Acts 27, 8. Comp. 
 Engl. Fairhaven. 
 
 /caXoTTOteco, , f. 770-01, to do well, to live 
 virtuously, 2 Thess. 3, 13. Sept. in Cod. 
 Alex, for S^an Lev. 5, 4. A later form 
 for the earlier TO /coXoV (jcaAwj) TTOU CO, Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 199, 200. 
 
 fca\6$, rj, 6i>, fair, goodly, beautiful, pr. 
 as to external form and appearance. Sept. 
 for nfi^ Gen. 12, 14. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 12. 
 In N. T. 
 
 1 . good, goodly, excellent, e. g. a) As 
 to quality and character. a) Genr. yrj 
 Matt. 13, 8. 23. Mark 4, 8. 20. Luke 8, 
 15; 8(v8pov Matt. 12, 33. Luke 6, 43; 
 (nrtpfM Matt. 13, 24. 27. 37. 38 ; pirpov 
 Luke 6, 38. Negat. ov KO\OV not good, bad, 
 worthless, 1 Cor. 5, 6. Sept. for aia Gen. 
 1,4. Ez. 17, 8. So Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 6. 
 8) Also good, choice, excellent, e. g. naprcos 
 Matt. 3, 10. 7, 17. 18. 19. 12, 33. Luke 
 3, 9. 6, 43 ; olvos John 2, 10 bis (Hdian. 
 5. 5. 16) ; /wzpyaptrat Matt. 13, 45 ; Xi Sot 
 Luke 21, 5; also Matt. 13, 48. 1 Tim. 3, 
 1. 13. 19. Sept. for nia Gen. 27, 9. 30, 
 20. Zech. 1, 13. So Hdian. 1. 16. 7. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 1. 9. y) Spec, fair, worthy, hon 
 ourable, 1 Tim. 1, 18. 3, 7. James 2, 7 ro 
 KoX6i> wop!. So Xen. Cyr. 7. 3. 11. 
 
 b) good, as to effect and influence, useful, 
 profitable; e. g. oXas Mark 9, 50. Luke 14, 
 34; also 1 Tim. 1, 8. 4, 4. Sept. for nia 
 Gen. 2, 9. So Ecclus. 14, 3. Xen. Mem. 
 
 3. 8. 4 sq. Hence K aX 6 v e crn, it is good, 
 profitable, juiat, c. ace. et infin. Matt. 17, 4 
 et Mark 9, 5 et Luke 9, 33 KO\W tort f]fj.as 
 cbSe flvai. So with dat. of pers. and inf. as 
 subj. Matt. 18, 8. 9. Mark 9, 43. 45. 47. 
 1 Cor. 7, 1. 26 bis. 9, 15. With dat. and 
 ft, Matt. 26, 24 et Mark 14,21. 9,42 K a\6v 
 f(mv avra pa\\ov ft KT\. it were better for 
 him if, etc. 1 Cor. 7, 8 c. t uv. 
 
 2. In a moral sense, good, right, worthy. 
 noble, spoken of the heart and life, and of 
 what pertains to them. a) Of thoughts, 
 feelings, emotions ; Heb. 13, 18 *toXij <rvvti- 
 Srjcris a good conscience. Luke 8,15 tv nap- 
 bia KoXi; Kal dya^fj. b) Of precepts re 
 quiring what is good and right ; Rom. 7, 16 
 6 vofios K. Heb. 6, 5 K. 3eoC pfjpa. 1 Tim. 
 
 4, 6 r; K. SiSao-KtiXia. 2 Tim. 1, 14 TTJV K. 
 irapa%T)KT]v. c) Of life and actions, good, 
 right, noble ; so xaXf] dva<rrpo<pf) James 3, 
 
 13. 1 Pet. 2, 12 ; K. dyw 1 Tim. 6, 12. 
 2 Tim. 4, 7 ; K. 6>oXoyta 1 Tim. 6, 12. 13 ; 
 K. %ep.f\iov 1 Tim. 6, 19, comp. v. 18 ; also 
 1 Tim. 2, 3 et 5, 4 TOVTO yap KO\OV evwiriov 
 TOV 3eoO, comp. in evviriov no. 3. Spec. 
 epyov Ka\6v, tpya xaXa, a good deed, 
 good works, comp. in tpyov no. 2. c. ft ; so 
 genr. i. q. well-doing, virtue, Matt. 5, 16. 
 1 Tim. 5, 25. Tit. 2, 7. 14. Heb. 10, 24. 
 
 1 Pet. 2, 12; c. epya impl. Rom. 12, 17. 
 
 2 Cor. 8, 21. Tit. 3, 8 ra /coXa. (Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 1. 32. Conv. 8. 10, 32 ; tpya impl. 
 Mem. 2. 1. 27.) Also i. q. useful work, 
 benefit, Matt. 26, 10. Mark 14, 6. John 10, 
 32. 33. 1 Tim. 5, 10. 6, 18. Tit. 3, 8. 14. 
 d) Neut. TO KaXop, abstr. the good, the 
 right, what is good and right; Rom. 7, 18. 
 
 1 Thess. 5, 21. Heb. 5, 14. Hence ro 
 K.a\ov Troiflv, to do good, i. e. to do well, 
 to act virtuously, Rom. 7, 21. 2 Cor. 13, 7. 
 Gal. 6, 9. James 4, 17. (Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 2.) 
 Also Ka\6v ecrrt, it is good, it is righl, 
 c. inf. Matt. 15, 26. Mark 7, 27. Rom. 14, 
 21. Gal. 4, 18. Heb. 13, 9. e) Of per 
 sons in respect to the performance of duty ; 
 e. g. 6 Troip.T)v 6 KoXd? John 10, 11 bis. 14 ; 
 K. SIUKOVOS 1 Tim. 4, 6 ; K. orpariam/y 
 
 2 Tim. 2, 3 ; K. ot\oi/d>oi 1 Pet 4, 10. So 
 Ml. V. H. 3. 10. Luc. Alex. 30. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 6. 16. 
 
 Ka\vfJ,fJ,a, O.TOS, TO, (KaXvTrrw,) a cover 
 ing, veil, 2 Cor. 3, 13 : trop. v. 14. 15. 16-; 
 see in awHcaXuTmo. Comp. Ex. 34, 33 sq. 
 where Sept. for rnOT3 . Horn. II. 24. 93. 
 ^Eschyl. Again. 1118. 
 
 Ka\V7TT(i), f. -v^co, (kindr. Kt\v<pr], Kpvnrat, 
 (cXeVroo,) to cover over, to cover up, to hide ; 
 c. ace. Matt. 8, 24. Luke 8, 16 KoXwrrei av- 
 Tovcrufvfi. 23,30. Sept. fornos Gen. 7, 19. 
 (Lycurg. 197. 9. Xen. Eq. 12 . 5. Cyr. 5. 
 1. 4.) Trop. Matt. 10, 26 ouSei/ KfKaXvp- 
 fitvov. 2 Cor. 4, 3 bis. James 5, 20 et 1 Pet. 
 4, 8 Kci\v\lsfi TrX^Sor d/iapncoi/, shall cover 
 a multitude of sins, i. e. cause them to be 
 overlooked, not punished. Comp. Sept. and 
 ,-103 Ps. 32, 1. 
 
 adv. (*coXdr,) pr. beautifully ; in 
 N. T. morally, well, rightly. E. g. 
 
 1 . As to manner and external character, 
 wdl, i. e. rightly, suitably, properly. John 
 18, 23 ft 8e AcoXaJf sc. e XaXrjcra. Acts 10, 
 33. 1 Cor. 7, 37. 38. 14, 17. Phil. 4, 14. Heb. 
 13,18. James 2, 8. 1 9. 2 Pet. 1 , 1 9. 3 J >lm 6. 
 Negat. OLI KoAo>r not well Gal. 4, 17. Sept. 
 for ron 1 K. 8, 18. (^El. V. H. 14. 25. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 8. 6.) In regard to office 01 
 duty, well, faithfully, 1 Tim. 3,4. 12. 13. 
 5, 17. So 1 Mace. 8, 23. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 
 
374 
 
 Kava 
 
 45. Emphat. very well, excellently, Mark 7, 
 37. Gal. 5, 7 e rpe xere K a\S>s. Ironically, 
 Mark 7, 9 KuXws d3ereire r^f (vrdXrjv T. 
 3eov. 2 Cor. 11,4. (M. V. H. 1.16.) In 
 the sense of well, honourably, James 2, 3 
 cri> KaSov a)8e (caXcoj. 
 
 2. As to effect, influence, tendency, icell, 
 rightly, aptly, as of declarations or prophe 
 cies, Matt. 15, 7 KaXws Trpoet^revo-e Trept 
 vfjL&v. Mark 7, 6. 12, 28 Sri KaXwr drreKptir). 
 v. 32. Luke 20, 39. John 4, 17. 8, 48. 13, 
 13. Acts 28,25. Rom. 11, 20. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 7. 11. 
 
 3. In phrases, e. g. a) KaXcos flirtlv, 
 to speak well of, to praise, c. ace. Luke 6, 
 26; conip. in einov no. 1. f. Buttm. 131. 
 2. b) KaXcoy f xfiv> to be well, to reco 
 ver from sickness, Mark 16, 18 ; see in ?^w 
 no. 5. Comp. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 47. c) *a- 
 Xoif TToiflv with accus. or dat. to do well 
 to any one, to benefit, Matt. 5, 44. Luke 6, 27 ; 
 absol. Matt. 12, 12. Comp. Buttm. 131. 2. 
 
 see in KUJUI. 
 
 9, ov, 6, 17, a cameZ, Matt. 3, 4. 
 Mark 1, 6. Sept. for baa Gen. 12, 16. 24, 
 10 sq. So Diod. Sic. 3/43. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 
 30. Spec, in proverbs, e. g. a) Matt. 19, 
 24 et Mark 10, 25 et Luke 18, 25 fvKonu- 
 repov t(TTi Kap.T]\ov 8ui rpv!Tr]p.aTos pa(pi8os 
 SteXSelv, applied to that which is extremely 
 difficult or impossible ; so the Rabbins of 
 an elephant, see Buxtorf Lex. 1722. Lightf. 
 et Scho3ttg. Hor. Heb. in Matt. 1. c. The 
 same expression occurs in the Koran, Sur. 
 7. 38 ; but doubtless imitated from the N. T. 
 b) Matt. 23, 24 ot 8ii}\iovrfs rov Kmvunra, 
 TTJV 8 Kap.rj Xov KaraiTLvovTfs, spoken of those 
 who are formal and diligent in the observ 
 ance of lesser duties, but negligent in the 
 discharge of higher ones ; comp. Buxtorf 
 I.e. 1516. 
 
 /caUiX.09, ov, o, a rope, cable ; so in some 
 Mss. instead of KapjXos Matt. 19, 24. Luke 
 18, 25. Suid. Ka/j.iXoy fie ira^y (TXOIVIOV. 
 Schol. in Aristoph. Vesp. 1030. The word 
 is not found elsewhere ; and was perh. in 
 vented to evade the supposed difficulty of 
 the reading xa^Xoy ; see Passow s. v. But 
 see Gesenius in Hob. Lex. art. ban . 
 
 tcd/jiivos, ov, T], a furnace, for smelting 
 metals, burning pottery, baking, or the like ; 
 genr. Matt. 13, 42. 50 fls TTJV Kapivov rov TTU- 
 pos i. e. a burning furnace. Rev. 1,15. 9, 2. 
 Sept. for jttjSS Gen. 19, 28 ; n^3 Jer. 11,3, 
 "WS Dan. si 6 sq. Diod. Sic. 5. 27. Xen. 
 Vect. 4. 49. 
 
 KdfAfJilXi), f. vo-w, (for Kara/iva>.) to shut 
 down, to close the eyes so as not to see ; c. 
 
 ace. Matt. 13, 15 et Acts 28, 27 rovs o<$3. 
 avr&v ftdtdpfivcrav, quoted from Is. 6, 10 
 where Sept. for ssai Hiph. Trop. Philo 
 de Somn. p. 589. e. This is a later form, 
 not used by Attic, writers, Phryn. et Lob. 
 p. 339 sq. Sturz. de Dial. Alex. p. 173 sq. 
 
 f. KCI/J.S), aor. 2 eKapov, perf. 
 a, Buttm. 5 110. 11. 2. 
 
 1. to be weary, faint, as from labour, in- 
 trans. Rev. 2, 3 Kf/corria/cay KOI ov /ce tyiJjAtay. 
 Heb. 12, 3. Sept. Job 10, 1. Hdian. 8. 4. 
 16. Xen. An. 3. 4. 47. 
 
 2. to be sick, James 5, 15 f) ev^Tj TTJS 
 Trt crrecas craxj-fi Kiip-vovra. Diod. Sic. 1. 25. 
 Dem. 1364. 13. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 51. 
 
 Ka/A0l } see in Kayu>. 
 
 fcdfjiTTTCO, f. -^co, to bend, c. ace. *TVV 
 Horn. II. 4. 486 ; vXov Plato Prot. 325. d. 
 In N. T. spoken of the knees, to bend, to 
 bow, i. e. 
 
 1. Trans. Kap-Trrfiv TO yovv, to bend the 
 knee, in homage, worship, c. dat. Rom. 11, 
 4; so Sept. for b 3^3 1 K. 19, 18. With 
 irpos c. acc. Eph. 3, 14. So genr. Horn. 
 II. 7. 118 ; comp. Xen. Eq. 1. 6. 
 
 2. Intrans. TTOJ/ yow Ka/^et, every knee 
 shall bow, shall bend itself, in homage, wor 
 ship ; c. dat. Rom. 14, 1 1 quoted from Is. 
 45, 23 where Sept. for SBb 3n3 . With 
 fvrivi Phil. 2, 10. 
 
 Kav : crasis for al fdv, and if, also if; 
 sometimes written KO.V but improperly, 
 Buttm. \ 29. n. 2. b, and n. 7. 
 
 1. and if, with Subj. aor. or perf. and in 
 the apodosis the fut. or ov p.rj with Subj. 
 James 5, 1 5. Mark 16,18 nav 3ai/ao-i/zdV ri 
 TtlaxTiv KT\. Luke 13, 9 KCLV fiev 7701^077 Kap- 
 TTOV, sc. KaXa>y. Xen. An. 3. 1 . 36. 
 
 2. also if, even if. although, with Sub- 
 junct. a) Genr. with Subj. aor. and the 
 apodosis with fut. Matt. 21, 21 KO.V TW opei 
 TOVTW KrX. John 1 1, 25 K&V ano Savr], f]<r(Tai. 
 Heb. 12, 20. Also with Subj. pres. and 
 the apodosis with pres. or fut. or Subj. aor. 
 Matt. 10, 23 Grb. 26, 35. John 8, 14. 10, 
 38. Comp. Luc. D. Deor. 20. 12. b) if 
 even, if but, at least, where Kai is intens. by 
 way of diminution, Passow in *fai no. 8. [II. 
 3. b.] Herm. ad Vig. p. 836. So with Subj. 
 aor. and in the apodosis the fut. Mark 5, 28 
 KO.V ro>v ipaTicov avrov a^co/iat, O"co3?jcropat. 
 Ellipt. without apodosis, Mark 6, 56. Acts 
 5, 15. 2 Cor. 11, 16. So genr. Hdian. 4. 4. 
 15. Luc. D. Deor. 5. 2. 
 
 Kavd, ,7, indec. Cana, Heb. f JR, a vil 
 lage of Galilee eight or ten miles north Oi 
 Nazareth: John 2, 1. 11. 4, 46. 21, 2. Not 
 
Ka. 
 
 375 
 
 KapSia 
 
 mentioned in O. T. but always called Ka- 
 va TIJS TaXiXataj to distinguish it from a 
 Cana in Asher not far from Tyre, Josh. 19, 
 28. It is now in ruins ; and is still called 
 Kana el-Jelll, Cana of Galilee. See Bibl. 
 Res. in Palest. III. p. 204 sq. comp. p. 384. 
 Jos. B. J. 1. 17. 5. 
 
 Kavavaios, O v, 6, (Kai/a,) a Canaile, 
 one born at Cana; so Lachm. Matt. 10, 4. 
 Mark 3, 18, for Kavavinjs q. v. Act. 
 Thorn. $ 1. 
 
 KavaviTijs, ou, 6, the Cananite, an 
 epithet derived from Heb. NSJ? Aram. "fi^p. 
 zeal, and signifying i. q. ^Xwr^r q. v. 
 Hence SI /KBI/ 6 KavaviTTjs, the name of one 
 of the apostles, Matt. 10, 4. Mark 3, 18 ; see 
 fully in arts. f^Xwr^s no. 2, and 2tficoi> no. 2. 
 
 KavSatCT), TJS, T], Candace, a name com 
 mon to the queens of Ethiopia (Meroe) in 
 the age of Christ, Acts 8, 27. This coun 
 try was then governed by females ; Strabo 
 17. p. 786, 820 sq. Dion Cass. 54. 5. p. 335. 
 Plin. H. N. 6. 35. See in AiSi o^. 
 
 KQ.V03V, 6vos, 6, (K.O.VTI, KuWa,) a reed, rod, 
 staff, employed to keep any thing stiff, 
 erect, asunder, Horn. II. 8. 193. ib. 13. 407 ; 
 a measuring rod, rule, line, J2schin. 82. 25, 
 26, 27. Plato Phil. 56. b. In N. T. trop. a 
 canon, i. e. a standard, rule, e. g. of life and 
 doctrine, Gal. 6, 16 ocrot ro> Kavovi TOVTCO 
 (rroixr]o-ovo-iv. Phil. 3, 16Rec. (So Eurip. 
 Hec. 602 Kavav TOV KoXoC. Dem. 324. 27. 
 Xen. Ag. 10. 2.) Meton. limit, district, 
 sphere, of action or duty assigned (mea 
 sured off) to any one, 2 Cor. 10, 13 Kara TO 
 fj.tr pov TOV Kavovos K.T\. v. 15. 16. Comp. 
 Jos. c. Ap. 2. 17 init. 
 
 KcnrepvaovfJi,, fj, indec. Capernaum, 
 written also Kafpapvaoi/n, Heb. prob. *i3 
 WHS (village of Nahum), a town or city of 
 Galilee in the confines of Zebulon and 
 Naphtali, on the western shore of the lake 
 of Tiberias ; comp. Matt. 4, 13 fls KUTT. TTJV 
 (V opiois ZafiovXa/v KOI Ne- 
 It was for a time the residence 
 of Jesus (Matt. 1. c.) and was much fre 
 quented by him ; hence called 77 I8ia TrdXt?, 
 Matt. 9, 1 comp. Mark 2, 1 sq. Capernaum 
 is not mentioned in the O. T. and only once 
 by Josephus, de Vit. sua 72. It probably 
 was situated on the shore, at the north end 
 of the plain of Gennesareth (see art. Ttwrj- 
 a-apfr), at the place now called KhAn Min- 
 yeh, near the large fountain Ain et-Tin ; 
 which then would be the fountain Caphar- 
 naum mentioned by Josephus, B. J. 3. 10. 
 8. Comp. espec. John 6, 24. 25, with Matt. 
 13, 34 and M;irk 6, 53. See Bibl. Res. in 
 
 Palest. III. p. 288 sq. Reland Falsest p 
 682. Matt. 4, 13. 8, 5. 11, 23. 17,24. 
 Mark 1, 21. 2, 1. 9, 33. Luke 4, 23. 
 31. 7, 1. 10, 15. John 2, 12. 4, 46. 6, 17. 
 24. 59. 
 
 a), f. fvcra, from 6 KamjXos a 
 retailer, huckster, Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 42 ; an 
 inn-keeper, publican, JE\. V. H. 10. 9 ; see 
 more in e/wropor. The KOTTT/XOI were noto 
 rious for adulterating their commodities, 
 Sept. Is. 1, 22. Luc. Hermot. 59 Sxnrfp oi 
 Kdirrj\oi, Kfpacra.^.fvoi KOI SoXcocraires /cat 
 KaKOfifTpovvrts. Hence KaTTT/Xevco pr. to 
 be a retailer, vintner, Hdot. 1.15. Plato Rep. 
 525. d. Hesych. KanvXfve i /xfraTrwXe I, o- 
 voTTco\(l KOL TO. irpos ras rpo(pas KU\ iroafts. 
 In N. T. trop. to adulterate, to corrupt, c. 
 ace. 2 Cor. 2, 17 Ka7nj\fvovT(s TOV Xoyo 
 TOV Stov. So Philostr. Vit. Apollon. 1. 13. 
 ib. 5. 36. Pallad. 72 (in Anthol. Gr. III. p. 
 130) TI>XT) KaTrr)\fvov(ra Trdiva TOV ftiov. 
 KdTrvos, ov, 6, smoke, Acts 2, 19. Rev. 
 
 8, 4. 9, 2 ter. 3. 17. 18. 14, 11. 15, 8. 18. 
 
 9. 18. 19, 3. Sept. for ^ Ex. 19, 18. 
 Josh. 8, 20.JEL V. H. 12. 37. Xen. Cyr. 
 6. 3. 5. 
 
 KaTTTraSo/cia, as, fj. Cappadocia, an 
 eastern province of Asia Minor, bounded N. 
 by Pontus and Galatia, W. by Lycaonia, S. 
 by Cilicia, and E. by Syria and Armenia 
 Minor ; Acts 2, 9. 1 Pet. 1,1. The coun 
 try was celebrated for its wheat and its pas 
 tures ; for the excellence of its horses ; and 
 for the dulness and vice of the inhabitants ; 
 comp. the verb KaTTTraSoKi j^ii/, and the viru 
 lent Greek epigram preserved by Constan- 
 tine Porphyr. Them. 1. 2, in Lat. thus : 
 
 Vipera Cappadocem nocitura momordet ; at ilia 
 Gustato periit sanguine Cappadocis. 
 
 In the time of the N. T. Cappadocia waa 
 a Roman province. Strabo 12. p. 539. Dion 
 Cass. 57. 17. Tac. Ann. 2. 42; 
 
 KapSia, as, f], (kindr. x/ap, Krjp,) tJie 
 heart, Lat. cor, as the seat of life, Horn. II. 
 
 10. 94. ib. 13. 282. In N. T. 
 
 1. the heart, the human heart, only trop. 
 for the mind, the inner man, Lat. animus. 
 
 a) As the seat of the desires, feelings, 
 affections, emotions, passions. a) Genr. 
 Matt. 5, 8 ot KaSapol TJJ Kap8ia. v. 28. 6, 21. 
 Mark 4, 15. Luke 1, 17. John 14, 1. Acts 
 
 11, 23. Rom. 2, 5. 1 Cor. 4, 5 TUS &ov\as 
 TO>V Kap8i5>v. 2 Tim. 2, 22. Heb. 3, 8. 12. 
 10, 22. al. saep. Sept. for 3^ Ps. 51, 12. 
 Prov. 31, 11. So Plut. Artax. 6. Xen. 
 Conv. 4. 28. /3) In phrases: ? K v. diro 
 KapSias, from the heart, i. e. willingly, 
 freely, sincerely, Matt. 18, 35. Rom. 6. 17 ; 
 
376 
 
 t o\rjs TTJS K. and eV oX?/ TTJ KapS/a,/rom or 
 tciVA the whole heart, Matt. 22, 37. Mark 12, 
 30. Sept. for 2^23 Deut. 6, 5. Ps. 1 1 9, 34. 
 (Luc. Jup.Trag. 19. Philopatr. 18. Theocr. 
 Id. 29. 4. M. Antonin. 2.3.) So ij /capSt a /cat 
 
 17 i/^ M a one fretfrt and one soul, i. e. en 
 tire unanimity, Acts 4, 32 ; eVSvjueicrSai v. 
 5iaXoyieo-2<n eV r/ (capSt a avrov, to consider 
 in one s mind, with oneself, Matt. 9, 4. Luke . 
 3, 15 ; (rvp.(3a\\fiv ev rfj K. to ponder in mind 
 Luke 2, 19 ; avaftaiveiv tv TTJ K. V. rt TTJV 
 K. to come up in or into one s heart, mind, 
 Luke 24, 38. Acts 7, 23. (Sept. Is. 65, 17. 
 Jer. 3, 16.) Also /3dXXen> ds TTJV K. to put 
 into one s heart, to suggest, John 13, 2 ; fit- 
 86vai fTrl Kapdias to place upon the hearts, 
 i. e. to put into them, Heb. 10, 16 comp. 8, 
 10. Rev. 17, 17. (Sept. Neh. 7, 5.) Fur 
 ther, e xfiv eV Kap8ia, to have in one s heart, 
 i. e. to love, to cherish, Phil. 1,7; flvai h rfj 
 .<. TWOS, to be in ones heart, to be the object of 
 his love, 2 Cor. 7, 3 ; dvrjp Kara T^V Kap8iav n- 
 vos a man after one s own heart, i. e. like-mind 
 ed and therefore approved and beloved, Acts 
 13, 22 ; 6 KpvTTTos rJjy Kap8ias aVSpcoTros i. q. 
 6 fo-<o uj/3paj7rof 1 Pet. 3, 4. y) Synecd. 
 put for the person himself, in cases where 
 various affections, passions, emotions, are 
 ascribed to the heart or mind; comp. Ge- 
 sen. Lehrg. p. 752, 753. John 16, 22 x a P*l~ 
 (rerai i>nu>v f] Kap&ia. Acts 2, 26 evcppdi Sr; 
 T! K p.ov. 14, 17. Col. 2, 2. 2 Thess. 2, 17. 
 James 1, 26. 5, 5. So in emeiv V. Xe-yetveV 
 rfi Kap8ia to say in one s heart, i. e. in one 
 self, to think, see in cwcy no. 1. . Matt. 24, 
 48. Rom. 10, 6. Rev. 18,7. See Heb. Lex. 
 i no. 2. 
 
 b) As the seat of the intellect according 
 to the Heb. views, the heart, mind, under 
 standing ; Matt. 13, 15 bis, KCU rfj /ccrp/a 
 (rvviSxn. Mark 6, 52. Luke 24, 25. John 
 12, 40. Rom. 1, 21. 2 Pet. 1, 19. Eph. 1. 
 
 18 Grb. but Rec. Siavoia. Sept. and 2^ Is. 
 6, 10. Job 12, 3 ; comp. Heb. Lex. 32b no. 
 1. e. (Horn. II. 21. 441.) Also SeVSnt v. 
 Star^peti/ eV r!j AtapSta, to lay up or keep in 
 mind, Luke 1, 66. 2, 51. Spec, for con 
 science, Rom. 2, 15. 1 John 3, 20 bis. 21. 
 
 2. Trop. the heart, for the middle, midst, 
 the central part of any thing, e. g. AC. TT/S 
 yfjs Matt. 12, 40. Sept. and & Ez. 27, 4. 
 Jonah 2, 4. -f 
 
 KapStoyvwcmis, O v, 6, ((capSm, yivta- 
 (TACCO,) hear -knoiver, searcher of hearts, Acts 
 1, 24. 15, 8. Found only in N. T. 
 
 KapTros, ov, 6, 1. fruit, produce, of 
 trees, plants, and of the earth ; Matt. 3, 10 
 
 ftfvSpOV fJ.T) TTOIOVV KClpTTOV KO\OV. 1 3, 8. Luke 
 
 12. 17 OVK ( xa> ITOV crui/a^w TOVS KapTrovs 
 fiov. 13, 6. 7. 9. John 12, 24. 2 Tim. 2, 6. 
 al. Allegor. John 15, 2 ter. 5. 8. Spec. 
 aTroStSoVat KapTrovs to pay over the fruits, 
 i. e. a share of them as rent, Matt. 21, 41. 
 Luke 20, 10. Sept. for ^Q Ps. 1, 3. Jer. 
 12, 2. So Diod. Sic. 2. 36, 49 init. Xen. 
 Vect. 4. 6, 9. By Hebr. of children, off 
 spring, as Kapnos rrjs KotXt as fruit of the 
 womb Luke 1, 42 ; K. rfjs oo-foos fruit of 
 the loins Acts 2, 30. So Sept. and n ^B 
 Gen. 30, 2. Mic. 6, 7. al. 
 
 2. Trop. fruit, i. e. a) For deeds, 
 works, conduct ; Matt. 3, 8 Troi^trare Kaptrbv 
 aiov rtjs p-fravoias. 7, 16. 20. 21, 43. Luke 
 3, 8. al. Sept. for riJOSPl Prov. 10, 16. 
 b) For effect, result; Rom . 15, 28. Gal. 5, 
 22 6 Kapirbs TOV irvfiifjiaTos. Eph. 5, 9. Heb. 
 .12, 11. James 3, 17. Sept. and n ")B J er . 
 17, 10. Mic. 7, 13. c) For profit, advan 
 tage, good result ; John 4, 36 KOL o-vmyet 
 Kapjrbv fls fo)7ji/ alwviov. Rom. 1,13. 6, 21. 
 22. James 3, 18. al. Sept. and ^B Ps. 58, 
 
 12. So Hdian. 8. 3. 15. Xen. Cyr. 7. 2. 
 11. d) Also Kapnbs rccv ^etXea)i/,/?-U27 of 
 the lips, i. e. praise, Heb. 13, 15, in allusion 
 to Sept. Hos. 14, 3 Kapirbs xXe coj/ for "^O 
 where the Heb. now reads c^Q calves, bul 
 locks. Comp. Sept. and Heb. Prov. 12, 14. 
 Is. 57, 19. -f 
 
 Kapiros, ov, 6, Carpus, pr. n. of a mar. 
 2 Tim. 4, 13. 
 
 fcapTTOcfropea), , f. jjo-w, (KapTro 
 to bear fruit, intrans. 
 
 1. Pr. Mark 4, 28 auroudr^ yap r/ yrj Kap- 
 jrofpopd. Sept. for rnQ Hab. 3, 16. Diod. 
 Sic. 2. 49. Xen. Vect. 1. 3. 
 
 2. Trop. of life and conduct ; Col. 1, 10 
 KapTTfxpopoviTfs fv Tvavr\ f pycp ayaSw. Matt. 
 
 13, 23. Mark 4, 20. Luke 8, 15. With 
 dat. e. g. TW 3ew Rom. 7, 4. rw Savdrw v. 5, 
 to bear fruit unto God or unto death, i. e. 
 acceptable to God or worthy of death. Also 
 of the gospel as effectively preached, Mid 
 Col. 1, 6. 
 
 /capTTO^OpO?, ov, 6, 77, adj. (napnos, <pe- 
 pto,) fruit-bearing, fruitful. Acts 14, 17 KM- 
 po\ KapTr. Sept. Ps. 107, 34 yrj. Diod. Sic 
 1. 74 x^P a - -^ en - Cyr. 6. 2. 22 (poiviK.es. 
 
 KCtpTepeci)) >, f. jjaw, (/caprfpo?, Kapros, 
 xparos.) to be strong, steadfast, to endure. 
 intrans. Heb. 1 1 , 27 TOV a6parov wr 6pu>v 
 fKapTfprjo-e. Ecclus. 2, 2. Diod. Sic. 3. 
 5 ult. Xen. Hell. 3. 1. 17. 
 
 Kapfas, (os, ovs, TO, (Kdpcpa,) pr. some 
 thing dry, i. e. any small dry particle, as of 
 chaff, wood, or the like, a twig, mote ; put 
 
377 
 
 Kara 
 
 as the emblem of lesser faults, opp. SOKOS, 
 Matt. 7, 3. 4. 5. Luke 6, 41. 42 bis. For 
 the Heb. proverb see Buxtorf Lex. Rab. 
 2080. Sept. Gen. 8, 11. Luc. Astrol. 29. 
 Plut. de Solert. anim. 10. 
 
 /capxr/Swv, uvos , 17, (pr. Carthage,) in 
 N. T. a carbuncle; Rev. 21, 19 in Mss. 
 for xa\Ki]8tov chalcedony. Comp. Theophr. 
 Fragm. 2. 18, et ibi Schneider. 
 
 /cara, a prep, governing the genitive and 
 accusative, with the primary signif. down, 
 
 1. e. down from, down upon, down in, etc. 
 Buttm. J147. n. 1. Kiihner $292. Matth. 
 \ 581. Winer 51. k. p. 457. $ 53. d. p. 476. 
 Passow s. v. 
 
 I. With the GENITIVE. 1. Of Place, i.e. 
 a) Of motion down from a higher to a lower 
 place, 6. g. Kara rov Kpijfj.vov ds %d\ao-(rav 
 down from (along) a precipice into the sea, 
 Matt. 8, 32. Mark 5, 13. Luke 8, 33. So 
 Kara Kf^oX^y fx fiv t have depending from 
 the liead, 1 Cor. 11,4; see in e^w no. 3. a. 
 $. Jos. B. J. 1. 7. -5 KOTO. ru>v Kprj[j.vcav 
 fppiTrrovv tavrovs. ib. 2. 3. 3. Xen. An. 4. 
 
 2. 17. 
 
 b) Of motion down upon a lower place, 
 upon, Mark 14, 3 Kare^ffv avrov Kara rrjs 
 Kf(pa\fjs. So Jos. B. J. 2. 3. 2 Kara Kftpa- 
 Xrjr avr<av T)(f)iecrav TO. f3t\rj, i. e. from the 
 porticos. JEl V. H. 8. 14. Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 
 5. Trop. 17 Kara /3a3ov? Trrw^e/a, lit. pov 
 erty down to the very depths, i. e. deepest 
 poverty, 2 Cor. 8, 2. So pr. Strabo 9. p. 
 419 (ivrpov KotXoi Kara fictions. Winer 
 5 55. 2. f. 
 
 c) Genr. of motion or direction upon, to- 
 wards, through, any place or object, a) Pr. 
 upon, against, Acts 27, 14 e,3aXe Kar avrijs 
 avep-os rvfpaviKos. So lidian. 6. 7. 18. 
 Dem. 403. 3. Comp. Matth. 1. c. /3) Also 
 through, throughout, where Kara c. ace. is 
 more usual. Luke 4, 14 <pfiprj e ^XSe Ko3 
 0X77? rrjs TTfpix^p^v. 23, 5 8i8do-Ka>v KaS 
 0X77? rf/s lovbaias. Acts 9, 31. 4:2. 10, 37. 
 For adv. Ka3 oXov, see art. KaSo Xou. So 
 Horn. Od. 6. 102. JEl V. H. 1. 14. Pol. 1. 
 17. 10. y) After verbs of swearing, i. e. 
 to swear upon or by any thing, at the same 
 time stretching out the hand over, upon, to 
 wards the object. Matt. 26, 63 e^opAci fa) a-e 
 Kara rov 3eoO. Heb. 6, 13 bis, u>fj.ocrf Ka3* 
 (avrov. v. 16. Sept. for 3 S^H 2 Chr. 
 36, 13. Is. 45, 23. So Dem. 553. 17. ib. 
 1268. 24. Thuc. 5. 47. 
 
 2. Trop. of the object towards or upon 
 which any thing tends, aims, is directed, 
 upon, in respect of;l Cor. 15, 15. Jude 15 
 iroirjcrai Kpi&tv Kara iravratv. So Plut. de 
 Puer. educ. 4 init. o Kara ruiv re^viav Kal 
 
 rwv Tno-rr]/j:(0v \tyeiv fl<a%ap.(v. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 2. 16. Apol. Socr. 13. Comp. Matth. I.e. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 272. Spec, against, af 
 ter words of speaking, accusing, warrinf, 
 and the like; Matt. 5, 11 nav TTOV. prjfw 
 *a3 vp.S>v. v. 23 e^ei rl Kara (rov. 10, 35. 
 12, 14 a-vpftovXiov eXafiov Kar avrov. v. 30 
 6 fj.f) o)i> fj.fr" f/j.ov, tear (fiov firri. 26, 59. 
 Mark 11, 25. 14, 55 sq. Luke 23, 14 &r 
 Ka-rrjyopelre KOT avrov. John 18, 29. Acts 
 4,26. 16,22. 21,28. 2 Cor. 13, 8. Gal. 
 5, 17. al. sacp. So Palasph. 6. 3. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 12. 1. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 1. Comp. 
 Passow no. 5. [II. 3.] 
 
 II. With the ACCUSATIVE, where the pri 
 mary and general idea is down upon, out 
 over, throughout. See the grammarians as 
 above cited, and Winer 53. d. p. 476. 
 
 1 . Of Place, i. e. a) Of motion or ex 
 tension, out over, through, throughout a 
 place ; Luke 8, 39 *a3 SXrjv rf]v TTO\IV mn- 
 PVQ-ITUIV. 15, 14 e yeWro Xi/xo? Kara rfjv ^<i- 
 pav fK(ivr]v. Acts 5, 1 5. 8, 1 . 11,1 ovrts 
 Kara rrjv lovdaiav who were throughout Ju- 
 dea. 15,23. 24,12. So TropeWcrSai Kara 
 rfjv 686v to travel through i. e. along the 
 way Acts 8, 36 ; and genr. Kara rfjv 58ov 
 along or BY the way, while travelling upon 
 it, Luke 10, 4. Acts 25, 3. 26, 13. So 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 72 ol Kara TI\V Aiyvnrov. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 5. 1 1 dpio-r(voi>Ts KO! Kara yrjv 
 Kal K. 3aX. Thuc. 5. 3 Ka3 686v. From 
 this idea of motion throughout every part of 
 a whole, arises the distributive sense of 
 Kara, in no. 3 below. 
 
 b) Of motion or position upon, at, near 
 to, adjacent to ; Luke 10, 32 yevoptvos Kara 
 rov ronov. v. 33 ^X2e Kar avrov. Acts 2, 
 10 rrjs AijSvTjs rijs Kara Kvpfjvrjv. 16, 7. 27, 
 2 rovs Kara TTJV Acri af ronovs, i. e. places 
 on and near the coast of Asia Minor, v. 7. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 22. Xen. An. 5. 2. 16, 23. 
 
 c) Of motion or direction upon, i. e. to 
 wards any place ; Acts 8, 26 iropevov Kara 
 IJ.(o-r}p.ftplav. 27, 12 \ifitva j3\(7rovra Kara 
 Ai/3a. Phil. 3, 14 Kara CTKOTTOV 8iuiKa>. So 
 Thuc. 7. 6 onfp Ka3 avrovs rjv, i. e. over 
 aainst. Xen. An. 7. 2. 1. Spec. KOTO- 
 
 oo-uTTOv dvTio-rfjvai, to withstand one to 
 (over against) his face, Gal. 2, 11. So Xen. 
 Hi. 1. 14 Kar 6<p 5a\p.ovs. 
 
 d) Of place where, i. e. of being al, in, 
 within a place, where sometimes eV might 
 be employed though not strictly synony 
 mous ; just as in Engl. at a house and 
 
 in a house may be used interchangeably ; 
 comp. Winer 1. c. p. 476 marg. a) With 
 ace. of place ; Rom. 16,5 rr/v Kar OIKOV 
 avra>v (KK\Tjcriav tJie church AT or IN their 
 
Kara 
 
 378 
 
 Kara 
 
 house, i. e. accustomed to meet there. 1 Cor. 
 16, 19. Pliilem. 2. Acts 13, 1 rjcrav Kara 
 TTJV fKK\r)criav 7rpo<j)rai KT\. So Luc. D. 
 Deor. 20. 13 Kar acrrv ijv. Diod. Sic. 2. 
 28 rois Kara n}v rru\iv. Palseph. 5. 3 Kpv- 
 ^ai Kara yr>. /3) With Ace. of pers. im 
 plying place, in, with, among; Acts 21, 21 
 Toir Kara ra e^Svrj lovSaiovs the Jews dis 
 persed among (throughout) the Gentiles. 
 26, 3 TOW Kara "lovScuous e 3a>i>. 17, 28 rives 
 raiv Ka3 vp.as TTOITJTCOV, certain of your own 
 poets. 18, 15. Eph. 1,15 TTJV Ka3 vpas iri- 
 CTTIV. (Diod. Sic. 4. 8 eK TOU Ka3 avrovs 
 Qiov. Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 11.) Spec. Ka3 
 eavrov in or with oneself, pr. in one s own 
 house, chez soi ; and hence genr. by or for 
 oneself, alone ; Acts 28, 1 6 fieveiv Ka3 eav 
 rov. Rom. 14, 22. James 2, 17. Comp. 
 Matth. 1. c. p. 1155. So Xen. An. 6. 2. 11. 
 Cyr. 7. 4. 15. y) With ace. of thing im 
 plying place, e. g. Kara 7rp6<ra>Tr6v rivos in 
 the presence of, before any one, Luke 2, 31. 
 Acts 3, 13 ; and so Acts 25, 16. 2 Cor. 10, 
 
 1. Also Kar o<jf>3oA^ovs sc. vp.u>v Gal. 3, 1. 
 Trop. of a state or condition in which any 
 thing is or is done, thus implying manner ; 
 e. g. Kar ovap in or by a dream, Matt. 1, 20. 
 
 2, 12. 13. (Jos. Ant. 1. 19. 1 Kara rovs 
 VTTVOVS.) 1 Cor. 2, 1 77X301 ov Ka3 i)Tffpoxr)v 
 \oyov I came not in excellency of speech. 
 Adverbially, Mark 1, 27 /car (t-ova-iav, see 
 in tovcria no. 3 ; so Kara Kpdros strongly, 
 vehemently, Acts 19, 20 (Thuc. 1. 64) ; 
 Kar I8iav in private, see in Ktoy no. 1 . b ; 
 /cara fiovas, see art. Kara/ioVaj. So Ka3 
 vTrepfto\r]v, exceedingly, Rom. 7, 13. (3al. 1, 
 13. 2 Cor. 4, 17, see in virfpfto\T] ; or ex 
 cellently, par excellence, 1 Cor. 12, 31. Also 
 ol Kar ioxfa those in distinction, i. q. the 
 distinguished, Acts 25, 23 ; comp. Buttm. 
 125. 6. 
 
 2. Of Time, i. e. of a period or point of 
 time throughout, during, in or at which, any 
 thing takes place ; e. g. Kara ro aird, at the 
 same time, together, Acts 14, 1 ; see in au- 
 TOS no. 3. a. y. Rom. 5, 6 Kara naipov in 
 due time. Acts 12, 1 Kar eKflvov rov Kaipov 
 during (about) that time. 19, 23. Rom. 9, 9. 
 Acts 13, 27. 16, 25 Kara ro fj.eaoviiKrt.ov 
 about midnight. 27. 27. Heb. 1, 10 av Kar 
 apXas in the beginning, of old. 3, 8 Kara rrjv 
 rjuepav rov 7teipao-p.ov during the time of 
 temptation. 9, 9. Sept. for 3 Gen. 18, 10 ; 
 comp. Heb. Lex. 3 B. 3. So 2 Mace. 12, 
 15. Diod. Sic. 4. 9. Thuc. 3. 99. Also 
 distributively, see in no. 3. b. 
 
 3. In a distributive sense, derived strictly 
 from the idea of pervading all the parts of a 
 whole ; e. g. a) Of place ; Matt. 24, 7 
 
 Kara TOTTOVS throughout all places, in various 
 parts. Luke 8, 1 8iu>8eve Kara TroAiv KOI KO>- 
 fjij]v, throughout city and village, i. e. every 
 one, generally, v.4. 9,6. 13,22. Acts 2, 46 
 K\>vres re Kar OLKOV aprov i. e. from house 
 to house. 8,3. 14,23. 15,21.36. 22, 19. al. 
 So Palseph. 39. 2. Diod. Sic. 2. 28 Kara KO>- 
 fj.as. Hdot. 1. 196 Kara Kw/iay eKaaras. Xen. 
 Hell. 6. 3. 19. b) Of time; e. g. Ka3 
 f]/jifpav daily, every day, Matt. 26, 55. Mark 
 14, 49; also ro Ka3 ^epav Luke 11, 3. 
 1 9, 47 ; Kar eros, Kar eviavrov, yearly, every 
 year, Luke 2, 41. Heb. 9, 25. 10, 1. 3; 
 Kara foprrjv at each passover Matt. 27, 15. 
 Luke 23, 17; Kara aaipov at certain times, 
 from time to time, John 5, 4 ; Kara p.iav 
 o-a/3/3ar<ui every first day of the week 1 Cor. 
 16, 2. Also Acts 17, 17 Kara 7rao-ai> fjfie- 
 pav. 18, 4. Heb. 3, 13 Ka3 eKacrrrjv rjfji. 
 Rev. 22, 2 K. fj.r/va eva eKacrrov. So Sept. 
 1 Sam. 7, 16. Luc. D. Deor. 24. 2. Xen. 
 An. 3. 2. 12. c) Genr. of any parts, num 
 ber, or the like ; e. g. Kara /xe/joy, part for 
 part, particularly, Heb. 9, 5. (2 Mace. 2, 
 
 30. Pol. 1. 4. 3,6.) Of number, Ka3 eva 
 one by one 1 Cor. 14, 31, see in els no. 1. 
 b. y ; as likewise for ot Ka3 eva, Ka3 ev, els 
 Ka3 els, see ibid. Also Kara fiiio by twos, 
 two and two, 1 Cor. 14, 27. Comp. Matth. 
 1. c. Winer 1. c. So JEl. V. H. 2. 1. Xen. 
 An. 4. 7. 8. 
 
 4. Trop. of fitness, accordance, conformi 
 ty, expressing the relation of one thing to 
 wards another. Thus 
 
 a) Of a rule, measure, standard of com 
 parison, according to, conformably to, after, 
 secundum, see Matth. I.e. p. 1153. Winer 
 
 1. c. p. 477. a) Genr. Matt. 9, 29 Kara 
 rrjv trump vp.>v yevr] 5r)ra> Vfuv. 23, 3 Kara 
 ra epya avrwv pr/ Troielre. Mark 7, 5. Luke 
 
 2, 22 Kara rov vopov M. v! 39. 23, 56. John 
 8, 15 Kara rrjv crapm Kpivere, i. e. from ex 
 ternal circumstances. 19, 7. Acts 22, 12. 23, 
 
 31. 26, 5. Rom. 2, 2 earl Kara a\r]^eiav, 
 
 1. q. earl aXrj^rjs. V. 6. 7. 8, 4. 5 Kara crdp- 
 Ka, Kara nvevpa, i. e. according to the will 
 of the flesh or of the Spirit. 10, 2. 14, 15. 
 Gal. 1, 4. Eph. 4, 22. Col. 2, 8. al. saep. 
 Sept. for 3 Ps. 7, 9. al. (Palsph. 32. 11. 
 Lue. Bis ace. 4. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 15, 16. ib. 
 5. 5. 6.) With the idea of proportion ; Matt. 
 
 2, 16. 25, 15 eKucrro) Kara rrjv loiav 8vvafj.iv. 
 Rom. 12, 6. 1 Cor. 3, 8. 2 Cor. 10, 13. So 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 1. /3) With ace. of 
 person, i. e. according to the will of any one, 
 Rom. 8, 27 Kara 3edV. 2 Cor. 7, 9. 10. 11. 
 1 Pet. 4, 6. Rom. 15, 5. 1 Cor. 12, 8; by 
 command of any one 2 Cor. 11, 17 ; accord 
 ing to the narrative or writing ofnny on 9, 
 
379 
 
 only in the inscriptions of the Gospels. 
 (2 Mace. 2, 13. Plato Phzedr. 1. p. 227. b, 
 <ara HivBapov as Pindar says. Cratyl. 18. 
 p. 401. d.) Gal. 1,11 OVK ea-ri Kara oV3pa>- 
 TTOV, is not according to man, not such as 
 man would have made. 7) Adverbially, 
 Luke 10, 31 Kara trvyicvpiav by chance, ac 
 cidentally. (Hdot. 8. 87 /caret TVXVV.) John 
 10, 3 /car ovopa. Acts 18, 14 Kara \6yov, 
 reasonably. (Luc. Icarom. 18.) 1 Cor. 14, 
 40. Eph. 6, 6. 1 Pet. 3, 7 Kara yvoxriv, dis 
 creetly. So /cara ri, Jiow ? Luke 1,18. 
 
 b) Of an occasion, by virtue of, because 
 of, for, by, through, where the idea of ac 
 cordance, adaptedness, lies at the bottom ; 
 comp. Winer 1. c. p. 478. Matth. 1. c. Matt. 
 19, 3 aTro\vcrai TJJV yvvaiKa avrov Kara TTO.- 
 <rav alriav for any cause. Acts 3, 17 KOTO. 
 ayvotav, because of ignorance, ignorantly. 
 Rom. 2, 5. 2 Cor. 8, 8. Gal. 2, 2. Eph. 1, 
 5. 7. 9. 3, 3. Phil. 2, 3. 4, 11. 2 Thess. 2, 
 9. 1 Tim. 1, 1. Philem. 14 /car dvdyier)v. 
 Heb. 7, 5. al. sasp. 2 Mace. 6, 11. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 13. 1. Diod. Sic. 20. 40 Kar dvdyKTjv. 
 Xen. An. 7. 3. 39. 
 
 c) Of any general relation, reference, 
 allusion, in respect to, as in; Winer and 
 Matth. 1. c. a) Genr. Rom. 1, 3 
 a-nepp-aros Aa/318 Kara o-dpxa. 9. 5. 11, 28. 
 Phil. 3, 5. 6 Kara v6fi.ov . . . KUTU (fjKov . . . 
 Kara iK.aioa"vvr]v. Tit. 1, 4. Heb. 9, 9 Kara 
 o-vvetSjjo-ij/. 1 Pet. 4, 14. So Jos. B. J. 4. 4. 
 3 Kar fpavrov. Palaeph. 32. 5 Kara ytvos 
 AtSiWey. Hdot. 1. 49. Plato Prot. 317. a. 
 3) Spec. Kara c. ace. with a preced. article 
 forms a periphrase for the kindred adjective ; 
 e. g. Rom. 11,21 ot Kara (pv<rii>, natural 
 branches. Col. 3, 22 rols Kara vdpita. KV- 
 piots. Also ra Kara rov IlavXoi Paufs 
 affairs, his cause, Acts 25, 14 ; ra Kar ip* 
 my affairs Eph. 6, 21 . Col. 4. 7. So 2 Mace. 
 3, 16. Diod. Sic. 1. 10 fj Kara (pvinv /3a>Xor. 
 JE\. V. H. 2. 42. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 16 ra 
 Ka3 was. y) Also in phrases; e. g. 
 Kara -rrdvra in all respects, in all things, 
 Acts 3, 22. Heb. 2, 17 (Thuc. 4. 81) ; Kara 
 rrdvra rponov in every respect, every way, 
 Rom. 3, 2 ; with negat. 2 Thess. 2, 3. 
 Buttm. 147. n. 1. (2 Mace. 11, 31. Pol. 1. 
 88.11.) Ko3 oo-oi by how much. i. e. in- 
 asinuch, quafenus, Heb. 3, 3. 7, 20 ; Kara 
 roo-ovroi/ by so much 7, 22. Spec.ro Kar 
 ( fit, lit. what relates to me, so far as in 
 me lies, Rom. 1, 15. So Dem. 1210. 20 ro 
 KOT tfjit. Xen. Hell. 1. 6. 5 ra Kar e /ie. 
 Comp. Matth. 283. Buttm. 125. n. 8. 
 
 5. Of likeness, similitude, manner, like, 
 after, in the manner of; 2 Cor. 1. 17 et 10, 
 2 Kara <rdpica. i. e. like a frail and feeble 
 
 man. Heb. 5, 6. 10 Kara nji/ rd^ 
 (T(8fK, i. e. after the order or rank of Mel- 
 chisedec, comp. 7, 15, and see in art. ratj. 
 Acts 13, 22 see in napbia no. 1. a. /3. Sept. 
 for 3 Deut. 4, 32. Lam. 1, 12. (Luc. Muse. 
 Enc. 1. Hdot. 2. 92 /ityaSor Kara /x^Xov.) 
 With ace. of pers. Gal. 4, 28 Kara lo-aax 
 like Isaac, as Isaac. Rom. 3, 5 et Gal. 3, 15 
 Kara tif^puTrov \fya> I speak as a man ; also 
 with the idea of a common man, not a be 
 liever, 1 Cor. 3, 3. For 1 Cor. 15, 32 see 
 in S^ptojua^ew. So Luc. Pise. 12. Arr. 
 Exp. Alex. 3. 27. 10. Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 30. 
 Adverbially, Ka3 ov rpoirov lit. after 
 what manner, i. q. as, even as, Acts 15, 11 ; 
 Kara ravrd, thus, so, Luke 17, 30. 6, 23. 
 26 ; Ka3 ofjLoioTTjra, like, like as, Heb. 4, 15. 
 
 6. Of the end, aim, purpose, towards 
 which any thing is directed, for, in behalf 
 of, by way of; 2 Cor. 11, 21 Kara art/u ai/ 
 [e /xi)v] Xe-yo), I say it by way of disparage 
 ment, to my own reproach. 1 Tim. 6, 3 17 
 Kar fiHrfftfiav SiSa^iy, the doctrine which is 
 for godliness, tends to promote it. 2 Tim. 
 1,1. Tit. 1,1. See Kiihner Ausf. Gr. 607. 
 3. a. Jos. Ant. 3. 11.4 Kara rr^v Tipfjv roil 
 Seov rovro Trotcoi/. Palaeph. 43. 4. Thuc. 6. 
 31 Kara Se ap f/Kfiv. Hdot. 2. 152. 
 
 NOTE. In composition Kara implies : 
 a) Motion downwards, as Kara/3aiVco, KaSai- 
 peco, KaraTriVra). b) Direction against, in 
 a hostile sense, as KarayivtotrKco, Karrjyopeo), 
 KaraXaXew. c) Distribution, as KaraK\^- 
 poSor/o). d) It serves to strengthen the 
 notion of the simple word, and is then often 
 simply intensive, as KaSoTrX/fco, KaraXa/z- 
 jBdva. e) Sometimes it gives to an in- 
 trans. verb a transitive sense, as Karapyew 
 Comp. Buttm. 5 147. n. 6. + 
 
 Kara(3aiva>, f. /3,?o-opu, (/SatVw,) aor,2 
 Karfpr]v, imper. Kard/3f/3t and Kard/3a Mark 
 15, 30. Buttm. J 107. n. I. 14. 5 114 ftztW 
 
 1 . to go or come down, to descend, from a 
 higher to a lower place ; e. g. of persons, 
 with UTTO c. gen. of place whence; Matt. 
 8, 1 KaTaftdiTi 8e avrw OTTO rov opovs. 17. 9. 
 Mark 9, 9. Matt. 14, 29 OTTO rou TrXot ov. 
 Mark 15, 30 Kardfia djrb rov trravpov. Sept. 
 for -JB l-n Ex. 34, 29. Judg. 4, 14. (Xen. 
 Cyr. 5. 5. 6.) With els c. ace. of place 
 whither, Mark 13, 15 py Kara^drco tls TTJV 
 oiKiav. Acts 8, 38. Eph. 4, 9. Sept. for 
 ni Job 7, 9. Jonah 2, 7. (Hdian. 8. 2. 1. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 5.) With eVi c. ace. as 
 Vi TTjv 3dXao-aai/ down upon the sea-shore, 
 sc. from the mountain John 6, 16. (Xen. 
 Ag. 1. 18.) Also irpos TWO. Acts 10, 21. 
 14, 11. Sept. for -ni Ex. 19, 14. Absol. 
 
380 
 
 Matt. 24, 17. Luke 6, 17. John 5,7. (Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 4. 8.) Of those who go from a 
 higher to a lower region of country, e. g. 
 OTTO Iepovo-a\w Mark 3, 22. Luke 10, 30 ; 
 with els, John 2. 12 els VLanepvaovp.. Acts 
 7, 15 els AiyimTov. 14,25. 16, 8. al. Ab- 
 sol. Luke 2, 51. John 4, 47. Acts 8, 15. 
 24, 1. Sept. for TV; Gen. 12, 10. 42, 3. 
 So Hdot. 5. 106 fin. Xen. Hell. 3. 4. 11. 
 Spoken of those who descend, come down, 
 from heaven ; e. g. God as affording aid to 
 the oppressed, Acts 7, 34 quoted from Ex. 
 3, 8 where Sept. for "ni . Of the Messiah, 
 c, CK John 6, 38. 42; c. 0770 l Thess. 4, 
 16. Of the Holy Spirit, c. John 1, 32 ; 
 eni nva Luke 3, 22. John 1, 33. Of an 
 gels, e ovpavov Matt. 28, 2 ; ev c. dat. of 
 place whither John 5, 4, see in ev no. 4 ; 
 eni TWO. John 1, 52 see in dvafialva) no. 1 fin. 
 Sept. for ^ Gen. 28, 12. Of Satan as 
 cast down from heaven, Rev. 12, 12 ; comp. 
 v. 9. 10. 
 
 2. Of things, e. g. a way leading down 
 from a higher to a lower tract of country, 
 Acts 8, 26 68ov T^V Kara/3. OTTO lepovo-. els 
 rdai>. So Ti* Sept. Kardyco Prov. 7, 27. 
 Of things descending from heaven, i. e. let 
 down or sent down from God ; e. g. a ves 
 sel Acts 10, 11. 11, 5; spiritual gifts, c. 
 OTTO James 1, 17; the new Jerusalem 17 
 Kara/3. eVc TOV ovp. ano T. SeoC Rev. 3, 12 
 in an anacoluthon. So of phenomena from 
 the heavens, the clouds, to fall, e. g. fj 
 pox>? Matt. 7, 25. 27 (Jos. Ant. 2. 16. 3) ; 
 XaTXa^ Luke t 8, 23 ; nvp. OTTO TOV ovp. Luke 
 9, 54; irvp C K rov ovp. Rev. 13, 13. So 
 Sept. and T^ 2 K. 1, 10. 12. Genr. i. q. 
 to fall, to drop, e. g. sweat, weret 3pd/x/3oi 
 alfj-aros Kara/3. eVi rf)v yrjv Luke 22, 44. 
 So Ecclus. 32 or 35, 1 5 8d<pva eVt criaydra 
 KaVa/3aiVet. + 
 
 KaraflaXXa), f. j3aXa>, (/3dXX,) 1. to 
 cast down, e. g. from heaven, Pass. Rev. 12, 
 10 Kare^rftr] o Karqyap. So Pol. 1. 24. 12. 
 Xen. Hell. 5. 2. 41. Spec, to prostrate, 
 2 Cor. 4, 9. Sept. for ^Brt Ps. 73, 18. 
 So Luc. D. Deor. 14. 2. Plato Hipp. min. 
 374. a. 
 
 2. Mid. to lay down, e. g. a foundation, 
 c. ace. Heb. 6, 1. Jos. Ant. 15. 11. 3. 
 Pol. 10. 27. 9. Plato Legg. 803. a. 
 
 Karaftapeaj, S>, f. jjo-, (/3ape,) to 
 weigh down, as a burden ; in N. T. trop. to 
 burden in a pecuniary sense, c. ace. 2 Cor. 
 12, 16; comp. Sept. and 123 2 Sam. 13, 
 25. Genr. Diod. Sic. 19. 24~ "Pol. 18. 4. 4. 
 Karaflapvva), i. q. Kara/3ape o>, to weigh 
 down, to oppress ; Pass, of the eyes, Mark 
 
 14, 40 ot o</>3. Ka.Ta^apvv6p.fvoi in some editt. 
 for /3e/3ap?7p.eVoi in Rec. Pr. Sept. Joel 2. 
 8. 2 Sam. 14, 26. 
 
 KaTdftacriS, ea>r, f), (KarajSaiW,) ago 
 ing down, e. g. towards the coast Xen. An. 
 7. 8. 26. In N. T. a descent, i. e. place of 
 descending, a declivity, Luke 19, 37 Kard/3. 
 TOV opovs TUIV e\aio>v. Sept. for TiTO Josh. 
 10, 11. Mic. 1, 4. So Pol. 11. 15*8. Xen. 
 An. 3. 4. 37. 
 
 /carafe i/3a&>, f. d<ra>, (/3i/3df<.) to cause 
 to go down, to bring down, e. g. os aSou, 
 Pass. Matt. 11, 23. Luke 10, 15. Sept. for 
 TniilEz. 31, 16. 18. Hdot. 8. 119. Plut. 
 Themist. 4. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 18. 
 
 /cara/3oX?7, fjs, y, (Kara/3dXX,) a cast 
 ing down, i. e. 
 
 1. a laying down, founding, foundation; 
 in N. T. only in the phrase : Kara/3oX)j TOV 
 Koo-fjLov, the foundation of the world, i. e. the 
 creation, beginning of the world, Matt. 13, 
 35. 25, 34. Luke 11, 50. John 17, 24. 
 Eph. 1, 4. Heb. 4, 3 (see in Ka/rot). 9, 26. 
 
 I Pet. 1, 20. Rev. 13, 8. 17, 8. Plut. Aq. 
 et Ignis comp. 2 cfyia rfj irpwTr) Kara/3oX; 
 TO>V dvZpayrrav. Diod. Sic. 12. 32. "Pol. 13. 
 6. 2. 
 
 2. Of seed, a casting in, trop. Heb. 11, 
 
 I 1 8vvap.iv eXa/3ei> tls KarajSoX^v o-rrep/xaroy, 
 lit. strength for the casting in (implanting) 
 of seed, i. e. strength for conception, pro 
 creation. Hippocr. Aphorism. 4, ra KVOV- 
 
 roO a-irepfMTos. Arr. Epict. 1. 13.^3 vibs 
 f< ratv avruiv crTrepp.arooi Kat rrjs avrijs ava>- 
 Sfi/ /cara/3oX^s. So Kara/SdXXcii/ a-Trepjttara, 
 e. g. M. Antonin. 4. 36 crn-e p/xara els y>jv rj 
 fj.T)Tpav Kara^aXXo/xeva. Galen, de Potent. I ; 
 comp. Wetst. N. T. in loc. 
 
 KaTa(3paj3eva), f. fvo-a>, OpajSevw,) to 
 give the prize against any one, to deprive of 
 the palm, Zonar. in Can. 35. Cone. Laod. 
 Kara/3pa|3et)<a e ori ro /iJj TOV viKrjo-avra dt-iovv 
 TOV /3pa/3et ov, aXX erepw StSdfat avTO d8i- 
 Kovpfvov TOV viKT](ravTos. In N. T. trop. to 
 deprive of a due reward, to defraud, c. ace. 
 Col. 2, 18. So Dem. 544 ult. 
 
 Karayje\ev<f, ea>s, 6, (Karayyt XXw,) an 
 announcer, proclaimer ; Acts 17, 18 ^evav 
 fioKfl Kar. flvai. 
 
 f. yeX&j, (Kara intens.) 
 Pass. aor. 2 Ka-rrjyyeX^v Acts 17, 13, see 
 Buttm. ^ 101. n. 4 ; pr. to bring word down 
 to any one, i. q. to bring it home to him ; 
 hence, to announce, to publish, to show forth, 
 c. ace. Acts 3, 24 ray fjp.tpas rat/ray. 1 Cor. 
 11, 26 Sdvarov TOV Kvpiov. Pass. Acts 13, 
 38 vfuv *t(j)(o-is ap.apTi>v Karayye XXerot. 
 
381 
 
 Rom. 1,8. So Jos. Ant. 3. 8. 6. Pol. 4. 
 53. 12. Xen. An. 2. 5. 38. Spec, to an 
 nounce, to set forth, to preach, inculcate ; 
 C. ace. Acts 4, 2 unrayytXeiv TTJV dvdtrracriv 
 rr]v tic veicpw. 13, 5. 15, 36. 16, 17. 21. 
 17, 3. 23. 26, 23. 1 Cor. 2, 1. 9, 14. Phil. 
 1, 16 [17] Xpiarrov ttarayy. Col. 1, 28. 
 Pass. Acts 17, 13. Phil. 1, 18. 
 
 /carayeXaet), , f. daw, (yeXd<a,) to 
 laugh at in scorn, to deride, c. gen. Matt. 9, 
 24 Kal KarcytXcov UVTOV. Mark 5, 40. Luke 
 8, 53 ; comp. Buttm. $ 132. 10. e. Sept. for 
 i Job 21, 3 ; pHD Job 30, 1. 3. V. H. 
 <*. 37. Xen. An. 2. 6. 23. 
 
 KaTayiVUKTKW, f. yj/coao/xai, (yU WOTCCO,) 
 
 lo know or note against any one, to his dis 
 advantage, Sept. for ifsn Prov. 28, 11. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 10. In N. T. to judge or 
 think ill of, to condemn, to blame, c. gen. 
 1 John 3, 20 tav Karayivuo-Kr) rjfj.S>v f) Kap- 
 8ia. V. 21. Pass. Gal. 2,11 on Karfyycoa^ie- 
 vos ?jv because Tie had been blamed, sc. by 
 others, prob. by Christians of Antioch ; not 
 because he was to be blamed ; a sense 
 which the participle does not admit. So 
 Ecclus. 14, 2. Dem. 1402. 24. Hdian. 5. 2. 
 12. Plato Dem. 382. e. 
 
 * 
 
 Kardywfii, f. Kard, (aywp.i,~) aor. 1 
 KciTfat-a, Pass. aor. 2 Karedyijv, both with syll. 
 augm. prob. to distinguish them from the 
 forms of Ka.Ta.ya>, see Winer 12. 2. Buttm. 
 5 84. n. 5. Anom. fut. Att. Karedo> Matt. 
 12, 20, prob. for the like reason. Passow 
 in aywp.1. Buttm. 114ayw/u. Matth. 5 222. 
 p. 429. To break down, to break off or in 
 two, C. ace. Matt. 12, 20 /cdXa/ioi/ o-vvr. ov 
 K aredei. John 19, 32. 33. Pass. John 19, 
 31 tva Kareayuxriv O.VTWV TO. crKe X?;. Sept. 
 for 5-13 Jer. 48, 25. So Pol. 1. 37. 2. 
 Xen. An. 4. 2. 20. 
 
 Kardjco, f. do>, (ayo>,) 1 . to lead down, 
 e. g. persons, to bring or conduct down, 
 from a higher to a lower place or region ; 
 with ace. and ds, Acts 9, 30 tcarfiyayov av- 
 TOV els Kaiadpeiai/. 23, 20. 28 ; ace. C. TT/JO S 
 nva 23, 15 ; ace. simpl. 22, 30. Rom. 10, 6. 
 Sept. for Tni n c. els 1 K. 1, 33; c. npos 
 Gen. 44, 21. Hdian. 8. 1. 3 etV. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 7. 4. Xen. Ag. 1. 18. 
 
 2. Spec, as a nautical term, to bring down 
 a ship to land, c. ace. Luke 5, 1 1 Kcrrayd- 
 yovrfs TO. TrXoia eirl TTJV yrjv. So Sext. Em- 
 pir. adv. Phys. 2. 68 vr/e? ds trtpovs Kard- 
 yovrai Xipevas- Xen. An. 6. 6. 3. Hence 
 Pass. aor. 1 KaTTjx^ r ) v > to come to land, 
 to land, to touch, Acts 21, 3. 27, 3. 28. 12. 
 So Jos. Ant. 14. 14. 3 ei? Bp(>rrf]<riov KOT- 
 dverai he (Herod) landed at, Brundusium. 
 
 f. t o-o/xat, Mid. depon. 
 (dycoi/i ^ojuat,) to contend against, to prevail 
 against, to subdue, c. ace. fiao-iXeias Heb. 1 1 , 
 33._J OS . Ant. 7. 2. 2. JEl. V. H. 4. 8. 
 Pol. 2. 45. 4. 
 
 /caraoetw, f. 8f]<r<a, (So,) to bind down, 
 .0 bind fast, e. g. ev Secr/xw caraSf)crat Horn. 
 Od. 15. 443. Luc. Asin. l6. In N. T. to 
 bind together, to bind up, e. g. wounds, c. 
 ace. rpav/jLara Luke 10, 34. Sept. for ^::n 
 Ez. 34, 4. 16. So Ecclus. 27, 21. 
 
 KardSr}\o^, ov, 6, f], adj. (<ard intens. 
 SijXor.) very clear, quite evident, Heb. 7, 15. 
 Plut. Romul. 29. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 14. 
 
 KaTaSucdfo, f. do-to, (StKafco,) to give 
 judgment against, to condemn, c. ace. of 
 pers. Matt. 12, 7. 37 ; absol. Luke 6, 37 bis. 
 James 5, 6. Sept. for Sitfnsn Ps. 37, 33. 
 Jos. Ant. 7. 11. 3. Diod. Sic. 14. 4. In 
 Gr. writers oftener c. gen. Xen. Hell. 7. 
 4. 33. 
 
 KaraotKij, 77?, ^, (Si *?/,) judgment a- 
 gainst, condemnation, Acts 25, 15 Lach. foi 
 Rec. diKr,. Luc. D. Mort. 17. 2. Plut. 
 Themist. 21. 
 
 KaraSiMKO}, f. &, ( K ard intens.) to 
 pursue closely, an enemy Xen. An. 4. 2. 5. 
 Sept. for tl-n Judg. 7, 25. In N. T. to 
 follow closely, in order to find, c. ace. Mark 
 1, 36. So Sept. and 5]T; Ps. 23, 6. 
 
 /caraSouXon), , f. <ao-co, (SouXdw,) to 
 bring down under bondage, to enslave, c. ace. 
 2 Cor. 11, 20. Gal. 2, 4 Iva r^nas KaraSov- 
 Xa>crov<7H>, where others KaTaSoiAaxrwirai 
 Mid. depon. Sept. for TaSfi Ex. 1, 14. 
 6, 5. 1 Mace. 8, 10. Luc. Pseudosoph. 12. 
 Thuc. 3. 70. 
 
 KaTaSwaareva), f. eva-ca, (dwacrrevu, 
 8vvdo-TT)s.) to exercise power against any 
 one, i. e. to overpower, to oppress ; c. gen. 
 James 2, 6 oii% oi TrXovtrioi KaraSwacrrfv- 
 ovaiv vfj.o)V, Pass. part. Acts 10, 38. Sept. 
 c. gen. for C23 2 Sam. 8, 1 1 ; c. ace. for 
 ruin Jer. 22, 3. So c. gen. Diod. Sic. 13. 
 73 ; c. ace. Xen. Conv. 5. 8. 
 
 KardSfefJ,a, aros, TO, in N. T. prob. 
 corrupted for KaTavd^f^a i. q. di/dSf/ia but 
 stronger, a curse, Rev. 22, 3 in later editt. 
 for KUTavd^f/j-a in Rec. Comp. for the sense, 
 Zech. 14. 11. 
 
 KaTcfeefj.aT%a), f. iV, (WaSf/ia,) to 
 curse, absol. Matt. 26, 74 in later editt. in 
 stead of Karava3f/naTi a) in Rec. from which 
 it is corrupted. Chrysost. in Ps. 77. Iren 
 c. Haer. 1. 13. 4. ib. 1. 16. 3. See Wetst 
 N. T. in loc. 
 
382 
 
 ) : f. W a>, 
 down shame, upon, L e. 
 
 1. to dishonour, to disgrace, c. ace. xara- 
 to-x- T-TIV Kf(f>a\T)v 1 Cor. 11,4.5,1 e. offends 
 against decorum. Ecclus. 22, 5. Hdian. 5. 
 1. 17. Xen. An. 3. 1. 30. 
 
 2. to shame, to put to shame, i. q. ala-xvvta 
 but stronger; c. ace. a) Pr. Luke 13, 
 17. 1 Cor. 1, 27 bis, Iva rovs croipovs Karai- 
 o-xvvr,- 11, 22. 2 Cor. 7, 14. 9, 4. 1 Pet. 3, 
 16. Sept. for ttJinn 2 Sam. 19, 5. So Arr. 
 Epict. 2. 8. 21. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 28. 
 b) From the Heb. by meton. of cause for 
 effect, to bring to nought one s hope, to dis 
 appoint, Pass. Rom. 5, 5 17 8e e\Tr\s ov Karat - 
 
 i. 9, 33 et 10, 11 et 1 Pet. 2, 6 iras 6 
 e?r avrtn ov KaTaicrxvv SrjcreTai, 
 quoted from Is. 28, 16 where Sept. for 
 B^nn. Sept. for to>2n p s . 22, 6. 44, 8. 
 
 al. So Ecclus. 2. 10. 
 
 KaraKaiw, f. /cavo-w, (KOUB,) Pass. aor. 
 2 Karendrjv, fut. 1 KoraKav Sficrop.a.i, Rev. 18, 
 8, and also in the later usage Pass. fut. 2 
 KaraKafj(rofj.M 1 Cor. 3, 15. 2 Pet. 3, 10 ; 
 comp. Winer 15. p. 98. Buttm. Ausf. 
 Sprachl. 114 KOUO. To burn down, to 
 consume utterly, Engl. to burn up, c. ace. 
 Matt. 3, 12 TO (ixvpov KaraKavcrfi irvpl 
 uTjSeVrw. 13,30. 40. Luke 3, 17. Acts 19, 
 19. 1 Cor. 3, 15. Heb. 13, 11. 2 Pet. 3, 10. 
 Rev. 8, 7 ter. 17, 16. 18, 8. Sept. for Eft to 
 Ex. 32, 19. Lev. 6, 30. Luc. D. Mar. 11. 
 
 I. Diod. Sic. 1. 59. Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 1. 
 KaTaKd\,V7TTC0, f. -^a, (xaXwrrw,) to 
 
 cover with a veil which hangs down, and 
 hence to veil ; in N. T. only Pass, or Mid. 
 to be veiled, to wear a veil, absol. 1 Cor. 
 
 II, 6 bis; also c. ace. TTJV KecpaXrjvv. 7; 
 comp. Buttm. 134. 6, or { 135. 5. Sept. 
 forces Gen. 38, 15. Is. 6, 2. Jos. Ant. 
 7. 10. 5. Hdot. 1. 119. Act. Xen. Cyr. 6. 
 4. 11. 
 
 KaraKav^dofjiai, &>/iai, f. ijcro/iai, Mid. 
 depon. ((cau^ao/idi,) 2 p. pres. >caraKav^a- 
 o-at Rom. 11, 18; see Buttm. 103. III. 
 Winer 13. 2. b. To boast oneself against, 
 to glory over, c. gen. Rom. 11, 18 bis, /wj 
 KciTciKavxto TU>V K\d8cav KT\. So C. Kara 
 James 3, 14. Hence James 2, 13 KaraKau- 
 Xarai e\fos [6 e\eS>v] Kpiafms, i. e. the mer 
 ciful man glorieth (rejoiceth) against judg 
 ment, fears not condemnation. So Sept. Jer. 
 50, 10. 38. 
 
 Kard/cetfiai, f, eivapai, (K/*ai,) to lie 
 down, to lie, intrans. Comp. Kflp,ai, Buttm. 
 ij 109. II. 
 
 1. Of the sick, foil, by a particip. Mark 
 1 30 KarfKfiro TrvpeWoucra, she Jay sick of a 
 
 fever. Acts 28, 8 ; with ri c. dat. Mark 2, 4, 
 Luke 5, 25. Acts 9, 33 ; with eV John 0, 3 : 
 absol. v. 6. Luc. Icarom. 31 KaraKfirai, vo- 
 <Ttov. Dem. 1265. 23 qpuca dff%tv(ot> eya KU- 
 
 TfKfip.T)l>. 
 
 2. to recline at table, see in dvaKtinai no. 
 2. Mark 14, 3. Luke 5, 29; c. / olicia 
 Mark 2, 15. 1 Cor. 8, 10. Plut. J. Cees. 
 63 mid. Xen. Conv. 1. 14 ; c. eV Luc. Tox. 
 44. Xen. An. 6. 1. 4. 
 
 Kara/cXdco, S>, f. do-a>, (icXato,) to break 
 down, to break off or in pieces, e. g. rovs 
 aprovs Mark 6, 41. Luke 9, 16. Jos Ant. 
 
 2. 14. 4. Dem. 1251. 23. Plut. Pomp. 
 48 init. 
 
 KaraK\eiw, f. eiVw, (/cXe/co,) to shut to a 
 door, to close, Xen. Cyr. 6. 4. 10. In N. 
 T. of a person, pr. to shut down in a subter 
 ranean prison ; hence, as in Engl. to shut 
 up, to confine, e. g. -rivd ev (pv\aKy Luke 3, 
 20. Acts 26, 10 where Rec. c. dat. 0vXa- 
 KOIS. Sept. c. ev for N^3 Jer. 32, 3. Wisd. 
 17, 2 c. dat. Hdian. 3. 7. 5 c. ev. Xen. An. 
 5. 2. 18 c. fls. 
 
 KaTaK\r]po8orea), , f. jjo-co, (K\Tjpo8o- 
 Teco, K\ijpo86TTis,) to give by lot to each, to 
 distribute by lot, c. ace. Acts 13, 19 Rec. 
 where others Karaii^i]povofieu>. Sept. for 
 bimn Deut. 21, 16 et Josh. 19, 51 in ed. 
 Aid. et Compl. 1 Mace. 3, 36. 
 
 KaTKK\7)povo/j,ea), . f. ^a,, (X^pow- 
 /Lie co,) to let each get by lot, to distribute by 
 lot, c. acf,. Acts 13, 19 in later editt. for *a- 
 TaK\T]poouTea> in Rec. So Sept. for p?l"l 
 Josh. 18,2 ; i^rri Num. 33, 54. Josh. H, 
 1. Used by Greek writers only in the 
 sense to inherit down from an ancestor, c. 
 gen. In later writers c. ace. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 129. 
 
 KaratcXiva), f. j/i, (/cXcVw,) pr. to make 
 incline, to make lie down, genr. 1 Mace. ] , 
 
 3. Xen. Cyr. 6. 4. 11. In N. T. only of 
 the posture at meals, to make recline, c. ace. 
 Mid. to recline at a meal ; see in dvaKeifiai 
 no. 2. Luke 9, 14 Kara/cXiWre avrovs K\i<ri- 
 as. Pass. aor. 1 as Mid. Luke [7, 36.] 14, 
 8. 24, 30. So Act. ^El. V. H. 8. 7. Xen 
 Cyr. 2. 3. 21. Mid. Xen. Conv. 1.8. 
 
 KaraK\v^(t), f. vo-w. (X^w,) to dash 
 down upon, to overflow, to overwhelm ; Pass. 
 2 Pet. 3, 6 6 TOTS KOCT/HOS v8ari Kara*Xu- 
 o-3ety aTrcoXero. Sept. for ^^0) Job 14, 19. 
 Jer. 47, 2. Diod. Sic. 1.19. Plato Tim. 
 22. d. 
 
 flood, deluge, e. g. Noah s flood, Matt. 24, 
 38. 39. Luke 17, 27. 2 Pet. 2, 5. Sept. for 
 
383 
 
 tcaTa\aj.i{3dva) 
 
 -q Gen. 6, 17. 7, 6 sq. Jos. Anf. 1. 3. 
 6. Diod. Sic. 1.10. Plato Tim. 23. b. 
 
 eto, >, f. 770-0), (KOTO, in- 
 tens. d<coXou3 a),) to follow closely, c. dat. 
 Acts 16, 17 ; absol. Luke 23, 55. Pol. 6. 
 42. 2 ; trop. Jos. Ant. 6. 7. 4. Plut. adv. 
 Colot. 3 fin. 
 
 KaraKOTrrco, f. ^o>, (KO TTTO),) to cui or 
 fie7 down, to cut in pieces, Pol. 5. 25. 3. 
 Xen. Hell. 1. 5. 3. In N. T. genr. and in- 
 tens. to beat, to cut, to wound, c. ace. Mark 
 5, 5 KaraKOTTTQiv tavrov Xi Soir. So Diod. Sic. 
 2. 44. Xen. Mag. Eq. 4. 5. 
 
 Karate pi] JJLV i &>. f. t o-w, (Kprj/m fw, Kpr)- 
 fjivos.} to throw down a precipice, to cast down 
 headlong, c. ace. Luke 4. 29 W 6<j>pvos TOV 
 opovs . . . wore KaTaKpr)p.vicrai avrov. Sept. 
 for TpV^n 2 Chr. 25, 12. Diod. Sic. 4. 
 31. Pol. 3. 116. 12. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 7. 
 
 KaraKpifJia, aros, TO, (araKpivo),) judg 
 ment against, condemnation, Rom. 5, 16. 
 18. 8, 1. Hesych. Karaicpi^a- 
 
 ), f. /w, (/rpiVw,) to give judg 
 ment against, to condemn, in Greek writers 
 with a gen. of pers. and ace. of punishment, 
 Matth. J 378. p. 694 pen. In N. T. with 
 ace. of pers. and dat. of punishment ; Matt. 
 20, 18 Karaxpivovo-iv avrbv Safdrw, they shall 
 condemn him to death. Mark 10, 33. 2 Pet. 
 2, 6 ; ace. of pers. and infin. Mark 14, 64 
 KOTfKpivov avrov elvai tvox<ov 3ai>arov. (Hist. 
 of Sus. 41. Xen. Hi. 7. 10.) With ace. of 
 pers. the crime or punishment being im 
 plied ; John 8, 10 ovofis erf KartKpivev ; V. 
 11. Rom. 2, 1 ; absol. Rom. 8, 34; Pass. 
 Matt. 27, 3. James 5, 9 Rec. Of the last 
 judgment Mark 16, 16. 1 Cor. 11,32. Trop. 
 Rom. 8, 3 KaTtKpttx Ti]v apapriav tv rrj crap- 
 KL i. e. hath condemned, passed sentence 
 upon, all carnal lusts and passions, in antith. 
 to v. 1 ; comp. 6, 1 sq. So Hist, of Sus. 
 48. Hdian. 7. 6. 7. Plut. C. Gracch. 18. 
 Spec, to condemn by contrast, i. e. to show 
 by one s conduct that others are guilty of 
 misconduct and deserve condemnation ; c. 
 ace. Matt. 12, 41. 42. Luke 11, 31. 32. 
 Heb. 11, 7. Pass. Rom. 14, 23. 
 
 /taTa/Cpl<Tt9, ea>r, TI, (KaraKptVco,) con 
 demnation, 2 Cor. 3, 9 ; also censure, blame, 
 7,3. 
 
 KaraKVptevo), f. f va-co, (Kvpieuw.) to lord 
 it against or over any one, i. e. 
 
 1. Genr. to exercise authority over, c. gen. 
 Matt. 20, 25 ot dp^ovrej TU>V f%v<ai> KCITCIKV- 
 pitvovcnv CLVTVV. Mark 10, 42. 1 Pet. 5, 3. 
 Scot, for ^53 Jer. 3, 14; iwa p s . 19, 14. 
 
 Ecclus. 17, 4. Not found in Gr. writer* 
 in this sense. 
 
 2. Spec, to get the mastery of, to over- 
 power, to subdue, c. gen. Acts 19, 16. Sept. 
 for 033 Gen. 1, 28. Num. 32, 29. Diod. 
 Sic. 14. 64. 
 
 /caraXaXew, a>, f. TJO-W, (XaXe w,) to speak 
 against, to speak evil of, to slander, c. gen. 
 James 4, 11 ter, ^.17 /caroXaXelre aXX^Xwi 
 *rX. 1 Pet. 2, 12 eV <w KaraXaXoCtrti vfj.a>i>. 
 3, 16. Sept. for ttfa Ps. 44, 17 ; ">M Ps. 
 78, 19. Luc. Asin. 12. Diod. Sic. 11. 44; 
 c. ace. Pol. 3. 90. 6. 
 
 /caraXaXict, as, fj- ((caraXaX/o).) a speak 
 ing against, evil speaking, slander, 2 Cor. 
 12, 20. 1 Pet 2, 1. Wisd. 1, 11. Test. 
 XII Patr. p. 678. A word of the later 
 Greek, Thorn. Mag. p. 565. 
 
 KdTa\ci\O$i ov, 6, fj, adj. (KarnXoXe a> ; ) 
 speaking against ; as Subst. a slanderer, 
 backbiter, Rom. 1, 30. 
 
 KClTa\afJ,(3dva), f. Xi^o/im, (Kara in- 
 tens.) aor. 2 icaTeXafiov, to take, to receive, 
 with the idea of eagerness or the like. E. g. 
 
 1. Pr. to lay hold of, to seize, with the 
 idea of eagerness, suddenness, e. g. a crim 
 inal, John 8. 3. 4 avn) 17 -yvvf] AcareiX^Sr; 
 eTravroepcopw fj.oixevop.tvr). (^El. H. An. 11 , 
 15 quoted in aurocpwpoj. Luc. Conv. 32.) 
 Of an evil spirit which seizes, takes posses 
 sion of a demoniac, Mark 9, 18. So J31. 
 V. H. 3. 9. Trop. of darkness, evil, to 
 come suddenly upon, John 12, 35 iva p.f] 
 a-Koria vp.us KaroXa/fy. 1 Thess. 5,4 ^ ij/ie pa. 
 Sept. for P2? Gen. 19, 19 ; i K. 18, 
 44. So Arr. Exp. Alex. 1. 5. 17. Pol. 9. 
 18. 3. Plato Rep. 387. e. 
 
 2. In allusion to the public games, to lay 
 hold of, to obtain the prize, with the idea of 
 eager and strenuous exertion, to attain to ; 
 c. ace. Rom. 9, 30. 1 Cor. 9, 24 OUTCO rpt- 
 XfTf, iva *caraXa/3r;Te sc. TO /3pa/3eloi>. Phil. 
 3, 12 bis, SICOKW 8e, (1 Kai KaTaXa/3a> e(p <u 
 Kcii K<iT(\T]<p :3r)v VTTO TOU Xpiorov, if also 1 
 may lay hold of that for which too I hare 
 been laid hold of by Christ, i. e. TO yvwvai 
 nvrov KT\. in v. 10. So v. 1 3. Comp. Hdot. 
 6. 39. Thuc. 3. 30. 
 
 3. Trop. to seize with the mind, to com 
 prehend, c. ace. John 1,5 17 8e a-Koria ov 
 Kart\a{if v avro. (Clem. Alex. Strom. 1. 16 
 KttraXap.,3areii; TO /ze yeSoj rrjs dXrjSeiaj.) 
 Mid. to comprehend for oneself, to perceive, 
 to find, C. 6Vt, Acts 4, 13 KaraXa^op-fvoi on 
 i/3pu7roi aypap-p-aToi tltri. 10,34; C. aCC. 
 et inf. 25, 25 ; TI indir. Eph. 3, 18. So c. 
 OTI Arr. Epict. 1. 5. 6; c. ace. Plato Ax. 
 370 a 
 
384 
 
 f. o>, (Xeyw,) to lay down, 
 Mid. to He. down for sleep, Horn. Od. 14. 
 520. ib. 19. 44 ; to lay down or out, apart 
 from others, to pick out, to select, Plut. C. 
 Gracch. 6 init. Plato Legg. 762. e : spec. 
 of soldiers, to choose, to enlist, to enrol, Pol. 
 2. 24. 14. Xen. Cyr. 3. 4. 11. Hence in 
 N. T. genr. to reckon to a number, to enrol, 
 Pass. 1 Tim. 5, 9. 
 
 aros, TO, (KaraXeiVa),) a 
 remnant, remainder ; Rom. 9, 27 /caraXei/i/xa 
 o-wSTjaercu, a remnant only shall be saved, 
 
 1. e. a small part, few ; quoted from Is. 10, 
 22 where Sept. for ixd Ecclus. 44, 17. 
 1 Mace. 3, 35. 
 
 /caraXe/TTft), f. ^o>, (XeiVw,) aor. 1 Kare- 
 Xen/m Acts 6, 2. a later form, Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 713 sq. Buttm. Ausf. Sprachl. 114 Xet- 
 TTCO. Pr. to leave down to one s heirs, to 
 leave behind so as to descend to them, Horn. 
 Od. 1. 243. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 10. Hence 
 genr. and in N. T. 
 
 1. to leave behind, at one s departure, e. g. 
 
 a) At death, c. ace. Mark 12, 19 feat Kare- 
 Xwre yvvdiKa. Luke 20, 31. So Sept. Deut. 
 28, 54. Palseph. 32. 7. Plato Legg. 773. e. 
 
 b) Genr. in any place, c. ace. Mark 14, 52 
 Kara\nru>v TrjV crivSova. John 8, 9. With 
 ev C. dat. of place, Luke 15, 4 ov KaroXetVei 
 TCI fi>v. ev Trj eprjp-m. 1 Thess. 3, 1 eV ASq- 
 vats. Tit. 1, 5; with avroG there Acts 18, 
 19 ; with els aSov Acts 2, 31 see in els no. 
 
 4. So with ace. and predicate of condition, 
 Acts 24, 27 KOTeXwre TOV HaiiXov o edfp.evov. 
 25, 14. Sept. for 3tS Gen. 39, 12. 13. 
 Josh. 8, 17. So Jos. Ant. 2. 4. 5 ; eV Hdian. 
 3. 14. 17. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 17 ; with pred. 
 Hdian. 8. 8. 16. 
 
 2. to leave, to quit wholly, to forsake, i. q. 
 XeiVw but stronger. a) Of place, c. ace. 
 Matt. 4, 13 KaroXiTTcbi TTJV Na^a/3/3. Heb. 
 11, 27. With ace. and predicate, Acts 21, 
 3. Sept. for 273 1 Sam. 31,7. So Hdian. 
 8. 2. 10. Xen. An. 4. 2. 7. b) Of persons 
 and things, to leave, to forsake, so as to have 
 nothing more to do with them, c. ace. Matt. 
 19, 5 K. TOV iraTepa KOI TTJV pr/Tcpa. Mark 
 10, 7. Eph. 5, 31. Matt. 16, 4. 21, 17 ; with 
 predic. /zoW Luke 10, 40. Of things, Luke 
 
 5, 28 KaroXiTTcbi aVoira. Acts 6, 2. 2 Pet. 
 
 2. 15. Sept. for 3W Gen. 2, 24. Deut. 31, 
 17. Hdian. 3. 3. 12. Xen. An. 3. 1. 2. 
 
 3. to leave remaining, to have left, to re 
 serve, c. ace. Rom. 11, 4 Kare\nrov e /imma 
 fTrTaKKTX&t-ovs (ivSpas, quoted from 1 K. 19, 
 18 where Sept. for "^en . Pass. Heb. 4, 
 1. Plut. M. Ant. 65. Xen. Ag. 5. 1. Mem. 
 1. 1. 8. 
 
 , f. do-co, (Xi3do>,) to stjne 
 down, to stone to death, c. ace. Luke 20, 6. 
 Comp. Sept. Ex. 17, 4. Num. 14, 10. 
 
 ? , ^, (WoXXdo-o-<o,) ex 
 change, espec. of money Dem. 1216. 18. 
 In N. T. a change from enmity to friend 
 ship, reconciliation, spec, restoration to the 
 divine favour ; Rom. 5,11 6Y ov vvv T>?/ 
 Kar. e Xd/3o/xei>. 2 Cor. 5, 18. 19. Rom. 11 
 1 5 KaraXXayrj Kocr/iov, i. e. the means or oc 
 casion of reconciling the world to God. Sn 
 genr. 2 Mace. 5, 20. Dem. 10. 15. 
 Theb. 767. 
 
 v. -TTO>, f. , (dXXd<y 
 a-ca,) to change against any thing, to e 
 change for, e. g. money Hdian. 2. 13. 12- 
 genr. Plato Pha;d. 69. a. In N. T. to change 
 a person towards another, from enmity to 
 friendship, to reconcile to any one, (thus 
 differing from SiaXXdo-o-o) which implies 
 mutual change, Tittm. de Syn. N. T. p. 
 101 sq.) c. ace. et dat. 2 Cor. 5, 18. 19 
 KOO-/JLOV /caraXXdo-o-&>i> eavrw. Pass. aor. 2 
 KaTrj\Xdyr)v, to be or become reconciled h 
 any one, c. dat. Rom. 5, 10 bis, Kar^XXcryT?- 
 pev T<S Sew KT\. 1 Cor. 7, 11. 2 Cor. 5,20, 
 2 Mace! 1, 5. JEl V. H. 2. 21. Xen. An. 
 1. 6. 2. 
 
 AraTttXot7T09, OD, 6, fj, adj. (Xotn-o r,) left 
 over, remaining, Plato Tim. 39. e. In N. T. 
 of KaTaXoiTrot the rest, the residue, Acts 
 15, 17 quoted from Am. 9, 12 where Sept. 
 for n-nKtj ; also for ^ijt: Ezra 3, 8. So 
 Neut. Pol. 2. 11. 6. 
 
 Kara\v/jia, arcs, TO, (*caraXv<u,) a place 
 of half, lodging-place, inn, khan, caravanse 
 rai, see in KaraXvw no. 2. Bibl. Res. in Pa 
 lest. III. p. 431. Luke 2, 7 OVK rjv avrols TO 
 KOS ev TU> KaraXv/xari. By synecd. Mark 14, 
 14 et Luke 22, 1 1 TTOV e o-ri TO KOTaXvpa ; 
 i. e. a room where we may sup, a lodging. 
 Sept. for Tiba Ex. 4, 24 ; rDir? i Sam. 9, 
 22. Ecclus. 14, 25. Pol. 2. 36. 1. Diod. 
 Sic. 14. 93. 
 
 Kara\.vu>, f. vo-o>, (Xvw.) to loosen down, 
 apart, i. e. 
 
 1 . to dissolve, to break down, to disunite 
 the parts of any thing ; hence spoken of 
 buildings or the like, to throw down, to de 
 stroy, c. ace. Matt. 26, 61 KOTakva-ai TOV 
 vaov, and so 27, 40. Mark 14, 58. 15, 29. 
 Acts 6, 14 ; also Matt. 24, 2. Mark 13, 2. 
 Luke 21, 6. 2 Cor. 5, 1 ; trop. Gal. 2, 18. 
 Sept. for Chald. "inb Ezra 5, 12. So Hdian. 
 8. 4. 4. Plut. Poplic. 10. Trop. to destroy, 
 to put an end to, to render vain. e. g. TOV vo~ 
 fiov Matt. 5, 17 bis ; epyov Acts 5, 38. 39. 
 
385 
 
 tcaravvcrcrci) 
 
 xlom. 14, 20. So 2 Mace. 2, 22. Diod. Sic. 
 L* 80. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 14. 
 
 2. to let Icose, to unbind, e. g. TOVS ITTTTOVS 
 irom a chariot Horn. Od. 4. 28. Hence of 
 travellers and caravans, to halt for rest or 
 for the night, to put up for the night, wiien 
 the beasts of burden are unloaded, .Sept. for 
 "pba Gen. 42, 27. 43,21. Xen. An. 1. 8. 1. 
 In N. T. genr. to lodge, to take lodging, 
 intrans. Luke 9, 12; with napd TIVI, 19, 7 
 fiVijASe KaraAvaat KT\. Sept. for "pb Gen. 
 24, 23. 25. So Luc. Asin. 17 ; Trapd TIVI Dem. 
 252. 24. Plato Prot. 311. a. 
 
 , f. /mS^o-o^m, (Kara 
 intens.) to learn thoroughly Xen. CEc. 1 1 . 
 6. In N. T. to note accurately, to observe, to 
 consider, c. ace. Matt. 6, 28 K. TO. Kpivu TOV 
 dypov. Sept. for ft&n Gen. 34, 1. Arr. Alex. 
 M. 5. 11. 2. Dem. 660. ( 22. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 4. 2. 
 
 Kara/naprvpea), <, f. jjo-oj, (/naprvpeco.) 
 to witness against, to testify against, c. gen. 
 Buttm. J132. 10. g. Matth. { 378. Matt. 26, 
 62. 27, 13. Mark 14, 60. 15, 4. Sept. for 
 
 TW i K. 21, 10. is ; a n:s job 15, 
 
 6. Ls. 132. 23. Dem. 836. 25. 
 
 ), f. i/, (Kara, intens.) to re 
 main fixedly, to abide, to dwell, intrans. Acts 
 13. Sept. for atth Num. 20, 1. Plut. 
 Numa 21. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 45. 
 
 KarafAOvas, adv. (KOTU, /lo vor,) alone, 
 by oneself, Mark 4, 10. Luke 9, 18. Sept. 
 for Tja Jer. 15, 17; "nab Mic. 7, 14. 
 Pol. 4. 15, 10. Thuc. 1. 37. Comp. Buttm. 
 J115. n. 5. 
 
 tcaTavc&efACl) O.TOS, TO, (Kara intens.) 
 a curse against any one, a curse, i. q. dvd- 
 Se/ia but stronger, Rev. 22, 3 Rec. Comp. 
 Zech. 14, 11, and see in Kard3ep.a. 
 
 KaTavcfeefAarlfa, f. iVco, (KOTO intens.) 
 to utter curses against, to curse, i. q. dvatte- 
 uarifa but stronger, Matt. 26, 74 Rec. See 
 in AcaTa2e/x(m a>. 
 
 KaTavakicncw, f. Aa>o-a>, (KQTU intens.) 
 to consume utterly, i. q. dpaAiVica> but strong 
 er, e. g. of a fire, absol. Heb. 1 2, 29 nvp KO- 
 ravaXia-Kov. Sept. for bsx Lev. 6, 10. Pol. 
 32. 7. 15. Plato Phaed. 72. d. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 2. 22. 
 
 KaTavapKaw, u>, f. TJO-&>, (vaptcdv, ) to be 
 come torpid against any one, to his detri 
 ment, i. q. to be slothful, heavy, burdensome 
 to any one, e. g. in a pecuniary sense, c. 
 gen. 2 Cor. 11, 8. 12, 13. 14 ov Kararapjoj- 
 <ra> vfj,a)i>. Hesych. Karevapjo/cra tfidpvva. 
 b. ov KaTevdoKTjara ov Karfftdprjo-a. Ac- 
 25 
 
 cording to Jerome the use of this word is a 
 Cilicism of Paul ; Algas. Qu. 10. See Wet- 
 stein N. T. ad 1 Cor. 11, 8. 
 
 Karavevo), f. euo-w, (pevw,) to nod or 
 ic ink towards any one, to make signs to any 
 one, with the head, eyes, or hands, to beckon, 
 c. dat. Luke 5, 7. Luc. Asin. 48. Pol. 39. 
 1. 3. 
 
 tcaravoeco, a>, f. ijo-w, (Kara intens. vow.) 
 
 1. to see or discern distinctly, to perceive 
 clearly, c. ace. Matt. 7, 3 do<ov ov naravofis ; 
 Luke 6, 41. Acts 27, 39. Trop. Luke 20, 
 23 K. TTJV iravovpylav, Sept. for ^^SH Ps- 
 91, 8. Plut. Pyrrh. 34. Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 2 : 
 trop. Xen. An. 7. 7. 45. 
 
 2. Trop. to mind accurately, to observe, to 
 consider, c. ace. Luke 12, 24 K. TOVS nopanas. 
 \. 27 ra Kpiva. Acts 7, 31. 32. 11,6. Heb. 3, 
 1. James 1, 23. 24. Sept. for ri!O Is. 5, 
 12. Num. 32, 8. 9. So Luc. Demon. 20. 
 Xen. Hi. 1. 22. Spec, to have respect to, 
 to regard, c. ace. Rom. 4, 19 ov Karfvorja-f 
 TO eavrov a-copa KT\. Heb. 10, 24. Sept. 
 
 for pan is. 57, i. 
 
 Karavraco, &>, f. jjo-co, (dvrdv, dvri,) lit. 
 to come down over against, i. e. to come 
 downto or upon, to arrive, at a place ; Acts 
 20, 15 Karr]VTi](Ta^i(v dvriKpv Xi ou we came 
 over against Chios. Elsewhere in N. T. 
 with tls c. ace. Acts 16, 1 /canjmjo-e tig 
 A/P/V. 18, 19. 24. 21, 7. 25, 13. 27, 12. 
 28, 13. (2 Mace. 4, 44. Palaeph. 15. 2. 
 Diod. Sic. 3. 34.) Of things, to come or be 
 brought to any one, c. els 1 Cor. 14, 36 ; to 
 come upon, to happen to, i. e. in the time of 
 any one, c. ds 1 Cor. 10, 11. So Pol. 6. 4. 
 12. Trop. to attain to the possession of 
 any thing, to obtain, c. els Acts 26, 7 els fjv 
 (eVayyeXiW) . . . f\7rid KaTavrrjcrai. Eph. 
 4, 13. Phil. 3, 11. So c. Trpo r 2 Mace. 6, 
 14; els Pol 4. 34. 2. 
 
 Kardwfys, e^y, fj, (Karaj/vo-o-w,) pr. a 
 piercing through, trop. -vehement pain, grief, 
 Hesych. icaTavvgis- 17 XI/TTTJ. But Sept. has 
 the verb Karai/vo-o-eo for Heb. B^ to be si 
 lent, dumb, Lev. 10,3. Ps. 4, 5; for ebsw 
 id. Dan. 10, 15 ; and for C;H3 to lie in deep 
 sleep, stupor, Dan. 10, 9. So also Sept 
 KaTavvgis for Heb. na -j ^Pl deep sleep, 
 stupor, Ps. 60. 3. Is. 29, 10. Hence in X. 
 T. from the Sept. slumber, stupor, Rom. 1 ] , 
 8 e8a>KfV avTois 6 3ft>s 7rvfvp.a KaTavv{-i>s, 
 quoted from Is. 29, 10 where Sept. for 
 iia -pn as above. Some derive it in this 
 sense from KaTaw(rrdu>. 
 
 KctTavvcrcra) v. -TT<U, f. &>, (KUTU in 
 tens.) to prick through, to pierce; Pass. 
 
386 
 
 trop. to be greatly pained, to be deeply moved; 
 Acts 2, 37 Karevvyrja-av Trj Kap8iq. Sept. for 
 3&oa p s . 109, 16. Ecclus. 14, 1. Hesych. 
 
 a), >, f. eoo-w, (nard intens.) to 
 count worthy of any thing ; in N. T. only 
 Pass, to be counted worthy, c. gen. TTJS ftao-t- 
 Xf<as TOV Sfoi) 2 Thess. 1,5; c. infin. Luke 
 20, 35. 21, 36. Acts 5, 41. So c. gen. 
 Jos. Ant. 15. 3. 8. Diod. Sic. 2. 60; c. inf. 
 Dem. 1383. 11. 
 
 , , f. TJO-W, (Trare w,) to tread 
 down, to trample down, c. ace. Matt. 5, 13. 
 7, 6 /DjTTore KaraTrarijo-axrti/ aiirovs vnb rols 
 TToo-ti/ avrS>v. Luke 8, 5. 12, 1. Sept. for 
 0^ 2 Chr. 25, 18. Ez. 34, 18. So Pol. 1. 
 34. 5. Xen. Ag. 1. 15. Metaph. as a mark 
 of scorn and contempt, Heb. 10, 29 TOV vibv 
 roOSeoC. So 1 Mace. 3,51. Horn. II. 4. 157. 
 
 KaraTravcns, fw s, jj. (Karairavco^) a rest 
 ing down, rest, Sept. for iriaa 1 Chr. 6, 16 
 [31]. 2 Mace. 15, 1. In N/T. from the 
 Heb. a rest, resting-place, dwelling, pr. after 
 wandering and disquiet ; comp. in Karairavui 
 no. 1. b. So Acts 7, 49 TIS TOTTOS TTJS KU- 
 Tair. fjLov, and what the place of my rest, 
 abode ? i. e. of Go*d in allusion to temples, 
 quoted from Is. 66, 1 where Sept. for 
 nrnas , a s also Ps. 132, 14 ; comp. Ecclus. 
 24, 6 sq. Also of the promised land as the 
 rest or abode of the Israelites after their 
 wanderings, Heb. 3, 11. 18 et 4,3. 5 et flcr- 
 (\fvo-ovrai (Is TTJV KaraTravcriv fiov, my rest, 
 i. e. which I have promised ; quoted from 
 Ps. 95, 11 where Sept. for nniaa , as also 
 Deut. 12, 9; see in /carrot. Trop. the rest, 
 quiet abode, of those who shall dwell with 
 God in heaven, in allusion both to the rest 
 of Israel and to the sabbath, Heb. 4, 1. 3. 
 10. 11. Comp. Wisd. 4, 7. Act. Thorn. 
 36. 
 
 tcctTctTravQ), f. O-QJ, (TravtB,) to rest or 
 quiet down, i. e. 
 
 1. Trans. a) Pr. to cause to cease, to 
 make rest or desist, to restrain, c. ace. Acts 
 14, 18 /LidXts KOTfTravcrav TOVS o^Xovy. So 
 Sept. Job 26, 12 where Heb. 55-1 ; for rfex 
 Ps. 85, 4. So Pol. 1. 9. 8. Dem. 808. 14* 
 Plato Polit. 294. e. b) Spec, to cause to rest, 
 to give rest to, i. e. to bring into the rest and 
 happiness of those who dwell with God, 
 Heb. 4, 8 ; comp. v. 1. 9. The^llusion is 
 to Joshua s giving rest, i. e. quiet posses 
 sion and dwelling, to the Israelites in the 
 promised land after their wanderings. Sept. 
 for rpan Josh. 1, 13. 15. 22, 4. So genr. 
 Horn. II. 16. 618. Xen. Yen. 7. 2. 
 
 2. Intrans. to rest from, to cease Jrom, 
 with avid c. gen. Heb. 4, 4 Karfnavcrfv 6 
 3eoy drrb IT. T. epyatv avrov. V. 10. Sept. for 
 JO natti Gen. 2, 2. 3 ; 8li Gen. 49, 32. 
 Test. XII Patr. p. 541 xaTairaixrei. TJ yfj 
 drrb Tapcr^y. Eurip. Hec. 908 p.o\nav 8" 
 arro . . . KaTOTravcras. The more common 
 Gr. usage is KaraTravecrSai TWOS, Matth, 
 355. 4. 
 
 aroy, TO, 
 
 i/v/u.) a covering, veil, which hangs down, 
 Act. Thorn, j 11 TO KaraTreracr/ia TOI) j/v/i- 
 (j)S)vos. In Sept. a veil, curtain, of the 
 tabernacle and temple, of which there were 
 two, viz. one at the entrance of the outer 
 sanctuary, Heb. TjOa Sept. Kara7reVao>ta 
 Ex. 26, 36. 40, 5. Jos. B. J. 5. 5. 4 ; and 
 the other before the holy of holies separat 
 ing it from the outer sanctuary, Heb. nS^ia 
 Sept. KaraTTfTaa-pa Ex. 26, 31. 27, 21. 40, 
 3. Jos. B. J. 5. 5. 5. Comp. Wetst. N. T. 
 ad Matt. 27, 51. In N. T. the veil, curtain, 
 of the inner sanctuary, which was rent at. 
 Christ s death, TO KaTantraa-fjia TOV vaov 
 Matt. 27, 51. Mark 15, 38. Luke 23, 45 ; 
 comp. Heb. 9, 8. 10, 19. 20. Also TO 8(v 
 Tfpov KaTaTreTaa-p.a id. Heb. 9, 3. Trop. 
 Heb. 6, 19 TO farwTfpov TOV AcaTaTTfTao-yiaTOi 
 thai within the veil, i. e. the inner sanctuary, 
 the holy of holies, in the heavenly temple ; 
 comp. v. 20 and 10, 19. So Heb. 10, 26 
 where it is a symbol of the body and death 
 of Jesus. 
 
 f. irlopuu, (TTI VO),) to drink 
 down, to swallow down as in drinking ; Engl. 
 often to swallow up. 
 
 1. Of persons, c. ace. Matt. 23, 24 T^V 
 de K.d^.r]\ov Karairivovrfs. 1 Pet. 5, 8. Sept. 
 for j&a Jon. 2, 1. So m V. H. 1. 3. 
 Luc. D! Marin. 14, 3. Plato Euthyphr. 6. a. 
 
 2. Of things, e. g. the earth, to swallow 
 up, to absorb, c. ace. Rev. 12, 16. (Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 32.) The sea. to overwhelm, to drown, 
 Pass. Heb. 11, 29. (Pol. 2. 41. 7.) Trop. 
 2 Cor. 5, 4. 
 
 3. Trop. to overwhelm, to destroy, c. ace. 
 1 Cor. 15, 54. Pass. 2 Cor. 2, 7 XVTTJ; KOTO- 
 
 ? 6 Toto^Toy. jEschin. 13. 39 K. TTJV 
 
 TraTpcoav overtop. 
 
 KaraTTiTTTO), f. Treo-oC/xat, (TTI TTTO),) to 
 fall down, e. g. prostrate, eiy TJ)I> yrjv Acts 
 26, 14; vfKpov 28, 6. Sept. for bfij Ps. 
 145, 14. Luc. Nigrin. 36. Xen. Cyr/4. 5. 
 54. Mem. 3. 3. 5. 
 
 /caraTrXeo), f. evo-co, (n-Xew,) to sail 
 down from the high sea to land (comp. in 
 Kardyto no. 2) ; hence to sail to any place, to 
 
387 
 
 tome by ship to, c. els Luke 8, 26. Pol. 1. 
 53. 2. Xen. Hell. 1. 4. 11. 
 
 <s, f. qo-co, (TTOWO),) to work 
 down, to wear down by labour, Plut. Alex. 
 M. -1. In N. T. Pass. trop. to be weary, 
 oppressed, afflicted, Acts 7, 24. 2 Pet. 2, 7. 
 So 2 Mace. 8, 2. ./El. V. H. 3. 27. Diod. 
 Sic. 13. 51. 
 
 , f. icrw, (irovrifa, irov- 
 ror,) to cas or stn& down in the sea ; Mid. 
 or Pass, to sink, to be sunk, to be drowned; 
 Matt. 14, 30. 18, 6 KaranovrKr^fj eV ro> ne- 
 \dyti TTJS 2aAd<roT;r, where only a sure 
 mode of death is pointed out, prob. without 
 allusion to the punishment of drowning 
 (KaTOTroiTioyioj) practised by the Egyptians, 
 Greeks, and Romans, but not by the Jews ; 
 see Casaubon ad Sueton. Octav. c. 67. 
 Wetst. N. T. I. p. 441. Adam s Rom. Ant. 
 p. 274. Diod. Sic. 16. 35 TOVS 8 aXXovr 
 a>s tpocrv\ovs Karfrfavriuf. Plut. Timol. 
 13 fin. Pol. 2. 60. 8. Dem. 677. 6. 
 
 Karapa, as, 17, (*ard intens. dpd,) pr. 
 imprecation against, i. e. 
 
 1. Pr. and genr. imprecation, cursing. 
 James 3, 10 e*. r. a. oTo^aroy eepxerai 
 fiiXoyia KOI nardpa. Sept. for tlbbp Gen. 
 27, 12. 13. Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 5. Plut* Timol. 
 5. Plato Alcib. 143. b. 
 
 2. From the Heb. a curse, i. e. a devot 
 ing or dooming to utter destruction, see in 
 avdStp.a ; and hence curse,* condemnation, 
 doom; Gal. 3, 10 VTTO Kardpav (l<ri are sub 
 ject to the curse, i. q. fViKardparoi. v. 13 bis, 
 K TTJS KdTapas TOV vopov, yevopevos virep 
 T)p.>v Kardpa, i. e. from the curse, doom, 
 which the law threatens, being himself 
 made a curse for us, i. e. meton. accursed, 
 i. q. (TTLKaTapaTos. 2 Pet. 2, 14 Kardpas 
 Tfuva, i. e. on whom the curse abides. So 
 Sept. for Mix Dan. 9, 11 ; nbbp Jndg. 9, 
 57. Deut. 28, 15. 45 ; n-nxa Prov. 3, 33. 
 Mai. 2, 2. Also of the earth, Heb. 6, 8 
 fij . . . Kardpas tyyvs near to the curse, almost 
 accursed, doomed to sterility. So Gen. 3, 
 17 na-ixn n-vnx, Sept. f Varaparoy, 
 comp. 5, 29. 8, 21. 
 
 Karapaofj,ai, i^at, f. do-o/xai, Mid. de- 
 pon. (dpdo/xai, dpd,) to wish or pray against 
 any one, to wish evil to, to curse. a) Pr. 
 and c. ace. e. g. opp. to fvXoydv, Matt. 5, 44 
 TOVS Acarapco/ieVour v/iaj. Luke 6, 28. Rom. 
 12, 14. James 3, 9. So Sept. for -nx Gen. 
 12, 3. Num. 24, 9. So c. ace. impU Xen. 
 An. 5. 6. 4 comp. Luc. Asin. 27 ; oftener 
 c. dat. Luc. D. Mort. 27. 7. Xen. An. 7. 7. 
 48. b) From the Heb. to curse, to devote 
 ro destruction; so a fig-tree Mark 11, 21, 
 
 comp. in *ardpa no. 2 ult. Pass. part. a- 
 Ti]pa[j.fvos accursed, i. q. fViKardparos, 
 Matt. 25, 41 ; comp. Buttm. } 113. n. 6. 
 Sept. for nbbp Deut. 21, 23; *>kpn Job 
 24, 18. So Wisd. 12, 1 1. Ecclus. 3, 16. 
 
 Karapyea), , f. TJO-CO, (dpy w,) to let 
 be idle, unemployed, e. g. the hands Eurip. 
 Phcen. (758) 765. In N. T. to make idle, 
 useless ; to bring to nought. 
 
 1. Pr. e. g. land, to spoil, c. ace. Luke 
 13,7 iwm Kal TTJV yf/v Karapyfl. Comp. dpyos 
 of land, Aristot. CEc. 2. Diod. Sic. 19. 42. 
 Trop. to make without effect, 1o make vain, 
 void, fruitless, e. g. TTJV niaTiv TOV Seou 
 Rom. 3, 3 ; vopov v. 31. Eph. 2, 15; eVay 
 yeX/ai/ Rom. 4, 14. Gal. 3, 17. Spec, to 
 bring to nought, to debase, c. ace. 1 Cor. 1, 
 28 ; and so Pass. 1 Cor. 2, 6. 
 
 2. Genr. to make to cease, to do away, to 
 put an end to; 1 Cor. 13, 11 Karf]pyr)Ka TO. 
 TOV vrjiriov 1 put away childish things. (Sept. 
 for Chald. bwa to make desist, Ezra 4, 21. 
 23.) Hence to abolish, to destroy, Rom. 6, 
 6 TO o-wfjLa TTJS apapTias. 1 Cor. 6, 13. 15, 
 24 orai/ Karapyr^a-rj nauav dp%r]v KT\. v. 26. 
 2 Thess. 2, 8. 2 Tim. 1, 10. Heb. 2, 14. 
 So Test. XII Patr. p. 731 Karapy^cm Be- 
 Xi ap (cat TOVS inrfpfTovvras aura. Just. Mart, 
 de Resurr. p. 242. Pass. KaTapy e op.at, 
 OV/JLOI, to cease, to be done away, 1 Cor. 
 13, 8 bis, f?T6 TrpocprjTflai, KaTapyrj^rjcrovrai. 
 KT\. v. 10. 2 Cor. 3, 7. 11. 13. 14. Gal. 5, 
 1 1 . So KOTapyto/jiai drro TWOS, to cease 
 from, to cease being under or connected with 
 any person or thing ; e. g. diro TOV i/o /xov 
 to be freed from a law Rom. 7, 2. 6, i. q. 
 e XevSepa foriv diro TOV vop.ov in v. 3 ; also 
 Gal. 5, 4 KaTTipyrjZrjTe drro TOV Xpiorov ye 
 have ceased (withdrawn, apostatized) from 
 Christ. Theophyl. well, ovSf^iaj/ Koivvviav 
 
 a TOV XptoroO. 
 
 pi^ffj,eo), s>, f. rjo-o, (dpi3^* a>.) to 
 number under or among ; Pass. Acts 1,17 
 KaT77pi3p7/ieVoy TJV eV f] fj.lv. Sept. for ttJrnrirl 
 2 Chr. 31, 19. Diod. Sic. 4. 85. Plato "Pol 
 lit. 266. a. 
 
 KarapTiyCi), f. io-ca, (dpri <J&>, iipTios, ) to 
 make quite ready, to put fully in order, to 
 make complete. 
 
 1. Pr. of what is broken, injured, to refit, 
 to repair, to mend, and this is the more 
 common classic usage ; c. ace. e. g. TU 
 o-iKTva Matt. 4, 21. Mark 1, 19. Sept. for 
 Chald. bbDOJ Ezra 4, 12. 13. 16. So Arr. 
 Epict. 3.~20 . 10. Diod. Sic. 12. 3. Hdot. 5. 
 106. Trop. of a person in error, to restore, 
 to set right, c. ace. Gal. 6, 1. So Plut. Mar- 
 cell. 10. 
 

 2. Spec, lo furnish fully, to make perfect, 
 i. e. such as one should be. deficient in no 
 part; so of persons, c. ace. 1 Pet. 5, 10 6 
 #e Seoy . . . Karapri tm vpas. Pass, or Mid. 
 
 2 Cor. 13, 11 Karapri fecrSe le ye perfect. 
 Luke 6, 40 Kar^prioT/eVoy 8e Tras ecrrat cos 6 
 StSdax. avTov, every one completed (perfect 
 ed) shall be as his master, not more. Also 
 with ev TIVL in any thing, Heb. 13, 21 Karap- 
 ri crai 11/j.as tv TT. epyw dyaSw. Pass. 1 Cor. 
 
 1, 10. Of things, e. g. ra vcrrep^/zara, to 
 fill out, to supply, 1 Thess. 3, 10. Comp. 
 Pol. 5. 2. 11 MaKeSwes rats rpccruuc Karrjp- 
 
 TKTfJLfVOl. 
 
 3. Genr. to prepare, to set in order, to 
 frame; in N. T. only in Pass, and Mid. 
 Rom. 9, 22 a-Kfiirj opyfjs Karr)pTi(riJ.eva fls 
 djrcoAetai/. Matt. 21, 16 K. mvov, from Ps. 8, 
 
 3 where Sept. for "1& 1 ? . Heb. 10, 5 crcop.a 
 e KciTrjpTio-a) fwi, a body hast thou prepared 
 for me, as a sacrifice to thee, quoted from 
 Ps. 40, 7 Sept. where the Heb. is different. 
 Heb. 11, 3 KarrjpTicr Sai roiis alaivas popart 
 3eov, iv ere framed, were created and set in 
 order; comp. Sept. Ps. 74, 16 a-v Karrjp- 
 rtcro) rj\iot> Kal (reXrjvrjv for Heb. "pD? 1 ! P S - 
 89, 38. Diod. Sic. 11. 75. Pol. 1. 21. 4. 
 
 KardpTlcris, ecu?, f], (Karapn fco,) perfec 
 tion, i. e. the being made or becoming per 
 fect, 2 Cor. 13,9; comp. in Karaprtfa no. 
 2. Plut. Alex. M. 7. 
 
 KarapTMT/JiOSj O v, 6, (ncaTaprifo),) a per 
 fecting, i. e. the act of making perfect, Eph. 
 4,12. 
 
 /caracreuu, f. ei o-co, (o-tieo,) to shake 
 doicn, e. g. buildings JFA. V. H. 3. 16. 
 Thuc. 2. 76. In N. T. to shake the hand 
 at any one, to wave the hand, to beckon, as 
 a sign for silence, c. ace. Acts 19, 33 ara- 
 a-fia-as rfjv x e P a waving the hand; c. dat. 
 Acts 13, 16 Karaa-do-as rfj xpi waving 
 with the hand. Also c. dat. of pers. 21, 40 
 K . rrj x- ^ a $- 12 > 17 - So T y v X- Pml 
 Leg. ad Cai. 1018. b ; 777 x- Jos - Ant - 8 - H- 
 
 2. Pol. 1. 78. 3 ; c. dat. of pers. Xen. Cyr. 
 5. 4. 4. 
 
 Karacr/caTTTa), f. ^o>, (o-xaTrrw,) pr. to 
 dig down, to undermine ; and hence to over 
 throw, to destroy, to rase, e. g. cities, build 
 ings, Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 46. Hdian. 8. 4. 24. 
 Xen. Hell. 2. 2. 23. So in N. T. as quoted 
 from Sept. e. g. Rom. 11, 3 ra "SvcnaaT^piu 
 <rov KUTfa-Ka-^av, they have digged down 
 thine altars, destroyed them, quoted from 
 1 K. 19, 10 where Sept. for tJ-,n. Part. 
 Pass. Acts 15, 16 ra Kareo-Ka/x^e ra, the 
 ruins, from Am. 9, 11 where Sept. for 
 
 , f. ao-a,, ( K ara intens.) to 
 prepare fully, to put in readiness, c. ace. e. g. 
 a way before an oriental monarch, rf]v 686v 
 Matt. 11, 10. Mark 1, 2. Luke 7, 27, quoted 
 from Mai. 3, 1 where Heb. n3Q , Sept. eVi- 
 /3AeVo/iai ; see in eVot/idfco no. 1 . a. Luke 1 , 
 17 Xaoi KaTfCTKevatr/ieVoj/ a people fully pre 
 pared, for the coming of the Messiah. (Genr. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 1. Dem. 14. 26. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 11. 4.) Spoken of buildings, i. q. to build, 
 to construct, e. g. olnov Heb. 3, 3. 4 ; vict]vr]v 
 9, 2. 6; Kij3a>Tov the ark of Noah 11, 7. 
 1 Pet. 3, 20. So Jos. Ant. 8. 8. 4. Hdian. 
 5. 6. 14. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 27. Of God, to 
 create, e. g. ra iravra Heb. 3, 4. Sept. for 
 S02 Is. 40, 28. 43, 7. So Wisd. 9, 2. 
 
 Karaa"Kr/voci), &, f. axrcu, (a-K^ow,) to 
 fix down a tent, to pitch, tent, to encamp, 
 Diod. Sic. 14. 62. Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 2. In 
 N. T. genr. to sojourn, lo dwell, and spoken 
 of birds, to haunt ; so eV rois /cXaSoty Matt. 
 13, 32. Luke 13, 19; VTTO TTJV a-nlav Mark 
 4, 32. Sept. for -jaoj Ps. 104, 12. So Jos. 
 Ant. 3. 8. 5. Diod. S ic. 19. 94 ult. TT\T)V TOV 
 KaTCKTKrjvovv (v otKiais. Pol. 35. 2. 4. Trop. 
 to rest, to remain ; Acts 2, 26 17 crdpt- p.ov 
 KaTao-KrjvaMTfi fir eArn Si, quoted from Ps, 
 16, 9 where Sept. for "jatio . 
 
 ear, 17, 
 
 the, pitching of a tent, building, Sept. for 
 rn 33 1 Chr. 28, 2 ; a tent pitched, quarters, 
 Diod. Sic. 17. 95. In N. T. a lodging, 
 dwelling, abode, and spoken of birds, a 
 haunt, Matt. 8, 20. Luke 9, 58. In Sept. 
 only of the dwelling of God, for nail) 
 2 Chr. 6, 21. Symm. for -jsaia Ps. 46*5. 
 So Tob. 1, 4. 2 Mace. 14, 35. Comp. Pol. 
 11. 26. 5. Plut. Demetr. 26. 
 
 Karaa-Kid^a), f. acrco, (ovaafw,) to sha 
 dow down upon, i. e. to overshadow, to cover, 
 c. ace. Heb. 9, 5. Plut. Artax. 18 fin. Plato 
 Tim. 74. d. 
 
 KaraCTKOTTea), d>, f. ijo-co, (o7C07re a>,) to 
 view accurately, to contemplate, Xen. Mem. 
 
 2. 1. 22 ; to inspect, Pol. 10. 20. 2 ; to recon 
 noitre, Plut. ^Em. Paul. 16. In N. T. with 
 sinister intent, to spy out, to explore, c. ace 
 Gal. 2. 4 KaTaa-KOTrfjo-ai TTJV e XevSepiai/ vfj.wv 
 So Sept. for ^ 2 Sam. 10, 3. 1 Chr. 19, 3 
 
 KdTCUTKOTTOS) ov, 6, (KaracrKOTre w,) Q 
 scout, spy, Heb. 11, 31. Sept. for bjj TO 
 Gen. 42, 9. 11. Pol. 14. 3. 7. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 3. 3. 25. 
 
 Karaao^l^oiJLaCj f. laropai, Mid. depon. 
 (o-o(pi w,) pr. to be wise against any one, 
 i. e. to deal subtilely with, insidiously, deceit 
 fully, c. ace. Acts 7, 19 Karao-oipio-dp.ei or TO 
 
389 
 
 ytvos Tjfj.(av, in allusion to Ex. 1, 10 where 
 Sept. for csnnn . Judith 5, 11. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 1. 2. ~Diod . Sic. 15. 74. 
 
 f. f X, (ore XXco,) to put 
 or let down, to lower, e. g. ras ptifiSovs the 
 fasces Dion. Hal. 8. 44. In N. T. trop. to 
 put down, to quell, to appease, c. ace. rov 
 ox^ov Acts 19, 35. 36. So 2 Mace. 4, 31. 
 Jos. Ant. 14. 9. 1. Plut. Moral. II. p. 95. 
 
 aros, TO, KaSicmj/u, po 
 sition, i. e. condition, character, deportment ; 
 Tit. 2, 3 eV Karacrrij/iari ItpcnrpfTrfls. 
 3 Mace. 5,45. Jos. B. J. 1. 1. 4. Plut. 
 Marcell. 23 pen. 
 
 Kara(rrd\rj, ^ s , f/, (/carao-reXXca,) a let 
 ting down, i. e. the letting fall of a garment, 
 the adjustment of it, on and around one s 
 person, *. Trepi/SoXr/s Plut. Pericl. 5. In 
 N. T. melon, dress, raiment, apparel, 1 Tim. 
 2, 9 tv KaTao-ToXfl Kocr/iia). Sept. for flBSB 
 Is. 61, 3. So Jos. B. J. 2. 8. 4. 
 
 Karacrrpeffxi}, f. \^<o, (o-Tpe<p&>,) to turn 
 down, to turn under, e. g. with a plough 
 Xen. (Ec. 17. 10. In N. T. to overturn, to 
 overthrow, to upset, c. ace. Matt. 21, 12 ras 
 rpa-TTt^ay TU>V KoXXu/SiorcSi . Mark 11, 15. 
 Sept. for ^?n Job. 28, 9. Hag. 2, 22. So 
 Anthol. Gr. III. p. 38. Also K. ray TroXeZ? 
 to destroy Plut. Pericl. 23. Hdian. 8. 4. 22. 
 
 KdTCKTTpT/VLCUi)) <B, f. dcrw, (oTp^vido),) 
 to revel against; to run rial against any one, 
 C. gen. 1 Tim. 5, 1 1 orav yap KaracrTprjvid- 
 (Tcao-i TOV XpioroC, against Christ, (. e. they 
 lead a life of voluptuous luxury in neglect 
 of Christ, to the detriment of his cause. 
 Basil. Ep. ad Amphil: III. p. 28. c. Nicet. 
 Annal. XIX. 4. 368. d. Comp. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 381 ; see more in arpnvidv. 
 
 s, f), (*aTao-Tpe<po>,) ca 
 
 tastrophe, i. e. overthrow, destruction, of ci 
 ties ; 2 Pet. 2, 6 as TroXety . . . naracrrpofpfj 
 na.TtKpi.vf. Sept. for risen Gen. 19, 29; 
 T! Job 15, 21. So Plut. Instit. Lacon. 
 42. Thuc. 1. 15. Trop. subversion, opp. 
 ro ^prj<rijj.ov, 2 Tim. 2, 14. 
 
 KaTacrrpOiVW/jLL, f. orpoxrw, (orpoii/- 
 w/xi,) to spread down, to strew down, e. g. 
 persons, Pass. 1 Cor. 10, 5 KnTfcrTpui^rjcrav 
 ev tpr]fj.(o, they were strewed as corpses in 
 the desert, were destroyed. Sept. for Brrj 
 Num. 14, 16. Judith 14, 4. JE\. H. An. 7 . 
 2. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 64 ot m po-ai . . . TroX- 
 
 Karacrvpo), f. put, (o-vpco,) to drag down, 
 to force along, e. g. as a torrent TOVS Xi3ouf, 
 uXa, Ti7f a^op Test. XII Patr. p. 643. 
 
 Plut. Symp. 1 . 9. 3 ; TO SIKTVOV Alciphr. 
 Ep. 1. 1. In N. T. of a person, to drag or 
 haul along, c. ace. riva rrpbs Kpirtjv Luke 
 12, 53. So Philo Leg. ad Cai. p. 1010 8ui 
 jj-fa-ns Kareo-vpov dyopas. Comp. delrahere 
 injudicium, Cic. pro Milon. 14. 
 
 Karaa-^d^w v. -drro), f. dgm, (o-^u- 
 o>, o-0aTT<,) to slaughter down, i. e. genr. 
 to butcher, to kill, c. ace. TOVS e ^Spovs Luke 
 19,27. Sept. for ann Zech. 11,5. ^El. 
 V. H. 13. 2. Xen. An. 4. 1. 23. 
 
 > 5 f. i cra>, (KOTU intens.) 
 to seaZ up, c: ace. e. g. TO fiiftXlov a book or 
 roll, Rev. 5, 1. Sept for Enn Job 9, 7. 
 Wisd. 2, 5. Luc. Alex. 49. Plut. de Defect. 
 Orac. 45. 
 
 /CQ>TCi<T^6O"t9) e<us, 17, (KareVo),) <z holding 
 fast, possession ; in N. T. meton. a posses 
 sion, thing possessed, e. g. a dwelling, land. 
 Acts 7, 5 Sovj/at ft? Karacrxecri!> avrfjv SC. 
 TI)J/ yTji/. v. 45 tv rfj KaTacr^eo-ft, see in tv 
 no. 4. Sept for ^JHX Gen. 17, 8. Ps. 2, 8. 
 Judith 9, 13. Jos. Ant. 9. 1. 2. 
 
 put or lay down, to deposit, e. g. in a tomb, 
 C. ace. Mark 15, 46 Kare^nKtv avrov fv^vrj- 
 (j.fia>. jEl. V. H. 13. 2. Plut. Lysand. 29 ; 
 genr. Xen. Eq. 6. 7. 
 
 2. Mid. to deposit for oneself, to lay up for 
 use, genr. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 34. An. 7. 6. 34. 
 In N. T. trop. KaTtmSecrSat x-P lv v - X a P l ~ 
 ras, c. dat. to lay up favour with any one, 
 to icin /it s favour, to curry favour with ; 
 Acts 24, 27 3t Xb>i/ T? ^dptTar /caTaSe trSai 
 Totr louS. 6 $^Xif 25, 9. So 1 Mace. 10, 
 23. Dem. 416. 5. Xen. Cvr. 8. 3. 26. 
 
 rs,Tj, Karare^ixa. concson, 
 
 1. e. a cutting off, mutilation; so Phil. 3, 2, 
 contemptuously for the Jewish circumcision, 
 in contrast with the true spiritual circumci 
 sion in v. 3. Cornp. in aTroKoVro). 
 
 Kararo^evd), f. evo-w, (Yoeu&>,) to shoot 
 down with an arrow or dart ; Pass. c. dat 
 /3oX/St Heb. 12, 20, in allusion to Ex. 19, 13 
 where Sept. for fi^. L UC- j). Deor. 19. 
 
 2. Hdot. 3. 36. 
 
 , aor. 2 
 
 to run down from a higher to a lower place ; 
 Acts 21, 32 KOT(8pafjLfv eV avrovy he ran 
 down upon them, from the fortress Antonia. 
 Sept. for "pi i K. 19, 20. Hdot. 7. 192. 
 Xen. An. 7. 1. 20. In a hostile sense Sent 
 Lev. 26, 37. Xen. Cyr. 7. 2. 5. 
 Kara(f)dy(i), see in KaTfo-3uo. 
 
 f. Karoio-a, e ") Pass. 
 
 aor. 1 K(iTTjv(x?}T]v, to bear or carry down from 
 
tcaradpevya) 
 
 390 
 
 a higher to a lower place, Palaeph. 10. 2. 
 Dem. 1158. 15; to bring down with vio 
 lence, as a blow, Luc. Tim. 53; to throw 
 down Jos. Ant. 2. 9. 7. Hdian. 4. 15. 9. 
 Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Pass. KdTd(pepea-^at, to be borne or 
 thrown down; Acts 20, 9 Karevf^iis OTTO 
 TOV vnvov f neo-t, being borne down from 
 the sleep, i. e. he sunk down from sleep, lost 
 his balance and fell. (JEl V. H. 3. 4. Hdian. 
 1. 11. 3.) Trop. to be borne down, oppressed, 
 e. g. with sleep, vnvu> Acts 20, 9. So 
 Symm. for t^? Ps. 76, 7; ds vnvov Jos. 
 Ant. 2. 5. 5. Diod. Sic. 3. 57. 
 
 2. Spec. KdTdfpe pa> -^^(pov (KCLTO. intens.) 
 to bring down or deposit a vole, to vole, 
 
 1. q. (ptp(o -^Tjcpov but stronger, implying 
 alacrity, zeal. Acts 26, 10 KarrjvtyKa tyfyav 
 
 1 gave my vote, assented ; comp. 22, 20. 
 So (pepa) ^(pov Dem. 271. ult. Plut. Co- 
 riol. 15 TTJS rjfjifpds ev -ft TTJV ^Tjfpov eftfi <pf- 
 
 pflV (VffTaOTJS. 
 
 Karafavya), f. /iat, ((evy,) to flee 
 down to any place, to flee for refuge, e. g. 
 ds TUS TroXeis Acts 14, 6 ; trop. c. inf. 
 Heb. 6, 18. Sept. for OW Num. 35, 26. 
 Deut. 4, 42. Hdian. 7. 11. 12. Xen. Hell. 
 4. 8. 28. 
 
 KarcKJ&eipa), f. epS>, (KOTO, intens.) to 
 spoil utterly, to corrupt, c. ace. Luc. Tim. 
 36 ; KdTd<p%. TTJV xdipav to lay waste, Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 56. Pol. 2. 64. 3. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Trop. to corrupt, to deprave; Pass. 
 
 2 Tim. 3, 8 KaTf<p%app,fvoi TOV vovv, Buttm. 
 131. 7. Comp. Sept. Kara<^3. TTJV 686v for 
 
 mnain Gen. 6, 12. 
 
 2. to destroy, Pass, to perish, 2 Pet. 2, 12. 
 Sept. for baa Ex. 18, 18; t^ntfri Gen. 6, 
 17. 2 Mace. 5, 14. ^Eschyl. Pers. 345. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 16. rf 
 
 /eara^iXea), a>, f. 770-0), (Kara intens.) 
 to kiss tenderly, deosculor, stronger than (pi- 
 Ao, c. ace. Matt. 26, 49 comp. v. 48. 
 Mark 14, 45. Luke 7, 38. 45. 15,20. Acts 
 20, 37. Sept. for p^3 Gen. 31, 28. 55. 
 Ruth 1, 9. 14. Luc. Asin. 51. Xen. Mem. 
 
 2. 6. 33. 
 
 Kara<f>poved), >, f. TJO-IO, (<ppovea>,) pr. 
 to think down upon, i. q. to look down upon 
 any one, to think lightly of, to despise, 
 c. gen. Buttm. { 132. 10. e. Matt. 18, 10 p.f) 
 KdTdfppovTjcrrjTe tvos TO>V piKpcov TOVTCW. 
 Rom. 2, 4. 1 Cor. 11, 22. 1 Tim. 4, 12. 
 Heb. 12, 2. 2 Pet. 2, 10. SoWisd. 14, 30. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 67. Xen. Mem. 3. 4. 12. 
 Spec, to neglect, not to care for, Matt,J>, 24 
 et Luke 16, 13 opp. to dj>3<rxfo-3cu. 1 Tim. 
 6,2. So Hdian. 5. 4. 3. Xen. Mem. 3. 12. 3. 
 
 KaTl(f)pOVT)Tr)S, ov, 6, (Kara(ppovfo,) a 
 despiser, contemner, Acts 13, 41, quoted 
 from Sept. Hab. 1, 5 where Heb. tniaa. 
 Sept. for "Ill s Hab. 2, 5. Jos. Ant. 6. 14. 
 4. Plut. Brut. 12 init. 
 
 , f. evo-w, (x >) to pour down 
 upon, and gen% to pour upon, e. g. Vi TTJV 
 Ke(p. Matt. 26, 7 ; Kara TTJS Ke(p. Mark 14, 
 3. Sept. Job. 41, 15. Hdian. 8. 4. 26- 
 Plato Rep. 398. a. 
 
 Karajfiovios, [ O v, 6, f), adj. (x%>v,) 
 under-ground, subterranean, put for abrjs 
 and its inhabitants, Phil. 2, 10. Anthol. 
 Gr. IV. p. 257. Dion. Hal. Ant. 2. 10. Horn. 
 II. 9. 457. 
 
 /caTaxpdofJLai, aj/j.ai, f. yc-opai, Mid. 
 depon. (Kara intens.) to use overmuch, to 
 over-use, and so to misuse, to abuse, c. dat. 
 
 1 Cor. 7, 31 01 xpco/nei/oi TO) Kooyiw wr p-f) 
 K.a.Ta\pa>iJL(voi. 9, 18. ^El. V. H. 3. 13. 
 Hdian. 8. 4. 22. Plato Menex. 247. a. 
 
 Kara-^rv^u), f. &>, (^^0),) to cool down, 
 to cool, to refresh by cooling, c. ace. ri)V 
 yXwo-o-av Luke 16, 24. Sept. Ez. 26, 19. 
 Diod. Sic. 3. 8 pen. Theophr. C. PI. 4. 12. 9. 
 
 /ca.re/8(Xo9, ov, 6, f], adj. (KOTO, intens. 
 eiStoXov,) full of idols, given to idolatry ; 
 Acts 17, 16 KdTflb aiKov ov<rav TTJV iro\iv. 
 Comp. the forms TOTTOS Kard8fv$pos Diod. 
 Sic. 16. 31 ; TO TTOJ Ktirafpirros Pol. 18. 3. 1. 
 
 Karevavrt, adv. (fvavri,) pr. down over 
 against ; hence genr. i. q. over against, op 
 posite to, c. gen. a) Genr. Mark 11, 2 
 
 KU>IJ.T)V TTJV KdTfVaVTl {l/iO>J>. 12, 41. 13, 3. 
 
 [Matt. 21,2. 27,24.] Also with art. 6, 
 r} KdTevavri, adj. opposite, Luke 19, 30 els 
 TTJV Karevavri KU>{J.T]V. Buttm. 125. 6. 
 Sept. for 113 Ex. 19, 2; ^ 1 Chr. 5, 
 11; ^B"^ 5 ? Zech. 14,4. So Ecclus. 22, 
 18. b) Spec, before, in the sight of, 
 Rom. 4, 17 KdTevavri ov eVioTevo-e 3eov, 
 by attract, for KdTevdvri Seov w tViVreucre. 
 comp. in art. 6s II. A. 3. b. 8. Buttm. 5 143. 
 14. Winer $ 24. 2. n. Sept. for n .?a~^ 
 Ex. 32, 10 ; ^Eb 2 Chr. 2, 6. Ex. 32, 5. 
 
 KarevatTTiov, adv. (eVwTrtov,) pr. down 
 in the presence of, in the very presence of; 
 hence genr. before, in the sight of, c. gen. 
 
 2 Cor. 2, 17 KdTevairiov TOV SfoC. 12, 19. 
 Eph. 1, 4. Col. 1, 22. Jude 24 HUT. TTJS 
 86^Tjs dvTov, before, in the presence of. Sept. 
 for h :B-nx Lev. 4, 17; *\3Sa Josh. 21, 46; 
 *yb Josh. 1, 5. 
 
 Kare^OV(Tld^O), f. dcra, (eov<nao>,) to 
 exercise authority against or over any one, 
 c. gen. Matt. 20, 25. Mark 10, 42. 
 
391 
 
 f. do-opu, Mid. depon. 
 (Kara intens. (pydfopai, ) Pass. aor. 1 /car- 
 fipyd<T3T)v with Pass, signif. 2 Cor. 12, 12, 
 comp. Buttm. j 113. n. 6. 
 
 1. to work out, to bring about, e. g. a) 
 Of persons, i. q. to work, to effect, to accom 
 plish, to do; so of Christ, c. ace. Rom. 15, 
 18. (Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 11.) So actions, 
 conduct, c. ace. Rom. 1, 27 TTJV dvxw 
 trvmjv KUTtpya^opfvoi. 2, 9 /c. TO KUKOV. 7, 
 15. 17. 18. 20. 1 Cor. 5, 3. 1 Pet. 4, 3. 
 (Xen. Hiero 1. 32.) Also miracles, o^/xeTa, 
 Pass. 2 Cor. 12, 12 ; so Hdot. 9. 108. Spec. 
 to form, to make ; so of God, c. ace. et dat. 
 a Cor. 5, 5. Sept. for isa Ex. 15, 17. 
 b) Of things, to cause, to produce, to work, 
 to be the cause or author of, c. ace. Rom. 4, 
 15 6 vayLOs 6pyr]V Karepydfrrai. 5, 3. 7, 8. 
 13. 2 Cor. 4, 17. 7, 10 bis. 11. 9, 11. Phil. 
 2, 12. James 1, 3. 20. So Plato Legg. 
 791. a. 
 
 2. to work out to the end, to bring to an 
 end, Hdian. 3. 12. 12. Plut. M. Crass. 10. 
 Hence in N. T. to make an end of, to van 
 quish, c. ace. uTravra Eph. 6, 13. So Jos. 
 Ant. 2. 4. 2. Hdian. 1. 9. 3. Xen. Cyr. 4. 
 6. 4 TOV \fovra. 
 
 tcarepXpfJMU, aor. 2 KOT^OV, (epx- 
 pcrt,) to go or come down, to descend, e. g. 
 of persons going from a higher to a lower 
 region of country, to the sea-coast, or the 
 like ; with ds c. ace. of place Luke 4, 31. 
 Acts 8, 5. 13, 4. [21, 3] ; d c. gen. of 
 place Luke 9, 37. Acts 15,1. 18,5. 21,10; 
 with ds and OTTO Acts 11, 27. 12, 19; with 
 npos c. ace. of pers. Acts 9, 32. (So c. ds 
 ffl. V. H. 4. 25. Hdian. 1.16. 3.) Of per 
 sons coming from the high sea down to 
 land, c. r Acts 18, 22. 27, 5. So Hdian. 
 4. s. 1. Trop. of divine gifts, James 3, 
 15 <r<xf>i a aWSev KaTtpxop-fvrj, 8ee "* avu >%tv 
 no. 1. 
 
 /caTe<T^WB, aor. 2 KOT<payov, (ea-Suo,) to 
 eat down, to devour, Engl. usually to eat up. 
 
 1. Pr. as animals, c. ace. so Kartyayov, 
 Matt. 13,4 ^X3f ra irfTdva (cat Kartyayev 
 avro. Mark 4, 4. Luke 8, 5. Rev. 12, 4. 
 Sept. for ^35t Gen. 37, 19. Ex. 10, 15. 
 (Palaeph. 4. I /carecrS.) Of persons, e. g. 
 8if3\apioiov KdTcxpaydv, to devour a book, 
 as emblematic of an eager and full know 
 ledge of its contents, Rev. 10. 9. 10 ; comp. 
 Ez. 3, 1. 3, where Sept. for b=X. So 
 Xen. Lac. 15. 4 /corac^. Diod. Sic. 1. 90 
 KaTf(r3. Trop. Karafyayflv TOV filov, to de 
 vour one s substance, to squander, Luke 15, 
 30. So Horn. Od. 15. 12. ^Eschin. 13. 38 
 KaTa<t>aytlt> TTJV trarputav otxnav. 
 
 2. Trop. e. g. of things, as fire, to consume, 
 Rev. 11, 5 /careo-3. 20, 9 /car <. Sept. for 
 b3S , Kareo-3. Is. 29, 6. Joel 2, 5 ; /care(. 
 Lev. 10, 2. Of zeal, John 2, 17 6 fijAos TOV 
 OIKOV arov /care ^aye p.e, quoted from Ps. 69, 
 10 where Sept. for bax . So Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 538 6 fiJXo? avTov Kcn-eo-St ei. Jos. 
 Ant 7. 8. 1. Of persons, e. g. Gal. 5, 15 
 dXXTjXous KdTfvZieiv, i. q. to consume or de 
 stroy one another. (Comp. Sept. for bsj< 
 Is. 9, 12. Xen. An. 4. 8. 14.) In the sense 
 to pillage, to plunder, by extortion, oppres 
 sion, as /carecrS. TWO. 2 Cor. 11, 20 ; ray ot- 
 Kids T>V xvpw" Matt. 23, 13. Mark 12, 40. 
 Luke 20, 47. Comp. Horn. Od. 2. 237. 
 
 Karev^fvva), f. woj, (fi>3wo>,) to guide 
 straight towards or upon any thing ; hence 
 genr. to guide, to direct, e. g. one s way or 
 journey to a place, c. ace. 1 Thess. 3, 11 
 6 Kvpios KdTfvSvvai (optat.) TTJV odov Tjfj.au> 
 TTpos vp-as. So Plut. Alex. M. 33 init. 
 Plato Tim. 44. b. Trop. TOVS n68as ds TTJV 
 686v TJJS dprjvrjs Luke 1, 79 ; TUS Kapdias 
 eir TI 2 Thess. 3, 5. Sept. K. TTJV ooov for 
 1; Hiph. Ps. 5, 9 ; K. TTJV Kapolav for yaH 
 2 Chr. 12, 14. 19, 3. So Plut. ad Princ. in- 
 erud. 2. Plato Legg. 847. a. 
 
 /careuXoyeft), >, f. ^o-a>, ( Ka rd intens.) 
 to bless much, c. ace. Mark 10, 16 in Mss. 
 Plut. de Adul. et Amic. 25. 
 
 /care<i crT77/u, f. o-r^o-w, ( C/>I OTJJ/U,) in 
 N. T. only in aor. 2 KaTfTreVnjv, intrans. to 
 stand forth against ; hence in a hostile sense 
 
 1. q. to rush upon, to assault, c. dat. TQ> 
 
 vXw Acts 18, 12. Comp. e^ tmj/u no. 2. 
 f. /ca3e|, (KOTO intens.) aor. 2 
 , to have and hold fast, to hold 
 firmly. 
 
 1. Genr. in various senses. a) to hold 
 fast or back, to retain, to detain a person, 
 c. ace. Luke 4, 42 KOI KaT(l\ov UVTOV TOV p.fj 
 TTOpfvetrtai. Philem. 13. Sept. for inx Pi. 
 Gen. 24, 56. (Jos. Ant. 7. 4. 1. Xen. Mem. 
 
 2. 6. 9, 11.) In the sense to hinder, to re 
 press, 2 Thess. 2, 6. 7 ; some also Rom. 1, 
 18, see in lett. b. So Plut. Pericl. 18. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 4 bis. b) to have in pos 
 session, to possess, c. ace. 1 Cor. 7, 30 /cat 
 01 dyopdfrvTfs (s p-i) /carf^ower. 2 Cor. G, 
 10. Rom. 1, 18 TWI> rrjv aXj3ftai> tv dBiKia 
 Karf^oi/rcoi , holding the truth in unright 
 eousness, i. e. having a knowledge of the 
 truth but living in idolatry and unrighteous 
 ness, as is explained in the next verses. 
 Sept. for Chald. Aph. V3HX Dan. 7, 18. 22. 
 So ^El. V. H. 7. 1. Pol. 1. 2. 3. Xen. Mem. 
 
 3. 5. 26. c) Trop. to hold fast in one s 
 mind and heart, to keep in mind, c. ace. e. g 
 
Kartjjopea) 
 
 392 
 
 rbv\6yov Luke 8, 15 ; ras TrapaSoVfi? 1 Cor. 
 
 11, 2; TO KaXoV 1 Thess. 5,21; also Heb. 
 3, 6. 14. 10, 23; in memory 1 Cor. 15, 2. 
 So Dion. Hal. Ant. 4. 29. Theophr. Char. 
 26, or 8 ed. Tauchn. d) Pass, to be held 
 fast, i. e. trop. to be bound by a law, / 
 Kareixo /teSa Rom. 7, 6 ; comp. Sept. for 
 ION Gen. 39, 20. Of disease, John 5, 4 
 o> SijTTore KardxcTo vocrrjfjLaTi by whatever 
 disease he was held bound. Sept. and tnx 
 Jer. 13, 21. So Hdian. 1. 12. 1. ib. 1. 4. 19*. 
 Xen. Conv. 1. 10. e) As a nautical term, 
 KOTf^fiv [rrjv vavv] fls rbv alyiaXov, to 
 hold a ship firm towards the land, i. e. to 
 steer towards the land, Acts 27, 40. So 
 Hdot. 7. 188 KareV^f . . . es rbv aryiaXoV. 
 Plut. Thes. 21. Thuc. 8. 23; fully Horn. 
 Od. 11. 455. 
 
 2. Spec, to lay fast hold of, to get posses 
 sion of, to seize, c. ace. Matt. 21, 38 KOTU- 
 o-xw/zei/ TJJV Kkrjpovofjiiav. So to take eagerly, 
 TOV etrxaTov TQTTOV Luke 14, 9. Sept. for 
 lr]8 2 Sam. 4, 10. 20, 9. Hdot. 5. 72. 
 Diod. Sic. 12. 82. Xen. Hell. 2. 1. 2. 
 
 Karr/yopea), o>, f. 170-0), (Kara, dyoptva),) 
 to speak against, espec. before judges, to ac 
 cuse. 
 
 1 . Pr. in a judicial sense, with gen. of per 
 son; Matt. 12, 10 Iva KaTrjyoprjcrcoariv av- 
 TOV. Mark 3, 2. Luke 11, 54. 23,2. 10. 
 John 8, 6. Acts 24, 2. 25, 5. Rev. 12, 10 ; 
 gen. impl. Acts 24, 19. (1 Mace. 7, 6. Luc. 
 Necyom. 11. Xen. An. 5. 8. 1.) With 
 gen. of pers. and ace. of thing, Matth. 5 370. 
 n. iJ. Mark 15, 3 Karijyopovv avrov TroXXa. 
 |v. 4.] Acts 28, 19. (1 Mace. 7, 25. Xen. 
 Hell. 1.7. 14.) Or with gen. of tiling "by at 
 tract. Acts 24, 8. 25, 1 1 . With -rrepl c. gen. 
 of thing Acts 24, 13. (Xen. Hell. 1. 7. 2.) 
 With Kara c. gen. of pers. and gen. of thing 
 by attract. Luke 23, 14. Pass, where the 
 subject is a person, Acts 25, 166 Karrjyo- 
 povp.fvos KT\. and with vno TIVOS Matt. 27, 
 
 12. (Hdot. 7. 205.) Where the subject is 
 a thing, c. ivapd TWOS, Acts 22, 30 TO ri 
 KaTrjyopfiTai. irapa rwv Iov8. So Thuc. 
 1. 95. 
 
 2. Genr. to accuse, to complain of, c. gen. 
 of pers. John 5, 45 bis, pr) SoKtrre OTI e yw 
 Karr]yopr]<Ta> vfJL&v KT\. Rom. 2, 15. Hdian. 
 6. 9. 1. Xen. Hi. 1. 14. 
 
 KaT^yopia, as, 17, (Kanjyopeo),) an ac 
 cusation, e. g. judicial. Luke 6, 7 Iva evpaxrt 
 KaTT/yoplav avrov. John 18, 29. 1 Tim. 5, 
 19. So Jos. Ant. 2. 4. 3. Ml V. H. 11. 
 10. Plato Apol. 19. a. Also i. q. complaint; 
 Tit. 1,6 fv Karriyopia oVcoTi as-. So Xen. 
 Hell. 2. 1. 31. 
 
 ou , 6, (Ka-nryopev,) an ac 
 cuser, John 8, 10. Acts 23, 30. 35. 24, 8. 
 25, 16. 18; of Satan Rev. 12, 10 Rec. 
 comp. in gtd/3oXof. 2 Mace. 4, 5. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 9. 
 
 opos, 6, (KanjyopfatC) an ac 
 cuser, i. e. Satan, Rev. 12, 10 in later edi- 
 ditions for Karrjyopos q. v. Not found in 
 Gr. writers, but expressed by the Rabb. 
 rijPBg.an accuser, Buxtorf Lex. 2009. 
 
 Karrjfpeia, as, 17, (Karrjiprjs, (pdos,) dejec 
 tion, sadness, James 4, 9. Plut. de vit. Pu- 
 dore 1. Thuc. 7. 75. 
 
 Karr/^ea), i, f. 770-0), (foew,) to sound 
 out towards any one, in his ears, Luc. Jup. 
 Trag-. 39. Hence trop. and in N. T. 
 
 1. to teach, to instruct, orally, by the 
 sound of the living voice ; spoken of the 
 oral instruction, preaching, of the apostles 
 and early Christian teachers ; with ace. of 
 pers. 1 Cor. 14, 19 Iva KO\ a\\ovs Karrjxtjo-o). 
 So c. ace. impl. Gal. 6, 6. (Act. Thorn. $ 16.) 
 Pass. c. ace. of thing, Buttm. 134. 6. Acts 
 18, 25 KaTT)xr)iJ.evos TTJV 6$bv TOV Kvpiov. 
 Gal. 6, 6. Also with nepi c. gen. Luke 1, 
 4 ; fK c. gen. Rom. 2, 18. Jos. de Vit. 65 
 ult. Luc. Asin. 48. 
 
 2. Genr. to inform, to apprize of; Pass. 
 to be informed of, to hear by report ; with 
 TTfpi c. gen. Acts 21,21 ; T! nepi TIVOS v. 24. 
 So ttanjXTptls irfpl TU>V a-v^eQ^Karuiv 
 Plut. de Fluv. 17. 1. ib. 21. 4. 
 
 KCUT ISiav, see in I8ios no. ] . b. 
 
 KdTioa), f. a>(r<B, (to o), ioy,) to cause to 
 rust, to corrode with rust ; Pass, to rust out, 
 to be corroded, hyperbol. James 5, 3 6 %pv- 
 Kai 6 (ipyvpos KOTuoTat. Comp. 
 
 Ep. of Jer. 24. Lam. 4, 1. Arr. Epict. 4. 
 16. 14 oW oVXa/Ha fniKfi[j.fva KaTiaTai. 
 
 KaTtcr^ya), f. va-<o, (iV^uw.) to be strong 
 against any one, e. g. a) In a hostile 
 sense, to prevail against or over, to overcome, 
 to vanquish, c. gen. Matt. 16, 18 ov Kari- 
 <rxov<riv avTrjs. So Wisd. 7, 30 Alex. ^El. 
 V. H. 12. 9. Diod. Sic. 1. 24. b) Genr 
 to prevail, to get the upper hand, absol 
 Luke 23, 23. So Jos. Ant. 16. 3. 1. Pol 
 6. 51. 6. 
 
 KarOlK(i)j o>, f. 770-0), (oiWo),) to hoilSf 
 
 down in a place, to dwell. 
 
 1. Pr. with an accus. of place, to dwell 
 fixedly in, to inhabit ; Acts 1,19 TOIJ KUTOI- 
 Kovcnv Ifpov<ra\r]fji. 2, 9. 14. 4, 16. 9, 32. 
 35 TOVS KaToiKovvras A.vS8av. 19, 10. 17. 
 Rev. [12, 12.] 17, 2. Sept. for 3^ Gen. 
 13, 7. 34, 29. So Luc. D. Deor. 18. 1. 
 Diod. Sic. 5. 16. Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 38. Trop. 
 
393 
 
 of God as manifesting his constant presence 
 in the temple, Matt. 23, 21. 
 
 2. Intrans. to dwell fixedly, to inhabit, to 
 reside ; so with t I s c. ace. see in tls no. 4 ; 
 Matt. 2, 23 t\%u>v KaTcaKrja-fv ds TTO\LV Xey. 
 NafapeV. 4, 13, Acts 7 , 4. With tv c. dat. 
 Luke 13.4 KaToiKovvras tv ifpoua. Acts 1, 
 20. 2,5. 7,2.4. 9,22. 11,29. 13,27. 
 Heb. 11,9. Rev. 13, 12.^ With tiri c. gen. 
 eVi T^J yrjs Rev. 3, 10.* 6, 10. 8> 13. 11, 
 10 bis. 13,8. 14 bis. [14,6.] 17,8; c. ace. 
 tn\ nav TO Trpoffwrov TTJS yrjs Acts 17, 26. 
 With TJ-oC, 6Vov, Rev. 2, 13 bis. With e /c 
 Matt. 12, 45. Luke 11, 26 ; impl. Acts 22, 
 12. Sept. for 313? c . tv Gen. 13, 12. 19, 
 29; c. tni Lev. 20, 22. 25, 18. 19; eVcet 
 Gen. 11,2. So c. tv Diod. Sic. 4. 58. Xen. 
 An. 5. 3. 7 ; O.VTOV Palaeph. 31. 11. Trop. 
 of God, see above in no. 1 ; c. tv Acts 7, 48. 
 17, 24. (Sept. and 3izh p s . 2, 4. 9, 12. 
 Test. XII Patr. p. 652.) Of Christ as be 
 ing ever present by his Spirit in the hearts 
 of Christians, tv TOLS KapStais V/JL&V Eph. 3, 
 1 7 ; and so TO TrXqpw/iu TTJS 3etoT7jros which 
 was in Jesus, c. tv Col. 2, 9. 1, 19. Of 
 the spirit or disposition of mind, James 4, 5. 
 Also 17 8iKaioa-vvj] 2 Pet. 3,13; comp. Sept. 
 Jer. 32, 16. 
 
 KdTOlKrja lS) fwj, rj, (/caTotKf o>,) a dwell 
 ing, habitation, abode, Mark 5, 3. Sept. for 
 3TOV3 Gen. 10, 30. Plut. Lysand. 28 med. 
 Plato Tim. 71. b. 
 
 KdTOlKr/Tijplov, ov, TO, (KOTOI/WOD,) a 
 dwelling-place, dwelling, e. g. TOV Seov, as 
 being ever present by his Spirit in the 
 hearts of Christians, Eph. 2, 22 ; K. daip.6- 
 vw Rev. 18, 2. Sept for "psa Nah. 2, 1 1 ; 
 rrain Ex. 12, 20 ; na 2 Chr. 6, 30. 
 
 KdTOlKia, as, T], (icaToiKfa).) a dwelling, 
 habitation, abode, Acts 17, 26. Sept. for 
 sa-io Ex. 35, 3. Lev. 3, 17. Pol. 5. 78. 5. 
 Plut. M. Anton. 16 bis. 
 
 KdTOTTTpl^O), f. io~a>, ((caTOTTTpoi , COmp. 
 eo-orrrpoi/,) to show as in a mirror, Plut. de 
 placit. Philosoph. 3. 5 ult. Mid. to look in 
 a mirror, to behold as in a mirror, Diog. 
 Laert. de Plat. 3. 39 TOIJ p-eSvovcri o-wfj3o^- 
 \tvf KaToirTpieo- 5ai. Artemid. 2. 7. In 
 N. T. Mid. to behold as in a mirror, c. ace. 
 
 2 Cor. 3, 18 TTjV 86aV KVpLOV KaTOTTTptfo - 
 
 p.f voi, i. e. beholding the glory of the Lord 
 as reflected and radiant in the gospel, in 
 antith. to v. 15. So Philo 2 Alleg. p. 79. e, 
 un8e KciTOTrTpicraifJ.rv tv XX(i) TLVL TTJV (rr/v 
 I8tav T] tv o-oi TW Sew. Lojsner Obs. p. 304. 
 
 KClTOpjCtifAd) OTOS, TO, (fcaTopSoco.) any 
 thing rightly done, a right action. Lat. recte 
 
 faclum, Plut. de Stoic, repugn. 11, 15. Cic. 
 de Fin. 3. 7. In N. T. any thing success 
 fully done or arranged, a worthy deed or 
 measure ; Acts 24, 3 KaTopSco/icrrooi/ ywop.e- 
 viuv TW eSi/ft TOUTO) KT\. many excellent 
 arrangements having been made for this 
 nation, i. e. in reference to the government 
 and institutions, spoken in flattery to Felix. 
 So 3 Mace. 3, 23 Karacrrpfya.!. TCI KaTopSco- 
 p.aTa. Oftener of military deeds, achieve 
 ments, Pol. 1. 19. 12. Diod. Sic. 5. 20. 
 Plut. Camill. 37 bis. Not used by earlier 
 writers, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 250 sq. 
 
 /caret), adv. (caTa,) down, downwards. 
 Comparat. KaTWTe pw Matt. 2, 16. 
 
 1. Of place. a) Place whither, imply 
 ing motion down ; Matt. 4, 6 /3aXe a-eavTov 
 KOTO). Luke 4, 9. John 8, 6. 8. Acts 20, 9. 
 Sept. for iiMTsb Ecc. 3, 21. Is. 37, 31. 
 Hdian. 3. 11. 5. Xen. An. 4. 8. 20. 
 
 b) Place where, below, underneath ; Mark 
 14, 66 lv T// avKfj KCITW. Acts 2, 19. Matt. 
 27, 51. Mark 15, 38. Sept. for HKsb Ez. 
 1, 27 ; RTO Ez. 31, 16. So Hdian. 8. 3. 1. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 7. With art. 6, TJ, TO KOTO), 
 as adj. that which is below, the low, earthly, 
 John 8, 23. Buttm. 125. 6. So Jos. B. J. 5. 
 4. 1 T) KOTO) Tro Xif. Diod. Sic. 1. 49. Thuc. 
 1. 120. 
 
 2. Of time, comparat. Matt. 2, 16 ajro 
 SieTovs Acal /caTcoTepw of two years old and 
 under, q. d. lower down. Sept. Kara for 
 n-j^b i Chr. 27, 23. Diod. Sic. 1. 3 KUTO,- 
 Ttpca, JE1. V. H. 3. 17 /caTw. 
 
 KaT(t)T6po$, a ; ov, comparat. (KOTW,; 
 lower down, lower. Eph. 4, 9 KCIT^ ds TO. 
 KdTWTfpa fjifprj TTJS yrjs he descended into the 
 lower parts of the earth, i. e. to aons, blX iJ 
 implying that Christ became subject to death ; 
 comp. 1, 20. Sept. tls TO. naTuiraTa TTJS yfjs 
 
 for f-ixn niitnnns, i. e . Sheol, Ps. 63, 10 ; 
 comp. Ez. 26, 20. Also Sept. KtmoTepo? for 
 
 pnnn i K. 9, 17. 
 
 KdTO)repu>j see in KCITV. 
 
 Kavoa, as, fj, Vulg. Cauda, pr. n. of an 
 island near Crete, Acts 27, 16 Lachm. for 
 Rec. KXavST/, where see more. 
 
 KdVfid, aTos,To, (*auo.) a burning, glow, 
 heat, Rev. 7, 16. 16, 9. Sept. for ch Gen. 
 8, 22. Epict. Ench. 29. 2. Xen. Mem. 4. 
 3. 9. 
 
 KdV/JtaTlfo, f. i o-<0, (*ca{)p.a,) to burn, to 
 scorch, c. ace. Rev. 16, 8 ; Pass. Matt. 13, 
 6. Mark 4, 6. Rev. 16, 9. Arr. Epict. 1. 6. 
 26. Plut. conjug. Praec. 12. 
 
 AcaOcri?, fajy, fj, (KCU CO,) a burning, burn 
 ing up. Heb. 6, 8 r/s TO Te Xoy tls KOVCTIV, 
 
Kavaoo/j,ai 394 
 
 i. e. the end of which is to be burned. Sept. 
 for ira Pi. inf. Is. 40, 16. 44. 15. Plut. 
 de tuend. Sanit. Prac. 9. Plato Rep. 406. d. 
 
 KOAJCTOOfACLl) ovuai, (KaO<7ij,) only Pass. 
 to be set on fire, to burn, 2 Pet. 3, 10. 12. 
 Trop. of a fever, Gal. et Dioscor. 
 
 Kavc7(t)V, cavos, 6, (Kat o), Kavcrio,) a burn 
 ing, heat, e. g. of the sun, Matt. 20, 12. 
 Luke 12, 55. James 1,11. So Ecclus. 18, 16. 
 Luc. Philops. 25. Artemid. III. p. 73. b. 
 Others in James 1. c. a scorching wind, i. e. 
 the wind from the Arabian desert, as Sept. 
 for 6i7i2 Job 27, 21 ; also avf^os Kava-av 
 for 61712 m-> Jer. 18, 17. Ez. 17, 10. 
 The Arabs also call this wind Shurkiyeh 
 (Sirocco) pr. east wind, though it comes 
 mostly from the southern quarter ; see Heb. 
 Lex. art. 61715 . Bibl. Res. in Palest. I. p. 
 305, comp. p. 287. 
 
 KaVTr/piai^Q), {. dcra>, (Kavrrjpiov, Kat w,) 
 to cauterize, to brand with a hot iron ; Pass. 
 OJY~ 1 Tim. 4, 2 KeKavTypiacrfj.fi>oi.Tr)v I8iav crvv- 
 fi8r]0fv branded in their oivn consciences, 
 having the marks, stigmata, of their guilt 
 burnt in upon ^heir consciences ; i. e. being 
 ever conscious of their guilt like branded 
 criminals. Hesych. K(KavrTjpiacrp.evof pf) 
 fXotTfs TTJV crvvfidrjcriv vyirj. Comp. Diod. 
 Sic. 20. 54 Toif ^vxals TU>V vo~ov eocrTrep 
 KavTTjpid nva Trpocrrj yf. Cic. de Off. 3. 21, 
 qui conscientiae labes et vulnera in animo 
 habent. 
 
 Kair^aofiai, up.ai, f. rjcrop.ai, Mid. depon. 
 (kindr. ai^e cu,) 2 pers. pres. Kavxacrai Rom. 
 2, 17. 23 ; see Buttm. 103. III. 1, marg. 
 Winer 13. 2. b. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 360. 
 To boast, to vaunt oneself, to glory, to exult, 
 to rejoice, both in a good and bad sense ; 
 e. g. absol. 1 Cor. 1, 29. 31 6 Kavx^^fvos. 
 4,7. [13, 3.] 2 Cor. 10,13.17. 11,18.30. 12, 
 1.6.11. Gal. 6, 14. Eph. 2,9. With accus. 
 of thing as to which or of which one boasts, 
 comp. Buttm. $ 131. 7, 8. 2 Cor. 9, 2 fjv . . . 
 Kavx&pai MaKfSocnv. 11, 30; ace. of de 
 gree 11, 16. With fv c. dat. of that in 
 which one glories, e. g. of things Rom. 2, 
 23 os ev VO/JLCO Kavxacrai. 5, 3. 2 Cor. 5, 12. 
 10, 15. 16. 11, 12. 12,9. Gal. 6, 13. James 
 1, 9. 4, 16 ; of persons, Rom. 2, 17 tv Sew. 
 5, 11. 1 Cor. 1, 31. 3, 21. 2 Cor. 10, 17. 
 Phil. 3, 3. 2 Thess. 1,4. With eVi c. dat. 
 Rom. 5, 2 fir e^TTt St. So with Kara c. ace. 
 as to any thing, 2 Cor. 11, 18; irepi c. 
 gen. 2 Cor. 10, 8 ; inrep c. gen. 2 Cor. 7, 
 14 virip vpaiv K. 9, 2. 12, 5 bis. Sept. ab 
 sol. for !i27n 1 Sam. 2, 3 ; for ^H 1 ? 1 "! 
 c.- ace. Prov. 27, 1 ; c. Iv Jer. 9, 22. 23 ; 
 c. iirl Prov. 25, 14. Find. Ol. 9. 58 ; c. 
 
 firi Ecclus. 30, 2. Diod. Sic. 16. 70 ; c. ace. 
 Lucian. Ocyp. 120 ; c. dat. Hdot. 7. 39. 
 
 Kav^T) fJ,a, aros, TO, (Kavxafyai,) a boast 
 ing, glorying, exulting, rejoicing, i. e. 
 
 1. Pr. the act of glorying, exulting, re 
 joicing, in any thing ; c. gen. Heb. 3, 6 TO 
 Kavxnp.a rrjs eXiridos, i. e. the hope in which 
 we rejoice. So vtrtp rivos 2 Cor. 5, 12. 
 9, 3 ; absol. 1 Cor. 5, 6. Plut. Agesi. 31. 
 Find. Isth. 5. 65. 
 
 2. Meton. boast, object of boasting; ground 
 of glorying, of exultation, of rejoicing; Rom. 
 4, 2 e xfi Kai>xT)p.a. 1 Cor. 9, 15. 16. 2 Cor. 
 1, 14. Gal. 6, 4. Phil. 1, 26. 2, 16. Sept. 
 for nlbi-in Deut. 10,21. Jer. 17, 14 ; rnxstn 
 Prov.Y?; 6. Ecclus. 10, 22. 
 
 KaVfflcns, eo)y, 17, (/cau^aojLiat.) a boast 
 ing, glorying, exulting, rejoicing, i. q. K av- 
 Xnp-a, but found only in late writers. 
 
 1. Pr. the act of glorying, exulting, re 
 joicing, in any thing; 2 Cor. 7, 14 TJ Kai/xr;- 
 a-is Tjp.>v f] eVi TtVou. 2 Cor. 7, 4. 9,4. 11, 
 17. 1 Thess. 2, 19 crrttpavos Kavxrja-ffos, 
 i. e. the crown in which we glory, rejoice. 
 James 4, 1 6. So vnep TWOS 2 Cor. 8, 24. 
 Sept. (TTf(p. Kavxricrfvs for rpiXSFl Prov. 16, 
 31. Ez. 16, 12. 23,42. 
 
 2. Meton. boast, object of boasting ; ground 
 of glorying, of exultation, of rejoicing; Rom. 
 3, 27 TTOV ovv rj Kavxyo-is ; 2 Cor. 1, 12. 11, 
 10; ev Xptorw Rom. 15, 17; virep vfjitav 
 2 Cor. 7, 4. So 1 Cor. 15, 31 w? TTJV vpt- 
 rtpav Kavxncriv f]v e xaj, i. q. TTJV Kaiixfja-iv 
 virep vp.cav v. tv v/itv. Sept. Jer. 12, 13. 
 Etymol. Mag. 400. 38. 
 
 , wv, al, Cenchrea, the east 
 ern port of Corinth, about 70 stadia from 
 the city; Acts 18, 18. Rom. 16, 1. Comp. 
 Strabo 8. p. 380. 
 
 KeSpos, ov, f), the cedar, Heb. fnx , i. e. 
 cedrus coniferus or pinus cedrus, a tree 
 celebrated in O. T. and growing chiefly on 
 Mount Lebanon ; at the present day the 
 number is greatly reduced ; see Bibl. Res. 
 in Palest. III. p. 440. (Horn. Od. 5. 60. ^El. 
 V. H. 5. 6.) Not found in N. T. except in 
 the false reading TOV x fl P^PP ov T ^ v Kf8pa>v 
 John 18, 1 Rec. See in KeSpcoi/. 
 
 KeSpwv, <$, indec. Cedron, Heb. *|1"i^ 
 (the turbid) Kidron, Josephus KeSptoj/, a>vos . 
 Ant. 8. 1. 5 ; pr. n. of a winter-torrent (^e/- 
 /j.appos ) which begins a little northwest of 
 Jerusalem, and flows through the valley of 
 Jehoshaphat between the city and the mount 
 of Olives, <pdpay rov KtSpuvos Jos. Ant. 
 9. 7. 3. B. J. 5. 4. 2. The valley continues 
 
395 
 
 some distance directly south and then south 
 eastwardly by the convent of St. Saba to 
 the Dead Sea. It is always dry except in 
 the rainy season after very heavy rains. 
 See Bibl. Res. in Palest. I. p. 396-402. 
 In N. T. John 18, 1 6 x f ip- a PP os T v Ke8pcav, 
 the brook (torrent) of Cedron. So Sept. 6 
 xdp-. Kefyxoi/ for Heb. IVVip 2 K. 15, 13. 
 23, 6. 12. 2 Chr. 29, 10. al. Jos. Ant. 6 
 XtifJL. KeSpwvos Ant. 8. 1.5. Out of this 
 name, later transcribers unacquainted with 
 the Hebrew have made 6 x ^f JLa PP os v 
 Kfo~pcov,the brook of cedars, John 18, 1 Rec. 
 and also in Sept. 2 Sam. 15,23. 1 K. 15, 13. 
 Keifiat, f- Kfia-op-ai, to lie ; also to be laid, 
 i. q. Perf. Pass, of Ti3??/it, see Buttm. j 109. 
 II. 4. 
 
 1. to lie, to recline, of persons, e. g. an 
 infant lv rfj (pdrvrj Luke 2, 12. 16 ; a dead 
 body Matt. 28, 6. Luke 23, 53. John 11, 41. 
 20,12. (Hdian.2. 1.19. Xen. An. 1. 8. 27.) 
 Of things, Luke 24, 12 TO faovia Ktlpfva 
 Hova. John 20, 5. 6. 7. 21, 9; with eVt c. 
 ace. 2 Cor. 3, 15. So c. eV Palseph. 46. 3. 
 Luc. Pise. 41. 
 
 2. As Perf. Pass, of Tt3;/u, to be laid, set, 
 placed, e. g. as a foundation 1 Cor. 3, 11 ; 
 a throne Rev. 4, 2 ; vessels John 2, 6. 19, 
 29. (Xen. An. 7. 3. 23.) With irpos n to be 
 laid to or at, as the stroke of an axe, Matt. 
 3, 10. Luke 3, 9. Also to be laid up, repo- 
 sited, Luke 12, 19. (Xen. CEc. 7. 36.) Of 
 a place, to be set, situated, to lie, Rev. 21, 16 
 iroXts Tfrpdywos KftTeu. Matt. 5. 14. So 
 2 Mace. 4, 33. Hdian. 3. 1. 11. Xen. An. 
 5. 4. 15. Trop. of persons, to be set, ap 
 pointed, c. tls final, for any thing Luke 2, 
 34. Phil. 1, 16. 1 Thess. 3, 3. Of laws, to 
 be given, made, c. dat. 1 Tim. 1,9. So Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 4. 16. 
 
 3. to be laid, situated, in any state or 
 condition durably, i. q. to Iw, to be ; c. eV, 
 1 John 5, 19 6 KoV/ioy Ktlrai tv TW irovrjpa, 
 is wholly given to wickedness. 2 Mace. 3, 
 11. 4, 31. Hdot. 2. 171 ; comp. Horn. 3e&)j/ 
 (V yovvacri KtiTai Od. 1 . 267, 400. 
 
 Kecpta, as, 17, o- band, bandage, for swath 
 ing infants or dead bodies, Moscoph. Ktipia 
 6 TUV iT?7ricoj> Sf fffios, rjyovv t) KOIVUS (pao-Kta, 
 rat 3 Setr^ouo-t TOVS vticpovs. In N. T. only 
 of a dead body, Plur. John 1 1, 44 ; comp. ra 
 o3oW John 20, 5. So Origen ad Joh. 1. c. 
 tefipiai vfKpaiv fieri 8cr/iot. 
 
 Kelpw, f. Kfpv, pr. to shear, to clip, c. 
 ace. e. g. a sheep Acts 8, 32, from Is. 53, 7 
 where Sept. for m . Spec, the head, to cut 
 off the hair, Acts 18, 18 Kfipdp.cvos rfjv *ce- 
 hating shorn his head, i. e. having 
 
 had it shorn. 1 Cor. 11,6 bis. So Sept, 
 for ita Job 1, 20. Jer. 7, 28 ; nia 2 Sam. 14, 
 26. ^El. V. H. 3. 19. Xen. Hell. 1. 7. 8. 
 
 aros, TO, ((ceXevco.) a call, 
 cry, shout, of command, incitement, urging 
 on; 1 Thess. 4, 16 6 Kvpios tv KeXeva/nart, 
 eV <pa)VTJ apxayyi\ov rat tv crdXTTtyyt 3eov, 
 KaTaj3f)creTai arc oiipavov. Of the shout of 
 sailors at the oar Luc. Catapl. 19; of sol 
 diers rushing to battle Thuc. 3. 14; of a 
 multitude Diod. Sic. 3. 15; of a huntsman 
 to his dogs Xen. Yen. 6. 20. 
 
 K\eva), f. evcrw, pr. to urge or drive on, 
 pdo-riyi KfXeveiv Horn. II. 23. 642 ; comp. 
 Passow s. v. In N. T. and genr. to exhort, 
 to command, to order something to be done ; 
 so with ace. and infin. aor. Matt. 14, 19 nt- 
 \fv<ras rovs o^Xour dvaK\i^ir)i>ai. "V. 28. 18, 
 25. 27, 58. 64. Luke 18, 40. Acts 4, 15. 
 8,38. 22,30. 23, 10. 25,6. 17; ace. impl. 
 Matt. 8, 18. 14, 9. Acts 5, 34. 12, 19. 21, 
 33. (Judith 12, 1. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 9; ace. 
 impl. Diod. Sic. 4. 61.) With ace. and inf. 
 pres. Acts 21, 34 eWXeucre uyecrSat ILVTOV. 
 22, 24. 23, 3. 35. 24, 8. 25, 21. 27, 43 ; 
 ace. impl. Acts 16, 22. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 17 ; 
 c. ace. impl. Hdian. 2. 3. 8. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 
 2.) With dat. and inf. apr. Matt. 15, 35 
 /cat fKtXfvart rols o^Xots dvanfVfiv. Absol. 
 Acts 25, 23. So Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 9; absol. 
 1. 4. 18. 
 
 KVo8oj;ia, as, r], (Kev68o^os,) vain-glo 
 ry, empty pride, Phil. 2, 3. Wisd. 14, 14. 
 Luc. D. Mort. 10. 8. Pol. 3. 81. 9. 
 
 o9, ou, 6, f), adj. (xevos, 8oa,) 
 vain-glorious, full of empty pride and ambi 
 tion, Gal. 5, 26. Pol. 27. 6. 12. ib. 39. 1. 1. 
 
 T), 6v, empty, opp. to Tj-Xfjpjjs full, 
 e. g. TroXt? dj/3pa>7r<ot> Kevrj Hdian. 8. 1.9. 
 Xen. An. 1. 8. 20. In N. T. 
 
 1 . Pr. as avrbv . . . aTreoreiXai/ KCVOV, i. e. 
 with empty hands, having nothing, Mark 
 12,3. Luke 1,53. 20, 10. 11. Sept. for 
 Cp-n Gen. 31, 42. Deut. 15, 13. Judith 
 l/ll". Plut. Camill. 11. Plato Rep. 370. e. 
 
 2. Trop. empty, rain, i. e. a) fruitless, 
 without utility or success, Acts 4, 25 rat 
 Xaot t/jLeXtTTja-av Kevd. 1 Cor. 15, 10 fj %d- 
 pis ov itevr] (yfvrfir). 15, 14 bis. 58. 1 Thess. 
 2, 1. So (Is Kfvov in vain 2 Cor. 6, 1. 
 Gal. 2, 2. Phil. 2, 16 bis. 1 Thess. 3, 5. 
 Sept. for D|rn Is. 55, 11 ; osx Job 7, 6; 
 (Is K. for K-jttft" Jer. 6, 29. 18, 15. So Plut. 
 de and. Poet 1 pen. Dem. 306. ult. ds K. 
 Diod. Sic. 19. 9. b) Of that in which 
 there is nothing of truth or reality, empty, 
 false, fallacious, e. g. Kfvoi Xoyot Eph. 5, 6 ; 
 
Kevcxpcovia 
 
 <. drrd-ni Col. 2, 8: Sept. for iUi Ex. 5, 9 ; 
 2T3 Hos. 12, 1. (Dem. 19. 11. Plato Legg. 
 683. e.) Of persons, vain, foolish, James 
 2, 20. So Arr. Epict. 2. 19. 8. 
 
 words, vain babblings, fruitless disputation, 
 1 Tim. 6, 20. 2 Tim. 2, 16. Some Mss. 
 read iauvo<frwia. Hesych. Ktvofpovias p,a- 
 TaioXoyias. 
 
 Kevow, u, f. o)o-o), (Kfvos,) to empty, to 
 make empty, Pass. Jer. 14, 2. Luc. Alex. 36 
 ni oiKiai (Keva>%Tjo-av.. Thuc. 8. 57. In N. 
 T. only trop. 
 
 1. In the phrase KCVOVV eavTov, to empty 
 oneself, i. e. to lay aside rightful dignity and 
 attributes by descending to an inferior con 
 dition, to humble oneself; Phil. 2, 7 eicevcoo-e 
 eavTov, i. q. eVaTretVoxrep envrov in v. 8. So 
 Sept. Kfvos for p"i Neh. 5, 13. Orig. Ho- 
 rnil. in Jer. 1, 7. 
 
 2. to make empty, vain, fruitless; Pass. 
 Rom. 4, 14 KfKfvtaTai rj TTIOTIS. 1 Cor. 1, 17. 
 Hence to make void, to falsify, i. e. to show 
 to be without ground, fallacious, e. g. KO.V- 
 XWa 1 Cor. 9, 15. Pass. 2 Cor. 9, 3. 
 Hesych. Kevw^ifj paTaios aTro^av^. 
 
 tcevrpov, ov, TO, (Keireo>.) a point, prick, 
 sting, e. g. 
 
 1. a sling, as of locusts, scorpions, Rev. 
 9, 10. So of bees, JE1. V. H. 1. 60. Plato 
 Phaed. 91. c. Trop. as a thing of venom, 
 venomous weapon, ascribed to death per 
 sonified; 1 Cor. 15,55. 56 TTOV aov, Sawrre, 
 ro Kevrpov ; ... TO Be Kfvrpov TOV SavaTov f] 
 dfj-apTia, i. e. the sting, that by which death 
 destroys, viz. sin ; quoted laxly from Sept. 
 rlos. 13, 14 where Heb. sap plague, pes 
 tilence ; comp. Hos. 5, 12. 
 
 2. a goad, stimulus, i. e. a rod or staff 
 with an iron point for urging on horses, 
 oxen, etc. pr. Horn. II. 23. 387, 430. Xen. 
 Oyr. 7. 1. 29. In N. T. only in the pro 
 verbial expression jrpos Ktvrpa \aKTifiv, to 
 kick against the goads, i.e. to offer vain and 
 rash resistance, Acts 9, 5. 26, 14. So in 
 Greek and Rom. writers, .^Eschyl. Agam. 
 1624. Find. Pyth. 2. 174. Lat. adi-ersum 
 stimulum calcare Terent. Phorm. 1. 2. 28; 
 contra acumina calcitrare Amm. Marc. 
 18. 5. 
 
 KVTVpla)V, ww?, 6, Lat. centurio, a 
 centurion, originally the commander of a 
 hundred foot-soldiers, i. q. eKaTovrap^os, 
 Mark 15, 39. 44. 45. See Adam s Rom. 
 A;. .. p. 370. Diet, of Antt. art. Exercitus, 
 p. 504. 
 
 KevSy?, adv. (/cevdr,) vainly, in vain, to 
 no purpose, James 4, 5. Sept. for p" 1 "?? 
 
 396 
 
 icepas 
 
 Is. 49, 4. Arr. Epict. 2. 17. G. Plut. de 
 
 rect. rat. audiend. 6. 
 
 / f 
 
 /cepaia, as, n, (mpas,) pr. a little horn ; 
 hence a point, extremity, e. g. of a sail-yard 
 Luc. Navig. 4. Pol. 14. 10. 11 ; of an island 
 Philostr. Vit. Sophist. 1. 21. 2. In N. T. a 
 point, apex of a letter, e. g. of 3 i i 3 i 
 put for the least particle, tittle, Matt. 5, 18. 
 Luke 16, 17. Philo in Flacc. p. 984. b. 
 Plut. non posse suav. viv. sec. Epic. 18 
 fryo/JLaxeiv nepl eruXXa/3o)i /cat Ktpmcav. 
 
 Kepafj,evS) (cos. 6, (Ktpap.os,) a potter, 
 Matt. 27, 7. 10. Rom. 9, 21. Sept. for 1211 
 Is. 29, 16. Pol. 15. 35. 2. Plato Rep. 
 421. a. 
 
 evy.) of or made 
 ly a potter; Rev. 2,27 o-Kfvr) ra KepapiKii 
 a potter s vessels, quoted from Ps. 2, 9 where 
 Sept. a-Kevos Kfpa/J.fws for "iS H ^3 . Pint. 
 de genio Socr. 20 mid. Kfpauixol rpo^oi. 
 Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 147. 
 
 KepajJiiov, ov, TO, (pr. neut. of adj. Ktpd- 
 P.IOS earthen Xen. An. 3. 4. 7,) an earthen 
 vessel, i. e. a pot, pitcher, jar; e. g. Kepd- 
 P.LOV vftaros, a jar of water, Mark 14, 13. 
 Luke 22, 10. Sept. for 5-12 a Jer. 35, 5. 
 Plut. CatoMin. 46. Xen. An /G. 1.15. 
 
 KepafAO?, ov, 6, (perh. Kfpdvwfj.i, ) pr. 
 potter s clay, Hdian. 3. 9. 10 ; an earthen 
 vessel i. q. Kepdpiov Hdot. 3. 6. In N. T. 
 a tile, of burnt clay, for covering roofs, 
 Luke 5, 19. So Hdian. 7. 12.11. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 1. 7. 
 
 Kepdi>vv[JU, f. Kfpdo-o),Pass.perf. KfKtpa- 
 0-fj.ai Buttm. ^114. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 582; 
 to mix, to mingle, genr. Diod. Sic. 2. 26. 
 Xen. Ath. 2. 8 ; spec, wine with water or 
 spices, Sept. for T|O Is. 5, 22. Prov. 9, 2. 
 5. Xen. An. 1. 2. 13. In N. T. trop. of 
 the wine of God s wrath, which is mingled, 
 prepared, poured out in a cup ; see in 3v/xos 
 and Heb. Lex. art. c^ ; so Rev. 18, 6 bis, V 
 TO) 7TOTT)pta>, to (Ktpao~{, Kfpdo~aTe ai/Tr; $t- 
 TrXow, comp. 17, 2. 4. Spec, to pour out, 
 to Jill a cup, with the wine already prepared ; 
 Pass. Rev. 14, 10 irifrai e /c TOV o ivov TOU 
 %vp.ov TOV Seov, TOU KfKfpao-p.fvov aKparov 
 (v TO) TroTTjpitit KT\. Comp. Horn. Od. 5. 93 
 Kfpacro-f 8f vfKTap tpvZpov, where Eustath. 
 oi 8rj\ol Kpa/jid Ti, aXX a^rt TOV eVe^ee Kfl- 
 Tai. 
 
 Kepas, OTOS, TO, Plur. Ta nepara uncuu 
 tracted, Buttm. \ 54. n. 1 ; a horn. 
 
 1. Pr. of a beast, Rev. 5, 6. 12. 3. 13, 
 1 bis. 11. 17, 3. 7. 12. 16. Sept. for ^ 
 Gen. 22, 13. Dan. 7, 7. 8. So ^El. H. An. 
 12. 19, 20. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 9. From the 
 
tcepariov 
 
 397 
 
 Heb. a horn is put as the symbol of strength, 
 power, the figure being taken from the bull 
 and other animals that push with the horns, 
 Sept. and yiJ3 Jer. 48, 25. Ps. 75, 11. Ec- 
 clus. 47, 5. 7. 11. Hence meton. Luke 1, 
 69 Ktpas <r<TT]pias a horn of deliverance, 
 i. q. a strong deliverer. Sept. and Heb. 
 iJti-i T) Ps. 18, 3. 2 Sam. 22, 3. See 
 Heb. Lex! ,^. 
 
 2. Trop. of any extremity, projecting 
 point, resembling a horn, e. g. upon the 
 four corners of the Jewish altars, Rev. 9, 
 13. Comp. Ex. 27, 2 sq. where Sept. and 
 "Hi? ; see Heb. Lex. "ftp. c. Of the wing 
 of an army 2 Mace. 15, 20. Xen. Cyr. 2. 
 4. 29. 
 
 Kepdrtov, ov, TO, (dimin. of Kfpas,) pr. 
 a little horn ; in N. T. a pod, carob-pod, Luke 
 15, 16, i. e. the fruit of the carob tree, Rabb. 
 1*1 H , Arab, khariib, Gr. Ktparfia (horn- 
 tree), the ceratonia siliqua of Linn. Germ. 
 Johannisbrod-baum. This tree is common in 
 Syria and in the southern parts of Europe, 
 and sometimes grows very large. It produces 
 long slender pods shaped like a horn or sic 
 kle, containing a sweetish pulp and several 
 small brown shining seeds like beans. These 
 pods are sometimes eight or ten inches long 
 and a finger broad. They are eaten with 
 relish by the poorer classes in the East ; 
 and swine are often fed with them. See 
 Buxtorf. Lex. 821. Bibl. Res. in Pal. III. 
 p. 58. Celsii Hierob. I. p. 226. Galen, de 
 fac. Aliment. II. 
 
 ), f. avia, (fcepSoj,) later fut. 
 K(pBr)(Top.ai, aor. 1 (KtpSrja-a, Buttm. 5 114. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 740 ; Pass. fut. 1 K fp8rj- 
 Sijo-o/iai. For the anom. 3 plur. fut. Subj. 
 Kfpb^fjo-favrai 1 Pet. 3, 1 in some editions, 
 a corrupt form of the later Greek, see Wi 
 ner } 13. 1. e. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 721. To 
 gain, to acquire as gain, to win. 
 
 1. Pr. of things, c. ace. e. g. rbv Koo-pov 
 oXoi/, the wealth of the whole world, Matt. 
 16, 26. Mark 8, 36. Luke 9, 25. In trade, c. 
 ace. Matt. 25, [16.] 17. 20. 22; absol. James 
 4, 13. So JE.L V. H. 2. 19. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 9. 4. Spoken of avoiding any loss or evil, 
 to gain, i. e. to save, to be spared from, to 
 woid, c. ace. Acts 27, 21 Ktpoija-ai. (&) 
 rrfv vftpiv Tavrrjv KT\. and so to have saved 
 (avoided} this loss. So Jos. Ant. 2. 3. 2. 
 Heliodor. 4. 10. Luc. Tyrann. 8. 
 
 2. Trop. of persons, to gain, to win any 
 one, i. e. a) As a friend or patron, e. g. 
 Xpio-TdV Phil. 3, 8 ; rbv do(\<poi> Matt. 18, 
 15. b) to gain over to one s side ; in N. 
 T. to win over to Christ and thus bring to 
 
 salvation, 1 Cor. 9, 19. 20 bis. 21. 22, wnere 
 it is i. q. <ro>fo> in v. 22. 1 Pet. 3, 1, comp. 
 1 Cor. 7, 16 where it is <ro>co. 
 
 Kpoo$] tos, ovs, TO. gain, profit, Phil. 1, 
 21. 3, 7. Tit. 1, 11. Luc. de Merc. cond. 
 40. Plato Le. 835. b. 
 
 OTOS, TO, (neipa,*) pr. a smalt, 
 piece, bit ; hence collect, small coin, change, 
 John 2, 15. Jos. B. J. 2. 14. 6. Dem. 
 549. 27. 
 
 a money-changer, broker, John 2, 14, i. q. 
 KoXXvj3io-Tjjj in Matt. 21, 12. The annual 
 tribute of each Jew to the temple was a 
 Jewish half-shekel, Ex. 30, 13 sq. and this 
 the money-changers, sitting in the porticos 
 of the outer court, furnished to the people 
 as they came up, in exchange for Greek 
 and Roman coins. At the present day, in 
 oriental cities, money-changers are found 
 in, the most public places, sitting at little 
 tables covered with various coins. Comp. 
 art. Tpcm(iTT)s, also Buxtorf. Lex. Rab. 
 2032. 
 
 K(pa\atOV : ov, TO, (K((paXdios, KffpdXf],} 
 a small head, capitulum, e. g. of a bird 
 Diod. Sic. 3. 28. In N. T. and genr. trop. 
 the head, i. e. 
 
 1. the chief thing, main point. Heb. 8, 1 
 Kf(pd\aiov 8e eVt TOIS Xeyo/ieVoty, i. e. the 
 great and essential point in what is now 
 said. So Suidas in reference to this pas 
 sage, K((puXaiov eKfl TO peytcrTov X/yerat. 
 Luc. Vit. Auct. 23. Dem. 520. 27. Plato 
 Legg. 643. C, KecfraXaiov 8f] TrmSeiaj Xeyo- 
 p.fv TTJV opSrjV Tpofpjjv. 
 
 2. the sum, amount, in computing, sum 
 ming up, Theophr. Char. 25 [14]. Thuc. 1. 
 36. Xen. Cyr. 6. 3. 18. Hence of money. 
 a sum, capital ; Acts 22, 28 TroXXou M cpa- 
 Xalou TTJV 7ro\LTfiav TavTTjv fKTTjcrdfiijv. Sept. 
 and taxi Lev. 5, 24 [6, 5]. So Jos. Ant 
 12. 2. 3 med. ^Eschin. 68. 26. 
 
 K<f)a\aiOQ), ), f. <uo-o), (KffpaXaiov,) to 
 sum up, Thuc. 3. 67. In N. T. i. q. Kf<pa- 
 Xi o>, to smite or ivound on the head, c. ace. 
 Mark 12, 4 Kanelvov XtSo/SoXijcrai^-fs 1 (Ktffra- 
 \aiuxrav, comp. Luke 20, 12 where it is 
 Tpavp-aTicravres. See Lob. ad Phyrn. p. 95. 
 
 Ke^aXijj JJy, f), the head. 1. Pr. of 
 man, Matt. 6, 17. 8, 20. 27, 30. Luke 7, 
 38 ; as cut off Matt. 14, 11. Mark 6, 27 ; of 
 
 ^animals Rev. 9, 17. 19. 12, 3. al. Sept. 
 
 for ttJJO Gen. 3, 15. 40, 19. So Hdian. 
 4. 8. 4. Xen. An. 2. 6. i. Synecd. 
 as the principal part, put emphatically for 
 the whole person, Acts 18, 6 TO cu/ia i-juo) 
 
tce(j)a\l<> 
 
 398 
 
 tin ri]v Kpa\rjv vp.a>v,your blood be on your 
 own heads, the guilt of your destruction rest 
 upon yourselves. Sept. and tt3X"i 2 Sam. 1, 
 16. 1 K. 2, 33. 38. Also Rom. 12, 20, 
 quoted from Prov. 25, 22 where Sept. and 
 liixi. So Aristoph. Plut. 526 els KfCpaXyv 
 o-ot for els ere. Comp. Horn. II. 11. 55. 
 Od. 1. 343. JEA. V. H. 12. 8. Trop. of 
 things, the head, the foremost, chief, e. g. 
 r.paXr) ycwias, the head of the corner, i. e. 
 the chief corner-stone, the main foundation, 
 Matt. 21, 42. Mark 12, 10. Luke 20, 17. 
 Acts 4, 11. 1 Pet. 2, 7, all quoted from Ps. 
 118, 22 where Sept. for ^ ^N"i ; see in 
 aKpoyuviaios. Heb. Lex. tl5iO no. 4. 
 
 2. Trop. of persons, i. e. the head, the 
 chief, one to whom others are subordinate ; 
 e. g. a husband in relation to a wife, 1 Cor. 
 11. 3 KffpaXr] yvvaiKos 6 dvrjp. Eph. 5, 23. 
 Of Christ in relation to his church, which is 
 his body, <r<5/z, and its members his mem 
 bers, fieXrj, (comp. 1 Cor. 12, 27,) 1 Cor. 
 11, 3. Eph. 1, 22. 4, 15. 5, 23. Col. 1, 18. 
 2, 10. 19. Of God in relation to Christ 
 1 Cor. 11, 3. Sept. and ti1 Judg. 11, 8. 
 
 11. 2 Sam. 22, 24. + 
 
 K(j)a\k, ( Soj, 17, (Kf$oX>;,) pr. a little 
 head, e. g. a bulb of garlic Luc. Dial. Me- 
 retr. 14. 3 ; the head, knob, of a column, etc. 
 Philo de Vit. Mos. II. p. 146. 50. Jos. Ant. 
 
 12. 2. 8. In N. T. the head, knob of the 
 wooden rod on which Hebrew manuscripts 
 are rolled ; and hence meton. for a roll, 
 volume; Heb. 10, 7 Ke(pa\ls ftipXlov, quoted 
 from Ps. 40, 8 where Sept. for "ifitrnha. 
 
 fcrj/jioa), to, f. COG-CO, (KJJ/IO S,) to muzzle, 
 i. q. $i/ioo> for which it stands in some Mss. 
 1 Cor. 9, 9. Xen. Eq. 5. 3. 
 
 KrjvcroS) ov, 6, Lat. census, in Greek airo- 
 ypa<j>T) q. v. pr. an enumeration of the peo 
 ple and valuation of property, see Adam s 
 Rom. Ant. p. 79, 128 sq. Diet, of Antt. art. 
 Census. In N. T. tribute, poll-tax, paid by 
 each person whose name was taken in the 
 census, Matt. 17, 25. 22, 17 et Mark 12, 
 14 Sovvai KTJVO-OV Km o-apt. Matt. 22, 19 vo- 
 uio-fjLa TOV KIJWOV, the tribute-coin, i. q. 8q- 
 vapiov in Mark 12, 15. Hesych. Kijva-os 
 ei Soy vofj.icrp.aTos, fTTiK((pd\aiov. 
 
 /cf]7ro$i ov, 6, a garden, any place plant 
 ed with herbs and trees, Luke 13, 19. John 
 18, 1. 26. 19, 41 bis. Sept. for 1* Deut. 11, 
 10. Am. 4, 9. Luc. Asin. 1. Xen. CEc. 
 1. 13. 
 
 KijTTOVpoS, ov, 6, (KTJTTOS, ovpo?,) a gar- 
 den-keeper, gardener, John 20, 15. Pol. 17. 
 6. 4. Plato de Legg. 316. e. 
 
 Krjpiov, ov, TO, (Kqpoy,) a honey-comb, 
 full of honey, Luke 24, 42. Sept. for r>B3 
 Prov. 24, 13. 19, 11. Diod. Sic, 5. 26. 
 Xen. An. 4. 8. 20. 
 
 UTOS, TO, (KTJPVO-O-U,) procla 
 mation by a herald, Dem. 917. 24; Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 5. 57. In N. T. preaching, public 
 discourse. 
 
 1. Of prophets, e. g. the denunciation of 
 Jonah against Nineveh, TO Krjpvyfia lava 
 Matt. 12, 41. Luke 11, 32. Sept. for 
 nxi-tfj Jon. 3, 2. 
 
 2. Of Christ and his apostles, the preach 
 ing of the gospel, public instruction, 1 Cor. 
 
 1, 21. 2, 4. 15, 14. Tit. 1,3. Meton. for 
 the gospel preached, Rom. 16, 25. 2 Tim. 
 4, 17. Clem. Alex. Strom. 6. 5, 6. 
 
 Krjpvg, VKOS, 6, a herald, public crier, 
 Diod. Sic. 18. 8. An. 5. 7. 3, 4. In N. T. 
 a preacher, public instructor, e. g. of the 
 divine will and precepts, as Noah, 2 Pet. 2, 
 5 ; of the gospel, as Paul, 1 Tim. 2, 7. 
 2 Tim. 1, 11. 
 
 Kypvcrcra) V. -TTO), f. co, (K7ypv|,) to be 
 a herald or public crier, Horn. II. 17. 325. 
 Luc. D. Deor. 24. 1 ; to make proclamation 
 by a herald, Diod. Sic. 17. 109. Xen. Hell. 
 
 7. 2. 23. In N. T. to proclaim, to announce 
 publicly, to publish. 
 
 1. Genr. c. ace. Matt. 10, 27 Krjpv^aTe 
 ri Tcav dcojuarcoi/. Luke 12, 3. Acts 10, 42. 
 Rev. 5, Sept. for sn|5 Ex. 32, 5. Esth. 
 6, 9. 11 : r^n Joel 2, 1. So Hdian. 1. 7. 
 
 2. ^Eschin. 75. 30. Also to publish abroad, 
 to laud publicly ; Mark 1 , 45 rjp^aTo Kripvtr- 
 (Tfiv TroXXa Kal 8ia(pT)fj.ii.v. 5, 20. 7, 36. 
 Luke 8, 39. So Pol. 30. 20. 6. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 8. 4. 4. 
 
 2. Espec. to publish, to announce, to preach 
 religious truth, the gospel with its privileges 
 and obligations, the gospel dispensation. 
 a) Pr. e. g. of John the Baptist, Matt. 3, 1 
 KT/pucrcrcov tv rrj fprjp.(o Kal \(yo>v. Mark 1, 
 4. 7. Luke 3, 3. Acts 10, 37. Of Jesus, 
 Matt. 4, 17. 23. 9, 35. 11, 1. Mark 1, 14. 
 38. 39. Luke4, 44. 8, 1. 1 Pet. 3,19. Of 
 apostles and teachers, Matt. 10, 7. 24, 14. 
 
 26, 13. Mark 3, 14. 6, 12. 13, 10. 14, 9. 
 16, 15. 20. Luke 9, 2. 24, 47. Acts 20, 
 25. 28, 31. Rom. 10, 8. 14. 15. 1 Cor. 9, 
 
 27. 15, 11. Gal. 2, 2.. Col. 1, 23. 1 Thess. 
 2, 9. 2 Tim. 4, 2 K. TOV \6yov. (Act. Thorn. 
 ^ 1, TOV Xoyoj/.) So TOV Xpi<rr6z> Krjpvo~- 
 creiv, to preach Christ, i. e. to announce him 
 as the Messiah, and exhort to the reception 
 of his gospel, Acts 8, 5. 9, 20. 19, 13. 
 1 Cor. 1, 23. 15, 12. 2 Cor. 1, 19. 4, 5 ov 
 yap eavTovs KT)pvo-(ropfv, dXXa X/itrroV. 1 1 , 
 
KTjTOf 
 
 399 
 
 4 bis. Phil. 1, 15. 1 Tim. 3, 16. b) In 
 allusion to the Mosaic and prophetic institu 
 tions, to preach, to teach; Acts 15, 21 Mcou- 
 OTJS . TOVS KTjpvo-arovras avrov ?x- Rom. 
 2, 21 6 Kr)pv<T<T<i)v fj.r) K\(7TTfiv. Gal. 5, 11 
 ft irfpiTOfiriv (Ti Krjpvcrcro}. Luke 4, 18. 19, 
 quoted from Is. 61, 1 where Sept. for X^J5 . 
 #77x09, eos, ovs, TO, a huge fish, sea- 
 monster, Matt 12, 40. Sept. for ^"la y* 
 Jon. 2, 1. Palaeph. 38. 1. Diod. Sic. 4. 42. 
 
 K?7<a9, a, 6, Cephas, later Heb. NB* 1 ? 
 (a rock, Buxt. Lex. 1032,) a surname of 
 Simon Peter, i. q. Gr. EU rpoy, John 1, 43. 
 1 Cor. 1, 12. 3, 22. 9, 5. 15, 5. Gal. 2, 9. 
 [1, 18. 2, 11. 14.] 
 
 Ki{3(i)TO$, ov, f], an ark, i. e. a wooden 
 chest, coffer, JEl. V. H. 9. 13. Lysias 121. 
 5. In N. T. spoken of the ark of the cove 
 nant, Heb. 9, 4. Rev. 11, 19. Sept. for 
 "pis Ex. 25, 10. Lev. 16, 2. al. (Jos. Ant. 
 4. s . 44.) Of Noah s ark, Matt. 24, 38. 
 Luke 17, 27. Heb. 11, 7. 1 Pet. 3, 20. 
 Sept. for n3Jn Gen. 6, 14 sq. 7, 1 sq. In 
 like manner Josephus calls the latter Xap- 
 ra, Ant. 1. 3. 2 sq. 
 
 Kt&dpa, as, fj, (Ki Saptr,) whence Lat. 
 cithara, Ital. ghitara, Engl. guitar, though 
 the modern instrument is different. The 
 ancient cithara and lyre were on the same 
 plan, a sounding base or bottom, (larger in 
 the lyre,) from which rose two horns as 
 from the head of a stag. A cross-bar con 
 nected the two horns near the top ; between 
 which and the base the strings were stretch 
 ed. The lyre was larger, and when played 
 stood upright between the knees ; while the 
 cithara stood upon the knees of the player. _ 
 Both were held with the left hand, and 
 played with the right, sometimes with a 
 plectrum or key. See Diet, of Antt. art. 
 Lyra. ;E1. V. H. 14. 23. Luc. Imag. 14. 
 Plato Rep. 399. d. In N. T. cithara, q. d. 
 a lyre, harp, 1 Cor. 14, 7. Rev. 5, 8. 14, 2. 
 15, 2. Sept. for -,133 Gen. 31, 27. 1 Chr. 
 9, 11. Josephus describes the Heb. "^53, 
 Kivvpa, as having ten strings and as struck 
 with a key, Ant. 7. 12. 3. Com p. Heb. 
 Lex. art. - ->3. 
 
 K&apl^a), f. ia-co, (i3apir,) to play upon 
 the cithara, i. e. genr. to play the lyre, to 
 harp, 1 Cor. 14, 7. Rev. 14, 2. Sept. for 
 1?? Is. 23, 16. ^El. V. H. 3. 32. Xen. Mem. 
 3. 1. 4. 
 
 Kfeapyoos, ov, 6, (/aSapa, aoiSdr, wSo s,) 
 a lyrist, harper, one who plays on the lyre 
 or harp and accompanies it with song, Rev. 
 14, 2. 18, 22. ^El. V. H. 3. 43. Plato 
 Conv. 179. d. 
 
 as, 17, Cilicia, a province of 
 Asia Minor, bounded N. by Cappadocia, 
 Lycaonia, and Isauria ; S. by the Mediter 
 ranean ; E. by Syria ; and W. by Pamphy- 
 lia. The western part was called rpa^eta, 
 aspera, and the eastern irfoivr), campestris. 
 This country was the province of Cicero 
 when proconsul, and its chief town Tarsus 
 was the birthplace of Paul. Acts 6, 9. 15, 
 23. 41. 21, 39. 22, 3. 23, 34. 27, 5. Gal. 
 
 1. 21. See Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. I. ii. p. 
 196. Winer Realw. art. Cilicia. 
 
 Kivafjicofiov, ov, TO, cinnamon, the aro 
 matic bark of the Laurus cinnamomum, 
 which grows in Arabia, India, and espe 
 cially in the island of Ceylon. The ancients 
 employed it in their incense and perfumes. 
 Rev. 18, 13. Sept. for yiaSR Ex. 30, 23 ; 
 Siari !-i2i3 Jer. 6, 20. Diod. Sic. 2. 49. 
 Hdot. 3. 111. Comp. Plin. H. N. 12. 42. 
 
 KlvSwevd), f. fva-o), (KIVOVVOS-) to ue in 
 danger, in peril, absol. Luke 8, 23. 1 Cor. 
 15, 30; c. inf. Acts 19, 27. 40. Ecclus. 
 31 [34], 12. Pol. 4. 12. 13. Xen. Hell. 1. 
 4. 15. 
 
 KivSvvo?, ov, 6, (perh. Kti/eco,) danger, 
 peril, Rom. 8, 35. 2 Cor. 11, 26 octies. 
 Sept. for "ISO Ps. 116, 3. Hdian. 3. 3. 6. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 8. 
 
 Ktvea), 5), f. 770-0), (KI O),) to move, to put 
 in motion, c. ace. Matt. 23, 4 ov 3e Xouo-t 
 Kii>r)<rai aura sc. TO. (popria. Sept. Pass, for 
 Bin Is. 41, 7 ; CHS Job 13, 25. (Xen. Conv. 
 
 2. 22.) So Kivtlv TTJV Kf(pa\i ]v to move or 
 shake the head, in derision, Matt. 27, 39. 
 Mark 15, 29. Sept. for OKI S^n 2 K. 
 19, 21. Ps. 22, 8. (Ecclus. 12, 18. 13, 7.) 
 Mid. to move oneself, to move, intrans. Acts 
 17, 28 faVe^ (cat /ai/ov/ieSa. (Sept. Gen. 7, 
 21. JEl V. H. 1. 6. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 19.) 
 Trop. to move, to stir up, to excite, e. g. 
 (rraariv Acts 24,5. 21,30 eKiv^rj 37 TroAi? 
 SXrj. So Hdian. 7. 3. 4. Xen. Ag. 1, 37. 
 With eVc TOV TUTTOV, i. q. to move away, to 
 remove, c. ace. Rev. 2, 5. 6, 14. So c. ani 
 Xen. An. 3. 4. 28 ; absol. Hdian. 6. 1.6. 
 
 Kii>ri(Ti<;, f<af, rj, (KII//O).) movement, mo- 
 lion, John 5, 3 TTJV TOV vdaTos Kii^jcriv. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 7. Xen. Yen. 10. 12. 
 
 Kk, 6, indec. Kis, Heb. ^""P Kish, pr. 
 n. of the father of king Saul, Acts 13, 21 ; 
 comp. 1 Sam. 9, 1. 
 
 Kiyp Tj/^t, f. xprjoxo, (xpdw, see Buttm. 
 S 114,) to supply with, to lend, c. ace. et dat. 
 Luke 11,5 -%pri<r6v p,oi Tpels apTovs. Sept 
 Ex. 12, 36. JE\. V. H. 14. 10. Xen. Mem 
 
 3. 11. 18. 
 
400 
 
 ov. o, (xXtzca,) a shoot, sprout, 
 clinch, pr. young and easily broken off. 
 .Jfatt. 24. 32 ttrav 7/877 6 K\d8os avrrjs yevr]- 
 rai anaXus KOI TO. (pvX\a fie^tvg. 13, 32. 21, 
 8. Mark 4, 32. 13, 28. Luke 13, 19. Sept. 
 for rn ib n Jer. 11, 16. Ez. 31, 7. So JE1. 
 V. H. 2. 14. Theophr. II. PI. 1. 8. 5. 
 Trop. and allegor. 01 K\d8oi branches for 
 offspring, posterity, Rom. 11, 16. 17. 18. 19. 
 21. So Theophr. Char. 5 or 21 icXdSos Me- 
 
 \ITOLOS. 
 
 K\atO), f. jcXauo-o/zat Buttm. 114; in 
 N. T. fut. frXauo-cu Luke 6, 25, comp. Winer 
 115; to weep, to wail, to lament, implying 
 not only the shedding of tears, but also every 
 external expression of grief. 
 
 1. Intrans. and absol. Matt. 26, 75 K\av- 
 Tf TriKpus. Mark 14,72. Luke 6,21. 7,13. 
 3, 52. John 11, 31. 33. 1 Cor. 7, 30. al. 
 With eVi c. dat. to weep for or over any one, 
 .Luke 19, 41 ; eVi c. ace. Luke 23, 28 P.TJ 
 K\aifre eV ffj.f KT\. Joined with u\aXdfiv 
 Mark 5, 38 ; with Zopvfclv Mark 5, 39 ; 
 ZpTjvtlv John 16, 20 ; KoVreo-Sai Rev. 18, 9 ; 
 6\o\vfiv James 5, 1 ; nev Sflv Mark 16, 10. 
 Luke 6, 25. Rev. 18, 15. 19; so eV avTrj 
 v. 11. Sept. for fisa Gen. 33, 4. Num. 14, 
 1 ; eVi nva Judg. 14, 17. 2 Sam. 19, 1. 
 Ml V. H. 12. 1 init. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 13. 
 
 2. Trans, c. ace. to beweep. to bewail, to 
 weep or lament for, e. g. the dead, Matt. 2, 
 18 Po^>)X K\aiovcra TO. reKva airrjy. Sept. 
 for n33 Gen. 37, 34. Deut. 34, 8. JEL V. 
 H. 6. V. Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 32. + 
 
 /cXacri?, fa,s, T], ((cXdco,) a breaking, i. e. 
 act of breaking, e. g. V r?J /cXdtret TOU ap- 
 TOV Luke 24, 35. Acts 2, 42. Theophr. 
 Caus. PI. 2. 14. 4 K\d<ris a/wre Xwi/. Plato 
 Tim. 43. d. 
 
 K\acrfAa, arcs, TO, (/cXdw,) a fragment, 
 bit, e. g. of food, Matt. 14, 20. 15, 37. Mark 
 6, 43. 8, 8. 19. 20. Luke 9, 17. John 6, 12. 
 13. Sept. for r.B Lev. 2, 6. Judg. 19, 5. 
 Diod. Sic. 17. 13. Xen. Yen. 10. 5. 
 
 KXavSij, vs, 17, Clauda or Claude, now 
 Gozzo, a small island off the S. W. coast 
 of Crete, Acts 27, 16; see KaCSa. It is 
 also called KXavSo? Ptol. 3.7; and Gaudos, 
 Mela 2. 7. Plin. II. N. 4. 20. See Pococke 
 Descr. of the East, II. i. p. 240. 
 
 K\av8la, as, -f], Claudia, pr. n. of a 
 Christian female, 2 Tim. 4, 21. 
 
 .KAauSto?, ov, 6, Claudius, pr. n. 
 
 1. Tiberius Claudius Nero Drusus Ger- 
 manicus, the fourth Roman emperor, suc 
 cessor of Caligula, r. A. D. 41-54. Acts 
 
 11. 28. 18, 2. In the fourth year of his 
 reign occurred the famine foretold by Aga- 
 bus Acts 11, 28 ; see Jos. Ant. 20. 2. 6. 
 ib. 20. 5. 2. Dion Cass. 60. 11. Tac. Ann. 
 
 12. 43. Sueton. in Claud. 28. Krebs Obs. 
 in N. T. p. 210. At first he was favoura 
 ble to the Jews, Jos. Ant. 20. 1. 2 ; but in 
 his ninth year he banished all the Jews from 
 Rome, Acts 18, 2 ; comp. Sueton. in Claud, 
 25. 
 
 2. Claudius Lysias, a Roman tribune, 
 XiX/apxor, commanding in Jerusalem, Acts 
 23, 26. 
 
 K\cw J//-09, ov, 6, (*cXauo,) a weeping, 
 wailing, Matt. 2, 18. 8, 12. 13, 42. 50. 22, 
 
 13. 24, 51. 25, 30. Luke 13, 28. Acts 20, 
 37. Sept. for 133 Gen. 45, 2. Ezra 3, 13. 
 ^Eschyl. Agam/1554. Plut. Romul. 19. 
 Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 325. 
 
 /cXaw, f. /cXdcrcD, to break, i. e. to break 
 off or in two, Horn. II. 11. 584. Diod. Sic. 
 4. 35. Plut. Romul. 28 mid. In N. T. only 
 in the phrase *Xd era t rov aprov,lobreak 
 bread, i. e. for distribution as preparatory to 
 a meal, the Jewish bread being in the form 
 of thin cakes; also genr. Matt. 14, 19. 15, 
 36. Mark 8, 6. 19. Luke 24, 30. Acts 27, 
 35. Sept. and Heb. onb 0*18 Jer. 16, 7; 
 comp. Is. 58, 7. Also in the Lord s supper 
 and the agapac, Matt. 26, 26. Mark 14, 22. 
 Luke 22, 19. Acts 2, 46. 20, 7. 11. 1 Cor. 
 10, 16. 11, 24. (Act. Thorn. $ 27, 29.) 
 Metaph. of the body, aw/ia, of Christ, as 
 typically broken in the eucharist ; 1 Cor. 11, 
 24 TO o~oj/ia TO virep vp.a>i> K\u>p.fi>ov, where 
 the allusion is to the death on the cross, 
 So pr. Jos. B. J. 2. 8. 10. 
 
 /cXeiV, K\(i86s, 17, ace. /cXelv and (cXelSa, 
 Plur. ace. KXeldas and contr. /cXels, Buttm. 
 44. J 58. Winer J 9. 2. n ; a key, for lock 
 ing and unlocking, in N. T. as the symbol 
 of power and authority. Matt. 16, 19 8a>cra> 
 crot ras /cXets rrjs /3acriXe/as ToO SeoC, i. e. 
 the power of opening or shutting, of admit 
 ting to or excluding from, the kingdom of 
 God. Rev. 3, 7 6 e^oiv rrjv KXiiv TOV Aa- 
 /3i S, in a like sense, in allusion to Is. 22, 22 
 where Sept. TTJV /cXelSa oi/cou Aa/3i S for 
 I^ ^T rpa nnca . Rev. i, 18 ras K\fls TOV 
 
 aSov. 9, 1. 20, 1. Trop. Luke 11, 52 TTJV 
 K\fl8a rrjs yvaxretos, the key of knowledge, 
 i. e. the means of attaining to the knowledge 
 of the kingdom of God, the way of salvation ; 
 comp. Matt. 23. 13. Pr. Sept. for HRSJa 
 Judg. 3,25. Luc. Tim. 13. Plato Ax. 371. b. 
 
 K\eia), f. a-o), Pass. perf. K/KXeio/iai, 
 aor. 1 fK\ficr^T}v, for the o- see Buttm. 98 
 n. 6. o 112. 20. c. 
 
40 1 
 
 1. to shut, to shut up, to clcse, c. ace. 
 Matt. 6, 6 K\fi(rus TTJV %vpav (rov. 25, 10. 
 Luke 11,7. John 20, 19. 26. Acts 5, 23. 
 21, 30. Rev. 20, 3. 21, 25. Sept. for 150 
 Gen. 7, 16. Josh. 2, 7. (Hdian. 7. 11. 12 . 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 27.) So the heavens, TOV 
 ovppvw, i. e. the windows of heaven so that 
 no rain can fall, Luke 4, 25. Rev. 11, 6; 
 comp. Gen. 7, 11. 8, 2. Job 38, 37. 
 
 2. Trop. a) Matt. 23, 13 [14] *Xfi ere 
 TTJV /3a<j. T&V oip. to shut up the kingdom of 
 heaven, i. e. willingly to prevent men from 
 entering ; comp. in *cXeiy. So of authority 
 to exclude or admit, Rev. 3, 7 bis. 8. b) 
 1 John 3, 17 /cXeltrai ra crTrXay^ca OTTO TIVOS, 
 to shut up one s bowels from any one, i. e. 
 not to let one s compassion flow out, to be 
 hard-hearted ; comp. in (nr\dyxvov no. 2. a. 
 
 /cXe/i/ia, aros, TO, (KXJTO>,) theft, Rev. 
 9, 21. Dem. 736. 5. Xen. (Ec. 14. 5. 
 
 K\eo7ra$, a, 6, Cleopas, one of the two 
 disciples to whom Jesus appeared on the 
 way to Emmaus, Luke 24, 18. Contracted 
 for KXeoVarpoy Plut. Arat. 40 ; like Airi- 
 iras for Ai/riVcn-por. Different from KXanas 
 q. v. 
 
 AT\09, eovs, TO, (^Ae co, KaXeco,) pr. re 
 port, rumour, Horn. 11. 2. 486. Od. 13. 415. 
 In N. T. and genr. fame, renown, glory, 
 1 Pet. 2, 20. Sept. for yieaj Job 28, 22. 
 So JEL. V. H. 2. 32. Plato Legg. 625. a. 
 
 /cXe7TT779, ov, 6, (icXfTrra),) a thief, Matt. 
 6, 19. 20. 24, 43. Luke 12, 33. 39. John 
 10,1. 12,6. 1 Cor. 6, 10. 1 Thess. 5, 2. 4. 
 1 Pet. 4, 15. 2 Pet. 3, 10. Rev. 3,3. 16, 15. 
 Sept. for 335 Ex. 22, 2. Joel 2, 9. So Dem. 
 1120. 14. *Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 6. Trop. of 
 false teachers, deceivers, who steal men 
 away from the truth, John 10, 8. 10. Sept. 
 and 335 Hos. 7, 1. 
 
 K\67TTCi). f. KXctyea Matt. 19, 18. Rom. 
 
 13, 9, instead of the more usual fut. K\tyo- 
 fjiai Buttm. 5 1 13. 5, and n. 7. Winer j 15. 
 To steal, absol. Matt. 6, 19. 20 oiopva-o-ova-i 
 KOI (cX7rTovo-t. Mark 10, 19. Luke 18, 20. 
 John 10, 10. Rom. 2, 21 bis. Eph. 4, 28 bis. 
 Fut. ov <\f \jsfis as imperat. Matt. 19, 18. 
 Rom. 13, 9 ; see Winer $ 44. 3* Matth. 
 $ 498. c. Sept. for 333 Ex. 20, 15. Deut. 
 5, 19. (Dem. 422. 9. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 15.) 
 Spec, to steal away, to take by stealth, c. ace. 
 e. g. a dead body, Matt. 27, 64. 28, 13. 
 Sept. and 33S 2 Sam. 21, 12. So Hdian. 
 2. 1. 5. 
 
 /c\7//ia, aTos, TO, (xXaco,) a shoot, sprout, 
 branch, i. q. AtXaSoy, pr. such as are easily 
 Broken off; in N. T. only of the vine, a 
 2fi 
 
 shoot, tendril, John 15, 2. 4. 5. 6. Sept. for 
 ni*Vj Ez. 12, 6. 7 ; rnbt Ez. 15, 2. Luc. 
 D. Deor. 18. 2. Xen. (Ec, 19. 8. 
 
 K\i]/jLr)s, fvros, 6, Clement, pr. D. of a 
 Christian Phil. 4, 3 ; not improbably Cle 
 mens Romanus. 
 
 K\T]povo/j.ea>, w, f. TJO-O), (KXnpovo/jLds,) 
 to hai-e and hold a portion by lot, Sept. for 
 ins Num. 26, 55. Josh. 16, 4. Hence, as 
 an inheritance might also be distributed by 
 lot (Ecclus. 14, 15), to inherit, to be heir to 
 any person or thing ; in Gr. writers c. gen. 
 e. g. of pers. Luc, D. Mort. 9. 4. ib. 11. 3 ; 
 of thing Dem. 171. 25. Comp. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 129. In N. T. genr. 
 
 1. to inherit, to be heir, absol. Gal. 4, 30 
 ov yap fir) K^.Tjpovofj.rjar) 6 vlos Trjs TratS/crK^y 
 fifTa KT\. quoted from Gen. 21, 10 where 
 Sept. for djni ; as also Gen. 15, 4. Num. 
 27, 11. Plato Legg. 923. e. 
 
 2. In later usage simply to obtain, to ac 
 quire, to possess ; in N. T. only trop. of 
 the friends of God as receiving admission 
 to the kingdom of heaven and its privileges ; 
 c. ace. Matt. 5, 5 K\7)povofj.f)o-ovcri T^V yfjv 
 they shall possess the land, i. e. primarily the 
 land of Canaan, but here put in a spiritual 
 sense for the Messiah s kingdom ; comp. 
 Sept. and Heb. fix ^ Ps. 37, 9. 11. 22. 
 29. 25, 13. Also X. TTJV fiao-iXfiav TOV 
 3eo5 Matt. 25, 34. 1 Cor. 6, 9. 10. 15, 50. 
 Gal. 5, 21 ; K\. fafjv alwtov Matt. 19, 29. 
 Mark 10, 17. Luke 10, 25. 18, 18 ; dfaap- 
 o-iav 1 Cor. 15, 50; also Heb. 1, 4. 14. 6, 
 12. 12, 17. 1 Pet. 3, 9. Rev. 21,7. Sept. 
 for U^l Gen. 15,7. Deut. 1,21. So genr. 
 c. ace. Jos. Ant. 8. 13. 8 *X. TOV Na/3ov3ov 
 a/i7rfXaJfa TrpoiKa. Diod. Sic. 1. 24. Pol. 2. 
 27. 5. See Lob. ad Phryn. p. 129. 
 
 K\r]povofiia, ay, 17, 
 tion by lot, an inheritance. 
 
 1 . Pr. from one s ancestors, a patrimony, 
 Matt. 21, 38. Mark 12, 7. Luke 12, 13. 20, 
 
 14. Sept. for iibn? Num. 27, 7. 8. 9. 10. 
 11. Isocr. 393. a. Hdian. 5. 1. 13. 
 
 2. Genr. a portion, possession, espec. the 
 land of Canaan as the possession of the Is 
 raelites, Acts 7, 5. Heb. 11, 8. Sept. and 
 rtm Deut. 4, 38. Josh. 11, 23. Hence 
 trop. of admission to the kingdom of God 
 and its privileges, Acts 20, 32. Gal. 3, 18. 
 Eph. 1, 14. 18. 5, 5. Col. 3, 24. Heb. 9, 
 
 15. 1 Pet. 1, 4. 
 
 K\TJpOVO/jLO$, ov, 6, (jcX^poj, Vfpopat,) 
 pr. having and holding a portion by lot , 
 hence in N. T. and genr. an heir, see above 
 in K\r)povop.fca. 
 
 a por 
 
402 
 
 K\ivdpi,ov 
 
 1. Pr. Matt. 21, 38. Mark 12, 7. Luke 
 20, 14. Gal. 4, 1. Sept. for ^^ Jer. 8, 
 10. 2 Sam. 14, 7. So JEl. V. H. 13. 10. 
 Lysias 907. 5. Plato Rep. 331. d. Trop. 
 K\T]pov6fios Seou, an heir of God, i. e. a par 
 taker of the blessings which God bestows 
 upon his children, implying admission to the 
 kingdom of heaven and its privileges, Rom. 
 8, 17 bis. Gal. 4, 7. So Gal. 3, 29 xX^po- 
 vd/ioi (roi> A/Spaa^), i. e. heirs of the bless 
 ings promised to Abraham. 
 
 2. Genr. a possessor, sc. of any thing re 
 ceived as a portion or possession, e. g. the 
 kingdom of heaven, Rom. 4, 13. 14 et yap 
 ot < vop.ov KXrjpovofioi KT\. Tit. 3, 7. Heb. 
 1, 2. 6, 17. 11,7. James 2, 5. 
 
 K\r)po$, ov, 6, (perh. KXdw,) a lot, i. e. 
 
 1 . Pr. a lot, die, any thing used in deter 
 mining chances, comp. Potter s Gr. Antt. 
 I. p. 333. Diet, of Antt. art. Sortes. E. g. 
 (cXfJpoi/ J3a\\ftv, Engl. to cast lots, Matt. 27, 
 35 bis. Mark 15, 24. Luke 23, 34. John 19, 
 24. Acts 1, 26 bis, f 8u>Kav K\rjpovs . . . Kai 
 eTTfo-ev 6 K\?)pos. Sept. for Vn 1 ^ Ps. 22, 19. 
 Jon. 1,7. Luc. Hermot. 40. Plut. M. Crass. 
 16 bis. Plato Legg. 946. b. 
 
 2. Meton. a lot, i. e. a part, portion, as 
 signed by lot, Acts 8, 21 OVK eon rroi pepls 
 ov8e K\rjpos ev TW Xdy<a rovrw. Sept. and 
 ^1 a Dent. 10,9. 12, 12. Of an office to 
 which one is appointed by lot or otherwise ; 
 Acts 1, 17. 25 \ajBf1v TOV K\rjpov TTJS SiaKO- 
 vias, comp. v. 26. Hence genr. a portion, 
 possession, heritage, trop. Acts 26, 18 *cXn- 
 pov fv rots f]yiacrp.fvois. Col. 1, 12. Plur. id. 
 1 Pet. 5, 3 fjLTjo u>s KaraKvpifvovrfs TU>V K\T]- 
 pu>v, not as lording it over the possessions, 
 heritage, of God or Christ, the church. So 
 Wisd. 5, 5. Pr. of an estate, farm, JE\. V. 
 H. 12. 61. Plato Crit. 118. e; also Plur. 
 Hdot. 1. 76. Plato Crit. 119. a. 
 
 ), o>, f. too-co, (ccXJjpoy,) to lot, to 
 choose by lot, Hdot. 1. 94. Isocr. 144. a. Mid. 
 to obtain by lot, ^Eschin. 26. 36 ; genr. to 
 obtain, to receive, JE\. H. An. 1. 13. In N. 
 T. only Pass. aor. 1 fK\r)p6>%r)v, to be al 
 lotted, to be chosen by lot, and so genr. to be 
 chosen, appointed of God, absol. Eph. 1,11 
 ev o> Kai fK\r)pu>^rjp.V . . . fls TO fivai rjfjLas 
 KT\. in whom we have been allotted, chosen, 
 etc. Comp. Eurip. Hec. 98 [102] lv eK\rj- 
 , . . o~ov\rj. 
 
 ea>s, T], (KaXe w,) a call, sum 
 mons, Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 14 ; an invitation to a 
 banquet, 3 Mace. 5, 14. Xen. Conv. 1. 7. In 
 N. T. trop. a call, calling, invitation, to the 
 kingdom of God and its privileges, i. e. that 
 divine cal. by which Christians are introdu 
 
 ced into the privileges of the gospel ; Rom. 
 11, 29 j? K\?I<TI.S TOV 3eoC. Eph. 4, 1. Phil. 3, 
 14. 2 Thess. 1, 11. 2 Tim. 1, 9. Heb. 3, 1. 
 2 Pet. 1,10. Eph. 1, 18 et 4, 4 f] eXnls -rijs 
 K\r]crecas, i. e. the glorious hope of him whom 
 God has called. (Clem. Alex. Strom. 6. 17.) 
 So 1 Cor. 1, 26 fiXenfTe rnv K\TJO-IV vp.&v, 
 
 1. e. the manner of your call, how ye were 
 called. 1 Cor. 7, 20 fKaa-Tos eV 777 KXijcrei j 
 fK\r)%T), tv TavTr/ p.ei>fTO), i. e. as he was 
 called, so let him remain. 
 
 tfA7jT09, 77, 6v, (/caXew,) called, invited, 
 e. g. to a banquet, Sept. for ^^{5 1 K. 1, 
 41. 49. jEschin. 50. 1. In N. T. trop. 
 called, invited, to the kingdom of heaven 
 and its privileges ; genr. Matt. 20, 1 6 et 
 22, 14 TroXXoi yap etcri (cX7jrot, oXtyoi 8e 
 tK\(KTol. Emphat. of those who have obeyed 
 this call, the called, i. q. saints, Christians ; 
 Rom. 1, 6. 7 KX^Tol irjaov Xp. . .. KX^rot 
 ayioi. 8,28. 1 Cor. 1, 2. 24. Jude 1. Rev. 
 17, 14. Comp. Heb. X l pa Is. 48, 12. 
 Spec, called, appointed, chosen, of God as an 
 apostle; Rom. 1, 1 et 1 Cor. 1, 1 KXrjroj 
 aTro aroXoy, comp. Gal. 1, 15. 
 
 tcXiftavos, ov, 6, an oven, for baking 
 bread, Matt. 6, 30. Luke 12, 28. Sept. for 
 Heb. 1B Ex. 8, 3. Lev. 26, 26. So Hdot. 
 
 2. 92. Artemid. 2. 10. The Attic form was 
 Kpiftavos, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 179. The Heb. 
 I Sn, Gr. K\ifiavos, was a large round pot 
 of earthen or other materials, two or three 
 feet high, narrowing towards the top ; this 
 being first heated by a fire made within, the 
 dough or paste was spread upon the sides to 
 bake, thus forming thin cakes. See Nie- 
 buhr s Arabien p. 51. D Arvieux Mem. III. 
 p. 270 sq. Jerome on Lam. 5, 10 " Cliba- 
 nus est coquendis panibus asnei vasculi di- 
 ducta rotunditas, quae sub urentibus flam- 
 mis ardet intrinsecus." 
 
 OTOS, TO, (KXi j/w.) inclination, 
 slope, Pol. 2. 16. 3 /cXi /m T&V op>v. A so 
 of the supposed inclination of the earth 
 towards the poles in ancient geography, 
 whence the northern hemisphere was divi 
 ded into K\ip.aTa, climates or zones, by lines 
 parallel to the equator, according to the dif 
 ferent lengths of the longest day ; Yitruv. 
 1.. 1. Diet, of Antt. art. Clima. Hence in 
 N. T. and genr. a climate, a clime, region, 
 Gal. 1, 21 els TU K\l^aTa TTJS Svpt ar. Rom. 
 15, 23. 2 Cor. 11, 10. So Pol. 5. 44. 6. 
 Hdian. 2. 11. 8. Plut. ^Emil. Paul. 5. 
 
 tcXivdpiov, ov, TO, (dim. KXiVj/,) a small 
 bed, couch; Acts 5, 15 Lachm. rt K\ivapi~ 
 a>v, Vulg. in lectulis, for Rec. rt K\IVUV. 
 Aristoph. Fr. 33. 
 
403 
 
 fc\ivr), rjs, f), (jcXtW,) a bed, couch, on 
 which one lies, reclines, rests. In the east, 
 the poor sleep on mats or on the ground 
 wrapped in their outer garment ; those more 
 wealthy on quilts or mattresses filled with 
 cotton, winch are spread on the floor or on 
 the low sofas (divans) around the room, bed 
 steads being now unknown. See Bibl. Res. 
 in Pal. III. p. 32. Russell s Aleppo I. p. 144. 
 In N. T. 
 
 1. a bed, in N. T. only as used for the 
 sick, Mark 7, 30 et Rev. 2, 22, see in /3aX- 
 Xa> no. 1. f. Sept. and Siaa Gen. 48, 2. 
 49, 3 ; genr. 2 Sam. 4,7. 1 K. 17, 19. So 
 Luc. Asin. 3. Isaeus 59. 39. Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 
 15. Of a bed in which the sick are borne, 
 prob. a quilt or mattress, perh. on a light 
 frame or bedstead, Matt. 9, 2. 6. Luke 5, 
 
 18. Acts 5, 15. SoLys. 101. 24 eV /cXt i^ ire- 
 pi(p{p6fj.fvos. Comp. Sept. and MBB Cant. 
 3, 7. See Diet, of Antt. art. Lectus. 
 
 2. a couch, sofa, divan, for sitting or 
 reclining ; Luke 17, 34 eo-ovrat 8vo eVi Xt- 
 vas pias, i. e. two persons shall be sitting 
 or reclining together ; comp. the expression 
 in Matt. 24, 40. Sept. and ?! Am. 6, 4, 
 comp. 3, 12. So Luc. Alex. 15 eVi K\ivr)s 
 KaSefd/iei/os. Xen. Cyr. 8. 8. 16. Plato 
 Prot. 317. d, e. Spec, a triclinium, i. e. the 
 couch on which they reclined at meals, sete 
 in avuKeifj-ai no. 2 ; Mark 7, 4 /SaTmoyious 
 i70TTjpi(ov . . . Kai K\ivS>v. Prob. Mark 4, 21 
 et Luke 8, 16 6 Xv^vos . . . inro TTJV K\ivr]v. 
 Sept. and Mas Esth. 7, 8. Ez. 23, 41. So 
 Luc. Catapl. 16. Plato Rep. 373. a ; also 
 Luc. Tox. 28 VTTO t&ivrj- Dem. 609. 15 VTTO 
 KkivrfV. 
 
 K\tviiov, ov, TO, (dimin. KXiVq,) a little 
 bed, Luke 5, 19. 24 ; comp. v. 18 where it 
 is K^IVT) q. v. Luc. Asin. 2. Plut. Coriolan. 
 24. Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 180. 
 
 K\iva), f. i/o>, perf. K(K\iica, to incline, to 
 bend any thing from a straight position, 
 whether downwards or horizontally. 
 
 1 . to incline, to bow. to bow down, c. ace. 
 e. g. TO TrpocrcoTToy ds TTJV yrjv, in reverence, 
 Luke 24, 5 ; rf]i> Ke<pd\7)v. as one dying, 
 John 19, 30 ; also genr. T/JJ/ Kf^oXiji , to re 
 cline or lay the head, for rest, Matt. 8, 20. 
 Luke 9, 58. Comp. Sept. and nJ 2 K. 
 
 19, 16. So Diod. Sic. 15. 32. Xen. Eq. 5. 
 5. Intrans. to incline, to decline, spoken of 
 the day, Luke 9, 12. 24, 29 KtK\iKei> % q/*e- 
 pa. So Sept. for T Judg. 19, 11 ; fioa 
 Judg. 19, 8 ; WO Jer. 6, 4. So Pol. 3. 93. 
 7 ; also ryxXtVco Arr. Alex. M. 3. 4. 4. 
 
 2. to turn aside, to turn to flight, Lat. in- 
 clinare aciem, c. ace. Heb. 11, 34 ir 
 
 \as d\\OTpiu>v fK\ti>ai>. Jos. Ant. 14. 15.4 
 Horn. II. 5. 37 ; intrans. Pol. 1. 27. 8. 
 
 K\l(7ia, as, f), (/cXu/tt,) pr. place for re 
 clining ; hence a hut, cot, tent, Horn. Od. 
 16. 1. II. 1. 322 ; a triclinium, couches, for 
 reclining at a meal, Pind. Pyth. 4. 237 ; a 
 table-parly, a company reclining around a 
 table, Jos. Ant. 12. 2. 11. In N. T. accus. 
 /cXto-i ar adverbially, by table-parties, in com 
 panies ; Luke 9, 14 /cara/cXt i/are avroi/s *Xi- 
 o-ias dva nfvrrjKovra. Comp. Buttm. 11 5. 4. 
 
 /eXoTn?, ijs, 17, OcXe Trro),) theft, Matt. 15, 
 19. Mark 7, 22. Sept. for inf. of 3?a Gen. 
 40, 15. Hos. 4, 2. Dem. 1113. 17. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 2. 6. 
 
 K\vocoi>) covos, 6, (xXufw,) a dashing of 
 the sea, surge, billows, Luke 8, 24. James 
 1, 6. Sept. for t?& Jon. 1, 4. 11. 12. 
 Pol. 1. 27. 4. Diod. Sic. 3. 21 ; trop. Plato 
 Legg. 758. a. 
 
 K\v8a>v%ofiai, Pass, depon. ( K XvS<av,) 
 to surge, to be tossed in billows ; trop. to 
 fluctuate. Eph. 4, 14 /cXvoWtfo/xei/ot Travrl 
 dvffjLU SiSao-KaXiW Sept. for ^^?3 Is. 57, 
 20. Jos. Ant. 9. 11. 3 6 8rjp.os Tapacrcro/xe- 
 vos KOI Kkv8a>vi6iJ.evos. Aristaen. 1. ep. 27. 
 
 -KXeoTray, 5, 6, Clopas, pr. n. John 19, 
 25 ; elsewhere called Alpheus, see in AX- 
 <palos no. 1. 
 
 Kvr/^oj, f. Kvria-d), (/ewia>,) on this form 
 see Buttm. 5 112. 12. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
 254 ; to rub, to scratch ; Mid. KVTja-acr^ai. TO 
 ovs to scratch one s own ear, Luc. bis Ace. 
 1 ; TT)V Kf(paXr]v Plut. Pomp. 48 ult. Hence 
 to tickle, Anthol. Gr. III. p. 86. 8, els yap 
 dfioi^rjv, us Xe yrrai. Kvrfitiv ol8tv ovos TOV 
 ovov. In N. T. only Pass, to be tickled, to 
 feel an itching, trop. 2 Tim. 4, 3 <vrftop.fvoi 
 TI]V u.K.oi]v, lit. being tickled, itching, as to the 
 ears, i. e. having an itching to hear some 
 thing pleasing ; for the accus. see Buttm. 
 5 131. 7. Winer j 32. 5. So Hesych. Kvrj- 
 
 %6p.(VOl TTjV U.KOTJV ^TJTOVVTfS T\ KOVO~al Ka3* 
 
 T)8ovr]v. Comp. Kvri&is uiTtov Plut. de Su- 
 perst. 5. 
 
 Kvioos, ov, f], Cnidus or Gnidus, a town 
 and peninsula of Doris in Caria, jutting out 
 from the southwestern part of Asia Minor 
 between the islands of Rhodes and Cos, 
 celebrated for the worship of Venus. Acts 
 27, 7. See Strabo 14. p. 653. Plin. H. N. 
 36. 4. 5. 
 
 KoBpavrr}^, ov, 6, Lat. quadrans, q. d. 
 a farthing, the fourth part of an as, dao-a- 
 piov, q. v. It was a small brass coin, equal 
 to two Xrra, i. e. nearly to two-fifths of 
 one cent, or three-fourths of one farthing 
 
K0i\ia 
 
 eterling ; Matt. 5, 26. Mark 12, 42. See 
 in d<ra-dpiov. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 492. 
 
 K0i\ia, as, f], (KoIXoy,) the belly, e. g. 
 the exterior, Sept. for "33 Judg. 3, 21. Pol. 
 39. 2. 7. In N. T. 
 
 1. Genr. the belly, the bowels, as the re 
 ceptacle of food ; often as in Engl. for the 
 stomach, either in men or animals, Matt. 12, 
 40 ev rfj /cotXra row KTJTOVS. 15, 17. Mark 
 
 7, 19. Luke 15, 16 yt^io-ai rrjv KoiXiav av- 
 TOV. Rom. 16, 18. 1 Cor. 6, 13 bis, /Spoyta- 
 ra TTJ KotXia KT\. Phil. 3, 19. Rev. 10, 9. 
 10. Sept. for Eia Jon. 2, 2. Num. 5, 22. 
 Luc. Cynic. 6. Hdian. 1. 17. 23. Thuc. 
 2. 49. 
 
 2. From the Heb. by synecd. the womb ; 
 Matt. 19, 12 f< Koikias ^rpos. Luke 1, 15. 
 41. 42. 44. 2, 21. John 3, 4. Acts 3, 2. 14, 
 
 8. Gal. 1, 15. Personified, for the woman 
 herself, Luke 11,27. 23, 29. So Sept. and 
 IBS} Gen. 25, 24. Is. 44, 2 ; B tta Gen. 25, 
 23. Ruth 1, 11 ; Cri-n Job 3, 11. 10, 18. 
 
 3. Trop. from the Heb. for the inward 
 parts, the inner man, as in Engl. the breast, 
 the heart. John 7, 38 Trora/xot e< TTJS KoiKias 
 avTov KT\. So Sept. and "JE3 J b 15^ 35 
 Prov. 20, 27 ; B tfa P s . 40, 9. 
 
 KOifiaco, o), f. ^o-o), (kindr. KeT/nat,) to 
 make sleep, to put. to sleep, Horn. II. 14. 236 ; 
 trop. ib. 12. 281. In N. T. and genr. Pass. 
 Koipdopai, oi/iat, with fut. Mid. ijcro/iai. 
 
 1 . to be put to sleep, to fall asleep, to sleep, 
 intrans. Matt. 28, 13. Luke 22,45 /cot/iw^e - 
 vovs dno TTJS XvTnjy. John 11, 12. Acts 12, 6. 
 Sept. for ^ Is. 5, 27 ; 33 1 Sam. 3, 15. 
 JE\. V. H. 9. 24. Xen. Mem. 4. 5. 9. 
 
 2. to sleep the sleep of death, i. q. to die, 
 to be dead; Matt. 27, 52. John 11,11. Acts 
 7, 60 TOVTO eiTTwv tKoip.rj ZT). 13. 36. 1 Cor. 
 7,39. 11,30. 15,6.18.20.51. 1 Thess. 
 4, 13. 14. 15. 2 Pet 3, 4. So Sept. often 
 for 3310 1 K. 2, 10. 11, 43. Is. 43, 17. 
 2 Mace. 12, 45. Horn. II. 11. 241. Soph. 
 Electr. 509. 
 
 KOifJ,r)(ri<?) fug, fj, (KOI/XOO),) a sleeping, 
 sleep; meton. rest, repose, John 11, 13. 
 Plut. Symp. 8. 7. 4. Plato Conv. 183. a. 
 
 KOIVOS, {], ov, 1. common, shared alike 
 by all ; Acts 9 , 44 d^ov dnavra Koivd. 4, 
 32: Tit. 1, 4. Jude 3. Wisd. 7, 3. Hdian. 
 7 8. 13. Xen. An. 3. 1. 43. 
 
 2. In the Levitical sense, common, not set 
 apart and sacred ; hence ceremonially i. q. 
 unlawful, unclean, profane. Mark 7, 2 KOIVO.IS 
 
 X*P<ri",TOVT fQ-TLV dviTTTOLS. [v. 5.] Acts 10, 
 
 14 ovSeVore f(payov irav KOIVOV r] aKcfcaprov. 
 v. 28. 11,8. Rom. 14, 14ter. So 1 Mace. 
 
 Koivowia 
 
 1, 47. 62. Jos. Ant. 13. 1. 1 KOIVOV fiiov. 
 Trop. under the gospel dispensation, unholy, 
 unconsecrated ; Heb. 10. 29 TO afp.a T^S 8ia- 
 %fjKr)s KOIVOV fjyrjo-d/jLfvos, i. e. unconsecrat 
 ed, common, and therefore having no atoning 
 efficacy. Rev. 21, 27 in later edit. 
 
 KOivoo), o), f. o)o-o), (KOIVOS,) to make com 
 mon, to communicate with others, Pol. 8. 
 18. 1. Thuc. 1. 39. In N. T. in the Levit- 
 ical sense, to make common, i. e. to render 
 unlawful, unclean, to dejile, ceremonially, c. 
 ace. Matt. 15, 11 bis. 18. 20 bis, TO. KOIVOVV- 
 TO TOV av^p. KT\. Mark 7, 15 bis. 18. 20. 23. 
 Heb. 9. 13. Also to regard as common, to 
 call unclean, Acts 10, 15. 11, 9. (Hesych 
 fJ.T] KOIVOV fj.f) aKa^apTOV Ae ye.) Hence 
 genr. to profane, to desecrate, to pollute, c- 
 acc. Acts 21, 28 TOV ayiov TOTTOV. AbsoU 
 Rev. 21, 27 Rec. 
 
 Kotvcoveo)) o>, f. 770-0), (KOIVUVOS,*) to have 
 in common with others, to partake of or in 
 a thing or person. 
 
 1. Of things, c. gen. to partake of any 
 thing ; Heb. 2, 14 KfKoivatvyite (rapubs KOI 
 ciip.aTos. (2 Mace. 5, 20. Hdian. 3. 10. 15. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 22.) With dat. to partake 
 in any thing ; Rom. 15, 27 yap TOIS -rrvev- 
 /iariKoiy avTu>v fKoivutinjo-av TO. f^vrf. 1 Tim. 
 5^ 22. 1 Pet. 4, 13. 2 John 11. Rom. 12, 13 
 TOIS xpa aif Ttav ayicav Koivcovovvrfs, sharing 
 in the necessities of the saints, i. e. aiding 
 them. So Wisd. 6, 23. Plut. Arat. 8. Dem! 
 1436. 11. 
 
 2. Of persons, to partake with any one, 
 c. dat. et tv, Gal. 6, 6 Koii>o>i>etYo> Se 6 KaTq- 
 %ovfj.fvos TOV Xoyov TO? KaTrj^ovvri fv Trdcrijf 
 dyaSoT?, let him that is taught share with 
 his teacher in all good things, i. e. let him 
 communicate to his teacher of his good 
 tilings. With els Phil. 4, 15. So dat. of 
 pers. and gen. Pol. 2. 42. 5. ^El. V. H. 3. 
 17 ; dat. and els Act. Thorn. {26. 
 
 KOLVcovidj as, rj, (/coiyowfeo,) a partaking, 
 sharing, i. e. 
 
 1. participation, communion, fellowship, 
 Acts 2, 42. 1 Cor. 1, 9. 10, 16 bis, ov^i 
 Koivatvia TOV aipaTos . . . K. TOV crco/naToy ToO 
 Xp. 2 Cor. 6, 14. 8,4 K. TTJS 8iaKov[as, a part, 
 share, in transmitting this alms. 13, 13 K. 
 TOV ayiov TrvevpaTos. Gal. 2, 9 Se^ia KOIVO>~ 
 vias the right hand of fellowship, the pledge 
 of communion. Eph. 3, 9 Rec. Phil. 1, 5 
 K. VJJLOIV els TO evayye\iov, i. e. your partici 
 pation in the gospel, accession to it. 2, 1 
 3, 10. Philem. 6. 1 John 1, 3 bis. 6. 7. 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 5. 1 K, TT)S 6/iot os o-vp.<popas. 
 Hdian. 8. 2. 11. Plato Soph. 252. b. 
 
 2. communication to others, distribution 
 
405 
 
 genr. Hdian. 1. 10. 3. In N. T. meton. a 
 contribution, a collection of money in behalf 
 of poorer churches, Rom. 15, 26. 2 Cor. 9, 
 13. Heb. 13, 16. So Phavor. noivuvia n 
 
 KOIVOJVIKOS, 77, 6v, (jCMMNtfrO communi- 
 cative, social, Pol. 2. 41. 1. In N. T. com 
 municating, ready to give, liberal, 1 Tim. 
 6, 18. So Luc. Tim. 56 Trpos av8pa, olov 
 af, ebrXcukfai KOI TU>V ovra>v KOIVCOVIKOV. M. 
 Antonin. 7. 52. 
 
 KOLVCOVOf, ov, 6, TI, (KOIVOS,) a partaker, 
 partner, companion, absol. 2 Cor. 8, 23 vrrtp 
 Ti rou, Koivtovos ep.6s. Philem. 17. So Ec- 
 clus. 41, 18. Hdian. 2. 8. 5. Plato Rep. 
 333. b. With gen. of pers. of whom one 
 is the companion, with whom he partakes 
 in any thing, Matt. 23, 30. 1 Cor. 10, 20. 
 Heb. 10, 33. (Sept. for "OH Is. 1, 23. 
 Hdian. 4. 14. 4.) With dat. of pers. to or 
 with whom one is partner, Luke 5, 10 KOI- 
 vavol r<a 2{p.u>vi. Comp. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 
 24. With gen. of thing, 1 Cor. 10, 18 KOI- 
 va>vo\ TOV Zvo~iacrTT)piov, i. e. of the victims 
 sacrificed. 2 Cor. 1,7. 1 Pet. 5, 1. 2 Pet. 
 
 1, 4. So Ecclus. 6, 10. Hdian. 1. 8. 6. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 26. 
 
 KQiTi], rjs, 17, (KftfjLcu,) a lying down, for 
 rest or sleep, Hdot. 1. 10 S>prj rfjs KOITTJS 
 bed-time. Hence genr. and in N. T. 
 
 1 . a place of repose, a bed ; Luke 11,7 
 
 TO. TTCllSia fJLCT e /XOl) 1? TT]V KOITTJV. So JoS. 
 
 Ant. 6. 4. 2. Pol. 4. 57. 9. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 
 1. Spec, the marriage-bed, and meton. for 
 marriage itself, Heb. 13, 4. So Jos. Ant. 
 
 2. 4. 5. Plut. de Fluv. p. 18 ^77 3e Xooi> fuai- 
 vtiv Tr]V KOITTJV TOV yevvr]<ravTos. Eurip. Med. 
 152. 
 
 2. a lying with a woman, cohabitation, 
 whether lawful or unlawful. Rom. 13, 13 
 TTfptTMrrjo-w^ei/ . . . pf] Koirais, i. e. not in 
 lewdness. Sept. for SS iSs Lev. 18, 22. 
 Num. 31, 17. 18. 35. sVwisd. 3, 13. 16. 
 Find. Pyth. 11. 39. Eurip. Hippol. 154. 
 Hence from the Heb. meton. emissio semi- 
 nis as necessary for conception ; Rom. 9, 
 10 e| evbs KOLTTJV t^ovcra, having conceived 
 5y one. So Sept. ei 8o>Ke TIS Trjv KOITTJV 
 avrov tv a-oi for Heb. Pabtt) "P3 Num. 5, 
 20. Lev. 18, 23 ; comp. Lev. 18720. 
 
 KOITOJV, S>vos, 6. (KOI TTJ.) a bed-chamber ; 
 Acts 12, 20 6 eVl TOV KoiTutvos TOV ftacn- 
 Xewr. the king s chamberlain, his chamber 
 attendant, valet-de-chambre ; see in BXd- 
 OTOS. Sept. for 33!l5ia Ex. 8, 3 ; asaiia -iiri 
 2 Sam. 4, 7. Luc. Asin. 2. DkxL Sic. 11. 
 69. Not used by the best writers, Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 252 sq. 
 
 KOKKiVOS, r), ov, adj. (KO KKOS,) pr. refen 
 ring to the coccus ilicis of Linn, or kermes, 
 a small insect found adhering to the shoots 
 of a species of oak, quercus ccccifera, in 
 Spain and western Asia, in the form of 
 smooth reddish-brown or blackish grains, 
 about the size ef a pea. These grains or 
 berries, as they were thought to be, were 
 used by the ancients for dying a crimson or 
 deep rose color ; but have been superseded 
 in modern times by the cochineal insect, 
 coccus cacti, which gives a more brilliant 
 but less durable colour; see Rosenm. Bibl. 
 Alterthumsk. IV. ii. p. 447. Plin. H. N. 9. 
 65. ib. 16. 12. Hence KOKKIVOS, coccus- 
 dyed, crimson; Matt. 27, 28 ^Xa/nuSa KOK- 
 K.ivr)v, for which in Mark 15, 17 irop(pvpav. 
 Heb. 9, 19. Rev. 17,3.4. 18, 12. 16. Sept. 
 for nsbl n Ex. 25, 4. 28, 5 ; ^ti Josh. 2, 
 18. 2L~ So Plut. Fab. Max. 15. 
 
 KOKKOS, ov, 6, a kernel, grain, seed. 
 Matt. 13, 31 K. o-ivdirevs. 17, 20. Mark 4, 
 31. Luke 13,19. 17,6. John 12, 24 K. TOW 
 o-irou. 1 Cor. 15, 37. Hdot. 4. 143. Plut. 
 Mor. II. p. 3. See also in KOKKIVOS. 
 
 KO\a(O, f. daofiai, (kindr. KoXo?, KO- 
 Xovw,) pr. to curtail, to prune, e. g. ra SeV- 
 Spo Theophr. Caus. PL 5. 9. 11; trop. to 
 correct, to moderate, ^El. V. H. 11.3. Xen. 
 (Ec. 20. 12. Hence in N. T. and genr. 
 to chastise, to punish, c. ace. Acts 4,21 TTOJS 
 KoXdo"cowat O.VTOVS. 2 Pet. 2, [4.] 9 KoXafo- 
 pfvovs TTjpelv i. e. to -reserve as subject to 
 punishment, see Winer 46. 5. n. So 
 2 Mace. 6, 14. Hdian. 3. 5. 13. Xen. Mem. 
 3. 13. 4. 
 
 K0\aiceia, as , f/, (*:oXa,) Jlattery, 
 1 Thess. 2, 5. Jos. B. J. 4. 4. 1. Dem, 
 1099. 9. Plato Gorg. 466. a. 
 
 /co\a<rt9, fas , 17, (KoXda>,) a curtailing, 
 pruning, e. g. KoXao-is T&V 8ev8pcav Theo 
 phr. Caus. PI. 2. 4. 4. In N. T. punish 
 ment, Matt. 25, 46 fls Ko\acriv aluviov. 
 1 John 4, 18 see in ^&> no. 2. d. a. So 
 Wisd. 16, 2. 24. JEl V. H. 7. 15. Plato 
 Rep. 380. b. 
 
 KdXacrcrai, see KoXoo-o-m. 
 
 K6\a<pl(i), f. j o-o), (Ko\a<pos, KoXoTTTO).) 
 to smite with the jist, to buffet, c. ace. Matt. 
 26, 67 et Mark 14, 65 (Ko\d<picrav OVTOV. 
 Genr. to buffet, to maltreat, c. ace. 2 Cor. 
 12, 7. Pass. 1 Cor. 4, 11. 1 Pet. 2, 20. 
 Test. XII Patr. 708 oXa(p/ TCI Ttitva. 
 Unknown to the Attics, who used KovSv- 
 Xi fa>, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 175. 
 
 K0\\da), oj, f. lyo-w, (KoXXa glue,) to 
 glue together, to make cohere, Luc. Hist. 
 
406 
 
 consc-. 51. Plato Tim. 82. d. In N. T. 
 Mid. KoXXao/iai, w/xat, and Pass. aor. 1 
 fKo\\r]%r]v with Mid. signif. Buttm. 136. 
 1,2; to adhere, to cleave to, pr. of things, c. 
 dat. Luke 10, 11 TOV KoviopTov TOV KoXX?;- 
 3eWa vfj.lv. Praegn. in later edit. Rev. 18, 
 5 eKO\\rj%r]o-av CIVTTJS at aftapTiai d%pl TOV 
 ovpavov. Sept. for pan Ps. 102, 6. Job 
 29, 10. (Anthol. Gr. L p. 231.) Trop. of 
 persons, to join oneself unto, c. dat. of 
 thing, e. g. ap/iart, to follow, to accompany, 
 Acts 8, 29 ; ro3 ayaSaJ, to cleave to, Rom. 
 12, 9. Sept. and pan 2 K. 3, 3. With dat. 
 of pers. to join oneself to any one, to become 
 his servant, Luke 15, 15 ; to follow, to cleave 
 to, e. g. to a wife, so Lachm. Matt. 19, 5 ; 
 also TJJ Tropvrj 1 Cor. 6, 16 (Ecclus. 19, 
 2) ; TW Kvpia v. 17 (Sept. and pan 2 K. 
 18, 6) ; to follow the side or party of any 
 one, to associate with, Acts 5, 13. 9,26. 10, 
 28. 17, 34. Sept. and pan 2 Sam. 20, 2. 
 So 1 Mace. 3, 2. Plut. de Amicor. mult. 4. 
 
 tcoXkovptov v. KoKkvpiov, ov, TO, 
 (dim. of KoXXvpa coarse bread, cake,) pr. a 
 small cake, cracknel, Sept. for D^np? 1 K. 
 14, 3 Alex. In N. T. collyrium, eye-salve, 
 made up in small cakes, KoXkvpai, Rev. 3, 
 18. So Arr. Epict. 3. 21. 21. Luc. Alex. 
 21 Ko\\vpiov crKfvao-Tov 8e TOVTO f&Tiv eK 
 KITTYS Bpvrriay, Kat ao~<pd\Tov, KOI Xt 3ou 
 TOV 8ia(pavovs TfTpifififvov, Kal Krjpov, Ka\ 
 /iaari ^y, KT\. Other kinds are described 
 in Gels, de Med. 6. 2 sq. ib. 7. 4. Dioscor. 
 1. 2. 
 
 KoXXvficaTijs, ov, 6, (KoXXv/3os a small 
 coin, Aristoph. Pax 1196, 1200,) a money 
 changer, broker, i. q. Kep/iartcrn^y, Matt. 21, 
 12. Mark 11, 15. John 2, 15. They had 
 their seats in the porticos of the outer court 
 of the temple ; see more in Kep/^wmoT^y. 
 Comp. in art. Tpairf^LTrjs, and Adam s Rom. 
 Ant. p. 501 ; also Rabb. j nb ip Buxt. Lex. 
 2032. Lysias Fragm. 34 ult. The gram 
 marians condemn this word, Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 440. 
 
 KoXXvpiov, see KoX\ovptov. 
 
 to dock, to cut off, as members of the body, 
 c. ace. Sept. 2 Sam. 4, 12. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 78 fin. In N. T. trop. of time, to cut off, 
 to make short, Pass. Matt. 24, 22 bis, et 
 Mark 13, 20 bis, KoXo/ScoS^o-oirai at T^iepat. 
 So Heb. 1SJ3 Prov. 10, 27, Sept. oXtyo3f 
 o-ovrai. 
 
 KoXoaaai or KoXacrcrai, o>v, at, Co- 
 losse, a city of Phrygia Major, situated near 
 the Lycus some distance above (S. E.) of 
 
 its junction with the Meander ; and not far 
 from Hierapolis and Laodicea, east of the 
 latter; Col. 1, 2. With these cities it was 
 destroyed by an earthquake about A. D. 62. 
 A modern village near the site is called 
 Konos or Chona. See Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. 
 
 I. ii. p. 204, 228. Pococke Descr. of the 
 East, II. ii. p. 78. Hamilton s Res. in Asia 
 Minor, I. p. 508, 510. 
 
 Ko\oo-(raev$, ems, 6, a Colossian; 
 Plur. KoXoo-craeTy, Colossians, only in the 
 spurious subscription to the epistle. 
 
 tfoA/Troy, ov, 6, the bosom, the lap, e. g. 
 
 1 . Genr. the bosom, breast, of a man ; 
 John 13, 23 dvaKfifj,vos ev r<5 KoXma TOV 
 ITJO-OV, reclining on Jesus bosom, i. e. next 
 to him on the triclinium at supper, so that 
 his head was near to Jesus bosom ; comp. 
 in dvaKeifjtat no. 2. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 
 436. So Lat. in sinu recumbo Plin. Ep. 
 4. 22. Trop. to be in or on the bosom of 
 any one, i. q. to be in his embrace, to be 
 cherished by him as the object of strong 
 affection and care ; comp. in Engl. bosom- 
 friend, etc. John 1, 18 6 &v els TOV KO\ITOV 
 TOV Trarpo?, i. q. 6 fj.oi>oyevfjs vlos. So Luke 
 16, 22 et? TOP KO\TTOV TOV A/3paa/x, and v. 23 
 A.dapoi> ev Tols KO\TTOIS avTov, i. e. in inti 
 mate communion with Abraham, as one of 
 his beloved children ; for the Plur. see J21. 
 V. H. 13. 30. Winer 5 27. 3 ; comp. Engl. 
 embraces. So Josephus de Mace. 13 
 [4 Mace. 13, 16] OVTCO yap Savovras, rjfuis 
 A/Spao/i KOL lo-aciK KOI laKcofi vTrodeovrai 
 els TOVS Koknovs avTo>v. Comp. Lightfoot 
 Hor. Heb. in loc. Sept. 77 ywrj ev rw oX- 
 TTW o-ou for Heb. ^p/r? Mia Deut. l3, 7. 
 28, 54. 56; comp. 2 Sam. 12, 3. 8. Is. 40, 
 
 II. So Ecclus. 9, 1. Plut. Cato Min. 33 ult. 
 
 TafBlVlOV, fK TtoV HofJ.7TT]lOV K<J\TTO)V aV3pO)- 
 
 TTOV. Cic. ad Div. 14. 4 "tu vero sis in 
 sinu semper et complexu meo." Others 
 refer Luke 1. c. to a banquet in the king 
 dom of heaven, comp. Matt. 8, 11. Luke 
 13, 29; see in dvaK\iva> no. 2. But the 
 scene is here laid in abrjs, and not in the 
 Messiah s kingdom. 
 
 2. Spec, the bosom of an oriental gar 
 ment, which falls down over the girdle, and 
 is used for carrying things, as a sort of 
 pocket. Luke 6, 38 SoWovcri els TOV KO\TTOV 
 vpS>v. Sept. and P^n Is. 65, 6. Jer. 32, 18. 
 Luc. D. Mar. 12. 1. Pol. 3. 33. 2. Hdot. 
 6. 125. Comp. Hor. Sat. 2. 3. 172. Liv. 21. 
 18 " tune Romanus, sinu ex toga facto." 
 
 3. Put for a bay, gulf, inlet of the sea, 
 Acts 27, 39. Jos. Ant. 3. 1. 5. Hdian. 8. 
 1. 12. Xen. Hell. 6. 2. 9. 
 
407 
 
 /C07T09 
 
 aG>, , f. jja-w, to diuc, to swim, 
 absol. Acts 27, 43. Hierocl. Facet. 1. 
 Plut, Quaest. nat. 1. Plato Lach. 193. c. 
 
 as, ], (KoXv^jSaco, pr. 
 a swimming-place, hence a pool, pond, any 
 reservoir of water for swimming, bathing, 
 fish, or the like ; genr. 17 *oX. roC 2tXa>a/* 
 John 9, 7. 11 ; a healing bath or pool, see 
 B?3eo-8a, John 5, 2. 4. 7. Sept. for fiD^S 
 2 K. 18, 17. Is. 7, 3. Diod. Sic. 11/25 . 
 Plato Rep. 453. d. 
 
 K0\a)via, as, 17, Lat. colonia, i. e. a Ro 
 man colony, Acts 16, 12 ; see Adam s Rom. 
 Ant. p. 72 sq. Diet, of Antt. art. Colonia. 
 Philippi is here so called, because Augustus 
 had colonized thither many of the partisans 
 of Antony, Dion Cass. 51. 4. p. 445. 
 
 KOfida), <, f. qo-w, Oco /i?/,) to have long 
 hair, to wear the hair long, 1 Cor. 11, 14. 
 15. Jos. Ant. 4. 4. 4. Luc. D. Deor. 15. 1. 
 Xen. Lac. 11. 3. 
 
 K0/J,r), rjs, f], the hair, head of hair, 1 Cor. 
 11, 15. Sept. for jna Num. 6, 5. Hdian. 
 
 I. 7. 9. Xen. Cyr. l". 3. 2. 
 
 /C0/u &>, f. ^ crw, Att. f. io>, (xo/iecu,) to 
 take care of, to provide for, Horn. II. 24. 541 ; 
 so of one fallen in battle, to take up and 
 bear away Horn. II. 13. 196; hence genr. 
 to take up, to carry off, e. g. as booty Horn. 
 
 II. 2. 875. ib. 11. 738. In N. T. genr. 
 
 1. to bear, to bring, trans. Luke 7, 37 
 Kop-ltraua dXa/3acrrpoj> p.vpov. 1 Esdr. 4, 5. 
 Arr. Alex. M. 7. 22. 8. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 2. 
 
 2. Mid. Kop.iofi.ai, Att. f. K0fiiovfj.ai, 
 to bear or bring to oneself, to take for one 
 self, i.e. to acquire, to obtain, to receive; 
 c. ace. Matt. 25, 27 fKop.iarup.riv av TO (p.6v. 
 2 Cor. 5, 10. Col. 3, 25 Kop-idrai b Tjo iKrio-f. 
 Heb. 10, 36 K. TTJV eVayyfXiai/. 11, 39. 
 
 1 Pet. 1, 9. 5, 4. 2 Pet. 2, 13 ; with napd 
 c. gen. Eph. 6, 8. So 2 Mace. 8, 33. Arr. 
 Alex. M. 5. 27. 3. Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 10. 
 Spec, to receive back, to recover, c. ace. Hebt 
 11,19. Sept. for npb Gen. 38, 20. So 
 
 2 Mace. 10, 1. Diod. Sic. 12. 80. 
 
 KOfJi^forepov, adv. compar. (/co/i^toy,) 
 better, in the phrase no^ortpov ex flv i se 
 melius ha bere, to be better, to mend, John 4, 
 52; see in ex w no - *> Arr - Epict. 3. 10. 
 13 KO/LH//-WJ ex eu/ - ^ c> a ^ ^ V- 16. 15 belle 
 habere. 
 
 KOVldtt), 5>, f. ao-co, (K<w a,) to whitewash, 
 to whiten, with lime, Pass. Matt. 23, 27 
 rdfpois K(Koviap.(vois, whited sepulchres, in 
 accordance with an annual custom of the 
 Jews on the 25th day of the month Adar ; 
 see Wetst. N. T. hi loc. Acts 23, 3 ro i^e 
 
 K(Koviap.eix, thou whited wall, i. e. thou hy 
 pocrite, fair without and foul within. Sept. 
 for iijo Deut. 27, 2. 4. Diod. Sic. 19. 94. 
 Plut. Cato Maj. 4 pen. 
 
 Koviopros, ov, 6, (KOVIO, opwp.i, ) dust t 
 pr. as excited, flying, Matt. 10, 14. Luke 
 
 9, 5. 10, 11. Acts 13, 51. 22, 23. Sept. for 
 p2* Nah. 1,3; IBS Deut. 9, 21. Pol. 5. 
 85. 1. Xen. An. 1. 8. 8. 
 
 KOTrdfa, f. dcra, (KOTTOS,) pr. to be 
 beat out, weary, i. q. KOTrida ; hence to 
 relax, to abate, to cease, intrans. e. g. of the 
 wind, Matt. 14, 32. Mark 4, 39. 6, 51. 
 Sept for TjStt! Gen. 8, 1 ; pntf Jon. 1, 11. 
 12. Ecclus. 23, 17. Hdot. 7. 191. 
 
 /C07rero9, O v, 6, ((coTrro/xat,) lamentation, 
 wailing, as accompanied with beating the 
 breast, and the like ; Acts 8, 2. Sept. for 
 15013 Gen. 50, 10. Zech. 12, 10. 11. 
 Dion. Hal. Ant. 11. 31. Plut. Fab. Max. 17. 
 
 /COTTT;, ^y, ^, (KOTTTW,) slaughter, carnage, 
 Heb. 7, 1 ; in allusion to Gen. 14, 17 where 
 Sept. .for inf. nisti ; Sept. for tiS o Josh. 
 
 10, 20. Judith 15, 7. 
 
 KOTTiaw, a, f. ao-to, (KOTTIO, KOTroy,) pr. 
 as Engl. to be beat out, i. e. 
 
 1. to be weary, tired, to faint, absol. Matt. 
 
 11, 28 8fvre Trpos p.e trdvrfs ol Komfovrfs. 
 Rev. 2, 3 ; c. e /c John 4, 6 K. e/c TTJS 6801- 
 Tropias. Sept. for 551 Is. 40, 31. Jos. B. 
 J. 3. 10. 2. Aristoph. T Thesm. 795. Athen. 
 10. p. 416. 
 
 2. Spec, in N. T. to weary oneself with 
 labour, like Heb. S- ?^ , i. e. to labour, to work 
 hard, to toil, absol. Luke 5, 5 81 O\TJS rrjs 
 VVKTOS KOTTidcravTfs ov8fi> e\dj3op.ev. Matt. 
 6, 28 et Luke 12, 27 ra xpiva . . . ov KOTTIO. 
 ov8e vrftfi. Acts 20, 35. 1 Cor. 4, 12. Eph. 
 4, 28. 2 Tim. 2, 6. Trop. of a teacher who 
 labours in the gospel, John 4, 38 bis. 1 Cor. 
 
 15, 10. 16, 16. Sept. for Heb. W Josh. 
 24, 13; i Ps. 127, 1. (Anthol. Gr. IV. 
 p. 134. 2 fir) Tpi^f, p.f) KOTTi a.) With ei> to 
 labour in, trop. tv \6yco 1 Tim. 5, 17 ; eV KV- 
 pi(p i. e. in the work of the Lord, Rom. 16, 
 12 bis ; eV ip.1v among you, 1 Thess. 5, 12. 
 (Comp. Ecclus. 6, 19.) With eiy c. ace. 
 of pers. upon or for whom, s rjp.ds Rom. 
 
 16, 6 ; (Is vp.ds Gal. 4, 11. (Ecclus. 24, 34.) 
 With els final, as ds TOVTO STL J Tim. 4, 10 ; 
 (Is o Col. 1, 29 ; ds K(VOV in vain Phil. 2, 
 16. Sept. K. ds Kfvuv for S?^ Is. 65, 23. 
 Jer. 51, 53. 
 
 /C07T09, ou, 6, (KOTTTCO,) pr. a beating , 
 then wailing, grief, as accompanied with 
 beating the breast, i. q. KOTTCTOS, Sept. for 
 "pi* 1 Jer. 45, 3 ; also the being beat out, wea- 
 
KOTTpia 
 
 408 
 
 riness, Xen. An. 5. 8. 3. Hence in N. T. 
 toil, labour, wearisome effort, genr. John 4, 
 38 vp.(1s els ran KOTTOV avT&v eicrfXr/XvSare. 
 
 1 Cor. 3, 8. 15, 58 6 KOTTOS v^u>v ev Xptarw. 
 
 2 Cor. 6, 5. 10, 15. 11, 23. 27. 1 Thess. 1, 
 
 3 6 KOTTOS TIJS dydtrr/s, the labour of love, work 
 of beneficence. 2, 9. 3, 5. 2 Thess. 3, 8. 
 Heb. 6, 10. Rev. 2, 2. 14, 13. Sept. for 
 9*** Gen. 31, 42. So Ecclus. 14, 15. 
 Arr . Epict. 2. 14. 2. Plut. de Superst. 
 7 mid. Spec, trouble, vexation, in the 
 phrase KQTTOVS irapf^eiv nvi, i. q. to 
 trouble, to vex any one, Matt. 26, 10. Mark 
 14, 6. Luke 11, 7. 18, 5. Gal. 6, 17. Sept. 
 KOTTOS for t>3 Job 5, 6. Jer. 20, 18. So 
 KQTTOVS irapexfiv Aristot. Probl. sect. 5. 38. 
 Comp. TTOVOV irapf^fiv Ecclus. 29, 4. Hdot. 
 1. 177; Trpayjuara Trap(\eiv Hdot. 1. 155, 
 175. 
 
 KOTrpia, as, fj, (KdVpoy,) pr. a dung-hill 
 Sept. for n BttJR l Sam. 2, 8. Arr. Epict. 2. 
 4. 4 sq. In N. T. dung, manure, Luke 14, 
 35. 13, 8 Rec. Sept. for n*h 2 K. 9, 37. 
 Jer. 25, 33. So Arr. Epict. 1. cl- Artemid. 2. 9. 
 
 KOTTplOV, ov, TO, (xoirpios, KoVpoy.) dung, 
 manure; Plur. Koirpia Luke 13, 8 Grb. 
 Arr. Epict. 2. 4. 5. Plut. Pomp. 48 init. 
 KOirpicav KoCptvos- 
 
 KOTTTOJ, f. -^6), to strike, to beat, to cut by 
 a blow. 
 
 1. to cut off or down, e. g. branches of 
 trees, c. ace. Matt. 21, 8. Mark 11, 8. Sept. 
 for tV]S Num. 13, 24. Plut. Pericl. 33 mid. 
 Xen. An. 4. 8. 2. 
 
 2. Mid. /coVrojuat, to beat or cwi oneself, i. e. 
 the breast and body in the loud expression 
 of grief; hence, i. q. to lament, to wail, to 
 bewail absol. Matt. 11, 17. 24,30. Luke 
 23, 27 ; c. ace. Luke 8, 52 ; with eVi nva 
 Rev. 1, 7; eVi TLVL 18, 9. Sept. for ^0 
 absol. 2 Sam. 1, 12; c. ace. Gen. 23, 2. 
 50, 10 ; firi nva for i? *!& 2 Sam. 11, 26 ; 
 Ttw Zech. 12, 10. So absol. Hdot. 6. 
 58. Jos. Ant. 7. 1. 6. Plato Phaed. 60. a. 
 Act. KOTTTfiv Tr)i> Svpav Luc. Nigr. 2. Dem. 
 1156.-18. 
 
 Kopa^ CLKOS, 6, a raven, Luke 12, 24. 
 Sept. for yy* Gen. 8, 7. Ml. H. An. 1. 
 35, 47. Hdot. 4. 15. 
 
 Kopdaiov, iov, TO, (dim. xop?;,) a girl, 
 maiden, damsel, Matt. 9, 24. 25. 14, 11. 
 Mark 5, 41. 42. 6, 22. 28 bis. Sept. for 
 n ^3 Ruth 2, 8. 22. 1 Sam. 25, 42. An. 
 Epict. 3. 2. 8. Luc. Asin. 6, 36. The word 
 belongs rather to the style of familiar dis 
 course, like Germ. Madel, Lob. ad Phryn. 
 n. 73 sq s 
 
 , 6, indec. and fcop/Bavas, a, 6, 
 corban, Heb. "|2^}5 , i. e. an offering, obla 
 tion, gift to God ; so Lev. 2, 1. 4. 13, where 
 Sept. 8>pov. In N. T. 
 
 1- Pr. K op/3 a i/, something devoted to 
 God, Mark 7, 1 1 Kopfiav, 5 eon Soipoj/, KT\. 
 Jos. Ant. 4. 4. 4. ot Kopftav avTovs ovo/j.d- 
 cravrts T&> Sew, Stupor 8e roCro a~rjp.aiv(i KT\. 
 
 2. Spec. Kopftavas, spoken of money 
 offered in the temple, the sacred treasure ; 
 hence by meton. the treasury, i. q. yafrfpv- 
 \OKIOV q. v. Matt. 27, 6. Jos. B. J. 2. 9. 4 
 rov Ifpw %T)cravp6i>, KaAeirai Se Kopftavas. 
 
 Kope, 6, indec. Core or Kore, Heb tTn p 
 (ice) Korah, pr. n. of a Levite who rebelled 
 against Moses, Jude 11 ; see Num. c. 16. 
 
 Kopevvvfu, f. Kopeo-w, Pass. perf. KKO- 
 peo-juat, aor. 1 eKopeo-3/;^, ^o sa/e, ?o satisfy, 
 to Jill with food and drink ; Pass, or Mid. 
 to be sated, to be full, i. e. to have eaten and 
 drunk enough ; with gen. of thing, Pass. 
 Acts 27, 38 Kopeo-SeVrey fie Tpocpfjs. Trop. 
 absol. 1 Cor. 4, 8. JEl. V. H. 4. 9. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 11. 13 ; trop. Hdian. 1. 13. 10. 
 
 ios, a, ov, Corinthian, a Corin 
 thian, Acts 18, 8. 2 Cor. 6, 11. 
 
 , ov, TJ, Corinth, a celebrated 
 Grecian city, the capital of Achaia proper, 
 situated on the isthmus between the Pelo 
 ponnesus and the main land, and hence 
 called bimaris, Hor. Od. 1. 7. 2. It lay 
 between the gulfs of Lepanto and Egina, 
 on each of which it had a port, Lechae- 
 um on the former and Cenchrea on the lat 
 ter. A lofty rock bore the citadel, called 
 Akrocorinth. The city- was famous for the 
 worship of Venus and for every species of 
 expensive debauchery; whence the Hora- 
 tian proverb : Non cuivis homini contingit 
 adire Corinthum, Hor. Ep. 1. 17. 36. Co 
 rinth was destroyed by L. Mummius during 
 the Achaian war, about 146 B. C. It was 
 restored by Julius Caesar, and became the 
 capital of the Roman province Achaia and 
 the seat of the proconsul, Acts 1 8, 12. Here 
 Paul resided for more than 18 months (Acts 
 18, 11. 18) and gathered a large church, 
 which was afterwards not wholly exempt 
 from Corinthian vices. See Cellarius Not. 
 Orb. I. 949 sq. Neander Gesch. d. Apost. 
 Zeitalters I. p. 270 sq. 311 sq. edit. 3. 
 Acts 18, 1. 19, 1. 1 Cor. 1, 2. 2 Cor. 1, 1. 
 23. 2 Tim. 4, 20. 
 
 Kopvrj\lo$, ov, 6, Cornelius, pr. n. of a 
 Roman centurion at Cesarea, the first con 
 vert from the Gentiles, Acts 10, 1. 3. 7. 17. 
 21. 22. 24. 25. 30. 31. 
 
/co/909 409 
 
 ATOOO?, ov, 6, corns, Heb. "is cor, the 
 largest Hebrew dry measure, equal to the 
 "ten , i. e. to ten baths or ephahs, Ez. 45, 
 14; and therefore containing about 11 
 bushels or 88y gallons ; see in paras II, 
 and comp. Bceckh s Metrol. Untersuch. p. 
 259 sq. Luke 16, 7 fKarbv Kopovs crtYou. 
 Sept. for 13 2 Chr. 2, 10. 27, 5; for i^n 
 Ez. 45, 13. 
 
 KoafAea), S>, f. jjcrw, (KoV/io?,) to order, 
 to arrange, as an army, to set in array, to 
 draw up Horn. II. 14. 3S8. In N. T. 
 
 1. to put in order, to prepare, e. g. lamps, 
 to trim, c. ace. Matt. 25, 7 fKoo~p.r]o~av ras 
 \afjL7rd8as. So Sept. Koo-p.flv TTJV rpcme^av 
 for Tps Ez. 23, 41. Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 6 
 
 2. to decorate, to adorn, to garnish, c. 
 ace. e. g. TOV OIKOV as for a new dweller 
 Matt. 12, 44. Luke 11, 25 ; a bride, vvp.(pr]v 
 Rev. 21,2; genr. 1 Tim. 2, 9. Luke 21,5. 
 Rev. 21, 19 ; Sept. for rnS Jer. 4, 30. Ez. 
 16, 11. (Hdian. 5. 3. 12. Xen. Mem. 3. 11. 
 4.) Also Matt. 23, 29 Kocr/ieiT TO. p.vr]p.fia, 
 ye decorate the sepulchres, i. e. with garlands 
 and flowers, or by adding columns or other 
 ornaments. So Diod. Sic. 11. 33. Xen. 
 Hell. 6. 4. 7. Comp. ^El. V. H. 12. 7 AXe- 
 av8pos Tov. A^iXXeco? Ta(pov (a-TftpdvaxTf. 
 Trop. to adorn, to dignify, to display -the 
 worth and dignity of; c. ace. Tit. 2, 10 TTJV 
 8i8a<TKa\iav. 1 Pet. 3, 5 at aytai yvvainfs . . . 
 tKoo-povv favriis. So Ecclus. 48, 11. Hdian. 
 6. 3. 5. Xen. Conv. 8. 38. 
 
 KoafjiiKO^ 77, 6v, ((coV/nof,) worldly, ter 
 restrial, opp. (Trovpdvios. Heb. 9, 1 ayiov 
 Koa-fjiiKov, comp. v. 23. So Pint. Consol. ad 
 Apoll. 34 KOO-HIKT) 8idraty. Trop. worldly, 
 as conformed to this world, belonging to 
 the men of this world ; Titus 2, 12 eVtSu- 
 ftim Koo-p.iKai worldly lusts. So Clem. Alex. 
 Paed. 1.16 Xoyoy . . . r^y (cocr/xtK^y trvvrftfias 
 
 ov, 6, f], adj. (KOO-^OS,) well- 
 ordered, decorous, modest, in a moral respect, 
 1 Tim. 2, 9 yvva ia-as iv KaTa<rro\f) Kocr/u w. 
 3, 2 TOV frr[<TKOTTov . . . Kocr/xioy. Pol. 8. 11. 
 7. Xen. Hi. 5. 1. 
 
 KOCT/JiOKpCl TWp, OpOS, 6, (KOO*p.OS, KOa- 
 
 To>,) pr. lord of the world, Schol. in Aris- 
 toph. Nub. 397 Sfcrdyxaxris fta(ri\(vs TCOJ/ 
 ArWTTTUoJ , KOo~p.oKpdT<ap yeyovws KT\. In 
 N. T. of Satan, the prince of this icorld, i. e. 
 of worldly men; Plur. Eph. 6, 12 npos 
 rovs KocrpoKpaTopas TOV CTKOTOVS TOV al- 
 S>vos TOVTOV, i. e. Satan and his angels ; 
 comp. John 12, 31. 2 Cor. 4. 4. So Ignat. 
 1. 1 idflo\ov, ov Km Kocr/xo/cpdropa *ca- 
 
 ti . The Rabbins also have the epithet, 
 ; see Buxt. Lex. Ch. 2006. 
 ov, 6, (prob. Ko/ie w,) order, i. e. 
 regular disposition and arrangement, Horn 
 Od. 13. 77 Koo-p.? KaZiCfiv. Pol. 1. 21. 11. 
 Xen. OEc. 8. 20. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. decoration, ornament, 1 Pet. 3, 3 ov% 
 6 eco3ei>...Ko o7io?. Sept. for **\y Ex. 33, 
 4. 5. 6. Hdian. 3. 6. 19. Xen/ Cyr. 8. 
 4. 24. 
 
 2. order of the universe, the world, Lat. 
 mundus, first so used by Pythagoras and 
 then as a technical term of philosophy, see 
 Passow in voc. So Plato Gorg. 63. p. 508. 
 a, (pao~l 8e oi cro(poi, KOI ovpavbv KM yrjv KOI 
 Seovs Kai dv^puTrovs TTJV KOivatviav avvf^eiv 
 KOL (pi\iav KOL Koo-p.6r>]Ta Kal o-a>(ppoo-vi>T)v 
 KOI 8iKawrr]Ta, KOL TO o\oi> TOVTO 8ia ravra 
 KOO-/J.OV KoXova-i. Plin. H. N. 2. 3, " nam 
 quern nocrfiov Graci, nomine ornament!, ap- 
 pellaverunt, eum nos a perfecta absolutaque 
 elegantia mundum." Comp. Cic. de Nat. 
 Deor. 2. 22. Hence 
 
 a) Genr. the world, the universe, the hea 
 vens and earth, Matt. 13, 35 drro ara/3oXj}f 
 KOO-/J.OV. 24,21 div dpxfis Koo-p.ov. Luke 11, 
 50. John 17, 5. 24. Acts 17. 24. Rom. 1, 
 20. Heb. 4, 3. (2 Mace. 7, 23. JE1. V. H. 
 8. 11. Luc. Icarom. 4. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 11 
 
 O7TWJ 6 Ka\OVp.fVOS V7TO T(0>V ITO(plO~T(OV KO(Tp.OS 
 
 e^ft.) Meton. the universe, for the inhabit 
 ants of the universe, 1 Cor. 4, 9 3aTpoi> 
 rw KoV/icp, Kal dyye Xoty Kal dv- 
 . Trop. as in Engl. a world of any 
 thing, for an aggregate, congeries. James 
 3, 6 T) y\>o~cra. ..KOCT/XO? d8iKias, a world of 
 iniquity. Comp. Sept. Prov. 17, 6 TOV 
 mcTTov o\os 6 Kocrpos TO>V xprjiiUToov, TOV 8( 
 d.Trio TOV ov8e oftoXos- 
 
 b) Synecd. the earth, this lower world, as 
 the abode of man. o) Pr. Mark 16, 15 
 Tropev SfVTfs els TOV KocTfiov airavra. John 
 16, 21. 28. 21, 25. 1 Tim. 3, 16. 1 Pet. 5, 
 9. 2 Pet. 3, 6 6 rdre Kocr/ioy. So ep^6cr3ai 
 fls TOV Koa-p-ov and the like, to come or be 
 sent into the icorld, i. e. to be born John 1, 
 9 ; or to go forth into the world, to appear 
 before men, John 3, 19. 6, 14. 1 Tim. 1, 15. 
 Heb. 10, 5; also 1 John 4, 1. 2 John 7. 
 John 3, 17. 1 John 4, 9. Hyperbolically, 
 Matt. 4, 8 jrdcras TOS f3ao-i\(ias TOV Koo~fJ.ov. 
 Rom. 1, 8. Comp. Luc. de Astrol. 12. ) 
 Meton. the world, for the inhabitants of the 
 earth, men, mankind ; Matt. 5, 14 i^ifl? e or* 
 TO <oir TOV Koa-fJLOv. 13, 38 6 Se dypdy fcmv 
 6 KOO~P.OS- John 1, 29. 3, 16 OVTU> yap Jjyd- 
 Trrjo-fv 6 3eoy TOV Kt )<Tfj.ov. Rom. 3, 6. 19. 
 
 1 Cor. 4, 13. 2 Cor. 5, 19. Heb. 11, 7 
 
 2 Pet. 2, 5 dpxatov Koa/iov. 1 John 2, 2. 
 
Kovdpros 
 
 410 
 
 (Wisd. 10, 1. 14, 6. 14.) So nyperb. the 
 world for the multitude, every body, Fr. tout 
 le monde. John 7, 4 (pavepacrov o-tavTov TO> 
 Koo-pco, opp. tv Kpv7rTa>. 12, 19. 14, 22. 18. 
 20. 2 Cor. 1, 12. 2 Pet. 2, 5 Kovpos d<re- 
 Ba>v. Put also for the heathen world, i. q. 
 TO. e%vij, Rom. 11, 12. 15; comp. Luke 
 12, 30. 
 
 c) In the Jewish mode of speaking, the 
 present world, the present order of things, 
 as opposed to the kingdom of Christ ; and 
 hence always with the idea of transientness, 
 worthlessness, and evil both physical and 
 moral, the seat of cares, temptations, and 
 irregular desires. It is thus nearly i. q. 6 
 aluiv OVTOS, In-fH tj^iSfl , see fully in aivv 
 no. 2. b. a) Genr. and with OVTOS, John 
 12, 25 6 u.io~a>v rr]v ^v^rfv UVTOV ev r&> 
 Kooyzw TovT<a, opp. els far/v alcaviov. 18, 36 
 bis, TJ /3a<riXeia 77 eprj OVK fo~Tiv fK TOV Koo-pov 
 TOVTOV KT\. 1 Cor. 5", 10. Eph. 2, 2. 1 John 
 4, 17. Without OVTOS, 1 John 2, 15. 16. 17. 
 3, 17. Spec, the wealth and enjoyments 
 and cares of this world, this life s goods ; 
 Matt. 16, 26 TI yap axpeXemu av Spamos, 
 eav TOV Koo-pov S\ov KepSijoT/ ; Mark 8, 36. 
 Luke 9, 25. 1 Cor. 3, 22. 7, 31. 33. 34. 
 Gal. 6, 14. James 4, 4. 1 John 2, 17. /3) 
 Meton. for the men of this world, worldlings, 
 as opp. to those who seek the kingdom of 
 God; so with euros, John 12, 31 77 Kpicris 
 TOV K. TOVTOV. 1 Cor. 1, 20 cro(pia TOV K. 
 TOVTOV. 3, 19. Gal. 4, 3. Col. 2, 8 ; as sub 
 ject to Satan, John 12, 31 6 apxav TOV K. 
 TOVTOV. 14, 30. 16, 11. Without OVTOS, 
 John 7, 7 oi dvvaTai 6 Koo-pos pio-dv vpds. 
 14, 17. 19. 27. 31. 16, 8. 17, 6. 9. 1 Cor. 
 1, 21. 2 Cor. 7, 10. Phil. 2, 15. James 1, 
 27. + 
 
 Kovdpros, ov, 6, Lat. Quartus, pr. n. 
 of a Christian at Rome, Rom. 16, 23. 
 
 K.OVJJLI, cumi, Heb. imperat. fern. Elp 
 arise, expressed in Greek letters, Mark 5, 
 41. 
 
 KOiHTTCOOiCl) as, f], Lat. custodia, custo 
 dy ; in N. T. meton. a watch, guard, sc. of 
 Roman soldiers at the sepulchre of Jesus, 
 Matt. 27, 65. 66. 28, 11. Hesych. /covo-rw- 
 
 KOvtyifo, f. t o-co, (*ot>(poj,) to be light, 
 intrans. Hes. Op. 461. Soph. Philoct. 735. 
 In N. T. trans, to lighten, e. g. a ship by 
 throwing things overboard, c. ace. Acts 27, 
 38. Sept. for ign Jon. 1,5. So Pol. 1. 39. 
 4 K. Tas vavs. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 1. 
 
 K0(f)ivos, ov, 6, a basket, wicker-basket, 
 Lat. cophinus ; Matt. 14, 20 8a>8fKa Kocpi- 
 vovs TrXTjpeTy. 16, 9. Mark 6, 43. 8, 19. 
 
 Luke 9, 17. John 6, 13. Sept. for ^w 
 Ps. 81, 5; bG Judg. 6, 19. So Aristoph. 
 Av. 1310. Plut. Pomp. 48 init. Xen. Mem. 
 3. 8. 6. The Kocpivos was proverbially the 
 Jewish travelling-basket; comp. Juv. Sat. 
 3. 15 "Judaeis, quorum cophinus foenum- 
 que supellex." 6. 542. 
 
 KpappdTOS) ov, 6, Lat. grabatus, a 
 small couch, bed, bedstead, which might 
 easily be carried about, or for travelling ; 
 called by the Greeks o-/a /rovs, c-<t/i7rdSioi/. 
 Mark 2, 4. 9. 11. 12. 6, 55. John 5, 8. 9. 
 10. 11. 12. Acts 5,15. 9,33. Comp. Mark 
 1. c. with Luke 5, 18. 24. Act. Thorn. 
 $ 50, 51. Arr. Epict. 1. 24. Poll. Onom. 10. 
 35. A Macedonian word, used only by very 
 late writers, Sturz de Dial. Alex. p. 175. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 62. See in /cXt i^ and 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Lectus. 
 
 f. KeKpdo/iat, aor. 1 e *paa, 
 perf. 1 Keicpdya. with the signif. of the pre 
 sent, Buttm. J 113. 7, and n. 13. 5 1 14 Kpdfa. 
 Passow s. voc. This is strictly an onoma- 
 topoeetic verb imitating the hoarse cry of the 
 raven, to croak, Germ, krachzen ; hence 
 genr. and in N. T. 
 
 1. to cry, to cry out, intrans. e. g. of in 
 articulate cries, clamour, exclamation ; so 
 from fear, anb TOV <po/3ov Matt. 14, 26 ; 
 from pain Matt. 27, 50. Mark 15, 39 comp. 
 v. 37. Rev. 12, 2; from abhorrence Acts 
 7, 57. Of demoniacs Mark 1, 26. 5, 5. 9, 
 26. Luke 9, 39. (Sept. for psj 2 Sam. 13, 
 19. Jer. 25, 34.) Also in joy, by hyperb. 
 Luke 19, 40 ol Xi Soi KfKpd^ovrat. Sept. for 
 S^S Josh. 6, 16. Ps. 65, 14. So Arr. 
 Epict. 3. 4. 4 Kopa oTav p.rj aio-iov KfKpdyrj. 
 Luc. Tim. 11. Xen. An. 7. 8. 15. 
 
 2. Of any thing uttered with a loud voice, 
 to cry, to exclaim, to call aloud; so followed 
 by the words uttered, Mark 10, 48 6 Se ?roX- 
 Xo> p.a\\ov fxpa^fv vie Aa/3/8 KT\. 15, 13. 
 14. Luke 18, 39. John 12, 13 K al fKpafrv 
 uo-avvd. Acts 19,32. 34. 23, 6. al. So with 
 (ptovfj fj.yd\r] Acts 7, 60 ; ev <pa>vfj ^eydXj 
 Rev. 14, 1 5. Followed by a tense or particip. 
 of Xeya or the like ; e. g. e*pae Xeya>i> 
 Matt. 14, 30. Mark 3, 11. John 1, 15; 
 eicpagav \eyovTfs Matt. 8, 29. 27, 23 ; upa- 
 fav Kal Xeycov Mark 5, 7. Luke 4, 41 ; Kpd- 
 frvres KOI \eyovrfs Matt. 9, 27. 21, 15; 
 Kpdgas KOL fine Mark 9, 24 ; so with (jxovfj 
 Heyd\7j Rev. 6, 10. 7, 2. 10. 19, 17. 
 
 3. Of urgent prayer, entreaty, impreca 
 tion, to cry, to cry out; Rom. 8, 15 tv o> 
 Kpa^optv dftfta, 6 TraTrjp. Gal. 4, 6. Trop. 
 James 5, 4 6 p.io-%bs TU>V epyaT&v . . . 
 Kpdfa (Trpbs Kvpiov) i. e. for vengeance. 
 
tcpaiTraX.rj 411 
 
 Sept. for pSS p s . 28, 1. 30, 9 ; p?J 2 Sam. 
 19,28. Jer. 11, 11. 12. + 
 Kpai7rd\r/, rj Sf fa (prob. 
 
 tcparos 
 
 p- 
 
 X?;, (5/wrdfw,) pr. a seizure of the head ; 
 hence intoxication, debauch, and its conse 
 quences, giddiness, headache, nausea, Lat. 
 crapula. Luke 21, 34 eV KpanrdXrj icai /wSiy 
 t n revelling and drunkenness. Hdian. 1. 
 17. 7. 22. Plut. de Adulat. et Amic. 20. 
 
 tepaviov, ou, TO, (dim. upavov, ) a skull, 
 Lat. cranium, Matt. 27, 33. Mark 15, 22. 
 Luke 23, 33. John 19, 17. Sept. for nbaba 
 Judg. 9, 53. 2 K. 9, 35. Luc. D. MorL 
 23. 3. Hdian. 7. 7. 8. Plato Euthyd. 299. e. 
 
 ov, TO, (kindr. /cpoo-o-o y, 
 the edge, margin, skirt, e. g. of a 
 mountain Xen. Hell. 4. 6. 8 ; of a garment 
 Theocr. 2. 53. In N. T. a fringe, Heb. 
 Pnapa: Num. 15, 38 sq. where the Jews 
 are directed to wear fringes on the corners 
 of the outer garment ; Matt 9, 20. 14, 36. 
 23, 5. Mark 6, 56. Luke 8. 44. Sept. for 
 mspS Num. 1. c. 
 
 /cparaios, d, 6v, (icpdTos,} strong, mighty, 
 
 e. g. 77 K. 
 
 TOV Seou 1 Pet. 5, 6. So 
 
 Sept. and pjn Ex. 3, 19. Deut. 3, 24. 
 Esdr. 8, 47. Pol. 2. 69. 8. Plut. M. Crass. 24. 
 KpaTaioo), f. dxro), (Kpcrraioj,) to make 
 strong, to strengthen, found only in Sept. 
 the N. T. and later writers, for the earlier 
 Kparvvu, Passow s. v. Act. Sept. for P!H 
 
 1 Sam. 23, 16. 2K. 15, 19. In N. T. only 
 Pass, to become strong, to grow strong, Luke 
 1, 80 et 2, 40 iKparaiovTo Tn>fvfj.aTi. Eph. 
 3, 16. 1 Cor. 16, 13. Sept. for ptrj intr. 
 
 2 Sam. 10, 12. 2 Chr. 21, 4 ; f&x Ps. 31, 
 25. So 1 Mace. 1, 62. 
 
 Kpa-Teo), S>, f. jjo-w, (KpaToy,) to be strong, 
 mighty, powerful; hence to hold sway, to 
 rule, absol. Horn. Od 13. 275; c. gen. to 
 rule over, Horn. II. 1. 79, 288. In N. T. 
 genr. to be or become master of, i. e. 
 
 1 . to lay hold of, to lay hands on, to take, 
 to seize. a) Genr. and c. ace. e. g. a per 
 son, Matt. 14, 3 6 yap HpcoS^r Kparfja-as 
 TOV icodw^y, fbrjcrfv avTov. 18, 28. 21, 46. 
 22, 6. 26, 4. 48. 50. 55. 57. Mark 3, 21. 
 
 6, 17. 12, 12. 14, 1. 44. 46. 49. 51. Acts 
 24, 6. Rev. 20, 2. So of an animal, Matt. 
 12, 11. Sept. genr. for tnx Cant. 3, 4. 
 2 Sam. 6, 6. So Palaeph. 2. 7, 9. ib. 32. 2. 
 Xen. An. 4. 7. 15; animals Arr. Epict. 2. 
 
 7. 12. Xen. Ven. 5. 29. b) Spec, to lay 
 hold of, to take by the hand or other member ; 
 with ace. of pers. and also gen. of the part, 
 Buttm. $ 132. 5. e,andn. 10. Mark 9, 27 Ir;- 
 trovs KpciTTjo-as avrov TTjr x ft P s rrX. (Test. 
 
 XII Patr.p. 590.) So with the tec. of pers. 
 suppressed, Kpartlv TTJS x ei P os TWOS, to take the 
 hand of any one, to take by the hand, Matt. 9, 
 25. Mark 1, 31. 5, 41. Luke 8, 54 ; comp. 
 Buttm. 1. c. So Sept. and P!0 Gen. 19, 16. 
 2 Sam. 1, 11. Once c. ace. of the part, 
 Matt. 28, 9 fKpdnjcrav avrov TOVS Tr68as. 
 So Sept. for P^nrt Judg. 16, 26. c) 
 Trop. c. gen. of thing, to lay hold of, to ob 
 tain, to win; Acts 27, 13 TTJS TrpoSeVewy. 
 Heb. 6, 18 Kp. Trjs TrpoKfifJifvrjs f \iridos. 
 So Sept. Prov. 14, 18. Diod. Sic. 16. 20 up. 
 TTJS TrpoSeVewf. 
 
 2. to hold, to hold fast, not to let go, i. e. 
 a) Of things, c. ace. Rev. 2, 1 6 icparuv 
 TOVS eVra dorepay tv rfj Segia avrov, comp. 
 
 1, 16 where it is e^a>v. Rev. 7, 1 K. TOVS 
 Tfa-cr. dvepovs iva p.i) KT\. Pass. Luke 24, 
 16 01 o<p3oAp,ol aiircav eKpaTovvro. So Plut. 
 Cato Min. 13. Luc. Amor. 44; c. gen. TTJS 
 y\u>TTr)s Plut. de Lib. educ. 14. p. 22. b) 
 Of persons, to hold in subjection, Pass. Acts 
 
 2, 24 KtzSoTi OVK ?)v Swarbv KpaTfia^at av- 
 TOV VTT OVTOV sc. %ava.Tov. (Comp. Plut. 
 Mor. II. p. 99.) So to hold one fast, i. e. 
 to hold fast to him, to cleave to him, c. ace. 
 e. g. in person Acts 3, 11 Kparovvros 8e 
 avrov TOV IlfTpov KT\. or in faith Col. 2, 19 
 Tr]v K((bd\T]v i. e. Christ. c) Trop. e. g. 
 of sins, to retain, not to remit, c. ace. John 
 20, 23 bis, see in Sew. Also to keep to one 
 self, e. g. TOV \6yov Mark 9, 10. (Sept. Kpa- 
 Tovfj.eva for enigmas Dan. 5, 12. Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 683 eV ^vxj} crov p.fj /cpaTijo-?;? So- 
 Xoi>.) Genr. to holdfast in mind, to observe, 
 c. ace. Mark 7, 3 KpaTovvres TTJV 7rapdSoo"t> 
 TW> Trpta-fivTfpav. v. 4. 8. 2 Thess. 2, 15. 
 Rev. 2, 13. 14. 15. 25. 3, 11. (Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 665 KpaTelv TO Se X^o TOV 3foi5.) 
 Once c. gen. Heb. 4, 14 KpaTojp.fv TTJS 6/j.o- 
 \oylas, let us hold fast our profession, not 
 swerve from it ; so Plut. de vit. Pudor. ia 
 
 K.paTU>V TTJS TTClpaiVfCTftoS KT\. 
 
 KpaTicrro?, 77, ov, adj. superl. (KpaTvsi 
 KpaTo?.) used as superl. of dyaSo y, Buttm. 
 5 68. 1. ^ 69. n. 1 ; most excellent, most no 
 ble, in addressing persons of rank and autho 
 rity, Luke 1, 3 KpaTto-re 0eo <piXe. Acts 23, 
 26. 24, 3. 26, 25. Jos. Vit. 76. Longin. 
 39 init. So genr. Plut. de Tranq. An. 1. Xen 
 Cyr. 8. 3. 3. * 
 
 /cparo?, (os, our, TO, strength, physical 
 Horn. II. 16. 524. ib. 24, 293. In N. T. 
 
 1. might, vigour, power; Acts 19, 20 
 KOTO. xpaTos, mightily, vehemently, see in Kara 
 II. 1. d. y. (Xen. Ag. 2. 3.) Eph. 1, 19 
 Kara 7171* evepyeiav TOV xpaTovs TTJS ta^vos 
 , of his mighty power. Eph, 6, 10. Col. 
 
412 
 
 1. 11. Sept. for fax Is. 40,26; comp. 
 Sept. for fVixa Ps. 89, 10. Meton. might, 
 collect, mighty deeds, Luke 1, 51 eVofyo-e 
 KpaTos fv ppaxlovi KT\. Comp. Heb. TBS 
 ^.ft. Sept. TTOifiv 8vvap.iv Ps. 118, 16. 
 
 2. Spec, power, dominion. 1 Tim. 6, 16 
 <j)Tip.f) Kal Kpdros ala>viov. Heb. 2, 14. 1 Pet. 
 4, 11. 5, 11. Jude 25. Rev. 1, 6. 5, 13. 
 Jos. Ant. 1. 19. 1. Hdian. 7.7. 12. Plato 
 Legg. 713. a. 
 
 Kpavyatyd)) f. do-a>, (Kpauyj;,) to cry, to cry 
 out, i.q. Kpdfa, absol. Matt. 12, 19 owe epurei, 
 ov8e Kpavydo-fi, see in epi fco. 15, 22. John 
 11, 43 (pwi/J; p, f y. fKpavy. 18, 40. 19, 6. 15. 
 Acts 22, 23. Sept. for S^fi Ezra 3, 13. 
 Arr. Epict. 3. 4. 4. Dem. 1258. 26. Comp. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 337. 
 
 Kpawyrj, fj s , 17, (/epa^w,) a cry, out-cry, 
 e. g. as giving public notice, Matt. 25, 
 6. Rev. 14, 18. (Xen. An. 2. 2. 17.) 
 Of tumult or controversy, clamour, Acts 
 23, 9. Eph. 4, 31. (Pol. 2. 70. 6.) Of 
 sorrow, wailing, Rev. 21, 4. Sept. for !~!*S 
 Ex. 12, 30. (Xen. Hell. 6. 4. 16.) Of sVpl 
 plication, Heb. 5, 7 ; and so Sept. for f^S 
 Job 34, 28. 
 
 Kpea$, oTOff, aoy, TO , Plur. TO Kpe ara, 
 contr. *pe a Buttm. 54 ; meat, flesh, sc. of 
 animals slaughtered, Rom. 14, 21. 1 Cor. 
 8, 13. Sept. for ifca Ex. 12, 8. Deut. 12, 
 15. Luc. Prom. v. Cauc. 10. Xen. Mem. 
 4. 3. 10. 
 
 Kpeivcrwv v. -TT&W, ovos, 6, fj, compar. 
 (pr. Kpai<T(ra>v, upaTvs,} used as comparat. 
 of dyaSos, better, Buttm. { 68. 1. Passow s. 
 V. Comp. in KpdYto-Toy. 
 
 1. better, more useful, more profitable, 
 only Neut. TO Kpfta-o-ov, 1 Cor. 7, 9. 11, 17. 
 12, 31. Phil. 1, 23. Heb. 11, 40. 12, 24. 
 2 Pet. 2, 21. As adv. 1 Cor. 7, 38. Sept. for 
 ai rj Ex. 14, 12. Prov. 25, 25. Arr. Epict. 
 1. 29. 13. Thuc. 4. 10. 
 
 2. better in value or dignity, nobler, more 
 excellent; Heb. 1,4 TOO-OVTW Kpe$rrv ye- 
 vop.fvos. 6, 9. 7, 7. 19. 22. 8, 6 bis. 9, 23. 
 10, 34. 11, 16. 35. 1 Pet. 3, 17. Sept. for 
 ai Judg. 8, 2. Prov. 8, 11. Hdian. 3. 2. 
 6. Xen. Ag. 11. 15. 
 
 Kp/J,dvvv/jt,l, f. K pfp.do-a>, Pass. aor. 1 
 (Kpfp.do-%r)v, fa hang up, to suspend ; Mid. 
 Kpep.ap.ai after the form to-ra/iai, to hang, 
 to be suspended, intrans. A pres. form *pe- 
 p.d<o is found only in very late writers, Pas- 
 sow s. v. Buttm. 5 114. 
 1. Act. with ace. impl. and with eVi c. 
 gen. Acts 5, 30 et 10, 39 Kpfp.da-avres (av- 
 TOV) Vt i)Xot;. Pass. c. eis Matt. 18, 6. 
 
 Absol. Luke 23, 39. Sept. c. eVi for fibtn, 
 Act. Gen. 40, 19. 22. Pass. Esth. 5, 14." 7, 
 10. Luc. Asin. 39. Xen. An. 1. 2. 8. 
 Pass. Xen. Eq. 10. 9. 
 
 2. Mid. Acts 28, 4 Kpfp.dp.fvov TO Srjpiov 
 fK TTJS x ft P os avTov, hanging from his hand. 
 With (Trl gv\ov Gal. 3, 13. Trop. c. eV, 
 Matt. 22, 40 see in tv no. 3. c. a. Sept. 
 Kpfp.dp.fvot for h! )bfi Deut. 21, 23. 2 Sam, 
 18, 10 ; trop. Deut. 28, 66. Jos. Ant. 7. 
 10. 2. Hdian. 1. 14. 1 ; c. & Xen. Mem. 3. 
 10. 13. Trop. Philo T. II. ed. Mang. p. 
 420 >v at TOV e%vovs f\7rides fKpep.avro. 
 
 KpTjfAVOS, ov, 6, (Kpfp.dvvvp.1,) a steep 
 place, precipice, pr. overhanging, Matt. 8, 
 32. Mark 5, 13. Luke 8, 33. Sept. for 
 *^3 2 Chr. 25, 12. Diod. Sic. 1. 33. Plato 
 Legg. 944. a. 
 
 Kpfa IJTOS, 6, a Cretan, Acts 2, 11. Tit. 
 
 I, 12 KpfjTfg dfl i^eOorat, quoted from Epi- 
 menides, see in yaarijp ; comp. Pol. 4. 8. 
 11. m. V. H. 1. 10 of Eire s fla-i TO- 
 gci-eiv ayaSot. Xen. An. 1. 2. 9. 
 
 Kprjcr/cr]^ rivros, 6, Crescens, pr. n. of a 
 Christian at Rome, 2 Tim. 4, 10. 
 
 KprjTr), rjs, fj, Crete, now Candia, a ce 
 lebrated island of the Mediterranean, oppo 
 site to the Egean Sea. It was anciently 
 celebrated for its hundred cities, whence the 
 epithet eWo /wroXis, Horn. II. 2. 649. The 
 Cretans were celebrated archers, robbers, 
 and liars ; see in Kpij? and espec. Pol. 4. 8. 
 
 II. Here a Christian church was left by 
 Paul in charge of Titus. Tit. 1,5. Acts 27 
 7. 12. 13. 21. 
 
 s , ^, barley, Rev. 6, 6. Sept. for 
 M^to Deut. 8, 8. Palsph. 4. 1. Xen. An, 
 1. 2. 22. 
 
 77, ov, (KpiSjj,) of barley, as 
 ciproi Kptiivoi barley loaves John 6, 9. 13, 
 Sept. for D-nbto 2 K. 4, 42. Pol. 54. 9. 15. 
 Xen. An. 4. 5. 26, 31. 
 
 aros, TO, (Kpivco,) judgment, i. e. 
 
 1. The act of judging, giving judgment, 
 i. q. Kpio-is, spoken only in reference to fu 
 ture reward and punishment. John 9, 39 
 fls Kpip.a eyw tls TOV Ko<rp.ov j^XSov for judg 
 ment am I come into the world, i. e. in 
 order that the righteous may be approved 
 and the wicked condemned, as is figuratively 
 said in the next clause. 1 Pet. 4, 17. So 
 of the judgment of the last day, Acts 24, 25 
 TO Kpip.a TO p.e\\ov ecrecrSai. Heb. 6, 2. 
 Meton. for the office or power of judgment 
 Rev. 20. 4. So Heb. B50J52 Sept. Kpiats 
 Lev. 19, 15. Deut. 1, 17. Heb. Ez 21, 32. 
 
 2. judgment rendered, decision, award. 
 
KplVOV 
 
 413 
 
 ft) Genr. Matt. 7, 2 eV <a yap Kpifjuirt Kpivtrt, 
 KpiSijo-fo-Se. Rom. 5, 16. Plur. Rom. 11, 
 33 TU Kplpara avTov, the judgments of God, 
 his ordinances, acts of his providence, pa- 
 rall. with at 6Soi avTov. Sept. for 2Q! 
 Zech. 8, 16. Ps. 17, 2. Plur. of God PS. 
 
 19, 10. 119, 75. So Pol. 24. 1. 12 >a- 
 XoviTfs Tols Kpi/jiacriv a>s 7rapa/3e/3pa/3evp.- 
 vois. Pint, de Stoic, repugn. 27. b) Often- 
 er, condemnation, sentence, implying also 
 punishment as a certain consequence, Matt. 
 23, 13 8ta TOVTO Xrj^fcr^f irepicrcroTepov Kpl- 
 pa. Mark 12,40. Luke 20, 47. 23, 40. 24, 
 
 20. Rom. 2, 2. 3 TO *pi>a TOV 3eov. 3, 8. 
 13,2. 1 Cor. 11,29.34. Gal. 5, 10. 1 Tim. 
 
 3, 6. 5, 12. James 3, 1. 2 Pet. 2, 3. Jude 
 
 4. Rev. 17, 1. 18, 20 see in no. 1. b. 
 Sept. and OQOJn Deut. 21, 22. Jer. 4, 12. 
 So Ecclus. 21, 5. 
 
 3. From the Heb. a law-suit, cause, some 
 thing to be judged, e. g. Kpi^ara e%ew, to 
 have law-suits, to go to law, 1 Cor. 6, 7. 
 Sept. and BBEtt Job 23, 4. 31, 13. 
 
 rcpivov, ov, TO, a lily. Matt. 6, 28. Luke 
 12, 27. Sept. for 1^13 Cant. 2, 16. 4, 5. 
 Theophr. C. PL 6. 6. 3. Plut. de rect. rat. 
 aud. 15. 
 
 fcpiva>, f. wca, aor. 1 tupwa, perf. Keitpi- 
 Ka, Pass. aor. 1 expfanv, i. q. Lat. cerno by 
 transp. of the vowel, pr. to separate, Horn. 
 II. 2. 362. ib. 5. 501 ; to distinguish, to dis 
 criminate between good and evil, Xen. Mem. 
 3. 1. 9. ib. 4. 8. 11 ; to select, to choose out 
 the good, Xen. An. 1. 9. 30. Hence genr. 
 and in N. T. to decide, to judge, i. e. to form 
 or give an opinion after separating and con 
 sidering the particulars of a case. 
 
 1. to judge in one s own mind, as to what 
 is right, proper, expedient, i. q. to decide, to 
 determine ; so with the infin. Acts 1 5, 1 9 
 810 eyu> Kpivat fj.f] Trapej/oxXetV TOLS KT\. 3, 
 13 KpivavTOS (Kfivov dnoXvew, i. e. having 
 decided in his own mind, not judicially. 20, 
 16. 25, 25. 1 Cor. 2, 2. 5, 3. Tit. 3, 12. 
 With TOV c. inf. Acts 27, 1 ebs 8e fxpi^rj TOV 
 arroTrXeti/ r^as KT\. (3 Mace. 1, 6. Xen. An. 
 3. 1. 7.) With ace. and infin. Acts 21, 25 
 Kplvavres fJ.rj8(v TOIOVTOV Trjpew avTovs. So 
 infin. elvai impl. comp. Matth. 534. n. 1. 
 Acts 13, 46 Kal OVK diovs Kpivt-re tavTovs 
 rijs at. fays, ami judge yourselves umvorthy 
 of eternal life. 16, 15. 26, 8. Rom. 14, 5 bis, 
 os p.fv Kpivfi f]p.fpav [eiVai] Trap fjp.(pav, os 
 Se KpiVet Tracrav rjfjiepav, one man judgetli 
 one day to be above another ; another judg- 
 eth every day sc. to be alike, for so we must 
 supply from the force of the antithesis, 
 comp" Matth. 634. 3. (So c. inf. Arr. 
 
 Epict. 3. 29. 50. Xen. An. 1. 9. 5, 20 ; inf. 
 impl. Wisd. 2, 22. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 2 *pi3f k . 
 rjTt (v8aip.ovfo-TaToi. Xen. An. 3. 1. 12.) 
 With ace. of thing, to determine on, to de 
 cree, Rev. 16, 5 OTI TOVTU fKpwas. Acts 16, 
 4 TO. So y/iara ra KfKpifj.fva. (Isocr. Paneg. 
 p. 50. a. Pol. 3. 6. 7.) With accus. TOVTO 
 as introducing the infin. c. art. TO, Rom. 14, 
 1 3 aXXa TOVTO KpivaTe p.a\\ov, TO JJ.TJ TtSeVa* 
 KrX. 2 Cor. 2, 1. 1 Cor. 7, 37 TOTO Kticpi- 
 
 KfV, TOV TT/petJ/ KT\. So TOVTO OTt, 2 Cor. 
 
 5, 14. 
 
 2. to judge, i. e. to form and express a 
 judgment, opinion, as to any person or thing, 
 more commonly unfavourable ; so with ace. 
 of pers. John 8, 15 e yw ov Kpiva> ovSeVa. 
 Rom. 2, 1. 3. 3, 7. 14, 3. 4. 10. 13. Col. 2, 
 16 ; with ace. of thing, 1 Cor. 10, 15. 
 (Xen. Vect. 5. 11.) Absol. Matt. 7. 1 bis. 
 2 bis. Luke 6, 37 bis. John 8, 16. 26. Rom. 
 2, 1 bis. 1 Cor. 4, 5. Pass. 1 Cor. 10, 29. 
 With interrog. e. g. et, Acts 4, 19 ; genr. 
 1 Cor. 11, 13. (So et Thuc. 4. 130 ; TroVf- 
 pov Xen. Cyr. 4. 1. 5.) With an adjunct 
 of manner, e. g. Kpivav Kpla-iv John 7, 24, 
 comp. Buttm. 131. 4 ; up. TO SIKOIOV Luke 
 12, 57 ; op^us Luke 7, 43 (Arr. Epict. 2. 
 15. 6) ; KOT o-^nv John 7, 24 ; KOTO. crdpKa 
 8, 15. Spec, to condemn, c. ace. Rom. 
 2, 27. 14, 22. James 4, 11 ter. 12. So 
 Sept. and S^rt Job 10, 2. 
 
 3. to judge, in a judicial sense, viz. a) 
 to sit in judgment on a person, to put on 
 trial, to try, c. ace. John 18, 31 KOTO TOV 
 vop.ov vfjiuiv KpivaTe OVTOV. Acts 23, 3. 24, 
 
 6. 1 Cor. 5, 12 bis. (Pol. 5. 29. 6. Xen. 
 An. 6. 6. 16.) Pass. Kpivopai, to be 
 judged, to be tried, to be on trial ; Acts 25, 
 10 ov /xe Set *piWo-3at. Rom. 3, 4. (Sept. 
 for BBttj Ps. 51, 6.) With Trept TWOS for 
 any thing Acts 23, 6. 24, 21 ; eVt TIW for, 
 Acts 26, 6 ; eVt TWOS before any one Acts 
 25, 9. 20. So Dem. 407. 20. Xen. Hell. 1. 
 
 7. 7 ; c. Trepi ib. 3. 5. 25 ; c. eVi TWOS 
 comp. Max. Tyr. 9. 4. Wetstein N. T. II. 
 p. 120. Spoken in reference to the gospel 
 dispensation, to the judgment of the great 
 day, e. g. of God as judging the world 
 through Christ, John 5,22. 8,50. Acts 17, 
 31 Kp wfiv TTJV oiKovfj.(vr)v. Rom. 3, -6 TTWJ 
 
 6 3eo9 TOV Koo-fjiov. 2, 16 TO Kpvrrrd 
 
 1 Cor. 5, 13. James 2, 12. 1 Pet. 1, 17. 2 
 23. Rev. 11, 18. 20, 12. 13. Of Jesus af 
 the Messiah and Judge, John 5, 30. 16, 11. 
 
 2 Tim. 4, 1 I. Xp. TOV p.f\\ovros Kpiveiv 
 U>VTOS Kal vfKpovs. 1 Pet. 4, 5. Rev. 19, 11 
 Figuratively of the apostles, Matt. 19, 28. 
 Luke 22, 30. 1 Cor. 6, 2. 3 ; iv vp.lv K pi- 
 
 6 Koo-fios 1 Cor. 6, 2 ; comp. in /Sao-t- 
 
K pl<T IS 
 
 \(vu> no. 2. a. Wisd. 3, 1. Ecclus. 4, 15. 
 So c. eV Diod. Sic. 19. 51. b) In the 
 sense to pass judgment upon, to condemn, 
 c. ace. John 7, 51 fj.r/ 6 vo^os ^/xooi/ K/nWi 
 TOV ai/3p. KT\. Luke 19, 22. Acts 13, 27. 
 As implying also punishment, 1 Cor. 11, 
 31. 32. 1 Pet. 4, 6. (Genr. ^El. V. H. 8. 3. 
 Dem. 215. 4. Xen. An. 5. 6. 33.) So of 
 the condemnation of the wicked and includ 
 ing the idea of punishment as a certain con 
 sequence, i. q. to condemn, to punish, c. ace. 
 e. g. of God as judge, Acts 7, 7 KOI TO e^vos 
 . . . Kpiva eyeo, quoted from Gen. 15, 14 
 where Sept. for fJ Rom. 2, 12. 2 Thess. 
 2, 12. Heb. 13, 4 KOI p-oixovs Kpivti 6 Sees. 
 Rev. 6, 10. 18, 8. ib. v. 20 see in no. 1. 
 b. 19, 2. Of Jesus, John 3, 17 ov . . . Iva 
 KP LVTJ TOV Koa-fjiov. v. 18 bis. 12, 47 bis. 48 
 bis. James 5, 9. Sept. and BB1Z3 Is. 66, 16. 
 Ez. 38, 22. c) Once from the Heb. i. q. 
 to vindicate, to avenge, Heb. 10, 30 Kvpios 
 Kpivei TOV \abv avTov, the Lord tcill avenge 
 his people i. e. by punishing their enemies, 
 quoted from Deut. 32, 26 or Ps. 135, 14 
 where Sept. for T? ; also Gen. 30, 6. Ps. 
 54,3, 
 
 4. Mid. or Pass. Kpivopai, to have a 
 controversy with any one, to contend, e. g. 
 a) Genr. c. dat. Matt. 5, 40 T<U SeXoiri troi 
 Kpftrjvat. Sept. for y<*\ Jer. 2, 9. Job 9, 3 ; 
 Mic. 6, 1. So Hdot. 3. 120. Aristoph. Nub. 
 66. b) Before a court, i. q. to go to law, 
 t.o have a law-suit ; so c. /xera TWOS with 
 1 Cor. 6. 6 ; eVt TWOS before any one 1 Cor. 
 6, 1. 6. Sept. c. p.fTa TIVOS for Heb. SS "p? 
 Ecc. 6, JO ; c. irpos Tiva for OS 2^ Job 31, 
 13. Comp. Eurip. Med. 609. Plut. Symp. 
 1. 2. 3. 
 
 coj, )j, (/cpi wa,) pr. separation, 
 trop. division, dissension, Hdot. 5. 5. ib. 7. 
 26 ; decision, i. e. the decisive moment, cri 
 sis, turn of affairs, Pol. 9. 5. 4. ib. 16. 4. 8. 
 In N. T. judgment, i. e. 
 
 1. Genr. judgment, opinion, formed and 
 expressed. John 7, 24 TTJV StKaiav Kpiatv 
 xpivaTe. 8, 16. Comp. in Kpiva no. 2. 
 Jos. C. Ap. 1. 24 ot vyiaivovres TTJ Kpio-fL. 
 Pol. 17. 14. 10. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 10. 
 
 2. judgment in a judicial sense, i. e. a) 
 The act of judging, in reference to the final 
 judgment, e. g. 17 rj^epa icpia-fas the day of 
 judgment, Matt. 10, 15. 11, 22. 24. 12, 36. 
 Mark 6, 11. 2 Pet. 2, 9. 3, 7. 1 John 4, 
 17 ; &pa Kpla-euis Rev. 14, 7 ; KO KTIS peyd- 
 \rjs rjfjitpas Jude 6 ; also simply Kpia-ts for 
 tpio-is fiey. fjfj.. Matt. 12, 41. 42. Luke 10, 
 14. 11, 31. 32. Heb. 9, 27. So John 12, 
 81 vvv Kpicris (<rri TOV Kooytov. now is this 
 
 world judged. 16, 8. 11. John 5, 27 et Jude 
 15 Kpicriv noiflv i. q. Kpivfiv, comp. John 5, 
 30 and in KpLvca no. 3. a. Metoh. for the 
 office and power of judgment, John 5, 22. 
 Sept. for BBttja Lev. 19, 15. Deut. 1, 17. 
 Is. 28, 6. Luc. Abdic. 11. Hdian. 1. 11. 12. 
 Xen. An. 6. 6. 20. 
 
 b) judgment given, sentence pronounced, 
 genr. John 5, 30. 2 Pet. 2, 11 /SXao-^- 
 (J.ov Kpicnv, also Jude 9 Kpia-is @\ao-(pr]p.ias 
 (Dem. 322. 15.) Spec, sentence of punish 
 ment, condemnation, e. g. to death Acts 8, 
 33, quoted from Is. 53, 8 where Sept. for 
 OBTTH as also Jer. 39, 5 ; see in aipa> no. 4. 
 b. (jEl. V. H. 13. 37. Diod. Sic. 1. 82 pen.) 
 Usually implying also punishment, as a cer 
 tain consequence, e. g. from God, SiKaiai at 
 Kpio-fis avTov, his judgments, punishments, 
 Rev. 16, 7. 19, 2. 18, 10 comp. v. 8. 
 2 Thess. 1, 5 comp. v. 6. So Sept. and 
 OBttJa Jer. 1,16. Of Christ as Judge of 
 the world condemning the wicked, judg 
 ment, condemnation, e. g. Matt. 23, 33 xpi- 
 <ns TTJS ytevvrjs. Mark 3, 29. John 5, 29 dvd- 
 o-Tacris Kpio-fus. John 3, 19. 5, 24. Heb. 
 10, 27. James 2, 13 bis, see in KaTaKavxd- 
 onai. 5, 12 comp. v. 9. 2 Pet. 2, 4. Trop. 
 of moral judgment, condemnation ; 1 Tim. 
 5, 24 TIVWV avSpatTrui al n/iaprim Trpo8rj\oi 
 fla-i, Trpodyovcrai els Kpiaiv, i. e. some men s 
 sins are manifest, leading on to condemna 
 tion, i. e. accusing them, crying for con 
 demnation ; in others, they follow after, are 
 only known afterwards. 
 
 3. Melt u. a judgment-seat, tribunal, put 
 for a court of justice, judges, i. e. the 
 smaller tribunals established in the cities 
 of Palestine, subordinate to the Sanhedrim ; 
 comp. Deut. 16, 18. 2 Chr. 19, 5. Accord 
 ing to the Rabbins they consisted of 23 
 judges ; but Josephus expressly says the 
 number was seven, Ant. 4. 8. 14, 38. B. J. 
 2. 20. 5; see Krebs. Obss. p. 19. Matt. 5, 
 21. 22 fvo\os eorat TT) Kpicrti. Cornp. Sept. 
 and BBttSa Job 9, 32. 22, 4. 
 
 4. From the Heb. right, rectitude, jus 
 tice, what is just and conformable to law, 
 Matt. 23, 23. Luke 11, 42 Trape p^eo-Se TJJV 
 Kpia-iv. So Sept. and "JBttia Deut. 32, 4. 
 Gen. 18, 25. Jer. 22, 15. Spec, the law, 
 statutes, i. e. the divine law, the religion of 
 Jehovah as revealed in the Gospel, Matt. 
 12, 18. 20, quoted from Is. 42, 1. 3. 4, where 
 Sept. and BBttia . See Gesen. Comm. on 
 Is. 1. c. 
 
 , ov, 6, Crispus, pr. n. of the 
 ruler of a synagogue at Corinth, Acts 18, 8. 
 1 Cor. 1, 14. 
 
415 
 
 /epinjpiov, ov, TO, (Kpirijy,) a criterion, 
 rule of judging, Arr. Epict. 1. 11. 9 sq. 
 In N. T. a judgment-seat, tribunal, put for 
 a court of justice, judges. a) Genr. 
 James 2, 6 {\KOVO-IV vfj.as fls KpiTrjpia. So 
 Sept. Judg. 5, 10. Susann. 49. Pol. 16. 
 27. 2. Plato Legg. 767. b. b) Meton. a 
 law-suit, cause, before a tribunal, 1 Cor. 6, 2. 
 4. Others take it as in lett. a. 
 
 ov, 6, (*cpiV<o,) a judge, i. e. one 
 who decides or gives an opinion in respect 
 to any person or thing. 
 
 1. Genr. James 2,- 4 Kpiral StaXo-yKr/iwi/ 
 TTovrjpSiv, see in 8ia\oyio~[i.6s. Matt. 12, 27. 
 Luke 11, 19. In an unfavourable sense 
 James 4, 11. Sept. for I?* 1 Sam. 24, 16. 
 Pol. 9. 33. 12. Xen. Conv. 5. 1, 9, 10. 
 
 2. In a judicial sense, one who sits to 
 dispense justice, diff. from 6 StKaonyr where 
 see fully; Matt. 5, 25 bis. Luke 12, [14.] 
 58 bis. 18, 2. 6. Acts 18, 15. 24, 10. Of 
 Christ the final Judge, Acts 10, 42 icpiTrjs 
 TU>V a>vra>v Kal vfKpuv. 2 Tim. 4, 8. James 
 5, 9 comp. v. 8. Of God, Kpirfj 3ew iravraiv 
 Heb. 12, 23. James 4, 12. Sept for ( H 
 Ezra 7, 4 ; BE^ Deut. 16, 18. Job 9, 24 ; 
 of God Ps. 7, 12. 50, 6. Diod. Sic. 1. 92. 
 Xen. Hell. 4. 4. 3. 
 
 3. From the Heb. i. q. a leader, ruler, 
 chief, Heb. BEttJ, spoken of the Hebrew 
 judges so called, from Joshua, to Samuel, 
 Acts 13, 20. Comp. Judg. 2, 16 sq. Heb. 
 Lex. art. BBttS no. 2. Jos. Ant. 6. 5. 4. 
 
 /cptTt/co?, j, 6v, (Kpiriyr,) skilled in judg 
 ing, quick to discern and judge of any thing, 
 c. gen. Heb. 4, 12 KpiTixbs fv%vp.T]o-(a>v KT\. 
 Luc. de Saltat. 74. Plato Polit. 292. b. 
 
 Kpovco, f. era), to knock, to rap, e. g. at a 
 door for entrance, c. ace. TTJV %vpav Lnke . 
 13, 25. Acts 12, 13 ; absol. Matt. 7, 7. 8. 
 Luke 11, 9. 10. 12,36. Acts 12, 16. Rev. 
 3,20. Sept. for p>B^ Judg. 19, 22. Cant. 
 5, 13. Judith 14, 14; K. rr\v Svpav Aris- 
 toph. Eccl. 317. Plato Prot. 310. a. Xen. 
 Conv. 1. 11. The more usual Attfc phrase 
 was KOTTTfiv rf]v "Svpav, Lob. ad Phrvn. p. 
 177. 
 
 KpirrrTij, qr, 77, (<pvmos,) a crypt, vault, 
 secret cell; Luke 11, 33 $ Kpvnrrjv Tferj- 
 <ri. Athen. 5. p. 205. a. Juvenal. 5. 106 
 crypta. 
 
 Kpmrros, rj, 6v, (KpvTTTco,) hidden, con 
 cealed, and therefore secret, Matt. 10, 26 ov- 
 8ev e crrt . . . KpimTov 6 ou yvaxr^rjafTai. 
 Mark 4, 22. Luke 8, 17. 12, 2; cV T o> 
 KpuTTTcp, in secret, where one cannot be 
 seen of others, Matt. 6, 4 bis. 6 bis. 18 bis ; 
 
 , in secret, privately, John 7, 4. 
 10. 18, 20. 1 Cor. 4, 5 rot Kpvnra TOV O-K.O- 
 TOVS, the secret works of darkness. 2 Cor. 4, 
 2 see in alo-xvvrj no. 3. Sept. for "ittOE 
 Jer. 49, 9. (Hdian. 5. 6. 7. Xen. Mag. Eq. 
 
 4. 10.) Trop. TO Kpvirra TWOS, the secrets ot 
 one s heart, secret thoughts, Rom. 2, 16. 
 
 1 Cor. 14, 25. 1 Pet. 3, 4 6 KPVTTTOS TTJS 
 KapSias (iiftpanros, i. e. the internal man. 
 Rom. 2, 29 6 ev TO> KpuTmS lovSaior, a 
 Jew at heart. Ecclus. 1, 30. 4, 18. 
 
 KpUTTTQ), f. -^-o), to hide, to conceal ; Mid. 
 or Pass, to hide oneself, to be hid ; Pass. aor. 
 
 2 fKpv^Tjv as Pass, to be hid, Matt. 5, 14. 
 Luke 19, 42 ; and with Mid. signif. to hide 
 oneself John 8, 59. 12,36. Buttm. 5 1 1 3. n. 6. 
 5 136. 1,2. Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 317 sq. 
 Matt. 5, 14 ov 8vva.Tai TTU\I.S Kpv^rjvai. 13, 
 35. v. 44 ov evpvv fKpv^e. [25, 18.] 1 Tim. 
 
 5. 25. Heb. 11, 23. Rev. 2, 17 TOV pawa TOV 
 KfKpvp.p.tvov, of the hidden manna, as symbo 
 lical of the enjoyments of the kingdom of 
 heaven ; in allusion to the manna laid up in 
 the ark, of which the antitype is in the true 
 temple in heaven, Ex. 16, 33 sq. Rev. 11, 
 19; comp. Heb. 9, 4. 11. Others unne 
 cessarily suppose an allusion to the Jewish 
 tradition, that the ark with the pot of man 
 na was hidden by order of king Josiah, and 
 will again be brought to light in the reign 
 of the Messiah ; comp. Wetst. N. T. and 
 Schoettg. Hor. Heb. in loc. With ei> TIVI, 
 Matt. 13, 44 Sr/cravpoj KfAcpv/ijueVw tv TOJ 
 aypw. 25,25; trop. Col. 3, 3. With ets TI 
 Rev. 6, 15 ; air 6 TWOS to hide from, John 12, 
 36 itjaovs a7reA3a>i fKpvftrj air avTcav, hia 
 himself from them. Luke 18, 34. 19, 42, 
 Rev. 6, 16 ; so John 8, 59 irjo-ovs Se e /cpu- 
 fir), Kal e ;}X3ej/ e /c TOV iepov, i. e. Jesus 
 hid himself and afterwards went out of the 
 temple ; or we may render tKpv^rj adverbial 
 ly, he secretly went out, comp. in atroTo\- 
 fido). Part. perf. KfKpvppfvos, hidden, as 
 adv. secretly, John 19, 38, see Buttm. 5 123. 
 
 6. Sept. for N^nn Gen. 3, 8. 10 ; 1^0^ 
 Gen. 4, 13. Hdian! 1. 14. 7. Plato Legg. 
 958. e ; c. eV Hdian. 3. 4. 14 ; d s Diod. Sic. 
 4. 33; O.TTO Horn. Od. 23. 110. 
 
 KpVCTTaX\.l(0, f. t <rw, (KpvoraXXoy,) to 
 be as crystal, clear and sparkling, Rev. 21, 
 11. 
 
 KpV(TTCl\Xo$) ov, 6, f], (Kpvos, KpuoraiVco 
 to freeze,) crystal, pr. any thing congealed 
 and pellucid, e. g. ice Sept. for rTnj^ Job 6 
 16. Plato Tim. 59. e. In N. T. prob. rock- 
 crystal, Rev. 4, 6 22, 1. So Diod. Sic. 2. 
 52 init. Strabo 15. p. 717. Comp. Plin. 
 H. N. 37. 9. 
 
rcpv(f)aio$ 
 
 416 
 
 , ov, (KpvTTTO), ) hidden, se 
 cret, Matt. 6, 18 bis Lachm. lv rw Kpv(paia>, 
 for lv rw KpvTTT<a Rec. Sept. for "iPiDa 
 Jer. 23, 24. Xen. Hi. 10. 6. 
 
 Kpvffrf), adv. (KpvTrTQ), ) secretly, not open 
 ly, Eph. 5, 12. Sept. for 1W33 Deut. 28, 
 57._Soph. Ant. 85. Xen. Conv. 5. 8. Comp. 
 Buttm. 5 115. n. 3. 
 
 KTaoftai. S)fj.ai, f. 770-0/101, Mid. depon. 
 to gel for oneself, to acquire, to procure, by 
 purchase or otherwise ; perf. KfKTrjp.ai as 
 pres. to have got, to possess, see Buttm. 
 J113. 7; so c. ace. Matt. 10, 9. Luke 18, 
 12 TTUVTCI 6 cra xrw/xai. 1 Thess. 4, 4 TO eav- 
 TOV a-Kfvos KTa<T%ai, to acquire his own ves 
 sel i. e. a wife, in the oriental manner by 
 purchase ; see in O-KCVOS no. 3. With an 
 adjunct of price, e. g. gen. Acts 22, 28 ; did 
 c. gen. 8, 20 ; c. gen. 1,18 OVTOS eVr^o-aro 
 T(a>piov fK TOV /xtcrSoC *rX. i. e. was the occa 
 sion of purchasing; comp. Rom. 14, 15. 
 1 Tim. 4, 16. With lv c. dat. trop. Luke 
 21, 19 lv TTJ virop,ovfj vp.a>i> KTr]o~a(r % ray 
 \^v^ay vp.ct>v, through your patience gain 
 your own souls, secure your salvation ; 
 comp. Matt. 10, 22 et 24, 13. Sept. for 
 "I2|2 Gen. 4, 1. 25, 10. Ecclus. 51, 28. 
 3. V. H. 5. 9. Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 3. 
 
 arcs, TO, Kexr^/iat, a posses 
 sion, property, any thing acquired and pos 
 sessed, estate ; Matt. 19, 22 et Mark 10, 22 
 f]v yap f xatv KTrjuara TroXXa. Acts 2, 45. 5, 
 1 comp. v. 3 where is x^piov. Sept. for 
 nbns Job 20, 29 ; "nto Prov. 23, 10. 
 Luc. Tox. 62. Hdian. 7. 12. 13. Xen. Mem 
 3. 11. 5. 
 
 eos, ovs, TO, (Krao/icu,) pr. i. q. 
 , a possession, property ; spec, in Plur. 
 flocks and herds of every kind, Pol. 12. 4. 
 14. Xen. An. 4. 5. 25. In N. T. a least, 
 domestic animal, e. g. as bought or sold 
 Rev. 18, 13 ; as yielding meat 1 Cor. 15, 
 39 ; as used for riding or burden Luke 10, 
 34. Acts 23, 24. Sept. for tvttiz Ex. 9, 20 ; 
 ^2?3 Num. 20, 8 ; Wf;n Gen. 13, 2. 7 ; 1X 
 Gen. 30, 44. Hdian. 4. 15. 13 of horses 
 and camels. Luc. Asin. 13. 
 
 KTrjratp, opos, 6, (Krao/iai,) a possessor, 
 owner, Acts 4, 34 Kr^ropej xapiW. Diod. 
 Sic. VI. p. 196. 
 
 tfYta>, f. ID-CO, (kindr. KTaopai,) pr. to 
 people and till a land, Horn. II. 20. 216 ; to 
 found a city, Horn. Od. 11. 263. Diod. Sic. 
 1. 12. Plato Prot. 322. b. In N. T. to found, 
 to create, to form, e. g. of God as creating 
 the universe or any of its parts, c. ace. 
 Mark 13, 19 ^ rto-e 6 Sedy. Eph. 3, 9. 
 
 Col. 3, 10. 1 Tim. 4, 3. Rev. 4, 11. 10, 6 ; 
 absol. Rom. 1, 25 ; Pass. 1 Cor. 11,9. Rev. 
 4, 1 1. Of Christ, Pass, Col. 1,16 bis. Sept. 
 for ina Deut. 4, 32. Ps. 89, 13. (Wisd. 11, 
 17. Ecclus. 17, 1. ^Eschyl. Suppl. 172.) 
 Trop. of a moral creation, renovation, Eph. 
 2, 10 KTio-%fVTes tv X. I. eVi epyois dyaZols 
 v. 15. 4, 24. So Sept. and xna p s . 51, 12. 
 KTHTis, WSj ^ ( (KT-/^) a founding of 
 cities Jos. c. Ap. 1. 2. Diod. Sic. 2. 4. Thuc. 
 1. 18. In N. T. creation, i. e. 
 
 1. The act of creating, Rom. 1, 20 OTTO 
 KTio-ecos Koo-p-ov. Psalt. Salom. 8, 7. 
 
 2. Genr. a created thing, and collect, cre 
 ated things ; Rom. 1 , 25 f\arpe\xrav TTJ KTI- 
 (Tfi irapa TOV KTiaavTa. 8, 39. Heb. 4, 13. 
 So Wisd. 2, 6. Ecclus. 49, 16. Spec, and 
 collect. a) creation in general, the uni 
 verse, e. g. an dpxrjs Krio-fvs Mark 10, 6. 
 13, 19. 2 Pet. 3, 4. Col. 1, 15 TrpcoroYoKoy 
 irda-rjs KTio-fos. Rev. 3, 14. So Rom. 8, 
 19. 20. 21. 22. Spec, the visjble creation, 
 Heb. 9, 11. So genr. Judith 9, 12. 16, 14. 
 b) Meton. for man, mankind, Mark 16, 15 
 KrjpvgaTf TO fvayye\iov -rrdcrrj TTJ KTto-fi. Col. 
 1, 23. Trop. 2 Cor. 5, 17 et Gal. 6, 15 
 Kaivr) KTitris a new creature in a moral senso, 
 
 1. q. Kaivbs uvZpanros in Eph. 4, 24. 
 
 3. Spec, an ordinance, institution, 1 Pet. 
 
 2. 13 VTTOTaynTC ovv 7700-77 dv^pumivrj /crtWt, 
 i. e. every institution among men, as govern 
 ment, magistrates, etc. 
 
 KTKTfAa, aTos, TO, (KT/<B,) a place found 
 ed, a colony, Strabo 7. p. 315. In N. T. a 
 created thing, creature, 1 Tim. 4, 4. James 
 1,18. Rev. 5, 13. 8,9. SoWisd.9,2. 13,5. 
 
 KTiaTT}?, ov, 6, OTI B,) the founder of a 
 city, Diod. Sic. 11. 66 fin. Plut. Camill. 1. 
 In N. T. a creator, spoken of God, 1 Pet. 
 4, 19. So Ecclus. 24, 8. 2 Mace. 1, 24. 
 
 Kvpeta,) as, 17, (KI/POS cube, die,) dice- 
 playing, Athen. 10. p. 445. a. Xen. Mem. 1. 
 
 3. 2. (Ec. 1. 20. In N. T. trop. gambling, 
 sleight, artifice ; e. g. lv Kvfieia dv^pam^v, 
 through, the sleight of men, Eph. 4, 14. So 
 Rabb. 80Sip Buxt. Lex. Chald. 1984. The- 
 
 odoret. Kvftfiav yap TTJV iravovpylav KaXet. 
 
 KV/3epVT]cri$) ews, (Kv/Bepvdw, ) pr. a steer 
 ing, pilotage, Plato Rep. 488. b. In N. T 
 a governing, direction, put for concr. govern 
 ors, directors, in the primitive churches, 
 1 Cor. 12, 28. Sept. for m ^sntn Prov. 
 11,14. So Plut. Phocion 2 pen. Pind. Pyth 
 10. 112. 
 
 Kvpepvr)Tt]S, ov, 6, (Kv@fpvda>, Lat. gu- 
 lerno,} the governor of a ship, i. e. the steers 
 man, pilot, Lat. gulernator, who had the 
 
KVK\VO) 
 
 sole direction of the ship, Acts 27, 11. Rev. 
 18, 17. See Potter s Gr. Antt. II. p. 144. 
 Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 406. Sept. for bah 
 Ez. 27, 8. 27. 28. Pol. 1. 37. 4. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 7. 3. 
 
 KVK\6VO), f. fvo-w, (KVK\OS,~) to encircle, 
 to surround, to compass, as besiegers a city 
 or camp, c. ace. Rev. 20, 9 Lachm. for Rec. 
 KvfcXooj. Strabo 6. p. 283. 
 
 KVK\c&V, adv. (KwcAor .) from around, 
 round about, Rev. 4, 3. 4. 8 ; c. gen. Rev. 
 
 5, 11 Rec. Sept. for -^Sa Judg. 8, 34. 
 1 K. 4, 24. Lys. 283. 14. Dio Chrys. Or. 
 
 6. 216. Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 9. 
 KVfcXos, ov, o, a circle, in N. T. only in 
 
 dat. Kv*Xo> as adv. around, round about, 
 comp. Buttm. 115. 4. Mark 3, 34 irepi- 
 PXe^dptvos KVAcAo). 6, 6. 36. Luke 9, 12. 
 Rom. 15, 19; c. gen. Rev. 4, 6 KVK\U> TOV 
 SpoW- 5, 11 Grb. 7, 11. Sept. for roo 
 Gen. 23, 17. Ex. 30, 3 ; c. gen. for inf. C^n 
 Josh. 6, 3. Hdian. 1. 15. 5. Xen. Hell. 6. 
 5. 17; c. gen. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 5. 
 
 KVK\f>(0, i), f. wo-a), (KV*AOS ; ) to encircle, 
 (o surround, c. ace. John 10, 24. Acts 14, 
 20. Of besiegers, to surround, to compass, 
 c. ace. Rev. 20, 9. Pass. Luke 21, 20 
 KvicXovp.(V7]v vno <rrpaTonfba>v TTJV lepovcr. 
 Heb. 11, 30. SepU for aao 1 K. 7, 15 ; nan 
 Is. 29, 3. Pol. 1. 17. 13, ^El. H. An. 2.8. 
 Thuc. 4. 32. 
 
 KV\io), f. t o-o), a later form i. q. 
 Buttm. 114; to roll, c. ace. e. g. 
 Sept. for bba Josh. 10, 18 ; irtiov Luc. Hist, 
 conscr. 2. In N. T. Mid. to roll oneself, to 
 wallow, Mark 9, 20 tKvXiero afypifav. So 
 Arr. Epict. 4. 11. 29. Diod. Sic. 1. 87. 
 
 KV\K7fUt) arc?, TO, (ACV\UO,) pr. some 
 thing rolled, a wheel, Symm. for babj Ez. 
 10, 13. In N. T. a wallowing-place, i. q. 
 KvXicrrpa, 2 Pet. 2, 22 Is . . els tcvXio-pa /3op- 
 (So pov, see in |3o p/3opor. So Poll. Onom. I. 
 183 ; comp. KiAiWpa Xen. Eq. 5. 3. 
 
 KvXXos, rj, 6v, (kindr. /coTXoj.) pr. lent, 
 crooked, e. g. the hand as held out in beg 
 ging, Aristoph. Eq. 1083 ; also of the limbs, 
 as KvAAo7ro8ta)i> of Vulcan, Horn. II. 18. 371. 
 Hence genr. and in N. T. crippled, lame, 
 espec. in the hands, Matt. 15, 30. 31. 18,8. 
 Mark 9, 43. So Aristoph. Av. 1379. Hipp, 
 rie Off. med. 6. p. 14. Poll. On. 4. 188. 
 See Kypke I. p. 79. 
 
 /oyia, oroj, TO, (KI/W.) a ware, billow, 
 
 Matt. 8, 24. 14, 24. Mark 4, 37. Acts 27, 
 
 41. Jude 13. Sept. for bs Job 38, 11. Is. 
 
 48, 18. Pol. 10. 10. 3. Plato Tim. 43. b. 
 
 27 
 
 417 Kvpr/vto? 
 
 KVfJ,j3a\ov, ov, TO, (KV^POS,) a cymbal, 
 1 Cor. 13, 1. Sept. for nbsa 1 Chr. 13, 8. 
 Luc. Alex. 9. Xen. Eq. l. 3. 
 
 ov, TO, cummn, cumnum sa- 
 tivum Linn. Heb. "I M?, Germ. Kiimmel, an 
 umbelliferous plant with aromatic seeds of 
 a warm and bitterish taste, very similar to 
 caraway-seeds ; they were used by the an 
 cients as a condiment, as they still are by 
 the common people of Germany ; Matt. 23, 
 23. Sept. for ,33 Is. 28,25. 27. Theophr. 
 II. PI. 7. 3. 2, 3. Comp. Plin. H. N. 20. 57. 
 Celsii Hierob. I. p. 516 sq. 
 
 Kvvdpiov, ov, TO, (dim. KiW.) a little 
 dog, puppy, Matt. 15, 26. 27. Mark 7, 27. 
 28. Arr. Epict. 2. 22. Plato Euthyd. 27. 
 p. 298. d. Xen. Cyr. 8. 4. 20. Comp. Lob 
 ad Phryn. p. 180. 
 
 Kirrrpios, ov, 6, a Cyprian, Cypriot, 
 from Cyprus, Acts 4, 36. 11, 20. 21, 16. 
 
 Kv7rpo$j ov, f], Cyprus, a large and 
 celebrated island of the Mediterranean, not 
 far from the coasts of Syria and Asia Mi 
 nor, extremely fertile, and abounding in 
 wine, oil, alhenna, and mineral productions. 
 The inhabitants were luxurious and effemi 
 nate. The presiding divinity of the island 
 was Venus, who had a famous temple at 
 Paphos, and is hence often called the Pa- 
 phian goddess. Of the Cyprian cities, Sa- 
 lamis and Paphos are mentioned in N. T. 
 It was governed by a proconsul ; see in 
 drtviraros. Acts 11, 19. 13, 4. 15, 39. 21, 
 3. 27, 4. Comp. Cellar. Notit. Orb. II. p. 
 225 sq. Pococke Descr. of the East, II. i. p. 
 210 sq. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. III. p. 378 sq. 
 
 KV7TTW) f. -^0), to bend forwards, to stoop 
 down, absol. Mark 1 , 7. John 8,6.8. Sept. for 
 Tij? 1 Sam. 24, 9. 1 K. 1, 16. 31. Plut. 
 Agesil. 12 med. Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 7. 
 
 KvpTjvaio?, ov, 6, a Cyrenian, from 
 Cyrene in Africa, spoken of Jews born or 
 residing there, Matt. 27, 32. Mark 15, 21. 
 Luke 23, 26. Acts 6, 9. 11, 20. 13, 1. 
 
 TJS, fj, Cyrene, a large and 
 powerful city of Libya Cyrenaica in north 
 ern Africa, situated in a plain a few miles 
 from the Mediterranean coast. It was the 
 resort of great numbers of Jews, who were 
 here protected by the Ptolemies and by the 
 Roman power. Acts 2, 10. See 1 Mace. 
 15, 23. Jos. Ant. 14. 7. 2. ib. 16. 6. 5. c. 
 Ap. 2. 4. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. III. p. 367. 
 Kvpijvios, ov, o, Cyrenius, Lat. Quiri- 
 nus, Luke 2, 2, i. e. Publius Sulpitius Qui- 
 rinus, a Roman senator, of an obscure 
 
418 
 
 family, but raised to the highest honours 
 by Augustus, Tacit. Ann. 3. 48. He was 
 sent as governor or proconsul to Syria ; 
 and as such took a census of the whole 
 province with a view to taxation, which 
 was completed in A. D. 8, according to the 
 usual chronology, Acts 5, 37. Jos. Ant. 18. 
 
 1. 1. ib. 18. 2. 1. The census spoken of 
 in Luke 1. c. was perhaps a mere enrol 
 ment of persons (see in anoypatyrf), and is 
 therefore mentioned by no other historian ; 
 hut how could it have been made by Cyre- 
 nius, who first came as proconsul several 
 years later ? and when too at the time spe 
 cified by Luke, Saturninus or Varrus and 
 not Cyrenius was proconsul of Syria ? Not 
 improbably Cyrenius may have been at that 
 time joined with Saturninus, either as a 
 commissioner, or as his procurator, and is 
 therefore called r)ytp.a>v, just as Volumnius 
 had before been procurator and was called 
 tjye pcov, Jos. Ant. 16. 9. 1. ib. 16. 10. 8; 
 and just as Coponius afterwards was joined 
 as procurator with Cyrenius himself, and so 
 was called ijye/xcoi , Jos. Ant. 18. 1.1. Pro 
 fane history does not indeed assert that 
 Quirinus had thus been procurator of Syria 
 at a period some years before he was sent 
 thither as proconsul ; but it does relate that 
 he had been before sent into the east as 
 imperial commissioner; Tacit. 1. c. comp. 
 
 2. 42, and Jos. Ant. 18. 1. 1. The hypo 
 thesis is therefore a probable one, and is fa 
 voured also by the mode of expression in 
 Luke : This census took place FIRST (as the 
 first) under Cyrenius. See Ideler Chronol. 
 II. p. 394 sq. Credner Beitr. z. Einl. in 
 N. T. I. p. 230 sq. Miinter Stern d. Wei- 
 sen 88 sq. Others take Trpoorr; for compar. 
 irporepa, and render before Cyrenius ; but 
 without sufficient authority; see Tholuck 
 Glaubwiirdigk. p. 182 sq. Huschke lib. d. 
 Census, p. 89 sq. 
 
 Kvpia, as, T], (fern, of Kvpioy,) mistress, 
 lady, used as an honorary title of address to 
 a female, as in English, 2 John 1.5; comp. 
 in Kvpios I. 3. So Epict. Ench. 40 al yv- 
 vaiKfs Kvpiai KaXovvrai O.TTO T{o-<rapfo~Kai- 
 8fAca ercav. Genr. Sept. for rPOS Gen. 16, 4. 
 2 K. ft, 3. Xen. Hell. 3. 1. 12! Others re 
 gard it as a fern. pr. n. Cyria, which was 
 not unusual among the Greeks ; comp. 
 Gruteri Inscript. p. 1127. no. XL Liicke 
 Comm. in Job. III. p. 351. ed. 2. 
 
 KVpLaKO<;. 77, ov. (Kvpios,) pertaining to 
 the Lord, to the Lord Jesus Christ ; e. g. 
 KvpiaKov 8(~nrvov the Lord s supper 1 Cor. 
 11, 20 ; Kvp. fjntpa the Lord s day Rev. 1, 
 
 10. Act. Thorn. 31. Clem. Alex. Strom. 
 7. 10. 
 
 KVpievco, f. fV(TO) , (^pior,) to be lord 
 over any person or thing, to hare dominion 
 over, c. gen. Luke 22, 25 of pa<n\e is T&V 
 fyvaiv Kvpifvovcriv avT&v. Rom. 14, 9. 2 Cor. 
 
 I, 24. Part. 6 Kvpi.fi/cov, a lord, potentate. 
 1 Tim. 6, 15 Kvpios ra>v Kvpttvovruv Lord 
 of lords ; comp. in ftao-iXfvs no. 1. Trop. of 
 things, Rom. 6, 9. 14 d/xaprta yap vpiov ov 
 Kvpieva-fi. 7, 1. Sept. for il?J3 Judor. 9, 2. 
 Is. 19, 4. Pol. 5. 34. 6. Xen. Mem. 3 5. 11. 
 
 Kvpios, ov, 6, (<cvpos,) lord, master, owner. 
 
 1. Generally: 1. The possessor, owner, 
 master, e. g. of property. Matt. 20, 8 6 KV- 
 pios TOV afjiTrfXtovos. 21, 40. Gal. 4, 1. Sept. 
 6 Kvpios TOV Tavpov Heb. ??3 Ex. 21, 28. 
 29. 34. (Pol. 3. 98. 10. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 44.) 
 So the master or head of a house, Mark 13, 
 35 Kvpios Tys oiKias. Matt. 15, 27. (Sept. 
 and i>?3 Ex. 22, 7.) The master or pos 
 sessor of persons, servants, slaves, Matt. 10. 
 24. 24, 45 SovXof . . . ov KaTfo~TT)<rev 6 Kvpios 
 avTov KT\. v. 46. 48. 50. Acts 16, 16. 19. 
 Rom. 14, 4. Eph. 6, 5. 9. Col. 3, 22. 4, 1. 
 al. Sept. for D^-hx Judg. 19, 11. Gen. 
 24, 9 sq. (Luc. Nigr. 26. Diod. Sic. 4. 63. 
 Xen. Conv. 6. 1.) Spoken of a husband., 
 1 Pet. 3, 6 wy Sdppa VTTJJKOVCTC rc3 A^paa/x, 
 Kvpiov CIVTUV KaXouo-a. Sept. for "p ^X Gen. 
 18, 12. So Pint. Mor. II. p. 210. With 
 gen. of thing, and without the art. lord, 
 master of any thing, as having absolute au 
 thority over it, e. g. Kvpios TOV 3epi crp.ov 
 Matt. 9, 38. Luke 10, 2 ; K. TOV o-aj3/3drot; 
 Matt. 12, 8. Mark 2, 28. So Jos. Ant. 4. 
 
 8. 19 Kvpios fivai Ta (pvru KapnovcrSai. Dem. 
 36. 27. Xen. Cyr. 8. 5. 22. 
 
 2. Of a supreme lord, sovereign, e. g. the 
 Roman emperor Acts 25, 26. So Philo 
 Leg. ad Cai. II. p. 587. 42. Arr. Epict. 4. 
 1.12. Plut. Brut. 30. Of the heathen gods, 
 1 Cor. 8. 5 wcTTTfp fieri 3eoi TroXXot KOI KV- 
 pioi TroXXoi, i. e. gods superior and inferior. 
 So Pind. Isth. 5. 67 Zevs 6 Trdirtav Kvpios. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 65. 
 
 3. As an honorary title of address, espe 
 cially to superiors, as Engl. Master, *Str , 
 Fr. Sieur, Monsieur ; Germ. Herr ; e. g. 
 from a servant to his master Matt. 13, 27. 
 Luke 13, 8 ; a son to his father Matt. 21, 
 30 ; to a teacher, master, Matt. 8, 25. Luke 
 
 9, 54, (comp. in fVioTar^s,) and so doubled 
 Matt. 7. 21. 22. Luke 6. 46 ; to a person of 
 dignity and authority, Mark 7, 28. John 4, 
 
 II. 15. 19. 49; to the Roman procurator 
 Matt. 27, 63. Also in the respectful intei 
 course of common life, John 12,21. 20, 15 
 
419 
 
 Acts 16, 30. Comp. Seneca Ep. 3, obvios, 
 si nomen non succurrit, dominos appella- 
 mus. Sept. and "pX Gen. 19, 2. 23, 6. 
 11. 15. al. Arr. Epict. 2. 20. 30. ib. 3. 10. 
 
 15. Pol. 7. 9. 5. 
 
 II. Spec, of God and Christ. 
 
 1. Of God as the Supreme Lord and 
 sovereign of the universe, usually in Sept. 
 for Heb. fTtSTJ Jehovah. With the art. 6 
 jcupios, Matt . 1, 22. 5, 33. Mark 5, 19. 
 Luke 1, 6. 28. Acts 7, 33. Heb. 8, 2. 10. 
 James 4, 15. al. saep. Without the art. 
 Kvpios Matt. 27, 10. Mark 13, 20. Luke 
 1,58. Acts?, 49. Rom. 4, 8. Heb. 7, 21. 
 1 Pet. 1, 25. al. saep. So Sept. for nVYj, 
 6 icvp. Job 1, 7 ; xvp. Gen. 11, 5. 18, 33 ; 
 ^HX, 6 Kvp. Is. 49, 14 ; Kvp. 1 K. 22, 6 ; 
 nifiVrnx, 6 *vp. Ps. 73, 28 ; Kvp. 1 K. 2, 
 26 ; t^rfbsjj , 6 Kvp. 1 Sam. 23, 7 ; Kvp. Gen. 
 21, 2. 6 ; &J , 6 Kvp. Job 8, 3 ; K vp. Num. 
 23, 8 ; n, Kvp . Job 6, 4. 14. With ad 
 juncts, without the art. e. g. Kvpios 6 3e- 
 6s TIVOS Matt. 4, 7. 10. 22, 37. Luke 1, 
 
 16. al. Sept. for nvr; \3V1X Is. 25, 8. Ez. 
 4, 14; (so Judith 8, 14. 16;) nvptos <ra- 
 /3ao>3 Rom. 9, 29. James 5, 4. Sept. and 
 Heb. rvixss ,-nrp : Sam 15j 2 . i s . i, 9. 
 
 So Kvpios TravTOKpdrtop 2 Cor. 6, 18, 
 and Kvpios 6 Seo? 6 TrairoKparcop Rev. 4, 8. 
 
 11. 17. al. Sept. for rnxas rnrn 2 Sam. 
 7,8. Nah. 2, 14. Also Kvpios T>V KV- 
 pifvovruv Lord of lords 1 Tim. 6, 15, 
 comp. in jSao-iXeus no. 1. Further, Kvpios 
 ovpavov KOI yf/s Acts 17, 24 ; and so ap 
 plied also to God as the Father of our Lord 
 Jesus Christ, Matt. 11,25 Trarep, Kvpif rov 
 ovpavov KT\. Lake 10, 21. Comp. Heb. 
 C^SISrl ^n 5X rVJrn Sept. ptos 6 3eor roO 
 ovpavov 2 Chr. 36, 23. Ezra 1, 2. Neh. 1, 5. 
 
 2. Of the Lord Jesus Christ. a) In 
 reference to his abode on earth as a master 
 and teacher, where it is i. q. pafifii, and tVt- 
 orarjjj, comp. Matt. 17, 4 with Mark 9, 5 
 and Luke 9, 33 ; comp. also John 13, 13. 
 14. So chiefly in the evangelists before the 
 resurrection of Christ, and with the art. 
 6 Kvpios THE Lord emphat. Matt. 21, 3 6 
 icvpios avT<i>v xpfiavexfi. 28, 6. Luke 7, 13. 
 10, 1. John 4, 1. 20, 2. 13. Acts 9, 5. 
 1 Cor. 9, 5. al. sasp. With adjuncts, e. g. 
 6 Kvpios KOI 6 SiSao-AcaXor John 13, 13. 14; 
 6 Kvpiot lyo-ovs Luke 24, 3. Acts 1, 21. 
 
 4, 33. al. b) As the Supreme Lord of the 
 gospel dispensation, Head over all things to 
 the church Eph. 1, 22 ; Lord of all, 6 yap 
 avros Kvpios ndvrtav Rom. 10, 12 ; comp. 9, 
 
 5. 1 Cor. 15, 25 sq. Heb. 2, 8. 8, 1. Rev. 
 
 17. 14. With the art. 6 Kvpios Mark 16, 
 
 19. 20. Acts 8, 25. 19, 10. 2 Cor. 3, 17. 
 Eph. 5, 10. Col. 3, 23. 2 Thess. 3, 1. 6. 
 2 Tim. 4, 8. James 5, 7. al. sajp. So c, 
 gen. of pers. 6 Kvpios p-ov, Matt. 22, 44. 
 Eph. 6, 9. Heb. 7, 14. Rev. 11, 8. With 
 out the art. Kvpios Luke 1, 76. 2 Cor. 3, 
 16. 17. Col. 4, 1. 2 Pet. 3, 10. For iv KV- 
 pica see below. With adjuncts, c. art. f KV- 
 pios ITJCTOVS or lr)o~ovs 6 K . 1 Cor. 5, 5. 11, 
 23. Rom. 4, 24 ; o *vp. fjp.<av Ir/o-ovr Heb. 
 13, 20 ; 6 K. rjpuv XptoT-os- once Rom. 16, 
 18 ; 6 AC. Irja-ovs Xprrof, or I. Xp. 6. Kvp. 
 Acts 16, 31. Rom. 13, 14. al. Rom. 1, 4. 
 1 Cor. 1, 9. al. 6 Kvp. fjp.a>v l. Xp. 1 Cor. 1, 
 2. 10. Gal. 6, 18. al. saep. I. Xp. 6. Kvp. 
 Ww Eph. 3, 11. 1 Tim. 1, 2. 2 Pet. 1, 2. 
 So without the art. Kvpios lyo-ovs Rom. 10, 
 9. 1 Cor. 12, 3. Phil. 2, 19. al. Xptoro? KV- 
 pioy, the Messiah, Luke 2, 1 1 ; Kvpios Iq- 
 <rovs XpioTo f, or I. Xp. Kvpios, Rom. 1, 
 7. 2 Cor. 1, 2. Phil. 1, 2. al. 2 Cor. 4, 5 ; 
 Kvpios TJJJLGOV I. Xp. Gal. 1, 3. Spec, in 
 the phrase ei> Kvpia>, in the Lord, without 
 the art. found only in the usage of Paul ex 
 cept once Rev. 14, 13, and to be explained 
 from the fact, that believers are represented 
 as one with Christ ; as members of his 
 body Eph. 5, 30, comp. 1 Cor. 12, 27 ; or 
 also of one spiritual body of which Christ is 
 the Head Col. 3, 19, comp. Eph. 2,20; and 
 are therefore in Christ ; see espec. in iv no. 
 1 . c. a. Hence ei> nvpia is : a) in the 
 Lord, after verbs of rejoicing, trusting, and 
 the like, genr. Phil. 3, 1. 1 Cor. 1, 31. 
 Phil. 2, 19. ) in or by the Lord, by 
 his authority, Eph. 4, 17. 1 Thess. 4, 1. 
 y) in or through the Lord, thro ugh his aid and 
 influence, by his help, 1 Cor. 15, 58. 2 Cor. 
 2, 12. Gal. 5, 10. Eph. 2, 21. Col. 4, 17. 
 S) in the work of the Lord, in the gospel- 
 work, Rom. 16, 8. 13. 1 Cor. 4, 17. 9, 2. 
 Eph. 6, 21. 1 Thess. 5, 12. f ) As mark 
 ing condition, one in the Lord, i. e. united 
 with him, his follower, a Christian, Rom. 
 16, 11. Phil. 4, 1. Philem. 16. As 
 denoting manner, in the Lord, i. e. as be 
 comes those who are in the Lord, Chris 
 tians, Rom. 16, 2. 22. 1 Cor. 7, 39. Eph. 
 6, l. Phil. 2,29. Col. 3, 18. -f 
 
 TTJTOS, f], (uptor,) lordship, 
 dominion, for concr. lords, princes, rulers, 
 Eph. 1, 21. Col. 1, 16. 2 Pet. 2, 10. Jude 
 8. Not found in classic writers. 
 
 /cvpoci), , f. o>crci>, (KI/POS ,) to make valid, 
 sure, to confirm, c. ace. e. g. StaS^i/ Gal. 
 3, 15. 2 Cor. 2, 8 Kvp(a<rai (is avrov dyaTrrjv. 
 Sept. Pass, for wp Gen. 23, 20. Jos. Ant 
 10. 11. 6. Pol. 1. 11. 1, 3. Thuc. 8. 69. 
 
KVCOV 
 
 420 
 
 KVCOV, KVVOS, 6, T], a dog ; Plur. ot nvves, 
 dogs; Luke 16, 21. 2 Pet. 2, 22. Sept. for 
 3.J3 Ex. 22, 31. Judg. 7, 5. (Ml. H. An. 
 8/9. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 13.) In the east 
 dogs arc mostly without masters ; they 
 wander at large in the streets and fields, 
 often in troops, and feed upon offal and 
 even corpses; comp. 1 K. 14,11. 16,4. 
 
 21, 19. Ps. 59, 6. 14 sq. They are held 
 as unclean, and to call one a dog is a 
 stronger expression of contempt than even 
 with us ; 1 Sam. 17, 43. 2 K. 8, 13. The 
 Jews called the heathen dogs, just as Mu- 
 hammedans do Christians at the present 
 day; comp. Schcettgen Hor. Heb. p. 1145. 
 See Rosenm. Bibl. Alterthk. IV. ii. p. 95. 
 Trop. for an impudent, shameless person, 
 including the idea of uncleanness ; so Phil. 3, 
 2, where it is spoken of Judaizing teachers, 
 comp. Is. 56, 11. (Horn. II. 6. 344, 356. Od. 
 
 22. 35.) So in the proverb, Matt. 7, 6 /ZTJ 
 Score TO ayiov TO!S KVO-I, lit. gice not that 
 which is holy unto dogs, i. e. genr. proffer 
 not good and holy things to those who will 
 spurn and pervert them. Plur. also for 
 Sodomites, catamites, Rev. 22, 15 ; so Sept. 
 and 3^9 Deut. 23, 19, comp. v. 18. 
 
 KW\f>v, ov, TO, (perh. /ce XXco,) a limb, 
 member, of the human body Eurip. Phcen. 
 1185 [1201]. Apollodor. Bibl. 3. 5; of an 
 animal Diod. Sic. 3. 28. In N. T. Plur. 
 ra Ku\a,the limbs, for the carcass, corpse, 
 as in Engl. the bones, Heb. 3, 17. So Sept. 
 for "ttQ Num. 14, 29. 32. Is. 66, 24. 
 
 Kd)\va>, f. vo-w, (/coXor, kindr. KoXafco, 
 KoXoi co,) pr. to cut short ; hence genr. to 
 hinder, to prevent, to restrain, pr. with ace. 
 of pers. and gen. of thing, Acts 27, 43 (<a>- 
 \v<rfi> UVTOVS TOV J3ov\r] juaror. So Sept. 
 for TOMB 1 Sam. 25, 26. (Pol. 2.8.8. 
 Xen. Ag. 2. 2.) With ace. of pers. and inf. 
 Acts 8, 36 rl KwXvet p.f ftairr lo-Srjvai. 16, 6. 
 24, 23. 1 Thess. 2, 16. Heb. 7, 23; ace. 
 impl. Luke 23, 2. 1 Tim. 4, 3. Matt. 19, 
 14 ; inf. impl. Mark 9, 38. 39. 10, 14. Luke 
 9, 49. 11, 52. 18, 16. Acts 11, 17. Rom. 1, 
 
 13. 3 John 10 ; absol. Luke 9, 50. (Hdian. 
 1. 12. 5. Xen. Mem. 4. 5. 4 ; ace. impl. Jos. 
 C. Ap. 1. 22 KcoXvovo-t oi vofioi geviKovs op- 
 KOVS optnifiv. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 26 ; inf. 
 impl. Xen. Hell. 7. 5. 26 ; absol. Xen. An. 
 4. 2. 25 ult.) With ace. of thing, 1 Cor. 
 
 14, 39 Kal TO XaXfiv yX&xro-au M KcoXvere. 
 2 Pet. 2, 16. (Hdian. 3. 1. 13. Xen. Mem. 
 4. 5. 5.) With ace. of thing and TOV c. inf. 
 Acts 10, 47 /xqrt TO vftcap KcoXOerai . . . TOU 
 pf] /3a7TTio-3^ai TOVTOVS, comp. Buttm. 140. 
 n. 10. Winer 45. 4. b. By Hebr. with ace. 
 
 of thing and OTTO c. gen. of pers. Luke 6, 
 29 cnro Toi alpovTos o~ov TO fyiaTioi/, Kal TOV 
 
 a p,rj Kai\vo-r)s. So Sept. for *Jtt NP3 
 Gen. 23, 6 ; "JO ? 2 Sam. 13, 13. 
 
 K(i)fJ, / rjj rjs, rj, (K(ifj.a.i, Kot/iaco,) a village^ 
 hamlet, country-town, without walls, opp. to 
 a fortified city. 
 
 1. Genr. e. g. Tay vroXeis Kai TO.S Koo/ias 
 Matt. 9, 35. 10, 11. Luke 8,1. 13,22, 
 dypol KOI Kco/iat fields and villages Mark 6, 
 36. Luke 9, 12; Kco/xat fj TroXeiy rj dypol 
 Mark 6, 56 ; jj KU>^, at Kw/^at, simply, Matt. 
 14,15.21,2. Mark 6, 6. 11,2. Luke 5. 
 17. 9, 6. 52. 56. 10, 38. 17, 12. 19, 30. 
 24, 13. 28. John 11, 1. 30. So John 7, 42 
 of Bethlehem, i. e. before the time of Reho- 
 boam, who fortified it, 2 Chr. 11,6. Meton. 
 milages for the inhabitants of villages Acts 
 8, 25. Sept. for "<S3 1 Chr. 27, 25. Cant. 
 
 7, 12. So Pol. 2. 17. 9 <pKovv KOTO Kco/ia? 
 aTfixiorovs. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 28. Spec. 
 Mark 8, 27 at jca>/iat Katcrapei as, the villages 
 of Cesarea, i. e. lying around und depend 
 ent upon it. Sept. Plur. for m 33 Josh. 15 
 45. 17, 11 ; "istn Josh. 15> 31 sq. 19, 6 sq 
 
 2. Apparently of a large town or city 
 perhaps without walls, or partly in ruins 
 e. g. the northern Be thsaida (Julias), Marli 
 
 8, 23. 26 bis ; comp. v. 22. Sept. for its 
 Josh. 10, 37. 15, 9. Hdian. 3. 6. 19 ol 
 Byzantium, 7rao-a Te TJ TroXty KdTfo-Kcxpr) 
 Kai. . .iravros Te Kocrpov Kal TI^S d<pcupt %tv 
 TO ~BvdvTt,ov Ktap.r] fiovXeueti/ Dcpu&otc Soo- 
 pov e SoSj;. 
 
 KWfl07TO\t<), ea>s, fj, (KW/^T;, TroXts,) c 
 xillage-city, town, i. e. a large village 01 
 town like a city, but without walls, Mark 
 1, 38. Strabo 13. p. 887. b, KOI TO "l\ioi>, 
 o vvv e oTt, K(t>p.6no\is TIS rjv. 
 
 /cw/i09, ov, 6, a revel, carousal, Lat. co 
 missatio, a merry-making or rioting afte? 
 supper, the guests often sallying into the 
 streets with torches, music, frolic, and songs 
 in honour espec. of Bacchus ; Rom. 13, 13. 
 Gal. 5, 21. 1 Pet. 4, 3. 2 Mace. 6, 6. Diod. 
 Sic. 17. 72. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 25. Comp. 
 Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 434. Diet, of Antt. 
 art. Comissalio. 
 
 Kaivco^r, (CTTos, 6, T], a gnat, culex, as 
 found in acid wine and vinegar, Matt. 23. 
 24 ; see in fcd^Xos. Aristot. H. An. 5. 19 
 ot 8e Kwvames (K o-KO\f]KMV, ot yivovrai tn 
 TJyr Trepi TO oos tXuos. Pint. adv. Stoic. 28 ; 
 genr. Hdot. 2. 95. Comp. Buxt. Lex. 1516. 
 
 Kw9, 77, gen. K, ace. K&v and K, 
 Buttm. ^ 37. n. 2 ; Cos or Co, now Stan- 
 ko or Stanchio, a small and fertile island of 
 
Ko) era/A 
 
 421 
 
 (he figean sea, near the coast of Caria in 
 Asia Minor, almost between the promonto 
 ries on which the cities Cnidus and Hali- 
 carnassus were situated. It was celebrated 
 for its wine, silks, and cotton of a beautiful 
 texture. Acts 21, 1 tig rr)i/ Kcoi/. 1 Mace. 
 15, 23 tls Kw. Jos. Ant. 14. 7. 2. See 
 Strabo 14. p. 657. 
 
 Kcacrd/ji, 6, indec. Cosam, prob. Heb. 
 cop, pr. n. of a man Luke 3, 28. 
 
 /co)(/>6?5 T), 6v, (KOTTTW,) pr. blunted, dull, 
 e. g. a weapon cornp. Horn. II. 11. 390. 
 [n N. T. trop. of the senses and faculties. 
 
 1 . As to the tongue, the speech, blunted, 
 lame, dumb; Matt. 9, 32. 33 t\d\t]a-tv 6 
 Koxpos. 12, 22 bis. 15, 30. 31. Luke 1, 22. 
 11, 14 bi?, 8aip.uviov Ko><b6v, comp. in aXa- 
 Xoj. Sept. for n^x Hab. 2, 18. Hdot. 1. 34 
 comp. 85. Xen. Cyr. 7. 2. 20. 
 
 2. As to the hearing, blunted, dull, deaf; 
 Matt. 11,5 KOI Koxpol UKOVOWI. Mark 7, 32 
 comp. v. 33. v. 37 TOVS Kaxpoiis Trotei fbtoucur. 
 9, 25 7rvevfJ,a aXaXov Kal Koxpov. see in aXa- 
 \og. Luke 7, 22. Sept. and SJnn Ps. 38, 14. 
 Is. 35, 5. 43, 8. Luc. Vitar. Auct. 2T 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 19. 
 
 , f. Xijfo/xai, aor. 2 
 
 1. to obtain by lot, to have fall to one s 
 lot; c. gen. Luke 1, 9 eXa^e rou %vp.id<rai, 
 the different portions of the daily service 
 being assigned by lot, see Wetst. N. T. in 
 [oc. Matth. \ 328. So c. gen. Plut. de Fac. 
 in orbe Lun. 20; absol. Jos. B. J. 3. 8. 7. 
 Diod. Sic. 4. 63. Xen. Cyr. 6. 3. 34. 
 Spec, to lot, to distribute by lot, to cast lots, 
 with irtpi c. gen. John 19, 24 Xa^t^ey Trepi 
 aiiTov, TWOS ecrrai. So absol. Diod. Sic. 4. 
 G3 fXa^ov, Kal o-vvef3r) ra> rtXr/pw Xa^elv 
 Qrjcrta. 
 
 2. Genr. to obtain, to receive, c. ace. Acts 
 
 I, 17 (\axt TOV K\f)pov, see in K\rjpos no. 2. 
 
 2 Pet. 1, 1. Comp. Matth. 1. c. p. 637. 
 
 3 Mace. 6, 1. Luc. Hermot. 57. Xen. An. 
 4. 5. 24. 
 
 Ad^apo-)) ov, 6, Lazarus, pr. n. a) 
 The brother of Mary and Martha of Beth 
 any, raised by Jesus from the dead, John 
 
 II, 1. 2. 5. 11. 14. 43. 12, 1. 2. 9. 10. 17. 
 b) The poor man in our Lord s parable, 
 Luke 16, 20. 23. 24. 25. Hence the mod 
 ern Lazaretto. 
 
 \a&pa, adv. (Xa3t ~u>, Xaj/Sdvco,) secretly, 
 privately; Matt. 1, 19 Xd3pa dnoXva-ai. 2, 
 7. John 11, 28. Acts 16, 37. Sept. for 
 1PB3 Deut. 13, 7 ; B^3 i Sam. 18, 22. 
 Diod. Sic. 14. 75. Xen. Hell. 4. 8. 16. 
 
 \ai\aty, OTTOS, T), a storm, tempest, of 
 wind with rain, Mark 4, 37. Luke 8, 23. 
 2 Pet. 2, 17. Sept. for 150 Jer. 35, 32 ; 
 new Job 21, 18. Pol. 30* 14. 6. Plut. 
 Ti mol. 28. 
 
 \dfCO), see Xda-xia. 
 
 Xa/n-i a>, f. I o-w, (Xd.) to kick, to strike 
 with the heel, e. g. irpbs Ktvrpa Acts 9, 5. 
 
 26, 14; see in Kfvrpov no. 2. Luc. Her 
 mot. 33. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 7. 
 
 \a\ea), a, f. 770-0), to speak, to talk, pr. 
 to use the voice, without any necessary 
 reference to the words spoken, and thus 
 differing from dntlv and Xtyuv ; see Tittm. 
 de Syn. N. T. p. 79, 80. So espec. of 
 children, to talk much, to prattle, Germ. 
 lallen, Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 12 TraiSdptov &v, 
 Sfivoraros \a\elv (8oKovv tlvai. Plut. de 
 Garrul. 1 ; also of monkeys, to chatter, to 
 babble, Plut. de Placit. Philosopher. 5. 20 ; 
 of birds, to twitter, to chirp, Mosch. 3. 113. 
 Theocr. 5. 34. Comp. Heb. lax and -12^ 
 Gesen. Lex. In N. T. genr. to speak, to 
 talk ; less frequent in profane writers. 
 
 1. Pr. of persons, to speak, absol. Matt. 
 9, 33 (\d\vo-(v 6 Kco(o y. 12, 22. 15, 31. 
 Mark 5, 35 en avrov XaXoOiro?. Luke 7, 
 15. Acts 18, 9. James 1,.19. al. saep. Sept. 
 for -i:n 1 Sam. 3, 9. 10. Is. 1, 2. (Luc. de 
 Domo 3 ult. Hdian. 2. 4. 14 fri XoXoiWa 
 TOV. . .<povvov<ri.) With an adv. John 18, 
 23 Kaxas e XdXrjo-a. 1 Cor. 13, 11 o>s VTJ- 
 irios eXdXow. So opScor Mark 7, 35 ; ov- 
 rcos Acts 7, 6. Heb. 6, 9 ; crro/xa Trpos crro/xa 
 mouth to mouth, i. e. face to face, 2 John 12. 
 (Sept. for HB-bx no la n Num. 12, 8 ; 
 ijSeW Dem. 578. 16.) With other adjuncts 
 of manner, e. g. with dat. irapprja-ia. boldly, 
 openly, John 7, 26. Acts 2, 6 I8ia SiaXtKrw. 
 6, 10. 1 Cor. 13, 1 ; genr. yXwo-o-ats 
 XaXeli/ see in yXeoo-em no. 2. d. Also with 
 a prep. e. g. ds depa 1 Cor. 14, 9 see in 
 dfjp ; ex c. gen. of manner rr source Matt, 
 12, 34 ; e /c TO>J> I8la>v XoXfi, John 8, 44 ; e v 
 c. dat. 1 Cor. 12, 3 tv Trvfi^ian 3. XoXcoi/. 
 With a particip. of manner, Luke 1, 64 Kai 
 eXfiXa (v\oya>v. 2 Cor. 11, 23. In various 
 constructions marking the person (or thing) 
 
XaXeo) 
 
 XaXetw 
 
 to or of whom one speaks, e. g. a) With 
 dat. of pers. to speak to or with any one, 
 Matt. 12, 47 {flTovvrts trot XaXrjcrtu. Luke 
 1,22. John 9, 29. 19,10. Acts 7, 38. Rom. 
 7, 1. (Sept. and 13^ Gen. 18, 33. Arr. 
 Epict. 3. 13. 7. Dem 578. 16.) With an 
 adjunct of manner added, e. g. dat. Trapprj- 
 <ria John 7, 13. Eph. 5, 19 \a\ovvras eav- 
 roit i//-aXp,otj, i.e. singing together; ev c. 
 dat. 1 Cor. 14, 6. 21 ; ire pi TWOS Luke 2, 
 38. With particip. \eyu>v, giving defi- 
 niteness to the idea of XoXeti/, Matt. 14, 27 
 f\d\r)(rev avTois 6 I. Xc yo)! . 23, 1. 28, 18. 
 Luke 24, 6. al. ssep. So Sept. for ibxb ISpj 
 Gen. 17, 3. 34, 8 ; -,bsb las Gen. 22, 42 . 
 See Heb. Lex. art. "vox no. 1. b) With 
 p,era TIVOS, to speak with, John 4, 27. 9, 
 37 6 XaXwp p.era <rov. With Xe yw, Mark 
 6, 50 e\d\r)<re per* avTtav KOI Xe yet. Rev. 
 21, 9 Xeyav. Sept. for B? ^3^ Num. 11, 
 17 ; PS n Gen. 35, 13. c) With n-pos 
 rtwz, to speafc to, found only thrice except in 
 Luke s writings (1 Thess. 2, 2. Heb. 5, 5. 
 11, 18; see below). Acts 4, 1 XaXoiW<Bi> 
 be avTwv irpbs TOV XadV. 21, 39. Sept. for 
 is 13-n Gen. 18, 27. 29. (Luc. Asin. 5. 
 Plut. de Garrul. 1.) Followed by eiiayye- 
 Xj fopat Luke 1, 19. Acts 11, 20; \tycov 
 Acts 8, 26. 26, 31. 28, 25. With \eya>v 
 imp}. Heb. 5, 5. 11, 18. So Sept. for 
 bs iM c . ib impl. 1 K. 21, 5. 2 K. 1, 
 
 1 ; comp. Gen. 41, 17. Ex. 32, 7. See 
 Heb. Lex. art. W Piel no. I.e. d) With 
 rrept TLVOS, to speak about or of any one, 
 John 8, 26. 12, 41. Sept. for 3 13 1 ]? 
 Ez. 33, 30. e) With ace. of a kindred 
 noun or of a pronoun, in a general or ad 
 verbial sense, and thus differing from \eyeiv 
 c. ace. which implies a definite object or is 
 followed by the express words spoken ; see 
 Buttm. 5 131. 4 and 8; comp. in Engl. to 
 talk nonsense, i. e. foolishly, to talk strange 
 things, i. e. strangely. Matt. 12, 34 irS>s 
 8vva(T%f aya3a XoXcti/. John 8, 20 pTjpara. 
 Rom. 15, 18 rt. 1 Cor. 9, 8 ravra. 14, 9. 
 
 2 Cor. 12, 4. 1 Tim. 5, 13. So Mark 2, 7 
 XaXet jSXaa-eprjptay. Acts 6, 13 pijpara 
 /3Xao-(p. John 8, 44 TO tyevo os. Jude 15. 
 16. Sept. and ns n Ex. 4, 12. (Luc. De- 
 monax 51 oXt ya p,ev XaXa>j/, TroXXa Se UKOV- 
 uv. Plut. de Garrul. 23. Xen. Cyr. 1.4. 1.) 
 With other adjuncts added, e. g. ace. et dat. 
 of pers. Matt. 9, 18. John 14, 25. 15, 11. 
 (Sept. Gen. 28, 15.) Or also dat. of man 
 ner. Mark 8, 32 TOV \6yov Trapprjo-ia e XaXft. 
 1 Cor. 14, 2 ; bid c. gen. of manner 1 Cor. 
 14, 9; tv c. dat. of manner 2 Cor. 11, 17; 
 tv XpioraJ i. e. by his authority 2 Cor. 12, 
 
 19. Also ri Kara Tiva .. e. according to 
 2 Cor. 11, 17; rt pera TIVOS Eph. 4, 25 
 (Sept. Gen. 31,29); rt irepi TIVOS Luke 
 2, 33; rl irpos nva Acts 11, 14. Luke 
 24, 44 ; -n-pos TO ovs Luke 12, 3. Sept. for 
 b? "iStt Gen. 18, 19. 
 
 2. As modified by the context, where the 
 sense lies not so much in XaXe> as in the 
 adjuncts, e. g. a) Of one teaching, for 
 to teach, to preach, absol. Luke 5, 4. 1 Cor. 
 14, 34. 35. 1 Pet. 4, 11 ; with an adv. John 
 12, 50. Acts 14, 1. Eph. 6, 20 ; with diro 
 v. eVc c. gen. of source or occasion John 7, 
 17. 18. 12, 49; eV c. gen. of manner, 
 John 3, 31 ; with a dat. of manner, yXwcr- 
 a-ais \a\elv, Mark 16, 17. Acts 2, 4. al. 
 see in yXSxraa no. 2. d. Also with an ad 
 junct of pers. to whom, e. g. dat. John 15, 
 22. 1 Cor. 3, 1 ; adv. irapprjo-ia John 18, 
 20 ; ev c. dat. of manner Matt. 13, 10 Start 
 ev 7rapa/3oXaTs XaXety avTols. 13, 34; eVt 
 rw owpan TIVOS Acts 4, 17. 5, 40, see in 
 tiri II. 3. c. /3. So Trept TIVOS Luke 9, 
 11 ; irpos Tiva Acts 11, 20. Further, with 
 an ace. of the thing taught; absol. John 3 
 11. 8, 30. 40. 18, 20. Acts 16, 14. 20, 30. 
 Tit. 2, 1 ; and so in reference to the doc 
 trines of Jesus, John 8, 28. 38. 12, 50. 
 Acts 5, 20. 17, 19. 1 Cor. 2, 6. 7 ; XoXa 
 KOI StSao-Jceti/ Acts 18, 25. With pers. to 
 whom, e. g. dat. Mark 2, 2 e XdXei avTois 
 TOV \6yov. 4, 33. John 6, 63. Acts 8, 25 ; 
 also with ev c. dat. of manner John 16, 25 ; 
 \eycav Matt. 13, 3 ; rt irposTiva Acts 3, 22. 
 1 Thess. 2, 2 \a\rjaai ivpos vp.as TO evay- 
 yeXXtov. b) Of those who tell, relate, de 
 clare, announce any thing, John 1 , 37 ; 
 irpos Tiva et adv. Luke 2, 20 ; Trepi TIVOS 
 John 9, 21. (So c. dat. Theophr. Char. 7 
 or 24.) With ace. of thing, Acts 4, 20. 
 Matt. 26, 13 ; ace. of thing and dat. of pers. 
 Acts 23, 28. and with Xe ywi impl. Matt. 13, 
 33. Also Trept TIVOS Luke 2, 17. Acts 22, 
 10; Ka3 6f Tporrov 27, 25; irapd TIVOS 
 Luke 1, 45. c) Of prophecy, predic 
 tions, for to foretell, to declare, 2 Pet. 1,21. 
 James 5, 10. Acts 3, 24. 26, 22 ; irpos TWO 
 Acts 28, 25 ; with ace. of thing, Luke 24. 
 25 ols by attr. for a. Acts 3, 21 ; ace. et 
 dat. of pers. John 16, 1. 4. So of a divine 
 promise, Luke 1 , 55. 70. d) Of what is 
 said with authority, for to direct, to charge, 
 to prescribe, c. dat. Mark 16, 19; ace. et 
 dat. John 15, 11 ; ace. et els et TTfpt Heb. 
 7, 14. For to publish, to promulgate, au 
 thoritatively, Heb. 3, 5. 9, 19. e) Trop. 
 to speak by writing, by letter, 2 Cor. 11,17 
 bis. Heb. 2, 5. 2 Pet. 3, 16 as KOI ev irdcrais 
 TOIS fTTiffToXais, XaXooz ev avTols- Of one 
 
\a\td 
 
 423 
 
 dead who speaks, exhorts, by his example 
 and faith, Heb. 11,4. 
 
 3. Melon, of things as speaking, e. g. 
 a) Of a law, to speak, to prescribe, Rom. 3, 
 19. b) Of the expiatory blood of Jesus, 
 Heb. 12, 24 Kpfirrov XaXoCirt Trapu TOV 
 *A)3eX, speaking better than the blood of Abel, 
 since this latter cried only for vengeance, 
 Gen. 4, 10. c) In ihe imagery of the 
 Apocalypse, spoken of a voice, Rev. 1,12. 
 4, 1. 10, 4 ; of thunders, which are said Xa- 
 \(^v TCIS favTu>v <p(oi>ds Rev. 10, 3. 4 ; of a 
 beast, Rev. 13, 5. 11. 15. So Heb. "i^x, 
 Sept. fiTTfv, of the serpent, Gen. 3,1.4. -f 
 
 \a\td, as, TJ, (XaXf w,) a talking, gos- 
 sip, Arisloph. Nub. 931 ; talkativeness, Plut. 
 Je rect. rat. aud. 18. Plato Def. 416. In 
 N. T. speech, utterance, i. e. a) A manner 
 of speaking, a dialect, Matt. 26, 73. Mark 14, 
 70. Sept. for ia"|B Cant. 4, 3. b) Melon, 
 whal is uttered, a saying, words, John 4, 
 42. 8, 43. Sepl. for "O"? Job 33, 1 ; comp. 
 Sept. Is. 11,3. So Pol. 32. 9. 4. 
 
 \afid or Xa/i/ia, lama, i. e. Heb. "isb 
 or F!33b, why? wherefore? Matt. 27, 46 et 
 MaikYs, 34, from Ps. 22, 2 where Sept. 
 
 f. XJ^O/LICU, aor. 2 
 perf. ("i\T)<pa ; to take, and also to receive. 
 
 1 . to lake, to lay hold of, to grasp, to seize, 
 to take and keep hold of. 
 
 a) Pr. with the hand, to or with oneself ; 
 c. ace. expr. or impl. a) Genr. c. ace. 
 Mall. 14, 19 teal Xa/3o>i/ rovs TreVre tiprovs. 
 25, 1 Xa/3ov<7<u Tar Xa/irrdSa?. 26, 26. 52. 
 27, 6. 30. 48. Mark 9, 36. Luke 22, 17. 
 John 12, 3. 13. 13, 4. 12. 30. 1 Cor. 11, 
 23. Rev. 5, 8. 22, 17 ; with e/c TIVOS added, 
 John 16, 14. Rev. 5, 7. Sept. for n^b 
 Gen. 18, 8. Num. 16, 17. 18 ; NiU3 Josh. 6, 
 4. Is. 2, 4. (Hdian. 8. 8. 15. Xen. Cyr. 6. 
 4. 4.) Trop. rifj.T]i> eavrw X. Heb. 5, 4 ; 
 8vvap.iv Rev. 11, 17. (Xiphilin. Galb. p. 
 187 vofiifav oiiK flXrjcpfvai TTJV dpx fjv, aXXa 
 8eSoo-3ai aura>.) Part. Xa/3a>/ is often used 
 before other verbs by a species of pleonasm, 
 in order to express the idea more fully and 
 graphically, comp. in dvio-rrjp.1, II. 1 . a. Pas- 
 sow in \ap.!3dv<i> ult. Matt. 13, 31 ov Xa/3&>i> 
 avZpurros (nrftpfv. v. 33 ; ace. impl. Luke 
 24,43. Acts 16, 3. So Sepl. Josh. 2, 4. 
 Luc. Scyth. 6. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 6, 7. 
 ) Of taking food or drink, c. ace. John 19, 
 30. Acts 9, 19 KOL Xaj3wv Tpo(pfjv. 1 Tim. 
 4, 4 ; absol. Mark 15, 23. So Heb. Hfsb, 
 see Heb. Lex. al.-o Plut. Pomp. 2 pen. 
 v) to take to or with any one, c. ace. e. g. 
 
 Matt. 16, 5 fVeXdSoiro tiprovs \ajBtlv. v. 7 
 25,4. John 18, 3; also c. /x3 euvro> 
 Matt. 25, 3. (Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 22.) Spec. 
 Xa/i/3di/eii/ yvvalna to lake a wife, to 
 take as a wife, Mark 12, 19. 20. 21. 22. 
 Luke 20, 28 sq. Sept. for njsb Gen. 0, 2. 
 11,29. So Jos. Ant. 1. 16. 3. Plut. T. 
 Gracch. 1. Xen. Cyr. 8. 4. 16. 8) to 
 take upon oneself, to bear, Irop. Malt. 10, 
 38 TOV (rravpov. 8, 17 TUS dcrSevfius rj^wv. 
 quoted from Is. 53, 4 where Heb. xr:. 
 Sept. (pepuv. e) to take up, to gather up. 
 Matt. 16, 9. 10 irocrovs Ko<pivovs Xd/3er. 
 comp. Mark 8, 19. 20. Trop. Xa/3elj> T/^ 
 ^VXTIV, opp. rfariiu, John 10, 17. 18. So 
 pr. Xen. (Ec. 8. 2. ib. 9. 10. 
 
 b) to take out from a number, to choose, c. 
 ace. Acts 15, 14 \afteiv e| e3 va>v \auv. 
 Pass. Heb. 5, 1. Sept. Amos 2, 11. Pol. 5. 
 63. 1. Xen. An. 1, 1. 6. 
 
 c) to take, i. e. to seize, to lay hold of, 
 with the idea of force, violence. a) Pr. c. 
 ace. Mall. 21, 35 /rat Xa/3oVrey rovy 8ov\ovs 
 avrov,ov p.fv(8fipav KT\. v. 39. Mark 12, 3. 
 8. John 19, 1 ; absol. 2 Cor. 11, 20. (Luc. 
 D. Deor. 21. 2. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 23.) So 
 in hunling or fishing, to take, to catch, Luke 
 5, 5 ; trop. 2 Cor. 12, 16 SoXw vp.as eXa/So* 
 comp. Matt 4, 19. So Palaep h. 28. 3. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 4. 9. /3) Trop. of any strong af 
 fection or emotion, to seize, to come or fait 
 upon any one, c. ace. e. g. eKa-raa-is eXa/Stt 
 anavras Luke 5, 26; (pofios 7. 16; iretpa- 
 oyio r 1 Cor. 10, 13. Sept. for tnx Ex. 15, 
 15. (2 Mace. 9, 5. Jos. Ant. 2. 6. 8. Xen. 
 Conv. 1. 15.) So of an evil spirit, demon, 
 Luke 9, 39 ; comp. Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 5. 
 
 d) to take away, e. g. from any one by 
 force, c. ace. Matt. 5, 40 KOI TOV ^trw^u om 
 Xafidv. Rev. 3, 1 1 Iva fj.r)8f\s Xd/Si? TOV are- 
 (pavov (TOV. 6, 4 /e v. HTTO TTJS yrjs. Sept. foi 
 n5^ Gen. 27. 35. 31, 1. Pol. 4. 3. 11. 
 Xen. An. 2. 1. 10. 
 
 e) to take up a person, i. e. to receive him 
 as a friend or guest into one s house or so 
 ciety, i. q. Se ^o/iat. a) Genr. c. ace. John 
 19, 27 eXa/3ei> 6 /iaSqrijj OVTIJV ds TO. i Sta. 
 2 John 10 ds oiKiav. John 6, 21 els TO TrXot- 
 ov . (Horn. Od. 7. 255.) Trop. of a lemcher 
 or Ihe like, to receive, to acknowledge, to 
 embrace and follow his instructions, John 
 1,12. 5,48. 13,20. 14, 17. So of doc 
 trine, to receive, to embrace, e. g. TO> \uyov 
 Matt. 13, 20. Mark 4, 16; TTJV papTvpiav 
 John 3,11. 32. 33. 1 John 5, 9 ; TU p^/uara 
 John 12, 48. 17, 8. /3) From the Heb. 
 \ap.{idvfi.v np6(T6>7r6v TIVOS, to accept 
 the person of any one, Heb. n^DB Kio: , pr. 
 
424 
 
 spoken of a king or judge who receives or 
 admits the visits of those who bring him sa 
 lutations and presents, and favours their 
 cause, see espec. Job 13, 10 ; hence to fa 
 vour any one, both in a good and bad sense, 
 see Heb. Lex. art. to3 no. 3. b. In N. T. 
 only in a bad sense, to accept one s person, 
 i. q. to be partial towards him, absol. Luke 
 20, 21 ; c. gen. Gal. 2, 6 7rpoVa>7roi/ 3eo? dv- 
 Spcoirou ov Xa/i/3di>et. So Sept. for KfflJ 
 B"?B p s . 82, 2. Lev. 19, 15. 
 
 f) Trop. in phrases, where \apfidvtiv 
 with its accus. is often equivalent to the 
 verb corresponding to the accus. e. g. dp- 
 Xr)v \afjipdvfiv i. q. to begin, Heb. 2, 3. 
 (JEl. V. H. 2. 28. Hdian. 7. 11. 1.) d<pop- 
 fifjv \a(j.fi. to take occasion, Rom. 7, 8. 11. 
 (Diod. Sic. 4. 32 xaipov.} 3d/)<ros Xa^i/3. 
 to take courage, i. q. 3appea>, see in Sdpa-or, 
 Acts 28, 15 ; IKCLVOV Xa/x/3. to take security, 
 Acts 17, 9 ; X 17377 1/ X. to forget, 2 Pet. 1, 9. 
 (.El. V. H. 3. 18. Jos. Ant. 2. 9. 1.) ftop- 
 <f>r]v TIVOS X. to take the likeness or form 
 of any one, to liken oneself to him, Phil. 2, 
 7 ; irtlpav Xu/i/3. to mate trial of, i. e. to 
 attempt, Heb. 11, 29; (Hdian. 1. 8. 10. 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 54;) or also i. q. to hate 
 trial of, to experience, Heb. 11, 36. (Xen. 
 CEc. 17. 1.) <rvnpov\iov Xa/n/3. to take 
 ;vunsel, i. q. to consult, Matt. 12, 14. 27, 1. 
 7. 28,12; vTrob f ly /j.d nva Xa/^t/3. to tote 
 any one as an example, James 5, 10 ; \nro- 
 j. v ij cr t v Xa/*/3. to recollect, to remember, 
 2 Tim. 1,5; xdpaypd TIVOS Xa/z/3. to tote 
 or adopt the mark of any one, Rev. 14, 11 ; 
 and with em c. gen. 14, 9. 20, 4. 
 
 2. to hare given me, to receive, to obtain, 
 to partake of. 
 
 a) Genr. and absol. Matt. 7, 8 nds yap 6 
 aiT&v \apj3dvei. 10,8. John 16. 24. 1 Cor. 
 4, 7 ; with ace. Matt. 20, 9 eXa/Soy dvd fyvd- 
 piov. V. 10. 25, 16 TreWf raXajra XajScof. 
 Mark 10, 30. 11, 24. John 4^ 36. Acts 3, 3. 
 Rom. 4, 11. 1 Cor. 9, 24. Gal. 3, 14. Phil. 
 3, 12 comp. in KaTa\ap.f3dva> no. 2. Heb. 
 11, 35. James 1, 12. 1 Pet. 4, 10. Rev. 4, 
 11. (ffl. V. H. 9. 31. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 7.) 
 With tK TIVOS partitively, see in CK no. 1. d. 
 John* 1,16. Rev. 18, 4 eVc rtiv TrXvyfov avTijs 
 Iva fjif/ Xd/Sj/re. (Palaeph. 52. 3.) With an 
 adjunct of the source added, e. g. OTTO c. 
 gen. from, 1 John 2, 27; Trapd c. gen. 
 from any one Acts 2, 33. James 1, 7. Rev. 
 2, 27 ; (Hdian. 4. 7. 3 ;) or spoken de co- 
 natu, John 5, 34. 41 doav irapa dv^pu>irov 
 ov Xa/bi/Sdi/o). v. 44 ; VTTO c. gen. 2 Cor. 11, 
 24 vrro louSauop . . . t\aj3ov (rrXrjyds), comp. 
 Luc. Cronos. 16. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 16. 
 
 b) Of an office or dignity, to receive, to 
 
 obtain, either as committed or transmitted, 
 c. ace. e. g. (TTia-KOTT^v Acts 1, 20 ; id^pov 
 v. 25 ; ItpaTfiav Heb. 7, 5 ; 8ao-i\dav Luke 
 19, 12. 15 ; c. Trapd TIVOS Acts 20, 24. So 
 Hdian. 3. 15. 8. Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 2. Also 
 of a successor in office, Xa/3i/ 8iddoxov 
 Acts 24, 27, comp. SiaSe xo/iat. So Lat. 
 sitccessorem accipere Plin. Ep. 9. 13. 
 
 c) Spec, to receive tribute, rent, i. q. to 
 collect, to exact, c. ace. Matt. 17, 24 ot ra 
 8io~paxfj.a \afj.{3dvovTfs, i. e. the receivers, 
 collectors. 21, 34. Heb. 7, 8 ; so c. ajrd 
 TIVOS Matt. 17, 25. 3 John 7. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 6. 3 ; Trapd TIVOS Luc. D. Mort. 22. 1. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 5. 6. 
 
 d) Trop. to receive instruction, i. q. to be 
 instructed, to learn, absol. Rev. 3, 3 /iwj/id- 
 veve ovv Trias fi\n(pas KOI f/Kov<ras. Diod. 
 Sic. 2. 29 /3e/3atW eKaora \apj3dvovo-iv, i. e. 
 fiav Sdvovo iv. 
 
 e) Trop. in phrases, comp. above in no. 1. 
 f. E. g. f v T o X T) v Xa/i/Sdi/f iv, to receive com 
 mandment, Trapd TIVOS John 10,18. 2 John 4 ; 
 TTfpi TIVOS Col. 4, 10 ; Trpos nva Acts 17, 15. 
 (Act. Thorn. \ 36.) KaTaXXayrjv Xa/*. 
 i. q. to be reconciled, Rom. 5, 11 ; Kptpa 
 Xa/*/3. to receive condemnation, i. q. to be 
 condemned, Matt. 23, 13. James 3, 1 ; c. dat. 
 reflex. Rom. 13, 2 ; ot/co8o/i^v Xa/n/3. /u 
 receive edification, i. q. to oe ea i/tea , 1 Ccr. 
 14, 5 ; 7rapayy(\iav \a/j.^. to receive a 
 charge Acts 16, 24; TrepiTo^v Xa/i/3. 
 i. q. to Ze circumcised John 7, 23. -f 
 
 Ad/tex, 6, indec. Lamech, Heb. Tjoi, 
 pr. n. of a patriarch, the father of Noah, 
 Luke 3, 36 ; see Gen. 5, 25 sq. 
 
 \afjbfid, see \dp.a. 
 
 Xa/i7ro9, d8os, T), (Xd/in-o), Heb. 1^,) 
 a Zi^/tf, e. g. a torch, lamp, or lantern ; 
 genr. Acts 20, 8 \afi7rd8es [naval. Rev. 4, 5. 
 (Sept. for l^ab Gen. 15, 17. Ex. 20, 18.) 
 Prob. a torch, Rev. 8, 10. John 18, 3. Sept. 
 and T 1 ^ Judg. 15, 4. 5. So Hdian. 4. 2 
 20. Plato Ax. 372. a. Also a lamp, fed 
 with oil, Matt. 25, 1. 3. 4. 7. 8. Sept. and 
 ^ Judg. 7, 16.. 20. On the form of 
 ancient lamps see Diet, of Antt. art. Lu 
 cerna. 
 
 Xa/z,7Tp09, d, ov, (Xd/Mr<D,) shining, bright, 
 radiant, e. g. 
 
 1. Pr. of a star, Rev. 22, 16 6 don)/? 6 
 \ajj.Trpbs 6 Trpu ivos. So Ep. Jer. 51. Horn. 
 II. 4. 77. Xen. Mem. 4. 7. 7. Of raiment, 
 radiant, and hence white, spoken of angels 
 Acts 10, 30. Rev. 15, 6. 19, 8. Of the 
 robe put by Herod upon Christ in mockery, 
 as Pilate s soldiers afterwards put on him a 
 purple robe, Luke 23, 11 ; comp. Mark 15, 
 
425 
 
 17. etc. (Pol. 10. 4. 8. Diod. Sic. 1. 91.) 
 Hence splendid, sumptuous, of raiment, 
 James 2, 2. 3 e trSijr \ap.npd. Also genr. 
 Rev. 18, 14 ra Xapnpd, costly things. So 
 Diod. Sic. 20. 7. Xen. Conv. 1. 4. 
 
 2. Spec. cZear, limpid, Rev. 22, 1 irora^ov 
 \ap.Trpov o>s KpvcrraXXov. ^Eschyl. Bum. 
 695. Xen. Hell. 5. 3. 19. 
 
 \afA7rpOTrfi, TTJTOS, f], (XctyiTrpo y.) bright 
 ness, splendour, X. TOV 17X101; Acts 26, 13. 
 Sept. for PW3 Is. 60, 3 ; 1*1 Dan. 12, 3. 
 Pol. 11. 9. 1. Xen. An. 1. 2. 18. 
 
 Xflyt47T/j<W9, adv. (Xa/iTrpdr,) splendidly, 
 sumptuously, Luke 16, 19. Jos. Ant. 6. 1. 
 
 3. Plut. Pomp. 46. Plato Tim. 27. b. 
 
 Xa/iTTft), f. \^a>, (comp. Heb. ^?b , see 
 Heb. Lex.) to give light., to shine, to be bright ; 
 C. dat. Matt. 5, 15 Xa/rft Tracri TOIS tv 177 
 oiKia. Absol. 17, 2 eXa/LiA//* TO npocrconov 
 CIVTOV. Luke 17, 24. Acts 12, 7. 2 Cor. 4, 
 6 cic O-KOTOVS (pas Xa/*\//-ai. Trop. Matt. 5, 
 16. 2 Cor. 4, 6. Sept. for W3 Prov. 4, 18 ; 
 n^ntri Dan. 12, 3. Plut. Symp. 6. 7. 2 pen. 
 Xen . Mem. 4. 7. 7. 
 
 Aaz/^az/tw, f. Xijo-w, aor. 2 eXaSov, to ie 
 hid, concealed, unknown ; absol. Mark 7, 24 
 oiuc l)8vi>fiT] XaSeli/. Luke 8, 47. (jEl. V. H. 
 
 4. 20 init.) With ace. of pers. to be hid AS 
 TO any on?, i. e. from him, to escape his no- 
 lice, Lat. latere aliquem ; Acts 26, 26 on 
 ov< eXaSf yap avrov TI TOVTW. 2 Pet. 3, 5. 
 8 ; see Matth. $412. 5, comp. Buttm. 131. 
 2. So Hdian. 5. 8. 8. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 13. 
 Joined with the participle of another verb 
 it has the force of an adverb, i. q. secretly, 
 unawares; Heb. 13,2 eXaSoV rivt s evi<rav- 
 ns ayyeXovr. Buttm. 144. n. 6. Winer 
 5 58. 4. So Hdian. 5. 8. 6. Xen. An. 1.1.9. 
 
 Aaei/ro9, 17, 6v, (Xaev ; Xaj, f<o,) 
 stone-hewn, rock-hewn, of a sepulchre hewn 
 in the rock, Luke 23, 53 ; comp. in Xaro/xeco. 
 Sept. Deut 4, 49. Aquil. Num. 21, 20. 
 23, 14. 
 
 AaoSiKeta, as, f/, Laodicea, the chief 
 city of Phrygia Pacatiana in Asia Minor, 
 situated on the river l.ycus some distance 
 above its junction with the Meander, south 
 of Hierapolis and west of Colosse. Its ear 
 lier name was Diospolis ; it was enlarged 
 by Antiochus II, and called by him Laodicea 
 after his wife. About A. D. 62 it was de 
 stroyed by an earthquake, along with the 
 two cities just named ; but was rebuilt by 
 Marcus Aurelius. It is now in ruins, and 
 the place bears the name of Eski-hissar. 
 See Strabo 12. p. 578/Plin. H. N. 5. 29. 
 Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. I. il p. 205, 228. 
 
 O. v. Richter p. 521. Hamilton s Res. in 
 Asia Minor, I. 514 sq. Col. 2, 1. 4, 13. 15. 
 16. Rev. 1, 11. [3, 14.] 
 
 Aao$t,K.evs, f USi S, a Laodicean, Col. 4, 
 16. Rev. 3, 14. 
 
 ov, 6, people, the people at large, 
 the mass, not like brj^os a body politic. 
 1 . Pr. and genr. a people, nation, tribe, 
 
 1. e. the mass of any people ; Luke 2, 10 
 rjris fa-rat iravr\ TW XaoJ. Rev. 5, 9. Plur. 
 Luke 2, 31. Acts 4, 25 quoted from Ps. 2, 
 1 where Sept. for okb. Sept. for OS Job 
 36, 31. Ez. 20, 41. So Horn. Od. 6. 194. 
 Hdot. 5. 42. Strabo 14. p. 984. a. Spec, of 
 the Jews as the people of God s choice, only 
 Sing. Matt. 1,21. 2, 4. 6. Mark 7, 6. Luke 
 
 2, 32. John 11, 50. Heb. 7, 5. al. saep. So 
 Sept. and 0? Ex. 1, 20. 8, 1. Deut. 2, 4. al 
 saep. Trop. of Christians as God s spiritual 
 Israel, Sing. Tit. 2, 14. Heb. 2, 17. 4, 9. 
 13, 12. 
 
 2. In a more limited sense, the people, i. e. 
 the many, the, multitude, the public, either 
 indefinitely or of a multitude collected in 
 one place. Luke 7, 29 KOI TTOS 6 \a6s d/cou- 
 o~ay. 8, 47. 9, 1 3 fir iravra TW Xabv TOVTOV 
 for all this multitude. 18, 43. 23, 27 Tr\f)~ 
 3os TOV XaoC Kai yvvaiK<av, Acts 3, 9. 11- 
 12. 5, 37. 18, 10. So Horn. II. 18. 502. 
 ib. 23. 728. Spec, the common people, the 
 populace, the inhabitants of any city or ter 
 ritory, e. g. Jerusalem Acts 2, 47. 21, 30. 
 36 ; of Galilee Matt. 4, 23. 9, 35. Sept. 
 and fi? Gen. 19, 4. 23, 7. 12. 13. (Horn. 
 Od. 13. 156. Plut. Romul. 26.) As distin 
 guished from magistrates and the higher 
 classes, Matt. 26, 5 Iva p.T) 3opu/3oj ye wjrai 
 eV TW Xaw. 27, 25. 64. Mark 11, 32. Luke 
 19, 4 s. 20, 6. 23, 13. Acts 6, 12. al. Sept. 
 and OS Ex. 18, 22. 26. Josh. 6, 8. 10. + 
 
 \dpvyj;, vyyos, 6, larynx, the throat, 
 gullet, as an organ of the voice, Rom. 3, 13, 
 quoted from Ps. 5, 10 where Sept. for Tna. 
 Ecclus. 6, 5. Aristoph. Ran. 575 [583]. 
 Eurip. Cycl. 157. On the diff. between 
 \dpvy and (pdpvy, see Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 
 65, 470. 
 
 Aaaaia } as, 17, Lasea, a maritime city 
 of Crete, on the southern coast, not men 
 tioned in profane writers. Acts 27, 8. 
 
 Xacr/Cft), f. \aK77crta, to sound, to ring, 
 Horn. II. 14. 25. ib. 20. 277 ; in aor. 2, to 
 crack, to knack, to snap, in breaking, Hes. 
 Theog. 694. Horn. II. 13. 616. In N. T. 
 and later, to crack open, to burst, intrans. 
 Acts 1, 18 f\aKT]<re p,f(ros, he burst asunder 
 in the midst, i. e. Judas having hanged hinr>- 
 
self (Matt. 27. 5), the rope broke and the 
 fall caused the bursting of the abdomen. 
 So Act. Thorn. { 33 6 8e 8paKcav (pvoyZfls 
 \aKr]<re. Zonar. Lex. 691 dvrl TOV ia^la^ii). 
 
 X,TO/ie&), &. f. 770-6), (Xay, T//XJ/O),) to cut 
 stone, to hew in stone, e. g. ^vrj/jiflov, 6 e Xa- 
 rofjLTjcrfv (v T?j nfTpa Matt. 27, 60. Mark 15, 
 46. Sept. and 2Sli Is. 22. 16. Deut. 6, 11. 
 Jos. Ant. 12. 7. 6. Diod. Sic. 5. 39. 
 
 Xorpeta, as, f], (Xarpeua>,) service, pr. 
 for hire, or as a slave, JE1. V. H. 3. 9. Soph. 
 Ajax 503. In N. T. service of God, wor 
 ship, John 16, 2. Rom. 9, 4. 12, 1. Heb. 9, 
 1. 6. Sept. and rna? Ex. 12, 25. 26. 
 Josh. 22, 27. Plut. de Adulat. et Amic. 12. 
 Plato Phaedr. 49. p. 244. e. 
 
 \arpeva), f. ( v<ra>, (XaiynV one hired,) 
 to work for hire or as a slave, to serve, Pa- 
 laeph. 45. 1, 4. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 36, i. q. Sov- 
 \eviv ib. J 41. In N. T. in respect to God, 
 to serve, to worship. a) Genr. c. dat. Matt. 
 4, 10 et Luke 4, 8 Kvpiov TOV 3eoV . . . airw 
 Hova XaTpf va-t is. Luke 1, 74. 2, 37. Acts 
 7, 7. 42. 24, 14. 27, 23. Rom. 1, 9. Phil. 
 3, 3. 2 Tim. 1, 3. Heb. 9 ; 14. 12,28. Rev. 
 22, 3 ; absol. Acts 26, 7. Sept. and 135 
 Deut. 6, 13. 10, 12. Josh. 24, 15. Once 
 of idol-worship, Rom. 1, 25 Adrpeuo-o/ ri; 
 KTitrei KT\. Sept. and 123 Deut. 4, 28. 
 Judg. 2,11.13. So Eurip. Ion 1 52. Plut. de 
 Pyth. orac. 26. b) Spec, of an external 
 ritual worship, i. q. to serve as priest, to offi 
 ciate, c. dat. rff o-Krjvf) Heb. 8, 5. 13, 10 ; and 
 so in the celestial temple Rev. 7, 15. Also 
 genr. for to offer sacrifice, to worship, absol. 
 Heb. 9 ; 9. 10, 2 ; comp. Sept. and ia Ex. 
 3, 12. 7, 16. 
 
 ov, TO, (XaxmVco,) pr. a plant 
 in tilled ground ; hence a garden-plant, 
 herb, vegetable. Matt. 13, 32 fj.(lov T>V \a- 
 xdvuv Trdvr&v. Mark 4, 32. Luke 11,42. 
 Rom. 14, 2. Sept. for p^ 1 K. 21 , 2 ; P^ 
 Gen. 9, 3. Luc. Philopseud. 8. Plato Rep. 
 372. c. 
 
 yle/8/3at09, ou, o, Lebbeus, a name of 
 the apostle Jude, also called Thaddeus, 
 Matt. 10, 3 ; see in lovSas no. 4. 
 
 \eyecav, S>vos, 6, Lat. legio, a legion, the 
 largest division of troops in the Roman ar 
 my, varying greatly in number at different 
 periods, as 3000, 4200, 5000, 6600, etc. 
 See Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 366 sq. Diet, of 
 Antt. art. Legio. In N. T. a legion, for an 
 indefinitely great number, e. g. of angels 
 Matt. 26, 53 ; of demons Mark 5, 9. 1 5. 
 Luke 8, 30. So Rabb. "P^, Buxt. Lex. 
 Chald. 1123. 
 
 \eya), f. &), primarily .o lay, Germ. 
 legen; Pass, or Mid. to lie, Germ, liegen, 
 E. g. to lay or lei lie down for sleep Horn. 
 II. 24. 635, and Mid. to lie down for sleep 
 Od. 17. 102; to lay together, to collec-. Lat. 
 lego, colligo, Horn. II. 23. 239. Od. 24. 72 ; 
 Mid. to gather for oneself, to choose, to pick 
 out, Horn. II. 21. 27. Od. 24. 108. Also to 
 lay down or before, i. e. to relate, to recount ; 
 and hence the prevailing Attic and later 
 signif. to say, to speak, i. e. to utter definite 
 and connected words, to discourse; thus 
 differing from XoXeiv q. v. and also from 
 flirflv in so far as this latter refers only to 
 words spoken and not to their connected 
 sense ; see Tittm. de Synon. N. T. p. 79, 
 80 sq. Sept. usually for "iax. In N. T. 
 
 1. to lay before, to relate, e. g. trapa^oXfiv. 
 to put forth, to propound, with ace. and dat. 
 of pers. Luke 1 8, 1 eArye 8e *ai Trapa^o\f]V 
 avrois. 13, 6 ; with jrpos nva Luke 12, 41. 
 14, 7. So of events or the like, to narrate, 
 to tell, e. g. TOVTO, raOra, c. dat. Luke 9, 21 ; 
 irpos nva 24, 10. Palaeph. 7. 2. Hdian. 1. 
 11. 2. ib. 7. 12. 20 ra fie tir6fj.tva rois 
 fi-ijs \fx%f)<rfTai. Xen. Mem. 3. 6. 13. 
 
 2. to say, to speak, to discourse, see above , 
 genr. and construed : 
 
 a) With an adjunct of the object, i. e. 
 the words spoken, the thing or person spo 
 ken of, etc. a) Followed by the words 
 uttered, Matt. 1, 20 ayyt\os . . . f(j)dvrj avrw, 
 \eya>v icoo-^ KT\. 8,2. Mark 6, 2. Luke 
 2, 13. 12, 54. John 1, 29 *al Xe yer t6> 6 
 dpvus rov 3eoO. v. 36. Acts 4, 16. Rom. 9, 
 25. Heb. 1, 6. 8, 13. James 3, 23. al. szep. 
 (Xen. Conv. 4. 1.) So with 6Vt before the 
 words quoted, Matt. 9, 18. Mark 2, 12 Xe- 
 yowaj OTI ovSenoTf OVTMS f idop.fv. 3, 21. 
 Luke 4. 41. 23, 5. John 8, 33. Acts 2, 13. 
 
 6, 11. Rom. 3, 8. al. sa?p. Comp. Buttm. 
 5 139. m. 58, 61. (Palasph. 6. 7. Hdian. 8. 
 3.4.) Hence particip. Xeycov,\eyovTfs, 
 saying, is often put after other verbs or nouns 
 implying speech, like Heb. "IBN^ , as intro 
 ducing the exact words, q. d. in these words, 
 e. g. Matt. 5, 2 e S/5ao"Kep CIVTOVS, \eyaiv 
 HdKapioi KT\. 6, 31 /ir) ovv pfpip.vr](r7)T(. 
 XeyovTfs TI (pdyotfjLev KT\. 9,30. 12,38. 
 16,7. Mark 1,7. 24. 11,31. Luke 4, 35. 
 36. 7, 39. 20, 5. John 4, 31. 51. Acts 2, 
 13. 40. 24, 2. Heb. 12, 26. Rev. 6, 10. al. 
 ssep. but not found in the acknowledged 
 epistles of Paul. Sept. and ibxb Gen. 1, 
 22. 2, 16. Lev. 1, 1. al. saep. So Palacph. 
 
 7. 7. /3) With ace. of thing or person, 
 e. g. the thing spoken, Matt. 21,16 UKOVHS 
 TL OVTOI \eyovo-tv ; Mark 11, 23. Luke 8, 8 
 TOVTO \eyccv. John 5, 34. Rom. 10. 8. Eph. 
 
427 
 
 ft, 12 al. szep. Hence ra Xeyo/xeva Luke 
 18, 34. Acts 8, 6. (Hdian. 4. 14. 7 eAff 
 rotaSf. Xen. An. 7. 7. 43.) With ace. of 
 person spoken of, but only in attraction 
 with OT-I, see Buttm. 5 151. I. 6. Winer 
 5 63. 4. a. John 8, 54 6 irarijp ...ov v/j.e"is 
 \tytTf, on 3f6r vp.S)v m. 9, 19. Comp. 
 Xen. Conv. 4. 46 Xtyeiv re rovs (pi\ovs, 
 oiTivts eiVt. y) With ace. and inf. comp. 
 Mattli. J 537. p. 1056. John 12, 29 eXeye 
 (3poi/rr)j> ytyovtvai. Matt. 16, 13. Luke 11, 
 18. Acts 4, 32. 5, 36. Rom. 15, 8. 2 Tim. 
 2, 1 8 ; tlvai impl. Rev. 2, 20. So Hdian. 
 
 I. 7. 9. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 1. 8) With on 
 instead of the accus. and inf. comp. in on 
 no. 3. Buttm. $ 141. n. 2. Winer { 45. 2. 
 Mark 9, 11. Luke 9, 7. John 4, 20 *at 
 v/iely Xe yere, on V lepoo-. e<rrii> 6 roVos /crX. 
 1 Tim. 4, 1. So with 6Yi and the apodosis 
 impl. in the phrase <rv Xe yeu, Matt. 27, 
 
 II. John 18, 37 ; comp. Luke 22, 70 vpe is 
 Xeyerf, on y&> ei/xt. So Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 17. 
 r) With an adv. or adverbial phrase, John 
 
 13, 13 Ka\ Ka\S>s \fjfre. (Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 
 11.) Rom. 3, 5 et Gal. 3, 15 X. KOT ai/3po>- 
 TTOV. Metaph. Rev. 18, 7 tv rf/ Kapbia avTrjs 
 Xey, and Matt. 3, 9 Xeyeii/ tv eavrotr, to 
 say in one s heart, in or among themselves, 
 i. e. to think, comp. in tiirov, no. 1. f. Heb. 
 Lex. lax no. 2. 
 
 b) With a further adjunct of the person 
 to whom one speaks, in the dat. or with 
 /iera, irpos , and also of whom, with et r, 
 irfpi, vrrep. The adjunct of the object is 
 then always present or implied, in some one 
 of the preceding constructions. a) With 
 dat. of pers. e. g. with the words uttered, 
 Matt. 8, 26 KOI Xs yei avro is n SeiXot eWe 
 KT\. 14, 4. Mark 2, 5. 14. 2 John 10. 11. 
 al. sa?p. So with dat. of thing personified 
 Matt. 21,19. Rev. 6, 16. Also with on be 
 fore the words quoted, comp. above in lett. 
 a. 8. Luke 8, 49. John 4, 42. So too /cat 
 ?Xeye auru or the like is put after other verbs 
 of speaking, like \eycav, comp. in iett. a. a. 
 Mark 9, 31. 14, 61 eVnjpcimz airrbv KOI \eyei 
 avToi (rii (I 6 Xp. KT\. With an ace. of 
 thing, John 16, 7. 2 Thess. 2, 5. Rev. 2,7 ; 
 ace. of pers. nf whom, as object, John 8, 27. 
 Phil. 3, 18. With on instead of ace. et inf. 
 Matt. 16, 18. John 16, 26. With an ad 
 verbial construction of manner, as Mark 3, 
 23 tv Trapa/SoXalj eXeytv nvroif. 4, 2. 12, 
 38. With irepi nvos Matt. 11,7. |3) With 
 P.(T aXXqXtoi/, with one another, followed 
 by the words spoken, John 11, 56. y) 
 With irpos c. ace. of pers. to whom, e. g. 
 with the words uttered, Mark 10, 26. Luke 
 
 14, 7. John 4, 15. Heb. 7, 21. (Xen. Cyr. 
 
 1. 3. 14.) With on of citation, Luke 4, 21 ; 
 with an ace. of thing, 11, 53; with ntpi 
 TIVOS 7, 24. Further with an adjunct of 
 person of whom one speaks : 8) With 
 (Is c. ace. of, concerning any one, genr 
 Eph. 5, 32 ; with the words uttered, Acts 
 
 2, 25 ; with an ace. of thing Luke 22, 65. 
 So Xen. Mem. 1. 5. 1. e) With irtpi 
 c. gen. of pers. with the words uttered, 
 John 1, 48. Matt. 11, 7; with ace. of thing 
 Acts 8, 34. John 1, 22. 9 X 17. Tit. 2, 8 ; 
 with on for inf. Luke 21, 5. f) With 
 vTrep o-favTov, to speak for oneself, Acts 
 26, 1. 
 
 c) Meton. of things, e. g. a) A voice, 
 (pcBi/i) Xt youo-a Matt. 3, 17. Rev. 6, 6 ; c. 
 dat. Acts 9, 4. Rev. 16, 1 ; dat. of manner 
 Acts 26, 14. j3) A writing, scripture, f) 
 ypafpf], with the words quoted John 19, 37. 
 James 4, 5. 6 ; n Rom. 4, 3. Gal. 4, 30 ; 
 with 17 ypcxpr] impl. Gal. 3, 16. Eph. 4, 8. 
 So Hdot. 1. 124. ib. 8. 22. y) A law, 6 
 vop.os, c. ace. 1 Cor. 9, 8 ; absol. v. 10. 14, 
 34. 8) Genr. 6 ^prjparia fj.os Rom. 11,4; 
 TJ SiKaioa-vvT], as personified, 10, 6. 
 
 d) Trop. for to mean, to have in mind, to 
 mean to say, comp. above in lett. a. f. Heb. 
 Lex. *rax no. 2 ; so c. imper. Gal. 5, 16 ; 
 c. ace. of thing, 1 Cor. 10, 29 a-vvtibrja-iv 
 8e Xeyw *rX. 1,12. Gal. 3, 17 ; ace. of pers. 
 John 6, 71 eXeyf Se rov lovdav. Mark 14, 
 71. Jos. Ant. 6. 5. 5. Luc. D. Deor. 3. 1. 
 Xen. CEc. 17. 8. 
 
 3. Spec, to say, to speak, as modified by 
 the context, where the particular sense lies 
 not so much in Xe yco per se, as in the ad 
 juncts, e. g. a) Before questions, for to 
 ask, to inquire, followed by the words spo 
 ken, Matt. 9, 14. Mark 5, 30. 14, 14. Luke 
 7, 20. John 7,11 KOI eXeyoi/ irov t(mv 
 (Kflvos ; Rom. 10, 19 ; c. dat. of pers. Mark 
 6, 37. Luke 16, 5. 22, 11. With d whe 
 ther, Acts 25, 20; c. dat. of pers. 21, 37. 
 b) Before replies, for to answer, to reply, 
 followed by the words spoken, e. g. after a 
 direct question, Matt. 17, 25. John 18, 17 ; 
 c. dat. of pers. Matt. 18, 22. 20, 7. 21 ; 
 also with on of citation Matt. 19, 8. John 
 20, 1 3 ; preceded by airoKpfteis Mark 8, 29. 
 Luke 3, 11. Without a preceding question, 
 with dat. of pers. and the words spoken, 
 Matt. 4, 10. 26, 35. Luke 16, 29. John 2, 
 4; with uTTOKpiSfi ? etc. Mark 9, 19. Luke 
 11,45. c) In affirmations, for to affirm, 
 to maintain, to declare, e. g. with the words 
 uttered, Mark 14, 31 6 Se e /c irfpiarcrov 
 eXfye p.aX\ov fiiv KT\. Gal. 4, 1 . 1 John 
 2, 4 ; with ace. and inf. Matt. 22, 23. Luke 
 24, 23 ot \fyovcrtv avrov r]v. 23. 2 ; ace. 
 
Xey&> 428 
 
 impl. James 2, 14. 1 John 2, 6. 9 ; with on 
 instead of ace. et inf. Matt. 17, 10. Rom. 
 4, 9. With a dat. of pers. in the phrases 
 Xf yw (rot V. vfj.1v, dfirjv Xe yw vfjiiv, and the 
 like, in solemn affirmations, genr. Matt. M. 
 22. Mark 11, 24. Luke 4, 25; c. dp^ 
 Matt. 5, 18. 25, 12. al. dpfjv, dpyv, John 
 1, 52. 3, 3. 8, 51. al. comp. in dfirjv no. 3. 
 So in the middle of a clause, Matt. 11, 9 
 vai, Xeyca vfj.iv, KOI TTfpicra OTfpov TrpofprjTov, 
 Luke 7, 14. 11, 51. 15, 10. With on for 
 ace. c. inf. Matt. 3, 9. Mark 9, 13. Luke 
 4, 24. John 3, 11. d) Of teaching, for to 
 teach, to inculcate, so with the proposition 
 taught, Matt. 15, 5; c. ace. Acts 1, 3; 
 ace. et infin. Acts 21,21 ; ace. impl. 15, 24 ; 
 ace. et dat. of pers. Matt. 10, 27. John 8, 
 16. 16, 12. So absol. Xen. Conv. 4. 13. 
 e) Of predictions, to foretell, to predict, c. 
 ace. et dat. Mark 10, 32 ; ace. Luke 9, 31 ; 
 dat. John 13, 19. f) Of what is spoken 
 with authority, to command, to direct, to 
 charge, absol. Matt. 23, 3 \tyovo-i yap, nal 
 ov TToiovo-i,. So c. acc. Luke 6, 46 ; ace. et 
 dat. Mark 13, 37. John 2, 5; dat. of pers. 
 and imperat. Matt. 5, 44 eyw 8e Xe yw vfj.iv 
 dyatrare KT\. 8, 4. 20, 8. Mark 5, 41. 6, 
 10. Luke 5, 24. John 2, 7. 8; c. dat. et inf. 
 Rev. 13, 14 ; c. inf. Rom. 2, 22; with iva 
 Acts 19, 4. (So c. inf. Xen. An. 1.3. 8. 
 ib. 7. 1. 40.) Also to charge, to exhort, 
 c. dat. Acts 5, 38; c. dat. et inf. Acts 21, 
 4; c. TOVTO et inf. Eph. 4, 17. g) Of 
 calling out, i. q. to call, to exclaim, etc. 
 Matt. 25, 1 1 Xe yoi/crtu Kvpie, Kvpie, avoiov 
 r lf jTiv. Luke 13, 25. Acts 14, 11. h) Trop. 
 to say or speak by writing or message, e. g. 
 with the words written, Luke 1, 63 eypa^e, 
 Xeycav KT\. 20, 42 ; c. acc. 1 Cor. 7, 6, impl. 
 Philem. 21 ; acc. etdat. 1 Cor. 15,51 ; c. dat. 
 
 1 Cor. 6, 5. 10, 15. 2 Cor. 6, 13 ; with on 
 for acc. and inf. Gal. 5, 2 ; TOVTO on 1 Thess. 
 4, 15 ; with an adv. or the like, 2 Cor. 7, 3. 
 11,16. Phil. 4, 11. So Sept. and "raNb 
 
 2 K. 10, 6. Jos. Ant. 13. 4. 1. Hdot. 3. 40. 
 4. to call, to name, i. q. KoXew, pr. to 
 
 speak of as being or being called so and so ; 
 always with two accus. one the direct ob 
 ject, and the other an epithet or predicate ; 
 so Matt. 19, 17 TI p.e \eytis dya3oV; Mark 
 15, 12 ov Xe yere /3a(riXe a TOJV lov&auoi/. 
 Luke 20, 37. John 5, 18. 15, 15. Acts 10, 
 28. al. Pass. Matt. 13, 55 f) pjnjp avTov 
 Xeyerai Mapidp.. Heb. 11. 24. Part. Xcyd- 
 pevos, called, named, Matt. 2. 23 tls TTO- 
 \iv \fyofjLfvrjv Naape 3. 9, 9 av%pa>nov 
 MarSaTov \(yop.evov. 26, 3. 14. Mark 15, 7. 
 fohn 4, 5. 9, 11. 22, 1. Acts 3, 2. Eph. 3, 
 1 1 ; also surnamed, Matt. 4, 18 Sipava TOV 
 
 \enovpyia 
 
 \fyofj.fvov UeTpov. 10,2. 4,11. (Esdr. 8, 
 41. Jos. Ant. 12. 3. 2. Palasph. 7. 6. Plato 
 Phaedr. 272. b.) With the idea of transla 
 tion into another language, e. g. fully, John 
 1, 39 pa/3/3/, 6 Xtyerai fpp.r)Vfv6fj,fvov, 8id- 
 o-KaXf. 19, 17 os Xeyerat iftpcuarl, FoXyoSa. 
 Acts 9, 36. Simply, John 4, 25 Meo-o-i ay, 
 6 \fy6fj.fvos Xptcrroy, i. e. in Greek. 11, 1G 
 Qo.ifj.ds 6 \fy6fji(vos At Su/io?. 20, 16 pa/3/3ou- 
 vl, o Xeyerat StSaoTcaXe, comp. 1, 39. + 
 
 Act/z^a, error, TO, (Xei7ra>.) a remnant, 
 remainder, what is left, meton. _ of pers. 
 Rom. 11, 5. Sept. for in? Josh. 13, 12; 
 t^lXtti 2 K. 19, 4. So genr. Plut. Nicias 
 17. Hdot. 1. 119. 
 
 \et09, a, ov, Lat. Iccvis, smooth, level, 
 even, opp. Tpa^vs- Luke 3, 5 els oSour 
 quoted from Is. 40, 4 where Heb. 
 Sept. fls TTfo-ia.JEL V. H. 3. 1. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 1. 20 \eirj 686s. Plato Legg. 718. e. 
 
 XeiTTCt), f. ^o), to leave, to forsake, c. acc. 
 Hdian. 1. 10. 2. Xen. Yen. 3. 3. In N. T. 
 
 1. Pass, to be left, forsaken of any thing, 
 i. e. to be destitute of, to lack ; c. gen. Jarnes 
 1, 5 ei 8e TIS vp.6>v XeiTrrrai o-o<piaf. 2, 15. 
 Comp. Buttm. $ 132. 10. a. With eV /x^Sew 
 James 1,4, i. e. to be wanting in nothing, 
 
 1. q. Te Xeioy, oXo /cX^por. Comp. Jos. Ant. 9. 
 11.2 ovSe fj.ids dpfTTJs dntXeiTTfTO. 
 
 2. Intrans. to fail, to lack, to be wanting, 
 c. dat. of pers. Luke 18, 22 en ?v <roi Xf tVet. 
 Tit. 3, 13. Part. TO \flnovra Tit. 1, 5. 
 Wisd. 19, 4. Pol. 13. 2. 2. Diod. Sic. 1. 5. 
 Plato Legg. 728. a. On the derivation of 
 the intrans. from the transitive signif. see 
 Passow s. v. 
 
 \eiTOVpjeca, to, f. jyo-&), (Xftroupyo j,) pr. 
 to do public service, to serve the public, at 
 one s own expense, intrans. Dem. 833. 25. 
 Xen. Mern. 2. 7. 6. In N. T. genr. to serve, 
 to minister, e. g. 
 
 1. Publicly in religious worship, as the 
 priests of the O. T. absol. Heb. 10, 11 ; of 
 Christian teachers, c. dat. ro> icvpiu Acts 13, 
 
 2. Sept. for rniB Num. 18, 2. Deut. 10, 8. 
 Dion. Hal. Ant. 2. 22. Plut. an seni sit ger. 
 Resp. 17 r<a IIu3(q> \fiTovpyovvra. 
 
 2. Spec, in a more private sense, to mi 
 nister to any one, to supply pecuniary aid, c. 
 dat. Rom. 15, 27. Test. XII Patr. p. 689 
 OVK oiKTfipfi \fiTovpyovvra avT<a eV KciKca. 
 Plut. 1. C. 17 <ay XfXetroupyTjKoYa (cro() TTO- 
 Xvv \povov. 
 
 \lTOVpjla, as, TI, (\fiTovpyos,) public 
 service, public office, i. e. such as in Athens 
 and elsewhere were administered by the ci 
 tizens in turn and at their own expense, as 
 
\eiTOvpyircos 
 
 429 
 
 \evtca ivco 
 
 a part of the system of finance, ^El. V. H. 
 6. 6. Dem. 1209. 2; Plato Legg. 949.. c; 
 comp. Xen. CEc. 2. 6. Bcickh Staatshaush. 
 der Ath. I. p. 480, comp. II. p. 62. Potter s 
 Gr. Ant. I. p. 85. Diet, of Antt. art. Lei- 
 tourgia. In N. T. genr. service, ministry, 
 official charge, e. g. 
 
 1 . Of the public ministrations of the Jew 
 ish priesthood; Luke 1, 23 at ^/it pai rf)s 
 \dTovpyias CIVTOV. Heb. 8, 6. 9,21. Trop. 
 of the ministry of a Christian teacher in 
 bringing men to the faith, Phil. 2, 17 X- 
 rovpyia TTJ? TrioTfa)? vp.cav. Sept. and !~nh5 
 Ex. 38, 21. Num. 8, 22. Jos. B. J. 1. 1*. 4. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 21. 
 
 2. In a wider sense, friendly service, kind 
 office, genr. Phil. 2, 30. (Luc. Saltat. 6. 
 Plut. an seni sit ger. Resp. 6.) Spoken of 
 alms, i. e. public collections in the churches, 
 2 Cor. 9, 12. 
 
 \eirovpyiKOS, T), 6v, (Xetrovpyoy,) per 
 taining to the public senice, e. g. of the 
 temple, Sept. a-Kfvr; X. for nnffin ^3 Num. 
 4, 12 ; !T7 25 ^3 Num. 4, 26. In N. T. 
 Act. ministering, rendering service to others, 
 Heb. 1, 14 \fiTovpyiKa Trvevpara, els 8ia/co- 
 viav KT\. See on the ministry of angels 
 Ps. 34, 8. 91, 11 sq. Matt. 18, 10. Luke 1, 
 19. 2, 9. 13. Acts 12, 7. 27, 23. Philo de 
 Gigant. p. 286. 
 
 \eiTOV py6$, ov, 6, (Xei ros V. Xeiros, Xa- 
 6s, epyov.) a public servant, minister, such 
 as in Athens performed or administered the 
 Xftrovpyuu at their own expense ; see in 
 \firovpyia, and the authorities there cited. 
 In N. T. a minister, servant, viz. 
 
 1. Genr. e. g. TOV 3eov, Rom. 13, 6. 
 Heb. 1,7 6 iroiSiv TOVS \dTovpyovs OVTOV 
 nvpbs (pXoya, quoted from Ps. 104, 4 where 
 Sept. for rntia ; comp. 1 K. 10, 5. So EC- 
 clus. 10, 2. Philo de Charitat. 3. p. 700. d. 
 Plut. de defect. Orac. 13. Spec. Phil. 2, 
 25 \firovpybv TTJS xP f ias M ou > a minister for 
 my wants, i. e. one who ministers to my 
 wants. 
 
 2, Spec, of a priest in the Jewish sense, 
 Heb. 8, 2 TJV ayia>v XetTovpyoy. So Sept. 
 and rnajn Neh. 10, 39. Jer. 33, 21. Of 
 Paul as a minister of Christ, of the gospel, 
 Rom. 15, 16 ds TO (Ivai p.e \firovpybv I. X. 
 els TO eSwj. Philo Allegor. 3. 46. p. 86. 
 a, X. rCav ayia>v. 
 
 \evTLOV, ov, TO, Lat. linteum, a linen 
 cloth, e. g. a towel, apron, worn by servants 
 and persons in waiting, John 13, 4. 5. 
 Galen, de Comp. Med. 9. Sueton. Calig. 26 
 succinctos Zirtfeo. See Adam s Rom. Ant. 
 p. 449. 
 
 , /Soy, 17, (XeVoy, X/TTCO,) a scale, 
 flake, e. g. from the eyes Acts 9, 18. 
 Sept. of fish, for ntoptofc Lev. 11, 9. 10. 
 Of fish Plut. de Solert. anim. 28 bis. Diod. 
 Sic. 20. 91 of thin plates, laminas. 
 
 \7rpa, as, fj, (XeTrpoy,) leprosy, in which 
 the skin becomes scaly ; see Jahn 188 sq. 
 Matt. 8, 3. Mark 1, 42. Luke 5, 12. 13. 
 Sept. for n?^S Lev. 13, 2. 3sq. Jos. Ant. 
 3. 11. 3, 4. Hdot. 1. 138. 
 
 XeTT/309, ov, 6, (XeVoy, Xerrty,) pr. scaly, 
 scabby ; hence a leper, one diseased with 
 leprosy, Matt. 8, 2. 10, 8. 11, 5. Mark 1, 
 40. Luke 4, 27. 7, 22. 17, 12. 2t>v 6 
 XeTrpo y, Simon the leper, who had been a 
 leper, Matt. 26, 6. Mark 14, 3. Sept. for 
 SVtt Lev. 13, 44. 45 ; sn MJ 2 Sam. 3.29. 
 2 K. 7, 3. Jos. Ant. 3. 11. 4. Aristoph. 
 Achar. 723. 
 
 \e7TTOV, ov, TO, (XfTrroj, XeVw,) the 
 name of the smallest Jewish coin, like Engl. 
 mite. Its value was half a KoSpdvrrjs q. v. 
 or the eighth part of an do-o-dpiov q. v. It 
 was therefore equal to about one fifth of 
 one cent, or three eighths of one farthing. 
 Mark 12, 42. Luke 12, 59. 21, 2. Pr. 
 \fnTov Kfp/j.a Alciphr. I. Ep. 9 ; \fTrrbv vo- 
 Hia-na Pollux On. 9. 92. 
 
 Aevc or ./leui?, ace. Aeu>, Winer J 10. 
 1, Levi, Heb. "^ (a joining), pr. n. of four 
 persons in N. T. 
 
 1. The third son of Jacob and Leah, the 
 head of the tribe of Levi, Heb. 7, 5. 9. Rev. 
 7,7. 
 
 2, 3. Two of the ancestors of Jesus, Luke 
 3, 24. 29. 
 
 4. One of the apostles, Aeiuy, the son of 
 Alpheus, called also Matthew, Mark 2, 14. 
 Luke 5, 27. 29 ; comp. Matt. 9. 9. 
 
 Aevirr/Si ov, 6, a Levite, one of the pos 
 terity of Levi, spoken in N. T. of the de 
 scendants of the three great families into 
 which this tribe was divided, the heads of 
 which were Gershom, Kohath, and Merari, 
 Num. 3, 17 sq. These were appointed by the 
 Mosaic law to be the ministers and servants 
 of the priests, and to perform the menial offi 
 ces of the temple and temple-service. Luke 
 10, 32. John 1,19. Acts 4, 36. See Num. 
 1, 50 sq. 4, 1 sq. 8, 5 sq. Jos. Ant. 9. 13. 3. 
 
 AevlriKOS, yj, 6v, Levitical, pertaining to 
 the Levites, Heb. 7, 11. 
 
 \evKaivo), f. avta, (XeuKo s,) to whiten, tc 
 make ichite, e. g. TOS oroXar Rev. 7, 14; 
 absol. Mark 9, 3. Sept. for T^H p s . 51. 
 9. Is. 1, 18. Horn. Od. 12. 172. Eurip. 
 Cycl. 17. 
 
430 
 
 Xeu/C09, T], 6v, (XetWo>, \VKTJ, Lat. luceo.) 
 pr. light, emitting light, shining, glittering, 
 radiant ; hence radiant while. 
 
 1. Pr. of raiment, espec. that of angels, 
 Mark 16, 5. John 20, 12. Acts 1, 10. Rev. 
 3,4. 5. 18. 4,4. 6, 11. 7,9. 13. 19, 14. 
 Luke 9, 29 6 i/xartcr/^oj avrov \fVKos eg- 
 acrrpaTTTuiv. Matt. 17, 2 \evKci ear TO (p<os. 
 28, 3 et Mark 9, 3 X. oxret x 1 "" com P- l^ a - 
 7, 9 where Sept. for IJfi . Of a throne 
 Rev. 20, 11. Horn. Od. 6. 45. II. 14. 185 
 
 KpriftffJLVOV \fVKOV TJfXlOS (OS. 
 
 2. Genr. while, e. g. hair Matt. 5, 36. 
 Rev. 1, 14 ; a stone Rev. 2, 17 ; a cloud 14, 
 14; a horse 6, 2. 19, 11. 14 ; a field ripe 
 for the harvest John 4, 35. Sept. for "j^J 
 Lev. 13, 3. 4. Zech. 1,8. 6, 3. Horn. II. 
 10. 437. Hdian. 5. 6. 16. Xen. A. 1. 28. 
 
 , ovros, 6, a lion, Heb. 11, 33. 
 
 1 Pet. 5, 8. Rev. 4, 7. 9, 8. 17. 10, 3. 13, 
 2. Sept. for "^H 1 Sam. 17, 34. 36. 37 ; 
 ft?}* Judg. 14, 5. 8. 9. So Pol. 5. 35. 13. 
 Xen. Ven. 11. 1. Trop. for a hero, power 
 ful deliverer, Rev. 5, 5 6 \eav 6 &>v (f>v\rjs 
 lovSa, comp. Neh. 2, 13. Jer. 49, 18. Also 
 proverbially for great danger ; 2 Tim. 4, 17 
 fopiKT^rjv (K <rTo/xaTos XeoiToy, i. e. from im 
 minent danger of life ; see Ps. 22, 22. Jer. 2, 
 15; comp. Dan. 6, 22 sq. 
 
 XT/^??, rjs, fj, (Xai/3di>co,) forgetfulness, 
 Mivion, e. g. \r)%r)v\ap.pdvfiv i. q. to forget, 
 
 2 Pet 1, 9; comp. in Xa^dixo no. 1. f. 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 6. 10. JE\. H. An. 4. 35. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 21. 
 
 ov, 6, f}, a trough, e. g. for drink 
 ing, watering, Sept. for U>11 Gen. 30, 39. 
 42. Horn. Hymn, in Merc. 104. In N. T. 
 a wine-trough, wine-vat,viz. 
 
 1 . The upper vat or press, Heb. H?, into 
 which the grapes were cast and trodden by 
 men, Rev. 14, 19. 20 bis. 19, 15. Sept. for 
 MS Neh. 13, 15. Is. 63, 2. So Diod. Sic. 3. 
 63. Anacr. 52. 4. It was sometimes hewn 
 in a rock, and had a grated opening near 
 the bottom through which the liquor flowed 
 off into a lower vat ; see Kaempfer Amoe- 
 nitatt. p. 377. d Arvieux Mem. III. p. 327 
 sq. At the present day on Mount Lebanon 
 the grapes are trodden out in baskets ; Bib- 
 lioth. Sacra, 1846, p. 385 sq. 
 2. The lower vat or trough, dug in the 
 rock or earth as above, Matt. 21, 33, i. q. 
 viro\r]vwv Mark 12, 1 ; comp. also Is. 5, 
 2 where Heb. S^ , Sept. irpoXrjviov. Sept. 
 \vvos for J?1 Prov. 3, 10. Joel 2, 24. 
 Anthol. Gr. IV. p. 259. 3. Schol. in Ari- 
 stoph Eccl. 154. Wetstein N. T. I. p. 466. 
 
 ov, 6, tattle, idle talk, Luke 24, 
 11. jEschin. 34. ult. Xen. An. 7. 7. 41. 
 
 \rjcrTrjs, ov, 6, (\rjts, X^o/jot,) a plun- 
 derer, robber, Matt. 21, 13 airrj^aiov X^orcoi/. 
 26, 55. Mark 11, 17. 14, 48. Luke 10, 30. 
 36. 19,46. 22,25. John 10,1. 18,40. 2 Cor. 
 11, 26. Matt. 27, 38. 44 et Mark 15, 27, 
 comp. Luke 23, 33 Kaicovpyoi. Trop. John 
 10, 8, comp. in K\fTrrr)s. Sept. <T7njXaiov 
 
 \yvruv for D^I-IQ rnsa j er . 7, 11. 
 
 Hdian. 1. 10. 3. Xen. Hell. 6. 4. 35. 
 
 fcof, 77, (\ap.pdva.) a receiving, 
 receipt, only Phil. 4, 15, for which see in 
 86<ris no. 2. Ecclus. 41,19. 42, 7. Plato 
 Rep. 332. a, 17 uTroSotm KOI f) \ij\}ns. 
 
 \iav, adv. much, very, exceedingly , . so 
 with a verb, Matt. 2, 16 e 3u/*o>3?7 \iav. 27, 
 14. Luke 23, 8. 2 Tim. 4, 15. 2 John 4. 
 3 John 3. Sept. for ^ka Gen. 4, 5. 1 Sam. 
 
 11, 15. (OEschin. 6. 21. Xen. An. 6. 1. 28.) 
 With an adj. Matt. 4, 8 opos v^Xoi/ XiW. 
 8, 28. Mark 9, 3. Sept. for 1K Gen. 1, 
 31. (Palaeph. 28. 1. Xen. Ag. 5. 4.) With 
 other adverbs, Mark 1, 35 Trpon evwxov \iav, 
 see in ei/w^os. 6, 51. 16, 2. (Luc. Pise. 34.) 
 For the phrase ol vrrep \iav 2 Cor. 11, 5. 
 
 12, 11, see in vntpXiav. 
 
 Xt/3cH/09, ov, 6, (Heb. !"I3h5 ,) pr. arbor 
 thurifera, the tree which produces frankin 
 cense, crowing chiefly in Arabia ; Hdot. 4. 
 75. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 187 sq. Comp. Plin. 
 H. N. ?,-2. 30 sq. Celsii Hierob. I. p. 231 sq. 
 Rosenm. Bibl. Alterthk. IV. i. p. 153 sq. 
 Later and in N. T. frankincense, i. q. 
 Xt/3ai/coTo j, a transparent and fragrant gum 
 which distils from incisions in the above 
 tree, and was iised by the ancients as in 
 cense, comp. Ex. 30, 34. In modern times 
 it is classed among drugs, and is sometimes 
 called olibanum. Matt. 2, 11. Rev. 18, 13. 
 Sept. for Heb. Mjhb Ex. 1. c. Lev. 2, 1. 5, 
 11. Diod. Sic. 5/41. Hdian. 4. 8. 20. 
 Theophr. H. PI. 9. 1. 2, 6. 
 
 \i(3avwros, ov, 6, (\iftav6s,) pr. frank 
 incense, JEl V. H. 11. 5. Hdian. 5. 5. 12. 
 In N. T. meton. a censer for burning in 
 cense, thuribulum ; Rev. 8, 3 e^coi/ Xi/3az>w- 
 TOV xpwovv. v. 5. 
 
 Ai/3epTivo$, ov, 6, Lat. libertinus, a 
 Libertine, a f reed-man of Rome, either per 
 sonally made free or born of freed parents. 
 see Adam s" Rom. Ant. p. 34, 41 sq. Diet. 
 of Antt. arts. Ingenui, Liberlus. In N. T. 
 Acts 6, 9 rives TU>V fK rrjs (rvi>aya>yrjs TTJS 
 \fyo/j.fvr]s AijSepTiVaw, certain of those be 
 longing to the synagogue of the Libertines 
 so called. These were probably Jews, who 
 
431 
 
 naving been carried as captives to Rome, 
 and there freed by their masters, had settled 
 down as residents in that city, i. e. they and 
 their descendants as Roman freed-men. The 
 term At/3eprii/oi thus became for them a 
 sort of proper name, at least among the 
 Jews at Jerusalem. Philo expressly affirms 
 that a large section of the city beyond the 
 Tiber was occupied by Jews of this charac 
 ter, Leg. ad Cai. p. 1014. c, or Opp. II. p. 
 568. Tacitus also relates, that under Ti 
 berius 4000 freed-men who professed the 
 Jewish religion were at once transported to 
 Sardinia, Annal. 2. 85 ; comp. Sueton. Ti 
 ber. 36. See Loesner Obs. in N. T. p. 180. 
 Some read by conject. Ai/SvariVwi , "Li 
 byans. 
 
 Aiftw), rjs, T], Libya, Acts 2, 10, a region 
 of Africa, west of Egypt along the coast of 
 the Mediterranean, and extending back inde 
 finitely into the desert. The tract along 
 the coast was divided under the Romans 
 into two parts ; on the east Libya Marmari- 
 ca ; and towards the west Libya Cyrenaica, 
 so called from its chief city Cyrene, and 
 called also Libya Pentapolis from the five 
 cities which it contained, Apollonia, Arsi- 
 noe, Berenice, Cyrene, Ptolemais. In all 
 these cities there dwelt many Jews. Plin. 
 H. N. 5. 5. Jos. Ant. 14. 7. 2. Comp. in 
 Kvpr]in]. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. III. p. 361, 
 367. 
 
 XtS-a&>, f. da-o), (Xt Sos,) to stone, to pell 
 with stones, in order to wound or kill, c. ace. 
 John [8, 5.] 10,31.32.33. 11,8. Acts 5, 26. 
 14, 19. 2 Cor. 1 1, 25. Heb. 1 1, 37. Sept. and 
 30 2 Sam. 16, 6. 13. Intrans. Pol. 10. 
 29. 5. Strabo 15. p. 705 X. eVi O-KOTTOV. 
 
 \feivo$, T], ov, (Xi 3oy,) stone, of stone, 
 made of stone ; John 2, 6 vSpt at Xi Siwu. 
 2 Cor. 3, 3. Rev. 9, 20. Sept. for 1=X 
 Gen. 35, 14. Ex. 31, 17. Luc. Demon. 67. 
 Xen. An. 3. 4. 7, 9. 
 
 \feo/3d\ea), , f. Tjo-a), (Xi 3or, aXXa>,) 
 to throw stones at any one, to stone, in order 
 to wound or kill, i. q. Xi3ao>, c. accus. 
 Matt. 21, 35. 23, 37. Mark 12,4. Luke 13, 
 34. Acts 7, 58. 59. 14, 5. As a Mosaic 
 punishment, John 8, 5 ; comp. Lev. 20, 10 
 ct Dent. 22, 22, also v. 21 where Sept. and 
 ^15D. Heb. 12, 20, comp. Ex. 19, 13 where 
 Sept. and ^15^. Sept. also for OVi Lev. 
 20, 27. 24, 14. 16. Plut. Platon. Quaest. 7. 
 Dio Cass. 999. 7. 
 
 ov, 6, a slone, small or large. 
 1. Pr. e. g. of small stones, Matt. 4, 3 
 iva ol X/3oi OVTOL ttproi ytvatvrai. V. 6. 7, 9. 
 
 Mark 5, 5. al. Sept. and l^X i Chr. 12, 2. 
 2 Chr. 1, 15. (Xen. An. 5. 2. 14.) Of 
 stones for building, Matt. 24, 2. Mark 13, 1 
 tSe TroraTToi Xi Sot. v. 2. Luke 19, 44 ; here 
 for the size and beauty of the stones with 
 which the temple was built, see Jos. Ant. 
 15. 11. 3. B. J. 5. 5. 1 sq. Ezra 5, 8 where 
 Sept. XtSot tK\(KToi for y=3> |25<. (Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 1. 7.) Of a mill-stone X. ^ivXtKoy 
 Mark 9, 42. Rev. 18, 21. (Hdian. 3. 1. 14.) 
 Of a stone for covering the mouth of a se 
 pulchre, Matt. 27, 60. 66. 28, 2. Mark 15, 
 46. Luke 24, 2. John 11, 38. al. Sept. and 
 12X Gen. 29, 2. 3. 8. 10. (Luc. de Luctu 
 19.) Of stone tablets 2 Cor. 3. 7 ; comp. 
 Ex. 31, 1. 4. Of idols carved in stone, i. e. 
 statues of marble, Acts 17, 29 ; so Sept. 
 and "|35< Deut. 4, 28. 28, 36. Of precious 
 stones, e. g. Xi Soy rifuos Rev. 17, 4. 18, 
 12. 16. 21, 11. 19; trop. 1 Cor. 3, 12; 
 Xt Sos Ida-TTis Rev. 4, 3. 21, 11. Sept. and 
 13, X. riit. 2 Sam. 12, 30. 1 K. 10,2. 11 ; 
 X. 07*. Ex. 35, 25. Ez. 10, 1. So Jos. Ant. 
 10. 2. 2. Hdian. 4. 8. 21. 
 
 2. Trop. spoken a) Of Christ, as 6 
 Xi Soy aKpoycovialos, Eph. 2, 20. 1 Pet. 2, 6 ; 
 see in aKpoycovialos. As 6 Xi Sor >v 1 Pet. 
 2, 4, see in aa> no. 1. c. As 6 Xi 3os Trpocr- 
 Ko/jLparos, the stone of stumbling, Rom. 9, 
 32. 33. 1 Pet. 2, 7, i. e. the occasion or 
 cause of fall, destruction, to the Jews, since 
 they took offence at his person and charac 
 ter, and thus rejected their spiritual deliv 
 erer ; comp. Is. 8, 14 et ibi Gesen. Comm. 
 b) Of Christians, as Xi 3ot fames 1 Pet. 2. 
 5, see in (Jaw no. I.e. + 
 
 Xi^6crrp&)T09, ou, 6, 77, adj. (Xi Soy. 
 0-Tpiavvvp.i,) stone-strowed, pared, Sept. foi 
 riBS-i Esth. 1, 6. 2 Chr. 7, 3. App. Bell. 
 Civ. 3. 26 eV XtSotrrpcorw TroXet. Arr. Epict. 
 4. 7. 37 <ro! ^.e Xet TTWS av eV XftocrrpatTois 
 [oiKTj^tao-t] otKjjcn/re, i. e. houses decorated 
 with tesselated or Mosaic pavements, as 
 was customary at Rome after the time of 
 Sylla, Plin. H. N. 36. 60, 64. Sueton. Gas. 
 46. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 529. In N. T. 
 Neut. TO Xt3oo-rpa>roi>, iht Pavement, 
 John 19, 13, as pr. name of a place (ro- 
 TTOS-) in Jerusalem, where Pilate gave sen 
 tence against Jesus ; in Aramaean Gabballia 
 (ridge), see in ya/3/3a3a. It was just with 
 out the prsetorium ; and there Pilate set up 
 his tribunal or seat in public, before all the 
 people, as was not unusual ; see Jos. B. J. 
 2. 9. 3. ib. 2. 14. 8. Not improbably there 
 may have been on this spot an elevated 
 space or permanent platform paved with 
 marble for this very purpose ; whence the 
 
432 
 
 name. Suetonius relates (1. c.) that Julius 
 Caesar in his military expeditions took with 
 him pieces of marble ready fitted, in order 
 that wherever he encamped they might be 
 laid down in the prEetorium. Others sup 
 pose the similar pavement in the outer court 
 of the temple to be meant, Sept. 2 Chr. 7, 3. 
 Jos. B. J. 6. 1. 8. ib. 6. 3. 2 ; but a Roman 
 magistrate could hold no such proceedings 
 in the temple. See Wetstein N . T. in loc. 
 Krebs Obs. in N. T./p. 158. 
 
 Xt/c/ia&>, <, f. rjo-a, (XiK/ios,) to winnow 
 grain ; in the East this is done by throwing 
 it up with a fork against the wind, which 
 scatters the straw and chaff, Horn. II. 5. 
 500. Xen. (Ec. 18. 2, 6 ; see Bibl. Res. in 
 Palest II. p. 277, 371. Hence, to scatter, 
 to disperse, Sept. Is. 17, 13. Amos 9, 9. 
 Wisd. 11, 19. In N. T. trop. Matt. 21, 44 
 et Luke 20, 18 e </> bv ft av TreVfl (6 Xt Sor), 
 XiK/ir/crei alrov, it shall scatter him to the 
 winds, i. e. crush him in pieces, make chaff 
 of him ; comp. Sept. for Chald. C^O Aph. 
 Dan. 2,44; i$i Job 27, 21. 
 
 \ifji,r)V, fvos, 6, a haven, harbour, port, 
 Acts 27, 12 bis. v. 8 see in art. KoXot Xt/xe- 
 ve s. Sept. for firm p s . 107, 30. Diod. Sic. 
 3. 38. Xen. An. 6. 4. 1. 
 
 js, 17, (Xe//3w ; ) pr. water left 
 standing or stagnant ; hence a pool, lake, 
 e. g. the lake of Gennesareth, Luke 5, 1 
 Trapa rrfv X. TfvvrjcrapfT. 5, 2. 8, 22. 23. 33. 
 Of a lake of burning sulphur, e. g. yeewa 
 q. v. Rev. 19, 20. 20, 10. 14 bis. 15. 21, 8 ; 
 comp. in afys. Sept. for C5X Ps. 107, 35. 
 114, 8. Diod. Sic. 2. 4. Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 
 19. 
 
 oO, 6, (XetVco, Xe Xet/t/iat,) also 
 Dor. r) Xt/io y in Mss. Luke 15, 14. Acts 11, 
 28, comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 188 ; pr. fail 
 ure, want of food ; hence hunger, famine. 
 
 1 . Of single persons, hunger, 2 Cor. 1 1 , 
 27 lv Xi/iw Kal 8fyet. Luke 15, 17. Rom. 8, 
 35. Sept. for 33H Lam. 5, 10. So Xt/w 
 rj 8fyos Luc. Tox. 58. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 13. 
 
 2. Of cities or countries, famine, scarcity 
 of grain, Matt. 24, 7 <i<jovrai Xt/ioi KOI Xot- 
 fu>l. Mark 13, 8. Luke 4, 25. 15, 14. 21, 
 11. Acts 7, 11. 11,28. Rev. 6, 8. 18,8. 
 Sept. for 25n Gen. 12, 10. Ruth 1,1. al. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 84init. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 7. 
 
 \lvov, O v, TO, flax, the plant, Sept. for 
 nrjttJB Ex. 9, 31. Xen. Ath. 2. 11, 12. 
 In N. T. and genr. what is made of flax, 
 linen, e. g. raiment, Rev. 15, 6 eVSeSv/xeW 
 XiVoi/ xaSapov. Sept. and fPJt Q Is. 19, 9. 
 So Horn. II. 9. 661. Od. 13. 73. Put also 
 
 for the wick of a lamp, i. e. a strip of linen ; 
 Matt. 12, 20 \lvov Tv^o^evov ov o-fieo-fi, the 
 smoking wick he will not quench, i. e. the 
 faint and just expiring light he will not ex 
 tinguish, quoted from Is. 42, 3 where Sept 
 and !">fi^Q . Sense : the Messiah will com 
 fort the oppressed, and not add to their sor 
 rows. 
 
 Atvos, ov, 6, Linus, pr. n. of a Chris 
 tian, 2 Tim. 4,21. 
 
 \nrapo$, d, 6v, (XiVoj,) fatty, oily, oint 
 ed, Horn. Od. 15. 352. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 31 ; 
 fat, e. g. ^rjpla Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 11, 77 yij 
 Sept. Neh. 9, 35 ; full, fresh, ruddy, e. g. 
 the goddess Qtfjus, Hes. Theog. 901 ; XiTra- 
 pol ra 7rp6<T(OTra Plut. Agesi. 29. In N. T. 
 trop. of things, espec. as belonging to orna 
 ment and luxury, bright, precious, sump 
 tuous ; Rev. 18, 14 -navra. ra \nrapa Kal ra 
 Xa/wrpa aTrcoXero. So Horn. II. 22. 406. 
 Find. Olymp. 8. 108 \nrapos KOCT/JLOS. 
 
 \vrpa, as, 17, Lat. libra, a pound, in 
 weight ; John 12, 3 Xa/Souo-a \irpav pvpov. 
 19, 39. So Pol. 22. 26. 19. Plut. Poplic. 
 15. The \irpa varied in different coun 
 tries ; the Roman libra was divided into 12 
 ounces, and was equivalent to nearly 12 
 ounces avoirdupois. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 
 490. BcEckh Metrolog. Untersuch. p. 160 sq. 
 170 sq. Diet, of Antt. art. Libra. Rabb. 
 t Lex. 1138sq. 
 
 , \ifi6s, 6, pr. n. for the south or 
 south-west wind, Africus, Pol. 10. 10. 1. 
 Hdot. 2. 25. Sept. for 1 j P} Ps. 78, 26. 
 In N. T. meton. the south, the southern 
 quarter, Acts 27, 12. Sept. for 253 Gen. 
 1 3, 14 ; jSin Num. 2, 10. So Pol. 9, 27. 5. 
 Xoyta, ay, T), (Xeyco,) a collection, e. g. 
 of money, 1 Cor. 16, 1. 2. Suid. \ayiav 
 TTJV o-vXkoyrjv. So Theodoret and others ir. 
 loc. Not found in classic writers. 
 
 j,at; f. tVo/iot, Mid. depon. (Xo- 
 yoj.) aor. I f\oyicrdfj.r)v ; also Pass. aor. 1 
 eXoyt o-Sr/i/ Mark 15, 28. al. and fut. 1 Xoyt- 
 crSijcro/Lcai Rom. 2, 26, in the Passive sense, 
 comp. Buttm. { 113. n. 6. Matth. 495. e. 
 So too even pres. Xoyi b/xat is sometimes 
 Passive, Rom. 4, 4. 5. 24. 9, 8 ; see Winer 
 1 39. 7 c. Buttm. Ausf. Sprachl. 1 13. n. 7. 
 Pr. to reason, i. e. to use the reason ; 
 hence to reckon, to count, to compute, espec. 
 in numerical calculations, Hdot. 7. 28. Luc. 
 D. Mort. 4. 1. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. to reckon or count to any one, pr. to 
 put to one s account; c. dat. Rom. 4, 4 TW 
 va> 6 /iicrSoy ov \oyltrai Kara 
 So Dio Chrysost. 48. p 534. b, 
 
433 
 
 \oyos 
 
 ov&c ol yovfis TOIS TtKvois dirrl TU>V dva- 
 \a>fiaT(t>v ras fv%as \oyiovrai. JE\. H. An. 
 
 3. 11 ult. Dem. 1148. 20. Trop. to count 
 to any one, to impute, to attribute, pr. c. dat. 
 of pers. and ace. of thing, but often in the 
 Pass, construction : a) Genr. Rom. 4, 6 
 (a 6 3e6? Xoyt feTdi 8iKatoo~viT)v %capls epycov. 
 v. 11. So of evil, to impute, to lay to one s 
 charge, and with a negat. not to impute, i. e. 
 to overlook, to forgive ; Rom. 4, 8 paKiipios 
 dvrjp & ov p.f] XoyiaTjrai Kvpios a^apriav, 
 quoted from Ps. 32, 2 where Sept. for 
 b Stan. 2 Cor. 5, 19 (comp. Col. 2, 13). 
 2 Tim. 4, 16. 1 Cor. 13, 5. Sept. and a^n 
 2 Sam. 19, 20. b) With el s n, e. g. 
 Rom. 4, 5. 9 eXoyurfti) TO> Afipaup, f) TTIO-TIS 
 ds SiKaiofTvvrjv, i. e. Abraham s faith was 
 imputed to him as righteousness, he was 
 treated on account of it as if righteous. 
 With 17 TTLO-TIS or the like Rom. 4, 3. 22. 
 Gal. 3, 6. James 2, 23 ; tls impl. Rom. 4, 
 10. 23. 24. Comp. Gen. 15, 6 where Sept. 
 and \ sen . So 1 Mace. 2, 52. 
 
 2. /o reckon, to reason, to think, to consi 
 der ; absol. Mark 11,31 KOI eKoyl^ovro irpbs 
 eavrovs. With 6Yt Heb. 11, 19. [John 11, 
 50] ; TOVTO or* 2 Cor. 10, 7. With ace. of 
 thing, to think upon, to consider, Phil. 4, 8 
 ravTa Xoyi eo-3e. So Wisd. 2, 1 . Isocr. p. 
 79. b. Xen. Hi. 1. 11 ; c. ort Xen. Hell. 2. 
 
 4. 28 ; ra\ira Thuc. 7. 73. Spec, to reason 
 out, to think out, to find out by thinking, c. 
 ace. 2 Cor. 3, 5 OVK luavoi ecr/iev d(p tavratv 
 Xoyi o-ao-3ai n KT\. Comp. Sept. and - ^^ 
 Jer. 11, 19. 50, 45. So Liban. 44. p. 914. 
 d, d(p favTwv aura \oyi6[j.fvoi KOI O-KOTTOVV- 
 
 T(S OI 8lKUO~Tai KT\. 
 
 3. to reckon, to count, to judge, to sup 
 pose, as the result of reasoning, c. ace. et 
 inf. Rom. 3, 28 Xoyifo /ifSa yap, StKcuoucrSai 
 Tri o-rei av&puirov. Phil. 3, 13. 2 Cor. 11, 5. 
 Rom. 6, 11. 14, 14. With 6Yt instead of 
 ace. et inf. Rom. 8, 18 \oyiouai yap, on 
 OI/K aia KT\. and with TOUTO on 2, 3. 2 Cor. 
 10, 11 ; absol. 1 Pet. 5, 12. Sept. and atfn 
 Is. 53, 4. (Hdian. 2. 11. 14. Diod. Sic* 
 13. 112. Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 6; c. Sri Hdian. 
 3. 8. 6.) Genr. to reason, to judge, absol. 
 
 1 Cor. 13, 11 us vi]-mos t\oyi<jpr)v. With 
 ("is Tira 2 Cor. 12, 6. Also i. q. to purpose, 
 
 2 Cor. 10, 2 \oyiofjLai ToX/irjo-at. Sept. and 
 rrn \ e h. 6, 2. So Xen. An. 2. 2. 13. 
 
 4. to reckon as or for any thing, to count, 
 to regard, to hold, c. ace. et a>s 1 Cor. 4, 1 
 
 ras Xp. 2 Cor. 10, 2 ult. Rom. 8, 36 quoted 
 from Ps. 44, 23 where Sept. and Sicn, as 
 also Am. 6, 5. (So c. dupl. ace. Wisd. 5, 4. 
 15, 15.) With ds c. ace. for or as any 
 28 
 
 thing, see els no. 3. a. Acts 19, 27 ds ov- 
 8fv Xoyto-Stywu. (Wisd. 9, 6.) Rom. 2, 26. 
 9, 8 ret TfKva . ..\oy{frai els cnrtppa, where 
 Xoy/eTcu is either Pass, or we may supply 
 6 3edy, 17 ypa(pr), or the like. Sept. for 
 \> DCn i Sam. 1,13. With p.fra c. gen. 
 to reckon with or to, i. e. to count as ; Mark 
 15, 28 et Luke 22, 37 pya dvo^v e XoyiVSrj, 
 quoted from Is. 53, 12 where Sept. f>r 
 nx nja Niph. So Heb. B? mdn, Sept. 
 
 7rpoo-Xoyifeo-3at fJLfrd, Ps. 88, 5. 
 
 \oyiKOf, ^, oy, (Xdyov.) reasonable, ra 
 tional, pertaining to the reason, mind, un 
 derstanding, not material or physical ; Rom. 
 12, 1 XoyiKT) \arpeia, comp. John 4, 23 et 
 Rom. 7, 25. 1 Pet. 2, 2 TO Xoyticoi/ aooXov 
 yaXa, i. e. rational (spiritual) and pure nou 
 rishment for the soul. Test. XII Patr. p. 
 547 Trpotnpepouot Kvpica \oyi<rjv Trpocrcpopdv. 
 Art. Epict. 1. 1.4 r) 8wafj,Ls TJ Xoyuoj i. e. 
 reason. Plato Locr. 99. e. 
 
 \oyiOV, ov, TO, (neut. of Xdytoy,) pr. 
 something uttered, effatum ; e. g. from God, 
 an oracle, a divine communication; so of 
 oracles in the O. T. Acts 7, 38 ; espec. 
 those relating to the Messiah, Rom. 3, 2. 
 So through Christ, the doctrines of the gos 
 pel, Heb. 5, 12. 1 Pet. 4, 11. Sept. for 
 "T^X Ps. 12, 7. Diod. Sic. 2. 14. Hdot. 
 4. 178. 
 
 Xoyt09, ov, 6, 17, adj. (Xdyor ,) Att. learned, 
 erudite, i. q. iro\vio-ru>p, Dion. Hal. Ant. 1. 
 7. Hdot. 2. 77. In N. T. skilled in speech, 
 eloquent, an orator, i. q. XewtKo s, Acts 18, 
 24 dvrjp Xdyior. So Jos. Ant. 17. 6. 2. 
 Luc. Pseudol. 24. Epict. Ench. 44. Plut. 
 Cic. 49. See Lob. ad Phryn. p. 198. 
 
 Xccyicr/xo?, {5, 6, (Xoyt b/u,) pr. reckon 
 ing i. e. the art, arithmetic, Xen. Mem. 4. 
 7. 8. In N. T. reasoning, thought, cogita 
 tion, e. g. of conscience Rom. 2, 15. (Genr. 
 Wisd. 9, 14. Dem. 127. 24. Plato Tim. 
 34. a.) Spec, thought, imagination, con 
 ceit, 2 Cor. 10, 5 \oyio~fj.ovs KcftaipovvTfs. 
 Sept. for fiaarn? Prov. 6, 18. Jer. 11, 19. 
 
 \o<yofjia^ea), S>, f. IJCTW, (Xoyo?, ^a^O 
 to strive about words, to dispute about tri 
 fles, 2 Tim. 2, 14. 
 
 \oyo/Lta^ta, as, fj, (Xoyo/Lia^ea),) word- 
 strife, dispute about trifles, 1 Tim. 6, 4. 
 
 Xoyo?, ov, 6, (X/ya>,) word, as spoken, 
 any thing spoken ; also reason, as manifest 
 ing itself in the power of speech ; hence 
 both Lat. oratio and ratio. See Passow s. v. 
 
 I. Word, both the act of speaking and 
 the thing spoken, Lat. oratio. 
 
 1 . Pr. word, not in the grammatical sense 
 
\6yos 434 
 
 . iiKe eVos and prjpa, but as uttered by the 
 living voice, a speaking, speech, utterance, 
 Lat. vox. Matt. 8, 8 povov eiVe \6yov. Luke 
 7, 7. 23, 9. 1 Cor. 14, 9. Heb. 12, 19. al. 
 Sept. for n n Gen. 44, 18. (Hdian. 8. 6. 
 16. Hdot. L61. Xen. Cyr. 6. 4. 5.) So 
 flTTfiv \6yov Kara TWOS, to speak a word 
 against any one, M^tt. 12, 32 ; eis nva id. 
 Luke 12, 10. (Jos. Ant. 15. 3. 9.) Also 6 
 Xo yos TOV Scov, the word of God, his 
 omnipotent voice, decree, 2 Pet. 3, 5. 7. 
 Sept. and lan Ps. 33, 6 ; comp. Gen. 1, 3. 
 Ps. 148, 5. " 
 
 2. word, emphat. i. e. a saying, declara 
 tion, sentiment uttered, Lat. dictum, effatum. 
 a) Genr. John 6,- 60 o-AcX^pos eVrtj/ OVTOS 6 
 Xo yos. Luke 20, 20. Matt! 7, 24 6Wis a- 
 /covet p-ov TOVS Xoyovs TOVTOVS. V. 26. 10, 
 14. Luke 4, 22. al. Sept. and -iat| Prov. 
 4, 4. 20. (.El. V. H. 14. 15 TOVS SwlcpdYovs 
 Xo yovs.) So in reference to words or de 
 clarations, e. g. which precede, Matt. 15, 12 
 oi "Japicralot aKovo-avTfs TOV \6yov, i. e. in 
 v. 3 sq. 19, 22 comp. v. 21. Mark 7, 29 
 comp. v. 28. John 2, 22. 4, 50. 7, 40 comp. 
 v. 37. 10, 19. Acts 5, 24. Tit. 3, 8. Rev. 
 19, 9. (Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 32.) Or which 
 follow, John 12, 38. Acts 20, 35. Rom. 
 13, 9. 1 Cor. 15, 54. 1 Tim. 3, 1. Sept. 
 and ia^i 1 K. 2, 4. With gen. of thing, 
 e. g. Xoyos eVayyeXt as Rom. 9, 9 ; X. TTJS 
 6pKcop.oo-t as Heb. 7, 28. Also 6 Xdyos 
 TOV TrpofprjTov, etc. the word, declaration, 
 of the prophet, i. e. the prediction, prophecy, 
 Luke 3, 4. John 12, 38. Acts 15, 15. 2 Pet. 
 1, 19. Rev. 1, 3. Spec, a proverb, maxim, 
 John 4, 37. So &\. V. H. 1. 19. Plato 
 Symp. 195. b. b) In reference to reli 
 gion, religious duties, i. q. doctrine, precept ; 
 Acts 18, 15 fie r)Trjnd e crri TTfpl Xdyov 
 KT\. 15, 24. Tit. 1, 9. Heb. 2, 2 ; Xoyoi -rijs 
 Trurrews 1 Tim. 4, 6 ; Xo yos SiKaioo-vvrjs 
 (see in aireipos) Heb. 5,13; Xoyos avSpaj- 
 TTCOV 1 Thess. 2, 13. 2 Tim. 2, 17; of a 
 teacher John 15, 20. Sept. and IM Ex. 
 34, 27. 28. (1 Mace. 2, 33. 34.) Espec. of 
 God, Xo yos TOV Seov, the word of God, 
 divine declaration, oracle; John 10, 35 Trpos 
 ovs 6 X. TOV 3. rytWro. 5, 38. As an 
 nouncing good, the divine promise, Rom. 9, 
 6. Heb. 4, 2 ; (Sept. and iw Ps. 33, 4. 
 56, 5 ;) or evil, Heb. 4, 12. Rom. 3, 4 from 
 Ps. 51, 6 where Sept. and l^. Rom. 9, 
 28 from Is. 10, 22. 23, where Sept. for 
 "(nibs. (Bar. 2, 1.) In relation to duties, 
 a precept, John 8, 55. 5, 24. Mark 7, 13. 
 Sept. and "im Ex. 35, 1. So of the divine 
 declarations, precepts, oracles, relating to 
 
 the instructions of men in religion, the word 
 of God, i. e. the divine doctrine, the doc 
 trines and precepts of the Gospel, IHE GOS 
 PEL itself. Luke 5, 1 aKoveiv TOV \6yov TOV 
 3eov. John 17, 6. Acts 4, 29. 31. 8, 14. 
 1 Cor. 14, 36. 2 Cor. 4, 2. Col. 1, 25. 
 1 Thess. 2, 13. Tit. 1, 3. Heb. 13,7 ; with 
 TOV 3eov impl. Mark 16, 20. Luke 1, 2. 
 Acts 10, 44. Phil. 1, 14. 2 Tim. 4, 2 *f 
 pvgov TOV \6yov. James 1, 21. 1 Pet. 2, 8. 
 Rev. 12, 11. So 6 Xo yos TTJS aX^Set aj Eph. 
 
 1, 13. 2 Tim. 2, 15; \6yov fa^s Phil. 2, 
 16; X. TTJS crcoTTjpias Acts 13, 26; X. TTJS 
 jSao-iXe/ar Matt. 13, 19, and with TJJS /3. 
 impl. v. 20 sq. Mark 4, 14 ; X. TOV evayye- 
 X/ov Acts 15, 7; X. TOV o-ravpov 1 Cor. 1, 
 18 ; 6 X. TTJS \apiTos avTov Acts 20, 32. In 
 the same sense of Christ, 6 Xdyoy TOV 
 Xp. John 5, 24. 14, 23. 24. Col. 3, 16; 
 X. TOV Kvpiov Acts 8, 25 ; 6 X. TTJS ^aptros 
 avTov Acts 14, 3. 
 
 3. word, words, i. e. talk, discourse, speech, 
 Lat. sermo, the act of discoursing, a holding 
 forth, harangue. a) Pr. and genr. Matt. 
 22, 15 OTTtoS 1 avTov 7rayi8fucra>crti> ev Xo yw. 
 Luke 9, 28. Acts 14, 12 6 rjyovfifvos TOV 
 Xoyov. 2 Cor. 10, 10; lv Xoyw in word, in 
 discourse, James 3, 2. 1 Tim. 4, 12; v 
 Xoyw KoXaKfias, in flattering words, 1 Thess. 
 
 2, 5 ; Sia Xoyov, by word, by discourse, 
 orally, Acts 15, 27. 2 Thess. 2, 2. 15. In 
 antith. \6yos and tpyov, word and deed, Col. 
 
 3, 17. 2 Cor. 10, 11 ; comp. in epyov no. 2. 
 
 b. (Dion. Hal. Ant. 6. 87 ult. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 2. 59.) So Xoyos and fivvapis 1 Cor. 4, 
 19. 20. 1 Thess. 1, 5. Also n-ept ov TTO- 
 Xvy f]fuv 6 Xoyos of whom we have much 
 to say, Heb. 5. 11. With a gen. 1 Tim. 4, 
 5 8ta Xoyov 3eov Kal eVrev^eooy through the 
 word of God and supplication, i. e. through 
 prayer to God, comp. v. 4. So genr. Jos. 
 Ant. 4. 8. 24. Hdian. 1. 4. 1. Dem. 319. 9; 
 
 c. Trfpi False ph. 21. 2. Spec. a) Ot 
 teachers, discourse, teaching, preaching, in 
 struction. Matt. 7, 28 ore crvvfTt\to-fv 6 I. 
 TOVS \6yovs TOVTOVS. 26, 1. Luke 4, 32. 
 36. John 4, 41. Acts 2, 41. 13, 15. 20, 7 
 TraptTfivf TOV Xoyov. 1 Cor. 1, 17. 2, 1. 4. 
 
 1 Tim. 5, 17 ev Xo yw /cat SiSao-KaXt a. 1 Pet. 
 3, 1. So in antith. Xoyos and epyov Luke 
 24, 19. Acts 7, 22; comp. above. (Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 3. 6.) Also 6 Xo yos dX^Sei as 
 
 2 Cor. 6, 7. James 1, 18; 6 X. /caraXXayiys 
 2 Cor. 5, 19 comp. v. 18. /3) Of, those 
 who relate any thing, a narrative, story, 
 John 4, 39. Acts 2, 22. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 
 16, or 3. 1.) Meton. a history, treatise, i. e. 
 a book of narration ire pi TIVOS Acts 1,1. 
 Sr Dion. Hal. Ant. 1. 74. jEl. V. H. 7. 14. 
 
435 
 
 Xen. Ag. 10. 3. y) In the sense of con 
 versation, colloquy, Luke 24, 17. (^El. V. 
 H. 13. 31. Xen. Ag. 3. 5.) Hence answer, 
 reply, Matt. 5, 37. 
 
 b) Melon. tJie power of speech, utterance, 
 delivery, eloquence; 2 Cor. 11, 6 iSiconjy 
 rw Xdytp. 1 Cor. 12, 8. Eph. 6, 19. Isocr. 
 p. 27. b. Plato Rep. 376 ; i. q. Swap-ty \6y<av 
 Hdian. 7. 5. 10. 
 
 c) Meton. for the subject of discourse, a 
 topic, matter, thing, e. g. a) Genr. Matt. 
 19, 11. Luke 1, 4 Iva (Ttiyvcas Trept 2>j/ a- 
 rf)x%T]s \oya>v TTJV dcr(pd\(iav. Acts 8, 21 
 comp. v. 12. Sept. and "C^ saepiss. e. g. 
 
 2 Sam. 3, 13. 11, 18. So Pol. 8. 14. 5. 
 Hdot. 1. 21. Plato Apol. 34. e. /3) Spec. 
 matter of dispute, discussion, a question, e. g. 
 judicial, Acts 19, 38 (Dem. 942. 17); mo 
 ral, Matt. 21, 24 cptoTTjcrci) vp.as Kayo) \6yov 
 eva. So Diog. Laert. Stilpo II. 1 1 6r<noC- 
 TOV riva \6yov eptur^crat. 
 
 4. word, i. e. talk, rumour, report ; Matt. 
 28, 15 Kal 8ifcf)r]fj.i(T^Tj 6 \6yos OVTOS KT\. 
 Mark 1, 45. John 21, 23 ; with Trept TWOS 
 Luke 5, 15. 7,17. Acts 11, 22. Sept. and 
 1M 1 K. 10, 6. So Jos. Ant. 15. 3. 7. 
 Xen. An. 1. 4. 7 ; c. Trept ib. 6. 6. 13. 
 Hence for mere talk, pretence, show, Col. 2, 
 23 Xdyop fitv t \ovra cro(ptay. So Diod. Sic. 
 13. 4, opp. aXqSeta. Dem. 93. 5 Xdyot ravra 
 <al 7rpo<pao-ety. 
 
 II. Reason, the reasoning faculty, as that 
 power of the soul which manifests itself in 
 speech, Lat. ratio; Dem. 783. 2 p.rj8(TroT 
 (K Xdyou Tavra o-Korretre. Arr. Epict. 1. 
 
 12. 26. Plato Phaedr. 270. c, 6 dX^s Xd- 
 yos. In N. T. 
 
 1. a reason, ground, cause. Matt. 5, 32 
 napeKTos Xoyou Tropretay. Acts 10, 29. 
 Sept. eVt Xdyou for Heb. "1?^? 2 Sam. 
 
 13, 22. (Pol. 28. 11. 7. Xen. An. 6. 2. 10.) 
 Spec. Kara \6yov i. q. with reason, rea 
 sonably, for good cause, Acts 18, 14. So 
 
 3 Mace. 3, 14. Luc. D. Mort. 30. 3. Thuc. 
 3. 39. 
 
 2. reason, reasons, as demanded or given, 
 i. e. a reckoning, account. a) Pr. <rvvai- 
 oeiv \6yov pera TWOS to take up an account 
 with any one, i. e. to reckon with, Matt. 18, 
 23. 25, 19; an-oSiSdi/ai \6yov, to render an 
 account, e. g. TTJS oucoyap&M Luke 16, 2; 
 also Phil. 4, 15. 17, see in 86ans. So Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 49. Luc. Abdic. 8. Plut. Camill. 13. 
 b) Trop. account, i. e. the relation and rea 
 sons of any transaction, an explanation ; so 
 aTToStSdi/at v. 8t86vai Xdyov, to give 
 account, e. g. TT)S o-vorpocpf/y Acts 19, 40; 
 with Trept nvos Matt. 12, 36. Rom. 14, 12; 
 absol. Heb; 13. 17. 1 Pet. 4, 5. So XoyoK 
 
 atreii Trept TIVOS 1 Pet. 3, 15 ; also Heb. 4, 
 13 Trpoy w i]fjdv 6 Xdyoy. Sept. drro8i8. X6- 
 yo> for Chald. NnS J Dan. 6, 3. So Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 37 aTroSiS. Xoyoi/ Trept. Dem. 227. 26 
 8i86vai Xoyov. Xen. CEc. 11. 22. c) Trop. 
 \6yov TrotoC/Liat, to make account of, 
 i. e. to regard, to care" for ; Acts 20, 24 ov- 
 8evos \6yov Tfoiovp.ai, i. e. I make account 
 of none of these things, am not moved by 
 them. So Jos. Ant. 2. 5. 3. Dion. Hal. 
 Ant. 9. 50 \6yov ovdevus avra>i> noir]crdp.fvos. 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 26 TU>V a\\a>v peiw p.ot 
 Xdyor. -f- 
 
 III. With the art 6 Adyor, the Word, 
 the Logos, only in the writings of John, 
 John 1, 1 ter. 14. 1 John 1,1. [5, 7.] Rev. 
 19, 13. It here stands for the divine pre- 
 existent nature of the Messiah, which " be 
 came flesh and dwelt among us" as Jesus 
 Christ, the God -man ; John 1,14. This use 
 of 6 Xo yos by John may perhaps be account 
 ed for from the following considerations. In 
 the O. T. the word of Jehovah (rTJrrpa^, 
 Sept. p^p-a v. Xdyo?) sometimes appears as 
 personified, or at least is used for Jehovah 
 himself; Gen. 15, 1. 4. 5. 7-9. 1 K. 13, 9. 
 17. 19, 9. 11 sq. Among the later Jews 
 this usage became more definite and fre 
 quent, especially in the Chaldee Targums ; 
 in which the word of Jehovah (Chald. 
 rrirn -n ana^a) is often put where the 
 Hebrew reads ftjrT? Jehovah, or B l l^?< 
 God; so Gen. 19, 24. 20, 3. Ex. 17, 16. 
 Lev. 26, 12. Is. 45, 11. al. See Buxtorf 
 Lex. Chald. 125. In like manner the wis 
 dom of God ("""^n , crocp/a) appears in the 
 
 0. T. as personified, Prov. 8, 12. 22-31 ; 
 also Ecclus. c. 24. Wisd. 7, 21 sq. Later 
 Jewish writers identify or at least connect 
 this o-o(pia with 6 Xo yos rov 3eoC ; so Ecclus. 
 
 1 , 5 Complut. Trrjyr) (ro(pias Xdyoy 3eou tv 
 v\lsi<rTois, comp. Philo de Profugis j 20. p. 
 466. This Xoyoj also appears as personi 
 fied and as the agent in creation, Wisd. 9, 
 
 I. 18, 15. More developed is this doctrine 
 of a Xoyoy rou 2eoi5 in Philo ; whether from 
 any reference to the vovs or Xoyor of Plato 
 is uncertain; see Plato Phileb. p. 30. b. 
 Epinom. p. 986. Of this hypostasis Philo 
 speaks as 6 Sevrfpor 3eo ?, os ea-riv fKttvov 
 [3eoi5] Xoyov, Fragm. in Euseb. Praep. 
 Evang. 7. 13, also in Phil. Opp. ed. Mang. 
 
 II. p. 625. He calls him 6 7rpfo-/3irraros roC 
 3Woy Xoyo?, as also 6 Trpcaroyovos avrov Xo- 
 yoy , and 6 npuToyovos vlos , de Prof. ; 20. p. 
 466; de Somn. 1. 37. p. 597; de Agricult. 
 5 12. p. 195. b. Of him he also says : 
 Xdyoy Se tcrnv flKuiv 3fov, 6V ot> tri/fiTras 6 
 KoVp-oy e Sr/p-ioupyelro, de Monarch. 2. 5. p. 
 
436 
 
 \ovrpov 
 
 823. b; comp. Col. 1, 15. 16. 2 Cor. 4, 4. 
 Heb. 1, 2. 3. It would hence appear, that 
 in the Jewish philosophy of that age there 
 was much subtle speculation respecting this 
 divine Word, is 139 , Xoyos ; and therefore 
 the apostle John, in the very beginning of 
 his Gospel, sets out with declaring the real 
 and true Logos, in opposition to the unreal 
 and false hypostasis of a prevailing philoso 
 phy, perh. of the Gnostics ; John 1 , 1 ev 
 dpxfj TJV 6 \6yos, Kai 6 Xdyos TJV Trpos TOV SC 
 OP, KOI 3e6s TJV 6 Xoyos, comp. V. 14. See 
 genr. Liicke, Tholuck, Wetstein, on John 
 1,1. Bleek Hebraerbr. II. p. 41. Neander 
 Gesch. d. Apostol. Zeitalt. ed. 2, II. p. 503. 
 [Engl. II. p. 64.] Hagenbach s Dogmen- 
 gesch. I. $40 sq. Dorner Lehre von d. 
 Person Christi, 1845, Th. I. Dahne Gesch. 
 Darstell. der Jiid. Alexandr. Religionsphi- 
 los. I. p. 114 sq. Some here take 6 Xoyos 
 for 6 \fy6p.fvos the promised, i. q. 6 ep^o/xe- 
 vos ; others for 6 Xe ywj/, the teacher ; but " 
 both these interpretations are without any 
 philological support. 
 
 Xo y^T?, rjs, T], the point of a weapon, pr. 
 the triangular iron head of a lance or jave 
 lin Hdot. 7. 69. Xen. An. 4. 7. 16. In N. 
 T. a lance, spear, John 19, 34. Sept. for 
 nnh Neh. 4, 13. 16. So Plut. Pyrrh. 33 fin. 
 Xen. An. 2. 2. 9. 
 
 XotSopew, &>, f. Tjo-(o, (Xot Sopos,) to rail 
 at, to revile, c. ace. John 9, 28 eXoiSoprjcrav 
 avTov. Acts 23, 4. Pass. 1 Cor. 4, 12. 
 1 Pet. 2, 23. Sept. for y\*\ Deut. 33, 8. 
 Diod. Sic. 20. 33. Xen. An. ,3. 4. 49. 
 
 \ol$opia, as, f], (XoiSopew,) a railing, 
 reviling, 1 Tim. 5, 14. 1 Pet. 3, 9 bis, XoiSo- 
 plav carri XoiSoptas. Sept. for 3^ Prov. 
 20, 3. Luc. Tim. 55. Xen. Hi. 1. 14. 
 
 Xoi8op09, ou, 6, T), adj. railing, reviling ; 
 as Subst. a railer, reviler, 1 Cor. 5, 11. 6, 
 10. Sept. for THE Prov. 25, 25. Luc. 
 Fugit. 27. Plut. Mor. II. p. 15 ult. 
 XotyU.09, ou, 6, a pestilence, plague, Matt. 
 24, 7 et Luke 21, 11 Xoi/xol etrovrai. Sept. 
 for 15-T Jer. 27, 6. 28, 8. So Ml. V. H. 
 6. 10. Plato Conv. 201. d. Trop. of a ma 
 lignant and mischievous person, a pest; 
 Acts 24, 5 evpovTfs yap TOV avdpa TOVTOV 
 Xoi/xoV. Sept. for J>?$3 1 Sam. 2, 12 ; pi 
 Ps. 1, 1 ; StH Ez. 7, 21. So Dem. 794. 5 ; 
 also peslis Cic. in Catil. 2. 1. 
 
 X017TP9, i], 6v, (XeiVw,) left, remaining, 
 other, e. g. 
 
 1. Plur. Matt. 25, llm Xoiiral TrapSeW. 
 Acts 2, 37 rovs XotTTous aTTOo-rdXoDS. Rom. 
 1, 13. 2 Cor. 12, 13. 2 Pet. 3, 16. al. Ab- 
 
 sol. 01 XotTToi, the rest, the outers, Matt. 
 22, 6. Mark 16, 13. Luke 18, 9. Rom. 11, 
 7. Rev. 2, 24. Neut. TO. Xowra Mark 4, 19. 
 Luke 12, 26. 1 Cor. 11, 34. Sept. for "iZtj 
 Josh. 13, 27. 2 K. 1, 18 ; Itria Josh. 17, 2 ; 
 1X11J Ezra 4, 7. Luc. Vit. Auct. 27. Hdian. 
 4. 2 . 20. Plato Polit. 289. d ; rd X. Xen. 
 Ag. 2. 22. 
 
 2. Adverbially: a) Gen. TOV XOITTOU 
 sc. xpovov, pr. for the rest of the time, i. e. 
 in future, henceforth, Gal. 6, 17. Comp. 
 Buttm. 132. 5. b. Herm. ad Vig. p. 706. 
 So Hdian. 8. 4. 17. Xen. Cyr. 4. 4. 10. 
 b) Neut. ace. TO Xonrov, for the rest, as 
 to the rest ; spoken of time, henceforward, 
 henceforth, 1 Cor. 7, 29. Heb. 10, 13. (Plut. 
 Mor. II. p. 64. 4. Xen, An. 2. 2. 5.) Also 
 further, still further ; Matt. 26,45 et Mark 
 14. 41 KaSevSere TO \onrov KOI avcnra.vfcr Zf , 
 do ye sleep on still further and take your 
 rest ? (Jos. Ant. 2. 6. 7 01 p.ev ovv aXXot 
 TOV Ka3 avTovs tzTT^XXay/ieVoi dtovs, fi> TTJ 
 Trtpi TOV Bevia/iii <ppovTi8i TO \onrbv f]<rav. 
 ib. 18. 8. 3 pen. comp. Plato Phsedr. 256. c.) 
 Others in Matt, and Mark 1. c. render hence 
 forth, with or without irony; but against 
 the next clause, espec. in Mark. Spec. TO 
 XoiTj-oV in a transition, at the beginning of a 
 clause, as to the rest, furthermore, finally. 
 Eph. 6, 10. Phil. 3, 1. 4. 8. [1 Thess. 4, 
 1.] 2 Thess. 3, 1. c) Ace. \onr6v, 
 also 6 8e Xoin-oV 1 Cor. 4, 2, as to the rest, 
 further, furthermore, finally, 1 Cor. 1, 16. 
 4, 2. 2 Cor. 13, 11. 1 Thess. 4, 1. 2 Tim. 
 4, 8. Acts 27, 20. So Palaeph. 52. 7. Arr 
 Epict. 1. 24. 1. mV.H. 8. 14. + 
 
 Aov/cds, a, 6, Luke, contr. from Lat. 
 Lucanus, the writer of the Gospel of Luke 
 and of the Acts of the Apostles. He was 
 the companion of Paul in several of his 
 journeys and came with him to Rome ; 
 comp. Acts 16, 10. 40. 28, 16. He is pro 
 bably the same who is called 6 larpos Col. 
 4, 14; but must not be confounded with 
 A.OVKIOS Lucius in Acts 13, 1. 2 Tim. 4, 
 11. Philem. 24. Col. 4, 14. 
 
 AOVKIO<>) ov, 6, Lucius, the Latin name 
 of a teacher in the church at Antioch, a 
 Cyrenian, Acts 13, 1. Rom. 16, 21. 
 
 \ovrpov, oO, TO, (Xovw.) a bath, place 
 for bathing, Hdian. 3. 6. 19. Xen. Ath. 2. 
 10; water for bathing, washing, Hdian. 7. 
 2. 12. Diod. Sic. 1. 84. In N. T. a wash 
 ing, ablution, i. e. the act, spoken of bap- 
 tism Eph. 5, 26. Tit. 3, 5. So Act. Thorn. 
 5 25 ; pr. Sept. for HSnn Cant. 4, 2. Hdian. 
 1. 17. 19. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 59. 
 
\OVOi 
 
 437 
 
 Avcrrpa 
 
 \ovci)j f. tro), to bathe, to icash, but only 
 a person or the whole body ; not merely 
 the hands and face, which is expressed by 
 i/tVnu. So c. ace. Acts 9, 37 \ovcrai>Tfs 8e 
 aiiTr]v. Ace. impl. et 0770, Acts 16, 33 eXou- 
 <Ttv [avToiiy] UTTO Tuiv 7r\nyS>v. Pass. John 
 13, 10. 2 Pet. 2, 22. Heb. 10, 23 XeXou- 
 Hfvoi TO 0-oo/ia vdari KaSapw, where for the 
 ace. comp. Buttm. 131. 7. } 134. n. 2. 
 Sept. for yrn Lev. 8, 7. Ruth 3, 3. So 
 Luc. Luct. 11. Plato Phaed. 115. a. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 13. 3. Trop. to cleanse, to purify, 
 C. ace. et diro, Rev. 1, 5 \oixravri. r^ias OTTO 
 Ttav apapTitov KT\. Comp. Sept. and "f^l 
 Is. 1, 16. 
 
 Av88a, TJS, i], Lydda, a large village 
 situated ten or twelve miles southeast from 
 Joppa, Acts 9, 32. 35. 38. Jos. Ant. 20. 
 
 6. 2 AuSSa Ku>p.r], TrdXeoor TOV fityt^ovs OVK 
 arroSeovo-a. Heb. ^ Lod 1 Chr. 8, 12; 
 called also by the Greeks Diospolis. See 
 Reland Palaest. p. 877. Bibl. Res. in Pal. 
 TIL p. 49 sq. 
 
 AvBia, as, 17, Lydia, pr. n. of a woman 
 of Thyatira residing at Philippi, a dealer in 
 purple, Acts 16, 14. 40. Also the name of 
 a province on the western coast of Asia 
 Minor, the former kingdom of Croesus ; of 
 which the cities Thyatira, Sardis, and Phila 
 delphia, are mentioned in N. T. but not the 
 province itself. 
 
 Avicaovia, as, f), Lycaonia, a region in 
 the interior of Asia Minor, bounded N. by 
 Galatia, E. by Cappadocia and Cataonia, 
 S. by Cilicia and Isauria, and W. by Phry- 
 gia. It was adapted to pasturage ; and of 
 its cities, Iconium, Derbe, and Lystra are 
 mentioned in N. T. Acts 14, 6. The Ly- 
 caonians spoke a peculiar dialect (v. 11), 
 which Jablonsky supposes to have been 
 derived from the Assyrian, Opusc. ed. te 
 Water III. p. 3 sq. Others regard it as 
 corrupted from the Greek. 
 
 AvfcaoviCTTi, adv. Lycaonicc, in the Ly- 
 caonic dialect, Acts 14, 11 ; see in Avxaovia. 
 Comp. Buttm. $ 119. 15. c. 
 
 Av/cia, as, f], Lycia, a province on the 
 S. W. coast of Asia Minor, bounded E. by 
 Pamphilia, N. by Phrygia, W. by Caria, 
 and S. and S. W. by the Mediterranean. 
 Of its cities only Patara is mentioned in 
 N. T. Acts 27, 5. 
 
 \VKO$, ov, 6, a wolf, Matt. 10, 16. Luke 
 
 10, 3. John 10, 12 bis. Sept. for axt Is. 
 
 11, 6. (Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 14.) Trop." of a 
 rapacious and violent person, wolf-like, Matt. 
 
 7, 15. Acts 20, 29. So Act. Thorn. $ 25; 
 comp. Sept. and 2Xt Zeph. 3, 4. 
 
 Mid. depon. (XO/xa,) pr. 
 to stain, to disgrace, by .insult, indignity, 
 
 1. e. to insult, to treat with indignity, to mal 
 treat, c. ace. Hdot. 8. 28 ; c. dat Hdot. 9. 
 79. In N. T. to injure, to make havoc of, 
 to destroy, c. ace. Acts 3, 3 2a>Xoj Se e Xv- 
 /zaiVero Tty eKKXTjo-tW. Sept. for nn&5 Jer. 
 48, 18. Am. 1, 11.. So Diod. Sic. 1. 60. 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 3. 24. 
 
 Xt/rreco, >, f. rja-ca, (XvTn;,) to grieve, to 
 distress, to make sad ; Pass, or Mid. to be 
 grieved, to be sad, sorrowful. So c. ace. 
 2 Cor. 2, 2. 5 bis. 7, 8 bis. Pass, or Mid. 
 Matt. 14,9. 17, 23 eXv7r^3^o-av o-cpdfipa. 18, 
 31. 19, 22f 26, 22. 37. Mark 10, 22. 14, 
 
 19. John 16, 20. 21, 17. 2 Cor. 2, 2. 4. 6,. 
 10. 7, 9ter. 11. 1 Thess. 4, 13. 1 Pet. 1, 6. 
 Sept. for sn? Deut. 15, 10. Jqn. 4, 1 ; SXS 
 2 Sam. 19, 2. So Hdian. 6. 7. 7. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 2. 8. Spec, to aggrieve, to offend, 
 c. ace. Eph. 4, 30. Pass. Rom. 14, 15 ei Sm 
 /3p&>/nara 6 dSeX^ds crov XvTreirat. So ^El. 
 V. H. 12. 16. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 10. 
 
 XUTTT/, T)$, fj, grief, sorrow, John 16, 6. 
 
 20. 21. 22. Luke 22, 45. Rom. 9, 2. 2 Cor. 
 
 2, 1. 3. 7. 7, 10 bis. 9, 7. Phil. 2, 27 bis. 
 Heb. 12, 11. Sept. for p? Gen. 42, 38; 
 W7 Jonah 4, 1. So Hdian. 3. 15. 5. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 9. 8. Meton. cause of grief, grie 
 vance, trouble, 1 Pet. 2, 19. So Sept. 
 Prov. 31, 6. Xen. Lac. 7. 6. 
 
 Avadvias, O v, 6, Lysanias, pr. n. of a 
 tetrarch of Abilene, Luke 3, 1 ; see fully 
 
 Avcrias, ov, 6, Lysias, i. e. Claudius 
 Lysias, a Roman tribune, ^iXiap^of, com 
 manding in Jerusalem. Acts 23, 26. 24, 
 7. 22. 
 
 Xucr9, tcos, fj, (Xvu,) a loosening, dis 
 junction, pr. of or from any tie or con 
 straint. ; spoken in N. T. of the conjugal 
 tie, separation, divorce, 1 Cor. 7, 27. 
 Comp. X. TO>V Kaitiov Jos. Ant. 9. 4. 4. Pol. 
 15. 15. 4. Thuc. 2. 102. 
 
 Al/O"tTeX<U. o>, f. ijtrw, (XucrtTeXijf ; Xv&jj 
 TeXoj,) pr. to pay or make good expenses 
 incurred ; hence to make oneself useful, to 
 be useful, projitable, better ; so impers. 3 per?. 
 pres. Luke 17, 2 Xvo-JTeXeZ avrw . . . f) KT\, 
 i. e. it were better for him. Ecclus. 29, 1 1 . 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 12; genr. JEl V. H. 13. 
 39. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 15. 
 
 Avcrrpa, as, tj, also TCI Avorpa, gen. <av, 
 Lystra, a city in the southern part of Ly 
 caonia in Asia Minor ; so 17 A. Acts 14, 6. 
 21. 16, 1 ; TO A. Acts 14, 8. 16,2. 2 Tim. 
 3, 11. Pliny refers it to Lycaonia, 5. 32 
 
\vrpov 
 
 438 
 
 but Ptolemy assigns it to Isauria, 5. 4 ; 
 comp. in IKOVIOV. Peril, at the modern 
 Bin Bir Kilisseh ; see Hamilton s Res. in 
 AsiaM. II. p. 317-320. 
 
 \VTpov, ov, TO, (Xuo>,) toosing-money, a 
 ransom, the price paid for the release of any 
 one; trop. Matt. 20, 28 et Mark 10, 45 
 bovvai Tr)v TJ/VXTJV O.VTOV \vrpov dvrl TTO\- 
 \>v, to give his life a ransom for the deli 
 verance of many, i. e. from the conse 
 quences of sin and guilt. Sept. for f^NS 
 Lev. 25, 24. 51 ; ">> Ex. 30, 12. NunY. 
 35, 31. 32. Hdian. 4. 6. 12. Thuc. 6. 5. 
 Plato Rep. 393. d. 
 
 \VTpoco, , f. oxro), (\vrpov,) to ransom, 
 to let go free for a ransom, Diod. Sic. 19. 
 73 ult. Plato Thest. 165. e. In N. T. only 
 Mid. \vrp6ofj-ai, f. oxrojuai, to release by 
 payment of ransom, i. e. to ransom, to re 
 deem, to deliver; trop. c. ace. Luke 24, 21 
 XvrpoiJo-ScH rbv lo-parjX, i. e. from the power 
 of the Romans and genr. from their present 
 fallen state. Also with OTTO , Tit. 2, 14 
 X. rjfjLas OTTO TTao-ijs dvop.ias, i. e. from the 
 power and consequences of iniquity. Pass. 
 aor. 1 f\vTpuKr^r)v in Pass, sense, c. e * 
 1 Pet. 1,18. Sept. for iS Is. 44, 22 sq. also 
 for ) rnB c. a Ps. 119, 134; < Ps. 130, 
 8. 1 Mace. 4, 11 ; pr. Plut. Cimon 9 ult. 
 Diod. Sic. 5. 17. 
 
 eats, f/, (Xurpdo/iat,) a ran 
 soming, Plut. Arat. 11. In N. T. trap. 
 redemption, deliverance, from evils, Luke 1, 
 68. 2, 38 ; from sin and its consequences, 
 Heb. 9, 12. Sept. for Jibxa Lev. 25, 48 ; 
 nl1Q p s . Ill, 9. 130, 7. 
 
 /VtTp&)T?;9, ov, 6, (Xvrpoo/iat,) a redeem 
 er, deliverer, Acts 7, 35 TOVTOV 6 3e6s . . . 
 XvTpcoTTjv dn(o-Tfi\fv. Sept. for ^XS p s. 
 19. 15. 78, 35. Act. Thorn. J 10, 57. 
 
 \v^(vla, as, f], (\vxvos,) a light-stand, 
 lamp-stand, candlestick, a word of the later 
 Greek for the earlier TO \vxviov Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 313 sq. Matt. 5, 15 dXX eVl 
 TTJV \vxviav. Mark 4, 21. Luke 8, 16. 11, 
 33. Heb. 9, 2. Sept. for rrnha Ex. 25, 
 31. Lev. 24, 4. So Ecclus. 26, 17. Jos. 
 Ant. 3. 8. 2. Luc. Asin. 40. Symbolically 
 in the Apocalypse, of a Christian church 
 Rev. 1, 12. 13. 20 bis. 2, 1. 5 ; of a Chris 
 tian teacher or prophet Rev. 11, 4, in allu 
 sion to Zech. 4, 2 sq. where Sept. and 
 
 , ov, 6, a light, i. e. portable, as 
 a candle, lamp, lantern; Matt. 5, 15 ovde 
 Xvxvov. Mark 4, 21. Luke 8, 16. 
 
 11, 33. 36. 12, 35 to-Tcacav vpwv . . . ot 
 \vxvoi Kai6p.fvoi let your lamps stand burn 
 ing, i. e. be ye ready, watch. (Comp. Matt. 
 25, 7 sq.) Luke 15, 8. 2 Pet. 1, 19. Rev. 
 18, 23. 22, 5. So 6 \VXVQS TOV crco/iaror, 
 for the eye, Matt. 6, 22. Luke 11, 34. 
 Sept. for 13 Ex. 25, 37. Zech. 4, 2. (Arr. 
 Epict. 2. 17. 37. Diod. Sic. 3. 12 pen. 
 Plato Conv. 218. b.) Trop. of John the 
 Baptist as a distinguished teacher, John 5, 
 35 ; of the Messiah, TO dpviov, Rev. 21, 23. 
 Comp. Sept. and ^ Ps. 119, 105. Prov. 
 6,23. 
 
 j f. vo-<>>, 1 . to loose, to loosen, what 
 is fast, bound, i. q. to unbind, to untie ; spo 
 ken of a ligature or any thing fastened by it. 
 a) Genr. and c. ace. Mark 1, 7 Xvo-at TOV 
 ifiavra TO>V v7roo~T)p.dT<i>v avTOv. Luke 3, 16. 
 John 1, 27. Acts 7, 33. 13, 25. (Sept. for 
 ^"?J Ex. 3, 5. Hdian. 1. 11. 12 r^v favyv.) 
 Trop. TOV o~eo-p.ov TTJS y\uo-o-r)s, the impedi 
 ment, Mark 7, 35 ; TOS a>8~ivas TOV ZOVOTOV 
 Acts 2, 24, see in uSiv no. 2. (Comp. ./El. 
 H. An. 12. 5.) Here belongs also the phrase 
 o eav XVO-TJS eVi TTJS yris, eorat \t\vp.fvov 
 ev Tois ovpavols Matt. 16, 19 bis. 18, 18 
 bis, i. e. whatsoever ye shall loose on earth ; 
 see fully in 8ta> no. 1. b) Of animals 
 tied, e. g. TOV TrSiXov Mark 11, 2. 4. 5. 
 Luke 19, 30. 31. 33 bis. Absol. Matt. 
 21,2; OTTO TTJS <paTvr}s Luke 13, 15. Sept. 
 for nna Job 39, 5. So Xen. An. 3. 4. 35. 
 c) Of a person swathed in bandages, grave- 
 clothes, e. g. Lazarus, John 11, 44. 
 
 2. Of persons bound or confined, to let go 
 loose, to set free, c. ace. e. g. prisoners, 
 Acts 22, 30 fKvcrev OVTOV OTTO T<av Secr/iow. 
 24, 26. Rev. 9, 14. 15. 20, 3. 7 eVc TTJS (pv- 
 XOKTJS. Trop. Luke 13, 16. 1 Cor. 7, 27 
 \f\vo~ai OTTO yvvaiKos, i. e. art thou free from 
 a wife, in antith. with 8e Seo-ai. Sept. for 
 "nnn p s . 105, 20. 146, 7. Plut. M. An 
 ton. 15. Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 12; Seoyiwy 
 Plato Rep. 360. c. 
 
 3. to loosen, to dissolve, i. e. to sever, 
 to break, to break up; c. ace. e. g. roy 
 o-QpaylSas Rev. 5, 2. 5. Acts 27, 41 17 Se 
 
 f Xvfro, but the stern was broken up, 
 went to pieces, from the violence of the 
 waves. (Plut. Pyrrh. 6 TTJV eVioroXjyi/. Id. 
 Dion 53 TOV Tafpov.) Trop. of an assembly, 
 
 r)v a~vvaya>yrjv Acts 13, 43. So Diod. Sic. 
 19. 25 TTJV fKK\T)o-iav. Horn. II. 1. 305 dyo- 
 
 fjv. Hence 
 
 4. Of any thing built up, an edifice, to 
 break down, to demolish, to destroy, c. ace. 
 John 2, 19 Xuo-are TOV vaov TOVTOV. Eph. 
 2, 14. Trop. 1 John 3, 8. Also of the world 
 
439 
 
 as to be destroyed by fire, q. d. to dissolve, 
 to melt, 2 Pet. 3, 10. 11. 12. So Esdr. 1, 
 5 A. TU Tt ixn lfpova-. Horn. II. 2. 118. ib. 16. 
 100. Trop. of a law, institution, to break, 
 i. e. a) to make void, to do away ; John 
 10 35 ov SvVarcu Av3Jji/ai TJ ypa(pfj. Matt. 5, 
 19. So Dem. 31. 12. b) to transgress, to 
 violate, John 7, 23 Iva (JLTJ \v%fj 6 vop.os M. 
 5, 18 TO (rdfijBarov. So Thuc. 6. 14 TOVS 
 
 s. Xen. An. 3. 2. 10 TCIS <T7roj>bas KOI 
 
 TOVS OpKOVS. 
 
 AWLS, i8os, f], Lois, pr. n. of a Christian 
 matron, the grandmother of Timothy, 2 Tim. 
 1, 5. 
 
 ACOT, 6, indec. Lot, Heb. Bib (veil), pr. 
 n. of Abraham s nephew, Luke 17, 28. 29. 
 32. 2 Pet. 2, 7. See Gen. 11, 31. 13, 5 
 sq. 14, 12 sq. 19, 1 sq. 
 
 M. 
 
 ij 6, indec. Maaih, pr. n. of an 
 ancestor of Jesus, Luke 3, 26. 
 
 MayaSdv, ^, indec. Magadan, Matt. 
 15, 39 Lachm. for Rec. MaySoAd q. v. 
 
 MaySaXa, 77, indec. Magdala, Heb. 
 iWB (tower) Migrffrf, Chald. xb^aa , a 
 place on the western shore of the lake of 
 Gennesareth, about three miles north of Ti 
 berias ; now a small village called Mejdel ; 
 see Biblical Res. in Pal. III. p. 298. Comp. 
 Josh. 19, 38. Matt. 15, 39. Mark 8, 10. 
 
 Mayoa\.r/vrj, f/s, fj, Magdalene, i. e. of 
 Magdala, a fern, appellative, spoken of one 
 of the women called Mary, i. e. Mary of 
 Magdala, Matt. 27, 56. 61. 28, 1. Mark 
 15, 40. 47. 16, 1. 9. Luke 8, 2. 24, 10. 
 John 19, 25. 20, 1. 18. Comp. in Mapt a 
 no. 3. 
 
 MayeScbv, indec. pr. n. Magedo, Me- 
 giddo; so Matthaei Rev. 16, 16. for Rec. 
 *App.aye8o a>v q. V. 
 
 fiayeia, as, fj, (pdyos,) magic; Plur. 
 pay flat, magic arts, sorceries, Acts 8, 11. 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 13. 3. Plut. de Superst. 12. 
 Plato Ale. 122. a. 
 
 /jLayevo), f. evo-o>, (/zdyos.) to practise 
 magic, sorcery, absol. Acts 8, 9. Luc. Asin. 
 4. Plut. Numa 15 med. 
 
 MdyoSy on, 6, Magus, Plur. Mdyoi, 
 Magi, the name for priests and wise men 
 among the Medes, Persians, and Babylon 
 ians, pr. great, powerful, Heb. Jra ; and from 
 the same stem comes Gr. p.tyas, Lat. magis, 
 magnus. Comp. Jer. 39, 3. Heb. Lex. art. 
 aa. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 51. ib. 7. 5. 57. 
 JE\. V. H. 2. 17. Hdian. 4. 12. 6, 8. Cic. 
 de Divinat. 1. 23. Wetstein N. T. I. p. 
 240. Their learning was connected with 
 astrology and enchantment, whence Sept. 
 pdyos for Chald. 5)^"? enchanter, magician, 
 Dan. 1,20. 2,2.27. 5,7; i. q. Chald. D^sn 
 Sept. o-o<j>6s Dan. 2, 12. 18. 24. 27. 5, 7. 8 ; 
 comp. 5, 11. 12. InN. T. 
 
 1. Plur. the Magi, wise men, from the 
 East, i. e. from Persia or Arabia, who came 
 to salute the new-born Messiah, Matt. 2, 1. 
 7. 16 bis. 
 
 2. a magician, sorcerer, diviner, Acts 13, 
 6. 8. Sept. for C]^X as above. Hdian. 4. 
 12. 6, 8. ^Eschin. 73. 13 TOIOVTOS fidyos 
 
 Maycoy, 6, indec. Magog, Heb. jn;ra , 
 pr. n. of a son of Japhet Gen. 10, 2 ; but in 
 N. T. put symbolically for remote heathen 
 nations ; see fully in Twy. Rev. 20, 8. 
 
 MaStdv, MaStdfj,, 6, indec. Madian, 
 Heb. "J^a Midian, pr. n. of an Arabian 
 tribe descended from Abraham by Keturah, 
 Acts 7, 29; comp. Gen. 25, 2. They 
 would seem to have dwelt in the region 
 extending from the eastern shore of the 
 Gulf of Akabah, (where Josephus and the 
 Arabian geographers place a city Madyan) 
 to the borders of Moab on the one side, and 
 to the vicinity of Sinai on the other. They 
 were nomadic in their habits ; and bands 
 of them moved about to different places; 
 comp. Ex. 3, 1. 18, 5. Num. c. 31. Judg. 
 c. 6-8. Jos. Ant. 2. 11. 1. See Heb. Lex. 
 art. f*. 
 
 ov, 6, (kindr. p.da, /idcro-o),) the 
 breast, pap, Rev. 1, 13 Lachm. for paa-ros 
 Rec. Horn. II. 5. 393. Eurip. Bacch. 700. 
 Luc. Tragop. 110. 
 
 fJicferjTeva), f. evcra, (/iaST/r^y,) to disci 
 ple, i. e. 
 
 1. Intrans. to be the disciple of any one, 
 C. dat. Matt. 27, 57 KOI UVTOS e/xaSijieuo-f 
 TW Irjvov. Plut. X. Orator. Vh. 1 init. Ib. 
 4. p. 140, tfj.a SrjTfvcrf 8 airoj Kal Q(6no^.rros- 
 
 2. Trans, to train as a disciple, to teach, 
 to instruct, c. ace. Acts 14, 21 ^a^Tfvcrav- 
 res tKavovs. Matt. 28, 19. Pass. Matt. 13, 
 52. Comp. 3pia/^3ei)cD no. 2. 
 
 fJLO& fJTtfi, ov, 6, (/iaj/3dj/ci),) a disciple, 
 scholar, follower of a teacher, genr. Matt 
 
440 
 
 10, 24; of the Pharisees Matt. 22, 16: of 
 John the Baptist Matt. 9, 14. Mark 2, 18. 
 Luke 5, 33. John 3, 25 ; of Jesus Matt. 
 5, 1. Mark 8, 27. Luke 8, 9. John 3, 22. 
 al. saepiss. Spec, the twelve apostles, Matt. 
 10, 1. 11, 1. 20, 17. Luke 9, 1. Plur. 
 emphat. for true disciples, John 13, 35. 15, 
 8. After Christ s death the term disciple 
 takes the broader sense of follower, believer, 
 
 1. q. Christian, Acts 6, 1. 2. 11, 26. Jos. 
 Ant. 61 5. 4. Luc. Tim. 51. Dem. 928. 7. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 27. + 
 
 HcferjTplct) as, TJ, (p.a ^rjTTjS; ) a female 
 disciple, i. e. a female Christian, Acts 9, 36. 
 Diod. Sic. 2. 52. Diog. Laert. Speus. 4. 
 
 2. Moeris, p.a%r)Tpis, dmKws naSrjTpia, eX- 
 
 McfeovaaXa, 6, indec. Mathusala, 
 Heb. nbttiino (dart-man) Methuselah, the 
 oldest of the patriarchs, having lived 969 
 years ; see Gen. 5, 21 sq. Luke 3, 37. 
 
 Maivdv, 6, indec. Mainan, pr. n. of an 
 ancestor of Jesus, Luke 3, 31. 
 
 paivofjiCH,, f. fj.avovfj.ai, Mid. depon. to be 
 mad, to rave, spoken of persons who so 
 speak and act as to seem out of their senses, 
 absol. John 10, 20. Acts 12, 15. 26, 24. 
 25. 1 Cor. 14, 23. Sept. Jer. 29, 26. 
 Hdian. 7. 8. 9. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 11. 
 
 pafcaptfo, f. lo-oj, (paKap,) Att. fut. tw, 
 Buttm. J 95. 9 ; to pronounce happy, to call 
 Ikssed, c. ace. of pers. Luke 1, 48. James 
 5, 11. Sept. for 1 Gen. 30, 13. Is. 3, 
 11. Diod. Sic. 13. 58. Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 9. 
 
 f, a, ov, (collateral form of 
 poet. p.aKap, ) happy, blessed, e. g. of God 
 1 Tim. 1, 11. 6, 15. Genr. Matt. 5, 3 sq. 
 Luke 1, 45. 6, 20 sq. Rom. 4, 7. al. saep. 
 With p.5X\ov, Acts 20, 35 paKapiov eori 
 p.a\\ov, more blessed is it. Compar. paica- 
 piuTepos, happier, 1 Cor. 7, 40. Sept. 
 for "nttiit Ps. 1, 1. Deut. 33, 29. Ceb. 
 Tab. 11. Hdian. 2. 4. 17. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 
 14. + 
 
 fJ,aKa,pia"fJiO$, ov, o, (/iaKapi fu,) a pro- 
 nouncing happy, blessedness ; hence \eyeiv 
 TOV p.aKapio-p.6v TWOS, i. q. p.aKapifi,v, Rom. 
 4, 6. 9. Gal. 4, 15 ris ovv rjv 6 p.. vp.>v, how 
 ye then called yourselves blessed. Plut. So 
 lon 27 fin. Plato Rep. 591. d. On nouns 
 ending in o-p.os, see Lob. ad Phr. p. 511. 
 
 Ma/ce&ovta, as, TJ, Macedonia, a country 
 lying north of Greece proper, joining S. on 
 Thessaly and Epirus ; E. on Thrace and 
 the ^Egean ; W. on the Adriatic and Illy- 
 ricum ; and N. on Dardania and Mossia. 
 It was the original kingdom of Philip and 
 
 Alexander ; and was afterwards subdued by 
 the Romans under P. ^Emilius, who divi 
 ded the country into four districts ; comp. 
 in Qfo-o-a\oviKr), and Liv. 45. 29. The 
 Romans afterwards divided the whole of 
 Greece into two great later provinces, Ma 
 cedonia and Achaia; see in A%aia. Oi 
 the cities of Macedonia proper, there are 
 mentioned in N. T. Amphipolis, Apollonia, 
 Berea, Philippi, and Thessalonica. Acts 
 16, 9. 10. 12. 18, 5. 19, 21. 22. 20, 1. 3. 
 Rom. 15, 26. 1 Cor. 16, 5 bis. 2 Cor. 1, 
 16 bis. 2, 13. 7, 5. 8, 1. 11, 9. Phil. 4, 
 15. 1 Thess. 1, 7. 8. 4, 10. 1 Tim. 1, 3. 
 
 Ma/ceocov, 6vos, 6, a Macedonian, Acts 
 16,9. 19,29. 27,2. 2 Cor. 9, 2. 4. 
 
 fAa/ceXXov, ov, TO, Lat. maceltum. i. e. 
 a meat-market, shambles, where also all 
 kinds of provisions were exposed for sale, 
 1 Cor. 10, 25. Luc. Diss. c. Hes. 7. Plut. 
 Quaest. Rom. 54. See Adam s Rom. Ant. 
 p. 569. Diet, of Antt. art. Macellum. 
 
 paKpdv, adv. (paKpos,) strictly for \M- 
 Kpav 686v, a long way, Buttm. 115. 4 ; i. e. 
 as in Engl. a great way, far, far off. Luke 
 15, 20 p,aKpav aTre^ovros. Acts 22, 21. 
 So c. OTTO TWOS, Matt. 8, 30 TJV 8f ua<pav 
 an- avT&v. Mark 12, 34. Luke 7, 6. John 
 21, 8. Acts 17, 27. Sept. for pirn Josh. 
 9, 22. Judg. 18, 7. So Pol. 3. 45. 2. Xen. 
 An. 3. 4. 42. With the art. ot paicpdv, 
 those far off, those remote from God, i. e. the 
 Gentiles as opp. ot tyyvs the Jews, Eph. 2, 
 13. 17; comp. Is. 57, 19 where Sept. and 
 pIJTl ; see in eyyvs no. 1. So ot els p.a.Kpdv 
 Acts 2, 39, comp. in els no. 4. See Buttm. 
 125. 6. 
 
 , adv. (p.aKp6s,~) from far, 
 afar off ; Mark 8, 3 p.aKpo%(v TJKOVO-IV. 11, 
 13. Luke 18, 13. 22, 54. 23, 49. Sept. 
 for pinna Gen. 22, 4. 37, 17. 2 K. 2, 7. 
 So Philo quod somn. a Deo mitt. p. 575. b. 
 JEl H. An. 2. 15. ib. 15. 12. The form be 
 longs to the later Greek, Lob. ad Phr. p. 93. 
 Still less pure is the synon. airb pa- 
 ev, from far, afar off, Matt. 26, 58 
 at/r< OTTO p-aKpo^fv (comp. Luke 
 22, 54). Matt . 27, 55. Mark 5, 6. 14, 54. 
 15, 40. Luke 16, 23. Rev. 18, 10. 15. 
 17. Sept. for pin ig 2 K. 19, 25 ; pn^ 
 Ps. 138, 6. So Polemo Physiogn. l . 6. 
 Greg. Naz. Or. 25. p. 484. c. See Lob. ad 
 Phr. p. 46 ult. Comp. the like use of Heb. 
 "JB , Heb. Lex. art. "JO no. 3. h. 
 
 fiaKpo^fVfjieti), w, f. qo-co, (p-aKpos, 3t/- 
 //o ?,) pr. to be long-minded, i. e. slow to 
 anger, passion, excitement. Hence 
 
441 
 
 1 . to be long-suffering, forbearing, to bear 
 patiently; absol. 1 Cor. 13, 4 17 aydirr) pa- 
 *po3v/nel. With els riva 2 Pet. 3, 9 ; iiri 
 TIVI, Luke 18, 7 p.aKpo^vp.S>v fir avrois, i. 6. 
 though he bear long with them, is slow to 
 avenge them (comp. Ecclus. 32 or 35, 18). 
 Matt. 18, 26. 29; irpos nva 1 Thess. 5, 
 14. Sept. for D-iBX Tpxn p r0 v. 19, 11. 
 So c. t-ri nvi Ecclus. isi il. 32 [35], 18 ; 
 aosol. 2 Mace. 6, 14. Plut. de Gen. Socrat. 
 23 oen. 
 
 2. to wait patiently, to be patient, absol. 
 Heb. 6, 15 ovTO) p.aKpo%vp.r](ras eVe ru^e TTJS 
 frrayyeXias James 5, 7. 8 ; c. eVi TIVI James 
 
 5, 7. Artemid. 4. 12 Trdira p-aKpoZvp-flv Kf- 
 
 p,T) KVoa-!TOv8flv, 
 
 as, i], (/LiaKpoSup-eco,) lon 
 ganimity, slowness to anger, passion, excite 
 ment, i. e. long-suffering, forbearance, patient 
 endurance ; genr. Rom. 2, 4 TTJS p.aKpo3u- 
 p,ias TOV Sfov Karacppovtls , 9, 22. 2 Cor. 6, 
 
 6. Gal. 5, 22. Eph. 4, 2. Col. 3, 12. 1 Tim. 
 1, 16. 2 Tim. 3, 10. 4, 2. 1 Pet. 3, 20. 
 2 Pet. 3, 15. Sept. and n^SX 7^ Prov. 
 25, 15. Jer. 15, 15. So Plut. Lucull. 33 
 apfTTjv p,fv (nfdfiKWTO KOI fUUtpt/SSvfUcni fjye- 
 p.6vos dya3ov. Menand. p. 203. Spec, pa 
 tient endurance of evil, patience, Col. 1, 11. 
 Heb. 6, 12. James 5, 10. So Sept. Is. 57, 15. 
 
 (jLaKpcfevpCDS, adv. (/uzKpo3v/xco,) pa 
 tiently, i. e. with indulgence, with clemency, 
 Acts 26, 3. 
 
 /Lia/f/309, a, 6v, (paws, P.TJKOS,) long, ex 
 tended in space or time. 
 
 1. Of space, e. g. from one point to ano- 
 rner ; hence far, far distant; Luke 15, 13 
 et 19, 12 els x * ) P av p- aK P av - Sept. 68os 
 /wKpd for pirna ^ Prov. 7, 19. So 
 Hdian. 6. 7. 10. Xen! Cyr. 5. 5. 42. Ace. 
 paicpdv as Adv. see in its order. 
 
 2. Of time, e. g. pwcpw XP V< ? Hdian. 5. 
 3. 5. In N. T. only Neut. Plur. p,aKpd as 
 Adv. long, e. g. p.aKpa Trpoo-ev^o/iei/oi pray 
 ing long, making long prayers, Matt. 23, 14 
 [13]. Mark 12, 40. Luke 20, 47. Jos. Ant. 
 6. 11. 10. Luc. Tim. 38. Plato Prot. 334. d. 
 
 fj,afcpoxp6vio$, on, 6, T], adj. 
 \povos,} pr. long-timed, i. e. long-lived ; 
 Eph. 6, 3 Iva p.. ytvrj, quoted from Ex. 20, 
 12 et Deut. 5, 16 where Sept. for 
 
 fJUl\aKia. as, T), (/-loXaKo?,) softness, trop. 
 for timidity Pol. 3. 79. 4 ; delicacy, effemi 
 nacy, Luc. D. Deor. 10. 6, 8. Plato Rep. 
 410. d. In N. T. weakness, disease, e. g. 
 of body Matt. 4, 23 "SepaTrfixav iraa-av pa\a- 
 
 Kiav. 9, 35. 10, 1. Sept. for "bn Deut. 7, 
 
 15. 2Chr. 16, 12. Comp. p.aXaia ea-3ai to 
 be weakly, sickly, ,1. V. H. 3. 19 ; p.oAo- 
 K.US ex flv Luc. D. Deor. 9. 1. 
 
 jiakaKOS, a, 6v, soft, pr. to the touch ; 
 spoken of raiment as made of soft materials, 
 of fine texture, ip,di-ia p.a\aK.d Matt. 11,8 bis. 
 Luke 7, 25. So Luc. Saturn. 1 eo-S^ra? 
 fvavStls Kal naXaxds. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 30. 
 Trop. effeminate, spoken of a catamite, 
 scortum virile, 1 Cor. 6, 9. So Dion. Hal. 
 Ant. 7. 2. Plut. de capiend. ex hum. util. 4. 
 
 MaXe\erj\ : 6, indec. Maleleel, Heb. 
 ^^2 (praise of God) Mahalaleel, pr. n. 
 of the son of Cainan, Luke 3, 37 ; comp. 
 Gen. 5, 12. 
 
 [AaXiaTa, adv. superl. (p-dXa.) most, 
 most of all, especially. Acts 20, 38 oSui d>- 
 p.fvoi p,d\t(TTa eVi rw Xdya) KT\. 25, 26. 26, 
 3. Gal. 6, 10. Phil. 4, 22. 1 Tim. 4, 10. 5, 
 8. 17. 2 Tim. 4, 13. Tit. 1, 10. Philem. 16. 
 2 Pet. 2, 10. Luc. Somn. 18. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 4. 4. 
 
 /AoXXov, adv. comparat. (/idXa.) more, 
 rather, Lat. potius ; in various connections. 
 
 1. Genr. 1 Cor. 14, 1 ^XoCre ra Trvevpa- 
 8e jXoih-e] Iva KT\. v. 5. 
 
 2 Cor. 5, 8; before a gen. 1 Cor. 14, 18 
 TTuvruiv vp.a>i> fjiaXXov yXcucrcraiy XaXcov. (Xen. 
 An. 3. 12. 1.) Also TroXXw /xaXXov. 
 much more, Matt. 6, 30. Mark 10, 48. Luke 
 
 18, 39. Rom. 5, 9. 10. 15. 17. 1 Cor. 12, 
 22. 2 Cor. 3, 9. 11. Phil. 2, 12. Heb. 12,9. 
 25; 7Tocra> p-aXXov, how much more, Matt. 
 7, 11. 10 . 25. Luke 11,13. 12, 24.28. 
 Rom. 11, 12. 24. Philem. 16. Heb. 9, 14; 
 TocrovTw p.. so much the more Heb. 10, 25 ; 
 p.aXXoi> <al p.a\\ov, more and more, 
 Phil. 1, 9 ere p.. Kal p.. TTfpiara-fvr]. (Diog. 
 Laert. 9. 10. 2 ; ert p.. Dion. Hal. Ant. 9. 6.) 
 With TJ or fjnip, i. e. p.a\\ov rj, more than, 
 rather than, Matt. 18, 13 x a P et >7r a ^ r ? 
 p.aX\ov TI eVt rols KT\. John 3, 19. Acts 4, 
 
 19. 5,29. 27,11. 1 Tim. 1,4. 2 Tim. 3,4; 
 p.a\\ov rlmp John 12, 43. (Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 
 17; comp. Herm. ad Vig. p. 719.) So 
 ellipt. where 77 and its verb are to be sup 
 plied in thought, e. g. Philem. 9 /zaXXov 
 irapaKa\> sc. rj eVrtTacrcra). 2 Cor. 2, 7 wore 
 p.a\\ov i/p-as ^apio-atrSai sc. TJ (iriTip.qv. 
 Intens. the more, the rather, much more. 
 Matt. 27, 24 dXXa p,a\\oi> 2opv/3oy yivtrai, 
 i. q. p.aXXoi> Sopv^flrat, comp. v. 23, i. e. 
 but that there was the more a tumult. Mark 
 14, 31 comp. v. 29. Luke 5, 15. John 5, 18 
 Sid TOVTO ovv p.a\\ov ftfrovv avruv aTiOKTfi- 
 vai, comp. v. 16. John 19, 8. Acts 5, 14. 
 9, 22. 22, 2 comp. 21, 40. 2 Cor. 7, 7. 12, 
 9. Phil. 1,12. 3,4. 1 Thess. 4, 1. 10. 2 Pet. 
 
442 
 
 fjiavva 
 
 I, 10. (Thuc. 5. 44.) So ov /xaXXoi/ in 
 interrogat. 1 Cor. 9, 12. 2 Cor. 3, 8 comp. 
 v. 7. 
 
 2. Joined with a word in the positive > 
 fj.a\\ov forms a periphrase for the compara 
 tive, like Engl. more; Matth. $458. So 
 before rj, Acts 20, 35 paKapiov C CTTI /naXXov 
 8i86vai, rj Xa/i/Sdj/eti/, it is more blessed. 1 Cor. 
 9, 15. Gal. 4, 27; before , Mark 9, 42 
 KaXoV f&Tiv avTia p.a\\ov, et KT\. So C. gen. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 30. 
 
 3. Emphat. with another comparative, ei 
 ther in form or sense ; comp. Matth. 1. c. 
 Winer $36. 3. n. 1. Mark 7, 36 p.a\\ov 
 TTfpio-o-oTfpov. 2 Cor. 7, 13. Phil. 1, 23 
 TroXXco yap fjiu\\ov Kpel<T(rov. (Hdot. 1. 31, 
 32. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 12 ult.) Also with 
 verbs of comparison, Matt. 6, 26 ofy v^els 
 fiaXXov 8ia(pfpeTf avTcov ; Heb. 11, 25 fj,a\- 
 \ov e\6fj.vos. So fj.. eXeo-3at Dem. 946. 7. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 4. 
 
 4. After a negative clause or prohibition 
 expr. or impl. rather ; so 8e pa\\ov,but 
 rather, Matt. 10, 6 nopei/faZe 8e p-aXXov 
 *TX . v. 28. 25, 9. Mark 5,26. Luke 10,20. 
 Eph. 4, 28. Heb. 12, 13. (Thuc. 1. 123.) 
 dXXa /xdXXov, hut rather, Rom. 14, 13- 
 fJ,r)K(Ti. ovv dXX^Xoiij ttjpiv&ptv dXXa TOVTO 
 KplvaTe p,a\\ov. Eph. 5, 4. 1 Tim. 6, 2. 
 1 Cor. 7, 2 1 pf) croi yueXeVai dXX el Kal . . . 
 fiaXXov xprjo-ai. Impl. Mark 15, 11 tva [fj,fj 
 TOV Iijo~ovv dXXci] ^taXXov TOV B. aTroXvcny 
 ai/Tolf, comp. v. 9. So ov^i fiaXXov in 
 interrog. 1 Cor. 5, 2. 6, 7 bis. 
 
 5. Intens. /j.a\\ov 8e before an anti 
 thetic clause, or rather, yea more ; Rom. 8, 
 34 X/j. 6 cnro^avaiv ; fj,a\\ov 8e KOL eyep^els ; 
 Gal. 4, 9. Eph. 5, 11. ^El. V. H. 2. 13. 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 49. 
 
 ov, 6, Makhus, Heb. Ta 
 (counsellor) Malluch, pr. n. of a servant, 
 John 18, 10. 
 
 77?, ^, a grandmother, 2 Tim. 1, 
 5. Jos. Ant. 10. 11. 2. Hdian. 5. 3. 7. 
 Plut. Agis 19 fin. A word of the later 
 Greek instead of the earlier TTJ^TJ. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 133 sq. 
 
 /uia/Jb(i)vd?, fjiafA/jiwvas, a, 6, mammon, 
 i. e. wealth, riches, Chald. yiaa, al aa, 
 ( r - T? 5 *;) pr- that in which one trusts, see 
 Buxt. Lex. Chald. 1217 sq, So Luke 16, 
 9. 11 ; and personified like Gr. TrXovroy, 
 Matt. 6, 24. Luke 16, 13. Suid. ^a/ia>j/ay 
 TT\OVTOS yrfivos, xpvcros 1 . 
 
 Mavaijv, 6, indec. Manaen, pr. n. of a 
 Christian teacher at Antioch, Acts 13, 1. 
 
 f). 6, ace. ij, Manasses, Heb. 
 (making forgreO Manasseh, or, n. 
 
 aor. 2 ffj.a%ov, 
 
 1. The son of Joseph, adopted by Jacob, 
 Rev. 7, 6. 
 
 2. A king of Judah, son of Hezekiah, r. 
 699-644 B. C. noted for his idolatry and 
 cruelty, Matt. 1, 10 bis. See 2 K. c. 21. 
 2 Chr. c. 33. 
 
 /J,dV3iava>, f. 
 to learn. 
 
 1. Genr. by inquiry from others, or from 
 teaching, study, observation, to learn, to be 
 taught; absol. Matt. 9, 13 7ropev3eVr 8e 
 ^aSere, TI ecm KT\. John 6, 45. 1 Cor. 14, 
 31. 1 Tim. 2, 11. 2 Tim. 3, 7; with drro 
 TLVOS Matt. 11, 29. With ace. of thing, 
 Rom. 16, 17 TJV vp-fls ffj.a%ere. 1 Cor. 14, 
 35. Phil. 4, 9. 2 Tim. 3, 14 ; with d TIVOS 
 Matt. 24, 32 et Mark 13, 28. 1 Cor. 4, 6 
 tva ev fj/j.lv /idSere TO p.r] virfp KT\. in us, 
 i. e. by our example. Also with ace. impl. 
 John 7, 15 ; c. OTTO TIVOS Col. 1,7; irapa 
 TIVOS 2 Tim. 3, 14. With ace. of person, 
 to learn any one, i. e. his doctrines, precepts, 
 Eph. 4, 20. Sept. c. ace. for lab p s . 119, 
 71. 73. Deut. 5, 1. So absol. Hdian. 8. 7. 
 8 ; c. inf. JEl V. H. 3. 32 ; c. ace. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 9. 3 ; TIVOS CEc. 13. 6 ; jrapd 
 TIVOS Cyr. 2. 2. 6. Spec, to learn by infor 
 mation, to be informed, c. STI Acts 23, 27 ; 
 OTTO TIVOS Gal. 3, 2. (jEl. V. H. 2. 42. Xen. 
 Cyr. 6. 1. 31.) Also to understand, to com- 
 prehend, Rev. 14,3. So Luc. D. Mort. 16.4. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 10. 
 
 2. 1o learn by experience, i. q. to do habit 
 ually, to be wont, with an inf. expr. or impl. 
 Phil. 4, 1 1 e yw yap epcftov . . . avrapKTfs 
 elvai. 1 Tim. 5, 4. 13. Tit. 3, 14 ; c. ace. 
 He*. 5, 8 i=p.a%(v TIJV vjraKorjv. Xen. An. 
 3. 2. 25. 
 
 fAavid) as, fj, (/icuVo/ia*,) mania, mad 
 ness, Acts 26, 24. Wisd. 5, 4. Hdian. 1. 
 15. 17. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 50. 
 
 ftavva, TO, indec. manna, the miraculous 
 food of the Israelites in the desert, Heb. "ja , 
 Sept. TO pdv Lev. 16, 31. 35; TO pdwa 
 Num. 11, 6. Josephus fj pawa Ant. 5. 1. 4. 
 In N. T. John 6, 31. 49. 58. Heb. 9, 4 ; 
 symbolically Rev. 2, 17 see in KOVTTTOO. 
 Comp. Ex. 16, 31 sq. Jos. Ant. 3. L 5. Jose- 
 jhus relates that in his day manna was still 
 found around Mount Sinai, Ant. 3. 1. 6; 
 and the same fact has also been abundantly 
 ascertained by modern travellers. The mo 
 dern manna, manna Arabica, is a sweet 
 resin similar to honey, which in the desert 
 of Sinai and some other oriental countries, 
 sxudes in summer chiefly from the leaves 
 of the tamarisk or Turfa, Tamarix gallica 
 mannifera. This the Arabs collect, and 
 
443 
 
 regard it as the greatest dainty which their 
 country affords. But the quantity is tri 
 fling, not amounting to more than five or 
 six hundred pounds each year. It has been 
 ascertained within the present century, first 
 by English naturalists and more fully by 
 Ehrenberg, that the manna flows out from 
 the leaf in consequence of the puncture of 
 an insect nearly allied to the cimex genus, 
 called coccus manniparus ; see Ehrenb. 
 Symbol. Phys. Berl. 1829. But the charac 
 teristics of the modern manna correspond 
 in scarcely a single particular with the an 
 cient manna as described in the Old Testa 
 ment ; nor is it a possible supposition, that 
 there could have been a supply of it suffi 
 cient for a host like that of Israel, amount 
 ing to at least two millions of persons. See 
 genr. Bibl. Res. in Palest. I. p. 170, 550. 
 Niebuhr s Arabien p. 145. Burckhardt s 
 Trav. in Syr. p. 599 sq. Heb. Lex. art. 1. 
 /jLavrevopat,, f. eva-opai, Mid. depon. 
 (p.dvris, p.aivop.ai,) to utter responses as from 
 an oracle, to divine, to foretell, Acts 16, 16. 
 Sept. for nO Deut. 18, 10. 1 Sarn. 28, 8. 
 jEI. V. H/2. 17. Luc. D. Deor. 1. 2. 
 Plato Tirn. 72. b. 
 
 fj,apalvo), f. avS>, pr. to put out, to 
 quench fire, Horn. H. Merc. 140. Pass, to 
 go out, to die away, of fire, Horn. II. 9. 212. 
 Hence to make pine away, to dry up, cause 
 to wither, Sept. for tisn Job 1 5, 30. Meleag. 
 104, in Anthol. Gr. I. p. 30. Pass, to wither, 
 to fade away, pr. of roses Wisd. 2, 8 ; of the 
 body, person, Jos. B. J. 6. 5. 1. In N. T. 
 Pass. trop. of a person in prosperity, to fade 
 away, e. g. 6 TrXoucrtoj James 1, 11. So 
 Anthol. Gr. IV. p. 35. Plut. Marcell. 24 init. 
 rfi p(ap.T} p,apaivop.evrj. 
 
 Mapav cfod, Maran-atha, Aramaean 
 MriX "pa , i- <! xvpios epx^rai, the Lord 
 cometh to judgment, 1 Cor. 16, 22. Buxt. 
 Lex. Chald. 1248. 
 
 ov, 6, (pdpyapos,) a pearl, 
 Matt. 13, 45. 46 tva iroXvrtfJiov papya- 
 pirrjv. 1 Tim. 2, 9. Rev. 17, 4. 18, 12. 16. 
 21,21 bis. Trop. Matt. 7, 6 comp. in KVUV. 
 ./El. H. An. 10. 13 6 eV rats yvvaii-i 3av- 
 fiacrros papyapiTTjs- Theophr. Fragm. 2. 36. 
 Comp. Plin. H. N. 9. 53, 54. 
 
 Map^d, 77?, r), Martha, a sister of La 
 zarus, Luke 10, 38. 40. 41. John 11, 1. 5. 
 19. 20. 21. 24. 30. 39. 12, 2. 
 
 Mapia, as, 17, or Mapidfj,, ^, indec. 
 Maria, Mary, Heb. B^a (rebellion) Miri 
 am, pr. n. of several females. 
 
 1. Mary the mother of Jesus, written 
 
 Mapia Matt. 1, 16. 18. 2, 11. Mark 6, 3. 
 Luke 1, 41. Acts 1, 14; Mapidfj. Matt. 1, 
 20. 13, 55. Luke 1, 27. 30. 34. 38. 39. 46 
 56. 2, 5. 16. 19. 34. 
 
 2. Mary, Mapia, the mother of James 
 the Less and Joses, sister to Jesus mother 
 (John 19, 25) and wife of Alpheus or Clo- 
 pas; see in AXcpatos no. 1, and idKcoftos 
 no. 2. Matt. 27, 56. 61. 28, 1. Mark 15, 
 40. 47. 16, 1. Luke 24, 10. John 19, 25. 
 
 3. Mary Magdalene, i. e. of Magdala, 
 Mapta, Matt. 27, 56. 61. 28, 1. Mark 15, 
 40. 47. 16, 1. 9. Luke 8, 2. 24, 10. John 
 19,25. 20, 1. 11. 16. 18. 
 
 4. Mary, Mapia, a sister of Lazarus and 
 Martha, Luke 10, 39. 42. John 11, 1. 2. 19. 
 20. 28. 31. 32. 45. 12, 3. 
 
 5. Mary, Mapia, mother of John sur- 
 named Mark, Acts 12, 12. 
 
 6. Mary, Mapidp., a Christian female at 
 Rome, Rom. 16, 6. 
 
 Mdp/co$, ov, 6, Marcus, Mark, the wri 
 ter of one of the four Gospels, pr. John sur- 
 named Mark, Acts 12, 12. 25. 15, 37; the 
 nephew of Barnabas Col. 4, 10; the com 
 panion of Paul and Barnabas on their first 
 journey, and of Barnabas on his second 
 after separating from Paul, Acts 15, 39 
 comp. 12, 25. He is later again mentioned 
 among the companions of Paul, Col. 1. c. 
 Philem. 24. 2 Tim. 4, 11 ; and is also af 
 fectionately called son by Peter, just as Ti 
 mothy is by Paul, 1 Pet. 5, 13 ; comp. Acts 
 12, 12. 2 Tim. 1, 2. 
 
 ftapfj,apo<>, ov, 6, 17, (p,app.at pa>,) stone, 
 rock, Horn. II. 12. 380. Later and in N. T. 
 i. q. Lat. marmor, marble, Rev. 18, 12. So 
 Ep. Jer. 72. Diod. Sic. 3. 14. 
 
 ftaprvp, see in pdprvs. 
 
 [taprvpew, J>, f. TJO-O>, (p-dp-rvs,) to wit 
 ness, i. e. 
 
 1. to be a witness, to be able or ready to 
 testify, c. dat. commodi, John 3, 28 avrol 
 vp-ds p-oi p-aprvpelrf, OTI KT\. Acts 22, 5. 
 Xen. Hell. 1. 1. 31. 
 
 2. to bear witness, to testify, to the truth 
 of what one has seen, heard, knows. a) 
 Pr. and genr. with ire pi c. gen. to bear 
 witness of or concerning any person or thing ; 
 John 1,7. 8 tva p-aprup^OT/ irep\ rov (puiros. 
 v. 15. 2, 25. 5, 31. 32. 8, 13. 14. 18. 15, 
 26. 21, 24; c. OTI 7, 7; c. irfpi impl. 15, 
 27 comp. 26. 18, 23 /iaprvpTjcrov Trepl rov 
 KOKOV, i. e. show it, prove it, by your testi 
 mony. With or i as equiv. to ace. et inf. 
 Winer $ 45. 2. ult. John 1 , 34 KOI fttftap- 
 TvprjKa OTI ovros ecrriv KT\. 4,44. 12, 17. 
 1 John 4, 14. Luke 11, 48; also c. dat 
 
444 
 
 comm. v. incomm. Matt. 23, 31 
 tavTols, OTI KT\. Rom. 10, 2 p.aprvpu> yap 
 avTols, OTI rj\ov 3eou e^ovcnv. Gal. 4, 15 
 uaprupco vp.1v, OTI KT\. Col. 4, 13 ; Kara n- 
 vos, 1 Cor. 15, 15 efj.apTvpTjaafj.ev Kara TOV 
 Seou. (So c. on et dat. Xen. Cyr. 8. 8. 1.) 
 Followed by the words testified, after Xeyav, 
 fine, OTI of quotation, or the like ; John 1, 
 32 Kal efj,apTvpT]o~ev latdvvrjs \eya>v OTI KrX. 
 
 4, 39. 13, 21 ; c. dat. comm. Acts 13, 22. 
 [Rev, 22, 18.] With an accus. expr. .or 
 impl. e. g. of a kindred or synon. noun, John 
 
 5, 32 17 p.apTvpia fji> p-apTvpel Trepl efiov, 
 comp. 1 John 5, 9. 10. So 1 Tim. 6, 13 p. 
 TTJV /caXj)j/ 6fjLo\oyiav. (Arr. Epict. 4. 8. 32. 
 Dem. 1131. 4.) With ace. of thing genr. 
 to testify any thing, to bear witness of or con 
 cerning any thing ; John 3,116 eapaKa^ev 
 fj.apTvpovfj.ev. v. 32. 1 John 1, 2. Rev. 1, 2 
 os efj.apTvpTjo~e TOV \6yov TOV Seou. 22, 20 6 
 p.apTvp>v TavTa, in a causative sense, comp. 
 v. 16 ; ace. et dat. Rev. 22, 16 /uaprvpi/crat 
 vfj.lv TavTa. With an ace. impl. from the con 
 text, e. g. TO. Trepl ep.ov Acts 23. 1 1 ; TOVTO 
 or the like, John 19, 35 KOI 6 ea>pa.Ku>s fj.ffj.ap- 
 rvprjKe. Acts 26, 5. Heb. 10, 15. 1 John 5, 6. 
 7.8. Sogenr. ^El.V. H. 9. 11. Dem. 1131. 
 23; c. ace. et dat. Arr. Epict. 4. 1. 145. 
 With a dat. of pers. or thing to or for whom, 
 in favour of whom one bears testimony ; 
 John 3, 26 w crv p.ep.apTvpT]Kas. 5, 33. 18, 
 37. 3 John *3. 6 ; dat. impl. 2 Cor. 8, 3. 
 3 John 12 fj,aprvpovfj.ev. Pass. c. VTTO Rom. 
 3, 21 ; c. 6Vi Heb. 7, 8. So Xen.,Cyr. 8. 
 8. 1, 27. b) Trop. of God as testifying 
 by his Spirit, by signs, miracles, works ; c. 
 n-epi John 5, 37. 8, 18. 1 John 5, 9. 10; 
 OTI of quot. Heb. 7, 17 ; TO> \6ya>, to, in 
 favour of, Acts 14, 3. Of the Scriptures 
 and prophets, c. irepi John 5, 39 ; with a 
 dat. and inf. c. ace. Acts 10, 43. (Hdian. 
 3. 12. 5. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 20.) Also of 
 one s deeds, works, c. Trepi John 5, 36 TCI 
 epya a eyw TTOIOJ, p-aprvpel Trepl efiov. 10, 25. 
 So Sept. Gen. 31,48. Plut. Pericl. 22 init. 
 Xen. Hi. 9. 3. c) Emphat. to testify 
 strongly, to bear honourable testimony. Pass. 
 to be well testified of, to have good witness ; 
 C. dat. Acts 15, 8 3e6s ffiapTvprjcrfv carols 
 KrX. Heb. 11, 4 ri TLVI. Pass. c. inf. Heb. 
 11, 4 81 TJS fp-apTvprftrj eivai St /catos. V. 5. 
 Hence genr. to speak well of, to applaud, c. 
 dat. Luke 4, 22 iravres ep-apTvpovv avTco. 
 (Jos. Ant. 14. 10. 2. ^El. V. H. 1. 3o .) 
 Pass, to be lauded, to be of good report, Acts 
 
 6,3; c. vrro Acts 10, 22. 16,2. 22,12. 
 3 John 12 ; c. ev 1 Tim. 5, 10. Heb. 11, 2 ; 
 c. 8t<i v. 39. So Jos. Ant. 3. 2. 5 M. An- 
 tonin. 7. 62. 
 
 3. Mid. fj.apTvpfop.ai, ovp.ai, only 
 twice in N. T. a) With dat. Acts, 26, 22 
 Rec. fj.apTvpovfj.fvos p-iKpca re Kal fj.eyaXa>, 
 bearing MY testimony both to small and 
 great. Not thus found in Gr. writers; 
 hence some read fj.apTvp6fj.evos. b) Spec. 
 to call to witness, to invoke, like futpTvpofMi, 
 so Dion. Hal. 7. 49 ult. fj.apTvpovfj.evos Seovs 
 re Kal dv^pdnrovs. Diod. Sic. 4. 54 r^s yv- 
 vaiKos TOVS Seovs fJ.apTvpovfj.evrjs. Hence in 
 N. T. to invoke, to obtest, to charge, c. ace. 
 impl.^1 Thess. 2, 12 TrapaWaXoCwes vfj.as Kal 
 7rapap.v%ovfJ.fvoi Kal fj.apTVpovfJ.evoi KT\. Sept. 
 for TV?n Gen. 43, 3. Lam. 2, 13. 
 
 fiaprvpia, as, fj, (fj.apTvpeu>,) ivitness, 
 testimony, as borne, given ; comp. in p.ap- 
 
 TVplOV. 
 
 1. Of judicial testimony, Mark 14, 56. 59 
 ovSe ourcos io~rj fjv 17 p-apTvpia OVTCOV. Luke 
 22, 71. John 8, 17 ; p.apT. KOTO. TWOS Mark 
 14, 55. Sept. for T? Prov. 25, 18. Dem. 
 846. 24. Plato Legg. 937. a. 
 
 2. Genr. testimony to the truth of any 
 thing. a) Pr. John 19, 35 Kal 6 eapaKas 
 fJ.efj,apTvpr)Ke, Kal d\rj^!ivrj avTOv ecrTiv fj fJ.ap- 
 Tvpia. 21, 24. 1 John 5. 9 TTJV p.. TWV dvr 
 SpwTTcov. 3 Jolm 12. Also of a poet Tit. 1, 
 13. So Arr. Epict. 3. 22. 86. Diod. Sic. 
 3. 73 [72]. Plato Conv. 179. b. b) Spec, 
 in reference to Jesus and his doctrines, i. e. 
 to the truth of his mission and gospel ; 
 genr. John 5, 34 ov irapa dv^putTrov TTJV fi. 
 Xafj.jBa.vc>}. 1 Jolm 5, 10 p.. ev eavTta. So 
 from John the Baptist, John 1, 7. 19. 5, 36 ; 
 from other teachers Rev. 11, 7. 12, 11 Sta 
 TOV \6yov TTJS p.apTvpias avTcav i. e. the 
 word, gospel, to which they testified. Acts 
 22, 18 p.. Trepl ep.ov. Also from God, John 
 
 5, 32. 1 John 5, 9 bis. 10. 11. Of Christ s 
 testimony respecting himself, John 3, 11. 
 32. 33. 5, 31. 8, 13. 14; also in the phrase 
 r/fj,apTvpia TOV i 77 cr o v , the testimony of 
 Jesus, i. e. what he testified and taught re 
 specting himself and his gospel, and hence 
 equiv. to the gospel ; Rev. 1 , 2 6s ep.apTv- 
 prjcre TOV Xoyov TOV Seoi) Kal Tr/v fj,ap. I. X. 
 V. 9. 20, 4. 19, 10 f] yap p.apTVpia TOV I. 
 eVri ro Trvevp-a TTJS Trpo(priTeias,for the testi 
 mony of Jesus is the spirit of prophecy, i.e. 
 implies the prophetic spirit in those who are 
 its ministers, and thus makes them fellow- 
 servants with the angel. Also e%eiv TT>V p.. 
 TOV lijo-ov, to have and hold fast the testi 
 mony of Jesus, Rev. 12, 17. IS, 10; impl. 
 
 6, 9 ; comp. John 14, 21 et 2 John 9. c) 
 Emphat. honourable testimony, good report, 
 1 Tim. 3, 7. So Ecclus. 31 [34], 23. Jos. 
 Ant. 6. 10. 1. 
 
ftaprvpiov 
 
 445 
 
 paprvpiov, ov, TO, (p.apTvpeu, ) witness, 
 testimony, as borne, given, i.- q. p.aprvpia. 
 Thorn. Mag. p-apTvpiov Kpiirrov 77 p.aprvpia. 
 
 1. Genr. testimony, 2 Cor. 1, 12 TO /i. 
 rrfs o-vvfio*r)o-ea>s. So historically, Acts 4, 33 
 T^ p. rrjs dvao-Tao-ecas TOV Kvptov i. e. of, con 
 cerning his resurrection. Heb. 3, 5tls p.. TO>V 
 \a\T]^T]o-op.fV(av, for testimony, for testifying. 
 (Ml V. H. 2. 5. Xen. Conv. 8. 34.) In 
 reference to Jesus and his doctrines, e. g. 
 from teachers, 2 Thess. 1,10. Also TO p.ap- 
 Tvpiov TOV Xpto-Tot), the testimony of 
 Christ, i. e. what he testified and taught 
 respecting himself and his gospel, and hence 
 equiv. to the gospel, 1 Cor. 1, 6. 2 Tim. 1, 
 8. 1 Cor. 2, 1 TO /i. ToO 3n) id. Genr. in 
 the sense of testimony, evidence, proof, e. g. 
 fls p-aprvpiov avTols, as a testimony 
 unto them, Matt. 8, 4. 24, 14. Mark 1,14. 
 Luke 5, 14. 21,13; also against them Matt. 
 10, 18. Mark 6, 11. 13, 9. James 5, 3, 
 and so V avrovs Luke 9, 5. Also 1 Tim. 
 2, 6 TO p.apTvpioi> Kaipols Idiots, the testimony 
 in due time, i. e. to be mn.de known in its 
 time, in apposit. with the preced. participial 
 clause, comp. Tit. 1, 3. Sept. for 1? Deut. 
 31, 26. Josh. 22, 27. So Hdot. 8. 120. 
 Xen. Hell. 1. 7. 4. 
 
 2. From the Sept. f) (ricr)vr) TOV p.apTvplov, 
 the tabernacle of witness, put for the taber 
 nacle of the congregation, Heb. ^^ fix > 
 Acts 7, 44. Rev. 15, 5. So Sept. for 
 1510 ^nk EX. 29, 42. 44. 40. 22. 24, 
 
 deriving "W iE from 1W to testify, instead of 
 from 13* to assemble ; see Heb. Lex. art. 
 1?"ia no. 2. a. 
 
 fj,apTvpo/J,ai : f. p.apTvpovp,m, Mid. de- 
 pon. (p-dprvs,) to call to witness, to invoke as 
 witness, e. g. the gods Dem. 799. 6. Plato 
 Phil. 12. b. Hence in N. T. genr. to invoke, 
 to obtest, to protest, to make an earnest and 
 solemn appeal e. g. a) By way of affirm 
 ation, protestation, c. dat. et 6Yi, Acts 20, 
 26 p.apTi pofj.ai vp.1v OTI KT\. q. d. I sol 
 emnly affirm, I call God to witness. Gal. 
 5, 3. So Jos. B. J. 3. 8. 3. Plut. Lysand. 
 6 irpos riva. b) By way of exhortation, to 
 . obtest, to exhort solemnly, to charge, c. ace. 
 et inf. Eph. 4, 17. Acts 26, 22 in some 
 editions, see in p.apTvp(a> no. 3. So Pol. 
 13. 8. 6. Time. 6. 80. 
 
 fj,apTV$, vpos, 6, rj, a witness, dat. pAp- 
 rvpi, ace. p.dprvpa. Plur. dat. p.dpTv<ri. The 
 nom. pdpTvp belonged only to the jEolic 
 dialect, and is not found in N. T. but be 
 came current in later ecclesiastical writers 
 in the sense of martyr ; see Buttm. Ausf. 
 Sprachl. } 58. p. 230. 
 
 1. a ivitness, in a judicial sense; Matt. 
 18, 16 eVi <rTop.aTos 8vo p.apTvpa>v ij Tpiuv 
 
 aSTJ nav pfaa. 26, 65. Mark 14, 63. 
 Acts 6, 13. 7,58. 2 Cor. 13, 1. 1 Tim. 
 5, 19. Heb. 10, 28. Sept. for "? Deut. 
 17, 6. Prov. 24, 28. Dem. 1025. 22. 
 Xen. Hell. 1. 7. 6. 
 
 2. Genr. a witness,, one who testifies or 
 can testify to the truth of what he has seen, 
 heard, knows. 1 Thess. 2, 10 vp.fls p.dp- 
 Tvpfs KOI 6 3edr, u>s 6o-ia>s KT\. 1 Tim. 6, 
 12; p.dpTvs f<rr\v 6 3eoy Rom. 1, 9. Phil. 
 1, 8. 1 Thess. 2, 5; p.dpTvpa T. 3eoi/ eVi- 
 Ka\t iv 2 Cor. 1 , 23. So in allusion to those 
 who are spectators at a public game, Heb. 
 
 12, 1. Sept. and 1? Gen. 31. 50; comp, 
 Sept. Is. 43, 10. So Jos. Ant. 15. 5. 3, 
 Luc. Phalar. 1. 1. Xen. Ag. 4. 5 ; in a 
 public game, Longin. de Subl. $ 14. 
 Espec. of those who witnessed the life, 
 death, and resurrection of Jesus, who bear 
 witness to the truth as it is in Jesus ; Luke 
 24, 48 vp.fls 8e tare p-dprvpes TOVTGW. Acts 
 1, 8. 22. 2, 32. 3, 15. 5, 32. 10, 39. 41. 
 
 13, 31. 26, 16. 2 Tim. 2, 2 a rJKovo-as Trap 
 tfjiov Sia TToXXeoi/ fj.apTvpa>v, i. e. confirmed 
 by many other witnesses. With a dat. Acts 
 22, 15. 1 Pet. 5, 1. So of one who bears 
 witness for God, and testifies to the world 
 what God reveals through him, i. e. a teach 
 er, prophet, genr. Rev. 11,3; of Jesus, c 
 p.dpTvs 6 ina-Tos Rev. 1, 5. 3, 14; comp. 
 John 1, 19. 14,6. 
 
 3. a martyr, one who by his death bears 
 witness to the truth ; Acts 22, 20 2,Tf<pdvov 
 TOV p.dprvp6s (TOV. Rev. 2, 13. 17, 6. 
 Euseb. H. E. 2. 1. Frequent in ecclesias 
 tical writers ; see Suicer Thes. Eccl. s. 
 voc. 
 
 /Aacrcrao/iat, >p.ai, f. 7jo-o/iai, Mid. de- 
 pon. (|iao-o-,) to chew, to gnaw, e. g. ras 
 yXcoo-o-aj in pain, Rev. 16, 10. Sept. Job 
 30, 4. Jos. B. J. 6. 3. 3. Luc. Ocyp. 
 122. In Gr. writers oftener p,ao-dop.ai, 
 Theophr. H. PI. 4. 9. Aristoph. Eq. 717. 
 
 itttCTTfyOft), <U, f. OHTUi, (p.d(TTl,) tO 
 
 scourge, c. ace. e. g. persons as criminals, 
 Matt. 10, 17. 20, 19. 23, 34. Mark 10, 
 34. Luke 18, 33. John 19, 1 ; see in ip.ds 
 no. 2. Sept. for fi^H Ex. 5, 14. Deut. 25, 
 3. So JE\. V. H. 12. 62. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 
 18. Trop. of God, to chastise, to correct 
 C. ace. Heb. 12, 6 p-aa-Tiyoi 8e ndvra viov 61 
 napabexfTai, quoted from Sept. Prov. 3, 12 
 where Heb. 3!*J? , i. e. as a father. Sept. 
 and nsn Prov. 17, 10. So Tob. 13, 2. 5. 
 
 ^acrri^w, f. iga>, (p.do-ri.) to scourge, 
 c. ace. e. g. a person as criminal Acts 22, 25. 
 
446 
 
 Sept. for nsri Num. 22, 5. Luc. Tim. 23. 
 Pint. Alex. M. 42 ult. 
 
 iyos, ^, a whip, scourge, see in 
 ydy no. 2 ; Acts 22, 24. Heb. 11, 36. 
 Sept. for ui tts 1 K. 12, 11. 14. So Luc. 
 Asin. 44. Xen. An. 3. 4. 25. Trop. a 
 scourge from God, i. e. disease, plague ; 
 Luke 7, 21 curb i>6<ra>v KCU nacrriycav. Mark 
 3, 10. 5, 29. 34. Sept. for 2SJ5B p s . 32, 10; 
 Ps. 39, 12. 89, 33. So Horn. II. 12. 37. 
 ^Eschyl. Theb. 608. 
 
 fj^aarof, ov, 6, (collat. /*ab y,) the breast, 
 pap; Luke 11, 27 paKapioi. ol /uurrot ovs 
 e StyXao-as. 23, 29. Rev. 1, 13. Sept. for 
 Id Job 3, 12. Cant. 1, 12. Pol. 15. 31. 
 13. Xen. An. 4. 3. 6. 
 
 fJ,aTaio\oyid, as, 17, (/iaraioAoyo? ,) I am 
 taZfc, empty jangling. 1 Tim. 1, 6. Por- 
 phyr. de Abstin. 4. 16. Plut. de Lib. edu- 
 cand. 9 mid. 
 
 O v, , j, a. 
 Xeyco,) given to xain talking ; Subst. a -vain 
 talker, empty wrangler, Tit. 1, 10. Athen. 
 617. a. 
 
 a , ov, (/idr^,) vain, empty, 
 idle, fruitless, Tit. 3, 9 ; irioris 1 Cor. 1 5, 
 17; ^Sprj(TKfia James 1, 26; dvucrrpofpri 
 
 1 Pet. 1, 18. So 1 Cor. 3, 20 on Vi p.d- 
 TCUOI, quoted from Ps. 94, 1 1 where Sept. 
 for ^ft, as also Zech. 10, 2 ; for *$* Is. 31, 
 2. So Hdian. 6. 7. 24. Xen. Vect. 4. 41. 
 Plato Tim. 40. d. From the Heb. rd p.d- 
 raia, vanities, nothings, for idols, idolatry, 
 Acts 14, 15. Sept. and ^ I K. 16, 13. 
 
 2 K. 17, 15. Jer. 2, 5. 8, 19. 
 
 /LiaTcrtOT?79j rjros, f], (p-draios,) vanity, 
 emptiness ; 2 Pet. 2, 18 vnepoyna yap p.a- 
 TdioTTjTos (p SfyyopLfvoi. (Sept. for pTl Ps. 
 4, 3.) Spec, frailty, transientness ; Rom. 8, 
 20 TT; yap /j.aTai6rr)Ti 17 ariais imtTdyrj. 
 Sept. for ^ Ps. 39, 6. 62, 10. Ecc. 1, 2. 
 14. From the Heb. for folly, perverseness, 
 wickedness, Eph. 4, 17. Sept. and &O85 
 Ps. 26, 4. 119, 37. 144, 8. 11. 
 
 fJLCLTaiOU), &, f. coo-co, (/xdraioy,) pr. to 
 make vain, Sept. for ^Ovj Jer. 23, 16. 
 In N. T. from the Sept. only Pass, to be 
 come rain, i. e. foolish, perverse, wicked; 
 Rom. 1, 21 (p.aTaim%T]<rav fv rots StaXoyi- 
 07*04? avT<ov, in reference espec. to idola 
 try ; comp. v. 23, and see in pdraios fin. 
 So Sept. and ban 2 K. 17, 15. Jer. 2, 5 ; 
 comp. Sept. for b?&? 2 Sam. 13, 13. 
 26, 21. 
 
 fj,aTr/v : adv. (p-d-nj, ) z n rain, to no pur 
 pose, fruitlessly; Matt. 15, 9 et Mark 7, 7 
 
 p.. 8e trtftami p.e. Sept. for Xl^jb Jer. 2 
 30. Hdian. 1. 4. 7. Xen. CEc. 1*40. 
 
 . OVj c>, Matthew, (i. q. MOT- 
 /ay,) one of the apostles, the writer of 
 the first Gospel, called also Levi, and ori 
 ginally a publican, o TeXco^j, Matt. 10, 3. 9, 
 9. Mark 3, 18. Luke 6, 15. Acts 1, 13. 
 Comp. Mark 2, 14. Luke 5, 27. 
 
 Mar^rdv, 6, indec. Matthan, Heb. IWB 
 (gift), pr. n. m. Matt. 1,15 bis. 
 
 , 6, indec. Matlhat, pr. n. ol 
 two men, Luke 3, 24. 29. 
 
 a, 6, Matthias, (i. q. Marra- 
 3/a?,) pr. n. of the apostle chosen in the 
 place of Judas, Acts 1, 23. 26. 
 
 d, 6, indec. Matlatha, Heb. 
 i33 (gift of Jehovah), pr. n. m. Luke 
 3,31. 
 
 , ov, 6, Mattathias, Heb. 
 i" 1 ^ 5 ? (gift of Jehovah) Mattithiah, pr. n. 
 of two men, Luke 3, 25. 26. 
 
 pa^aipa, as,rj,a large knife, slaughter 
 knife, worn by Homer s heroes along with 
 the sword, II. 3. 271. Hdot. 2. 61. JEL V. 
 H. 8. 3. In N. T. a sword, pr. for cut 
 ting; Matt. 26, 47 /zera fuixaipcav Kal gv- 
 \uv. V. 51 dvfcnraaf rrjv fjid^aipaif avrov. v. 
 52 tor. 55. Mark 14, 43. 47. 48. Luke 21, 
 24. 22, 36. 38. 49. 52. John 18, 10. 11. 
 Acts 16, 27. Heb. 4, 12. Rev. 6, 4. 13, 10 
 bis. 14 ; trop. Eph. 6, 17. Sept. for a^H 
 Gen. 34, 25. Judg. 3, 16. (Diod. Sic. 16. 
 94. Xen. An. 1. 8. 6.) Spec, for the sword 
 of justice, i, e. of the executioner, Acts 12, 
 2. Rom. 8, 35. Heb. 11, 34. 37; (popdv 
 p.dxaipav, to bear the sword, i. e. to have the 
 power of life and death, Rom. 13, 4. So 
 ^Eschin. 38. 11. Philostr. Vit. Apollon. 7. 
 16; comp. Sueton. Vitell. c. 15. Meton. 
 the sword for war, opp. flprjvr), Matt. 10, 34. 
 Sept. and 3-in J er . 14, 13 ; 3^rl Sept. TTO - 
 . 26, 6. 
 
 J ? r "7> (M"* /"")) a fight, battle, 
 Hdian. 8. 5. 1. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 29. In N. 
 T. genr. strife, conflict, controversy ; 2 Cor. 
 7, 5 eco3> fj.d x ai. 2 Tim. 2, 23. Tit. 3, 9 
 p-dxas vop.ixds, i. e. strifes about the Mosaic 
 law. James 4, 1. Sept. for S-n G en . 13> 
 7 ; fiia Prov. 15, 18. Arr. Epict. 4. 5. 3. 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 38. 
 
 /j,d%o/Aai, f. (0-op.ai, Mid. depon. to fight, 
 pr. in war, battle, Hdian. 4. 15. 15. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 3. 29, 30. In N. T. genr. to strive, 
 to contend, e. g. physically in a private 
 quarrel, Acts 7, 26. (Sept. for MSD Ex. 
 
447 
 
 21, 22. 2 Sam. 14, 6.) Also in words, to 
 strive, to dispute, e. g. rrpbs dXXrjXouy John 
 6, 52 ; recipr. 2 Tim. 2, 24. James 4, 2. 
 Sept. for 3-n Gen. 31, 36. Neh. 13, 25. So 
 Arr. Epict. 4. 1. 146. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 16. 
 
 to boast largely, to play the braggart, James 
 3, 5. 2 Mace. 15, 32. Plut. Consol. ad 
 Apoll. 6 pen. Diod. Sic. 15. 16. 
 
 f4ya\U)$i a, ov, (/ie yaf, /LteydXr;,) great, 
 glorious, wonderful ; e. g. ra /iryaXeta, 
 great things, wonderful u-orks, Luke 1, 49. 
 Acts 2, 11. Sept. for rviVia Ps. 71, 19. 
 Pol. 8. 3. 1. Xen. Mem. 4. 5. 2. 
 
 /iey<zXetOT?79, TJTOS, 17, (/ieyoXeToy,) great 
 ness, majesty, glory, e. g. rov Seov Luke 9, 
 43 ; rov Kvpiov 2 Pet. 1,16; TTJS Apre /itSo? 
 Acts 19, 27. Sept. for rnxsn Jer. 33, 9. 
 1 Esdr. 1, 5. Jos. Ant. 8. 4. 3. 
 
 IJ,6yd\o7rpen">fi, eos, ovs, 6, 17, adj. (p.e- 
 yas, TrpeVoj,) befitting a great man, mag 
 nanimous, Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 5. In N. T. 
 magnificent, most splendid, of things, 2 Pet. 
 1, 17 vrro -njs pry. 86frs. So 2 Mace. 15, 
 13. Luc. D. Mar. 15. 1. Xen. Hi. 2. 2. 
 
 fjueya\vvo), f. w5>, (/x/yas,) to make 
 great, to enlarge. 
 
 1. Genr. c. ace. e. g. ra Kpdo-TreSa TU>V 
 ipariw Matt. 23, 5 ; TO eXeoy /nerd rivoy, to 
 show one great mercy, do him great kind 
 ness, Luke 1, 58. Sept. and Heb. i^ri 
 10H Gen. 19, 19; comp. Ps. 57, 11. Plut. 
 Themist. 27. Thuc. 5. 98. 
 
 2. Spec, to magnify, to extol, to praise, 
 c. ace. Luke 1, 46 rov nvpiov. Acts 5, 13. 
 10, 46. 19, 17. 2 Cor. 10, 15. Phil. 1, 20. 
 Sept. for Vna Ps. 34, 4. 2 Sam. 7, 26. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 20. Xen. Ap. Socr. 32. 
 
 ^te YttXxus , adv. (/ie yas.) greatly, much ; 
 Phil. 4, 10 x t W 1 /^ya^wf- Sept. 1 Chr. 
 29, 10. Pol. 4. 61. 5. Xen. Hi. 4. 5. 
 
 fj,eja\(i)O-vvrj, TJS, 17, (/zya f ) greatness, 
 majesty, i. e. the divine majesty, melon, for 
 God himself, Heb. 1,3. 8, 1 ; also in ascrip 
 tions, Jude 25. Sept. for Via Deut. 32, 3 ; 
 r&Via l Chr. 29, 11. Ps. 145, 6. Test 
 XII Patr. p. 586 ; meton. for God, Lib. 
 Henoch. in Fabr. Cod. Ps. V. T. p. 187. 
 The usual word in Greek writers is /ie yc- 
 
 tt Vft9) ufydXi?, /ieya, Gen. ptyaXov, TJS, 
 ov. Compar. p.ei<>>i>, Superl. /* yio- 
 once 2 Pet. 1,4. A double compar. is 
 forepof 3 John 4, see under Aax*o-rorf r v^. 
 Great, large, pr. of physical magnitude. 
 
 1. Of men or animals, great in size, stat- 
 
 ure, John 21, 11 ix^vs. Rev. 12, 3 dpdv. 
 v. 14. Of persons, i. q. full-grown, Heb. 
 11, 24 p.e-yas yevoptvos ; and so fiiKpos KOI 
 p*yas, small and great, Acts 8, 10. 26, 22. 
 Heb. 8, 11. Rev. 11, 18. Sept. for bina Ez. 
 29, 3. 17, 3. Gen. 19, 11. So Palaeph. 
 40. 1, 2. Hdian. 2. 9. 6; of pers. Luc. Tox. 
 44. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 14, 17. Hence of age, 
 6 p.f t f w v, the greater, the elder, Lat. major 
 natu, Rom. 9, 12, quoted from Gen. 25, 23 
 where Sept. for -"5 . Comp. Xen. Ven. 9. 8. 
 2. Of things, great, e. g. a) In size, ex 
 tent, Matt. 27, 60 X/3oi/. Mark 13, 2 oua- 
 as. Luke 12, 18. 16, 26 xaa/wi. (Palaeph. 
 29. 5.) Luke 22, 12. Acts 10, 11. 1 Cor. 
 16, 9 3vpa. Rev. 8, 10. 11, 8. 14, 19. 18, 
 
 21. al. Trop. of guilt John 19, 11. Sept 
 for b-ila Josh. 10, 2. 11 ; trop. 2 Sam. 13, 
 16. So Hdian. 3. 7. 5. ib. 4. 15. 14. b) In 
 measure, e. g. taU, large, Luke 13, 19 8tv- 
 8pov. Matt. 13, 32. Mark 4, 32; or long, 
 Rev. 6, 4 fjidxaipa ; or large, broad, Rev. 
 9, 14 TTora/Ms. 20, 1 oXvcrty. So Hdian. 3. 
 3. 10. ib. 3. 7. 9. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 17 x <-v. 
 c) Of number or amount, Mark 5, 1 1 dyeX?;. 
 1 Tim. 6, 6. Heb. 10, 35; trop. John 15, 
 13. Acts 4, 33 x<*pis. James 4, 6. Sept. and 
 iiia 1 K. 8, 66. 2 Chr. 7, 8. So Hdian. 
 7. 4. 9 TrX^Sof. d) In price, cost, great, 
 costly, splendid, Luke 5, 29 So;^?. 14, 16 
 Semvov. 2 Tim. 2, 20. Heb. 9, 11. Sept. 
 and ^a Gen. 21, 8. Jer. 52, 13. Of a 
 day, celebration, great, solemn, John 7, 37. 
 19, 31 ; elsewhere of the day of judgment 
 Acts 2, 20. Jude 6. Rev. 6, 17. 16, 14. 
 So Sept. and Hia Mai. 4, 5. Joel 2, 11. 31. 
 e) Trop. great in estimation, weight, impor 
 tance; Matt. 22, 36. 38 fvroXrj. Eph. 5, 
 32 et 1 Tim. 3, 16 pva-TTipiov. 1 John 5, 9 
 fj.aprvpia. 1 Cor. 9 ; 1 1 . So jLtei a)i> greater, 
 more important, Matt. 23, 19. 1 Cor. 13, 
 1 3. Heb. 11,26; fityia-ros 2 Pet. 1 , 4. Sept 
 forVhS 1 Sam. 22, 15. So Dem. 1366. 
 
 22. Diod. Sic. 3. 72. Xen. An. 2. 6. 14. 
 3. Trop. great in force, intensity, effect, 
 
 e. g. a) As affecting the external senses, 
 great, vehement, violent, Matt. 8, 24 <retoyior 
 ^yas. Luke 21, 11. (^El. V. H. 6. 9.) 
 Mark 4, 37 XalXa-^. v. 39 yaX^w/. John 6, 
 18 arf/ios. (Dem. 1213. 27.) Rev. 11, 19 
 XriXaa. 16,21. So likewise irroxns Matt. 
 7, 27 ; p JJy/wi Luke 6, 49 ; <pww7 Matt. 24, 
 31 (Hdian. 1.8. 12) ; upavyrj Acts 23, 9. 
 Rev. 14, 18; xpdfeiv fj-clgov adv. more 
 vehemently, Matt. 20, 31 (Hdot. 2. 141. 4). 
 Also TrvpfTos Luke 4, 38 ; KOTTITOS Acts 8, 
 2. Sept. Gen. 50, 10. b) As affecting the 
 mind, causing emotion, e. g. Matt. 2, 10 ^o- 
 

 p&v p.ty. 3 John 4. Mark 5, 42 eKO-rao-iv p,. 
 Luke 2, 9 0d/3oi . Rom. 9, 2 Xwn?. Rev. 12, 
 12 3u/i6r /*. (J^schin. 63. 10 opyrj. Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 2. 10 $o /3os.) So of events, Matt. 
 24, 21 SXtytp. Luke 4, 25 Xtpk. 21, 23. 
 Acts 8, 1 fiicoy/ids. James 3, 1 Kpifia. Rev. 
 16, 21 TrX^yjj. (Sept. Job 2, 13. ^Eschin. 
 55. 10. Xen. An. 5. 8. 17.) Of things ex 
 citing admiration, great, mighty, wonderful, 
 e. g. o-np-fla p.. great signs, mighty deeds, 
 miracles, Matt. 24, 24. Luke 21, 11. Acts 
 
 6, 8 ; Suva/ids Acts 8, 13 ; 8vvap.is p.. Acts 
 
 4, 33. 8, 10. So fifi^ova sc. epya John 
 1, 51. 5, 20. 14, 12. Joined with 3au/ia- 
 O-TOS Rev. 15, 1. 3. 2 Cor. 11, 15 TI p.eya ovv 
 what wonder then? comp. v. 14. Sept. and 
 ^Via Deut. 6, 22. 10, 21. 29, 3. So Dem. 
 1046. 10. ^Eschin. 19. 13. 
 
 4. Trop. great in power, dignity, autho 
 rity, e. g. 01 /neyaXot the great, i. e. nobles, 
 princes, Matt. 20, 25. Mark 10, 42. Matt. 
 
 5, 35 TOV p.ey. /Sao-tXe wy. (ML V. H. 12. 1. 
 Hdian. 6. 4. 8.) Heb. 4, 14 dpxifpea p.. 10, 
 
 21. 13, 20. Of God, Tit. 2, 13. Rev. 19, 
 17 ; of Diana Acts 19, 27. 28. 34. 35. 
 Genr. great, distinguished, Matt. 5, 19 OVTOS 
 ueyas (cX^crerat. Mark 10, 43. Luke 7, 
 16 7rpo<pf)Tr]s. Acts 8, 9. So p,fifav c. gen. 
 Matt. 11, 11. Luke 7, 28. John 13, 16. 
 1 Cor. 14, 5; simply Matt. 18, 1. Luke 22, 
 24. 2 Pet. 2, 11. Sept. and ^-m 2 Sam. 
 
 7, 9. Neh. 11, 14. So Dem. 116. 8. Hdian. 
 1. 6. 17. Xen. An. 3. 2. 10. In a bad sense, 
 great, noted, TJ Tropvrj Rev. 17, 1. 19, 2. So 
 JEsch. 22. 28 Tropvos. 
 
 5. Implying censure, i. q. too great, lofty, 
 boastful, arrogant. Rev. 13,5 ord/ia XaAow 
 p.eyd\a /cat (3\acr(pT]p.ias. So Sept. and 
 Chald. S-n-i Dan. 7, 8. 20. Heb. btia 
 Sept. p.(yab.oppf)p.a>v Ps. 12, 4. Horn. Od. 
 
 22. 288 p.(ya etVelv. Dem. 1124. 25 p.eya 
 XaXflv. Plato Phaed. 95. b. + 
 
 fj,eye^ro$, eos, ovs, TO, (p.fyas,~) great 
 ness, trop. Eph. 1, 19 ro p.. Tys 8vvdp.fms 
 avrov. Sept. for }Hz Ex. 15, 16. JDschin. 
 82. 16. Plato Polit. 290. d. So phys. Hdian. 
 
 8, 2. 10. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 12. 
 fjL<yi(TTaVS, a>v, of, (peyas, p.fyio-rof, ) 
 
 the great, Lat. magnates, i. e. chiefs, nobles, 
 princes, Mark 6, 21. Rev. 6, 15. 18, 23. 
 Sept. for t^T^ Jer. 14, 3. Nah. 2, 5 ; 
 tSiVha Jon. 3, 7 ; d^to 2 Chr. 36, 18. 
 Jos. Ant. 11. 3. 2. ib. 20. 2. 3. Artemidor. 
 1. 2. ib. 3. 9. It is a word of the later 
 Greek, Phryn. et Lob. p. 196 sq. Sturz de 
 Dial. Alex. p. 180 sq. Sing. dat. p-eyio-ram 
 occurs once Ecclus. 4, 7. 
 
 /ie<yi<7T09, see in p.eyas init. and no. 2. e. 
 
 f. 
 
 v<a,) to interpret over from one language 
 into another, to translate; in N. T. only 
 Pass. Matt. 1, 23 o tori p.e^fpp.r]vev6nvov. 
 Mark 5, 41. 15, 22. 34. John 1, [39]. 42. 
 Acts 4, 36. 13, 8. Jos. c. Ap. 1. 10. Diod. 
 Sic. 1.11. Pol. 6. 26. 6. 
 
 T]S, f], (kindr. ^3u, comp. Germ. 
 Meth,~) strong drinking, drunkenness, a 
 drunken-frolic, Luke 21, 34. Rom. 13, 13. 
 Gal. 5, 21. Comp. in Kpanrd\r}. Sept. for 
 Jinsti Ez. 23, 33. 39, 19. JEL V. H. 3. 14. 
 Xen. Ag. 5. 1. 
 
 /-u,) also p.f%i(TTdva> 1 Cor. 13,2; comp. 
 Buttm. 106. n. 5. $ 112. 10. To set or 
 move over from one place to another, to 
 transfer, to remove; in N. T. only in the 
 transitive forms, for which see in "io-njp.i. 
 
 1. to remove, c. ace. 1 Cor. 13, 2 wore 
 0/377 /ieSicrTdi/eii . Of persons, to translate, 
 c. ace. et (Is Col. 1, 13. Sept. for ija 
 Is. 54, 10. So Jos. Ant. 9. 11. 1 ult. 
 Hdian. 6. 4. 14. Trop. to draw over to an 
 other side or party, to seduce, to turn away, 
 c. ace. 6 ^Xoj/ IKOVOV Acts 19, 26. Sept. for 
 T On Is. 59, 15. So Xen. Hell. 2. 2. 5. 
 
 2. Of persons, to remove from office, e. g. 
 a king, to depose, c. ace. Acts 1 3, 22, comp. 
 1 Sam. c. 16; a steward, to dismiss, Pass. 
 Luke 16, 4 orav /irratrraSw TT/S oLK.ovop.ias, 
 where for the genit. comp. Matth. 353. 
 Winer $ 30. 6. Sept. for -non 1 K. 15, 13. 
 So c. OTTO Pol. 4. 87. 9. 
 
 aj, 77, (pfzoofvct ; pfTa, ooos,) 
 art, artifice, wile, only in N. T. Eph. 4, 14. 
 6, 11. Hesych. ^eSoSei ay Te^i/as. So p.c 
 SoSevw to use artifice Pol. 38. 4. 10. 
 
 ou, 6, 17, adj. (p.crd, opos.) 
 bordering upon, border, frontier, e. g. TrdXis 
 Jos. B. J. 4. 11. 2; yr] Thuc. 2. 27. In 
 N. T. Plur. neut. TO p.e%6pia sc, x<pi a, 
 the borders, confines, Mark 7, 24 TO /LI. Tvpov 
 KOI SiScowr. So Hdian. 5. 4. 10. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 4. 16. 
 
 ), f. vo-co, (P-&V, comp. in /ie 377,) 
 to make drunk ; Mid. to become drunk, to be 
 drunken, like Engl. to ge drunk ; hence to 
 carouse; Pass. aor. 1 e/ie3vo-3r;i/ in Mid. 
 signif. Buttm. J 136. 1,2 ; comp. J 112. n. 6. 
 Absol. Luke 12, 45 trlpcur /cat /LteSuo-Keo-Sai. 
 John 2, 10. 1 Thess. 5, 7 ; c. dat. oii/w Eph. 
 5, 18. Trop. e /c TOV o ivov TTJS rropvfias Rev. 
 17, 2. Sept. Act. for ">3 JJ Jer. 51, 7. Hab. 
 2, 15; Mid. for nm3 p rov . 4> n. Luc, 
 de dea Syr. 22. Pol. 4. 57. 3. Plato Conv 
 176. c ; trop. ib. Legg. 649. d. 
 
449 
 
 6, f), adj. (/i3u,) drunken; 
 Subst. a drunkard, 1 Cor. 5, 11. 6, 10. 
 Sept. for X20 Prov. 23, 21 ; lau) Prov. 26, 
 9. Luc. Tim. 55 /u. Kai irdpoivos. Plut. 
 Cato Min. 24. Earlier writers used /xe3u- 
 <ror only of females, later ones also of men, 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 151 sq. 
 
 fA&vw, Qie Sv,) only in pres. and im 
 perfect ; all other forms belonging to /ie- 
 3vo-Ko> q. v. Buttm. 114. To be drunk, to 
 get drunk ; hence to carouse ; absol. Matt. 
 24, 49 p.fTa Tcav P.&VOVTCOV, with the drunken. 
 Acts 2, 15. 1 Cor. 11, 21. 1 Thess. 5, 7. 
 Trop. tK TOV aip-aTos Rev. 17, 6. Sept. for 
 1 sa 1 Sam. 1,13. Job 12, 25 ; trop. ov OTTO 
 olvov for -,n lati Is. 51, 21. So JEl V. H. 
 2. 40. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 21. 
 
 pelfyav, fjiet^orepo?, see in ptyas init. 
 
 fj,\av, avos, TO, (neut. of /xeXar,) black 
 colour or dye, ink; 2 Cor. 3, 3 eVtoToXj) 
 (yy(ypap.p.evr) ov peXavi. 2 John 12. 3 John 
 13. Dem. 313. 11. Plato Phsdr. 276. c. 
 See Plin. H. N. 35. 25. Diet, of Antt. art. 
 Atramentum. 
 
 fj,e\a$, aiva, av, black ; Matt. 5, 36 3pi . 
 Rev. 6, 5. 12. Sept. for n nttJ Lev. 13, 37. 
 Cant. 1, 5. Luc. Paras. 41. Xen. An. 4. 
 6. 13. 
 
 JVfeXea?, 5, 6, Meleas, pr. n. m. Luke 
 3,31. 
 
 mpers. see n 
 
 aa), , f. jja-w, (^e Xw, /ze Xet,) to 
 care for, to take care of any thing, i. e. 
 eo as to be able to perform it, Hes. Op. 314, 
 441 ; comp. Tittm. de Synon. N. T. p. 176. 
 Hence in N. T. Lat. meditare, to me 
 ditate., to revolve in mind; c. ace. of thing, 
 Mark 13, 11. 1 Tim. 4, 15 ravra ^ieXtVa. 
 Acts 4, 25 TI (pe\(TTjo-av Kevd ; quoted from 
 Ps. 2, 1 where Sept. for !"i5rj ; also for ^" l ^ b ] 
 Ps. 1 1 9, 1 48. So Dem. 1 1 29. 9. Xen. Mem" 
 1. 2. 21. 
 
 /ieXt, ITOS, TO, honey, Lat. mel, Rev. 10, 
 9. 10. Matt. 3, 4 et Mark 1, 6 /ieXt uypiov, 
 see in uypios. Sept. for HJs n Judg. 14, 8. 
 18. Diod. Sic. 19. 94. Xen. Hell. 5. 3. 19. 
 
 /u.eXicr<rto9, ov, 6, 17, adj. (^ieXto-o-a,) of 
 bees, made by bees; Luke 24, 42 OTTO p.. 
 Krjplov of bee-comb, honey-comb. 
 
 M\LTIJ, TJS, T), Melita, now Malta, an 
 island of the Mediterranean, lying south of 
 Sicily, Acts 28, 1. It was anciently a Car 
 thaginian colony (Diod. Sic. 5. 12) ; and 
 the Phenician language still exists there in 
 a corrupt dialect ; comp. Acts 28, 2. Gesen. 
 Monunom Phoen. p. 11. Here Paul was 
 29 
 
 shipwrecked, after being driven up and 
 down for fourteen days in the Adriatic Sea, 
 between Sicily and Greece ; see Afyn as 
 and Acts 27, 27 sq. Hence he sailed again 
 on a direct course by Syracuse and Rhe- 
 gium to Puteoli, Acts 28, 11 sq. There 
 was another Melita, a small island in the 
 Adriatic Gulf, on the Illyrian coast, now 
 called Meleda, which some have thought to 
 be the place of Paul s shipwreck ; but its 
 position does not accord with the subse 
 quent voyage to Puteoli ; nor can we well 
 suppose a vessel bound from Alexandria to 
 Puteoli to have wintered in this island ; 
 comp. Acts 28, 11. 
 
 f. jjo-oj, (kindr. /le Xoo,) impf. 
 oz/ and rjp.e\\ov Buttm. 83. n. 5 ; to 
 be about to do or suffer any thing, to be on 
 the point of, constr. with an infin. of that 
 which one is about to do or suffer, mostly 
 the inf. future (in N. T. least of all), often 
 inf. present, and rarely inf. aorist ; which 
 latter Phrynichus condemns p. 336, though 
 it is found in the earliest writers and even 
 in Ionic and Attic prose, Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 745 sq. Comp. Winer 45. 8 pen. For 
 the force of the inf. pres. and aor. after /xeX- 
 Xw, as implying duration or transientness, 
 see Buttm. 137. 5. 
 
 1. Genr. to be about to do, etc. a) So 
 with inf. pres. Luke 7, 2 e/xeXXe Tf\evrav, 
 was about to die, was at the point of death. 
 John 4, 47. Acts 21, 27. 27, 33. With inf 
 aorist, Rev. 3, 2 a /ueXXet aircRavtiv. 12, 4. 
 So c. pres. 2 Mace. 9, 18. ^El. V. H. 1. 11 ; 
 c. aor. Hdian. 2. 10. 9. Thuc. 6. 31. 
 b) Also as implying purpose, i. q. to liate in 
 mind, to intend, to will, c. inf. pres. Matt. 2, 
 13 fj.e\\(i yap HpcoSr/f frrtlv TO Trato iov. 
 Luke 10, 1. John 6, 6. Acts 3, 3. 12, 6. 
 Rev. 10, 4 ; c. inf. aor. Rev. 2, 10 tSov yue XXet 
 $aXfii>. 3, 16. So c. pres. Xen. An. 5. 7. 
 5 ; c. aor. JE.L V. H. 3. 27. Xen. Cyr. 1 
 4. 16. 
 
 2. Spec, ought, should, must, as implying 
 necessity, accordance with the nature of 
 things or with the divine appointment, and 
 therefore certain, destined to take place ; so 
 c. inf. pres. Matt. 11, 14 HX/as 6 ^is XXcoi/ 
 p X fo-5ai. 20, 22. Mark 10, 32. Luke 9, 
 31. 44. John 11, 51. Acts 28, 6. Rom. 4, 
 24. 8, 13. Heb. 1, 14. James 2, 12, Rev. 
 2, 10 a jueXXety Trdcrxeiv. With inf. aor. 
 Rom. 8, 18 Ti)V /ie XXoucrai Soai/ aTroicaAv- 
 (ptsfivai. Gal. 3, 23. With M.fut. Acts 11, 
 28 \ip.ov fjityav p.(\\(tv ecreo Sat. 24,15. So 
 c. pres. Diod. Sic. 2. 31. Xen. Lac. 1.3; 
 c. aor. Xen. 6. 1. 40 ; c. fut. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 2. 5. Hence particip. /* ^XXcov, ova-a, ov, 
 
450 
 
 impending, coming, future ; Matt. 3, 7 OTTO 
 rrjs /JLfX\ovcTT)s opyijs- 12, 32. Rom. 5, 14. 
 1 Tim. 4, 8. Heb. 9, 11. 13, 14 ; ra p.e\\ovra 
 things to come, Rom. 8, 38. 1 Cor. 3, 22; 
 (Is TO p.e\\ov, in future, hereafter, Luke 13, 
 
 9. 1 Tim. 6, 19. So Luc. D. Mort. 3. 1. 
 Hdian. 1. 14. 3. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 13. 
 
 3. Also, may, can, will, implying possibili 
 ty, probability, what one hopes or fears ; c. 
 inf. pres. Matt. 24, 6. Luke 22, 23 6 TOVTO 
 p.cX\(ov Trpdtrcreiv wlio might or could do this. 
 Acts 20, 38. 1 Tim. 1, 16. With inf. ful. 
 Acts 27, 10 Secopw on p-tTa vfipeais . . . p.(\- 
 \eiv ecretrSai TOP TT\OVI>. So C. pres. Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 3. 3 ; c. fut. Xen. An. 4. 7. 16. 
 
 4. to be ever about to do a thing, i. e. to 
 linger, to delay. Acts 22, 16 KOI vvv ri /xe X- 
 Xeis; Jos. Ant. 3. 2. 3. Hdian. 2. 2. 21. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 15. -f 
 
 yu,eXo?, tos, ovs, TO, 1 . a limb, member^ 
 of the body ; Matt. 5, 29. 30 Ij/ v pt\S>v 
 vov. Rom. 12, 4 bis. 1 Cor. 12, 12 bis. 14. 
 18. 19. 20. 22. 25. 26 quater. James 3, 5. 6. 
 So Hdot. 1. 119. m. V. H. 14. 7. Plato 
 Tim. 76. e. Plur. TO. p.e\r), the members, 
 collect, for the body, as the seat of the de 
 sires and passions, Rom. 6, 13 bis, TO. p.e\rj 
 \ijjL(av 6VXa afii/a ay V. 8iKaioo~uvr)S. V. 19 
 bis. 7, 5. 23 bis. Col. 3, 5. James 4, 1. 
 1 Cor. 6, 15 ter, ra o-a>/j.ara vfifav /^e Xj; 
 Xpio-Tov fcrriv . . . Tropfrjs jj-f^r], i. e. your 
 bodies are Christ s bodies, they belong to 
 Christ and not to a harlot. 
 
 2. Trop. a member of the church, of 
 which Christ is the Head, 1 Cor. 12, 27. 
 Eph. 5, 30; d\\fj\a>v p.f\ij members of one 
 another, i. e. as intimately united in Chris 
 tian fellowship, Rom. 1 2, 5. Eph. 4, 25. 
 
 Me\Xh o, indec. Melchi, Heb. h S^? 
 (my king) Malchi, pr. n. of two of Jesus 
 ancestors, Luke 3, 24. 28. 
 
 MeX^creSe tf, 6, indec. Melchisedek, 
 Heb. P^" 1 ^?^ (king of righteousness), 
 pr. n. of a king of Salem or Jerusalem, and 
 a patriarchal priest of Jehovah, cotemporary 
 with Abraham; comp. Gen. 14, 18 sq. Jos. 
 Ant. 1. 10. 2. Heb. 5, 6. 10. 6, 20. 7, 1. 
 
 10. 11. 15. 17. 21. 
 
 ), f. ^eXjjo-w, to be for care and con 
 cern to any one ; as dvSpcoTrotcrt /neXco Horn. 
 Od. 9. 20. Hence in N. T. Impers. /xe Xet, 
 impf. e/zeXe, imperat. /zeXeYo> 1 Cor. 7, 21, 
 it is for care, it concerns, with dat. of per 
 son ; but so that it may usually be rendered 
 personally, he cares for, he taketh care of. 
 So pr. c. gen. of the object, Buttm. $ 132. 
 6. e. 1 Cor. 9, 9 [JLTJ rS>v /3o o> /zeXei Seep ; 
 doth God take care of oxen 1 c. gen. impl. 
 
 1 Cor. 7, 21. So Jos. Ant. 7. 1. 6. Luc. 
 D. Mort. 22. 3. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 30. With 
 ire pi C. gen. Matt. 22, 16 ov jue Xet o-onrtpl 
 ov8fi>6s, i. e. thou carest for no one, art im 
 partial. Mark 12, 14. John 10, 13. 12, 6. 
 1 Pet. 5, 7. So 1 Mace. 14, 43. Jos. Ant. 
 12. 4. 2. Xen. Hi. 9. 10. Once with a 
 Neut. nominat. Acts 18, 17 ov&fv TOVTM 
 TaXXiwi ffj.f\(v, i. e. none of these things 
 was matter of concern to Gallio, he cared 
 for none of them ; see Matth. 5 348. n. 2 ; 
 comp. Buttm. 129. 18. So Horn. D. 
 5. .490. Eurip. Hippol. 104. With on, 
 Mark 4, 38 ov p.f\fi croi, on tz7roXXv/ie3a ; 
 Luke 10, 40. So c. to? Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 13. 
 
 /Ae/j,ppava, ys, 17, Lat. membrana, i. e. 
 membrane, skin, parchment, 2 Tim. 4, 13 
 (pepe . . . p.a\i(7Ta TUS pfpftpdvas. Comp. 
 Plin. H. N. 13. 21. 
 
 /u,e/ji(f)OfJiaL, f. ^op-ai, Mid. depon. to find 
 fault with, to blame, to censure, c. dat. Heb. 
 8, 8 p.fp,(p6iJ.fvos yap ai/Tols Xeyet. Absol. 
 Rom. 9, 19. Mark 7,2 Rec. Jos. c. Ap. 1. 
 20. Luc. D. Deor. 5. 3. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 2Q 
 
 fAe{iijrifj,oipo$, ov. 6, rj, adj. (fj.ffj.(pofj.at, 
 polpa,) finding fault with one s lot, repin 
 ing, complaining, Jude 16. Plut. de cohib. 
 Ira 13. Luc. D. Deor. 20. 4. 
 
 l*-V, a conjunctive particle expressing 
 affirmation or concession, truly, indeed, and 
 at the same time pointing forward to some 
 thing antithetic or different, which is then 
 commonly subjoined with 8e or an equiva 
 lent particle ; so that pen and Se correspond 
 to each other, and mark the protasis and 
 apodosis. Where there is antithesis, /ieV 
 ... fie may be rendered indeed . . . but ; in 
 many instances, however, they merely mark 
 transition, and cannot well be given in 
 English. See genr. Buttm. 149. m. 11. 
 Kiihner $ 322. Matth. 622. Herm. ad Vig. 
 p. 838 sq. The place of fj.ev is after the 
 word to which it belongs in sense, i. e. 
 usually after one, two, three, or even four 
 words in a clause (John 16, 22), never at 
 the beginning ; see Winer 65. 5. 
 
 1. Where there is a definite antithesis, 
 and nev retains its concessive power, in 
 deed, e. g. a) Followed by 8e in the 
 apodosis, so that pev ... fie is i. q. indeed . . . 
 but ; Matt. 3, 1 1 e yw /*eV /3a7m o> v/j.as ev 
 3Sari ... 6 fie oTriVw /zou tp^6p.vos. 9, 37 
 6 p.(v %fpicrp.bs 7TO\vs, ol fie e pyarai oXi yoi. 
 Mark 1, 8. John 16, 22. Acts 1, 5. Rom. 
 2, 7. 8. 1 Cor. 12, 20. Phil. 3, 1. Heb. 3, 
 5. 6. 1 Pet. 1, 20. al. saepiss. Placed irre 
 gularly, i. e. before the word to which it 
 refers, Acts 22, 3. Tit. 1,15 Rec. Comp. 
 
451 
 
 Winer 1. c. note. (Sept. Job 42, 5. JEl. H. 
 A. 2. 31. Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 11.) So too 
 piv yap and /iei> ovi/, where each parti 
 cle retains its own proper force, e. g. pev 
 yap . . . 8e, for indeed . . . but, Acts 13, 36 
 Aa/3S pfv yap . . . bv 8e 6 3e6y rjytiptv KT\. 
 for David indeed ... but. 23, 8. 25, 11. 
 Rom. 2, 25. 1 Cor. 11, 7. Heb. 7, 18. al. 
 Inverted Acts 28, 22. (Wisd. 7, 30. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 5.) Also pev ovv...8e, 
 where ovv is illative and ptv refers to Se , 
 indeed therefore, then . . . but, Acts 18, 14 sq. 
 ft p(V ovv rjv d8iKT]pd n . . . (I 8e fijT7?/xa 
 *rX. 19, 38 sq. 1 Cor. 9, 25. Phil. 2, 23. 
 So Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 40. 
 
 b) With some other particle in the apo- 
 dosis, Buttm. 1. c. Matth. 1. c. Winer 64. 
 2. e. fin. E.g. pev. ..d\\d Rom. 14,20; 
 pev yap . . . dXXd Acts 4, 16 sq. 1 Cor. 14, 
 17. (Luc. D. Deor. 8 pen. Xen. CEc. 3. 6.) 
 pev . . .entiTo. John 11, 6 sq. James 3, 
 17 ; comp. Matth. 5 622. 6. (Xen. Mem. 1. 
 4.11.) pev. ..KOI Acts 27, 21 sq. 1 Thess. 
 2, 18. (Luc. D. Deor. Marin. 8. 1.) pet* . . . 
 n\t Luke 22 > 22 - (Hdian. 6. 7. 11, 20.) 
 So pev ovv . . . xai Acts 26, 4 comp. v. 6 ; 
 ptv ovv . . . ravvv Acts 17, 30. 
 
 c) The adversative particle (Se or the 
 like) is sometimes wanting after pev, either 
 because the antithesis is expressed in some 
 other way, as Heb. 12, 9 ; or because the 
 apodosis itself is omitted, e. g. a) Where 
 the apodosis is obviously implied, Winer 
 
 1. c. init. Matth. $ 622. 6. Acts 19, 4 Icodv- 
 VTJS pev e /3a7rri(re fidTmcrpa peravoias KT\. 
 supp. but not so Jesus. Rom. 7, 12 coo-re 
 6 ptv vopos aytos, supp. but not this abuse 
 of it, comp. v. 7 sq. Col. 2, 23. Heb. 6, 
 16. So Soph. Antig. 1336. /3) Where 
 through a change of construction the writer 
 neglects the apodosis, Winer 1. c. Acts 1, 
 1 TOV pev npioTov \6yov KT\. where the apo 
 dosis would regularly come in before v. 3, 
 c but in this second book ; but the writer 
 neglects it and turns to something else. 
 Rom. 1, 8. 10, 1. 2 Cor. 12, 12 ; pev ydp 
 11,4. y) Or sometimes the apodosis is 
 as it were obliterated, and then pev serves 
 to insulate some person or thing, and so to 
 exclude every thing else which might other 
 wise be expected, Lat. quidem, Buttm. 1. c. 
 So espec. with a pers. pron. as eyo> pev, 7 
 indeed, I at least, 1 Cor. 3, 4. Rom. 11, 13. 
 1 Thess. 2, 18 ; f yw pev ovv Acts 26, 9. 
 Also ft. v ydp, as irpS>rov pev yap Rom. 3, 
 
 2. 1 Cor. 11, 18. So Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 12. 
 Conv. 2. 5. 
 
 d) Vice versa, 8e sometimes stands in 
 the apodosis without pev in the protasis, 
 
 e. g. Luke 11, 47 ; oval vp iv, OTI . . . ot 3 
 irarepfs vpcov KT\. See Matth. } 288. 4. 
 
 2. Where the antithesis is less definite, 
 so that pev . . ,8e serve to mark transition 
 or are merely continuative ; here the force 
 of pev cannot well be given in English, 
 while 8f is to be rendered but, and, etc. 
 Thus 
 
 a) Simpl. pev . . . 8e, Matt. 25, 33 o-r^<r 
 TO. pev 7rpd/3ara e< Seta>i/ auroi), ra 8e epi- 
 (pia KT\. he shall set the sheep on his right 
 hand, but (and) the goats on his left. Luke 
 
 13, 9. 23, 56 comp. 24, 1. Acts 14, 12. 
 Rom. 8, 17. 1 Cor. 1, 23. 2 Tim. 4, 4. 
 Jude 8. Comp. Buttm. 1. c. Matth. $ 622. 
 So 2 Mace. 3, 40 comp. 4, 1. Xen. Cyr. 2. 
 1. 10. ib. 4. 5- 15. 
 
 b) With ovv, i. e. pev ovv, in Engl. 
 only therefore, then, e. g. a) Followed by 
 8e, Mark 16, 19 6 p.tv ovv Kvpios dceXr;03ij 
 . . . (Kflvoi 8f e ^eXSoWes *rX. John 19, 24 sq. 
 Acts 1, 6 sq. 2, 41 comp. 42. 5, 41 comp. 
 6,1. 8, 4sq. 9, 31 sq. 12,5. 13, 4 comp. 6. 
 
 14, 3 sq. 15, 3 sq. 23, 18 sq. 28, 5 sq. /3) 
 Without 8e, where /neV ovv then serves as a 
 continuative, with a certain degree of illa 
 tive force, Engl. then, therefore, Lat. et qui 
 dem. comp. Herm. ad Vig. p. 843. n. 342. 
 Acts 23, 22. 1 Cor. 6,4. Heb. 7, 11. (Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 1. 2. ib. 4. 3. 1.) Followed by 
 icat, Acts 1, 18. 26, 4 comp. 6. Comp. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 3. Or also with an affirm 
 ative power, yea then, indeed, certainly, verily, 
 comp. Viger. p. 541 et Herm. p. 842. n. 343. 
 Acts 26, 9. Heb. 9, 1. 1 Cor. 6, 7 f}8rj /V 
 
 OVV 6\CCS TJTTTJfJLa VfUV fOTlV, OTi KT\. UOW 
 
 assuredly there is wholly a fault among you, 
 that etc. (Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 37.) So dXXa 
 fjitv ovv Phil. 3, 8 ; see in dXXa no. 3. d. 
 
 3. In clauses expressing partition or dis 
 tribution : a) With the art. 6, 17, TO, or 
 the relat. Ss, rj, o, Buttm. 5 126. 2, 3. E. g. 
 followed by Se, as 6 p.e v . . . 6 8e, the one 
 ...the other, this . . . that, Phil. 1, 16. 17. 
 Heb. 7, 5. 6. 21 sq. also one . . . another, and 
 Plur. some . . . others, Matt. 22, 5. 6. Ac.ts 
 14, 4. 17, 32 ; 6 p.ev . . . oXXo? <? , one . . 
 another, Matt. 16, 14. John 7, 12. So bs 
 p.fv . . . os 8e, the one . . . the other, Luke 
 23, 33. 2 Cor. 2, 16 ; bs pev . . . 6 8e do-3e- 
 vcav, the one . . . but the weak, Rom. 14, 2 ; 
 also one . . . another, Plur. some . . . others, 
 Matt. 13, 8. Acts 27, 44. Rom. 9, 21. Jude 
 22. 1 Cor. 12, 28 ovs ptv, where the writer 
 falls out of the construction and proceeds 
 with TrpeoTov, 8tvrepov, rplrov. Further, or 
 ptv . . . oXXos 8e, one . . . another, Matt. 13, 
 4sq. Mark 4, 4. 5. 1 Cor. 12, 8 sq. Fol 
 lowed by KCU, as oy n(v . . . Ka\ erepos, 0716 
 
fjievovv 
 
 452 
 
 . . . and another, Luke 8, 5 sq. b) With 
 other pronouns, as <ryo> p.ev . . . eya> Se ter 
 1 Cor. 1, 12 ; aXXoy ptv . . . aXXos 8e 1 Cor. 
 15, 39 ; rls fj.fi> . . . TIS 8e Phil. 1, 15 ; rovro 
 ft(v . . . roOro 8e, partly . . . partly, Heb. 1 0, 
 33, comp. Matth. 288. n. 2. Herm. ad 
 Vig. p. 702. So Isocr. Panegyr. p. 44. d. 
 Hdot. 3. 106. c) With an adv. as &8e 
 ftev . . . fKfl Se Heb. 7, 8, comp. Buttm. 149. 
 m. 14. Genr. John 16, 9. 10. 11. + 
 
 /jievovv, better pev ovv, see in p.ev no. 
 1. a, b, and no. 2. b. Later ecclesiastical 
 writers place it first in a clause, contrary to 
 earlier usage, Phryn. et Lob. p. 342 ; comp. 
 in fj.fv init. 
 
 fievovwye, i. q. p.ev ovv but stronger, 
 yea then rather, yea indeed, yea verily, comp. 
 in ptv no. 2. b. /3 ; Luke 11, 28. Rom. 9, 
 20. 10, 18. [Phil. 3, 8.] Comp. Viger. p. 
 541. So Nicet. Annal. 21. 11. p. 415. In 
 N. T. and ecclesiastical writers it is placed 
 first in a sentence, contrary to earlier usage ; 
 Sturz de Dial. Alex. p. 203. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 342. Comp. in pevovv. 
 
 fiievroi conjunct. (/*, TOI enclit.) pr. i.q. 
 pei> affirmative or concessive, but stronger, 
 indeed then, truly, certainly, forsooth, espec. 
 in negative clauses and answers, see Buttm. 
 5 149. m. 27. Kiihner 316. n. Matth. 622. 
 So Plato Phffid. p. 68. b. p. 73. d. Xen. 
 Lac. 1. 1. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. indeed then, indeed therefore; or, the 
 force of p.tv being lost in English, therefore, 
 then, i. q. p.tv ovv, see in ptv no. 2. b ; 
 so followed by fie, James 2, 8. Xen. Hell. 
 4. 8. 5. Hi. 1. 25. 
 
 2. As marking exception or contrast, yet, 
 yet still, nevertheless, howbeit, John 4, 27 
 ovoels p-fvrvi eiVe- ri forfls ; 7, 13. 12,42 
 o/zws p.fVToi. 20, 5. 21, 4. 2 Tim. 2, 19. 
 Jude 8. Jos. Ant. 1. 18. 6. Xen. Cyr. 2. 
 
 1. 5 ; ofius p.evroi Ceb. Tab. 33. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 2. 3. 22. 
 
 fJbeva), f. p.eva>, aor. 1 epeiva, perf. fj.ffj.e- 
 vr) K a, Buttm. 5101. n. 9. 5 112. 6; plupf. 
 3 plur. fifp.fvr]Kfio-av 1 John 2, 19, see 
 Buttm. 83. n. 7. Winer j 12. 8. 
 
 1. Intrans. to stay, to remain, to abide, 
 Lat. maneo. 
 
 a) In a place, i. e. of persons remaining or 
 dwelling in a place ; so c. adv. Matt. 10, 11 
 KaKfl fitivaTe. 26, 38. John 2, 12. With 
 tv c. dat. of place Luke 8, 27 eV ol<ia OVK 
 tpevev. John 7, 9. 8, 35. Acts 20, 15. 27, 
 31. 2 Tim. 4, 20 ; eV rf) alula impl. John 8, 
 35. Acts 16, 15. With perd c. gen. of 
 person Luke 24, 29, and with the notion of 
 help John 14, 16. With napd c. dat. of 
 
 pers. John 14, 25. Acts 18, 3. 20, and with 
 the notion of help John 14, 17. Also a3 
 favrov ptvtiv to dwell by oneself Acts 28, 
 16 comp. 30. With o-vv c. dat of pers. 
 Luke 1, 56. Spec. i. q. to lodge, c. TTOV 
 John 1, 39. 40 ; iv c. dat. of place Luke 19, 
 5 ; irapd c. dat. of pers. John 4, 40. Acts 9, 
 43, comp. 10, 6. Sept. c. /iera for 312^ 
 Gen. 24, 55. So c. adv. 1 Mace. 11, 40. 
 Xen. An. 1. 3. 11 ; ev Hdian. 4. 3. 10 ; /wra 
 Plut. Mor. II. p. 25 ; irapd Ceb. Tab. 9. 
 Of things, with ri c. gen. John 19, 31 tra 
 p.T] fJ.(ivfl firl TOV aravpov TO. crco/iara. (Comp. 
 Hdian. 4. 4. 9.) Trop. with eVi c. dat. 
 2 Cor. 3, 14. 
 
 b) In any state or condition, c. adv. 1 Cor. 
 7, 8. 40 (civ ovrci) p-tivT). With tv c. dat. 
 John 12, 46 Iv TTJ ovcori a fj.r) p-fivrj. 1 Cor. 
 7, 20. 24. 1 John 3, 14 ; c. Iv impl. Phil. 1, 
 25 comp. 24. (Hdian. 2. 1.15.) With dat. 
 of pers. to remain to one, i. e. in his power, 
 Acts 5, 4. (Sept. Dan. 4, 23 ; comp. Hdian. 
 3. 7. 6.) With a subst. or adj. implying 
 condition or character ; 1 Cor. 7, 1 1 /xeVerw 
 ayapos. 2 Tim. 2, 13 (Kf ivos TTICTTOS p.fv(i. 
 Heb. 7, 3 p.fvfi Ifptvs- Also things, John 
 12, 24 avros [6 KOKKOS] p.6vos p.(Vfi, i. e. 
 sterile. Acts 27, 41 TJ p.tv irpaipa. (fj.(iv(t> 
 do-aXevroy. With an adj. impl. e. g. aad- 
 \tvras, firm, stedfast, Rom. 9, 11 ; opp. to 
 Karaicatfo-3ai 1 Cor. 3, 14. Part. p.evov opp. 
 npcftfv, i. e. remaining unsold, Acts 5, 4 
 ou^l fitvov, <rol ffifve ; comp. above. So 
 Luc. D. Deor. 8 pen. Soph. Trach. 176. 
 Hdian. 8. 5. 1. With an adjunct of time 
 during or to which a person or thing re 
 mains, continues, endures ; 1 Cor. 15, 6 ot 
 TrXfiovs fievovcriv eais apri. Matt. 11, 23 
 p-fXP* 1 r ^ J crrjiMfpov. John 21, 22. 23 eav av- 
 TOV Se Xw ptvtiv ea>s ep^o/xat. (Xen. An. 2. 
 3. 24.) Rev. 17, 10 6\iyov avrov 8f1 fj.f~ivai, 
 i. e. retain his power, opp. Treereti/. John 12, 
 34 els TOV alwva, and so 2 Cor. 9, 9. 1 Pet. 
 1, 25. (Sept. Ps. 9, 8. 112, 6. 9.) So ds 
 <0T]v altaviov John 6, 27. Hence absol. 
 with the idea of perpetuity, i. q. to remain 
 or endure forever, to be perpetual, e. g. Chris 
 tian graces, rewards, institutes, and the like ; 
 1 Cor. 13, 13 vvv 8f pevei TTiVns, e\Tris, dyd- 
 TTTJ. Heb. 13, 1. John 15, 16. Heb. 10, 34. 
 12, 27. 2 Cor. 3, 11. 
 
 c) Of the relation in which one person 
 or thing stands to another, chiefly in John s 
 writings ; thus, to remain in or with any 
 one, is i. q. to be and remain united with 
 him, one with him, in heart, mind, will ; 
 e. g. with eV C. dat. of pers. John 6, 56 tv 
 p.ol fj,evfi, Kclyu) ev avTO>. 14, 10. 15, 4. 5. 
 G. 7. 1 John 2, 6. 3,24. 4, 15. 16 ; wrd 
 
453 
 
 TWOS 1 John 2, 19. So to remain in any 
 thing, is i. q. to remain stedfast, to persevere 
 in it, e. g. with eV c. dat. John 8, 31 V ro> 
 Xoyw. 15, 9 et 1 John 4, 16 V r^ ayaTrj;. 
 
 1 John 2, 10 ev TW <pa>Ti. 2 John 9 lv rjj 
 SiSa^i/. So 1 Tim. 2, 15 eai> p.fiva>o~iv tv 
 jri orei. (2 Mace. 8, 1.) Vice versa, and in 
 a like general sense, the same things are 
 said to remain in a person, e. g. with eV c. 
 dat. of pers. John 5, 38 TOV \6yov O.VTOV OVK 
 \ere ptvovra tv vp.lv. 15, 11. 1 John 2, 14. 
 3, 17 TT&S TI dydnrj TOV 3eo) fj.evei tv avr<f ; 
 
 2 John 2. Comp. in e^o) no. 2. d. /3, ult. 
 In a kindred sense, spoken of divine gifts, 
 privileges, with eVi Tiva, John 1, 32. 33 TO 
 trvtvpa KUTaflaivov KOL pevov eV UVTOV. 1 John 
 3, 15 (v avrco. So of evils, John 3, 36 17 
 opy^ TOV 3. /xeWi eV O.VTOV. 9, 41 77 ovi/ 
 dp.apri a vp.5>v p,em sc. e<p up.aj, i. q. ye re 
 main in your sin. 
 
 2. Trans, to stay for any one, to wait for, 
 to await ; c. ace. Acts 20, 5 OVTOI f^evov 
 rjp.ds fv Tpadfit. V. 23 8e<r/ia p.e KOL ^\i\j/eis 
 fj.fvovo-1. Sept. for ""131"! Is. 8, 17. Dem. 
 50. 26. Xen. An. 4. 4. 20. -f 
 
 fj,epi%(0, f. i <ra>. (fjiepis,) to part, to divide 
 into parts, c. ace. Plato Farm. 131. c ; Pass. 
 Xen. An. 5. 1. 9. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. to divide out, to distribute, c. ace. e. g. 
 roils Ix^vas Mark 6, 41. Sept. for p^=n 
 Ex. 15, 9. Josh. 14, 5. So Hdian. 1. 17. 3. 
 Hence genr. to distribute, for to assign, 
 to grant, to bestow ; so of God Rom. 12, 3. 
 1 Cor. 7, 17. 2 Cor. 10, 13 ; genr. Heb. 
 
 7, 2. So Sept. Job 31, 2. Ecclus. 45, 20 
 or 28. 
 
 2. Mid. p.fpiop.ai TI p.eru TWOS, to divide 
 any thing with another, to share with ; Luke 
 12, 13 p.epi(ra(T2ai p-er e /ioC TTJV K}\.rjpovofj.Lav. 
 Comp. 03? pi" and Sept. Prov. 29, 24. 
 Dem. 913. 1 ; comp. Jos. Ant. 1. 8. 3. Hdian. 
 
 3. 10. 12. 
 
 3. Trop. Pass, of persons, to be divided into 
 parties and factions, to be disunited ; Matt. 
 12, 25 bis. 26. Mark 3, 24. 25. 26. (Pol. 
 
 8. 23. 9.) Spec. 1 Cor. 1,13 lupepurrai 6 
 Xpia-Tos ; is Christ divided 1 i. e. are there 
 parts or divisions in Christ ? 1 Cor. 7, 34 
 ue/if picrrat 17 yvvf] KOI TJ irap Stvos, a wife 
 and a virgin are divided, different, sc. in 
 their interests. So Hdian. 3. 10. 6. 
 
 fjuepifiva, as, f], (p-fpis, p-ep/fw,) care, 
 anxiety, anxious thought, as dividing up and 
 distracting the mind ; Matt. 13, 22 et Mark 
 
 4, 19 p.fpifjivai TOV alutvos TOVTOV, i. e. for 
 this world s goods, worldly cares. Luke 8, 
 14. 21,34. 2 Cor. 11,28. 1 Pet. 5, 7. 
 Sept. Ps. 55, 23. ^Eschyl. Bum. 360. Plut. 
 de \ 7 irt. et Vit. 2. 
 
 >, f. T]<T(O, (jLiept/iva,) to care, 
 to be anxious, troubled, to take anxious 
 thought ; absol. Matt. 6, 27 ris 8e tg vp.S)v 
 Hfpt/jivav bvvaTai KT\. V. 31. Luke 12, 25. 
 Phil. 4, 6. (Plato Rep. 607. c.) With dat. 
 of that for which, Matt. 6, 25 p.f) p.fpip.vaTf 
 TJJ ^fv^fj vpfav. Luke 12, 22 ; fls TO avpiov 
 Matt. 6, 34; jrcpi c. gen. Matt. 6, 28. Luke 
 12, 26; Trtpi c. ace. Luke 10, 41 ; wre p c. 
 gen. 1 Cor. 12, 25 ; irS>s Matt. 10, 19. Luke 
 12, 11. (Dem. 576. 23 p.epip.i/ai TO. Strata 
 Ae yetz/.) With accus. of thing, pr. as to or 
 for which one cares, Buttm. 131. 7; 
 hence to oare for, to take care of, 1 Cor. 7, 
 32. 33. 34 bis, ^epijuva ra TOV Kvpiov . . . ra 
 ToC /coV/iou. Matt. 6, 34 TO (CIVTTJS. -Phil. 2, 
 20 ra Trept v^v. So Wisd. 12, 22. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 7. 12 KOI TO TroXXa pfpifivqv. 
 fApif, i os, 17, (/i/por,) a part, e. g. 
 
 1 . Of a country, i. e. a division, province, 
 Acts 16, 12; see in MaxeSovia. So Sept. 
 and P^ Josh. 18, 6. Comp. /j.fpi8dpxr)s 
 
 1 Mace. 10, 65. Jos. Ant. 12. 5. 5. 
 
 2. Genr. a part assigned, portion, share, 
 trop. Acts 8, 21 OVK ecrrt croi /tepi? . . . ev 
 T<a Xo yw rovrw. Sept. and p-?ri Gen. 31, 
 14. Deut. 12, 12. So pr. Plut . Agesil. 17. 
 Dem. 1039. 22. Also portion, lot, destiny, 
 as assigned of God, Luke 10, 42 TTJV dya^v 
 pfplda f^eXe^aro. Sept. and P^H Ecc. 3, 
 22. 9, 9. Dan. 4, 12. 
 
 3. As implying participation, fellowship. 
 
 2 Cor. 6, 15 TIS p-fpls Trtcrro) pera cnn orou; 
 
 Col. 1, 12 flS TTJV fJ.fpi8a TOV K\TjpOV, i. 6. SO 
 
 as to be partakers of the inheritance, etc. 
 Sept. for M pin Deut. 10, 9. Ps. 50, 18. 
 
 /i6|0icr/409, ov, 6, (p-fpi jjco,) partition, di 
 vision, separation, Heb. 4, 12. So Plut. 
 Rep. ger. Prase. 15. p. 85. Plato Legg. 
 903. b. Also distribution, and so for gift, 
 Heb. 2, 4 irvfv/jiaTos dyiov ynfptcrp,oiy, comp 
 in p.epi d> no. 1. So genr. Pol. 31. 18. 1. 
 
 /ieptcTTT??, ov, 6, (p.fpt o>,) a divider, dis 
 tributor, Luke 12, 14. 
 
 pepos, tos, ovs, TO, (kindr. p.e/pop.at,) a 
 part, e. g. 
 
 1. In respect to a whole, a part, a por 
 tion, piece, a) Genr. and absol. John 19, 23 
 bis, TeVtrapa p-e pr; KT\. Rev. 16, 19. With 
 gen. of the whole, Luke 15, 12 TO eVt^dX 
 Xoi> juepoj Trjs ovcrias. 24, 42 t^Svos 
 OTTTOV p.pos. So c. gen. impl. Luke 11, 36 
 
 fJLT] (%OV Tl fifpOS (TKOTflVOV, SC. TOV (TW/JiaTOS, 
 
 and so Eph. 4, 16. (In full Hdian. 8. 4. 
 27.) Acts 5, 2 supp. TTJS Ttp-ijj. 23, 6 supp. 
 ToC o-vvfo piov comp. v. 1, and so v. 9 ; or it 
 may in v. 9 be rendered parly. 1 9, 27 TOVTO 
 Kivdvvevfi TO p-epoy, this part, this branch of. 
 
454 
 
 labour, this our trade. So genr. Diod. Sic. 
 1. 28; c. gen. Hdian. 7. 12. 13. Xen. Cyr. 
 1.6. 14 ; gen. impl. 8. 4. 29. Hence often 
 in adverbial significations, e. g. accus. p.e- 
 pos TI in some part, partly, 1 Cor. 11, 18; 
 Buttm. I 131. 7. (Thuc. 2. 64.) dirb pe- 
 povs,in part, partly, in some degree, 2 Cor. 
 1, 14. 2, 5. Rom. 11, 25. 15, 15. 24. (Diod. 
 Sic. 13. 108.) fK p,epovs, in part, partly, 
 i. e. imperfectly, 1 Cor. 13, 9 bis. 12. v. 10 
 TO IK pepour this in part, this piecemeal 
 knowledge ; also in particular, individually, 
 
 1 Cor. 12, 27; KOTO pepos particularly, in 
 detail, Heb. 9, 5, see in Kara II. 3. c. So Pol. 
 1. 4. 3. Thuc. 4. 26. b) Of a country, 
 the earth, a part, tract, region ; Matt. 2, 22 
 els TO. pepr) TTJS FaXiXaias. 15, 21. 16, 13. 
 Mark 8, 10. Acts 2, 10 ; absol. 19, 1. 20, 2. 
 So Eph. 4, 9 TO. Karcorepa pep?; TTJS yr\s, see 
 in jcarcorepoy. Sept. for ^5 Neh. 3, 15. 
 (Hdian. 2. 11. 8. ib. 6. 5. 15.) So of a ship, 
 a part, side, quarter ; John 21, 6 ra 8eia 
 pepq ToC TrXot ou. Sept. and 2?bS Ex. 26, 35. 
 So 1 Mace. 9, 12. c) Trop. a part of a gen 
 eral topic, a particular ; Col. 2, 16 eV pepei 
 fopTTJs rj vovp.T)i>ias KT\. in the particular of 
 a festival, i. e. in respect of. Also eV TO> pepei 
 TOVT(O, in this particular, in this respect, 
 
 2 Cor. 3, 10. 9, 3. 1 Pet. 4, 16. So Philo 
 in Flacc. p. 989. d. JEl. V. H. 8. 3. 
 
 2. apart assigned, portion, share; Rev. 
 22, 19 d(paipr]o-fi 6 3e6s TO p-e pos auToC. 
 Adv. dva pe pos pr. each in his part or turn, 
 by course, one after another, 1 Cor. 14, 27. 
 (Pol. 3. 55. 8.) Also portion, lot, destiny, 
 as assigned of God ; Matt. 24, 51 KOI TO pe- 
 pos avTOV peTa TO>V {nroKpiTcov Sqo-et. Luke 
 12, 46. Rev. 21, 8. Sept. for P^H Ecc. 5, 
 18 ; comp. in ptpi s no. 2. Soph. Antig. 
 147. Thuc. 1. 127. 
 
 3. As implying participation, fellow ship; 
 John 13, 8 OVK e^ets pepoj per e poC. Rev. 
 20, 6. Comp. in pepi s no. 3. 
 
 fMecrr/fAppici) as, rj, (peVoy, ^pe pa, Buttm. 
 5 19. n. 1,) mid-day, noon, Acts 22, 6. Sept. 
 for C jnns Gen. 43, 16. 25. So Hdian. 1. 
 17. 1. Xen. Hell. 5. 3. 1. Meton. the mid 
 day quarter, the south, Acts 8, 26. So Jos. 
 A nt. 4. 5. 2. Xen. Cyr. 1.1.5. 
 
 ?, in some Mss. for Mecrcrias. 
 
 i), f. evo-co, (peo-tTT^s,) to be a 
 mediator, arbiter, Jos. Ant. 16. 4. 3 ult. 
 Diod. Sic. 19. 71 ; to mediate for any one, 
 to intercede, Jos. Ant. 7. 8. 5. In N. T. 
 to intervene with any thing, i. e. to inter 
 pose ; Heb. 6, 17 6 pKw e peo-iVevo-e he inter 
 posed with an oath, i. e. between himself 
 and the other party, by way of confirmation, 
 
 ratification, pledg "- 
 Ant. 4. 6. 7. 
 
 Comp. pecriTT) ? Jos. 
 
 ov, 6, (peVos, c?pi to go,) a 
 go-between, a mediator, one who intervenes 
 between two parties, e. g. 
 
 1 . As an interpreter, internuntius, a mere 
 medium of communication, e. g. Moses, 
 Gal. 3, 19. 20. Jos. Ant. 16. 2. 2. Diod. 
 Sic. 4. 54. 
 
 2. As an intercessor, reconciler ; so of 
 Christ, 1 Tim. 2, 5 peo-ir^f 3eo /cat dz>3pa>- 
 irav. Heb. 8, 6. 9, 15. 12, 24. Sept. for 
 rvOTO Job 9, 33. Plut. Is. et Osir. 46. 
 The earlier Greeks used peVoj SiKaorij? 
 Thuc. 4. 83 ; or peo-/8tos Aristot. Polit. 5. 
 6. See Lob. ad Phryn. p. 121 sq. 
 
 ov, TO, 
 
 p.faos, vv,) midnight, Luke 11, 5. Acts 
 16, 25. 20, 7. Put for the midnight watch 
 Mark 13, 35; comp. in (piiXaitf). Sept. for 
 
 n V^ h ^n Jud g- 16 > 3 - Ruth 3 > 8. Luc. 
 Merc. cond. 26. Diod. Sic. 20. 48. Used by 
 the later prose writers, although Phrynicus 
 assigns it to poetry ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 53. 
 
 MecroTTOTafJUa, as, 17, (p-eVos, Trorop-o y,) 
 Mesopotamia, pr. Mid-river, the fertile 
 tract of country lying between the rivers 
 Euphrates and Tigris, extending from the 
 northern mountains to Babylon and below, 
 Acts 2, 9. 7, 2. The Hebrew name was 
 E"?^"!!? Q^? Syria of the two rivers Gen. 
 24, 10; also ens j nB the Plain of Syria, 
 Gen. 25, 20. 28, 2. It now belongs to the 
 Turkish dominion, under the name el-Jezi- 
 rah, the peninsula. See Rosenm. Bibl. 
 Geogr. II. ii. p. 133, 155. Ritter Erdk. 
 Th.XI. 
 
 pecroSj f], 6v, (kindr. with p-era,) mid, 
 middle, midst. 
 
 1. Adj. e. g. p-t oT/ ^p-e pa mid-day, pea-rj 
 vvt; mid-night, Acts 26, 13. Matt. 25, 6. 
 This is a later form instead of the earlier 
 p-to-ov f]p.fpas (comp. Acts 27, 17), p-ecrova-a 
 Tjp-epa. p.eo-J7p.#pia, comp. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 53 sq. 465. So Sept. Ex. 11, 4. 1 K. 
 3, 20. Esdr. 9, 41. In an adverbial sense, 
 Buttm. 5 123. 6. Luke 23, 45 fVxiVSj? TO 
 KaTaneTaapa TOV vaov p.eo~ov. John 19, 18. 
 Acts 1,18. With a gen. John 1, 26 p-eVos 
 Se vfj.S>v f<TTJ]Kf in the midst of you, among 
 you. Matt. 14, 24 TO 8e nXoiov fjdr) p.eo-ot> 
 TTJS 3a\do-oT;y rjv, the vessel was now mid- 
 icay of the lake. Comp. Buttm. $ 132. 5. b. 
 Matth. 5354. r). Sept. for T^HS Gen. 15, 
 10. So Luc. Conv. 43 ; c. gen. Jos. B. J. 
 3. 8. 1. Hdian. 3. 9. 5. 
 
 2. Neut. TO ft f 0-ov as Subst. the middle, 
 
455 
 
 fj,era 
 
 the midst, only with prepositions. a) avu 
 pfo-ov, in the midst of, among, c. gen. of 
 pers. or thing, Matt. 13, 25. Mark 7, 31. 
 1 Cor. 6, 5. Rev. 7, 17. See more in dvd 
 no. 1. b) 8 1 a jieo-ov, through the midst 
 of, c. gen. of pers. or place, Luke 4. 30. 
 17,11. JohnS, 59. Sept. for Tpna Jer. 
 37, 4. So Plut. Solon 14. Xen. An. 1. 4. 
 4. c) fls /j.f<rov, els TO fjLtcrov, into the 
 midst of an assembly, etc. Mark 3, 3 eyetpai 
 fls TO fj.fo-ov. Luke 4, 35. 5, 19. Also by 
 attraction in Mark 14, 60. Luke 6, 8. John 
 
 20, 19. 26; see in fls no. 4. Sept. for 
 Tpprbx Ex. 14, 23 ; tpna Ex. 11, 4. So 
 Luc. adv. Indoct. 29. Xen. An. 1. 5. 14. 
 d) fK pto-ov, out of the midst, c. gen. of 
 pers. from among Matt. 13, 49. Acts 17, 
 33. 23, 10. 1 Cor. 5, 2. 2 Cor. 6, 17. Sept. 
 for rp na Ex. 7, 5 ; a^o Ex. 31, 13. Ab- 
 sol. aipfiv fK TOV /j.fcrov to take away from 
 the midst, toilers, e media, i. e. to abolish, to 
 destroy, Col. 2, 14 ; also yiWo-Sat e/c /aeVou id. 
 neut. 2 Thess. 2, 7. So Xen. An. 1. 5. 14 e* 
 TOV peo-ov f iWao-3at. e) fVfJiftrtf, tv T<a 
 p,e<rq>, in the midst, absol. Matt. 14,6 cop^o-" 7 " 
 tv r<5 fj.fo-(p i. e. before Herod and his guests. 
 John 8, 9, comp. v. 2. (Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 46.) 
 With gen. of thing or place, Mark 6, 47 lv 
 p. T^S SaXao-o-r/s. Luke 21, 21. 22, 55. 
 Acts 17, 22. Heb. 2, 12. Rev. 1, 13. 2, 1. 
 [2, 7.] 4, 6. 5, 6. 6, 6-. 22, 2. With gen. 
 of pers. in the midst of, among, Matt. 18, 20. 
 Luke 2, 46 eV /ie erw T>V SiSacncaXwi/. 22, 
 27. 55. 24, 36. Acts 1, 15. 2, 22. 27, 
 
 21. 1 Thess. 2, 7. Phil. 2, 15. Rev. 5, 6. 
 Also by attract, in Matt. 10, 16. 18, 2. 
 Mark 9, 36. Luke 8, 7. 10, 3. John 8, 3. 
 Acts 4, 7 ; see in lv no. 4. Sept. for 
 ?pn3 Gen. 1,6. 23, 10 ; a^a Deut. 29, 
 11. So Xen. Cyr. 8. 5. 8. ib. 8. 6. 22. 
 f) KOTO. p.f<rov TTJS WKTOS, about midnight, 
 Acts 27, 27. Sept. for a-jjsa Josh. 1, 11. 
 So Xen. An. 6. 2. 17 Kara p.. Trjs Qpaxrjs, 
 comp. Cyr. 5. 3. 52. 
 
 fJieaOTOl^OV, ov, TO, (p.eo-os, i-ol^oy.) a 
 middle-icall, partition, trop. of the Mosaic 
 law as separating the Jews and Gentiles, 
 Eph. 2, 14. Some suppose here an allusion 
 to the wall between the inner and outer 
 courts of the temple ; see in Itpov and Jos. 
 B. J. 5. 5. 2 ; comp. Rev. 11,1. 2. Clem. 
 Alex. 6. 13. Athen. 7. p. 281. d, Tw...p.f- 
 
 arcs, TO, (p-ta-os, oi/pa- 
 vos,*) mid-heaien, the midst of the heavens, 
 Rev. 8, 13. 14, 6. 19, 17. Eustath. ad II. 
 8. 68. Comp. /xeo-ovpai/eco Porph. de Ab- 
 etin. IV. 8. Strabo 2. p. 169. c. 
 
 ), u>, f. oxro), (^itcroy,) to be in the 
 middle, in the midst, mid-way, intrans. John 
 7, 14 TTJS fopTrjs p.faoiicrrjf, i. e. at the mid 
 dle of the festival. Sept. Ex. 12, 29. Time. 
 5. 57. Xen. Hell. 2. 2. 24. 
 
 , ov, 6, Messias, Heb. J^EO 
 Messiah, i. e. the Anointed, to which Xpto-roy 
 Christ corresponds in Greek; John 1,42. 
 4,25. 
 
 //.ecrroV, 77, 6v, full, filled, stuffed, with a 
 gen. of that of or with which a person or 
 thing is full, Button. \ 132. 10. a. John 19, 
 29 bis, crKfvos oovs P.TTOV KT\. 21, 11. 
 James 3, 8. Sept. for tfba Ez. 37, 1. Nah. 
 1,10. So Hdian. 5.4.4. Xen. An. 1 . 4. 1 9. 
 Trop. Matt. 23, 28 /xeoroi eWe vnoKpio-ecas. 
 Rom. 1, 29. 15, 14. James 3, 17. 2 Pet. 
 2, 14. So Sept. Prov. 6, 34. Xen. Conv. 
 1. 13. 
 
 /AeCTTOft), a, f. wcro), (/ieoro s,) lo fill, 
 Pass, to be filled, to be full, c. gen. Acts 2, 
 13 yXevKovs /j.f/^faTa>|ueVoi ettrt. 3 Mace. 
 5, 10; trop. Soph. Antig. 780. Plato Legg. 
 649. b. 
 
 //.era, prep, (kindr. /^eo-os,) governing 
 the genitive and accusative, in the poets 
 also the dative ; with the primary signif. 
 mid, amid, Germ, mit, i. e. in the midst, 
 with, among, implying accompaniment, and 
 thus differing from ari/v which expresses 
 conjrfnction, union. See Matth. J 587. Wi 
 ner 5 51. 5. h. p. 451. Buttm. 5 147. n. 1. 
 Tittm. de Synon. N. T. p. 176. 
 
 I. With the GENITIVE, implying compan 
 ionship, fellowship. E. g. 
 
 1. with, i. e. mid, amid, among, in the 
 midst of, as where one is said to sit, stand, 
 or be with or in the midst of others, with 
 gen. plur. of pers. or thing. Matt. 26, 58 
 fKcfaqTo fj.tTa TUI> vrrr]peT<i)v. Mark 1, 13. 
 14, 54. 62 fp^optvov jttera TOJV vffpeXtov TOV 
 ovpavov. Luke 24, 5. John 18, 5. Acts 20, 
 18. Rev. 21, 3. al. 1 John 4, >7. Comp. 
 Matth. et Winer 1. c. Horn. Od. 10. 320. 
 Eurip. Hec. 209. Xen. Hell. 4. 8. 16. 
 
 2. with, i. e. together with, along icilh. 
 
 a) Pr. and with gen. of pers. a) 
 Where one is said to go, remain, sit, stand, 
 or be with any one, in his company ; so with 
 a notation of place added, Matt. 5, 25 W 
 OTOV ei iv TT) 68<u /J.fr avroO. Luke 11, 7. 
 22, 21. John 3, 26. 11, 31. Rev. 3, 21. al. 
 Often without notation of place, e. g. /* j/eti/, 
 ttafuvtw, rrfpinaTflv, oiKflv p.(Ta TIVOS, to 
 abide, walk, dwell with any one, Luke 24, 
 29. 22, 28. John 6, 66. 1 Cor. 7, 13 ; t.rop. 
 p.tvtiv fjifTa TWOS, to continue on the aide 
 of any one, of his party, 1 John 2, 1 9. So 
 
//era 
 
 456 
 
 fj,era 
 
 tlvai pera TWOS, to be with any one, i. e. 
 in his company ; Matt. 9, 15 e <p oo-ov per 
 avTcov fo-Tiv 6 j/up(pi oj. Mark 5, 18. Luke 
 
 15, 31. John 7, 33. 2 Tim. 4, 11; also 
 yei/eV3ai pera nvos id. Acts 7, 38. 9, 19; 
 flvai impl. Mark 9,8. John 18,26; trop. 
 2 John 2. Hence ol ovres V. yei/dpei/oi pera 
 TWOS, ol pera TWOS, those with any one, his 
 companions, Matt. 12, 3. 4. Mark 16, 10. 
 Luke 6, 3. 4. Tit. 3, 15. (Ceb. Tab. 14. 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 25.) Trop. to be of one s 
 side or party. Matt. 12, 30 6p?) i^per e pov, 
 K.CLT f[j.ov eo-Ti. (Thuc. 3. 56. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 
 7.) Also to be present with any one for aid, 
 6. g. God, John 3, 2 eav pi) fj 6 3eoy per av- 
 TOV. 8, 29. Acts 7, 9. 2 Cor. 13, 11 ; ei- 
 vai impl. Matt. 1, 23. Rom. 15, 33; trop. 
 f] xe/p Kvpiov Luke 1, 66. Acts 11, 21. 
 Also Jesus, Matt. 28, 20 ; ewat impl. 
 2 Thess. 3, 16 ; the Holy Spirit John 14, 
 
 16. Also with flvai impl. to be ever with 
 any one, i. e. to be ever bestowed, given, 
 e. g. the divine favour, blessing, as ip the 
 closing benedictions of the epistles, Rom. 
 16, 20. 24. 1 Cor. 16, 23. 24. Heb. 13, 25. 
 2 John 3. Rev. 22, 21. ) Where one 
 is said to do or suffer any thing with another, 
 implying joint or mutual action, influence, 
 suffering ; Matt. 2, 3 HpcoS^s eVapa^S?; KOI 
 irucra lepocroXvpa per O.VTOV. 5, 41. 12, 30 
 fir/ (rvvdycav per e pov. v. 41. 18, 23. Mark 
 3, 6. 7. Luke 5, 29. 30. John 11, 1* 19, 
 18. Acts 24, 1. Rom. 12, 15 bis. 1 Thess. 
 3, 13. Heb. 13, 23. Rev. 3, 20. al. (Hdian. 
 3. 4. 12. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 12.) So where 
 with is equivalent to and, as often in 
 English, i. e. where Kai might stand ; Matt. 
 22, 16 aTTOortXXouo tz oirco TOVS paS^ray 
 avT&v pera roof HpeoStaz/ooz/, i. q. their own 
 disciples and the Herodians. 2, 11. 19, 10. 
 1 Cor. 16, 11. y) With gen. of a pers. 
 pron. after verbs of having or taking with 
 oneself; Matt. 15, 30 t^ovrts pe3 favT&v 
 XooXois KT\* 25, 3. Mark 14, 33. 2 Tim. 4, 
 11. So Diod. Sic. 20. 4. 8) Where the 
 accompaniment implies only nearness, con 
 tiguity ; Matt. 21, 2 Kai rrS>\ov per avrfjs. 
 Rev. 14, 1. Acts 2, 28 TrXr/pcoo-fts pe ev(ppo- 
 trvvrjs pera TOV TrpocrwTrov o~ov, in thy pre 
 sence, near thy person ; quoted from Ps. 
 16, 1 1 where Sept. for ?p3& n. Af 
 ter the verb aKoXovSe co, to follow, Luke 9, 
 
 49 OVK aKoXovSei pe3 ijpcov. Rev. 6, 8. 
 14, 13. This is a construction of the later 
 Greek instead of the dat. see Phryn. et 
 Lob. p. 353 ; comp. Matth. { 403. p. 738. 
 
 50 Dem. 608. 13. f) After verbs com 
 pounded with trvv, instead of the more 
 usual dative, Matt, j 405. Acts 1, 26 <rvy*a- 
 
 Tf\lsrj(j>io- 5r} pera TO>V drroo-ToXuv. 2 Cor. 8, 
 18. Gal. 2, 12. Matt. 17, 3. 20, 2. So 
 Diod. Sic. 13. 62. Dem. 330. 2. Aristoph. 
 Acharn. 277. See Lob. ad Phryn. p. 353, 
 354. 
 
 b) Trop. with gen. of thing, e. g. a) 
 As expressing the state or emotion of mind 
 which accompanies the doing of any thing, 
 with which one acts ; Matt. 28, 8 e |eX3o{i- 
 (Tai Ta%v pera tyofiov Kai ^apaj peydXijs. 
 Mark 3, 5. Luke 14, 9. Acts 20, 19. 24, 3. 
 Eph. 4, 2 bis. 2 Thess. 3, 12. 1 Tim. 2, 9. 
 Heb. 10,22.al. saep. Comp. Matth. 1. c. So 
 1 Mace. 7, 28. Hdian. 2. 13. 4. Diod. Sic. 
 
 13. 108. Xen. Ven. 13. 15. 0) As mark 
 ing an external action, circumstance, or 
 condition with or by which another action or 
 event is accompanied, e. g. Matt. 14, 7 pe3 
 vpKov a>no\6yr]o-fv avrfj. 24, 31 aTroareXei 
 TOVS ayye Xour avTov /xera o-aXn-iyyoy (pcoi iys 
 p.eyaX/r. Matt. 27, 66 together with the watch. 
 Mark 6, 25. 10, 30 comp. Winer 1. c. p. 
 451. Luke 9, 39. 17, 20. Acts 5, 26. 13, 
 17. 14, 23. 24, 18. 2 Cor. 8, 4. 1 Tim. 4, 
 
 14. Heb. 5, 7. 7, 21. al. saep. (Hdian. 3. 6. 
 7. Thuc. 1. 18 ult. 6. 28. Xen. Hi. 1. 33.) 
 Also often where it is equivalent to Kai, as 
 in English ; comp. above in a. /3, ult. Eph. 
 6, 23 flprjVT] . . Kai dydnr] p,fTa Trt orewr KT\. 
 Col. ], 11. 1 Tim. 1,14. 2,15. 3,4. 2 Tim. 
 2, 10. Heb. 9, 19. al. y) With gen. of 
 thing which one has or takes along with 
 him, or with which he is furnished, comp. 
 above in a. y. Matt. 24, 30 /xera gvi/a/xetos 
 Kai Sogijs. Mark 14, 43 o^Xoy TTO\VS p-era 
 p-a^atpaij/ /crX. John 18, 3. Acts 26, 12; 
 comp. 9, 2 et 22, 5. So Luc. Philops. 8. 
 Thuc. 6. 28. Lys. 101. 17 p.er oLvov X- 
 Seij . 8) After the verb ptyvvfju to min 
 gle, Matt. 27, 34 oos pera ^oX^y peptype- 
 vov. Luke 13, 1 a>v TO atpa HiXaToy ep ^ 6 
 pera ra>j/ SvcrtcSi/ avToav. So Plato Tim. p. 
 35. a, fjuyvvs 8e pera TIJS ovaias Kai tK TK>V 
 TpuSv TToirjo-dfjifvos ev. The more usual 
 construction is with the dat. Matth. { 403. 
 b; comp. Hdian. 5. 5. 16. 
 
 c) From the Heb. pera is sometimes put 
 like ES, r.N, where the common Greek 
 construction is different, espec. after verbs 
 and nouns implying joint or mutual action, 
 influence, suffering, where in Engl. also we 
 say with ; e. g. a) After words imply 
 ing accord or discord, Luke 23, 1 2 eytvovro 
 8e (pi Xot . . . per aXXjjXcov. (So C. dat. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 33.) Rom. 12, 18 pera 
 Trdirutv aV2lpu>7r&)j flprjvevovTfS. (Sept. 1 K. 
 22, 45 ; c. dat. Job 5, 23. Ecclus. 6, 6.) 
 Heb. 12, 14. John 3, 25 ft-n^vis . . . 
 /iTa TWV lovSaiW. 1 Cor. 6, 6. 7. Rev. 2, 
 
fj-era 
 
 457 
 
 16 TroXf^ijcro) /ier avraiv. 11, 7. 12, 17. 
 13, 7. Here the dat. is more common, 
 Matth. -404. c. /3) After noi^fvat, rrop- 
 wuco, and the like ; Rev. 2, 22 rovs ^otxfv- 
 ovras (JLfT avTrjs. 17, 2. 18, 3. 9 ; also 14, 
 4. So Heb. rt c . HX Jer. 23, 17 ; c. a 
 Sept. tv Ez. 16, 17. Heb. Lex. HJt no. 1. 
 The common construction is c. accus. see 
 under these verbs. y) After words signi 
 fying participation, fellowship ; 2 Cor. 6, 
 15. 16 ris pepls Triorw fj.fra dirioTOV KT\. 
 John 13, 8 OVK exeif p.fpos p.tr ffiov. 1 John 
 1, 3. 6. 7. Commonly c. dat. as TI <roi KOI 
 ffioi Matt. 8, 29 ; comp. Matth. 389. i. a. 
 Also Xoyi fetrSat /ifrd TWOS, to be reckoned, 
 counted, with any one; Mark 15, 28 et 
 Luke 22, 37 KOI fj.fra dvopcov eXoytVS?;, quo 
 ted from Is. 53, 12 where Heb. nx J15333, 
 Sept. tv. So c. dat. Hdot. 8. 136. 8) Af 
 ter verbs implying to speak or talk with any 
 one ; Mark 6, 50 Kal evSe coj e XaX^crei/ /ner 
 auTwi/. Rev. 4, 1 ; also John 6. 43. 16, 19. 
 So 13* c . W? Sept. /Ltero Gen. 31, 29 ; c. 
 HS Sept. Trpos Gen. 23, 8. 42, 30. For the 
 more usual dat. see in XaXe<u, SiaXeyw, etc. 
 e) TToielv TI /iera TWOS, to do with any 
 one, i. e. to or towards him, corresponding 
 to Heb. M iliBS ; Luke 1, 72 Tronjcrat eXeo? 
 /xera TCOI/ Trarepcav. 10, 37. Acts 14, 27. 15, 
 4. So Heb. and Sept. Gen. 24, 12. Sept. 
 lv Gen. 40, 14. Also fj.fya\vvetv TI fie- 
 TO. TIVOS Luke 1, 58, for Heb. CS Vvnarj; 
 see in p.fya\vvco. For the more usual ace. 
 or dat. see in irote w no. 2. d. 
 
 II. With the ACCUSATIVE, ^TO. strictly 
 implies motion towards the middle, into the 
 midst of any thing, Horn. II. 2. 376 ; and 
 then also motion after any person or thing, 
 i. e. either so as to follow and be with a 
 person, or to fetch a person or thing ; see 
 Passow pera C. 1. Winer 53. f. Hence 
 also spoken of succession either in place or 
 time, after. In N. T. 
 
 1. Of succession in place, after, behind; 
 once, Heb. 9, 3 peTa TO StvTfpov KaTane- 
 Tacr/Mi. Horn. Od. 2. 406. Paus. 3. 1. 1. 
 Thuc. 7. 58. 
 
 2. Of succession in time ; e. g. with a 
 noun of time, Matt. 17, 1 /ie3 ripe pas < 
 after six days. 25, 19 /xera 5e xpovov iroXvv. 
 Mark 8, 31. Acts 12, 4. 28, 11. Gal. 1, 18. 
 So pifT y ov TroXXas r]fj.fpas Luke 15, 13; ou 
 /itTa TroXXas Tdirras 17 /if pay Acts 1,5; COmp. 
 in oil, and Winer { 23. 5. n. (Palasph. 5. 3. 
 Hdian. 5. 6. 2. ^El. V. H. 9. 21.) With a 
 noun of person, Acts 5, 37 jifra TOVTOV av- 
 (<rnj lovSar. 19, 4. (Hdian. 6. 2. 18. Xen. 
 Cyr. 2. 2. 4.) With a noun marking an 
 
 event or point of time ; Matt. 1,12 p.tTa 8 
 Tr]i> p.fToiKfo-iav Bafivhwvos. Mark 13, 24. 
 Luke 9, 28. John 13, 27. 2 Pet. 1,15. Sc 
 Hdian. 4. 9. 3. Also /*era ravra v. TOV- 
 TO after these things, after this, Mark 16, 12. 
 Luke 5, 27. John 3, 22. al. (Diod. Sic. 1. 7. 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 2. 22.) With an adj. Luke 
 22, 58 nfTa ftpaxv, see in jSpa^s no. 1. 
 Acts 27, 14 /xera ov TTO\V. (Jos. 1. 12. 2.) 
 With an infin. c. art. Matt. 26, 32 /xrra S< 
 TO eyepSfjvai /ze, i. e. after that I am risen 
 again. Mark 1, 14. Luke 12, 5. Acts 1, 3. 
 1 Cor. 11, 25 fj.fTa TO SeiTw/crat. Heb. 10 
 26. So Hdian. 2. 9. 6. 
 
 NOTE. In composition /irra implies : a^, 
 Fellowship, partnership ; as p.eTa&i8a>p.i, /*e 
 Te^w, /ieraXa/LtjSaj/a). b) Proximity, con 
 tiguity ; as ^opiov. c) Motion or direc 
 tion after, as /j.fTanffj.nop.ai. d) Sequence 
 in time ; as ^reVeira. e) Transition, 
 transposition, change, over, away, Lat. trans , 
 as MtTapaivo), ie 
 
 /iera/3atW, f. jS^o-o/^at, Oati/w,) to go 
 or pass over from one place to another, to 
 remove; e. g. e olitias (Is oiKiav Luke 10, 7 ; 
 trop. John 5, 24. 1 John 3, 14. So Luc. 
 Vitar. Auct. 5 es a XXo [trco/ia] /tfTa/3^o-fai. 
 Trop. 2 Mace. 6, 9. 24. Plut. Thes. 5. 
 Hence genr. to pass over or away, to depart, 
 c. OTTO Matt. 8, 34 ; eVc et Trpos John 1 3, 1 ; 
 c. adv. Matt. 11, 1 peW/Sq eWZSei/. 12, 9. 
 15, 29. 17, 20 bis. John 7, 3. Acts 18, 7. 
 So Pol. 21. 10. 12. Plato Crat. 438. a. 
 
 /xera/3aXX&), f. a Xw, (/3uXXa>,) to throw, 
 or turn over, e. g. with a plough c. ace. 
 Xen. CEc. 16. 13; to turn about, Horn. II. 
 8. 94; to change, Diod. Sic. 1. 12. In N. 
 T. Mid. to change oneself, to change one s 
 mind, Acts 28, 6. So Jos. Ant. 1. 3. 1. 
 Dem. 205. 19. Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 31. 
 
 /ierciyw, f. o>, (ayo>,) to lead over from 
 one place or country to another, to transfer, 
 Pol. 5. 1. 9. Diod. Sic. 20. 3 fin. In N. T. 
 to move or turn about, from one place to 
 another, James 3, 3. 4. 
 
 f. 8a><ra>, (Si Sco/it,) to give 
 to any one as his share, to share with, i. e. 
 to impart, to communicate ; c. dat. Luke 3, 
 116 f^aiv 8vo ^iTaJvar, /xeTaoYa> T&> pr/ f^ov- 
 TI. Eph. 4, 28. Part, absol. 6 fj.fTao io ovs, 
 one who distributes alms, an officer of the 
 primitive church, Rom. 12, 8. With ace. 
 and dat. Rom. 1, 11 IVO.TI p.fTao S) ^apicr/ia 
 vfjuv 7rvfVfj.aTi.K6i>. 1 Thess. 2, 8. So c. dat. 
 Luc. Paras. 1. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 1 ; c. dat. et 
 ace. Hdot. 9. 34. A en. An. 4. 5. 5. See 
 Matth. { 326. n. 
 
eas, f), (/*er<m 37p.i.) meta 
 thesis, transposition, a setting in another 
 place. Hence 
 
 1. Pr. translation, removal from one 
 place or state to another, Heb. 11, 5. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 23. 
 
 2. mutation, change; Heb. 7, 12 vupov 
 werdSeo-ts. 12, 27. 2 Mace. 21, 24. Thuc. 
 5. 29. 
 
 peTaipd), f. apco, (ai pw,) pr. to lift away, 
 to take away, from one place to another, 
 Dem. 395 ult. Sept. for !ibah 2 K. 25, 11. 
 In N. T. intrans. or with lavrov impl. to 
 take oneself away, i. e. to go away, to depart ; 
 Matt. 13, 53 peTripev eKetSei/. 19, 1. Comp. 
 Buttm. \ 113. n. 1. 5 130. n. 2. So Aquil. 
 Gen. 12, 8 Kal nfTrjpev 6KeT3ei> for 
 
 CTE, Sept. dTTfa-rr]. 
 
 ytiera/caXero, , f. e o-a>, OaAe w.) to caZZ 
 away from one place to another, Sept. Hos. 
 
 11, 1. jEschin. 49. 30; to call back, to re 
 call, Pol. 14. 1. 3. Thuc. 8. 11. In N. T. 
 Mid. to call away to oneself, to call for, to 
 invite c. ace. Acts 7, 14 /irreKaXfVaro TOV 
 n-ar/pi avrov laK. 10, 32. 20, 17. 24, 25. 
 So Achill. Tat. 4. p. 243 Kal Sarai TOV TOV 
 crrparoTre Sot larpov /iiera/caXecracrSai. 
 
 [jLeraKivew, <, f. rja-a>, (givca,) to more 
 from one place to another, to move away, to 
 remove; Pass. trop. Col. 1, 23 /i?) p,era/a- 
 vovpevoi dno TTJS \ni8os, not moved away 
 from the hope, not fallen away, not waver 
 ing. Pr. Hdot. 1. 51. Luc. Contempl. 6. 
 Xen. Eq. 7. 6. 
 
 peToha/Afidva), f. X^o/zai, (Xa^Sdi/co,) 
 to receive with others, to take a share of any 
 thing, to partake of, to share ; c. gen. 2 Tim. 
 2, 6 TUIV Kapncov p.fTa\anJ3dveiv. Heb. 6, 7. 
 
 12, 10. Spec. Tpo(pTJs p.eraXap.jSdi eti/, to 
 partake of food, to take food, Acts 2, 46. 27, 
 33. 34. So JEl. V. H. 9. 5. Xen. Hell. 3. 
 5. 2. Hence genr. to take, to have, c. ace. 
 Acts 24, 25 Kaipbv Se /irroAa/3wi>. Comp. 
 Matth. 325. n. 2. So Pol. 2. 16. 15 Kaipov. 
 
 fJ,Ta\,r/\lri$, ecos, 77, (p.eraXap./Sdi a),) a 
 partaking of any thing; 1 Tim. 4, 3 tls p.e- 
 rdXr^tv, i. e. to be partaken of, enjoyed. 
 Pol. 31. 21. 3 fifro\T]\l/is rfjs dpxTJs. Plato 
 Parm. 131. a. 
 
 yu-eraXXacrcrft) v. -rru), f. , (dX- 
 Xd(rcra>,) to exchange one thing /or another, 
 c. ace. et tv, Rom. l,-25; eis v, 26 Plut. 
 Cic. 31 TO IfJidna. So c. ety Djod. Sic. 4. 
 51. Plato Polit. 291. b. 
 
 /ieTa/AeAo/iCM, f. Tja-o/xat, Pass, depon. 
 </ie Xto, /ieXo/xai,) Pass. aor. 1 /xtrf/teX^S^i-, 
 Buttm, ^ 113. 4 and n. 5 ; pr. to transfer or 
 
 458 fjieravoia 
 
 change one s care ; hence, to change one s 
 mind or purpose, after having done any 
 thing; Matt. 21, 29 Zcrrtpov 8e p.erap.eX;- 
 3e/y. v. 32. Heb. 7. 21 quoted from Ps. 110, 
 4 where Sept. for Cr]3 . Oftener with the 
 idea of regret, sorrow, to repent, to feel sor 
 row, remorse ; Matt. 27, 3 of Judas. 2 Cor. 
 
 7, 8 bis. 1 Mace. 11, 10. Diod. Sic. 15, 9. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 5. 
 
 transform, to transfigure, e. g. eavTov Ml. 
 V. H. 1. 1. Athen. 8. p. 334. c. In N. T. 
 Mid. to change one s form, to be transfigured, 
 Matt. 17, 2. Mark 9, 2. (Ml V. H. 14. 8.) 
 Trop. to be transformed in mind and heart, 
 Rom. 12, 2 fifTap.op(povo- %e TTJ dvaKaivaxrfi 
 TOV voos- 2 Cor. 3, 18. 
 
 f^STCLVOGO), <o, I. Tjo~fo, (j octo.) pr. to per 
 ceive afterwards, to have an afterview ; hence 
 to change one s view, mind, purpose ; Sept. 
 for CH5 Zech. 8, 14. Diod. Sic. 15. 47. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 1. 3. In N. T. to change one s 
 mind, to repent, implying the feeling of re 
 gret, sorrow; genr. Luke 17, 3 nal eav p,e- 
 Tavorjcrrj, a(pfs airw. V. 4 ; with eVi C. dat. 
 2 Cor. 12, 21. So jos. Ant. 2. 15. 3. Epict. 
 Ench. 34. Diod. Sic. 13. 53. In a religious 
 sense, implying sorrow for unbelief and sin. 
 and the turning from them unto God and 
 the gospel of Christ ; absol. Matt. 3, 2 
 p.fTavoflT, fjyyiKe yap TJ j3acri\fia TOIV oipa- 
 vwv. 4, 17. 11, 20. Mark 1, 15. 6. 12. 
 Luke 13. 3. 5. 15, 7. 10. 16, 30. Acts 2, 
 38. 3, 19. 17, 30. 26, 20 ^Tavodv Kal 
 fTTKTTpt (pen/ eVi TOV Sedv repent and turn to 
 God, i. e. from idolatry. Rev. 2, 5 bis. 16. 
 21. 3, 3. 19. 16, 9. Praegn. c. OTTO, Acts 
 
 8, 22 pfTavorjo-ov UTTO TTJS KaKias repent [and 
 turn]/?-owi this evil; see in OTTO no. 1. b. f, 
 With , Rev. 2, 21 c TTJS iropveias. v. 22. 
 
 9, 20. 21. 16, 11. Sept. c. aTrd for *3S CH3 
 Jer. 8, 6. (Jos. Ant. 7. 7. 3, c. Trep/.j" As 
 attended with acts of external sorrow, pen 
 ance, Matt. 11, 21 av (v CTOKKW Kal o~Tro$ca 
 pfTavoTjo-av. 12,41. Luke 10, 13. 11,32*; 
 comp. Jonah 3, 5-10. For s in Matt. 12, 
 41 et Luke 11, 32, see in ds no. 3. e. a. 
 So Test. XII Patr. p. 520, 607 ; called also 
 p-erdi/ota TTJS crapKos p. 611. 
 
 fiTavotOf, as, fj, (p,(Tavofo),} change of 
 mind or purpose, repentance ; genr. Heb. 
 12, 17 fj-tTavoias yap Tonov ov% evpf, he 
 found no place for a change of mind, i. e. 
 in his father Isaac ; comp. Gen. 27, 34. 37 
 sq. So Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 1. Pol. 4. 66. 7. 
 In a religious sense, repentance, penitence, 
 implying sorrow for unbelief and sin, and a 
 turning from them unto God and the gos- 
 
459 
 
 pel of Christ. Matt. 3, 8 Kapirov a^iov rys 
 ptravoias. v. 11. 9, 13. Mark 1, 4. 2, 17. 
 Luke 3, 3. 8. 5, 32 /caXeVai . . . o/xaprcoXous 
 tf p-fTaVotai/. 15, 7. 24, 47. Acts 5, 31 
 8ovvai p.(T(ivoiav TO> lo-paTjX K.a.1 a(pf<Tiv 
 Afiaprioov. 11, 18 rfjv pfrdvoiav fls fcojjj/. 
 13, 24. 19, 4. 20, 21 TTJV fls 3eoi> ^eravoiav. 
 26, 20. Rom. 2, 4. 2 Cor. 7, 9. 10. 2 Tim. 
 
 2, 25. Heb. 6, 1. 6. 2 Pet. 3, 9. So VVisd. 
 12, 19. Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 10 fin. 
 
 //.era^u, adv. and prep, (p-era,) in the 
 midst, between. 
 
 1. Adv. e. g. of place, between, Wisd. 18, 
 23. Horn. II. 1. 156. In N. T. only of time, 
 mean time, mean while, e. g. ev TO> p.erau 
 (xpoVw), in the mean time, John 4, 31 ; 
 comp. Buttm. 125. 6. (Xen. Conv. 1. 14; 
 fully Hdian. 3. 8. 20.) Also 6 /*erau, 
 pr. intervening, intermediate, put for next 
 following, next, as Acts 13, 42 TO p.trav 
 adftftaTov, the next Sabbath ; Buttm. 1. c. So 
 Jos. B. J. 5. 4. 2 Aa/3tou re Kal SoXop-coz/os, 
 e ri de TUIV fj.(Tav TOVTCAV /SacrtXe ooi . Plut. 
 Instit. Lacon. 42 01 perau MaxeSoviKol /3a- 
 crtXets 1 . 
 
 2. Prep, with gen. of place or pers. Matt. 
 23, 35 /LtfTav TOU vaov (cat rov Svatacrn;- 
 piov. Luke 11, 51. 16, 26. Acts 12, 6. So 
 Jos. Ant. 7. 10. 4. JEl. V. H. 3. 1. Xen. 
 Cyr. 7. 1. 10. Trop. of pers. Matt. 18, 15 
 [KTat-v (ToC Kcii avrov poVou, Engl. between 
 tliee and him alone. Acts 15, 9. Rom. 2, 15 
 p.frav a\\rj\a>v, between one another, i. e. 
 in turn, alternately. So Plut. de Amic. et 
 Adulat. 1. 
 
 /jieTcnrefjiTra), f. fa, (T^TTM,) to send 
 after, to send for, Thuc. 4. 30. ib. 7. 15. 
 In N. T. Mid. p-miTrepTropat, f. -^op-at, to send 
 for to oneself, to invite to come, Acts 10, 5. 
 22. 29. 11, 13. 24, 24. 26. 25, 3. Pass. Acts 
 10, 29. Sept. for FiriBri Num. 23, 7. So 
 2 Mace. 15, 31. Hdian. 3. 5. 7. Xen. Mem. 
 
 3. 9. 11. 
 
 fj,eTacrTpe(j)(i), f. \^&>, (o-rp/^xa,) to turn 
 about, from one direction to another, Plut. 
 Otho 4. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 28. In N. T. to 
 turn into something else, to change, Pass. 
 C. els James 4, 9. Acts 2, 20 6 rj\ios /iera- 
 o-rpacpqo-eTai fls (TKOTOS, quoted from Joel 
 3, 4 [2, 31], where Sept. for 7|Brt Niph. 
 (1 Mace. 9, 41.) In a bad sense, to change 
 for the worse, to pervert; c. ace. Gal. 1, 7 
 p-eTaorpol/m TO evayy/Xtoi/. So Ecclus. 11, 
 31. Test. XHPatr. p. 688. 
 
 /LieTacr^/xaTt ^w, f. t o-ea, (a-xwaTifa, 
 o-X^ia-) to transform, to change the form or 
 appearance of any thing, c. ace. Phil. 3, 21 
 os p.(Tao~xT)iJ.aTi(rfi TO o-co/na TTJS 
 
 . Mid. c. fls, to transform oneself into 
 another shape or character, 2 Cor. 11, 13 
 fj.fracr)(rjfj.aTi^6fji(voi fls dnoa-ToXovs. V. 14 ; 
 c. is v. 15. So Jos. Ant. 7. 10. 5 pen. 
 Diod. Sic. 3. 12 pen. Plato Legg. 903. e. 
 Mid. Test. XII Patr. p. 530. Trop. to 
 transfer figuratively, to apply metaphoric 
 ally, c. (is nva 1 Cor. 4, 6. So Plato Legg. 
 906. c. 
 
 , f. Sijo-a, (T&JJ/U,) to trans 
 pose, to put in another place. Hence 
 
 1 . to transport, to transfer, to translate ; 
 Pass. Acts 7, 16 /cat peTfT&rjcrav fls Su^e /i. 
 Heb. 11,5 bis. Eva>% p.fTfTe%r) sc. fls rov 
 ovpavov KT\. comp. 2 K. 2, 11. So Sept. 
 Gen. 5, 24. Diod. Sic. 17. 29. Plato Conv. 
 191. c. Mid. to transfer oneself, to go over 
 from one side or party to another ; hence, 
 with oVo and fls, to fall away from one to 
 another, Gal. 1,6. So 2 Mace. 7, 24. Athen 
 7. p. 281. e. Pol. 3. 111. 8. Trop. to trans 
 fer to another use or purpose, to pervert, 
 to abuse, c. ace. Jude 4 TTJV x^P iV T v 
 3eo! /ifTaTi3eWu ets aWXyftai , so as to 
 pervert the grace of God unto licentious 
 ness. 
 
 2. to change, by putting one thing in 
 place of another ; Pass. Heb. 7, 12 p.fTan- 
 3e/ii^f rijs Ifpciixrvvrfs, the priesthood being 
 changed. So Plato Minos 316. c, TOVS vo- 
 P.OVS. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 14. Others, being 
 transferred, as in no. 1 . 
 
 fJ,eT7retTa, adv. (erretTa,) after then, 
 
 1. e. thereafter, afterwards, Heb. 12, 17. 
 Judith 9, 7. Plut. C. Mar. 4. Plato Ep. 
 353. c. 
 
 /xere^ft), f. ^<3e|aj, (ex0 aor. 2 p.fTf- 
 <TXOV, pr. to have with another, i. e. to par 
 take of, to share in, to be a partaker ; c. gen. 
 Buttm. 5 132. 5. d. 1 Cor. 9, 10. 12 <1X- 
 Xot rrjs vp.wv (ovcrias /LteT/xouo-ti/. 10, 21. 
 30 impl. Heb. 2, 14. 7, 13 <j>v\ns erepas 
 fjifTfo-xrjKfv, he had part in another tribe, 
 belonged to another tribe. With 1 Cor. 
 10, 17, comp. in no. 1. d. /3. So to par 
 take of food, C. gen. -yaXaKToy Heb. 5, 1 3. 
 2 Mace. 5, 10. Diod. Sic. 1. 5. Xen. Mem. 
 
 2. 2. 3. 
 
 fJLT(i)plly(0, f. uro>, (fifTfcopos ; /ird, 
 fdupa, ai wpa,) to lift on high, to raise in the 
 air, JE\. H. An. 11. 33 tavrbv rots irrfpois 
 pfTfcapia-as- Xen. Cyr. 6. 3. 5. Trop. to 
 elate, as with pride, 2 Mace. 5, 17. Diod. 
 Sic. 4. 70 ; also to render hesitating, fluctu 
 ating, to make of doubtful fidelity, as if 
 floating in the air, Pol. 5. 70. 10. Diod. Sic. 
 17. 5 ^LteTett>/Ji ecr3at Trpos a7roVTacrij>. 
 Hence in N. T. Pass, or Mid. p.fTfcop[o- 
 
4fiO 
 
 pa i, to be in suspense, to be of doubtful mind, 
 anxious, fluctuating between hope and fear, 
 Luke 12, 29. So ptreapos rals fiiavoiais 
 Pol. 3. 107. 6. ib. 5. 18. 5. 
 
 fjieTOltcecria. as, fj, (/ierotKe o), fj.tr OLKI^OI.) 
 change of abode, migration, and hence for 
 the Babylonish exile, Matt. 1, 11. 12. 17 
 bis. Sept. for nbw 2 K. 24, 16. 1 Chr. 
 5, 22. Leonid. Tar. 79, in Anthol. Gr. I. p. 
 175. See Munthe Obss. p. 1. 
 
 l^eTOLKLLfO, f. iVw, (oucto>, OLKOS,} Att. 
 
 fut. to), Buttm. 95. 9 ; to cause to change 
 one s abode, to make remove or migrate; 
 hence to remove, to carry away, c. ace. Acts 
 7, 4 /j.TtoKi<rev avrov els TTJV yfjv Tavrrjv. V. 
 43 /ieroiKiw vpas eVeKeira Ba/3. Sept. for 
 !-&an i Chr. 5, 6. Am . 5, 27. Diod. Sic. 
 11/88 pen. JE1. V. H. 1. 11. Thuc. 1. 12. 
 
 fj, (^ere ^a),) participation, 
 partnership, fellowship, 2 Cor. 6, 14; pa- 
 rail. with Koivavia. Psalt. Salom. 14, 4. 
 Plut. Amator. 15. p. 485. Plato Ep. 345. a. 
 
 fiero-ftps, ov, 6, fj, adj. (/ifT-e xco,) parta 
 king of; Subst. a partaker, Heb. 3. 1 K\TJ- 
 (Tfcas (TTOVpavlov /xero^ot. V. 14. 6, 4. 12, 
 8. So Anthol. Gr. IV. p. 263. Plato Pheedr. 
 262. d. Absol. a partner, companion, fel 
 low, Luke 5, 7. Heb. 1, 9 quoted from Ps. 
 45, 8, where Sept. for "OfJ. So Dem. 
 1411. 4. 
 
 //.erpeo), , f. ijo-o>, (jj.erpov, ) to measure, 
 in any way, e. g. a) Of capacity, with 
 an adjunct of manner, in the proverbial 
 phrase oi V. ev w /-i^V-pco ptrpflre, /zerpjjSiycre- 
 rai, Matt. 7, 2 bis. Mark 4, 24 bis. Luke 6, 
 38 bis. Sept. for Tro Ez. 16, 18. So 
 Dem. 918. 11. Plut. Marcell. 25 pen. 
 b) Of length or distance, as measured by 
 the rule, KaXapos, c. ace. Rev. 11,1 p.frpr)- 
 (rov rov vabv TOV 3eov. V. 2. 21, 15. 16. 17. 
 Sept. and Tin Num. 35, 5. So Xen. Hell. 
 3. 2. 10. Mem. 4. 7. 2. c) Trop. for to 
 estimate, to judge of, c. ace. 2 Cor. 10, 12 
 iv eavrois eavrovs fJieTpovvrfs. So Hdian. 
 1 . 6. 2. Dem. 324. 24. Comp. metior Hor. 
 Ep. 1. 7 fin. 
 
 C, 6, (/ierpea, pr. a mea 
 surer ; then a metretes John 2, 6, i. e. the 
 Attic amphora, a measure for liquids con 
 taining 12 ^o ey or 72 gea-rai, and equal to 
 | of an Attic /ie/zj/or. Hence the pfrprjTTjs 
 was equivalent to the Hebrew bath, or about 
 8^ gallons. The Roman amphora was 
 smaller, being only equal to f of the ^frpr^- 
 TTJS. See in /Sdros II, and Bffickh Metrol. 
 Untersuch. p. 200, 278, 284, 290. Sept. 
 
 for ro 2 Chr. 4, 5. Pol. 2. 15. 1. Dem. 
 1045. 6. 
 
 /AerptOTra^eo), , f TJO-W, (/ierpio-ia^r , 
 fierpios, TraSos,) to ie moderate in one s pas 
 sions ; hence to be gentle, indulgent, com 
 passionate, c. dat. towards any one ; Heb. 
 5, 2 fj.frpiona Selv Svvdufvos rois ayvooixri. 
 KT\. Philo de Joseph. II. p. 45. 37. Jos. 
 Ant. 12. 3. 2. So nfrpioTra^s Dion. Hal. 
 8. 61. 
 
 yLterpico?, adv. (/zeVptos, perpov.) mea- 
 suredly, moderately, i. e. with moderation, 
 Pol. 3. 85. 9. Xen. An. 2. 3. 20. In N. T. 
 modei-ately, little, and ov /neTptwy not a little, 
 much, greatly, Acts 20, 12. So Hdian. 1. 
 
 3. 12. Xen. Mem. 4. 1. 1. 
 
 fierpov. ov, TO, measure, in the widest 
 sense. 
 
 1. Pr. and genr. a) Of capacity, in 
 the proverbial expression Matt. 7, 2. Mark 
 
 4. 24. Luke 6, 38 bis. Trop. measure of 
 sins, Matt. 23, 32. Sept. for M 2 Chr. 2, 
 10 ; nsiN Lev. 19, 36. Deut. 25, 14. So 
 Hdot. 4. 198. Xen. An. 3. 2. 21. b) Of 
 length or surface, a measure, i. e. a measur 
 ing-rod, Ka\ap.os, Rev. 21, 15 in later edit, 
 21, 17 fierpov dc2pco7rov, a man s measure, 
 i. e. common, current, ordinary. Sept. for 
 Ex. 26, 2. 8. Ez. 42, 16 sq; 1)? 2 K. 
 2l 13. So Xen. Mem. 4. 7. 2. c) Ad 
 verbially, fK /jLtrpov by measure, i. q. yueTpi - 
 cos, i. e. moderately, sparingly, John 3, 34 ; 
 see in no. 3. h. 
 
 2. Meton. a measure, a portion as mea 
 sured off or allotted, allotment, proportion ; 
 Rom. 12, 3 ws 6 Seov fp.fpicre furpov Tn oTecor. 
 Eph. 4, 7. 13. 16. 2 Cor. 10, 13 bis, see in 
 Kavav. Luc. Imag. 7. Plato Rep. 621. a, 
 
 TT\fOV fJLfTpOV. 
 
 fAeraiTrov, ov, TO, (/xerd, oty,) the fore 
 head, Rev. 7, 3. 9, 4. 13, 16. 14, 1. 9. 17, 
 
 5. 20, 4. 22, 4. Sept. for USa Ex. 28, 33. 
 1 Sam. 17, 49. Hdian. 1. 15. 7. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 4. 8. 
 
 ^ and A te X/ 3i? J (kindr. H^KOS, pa- 
 Kpos,) the former also sometimes before a 
 vowel, Buttm. 5 26. 4. Winer 5 5. 1. b. Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 14 ; a particle serving to mark 
 a terminus ad quern, both of place and time. 
 It differs therefore from axpi, in that a^pt 
 fixes the attention upon the whole duration 
 up to the limit, while pfXP 1 re f ers solely to 
 the limit, implying that the action there 
 terminates. See Tittm. de Synon. N. T. 
 p. 33 sq. 
 
 1. Prep, with the genitive, unto, until, 
 usque ad. 
 
461 
 
 a) Of ilace, unto, as far as to; Rom. 15, 
 19 pt xp TOV iXXvpi /cov. Sept. for na~1S 
 Job 38, Tl .Palaeph. 21.1. Hdian. 1.12.15. 
 Xen. An. 2. 2. 6. 
 
 b) Of time, until a) With gen. of a 
 Bubst. Matt. 13, 30 fif\P l T0 ^ ^fp^uov. 
 Acts 10, 30. 20, 7. Rom. 5, 14 utxpi Mcov- 
 o-e oK, i. e. death reigned from Adam until 
 Moses without there being any revealed law, 
 but not so afterwards ; comp. Tittm. 1. c. 
 1 Tim. 6, 14. Heb. 3, 6. 14. 9, 10. Sept. 
 for ns n? p s . 105, 19. So Hdian. 1.1.5. 
 Xen. Venat. 4. 11. /3) p.fXP ls ov sc> 
 Xpovov, until what time, i. e. until, as a 
 Conjunct, with the Subjunctive, where the 
 matter is uncertain, Mark 13, 30 pexp 1 ? v 
 ndvra ravra yivrjTai. See Buttm. $ 146. n. 2. 
 Matth. 480. b. So Hdot. 4. 119 ; c. impf. 
 Indie. Xen. An. 5. 4. 16. y) p-^XP 1 r ^ y 
 rri)p.(pov, until this day, Matt. 11,23. 28, 
 15. Here axpt might properly have been 
 used ; but the writer employs ^xp 1 P r b- 
 as not looking at all beyond the present 
 time ; comp. Tittm. 1. c. p. 35. So pexpi- 
 TOV vvv Palaeph. 17. 2 ; fJ-(XP l T ^" / Se ra>v KOI- 
 p>v Diod. Sic. 4. 19. 
 
 c) Trop. of degree or extent ; 2 Tim. 2, 
 9 KdKOTraSai pfXP 1 ftrpa>i . Heb. 12, 4 /zt- 
 Xpis at^ai-oy. Phil. 2, 8 fiexP 1 Savdrav. V. 
 30. 2 Mace. 13, 14. Hdian. 1. 15. 16. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 7. 3. 
 
 2. Conjunct, until, before a verb in the 
 Subjunct. where the matter is either pres. 
 or fut. and therefore uncertain, Buttm. 146. 
 n. 2. Eph. 4, 13 fifXP 1 KaTavrfjcru>p.fv . . . cts 
 Tf\fiov KT\. Xen. Hell. 1. 3. 11 TTC- 
 fv . . MXP ir ^ 3 ?7- ^0 c. impf. In 
 die. Thuc. 3. 10. 
 
 /i77, a negative particle, not, expressing 
 a dependent and conditional negative, i. e. 
 depending on the manner in which one con 
 ceives of a thing, and therefore subjective ; 
 while ov expresses a direct negation, inde 
 pendently and absolutely, and is therefore 
 objective. That is, firj implies that one con 
 ceives a tiling not to be, while ov expresses 
 that it actually is NOT ; hence pr) refers to 
 the* predicate, ov to the copula. The same 
 distinction holds good in all the compounds 
 of JMJ and ov. See Buttm. 148. Kiihner 
 5 318. 3. Winer { 59. Herm. ad Vig. p. 795 
 sq. 802 sq. Matth. 608. 5. 
 
 I. As a NEGATIVE particle, not, non, 
 where the following special uses all flow 
 from the general principles above stated. 
 E g. M, and not ov, is used : 
 
 1. In all negative conditions and supposi 
 tions; in N. T. after iav and ci, Buttm. 
 
 148. 2. b. E. g. eav 7*17, Matt. 5, 20 car 
 p.r) IT (pio~<r every TI 8iKaioo-vvT] v/icoi/ KT\. 
 Mark 3, 27. Luke 13, 3. 5. Tit. 1, 6. al. 
 see in cap II. 2. So el prf, Matt. 24, 22 
 ei p.i] KoXoj3d)27jcrai/ ai r]p.epai. Mark 2, 7. 
 John 3, 13. Acts 21, 25. al. see in d III. 
 
 2. e. With fdv or el implied, Mark 12, 19. 
 Luke 10, 10. John 12, 47. 1 Cor. 13, 1. 2. 
 
 3. James 2, 14. Sometimes el is followed 
 by oil, where ov then refers not to the condi 
 tion, but to the verb alone, which it renders 
 negative ; as Matt. 26, 24 KO\OV r/v avr<5, 
 et OVK (yfvvrjSr], i. e. the not being born 
 would have been better for him ; here prj 
 would have implied uncertainty as to his 
 having been born. Mark 11, 26. Luke 14, 
 26. 18, 4 ft Kal 3eov ou <o/3ov/iai, i. e. to 
 not fear, i. q. to contemn. John 10, 37 el 
 ov Trotw ra epya TOV irarpos p.ov, \. e. to not 
 do, i. q. to leave undone. 11, 8. James 2, 
 11. See Buttm. 148. 2. b, and marg. Wi 
 ner 559. 5. Herm. ad Vig. p. 831. Comp. 
 in ov no. 5. 
 
 2. After particles implying purpose, also 
 result anticipated or supposed, i. e. in N. T. 
 after Iva, OTTOS, Sxrre, Buttm. 148. 2. c. 
 Matth. 8 608. 5. a. Winer 8 60. 2. E. P-. 
 
 1 I C5 
 
 iv a firj , Matt. 26, 5 Iva /nij 3opv/3or yevrjrai. 
 Luke 8, 10. John 3, 16. Acts 5, 26. Heb. 
 13, 17. al. So Matt. 5, 29. 30. Mark 4, 12. 
 John 1 1 , 50. al. see in Iva I. 1 , and II. a. So 
 oVcos P.TI, Matt. 6, 18. Luke 16, 26. Acts 
 20, 16. 1 Cor. 1, 29. Also before an infin. 
 expressing purpose, either inf. simply, or 
 with &>o-re, el s, Trpos, bid, see below in no. 4. 
 
 3. After relative pronouns, as os. o<rrts, 
 oo-o?, wherever they refer not to definite 
 antecedents, but to such as are indefinite 
 and general, or implied, Buttm. { 148. 2. e. 
 Matth. J 608. 5. c. Winer { 59. 4. E. g. 
 Matt. 10, 14 or tav pf] de^rai v/jias. 11, 6. 
 Luke 8, 18. 1 Pet. 2, 9. Mark 6, 11 6W 
 av p.rj dfu>vrai vp.as. Luke 9, 5. Acts 3, 23 
 rjris av /J.TJ a/covoT/. Rev. 13, 15. But ov is 
 put after os, oWiy, where these refer to a 
 definite antecedent, as Luke 14, 33 ; or 
 where any thing is said actually not to be 
 or to be done, as Matt. 10, 38. 13, 12. Mark 
 9, 40. Luke 14, 27. 
 
 4. With the Infinitive as being dependent 
 vipon another finite verb or word expressed 
 or implied ; here the infin. may usually ei 
 ther itself be resolved into a supposition, or 
 the verb on which it depends expresses 
 supposition, condition, thought, purpose ; 
 Buttm. ^ 148. 2. g. Winer { 59. 2. Herm. ad 
 Vig. p. 806 ult. Thus a) Inf. simpl. 
 Matt. 22, 23 ot \tyovres ^ elvai uvdo-rao-tv, 
 i. e. as they suppose and believe. Luke 2, 
 
462 
 
 26. 20, 7 21, 14. Acts 15, 19. 38. 23, 8. 
 25, 24. 27 XoybV /ioi SoKff . . . p) (cat Tar 
 /car avTou atrt as o-rjfj.dvai. Rom. 13, 3 3e - 
 Xeiy Se prj (po/3eur3at T^V ifovoicv. 1 Cor. 
 7, 1. 1 Tim. 1, 20. 2 Pet. 2, 21. After 
 Set, o<et\t0, and the like, Bnttm. 1. c. Matt. 
 23, 23 ravTO. eSei TrotJjcrat, KaKflva (JLTJ d<pi- 
 cvai. Luke 18, 1. Acts 27, 21. Rom. 15, 1. 
 1 Tim. 3, 3 Set ovv enio-KOTrov . . . fifj Trdpoi- 
 vov, fj-rj 7T\r]KTT)v (eiVai). V. 8. Tit. 1, 7.. 2, 
 
 3. 9. 10. After ofnvv^i, implying future 
 purpose, Heb. 3, 18 TI O-I 8e aytoo-e p.rj elo~- 
 eXeiWo-3ai KT\. see Herm. ad Vig. p. 805. 
 After verbs of commanding, entreating, e. g. 
 with inf. pres. as continued, Acts 1, 4 irap- 
 jjyyetXei avrois OTTO lepoa. pr) ^copi^ecrSat. 
 21, 4. Rom. 2, 21. 22. Eph. 3, 13 8ib mYoC- 
 pai fir/ fKKdKtiv. 2 Tim. 2, 14. (Comp. 
 Luc. D. Mort. 1. 4.) With inf. aor. as 
 transient, Matt, 2, 12. 5, 34. Luke 22, 40. 
 Heb. 12, 19. By pleonasm after verbs im 
 plying a negative, e. g. of denying, Luke 
 20, 27 of dimXeyovrfs avaaracriv firj fivat. 
 22, 34, See Matth. 534. n. 4. Winer $ 67. 
 1. n. Vice versa after ov ovvapai, where 
 the negatives have each its proper power, 
 and constitute an emphatic affirmative ; Acts 
 
 4, 20 ov 6Wa/ie3a a fi8op.(v . . . /ij) XaXelt/, 
 i. e. we cannot but speak. Buttm. 148. n. 
 7. b. After Sxrrf , in N. T. marking a 
 result anticipated or supposed on the part 
 of the speaker or writer ; Matt. 8, 28 oxrre 
 jtt?7 Ivxyeiv Tiva TrapfX Sf iv. Mark 3, 20. 
 1 Cor. 1, 7. 2 Cor. 3, 7. 1 Thess. 1,8. So 
 Xen. Conv. 4. 54. b) Infin. c. rov, e. g. 
 as dependent on a Subst. Rom. 11,8 <5(p3aX- 
 fioi TOV fj.T) jSXeTTfiv KT\. et 1 Cor. 9, 6 OVK 
 f^o^fi* f^ovo-iav TOV /ii) e pydeo-3ai ; i. e. 
 implying possibility, but not the will. After 
 verbs of hindering or being hindered, Luke 
 4, 42. 24, 16. Acts 10, 47 voa>p Ka>\v<rai 
 . . . TOV JJ.T] /SaTmtrSJJwu TOVTOVS. 14, 18. 20, 
 
 27. Rom. 11, 10. 1 Pet. 3, 10 ; also Luke 
 17, 1. Heb. 11,5. James 5, 17. As mark 
 ing -purpose or result, where wore might 
 stand instead of TOV, comp. below in lett. d. 
 Rom. 7, 3 e XeuSe pa e trrti/ OTTO TOV Popov, 
 TOV fj.r) eivai avTrjv /iot^aX/Sa. Comp. Winer 
 545. 4. p. 379. b. Buttm. $ 140. n. 10. c) 
 Infin. C. r<3, 2 Cor. 2, 12 TW /ii7 evpelv p.e 
 TITOV, i. e. marking a cause as existing in 
 the mind of any one. d) Infin. c. TO, 
 where the infin. is then equivalent to a 
 Sllbst. Rom. 14, 21 Ka\vv TO p.rj (paydv Kpea, 
 
 1. q. i/one would eat no meat, Buttm. 148. 
 
 2. g. 1 Cor. 4, 6. 10, 2 ; preceded by TOU- 
 TO, Rom. 14, 13. 2 Cor. 2, 1. 1 Thess. 4, 6 
 comp. v. 3. So with the prepositions tls 
 and Trpo f as marking purpose or supposed 
 
 result ; e. g. els TO /^ Acts 7, 19. 1 Cor 
 
 9, 18. 10, 6. Heb. 11, 3. 1 Pet. 3, 7; 
 irpbs TO pfi 2 Cor. 3, 13. 1 Thess. 2, 9. 
 2 Thess. 3, 8. With 8 id as marking the 
 probable or supposed cause of any thing, 
 Matt. 13, 5 8ia TO p.}) ex flv /33s y*)s. v. 6. 
 Mark 4, 5. James 4, 2. So Ceb. Tab. 24. 
 
 5. With participles, when they stand ellip- 
 tically for any of the above constructions, 
 or refer to an indefinite subject ; or, in gen 
 eral, where they imply supposition, condition, 
 purpose, or any thing subjective ; Buttm. 
 5 148. 2. f. ^ 144. 2. Kiihner $ 318. 5. Winer 
 j 59. 3. E. g. a) When the participle 
 may be resolved into the construction with 
 tl, lav, or the like, comp. above in no. 1. 
 Buttm. 1. c. Luke 11, 36 et ovv TO o-a>fj.d 
 crov oXov <pa>T(iv6v, /J.T) fX ov T ptpos KT\. 
 Rom. 5, 13. Gal. 6, 9 Kaipw yap iSi w 3ept- 
 crojuez/, firj fK\v6fitvoi. Col. 1,23. 1 Pet. 3,6. 
 b) Where the participle, either with or with 
 out the article, is equivalent to a relative 
 referring to a general or indefinite antece 
 dent ; comp. above in no. 2. Buttm. 1. c. 
 E. g. 6 UTI c. part. Matt. 12, 30 6 py &v 
 fjitT (fj.ov, whosoever, i. q. if any one, where 
 ov would only have referred to some parti 
 cular and definite individual. Luke 11, 23. 
 John 3, 18 6 ^ Tno-Ttvav, comp. Winer 
 5 59. 1. John 10, 1. 12, 48. 1 Thesb. 4, 13. 
 al. Matt. 25, 29 oV6 TOV p.r] e xoiroi. Luke 
 3, 11. 19, 26. 27. Rom. 4,20. James 4, 17. 
 1 Cor. 7, 37. Alsovraj pr) c. part. 1 Thess. 
 2, 12 Trdvrfs ol p) TrKTTfvtravTts. 1 John 3, 
 
 10. Matt. 3, 10. 13, 19 7rain-6f aKovovros . . . 
 KOL fj.f) o-vvifvTos. John 15, 2. So genr. 
 Matt. 9. 36 MoVi 7rpo/3aTtz ^17 e^ovra iroifjLeva. 
 10, 28. Luke 12, 47. Acts 20, 22 l&ov e yo> 
 ... JUT) et Sco?, where the subject is indeed 
 specific, but the part, expresses a subjective 
 doubt, uncertainty. Rom. 2, 14. 1 Cor. 7, 
 29 sq. 9, 21. 1 John 2, 4. al. Here too 
 belong such phrases as TO pr/ SeovTa, TO 
 P.TJ KcffirjKovTa, i. q. aTiva p.rj Set, etc. 1 Tim. 
 5, 13. Rom. 1, 28. (Ceb. Tab. 25.) TO ^ 
 ovTa, i. q. ariva fj.r) eVrt, Rom. 4, 17 ; trop. 
 1 Cor. 1, 28. Comp. Buttm. 5 148. 2. f. 
 Winer 59. 4. p. 562. c) Where the 
 part, with pr) expresses the supposed* or 
 apparent cause or occasion of any thing, 
 Bnttm. 5144. 2. Matt. 1, 19 Iwo-^ fie o 
 dvrjp avTr/s, St /caio? &>v Kat ^17 Se Xa>i/ KT\. 
 18, 25 pr) f xovros Se avTov dTroSovvai, e - 
 \fvo-fv KT\. Mark 2, 4. 12, 24. Luke 5, 19. 
 9, 33. Acts 9, 26. 12, 19. 2 Cor. 3, 14. 
 Heb. 4, 2. So Eurip. Herac. 283 or 284. 
 d) Where the part, with ^ expresses a 
 supposed or apparent result, like wore pj c, 
 infin. comp. above in no. 4. a. Luke 7, 30 
 
463 
 
 Acts 20, 29 ftVf Afvcroirat . . . \VKOI ftaptls 
 $ vp.as, fi?) (pfi86p.evoi rov frbt/iWow. 2 Cor. 
 4, 2. Phil. 1, 28. So Acts 9, 9 r> foe pas 
 rpels p.f) /3Xe7rwi/, KOI OVK ((payev, he was for 
 three days apparently blind, so as not to see, 
 i. e. he was supposed to be a blind man ; 
 but OVK f(paye relates a specific fact. Also 
 >vith <ai as equiv. to wort, comp. in KCII no. 
 1. c. j3. Luke 1, 20 6077 <nu>Tra>v, /cai p.rj 8v- 
 t>dp.evos XaXrJcrat. 13, 11. Acts 27, 15. 
 
 6. In all negative expressions of wish, 
 entreaty, command, where p.f] then often 
 stands at the beginning of a short independ 
 ent clause, the idea of wishing and the like 
 not being expressed, but retained in the 
 mind ; Buttm. 148. 2. c, and n. 5. Herm. 
 ad Vig. p. 802. Matth. $608. n. 1. Thus 
 to express a negative wish, p.f) is construed 
 with the Optative ; in negative entreaty and 
 command, with the Imperative and Subjunc 
 tive, as follows : a) With the Optative, 
 implying a negative wish, in the frequent 
 exclamation /* r) yevoiro, may it not be ! 
 let it not happen ! Luke 20, 16. Rom. 3, 4. 
 6. 31. 1 Cor. 6, 15. Gal. 2, 17. (Arr. Epict. 
 
 I. 1. 13. ib. 1. 5. 10.) So Gal. 6, 14. 
 
 2 Tim. 4, 16 p.rj avrols Xoyio-SeiT?. So Horn. 
 Od. 1. 386. ib. 20. 344. b) With the 
 Imperative always, (which never takes oi,) 
 usually with the Imp. present implying con 
 tinued action, and forbidding what one is 
 already doing ; Buttm. 148. 3. 137. 5. 
 Winer $60. 1. Matt. 6, 16 /*T) yiWo-3e SHT- 
 
 TTep 01 VirOKplTaL V. 19. 25. 17, 7. 24, 6 
 
 opart, P.TJ 3pofTo-3e, beware, be not troubled. 
 Mark 9, 39. Luke 23, 28. John 2, 16. Acts 
 10, 15. 1 Pet. 4, 12. al. saep. Imperat. 
 
 3 pers. pres. Rom. 6, 12 /ti) ovv /3ao-tXever<o 
 rj ap&pria tv ra> SWJTOJ vp.(av trw/itm. 14, 16. 
 1 Cor. 7, 12. 13. Col. 2, 16. 1 Tim. 6, 2. 
 James 1,7. al. Also Imper. impl. Luke 
 13, 14. John 18, 40. Gal. 5, 13. Rom. 12, 
 
 II. 16. 19. (Luc. Tox. 56.) So in antithe 
 tic clauses, as Col. 3, 2 ra Sva> (ppovelre, p.r] 
 TO. eVl y^s. James 1, 22. 1 Pet. 3, 9. 2 Cor. 
 9, 7 ; p) . . . aXXa Luke 22, 42. John 6. 27. 
 Phil. 2, 12. Very rarely /iij is found with 
 the Imper. aorist, (in N. T. only 3 pers.) 
 implying transient action, and forbidding 
 that which one may be about to do, e. g. 
 Matt. 6, 3 p.fj yvo)To> TJ dpio-rtpd crov KT\. 
 24, 18. Mark 13, 15 p.fj Kara/Sarco els rr]v 
 
 otKiav. v. 16. Luke 17, 31. Comp. Buttm. 
 Winer, 1. c. So Horn. Od. 16. 301. Xen. 
 Cyr. 7. 5. 73. c) With the Subjunctive in 
 negative entreaties, commands, exhortations, 
 where the action is to be expressed as tran 
 sient and momentary ; Buttm. 1. c. and $ 1 39. 
 m. 4. Winer 1. c. E. g. in 1 pers plur. 
 
 Subj. present, when it stands as for 1 per.-. 
 Imperat. comp. above in lett. b. Gal. 5, 26 
 p.f] yivap.e Sa. Kev68ooi. 6, 9. 1 Thess. 5, 6. 
 1 John 3, 18 ; aorist, John 19, 24 p.fj o-^i- 
 o-a)p.(v avTov. Buttm. $ 139. m. 4. Winer 
 5 42. 4. In 2 and 3 pers. Subj. aorist, Matt. 
 1, 20 p.fi (poftn Sfjs. 3, 9 /zi) So ^re Xeyeiv 
 5, 17. 6, 13. lOJ 5. 9. 10. Mark 5, 7. 14, 2. 
 Rom. 10, 6. 1 Cor. 16, 11. Col. 2,21. Heb. 
 3, 8. 10, 35. James 2, 11. al. sa?piss. So 
 with yevrfifi or the like impl. Matt. 26, 5. 
 Mark 14, 2. 
 
 7. Genr. in any construction, where the 
 negation is from the nature of the case sub 
 jective, conditional, or a matter of supposi 
 tion. Matt. 19, 9 os av aTroXucn; rrjv yvvaiKa 
 CIVTOV, p.T] CTTI TTOpvetq. Mark 12, 14 8u>p.fv, 
 T) p.f) 8a>p.(v ; John 3, 18 OTI p.f] TreiricrTevKev, 
 because by the very supposition he has not 
 believed, comp. Herm. ad Vig. p. 804. (Luc. 
 D. Marin. 5. 1.) Rom. 3, 8 ri ert dyo) cos 
 d/zaprcoXcij Kpivop.ai ; KOI p.rj, KT\. hypothe 
 tical^, and why not rather ? Col. 2, 18 a pf] 
 eatpanev ep-^areixov, i. e. into what he can 
 not possibly be supposed to have seen ; 
 here ov would have expressed that he had 
 not seen them though he had the power. 
 1 Thess. 4, 5 p.r) ev Travel eViSu/u ay, where 
 P.TJ refers to the preceding infin. /trao-3a. 
 Rom. 14, 1. 
 
 8. Coupled with o v , in the order ov prj, 
 as an intensive negative, (^ ov is in N. T. 
 only interrog. see in no. Ill,) in emphatic 
 assertions and assurances referring to the 
 future, not at all, by no means, construed 
 pr. with the Indie, future, or more com 
 monly with the Subj. aorist, Buttm. $ 148. 
 n. 6. 5 139. m. 6. Kiihner 5 318. 7. Winer $ 
 60. 3. Herm. ad Soph. CEd. Col. 853. a) 
 With Indie, fut. Matt. 16, 22 ov ^ eorai 
 (TOI TOVTO. 26, 35 ov p.T) ere drrapi>r]o~ofMi. 
 Luke 22, 34. John 8, 12. 20, 35. Rev. 3, 5. 
 9. 6. al. So in emphatic interrogation. Luke 
 18,7. John 18, 11. b) With Subj. aorist, 
 e. g. aor. 1 Pass. Matt. 24, 2 ov p,fj d<pe%fj 
 2>Se \tios. Luke 22, 16. 18. Heb. 8, 12. 
 1 Pet. 2, 6. al. Aor. 2 Act. and Mid. Matt. 
 5, 18. 20. 18, 3. Luke 1, 15. John 6, 37. 
 Rev. 3, 3. 12. al. Mid. Mark 13, 19. So as 
 strengthened by ovKeri Matt. 14, 25. Luke 
 22, 16; ovSe Matt. 24,21. In emphatic 
 interrog. John 11, 56. 18, 11. Further, 
 contrary to the doubtful rule of Dawes, 
 with aor. 1 Act. Matt. 10, 23 ov JUT) reXe- 
 erijre ras TroXet? KT\. Mark 9, 41. John 4, 14. 
 48. Acts 13, 41. Heb. 8, 11. 2 Pet. 1, 10: 
 c. ovKfTi Rev. 18, 14. Mid. Matt. 16, 28. 
 Rom. 4, 8. See Buttm. 5 139. m. 46, marcf 
 Winer $ 60. 3. n. 
 
464 
 
 11. As a CONJUNCTION, that not, lest, Lat. 
 ne, in N. T. only after verbs expressing/ear, 
 anxiety, foresight, with which both the 
 Greeks and Latins connect a negative so as 
 to imply a wish that the thing feared may 
 no* be or happen ; Buttm. j 148. 4. 139. 
 m. 50. Herm. ad Vig. p. 796. Matth. $ 520. 
 Construed variously : 
 
 1. With the Subjunct. where the pre 
 ceding or governing verb is in the present ; 
 see Buttm. 1. c. Winer { 60. 2. So after 
 verbs of fearing and the like, Acts 27, 17 
 (po/3ovfj,evoi re HTJ fls TTJV Svprtv HOTCcrxri. 
 2 Cor. 12, 21, comp. v. 20. So c f -<popov- 
 fj-evos impl. 2 Cor. 12, 6. Or, out of the 
 Indicative, the preced. verb may be a past 
 tense ; as Acts 23, 10 evXa/3j?3els 6 x- M 
 Stao-7rao-3# 6 ITauXor. Comp. Plato Apol. 
 Soc. init. XP*I V euXa/3eio-3ai p.r) inr" ep-ov 
 (^a-jTarrftriTf. After verbs of foresight, or 
 caution, the prec. verb being in the present ; 
 Matt. 18, 10 6pare, pr) KaTacppovrjo-rjTe evos 
 KT\. Mark 13, 5. 36. 2 Cor. 8, 20. Gal. 
 6, 1. Heb. 12, 15. 16. Rev. 19, 10 et 22, 
 9 opa P.TI sc. TroiTjaT/s TOVTO. 
 
 2. With the Optative, where the pre 
 ceding verb is in a past tense of the Indica 
 tive ; see Buttm. Winer, 1. c. So after a 
 verb of foresight, Acts 27, 42 ru>v fie orpa- 
 TiaiTtav /3ouX?} ryevrro, iva T. 8. anonTflvGxn., 
 fijy TLS fKKo\vfj.^Tja-as 8ia<puyoi, where how 
 ever later editions read diatpvyy in Subj. see 
 Winer { 60. 2. 
 
 3. With the Indicative, less often, and 
 implying that the thing feared already exists 
 or is about to happen, Winer 60. 2. b. So 
 Indie, pres. Luke 1 1, 35 ovcoTrei ovv p.fj TO (pa>s 
 TO (v crol CTKOTOS eWiV. Indie, fut. Col. 2, 8 
 fiXnrcrc p.f] TIS upas ecrrai 6 o-vXaya>ya>v. 
 
 4. With the Infinitive in negative wishes 
 or admonitions, implying a fear of the con 
 trary ; so c. ace. et infin. 2 Cor. 6, 1 Trapa- 
 
 Kd\OVp.fV p.r) fig KfVOV TTJV X^P iV TOV % f V 
 
 8eao-3at vp.as. 13, 7. Buttm. $ 148. n. 2. g. 
 Horn. Od. 9. 530. 
 
 III. As an emphatic INTERROGATIVE Par 
 ticle, which has lost its own negative power, 
 but serves to express a degree of fear or 
 anxiety, and implying the expectation of a 
 negative answer ; while ou interrog. de 
 mands an affirmative answer. Buttm. 148. 
 5. Kiihner $ 345. 5. d. Matth. $ 608. n. 3. 
 Winer 61. 3. b. Construed with the Indie, 
 of all the tenses. 
 
 1. Simply, with the Indie, pres. Matt. 
 9, 15 fir] 8vvavTai ol viol rov vvp-fpaivos Trev- 
 *dv KT\. John 3, 4. Acts 7. 28. 1 Cor. 12, 
 29. 30. James 2, 14; with e ori or the like 
 Impl. Rom. 3, 5. 9, 14. 1 Cor. 12, 29 sq.- 
 
 Indic. aor. Luke 22, 35 p.}) rivbs v 
 
 John 7, 48. Rom. 11,1; perf. John 7, 47; 
 
 fut. Matt. 7, 9. 10. Rom. 3, 3. 
 
 2. Used before ou, i. e. ^77 ov, where p,rj 
 is interrogative, and ou belongs solely to 
 the following verb, Winer l. c. Rom. 10, 
 18 dXXa Xey<a p.fj OVK TJK.OV<TO.V , have they 
 not heard ? is it so then that they have not 
 heard? v. 19 ^17 lo-pajyX OVK eyj/w; hath 
 then Israel not known ? is he then ignorant ? 
 1 Cor. 9, 4. 5. 11, 22. So Xen. Mem. 4. 
 2. 12. -f 
 
 see in ye no. 2. d. 
 
 , adv. (/LujSa/io s ; p;Se d/xo j,) 
 by no means, Acts 10, 14 et 11,8 "Svvov Kal 
 <pdye 6 Se eiVe p.rj8ap.(as sc. TOVTO ytvoiTO. 
 Comp. in prj I. 6. a. Sept. for "^" ^rj Gen. 
 18, 25. Luc. D. Deor. 4. 2. Xen. Conv. 
 2. 3. 
 
 fiijoe, conjunct. (^,77, fie,) differing from 
 ov8e as p.rj from ou, and having the same 
 general signification as p.jj ; pr. and not, also 
 not, and hence neither, not even, as connect 
 ing whole clauses or propositions. Buttm. 
 ^149. m. 15. Matth. 609. Winer j 59. 6. 
 
 1 . In a continued negation, at the begin 
 ning of a subsequent clause, neither, nor, 
 mostly preceded by p,^. Matt. 10, 14 6? tav 
 p.rj 8(r)Tat vfias, pw8f UKOVO-JJ TOVS \6yovs 
 vfj.5>v. Mark 6, 11. Luke 16, 26. John 4, 
 15. Rom. 14, 21. 1 Tim. 1, 4 ; prec. /ITJTTCU 
 Rorn. 9, 11. So Hdian. 1. 10. 8. ib. 6. 2. 
 9. Also in a continued prohibition, usually 
 after p,rj, and then it takes the same con 
 struction as p.!/ with the Imperat. or Sub- 
 junct. see in HTJ no. I. 6. b, c. So with 
 Imperat. pres. expr. or impl. Matt. 6, 25 ^,17 
 
 r<5 croyiari vfj.u>v. Mark 13, 11 HTJ 7rpop.(pi- 
 pvaTe . . . fJ.T]8f /ifXerare. Rom. 6, 13. Heb. 
 12, 5; pjoVi s . . . nrfe 1 Tim. 5, 22; aor. 1 
 Pass. 1 Pet. 3, 14. With Subjuncl. pres. 
 1 pers. plur. in exhortations 1 Cor. 10, 8. 9. 
 1 John 3, 18 ; aor. 2 and 3 pers. Matt. 7, 6 
 p.rj 8>Te . . . p.T)8e j3a\r]T(. Mark 13, 15. Col. 
 2, 21. 2 Tim. 1, 8; w Se ... w Se Mark 8, 
 26; ufais . . . iir)8e Luke 3, 14. W 7 ith an 
 Infin. depending on a verb of prohibition 
 Acts 4, 18. 1 Tim. 1, 4. Once in antithe 
 tic apodosis, with Imper. 2 Thess. 3, 10 
 TIS ov SeXet epydecr3ai, p^Se fVSieYw. 
 
 2. In the middle of a clause, not even ; 
 Mark 2, 2 coo-rf /^KeYt ^copeTi fJ.w8e ra Trpor 
 TTJV Svpai . 1 Cor. 5, 11. Eph. 5, 3. Buttm. 
 ^ 149. m. 15. Luc. D. Deor. 6. 2. Xen. Hi. 
 4. 4. + 
 
 /A?70ei9, p.r)8fp.ia, p.T)8ev, (p^Se, fls,) not 
 even one, no one, i. e. no one whoever he 
 
465 
 
 /j-rjirore 
 
 may be, from the indefinite and hypothetic 
 power of p.rj, differing from ovbds as ^117 
 from ov ; see in p.r) init. 
 
 1. Genr. Matt. 16, 20 Iva p.rjb fvl ftivaxnv. 
 Mark 6, 8 Iva p.rjb fv aipaxnv ds 68uv. John 
 8, 10. Acts 4. 21. 1 Cor. 1, 7. Heb. 10, 2. 
 al. (Xen. Hell. 5. 4. 20.) With rf, ^iceri, 
 or p.rj8fis repeated, in a strengthened nega 
 tion, comp. Buttm. 148. 6. 1 Pet. 3, 6 ^ 
 (poftovp.fvoi fj.rj8fp.iav TTTorjcnv. Mark 11, 14 
 fjLrjKtri ex. <TOV p.rjo fls Kapnuv (pdyoi. Acts 4, 
 17. 2 Cor. 6, 3. So Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 39. 
 
 2. In prohibitions, e. g. with Imper. pres. 
 Luke 3, 13 /j.rjo tv TT\(OV. . . Trpacrcrere. 1 Cor. 
 3, 18. 21. Tit. 2, 15. James 1, 13; Imper. 
 impl. Matt. 27, 19. Phil. 2, 3 ; with a dou 
 ble neg. Rom. 13, 8. (Luc. D. Deor. 24. 1.) 
 With Subjuncl. aor. Matt. 17, 9 nrjSfvl ei- 
 TnjTf TO 5pap.a. Acts 16, 28. (Luc. D. Deor. 
 1. 2.) Matt. 8, 4 opa, prjo fvl fmrjs. So 
 with a double neg. Mark 1, 44. 
 
 3. Neut. p.T)8fv, nothing. a) As adv. 
 not at all, in no respect, e. g. p/StV ftiaKpi- 
 v6p.(vos Acts 10, 20. 11, 12. James 1, 6. 
 After verbs of profit or loss, deficiency, or 
 the like, Mark 5, 26 KOL prjo ev &)0eXr;2fio-a. 
 Luke 4, 35. 2 Cor. 11,5. Phil. 4,6. Comp. 
 Passow in p-votis. (Luc. D. Deor. 1. 2. 
 Xen. (Ec. 11. 9.) So ev p.no evi in nothing, 
 in no respect, 2 Cor. 7, 9. Phil. 1, 28. 
 James 1, 4. b) Trop. prjoev av, being 
 nothing, i. e. of no account, no weight of 
 character, Gal. 6, 3. Comp. Buttm. $ 129. 8. 
 So Dem. 562. 23. + 
 
 e, adv. (p/St, Trore,) not even 
 ever, never, 2 Tim. 3, 7. Luc. adv. Indoct. 
 28. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 10. 
 
 ), adv. QujSe, TTW,) even not yet. 
 not yet, Heb. 11, 7. Luc. pro Lapsu 15. 
 jEschyl. Pers. 435. 
 
 Mi)8o9, ov, 6, a Made, Acts 2, 9. The 
 country of Media, MijSi a, lay between the 
 Caspian sea on the north and northeast, and 
 Persia on the south, extending on the north 
 west and west to Armenia. It was incorpo 
 rated with the kingdom of Persia ; and com 
 prised the following provinces of modern 
 Persia, Shirvan, Adzerbij&n, Ghilan, Mazan- 
 der&n, and Irak Ajami. See Strabo 11. p. 
 522 sq. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. I. i. p. 276. 
 
 fjiTjKeTi, adv. (pj, en, like ovxert,) no 
 more, no further, no longer, in the general 
 sense of p.tj. and construed in the same man 
 ner ; see pj init. E. g. after Iva, comp. 
 in w I. 2. 2 Cor. 5, 15. Eph. 4, 14 Iva 
 priori u>p.fv vr]-moi. With the Infin. comp. 
 r I. 4. Acts 4, 17. 25, 24 no/Soarm p.r) 
 fn. Eph. 4, 17. (Xen. 
 30 
 
 Mem. 4. 3. 8.) With an inf. after Start 
 Mark 1, 45. 2, 2; inf. et rov Rom. 6, 6, 
 tls TO p.r) c. inf. 1 Pet. 4. 2. With Parti 
 ciples, as expressing a cause, comp. fir] I. 
 
 5. C. Rom. 15,23 vvvl 8 /JLTJKCTI TOTTOV (%(ov 
 KT\. 1 Thess. 3, 1. 5. (Hdian. 1. 15. 1.) 
 As expressing a result, Acts 13, 34 ; comp. 
 M I. 5. d. So Luc. D. Mort. 6. 1. In 
 negative expressions of wish, entreaty, com 
 mand, see p.r) I. 6 ; so with the Opt. imply 
 ing a negative wish, Mark 11, 14 pjKe ri 
 croC p.r]8f\s Kapnov (pdyoi. With the Imper. 
 pres. John 5, 14 et 8, 11 p.r)Kfrt apupravf. 
 Eph. 4, 28. 1 Tim. 5, 23. (Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 
 13.) With the Subjunct. pres. 1 pers. plur. 
 Rom. 14, 13 ; aor. 2 and 3 pers. Mark 9, 25. 
 Matt. 21, 19. Comp. in p.f} I. 6. c. 
 
 pil/cos, f OS , ovs,r6, length, Rev. 21, 16 bis. 
 Trop. Eph. 3, 18. Sept. for TI"!!* Gen. 
 
 6, 15. al. JEl V. H. 3. 1. Xen. CEc. 19. 2. 
 
 f. vv>, (fj.rJKos, ) to make long, 
 to extend, Xen. Mem. 3. 13. 5. In N. T. 
 Mid. fjLTjKvvonai to lengthen oneself, spoken 
 of plants, to grow up, absol. Mark 4, 27. 
 So Sept. Act. for ^ Is. 44, 14. 
 
 /iT/Xtwr??, rjs, f], (fj.r]\ov, ) a sheep-skin, 
 as used for clothing, Heb. 11, 37. Sept. for 
 n ^^ spoken of a prophet s mantle 1 K. 
 19/13. 19. 2 K. 2, 8. 13. 14. Poll. Ono- 
 mast. 10. 176, 181. Clem. Rom. Ep. 1 ad 
 Cor. 17. 
 
 fttfv, a particle of strong affirmation, yea, 
 assuredly ; in N. T. only in the connection 
 ?i prjv, the usual formula with oaths ; see 
 in TI, and Buttm. $ 149. m. 29. 
 
 /i?7i>, P.TJVOS, 6, 1. a month, Luke 1, 24. 
 26. 36. 56. 4, 25. Acts 7, 20. 18, 11. 19, 
 8. 20, 3. 28, 11. James 5, 17. Rev. 9, 5. 
 10. 15. 11, 2. 13, 5. 22, 2. Sept. for tinh 
 Gen. 7, 11. 8, 4. 5. Hdian. 1. 14. 17. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 8. 2. 
 
 2. Meton. the new-moon, which was the 
 first day of the month and a festival, Gal. 4, 
 10. So Heb. ti i n Sept. vfo^vla Num. 
 28, 1. Ps. 81, 4. See Num. 10, 10. 28, 
 11 sq. 1 Sam. 20, 5. 24 sq. Winer Realw. 
 art. Neumond. 
 
 firfWO), f. vcru, to make known, to show. 
 to disclose, pr. something before unknown ; 
 c. ace. Luke 20, 37. John 11, 57 tdv m 
 yi/cS TTOU c ort, nqviKri]. 1 Cor. 10, 28 ; c. dat 
 Acts 23, 30. 2 Mace. 3, 7. Jos. Ant. 1. 
 11.2. Thuc. 2. 42. 
 
 fj,r) ov, see in ^17 III. 2. 
 
 /i^TTore, neg. partic. (pri, Trort,) in the 
 same general sense and uses as p.fi. 
 
466 
 
 1 . As a negative Particle, not ever, never, 
 in no supposable case ; Heb. 9, 17 eVel prj- 
 jrore laxvi [8ia%r]Kr]] ore fj 6 8ia%ep.fvos. 
 Luc. Fugit. 1. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 6. 
 
 2. As a Conjunction, that not ever, that 
 never, lest ever, i. e. lest at some time or 
 other, indefinite, i. q. lest perhaps; comp. 
 HTJ II. So after verbs implying purpose; 
 with the Subjunct. and preceded by a fu 
 ture, a present or aorist, or an Indie, past 
 tense ; as in Iva I. 1. a, c, d. So c. fut. 
 preced. Matt. 4, 6 dpovo-i <re, /zijTrore irpov- 
 Ko\l/rjs KT\. Luke 4, 1 1 ; pres. or aor. pre 
 ced. Matt. 5, 25 t trSt fvvoa>i> . . . /zijTrore ere 
 TrapaSw KT\. 7, 6. 13, 29. 27, 64. Mark 4, 
 12. Luke 12, 58. 14, 8. 12; Iva /^Trore 
 Luke 14, 29; praet. preced. Matt. 13, 15. 
 Acts 28, 27. With the Indie, fut. Mark 14, 2 
 firjTTOTe 3dpv/3or ecrrcu rov Xaou, comp. in [JLTJ 
 II. 3. After verbs implying fear or caution, 
 with the Subjunct. Matt. 15, 32. Luke 21, 
 34 Trpotre^ere tavrois, firjTTOTf ftaprfiaxriv 
 KT\. Heb. 2, 1. 4, 1 ; with prec. verb impl. 
 Matt. 25, 9. Acts 5, 39. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 
 10.) With Indie, fat. Heb. 3, 12, comp. in 
 fif) II. 3. 
 
 3. As an Interrogative Particle ; e. g. in 
 a direct inquiry implying a negative answer, 
 John 7, 26 /iijTrore dX?;3wy eyvaxrav ol ap- 
 %ovTfs , do the rulers then certainly know ? 
 Indirect, whether perhaps, if perhaps ; 
 with the Opt. Luke 3, 15 8ia\oyio/j,(vci>v 
 iravTuiv . . . /iijTrore euros f irj 6 Xptoro?. With 
 the Subjunct. 2 Tim. 2, 25. See Herm. ad 
 Vig. p. 808. Matth. } 514. c. 
 
 /Lt^TTft), adv. (fj-rj, TTco,) not yet, Rom. 9, 
 11. Heb. 9, 8. [Acts 27, 29.] Plut. Mor. 
 II. p. 81. 4. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 23. 
 
 /i?77ra>9) conjunct, (^rj, mar,) that in no 
 way, that by no means, i. e. lest in any way, 
 lest perhaps ; so after verbs implying pur 
 pose, with the Subjunct. and preceded by the 
 present, comp. in ^17 II. 1. 1 Cor. 9, 27 
 
 VTTUTTuifa p.OV TO (TO/iO . . . /UIJTTWy tt XXotS KTj- 
 
 pvas avTos dSd/a/ior yevw/wit. 2 Cor. 2, 7. 
 9, 4 ; preceded by an aor. Gal. 2, 2, comp. 
 Winer 60. 2. n. After verbs implying/ear 
 or caution ; e. g. with the Indie, comp. in 
 p.f] II. 3. Gal. 4, 11 (o/3oC/iai vp.as, p jirms 
 fiKrj KfKoiriaKa els v/j.as. With Subjunct. 
 aor. Acts 27, 29. Rom. 11, 21 [jSXeWe] 
 p,T)na>s ov8f (rov (peicrrjTai. 1 Cor. 8, 9. 2 Cor. 
 11,3. 12, 20 bis, where supply at the end 
 fvpeSoSo-i. (Horn. Od.-4. 775.) Once con 
 strued with both Indie, and Subjunct. 
 1 Thess. 3, 5 eTrep/m tls TO yvavai TT]V TTI- 
 (rriv vpav, p.r]7Tois fTreipaiTfv vfj.as 6 ireipdfav 
 teal fls Kvbv yevrjTai. 6 KOTTOS fjfJLWv, i. e. 
 
 [fearing] lest perhaps the tempter have tempt 
 ed you and our labour be in vain ; see in 
 Winer 1. c. 
 
 prjpo?. ov, 6, the thigh, Rev. 19, 16 e^et 
 . . . eVi TOV p,r)pbv avTov ovop,a yeypapp-evov, 
 for which custom see Cic. Verr. 4. 43. 
 Pausan. Eliac. extr. Hdot. 2. 106. Wetst. 
 N. T. in loc. So Sept. for T^ Gen. 24, 2. 
 9. Luc. D. Deor. 9. 1. Xen. Cyr. 7. 3. 6. 
 
 fJ^fjTe, conj. (fj.fj, T,~) marking a conti 
 nued negative, and referring commonly to 
 a part or member of a proposition or clause, 
 while prjfte refers to a whole clause ; pr 
 and not, also not ; hence neither, not even. 
 See Buttm. 5 149. m. 15. Kiihner $ 321. 
 2. Winer 5 59. 7. 
 
 1. In a continued negation, at the begin 
 ning of a subsequent clause, after p.fj, nei 
 ther, nor. Eph. 4, 27 6 rjXios ^17 eVtSueVw . . . 
 f*T]Tf 8i8oTe TOTTOV rc3 &ia/3oXw. 2 Thess. 2, 
 2. (Hdian. 4. 15. 19.) Repeated, /^re... 
 fjtrjTe, neither . . . nor, before different parts 
 of the same clause, Matt. 5, 34 sq. p.f) o/xd- 
 crai oXcuy, p.r]Tf tv rw ovpava, . . . prjTe fv rrj 
 yfj, . . . /iijre fls lepocr. KT\. Acts 23, 8. 12. 
 21. 1 Tim. 1, 7. James 5, 12. al. So Xen. 
 Lac. 15. 3. 
 
 2. Alone in the middle of a clause, not 
 even, Mark 3, 20 wcrre p) SvracrSlcu avrovs 
 fJ.r]Te tiprov (payelv. Xen. Lac. 10. 7. + 
 
 fj,r]Tr)p, fpos, Tpos, rj, comp. Buttm. 5 47. 
 
 1. a mother, Matt. 1, 18. 2, 11. 13. 20. 
 al. saep. Trop. of one in the place of a mo 
 ther, Matt. 12, 49. 50. Mark 10, 30. John 
 19, 27. Rom. 16, 13. Sept. for BX Gen. 
 2, 24. 44, 20. Hdian. 1. 10. 11. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 2. 1 ; trop. Horn. H. 6. 429. 
 
 2. Genr. for a parent, ancestor, progeni 
 trix. Gal. 4, 26 fj e afco lepouo-. e XeuSepa 
 forty, TJTIS eVrt [Sdppa] p^jTrjp TVCLVTUIV 
 TJH&V, i. e. which represents Sarah our com 
 mon mother ; comp. v. 22. 24. 28. So 
 Sept. and CX Gen. 3, 20. Trop. of a city 
 as the parent or source of wickedness and 
 abominations, Rev. 17, 5 Ba/3t>Xwi 17 P-TJTTJP 
 TWV TTOpvwv Kal TUV j38f\vyp.aTii>v. So Test. 
 XII Patr. p. 539. p. 735. + 
 
 f^fjTl, neg. partic. (fj.rj, rl indef.) not at 
 all, not perhaps, see Buttm. { 150. m. 6. 
 In N. T. 
 
 1. As Negat. only in the connection ft 
 P.TJTI, if not perhaps, unless perhaps, Luke 
 9, 13. 1 Cor. 7, 5. 2 Cor. 13, 5. Also /i 77- 
 ny e, i. q. P.TJTI, but stronger, not at all then, 
 i. e. for Engl. not to say then, much more 
 then, 1 Cor. 6, 3. Comp. Buttm. 1. c. 
 Herm. ad Vig. p. 801. 
 
467 
 
 2 As Interrog. whether at all ? whether 
 perharps ? i. e. is or has perhaps ? but often 
 not to be expressed in English. Matt. 7, 16 
 
 12, 23. 26, 22. 25. Mark 4,21. 14, 19 bis. 
 Luke 6, 39. John 4, 29. 7, 31. 8, 22. 18, 
 35. 21, 5. Acts 10, 47. 2 Cor. 12, 18. 
 James 3, 11 ; ^napa^ Cor. 1, 17. Sept. 
 for n Mai. 3, 8 ; fin Gen. 20, 9. 
 prjTiye, see in P.TJTI no. 1 . 
 
 fj,i]Tl$, pron. interrog. (^77, rls indef.) 
 whether any one ? is or has any one ? John 
 4, 33. 7, 48. Comp. rf III. 
 
 pyrpa, a?, ij, (p.t)T7)p,*) the matrix, womb, 
 Luke 2, 23. Rom. 4, 19. Sept for nrn 
 Num. 3, 12 ; crn 1 Sam. 1, 5. 6. J31. V. 
 H. 10. 3. Plato Tim. 91. b, d. 
 
 fjirjrpdXaxt 1 ). O v, 6, Att. p.nrpa\oias, 
 (P.TJTTJP, dXoida>.) a smiler of his mother, a 
 matricide, 1 Tim. 1, 9; comp. Rom. 1, 30. 
 
 Thorn. Mag. p. 695. Attic form, Luc. 
 Deor. Concil. 12. Lys. 116. 43. Plato 
 Phaedr. 62. p. 114. a. 
 
 /j.ijTpOTroXif, fas, fj, (p-tjTrjp, TroXty,) me 
 tropolis, 1 Tim. 6, 23 in the spurious sub 
 scription. Xen. An. 5. 2. 3. 
 
 l^ia : see in ds. 
 
 fJLUUVO), f. avv>, Pass. perf. p.(p.[ao-p.ai 
 Tit. 1, 15, Buttm. 101. n. 8 ; id. 3 pers. 
 sing, /ie/iiaircu Tit. 1,15, Buttm. 101. n. 
 7; Pass. aor. 1 fp.tdv^rjv, Buttm. 101. 7; 
 pr. to colour, to tinge, Horn. D. 4. 141. An- 
 thol. Gr. II. p. 153; to stain, to pollute, 
 Hdian. 1. 15. Luc. Phalar. 1. 12. In N. T. 
 to dejile, to pollute. 
 
 1. In the Levitical sense, Pass. John 18, 
 28 iva p.r] pnavlSao iv, dXX iva (^dyaxri TO 
 rrdo-xa. Sept. for ^ Lev. 5, 3. 22, 5. 8. 
 
 Tob. 2, 9 ; comp. Plato Legg. 782. c. 
 
 2. In a moral sense, c. ace. Jude 8 a-dpKa 
 uev /iimVovo-t. Pass, to be polluted, corrupt, 
 Tit. 1, 15 bis. Heb. 12, 15. Hdian. 2. 5. 
 10. Thuc. 2. 102. 
 
 jjiiacr fjid, arcs, TO, (/ucuW),) pr. a colour 
 ing, staining, Suid. /StHpq. In N. T. pollu 
 tion, defilement, in a moral sense ; 2 Pet. 2, 
 20 ra p.. rov Koa-p-ov. So Judith 9, 2. Dem. 
 1374. 11. Plato Euth. 4. c. 
 
 /Xiacr/i09 ; ou, 6, (/uaiW,) pollution, de 
 filement, in a moral sense ; 2 Pet. 2, 10 eV 
 (ir&vp.iq p.iao-p.ov, i. e. in polluted desire, 
 unclean lust. Buttm. $ 132. n. 12. Wisd. 
 14, 26. Plut. de ap. Delph. 20 fin. 
 
 (jbi<yfj,a, arcs, TO, (p.iyvvp.1,*) a mixture , 
 John 19, 39 p-iyp-a crp.vpvT]s KOI aXdr/s. 
 Ecclus. 38, 8. Plut. de prefect, in Virt. 8 fin. 
 
 , f. fu co, to mix, to mingle, 
 Lat. misceo, Germ, mischen ; c. accus. et 
 dat. and in Pass. c. dat. Rev. 8, 7 p.fp.i- 
 yp.eva atpari. 15, 2. See Matth. $ 403. b. 
 So Diod. Sic. 1. 2 pen. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 6. 
 Also c. ace. et /xera TWOS, Luke 13, 1 Lv TO 
 aip.a IliXaros fp-i^e p.Ta rfav ^vcrimv OVTWV. 
 Matt. 27, 34. So Plato Tim. p. 35. b. 
 
 fjil/cpos, d, 6v, small, little ; comparat. 
 p.iKpoTfpos, smaller, less ; pr. opp. of p.f- 
 yas large. 
 
 1. Of magnitude. Matt. 13, 32 /iiKpo repoy 
 Trdvrcov TWV cnr(pp.dTu>v. Mark 4, 31. James 
 3,5. So Palaeph. 52. 1. Xen. CEc. 8. 11. 
 Of stature, Luke 19, 3 TTJ ijXtKt a p.tKp6y 
 ?,v. Sept. for ^>saj Ez. 17, 6. (Xen. Cyr. 
 8. 4. 20.) Hence also of age, small, young, 
 not grown up; Acts 8, 10 OTTO p.ticpov e<as 
 p. f yd\ov. 26, 22. Heb. 8, 11. Rev. 11, 18. 
 
 13, 16. 19, 5. 18. 20, 12 ; comp. in ptyas 
 no. 1. In a compar. sense for less, younger, 
 Lat. minor natu; Mark 15,40 TOV Ia/c. roO 
 p.iKpov, of James the less. 
 
 2. Of quantity, a little, 1 Cor. 5, 6 p.iKpa 
 vp.T). Gal. 5, 9. (Xen. Mem. 3. 14. 1, 3.) 
 Trop. Rev. 3, 8. Adv. piKpov TI 2 Cor. 11, 
 1.16. Sept. for *J553 Job 10, 20. Prov. 6, 
 10. Also of space, Neut. p.iKp6v as adv. 
 a little, 7rpofA3o>i> p,iKpov Matt. 26, 39. Mark 
 14,35. So Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 6. 
 
 3. Of number, little, few, Luke 12, 32 TO 
 p.iKpov TToip.viov. Sept. for U? Gen. 30, 
 30. 47, 9. Xen. GEc. 2. 8. 
 
 4. Of time, John 7, 33 p.iKpbv xpdvov. 12, 
 35. Rev. 6, 11. 20, 3. Hence absol. p.i 
 Kpov sc. xpdVoi/, a little while, pr. ace. of 
 time how long, John 13,33. 14, 19. 16, 16 
 bis. 17 bis. 18. 19 bis. Heb. 10, 37. So p.(Ta 
 p.iKp6v, after a while, a little after, Matt. 
 26, 73. Mark 14, 70. Jos. Ant. 4. 7. 1. 
 Xen. Eq. 7. 15. ib. 8. 7. 
 
 5. Trop. of dignity, authority, little, low 
 ly, humble ; Matt. 10, 42 eva rSsv p.tKp<oi> 
 TOVTUV, spoken of the disciples. 18, 6. 10, 
 
 14. Mark 9, 42. Luke 17, 2. Matt. 11, 11 
 6 & p.iKp6repos tv. T. /3. Luke 7, 28. 9, 
 48 JE\. V. H. 2. 27. Xen. An. 3. 2. 10. 
 
 , ov, 17, Miletus, an ancient ma 
 ritime city in the southern part of Ionia on 
 the confines of Caria, south of the Meander, 
 and about thirty miles distant from Ephesus. 
 It was celebrated for a temple of Apollo, 
 and as the birth-place of Thales and Anaxi- 
 mander. Miletus became the chief seat of 
 commerce in Asia Minor. A few ruins 
 now mark its probable site, near a village 
 called Palatia or Palatch. See Plin. H. N. 
 5. 31. Strabo 14. p. 635. Rosenm. Bibl. 
 
468 
 
 Geogr. I. ii. p. 187. Acts 20, 15. 17. 
 2 Tim. 4, 20. 
 
 fJii\lov, lov, TO, a mile, Matt. 5, 41, i. e. 
 the Roman mille passuum, milliarium, the 
 mile of 1000 paces of 5 feet, whence its 
 name. The Roman foot is estimated at 
 11.6496 inches English; by Bceckh at 
 131.15 lines French. This gives 1618 or 
 1619 yards as the length of the Roman 
 mile ; being 142 or 141 yards less than the 
 English mile of 1760 yards. See Boeckh 
 Metrol. Untersuch. p. 199. Diet, of Antt. 
 art. Milliare. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 503. 
 Pol. 34. 11. 8. Strabo5. p. 332. 
 
 /JLi[j,OfJbCii} f. r)o~op,ai, Mid. depon. (p.ip.os^) 
 pr. to mimic, but in a good sense, i. e. to 
 imitate, to follow as an example, c. ace. 
 2 Thess. 3, 7 Trcoy del /zi/ieto-Sai fjp.as. V. 9. 
 Heb. 13, 7. 3 John 1 1 . Wisd. 4, 2. Hdian. 
 4. 9. 5. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 10. 
 
 fM,fj,r)Tr)$, ov, 6, (p.ip.eop.ai.) an imitator, 
 follower ; in N. T. only in the phrase P.IP-T)- 
 TTJS yivop.ai, to become an imitator, i. e. to 
 imitate, i. q. /u/ie o/wu, 1 Cor. 4, 16. 11, 1. 
 Eph. 5, 1. 1 Thess. 1, 6. 2, 14. Heb. 6, 12. 
 1 Pet. 3, 13. Jos. Ant. 6. 6. 12. Hdian. 6. 
 8. 5. Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 3. 
 
 /j,i/j,vrjo-fca), f. p.vr)o-a, to put in mind of, 
 <o remind, Horn. Od. 12. 38. II. 1. 407. 
 In N. T. only as Mid. depon. p.ip.vr)<TKo- 
 fjiai, f. p,vr)o~op,ai, aor. 1 {p.vi ]o~ %r)v both as 
 Mid. and Pass. Buttm. 5 136. 1, 2. 5 113. n. 6 ; 
 perf. part. p.ep.vr]p.fvos 2 Tim. 1, 4, as pres. 
 Buttm. 5 114 ; comp. Matth. 5 495. 
 
 1 . to call to mind, to recollect, to remem 
 ber, usually c. gen. Buttm. 132. 10. d. 
 Pres. Heb. 2, 6 on p.ip.vrjo-<T) O.VTOV, quoted 
 from Ps. 8, 5 where Sept. for "i?J. Heb. 13, 
 3. Aor. 1 as Mid. Matt. 26, 75 ep.vr]o-%r) 6 
 HeTpos TOV prjp-ciTOs. Luke 1, 54 e Xeouy. 
 v. 72. 23, 42. 24, 8. Acts 11,16. 1 Cor. 
 11,2. 2 Tim. 1, 4. 2 Pet. 3, 2. Jude 17. 
 Heb. 8, 12 et 10, 17 TUIV dvop.iu>v OVTUIV ov 
 fif) /ui^o-Sco en, i. e. I will pardon them, 
 quoted from Jer. 31, 34 where Sept. for 
 irt Nb. and so Sept. for ttbo Jer. 33. 8. 
 (Luc. D. Deor. 2. 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 33.) 
 W T ith on, Matt. 5, 23. 27, 63. Luke 16, 25. 
 John 2, 17. 22. 12. 16 ; y, Luke 24, 6 
 p.vi ja ^rjTf. wy \a\r](Tev vp.lv. So Ecclus. 
 7, 16 or 18. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 27. 
 
 2. Aor. 1 fp.vr)o-%rjv as Pass. Buttm. $ 113. 
 n. 6. Matth. j 495. e; to be remembered, to 
 
 . be had in remembrance, followed by fvu>-niov 
 TOV Seov, either fo* good, as prayers Acts 
 10, 31 comp. v. 4 ; or for punishment, Rev. 
 16, 19. Sept. for "i?t3 Ez. 18, 22 ; comp. 
 Num. 10, 9. Ps. 109, 14. 
 
 , f. ,70-0,, (/iTo-oy,) to hate ; Pass. 
 to be hated, odious. 
 
 1. Genr, to hale, c. ace. of pers. usually 
 implying active ill will in words and con 
 duct, a persecuting spirit ; Matt. 5, 43 /uto-i?- 
 a-fis TOV ex%p6v aov. V. 44. 10, 22 eVeo-Sf 
 p.io-ovp.fvoi. Mark 13, 13. Luke 1, 71. John 
 7, 7 bis. 15, 18 bis. Eph. 5, 29. Tit. 3, 3. 
 1 John 2, 9. 11. al. Sept. for *b Gen. 
 37, 3. Lev. 26, 17. (Hdian. 1. 13. 5. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 2. 7.) Spec. i. q. to persecute, Rev. 
 17, 16 OVTOI p-ia-rjo-ovo-i TTJV Tropvrjv. Sept. 
 and Wb 2 Sam. 5, 8. 22, 18. With ace. 
 of thing, i. q. to detest, to abhor ; John 3, 20. 
 Rom. 7, 15 6 fuo-S>, TOVTO TTOIW. Heb. 1, 9. 
 Jude 23. Rev. 2, 6 bis. 15. 18, 2. So Tob. 
 4, 15. Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 37. 
 
 2. Spec, in antith. with ayem-aw it is i. q. 
 not to love, to love less, to slight, c. ace. of 
 pers. Matt. 6, 24 TOV eva /iicr^cret KOI TOV 
 fTepov dyaTTTjo-fi. Luke 14, 26. 16, 13. John 
 12, 25. Rom. 9, 13. So Sept. and :b 
 Gen. 29, 31. Deut. 21, 16. Mai. 1, 3. + 
 
 /U<7^a7ToSoo-/a, ay, 17, (//to-SaTroSo r^y.) 
 pr. a paying off of wages ; hence recom 
 pense, requital, e. g. in the sense of reward 
 Heb. 10, 35. 11, 26 ; also punishment Heb. 
 2, 2. Constit. Apostol. 6.11; comp. p.io-%o- 
 Soo-i a Thuc. 8. 83. 
 
 ov, 6, (/uo-So y, drrooi- 
 ficojut.) pr. a payer off of wages ; hence a 
 requiter, rewarder, Heb. 11, 6. Constit 
 Apostol. 4. 6. 
 
 ^AtcriJ09, ia, iov, (/ito-3o y,) hired, sala 
 ried, e. g. TratSaywyot Plut. Lycurg. 16. 
 In N. T. as Subst. one hired, a hired servant, 
 Luke 15, 17. 19. Sept. for VSb Lev. 25, 
 20. Job 7, 1. So Tob. 5, 11. Ecclus. 7, 20. 
 
 /ucno-09, oC, 6, 1. hire, wages, recom 
 pense, Matt. 20, 8. Luke 10, 7 a|ioy yap 6 
 epydrrjs TOV p.io- Sov avTov toriv. Acts 1, 18 
 /jio-36y ddiKias, i. e. the wages of his crime. 
 Rom. 4, 4. 1 Cor. 3, 8. 1 Tim. 5, 18. James 
 5, 4. 2 Pet. 2, 15 /zicrSoy d&Way, i. e. wages 
 got by iniquity. Jude 1 1 p.io-%ov, i. e. for 
 hire or gain, comp. Buttm. { 132. 10. b, c. 
 Sept. for ">=b Gen. 30, 28. Mai. 3, 5; 
 rn>ba Gen. 31, 7. Ml V. H. 8. 8. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 6. 5. 
 
 2. Spec, reward, Matt. 5, 12 6 /xio-Soy 
 vfj.S)v TroXiy iv Tols ovpavols. \. 46. 6, 1. 2. 
 5. 16. 10, 41 bis. 42. Mark 9, 41. Luke 6, 
 23. 35. John 4, 36. 1 Cor. 3, 14. 9, 17. 18. 
 2 John 8. Rev. 11, 18. 22, 12. Sept. and 
 ^b Gen. 15, 1. Hdian. 1. 3. 5. Xen. An. 
 2. 2. 20. 
 
 3. Spec, retribution, punishment, 2 Pet. 
 
469 
 
 2, 13 p.KT%6s dSiKias. 2 Mace. 8, 33. Callim. 
 Hymn. in Dian. 264 ovSe yap \\rpfi8jjs oXt- 
 
 , <i, f. a><ra>, (/ii0-3o r,) to Tu re 
 out, to let out for hire, Ml V. H. 6. 1. Diod. 
 Sic. 12. 56. In N. T. only Mid. /ito-So- 
 ofjLai, oifjiai, f. axTopai, to let hire out to one 
 self, I. q. simply to hire, see Buttm. 135. 8 ; 
 C. ace. Matt. 20, 1 /LuaSwcracrSai fpydras. 
 v. 7. Sept. for "=^ Judg. 9, 4. 2 Chr. 24, 
 12. So ML V. H. 14. 17. Xen. An. 6. 
 4. 13. 
 
 filcr^cofia, arcs, TO, (/ito-Sdw,) hire, wa 
 ges, rent, Sept. for "jinx Deut. 23, 19. ML 
 V. H. 4. 12. Isocr. l45. c. In N. T. a 
 thing hired or rented, e. g. a lodging, hired 
 dwelling, Acts 28, 30. So Philo, tv /o-3a>- 
 
 fJUlTl OlKflv. 
 
 yLttcr^tuToV, ov, 6, (/no-Sow,) on fa rec?, a 
 hired servant, hireling, Mark 1, 20. John 10, 
 12. 13 bis. Sept. for TOto Ex. 12, 45. 
 Lev. 19, 13. Luc. de Merc. Cond. 36. 
 Dem. 1199. 21. Plato Lys. 208. a. 
 
 MiTvXtjvrj, rjs, rj, Milylene, the cele 
 brated capital of the island of Lesbos, Acts 
 20, 14. It was the birth-place of Sappho, 
 AlccEus, Pittacus. Now called Castro. See 
 Strabo 13. p. 617. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. 
 III. p. 372. 
 
 Mi^aij\, 6, indec. Michael, Heb. ^N^a 
 (who as God ?) pr. n. of an archangel, the 
 patron of the Jewish nation, Jude 9. Rev. 
 
 12, 7 ; see in d^ayyeXoy. 
 
 pud, as, TJ, Lat. mina, pr. a Greek weight, 
 the 60th part of a talent, containing 100 
 Spa^/idt, and larger than the Roman libra 
 or pound nearly in the proportion of 4 to 3. 
 The Roman libra is reckoned at nearest 
 ll| ounces avoirdupois ; and the Greek 
 mina at nearest I5i ounces, or a little less 
 than the English pound avoirdupois. See 
 Bceckh MetroLUntersuch. p. 122-124. Diet. 
 of Antt. arts. Mina, Libra. Adam s Rom. 
 Ant. p. 490. So 1 Mace. 14, 24. Hdot. 2. 
 180. In N. T. (iva is a sum of silver reck 
 oned by weight, containing 100 Spa^/xat, 
 and being itself the 60th part of a talent. 
 Hence according to the value of the drachma 
 under the Romans, the pva was equal to 
 3. 2s. Gd. sterl. or $15; see in Spa^/wi 
 and apyvptov no. 2. Luke 19, 13. 16 bis. 
 18 bis. 20. 24 bis. 25. So genr. Dem. 1231. 
 
 13. Xen. Mem. 2. 5. 2sq. 
 
 , coi/o r, 6, Mnason, pr. n. of a 
 Christian, Acts 21, 16. For the construc 
 tion see in art. or II. A. 3. a. j3. 
 
 fj,Via, as, fj, (/ii/xj/Tyo-KO),) recollection, 
 remembrance, Phil. 1, 3 eVt 777 pvfiq vfj.uv. 
 So fj.vfiav e x f I v to have remembrance of, 
 i. q. to recollect, to remember, 1 Thess. 3, 
 6. 2 Tim. 1, 3. Also fivfiav 7roteio-3ai 
 to make remembrance of, i. e. to bear in mind, 
 to make mention of, Rom. 1, 9. Eph. 1, 16. 
 1 Thess. 1, 2. Philem. 4. Sept. genr. for 
 1=t Is. 26, 8 ; fin. Troiflo-Sai for "131 f^S 
 Ps. Ill, 4 ; for 1st Job 14, 13. ML V. H. 
 6. 1 ; P.V. fx flv Isocr. p. 89. d. Plato Menex. 
 244. a ; \iv. 7roteio-3ai /Eschin. 23. 5. Plato 
 Phaedr. 254. a. 
 
 fJ,vr/[J,a, aros, TO, (fiifj-v IJO-KO),) pr. a me 
 morial, monument, to keep in memory any 
 person or thing, Horn. Od. 15. 126 ; hence 
 sepulchral monument, cenotaph, Horn. II. 23. 
 619. Dem. 1310. 15. In N. T. meton. a 
 tomb, sepulchre, see in jj.vrjp.flov, usually 
 hewn in the rock ; Mark 5, [3]. 5. Luke 
 8, 27. 23, 53 e^r/Kav avro (TO crco/za) Iv jj.vij- 
 paTi Xaeurw. 24, 1. Acts 2, 29. 7, 16. 
 Rev. 11, 9. Sept. for "is;; Ex. 14, 11. 
 Ez. 37, 12 ; M^WJ? Ez. 32, 23. So Diod. 
 Sic. 13. 86. Xen. Cyr. 7. 3. 11. On the 
 Hebrew tombs see the next article. 
 
 fj,vr)/jieiov : ov, TO, (/if/i^o-Kaj,) pr. a me 
 morial, monument, i. q. pvrjp.a, Xen. Ag. 6. 
 2 ; hence a sepulchral monument, cenotaph, 
 Dem. 1125. 16. Thuc. 5. 11. In N. T. 
 meton. a tomb, sepulchre, Matt. 8, 28. 27, 
 52 Kai ra ^.vr^ifla dveco^jno~av. V. 53. 28, 8. 
 Mark 5, 2. al. So Matt. 23, 29 <oo-/ielre 
 ra pvT]fj.fla, and Luke 1 1 , 47 otKoSo/ieire ra 
 Ij.mjfjLe ia, i. e. ye adorn or build up (repair) 
 the sepulchres of the prophets ; see in KOCT- 
 p.((o no. 2, and Kovidco. Comp. 1 Mace. 13, 27. 
 Jos. Ant. 13. 6. 6. Sept. for 13J5 Gen. 23, 
 6. 9. 49, 30 ; rntopj Gen. 35J 20. So 
 Plut. Lysand. 28, 29. Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 14, 
 15. The sepulchres of the Hebrews were 
 often caverns, Gen. 23, 9 sq. or were hewn 
 out by art in rocks on the sides of hills, in 
 various forms and sizes, sometimes with 
 several compartments. They were closed 
 by a door or layer of stone, and the entrance 
 was often decorated with ornaments and 
 whitewashed. On the ancient sepulchres 
 around Jerusalem, see Bibl. Res. in Palest 
 
 1. p. 517, 523 sq. + 
 
 /jbvrifjLT], rjs, T), (p.ip.vT]<rKo>,) remembrance, 
 recollection ; e. g. fj.vf)fj.rji> TroieurSat, to call 
 to mind, to bear in recollection, 2 Pet. 1,15. 
 Sept. for 15t Ps. 30, 5. ^El. V. H. 5. 3. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 2 init. pv. 7roielo-3ai Thuc, 
 
 2. 54. 
 
 fj,VT)fJiOVV(t), f. rucrco, 
 o-KO),) to call to mind, i. e. 
 
470 
 
 1. to remember, to bear in mind; absol. 
 Mark 8, 18. With a gen. comp. Buttm. 
 132. 10. d. Luke 17. 32 /zi/^oi/evere TTJS 
 yvvaiKos AWT. John 15, 20 rov Xoyov. 16, 
 4. 21. Acts 20, 35. Gal. 2, 10. Col. 4, 18. 
 1 Thess. 1, 3. Heb. 11, 15. 13, 7. Sept. 
 for 1?t p s . 63, 7. So 1 Mace. 12, 1 1. Luc. 
 D. Deor. 4. 4. Diod. Sic. 1. 21. With an 
 accus. comp. Matth. 347. n. 2. Winer 30. 
 7. c. Matt. 16, 9 TOVS aprovs. 1 Thess. 2, 
 9 TW KOTTOV. 2 Tim. 2, 8 ; also God is said 
 to remember sin, i. e. to punish it, c. ace. 
 Rev. 18, 5. Sept. for 1?J Ex. 13, 3. Is. 
 43, 18. So 2 Mace. 9, 21. Hdian. 6. 1. 16. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 7. With OTI Acts 20, 31. 
 Eph. 2, 11. 2 Thess. 2, 5 ; TTO^V Rev. 2, 
 5 ; Trwy 3, 3. 
 
 2. to caZZ /o another s mind, to mention, 
 to speak of, c. Trepi, Heb. 11, 22 Trepl TJ)? 
 e o&ov . . . fpvrjpovevcrf. Hdian. 1. 1. 5. 
 Xen. Vect. 4. 25. 
 
 p,in]p,ocrvvov, O v, TO, (^/xoo-vi os-,) a 
 memorial, monument, i. q. /m^/moj/, Hdot. 
 2. 136, 148. In N. T. genr. a memorial, 
 i. e. any thing serving to keep a person or 
 thing in remembrance; Matt. 26, 13 et 
 Mark 14, 9 els /j.vr)p.6crvvov avTrjs for a me 
 morial of her, i. e. in memory of her, to her 
 honourable remembrance. Acts 10, 4 at 
 Trpocrev^at crov . . . avijBrjO av fls p.v. tvunriov 
 T. 3. thy prayers... are come up as a me 
 morial, into remembrance, before God. Sept. 
 for "OJ. Ex. 17, 14; ThST Ex. 12, 14. 
 Ecclus. 10, 17. 24. 20. 
 
 fjLVr)CTT6V(0 : f. tva-opai, (/xmo/iat,) to ask 
 in marriage, to icoo, c. ace. Horn. Od. 18. 
 276. Xsn. Hell. 6. 4. 37. Mid. id. JEL V. 
 H. 10. 15. In N. T. only Pass. pr. to be 
 asked in marriage ; hence, to be betrothed, 
 affianced, c. dat. of pers. Matt. 1, 18 fjLvrj- 
 s rrjs firjrpos CLVTOV Mapias T&> 
 -i^. Luke 1, 27. 2,5. Sept. for Pu. 
 tni* Deut. 22, 23. 25. 27. 28. So Artemid. 
 2. 12. Eurip. Elect. 313. 
 
 fJLOyi\a\.o<), ou, 6, /, adj. (poyis, XaXe w.) 
 speaking with difficulty, a stammerer, Mark 
 7, 32. Sept. for c&st tongue-tied Is. 35, 6. 
 So ./Etius 8. 38. Phavor. poXis TO </>3ey/ia 
 8iop%ovv vvdp.fvos. Some Mss. read poy- 
 yiXaXos, (poyyos, XaXew,) speaking with 
 a hoarse hollow voice. This form is found 
 in no lexicon. 
 
 poyis, adv. (/xoyos,) with difficulty, hard 
 ly, Luke 9, 39. 3 Mace. 7, 6. Luc. D. 
 Mort. 6. 2. Xen. An. 3. 4. 48. 
 
 , ou, 6. Lat. modius, the chief 
 Roman measure for things dry, Matt. 5, 15. 
 
 Mark 4, 21. Luke 11, 33. It was equal to 
 one-third of the Roman amphora, and to 
 one-sixth of the Attic medimnus ; and wa? 
 therefore equivalent to two-ninths of an At 
 tic fifTprjTrjs. Hence it is reckoned at 1 gall. 
 7.8576 pints Engl. or nearly one peck. See 
 Boeckh Metrol. Untersuch. p. 200. Diet. 
 of Antt. art. Modius. Adam s Roman Ant. 
 p. 505. Jos. Ant. 9. 4. 5. Dinarch. 95. 37. 
 /iO^aXi?, idos, fj, (i. q. potxds fern, of 
 fioixos,) an adulteress, Rom. 7, 3 bis. 2 Pet. 
 2, 14 o<p3aX^ol /jLfcrTol /not^oXi Sos, eyes full 
 of an adulteress, i. e. gazing with desire 
 after such persons. Sept. for ^SSOB Prov. 
 30, 20. Hos. 3, 1. So Pint. Plac. Philo- 
 soph. 1.7. p. 245. A late form, Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 452. Trop. from the Heb. one 
 faithless towards God, as an adulteress to 
 wards her husband ; in O. T. chiefly of 
 those who forsook God for idols, Sept. Ez. 
 16, 38. 23, 45. Mai. 3, 5; see in f^Xoy no. 
 2. In N. T. genr. of those who neglect 
 God and yield themselves up to their 
 own lusts and passions, James 4, 4 ; also 
 yfpfu irovrjpa KCIL /iot^aX/y, where /xoi^aXts 
 is in apposit. for adulterous, i. e. faithless, 
 apostate, Matt. 12, 39. 16, 4. Mark 8, 38. 
 
 fJLOi^ao), >, f. Tjcro), (polios,) to commit 
 adultery with a woman ; trop. c. ace. TT/V 
 SdXao-o-aj , to have dalliance with the sea, to 
 get possession of it covertly and without 
 right, Xen. Hell. 1. 6.^15. In N. T. only 
 Mid. poixaofj.ai, W/LUU, genr. to commit 
 adultery, used of both man and woman ; 
 absol. Matt. 5, 32 bis, Troiei avTrjv pot^a- 
 crSai* KOI os. . . p-oi^arat. 19, 9 bis. Mark 
 10, 11. 12. Sept. for S|a Jer. 3, 8. 9, 2. 
 Different is Thorn. Mag. p. 619, p-oixarai 
 6 dvfjp, fjLoi^fvfTai 8e f] yvvrj. 
 
 fjtotjfela, as, 17, (fjLOLXfvca, ) adultery, 
 Matt. 15, 19. Mark 7, 21. John 8, 3. Gal. 
 5, 19. Sept. for t^SSS Jer. 13, 27. Wisd. 
 14, 26. Hdian. 5. 7. 6. Plato Rep. 443. a. 
 
 /jLOi%eva), f. euo-co, (p.oixos,~) to commit 
 adultery. a) Act. genr. and absol. Matt 
 5, 27 ou poixtva-fis. 19, 18. Rom. 13, 9 
 Mark 10, 19 ^ poixevays. Luke 18. 20 
 James 2, 1 1 bis ; all in allusion to Ex. 20. 
 13. Deut. 5, 17, where Sept. for PjS3. 
 Luke 16, 18 bis. Rom. 2, 22 bis. (Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 78. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 5.) With ace. 
 to commit adultery with any one, Matt. 5, 28 
 ^8rj ifUHXWTt avrrjv. Sept. for C|^3 trop. 
 Jer. 3, 9. (Luc. D. Deor. 6. 3. Plato Rep. 
 360. b.) Symbol, once c. pera TWOS, Rev. 
 2, 22 ; comp. in pu^aX/i fin. b) Mid. 
 absol. to commit adultery, Lat. mcechari; 
 
471 
 
 //.oi/o? 
 
 Pass. aor. 1 as Mid. Matt. 5, 32 John 8, 4 
 Lachm. 
 
 >, ov, 6, an adulterer, Luke 18, 1 1 
 1 Cor. 6, 9. Heb. 13, 4. Sept. for C|Sjb 
 Job 24, 15. Prov. 6, 32. So JEL V. H. 
 10. 13. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 5. Trop. from 
 the Heb. one faithless towards God, as an 
 adulterer towards his wife, see in p-oi^a. 
 fin. James 4, 4. So Sept. and ^m Is. 
 57,3. 
 
 fjioXtf, adv. (/xojXor, /no Xoj.) i. q. p.6yis 
 but less Attic, Buttm. Ausf. Spr. } 16. n. 2 ; 
 n-ith difficulty, hardly, scarcely, Acts 14, 18. 
 27, 7. 8. 16. Rom. 5, 7. 1 Pet. 4, 18. 
 Hdian. 3. 6. 4. Xen. Conv. 4. 37. 
 
 MoXo^, 6, indec. Moloch, Heb. T]bb 
 (king) Molek Jer. 32, 35 ; also E2bE Milcom 
 
 1 K. 11, 5. 2 K. 23, 13 ; and cabs Mai- 
 cam Jer. 49, 1. 3 ; pr. n. of an idol of the 
 Ammonites, to which the Hebrews from 
 the time of Solomon onwards sacrificed in 
 fants in the valley of Hinnom, 1 K. 11,7. 
 
 2 K. 23, 10. Jer. 7, 31. 32. 32. 35; comp. 
 in yetwa. The Rabbins describe the statue 
 of Moloch as of brass, in the form of the 
 human body, but with the head of an ox ; 
 it was hollow within, was heated from be 
 low, and the children to be immolated were 
 placed in its arms. Similar to this was also 
 the statue of Saturn among the Carthagi 
 nians, see Diod. Sic. 20. 14. Hence it 
 has been held that Moloch represented the 
 planet Saturn, which was regarded as a *a- 
 Ko8cu /ia)i> to be appeased with human sacri 
 fices. According to Jer. 32, 35 and 19, 5 
 Moloch would seem to be no other than 
 Baal (b?sn) } to whom also children were 
 sacrificed in the region of Carthage and 
 Numidia, prob. as the representative of the 
 same planet. See Heb. Lex. arts. T|bb and 
 b?3 no. 5. Gesen. Comm. on Is. II. p. 343. 
 Miinter Relig. der Karthag. p. 19. In N. 
 T. only Acts 7, 43 KOI di/eXd/Sere TTJV O-KTJ- 
 vrjv TOV MoXd^, comp. in di>a\ap.f3dva> no. 
 2 ; quoted from Amos 5,- 26 where Sept. 
 MoXdx for Heb. c ?3b_E your king, i. q. 
 
 fj.o\vv(i), f. wS>, to soil, to stain, to defile, 
 Sept. for bs-J Gen. 37, 30. Luc. Anachar. 
 1. In N. T. symbol. Rev. 3, 4 OVK epoXwav 
 ra IfjMTta. 14, 4. Metaph. 1 Cor. 8, 7 9 
 (rvvfi^rjo-Ls avTtav . . . /xoXiWrat. their con 
 science is defiled, i. e. by the feeling of 
 wrong, is no longer pure. So Ecclus. 21, 
 28. Artem. 2. 26. Porph. de Abstin. 1. 42. 
 
 yxo\vcr/i09) oO, 6, (/ioXuj><B,) a soiling, 
 itain, Plut. Mor. V. p. 8. In N. T. defile- 
 
 menl, pollution, in a moral sense, 2 Coi. 7, 
 1. Sept. for MB3n Jer. 23, 15. So Esdr. 
 8, 33. 2 Mace. 5, 27. 
 
 fj,o^(j)r], fj S , fj, (pefjL<pofj.ai, ) fault found, 
 blame, complaint, i. e. occasion of complaint, 
 Col. 3, 13. Eurip. Orest. 1068. Plato Ep. 
 323. b. 
 
 ;}$, jj, (n/j/co,) pr. stay, in a place 
 Xen. An. 5. 1. 5. In N. T. an abode, dwell 
 ing, mansion, John 14, 2. Spec, noiflv 
 /J.OVTJV irapd TIVI, to make one s abode with 
 any one, i. e. to abide or dwell with him, 
 trop. John 14, 23; comp. Rev. 21, 3. So 
 pr. Jos. Ant. 8. 13. 7. Thuc. 1. 131. 
 
 fj,ovoyevrjs, eo y, O vs, 6, 77, adj. (povos, 
 ytvos, ytvofiot,) only born, only begotten, 
 i. e. an only child, Luke 7, 12 ^ovo-yev^s ro> 
 fj.r]Tpi. 8, 42 Zvydrrjp p.oi>. rjv. 9, 38. Heb. 
 11,17. So Tob. 3, 15. 6, 9. Diod. Sic. 4. 
 73. Plato Crit. 113. d. In John s writings 
 spoken only of the Messiah, 6 Adyov in the 
 flesh, as the only begotten Son of God (Luke 
 1, 35) in the highest sense, as alone know 
 ing and revealing the essence of the Father, 
 John 1, 14. 18. 3, 16. 18. 1 John 4, 9. 
 Others here most dear, only beloved, as Sept. 
 forlorn p s . 22,21. 35, 17. 
 
 /J,6vo$, 77, ov, only, alone. 1. Pr. With 
 out others, without companions, e. g. of 
 persons, Matt. 14, 23 /zoW ^v et. Mark 
 6, 47 xal avTos /zoi/o? eVl rrjs yvjs. 9, 2 KUT 
 Ibiav IJLOVOVS. V. 8. Luke 10,40. John 8, 9. 
 Rom. 11, 3. 16, 4. Heb. 9, 7. 2 John 1. al. 
 Sept. for *i?b Gen. 2, 18. 32, 23. (Hdian. 
 3. 5. 15. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 36.) Trop. of 
 one acting by his own authority, alone, John 
 8, 16; or as destitute of help from another 
 John 8, 29. 16, 32. (JE.I V. II. 9. 40.) 
 Of things, Luke 24, 12 TO. teovia Kfl^va 
 fj.6va, by themselves without the body of 
 Jesus. John 12, 24 6 KUKKOS . . /J.QVOS pevti, 
 i. e. sterile, barren. In an adverbial sense, 
 of persons and things, comp. Buttm. 123. 
 
 6. Matt. 4, 4 OVK fTV f tpTCO /ZWO) ^r/CTfTai 
 
 6 ai/3p. John 5, 44 rfjv So^av napa TOV fj.6- 
 vov 3eoi) ov ^rjrelTf. Jude 4. Rev. 15, 4. 
 (Xen. Mem. 4. 5. 9.) So after ei p^, 
 Matt. 12, 4 et /jit] rols Itptvcri P.WOLS (comp. 
 Acts 11, 19). Matt. 17, 8. 24, 36. Luke 5, 
 21. Phil. 4, 15. Rev. 9, 4. 
 
 2. alotie of many, one out of many ; Luke 
 24. 18 (TV p.6vos napoiKfls ifpovtrdhrjfj. KT\. 
 1 Cor. 9, 6. 2 Tim. 4, 11. Eurip. Ale. 460. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1 . 4. 27. 
 
 3. Neut. [tovov as adv. only, alone, 
 Buttm. ^ 115. 4. E. g. simply, Matt. 5, 47 
 
 . 9, 21 iav \t.ovov 
 
 TOV Ifiariov avTov. Mark 5, 36. Acts 
 
472 
 
 18, 25. 1 Cor. 7, 39. Gal. 1, 23. Heb. 9, 10. 
 (Hdian. 3. 4. 19. Xen. Conv. 5. 2.) After 
 fl pr), Matt. 21, 19 ft p,f) (pvXXa v-ovov. 
 Mark 6, 8. Acts 11, 19. With negatives, 
 e. g. p.rj p-ovov not only, simply Gal. 4, 18. 
 James 1 , 22 ; in antith. or gradation, c. dXXd 
 Phil. 2, 12 ; with dXXa KOI, but also, John 
 13, 9 fj.T) TOVS 7r68as p.ov p.6vov, aXXa KOI ras 
 Xflpas KT\. (Hdian. 2. 5. 10.) ov povov, 
 not only, comp. in ov no. 3 ; simply James 
 2, 24 ; in antith. or gradation, c. dXXd Acts 
 
 19, 26; (Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 16;) with aXXa 
 K ai but also, Matt. 21, 21. John 5, 18 OTI ov 
 p.6vov eXve TO crdfifiaTov, dXXa KOI irarepa 
 I8iov fXeye TOV Zeov. 11, 52. Acts 21, 13. 
 Rom. 1, 32. Heb. 12, 26. al. So Hdian. 1. 
 12. 14. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 17. + 
 
 \fjios, ov, 6, f], adj. (povos, 
 o y,) one-eyed, having one eye, Matt. 
 18, 9. Mark 9, 47. Luc. Ver. Hist. 1. 3. 
 The earlier Greeks said Tfpo <p3aXp.oy, Lob. 
 adPhryn. p. 136. 
 
 fiovoo), ,, f. wo-to, (P.OI/OS,) to leave alone, 
 Pass, to be left alone, e. g. as a widow, to be 
 solitary, prob. childless, 1 Tim. 5, 5. Diod. 
 Sic. 19. 39. Xen. Yen. 9. 9. 
 
 s, fj, form, shape, Mark 16, 12 
 eV eVf pa p.op<pfj. Sept. for rP?5B I s . 44, 13. 
 (Luc. Hermot. 27. Xen. (Ec. 6. 16.) Phil. 
 2, 7 p.op(pf]v SovXov \ap<bv i. e. appearing in 
 a humble and despised condition. (Comp. 
 Test. XII Patr. p. 744 TOV /3ucrtXea TWV ovp. 
 TOV (irl yrjs (pavevra ev poptpfj av^Spunrov 
 Tcm-fii coo-fcos, i. q. p. 644 3ew lv o^p-an 
 di/SpcoTrov.) Also Phil. 2, 6 os (V p-opcp^ 3eov 
 virdpx^v who being in the form of God, i. e. 
 as God, like God, where the force of the 
 antithesis refers most naturally to the divine 
 majesty and glory ; so Sept. for "H Dan. 4, 
 33 ; comp. 5, 6. 9. 10. Or p.op(pjj may here 
 have the sense of (pvo-is nature ; hence iv 
 p-opcpj/ Seov vTrdpxuv, being in the nature of 
 God, of the same nature with God; comp. 
 Eurip. Bacch. 54 p-op^v T e p 1 ?" p,ere/3aXoi 
 els (ivSpos cpvo-iv. Plato Rep. 381. c, 3e6? 
 KciXXio-TOS Kai (ipio-Tos &v . . . p-evei del oTrXcos 
 
 fV TTJ ttVTOV /JLOp(plJ. 
 
 /jiop(j)6(i), >, f. wo-co, (nop<j>rj,) to form, 
 to fashion, c. ace. Sept. for "^n Is. 44, 13. 
 Plut. Platon. Quaest. 2. 2. In N. T. Pass. 
 to be formed; trop. Gal. 4, 19 a^ptj ov p.op- 
 (a>3; Xp. eV vp.1v, i. e. until Christ in his 
 full form and life live in you ; comp. 2, 20. 
 
 fj,6p(f)(i)cn^, tos, r), (p.op(poa>,) pr. a form 
 ing, training, p.. TO>V oVvSpwv Theophr. C. 
 PI. 3. 7. 4. In N. T. form, appearance; 
 either mere external form, 2 Tim. 3, 5 e%ov- 
 
 Tes p.6p<pwcriv evo-efteias , or a prescribed- 
 form, Rom. 2, 20 fx>v TTJV p.. TTJS yvuxreats. 
 Comp. genr. Test. XII Patr. p. 742 ISelv TTJV 
 p.. TTJS oif/e&s avTov. 
 
 fj,oa"xp7roiea), t5, f. jjo-w, (p.6<rxos, 
 TTotew,) to make a calf, i. e. the image of a 
 calf or bullock, found only Acts 7, 41. 
 The allusion is to the golden calf made by 
 Aaron in imitation of the Egyptian Apis ; 
 comp. Ex. 32, 4 sq. where Sept. ( 
 
 ov, 6, pr. a shoot of a plant, 
 young and tender, Horn. H. 11. 105. Dios- 
 cor. IV. 108 ; hence a young animal, and 
 espec. in prose and N. T. a calf, a young 
 bullock, Luke 15, 23. 27. 30. Heb. 9, 12. 
 19. Rev. 4, 7. Sept. for i Ex. 32, 4. 8. 
 19; IB Ex. 29, 10 sq. "iga Gen. 12, 16. 
 ^El. H. An. 14. 11. Plato Crat. 393. c. 
 Hdot. 3. 28 of the god Apis, i. e. a young 
 bullock. 
 
 jAOvaiKos, fj, 6v, (/iovo-a,) devoted to the 
 muses, i. e. to the liberal arts and sciences, 
 learned, a scholar, Ml. V. H. 4. 15. Plato 
 Soph. 253. b. In N. T. skilled in music, a 
 musician, Rev. 18, 22 ^>o>i^ Ki3apo>coi> KOI 
 P.OVO-IKWV Kai ai\T)T<v, perh. here singers. 
 So 1 Mace. 9, 39. 41. Luc. D. Deor. 7. 3. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 38. 
 
 /io^jo?, ov, 6, (/Lioy/o), ^toyof.) toil, 
 wearisome labour, travail, including the idea 
 of painful effort, sorrow ; in N. T. only as 
 coupled with KOTTOS. 2 Cor. 11,27 eV KO TTW 
 Kai p-oxZu. 1 Thess. 2, 9. 2 Thess. 3, 8. 
 Sept. for ?nS Deut. 26, 7. Ecc. 2, 18sq. 
 Wisd. 10, 10. .Eschin. 80. 16. Xen. Conv. 
 8. 40. 
 
 yu,ueXo9, ov, 6, marrow, Heb. 4, 12. 
 Sept. Gen. 45, 18. Luc. Tim. 8. Plato 
 Tim. 91. a. 
 
 yiu eco, w, f. jjo-w, (p.va), ) to initiate, to in 
 struct, in things before unknown, Pass. Phil. 
 4, 12, parall. with p.av%dva> in v. 11. Diod. 
 Sic. 4. 7 /Lively rov? dvtlpunrovs TOVTO 8 
 eo-Tiv, TO 8i8do~Kfiv TO. Ka\a Kai av/i(pepoi>- 
 Ta, KOI VTTO T>V aTrcuSevreoi/ dyvoovfj-eva. 
 Spec, to initiate into the heathen mysteries, 
 Diod. Sic. 5. 48. Dem. 1351. 26. 
 
 /iO^-09, ov, 6, speech, discourse, Horn. 
 Od. 11. 561. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 58 ; a tale, 
 story, Horn. Od. 3. 94. In N. T. a myth, 
 fable, legend, a mythic tale, mythic dis 
 course ; 1 Tim. 1, 4. 4, 7 TOVJ 8e fBtfif)\ovs 
 Kai ypaa>8fis p,v3ovs napaiTov. 2 Tim. 4, 
 4. Tit. 1, 14 /LIT) i rrpoo~fxv rf s Iov8a iKols 
 /xvSotr. 2 Pet. 1, 16. So Hdian. 1. 11. 6. 
 Dem. 1219. 14. Plato Rep. 350. e. 
 
/J,VKUO/J,CU 
 
 473 
 
 at, f. qrro^at, Mid. depon. 
 (fjiv,) onomatop. to moo, to lotc, pr. as the 
 cow or ox, Horn. II. 18. 580. Luc. D. Mar. 
 15. 2; to bellow II. 21. 237; of other ani 
 mals, Plut. de esu earn. 1. 1. Theocr. 26. 
 20. In N. T. of a lion, to roar, Rev. 10, 3 
 Sicnrfp \ea)v /JLVKUTCU. So Anthol. Gr. I. p. 
 246. 
 
 , f. /orw, (fjLVKTrjp, pvfa, IJLV,) 
 to turn up the nose, to sneer at ; hence to 
 mock, 1o deride ; Pass. Gal. 6, 7 36? ov 
 fivKTrjpi^(Tai, i. e. God will not let himself 
 be mocked. Sept. for l Job 22, 19. Ps. 
 80, 7. 1 Mace. 7, 34. Lys. Fragm. 36. 
 
 /iiAi/co?, 77, 6v, (/ivX?;,) belonging to a 
 mill ; e. g. Xi 3o? HV\IKOS, a mill-stone, 
 Mark 9, 42. Luke 17, 2 Lachm. 
 
 ^IvXoS", ov, 6, (p.v\T), /ivXXw, /ivco.) pr. a 
 grinder, hence a mill, a mill-stone. The 
 mills used by the Hebrews are still com 
 mon in the East ; they are composed of two 
 stones, of which the lower is fixed, and the 
 upper is turned round upon it (Heb. M 1 ! 
 rider), having a hole in the middle for re 
 ceiving the grain, which is usually dropped 
 in by hand. The grinding was and is mostly 
 done by hand by female slaves, who sit or 
 kneel at their work, and relieve each other. 
 The grating sound of the mill is often heard 
 at a distance. Larger mills were turned by 
 an ass ; whence the upper mill-stone was 
 called OVLKOS Matt. 18, 6 ; or also ovos, 
 Hesvch. was 6 avutrtpos Xt Soy TOV fj.ii- 
 Xou. Xen. An. 1. 5. 5; comp. Luc. Asin. 
 28, 42. See Bibl. Res. in Pal. II. p. 180 
 sq. 385, 471. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. a mill, Rev. 18, 22 KCU (pcavfj p.v\ov, 
 the sound of the mill, i. e. its grating sound, 
 which marks the presence and prosperity of a 
 household ; comp. Jer. 25, 10. [Matt. 24, 41.] 
 Sept. for D lrvj Ex. 11, 5. Is. 47, 2. Plut. 
 de vitand. JEre alien. 7 mid. Hesych. 1. c. 
 
 2. Synecd. a mill-stone, the upper one or 
 rider; e. g. p.v\os OVIKOS Matt. 18, 6. [Mark 
 9, 42.] Luke 17, 2 ; /*. ptyas Rev. 18, 21. 
 Sept. for 23 1 ?. Judg. 9, 53. 2 K. 11, 21. 
 Anthol. Gr. III. p. 46, 51. 
 
 fj,v\d)V, ooi/oj, 6, (/xvX?;,) a mill-house, 
 pistrinum, place where the mill is, Matt. 
 24, 41. Luc. Asin. 42. Dem. 1111. 27. 
 Thuc. 6. 22. See in /ivXo?. 
 
 Mv pa, uv, TO, Myra, one of the six prin 
 cipal cities of Lycia, on the S. W. coast of 
 Asia Minor, Acts 27, 5. See Strabo 14. p. 
 665, 666. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. I. ii. p. 192. 
 
 [Avptds, d8os, fj, (pvpios,) a myriad, ten 
 thousand, Act* 19, 19. Sept. for 
 
 Ezra 2, 64 ; ttaa/J Deut. 33, 17. So ^El. 
 V. II. 2. 25. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 6. Put as in 
 Engl. for any indefinitely large number, 
 Luke 12, 1. Acts 21, 20. Heb. 12, 22. 
 Jude 14. Rev. 5, 11. 9, 16. So Sept. and 
 rt^ Gen. 24, 60. 1 Sam. 21, 11. 
 
 fAVpifo, f. iVco, (p.vpov.) to rub with oint 
 ment, to anoint, e. g. for burial, c. ace. Mark 
 14, 8 Trpoe Xa/Se /zvpt crat /JLOV TO crw/ia. 
 Aristoph. Plut. 529. Hdot. 1. 195. 
 
 fj,vpi,o$, a, ov, very many, innumerable, 
 Find. Nem. 10. 84. Theocr. 16. 22. Plur. 
 fMvpioi id. Horn. Od. 8. 110. In N. T. only 
 Plur. /xvp tot, ten thousand, pr. Matt. 18, 24 
 fj.vpio)v raXazrcoi/. Sept. for O^Ebx PH^S 
 Esth. 3, 9 ; Tan 1 Chr. 29, 7. So Diod. 
 Sic. 15. 59. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 5. Put as in 
 Engl. for any indefinitely large number; 
 1 Cor. 4, 15 eav p-vpiovs 7rai8aycoyot<j e^rfTf. 
 i. e. ten thousand masters. 14, 19. So Jos. 
 Ant. 5. 3. 2. Hdian. 2. 3. 14. Xen. Cyr. 5. 
 1.13. 
 
 fivpov, ov, TO, (kindr. /xupw.) any aro 
 matic balsam distilling of itself from a tree 
 or plant ; espec. myrrh, p.vppa, o-p.vpva, 
 JEl V. H. 12. 31, comp. Diod. Sic. 5. 41. 
 In N. T. genr. ointment, unguent, i. e. per 
 fumed, Matt. 26, 7 dXd/3a<rrpoj> p.vpov. V. 
 9. 12. Mark 14, 3. 4. 5. Luke 7, 37. 38. 23, 
 56. John 11,2. 12, 3 bis. 5. Rev. 18, 13. 
 Opp. to eXcuoi>, Luke 7, 46 e Xai w 1-171 Ke<p. 
 fjiov OVK T)\{i\lsas avrr] 8e p.vpa> TyXfti^e fj.ov 
 TOVS 7r68as, comp. Xen. below. Sept. for 
 ni -J "jEtti P s . 133, 2; VSttS Prov. 27, 9. 
 Cant. 1, 2. So JE1. V. H. 9. 9. Pol. 31.4. 
 1. Xen. Conv. 2. 3, 4 opp. eXaiof. 
 
 Mv<rla, as, rj, Mysia, the north-western 
 province of Asia Minor, lying between the 
 Propontis and Lydia, and including the 
 Troad, Acts 16, 7. 8. It formed part of the 
 Roman proconsular Asia. The Mysian ci 
 ties Assos, Pergamus, and Troas, are men 
 tioned in N. T. See Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. 
 I. ii. p. 173. 
 
 p/Vcnr)plOV, iov, TO, (/xvcm/y, p.veo>,) a 
 mystery, i. e. something into which one 
 must be initiated, something of itself not 
 obvious -and above human insight. In N. 
 T. spoken of facts, doctrines, principles, 
 not fully revealed. 
 
 1 . Genr. Matt. 13,11 vfui> Se &orai yi/a>vai TO 
 fj.vo-TT)pia TI]S j3acr. ra>v ovp. to knoiv the mys 
 teries (mysterious things) of the kingdom of 
 heaven, i. e. in a deeper and more perfect 
 manner than they were made known to 
 others. Mark 4, 11. Luke 8, 10. 1 Cor. 14, 2. 
 
 Eph. 5, 32 TO /iVOTJJptOI TOUTO fj.tya ((TTIV 
 
474 
 
 2 Thess. 2, 7 TO p.vo-Trjpiov TTJS dvop-ias, the 
 hidden wickedness, as yet unknown to 
 Christians, opp. dnoKaXinrTeo-^ai in v. 8. 
 (Jos. B. J. 1 . 24. 1 KdKtas p.vo-Tr)piov.) Rev. 
 1, 20 TO p-vo-T. TWV eirra dcrrepcov. 10, 7. 17, 
 5. 7. Wisd. 2, 22. Hdian. 8. 7. 8. Of the 
 Eleusinian mysteries, e. g. the lesser, ra 
 fiiKpd Diod. Sic. 4. 14; the greater, Diod. 
 Sic. 4. 25. Dem. 29. ult. Xen. Hell. 1. 4. 14. 
 2. Spec, the mystery of the Gospel, the 
 Christian dispensation, as having been long 
 hidden and first revealed in later times. 
 Eph. 3, 9 et Col. 1, 26 TO fJLva-rrjpiov TO OTTO- 
 KfKpvfj.fjLevov drro TO>V alcov&v ev TW 3e. 
 Eph. 6, 19 TO ft. TOV euayyeXi ov. Col. 2, 2 
 TO p.. TOV 3eoC. 4, 3 et Eph. 3, 4 TOV Xp. 
 1 Tim. 3, 9 TTJS Trio-Teas. Rom. 16, 25. 
 
 1 Cor. 2, 7. 4, 1. 13, 2. Eph. 3, 3. Col. 1, 
 27. So of particular doctrines or parts of 
 the gospel, Rom. 11, 25. 1 Cor. 15, 51. 
 Eph. 1, 9. 1 Tim. 3, 16. 
 
 /AVOJTTafo, f. do-to, (ftvar^; ftvco, co^,) 
 pr. to shut the eyes; then to contract the 
 eyelids, to Mink, to twinkle, like one who 
 cannot see clearly ; hence to see dimly, to 
 be near-sighted, trop. 2 Pet. 1, 9. Aristot. 
 Probl. Sect. 31. Suid. fftvd>7rao-ev tiKpois 
 Tols ofpSaXp-otj Trpoo-fO xt) pv7rao) -yap TO 
 eappvav 
 
 fi(i)\a>-^r, anas, 6, (kindr. p.o)Xo?, p.wXvy,) 
 a stripe, weal, the mark of a stripe or blow ; 
 trop. 1 Pet. 2, 24 ov T p,o>Xa>7ri ItfarjTf, i. e. 
 collect, stripes, quoted from Is. 53, 5 where 
 Sept. for iTi Ori. So pr. Luc. Philopseud. 
 20. Plut. Jm. Paul. 19 fin. 
 
 fjicofjiaofiat, c3p.at, f. rjo-ofiai, Mid. depon. 
 (p.wp.or,) to find fault ivith, to carp at, to 
 blame, c. ace. 2 Cor. 8, 20. Aor. 1 e p.wp.jjSei 
 as Pass. 2 Cor. 6, 3 tVa p.?) pcop^S?; rj StaKo- 
 vla fawn, comp. Buttm. 113. n. 6. Wisd. 
 10, 14. Luc. D. Deor. 20. 2. Plato Prot. 
 346. c. 
 
 /AW//-O?, ov, 6, fault, i. e. fault-finding, 
 blame, censure, Ecclus. 18, 15. Plut. Reip. 
 gerend. Praec. 27. p. 102. In N. T. fault as 
 found, a blemish, trop. stain, disgrace, 
 
 2 Pet. 2, 13 o-7nXot KCH p.wp,ot. So pr. 
 Sept. for n*ia of a bodily defect, Lev. 12, 16 
 sq. Deut. 15, 21. Anthol. Gr. I. p. 74, 75. 
 
 /mwpalva), f. ai/<3, (/iwpos,) pr. to make 
 dull, sluggish, see in fj,a>p6s. Hence 
 
 1. Of impressions on the taste, Pass, to 
 become insipid, tasteless, to lose its savour, 
 e. g. salt, Matt. 5, 13 et Luke 14, 34 lav be 
 TO oXay [jLoipaiftfj. See fUtp6f. 
 
 2. Of the mind, to make foolish, silly, i. e. 
 to show to be foolish ; c. ace. 1 Cor. 1 , 20 
 e/ttepai ev 6 3f6y TT/V (rofpiav TOV KoVjuov. 
 
 Pass. Rom. 1, 22 <pdo~KovTes elvat cro(poi 
 ffjLa>pdv^Sr]crav, they became foolish, acted like 
 fools. Sept. for b&3 Is. 44, 15. Pass, for 
 ^?5a ; 2 Sam. 24, 10; 1?a3 Is. 19, n._ 
 In profane writers /icopaiVw in ^his sense is 
 intrans. to be foolish, to act foolishly, Luc. 
 D. Mort. 13. 3. Xen, Mem. 1. 1. 11. 
 
 fJ,a>pia, as, f], (p.copos,) folly, foolishness, 
 absurdity, spoken of what seems foolish and 
 absurd, 1 Cor. 1, 18 6 Xo yo? . . . TOIS p.ev 
 uTroXXv/jLtvois p.a>pia e ort. V. 21. 23. 2, 14. 
 
 3, 19. Ecclus. 20, 31. Dem. 128. 10. 
 Thuc. 5. 41. 
 
 fAG) pO\0<y id, as, fj, (p-copoXoyoy ; ftcopos, 
 Xeyo),) foolish talk, vain discourse, Eph. 5, 4. 
 Aristot. H. A. 1. 11.5. Plut. de Garrulit. 
 
 4. pen. 
 
 /jiwpos, d, 6v, pr. dull, not acute, e. g. 
 of impressions on the taste, insipid, taste 
 less, Dioscor. 4. 18. p. 122. Hippocr. de Dieeta 
 2. 27. 2. In N. T. of the mind, dull, stu 
 pid, foolish, and Subst. 6 p. o> p 6 s , a fool ; 
 e. g. of persons, Matt. 7, 26 6/ioio)3^creTai 
 dv8pl p,copw. 23, 17 /Lia>pot KOL Tv(p\oi. V. 19. 
 25, 2 at Trfvre fitcpai sc. TrapSeVot. v. 3. 8. 
 1 Cor. 3, 18. 4, 10. Sept. for ^33 Deut. 
 32, 6 ; ^03 Ps. 94, 8. (Luc. Paras. 25. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 45.) From the Heb. with 
 the accessory idea of wickedness, impiety, 
 Matt. 5, 22 ; so Heb. ^J Sept. a<pcoi> Ps. 
 14, 1. 53, 2. Job 2, 10 ; see Heb. Lex. ^3 
 no. 2. Comp. Arr. Epict. 3. 22. 85. Plato 
 Legg. 857. d. Of things, 1 Cor. 1, 25 TO 
 /juapov TOV 3eov i. e. what men count foolish 
 though coming from God, comp. v. 23. 24. 
 V. 27 Ta p-wpa TOV KdV/Aov. 2 Tim. 2, 23 et 
 Tit. 3, 9 ^TTjo-eis p.. So Luc. Epigr. 1. 
 Xen. 1. c. 
 
 JVfawcr?}9 or Ma>cn}9, 6, gen. e cos, dat. 
 et et ft, acc. ea et fjv, Moses, Heb. !"iujo 
 (drawn out, saved), pr. n. of the great He 
 brew prophet and legislator ; on the forms 
 and flexion, see Winer J 10. The form 
 M o> o- 77 r, comes from Heb. niaa, an d is 
 found in Text. rec. chiefly in the Evan 
 gelists, Matt. 8, 4. 17, 3. 23, 2. Mark 1, 
 44. 9, 4. 5. Acts 3, 22. al. The form 
 Mwvo-Jjf, also in Sept. and Josephus, and 
 in several later editions every where in N. 
 T. is derived from the Egyptian etymology ; 
 see Heb. Lex. art. Jiaja Jos. Ant. 2. 9. 6 rb 
 yap v &o>p ft a> ol AiyvTmoi KaXouo ii , v<rrjs 
 fie TOVS e vSaTos aaftfVTas, comp. C. Apion. 
 1. 31. So-ai Rec. Mwvo-^r, Acts 6, 14. 7,35. 
 37. al. Gen. Mojvo-eW Acts 15, 1. 5. Dat. 
 -el 2 Tim. 3, 8. al. Meton. for the books oj 
 Moses, the Pentateuch, Luke 16, 29. 31. 24, 
 27. + 
 
Naacrwv 
 
 475 
 
 N. 
 
 Naaadbv, 6, indec. Nahson, Heb. "p^n? 
 (enchanter) Nahshon, pr. n. of a chief of 
 Judah. whose sister was the wife of Aaron, 
 Matt. 1, 4 bis. Luke 3, 32. See Ex. 6, 23. 
 Num. 2, 3. 
 
 Nayyal, 6, indec. Naggcc, pr. n. of an 
 ancestor of Jesus, Luke 3, 25. 
 
 Na&pe^ Na^aper, %, indec. Naz 
 areth, prob. Heb. 1S3 (a sprout, branch), 
 Aram. nX1S3, see Hengstenb. Christol. 
 II. p. 1 sq. pr. n. of a small city in Gali 
 lee, just north of the great plain of Esdrae- 
 lon, and about mid-way between the lake 
 of Tiberias and the Mediterranean. It lies 
 at the foot and on the lower slope of a hill 
 facing the E. and S. E. along a small valley 
 or basin entirely shut in by hills, except a 
 narrow rocky gorge toward the south lead 
 ing to the great plain. From the summit 
 of the western hill is one of the finest views 
 in Palestine. The cliff now wrongly shown 
 as the place where the men of the city were 
 about to cast Jesus down from the preci 
 pice (Luke 4, 29), is nearly two miles from 
 the city, adjacent to the plain. See. Bibl. 
 Res. in Pal. III. p. 183-200. Matt. 2, 23. 
 4, 13. 21, 11. Mark 1, 9. Luke 1, 26. 2, 4. 
 39. 51. 4, 16. John 1, 46. 47. Acts 10, 38. 
 
 Na^apyvos, ov, 6, a Nazarene, i. e. an 
 inhabitant of Nazareth ; spoken of Jesus, 
 Mark 1, 24. 14, 67. 16, 6. Luke 4, 34 
 
 NafopaioS) ov, 6, a Nazaraan, Naz 
 arene, an inhabitant of Nazareth ; in some 
 editions written NafapaTos in Matt. 2, 23. 
 26, 71 . John 18, 7. Spoken of Jesus, Matt. 
 26, 71. Mark 10, 47. Luke 18, 37. 24, 19. 
 John 18, 5. 7. 19. 19. Acts 2, 22. 3, 6. 4, 
 
 10. 6, 14. 22, 8. 26, 9. Matt. 2, 23 Sri Nafco- 
 palo? K\Tj%fj(TfTai, he shall be called a Naz 
 arene, i. e. looking to the etymology of the 
 name (see in Naap/3), he shall be called a 
 shoot, branch, in allusion to such passages 
 as Is. 11,1. 53,2. Jer. 23,5. 33, 15. Zech. 
 3, 8. 6, 12 ; see Hengstenb. Christol. Vol. 
 
 11. p. 1 sq. Once of Christians in con 
 tempt, as the followers of Jesus of Naz 
 areth, Acts 24, 5. 
 
 Ncfedv, 6, indec. Nathan, Heb. *ri3 
 (given sc. of God), pr. n. of a son of David, 
 Luke 3, 31 ; comp. 2 Sam. 5, 14. Not the 
 prophet Nathan, 2 Sam. 7, 2 sq. 12, 1 sq. 
 
 Ncfeavafa, 6, indec. Nathanael*, Heb. 
 ^3r3 (given of God, i. q. QtoSapos Theo 
 
 dore), pr. n. of a disciple of Christ, probably 
 the same with the apostle Bap3oAo/iaIor 
 q. v. John 1, 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 21, 2. 
 
 vat, adv. of affirmation, yea, yes, cer 
 tainly. 
 
 1 . Pr. yea, in answer to a question ; 
 Matt. 9, 28 TTKTTfvfTe OTI 8vvap.ai TOVTO Troirj- 
 crat , \eyovcnv avTcS vat, Kvpif. 13, 51. 17, 
 25. 21, 16. John 11, 27. 21, 15. 16. Acts 
 5, 8. 22, 27. Rom. 3, 29. ^El. V. H. 13. 
 4. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 20. 
 
 2. As expressing assent to the words or 
 deeds of another. Matt. 11,26 vai, 6 Trarr)p, 
 [op3o>j TroifTs,] OTI OVTUS KT\. Luke 10, 21. 
 Rev. 16, 7. 22,20 vai, ep%ov Kvpif, in some 
 edit. So Act. Thorn. 17, 18. Xen. Mem. 
 
 2. 7. 14. With Kai introducing a subse 
 quent limitation or modification; Matt. 15, 
 27 et Mark 7, 28 vai, Kvpte Kai yap TO. K.VVCL- 
 pia KT\. comp. in yap no. 1. b. Viger. p. 
 423 sq. So Arr. Epict. 2. 10. 20. Plato 
 Soph. p. 226. e. 
 
 3. Intens. in strong affirmation, yea, veri 
 ly; Luke 11,51 vai, Xe yw vp.1v, eKj^TTjSjjo-e- 
 rai KT\. 12, 5 vai, Xeyw vp.1v, TOVTOV (poj3r]- 
 StyTe, yea, I say unto you, fear him. Phil. 4, 
 
 3. Philem. 20. Rev. 1, 7 vai, ap.f]v. 14, 13. 
 22, 20 vai, ep^o/xat Ta^v. (Arr. Epict. 2. 1 3. 
 21; comp. Horn. II. 1. 234. Find. Nem. 11. 
 30. Vig. p. 424.) Also with neat, yea and 
 more also, Matt. 11, 9 et Luke 7, 26 vai, 
 Aeyo> vp.1v, Kal rrtpicrcroTtpov Trpofpyrov, yea, 
 and more than a prophet. (Xen. Conv. 8. 4.) 
 With the art. TO vai, yea, i. e. the word 
 yea. 2 Cor. 1, 17 tva y trap e /xol TO vai, 
 vai, KOI TO ov, ov. v. 20. James 5, 12 ; art. 
 impl. 2 Cor. 1, 18. 19 bis. Matt. 5, 37. 
 
 Na i v, y, indec. Nain, a town of Galilee 
 situated according to Eusebius about two 
 miles south of Mount Tabor, near Endor, 
 Luke 7,11. Now Nein, a small hamlet ; 
 see Bibl. Res. in Pal. III. p. 218, 2-2C,. 
 
 1/009, ov, 6, (i>ai o>,) a dwelling, spec, of a 
 god, a temple, fane ; in classic writers most 
 ly i. q. tepoV, though sometimes spoken of 
 the interior and most sacred part of a tem 
 ple (iVpoV), where the image of the god was 
 set up, Hdot. 1. 183. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Genr. of any temple, eV ^eipoTronyTOjy 
 vaols Acts [7, 48.] 17, 24. (Hdian. 7. 3. 13. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 8. 10.) Acts 19, 24 noiStv 
 vaovs apyupovs ApTe /xiSor, silver shrines of 
 Diana, i. e. miniature copies of the temple 
 of Diana at Ephesus, containing a small 
 
Naov/j, 
 
 476 
 
 Image of the goddess. Such shrines of 
 other gods were also common, made of gold, 
 silver, or wood, and were purchased by pil 
 grims and travellers, probably as memorials, 
 or to be used in their devotions ; much like 
 the models of the Holy Sepulchre at the 
 present day among pilgrims to Jerusalem. 
 See Wetstein N. T. in loc. So Artemid. 
 IV. 34 Kparivos 6 fj/jLtrepos, dpyvptov vaov 
 epyeTTto-TuTrjs 86as elvai. Diod. Sic. 1.15, 
 97. ib. 20. 14 errefi^av 8e KOL TOVS eK T>V 
 lfpS>v xpvaovs vaovs rois d<pi8pu/zacrt Trpos 
 TTJV iKeaiav. Hdot. 2. 63 TO 8e ayaX/ia, eov 
 
 Comp. Dion. Hal. 2. 12 TO. TTJS 
 Apre /uiSoy d<pi8pv(j.a.Ta trap H E\\r]o-iv. 
 
 2. Of the temple at Jerusalem, or in allu 
 sion to it, but only of the fane or edifice it 
 self, in distinction from lepov, which in 
 cluded also the courts and other appurten 
 ances ; see in lepov. a) Pr. Matt. 23, 16 
 bis, os av opocrr] ev TCO van ... ev TW ^pvuo) 
 TOV vaov. V. 17. 21. V. 35 /uerav roi vaov 
 KOI TOV Svaiao-Trjpiov, i. e. the altar of burnt 
 offerings which stood in the court of the 
 priests before the entrance of the vaos, see 
 in iepov. 27, 5 pfycras TO. dpyvpia ev r raw, 
 prob. in the entrance of the vaos, since Judas 
 could not enter within it. 26, 61 et 27, 40. 
 Mark 14, 58 et 15, 29. Luke 1, 9. 21. 22. 
 John 2, 20. 2 Thess. 2, 4. Also rb Kara- 
 irfTao-fj.a TOV vaov Matt. 27, 51. Mark 15, 38. 
 Luke 23, 45; see in Kararreracr/ia. Sept. 
 for Jftin 1 K. 6, 5. 17. Ps. 5, 8. 11, 4. So 
 Jos. Ant. 8. 4. 1. ib. 11. 4. 3. b) Symbol. 
 of the temple of God in heaven, to which 
 that of Jerusalem was to correspond (comp. 
 Heb. 8, 5. 9, 11); Rev. 3, 12. 7, 15. 11, 
 1. 2. 19 bis, T)voiyr) 6 vaos TOV 3foC ev ro> 
 ovpavca KT\. 14, 15. 17. 15, 5. 6. 8 bis. 16*, 
 1. 17. 21. 22 bis. So Test. XII Patr. p. 550 ; 
 comp. Wisd. 3, 14. c) Trop. of persons 
 in whom God or his Spirit is said to dwell 
 or act, e. g. the body of Jesus, John 2, 19. 
 21 ; of Christians 1 Cor. 3, 16. 17 bis. 6, 
 19. 2 Cor. 6, 16 bis. Eph. 2, 21. So Act. 
 Thorn. 5 12 yivecr^e vaol ayioi. 
 
 Naovfa 6, indec. Ndum, Heb. t3lP!3 
 (consolation) Nahum, pr. n. of an ancestor 
 of Jesus, not the prophet, Luke 3, 25. 
 
 vdpoos, ov, rj, nard, the oriental or In 
 dian spikenard, andropagon nardus Linn. 
 Heb. tfns, Sanscr. narda, Plin. H. N. 12. 
 26 ; see Celsii Hierobot. II. p. 1 sq. Jones 
 on the Spikenard of the Ancients, in Asiat, 
 Researches Vol. IV. The ancients ex 
 tracted from it an oil or ointment which was 
 highly prized, Theophr. H. Plant. 9. 7. 2, 
 
 3. Dioscor. 1. 66; comp. Tibull. 2. 2. 7 
 Hor. Epod. Jfc 59. Hence in N. T. pvpov 
 vdpftov Triff^iKrjs, ointment of pure spike 
 nard, i. e. the most precious, Mark 14, 3. 
 John 12, 3. So Sept. for ^3 Cant. 1, 12. 
 
 4, 13. 14. 
 
 Ndp/ctcrarof, O v, 6, Narcissus, (pr. a 
 flower,) pr. n. of a man at Rome, Rom. 16, 
 11. He is supposed by some to have been 
 the well known freed-man and favourite of 
 the emperor Claudius ; comp. Sueton. Claud. 
 28. Tacit. Annal. 12. 57. 
 
 vavayed), >, f. 770-0), (yavayos , vavs, 
 aywp.1, to suffer shipwreck, to be shipwrecked, 
 intrans. 2 Cor. 11,25 rpis evavdyrjo-a. Trop. 
 1 Tim. 1, 19 Trepl TTJV irio-riv. Dem. 910. 
 7. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 24; trop. Philo de Somn. 
 p. 1128. d. 
 
 vavK\r/pos : ov, 6, (vavs, K\rjpos,) a ship 
 owner, ship-master, nauclerus, i. e. the mas 
 ter or owner of a trading vessel, who took 
 passengers and freight for hire, Acts 27, 
 11. Comp. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 406. Jos. 
 Ant. 9. 10. 2. Pol. 4. 6. 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 
 6 no 
 . GO. 
 
 vav$, vedis, fj, (vea>, z/aico,) ace. vavv, see 
 Buttm. ^ 58; a ship, vessel, Acts 27,41. 
 Sept. for isx 1 K. 9, 26. rT SX Job 9, 26. 
 Hdian. l.ll. 11. Xen. HelY/1. 6. 19. 
 
 vavTijS) ov, 6, (vavs,) a ship-man, sailor, 
 seaman, Acts 27, 27. 30. Rev. 18, 17. Jos. 
 Ant. 9. 10. 2. Pol. 1. 49. 2. Xen. Hell. 7. 
 1. 12. 
 
 Na^ojp, 6, indec. Nachor, Heb. *iiri3 
 (snorting) Nahor, pr. n. of the grandfather 
 of Abraham, Luke 3, 34 ; comp. Gen. 1 1 
 22 sq. 
 
 VdVia$, ov, 6, (yedv, veos,) a youth, a 
 young man, Acts 20, 9. 23, 17. 18. 22. 
 Sept. for "i?a Judg. 16, 26. So Hdian. 1. 
 9. 2. Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 2. Spoken of Saul 
 (Paul) Acts 7, 58, where however it deter 
 mines nothing definitely as to his age ; since 
 veavias, like veaviaKos, was applied to men 
 in the vigour of manhood, up to the age of 
 40 years ; see in veavicrxos. So of warriors, 
 Sept. for lina 2 Sam. 6, 1. 1 Chr. 19, 10; 
 also Hdian. 6. 8. 7. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 6. 
 
 veavKTKO?, ov, 6, (vedv, veos,) a youth, a 
 young man, Mark 14, 51 els TIS veavio-Kos. 
 
 16, 5. Luke 7, 14. Sept. for 1?S 1 Sam. 
 
 17, 55. Is. 3, 3; *fo* Ezra 10, 1. So Jos. 
 Ant. 6. 9. 2. Ml V. H. 9. 39. Xen. An. 7. 
 2. 33. Of young men in the prime and vi 
 gour of manhood, up to the age of 40 years, 
 Matt. 19, 20. 22, comp. Luke 18, 18 where 
 it is apxatv. Acts 5, 10 01 veavio-Kot, i. e. the 
 
477 
 
 ve/cpcocrts 
 
 younger members of the community, i. q. 
 vtuTtpoi in v. 6. Opp. to Trpea/Surfpoi or 
 irarf pes, Acts 2, 17. 1 John 2, 13. 14. Of 
 police-men, Mark 14, 51. Sept. for ">?? Gen. 
 41, 12. Josh. 6, 23; D- ttSsx Josh. 2, 1. 23. 
 So Pol. 5. 25. 3. Hdian. 7. 6. 3. Xen. Cyr. 
 5. 1. 9, 13. Phavorin. veavicmos air ercav 
 fiKoo~iTpiu>i> fas tTtov rptaKoirarecrcrdpa)!/, TJ 
 TfcrcrapaKovra tvos. 
 
 j, fj, (veos, n6\is,) Neapo- 
 lis, a city and port of Macedonia near the 
 Sinus Strymonicus, 12 Rom. miles E. S. E. 
 of Philippi, on the confines of Thrace, Acts 
 
 16, 11. Strabo 7. p. 330. Plin. H. N. 4. 18. 
 Now Kavalla; see Leake s Trav. in N. 
 Greece, III. p. 180, 224. 
 
 Neefidv, 6, indec. Naaman, Heb. "JESS 
 (pleasantness), pr. n. of a Syrian warrior 
 and captain, Luke 4, 27. See 2 K. c. 5. 
 
 ve/cpo$, ov, 6, (vfKvs,~) dead, both as 
 Subst. and Adjective. 
 
 1. Subst. one dead, a dead person, only of 
 mankind, and this is the Homeric and early 
 usage ; see Passow in voc. 
 
 a) a dead body, corpse, Matt. 23, 27 ye- 
 P.OVO-IV ooreW v(Kp5>v. Rev. 20, 13. Sept. 
 for r&33 Deut. 28, 6. Jer. 7, 31. Hdian. 4. 
 15. 16. Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 5. 
 
 b) Genr. a dead person, Plur. the dead, 
 e. g. a) As yet unburied, Matt. 8, 22 
 3d\//m TOVS vfKpovs. Luke 7, 15. Heb. 9, 
 
 17. Also for one slain Rev. 16, 3. Sept. for 
 na Gen. 22, 3 sq. So Pol. 2. 34. 12. Plato 
 Rep. 639. e. /3) As buried, laid in a se 
 pulchre, and therefore as being in a8r] S q. v. 
 and see also Heb. Lex. art. Vixti . Luke 16, 
 30 tdv TIS divb vfKp>v iropfv^f] npbs av- 
 TO IS. John 5, 25 o: vpol aKova-ovrai TTJS 
 (pavrfs T. vioO T. 3. Acts 10, 42. Rom. 
 
 14, 9. Heb. 11, 35. Rev. 1, 18. So ol i/e- 
 Kpol tv Xpiora) i. e. those who have died in 
 the Christian faith, 1 Thess. 4, 16. Sept. 
 for c^ntt Ecc. 9, 5. Is. 8, 19. (Luc. D. 
 Murt. 3. 1, 2. ib. 22. 2. Horn. Od. 11. 34.) 
 In reference to being raised again from the 
 dead, resurrection, e. g. fwirep vatpiav 
 trop. Rom. 6, 13 ; fwq t< vtKp&v trop. 11, 
 
 15, see in fwq no. 1. a. So ^axmoifiv TOVS 
 v. Rom. 4, 17 ; iydpfiv TOVS vfxpovs Matt. 
 10, 8. John 5, 21. Acts 26, 8. 2 Cor. 1, 
 9; fytlpfiv Tiva drrb ((K) v(K.p<i>v Matt. 14, 
 2. 27, 64. Acts 3, 15. Gal.l, 1. 1 Thess. 1, 
 10 ; dvacnrivai t< TU>V vtKpmv Matt. 17, 9. 
 Luke 16. 31. John 20, 9; trop. Eph. 5, 
 14; dvdcrrao-is T&V vftpuiv Matt. 22, 31. 
 Acts 17, 32. Rom. 1, 4. 1 Cor. 15, 13. 21. 
 42 ; dv. T; (K veicpaiv Acts 4, 2 ; eavd<rra<ns 
 raw. Phil. 3, 11. 
 
 c) Emphat. ot vexpot, the dead i. e. utterly 
 dead, extinct, Matt. 22, 32 OVK ecrnv 6 3eor 
 vtKpuiv, dXXa a>vra>v. Mark 12, 27. Luke 
 20, 38. 1 Cor. 15, 29 vrrep rav vtiipnv, see 
 in jSaTrr/fw no. 2. a. y. Trop. vtKpoi, those 
 dead to Christ and his Gospel, spiritually 
 dead ; Matt. 8, 22 afas TOVS vfKpovs KT\. 
 let the spiritually dead bury their dead, i. e. let 
 no lesser duty keep you from the one great 
 duty of following me. Luke 9, 60. Comp. 
 Rom. 6, 13. 11, 15. Eph. 5, 14 ; see in lett 
 b, above. 
 
 2. Adj. vfKpos, d, 6v, dead, in Attic and 
 later usage ; usually of mankind, but also 
 of an animal, Luc. D. Deor. 7. 4 ^eXwwji 
 TTOV vtupav cvp<v. 
 
 a) Pr. Matt. 28, 4 tyfvovro uxrei vfupol. 
 Acts 20, 9 Kal /7p3?7 re/epos was taken up dead, 
 i. e. for dead. 28, 6. Rev. 1, 17. Rom. 8, 
 10 ro crc3/ia vf<pbv 81 afiapTiav, the body is 
 dead because of sin, i. e. remains subject to 
 death; parall. is TO. Sv^ra crco/xara v. 11. 
 Sept. for na 2 Sam. 19, 6. Is. 27, 36. So 
 Luc. Philops. 31. Arr. Epict. 3. 10. 15. 
 Trop. for lost, perished, given up as dead, 
 e. g. the prodigal son, Luke 15, 24. 32 ; 
 parall. with diro\u>\<as. So Aristoph. Ran. 
 420. Achill. Tat. 5. p. 553 rjv av en aoi 
 
 b) Trop. in opp. to the life of the Gos 
 pel, e. g. a) Of persons, dead to Christ 
 and his gospel, and so exposed to punish 
 ment, spiritually dead, Rev. 3, 1. With 
 dat. of cause or manner, Eph. 2, 1 fjuds ov- 
 TCIS vtKpovs Trapa.nTup.acri. v. 5 ; iv c. dat. 
 Col. 2, 13. Vice versa, vtKpbs flvai 777 
 ap.apri a, to be dead to sin, no longer willingly 
 subject to it, Rom. 6, 11, i. q. diro^aveiv TJ) 
 ap.. in v. 2. ) Of things, dead, inactive, 
 inoperative, e. g. d/iapn a Rom. 7, 8 ; Tn oriy 
 James 2, 17. 20. 26; also fpya. venpd, 
 dead works, i. e. external righteousness, not 
 proceeding from a living faith, and therefore 
 fruitless, sinful, Heb. 6, 1. 9, 14. + 
 
 vercpoa), to, f. <oo-o>, (i>(Kp6s,) to make 
 dead; Pass, to die, pr. Anthol. Gr. IV. p. 
 276. In N. T. trop. to deaden, to mortify, 
 to subdue, c. ace. e. g. TO. p.(\r] Col. 3, 5. 
 Pass. part. veveKprnp-tvos, v, ov, deadened, 
 i. e. dead, powerless, impotent, as aco/xa i/e- 
 vp. Rom. 4, 19. Heb. 11, 12. So Plut. 
 de prim. Frig. 21 ; comp. diroveKpovo-3ai Arr. 
 Epict. 4. 5. 21. 
 
 ve/cpaxriS, ecos, 17, (ve/cpoa);) pr. a putting 
 to death ; hence in N. T. 
 
 1. death, i. e. violent death, 2 Cor. 4, 10 
 
 TT)V VtKpOHTlV TOV ivCTOV tV TO) (TOIfiaTl 
 
 f)p.a>v TTfpi<j)fpovTcs, i. e. ever exposed fc 
 
veos 
 
 478 
 
 the cause of Christ to the same death which 
 he suffered. 
 
 2. Trop. dead-ness, impotency, Rom. 4, 
 19. Astrampsych. Oneirocrit. in Suid. ve- 
 Kpovs opuv veicpoMTiv ffis Trpay/JidTtoV. Comp. 
 dnoveKpaio-is Arr. Epict. 1. 5. 4. 
 
 V60$j a, ov, young, new ; Compar. v e w- 
 Tfpos, younger. 
 
 1. Pr. of persons, young, youthful. Tit. 
 2, 4 "v(t7(o(ppovi<ii>(ri ras veas, opp. irpecrflv- 
 TiBas. Sept. for 1?3 Gen. 37, 2. Prov. 
 22, 15. So Luc. D. Mort. 12. 4. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 1. 5, 31. Compar. vedirepos, 
 younger, e. g. of two or more, Luke 15, 12. 
 13, 6 v(o>T(pos avT<av, 6 v. vlos. Sept. for 
 "JBfc Gen. 9, 24. 42, 13. (Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 
 1. An. 1. 1. 1.) Genr. for a young person, 
 Plur. the younger, the young, in opp. to 
 those older; John 21, 18 ore rjs veaTcpos. 
 Acts 5, 6 ot veaiTfpoi, i. q. 01 vfavio~Koi in v. 
 10. 1 Tim. 5, 1.2. 11. 14. Tit. 2, 6. 1 Pet. 
 5, 5. Implying inferior dignity, Luke 22, 
 26. Sept. for 153 Ps. 148, 12. Jer. 1, 6. 
 7. So Ceb. Tab. 2. Dem. 242. 15. Thuc. 
 1. 42. 
 
 2. Of things, new, recent, e. g. olvos, 
 da-Koi, Matt. 9, 17 bis. Mark 2, 22 ter. Luke 
 5, 37 bis. 38. 39. Sept. for tti in Lev. 23, 
 17. Cant. 7, 13. So Hdian. 1. 5. 26. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 6. 38. Trop. of the heart, disposi 
 tion, nature, as renewed and therefore bet 
 ter ; e. g. 1 Cor. 5, 7 Iva rjre veov (pvpapa. 
 Col. 3, 10. Heb. 12, 24 SicfttjKrj vea. 
 
 veocrcros, ov, 6, (z/eo j,) a youngling, the 
 young of animals, espec. of birds. Luke 2, 
 24 8vo vfoao-ovs Trepi(TTfp)i>, where some 
 Mss. have the later form voo-o-ovs, see Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 206. Sturz Dial. Alex. p. 185. 
 Sept. for 1? Lev. 5, 7. Prov. 30, 17 ; t^rpSX 
 Deut. 22, 6. Ml V. H. 1. 6. Xen. CEc. 
 7. 34. 
 
 i/eor^9, TJTOS, fj, (veos,) youth, youthful 
 age. Matt. 19,20 e/c vforrjTos p.ov. Mark 10, 
 20. Luke 18, 21. Acts 26, 4. 1 Tim. 4, 12 
 fj.r]8eis crov Trjs v. KaTcxppovfiTU) let no one 
 despise thy youth, i. e. conduct thyself with 
 the wisdom of riper age. Sept. for EJilWS 
 Gen. 8, 21 ; W^5 Ecc. 11, 9. 10. Hdian! 
 1. 3. 3. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 31. 
 
 veocfrvros, ov, 6, rj, adj. (vfos, $iieo,) 
 newly planted, Suid. vto(pvTov TO veuo-rl 
 <pvTv%(v. Sept. for 5B3 Job 14, 9. Ps. 144, 
 12. In N. T. as Subst. trop. a neophyte, 
 new convert, 1 Tim. 3, 6. 
 
 Nepwv, was, 6, Nero, the Roman em 
 peror, only in the spurious subscription 
 2 Tim. 4, 23. 
 
 vevco, f. vfvo-co, to nod, to beckon, as a 
 sign to any one ; c. dat. John 13, 24 vtvti 
 ovv avT<a 2ip.oov. Acts 24, 10. Sept. Prov. 
 
 4, 25. JEL V. H. 14. 22. Plato Phad. 117. a. 
 ve(f>e\T], rjs, T), (dim. vtyos,) pr. a small 
 
 cloud, nebula, perh. Luke 12, 54 ; comp. 
 1 K. 18, 44. Genr. a cloud, Jude 12 vefo- 
 Xat ano-poi. [2 Pet. 2, 17.] Sept. for *]35 
 Gen. 9, 13. 14 ; pnti Ps. 36, 6 ; 35 Judg! 
 
 5, 4. So Luc. D. Deor. 6. 4. Xen. An. 1. 
 
 8. 8. Accompanying supernatural appear 
 ances and events, as the pillar of cloud in 
 the desert, 1 Cor. 10, 1. 2 ; comp. Sept. 
 and "155 Ex. 13, 21. 22. In connection with 
 Christ, as with a voice from heaven Luke 
 
 9, 35 ; or at his transfiguration, v(pe\r) <pa> 
 Tfivrj, Matt. 17, 5 bis. Mark 9, 7 bis. Luke 
 9, 34 bis ; as receiving him up at his ascen 
 sion, Acts 1,9; as surrounding him at his 
 second coming, Matt. 24, 30. 26, 64. Mark 
 13, 26. 14, 62. Luke 21, 27. Rev. 1,7. 14, 
 14 bis. 15. 16. As surrounding ascending 
 saints or angels, 1 Thess. 4, 17. Rev. 10, 1. 
 11, 12. Sept. of God, Ps. 18, 8 sq. 97, 2. 
 Is. 19, 1. 
 
 Necf&aXelfJ,, 6, indec. Nephthalim. Heb. 
 "^^3 (my wrestling) Naphtali, pr. n. of 
 the sixth son of Jacob, born o/ Bilhah, comp. 
 Gen. 30, 8. In N. T. only meton. the tribe 
 of Naphtali, Matt. 4, 13. 15. Rev. 7, 6. 
 
 ve<f)0$) fos, ovs, TO, a cloud, pr. Hdian. 
 1. 14. 4. Diod. Sic. 1. 38. In N. T. trop. 
 for a crowd, throng, Heb. 12, 1 vefyos p.ap- 
 Tvpwv. So Apoll. Rh. Argon. 4. 397. Hdot. 
 8. 109 vecpos Toa-ovTo dv Sp&iTctiv. Diod. Sic. 
 
 3. 29 Ta ve(f)ri T 
 
 V(f>p6s, ov, 6, a kidney; Plur. ot ve- 
 (ppoi, the kidneys, reins, loins, Sept. for 
 rfrba Ex. 29, 13. 32. Job 16, 13. In N. T. 
 trop. for the inmost mind, the seat of the 
 desires and passions, Rev. 2, 23 fpevvnv ve- 
 (ppovs KOI Kap8ias. Comp. Sept. and {ilibs 
 in the similar phrase Ps. 7, 10. Jer. 11, 2V. 
 17, 10. 20, 12. 
 
 V(OKOpO$, ov, 6, (vaos, Att. ve<as, Kopea.) 
 pr. temple-sweeper ; hence a temple-keeper, 
 prefect of a temple, who had charge also of 
 the decorations, Jos. Ant. 1. 7. 6. Xen. An. 
 5. 3. 6 ; also a worshipper, one who fre 
 quents a temple, e. g. said of the Israel 
 ites in the desert, Jos. B. J. 5. 9. 4 ovs 6 
 Sfeoy eaurw veatKopovs rjjfv, and so vtKOfttiv 
 ib. In N. T. a title assumed by cities noted 
 for the worship of a particular deity, to 
 whom they had built a temple ; e. g. of 
 Ephesus, a worshipper, devotee of Diana, 
 Acts 19, 35 vfatKopos TTJS p.fydXi]s ApTe/u- 
 
vecorept/co? 
 
 479 
 
 dos. So in inscriptions and on the coins of 
 several cities ; see in Wetstein N. T. II. p. 
 588. 
 
 VewreplKOS, v, 6v, (veos, vi)Tfpos,) 
 youthful, pertaining to youth ; 2 Tim. 2, 22 
 Tas v. eViSu/iuzj (ptvye. 3 Mace. 4, 8. Pol. 
 10. 24. 7. Plut. Dion 8. 
 
 vea)Tepos, a, ov, see in i/e oy. 
 
 VTJJ a particle of strong affirmation, with 
 an accus. of that to which one appeals, 
 whether with or without an oath ; 1 Cor. 
 15, 31 vr) TTJV up. Kai/xno-iv, I protest by 
 the rejoicing in you, which I hare in Christ. 
 Sept. for ^n Gen. 42, 1 5. 16. Luc. D. Deor. 
 19. 1. JEl. V. H. 1. 33. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 10. 
 
 vrftw, f. vfjo-co, (vfo>, Buttm. 114,) to 
 spin, absol. Matt. 6, 28 et Luke 12, 27 ovSe 
 vrftfi, PC. TO. Kpiva. Sept. for "11O Ex. 35, 
 25. 38, 18. Anthol. Gr. III. p. 63. Plato 
 Polit. 289. c. 
 
 d^Ci), f. aero), (i/ijTnoy,) to be as a 
 child, childlike, intrans. 1 Cor. 14, 20 777 
 KaKia vT]TuueTf, i. e. be ignorant of it ; comp. 
 Matt. 18, 3. So the Greek prov. 8ia<pfpei 
 8e TOV vrjTriov Ka3 f)\iKiav ov8ev 6 ev rais 
 (ppfo~l vT)Trui(i)i>, in Wetstein ad loc. 
 
 ViJTTtos, ia, lov, Att. os, ov, (vn-, eiros,) 
 pr. not speaking, Lat. infans ; hence subst. 
 an infant, child, babe, without any definite 
 limitation of age. 
 
 1. Pr. Matt. 21, 16 t< o-TopctTos vT]isla>v 
 KOI SqXafo i/rcoi , quoted from Ps. 8, 3 where 
 Sept. for Wjte- 1 Cor. 13, 11 quinq. ore 
 fjp.T)v vi]nios KT\. Spec, a minor, one not 
 yet of age, Gal. 4, 1. Sept. genr. for ^il S 
 and Wjfa of a child playing in the streets 
 Jer. 6,11. 9,20; asking for bread Lam. 4, 
 4 ; borne in the arms Lam. 2, 20 ; once of 
 the foetus Job 3, 16. Hdian. 2. 15. 7. Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 74. Plato Ax. 366. d. 
 
 2. Trop. a babe, for one unlearned, unen 
 lightened, simple ; e. g. in a good sense, 
 Matt. 11.25 aTTfKa\v\l/-as avra VTJTTIOIS. Luke 
 10, 21. Rom. 2, 20. [1 Thess. 2, 7.] Im 
 plying censure, 1 Cor. 3, 1 &>? VTJTTIOIS ev 
 Xpio-ro). Gal. 4, 3. Eph. 4, 14. Heb. 5, 13. 
 Sept. for TO Prov. 1, 32. Ps. 19,8. Horn. 
 Od. 9. -14. Luc. Haley. 5. Plato Ax. 367. a. 
 
 Nrjpev?, (us, 6, Nereus, pr. n. of a 
 Christian at Rome, Rom. 16. 15. 
 
 Nrjpt, o, indec. Neri, pr. n. of an ances 
 tor of Jesus, Luke 3, 27. 
 
 irr/criov, ov, TO, (dim. vrja-os, ) a small isl 
 and, islet, e. g. K\av8rj q. v. Acts 27, 16. 
 
 vr\(JO^i ov, f), (kindr. veto, wiw,) an island, 
 Acts 13, 6. 27, 26. 28, 1.-7. 9. 11. Rev. 1, 
 
 9. 6, 14. 16, 20. Sept. for ^ Ps. 72, 10 
 Ez. 26, 15. 18. Diod. Sic. 3. 44. Xen. 
 Hell. 4. 8. 7. 
 
 ay, TJ, (j^crreua),) fasting, a 
 fast, abstinence from eating. 
 
 1. Genr. e. g. for want of food, 2 Cor. 
 6, 5. 11, 27 eV Xi/Lia> /cat fin/m, eV Hjartlais 
 7roXAa/cty. Diod. Sic. 1 . 82. Plut. C. Mar. 36. 
 
 2. In a religious sense, as of the private 
 fastings of the Jews, Matt. 17, 21 et Mark 
 9, 29 ev irpoo-evxrj KOI vrjo-Tfiq. Luke 2, 37. 
 Acts 14, 23. 1 Cor. 7, 5. To this kind of 
 fasting the Pharisees ascribed great merit 
 and practised it often, sometimes twice a 
 week ; see Matt. 9, 4. Luke 18, 12. Dan. 9, 3. 
 Is. 58, 3 sq. Tob. 12, 8. In their longer fast 
 ings they abstained only from the bette- 
 kinds of food, Dan. 10, 2 sq. Sept. for ci s 
 Dan. et Is. 1. c. Ps. 69, 11. Spec, the fast, 
 i. e. the annual public fast of the Jews, the 
 great day of atonement, held on the tenth 
 day of the seventh month (Tisri), five days 
 before the festival of Tabernacles ; see Lev. 
 16, 29 sq. 23, 27 sq. 34. The seventh 
 month began with the new moon of Octo 
 ber ; and hence this fast served to indicate 
 the season of the year after which the navi 
 gation of the Mediterranean became dan 
 gerous, Acts 27, 9. So Jos. Ant. 3. 10. 3, 
 comp. 4 TpfTrop.evov TOV Kaipov irpbs TTJV 
 jfHfttpiov >pav. Philo de Vit. Mos. 2. p. 
 657. c ; also genr. Plut. Symp. 4. 6. 2 init. 
 ^El. V. H. 5. 20. 
 
 f. evo-w, (j^o-Tty,) to fast, to 
 abstain from eating, in N. T. only of priv 
 ate fasting, see in i^oret a ; Matt. 6, 16 bis. 
 17. 18. 9, 14 bis. Mark 2, 18 ter. 19 bis. 
 Luke 5, 33. 18, 12. Acts 10, 30. 13, 2. 3. 
 Sept. for n Judg. 20, 26. 1 Sam. 7. C. 
 (JEL V. H. 5. 20. Plut. Demosth. 30.) 
 With the notion of grief, mourning, with 
 which fasting was often connected, Matt. 
 9, 15 iTfv Sfiv. . . vrjo-Tfvo~ovo~iv. Mark 2, 20. 
 Luke 5, 34. 35. Comp. 2 Sam. 12, 16. 
 Ezra 10, 6. Neh. 1, 4; where Sept. and 
 Heb. 0*128 . Of the Saviour s supernatural 
 fast of forty days, Matt. 4, 2 ; comp. Luke 
 4, 2. Others suppose his fasting may have 
 consisted in abstaining from all ordinary 
 food, and subsisting only on the scanty sup 
 plies of the desert; comp. Dan. 10, 2 sq. 
 1 Sam. 31, 13. Act. Thorn. ^ 20 j^oreuet 
 o-vvexu>s, Kai liprov eVSi ei /xoVoi/ /zera aXa- 
 TO?, Kai TO TTOTOV avTov vdcop. 
 
 jrijcms, toj, 6, f], adj. (1/77-, eV2uo,) not 
 having eaten, fasting, Plur. ace. vrjo-Tfts 
 Matt. 15, 32. Mark 8, 3 Plut. Cato Maj. 
 23 i/o-rii . Dion. Hal. Rhet. 9. 16 vi 
 
480 
 
 Also ace. plur. i/ijortSe? Athen. 7. 79. p. 
 126. See Lob. ad Phryn. p. 326. 
 
 vr)(f)d\ioy, ia, iov, (v^co,) sober, tem 
 perate, espec. in respect to wine, Jos. Ant. 
 3. 12. 2; comp. Plut. Sept. Sap. Conv. 13 
 pen. In N. T. trop. sober-minded, watchful, 
 circumspect; 1 Tim. 3,2 Sei ovv fniorKonov 
 dvai vr)<pd\iov KT\. v. 11. Tit. 2, 2; comp. 
 1 Thess. 5, 6. So Plut. de Garrulit. 4 mid. 
 Phavorin. vrj<paXios ecrnv 6 del vr](poov Kal 
 avvfcriv e^cav rfj fjXiKia Kard\\rj\ov. Text. 
 Rec. in 1 Tim. 3, 2. 11, has the later sy- 
 non. form V7)<pd\eos, a, ov, comp. Pas- 
 sow s. v. 
 
 vij^co, f. -v^o), to be sober, temperate, ab 
 stinent, espec. in respect to wine, Jos. B. J. 
 5. 5. 7 OTTO dxpaTov vf)(povrfs- Xen. Cyr. 7. 
 5. 20. In N. T. trop. to be sober-minded, 
 watchful, circumspect, absol. 1 Thess. 5, 6 
 yprjyopiop.fv Kal vr)(pa>p.ev. V. 8. 2 Tim. 4, 5 
 trv 8e rffa tv Trda-i. 1 Pet. 1, 13. 4, 7. 5, 8. 
 So Jos. B. J. 2. 12. 1. Luc. Hermot. 47 
 VTJfa Kal p.ffjLVT]o-o d-ma-Tfiv. Plato Legg. 
 918. d. 
 
 Niyep, 6, indec. Niger, surname of 
 Simon a teacher at Antioch, Acts 13, 1. 
 
 Nifcdvaip, opos, 6, Nicanor, pr. n. of 
 one of the seven primitive deacons, Acts 
 6,5. 
 
 )j a,, f. TJO-CO, (viKr],") to be victorious, 
 
 1. Intrans. to come off 1 victor, to pre 
 vail; Rom. 3, 4 Iva viKrjO~r]s ev rw /cptWcrSat 
 o-f, quoted from Sept. Ps. 51, 4 where Heb. 
 "t3j to be pure. With an infin. Rev. 5, 5. 
 Dem. 1436. 18. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 17. 
 
 2. Trans, to overcome, to conquer, to sub 
 due, c. ace. Luke 11, 22 6 la-xvporepos . . 
 VLKTJO-T] avrov. Rom. 12, 21 bis, fj.fi VIKOI 
 (Pass.) vno TOV KO.KOV, dXXa V IKO. ev TW 
 dyaSw TO KCLKOV. So Diod. Sic. 4. 57. Xen. 
 Cyr. l. 10. 4. Mem. 2. 6. 35. Of Jesus 
 and his followers as victorious over the 
 world, over evil, over all the adversaries of 
 his kingdom ; with an ace. expr. or impl. 
 1 John 5, 4 bis, vixd TOV Koa-p-ov KT\. v. 5. 
 Rev. 3, 21. 6, 2 bis. 12, 11. 17, 14. Perf. 
 for pres. or fut. John 16, 33 eyob vevtKrjKa 
 TOV Koa-p-ov. 1 John 2, 13. 14. 4, 4. Hence 
 Part, absol. 6 VIK>V, the victor, he that 
 overcometh, Rev. 2, 7. 11. 17. 3, 5. 21,7; 
 as Norn, absol. Rev. 2,26. 3, 12. 21 ; comp. 
 Buttm. 145. n. 4. Winer 28. 3. Pragn. 
 before TOV Sqpi ou Rev. 15, 2, see in ex 
 no. 1 . b. Also of the adversaries of Christ s 
 kingdom as temporarily victorious, Rev. 11, 
 7. 13.7. 
 
 r)s, f), victory, metcn. for the ground 
 or pledge of victory, 1 John 5, 4 OVTT] eVrlv 
 TJ VIKIJ...T) TTIO-TIS vp-wv. Pr. Jos. B. J. 1. 
 27. 3. Hdian. 3. 8. 2. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 
 10. 
 
 Nifc6Siifj,o?, ov, o, Nicodemus, (victor 
 populi,) pr. n. of a Pharisee and member of 
 the Sanhedrim, who came to Jesus b y night, 
 prob. as a serious though timid inquirer. 
 John 3, 1. 4. 9. 7, 50. 19, 39. 
 
 ov, 6, a Nicolaitan, pr. a 
 follower of NtKoAaor, Rev. 2, 6. 15. This 
 was prob. an heretical sect sprung from 
 some leader of that name ; but whether 
 connected with the Nicolaitans of the second 
 century and later, is very doubtful. Some 
 regard the word as symbolical, referring to 
 those who are called in v. 14 TOVS KpaTovv- 
 Tag TTJV diSaxyv BaXadp, ; since the Greek 
 name NtKoXao? corresponds to the Heb. 
 01 ^2 , if this latter be taken as compounded 
 from 3>bsi ( O r 3^3) i. q. j/ticaw, and C5 Xaos ; 
 so Eichhorn in Comm. ad loc. Hengstenb. 
 Bileam p. 22 sq. Comp. the symbolical 
 use of lea/3eX in Rev. 2, 20. But a com 
 parison of vv. 14. 15, seems to show that 
 the Nicolaitans and the followers of Balaam 
 were two distinct sects. See genr. Winer 
 Realw. s. voc. Neander Apostol. Zeitalt. II. 
 p. 533. ed. 3. [Engl. II. p. 50 sq.] 
 
 J\tKoi\ao$, ov, 6, Nicolas, (victor popu 
 li.) pr. n. of a proselyte of Antioch, one of 
 the seven primitive deacons, Acts 6, 5. 
 
 fas , ,7, Nicopolis, (pr. city 
 of victory,) a city where Paul proposed to 
 winter, Tit. 3, 12 ; also in the spurious 
 subscription. Prob. Nicopolis ad Nestum v. 
 Nessum, on the river Nessus (now Mesto), 
 which was here the boundary between 
 Thrace and Macedonia ; and hence the city 
 is sometimes reckoned to the latter. Ptoi. 
 3. 11. Another Nicopolis was built by 
 Augustus in Epirus, near the Sinus Am- 
 bracius, in honour of the battle of Actium ; 
 Strabo 7. p. 325. Dion Cass. 51. 1. Other 
 cities of this name existed in Cilicia, Arme 
 nia, Egypt, etc. 
 
 VIKOS, eos, ovs, TO, (viKrj.) victory, a later 
 form for viia?, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 647. 1 Cor. 
 15, 55 TTOV a-ov, a8rj, TO VIKOS , v. 57. So 
 els vlKos adv. victoriously, triumphantly, 
 Matt. 12, 20; see in eV/3aXX&> no. 2. b, and 
 Kpims no. 4. 1 Cor. 15, 54, comp. Is. 25, 8, 
 where Heb. HSib . Sept. for nS3^ 2 Sam. 
 2, 26. Job 36, 7 ; comp. Buxtorf Lex. 
 Chald. 1379. Sept. genr. Ez. 3, 8. An- 
 thol. Gr. III. p. 242. 
 
481 
 
 Nivevi, 17, indec. Nineveh, Heb. ^p?, 
 i. e. dwelling of Ninus, the ancient capital 
 of the Assyrian empire, Luke 1 1, 32 ; comp. 
 Gen. 10, 11, and the book of Nahum. It 
 was situated on the eastern bank of the 
 Tigris, opposite to the modern Mosul ; and 
 appears to have comprised a large tract of 
 country, including various fortresses and 
 temple-palaces several miles distant from 
 each other. Those at Khorsabad and Nim- 
 roud have been excavated. The Greeks 
 and Romans called it NUW, Ninus, Hdot. 
 1. 193. Plin. H. N. 6. 30. It was finally 
 destroyed B. C. 606. See Niebuhr Reise- 
 beschr. II. p. 353. Rich s Koordistan, II. 
 p. 29 sq. Ritter Erdkunde XI. p. 221 sq. 
 Layard s Nineveh and its Remains, passim. 
 
 NivevirrjS, ov , 6, a Ninevile, Matt. 12, 
 41. Luke 11, 30. [32.] 
 
 vnrrrjp, rjpos, 6, (POTTOD,) a rcash-basin, 
 John 13, 5. Pollux Onom. 10. 78 no8a- 
 
 ), f. ^o), a later form, for which 
 earlier writers used Wfco, f. i^w, Buttm. 
 Ausf. Sprachl. 114. p. 249; to wash, but 
 only some part of the body, as the face, 
 hands, feet. Ablutions of the hands and 
 feet were common with the Jews, e. g. of 
 the hands before eating, see Matt. 15, 2. 
 Mark 7, 3 ; of the feet, as a mark of hospi 
 tality offered to a guest on his arrival, and 
 performed by menial servants or slaves, see 
 1 Sam. 25, 41. Gen. 18, 4. 19, 2. 24, 32. 
 43 24. Judg. 19, 21. The usual mode of 
 ab.ution in the east is by pouring water 
 upon the hands ; this is done by a servant ; 
 comp. 2 K. 3, 1 1 . See Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. 
 p. 451. III. p. 26. Winer Realw. art. Reinig- 
 keil. Hence, to wash, c. ace. e. g. the face, 
 TO TrpocrcoTroi Matt. 6, 17 ; impl. the eyes, rovs 
 o03aX/ious John 9, 7 bis. 1 1 bis. 1 5 ; the 
 
 hands, ras x ( " l P as ^ att - 15 2 - ^ ai "k 7 > 3 5 
 the feet, TOVS TroSay John 13, 5. 6. 8 bis. 10. 
 12. 14 bis;. 1 Tim. 5, 10. Sept. for fPn 
 of the face Gen. 43, 31 ; the hands Ex. 30, 
 20. Dent. 21, 6; the feet 1 Sam. 25, 41. 
 Gen. 18, 4. So the face Plut. conjugal. 
 Praec. 29 ; the hands, id. C. Mar. 26 ; the 
 feet, id. Thes. 10. Hdot. 6. 19. 
 
 voero, , f. fata, (vuos, vovy,) to see with 
 the eyes, to perceive ; e. g. o^>3aX^oTy vottv 
 Horn. II. 24. 294. ib. 3. 396. Xen. An. 3. 4. 
 44. In N. T. trop. to see mentally, i. e. 
 
 1. to* perceive, to understand, to compre 
 hend, absol. Matt. 16, 9 oviro voeiTe; Mark 
 8, 17; TV KapSi a John 12, 40. With an 
 ace. expr. or impl. Eph. 3, 4 avayivvxTKovrts 
 vor/rrai uvvt<j(v JJLOV. V. 20. 1 Tim. 1, 7. 
 31 
 
 Rom. 1, 20. With infin. Heb. 11,3; with 
 on Matt. 15, 17. 16, 11. Mark 7, 18. Sept 
 for T^n Prov. 1, 2. 6. Diod. Sic. 5. 31. 
 Plut. Thes. 3. Xen. An. 3. 4. 44. 
 
 2. to think of, to consider, to give heed to, 
 c. ace. 2 Tim. 2, 7 vofi, Xe yw. Absol. Matt. 
 24, 15 et Mark 13, 14 6 dvayivao-Ktov votlm. 
 Ecclus. 11, 7. Horn. II. 9. 533 [537]. 
 Arr. Epict. 3. 1. 18. 
 
 voij/aa, arcs, TO, (i/o/o),) a perception, 
 thought, i. e. 
 
 1. Pr. what is thought out, excogitated; 
 hence a purpose, project, device. 2 Cor. 2, 
 11 ou yap avrov (rov Sarai/a) TO voripara 
 ayj/ooC/iei/. 10, 5. Baruch 2, 8. Horn. II. 
 10. 104. Plato Polit. 260. d. 
 
 2. Meton. for the gift or power of thought, 
 the mind ; e. g. the understanding, 2 Cor. 
 3, 14 eVojpcoS^ TO. voTjfj.ara avTeav. 4, 4 ; also 
 the affections, disposition, 2 Cor. 11, 3 OVTO> 
 ffidpr) TO. vofipara vp,cav. Phil. 4, 7. Horn. 
 Od. 20. 82, 346. Find. Pyth. 6. 29. Plato 
 Conv. 197. e. 
 
 , ov, 6, ;, adj. bastard, spurious, 
 Heb. 12, 8. Jos. Ant. 5. 7. 1. Luc. Tox. 
 51. Xen. An. 2. 4. 25. 
 
 VOJAT)) tjs, 17, (vtfio),) pasture, pasturage. 
 
 1. The act of feeding, pr. Xen. CEc. 
 7. 20 ; in N. T. trop. a feeding, eating, 
 spreading, as of a gangrene ; and hence 
 vofir]v fx fiv > * I 4 ? ea ^> 1 s P rea d> 2 Tim. 2, 
 17 6 Xdyos avTu>v u>s yayypaiva ivp.r)i> l. 
 So of an ulcer Pol. 1. 81. 6 ; of fire Jos. B. 
 J. 6. 2. 9. Pol. 1. 48. 5. 
 
 2. pasturage, pabulum, trop. John. 10, 9 
 vop.T)v (vpf)<r(i, i. e. he shall have enjoyment, 
 shall find happiness. Sept. for nsna Gen. 
 47, 5; n-VSia Ps. 74, 1. Trop." Plato 
 Phsedr. 248 . b. Pr. Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 20. 
 
 vo^i^w, f. t o-co, (v6p.os,~) to acknowledge 
 as custom, to do customarily, \. e. 
 
 1. Pr. i. q. to do by custom, to be accus 
 tomed. to be wont; Pass. id. Acts 16, 13 ov 
 fvofjii^fro Trpocrfv)(r] fivai, where according to 
 custom was the proseucha, i. e. irapa TTOTO- 
 p.6v ; see in Trpoa-tv^f] no. 2. Jos. Ant. 11. 
 
 1. 3. Luc. D. Deor. 9. 2. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 
 2. 27. Also Act. Hdian. 6. 1. 9. Dem. 
 1077. 25. 
 
 2. Genr. to regard or acknowledge as any 
 thing, i. e. in its customary character, or in 
 the customary or prescribed manner, e. g. 
 riva 3e6i> vopi^fiv Dinarch. 102. 13; riji 
 ai^/LiaXccToj/ yvvaLKa fvopi^fv Conon. Narrat. 
 44. So Pass. Luke 3, 23 o>? eVo/ii fero, as 
 he was regarded, reckoned, 5. e. according to 
 Jewish custom. (Dem. 1022. 16 of i/o/xt- 
 
482 
 
 p.fv ves, P.T) ovres e yevfi f OVTUIV. 
 Hdot. 4. 180.) Hence simply to regard, to 
 think, to suppose, e. g. with inf. and ace. 
 Luke 2, 44 vopio-avres 6e avrov ev rfj <rvvo8iq 
 elvai. Acts 7, 25. 8, 20. 14, 19. 16, 27. 17, 
 
 29. 1 Cor. 7, 26. 1 Tim. 6, 5 ; inf. simpl. 
 1 Cor. 7, 36. With 071, Matt. 5, 11 p.fj i/o- 
 /tiVj?re on TJ\%OV KT\. 10, 34. 20, 10. Acts 
 21, 29. So inf. c. ace. ^El. V. H. 8. 6. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 5 ; inf. Xen. Ag. 2. 3; on 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 22. 
 
 z/o/u/co?, ^, oV, (i/o/xos,) pertaining to law. 
 
 1 . Genr. Tit. 3, 9 flaxen vopiKai, i. e. dis 
 putes relating to the Mosaic law. Adv. 
 vop.iK.>s according to law, Plut. de vitios. 
 Pud. 10. 
 
 2. Of persons, one skilled in the law, a 
 lawyer. Tit. 3, 13 Zrjvav TOV i>op.iKov irpoTTtp.- 
 ^rov. So Plut. Sulk 36. Strabo 12. p. 813. c, 
 ot trapa Pa>p.aiois vop,iKoi. Arr. Epict. 2. 13. 
 7. In the Jewish sense, an interpreter and 
 teacher of the Mosaic law, so called in Luke, 
 (once in Matt.) elsewhere i/o/ioSiSao-KaXos 
 and ypap.p.aTfvs, see in ypap-p-arevs no. 2. 
 Matt. 22, 35 et Luke 10, 25 vopuKos TIS 
 (comp. Mark 12, 28 ypa^arevi). Luke 7, 
 
 30. 11, 45. 46. 52. 14, 3. So Jos. B. J. 2. 
 21. 7. 
 
 ;, adv. (v6p.ip.os, v6p.os,) law 
 fully, according to law and custom, 1 Tim. 
 1, 8. 2 Tim. 2, 5. Arr. Epict. 3. 10. 8 el 
 vop.ip.as fjZXrjo-as. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 1. 
 
 Z o/uoy/.a, aros, TO, (vop.ifa, ) any thing 
 sanctioned by law or usage, a custom, JEs- 
 chyl. Theb. 269. Hence in N. T. current 
 money, coin, Lat. numisma ; Matt. 22, 19 
 TO v. TOV KT]vcrov. So Jos. Ant. 14. 14. 1. 
 Hdian. 2. 15. 9. Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 12. 
 
 .09, ov, 6, (vop.os, 6\d- 
 ?.) a law-teacher, lawyer, i. e. a teach 
 er and expounder of the Jewish law, i. q. 
 vop,iKos and ypap.p.aT(vs, Luke 5, 17. Acts 
 5, 34 ; see in ypap.p.aTtvs no. 2. Spoken 
 also of perverse Christian teachers, who ob 
 truded themselves upon the churches as 
 expounders of the Mosaic law ; 1 Tim. 1, 7 
 fivai vop,o8i8do-K.a\oi. 
 
 as, fj, (Vo/io3ere<,) law- 
 giving, legislation^ the giving of a code of 
 laws, Pol. 4. 81. 12 OTTO Trjs AvKovpyov vo- 
 HoZealas. Plato Rep. 427. b. In N. T. 
 meton. legislation, i. q. the laws given, code 
 of laws, the law, e. g. the Mosaic code, 
 Rom. 9, 4 a>v al SmStyKfU KOI fj vopo^eaia. 
 So 2 Mace. 6, 23. Lys. 186. 33. Plut. In- 
 stit. Lacon. 42 pen. ea>s ov navrcnraa-iv inrfp- 
 Mvres TTJV A.vKovpyov vop,o%(criav. 
 
 , &, f. ijo-w, 
 make, or give laics, to legislate. 
 
 1. Genr. and c. dat. for any one, Xen. 
 Apol. Socr. 15 AvKovpyov TOV AaKf8a.ip.ovi- 
 ois vop.o%fTr]o-avTos. Sept. for FH^ Ex. 24, 
 12. Hence in N. T. Pass, to be legislated 
 
 for, to receive laws, where the dat. of the 
 active construction becomes the nom. to the 
 passive, Buttm. J 134. 5. Winer 40. 1. 
 Heb. 7, 1 1 6 Xaos yap eV avTrj vevop.o StTrjTo 
 for the people received the (Mosaic) law upon 
 this condition, sc. of receiving the Levitical 
 priesthood. 
 
 2. Spec, to establish, to sanction, pr. as 
 law, or by law, Pass. Heb. 8, 6 fJTis (8z- 
 
 eVl xpfiTTOo-iv eVayyeXi atr vevop.o%e- 
 . Jos. Ant. 3. 15. 3. Act. c. ace. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 27. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 25. 
 
 ov, 6, (vopos, Ti 3j/u,) a law- 
 giver, legislator, James 4, 12. Jos. Ant. 3. 
 
 7. 7. Diod. Sic. 1. 94. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 31. 
 vofjios, ov, 6, (vep.a> to allot,) pr. any 
 
 thing allotted, apportioned, that which one 
 has in use and possession ; hence a usage, 
 custom, Sept. and STiin 2 Sam. 7, 19. Luc. 
 D. Mort. 14. 5. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 28. In N. 
 T. a law, ordinance, as prescribed by cus 
 tom or authority. 
 
 1. Genr. law, without reference to a par 
 ticular people or state. Rom. 4, 15 ov yap 
 OVK <TTI vop.os, otSe Trapd/Sao ty. 5, 13. 7, 8. 
 1 Tim. 1,9. So Dem. 774. 18. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 2. 41 sq. Spec, of particular laws, sta 
 tutes, ordinances ; in N. T. mostly of the 
 Mosaic statutes, viz. a) Of laws relating 
 to civil rights and duties, John 7, 51 p,T) 6 
 vop.os f)p.a>v Kpivft TOV av %pa>7rov KT\. John 
 
 8. 5 comp. Lev. 20, 10. John 19, 7 comp. 
 Lev. 24, 16 et Deut. 13, 5. Acts 23, 3. 24, 
 6. Also the law of marriage Rom. 7, 2. 3. 
 1 Cor. 7, 39 ; of the Levitical priesthood 
 Heb. 7, 16. Also Heb. 9, 19 /cara vopov i. e. 
 according to the ordinance or command 
 respecting the promulgation of the law, 
 see Ex. 20, 18. 19. 24, 2 sq. Sept. for 
 JTnl n Num. 19, 14. So of particular civil 
 laws among the Greeks, Dem. 325. 13. ib. 
 599. 24. Xen. Hell. 3. 3. 2. b) Of laws 
 relating to external religious rites, e. g. pu 
 rification Luke 2, 22. Heb. 9, 22 ; circum 
 cision John 7, 23. Acts 15, 5 (comp. 21, 
 20. 24) ; sacrifices Heb. 10, 8. So Sept. 
 and fi-i-in Lev. 6, 9. 14. al. c) Of laws 
 relating to the hearts and conduct of men, 
 Rom. 7, 7 6 vop.os eXeyev OVK {iri%vp.r]O~fis. 
 James 2, 8. Heb. 8, 10 et 10, 16 SiSovs vo 
 p-ovs p.ov eVi Kapbias OVTCOV, quoted from 
 Jer. 31,33 where Sept. for STiin . d) Put 
 
VOOf 
 
 483 
 
 vov^ecria 
 
 lor a written law, a law expressly given, i. q. 
 o vopos eyypanTos. Rom. 2, 14 {Siy TO. p.f] 
 vopov f%ovTa . . . eavrois etcrt vup,os. So 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 94 vop,oi, eyypcmToi. 
 
 2. the Ian; i. e. a code or body of laws, in 
 N. T. only of the Mosaic code. a) Pr. 
 Matt. 5,18 iwra tv . . . ov pr) jrapeXSi; OTTO 
 roO vofJLOv. 22, 36 rroia tVroXij fj.eyd\r] fit 
 rc3 vo/j.(j>; Luke 16, 17. John 1, 17 6 v6p.os 
 Sta Mwi/Wwr eSo 37/. 7, 19. Acts 7, 53. Rom. 
 2, 13 sq. 5, 13. 1 Cor. 15, 56. Gal. 3, 10 
 sq. Phil. 3, 5. 1 Tim. 1, 8. James 2, 9. 11. 
 al. Hence epya vopov, see in tpyov no. 2. 
 c. 8, Rom. 2, 15. Gal. 2, 16. 3, 10 ; of CK 
 VO/JLOV, ot eV vo/j.(o, oi VTTO iiopov, those un 
 der the Mosaic law, Rom. 4, 16. 3, 19. 
 1 Cor. 9, 20 ; 6Vot eV vo /zw id. Rom. 2, 12. 
 Sept. and fnin Deut. 1, 5*. 4, 44. al. b) 
 Synecd. for the Mosaic dispensation, Rom. 
 10, 4 Tf\os yap VO/JLOV Xpicrros. Heb. 7, 12. 
 10, 1. c) Meton. for the book of the law, 
 i. e. pr. the books of Moses, the Pentateuch, 
 Matt. 12, 5. Luke 2, 23 (comp. Ex. 13, 2). 
 Luke 10, 26. 1 Cor. 9, 8. 9 (comp. Deut. 
 25, 4). 1 Cor. 14, 34 comp. Gen. 3, 16. 
 Sept. and Ti ifl Neh. 8, 2. As forming 
 part of the Old Test. 6 vopos Kal oi irpocpf)- 
 rat, Matt. 5, 17. Luke 16, 16. John 1, 46. 
 Acts 13, 15. 28, 23. Rom. 3, 21. (Jos. de 
 Mace. 18.) Also vopos /cat rrpo(p. Kal ^aX- 
 fjioi Luke 24, 44. Simply 6 v6p.os for the 
 Old Testament, John 10, 34. 12, 34. 15, 
 25 comp. Ps. 35, 19. 1 Cor. 14, 21 comp. 
 Is. 28, 11. 12. So 2 Mace. 2, 18. 
 
 3. Trop. 6 z/o/ios TeXetoj, the more perfect 
 law, put for the Christian dispensation, in 
 contrast with that of Moses ; comp. above 
 in no. 2. b. James 1, 25 6 8e irapaKtyas els 
 v6p.ov TtXfiov TW TTJS fXtv^epias. So with 
 out reXetos, James 2, 12. 4,11. Also of 
 the laws, precepts, established by the gos 
 pel ; e. g. 6 v6[j.os Xpio-Tov Gal. 6, 2 ; absol. 
 Rom. 13, 8. 10 TrX^pco/itt ovv vofjMV f) aydnrj. 
 Gal. 5, 23. 
 
 4. Trop. a laic, rule, standard of judging 
 or acting ; Rom. 3, 27 8ta iroiov vopov 
 TUIV fpyw ; ov^ 1 oX\a Sta v6[j.ov Trt orecoy. 
 7, 23. 25. 8, 2. 9, 31. Arr. Epict. 1. 26. 
 1. + 
 
 voo$, see vovs. 
 
 voveci), &, f. T](ra>, (vocros,) to be sick, to 
 ail, pr. Hdian. 3. 15. 3. Thjic. 1. 138. In 
 N.- T. trop. voa-elv rrepi n, to be sick 
 with longing for any thing, to pine after, 
 to dole about ; 1 Tim. 6, 4 vo<r<Zv irtpl forr]- 
 creis Kal Xoyo/za^iar. So irepi TI Pint, 
 de Ira cohib. 14. Id.de seipsum citra Invid. 
 laud. 20 TOIS T>fp\ 86ai voaoiKnv. Plato 
 Phaedr. 228. e. 
 
 aros, TO, (i/oo-e cu,) sickness, dis 
 ease, i. q. i/ocroy, John 5, 4. Luc. Abdicat. 
 18. Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 27. 
 
 i/ocros", ov, i], sickness, disease ; Matt. 4, 
 23 3fpa7reua>i rraa-av vouov. \. 24. 9, 35. 
 10, 1. Mark 1, 34. 3, 15. Luke 4, 40. 6, 
 17. 7, 21. 9, 1. Acts 19, 12. Sept. for 
 "^n 2 Chr. 21, 19 ; M sHO Ex. 15, 26. So 
 Hdian. 1. 3. 1. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 13. Me- 
 taph. for pain, sorrow, evil ; Matt. 8, 17 <al 
 ras vocrovs [rjp.ci)v] tfidcrracrfv, translated 
 from Is. 53, 4, Heb. waSsa. 
 
 vocrcrid, as, 77, (veoa-a-os,) a later contr. 
 form for Att. veotro-ta, a nest with the young, 
 Sept. for 1J3 Ps. 84, 4. Pausan. 9. 30. Hdot. 
 3. 1 11 ; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 206 sq. Sturz 
 de Dial. Alex. p. 185. In N. T. a nest of 
 young birds, brood ; Luke 13, 34 ov rponov 
 opvis TTJV favrriv vocrcridv. So Sept. and "|5 
 Deut. 32, 11. 
 
 vocr<Tiov, ov, TO, (dim. reocro-dr,) contr. 
 for Att. veoo-o-iov, see in z/oo-o-id ; a young 
 bird, Plur. TO. voao-ia, a brood of young birds, 
 Matt. 23, 37. Sept. for BTpB 5 *. Ps. 84, 4. 
 So TO. vtorria Aristot. H. An. 9. 29. ^El. 
 V. H. 10. 3. 
 
 vo<T(ro<>, see veoo-aos. 
 
 vocr(j>t:ci), f. i <ra>, (j/do-^)i,) pr. to put 
 apart, to separate ; Mid. to separate oneself, 
 to go away, Horn. Od. 11. 73. Act. to take 
 or snatch away, to rob, Pind. Nem. 6. 106. 
 In N. T. Mid. to take away for oneself, to 
 keep back what belongs to another, to em 
 bezzle, to purloin; absol. Tit. 2, 10 ; with 
 OTTO c. gen. partitively, Acts 5, 2. 3 voo-(pi- 
 o-acr%ai OTTO TTJS Tip.rjs. So c. drrd Sept. 
 Josh. 7, 1 ; ovftev t< TWOS Philo de Vit. Mos. 
 1. p. 641. e ; c. ace. 2 Mace. 4, 32. Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 2. 42. 
 
 VOTO?, ov, 6, the south wind ; strictly the 
 south-west wind, Lat. notus. 
 
 1. Pr. Luke 12, 55 VOTOV wvfovra. Acts 
 27, 13. 28, 13. Sept. for Cl "^ Job 37, 17 ; 
 ja^S} Cant. 4, 16. Plut. M. Anton. 7. Xen. 
 An. 5. 7. 7. 
 
 2. Meton. the south, the southern quartei 
 of the heavens and earth ; Matt. 12, 42 et 
 Luke 11, 31 ^ao-i Xto-o-a VOTOV (comp. 1 K. 
 c. 10). Luke 13, 29. Rev. 21,13. Sept. for 
 tsi-W Ecc. 1, 5. Ez. 40, 25 ; 3M Josh. 15, 
 2 ; ja- n Ex. 26, 35. Plut Camill. 16. 
 Plato Crit. 118. b. 
 
 . as, 17, (i/ovSfTeu.) a putting 
 in mind, warning, admonition; 1 Cor. 10, 
 1 1 TavTa fypdfpT] irpbs rouSecrt az/ rjfjLwv. Eph. 
 6, 4. Tit. 3, 10. Jos. Ant. 3. 15. 1. Diod. 
 Sic. 15. 7. Plut. Solon 25. The firm vov 
 
484 
 
 wv 
 
 was regarded as more Attic, Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 512. 
 
 I/Ot&ereO), >, f. JJO-G>, (yovs, Tt Si;/",) to 
 pu irc mmd, to remind, to ivarn, to admon 
 ish, c. ace. Acts 20, 31 owe iiravadfi^v . . . 
 vov%T(ov eva CKOO-TOV. Rom. 15, 14. 1 Cor. 
 4, 14. Col. 1, 28. 3, 16. 1 Thess. 5, 12. 14. 
 2 Thess. -3, 15. Sept. for *&} Job 4, 3. 
 Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 24. Luc. Tim. 48. Xen. Cyr. 
 8. 2. 15. 
 
 vov^via, as, fj, (veos, p^,) Att. contr. 
 for vfop.i]via, pr. the new-month, i. e. the new- 
 moon, as a festival, Col. 2, 16 ; see in pf)v 
 no. 2. Sept. for WO 1HK Ex. 40, 2. 15 ; 
 V, ttJah Num. 10, 10. 28, 11. Jos. Ant. 4. 
 4. 6. Dem. 799 ult. Xen. An. 5. 6. 23. 
 
 z/ou^e^w?, adv. (vovvexns , vovs, ?X W >) 
 with understanding, discreetly; Mark 12, 
 34 vovvfx&s dire<oten.Po\. 2. 13. 1. Plut. 
 de Solert. Anim. 39 pen. See Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 604. 
 
 vovs, vov, 6, ace. vovv, Att. contr. for 
 voos, voov ; but in N. T. and the Fathers 
 only with genit. voos, dat. voi, Winer 8. 
 2. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 453 ; pr. the seer, per- 
 ceiver, i. e. the intelligent or intellectual 
 principle, the mind. 
 
 1 . the mind, as the seat of emotions and 
 affections, modes of thinking and feeling, 
 the disposition, moral inclination, in Engl. 
 i. q. the heart; Rom. 1, 28 irapibwttv av- 
 TOVS 6 3. els d8oK.ip.ov vovv. 12, 2. 1 Cor. 1, 
 10. Eph. 4, 17. 23. Col. 2, 18. 1 Tim. 6, 5 
 dif(p%app.evo>v TOV vovv. 2 Tim. 3, 8. Tit. 1, 
 15. So for firmness or presence of mind, 
 
 2 Thess. 2, 2. As implying heart, reason, 
 conscience, in opp. to fleshly appetites, Rom. 
 7, 23. 25. Sept. for M^ Is. 10, 7. 12. 
 Horn. Ocl 1. 3. Luc. de Salt. 85. Xen. Cyr. 
 5. 2. 17. 
 
 2. the understanding, intellect ; Luke 24, 
 45 oif]voL^fV aiiTwv TOV vovv. 1 Cor. 14, 14. 
 15 bis. 19. Phil. 4, 7. Rev. 13, 18 6 fx> v 
 TOV vovv, i. e. wise. Sept. for 23b Josh. 
 14, 7._Dio4. Sic. 3. 6. Xen. Mem. 3. 12. 7. 
 
 3. Meton. the mind, for what is in the 
 mind, i. e. thought, counsel, purpose, opin 
 ion; e. g. of God or Christ, Rom. 11, 34 
 TIS yap eyva> vovv Kvpiov, quoted from Is. 
 40, 13 where Sept. for I?" 1 1 Cor. 2, 16 bis. 
 Of men y Rom, 14, 5. Judith 8, 14. Plut. 
 de rect. rat. audiend. 13. p. 102. Xen. An. 
 
 3 3. 2. 
 
 4. Trop. of things, the sense, meaning. 
 Rev. 17, 9 2>Sf 6 vovs 6 e^wv o-otyav, i. e. 
 the deep or hidden sense. Synes. Ep. 103 
 <rv KQKU>S eVeoVa> TOV vovv TTJS firi 
 
 Plut. Demosth. 6 pen. Ildot. 7. 162. 
 
 Nv/J,(pas, a, 6, Nymphas, pr. n. of a 
 Christian, Col. 4, 15. 
 
 Wfjity r), rjs, fj, (obsol. vvftw, Lat. nubo,) 
 a bride, spouse, newly married. 
 
 1. Pr. John 3, 29 6 f\u>v TTJV vvfj.<j>ijv wp.- 
 (plos to-TL. Rev. 18, 23. 21, 2. 9. 22, 17. 
 Sept. for fllb? Jer. 2, 32. 7, 32. Joel 2, 16. 
 JEl. V. H. 4. 1. Xen. Conv. 9. 3. 
 
 2. Spec, as opp. r] TrevZepd, it is put for 
 a daughter-in-laiv, Matt. 10. 35. Luke 12, 53 
 bis. Sept. and fii? Mic. 7, 6. Gen. 38, 
 11. Ruth 1, 6. 7. Tob. 11, 16. 17. Jos. 
 Ant. 5. 9. 1. 
 
 VV/Ji^iOf, ou, 6, (vvufpTj,*) a bridegroom, 
 spouse, newly married, Matt. 9, 15 bis. 25, 
 
 I. 5. 6. 10. Mark 2, 19 bis. 20. Luke 5, 34. 
 35. John 2, 9. 3, 29 ter. Rev. 18, 23. Sept 
 for inn p s . 19, 6. Jer. 7, 32. Hdian. 4. 11. 
 7. Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 5. 
 
 VVfi^xJov, S>vos, 6, (vvp-fpT),) a bridal 
 chamber, where the nuptial bed was pre 
 pared, usually in the house of the bride 
 groom whither the bride was brought in 
 procession ; in N. T. only in the phrase 
 viol TOV wpfptavos, sons of the bride-chamber 
 Matt. 9, 15. Mark 2, 19. Luke 5, 34. These 
 were the companions of the bridegroom, 
 bridemen, called by the Greeks Trapavvptpioi, 
 just as the bride had also her companions 
 or bridemaids. Rabb. faaciB, Buxtorf 
 Lex. Chald. 2535. Comp. Jud g. 14, 11. Ps. 
 45, 14 sq. Tob. 6, 13. 17. Act. Thorn, ft 9, 
 
 II. Suid. vvn<pu>vos KOLTOIVOS. 
 
 vvv, adv. also vvvi as strengthened by 
 the demonstr. i, Matth. $ 607. Buttm. \ 80. 
 2 ; now, Lat. nunc, Germ. nun. 
 
 1. Pr. of TIME, now. a) Of the actual 
 present, as opp. both to time past and future. 
 Luke 6, 21 01 Trfiv&vrfs vvv. v. 25. John 4, 
 18 Kal vvv ov ex* 1 * KT ^- 12, 27 vvv fj -^vxf] 
 fjiov TerapaKrai, for the perf. as present see 
 Buttm. 5 113. 7. John 16, 22. 17, 5. 7. 
 Acts 2, 33. 10, 33. 26, 6. 1 Cor. 16, 12. 
 Gal. 2, 20. 1 John 2, 18. al. sssp. Sept. for 
 tip)? Josh. 14, 11. Is. 48, 7. So Hdian. 1. 
 4.7. Diod. Sic. 1. 10. Xen. (Ec. 20. 24. 
 In direct antith. to something done in time 
 past, e. g. vvv Se Luke 16, 25. Gal. 4, 9. 
 Eph. 5, 8. Phil. 3, 18. Heb. 9, 26. James 
 4, 16 ; vvv\ Se, in which connection chiefly 
 is wvi found, Rom. 3, 21. 6, 22. 1 Cor. 5, 
 11 comp. v. 9. 2 Cor. 8, 11. Philem. 11 ; 
 dXXa vvv Luke 22, 36. In antith. to some 
 thing future, emphat. Mark 10, 30 vvv tv 
 TCO (cai/jM Toura), opp. eV rw al&vi TO> (pX~ 
 fj.evco. So Xen. Conv. 8. 4 vvv ev TCO irapovTi. 
 With the art. 6, 17, TO vvv, as adj. the 
 
wv 
 
 485 
 
 now existing, present, see Buttm. 125. 6. 
 Acts 22, 1 TTJS Trpbs vfj.as vvvl dno\oyias. 
 Rom. 3, 26 lv ra> vvv Katpw. 8, 18. 2 Cor. 
 8, 13. Gal. 4, 25 rfj vvv itpovo-. 1 Tim. 4, 
 8. 2 Tim. 4, 10. 2 Pet. 3, 7. (Diod. Sic. 
 2. 5 fin. Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 3. ib. 6. 6. 13.) 
 So ano TOW vvv sc. xpdi/ov, from now, 
 henceforth, Luke 1, 48. 2 Cor. 5, 16; a^pi 
 row vui wnft Z mw, Rom. 8, 22. Phil. 1, 5; 
 ea>y TOV vw id. Matt. 24, 21. Mark 13, 19. 
 Also ra vvv or TO.VVV adv. no?0, aZ pre 
 sent, Buttm. 5 125. n. 8. Acts 4, 29. 5, 38. 
 17, 30. 20, 32. 27, 22. non al. (Soph. 
 Elect. 421. Hdot. 7. 104. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 10. 15.) Further, TO vvv ex ov > as ^ now 
 is, for the present, Acts 24, 25 ; see in e^co 
 no. 5. 
 
 b) In reference to time just past, now, 
 i. e. just now, even now ; comp. Viger. p. 
 425. E. g. with a perf. John 14, 29 KOI 
 vvv fiprfKa vp.l.v Trplv ytvfo-^ai. Acts 7, 52 ; 
 with an aor. Matt. 26, 65. John 13, 31. 21, 
 10. Rom. 5, 11 ; with an imperf. John 11,8 
 vvv er]Tovv ere XtSaerat ot lovSaTot. Perf. 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 27 ; impf. ib. 4. 5. 48. 
 
 c) In reference to future time just at 
 hand, now, i. e. even now, presently, imme 
 diately ; comp. Viger. p. 426. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 19. Matth. J 607. E. g: with a fut. John 
 12, 31 vvv 6 apxav TOV K. T. KJ3\r) %r]crfTai 
 eo>. Acts 13, 11. Phil. 1, 20. (Aristoph. 
 Vesp. 151. Xen. Cyr. 4. 1. 23.) With a 
 pret. for fut. as implying what is imme 
 diately to take place, Winer ^ 41. 2. Matth. 
 5 504. 3. John 4, 23 ep^rrai copa, *al vvv 
 ecTTiv. 16, 32. John 12, 31 vvv Kpicrts earl 
 TOV Kocrp-ou. 16, 5 vvv Se vrrayw Trpos KT\. 
 Acts 26, 17. 
 
 2. As a particle of TRANSITION or con 
 tinuation, a) Genr. now, as marking a 
 present condition, i. e. in the present state 
 of things, as things are. Luke 2, 29 vvv 
 aTToXt et? TOV 8ov\6v (TOV. 11, 39. Rom. 5, 9. 
 2 Cor. 7, 9. Col. 1, 24; *at vvv Acts 3, 
 17. 20, 25. In antithesis, vvvl 8e 1 Cor. 
 13, 13; and so vvv S preceded by ft, Luke 
 19, 42. John 8, 40. 1 Cor. 7, 14; vvvl 8e 
 after , Rom. 7, 17. Heb. 8, 6. 11, 16. al. 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 2. 16; after , Hdot. 3. 
 25. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 14. 
 
 b) As implying that one thing follows 
 now out of another, thus marking a conclu 
 sion, inference, i. q. now then, now therefore, 
 i. e. since these things are so; Acts 12, 11 
 vvv 0180. aAjjSco?. 22, 16 *at vvv ri /ze XXetj ; 
 1 Cor. 14, 6 wv\ 8e. So vvv ovv Acts 
 16, 36. 23, 15; interrog. Acts 15, 10; 
 vvv upa Rom. 8, 1. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 54 
 vvv ovv. 
 
 3. EMFHAT. in commands and exhorta^ 
 tions, implying that what is to be done should 
 be done now, at once, on the spot ; comp. 
 Passow s. v. Viger. p. 426. So with an 
 Imperat. Matt. 27, 42 Kara/3arca vvv drro TOV 
 crravpov. v. 43. John 2, 8. James 4, 13 
 aye vvv. 5, 1. 1 John 2, 28. Acts 7, 34 vvv 
 o-fvpo. Horn. II. 23. 485. Aristoph. Pac. 
 513. Eurip. Phren. 101. + 
 
 vv%, VVKTOS, T/, 1. night, Lat. nox ; 
 pr. Matt. 14, 25 Teruprj; (pv\aKrrj Ttjs WK- 
 TOS. Mark 6, 48. Luke 2, 8. Rev. 8, 12 
 KOI rj vvg 6/xotW. 21, 25. 22, 5 ; trop. John 
 9, 4. Sept. for M^b Gen. 1, 5. Job 3, 6. 
 7. (Hdian. 4. 6. 8. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 4.) 
 In specifications of time, comp. in rfjiepa 
 no. 1. a. a) Genii, of time when, inde 
 finite and continued, Buttm. 132. 5. b. 
 E. g. VVKTOS by night Matt. 2, 14. 27,64. 
 John 3, 2 ; rjp.(pas KOI VVKTOS, by day and by 
 night, i. e. continually, Luke 18, 7. Acts 9, 
 24. Rev. 4, 8; VVKTOS KCU fjp.. 2 Tim. 1, 3. 
 (Xen. Hell. 1. 1. 11 ; fa. K. v. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 2. 8 ; WK. K. Tjp... Conv. 4. 48.) So /ne- 
 077? 8e VVKTOS Matt. 25,6 ; /taro p.ftrov TTJS v. 
 Acts 27, 27 ; 8ia TTJS VVKTOS, during the 
 night, i. e. either the whole night Luke 5, 
 5, or by night Acts 5, 19. 16, 9. b) Da 
 tive of time when, definite, Buttm. 5 133. 4. e. 
 E. g. Luke 12, 20 TavTrj TJJ VVKTI, this very 
 night. Acts 12, 6. (Xen. An. 6. 1. 13.) 
 Also ev VVKTI by night Acts 18, 9 ; eV 177 v. 
 Matt. 26, 31. John 11, 10. So Xen. Conv. 
 1..9. c) Accus. of time hoiv long, Buttm. 
 5 131. 9. Matt. 4, 2 VVKTCIS Tfo-o-apaKovra. 
 12, 40 rpetr VVKTUS. Also TOS VVKTOS the 
 nights, i. e. during the nights, Luke 21, 37 ; 
 vvKTa KOI fipepav night and day, continu 
 ally, Mark 4, 27. Luke 2, 37. Acts 26, 7. 
 2 Thess. 3, 8. al. So Xen. Conv. 4. 54 TUS v. 
 Hiero 7. 10 VVKTCL K. 17^. 
 
 2. Trop. night, for a time of moral and 
 spiritual darkness, the opposite of gospel 
 light and day; Rom. 13, 12 TJ vvg Trpoe- 
 Ko^o-e. 1 Thess. 5, 5. + 
 
 vv<Tcra> v. -TT<U, f. , to prick, to 
 pierce, e. g. rr\v jrXfvpdv John 19, 34. 
 Ecclus. 22, 20. Luc. Epist. Saturn. 38. 
 Plut. ^Emil. Paul. 20 pen. 
 
 vva-rd^o}, f. w, (vtva),) pr. to nod; 
 hence to nap, to slumber, intrans. Matt. 25, 
 5 fvv<TTaav Tracrai KOL (Ka%tv8ov. Trop. 
 2 Pet. 2, 3. Sept. for ow Ps. 121, 3. Nah. 
 3, 18. Luc. Merc. cond. 29. Xen. Cyr. 8. 
 3. 43. 
 
 day and night, twenty-four hours, 2 Cor. 
 11, 25. Geopon. 5. 8. 8. ib. 12. 19. 18, 
 
Nae 
 
 486 
 
 Found only in very late writers, see Sturz 
 de Dial. Alex. p. 186. 
 
 Nooe, 6, indec. Noe, Heb. rlia (rest) 
 Noah, pr. n. of the patriarch preserved from 
 deluge, Matt. 24, 37. 38. Luke 3, 36. 17, 
 26. 27. Heb. 11,7. 1 Pet. 3, 20. 2 Pet. 
 2,5. 
 
 d, 6v, (vco^s, vo^os,) slow, 
 sluggish, dull, pr. physically, Ecclus. 4, 29. 
 Luc. de Astrol. 21. In N. T. trop. of the 
 mind, dull, slothful; Heb. 5, 11 j>o>3poi -ye- 
 
 yovare rais O.KOOIS. 6, 12 Iva ^rj vuftpo\ 
 yetnjar Sf. So Sept. Prov. 22. 29. Pol. 4. 
 8. 5. Plato Theffit. 144. b. 
 
 va)TO$ : ov, 6, the back, of men and ani 
 mals ; Rom. 11, 10 rbv v5)Tov aiiTwv crvy- 
 Kap-^sov, from Ps. 69, 24 where Sept. for 
 t*$nn the loins. Sept. for =a i K. 7, 32 ; 
 Sl^ a K. 17, 14. Plut. C. Mar. 33. Pau- 
 san. 10. 27. Athen. 9. 39. The earlier and 
 more Attic form was TO v>rov, Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 290. 
 
 ia, as, f], (eVos,) pr. guest-right, an 
 alliance of hospitality, Lat. hospitium, Pol. 
 33. 16. 2. Xen. Ag. 8. 3, 4; see Potter s 
 Gr. Ant. II. p. 416 sq. Adam s Rom. Ant. 
 p. 446. Diet, of Antt. art. Hospitium. Then, 
 hospitality, entertainment, Ml. V. H. 9, 15. 
 Dem. 81. 20. In N. T. place for a guest, 
 and genr. a lodging ; Acts 28, 23 TJKOV irpbs 
 avrbv els TTJV {-tviav. Philem. 22. So Jos. 
 Ant. 5. 2. 8 pen. Hesych. gevia 
 
 evi(o, f. t o-oj, (evos,) 1. to receive as 
 a guest, to entertain ; Pass, to be entertained, 
 to lodge with any one ; Acts 10, 6 m ferai 
 Trapa TIVI "2ifj.a>vi flvpcrfl. v. 18. 23. 32. 21 , 
 16. 28, 7 rjfjias <pi\o(pp6v(t)s et-evio-ev. Heb. 
 13, 2. Ml V. H. 13. 26. Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 
 3 t-fvio-Zevrfs Tore irapa Ktip<B. 
 
 2. to appear strange to any one, to sur 
 prise, c. ace. Jos. Ant. 1. 1. 4 TOV 3eoi/ e - 
 vicrev TO 7rpaTTo/xei>oi>. In N. T. Part. plur. 
 TO geviovTa, strange things, i. e. novel, 
 surprising, Acts 17, 20. (2 Mace. 9, 6. 
 Diod. Sic. 12. 53.) Also Mid. ei/i o/iai, 
 to be surprised, to think strange of, with 
 dat. of cause or object, 1 Pet. 4, 12 ^ ge- 
 t>[fo-%f TTJ ev v[uv Trvpcoo-et, comp. Winer 
 531. 1. Buttm. $ 133. 4. c. So with eV a 
 1 Pet. 4, 4. So firi TLVI Jos. Ant. 1. 1. 2. 
 Pol. 2. 27. 4. 
 
 ea>, >, f. Jjo-a), (gevoftoxos ; |e- 
 t,) to entertain strangers, to prac 
 
 tise hospitality, absol. 1 Tim. 5, 10. Max. 
 Tyr. Diss. 32. 133. Dion Cass. 78. 3. The 
 Atticists prefer gevo8oKea>, Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 307. 
 
 ^^09, 77, ov, pr. adj. not of one s family, 
 stranger. Hence 
 
 1. Subst. 6 |evos, a guest, stranger. 
 a) Pr. a friend allied in hospitality, hospes, 
 such an alliance being usual among friends 
 who lived in different cities or countries, 
 
 who then were entertained at each other s 
 houses, see Potter s Gr. Ant. II. p. 416 sq. 
 Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 446. Diet, of Antt. 
 art. Hospitium. As the relation was mutual, 
 6 eVor is used, like Lat. hospes, both of the 
 entertainer and the entertained; e. g. of the 
 former, the host, Rom. 16, 23 Tdios 6 |eVos 
 fiov Kal TTJS fKKXrjcrias oXrjs. So Dem. 194. 
 19. Diod. Sic. 17. 47. Xen. An. 3. 1. 4. 
 
 b) Genr. a stranger, foreigner, as coming 
 from another place or country ; Matt. 25, 
 35 |eW rJM v - v - 38 - 43 - 44 - 27 > 7 * Tafyov 
 TOIS fvois. Acts 17, 21 01 fTu8r)fi.ovvTes evoi 
 resident strangers, foreigners. Heb. 11, 13. 
 3 John 5. Sept. for n ^a Ruth 2, 10. 2 Sam. 
 15, 19; "ia Job 31, 32 . So Ceb. Tab. 2. 
 Hdian. 5. 7. 4. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 17. Trop. 
 as not belonging to the Christian communi 
 ty, an alien, c. gen. Eph. 2, 12 0/01 TO>I> 
 SiaSrjKwv, aliens from the covenants ; comp. 
 Winer $ 30. 6. Buttm. 132. 8. (Soph. 
 CEd. Tyr. 218 sq.) Absol. a stranger, not 
 a Christian, Eph. 2, 19 OVKCTI tore tVoi KOI 
 rrdpoiKoi. 
 
 2. Adj. strange, i. e. foreign, unknown, as 
 coming from another country; Acts 17, 18 
 8atp.oVta |eVa. Trop. Heb. 13, 9 StSa^alr 
 gtvais, strange doctrines, foreign to the 
 Christian faith. So Wisd. 16, 2. ^El. V. H. 
 2. 13 tvoi 8a[p.oves. Xen. Ven. 11. 1. 
 Trop. strange, novel, unheard of, causing 
 wonder, 1 Pet. 4, 12 a>s i;evov vfuv o-vju/Sai- 
 vovros. So Wisd. 19, 5. Luc. Contempl. 
 13. Diod. Sic. 3. 52. 
 
 ov, 6, Lat. sextarius. pr. a mea 
 sure of things liquid and dry, the 16th part 
 of a modius, and therefore containing nearly 
 one pint English ; see in podios. Adam s 
 Rom. Ant. p. 504. Bceckh Metrol. Unter- 
 such. p. 200 sq. Later Heb. NZtoJ? see 
 Buxt. Lex. Chald. 2076. In N. T. genr. 
 for any small measure or vessel, a cup, 
 
487 
 
 O, ?7, TO 
 
 r, Mark 7, 4. 8. So pr. Jos. Ant. 8. 
 2. 9. Arr. Epict. 1. 9. 33. 
 
 t-rjpaivw, f. avS), (|i?po s,) aor. 1. f ^ij- 
 pai/a James 1, 11, comp. Buttm. $ 101. 4; 
 Pass. perf. e l^pa/ipu Mark 3, 1. 3, comp. 
 Buttm. 101. n. 8; also 3 pers. sing. e ?j- 
 pavrai Mark 11, 21, comp. Buttm. $101. 
 n. 7. To dry, to make dry ; Pass, to be 
 dried up, to become dry. E. g. of plants, 
 Act. c. ace. to dry up, to wither, once James 
 1,116 rjXios . . f&pavf TOV xoprov. Pass. 
 to wither away, Matt. 13, 6 et Mark 4, 6 8ia 
 TOfifi f X fiv piav f&pdiftr). Matt. 21, 19. 20. 
 Mark 11, 20. 21. Luke 8, 6. John 15, 6. 
 1 Pet. 1, 24. Also of the harvest, to be dry, 
 ripe, as 6 %epio-p.6s Rev. 14, 15. Sept. for 
 to?? Jer. 12, 4. Hos. 9, 19. So Dem. 1278. 
 22/Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 8. Of fluids, Pass, to 
 be dried up, Rev. 16, 12 TO vSwp. Mark 5, 
 29 17 Trrryj). Sept. for C3? Gen. 8, 7. 1 K. 
 17, 7. Is 19, 5. Of the body or its members, 
 Pass, to wither, to pine away; Mark 3, 1 
 e^cov TTJV X f ~ l P a - v - ^ 9, 18 KOI 
 and he pineth away. Sept. and 
 ttn 1 ; 1 K. 13, 4. Prov. 17, 22. So Act 
 Thorn. $ 48. 
 
 |r??p09, a, 6v, 1 . dry, e. g. of a tree, 
 dry, withered, Luke 23, 31 d eV TO> vypo> u- 
 \w TavTct TTOiovariv, tv TO> 7p&> rt yevrjrat ; 
 \. e. a green or dry tree as emblematic of 
 the righteous and the wicked, drawn from 
 Ez. 20, 47 comp. 21, 3. Sept. for U?" 
 Is. 56, 3. Ez. 17, 24. So Diod. Sic. 20. 
 42. Xen. CEc. 7. 36. Of the body or its 
 members, John 5, 3 ; q x e V ^ att - 12, 10. 
 [Maik 3, 3.] Luke 6, 6. 8. Comp. Sept. for 
 Heb. poi Hos. 9, 17. So Test. XII. 
 Patr. p. 535 f] x p- 
 
 2. Spec. 17 77 pa sc. 777, the dry land, as 
 opp. 17 SoXdo-o-Tj, Matt. 23, 15. Heb. 11, 
 29. Sept. and fttja? Gen. 1, 9. 10. Jonah 
 1, 9. StraboS. p. 143. 
 
 %v\ivo<>, 17, ov, (vXoi,) wooden, made of 
 wood. 2 Tim. 2, 20 ovcevri gv\iva. Rev. 9, 
 
 20. Sept. for f? Lev. 11, 32. Deut. 10, 1. 
 Hdian. 4. 7. 8. Xen. An. 5. 2. 5. 
 
 1. Genr. for fuel, timber, ornament, etc. 
 1 Cor. 3, 12 Xi Sovs TI/J.LOVS, uXa, ^opTOK 
 Rev. 18, 12 bis, see in 3utVos. Sept. and 
 n Gen. 22, 3. 6 sq. JEl V. H. 5. 6. 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 49. 
 
 2. Spec, any thing made of wood, e. g. 
 a) a Staff, club, as utra paxuipiav KOI vX<ui> 
 Matt. 26, 47. 55. Mark 14, 43. 48. Luke 
 22, 52. So Jos. B. J. 5. 3. 1. Hdian. 7. 7. 
 8. Dem. 645. 16. b) stocks, Lat. nervus, 
 a wooden block or frame put on the neck of 
 a prisoner ; sometimes also a block with 
 holes in which the feet and hands were con 
 fined ; comp. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 272. 
 Acts 16, 24 TOVS TroSay alrSnv ^a(paX/craTO 
 tls TO v\ov. Sept. for 1O Job 33,11. So 
 Luc. Tox. 29 Ta crKf\T] tv T<a v\<a KaraKf- 
 K\fia-fjieva. Pint, de genio Socr. 32 ot Se 
 rovs TroSas tv TW i;X<u Sf5e/xVot ras ^eipay 
 dptyovres tfiouv. Lys. 117. 32. c) a slake, 
 pale, cross, i. q. o-raupoy, Acts 5, 30 et 10, 
 39 Kpffid(Tai>Ts fVi ^uXou. 13, 29. Gal. 3, 
 13 see in eViKaTupaToy. 1 Pet. 2,24. Sept. 
 and 7? Deut. 21, 22. 23. Esth. 5, 14; 
 comp. Josh. 10, 26. 27. 
 
 2. Of living wood, a tree; Luke 23, 31 
 fv TO) iypw vX<a, see in ijpos no. 1 . Rev. 2, 
 7 . TT/S fafjs, see in o} no. 1. b. 22. 2 bis. 
 14. 19. Sept. for f? Gen. 1, 11. 12. 2, 9. 
 Paleeph. 34. 4. Xen. An. 6. 4. 4, 5. 
 
 vpaa), w, f. 170-0), (gvpov, va>.) to shear, 
 to shave, pr. the locks or beard ; Mid. Acts 
 21, 24 Iva vpT)crovTai TTJV Ke(pa\f)v that 
 they may shave their heads, may cut off their 
 hair. Pass. perf. part. fern, l^vp^vr, 1 Cor. 
 11, 5. 6. Sept. for nfea Gen. 41,14. Num. 
 6, 9. 19. Palaeph. 33. 1. Luc. Cynic. 14. 
 Plut. Mor. II. p. 22. 1 0. Some of the gram 
 marians regard vpe o) as the better form, 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 205 ; soHdot.2. 65. Plato 
 Rep. 341. c. 
 
 o. 
 
 6, r), TO, gen. TOV, T^y, TOU, see Buttm. 
 $ 75. 2 ; originally a demonstrative pronoun, 
 this, that ; but in Attic and later usage 
 mostly a prepositive article, the; Buttm. 
 $ 126. 1. Kiihner $ 247. $ 244 sq. Matth. 
 j 264. $ 286. 
 
 1. As a DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN, this, 
 that ; see the grammarians just cited, and 
 Winer, j 20. 
 
 1. Simpl. once in the words cited from 
 the poet Aratus, Acts 17, 28 TOU yap ral 
 ytvos fa-p-tv, for of THIS ONE (him) we are 
 also the offspring. Buttm. $ 126. n. 7. Kiih 
 ner $247. 2, 3. Matth. 286. Horn. II. 1. 
 12. Soph. CEd. Tyr. 1082 rfs yap TT^VKO 
 prjTpos. Xen. Ath. 2. 8. 
 
 2. In distinctions and distribution, with 
 p.v, 8t, e. g. 6 p-eV ... 6 8(, the one . . . the 
 
0, 
 
 488 
 
 O, 7), TO 
 
 aZ one ... this one. Phil. 1, 16. 17 
 of ftiv ft- dydnrjs . . . ol 8e lt~ eptSei ar. Heb. 
 7, 5. 6 ot /wi; ... 6 Se v. 23. 24. So dis- 
 tribntively, one ... another ; Plur. some . . . 
 others. Matt. 13,236 peV aroi/, 6 8e e)j- 
 /coira. 22, 5. 6 ; ot peit . . . ot fie Acts 14, 4. 
 17, 32. 28, 24 ; rotr /zeV . . . roTy 6V Rom. 2, 
 
 7. 8 ; rovs [JLtv . . . TOVS 6V Eph. 4, 11. Also 
 ot peit . . . aXXot Se Matt. 16, 14. John 7, 12 ; 
 /cat Tivts ... ol 8e Acts 17, 18. See Buttm. 
 5 126. 2, and n. 4. Kiihner $ 247. 3. d. 
 Matth. ^ 288, and n. 6. Winer { 20. 1. So 
 Matt. 28, 17 ot Se fdioracrav, out some 
 doubled, i. e. in antith. to all as impl. in. 
 Trpoo-fKvvrjo-av. See Meyer Comm. in loc. 
 
 3. In the narrative style, 6 6V is used by 
 way of transition to another person or party 
 already mentioned, without a preceding 6 
 fjitv, but this one, i. e. but he, and he, etc. 
 Matt. 2. 5 ot 6V 617701*. 16, 14. Mark 8, 28 
 ot 6V dTTfKpfarjo-av. Luke 7, 40 6 6V (pi)<ri. 
 
 8, 30. 48. John 6, 20. 8, 11. al. saep. So 
 with a participle intervening, Matt. 2, 9 of 
 6V uKovcravTfs . . . eVopeuStycrai . V. 14. 21 6 
 6e fytpSfls 7rape Xa/3e TO Trai8iov. 4, 4 6 6V 
 aTTo/cptSftj dire. V. 20. 12. 39. Mark 1, 45. 
 Luke 6. 8. John 8, 9. al. ssep. See Buttm. 
 5 126. 4. Kiihner 5247. 3. a. Matth. 5 289. 
 ult. Winer $ 20. 2. Jos. Ant. 6. 11. 9. 
 Xen. An. 2. 3. 2 ; with part. Jos. B. J. 4. 
 .11. 1. 
 
 II. As the PREPOSITIVE ARTICLE, origin 
 ally a demonstrative as above, but having 
 its demonstrative power gradually softened 
 down so as simply to mark an object as de 
 finite ; not as a class, but as a definite mem 
 ber of a class. It corresponds in many 
 respects to the English the, and French le, 
 la, but more nearly to the Germ, der, die, 
 das; though it is sometimes used where 
 we still say this, often where we employ no 
 article, and sometimes even where we put 
 the indefinite a, an. Usually it is omitted 
 where the English omits it. The usage 
 of languages varies much in respect to 
 their articles ; and, in Greek especially, the 
 usage seems in many cases never to have 
 become fixed, but to have been left to the 
 taste and judgment of the writer or speak 
 er ; as is also in some measure the case 
 with our English the. Further, to the wri 
 ters of the N. T. the use of the Heb. article 
 (h) was vernacular ; and this could hardly 
 fail to impart a shade of colouring to their 
 mode of employing the article in Greek ; 
 though probably not to such an extent as 
 is often supposed. See Buttm. 124 sq. 
 Kiihner $ 244-246. Matth. $ 264-285. Wi 
 ner \ 17 sq. 
 
 A) With Substantives, or words standing 
 for substantives. 
 
 1. Simply, i. e. without adjectives or 
 other adjuncts, where the Subst. is to be 
 expressed as definite. 
 
 a) Genr. where the noun refers to a per 
 son or thing as well known, i. e. either as 
 already mentioned, or as of common noto 
 riety ; so in English. E. g. a) As already 
 mentioned, Matt. 1, 24 6 ayyeXor, comp. v. 
 
 20. Matt. 2, 7 rovs pdyovs, comp. v. 1. 
 Matt. 5, 1 TOVS o%\ovs, comp. 4, 25. Matt. 
 13, 25. 26 roit CTLTOV, 6 %6pTos, TO. idvia 
 sc. there spoken of. v. 30. (But v. 27 
 ftfdwa indef.) 19, 14. Mark 5, 39. Matt. 
 
 21, 18 els TTJV 77o\iv, i. e. Jerusalem, but in 
 John 4, 8 els T^V IT. i. e. Sichem. Acts 19, 
 17 els TTJV oiKiav, comp. v. 11. Also. Matt. 
 2, 11, comp. v. 9. al. saep. /3) As of com 
 mon notoriety ; Matt. 1 , 22 Sta TOV ?rpo<p?j- 
 TOV, i. e. Isaiah, but 2, 15 8ia r. TT. Hosea. 
 Matt. 2, 4 ToG XaoC i. e. the Jewish people. 
 2, 7 TOV TraiSt ov, for which the Magi were 
 inquiring. 5, 1 els TO opos, i. e. near by. 
 5, 25 lv TTJ 6S<a, sc. to the judge. 9. 28 ds 
 Tr)v oiKiav, i. e. w r here he was to lodge. 8, 
 12 6 /cXauS/xoy KOL 6 jBpvyfj.os Tcav 68. SC. 
 which are well known as belonging to that 
 place. 12, 41 eV 777 Kpio-ft, i. e. the day of 
 judgment. 21, 8 dnb TO>V 8fv8pa>v, which 
 grew there. 13, 2 TO TrXotoi/, which was 
 there, or which he had bespoken. 26, 27 
 TO rroTrjpiov, sc. usually served at table. 
 Mark 2, 24 et 3, 2 eV Tols <rdfifiao-iv, i. e. 
 on a certain sabbath. (But Matt. 12, 2 iv 
 o-a/3/3dra> indef.) Luke 5, 14 TO> leptl, i. e. 
 the proper priest, v. 16 lv Tais ep^/ioty, sc. 
 near the city. 12, 54 TTJV vt<f>f\r]v, the har 
 binger of rain. 16, 21 ot Kvves, sc. of that 
 city. John 3, 10 6 SiSao-KaXos TOV lo-p. 
 with emphasis (see Winer 5 17. 4. p. 125). 
 13, 5 (Is TOV vmrrjpa, which belonged to 
 the chamber. 21, 20 lv TW 8ei7rva. comp. 
 13, 23 sq. Acts 11, 13 6 a-yyeXoj, comp. 
 10, 3. Acts 21, 38 6 MJWTTIOS, i. q. in 
 Engl. that Egyptian. Rom. 4, 3 17 ypcxpfj, 
 the Scriptures. 5, 15 ot TroXXot, the many, 
 the great mass. 1 Cor. 10, 1. 2 lv Ty pe^cXg 
 Kat lv TTJ SaXacro-fl, i. e. the pillar of cloud 
 and the Red Sea. James 2, 25 TOVS dyye- 
 Xous, the spies sent by Joshua. Rev. 5, 13 
 TCO dpviat f] evkoyia /cat 17 TIJJ.T) KOL j; Soa /crX. 
 i. e. the glory which belongs to God and 
 to none other; comp. v. 12. Rom. 11, 36. 
 al. saep. Winer 5 17. 1. Buttm. 5 124. n. 6. 
 Here however it often depends on the 
 taste or feeling of the writer, whether the 
 object shall be expressed as definite or not ; 
 as Matt. 12, 1 rlXXra* vrnxvas, i. e. some 
 
TO 
 
 4S9 
 
 O, 1J, TO 
 
 ears, indef. but Mark 2, 23 et Luke 6, 1 
 r/XXeiv rouy ora^uas i. e. of the grain just 
 before mentioned. Mark 6, 8 Iva p.rj8ev al- 
 pcoo-tj/ (Is 686v i. e. for journeying, for this 
 or any other journey ; but Luke 9, 3 els rr]v 
 65oV, i. e. for this journey. 
 
 b) With proper names of persons or 
 places. Here the usage is various, and 
 seems to depend mostly on the will of the 
 writer, or on some special idiom. aa) Of 
 persons, as 6 tyo-ovy, Matt. 3, 13. 15, and 
 so almost universally in Matthew, and gen 
 erally in the other gospels, but less fre 
 quently elsewhere ; also OUT-OS 6 Irjcrouy 
 Luke 24, 15 ; without art. e. g. tyo-ovy 
 Luke 2, 52. 4, 1. 1 John 2, 22. al. saep. 
 So 6 Iwdwjy Matt. 3, 13. 11, 1 ; without 
 art. Matt. 3, 4. 9, 14. 11, 2. 4 ; 6 ILiXdros 
 Matt. 27, 13. 17. 22, and so more usually ; 
 but without art. Luke 13, 1. 23, 6. Acts 
 13, 28; 6 Uav\os Acts 14, 11. 19. 15, 2; 
 without art. 13, 16. 15, 36; 6 IlaCXoy KOI 
 6 Bapvdftas Acts 13, 43. 46; without art. 
 15, 2. 12. 25 ; 6 2re<paKoy Acts 6, 9. 7, 59. 
 
 8, 2 ; without art. 6, 5. 8. etc. etc. So be 
 fore the compound pr. n. for Jehovah, Rev. 
 1, 4 drro TOV 6 &v KOI 6 rji> KT\. Where the 
 proper name has an adjunct of title, office, 
 family, or the like, and is thus made defi 
 nite, the article is omitted ; as Icodwjy 6 
 BaTmoTJjy Matt. 3, 1. Mark 8, 28 ; HiXarw 
 no rjyfJLovL Matt. 27, 2 ; IaKa>/3oj/ TOV aSeX- 
 (pov TOV Kvptov Gal. 1, 19 ; Sipwv 6 Kavavl- 
 TTJS Matt. 10, 4. Acts 18, 8. 17. al. saep. 
 Where the pr. n. is indeclinable, the article 
 would seem to be more necessary, in order 
 to mark the case ; but the usage is here 
 equally variable, e. g. 6 Icoo-rjip Matt. 1, 18. 
 24 ; without art. Luke 2, 33. 4, 22 ; TOV 
 Aa0/8 Acts 13, 22. Matt. 22, 42; usually 
 without art. Matt. 1, 20. Mark 2, 25. al. 
 saep. Comp. the genealogies in Matt. 1, 
 1 sq. Luke 3, 23 sq. Buttm. $ 124. 3. Wi 
 ner 5 17. 8. bb) With geographical 
 names ; where as a general rule names of 
 countries take the article more frequently 
 than those of cities, Winer, { 17. 7. Gener 
 ally also where two or more names follow 
 each other, only the first takes the article, 
 as Matt. 4, 25 OTTO TTJS FaXiXaiay KOI At^arr. 
 KOI icpocr. K.a\ "louSai ay KT\. Luke 3, 1. 
 Acts 1, 8. 2,9. 6,9. 9.31. 14,21. 1 Thess. 
 1, 8. But see Acts 2, 9 TTJV Ao-iW, and 
 1 Thess. 1,7. Spec, a) Names of coun 
 tries, as !} Ao-ia Acts 19, 10. 22. 26. 27, 
 and so always except Acts 6, 9. 1 Pet. 1, 1, 
 by the above rule. So f) A^aia Acts 18, 
 12. 27, and usually ; but without art. 2 Cor. 
 
 9, 2; 17 ToXaria 1 Cor. 11, 1. Gal. 1, 2; 
 
 without art. 2 Tim. 4, 10 ; 77 TaXiXat a Mat! 
 
 2, 22. 4, 12, and so always except Matt 
 4, 15, and Luke 17, 11. Acts 9, 31, by pre 
 ced. rule. Also fj louSa/a Matt. 2, 1. 5, 
 and so always except Matt. 4, 25. Acts 2, 
 9 ; 77 IroAt u Acts 18, 2, and always ; 77 Kv- 
 irpos Acts 13, 4. 21,3; without art. 15, 
 39 ; 17 MoKeoWa Acts 16, 10. 19, 21 ; with 
 out art. 16, 9. 1 Cor. 16, 5 ; 17 Supi a Matt. 
 4, 24. Acts 18, 18 ; without art. Acts 21,3. 
 The name AtyuTrroy never has the article. 
 Comp. in Engl. the Crimea, the Dekkan, 
 Germ, die Turkey, die Schweilz, Fr. la 
 France, la Suisse, la Prusse. Winer 1. c. 
 )3) Names of cities have the article least 
 frequently, espec. after the prep. ev, els, . 
 E. g. 17 Avrio^eia only Acts 15, 23 ; 17 Aa- 
 p.ao-/<o y only Acts 9, 3. 22, 6 ; once els TTJV 
 A. 26, 12; r, Ecpeo-os only Acts 18, 21. 
 19, 17. 20, 16 ; ev ro?y lepoo-oXtyzoty twice 
 John 5, 2. 10, 22 ; 77 lepovo-aX^ once Acts 
 5, 28 ; c. adj. Gal. 4, 25. 26 ; 77 Kan-fpraov/* 
 once Luke 4, 23 ; 77 Naape3 twice Matt. 
 4, 13. Luke 4, 16; 77 Pcop-j; twice, Acts 
 18, 2 e< T-Jjs P. 28, 14. So Hdian. 1. 6. 14, 
 but often without art. see Irmisch Index ad 
 Hdian. Tvpos has not the art. in N. T. but 
 f] Tvpos Hdian. 3. 3. 6. Comp. Winer 1. c. 
 y) Names of rivers take the art. as in Engl. 
 e. g. 6 Iop8divr;y, the Jordan, always, Matt. 
 
 3, 5. 6. al. 6 EvKpparriy Rev. 16, 12 ; c. adj. 
 
 9, 14. So Hdian. 6. 5. 3. Names of moun 
 tains do not occur in N. T. except in con 
 nection with TO opoy, see in cXaui no. 1, 
 and 2tva. Names of nations belong pro 
 perly under lett. d, below. The rule is 
 sometimes laid down for geographical 
 names, that where first mentioned they are 
 without the article, but take it afterwards ; 
 yet the converse of this is just as often 
 true. E. g. Acts 17, 10 ds Etpoiav, v. 13 
 ev TJI B. Acts 20, 15 ei y MiXriroi/, V. 17 aTro 
 TTJS M. But also ib. v. 13. 14 ds TTJV *A<r- 
 ffov, comp. v. 16. 18; also 17, 1. 11. 13. 
 18, 1 et 19, 1. So els TTJV Kaicrdpfiav Acts 
 
 10, 24. 12, 19; elsewhere without ar{. 
 
 c) With nouns implying a person or 
 thing as alone, the only one of the kind, ei 
 ther as pre-eminent above all others, or as 
 alone existing ; thus approaching the na 
 ture of a proper name, and sometimes pass 
 ing over into one. E. g. 6 Xpiaro y, the 
 Christ, the Messiah, Matt. 1, 17. 2, 4, and 
 so almost always where it stands alone ; 
 since as a pr. name without the art. it oc 
 curs very rarely in the Gospels and Acts, 
 as Luke 23, 2. John 9, 22 ; though oftener 
 in the Epistles, Rom. 5, 6. 6, 4. 1 Cor. 
 1, 17. 23. (Winer } 17, 4. n. 1.) So 6 vfij 
 
TO 
 
 490 
 
 0, ??, TO 
 
 row 3fo> v. TOV dv^pumov, see in fids. Also 
 6 StSdovcaXo? Mark 14, 14. Further 6 8id- 
 SoXor, the devil, KUT ^o\f)v Matt. 4, 1. 5. 8, 
 and always except Acts 13, 10, comp. 1 Pet. 
 
 5, 8 ; 6 TTovrjpos the evil one Matt. 6, 13. 
 13, 19. 25 ; d avrixpivTos 1 John 2, 18 ; 6 
 irfipafav 1 Thess. 3, 5 ; 6 SdvaTos Rev. 6, 
 8. 20, 13. 14 ; 6 a^ivZos Rev. 8, 11. (Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 3. 4. An. 6. 6. 7.) So 6 2f/3aoro s, 
 Augustus, pr. the august, Acts 25, 21. 25. 
 Comp. Winer 17. 6. Matth. 268. The 
 names of God, Seo y and Kvpios, (the latter also 
 of Christ,) often have the article, but more 
 frequently omit it, espec. in the oblique cases ; 
 see in 3eo? no. 1, and Kvpios II. 1, 2. The 
 name Trartjp applied to God has usually the 
 art. and a genitive, but also simply 6 rra-rrip 
 Matt. 28, 19. Luke 10, 22; also irapa TTO- 
 rpos John 1,14. So TO Trvevpa and TO Trvev/xa 
 ayiov, almost as pr. n. Matt. 28, 19. Acts 
 1, 8. 10, 19. Rom. 15, 30. 1 Cor. 2, 10. 
 2 Cor. 13, 3 ; without art. 1 Pet. 1, 2. Acts 
 8, 15. 1 Cor. 12, 3. Jude 20. See Winer 
 18. p. 138, 141. Buttm. 124. n. 7. 
 Also with nouns or names of single objects, 
 concrete or abstract, where also the article 
 is often omitted when they are otherwise 
 so definite that no ambiguity can arise. 
 E. g. 6 fj\tos Matt. 13, 43. Mark 1, 32" ; 
 without art. Matt. 13, 6. Luke 21, 25; and 
 eo too dno di>aTo\rjs ijXt ou Rev. 7, 2. 16, 
 12. al. (JE\. V. H. 4. 1. Xen. An. 1. 10. 
 15.) So 6 ovpavos, oi ovpavoi, Matt. 3, 2. 
 16, and usually in the Gospels and Apoca 
 lypse ; without art. Matt. 5, 45. 6. 20. 
 1 Cor. 8, 5, and more usually in the Epis 
 tles. Also 37 yrj Matt. 5, 13. 18; without 
 art. 1 Pet. 3, 5. 10. Acts 17, 24. al. So 
 too Kooyioy, SaXacro a, jj.fa-rjp,ftpia, vv, and 
 others, see Winer 5 18. p. 138 sq. (But 
 OTTO Kara/SoXijr KOO-/XOV always without art. 
 Matt. 13, 35. al.) Also T] dyopd Matt. 20, 3. 
 Acts 16, 19; but Mark 7, 4 UTTO dyopds, 
 comp. Engl. from market. Luke 7, 32 ; 6 
 vop.os the law of Moses, Matt. 5, 18. 22, 36. 
 John 1, 17 ; without art. Rom. 2, 23. 3, 20. 
 21. 31. Gal. 2, 21. 3, 2; rov dypov Matt. 
 
 6, 28. 30 ; but an dpyov as opp. to the city, 
 Mark 15, 21. Luke 15, 25. Comp. Winer 
 1. c. Further, with abstract nouns, in re 
 spect to which languages vary, e. g. in 
 Engl. virtue always without art. but truth 
 or the truth; Germ, usually die Tvgend, 
 die Wahrheit, French, la vertu, la verite, 
 rarely without the article ;" while the Greek 
 inserts it, or also omits it where no ambi 
 guity can arise. E. g. fj dptrf] 2 Pet. 1, 5 
 bis; without art. v. 3 ; f) dydin} Rom. 13, 
 10 bis. 1 Cor. 13, 4. 8 ; without art. v. 2. 
 
 3. 2 Cor. 2, 8; fj apapria Rom. 5, 12. 6 
 1. 2. 17. 18; without art. Rom. 3, 9. 20. 
 
 5, 13; 17 diKcuoo-vvr) Rom. 5, 17. 6, 18. 19. 
 20; without art. Rom. 4, 9. 5, 21. 9, 30; 
 r) TTIO-TIS Rom. 3, 30. 31. 4, 9 ; without art. 
 Acts 6, 5. Rom. 1, 17. 3, 28. al. etc. etc. 
 See also Matt. 15, 19. Gal. 5, 19 sq. Col. 
 
 3, 8. Comp. Matth. 264. p. 545. Winer 
 
 5 18. 1. Buttm. I 124. n. 7. 
 
 d) With nouns implying a definite genus 
 or class of individuals, distinct from all 
 others, Matth. { 264. p. 544. Winer $ 17. l.c. 
 E. g. a) Genr. in Plur. at dXaneKes 
 Matt. 8, 20 ; oi ateroi 24, 28. So oi ve K poi 
 the dead Matt. 14, 2. 22, 31. Mark 12, 26. 
 1 Cor. 15, 29. 42 ; but more frequently also 
 without the article, espec. in connection 
 with words referring to a rising from the 
 dead, as eyeipfiv, dvaa~rrjvai, aVaoracnj, etc. 
 Matt. 17, 9. Luke 24, 46. Acts 3, 15. Rom. 
 10, 7. al. (So ot v. Luc. Necyom. 17. D. 
 Mort. 17. 2; without art. D. Mort. 3. 1. ib. 
 20. 3.) Here belong also the plural names 
 of nations, which take the article as generic, 
 e. g. ot lovSalot, the Jews, the whole na 
 tion, Matt. 2, 2. Luke 7, 3. John 5, 1 ; 
 sometimes also spoken of certain individuals 
 or a particular class as representing the 
 whole, Mark 7, 3. John 2, 18. 20 ; but lov- 
 datoi Jews indef. Acts 2, 5. 10. So of *EX- 
 \rjvfs John 7, 35; oi Paytatot John 11, 48. 
 ft) In the Sing, where the noun expresses 
 a generic idea, or stands as the representa 
 tive of a class ; where in English also we 
 commonly put the. Matt. 12, 35 o dycftbs 
 az/S/xBTTos . . . KOI 6 jrovrjpoS Mark 3, 27. 
 Luke 10, 7 6 epydrrjs. John 10, 11 6 TTOI^J/ 
 
 6 KaXoy. Rom. 1, 17 6 S/Kaioy. Gal. 3, 20. 
 
 4, 1. Here too we may refer 6 o-jm pwi/, 
 the sower, Matt. 13, 3. Mark 4, 3 ; so in 
 Engl. the farmer sows his seed, etc. Also 
 or! rr]v iffrpav, or! TTJV afj,fj.ov, Matt. 7, 24. 
 26. See Buttm. 5 124. n. 6. So Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 3. 16 bis. For participles in a si 
 milar sense, see below in D. 
 
 e) With nouns in themselves indefinite, 
 which yet become definite as standing in 
 some certain relation to the definite person 
 or thing there spoken of; Buttm. 5 124. n. 
 
 6. 5 127. 8. Winer 17. 2. E. g. Luke 18, 
 15 TO. Ppe(pT) i. e. their own children. John 
 
 5, 36. Acts 14, 10 flirt fjLeydXrj rfj (pavf). 
 26, 24. (Luc. Saturn. 3. Diod. Sic. 1. 83.) 
 1 Cor. 11,5 aKaraKaXv7rr<a rrj Kf(pa\fj, so in 
 Engl. with the head uncovered, i. e. her head. 
 
 Heb. 7, 24. Rev. 4, 7. The definiteness of 
 such nouns is often strengthened by the 
 genit. of a pronoun ; e. g. Matt. 3, 4 6 !- 
 (l%e TO ei/Svjua avrov. Mark 8, 17. 
 
o, ?/, TO 
 
 491 
 
 O, 1), TO 
 
 John 19, 2. Rev. 2, 18. Also TO 5vop.a av- 
 TOV Matt. 1, 21. 23. Luke 1,13. al. So 
 .321. II. An. 13. 15 oXty;)i> ?x rr\v ovpdv. 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 4 6/J.otav rats 8ov\ais et ^f 
 rfjv eo-Sqra. Tlie article may also be omit 
 ted before such nouns, when otherwise de 
 finite ; as 1 Tim. 2, 8 (iraipovras ocriovs 
 Xfipas. 2 Pet. 2, 14. Winer 5 18. 2. 
 
 f ) Where two or more nouns in the same 
 case are connected by KOI or the like, if the 
 first have the article, the second takes or 
 omits it in certain circumstances, viz. 
 a) If the nouns are of different genders the 
 article is by rule repeated; as Matt. 15, 4 
 TifJM TOV Trartpa KOI TTJV pyre pa. V. 5. Matt. 
 8, 26. Luke 14, 26. Acts 13, 50 ras o-e/3o- 
 pfvas yvvaiKas . . . Kal TOVS irpatrovs KT\. 15, 
 20. Rom. 8, 2. 1 Cor. 2, 4. Eph. 2, 3. Col. 
 2, 13. al. So connected by ovre 1 Cor. 3, 
 7. Winer 5 18. 3. (Diod. Sic. 1. 50. Plato 
 Charmid. 17. p. 160. b, TO. TOV Ta\ovs re KO.I 
 TTJS ogvTrjTos.} But sometimes the article is 
 here omitted, espec. where the nouns ex 
 press kindred ideas ; Col. 2, 22 TO. eVrdX/ia- 
 ra Kal o~i8a<TKa\ias T>V dv Sp. Luke 1,6. 14, 
 23. 23, 49. Rev. 5, 12. So Plato Rep. 586. 
 e, rfj imtrrfipj) Kal Xoyo>. Legg. 784. e. /3) If 
 the nouns are of the same gender, but express 
 different and independent objects, the article 
 is repeated, as Mark 2, 16 oi ypap.fWTe is KOI 
 91 <bapt(raioL. V. 18 oi /zaSqrat TOU iwdwou 
 ical oi $apio-aToi. 12, 13. Luke 1,58. 11, 
 39. 12, 11. 23, 4. Acts 6, 4. Rev. 22, 1. al. . 
 saep. So with re ... Kal, Acts 17, 10. 14. al. 
 Also where the art. is necessary for dis 
 tinctness, as 1 Cor. 1, 28. See Winer { 18. 
 5. So Diod. Sic. 1. 30 dia TTJV dwftpiav 
 nal Trjv (nrdviv KT\. Xen. Cyr. 1.2. 2. Ath. 
 1. 4. y) But if the nouns be of the same 
 gender and stand in near relation to each 
 other, the article is more commonly not re 
 peated. E. g. when they are all parts of one 
 general idea, or of a whole ; Mark 15, 1 oi 
 dp^tepfls p-fTO. TUIV TrprftvT(pu>v Kal ypa/i- 
 paTfw, where the elders and scribes stand 
 as one division over against the priests. 
 Luke 14, 3. 21. Phil. 2, 17. Col. 2, 8. 19. 
 1 Tim. 4, 7. 1 Pet. 2, 25. al. (Plato Phaedo 
 78. b, TW p.(v (rvvTf ZfVTi re Kal auj/SeVa) ovri 
 KT\. Hdot. 1. 65 fin. Matth. } 268. n. 1.) 
 Or where a noun is added for nearer expla 
 nation, Col. 3, 17 ev%. TW 3fo> Kal Trarpt. 
 Eph. 1, 3. Phil. 4, 20. 2 Pet. 1, 11. 2, 20. 
 al. Or where with the first noun and its 
 article there is connected a genit. or other 
 adjunct which refers also to the second ; 
 Phil. 1, 25 (Is TTJV vp.5)V TTPOKOTTTJV Kal %apav 
 T. TT. 1 Thess. 2, 12. 3, 7. Eph. 3, 5. Acts 
 1, 25 TTJS diaKovias ravnjs Kal o 
 
 Winer 18. 4. (^El. H. An. 7. 29. Diod. 
 Sic. 1 . 86 fin.) Or where the nouns thus 
 connected are adjectives or other predicates 
 referring to one subject; Acts 3, 14 v/ms 
 TOV ciyiov Kal 8i<aiov rjpVTjcraa-^t. 2, 20. 
 Mark 9, 25. John 21, 24. Phil. 3, 3. 
 1 Thess. 2, 15. So with aXXa John 10, 1. 
 (^El. H. An. 2. 32. Diod. Sic. 3. 27.) Also 
 in proper names, when they all stand in like 
 relation, Acts 1, 13. 15, 23. 
 
 g) With the subject or predicate of a sen 
 tence ; here a common rule is, that the sub 
 ject takes the article and the predicate omits 
 it, Matth. 264. n. p. 546. Winer 17. 5. 
 But this is true only in so far as the former 
 is more frequently definite than the latter ; 
 and the case may be inverted ; or both may 
 be definite or indefinite ; so that strictly 
 speaking the subject and predicate as such 
 neither take nor reject the article, but are 
 governed in respect to it by the same prin 
 ciples as other nouns. E. g. a) The 
 subject takes the article, but not the predi 
 cate. John 1 , 1 3f 6s ?fv 6 Xoyor. 4, 24 irvev- 
 p.a 6 3for. 6, 63 ra pij/iara . . . irvevpA tcm 
 KOI far) eo-riv. Rom. 6, 21. 23. 1 John 3, 
 15. 4, 8 o Seor dydTTrj fcrriv. So Luke 1, 
 35. al. saepiss. /3) Both subject and pre 
 dicate have the article. E. g. Matt. 6, 22 
 6 Xv^i/o? ToC crco/Ltaro? ecrriv 6 o(p^!a\fj.6s. 
 John 1, 4 rj far] rjv TO (pus T>V dittp. 6, 63. 
 1 Cor. 15, 56. 2 Cor. 3, 17 6 8e Kvpios TO 
 7rvfvp.d ecrnv. Phil. 3, 19 u>v 6 3f6? 17 KOI- 
 Xi a. 1 John 2, 7. 3, 4 17 d/xapria e crrtf 17 
 dvopla. Rev. 18, 23. al. seep. So Matt. 13, 
 19-23, where the subject c. art. is repeated 
 by OVTOS. Comp. Matth. Winer 1. c. 
 y) The predicate has the article, where the 
 subject is without it. E. g. where the sub 
 ject is a proper name, 1 John 4, 15. 3, 1. 6 ; 
 or a pronoun, as e yo>, John 6, 51 e yw et/it 
 6 apros. Acts 7, 32 ; v/mr, 2 Cor. 3, 2 17 
 eVicrroXi) TJfitav vp.(?s tore. Matt. 5, 13. 14; 
 o&ro?, Matt. 3, 17 OVTOS f<mvo VMS fJ.ov KT\. 
 Mark 6, 3. John 1, 19 av-rr} Itrrlv 17 pap-rv- 
 pia KT\. Acts 4, 11. 1 Cor. 11, 24. 25. So 
 where the predicate is a participle with the 
 article, the subject being still a pronoun, 
 e. g. y<B flp.i 6 naprvpuv John 8, 18 ; ov 
 yap vp.f1s fcrre oi XoXovvrfs Matt. 10, 20 ; 
 OTO? Mark 4, 16. John 9, 8 ; fKflvos Mark 
 7, 15. So Luke 8, 21, where the subject 
 without the art. is repeated by OVTOS Once 
 the predicate has two nouns, one without 
 and the other with the article, John 8, 44 
 OTI ^fvcrrrjs ecrri, Kal 6 TraTrjp OVTOV SC. TOV 
 tyevdovs, see in avros 2. b. /3. 8) But some 
 times both subject and predicate are without 
 the article ; Matt. 20, 16 TroXXol ydp (l<ri 
 
TO 
 
 492 
 
 ), TO 
 
 *X7To/, oXi yot Se exXeKTOt. 22, 14. Winer 
 ( 17. 5 ult. Matth. 264. note. So JEl H. 
 An. 3. 23 curia TOVTUV <pvo~is dya^irj. Isocr. 
 ad Demon, p. 8. b, KoXoy Zqcravpos Trap 
 dvdpl tnrovSaiG) X<*P S d(pei\opevt). 
 
 h) With a noun in the nominative, where 
 it stands for the vocative, Winer { 29. Matth. 
 5312. Buttm. 545. 1. Matt. 27, 29 ^alpe, 
 6 fiaaiXevs T. I. Mark 9, 25. 10, 47 6 vibs 
 A. e\er]o~6v pe. Luke 8, 54 17 vrais, tyeipov. 
 12, 32. John 8, 10. Acts 13, 41. Rom. 8, 
 15. al. Plato Symp. 172. a. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 14. 4. 
 
 2. With nouns as accompanied by ad 
 juncts. Here the use of the article depends 
 on the definiteness of the noun, either in it 
 self, or as affected by the adjunct. The ad 
 junct may stand before the noun, i. e. be 
 tween it and the article, if it have one ; or 
 also after the noun, and then if the noun 
 have an article, this may be repeated before 
 the adjunct, or not, according to circum 
 stances. See Buttm. 125. Kiihner 245. 3. 
 a) With a Subst. as adjunct, either in 
 the genit. or in apposition. a) In the 
 genit. and here each noun, both the leading 
 and the governed, takes or omits the art. ac 
 cording to the general rules in no. 1 above. 
 E. g. between the art. and the noun, 1 Pet. 
 3, 20 ri TOV Seou /ua*po3v/iia. 2 Pet. 3, 20 ; 
 here the two articles stand side by side, 
 comp. Buttm. 125. 2. More freq. the gen. 
 is put last, as Matt. 3, 2 fj /Sao-tXe/a rcui> ov- 
 pavfov. 3, 1 (V 177 fprjp-q> Tijs lovS. V. 3 TTJV 
 68bv Kvpiov. 6, 22. saep. In such a con 
 struction the art. is sometimes for the sake 
 of emphasis repeated, as Matt. 26, 28 TO al- 
 pa won TO TTJS Kaivrjs 8ia%t)KT)s. Mark 14, 
 24. 1 Cor. 1, 18 6 Xoyoy 6 ToC crravpov. 
 Winer $ 19. 1. Buttm. 125. 3. Matth. 
 5 278. So Plat. Gorg. p. 481. e, 6 8ijfws 6 
 AZrjva iav. Where the leading noun is rea 
 dily understood from the connection, it is 
 very commonly omitted, and then its article 
 stands alone before the genitive of the ad 
 junct ; so espec. the words yvvf], P.IJTTJP, 
 TraTy, vlos, d8fX(oy, and the like ; comp. 
 Buttm. 125. 4,5. E. g.Matt. 1, 6 T tjs 
 TOV Ovpiov (yvvaiKos). 4, 21 TOV TOV Ze/3e- 
 ficu ov (vlov). In N. T. this occurs mostly 
 in apposition, see below. ]3) In apposi 
 tion, and here the leading noun takes or 
 omits the art. as in no. 1 ; while with the 
 adjunct the article is inserted or omitted, 
 according as the latter is or is not intended 
 to distinguish the leading noun from all 
 others of the like kind or name ; comp. 
 Matth. 274. Winer 5 19. 3. E. g. Rom. 
 8, 23 vlaRfffiav dTrfKo exop.fvoi, TTJV diroXv- 
 
 TOV crco/iciToy ?7/Acoi/. John 16, 13 
 orai/ 8 e XSiJ emi>o y, TO 7rvfv[j.a KT\. More 
 usually with pr. names, which then them 
 selves commonly omit the art. as Matt. 2, 1 . 
 3 HpwSqy 6 jSacnXevy. 3, 1 loodw/y 6 Ba- 
 TTTto-Tijy. 4,21 ladvvrjv TO vdftfXfpbv avTov. 
 21, 11 ITJO-OVS 6 irpo<pr]TT]s. 27, 2. Mark 10, 
 47. Acts 21, 8. 25, 13. Eph. 3, 1. al. sap. 
 (Hdot. 1. 107. Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 2.) Here 
 too the article often stands without its sub 
 stantive ; see above in a, fin. Matt. 10, 2 
 laKco/3oy 6 TOV Zefiedaiov (vios). V. 3. Mark 
 
 2, 14. 16, 1 Map/a 77 TOV *IaKco/3ou (JJ.T/TTJP), 
 comp. 15, 40; also Mapt a laxw/Sou Luke 
 24, 10, comp. Acts 1, 13. John 19, 25 M. 
 q TOV KXwra (yvvrj). Acts 13, 22. al. Comp. 
 Matth. 1. c. So Hdot. 7. 204. Xen. An. 3. 
 
 3. 20. But where the noun in apposit. is 
 not thus meant for definite distinction, it 
 omits the article ; as Luke 2, 36 *Avva irpo- 
 (pfjris, ZvyaTTjp &avovr]\. 3, 1 Ti/Sjjpt ou Kai- 
 a-apos, comp. Winer 19. 3. Acts 6, 5 bis. 
 7, 10 $apao> /3ao-tXews. Matt. 1-2, 24. Rom. 
 
 1. 1 IlaCXoff 8ov\os I. Xp. Jude 1. al. So 
 Luke 4, 31 Karrepvaov/j,, irohiv TTJS FoX. 23, 
 51. Matth. 1. c. So Hdot. 1. 1. Thuc. 1. 1. 
 Sometimes a pr. name is thus added in 
 apposition, espec. names of rivers, either 
 with or without the art. Rev. 16, 12 rl 
 TOV iroTap.bv TOV p.eyav TOV Eixppdrrjv, but 
 9, 14 eVt r<a TT. rw /icyoXw EiK^pdr?;. Or 
 the name is put between the art. and TTOTO- 
 p.6s, as Mark 1, 5 ei> TO> TopSa!/?; Trora/^y, 
 comp. Matth. 1. c. p. 559 ult. So Hdot. 1. 
 72 6 "AXus TroTo/ioy. Thuc. 6. 50. Xen. An. 
 
 2. 5. 1. 
 
 b) With an Adject, as adjunct. a) 
 Pr. as expressing an essential or intrinsic 
 quality of the noun, and forming with it one 
 idea. Here if the subst. have no art. the 
 adject, takes none, and is put either before or 
 after the noun, as Matt. 14, 14 ddev iro\vv 
 QX\OV. 26, 47 6 ^Xos TTO\VS. Luke 11,13 dya- 
 3a 86/j.aTa. Matt. 7, 11 So/zara ayaSa. But 
 if the norm have the article, the adjective 
 may stand between the noun and its article 
 (i. e. before the noun) ; or after the noun, 
 and then the article is repeated before the 
 adjective. Buttm. 5 125. 1, 3. Kiihner 245. 
 
 3. a. Matth. 5 277. a. Winer 5 19. 1. a. E. g. 
 Matt. 7, 13 8ia TTJS a-Tevfjs TTV\T]S. 12, 35 6 
 ayaSoy ai/Sp. 28, 19 TOV dyi ou TrvevmaTOs. 
 Mark 6, 39. Luke 1, 35. John 4, 23. saep. 
 More commonly after the noun ; Acts 1 2, 
 10 eVl TTJV TTV\T]V TTJV tri&tjpav. Luke 8, 8 
 (Trl TTJV yfjv TTJV dycftfjv. Mark 13, 11 TO 
 jrvev/j-a TO nyiov. Luke 21, 3 fj x*lP a *] ""r<a- 
 Xq. John 6, 13. 10, 11. James 1, 9. 3, 7. 
 saspiss. So where the noun has also a ge* 
 
TO 
 
 493 
 
 u, ;, TO 
 
 nit. as Matt. 1, 25 TOV viov avrrjs TOV Trpcoro- 
 TOKOV. 3, 17. 6, 6. Tit. 2, 11. /3) Where 
 the adject, is the predicate of a clause or 
 sentence, it naturally stands without the 
 article as being indefinite, comp. in no. 1 . g. 
 Its place is then usually before the subject ; 
 as Matt. 7, 1 3 TrAareTa rj nvXrj, KOI fvpv^at- 
 pos f) qfidy. Heb. 5, 11 -rrepl ov TroXuy fipiv 6 
 Xoyoy KT\. But also after the subject, as 
 Matt. 9, 37 6 p.tv 3epto-/x6y TroXuy, ol fie 
 tpyarai oXt yot. James 2, 26. Comp. Matth. 
 5 277. b. y) Where an adject, connected 
 with a noun having the article, expresses, 
 not ar^ intrinsic quality belonging to the 
 noun, but a circumstance or condition pre 
 dicated of it, the adject, then stands without 
 the art. either after the noun, or before the 
 noun and its article, and constitutes a spe 
 cies of indirect predicate ; see Buttm. j 125. 
 n. 4. Kiihner $ 245. 3. b. Matth. 277. b. 
 E. g. John 5, 36 eyw fie e^o) TTJV p.apruptav 
 fjiti^o) TOU icoawou. So where an adj. has 
 an adverbial sense, Luke 23, 45 eV^io-Sty TO 
 KaTcnrtTao-pa roC vaov futrw. (Luc. D. 
 Deor. 8. 1 c^o> TOV TreXeKuy o^vraTov.) 
 Also the adjectives of quantity oXor and 
 Tray, e. g. Matt. 4, 23 o\ijv TIJV TaXtXaiav. 
 Luke 4. 14. 5, 5 fit oXrjy TT)J VVK.TOS. Rom. 
 
 8, 36 ; also Matt. 16, 26 TOV KOO-/J.OV o\ov. 
 Mark 1 , 33 ; TroXty S\rj. John 4, 53. Winer 
 {19. 1, marg. (Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 24 SXais 
 Tals T. 2. 4. 26 5\r)v Trjv vvKTa. 2. 1. 30 TI}V 
 IT. O\T)V KT\.) So Tray, Matt. 6, 29 tv Trdcn; 
 TJ7 So^v- Acts 1,.18. James 1, 8 ; also Matt. 
 
 9, 35 ray TroXeiy Tratray. Luke 12, 7. Rev. 
 13, 12. Adj. array follows the same rule, 
 Matt. 28, 11. Luke 3, 21. Mark 16, 15. 
 Luke 19, 48. See Buttm. { 127. 9. Kiihner 
 5 246. 5. Matth. 5 277. p. 564. { 265. 2. Wi 
 ner 17. 10. (Xen. Hell. 3. 4. 12, 16.) 
 Less frequently Troy stands between the art. 
 and subst. and is then emphatic, Acts 20, 
 18 TOV Trdvra xP vov - Gal. 5, 14. 1 Tim. 1, 
 16. Buttm. Matth. 1. c. To the above rule 
 belong apparently the following : 1 John 5, 
 20 Rec. j] 0)17 ata>j/toy. Luke 12, 12 Rec. TO 
 irvevfia ayiov. 1 Cor. 10, 3 TO ^peS/^a irvtv- 
 fMTiKov. Gal. 1, 4 ToC alutvos novrjpov. But 
 in all these the adj. expresses an intrinsic 
 quality ; and the construction is rather to 
 be referred to the later Greek usage, which 
 began in such cases to omit the article ; 
 comp. Winer J 19. 1. a. 8) Numerals 
 follow the general rule, e. g. as in a above ; 
 cardinals, Matt. 10, 1 rovy Sa>eKa aTroord- 
 Xovy. 20, 21 oi 8vo vioi fiov. Mark 6, 41 ; 
 ordinals, Matt. 20, 6 -rr]v tvBfKaTrjv utpav. 
 Mark 14. 12. Luke 1, 59; also Mark 15, 
 34 rj} u>pa ri} fwd-rr}. John 2, 1. Heb. 4, 4. 
 
 Also as in y ; Lake 2, 2 avnj 17 oT 
 TTpuirrj fytvfTo KT\. i. e. took place first, as 
 the first, under Cyrenius; see Mever Comm. 
 in loc. 
 
 c) With a Pran. as adjunct, e. g. a) 
 Personal pronouns in the genit. used in 
 stead of possessives, follow the same gen 
 eral rule as the gen. of nouns, see above in 
 lett. a. a. Buttm. { 127. 7. E. g. Matt. 5, 
 30 T) fiesta crou x f>i P- R m - 6, 12 eV rw SIT;- 
 T<a vfj.a>v trco/iart. Oftener after the noun, 
 Matt. 3, 17 6 vidy fj.ov 6 dyaTrr/roy. Acts 2, 
 39 6 Seoy TJ[JLWV. /3) Possessive pronouns 
 follow the rule of adjectives, see above in 
 lett. b. a. Matt. 18, 20 ei y TO e /xoi/ ovofjia. 
 John 4, 42. Rom. 15, 4 ; and so where the 
 subst. is implied, as Luke 5, 33 ot fie o-oi sc. 
 /xaStyTa/. 22, 42. 1 John 2, 2 ; also c. art. 
 after the noun, John 5, 30 17 Kpio-is fj e /iij. 
 6, 38. 10, 27. 14, 27. 1 John 1, 3. Here 
 the art. is essential to definiteness, Buttm. 
 ^ 124. n. 4. y) Demonstrative pronouns 
 are either put between the art. and noun ; 
 as 2 Cor. 12, 3 TOV TOIOVTOV uv^patrrov. 
 Mark 9, 37 ; or more commonly either be 
 fore the article and noun or after the noun, 
 as avTciy, ouToy, e lceTpoy, which being definite 
 usually require the article along with the 
 noun which they qualify. Matt. 3, 4 OVTOS 
 fie 6 l<t>dvvT)s. John 5, 36 aura TO. fpya, 
 Acts 1 6, 18 ai/Trj TTJ a>pa. John 16, 27. 1 Cor 
 15, 28; also Gal. 6, 13 ot TrfpiTe/j.v6fj.fvoi 
 avrot. So Matt. 20, 21 OVTOI ol 8vo vioi 
 (MOV. Luke 7, 44. 9, 48. John 6, 51. 58; 
 also Matt. 3, 9 TWV \fawv TOVTM. 26, 8. 
 31. John 2, 19. 20. So Matt. 27. 63 eVceli/oy 
 6 TrXoVoy. 18, 1 fKelvy TJJ u>pa. 24, 19 ; also 
 Matt. 7, 25 TTJ olicia fKtivrj. Mark 3, 24. 25. 
 sap. See Buttm. { 127. 9. Kuhner J 246. 
 3. Matth. I 265. 1. Winer 5 17. 9. But 
 genit. avTov instead of a possessive pron. 
 stands like the genitives in o above, and in 
 lett. a. a ; except that it is put before both 
 the noun and article, as Matt. 2, 2 ei 8o/* 
 CIVTOV TOV do-Tfpa, comp. Buttm. { 127. 7. 
 For 6 auToy see below in C, and in art 
 aL>Toy. 
 
 d) With a Particip. as adjunct, where 
 the construction is nearly the same as with 
 adjectives. The particip. sometimes stands 
 between the noun and article ; e. g. Matt. 
 2, 2 6 Te^Sety /3acriAeuy. v. 7. 3, 7 TJ)y //eX- 
 Xovcnjy opyfjs. 4, 18. al. More commonly 
 it stands after the noun ; and then if the 
 noun be definite, the participle also takes the 
 article, when a definite, well-known, or spe 
 cial relation is to be expressed ; Winer $ 19. 
 1. c. Matth. ^ 275. Matt. 7, 13 fj 6S6y 17 aTra- 
 yovcra. SW) 12. 26, 28 TO alp.d p.ov . , . ro 
 
o, 77, TO 494 
 
 ntp*, 7ro\\cov fK^vvofitvov. Luke 22, 19. 
 Acts 9, 7 of 8e avftpes of o~uvo8fvovTfs avrw. 
 Rom. 1, 3. 2 Tim. 3, 15. 1 Pet. 1, 21 els 
 SfoV, TOV tyeipavra. 3, 5. 5, 10. saep. (Luc. 
 D. Mort. 11. 1. Pol. 3. 48. 6.) Elsewhere 
 the article is not repeated, and thus there 
 arises the participial construction, in which 
 the participle merely expresses a predicate 
 like a finite verb ; Buttm. } 125. n. 3. $ 144. 
 Winer 1. c. John 4, 6 6 ovv lyo-ovs, Kenoin- 
 UKUS KT\. V. 39. Acts 3, 26. 23, 27 TOV av- 
 8pa TOVTOV o-vXXr/^SSej/Ta VTTO TU>V I. 26, 4. 
 Rom. 2, 27. 16, 1. 1 Pet. 3,5. saep. Luc. 
 D. Mort. 10. 9. Diod. Sic. 5. 34. 
 
 e) With a Preposit. and its case as ad 
 junct, i. e. as periphrase for an adject, or the 
 like. Here if the leading noun be indefinite 
 the adjunct in general is so likewise, and is 
 put after the noun ; as 1 Tim. 4, 3 els pe- 
 
 pera fv^apicrrias. 1, 5 dyanrj tn 
 KapSias. Rom. 14, 17. Winer j 19. 
 4. So Plato Rep. 378. d. But if the lead 
 ing noun have the article, or be in itself 
 definite, then the adjunct sometimes stands 
 between it and the article, but more com 
 monly after it, with the article repeated or 
 not according to circumstances. E. g. Matt. 
 15, 1 ot dno if poo~. ypa/j.p.a.Tf is- Rom. 9, 11 
 T) KaT eK\oyr)V TrpoSccris TOV Sfov. 11, 27 77 
 irap fnov SicftrjKT]. Luke 1, 70. Acts 27, 2. 
 After the noun, with art. repeated, Matt. 
 
 6, 6 Tea TTdTpi (TOV TO) fV T<S KpUTTTO). 7, 3. 
 
 Mark 4, 31. John 12, 21. Acts 4, 2. 27, 5. 
 2 Cor. 8, 4. 1 Thess. 1, 8. saep. Winer 19. 
 
 1 . b. So for the sake of definiteness or dis 
 tinction, where the leading noun has not the 
 article ; as Acts 26, 18 Tn crrei TJJ els (p.f. 
 2 Tim. 1,13 ei> Tr/orei KOI dydrrt] Trj eV X. I. 
 Tit. 3, 5. Winer 19. 4. But -vice rersa 
 the adjunct sometimes omits the article 
 when it stands before the leading noun ; as 
 Rom. 9, 3 T>V (ruyyevoiv p.ov Kara o-dpKa. 
 2 Cor. 7, 7 TOV vp,S)V fj\ov virep e p,ov. Eph. 
 
 2, 11 TO. e%vr) eV 0-ap/a. 1 Cor. 10, 18 TOV 
 lo-paijX Kara crapKa. So Col. 1. 4 TTJV TT I- 
 (TTIV vpcav ev Xpiorw I. Eph. 1, 15. See 
 Winer 5 19. 2, espec. par. 2. So Pol. 5. 
 64. 6. Xen. An. 1. 4. 4 TO p.ev fo-co^ev [reT^oj] 
 Trpo Trjs KiXi /ctas, opp. TO 8e eco TO Trpo TTJS 
 Svpt a?. 
 
 f) With an Adverb as adjunct, i. e. as 
 placed between the art. and noun, and thus 
 forming a periphrase for an adjective. 
 Buttm. 125. 6. Acts 13, 42 TO /ifrav 
 rajS/SaToi/. Rom. 7, 22 KOTCI TOV eo-a> ai Spw- 
 TTOI/. 2 Pet. 1, 9. See also in avo>, KOTO!), 
 etc. 
 
 NOTE. In cases like many of the pre 
 ceding, where the article is repeated with 
 
 6, ?;, TO 
 
 the adjunct after the noun, there is some 
 times ascribed to it the nature and name of 
 a relative pronoun, especially before parti 
 ciples, comp. in lett. d; on the ground 
 that in English and other languages it is 
 usually rendered by a relative. But this is 
 to confound the idioms of different langua 
 ges. In a still greater number of like cases 
 the article is not used at all ; and in no case 
 can the Greek relative be substituted for it, 
 without also changing the adjunct into a 
 finite verb. This remark has no bearing 
 upon the use of the article instead of the 
 relative in the epic language ; see Kiihner 
 247. 4. 
 
 B) With Adjectives. 1. As connected 
 with nouns, see above in A. 2. b. 
 
 2. Used as nouns, and then the article is 
 employed or not, precisely as with nouns, 
 a) Genr. as 6 dyaSo j tlie good man, generic, 
 Rom. 5, 7 ; ot TV(p\oi Matt. 9, 28 ; ot <ro- 
 
 001, ot vvvfToi, 1 Cor. 1 , 19. 27 ; ot Te Aeioi 
 
 2, 6. al. John 8, 7 6 dvafjidpTrjTos vp.>v, defi 
 nite. So 2 Cor. 8, 15 o TO TroXw . . . /cat 6 
 TO oXiyoV sc. o-uXXe as, quoted from Sept. 
 Ex. 16, 18, with allusion to v. 17. Comp. 
 Buttm. j 123. 5. Matth. $ 269. (Luc. D. 
 Deor. 16. 1 of dvorjToi. Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 5 
 ot o-o<poi. An. 7. 7. 36 TO iroXv.) In some 
 adjectives, a difference of signification is 
 thus produced, as dXXo? other, 6 aXXos the 
 other, see in aXXoj ; also eTepos, TrXeiuv, TTO- 
 Xvf, Trds, etc. b) Neut. adjectives with 
 the art. are often put as abstract nouns ; 
 e. g. Shii^. Rom. 1, 19 TO yvao-Tov TOV 
 SeoO. 2, 4 TO xPW^ov T. 3. 8, 3. 1 Cor. I, 
 25. 2 Cor. 4, 17. 8, 8. Heb. 6, 17. 7, 18. al. 
 saep. Matth. 269. Buttm. 128. 2. Winer 
 5 34. 1. Sing, as collect. Heb. 7, 7 TO eXaT- 
 TOV, TO Kpe iTTov, the less, the greater, Matth. 
 5445. 5. Plur. c. gen. as TO Kpvn-Ta TO>V 
 dvSp. v. TTJS KapSias Rom. 2, 16. 1 Cor. 14, 
 25. 4, 5. 2 Cor. 4, 5 ; TO. dopaTa avTov Rom. 
 
 1, 20. So Luke 18, 27 TO ddi/voTa Trapa 
 dv%p<07rois. Trop. for persons 1 Cor. 1, 
 27. 28. So Neut. accus. as adverb, TOV- 
 vavTiov for TO tvavriov, 2 Cor. 2. 7. Gal. 
 
 2, 7. 1 Pet. 3, 9. See Buttm. 5 131. n. 14 ; 
 comp. 5 115. 4. Matth. 5 446. 7. c) Nu 
 merals used as nouns follow the same rule, 
 e. g. Card, ot 8a Matt. 20. 24 ; of SwSe/co 
 Luke 8. 1. Ord. of TrpwTot Matt. 20, 10 ; o 
 SevTepos KCU 6 Tp iTos 22, 26. Also Neut. 
 as adv. with or without the art. Matth. 
 446. 7; e. g. TO TTP&TOV John 10, 40. 
 
 12, 16. 19, 39; more comm. Trpa>Tov Matt. 
 6, 23. 1 Cor. 12, 28; TO bevTepov 2 Cor. 
 
 13, 2. Jude 5; dtvTepov John 3, 4. 4, 54. 
 1 Cor. 12, 18; TO rpirov Mark 14, 41. 
 
0, 7/, TO 
 
 495 
 
 O, 77. TO 
 
 John 21, 17 bis ; rpirov Luke 20, 12. 1 Cor. 
 12, 28. al. So Xen. (Ec. 2. 13 TO irpu>Tov. 
 Cyr. 2. 2. 2 TO Sfi/r. CEc. 4. 15 
 
 C.V With Pronouns. a) Pron. posses- 
 sire, as connected with nouns, see above in 
 A. 2. c. When put for nouns, these take or 
 omit the article like nouns ; e. g. TO tpov 
 lit. ike mine, what is mine, Matt. 25, 27 ; TO: 
 fftd id. 20, 15. Luke 15, 31. John 17, 10 ; 
 comp. Buttm. 5 128. 1. So TO <roV Matt. 
 20, 14. Luke 6, 30 ; of o-ot thy family Mark 
 5, 19; of TjfjifTcpoi, our fellow Christians, 
 Tit. 3, 14. b) With demonstratives, e. g. 
 OTOIOVTOS, either as a generic idea, every 
 or all such, as a class, Matt 19, 14. Acts 
 22, 22 atpc drro rrjs yrjs TOV TOIOVTOV. Rom. 
 16, 18 ot ToioOrot. 1 Cor. 5, 11. 2 Cor. 10, 
 116 ToioOroy. Acts 19, 25 TGI ToiavTa. Rom. 
 1, 32 ; or as a definite person already men 
 tioned, 2 Cor. 12, 2. 3. 5. Comp. Buttm. 
 
 5 124. n. 2. Matth. 5 265. 7. Winer $ 17. 11 
 ult. With atro y the art. affects the signifi 
 cation, 6 avTos the same, see in avToy no. 
 
 3. For nouns with OVTOS, (Kelvos, see 
 above in A. 2. c. y. 
 
 D) With Participles. 1. As connected 
 with nouns, and serving as an adjective or 
 predicate ; see above in A. 2. d. 
 
 2. Absol. in the place of nouns, and then 
 the use of the article corresponds to the 
 usage with nouns; Matth. 270, 271. 570. 
 p. 1126. Winer $ 17. 3. a) Genr. Matt. 
 
 4, 3 6 Tmpdfcoi , the tempter. 13, 3 6 <nrv4pM*, 
 generic. Mark 5, 14 ot 8e ftoa-Kovres av- 
 TOVS, the herdsmen. Luke 7, 14. Rom. 4, 4. 
 Rev 15, 2. Matth. 271. So Neut. as 
 abstr. TO yfyfvvrjij.fvov /c T. trapKos John 3, 
 
 6 ; c. gen. Phil. 3, 8. Buttm. $ 128. 1. b) 
 Where the idea of verbal action still re 
 mains in the participle, corresponding in 
 Engl. to he who, those who, or the like. 
 Here the participle in itself is indefinite and 
 general, but the action which it expresses 
 is thus made definite and becomes limited 
 to certain specified individuals or a class, 
 which themselves thus become definite and 
 specific. Matth. $ 268 init Winer 17. 3. 
 E. g. 01 Se ecr^iovTfs lit. those eating, those 
 who ate, not the eaters, Matt. 14, 21. 15, 
 38. So Mark 4, 9 6 e^coj/ O>TO. duovfiv, 
 aKov(T(a. 10, 42. John 5, 29 bis. V. 32 aAAoy 
 ... 6 /iapTvpaJj/ irtpl tpe. Acts 2, 47. Rom. 
 10, 5. 14, 3. 16, 17. 1 Cor. 9, 13 ot TO. it pa 
 epyao>ei>oi. 2 Cor. 10, 17. 11, 4. Gal. 1, 
 23. al. saep. (Soph. Electr. 194 or 200. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 6.) As followed by OVTOS 
 emphat. Matt 26, 23. Mark 12, 40. Luke 
 8, 14. John 6, 46. al. As limiting a more 
 
 general word, e. g. Tray 6 amov, Tray 6 
 Luke 11, 10; rrpoy Ttwzy TOVS Tre 
 e<p eavToIy Luke 18, 9. Gal. 1,7. In ap- 
 posit. with a personal pron. impl. Matt. 7, 
 23. Rom. 2, 1. Comp. Matth. $ 276. p. 561. 
 For the occasional omission of the article 
 in such - cases in the classics, see Matth. 
 5271. n. c) With Neut. accus. as adv. 
 e. g. TO vvv ex ov > f or the P resen{ i Acts 24, 
 25 ; see in e^ca no. 5. 
 
 E) Before Prepositions with their cases, 
 which then form a periphrase for a subst. 
 or adjective ; comp. Matth. 272. b. Buttm. 
 5 125. 5. Winer 55. a) Genr. of pers. 
 as of oVo TTJS iraXias, those from Italy, 
 Heb. 13, 24. Phil. 4, 22 of rfs /caiVapoy 
 oiKias. Rom. 4, 14 of v6fj.ov, they of the 
 law. 2, 8 of e epi3eay the contentious. 
 Mark 3, 21 of trap alrov. Spec, before 
 TTcpi C. ace. of pers. e. g. of irtpl TOV Tlav- 
 \ov, i. e. Paul and his companions, Acts 
 13, 13; comp. Buttm. \ 150. m. 25. Kiih- 
 ner 5 263. d. Matth. $ 583. c. 1. (Pol. 5. 1. 
 7. Xen. An. 7. 4. 16.) Or, af irtpl Mdp3ai 
 Kal Mapi av, i. e. simply Martha and Mary, 
 John 11,19. Buttm. 1. c. Matth. 1. c. no. 2. 
 (Hdian. 7. 9. 1. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 10.) Or 
 also, of Trfpi avrov, those around him, his 
 companions only, Mark 4, 10. Luke 22, 49 ; 
 comp. Matth. 1. c. no. 3. So Xen. Hell. 7, 
 5. 12. b) Neut. TO, rd, see Matth. 283, 
 E. g. Ta ev TIVI, as Eph. 1, 10 TO. lv rols 
 ovpavols Kal TO. eVi Tr/y yijy, the things celes 
 tial and terrestrial. Luke 25, 33 ra eV 6a>, 
 the events in the way. Also TO e* TWOS, 
 as Rom. 12, 18 TO e up-aii/, as far as de 
 pends on you. 1 Cor. 13, 10 TO C K /i/povy, 
 comp. v. 9; TO v. Ta eiri Rom. 16, 19. 
 Eph. 1, 10; TO <aTa adverbially. Rom. 9, 
 5. Luke 11,3. Acts 4, 18. (Matth. } 283. 
 Buttm. 5 125. n. 8.) TO; irtpi TWOS, the 
 things concerning any one, Luke 24, 19. 
 Acts 23, 15. Phil. 1, 27; Ta rrepi tp.e, my 
 affairs, my state, Phil. 2, 23 ; Ta irtpl TOV 
 TOTtov, the environs, Acts 28, 7 ; comp. 
 Matth. 5 583. n. p. 1161. (Diod. Sic. 1. 50. 
 Isocr. ad Phil. p. 92. e.) TO. rrpoy Tiva, 
 as Heb. 2, 17 et 5, 1 Ta Trpoy T<>V 3foi> di 
 vine things. Luke 14, 28. 32. 19, 42; TO 
 vnep TIVOS Phil. 1, 29. 4, 10. 
 
 F) Before Adverbs, which then usually 
 stand in place of a noun or adjective. Buttm. 
 5 125. 6, 7. E. g. a) As Subst. Phil. 3, 
 14 Ta oTTi o-a) eViXai Sai o/ifi oy. Matt. 11, 23 
 /le xpt TJjy (rftfjifpov. Mark 5, 1 tls TO irtpav. 
 15, 1 eVl TO TrpoK. Luke 10, 35 rt TTJV av- 
 piov. John 1, 29. Rom. 8, 22. Eph. 2, 17. 
 Col. 3, 1. 2. 1 Tim. 4, 8. al. /3) With 
 the adverbial sense retained, as TO vvv 01 
 
O, 77, TO 
 
 496 
 
 TO 
 
 ravvv, now, at present, Acts 4, 29. al. Buttm. 
 \ 125. n. 5. See in vvv no. 1. a. 
 
 G) ,The NEUTER of the article, TO, ra, 
 is prefixed : 
 
 1. Absol, to the Genitive of a noun, and 
 thus expresses the abstract idea of some 
 thing having relation or reference to that 
 noun, as pertaining to it or derived from it, 
 as done by or to it, and the like ; Buttm. 
 128. n. 2. Matth. $ 284. E. g. Sing. TO, 
 Matt. 21, 21 TO rr)s O-VKTJS the thing of the 
 Jig tree, done to it. 1 Cor. 10, 24 TO eavTov, 
 TO TOV fTepov. James 4, 14. 2 Pet. 2, 22. 
 (Plato Parmen. 136. e. Xen. (Ec. 16. 7.) 
 More freq. Plur. rd, Matt. 22, 21 oVo SoTe 
 Ta Kaiaapos, Kaio-api Kal TO. TOV Seoi), TW 
 Sew. 16, 23. Luke 2, 49. Rom. 8, 5. 14, 
 19 TO Ttjs flpr]vr)s ,8itoK(op.fi>. 1 Cor. 2, 11. 
 13, 11. -Phil. 2, 4 TO eaurcoi/, ru 
 So 2 Cor. 11, 30 TO TTJJ daSei/eiay 
 icav^o-opai, things pertaining to my infirm 
 ity ; or perhaps as a periphrase for my in 
 firmity, comp. Buttm. 128. n. 5. Matth. 
 } 285. So Hdian. 3. 2. 10. Plato Phaedo 
 $ 44. p. 95. a. Thuc. 8. 31 Ta ASjjwuaj/ 
 
 2. Sing. TO is prefixed to single words 
 and to whole clauses when they are to be 
 taken as independent, or as themselves con 
 stituting an object, Buttm. \ 125. 8. 2. 
 Kiihner 244. 11. Matth. $ 280. E. g. 
 with single words, Gal. 4, 25 TO yap "Ayap, 
 i. e. the name Agar, as here used. 2 Cor. 
 1, 17 TO val val, Kal TO ov ov. James 5, 12. 
 (Dem. 255. 4. Plato Gorg. 496. d, TO 
 ditfscovTa.) So with a phrase or clause, 
 Luke 22, 2 (^TOVV . . . TO TTUIS avt\a>o~iv av- 
 TQV. Mark 9, 23. Luke 1,62. 9,46. 19,48. 
 22, 24. 37. Acts 4, 21. 22, 30. Rom. 8, 26 
 al. So Jos. Ant. 10. 10. 4. Plato Phjedo 
 8 init. p. 62. b. Rep. p. 327. c. 
 
 3. Sing. TO is prefixed to the Infinitive 
 when taken as a noun, which is then em 
 ployed in all the constructions that occur 
 with real substantives ; Buttm. 125. 8. 1. 
 
 1 140. 5. Kiihner j 308. Matth. j 540. Wi 
 ner J 45. 4, comp. 1 . a, and 2. c. Thus 
 
 a) As Nominative with TO , Phil. 1, 21 e/iol 
 yap TO {TJV, Xpio-TO? KOI TO ajro Savflv, Ktpdos. 
 v. 29. 1 Cor. 7, 26. 2 Cor. 8, 11 TO eViTe- 
 XeVai. Gal. 4, 18. seep. Matth. 1. c. p. 1060. 
 
 b) As Genitive with TOV, and this is 
 the most frequent construction : a) As 
 depending on nouns and verbs which else 
 where govern the genitive, e. g. on a 
 noun, Acts 20, 3 tyevfTO yvutv-t] TOV VTTO- 
 o-Tpt(pfiv KT\. Rom. 15, 23 eVi7ro3i ai> Se 
 c^coi/ ToC e X3eTi> irpos vpas- 1 Cor. 9, 6. 10. 
 
 2 Cor. 8, 1 1 ij TrpoSvpia TOV 3e Xj>. Heb. 
 
 5, 12. 1 Pet. 4, 17. al. saep. So in a laxer 
 use of the genit. Luke 1, 57. 2, 21 ^epai 
 OKTW ToC 7repiTe/mv OVTOV. Rom. 11, 8. 
 Phil. 3, 21. On an adj. as aios 1 Cor. 16, 
 4 ; fipaovs Luke 24, 25 ; tToipos Acts 23, 
 15; also Luke 17, 1. On a verb, Luke 1, 
 9 eXa^e TOU 3v/do-ai. So after verbs of 
 restraining, hindering, Luke 4, 42. 24, 16 
 ol de o<p3. avTcav lupaTovvTo TOV /z>) (Triyvur- 
 vai avTov. Acts 10, 47. 14, 18 p.o Xiy KaTt- 
 Travcrav TOVS 6 ^Xovs TOU p,r/ ^veiv avTo is. 
 20, 27. Rom. 15, 22. 1 Pet. 3, 10. al. Wi 
 ner 5 45. 4. /3) As referring to a whole 
 sentence and expressing purpose, where 
 the old grammarians unnecessarily supply 
 ei>Ka, x a P LV i or the like, Buttm. 140. n. 10. 
 Matth. ^ 540. n. 1. Winer 45. 4. b. Here 
 it nearly accords with the Engl. infin. pro- 
 ceded by to, i. q. in order to, that ; and so 
 TOV pt], in order not to, that not, lest. Matt. 
 2, 13 /^.e XXei yap H. rjTe1v TO TraiS/of, TOV 
 a7roXeo-ai a^TO. 3, 13. 13, 3 e l^XSev 6 O7m - 
 pcov TOV (nrfipfiv. Luke 1, 73 comp. \. 68. 
 Luke 1, 79 comp. v. 78. 5, 1. 7. Heb. 10, 
 7. al. saep. So negat. Acts 21, 12 7rapa- 
 \ovp.fv . . . TOV /J.f] avaftaiveiv KT\. Rom. 6, 6. 
 James 5, 17. al. saep. Here it sometimes 
 alternates with the simple infin. as Luke 
 1, 77 comp. v. 76. 2, 24 comp. v. 22. Once 
 with eveKa expressed in a sequence of 
 clauses, 2 Cor. 7, 12. (Thuc. 1. 45.) In 
 this sense also after verbs of deciding, com 
 manding, and the like, which of course im 
 ply purpose ; Acts 27, 1 &>y 8e fnpi^rj TOV 
 oVoTrXeu/ xrX. 1 Cor. 7, 37. Luke 9, 51, 
 4, 10 Tols dyycXotf auToD ej/TeXarat Trept 
 trot), TOV 8ia<puXaai o~f. Acts 15. 20. Wi 
 ner 45. 4. p. 378. This Infin. with TOV 
 occurs on every page of the Sept. where it 
 very generally stands for the Heb. Infin. c. 
 ^ . Hence it is sometimes held to be He 
 braism ; but although prob. more frequent 
 in N. T. from a Heb. influence, yet it is 
 also not uncommon in Greek writers ; e. g. 
 Strabo 15. p. 717. Arr. Alex. 2. 21. Thuc. 
 1. 23 Tas aiTias typa^ra . . . TOV prj Tivas &)- 
 Ttjo-ai TroTf KT\. ib. 2. 22. Plato Gorg. 457. 
 e, TOU KaTafpavts yei/eVSat. Xen. Cyr. 1 . 6. 
 40 TOV 8f jJ.r]b fVTfvSfv Siatpevyfiv, CTKOTTOVS 
 TOV yiyvopevov KaSion;?, KTX. \\ iner 1. c. 
 Buttm. 140. n. 10, 11. Kiihner 308.2.b. 
 y) In a laxer sense expressing more the 
 notion of result, (like the later use of Iva, 
 comp. Iva no. II, III.) and put by way of 
 explanation, or epexegetically, where the 
 simple infin. or <uo-Te c. infin. might stand ; 
 see Winer 45. p. 379 sq. Here it also 
 accords with the Engl. infin. after so as to, 
 so that; see above in 0, ult. Acts 7, 19 
 
497 
 
 086? 
 
 OUTOS (KUKCtXTf TOUS TTClTfpaS rjp.ti>V, TOV TTOl- 
 
 f"iv 3eTa ra /3pe<p;; *rX. Once after 
 Acts 3, 12 rjp.lv T L aTtvifTf, u>s . . . 
 td<rt TOV TTfpnraTf tv CIVTOV , comp. in iva 
 HI. 1. d. So Rom. 1, 24 Trapefiowcei/ avrovs 
 6 Seoj. . . fls aAcaSapa/ai , TOU art/id^eo-Sai TO 
 0-aywTa ACT\. 7, 3. 1 Cor. 10, 13. Here too 
 prob. oelongs the difficult construction in 
 Rev. 12, 7, fyevtTO TrdXf/ios eV ra> ovpav<a 
 6 Mt^aijX KO.I ol ayyeXoi avroO TOV Tro\fp.f)- 
 o~ai pera TOV 8paKovTos, where after 6 
 and ol ayyeXot \ve may snpply tyevovro, ac 
 cording to the frequent Heb. construction 
 of the Inf. c. i , and the clause is equivalent 
 to wore Tro\fp.r)crai TOV M. Kal Tour yy. 
 ^tTa /rX. see Gesen. Lehrgeb. } 211. Wi 
 ner \ 45. p. 380. Text. Rec. has tno\i^- 
 trav. 8) After a preposition, as O.VTI 
 James 4, 15 ; CK 2 Cor. 8, 11 ; Trpo Matt. 
 6, 8. James 17, 5. So JE\. V. H. 2. 34. 
 
 c) As Dative with rw, as implying cause 
 2 Cor. 2, 12 ; purpose 1 Thess. 3, 3 ; after 
 tv, see fv no. 2. a, fin. Matth. 541. Winer 
 } 45. 5. 
 
 d) As Accusative with TO , as depending 
 on a verb, Luke 7, 21 TvcpXoZs TroXXots e ^a- 
 pi craro TO jSXeVfii . 1 Cor. 14, 39. 2 Cor. 8, 
 11 TO TTOirjo-at (7TiTf\fcraTf. Rom. 14, 13. 
 As governed by 8ta, etr, irpos, see in Sid 
 II. 1. b ; fly no. 3. a, c, d ; Trpo r III. 3. d. + 
 
 OjBoT]KOVra, ol, at, TU, (OKTOJ.) eJ/<ty, 
 Luke 2, 37. 16, 7. Xen. An. 4. 8. 15. 
 
 oySoo?, r], ov, ordin. (OK,) the eighth, 
 Luke 1, 59. Acts?, 8. Rev. 17, 11. 21, 20. 
 (Xen. An. 4. 6. 1.) In 2 Pet. 2 ; 5 07800,, 
 Naif . . . (vXae, Noah the eighth person, 
 as the eighth, Noah and seven others ; 
 co mp. 1 Pet. 3, 20; see Winer { 38. 2. 
 Matth. I 469. 9. Comp. Plato Legg. 695. c, 
 (AapeTof) X3wi/ (Is TTJV ap^rjV Kal \aj3cov 
 avTrjv ffiftop-os, SteiXeTo KTX. Dem. 261. 3. 
 The Greeks usually add OVTOS , Time. 1 . 46. 
 Xen. Hell. 2. 2. 17. 
 
 by/cos, ov, 6, pr. bulk, mass, weight, 
 JEl.V. H. 14. 7. Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 32 ; a tu 
 mor, swelling, Diod. Sic. 2. 36 In N. T. 
 weight, burden, impediment, Heb. 12, 1 
 oyKov iravra ci7ro3/iej>oi. So Xen. Ven. 
 8.8. 
 
 oSe, r/8e, roSe, demonstr. pron. from 
 6, 17, TO, as pron. and enclit. 8f, Buttm. \ 76. 
 1 ; this, that; hie, h&c, hoc; genr. equiva 
 lent to OVTOS, but in some cases stronger ; 
 Buttm. ^ 127. 1. b. Matth. 5 470. 1. 
 
 1. As referring to the person or thing 
 last before mentioned. Luke 10, 39 TJySe 
 qv ddeX^rj. 16, 25. 2 Cor. 12, 19 G b. 
 Como. Matth. 1. c. Xen. Apol. 29. 
 32 
 
 2. As introducing what follows, this, 
 those, the following. Acts 15, 23 ypd-^avrrs 
 . . . Ta8e ol d-rr. KT\. 21, 11. Rev. 2, 1. 8. 
 12. 18. 3, 1. 7. 14. Comp. Matth. 1. c. 
 
 3. Spec. 8fiKTiKa>s, instead of an adv. of 
 place, i. q. here, there ; see Matth. j 471 . 12. 
 Buttm. $ 127. 1. James 4, 13 7ropeuo-&>/ie3a 
 tls Trjv8f Trjv irokiv, i. e. into this city here. 
 Plut. Symp. 1. 6. 1 T^i/Se TJJI> r]p.(pav. 
 
 ooevci), f. evo-w, (oSo r,) to be on the way, 
 to journey, to travel, absol. Luke 10, 33. 
 Sept. for T^n 1 K. 6, 12. Hdian. 7. 3. 9. 
 Plut. Timol. 12. 
 
 , w, f. TJO-W, (oSVyoy,) to lead the 
 way, Plut. Conjug. Praec. 6. In N. T. to 
 lead, to guide, c. ace. Matt. 15, 14 Tv<p\6s 
 Se Tv(p\6v lav 68r)yTJ. Luke 6, 39. Rev. 7 ; 
 17. Sept. for nnj Ex. 13, 17 ; 5^5 Ps. 80, 
 2 ; ^^ n Josh. 24, 3. So Hdian. 3. 3. 13. 
 Diod. Sic. 11. 8. yEschyl. Prom. 730. 
 Trop. of a teacher, John 16, 13 oS^yijo-et 
 vp.ds fls Trao-av TI)I/ aXfafiav. Acts 8, 31. 
 Sept. for rnin p s . 86, 1 1 ; Tj^-jn p s . 25, 
 5. SoWisd. 9, 11. 
 
 0077^09, oO, 6, (oSo y, T)yfop.ai,) a way- 
 leader, a leader, guide, Acts 1, 16. Trop. of 
 a teacher Matt. 15, 14. 23, 16. 24. Rom. 
 2, 19. 2 Mace. 5, 15. Pol. 5. 5. 15 ; trop. 
 Wisd. 7, 15. 
 
 oBoLTTOpea), w, f. ijo-oj, (oSoOTopor ; 686s, 
 iropfvop-ai.) to be on the way, to journey, to 
 travel, absol. Acts 10, 9. Jos. de Vit. } 32. 
 J21. V. H. 10. 4. Hdian. 5. 4. 13. 
 
 as, 17, (oSotTropew,) a jour 
 neying, travel, John 4, 6. 2 Cor. 1 1 , 26. 
 1 Mace. 6, 41. Hdian. 2. 15. 11. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 2. 10. 
 
 6So7TOlCi), , f. ^o-w, (oSo y, TTOte o),) to 
 
 make or level a road, Xen. An. 4. 8. 8. 
 In N. T. to make ones way, to go, to journey, 
 absol. Mark 2, 23 Lachm. for Rec. 68ov 
 elv, see fully in 686s no. 2. a. 
 
 0009, ov, T], I. a way, in respect of 
 place, a high-way, road, street. a) Genr. 
 Matt. 2, 12 81 dXXJJj 68ov uvt^oDprjcrav. 7, 
 13. 14. 8, 28. 13, 4. 19. John 14, 4. 5. 
 Acts 8, 26. Heb. 10, 20. James 2, 25. al. 
 Sept. for "H^ Num. 21, 4. Dent. 28, 7. 
 (Hdian. 3. 3. i, 2. Xen. An. 5. 3. 1.) Of a 
 street in a city, Matt. 22, 9 rl Tar &eo- 
 8ovs TWV 68wv. v. 10. Luke 14, 23. So 
 Sept. for pn Jer. 5, 1. 7, 16. (Hdian. 2. 
 9. 6. Xen. An. 5. 2. 22.) Also KOTO TIJ* 
 686v, along or on the way, Luke 10, 4. 
 Acts 8, 36. So Hdian. 2. 12. 2. Xen. An. 
 4. 6. 11. b) With a gen. of place tc 
 
498 
 
 oSvvda) 
 
 which a way leads, comp. Matth. { 367. 
 Heh. 9, 8 17 TWV dyicov 686s the way, entrance, 
 into the sanctuary. Sept. 77 68bs TOV vXov 
 T^S forHeb. y** --H Gen. 3, 24. (Comp. 
 Hdian. 8. 5. 1 0.) Meton. for the region to 
 or through which a way leads ; Matt. 10,5 
 fls 686i> (Zvuv into the way (country) of the 
 Gentiles. 4, 15 6oi> SaXdo-o-rj?, way of the 
 sea, i. e. the region around the sea of Gali 
 lee, quoted from Is. 8, 23 where Sept. for 
 C ?H "HT^- c) In the phrases erot/xa- 
 fiv V. Karacr^eva^f iv TT/V 686v, to 
 prepare the way, for a king, see in {roifuifa 
 no. 1 ; pr. Rev. 16, 12; trop. Matt. 3, 3. 
 11, 10. Mark 1, 2. 3; also tfavveiv TI]V 
 686v John 1, 23 ; all in allusion to Is. 40, 3 
 where Sept. for 7^7 ^ j 5 ? . Comp. 77 68us 77 
 Pa<ri\r)ta Hdot. 5. 53. d) Meton. of Je 
 sus as the way, i. e. the author and medium 
 of access to God and eternal life, John 14, 6. 
 2. In respect of action, way, i. e. a being 
 on the way, a going, journey, progress, 
 course. a) Genr. els TTJV 686vfor the ivay, 
 journey, Matt. 10, 10. Mark 6, 8. Luke 9, 
 3 ; e oSoC Luke 11,6; V rfj 68w, in or by 
 the rvay, on the journey, Matt. 15, 32. Mark 
 8, 3. 27. Acts 9, 17. 27 ; Kara rf;v 686v, by 
 or on the way, Acts 25, 3. 26, 13. So 
 1 Thess. 3, 11 K<zreu3wat TTJV 68bv fftttV. 
 Sept. for ~"fl Gen. 21, 24. 40. (Hdian 2. 
 11. 2. Xen. Mem. 3. 13. 5.) Acts 8, 39 
 TTOpevfo-^ai rr}i/ 6So i>, to go on one s way, to 
 continue one s journey ; comp. Buttm. 5 131. 
 4. (Sept. for T^ T^n p ro v. 7, 19. Xen. 
 Cyr. 5. 2. 22.) Also Mark 2, 23 Ka \ fj p- 
 Tai avTov 68bv iroitiv r/XXoirfs 
 s, and his disciples began to go 
 
 plucking the ears of grain, i. e. they went 
 along plucking the ears; comp. Matt. 12, 
 1 . Luke 6, 1. Here 68bt> ivoit iv is Hebraism 
 for Tfi* rwy>, as Sept. and Heb. Judg. 17, 
 8, corresponding to the Lat. iter facere. 
 The more classic Greek is Mid. TroieTcrSat 
 rrfv 68dv Jos. Ant. 18. 4. 3. Xen. Ag. 2. 1 ; 
 though very late writers employ the Act. 
 e. g. TToiflv 686v Xenoph. Ephes. lib. 3 
 init. comp. Troieiv TT/V Tropeiav Polyan. 1. 
 49. 3. b) With a gen. of time, as Luke 
 2, 44 rfpepas 686v, a day s journey. Acts 1, 
 12 crafi&a.Tov e ^oi/ 686i>, a sabbath-day s 
 journey, i. e. according to the Rabbinic limi 
 tation, 2000 larger cubits or minor paces ; 
 see Lightfoot Hor. Heb. in Luc. 24, 50. 
 Buxtorf Lex. Chald. 1197. According to 
 Epiphanius, himself once a Jew, the sabbath 
 day s journey was f> stadia or 750 Roman 
 paces; Haer. 66. 82. This accords best 
 with Acts 1. c. and Josephus ; since the lat 
 
 ter also gives the distance of the mount of 
 Olives in one place at 6 stadia, and in ano 
 ther at 5 stadia ; B. J. 5. 2. 3. Ant. 20. 8. 
 
 6. See Reland Falsest, p. 398, 399. Wi 
 ner Realw. art. Sabbathsweg. Sept. 68. 
 rpiS>v ?7/z. for Heb. T\~n Gen. 30, 36. 31, 
 23. So Jos. Ant. 5. 3. i." Xen. Cyr. 1.13. 
 
 3. Trop. a, way, manner, means, i. e. 
 a) a way or method of proceeding, of doing 
 or effecting any thing; 1 Cor. 4, 17 ray 
 68ovs povTas ev Xp. 12, 31. (Dem. 733. 20. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 4.) So ai 6801 TOV 3eou, 
 the ways of God, his mode of proceeding, ad 
 ministration, counsels, Acts 13, 10. Rom. 
 11, 33. Rev. 15, 3. Sept. and 7p* Ps. 18, 
 31. b) a way or means of arriving at or 
 obtaining any thing. Luke 1, 79 68bs flprj- 
 VTJS, i. e. the way of peace and salvation. 
 Acts 2, 28 6a-ovs fays. 16, 17. 2 Pet. 2, 21. 
 Sept. and rnx Prov. 10, 17. So Luc. 
 Hermot. 14 686s 17 eVt (foiXocrofpiav (iyovcra. 
 c) a way of thinking, feeling, acting, man 
 ner of life and conduct ; James 5, 20. Matt. 
 
 21, 32 77X26 la>dvvr]s ev 68<a 8iK.aio<Tvvr]s, i. e. 
 living a just and holy life. Rom. 3, 17 68bi> 
 flprjvrjs, peaceful life, quoted from Is. 59, 8 
 where see Gesen. Comm. With a gen. of 
 pers. the way or ways of any one i. e. his 
 mode of life, conduct, actions, Acts 14, 16. 
 Rom. 3, 16. James 1, 8. 2 Pet. 2, 15. Jude 
 11. (Sept. for T^ Job 23, 10.) But the 
 way of God or of the Lord, is also the way, 
 walk, life which God approves and requires, 
 Matt. 22, 16. Luke 20, 21. Acts 18, 25. 
 26. Heb. 3, 10. (Sept. and T^ Job. 23, 
 11. Ps. 25, 4.) Hence absol. for the gospel 
 way,ihe Christian life, Acts 9, 2. 19,9. 23. 
 
 22, 4. 24, 14. 22. Also 2 Pet. 2, 2 fj oSos 
 rrjs a\r)%fias the way of truth, the gospel. 
 So Judith 5, 8. 18 ; comp. a way or sect of 
 philosophy, Luc. Hermot. 46. + 
 
 6801/9, dovros, 6, a tooth, Matt. 5, 38. 8, 
 12 6 j3pvy[j.bs TU>V o86vTcov. 13, 42. 50. 22, 
 13. 24, 51. 25, 30. Mark 9, 18. Luke 13, 
 28. Acts 7, 54. Rev. 9, 8. Sept. for -jui 
 Lev. 24, 30. Job 16, 9. Luc. D. Mort 6. 
 2. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 6. 
 
 oBwdco, >, f. 770-0), (oSuw;,) to pain, tc 
 distress, in body or mind, c. ace. Jos. Ant. 
 
 7. 2. 1. Arr. Epict. 4. 1. 112. In N. T. 
 only Pass, or Mid. to be pained, distressed, 
 to sorrow. Luke 2, 48. 16, 24 oSvi/oo/zcu tv 
 rfj <p\oy\ raVTft. V. 25 crii 8e 68vi>a<rai, for 
 which 2 pers. sing, see in /cav^ao/xat. Acts 
 20, 38. Sept. for Hiph. b^nn Zech. 9, 5. 
 So Luc. Lexiph. 13. jEschin. 9. 3. Plato 
 Rep. 515. e. 
 
oSwi) 499 
 
 OOVIT], TJS, fj, pain, distress, sorrow, of 
 body or mind, Rom. 9, 2. 1 Tim. 6, 10. 
 Sept for yi;n Jer. 8, 18; bas Job 7, 3. 
 Luc. Tox. 6L Xen. Mem. l! 3. 12. 
 
 ooiyj/ioy, ov, 6, (o8vp6fj.m,) wailing, 
 lamentation, mourning. Matt 2, 18 *Aau- 
 3u6j Kal o8vpfji6s ptyas, quoted from Jer. 31, 
 15 where Sept. for n"nsnrn- 2 Cor. 7, 7. 
 2 Mace. 11, 6. JEl V. H."l4. 22. Plato 
 Rep. 398. d. 
 
 Otay, ov, 6, Ozias, Heb. n* (might 
 of Jehovah) Uzziah, a pious king of Ju- 
 dah, r. 811-759 B. C. Matt. 1, 8. 9. See 
 2 Chr. c. 26 ; and comp. 2 K. c. 1 5, where 
 he is called rrnts , Afapias, Azariah, prob. 
 another fonn of the same name ; see Heb. 
 Lex. art. 
 
 o&)j f. qo-o) or eVw, to smell, to have a 
 scent, intrans. e. g. fragrant, ^El. V. H. 13. 
 16. Xen. Conv. 2. 3. In N. T. of a corpse, 
 to smell, to stink, absol. John 11, 39. Sept. 
 for uJxa Ex. 8, 14. So Arr. Epict. 4. 11. 
 15, 18." Plut Phocion 22. 
 
 (feev, relat. adv. whence, see Buttm. 
 {116. 4. 
 
 1. Of place, Acts 14, 26 fcev ^o-av TTQ- 
 pa8f8op.f foi T!J x<*P lTt rov 3- 28, 13. Matt. 
 12,44. Luke 11, 24. Heb. 11, 19. Sept. 
 for -psn Ps. 121, 1. So Xen. An. 2. 3. 
 14, 16. Spec. i. q. (Kfl^fv onov, thence 
 where, Matt. 25, 24. 26 o-vvdya> o3v ov 
 Sifo-KopTTio-a ; comp. Matth. } 473. n. 2. 
 SoThuc. 1. 89. 
 
 2. Of a source, means, whence, whereby, 
 1 John 2, 18 o3ei/ yivuKruo^ev. Jos. Ant 
 2. 3. 4. Hdian. 1. 16. 4. 
 
 3. Illative, as referring to a cause, ground, 
 motive, i. q. wherefore, whereupon; Matt. 
 14,7 o3f v /xe3 opuov w/ioAo yjjo-f v. Acts 26, 
 19. Heb. 2, 17. 3, 1. 7, 25. 8, 3. 9, 18. 
 Judith 8, 20. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 2. 
 
 afoovi), TJS, 17, pr. fine white linen Horn. 
 Od. 7. 107. In N. T. genr. a linen cloth, 
 e. g. a sheet, sail, Acts 10, 11 o-xevos as 
 oZoiTjv fj.fya\r]v. 11,5. So Luc. Jup. Trag. 
 46. Hdian. 5. 6. 21. 
 
 c&oviov, ov, TO, (dim. o3o w;.) a smaller 
 linen cloth, bandage ; in N. T. only of ban 
 dages in which dead bodies were swathed 
 for burial, Luke 24, 12. John 19, 40. 20, 5. 
 6. 7. Sept for T"! Judg. 14, 13; MSass 
 Hos. 2, 7. 11. [2, 5. 9.] Poll. On. 4. 181 
 o^oviov TO enidfo-p.ov. Luc. Philops. 34 ; 
 sail-cloths Pol. 5. 89. 2. Dem. 1145. 6. 
 
 oZSa, see in eiSw II. 
 
 olKtaKO$ : T], 6v, see in OIKICLKOS. 
 
 oitcrjTrjpiov 
 
 owcetoy. a, ov, (of/coj,) belonging to the 
 house, domestic, Luc. Eun. 7. Xen. Cyr. 8 
 1 . 1 5. In N. T. belonging to a family ; 
 only Plur. of oiKeloi TWOS, those of one s 
 house, relatives, i. q. household, family, 
 1 Tim. 5, 8. Trop. for associates, kindred, 
 e. g. TOV Sfou, i. q. TfKva TOV Seov, Eph. 2, 
 19 ; TTJS 77iWewr Gal. 6, 10. Sept. pr. for 
 1X0) Lev. 18, 6. 21, 2. So pr. J31. V. H. 
 14~. 32. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 48; trop. Diod 
 Sic. 13. 91. 
 
 OUtenfa, as, 77, (oiVn/r,) a household. 
 i. e. the servants, Matt. 24, 45 Lachm. for 
 a Rec. Luc. Merc. cond. 15. 
 
 OMC6T779, OU) <$ 5 (o /coj,) house-companion, 
 one living in the same house, Ecclus. 6, 11. 
 Hdot. 8. 106. In N. T. a domestic, a ser 
 vant, slave, Luke 16, 13 ov8t\s oi/cen;? 8v- 
 VO.TO.I 8vo~l Kvpiots 8ov\fvfiv. Acts 10, 7. 
 Rom. 14, 4. 1 Pet. 2, 18. Sept for nns 
 Gen. 9, 25. 27, 37. So Hdian. 7. 4. lo! 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 9, 16. 
 
 oifceco, t5, f. T](ra>, (otVeor.) to house, to 
 dwell, to abide, e. g. 
 
 1 . Intrans. with eV, to dwell in, trop. of 
 the Holy Spirit abiding in Christians, Rom. 
 8, 9 Ttvcv/Jia SeoiJ otVet tv \jp.l.v. v. 11. 1 Cor. 
 
 3, 16. Of sin or a sinful propensity abiding 
 in men, Rom. 7, 17 f) otVoOaa tv e/ioi a/iap- 
 Tt a. v. 18. 20. Sept. c. / pr. for 3<jji Gen. 
 
 4, 15. 19. 19, 30. So ^El. V. H. 12. 64; 
 pr. Luc. Merc. cond. 3. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1.5. 
 With fifTa c. gen. to dwell with any one, 
 and spoken of man and wife, to live with, to 
 cohabit, 1 Cor. 7, 12. 13. So Sept. and 
 ^ Prov. 21, 19; comp. 1 K. 3, 17. 
 
 2. Trans, to dwell in, to inhabit, c. ace. 
 1 Tim. 6, 16 (pas OIKUV drrpoo-irov. Sept 
 Gen. 24, 13. Hdian . 2. 10. 15. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 1. 8. For Particip. fj oiKovfj.fvrj, see in 
 its order. 
 
 OiKr/fia, O.TOS, TO, (<nVo),) a dwelling, a 
 house, building, Thuc. 4. 115. Xen. An. 7. 
 4. 15. In N. T. and espec. in polite Attic 
 usage, a prison, Acts 12, 7 (ptas f\afj.\^fv 
 tv TO) oiKTjfjLaTi. So Plut. Solon 15 TOVS 
 A%r)vaiovs Aeyovcri . . . ao~Tfi<i)s VTTOKOpifc- 
 crSat . . . oiK?;/Aa 8f TO Of(T(jia>Tripi.ov naXovvras- 
 Dem. 789. 2. Thuc. 4. 48. 
 
 OlfCr/T7]plOV, OV, TO, (oiKTjTTJp, OIKfd),) O 
 
 dwelling, habitation, abode, e. g. heaven, as 
 the abode of angels, Jude 6. Many of theso 
 the later Jews supposed to have relinquished 
 heaven out of love for the daughters of men, 
 Gen. 6, 2 ; see Lib. Henoch. in Fabr. Cod. 
 pseud. V. T. I. p. 179 sq. Test. XII Patr. 
 p. 529 sq. Jos. Ant. 1.3. 1. Trop. of the 
 
500 
 
 future spiritual body as the abode of the 
 soul, 2 Cor. 5, 2. Sept. for -psa Jer. 25, 
 30. Pr. 2 Mace. 11, 2. Cebet.*Tab. 17. 
 Plut. Lucull. 39. 
 
 olicia, as, TI, (otKoy,) 1. a house, dwell 
 ing, habitation ; Matt. 2, 1 1 VASoWey fls 
 rfjv oiKiav. 7, 24 sq. John 12, 3. al. Matt. 5, 
 1 5 ol ev rjj oiKiq, those in the house, i. e. the 
 household. Sept. for rV?Sl Gen. 19, 4. Ex. 
 1, 21. (Hdian. 2. 4. 18." Xen. Mem. 3. 6. 
 14.) Of. heaven as the -dwelling of God, 
 John 14, 2 tv TTJ oiKiq TOV irarpos KT\. 
 Comp. Ps. 11, 4. is. 63, 15. Am. 9, 6. Ar- 
 temid. 2. 68 6 ovpavbs 3ecof tcrriv OIKOS. 
 Trop. of the body as the habitation of the 
 soul, 2 Cor. 5, 1 bis ; comp. v. 2. 
 
 2. Meton. a household, a family, those 
 who live together in a house, Matt. 10, 13. 
 12, 25 oiKi a /ifpia-Seura Ka3 eavrfjs- John 
 4, 53 avros KCU f] olida avrov oKrj. 1 Cor. 
 16, 15. Sept. for rv?3 Gen. 50, 8. So 
 Dem. 1358. 13. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 6. Spec, 
 prob. domestics, servants, attendants, Phil. 
 
 4. 22 ot CK TT]s Kat crapoy ot/ct ay. So Sept. 
 and rna Gen. 24, 2; comp. Jos. Ant. 17. 
 
 5. 8 ( AiriTrarpoi ) a>y . TOV KaiVapoy Ste- 
 <p3apKora DJV oiKiav. 
 
 3. Meton. goods, property, i. e. one s 
 house and what is in it. Matt. 23, 14 [13] 
 K.aTfcr SifTt Tas oiKias rcav ^rjptav. Mark 12, 
 40. Luke 20, 47. So n?2 , Sept. ra vnap- 
 X ovra, Gen. 45, 18. m V. H. 4. 2. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 1. 2. + 
 
 oiKtaKOS, T], 6v, (otKi a,) belonging to the 
 house, domestic, i. q. ot/moy ; in N. T. only 
 Plnr. ot oiKiaicoi TWOS those of one s 
 house, i. e. household, family, Matt. 10, 25. 
 36. Some Mss. have the doubtful form 
 oixeiaKos. Plut. Cicero 20. 
 
 Ot/eOOe<77TOTe&), , f. jjo-co, (oi/coSeo-Tro- 
 T>;y,) pr. to be house-master; genr. to be 
 head of a family, to rule a household, absol. 
 1 Tim. 5, 14. So trop. Luc. Astrol. 20. 
 Plut. Placit. philos. 5. 18. A word of the 
 later Greek, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 373. 
 
 Ot/eoSecrTTOT?;?, ov, 6, (OLKOS, Seo-TroY^y,) 
 a house-master, head of a family, paterfamil 
 ias, Matt. 10, 25. 13, 27. 52. 20, 1. 11. 21, 
 33. 24, 43. Mark 14, 14. Luke 12, 39. 13, 
 25. 14, 21 ; pleonast. 22, 11 olKooeanr. rtjs 
 oiVi ay. Jos. c. Apion. 2. 11. Poll. On. 10. 
 21. Plut. Q,u. Rom. 30. A later form, for 
 which the earlier writers said O IKOV v. oiKtay 
 SfcrTrorTjy, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 373. 
 
 Ot/co8o/>ie&>, o>, f. rjo-co, (oiKOo/ioy,) pr. 
 to build a house, and genr. to build, to con 
 
 struct, to erect ; comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 487 
 sq. 587. 
 
 1 . Pr. to build, c. ace. e. g. olnlav Luke 6, 
 48 ; Trvpyov Matt. 21, 33. Mark 12, 1. Luke 
 14, 28; vaov Mark 14, 58. Luke 12, 18; 
 so c. dat. commodi, Luke 7, 5 rijv o~vvayco- 
 yrjv avTos (fKo86jjirjcrft> Tjfuv. Acts 7, 47. 49. 
 With fVt c. gen. to build upon, Luke 4, 29 ; 
 eVt c. ace. Matt. 7, 24. 26. Luke 6, 49. 
 Absol. Luke 14, 30. 17, 28. John 2, 20. 
 Part, ot oiKoSo/iovi Tey the builders, Matt. 
 21, 42. Mark 12, 10. Luke 20, 17. Acts 4, 
 11. 1 Pet. 2, 7. Sept. for Wa Gen. 4, 16. 
 
 8, 20 ; c. eVt Ez. 16, 31. So Diod. Sic. 3. 
 55. Xen. Mem. 3. 8. 8 ; ace. et dat. Diod. 
 Sic. 4. 80. Trop. of a system of instruc 
 tion, doctrine, precepts, Rom. 15, 20. Gal. 2, 
 18. So Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 15. 
 
 2. Spec, to rebuild, to renew, e. g. a build 
 ing decayed or destroyed, Matt. 23, 29 TOVS 
 rd(p<jvsT(i>VTrpo<pT)T<i)v. Luke 11, 47. 48. So 
 Matt. 26, 61. 27, 40. Mark 15, 29. So 
 Sept. and M33 Josh. 6, 26. Job 12, 14. Am. 
 
 9, 14. 
 
 3. Trop. to build up, to establish, to con 
 firm, spoken of the Christian church and 
 its members ; who are thus compared to a 
 building, a temple of God, erected upon the 
 one only foundation Jesus Christ, and ever 
 built up progressively and unceasingly more 
 and more from the foundation ; 1 Cor. 3, 9. 
 
 10, Eph. 2, 20. 21. E. g. a) Externally, 
 Matt. 16, 18 eVt TavTT) rrj irtrpq olKo8op.i]cr<i> 
 p.ov TTJV fKK\r)o-lav. 1 Pet. 2, 5. Acts 9, 31. 
 b) Internally, in a good sense, to build up 
 in the faith, to edify, to cause to advance in 
 the divine life, absol. 1 Cor. 8, 1 17 aycnrr) 
 oi /coSop-et. 10, 23; c. ace. 14, 4 bis. 17. 
 1 Thess. 5, 1 1 ; ace. impl. 1 Cor. 20, 32 
 Lachm. In a bad sense, lo embolden, Pass. 
 1 Cor. 8, 10. 
 
 ot/coSo/i??, ij y , ij, ( ?Koy, So/xi;,) a later 
 word used for both oiicoo ofj.ncns and OIKO&O- 
 p.n/j.a, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 487, 490. 
 
 1 . a building up, the act of building, e. g. 
 j; OIK. TO>V rtijffeHt 1 Mace. 16, 23. Sept. 
 1 Chr. 26, 27. Jos. Ant. 11. 5. 8 init. In 
 N. T. only metaph. a building up in the faith. 
 edification, advancement in the divine life, 
 spoken of the Christian church and its mem 
 bers ; see in otKoSo/xe w no. 3. Rom. 14, 19 6V 
 vxfTf ... TO rrjs otKoSo/jJJy. 1 5, 2. 1 Cor. 14, 
 5. 12. 26. 2 Cor. 10, 8. 12, 19. 13, 10. Eph. 
 4, 12. 16. 29. 1 Tim. 1, 4 in Mss. So 
 1 Cor. 14, 3 XoXeT ouco&tytVjv i. e. ra r^y 
 
 2. a building, an edifice, i. q. otV 
 see Lob. 1. c. and p. 421. Matt. 24, 1 Toy ot- 
 Kofio/iay TOV iepov. Mark 13, 1. 2. Trop. 
 
ol/coSofjiia 
 
 501 
 
 04/C09 
 
 ef the Christian church as the temple of 
 God, see in oiKoo op.fca no. 3. 1 Cor. 3, 9 
 SfoO oiKo8op.r) eWf. Eph. 2, 21. Also of 
 the future spiritual body as the abode of the 
 soul, 2 Cor. 5, 1. 
 
 OtfCOGOjAia, as, 17, (oucodo/zc a>,) a building 
 up, act of building, Jos. Ant. 11. 5. 7, 8. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 7. In N. T. trop. edifica 
 tion, Christian improvement, 1 Tim. 1, 4 
 Rec. Others oi/a/Sofn/, also 
 
 ?, ov, 6, (OIKOS, S//i<B,) a house- 
 builder, i. e. genr. a builder, architect, Acts 
 4, 11 Lachm. for Part. oiKoSop-wv Rec. 
 Sept. for H3S 2 K. 12, 12. Jos. Ant. 11.5. 
 
 8. Xen. Hell. 7. 2. 20. Comp. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 487 sq. 587. 
 
 oucovofJieu), >, f. jjo-w, (oiKOj/o /ior,) to ie 
 manager of a household ; genr. to be ma 
 nager, steward; to manage, to administer, 
 absol. Luke 16, 2. So c. ace. Diod. Sic. 
 12. 15 TO. xprjpurra. Xen. Mem. 4. 5. 10 TOV 
 (avrov OIKOV. 
 
 oitcovofAia, as, rj, (oiKovop.fo>,) economy, 
 pr. management of a household or of house 
 hold affairs. E. g. 
 
 1. stewardship, administration, the office 
 of a manager or steward. Luke 16, 2 071-0- 
 8of \oyov rrjs oiKovo^ias- \. 3. 4. So Sept. 
 Is. 22, 19. Arr. Epict. 1. 9. 11. Xen. CEc. 
 1. 1. Trop. of the apostolic office, 1 Cor. 
 
 9, 17. Col. 1, 25. Eph. 3, 2. 
 
 2. an economy, i. e. a disposition or ar 
 rangement of things, a dispensation, plan, 
 scheme. Eph. 1, 10 tls TTJV oiKovofj.iav TOV 
 TT\r)pa>paTos TU>V Kaipuiv. Eph. 3, 9 et 
 1 Tim. 1,4 in later edit. Hdian. 6. 1. 2. 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 25. 
 
 oucovopos, ov, 6, (OIKOS, vfpv,) 1. a 
 house-manager, overseer, steward, pr. one 
 who had authority over the servants or 
 slaves of a family, to assign their tasks and 
 portions ; with which was also united the 
 general management of affairs and accounts ; 
 Luke 12, 42. 16, 1. 3. 8. Gal. 4, 2. Such 
 persons were themselves usually slaves, 
 Luke 12, 42, comp. v. 43. 45. 46 ; so Elie- 
 zer Gen. 15. 24, 2; and so Joseph is 
 called the oiKovop-os of Potiphar, Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 715, comp. Gen. 39,4; see D Or- 
 ville ad Chariton p. 127 sq. But free per 
 sons appear also to have been thus em 
 ployed, Luke 16, 3. 4. The oiKov6p.oi had 
 also some charge over the sons of a family, 
 prob. in respect to pecuniary matters, thus 
 differing from the nrtr/xnrM or tutors, Gal. 
 4, 2. Comp. Gen. 24, 3. Luc. Tim. 14 u>s 
 
 KClTlipaTOS OlKfTTJS, *) OLKOVOHOS, fj 
 
 Plut. de Lib. educ. 7. Diod. Sic. VI. p. 223. 
 
 s S)V 8voi 
 n\oi>Tcov. Xen. Mem. 2. 10. 4. 
 
 2. In a wider sense, for one who adminis 
 ters a public charge or office, a steward, mi 
 nister, agent, genr. 1 Cor. 4, 2. Also of 
 the fiscal officer of a city or state, a treasu 
 rer, quccsfor, Rom. 16, 23 otVovo /ioy rfjs no- 
 Xewff. So Diod. Sic. 1. 62. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 4. 7, 1 1 ; of royal quaestors, 1 Esdr. 4, 49. 
 Jos. Ant. 11. 6. 12. Trop. of the- apostles 
 and other teachers as stewards, ministers of 
 the gospel. 1 Cor. 4, 1. Tit. 1,7. 1 Pet. 
 4, 10. 
 
 Ot/C09, ov, 6, I. a house, dwelling, home , 
 Matt. 9, 6 vTraye tls TOV OIKOV crov. v. 7. 
 Mark 3, 20. Luke 1, 40. John 7, 53. 11, 
 20. Acts 10, 22. al. So ev OIKV at home 
 1 Cor. 11,34. 14,35; /car OIKOV, K.ar 
 oiKovs,from house to house, in private houses, 
 Acts 2, 46. 5, 42. 8, 3. 20, 20 ; f, /car ot- 
 KOV TIVOS fKK\T)o~ia, Rom. 16, 5. 1 Cor. 16, 
 19. Col. 4, 15; see in (KK\rja-ia no. 2. 
 Sept. genr. for PHS Gen. 39, 2. 16. Scepiss. 
 So Hdian. 1. 17. 7. Xen. Cyr. 8. 6. 4. 
 Spoken of various kinds of houses, edifices, 
 as o OLKOS TOV )3acrtXeo)j V. TOV dp^ifptios, 
 i. e. a palace, Matt. 11, 8. Luke 22, 54. 
 Sept. for n?a Gen. 12, 15 ; ^n 2 K. 20, 
 18. Dan. 1, 4. (Hdian. 3. 10. 9.) Also ot- 
 KOS ffMTopiov, house of traffic, bazar, John 2, 
 16. Spec. OIKOS T o v 3 e o v house of God, 
 i. e. the tabernacle or temple where the pre 
 sence of God was manifested, and where 
 God was said to dwell, e. g. the tabernacle 
 Matt. 12, 4. Mark 2, 26. Luke 6, 4. (Sept. 
 and 1^3 1 Sam. 1, 7. 24. al.) The temple 
 at Jerusalem, Matt. 21, 13. John 2, 16. 17. 
 Acts 7, 47. 49. al. Once for 6 va6s alone, 
 Luke 11, 51, comp. Matt. 23, 35. Also 
 o Acof TTJS TTpotrevx^s id. Matt. 21, 13. Mark 
 11,17. Luke 19, 46. Sept and n^a O i 
 the temple 2 Sam. 7, 13. Ezra 1, 2. 3 sq. 
 Synecd. put for a room or part of a house, 
 e. g. the ccenaculum or large room for eat 
 ing, Luke 14, 23 ; for the vntpwov or place 
 of prayer, Acts 2, 2. 10,30., 11, 13. Sn 
 Jos. Ant. 10. 11. 2. Xen. Conv. 2. 18. 
 Trop. of persons, e. g. Christians as the 
 spiritual house or temple of God, 1 Pet. 2, 
 5; comp. in oiKoSop.^ no. 3. Of those in 
 whom evil spirits dwell, Matt. 12, 44. Luke 
 11, 24. 
 
 2. In a wider sense, a dwelling-place, ha 
 bitation, abode, as a city or country, Matt. 
 23, 38 6 OIKOS vfj.Qiv (pr^ios dfpitTai. Luko 
 13, 35. Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 10. 
 
502 
 
 owo? 
 
 3. Melon, a household, family, those who 
 live together in a house, Luke 10, 5 elprjvr] 
 rw O?KO> TOVTCO. Acts 10, 2. 11, 14 tru /cat 
 rray 6 OIKOS crov. 16, 15. 1 Cor. 1, 16. 
 2 Tim. 1,16. Tit. 1, 11. al. Including also 
 the idea of household-affairs, Acts 7, 10. 
 1 Tim. 3, 4. 5. 12. Sept. and rna Gen. 7, 
 1. 12, 17. al. So JEL V. H. 4. 27. Arr. 
 Epict. 4. 6. 31. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 17 ; comp. 
 Mem. 1. 5. 3. Trop. 6 OIKOS TOV 3eot), 
 the household of God, i. e. the Christian 
 church, Christians. 1 Tim. 3, 15 tv OIKK> 
 3eov ... TJTIS icrri tKK\rj(ria 3eov a>vros. 
 Heb. 3, 6. 10, 21. 1 Pet. 4, 17. So of the 
 Jewish church, Heb. 3, 2. 5. Sept. and 
 nipp. ma Num. 12, 7. 
 
 4. Melon, a family, lineage, posterity, de 
 scended from one head or ancestor; Luke 1, 
 27 e ot/cou Aa/3t S. v. 69. 2, 4. Sept. and 
 n^a 1 K. 12, 16. 19. So Dem. 1058. 18, 
 20. Xen Cyr. 3. 6. 2. By Hebraism ex 
 tended to a people, nation, as descended 
 from one ancestor, e. g. oiKos lo-pai]\, house 
 or people of Israel, Matt. 10, 6. 15, 24; OI 
 KOS laK&>|3 id. Luke 1, 33; or/cos Iov8a 
 Heb. 8, 8. So Sept. for tsnlS-i n^i Lev. 
 10, 6; apr; rva EX. 19, 3; min-i ma 
 
 1 K. 12, 23 . + 
 
 OiKOV/j,ei>r), TJS, fj, (ot/cc a, Pass. part, 
 pres.) sc. yr), the inhabited earth, the world, i. e. 
 
 1 . In Greek usage, as inhabited by Greeks, 
 opp. to barbarian lands, Dem. 85. 17. Xen. 
 Vect. 1. 6; and later by Greeks and Ro 
 mans. Hence in N. T. put for the Roman 
 world, the Roman empire; Acts 17, 6. 24, 
 5 Tols lovbaiois rols Kara TTJV olKovpfvyv. 
 Luke 2, 1 dnoypdcpea-^ai Traaav TTJV olxov- 
 fifvrjv, comp. in Kvprjvios. Acts 11, 28 see 
 in KXavSiof. In these last two passages the 
 writer prob. had chiefly in view the regions 
 in and around Palestine. Jos. Ant. 12. 3. 1. 
 JB. J. 5. 5. 1. Hdian. 5. 2. 5. 
 
 2. Genr. in later usage, the habitable 
 globe, the earth, the world, as known to the 
 ancients. a) Pr. Matt. 24, 14 KJjpv^Sijo-f- 
 rai TOVTO TO (vayye\iov . . . tv 0X77 TTJ OIKOV- 
 p.evrj. Luke 21, 26. Rom. 10, f 8. Heb. 1,6. 
 Rev. 16, 14. "Hyperbol. Luke 4, 5 iraa-as 
 TCIS ftacriXfias TJJS oiKovp,fvrjs, i. <] TOV KO- 
 a-fjiov in Matt. 4, 8. Sept. for f^. Is. 23, 
 17; ^an Ps. 19,4. 24, 2. So Jos. Ant. 
 4. 8. 2. Pol. 1. 1. 5. Diod. Sic. 1. 1. b) 
 Melon, the world, for the inhabitants of the 
 earlh, mankind ; Acts 17, 31 Kplvuv TJJV 
 OIK. tv SiKaioo-vvrj. 19, 27. Rev. 3, 10. 12, 
 9. So Sept. and ^3P? Ps. 9, 9. 98, 9. c) 
 Trop. Heb. 2, 5 ^ olKovfjLfvrj rj /xeXXovcra, 
 i. q. 6 ala>v 6 /it XXcoj/, see in alav no. 2. b. 
 
 ov, 6, fj, adj. (OIKOS, 
 doing house-work, fern, a housewife, Tit. 2, 
 5 Lachm. for oiKovpos. Not found else 
 where. 
 
 ov, 6, T), adj. (OIKOS, cvpos, ) 
 pr. guarding the house, Artemid. 2. 11. 
 Aristoph. Vesp. 970 KVW oiKovpos. In N. 
 T. keeping at home, domestic, spoken of 
 females Til. 2, 5. Comp. 1 Tim. 5, 13. 
 So Philo de Exsecr. p. 932. d, ctywrai KO\ 
 yvvcuKas . . . o-a><ppovas, oiKovpovs, /cat <f)i\di>- 
 dpovs- Dion Cass. 56. p. 391 ywr] o-u><ppu>v, t 
 oiKovpos, oiKovofjios, Tra.i8oTp6(j)os. Dinarch. 
 100. 37. 
 
 ), f. ep o), (owcTor,) later fut. 
 
 see Passow s. v. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 741 ; to pity, to have compassion on, c. 
 ace. Rom. 9, 15 oiKTfipf]<ra> ov av oiKrei pco, 
 quoted from Ex. 33, 19 where Sept. fut. 
 rjo-v for crn, as also 2 K. 13, 23. Mic. 7, 
 19. So f." fan Test. XII Patr. p. 632. 
 Jos. de Mace. 5 5 ; f . epa Palaeph. 23. 4. 
 Luc. Tim. 42 ; pres. Plut. Lucull. 19. Xen. 
 An. 3. 1. 19. 
 
 ov, 6, (oiKTfipco, ) pity, com 
 passion, mercy, i. e. the feeling ; less strong 
 than eXeos q. v. Tittm. de Synon. N. T. p. 
 69 sq. Col. 3, 12 wnXdyxya oiKTippov, but 
 Rec. O-JT\. olKTipp&v. Elsewhere only Plur. 
 Rom. 12, 1. 2 Cor. 1, 3. Phil. 2, 1. Heb. 
 10,28. Sept. for Heb. C^rV), Sing. Zech. 
 1, 16. 7, 9; Plur. 2 Sam. 24, 14. Ps. 144, 
 9. Sing. Bar. 2, 21. Ecclus. 5, 6. Plur. 
 1 Mace. 3, 45. Find. Pyth. 1. 164. 
 
 oucrippwv, ovos, 6, TJ, adj. (ot/crti /jw,) 
 pitiful, compassionate, merciful, Luke 6, 36 
 bis. James 5, 11. Sept. for Blrrn Ex. 34, 
 6. Neh. 9, 17. Theocr. Id. 15. 75. Anthol. 
 Gr. IV. p. 219. 
 
 ot/icu, see o io^ai. 
 
 OIVOTTOTT} 1 ?, OV, 6, (oiVOS, TTOTTJS, TTIVU),) 
 
 a wine-drinker, wine-bibber, Matt. 11, 19. 
 Luke 7, 34. Sept. for "p X2D Prov. 23, 
 20. Luc. Asin. 48. Pol. 20. 8. 2. 
 
 * 
 OiVOf, ov, o, 1 . wine ; e. g. oiVoy vtos, 
 
 new wine, not yet fully fermented and ripe, 
 Matt. 9, 17 ter. Mark 2, 22 quater. Luke 5, 
 37 bis. 38. Genr. Mark 15, 23 fo-p.vpvHrp.e- 
 vov oivov. [Matt. 27, 34.] Luke 1,15 olvov 
 /cat o-iKfpa ov fj.r/ TTITJ. 7, 33. 10, 34. John 2, 
 3 bis. 9. 10 bis. 4, 46. Rom. 14, 21. Eph. 5, 
 18. 1 Tim. 3, 8. 5, 23. Tit. 2, 3. Rev. 18, 
 13. Sept. for "p? Gen. 9, 21. 24. 14, 18 ; 
 la h^Fl Gen. 27, 28. Judg. 9, 13. (Hdian. 
 5. 5. 16. Xen. CEc. 17. 9.) Melon, for 
 the vine and its fruit, Rev. 6, 6. Sept. and 
 
503 
 
 CJliTl Joel 1, 10. On the present modes 
 of preparing wine on Mount Lebanon, see 
 an article by E. Smith in Biblioth. Sac. 
 1846, p. 385 sq. 
 
 2. Symbol, oivos TOV 3 v p. o v TOV 3eov, 
 wine of God s wrath, i. e. the intoxicating 
 cup which God in wrath presents to the 
 nations, and which causes them to reel and 
 stagger to destruction, see espec. in 3u/*o r . 
 Rev. 14, 10. 16, 19. 19, 15. Comp. Jer. 
 25, 15. Is. 51, 17. Ez. 23, 31 sq. Heb. 
 Lex. art. 01 3 Also symbol, oivos TOV 3v- 
 ^ioC TTJS TTopveias, wine of wrath of forni 
 cation, i. e. a love-potion, philter, with 
 which a harlot seduces to fornication (idol 
 atry), and thus brings upon men the wrath 
 of God, Rev. 14, 8. 18, 3 ; ellipt. olvos Tys 
 iropvdas id. Rev. 17, 2. Comp. Jer. 51, 7. 
 
 owo(f)\.vyi(i) as, f], (oii/o$Au ; oivos, 
 (Avo>.) wine-drinking, xinolency, 1 Pet. 4, 
 3. J31. V. H. 3. 14. Xen. CEc. 1. 22. 
 
 OiO/JMi, contr. olfJLai, Buttm. } 114; 
 to suppose, to think, to be nf opinion, pr. fol 
 lowed by the Infin. c. ace. e. g. inf. aor. 
 John 21, 25 ov8e OVTOS oifiai rbv KocrfMov 
 vcopfjcrai TO. ypa(p6p.fva /3t/3Ai a. With an 
 inf. simply, when the subject of both verbs 
 is the same, Phil. 1, 16 [17] oloptvoi SAn/nt/ 
 f-rrifpepeiv Tols 8((TfjLols uov. With 6Vt in 
 stead of inf. James 1, 7; comp. Matth. 
 539._So c. inf. et ace. Hdian. 4. 15. 15. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 10; c. inf. 2 Mace. 7, 24. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 15. 
 
 olo?, a, ov, & correlative relat. pron. cor 
 responding to natos, rows, Buttm. } 79 ; 
 pr. of what kind or sort, what, such as, 
 qualis. 
 
 1. Pr. in a dependent clause, with TOIOV- 
 TOS or a like word corresponding ; 1 Cor. 
 15, 48 bis, oior 6 xoi /co?, rotovrot oi ^oiVoi, 
 (crA. 2 Cor. 10, 11 ; with 6 OVTOS Phil. 1, 
 30. So with TOIOVTOS impl. Matt. 24, 21 
 SArv/ns 1 /ieydArj, ota ov ytyovtv. Mark 9, 
 3. 13, 19. 2 Cor. 12, 20 bis. 2 Tim. 3, 11 
 old p.oi tytvfTo. Rev. 16, 18. So C. TOIOV- 
 TOS Ecclus. 49, 14. Xen. Hi. 6. 8; impl. 
 Hdian. 5. 5. 11. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 5, 27. 
 
 2. In an independent clause it has the 
 nature of an exclamation, implying some 
 thing great or unusual, what, what manner 
 of, how great ; Luke 9, 55 OVK oiSare oiov 
 TrvfvpaTos f(TTf vpe is. 1 Thess. 1 , 5. 2 Tim. 
 
 3, 11 ult. Jos. Ant. 10. 3. 2. Hdian. 7. 
 
 4. 2. 
 
 3. Neut. oi>x olov adverbially, not so 
 as, not so ; ellipt.- for ov TOIOV 8 Ae yw, olov 
 on. Hence Rom. 9, 6 ov% olov Se, Sri 
 
 6 \6yos TOV 3eov, but not so 
 
 (would I reason) as that the promise of God 
 is become without effect. Comp. the ofo 
 OTI of late writers, so as that, Greg. Cor 
 inth. ed. Schffif. p. 105; also us olov, olov 
 cao-TTtp, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 427. See Winer 
 5 66. 5. Others here take ov^ olov as i. q. 
 non modo ; but in this sense it is elsewhere 
 followed not by OTI, but by an antithesis, as 
 aAAd or the like ; Pol. 1. 20. 12. ib. 18. 18. 
 11. Others again prefer the common signif. 
 before an infin. it is not possible, and regard 
 OTI as put instead of an infinitive ; ^El. V 
 H. 4. 17. But neither of these senses ac 
 cords well with the context. 
 Old), obsol. theme, see (pfpa. 
 
 ) <a, f. Tjcro), (oKfoy,) to be slow, 
 tardy, to delay, c. inf. Acts 9, 38 pf/ onvrjo-ai 
 eto-fA3eIi> ewy OVTCOV. Sept. for ^5? Judg. 
 18, 9. Luc. D. Deor. 6. 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 3. 14. 
 
 OKinjpoS, d, ov, (oKi/eco,) slow, tardy, 
 slothful, of persons, Matt. 25, 26 Trovrjpe 
 SovAe KOI oKvrjpe. Rom. 12, 11. Sept. for 
 ^SS Prov. 6, 6. 9. So Dem. 777. 5. Hdian. 
 2. 4. 10. Thuc. 1. 142. Neat, of things, 
 tedious, tiresome; Phil. 3, 1 ra avra ypd- 
 <pfii> . . . fp.ol fitv OVK oKVTjpov. So Theocr. 
 Id. 24. 35. Soph. OZd. R. 834. 
 
 OKraTJfj,epo<f, O v, 6, 17, adj. (O<TO>, jj/ie/>a,) 
 an eighth-day person or thing ; Phil. 3, 5 
 rrepiTOfj,jj oKTarj/jiepos, as to circumcision an 
 eighth-day man, i. e. circumcised on the 
 eighth day. Comp. Gregor. Naz. Orat. 
 25. p. 465. d, Xptoros avi orarai Tpirj/jifpos, 
 Aafapor T(Tparjp.(pos. On such compound 
 words see Buttm. { 70. n. 3. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 676. 
 
 OKT(O, ol, at, ra, indec. card. num. eight, 
 Luke 2, 21. 9, 28. 13, 4. 11. 16. John 5, 
 5. 20, 26. Acts 9, 33. 21, 6. 1 Pet. 3, 20. 
 
 , ov, 6, 17, adj. (oAeSpoy,) de 
 structive, deadly, Plato Rep. 389. d. In N. 
 T. Neut. TO oAe Spiov, destruction, death, 
 i. q. oAeSpoy, for which it is read by Lachm. 
 2 Thess. 1, 9. 
 
 , ov, 6, (oAAv/xt,) destruction, 
 ruin, death ; 1 Cor. 5, 5 ds oAeSpoi/ Trjs 
 o-apKos. Of divine punishments, ] Thess. 
 5, 3 al(pvi8ios oAeSpo?. 2 Thess. 1, 9. 
 1 Tim. 6, 9. Sept. for TX Ob. 13; lib 
 Prov. 21, 7. Hdian. 8. 8. 10. Xen. An. 1. 
 2. 26. 
 
 t a., ay, 17, (oAtyoTTtoToy,) lit 
 tle faith, want of faith, Matt. 17, 20 Lachm. 
 for airia-Tia Rec. 
 
504 
 
 0X09 
 
 ov, 6, 17, adj. (oXi yor, TTI- 
 crir,) of little faith, unbelieving, Matt, fi, 30. 
 8, 26. 14, 31. 16, 8. Luke 12, 28. Act. 
 Thorn. { 28. Not found in classic writers. 
 
 0X1/709, T], ov, little, pr. opp. of TTO\VS 
 much. 
 
 1. Of number, small, in N. T. only Plur. 
 oXi yoi. at, a, few. Matt. 7, 14 oXt yoi . . . ot 
 (vpicn<oi>Tes av-rrfv. 9, 37 ot Se epyarai 0X1- 
 yot. 15, 34. 20, 16. 22, 14. 25, 21. 23. 
 Mark 6, 5. 8, 7. Luke 10, 2. 12, 48 Sapjj- 
 orerai oXt yar sc. TrX^yar. (Buttm. 134. n. 
 2.) Luke 13, 23. Acts 17, 4. 12. Heb. 12, 
 10 Trpos oXt yay fjpepas. 1 Pet. 3, 20. Rev. 
 
 2, 14. 20. 3, 4. Sept. for B?a Num. 13, 
 19. Is. 10, 7. So Hdian. 4. 13. 8. Xen. 
 Cyr. 2. 1. 3. Hence 1 Pet. 5, 12 Si oXi yow 
 typa-^a, i. e. in /ew words, briefly ; comp. 
 Thuc. 4. 95 Si oXt yov. 
 
 2. Of magnitude, amount, ZtV/Ze, small, in 
 N. T. only in Sing. Luke 7, 47 6\iyov d(pl- 
 trai. Acts 12, ISrapa^o? OVK oXi yor. 15, 2. 
 19, 23. 24. 27, 20. 2 Cor. 8, 15. 1 Tim. 4, 
 8 irpos oXt yov o(peXtp.oj profitable for little. 
 
 5, 23. James 3, 5. Sept. for a?E 1 K. 17, 
 10. 12. So Hdian. 1. 14. 4. Xen. Cyr. 5. 
 4. 25. Hence Eph. 3, 3 eV oXi yw Trpoe- 
 ypa^a, in brief, briefly. So Aristot. Rhet. 
 
 3. 11. 
 
 3. Of time, lillle, short, brief; Acts 14, 
 28 xpovov OIIK o\lyov. James 4,14 Trpos 0X1- 
 yov sc. xpovov. Rev. 12, 12. Also eV 0X1- 
 ya> sc. XP V( ? Acts 26, 28. 29. Hdian. 2. 
 14. 10. Xen. Ath. 3. 1 1 ; eV oXi yw Xen. 
 Hell. 4. 4. 12. 
 
 4. Neut. oXtyoi/ as adv. spoken of space, 
 amount, time ; Mark 1,19 7rpo/3ay oXiyov. 
 
 6. 31. Luke 5, 3. 7, 47 aycnra oXi yov. 1 Pet. 
 1, 6. 5, 10. Rev. 17, 10 6\iyov avrbv Set 
 ptivat. Sept. for "J553 p s . 37, 10. ^El. V. 
 H. 12. 9. Xen. Conv. 1. 14. 
 
 ov, 6, T), adj. (oXiyos, -^v- 
 %{).) feeble-minded, faint-hear ted, 1 Thess. 5, 
 14. Sept. for nil laps Prov. 14, 29. Ar- 
 temid. 3. 5 ; so oXiyo\|^vx /w Isocr. p. 392. b. 
 d\,i r yu)p0), oj, f. fjcra), (oXi ycopoj ; 0X1- 
 yoy, eSpa.) <o care little for, to make light of, 
 to de.spise : c. gen. Heb. 12, 5 fu) oXtywpet 
 7rai8ei as Kvpiov, quoted from Prov. 3, 1 1 
 where Sept. for t>N?3Pri>X .Hdian. 1. 1. 1. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 4. 3. 
 
 6X170)9, adv. little, but a little, not yet 
 fully, 2 Pet. 2, 18 ; where Rec. ovras. 
 Hippocr. Aphor. lib. 1, quickly, speedily. 
 
 o\cfepevTij<>) ov, 6, (oXoSpevw,) a de 
 stroyer, 1 Cor. 10, 10; comp. Num. 14, 
 2 sq. 24, 4 sq. 
 
 , f. f^o-co, (SXeSpo?,; to destroy, 
 only in particip. c. ace. Heb. 11, 28 6 0X0- 
 %pevuv TO. TrpcordroKa. Sept. for rnnilJE 
 Ex. 12, 23 ; comp. 1 Chr. 21, 12. 15. 16 ; also 
 for ttJ-nirt Josh. 3, 10. So Wisd. 18, 25. 
 Lachm. reads oXeSpevw, a form not found in 
 lexicons. 
 
 6\OKavra)/J,a, UTOS, TO, (oXoxaurow, 6X0 - 
 Kdvros; SXos, (cat a),) a holocaust, whole burnt- 
 offering, pr. in which the whole victim was 
 burned ; but genr. a burnt-offering, Mark 
 12 ? 33. Heb. 10, 6. 8. Sept. for rtb> Ex. 
 18, 12. 24, 5; "^X Ex. 30,20. Lev. 4. 
 35. Comp. oXoKairro a Jos. Ant. 3. 9. 1 ; 
 ib. 9. 7. 4. 
 
 as, rj, (6XoK\77poff,) whole 
 ness, soundness of body, Acts 3, 16. Sept. 
 for ch^Is. i, 6. 
 
 oXo/cX^pO?, ov, 6, TI, adj. (oXoy, KX^por.) 
 pr. whole in every part ; hence genr. ivhole, 
 entire, perfect; 1 Thess. 5, 23 O\OK\T)POV 
 vpaiv TO T^vfiifia Kal rj ^^X 1 ? Ka To <T ^t i<l i 
 your whole spirit, soul, and body, i. e. your 
 whole man. Trop. in a moral sense, James 
 1, 4 Iva TfTf re Xeioi Kal oXoVX^poi. Sept. 
 pr. for D^iy Deut. 27, 6 ; B^aB Ez. 15, 5. 
 Pr. Luc. Philops. 8. Plato Tim. 44. c ; 
 trop.Wisd. 15, 3. Pol. 18. 28. 9. 
 
 oXoXt>&>, f. <u, an onomatopoeetic verb, 
 pr. to cry aloud to the gods ; espec. of 
 prayers and hymns of joy uttered by fe 
 males on festival days, accompanied with 
 shouts and shrieks, Horn. II. 6. 301. Od 
 3. 450. ib. 22. 408, 411. In later usage, 
 genr. to cry aloud, Lat. ulularc, e. g. in joy, 
 to shout, Theocr. 17. 64. In N. T. in com 
 plaint, to shriek, to howl, absol. James 5, 1 
 K\avcraTf oXoAufoirfr. Sept. for 1 ? 1 vl Is. 
 13, 6. 15, 3. 16, 7. So Diod. Sic. 3. 59. 
 Dem. 313. 20, 21. 
 
 6X09, ?;, ov, whole, the whole, all; for 
 the construction with nouns having the 
 article, see in 6, fj, TO, p. 293. b. y. E. g. of ^* "J3 
 space, extent, amount, or the like ; Matt. 4, 
 23 SKrjv TTJI> Ta\i\aiav. 5, 29 o\ov TO o-co/^n. 
 16, 26 Koo~[J.ov SXov Kfpdrjffr]. 21, 4 TOVTO 
 Se o\ov ytyovev. 22, 40. Mark 1, 33 TroXts 
 S\T). Luke 1, 65. John 4, 53. 1 Cor. 6, 6. 
 Rev. 6, 12. al. Neut. 0X0 v the whole mass, 
 Matt. 13, 33. Luke 13, 21 ; Si* oXou through 
 out, in every part, John 19, 23. Sept. for 
 Vs Gen. 25, 25. Zech. 4, 2 ; ^3 Ex. 28, 
 27. So Hdian. 4. 4. 9. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 17. 
 Of time, Matt. 20, 6 SXrjv TTJV fjpfpav. Luke 
 5, 5 Si 0X77? TJjs VVKTOS. Acts 1 1, 26 (viavrof 
 oXov. 28, 30. al. Sept. and b s Ex. 10, 13 ; 
 
505 
 
 b^3 Num. 4, 6 ; ta^n Lev. 25, 30. So 
 Hdian. 8. 4. 3. Plato Conv. 219. c. Of an 
 affection, emotion, condition, Matt. 22, 37 
 iv 0X77 rrj KapBia crov, KOI iv 0X77 TT) ^vxi) 
 crov, KT\. quoted from Deut. 6, 5 where 
 Sept. and Vs. Luke 10, 27. John 9, 34 
 iv apapTiais (TV iytwrftrjs 5\os. John 13, 
 10. So Jos. B. J. 1. 2. 4 oXoy rov TraSov? 
 r>. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 28. -f 
 
 oXoreX?/9, e j, ovr, 6, 17, adj. (oXoj, T- 
 Xos,) ^uite complete, perfect, whole. 1 Thess. 
 5, 23 ayidcrai vfj.ds oXoreXeir, i. e. wholly, in 
 every part, cornp. Buttm. 123. 6. Aquil. 
 6\oT(\S>s for ^33 Deut. 13, 17. Plut. de 
 Placit Philos. 5. 21. 
 
 , 5, 6, Olympas, pr. n. of a 
 Christian, Rom. 16, 15. . 
 
 oXfi&O?, ov, 6, an untimely fig, winter 
 fig, grossus, i. e. such as are later and do 
 not ripen at the usual season, hut hang up 
 on the trees during winter and often until 
 spring, Rev. 6, 13. Sept. for 3Q Cant. 2, 1 3. 
 So Dioscor. 1. 186. Theophr. H. PI. 5. 9. 
 12. Hdot. 1. 193. For the diff. kinds of figs 
 eee in O-VKTJ. 
 
 6 X(U?, adv. (oXor,) ivholly, altogether, 
 1 Cor. 6, 7 oXcoj rJTTT]p.a vp.lv icrnv. Also 
 everywhere, commonly, 1 Cor. 5, 1 . Negat. 
 ov v. fifi oXo>r, not at all, 1 Cor. 15, 29. 
 Matt. 5, 34. Luc. Tim. 13. Xen. (Ec. 20. 
 20; negat. Palaeph. 3.5. Hdian. 1. 1. 5. 
 
 OfjL/3po$i ov, 6, a shower, heavy rain, 
 with thunder and tempest, Lat. imber, Luke 
 12, 54. Sept. for envsto Deut. 32, 2. 
 Hdian. T. 14. 4. Xen. (Ec. 5. 18. 
 
 o[AipOfiai : to long for, to haie strong 
 tiffed ion for, i. q. ip-fipopai ; c. gen. 1 Thess. 
 2, 8 in later edit. Symmach. Ps. 62, 2 
 6/iifi perat. Hesych. 6p.eip6p.tvoi 6p.(ipovrai, 
 eirftv/Jiovcri.. Photius p. 331. 9 opeipovrai 
 tnftvp.ova-1. Omitted in most modern lex 
 icons. 
 
 OfJLl\(O, u, f. TJO-W, (o/-uXor,) to be in a 
 crowd or in company u-ith, to have inter- 
 course with, Luc. Tim. 45. Xen. Conv. 2. 
 10. In N. T. to converse, to talk with, absol. 
 Acts 20, 11. Luke 24, 15 ; c. dat. Acts 24, 
 26 ; TT/JO? aXXrjXovr Luke 24, 14. So c. 
 dat. Jos. Ant. 10. 11. 7. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 
 1 5 ; irpos nva Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 2. 
 
 6/u\ta, as, fj, (6/itXeo),) a being toge 
 ther, companionship, Xen. Mem. 3. 7. 5. 
 In N. T. intercourse, converse, 1 Cor. 15, 
 33 ffifipovariv 17377 XP 1 ? " 3 op.i\iai KOKOI, from 
 Menand. Fr. p. 75. Mein. So Diod. Sic. 
 16. 54 rais Trovrjpais 6p.i\iais 8i<p3eipe TO 
 
 r TO>I> oVSwTrom Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 19. 
 
 ov, 6, (6p-ds, 6p.ov, 1X77.) a crowd 
 ing together, a crowd, multitude, Rev. 18, 
 17 Rec. Hdian. 1. 1. 1. Thuc. 4. 112. 
 
 r]s, f], (kindr. o^t^w.) a mist, fog; 
 2 Pet. 2, 17 o/u xXcu VTTO Xai XaTro? eXaui/o- 
 p.ei>ai, where Rec. ve(pf\ai. Sept for 
 Job 38, 9. Joel 2, 2. Diod. Sic. 1. 7. 
 An. 4. 2. 7. 
 
 aroj, TO, (o^o/xai, 2)fj.p.ai,} pr. a 
 sight, thing seen, Plato Phaedr. 253. e. 
 Usually and in N. T. an eye, Plur. TCI o/z- 
 fj.ara, the eyes, Mark 8, 23. [Matt. 20, 34.] 
 Sept. for C^S Prov. 6, 4. 10, 27. So 
 Luc. D. Mort. 28. 1. Xen. Conv. 1. 9. 
 
 O/AVVO), f. p.ovpMi, aor. 1 
 , Buttm. ^ 106. n. 5. 114. Moeris 
 op,vv(iv, EXX^i/news. 
 
 1 . to swear, to take or make oath, absol. 
 Matt. 26, 74 et Mark 14, 71 jjTp^aro ... 
 op.vveiv. Matt. 5, 34 p.f) op-ovai oXwy. So 
 Xen. O2c. 4. 10. The person or thing 
 by which one swears is put in various 
 constructions, e. g. in accus. as TOV ovpa- 
 vov James 5, 12; comp. Buttm. $131. 2, 
 Matth. 413. 10. (Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 1. Xen. 
 An. 7. 6. 18.) With Kara c. gen. Heb. 6, 
 13 bis, eVe! . . . e3ju.o<re *a3 eauroC. V. 16. 
 Sept. for 3 5?a|5 Is. 45, 23. Am. 4, 2. (Luc. 
 Conv. 32. Dem. 1306. 21.) Once with tit 
 lfpova-a\T)p. Matt. 5, 35 ; see in els no. 1 . b. 
 (Hdian. 2. 13. 4.) By Hebraism with iv 
 c. dat. see in iv no. 3. c. a, ult. Matt. 5. 34 
 iv raj ovpava, iv rrj yrj. v. 36. 23, 16 bis. 
 18 bis. 20 bis. 21 bis. 22 bis. Rev. 10, 6. 
 Sept. for a raa Ps. 63, 12. Jer. 5, 7. 
 
 2. Spec. i. q. to declare with an oath, e. g. 
 followed by the words of the oath ; Heb. 3, 
 11 et 4, 3 bi w/iocra iv rfj opyfj p.ov 
 (lo-fXevo-ovrai, see in et I. 2. h. ft. Heb. 7, 
 21 ; c. inf. 3, 18. So c. inf. Plut. Galb. 22 
 fin. Xen. Ag. 1. 10. Hence, to promise 
 with an oath, c. dat. et on, Mark 6, 23 ; 
 with opKw c. dat. et infin. Acts 2, 30 on 
 upKca (av.o(Ttv aurw 6 3eor . . . avaa Trja fi.v. 
 With accus. and dat. Acts 7, 17 rfjs iirayyf- 
 \ias r)s u>p.ocrev 6 Seor rw Afipad/j., where 77? 
 is by attr. for rjv. So with -rrpos nva, Luke 
 
 1, 73 opKov ov a>p.o<Tf irpos Aftpaiip., comp. 
 Gen. 26, 3 opKov ov u>p.o<rf T< A. Deut. 7, 
 8. So c. dat. et inf. Xen. An. 7. 7. 40 ; 
 irpos riva Horn. Od. 14. 331. 
 
 6fJ,cfov/J,a86v, adv. (6/io3v/noj ; 6p.6s , 3u- 
 PMS.) with the same mind, with one accord, 
 all together. Acts 1 , 14 OVTOI iravrts rj<rav 
 irpocrKaprtpovvrfs 6/io3upaSov TTJ irpo&fvxjj 
 
 2, 1. 46. 4, 24. 5, 12. 7, 57. 8, 6. 12, 20. 
 15, 25. 18, 12. 19, 29. Rom. 15, 6. Sent. 
 
506 
 
 for 1?rVi Ex. 19, 8. Jer. 46, 2). Hdian. 2. 
 
 3. 6. Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 17. 
 
 ofj,oidw, f. do, (o/ioioj,) /o ie foTcej 
 absol. Mark 14, 70 77 XoXid <rov 6/*otdet. 
 The simple verb is not elsewhere found ; 
 but comp. 7rapo/xoido> Matt. 23, 27 ; Trpocro- 
 (j.oida> Geopon. 2. 21. 6. 
 
 O/iOiOTTa^?/?, tos, oCy., 6, ?;, adj. (O/JLOIOS, 
 jrdSoy, 7rdo-xa>,) like-affected, suffering like 
 things, like, i. e. of like nature, affections, 
 condition ; c. dat. Acts 14, 15 i^iflr 6p.oio7ra- 
 Sets fo~fj.fv v/ui> lufopamoi. James 5, 17. 
 Buttm. J 133. 2. f. Wisd. 7, 3. Theophr. 
 Fragm. 5. 35. Plato Tim. 45. c. 
 
 O/iOiO?, a, of, (6/io y,) once opoios, 6, 17, 
 with two endings, Rev. 4, 3 ipis o/zoios in 
 later edit, see VViner 1 1 1 . 
 
 1. Z;7ce, resembling, Lat. similis ; e. g. in 
 external form and appearance, John 9, 9. 
 Rev. 1, 13 5/j.oiov via! diftpdnrov. v. 15. 2, 
 18. 4. 3 bis. 6. 7 ter. 9, 7 bis. 10. 19. 11,1. 
 13,2.11. 14,14.16,13.21,11.18. (Xen. 
 Hell. 3. 2. 27.) In kind or nature, Acts 
 17, 29. Gal. 5, 21. (Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 7.) 
 In conduct, character, Matt. 11, 16 [f] yevta 
 avTTJ\ 6/j.ola ecrrl TratSt ois KT\. 13,52. Luke 
 
 7, 31. 32. 12, 36. (-Xen. Ath. 3. 10 o/xoioi 
 rots ofioiois (vvoi etcri.) In condition, cir 
 cumstances, Matt. 13, 31 6fj.oia (<rr\v rj /3acr. 
 T>V ovp. KOKKcp aivaTTfats. v. 33. 44. 45. 47. 
 20, 1. Luke 6, 47. 48. 49. 13, 18. 19. 21. 
 1 John 3, 2. Rev. 18, 18. So Hdian. 4. 13. 
 17. Xen. Hi. 1. 27. 
 
 2. just like, equal, the same with ; e. g. 
 in kind or nature, Jude v. 7 rbv op-oiov rov- 
 TOIS rpoTTov. (Palaeph. 29. 3.) In conduct, 
 character, once c. gen. John 8, 55 eo-o^at 
 OJJLOIOS vfi&v, ^fvaTrjs. (Comp. Ecclns. 13, 
 16. Xen. An. 4. 1. 17.) In authority, 
 dignity, power, Matt. 22, 39. Mark 12, 31. 
 Rev. 13, 4. So Ecclus. 44, 19. Jos. Ant. 
 
 8. 14. 1 OVK a>v op.oios at>r<5 rfj crrparia. 
 
 o/z.otOTT/9, TTJTOS, 17 (o/iotor,) likeness, 
 similitude, Heb. 4, 15. 7, 15. Sept. for 
 V Gen. 1, 11. 12. Plut. Galb. 9. Plato 
 Theaet. 158. c. 
 
 O/iOtow, >, f. coo-o), (o/xotoj,) to make 
 like, e. g. 
 
 1. Pass. aor. 1 ofioivZwv, to be or 
 become like, c. dat. e. g. in external form, 
 Acts 14, 11 ot 3eol . . . 6/ioi<p3f vrts di>3pco- 
 n-oty. Sept. for Ma^ Is. 40, 18. (Diod. Sic. 
 
 4. 78.) In conduct, character, Matt. 6, 8. 
 (Ecclus. 13, 1. Thuc. 3. 82.) In condition, 
 circumstances, Heb. 2, 17 roTy u8eX</>oIs 
 
 i at. Once c. u>s, Rom. 9, 29 as 
 v co/xoiwS^ej , quoted from Is. 1, 
 
 9 where Sept. so for ^ na n So Time. 
 5. 103. 
 
 2. Genr. in comparisons, to liken, to com 
 pare, c. ace. et dat. Pass, to be likened, to 
 be like, c. dat. Matt. 7, 24 6/*oia>cra> avrbv 
 dvSpl (ppovip.{j>. v. 26 6/ioico37j(reT<n dvftpl 
 /zcopw. 11,16. 13, 24. 18, 23. 22, 2. 25, 1. 
 Mark 4, 30. Luke 7, 31. 13, 18. 20. Sept. 
 for rtn n Cant. 2, 17. 7, 7. Ps. 102, 7. 
 Ecclus. 25, 14. Philostr. Vit. Sophist. 2. 
 27. 3 Kai TTOU KOI r<u Hd\e/j,a>vi O/JLOLOVVTGJV 
 O.VTOV. 
 
 Ofj,oia>fi,a, aros, TO, (6/iotdw,) pr. some 
 thing made like, a likeness, i. e. 
 
 1. a form, shape, image; Phil. 2,7 eV 
 o/^oico/iart di SpcoTrou yevopfvos, parall. with 
 popcpt. Rev. 9, 1. Sept. for r$m 2 K. 
 16, 10 ; tabs i Sam. 6, 5 ; tT^n Deut. 4, 
 16; MJ^FJ Ex. 20, 4. Aristot. Eth. 8. 10. 
 Plato Phae dr. 250. a, b. 
 
 2. Abstr. likeness, resemblance, simili 
 tude ; Rom. 1, 23 fv 6/jLoiu>naTi eiKovo* 
 <p%apTov dj/3p&>7rou, i. q. iv fiKovi opo ia KT\. 
 an image like to corruptible man. 5, 14 eVt 
 rw 6p,otco/iari rrjs Trapa^Sda-ecuj ASu/x, i. e. 
 a transgression like that of Adam. 6, 5. 
 8, 3. 
 
 o/io09, adv. (o/zotof,) in like manner, 
 likewise ; Matt. 22, 26 6fioia>s KOI 6 Sevrepoj. 
 Mark 4, 16. Luke 5, 10. John 6, 11. 1 Cor. 
 
 7, 3. 4. al. Also 6/iotW note tv Luke 3, 11. 
 10, 37. al. Sept. Esth. 1,18. Hdian. 1. 10. 
 14. Xen. Mem. 4. 7. 8. -f- 
 
 o/iOtwcri 1 ?, e<ay, jj, (6p.oida>,) pr. a liken 
 ing, comparison, Luc. pro Imag. 19. Plato 
 Rep. 454. c. In N. T. likeness, resem- 
 blance; James 3, 9 roi>s di/Sp. TOVS xa3 
 6/j.oiaxriv SeoC yfyovoras, in allusion to Gen. 
 
 1, 26 where Sept. for niEiS ; also for 
 rnxn EZ. i, 10. Dan. 10, ie ; n^sR Ez. 
 
 8, 10. 
 
 o/u,oXo<ye&), w, f. jyo-w, (o/ioXoyor ; 6/idr, 
 6fj.ov, Xeyw,) pr. ^o speak or soy together, 
 in common, i. e. the same things ; hence to 
 hold the same language, i. q. to assent, to 
 accord, to agree with, c. dat. Jos. Ant. 8. 6. 
 
 2. Hdot. 1. 23, 171. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 19. 
 Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. to accord with, to agree to do any 
 thing ; hence i. q. to promise, c. dat. et infin. 
 Matt. 14, 7 /ze3 opKov a>p.o\6yr)crev airy 
 dovvai o tciv alrrjcrrjTai. [Acts 7, 17.] Jos. 
 Ant. 8. 4. 3. Plut. Consol. ad Apoll. 5. 
 Xen. An. 7. 4. 22. 
 
 2. to concede, to admit, to confess, e. g. a 
 charge, c. ace. et dat. Acts 24, 14 6/ioXoyo 
 e TOVTO (TGI, OTI KT\. Also of sins, c. aca 
 
6jj,o\oyta 
 
 507 
 
 rit apaprlas 1 John 1, 9. Ecclus. 4, 29. 
 Hdian. 1. 6. 8. Xen. An. 1.6.1. 
 
 3. to confess publicly, to acknowledge 
 openly, to profess ; so c. ace. of kindr. noun, 
 1 Tim. 6, 12 top.o\6yr]cras TTJV K. 6p.o\oyiav, 
 comp. Buttm. } 131. 4. With accus. genr. 
 Acts 23, 8 <aptcratoi 8e 6/xoXoyoCcrt ra d/i- 
 (froTfpa. Rev. 3, 5 in later edit. Also c. inf. 
 Tit. 1,16 Sfoi/ 6/ioAoyov<rn> eiSeVai. (Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 3. 9.) With particip. for infin. 
 Buttm. ^ 144. 6. b. Matth. { 555. n. 2. 
 1 John 4, 2 TTOV Trvfvp.a 6 6/xoXoyei irjcrovv 
 Xp. tv crapKi eXj/Xu3oTa. v. 3. 2 John 7 ; 
 particip. oWa impl. John 9, 22. Rom. 10, 9 
 fav ofJioXoyrjcrrjS . . xvpiov [6Vra] irjcrovv. 
 Absol. but with ace. and particip. impl. 
 John 12, 42. Rom. 10, 10. (Ml V. H. 2. 
 44 ; impl. 2. 4.) With on instead of infin. 
 Matth. 539. 1. Heb. 11,13 op-oXoyycravrts 
 OTI Voi KOI IT. fltriv. 1 John 4, 15. (/El. 
 V. H. 12. 2.) With OTI as citing the ex 
 press words, Matt. 7, 23. John I, 20 bis. 
 Peculiar is the construction 6/ioXoyeIj> 
 tv TIVI, to confess in behalf of any one, i. e. 
 to profess or acknowledge him, see in eV 
 no. 3. c. a. Matt. 10, 32 bis. Luke 12, 8 bis. 
 By Hebraism, with dat. of per.. to acknow 
 ledge to any one, e. g. benefit-, i. q. to give 
 thanks, to praise, Heb. 13, 15 ^ftX/coi/ 6/10- 
 \oyovvT6nv TO) ov6p.aTL avrov. So Heb. 
 b nTin, Sept. eo M oXoy/co, Ps. 75, 2. 
 1 Chr. 29, 13; di>3o^oAoy/ Ez. 3, 11. 
 Comp. in dvSo/ioAoyta) and eo^oAoye co 
 no. 1. 
 
 o/ioXoyta, as, 17. (o^oXoye a),) assent, 
 accord, agreement, Luc. Paras. 30. Thuc. 
 5. 21 ; an admission, confession, Plato Gorg. 
 461. c. In N. T. confession, profession, 
 subjective; 1 Tim. 6, 12. 13 rfjv Ka\fjv 
 6p.o\oyiav, comp. in 6/ioAoyeco no. 3. 2 Cor. 
 9, 1 3 eVr 777 vTroTayfj rf/s 6p.o\oyias vp.wv 
 KT\. your subjection (as the effect) of your 
 profession. Heb. 10, 23 Kcrre^M/iei/ 6/10X0- 
 yiav TTJJ (\TriSos, i. e. our profession of hope 
 (comp. 3, 6. 14). Heb. 3, 1. 4, 14. Sept. 
 for "1^3 vow Jer. 44, 25. So Philo de Somn. 
 I. p. 654. 16, 6 p.fv 5e p-eyas ap^itptvs Trjs 
 upoXoyias KT\. 
 
 ofjioXoyov/Meva)*;, adv. (6/ioXoy/w,) by 
 consent of all, confessedly, without contro 
 versy, 1 Tim. 3, 16. Jos. Ant, 2. 9. 6. 
 Diod. Sic. 13. 26. Xen. CEc. 1.11. 
 
 ofJLOTexyos, ov, 6, rj, adj. (6/104-. r^vr),) 
 of the same trade, Acts 18, 3. Jos. Ant. 
 18. 13. 4. Luc. Demon. 23. Plato Theag. 
 125. e. 
 
 6[JLOV, adv. (genit. of 6/ios,) at the same 
 place or time, together ; e. g. of place, John 
 
 21,2; of time John 4, 36. 20, 4. Sept. of 
 time for 1H? Job 34, 29. So of place ^Es- 
 chin. 21. 12. Xen. Conv. 1. 3; of time 
 Hdian. 1. 11. 13. Xen. An. 1. 10. 8. 
 
 ovos, 6, fj, adj. (cfidr, tf>pr]v,} 
 of the same mind, like-minded, 1 Pet. 3, 8 ; 
 comp. Rom. 12, 16. Hes. Theog. 60. Plut. 
 de Def. Orac. 40. 
 
 o/ioo, obsol. theme, see op.wp.i. 
 
 o/i&>9, advers. part. (6/io j,) pr. as Engl. 
 at the same time, i. e. nevertheless, notwith 
 standing, yet ; so as strengthened by pevToi, 
 John 12, 42 o/x<ay p-evroi Kal KT\. Engl. yet 
 nevertheless. So simpl. 2 Mace. 15, 5. 
 Hdian. 7. 7. 4. Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 21 ; with 
 HfVToi ib. 2. 3. 22. Cebet. Tab. 33. In the 
 usage of Paul, 5/iwy is put before a refer 
 ence to something inferior, out of which 
 there then follows a conclusion a minore 
 ad majus, i. q. yet even; l.Cor. 14, 7 ojutus 
 ra ti^v^a (pavrfv StSoira KT\. yet eten as to 
 inanimate musical instruments you require 
 them to give forth distinct sounds ; how 
 much more then, etc. Gal. 3, 15 yet even a 
 man s covenant, duly confirmed, no one an- 
 nulleth. Others assume a trajection of 
 o/iwf, see Winer 5 65. 4. 
 
 ovap, TO, only Sing, in nom. and accus 
 a dream; in N. T. only Kar ovap, in a 
 dream, Matt. 1, 20. 2, 12. 13. 19. 22. 27, 
 
 19, Heb. Bibrra, Sept. ca3 vnvov, Gen. 
 
 20, 6. 31, 11. So /car ovap Strabo 4. 1. 4. 
 p. 179. Artemid. 1. 2. 9. JEl V. H. 1. 13. 
 Earlier writers used simply wap, Dem. 429. 
 18. Xen. Conv. 4. 33. See Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 421 sq. 
 
 ovapiov, ov, TO, (dim. 6Vor,) a young 
 ass, John 12, 14, comp. v. 15. Athen. 13 
 p. 582. c. 
 
 oveioi^o), f. itrca, (6Vi8oy.) to defame, 
 to disparage, to reproach. 
 
 1. Genr. i. q. to rail at, to revile, to assail 
 with opprobrious words, in later usage with 
 ace. of pers. Matt. 5, 1 1 ftaicapti eorf, orav 
 oi/eiSiVcoo-iv vp.as. 27, 44. Mark 15, 32. 
 Luke 6, 22. 1 Tim. 4, 10. 1 Pet. 4, 14. 
 Rom. 15, 3, quoted from Ps. 69, 10 where 
 Sept. for rpn ; as also Ps. 42, 11. 2 Sam. 
 
 21, 21. Ecclus. 22, 20. Plato Apol. 30. e ; 
 absol. Horn. II. 1. 211. 
 
 2. Spec, to reproach icith any thing, i. q. 
 to upbraid, to chide; e. g. c. ace. pers. et 
 OTI, Matt. 11, 20 TOT* TJP^CLTO oretSifof TUS 
 TToXtis OTI ov fjifTtvoTjcrav. With ace. of 
 thing/or which, Mark 16, 14 TIJI/ atnarTiav 
 avTvv. (So TIVO. SioYi Luc. Tox. 61 ; TIVI TI 
 Hdian. 3. 8. 12; Tivd Plato Phaedo 18. p. 
 
508 
 
 31. a; on ib. 17. p. 29. e.) Absol. to up 
 braid sc. with benefits conferred, James 1, 
 5. SoEcclus. 41, 29 ; nvi TI Pol. 9. 31. 4. 
 
 ^ oO, 6, (owSi a>.) a reviling, 
 reproach, contumely. Rom. 15, 3 ot omSt- 
 07101 Ttav ovei8i^dvTO>v ere. see in ovetdifa no. 
 1. 1 Tim. 3,7. Heb. 10,33. 11, 26 TwoVeiS. 
 TOU X/j. reproach like that of Christ. 13, 13. 
 Sept. for nenn Ps. 69, 10. Joel 2, 19. 
 1 Mace. 10, Vo! Menand. Prol. p. 118. d. 
 A late word. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 512. 
 
 Ol/etoo?, eos, ovs, TO, pr. fame, name, re 
 port, good or bad ; e. g. good fame, renown, 
 Eurip. Phoen. 835 <d\\itrTov oi/eiSos. 
 Usually and in N. T. ill fame, reproach, dis 
 grace; Luke 1, 25 d<pf\etv TO oveiSos p.ov, 
 spoken of sterility, in allusion to Gen. 30, 
 23 where Sept. for riB nn; comp. Is. 4, 1. 
 So Diod. Sic. 1. 93. Xeri. Yen. 13. 8 ; also 
 reproach in words, Luc. Alex. 45. Dem. 
 19.8. * 
 
 see ovvT]p.i. 
 
 Ovrj<Tifj,o<>, ov, 6, (ovlvrjp.1, pr. profitable,) 
 Onesimus, pr. n. of a slave of Philemon, 
 converted under Paul s preaching at Rome, 
 and sent back by him to Philemon with an 
 epistle ; Col. 4, 9. Philem. 10. 
 
 Ovr)o-l(f)0po<;, ov, 6, (ovrjo-is, (e /><a, pr. 
 profit-bringing,) Onesiphorus, pr. n. of a 
 Christian, probably at Ephesus, 2 Tim. 1, 
 16. 4, 19. 
 
 Oft/coy, TJ, ov, (6Voy,) pertaining to an 
 ass e. g. fj.v\os OVIKOS, an ass-millstone, 
 i. e. turned by an ass, a large upper-mill 
 stone, Matt. 18, 6. Luke 17, 2. Mark 9, 42 
 Lachm. See in p.v\os. 
 
 OVll>7)/J,l, f. ovfjcra), to be of use, to profit, 
 c. ace. JEl V. H. 7. 14. Xen . An. 3. 1. 38 ; 
 to gratify Xen. An. 6. 1. 32. In N. T. 
 only Mid. ovivap.ai, aor. 2 Opt. ovai/jujv, to 
 hate profit, to have joy, c. gen. of or from 
 any one ; Phil. 20 val, tyd> crov 6vaip.Tjv. 
 Buttm. J132. 10. i. Matth. { 327. 4. So 
 Aristoph. Thesm. 469 ovatp.r)v TWI/ TCKI/OH/. 
 Dem. 842. 10. On the forms, espec. aor. 
 2 Indie. <avrjp.rjv or <Lvdp.r)v, see Buttm. 1 14. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 12 sq. 
 
 ovofta, arcs, TO, the name of a person or 
 thing ; Heb. ott) 
 
 1. Pr. and genr. name ; Matt. 10, 2 TWJ/ 
 Swd. drroordXwi rot ovop.aTa to Ti TOVTU. 
 Luke 1, 63 Iwaw/js ecrrl TO ovofia avTov. 
 10, 20. Acts 13, 8. Phil. 4, 3. Rev. 13, 1 
 ovop.a j3\ao-(f)T]iuas, a blasphemous name. 
 17, 3. 21, 14. al. So Mark 6, 14 (pavfpov 
 yap iyevfTo TO ovop.a avrov, his name had 
 
 become known abroad; others fame, but un 
 necessarily, comp. Matt. 14, 1. The verb 
 KoAew to call sometimes takes oVo/ia with 
 the name in apposit. Matt. 1,21 KaXea-fis TO 
 ovop.a avTov irjo-ovv. v. 23. 25 ; so Mark 3, 
 16 fTT&rjKf TW Sifuovi wopa litrpov. v. 17. 
 Also KaXelv Tiva TW ovopari TOUTW, i. e. by 
 this name, Luke 1, 61 ; K. eVi TW wopcm 
 after the name of any one, v. 59 ; see in 
 KaXe co no. 2. a, and ri II. 3. c. /3. Further, 
 ov TO ovofia [e o-Ti] Mark 14, 32 ; TO ovofM 
 avTov V. avTJJs [eyeVero] Luke 1,5; oVojia 
 /tot, o-ot, aiiTw, i. e. my, thy, his name, Mark 
 5, 9. Luke 2, 25. John 1, 6. 3, 1. al. Matth. 
 ^308. (Hdian. 4. 12. 1. Xen. Mem. 3. 11. 
 1. An. 1. 5. 4.) Ace. ai/3pw7ro? . . . TOV- 
 vopa *lc0o-r]<p sc. KaXovpfvos, Matt. 27, 57. 
 (Palaeph. 40. 3 Tovvopa. JEl V. H. 13. 27 
 init. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 11.) But also dat. 
 i/3pa)7roff . . . oi/o /zcm 2t /io)j/. Simon by name, 
 Matt. 27, 32. Mark 5, 22. Luke 1, 5. Acts 
 5, 1. Buttm. j 133. 4. b. (Paheph. 2. 4. 
 Xen. An. 1. 4. 11.) Adv. KOT oi/o/na, by 
 name, severally, John 10, 3. 3 John 15. 
 Meton. name is put for the person or per 
 sons bearing that name, e. g. Luke 6, 22 
 Kal eK/3aXo-i TO ovop.a vfi<i> wy Trovr/pov, 
 see in eVe/3aXXa> no. 1. Acts 1, 15 ^v rt 
 ox\os ovopaTcov KT\. Rev. 3, 4. 11, 13. So 
 Sept. tg dpi%p.ov di>ofj.dT<ov for fTraUJ "IBD522 
 Num. 26, 53. 55. Comp. Jos. Ant. 1.19. 
 10 Ta [pecora] eV oj/o /iaTt TW laAc&>/3ou 
 TiKTopfva. Lat. nomen Caeninum for 
 Caeninenses, Liv. 1. 10; nomen Etrus- 
 cum, the Tuscan nation, ib. 7. 17. 
 
 2. Implying authority, e. g. to come or 
 to do any thing in or by the name of any 
 one, i. e. using his name ; as his messen 
 ger, envoy, representative ; by his author 
 ity, with his sanction. E. g. ev OI/O /ZCZTI 
 TWOS, see eV no. 3. c. /3. Acts 4, 7 eV 770/0 
 8vvdp.fi, TJ ev Trolq oVo/ian KT\. Matt. 21, 9 
 6 epjf6fuvos fv ov. Kvplov. 23, 39. John 5, 
 43 bis. 10, 25 eV T ov. TOV irarpos. Mark 
 16, 17 eV TW ov. /j-ov 8ai/j.6vta f /t/SaXovcrt. 
 Luke 10, 17. 24, 47. John 14, 26. Acts 3, 
 6 (v TW ov. I. Xp. [Xe ya) o~ot] eyapf KT\. 
 9, 27. 28. 1 Cor. 5, 4. 2 Thess. 3, 6. James 
 5, 14; atTeii eV TW ov. lr)o~ov John 14, 
 13. 14. al. Comp. below in no. 4. b. So 
 eVt TW ovop-uTt TIVOS, id. see in tni II. 3. 
 C. /3. Mark 9, 39 6? 7roirjo~fi 8vvap.iv eVl TW 
 ov. p.ov. Luke 9, 49 ; XoXeiv v. Sidda-Keiv 
 fnl TW 6v. Irjo-ov, Acts 4, 17. 18. 5, 28. 40, 
 Of impostors, Matt. 24, 5. Mark 13, 6. 
 Luke 21, 8. Dat. TW ov6p.aTi TIVOS- id. 
 Matt. 7. 22 TW crw ovopciTi 7!-po<prjTfV(rafj,(i 
 KT\. Mark 9, 38 ; comp. in 8aip.6vwv no. 2 
 d. So eiri Tc5 ov. Jos. Ant. 4. 1. 1. Dem 
 
ovo^ia 
 
 509 
 
 495 7. ib. 917. 27 ; IK TOV 6v. Jos. Ant. 7. 
 1.5. 
 
 3. As implying character, dignity, i. e. the 
 name and dignity to which one is entitled ; 
 Matt. 10, 41 bis, 6 8(\ofJ.fvos 7rpo(pi ]TT]v ds 
 ovop.a TrpofpijTov, i. e. in the character of a 
 prophet, as a prophet, v. 42 ; see in ds no. 
 3. e. Matt. 18, 5 or tav Se^rjrai irai&iov ev 
 iiri TO> ovofiaTi u-ov, i. e. in the character of 
 being mine, as my disciple. Mark 9, 37. 
 Comp. the fuller expression in v. 41 ev 
 ovofiari on Xpiorou tore. So Eph. 1, 21 
 vTrepdva) . . . TTOVTOS ovopaTos KT\. Phil. 2, 
 9 ovofJM TO virep iriiv ovofta. Acts 4, 12. 
 Heb. 1, 4. Rev. 19, 16. So Act. Thorn. 
 {27. Jos. Ant. 12. 4. 1 (ptpvjjs ovopaTi. 
 Hence, mere name, as opp. to reality, Rev. 
 3, 1 ovoyLa fx (ls OTi fi s Ka VfK pos (i- i. e. 
 thou art said to live, thou livest in name 
 only. So Jos. Ant. 8. 13. 6. Horn. Od. 4. 
 710 ; opp. tpyov Eurip. Phoen. 512. 
 
 4. Emphat. TO tropa TOV 3eov, TOV 
 Kvpiov. TOV Xpiorov, the name of God, of 
 Christ, as a periphrase for God himself, 
 Christ himself, in all their being, attributes, 
 relations, manifestations ; genr. Matt. 28, 
 19 j3arrriovTfs ai/Tovs els TO ovofta TOV TTO- 
 rpos Kal TOV vlov Kal row dyiov irv(vfj.aTos, 
 see in fZairrifa no. 2. a. y. Spec. a) 
 Of God, where his name is said to be hal 
 lowed, revealed, invoked, honoured, and the 
 like ; Matt. 6, 9 dytao-37]Ta> TO ovopd <rov, 
 
 1. e. all that the name of God includes. God 
 himself in all his attributes and relations. 
 Luke 11, 2. 1, 49 ayiov TO ovopa avTov. 
 John 12, 28. 17, 6 t(pav(pu>crd crov TO ovo^ia 
 TO IS oV3p. Rom. 9, 17. Heb. 2, 12 (comp. 
 Sept. and Did Ex. 9, 16). After fVtAcaXe oj 
 to invoke, Acts 2, 21. 9, 14. Rom. 10, 13; 
 also 2 Tim. 2, 19. So of praise, homage, 
 Rom. 15, 9 TW OVOJMTL o-ov ^aXw. Heb. 6. 
 10. 13, 15. Rev. 11, 18; so Matt. 28, 19. 
 Acts 15,14 Xa/3f tv e e3i>a>i/ Xaov TOJ oVo- 
 p,aTt atiTou, i. e. in honour of his name, of 
 himself, comp. v. 17 ; here Rec. has eVi, 
 see in II. 3. h. John 17, 11. 12 njpfij/ 
 avTois tv TCO ov6p.ari <rov, i. e. in the know- 
 led 0-e and observance, enjoyment of thy 
 name, of thyself. Vice versa Rom. 2, 24 
 TO ov. TOV 2eou ot vp.ds /SXao-cpTj^etTat KT\. 
 1 Tim. 6, 1. (2 Mace. 8, 4.) So genr. 
 Sept. and nti Gen. 4, 26. Ps. 5, 12. Is. 26, 
 8. al. See Heb. Lex. art. OTSJ no. 2. b) 
 Of Christ, as Messiah and Lord, where his 
 name is said to be honoured, revered, be 
 lieved on, invoked, and the like. Acts 19, 
 17 fp.tya\vv(TO TO ovofJM TOV Kvpiov irjo-ov. 
 Phil. 2, 10. 2 Thess. 1, 12. Rom. 1,5. Rev. 
 
 2, 13. 3, 8. Matt. 12. 21 eV TW ov. OVTOV 
 
 {%vr) (\Tuov(rt. John 1, 12 TO!J 7ri(TTtvovo-it> 
 fls TO 5vofj,a avTov. 2. 23. 3, 18. Acts 3, 16, 
 1 John 3, 23. 5, 13. After eVi/caXeo) to in 
 voke, 1 Cor. 1, 2. Acts 9,21. 22, 16. After 
 ^SaTTTi fw, e. g. (Is TO oVo/za TOU K. irjo-ov 
 Acts 8, 16. 19, 5. Matt. 28, 19; /3. eVt TW 
 6v. I. Acts 2, 38 ; /3. eV TW ov. TOV K. Acts 
 10, 48 ; see in /SaTrrt fco no. 2. a. y ; comp. 
 Rom. 6, 3 /SCOT, tls Xpiorov. (Hence by 
 antith. also @air. fls TO ov. Hav\ov 1 Cor. 1, 
 13. 15.) Where benefits are said to be re 
 ceived in or through the name of Christ, 
 John 20, 31 iva Trio-Tevovres farjv fXT rf * v 
 TW ovufjiaTi avTov. Acts 4, 10. 30. 10, 43. 
 1 Cor. 6, 11. 1 John 2, 12. Where any 
 thing is done in his name, i. e. in and 
 through him, through faith in him, Eph. 5, 
 20 evxapicrTovvTfs . . . tv Ttp ov. TOV K. I. 
 Xp. TW 2<Fc3 Kal Trarpi, comp. Col. 3, 17 7rui>- 
 TO \TroitiTf\ tv ov. Kvpiov I. fi/xaptorovvrfs 
 T<U 3ew /cat TT. 81 avTov. Here might also 
 be referred the phrase aiTe iv tv ovopaTi Xp. 
 see above in no. 2. Espec. the name of 
 Christ stands for Christ as the Head of the 
 gospel dispensation, i. q. Christ and his 
 cause, as Acts 8, 12 tvayyeXi^ontvos TU . . . 
 TOV ov. I. Xp. 9, 15. Matt. 18, 20 (rvwjy/xe- 
 voi fls TO ffjiov ovo/j-a, see in ds no. 3. d. a. 
 So where evils and sufferings are endured 
 did TO ovofia TOV Xp. Matt. 10, 22 ^ucro{J/i- 
 voi Bia TO ovop.d p.ov, i. e. on account of me 
 and my cause, as believing on me. Mark 
 13, 13. John 15, 21. Rev. 2, 3; eV ov. Xp. 
 1 Pet. 4. 14; tvfKfv TOV ov. Xp. Matt. 19, 
 29. Luke 21, 12; vrrep ToC OVO/JL. Xpto-ToC. 
 Acts 5, 41. 9, 16. 21, 13. 3 John 7. al. 
 Or where one opposes and blasphemes TO 
 ovopa TOV Xp. Acts 26, 9. James 2, 7. 
 c) Of the Holy Spirit, in the formula of 
 baptism, Matt. 28, 19; see above, no. 4. 
 init. + 
 
 OVOfJ,d(O, f. do-o), (6Vop.a,) 1. to name, 
 to call by name, c. ace. ovopa, to name the 
 name of any one, to call or pronounce his 
 name, with Vi Tiva Acts 19, 13. (Sept. for 
 2(33 Lev. 24, 16.) Also to call upon, to in 
 voke, to profess the name of any one, 2 Tim. 
 2,19 TTGJ 6 ovop.da>v TO ovopa Kvpiov. Sept. 
 for-P3Tn Is. 26, -13. Jer. 20, 9. (Hdian. 5. 
 5. 13. Xen. Apol. Soc. 24.) Pass, to be 
 named, i. e. to be mentioned, heard of, 
 Imuicn ; Rom. 15, 20 OTTOV oVo/ido-Sj; Xpt- 
 OTO J, i. e. where Christ is already known 
 and professed. Eph. 1, 21. 5, 3 /i^Se oVo- 
 paeo-Zco tv vpiv lei it not be so much as 
 named among you. 1 Cor. 5, 1. Comp. 
 Sept. for rottJ Esth. 9, 4. Genr. Act. Luc. 
 Hale. 5. Hdot. 1. 86. Xen. Conv. 6. 1. 
 Pass. Hdian. 2. 3. 15. 
 
ovos 
 
 510 
 
 , in 
 
 2. Spec, to name, to call, to give a name 
 or appellation, with two ace. Luke 6, 13. 
 14 bv KCU wv6fj.ao~f Tlerpov. Pass. 1 Cor. 5, 
 
 11. With e< TWOS, to be named from or 
 after any one, Eph. 3, 15. Sept. for io;3 
 Gen. 26, 18. Jer. 25, 29. Palaeph. 4.Y. 
 Hdian. 3. 10. 9 ; e/c TWOS Soph. (Ed. R. 
 1036. Xen. Mem. 4. 5. 12. 
 
 01/09, ov, 6, fj, an ass, male or female, 
 Matt. 21, 2. 5. 7. Luke 13, 15. 14, 5. John 
 
 12, 15. Sept. for -ii nn Gen. 12, 16 ; yinx 
 Judg. 5, 10. Luc. Asin. 51. Xen. An. 2. 
 1. 6. 
 
 oWft)?, adv. (wi>, eifit,) rea%, 
 very deed ; Mark 1 1, 32 on ovr&s 
 $y. Lake 23, 47. 24, 34. John 8, 36. 1 Cor. 
 14, 25. Gal. 3, 21. 2 Pet. 2, 18 Rec. With 
 the art. 6, 17 oVta? as adj. real, true, 1 Tim. 
 5,3.5.16. [6,19.] Buttm. $ 125. 6. Sept. for 
 n:rx Num. 22, 37. Hdian. 4. 12. 9. Xen. 
 Conv. 9. 5 ; c. art. Jos. Ant. 15. 3. 5. JEl. 
 V. H. 2. 10. 
 
 0^09, tos, ovs, TO, (ogvs,*) pr. sharp wine, 
 vinegar, Pol. 12. 2. 8. Xen. An. 2. 3. 14 ; 
 genr. vinegar, sour wine, posca, vinum cul- 
 palum, i. e. cheap poor wine, which mixed 
 with water was a common drink, espec. for 
 the poorer classes and soldiers ; see Adam s 
 Rom. Ant. p. 393. Wetst. N. T. I. p. 535. 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Posca. Sept. and jrjph 
 Num. 6, 3. Ruth 2, 14. Plut. Cato Maj. 1 
 fin. v8o>p 8 firivfV firi TTJS crrpaTfias, 
 
 Comp. Ulpian 12. 38. Mingled with myrrh 
 or bitter herbs it was given to persons about 
 to be executed in order to stupefy them ; 
 Babyl. Tr. Sanhedrin fol. 43. 1. c. 6, " Dixit 
 R. Chasda , Qui ducitur ad mortem, ei da- 
 tur bibendum granum turis in poculo vini, 
 ut distrahatur mens ejus," in allusion to 
 Prov. 31, 6. Comp. Galeu. Simpl. Med. 
 15. 19. So in N. T. genr. vinegar, pos 
 ca, Matt. 27, 48 Xa/Swi/ a-iroyyov, 77X770-0? 
 Tf oovs. Mark 15, 36. Luke 23, 36. John 
 19, 29 bis. 30. Also Matt. 27, 34 Sos 
 
 p.ffiiyp.evov, i. q. in Mark 15, 23 
 
 i ov olvov. 
 
 ofu?, tla, v, 1. sharp, keen, having a 
 .sharp edge ; e. g. po^aia, Speiravov, Rev. 
 1,16. 2,12. 14, 14. 17. 18 bis. 19, 15. 
 Sept. for !Tnn I s . 49, 2. Ez. 5, 1. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 8. 1 bis. Hdot. 3. 8. 
 
 2. quick, swift, from the idea of sharp 
 ness, eagerness, vehemence; Rom. 3, 15 
 cecs ol Ttobfs avTcoi/, Comp. Is. 59, 7. Sept. 
 for bfe Amos 2, 15. Hdian. 1. 9. 20. Plut. 
 Romul. 10. Xen. Eq. 1. 13. 
 
 O7r7 ?j rjs, 17, an opening, hole, e. g. a fis 
 sure in the earth or rocks, Heb. 11, 38; 
 a fountain, James 3, 11. Sept. for ^P-. 
 Ex. 33, 22; D^an Qbad. 3. Athen. 13* p. 
 569. b. m. V. H. 4. 28. Plut. de Solert. 
 Anim. 16 pen. 
 
 OTTia-^feVj adv. (oms,) pr. from behind, 
 Buttm. ^116. 1. In N. T. only of place, 
 behind, after, at the back of any person or 
 thing. (In the classics also of time, Horn. 
 II. 9. 515. Pind. Nem. 7. 149.) 
 
 1. Adv. behind, at the back; Mark 5, 27 
 e XSoCo-a ei rw o^Xw O7ria-Se.y, i. e. from be 
 hind. Matt. 9, 20. Luke 8, 44. Rev. 4, 6. 
 
 5, 1 /3i/3Xi oi> ytypafip.fvov fcra&fv KOL oirt- 
 trSev, a scroll written within and on the back. 
 Arr. Alex. M. 1. 15. 12. Xen. An. 5. 6. 9. 
 
 2. Prep, with a genit. Buttm. 146. 3 ; 
 behind, after, Matt. 15, 23 xpafei onHrSfv 
 iniSiv. Luke 23, 26. Sept. for n< ]rix Gen. 
 18, 10. Ruth 2, 7. Palaeph. 29. 5. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 3. 25. 
 
 OTTUTtt, adv. (onis, comp. Buttm. $ 115. 
 6,) behind, back, backwards, of place and 
 time. 
 
 1. Adv. behind, back, in N. T. only of 
 place ; Luke 7, 38 irrua-a oVt erco. Matt. 24, 
 18 /u.r) eTTtorpf^arw OTTICTO), sc. to his 
 house. Sept. for t^nhx l K. 18,37. So 
 Luc. Asin. 51. JE.L V/H. 13. 3. Plato 
 Phsedr. 254. e. With the art. TO. oTrt crw, 
 pr. tilings behind, also fls TO. oTrtVco i. q. 
 backward, back; comp. Buttm. 125. 6. 
 So ampx. fls ret o7rl.(Ta>, to go back, to fall 
 back, pr. John 1 8, 6 ; trop. from a teacher, 
 
 6, 66 ; /SXeVco tis TO. OTT. Luke 9, 62 ; a-Tpe- 
 (pofj.ai fls TU on. to turn back i. e. about, 
 John 20, 14 ; eVierrpe^aro) fls ra OTT. to 
 turn back, sc. to one s house, Mark 13, 16. 
 Luke 17, 31. Trop. Phil. 3, 14 TO oVurca 
 f nikav Sa.vop.evos, i. e. former attainments in 
 Christian life and holiness. Sept. fls TO. 
 oV. for Tins 2 Sam. 1, 22 ; nrw Gen. 19, 
 17. 26. So els TOVTTIO-V Hdian. 5. 6. 17. 
 thuc. 4. 4. 
 
 2. Prep, with a genit. Buttm. { 146. 3. 
 often in N. T. and Sept. but not usual in 
 the classics ; spoken both of place and time, 
 a) Of place, behind, after ; e.g. place where, 
 Rev. 1, 10 fJKOVO-a OTTIO-CI) fiou <paVT)v. be~ 
 hind me. (Sept. for ">lns Cant. 2, 9. Is. 
 57, 8.) With verbs implying motion after 
 any one, i. e. a following as a disciple, par 
 tisan, or otherwise ; e. g. aKoXov3et orn crw 
 /zov Matt. 10, 38 ; 8fvre orrtVo) /xou 4, 19. 
 Mark 1, 17; e XSelK, aTreXSeu/, Matt. 16, 24. 
 Mark 1, 20. 8, 34. Luke 9, 23. 14,27. 
 John 12, 19. So Luke 19, 14. 21, 8. Acts 
 
511 
 
 5, 37. 20, 30. Trop. 1 Tim. 5, 15. 2 Pet. 
 2,10. Jude 7. Rev. 12,15. Pragn. Rev. 
 13, 3, see in 3<u/p,dfa> no. 2. d. Sept. pr. for 
 nnx 1 Sam. 13, 7. 2 K. 6, 19; trop. 
 Deut. 4, 3. 2 K. 13, 2. (Palajph. 32. 2.) 
 Also implying motion behind any one, to 
 his rear, in expressions of aversion ; so vira- 
 ye oiria-ca fiov, get thee behind inf., i. e. 
 away, amunt thee, Matt. 4, 10 in later 
 edit. 16, 23. Mark 8, 33. Luke 4, 8. Sept. 
 and n "qx 1 K. 14, 9. Is. 38, 17. b) Of 
 time, after, as 6 OTT/O-O) p.ov ep^o /xei/os Matt. 
 3, 11. Mark 1, 7. John 1, 15. 27. 30. Sept. 
 for inx Neh. 13, 19; "nrH* 1 K. 1, 24. 
 
 OTrXt^iw, f. j a-o), (oVXov,) to make ready, 
 to prepare, e. g. food or drink, Horn. II. 11. 
 641 ; a chariot, ships, to equip, ib. 24. 190. 
 Od. 17. 288 ; to equip with arms, to arm, 
 Hdian. 1. 13. 5. Xen. Ag. 2. 7; Mid. to 
 arm oneself, to take arms, Horn. II. 8. 55. 
 Hdian. 6. 9. 6. In N. T. only Mid. to arm 
 oneself, trop. in a moral sense, c. ace. 1 Pet. 
 4, 1 vp.e is TTJV avTTjv evvoiav oTrXitracr Sf. So 
 Jos. Ant. 6. 9. 4. Soph. Elect. 996 3pdW 
 
 O7rXoi>. ou, TO , a tool, implement, e. g. 
 of an artisan Od. 3. 433 ; of a ship, plur. 
 ropes, tackle, Horn. Od. 15. 288. Hdot. 9. 
 115. In N. T. only Plur. TO. 077X0, in 
 struments, implements, e. g. 
 
 1 . Of war, weapons, arms, armour, John 
 18, 3 ; trop. 2 Cor. 6, 7. 10, 4 TO. oir\a rijs 
 (rrpaTfiai fi(j.a>v ou crapKiKa. Rom. 13, 12. 
 Sept. pr. for n n ^? Jer. 21,4; 5^ Jcr. 46, 
 3; nblT 2 Chr. 23, 10. Hdian. 2. 11. 9. 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 14. 
 
 2. Trop. instruments, with which any 
 thing is effected or done ; Rom. 6, 13 bis, 
 OTrXa dSiKia?, 6VXa SiKaiocrvvns. Sept. Prov. 
 14.7. 
 
 07TOt09, ota, olov, relat. pron. correlat. 
 with TToIor, roiof, Buttm. } 79. 5 ; what, of 
 whnt kind or sort, qualis ; hence with rot- 
 OVTOS, i. q. as. Acts 26, 29 TOIOVTOVS, onolos 
 ayw flfii. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 36.) Simpl. 
 1 Cor. 3. 13 tpyov oiroiov tern. Gal. 2, 6. 
 1 Thess. 1, 9. James 1, 24. Hdian. 6. 1. 
 1. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 13. 
 
 O7TOT6, compound relat. particle, (or*,) 
 of time, when, at what time, see Buttm. $ 1 16. 
 4, comp. J 79. 5 ; with an Indie, of what ac 
 tually took place at a certain time, Luke 6, 
 3 ; comp. Herm. ad Vig. p. 902, 916. Luc. 
 D. Deor. 5. 5. Xen. An. 2. 1. 1. 
 
 i 
 
 OTTOV, relat. adv. (TTOU.) of place, pr. 
 where, in which or what place, see Buttm. 
 ; 116. -1. comp. 579. 5. 
 
 1. Pr. and after express mention ot a 
 place, where ; so with Indie. Matt. 6, 19. 20 
 tv ovpavto, OTTOV oure <rf)S KT\. Mark 9, 44. 
 Luke It, 33. John 1, 28. al. With * 
 added pleonast. Rev. 12, 6 OTTOU e^ei CKEI 
 To rrof . v. 14; or also eV aircav 1 7, 9. Sept. 
 for C&j ">05X Judg. 18, 10. (Palaeph. 15. 2. 
 Hdian! 2. 7. 5.) With Subjunct. of that 
 which is indef. Mark 14, 14; comp. Herm. 
 ad Vig. p. 741. With e/cei emphat. in 
 the corresponding clause ; Matt. 6, 21 OTTOV 
 ydp fCTTtv 6 3. vfiaiv, tKfl eorat Kal T] KapSi a 
 vpStv. Luke 12, 34. 17, 37. John 12, 26. 
 Simpl. and including the idea of a demon 
 strative, there ichsre, Matt. 25, 24 Stplfav 
 OTTOV OVK fo-n-ftpas. v. 26. Mark 5, 40. John 
 3, 8. 7, 34. Rom. 15, 20. al. So Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 4. 16. With av, as OTTOV av, wliere- 
 soever, comp. in av II. 1 . b ; so with Sub 
 junct. Mark 9, 18 oirov av avrbv KaraXdpr}. 
 14, 9 ; OTTOU tdv id. Matt. 24, 28. Mark 6, 
 10. With Indie, impf. Mark 6, 56. So Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 5. 41, c. Subj. 
 
 2. Trop. in a wider sense, including also 
 time, manner, circumstances, etc. Col. 3, 
 11 OTTOU aim tvi "EXXnv KT\. 2 Pet. 2, 11 ; 
 c. (Kfl emphat. James 3, 16. Simpl. i. q. 
 there where Heb. 9, 16. 10, 18. So Sept. 
 Prov. 26, 20. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 11. ib. 6. 1 
 7. Also in reasoning, where, :vhereas, i. q. 
 since, 1 Cor. 3, 3 OTTOU yap eV vplv fJjXor . . . 
 ov\i crapKiKol fcrre ; comp. Buttm. 149. 
 m. 6. So Luc. D. Deor. 18. 2 fin. Hdian. 
 2. 10. 13 ; onov ye Xen. Cyr. 8. 4. 31. 
 
 3. By attract, after verbs of motion, in 
 stead ofwhilher, Buttm. J 151. I. 8. Winer 
 J 58. 7. E. g. with Indie. John 8, 21.22 
 orrou eyo) VTrdyw. 14, 4. Heb. 6, 20. So 
 OTTOU av c. Subjunct. Luke 9, 57 6Vou av 
 fmtpxn- James 3, 4. Rev. 14, 4 ; OTTOU tdv 
 id. Matt. 8, 19. Hdian. 2. 11. 8. Xen. Cyr. 
 8. 3. 23. + 
 
 f/>< />> 
 
 OTTTCtCTia, as, T], (oTTTavo), O7rraa>.,) a 
 
 sight, appearance; espec. a vision, appari- 
 tinn. Luke 1, 22. 24, 23 oTrrao-tW ayyeXwv 
 fvpaKfvai. 26, 19. 2 Cor. 12, 1. Sept. for 
 ns-na Dan. 9, 23. 10, 1. 7. 8. Anthol. Gr. 
 Lp.191. 
 
 O7TT09, 77, 6v, (oTrrdw,) roasted, broiled, 
 cooked by fire ; Luke 24, 42 Z^Suos oVroC 
 /Ltepof. Sept. for *^X Ex. 12, 8. 9. Is. 44, 
 16. Pint. Mor. II. p. 79. Plato Rep. 404. c. 
 
 07TTO), obsol. theme, fut. fyop-ai, see in 
 opdco. 
 
 , as, t), pr. late summer, dog-days, 
 that season of the year which followed TU 
 
O7TC09 
 
 512 
 
 OTTGJ? 
 
 r, and in which Sirius or the dog-star 
 ruled ; in the east this is also the season of 
 fruit, fruit-time ; Horn. II. 22. 27. Xen. 
 Hell. 3. 2. 10. Comp. II. 5. 5 and Heyne s 
 note ; also Ideler s Kalendar der Griech. u. 
 Rom. p. 15. Id. Handb. der Chron. I. p. 243. 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Astronomia III. In N. 
 T. meton. and collect, fruits; Rev. 18, 14 
 ff oirutpa TJJS em^vfjiias TTJS tyv^s, i. e. the 
 fruits in which thou hast delighted. Sept. 
 and V?E Jer. 40, 10. 12. So Hdian. 1. 6. 
 3. Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 25. 
 
 ?, relat. adv. of manner, in what 
 manner, liow, Buttm. \ 116. 4. It passes 
 over also into a conjunction, in the manner 
 that, so that. 
 
 I. Relat. Adv. in what manner, how ; 
 once in N. T. with Indie, aor. in the narra 
 tion of an actual event ; Luke 24, 20 ra 
 TTtpi irjcrov . . . STTU> s re TraptSuiKav avrbv ol 
 upXifptis KT\. Jos. B. J. procem. 2 OTTCCS 
 KaTfo-rpe\l/fv. Horn. II. 10. 545. Xen. An. 
 1. 6. 11. 
 
 II. Conjunct, pr. in such manner that, 
 and then genr. so that, that, in the various 
 senses of iva, with which it may be com 
 pared throughout, viz. TeXi/cwr, final, as 
 marking end or purpose, to the end that, in 
 order that ; but also cK/3ar(jca>?, ecbatic, as 
 marking the event, result, upshot of an ac 
 tion, so that it ivas or is so and so. This 
 latter use of Snots has been denied and sup 
 ported in the same manner and by the same 
 writers, as in iva ; see in Iva init. and note. 
 Tittm. de Synon. N. T. lib. II. p. 53 sq. 
 Winer \ 57. ult. In N. T. OTTODS is found 
 only with the Subjunctive ; though in the 
 classics it is construed with other moods, 
 like Iva. Buttm. $ 139. m. 45, 46. 
 
 1. As final, T(\iKa>s, to the end that, in 
 order that ; and Stray prj, in order that not, 
 lest ; with the Subjunctive. 
 
 a) Simply, without av. a) Preceded by 
 the present, or aorist of any mood except the 
 Indicative ; and then the Subjunct. marks 
 what it is supposed will really take place ; 
 comp. in Iva I. 1. a. E. g. pres. Matt. 6, 2 
 utcnrfp ol vTTOKpiral TTOIOVO-IV . . OTTOS &oa- 
 T^Soo~iv VTTO rail utfip. V. 16. Heb. 9, 15 ; 
 impl. 1 Pet. 2, 9. Aor. Mark 5, 23 firftrjs 
 avrf, TO.S \fipus, OTTOS cro^rj. Luke 16, 28. 
 John 11, 57. Acts 9, 12. 2 Cor. 8, 14. 
 2 Thess. 1, 12; STTOS M Acts 20, 16. 
 1 Cor. 1, 29. So Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 5. Conv. 
 8. 25. ) Preceded by the Imperative; 
 comp. in Iva I. 1. b. E. g. Imper. pres. 
 Matt. 5, 45 uyaTraTf . . . OTTOS -yeVr/cr3e viol 
 KT\. Aor. Matt. 2. 8 diniyyrtXarc p.oi, OTTOS 
 
 u vntp 
 
 xdyo) f\Uov KT\. 5, 16. 6, 4. Acts 23, 15. 
 23. 2 Cor. 8, 11 ; OTTOS p.r) Matt. 6, 18. So 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 10. y ) Preceded by the 
 future; comp. in Iva I. 1. c. Acts 24, 26. 
 8) Preceded by a past tense, see in iva I. 1. 
 d. Matt. 26, 59 ifij-nw ^(vbouapTvpiav . . . 
 OTTOS SavaToo-oo-iv avrov. Acts 9, 17. 24. 
 25, 26. Rom. 9, 17 bis. Gal. 1, 4. So 
 Hdian. 4. 5. 8. Thuc. 2. 3. 
 
 b) With tiv, i.e. OTTOS av, see in av II. 2. 
 E. g. preced. pres. Matt. 6, 5 in later edit. 
 Rom. 3, 4. impl. (Plato Gorg r p. 481. a. 
 Isocr. ad Phil. c. 49.) Preced. Imper. Acts 
 3, 19 OTTOS av eA3cocu Kcupoi KT\. that so 
 perhaps may come the times. Preced. fut. 
 Acts 15, 17. Comp. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 6. 
 
 2. As ecbatic, (KpariKos, so thai, so as 
 that; with the Subjunct. see in Iva II. a) 
 Preced. by a pres. or prat, as pres. Luke 
 16, 26 xdo~fj.a utya eVr^piKrcu, OTTOS *crX. 
 so that, with the result that. So Hdot. 1. 8. 
 /3) Preced. fut. Matt. 23, 35 Siwere. . . OTTOS 
 eASty e vfias irav alpa SiKaiov KT\. v) 
 Preced. prat. Heb. 2, 9 
 
 . . . fo~T(pavouevov onu>s 
 jravros yfvo-rjTai Savdrov, we see Jesus... 
 for the suffering of death crowned with glory 
 and honour, so as that (with the result that) 
 by the grace of God he might taste death 
 for every man. Here belongs the phrase 
 o nuts 7r\7;pco3^ TO pij^Sfv, preceded by a 
 past tense or by TOVTO yeyovev implied, Matt. 
 
 2, 23. 8, 17. 12, 17. 13, 35. It is wholly 
 equivalent to iva irXrjpa Sfj, which see in 
 iva II. d. 8) Once OTTOS av, Luke 2, 
 35. Comp. above in no. 1. b. 
 
 3. After verbs of asking, entreating, ex 
 horting, and also of deciding, commanding, 
 which in themselves imply a purpose, 5nats 
 became equivalent to a demonstrative con 
 junction, like our that, simply pointing out 
 or introducing that to which the preceding 
 words refer ; comp. Iva III. The same 
 verbs often take after them the infin. or also 
 Iva. E. g. Seo/zat in imperat. Matt. 9, 38 
 StrfSrjTf ovv . . . OTTOS ftcftaXr) fpyaras KT\. 
 Luke 10, 2. Acts 8, 24. (Hdot. 9. 117.) 
 So with inf. and with Iva, see in Iva III. 1. b. 
 After epomiw, prat. Luke 7, 3. 11,37 ; 
 aor. inf. Acts 23, 20 ; comp. in Iva 1. c. 
 After fij^ouai and Trpoa-ev^ouai, James 5, 
 16. Acts 8, 15; impl. Philem. 6; irapaKa- 
 Ae w Matt. 8, 34. After verbs of deciding, 
 Matt. 12, 14 crvpfiovXiov eXapov Kar avrov 
 ...OTTCOS avrov u7roAeVa)(r>. 22, 15. Mark 
 
 3, 6 ; comp. Matt. 27, 1 where it is Sum 
 c. inf. So after verbs or phrases implying 
 decision, authority, command; as T/Tj/craro 
 
 ay ... OTTOS KT\. Acts 9, 2. atTov- 
 
513 
 
 opao) 
 
 *P lv KaT avTov onus KT\. Acts 25, 3. 
 Comp. in Iva III. 1. a. 
 
 opdfjia, OTOS, TO, (opdo),) pr. thing 
 peon, a sight, spectacle, genr. Acts 7, 31 6 
 8e McoiJcn}? tSobp e 3av/iacre TO opap.a. Matt. 
 17, 9, comp. Mark 9, 9. Sept. for fi!Oa 
 Ex. 3, 3. Deut. 28, 34. So JE\. V. H! 2~ 
 13. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 66. Spec, of a super 
 natural appearance, a vision, Acts 9, 10. 12. 
 10,3.17.19. 11,5. 12,9. 16,9.10. 18,9. 
 Sept. for rtsna Gen. 46, 2 ; "Jim Dan. 8.2; 
 rnm? Gen. 15, l. 
 
 opaais, f a>s, 17, (opdoo,) pr. the sight, 
 sense of seeing, Wisd. 15, 15. Diod. Sic. 
 1. 59. Demad. 178. 41. In N. T. 
 
 1 . appearance, aspect, external form ; 
 Rev. 4, 3 bis, op.oios opdcrei Ai 3o> IdcnriSi 
 KT\. i. e. in his appearance etc. Ecclus. 
 11,2. 
 
 2. a sight, vision, presented to the mind, 
 i. q. opafw, Rev. 9, 17. Acts 2, 17 opda-as 
 ttyowat, quoted from Joel 3, 1 [2, 28] where 
 Sept. for T^jn. Sept. for V tT 2 Is. 1, 1. 
 Jer. 14, 14. Tob. 12, 19. 
 
 oparoS) T), 6v, (6pd<a,) seen, visible, Col. 
 1,16 TO opara <al ra dopara. Sept. Job 34, 
 26. Arr. Epict. 1. 6. 8. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 2. 
 
 opdco, >, also OTrrdvo), f. fyop-ac. SLOT. 
 1 by\lfdp.r]v see below ; perf. eoipaKa, plupf. 
 tupdnfiv, for which double augm. see 
 Buttm. \ 84. n. 8 ; Pass. aor. 1 uxfiSijv. 
 Fut. 0-^op.ai is from obsol. OIITQ, comp. 
 Buttm. 5 H3. 5; for 2 pers. sing, fyei 
 John 11, 40. al. see Winer 5 13. 2. Buttm. 
 103. III. 3. Aor. 1 ta-^rdpnv is late and 
 rare ; in Subjunct. Luke 13,28, also Liban. 
 Decl. IV. p. 611 ; in Opt. Anna Comn. XI. 
 342 ; comp. Lob. ad Pnryn. p. 734. Pres. 
 oTTTava) is also from the same theme, 
 comp. Buttm. 112. 11; only Pass. Acts 
 1, 3, also 1 K. 8, 8. Tob. 12, 19. For the 
 3 plur. perf. ccipcucai/ instead of ecapuKao-t, 
 in Mss. Luke 9, 36. Col. 2, 1, see Buttm. 
 $ 103. V. 3. Ausf. Sprachl. 5 87. n. 4. Wi 
 ner J 13. 2. c. Aor. 2 is made throughout 
 by (18 ov q. v. in eiSw I. 
 
 1. to see, to perceive with the eyes, to look 
 at ; implying not the mere act of seeing, 
 but also the actual perception of some ob 
 ject, and thus differing from ^XeVco, comp. 
 Tittm. de Synon. N. T. p. 114 sq. So with 
 accus. of person or thing, comp. in ei5o> I. 
 1 ; e. g. op do), Luke 16, 23 6pa rbv Aftpa- 
 au UTTO p-aKpfafv. 1, 22 ijirracriav fa>pa.Kfv. 
 9, 36. 24, 23. John 4, 45. 5, 37. 6, 2. 9, 
 37. 20, 18. 25 29 Acts 7, 44. 22, 15. 
 1 John 1, 1. nl. O\ISO/JLUI, Matt. 28,7 t I 
 33 
 
 V. 10. Luke 3, 6 o^eia, 
 Trdcra crap TO cru>TT)pLov TOV 3eoC (comp. Is. 
 40, 5). Luke 13, 28. John 11, 40. Acts 2, 
 17. (Joel 2, 28, or 3, 1.) Rev. 1, 7. al. 
 With ace. impl. 6p. John 1, 34. 1 Pet. 1,8. 
 Sept. for fixn , fyaca Ex. 2, 12. Gen. 13, 
 15; fyop.ai Is. 35, 2. Jer. 4, 21 So 
 6pda> Dem. 168. 1. Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 31 ; cty. 
 Luc. Tim. 5. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 10. Also 
 with ace. and particip. Buttm. 144. 1, and 
 6. b. Heb. 2, 8 GUTTM 6pa>p,fv avr<n TO. Trdira 
 virorfTay/jLfi>a. Matt. 24, 30 o-^rovrai TOV vlov 
 TOV dv^p. fp^6p.fvov. Mark 14, 62. Luke 
 
 13, 28. John 1, 52. Sept. 6pda> for niO 
 Ex. 2, 6. 11. So opdca Hdian. 1. 4. 2. XeV. 
 Cyr. 1. 2. 8 ; fy. Luc. Tim. 6. Xen. Hell. 
 3. 2. 9. Spec, in modified senses : a) to 
 look upon, to behold, to contemplate, once c. 
 fls, John 19, 37 o-fyovrai els ov f^fKfvrrjcrav. 
 from Zech. 12, 10 where Heb. aian, Sept. 
 (7rij3\iropai. Sept. o\^. c. ace. for fiX"i 
 Ps. 8, 4. Is. 17, 8. So opdcu c. (Is Horn. if. 
 24. 633. Xen. Conv. 5. 6. b) to see face 
 to face, to see and converse with, i. e. to 
 have personal acquaintance and intercourse 
 with ; e. g. 6pda>, John 6, 36. 8, 57 KOI 
 AjSpadp. ecapaKas , 14, 9 6 ed)paas e/xe. 15, 
 24; o^o/iai John 16, 16. 17. 19. 1 John 3, 
 2. With TO irpafranrov TWOS, to see one s 
 face, id. 6pdu> Col. 2. 1 ; 6 ^. Acts 20, 25, 
 (Test. XII Patr. p. 636.) So to see God, 
 opav, trop. for to know him, q. d. to be ac 
 quainted with him, to know his character ; 
 only in John s writings, John 1, 18. 6, 46. 
 
 14, 7. 9. 15, 24. 1 John 3, 6. 4, 20. 3 John 
 11. (Ecclus. 43, 31.) In a wider sense to 
 see God, i. q. to be admitted to his presence, 
 to enjoy his intercourse and special favour ; 
 the figure being" drawn from the customs of 
 oriental courts, see in jSXeVo), no. 2. a ; Matt. 
 5, 8 fyovrat. TovZeov. Heb. 12, 14. Rev. 22. 
 4 o\lsoirai TO TrpocratTrov aj/rou. Comp. 1 K. 
 1 0, 8. Also to come to see, to visit, S\jf. vfj.ds 
 John 16, 22. Heb. 13, 23. So Heb. nxn, 
 Sept. lo-flv, 2 Sam. 13, 5. 2 K. 8, 29. cj to 
 see lake place, to witness, e. g. o-^r. TTJV f)fj.tpav 
 TWOS, Luke 17, 22 ; see in f"8o> I. 1. d. 
 
 2. Trop. of the mind, to see, to perceive 
 with the mind or senses, e. g. a) Genr. 
 to be aware of, to observe, c. accus. et parti 
 cip. Acts 8, 23 avv8f(rp.ov dBiKias opca trt 
 ovra. With 6Vt James 2, 24. Sept. c. 6Vi 
 for nan Gen. 26, 28. So c. ace. et part. 
 Diod. Sic. 1 3. 58 ; 6Vt M. Antonin. 9. 27. 
 b) Of things, to see and know, i. e. to come 
 to know, to learn ; John 3, 1 1 6 oi8ap.(v \n- 
 \ovpfv, KOI 6 (u>pdKafj.(v p.apTvpovfj.tv. v. 
 32. 8, 38. Also, to perceive, to understand ; 
 Col. 2, 18 a p.r) (uipciKfv (p-fiaTtvatv. Ro:u. 
 
opaco 
 
 514 
 
 opyi^co 
 
 15, 21, parall. with truwij/u- So Ecclus. 
 43, 32. Eurip. Phren. 757 fls oVr/p ou Traps 
 opa. Xen. Mem. 4. 7. 3, 5. 
 
 3. By Hebr. to see, to experience, e. g. 
 good, to attain to, to enjoy, c. ace. John 3, 
 36 OVK ctyerai fcoiji/. Sept. OVK o^erai (pa>s 
 for fSO Ps. 49, 20 ; comp. in eiSw I. 3. 
 Lycophr. Cassandr. 1019 /Si oi/. 
 
 4. Absol. to see to it, to take care, to 
 take heed, only in Imperat. phrases. a) 
 opa, e. g. Heb. 8, 5 opa yap, fp^o-i, TTOUJCTT;? 
 ndvra KT\. quoted from Ex. 25, 40 where 
 Sept. for flSO ; strictly for opa onus, comp. 
 Matth. J519. 7. p. 999. Elsewhere only as 
 followed by p.fj or its compounds, or an 
 equivalent phrase, e. g. opa ^77, opare p.rj, 
 take heed lest, beware ; before the Subjunct. 
 Matt. 8, 4 opa, p.qSei i 617777?. Mark 1, 44. 
 1 Thess. 5, 15. Rev. 19, 10 opa pj sc. Troi ^r. 
 22, 9 Before the Imperat. Matt. 9, 30. 24, 
 6. (Epict. Ench. 19. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 27.) 
 So before another like imperative, with OTTO, 
 i. q. beware of; Matt. 16, 6 opart KOI irpoa- 
 e ^fre diro rrjs fv/Liijs KT ^- ^ ar ^ 8 > 15< 
 
 12, 15. b) Fut. o-v o\lfft, vpe is o 
 see Ifiou to il, look ye to it, a milder form for 
 the imperat. Winer 44. 3. Matth. 498. c. 
 Matt. 27, 4 rt irpas was ; o-v ctyei. v. 24. 
 Acts 1 8, 1 5. So Arr. Epict. 2. 5. 30. ib. 4. 
 6. 11. M. Antonin. 11. 13. 
 
 5. Pass. aor. 1 uxp^nv, once fut. 1 o(p^r}- 
 o-opai Heb. 9, 28, and once pres. part. oTrra- 
 vop-evos Acts 1, 3, c. dat. to be seen by any 
 one, to appear to any one, Buttm. 134. 4 
 a) Pr. and spoken of things, with eVof place 
 Rev. 11, 19 KOI o><p3?7 17 KtjScoroy . . . eV r 
 raw avrov. 12, 1. 3; with dat. of pers. 
 Acts 2, 3 KOI oocpSqo-ai avroly . . . yXwo-o-ai 
 woVi Trvpos. 16,9. Sept. and MX"? Gen. 8, 
 5. 9, 14. Spoken of persons, with dat. of 
 pers. e. g. angels, Luke 1,11 oStpSrj Se avrw 
 ayyfXos. 22, 43. Acts 7, 30. 35 ; of God 
 Acts 7, 2 ; of persons dead, Matt. 17, 3 
 oScpSTjo-av aiirols Mwvo-fjs KT\. Mark 9, 4 ; 
 with (v of manner, Luke 9, 31 01 o<p3Wes 
 eV Sov Of Jesus after his resurrection, 
 Luke 24, 34. Acts 1, 3. 9, 17. 13, 31. 26, 
 16. 1 Cor. 15, 5. 6. 7i 8. 1 Tim. 3, 16; or 
 in his second coming, Heb. 9, 28. Also 
 Acts 26, 16 p-dprvpa ... &>v [TOVTW a] re 
 o(p3i}o-op.at o-oi, a witness of those things as 
 to which I will yet appear unto thee ; here 
 some render, which I will cause thee to see, 
 but against all analogy. Sept. forMsnj, 
 of angels Ex. 3, 2. Judg. 6, 12; of God 
 Gen. 12, 7. 17, 1. So Hdian. 2. 11. 5. 
 Luc. D. Mort. 23. 1 ; c. vrro TWOS JE\. V. 
 H. 2. 26. Xen. Yen. 12. 20. b) As Mid. 
 to show oneself, to present oneself to or be 
 
 fore any one ; Acts 7, 26 <5<p37 avroit ua- 
 
 xo/ieW. Sept. for nsj inn 2 K. 14, 8. So 
 
 Hdian. 1. 16. 8, 12. + 
 
 opjf), y S) ^, (ope yo),) pr. a reaching 
 after, propension, natural impulse, i. e. the 
 character or disposition as resulting from 
 impulses, Hes. Op. 302. Find. Pyth. 9. 76. 
 Hdot. 6. 128. Hence genr. and in N. T. 
 passion, i. e. any violent commotion of mind, 
 indignation, anger, wrath, espec. as inclu 
 ding desire of vengeance, punishment, and 
 therein differing from 3up.ds ; see in Svp-dt 
 and comp. Tittm. de Synon. N. T. p. 131 
 sq. 255. So Zeno in Diog. Laert. 7. 113 
 opy^ fcrriv tViSv/ua rt/xcap/ar rot) SOKOVJTOJ 
 
 T)8lKT]KfVal OV TrpCHTTJKOVTOIS. 
 
 1. Pr. and genr. Mark 3, 5 Trfpi{3\(\lfdfj.e- 
 vos aiiToiis p.fr opyrjs, i. e. indignantly. 
 Rom. 12, 19. Eph. 4, 31. Col. 3, 8. 1 Tim. 
 
 2, 8. James 1,19, 20, eoTo> TTUS oVSpooTros 
 . . . ppa8i>s (Is opyrjV opyrj yap* KT\. Sept 
 for S) 2 Sam. 12, 5. Job 16, 9 ; n^n p rov . 
 21, 14 ; ?!*!? Josh. 9, 20. So Gnom. Poet. 
 p,ov6(TT. 354. p. 183, Tauchn. ytyvov S ts 
 opyrjv p.T) Ta%vs y , aXXa /3paSvr. Hdian. 4. 
 
 3. 8. Xen. Eq. 9. 2. Mem. 2. 6. 63 
 Spoken of God, as implying utter abhor- 
 rence of sin and aversion to those who live 
 in it ; Rom. 9, 22 ei fie SeXcbi/ 6 Seos eVSet- 
 ao-3ai TTJV opyjjv. Heb. 3, 11. 4, 3. Sept. 
 and *X Ex. 4, 14. Deut. 29, 20 ; B?! Is. 
 10,5; |l ir Ex. 32, 12. So Jos. Ant. 8. 7. 6. 
 
 2. Meton. wrath, as including the idea of 
 punishment, e. g. as the penalty of law, 
 Rom. 4, 15 6 yap vo por opyTjf Karepyderai. 
 13, 4. 5. So Ecclus. 7, 16. Dem. 528. 4 
 rw Spdcravrt 8 OVK Icrrjv rf]v opyfjV . . . era- 
 ti> 6 i>6p.os. Also of the punitive wrath of 
 God, the divine judgments to be inflicted 
 upon the wicked, e. g. OTTO rr)s p-eXXovo^r 
 opyJ?y Matt. 3, 7. Luke 3, 7. 1 Thess. 1, 
 10; ofiyfj 3eoC air ovpavov Rom. 1, 18; 
 opyi7 eV rjp-fpa opyrjs 2, 5 bis. Rev. 6, 17 ; 
 also Luke 21, 23. John 3, 36. Rom. 2, 8. 
 3, 5. 5, 9. 9, 22 a-Kfvrj opytjs. Eph. 2, 3 
 rtKva (pvcrfi. opyrjs. Eph. 5, 6. Col. 3, 6. 
 1 Thess. 2, 16. 5, 9. Rev. 6,16. 11, 18. 
 For the phrase cow rrjs opyrjs v. roO 3u- 
 p-ov rrjs opyrjs rov 3eov, see in 3vp.ds and 
 oivos, Rev. 14, 10. 16, 19. 19, 15. ^ So 
 Psalt. Salom. 15, 6 (pX6| irvpos *ai opyf) 
 
 f. tVw, (opyrj, ) to make angry, 
 to provoke, c. ace. ^Eschin. Dial. Socr. 2. 1. 
 Xen. Eq. 9. 2. In N. T. only Pass, or 
 Mid. opyi op-ai, a or. 1 wpyurSqi , to be or 
 become angry, provoked; absol. Matt. 18, 
 34. 22,7. Luke 14,21. 15,28. Rev. 11, 
 
515 
 
 18. Eph. 4, 26 opyi ffcrSf KOI pr) duaprdvfTf 
 (com p. Sept. Ps. 4, 5), i. e. in your anger 
 sin not, repress your anger ; comp. Heb. and 
 Sept. Prov. 16, 32. With a dat. Matt. 5, 22 
 fray 6 opyi^opfvos TO> dSeXepw avrov. With 
 firi TIVI, Rev. 12, 17. Sept. for tTJH Gen. 
 31,36; c. dat. Num. 25, 3; c. firi Num. 
 32, 13 ; C]J8t, c. dat. Is. 12, 1 ; c. ri 1 K. 
 11, 9. Dem. 514. lO. Xen. Hell. 4. 8. 30 ; 
 c. dat. Hdian. 5. 8. 15. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 5. 
 
 o/jyt Xoy, T], oi>, (0/3717-) p^one to anger, 
 passionate, Tit. 1,1; Sept. for nian ffinx 
 Prov. 22, 24 ; fran b?3 29, 22. Hdian. 4. 
 9. 6. Xen. Eq. 9. 7. 
 
 opyvta, as, f], (opeyca,*) a fathom, pr. 
 the space which one can measure by ex 
 tending the arms laterally ; Acts 27, 28 bis. 
 JEl V. H. 2. 22. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 19. 
 
 opeyo), f. o>, to reach or stretch out, es- 
 pec..T;? x e P a Horn. II. 15. 371. Jos. B. J. 
 1 2. 4 ; genr. Xen. An. 7. 3. 29. In N. T. 
 only Mid. ope yo/*ai, to stretch oneself, to 
 reach after any thing ; hence trop. to long 
 after, to desire, to covet; c. gen. Heb. 11,16 
 Trarpj Soy Kpeirrovos opeytrat. 1 Tim. 3, 1. 
 6, 10. So Hdian. 2. 15. 8. Xen. Mem. 1. 
 2. 15 ; pr. Horn. II. 5. 851. Hes. Scut. 456. 
 
 opeivos, T), 6v, (opor,) mountainous, as 
 17 opeivr) (x<*>pa) mountainous country, Luke 
 
 I, 39. 65. Sept. for in Gen. 14, 10. Deut. 
 
 II, 11. Pol. 3. 17. 2. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 3. 
 o/3e^t9, ccoy, fj, (optyo/zai.) pr. a reaching 
 
 ifler, trop. longing, lust, Rom. 1, 27. 
 Rcclus. 23, 6. Hdian. 3. 13. 14. 
 
 Op^OTTOOeh), o>, f. jjero), (opSoy, Trovy,) 
 pr. to foot it straight, to walk straight ; trop. 
 to walk (live) uprightly, air. \eyop.. Gal. 2, 
 14. 
 
 0/3^09, TJ, 6v, straight, right. 1. In 
 height, upright, erect, Acts 14, 10 ai/acrrqSi 
 opSdy, comp. Buttm. $ 123. 6. 1 Esdr. 9, 
 46. Luc. Rhetor, praec. 19. Xen. Mem. 1. 
 4. 11. 
 
 2. Horizontally, straight and kvel, not 
 crooked or uneven, trop. Heb. 12, 13 rpo- 
 X/ay opSay iroifja-aTf. Sept. for "itJi Prov. 
 12, 16. 16, 25. Pr. 680? opSij Jos. Ant. 6. 
 1. 3. Luc. D. Deor. 25. 2. 
 
 >, f. jycrw, (op3ordp.oy ; op- 
 Soy, Ttnvca,) to cut straight, e. g. 68oV, Lat 
 tzam recte secare, to cut (make) straight 
 one s way, to direct, Sept. for *i$p Prov. 
 3, 6. 1 1 , 5 ; comp. oSouy ei>3eiay erep.6 Thuc. 
 2. 100. In N. T. trop. c. ace. \6yov instead 
 of 6Soi>, 2 Tim. 2, 15 6p^orop.ovvra TOV Xo- 
 yov rrjy dXr/Seiay, pr. culling straight the 
 
 word of truth, i. e. rightly and skilfully 
 teaching it. Comp. Constitut. Apost. 7, 
 30 opZoTopelv ev rols TOV Kvplov 8oy/io-ii/. 
 Euseb. H. E. 1. 8 TT)I/ efadav Kal /3ao-iXtK?) 
 68ov op2oTO/xoCo-a TJ fKKXrjtria TOV Seou. 
 
 op&pifo, f. t o-o), (opSpoy,) <o rise ear/y, 
 to do early in the morning ; so praegn. 
 Luke, 21, 38 Tray 6 Xaoy <2p3pi<|e irpoy avrbv 
 tv rw iepw KT\. all the people came early in 
 the morning to him in the temple. Sept. for 
 
 fiisan Gen. 19, 27; inia Job 7, 21 
 
 1 Mace. 11, 67. Tob. 9, 4." The Attic form 
 was opSpeuw ; Moeris p. 272 opSpeuei Arri- 
 Kwy, opSpt^et EXX?;j/iK&)y. Thorn. Maw. p. 
 656. 
 
 op&pliVQS, rj, 6v (opSpoy,) morning, early, 
 e. g. acrnjp Xa/xn-poy Kai op3pii/o y Rev. 22, 
 16 Rec. Luke 24, 22 Lachm. Sept. for 
 a^30 Hos. 6, 4. 13, 3. Luc. Gall. 1. 
 Antip. Sidon. in Anthol. Gr. II. p. 12. Posi 
 dipp. ib. p. 42. This form is condemned 
 by the Atticists, who prefer opSptoy ; see 
 Sturz de Dial. Alex. p. 186. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 51. 
 
 opzrpio?, a, ov, (opSpoy,) morning, early, 
 malutinus, as adv. Luke 24, 22 yevop-evai 
 opSpiat eVt TO (JiVT)fJLfioi>, comp. Buttm. J 123. 
 6. Sept. Job 29, 7. Plut. Cato Min. 41. 
 Plato Prot. 313. b, opSptoy JJKO>V. Comp. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 51. 
 
 6p^pO<; : ov, 6, (kindr. opmp.i, opSo y, 
 orior, ortus.) day-break, morning, pr. the 
 time at and immediately after day-break, 
 while one still needs a light ; but later in 
 cluding also the morning twilight until near 
 sunrise ; Phryn. et Lob. p. 275. 
 
 1. day-break, dawn, Luke 24, 1 opSpov 
 jSaSeoy, comp. John 20, 1 ; see in /3a3i5y 
 lett. b. Aristoph. Vesp. 216 op3poy /3a3vy 
 *rX. Theocr. 18. 14; genr. Diod. Sic. 14. 
 104. Xen. Yen. 6. 6. 
 
 2. morning twilight, early morn. i. q. tcoy 
 or fas, comp. Phryn. 1. c. John 8, 2 opSpou 
 8e TruXiv TraptyivfTO els TO Ifpov. Acts 5. 
 21. Sept. for ipa Judg. 16, 2 ; -iniD Josh. 
 6, 15. Joel 2. 2. 
 
 op^co9 ; adv. (<5p3oy.) straight, right, i. e. 
 erectly, Xen. Eq. 7. 5. In N. T. of man 
 ner, rightly, correctly, Mark 7, 35 eXdXet op- 
 3o>r. Trop. in a moral sense, Luke 7, 43 
 opSwy tKpivas. 10, 28. 20, 21. Sept. for 
 aia Gen. 40, 16 ; s^arj Deut. 5, 28. Luc. 
 Cynic. 5. Xen. An. 1. 9. 30. 
 
 opi^w, f. itreo, (opoy,) to bound, to make 
 or set a boundary, Sept. for bWR Josh. 13, 
 27. Hdot. 2. 16. Xen. Cyr. 8. 6. 21. In N. 
 T. and usually, to mark out, to limit ^ to de- 
 
opiov 
 
 516 
 
 opvacra) 
 
 tcrmine, to appoint ; c. ace. of thing, Heb. 
 4, 7 7rdXii> nva opifei qpfpav. Acts 17, 26. 
 Part. perf. Pass, vpio-pevos, n, ov, deter 
 mined, decreed, Luke 22, 22. Acts 2, 23. 
 So Jos. Ant. 6. 5. 3. Hdian. 1. 10. 11. Xen. 
 An. 7. 7. 36. With ace. of pers. as ap 
 pointed to an office or station, Acts 17, 31 
 tv aVSpl w [ov] atpio-e. Pass, with a noun 
 of office in apposit. Acts 10, 42 avros la-riv 
 6 a>pio-p,fvos VTTO rod 3eov KpiTj]s fcovrcoi KOI 
 vacpuv. (Meleag. in Anth. Gr. 1. p. 9, <re 
 Seoj/ copio-e.) So Rom. 1, 4 TOV opicr SfVTos 
 viov 3eou *rX. i. e. marked out, declared ; 
 Chrysost. SetxSeVros- ; comp. Phil. 2, 8 sq. 
 Eph. 1, 20 sq. With an inf. Acts 11, 29 
 
 (aplO-fV fKa&TOS . . . TTfU^ai KT\. 
 
 opiov, ov, TO (opoy,) a bound, border; 
 usually Plur. TO. opia, the borders, Plut. 
 Aristid. 11 pen. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 1. In N. T. 
 only Plur. and by Hebraism, for a space 
 within certain boundaries, territories, coun 
 try, district; Matt. 2, 16 / B?;3Xee/z KUI ev 
 iracn TOLS opiois avTTjs. 4, 13. 8, 34. 15, 22. 
 39. 19, 1. Mark 5, 17. 7, [24.] 31 bis. 10, 1. 
 Acts 13, 50. On Matt. 4, 13 see Bibl. Res. 
 in Pal. III. p. 288 sq. So Sept. and ^*a 
 Gen. 23, 17. Ex. 8, 2; for rniB Judg". 
 20,6. 
 
 optci^Q), f. io-a>, (opKoy,) to put to an oath, 
 to make swear, c. ace. Sept. for S^aTliti 
 Gen. 50, 25. Dem. 678. 5. Xen. Conv. 4. 
 10. In N. T. to adjure, to charge on oath; 
 with two ace. of person whom and by whom ; 
 Mark 5, 7 opKifa o-e TOV 3eoV Acts 19, 13. 
 1 Thess. 5, 27. See Buttm. \ 131. 2, comp. 
 6. Matth. 5413. 10. So Sept. eopKifo> 
 Gen. 24, 3. The Atticists condemn this 
 word, though found in the best writers, and 
 prefer opKoca, Phryn. et Lob. p. 360 sq. 
 
 6/3K09, ov, 6, (kindr. epKos, Lat. Orcus.) 
 an oath, Matt. 14, 7. 9. 26, 72. Mark 6, 26. 
 Luke 1, 73. Acts 2, 30. Heb. 6, 16. 17. 
 James 5, 12. Sept. for riSiaa Gen. 24, 8. 
 26, 3. So 1 Mace. 7, 18. Pol. 3. 68. 13. 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 12. Meton. what is pro 
 mised with an oath ; Matt. 5, 33 cbroScBo-eiy 
 rc3 Kupt w TOVS opKovs crov. 
 
 f , < H 
 
 pKW fJiOd iflj as, 77, (opKco/iorea) ; opKos, 
 o/xvv/u,) pr. the swearing of an oath, the 
 taking of an oath ; hence a swearing, an 
 oath, Heb. 7, 20. 21 bis. 28. Sept. for r^X 
 Ez. 17, 18. 19. 1 Esdr. 8, 93 ; ra op/ao- 
 fi6o-ia Plato Phsedr. p. 241. a. 
 
 6p/jida), >, f. T]<ra>, (tSpp-j;,) to make rush 
 on, to impel, to incite, c. ace. Horn. II. 6. 
 338. Diod. Sic. 3. 53. Xen. Eq. 7. 17, 18. 
 Often and in N. T. intrans. to rush on, 
 
 to move forwards impetuously; e. g. tirl 
 Tiva, Acts 7. 57 atpfjLTjcrdv re op.o Svp.ao ov eV 
 avTov. With eiy TI, Acts 19, 29 els TO 
 3/arpoj/. Matt. 8, 32. Mark 5, 13. Luke 8, 
 33. So c. eVi 2 Mace. 12, 20. Hdian. 3. 5. 1 ; 
 efs nva. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 17; eTy TI Thuc. 
 1. 87. 
 
 op^it], y s , ^, (opw/ii,) a rusliing on, 
 onset, assault ; Acts 14, 5 o>y Se tytvtTo 
 opfifj . . . v/3pt <rai Koi Xt3oj3oX^(rai UVTOVS. So 
 Sept. Jer. 47, 23. Hdian. 2. 5. 8. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 2. 6. Trop. of the mind, impulse, 
 purpose, will, James 3, 4. So Epict. Ench. 
 1.1. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 2. 
 
 opfJiri^a, aros, TO, (6p/iaco,) pr. impe 
 tuous movement, a rusliing on, Sept. Deut. 
 28, 49. 1 Mace. 6, 47. Hence in N. T. 
 impetus, violence; e. g. as dat. of manner, 
 Rev. 18, 21 6pp.rjfj.aTi /SX^Sqo-erat, i.e. with 
 violence. So Etym. Magn. 618. 10. Comp. 
 Horn. II. 13. 356. 590. Buttm. Lexil. II. 
 p. 4^sq. 
 
 opveov, ov, TO, (opwy,) a bird, fowl, e. g. 
 carnivorous, Rev. 18, 2. 19, 17. 21. Sept. 
 for Site Gen. 6, 20 ; V*9 Gen. 15, 11. Ez. 
 39, 4. Luc. Demon. 66. Xen. An. 6. 
 1. 23. 
 
 OfVtS, tSoj, 6, 7;, a bird, fowl, gerr. Luc. 
 Merc. Cond. 17. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 9. In 
 N. T. only of poultry, the lien, gallina. 
 Matt. 23, 37. Luke 13, 34. So Pol. 12. 
 26. 1. Xen. An. 4. 5. 25. 
 
 ia, as, f), (opoSere ca ; opo?, rt Si;- 
 /xt.) pr. a setting of bounds ; meton. a bound, 
 limit; Acts 17,26 opicras . . . ray opoSeatas 
 Trjs KdToiKias CLVTWV. Glossar. Hdot. p. 174. 
 Wessel. ovpot 6po3eo-ta. Comp. Greg. Cor. 
 p. 390. n. 58. Schaefer. 
 
 opo?, eos, ovs, TO, Plur. ra opr;, gen. T>V 
 dpew Rev. 6, 15. Sept. Is. 13, 4; see 
 Buttm. 5 49. n. 3. Winer 9. 2. c ; a moun 
 tain, hill, Matt. 5, 1 dveftr) els TO opos. v. 14. 
 8, 1. Mark 5, 5. Acts 7, 30. al. So TO opos 
 TO KoA. f\ai>v, the mount of Olives, Luke 
 19, 29. 21, 37. Acts 1, 12; see in e Xat a 
 no. 1. (Jos. Ant. 20. 8. 6.) Proverbially, 
 to remove mountains, i. q. to accomplish 
 great and difficult things, 1 Cor. 13, 2. 
 Matt. 17, 20. 21,21; so the Rabbins, comp. 
 Buxt. Lex. 1653. Sept. opos for ^ Gen. 
 8, 4. 5. Hdian. 2. 11. 16. Xen. An. 1. 2. 
 25. + 
 
 opvcrao) v. -TT&), f. |<, to dig, c. ace. 
 Matt. 21, 33 u>pvev tv aura \r)i>ov. Mark 
 12, 1 ; absol. Matt. 25, 18. *Sept. for 3?^ 
 Is. 5, 2 ; IS" Gen. 21, 30. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 50. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 10. 
 
517 
 
 09, ??, O 
 
 op<j)avo$, 17, ov, (kindr. optpvr), 6p(j)v6s,) 
 orphan, bereaved, e. g. children bereaved 
 of parents, James 1, 27 upcpavovs KOI xnP as - 
 Trop. of disciples without a master John 
 14, 18. Sept. for tin? Ps. 68, 6. Jer. 7, 
 5. Dem. 1320. 19. Xen. An. 7. 2. 32 ; 
 trop. Lys. 196. 13. 
 
 op^eo), J>, f. Tjo-co, (kindr. opwp.i, ) to lift 
 up, to raise aloft, a rare and post-Homeric 
 form, i. q. ptTfa>piftv, Plato Cratyl. p. 406. e. 
 Earlier and more common was Mid. depon. 
 op%fop.ai, f. T}(TO/LUH, to leap sc. by rule, to 
 dance, intrans. Matt. 11, 17 et Luke 7, 32 
 t]v\itrap.(V lp.lv KM OVK wp^rjo ao ^e. Matt. 14, 
 6. Mark 6, 22. Sept. for ngn 1 Chr. 15, 29. 
 Ecc. 3, 4. So Luc. D. Deor. 18. 1. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 3. 10. 
 
 oy, 77, o, genit. ov, ye, ov, see Buttm. 
 5 75. 2 ; originally a demonstrative pronoun, 
 this, that, (like 6, 9, TO,) but in Attic and 
 later usage mostly a postpositive article or re 
 lative pronoun, who, which, what, that ; Buttm. 
 J 126. 1. Kiihner331. Matth. $289. n.7. 
 
 I. As a DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN, this, 
 (hat; only in distinctions and distribution, 
 with ptv, dc, as or fj.ev...os fi e , that one 
 . . . this one, the one ...the other ; less fre 
 quent in Attic writers than 6 p.ev ... 6 Se, 
 bu* equally common with it in later writers 
 aiu. in N. T. comp. Buttm. 126. 3. Kiih- 
 ner 5 331. n. 1. Matth. 1. c. Winer { 20. 1. 
 E. g. 2 Cor. 2 16 ols p,ev...ols 8e, to the 
 one... to the other. Matt. 21, 35 ov piv tSet- 
 pav, ov de dirfKTetvav, i. e. one . . . another. 
 13,8 6 p.fv...o oe. 25, 15. Luke 23,33. 
 
 .Rom. 9, 21. al. sasp. So Luc. Asin. 23. 
 Pol. 1. 7. 3. Dem. 248. 18. Further, os 
 fiev...a\\os 8f Matt. 13, 4 sq. os fitv... 
 oXXoj 8f . . . (Ttpos 6V 1 Cor. 12, 8 sq. 6 p.tv 
 . . . KOI frcpov Luke 8, 5 sq. 
 
 II. As the postpositive article, or RELA 
 TIVE PRONOUN, who, which, what, that ; qui, 
 qua, quod. The construction with the re 
 lative strictly implies two clauses ; in the 
 first of which there should stand with the 
 "erb a noun (the antecedent), and in the 
 second the corresponding relative, each in 
 the case which its own clause demands, the 
 relative also agreeing with the antecedent 
 in gender and number ; see Buttm. } 123. 
 1. 3. J 143. Kiihner j 332. 1. But in usage, 
 the form and power of the relative is often 
 varied, both in construction and in signifi 
 cation, as also by connecting with it other 
 particles. E. g. 
 
 A) In CONSTRUCTION. 1 . As to Gender, 
 the relat. agrees regularly with its antece 
 dent ; Matt 2, 9 6 do rr)p ov ti8ov. Luke 5, 
 
 3. John 6, 51. saepiss. So where it relates 
 to a remoter antecedent, as 1 Cor. 1, 8 os 
 KOI j3(ftaiu(Tfi vpMs, i. e. o Seo r in v. 4, 
 comp. v. 9. But from this rule there are 
 two departures in form : a) Where the 
 relat. with the verb etvcu or the like con 
 forms in gender to the following noun, 
 Buttm. 143. 4. Kiihner $ 332. 5. b. Wi 
 ner 24. 3. n. 1. So Gal. 3, 16 tnrippuri 
 aov, os fcrri Xptoroy. Eph. !, 14. 6, 17 
 p.d^aipav, 5 (<TTI p^a 3eoC. 1 Tim. 3, 15. 
 So Hdot. 5. 108. Plat. Legg. 699. c. b) 
 Where by the constructio ad sensum the 
 relat. takes the gender implied in the ante 
 cedent, and not that of its external form ; 
 Rom. 9, 23 sq. O~KVTJ (\eovs, a 7rpor;ro//ia- 
 o-(v...ovs Kal fKaXto-fv. Gal. 4, 19. Phil. 2, 
 15. 2 Pet. 3, 16 fv irdo-ais rais eTTicrroXaiy 
 [i. q. ypdfji^aa-i], ev ols KT\. 2 John 1. 
 Buttm. 5 143. 5. c. Matth. $ 434. 1. b. Herm. 
 ad Vig. p. 708. (Eurip. Suppl. 12.) Neut. 
 
 often refers to a masc. or fern, antece 
 dent, taken in the general sense of thing, 
 Kiihner 332. 5. n. 2. Matth. $ 439 ; comp. 
 Buttm. ^ 129. 8. So in explanations, Matt. 
 1, 23 E/i/iiai/ou^X, o e cm p.t^fpp.TjVfv6p.tvov 
 KT\. 27,33. Mark 3, 17. 12,42 Xn-a ovo, 
 5 eon Ko8pdvrrjs. 15, 16. 42. John 1, 39. 
 Col. 1, 24. Heb. 7, 2. al. (Otherwise Acts 
 9, 39.) Also where Neut. o refers to a 
 whole preceding clause, Mark 15, 34. 
 
 1 John 2, 8. 
 
 2. As to Number, the relat. agrees regu 
 larly with its antecedent, as in the exam 
 ples above cited. The departures from this 
 rule are rare, e. g. a) Relat. Sing, after 
 a plural antecedent, once Phil. 3, 20 eV ov- 
 pavols ...( ov KT\. where however ov may 
 be taken as an adverb ; see below in B. 7. 
 b) Relat. Plur. after an anteced. Sing, col 
 lect. Phil. 2, 15 ev pccra) yeveas cr/coXtay... 
 fv ols <paiWo-3f KT\. here the construction 
 is ad sensum, both in number and gender, 
 Matth. ^ 434.2. b. 475. a. Buttm. 5143.5. b; 
 comp. above in 1. b. (Judith 4, 8 ij ytpov- 
 <rla...oi fKa^vro. 2, 3 ; comp. Horn. II. 16. 
 368. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 31.) So where the 
 anteced. includes in any way the idea of 
 plurality, Acts 15, 36 Kara Traaav TTO\IV, tv 
 ais KT\. 2 Pet. 3, 1 ftevrepav eVtaroXTji/, eV 
 air KT\. i. e. in both which, the first and 
 second. 
 
 3. As to Case ; here the general rule is, 
 that the relative stands in that case which 
 the verb of its own clause demands, Buttm. 
 { 143. 1. Kiihner 332. 1. Matth. $ 473. 
 E. g. as subject, John 1, 9 TO (f)cos...o (pco- 
 riei Trdvra uv Sp. v. 30 dvfjp, os e/x/rpoerSeiF 
 pov ytyovtv. Acts 8, 27. Matt. 10, 26. saep. 
 
oy, 77, o 
 
 518 
 
 09, 77, o 
 
 As object, Ace. Matt. 2, 9 o dcrr^p, ov erSov. 
 Acts 6, 3. 6. 22, 9. saep. As Dat. Acts 8, 
 10 dvfjp...ta irpo<rfl\ov Ttdvres- Col. 1, 27. 
 1 Pet. 1, 12 . 5, 9. al. But the departures 
 from this rule are frequent, viz. 
 
 a) By Attraction, i. e. where the relative 
 in respect to its own verb would stand in 
 the accus. but the antecedent stands in the 
 Genitive or Dative, and then the relative is 
 attracted by the antecedent into the same 
 case with itself; Buttm. 143. 13. Kiihner 
 $ 332. 6. Matth. $ 473. Winer $ 24. 1. 
 E. g. Genii. Matt 18, 19. John 4, 14 v8a- 
 ros, ov eyca ficocrw. 7, 31 TOVT&V, 2>v OVTOS 
 (Koirjo-fv. v. 39. Acts 1,1. Acts 24. 21. 
 Eph.4,1. Judel5. (Sept. Zeph.3,11.) Rev. 
 1, 20. al. saep. Neglected, Heb. 8, 2 rr/s ovo?- 
 vfjs, f/v eTn?fz> 6 Kvpios. (Sept. Jer. 51, 64. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 10.) Dative, Mark 7, 13. 
 Luke 2, 20 eVt irao-iv ols fJKov<rav. 5, 9. 
 John 4, 50 rw Xdyw. w eirrev irjcrovs. Acts 
 7, 16. 20, 38*. 2 Cor! 12, 21. 2 Thess. 1, 
 
 4. al. saep. So Sept. Jer. 15, 14. Xen. An. 
 
 5. 4. 33. Here the antecedent is often 
 omitted, espec. the demonstr. pron. OVTOS, 
 (Ktlvos, comp. below in no. 4 ; and then the 
 relative stands alone in a case not properly 
 belonging to it; Buttm. 5 143. 15. Matth. 
 473. b. Winer 23. 2. The relative it 
 self then stands like Engl. what, for that 
 which, he who, etc. E. g. Luke 9, 36 ovotv 
 cov euipa.K.ao iv, for ovo ev TOVTO>V <>v [a] ewpa- 
 Kacriv. 23, 41 iit-ia yap [tKfivatv] >v eVpa- 
 ap.ei/KrX. Acts 9, 24. 22, 15. 26, 16. Rom. 
 15, 18. 2 Cor. 12, 17. al. saep. So Jos. Ant. 
 
 3. 8. 2 vnrjKovov ols eWXevcre. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 4. 26. 
 
 b) By inverted Attraction, i. e. where the 
 antecedent is attracted by the relative into 
 the same case with itself, viz. a) Where 
 the anteced. remains connected with its 
 own clause, and before the relative. Matt. 
 21, 42 Xt 3oi/ ov aVeSoKip-ao-ai/, OVTOS KT\. 
 Luke 1, 73 opKov [for op/cov] ov w/ioo-e. 20, 
 17. 1 Cor. 10, 16 rbv aprov ov KXui/Jifv, ov^l 
 Koivuvla KT\. See Buttm. 5 151. 1. 4. Matth. 
 474. Winer 24. 2. a. So Hippoc. Morb. 
 
 4. 11 TO.S Trrjyas as wvop-ocra, aurai KrX. 
 Plato Men. 96. a, C ojpoXoyrJKa/iei/ Se ye, 
 
 7rpyp,aTos ov pTt io~Ka 
 Sqrat elev, TOVTO SiftaKTov p,r) elvai. Comp. 
 Virg. ^En. 1. 577 urbem quam statuo, 
 vestra est. /3) Where the antecedent it 
 self is attracted over into the clause of the 
 relative, and by transposition stands after it 
 in the proper case- of the relative ; see 
 Buttm. 5 143. 12. Kiihner 5 332. 8. Matth. 
 474. a. Winer $ 24. 2. b. Mark 6, 16 
 elnev OTI ov eyu> uTreKf(pd\i(ra 
 
 *I<L>dvvrii>, OVTOS fo-Tiv, for OVTOS eo~Tiv lcod>- 
 vys, ov f ycb aTTfK. Luke 1, 4. Acts 21, 16 
 ayovrfs Trap oi t-fvio-%up.(v, M.vdcra>vL KT\. for 
 ayovres TAvdffutva, Trap w ^ei tcrScop-fv. So 
 most commentators ; others take it for uyov 
 res Trapa Mvdvuva Trap w KT\. bringing us 
 to Mnason, etc. Winer 31 . 2. p. 242. (Plato 
 Phaed. 116. b, fjvf^ir} Trap OVTOV TO TraiSi a.) 
 Rom. 6, 17. Philem. 10. 1 John 2,25. Rev. 
 17, 8 /3XeTro iT-coi> for j3XeTron-ey. So Soph. 
 Trach. 676 w f%piov . . . TTOKO), TOVT rj(pdvt- 
 orat. Xen. An. 1. 9. 19 ys apx 01 x^P 05 - 
 y) This transposition may also take place 
 when the antecedent would already stand 
 in the same case with the relative ; cornp. 
 Winer $ 24. 2. n. Buttm. 143. 14. E. g. 
 John 11,6 fptivtv tv o> rjv TOTTW, for eV TOTTW 
 ev ca TJV. Matt. 7, 2 lv w tepifiari, tv < /xerpw, 
 for ev TW Kpi /iart w KT\. 24, 44. Mark 15, 
 12. (Hdot. 5. 106.) Here belongs the ad 
 verbial phrase ov rpoirov, /ca2 ov Tponov, 
 for KaTa TOV Tpmov ov, pr. in the manner 
 which, in the same manner as, hence i. q. as, 
 Matt. 23, 37. Luke 13, 34; *a3 ov r. Acts 
 15,11. Comp. Buttm. $131. 7, 10. 5115.4. 
 So Sept. Is. 14, 19. 24. 2 Mace. 15, 39. 
 Xen. An. 6. 3. 1 . 8) Sometimes the ante 
 cedent is attracted over to the second clause 
 in such a way, that it together with the rela 
 tive remains in the case required by the 
 word on which it depends ; Rom. 4, 17 
 KaTfvavTi ov tnio-Tivo-f 3foO, for KOTtvavrt 
 Seoi) <B eTrt o-Tfvcre. Buttm. $ 143. 14. Wi 
 ner 5 24. 2. n. Soph. (Ed. Col. 333 TJ\%OV vv 
 
 2>7Tfp fl^OV OtKfTWV TT I O~ T W fJLOVO). 
 
 c) The case of the relative often depends 
 on a preposition with which the verb is 
 construed ; e. g. a) Genr. Matt. 3, 17 
 t3 vlos p-ov, ev a> cvb oKTjo-a. 10, 11. 11, 10 
 OVTOS ydp fo~Ti, Ttfpl ov yeypaTTTai. Luke 1, 
 4. Rom. 10, 14. 1 Cor. 8, 6 bis, els Seoy o 
 Trariyp, t ov TO. -navra KT\. So Xen. Mem. 
 2. 2. 8. |3) Sometimes the prep, which 
 stands with the anteced. is repeated before 
 the relative ; John 4, 53 tv 777 c5pa, eV y tl- 
 irev KT\. Acts 7, 4. 20, 18. Comp. Winer 
 $ 54. 7. n. (Dem. 1203. 9 ev Tols xpwotr ev 
 ols ytypairrai *rX. Plato Soph. 257. d. 
 Xen. Vect. 4. 13.) More commonly when 
 the prep, stands before the antecedent, it is 
 omitted before the relative, Winer 1. c. 
 Matth. $ 474. e. $ 595 ult. E. g. Matt. 24, 
 50 ev rjp-fpa fj ov Trpoo-SoKa. Luke 1, 25. 
 12, 46. Acts 13, 2 els TO epyov, o 7rpocr/ct- 
 /cX^p-at avTovs. v. 39. So Plato Phaedo 21. 
 p. 76. b, Sioovai Xoyoi/ irepl TOVTCHV tov vvv 
 8rj e\eyopev. Xen. Conv. 4. 1. An. 5. 7. 17. 
 y) By Attraction the relative is put with 
 the preposition belonging to the omitted an- 
 
09, ?;, o 
 
 519 
 
 oy, 77, o 
 
 tecedent ; comp. above in no. 3. a. John 6, 
 29 Iva TriorevoTjrf ds ov direo-TCt\(v exeivos, 
 for is TOVTOV ov KT\. 19, 37. Rom. 14, 22. 
 1 Cor. 7, 1. Gal. 1, 8. 9. Heb. 5, 8. 2 Pet. 
 2, 12. 
 
 d) Sometimes the relative is not depen 
 dent on the verb, but on some noun con 
 nected with the verb, and then the relative 
 is put in the genitive; Matt. 3, 11 ov OVK 
 tlp.1 IKHVUS TO. {/TToSrjfJMTa j3ao~rd<rai. V. 12 
 ov TO irrvov. Mark 14, 32. Luke 13, 1 &>/ 
 TO oT/ia. John 1, 27. 4, 46. 11, 2. Acts 16, 
 14. Rom. 2, 29. Col. 1, 25. Rev. 13, 12. 
 Sept Dan. 2, 11. Hdian. 8. 3. 20 ATroX- 
 \<ava, ov Kal Trjv eiKova eXeydV rives KT\. 
 
 4. As to Position ; here the relative with 
 its clause regularly follows the antecedent, 
 as in most of the preceding examples. But 
 for the sake of emphasis, the relative clause 
 may be put first, espec. where a demonstr. 
 avros, OVTOS, or the like, follows ; as Matt. 
 26, 48 w av (f)i\r)o~a, avTos eo~Ti. John 3, 
 26 of r\v ufTU o~ov . . . OVTOS /3arrTt f. Heb. 
 13, 11. 2 Pet. 2, 19. Comp. Buttm. $ 143. 
 10. Kiihner { 332. 8. Matth. $478. In 
 both these positions, the antecedent, espec. 
 the demonstr. pron. avros, OVTOS, enflvos, is 
 very frequently omitted ; so that the relative 
 then stands like Engl. what, for that which, 
 he who ; comp. above in no. 3. a. Buttm. 
 
 5 143. 15. Matth. $ 473. b. 478. Winer 23. 
 2. E. g. genr. Matt 13, 17 aKovo-ai a 
 aKovfTf, for TavTa a. 14, 7. Mark 2, 24. 
 Luke 8, 17. John 4, 22. al. So in the in 
 verted position, Matt. 7, 2. 10, 38 Kal os ov 
 \afj..-}urfi OVK fo-Ti /MOV aios. 13, 12 Kal 
 o exfi- dp^fjo-eTat. 19, 6. 25, 29. Mark 9, 
 40. Luke 4, 6. 12, 40. John 8, 38 bis, cy 
 
 6 co>/Kz<a, XaXa> KT\. 13, 27. Rom. 2, 1. 
 Heb. 2, 18. 1 John 1, 1. 3. Comp. Matth. 
 5 478. Here too belongs the elliptic use of 
 Neut. o with its clause before another pro 
 position, in the signif. as to that, in that, 
 quod altinet ad; the corresponding TOVT 
 <rrt, TOVT ecrrt 6Yi, or the like, being omit 
 ted before the latter clause. Rom. 6, 10 bis, 
 o yap dnt^avf, Ttj apapTia ariSoftr (<pdna 
 o 8f /, / ra Sew. Gal. 2, 20. See Matth. 
 } 4781 Buttm. I 151. IV. 10. So Plato 
 Euthyd. 271. c, o Se o~v tpuTqs Trjv o~o<f)iav 
 avTolv KT\. Xen. Hi. 6. 12. CEc. 15. 4. An. 
 2. 3. 1. 
 
 B) In SIGNIFICATION. The relative strictly 
 serves simply to introduce a dependent clause 
 and mark its close relation to the leading pro 
 position ; as Matt. 2, 9 6 do-Trip, ov doov ev TTJ 
 dvaTo\fj,irporiy(vavTovs. But in common use 
 it was employed in a wider extent, both as a 
 general connective particle, and also some 
 
 times as implying purpose, result, cause, 01 
 the like, which would properly be ex 
 pressed by a conjunction. See Buttm. 
 5 143. n. 2, 3, 4. Matth. 479 sq. For the 
 sense what, that which, he who, see above 
 in A. 4. 
 
 1. As a general connective, e. g. a; 
 Genr. John 4, 46. 11, 2 r^v 8f Mapia iy 
 d\fi\l/ao-a TOV Kvpiov fJ-vpca ... ^$-6 dot\(pbs 
 A. rjo-SfVfi. In this way it is not uncom 
 mon for Paul, and also Peter, to connect 
 two, three, or more clauses by relatives, 
 referring to the same or also to different 
 subjects ; e. g. Acts 26, 7. Eph. 3, II. 12. 
 Col. 1. 13 sq. 24-29. 1 Pet 1, 8. 10. 12. 
 2, 22 sq. 3, 19 sq. 4, 4. 5. 2 Pet. 2, 2. 3. 3, 
 1 6. al. Comp. Winer 24. n. 2. b) 
 Where it is equivalent to a demonstrative, 
 and this, these; and he, they, etc. Luke 12, 
 24 ols OVK eoTi Tapflov, and they have no 
 store-house. Acts 6, 6 ovs (o-Trjo-av, and 
 these they set before, etc. 7, 45. 11, 30. 
 Gal. 1, 7. 1 Pet l, 12. 2, 4; ty 1 <5 Phil. 3, 
 12; (v oiy i. q. ei/ TOVTOIS 8e Luke 12, 1 ; 
 (Is 5 i. q. els TOVTO 8e Col. 1, 29. This is 
 rare in early Greek writers, but more fre 
 quent in later ones, Buttm. 5 143. 6. Matth. 
 5 447. So Apollodor. 1.1.3 Kpovos KaTf- 
 tritv Eori ai/, eiVa Aij/xjjrpai/ Kal "Hpav jie3 
 as liXovTava KT\. Jos. Ant. 14. 13. 7. Plato 
 Apol. Socr. 35. a. c) In the formula ov 
 Tponov, see above in A. 3. b. y. 
 
 2. As implying purpose, equiv. to ti-a, 
 Matt. 11, 10 eyo) d7roaWXXa> TOV dyyt\6v 
 JJLOV ... os: KaTao-Kfvdo-fi TTJV 686v o~ov KT\. 
 Mark 1, 2. Luke 7, 27. Comp. Buttm. 
 5 143. m. 34. Matth. 5 481. So Heb. -iias 
 Sept. Iva, Gen. 11, 7. 22, 14. Deut. 4, 40~; 
 comp. Gesen. Lehrg. p. 771. Heb. Lex. 
 art. "iffiit B. 2. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 14 6VXa 
 KTuwai, oif dfjLWovvrai TOVS doiKoviras. 
 
 3. As marking result, or consequence, 
 equiv. to Start. So after TIS, Luke 7, 49 
 TLS OVTOS fo-riv, os Kal d/za/m ar d<pir)ai, who 
 is this, that he should also forgive sins? 5, 
 21. Matth. ^ 479. a, and n. 1. Buttm. 143. 
 m. 35 b. So Judith 8, 12. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 
 14 TIS OVT<OS i&xvpus, os SvvaiT av KT\. 
 
 4. As implying cause, or a reason, equiv. 
 to OTI, because. Luke 8, 13 OVTOI piav OVK 
 
 fXOVCTlV, Ot TTpOS KUlpOV TTlO-T(VOVO-l, Lclt. Ul 
 
 qui, because. Luke 4, 18. So in the con 
 structions a v 3 S)v, ffi J, see in dvrl no. 1. 
 c. eiri II. 3. f. Comp. Buttm. 5 143. m. 35 a. 
 Matth. ^ 480. c. So more freq. oonr, see 
 that art. in B. 3. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 13. 
 
 5. Once < o in direct interrog. for eVi 
 TJ, Matt. 26, 50 craTpf, f<p* o naptl ; So 
 Arr. Epict. 4. 1. 95. Comp. Aristoph. 
 
520 
 
 ocr/i?) 
 
 Lysistr. 1101 cr 1103 eVt rt Trdpeore 8fv- 
 po , Tliis direct use belongs to the later 
 Greek, although earlier writers employed 
 os indirectly like rls , as Plato Men. 80. c> 
 ivfpi dpfTTJs, o fcrriv, e ydb p.ev OVK ol8a. Xen. 
 Cyr. 6. 1. 46. See Winer ^ 24. 3. Matth. 
 485. Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 57. 
 
 6. Including the notion of a particle of 
 time, as ore, orav. So a<^> rj s r]fj.fpas, i. q. 
 UTTO rfjs rjfj.. ore, Col. 1, 6. 9. Ellipt. d<^> 
 rjs, i. q. dnb rfjs rjp.. V. u>pas. ore, Luke 7, 
 45. 2 Pet. 3, 4. So a^P 1 *l s W^P *! an d 
 XP l ov, see in a%pi no. 1. a, b; eV o>, see 
 in eV no. 2. a; ews ou, see in eW III. 1. b; 
 p.expis ov, see in fiexpi no. 1. b. /3. 
 Comp. Matth. } 480. 
 
 7. Neut. genit. ov, as adv. of place, where, 
 Matth. J 486. 1. Buttm. 116. 4. a) Pr. 
 Luke 4, 16 ov T)V Tf%pap.p,tvos. 23, 53. Acts 
 1, 13 ov rjcrav Kara^fvovrts. Col. 3, 1. Heb. 
 3, 9. Rev. 17, 15 TO. vSara . . . ov 17 jropvr) KO- 
 Sqrai. Trop. Rom. 4, 15. 5,20. Also with 
 fKfl emphat. corresponding, Matt. 18, 20 ov 
 yap fieri Svo 77 rpds . . . tKfl KT\. 2 Cor. 3, 17. 
 So Sept. Gen. 13, 4. JEi. V. H. 3. 19. 
 Xen. An. 2. 1. 6; c. em Arr. Epict. 2. 2. 
 14. With prepositions, as eVdi>co ov Matt. 
 2, 9 ; e | ou whence Phil. 3, 20 ; see Winer 
 5 54. 7. n. 1. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 46 sq. b) 
 In attraction with verbs of motion, for whi 
 ther ; as in Engl. often where, see Buttm. 
 
 5 151. I. 8. So Luke 10, 1 ds irdcrav noXiv 
 KOI roirov, ov ffj.f\\fv avrbs epxe<r3ai. 22, 
 
 10. 24, 28. Matt. 28, 16. Also ou fdv 
 whithersoever 1 Cor. 16,6; see fdv (for av) 
 2. b. So Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 15 ; ov fdv 1 Mace. 
 6, 36. 
 
 C) Connected with other particles : a) 
 
 6 s av, os fdv, whosoever, comp. Buttm. 1 39. 
 m. 14; see in av II. 1. a; fdv II. 1. b) 
 or ye, once Rom. 8, 32 ; see in ye no. 1. 
 b. c) os 8f]TroT, once John 5, 4 ; see 
 in Bfj no. 3. d) ocrTrep, rjirep, oirtp, who 
 indeed, who namely, i. q. or but stronger 
 and more definite; once Mark 15, 6 era 
 ofo-piov, ovTTfp TJTOVVTO, \. c. whom namely 
 they demanded. Buttm. 75. 3. So Jos. 
 Vit. 5 18. Luc. D. Deor. 8. 1. ib. 10. 2. 
 e) o OTIS , see in its order. + 
 
 ocra/a?, adv. (oo-oj,) how many limes, 
 how often ; in N. T. only with av, i. e. 6o-d- 
 KIS av, however often, so often as, 1 Cor. 11, 
 25, 26; oa-aKis tdv Rev. 11, 6. See in ay 
 
 11. 1. b, and fdv II. 2. c. Plut. Alex. M. 5. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 4. 3. 
 
 69 ye, see in ye no. 1. b. 
 ocrioy, a, ov, also once uo-tos, 6, 17. 
 1 Tim. 2, 8 ocrt ovj \t~ipas, see Winer $ 11. 
 
 1. Matth. { 436. 2 ; holy, pure, sanctus, pi. 
 right as conformed to God and his laws j 
 thus distinguished from dittos, which re 
 fers more to human laws and duties ; e. g. 
 Pol. 23. 10. 8 ra irpos TOVS dvtlpiaTrovs 8i- 
 Kaia, KOI TO. Trpbs TOVS Seorr oo-ta. Hdian. 2. 
 13. 16. Xen. Hell. 4. 1. 33. Tittrn. de Syr. 
 N. T. p. 25. In N. T. 
 
 1. Of persons, holy, hallowed; so of God, 
 as the personification of holiness and purity, 
 Rev. 15, 4 on povos ttcrtoy. 16, 5. (Sept. for 
 TDn p s . 145, 17; ^ Deut. 32, 4.) Ol 
 men, holy, pious, godly, careful of all duties 
 towards God; Tit. 1, 8 Set yap fmo-KOTrov 
 flvai . . . craxppova, dixatov, ocriov, KT\. Else 
 where of Christ, Heb. 7, 26. Acts 2, 27 et 
 13, 35 ovdf Scocrets TOP ocriov trou tfieif rr]v 
 dicxpZopdv, quoted from Ps. 16, 10 whero 
 Sept. for *J n on ; as a i so D eut< 33) 8 . 2 Chr. 
 6,41. Ps. 4, 4. Arr. Epict. 2. 4. 2. Xen. 
 Ag. 3. 5. 
 
 2. Of things, holy, sacred ; e. g. 1 Tim. 
 
 2, 8 tiraipovras ocriovs ^eipay, i. e. pure, 
 spotless. (Sept. otr/a Kap8ia for "ifrta Prov. 
 22, 11.) Acts 13, 34 8<icra> vfuv rd oaia 
 Aa^iS ra Triora, pr. I will give you the holy 
 promises of David, the sure, i. e. the things 
 inviolably promised of God to David . in al 
 lusion to Is. 55, 3 where Sept. for ^tm 
 ^T?> mercies, favours promised. 
 
 ocriOT7/9, TTJTOS, T], (oo-tos,) holiness, god 
 liness, piety, careful observance of all duties 
 towards God ; distinguished from fiiKawxrv- 
 vr\ as oaios from OLKMOS, see above in oo-ios. 
 Luke 1, 75 eV ocriorTjri KCU diKaiocrvvrj eVw- 
 TTIOV avTov. Eph. 4, 24. Sept. for ^* 
 Deut. 9, 5 ; BP\ 1 K. 9, 4. Plut. Alcib. 
 34. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 47. 
 
 OITKO?, adv. (oo-tor,) holily, piously, godly, 
 1 Thess. 2, 10 oViW /cat oucaius, comp. 
 above in oo-toj. Jos. Ant. 6. 5. 5. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 5. 26. 
 
 007477, fjs, fj, (o^co,) a smell, odour, e. g. 
 bad 2 Mace. 9, 10. 12 ; of the hare, Xen. 
 Ven. 8. 2. In N. T. only of fragrant odour, 
 John 12, 3 fj oe oiKia eVrXjj/xiSj; eV TTJS 
 oo-p.TJs rov p.vpov. Sept. for H^l) Cant. 1, 
 
 3. 11. 2, 13. (^El. V. H. 14. 39 oV/ii) TWK 
 POOMV. Xen. Conv. 2. 3.) By Hebr. oo-^ij 
 tva>oias, an odour of fragrance, i. e. sweet 
 odour, as accompanying an acceptable sa 
 crifice, Eph. 5, 2. Phil. 4, 18. Sept. and 
 n pp? n-n Lev. 1, 9. 13. 17. 2, 2. 9. al. 
 Trop. 2 Cor. 2, 14 TTJV oV/iJjJ> r^s yvutrttas 
 aiirov (f>avfpovvTt 81 fj/j,a>v. V. 16 bis, 007x77 
 Sai/drou . . . 007117 fwiyy, comp. the Rabb. CD 
 ^^l aroma v. pufot s mortis, O" l * 1 in c ^ 
 
521 
 
 aroma, v. pulvis vita, Wetstein N. T. in 
 loc. Buxtorf. Lex. 1494. Coinp. also Aiis- 
 tot. de mirab. Auscult. Xe yerat Se KOI TOVS 
 yvnas inb TTJS TWV p.vpuiv ocrp.fjs ajro^vrj- 
 (TKftv. JE\. H. An. 3. 7 euwcua 8e <a\ pvpov 
 yvijflv curia SaraTOU. 
 
 ocro9, rj, ov, relat. pron. corresp. to TO- 
 orof, and in N. T. to TOO-OVTOS or the like ; 
 Buttm. 5 79. 3, 5 ; i. q. Lat. quantus, a, urn, 
 i. e. how great, how much, how many ; as 
 great as, as much as, etc. 
 
 1. Of magnitude, how great, as great as, 
 Rev. 21, 16 TO (J,fJKOs avT^s [TCIOVTOV ecrri 
 Rec.] 5<rov KOI TO TrXaroj. Xen. An. 3. 
 1. 19. 
 
 2. Of time, how long, as long as, e. g. 
 ocrov xpovov Mark 2, 19; t(f> ocrov \P^~ 
 vov Rom. 7, 1. 1 Cor. 7, 39. Gal. 4, 1 ; 
 also (<j) ocrov Matt. 9, 15, see in Vi III. 2. 
 a. So Act. Thorn. } 36. Xen. Cyr. 5. 5. 8. 
 Repeated and so intens. Heb. 10, 37 ert 
 fjiiKpov ocrov ocrov, like Engl. yet a very 
 very little white ; comp. Herm. ad *Vig. p. 
 726. Matth. 486. n. 1 fin. So Sept. Is. 
 26, 20. Aristoph. Vesp. 213 OVK dntKoifjLT)- 
 ^rjfjLtv ocrov ocrov O~TI\T]V. Arr. Indie. 29. 15. 
 
 3. Of quantity, number, multitude, how 
 much, how many, etc. a) Sing, as much 
 as ; John 6, 1 1 IK rSnv &bapUn> \TOO-QVTOV] 
 Sc-ov TJSc\ov. So JEl. V. H. 1. 4. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 2. 26; with TOO-OVTOV expr. Xen. 
 Cyr. 2. 3. 6. b) Plur. ocroi, ocrai, as 
 many as, all who; Neut. 5 era, as many as, 
 all that or which, all what. Matt. 14, 36 KOI 
 ocroi fj^avro, diecrobSquai . Mark 3, 10. 
 Acts 4, 6. 34. Rom. 2, 12. 2 Cor. 1, 20. 
 Gal. 3, 10. Rev. 2, 24. Neut. Luke 12, 
 3 ocra tv TTJ o-KOTia tiirart. John 15, 14. 
 Acts 9, 39. Jude 10. (Hdian. 4. 9. 16. Xen. 
 An. 2.1. 1.) Preceded by navrts, where 
 irdiTfs ocroi is i. q. ocroi, but stronger, Matt. 
 13, 46. 22, 10. Mark 12, 44. Luke 4, 40. 
 al. (Hdian. 1. 10. 11. Xen. Hell. 6. 2. 27.) 
 With OVTOS or OVTOS corresponding, Rom. 8, 
 14 ocroi yap. . . OVTOI flcriv KT\. Gal. 6, 12. 
 John 1, 12 ocroi 5e tXaftov avrov, e8a)Kfv 
 avrols KT\. Gal. 6, 16. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 9. 
 Hi. 4. 10.) With av. as ocros av, ocros eoV, 
 whosoever, whatsoever, see in av II. l.a; tdv 
 (for ai>) no. 1. Matt. 18, 18 ocra, tav S^cr^re 
 ri TTjf yrjs Mark 6, 1 1 ocroi av p.fj 8fu>i>rai 
 vpas. Luke 9, 5. John 11, 22. Rev. 3, 19. 
 Strengthened by irdvrfs, Matt. 7, 12. Acts 3, 
 22. So Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 5. c) Neut 6 era 
 sometimes expresses also admiration, how 
 many and great things, as in Engl. what 
 things, q. d. what great things. Acts 9, 13 
 ocra KOKO. (Troirjcrf rols dyiots crov. V. 16. 15, 
 12 ocra (iro iTjcrfv 6 Seoj o~Tjp,(ia KT\. So 
 
 genr. of great or unusual deeds, Mark 6, 30. 
 Luke 4, 23. 9,10. John 21, 25; of benefits 
 conferred, Mark 3,8. 5, 19. 20. Luke 8, 39. 
 Acts 14, 27. 15, 4. 2 Tim. 1, 18. Comp. 
 Buttm. j 150. m. 8. Matth. 445. c. 
 
 4. Of measure, degree, extent. a) Be 
 fore a comparative, as KaS* ocroi . . . Kara TO 
 O-OVTOV, by how much... by so much, Heb. 
 7, 20. 22; ocro> . . . TOCTOUTOJ id. Heb. 1, 4. 
 (Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 10.) So oo-w, by how 
 much, with TOO-OVTW impl. Heb. 8, 6. (Plut. 
 Alex. M. 5.) With paXXov omitted after 
 ocrw, Heb. 10, 25 cai TOO-OVTO) /zaXXov, ocra> 
 /3XeVere KT\. Comp. Matth. j 455. n. 7. 
 b) Neut. ocrov, adv. how much, by how 
 much, Mark 7, 36 ocrov 8e UVTOS avTois Sie- 
 ore XXeTO, /xaXXoi/ KT\. Plur. ocra id. with 
 TOO-OVTOV, Rev. 18, 7. Also e c/) ocrov, inas 
 much as, Matt. 25, 40. 45. Rom. 11, 13; 
 a3 ocroi/, by how much, as, with OVTCO, Heb. 
 9, 27. + 
 
 ocTTrep, rJTrfp, airtp, see in 6s C. d. 
 
 oa-reov, contr. ocrrovv, ov, TO, Plur. 
 uncontr. oor/a, gen. ocrrcuv, comp. Winer 
 8. 2. d ; a bone, John 19, 36 ocrroCj ou 
 o~vvTpi^TjcrTai. Luke 24, 39 crdpxa Kal 
 ocrrfa. Matt. 23, 27 yipawnf wrfAr, and 
 so Eph. 5, 30. Heb. 11,22. Sept. for CSS, 
 oa-Tovv Gen. 2, 23. Num. 9, 12 ; oo-rea 
 Lam. 3, 4. 4, 8 ; usually tWa Gen. 50, 25. 
 Ex. 13, 19; ocrre wi/ Gen. 2, 23. Prov. 16, 
 24. Luc. Pise. 36 OO-TOVV. Luc. Amor. 46 
 ocrr/a, usually oora D. Mart. 18. 1. Xen. 
 Eq. 1. 4, 5 ; ocrr/wi/ Luc. Necyom. 15. 
 
 OffTt?, rjris, o,n, compound relat. pron. 
 i. e. or strengthened by T\S, Buttm. 5 77. 3. 
 Ki\hner j 93. Neut. o.ri is so written to 
 distinguish it from conj. on, Buttm. 5 15. 2. 
 Gen. OVTIVOS does not occur in N. T. but only 
 gen. orou in the phrase ecov 6Yov, see be 
 low in B. 4. Buttm. 1. c. The only other 
 forms in N. T. are Plur. nom. O~TIV(S, ai- 
 Tivfs, ariva, and Neut. ace. O,TI, aTiva. Pr. 
 any one who, some one who, whosoever, what 
 soever ; differing from Ss in referring to a 
 subject only generally, as one of a class, 
 and not definitely, thus serving to render a 
 proposition general ; see Passow s. v. Matth. 
 j 483. It has mostly the regular relative 
 construction, Buttm. 5 143. 1 ; for instances 
 where it conforms in gender and number 
 to the following noun, see below in A. 1, 
 and B. 3. Buttm. 143. 4. 
 
 A) In the proper relative sense. 1 . Pr. 
 and genr. who, i. e. one who, some one who, 
 whoever, whosoever, etc. Matt. 2, 6 * croC 
 
 i jyovp.fvos, oaris Troi/Liaivei TO* 
 f P.OV, i. e. one who. 7, 24 dvSpl <ppovi 
 
ocru? 
 
 522 
 
 /MB, ocrrts (pKo86p.r)o-e. v. 26. 13, 52. Luke 
 2, 10 xapav pf-ydXnv, rjns eVrat iravrl rco 
 Xaw. 7, 37. 12, 1. Acts 16, 16 iraiBio-iajv rtwz 
 . .. TJTIS KT\. 24, 1. Rom. 16, 6. 12. 1 Cor. 7, 
 13. Phil. 2, 20. Plur. Matt. 16, 28 Vi 
 r<fes...orr/es ov /Lt^ KrX. 25, 1 ; arwa, 
 things which, 1 Cor. 6, 20. Col. 2, 23. So 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 16. In 1 Cor. 3, 17 olnvts 
 agrees with the subsequent v/xeis instead of 
 vaos. Buttm. { 143. 4. 
 
 2. every one who, all who, whosoever, 
 whatsoever, where the relative clause often 
 stands first ; comp. in os A. 4. a) Genr. 
 c. Indie. Matt. 5, 39 6Wts o-e pairio-ei . . . 
 rrrpt^ov awrw KrX. V. 41. 13, 12. 23, 12. 
 Mark 8, 34. Luke 14, 27. (Xen. Mem. 1. 
 6. 13.) With the Subjunct. Matt. 18, 4, 
 but this is unusual ; also James 2, 10 
 Lachm. where Rec. and others have the 
 Indie, future ; see Winer 43. 3. b, fin. 
 Plur. Mark 4, 20 KOI ovroi flaw . . . otrivts 
 aKovovcn rbv \6yov KT\. Luke 8, 15. Gal. 
 5, 4. Rev. 1,7. So Xen. Cyr. 1 . 5. 1 1 . b) 
 Strengthened by Tray, but only in Sing, the 
 plural form being always TrdVres 00-01 and 
 not TrdvTfs olrives, see Passow s. v. Matth. 
 5 483. b, init. So Matt. 7, 24 TTOS ovv ocrris 
 KT\. 10, 32. Col. 3, 17. al. So by Hebr. 
 jrdcra ^vx^i fjris av KT\. Acts 3, 23 ; comp. 
 Deut. 1 , 39. So Jos. Ant. 14. 9. 4. c) With 
 av, which strengthens the indefiniteness ; 
 comp. in av II. 1. a; whosoever, whatsoever, 
 in N. T. only with the Sing. c. Subjunct. 
 Matt. 10, 33 Jems 8 av dpvf]crrjTai uf. Luke 
 10, 35. John 2, 5. 1 Cor. 16, 2. Gal. 5, 10. 
 al. So 0;Ti tdv Col. 3, 23 ; 6 edv ri for o ; rt 
 tdv Eph. 6, 8; comp. euv (for av) no. 1. 
 Matth. 5483. p. 906. So Lysias p. 160 ult. 
 
 3. Sometimes 6Wis refers to a definite 
 subject, and is then apparently i. q. 5s, e. g. 
 Luke 2, 4 els TroXti/ Aa/Si S, TJTIS KaXeTrat 
 B^SXeeVi. John 8, 53. Acts 11, 28. 16, 12. 
 Rev. 1, 12. 11, 8. But in all these in 
 stances the ultimate reference may perhaps 
 be to a general idea, as in Luke 2, 4 to a 
 city of David, one which is called Bethlehem; 
 and so of the rest. John 8, 53 TOV Trarpbs 
 f]fj.a>v A/Span/i, OOTIS aW3ai>e, Abraham, a 
 man who is dead. Comp. Passow ocrris 
 lett. g. (7.) Matth. $ 483. p. 906. Horn. II. 
 23. 43 ov uf] Zrjv ocms re Seeoy viraros KT\. 
 Hdot. 2. 151. 
 
 B) "Oo-rtv, like the simple 8s, is employed 
 in a wider extent, both as a connective, and 
 as implying result, cause, or the like, where 
 a conjunction might also stand ; comp. in 
 os B. Buttm. 139. m. 34 sq. Matth. 5 477. 
 
 1 . As a general connective ; Luke 1 , 20 
 av^f S>v OVK fTTicrreva-as rcis \6yois fiov, 
 
 i *rX. 23, 19. Johfi 
 21, 25. Rom. 9, 4. Gal. 4, 24. Heb. 2, 3. 
 8, 5. 10, 11. al. Comp. in os B. 1. 
 
 2. As marking result, event, or the like, 
 equiv. to wtrre. So after TOIOUTOS, 1 Cor. 5, 
 
 1 Toiavrr) iropveia, rjris ov8e tv rots t%i>((rw. 
 Comp. in 5s, B. 3. Matth. 479. n. 1. Dem. 
 181. 16. Xen. An. 2. 5. 12. 
 
 3. Implying cause, ground, or reason, 
 equiv. to 5ri because ; comp. in os B. 4. 
 Matth. ^ 480. c. So Matt. 7, 15 Trpoo-e ^ere 
 oe 0776 TU>V ^r(v$QTrpo<f>r)Ta>v, otrtves fp\ov- 
 rai irpbs tyzas KT\. Lat. ut qui, as those who, 
 i. e. because such, for such come to you. 
 25, 3. Acts 10, 41. 47. 17, 11. Rom. 6, 2. 
 So ijns Col. 3, 5. 14. Heb. 10, 35. Here 
 it sometimes takes the number and gender 
 of the following noun, Buttm. 5 .143. 4 ; 
 comp. in os A. 1. a. Eph. 3, 13 p) emtaKdv 
 (V rals SXfyciTi fj.ov vnep V/JLUIV, rjris f<rrl 
 Soa ifjLuv. Phil. 1, 28. 1 Tim. 1, 4. Gal. 
 5, 19. Eurip. Med. 221, 222. Xen. Cyr. 4. 
 5. 39 fin. 
 
 4. Including the notion of a particle of 
 time, as ore, Srav, only in the phrase tots 
 OTOV, until when, until; see in ecus III. 1. 
 b. /3. Comp. in os B. 6. Matth. $ 480. b, 
 and note. + 
 
 0<TTpaKlvo$, 77, ov, (oo-rpaKov, oWpeoi-,) 
 Lat. lestaceus, i. e. earthen, made of clay, 
 
 2 Tim. 2, 20. Trop. as an emblem of frail 
 ty, 2 Cor. 4, 7. Sept. for ! cnn. Lev. 6, 28. 
 15, 12. Arr. Epict. 3. 9. 18." Diod. Sic. 
 3. 9. 
 
 ecos, f), (oV(/>paiVo/xat,) the 
 smell, sense of smell. 1 Cor. 12, 17 et eJXo* 
 [TO o-a>/ia] OKOJJ, TTOU 17 o(T(ppr](ris ; Pint. 
 de Fortun. 3. Plato Phaed. 111. b. Comp. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 117. 
 
 ocrc^i;?, ^os, 17, Plur. at 6o-(pves, the loinst 
 the lower region of the back, lumbar region, 
 the hips, as opp. to the shoulders and thighs, 
 Epict. Ench. 29. 5. Arr. Epict. 3. 15. 9 
 I8ov crov rovs (u/iovs, rous /J.rjpovs, TTJV ocr<$>vv. 
 Luc. Lexiph. 8 ; of animals Xen. Eq. 1.12. 
 Ven. 4. 1. In N. T. only as correspond 
 ing to Heb. d^sntt and c^sbh, the loins, 
 external or internal. 
 
 1. External, the loins, the hips, where the 
 girdle is worn, Matt. 3, 4 et Mark 1, 6 farjv 
 hpftorunff Trepl TTJV 6<r(pvv avTov, The 
 orientals, in order to run or labour with 
 more ease, are accustomed to gird their long 
 flowing garments close about them ; hence 
 to have the loins girded, i. q. to be in readi 
 ness, prepared for any thing, Luke 12, 35, 
 Eph. 6, 14. Trop. 1 Pet. 1,13; comp. in 
 Comp. Sept. and E 1 ?-^ Ex. 
 
orav 
 
 523 
 
 OTt 
 
 12, 11. 2 K. 4, 29. 9, 1 ; B^n Job 38,3. 
 
 40,7. 
 
 2. Internal, as the seat of procreative 
 pmver in men ; Heb. 7, 5 efpxeo-3cu eVc TTJS 
 ocr(pvos rivos, see in t^fp^op.ai no. 2. Heb. 
 7, 10. Acts 2, 30 Kapiros rrjs oa<pvos, i. e. 
 children, offspring ; comp. Sept. naprrbs KOI- 
 \ias Gen. 30, 2. Ps. 132, 11. Sept. for 
 Cisbn Gen. 35, 11. 2 Chr. 6, 9. 
 
 OTCIV, adv. (ore, av,) w>/ierc, with the ac 
 cessory idea of uncertainty, possibility, i. q. 
 whensoever, if ever, in case thai, so often as ; 
 Buttm. {139. m. 14, 37 ; comp. in av II. I.e. 
 Construed regularly with the Subjunctive, 
 referring to an often repeated or possible 
 action in the present or future time ; in 
 Greek writers sometimes with the Optative ; 
 and in a few very late instances with the 
 Indicative. Buttm. 1. c. Kiihner \ 337. G. 
 Matth. ^ 521. p. 1005. Winer } 43. 5. 
 
 1. Pr. with the Subjunctive, as above, 
 a) In general propositions, c. Subj. pres. 
 Matt. 15, 2 orav aprov ttAtttfftf* Luke 11, 
 21. John 16, 21. 2 Cor. 13, 9. al. Aor. 
 Matt. 5, 1 1 QTCLV ovfibiaaxTiv u/xar. Mark 4, 
 15. 16. John 2, 10. 1 Tim. 5, 11. Rev. 9, 
 5. al. (Pres. Luc. D. Deor. 11. 2. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 4. 15; aor. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 8. Hi. 
 2. 15, 17.) So in general exhortations, c. 
 pres. Matt. 6, 5. 6 <rv fie orav irpoa-tvxn- 
 Mark 11, 25. Luke 14, 12; aor. i. q. Lat. 
 fut. exact. Luke 14, 8 orav KXrjSiJs viro TWOS- 
 17, 10. In a general comparison, c. pres. 
 Luke 11, 36 as orav KT\. Matth. 1. c. n. 3. 
 p. 1008. Passow s. v. So Horn. II. 11. 269. 
 
 b) In reference to a future action or time, 
 Matth. 1. c. p. 1006. E. g. c. Subj. pres. 
 Matt. 26, 29 fats rrjs rjp- * orav avro Trivat 
 ue3* vfJMV KT\. Mark 13, 4. John 7, 27. 
 Rev. 10, 7. 18, 9 ; c. rore corresp. 1 Thess. 
 5, 3. Subj. aor. i. q. Lat. fut. exact. Matt. 
 19, 28 omv KaSiarj 6 vlos rov di>:}p. Mark 8, 
 38. Luke 13, 28. John 5, 7. 15, 26. Acts 
 23, 35. 1 Cor. 16, 2. 3. 5. Rev. 12, 4. al. 
 So c. rore corresp. Matt. 9, 15. 24, 15. 
 John 8, 28. al. (Pres. Plato Gorg. p. 526. e. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 14; aor. Sept. Jer. 34, 
 14. Thuc. 4. 60.) Once c. Indie, fut. Rev. 
 4, 9 KOI orav 8a>aov(n ra a>a KT\. where 
 Mss. read 8&><n and Soio-wo-i. See Winer 
 \ 43. 5. n. 
 
 2. With the Indie, imperf. in narrating 
 an actual event; once Mark 3, 11 Km irvtv- 
 uara TCI aKu^apra. orav avrov e 3eo>pei, i. e. 
 whenever, as often as. Here Greek writers 
 would employ the Opt. Matth. $ 521. p. 
 1006 init. p. 1007. n. 1. Winer $43. 5, pen. 
 Sept. Gen. 38, 9 orav eio-Tjp^ero. Dan. 
 3,7. 
 
 3. Spec, orav is sometimes causal, like 
 Engl. since, i. q. because, in that, inasmuch 
 as ; so c. Subj. John 9, 5 orav ev rca KOCT/HO* 
 Si, (f>s eip,i KT\. 1 Cor. 15, 27. Arislot. 
 de Mund. 4 p,aXicrra orav ro p.tv ra^itrrov y 
 rd>i/ ovratv. Plato Soph. 241. a. Xen. Hi. 6. 
 13, 14. So ore in Greek writers, Herm. 
 ad Vig. p. 916. Horn. II. 16. 433 ; also ore 
 ye Hdot. 5. 92. + 
 
 ore, adv. of time, when, correl. with 
 n-oTf , ToVe , Buttm. 116. 4; construed re 
 gularly with the Indicative as relating to an 
 actual event, Herm. ad Vig. p. 903, 915. 
 Rarely with the Subjunct. see below in 
 no. 3. 
 
 1. With Indie, pres. in general proposi 
 tions, when; John 9, 4 vvg, ore ovbtls 8v~ 
 varai fpya^u^ai. Heb. 9, 17. Comp. 
 Herm. ad Vig. p. 916. 
 
 2. Usually of time past ; so with Indie, 
 pres. in an historical sense, Mark 11, 1, 
 comp. Matt. 21, 1. (Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 6.) 
 Imperf. Mark 14, 12 ore TO Trao-^a t^vov. 
 15, 41 ore r\v tv rfj TaXtXata. John 17, 12 
 where Jesus speaks by anticipation. 21, 18. 
 Rom. 6, 20. 1 Cor. 13, 11. Jude 9. With 
 Trore corresp. Col. 3, 7. 1 Pet. 3, 20. (Xen. 
 An. 2. 6. 20.) Aor. Matt. 7, 28 ore o-vvfrc- 
 Xeo-eu 6 I. TOVS \6yovs. 12, 3. Mark 1, 32. 
 Luke 2, 21 sq. 22, 14. John 1,19. 6, 24 
 Acts 1, 13. 1 Cor. 13, 11. Gal. 2, 11 sq 
 Rev. 1, 17. 6, 3. al. saep. So with ro r 
 corresp. Matt. 21, 1. John 12, 16. (Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 4. 13.) Perf. 1 Cor. 13, 11 ore 8t 
 ytyova avfip. 
 
 3. Of future time ; so with Indie, fut 
 Luke 17, 22 fKfvcrovrai rjfj.fpai, ore eVt- 
 
 3v/x^o- fTf K^- Jonn 4 2 V 23 - 6 25 - 16 ) 25- 
 Rom. 2, 16. 2 Tim. 4, 3. Comp. Passow 
 ore no. 3. So Horn. Od. 18. 272. II. 17. 
 728. al. Once with Subjunct. Aor. instead 
 of Indie, fut. Luke 13, 35 eW av rjgrj ore 
 etTnjre *rX. So Horn. II. 23. 323. ib. 12. 
 286; see Matth. 5 521. n. 1. In the later 
 ages of the Greek, the aor. Subjunct. was 
 thus very commonly employed for the fut. 
 Indie. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 722 sq. + 
 
 o,T6, ij,re, To ; re, i. e. the prepositive art. 
 with re, so written to distinguish it from 
 the adverbs ore, rore, etc. It thus ex 
 presses simply the article in connection 
 with the different senses of re, for which 
 see in art. re 4. d. 
 
 <m, conjunct, demonstrative and causal, 
 like Engl. that; originally Neut. of ocrrn. 
 As demonstrative it stands pr. for TOVTO o,ri, 
 as pointing out or introducing that to which 
 the preceding words refei i. e. their object, 
 
OTl 
 
 524 
 
 OTL 
 
 contents, argument. As causal it is pr. i. q. 
 t!ia TOVTO O.TI, and assigns the cause, reason, 
 motive, ground of any thing, for that, be 
 cause, for, etc. Construed in N. T. with 
 the Indicative ; once by anacoluthon before 
 the Infin. Acts 27, 10, see below in I. 3. c ; 
 in Greek writers sometimes also with the 
 Optative, Mati } 529. 2. 
 
 I. Conjunct JKMOKSTRATIVE, that, viz. 
 
 1. Pr. after a demonstr. pron. as TOVTO 
 or the like expr. or impl. John 3, 18 avTT) 
 8e faTiv fj Kpiais, OTI TO <pws e X^XvSf v KT\. 
 Rom. 2, 3. 2 Cor. 5, 14. Rev. 2, 6 dXAa 
 TOVTO fx fls i Tt KT ^- impl- v. 4. So eV 
 TOVTOI . . . on, 1 John 3, 16. 4, 9. 10. 13 ev 
 
 TOVTG) . . . OTl fK TOV TTVfVp.ClTOS OVTOV fi8co- 
 
 Kfv rjp.iv. Also John 16, 19 Trepl TOVTOV 
 ... OTI ftirov Impl. Matt. 16, 7 SteXoyi- 
 foiro (V eavTols, \tyovTfs \ravTa eVn a 
 Xeyei,] OTI apTovs OVK (\d^o/j.fv. V. 17 TI 
 8taXoy( V(r3f Iv eavTols [ravTa], OTI apTovs 
 OVK e Xa/3ere; Mark 8, 16. 17. Comp. 
 Mark 2, 8. 
 
 2. After a pron. interrog. e. g. TIS, TI, as 
 John 14, 22 TI ytyovtv, OTI f^Juv p.tX\fis KT\. 
 So TI OTI for Tt fo-Ti OTI, pr. what cause is 
 tliere, that? Mark 2, 16. Luke 2, 49. Acts 
 5, 4. 9. (Luc. Tim. 28.) So with a pron. 
 or subst. Mark 4, 41 TIS apa OVTOS e cru, OTI 
 <T\. Luke 8, 25. Heb. 2, 6 TI to-Tiv aj/3po>- 
 rros, OTI /j.ip.vfio-Kr) OVTOV ; i. e. what cause 
 is there in man, that ? quoted from Sept. 
 Ps. 8, 5. 144, 3. Comp. Ex. 16, 7 fat is Se 
 rt (o-ptv, OTI KT\. Num. 16, 11. Job 15, 14. 
 Also after iroTanos Matt. 8, 27. Mark 
 4,41. 
 
 3. Most freq. OTI c. Indie, is put after 
 certain classes of verbs, to express the 
 object or reference of the verb ; and is then 
 equiv. to an Infin. c. ace. or to the corres 
 ponding participial construction, and often 
 alternates with these in one and the same 
 verb; comp. Buttm. 141. n. 2. Kiihner 
 I 329. Matth. { 539. n. 1. j 624 mid. Winer 
 45. 2. n. In Engl. with the same classes 
 of verbs it is likewise often optional whether 
 to employ that with the Indie, or simply an 
 Infinitive ; in Lat. the regular construction 
 is the Infin. c. accus. The tendency of the 
 later Greek was to multiply particles, and 
 hence it often preferred OTI to an infinitive ; 
 see Winer 1. c. 
 
 a) .After verbs signifying to say, to speak, 
 and all verbs including this idea ; which 
 are put also c. infin. Matth. 537. p. 1056. 
 534. b, and n. 2. Comp. in Engl. I say 
 that it is so, or I say it to be so. E. g. 
 after Xt ya Matt. 3, 9". 12, 6. Mark 3, 28. 
 Luke 10, 24. 2 Cor. 11, 21 w? OTI. 1 Tim. 
 
 4, 1 ; for the attract, in John 8, 54. 9, 19, 
 see Buttm. 5 151. I. 6. After elirov Matt 
 28, 7. 13. John 7, 42. 1 Cor. 1, 15. al. 
 Also after di/ayytAAaj Acts 14, 27 ; ypdfpco 
 Mark 12, 19. 1 John 2, 12. 13; oiodo-Ka 
 
 1 Cor. 11, 14 ; gtqyeo/w" Acts 9. 27 ; 
 TV/jew Matt. 23, 31. John 4, 44, 
 eWaXoC/i<u 2 Cor. 1, 23 ; o>w/xi Rev. 10. 
 6; 6[jLo\oyfa> Heb. 11, 13; o-(ppuyia> John 
 3. 33. Sometimes Aeya> or the like is im 
 plied in the preceding verb or words ; e. g. 
 TrapaKaXe w Acts 14, 22. John 7, 35 TTOV 
 OVTOS fif\\ei 7ropeufo~3at, [Xe yeoi ] OTI rjp.fls 
 OVK evpr]o-op.fv O.VTQV ; comp. Winer 42. 4. 
 c. Acts 1,5. So after a Heb. formula of 
 swearing, like 13 , e. g. foi eyco, on Rom. 
 14, 11, in allusion to Is. 45, 23, comp. 49, 
 18; see Heb. Lex. 13 B. 1. a. Here also 
 belongs ovx OTI, not that, at the beginning 
 of a clause, i. q. ov Ae yw on. used by way 
 of explanation or limitation of something 
 previously said ; John 6, 46 ovx Tl TOV ^ a 
 Tfpa TIS ewpaKfv. 7, 22. 2 Cor. 1, 24. Phil. 
 3, 12. 4, 11. 17. So oi>x olov 8t OTI Rom. 
 9, 6, see in ofos, Comp. Buttm. 5 150. 
 m. 1, 2. Matth. {624. 4. 
 
 b) After verbs signifying to show, to make 
 known, and the like, which elsewhere are 
 construed with a Particip. Matth. $ 549 5. 
 and note ; or with an Infin. Matth. j 549. 6. 
 n. 2. Comp. in Engl. I show that it is so, 
 or I show it to be so. E. g. after 8fixvv<a 
 Matt. 16, 21. John 2, 18; aTroSeiKi/v/u 
 
 2 Thess. 2,4; fyAow 1 Cor. 1, 11 ; SfjAov 
 on 1 Cor. 15, 27. Gal. 3, 11. 1 Tim. 6,7. 
 (Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 24.) Also after dnoKa- 
 \VTTTO> 1 Pet. 1, 12 ; ep(j>avifa Heb. 11, 14; 
 fyavfpow 2 Cor. 3, 3. 1 John 2, 19. 
 
 c) After verbs signifying to hear, to see, and 
 trop. to perceive, to know, and the like ; else 
 where with a Particip. Matth. { 548. 1,2, 
 and notes. 549. 3, 4, and notes ; or with an 
 Infin. Matth. { 549. 6. n. 2. So also in 
 Engl. E. g. after dxova) Matt. 20, 30. 
 Mark 2, 1. 10, 47. John 14, 28. al. (Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 3. 18.) After jSAeVa) Rev. 17, 8. 
 2 Cor. 7, 8. James 2,22; dSov Mark 9, 
 25. John 6, 22. Matt. 2, 16 ; 6pdu> James 2, 
 24 ; Sedo/zai John 6, 5 ; Sfwpe a) John 9, 8. 
 Acts 27, 10 3. 6Vt . . . p.f\\f iv eo-eaSat TOV 
 TT\OVV, where for on c. Infin. in anacolu- 
 thon, see Winer } 45 pen. { 64. 2. c. Matth. 
 { 631. p. 1299. After yij/wo-Kco Matt. 21, 
 45. Mark 12, 12. Luke 10, 11; yj/a>o-To 
 e o-n Acts 28, 28 ; dvayiva>o-Ka> Matt. 12, 5. 
 19, 4; eTriyivoxTKu Mark 2, 8. Luke 1,22 ; 
 ot8a Matt. 6, 32. Mark 2, 10. 2 Cor. 11. 
 31. Also after dyi/oe w Rom. 6, 3. 7, 1 
 tVi oTa/iai Acts 15, 7 ; KaTa\apj3dva> Acts 4 
 
OTI 
 
 525 
 
 ov 
 
 13. 10, 34; vofu Matt. 15, 17; o-vvirjpi 
 Matt. 16, 12. 
 
 d) After verbs signifying to remember, to 
 care for; elsewhere with a Particip. Matth. 
 J 549. 6, and n. 1. E. g. after pipy tjo- KU 
 Matt. 5, 23. John 2, 22 ; v7ro/it/i"?o-Ka> Jude 
 5 ; u.vrip.ovfva> John 16, 4 ; /*e A ei y^ot Mark 
 4.38. Luke 10, 40. 
 
 e) After verbs signifying lo hope, to be 
 lieve, to think, to consider, and the like; 
 elsewhere c. infin. Matth. 534. b, and n. 
 2. So in Engl. E. g. after ATTI a> Luke 
 24, 21. Acts 24, 26; Triorevo) Matt. 9, 
 28. Mark 11, 23. Luke 1, 45 ; TreVoiSa, TTC - 
 7ra-/iat, Phil. 2, 24. Rom. 8, 38. 15, 14. 
 (Xen. (Ec. 15. 6.) Also after 6W Matt. 
 6, 7. 26, 53 ; Xo-yt ^ai Heb. 11, 19 ; StaXo- 
 yiop.ai John 11, 50 ; vo^i^iv Matt. 5, 17 ; 
 ot^at James 1,7; vrro^a^dva Luke 7, 43. 
 
 4. Spec, on serves also to introduce 
 words quoted without change, chiefly after 
 verbs implying to say and the like, and is 
 then merely a mark of quotation, not to be 
 translated into English ; see Buttm. $ 139, 
 m. 61. Kiihner 329. n. 3. Matth. 624. p. 
 1270. E. g. Matt. 2, 23 TO pjjSeV . . . ort 
 Nafwpatos xX^o-frai. 5,31. 7,23. 26,74. 
 Mark 3, 21. 22. 9, 28 ot /ia3. eV^peoreoi av- 
 TOV KCLT I8iav OTI f)p.(ls OVK fj^vvrj^T] fj.ev eVj3a- 
 \f~iv OVTO ; where Mss. read Start and OTI 
 Start, comp. Matt. 17, 19 ; also Luke 1, 25. 
 61. John 1, 20. 32. Acts 11, 3. 15, 1. Heb. 
 10, 8. Rev. 3, 17. al. So Sept. and Heb. 
 "*> Gen. 29, 33. Josh. 2, 24 ; comp. Gesen. 
 Lehrg. p. 846. Heb. Lex. art. ^3? B. 1. Pol. 
 1. 80. 9. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1.8. 
 
 II. Conjunct. CAUSAL, for that, because. 
 
 1 . Pr. after a demonstr. pron. as rovro or 
 the like, for that, because, e. g. Sta roCro 
 ort, Matt. 13, 13. John 8, 47. 10, 17. 12, 39. 
 1 John 3, 1 ; iv TOVTO> OTI Luke 10, 20 ; 
 also ovrcor on Rev. 3, 16. Comp. rovrw v. 
 TO.VTT, OTI Xen. Hi. 1, 17. (Ec. 18. 10. 
 
 2. After a pron. interrog. as rt r, ri, e. g. 
 atari; OTI Rom. 9, 32. 2 Cor. 11, 11. So 
 X^piv TWOS, OTI 1 John 3, 12. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 3. 15, comp. 11. 
 
 3. Simply, on is put after certain classes 
 of verbs and also genr. to express the 
 cause, reason, motive, occasion of the action 
 of those verbs, or of any action or event 
 mentioned, that, i. q. seeing that, because, 
 for, etc. a) After verbs or words signify 
 ing an emotion of the mind, as wonder, joy, 
 pity, sorrow, e. g. Sau/xafto Luke 11, 38. 
 John 3, 7. Gal. 1, 6. al. (Xen. Yen. 1. 3.) 
 Also ^io-rafJMi Acts 10, 45; ^at pw q. v. 
 Luke 10, 20. John 14, 28. 2 Cor. 7, 9; o-vy- 
 \aipitt Luke 15, 6. 9; o~7rXay^i//^b/zai Matt. 
 
 9, 36. Mark 6, 34 , K\ata> Rev. 5, 4 : 
 Kal irtvZfa Rev. 18, 11. b) After verbs 
 or words expressing praise, thanks, and the 
 like, e. g. tnaivtu Luke 16, 8. 1 Cor. 11, 17. 
 (Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 41.) Also OVK enaivfu 
 1 Cor. 11, 2 ; fou.o\oyea> Matt. 11,25. 26; 
 (i/Xopio-TfO) Luke 18, 11 ; x^P ls " Tl R m - 6, 
 17. 1 Tim. 1, 12. So Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 3. 
 (Ec. 8. 16. c) Genr. Matt. 2, 18 OVK rfat\t 
 TrapaK\r}^irjvai,oTiovK (tot. Mark 1, 27. 5, 9 
 Xtyf <av ovop.d p.oi OTI TroXXot f a/tev. Luke 
 4, 36. 11, 42 ouat vp.lv, OTI KT\. V. 43 sq. 16, 
 
 3. 23, 40 ov8e (pof3rj o-v roj/SeoV, ort KT\. \. e. 
 seeing that. John 1, 30, 51. Acts 1, 17. 
 Rom. 6, 15. 1 Cor. 3, 13. 2 John 7. Rev. 3, 
 
 4. 8. al. saep. (Plato Euth. 10. a. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 9. 1.) Repeated by way of resumption, 
 1 John 3, 20 ort, e av KarayivwovcT; fjfjLcav 17 
 KapSi a, ort peifav fo~T\v 6 3. i. e./or, if our 
 own heart condemn us, for God is greater 
 than our heart ; comp. Eph. 2, 11. 12. Xen. 
 An. 7. 4. 5 ; see Liicke and De Wette in 
 loc. + 
 
 brov, see in oo-rts init. and B. 4. 
 ov adv. where, see in os B. 7. 
 
 ov, also OVK or ou^ before a vowel ac 
 cording as it is smooth or aspirated, Buttm. 
 5 26. 5 ; usually without accent, but written 
 ov when standing alone or at the end of a 
 sentence, Buttm. J 13. 3, 4 ; a negative par 
 ticle, not, no, non, expressing direct and full 
 negation, independently and absolutely, and 
 hence objective ; thus differing from p.rj 
 which implies a conditional and hypothetical 
 negative, and is therefore subjective. On 
 this distinction both in meaning and use be 
 tween ov and p.rj, which holds good also in 
 all their compounds, see more fully under ^ 
 init. and in the authors there cited. E. g. 
 
 1. Before a verb, where it then renders 
 the verb and proposition negative in respect 
 to the subject. a) Genr. Matt. 1, 25 cal 
 OVK. eyiv(i3O~K(v avTrjv. Mark 3, 25 ov 8vi>a- 
 TO.I o-TaSrjvai 17 otKi a (Kflvrj. v. 26. 14,68. 
 Luke 6, 43. 44. John 1, 10. 11. 7, 8. 8, 50. 
 Acts 2, 15 ou yap OVTOI p.(%vovo-iv. v. 34. 
 Rom. 3, 11. Rev. 2, 2. 3. saepiss. b) 
 With the 2 pers. future in prohibitions, 
 where the neg. fut. thus stands for a neij. 
 imperative, precisely as in Engl. thou shall 
 not do it, which is stronger than the direct 
 imperat. do it not ; Winer 5 44. 3. 5 60. l.n. 
 Matth. J 498. c. p. 942. Matt. 6. 5 OVK 077 
 oioTrep ot vironpirai . Elsewhere only in 
 citations from the Sept. and Heb. Luke 4, 
 12 comp. Deut. 6, 16. Acts 23, 5 comp. 
 Ex. 22, 28. 1 Cor. 9, 9 comp. Deut. 25, 4. 
 So from the decalogue. Tlatt. 5. 21 ov<$tr 
 
ov 
 
 526 
 
 ov 
 
 v. 27. 33. Rom. 7, 7. 13, 9. al. So 
 in Heb. all neg. imperatives are made by the 
 fut. Gesen. Lehrg. p. 771. Comp. Xen. 
 Hell. 2. 3. 34. Cyr. 8. 3. 47. c) Where 
 the subject is IT as or also efy, and ou is 
 joined, not with TTO.S (see below in no. 
 
 5. b), but with the verb ; here by He 
 braism irds...ov, or also ov,..<rra.s, is 
 equiv. to ot Set s, not one, none ; see Winer 
 26. 1 ; comp. Heb. bb X b Gesen. Lehrg. 
 p. 831. Heb. Lex. bb no. 3. So Matt. 24, 
 22 OVK av eVwSr; natra o-dp, lit. not saved 
 would be all flesh, i. e. no flesh would be 
 saved. Mark 13, 20. Rom. 3, 20. Gal. 2, 16. 
 Eph. 5,5 Tray iropvos. . .OVK e%fi. Luke 1, 
 37 ov d8vvaTT]<r(i rrapa ra> Sew TTO.V piju-a. 
 2 Pet. 1, 20. 1 John 2,21. Rev. 22, 3. For 
 1 Cor. 15, 51, see below in no. 5. c. So 
 Sept. and bb &6 Ps. 49, 18 ; b 3 -px Ecc. 
 1, 9. Also els. ..ov, not one, none, Matt. 
 10, 29 tv e avrcav ov irea-flrai. Luke 12) 
 
 6. Sept. and xb nnx Is. 34, 16. d) 
 Where ou with its verb is followed by 
 dXXa, i. e. ov.. .dXXd, pr. Matt. 9, 12 ov 
 Xpeiav e^ovaiv ol l&xyovrfs larpov, dXX ol 
 KaK&s (xovres. 15, 11. John 7, 16. 1 Cor. 
 
 7. 10. al. In other passages some suppose 
 ov is to be taken in a modified or compara 
 tive sense, i. q. not so much as, or the like ; 
 but this is unnecessary ; e. g. Matt. 10, 20 
 ou yap vfj.(1s eo~Tf of \a\ovvrfs, dXXa TO 
 Trvfvp-a KT\. i. q. Engl. it is not you at all 
 who speak, but the Spirit ; and this is far 
 stronger than : it is not so much you, as the 
 Spirit. John 12, 44. al. see more in no. 2. 
 Comp. Winer 59. 7. Also oux ort . . . dXX 
 on, John 6, 26. 12, 6. 1 John 4, 10. e) 
 Sometimes ov stands in a conditional sen- 
 lence after , where the usual negative is 
 pr], see fully in // I. 1. f) As strength 
 ened by other negative particles; e. g. pf) 
 ov only in interrog. see in ^17 III. 2; ov 
 H 77 as an intensive negative, see in pq I. 8. 
 Strengthened also by compounds of ov. e. g. 
 OVK ov8e, not even, Luke 18, 13 OVK iJfteXe 
 ovSe rov? o(3. enapai. Rom. 3, 10; OVK 
 o v 8 1 1 s, OVK ovoVv, no one whatever, nothing 
 al all, Mark 5, 37 KOI OVK d(prJK(v ov8fva KrX. 
 Luke 4, 2. John 6, 63. 8, 15. 2 Cor. 11, 8; 
 OVK ovStVo) ovoV/y Luke 23, 53 ; OVK ovKen 
 Acts 8, 39. See Buttm. $ 148. 6. Winer 
 $ 59. S. b. Very rarely two negatives de 
 stroy each other, and thus imply an affirm 
 ative ; 1 Cor. 12, 15 ov vapa TOVTO OVK 
 fo-riv fK TOV o-wpaTos ; For Acts 4, 20, see 
 in fj.rj I. 4. a. Comp. Buttm. 148. n. 7, 8. 
 Winer $ 59. 8. a. Matth. 609. p. 1227. 
 
 2. Before the object of a verb, where it 
 renders the proposition negative in re 
 
 spect to the object; e. g. gem Matt. 9, 13 
 eXeoi/ 3eXoj, KCU ov 3vo-i ai/. 1 Cor. 4, 15. 
 Heb. 2, 16. More freq. as followed by 
 dXXcz, i. e. ov...dXXd, see above in no. 1. 
 d. Mark 9, 37 OVK e>e Several, dXXa TOV 
 KT\. Acts 5, 4. 10, 41. 1 Cor. 1, 17. 14, 22. 
 Eph. 6, 12. 1 Thess. 4, 8. al. So ov x on 
 . . . dXX on, 2 Cor. 7, 9. Also ov^ iva as 
 marking object, purpose ; John 6, 38 Kara- 
 ftfftrjKa fK TOV ovpavov, ov^ Iva TTOIOJ KrX. 
 2 Cor. 2, 4. 8, 13. For ov^ ort at the 
 beginning of a clause, by way of correction 
 or limitation, see in on I. 3. a. 
 
 3. Before the adjunct of a verb, adver 
 bial or the like, where it then renders the 
 proposition negative in respect to the ad 
 junct ; e. g. before a noun implying man 
 ner, 2 Cor. 3, 3 ov pe\avi, dXXa irvfii^ari 
 KrX. 2 Pet. 1, 21. 2 Cor. 5, 7. John 3, 34 
 ov yap fK u.(Tpov 8i8a>o-iv 6 3. Gal. 2, 16. 
 James 2, 25. 1 Cor. 1, 17 OVK eV trofylq KT\, 
 Acts 5, 26. Before an adject, as adv. Rom. 
 8, 20 ov^ fKovo-a, comp. Buttm. 5 123. 6. 
 So before "a"n .adverb, 1 Cor. 5, 10 typa-^a 
 vfuv . . . ov TrdiTcosv i. e. not altogether ; 
 comp. Winer 5 65. p. 639. John 7, 10 ou 
 <pavfp<s, dXXd. 2 Cor. 8, 5. 12. Spec, ov 
 P.OVOV . . . dXXd v. dXXa KOJ, not only . . . 
 but also, expressing a gradation of meaning, 
 comp. in /xoVoy no. 3 ; so pr. as referring to 
 place, time, manner, Acts 19, 26 ov u.6voii 
 E(pto-ov, dXXa KT\. Rom. 9, 24. 2 Cor. 7, 7. 
 Eph. 1,21. 1 Thess. 1,8. 1 John 5, 6. Also 
 as referring to the subject, Acts 19, 27. 
 Rom. 1, 32. 1 Tim. 5, 13 ; or to the object, 
 Acts 21, 13. Rom. 4, 12. 2 Cor. 8, 10. al. 
 So to the subj. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 7 ; obj. Mem, 
 2. 7. 6. 
 
 4. Before Participles, where a direct and 
 absolute negative is to be expressed ; other 
 wise /LIJJ, see in /xi? I. 5. Winer } 59. n. 
 Matth. ^ 608. d. So 2 Cor. 4, 8 3Xi/3o>e vot, 
 dXX ov o-Tfvo^copov/jLfvoi. KrX. Gal. 4, 27. 
 Eph. 5, 4. Phil. 3, 3. Heb. 11, 35. 1 Pet. 1, 
 8. 2, 10. Luc. Philops. 5. ^El. V. H. 10. 
 11. Diod. Sic. 19. 97. 
 
 5. As affecting single words, ov not only 
 renders them negative, but often gives 
 them the directly contrary sense, .some 
 times as a sort of compound, like Eng. non, 
 un ; see Buttm. } 148. n. 2, 3. Matth. 
 5 608. 1. Herm. ad Vig. p. 831, 887. Wi 
 ner 5 59. 5. E.g. a) With Verbs, as 
 OI K dyarrdca to not love, i. q. to be careless 
 of, Rev. 12, 11 ; OVK dyvota to not be igno 
 rant, i. q. to know well, 2 Cor. 2, 1 1 ; OVK 
 f dw to not permit, i. q. to restrain, Acts 16, 
 ". (Horn. II. 5. 256.) Also OVK a^cXeu, 
 i q. to be careful, 2 Pet. 1, 12; ov 3e X. 
 
ova 
 
 ov8e 
 
 nolo, to be unwilling, Matt. 23, 37. 1 Cor. 
 10, 1 ; OVK dpi aios V. ixavos, to be un 
 worthy, Matt. 3, 11. Acts 13, 25. b) 
 With Nouns, as OVK 3i/oy, ov Xao r, q. d. a 
 non-people ; 1 Pet. 2, 10 01 TTOT ov Xady, 
 vvv 8e Xaor SeoC. Rom. 9, 26. 10, 19. So 
 Heb. Xb , Sept. ov, Hos. 2, 25. Deut. 32, 
 21 ; comp. Gesen. Lehrg. p. 832. Heb. 
 Lex. &> no. 6. b. Buttm. } 148. n. 3. Wi 
 ner $58. 1. n. So Thuc. 1. 137 ^ ov 8id- 
 Xvo-iy. c) With Adjectives, e. g. with iras, 
 where in the form o v IT a s , ov iravres, it 
 merely takes away the positive force, i. q. 
 not every one, not all; Matt. 7, V 21 ov iras 6 
 Xeyuv. 19, 11. Rom. 9, 6. 10, 16. 1 Cor. 
 15, 39. al. (But was . . . ov, i. q. no one, 
 see above in no. 1. c.) Once through the 
 force of the antith. irdires . . . ov is i. q. ov 
 iraiTfs, 1 Cor. 15, 51 ; see Winer \ 26. 1. 
 With other adjectives, it expresses the con 
 trary, e. g. OVK ao-T)fi.of, not mean, i. q. 
 renowned, Acts 21, 39; OVK oXi yoi, no few, 
 i. e. many, Acts 17, 4. 12 ; ov TroXXcu 17/^6- 
 pat, not many, i. e. a few, Luke 15, 13. 
 John 2, 12. Acts 25, 6. d) With Ad 
 verbs, ov fifrpiios Acts 20, 12 ; OVK ev3e o>y 
 Luke 21, 9. 
 
 6. In negative answers, no, nay, not, not 
 at all ; Matt. 13, 29 6 Se tyrj ov. John 1, 
 21. 2 Cor. 1, 17. James 5, 12 ; ov ov intens. 
 Matt. 5, 37. With the art. TO ov, i. e. the 
 word ov, 2 Cor. 1, 17. James 5, 12; comp. 
 in val no. 3. Strengthened by other parti 
 cles, as ov yap Acts 16, 37, see in yap no. 
 3. b. Also ov Travrwf, not at all, Rom. 
 3, 9, see Winer } 65. 4. p. 638 ; comp. ov 
 Train-as Theogn. 299 or 305. Epiph. Haer. 
 38. 6; ov Trdw Xen. An. 6. 1. 26. 
 
 7. In negative questions, nonne ? is not ? 
 are not? where an affirmative answer is 
 always presupposed, so that the neg. ques 
 tion stands instead of a direct affirmation ; 
 see Buttm. 148. 5. Winer $ 61. 3. E. g. 
 simply, Matt. 6, 26 ov^ v/xf iy p.a\\ot> Siacpe- 
 ptTf avrtav, 12, 3. 5. Mark 4, 13. 21. John 
 6, 42. 1 Cor. 6, 2. 3. Also OVK dnoKpiinj 
 ov8(v; Mark 14, 60. 15, 4. So Xen. Cyr. 
 5. 5. 13. With other particles, as OVK a pa 
 Acts 21, 38, see in Spa no. 2 ; ov p.r), see 
 in p.T] I. 8. a ; /i fj o v , see in /zij III. 2 ; d X X 
 ov, as Heb. 3, 16 who now did provoke 
 God ? dXX ov KrX. but were they not all 
 those who came out of Egypt 1 comp. in dXXd 
 no. 2. b. y. -f- 
 
 ova, interj. ah! aha! Lat. vah ! pr. of 
 idmiration, but uttered in derision, Mark 15, 
 29. Arr. Epict. 3. 23. 24, 32. Dion Cass. 
 63. 20. 
 
 ovat, interj. wo! alas! I^t. vcc, Heb. 
 iis, in, uttered in grief, indignation, or 
 the like. 
 
 1. Pr. and in the later usage c. dat. 
 Matt. 11, 21 ovai o~oi, Xopatfv. 23, 13 sq. 
 Mark 13, 17. Luke 6, 24 sq. Jude 11. Rev. 
 12, 12; dat. impl. Luke 17, 1. Thrice 
 repeated intens. ovai, ova/, ovat Rev. 8, 1 3 
 comp. Gesen. Lehrg. p. 670. Before a yoc 
 V TrdXiy, with o-ot impl. Rev. 18, 10. 16. 19. 
 Sept. genr. for iix Num. 21, 29 ; i-jn Is 
 10, 1. 5; i Ecc. 10, 16. Arr. Epict. 3. 
 
 22. 24. 
 
 2. As Subst. indec. 1 Cor. 9, 16 ovai poi 
 eWi, Engl. wo is me! So Sept. oval avrois 
 e ort for onb il x Hos. 9, 12, comp. Prov. 
 
 23, 29. Hence with the art. fern, f) ovai, 
 a wo, calamity, Rev. 9, 12. 11, 14. Here 
 one might expect the neut. TO ovai, like TO 
 *Ayap Gal. 4, 25 ; but the writer assigns 
 the gender ad sensum, as if i. q. fj SXi^iy 
 rj TaXai7ra)/Ji a ; comp. Winer $ 27 fin. -f- 
 
 OvSafAOJS, adv. (ovSa/idr, ovSe d/idy,) in 
 no wise, by no means, Matt. 2, 6. 3 Mace. 
 1, 11. 12. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 15. 
 
 ovoe, conjunct, (ov, 8e,) denying abso 
 lutely and objectively, and differing from 
 p.i]8e as ov from ^177 ; pr. continuative, ana 
 not, also not ; hence nor, neither, not even, 
 usually as connecting whole clauses or pro 
 positions, and thus differing from ovre q. v. 
 Buttm. $ 149. m. 15. Kiihner $ 321. 2. Winer 
 \ 59. 6. Matth. { 609. 
 
 1. In a continued negation, at the begin 
 ning of a subsequent clause, viz. a) and 
 not, nor, neither, genr. preceded by ov, Matt. 
 
 5, 15. 6, 20 07TOV K\(TTTai OV 0~lOpl>(T(TOV<riV, 
 
 ov8f K\t7TTOv<nv. v. 26 OTI ov o-TTfipovo-iv, 
 ov8f Sfptfovo-ii/, ovSe o-vfuyovo-ij KTX. v. 28. 
 Mark 4, 22. Luke 12, 33. John 1,13. 6, 24. 
 Acts 8, 21. Gal. 1, 1. Rev. 21, 23. al. (Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 5.) Also ov . . . ov8e . . . ovrt 
 1 Thess. 2, 3 ; OVTTQJ . . . ovoV interrog. Mark 
 
 8, 17. Matt. 16, 9 sq. Preced. by ovoVi r, 
 Matt. 9, 17. Rev. 5, 3 ; so in apposit. with 
 ovSc/y, e. g. ovSe . . . ovSe, neither.. . nor Mark 
 13, 32 ; ti/a pj . . . ov8e Rev. 9, 4. Once ov8e 
 p.t], preced. by ov, ovSe, Rev. 7, 16. b) also 
 not, neither, in a stronger transition or anti 
 thesis, e. g. preced. by ov, Matt. 21, 27 ov* 
 oidupfv . . . ov8e tya> \tyu> vfj.iv KT\. Mark 
 12, 21 cornp. v. 20. Luke 16, 31 M. OVK 
 a.K.ovov<Tiv. ov8 . . . Ttfio-^Q-ovTai. John 1 5, 4. 
 Rom. 4. 15. 1 Cor. 15, 13. 16. (Hdian. 1. 
 
 9. 8. Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 11.) Also ovSds... 
 ovSe JohnS, 11. 1 Tim. 6, 16; ovSe/y... 
 ov8e . . ovKtTi Matt. 22, 46 ; lav /xr} . . . ov&V 
 Matt. 6, 15. So with preced. neg. impl lu 
 
528 
 
 OVK 
 
 umcn ceo, Mark 16,13 ovfie ineuKHS (iri<rTfv- 
 aav. With yap and dXXd, after a pre- 
 ced. neg. expressed or implied in the con 
 text; e. g. ov8e yap, for not also, for 
 neither, where ov denies, 8e connects, and 
 yap assigns a reason ; John 7, 5 ovSe yap 
 oi uSeXcpoi avrov firiaTfvov KT\. Acts 4, 34. 
 Rom. 8, 7 ; strengthened by ov8eis, John 5, 
 22 ovde yap 6 Trarijp Kpivti ovbtva. Gal. 1, 
 12 ovde yap...ovre. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 12.) 
 So dXX ov8f, yea neither, where dXXd 
 merely strengthens the negation, comp. in 
 dXXd no. 3. e. Matth. $ 613. Luke 23, 15 
 ov8ev evpoi/ . . . dXX ov8e HpcoS^r. 1 Cor. 3, 
 
 2. Gal. 2, 3. So Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 8. An. 1. 
 
 3. 3 ; fully ov p.6vov . . . dXX ovSe Jos. B. J. 
 
 4. 2. 3. 
 
 2. Spec, not even, not so much as, e. g. 
 a) In the middle of a clause, comp. Buttm. 
 Matth. 1. c. Matt. 6, 29 Xe yo> 8e vfuv, OTI 
 ot Se SoXo/iwi/ ev rrdcrrj rfj 86y avrov KT\. 
 Mark 6, 31. Luke 7/9. John 21, 25. 1 Cor. 
 
 5. 1 (Hdian. 1. 12. 13. Plut. Timol. 5 pen. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 11, 12.) As strengthen 
 ing ov, i. e. OVK ovoe Luke 18, 13, comp. in 
 ov no. 1. f. For ovfie f is, see in els no. 
 l.a. Also dXX ov8e, yea not even, comp. 
 above in no. 1. b. Acts 19, 2 dXX ov8e el 
 irveiip-a ayiov e ort, rjKovarap.fv. 1 Cor. 4, 3. 
 So Hdian. 2. 13. 13. b} In interrog. Mark 
 
 12, 10 ov8e TTJV ypa(pr)V ravTrjv dWyi/oore ; 
 Luke 6, 3. 23, 40 ; comp. in ov no. 7. + 
 
 ouSe/?, ouSeyLua, ovSev, (ovSe, etj,) 
 declined like ds q. v. Neut. ov%fv a later 
 form, twice 1 Cor. 13, 2. 3 Lachm. also once 
 masc. genit. ovSevdy 2 Cor. 11, 8 Lachm. 
 Sept. Gen. 41, 44. Is. 41, 28 ; see Buttm. 
 5 70. 1. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 181 sq. Neg. 
 adject, denying absolutely and objectively, 
 and differing from p.rjotls as ov from p.r], 
 genr. no one, nothing, i. e. none at all ; pr. 
 emphat. not even one, not the least, but in 
 this sense it is commonly written separate 
 ly, ovSe fls, ovSe ev, see in els no. 1. a. 
 Buttm. 1. c. 
 
 1. Adj. with a subst. no one, no, Luke 
 4, 24 ov8t\s ivpofpTjnjs. John 16, 29 Trapoi- 
 Hiav ov8ffj,iav. 18,38. 1 Cor. 8,4. al. Neut 
 Luke 23, 4 ov8ev a riov. John 10, 41. Acts 
 17, 21. al. So Hdian. 4. 2. 11. Luc. Asin. 
 
 13. Xen. Cyr. 1. 1. 2. Partitively, with 
 gen. of a whole, Buttm. 132. 5. a. Matth. 
 318 ; e. g. Luke 4, 26 npbs ov8ep.iav av- 
 Tav. V. 27 ov8fls avT&v. Acts 5, 13. 18, 17 
 ovftfv TOVTUV. 1 Cor. 1, 14. 9, 15. So ov- 
 8 f \s e avruv John 7, 19. 17, 12. 18, 9. 
 
 2. Absol. as subst. ovSei y, no one, no 
 man, no person. Matt. 6, 24 ovSelr 8vvarai 
 Svcrl KVOIOIS 8ov\(vtiv. Mark 5, 4. Luke 5, 
 
 36. 37. 39. John 5, 22 6 irarrjp *piW oi- 
 8tva. Acts 9, 8. Eph. 5,29. Rev. 2, 17. al. 
 So Hdian. 7. 6. 8. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 45. 
 With other negatives, for strength, Buttm. 
 5 148. 6; e. g. after ov, Matt. 22, 16 ov 
 p.e\i (rot irtpl ov8ev6s. John 8, 15. Acts 
 4, 12. 2 Cor. 11,8. (Comp. Xen. An. 1. 6. 
 11.) Also ovSeVco ov8fis Luke 23, 53; 
 ovSeir ovKen Mark 12, 34. 
 
 3. Neut. ov8ev absol. nothing, genr. 
 Matt. 10, 26 ovSeV yap eVri Kt^\vp.p.evov. 
 27, 24. Luke 22, 35. John 8, 28. Acts 15, 
 9. Gal. 2, 6. Heb. 2, 8. al. sjep. With 
 other negatives for strength, Buttm. J 148. 
 6 ; e. g. after ov, Mark 14, 60 OVK dnoKpii^j 
 ov8ft> ; Luke 4, 2. John 3, 27. Acts 26, 26. 
 (Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 36.) Also ot>KeVi . . . ov- 
 8ev Mark 7, 12 ; ovSeVo) ovSe v 1 Cor. 8, 2; 
 ov8ev...ou pf) Luke 10, 19. Spec, accus. 
 ov8ev adv. i. e. in no ivay, in no respect, 
 Acts 25, 1 lovSai ovs ouSeV rj8iKT)<ra. 1 Cor. 
 13, 3. 2 Cor. 12, 11. Gal. 4, 12; with ov, 
 John 6, 63 OVK u><pf\f1 ovSeV. So Hdian. 
 
 1. 3. 10. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 9. Trop. no 
 thing, i. e. of no account, weight, value, 
 authority; comp. Matth. J 437. n. 1. So 
 Matt. 23, 1 6 os av ofiocrr) ev TW i/aw, ovo tv 
 to-Tiv. v. 18. John 8, 54. 1 Cor. 7, 19. 13, 
 
 2. 2 Cor. 12, 11. al. Also els ov8tv yive- 
 o-3ai. to come to nought, Acts 5, 36 ; els ov- 
 8tv Xoyto-SfJwu, to be set at nought, to be 
 contemned, Acts 19, 27 ; comp. in fls no. 
 
 3. a. So Sept. Is. 14, 23. Plato Rep. 556. 
 
 d, avftpfs oi TjfifTfpoi 7r\ovcnoi flcrlv ovfie t. 
 Xen. Hell. 4. 8. 4 ovStV ta-^fv. -f 
 
 ov8e7TOT6, adv. (ovSe, Trore,) not ever, 
 never, comp. in ov init. So before the pres. 
 in general propositions; 1 Cor. 13, 8 17 
 uyoTn; ov8f7TOTf eWiVret. Heb. 10, 1. 11. 
 (Horn. Od. 10. 464.) Before a praet. comp. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 457 sq. -Buttm. J 149. 
 m. 21. Matt. 7, 23 on ovSeVore fyvonv vpas. 
 9, 33. Mark 2, 12. Luke 15, 29 bis. John 
 7,46. Acts 10, 14. 11,8. 14,8. (Xen. Mem. 
 1. 4. 16.) Before a fut. comp. Lob. 1. c. 
 Matt. 26, 33. In interrog. Matt. 21, 16 
 ovoenore avfyvcore ; v. 42. Mark 2, 25. 
 Comp. in ov no. 7. 
 
 ovSeTTO), adv. (ov8f, enclit. TTW,) pr. also 
 not ever, i. q. not ever yet, not yet, before a 
 praet. John 7, 39 ovS/Trw eSo^dcrS^. 20, 9. 
 So Hdian. 1. 3. 12. Xen. Mem. 3. 6. 1. 
 Strengthened with ovoeis Buttm. 5 148. 6 ; 
 
 e. g. oi StVw ov8fis Luke 23, 53. John 19, 
 41 ; ov8V&> ov8(v 1 Cor. 8, 2. Comp. m 
 dfis no. 2, 3. 
 
 oi&ei9, ovSeV, see in 
 OVK, see ov. 
 
ovtcert, 
 
 529 
 
 ovv 
 
 i, also OVK ert, adv. no more, no 
 further, no longer, in the general sense of 
 ov ; see ov init. So genr. Matt. 19,6 <S<rre 
 ovKtTi flo-l 8110. Mark 10, 8. Luke 15, 19. 
 John 4, 42.Rom. 7, 17. 20. 2 Cor. 1, 23. 
 Rev. 10, 6. So Hdian. 2. 8. 10. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 4. 5. With other negatives for strength, 
 Buttm. } 148. 6; e. g. OVK . . . OVKCTI Acts 8, 
 39; ov8f...ovK(Tt Matt. 22, 46; ov8fis... 
 ovK.tr i Rev. 18,11; ovtceri . . . ovoei s Mark 
 7, 12. 15, 5. Luke 20, 40. So ovAteVt ou 
 /*ij intens. Mark 14, 25. Luke 22, 16. Rev. 
 18, 14. + 
 
 OVKOVV, adv. (OVK ovv,} pr. interrog. 
 nonne ergo ? Germ, nicht wahr 1 not so 
 then ? implying an affirmative answer, comp. 
 in ov no. 7 ; hence used by the Attics 
 as an affirmative illative particle, therefore, 
 then; see Buttm. $ 149. m. 18. Kiihner 
 5 324. n. 7. Herm. ad Vig. p. 793 sq. Pas- 
 \ sow in OVKOVV. In N. T. once, John 18, 37 
 OVKOVV |3ao-iXevr ei o-v, interrog. net so then? 
 thou art a king. So best ; others without 
 interrog. thou art then a king. Comp. Wi 
 ner } 61 fin. Interrog. Xen. Mem. 2.2. 1 ; 
 genr. JEl V. H. 11. 9. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 19. 
 
 ov /y,r), see in /z?/ I. 8. 
 
 oSv, conj. thereupon, then, therefore, de 
 noting (he sequence of one clause upon an 
 other ; or also the consequence of one clause 
 or member upon another. It is put after 
 one or more words in a clause. See Passow 
 s. voc. Matth. $ 625. Kiihner 324. 3. b. 
 Winer j 57. p. 522, 534. 
 
 1. Denoting the mere SEQUENCE of one 
 clause upon another, and thus marking tran 
 sition or continuation, thereupon, then, now ; 
 comp. Passow 1. c. Matth. 625. p. 1274. 
 
 a) Genr. Luke 6, 9 eirrev ovv 6 I. -rrpos 
 avTovs, then said Jesus unto them. John 12, 
 
 1. 9. 18, 11. 16. 19, 29 o-Kfvos ovv ro 
 oovs p-eoTov now there icas set a vessel. 21, 
 5. Rom. 11, 1. 11. 15, 17. al. (Hdian. 3. 
 5. 11.) So where, after introductory mat 
 ter, a transition is made to the thing itself, 
 Matt. 13, 18. Luke 20,29 tnra ovv aSeX^ot 
 rfo-av, comp. v. 28. John 4, 5. 19, 40. Acts 
 
 2, 33. 1 Cor. 7, 26. So Paheph. 32. 11. 
 Also /*e v ovv, comp. in p.tv no. 1, 2 ; e. g. 
 with 8e following, Mark 16, 19 6 fj.fv ovv 
 Kvpios . . . eKflvoi 8f, so then the Lord. Acts 
 l,6sq. 8, 4sq. 19, 38 sq. 23, 18. 31. al. 
 (Diod. Sic. 16. 31 pen.) Without -8* , Acts 
 23, 22. 26, 4. 9. 1 Cor. 6, 4. Heb. 7, 11. 
 So Xen. An. 1. 7. 17. 
 
 b) Joined with a particle of time, or words 
 Implying time, Matth. p. 1274. E. g. orav 
 fo Matt. 21, 40, but otherwise Matt. 6, 2. 
 
 34 
 
 Luke 11, 34 ore ovv John 2, 22. 19. 6. 
 8. 23. 30; u>s ovv John 4, 1. 40. 20, 11. 
 (Plato Protag. 19. p. 316. a.) Also eav- 
 rrjs ovv Acts 10, 33 ; vvv ovv ibid. iraXiv 
 ovv, ovv TraXiv, John 8, 12. 21. 10, 7. 19. 
 31. 39; Tore ovv John 11, 14. 20, 8. 
 (Hdian. 1. 15. 11 ovv Trore.) So with a 
 participle which may be resolved by a par 
 ticle of time, as Srav, ore, as, with a finite 
 verb ; John 6, 14 ot ovv ai/3po>7roi tSovrts 
 KT\. then those men, when they had seen, etc. 
 v. 15. 11,17. 19, 13. Acts 15, 2. Rom, 
 15, 28. al. Comp. Matth. $ 565. 1. Buttm. 
 5 144. 2. 
 
 2. Denoting the CONSEQUENCE of one 
 clause upon another, as an effect from a 
 cause, therefore, tlien, consequently, viz. 
 
 a) Where any thing is said to be done 
 in consequence of what is previously nar 
 rated, a) Genr. Luke 15, 28 copyi o-3^ /, 
 Koi OVK T/SeXev eicreXSeif " 6 ovv Trarfjp avrov 
 e eX3a)y KT\. John 9, 7. 19, 24. Acts 17, 
 20. Rom. 9, 19. Eph. 4, 1. 1 Tim. 5, 14. 
 1 Pet. 2, 7. al. So frequently, espec. in 
 John, in the phrases elrrtv ovv, fl-rrov ovv, 
 John 4, 33. 8, 13. 11, 12. 21, 7/al. But 
 such passages may often be referred to 
 no. 1. a. So Diod. Sic. 16. 91 efavs ovv 
 Svcrtar KT\. /3) In exhortations founded 
 on what precedes ; Matt. 5, 48 eo-fcrSe ovv 
 vjjLfls T(\fioi. Mark 13, 35 yprjyopelre ovv. 
 Luke 6, 36. Acts 3, 19. 13, 38. Rom. 11, 
 22. 1 Cor. 16, 11. Col. 3, 5. Heb. 4, 1. 
 James 5, 7. al. So Eurip. Orest. 647 or 
 648. Luc. Conv. 36. y) Where the 
 consequence is connected with a condi 
 tional or causal clause, e. g. tav ovv, if 
 therefore, Matt. 5, 23. Luke 4, 7. Rom. 2, 
 26. John 6, 62; el ovv Matt 6, 23. 
 Luke 16, 11. John 18, 8; eire ovv 1 Cor. 
 10, 31. So eVf I ovv Heb. 2, 14. 4, 6. 
 (Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 5.) Likewise with par 
 ticiples equiv. to eVei with a finite verb, 
 Matth. 5565. 2. Buttm. 5 144. 2. Acts 17, 
 29 ytvos ovv inrdpxovTfs TOV 3eoi5, OVK o(pfi- 
 \op.fv KT\. Rom. 5, 1. 2 Cor. 7, 1. Heb. 4, 
 14. 1 Pet. 4, 1. 
 
 b) Illative, expressing an inference or 
 conclusion from what precedes. a) Genr. 
 Matt. 3, 10 fj at-ivTj . . . Kelrai irav ovv 8tv- 
 opov KT\. Mark 10, 9. Luke 20, 44. John 3, 
 29. 8, 38. Rom. 6, 4. Heb. 9, 23. James 4, 
 17. 3 John 8. al. Also in apa ovv, for 
 which see in apa no 1. c. /3. So Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 10. /3) After an enumeration 
 of particulars, expressing the general re 
 sult or conclusion ; romp. Passow in ovv. 
 Matth. ^ 625. p. 1272. So Matt. 1, 17 TrS- 
 o~ai ovv at ycvtai OTTO A/3paa/i KT\. John 7. 
 
530 
 
 ovpavos 
 
 43. 12, 17, comp. v. 9 sq. Also Luke 3, 18. 
 John 20, 30. So Xen. Mem. 1.1.16. y) 
 Where the conclusion is connected with a 
 conditional or causal clause, e.g. fl o v v in 
 the sense of V ovv, see in et I. 2. g. /3. 
 Matt. 7, 1 1 el ovv vp.fls o tSore KrX. John 13, 
 14. Acts 11, 17. 
 
 c) Where a sentence has been interrupt 
 ed by a parenthesis or intervening clauses, 
 and is again taken up ; equiv. to / say, Lat. 
 inquam, or the like ; Passovv s. v. Matth. 
 p. 1273 sq. Winer { 57. p. 523. So Matt. 7, 
 24 ?ray ovv oarty *crX. comp. v. 21. 10, 32 
 comp. v. 22. Mark 3, 31 comp. v. 21. 
 John 6, 24 comp. v. 22. 18, 12 comp. v. 3. 
 1 Cor. 8, 4 comp. v. 1. Gal. 3, 5 comp. v. 
 
 2. Heb. 4, 11 comp. v. 6. Xen. Mem. 1. 
 
 1. 20 comp. 1. Cyr. 5. 1. 3 comp. 2. 
 
 d) In interrogative sentences, referring 
 back to a previous assertion, supposition, or 
 other circumstances ; genr. Matt. 1 3, 28 
 Se Xety ovv oVeXSoi Tey criAXeo/xej aura ; 
 After interrog. particles : ri ovv, Matt. 1 7, 
 1 TI ovv ot ypajjLjjLaTfls \*yawnv KT\. where 
 ovv according to some may refer to the cir 
 cumstances of the transfiguration, comp. v. 
 
 3. 4 ; better as referring to v. 9. Matt. 19, 
 
 7. Mark 12, 9. Luke 3, 10. John 1, 21. 
 Rom. 3,1. 4, 1. 1 Cor. 14, 15. 26; TrdSei/ 
 ovv Matt. 13,27.56: TTWS ovv Matt. 12, 
 26. 26, 54. John 6, 42. 9, 19. Rom. 10, 14. 
 So Trcas ovv Luc. D. Deor. 2. 2. Xen. 
 Conv. 2. 10. + 
 
 OVTTCO, adv. (ov, enclit. TTCO.) not even yet, 
 not yet, comp. ov init So before a pres. 
 Matt. 24, 6 dXX OVTTCO ecrrt TO re Xoy. John 
 
 2, 4. 8, 57. Heb. 2, 8. Before a praet. 
 John 3, 24. 7, 39. 11, 30. Heb. 12, 4 ; otVo) 
 ovSa y Acts 8, 16. So c. pres. Hdian. 1. 
 
 8. 4. Xen. An. 1. 5. 12; c. prat. Xen. An. 
 1. 8. 8. In interrog. Matt. 15, 17 o&rco 
 voielTf ; on, KT\. 16, 9. Mark 8, 17. Comp. 
 in ov no. 7. + 
 
 ovpd, as, fj, the tail of an animal, Rev. 
 9, 10 bis. 19 bis. 12, 4. Sept. for SSJ Deut. 
 28, 13. Job 40, 12. Luc. D. Deor. 22. 1. 
 Xen. Eq. 5. 7. 
 
 ovpdvios, a, ov, Att. and in N. T. ovpd- 
 vins, 6, TI, (ovpavos, ) heavenly, of or from 
 heaven, dwelling in heaven ; as 6 Trar^p 6 
 nvpdvios, heavenly Father, Matt. 6, 14. 26. 
 32. 15,13; [5,48. 18,35. 2i3,9;] vrparia 
 ovpdvios heavenly host, angels, Luke 2, 13, 
 comp. in ovpavos no. 4. Also as from hea 
 ven, oiTTCKTia ovp. Acts 26, 19. 2 Mace. 7, 
 34. Hdian. 1. 7. 9. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 3. 
 
 ovpavo^fev, adv. (ovpavos, ) from hea 
 ven, Acts 14. 17. 26, 13 Horn. II. 1. 195, 
 
 208. Jos. de Mace. 4. ^Eschin. 73. 5. A 
 poetic form, used in prose only by late 
 writers, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 93, 94. 
 
 ovpavos, ov, 6, Plur. o v p a v o i , 5>v, ol, in 
 imitation of Heb. B t^> heaven, the heavens. 
 Plur. 01 ovpavoi is thus used most frequent 
 ly in Matthew, and always in the phrases 
 6 TtaTrjp 6 fv rots ovpavols, f] /SacriXei a ra>v 
 ovpavcav , less often in Mark and the Epis 
 tles of Paul and Peter ; in Luke s writings 
 only six times, Luke 10, 20. 11,2. 12,33. 
 21, 26. Acts 2, 34. 7, 56 ; and not at all in 
 the writings of John including the Apoca 
 lypse, nor in James. Pr. the expanse of 
 the sky, the apparent concave hemisphere 
 above us, which was regarded by the He 
 brews as solid, Heb. 5Jip"i, Sept. urepeco/ia, 
 Vulg. firmamentum, the firmament, Gen. 1 , 
 8. 14 ; and poetically as resting on columns, 
 2 Sam. 22, 8. Job 26, 11 ; but in common 
 usage including also the regions above the 
 sky, where God is said to dwell, Ps. 2, 4 ; 
 and likewise the region underneath and next 
 the firmament, the atmosphere, where the 
 clouds are gathered and the birds fly, Gen. 
 1, 20. 26. In N. T. 
 
 1. Pr. and genr. heaven, as including the 
 visible heavens and their phenomena; so 
 where heaven and earth are spoken of to 
 gether, e. g. opp. 1 Cor. 8, 5 eiVe ev ovpava, 
 f lre eVi T^S yys. Heb. 12, 26. 2 Pet. 3, 5. 
 Also 6 ovpavos Kal f] yrj, the heaven 
 and the earth, the universe, Matt. 5, 18. 
 Mark 13, 31. Luke 10, 21. Acts 4, 24. Rev. 
 10, 6. 14,7 TOV ovp. Kal rfjv yijv /cat TTJV Sa- 
 Xacraav. Col. 1, 16 TO ev rots ovp. /cat TO 
 r! TVS y. Sept. and yjsni t^irn Gen. 
 
 1, 1. 2, 1. So TO aKpov ovpavov, 
 TCI aKpa ovpav&v, the extremities of the 
 heavens, where they seetn to touch the 
 earth, Matt. 24, 31. Mark 13, 27; v-o 
 TOV ovpavov under heaven, i. e. on 
 earth, Acts 4, 12 ; ot into TOV ovp. Acts 
 
 2, 5. Col. 1, 23. (Plato Tim. p. 23. d.) 
 So i] vis- ovpavov sc. X"P a ^ ^ ^ e eur ^h or 
 region of the earth, Luke 17, 24 rrjs vir 
 ovp. els TTJV VTT ovp. i. e. from one part 
 of the earth to another. Further, ot vvv 
 ovpavoi 2 Pet. 3, 7, and 6 irpaiTos ovpavos 
 Rev. 21, 1, the present heavens, which are 
 to be destroyed at the final consummation of 
 all things, after which new heavens are to 
 appear, Kaivol ovpavoi 2 Pet. 3, 13. Rev. 21, 
 1. Sometimes more than one heaven is 
 spoken of, Eph. 4, 10. Heb. 4, 14. 7, 26 ; 
 see more fully below in no. 4. So genr. 
 Horn. II. 18. 483. Hes. Theog. 517. Xen. 
 CEc 19. 9. Trop. i/^coS^i/ni ea>s TOV ov- 
 
ovpavos 
 
 531 
 
 ovpavos 
 
 pavov, Lat. ad ccehim efferri, to be exalted to 
 heaven, to be highly distinguished, re 
 nowned, Matt. 11, 23. Luke 10, 15. Praegn. 
 KoXXacrScu i*xp l T v ovpavov Rev. 18, 5 in 
 later edit. Comp. dpSfjvai npos TOV ovp. 
 Plut. de Hdot. Malig. 31 fin. 
 
 2. Spec, heaven, of the firmament itself, 
 the starry heaven, in which the sun, moon, 
 and stars are fixed; Mark 13, 25 ot dcrrepfs 
 TOV ovpavov. Heb. 11, 12. Sept. and 01 73115 
 Gen. 1, 14. 15. 17. So Horn. II. 6. ids* 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 8. Hence, 77 o-rpartu TOV 
 ovpavov Acts 7, 42, and at Sui/u/zety Tiav 
 ovpavtav v. tv rols ovpavols Matt. 24, 29. 
 Mark 13, 25. Luke 21, 26, the host or hosts 
 of heaven, i. e. the sun, moon, and stars ; 
 so Sept. and e^T-lSri XS5 Is. 34, 4. Jer. 33, 
 22. Zeph. 1, 5; comp. Heb. Lex. art. X2S 
 no. 2. a. /3. Further, the stars are said 
 rriirrtiv dno TOV ovpavov, to fall from heaven, 
 as emblematical of great commotions and 
 revolutions, Matt. 24, 29. Rev. 6, 13. 8, 10. 
 9, 1 ; comp. Is. 34, 4 et ibi Gesen. Comm. 
 The firmament itself, which is spread out 
 over the earth as a tent or curtain (Is. 40, 
 22. Ps. 104, 2), is likewise said to be rolled 
 together as a scroll, Rev. 6, 14 ; comp. 
 Heb. 1, 10 sq. Is. 1. c. Trop. Luke 10, 
 18 fytmpovw TOV "SaTavdv u>s do-rpaTrrjv tK 
 rot) ovpavov ntaovra, where the form of ex 
 pression is in allusion to Is. 14, 12, the 
 lightning being emblematic of swiftness ; 
 for the sense, q. d. the power of Satan is 
 broken, comp. John 12, 31. Rev. 12, 7-9. 
 20, 2. 3. Others here refer ovpavos to the 
 atmosphere or air, of which Satan is said to 
 be prince ; see in drjp and 8ai/j.6viov no. 2. 
 
 3. Spec, also of the lower heaven, or re 
 gion below the firmament, i. q. the air, 
 atmosphere, where clouds and tempests are 
 gathered and lightning breaks forth, and 
 where the birds fly. E. g. of clouds, Matt. 
 16, 2 Trvppd^d. yap 6 ovp. v. 3. Luke 12, 
 56. Matt. 24, 30 eVt TU>V vf(pf\>v TOV ovp. 
 26, 64. Mark 14, 62 ; of rain and hail, Rev. 
 16, 21 ; of lightning or fire from heaven, 
 Luke 9, 54. 17, 29. Rev. 20, 9; of signs, 
 prodigies, Matt. 16, 1. Mark 8. 11. Luke 
 11, 16. 21, 11. Acts 2, 19. Rev. 12, 1. 3. 
 Also of birds, Matt. 6, 26 t Is TO. irtTtiva TOV 
 ovpavov. 8, 20. Luke 8, 5. 9, 58 ; comp. 
 Gen. 1, 20. 26. 28. 30. So Thuc. 2. 77 
 voap TroXu ovpavov. Xen. An. 4. 2. 2. Cyr. 
 4. 2. 15. Trop. KXelcrat TOV ovpavov, to 
 shut up the heavens, i. e. to withhold rain, 
 Luke 4, 25. Rev. 11, 6, i. q. e*r i ; n "iss 
 Sept. avvtxtiv TOV ovp. Deut. 11, 17. 2 Chr. 
 6, 26; comp. Gen. 7 11. Is. 24, 19 et ibi 
 Gesen. Comm. 
 
 4. Oftener, heaven, the heavens, of tne 
 upper or superior heaven, beyond the visible 
 firmament, the abode of God and his glory 
 of the glorified Messiah, the angels, the 
 spirits of the just after death, and generally 
 of every thing which is said to be with God. 
 a) Genr. e. g. of God, Matt. 5, 34 u.r]Tt tv 
 TU> ovpava, OTI Zpovos tijTi TOV 3eoO. 23, 
 22. Acts 7, 49. Heb. 8, 1. al. Hence God 
 is called 6 Seo? TOV ovp. Rev. 11, 13. 16, 
 11. (1 Mace. 3, 18.) Kvpios TOV ovp. Matt. 
 11, 25. Luke 10, 21. (Sept. Gen. 24, 3.) 
 K. tv Tols ovp. Eph. 6, 9. Col. 4, 1. Also 
 6 TTUTIJP 6 tv Tols ovpavols in the first 
 three gospels, Matt. 5, 16. 45. 48. 6, 1. 
 10, 32. Mark 11, 25. 26. Luke 11, 2; 6 
 TtaTrjp 6 t ovpavov Luke 11, 13. Of the 
 Messiah, the Son of God, as coming from 
 heaven, John 3, 13. 31. 6, 33. 38. 41 ; or 
 as returning thither after his resurrection, 
 Mark 16, 19. Luke 24, 51. Acts 1, 10. 11 ; 
 whence he will again come to judge the 
 world, 1 Thess. 1, 10. 4, 16. 2 Thess. 1, 7. 
 Of the Holy Spirit, Matt. 3, 16. John 1, 32. 
 
 1 Pet. 1, 12. [1 John 5, 7.] Of angels, 
 Matt. 18, 10. 24, 36. Mark 12, 25. Luke 
 22, 43. Gal. 1, 8. al. (Gen. 21, 17. 22, 11.) 
 Hence the angels are called rot o-rparei^iaT-a 
 TO. tv ovpava Rev. 19, 14, comp. Heb. x~S 
 C^SJrt and Sept. of angels, 1 K. 22, iV. 
 
 2 Chr." 18, 18. Ps. 148, 2. Heb. Lex. X2:J 
 no. 2. a. Of the righteous after death, as 
 the seat of their final and glorious reward, 
 Matt. 5, 12 6 [Alamos vfj.u>v TTO\VS tv Toils 
 ovpavols. 6, 20 ~rjcravpbs tv ovpavco. Luke 
 10, 20. 12, 33. 2 Cor. 5, 1. Col. 1,5. 1 Pet. 
 1, 4. al. In heaven also is the spiritual 
 temple with its sacred utensils, Heb. 9, 23. 
 24. Rev. 11, 19. 14, 17. 15, 5. 16, 17; and 
 there also the new Jerusalem is prepared 
 and adorned, Rev. 3, 12. 21, 2. 10. Hence 
 to be or to be done tv T<a ovpavta, i. q. among 
 or by those who dwell in heaven, Luke 15, 
 7 x a P a * > o" rat f " T <? ovpava. Matt. 6, 10 
 yfvr)^Si]Ta> TO 3fX?7/xa crou, as tv ovpav<a KO\ 
 eVt r^r y^s. Matt. 16, 19. 18; 18. Luke 11,2. 
 Also TO. tv Tols ovpavols, i. q. ths 
 higher spiritual world, Eph. 1, 10. Col. 1, 
 16. 20 ; and so Eph. 3, 15 rrdo-a Trarpi a tv 
 ovpavols. So poetically, where the heavens 
 are said to rejoice, Rev. 12, 12. 18, 20; 
 comp. Sept. and Heb. Is. 49, 13. Ps. 96, 
 1 1 . In various phrases etc. e. g. a) to 
 look up to heaven, as the abode of God, ai-a- 
 /SXeVeii ds TOV ovp. Matt. 14, 19. Mark 6, 
 41. 7, 34; aTfvitiv tls TOV ovp. Acts 1, 10. 
 7, 55 ; c/j/SXnrw* els TOV ovp. Acts 1,11, 
 tTTiipat TOVS 003. ds TOV ovp. Luke 18, 13. 
 John 17.1. /3) to ascend or be taken up 
 
ovpavos 532 
 
 vnio heaven, avafiaivtiv fls TOV ovp. John 3, 
 13. Acts 2,34; dvu\ri(p^irjvai fls TOV ovp. 
 Mark 16, 19. Acts 10, 16; dvao-irao-Zai 
 Acts 11, 10; dTrepxecrZat Luke 2, 15; TTO- 
 peveo-Sat 1 Pet. 3, 22. y) to come or be 
 sent from heaven, dnoo-TaXijvai cm ovp. 
 1 Pet. 1,12; ep^fcrSat fK ovp. John 3, 31 ; 
 KaTaftaivfiv fK V. cm ovp. John 6, 33. 38. 
 1 Thess. 4, 16 ; KaSiWSai fK TOV ovp. Acts 
 11,5. So with yivfo-^ai expr. or impl. TOV 
 air ovpavwv Heb. 12, 25; <pa>vr] fK T(Sv 
 ovpav&v Matt. 3, 17, comp. Mark 1, 11 
 (pcavrj iyfVfTO fK TCOV ovp. Luke 3, 22. al. 
 8) Also heaven is said to be opened, so as 
 to let pass in or out, to lay open the inte 
 rior, e. g. ot ovp. dvfa>x%T]crav, 6 ovp. dvea>- 
 yco?, ot ovp. dveioyp-fvoi, Matt. 3, 16. Luke 
 
 3, 21. John 1, 52. Acts 7,56. 10, 11. Rev. 
 
 4, 1. 19, 11 ; ot ovp. o-xi6p.evoi Mark 1,10. 
 
 b) Spec. fu>s TpiTov ovpavov, untothe 
 third heaven, 2 Cor. 12, 2, prob. in allusion 
 to the three heavens as above specified, viz. 
 the lower, the middle or firmament, and the 
 superior ; hence i. q. the highest heaven, the 
 abode of God and angels and glorified spir 
 its, the spiritual paradise, v. 4 ; comp. Eph. 
 4, 10. Heb. 4, 14. 7, 26. Comp. also Heb. 
 C^EUJ latt), Sept. 6 ovpavos TOV ovpavov, 
 
 \ Deut. 10, 14. 1 K. 8, 27. Ecclus. 16, 18. 
 So the pseudo-Lucian makes a Christian 
 say, eg TP (.TOV ovpavov dfpoftaTrjcras Luc. 
 Philopatr. 12. Others suppose the apostle 
 refers to the views of the later Rabbins, who 
 describe seven heavens, of which the first 
 is below the clouds ; the second is the re 
 gion of clouds and tempests and the abode 
 of evil spirits ; in the third are the hosts of 
 heaven, the stars ; while the other four 
 above this are assigned to the saints, the 
 various orders of angels, and the throne of 
 God ; see Test. XII Patr. in Fabric, p. 546. 
 Wetstein ad 2 Cor. 12, 2. But then 6 
 TP ITOS ovpavos could not well be i. q. 6 ?ra- 
 paSeio-oy in v. 4. 
 
 c) Meton. and from the later Heb. ovpa- 
 vos, ovpavoi, like Engl. heaven, as being the 
 abode of God, is often put for God himself; 
 e. g. fivai e ovpavov i. q. fK TOV Sleov, Matt. 
 21, 25. Mark 11, 30. 31. Luke 20, 4. 5; 
 $f8op,tvov fK TOV ovp. John 3. 27 ; rjfj.apTov 
 els TOV ovpavov Luke 15, 18. 21. Also in 
 the formula so freq. in Matthew fj ftao-iXfia 
 TO>V ovp. Matt. 3, 2. 4, 17. 5, 3. 10. al. 
 elsewhere fj /3ao-. TOV Seov or the like, see 
 in Pacn\tia no. 3. So Chald. N*a5 , Sept. 
 fgovcrta ovpdvios, Dan. 4, 23 [26]. Comp. 
 Buxtorf. Lex. Ch. 2440. Wetstein ad Matt. 
 21,25. Luke 15. 18 -f 
 
 OVT6 
 
 Ovpftavos, ov, 6, Urban, pr n. of a 
 Christian at Rome, Rom. 16, 9. 
 
 Ovpias, ov, 6, Urias, Heb. n^Jl 
 (flame of Jehovah) Uriah, pr. n. of the 
 husband of Bathsheba, Matt. 1 , 6 ; see 2 Sam. 
 11, 3 sq. 
 
 9 
 
 ov$, otTos, TO, an ear, Plur. TO S>i a 
 the ears ; Mark 7, 33 e/3oXe TOVS 8aT. av- 
 TOU els TO. WTO OVTOV. 8, 18. Luke 22, 50. 
 Acts 7, 57. 1 Cor. 12, 16. Sept. for ( tN, 
 to??!*. Ex. 29,20. Deut. 15, 17. So Hdian. 
 7. 3. 7. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 5. In phrases, 
 e. g. 6 f%<0v <Ta V. ei TIS e x ovs aKoveti/, 
 aKoveTco, i. e. whoever hath ears to hear 
 and understand, let him hear and attend ! 
 Matt. 11, 15. 13, 9. 43. Mark 4, 9. 23. 7., 
 16. Luke 8, 8. 14, 35. Rev. 2, 7. 11. 17. 
 29. 3, 6. 13. 22. 13, 9. So rtSerai els TO 
 WTO, to lei sink into the ears, to fix deep in 
 the mind, Luke 9, 44 ; comp. Ex. 17, 14. 
 Also to come els TO. WTO. TIVOS, to or into the 
 ears of any one, to be heard, Luke 1, 44. 
 Acts 11, 22. James 5, 4. (Sept. Ps. 18, 7. 
 Is. 5, 9.) So XaXeu/ V. aKovfiv els TO oZs, 
 to speak or hear in the ear, i. e. privately, 
 Luke 12, 3. Matt. 10, 27. (Ex. 11, 2.) Or 
 to do any thing ev Tots o>ertV TU OC, L e. : n 
 his hearing, presence, Luke 4, 21. (Sept. 
 Josh. 20, 4. Judg. 17, 2.) Spec. 3>Ta fis 
 8fr)o~iv, i. q. o>ra TOV Seov f&Tiv fls S. i. e. 
 God listens to prayer, 1 Pet. 3, 12, quoted 
 from Ps. 34, 16 where Sept. for tP31x ; 
 comp. 2 Chr. 6, 40. Neh. 1, 6. For Matt. 
 13, 15 bis, and Acts 28, 27 bis, see in art. 
 &ap f as. Rom. 11, 8 see in ^ I. 4. b. Acts 
 7, 51 see in dnepiTfjujTos. Poetically, ovj 
 as the organ of hearing is put for the per 
 son who hears; Matt. 13, 16 paKdpioi... 
 TO. u>Ta vfj.ci>v, OTI uKovfL. 1 Cor. 2, 9. Comp. 
 in KapS/a no. 1. a. y. 
 
 ovcria, as, rj, (et/xt, part. &v, ovo-a,) en 
 tity, essence, nature, Epict. Ench. 19. 2 ^ 
 ovo-t a TOV dyaSov. Arr. Epict. 2. 8. 1 ; being, 
 life, Soph. Trach. 913 mrais ovcria. In N. 
 T. and usually, what is to any one, what he 
 has, i. e. substance, property, Luke 15, 12. 
 13. So Tob. 14, 18. Pol. 20. 5. 14. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 8. 3. 
 
 oyre, conj. (ov, enclit. Te,) a continua- 
 tive, and not, also not, i. e. neither, nor, not 
 even; referring commonly to a part of a 
 proposition or clause, and thus differing 
 from ovSe q. v. Buttm. } 149. m. 15. Kiih- 
 ner 5 321. 2. c. Winer 59. 6. 
 
 1. As introducing a neg. clause, with or 
 without a preceding negation, neither, nor, 
 e. g. OVTE yap, Luke 20, 36. Acts 4. 12 
 
euro? 
 
 533 
 
 (Ildian. 3. 5. 11.) So ovre...Kat, as John 
 
 4, 1 1 KVplf, OVTf UVT\TJUa (X flS > * a T < />/ )f a P 
 
 irrX. 3 John 10 ; see espec. in KM no. 1. a. 
 (Eurip. Iph. in Taur. 595.) More freq. 
 repeated, o#re...oure, neither ... nor, be 
 fore different parts of a clause, Matt. 6, 20. 
 Luke 20. 35. John 5, 37. Acts 15, 10. Gal. 
 
 5, 6. al. (Xen. Lac. 14. 7.) Also three 
 times or more, ot>re , cure, oure, Acts 25, 8. 
 Rom. 8, 38. 39. 1 Cor. 6, 9. 10. Rev. 9, 20. 
 21. After another negative, as ov ... ovre 
 John 1, 25. Rev. 20, 4. 21, 4 ; ov8e...ovTe 
 Gal. 1, 12. 1 Thess. 2, 3. 
 
 2. Spec, not even ; Mark 5, 3 <al ovre 
 aXvo-fffiv ov8f\s rj8vvaTo UVTOV 8rjo-ai. Luke 
 12, 26. 1 Cor. 3, 2 Rec. So Hdian. 4. 6. 1 
 ov8e TIS r/v </>fia> TjXiKias, ovre p-(XP l vyrritav. 
 But Mss. in Mark and Luke 1. c. and 
 
 later edit, in 1 Cor. 1. c. read ov8e. + 
 
 
 OUTO?, avrr], TOVTO, gen. TOVTOV, TavTijs, 
 
 TOVTOV, pron. demonstr. this, that; pr. for 
 o curdy, T] ai>Tr], TO avTo, this same, Buttm. 
 j 76. 2, and n. 1. 
 
 1. Pr. as referring to a person or thing 
 before mentioned, i. e. to something preced 
 ing ; Buttm. 127. 1. b. Kiihner $ 303. 1. 
 Matth. 5470. 1. a) Pr. to that next pre 
 ceding, Luke 1, 32 Irjo-ovv OVTOS ecrrai 
 fityas. 2, 25. John 1, 2 Seoj TJV 6 \6yos 
 OVTOS TJV fv o.pxfj KT\. 3, 2. 6, 71. Acts 1, 
 
 14. 10, 36. Rom. 14, 18 ev TOVTOIS. 1 Tim. 
 
 6, 8. 2 Pet. 2, 20. 1 John 5, 6. 20. al. sa>p. 
 (Hdian. 4. 8. 11. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 28.) 
 Neut. Plur. ravra sometimes refers only to 
 one thing; 3 John 4. Luke 12, 4. [John 
 
 15, 17.] So Kara ravra i. q. OVTO> Luke 6, 
 23. 26, where later edit, read Kara raura. 
 Comp. Winer \ 23 pen. So Xen. An. 7. 6. 1 1. 
 b) Sometimes OVTOS refers not to the nearest, 
 but to another person or thing, as being the 
 chief topic of discourse; Winer 23. 1. 
 Matth. 1. c. Matt. 3, 3 OVTOS yap to-Tiv, sc. 
 ludvvrjs in v. 1. Luke 13, 2, comp. v. 1. 
 John 1, 42. 11, 37 *ai OVTOS even this man, 
 Lazarus. 21, 24. Acts 4, 11 curds eVrii/ 6 
 Xi 2or, sc. Xpio-ros. 7, 19. Gal. 4, 26. 2 John 
 
 7, So Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 14. c) As refer 
 ring generally to the preceding discourse ; 
 Matt. 7. 28 oTe (rvv(T(\fo-(v 6 I. TOVS Adyovr 
 TOVTOVS. Mark 4, 13, comp. v. 2 sq. Luke 
 1, 29. 24, 21. John 2, 11. Acts 19, 17. 
 Rom. 1 1 , 27. 1 John 2, 1. 26. So Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 3. 15. 
 
 2. As referring to or introducing what 
 follows, with emphasis, as in Engl. this, 
 i. q. the following ; Passow 1. c. Winer 
 5 23. 4. Matth. $ 472. c, d. So as followed 
 by the express words, e. g. TOVTO, Gal. 3, 17 
 TOVTO 8e X/yo) 8ia^T}Kijv KT\. 1 John 4, 2 ; 
 
 or with a Subst. Matt. 10, 2 TO. dvo 
 eo-Ti TavTa. Luke 2, 12. Acts 8, 32 rj 8f 
 TT(pioxr) ...TJV avTT] u>s KT\. 1 Cor. 9, 3. Or 
 followed by a noun simply, as the predicate, 
 2 Cor. 13, 9 roiJro 8e vgdpcSOi TT/V vp.<av 
 KaTapTio-iv. 1 John 5, 4. (Luc. Navig. 3.) 
 Or by an infin. e. g. without art. Acts 24, 
 16. 26,16. James 1,27; comp. Winer 1. c. 
 Matth. ^ 472. b. (Plato Apol. Soc. 29. p. 38. 
 c.) Inf. c. art. Rom. 14, 13 rovro Kpivart 
 fjLaXXov, TO fj.fj rt3eVat *crX. 2 Cor. 2, 1. 
 (Plato Apol. Soc. 24. p. 35. c. Xen. CEc. 
 8. 2.) So 8ia TOVTO before a particip. of 
 cause, Mark 12, 24; ev rovrw 2 Cor. 5, 
 2. Also before OTL and Iva, comp. in 
 ort I. 1, and Iva III. 1. f. Winer 5 23. 4 ; 
 e. g. before ort, John 21. 23 e ^XSei ovv 6 
 \6yos OVTOS... OTI 6 fia^rjTTjs KT\. Acts 20, 
 29. Rom. 6, 6. 1 Cor. 1, 12. 1 John 1, 5. 
 al. saep. (Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 25.) Before Iva, 
 e. g. of purpose, els TOVTO Iva Rom. 14, 9. 
 
 1 Pet. 3, 9. 4, 6 ; 8ta TOVTO Iva John 1, 31. 
 
 2 Cor. 13, 10. 1 Tim. 1, 16; or after a 
 word of command, John 15, 17. 1 John 3, 
 
 23. 4, 21 ; or genr. John 6, 29 roOrd eVrt 
 ro epyov TOV 3eov, Iva TTicrreucnjre *rA. V. 39. 
 40. 17, 3 avTT) f<rT\v 17 aluivios far], Iva yi- 
 vcao-Ka>(Ti KT\. 1 John 4, 17. 5, 3. al. 
 
 3. Put 8fiKTiKus, i. e. as pointing to a 
 person or thing present either to the eyes 
 or to the mind, Passow 1. c. Matth. 471. 
 12. a) Genr. Matt. 3, 17 OVTOS to-Tiv 6 
 vlos pov KT\. 17, 5. Mark 9, 7. Luke 9, 35. 
 Matt. 17, 20. 26, 26 roGrd e<m TO aw/id 
 uov. v. 28. Mark 14, 22. 24. 1 Cor. 11, 
 
 24. 25. al. Mark 12, 43. 14, 69. John 1, 
 15. 7, 46. Acts 2, 7. Matt. 8, 9 17 o-o<f>la 
 avTT]. 26, 34 ev TavTrj TJJ WKTI. Luke 12, 
 26 Kaipbv TOVTOV. 21, 6. Acts 1, 5. al. saep. 
 So Sept. for fit 1 Sam. 29, 3. (Xen. An. 
 4. 8. 14, 26.) So with a numeral referring 
 to time ; Luke 24, 2 1 rpi r^v Tavrrfv fjp.epav 
 Syei, see in ayu> no. 3. 2 Cor. 13, 1 rp irov 
 TOVTO tpxapai rrpbs vp.as. Comp. Winer 
 5 38. 5. n. 1. Matth. 5470. 8. Sept. TpiTov 
 TOVTO for B^an tibia nt Num. 22, 28. 32. 
 33. So Luc. t). Mort. 13. 3 eV Ba/SuXww 
 Kftpai Tp iTijv f]fj,epav TOVTTJV. Hdot. 5. 76 
 TfTapTov TOVTO aOTKo/zf i/ot. b) In admira- 
 tion, Matt. 8, 27 irorairos eo~Tiv OVTOS, OTI 
 KT\. 12, 23. Luke 4, 22. John 6, 14. O 
 More usually in contempt or aversion, i. q. 
 Engl. this fellow, or the like ; Matt. 9, 3 
 OVTOS j3Xao^7/it. 12, 24. 13, 54. Mark 6, 
 2. 3. Luke 5, 21. John 6, 42. Acts 7, 40. 
 al. Also TOVTO I Cor. 5, 2. 3. So Xen. 
 An. 3. 1. 30. Cyr. 1. 3. 11. 
 
 4. Inserted for emphasis : a) After the 
 subject or object of a verb, i. e. between 
 
OUT09 
 
 534 
 
 otmuj 
 
 this and the verb, Winer 5 23. 3. E. g. 
 after a noun, Matt. 13, 38 TO Se KaXbv arirep- 
 ;jLa, ovrot flo-iv ol viol KT\. 21, 42 Xt 3oi> ov 
 ...OVTOS tytv^rj KT\. Luke 8, 21. Acts 4, 
 10. Rom. 7, 10. 1 Cor. 6,4. 1 Pet. 2,7.al. 
 (Pol. 3. 20. 2. ib. 5. 111. 2.) After a re 
 lative pron. comp. below in no. 5 ; Matt. 5, 
 19 or av Troirjo-?? . . . OVTOS p.eyas K\T)%. KT\. 
 where in the preced. clause OVTOS is omit 
 ted. Mark 3, 35. Luke 9, 24. John 1, 33. 
 Rom. 8, 30. Phil. 4. 8. al. ssep. (Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 6. 8. An. 1. 6. 6.) After a parti 
 ciple, comp. Matth. 472. 2. Matt 13, 20 
 6 8e . . . (nrapfis . . . OVTOS eaTiv KT\. Mark 1 2, 
 40. Luke 9, 48. John 6, 46. Acts 17, 6. 
 So Pol. 1. 67. 12. Dem. 522. 20. b) In 
 apodosis after el, Rom. 8, 8 el &e rts Trvevp.a 
 Xp. OVK ex ft ovros V K to-Tiv avTOv. 1 Cor. 
 3, 17. Philem. 18. James 3, 2. 1 Pet. 2, 20. 
 Comp. Winer 139. 3. Matth. 610. fin. 
 c) After a parenthesis or intervening sen 
 tence, when the writer again returns to the 
 leading subject ; Acts 7, 35 bis. TOVTOV TOV 
 MWVOTJF...TOVTW 6 3e6s KT\. comp. v. 31. 
 So v. 37. 38. ^El. V. H. 3. 17 3fvo(pS>v 
 . . . OVTOS fKflvos rjv- 
 
 5. Where OVTOS is followed by a relative 
 sentence, OVTOS... os, i. q. this rvho, he who, 
 that which ; Luke 9, 9 TIS 8e (VTIV OVTOS, 
 TTfpl ov KT\. 1 Pet. 5, 12. 1 John 5, 9. 
 But both before and after a relative OVTOS is 
 frequently omitted ; and the relative then 
 implies it, and stands for he who, that which, 
 Engl. what ; see in os A. 4. Matth. 
 473. b. 
 
 6. As strengthened by OVTO S, i. e. av- 
 TOL OVTOI, these men themselves, SeiKTtKws 
 for they themselves, Acts 24, 15. 20. Of- 
 tener Neut. OVTO TOVTO, TOVTO OVTO, this 
 very thing etc. e. g. as referring to what 
 precedes, 2 Cor. 2, 3 eypa\|m vp.lv TOVTO eu 
 ro. Eph. 6, 18; with relat. 6...avTo TOVTO 
 Gal. 2, 10 ; comp. Matth. 472. p. 881 sq. 
 As referring to and introducing what fol 
 lows ; before, an infin. c. TO, 2 Cor. 7, 1 1 ; 
 Sn Phil. 1, 6; iva Eph. 6, 22. Col. 4, 8; 
 oVcos Rom. 9, 17. Also OVTO TOVTO, on this 
 very account, for this very reason, i. q. 8ia 
 Tavra, 2 Pet. 1,5; comp. Matth. 470. 7. 
 Greg. Cor. p. 29, 30. So Xen. An. 1. 9. 
 21 ; avTa Tavra Plato Protag. 310. e. 
 
 7. After KOI, as KOI OVTOS, often genr. 
 in the foregoing senses, e. g. and this man, 
 and he, Luke 16, 1 ; he also 20, 30; SEIKTI- 
 KWS Luke 22, 56. 59. Spec. Kal OVTOS, 
 Kal TOVTO, KOI TavTa, and he too, and this too, 
 and that indeed, i. e. where a particular 
 stress is to be laid upon the connection of 
 two circumstances, OVTOS is thus joined with 
 
 Kai, and then always refers back to the 
 former; see Matth. 470. 6. Buttm. { 150. 
 m. 16. Viger. p. 177. So 1 Cor. 2, 2 el p-f} 
 I. Xpio~Toi>, Kal TOVTOV fCTTavpcDfievov. (Hdot. 
 6. 11. Xen. Ag. 1. 2.) Oftener Neut. Kal 
 TOVTO, Rom. 13, 11 Kal TOVTO eiSores T 
 comp. v. 8. 1 Cor. 6, 6. Eph. 2, 8 ; K al 
 Tavra, 1 Cor. 6, 8 dXXa vp.fls dSiKeiTf, ... 
 Kal TavTa d8eX(povs. Heb. 11, 12. So Plur. 
 Jos. Ant. 10. 10. 4. Luc. D. Deor. 8 med. 
 Xen. CEc. 11. 3. 
 
 8. In distribution, TOVTO p.ev.. . TOVTO 
 8e, pr. as to this. . . as to that, i. q. partly. . . 
 partly, Heb. 10, 33. See in p.ev no. 3. b. 
 Matth. 288. n. 2. Hdot. 3. 106. Isocr. 
 p. 44. d. Dem. 474. 25. 
 
 9. Neut. TavTa ace. as adv. so, thus, 
 i. q. OVTO>S, Buttm. j 128. n. 5. Matth. 5 471. 
 13 ; so after KO^WS John 8, 28 ; altern. with 
 OVTWS Mark 2, 8 ; TavTa eivai, to be thus, 
 such, 1 Cor. 6, 1 1. As referring to what fol 
 lows, Luke 18, 1 1 Tavra ?rpoo"?jv^eTo 6 Sees 
 KrX.Soph. Ajax 1346. Horn. II. 11. 694. 
 
 10. In gender and number, the use of 
 ovTor exhibits some anomalies of syntax, 
 e. g. a) Where OVTOS refers in sense to 
 a preceding noun, it yet sometimes takes 
 the gender and number of a noun follow 
 ing; comp. Matth. 434. 1. b, and 2. b. 
 Matt. 13, 38 TO &e Ka\ov o-Trtpfj-a, OVTOI (Ifftv 
 
 01 viol KT\. comp. above in no. 4. Luke 8, 
 14. 15. So Matt. 7, 12. Gal. 4, 24. b) By 
 Hebraism, the fern. avTT) stands twice for 
 neut. TOTO, Matt. 21, 42 et Mark 12, 11 
 Trapa Kvpiov eyeVeTO OUT^ (i. e. TOVTO), quot 
 ed from Ps. 118, 23 where Sept. for Heb. 
 f>XT . For the Heb. idiom, see Gesen. Lehrg. 
 p. 661. + 
 
 01/TW9, also OVTW before a consonant, 
 demonstr. adv. (OVTOS,) in this manner, on 
 this wise, i. e. so, thus ; to which corresponds 
 relat. as, Buttm. 116. 7, and n. 7. On 
 the final s, see Buttm. 5 26. 4. Winer 
 55. l.b. 
 
 1. Pr. as referring to what precedes, and 
 in complete sentences preceded by a rela 
 tive adverb or adverbial word. a) With a 
 preced. relat. adv. as... so, e. g. KaSdVep... 
 OVTWS, Rom. 12, 5, comp. v. 4. 1 Cor. 12, 
 12 KaSaTTfp yap TO o~c!)p.a ev fcrTi . . . OVTCH Kai 
 6 Xpio-To s. 2 Cor. 8, 11. (Pint, de Sanit. 
 tuend. 10.) Also (caSws.-.ovTcos, Luke 
 11, 30. John 3, 14. 2 Cor. 1, 5. 1 Thess. 
 2, 4; WS...OVTWS Acts 8, 32. Rom. 5, 15 
 ov^ a>s TO TrapaTTTco/ia, OVTUI Kal TO xdpto~fLa. 
 
 2 Cor. 7, 14. 1 Thess. 2, 7. 8. (Xen. Cyr. 
 8.2.12.) So wo-7rep...ovTO)s Matt. 12 
 40. John 5, 21. Rom. 6, 4. 1 Cor. 11 12 
 
oz/r&>9 
 
 535 
 
 al. Further, *ca3 So-ov . . . ovras Heb. 9, 27. 
 28; ov Tp6nov...ovTa>s 2 Tim. 3, 8; Kara 
 TV/I/ 65oi .. .o{/rco? Acts 24, 14; a [cos]... 
 ourcof Acts 3, 18, comp. Matth. <j 480. c. 
 p. 899. b) Alone, and as referring gener 
 ally to the preceding discourse. Matt. 3, 15 
 OVT<I> yap TTpeTTOV f<rr\v tjp-lv TT\T)pu>o~ai Tra- 
 o-av 8tK. i. e. by being baptized, comp. v. 13. 
 Matt. 5, 12. 6, 30 comp. v. 29. 30. Matt. 9, 
 33. 17, 12. 18, 14. Luke 1, 25. John 11, 
 48. 1 Cor. 2, 11. 7, 26. 40, comp. v. 24. 
 Rev. 2, 15. al. szep. Interrog. John 18, 22. 
 (Hdian. 7. 5. 1. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 32.) Also 
 et raCra OVTUS x el e - so as they appear, 
 are reported, Acts 7, 1. 17, 11 ; comp. in 
 ( X u> no. 5. So Cebet. Tab. 4. Xen. An. 
 7. 7. 51. c) In emphatic affirmation or 
 prohibition, OVTUS eVrat, so shall it be; 
 Matt. 12, 45 OVTO>S to~Tai KOI rrj yej/ea rav- 
 777. 13,49. 24, 39; ov^ OVTUS ecrrai eV 
 v/ui> Matt. 20, 26. Mark 10, 43 ; with eVrai 
 impl. Luke 12, 21. 22, 26. So Horn. Od. 
 16. 31. ib. 21. 257. 
 
 2. As referring to and introducing what 
 follows ; in complete sentences followed by 
 a relat. adv. or adverbial word. a) With 
 a following relat. adv. so ... as, e. g. OVTUS 
 . . . KaSias. Luke 24, 24 KOI tvpov ourco a- 
 Sdjf KOL al yvvaiKes tiTrov. Rom. 11, 26; 
 OUT co? . . . cor, John 7, 46 ouS/Trore OVTCOS 
 (\d\rjo~fv afSpcoTTor, o>s OVTOS 6 av%p. 1 Cor. 
 4, 1. James 2, 12. (Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 3.) So 
 OVTCOS- . . . wore c. inf. Acts 14. 1. (Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 1.) ovrco? . . . ov rpoirov Acts 1, 
 1 1 ; *u3 ov rp. 27, 25. b) Alone, e. g. 
 as followed by direct narration or quotation, 
 Matt. 1, 18 TOV I. Xp. 17 yevvricris OVTUIS rjv 
 p.vrjCTTfv Zficrrjs KT\. 2, 5 ourco yap ytypairrai 
 . . . icat <TV B^Xee/i. John 21,1. Heb. 4, 4. 
 Rev. 9, 17. Or followed by an infin. 1 Pet. 
 2 ; 15. Also by oTt of quotation, Luke 19, 
 31. Acts 7, 6. 13, 34; comp. in on A. 4. 
 Or by iva, 1 Cor. 9, 24 OVTO> rpe^ere, Iva 
 
 3. Put SfiKTiKus, see in OVTOS no. 3. 
 Acts 21, 1 1 TOV av8pa . . ourco 8ijcrov(riv tv 
 Itpovo-. KT\. Rom. 9, 20. With the idea of 
 aversion, 1 Cor. 5, 3 TOV ourco TOVTO Kartp- 
 yaa dp.fi ov, comp. in ovro? no. 3. c. 
 
 4. Inserted for emphasis : a) After 
 participles, before the following verb, like 
 ofros-, see in OVTOS no. 4. a. Matth. $610. 
 p. 1235. Biittm. 5144. n. 13; e.g. Acts 
 20, 1 1 6ni\fjo-as (i^pis avyfj? OVTUIS ef)X3ei . 
 27. 17. Perh. John 4, 6 6 olv l 
 
 icoTria/coa? . . . f KaSefero OVTUIS errt TTJ Trrjyfj, 
 for OVTVS Ka3/fero, so he sat, wearied as he 
 was ; but Chrysost. aTrXco? cor trv)(t t jiut as 
 it happened. So Hdot. 6. 104 fin. Plato 
 
 Gorg. p. 457. a. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 1. b) 
 In apodosis, after , ort, comp. Matth. 1. c. 
 So after et, 1 Thess. 4, 14. Rev. 11, 5 ei 
 TIS avTovs SeXei dSiKrjcrat, OVTCO Set avTov 
 dTTOKTavSfjvat. But both these passages 
 may be perhaps better referred to no. 1. b, 
 above. (Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 3 in most edit.) 
 With OTI causal, Rev. 3, 16 ourcoy, on ^Xt- 
 apos et, . . . /^eXXco ere e/xecrat fK TOV o~TO[j.a- 
 TOS p.ov, for on . . . ourcor /ze XXco KT\. So 
 Hdot. 9. 6, c. (TTfi. 
 
 5. Spoken of degree, extent, so, so much, 
 to such a degree, in such a manner ; so 
 \vith adjectives and adverbs, Heb. 12, 21 
 ovrco (pofiepbv tjv TO (pavra6p.(vov. Rev. 16, 
 18; oimo ra^e coj Gal. 1, 6. Interrog. 
 Mark 7, 18 ovrco *at v/iety dcrvvrroi eVre; 
 
 4, 40 TI SetXot e o-re OVTCO ; Gal. 3, 3. So 
 Luc. D. Deor. 4. 4. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 16 ; c. 
 adv. Xen. Mem. 3. 11. 7. With a verb, 
 1 John 4, 1 1 et OVTMS 6 3eo? rjyurrTjo-ai 
 r ifj.us. Followed by wore c. Indie. John 3, 
 16. Interrog. Matt. 26, 40 OUT-CO? OVK. lo-xv- 
 o-uTe fj.iav fopav yprjyoprjo-ai ; are ye (hen so 
 unable? 1 Cor. 6, 5. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 11 ; 
 c. coo-re Luc. D. Deor. 2. 1 ; interrog. ib. 
 
 5. 2. + 
 
 Of^, see in ov. 
 
 ov X t "> a( ^ v - not > a strengthened form of 
 ov, used espec. by the Attics for empha=is, 
 Buttm. J117. 2. 
 
 1. Genr. John 13, 10 uXX ou^t nuirres 
 but not all, i. e. by no means all. v. 11. 
 
 1 Cor. 6, 1 ; ov^t . tlXXci 1 Cor. 10, 29. 
 
 2 Cor. 10, 13. Luc. D. Meretr. 12. 3. 
 Xen. Athen. 2. 18. 
 
 2. In neg. answers, no, nay, by no means, 
 comp. in ov no. 6 ; only as followed by 
 dXXa, Luke 1. 60 fj p.rjTrjp UVTOV fi-mv 
 ovxi- dXXa xrX. 12, 51. 13, 3. Rom. 3, 27. 
 So Sept. for 13 xb Gen. 18, 15. 19, 2. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 3/4. 
 
 3. Often in neg. questions, nonne ? is 
 not 1 are not 1 implying an affirmative an 
 swer, comp. in ov no. 7. Matt. 5, 46 ou^t 
 at ot reXcoi/at ro avro Trotovcrt ; 20, 13. 
 Luke 12, 6. 17, 17. John 11,9. Rom. 3, 
 29. al. Luke 17, 8 dXX ov^t e pet avT<a; 
 yea will he not rather say to him ? Sept. 
 for xbn Gen. 40, 8. Judg. 4, 6. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 3. 46 ; dXX ov x i ib. 2. 2. 19. -f 
 
 6<pet\errj^ O u, (5. (o^et Xco.) 1 . a debtor, 
 Matt. 18, 24 ety ocp. fjivpiaiv raXdn-cop. 
 Trop. of one indebted for favours, Rom. 15, 
 27. So Plut. C. Mar. 12. Plato Legg. 
 736. d. 
 
 2 Trop. a debtor, one. morally bound te 
 the performance of any duty ; so c. infin 
 
536 
 
 Gal. 5, 3 o(f)fi\tTT)s faT\v o\ov rov vop.ov 
 rroirjo-ai, i. e. he is bound to keep the whole 
 law. With dat. and inf. Rom. 8, 12; inf. 
 impl. Rom, 1, 14 "EXX^o-i re KOI fiapfidpois 
 . . . 6(pti\fTT]s flpi, sc. evayyeXicratrSat V. 15. 
 So c. dat. Soph. Ajax 590. 
 
 3. From the Aramaean, a debtor, a delin 
 quent, one who iails in the performance of 
 duty ; Matt. 6,12 rots o(pei\(Tais fjp,u>v, i. 6. 
 those who fail in their duties towards us. 
 Hence genr. a transgressor, sinner, i. q. 
 fytaprwXo y, Luke 13, 4 comp. v. 2. Lib. 
 Henoch. in Fabr. p. 180, o<pei\eTTjs apap- 
 Tias p.ryd\T]s. So Targ. "piTt debtors for 
 Heb. fiixisn sinners, Ps. 1, 1. Onk. XST! 
 for yjan G*en. 18, 23. See Buxt. Lex. Ch. 
 715. 
 
 o<etX?7, rjs, f]. (o<peiX&>,) indebtedness, 
 debt ; Matt. 18, 32 Trdaav TTJV v(j>ei\T]i> d(pfj- 
 Ka (rot. Trop. a due, duty, obligation, 
 Rom. 13, 7. 1 Cor. 7, 3 in later edit. Ety- 
 mol. Magn. as from Xen. Vect. See Sturz 
 Lex. Xenoph. sub v. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 90. 
 
 o<f)et\r)/jia, arcs, TO, (ocpetXco,) what is 
 owed, a debt, Sept. Deut. 24, 10. 1 Mace. 
 
 15, 8. Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 463, d<pei\r)p,a o 
 t8avfifTo TIS. In N. T. trop. 
 
 1 . a due, duty, obligation. Rom. 4, 4 ov 
 Xoy/ffrai Kara -^dpiv, dXXa Kara 6(f)fihT]p.a. 
 Thuc. 2. 40 OVK es X"P iV > "^ >s o<f)fi- 
 \rjp-a. Plato Legg. 717. b. 
 
 2. From the Aramaean, a delinquency, 
 fault, sin. Matt. 6, 12 afas rjp.1v ra o<pti- 
 \T]fj.ara f]pS)v, 5. q. TO. TrapcnrTcop.aTa v. 14, 
 and TCIS d/zaprt ay Luke 11, 4. So Targ. 
 X2"in debt, for Heb. nxan sin, Ps. 25, 18. 
 al. Comp. Buxt. Lex. Chald. 715, and in 
 o(j)fi\eTrjs no. 3. Greek writers said d(pir)- 
 P.I nvl ra xp* a > Luc. Saturnal. 5. JEl. V. 
 H. 14. 24. 
 
 o(petX&>, f. o(pd\T]o-a>, 1. to owe, to be 
 indebted; pr. in a pecuniary sense, c. ace. et 
 dat. expr. or impl. Matt. 18, 28 bis, os uxpei- 
 \tv avTca (KdTov fyvdpia KT\. Luke 7, 41. 
 
 16, 5. 7! Rom. 13, 8. Philem. 18. Sept. 
 for ntij Hiph. Deut. 15, 2. Is. 24, 2. So 
 Luc. D. Mort. 4. 1. Xen. Ag. 4. 4. Pass. 
 particip. neut. TO o(pe tXo/if vov, what is owed, 
 a debt, due, Matt. 18, 30. 34. So Xen. An. 
 7. 7. 34. 
 
 2. Trop. to owe, to be bound, obligated, 
 sc. to the performance of any duty, i. q. / 
 ought, I must ; so of what is required by law 
 or duty in general, e. g. c. inf. impl. Matt. 
 23, 16 os av O/JLOO-TJ- . . . o<p(i\ei sc. diroo ov- 
 vai. v. 18. Elsewhere c. inf. Luke 17, 10 
 6 o(pi\o/j.fv iroLrjcrqi, TreTrotJjKa/nei . John 13, 
 14. 19, 7 <5<ei Xei UTroSamv he ought to die. 
 
 Rom. 15. 1. 27. 2 Cor. 12, 14. Eph. 5, 28. 
 
 2 Thess. 1, 3. 2, 13. 1 John 2, 6. 3, 16. 4, 
 11. 3 John 8. Particip. 1 Cor. 7, 3 Rec. 
 So Wisd. 12, 15. Pol. 6. 37. 5. Thuc. 4, 
 19. Also of what the circumstances of 
 time, place, person, etc. render proper, i. q. 
 to be fit and proper, I ought, Acts 17, 29. 
 1 Cor. 7, 36 KOI O\ITUS 6<pfiX(i yii/ecr3at. 
 
 11, 7. 10. 2 Cor. 12, 11. Heb. 2, 17. 5, 3. 
 
 12. Or of what is from the nature of the 
 case necessary, / must or should, 1 Cor. 5, 
 10 fjrfi o(p(i\(Tf apa (K TOV /cocr/iov li^tk Zflv. 
 9, 10. 
 
 3. From the Aramaean, to fail in duty, to 
 be delinquent, to be in fault towards any one, 
 c. dat. Luke 11, 4. See in o0etXV?/r no. 3, 
 and 6<pfi\T)pa no. 3. 
 
 6cf)\.ov, epic and later form for Att. 
 &<p\ov aor. 2 of o$et X<a, pr. I ought, but 
 used only in the sense of wishing, would 
 that, utinam ; see Passow o^e/Xco no. 2. b. 
 [II. 2.] In earlier Greek writers it is still 
 a verb, c. c. infin. and often preceded by u>s, 
 , tiSf, Horn. II. 3. 173. Eurip. Med. 1. 
 Plato Rep. 432. c. Xen. An. 2. 1.4. See 
 Matth. 5 513. n. 3. Buttm. 5 150. m. 20. 
 In later writers and N. T. oceXoj is an 
 indec. particle of wishing, or interject. O 
 that! would that! utinam, c. c. Indie, see 
 Winer 5 42. 5. n. 2. Sturz de Dial. Mac. 
 p. 186. Buttm. 1. c. So 1 Cor. 4, 8 KOI 
 o(pf\6v ye e /Sao-iXeuo-are. 2 Cor. 11,1. Gal. 
 5, 12. Rev. 3, 15. Sept. for I Pfl in Ex. 16, 
 
 3 ; ft Num. 14, 2. 20, 3; ^n 2 K. 5, 3. 
 So Arr. Epict. 2. 18. 15; comp. Luc. Philo- 
 pseud. 1 fin. 
 
 o<peXo?, fos, ovs, TO, (oc^eXXco,) furthe? 
 ance, advantage, profit, 1 Cor. 15, 32 ri pot 
 ofaXos ; James 2, 14. 16. Sept. for b^Si n 
 Job 15, 3. Diod. Sic. 13. 53. Xen. Mem. 
 3. 1. 9. 
 
 SouXei a,) eye-service, rendered only under 
 the master s eye, Eph. 6, 6. Col. 3, 22. 
 Not found elsewhere. 
 
 oC, o, (o^o/iat, Part. aor. 
 o<3ei y,) an eye ; Plur. ot 8<3aX/io/, the eyes ) 
 1. Pr. and genr. Matt. 5, 29 6 o^>3. o-ou 
 6 Sexto s, v. 38. Mark 8, 25. Luke 24, 16. 
 Acts 9, 18. 1 Cor. 12, 16. 15, 52 <V pnrj} 
 6(p^a\p,ov. Rev. 3, 18. al. Sept. for T?? 
 Gen. 29, 17. 48, 10. (Pol. 12. 27. 1. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 4. 5.) Spec. oc^3. dTrXoOf, 
 o^)3. trovrjpos, i. e. sound, or unsound, dis 
 eased, Matt. 6, 22. 23 ; but 6$3. jrovrjpos 
 see also below in no. 2. For ace. TOVS 
 6<p%a\p.ovs in phrases after the verbs 
 
537 
 
 ), Siavoiyo. fopvo~o~ta, eVaipco, Kap.- 
 fiva>. see under these verbs respectively. 
 For 1 Pet. 3, 12, see in eVi III. 1. b. /3. 
 For 2 Pet. 2. 14, see in pxH^aXir. For 
 Heb. 4, 13, see yvp.i>ds no. 4. 
 
 2. Poet, the eye, as the organ of seeing, 
 is put for the person who sees; Matt. 13, 
 16 pciKapioi ol o<p3. Luke 2, 30 d8ov ol 
 o<p3. fjLov KT\. 10, 23. Rev. 1, 7. Sept. 
 and Heb. Dent. 3, 21. Is. 30,20. saep. 
 Further, as affections of mind are mani 
 fested through the eyes, hence that is at 
 tributed to the eyes which strictly be 
 longs only to the person ; e. g. envy, as 
 Matt. 20, 15 6 o(p3. <rov irovijpos fomv, on 
 eyo> dyaSdy elpn ; Mark 7, 22 o<p3. irovrjpos, 
 an evil eye, emy. So Heb. T?? 3n , Sept. 
 Bdo-Kavos, Prov. 23, 6. 28, 22 ; comp. Heb. 
 Lex. T? no. 1. So Ecclus. 14, 10 o<p3. 
 irovrjpbs (pSoi/epdf. 
 
 3. Trop. eye of the mind, the power of 
 perceiving and understanding ; so o<p3. TTJS 
 Stavoias Eph. 1, 18 Rec. others o<p3. TTJS 
 tcapo ias. Elsewhere absol. Luke 19, 42 vvv 
 8e (Kpvfir] CLTTO o<p3oXpcoj crov. Acts 26, 18, 
 comp. in avoiyo no. 4. b. John 12, 40. Rom. 
 11,8. 10. al. (Act. Thorn. 28 TOVS rfs 
 yt X^f o(p3oXpovs.) By Hebr. (v <5(p3aXp,oTy 
 TIVOS Matt. 21, 42 et Mark 12, 11, see in tv 
 no. 1. e ; aTrevavri T>V o<p3. Rom. 3, 8, see 
 in aTTivavTt no. 2. + 
 
 o<t?, teas, 6, a serpent; Matt. 7, 10 prj 
 ofav Vi8<r avTw ; Mark 16, 18 et Luke 
 10, 19 comp. Ps/91, 13. Luke 11, 11. 
 1 Cor. 10, 9. Rev. 9, 19. Of the brazen 
 serpent, John 3, 14. Sept. for Ena Gen. 
 
 3, 1. Ex. 4, 3. (Luc. Tim. 29. Dem. 786. 
 
 4. Hdot. 8. 4. 1.) As the emblem of wis 
 dom or cunning, e. g. in a good sense, Matt. 
 10, 16; in a bad sense, 23, 33. Comp. 
 Gen. 3, 1. Psalt. Salom. 4, 11 if o<j>ts 8ia- 
 \vo-ai o-o<j)iav. Hence symbolically for 
 Satan, 2 Cor. 11, 3; in allusion to Gen. 3, 
 1 sq. which the later Jewish writings also 
 explain of Satan, comp. Wisd. 2, 23. 24. 
 Act. Thorn. {5 31. 32. Also Rev. 12, 9 6 
 o<ptr 6 dpxcuos 6 Sarai/ar. V. 14. 15. 20, 
 2 ; comp. in 8pdKo>v. 
 
 O0pf9, vos, f], brow, pr. eye-brow, Sept. 
 Lev. 14, 9. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 6. In N. T. 
 the brow of a hill, edge of a precipice, Luke 
 4, 29 ; see in Nafape 3. So Horn. II. 20. 
 151. Pol. 7. 6. 3. Plut. Mor. II. p. 201. 
 
 6^Xe&>, , f. ijo-w, (oxXoj.) pr. to harass 
 with crowds, to mob, c. ace. Hdot. 5. 41. 
 jEschyl. Prom. 1001. In N. T. genr. to 
 harass, to vex, only Pass. Luke 6, 18 o^Xou- 
 vnb Trvfvp.dTO)v d/caSaprcov. Acts 5, 
 
 16. So Tob. 6, 7. Hdian. 6. 3. 9. Plut. de 
 Tranq. anim. 8 fin. 
 
 O^XOTTOieo), , f. TJO-CO, (o^Xoy, TTOU O),) 
 
 to gather a crowd, to raise a mob, intrans. 
 Acts 17, 5. Not found elsewhere. 
 
 0^X09, ov, 6, 1. a crowd, throng, mul 
 titude ; pr. a confused multitude, populace, 
 opp. to fif/po? a regular assembly, Plato Polit 
 304. c. So Sing. Matt. 9, 23 i Sd>i/ . . . rbi 
 ox\ov Zopvfiovp.{i>ov. v. 25. Mark 2, 4. Luke 
 5, 1. John 5, 13. Acts 14, 14. al. saep. So 
 TroXvr o^Xof Matt. 14, 14. Mark 6, 34 ; o ^Xof 
 rroXvs Matt. 20, 29. Mark 4, 1 ; 6 TTO\VS 
 o^Xoy Mark 12, 37 ; 6 TrXeurror o. Matt. 21, 
 8 ; TrdfjLTroKvs 5. Mark 8, 1 ; iras 6 o. Matt. 
 
 13, 2. Mark 4, 1 ; o. TOO-OVTOS Matt. 15, 33 ; 
 o. tKavos Mark 10, 46 ; ot pvptdSes TOV o. 
 Luke 12, 1. Sept. for "pan 1 K. 20, 13; 
 B? Num. 20, 20. So Luc. Amor. 12. Xen. 
 Cyr. 7. 5. 39 ; TTO\VS 5. ib. 6. 1. 1 ; 6 TTUS o. 
 jEl. V. H. 2. 6. Plur. of 0^X01 intens. in 
 the same sense, like Engl. crowds, multi 
 tudes. Matt. 5, 1 t Swi 8e TOVS o^Xov?. 7, 28. 
 Mark 10, 1. Luke 4, 42. 5, 3. John 7, 12. 
 Acts 8, 6. al. So o. TroXXoi Matt. 4, 25. 
 Luke 5, 15; iravres ol o. Matt 12, 23. 
 Sept. for ^2 Ez. 16, 40. So J\. V. H. 
 
 14. 8. Hdian. 7. 12. 11. Once Plur. of 
 0^X01 of throngs or multitudes out of dif 
 ferent nations, and thus i. q. nations, tribes; 
 Rev. 17, 15 Xaot KOI a^Xoi (l<ri, KOI e Si/j; 
 KOI yXcoo-o-at. So Hdian. 7. 7. 2. 
 
 2. Spec, the common people, the rabble, 
 plebs ; Matt. 14, 5 efyoftrfiri TOV o^Xoj/. 21, 
 26. Mark 12, 12. John 7, 12. 49 comp. 48. 
 Acts 16, 22. 24, 12. Plur. of o^Xot Matt. 
 
 21, 46. Acts 17, 13. Ecclus. 7, 7. Luc. 
 Herod. 8. Xen. Hell. 1. 4. 13. 
 
 3. Genr. a multitude, a great number ; 
 c. genit. of a class, Luke 5, 29 o^Xoj reXoo- 
 vS>v Ti-oXvf. 6, 17. Acts 1,15. 6, 7. With 
 fK c. gen. John 12, 9; o. I<av6s Acts 11, 
 24. 26. 19, 26 juerecrrr/frei iKavbv o^Xof. 
 So c. gen. Jos. Ant. 3. 4. 1. Luc. Necyom. 
 4. Xen. An. 4. 1. 20. 
 
 4. Melon, a mob, tumult, uproar ; Luke 
 
 22, 6 aTfp o^Xou. Acts 24, 18 ov peru o^Xot, 
 ov8f fifTa 3opv/3ou. Suid. o^Xou Tapa^ijs- 
 Xen. Hell. 4. 4. 11. + 
 
 OftUpCO/ACl) aros, TO, (o^updcB, oxypos, 
 ?^<a,) a fortress, strong-hold, pr. Sept. for 
 1S3? Josh. 19, 29. Is. 34, 13; rniS? 
 2 K. 22, 2. Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 3. In N. T. 
 trop. of strong arguments or imaginations 
 with which one fortifies himself against the 
 gospel, 2 Cor. 10, 4 ; comp. v. 5 and 1 Cor. 
 3, 20. So Sept. for TS Prov. 21, 22; tsa 
 Prov. 10, 29. 
 
otydpiov 
 
 538 
 
 ov, TO, dim. from TO ofyov, 
 fco,) Lat. opsonium, i. e. any thing cook 
 ed and eaten with bread, as meat, etc. Tob. 
 7, 8. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 4 ; later espec. fish, 
 Sept. for yi Num. 11, 22. Plut. Symp. 4. 
 4. 2, TroXXtoi UVTO>V (jijscav, (KVfvivTjKfv 6 t^Sus 
 uovov, *) paXtcrrd ye, o^rov KaXelcrSiai. Thuc. 
 1. 138. See Diet, of Antt. art. Opsonium. 
 Hence in N. T. TO o^rapiov, a fish; 
 John 6, 9 Silo fyapia (comp. Luke 9, 13). 
 John 6, 11. 21, 9. 10. 13. So Plut. de 
 tuend. Sanit. 7. Athen. IX. p. 385. b, 
 lx%vos fjLeydXov . . . KOI eiTTuiros Tufa IJO KTTOJ 
 flvai tyapiov KT\. 
 
 o^e, adv. (kindr. CTTO/UU, OTT/O-W,) late, 
 after long time, Horn. Od. 7. 155. ib. 23. 7. 
 Hesych. o^e juera TTO\VV xpovov, /SpaSe eoy. 
 Also c. gen. fye qXi/aa?, late in life, ^El. 
 V. H. 2. 23 ; <tye rfs fjp-fpas Thuc. 4. 93 ; 
 absol. late in the day or evening, late even 
 ing, Dem. 1303. 14. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 3. 
 Ammonius p. 108, eoWpa, 77 fjitTci TTJV Svcriv 
 rjXibv u>pa o^e Se, 17 /Ltera TTO\V rijy 8v(Tf cos, 
 /cat /caSoXcv yuera TroXvi \povov. Hence in 
 N. T. 
 
 1. Absol. late, late evening ; Mark 11, 19 
 Koi ore o\^e lyevfTo. Put for the evening 
 watch, Mark 13, 35; see in <bv\a.K.r) no. 4. 
 Sept for S"i5> MS Gen. 24, 11. See above. 
 
 2. With a genit. i. q. at the end of, at the 
 dose of, after. Matt. 28, 1 o^e fie <ra/3,3a- 
 Tiav, Trj fTri(pci><TKOv(rr) els fJ-iav KT\. at the 
 end of the sabbath, i. e. after the sabbath, 
 the sabbath being now ended, i. q. Mark 
 16, 1 SiayfvofjLevov TOV o-o-/3,3arov. For the 
 gen. see Buttm. 132. 5. b. Philostr. Vit. 
 Apoll. 4. 1 8 o\^e p.va-Ti]pi<av after the myste 
 ries. Philostr. de Ludis Pythiis, erra TTJV 
 uywviav Trape^eti/ TTJV yvp.vr]V, 6\^e TOVT<OV. 
 ib. o\j/e TO>V Tpco tKcoy. Wetst. ad loc. 
 
 6 -^6/xo?, ov, 6, 17, adj. (o-v/^e ,) late, latter. 
 James 5, 7 etas uv \afiri i<fTov Trpta tpov nal 
 c\^t^ioj/, the early and latter rain ; i.e. the 
 first or autumnal showers, which begin to 
 fall in Palestine after the middle of October 
 at the beginning of the rainy season ; and 
 the latest or vernal showers, which fall in 
 March and April before the harvest ; see 
 Bibl. Res. in Pal. II. p. 97. Sept. for 
 CJlp^Jt H-Vh Deut. 11, 14. Jer. 5, 24. 
 Joel2J 23. Horn. II. 2. 325. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 10. Xen. (Ec. 17. 4, 5. It is strictly poetic 
 for ox/fios, but is used by later prose writers, 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 51, 52. 
 
 OA/rio?, a, ov, (oS//-<r,) 1. late, Mark 11. 
 11 o-^rias fj$r] ovvrfs Trjs 3>pas, i. 6. it being 
 now late evening ; comp. in or|^e . Pol. 7. 
 16. 4. Dem. 1301. pen. Thuc. 3. 74. 
 
 2. Subst. fern. 17 o^i a (sc. a>pd) erennig 
 pr. late evening. The Hebrews reckoned 
 two evenings ; so in the phrase n^a nsn "pa 
 between the two evenings, as marking the in 
 terval or portion of the day during which 
 the paschal lamb was to be killed, Ex. 12, 6. 
 Lev. 23, 5. Num. 9, 3. 5 ; and also the even 
 ing sacrifice was to be offered, Ex. 29, 39. 
 41. Num. 28, 4. The time thus marked was 
 regarded by the Karaites and Samaritans as 
 being the interval between sunset and 
 dark ; Reland de Samar. 22, in Diss. 
 Misc. T. II. But the Pharisees and Rab- 
 binists, according to the Mishnah (Pesach 
 5. 3), held the first evening to commence 
 with the declining sun ; and the second 
 evening with the setting sun. This latter 
 view was the prevailing one in the time of 
 our Lord ; the hour of evening sacrifice 
 and prayer being then the ninth hour, or 3 
 p. m. Acts 3, 1 ; and the paschal lamb 
 being regularly killed between the ninth 
 and eleventh hours, Jos. B. J. 6. 9. 3. A 
 like distinction of two evenings was made 
 by the Greeks, viz. 8ei\rj rrpu>ia, oei\i] tyia, 
 Hdot. 8. 6, 9. Hesych. 8(i\rj Trpoua rj fier 
 apicrTOV u>pa Sei Xr? o\|/-/a, 17 Trepi Svo iv 
 rj\iov. Eustath. ad Od. 17. p. 285, 17 fyia 
 SetXij, ro Trepl T]\IOV 8va-p.rjS SelXr) irpoua. 
 TO fv%vs fK nfo-TjuPpias. See Heb. Lex. 
 art. tins . Gr. Harm. p. 211 sq. In N. T. 
 r] fyia marks : a) The former evening. 
 Sei X?; Trpana, in Matt. 14, 15 (comp. v. 23 
 et Mark 6, 35). Matt. 27, 57. Mark 4, 35. 
 15, 42. b) The latter evening, 8ei\r] 
 fyia, in Matt. 8, 16 et Mark 1, 32. Matt. 
 14, 23 comp. 15. Matt. 16, 2. 20, 8. 26, 20. 
 Mark 6, 47. 14, 17. John 6, 16. 20, 19. 
 
 cn/a?, ecos, 17, (oS/ o/iut,) the sight, faculty 
 of seeing, Pol. 3. 99. 7. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 
 14; a sight, appearance, thing seen, Jos. 
 Ant. 14. 15. 11. Xen. An. 6. 1. 9. Hence 
 in N. T. aspect, looks, i. e. 
 
 1. the visage, face, countenance ; John 
 11,44 TJ o\lns avrou crov8apla> TrepieSe &rro. 
 Rev. 1,16 TJ o. avTov us 6 17X10?. Sept. for 
 fun 19 Gen. 24, 16. 29, 17. ^El. V. H. 4. 
 28. Dem. 413 pen. 
 
 2. external appearance, show, John 7, 24 
 p.rj KpivfTe KOTO. 6 \|/w Jos. B. J. 3. 5. 2. 
 Thuc. 6. 46. 
 
 O^rdOVlOV) ov, TO, (o^aiffai ; otyov, u>v(o- 
 /mi,) Lat. opsonium, pr. whatever is bought 
 to be eaten with bread, see in fyapiov, and 
 comp. o^wi/e co JE>\. V. H. 3. 34. Xen. Mem. 
 3. 14. 1. Hired soldiers were at first paid 
 partly in rations of meat, grain, fruit ; see 
 CJES. B. Gall. 1. 23. 1. Pol. 6. 39. 12 sq, 
 
539 
 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Stipendium. Adam s Rom. 
 Ant. p. 393. Hence in N. T. TO o ^ &> v t o v , 
 a stipend, wages, rations, pr. of soldiers, 
 Luke 3, 14 dpKfTcrSe rots fyvviois vp.a/v. 
 
 1 Cor. 9, 7. (1 Mace. 3, 28. Pol. 6. 39. 12. 
 Dion. Hal. Ant. 9. 17.) Trop. and genr. 
 wages, recompense, 2 Cor. 11,8. Rom. 6, 
 23 ra o\|/-. rrjs apapTias. 
 
 77. 
 
 ), f. euo-a>, (Trayi s.) to lay a 
 snare for, to snare, to trap ; pr. Sept. Ecc. 
 9, 12. In N. T. trop. to ensnmre, to entan 
 gle, e. g. by difficult and perplexing ques 
 tions, c. ace. Matt. 22, 15 Iva irayiSfvo-cao-iv 
 avrbv (v Xoyw. So Symm. Prov. 6, 2 eVa- 
 yiSfv Srjs fV pfjuao-i o-ro/iaroj (rov, for Heb. 
 pdpl D. Sept. 1 Sam. 28, 9. 
 
 Tray 19, iSor , f], (irrjyvvp.t, ) pr. any thing 
 which fixes and holds fast. In N. T. 
 
 1. a snare, trap, gin; Luke 21, 35 a>s 
 nayls yap eViXeuo-erat, as a snare shall it 
 come upon them, i. e. suddenly, unexpect 
 edly. Sept for "9 Ecc. 9, 12. Am. 3, 
 5. So Ecclus. 27, 20. Anthol. Gr. IV. p. 
 38. Aristoph. Av. 194, 527. 
 
 2. Trop. Trayis rot) Sta/3oXov, snare of the 
 devil, i. e. wile, stratagem, 1 Tim. 3, 7. 
 2 Tim. 2, 26; absol. 1 Tim. ti, 9. Spec. 
 a cause of destruction, Rom. 11, 9 ytvrftr]- 
 T(a i] Tpdn-efa alriav (Is Tray/Sa, quoted from 
 Ps. 69, 23 where Sept for HQ ; also Josh. 
 23, 13. Is. 24, 18. So 1 Mace. 5, 4. 
 
 , aroj, TO, (7rdo-xa>,7ru3eli ,) what 
 is suffered, suffering, i. q. 7ra2or. 
 
 1." Pr. nil suffered, affliction, distress; 
 once Sing. Heb. 2, 9 8m TO 7rd3^/ia TOU 3a- 
 raTou, i. e. a suffering even unto death, the 
 genit. being explanatory. (Xen. Hi. 1. 36.) 
 Elsewhere only Plur. TO Tra^para, suffer 
 ings, calamities, Rom. 8, 18. 2 Cor. 1, 5 
 Ka3o>r 7rrpto-o-fvi TO ?ra3i7/iaTa ToC Xpierroi} 
 (Is fjpas, i. e. the sufferings of Christ as th e 
 mystical head of the church, of whom 
 Christians are members, with whom they 
 suffer; comp. Phil. 3, 10. Rom. 8, 17. Also 
 2 Cor. 1, 6. 7. Phil. 3, 10. Col. 1, 24. 2 Tim. 
 3, 11. Heb. 2, 10. 10, 32. 1 Pet. 1, 11. 4,13. 
 5, 1. 9. So Jos. Ant. 2. 14. 2. Xen. Eq. 
 9.4. 
 
 2. Meton. passion, an affection of mind, 
 emotion ; Gal. 5, 24 rfjv a-upxa <ri>v TO IS Tra- 
 3^/zacrt KCU TaTr eVi3v/ii air. Rom. 7, 5. 
 Plut. Pomp. 8 fin. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 17. 
 
 Tra^^ro?, ou, o, ff. adj. (mio-x^, 7ra3fli>,) 
 liable to suffering, Plut. Pelop. 16 TO 3i^- 
 rbv KCU ira2T)T<ii>. Id. Numa 8. In N. T. 
 destined to suffer ; Acts 26, 23 Xtycot/ . . d 
 iraS^Tos 6 Xpioro f, that Christ must needs 
 
 suffer, i. e. according to the prophets ; comp. 
 Luke 24, 26. 
 
 7Taj09, (os, ovs, TO, (vrdcr^co, TraZelv.) 
 suffering, affliction, calamity, Jos. Ant. 2. 
 14. 2. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 33. In N.T. pas 
 sion, i. e. affection of mind, emotion, espec. 
 lust, concupiscence. .Rom. 1, 26 TrdS?; dri- 
 fiias, rile affections, infamous lusts, Col. 3, 
 5. 1 Thess. 4, 5. So Test. XII Patr. p. 
 610. Jos. Ant. 2. 4. 5; genr. Hdian. 5. 4. 
 2. Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 8. 
 
 O v, 6, (Traiy, aywyij, ayca.) 
 a pedagogue, i. e. usually a slave or freedman 
 to whose care the boys of a family were 
 committed at the age of six or seven years, 
 who watched over their physical and moral 
 training, and accompanied them to the pub 
 lic schools and elsewhere, or provided them 
 with teachers, but did not himself instruct 
 them ; i. q. eVtVpon-os q. v. Plut. de Puer. 
 educ. J 7. Xen. Lac. 2. 1 , 2. ib. 3. 1 . Comp. 
 Diet, of Antt. art. P&dagogus. Adam s Rom. 
 Ant. p. 37, 511. In N. T. genr. a tutor, 
 guardian, with the idea of authority, 1 Cor. 
 4, 15. Trop. of the Mosaic law, Gal. 3, 
 24. 25. 
 
 iov, TO, (dim. TTCUS,) a boy, 
 lad, John 6, 9. Matt. 11,16 Rec. Sept. for 
 l!?. Gen. 42, 22; 153 Gen. 22, 5. 12. Pol. 
 10. 47. 7, 9. Plato. Conv. 207. d ; of a 
 servant boy ^El. V. H. 2. 2. 
 
 Traioeia, as, f], (TraiSevo),) the training 
 of a child, ^Eschyl. Theb. 18. Plato Phced. 
 107. d. In N. T. genr. 
 
 1. education, discipline, instruction, as 
 consisting in teaching, admonition, rewards, 
 punishment. Eph. 6, 4 fKTpifare avra (v 
 naio da . . Kvpiov, i. e. such training as the 
 Lord approves and requires. 2 Tim. 3, 16 
 TT. f; (t> StKaioo-vin]. Hdian. 5. 7. 13. Dem. 
 938. 10. Xen. Cyr. 1. 1. 6. 
 
 2. By Hebr. correction, chastisement, Heb. 
 12, 5. 7. 8. 11. Sept. and "iota Prov. 3, 
 11. 22, 15. Ecclus. 18, 14. See in n-m- 
 SCUM no. 2. 
 
 TraiSevTrjs, {5, 6, (jraiSfuo),) a teacher, 
 master, tutor, pr. of boys, PI ut.de Puer. ednc, 
 $ 7. Plato Legg. 835. a. In N. T. 
 
 1 . Genr. a teacher, instructor ; Rom. 2, 
 
540 
 
 20 iraiSfVTrjv a(pp6vav. Ecclus. 13, 19. 
 Plato Rep. 49J. d. 
 
 2. By Hebr. a corrector, chastiser, Heb. 
 12, 9. Sept. for 10W Hos. 5, 2. Psalt. 
 Salom. 8, 35. See in TratSeuu no. 2. 
 
 TraiSevd), f. eva-co, (Traty.) to bring up or 
 rear a child, Soph. Fragm. 433 avrr)v tiral- 
 Sfva-e yaXa. In N. T. and genr. 
 
 1 . to train up, to educate, to teach ; so c. 
 cat. of thing or manner, Pass. Acts 7, 22 
 f7rai8fv%r) Matvcrrjs ivacrr) <ro<pia A-lyvrrriw. 
 So C. Kara 22, 3, see in aKpiftela. (Jos. C. 
 Apion 1. 4 ypa./j.fj.a(rtv fTrai8fv%r)crav. So C. 
 acc. rei Diod. Sic. 1. 81. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 
 23.) Spec, to teach, to admonish, by word 
 or deed, c. acc. of pers. 2 Tim. 2, 25 eV 
 irpaorijTi iraidevovra. Tit. 2, 12. Pass. c. 
 inf. 1 Tim. 1,20 tva TratSeuScocri HTJ /SXacr^i/- 
 /*eli>, comp. Sept. Ps. 2, 10. So Wisd. 6, 
 25. JEL V. H. 1. 34. Xen. Hell. 6. 3. 11. 
 
 2. By Hebr. to correct, to chastise, to 
 chasten, e. g. as children, Heb. 12, 7. 10. 
 (Sept. and "to? Prov. 19, 18. 29, 17.) 
 Spoken of chastening from God by afflic 
 tions, calamities, 1 Cor. 11, 32. 2 Cor. 6, 9. 
 Rev. 3, 19. Heb. 12, 6 ; corrip. "Prov. 3, 12. 
 (Sept. and 1O^ Lev. 26, 18. Jer. 10, 24.) 
 Hence of prisoners, to scourge, Luke 23, 
 16.22 TratSfvcras ovv avrov OTroXvcra) . Comp. 
 Acts 16, 22. This use of the word is found 
 only in Sept. and N. T. So Phavorin. mu- 
 
 awl rov Ko\dfiv oiifids TU>I> pwropwv 
 v, dXXa Trapa poin] rfj Sei a ypafpfj TOVTO 
 
 (VplCTKfTal. 
 
 TraiSicfeev, adv. (rrais, muSiW,) from a 
 child, from childhood, Mark 9, 21. SoTraiSo- 
 Sfy, Synes. de Prov. p. 91. c. Joann. Zonar. 
 IV. 184. a. Earlier writers said e< 7rai86s 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 2 ; or e* Trai8iov Sept. Is. 
 46, 3. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 8. Comp. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 93. 
 
 TraiOlOV, ov, TO, (dim. rratf,) a little 
 child, either male or female ; Plur. ra TTCU- 
 8ia, little children. 
 
 1. Pr. and genr. e. g. of a child or chil 
 dren recently born, a babe, infant; Luke 18, 
 16. 17 TO. iraiSia, comp. v. 15 where it is 
 TafiptyT). Matt. 19, 13. 14. Mark 10, 13. 
 
 14. 15. John 16, 21. Also of those more 
 advanced, Matt. 11. 16 in later edit. 14, 21. 
 
 15, 38. 18, 2. 3. 4. 5. Mark 7, 28. Luke 7, 
 32. 9,47. 48. 11, 7. Sept. for ^ Gen. 
 30, 26. 1 Sam. 1,2; 5)B Gen. 45, 19. So 
 Hdian. 7. 9. 19. Luc. D. Mort. 10. 12. 
 Spec, a male child, boy, e. g. recently 
 born, Matt. 2, 8. 9. 11. 13 bis. 14. 20 bis. 21. 
 Luke 1, 59. 66. 76. 80. 2, 17. 21. 27. 40. 
 Heb. 11, 23. (Sept. for *i?5 Ex. 2, 8. 9.) 
 
 Also more advanced, Mark 9, 24. 36. 37 
 John 4, 49, comp. v. 47. Sept. for lVj 
 Gen. 21, 14. 15 ; i?3 Gen. 21, 17. 18. So 
 JEl V. H. 1. 34. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 10. Also 
 of a female child, a girl, maiden, partly 
 grown, Mark 5, 39. 40 bis. 41. 
 
 2. Trop. 1 Cor. 14, 20 ^17 muSia yiYeo-3* 
 (ppfaiv, be not babes in understanding, i. e. 
 \veak, puerile. As an endearing appellation 
 for the followers of Christ, Heb. 2, 13. 14; 
 comp. Is. 8, 18. So in direct address, Voc. 
 TratSt a, children, q. d. carissimi, John 21, 5. 
 1 John 2, 13 [14]. 18. 
 
 TrmS/CTtf?/, TJS, fj, (dim. Tralr,) a girl, 
 young maiden, free-born Sept. Ruth 4, 12. 
 Pol. 14. 7. 6. Xen. An. 4. 3. 11. In N. T. 
 a handmaid, bond-maid, a female slave or 
 servant, Matt. 26, 69. Mark 14, 66. 69. 
 Luke 12, 45. 22, 56. John 18, 17. Acts 12, 
 13. 16, 16. Gal. 4, 22 tva en TTJS -rraiSio-Krjs, 
 KOI cva fK rrjs e XevSe pay. V. 23. 30 bis. 31. 
 Sept. for nnx Gen. 21, 10 ; nnsffl Gen. 16, 
 1.2; espec. 1 Sam. 25, 41. So Dem. 1351. 
 3. Hdot. 1. 93. See Phryn. et Lob. p. 239. 
 
 TTatyi), f. 7rat o/iai, (jraiy,) aor. 1 eTraicra, 
 later form erraiga, Buttm. { 114; pr. to play 
 or sport as a child, Luc. D. Deor. 4. 3. 
 Xen. Mag. Eq. 5. 10. In N. T. to play, to 
 sport, with singing, leaping, dancing, as 
 connected with worship; 1 Cor. 10, 7 e /ca- 
 3i(rei> 6 Xaoy (payt iv Kal Trielv, KOI 
 
 quoted from Ex. 32, 6 where Sept. 
 for pHS. Sept. also for pn&3 J u dg. 16, 25. 
 2 Sam. 6, 5. So Horn. Od. 23. 147. Hes. 
 Scut. 277. 282. Aristoph. Ran. 410. 
 
 7TO.4?, TraiSdf, 6, 17, a child, male or fe 
 male ; a boy, youth; a girl, maiden; Plur. 
 oi TralSey, children; spoken of all ages 
 from infancy up to full grown youth ; see 
 Matt. 2, 16, also Acts 20, 12 comp. v. 9. 
 
 1. Pr. and genr. Matt. 2, 16 ai/eIXe irdv- 
 ras TOVS TraiSay TOVS (V B^SXee /i . . . drro 
 SifTovs Kai Karutrtpco. 21, 15. Sing, o irais 
 Matt. 17, 18. Luke 2, 43. 9, 42. John 4, 
 51 6 Trots (TOV fj, comp. v. 46 where it is 
 vios- Acts 20, 12, comp. v. 9 where it is 
 veavias. Also 17 Trals Luke 8, 51. 54, 
 comp. v. 42 where it is Svydrnp ws trmv 
 SwSeKa. Sept. genr. for ib^ 2 K. 2, 24 ; 6 
 TT. for *,a Prov. 4, 1 ; 17 TT. for nrs Ruth 2, 
 6; rnSS/Gen. 24,28.57. 34, 12. Jos. Ant. 
 9. 7. 5 Kai apptvfs airy KOI STjXeuu naifies 
 fyevovro. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 20 ; 6 THUS 
 Hdian. 1. 17. 6. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 1 ; 17 Tralj 
 Luc. D. Deor. 22. 1. Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 8. 
 
 2. Like Engl. boy, Lat. puer, put for a 
 servant, e. g. a) Pr. and genr. i. q. 8ov- 
 
rraia) 
 
 541 
 
 Xor, a servant, slave, Matt. 8, 6. 8. 13, 
 conip. v. 9 where it is SoCXor. Luke 7, 7, 
 comp. v. 3. 12, 45. 15, 26. Sept. for 133 
 Gen. 9, 26. 27. 26, 15. So JE\. V. H. 4. 
 22. Xen. Mem. 3. 13. 6. b) an attendant, 
 minister, as of a king, Matt. 14, 2 dirfv 
 [ HpwSqj] Tots iraia\v avTov. Sept. and 
 "132 Gen. 41, 38. Jer. 36, 24. So 1 Mace. 
 1,"6. Diod. Sic. 17. 36. c) 6 TTO IS rov 
 5(ov,the servant of God, i. q. fil rn 139, 
 see Heb. Lex. 13S> no. 2 ; spoken of a min 
 ister or ambassador of God, called and be 
 loved of God and sent by him to perform 
 any service; e. g. of David, Luke 1, 69. 
 Acts 4, 25; of Israel, Luke 1, 54, comp. 
 Sept. and 135 Is. 41, 8. 9. 44, 1. 2. 45, 4. 
 Also of Jesus the Messiah, Matt. 12, 18 
 iSov 6 TTOIS p.ov, in allusion to Is. 42, 1 
 where Sept. and 133) ; also Acts 3, 13. 26. 
 4, 27. 30. Sept. and 133 Is. 49, 6. 52, 
 13. al. 
 
 Trato), f. 7raiJ7<ru and n-alo-ea, to strike, to 
 smite, e. g. with the fist, a rod, sword ; c. 
 ace. Matt. 26, 68. Luke 22, 64. Mark 14, 
 47 et John 18, 10 eiraio-e rbv SoCXoi/. Sept. 
 for nsn Num. 22, 28. 2 Sam. 20, 10. So 
 Hdian. 4. 13. 11. Xen. Cyr. 7. 3. 6. Of a 
 scorpion, to strike, to sting, Rev. 9, 5. 
 
 TlaKartavr}, i)j, 17, Pacatiana, i. e. 
 Phrygia Pacatiana, the western part of 
 Phrygia as divided by the Romans, see in 
 Qpvyia ; only in the spurious subscription 
 
 1 Tim. 6, 22. See Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. 
 I. ii. p. 202. Cellarii Notit. Orb. Ant. II. p. 
 144, 149. 
 
 TrakaL, adv. 1. long ago, of old, former 
 ly; Matt. 11, 21. Luke 10, 13. Heb. 1, 1 
 jrdXcu 6 3eoj XaXqo-aj rots Trarpdo-iv. Jude 
 4. Hence 01 TrtiXat as adj. the old, former, 
 
 2 Pet 1, 9; comp. Buttm. $ 125. 6. Jos. 
 Ant. 11. 3. 1. Hdian. 1. 1. 1. Xen. Vect. 
 
 4. 2; c. art. Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 14. 
 
 2. Of time just past, as related to the 
 present moment, now long, already long, a 
 wliik; Mark 15, 44 6 8e IliXdro? . . . eTnj- 
 pwrrjcrfv avrov fl TrdXai d-rr&avfv. Hdian. 7. 
 
 5. 1. Plat. Phaedo $ 27. p. 79. c. Xen. Cyr. 
 8. 7. 1. 
 
 TraXcuo?. d, 6v, (TrdXai,) old, aged, not 
 new. 
 
 1. In age or time, old, former, not recent, 
 e. g- olvos Luke 5, 39 bis ; vp.r) 1 Cor. 5, 
 7. 8 ; 810377*77 2 Cor. 3, 14 ; <WoX?j 1 John 
 2, 7 bis ; 6 TraX. avSpajTroy Rom. 6, 6. Eph. 
 4, 22. Col. 3, 9 ; see in avZpanros no. 3. b. 
 Sept. for $* Lev. 25, 22. 2 Mace. 6, 21. 
 Hdian. 5. 5. 16. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 33. 
 
 2. From use, old, worn out, e. g. yicmo 
 Matt. 9, 16. Mark 2, 21 bis. Luke 5, 36 
 bis ; dfm>i Matt. 9, 17. Mark 2, 22. Luke 
 5, 37; genr. Matt. 13, 52. Sept. for nba 
 Josh. 9, 4. 5. Jer. 38, 11. Soph. CEd. R. 
 290. Lys. 179. 37. 
 
 TrahaioTT)?, rrjros, f), (TroXcuor,) oldness, 
 antiquatcdness ; Rom. 7, 6 [eVj iroXaior^rt 
 ypdp.fj.aros, i. q. tv ypdp,p.an TW TraXaiw, 
 comp. in ypdp^a no. 2. d. Of extreme old 
 age, second childhood, Eurip. Helen. 1065. 
 ^Eschin. 33. 34. 
 
 TTaXaioca, >, f. cbo-o), (TroXaioy.) to mak& 
 old; Pass, to wax old, to become old; pr. in 
 age, Act. Sept. Job 9, 5. Pass. Athen. I. p. 
 33. a, oivos 7re7raXaia>/xeW. Luc. Philopatr. 
 22. In N. T. from use, Pass, to wax old, 
 to be worn out; Luke 12, 33 /SaXdwia ^ 
 TraXaiovfieva. Heb. 1, 11 quoted from Ps. 
 102, 27. Heb. 8, 13 TO 8e Trdh.aiovp.fvov *ai 
 yrjpda-Kov, comp. Sept. Lam. 3, 4. So 
 Sept. Pass, for nba Deut. 29, 5. Josh. 9, 
 13. Ps. 102, 27. Is. T 50, 9. Trop. to make 
 old or antiquated, to declare obsolete, e. g. 
 a law or covenant, c. ace. Heb. 8, 13 Treira- 
 Xatco/cf TTJV TrpwTTjv sc. 8ia%f)KT)v. Comp. 
 Lat. antiquare legem Liv. 5. 30. Cic. de 
 Off. 2. 21. Adam s Rom. Ant p. 93. 
 
 TraX?7, r/s, rj, (TrdXXo),) a wrestling, pr. 
 JE\. V. H. 4. 15. Xen. An. 4. 8. 27. In 
 N. T. trop. struggle, conflict, Eph. 6, 12. 
 
 7ra\l r y<yeVO ia) as, 17, (TrdXii/, -yeWcriy,) 
 new birth, regeneration, reproduction, Luc. 
 Muse, encom. 7. Plut. de esu Cam. 2. 4. 
 Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Trop. in a moral sense, new birth, i. e. 
 regeneration, a change by grace from a car 
 nal nature to a Christian life, from sinful to 
 holy affections, Tit. 3, 5. Comp. in dvaKai- 
 VOMTIS, dvayevvdco, ytwdca. 
 
 2. Spec, renovation, restoration, restitu 
 tion, pr. from decay or ruin to a former 
 state, equiv. to dnoKardo-rao-is q. v. In N. 
 T. spoken of the complete external mani 
 festation of the Messiah s kingdom, when 
 all tilings are to be delivered from their 
 present corruption and restored to spiritual 
 purity and splendour ; comp. in /3a(riXet a 
 no. 3. Matt 19, 28 tv rfj TroXtyyei/ecrta, orav 
 Ka^io-rj 6 vlot rov dv%p. eVl SpoVou 86rjs 
 avrov, comp. Acts 3, 21. Jos. Ant. 11. 3. 
 9 TraXtyy. rrjs irarpio oi, i. e. the re-occupa 
 tion of Judea after the exile. So Cicero 
 calls the restoration of his dignity and for 
 tune TrdXtyyfvevia, ad Att 6. 6. 
 
 7rd\iv } adv. back, back agiin, again, pr. 
 as implying a return balk to a former place, 
 
542 
 
 state, act, or the like, i. q. re- in Lat. and 
 Engl. 
 
 1. Of place, espec. after verbs of motion, 
 bach, again ; Mark 2, 1 KOI iraXiv eto-J 
 
 fls KCTT. 5, 21. John 6, 15 d 
 7rdXii> tls TO opos. 11, 7. 14, 3 TrriXiv ep 
 jiat I come again, I will return. Acts 18, 
 21.2 Cor. 1, 16. 13, 2 e ai/ eX3a> ek ro TTO- 
 \iv. Phil. 1, 26 fita rrjs e^s Trapovo-ias ?ra- 
 Xii/ irpbs vpas. Gal. 1, 17. 4, 9. al. So 
 Ceb. Tab. 29. Dem. 346. 19. Xen. An. 4. 
 
 3. 20. Also \a/j.pdvfiv nd\iv, to take back 
 again, John 10, 17. 18. Acts 10, 16. (Xen. 
 An. 4. 2. 13.) Acts 11, 10 ; olK.o8op.f1v -nd- 
 \iv Gal. 2, 18. 
 
 2. Of time, again, another lime, once 
 more. a) Genr. Matt. 4, 8 TroXii/ rcnpa- 
 \anfidvei avrov 6 StajSoXoj. 20, 5. Luke 
 23, 20. John 4, 13.. 16, 16. Acts 27, 28. 
 Rom. 8, 15. Heb. 5, 12. 6, 6. James 5, 18. 
 al. saep. Pleonast. ird\iv C K Seurepov, 
 Engl. again the second time, Matt. 26, 42. 
 Acts 10, 15. (Ml. V. H. 1. 4. Hdian. 6. 7. 
 1. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 15.) Also, at another 
 time, genr. John 1, 35. 8, 12. 21. Acts 17, 
 32. Including also perhaps the idea of 
 place, i. q. again in another place, Matt. 
 
 4, 7. John 12, 39. Rom. 15, 10. 11. 12. 
 Heb. 2, 13. b) Hence as a continuative 
 particle, connecting circumstances which 
 refer to the same subject, again, once more. 
 further; Matt. 5, 33 TrdXiv tfKetxntre, 13, 
 44 sq. 18, 19. Luke 13, 20. John 12, 22. 
 1 Cor. 12, 21. Heb. 1, 5. 6. 2, 13. al. 
 (Diod. Sic. 13. 25. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 18.) 
 Also where there is an implied opposition 
 or antithesis, again, on the other hand, con 
 tra, Matt. 4, 7. 2 Cor. 10, 7. Gal. 5, 3. 
 1 John 2, 8. So Hdian. 4. 8. 10. Pol. 10. 
 9. 1. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 18. -f 
 
 TTa^TrX if&ei, adv. (Tra/zTrX^Sijs ; iras, 
 7rX?7?5oy ; ) the ivhole multitude together, all al 
 once, Luke 23, 18. Plato Grit. 111. a, si 
 sana lect. Suid. 
 dvrl TOV TroXu. 
 
 Tra/iTroXX?;, Tra^TroXu, (Tray, 
 us,) very much, very great, vast, Mark 
 8, 1 Tra/xTToXXov o^Xov ovTos. Jos. Ant. 7. 
 5. 3. Luc. Hermot. 61. Xen. Cyr. 1. 1. 3. 
 
 IIa/Ji<f)V\la, as, fj, Pamphylia, a district 
 of Asia Minor, bounded E. by Cilicia ; N. 
 by Pisidia ; W. by Lycia ; and S. by a part 
 of the Mediterranean here called the Sea of 
 Pamphylia. Of its cities only Perga is 
 mentioned in N. T. Acts 2, 10. 13, 13. 14, 
 24. 15, 38. 27, 5. See Strabo 14. p. 667. 
 Plin. H. N. 5. 26. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. I. 
 ii. p. 193. 
 
 , O v, , (frai/Soxevy,) pr 
 place where all are received, i. e. an inn 
 in the East a menzil or meddfeh, kh&n, cara 
 vanserai, Luke 10, 34. Comp. in Kara- 
 \vfjia, and see Bibl. Res. in Pal. II. p. 122. 
 III. p. 431. Epict. Ench. 11. Luc. Philo- 
 patr. 9. Pol. 2. 15. 5. The better Attic 
 form was iravo oKelov, see Phryn. et Lob. p. 
 307. 
 
 /iat,) pr. one who receives all, i. e. the 
 keeper of an inn or caravanserai, a host. 
 Luke 10, 35 ; see in TravSoxelov. Pol. 2. 15. 
 6. Plut. de San. tuend. 15. The more At 
 tic form was TravSoKevs, see Phryn. et Lob. 
 p. 307. 
 
 TTavriyvplS) tSo?, f], (TTCS-, a-yvpLs, dyopd,~) 
 pr. an assembly or convocation of the whole 
 people in order to celebrate any public fes 
 tival or solemnity, as the public games or 
 sacrifices; hence genr. a high festival, pub 
 lic convocation, joyful assembly, Jos. Ant. 
 2. 4. 3. Diod. Sic. 2. 55. Xen. Hi. 1.11 
 In N. T. only Heb. 12, 23 /cat ^vpida-iv, 
 ayye Xcoi rravrj-yvpei KOI eKK\T]o-Lq Trpwroro- 
 KWV KT\. and to countless throngs, even the 
 joyful assembly of angels, sc. as hymning 
 the praises of God around his throne ; comp. 
 Rev. 5, 11 sq. Ps. 148,2. Dan. 7, 10. Sept. 
 for IS ia Ez. 46, 11. Hos. 2, 11; rms 
 Am. 5, 21. 
 
 Travoitci, adv. (nds, OIK.OS, ) with all one s 
 household, Acts 16, 34. Sept Vat. for n^a 
 Ex. 1, 1. Jos. Ant 4. 4. 4. Jilschin. Dial". 
 Soc. 2. 1. Plato Eryx. 392. c. The Atti- 
 cists hold this to be a later form instead of 
 TravoiKLO. and TravoiKrjo-ia, Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 514 sq. 
 
 iravo7T\ia, or, 17, (TrawrXoy ; iras, 
 oTrXoi .) panoply, complete armour, offensive 
 and defensive, Luke 11. 22. Trop. of spi 
 ritual armour, Eph. 6, 1 1. 13. Sept. 2 Sam. 
 2, 21. ^El. V. H. 3. 24. Thuc. 3. 114. 
 
 TravovpyLd, as, f], (jravovpyos^) shrewd 
 ness, cunning, craftiness, Luke 20, 23 Kara- 
 vorjcras fie avrwv rrjv iravovpyiav. 1 Cor. 3, 
 19. 2 Cor. 4, 2. 11, 3. Eph. 4, 14. Sept. 
 for rta n? Josh. 9, 4. So Luc. D. Deor. 7. 
 1. Xen. An. 7. 5. 11. In late writers also 
 in a good sense, Sept. for f^ 1 ^ Prov. 1 , 4. 
 ^El. V. H. 2. 40. 
 
 Travovpyo?, O v, 6, f], adj. (nds, fpyov,) 
 pr. doing every thing ; hence shrewd, 
 cunning, crafty, 2 Cor. 12, 16. Sept. for 
 Wi Job 5, 12. So Luc. D. Deor. 2. 1. 
 Xen. An. 2. 5. 39. In late writers also in 
 a good sense, wise, Sept, for C3ri Prov, 
 
543 
 
 Trapa 
 
 13, 1 ; B11S Prov. 14, 8. 15; also Ecclus. 
 21, 12. 20. 
 
 7ravTa%r), adv. (iras.) every where, i. q. 
 jravraxov, for which it is read Acts 21, 28 
 Lachm. Soph. CEd. Col. 122. Plato Phjcd. 
 109. b. 
 
 adv. (Tray,) from all 
 sides, from every quarter, Mark 1, 45. 
 Hdian. 2. 8. 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 25. 
 
 Travra^ov, adv. (Tray.) in all places, 
 every where, Mark 16, 20. Luke 9, 6. Acts 
 17, 30. 21, 28. 24, 3. 28, 22. 1 Cor. 4, 17. 
 Jos. B. J. 1. 8. 4. Cebet. Tab. 7. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 6. 2. See Buttm. \ 116. n. 5. 
 
 /or, ovs, 6, fj, adj. (Tray, re- 
 Xoy r ) wholly ended, all complete ; hence 
 genr. perfect, entire, Jos. Ant. 10. 9. 3 TTCLV- 
 Tf\r]s aircoXda. Diod. Sic. 15. 17. Plato 
 Legg. 698. a. In N. T. only tls TO Travre- 
 \ts, pr. to completeness, i. e. adverbially, 
 completely, entirely, perfectly, Heb. 7, 25 ; 
 P.TJ eiy TO TraiTfXe y, not at all, Luke 13, 11. 
 See in tls no. 3. b. So Jos. Ant. 6. 2. 3. 
 ^El. V. H. 12. 20. 
 
 Trdvrr), adv. (Tray,) every where, Pol. 6. 
 
 23. 14. Xen. Hell. 1. 3. 21. In N. T. of 
 manner, in every way, in all ways; Acts 
 
 24, 3 KaTop3<wparci>i> yivo^vutv. . . Sta rrjs crijy 
 irpovoias Trdirrj KOL iravra^ov. So Pol. 25. 5. 
 9. Xen. Hell. 4. 7. 5. 
 
 /, adv. (Tray,) from every side 
 or quarter ; hence on every side, round 
 about, Luke 19, 43. Heb. 9,4. John 18, 20 
 Rec. Mark 1, 45 Lachm. Ecclus. 51, 10. 
 Jos. B. J. 4. 10. 1. Xen. Hi. 6. 8. 
 
 TTaVTOKparcop, opoy, 6, (Tray, Kparfco,} 
 the Omnipotent, the Almighty, only of God, 
 2 Cor. 6,18. Rev. 1,8. 4,8. 11,17. 15,3. 
 16, 7. 14. 19, 6. 15. 21, 22. Sept. where 
 Heb. niXSS 2 Sam. 5, 10. 7, 26. 27 ; for 
 "Hi* Job 5, 17. 8,5. Wisd. 7, 25. 2 Mace. 
 1, 25. Anth. Gr. IV. p. 151. 
 
 Travrore, adv. (Tray.) always, at all 
 limes, ever, Matt. 26, 11. Mark 14,7. Luke 
 
 15, 31. 18, 1. John 6, 34. 2 Cor. 2, 14. al. 
 ssep. Wisd. 19, 18. Dion. Hal. Ant. 11. 
 14. Hdian. 3. 9. 13. Only in later writers, 
 for the earlier aarorf, Sturz de Dial. Mac. 
 p. 187 sq. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 103. -f 
 
 7raiTG)9} adv. (Tray.) wholly, altogether, 
 entirely; 1 Cor. 5, 10 KOI oi> irdvras. 9, 10. 
 
 16, 12. So JEl V. II. 5. 14. Hdian. 2. 10. 
 1 1. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 13. Spec, by all means, 
 at all events, assuredly ; Luke 4. 23 rra i/rwy 
 
 (pf lTf p.01. ActS 18,21 Sfl fjLf TTUVTCOS TTjV 
 
 roprf]v iroirjo-ai tls Ifpoer. 21, 22. 28, 4. 
 
 1 Cor. 9, 22 Iva Tram-as nvas craxraj. In a 
 neg. reply, emphat. Rom. 3, 9 ov ndvras, 
 not at all, not in the least. So Tob. 1 4, 8. 
 JEl V. H. 1. 32. Plato Gorg. 497. c; in a 
 reply, Xen. Cyr. 8. 4, 10. 
 
 Trapd, a prep, governing the genitive, 
 dative, and accusative, with the primary 
 signif. beside, near by ; expressing thus the 
 relation of immediate vicinity or proximity. 
 See Passow in Trapa. Buttm. $ 147. n. 1. 
 Kiihner$297. Matth. 588. Winer } 51. 
 p. 437 sq. 
 
 1. With the GENITIVE, where as com 
 bined with the force of the genitive itself, 
 it has the sense from beside, from near, 
 from with, Fr. de chez, comp. Buttm. 132. 
 3. In prose writers and in N. T. only 
 with a gen. of person, implying a going 
 forth or proceeding from the side or pre 
 sence of any one ; thus taking the general 
 sense from ; comp. Viger. p. 580. Winer 
 
 1. c. p. 438. 
 
 1 . Pr. after verbs of motion, as of going, 
 coming, sending, and the like, from with, 
 from ; Mark 14,43 Trapa-ytWrat lovfiay . . . xat 
 o%\os TroXvy . . . Trapa TWV dp%iep(0)i>. Luke 
 8, 49. John 15, 26. 17, 8. So after emit, to 
 be from, to come from, John 6, 46. 7, 29 ; 
 impl. 1, 14. Of things, Luke 6, 19 Swapis 
 irap avrov e|^X3ev, a virtue went out from 
 him. Sept. Is. 57, 16. Luc. D. Deor. 24. 2. 
 Xen. An. 2. 2. 1. 
 
 2. Trop. after verbs of asking, receiving, 
 or those which imply these ideas, from ; 
 e. g. after verbs of asking, seeking, and the 
 like, Matt. 2. 4 eVuvSaz/ero Trap avrtav. \. 7. 
 20, 20 atToutra TI Trap avrov. Mark 8, 11. 
 Luke 12, 48. John 4, 9. Acts 3, 2. 9, 2. 
 James 1, 5. al. So Ml V. H. 7. 2. Xen. 
 An. 1. 3. 16. After verbs of hearing or 
 learning from any one, John 1, 41 duov- 
 crdvTcov Trapa I&dvvov. Acts 24, 8. 28, 22. 
 Gal. 1, 12. 1 Thess. 2, 13. 2 Tim. 1, 13. 
 
 2, 2. 3, 14 Trapa rives ep.a3fr. 2 John 4. al. 
 sa;p. So Luc. D. Mort. 13. 4. Hdian. 1.1.4. 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 6. After verbs of receiving, 
 obtaining, buying, being promised, and the 
 like, from any one ; Matt. 18, 19 yei^o-erai 
 avrols Trapa TOV Trarpos. (Xen. An. 7. 2. 25.) 
 Mark 12. 2 iva Trapa TUV yecopycHiv Xa/3^ KT\. 
 Luke 6, 34. John 5, 34. Acts 7, 16 J uvf)- 
 craro *A/3paap, . . . Trapa rS>v vlu>v Efj.fj.6p. 9, 
 14. 26, 12. Rom. 11, 27. Eph. 6,8. 2 Pet. 
 1,17. Rev. 3, 18. al. rap. So Luc. D. Deor. 
 5. 2. Ml V. H. 9. 25. Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 25. 
 After eivai expr. or impl. to be from 
 any one, i. e. to come, be given, bestowed, 
 from or by any one, John 17, 7 Trawa o<ra 
 8eS&)Kar pot, Trapa croC eVrt. Acts 26, 22 
 
Trapa 
 
 544 
 
 Trapa 
 
 3 John 3. So of hospitality or gifts, Luke 
 10, 7. Phil. 4, 18 TO. Trap" vp-ow. (Luc. D. 
 Mort. 13. 4 TCI ?rapa 7-77? TI/^V. Xen. Hell. 
 3. 1 . 6.) Or genr. to come, to be derived or 
 possessed, from any one, Mark 5, 26 ra Trap 
 aiiTrjs ndvra, i. e. all she had from herself, 
 all her own property. (Xen. Cyr. 5. 5. 13.) 
 Also of persons, of Trapa rivos pr. those from 
 near any one, i. e. his kindred, relatives, 
 Mark 3, 21. So Jos. Ant. 1. 10. 5. Luc. 
 Tox. 51. 
 
 3. Trop. c. gen. of pers. as the source, 
 author, director, from whom any thing pro 
 ceeds; is derived. a) Genr. Matt. 21. 42 
 Trapa Kvpiov eyei/ero avrrj, quoted from Ps. 
 118, 22 where Sept. for PXE. Luke 1, 45. 
 2, 1 f r}X3e Soy/xa Trapa Kaicrapoy. John 1, 
 6. Comp. Matth. { 588. So Luc. D. Mort. 
 1. 3. Plato Menex. 236. e. Xen. Hell. 2. 
 
 1. 27. b) Hence after passive verbs in 
 stead of wro , more espec. in later writers. 
 Acts 22, 30 TO TI KarrjyopdTai Trapa T>V 
 lovSaiW. Buttm. 134. 3. Winer 5 51. p. 
 438. So Luc. D. Deor. 4. 2. Plato Conv. 
 175. e. Xen. An. 1. 9. 1. 
 
 II. With the DATIVE, both of person and 
 thing, expressing rest or position by the side 
 of, near by, at, with ; and with a dat. Plur. 
 among ; see Passow, Buttm. Matth. 1. c. 
 Winer 52. p. 470. 
 
 1. Of Place, after verbs implying rest or 
 remaining in a place. a) Genr. and c. dat. 
 of thing, John 19, 25 elcrr^Kficrav 8e Trapa TW 
 a-Tavpw TOV l^croC. With dat. of pers. as 
 indicating place, Matt. 6, 1 /ito-3oi> OVK f xfre 
 Trapa TCO rraTpt vfj.u>v KT\. 22, 25 rfaav Se Trap 
 J7p.li/ fnTci dSeXcpot, i. e. with or among us. 
 28, 15. John 1,40. 8, 38. 14, 17. 23. 17, 
 5 bis [oira] Trapa trfauToj . . 77 fi%ov Trapa (rot. 
 Acts 10, 6. 1 Cor. 16, 2 Trap eauTaJ Tt3eVa>, 
 with himself, Fr. chez soi, at home. Acts 
 21, 16 Trap w m<73a>p.ei . Col. 4, 16 Trap 
 vfjuv among you, in your presence. 2 Tim. 
 4, 13. Rev. 2, 13. al. So Jos. Ant. 1. 11. 
 2 fKa%tcTo irapa TJJ 3upg. Luc. D. Deor. 
 23. 2. Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 15,26. b) Rarely 
 after verbs of motion, and only when subse 
 quent rest is also implied, comp. in eV no. 4 ; 
 so in Engl. by, with. Luke 9, 47 Iva-ovs . . 
 (TTLXafto/jitvos TratSt ov, ear^crei/ ai>To Trap 
 eWa>. 19, 7. Comp. Matth. 5 588. b. So 
 Xen. An. 2. 5. 27 si sana lect. 
 
 2. With dat. of Person, the reference 
 being to the person himself without regard 
 to place. a) Pr. and genr. with, among, 
 Matt. 21, 25 01 8e SteXoyi^oiro Trap eavToir. 
 Luke 1 . 30 et pe s yap x^P lv ^ a P a r< ? 3f <j>. 
 
 2, 52. 2 Cor. 1, 17. 1 Pet. 2, 20. So Luc. 
 D. Deor. 22. 2. Diod. Sic. 1. 6. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 8. 2. 28. b) Trop. icitli or before any one, 
 i. e. in his sight, presence, judgment, ho 
 being judge, Acts 26, 8. Rom. 2, 13 &WH 
 Trapa TW Sew. 11, 25. 1 Cor. 3, 19. Gal. 3. 
 11. James 1, 27. 1 Pet. 2, 4. 2 Pet. 3, 8. 
 So 2 Pet. 2, 1 1 Trapa Kvpiqi before the Lord, 
 as judge. (Jos. Ant. 7. 4. 2. JEl V. H. 10. 
 15 Trap e p.oi Kptrfj. Hdot. 3. 160.) Also 
 of what is in the power of any one ; Matt. 
 19, 26 bis, Trapa rois aV3pci>Trois TOVTO aSv- 
 varov eari Trapa 8e 3eu Ttavra Swa-rd. Of 
 moral qualities which are with any one, i. e. 
 belong to his character, Rom. 2, 1 1 ov yap 
 fcrri 7rpo(ra>Tro\r)\lsia Trapa TW 3e<5. 9, 14. 
 Eph. 6, 9. James 1,17. So Sept. Job 12, 
 13. Dem. 318. 13 ei S ovv ecrn KO\ Trap 
 ffjioi TIS ffnrfipia ToiavTT). c) Trop. 1 Cor. 
 7, 24 eKaiTTOs fv <a eVXjjSty, eV TOVTW fievfra> 
 irapa Tc3 Sew, with God, i. e. in union and 
 fellowship by faith with him, devoted to him 
 as Christians, i. q. eV Kvpla> v. 22. 
 
 III. With the ACCUSATIVE, pr. expressing 
 motion alongside of, near by, near to ; see 
 Passow, Buttm. Matth. 1. c. Winer { 53. g. 
 
 1. Pr. implying motion along or by (he 
 side of any thing, i. e. near, by, along, after 
 verbs of motion ; c. ace. of thing, Matt 4, 
 18 TTfpnrarutv 8f 6 I. Trapa TTJV 3aXao-o-ai>, 
 i. e. by the sea, along the sea-shore. Matt. 
 13, 4. Mark 2, 13. 4, 15 ot Trapa TTJV 68or 
 (a-rreipovrai) by the way-side. Luke 8, 5. 
 So Jos. Ant. 2. 5. 5 Trapa 7roTap.bv /SaS/fco; . 
 Xen. An. 6. 2. 1,18. 
 
 2. Expressing motion to a place, i. e. 
 place whither, to the side of, near by, near 
 to, at, after verbs of motion, and so equiv. to 
 Trpo y or etr c. ace. Matt. 15, 29 fifraftas . . 
 77X3? Trapa TTJV 3dXacrcraj/, he came near by 
 (to} the sea, approached the sea. v. 30 eppV 
 ^sav aiirovs Trapa TOUJ Tro Say TOV lijcrov, at 
 his feet. Luke 8, 41. Acts 4, 35. 7, 58. 
 Horn. II. 1. 347 TO) S avns "LTTJV Trapa vrjas 
 AxaiStv. Luc. D. Deor. 9. 2. Plato Phaed. 
 116. b. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 14 17 Trap e /ie 
 icro8oj. 
 
 3. Sometimes also with the idea of rest 
 or remaining near a place, near, by, at, i. q. 
 Trapa c. dat. Here however the idea of pre 
 vious motion or coming to the place, is 
 strictly implied ; comp. in ety no. 4. a) 
 Pr. after verbs of rest or remaining, Matt 
 13, 1 fKa^rjTO Trapa TTJV SaXacrcrai , i. e. he 
 went and sal by the sea-side. Mark 5, 21. 
 Luke 5, 1. 7, 38 o~Tacra Trapa TOVS TrdSa? 
 avrov oTrurw. 10, 39. Ellipt. with a verb 
 impl. Mark 4, 1. Acts 22, 3. Heb. 11, 12. 
 So ^El. V. H. 8. 16. Hdot. 8. 140. Time. 7. 
 39. b) Trop. of the ground or reason by 
 or along iciih which a conclusion follows, b\ 
 
Trapa 
 
 545 
 
 reason of, because of, Lat. propler, e.g. irapa. 
 rovTo, thereby, therefore, on this account; 
 1 Cor. 12, 15. 16 ou irapa TOVTO OVK ecrnv 
 IK TOV 0-tap.aTos ; comp. Matth. Winer 1. c. 
 Sept. for ^^9 Deut. 23, 5. So TT. roCro 
 Plut. Camill. 28. Xen. Mag. Eq. 1. 5 ; Trap 5 
 Jos. B. J. 3. 3. 5 ; genr. Pol. 1. 32. 4. Dem. 
 545. 22. 
 
 4. Denoting motion by or past a place, 
 (. e. along by, by, beyond,Thuc. 7. 13. Xen. 
 Cyr. 5. 2. 29 Trap avrrjV TTJV Ba/3vXcora &e t 
 irapitvai. In N. T. only trop. as implying 
 a failure to reach the exact point of aim, a 
 going beside or beyond the mark, a miss; 
 comp. Passow, Winer 1. c. a) i. q. Engl. 
 aside from, not coincident with, not con 
 formable to, i. e. contrary to, against. Acts 
 18, 13 Trapa TOV v6p.ov, pr. aside from the 
 law, contrary to law. Rom. 1, 26 Trapa (pv- 
 <nv. 4, 18 Trap eXTrt Sa. 11, 24. 16, 17. 
 Gal. 1, 8. 9. So Jos. Ant. 6. 13. 2. Hdian. 
 
 6. 3. 6. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 18. b) i. q. 
 Engl. beside, in the sense except, sate, 2 Cor. 
 11,24 Tfo-o-apaKovra irapa p.iav forty stripes 
 save one. So Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 1 TfcrcrapaKovra 
 (To>v Trapa rptaKoi/3 fj^pas. Dem. 688. 25. 
 Hdot. 9. 33. c) i. q. Engl. past, in the 
 sense beyond, besides, more than; so genr. 
 Heb. 11,11 Trapa Kaipbv rjKiKias erfnev, past 
 the proper age, beyond the usual age. (Jos. 
 Ant. 14.44. 3. Thuc. 3. 54 Trapa Svvap.iv.} 
 More commonly i. q. more than, above, be 
 yond; so genr. Luke 13, 2 d/naprcoXol Trapa 
 irdvras. v. 4. Rom. 1, 25. 12, 3 Trap 6 Set 
 (ppovtlv. 14, 5 see in *cpiVa> no. 1. Heb. 1, 
 9. (Diod. Sic. 12. 13 init. Plato Ion 539. e. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 14.) Also after compara 
 tives, where Trapa c. ace. is equiv. to tj Kara c. 
 ace. Matth. 588. p. 1174 ; e. g. Luke 3, 13 
 fiTjSfV TrXe oi/ Trapa TO Starfray/xeVoi/ nothing 
 more beyond what is appointed, i. q. no more 
 than is appointed. Heb. 1,4. 2, 7. 9. 3, 3. 
 9,23. 11,4. 12,24. (1 Esdr. 4, 35. Hdot. 
 
 7. 103. Thuc. 1. 23.) After SXXos, 1 Cor. 
 3. 1 1 Sfp.e Xtoi XXoi> . . Trapa TOV Ktiptvov, 
 oiher . . than ; comp. Matth. 1. c. So Plato 
 
 . 42. p. 93. a, ouSe fj.rjvnoi.f1v TI ou8e rt 
 uXXo, Trap a av exelj/a T) TTOIT; *j 
 
 NOTE. In composition Trapa implies: 
 a) Nearness, proximity, alongside of, beside, 
 near, by; as TrapaicaSifw, Trapum^t, Trapa- 
 SaXdaa-tor. b) Motion or direction to the 
 side of, near by, near to, by ; as Trapa/3dXX, 
 TrapaSi Sw/nt, Trape^w, TraparetVco. c) Mo- 
 lion along by or past any place, a going be 
 yond; as Trapoyoj, Trape p^o^iai, irapairXtca. 
 d) Trop. a going beside or beyond, going 
 amiss, i. q. Engl. mis-, i. e. wrongly, falsely, 
 35 
 
 asTrapaKovo>,Trapa3eG)pe (B; or like Lat. 
 trans, implying transgression, violation, as 
 Trapaflaivca, irapavop.ef-i> ; also by stealth, as 
 Trapetcrdyco. -f- 
 
 Trapaftaivo), f. /3?/o-op.ai, aor. 2 Trappy, 
 (/3aiVco,) pr. to go by the side of, to accom 
 pany, sc. as one of the warriors in a chariot, 
 Horn. II. 11. 522. ib. 13. 708. Hdot. 7. 40 ; 
 (o pass by or over in silence, Dem. 298. 11. 
 Usually and in N. T. only trop. to go aside 
 from, to overstep, to transgress, c. accus. 
 Matt. 15, 2. 3 vp-fTs irapaftaivfre rf/v fiToXr/v 
 TOV Seov. Absol. 2 John 9. Pragn. Acts 1, 
 25 e TJS [aTrooToXTjs] irapfftrj lovftas i. 6. 
 from which he by transgression fell away. 
 which he deserted by transgression ; so 
 Sept. c. f K for 1? "WO Ex. 32, 8. Sept. 
 genr. for "I2S Num. 14,41. Josh. 7, 11. 15. 
 Dem. 624. 1. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 21. 
 
 Trapa(3d\\w, f. /3aX, (/3dXXa>,) to 
 throiv near, to cast before, as food to ani 
 mals, Luc. D. Deor. 12. 1. Pol. 1. 84. 8. 
 In N. T. 
 
 1. to throw or place side by side, trop. to 
 compare, rt / rti/t Mark 4, 30. So rt r v i/t 
 Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 21. Hdot. 1. 198; ri irpos 
 rt Xen. Mem. 2. 4. 5. 
 
 2. Intrans. or with eauroV impl. to ihro-M 
 oneself near, i. e. to betake oneself any whi 
 ther, to go or come to a place, to arrive at ; 
 see Buttm. $ 130. n. 2. 5 113. 2. Matth. 
 5 496. Winer 5 39. 1. Espec. by ship, as 
 a nautical term, c. els Acts 20, 15 irap((3d- 
 \ofj.ev fls 2d/j.oi>. Jos. Ant. 18. 6. 4. Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 44. Hdot. 7. 179. 
 
 Trapafidais, as, 17, (7rapa/3au>,) trans 
 gression, e. g. rov vopov Rom. 2, 23 ; absol. 
 4, 15. 5, 14. Gal. 3, 19. 1 Tim. 2, 14. 
 Heb. 2, 2. 9, 15. Sept. for D^BO Ps. 101 
 3. 2 Mace. 15, 10 TT. T>V SpKcav. Plut. 
 Mor. II. p. 152. 
 
 TrapafidrrjS, O v, 6, (Trapa/3aiVo>,) an ac- 
 companier, companion, sc. as one of the 
 warriors in a chariot, Diod. Sic. 20. 41. 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 29. In N. T. a transgres 
 sor, e. g. TOV vop.ov Rom. 2, 25. 27. James 
 2, 11 ; absol. Gal. 2, 18. James 2, 9. So 
 Symm. for f^B Ps. 17, 4. Ez. 18, 10. 
 
 TrapafiLa&ficu, f. do-op-ai, Mid. depon. 
 (/3i aa>,) to force, to do violence to, contrary 
 to nature and right, Jos. Ant. 13.4. 9. Pol. 
 26. 1. 3. Plut. ed. Reisk. X. p. 118 pen. 
 
 Trapa/3iaecr3ai ratr f]8ovais TT)V (pvo~iv. 
 In N. T. to compel, to constrain, by over 
 much entreaty, c. ace. Luke 24, 29. Acts 
 16, 15. Sept for "1SQ 2 K. 2, 17; 
 1 Sam. 28, 23. 
 
546 
 
 irapa^d\evofJLai, f. eva-op-ai, Slid, de- 
 pon. (Trapti/SoXos, 7rapa/3aXXop,(H,) to expose 
 oneself, to venture ; Phil. 2, 30 Grb. Trapa- 
 f3o\(v(rdp,fvos rfj tyvxfi exposing himself as 
 to his life, regardless of his life ; for the 
 dat. see Winer 5 31. 3. Matth. 400. 6. 
 Chrysost. 1 Thess. Horn. 9. Hesych. jra- 
 pafto\(v<rdp.evos fls "5a.va.TOV eavrbv fK.8ovs. 
 See Wetstein N. T. not. crit. in loc. 
 
 7rapa(3o\ri, fjs, fj, (7rapa/3aXXo>,) pr. a 
 placing side by side, as of ships in battle, 
 Pol. 15. 2. 13. Diod. Sic. 14. 60. In N. 
 T. trop. 
 
 1. a comparison, similitude; Mark 4, 30 
 iv noia Trapa[3o\fj trapa^a\u>p.fv avrrjv ; 
 Heb. li, 19 eV 7rapa/3oXJ7 ; i. e. figuratively. 
 So JEl V. H. 3. 33. Pol. 1. 2. 2. Spec. 
 an image, figure, symbol, i. q. TVTTOS, Heb. 
 
 9, 9 TJTIS \T}v] irapapoXr) fls rov Kaipbv rov 
 fvfarrrjKOTa, i. e. a symbol or type of spirit 
 ual things in Christ; comp. v. 11. 
 
 2. Spec, a parable, a short discourse or 
 comparison, usually a narrative, under which 
 something else is figured, or in which the 
 fictitious is employed to represent and illus 
 trate the real. This is a favourite mode of 
 oriental teaching, and was much employed 
 by our Saviour ; so often in the first three 
 Gospels, but not elsewhere in N. T. E. g. 
 Matt. 13, 24 aXkrjv TrapajSoX^v iraptSrjKfv. 
 v. 31. 33. 53. 15, 15. 21, 33. 45. Mark 4, 
 
 10. 13 bis. 7,17. 12,12. Luke 5, 36. 6,39. 
 8, 9. 11. 12, 16. 41. 13, 6. 15, 3. 18, 1. 9. 
 19, 11. 20,9. 19. 21,29; iv irapafiokals in 
 parables, through or by means of parables, 
 Mark 4, 11. Luke 8, 10 ; \a\flv, \tyeiv, tl- 
 nflv iv 7rapa/3oXaij, Matt. 13, 3. 10. 13. 34. 
 22, 1. Mark 3, 23. 12, 1 ; 8i8ao-Ki/ iv napa- 
 /SoXatr Mark 4, 2 ; flirf 8ta 7rapa/3oX^r Luke 
 8, 4 ; dat. of manner, Mark 4, 33. Also 
 \wp\s napaftoXrjs OVK e XdXei avrols Matt. 13, 
 34. Mark 4, 34 ; OTTO TTJS <rvKijs p.d3ere TTJV 
 7rapa/3oX)ji>, i. e. drawn from the fig-tree, 
 Matt. 24, 32. Mark 13, 28. With gen. of 
 the object whence the parable is drawn, 
 Matt. 13, 18 TT. rov cnrelpovros. v. 36 TT. T>V 
 iavia>v. Once of a series of comparisons, 
 including also a parable, Luke 14, 7, comp. 
 v. 7-11. 12-14. 16-24. Sept. and Heb. tyv 
 Ez. 17, 2. 24, 3. 
 
 3. In a wider sense, figurative discourse, 
 a dark saying, apothegm, i. e. obscure and 
 of deep meaning; Matt. 13, 35 dvoi^co iv 
 7rapa|3oXa7r TO oTo p,rt p.ov, quoted from Ps. 
 78, 2 where Sept. for iica a sententious or 
 didactic poem; comp. Prov. 1, 6. Ecc. 12, 
 9. Hence i. q. a proverb, adage, Luke 4, 23. 
 Sept. and ba 1 Sam. 10, 12. Ez. 18, 2. 
 
 7rapa(3ov\evo/jiai, f. 
 
 to misconsult, to not regard, a doubt 
 ful form, c. dat. Phil. 2, 30 Rec. where 
 other editions and Mss. read 7rapaj3oXevop.ai 
 q. v. Not found elsewhere. 
 
 TTapajjeXla, as, rj (rflpayye XXw.) 
 announcement, declaration, pi xlamalion, by 
 authority, Xen. Hell. 2. 1. 4. In N. T. a 
 command, charge, precept, e. g. from magis 
 trates, c. dat. emphat. Acts 5, 28 oil Trapay- 
 yeX/a 7rapr;yyet Xap,ei> vp.lv , 16, 24. Or as 
 pertaining to religion, 1 Thess. 4, 2 Trapay- 
 yeXt ay e Scoxap.ei vp.lv Sta rov Kvpiov lijcrov. 
 
 1 Tim. 1, 5. 18. So genr. Pol. 6. 27. 1. 
 
 TrapayyeXXw, f. yeX&j, (ayye XXw,) to 
 bring or send ivord near to any one, to pass 
 the word along, to announce, Hdian. 1. 5. 3. 
 Xen. Hell. 2. 1. 4. Hence in N. T. and 
 comm. to give the word, to command, to 
 charge; also TrapayyeXXto p.fj, to forbid; 
 c. dat. of pers. expr. or impl. the thing com 
 manded being put in the accus. or infin. or 
 with tra and the like. a) With dat. and 
 accus. 2 Thess. 3, 4 a Trapayye\\op.fv iip.lv. 
 V. 10 TOVTO Trapayy. vp.lv, on KT\. c. dat. 
 impl. 1 Cor. 11, 17. 1 Tim. 4, 11. 5, 7 rav- 
 ra TrapayyeXXe, iva KT\. So Xen. Cyr. 4. 
 2. 19. Lac. 13. 5. /3) With dat. and infin. 
 see for the use of the infin. aor. as well as 
 inf. pres. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 747 sq. Winer 
 J 45. 8. E. g. infin. aor. Mark 8, 6 Trapqy- 
 yfiXe rw o^Xw dvanfffflv iiii rrjs yr/s. [Matt. 
 
 15, 35.] Luke 5, 14. 8, 29. 56. Acts 10,42. 
 
 16, 18. 23,22. 1 Cor. 7, 10. Inf. pres. Luke 
 9,21 avrols TrapTjyyeiXe p.T]8fvl \eyiv TOVTO. 
 Acts 1, 4. 4, 18. 5, 28. 40. 16,23. 17, 30. 
 23, 30. 2 Thess. 3, 6. 1 Tim. 1, 3. 6, 17, 
 with ace. and inf. pres. 1 Tim. 6, 13; dat. 
 impl. Acts 15, 5. So aor. Jos. c. Ap. 1. 26. 
 Hdian. 6. 8. 15. Xen. Ag. 1. 31 ; pres. Luc. 
 Nigr. 34. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 4. Inf. c. ace, 
 Xen. An. 1. 2. 1. y) Further, with dat 
 and Iva, see in Iva III. 1. a. Mark 6, 8. 
 
 2 Thess. 3, 12; dat. and KaSwr 1 Thess. 4, 
 1 1 ; with Xeycoi> before the express words 
 Matt. 10, 5. 
 
 TTapayLVOfjiatj f. yfvf)<rop.ai, (yivop.ai,) 
 Pres. and Impf. to become near, to become 
 present, i. e. to come, to approach, to arrive, 
 Matt. 3, 1. 13. Mark 14, 43; Impf. once 
 John 3, 23 ; elsewhere only Aor. 2 Trape- 
 yfv6p.r)v, to be near, to be present, i. e. to 
 have come or arrived; see in yivop.ai. 
 
 1. Genr. and absol. John 3, 23 iraptyi- 
 VOVTO Kal iftairriovTo. Luke 14, 21. 19, 16. 
 Acts 11, 23 os Trapayevvpfvos KOI I8a>v. 25, 
 7. 1 Cor. 16, 3. al. Sept. for ia Gen. 26, 
 32. Ex. 2, 16. 17. saep. So JEA. V. H. 12. 
 
Trapaya) 547 
 
 1 init. Xen. Cyr. 8. 1 . 3. With an adjunct 
 of place whither, e. g. ds c. ace. of place, 
 Matt. 2, 1. John 8, 2. Acts 13, 14. 15, 4. 
 (Sept. Josh. 24, 11. Hdot. 2. 4.) With 
 tni c. ace. of place, Matt. 3, 13 (Plut. 
 Mor. II. p. 35) ; tni c. ace. of pers. to come 
 upon or against any one, Luke 22, 52. 
 (Sept. Josh. 10, 9. Thuc. 2. 95.) With 
 irpos c. ace. of pers. Luke 7, 4. 11, 6. 
 Acts 20, 18. So Sept. Ex. 2, 17. 18, 6. 
 Diod. Sic. 2. 13. With an adjunct of place 
 whence, e. g. air 6 c. gen. Matt. 3, 13 ; e 
 68ov Luke 11, 6 ; irapd TWOS Mark 14, 43. 
 
 2. Spec, to come or appear publicly, e. g. 
 John the Baptist, Matt. 3, 1 ; Jesus, Luke 
 12, 51. Heb. 9, 11. 1 Mace. 4, 45. Test. 
 XII Patr. p. 745. + 
 
 Trapayo), f. da>, (aya>,) to lead along 
 near, to lead by or past, Xen. Hell. 4. 5. 1 1 . 
 Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Mid. Trapa.yofj.ai, to pass along, to 
 pass away; absol. 1 John 2, 8 TJ a-Koria 
 napdyfTai. Trop. i. q. to disappear, to per 
 ish, 1 John 2, 17 6 xoa-p-os irapdyfrai. Only 
 in N. T. 
 
 2. Intrans. 7rapdya>, to pass along, to 
 pass by, comp. in oyw no. 2. Matt. 20, 30 
 dicovo-avTfs on irjcrovs rrapdyet. Mark 2, 14. 
 15, 21. John 9, 1. Sept. for -i2 2 Sam. 
 15, 18. Ps. 129, 8. So Pol. 57l8. 4. 
 Spec, to pass on by, to pass away, Matt. 9, 
 9 Ka\ irapdyuv 6 incrovs (Ktteev. V. 27. 
 John 8, 59. Trop. i. q. to disappear, to per 
 ish, 1 Cor. 7, 31 TO <rxnp a T v tvo-p-ov TOV- 
 TOV irapayfi. Sept. and 13S Ps. 144, 4. 
 So Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 44. 
 
 iy/jMTL^d), f. t cro), (7rapadeiy/ia, 
 t,) to make an example nf, to put 
 to open shame, c. ace. Matt. 1, 19 p.f) Se Xtav 
 avrt]V TrapaSety/icm crat. Heb. 6, 6 coupled 
 with d>acrravpoa>. So Sept. for S^pl n 
 Num. 25, 4. Plut. de Curiosit. 10. Pol. 
 29. 7. 5. 
 
 Trapa^eto 09, ou, 6, paradise, comp. 
 Sanscr. paredeca, a region of beauty ; Ar- 
 men. pardes, a garden or park around the 
 house, planted with grass, herbs, trees, for 
 use and ornament, see Schroeder Diss. 
 Thesaur. Ling. Armen. praemiss. p. 56. 
 In the Heb. form O -pB and Gr. rrapaSacror, 
 it is applied to the pleasure gardens and 
 parks with wild animals around the country 
 residences of the Persian monarchs and 
 princes, Neh. 2, 8 ; comp. Ecc. 2, 5. Cant. 
 4, 13. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 14. Hell. 4. 1. 33. 
 CEc. 4. 13. Diod. Sic. 16. 41. In like 
 manner of the parks and gardens of the 
 Jewish kings, Jos. Ant. 7. 4. 14. ib. 8. 7. 
 
 3. Hence in Sept. of the garden of Eden, 
 Trapd&Vto-oy for Heb. *ja Gen. 2, 8 sq. Joe. 
 Ant 1. 1. 3. See Heb. Lex. o^nB. Ro- 
 senm. Bibl. Geogr. I. i. p. 173 sq. Hence 
 in the later Jewish usage and in N. T. par 
 adise is put for the abode of the blessed 
 after death, viz. 
 
 1. The inferior paradise, or the region oi 
 the blessed in Hades, Luke 23, 43 ; see art. 
 a8rjs. Comp. Jos. Ant. 18. 1. 3. 
 
 2. Spec. 6 TrapdSficros rov 3eoi), the 
 paradise of God, the celestial paradise, 
 where the spirits of the just dwell with 
 God, 2 Cor. 12, 4, i. q. 6 rpiros ovpuvos in 
 v. 3 ; see in ovpavos no. 4. b. So Rev. 2, 
 7, where the imagery is drawn from Gen. 
 2, 8 sq. Psalt. Salom. 14, 2. Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 586 alrbs [6 vlbs rov 3.] dVoiei 
 ras Supas rov irapadeicrov crov, Kal . . . 8a>o~fi 
 rois dyiois (paytiv (K rov v\ov rrjs fafjs. 
 
 f. o/*ai, Mid. depon. 
 t,) to take near or to oneself, i. e. to 
 receive to oneself, pr. from the hands of any 
 one, Xen. Cyr. 7. 3. 1. In N. T. trop. to 
 receive, to admit, to approve, e. g. things, c. 
 ace. Mark 4, 20 rbv \6yov. Acts 16, 21 
 e37;. 22. 18. 1 Tim. 5, 19. Sept. for xiSJ 
 Ex. 23, 1. (Arr. Epict. 1. 7. 6. Luc. if. 
 Mort. 28. 2.) Also persons, Acts 16, 4 
 Lachm. By Hebraism, to delight in, Heb. 
 12, 6 vlbv ov TrapaSe^erat, parall. with dyn- 
 Trao), quoted from Prov. 3, 12 where Sept. 
 for 
 
 rpir), TJS, r;, (8iarpi^, Siarpi 
 /3a>,) misemployment, useless occupalioj , 
 busy meddling; 1 Tim. 6, 5 Rec. This 
 reading has less authority than 8ianapa- 
 rpi^r), though some prefer it ; see Tittm. dn 
 Synon. N. T. p. 233. Winer J 16. 4. n. 
 
 7rapaSl8a)fJ,l, f. TrapaScio-co, (i8a>/*t,) to 
 give near or over to any one, to deliver over 
 or up, into the possession or power of any 
 one. 
 
 1. Of persons, to deliver over with evil 
 intent into the power or authority of others ; 
 e. g. to magistrates for trial, condemnation, 
 C. ace. et dat. Matt. 5, 25 p.r]irore erf irapa- 
 Sw 6 dvTiBiKos TO) xptrfj. Mark 15, 1 7rap- 
 Sa>Kai> avrbv r< ITiXdrw. Luke 20, 20. John 
 
 19, 11 ; dat. impl. Matt. 27, 18. Acts 3, 13. 
 (Dem. 515. 6.) To lictors or soldiers for 
 punishment or ward, Matt. 5, 25 xal 6 
 Kpirf)s <re TrnpaSw rw vTrrjpfrr]. 18, 34 irapt- 
 SwKfv avrbv rois ^acraficrrals. 20, 19 et 
 Luke 18, 32 rois 3i/fcrif, i. e. tlie Roman 
 soldiers. Acts 12, 4; with ds final, Matt. 
 
 20, 19. W ith ace. and r final, Luke 24, 
 20 Trap, avrbv tls Kpipa Savarou, i. e. to be 
 
548 
 
 punished with death. With Iva, Matt. 27, 
 26 irjcrovv napeSwiKV, Iva crravpcoSi;. Mark 
 15, 15. (Dem. 1327. ult. Xen. An. 4. 2. 1.) 
 Also in general to the power and pleasure 
 of one s enemies ; c. ace. et dat. Matt. 26, 
 15 /ctiyu vfuv irapa8a>o-a> aiiTov. Luke 23, 
 
 25. Mark 10, 33. 1 Tim. 1, 20 ; ace. simpl. 
 Matt. 10, 4 lovbas 6 Kal trapadovs avrov. 
 24, 10. Mark 3, 19. 14, 11. Luke 22, 21. 
 al. Pass. Matt. 4, 12. Mark 1, 14. 
 (1 Mace. 14, 33. Ceb. Tab. 9. Xen. Hell. 
 2. 4. 41.) Instead of dat. put with fig 
 o~vv(8pia, unto (before) councils, Matt. 10, 
 17. Luke 21, 12. (Dem. 1230. 18.) Also 
 elg x ^pds rivos , into the hands (power) 
 of any one, Matt. 17, 22. Mark 14, 41. 
 Luke 24, 7. Acts 21, 11. With tl s final, 
 Matt. 24, 9. 26, 2 6 vlos TOV dv%p. TrapaSi- 
 Sorai ds TO 0Taupa>3J)i>ai. Acts 8, 3 els (pv- 
 
 Mark 13, 12 et 2 Cor. 4, 11 ds 
 v, and so with tls Savarov impl. 
 wherever the reference is to the death of 
 Jesus, Rom. 4, 25. 8, 32. 1 Cor. 11. 23; 
 also where Jesus is said iavrov Trapa8i86vai, 
 Gal. 2, 20. Eph. 5, 2. 25. (Act. Thorn. 
 52.) Once genr. TWO. rivi els, 1 Cor. 5, 5. 
 
 2. Of persons or things delivered over to 
 do or suffer any thing, to give up or over, to 
 surrender, to permit, c. ace. Acts 15, 26 
 dj/SptoTroty TrapaSeScoKoVt ray ^l/v^as avTu>v, 
 men who have given up (jeoparded) their 
 lives. So c. ace. et Iva, 1 Cor. 13, 3 eav 
 TrapaSoi TO o~5>p.d JJ.QV Iva KavSTjcrco/xai. Sept. 
 for Chald. Sly; Dan. 3, 28. (Luc. Tim. 12. 
 Plut. Mor. II. p. 32. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 47.) 
 Of persons given over to follow their pas 
 sions or appetites ; with ace. and dat. of 
 thing, Eph. 4, 19 eavrovs 7rap{8a>Kuv rfj 
 do-eXyem. Ace. and infin. Acts 7, 42 ; ace. 
 and ds TI into any thing, i. e. into the pow 
 er or practice of it, Rom. 1, 24. 26. 28. So 
 Ecclus. 23, 6. 
 
 3. Of persons and things delivered over 
 to the charge, care, kindness of any one, to 
 giie up or over, to commit, to intrust, mostly 
 c. ace. et dat. Matt. 1 1 , 27 irdvra /xoi irapa- 
 8o37 vno TOV TraTpos. 25, 14. Luke 4, 6. 
 10, 22. Acts 27, 1 Trap(8i8ovv TOV HaiiXov. . 
 (KaTovrdpxn KT\. 1 Pet. 2, 23. 2 Pet. 2, 4. 
 (Diod. Sic! 5. 36. Xen. An. 4. 6. 1.) So 
 Trapa8i.86vai TWO. TTJ xdpiTi TOV 3eot), to com 
 mit (commend) to the favour of God, Acts 14, 
 
 26. 1 5, 40 ; Trapa8i86vai TO irvevp-a sc. rw 
 3ew, to give up the ghost, John 19, 30, comp. 
 Ps. 31, 5. Ecc. 12, 7. Spec, to deliver up, 
 to render up, e. g. TTJV /focriXetW TW 3e 
 1 Cor. 15, 24. So Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 7. 
 
 4. Of things delivered orally or by writ 
 ing, i. q. to deliver, to declare, to teach, c. ace. 
 
 et dat. expr. or impl. Mark 7, 13. Luke 1, 2. 
 Acts 6, 14 ret eSjj a irapedtaKfv vp.1v Mwvo-fjy 
 16, 4. 1 Cor. 11, 2. 23 o Kal nape8u>Ka vp.1v 
 15, 3. 2 Pet. 2, 21. Jude 3. Pass. Rom. 6 
 17 fir ov Trap(86^T]T( TVTTOV SiSa^y, for ds 
 TOV TVITOV 818. ov Trap(86 5r)Te, see Buttm, 
 131. 5, and $ 134. 6. Winer 24. 2. Jos. 
 c. Apion. 1. 12. Hdian. 1. 1. 3. Diod. Sic. 
 
 I. 3. 
 
 5. Intran s. or with tavTov impl. see in 
 7rapa/3dXX<B no. 2, to deliver up oneself, to 
 yield oneself, e. g. as the harvest presents 
 itself for the sickle ; Mark 4, 29 orjav Se ira- 
 
 pa8(3 6 KllpTTOS. -f- 
 
 TrapdSogos, O v,6, fj, adj. (86ga,) paradox 
 ical, strange, pr. aside from opinion, Luc. D. 
 Deor. 9. 2. Xen. Mag. Eq. 8. 19. In N. T. 
 strange, wonderful, Luke 5, 26. So Ecclus. 
 43, 25. Hdian. 1. 1. 5. Plut. Alex. M. 17. 
 
 TrapdSocns, fc os, TJ, (TrapaSi Sw/xt,) de 
 livery, the act of delivering over from one to 
 another, Thuc. 1. 9; the surrender of a. city, 
 Jos. B. J. 1. 8. 6. Thuc, 3. 53. In N. T. 
 meton. any thing orally delivered, a pre 
 cept, ordinance, instruction. 
 
 I . Of precepts or doctrines delivered down 
 from age to age, tradition, traditional law; 
 Matt. 15, 2 rrapa/SaiVovcrt rrjv Trapd8ocriv TUV 
 7rprpvT(puv. v. 3. 6. Mark 7, 3. 5. 8. 9. 
 13. Gal. 1, 14. Col. 2, 8. See Jos. Ant. 13. 
 10. 6. Pol. 12. 6. 1. Plato Legg. 803. a. 
 
 2. Genr. a precept, doctrine, 1 Cor. 11, 2 
 KaSSojy 7rap(8a>Ka vp.lv, ray irapa86<T(is KUTC- 
 X(T(. 2 Thess. 2, 15. 3, 6. Jos. Ant. 10. 
 4. 1. Arr. Epict. 2. 23. 40. Pol. 11. 8. 2. 
 
 7rapafy)\OCi), >, f. axrw, (j?Xo a>,) pr. to 
 make miszealous, i. e. to make jealous, to pro 
 voke to jealousy or emulation, trop. of Israel 
 whom God would make jealous of their own 
 high privileges and cause to set a right value 
 upon them, by bestowing like privileges on 
 other nations; c. ace. Rom. 10, 19 Trapa^;- 
 Xcoa-a) vp.as eV OVK e%vei, quoted from Deut. 
 32, 21 where Sept. for N?!?, N^n. R om . 
 
 II, 11. 14. Also in respect to God, to pro 
 voke God to jealousy and wrath by rendering 
 to idols the homage due to him alone, 1 Cor. 
 10, 22. Sept. for N?f? 1 K. 14, 22 ; 
 
 Ps. 37, 1. 7. 8. So Ecclus. 30, 3. 
 
 a , ov, (SdXao-o-a.) by 
 the sea-side, on the sea-coast; Matt. 4, 13 
 ds Kcwrepi . rrjv irapa%aXao-o-iav. Sept. for 
 
 c^n nsiirbs 2 Chron. 8, 17. Pol. i. 20. 
 6. Xen. Hell. 1. 1. 24. 
 
 S>, f. qcrco, (3ewp0,) in 
 look al a thing beside another, to compare. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 8. 7. In N. T. to look by GJ 
 
549 
 
 beyond any thing, to overlook, to neglect; 
 Pass. Acts 6, 1 ort TtapfZeupovvro at xW ai 
 avTuv. So Dem. 1414. 22. Diod. Sic. 35. 
 T. VI. p. 218. 
 
 TTapcfotj/crj, qs, f], (TrapariS^i,) a <fe- 
 posit, trust, something committed to one s 
 charge, 2 Tim. 1, 12 ; also 1 Tim. 6, 20 et 
 2 Tim. 1, 14 in later edit, for TrapnKaraSr;^ 
 in Rec. Sept. for .V^B Ley. 6, 2. 4. 
 Hdot. 9. 45. Pol. 33. 12. 4, 9. The Atti- 
 cists regard this as a later form for the earlier 
 Trapa/caraS 77*77, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 312. 
 
 Trapaivea), , f. fVa>, (aiWa>,) pr. to 
 praise by or before any one ; hence to recom 
 mend, to exhort, to admonish, absol. Acts 
 
 27, 9 ; c. ace. et inf. Acts 27, 22 irapaivu 
 {. pas ftevuflv. 2 Mace. 7, 25. Luc. Pise. 
 51 ; c. inf. Pol. 1. 80. 3. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 8. 
 
 TtapaiTeofAai, ovfj.cu, f. r/o-op-ai, Mid. 
 depon. (atVfw.) to ask at the hands of any 
 one, to beg of or from, to obtain by asking, 
 Find. Nem. 10. 56. Hdot. 1. 24, 90. In 
 N. T. to beg off from any thing, to avert by 
 entreaty, to deprecate. 
 
 1. Genr. to entreat that something may 
 not take place ; c. inf. Acts 25, 1 1 ov irapai- 
 ro\:fMii TO dnoZavf iv I do not deprecate death, 
 do not refuse to die. Followed by /nrj c. inf. 
 Heb. 12, 19; comp. in p.i] I. no. 4. Jos. 
 Vit. ^ 29 ^avfiv ov irapaiTovpai. Plut. Romul. 
 3. Thuc. 5. 63. 
 
 2. Spec, to excuse oneself, to beg off from 
 an invitation, absol. Luke 14, 18 TJp^avro . . 
 TrapatretcrSai jravrts. Pass, particip. perf. 
 as Pass. ib. ?x M e ifo.priTrip.tvov. v. 19. See 
 Buttm. $ 113. n. 6. Jos. Ant. 7. 8. 2. Plut. 
 Jul. CSES. 68 Kivvas. . tdoKfi vno KaiVapof 
 eVt Sflnvov KaXeicr2af TrapaiTOv/ifvor ACT\. 
 Plato Prot. 358. a. 
 
 3. Spec, not to receive, i. e. to refuse, to 
 reject, c. ace. Heb. 12, 25 bis, ^17 Trapamj- 
 OTjo-Sf TOV XaXovvra KT\. 1 Tim. 4, 7. 5, 
 11. So Jos. Ant. 3. 8. 8. Philo 2 Alleg. 
 p. 87. a. Diog. Laert. 4. 42. Also, to avoid, 
 to shun, c. ace. 2 Tim. 2, 23. Tit. 3, 10. So 
 2 Mace. 2, 31. Philo in Flacc. p. 968. d. 
 
 TrapaKO^i^a), f. la-m, (Ka3i o> no. 2,) to 
 sit down bij or at, to seat oneself near, with 
 rapa c. ace. Luke 10, 39. Sept. for 2tth 
 Job 2, 13. Arr. Epict. 2. 6. 23. Mid. 14 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 5. 7. 
 
 TrapaicaXea), w, f. o-o>, (VoXf w,) to call 
 to one s side or presence, to call for ; not 
 found in John s writings. 
 
 1. Pr. to call for, to invite, c. ace. Acts 
 
 28, 20 8ta TavTrjv TTJV aiTiav irapficd\((ra 
 vitas, i8f~iv KT\. JE\. V. H. 3. 37. Dem. 
 1265. ult. Xen. An. 5. 6. Ifi. 
 
 2. to call for or upon for aid, to invoke, 
 e. g. God, Jos. Ant. 13. 5. 8. Arr. Epict. 
 
 3. 21. 12. Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 17. Hence in 
 later usage and N. T. genr. to entreat, to be 
 seech, c. ace. Matt. 18, 32. Acts 16, 39. 
 2 Cor. 12. 18. Along with the accus. expr. 
 or impl. are also put other adjuncts, e. g. 
 Part. Xeywcor the like, Matt. 8, 5 TrpooTjXaefr 
 eKaTovrapxos, irapaKaXaiv O.VTOV KOI Xtycof. 
 V. 31 ot fie 8aifj.oves TrapaedXovv avTW Xe- 
 yovres. Mark 1, 40. 5, 23. Acts 16, 15. 
 25, 2. Also with ace. and inf. aor. Mark 
 5, 17 rjp^avro TrapaKaXeiv UVTOV 7reX2eZi> KT\. 
 Acts 8, 31. 9, 38. 19,31. 24,4; ace. et 
 inf. c. TOV 21, 12. (1 Mace. 9, 35. Arr. 
 Epict. 1. 10. 10; inf. pres. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 
 53.) Also c. Iva, Mark 5, 18. Luke 8, 31. 
 1 Cor. 16, 12. 2 Cor. 12, 8 ; c. OTTUJ Matt. 
 8. 34. (Plut. Demetr. 38 pen.) So c. mpi 
 TIVOS Philem. 10 ; comp. Jos. Ant. 1. c. 
 See Suid. 7rapa*coXf Iv . . .uievpov yap TO 8e- 
 eo-Sat. Thorn. Mag. p. 684. 
 
 3. to call upon to do any thing, to exhort. 
 to admonish, c. ace. of pers. Acts 15, 32 
 lovSas Kal Si\as...TrapfKaXfcrfv TOVS d8(\- 
 <j>ovs. 1 Cor. 14, 31. 2 Cor. 10, 1. 1 Thess. 
 2, 11. 1 Tim. 5, 1. Heb. 3, 13. (1 Mace. 
 12, 50. Pol. 1. 61. 1. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 15.) 
 Also with ace. and further adjuncts ; e. g. 
 with the express words, 1 Cor. 4, 16. 
 1 Pet. 5, 1 ; with inf. pres. Acts 11, 23 
 irapeKaXft Trdvras . . . rrpocrp-evfiv TW Kvp[<a. 
 Phil. 4, 2 bis. 1 Pet. 2, 11. (Plut/Mor. II. 
 p. 22. Tauchn.) With inf. aor. Acts 27, 
 33 Trape/cdXet 6 II. ajravras /ieraXa/3en/ rpo- 
 <f>fis. Rom. 12, 1. 2 Cor. 2, 8. Eph. 4, 1. 
 Heb. 13, 19. (Hdian. 6. 9. 10.) With mi 
 1 Cor. 1, 10. 2 Cor. 8, 6. 1 Thess. 4, 1. 
 Absol. c. ace. of pers. impl. Luke 3, 18. 
 Rom. 12, 8 6 jrapaKaXuv. 2 Cor. 5, 20. 13, 
 11. Tit. 1, 9. Heb. 10, 25; c. \iy<*v Acts 
 2, 40. Also c. inf. pres. 1 Tim. 2, 1 ; inf. 
 et ace. 2 Cor. 6, 1. So raOra Si8a(TKe KCU 
 TrapaicdXd 1 Tim. 6, 2. Tit. 2, 15. 
 
 4. to exhort in the way of consolation, 
 encouragement, i. q. to console, to comfort. 
 c. ace. of pers. Matt. 2, 18 Pa^X AcXcu ouo-a 
 . . . /cat OVK TjfeeXe TrapaKXrjS^vai. 5, 4. 2 Cor. 
 1, 4 ter, 6 irapaKaX&v f][j.as tiri irdcrr) T// 
 3Xty KT\. v. 6. 2, 7. 7, 7. 1 Thess/3, 7. 
 
 4, 18. So Trap. TO.S <ap8ias VftAr, Eph. f>. 
 22. Col. 2, 2. 4, 8. 2 Thess. 2, 17 ; comp. 
 in KapSi a no. 1. a. y. Sept. often for cH5 
 Gen. 24, 67. 37, 34. Deut. 32, 36. al. 
 Spec, to make glad, Pass, to be glad, to re 
 joice, Luke 16, 25. Acts 20, 12. -f 
 
 7TCtp(lKa\VTrTO), f. -v^-o), (KoXifTrrci),) to 
 
 cover over, to veil, by putting any thing be 
 side or before an object ; e. g. TOVS o 
 
550 
 
 7rapa\a/j,/3av(i) 
 
 vs Sept. for nibsn Ez. 22, 2? Mid. id. 
 Plut. Pomp. 60. In N. T. trop. Luke 9, 
 45 (TO pr/pa) ijv TrapaKeKa\vp.p.(vov cm av- 
 TUV. So Plato Rep. 503. a. 
 
 Trapa/cara^lJKT], 77?, 17, (TrapaKaraTtir)- 
 (j.1,) a deposit, trust, something committed 
 to one s charge, 1 Tim. 6, 20 and 2 Tim. 
 1, 14 Rec. where later edit, have the later 
 form -napa^rfKri q. v. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 312. 
 Jos. B. J. 3. 8. 5. Diod. Sic. 15. 76. Xen. 
 An. 5. 3. 7. 
 
 irapaKeifJiai,, f. o-o/xat, (KCI/MU,) to lie 
 near, to be adjacent, Hdian. 3. 4. 11. Xen. 
 An. 7. 3. 22. In N. T. trop. to be at hand, 
 to be present, prompt, Rom. 7, 18 TO yap 
 3eXeti TrapuKfiTat p.oi. v. 21. So pr. Judith 
 3, 2. 3. 
 
 , ;, TrapaKaew, pr. a 
 calling for, invitation, Dem. 275. 20 ol p,ev 
 f< Trapa/cXijcrecoj avyKaSij/iei oi. In N. T. 
 
 1. entreaty, persuasion; 2 Cor. 8, 4 /tera 
 TroXX^f 7rapaK\T]<rf(ii>s btop-tvot Tjp.5>v. V. 17 
 comp. v. 6. Jos. Ant. 3. 1. 5. Pol. 22. 7. 
 
 2. Thuc. 4. 61. 
 
 2. exhortation, admonition; Rom. 12, 8 
 ejre 6 TrapaKoXtov, ev rjj Trapa/cX^cm. 1 Cor. 
 14, 3. 1 Tim. 4, 13. Heb. 12, 5. 13, 22. 
 So 2 Mace. 7, 24. Diod. Sic. 15. 56. ^Es- 
 chin. 16. 33. Spec, instruction, teaching, 
 
 1. e. hortatory, Acts 13, 15 ei C OTI Xdyoy 
 tv iip.lv 7rapaK\r)(Tfa>s. 15, 31. 1 Thess. 2, 
 
 3. So Acts 4, 36 vlos TrapaK\f]<Tf&>s, i. q. 
 Aram. tl^13D~-i3 BapmjSas, where Trapa- 
 K\f](Tis is then equiv. to irpofprjTeia. 
 
 3. consolation, comfort; Rom. 15, 4 tva 
 dia...TTJs TrapaKXijtrfwy TU>V ypa(f)5>v TTJV eX- 
 Tri Sa exa)p.fv, i. e. the consolation afforded 
 by the Scriptures. 2 Cor. 1, 4. 5. 6 bis. 7. 
 7, 4. 7. 13. Phil. 2, 1. 2 Thess. 2, 16. Phi- 
 lem. 7. Heb. 6, 18 ; 6 3eor IT}? Trapa/cX^o-ecus 
 Rom. 15, 5. 2 Cor. 1,3. So Sept. for 
 oinna is. 57, 18 ; enninsn j er . 16, 7. Is. 
 66, 11. (1 Mace. 12, 9.) Including the 
 idea of spiritual aid, assistance, i. q. aid 
 and comfort, Acts 9, 31 T] TT. TOV aylov 
 irvevparos. Meton. for the author of spirit 
 ual aid and consolation, the Messiah, Luke 
 
 2, 25 ; so Sept. for Briaa Nah. 3, 7. So 
 the Rabbins Bri3E often as a name of the 
 Messiah, see Lightfoot Hor. Heb. ad Joh. 
 14, 16. Spec, solace, joy, cause of joy, 
 Luke 6, 24. 
 
 TrapaKXrjTOS, ov, 6, ^, adj. (TrapaKoXe co,) 
 pr. catted to one s aid, assisting ; hence as 
 Subst. 
 
 1. Lat. adcocatus, an advocate, interces 
 sor, who pleads the cause of any one before 
 a judge ; 1 John 2, 1 tdv TIS dpaprrj, rrapd- 
 
 K\TJTOI> e^op-ei/ Trpos TOV naTfpa, i. e. Christ. 
 Dem. 343. 10. Dion. Hal. Ant. 11. 37. So 
 Rabb. B^p*nB or suibjrnQ for yi-sa T ( xbn 
 intercessor, angel of intercession, Job 33, 
 23. 
 
 2. a consoler, comforter, bestowing spi 
 ritual aid and consolation ; spoken of the 
 Holy Spirit, the Paraclete, John 14, 16. 26 
 15, 26. 16, 7. 
 
 TTapatcor], ^ s , f), (rrapaKovai, ) a mis 
 hearing, what is heard amiss, Plato Ep. 
 341. b. In N. T. neglect to hear, disobe 
 dience; Rom. 5, 19 Sta TTJS Trapaxorjs TOV 
 tvbs drtpuTTov. 2 Cor. 10, 6. Heb. 2, 2. So 
 Just. Mart, de Resurr. p. 213, U7r 
 p.ev Trj TOV di/3p. TrapaKofj. 
 
 ), ,, f. fao), 
 
 3e o>,) to accompany side by side, to follow 
 closely, c. dat. Diod. Sic. 20. 29. Xen. 
 Conv. 8. 23. In N. T. trop. 
 
 1. Of things, to accompany any one, i. q. 
 to be done by him, c. dat. Mark 16, 17 or;- 
 p.fia fie rotf iriCTTfvcracri TCLVTCI TrapaKoXov- 
 Sijcrei. Comp. 2 Mace. 8, 11. 
 
 3. to follow out closely in mind, to trace 
 out, to examine, c. dat. Luke 1, 3 irapaic. 
 iracri dxpiftais. Pol. 1. 12. 7. Dem. 285. 
 21. 
 
 3. to follow, to conform unto, c. dat. e. g. 
 TT; 8t8a<rKaA/a 1 Tim. 4, 6. 2 Tim. 3, 10. 
 2 Mace. 9, 27. 
 
 TTClpttKOVCOj f. cra>, (UKOUO),) to mishear, 
 to hear amiss, JE\. V. H. 5. 9. Pol. 7. 11. 9. 
 Plato Prot. 330. e. In N. T. to neglect to 
 hear, not to obey, c. gen. Matt. 18, 17 bis, 
 fav Se irapanovcrrj avTa>v KT\. Sept. for 
 S33U Kb Is. 45, 12 ; HbS -p Esth. 3, 8. 
 So Jos. Ant. 1. 10. 4. Pol. 26. 2. 1. 
 
 TrctpaKVTTTCti, f. ^ru>, (KUTTTG),) to stoop 
 down by or to any thing, to bend forward in 
 order to look at any thing more closely ; 
 absol. Luke 24, 12 TrapaKv^as /3Xe7ret TO. 
 oSoVia. John 20, 5 ; with e"r TI, John 20, 
 11 Trapenv\lsfv fls TO fj.irjp.f ioi . Sept. for 
 ^ipirn Prov. 7, 6. 1 Chr. 15, 29. So Ec- 
 clus. 21, 23 fls olnlav. Luc. Tim. 13; ab 
 sol. Aristoph. Pax 983. Arr. Epict. 1. 1. 
 16. Trop. to look into, to know, c. fls, 
 James 1, 25. 1 Pet. 1,12. 
 
 7TCtpfl\Cl/J,pavco, f. X7j\^o/iai, (Xa/i/3aya>.) 
 
 Aor. 3 pers. Plur. TrapeXa/Socraj/ 2 Thess. 3, 
 
 6, see Buttm. 5 103. m. 25 ; to take with or 
 
 to oneself; also to receive with or to oneself; 
 
 | comp. in Xa/i/3ai><o. 
 
 1. to take to oneself, e. g. a city, to take 
 in possession, to seize, Xen. Hell. 4. 8. 11. 
 In N. T. only of persons, tn take to or 
 
jrapa\eyco 
 
 551 
 
 with oneself, as an associate, companion ; 
 c. accus. Matt. 1, 20 pr) (pofinSfjs irapdha- 
 Bfiv Mapta/x TT\V yvvaind crov. V. 24. (Sept. 
 Cant. 8, 2.) Matt. 17, 1 irapa\ap.pdvet 6 
 irja-ovs TOV IlfTpov cerX. 20, 17. 26, 37. 
 Mark 4, 36. 5, 40. 9, 2. 10, 32. Luke 9, 
 
 10. 28. 11, 26. 18, 31. Acts 15, 39. Also 
 with els c. ace. of place, Matt. 4,5. 8. 27, 
 27; /ne TO c. gen. of pers. Matt. 12, 45. 
 18,16. Markl4,3"3; irpos c. ace. of pers. 
 John 14, 3. Sept. for ngb, c. els Num. 
 23, 14; c. fjierd Gen. 22, 3. So Hdian. 3. 
 14. 17. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 15; c. els &\. V. 
 H. 2. 18. Part. TrapaXa/3o>i> is some 
 times used by partial pleonasm before other 
 verbs, in order to express the idea more 
 fully and graphically, comp. in Xa/x/Sd^w 
 no. 1. a. Acts 16, 33 KCU TrapaXajS&v avrovs 
 . . .(\owev arm TU>V 7T\r)yS>v. 21, 24. 26. 32. 
 
 23, 18. So too the verb itself with ai be 
 fore another verb ; Matt. 2, 13 TrapdXa/3e TO 
 jraiSiov KO.\ (pevye. V. 14. 20. 21. John 19, 
 16. So Sept. and ng^ 1 Sam. 17, 31. 57. 
 See Heb. Lex. art. npb no. 1. Trop. of 
 those whom Christ will take with him, or re 
 ceive into favour at his coming, Pass. Matt. 
 
 24, 40 6 els TrapoXa/i/Sdi/erat, ical 6 els d(pi- 
 rrai. v. 41. Luke 17, 34. 35. 36. Also of a 
 teacher, i. q. to receive, to acknowledge, to 
 embrace and follow his instructions, John 
 1, 11 ; comp. in Xap,/3di>o> no. 1. e. 
 
 2. to receive with or to oneself, what is 
 given, imparted, delivered over; see Xa^- 
 jSdvw no. 2 ; e. g. to receive (take) from 
 another into one s own hands, Xen. Cyr. 
 7. 2. 14. In N. T. 
 
 a) Pr. to receive in charge, as an office, 
 dignity, e. g. biaKoviav Col. 4, 17 ; $00-1- 
 Xflav Heb. 12, 28. Sept. for Chald. bag 
 Dan. 5, 33. Jos. Ant. 15. 2. 2. Diod. Sic. 
 
 11. 68. Xen. Hell. 6. 4. 35. 
 
 b) Trop. to receive into the mind, i. q. to 
 be taught, to learn, c. ace. of thing, Mark 
 7, 4 a Trapt\aftov Kpareiv. 1 Cor. 15, 1. 3. 
 Gal. 1, 9. Phil. 4, 9 a *al e /idSfre KOI Trape- 
 \dfiere. Col. 2, 6 TOV XpiaroV meton. for 
 the gospel of Christ. With ace. and dno 
 TLVOS 1 Cor. 11, 23 ; Trapd TIVOS Gal. 1, 12. 
 1 Thess. 2, 13. 4, 1. 2 Thess. 3, 6. 
 Routh Fragm. Patr. I. 464, rrjv iricmv TJV 
 * UPXTJS TrapfXdfiopev. Diod. Sic. 1. 5. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 22. 
 
 7rapd\ej(i), f. o>, (X y<u.) to lay beside 
 or near ; Mid. to lie near or with any one, 
 Horn. II. 2. 515. ib. 14. 237. In N. T. 
 Mid. irapa\fyop.ai, as a nautical term, 
 to lay one s course near, i. e. to sail near, 
 by, along a place or coast, i. q. 
 
 so c. ace. depending on Trapd in composit. 
 Buttm. 147. n. 9. Matth. 426. Winer 
 5 56. 2. C. Acts 27, 8. 13 irape\eyovro TTJV 
 KpriTT)v. Diod. Sic. 13. 3 KaKelSei fjftri irap- 
 e\fyovro TTJV iraXtW. ib. 14. 55. 
 
 7rapa\t09, ov, 6, 17, adj. (Trapd, oXs,) in 
 Gr. writers also TrapdXtos, a, ov, near or by 
 the sea, maritime. Luke 6, 17 dirb TTJS ira- 
 paXiov [x^pas] Tupov, i. e. the sea-coast. 
 Sept. for D^ C]in Gen. 49, 13; & Josh. 11, 
 2. 3. Jos. c. Ap. 1. 12 TTJV TrapdXiov $o- 
 VIKTJS KaTotKovvres. Pol. 3. 39. 3. Thuc. 
 2. 56. 
 
 j)y, f], (TrapaXXdo-o-w,) a 
 passing from hand to hand, transfer, JEs- 
 chyl. Agam. 490. In N. T. change, alter 
 nation, vicissitude, e. g. of celestial bodies, 
 trop. James 1, 17 Trap w [3ew] OVK evi TTO- 
 paXXay;;, see in dnocrKiacrp.a. So Plotin. 
 Enn. 6. 6. 3 rjp.epcov npos VVKTOS 17; TrapaX- 
 
 f. iVo/nat, Mid. depoii. 
 to misreckon, Luc. D. Mort. 4. 
 1. Dem. 822. 25. In N. T. pr. to deceive 
 by false reasoning ; hence genr. to deceive, 
 to circumvent, c. ace. of pers. Col. 2, 4. 
 James 1, 22. Sept. for nan Josh. 9, 2. 
 1 Sam. 19, 17. So Arr. Epict. 2. 20. 7. 
 Diod. Sic. 20. 8. Pol. 1. 11. 4. 
 
 77, ov, (TrapdXuo-tr, Trapa- 
 Xvw,) paralytic, palsied, Matt. 4, 24. 8, 6. 9, 
 2 bis. 6. Mark 2, 3. 4. 5. 9. 10. [Luke 5, 24.] 
 Act. Thorn. ^ 12. Comp. Celsus de Me 
 dic. 3. 27, " Resolutio nervorum interdum 
 tota corpora, interdum partes infestat. Ve- 
 teres auctores illud dTroTrX^tW, hoc Trapd- 
 Xvo-ti/ nominarunt ; nunc utr unique n-apdXv- 
 <riv nominari video." 
 
 TrapaXfto, f. vo-w, (Xva),) to loosen at 
 or from the side, i. e. things joined side by 
 side, to disjoin, Sept. for d ns Lev. 13, 45. 
 Pol. 8. 6. 9. Diod. 13. 106 TO. vdKKia.In 
 N. T. to dissolve, i. e. genr. to relax, to en 
 feeble ; only Perf. part. Pass. TrapaXe- 
 \vfjievos, 77, ov, relaxed, enfeebled, feeble. 
 
 1. Pr. Heb. 12, 12 irapa\e\vp.ei>a yovara. 
 in allusion to Is. 35, 3 where Sept. for 
 bias. Sept. for ns6 Gen. 19, 11. Pol. 
 20/10. 9. Diod. Sic.^O. 72; comp. Plato 
 Ax. 367. b. 
 
 2. Spec, paralyzed, paralytic, i. q. Trapa- 
 Xirmo y q. v. Luke 5, 18. 24. Acts 8, 7 TroX- 
 Xol Se Trapa\e\vp.i>oi Kal gttXoi. 9, 33. 
 1 Mace. 9, 55. ^Eschin. Dial. Soc. 3. 9. 
 Arista. Eth. N. 1. 13. 15. 
 
 Trapaftevo), f. v >, (p.ffa>.) to remain 
 near, by, with any one ; so with npos TIWJ, 
 
552 
 
 1 Cor. 16, 6 irpbs vpas 8e TV\OV Trapap.evu>. 
 Absol. Heb. 7, 23 KcoXveo-3ai 7rapap.ei/en>, 
 
 1. e. in the priest s office. (Judith 12, 7. 
 Plut. Romul. 15. Xen. Mem. 3. 2. 3.) 
 Trop. to continue in any thing, to persevere 
 therein, absol. James 1 , 25. So Diod. Sic. 
 
 2. 29 TT. ev TO 
 
 t, ov/iai, f. ^ao/xat, Mid. 
 depon. (p.v3/op.at, /*)3or,) to speak iesirfe or 
 M)?/A any one, kindly, soothingly, i. q. to 
 soothe, to pacify, Plut. Agesil. 37. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 1. 23. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. to exhort, to encourage, c. ace. expr. 
 or impl. 1 Thess. 2, 1 1 TrapaKaXoui/rey vp.as 
 KOI Trapafiv^ov/Jifvoi. 5, 14. 2 Mace. 15, 9. 
 Plut. Camill. 31. Xen. Hell. 4. 8. 28. 
 
 2. to console, to comfort, c. ace. John 11, 
 19 iva Trap, auras jrepl TOV d8e\(pov avrcov. 
 v. 31. Jos. Ant. 6. 3. 4. Pol. 15. 29. 10. 
 Xen. Conv. 1. 16. 
 
 ) as, TJ, (Trapa/ruSeo/iat,) ex 
 hortation, encouragement, Xen. Ag. 5. 3. 
 In N. T. consolation, comfort, 1 Cor. 14, 3. 
 So Wisd. 19, 12. JE\. V. H. 12. 1 fin. 
 Plato Ax. 365. a. 
 
 /ov, TO, (7rapa;*v3eo/iat,) 
 exhortation, encouragement, Plato Legg. 
 773. e. In N. T. consolation, comfort, sol- 
 ate, Phil. 2, 1. So Wisd. 3, 18. Luc. D. 
 Marin. 9. 1. Thuc. 5. 103. Comp. Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 517. 
 
 TTapavo/jieo), &>, f. ijo-o), (napdvofjios, 
 VO/J.QS,) to act aside from law, to violate 
 laic, to transgress, absol. Acts 23, 3. 
 Sept. for -pbn Ps. 119, 51. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 75. Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 4. 
 
 TTapavofiict) as, f), (Trapai/o/iew,) viola 
 tion of law, transgression, 2 Pet. 2, 16. 
 Sept. for fiSja Ps. 37, 7. Pol. 1. 7. 4. 
 Thuc. 4! 98.* 
 
 ), f. avta, (iriKpaivo), ) 
 aor. 1 TrapfniKpava, comp. Buttm. $ 101. 4; 
 found only in Sept. and N. T. pr. to show 
 bitterness with or towards any one, to deal 
 bitterly with, Sept. Lam. 1, 20 irapajnicpai- 
 vowra napfmKpdv^rjv. Oftener i. q. to im- 
 bilter, to provoke, e. g. God by disobedience, 
 Sept. c. ace. for M^B to rebel, Ps. 5, 12. 
 78, 17. 40. 56. Ez. 20, 13. 21. Hence in 
 N. T. absol. to provoke God, Heb. 3, 16. So 
 Esdr. 6, 15. 
 
 TrapaTTlKpacr/AOS, O v, 6, (irapaniKpai- 
 i>o>,) an imbittering, provocation, e. g. of 
 God by disobedience, Heb. 3, 8. 15. Sept. 
 for CO^B Ps. 95, 8. Not found in the 
 classics. 
 
 TTapaTTiTTTO), f. irf(rovp.ai, (TTITTTO,) aor, 
 2 TrapfTTfo-ov, to fall beside or at the side, 
 Plut. Lysand. 25 ; to fall in with, to meet, 
 Pol. 15. 28. 4. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 10; to fall 
 aside from, to swerve or deviate from, e. g. 
 TIJS 68ov Pol. 3. 54. 5 ; comp. Buttm. 132. 
 4. Hence in N. T. trop. to fall away from 
 the path of duty, from the faith, to aposta 
 tize, absol. Heb. 6, 6. Sept. for i>?B Ez. 
 18, 24. 20, 27. So Pol. 12. 7. 2 T^S aX^Sei - 
 as. Xen. Hell. 1. 6. 4. 
 
 7rapa7rXe&>, f. evo-o/iat, (TrXew,) to sail 
 by or past a place, e. g. rrjv "Efaaov Acts 
 20, 16; for the ace. depending on wapd, 
 see Buttm. { 147. n. 9. Matth. $ 426. Winer 
 1 46. 2. c. Luc. Nigrin. 19. Xen. An. 6. 2. 1. 
 
 7rapair\ri(TLOV, adv. (neut. of irapa- 
 7r\i]<nos, TrXrjcrlos,) near by, nigh to, trop. c. 
 dat. Phil. 2, 27 ^(r3eV77<re TraparrXijcrtcv Sava- 
 To). Absol. Pol. 4. 40. 10. Thuc. 7. 19. 
 
 7ra/3a7rX7?cri&)9, adv. (rrapoTrXijo-tos,) 
 pr. near to, nigh by ; and hence like, in like 
 manner, Heb. 2, 14. Jos. Vit. 5 37. Dem 
 36. 1. Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 25. 
 
 TrapaTTOpevofMai, f. tva-o^ai, Pass, de 
 pon. (TTopevopai,) to go near or by the side of 
 any one, to accompany, Pol. 10. 29. 4. Dion. 
 Hal. 7. 9. In N. T. to pass by, to pass along 
 by, intrans. Mark 11, 20 xal Trpon Trapairo- 
 pevojjifvoi, el8ov rrjv o-vKrjv KT\. Part, of na- 
 panopv6p.fvoi, the passers-by, Matt. 27, 39. 
 Mark 15, 29. With did c. gen. of place 
 through which, Mark 2, 23 8ia TUV a-iropi- 
 pa>v. 9, 30. Sept. for 133 Gen. 37, 27. 
 Josh. 6, 7 ; c. 8id for 3 Deuf. 2, 4. So Pol. 
 2. 27. 5. Plut. Camill. 32. 
 
 TrapaTTTW^a. aros, TO, (Trepan- tVrw,) a 
 misfall, mishap, Diod. Sic. 19. 100. In 
 N. T. 
 
 1. a falling aside or away from right, 
 truth, duty, a lapse, error, fault; pr. unin 
 tentional, arising from ignorance or inadver 
 tence. Matt. 6,14 tdv yap dfpiJTf TOIS dv%pa>- 
 TTOIS ra TrapaTTTw/iara avTtav. V. 15 bis. 
 Mark 11, 25. 26; also Matt. 18, 35. Rom. 
 11, 11. 12. Gal. 6, 1. Sept. for nx^tti 
 Ps. 19, 13 ; Chald. rtbion Dan. 6. 22. Pol. 
 9. 10. 6. 
 
 2. By Hebr. genr. for transgression, sin. 
 Rom. 4, 25 os TrapeSdSj; Sia ra TrapaTrrco- 
 p-ara rjfJLuv. Rom. 5, 15. 16. 20. 2 Cor. 5, 
 19. Eph. 1,7. 2, 1. 5. Col. 2, 13 bis. James 
 5, 16. Of Adam s transgression and fall, 
 Rom. 5, 15. 17. 18. (Wisd. 10, 1.) Sept. 
 forbsa Ez. 14, 13; ty Ez. 3, 20; S^B 
 Job 36, 9. Ez. 14, 11. Act. Thorn, j 38, 
 56. 
 
Trapappew 
 
 553 
 
 f. peuo-o/im, (pco.) Pass, 
 aor. 2 iraptppvTjv in signif. like the Act. 
 Buttm. J 1 1-1 /> > to flow near, to flow by, 
 pr. of a river, Hdian. 1. 11. 7. Xen. Cyr. 4. 
 5. 4 ; trop. to glide away, to escape from the 
 mind, Symm. Prov. 4. 21. Luc. Disp. c. Hes. 
 5 ti rt tv T<a TTJS TTOujo-eo)? 5po/i Trapappvtv 
 XaSr;. Plato Legg. 781. a ; of a person, to 
 glide along, to slip in by stealth, as a thief, 
 Plut. de Solert. Animal. 13 med. rrapap- 
 pvtls yap ai/3po>7rof (Is TOV vea>v TOV A.a-K\rj- 
 iriov. In N. T. once of persons, trop. to 
 glide aside, to miss, to fail of any thing ; 
 ahsol. Heb. 2, 1 Set rjp.as vpotri^tiv T0 ~ ts 
 aKouo-Seio-i, p.f)irorf 7rapappvup.ev, lest we glide 
 aside, lest we fail to profit by the things 
 heard (rots aKoucrSeto-t) and so miss of the 
 great salvation ; parall. with d/ieXTjo-airev 
 o-toTJ/pia? v. 3 ; comp. Heb. 4, 1 . So Sept. 
 vie, P.TJ Trapappvjjs, Typr/a-ov de (p.f)v $ov\f]v, 
 for Heb. nfe Prov. 3, 21. So too Clem. 
 Alex. Pcedag. III. p. 246 Iva fj.rj Trapappvuicri. 
 TTJS dXrj Sfias 8ia ^awoTT/ra. Eupol. ap. Stob. 
 Serm. 4. p. 53 pafvtrat re KCU irapappel TO>V 
 (ppevwv Tea o-w Xdyw. Others, to glide aside, 
 to stumble and fall, to perish ; so Chrysost. 
 fir/ r:apappv5>p.(v, rovre ort, pr) a7roXci>p.e3a, p,r] 
 (K.7T<T(i>iJ.(v. But this sense is not supported 
 by any usage. 
 
 Trapdarjfiof, ov, 6, 77, adj. (or/fia,) by- 
 marked, having a mark, sign, stamp ; e. g. 
 as bad, of false stamp, base, so of coin, Dem. 
 766. 6. Plut. de Adul. et Amic. 24 ; trop. 
 of pers. notorious, so prjTiap Dem. 307. 26 ; 
 also as good, trop. of pers. noted, distinguish 
 ed, Plut. Brut. 2. Hdian. 5. 8. 15. Hence 
 in N. T. of a ship, having a sign, badge, 
 emblem; Acts 28, 11 eVrrXouu. . . irapacrr]n<p 
 Aioo-Kvpois, in a ship . . . bodged with the Dios- 
 curoi, having Castor and Pollux as its sign 
 or emblem. So Neut. TO Trapda-rjp-ov as 
 Subst. the sign, badge, emblem of a ship, by 
 which it was distinguished from others; 
 commonly a picture or image on the prow, 
 and different from the tutela or figure of the 
 tutelar god of the ship upon the stern ; 
 though sometimes the parasemon and lutela 
 would seem to have been the same, as in the 
 present case ; comp. Potter s Gr. Ant. II. p. 
 128 sq. Adam s Rom. Ant p. 401. Diet, 
 of Antt. art. Navis no. 1, 2. Plut. Sept. 
 Sap. Conv. 18 pen. Trv Sop.fvov TOV re vav- 
 
 .Kalrrjs Vf<as TO 7rapd(rr]fj.ov. 
 
 Q), dcra), (<rKfvda>,) to make 
 ready before or for any one, to prepare at 
 hand, e. g. food, absol. Acts 10, 10 eyeVero 
 Si rpocrTTfivos . . . irapa<TKfva6i>Tu>i>o ( (Kfiva>v. 
 So 2 Mace. 2, 27 crv/wroo-ioi/. Hdot. 9. 82 
 tirlirvov. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 1, 2. Mid. or 
 
 Pass, to prepare oneself, to be prepared, 
 ready, 2 Cor. 9, 2. 3 ; elsiro\fj.ov 1 Cor. 14, 
 8. Sept. for tp Jer. 50, 42. So Jos. 
 Ant. 5. 7. 5. Hdian. 2. 14. 2. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 5. 9. 
 
 vrapaa Kevrj, fjg, 17, (o-Ktviy,) a making 
 ready at hand, preparation, 2 Mace. 15, 21 
 TU>V onXtov. Jos. B. J. 1. 11.8 rou SetTrvou. 
 Hdian. 8. 5. 7. In N. T. in the Jewish sense, 
 the preparation, i e. the day or hours before 
 the sabbath or other festival, when prepara 
 tion was made for its celebration, the ere of 
 the sabbath, Matt. 27, 62. Mark 15, 42. 
 Luke 23, 54. John 19, 14. 31. 42. So Jos. 
 Ant. 16. 6. 2 tv crd(3[3a<ri.v TJ 777 Trpo Tavrtjs 
 Trapao-Kfvfj. The same is called npocrdfifta- 
 TOV Mark 15, 42. Judith 8, 6 ; and npofopTiot 
 Philo de Vit. contempl. p. 616. See Gr. 
 Harm. p. 219. 
 
 Trapareiva), f. eva, (reiVa),) to stretch 
 out along, near, by; to extend near, Sept. 
 Gen. 49, 13. Plut. Pyrrh. 20. Xen. An. 7. 
 3. 48. In N. T. trop. to extend, to prolong 
 to continue, in time, c. ace. Acts 20, 7 Traps - 
 reive re TOV \6yov pfXP 1 ^f^owKriov. So 
 Jos. Ant. 1. 3. 9 TOV xpdvov. Poly^n. 3. p. 
 265, TOV aKpo/SoXtcr/iOJ/ a^P Set Xr/s napeTfivf. 
 Intrans. of time Diod. Sic. 2. 18. Plut. X 
 Orat. Vit. 5. 
 
 Traparrjpew, >, f. 770-00, (njpe co,) 1. tf 
 watch closely, e. g. the actions of any ono 
 with sinister intent, c. ace. Mark 3, 2 ita- 
 pfTrjpovv avrov, tl rois crdftfiacnv 3epa7rev- 
 o-ei avrov. Luke 6, 7. 14, 1. 20, 20 ; so 
 Tas Trd\as Acts 9, 24. Sept. for OST p s . 
 37, 12. Pol. 17. 3. 2 ; genr. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 14. 4. 
 
 2. Of times, to observe carefully, to keep 
 superstiliously, e. g. fipfpas, prjvas, Gal. 4, 
 10. Jos. Ant. 3. 5. 5 Tas tfto op.do as. 
 
 TTapaTriprfO lS, ecos, 17, (irapaTTjpeu,) 
 close watching, accurate observation. Luke 
 17, 20 ov% f pxerai 17 /3acriX. TOV 3. /xera 
 TrapaTrjpT]a-(fi)s, not icith observation, i. e. not 
 so that its progress may be watched. Arr. 
 Epict. 3. 16. 16. Pol. 16. 22. 8. Diod. Sic. 
 1. 28. 
 
 TTapari^r/fjil,, f. 3170-0), (n 3r;/xt,) 1. to 
 put or place near any one, e. g. 
 
 a) Of food, to set or lay before any one, 
 c. ace. of thing and dat. of pers. expr. or impl. 
 Mark 6, 41 Iva TrapaSwo-ii/ avrois. 8, 6 bis. 
 7. Luke 9, 16. 10,8. 1 1 , 6 011% e^co 6 irapa- 
 3>7(r<a avrw. Acts 16, 34 rpa7reai>. Pass. 
 1 Cor. 10, 27 irav TO rrapariSf/ifw vplr 
 eo-St ere. Sept. for ^Bb IPO Gen. 18,8; 
 \5Sb nito Gen. 24, 33. Luc D. Deor. 24. 
 1. Xen. Conv. 2. 2 
 
554 
 
 b) Trop. as a teacher, to set or lay before, 
 to propound, to deliver, c. ace. et dat. Matt. 
 13, 24 a\\rjv Tvapaj3o\rjV Trapt^rjKev avroty. 
 v. 31. Mid. c. on. Acts 17, 3. Sept. for 
 \3Bb ttto Ex. 19, 7. 21, 1. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 6. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 14. Mid. Jos. Ant. 4. 
 8. 2 init. 
 
 2. Mid. 7rapaT/3e/iiat, aor. 2 7rape3e- 
 IJLTJV, aor. 2 imper. TrapdSou 2 Tim. 2, 2, not 
 TrapaSov, comp. Buttm. j 107. m. 19 ; pr. to 
 place for oneself with any one, i. q. to give in 
 charge, to commit, to intrust, c. ace. et dat. 
 Luke 12, 48 KUI irap&evro iro\v. 1 Tim. 
 1, 18. 2 Tim. 2 , 2. 1 Pet. 4, 19. Also 
 Luke 23, 46 EIS ^eipay trou 7rapa3ijaojuai TO 
 TTvevp-d P.OV, comp. Ps. 31, 6 where Sept. 
 for B TiS TpBri . So Tob. 4, 1 . Pol. 33. 
 12. 3. Diod. Sic. 17. 23. Spec, to commit, 
 to commend, c. ace. et dat. Acts 14, 23 irape- 
 3ero avrovs rw Kvpi<p. 20, 32. Jos. Ant. 
 4. 8. 2 med. TrapartSe /xei/os tyxus pdp.a> o~a>- 
 
 7rapaTvy%dva), aor. 2 Trape-rvxov, (rvy- 
 \dva>,) to happen near, to fall in with any 
 one, Part, of Traparvyxavovrts, Acts 17, 17. 
 *-Jos. Ant. 2. 9. 5. Pol. 10. 15. 4. Xen. 
 Apol. Socr. 11. 
 
 TTapaVTl/ca, adv. (avriKa, avros,) pr. a 
 this very instant, instantly, forthwith ; equiv. 
 to Trap avTa ra Trpay/xara V. ra yudptva, 
 Tob. 4, 18. Pol. 1. 60. 1 ; comp. Tittm. de 
 Synon. N. T. p. 184. Herm. ad Vig. p. 781. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 47. In N. T. once c. art. 
 o, fj, TO irapavTiKa, as adj. instant, present, 
 momentary, 2 Cor. 4, 17 ; comp. Buttm. 
 5 125. 6. So Dem. 72. 16 rj 
 17801/77. Thuc. 2. 64. Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 9. 
 
 TTCtpafapO), aor. 2 Trapf)veyicoi>, (<pep,) 
 to bear along to, to bring on before, e. g. 
 food, Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 6; to bear along by, 
 to bear away, as does a stream, Act. Diod. 
 Sic. 17. 55; Pass. Hdian. 8. 4. 7. Diod. 
 Sic. 18. 35. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Act. trop. to let pass away, to avert, 
 e. g. evil, c. ace. of thing, Mark 14, 36 
 TraptvejKf TO TvoTrjpiov air e /ioC TOVTO. Luke 
 22, 42. Comp. Matt. 26, 39. 42, where it is 
 7rapcpxfo-%ai. Plut. Arat. 43 TOT* JLUV ovv 
 Trap-fjvfyKf TO prfiiv. Xen. Ven. 5. 27. 
 
 2. Pass. pr. to be borne along by, to be 
 borne or carried away, e. g. clouds, Jude 
 12 ve(j)e\ai uwSpoi VTTO dw/MNf Trapacpepd- 
 pevai, i. e. driven rapidly along. So Plut. 
 Arat. 1 2 Trpoy Se pfya Trvtvpa . . . irapafytpo- 
 fifvos fJioXis rj-^aro TTJS Adpias. Trop. to 
 be borne or carried away in mind ; Heb. 13. 
 9 SiSa^m? 7roiKi\ais fjirj Trapa^epfffSe. So 
 P^ut. Timol. 6 OVTGOS al /cpumr . . . afiovrai 
 
 KOI Trapacpfpovrai paSiwr viro KT\. Ml. V. 
 H. 9. 41. In both these examples Rec. hag 
 
 TT(pl(pfpO[J.(U q. V. 
 
 to think amiss, i. e. to be beside oneself, to be 
 foolish, to act foolishly ; absol. 2 Cor. 11, 23 
 Trapcxppovcov XaX&j. Sept. Zech. 7, 11. JE\. 
 V. H. 12. 51. Xen. Mem. 4. 7. 6. 
 
 as, 17, (Trapa^poyeco,) a 
 being beside oneself, folly, madness, 2 Pet. 
 2, 16. Not found elsewhere. 
 
 TrapaxeifJLdfa, f. do-a>, (xfifidfa,) tc 
 winter near or at a place, with a person, in- 
 trans. Acts 27, 12. 28, 11. 1 Cor. 16, 6. 
 Tit. 3, 12. Dem. 909. 14. Diod. Sic. 19. 
 34. Pol. 2. 64. 1. 
 
 as, 77, 
 
 a wintering near or at a place, Acts 27, 12. 
 Pol. 3. 34. 6. Diod. Sic. 19. 68. 
 
 adv. (pr. wapa TO 
 lit. with the thing itself, i. e. on the spot, 
 forthwith, straightway; Matt. 21, 19 /cat 
 (t-npdvSr) Trapaxprip-a fj wrf, i. e. imme 
 diately after being cursed, v. 20. Luke 1, 
 64. 4, 39. 5, 25. 8, 44. 47. 55. 13, 13. 18, 
 43. 19, 11. 22, 60. Acts 3,7. 5, 10. 9,18. 
 12, 23. 13, 11. 16, 26. 33. Sept. for nxna 
 Num. 6, 9. Is. 30, 13. ^El. V. H. 10. 3! 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 17. 
 
 7Tap8a\t9, f (os, 17, (TrapSoy,) a leopard, 
 Rev. 13,2. Sept. for 13 Is. 11,6. Jer. 
 5, 6. JEl. V. H. 12. 39. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 7. 
 
 TTCtpeSpeva), f. tva-at, (TrapeSpoy, eSpa, 
 ebp.at,) to sit near, i. q. to wait near, to 
 serve; c. dat. TW Svcriao-T^p/o) 1 Cor. 9, 13 
 Lachm. for TrpotrcSpeuu. Pol. 29. 11. 10. 
 Dem. 572. 10. 
 
 Trapd/Ai, f. eVopn, (ei p- 1 ) to be near by, 
 to be present, to have come, absol. John 7, 6 
 6 Kaipbs epos ovrrot vdpctmv. 11,28 6 SiSa- 
 o-KaXos TrdpfOTt. Acts 10, 21. 17,6. 1 Cor. 
 
 5, 3 bis. 2 Cor. 10, 2. 11. 13, 2. 10. Rev. 
 17, 8 in later edit. So 2 Pet. 1, 12 / rfj 
 irapovo-T) dX^Set a, i. e. the truth which is 
 with you, which ye have received. With 
 e i> c. dat. of time Luke 13, 1. (Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 2. 4.) With fls c. ace. of pers. Col. 1, 
 
 6, comp. in els no. 4 ; eVi c. gen. of pers. 
 before whom, Acts 24, 19 ; e <p o v. e<p w 
 of purpose Matt. 26, 50; fvwiriov TWOS 
 Acts 10, 33; irpos c. ace. Acts 12, 20. 
 2 Cor. 11, 8. Gal. 4, 18. 20. Sept. for &o 3 
 Num. 22, 20. Lam. 4, 18. (Diod. Sic. 17.8. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 23; c. els Jos. Ant. 1. 19. 
 4. Xen. An. 1. 2. 2 ; em c. ace. Xen. Ag. 
 1.32.) Part. TO irapov, the present time, 
 Heb. 12, 11 Trpos TO rrapoV. So Jos. Ant. 6t 
 
555 
 
 5. 1. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 29. Spoken of things, 
 c. dat. of pers. to be present with or to a 
 person, i. e. the person has the thing, 2 Pet. 
 1 , 9 <u yap fir) Trdpeort ravra, i. e. he who 
 lias not these things. 2, 8 Lachm. (Wisd. 
 31,1.) Hence Part, r a Trap ovra, things 
 which one has, i. e. property, fortune, condi 
 tion, Heb. 13, 5 dpKovp.fvoi roly irapoixriv. 
 So Phocylid. 4 dpKetcrSai rrapeoG<rt, Kal dX- 
 \OTpiav a7re xfo-3at. Xen. Conv. 4. 42. For 
 Part. 7rapp.Vor see in Trapirjpt. 
 
 TrapeKrajco, f. &>, (etVayw.) to lead in 
 by one s side, to introduce, Diod. Sic. 1. 87. 
 ib. 3. 2. In N. T. to lead or bring in by 
 stealth, to smuggle in, c. ace. e. g. ras aipe- 
 (rfis into the church, 2 Pet. 2, 1. So Pol. 1. 
 18. 3. Plut. Pyrrh. 29. Diod. Sic. 12. 41. 
 
 TTapetcra/CTO?, ou, 6, 17, adj. (Trapeio-dyco,) 
 brought in by stealth, smuggled in, e. g. 
 into the church, Gal. 2, 4 8iu TOVS IT. d8e\- 
 (povs. Hesych. irapdcraKrov aXXorpiov. 
 
 Trapeia-Bvvci), f. vo-o>, (eiVSvi/w,) aor. 2 
 e8vv, to go or come in by stealth, to creep in 
 unawares, e. g. into the church, Jude 4. 
 Jos. B. J. 1. 24. 1. Hdian. 7. 9. 18; trop. 
 ib. 1. 6. 2. Plut. Agis 3. 
 
 ,) aor. 2 nap- 
 
 1. to go or come in beside or with any 
 tiling, to enter in therewith, thereby, ihereto ; 
 Rom. 5, 20 vop.os 8f TrapeicrljXSei (ets TOP 
 Kocrp.0!/.), iu< //(e Zaw entered in thereunto, 
 (v. 12 q apapria eiVJjXSe,) i. e. the law 
 supervened upon the state of transgression 
 from Adam to Moses; comp. Gal. 3, 19. 
 Test. XII Patr. p. 608 yiWrcu pf3q, KOI 
 Trapd.a-fpxf ai rj avaurxyvria. Philo de Te- 
 mul. p. 243. C, nyvoia . . . p.rjTe (pas p-rjrf 
 \uyov Trapfta-eXSeif eaJcra. Id. de Opif. p. 
 34. d. 
 
 2. to go or come in by stealth, to enter un 
 awares, e. g. into the church, absol. Gal. 
 2, 4 olrivft irapfia-^X^ov KaTaa-KOTrfja-ai. 
 Plut. Coriolan. 23. Pol. 2. 55. 3. Diod. Sic. 
 12. 27. 
 
 Trapeta fftepa), (<pe p,) aor. 1 nap(ia~I]- 
 ixyica, to bear or bring in beside or there 
 unto, to bring forward therewith, e. g. vopov 
 Dem. 484. 1, 12. In N. T. trop. to bring 
 forward along with, to exhibit therewith, 
 e. g. OTTOVO T)! ira<ra.v 2 Pet. 1 , 5. 
 
 TTapetCTOS, adv. (KTOJ,) pr. near by 
 without, out by, found in very late writers 
 and only trop. besides; so c. art. TO. irapK- 
 TOS, the things besides, over and above, 2 Cor. 
 11, 28 x^P f v Tfapficros. Buttm. J 125. G. 
 Also with a gen. besides, except, Matt. 5, 32 
 ivs Xoyov vopvtias. [19, 9.] Acts 26, 
 
 29. Aquil. for "* Deut. 1, 36. Gr. in- 
 cert. for "n!ba Lev. 23, 38. So Pamphil. 
 in Geopon. 13. 15. 7. 
 
 7rapeppo\.r/j 779, 77, (7rupep,/3uXX, /3dX- 
 Xw,) a throwing in beside, interpolation, e. g. 
 of sentences, ^Eschin. 23. 41. ib. 83. 21. 
 As a military \vord,juxla-array, 7rapdraty, 
 a certain method of drawing up troops, by 
 placing some in the intervals between 
 others, Pol. 10. 21. 5. ib. 11. 32. 6; see 
 ^En. Tactic. 31, in Wetst. ad Act. 21, 34. 
 Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Meton. an array, for an army, host, 
 as drawn up in battle-array; Heb. 11, 34 
 TrapffjiftoXas ei(\ivav dXXorp/cov, see in (cXtVo) 
 no. 2. Rev. 20, 9. Sept. for fi.?na Ex. 14, 
 24. Judg. 4, 16. Pol. 3. 73. 8. JE1. V. H. 
 
 14. 46. 
 
 2. In late usage, an encampment, pr. 
 juxta-arrangement in a camp, Pol. 6. 28. 1. 
 ib. 6. 31. 7. Hence genr. a camp, spoken 
 of a standing camp, caslra stativa, Engl. 
 quarters, barracks, e. g. the quarters of the 
 Roman soldiers in Jerusalem, in the fortress 
 Antonia, which was adjacent to the temple 
 and commanded it, Acts 21, 34. 37. 22, 24. 
 23, 10. 16. 32; see in art. lepov. Also of 
 the encampments of the Israelites in the 
 desert, Heb. 13, 11; and in the same con 
 nection trop. v. 13. See Lev. 4, 12. 21. 16, 
 27, where Sept. for "liFTO ; as also 1 Sam. 
 4, 5. 6. 2 K. 7, 5. 7. Jos. Ant. 7. 4. 1. 
 Pol. 3. 74. 5, 9. Plut. J. Caes. 45. Phrynichus 
 says this use of the word is 8eivS>s Mcuce- 
 8ovm6v, ed. Lob. p. 377 ; comp. Sturz de 
 Dial. Maced. p. 30. 
 
 trouble besides, further ; c. dat. of pers. Acts 
 
 15, 19 Kpivu), P.TI Trapei/o^Xftf Toils dno TCOV 
 
 f 3i>d>j/. Sept. for nxbn Mic. 6, 3 ; v*nan 
 Job 16, 3. 1 Mace. : 12, 14. Pol. 1. 8.V. 
 Diod. Sic. 14. 27. 
 
 7rape7rio?7/io < ?, ov, 6, 17, adj. (tVi S^/ios, 
 eViS^/ieco,) a by-resident, sojourner, among 
 a people not one s own, Heb. 11, 13. 1 Pet. 
 1, 1. 2, 11. Sept for aajin Gen. 23, 4. 
 Ps. 39. 13. Pol. 32. 22. 4 
 
 ,, f. rrapeXfuo-o/iai, 
 ,) aor. 2 TrapijXSov; on the fut. see 
 
 1. to come near to any person or thing, 
 to draw near, to come, e. g. to a table or the 
 like; Luke 12, 37 TrapeXSwi 8iaKovfja-(i av- 
 rois. 17, 7. (Ecclus. 29, 9.) Also in a 
 hostile manner, absol. Acts 24, 7. So 
 genr. Jos. B. J. 3. 8. 2. M\. V H. 12. 39. 
 Xen. Conv. 1. 7. 
 
Trapecrts 
 
 556 
 
 2. to go or pass near, to pass along by. 
 a) Pr. and absol. Luke 18, 37 on 6 Irja-ovs 
 6 Na. irapfpxfTai. With ace. of pers. or 
 place, depending on napd, Buttm. J 147. n. 
 9. Matth. 5 426. 3 ; so Mark 6, 48. Acts 
 16, 8 TrapeXSoVrey 8e nyi VLwriap. Also 
 Sia TT> oSoO Matt. 8, 28. Sept. for -153 
 Ex. 15, 16. Judg. 11, 17. 19. So Xen 
 An. 2. 4. 25; c. ace. Ceb. Tab. 9. Xen. 
 Cyr. 2. 2. 7. Of time, to pas s by, to be 
 past, absol. Matt. 14, 15 77 &pa 77817 Trap^X- 
 3fi>. Acts 27, 9. 1 Pet. 4, 3 6 TrapeXTjXv- 
 3&>s Xpovos. Sept. for "1235 Job 17, 11. 
 Cant. 2, 11. So Dem. 40. "l3. Xen. An. 1. 
 7. 18. 
 
 b) Trop. i. q. to pass away, to perish, 
 absol. a) Genr. Matt. 5, 18 eW av nap- 
 e XSfl 6 ovpavbs KOI 77 yrj. 24, 34. 35. Mark 
 13, 30. 31. Luke 16, 17. 21, 32. 33. 2 Cor. 
 5, 17. James 1, 10. 2 Pet. 3, 10. Rev. 21, 
 1. Sept. and 1?S Ps. 37, 36. So Theocr. 
 27. 8 TO.XCL yap ere Trapep^ercu, cas ovap, rjfir). 
 Dem. 291. 12. -ft) Of words, declara 
 tions, and the like, to pass away without 
 fulfilment, to be in vain ; Matt. 5, 18. 24, 
 35 of e Xoyot uov ov fir] TrapeXScocrt. Mark 
 13, 31. Luke 21, 33. 
 
 c) Trop. of evils, to pass away from any 
 one, to be removed, averted; with OTTO c. 
 gen. of pers. Matt. 26, 39 TrapeXS/rto O.TT 
 f/Mv TO iroTTjpiov TOVTO. v. 42. Mark 14, 35. 
 Pr, Sept. Cant. 3, 4. Ml. V. H. 13. 38. 
 
 d) Trop. to pass by or over, to neglect, to 
 transgress, c. ace. see in lett. a ; Luke 11, 
 42 TTJV KpLa-iv. 15, 29 eWoXiji/. Sept. and 
 13S Deut. 26, 13. Jer. 34, 18. Dion. Hal. 
 Ant. 1. 58. Lys. 107. 42 vopov. 
 
 TTapecriS, ea>s, f], (Trapinp.1,) a letting 
 pass, pretermission, remission, in the sense 
 of overlooking, not punishing, Rom. 3, 25 ; 
 diff. from &<pns, which implies pardon, 
 forgiveness ; comp. Tittm. de Syn. N. T. p. 
 185. Dion. Hal. Ant. 7. 37 rr)i/ /*eV 6X0- 
 (r X P^ vaftotv ovx fvpovro. Comp. -rrapirifjii 
 Ecclus. 23, 2. 
 
 f. {fa, (e^o),) Mid. fut. 2 pers. 
 i, see below in no. 2 ; to hold near 
 by, beside any one, Horn. Od. 18. 317. II. 
 18. 556. Hence in N. T. to hold out to or 
 towards any one, e. g. 
 
 1. to present, to offer, c. ace. Luke 6, 29 
 trapeze KOI TTJV aXkrjv, SC. criayova. Luc. 
 D. Dear. 4. 5. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 54. 
 
 2. Trop. to present, to occasion, to give, 
 to show, towards or in behalf of any one ; 
 with ace. of thing and dat. of pers. expr. 
 or impl. E. g. KOTTOV V. KOTTOVS rrape- 
 \eiv rivi, to giie one. trouble, i. q. to trouble, 
 
 to vex, see fully in KVTTOS fin. Matt. 26, 10> 
 Mark 14, 6. Luke 11, 7. 18, 5. Gal. 6, 17. 
 (Pol. 1. 20. 10 ovar^fpfiav Trape ^eii/.) Also 
 epyao-tav Trape ^eiz/ T ivi, to make or 
 bring gain to any one, Acts 16, 16. (Jos. 
 Ant. 8. 2. 6 p,io-3oi>.) Acts 17, 31 mWw 
 Trapaa-x&v iraa-iv, Lat. omnibus fidem fad- 
 ens, causing belief in all, i. e. proving, con 
 firming to all. (Jos. Ant. 2. 9. 4. Plut. C. 
 Mar. 17. Pol. 4. 33. 7.) Acts 22, 2 Trape - 
 <TXOV rjcrvxiav, they gave silence. (Sept. for 
 ttipain Job 34, 29. Dion. Hal. Ant. 11. 
 32.) Acts 28, 2 TT. (pi\av%po>7riai>. 1 Tim. 
 1, 4. 6, 17. So Jos. Ant. 1. 3. 1. Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 5. 28. Mid. Trape ^o/zai, to do or 
 sJiow for one s self, for one r s own part ; 
 Luke 7, 4 aius ecmv u> nape^fi TOVTO, for 
 whom thou shouldst on thy part do this, 
 where for 2 pers. fut. 7rap<fei see Buttm. 
 $ 103. m. 18 ; others read Trape^. Acts 19, 
 24. Col. 4, 1 TO SiKaiov . . . Tols 8ov\ois Trape- 
 XfcrSf, show on your part towards servants 
 what is just. (Dem. 228. 26. Xen. An. 7. 
 6. 11.) With two ace. eWoV TI, Tit. 2, 7 
 (reavTov TrapexofJLfvos TVTTOV KaXuv tpycav. 
 So Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 39; Act. Plut. de Lib. 
 educ. 20. 
 
 TTapiyyopia, as, 17, (Trap^yope w, TrapiT- 
 yopos, dyopeva),) an addressing, exhortation, 
 Apoll. Rh. 2. 1281. In N. T. consolation, 
 comfort, Col. 4, 11. So Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 3. 
 Plut. de Exil. 1. 
 
 TrapjeVLd) as, rj, (7rap3e j/o?,) virginity, 
 virgin age; Luke 2, 36 770-00-0 7-77 /ierot 
 av8pos enTa OTTO TrapSei tay avTrjs, i. e. with 
 the husband whom she had married as a 
 virgin. Sept. for din^j Jer. 3, 4. Ec 
 clus. 15, 2. Diod. Sic. 3. 69 or 70. Plut. 
 Brut. 13. 
 
 Trap jez/o?, O v, 6, 77, adj. virgin ; so yvvfj 
 pSeVos Hes. Theog. 514; 777 TrapSeVw 
 Suyarpi AlyinrTov Sept. for n^ns Jer. 46, 
 1 1 ; 77 TrapSevoy yrj Jos. Ant. 1 . 1 . 2 ; TrapS. 
 ^77717 ^Eschyl. Pers. 613. In N. T. 
 
 1. Fern. 17 TrapSeVoy, Subst. a virgin, 
 maiden. a) Pr. one who has not known 
 man ; e. g. ^Luke 1, 27 bis, Trpoy irapZevov 
 fjLfp.irrjcmviJ.evrjv . . . Mapiav KT\. comp. v. 
 34. Trop. 2 Cor. 11, 2. Sept. for M^iina 
 Gen. 24, 16. 1 K. 1, 2. So Hdian. L 111 
 12, 13. Plut. Romul. 22. Matt. 1, 23 77 
 Trap^fvos tv yacrrpl egei, quoted from Is. 7, 
 14 where Sept. for nabs ; apparently there 
 referring to the youthful spouse of the pro 
 phet, comp. Is. 8, 3. 4. 8. 10. 18. 7, 3. 10, 
 21. So nbina , Sept. wp,077, as lamenting 
 for the husband of her youth, Joel 1, 8. 
 Sept. also vtavts for fiab? p s . 68, 26 ; aa 
 
557 
 
 also Aqnil. Symm. Theod. in Is. 7, 14. So 
 too fj irap^evos for youthful spouse, bride, 
 vvfKpT), Horn. II. 2. 514 oi-s TfKtv AoTua^r;, 
 irapZfvos aiSoirj. Soph. Trach. 1221. The 
 sense then in Matt. 1. c. would be : Thus 
 was fulfilled in a strict and literal sense, 
 that which the prophet spoke in a wider 
 sense and on a different occasion. See 
 Heb. Lex. jvcby . b) Genr. of a mar 
 riageable maiden, damsel, Matt. 25, 1. 7. 
 11. Acts 21, 9. 1 Cor. 7, 25. 28. 34 /zf/*e- 
 ptorat 17 yvvr/ KOI 17 Trap^tvos, i. q. rj ayapos. 
 v. 36. 37. [38] TI irap^evos airoC, i. q. his vir 
 gin daughter, marriageable but unmarried. 
 Sept. and rnsbs , Gen. 24, 43 ; for fi-nsj 
 Gen. 24, 14. 55. 34, 3 of Dinah after she 
 was defiled. So Diod. Sic. 5. 73. Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 6. 9. Mem. 1. 5. 2. 
 
 2. Masc. as adj. Rev. 4, 14 ovroi e!o-iv, ol 
 UfTayvvaiKtovovK efj.o\vv^ir](Tav irap Sfvoiydp 
 (l<ny,fvr they are virgins, i. e. chaste, pure, 
 free from all whoredom and uncleanness as 
 the symbols of idolatry ; see in f)\os no. 2, 
 and wopvfvft}. Suid. *A/3eX OVTOS TrapSeVoy 
 KOI Siicaios VTT?IPX(. Photii Amphil. Quaest. 
 188. p. 785. TOV nap Stvov KOI et ayyfXioToC 
 Icoawou. So of Joseph, Lib. Asseneth p. 
 92, 98, in Fabr. Cod. pseud. V. T. Tom. II. 
 
 ?, ov, 6, a Parthian, spoken of 
 Jews born or living in Parthia, Acts 2, 9. 
 So Jos. Ant. 10. 11. 7. Hdian. 6. 5. 15. 
 Parthia proper "was a region of Persia, on 
 the northeast of Media and Hyrcania, and 
 north of Aria, wholly surrounded by moun 
 tains ; Plin. H. N. 6. 29. Strabo 1 1. p. 51 1 sq. 
 In the later period of the Roman republic, 
 the Parthians extended their conquests and 
 became masters of a large empire, including 
 all the provinces of the former Persian king 
 dom, and extending to the Euphrates ; Plin. 
 6. 30. Strabo 16. p. 748. They were es 
 teemed the most expert horsemen and ar 
 chers in the world ; and the custom of dis 
 charging their arrows while in full flight, is 
 particularly celebrated by the Roman poets ; 
 comp. Hor. Od. 2. 13. 17. Virg. Geor. 3. 31. 
 See genr. Cellar. Notit. Orb. II. p. 700 sq. 
 
 f. Trapqo-w, (;/,) Pass. perf. 
 i, Buttm. 108. I. 1 ; to let by, to let 
 pass along, Hdot. 3. 72 ; trop. to let pass, 
 to prcctermit, to neglect, Luc. Hermot. 15. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 12; Kaipov Pol. 1. 33. 5; 
 also to let go loose, to relax, e. g. ropes, TOI/S 
 repSpiovs Aristoph. Eq. 440 or 442, comp. 
 437. Hence in N. T. trop. Pass, n-apif- 
 pai,to be relaxed, enfeebled ; only Part. perf. 
 as x f l P (s Kap(ip.fvai, hands enfeebled, hang 
 ing down from weariness and despondency, 
 
 Heb. 12, 12. Sept. for nsn Zeph. 3, 17. 
 Diod. Sic. 14. 105. Pol. 7. 58. 9. Plato 
 
 , f. 77apaoT7;<r, 
 aor. 2 irapeoTTjv , also Pres. Trapia-rdvo), a 
 later secondary form, Rom. 6, 13. 16. Dem. 
 28. 9. Pol. 3. 113. 8; comp. Buttm. 112. 
 10. } 106. n. 5. Trans, to cause to stand 
 near ; intrans. to stand near ; see in IOTTJ/U 
 init. Buttm. $ 107. II. 
 
 1. TRANS, in the Pres. impf. ful. and aor. 
 
 1 of the Active, to cause to stand near, to 
 place near by, JE\. V. H. 12. 1 post med. 
 Pol. 3. 113. 8. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1 . to place or set before any one, to pre 
 sent, to exhibit; c. ace. et dat. expr. or 
 impl. Acts 23, 33 7Tapfa"n](rav <a\ TOV HavXov 
 avT<a. Luke 2, 22 rw /cvpt w, in the temple. 
 
 2 Cor. 4, 14 Kal Trapaarqcm [i^ar] <rvv 
 v/juv, sc. TW firman TOV Xp. So with two 
 ace. of object and predic.-rtra TI, Acts 1, 3. 
 9, 41. Rom. 6, 13 bis. 16 w Trapia-rdveTf 
 eavrovs 8ov\ovs. V. 19 bis. 12, 1. 2 Cor. 
 11,2. Eph. 5, 27. Col. 1, 22. 28. 2 Tim. 
 
 2, 15. Sept. for l^rt Lev. 16, 7; ffK 
 Gen. 47, 2. Luc. Icarom. 24. jL H. An. 
 
 7. 44. Hdian. 5. 5. 11. 
 
 2. to place at hand, to provide, to furnish ; 
 C. ace. et dat. Matt. 26, 53 TrapaoTTjo-ei pot 
 TrXei ovj KrX. Acts 23, 24 KTT/W;. Luc. D. 
 Mar. 6. 2. Pol. 30. 9. 3. 
 
 3. Spec, to commend, c. ace. et dat. 1 Cor. 
 
 8, 8 jSpw/za 8e rjp.as ov Trapumjcrt rw Sew. 
 Jos. Ant. 15. 7. 3. Arr. Epict. 1. 16 ara 
 liraivtcrai fj Trapaa-rfjcrai. 
 
 4. Trop. to set forth by arguments, i. e. to 
 show, to prove, absol. Acts 24, 13 ovrt ira- 
 pacrrrjcrai 8vvavrai, Trepi u>v KT\. Jos. Ant. 
 8. 2. 5. Arr. Epict. 2. 23. 47. Xen. CEc. 
 13. 1. 
 
 II. INTRANS. in the perf. plupf. and aor. 
 2 of the Active, and in Mid. to stand near, 
 to stand by. 
 
 1 . Genr. to stand by, to be present ; c. dat. 
 expr. or impl. Acts 1,10. 9, 39 /cm Trape- 
 <rrr]<Tav aiiria Tracrat at XW al "> e< stood 
 around him. 27,23. Mark 15, 39 6 irapf- 
 <TTTJKU>S f^vavrias, who stood by over against 
 him. John 18, 22. 19, 26; evwriov TWOS 
 Acts 4, 10. Part, ol irapea-TrjKoTes, 
 contr. ot Trapfa-TioTts, (Buttm. 107. m. 
 22, 23,) the by-slanders, Mark 14, 47. 69. 70. 
 15, 35. Acts 23, 2. 4. Sept. for 323 Gen. 
 45, 1. 1 Sam. 22, 6. 7; ""?? Gen. 18, 8. 
 Judg. 3, 19. So Hdian. 8. 3. G. Xen. Mem. 
 
 3. 11. 2. Trop. in a friendly sense, to stana 
 by, to aid, c. dat. Rom. 1 6, 2 KOI Tr 
 
IlapfiCevds 558 
 
 ivrrj. 2 Tim. 4, 17. (Epict. Ench. 32. 
 Dem. 366. 20. Xen. Hell. 6. 5. 33.) Trop. 
 also in a hostile sense, absol. Acts 4, 26 
 irapt(TTT]crav ol [3a(Ti\fis TTJS yfjs, quoted from 
 Ps. 2, 2 where Sept. for SSnnrt ; so Ecclus. 
 51, 3. Of time, a season, i. q. to be present, 
 to have come, Mark 4, 29 Trapta-TrjKfv 6 3e- 
 pi<Tfj.6s. So Dem. 255. 25. 
 
 2. to stand by or before any one, in his 
 presence, e. g. in a forensic sense, before a 
 judge. Acts 27, 24 Kaicrapi ere Set irapa- 
 o-Trjvat. Rom. 14, 10. So genr. Hdian. 1. 
 4. 1. Spoken of attendants, ministers, who 
 wait in the presence of a superior, e. g. 
 Luke 1, 19 tyu> flp.i FajSpiiijX 6 TrapfarrjKuis 
 eVwTTioi/ TOW 3eov. With dat. Luke 19,24 
 comp. v. 13. Sept. and ! ins Deut. 1, 
 38. 1 Sam. 16, 21. 22. So Luc. D. Deor. 
 24. 1 Sei. . . Trapfcrrdvai. TW Alt . 
 
 Ilapfjievds, d, 6, Parmenas, pr. n. of one 
 of the seven primitive deacons, Acts 6, 5. 
 
 irdpoSos, ov, TI, (686s,) a way by, pass- 
 age-ivay, in place Jos. B. J. 1. 1. 5. Thuc. 
 3. 21. Xen. An. 1. 7. 16. In N. T. in 
 action, the way by, a passing by; 1 Cor. 
 16, 7 tv TrapoSw, by the way, in passing. So 
 Luc. D. Deor. 24. 2. Pol. 5. 68. 8. Thuc. 
 1. 126. 
 
 7rapoiKeo) : S>, (oiKe o>,) to dwell near, to 
 be neighbour, Luc. D. Mort. 2. 1. Xen. 
 Vect. 1. 5. In N. T. to be a by-dweller, to 
 sojourn, to dwell as a stranger, irdpoiKos , 
 c. tv, Luke 24, 18 or> p.6vos irapoiKtls tv 
 Ifpovo-aX?7/i ; with fls, Heb. 11, 9 irapwun- 
 a-fv els TTJV yrjv, i. e. he came and sojourned ; 
 comp. in ds no. 4. Sept. for *iis Gen. 20, 
 1 ; 2izn Gen. 24, 37. So Dio Chrys. 46. p. 
 521. d, TroXti yap Kpelrrov <pvyd8a eiVai, KOL 
 jrapoiKtiv eVl tvrjs, rf roiavra irc&fiv. 
 
 TTapolKia, as, f), (rrapotKe ca.) a dwelling 
 near, neighbourhood, Psalt. Salom. 12, 3. 
 In N. T. a sojourning, residence in a for 
 eign land without the right of citizenship, 
 Acts 13, 17 tv rfj TrapoiKia tv yfj Aiyvjrrto. 
 
 Sept. for nVi* Ezra 8 > 34 ( Wisd - 19 10 -) 
 Trop. of human life, 1 Pet. 1, 17; comp. 
 Heb. 11, 13. Sept. and IWB Ps. 119, 54. 
 
 TrdpotKOS, ov, 6, T], adj. (OIKOJ,) dwelling 
 near, neighbouring, c. dat. Plut. Pyrrh. 10. 
 Hdot. 7. 235. In N.T. 6 Trdpomos, Subst. 
 a by-dweller, sojourner, without the rights 
 of citizenship, a foreigner, Acts 7, 6. 29 
 rrdpoiKos tv yfj Ma8tai>. So Sept. for "la 
 Gen. 15, 13. Ex. 2, 22. . (Ecclus. 29, 26. 
 27.) Trop. of human life, 1 Pet. 2, 11; 
 comp. 1,17. Also in respect to the church 
 and kingdom of God, Eph. 2, 19. 
 
 as, f], (irdpoifj.os, olfj-osi) pr. 
 what is by the way ; hence, a by-word, by- 
 speech, e. g. 
 
 1. Pr. a proverb, adage, 2 Pet. 2, 22 TO 
 TTJS uXrj Sovs Trapot/it ay. Symmach. for ?^^ 
 Ez. 12, 22. Luc. D. Mort. 8. 1. JEL V. 
 H. 12. 22. Plato Soph. 231. c. 
 
 2. In John s Gospel, i. q. irapafiokr), which 
 word is not used by John ; comp. in jrapa- 
 j3o\rj. E. g. a) Genr. figurative dis 
 course, dark saying, i. e. obscure and full of 
 deep meaning, John 16, 25 bis, tv n-apoi/xi- 
 ais XaXeti . v. 29 ; comp. in -napaftoKr) no. 3. 
 Sept. and ^tt)n of short and sententious max 
 ims, Prov. 1, 1. 25, 1. So Ecclus. 6, 35. 
 39, 3. b) a parable, in the usual sense. 
 John 10, 6 ; comp. in Trapa(3o\t] no. 2. 
 
 Trapowos, ov, 6, y, adj. (ou>or,) by wine, 
 
 1. e. spoken of what takes place by or over 
 wine, revelry, as ra irdpoiva O-ie Xj;) drinking- 
 songs, Boeckh Pind. Fr. p. 555. In N. T. 
 of persons, pr. silling long by wine, given to 
 wine, 1 Tim. 3, 3. Tit. 1,7. So Luc. Tim. 
 55. Lysias 101. 20. 
 
 , f. x^o-opai, (oT^o/icd,) perf. 
 ; to go along by, to pass along, 
 Horn. II. 4. 272. In N. T. of time, to pass 
 away, only Part. perf. Trapw^i/juo/oy, by-gone ; 
 Acts 14, 16 tv rats Trapcp^/ie j/ai? ytvfais. 
 So Jos. Ant. 8. 12. 3. Hdot. 2. 14. Xen. An. 
 
 2. 4. 1. 
 
 I 7rapo/J,ouia), f. da-a, (6/wnd&>,) pr. to 
 be near I:, tike ; genr. to be like, to resemble, 
 c. dat. Matt. 23, 27. See in 6/ioiao>. 
 
 Trapo/AOio?, ov, 6, fj, adj. (o/j.otoj,) pr. 
 nearly like ; genr. like, similar, Mark 7, 8. 
 13 Trapo/jioia roiavra TroXXa. Poll. On. 9. 
 130 Trapo/zoiof Trap o\iyov Sp,oios. Diod. 
 Sic. 4. 26. Dem. 12. 8. Xen. Hell. 3. 
 4. 13. 
 
 irapo^vva), f. vv 5i, (6vva>, o|v?,) to 
 sharpen by or on any thing, to whet, e. g. 
 rriv fidxaipav Sept. for 1?^ Deut. 32, 41 ; 
 to sharpen by or along with, i. e. with and 
 for some other act or purpose, trop. TOP 
 fa * Plut. Marcell. 20. Trop. to sharpen 
 the mind, temper, courage of any one, to 
 incite, to impel, Jos. Ant. 15. 3. 5. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 3. 13. Hence in N. T. trop. to 
 provoke, to stir up, to rouse to anger, indig 
 nation, only Pass, or Mid. Acts 17, 16 rra- 
 pw^vvtro TO irvev/J.a avrov KT\. 1 Cor. 13,5. 
 Sept. for Qisari Deut. 9, 18 ; e)S Deut. 
 1, 34. So Dem. 10. 24. Thuc. 6. 56. 
 
 7rapovcriAO$) ov, 6, (Trapo^vrco,) pr. a 
 sharpening, i. e. trop. 
 
 1. provocation, incitement, to action or 
 
559 
 
 TTtt? 
 
 feeling ; Hcb. 10, 24 r ?rapo. dyarr^s KOI 
 
 2. a paroxysm of anger, sharp conten 
 tion, angry dispute, Acts 15, 39. Sept. for 
 Cisp Deut. 29,28. Jer. 32,37. Dem. 1105. 
 24. 
 
 jrapopyifo, f. iVa>, (opyi fw,) Att. fut. 
 frapopyioi Buttm. { 95. 7sq. Winer J 13. 1. c ; 
 to make angry by or along with something 
 else, to provoke thereby, therewith ; c. ace. 
 Eph. 6, 4 fifj TrapopyifTf TO. rtKva vptav. 
 [Col. 3, 21.] Rom. 10, 19 quoted from Deut. 
 32, 21 where Sept. for O^art > as also Judg. 
 
 2, 12. 1 K. 14, 15. Eccltis. 3, 16. 4, 2. 3. 
 Pass. Dem. 805. 19. The Act. is found in 
 profane writers only Triclin. ad Soph. An- 
 tig. 350. 
 
 TrapopyKT/JiOf, O v, 6, (irapopyifo, ) pro 
 vocation, Sept.. for 0?3 1 K. 15, 30. 2 K. 
 23, 26. In N. T. a being provoked, anger, 
 wrath, Eph. 4, 26. So Sept. for t%% Jer. 
 21,5. Not found in classic writers. 
 
 iraporpvvd), f. vj/o>, (OT/JUWB,) to urge 
 on by or along with something else, to stir 
 up, to incite, thereby, therewith ; c. ace. 
 Acts 13, 50. Jos. Ant. 7. 6. 1. Luc. Tox. 
 35. Plut. de sui Laud. 15. 
 
 Trapovcrui, as, 17, (7rdpeip.t,) pr. the being 
 or becoming present, e. g. 
 
 1. presence ; 2 Cor. 10, 10 17 8e irapova-ia 
 TOV 0-up.aTos do-Sfvi/r. Phil. 2, 12. Hdian. 
 1. 3. 13. Dem. 674. 24. Plato Phaed. 
 100. d. 
 
 2. a coming, advent, genr. 1 Cor. 16, 17. 
 2 Cor. 7, 6 tv rrj Ttapovo-iq Ti rou. V. 7. 
 Phil. 1, 26 Ttapovo-ia ira\iv irpos vfuis, a 
 coming again, return. So 2 Mace. 15, 21. 
 Pol. 23. 10. 14. Diod. Sic. 1. 29. Spoken 
 of the coming of Christ for the destruction 
 of the Jewish state and Jewish dispensation, 
 Matt. 24, 3. 27. 37. 39 ; also to judgment, 
 to receive the saints to their reward, 1 Cor. 
 15,23. lThess.2, 19. 2 Thess. 2, 8. 2 Pet. 
 
 3, 4. 1 John 2, 28 ; trap. TOV Kvpiov 1 Thess. 
 3,13.4,15. 5,23. 2 Thess. 2, 1. Jarnes 
 5, 7. 8. 2 Pet. 1, 16. In a like sense, 
 2 Pet. 3, 12 Trap. TTJJ TOV SfoC f]p.epas. Of 
 the coming i. e. manifestation of the man 
 of sin, 2 Thess. 2, 9 ; comp. v. 3. 
 
 TrapotyiS) iSos, ;, (o^oi/,) a side-dish, 
 consisting of dainties set on as a condiment 
 or sauce, Athen. 9. 2. p. 367. b. Pollux 
 Onom. 6. 56. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 4. In later 
 usage and N. T. a side^plate, i. e. a plate, 
 platter, dish, pr. in which dainties are served 
 up. Matt. 23. 25 TO t^a&tv roC Tronjpiov KOI 
 IT}? 7rapo\//-i8of. v. 26. So Arr. Epict. 2. 20. 
 Plut de adulat. et Amic. 9 The Atticists 
 
 condemn this use of the word, Phryn. et 
 Lob. p. 176. Stur? Lex. Xen. s. v. 
 
 Trapfrr/cria, as, 17, (trav, pj/o-ir,) pr. the 
 speaking out all, freespokenness, as char 
 acteristic of a frank and fearless mind ; 
 hence meton. and genr. 
 
 1. freeness, frankness, boldness, as of 
 speech, demeanour, action ; Acts 4, 13 
 StapoviTts 8e 7171* TOV IlfYpov Trappno-iav, 
 i. e. his freespokenness, boldness. 2 Cor. 
 3, 12. So Sept. Prov. 13, 5. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 53. Dem. 1397. 1. Plato Conv. 222. c. 
 In adverbial phrases, e. g. Trappno-iq. i. q. 
 freely, frankly, boldly, John 7, 13. 26; or 
 i. q. openly, plainly, without concealment 
 or ambiguity, Mark 8, 32. John 10, 24. 11, 
 14. 16,25. 29; also of actions, openly, done 
 in the sight of all, not privately, John 11, 
 54 ovKfTi Trapprjaiq TrtpicrruTfi KT\. 18, 20. 
 So fv Trapprjo-lq, in or with boldness, 
 i. q. freely, boldly, Eph. 6, 19. Phil. 1, 20; 
 also openly, publicly, opp. tv Kpu7rr<5, John 
 7, 4. Col. 2, 15 e8fiyfuiTi<rev ev rrapfirfa-iq. 
 (Wisd. 5, 1.) Also p.fTa Trapprjcrias, 
 with boldness, i. q. freely, boldly, Acts 2, 29. 
 4,29. 31. 28, 31. So 1 Mace. 4, 18. Luc. 
 Hermot. 51. Dem. 95. 28. 
 
 2. Spec, as implying frank reliance, con 
 fiding hope, i. q. confidence, assurance. 
 2 Cor. 7, 4 TroXXij fj.oi irapprjcria Trpos vpas 
 KT\. Eph. 3, 12. 1 Tim. 3, 13. Philem. 8. 
 Heb. 3, 6. 4, 16. 10, 19. 35. 1 John 2, 28. 
 3, 21. 4, 17. 5, 14. Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 13 
 Trapprjcriav Aa/ijSdi/ei irpbs TOV 3edi . Diod. 
 Sic. 14. 65. 
 
 f. do-opxu. Mid. depon. 
 (irappvo-ia, ) to be free spoken ; to speak freely, 
 openly, boldly ; to be free, frank, bold, in 
 speech, demeanour, action ; e. g. joined 
 with verbs of speaking, Acts 13, 46 Trappr}- 
 <na.o-dp.evoi. 8e 6 II. KOI 6 B. flnov. 19, 8. 
 26, 26. Genr. and with tv, e. g. of place, 
 ev Tjj o-vvaycayri Acts 18, 26; or of thing, 
 object, i. q. in behalf of, tv aiirw Eph. 6,20; 
 or of person, rrapprjo-. tv 3ew, i. e. in faith 
 and trust in God, 1 Thess. 2, 2, comp. 1, 
 1 ; also tv T<a ovopaTi TWOS, in one s name, 
 by one s authority, Acts 9, 27. 28. With 
 eVt rw Kvpi w Acts 14, 3, see in iiri II. 3. 
 c. a. Sept. Job 22, 6. Luc. Tim. 11. Plato 
 Gorg. 487. d ; with tv of place Plut. Mar- 
 cell. 20 *, irpos Tiva Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 8. 
 
 7Ta9, Tracra, Trav, Gen. iravros, Trdorjs 1 , 
 iravros, all, Lat. omnis. 
 
 1. With the idea of oneness, a totality, 
 all, the whole, Lat. totus, i. q. o\os. In this 
 sense, the Singular is put with a noun 
 having the article ; and the Plural also is put 
 
7TO9 
 
 560 
 
 with the article where a definite number is 
 implied, or without the article where the 
 number is indefinite. See in 6, f], TO, II. A. 
 
 2. b. y. Winer 17. 10. Buttm. { 127. 9. 
 Kiihner $ 246. 5. Matth. 277. 
 
 A) SING. a) Before a Subst. with the 
 article, Matt. 6, 29 ove SoXojuwi/ eV 770077 
 777 5o/? O.VTOV. 8, 32 Trdcra rj dye\r). Mark 
 5, 33. Luke 1,10 jrdv TO TT\^OS. 4, 25. 
 John 8. 2 TTfls 6 Xaoj. Acts 1, 8. Rom. 3, 
 19. 4, 16. al. saep. So with the names of 
 cities or countries, meton. for the inhabit 
 ants, Matt. 3, 5. Mark 1, 5. Luke 2, 1. al. 
 (Hdian. 6. 4. 1. Ml. V. H. 6. 11. Xen. Ag. 
 1. 25.) With proper names, sometimes 
 without the article, Matt. 2, 3. Acts 2, 36. 
 Rom. 11, 26; comp. Winer 17. 10. a. 
 
 b) After a Subst. c. art. John 5, 22 TJ\V 
 Kpicriv Trdcrav S/Sw/ce TO> iu<5. Rev. 13, 12. 
 Comp. in 6, 17, TO, 1. c. Buttm. 127. 9. 
 
 c) Rarely between the art. and Subst. 
 where TTUS is then emphatic, comp. in 6, q, 
 TO, 1. C. Buttm. 1. c. Acts 20, 18 TOV Trdvra 
 Xpovov. Gal. 5, 14. 1 Tim. 1, 16. 
 
 B) PLUR. a) Before a Subst. or other 
 word, viz. a) Subst. c. art. implying a 
 definite number, Matt. 1, 17 Trao-at at yeveal 
 OTTO A/3paa/j, fas Aa/3i S. 4, 8. Mark 3, 28. 
 Luke 1, 6. Acts 5, 20. Rom. 1, 5. al. saep. 
 Comp. Winer 17. 10. b. Buttm. 127. 9. 
 Matth. 265. 2. (Xen. An. 5. 3. 9.) With 
 out art. where the idea of number is then 
 indefinite, Winer, Matth. 1. c. E. g. irav- 
 Tfs aVSpwTrot all men, all mankind, indef. 
 Acts 22, 15. Rom. 5, 12. 18. al. (^Eschin. 
 1. 18.) So irdvres ayyeXoi %fov, all angels 
 of God, Heb. 1,6; Traira eSvij Rev. 14, 8. 
 Comp. Winer, Matth. 1. c. /3) Particip. 
 c. art. as Subst. Matt. 4, 24 irdvTas TOVS 
 KaK&s CXOVTCIS. 11, 28 irdvTes oi KOTriwirfs. 
 Luke 1, 66. 71. John 18, 4. Acts 2, 44. al. 
 saap. So Hdian. 1. 4. 17. Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 6. 
 y) Before other words and periphrases with 
 the art. in place of substantives, e. g. Pron. 
 possess, as TTO.VTO. TO. e /xa Luke 15, 31 ; Pre- 
 posit. with its case, Matt. 5, 15 ndcri TOIS eV 
 777 oiKt a. Luke 5, 9. John 5, 28. Acts 4, 
 24. al. Adv. Col. 4, 9. 
 
 b) After a Subst. or other word. a) 
 Subsl. c. art. as definite, comp. Winer 
 Buttm. Matth. 1. c. Matt. 9, 35 Ta? Tro Xety 
 irdo-as sc. of that region. Luke 12,. 7. Acts 
 16, 26. Phil. 1, 13. Rev. 8, 3. (Hdian. 3. 1. 
 
 3. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 19 fin.) Without art. 
 with a pr. name, Acts 17, 21 ASqraToi 8e 
 ndvTts. So genr. Hdian. 4. .2. 5. |3) 
 Particip. c. art. as Subst. Acts 20, 32 / 
 TOIS TjyiacrfjLevois Trdcriv. Heb. 5, 9. y) 
 Before other words or periohrases with the 
 
 art. in place of a Subst. e. g. Pron. possess. 
 as TO. e/na irdvra John 17, 10 ; Preposit. 
 with its case, Gal. 1, 2 oi <rvv e/xoi travrts. 
 Tit. 3, 15. Col. 4, 7. Mark 5, 2G. 
 
 c) Between the art. and subst. as em 
 phatic, Acts 19, 7. 21, 21. 27, 37. Comp. 
 Buttm. \ 127. 9. 
 
 d) Joined with a Pronoun pers. or de- 
 monstr. either before or after it, as jy^Is 
 TtdvTfs John 1, 16; jravres Tjjj.els Acts 2, 
 32 ; TT. vfitls Matt. 23, 8 ; v. TT. Luke 9, 
 48 ; OVTOI TT. Acts 1, 14 ; TT. CLVTOVS Acts 4, 
 33; avT. TT. 1 Cor. 15, 10; Taira Trdira 
 Matt. 4, 9. Luke 12, 30. 31 ; TT. TOVTO 
 Mark 7, 23. al. saap. 
 
 e) Absol. a) With art. ot -rrdvTfs, 
 they all, i. e. all those definitely mentioned, 
 Mark 14, 64 ot Se irdvres naTtKpivav avTov 
 KT\. Rom. 11, 32. 1 Cor. 10, 17. Eph. 4, 
 13. Phil. 2, 21. al. sa3p. Neut. T<Z irnvTa, 
 all things, i. q. aa) the universe, the 
 whole creation, Rom. 11, 36 ej- CIVTOV .. 
 Koi fls avTov TO. Trdvra. 1 Cor. 8, 6. Eph. 3, 
 
 9. Col. 1, 16. Heb. 1, 3. Rev. 4, 11. Trop. 
 of the new spiritual creation in Christ, 
 2 Cor. 5, 17. 18. (Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 11, 14.) 
 Meton. for all created rational beings, all 
 men, i. q. oi mivres, Gal. 3, 22. Col. 1, 20. 
 
 1 Tim. 6, 13 ; put also for all the followers 
 of Christ, Eph. 1, 10. 23. al. /30) Genr. 
 all things before mentioned or implied, e. g. 
 the sum of one s teaching Mark 4, 11 ; all 
 the necessaries and comforts of life, Acts 
 17, 25. Rom. 8, 32. So 1 Cor. 9, 22. 12, 
 6 comp. v. 5. 6. 2 Cor. 4, 15. Eph. 5, 13. 
 Phil. 3, 8 comp. v. 7. Col. 3, 8. al. yy) 
 As predicate of a pr. name, e. g. 6 3e6s TCI 
 rrdvra eV ndcriv, all in all, i. e. in all persons 
 or beings, above all, supreme, 1 Cor. 15, 
 28. Col. 3, 11. /3) Without art. jrdvTes, 
 all, i. q. TrdvTes av^puTtoi, all men. Matt. 
 
 10, 22 fiKTovp-fvoi VTTO Trdvruv. Mark 2, 12. 
 10, 44. Luke 2, 3 eVroptiWro -jravres, all 
 went, i. e. all the inhabitants of Judea. 3, 
 15. John 2, 15. 24. Neut. TTUVTU, all 
 things, Matt. 8, 33 dirrfyyeiXav Trdvra. Mark 
 4, 34. Luke 3, 20. John 4, 25. 45. Acts 
 10, 39. 1 Cor. 16, 14 rraira vpv i. e. all 
 your actions, whatever ye do. Heb. 2, 8. 
 James 5, 12. al saep. Accus. TTUVTU as adv. 
 as to or in all things, in all respects, wholly, 
 Acts 20, 35. 1 Cor. 9, 25. 10, 33. 11, 2. 
 (Jos. Ant. 9. 8. 3. Xen. An. 1. 3. 10.) So 
 KaTa Trdvra as to all things, in all respects, 
 Acts 3, 22. Col. 3, 20. Heb. 2, 17. 
 (2 Mace. 1, 17.) els Trdvra id. 2 Cor. 2, 9 ; 
 (v Trda-iv, in all things, in all respects, 
 
 2 Cor. 11, 6. Eph. 1, 23. 1 Tim. 3, 11. 
 2 Tim. 2, 7. Tit. 2, 9. 1 Pet. 4, 11. al. saep 
 
Tray 
 
 561 
 
 2. SING. Tray without the art. implies 
 plurality, all taken singly, every, each one 
 of all, i. q. (Kaoros, comp. Buttm. 127. 9. 
 Winer $ 17. 10. a. a) With nouns, Matt. 
 
 3, 10 TTOC ovv b tvo pov p.i) troiovv Kapnov. 
 
 4, 4. Mark 9, 49. Luke 2, 23. 4, 13. 37. 10, 
 
 I. John 1, 9. 2, 10. al. saepiss. b) Be 
 fore a relal. Pron. it is intensive, e. g. -rras 
 wrris, i. q. oorty but stronger, see in ocrrir 
 A. 2. b. Matt. 7, 24 Tray ocrriy aicovei everi, 
 one whosoever. Col. 3, 17. 23 ; Tray os iiv id. 
 Acts 2, 21. Rom. 10, 13. 1 Cor. 6, 18; Tray 
 os Gal. 3, 10 ; irav o Rom. 14, 23 ; meton. 
 John 6, 37. 39. 17, 2. c) Before a Par 
 ticiple, e. g. with the art. where the particip. 
 c. art. may be rendered he who, and becomes 
 a subst. expressing a class ; see in 6, 17, TO, 
 D. b. /3. Winer 17. 10. a. Matt. 5, 22 Tray 
 6 opyidpevos, every one who is angry. Luke 
 6, 47. John 6, 45. Acts 10, 43. Rom. 2, 10. 
 al. saep. So after the particip. e. g. rw 
 fXovri iravrL Matt. 25, 29. Without the 
 art. where the participial sense then re 
 mains, as Matt. 13, 19 iravros CLKOVOVTOS 
 every one hearing. 2 Thess. 2, 4. In Luke 
 
 II, 4 some Mss. have the art. Winer 17. 
 
 10. n. d) Absol. Mark 9, 49 Tray yap 
 irvp\ oAto-S^o-erai. Heb. 2, 9 Sia TTOVTOS sc. 
 \povov, continually, see in bianavTos. So 
 iv vavTi in every thing, in every respect, 
 
 1 Cor. 1, 5. 2 Cor. 4, 8. 6, 4. 7, 5. 11. 16. 
 
 11, 9. Eph. 5, 24. Phil. 4, 6. 12. 
 
 3. SING, collect, all, i. e. of all kinds, of 
 every kind and sort, including every possible 
 variety, i. q. iravroo aTros, Trairotoy, Herm. 
 ad Vig. p. 727. Passow s. v. 
 
 a) Genr. Matt. 4, 23 3f/>a7rev&>j> iraa-av 
 voo-ov Kai Trdcrav paXoJUOJC. Acts 7, 22 77(1077 
 o-ofpiq AlyvTTTiav. Rom. 1, 18. 29. 2 Cor. 
 
 1, 4. Col. 3, 16. 1 Pet. 2, 1. al. Pol. 1. 
 15. 6 TTJS TraoT/y aAoytay TrAiypey. Xen. An. 
 3. 2. 8. ib. 6. 4. 6. 
 
 b) Spec, all possible, i. q. the greatest, 
 utmost, supreme; Matt. 28, 18 t So 3?; p.oi 
 irao-a tovcria eV ovpava Kal tnl yrjs. Acts 
 
 5, 23. 17, 11 p.(Ta TraoT/y npo Svpias. 23, 1. 
 
 2 Cor. 12, 12. Phil. 1, 20. 2, 29. 1 Tim. 2, 
 
 2. 2 Tim. 4, 2. James 1, 2. 1 Pet. 2, 18. 
 Jude 3. Pol. 1. 39. 3. Plut. Timol. 5. 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 2. 22 ds iravra Kiv8vvov rjXSov. 
 
 4. With a negative, e. g. ov Tray, ov 
 rrdvTfs, not every one, not all, the negative 
 here belonging to Tray and merely denying 
 the universality, see in ov no. 5. c. Matt. 7, 
 21 ov Tray 6 Aeycoi>. 19, 11 ov Trairey. Rom. 
 9,6. 10,16. 1 Cor. 15,39. al. But Tray... 
 ov, where ov belongs to the verb, is by Hebr. 
 i. q. dvSei y, not one, no one, nothing, none, 
 gee ft. ly in ov no. 1. c. Luke 1, 37. Rom. 
 
 36 
 
 3, 20. Gal. 2, 16. 1 John 2, 21. Rev. 22 
 
 3 ; SO Acts 10, 14 oiSeVore efpayov TTOV KO- 
 vov. 2 Pet. 1, 20. Also Tray. . ./nj], 1 Cor. 
 
 I, 29 oTrcoy p.fj KavxrjcTTjTai Tracra ardp. Eph. 
 
 4, 29. Rev. 7, 1 ; and so Tray . . . ov pj Rev. 
 21, 27. See ov 1. c. Winer 26. 1. Comp. 
 Heb. ^= & Gesen. Lehrg. p. 831. Heb. 
 Lex. art. ^3 no. 3. So c. p.f], 1 Mace. 5, 
 42 p.f] dfprJTe Trdvra avSpanrov Trapeju/SaXeti/. 
 Ecclus. 20, 30. + 
 
 Tracr^a, TO, indec. thepassover, i. q. Heb. 
 HDQ and Aram. ^riO? (a passing over, a 
 sparing.) Sept. usually for l" 11 ?^, as Ex. 12, 
 
 I 1. 21. al. But Sept. in 2 Chr. 0ao-/*, 30, 
 15. 35, 1. 11 ; Josephus (pda-Ka, Ant. 5. 1. 
 4. The passover, the great sacrifice and 
 festival of the Jews, was instituted in com 
 memoration of God s sparing the Hebrews 
 when he destroyed the first-born of the 
 Egyptians ; it was celebrated on the even 
 ing following the 14th day of the month 
 Nisan (Num. 33, 3), which began with the 
 new-moon of April, or, according to the 
 Rabbins, of March, between the two even 
 ings ; see in o^ia no. 2. For the institu 
 tion and particular laws of this festival, see 
 Ex. c. 12 sq. Lev. 23, 4 sq. Num. 9, 1 sq. 
 The later Jews made some additions ; in 
 particular they drank at intervals during the 
 paschal supper four cups of red wine usu 
 ally mingled with one fourth part of water ; 
 the third of which was called ^2 nari 013, 
 the cup of blessing, TO Trorfipiov -njs euAoy/ay 
 1 Cor. 10, 16; comp. Matt. 26, 27. See 
 espec. Lightfoot Hor. Heb. ad Matt. 26, 
 26. 27. Othon. Lex. Rabb. p. 504 sq. Gr. 
 Harm. p. 214. In N. T. TO TroV^a is 
 spoken of the victim, the supper, and the 
 festival. 
 
 1. The paschal lamb, passover, i. e. a 
 lamb or kid of a year old, slain as a sacri 
 fice (Ex. 12, 3 sq. 27) between the two 
 evenings after the 14th of Nisan ; see in 
 (tyi a no. 2. According to Josephus the 
 number of lambs provided at Jerusalem in 
 his time, was 256.500, which were slain be 
 tween the 9th and llth hour, i. e. from 3 to 
 5 o clock, in the afternoon before the even 
 ing or commencement of the 15th day of 
 Nisan. B. J. 6. 9. 3. a) Pr. as Svftv TO 
 ndcrxa, to kill the passover, Mark 14, 12. 
 Luke 22, 7. Sept. for nDBr] -jna Ex. 12, 
 21 ; nocn TOT Deut. 16, 2. 5. 6. b) Trop. 
 of Christ, 1 Cor. 5, 7. 
 
 2. Thepaschal supper, passover, which was 
 eaten on the evening following the 14th of 
 Nisan, and was itself the commencement of 
 the seven days festival of unleavened bread ; 
 so c T o i p d f e t v TO Tracra, to make ready the 
 
502 
 
 Trareco 
 
 passover, Matt. 26, 19. Mark 14, 16. Luke 
 
 22, 8. 13 ; (paydv TO irdo-xa, to eat the pass- 
 over, to celebrate the paschal supper, Matt. 
 26, 17. Mark 14, 12. 14. Luke 22, 11. 15; 
 Ti-otfii/ TO irdcrxa id. Matt. 26, 18. Once 
 in reference to the first institution, Heb. 11, 
 28. Sept. Num. 9, 5. 33, 3. Josh. 5, 10. 
 11. 
 
 3. The paschal festival, passover, i. e. the 
 festival of unleavened bread, TO. a^v\ia, which 
 began with the paschal supper and contin 
 ued seven days, until the close of the 21st 
 day of Nisan ; Ex. 12, 15 sq. Lev. 23, 5 sq. 
 comp. Num. 28, 17. Deut. 16, 3. 4. Jos. Ant. 
 
 3. 10. 5. ; see Gr. Harm. p. 212. So Matt. 
 26, 2. Mark 14, 1. Luke 2, 41 rfj e o/jrjj roC 
 TracT^a. 22, 1 rj eoprrj TU>V du/zcoi , 17 Aryo- 
 HevT) TrdVxa. John 2, 13. 23. 6,4. 11,55 
 bis. 12,1. 13,1. 18,39. 19, 14. Acts 12, 
 
 4. Meton. John 18,28 (payelv TO Troo^a, 
 i. e. the sacrifices offered on the first day of 
 the passover, the Chagiga, etc. see Gr. 
 Harm. p. 218, comp. p. 213. Sept. 2 K. 
 
 23, 22. 23. Ez. 45, 21. Jos. B. J. 2. 1. 3 
 
 TTjS TUIV v[A(*)V 
 
 Trapa TOLS louSat ot? /caAemu. Hence the 
 whole passover is sometimes called fj topTrj 
 TIV d^vfjicov, see in a^vpos no. 2. Jos. B. J. 5. 
 3 1. 
 
 77 ttcr^&), f. Tm o-op.ai, aor. 2. fira%ov, 
 perf. TTfVoi/Sa ; to suffer, in the most general 
 sense, pr. to be affected by any thing from 
 without, to be acted upon, to experience 
 either good or evil. 
 
 1 . Of good, to be affected by, to experience, 
 i. e. to have happen to oneself, to receive ; 
 c. ace. Gal. 3, 4 rocravra eVaSere eli(fj , i. e. 
 have ye experienced such things, such bless 
 ings, in vain 1 comp. v. 2. 5. Theocr. Id. 
 15. 138. Jos. Ant. 3. 15. 1 vnofJLvrjo-ai, ocra 
 iraSovrts e CIVTOV [3eou], /cat nrjX iK.a>v fvtp- 
 yto-iiov jjLfTaka^ovTfs KT\. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 
 3 dya%d. 
 
 2. Of evil, to suffer, to be subjected to 
 evil, to calamity, pr. with naicus, KO.K.OV n, 
 Matt. 17, 15 Kal KCIKCOS Trao-x- Acts 28, 5. 
 OE1. V. H. 13. 17. Hdian. 3. 2. 10. Xen. 
 Hell. 4. 5. 17.) Absol. in the same sense, 
 to suffer, 1 Cor. 12. 26 etVeTratrx" ei/pe Aos. 
 1 Pet. 2, 20. 23. 3, 17. 4, 1 6 irctivv eV 
 a-apKi. v. 19. Heb. 2, 18, where comp. 
 Meleag. oi8a Tra3o>i> IXtftv, in Anthol. Gr. I. 
 p. 14. So. Hdian. 4. 13. 1. Xen. An. 1. 9. 
 8. With an ace. of manner, Buttm. 131. 
 7. 8 ; e. g. TroAAa, ra ai>ra, TaCra, a, etc. 
 Mark 9, 12. Luke 13,2. 2 Cor. 1,6. 2 Tim. 
 1, 12. Rev. 2, 10; by attract. Heb. 5, 8. 
 (Ecclus. 38, 16. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 5.) With 
 a preposit. marking source, manner, cause ; 
 
 e. g. OTTO TWOS, Matt. 16, 21 TroAAa -ir 
 OTTO TO>V Trpeo-/3. KT\. Mark 8, 31. Luke 9, 
 22 ; VTTO TWOS, Matt. 17, 12 /w AAfi ndtrxtw 
 VTT avT&v. Mark 5,26. 1 Thess. 2, 14; 
 8 id Tiva Matt. 27, 19 ; 8ta TI 1 Pet. 3, 14. 
 (2 Mace. 7, 32.) vn-ep TWOS, Acts 9, 16. 
 Phil. 1, 29. 2 Thess. 1, 5. With an adv. 
 
 1 Pet. 2, 19 aStW. 4, 15. 5, 10. Spoken 
 of the suffering and death of Christ ; Luke 
 22, 15 Trpo TOV p.f ira%fiv. 17, 25 TroAAa. 
 24, 26Ta{Va. v. 46 OVTUS. Acts 1,3. 3,18. 
 17, 3. Heb. 9, 26. 13, 12. 1 Pet. 2, 21 ra- 
 Sev vTrep TIP.UIV. 3, 18 TTfpi a/iaprtwv. 4, 1 
 iiTrep ijaaii/. So genr. Hdian. 5. 7. 1. ISEBUS 
 35. 19. Plato Conv. 222. e. 
 
 llarapa, uv, ra, Palara, a maritime 
 city of Lycia in Asia Minor, east of the river 
 Xanthus, Acts 21, 1. It was celebrated for 
 an oracle of Apollo, who was hence called 
 Palareus, Hor. Od. 3. 4. 64. Virg. ^En. 4. 
 144, where see Heyne Excurs. II. Strabo 
 14. p. 980, 981. Plin. 5. 28. 
 
 Traracro-ft), f. da>, pr. intrans. to strike, 
 to beat, Lat. pulso, e. g. as the heart, Horn. 
 11.7.216. Soph. Phil. 748. Later and in 
 N. T. trans. 
 
 1. to strike, to smite, e. g. with violence, 
 so as to wound, c. ace. Matt. 26, 51 Traraai 
 TOP SouAoi ToC apxiepe wf. Luke 22, 50 ; 
 with eV of instrum. v. 49. Sept. for ""IS!"} 
 Ex. 21, 12. 18 sq. So Pol. 11. 18/4. 
 Thuc. 8. 92. Xen. Eq. 7. 5. Also more 
 gently, i. q. to touch, to tap, c. ace. Acts 12, 
 7 Tr/v 7r\fvpav TOV rieYpou. 
 
 2. From the Heb. to smite, i. q. to kill, to 
 slay, to destroy. a) Pr. and c. ace. Acts 
 7, 24 TraTaa? TOV hlyv-rrTiov. Rev. 19, 15. 
 (Ex. 2, 12.) Matt. 26, 31 et Mark 14, 27 
 TraTao> TOV 7rot/j.eVa, quoted from Zech. 13, 7 
 where Sept. for ""IS!"} ; as also Ex. 12, 12. 
 
 2 Chr. 33, 25. See Heb. Lex. M33 Hiph. no. 
 2. b) Trop. and from the Heb. to smile, 
 i. e. to inflict evil, to afflict with disease, 
 calamity : spoken only of God or his angel, 
 Acts 12, 23 eVaVaei/ avTov ayj(\os Kvplov. 
 Rev. 11, 6. Sept. for n^H Gen. 19,11. 
 Num. 14, 12 ; 5]$i Ex. 12, 23. So 2 Mace. 
 9, 5. See Heb. Lex. art. N33 no - ! cc - 
 
 TTarea), a,, f. jjo-co, (Traroy,) to tread with 
 the feet. 
 
 1. Trans, c. ace. to tread down, to tram 
 ple under foot, i. q. to profane and lay waste ; 
 Rev. 11,2 TI]V TTO\IV TTJV ayiav jraTrjcr overt. 
 Luke 21, 24. Sept. for tJ^n I*. 1, 12. So 
 Luc. de Merc. cond. 17. Hdian. 8. 5. 24. 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 37. Spec.rfo tread out, e. g. 
 grapes, TJJV \TJVOV, Rev. 14, 20. 19, 15; 
 comp. in AT/I/OV. Sept. and Tp 1 ? Neh. 13, 
 
irarijp 563 
 
 15. Is. 16, 10. So Anacr. Od. 17. 14. 
 Xen. CEc. 18. 4 TOV <T~ITOV. 
 
 2. Intrans. to tread, to plant the foot ; 
 C. fTrdva), Luke 10, 19 rrardv eirdvo) o<p(a>v, 
 to tread upon serpents, i. e. without harm. 
 Sept. for b^ nbQJ Is. 32, 20 ; also for "$* 
 to walk, Is. 42, 5. 
 
 TTCLTrjp, Tfpos, Tpos, 6, a father, Lat. 
 pater ; comp. Buttm. 47. Spoken genr. 
 of men, and in a special sense of God. 
 
 A) Genr. 1. Pr. a father, genitor, by 
 whom one is begotten, Matt. 2, 22 dm 
 HpcoSov ToG TraTpbs avTov. 19, 5. Mark 5, 
 
 40. Luke 2, 48. John 4, 53. Heb. 7, 10. 
 al. sjep. (Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 14, 15.) Plur. 
 of irarepts, parents, both father and mo 
 ther, Heb. 11, 23 Mtui/ai}? eVpvjSr; Tpi^vov 
 vrrb Totv TraTfpov diiTov. Eph. 6, 4, comp. 
 v. 2. So Parthen. Erot. 1 jrapa TU>V narepcav 
 mnjirap.ei os , diiT^v rjydyfTo yvvaiKa. LllC. 
 Tox. 8. Of a reputed father, Luke 2, 48. 
 
 2. Of a remoter ancestor, i. q. forefather ; 
 also as the head or founder of a tribe or 
 people, a patriarch. Sing. Matt. 3, 9 irartpa 
 ?Xop.fv TOV A/3paa/i. Mark 11, 10. Luke 1, 
 32. 73. John 4, 12. Acts 7, 2. Rom. 4, 17. 
 18. al. seep. Trop. in a spiritual and moral 
 sense, e. g. of Abraham, Rom. 4, 1 1 els TO 
 tlvai avTW TTdTfpd ndvruv Tcav Tria-Tfvovraiv. 
 v. 12. 16. Also trop. of Satan as the father 
 of wicked and depraved men, John 8, 38. 
 
 41. 44 bis. Sept. for SX Gen. 17, 4. 5. 
 19.37. (Trop, 1 Mace. 2, 54.) Plur. oi 
 iraTfpfs, fathers, \.e.forefalhers, ances 
 tors, Matt. 23, 30 eV TOIS ij/jitpais TU>V TTO.- 
 Ttpwv. v. 32. Luke 6, 23. 26. John 7, 22. 
 Acts 3, 13. Rom. 9, 5. Heb. 1, 1. al. Sept. 
 and ni2J< Deut.-l, 11. 1 K. 8, 21. So Jos. 
 c. Apion! 1. 31. Hdian. 2. 15. 2. 
 
 3. As a title of respect and reverence, 
 either honorary, or towards one who is re 
 garded in the light of a father ; e. g. in 
 direct address, Luke 16, 24 irdrep A/Spaap,. 
 v. 27. 30. (Horn. Od. 7. 48.) So of a 
 teacher, as exercising paternal care, author 
 ity, affection, Matt. 23, 9 KOI irartpa p.f/ na- 
 \e<rr]Tf ifj.uv tTTt TV}? yfjs. 1 Cor. 4, 15 ; 
 comp. Phil. 2, 22. 1 Thess. 2,11. Sept. and 
 25$ of prophets, 2 K. 2, 12. 6, 21. 13, 14. 
 Comp. Schoettg. Hor. Heb. p. 745 sq. 
 Plur. voc. IT arepes, fathers, as an honorary 
 title of address, Buttm. 129 a. 1. Winer 
 5 29. 1 ; e. g. used towards elder persons, 
 1 John 2, 13. 14 ; also towards magistrates, 
 members of the Sanhedrim, Acts 7, 2. 22, 1. 
 (Plut. Romul. 13 irarepes <rvyyfypdp.p.evoi, 
 Lat. patres conscripti, i. e. senators.) With 
 the art. 01 irartpfs id. Eph. 6, 4. Col. 3, 21 ; 
 see Buttm. $ 129 a. 2. Winer 1. c. 
 
 Trarijp 
 
 4. Trop. c. gen. of thing, the author 
 source, beginner of any thing. Rom. 4, 12 
 Trarijp nfpiTofirjs, i. e. Abraham. John 8, 44 
 on ^evcrrrjs ecrrt, KOI 6 Trarijp ai/rov sc. rou 
 i^evSovr. Sept. and 2i< Job 38, 28. Plato 
 Menex. 1 0. p. 240. e, irarepts rr)S eXevZepias. 
 
 B) Of God, as the creator, preserver, 
 governor of all men and things, over whom 
 he watches with paternal love and care.; so 
 Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 24 *ai OVTOS [3eor] Trarfjp 
 rov Travros aj SpuTrcoj ytvovs. Diod. Sic. 
 5. 72. Horn. Od. 4. 341. In N. T. God 
 is called Father in various relations. 
 
 1. By the Jews, John 8, 41 eva Trarepa 
 f%op.fv, TOV SfoV, v. 42. So Sept. and as 
 Is. 63, 16. 64, 8. Wisd. 2, 16. 
 
 2. By Christians and all pious persons, 
 who are also called Tf<va 3eoO John 1, 12. 
 11,52. Rom. 8,16. al. Thus Jesus in speak 
 ing with his disciples calls God iraTr]p <rov 
 V. v/iou/, e. g. Matt. 6, 4 6 Trarijp crou 6 /3\e- 
 
 TTCaV fV T0> K/JU7TT&>. V. 6. 8 6 7T. VfJ.5>V. V. 1 5. 
 
 18. 10,20.29. 13,43. Luke 6, 36. 12,30. 
 32 ; once in John, 20, 17. With the further 
 adjunct, 6 Trariyp vfj.>i> 6 et> TOIS ovpavois 
 Matt. 5, 16. 45. 48. 6, 1. 9. 7, 11. Mark 11, 
 
 25. 26. Luke 11,2; 6 ovpdvios Matt. 6, 14. 
 
 26. 32 ; 6 e-irovpdvios Matt. 18, 35 ; 6 e ov- 
 pavov Luke 11, 13. So the apostles speak 
 ing for themselves and other Christians call 
 God irarrjp fjp.u>v and the like; Rom. 1. 7 
 elprjirrj OTTO 3eoG Trarpbs i/fJiiav. 1 Cor. 1, 3. 
 2 Cor. 1, 2. Gal. 1, 4. Eph. 1, 2. Phil. 1, -2. 
 4, 20. al. saep. Hence absol. in the same 
 sense, Rom. 8, 15 eXa/3erf Tvvfv^a vlo^Stcrias, 
 ti> KpdofJii> d^/3a, 6 Trarfjp. Gal. 4, 6. 
 Eph. 2, 18. Col. 1, 12. James 1, 27. 3, 9. 
 1 John 2, 1. 15. 16. 3, 1. al. saep. Comp. 
 Ps. 89, 26. So Heb. 12, 9 rw Trarpl TUV 
 irvtvpuTciiv. in antith. with TOVS r>js a-apKos 
 f]p.wv narepas, i. e. the Father of our spirits, 
 our spiritual Father; comp. Num. 16, 22. 
 
 27. 16. 
 
 3. Spec. God is called the Father ol 
 our Lord Jesus Christ, in respect to that 
 peculiar relation in which Christ is the Son 
 of God ; see in vlos. So where the Father 
 and Son are expressly distinguished, a> 
 Matt. 1 1 , 27 ov8f\s (Tnytvuxrufi TOV v tov, ft 
 fir] 6 TTOTTJP KT\. 28, 19. Mark 13, 32 ov8f\<, 
 otSei/ . . . ov8i 6 vibs, (I p-rj 6 TraTrjp. Luke 9 
 26. 10, 22. John 1, 14. 18. 3, 35 6 irar^p 
 uyana TOV viov. 5, 26. 1 Cor. 8, 6 fly S5v 
 6 naTTjp . . . Kcil els Kvpios "I. Xp. 1 Thess 
 1, 1. Heb. 1. 5. 1 Pet. 1, 2. 1 John 1, 3 
 2,22. 4, 14. 2 John 3. 9. al. Where Jesus 
 calls God iraTTip pov, e. g. Matt. 11, 27 
 irdvra p-oi 7raped37 virb TOV Trarpo? fjiov. 
 16, 27. Mark 8, 38. Luke 2, 49. John 10, 
 
564 
 
 UauXo? 
 
 18. 25. 29. Rev. 2, 27. 3, 5. 21. al. ssep. 
 So o TTCITTJP p.ov 6 tv ovpavois Matt. 7, 21- 
 10, 32. 33. 12, 50 ; 6 ovpdvios Matt. 15. 13. 
 Absol. in the same sense, Matt. 24, 36 ou- 
 8fls oi8fi>... .el fir) 6 TraTrjp p.6vos. Mark 14, 
 3G. Luke 10, 21. 22, 42. 23, 34. John 4, 
 21. 23. 6, 27. 37. 44 sq. 10,17. 13,1.3. 
 14, 6. Acts 1, 4. Rom. 6, 4. al. ssepiss. 
 Also John 17, 25 irdrep 8/Kcue, KCU 6 KOO-JUOS 
 *rX. see fully in K<U no. 1. f. a. The apos 
 tles also speak of God as 6 7rarr)p -rot) Kvpiov 
 f,fjiS>v l.Xp. Rom. 15, 6. 2 Cor. 1,3. 11,31. 
 Eph. 1,3. 3, 14. Col. 1, 3. 1 Pet. 1, 3. 
 Rev. 1, 6. al. Absol. 1 Cor. 15, 24 Srav 
 TrapaSw TTJV j3a<Ti\eiai rai 3e<5 Kai irarpl. 
 Gal. 1,1. Eph. 5, 20. Col. 3, 17. 2 Pet. 1, 
 17. Jude 1. al. sasp. So Eph. 1, 17 6 3e6s 
 rov Kvp. Tjp.uv I. Xp. 6 rrarrip rijs oj?s, */ie 
 Father of glory, gen. of qual. who. dwells 
 in glory, comp. Acts 7, 2. 2 Cor. 1,36 ir. 
 TOV Kvpiov r]p.S)v I. Xp. 6 irarrjp ra>v oiKTip- 
 
 ft&V. 
 
 4. Trop. c. gen. of thing, James 1, 17 
 (mo [3eov] TOV Trarpbs T>V <pu>To>v, the Fa 
 ther of lights, i. e. the author, creator, of 
 the heavenly luminaries ; but not like them 
 subject to change ; comp. Job 38, 28. + 
 
 ITaTyU.09, ov, f], Patmos, Rev. 1, 9, now 
 Patimo or Patmosa, a small sterile island 
 of the ^Egean sea, lying S. W. of Samos 
 and reckoned to the Sporades. Hither 
 according to tradition the apostle John was 
 banished, some say by Domitian ; see Iren. 5. 
 30. Euseb. H.E. 3. 14. Strabo 10. p. 488. 
 Plin. H. N. 4. 23. Pococke Descr. of the 
 East II. ii. p. 31. Schubert s Reise III. p. 
 425 sq. 
 
 TTdTpaKoxiS, ov, 6, (-rrarfip, dXotaw,) Att. 
 TrarpaXoi as, a smiler of his father, a parri 
 cide, 1 Tim. 1, 9; comp. in /^rpaXway. 
 Thorn. Mag. p. 695. Pollux On. 6. 152 
 TrarpuAwas *cai TrarpaXoi ay. Attic form, Aris- 
 toph. Nub. 1327. Dem. 732. 14. Plato Phae- 
 do 62. 
 
 Trarpia, as, fj, (irarfip,) paternal descent, 
 lineage, Hdot. 3. 75 ; a family, race, caste, 
 Hdot. 1. 200. In N. T. 
 
 1 . a family, Heb. " ^Q^ , as the subdi 
 vision of a Jewish tribe, (pv\rj, B3J , which 
 family comprehended several households, 
 aiKoi, ni2X ma, see Heb. Lex. *ti no. 11. 
 Luke 2, 4 e OI KOV Kal Trarpids Aa/3/8. Trop. 
 Eph. 3, 15. Sept. and nnBtto Ex. 6, 15. 
 1 Sam. 9, 21. al. Judith 8, 2. Jos. Ant. 
 6. 4. 1. ib. 7. 14. 7. 
 
 2. In a wider sense, for a tribe, people, 
 nation, like <vXjy. Acts 3, 25 Trao-at at ira- 
 
 l rrjt yrjs, in allusion to Gen. 12, 3 
 
 where Heb. MriQ^o , Sept. 9^X77. So 
 Sept. Trarpml ra>v e Svcov for ninBliJO 1 Chr, 
 16, 28. Ps. 22, 28. 96,7. 
 
 Trarpiapxys, OU) 6, (irarpia, apm,} 
 patriarch, the father and founder of a family 
 or tribe, as Abraham, Heb. 7, 4 ; the sons 
 of Jacob as heads of the twelve tribes, Acts 
 7, 8. 9. (Jos. de Mace. $ 16 fin.) So of 
 David as the head of a family, irarpid. 
 nnsilSa , Acts 2, 29 ; comp. Luke 2, 4 and 
 see in Tj-arpid no. 1. Sept. for rvbtf ffisi"! 
 1 Chr. 9, 9. 2 Chr. 19, 8 ; comp. T ! Chr. 
 27, 22. 
 
 rrrarpifcos, 77, 6v, (Trarf)p,~) paternal, per 
 taining to one s father, e. g. {-was Pol. 2. 
 48. 4 ; (piXos Xen. Hell. 6. 5. 4. In N. T. 
 received from one s fathers, ancestral, handed 
 down from ancestors, e. g. TrapaSo o-etv Gal. 
 1, 14. So Luc. Abdic. 23. Dem. 410. 10. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 88 TT. lepaxrvvai. 
 
 irarpif, i8 os , r\, adj. (Trarptor, irarf^p,) 
 pr. father-land, native country, 2 Mace. 4, 1. 
 Dem. 296. 15. Xen! Cyr. 1. 2. 7. In N. T.- 
 one s paternal city, native place, home, e. g. 
 Nazareth as the city of Jesus, because he 
 was brought up there, Matt. 13, 54. 57. 
 Mark 6, 1.4. Luke 4, 23. 24. John 4, 44 
 see in ydp no. 1. b. Trop. of a heavenly 
 home, Heb. 11, 14, comp. v. 16. Jos. Ant. 
 6. 4. 6 els Pafjia^av -rroKw Trarpls yao r;v 
 avra. Hdian. 8. 3. 2. 
 
 as, a , 6, Palrtfbas, pr. n. of a 
 Christian at Rome, Rom. 16, 14. 
 
 TrarpOTrapdooTOS, ov, 6, f), adj. (TraTrjp, 
 7rapa8i 8a>/u.) delivered down from one s 
 fathers, ancestral. 1 Pet. 1, 18 dpao-Tpocpr) 
 TrarpoTr. i. e. a way of life derived from one s 
 ancestors. Dion. Hal. Ant. 5. 48. Diod. 
 Sic. 17. 2, 4. 
 
 TTarpoSo?, <ua, woy, (Trarijp,) paternal, 
 pertaining to one s father, e. g. qb/Xoi Luc. 
 Tim. 12. Hdian. 3. 15. 13; patrimonial, 
 transmitted from father to son, Xen. An. 1. 
 7. 6. In N. T. received from one s fathers, 
 ancestral, handed down from ancestors, e. g. 
 vopos Acts 22, 3 ; &os Acts 28, 17. 24, 
 14 Xarpeuo) rw Trarpcoco Sew i. e. our ances 
 tral God, the God whom our fathers wor 
 shipped and made known to us. So vopos 
 2 Mace. 6, 1 ; Seo s Jos. Ant. 2. 13. 1. Plut. 
 Alcib. 2. Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 17. 
 
 JTa{}Xo9, ov, 6, Paulus, Paul, pr. n. of 
 two persons in N. T. 
 
 1. Sergius Paulus, a Roman proconsul 
 in Cyprus, residing at Paphos, Acts 13, 7. 
 See in dv^viraros. 
 
 2. Paul, the apostle of the Gentiles. 
 
Uav\o<> 
 
 565 
 
 originally called SatXos q. v. He was of 
 the tribe of Benjamin and of purely Hebrew 
 descent, Phil. 3, 5 ; but born at Tarsus in 
 Cilicia, Acts 21, 39. 22, 3, where his father 
 enjoyed the rights of Roman citizenship, of 
 which privilege Paul several times availed 
 himself, e.g. Acts 16,37. 22, 27 sq. At 
 Tarsus, which was a celebrated seat of 
 learning (Strabo 14. p. 673), he probably 
 gained that general acquaintance with 
 Greek literature which appears in his writ 
 ings, and which was so important to him as 
 a teacher of the Gentiles among nations of 
 Greek origin. His Jewish education was 
 completed at Jerusalem, where he devoted 
 himself to the severest discipline of the 
 Pharisaic school, under the instructions of 
 Gamaliel ; Acts 22, 3, comp. 5, 34. Ac 
 cording to the custom of learned Jews, he 
 appears also to have learned a trade, viz. 
 that of a tent-maker, O-KTJVOTTOIOS, by which 
 he afterwards sometimes supported himself, 
 Acts 18, 3. 20, 34; see Pirke Aboth c. 2. 
 } 2, comp. Neander Gesch. der Pflanz. d. 
 chr. Kirche, I. p. 233 sq. [Engl. p. 211.] 
 Paul, in the fierceness of his Jewish zeal, 
 was at first a bitter adversary of the Chris 
 tians ; but after his miraculous conversion, 
 he devoted all the powers of his ardent and 
 energetic mind to the propagation of the 
 gospel of Christ, more particularly among 
 the Gentiles. His views of the pure and 
 ."ofty spirit of Christianity, in its worship 
 and in its practical influence, appear to have 
 been peculiarly deep and fervent ;. and the 
 opposition which he was thus led to make 
 to the mere rites and ceremonies of the 
 Jewish worship, exposed him to the hatred 
 and malice of his countrymen. On their ac 
 cusation, he was put in confinement by the 
 Roman officers ; and, after being detained 
 for two years or more at Cesarea, was sent 
 to Rome for trial, having himself appealed 
 to the emperor. Here he remained in par 
 tial imprisonment two whole years, Acts 28, 
 30. Later accounts, mostly traditionary and 
 doubtful, relate that he was soon after set at 
 liberty ; and, that after new journeys and 
 labours in the cause of Christ, he was again 
 imprisoned and at last put to death by order 
 of Nero. See Clem. Rom. Ep. ad Cor. } 5. 
 Neander ib. I. p. 429 sq. [404 sq.] See 
 genr. Neander ib. p. 104 sq. [90 sq.] Hem- 
 sen s Leben Pauli. Getting. 1830. For the 
 chronology of Paul s life and the probable 
 dates of his epistles, see Neander 1. c. pas 
 sim. Hemsen p. 744. De Wette Einl. ins 
 N. T. passim. Acts 13, 9. 13. 18, 5. 19, 
 11. 23, 1. Rom. 1, 1. 1 Cor. 1. 1. -f- 
 
 t, f. Trauo-o), comp. Engl. to pause. 
 
 I . Trans, to make pause or cease, Lo re 
 frain from any thing, with ace. and dno c. 
 gen. 1 Pet. 3, 10 7rav<raro> rrjv yX&crcrav av 
 TOV dirb KaKov, in allusion to Ps. 34 ; 14 [13| 
 where Sept. c. OTTO for "JO 1S3 . So c. tn 
 Eurip. Electr. 987 irava-ov t< K.a<u>v ip.i. 
 The usual Greek construction is with ace. 
 and gen. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 2. Comp. Mattii. 
 5 345. 4, and n. 1. 
 
 2. Mid. intrans. to pause, to cease, to re 
 frain, from any thing ; so c. gen. of thing, 
 1 Pet. 4, 1 TTfTravrai d/iapr/a? hath ceased 
 from sin. Buttm. $ 132. 4. Winer. 5 30. 6. 
 For this use of the Pass. perf. see Buttm, 
 136. 3. Sept. c. gen. for yuvs Ex. 32, 11. 
 Josh. 7, 26. So Jos. Ant. 2. 3. 3. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 6. 2. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 36. With a 
 particip. instead of infin. Buttm. } 144. 6. 
 Winer 46. 1 . Luke 5, 4 &> j 8e fTrava-aro 
 \aXcav, as in Engl. when now he left speak 
 ing. Acts 5, 42 OVK fTTavadvro 8i8dcrKovrfs, 
 they ceased not teaching. 6,13. 13,10. 20, 
 31. 21, 32. Eph. 1, 16. Col. 1, 9. Heb. 10, 
 2; part. impl. Luke 11, 1. Sept. for Vw 
 Gen. 11,8; rt3 Gen. 18, 33. So Luc. D. 
 Deor. 6. 4. Hdian. 1. 6. 4. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 2. 
 
 Absol. i. q. to cease, to come to an end, 
 Luke 8, 24. Acts 20, 1. 1 Cor. 13, 8 eiYc 
 yKaxraai, irava-ovrai. Sept. for ?"in Ex. 9, 
 34. 35. So Hdian. 1. 16. 6. Xen. Conv. 
 4. 10. 
 
 ITa^o?, ou, f}, Paphos, a maritime city 
 of Cyprus near the western extremity of the 
 island, the station of a Roman proconsul, 
 Acts 13, 6. 13. About 60 stadia from the 
 city was a celebrated temple of Venus, hence 
 called the Paphian goddess, Horn. Od. 8. 
 363. Hor. Od. 1. 30. 1. See Strabo 14. p. 
 683. Pococke Descr. of the East, II. i. p. 
 225. 
 
 TTavyvQ), f. vvSa, (jraxvs, ) to make fat, 
 Xen. CEc. 12. 20 ; Pass, to become fat and 
 thick, Luc. Ver. Hist. 22. Xen. Conv. 2. 17. 
 
 In N. T. trop. in Pass, to become gross, 
 dull, callous, as if from fat; Matt. 13, 15 et 
 Acts 28, 27 tiraxuiftT] yap fj KapSia TOV Xaot" 
 TOVTOV, quoted from Is. 6, 10 where Sept. 
 for tb "pEEri; comp. Deut. 32, 15. So 
 Philostr. Vit. Apollon. 1. 8 iraxvvfiv volv. 
 Comp. Traxvs TTJV Siavoiav JEA. V. H. 13. 15. 
 Hdian. 2. 9. 15. 
 
 rreSrj, TJS, f), (rrt(a,~) a fetter, shackle foi 
 the feet ; Plur. 7rSai, fellers, Mark 5. 4 bis 
 Sia TO avrov TroXXd/ciy TT/Sau *a: aXvcrfcri 
 
 6eS/a-3at KT\. Luke 8, 29. Sept. for 
 
 2 Sam. 3,34; ^=3 Ps. 105, 18. Pol. 3. 
 
 82. 8. Xen. An. 4! 3. 8. 
 
566 
 
 US, rj, 6v, (TreSioV, Tre Soi ,) plain, 
 level, of the ground; Luke 6, 17 fcrrr) eVi ro- 
 trou TTf8ivov, he stood upon a level place, i. e. 
 upon the plain. Sept. for liti-us Deut. 4, 43 ; 
 ttbsti Josh. 9, 1. Pol. 1. 84. 4. Xen. Cyr. 
 1/6. 43. 
 
 7Teey<W, f. euo-oo, (nt fa,) to /oo< if, to 
 /rare/ on foot, i. e. by land and not by water, 
 intrans. Acts 20, 13. Pol. 16. 29. 11. Xen. 
 An. 6. 5. 4 te ty eVravSo 
 
 7re?7, adv. (dat. fern, of adj. Trefos,) on 
 /oo/, Matt. 14, 13. Mark 6, 33. For this 
 dat. as adv. see Buttrn. 115. 4. Jos. B. J. 
 4. 11. 5. Dem. 1046. 13. Xen. Cyr. 4. 3. 
 22. 
 
 o, f. jjo-w, (rrftiapxos , 
 
 P r - to ^ e y a ru ^ er > one i 
 authority ; hence genr. to obey, c. dat. ro> 
 Sew Acts 5, 29. 32; absol. Tit. 3, 1. So 
 Jos. c. Ap. 2. 41 Toiy vopois. Pol. 1. 45. 4. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 19. Spec, to obey or fol 
 low one s advice, c. dat. of pers. Acts 27, 21. 
 So Pol. 3. 4. 3. Diod. Sic. 1. 27. 
 
 ;;, 6v, (fl-ei Sto,) a form elsewhere 
 unknown, i. q. irtfaavos or Trfaavos, persua 
 sive, winning; 1 Cor. 2, 4 OVK eV Trfftols 
 cMSpmrivtjf <ro<pias Xoyoty, aXX KT\. Some 
 suppose it to be a contraction or corruption 
 of irefaavos , more prob. it belonged to the 
 language of common life. Others read by 
 conject. OVK tv ire tSot diftpanrivrjs (ro(pias, as 
 if from subst. TretSw, but against analogy. 
 
 Trefoo), 6os, ovs, f], (wet Sco,) pr. n. Pitho, 
 Lat. Suadia, the goddess of persuasion, 
 Hdot. 8. 111. Pollux On. 4. 22, 142. In 
 N. T. persuasion, persuasive discourse, in 
 Mss. 1 Cor. 2, 4, see in ?r3o j. So Pol. 2. 
 1. 7. Xen. Mem. 1. 7. 5. 
 
 TTei^ft), f. Tret o-o), perf. 2 TreVoiSa ; Pass. 
 perf. TttTTeio-pai, Pass. aor. 1 eVei trS^ ; to 
 persuade, pr. to move by kind words and 
 motives. 
 
 I. ACT. to persuade. 1. Genr. e. g. to 
 the belief and reception of the truth, i. q. to 
 convince, and in this sense mostly de conatu; 
 pr. with ace. of pers. Acts 18, 4 eVetSe rovs 
 lovdaiovs KT\. i. e. he sought to persuade 
 and convince them. 2 Cor. 5, 11. Also 
 with two ace. of pers. and thing, Acts 28, 
 23 Tret Scoy re avrovs ra Trepl TOV Irjcrov. 
 Buttm. 1 3 1 . 5. So with ace. of pers. impl. 
 Acts 19, 8 TTftitav [av-rovs] TO nepi KT\. 
 Also to persuade to error, absol. Acts 19, 26. 
 So rivd Wisd. 16, 8. M. V. H. 9. 14 e>e p.tv 
 ovv TO \ex%ti> oi> TTf (Set. Diod. Sic. 4. 26 ; 
 nva-ri Xen. CEc. 20. 15; ri Thuc. 3. 43 
 
 Trelcrat ra Setwrara. Xen. Mag. Eq. 3. 5. 
 With ace. of pers. c. infm. to persuade to 
 do any thing, to induce, Acts 13, 43 eVet3oi> 
 avToi/s (pp.tveiv rjj ^apin TOV Seov. 26, 28. 
 So Jos. B. J. 5. 13. 1. Diod. Sic. 11. 15. 
 Xen. An. 1. 3. 19. Spec, to instigate, c 
 ace. of pers. and Iva, Matt. 27, 20; ace 
 impl. Acts 14, 19. 
 
 2. to persuade, to conciliate, to bring over 
 to kind feelings. a) Genr. i. q. to pacify. 
 to quiet, e. g. an accusing conscience, T<U 
 Kapftias 1 John 3, 19, comp. v. 20 ; see ir 
 on II. 3. c. So Sept. 1 Sam. 24, 8. Xen. 
 Hell. 1. 7. 7 TOV Sfjfjiov, comp. 4, 5. b) 
 i. q. to win over, to make friends with, to con 
 ciliate, c. ace. of pers. Gal. 1,10 avSpw 
 Trei Sto, 77 TOV Seov ; parall. is T)TU> Apt 
 (Xen. Ath. 2.11.) Prob. by presents, bribes, 
 Matt. 28, 14. Acts 12, 20 TretVaires TOV 
 BXaaroV. So 2 Mace. 4,45. Jos. Ant. 14. 
 16. 4 U.pu>8r]s TroXXoTs ^p^acri TreiSet TOV 
 AvTtavtov. Xen. Hell. 7. 3. 4. 
 
 II. PASS, and MID. to let oneself be per 
 suaded, to be persuaded. Hence 
 
 1. Genr. e. g. of any truth, i. q to be con 
 vinced, to believe, absol. Luke 16, 31 oi-Se 
 
 fv TIS fK vfKpuiv vao-Tr. T 
 Acts 17, 4. Heb. 11, 13 Rec. With dat. of 
 thing Acts 28, 24 ; c. inf. 26, 26. (Jos. Ant. 
 8. 6. 5. Luc. D. Deor. 21. 1 ; c. dat, Xen. 
 Cyr. 1.5. 3.) Pass. perf. Tre Treior/xat as 
 pres. lam persuaded, convinced, see Buttm. 
 5 1 13. 7 ; so c. inf. et ace. Luke 20, 6 ; c. 6Vt, 
 Rom. 8,38. 14,14. 15,14. 2 Tim. 1,5. 12; 
 c. ace. TO. Heb. 6, 9 ; comp. Buttm. J 1 34. 6. 
 So c. inf. 2 Mace. 9, 27 ; c. 6Yt Xen. CEc. 
 15. 6 ; c. ToCro Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 19. Also 
 to be persuaded to do any thing, to be indu 
 ced, absol. but c. inf. impl. Acts 21, 14 p.fj 
 Trf&op-tvov 8e OVTOV sc. fir] dvajBaiveiv KT\. 
 So c. inf. Xen. Cyr. 5. 1.8. 
 
 2. Spec, to assent to, to obey, to follow, 
 c. dat. of person, Matth. { 362. n. 2. Acts 
 5, 36. 37. 40. 23, 21. 27, 11 6 fie e x. T<B 
 KvftfpvrjTrj . . . eVe/Sero fjiaXXov. Rom. 2, 8. 
 Gal. [3, 1.] 5, 7. Heb. 13, 17. James 3, 3. 
 JEl V. H. 3. 23. Hdian. 3. 12. 13. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 2. 8. 
 
 III. PERF. 2 Tre TroiSa, intrans. to be 
 persuaded, to trust, comp. Buttm. J 113. n. 3. 
 II. Hence 
 
 1 . to be confident, assured, c. ace. et inf. 
 Rom. 2, 19 TreVotSas 1 re (Tfavrov 68rjyov et- 
 vai KT\. With OTI Heb. 13, 18. Phil. 2, 24 ; 
 rovro on Phil. 1, 6. 25; eVi rtra 6Y, in 
 respect to any one, 2 Cor. 2, 3. 2 Thess. 3, 
 4; ets Tiva OTI, id. Gal. 5, 10. With the 
 further adjunct eV Kvpia in or through the 
 Lord, Gal. 5, 10. Phil. 2, 24. 2 Thess. 3, 
 
567 
 
 4. Sept. genr. for naa Prov. 10, 9. Deut. 
 33, 28; comp. Job 12/6. 
 
 2. to confide in, to rely upon, c. dat. Phil. 
 1, 14. Philem. 21 Tren-oiScbs r;/ imaKovij erou. 
 2 Cor. 10, 7 e atmu. Sept. for n*J3 Prov. 
 14,16. 2 K. 18, 20; nons Is. 28, 17. 
 (2 Mace. 8, 18. Dion. Hal. Ant. 3. 50. 
 Hdot 9. 88.) With tv c. dat. to trust or 
 have confidence in any thing, Phil. 3, 3 V 
 0-apKi. v. 4; r TIVI id. Mark 10, 24. Luke 
 11, 22. 18, 9. 2 Cor. 1, 9. Heb. 2, 13. 
 (Sept. for 2 n-JS p s . 25, 2. Prov. 11, 28 ; 
 a nOH Ps. 2, 12.) So Vt rtra id. Mall. 
 
 27, 43. Sept. for nt33 2 K. 18, 21. 22. 
 TTeivdd), a), f. do-ea, aor. 1 ftTfivao-a ; 
 
 the Attic contraction was TretJ/eo, fjs, ft ; but 
 later writers have Treivw, ay, a, inf. irtivav ; 
 see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 6*1, 204. Winer 13. 
 3 ; comp. Buttm. j 105. n. 5. 
 
 1. to hunger, to be hungry, absol. Matt. 
 4, 2 vrjcrrfvcrai yptpas Tfcro-apaKovra . . . 
 voTtpov fTT(ivao~f. 12, 1. 3. 21, 18. *<5, 35. 
 37. 42. 44. Mark 2, 25. 11, 12. Luke 4, 2. 
 6, 3. Rom. 12, 20. (Prov. 25, 22.) 1 Cor. 
 11, 21. 34. Rev. 7, 16. Sept. and asn 
 Prov. 25, 22. 2 Sam. 17, 29. So irtivav 
 Jos. Ant 10. 11. 6. Plut. Aristid. 25 ; 7m- 
 vvv Luc. D. Mort. 17. 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 
 30. 
 
 2. Trop. to famish, to be without food, 
 i. q. to be poor, needy, Luke 1, 53 nfivuvras 
 eVeVXTjo-ti/ d-yaSiv. 6, 21. 25. 1 Cor. 4, 11. 
 Phil. 4, 12. Sept. and a?^ Ps. 107, 9; =?? 
 Jer. 31, 12. 25. Ecclus. 4, 2. 
 
 3. Trop. to hunger after any thing, to 
 long for ; c. ace. rffv SiKaioa-vvrjv Matt. 5, 6 ; 
 comp. in 8i>Jra no. 2. Winer 5 30. 7. 
 Absol. of longing after spiritual nourishment, 
 aliment, John 6, 35. So Ecclus. 24, 21 ; 
 c. gen. Xen. CEc. 13. 9 TT. TOV firaivov. 
 Conv. 4. 36. 
 
 Trelpa, as, %, (irapdco,) a trial, essay, 
 Find. Nem. 3. 122. In N. T. only in the 
 phrase rrelpav \anftdveiv TIVUS, pr. to 
 take (make) trial of any thing, i. q. Trcipdfa ; 
 comp. in \anfidvo> no. 1 . f. E. g. 
 
 1. to make trial of, to attempt, TJJJ 3a\d<r- 
 077? Heb. 11, 29. Sept. for MB3 Deut. 
 
 28, 56. Hdian. 2. 2. 1. Xen. Mem. 1. 
 4. 18. 
 
 2. to have trial of, to experience, TU>V e/x- 
 naiypuv Heb. 11, 36. Jos. Ant. 2. 5. 1. 
 Pol. 28. 9. 7. Xen. An. 5. 8. 15. 
 
 7ret/3a&>, f. do-a>, (irtlpa, ) to make trial 
 of, to try, e. g. 
 
 1 . Of actions, i. q. lit attempt, to assay, 
 c. infin. Acts 16, 7 fndpa^ov ds rrjv Bi3v- 
 viav 7ropeve(r3at. 24, 6. Sept. for HS3 
 
 Judg. 6, 39. 2 Mace. 2, 23. Jos. B. J. 1. 
 8. 4. Polyb. Fragm. CO. 
 
 2. Of persons, i. q. to tempt, to prove, to 
 put to the test, c. ace. a) Genr. and in a 
 good sense, in order to ascertain the char 
 acter, views, feelings of any one ; Matt. 
 22, 35, comp. Mark 12, 28-34. John 6, 6 
 rovro 8e eXey? TTfipdfav avrov. 2 Cor. 1 3, 5 
 eavTovs TTfipdeTf. Rev. 2, 2. Sept. for 
 "S3 1 K. 10, 1 ; tft* Ps. 17, 3. So Jos. 
 B. J. 1. 10. 4. Plut. Cleom. 7. b) In a 
 bad sense, with ill intent, Matt. 16, 1 nfipd- 
 OVT(S (TrT)pa>TT)<rav alirov. 19, 3. 22, 18. 
 Mark 8. 11. 10,2. 12,15. Luke 11, 16. 
 20, 23. John 8, 6. Spec, to try one s vir 
 tue, to tempt, to solicit to sin ; Gal. 6, 1 Iva 
 /ir; 7rfipao-3gr <a\ (TV, lest thou also be templ 
 ed, yield to temptation. James 1,13 ter. 14. 
 Rev. 2, 10; espec. of Satan, Matt. 4, 1 
 Treipao-Sijwu VTTO rov 8ia/3oAou. V. 3. Mark 
 
 I, 13. Luke 4, 2. 1 Cor. 7, 5. 1 Thess. 3, 
 5 bis. c) From the Heb. where God is 
 said to try, to prove, by adversity, to try the 
 faith and confidence of Christians in him ; 
 1 Cor. 10, 13 os OVK td<rti v/xas Tmpacraij- 
 vai virtp o dvvao^e. Heb. 2, 18 bis. 4, 15. 
 
 II, 17. 37. Rev. 3, 10. Sept. and n&j 
 Gen. 22, 1. Ex. 20, 20. (Wisd. 11, 90 
 Yice versa, men are said to prove or tempi 
 God, by doubting and questioning his power 
 and aid, by murmuring against him, etc. 
 Acts 5,9 nfipdcrai TO TtvevfJia Kvpiov. 15, 10 
 Tt TTfipezffre TOV %f6v, 1 Cor. 10, 9. Heb. 
 3, 9 ov firfipaa-dv p.e ol irartpfs t>/i&>c, quoted 
 from Ps. 95, 9 where Sept. for n5 , as also 
 Ex. 17, 2. 7. Is. 7, 12. So Wisd. 1, 2. 
 
 7Tlpa(TfjLO<;, ov, 6, (TTfipdfco,) 1. trial, 
 proof, a putting to the test ; only of per 
 sons, a) Genr. trial of one s character 
 and faith ; 1 Pet. 4, 12 Trpbs Treipaa-fiw vp.~iv, 
 i. e. to try or prove you. So Ecclus. 6, 7. 
 
 27, 5 TTfipacrp.6s dvSpunrov tv SiaXoyioyiw 
 avrov. v. 7. b) trial of one s virtue, 
 temptation, solicitation to sin, espec. from 
 Satan, Luke 4, 13. 1 Tim. 6, 9. 
 
 2. From the Heb. trial, temptation, comp. 
 in ireipdfa no. 2. c. a) Of a state of trial 
 into which God brings his people by ad 
 versity and affliction, in order to excite and 
 prove their faith and confidence in him ; 
 Matt. 6, 13 et Luke 11, 4 ^17 tlo-eveyKrjs 
 fj^ias fh irfipacrp.6v, i. e. bring us not into a 
 state of trial, lay not trials upon us. Matt. 
 26, 41. Mark 14, 38. Luke 8, 13. 22, 40 
 46. 1 Cor. 10, 13 bis. James 1, 2. 12. 1 Pet 
 1, 6. 2 Pet. 2, 9. Sept. and !"i^ Deut. 7, 
 19. 29,2. (Ecclus. 2, 1. 36, 1.) Melon, 
 i. q. adversity, affliction, sorrow, Luke 22, 
 
 28. Acts 20, 19 8ov\(v(av rw Kvpita /iera 
 
568 
 
 ttaupvav KOL Treipao-fiuv. Gal. 4, 14. Rev. 3, 
 10, b) Vice versa, temptation of God by 
 man is distrust in God, complaint and mur 
 muring against him ; comp. in ireipafa no. 
 2. C. Heb. 3, 8 Kara rrjv r)p,epav TOV rrfipa- 
 afiov sc. roC SeoD, quoted from Ps. 95, 8 
 where Sept. for lisa ; as also Ex. 17, 7. 
 Deut. 9, 22. 
 
 Treipaw, >, f. do-ca, to try ; usually and 
 in N. T. Mid. Trei.pa.op.ai., to try for one 
 self, for one s own part ; to attempt, to as 
 say to do any thing ; c. infin. Acts 9, 26 
 firfiparo KoXXaerSai rois fj.a%T)T<us. 26, 21. 
 2 Mace. 10, 12. Hdian. 2. 11. 13. Xen. 
 An. 4. 3. 5. Act. Luc. Hermot. 36. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 29. 
 
 7reia-fj,ovij, JJy, f], (7Tft 3<B,) persuasion, 
 i. e. Pass, the being persuaded, credulity; 
 Gal. 5, 8 TIS vp.as eveKo^e TTJ dkrftfia fj.T/ 
 7Ti 3e<r3ai ; rj TTfio-fJiovr) OVK e< TOV KaX. KT\. 
 On the paronomasia see Winer 62. 1 fin. 
 So Eustath. ad II. a, p. 99. 45. Od. ^, p. 
 785. 22. Chrysost. ad 1 Thess. 1, 3. Others 
 take it as Act. persuasion, act. of persuad 
 ing, and refer it to the Judaizing teachers. 
 Eustath. ad II. a, p. 21. 46. t, p. 637. 5. 
 
 7re\a<yo?, eos, ovs, TO, the sea, pr. the 
 \igh or open sea, the deep, the main, remote 
 from land; intens. Matt. 18, 6 ev T<B TreXa- 
 yet rrjs SaXdcro-r;?. So Aristot. Probl. sect. 
 23. 3, tv r<a \ip.evi 6\iyrj ecrTlv TJ SaXacrcra, 
 eV Se TW TreXayet /3a3eia. Apoll. Rhod. 2. 
 608 Tre X. rrjs SaXacro-^f. Diod. Sic. 4. 77. 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 16. Spoken of the high 
 sea adjacent to a country ; Acts 27, 5 TO TT. 
 Kara TTJV KiXiKiW, the sea of Cilicia. So 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 16. 5. Time. 5. 110 TO KprjTi- 
 KOV TTf Xcryos. 
 
 7reXe/ay, f. i <ra>, (7r Xeca>s,) to hew with 
 an axe, Sept. for ^&B 1 K. 5, 18. In N. 
 T. to behead with an axe, Pass. Rev. 20, 4 
 TUS ^v^ay ru>v TreTTfXeKicr/ie i coi/. So Jos. 
 Ant. 20. 5. 4. Pol. 1.7. 12. Diod. Sic. 19. 
 101. Found only in late writers, Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 341. 
 
 7re^7TT09, 77, ov, ord. adj. (TreVre,) the 
 fifth, Rev. 6, 9. 9,1. 16,10. 21,20. Sept. 
 for "^an Gen. 1, 23. Dem. 260. 20. 
 Xen. An. 4. 7. 21. 
 
 f. T//-CB, 1. to send, to cause to 
 go, spoken of persons. a) Genr. and c. 
 ace. Matt. 22, 7 irt^as TO. o-rparevp-ara 
 airoC. Acts 25, 25. Phil. 2, 23. With 
 ace. and also dat. of pers. to whom, 1 Cor. 
 4. 17 fTrfp.^a vp. tv Ti/ioSeoy. Phil. 2, 19 ; 
 tls c. ace. of place, Matt. 2. 8 ; c*s TWO. in 
 to one s body Mark 5, 12 ; TT pos nva Acts 
 
 25, 21. Eph. 6, 22. Col. 4, 8. Tit. 3, 12. 
 So Xen. An. 4. 6. 19 ; TIM Hdian. 7. 9. 6. 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 22; f l s Luc. Asin. 45; 
 Trpos Pol. 2. 11. 4. b) Spec, of messen 
 gers, agents, ambassadors ; c. ace. Matt. 
 11,2 Tj-e/ii/ras Svo Tcot r a3?;rcoi> avroC. Luke 
 16, 24. John 1, 22. 13, 16. 1 Thess. 3, 2. 
 1 Pet. 2, 14. Pass. part, ot Tre/i^SeWes, 
 Z/iose sent, the messengers, Luke 7, 10. 
 With els c. ace. of place Luke 16, 27. 
 Acts 15, 22; irpos TIVO. Luke 4, 26. Acts 
 15, 25; c. infin. of purpose, 1 Cor. 16, 3. 
 Rev. 22, 16 enffi^a TUV ayyt\6v (JLOV papTV- 
 p^o-ai KT\. (Hdian. 3. 14. 8; tig ib. 1. 11. 
 
 9 ; Trpos ib. 6. 4. 6.) Also ace. of pers. 
 impl. and with els c. infin. of purpose, 
 1 TflCSS. 3, 5 fTTffj.\lsa els TO yvvvai, as in 
 Engl. I sent to know; also tls c. ace. of 
 place, Acts 10, 32. 20, 17; irpos rtva 
 Acts 10, 33. 19,31. 23,30. (With els and 
 irpos Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 4.) So Particip. Trep.- 
 (jsas before a finite verb, implying that one 
 does a thing by an agent or messenger, 
 Matt. 14, 10 /cat Triplets direicfCpaXicre TOV 
 Ia>avvr)v, comp. Mark 6, 27. (Hdian. 1 . 9. 
 19 WKTcop 6 Ko/i/ioSoy Tre/rv/ ay dnoTefjivti 
 TT]v Ke(f>a\r]i>. Plut. de Puer. educ. 14 fin. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 5.) Spoken of teachers, 
 ambassadors, sent from God or in his name, 
 e. g. John the Baptist, c. ace. et inf. John 
 1, 33 6 7re/i\^ay jue /SanTtfeii . Jesus as sent 
 from God, John 4, 34. 5. 23. 24. 6, 38 sq. 
 7, 16. 28. Rom. 8, 3. al. saep. The Spirit, 
 John 14, 26. 15, 26. 16, 7. The apostles 
 as sent out by Jesus. John 13, 20. 20, 21. 
 
 2. Of things, to send, to transmit. a) Pr. 
 c. ace. of thing and dat. of pers. Rev. 1 1 , 
 
 10 8o>pa Tftp-TTOvariv dXXijXoiy. With ace. 
 of thing impl. TIV\ [ri] e Ls TL Acts 11, 29. 
 Phil. 4, 16. So Hdian. 3. 7. 2. Xen. Cyr. 
 3. 1. 42. b) Trop. to send upon or 
 among, c. ace. et dat. 2 Thess. 2, 11 7r//i- 
 fy-ei avTols 6 3e6f evtpyfiav irKavrfs. Also 
 to send forth, c. ace. e. g. TO bpeTvavov, i. q. 
 to thrust in, Rev. 14, 15. 18. Wisd. 12, 
 25. Horn. II. 15. 109. -f 
 
 Trevr/s, 777-0?, 6, 17, adj. (irfvo/jtai,) pr. one 
 who works for his daily bread ; hence, 
 poor, needy, 2 Cor. 9, 9. Sept. for VPSBt 
 Ex. 23, 6 ; 159 Deut. 25, 11. Hdian. 2. V! 
 10. Xen. Mem". 2. 9. 3. 
 
 Trevjrepa, as, /;, (TrevSepo y,) a mother-in- 
 law, e. g. the wife s mother, Matt. 8, 14. 
 Mark 1 , 30 T; Se TT. ^ificavos. Luke 4, 38. 
 Also the husband s mother, in antith. to 
 u/z<p>7, Matt. 10, 35. Luke 12, 53 bis. 
 Sept. for ninn Ruth 1, 14. 2, 11. 3, I. 
 Luc. Alex. 35. r Dem. 1123. 1. 
 
C, 6, a father-in-law, John 
 18, 13 Sept. for on Gen. 38, 13. 25 ; -jnh 
 Ex. 3, 1. Pollux On. 3. 3. 2. Horn. I1/6. 
 170. Soph. CEd. Col. 1302. 
 
 Trez^eo), J>, f. jjoxa, (TrcVSov,) to mourn, 
 to lament, i. e. 
 
 1. Trans, c. ace. of pers. to bewail any 
 one, to grieve for him, 2 Cor. 12,21 Trei SJij- 
 o-w TToXXovr. Comm. for one dead, Sept. 
 for b3X Gen. 37, 33 ; ,122 Gen. 50, 3. Luc. 
 D. Deo r. 14. 1. Xen. Hell. 2. 2. 3. 
 
 2. Intrans. to mourn, to lament, pr. at the 
 death of a friend, joined with KXauo, Mark 
 16, 10. (Sept. for n=2 Gen. 23, 2.) So 
 genr. to be sad, sorrowful, to mourn, absol. 
 Matt. 5, 4 [MKapioi oi TrevSoOiref. 9, 15. 
 Mid. for oneself, 1 Cor. 5, 2 ; joined with 
 KXai w Luke 6, 25. James 4, 9. Rev. 18, 
 11. 15. 19; Vt TIM 18, 11. Sept. for bsx 
 Neh. 8, 11. Ez. 7, 27. ^Eschin. 84. 14*. 
 Plato Phaedr. 258. b. 
 
 7761^09, (os, ovs, TO, (kindr. TraSor,) 
 mourning, grief, sadness, genr. James 4, 9 6 
 ye Xojf vfjiiav fls TTfvSos fjL(Tacrrpa(pr)T(i>. Rev. 
 18, 7 bis. 8. 21, 4. Sept. and bax Lam. 
 5,15; mm Prov. 14, 13. WisdV 19, 3. 
 Dem. 139 T 9. 12. More comm. for one dead, 
 Luc. D. Deor. 25. 2. Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 6. 
 
 Trevi^po^, d, 6v, (nevofuu,) like TTfvrjs, 
 poor, needy, Luke 21, 2. Sept. for 133 Ex. 
 22,25; bn Prov. 28, 15. Pol. 6. 21. 7. 
 Dem. 422. 19. Plato Rep. 578. a. 
 
 Trei/ra/a?, adv. (Treirf,) Jive times, 
 2 Cor. 11, 24. Sept. 2 K. 13, 19. Plut. 
 Marcell. 1 init. 
 
 Trezrra/cio-^/Xtot, at, a, (xtXtot.) five 
 thousand, pr. five times one thousand, Matt. 
 14, 21. 16, 9. Mark 6, 44. 8, 19. Luke 9, 
 14. John 6, 10. Sept. 2 Chr. 35, 9. Xen. 
 Hell. 1. 2. 1. 
 
 TrevraKOO toi) at, a, five hundred, Luke 
 7, 41. 1 Cor. 15, 6. Sept. for rn XE Crn 
 Num. 1, 21. 33. Luc. Icarom. 1. Xen. 
 Hell. 1. 4. 21. 
 
 Trezre, ot, at, TO, card. num. indec. five, 
 Matt. 14, 17. 19. 16, 9. 25, 2. Luke 1, 24. 
 Acts 4, 4. al. As an indef. small number 
 1 Cor. 14", 19. Sept. for ttJan, fiissn , 
 Gen. 18, 28. Ex. 22, 1. Luc* Herniot 
 48. Xen. Ag. 1. 36. + 
 
 TrevTe/caiSeKaTos, rj, O v. ord. adj. (ntv- 
 TeiuSa,) the fifteenth, Luke 3, 1. Sept. 
 Num. 28, 17. Plut. adv. Stoic. 45 fin. 
 
 TrevrrjKOVTa, ot, at. TU, indec. fifty, 
 Mark 6, 40 et Luke 9, 14 dva TrevrriKovra, 
 by fifties. Luke 7, 41. 16, 6. John 8, 57. 
 
 569 Trepav 
 
 21, 11. Acts 13, 20. Sept. for 
 
 Gen. 6, 15. Ex. 26, 5. Luc. D. Marin/e! 
 
 1. Xen. Hell. 1. 4. 21. 
 
 TreirrrjKOCTTij, ijr, f], (TrevnjKoa-Tos,^ a fif 
 tieth part, a species of impost of two per cent. 
 Dem. 568. 12. ib. 738. 5; seeBosckh Staatsh. 
 d. Ath. I. p. 337. Diet, of Antt. art. Pente- 
 coste. In N. T. Pentecost, the day of Pente 
 cost, one of the three great Jewish festivals, 
 in which all the males were required to ap 
 pear before God; Acts 2, 1. 20, 16. 1 Cor. 
 16, 8. (Tob. 2, 1. 2 Mace. 12, 32. Jos. Ant. 
 14. 13. 4. al.) It was so called because 
 celebrated on the fiftieth day, TJ TrfiT^Kocrn} 
 fipepa, counting from the second day of the 
 festival of unleavened bread or passovej 
 i. e. seven weeks after the 16th day of N- 
 san; comp. Lev. 23, 15 sq. Deut. 16, 9 sq. 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 10. 6. Hence called in Heb. 
 ni SaO 3n , Sept. eopri) e ^So/zaSwi , festival 
 of weeks, Deut. 16, 10. It was a festival of 
 thanks for the harvest, which began directly 
 after the passover, Deut. 16, 9 sq. and was 
 hence called also n*n!D2n ni" 1 , Sept. ij/it- 
 pa T&V vuv, day of the first-fruits, Num. 
 28, 26. Josephus relates that in his day 
 great numbers of Jews resorted from every 
 quarter to Jerusalem K \eep this festival ; 
 Ant. 14, 13. 4. ib. 17. 10. .. B. J. 2. 3. 1. 
 
 7TTrofer/cn$, ecos, fj, (Tm Seo, TreVotSa,) 
 trust, confidence, so in Paul s writings. 2 Cor. 
 1, 15. 3, 4. 8, 22. 10, 2. Eph. 3, 12; tv 
 TIVI Phil. 3, 4. Sept. for "p rioa 2 K. 18, 
 20. Aquil. et Theod. for TJ3 Hos. 2, 18. 
 Jos. Ant. 1.3. 1. Philo de Nobil. p. 910. a. 
 Sext. Empir. Pyrrh. 3. 24. Found only in 
 late writers, Phryn. et Lob. p. 294 sq. 
 
 Trep, an enclitic particle, adding force 
 and emphasis to a word ; pr. shortened from 
 adv. irepi or its strengthened form irtpia- 
 a-tos, Buttm. J 117. n. 3. Kiihner 5 317. 1. 
 Matth. .} 594; much, very, ever; in N. T. 
 only as joined with a pronoun or particle, 
 see Herm. ad Vig. p. 791 . See Siorrfp, tdv 
 jrtp, (nrfp, fireiTrep, enfi8r]TT(p, rjirep, KaSdnep, 
 
 KaiTTfp, OCTTTfp, OHTTTfp. 
 
 TrcpaiTepa), adv. com par. of irfpav, be 
 yond, further; Acts 19, 39 Lachm. el 8e T 
 TrepaiTtpu (Tri^reiTf, where Rec. ntpi trt- 
 pa>v. Eurip. Phcen. 1681. Plato Phaed. 
 107. b. 
 
 Trepav, adv. (obs. -rrtpa, n-epas,) beyond, 
 over, on the other side ; as prep, governing 
 the genit. Buttm. 146. 1, 3. So irtpav TOV 
 lopSoVov Matt. 4, 15. 25. 19, 1. Mark 3, 8. 
 John 1, 28. 3, 26. 10, 40; irfpav T^S 3a- 
 John 6, 1. 17. 22. 25; jr. TOV x el P- 
 
570 
 
 ire pi 
 
 rov Kfdpcov John 18, 1. Sept. for 13$ 
 Gen. 50, 10. 11. Num. 34, 15. So Thuc. 
 5. 6. Xen. An. 4. 3. 3. With neut. art. TO 
 Trepay, pr. that beyond, the other side, i. e. 
 the region beyond, comp. Buttm. 1 25. 6, 7 ; 
 so Si a rov irtpav TOV lopSdvov Mark 10, 
 1 ; els TO TT. rrjs SaXdo-ffj;? 5, 1 ; tls TO TT. 
 rfjs \ipvT]s Luke 8, 22 ; absol. Matt. 8, 18. 
 28. 14, 22. 16, 5. Mark 4, 35. 5, 21. 6, 
 45. 8, 13. Sept. for 13$ Num. 21, 13. 
 Deut. 1,4. So Pol. 2. 32. 9. Diod. Sic. 3. 
 64 or 65 ; c. gen. Xen. An. 3. 5. 2. 
 
 7rep<Z9, aroj, TO, (obs. Trepa,) an end, ex 
 tremity, e. g. TI]S yj)s, of the earth, the re 
 motest regions, Matt. 12, 42. Luke 11, 31. 
 Rom. 10, 18. Sept. for yiX" &BSt p s . 2, 
 8; VW "^i? 5 ? Ps - 61 > 3, comp. 19, 5. 
 So Diod. Sic. 3. 53 ink. Xen. Ag. 9. 4 TO TT. 
 TTJS yr/s. Trop. an end to which any thing 
 comes, conclusion, termination; Heb. 6, 16 
 avrikoylas nepas. Sept. for i^Sf? Nah. 3, 9. 
 So Pol. 1. 41. 2. Xen. Vect. 4. 26. 
 
 nepya/AOS, ov, f], Pergamus, now Ber 
 gamo, a celebrated city of Mysia in Asia 
 Minor, Rev. 1, 11. 2, 12. It was situated 
 near the river Caicus ; and was the metrop 
 olis of the powerful kingdom of Pergamus, 
 so long famous under the Attali. The kings 
 of this race collected here a noble library of 
 200,000 volumes ; which was afterwards 
 given by M. Antony to Cleopatra, and added 
 to the library at Alexandria. Here also 
 parchment was first perfected ; hence called 
 pergamena. There was at Pergamus a cel 
 ebrated and much frequented temple of 
 Esculapius, who was usually represented 
 under the image of a serpent ; whence prob. 
 the allusion in Rev. 2, 13. See Pint. M. 
 Anton. 58. Plin. H. N. 5. 33. ib. 13. 21. 
 Strabo 13. p. 623 sq. O. v. Richter Wallf. 
 p. 488 sq. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. I. ii. p. 
 175, 219. 
 
 Ilepyrj, rjs, rj, Perga, the metropolis of 
 Pamphylia in Asia Minor, situated on the 
 river Cestus about 60 stadia from its mouth, 
 and celebrated for a splendid temple of 
 Diana; Acts 13, 13. 14. 14, 25. Strabo 
 14. 3. 2. p. 667. Plin. H. N. 5. 26. 
 
 irepl, prep, governing in N. T. the gen 
 itive and accusative ; in Gr. writers also the 
 dative; with the primary signif. around, 
 about, in a local sense, implying a surround 
 ing and inclosing on all sides. So with the 
 dative, e. g. SwprjKa Trepl crriftfa-aiv eSwf 
 Horn. II. 3. 332 ; 8aKTv\iov rrtpl Trj xpl 
 4>fpeiv Plato Rep. 359. d. Comp. Winer 
 J51. p. 446. 
 
 I. With the GENITIVE, \\here the genit. 
 
 then marks the centre from around which 
 an action proceeds, about which it is exert 
 ed ; see Passow s. v. Winer 1. c. Buttm. 
 132. 3. But in prose writers and usually 
 in the poets, nepi c. gen. is- used only trop. 
 about,concerning, respecting ; and so in N. T. 
 
 1. Where the genit. denotes the object 
 about which an action is exerted, as in Engl. 
 to speak or hear about or of a thing ; Matth. 
 589. Buttm. 147. n. 1. So after verbs 
 of speaking, asking, teaching, writing, and 
 the like; e. g. elrrov, Matt. 17, 13 6Vt 7rtp\ 
 la>avvov T. /3. elntv avTols. John 1, 30. 7, 
 39 ; XaXe w Luke 2, 17. 33. 38 ; Xeyw Matt. 
 11, 7. 21, 45. al. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 13.) 
 e pcordco Luke 9, 45. John 18, 19; 8i8a(TKo> 
 1 John 2, 27; ypd(pw Matt. 11, 10. John 5, 
 46; and so Matt. 12, 36. John 1,7. 8. 6,41. 
 Acts 1. 1. 16. 7, 52. 1 Cor. 1, 11. 1 Tim. 
 I, 7. al. sEep. (Plut. Mor. II. p. 25. M. 
 V. H. 2. 10. Luc. D. Deor. 1.2. Xen. An. 
 1, 7. 2. Cyr. 6. 1. 6.) So after nouns of 
 like signification, where the simple genit. 
 might sometimes stand ; Luke 4, 14 (frf]fj.ij 
 TTfpl avTov. v. 37 ?ix os 7i" e p ai Tov. Acts 11, 
 22. 25, 16. Rom. 1,3. Heb. 5, 11. SoCeb. 
 Tab. 38. Hdian. 2. 1. 6. After verbs of 
 hearing, learning, knowing, and the like ; 
 e. g. O.KOVO) Mark 5, 27. Luke 7, 3. 9, 9 ; 
 KaTrix^v Acts 21, 21. 24; eVurra/Aai Acts 
 26, 26 ; yvacrTov eori 28, 22. So UKO(:U> 
 Plut. Mor. II. p. 40. Plato Phaed. 58 init. 
 p. 108. c. Xen. An. 6. 6. 34. After verbs 
 of inquiring, deliberating, doubting, and the 
 like ; e. g. ^T/W, John 16, 19. 1 Pet. 1,10; 
 e eraa> Matt. 2, 8 ; TrwSdi/o/iai Acts 23, 
 20 ; SievSu/ze ojuai Acts 10, 19; StaXoyt bp,at 
 Luke 3, 19 ; 8iaTropfop.ai Luke 24, 4. Acts 
 5, 24 ; So/cet poi Matt. 22, 42. After like 
 nouns, as {TJTTJO-IS John 3, 25. Acts 18, 15. 
 So 7rvi>3. Luc. Alex. 33. Ceb. Tab. 33; 
 SoKeT poi Luc. D. Deor. 6. 4 ; o-Kon-tw Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 1. 15. 
 
 2. Where the genit. expresses the ground, 
 motive, occasion of the action, i. q. on account 
 of, because of, in Engl. often/or. a) Genr. 
 e. g. after verbs of reproving, accusing, 
 being tried, and the like, c. gen. of thing ; 
 
 ) Luke 3, 19 HpaS^s . . . e Xey^o- 
 
 fj,(vos VTT avrov irep\ HpwStdSos 1 KrX. John 
 
 8, 46. 16, 8. Jude 15; eyxaXe co Acts 19,40. 
 26, 2 ; KaTijyopeca 24, 1 3 : Kpivopai 23, 6. al 
 So /<a7Tjyopeo) Xen. Hell. 1. 7. 2; *cpiVop.ai 
 ib. 3. 5. 25. After verbs signifying an affec 
 tion of the mind, e. g. o-7rXayx*" t M al Matt. 
 
 9, 36 ; ayavaKTfc* Matt. 20, 24. Mark 10, 41 ; 
 3au/id<Jo> Luke 2, 18; /cav^dop-ai 2 Cor. 10, 
 8. Spec. fvxapio-Tfv and the like, 1 Coi 1 , 
 4. 1 Thess. 1, 2. 2 Thess. 2, 13; ev^api- 
 
571 
 
 irepi 
 
 trrlav drrobibovat 1 Thess. 3, 9. (So \dpiv 
 oTrofitSoi/at Died". Sic. 1. 88.) Also p.e Xei 
 Hoi Matt. 22, 16. Mark 12, 14; p.tpip.vda> 
 Matt. 6, 28. Luke 12,26. Also genr. after 
 various verbs and nouns, e. g. John 10, 33 
 Trepi KaXov tpyov ov Xi3dbp.ei ere KT\. John 
 19, 24 Xa^co/xei Trepi auToC, TiVos ecrrui. 
 Matt. 16, 11. Mark 1, 44. Luke 2, 27. Acts 
 15, 2. 19, 23 rdpaxos Trepi TTJS 6SoG. Col. 
 
 2, 1. So Hdian. 1. 11. 4. Dem. 10. 16. 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 22 cpiXoi/eiKtcu Trepi TWOS. 
 
 b) Where the action is exerted in favour of 
 the person or thing denoted by the genitive, 
 i. q. on account of, in behalf of, for, e. g. 
 Matt. 4, 6 TOIJ dyytXots avrov eVreXerrai 
 Trepi crov. Luke 22, 32 e ya> Se ffrfir]v Trepi 
 o-ov, Iva KT\. John 16, 26. Eph. 6, 18. Philem. 
 10. Heb. 11, 40. 1 Pet. 5, 7 6Yi avrw p-e Xei 
 Trepi vp.cov. After verbs of offering sacri 
 fice and the like in behalf of any one ; Matt. 
 26, 28 TO ai/jLa p.ov ... TO Trepi TroXXcoj/ tK^vvo- 
 p.vov. Mark 14, 24. Gal. 1, 4. Heb. 5, 3. 
 So Eu/ip. Phcen. 534 ; comp. Cic. de Off. 
 
 3. 21. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 13. ib. 3. 3. 44. 
 
 c) Where the action is exerted against a 
 person or thing ; so c. gen. of pers. after 
 words of accusing, Acts 25, 18 Trepi oS... 
 ol Karfj-yopoi ov9ejuta> alriav tirtfapov, comp. 
 V. 27 TOS ICOT avTov curias, ib. v. 15 Trepi 
 ov . . . (Vffpdvicrav ol dp%itpfls. comp. v. 2 
 KctTa TWOS. (Comp. Jos. Ant. 14. 10. 12.) 
 So in the phrase Trepi TTJS dp.apTias, Trepi 
 afjuipTiuv, on account of sin, for sin, i. e. 
 for doing away or expiating sin ; Rom. 8, 
 3 TOV viov TT(p.\^as . . Trepi ap-aprias. 1 Pet. 
 
 3. 18 Xp. aTra Trepi Afiafnav eVraSe. Also 
 Trpocrcpcopd v. Svaia Trepi ap.. Heb. 10, 18. 26 ; 
 aipa 13, 11; iXacrp.6y Trepi dp.. 1 John 2, 2. 
 
 4, 10. Ellipt. Trepi ap.apTias for Sucria TTfpi 
 d/i. Heb. 10, 6. 8, comp. v. 26, quoted from 
 Ps. 40, 6 where Sept. for nxon ; comp. 
 Lev. 5, 8. 9, 10. 2 Chr. 29, 24. See Winer 
 p. 447. 
 
 3. Where there is only a more general 
 reference or allusion to the person or thing 
 denoted by the genitive, concerning, as to, 
 touching, in relation to. a) Genr. Matt. 
 
 18, 19 tav 8vo vp.S>v (rvp(pa>vf)O-u(nv irepl 
 Train-as TrpdypaTos KT\. Luke 11, 53. John 
 9, 18 OVK (Trio-Tevcrav oi louSaToi TTfpl avTov 
 OTI Tv<p\os TIV. 11, 19. 15, 22. Acts 28, 21 
 Tjp.ds ovTf jpdp.p.aTa irfp\ aov f Se|dpf3a. 
 Rom. 15, 14. 1 Cor. 7, 37. Col. 4, 10 Trepi 
 ov f\dft(T fvro\ds. Heb. 11, 20. al. saep. 
 So Dem. 12. 9. Plut. Galb. 23. Diod. Sic. 
 
 19. 36. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 15. b) Absol. or 
 independ. usually at the beginning of a sen 
 tence, e. g. Matt. 22, 31 Trepi TTJS dvao-Ta- 
 
 *>v vficpuv KT\. as to or touching the 
 
 resurrection of the dead, have ye not read. 
 Mark 12, 26. Acts 28, 22. 1 Cor. 7, 1. 25. 
 8,1.4. 12,1. 1 Thess. 4, 9. 13. 5, 1. al. 
 Comp. Winer p. 447. Matth. $ 589. So 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 6, 9. Plato Phzedr. p. 250. c. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 15. c) With neut. art. 
 Plur. TO rrept TWOS, c. gen. of thing, the 
 things relating or pertaining to any thing, 
 as TO. Trepi TJ/J /3ao~tXei as T. oup. Acts 1, 3. 
 8, 12. 19, 8 ; also 24, 22. With gen. of 
 pers. i. q. one s circumstances, slate, pros 
 pects, Luke 22, 37. 24/19. 27. Acts 23, 11. 
 15. Eph. 6, 22. Phil. 1, 27. Col. 4, 8. So 
 Xen. An. 2. 5. 37. Hell. 7. 4. 1. 
 
 4. Spec, from the primary idea of sur 
 rounding and including, in the phrase rrept 
 TrdvTov, pr. including all, and hence more 
 than all, above all, Horn. II. 1. 287. Find. 
 Ol. 6. 84. Dion. Hal. Ant. 6. 45. In N. T. 
 once, 3 John 2 Trept Trdvrav fv^op.ai ere eu- 
 oSovo~3at . . . /caSwr fvoSovTai crov f) ^V^T), 
 above all things I wish that thou mayest 
 prosper. So usually ; but taken in connec 
 tion with the next clause, it is better to ren 
 der : as to all things I wish that thou may 
 est prosper, even as thy soul prosperelh ; as 
 above in no. 3. a ; see Liicke Comm. in loc. 
 Winer p. 447 sq. 
 
 II. With the ACCUSATIVE ; where the 
 accus. then marks the object around or 
 about which any thing moves, comes, or 
 finally remains. 
 
 1. Of Place, around, about, e. g. place 
 whither, after a verb of motion, Luke 13, 8 
 ecos OTTOV crKcrv^a) Trept avrrjv. (Horn. II. 21. 
 11. ed. Wolf.) More freq. of place where, 
 implying the coming and remaining around ; 
 e. g. with ace. of thing, Matt. 3, 4 6 ivdv- 
 vrjs et^e . . . a>i>T)V Sep/x. Trept TTJV oo-cpiii/ av- 
 TOV. Mark 9, 42 Xi So? p.v\tKos Trept TOV 
 Tpd\n\ov avTov. Rev. 1 5, 6. With ace. of 
 pers. Matt. 8, 18 tScbi Se 6 iTjo-oOr TroXXovj 
 o^Xovy Trepi avTov. Mark 3, 32. 34. Acts 
 22, 6. See Buttm. } 147. n. 1. Matth. \ 589. 
 c. Winer $ 53. i. So c. ace. rei Luc. D. 
 Deor. 11.2. Diod. Sic. 12. 44. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 2. 9; pers. Diod. Sic. 19. 36. Xen. Cyr. 
 7. 5. 59. With the art. ol, al, TO Trepi, 
 c. ace. of place, Mark 3, 8 oi Trepi Ti poi/ *al 
 2i8a>j/a, they about Tyre and Sidon, i. e 
 dwelling in and around these cities. Acts 
 28, 7 eV 8e TO!? Trepi TOV TOTTOV tKelvov, i. e. 
 in the parts around, the environs. Jude 7. 
 (Strabo 12. p. 571. .<E1. V. II. 12. 44. 
 Hdot. 6. 105.) With ace. of pers. oi Trepi 
 Tiva, of a person and his followers, Mark 
 4, 10. Luke 22, 49. John 11, 19. Acts 13, 
 13 ; see fully in 6, 17, TO, E. a. 
 
 2. Trop. of that about which an action is 
 
Trepiayco 
 
 572 
 
 exerted, about, concerning, respecting, i. q. 
 irepi c. gen. Winer, Matth. 1. c. a) Of a 
 matter or business about which one is occu 
 pied ; Acts 1 9, 25 TOVS irfpl roiavra epyd- 
 ras, lit. workmen about like things, of like 
 occupation. Luke 10, 40 17 Se MdpSa Trept- 
 f anaro irfp\ iTo\\fjv diaKoviav. v. 41. 1 Tim. 
 6, 4. Comp. Viger. p. 656, marg. So 
 fX flv K f P*- Ti Luc. D. Deor. 19. 2. JEl.V. 
 H. 3. 42 ; tlvai irtpi TI Diod. Sic. 1. 74. 
 Xen. An. 3. 5. 7. b) Genr. i. q. as to, 
 touching, 1 Tim. 1, l^mpl TTJV jrumv evav- 
 dyrja-av. 6, 21. 2 Tim. 2, 18. 3, 8. Tit. 
 2, 7. So Jos. Ant. 5. 7. 8. jEl. V. H. 3. 
 31. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 2. c) With art. 
 neut. TO. Trepl e/u.e, my circumstances, af 
 fairs, state, Phil. 2, 23. So Xen. Cyr. 6. 
 1. 54 TO. Trepi rovs irvpyovs. Comp. above 
 in I. 3. c. 
 
 3. Of Time, i. e. of a point of time not 
 entirely definite, about, Matt. 20, 3 Trepi TTJV 
 TPITTJV &pav. v. 5. 6. 9. 27, 46. Mark 6, 
 48. Acts 10, 9. 22, 6. Comp. Matth. Wi 
 ner, 1. c. ^El. V. H. 5. 13. Hdian. 3. 4. 8. 
 Xen. An. 1. 7. 1. 
 
 NOTE. In composition irfpi implies in N. 
 T. a) A moving, being, spreading around 
 on all sides as from a centre, around, round 
 about; as 7repi/3dXX(a, Trtpi/SXeVoj, Trepu ^co. 
 b) Trop. as around and including an object, 
 and therefore more than, over, above ; as 
 irfpifijj.1, irepiova-ia. c) Emphasis, a com 
 pleteness or strengthening of the simple 
 idea, Lat. per, i. q. completely, very, exceed 
 ingly ; as TrfpiXvTros, irepnreipo). -f- 
 
 Trepidya), f. d<a, (aya>,) 1. to lead 
 about ; e. g. those whom one takes as com 
 panions, C. ace. 1 Cor. 9, 5 d&VXcpijj; yvvaina 
 rrepidyfiv. Sept. for Tp^in Am. 2, 10. 
 Dem. 958. 15 rpelr Traldas aKoXovSouy Trepi- 
 dytis. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 3. 
 
 2. Intrans. or with tavrov impl. see ayo> 
 no. 2 ; to go about, to go up and down, ab- 
 sol. Acts 13, 11. With ace. of place, de 
 pending on Trepi in composit. Buttm. 147. 
 n. 9. Matth. $ 426. Winer 56. 2. c. Matt. 
 4, 23 irfpiTJyfv O\TJV TJ/V Ta\L\alav, he went 
 about all Galilee. 9, 35. 23, 15 on irepui- 
 ytTc TT]V 3dXa(rcrai> *cai TTJV r]pdv. Mark 6, 6. 
 So absol. Cebet. Tab. 6 ; comp. Trepidywi/ 
 Plut. Solon 3. 
 
 7reptatpe<w, , f. jjo-co, (aipe co,) aor. 2 
 TrepteiXov. 
 
 1. to take away what is round about ; c. 
 ace. Acts 27, 40 ras dynvpas TrepteXoWfj, 
 taking (cutting) away the four anchors 
 round about the ship ; comp. v. 29 and see 
 in do> no. 1 . So of a veil, Pass. 2 Cor. 3, 
 
 16 TrepiaipeiTai TO K.uk\>p.p.a, in allusion to 
 Ex. 34, 34 where Sept. for f On , as also 
 Gen. 41, 42; for l"OSn. Jon. 3, 6. So 
 2 Mace. 4, 38 ; 6VXa Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 47 ; 
 TO. Td x r) Dem. 125. 26. Xen. Hell. 2. 
 2. 22. 
 
 2. Trop. to take away wholly, all around. 
 Heb. 10, 11 TrepieXetj/ apapTias, wholly to 
 take away sins, to make complete expiation 
 for sins, comp. v. 4. Pass. Acts 27, 20 
 TTfpirjpe iTo irda-a f\7ris. Sept. for ^PH 
 Zeph. 3, 16; ^as* Ps. 119, 39. Dem. 
 942 ult. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1.21. 
 
 TTeptao-rpaTTTCi), f. ^ ffl , (ao-rpaTrra,) 
 to flash around, to shine around, with ace. 
 of pers. Acts 9, 3 ; see above in Trepidyu 
 no. 2. Fully with irtpi TIVO. Acts 22, 6 ; 
 see Buttm. 147. n. 9. Winer } 57. 2. 
 
 7repiftaX\.a), {. /3aXw, QSdXXw,) to cast 
 or throw around, to put around. 
 
 1. Genr. to cast around, c. ace. et dat. 
 Luke 19, 43 irepi[3a\oii<riv %dpaKd aroi. 
 Sept. for "Bia Ez. 4,2. Pol. 5. 20/5 ofr-e 
 Tafppov ovTf x<*P aKa TJ] iraptppciXfj Trepif- 
 &a\ov. JEl V. H. 6. 12. Xen. Mem. 2 
 
 1. 14. 
 
 2. Spec, of clothing, to throw around, to 
 put on, to clothe, e. g. a) Act. c. ace. of 
 pers. expr. or impl. Matt. 25, 36 yvp.v6s, KOI 
 7Tfpif/3dXere p.e. v. 38. 43. (Sept. Is. 58, 7.) 
 With two ace. of pers. and thing, to put a 
 garment around or upon any one, to clothe, 
 with any thing ; Luke 23, 1 1 irepiftaXav 
 avTov e o-SfJra Xa/ZTrpdv. John 19. 2 ; see 
 Buttm. 5 131. 5. Sept. for i"i&3 Ez. 18, 7. 
 16. So Tivd TI Test. XII Pair. p. 648. 
 Hdian. 2. 8. 10 TTJV /3ao~. Tropfpvpav [UVTOV] 
 TTfpiftuXovres. b) Mid. and Pass, to put 
 on one s own garments, to clothe oneself, 
 to be clothed ; absol. Matt. 6, 29 ovSe 2oXo- 
 Ha>v...TTpifftdXtTo us fv TOVTUV. Luke 12, 
 27. Rev. 3, 18. 19, 8. With accus. of 
 garment, comp. Buttm. 135. 5. 134. 6. 
 Acts 12, 8 7Tf/H/3aXoC TO lp.aTi6v <rov. Matt. 
 6, 31. Part. perf. Mark 14, 51 TTfpi^Xrj- 
 pevos (TivBova. 16, 5. Rev. 7, 9. 13. 10, 1. 
 11,3. 12,1. (17,4.) 18,16. 19,13. Sept. 
 for V^s i Sam. 28, 8 ; ftsnri 2 K. 19, 1. 
 
 2. (1 Mace. 8, 14. JE1. V. H. 12. 1. p. 156 
 ult. Tauchn. Xen. CEc. 2. 4.) With ej 
 rtvi, Rev. 3, 5 7repi)3aXeiTai Iv i/itm oty Xev- 
 Koh. 4, 4. Sept. for 3 H&3 Deut. 22/12. 
 Ps. 147, 8; comp. Ps. 45, 14. Once c. 
 dat. of garment, Rev. 17, 4 Rec. rrfpifif- 
 ^\T]fj.firr) 7rop<pvpa Kal KOKKIVO). So Sept. for 
 a ,163 i K. 1, 1. 11, 29. Wisd. 19, 6; 
 trop. ovflSti Dem. 740. 23. Diod. Sic. 12. 
 25. See Matth. 5 402. d. 
 
573 
 
 7rept/3Xe7r&), f. ^ w , (/SXeVw,) to look 
 around upon, c. ace. Plut. Marcell. 7. Xen. 
 Cyr. 5. 1. 2. In N. T. only Mid. irtpi- 
 /SXe jrojLiai, f. Ap-o/wu, to look round about 
 oneself, e. g. 
 
 1. Intrans. to look around, round about, 
 absol. Mark 9, 8 Trfpi/SXc^d/iepot, OVKT 
 ovSe ra fidov. 10, 23; c. inf. of purpose 
 Mark 5, 32. Sept. for MSB Ex. 2, 12. 
 Ecclus. 9, 7. Arr. Epict/3. 14. 3. Plut. 
 Cato Min. 37. 
 
 2. Trans, to look around upon, c. arc. 
 Mark 3, 5 7rfpij3Xf\^d^ti oy avrovy. V. 34. 
 11, 11. Luke 6, 10. Sept. for -niB Job 7, 
 8. Pol. 9. 17. 6. 
 
 TrepifioXaioVj ov, TO, (TrtptjSdXXca,) pr. 
 something thrown around ; hence a cover 
 ing, garment, spoken of the outer garment, 
 mantle, pallium ; comp. i/idriov no. 2. Heb. 
 
 1, 12 ojoVi 7repi/3dXaioi> eXi ety avrovy, in 
 allusion to Ps. 102, 27 where Sept. for 
 din!? 5 also for m03 Ex. 22, 27 ; fiSS-a 
 Ez. 27, 7. So Palseph. 52. 4. Dion. Hal . 
 Ant. 3. 61. Plut. Alex. 67. Spec, a cover 
 ing for the head, a veil, 1 Cor. 11, 15. 
 
 7T6ptoe&)j f. Sijcroj, (Sew,) Pass. perf. Tre- 
 pi8(8ffj.ai, to bind around; Pass. John 11, 
 44 f) o\lns avrov o-ovfiapi w TrepteSeSero. Sept. 
 Act. for 1OX Job 12, 18. Jos. Ant. 5. 4. 
 
 2. Hdot. 4/176. Plato Legg. 830. b. 
 
 i,) f. do-o/it, Mid. depon. 
 (irtpifpyos. epydop.ai,) pr. to work all 
 around a thing, on every side, to work 
 carefully, sedulously, to do with great and 
 even excessive pains, ^El. V. H. 2. 44-. 
 Hence in N. T. to overdo, to be a busy-body ; 
 so in the paronomasia 2 Thess. 3, 1 1 pjSey 
 tpyafrufvovs, dXXa 7reptepyabp.eVovy, doing 
 nothing, but over-doing ; not busy in work, 
 but busy-bodies. So Ecclus. 3, 23. Dem. 
 150. 24 e cov (pydr) Kal trepiepydfa. Plat. 
 Apol. Socr. 3. p. 19. b. 
 
 Trepiepyo?, ov, 6, tj, adj. (tpyov.) pr. 
 working all around, i. e. doing carefully, 
 sedulously ; comp. in irepiepydo(i.ai. In 
 N. T. over-doing, doing with care and pains 
 what is not worth the pains, i. e. 
 
 1 . Of persons, a busy-body, intermeddler ; 
 1 Tim. 5, 13 ov povov dpyai, dXXa *al (p\v- 
 apoi KOI irepifpyoi. Arr. Epict. 3. 1. 21. 
 Plut. T. Gracch. 2. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 1. 
 
 2. Of things, ra nepiepya, pr. over 
 wrought, curious; spoken of magic arts, 
 sorcery, Acts 19, 19 iKavoi 8e rtav ra Trtpi- 
 fpya irpagdiTav. Iren. adv. Hseres. 1. 20. 
 Tsidor. III. 139 ov rrjv Trapa XaXSat otr Trtpi- 
 
 epyov iraio evcriv f/jLaSov ol nalSfs ol rptis 
 KOI 6 AavirjX. Genr. Dem. 145. 17. Comp. 
 Lat. curiosus Hor. Epod. 17. 77. 
 
 Trepiep^ofMU, Mid. depon. (ep^o/wit,) 
 aor. 2 TrepifjXSoi , to go about, to wander up 
 and down, absol. Acts 19, 13. Hob. 11, 37 
 Of a ship sailing on an irregular course 
 with unfavourable winds, Acts 28, 13 
 With ace. of place, dependent on nepl in 
 compoeit. see in Trepidyw no. 2 ; so 1 Tim. 
 5, 13 TTfpifpxofifvai ray olxias, going about 
 to houses, from house to house. Sept. c. 
 ace. for BVJ Job 1, 7. Absol. Wisd. 6^ 
 16. Xen. OZc. 6. 13; c. ace. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 83. Xen. Ag. 9. 3. 
 
 Trepie^w, f. ^ (? X(B> ) aor. 2 Trepte - 
 (TXov, intrans. pr. to have or to hold oneself 
 around, to be around; comp. in e^co no. 5; 
 hence i. q. to surround, to environ, as a 
 mountain Dem. 1274. 15 ; c. ace. Xen. An 
 
 1. 2. 22. In N. T. to inclose, to embrace. 
 
 1. to clasp around^ to seize, c. ace. of 
 pers. trop. Luke 5, 9 3d/i/3os Trtpifa-xf av- 
 TOV. 2 Mace. 4, 16. Jos. B. J. 4. 10. 1 ; 
 pr. ib. 6. 3. 1. Luc. Tox. 14. 
 
 2. to include, to contain, as a writing, c. 
 ace. Acts 23, 25 ypd^as eVtcrroX^i irtpi- 
 (Xovcrav TOV TVTTOV TOVTOV. So 1 Mace. 15, 
 
 2. Diod. Sic. 1. 4. Plato Menex. 87. d. 
 Impers. 1 Pet. 2, 6 SioYt Trepie^et tv rfj 
 ypa(f>fj I8ov KT\. where supply 17 Trepio^?; 
 or the like ; see Buttm. { 129. 16, 17. So 
 Jos. Ant. 11. 4. 7 /3ovXo/uu yivea^at Trdvra 
 KaScoj eV avrfi 
 
 , f. fcio-co, (fcoj/w^tt,) to 
 gird around, Sept. for *nx trop. Ps. 18, 
 40. 30, 12. In N. T. only Mid. or Pass. 
 to gird oneself around, to be girded around, 
 spoken in reference to the long flowing 
 garments of the orientals, which they gird 
 up around them while engaged in any busi 
 ness ; see in ava^vwyn. Mid. absol. Luke 
 12, 37 TTfptfcocrerat KOI dvaK\ivel avrovf. 
 17, 8. Acts 12, 8 ; c. ace. trop. rf)v oar<pvi> 
 tv dXrjSf/a Eph. 6, 14. Sept. c. ace. for 
 Ian Is. 32, 11 ; itK Jer. 1, 17; c. iv for 
 3 Sept. 1 Chr. 15/27. (1 Mace. 3, 58. 
 Pol. 30. 13. 10.) Pass. perf. part, irtptc 
 fcoo>ieW, girded around; absol. Luke 12, 
 35 fcrraHTav vfj.5>v at ocr(pv(s TTfptf^axrfJifvai. 
 i. e. be ye ready, prepared ; comp. in dva- 
 fa>j/w/. Sept. and isn Ex. 12, 11. With 
 ace. of thing or girdle, Buttm. 5 134. 6. 
 Rev. 1,13 irfpif^(ccrp.(vov . . . ^taisrjv xpvcrf)v. 
 15, 6. So Diod. Sic. 1. 72. 
 
 Trepi je<7i9, ewr, rj, (mptrh^u,) a put 
 ting around, wearing, e. g. of golden orna 
 ments, 1 Pet. 3, 3 7rep/37o-ir xpvo-iW. 
 
574 
 
 Comp. Diod Sic. 12/21 p-vSe 7repm 3ecr2ai 
 Xpvcrta. 
 
 trans, lo cause to stand around, to place 
 around, Hdian. 7. 10. 13. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 
 1 ._ln N. T. only intrans. in Aor. 2, Perf. 
 and Mid. 
 
 1. to stand around, absol. John 11, 42 Sta 
 TOV ox^ov TOV 7rfpifo~ra>Ta. Acts 25, 7 Trepie- 
 a-Tnaav ol djrb if poo: i. e. around th tribu 
 nal. Sept. for 2S3 2 Sam. 13, 31. Judith 
 6, 1. Hdian. 5. 5. 19. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 41. 
 2. Mid. Trtpiio-Tapai, to stand round 
 about, at a distance from, so as not to come 
 near ; to stand aloof from, to avoid, c. ace. 
 depending on Trtpi in composit. see in Trepi- 
 dyo> no. 2. 2 Tim. 2, 16 TUS 8 /3ej3ijXovy 
 Kfvo<p(ovias Trepttarao-o. Tit. 3, 9. Jos. 
 Ant. 1.1.4 (pei/yei . . . Kal Trepuo-TOTat. ib. 
 4. 6. 12. Jamblich. Vit. Pythag. 31. Luc. 
 Hermot. 86. 
 
 aToy, TO, 
 
 . q. Ka3app.a, but stronger, cleansings, sweep 
 ings, off-scouring, filth ; Phavorin. rrrptKa- 
 3p/iaTa, dvrl TOV djro\^7jyp.ara, Kal axnrfp 
 aVoo-apw/iaTa. Also an expiatory victim, 
 ransom, as cleansing from guilt and punish 
 ment, comp. scape-goat ; so Sept. for ^B3 
 Prov. 21, 18 irfpiKa SapfjLa StKaiou avop.os. 
 Hesych. 7TfptKa3dppxiTa dvrtXvTpa, . . . Trept- 
 Ko^Saipovrfs Tay TroXetr, in allusion to the 
 custom by which, in times of public calam 
 ity, malefactors or other worthless persons 
 were immolated as victims, to make expia 
 tion for the state ; comp. KaSap/xa, Schol. in 
 Aristoph. Plut. 454 a3app.aTa fXeyoiro ot 
 eVi Trj KaSdpo-ei Xotp,ou TIVOS fj TIVOS eVtpay 
 vocrov, Sud/xepoi TOIS Seoiy. TOVTO Se TO e 3oy 
 (cat irtpl Pw/iat oty eVeKpdnjo-e. See Wet- 
 stein N. T. II. p. 114. Munthe Obs. in 
 N. T. e Diod. Sic. p. 321 sq. Adam s Rom. 
 Ant. p. 326. Diet, of Antt. art. Sdcrificium. 
 J. CEBS. Bell. Gall. 6. 16. See also art. Tre- 
 ofyniLa. Hence genr. and in N. T. meton. 
 for a vile and worthless person, a scape-goat, 
 outcast, 1 Cor. 4, 13 OK 7repnca3dpp.aTa TOV 
 Koa-p-ov, where some Mss. read wo-Trep v. 
 obo-Trepei Ka3dpp.aTa in the same sense. So 
 Arr. Epict. 3. 22. 78 ; comp. xd3ap/xa Jos. 
 B. J. 4. 4. 3. Luc. D. Mort. 2. 1. Dem. 574. 
 1 4. Lat. purgamentum servorum Q. Curt. 
 10. 2. 7. 
 
 1. to cover around, c. ace. TO 7rp6o-a>trov, 
 to blindfold, Mark 14, 65; c. ace. of pers. 
 id. Luke 22, 64. Sept. genr. for Tj?D 1 K. 
 8, 7. Genr. Plato Tim. 34. 6 ; trop. Plut. 
 de Anim. procreat. 4. 
 
 2. to quite cover, lo overlay, e. g. with 
 gold, Pass. Heb. 9, 4. Sept. for f 3113 Ex. 
 28, 20. 
 
 TrepiKeifAaij f. Ktltrofttn, (iceTp;ai,) to lie 
 around, to be. circumjacent, e. g. mountains 
 Hdian. 2. 11. 16. In N. T. to lie around, 
 also to be laid around, i. q. Perf. Pass, of 
 7rfpiTi 3j7p,i. see Buttm. $ 109. II. 4 ; hence 
 
 1. to surround, to encompass, c. dat. of 
 pers. Heb. 12, 1 irfpiKtip-tvov fip.~tv vt(pos 
 p.apTvpo>v. Comp. Matth. J 402. d. Hdian. 
 5. 6. 16. ib. 6. 1. 2. 
 
 2. For Pass. perf. of TrepmS^t, Buttm. 
 1. c. to be laid or put around, to be hung 
 around, as about the neck ; Mark 9, 42 d 
 TTfpiKfiTai Xt 3oy p,uXiKoy TTtpl TOV Tpd^Xoi/ 
 avToi. Luke 17, 2. So Hdian. 3. 5. 11. 
 Xen. Eq. 5. 3. With ace. of thing in the 
 manner of passive verbs, Buttm. J 134. 6, 7. 
 Acts 28, 20 TTJV d\vcriv TavTrjv nepiKfip-ai, I 
 am hung around with this chain, bound with 
 it. Trop. Heb. 5, 2 eVei Kal OVTOS irtpl- 
 KfiTai do-Zfvetav, is compassed with infirmity, 
 clothed with it. So Jos. de Mace. 12. 3 TO 
 8fo-p.d. HJiun. 2. 13.17; trop. Theocr. Id. 
 23. 14 vppiv. 
 
 7rept/ce<paXaiOj ay, 17, (7reptKf<pdXaioy, 
 Ke(paX/;,) a head-piece, helmet, trop. Eph. 6, 
 17 et 1 Thess. 5, 8, in allusion to Is. 59, 17 
 where Sept. for "313; also 1 Sam. 17, 5. 
 2 Chr. 26, 14. Pol. 3. 71. 4. ib. 6. 23. 8. 
 
 TTCplKpaTTj^j eoy, ovs, 6, f), adj. (KpaT o>,) 
 strong rmind about any thing, all powerful, 
 Anthol. ur. I. p. 137 yap.(pT)\fjcri irepiKpa- 
 Tffo~(riv fpvfj.vuv. In N. T. having wholly 
 in one s power, being master of; hence ircpi- 
 KpaTjjy ytVecrSai, to become master of, to mas 
 ter, to come by, c. gen. Acts 27, 16 jrepiKpa- 
 Tfis yevto-^ai T>JS o-/cd<p^y, to become masters 
 of the boat, to come by the boat, i. e. to se 
 cure it so as to hoist it into the ship, comp. 
 v. 17. 30. So Hist, of Sus. 39 in Cod. Alex. 
 
 rco, f. ^o), (Kpwmo,) to hide 
 all around, wholly ; to hide carefully, e. g. 
 eavrfv Luke 1, 24. Luc. D. Deor. 10. 8. 
 
 encircle round about, to surround, e. g. as 
 besiegers a city, Luke 19, 43. Sept. for 
 tpiSH 2K. 6, 14; 230 Josh. 7, 9. Mid. 
 Aristoph. Av. 346. Xen. An. 6. 3. 11. 
 
 7repi\dfJ,7T(0, f. ^co, (Xd/iTro),) to shine 
 around, c. ace. see in irtpidyca no. 2 ; Luke 
 2, 9. Acts 26, 13. Jos. B. J. 6. 5. 3. Plut. 
 Camill. 17. Diod. Sic. 3. 12. 
 
 TrepiXetTTft), f. v/ co, (XeiTrw,) to leave over f 
 Pass, to be left over, to remain over, i. q. TTC- 
 piyivofj.ai ; comp. in trtpi note. Part, o I 
 
575 
 
 ireptXf iiro/*ei>oi, those remaining over, 
 the survivors, 1 Thess. 4, 15. 17. 2 Mace. 
 1, 31. Hdian. 2. 1. 16. Pol. 1. 37. 2. 
 
 ou, 6, f), adj. (XuTn;,) pr. 
 * environed with grief, i. e. wholly grieved, 
 very sorrowful, Matt. 26, 38 ntpiXv-rros t<rnv 
 f) ^VXTJ pay (a>s Savdrov. Mark 6, 26. 14, 
 34. Luke 18, 23. 24. Sept. for nrrinilirt 
 Ps. 42, 6. 12. Aristot. Eth. 4. 3. Pliit. 
 Thes. 20,26. Isocr. 11. b. 
 
 7TpijJ,ei>a), f. via, (peW,) pr. to wait 
 round about any thing, i. e. to wait for, to 
 atcait earnestly, e. g. rrjv eVayyeXiai/ Acts 
 1, 4. Sept. for rtjp Gen. 49, 18. Dem. 
 1314. 6. Xen. An. 2. 1. 3. 
 
 7repi, (jrfpi strengthened,) roundabout, 
 gen. Pol. 1. 45. 8. In N. T. as adv. c. art. 
 6, TI, TO rrepi, surrounding, circumjacent, 
 comp. Buttm. J 125. 6. Acts 5, 16 TO TrXJ}- 
 3of TU>V 7repi Tf-oXf o>i>. So Jos. Ant. 1 1 . 2. 1 . 
 Xen. Cyr. 1 . 5. 2 ; genr. Xen. An. 4. 4. 7. 
 
 TrepioiKeo), >, f. 170-00, (ntpioiKos,) to 
 dwell around, c. ace. see in Treptayco no. 2. 
 Luke 1, 65 TOVS irtpioiKovvras avrovs, i. e. 
 their neighbours. Pint. Pomp. 34 init. 
 Xen. An. 5. 6. 16. 
 
 TreplOLKOS, ou, 6, 17, adj. (OIKO?,) one 
 dwelling around or near, a neighbour, Luke 
 1 , 58. Sept. for ft Deut. 1 , 7. JEl. V. H. 
 3. 1. Thuc. 8. 6, 22. 
 
 TreplOVCTlOS, O v, 6, fj, adj. (irfpiova-ia, 
 Trepi eip-t,) over and above, superabundant, 
 Hesych. -rrtpioiKnov iro\v, Trtpirrov. In 
 N. T. spec, one s own, peculiar; as Xaos 
 rrepiovo-ios Tit. 2. 14, i. q. Xaos fls irtpi- 
 iroir)(nv 1 Pet. 2, 9. Sept. Xao? irepiovcrios 
 for nho Ex. 19, 5. Deut. 7, 6. 14. 2. 26, 
 1 8. So Hesych. irfpioixriov . . . nfpnroirjToi>. 
 Theophylact. irtpiova-ios- oiKf ias. 
 
 Trepto^r/, y s , ^, (7rfpie x<a,) a circumfer 
 ence, circuit, compass, Jos. B. J. 5. 4. 3. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 91 ; the contents of a writing, 
 argument, Hesych. irtpioxi) *al V7r6%ns. 
 Hence in N. T. the argument or contents 
 within certain limits, a period, section, pass 
 age, Acts 8, 32 f) df TTfpLoxr) rfjs ypacprjs 
 KT\. So Stobffius in Eel. Phys. p. 164. a. 
 Dion. Hal. de Thuc. 25. Cic. ad Attic. 13. 
 25. 
 
 TTeptTTCtTeft), &>, f. 770-0), (Trarew,) to tread 
 about, lo walk about ; hence 
 
 1. Genr. to walk, to be walking; Matt. 
 9, 5 eyftpai KOI irepindrti. 11,5 ^ooXot nepi- 
 wtiTov(Ti. Mark 2, 9. 8, 24. 16, 12. Luke 
 24, 17. John 1, 36. Acts 3, 8. 9. 1 Pet. 5, 
 8. Rev. 9, 20. al. Sept. for -r^n Prov. 6, 
 22. So &\. V. H. 2. 5. Xen. Mem. 3. 13. 
 
 5. Conv. 9. 7. With an adjunct of place 
 or manner ; c. adv. OTTOU Luke 1 1 , 44. John 
 21, 18 ; c. adj. yvp.vos as adv. Rev. 16, 15. 
 With prepositions, e. g. Sia rov (paras av- 
 rrjs Rev. 21, 24; ev c. dat. of place, Mark 
 
 11, 27 eV TW t epw. John 10, 23. Rev. 2, 1. 
 (Sept. Gen . 3, 8. Cebet. Tab. 1. Dem. 
 1258. 22.) John 7, 1 TrepifTraret o I. eV rfj 
 FaXtXa/a, i. e. went about, remained in Gal 
 ilee ; so John 11, 54 ; lv c. dat. genr. Mark 
 
 1 2, 38 iv crroXaty. John 11, 9 eV i^/xepa. V. 
 10 tv TTJ WKTI. 12, 35; trop. John 8, 12. 
 1 John 1, 6. 7. 2, 11 ; iiri c. gen. as eVi 
 r>js SoXao-o-?;? Matt. 14, 25. Mark 6, 48. 
 49. John 6, 19. (Sept. 2 Sam. 11, 2. Ec- 
 clus. 9, 13.) Also eiri c. ace. as eVi TTJV 
 %d\a<r<rav Matt. 14, 26. 29; ptrd c. gen. 
 of pers. i. q. to accompany, to associate with, 
 John 6, 66. Rev. 3, 4. (Comp. Job 34, 8. 
 Prov. 13, 20.) So Trap a c. ace. as irapa 
 rrjv ZdXao-o-av Matt. 4, 18. Mark 1,16. 
 
 2. Trop. and from the Heb. to walk, i. q. 
 to live, to pass one s life ; always with an 
 adjunct of manner or circumstances ; comp. 
 Heb. r^rt Heb. Lex. no. 2. E. g. c. adv 
 Rom. 13, 13 fvcr^p-ovo)? TTfpiTrarTjcra). 
 
 1 Cor. 7, 17 wj. Eph, 4, 1. 17. 5, 8. 15. 
 Phil. 3, 17 ovTtas. Col. 1, 10 a a> 9 . 
 
 2 Thess. 3, 6. 11. (Sept. for rn 2 K. 
 20, 3.) With dat. of rule or manner, Wi 
 ner ^ 31. 3. b; comp. Buttm. { 133. 4. b. 
 Acts 21,21 rois eSeo-i ntpuraTeiv. 2 Cor. 
 12, 18 r&5 nvfv/jiaTi. Gal. 5, 16. With pre 
 positions, e. g. 8 id C. gen. as 8ia iri<TTtws 
 
 2 Cor. 5, 7 ; tv c. dat. e. g. of state or 
 condition, as tv a-apuL 2 Cor. 10, 3; also of 
 rule or manner, Rom. 6. 4 ev Kaivoryrt 
 fcof/j TT. 2 Cor. 4, 2. Eph. 2, 2. Col. 3, 7. 
 Heb. 13, 9; ev aXrftfia 2 John 4. 3 John 
 3, 4; eV Xpicrrw Col. 2, 6. (Sept. for 
 
 3 ^bn Prov. 8/20. Ecc. 11, 9.) Also 
 Kara c. ace. implying manner or rule, 
 Mark 7. 5 ou TT. Kara TTJV irapudocriv KT\. 
 Rom. 8, 1. 4 Kara ffdpxa. 14, 15. 1 Cor. 3, 
 3. Eph. 2, 2. 2 John 6. + 
 
 7Tpl7reipa)< f. -n-fpca, (Treipw,) pr. to put 
 round a spit ; hence to pierce through, to 
 transfix, so that the weapon is wholly sur 
 rounded and covered ; c. ace. or Pass. Jos. 
 B. J. 3. 7. 31 TroXXoi 8f rois Ibiois TrtpifTrti- 
 povro i (peo-u/. Luc. Zeux. J 10 bis. Diod. 
 Sic. 16. 80. In N. T. trop. 1 Tim. 6, 10 
 eavrovs TTtpifTTfipav oSvvais TroXXaZs 1 . So 
 Philo in Flacc. p. 965. a, [avrovs] dvrjKt- 
 o-rois TTfpifTTfipe KOKOIS. 
 
 TTepnriTTTO)) (TriVra),) aor. 2 nepifTrt- 
 <rov, to fall around any one, to embrace, Xen. 
 An. 1. 8. 28. In N. T. to fall into the midst 
 of any tiling, so as to be wholly surrounded 
 
576 
 
 by it ; to fait into or among, c. dat. Luke 
 10, 30 Xflo-TaZy TTfpifTTfa-fv. James 1, 2 TT- 
 pao-p,oly Trepnrfa-rjTf. With fls TVTTOV Acts 
 27, 41. So Xflo-raiy TrfpteVfo-e Diog. Laert. 
 4. 50. JEL V. H. 13. 46; KUKOIS 2 Mace. 
 10, 4. Isocr. de Pac. p. 176. a. Plato Legg. 
 877. c. 
 
 TreplTTOieco, , f. JJQ-W, (TTOU W,) to make 
 remain over and above, i. e. to lay up, to ac 
 quire, Jos. Ant. 17. 10. 2 ult. Plut. Phoc. 
 6. Xen. CEc. 2. 10; to preserve, e. g. life, 
 ,TIJJ> ^vxf]v, Isocr. p. 408. b. Xen. Cyr. 4. 
 
 4. 10. In N. T. only Mid. to acquire for 
 oneself, to obtain, to purchase, c. ace. Acts 
 20, 28 fjv TTfpinoirjcraTo 8ui rot) iS/ou tu/Mi- 
 Toy. 1 Tim. 3,13 /3a3p.6i/ eauToty KaX6i> Tre- 
 pnroiovvra, where for e avToly with the Mid. 
 see Winer \ 39. 6. p. 298. Sept. for (lisn 
 Gen. 31, 18; nfoS Prov. 6, 32. So Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 74. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 3. 
 
 TreplTTOlijcriS) ea>y, 17, (TrepiTrou co.) pr. 
 a making remain over, a laying up ; hence 
 in N. T. 
 
 1. Genr. acquisition, i. e. a) an ob 
 taining, gaining possession, 1 Thess. 5, 9 
 OVK eSeTO Jjp-ay 6 3e6s fls opyrjv, XX fls 
 Trtpnroirjtnv o-wTTjpi ay. 2 Thess. 2, 14. b) 
 Meton. the thing acquired, a possession, 
 1 Pet. 2, 9 Xaoy tls TTfpnroirjcnv, a people 
 for a possession, i. e. peculiar, one s own, 
 
 5. q. Xaoy Trepiouo-foy Tit. 2, 14. Eph. 1, 14 
 tls aTroKvrpaxTiv TTJS irfpnvoir](rf(i>s, for the 
 redemption of his possession, as in 1 Pet. 2, 
 9. So Sept, for ?^5O Mai. 3, 17. Aquil. 
 
 2. preservation, a saving of life ; Heb. 
 10, 39 fls TrepiTToirja-iv ^vxrjs, opp. UTrwXeta. 
 Sept. for nirva 2 Chr. 14, 12. Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 633 tva ytv^rai Trepmoirja-is T 
 Icoo-^cp. Comp. in irepnroita). 
 
 TTeplpprj yvvfJLl, f. rrfptpp^w, (p^ywp-i,) 
 <o <ear jroro around any one. e. g. fetters 
 Diod. Sic. 4. 44. In N. T. only of gar 
 ments, to tear off, e. g. the clothes of per 
 sons about to be scourged, ra t/idrm Acts 
 16, 22. So 2 Mace. 4, 38. Diod. Sic. 17. 
 35. Plut. Poplic. 6 01 Se [vTrrjpeTai] ev%vs 
 o-vXXa/So irey TOVS VSUV LCTKOVS, Trfpifppf]"/vvov 
 ra l/JLciTia, TCIS x f ^P as aTrrjyov OTTIO-QJ, pa/3Soi? 
 e^aivov TO. (rcop-ara. 
 
 TTeptCTTTaa), co, f. ao-co, (a-Traa),) <o draw 
 off from around, to draw or strip off, as 
 TTfpioTraeras TO SiaS?;p.a Plut. de Garrul. 12 ; 
 T^^ Tidpa! Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 13; to draw 
 about or away, e. g. a stream into other 
 channels, Plut. Camill. 4; persons to 
 nrtother object, Dion. Hal. Ant. 10. 33. 
 D od. Sic. 19. 10. In later usage and 
 
 N. T. Pass, irepitr-rrdofjiai, e3p,cu, trop. 
 to be drawn about in mind, to be distracted, 
 over-occupied, with cares or business ; with 
 TTfpi c. ace. Luke 10, 40 ij 8e M(ip3a Trrpt- 
 etTTraTO vrepi TTO\\TJV StaKoviai/. So c. -rrtpl 
 Ecclus. 41, 2. Pol. 3. 105. 1. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 74 I8flv ecrri TOVS Te^viVay Trepl TroXXa 777 
 Siavoiq. Trtpicnru>fj.fvovs. In this sense found 
 only in late writers, Phryn. et Lob. p. 415. 
 
 Trepicraeia. as, 17, (TTfpto-o-ds,) more 
 than enough, superabundance; Rom. 5, 17 
 TTJV TTfpicrcrfiav rrjs x<*P iTOS > ^ Q- T *l v X^P lTa 
 rr)v Treptao-^i , superabounding grace. 
 2 Cor. 8, 2. 10, 15 els Trepia-a-eiav adv. 
 superabundantly, exceedingly. So of evil, 
 excess, overflow, excrescence; James 1,21 
 Trep. rrjs KaKias. Comp. Sept. for 
 Ecc. 6, 8 ; -p -in^ Ecc. 1,3. 5, 8. 
 
 arcs, TO, 
 is oter a?2^ above ; e. g. 
 
 1. What is left over, a remainder, resi 
 due ; Mark 8, 8 ?)pav Trepicra-evp-aTa TUV *Xa- 
 crfj.a.TCt>v. 
 
 2. What is laid up, superabundance, 
 wealth, affluence; 2 Cor. 8, 13. 14 KOI TO 
 fKfit>(ov TrfpiwevfJia ytvr\Tat. tis TO vp.Siv 
 ixrrfpniM. Trop. Matt. 12, 34 et Luke 6, 45 
 CK TOV Trfpicrcrev/JMTos TTJS Kapdias. 
 
 TreptcrcreUft), f. evo-ca, (irfpurcros,) to be 
 over and above, to overgo, to exceed in num 
 ber or measure, Xen. An. 4. 8. 11. Conv. 
 4. 35. In N. T. to be more than enough ; 
 hence 
 
 1. to be left over, to remain; absol. John 
 6, 12 Ta TTfpicro-fvo-avra K\a<rp.aTa. With 
 dat. v. 13 o TTfpi cro-euo-e rots peftpcoKoo-iv. 
 Part. TO TTfpia-o-fvov, the remainder, resi 
 due, e. g. TOJV (cXao-p-aTwi/ Matt. 14, 20. 15, 
 37 ; so TO Trepio-o-fvo-av c. dat. Luke 9, 17. 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 9. 2 a S civ 
 
 2. to superabound, to abound richly. a) 
 Of persons, i. q. to have more than enough, 
 to hate superabundance, absol. Phil. 4, 12. 
 18; c. gen. Luke 15, 17 Trfpicrcrovo-iv ap- 
 TU>V, comp. Buttm. 5 132. 10. a. With et? 
 TI to cr/or any thing, ety irav fpyov aycftov 
 2 Cor. 9, 8 ; fv TIVI in or in respect to any 
 thing, Rom. 15, 13. Phil. 4, 12. Col. 2, 7. 
 So c. dat. Sept. Ecclus. 11, 12 7rrxei a itf- 
 pto-o-eva. Jer. 30, 10 ; c. eV 19, 24. b) Of 
 things, i. q. to abound, to have abundance, 
 intens. c. dat. Luke 12, 15 OVK ev TW Trtpia-- 
 o-fveiv Tivl f) <af] OVTOV. Part. TO TTfpter- 
 o-fvov TIVI, one s abundance, wealth, Mark 
 12,44. Luke 21, 4. (Tob. 4, 1^6. Xen. Cyr. 
 6. 2. 30 Ta 7n.TT]Ofia Trepio-o-fvoira.) With 
 fls Tiva, to abound unto any one, to happen 
 
577 
 
 to liim abundantly, Rom. 5, 15. 2 Cor. 1,^5 
 bis, see in ird^rjfjia. So etc TI, unto any 
 thing, 2 Cor. 8, 2. Also with the idea of 
 increment, to abound more and more, i. q. 
 to increase, to be augmented, c. dat. Acts 
 16, 5 (7rtpicr<rfvov TQJ dpi3po>, and with tv 
 TIM Phil. 1,9; did TWOS 2 Cor. 9, 12. Phil. 
 1, 26. c) Spec, in a comparative sense, 
 to be more abundant, to exceed, to be better, 
 to excel; e. g. foil, by irXdov and a gen. 
 Matt. 5, 20 tav /iij ntpicrcrfvcrr] TJ diKaiocrvvrj 
 v/ioov TT\flov TU>V ypanpaTftov KT\. With tv 
 TIVI in or in respect to any thing, 1 Cor. 15, 
 58 TTfpurcrfvovTfs ev TW tpy<f TOV Kvpiov. 
 2 Cor. 3, 9. 8, 7 bis. Absol. Rom. 3, 7 et 
 yap 17 aXfafia TOV 3e ov . . . (TTtpiffcrfvcrev, 
 
 1. e. has been made more conspicuous. 
 1 Cor. 8, 8 ovTf yap tdv (pdyu>p.fv, irfpicr- 
 a-tvop.fv. 14, 12. 1 Thess. 4, 1. 10. So 
 1 Mace. 3,30. Dion. Hal. Ant. 3. 11. Thuc. 
 
 2. 65. 
 
 3. Trans, to make superabundant, to cause 
 to abound, see Buttm. } 113. 2 sq. Matth. 
 { 496. 2. So of persons, 1 Thess. 3, 12 
 vfjids 8e 6 Kvpios TrKfovdcrai K.OL 7Tfpio~o-fvo-ai 
 Tj) dyaTrr]. Of things, 2 Cor. 9, 8 dvvaros 
 6 2for irdcrav x a P iv **p**W*5<nu f is vp.ds. 
 
 4. 15 Iva j) %dpis...Tr)v cvxapicrTiav Treptcr- 
 <Ttv<rr) els TTJV 86av TOV SeoC, where others 
 take nfpio-o-ev(Tji intrans. as above in no. 2. 
 
 b. Eph. 1, 8. Pass, of persons, to be made 
 to abound, to have more abundantly, Matt. 
 13, 12. 25, 29. Aquil. for Hiph. fut. in 1 } 
 Prov. 12, 26 irfpicrcrfv&v TOV TrXrj&iov 8i- 
 KUIOS- 
 
 Trepicra-os, 77, 6v, (nepi I. 4,) over and 
 above, more than enough. 
 
 1. Pr. as exceeding a certain measure, 
 
 c. gen. more than, Matt. 5, 37 TO Se Trepitr- 
 <TOV Tovrcav, whatsoever is more than these ; 
 comp. Matth. 334. Sept. for in 1 ; Ex. 10, 
 
 5. 2 K. 24, 31 ; ">nia 1 Sam. 30, 9. (Jos. 
 Ant. 10. 4. 2 TO n(pio-(r6v TO>I> xP 7 Jl JL ^ Ta>v - 
 JE\. V. H. 14. 32. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 21.) 
 Also superfluous, 2 Cor. 9, 1 irfpia-trov poi 
 (cm TO ypdcpeiv \i\jlv. So 2 Mace. 12, 44. 
 Hdian. 5. 1. 3. Xen. CEc. 18. 2. For the 
 adv. vTTfp fK TreptacroC, see art. virtp- 
 
 2. Genr. siyerabundant, i. e. abundant, 
 much, great. a) In the posit, degree ad 
 verbially ; e. g. neut. 7T(pi<r<r6v, abundantly, 
 in superabundance, John 10, 10 Iva fafjv 
 e^cixri. KOI Trtpio-o-ov e^cocrt^. Also fK Tre- 
 pio-a-ov, beyond measure, vehemently, Mark 
 6, 51. 14, 31 ; comp. in no. 3. h. So 
 Test. XII Patr. p. 711 *c irepi(T(rov iirol^rt. 
 b) Spec, in a comparative sense, more abun 
 dant, excellent, belter, Matt. 5, 47 TI 7rfpr- 
 37 
 
 , hence Neut. TO 
 excellence, pre-eminence, Rom. 3, 1. Sept. 
 for Chald. 1"W Dan. 5, 12. 6,4. Solsocr. 
 Panegyr. 1. Plut. Romul. 12 bis. Diod. Sic. 
 12. 156 vop.os ov&ev oparai irfptf)(iav crocpov 
 T) TrepiTToV. c) Comparat. Trepicro-o Te- 
 p o s , T), ov, more abundant, more, greater ; 
 e.g. in number, Luke 12, 4; in degree. 
 Matt. 23, 13 TTfpio-o-oTfpov Acpi /ia. Mark 12, 
 40. Luke 20, 47. 1 Cor. 12, 23 bis. 24. 
 2 Cor. 2, 7 ; of dignity, more, better, greater, 
 c. gen. Matt. 11, 9. Luke 7, 26. Neut. 
 Trfptacrorepof as adv. more abundantly, 
 more, the more; absol. Luke 12, 48 ntpio-- 
 croTtpov aiTTjo-ovcriv ai/Tov. 2 Cor. 10, 8 tav 
 Kal TTfpio-croYepoV TI Kau^jjo-co/iat KT\. Ileb. 6, 
 17. 7, 15 ; with a gen. 1 Cor. 15, 10 ; with 
 /naXXoi/ Mark 7, 36, comp. in p.d\\ov no. 3. 
 Winer 5 36. 3. n. 1. 
 
 TrepLcrcrorepay?, adv. in the compar. 
 degree, instead of the more usual Trepto-o-o - 
 Ttpov, Buttm. 5 115. 5. Matth. 262; more 
 abundantly, more, more vehemently ; comp. 
 in TTfpicra-os no. 2. c. The comparison is 
 every where made with something impKed ; 
 see Winer 5 36. 3. Mark 15, 14 Rec. ?re- 
 pio-o-oTepco? fKpa^av they cried out the more 
 vehemently, i. e. more than before. 2 Cor. 
 1, 12 7rtpio-<TOTfp<cs 8e irpbs vpas, more 
 abundantly towards you, sc. than towards 
 others. 2, 4 ^v e^w Trep. els V/JMS, sc. than 
 have others. 7,15. 11, 23 bis. 12,15. Gal. 
 
 1, 14. Phil. 1, 14. Also the more abun 
 dantly, the more, I Thess. 2, 17. Heb. 2, 1. 
 13, 19 ; with p.S\\ov 2 Cor. 7, 13, comp. in 
 p-SXAoi/ no. 3. Test. XII Patr. p. 721 TT?- 
 pio-aoTfputs f]ydrrr](Tav avTovs. Isocr. 35. 0. 
 
 7Tey3tcrcr(W9, adv. (irepio-a-os,) abundantly, 
 exceedingly, vehemently, Matt. 27, 23 -rrfpia-- 
 o-w? fxpagav. Mark 10, 26. (15, 14.) Acts 
 26, 1 1 . Sept. for in? Dan. 8, 9. 2 Mace. 
 8, 27. Plut. Consol. ad Apollon. 28 fin. 
 Hdot 2. 37. 
 
 TrepHTTepa, ds, 171 <* dove, pigeon, Matt. 
 3, 16. 10, 16. 21, 12. Mark 1, 10. 11, 15. 
 Luke 3, 22. John 1, 32. 2, 14. 16. Luke 
 
 2, 24 fivo vfocrvovs TTfpiaTfputv two young 
 dmes, the offering of the poor ; see Lev. 5, 
 7. 14, 22, where Sept. for nj P "VSa ; also 
 for na"h Is. 38, 14. Neh. 2, 7. ^El. II. 
 An. 3. T 15. Xen. An. 1. 4. 9. 
 
 Trepirefjiva), f. Ttpa>, (Tepvco,) aor. 2 
 TTfpifTfpov, to cut around, to circumcise; 
 Mid. to let oneself be circumcised, comp. 
 Buttm. 5 135. 8. In N. T. only in the Jew 
 ish sense, to circumcise, to remove the pre 
 puce ; c. ace. of pers. Luke 1, 59 ^X3o> 
 TT(piTtp.f~iv TO Tratoiov. 2, 21. John 7, 22. 
 
578 
 
 Acts 7, 8. 15. 5. 16, 3. 21, 21. Mid. Acts 
 15, 1. 24. 1 Cor. 7, 18. Gal. 2, 3. 5, 2. 3. 
 6, 12. 13 bis. Pass. perf. part. irfpiTfrprj- 
 fievos 1 Cor. 7, 18. Sept. for ito Gen. 17, 
 27. 21, 4. Mid. ib. 34, 15. 17. (Jos. Ant. 
 1. 10. 5. Diod. Sic. 1. 28. Hdot. 2. 36.) 
 Trop. in a spiritual sense, i. q. to put away 
 impurity, iniquity ; Col. 2,11 TrepifTp-Tj^nre 
 7r(piTOfifj a^eipoTTOMyrw, com p. Rom. 2, 29. 
 Sept. and ^ Deut. 10, 16. Jer. 4, 4. So 
 Philo Abr. I. p. 450. 
 
 Treptri^fjLi, f. TrfpiSno-a), (WSj^u,) 3 
 plur. pres. TrepmSe ao-i Mark 15, 17, see 
 Buttm. ^ 107. rn. 1 ; to put around, to place 
 around any person or thing ; with ace. and 
 dat. expr. or impl. Matt. 21, 33 (ppdyp-ov 
 ai>Tu> irfpie%j]Kfi>. Mark 12, 1. Matt. 27, 28 
 TTfpifyr]K(v aurw ^Xa^vSa. 27, 48 TrepiSelr 
 [rov a-Trayyov] /caAa/iw, i. e. putting it around 
 the end of a rod. Mark 15, 17. 36. John 19. 
 29. Sept. for Wia Ruth 3, 3 ; &&*] Gen. 
 27, 16. So Jos. Ant. 3. 7. 1. Hdian. 1. 3. 7. 
 Xen. Eq. 5. 1, 3. Trop. to put around, to 
 bestow upon, c. ace. et dat. 1 Cor. 12, 23 TOV- 
 TOIS rip.f]v Trfpicr<roTfpav Trepm Se/ifi . Sept. 
 for 1H3 Esth. 1, 20. Job 39, 19. So Hdian. 
 5. 1. 11. Dem. 1417. 2. Xen. Athen. 1. 2. 
 
 s , 17, (Trepirep.i a),) circum 
 cision, in the Jewish sense, the removal of 
 the prepuce, as the distinctive sign of the 
 Jewish nation from Abraham onwards ; 
 practised also by several ancient oriental 
 nations, as the Egyptians aud Ethiopians 
 (Hdot. 2. 104. Diod. Sic. 1. 28), and by all 
 Muhammedans ; see Gen. 17, 10 sq. Lev. 
 12. 3. Luke 1, 59. Jos. Ant. 1. 10. 5. c. 
 Apion. 1. 22. Barnab. Epist. c. 9. 
 
 1. Pr. e. g. a) The act or rite of cir 
 cumcision, John 7, 22. 23 -nepiTo^v Actp./3d- 
 vttv, to receive circumcision, to be circum 
 cised. Acts 7, 8. Rom. 4, 11. Gal. 5, 11. 
 Phil. 3, 5. So Sept. thrice for ^a, M^ia, 
 Gen. 17, 12. Ex. 4, 26. Jer. 11, 16. b) 
 The state of circumcision, the being circum 
 cised, Rom. 2, 25 bis. 26. 27. 4, 10 bis, eV 
 irtpirop.fi a>v, i. e. being circumcised. 3, 1 . 
 1 Cor. 7, 19. Gal. 5,^6. 6, 15. So ot 
 vf ptTo/irjy, those of the circumcision, the cir 
 cumcised, put for the Jews, Rom. 4, 12; 
 for Jewish Christians, Acts 10,45. 11,2. 
 Gal. 2, 1 2. Col. 4, 1 1 . Tit. 1,10. c) Meton. 
 and collect. T) irtpirop.^, the circumcision, for 
 the circumcised, the Jews, the Jewish peo 
 ple, Rom. 3, 30 os St/cat&xrei irtpiTop.r)i> e /c 
 TnWcoff. 4, 9. 12. 15, 8. Gal. 2, 7. 8. 9. 
 Eph. 2, 11. Col 3, 11. 
 
 2. Trop. circumcision in a spiritual sense, 
 i. a. the putting away of impurity from the 
 
 heart. Rom. 2, 28. 29 ittpirop.^ Kapdias. 
 Col. 2, 11 bis, irfpitrp-rj^riTe irtpiTop.fi d^ft- 
 
 pOTTOlTJTO) ...fV Trj irfptTOp.fi T V XpHTTOt). j. C. 
 
 the circumcision which has Christ for its 
 
 author and object. Collect, and emphat. 
 nu;i oo - > c / . 
 
 ml. 6, 6 Tjptis yap Tp,fv TI irtpiTOfjin, i. e. 
 
 we are the true spiritual circumcision, the 
 true people of God. 
 
 TreplTpCTTd), f. ^ w , ( T peVeo,) to turn 
 about, e. g. a person, Plato Axioch. init. p. 
 364. a. p. 370. b ; to turn upside down, to 
 overturn, Wisd. 5, 24. Plut. Marcell. 7. 
 Luc. Contempl. 7. In N. T. trop. to turn 
 about into any state, to cause to become any 
 thing, to make, c. els, Acts 26, 24 ere tls /xa- 
 viav TrtpiTptirti, i. e. turns thee about into 
 madness, makes thee mad. So Jos. Ant. 2. 
 14. 1 tls opyrjv irtpiTpairiv. Comp. Lys. 
 210. 2. 
 
 Trepirpexa), aor. 2 Trepie Spap-oi/, (rpex<0,) 
 to run around in a circle, Xen. CEc. 13. 8. 
 In N. T. to run about in a place ; c. ace. 
 Mark 6, 55 irepi8pafj.6t>Tfs S\ijv- TTJV Trfpi ^co- 
 pav, comp. for the ace. in Trepiayut no. 2. 
 Sept. for Bins Pol. Jer. 5, 1. Am. 8, 12. 
 So Cebet. Tab. 14. Lys. 185. 13. Xen. 
 Hell. 7. 2. 15. 
 
 7repl<f)epa), f. Trepioi o-o), (<pe po>,) to bear 
 or carry around, pr. in a circle or at table, 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 2. In N. T. 
 
 1. to bear or carry about, hither and thith 
 er, to various places, c. ace. Mark 6, 55 
 rovs KOKGOS exoirras TTfpKpfptiv. 2 Cor. 4, 
 
 10 T1]V VfKpOHTlV TOV irjCTOV TTfpKpfpOVTtS (V 
 
 ra o-co/iart, see in j/e <cpaxrij no. 1. 2 Mace. 
 7, 27. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 50. 
 
 2. Pass, to be carried or driven about, 
 hither and thither ; e. g. clouds by the wind. 
 Jude 12 Rec. i/e(p/Acu avvftpot VTTO dvcpcav 
 TTfpKpfpofjLfvai, but later edit, read 7rapa<pe- 
 pofufvai, see in Trapcupe pw no. 2. (Of a ship 
 Maxim. Tyr. 31. p. 306.) Trop. Eph. 4, 
 14 ntpxp. iravrl dvep.a> TTJS didaa-KoXlas. 
 Heb. 13, 9 Rec. see in 7rapa<pepeo no. 2. 
 
 Trept(j)povea), w, f. ijo-w, ((ppoww,) ta 
 think round about a thing, to consider it on 
 all sides, JEl V. H. 12. 52. Aristoph. Nub 
 225. In N. T. to think over a thing, to past 
 over in thought, to overlook, to despise, c. gen 
 Buttm. I 132. 5. 3. Matth. J 378. n. 2 
 Tit. 2, 15 p-qSe/r <rov irfpKppoixiru, comp 
 1 Tim. 4, 12. So Plut. Thes. 1. Plato Ax 
 372. b. 
 
 u > o "7> a - x/ 30 * rouna 
 about a place, circumjacent, neighbouring, 
 m. V. H. 1. 34. Hence in N. T. fern, f, 
 irtpixapos sc. yij, the country round about, 
 circumjacent region, Matt. 14, 35. Mark 1, 
 
579 
 
 JTeT/309 
 
 28. 6, 55. Luke 3, 3. 4, 14. 37. 7, 17. 8, 
 37. Acts 14, 6. Melon, of the inhabitants, 
 Matt. 3, 5. Sept. for ban Deut. 3, 13. 14; 
 "133 Gen. 1 3, 10. So ra Trepi xojpa id. 1 Chr. 
 5, 16. Palaeph. 21. 2. 
 
 TTfplifnjfAa, aros, TO, (irtpi^dca,*) pr. 
 scrapings, scum, filth, Hesych. TTfpi^T/p.a 
 TTfpiKard/iaypa. Also, like 7TfpiKa3appa, an 
 expiatory victim, ransom, espec. a human 
 victim, see in TepiKa3app.a ; so Hesych. irtpi- 
 ^r)/j.a dvTikurpov, dvrfyvxov. Suid. ovrcos 
 fnf\eyov [ot AZfrjvaioi] rw Kar (viavrov crvv- 
 
 tJfWTt T(OV KOKGiV (al. irdvTO)V KdKa) TTtpi- 
 
 ^rjfjia r)fiS>v ytvov, fjrot <ru>Trjpia Kal dnoXv- 
 Tpoxris Kal OVTCOS fVfftaXXov rfj SoAdcroT;, 
 axravti r Tlocreift&vi Svcrtav cmorivvvvrfs. 
 Tob. 5, 18 dpyvpiov...TTfpfyr)fj.a TOV irat- 
 8iov f]fj.S>v yevoiro. Hence in N. T. melon, 
 for a vile and worthless person, as in Engl. 
 scrapings, offscouring, scum, 1 Cor. 4, 13 
 ndvroiv TTfpfyijfJia Zens lipri. So Symm. for 
 2*? Jer. 22, 28. 
 
 TrepTrepevofiai,, Mid. depon. (nepirepos, ) 
 to boast or vaunt oneself, absol. 1 Cor. 13, 4. 
 M. AntDnin. 5. 5 Kal TO o-w/xdrtoj/ Karai- 
 rtairSai, Kal dpecrKecrSat, Kal irfpnfptve& Sa.i. 
 Liban. Or. 14. p. 427. a. 
 
 Ilepcrte, iftos, f], Persis, pr. n. of a fe 
 male Christian, Rom. 16, 12. 
 
 Trepvcrtj adv. (n-e par,) the past year, a 
 year ago, Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 7. In N. T. only 
 with OTTO, i. e. d-rro Trepuo-i, from or since 
 a year ago, 2 Cor. 8, 10. 9, 2 ; see in dn6 
 fio. 2. c. jB. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 47. So 
 Trpo irepvcri Dem. 467. 14 ; eVc irepva-i Luc. 
 Soiree. 5 7. 
 
 TTeraOfiai, see in rrfTopai. 
 
 i rrTlVOV, ov, TO, (7TT(iv6s, jre ro/xat,) a 
 bird, fowl, in N. T. only Plur. ra Trert ti>d, 
 Matt. 6, 26. 8, 20. 13, 4. 32. Mark 4, 4. 
 32. Luke 8, 5. 9, 58. 12, 24. 13, 19. Acts 
 10, 12. 11, 6. Rom. 1, 23. James 3, 7. 
 Sept. Plur. for Cll S Gen. 1, 26. Deut. 14, 
 19. 20; Sing, for t)33 Ez. 39, 4. Plur. 
 Paljcph. 23. 1. Hdot. 2. 123. 
 
 TTeTO^tfft, f. 7rerij(7op.(u or Trriycro/iai, 
 Mid. depon. to fly; so with fls c. ace. of 
 place whither, Rev. 12, 14 "va TTfrrjTai fls 
 TTJV (pr]p.ov. Part. Trerd/xevoy, flying, in later 
 edit. Rev. 4, 7. 8,13. 14,6. 19,17. Sept. 
 for t)W, PlB-fiP, Gen. 1, 20. Is. 31, 5. So 
 Palaeph. 13. 2. Luc. Soloecist. 7. Xen. An. 
 1. 5. 3. A later present form n-frdo/iai, 
 w/iai, whence part. 7rera>/ii/oj, is found in 
 Text rec. in the four passages above quoted ; 
 it belonged to the poets and to the later 
 nrose ; Butlm. 114 under Wro/wit. Lob. ad 
 
 Phr. p. 581. So Diod. Sic. 4. 77 fin. comp. 
 Luc. D. Marin. 1 5. 3 
 
 Trerpa, as, T/, 1. a rock, cliff, ledge, pr. 
 a mass of live rock. Rev. 6, 15 els raj TT/- 
 rpar TOW optcov. v. 16. In such, sepulchres 
 were hewn, Mark 27, 51. 60. Mark 15, 46 ; 
 see in /xi^/netoi/. On such also houses and 
 villages were founded for securily, Malt. 7, 
 24. 25. Luke 6, 48 bis. Spoken of a soil 
 underlaid wilh rock, i. q. TrerpwS^s, Luke 8, 
 6. 13. Sept for 3>bo 1 Sam. 13, 6. Is. 2, 
 21 ; "IIS Prov. 30. 19. Is. 2, 10. Ceb. 
 Tab. 15. Hdian. 8. 1. 13. Xen. An. 4. 7. 4. 
 2. Trop. of firmness and energy of faith, 
 like a rock, Matt. 16, 18 ; here said in allu 
 sion to the earnestness of Peter s reply v. 
 16, and in paronomasia with the pr. n. n/- 
 Tpos. Comp. Sept. and 3^0 2 Sam. 22, 2. 
 Of Christ, in allusion to the rock whence 
 the waters flowed in the desert, 1 Cor. 10, 
 4 bis ; comp. Ex. 17, 6. Num. 20, 8 sq. 
 where Sept. for isis ( sbtt ; see in aKo\ov- 
 3eo). So too of Christ as fj Trerpa ovcafSd- 
 Xou, a rock of offence or stumbling, i. e. as 
 the occasion of destruction to those who 
 reject him, Rom. 9, 33 et 1 Pel. 2, 8, quot 
 ed from Is. 8, 14 where Sept. for itiS; 
 comp. in Xt Sos no. 2. 
 
 ov, o, (rrf rpa,) pr. a piece of 
 rock, a stone, Luc. Navig. 44. Xen. An. 4. 
 7. 12; also a rock, Soph. Phil. 272. Plato 
 Legg. 843. a. In N. T. only as pr. n. Peter, 
 (Aram. NB" 1 ? Kj/cpay q. v.) the surname of 
 Simon one of ihe Apostles, son of Jonas, 
 and brother of Andrew, a fisherman of Beth- 
 saida, Matt. 16, 18. John 1, 43. 45. He 
 afterwards lived at Capernaum, and was 
 married, Mark 1, 29. 30, comp. v. 21. Luke 
 4, 38. This name was given him by Jesus 
 at the first interview, John 1, 43, prob. on 
 account of the boldness and usual firmness 
 of his faith in Jesus as the Messiah. He 
 was of an ardent, impulsive, unequal tem 
 perament ; at one time expressing unbound 
 ed devotedness to Jesus, and then denying 
 him ; Matt. 26, 33 sq. 69 sq. Although the 
 first to preach the gospel directly to the 
 Gentiles (Acts 15, 7. 14, comp. c. 10), yet 
 he wavered in respecl to the introduclion 
 of Jewish observances among Ihem, for 
 which he was openly reproved by Paul, 
 Gal. 2,11 sq. In kler years he is said to 
 have gone abroad, and to have preached 
 the gospel in the Parthian empire, whence 
 some suppose his firsl epistle was written ; 
 but this rests on no historical foundation. 
 A still later tradition relates thai he went 
 to Rome, and at lasl suffered martyrdom in 
 
580 
 
 that city along with Paul ; see Neander 
 Gesch. der Pflanz. u. Leit. der Kirche etc. 
 II. p. 460 sq. 472 sq. (Engl. II. 24 sq. 
 36 sq.) + 
 
 7reTpa)8r)$, tos, ovs, 6, 77, adj. (-ntrpos, 
 ti8os,~) rock-like, stone-like, having the form 
 of a rock, Diod. Sic. 3. 45. In N. T. rocky, 
 stony; hence TO TrerpwSey, rocky ground, 
 stony soil, Mark 4, 5 ; TO. Trerpuidrj id. Matt. 
 13, 5. 20. Mark 4, 16. So Jos. B. J. 2. 6. 
 1. Plut. Sylla 16. Plato Rep. 612. a. On 
 the form comp. Buttm. 119. 14. b. 
 
 Trrjyavov, ov, TO, (7rf]yvvp.i,~) rue, a plant, 
 ruta graveolens Linn. Luke 11,42. The- 
 ophr. H. Plant. 1. 15. Plut. Symp. 3. 1.3. 
 
 Tnqyr), jj s , jj, 1. a fountain, source, 
 James 3, 11. [12.] Sept. for T?? 1 K. 1, 
 9. So Hdian. 1. 6. 5. Xen. An. 1. 2. 7. 
 From the Heb. 7777701 vdareav. fountains of 
 water, Rev. 8, 10. 14, 7. 16, 4. Sept. and 
 o^a rvisis Ex. 15, 27 ; D^an jnsn 2 K. 
 3, 19. 25." (Judith 12, 7.) Trop. of life- 
 giving doctrine, John 4, 14 ; also as an em 
 blem of the highest spiritual enjoyment, 
 Rev. 7, 17. 21, 6; comp. in &>?; no. 1. b. 
 Sept. and ll pa Prov. 13, 14. 14, 29. So 
 Ecclus. 21, 13. 
 
 2. a well ; John 4, 6 bis, 77 7777777 TOV la- 
 Kw/3 /crX. comp. v. 1 1 where it is TO (ppeap. 
 2 Pet. 2, 17. 
 
 3. Spec, an issue, flux, 7777777 rev alp-aros 
 Mark 5, 29, i. q. fj pvo-is TOV cup.. Luke 8, 
 44. So Sept. for D^n* 1-ipn Lev. 12, 7. 
 
 TrrjyvvfjLI,, f. 7777co, to fix, to fasten, to 
 make fast and firm, Luc. Philopatr. 17. 
 Xen. Ven. 6. 7, 9; to fix or fasten together, 
 to construct, to build, Pol. 3. 46. 1. Hdot. 
 5. 83. In N. T. of a tent, to set up, to pilch. 
 Heb. 8, 2 171; ((TK.r)i>T)v) fTrr)ev 6 Kvpios- 
 Sept. for niJ3 Gen. 26, 25. 1 Chr. 16, 1. 
 So Pol. 6. 27. 2. Plato Legg. 817. c. 
 
 Trr)Sd\lOV, iov, TO, (TTTJ^OV, Tre Soi/,) a 
 helm, rudder, Acts 27, 40 omrft Tar fev- 
 KTTjpias TUV TTTjSaXuov. James 3, 4. JEL V. 
 H. 9.40. Xen. An. 5. 1. 11. 
 
 TTTjXi/co?, 77, ov, pron. correl. how great, 
 quanlus, corresponding to 77X1*09, 777X1*0?, 
 Butt. ^ 79. 5. Gal. 6, 1 1 iSeTe 7777X^01? V/MV 
 ypdp.p.a(Tiv eypa^a rfj ffjLr) X e P l > U e see M?1 1 
 how large an epistle I have written unto you ; 
 for Plur. ypdnp.ao-iv comp. Acts 28, 21, and 
 see in ypdp.p.a no. 2. Others : with how 
 large letters 1 haie written ; or also : with 
 what letters, what a hand ; but both less 
 well. Trop. of dignity, Heb. 7, 4. Sept. 
 for riBS Zeph. 2, 6 [2]. Luc. Haley. 2. 
 Pol. 1. 2. 8. 
 
 7777X09, ov, 6, clay, mire, mortar ; John 
 9, 6 bis, firruo-t x^Q-i Kcu fTroirjcrf 7777X01 eVc 
 
 TOV TTTVO-piaTOS KT\. V. 11. 14. 15. Sept. 
 
 for "lan Job 30, 19 ; B^a 2 Sam. 22, 43. 
 (Pol. 3. 79. 9. Xen. An. 1. 5. 7, 8.) Spec. 
 potter s clay, Rom. 9. 21. Sept. for "i5?n 
 Is. 29, 16 ; B-IB Is. 41, 25. So Pol. 12. 15. 
 6. Dem. 313. 17. 
 
 Tnypa, as, fj, a bag, sack, wallet, Lat. 
 pera, of leather, in which shepherds and 
 travellers carried their provisions. Matt. 10. 
 10 P.TJ Trrjpav ds 686v. Mark 6, 8. Luke 9, 
 3. 10, 4. 22, 35. 36. Judith 13, 10. Luc. 
 D. Mort. 10. 2. Plut. Quasst. Gr. 13. 
 
 7r *?% L ">> ?) o, (kindr. iraxys,) Plur. 
 gen. 7777xeo>j>, later contr. Tnjx^> v J nn 21, 8. 
 Rev. 21, 17. Xen. An. 4. 7. 16; comp. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 245 sq. Buttm. 5 51. n. 5; 
 pr. the fore-arm, from the wrist to the el 
 bow, 1EL V. H. 5. 19. Horn. Od. 17. 38. 
 In N. T. a cubit, the common ancient mea 
 sure of length, strictly the distance from 
 the elbow to the tip of the middle finger, 
 but reckoned at 1^ foot ; hence the Greek 
 cubit was equal to 1.5169 f. Engl. and the 
 Roman cubit to 1.4562 f. Engl. See Diet. 
 of Antt. art. Cubilus, Measures, and App. 
 Tab. II. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 503. So 
 Matt. 6, 27 7rrjx vv * va - Luke 12, 25. John 
 21, 8. Rev. 21, 17. Sept. for nrx Gen. 
 6, 15. 16. Jos. B. J. 6. 2. 9. Pol.~5. 89. 
 9. Xen. An. 4. 7. 16. 
 
 TnaCfti, f. ao-co, (Dor. for cricco,) pr. (c 
 press, to hold fast ; hence to lay hold of, to 
 take, to seize. 
 
 1. Of persons, to lake one by the hand. 
 c. ace. et gen. of the part, Acts 3, 7 77iao-as 
 aia-ov TTJS Sepias x l P s > com P- Buttm. J 132. 
 5. e. (Theocr. 4. 35.) In a judicial sense, 
 to take, to arrest, John 7, 30 t^Tovv ovv 
 OVTOV Tndo-ai. V. 32. 44. 8, 20. 10, 39. 11, 
 57. Acts 12, 4. 2 Cor. 11, 32, So Ecclus. 
 23,21. 
 
 2. Of animals, to take in hunting or fish 
 ing, to catch, c. ace. John 21, 3 V TTJ WKT\ 
 firiao-av oiSeV. V. 10. Rev. 19, 20 eVtao^ 
 TO STJP/OI/. Sept. for Tr]X Cant. 2, 15. 
 
 7Tte&>, f. eVo), (kindr. /3ia&>,) to press, 
 to holdfast, e. g. one s hand Pol. 32. 10. 9. 
 In N. T. to press down, to make com 
 pact, e. g. fifTpov Luke 6, 38. Sept. for 
 rft* Mic. 6, 15. So Pol. 18. 1. 10. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 10. 13. 
 
 TTi^ayoXoyta, as, f], (nftavos, Xoyor,) 
 persuasive discourse, enticing icords, Col. 2. 
 4. Fabr. Cod. apocr. N. T. III. p. 694. 
 Plato Theaet. 162. e; ir^avo\oyea> Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 39. 
 
581 
 
 JTltcpaivcii, f. aw, (TTiKpor.) pr. to make 
 sharp, acrid, bitter; e. g. water, Pass. Rev. 
 8, 11; comp. Ex. 15, 23. Meton. of the 
 pain caused by bitter and poisonous food or 
 drink, to cause bitter pain, c. ace. Rev. 10, 
 9 niKpaivti (rov TTJV KoiXlav. v. 10. Comp. 
 Sept. and -nra Hiph. Job 27, 2. Trop. of 
 the feelings, to imbitter, Pass, to be or be 
 come bitter, to be harsh, angry, Col. 3, 19. 
 Sept. Pass, for fjsg Ex. 16, 20. Jer. 37, 
 14. So Esdr. 4, 31/Dem. 1464. 18. 
 
 TTiKpict, as, f], (iriKpus,) bitterness, with 
 the accessory idea of venom, the two beinf 
 often connected in the mind of the He 
 brew; comp. the Heb. Deut. 29, 17 [18]. 
 32, 24. Am. 6, 12. Rev. 8, 11. So as a 
 genit. of quality, equiv. to an adj. Winer 
 } 34. 2. b. Buttm. } 132. n. 12. Heb. 12, 15 
 pia iriicpias i. q. pia niKpd, comp. Deut. 
 29, 17 [18]. Acts 8, 23 d s xoXiji/ nixpias, 
 i- q. x- iriKpav- (Comp. TriKpo ^oXor Anthol. 
 Gr. III. p. 208.) Trop. bitterness of spirit, 
 of speech; Eph. 4, 31 micra niKpia ical 
 Styior. Rom. 3, 14 $>v TO crrofia apas Kal 
 Tvixpias yefj-ti, quoted from Ps. 10, 7 where 
 Sept. for fiB ia deceit. Sept. for ia Job 
 7, 11. Is. 38, i?. So Pol. 8. 12. 1. Dem. 
 1482. 21. 
 
 a, o i>, pr. pricking, pointed, 
 sharp, as iriKpos ourror Horn. H. 4. 118, 
 134; TT. fi(\ep.va 22. 206. Hence genr. 
 and in N. T. of taste, bitter, acrid; e. g. 
 opp. to y\vK\/t , James 3,11. Sept. for in 
 Prov. 27, 7. Ex. 15, 23. (jEl. V. H. l". 
 34. Xen. An. 4. 4. 13.) Trop. of the 
 feelings, spirit, bitter, harsh, cruel, James 
 3, 14 (T)\OV TriKpov. So Diod. Sic. 1. 78. 
 Pol. 7. 14. 3. 
 
 7T4/C/3&59, adv. (niKpos, ) bitterly ; in N. T. 
 of bitter weeping, Matt. 26, 75 et Luke 22, 
 62 (K\av<rf 77tpa>f. Sept. for "in riD3 
 Is. 33, 7 ; TTQ Pi. Is. 22, 4. Aristaen. l* 
 21 or 22 ; genr. Arr. Epict. 3. 11. 3. Pol. 
 9. 34. 1. 
 
 JTiXaro?, O v, 6, Pilate, i. e. Pontius 
 Pilatus, the fifth Roman procurator of Ju- 
 dea, see in f]ytp.<at> no. 2. The first was 
 Coponius, sent out with Quirinus after the 
 banishment of Archelaus, see in Kvpf)vios ; 
 the second was Marcus Ambivius ; the 
 third, Annius Rufus ; the fourth Valerius 
 Gratus ; who was succeeded by Pilate 
 about A. D. 26; see Jos. Ant. 18. 2. 2. 
 Pilate continued in office about ten years ; 
 and being hated by both Jews and Samari 
 tans for the caprice and cruelty of his ad 
 ministration, he was accused by them be 
 fore Vitellius then governor of Syria, and 
 
 sent by him to Rome to answer to thesn 
 complaints before the emperor ; Jos. Ant. 
 18. 3. 1. ib. 18. 4. 1, 2. Tiberius was dead 
 before the arrival of Pilate ; and the latter 
 is said to have been banished by Caligula to 
 Vienna in Gaul, and there to have died by 
 his own hand about A. D. 41 ; Euseb. H. 
 E. 2. 7, 8. For the part taken by Pilate in 
 the condemnation of Jesus, comp. Jos. Ant. 
 18. 3. 3. A spurious tract called Ada Pi- 
 lati was current in the early ages of Chris 
 tianity, purporting to be a full report from 
 Pilate to Tiberius of the whole matter con 
 cerning Jesus. This tract however is ap 
 parently the same with the apocryphal Gos 
 pel of Nicodemus ; or, at least, is contained 
 in this latter ; which, together with Pilate s 
 pretended letters, may be seen in the Co 
 dex Apocr. N. T. I. p. 214 sq. ed. Fabric, 
 or I. p. 487 sq. ed. Thilo ; see also Thilo s 
 Prolegom. p. cviii sq. Matt. 27, 2 sq. 
 Mark 15, 1 sq. Luke 13, 1. 23, 1 sq. John 
 18, 29 sq. 19, 1 sq. Acts 3, 13. 4, 27. 13. 
 28. 1 Tim. 16, 13. + 
 
 7Tt/i7rA,77/u, f. 77X770-0), aor. 1 firXrjo-a, 
 Pass. aor. 1 firX^a^rjv, all from obsol. 
 IIAAQ, whence also the intrans. form 77X17- 
 3, not found in N. T. see Buttm. $ 114. 
 
 To fill, to make full, e. g. aor. 1 e 77X770- a, 
 c. ace. Luke 5, 7 ; also c. gen. of that with 
 which, Matt. 27,48. John 19, 29 7r\T)<ravrfs 
 (T-rvoyyov ogovs. Pass. c. gen. Matt. 22, 10; 
 comp. Buttm. } 132. 10. a. Sept. for j^o 
 Gen. 21, 19. 24, 16. So Anthol. Gr. iv! 
 89. Luc. Nigr. 16. Xen. An. 1. 5. 10. 
 Trop. Pass. aor. 1 eTrX^o-S^i/, to befitted, 
 to be full, e. g. a) Of persons, to be filled 
 with any thing, to be wholly imbued, affected, 
 influenced, with or by any thing ; with gen. 
 of thing, as rov nvfi/naros dyiov Luke 1,15. 
 41. 67. Acts 2, 4. 4, 8. 31. 9, 17. 13,9; 
 3v/nov Luke 4, 28 ; (p6@ov 5, 26 ; avoias 6, 
 11 ; also Acts 3, 10. 5. 17. 13, 45. Meton. 
 of a place, Acts 19, 29. Sept. for Nbsi: 
 Gen. 6, 11. 13. Prov. 12, 22. So Eccfus. 
 37, 27. Comp. Anthol. Gr. IV. p. 28. 
 crofyirjs irkrftoyLfvos. Act. Dem. 1491. 9. 
 b) Of prophecy, to be fulfilled, accom 
 plished ; Luke 21, 22 roC TrXTjerS^i/ai TCI 
 yfypafj.fj.tva, in later edit. So Heb. xba , 
 Sept. 7rXj;pa)3^at, 1 K. 2, 27. c) Of 
 time, to be fulfilled, completed, to be fully 
 past ; Luke 1 , 23 o>r fTrX^o-Srjo-aj/ al rjfjLtpai 
 rfis \iTovpyias. v. 57. 2, 6. 21. 22. So 
 
 ^B , Sept. 7rXr7/3&)3^at, Gen. 25, 24. 
 
 f. irpt]<ru>, to set on fire, to 
 burn, Ml V. H. 12. 23 ; comp. Buttm. 
 5 1 1 4. In N. T. Pass, only trop to be in- 
 
ISlOV 
 
 582 
 
 TTiTTTO) 
 
 flamed, to swell, to become swollen, e. g. 
 from the bite of a serpent, Acts 28, 6 npoo-f- 
 doKuv avTov fj.e\\fiv irip.Trpacr Sai. So JEi\. 
 H. An. 3. 18. Luc. Dipsad. 4 ofpis . . fKKaiei, 
 K.al afjnti, KOI Trip.Trpacr Sai noifl. 
 
 TTivatciBlov, ov, TO, (dim. nival-,*) a small 
 tablet, writing-tablet, pugillaris, Luke 1, 63. 
 Comp. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 510, 511. 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Tabulae. Symm. for 
 r,Df3 Ex. 9, 2. Arr. Epict. 3. 22. 74. Plut. 
 Eumen. 1. 
 
 TTlva^ UKOS, 6, (7rXa,) a board, table, 
 spec, a writing-table, tablet, covered with 
 wax, Jos. de Mace. 17. Dem. 1055. 16; 
 comp. in nivaxio i.ov. In N. T. pr. a wooden 
 trencher, and hence a plate, platter, dish, on 
 which food and the like was served up. 
 Matt. 14, 8 enl nivaKi TTJV KefpaXfjv TOV lo>- 
 dvvov. v. 11. 23, 25. Mark 6, 25. 28. Luke 
 
 11, 39. So Jos. Ant. 8. 3. 8. Athen. 6. 3. 
 Horn. Od. 1. 141. 
 
 TTtVO), f. Trio/iat Buttm. 5114. ^95. n. 
 18; 2 pers. nito-at Buttm. 103. m. 16; 
 aor. 2 eniov, perf. ntnatica. 
 
 1 . to drink, e. g. of persons, absol. Matt. 
 27, 34 OVK T/StXe Tridv. Luke 12, 19. Acts 9, 
 
 9. 1 Cor. 11, 25 ; trop. John 7, 37, comp. in 
 Str/mco no. 2. As infin. final, e. g. Sovvai 
 jriflv to give to drink, Matt. 27, 34. John 4. 
 7. 10. Rev. 16, 6; alrelv niiiv John 4, 9. 
 Sept. for fine Qen. 24, 14. 18 sq. So Luc. 
 D. Deor. 7. 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 18 ; as infin. 
 final Antiph. 114. 15. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 8. 
 With adjuncts : a) Foil, by ex c. gen. of 
 the drink, or meton. of the vessel containing 
 the drink, i. e. to drink of any thing, a part 
 of it ; Matt. 26, 27 nitre e avrov sc. TOV 
 noTTjpiov, v. 29. John 4, 12. 13. 14. 1 Cor. 
 
 10, 4. Rev. 18, 3. 14, 10 KCU UVTOS nitrai f< 
 TOV otvov TOV Svfj.ov TOV 3fov, see espec. in 
 Zvpos. Sept. for 1? tirna Gen. 9, 21. 2 Sam. 
 
 12, 3. So JE\. V. H. 1. 4. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 
 4. b) Foil, by OTTO c. gen. of the drink ; 
 Luke 22, 18 ov p.rj 7n o> dno ToG ytvv. Trjs 
 
 . Sept. for nfj Jer. 51, 7. c) 
 With accus. of the thing drank, to drink any 
 thing, to use as drink, Luke 1, 15 criufpa ov 
 fif] nirj. Rom. 14, 21. 1 Cor. 10, 4; to drink 
 of Matt. 26, 29. Trop. John 6, 53. 54. 56, 
 see in alpa no. 1. Sept. for finti Ex. 7, 18. 
 21. 1 K. 13, 18. 16 sq. Is. 5, 22. (Luc. D. 
 Deor. 4. 3 jcal vtKTap trig. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 
 10.) Meton. TO noTrjpiov nivfiv, to drink a 
 cup, e. g. of wine, pr. 1 Cor. 10, 21 ; trop. 
 of suffering, to drink the cup which God 
 presents, to submit to the allotments of his 
 providence, Matt. 20, 22. 23. 26, 42. Mark 
 10, 38. 39. John 18, 11 ; see in noTrjpiov. 
 
 For the phrase ea-Sifiv v. (payelv KOI irl- 
 vetv, in its various senses, see in co-3(o> no. 
 2. For Tpuyetv /ecu nivetv Matt. 24, 38, 
 see in rpwyw. 
 
 2. Trop. of the earth, to drink in, to im 
 bibe, C. ace. Heb. 6, 7 fj yrj r) niovo-a TOV . . . 
 vfTov. Sept. and find Deut. 11, 11. 
 Hdot. 3. 117. Xen. Conv. 2. 25. Comp. 
 sal prata biberunt Virg. Eel. 3. 111. + 
 
 TTiOTT??, TTJTOS, f), (iria>v,~) fat, fatness ; 
 Rom. 11, 17 Tijs TT. TTJS fXaias. Sept. for 
 l^ Judg. 9, 9. Job 36, 16 ; 1^ Zech. 4, 
 14. Luc. Amor. 14. 
 
 7Tnrpd(TK(Oj (ntpd^, ) perf. 77eVpa*ca, 
 Pass. perf. jrenpapai, Pass. aor. 1 fnpctiriv ; . 
 to trafflck away, pr. beyond sea, in other 
 lands; hence genr. to sell, c. ace. Matt. 13, 
 46 TTfTrpaxf Trdvra ocra et^e. Acts 2, 45. 
 Pass. Matt. 18, 25 fKe\fvo-fv avrov . . . irpa- 
 Siji/ai. Mark 14, 5. Acts 4, 34. 5, 4. With 
 gen. of price, Matt. 26, 9 irpa^vai TroXXoO. 
 John 12,5. Buttm. { 132. 10. c. Sept. for 
 1? Gen. 31, 15. Lev. 27, 27 ; c. gen. Deut. 
 21,14. So Hdian. 2. 6. 22. Xen. Conv. 4. 
 1 ; c. gen. Xen. An. 7. 7. 26. Trop. Pass. 
 to be sold to or under any one, i. q. to be his 
 slave; vrro c. ace. Rom. 7, 14 jrfrrpafj.evos 
 VTTO TTJV dfjiapTiav, i. q. to be the slave of sin, 
 devoted to it. Comp. Sept. and "i^ 1 K. 
 21, 25. Is. 50, 1. So 1 Mace. 1,15. Dem. 
 215. 6. 
 
 TTtTTTO), f. TTfo-ovnai, aor. 2 errto-ov, aor. 
 1 emo-a, Rev. 1, 17. 5, 14; comp. Buttm. 
 596. n. 9. 5114. Winer 5 13. 1. a. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 724. To fall, to fall down; Sept. 
 for Heb. *BS . 
 
 1. Pr. to fall from a higher to a .ower 
 place, spoken of persons and things ; in N. T. 
 always with an adjunct of place whence or 
 whither ; e. g. with and, to fall from, Matt. 
 15, 27 dnb TT)S Tpanffrs. Luke 16, 21. Acts 
 20, 9. Matt. 24, 29 see in ovpavos no. 2. 
 With (K, to fall out of or from, Luke 10, 18 
 tK TOV ovpavov. Acts 27, 34. Rev. 8, 10 et 
 9, 1, see in ovpavos no. 2. (Sept. and ^B- 
 Job 1, 16.) Also ev p,e<ra> T>V aKav S&v, 
 among, Luke 8, 7 ; eVt c. ace. to fall upon 
 any pers. or thing, Matt. 10, 29 eVi Trjvyriv. 
 13, 5. 7. 8. 21,44 bis. Mark 4, 5. Luke 8, 
 6. 8. 20, 18 bis. 23, 30. Rev. 6, 16. 8, 10. 
 Rev. 7, 16 ovde JJ.TJ ireo-fl eV OVTOVS 6 T)\IOS, 
 i. e. the burning sun shall not injure them. 
 Trop. TT. eVt Tiva, Rev. 11,11 Rec. /cat (pd/3o$ 
 fityas firfcrfv ITU TOVS KT\. With ets rt, to 
 fall into, among, upon, any thing, Matt. 15, 
 14 els ftoZwov. 17, 15. Mark 4, 7. 8. Luke 
 6,39. 8,14. John 12,24. Rev. 6,13. (Diod. 
 i Sic. 4. 77 els SaXao-o-cw. Xen. Hell. 4. 7. 7.) 
 
TTtTTTO) 
 
 583 
 
 With Trupa c. ace. of place, to fall at, by, 
 near, Matt. 13, 4. Mark 4, 4. Luke 8, 5. 
 
 2. Of persons, to fall dou-n, to fall pros 
 trate, absol. Matt, 18, 29 7rea-a>i> ovv 6 o-vvoov- 
 Xor, in later edit. Acts 5, 5. Joined with 
 irpoo-KWfiv, Matt. 2, 1 1 -nevovrfs irpoufKvvr]- 
 <rav. 4, 9. 18, 26. Rev. 5, 14. 19, 4. Sept. 
 and ^E3 2 Sam. 1, 2. Dan. 3, 5. 6. (Anthol. 
 Gr. I. p. 92.) Oftener with an adjunct of 
 place or manner, e. g. with fvunrtuv TWOS 
 Rev. 5, 8 ; with Trpoo-Kvi/e lv 4, 10 ; with els 
 c. ace. f if f8a<pos Acts 22, 7, comp. 9, 4 ; 
 fiy roiif TroSar n^df John 11, 32. Matt. 18, 
 29 Rec. (Diog. Laert. 2. 79.) With eVt c. 
 gen. of place, Mark 9, 20 eiri rfjs y^s. 14, 
 35 ; tiri c. ace. of place or manner, eVi rfjv 
 yfjv Acts 9, 4; eVt TOVS Tr68as TWOS 10, 25. 
 (Sept. 1 Sam. 25, 24.) Also eVl irp6cra>- 
 Trov,upon the face, Matt. 17,6. 26, 39. Luke 
 5, 12 ; with napa TOVS trodas Luke 17, 16 ; 
 with TTpoa-KWf w 1 Cor. 14, 25. Rev. 7, 11. 
 11, 16. (Sept. and ^23 i Sam. 25, 23 ; eVc 
 TTJV o^fiv Jos. Ant. 6. 9. 5 ; tnl oro/xa Xen. 
 Venat. 10. 13.) So too rrapa Tovr irodas 
 TWOS Luke 8, 41. Acts 5, 10, comp. Luke 
 17, 16; npos TOVS 7708. Mark 5, 22. Rev. 
 1, 17 ; ffjiirpoo Zfv TU>V iro8>v, c. irpocrKv- 
 vfa> Rev. 19, 10. 22, 8; with xa/iat John 
 18,6. (Sept. Job 1,20.) Spoken of those 
 who fall dead, to fall, to perish; Luke 21, 
 24 vfo-ovvrat, trrd/wm /la^atpar. 1 Cor. 10, 
 8. Heb. 3, 17. Rev. 17, 10 ; comp. Acts 5, 
 
 5. 10. Comp. Sept. and bsj Num. 14, 43. 
 Ex. 32, 27. Num. 14, 19. 32. So Hdian. 
 3. 7. 10. Xen. An. 1. 8. 28. Trop. to fall 
 from any state or dignity, c. TroSei/ Rev. 2, 5. 
 
 3. Of edifices, walls, or the like, to fall, 
 to fall down in ruins, Matt. 7, 25. 27. Luke 
 
 6, 49. 13, 4. Heb. 11, 30. Trop. Luke 11, 
 17. Acts 15, 16; comp. in a-K^vrf. So in 
 prophetic imagery, Rev. 11,13. 14, 8 tTreo-e, 
 fTT(o-f Ba@v\uv. 16, 19. 18, 2. [3.] Sept. for 
 bS3 Is. 21, 9. Xen. Hell. 5. 2. 5. 
 
 4. Of a lot, to fall to or upon any one, 
 \\ith eVi c. ace. Acts 1, 26. So Sept. and 
 bB3 Jon. 1,7. Ez. 24, 6. 
 
 5. Metaph. of persons, to fall into or un- 
 d:r any thing, e. g. condemnation, wro Kpi- 
 o-w James 5, 12. (Diod. Sic. 19. 8 n. inr 
 ((owiav TUV fjflitmtv.) Absol. to fall un 
 der temptation, into sin, i. q. to transgress, 
 to sin, Rom. 11,22. 14,4. 1 Cor. 10, 12. 
 Hence to fall into destruction, i. q. to be 
 made miserable, to perish, Rom. 11. 11 ^ 
 (Trrato-av, Iva wftrwrt , Heb. 4, 11. Sept. 
 and ^>S3 Prov. 11, 28. 24, 16. So Ecclus. 
 1, 27. 2, 7 ; comp. Hdot. 8. 16. Diod. Sic. 
 13. 37. Of things, i. q. to fall to the ground, 
 
 to fail, Luke 16, 17 fj roC v6p.ov piav a; paint 
 TTtaflv. [1 Cor. 13,8.] Sept and ^33 Josh. 
 23, 14. 1 Sam. 3, 19. Plato Euth. 17. p. 
 14. d, ov \ap.ai Trore Trecreirat, O,TI av tiTTys. 
 Comp. Liv. 2. 31 irrita cadunt promissa. 
 
 IliaiSia, as, f], Pisidia, the country or 
 the Pisidae, a district of Asia Minor lying 
 mostly on Mount Taurus, between Pam- 
 phylia, Phrygia, and Lycaonia. Its chiei 
 city was Antioch. Acts 13, 14. 14,24. See 
 Strabo 12. p. 569. Plin. H. N. 5. 24. Cellarii 
 Not Orb. II. p. 159 sq. 
 
 TTtcrTeyft), f. evo-ci), (Tri oTir,) aor. 1 ri 
 (TTfvo-a, perf. TreTTtoreu/ca, plupf. irtTno~T(v- 
 Ktiv without augm. Acts 14, 23, comp. 
 Buttm. I 83. n. 7. Winer $ 12. 12. To have 
 faith, to put faith in, to believe, to trust. 
 
 1. As to things, to have faith, to believe ; so 
 C. infin. Rom. 14, 2 6f p.ev Trio-revet (payeiv 
 Travra. With OTI Mark 11, 23. Rom. 10,9. 
 James 2, 19 ; absol. ibid. (So c. inf. Hdian. 5. 
 
 4. 5. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 45.) Also with the 
 idea of hope and certain expectation, c. inf. 
 Acts 15, 11 ; on Rom. 6, 8. So Xen. An. 
 7. 7. 47. More commonly of words spoken 
 and things, e. g. with dat. of a person speak 
 ing, whose words one believes and trusts ; 
 Mark 16,13 oiSe txtivois eVi trreucrai/. John 
 
 5, 46 ei yap eVioTeverc Mcoven;, e moTeveTf 
 av (p.oi. Acts 8, 12. 1 John 4, 1 ; c. ori. 
 John 4, 21. (Hdian. 2. 1. 23. Luc. Her- 
 mot. 17.) With an adjunct of the words 
 or thing spoken; e. g. dat. Luke 1, 20 owe 
 fTri(rrev(Tas TOI? Xdyoif p.ov. John 4, 50. 
 Acts 24, 14. 2 Thess. 2, 11. (Hdian. 4. 9. 
 10.) With iiri c. dat. Luke 24, 25 eVi na- 
 <riv. With tv c. dat. Mark 1, 15 eV r<a ev- 
 ayyeXi w, in the glad tidings, i. e. believe 
 and embrace the glad tidings, the gospel ; 
 so Sept. c. tv for 3 V^rt J er . 12, 6. Ps. 
 78, 22. (Dion. Hal. de Comp. verbor. p. 
 150. ed. Schaef.) With an adjunct of the 
 thing believed, e. g. dat. Acts 13, 41 epyov. 
 w ov P.TI TTifTTfvcrrjTf. (Hdian. 8. 3. 10.) 
 With accus. of thing, John 11.26 Tnoreveis 
 roOro; 1 Cor. 13, 7. 1 John 4, 16. Hence 
 Pass. 2 Thess. 1, 10 OTI eVicrrevSr; TO fJ.ap- 
 Tvpiov TIHUIV e (p vp.as, comp. Winer j 40. 1. 
 (Hdian. 8. 3. 22. Pass. ib. 2. 9. 4.) Witli 
 f?f TI, 1 John 5, 10 eif TTJV p.apTvpiav. 
 With OTI instead of ace. and infin. John 14. 
 10 TriOTevftr OTI e yu *crX. Rom. 10, 9 rrept 
 TWOS, OTI John 9, 18. So c. OTI Hdr an. 1. 14. 
 10. Xen. Hi. 1. 37. Absok where the case 
 of pers. or thing is implied from the con 
 text, Matt. 24, 23. Mark 13, 21. John 12, 
 47. Acts 8, 13 Kai avTos eViarevcre, sc. TW 
 
 o) rcj) euayyeXifo^eVco, com p. v. 12. 
 
584 
 
 Acts 15, 7 /cat irurrevcrai, SC. ra> Xoyu rov 
 (vayy. 1 Cor. 11, 18. So Hdian. 4. 4. 10. 
 Thuc. 1. 1. 
 
 2. As to persons, to have faith in, to be 
 lieve in or on, to trust in, e. g. a) In re 
 spect to God, to believe on God, to trust in 
 him, e. g. as able and willing to help, to 
 listen to prayer ; with dat. of pers. and ort, 
 Acts 27, 25 Trio-revo) yap r< Seta on ourco? 
 eorat. (So c. dat. Ecclus. *2, G! 8.) With 
 fls, John 14. 1 Trio-revere ets rov 3e6V. Ab- 
 sol. Matt. 21, 22 Trio-rfvoirfs, i. q. et Tri 
 o-revere. 2 Cor. 4, 13. Also as faithful to 
 his promises, c. dat. Rom. 4, 3 eVi o-revo-e 
 A/3paa/i rep Sew, KOI e XoytVSjj AcrX. quoted 
 from Gen. 15, 6 where Sept. for TEXri. 
 Gal. 3, 6. James 2, 23. Rom. 4, 17 /care - 
 vavri ov fnicrTfvcrf Seoi), by attract, see in 
 art. os A. 3. b. 8. p. 518. Absol. Rom. 4, 18. 
 Heb. 4, 3. Or genr. to believe in the de 
 clarations and character of God as made 
 known in the Gospel, c. dat. John 5, 24. 
 Acts 16, 34 ol TTfjrio-TfVKOTfs rc3 3e. 
 1 John 5, 10 ; with els c. ace. praegn. i. q. 
 to believe and rest upon, to believe in and 
 profess; see Winer 31. 2. n. 1 P.3t. 1,21 
 TOVS 6Y avTov TriuTtvovras fls SeoV. With 
 eVrt c. acc. id. Rom. 4, 24, comp. Winer 
 
 1. c. Absol. Luke 8, 12. 13, comp. v. 11. 
 Acts 13, 48. 
 
 b) As to a messenger from God, to believe 
 on and trust in him as coming from God 
 and acting under divine authority. a) Of 
 John the Baptist, c. dat. avrw, Matt. 21, 25. 
 32. Mark 11, 31. Luke 20, 5. /3) Of 
 Jesus as the Messiah ; e. g.. as able and 
 ready to heip his followers, c. ds John 14, 
 1 ; or to heal the sick and comfort the af 
 flicted, c. on Matt. 9, 28; absol. 8, 13. 
 Mark 5, 36. John 4, 48. Genr. as a teacher 
 and the Messiah sent from God ; c. dat. of 
 pers. John 5, 38 w aVeVretXei/ fKflvos, TOV- 
 ra vufls ov Trtcrrevere. 8, 31. 10, 37. 38. 
 Acts 5, 14. 2 Tim. 1, 12; with 6Vt, John 
 11, 27 e yw TreTT/orrevKa, ort (rii et 6 Xpiaro r. 
 20, 31. 1 John 5, 1. 5. John 8, 24 tav yap 
 fj.fj TTHTTfvcrTjTf, OTi eyco dfjii. 13, 19. 16, 
 27. 30. 17, 8. 21. al. saep. So with yiv<a- 
 a-Kfiv John 6, 69. 10. 38. With else. acc. 
 of pers. praegn. i. q. to believe and rest up 
 on, to believe in and profess, comp. Winer 
 31. 2. n. Matt. 18, 6 r<uz> uiKpfov TOVTCJV, 
 ro>i> irtcrTtvovTW fls ep-f. Mark 9, 42. John 
 
 2, 11. 3, 15. 16. 4, 39. 6, 35. 7, 5. 38. 8, 
 30 TToXXot eV/crrevo-ai ds avrov. 17, 20. 
 Acts 10, 43. 19, 4. Rom. 10, 14. Gal. 2, 
 16. 1 Pet. 1, 8; trop. els TO <pwj John 12, 
 36. So with ds ro ovop-a Irj crov in a 
 like nse, see in ovo^a no. 4, i. q. to be 
 
 lieve on Jesus and profess his name, John 
 1,12 rots 7Ti(rreuovo~ii fls TO oVo/ia avroO. 
 2, 23. 1 John 5, 1 3 ; with r<5 ovouan ai>- 
 TOV, id. 1 John 3,23. With eVi c. acc. o. 
 pers. i. q. ds rti/a, comp. Winer 31. 2. n. 
 Acts 9, 42. 11, 17, comp. v. 21. So eVi 
 c. dat. 1 Tim. 1,16. (Matt. 27, 42.) Trop. 
 Rom. 9, 33 et 1 Pet. 2, 6 TI STJ/U eV 2io> 
 
 Xl Soi/ . . . Kal 7TO.S 6 TTKTTfVtoV eV OVTW KT\. 
 
 quoted from Is. 28, 16 where Sept. for 
 r^SH- Pass. 1 Tim. 3, 16 eWrevSjj e 
 KOO-^W. (Dem. 464. 20. Xen. An. 7. 6.^3.) 
 Hence absol. to believe, i. e. to believe and 
 profess Christ, to be or become a Christian, 
 Mark 15, 32. Luke 22, 67. John 1, 7. 12, 
 39. Acts 4, 4. 14,1. 17,12.34. Rom. 4, 11. 
 1 Cor. I, 21. al. saep. Part. 01 Trto-revoi/- 
 Tfs, ol 7rio~Tfv<ravTfs, believers, Chris 
 tians, Acts 2, 44. 4, 32. 19, 18. Gal. 3, 22. 
 1 Thess. 1, 7. 1 Pet. 2, 7. al. 1 Cor. 14, 
 22 see in o-qptiov no. 2. a. 
 
 3. Trans, to intrust, to commit in trust 
 to any one; c. acc. et dat. Luke 16, 11 TO 
 aXrj Sivbv TIS vu.lv TTicrTfvcrfi , John 2, 24. 
 So Wisd. 14, 5. Luc. D. Deor. 25. 2. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 4. 17. Pass. irio-Ttvopai rt. 
 to be intrusted with any thing, to have com 
 mitted to one s charge, c. acc. see Buttm. 
 5 134. 7. Winer $ 40. 1. Rom. 3, 2. Gal. 
 2, 7 TreTTt o-reu^at ro euayyeXtoj/. 1 Cor. 9, 
 17 otKovo/uW TreTriorev/iai. 1 Thess. 2, 4. 
 1 Tim. 1, 11. Tit. 1,3. So Jos. Ant. 2. 
 9. 5. Diog. Laert. 7. 1. 29 7rio-rev3eVros TTJV 
 ft> Ilepya/iw ^t/SXioS/jKJji . Polyaen. 2. 36. 
 Diod. Sic. 20. 19, 27. + 
 
 TTicrrt/co?, ? ;, 6v, (TT LO-TIS.) causing be 
 lief or persuasion, Xen. Cyr. 1.6. 10 ; faith 
 ful, trustworthy, yvvalna TTIO~TIKT]V Artemid. 
 2. 33. p. 121. In N. T. trop. true, genuine, 
 pure, e. g. vapSov Trio-rt/cr)? Mark 14, 3. 
 John 12, 3. So Theophylact ad h. 1. 17 
 aSoXo? (cat /nera TTtVrews Karao-/cetiao - 3e7<ra, 
 and so all the ancient interpreters. See 
 Liicke on John 1. c. Winer 16. 3. 
 
 , f(os, 17, (Tret Sw, TretSo/xat,) faith, 
 belief, trust, pr. firm persuasion, confiding 
 belief in the truth, veracity, reality of any 
 person or thing. 
 
 I. As in classic Greek. 1. Pr. and 
 genr. faith, belief; Acts 17. 31 TT IO-TIV ira- 
 pa<r\u>v irao~iv, see in Trape^to no. 2. Rom 
 14, 22 a-v irlffTiv e^eis, thou hast faith, i. C 
 art firmly persuaded, v. 23 bis. Heb. 11, 1. 
 So with the idea of hope and certain ex 
 pectation, 2 Cor. 5, 7 Stu Trtcrrecoj yap rre/Jt- 
 TraroC/ie* , ov Sta (tb ovs. So Diod. Sic. 1. 
 39, 86. Plut. Romul. 8. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 19 
 Hi. 4. 1. 
 
7Tt(7Tt9 
 
 585 
 
 TTICTTIS 
 
 2. good-faith, fidelity, sincerity, Matt. 23, 
 23 TO. ftapvTfpa TOV vop.ov, rfjv Kpicriv KOI 
 TOV fXtov Kal TTJV irtoTiv. Rom. 3, 3 TOV 
 2foC. Gal. 5, 22. 1 Tim. 1,19 t%u>v irio-riv, 
 1. e. being faithful, sincere. 2, 1. 2 Tim. 2, 
 
 22. 3, 10. Tit. 2, 10 iriartv iratrav dya^v 
 all good fidelity. Rev. 2, 19. 13, 10. So 
 in the usage of Sept. for ^3^$ 1 Sam. 26, 
 
 23. Hab. 2, 4. Prov. 12, 22. Ecclus. 1, 
 26. Hdian. 3. 9. 4. Diod. Sic. 1. 79. Xen. 
 An. 3. 3. 4. 
 
 II. In N. T. iria-ris is used specially in 
 reference to God and divine things, to Christ 
 and his gospel, and thus becomes in some 
 sense a technical word, particularly in the 
 writings of Paul; denoting that faith, that 
 confiding belief, which is the essential trait 
 of Christian life and character, i. e. gospel 
 faith, Christian faith, comp. Rom. 3, 22 sq. 
 
 1. Of God, i. e. faith in, on, towards God, 
 e. g. 7rl "Stov Heb. 6, I ; irpbs TOV SeoV 
 1 Thess. 1, 8; ds Seoi/, c. eXiris, 1 Pet. 1, 
 21 ; c. gen. 3eoG Mark 11, 22. Col. 2, 12. 
 Absol. Matt. 17, 20. 21, 21. Luke 17,5.6; 
 comp. Mark 11, 22. Heb. 4, 2. 10, 22. 38 
 6 8t 8iKaios tK Trt crrecos {rjo-ercu, in allusion 
 to Hab. 2, 4 where Sept. for naiax fidelity, 
 v. 39. James 1, 6 curerrco 8e tv Trurm, i. e. 
 in filial confidence, nothing doubting. 5, 15 
 ij ti/x } TTiorews . Spoken analogically of the 
 faith of the patriarchs and pious men under 
 the Jewish dispensation, who looked for 
 ward in faith and hope to the blessings of 
 the gospel; comp. Gal. 3, 7 sq. Heb. 11, 
 13. So of Abraham, Rom. 4, 5. 9 eXoyiVSij 
 TOO Afipaap. i] TriaTis fls 8iKaioo-vvr]v. v. 11. 
 1-2. 13. 14. 16 bis. 19. 20. Heb. 6, 12. 
 Genr. of others, Heb. 11, 3. 4. 5. 6. 7 bis. 
 8. 9. 11. 13. 17. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 27. 28. 
 29. 30. 31. 33. 39; also Luke 18, 8. 
 
 2. Of Christ, faith in Christ,e. g. a) 
 As able to work miracles, to heal the sick, 
 and the like ; absol. Matt. 8, 10 oi>8e eV T 
 10-parjX TO(Tuvrr]v TT HTTIV tvpov. 9, 2. 22. 29. 
 15, 28. Mark 2, 5. 5, 34. 10, 52. Luke 5, 
 20. 7, 9. 50. 8, 48. 17, 19. 18, 42. Acts 
 3, 16 bis. So mediately, Acts 14. 9. b) 
 Of faith in Christ s death, as the ground of 
 justification before God, i. q. saving faith, 
 only in Paul s writings ; Rom. 3, 22 SIK<H- 
 OO-VVT] 8e Seov 8ia TTiWtcoj I. Xp. v. 25 Sta 
 rrioTftoS iv ru avrov atfian. V. 26 tK TT. "l^- 
 <rov. So from the connection, absol. v. 27. 
 28. 30 bis. 31. 1 Cor. 15, 14. 17; genr. 
 Rom. 1, 17 bis, sec in dnoKaXimTd) no. 1. 
 Rom. 5. 1. 2. 9, 30. 32. 10, 6. 17. Gal. 2, 
 16 bis. 20. 3, 2.5. 7. 8. 9. 11. 12. 14. 22. 
 
 24. 5, 5. 6. Eph. 2, a 3, 12 Sia T. iriortus 
 avroii Phil. 3, 9 bis. So of the faith of 
 
 Abraham, see above in no. 1. c) Genr. 
 as the Messiah and Saviour, the Head of 
 the gospel dispensation; c. ds, Acts 20, 21 
 irio-Ttv TTJV ds TOV K. "I. Xp. 26, 18. Col. 2, 
 5 ; iv XptoTto Gal. 3, 26. Eph. 1,15. Col. 
 1, 4. 1 Tim. l, 14. 3, 13. 2 Tim. 1, 13. 3, 
 15; TOV Kvpiov I. Xp. James 2, 1. Eph. 4, 
 13; c. gen. p.oO Rev. 2, 13, i. e. thy faith 
 toward me. 14, 12. Absol. Mark 4, 40. 
 Luke 8, 25. 22, 32. Acts 6, 5 avtipa n^fiprj 
 Tri trrecor Kal TTV. ay. v. 8. 11, 24. Eph. 3, 
 17. Col. 2, 7 comp. v. 5. So Eph. 6, 1G 
 Supeoj/ TTJS TTLO-rtus- 1 Thess. 5, 8. 
 
 3. Genr. e. g. c. gen. f] TTIO-TLS TOV tvayyt- 
 Xi ov, the faith r>f or in the gospel, gospel- 
 faith, Phil. 1 . 27 ; 77 TT. T^S d\r)?Sfias, faith 
 in the truth, in the gospel, 2 Thess. 2, 13. 
 Absol. in the same sense, i. e. Christian 
 faith, a firm and confiding belief in Jesus 
 and his gospel ; genr. 1 Cor. 2, 5 Iva f) 
 TT KTTLS vpcav fir/ rj eV crcxpiq. dvSpunraiv KT\. 
 2 Cor. 4, 13. Phil. 1, 25. 2, 17. 1 Thess. 
 
 1, 3. 1 Tim. 1, 5. 6, 11. 12. 2 Tim. 1. 5. 
 
 2, 18. Tit. 1, 1. Philem. 6. Heb. 12,2. 
 James 2, 5. 1 Pet. 1, 5. 7. 9. 5, 9. Else 
 where also TTLOTIS marks various predomi 
 nant traits of Christian character as arising 
 from and combined with Christian faith, 
 without implying however any sharp dis 
 tinction ; e. g. Christian knowledge, espec. 
 in Paul and James, Rom. 12, 3 /i<Vpoi TTJS 
 irio~T(o)S. V. 6. 14, 1 dcrSei aJi Trj Trio~Tti. 
 
 1 Cor. 12, 9. 13, 2. 13. Tit. 1, 13. 2 Pet. 
 1,5; also in James, as opp. to epya, James 
 2, 14 bis. 17. 18 ter. 20. 22 bis. 24. 26. So 
 of the Christian profession, the faith pro 
 fessed, Acts 13, 8 r)T<av 0~ia<TTp(\lsai TOV 
 
 dlftvTTdTOV OTTO TTJS TTLCTTfWS. 14, 22. 15. 9. 
 
 16, 5. 1 Cor. 16, 13. 2 Cor. 1, 24 fin. Gal. 
 6, 10. 1 Tim. 2, 15. 2 Tim. 4, 7. Oi 
 Christian zeal, ardour in the faith, Rom. 1 , 
 8 OTI fj TrtOTtr vfi(ov KarayyeXXerai KT\. 11. 
 20. 2 Cor. 8, 7. 10, 15. 13, 5. Eph. 6, 23. 
 
 2 Thess. 1, 4. 11. Of Christian love, as 
 springing from faith, Rom. 1, 12 17 iv d\\fj- 
 \oiy irio-ris, i. e. mutual faith and love. 
 2 Thess. 1, 3. Philem. 5 IT KTTIV r\v e^r 
 Trpof TOV Kvpiov Kal iTavTas TOVS ayiovs. Of 
 Christian life and morals, practical faith, 
 1 Tim. 4, 12 TVTTOS yivov . . . tv di>a<TTpo(pfj, 
 fv dycnrfj. tv ni<rT(i, tv ayveia. 5, 8. 12. 6, 
 10. Tit. 2, 2. Of constancy in the faith, 
 Col. 1, 23. 1 Thess. 3, 2. 5. 6. 7. 10. Heb. 
 13, 7. James 1, 3. 
 
 4. Meton. the object of Christian faith, 
 the faith, the doctrines received and be 
 lieved, Christian doctrine, and genr. the 
 system of Christian doctrines, the gospel, 
 the Christian religion ; Acts 6, 7 VTTO 
 
ro? 
 
 586 
 
 riy 7Ti oT, were obedient to the faith, em- 
 oraced the gospel. Rom. 1, 5. 16, 26. Acts 
 14, 27 3upa Tri o-recoy, i. e. access for the 
 gospel. 24, 24. Rom. 10, 8. 2 Cor. 1, 24 
 init. Gal. 1, 23. 3, 23 bis. 25. Eph. 4, 5. 
 1 Tim. 1, 4. 19. 3, 9. 6, 21. 2 Pet. 1, 1. 
 1 John 5, 4. Jude 3 rfj ana!- Trapado^fia-rj 
 roli dyiois Trio-ret, v. 20. So Tit. 3, 15 
 (piXovvras rjp.ds eV Trt crrei i. e. in the gospel, 
 as Christians. 1 Tim. 1, 2 Ttnvov eV Trt orei. 
 Tit. 1 , 4. Emphat. the true faith, true doc 
 trine, 2 Thess. 3, 2. 1 Tim. 4, 1. 6. 2 Tim. 
 3,8. 
 
 TTtcrro?, 77, oV, (Tm 3o>.) faithful, worthy 
 of faith, belief, trust, i. e. 
 
 1. faithful, trustworthy, true; 1 Tim. 1, 
 12 on TTICTTOV fie TjyrjcraTO. 2 Tim. 2, 2 rairra 
 TrapaSoi; Trio-roty dvSpumois. 1 Pet. 4, 19. 
 Rev. 1 9, 1 1 . Sept. for -jaw 1 Sam. 3, 20 ; 
 Vrax Prov 20, 6. So JEL V. H. 8. 6. 
 Thuc. 3. 10. Xen. An. 1. 6. 3. Hence 
 
 1, q. true, sure, verax, worthy of credit ; as 
 6 fidprvs 6 TTICTTOS Rev. 1, 5. 2, 13. 3, 14; 
 see in p.dprvs. Sept. for -paN Prov. 14, 5 ; 
 t aW Ps. 89, 38. Is. 8, 2. ("^El. V. H. 3. 
 18 fin. e i r<a TTICTTOS o Xtos \eycav. Xen. 
 Cyr. 6. 1. 42.) Of tilings, true, sure,verus, 
 e. g. Xo yos 1 Tim. 1, 15. 3, 1. 4, 9. 2 Tim. 
 
 2, 11. Tit. 1, 9. 3, 8. Rev. 21, 5. 22, 6. 
 Also Acts 13, 34 TO. o<na Aa/3!S TO. fiord, 
 see in co-toy no. 2. So Dem. 377. 27. 
 Thuc. 5. 14 ATI-IS TTia-rr]. 
 
 2. faithful in duty to oneself and to 
 others, of true fidelity ; Col. 4, 9 et 1 Pet. 
 5, 12 aSeXcpos Trio-rdy. Rev. 2, 10. Of God 
 as faithful to lu s promises, 1 Cor. 1, 9 TTJ- 
 O-TOS 63edr. 10, 13. 1 Thess. 5, 24. 2 Thess. 
 
 3, 3. Heb. 10. 23. 11, 11. 1 John 1,9. Of 
 Christ 2 Tim. 2, 13. (Sept. for nssiax 
 Deut. 32, 4 ; -pasa Deut. 7, 9.) Once TTI- 
 o-ros 8e 6 3eds as an obtestation or oath, as 
 God is faithful, 2 Cor. 1, 18 ; comp. Heb. 
 jEN T!^5t? Is. 65, 16. Spec, of servants, 
 ministers, who are faithful in the perform 
 ance of duty ; Matt. 24, 45 6 TTKTTOS SoCXos. 
 25, 21. 23. Luke 12, 42 6 TT. olKovofws. 
 1 Cor. 4, 2. Eph. 6,21. Col. 1,7. 4, 7. Heb. 
 2, 17. So TT. fir o\iya Matt. 25, 21. 23 ; 
 ev nvi Luke 16, 10 bis. 11. 12. 19, 17. 
 1 Tim. 3, 11. Heb. 3, 5 ; c. dat. of pers. 
 Heb. 3, 2. Sept. for -jaw Num. 12, 7. 
 ] Sam. 22, 14. So Hdian! 2. 8. 8. Xen. 
 Cyr. 5. 2. 23. 
 
 3. Act. faithful, believing, trusting, i. e. 
 firm in faith, confiding, i. q. 6 iria-revcov. 
 John 20, 27 p.rj yivov ciiricrTos, dXXa TTICTTOS. 
 Gal. 3, 9. So Theogn. 283. Soph. CEd. 
 Col. 1031. With dat. TO> Kvpia Acts 16, 
 
 15 ; also ev Kvpia, i. e. faithful to or in the 
 Lord, believing in him, i. q. a believer, 
 Christian, 1 Cor. 4, 17.. Eph. 1,1. Col. 1, 
 2 ; (Is 5(6v id. I Pet. 1,21 Lachm. Absol. 
 id. Acts 10, 45. 16, 1. 1 Cor. 7,25. 2 Cor. 
 6,15. iTim. 4,3. 10. 12. 5, 16 bis. 6, 2 bis. 
 Tit. 1, (j. Rev. 17, 14. Adv. TTKTTOV noielv, 
 to do faithfully, in a believing manner, as a 
 Christian, 3 John 5. Sept. for "jaw p s . 
 101, 6. So Ecclus. 1, 14. 1 MaccTs, 13. 
 TTtcrroft), u, f. wo-w, (TTto-rds,) pr. to make 
 faithful, trustworthy, e. g. by an oath, 
 Trio-row riva opifois, Jos. Ant. 15. 7. 10. 
 Thuc. 4. 88. Pass, or Mid. to be made 
 trustworthy, to give a pledge, to bind one 
 self, Pol. 18. 22. 6. Horn. Od. 15. 436. In 
 N. T. Pass. aor. 1 eTrio-TtoSqi/, to be made 
 confiding, believing, to be assured, comp. in 
 Trtcrro y no 3 ; hence i. q. to be assured of, to 
 believe, 2 Tim. 3, 14 fitve ev ols eposes KU\ 
 eTTto-rcaStyf, by attract, for ev TOVTOIS a. So 
 7no-ro>3e/s Soph. (Ed. Col. 1039, i. q. TTKTTOS 
 ib. 1031. 
 
 TT^avaw, >, f. TJO-O), (TrXdi/q,) 1 . to make 
 wander, to lead astray ; Pass, to wander, to 
 go astray ; e. g. of persons, Heb. 11, 38 <V 
 fpr]p.lais TT\ava)iJ:(voi. Of flocks, 1 Pet. 2, 
 25 o)r TrpdjSara TrXayco/xeva. Matt. 18, 12 bis. 
 13. Sept. for MH Gen. 37, 14. Ex. 23, 4. 
 Cebet. Tab. 6. ^El. V. H. 5. 7. Xen. An. 
 1.2. 25. 
 
 2. Trop. to mislead, i. e. a) to deceive, 
 to cause to err ; Pass, to err, to mistake, to 
 form a wrong judgment ; c. ace. Matt. 24, 
 4 et Mark 13, 5 /3XeVere ^ TIS v/xas 
 TT^avrjo-r,. Matt. 24, 5. 11. 24. Mark 13, 6. 
 1 John 1,8. 3, 7. Rev. 13, 14. Pass. Matt. 
 22,29 TrXarao-Se. Mark 12, 24. 27. Luke 
 21, 8 fir] TrkavrfiriTe. John 7, 47. 1 Cor. 6. 
 9. 15, 33. Gal. 6, 7. Heb. 3, 10. James 1 
 16. Sept. and H5n p r0 v. 12, 27. So Jos. 
 B. J. 6. 5. 4. Mosch. Id. 1. 25. Plut. Thes. 
 27. b) to deceive, to seduce, e. g. a people 
 into rebellion, c. ace. John 7, 12 TrXai/a riv 
 ox^ov. Rev. 20,8. 10. Also to seduce from 
 the truth, Pass, to be seduced, to go astray ; 
 
 1 John 2, 26 Trepl ruv TrXavwvrcov v^ds, comp. 
 v. 21.22. 2 Tim. 3, 13 bis. Pass. James 5, 
 1 9 fdv TIS fv vp.1v TvKavrfifj curb TJJS dXrjSflas. 
 
 2 Pet. 2, 15. Part. 01 TrXa.viap.evot, those 
 seduced, gone astray, Tit. 3, 3. Heb. 5, 2. 
 Spec, to seduce to idolatry, Rev. 2, 20. 12, 
 9. 18, 23. 19, 20. 20, 3. Sept. for nsn 
 2 K. 21, 9. Ez. 44, 10. 15. So Ecclus. 9,*8* 
 
 TT\avri) us, fj, (kindr. TrXdo>,) a wander 
 ing, Sept. Ez. 34, 12. ^El. V. H. 5. 7. In 
 N. T. only trop. error, i. e. 
 
 1. Genr. delusion, deceit, false judgment 
 
587 
 
 TrXeicTTO? 
 
 or opinion ; 1 Thess. 2, 3 f) 7rapdK\r](ns 
 fifj.wv OVK K TT\dvr]s. 2 Thess. 2, 1 1. Sept. 
 Jer. 23, 17. Diod. Sic. 2. 18. Plato Phaed. 
 81. a. 
 
 2. Melon, error of conduct, perverseness, 
 wickedness. Rom. 1, 27. James 5, 20. 2 Pet. 
 
 2, 18 roiis (v ir\dvr) dvao-rpetyopfvovs. Jude 
 
 11. Sept. for S^B Ez. 33, 10. Wisd. 1, 
 
 12. 12, 24. 
 
 3. Act. deceit, fraud, seduction to error 
 and sin ; Eph. 4, 14 /if3o&ei a TTJS ir\dirqs. 
 2 Pet. 3, 17. 1 John 4, 6 TO irvtvpa TTJS 
 TrXdjTjr a spirit of error, i. e. a deceiving 
 spirit, a teacher who seeks to seduce. Also, 
 a deception, fraud, Matt. 27, 64. Sept. for 
 fTD"JE Prov. 14,8. Hesych. n\dvr) dndrr). 
 
 TrXaviJTrjs, ov, 6, (TrXaraw,) a wanderer, 
 roamer, Sept. for part. TP Hos. 9, 17. Xen. 
 Ven. 5. 17. In N. T. do-rfjp TrXaj^n;? a 
 wandering star, planet, trop. of a false teach 
 er, Jude 13, comp. v. 4. So pr. Jos. Ant. 
 
 3. 6. 7. Diod. Sic. 1. 81. Xen. Mem. 4. 7. 5. 
 7T\avo$, ov, 6, f], adj. (irXdvr),) wander 
 ing about; Subst. a wanderer, vagabond, 
 juggler, Athen. 14. p. 615. e. In N. T. 
 Act. deceiving, seducing, 1 Tim. 4, 1 irpoa-f- 
 XoiTf? TTvevfiaa-i TrXdvois. Subst. a deceiver, 
 impostor, Matt. 27, 63 (Ktlvos 6 irXdvos. 
 2 Cor. 6, 8. 2 John 7 bis. S<i ;ulj. Jos. B. 
 J. 2. 13. 4 TrXdvoi aiftpwnoi KOI unar* nines. 
 Subst. Act. Thorn. 45. Diod. Sic. Tom. 
 VI. p. 199. 
 
 7rXa, axos, T], any broad and flat sur 
 face, e. g. of the sea, vrXa^ca TTOITOV jSaStt ai/ 
 Pind. Pyth. 1. 46 ; comp. Diod. Sic. 5. 36. 
 In N. T. and genr. a table, tablet, of wood 
 or stone on which any thing was inscribed, 
 e. g. the two tables of the decalogue given 
 to Moses, Heb. 9, 4 TrXaxes TTJS 8ia%i)KT]s. 
 2 Cor. 3, 3. Sept. and m n^ Ex. 31, 17. 
 32, 14 sq. So Jos. Ant. 3. 5. 4. Luc. 
 Somn. 3. Trop. 2 Cor. 3, 3 eWXafi Kap8i- 
 as vapxivais, comp. Rom. 2, 15 et Heb. 8, 
 10. Sept. and H^J Prov. 3. 3. Jer. 17, 1. 
 
 TrXaoyia, aros, ro ; (TrXdo-tro).) a tiling 
 formed, moulded, e. g. *y a potter, Rom. 9, 
 20 fir] epei TO irXdo-fta TW irXdcravTi ; quoted 
 from Is. 29, 16 where Sept. for inbsb rtiUStt . 
 
 Artem. 1. 56. Luc. D. Deor. 6. 4. Trop. 
 
 a figment, Dem. 1110. 18. 
 
 TrXacrtrw, v. -TT<U, f. TrXdcrw, comp. 
 Buttm. 92. n. 2. 5 95. 3 ; to form, to mould, 
 e. g. any soft substance, as a potter the 
 clay, absol. Rom. 9, 20 see in 7rXdo-^a. 
 Pass. 1 Tim. 2, 13 A&a/* -yap irpvros eVXd- 
 oS,. Sept. for -*.: Gen. 2, 7. 8 ; nitJS I s . 
 29, 16. Luc. D. Deor. 1.1. Xen. Mag 
 Eq. 6. 1. 
 
 r). 6v, (TrXdao-o),) formed, 
 moulded ; trop. feigned, false, deceitful ; 
 2 Pet. 2, 3 TrXaoToty \6yois. Plut. Thes. 
 20 ypdpiMTa TT\a<TTa 7tpocr(p(p(iv. Plato 
 Soph. 219. a. 
 
 TrXareta, see in TrXarvy no. 2. 
 
 TrXttTO?, ecos, TO, (TrXaTur,) breadth, Rev. 
 21, 16 bis. Trop. Eph. 3, 18. Sept. for 
 -rn Gen. 6, 15. Ex. 37, 1. So Hdian. 8. 
 
 4. 2. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 8. Spec. Rev. 20, 9 
 TO TrXoTos TTJS y}r, the breadth of the land, 
 the whole extent of it ; comp. Sept. for 
 anna Hab. i, 6. 
 
 7r\aTVVO), f. vvS>, (TrXaT^y.) Pass. aor. 1 
 (7r\aTi/v^!r]v, Pass. perf. TreTrXaTv/xai, 3 pers. 
 sing. irtTrXdruvrai 2 Cor. 6, 1 1, see in Buttm. 
 5101. n. 7. 
 
 1. to make broad, to enlarge, c. ace. Matt 
 23, 5 ir\arvvov(Tt 8e <J)v\aKTT]pia avra>v. 
 Sept. for ^nnn Ex. 34, 24. Plut. M. 
 Anton. 36. Xen. Cyr. 5. 5. 34. 
 
 2. Trop. of the heart or mind, Pass, to be 
 enlarged, 2 Cor. 6,11 TO O-TO//O f)p.u>v oWwye 
 . . . f) xapdia TJIJ.UV TTfirXdrvvrai, our heart is 
 enlarged towards you. so as to receive you 
 all with warm affection, comp. v. 12. So v. 
 1 3 TrXaTwSiTjTf KOI vfj.f1s, be ye also enlarged 
 in your hearts, so as to receive us ; comp. 
 in art. dimpio-Sia. Comp. Sept. and Heb, 
 ^ rrnri p s . 119, 32. 
 
 7rXaru9, e la, v, 1 . broad, wide, Matt 7, 
 13 TrXaTela 17 irvXr). Sept. for 3Hn Neh. 9, 
 35. Hdian. 4. 1. 4. Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 3R 
 686s rrXaTeia. 
 
 2. Subst. 17 TrXaTf Io sc. 686s, a broad 
 way, wide street in a city ; Matt. 6, 5 iv rais 
 ycaviais T&V rrXaTficav. 12, 19. Luke 10, 10. 
 13, 26. 14, 21. Acts 5, 15. Rev. 11, 8. 21, 
 21. 22, 2. Sept. for arn Judg. 19, 15. 20. 
 Zech. 8, 4. 5; pn Is. 15, 3. Tob. 13, 17. 
 Artemid. 3. 62. Plut. Thes. 27. id. Dion 46. 
 
 TrXey/^a, aroy, TO, (n\(Ka>,) any thing 
 plaited, braided, e. g. TrXe y/ia fivftXivov, the 
 ark or basket in which Moses was exposed 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 9. 4 ; a net, toil, Xen. Cyr. 1 . 
 6. 28. In N. T. a braid of hair, braided 
 hair ; 1 Tim. 2, 9 /iij iv frXrypaow* comp. 
 1 Pet. 3, 3 iv f/i7rXo*c>7 Tpix&v. So Aquil. 
 and Theodot. for "H" *?* diadem, Is. 28, 5. 
 
 TrXetcrro?, TJ, ov, (7rXei a>v,) the most, the 
 greatest, very great, the usual superlative 
 to TroXvf, Buttm. 5 68. 6 ; in N. T. only of 
 number, Matt. 11, 20. 21, 8 6 TrXeToros 
 o^Xor, a very great multitude. So Jos. Ant. 
 
 5. 1. 24. Xen. Ag. 3. 1. Hell. 7. 1. 23. 
 Neut. TO ir\fi<rrov adv. at most, 1 Cor. 14, 
 27; comp. Buttm. 5 128. n. 4. 
 
588 
 
 TT\ia)V, ovos, 6, 17, Neut. Tr\fiov Matt. 
 
 5, 20. 6, 25. Thuc. 7. 63. Xen. CEc. 7. 24, 
 25; usually Neut. TrXtov Luke 3, 13. Acts 
 15, 28. Luc. Parasit. 5. Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 7 ; 
 comp. Buttm. Ausf. Sprachl. { 68. 6. Matth. 
 J 135. Plur. contr. irXfiovs, also irkeioves 
 Heb. 7, 23. Xen. Hell. 4. 2. 11; accus. . 
 rrXetW, also irXeiovas Matt. 21, 36. Thuc. 
 2. 37. Xen. Mem. 3. 13. 5 ; Neut. ace. TrXet- 
 ova Matt. 20, 10. Xen. Apol. 22. Pr. more, 
 the usual comparative to TTO\VJ, comp. 
 Buttm. $ 68. 6. 
 
 1. Pr. of number, more ; but also of mag 
 nitude, and in comparison expr. or impl. 
 E. g. before a gen. Matt. 21, 36 TrXeiowi? 
 rav irpa>T<ov, more than the first or former 
 ones. Mark 12, 43. Luke 21,3. John 7, 
 31. (Diod. Sic. 12. 21.) Before rj, than, 
 Matt. 26, 53 TrXetW 77 8coSa. John 4, 1. 
 (Diod. Sic. 1. 79. Xen. An. 4. 8. 27.) Be 
 fore a numeral, 77 is oftener omitted, Acts 
 4, 22 e rcov TrAetopcoj/ rfwapdnovra. 23, 13. 
 21. 24, 11. 25, 6; comp. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 410 sq. Matth. $ 455. n. 4. (Plato Apol. 
 Socr. 17. d.) Once n\fov rf TreVre Luke 9, 
 13 ; comp. Lob. 1. c. Matth. 1. c. and \ 437. 
 n. 2. (Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 5, 6.) Before napd, 
 Luke 3, 13; see in trapa III. 4. c. Once 
 before 77X17^ c. gen. Acts 15, 28. Also 
 when the object of comparison is implied, 
 Matt. 20, 10. Luke 11, 53. John 4, 41. 15, 
 2. Acts 2, 40. 18, 20. 28, 23. Luke 7, 43 
 TO TrXetoi the more, i. e. the greater debt. 
 So Hdian. 8. 3. 11. Xen. Vect. 4. 32. 
 Hence genr. and emphat. i. q. many, very 
 many, Acts 13, 31 or uxp^Tj rt rjnepas 
 7r\fiovs. 21, 10. 24, 17. 25, 14. 27, 20. 
 Also Heb. 7, 23 ot p.fi> TtXfioves fieri lepeis, 
 opp. to one. So Xen. Cyr. 1 . 1 . 1 ; comp. 
 Xen. Venat. 5. 7. 
 
 2. Plur. c. art. ot irKdovts, ot jrXeiovs, 
 the more, the most, the many, comp. Matth. 
 266. Acts 19, 32 ot TT\(IOVS OVK ffddcrav 
 icrX. 27, 12. 1 Cor. 9, 19 iva TOVS TtXfiovas 
 KepSqo-o), i. e. that I may gain, if not all, yet 
 the greater part. 10, 5. 15, 6. 2 Cor. 2, 6. 
 4, 15. 9, 2. Phil. 1, 14. Jos. Ant. 10. 7. 3. 
 Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 34. 
 
 3. Trop. of worth, importance, dignity, 
 more, greater, higher ; before a gen. Matt. 
 
 6, 25 17 ijsvx*! wXeldv ftm rr}s rpocbrjs- 12, 
 41. 42 TrXfloi/ 2oXo/io>i>os &>6V. Mark 12, 33. 
 Luke 11, 31. 32. 12,23. Heb. 3, 3 jrXejW 
 rifjLTjv e^et TOU OIKOU. Rev. 2, 19. Pleon. 
 with TTfptcro-eveLV, Matt. 5, 20. Before irapd 
 lleb. 3, 3. 11,4. Absol. Hdian. 8. 4. 1. 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 43. Ag. 2. 24. 
 
 4- Neut. TrXetoi as adv. more, e. g. 
 ) Before a gen. John 21, 15 dyanas /ze 
 
 TrXeloi/ rovTcav; impl. Luke 7, 42. So Hdian. 
 5. 2. 7. Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 7. b) eVt TrXf I- 
 o v , further, longer ; spoken of space 2 Tim. 
 3, 9. Acts 4, 17 ; before a gen. do-ffifias, 
 
 1. e. further as to or in ungodliness, 2 Tim. 
 
 2. 16; comp. Matth. 340, 341. Winer 
 30. 4. (Xen. Eq. 1. 9.) Spoken of time, 
 Acts 20, 9. 24, 4. So Pol. 3. 58. 8. 
 
 7rXe/c&), f. w , to plait, to braid, Lat. 
 plico, plecto ; c. ace. Matt. 27, 29 n-Xe^ai" 
 Tf? o~re<f)avov ({ aK.av Zwv. Mark 15, 17. 
 John 19, 2. Sept. Is. 28, 5. Xen. An. 3. 
 
 3. 18. 
 
 ee in Tr\(ia>v. 
 
 f. da-co, (jrkfiuiv. TrXeoj/,) pr. 
 to do or be more, sc. than enough. 
 
 1. Of persons, to do or have more than 
 enough, to have an excess ; 2 Cor. 8, 15 6 
 TO TToXv. OVK eVXedVao-e, quoted from Ex. 
 16,18 where Sept. for Pl^ r! Aristot. 
 Pol. 1. 9. 7. 
 
 2. Of things, to abound more, to be abun 
 dant, to increase ; Rom. 5. 20 bis, Iva n-Xeo- 
 vdcrr) TO TrapaTTTwjua KT\. 6, 1. 2 Cor. 4, 15. 
 2 Thess. 1, 3. 2 Pet. 1, 8. With f iy n, to 
 abound unto any thing, to redound, to con 
 duce, Phil. 4, 17. Sept. for an 2 Chr. 24 ; 
 11; ran 1 Chr. 4, 27. Pol. 4. 3. 12. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 40. Plato Locr. 103. a. 
 
 3. Trans, to cause to abound, to increase; 
 c. ace. 1 Thess. 3, 12 fyia? fie c xvpios 
 Tr\eovd<rai [Opt.]...^ ayanrf KT\. Sept. 
 for nsnn Num. 26, 54. Ps. 71, 21. 
 1 Mace. 4, 35. Pass. Thuc. 2. 35. 
 
 TrXeoi/e/crew, i, f. ^o-a>, (ir\tov, ?x,) 
 to hai-e or claim more than another, i. q. 
 TrXeioi/ e^w, Xen. Cyr. 7. 2. 7, 1 1 ; to have 
 an advantage, to be superior, Jos. B. J. 
 proffim. 5. Xen. An. 3. 1. 37; to be 6 
 ir\eovKTT)s, to covet more, Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 
 18 ; to take advantage, to seek unlawful gain, 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 11. 2. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 31. In 
 N. T. trans, to take advantage of any one, 
 to make gain of, to defraud, c. ace. 2 Cor. 
 7, 2 ov8(va fTT\fovfKTT]crap.ei>. 12, 17. 18. 
 1 Thess. 4, 6. Pass. ^ Cor. 2,11. So Act. 
 Thorn. J 12 x*lP as Tr^fovfKTovvTfs. Plut 
 Marcell. 29. Pass. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 2. 
 
 7rXeove/CT7?9, O v, 6, (TT\(OV, exw.) pr. 
 one who will have more, i. e. a covetous 
 person, a defrauder for gain, 1 Cor. 5, 1 0. 
 11. 6, 10. Eph. 5, 5. Ecclus. 14, 9. Pol. 
 15. 21. 1. Xen. Mem. 1. 5. 3. 
 
 TrXeoref/a, as, r), (n\fov, e^co,) pr. 
 a having more, i. e. advantage, superiority, 
 Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 20. Pol. 2. 19. 3. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 6. 12. In N. T. pr. the will to havp 
 
589 
 
 more, i.e. copiousness, greediness for gain, 
 which leads a person to defraud others. 
 Mark 7, 22 7rAeoveuu, i. e. covetous thoughts, 
 plans of fraud and extortion. Luke 12, 15. 
 Rom. 1, 29. Eph. 4, 19. 5, 3. Col. 3, 5. 
 1 Thess. 2, 5. 2 Pet. 2, 3. 14. 2 Cor. 9, 5 
 OVTO>S wr tvKoyiav, KOI fir) a>s Tr\eovfl-iav, as 
 bounty and not as covetousness, i. e. not a 
 parsimonious gift ; parall. is (pft,8ofjLf vcas v. 6. 
 Sept. for SSS^Jer. 22, 17. Hab. 2, 9. &}. 
 V. H. 3. 16. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 28. 
 
 TrXeupo, as, r), the side, pr. of the body, 
 John 19, 34. 20, 20. 25. 27. Acts 12, 7. 
 Sept. 1* Num. 33, 55. 2 Sam. 2, 16. Pol. 
 5. 26. 6. Xen. An. 4. 1. 18. 
 
 eo), f. TrXevo-o/iat, usually uncon- 
 tracted, Buttm. 105. n. 2 ; to sail, absol. 
 Luke 8, 23. Acts 27, 24. With ds c. ace. 
 of place, Acts 21, 3 eVXeo/ifi ds Svpiav. 
 27, 6 ; eVi c. ace. Rev. 18, 17 in later edit. 
 With ace. of place by or near which, i. e. 
 of the way ; Acts 27, 2 TrXeTz/ TOVS Kara -rijv 
 Aeri av TOTTOVS, i. e. to sail along or by the 
 coast of Asia Minor ; see Matth. 409. 4. 
 Xen. An. 5. 1.4; c. ? Xen. Hell. 1.1.8; 
 c. eVi Luc. Alex. 54; c. ace. Pol. 3. 4. 10 
 ir\(~tv TO ire\d-/T). Xen. Hell. 4. 8. 6. 
 
 Trkrjj^, fjs, fj, (TrXqo-o-w,) 1. a stroke, 
 stripe, blow; Luke 12, 48 ta ir\T)y>v. 
 Acts 16, 23. 2 Cor. 6, 5. 11, 23. Sept. for 
 nsa Deut. 25, 3; V2& Prov. 29, 15. 
 Luc. D. Deor. 24. 2. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 16. 
 
 2. Meton. a wound, caused by a stripe or 
 blow, Luke 10, 30. Acts 16, 33 (\ova-(i> 
 [avrovs] dirb TU>V 77X777001 , i. e. from the 
 blood and filth of their wounds ; comp. v. 
 23. Rev. 13, 14. v. 3. 12 17 77X77717 TOV 3ai/u- 
 TOV, deadly wound, comp. Winer { 34. 2. 
 Sept. and na 1 K. 22, 35. Is. 1, 6 
 Luc. D. Deor. 14. 2. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 20. 
 
 3. From the Heb. like fiS? a stroke or 
 blow inflicted from God, a plague, cala 
 mity. Rev. 9, [18.] 20. 11,6. 15, 1 77X7770? 
 firra TOS eVxarar. v. 6. 8. 16, 9. 21 bis. 
 18, 4. 8. 21, 9. 22, 18. Sept. and nsa 
 Lev. 26, 21. Deut. 28,59.61. 29,21. 
 1 Mace. 13, 32. Philo de Vit. Mos. p. 624. 
 Jos. Ant. 6. 5. 6. 
 
 ", eos, ovs, TO, (nip.Tr\T)p.i, 77X7730),) 
 pr. fulness ; hence 
 
 1. a multitude, a great number, Luke 5, 6 
 77X7)30? Ix Svav TroXu. John 21,6. Acts 28, 3. 
 Heb. 11,12. James 5, 20. 1 Pet 4, 8. Sept. 
 and yi Gen. 27, 28. Is. 1, 11. Hdian. 7. 
 10. 3. Xen. An. 4. 7. 26. 
 
 2. Of persons, a multitude, throng ; c. 
 gen. of class, etc. Luke 2, 13. Acts 4, 32. 
 
 6, 2 TO 77X7720? ra>v ^aSrjTwjA Acts 5, 14 
 77X773*7 avSpuv KT\. i. e. multitudes. So c. 
 gen. impl. Acts 2, 6 comp. v. 5. 23,7. (Ceb. 
 Tab. I.) Also TroXu 77X7730? c. gen. Luke 
 6, 17. 23, 27. John 5, 3. Acts 14, 1. 17, 4; 
 TTCLV 77Xr]3o? c. gen. Luke 1, 10. Acts 25 
 24 ; gen. impl. Acts 15, 12 comp. v. 6. 15, 
 30 comp. v. 22. Acts 6, 5 comp. v. 2 ; a^av 
 77X7)30? c. gen. Luke 19, 37; c. gen. impl. 
 Luke 23, 1 comp. 22, 66; c. gen. of place, 
 Luke 8, 37 airav 77X7730? rrjs Trfptx^pov. 
 Acts 5, 16. Collect, with a verb plur. 
 Mark 3, 7. 8. Sept. for -jinn 2 K. 7, 13. 
 Is. 17, 12. Hdian. 4. 6. 11. Xen. Hell. 4. 
 4. 12. 
 
 3. Spec, the multitude, the people, popu 
 lace, Acts 14, 4 TO 77X7730? rrjs TroXecor. 19, 
 9. 21, 22. 36. Sept. and -pan Ez. 30, 15. 
 Hdian. 2. 7. 5. Xen. Mem. L 2. 42. 
 
 O), f. wa>, (irkrfivs, 7rX^3o?,) pr. 
 to make full ; hence 
 
 1 . Trans, to multiply, to increase, c. ace. 
 2 Cor. 9, 10. Heb. 6, 14 bis, TrX^vvcov 
 7r\rj%vv5> ere, quoted from Gen. 22, 17 where 
 Sept. for Heb. nSnx nsnn , of which 
 Hebrew idiom this is an imitation ; comp. 
 Gen. 3, 16. 16, 10. Winer 5 46. 7. Gesen. 
 Lehrg. p. 778. Pass. 77X773 vvopai, to be 
 multiplied, increased, e. g. in number, Acts 
 6, 7 Kal eVXrySufeTo 6 dpt3/*oj. 7, 17. 9, 31. 
 Sept. for fi2i Deut. 11, 21. Also in mag 
 nitude, extent, Matt. 24, 12 TrXrySvi-S^at 
 TTJV dvopiav. Acts 12, 24. Sept. for nan 
 Gen. 7, 17. 18. With dat. of person, to Ye 
 multiplied to any one, to abound to liim, 
 1 Pet. 1, 2 X^P ls VILIV Kal (Iprjvrf Tr\rftvv- 
 3ei 7. 2 Pet. 1, 2. Jude 2. 
 
 2. Intrans. to multiply oneself, to increase; 
 Acts 6, 1 Tr\rfiw6vTG>v ru>v jua3^Tcov. Sept. 
 for nan Ex. 1, 20; a? 1 ! 1 Sam. 14, 19. 
 Theophr. C. PI. 1. 19. 5* Hdian. 3. 8. 14. 
 
 irKrf^sa), see 771/^77X77/11. 
 
 7r\r}KT / r)<?, ov , 6, (77X770-0-0),) a striker, 
 one apt to strike, a quarreler, 1 Tim. 3, 3. 
 Tit. 1, 7. Plut. Marcell. 1. id. Pyrrh. 30. 
 
 TrXTjf^/jivpa, as, TJ, (77X77?, fjivpo), or pro 
 longed from 77Xr]/za, 77X77^77, comp. Buttm. 
 Ausf. Sprachl. ^ 7. no. 17,) the flow of the 
 sea, tide, flood-tide ; and hence flood, inun 
 dation, Luke 6, 48, comp. Matt. 7, 27. 
 Hesych. Tr\r)iJ.p.vpa TO opp.Tjfjia TTJS SaXucr- 
 0-775, 77 enippvcris. Anthol. Gr. II. p. 135. 
 Plut. Romul. 3. 
 
 f/V, prep, and adv. (contn wXtov,) pr. 
 more than, over and above ; hence besides, 
 except, but. 
 
 1 In the middle of a clause, e. g. a) 
 
590 
 
 Prep. c. gen. besides, except, Mark 12, 32 
 OVK fcrTiv aXXos irXrjv OVTOV, tliere is no 
 other besides him, but he. John 8, 10. Acts 
 
 8. 1 irdvTfS . . . 7T\T]l> T<OV aTTOcrrdXcOl/. 15, 
 
 28. 27, 22. Sept. for laisa Deut. 4, 35 ; 
 CEX Is. 45, 14. So Pol Y. 54. 4. Plut. 
 MOT. II. p. 32. Xen. An, 1. 9. 9. b) Adv. 
 or Conj. but ; so before on, Acts 20, 23 
 fir) (Idas, 7T\f)v OTI TO Trvtvp-a KT\. except 
 that, pr. knowing nothing more than that ; 
 com p. Buttm. 146. n. 2. So ir\r)v OTI 
 Dion. Hal. de Comp. Verbor. p. 176. 
 
 2. Adv. at the beginning of a clause, i. q. 
 much more, rather, besides, passing over 
 into an adversative particle, i. q. but rather, 
 but yet, nevertheless; Matt. 11, 22. 24 ir\r)v 
 \ey<a vp.lv. 1 8, 7. 26, 39. 64. Luke 6, 24. 
 35. 10, 11. 14. 20. 11, 41. 12, 31. 13, 33. 
 [17,1.] 18,8. 19,27. 22, 21. 42. 23,28. 
 1 Cor. 11, 11. Phil. 1, 18. 3, 16. 4, 14. Rev. 
 2,25. Sept. and Cfis Num. 22, 35. Judg. 4, 
 
 9. So Hdian. 1. 12! 6. Xen. An. 1. 8. 25. 
 Also where the -writer returns after a 
 digression to a previous topic, Eph. 5, 33, 
 comp. v. 25. 28. (Pol. 11. 17. 1.) Once 
 corresponding to p.ev, Luke 22, 22 ; comp. 
 in p.fv no. 1. b. 
 
 TrXTJpTjf, f os, ovs, 6, f], adj. (irXeos ,) full, 
 Jilled. 
 
 1. Pr. of hollow vessels, foil, by a gen. 
 of that of or with which any thing is full, 
 expr. or impl. Buttm. 132. 10. a. Mark 6, 
 43 KOI ypav KXaer/xdrcai/ Sa)Se*ca Kofpivovs 
 ir\r)pfis. 8, 19 ; impl. Matt. 14, 20. 15, 37. 
 Sept. for xbE Num. 14, 20. Deut. 6, 11. 
 So Hdian. 3/13. 9. Xen. An. 2. 3. 10. 
 Of a surface, full, fully covered, c. gen. 
 Luke 5, 12 dvrjp TrXrjprjs XeVpay. Sept. 
 and Xba 2 K. 6, 17. 7, 15. So Xen. An. 
 1. 5. 1 TTfdiov d\lsiv%iov TrXJJpey. OZc. 4. 8. 
 
 2. Trop. full, Jilled, fully imbued, furnish 
 ed, abounding in any thing, c. gen. Luke 4, 
 1 et Acts 7, 55 TrXrjprjs Tvvtv^aros ayiov. 
 John 1, 14. Acts 6, 3. 5. 8. 9, 36 TrX^? 
 dycftuv tpyuv. 11, 24. 13, 10. 19, 28. 
 Sept. and !*>.* Is. 51, 20. Jer. 5,27. Dem. 
 1445. 13. Xen. Cyr. 7. 2. 13. 
 
 3. Trop. full, complete, perfect. Mark 4, 
 28 (Tiros n\T]pT]s. 2 John 8 /aicrSoy TrXrjprjs. 
 Sept. and N?a Gen. 41, 7. 22. Ruth 2, 12. 
 Dem. 776. 9. Xen. An. 7. 5. 5 
 
 >, rjora), (jr\f)pr)s, < 
 pr. to bear or bring out fully, in full meas 
 ure ; hence 
 
 1 . Of persons, to give full assurance, to 
 persuade fully ; Pass, to be fully assured, per- 
 maded; Rom. i, 21 TrXrjpo^opij Sety, OTI KT\. 
 
 14,5. [Col. 4, 12.] Sept. for xba Ecc. 8, 11. 
 Clem. Rom. Homil. 11. 17. Ctesias Ex 
 cerpt. 38 TToXXots ovv Xoyois KOI opxois 77X17- 
 po(poprj(TavTfs Meyd/Svoi>. Isocr. Trapez. 6. 
 p. 17. 8, si lect. sana. 
 
 2. Of things, to make fully assured, to 
 give full proof of, to accomplish fully ; c. ace. 
 2 Tim. 4, 5 TTJV SiaKoviav crov Tr\r)po<$>6pi]<rov. 
 Pass. v. 17. (Comp. Acts 12, 25. Rom. 15, 
 19.) Pass. Luke 1. 1 Trepi TU>V TTfir\r)po<po- 
 prj/jifvcav ev rjp.lv Trpayfj.d.Ta>v, of those things 
 (which are) fully assured among us, are 
 fully believed. See Bleek on Heb. 6, 11. 
 
 TT XlJpO^Opla, as, rj, (irXvpofpopfv,) full 
 assurance, firm persuasion, 1 Thess. 1, 5 eV 
 TrXrjpofpopia TroXX^. Col. 2, 2. Heb. 6, 11 
 TrX. TTJS e\Tri8os- 10, 22. Not found in pro 
 fane writers. 
 
 7r\rjpOK>, <>, f. wo-co, (Tr\f]pr]s,~) 1. to 
 make full, to fill, to fill up ; e. g. a vessel, 
 hollow place, or the like, Pass. Matt. 13, 48 
 T}V, ore (irXnpdftr) sc. TJ crayrjvr]. Luke 3, 5 
 Trao-a (pdpay irXrjpui^TjO-fTai, quoted from Is. 
 40, 4 where Sept. for Kttji . Trop. c. ace. 
 Matt. 23, 32 TrX^poxrare TO /xe rpoj/ TU>V ira- 
 Tepcw vfj.o)i> i. e. the measure of their sins ; 
 comp. in dva7T\rjp6a> lett. a. Sept. pr. for 
 ! Jer. 13, 12. 2 K. 4, 4. So Hdian. 3. 
 9. 10. Diod. Sic. 2. 39. Xen. Eq. 1. 5. 
 Genr. of a place, to fill, by diffusing any thing 
 throughout ; c. ace. Acts 2, 2 rjx os rXij- 
 paxTfv i i\ov TOV OIKOV. With fK c. gen. of 
 thing / o:n or with which, John 12, 3 rj 8e 
 oiKia frrXrfpaiZr] tK TTJS 6(rp.rjS, Comp. Matth. 
 ^ 574. p. 1133. Trop. c. ace. et gen. Acts 
 5, 28 TTtTrXrjpdiKaTe TTJV Ifpovo-aXrjfjL TTJS 8i8a- 
 XT)S vp-av, comp. Winer j 30. 8. b. Sept. 
 and Kb53 2 Chr. 7, 1. Hagg. 2, 8. (Comp. 
 Liban. Epist. p. 721 Trcicras [TroXeiy] eVeVXrj- 
 cras Tcav vnep r]p.Sav \6yo>v.) Trop. TrXnpovv 
 TTJV KapSiav TWOS, to fill the heart of any one, 
 to take possession of it, John 16, 6. Acts 
 5, 3. 
 
 2. Trop. to fill, i. q. to furnish abundantly 
 with any thing, to impart richly, to imbue 
 ivith, c. ace. and often also with an adjunct 
 of that with which any one is filled or fur 
 nished. E. g. a) With ace. and gen. 
 Matth. ^ 352. Acts 2, 28 TrX^pdxretr pe tv- 
 (ppoo-vvrjs. 13, 52. Luke 2, 40 ir\r]po{ip.evov 
 a-o^ias. Rom. 15, 13. 14. 2 Tim. 1, 4. 
 Phil. 1,11 Rec. see end of lett. d. So 
 Hdian. 4. 5. 17. Plut. Fab. Max. 5. b) 
 With ace. and dat. or Pass. c. dat. Rom. 1, 
 29 7Tfn\r]pa>fj.fi ovs Trdcrrj aSt/a a. 2 Cor. 7, 
 4. Comp. Matth. 5 352. n. So 2 Mace. 7, 
 21 ; pr. Diod. Sic. 2. 39. Eurip. Here. 
 Fur. 372. c) With V c. dat. instead of 
 
591 
 
 the simple dat. Matth. $ 396. n. 2. Winer 
 {31. 6. Eph. 5, 18 77Xr7poOo-3t tv irvfiiuart. 
 d) With ace. simply, e. g. TT\. -nao-av xpeiav 
 V/JL.WV, i. q. to supply fully, Phil. 4, 19. Also 
 irX. TO. irdvra Eph. 1, 23 et 4, 10, spoken of 
 Christ as filling the universe with his in 
 fluence, presence, power. Hence Pass. 
 jrXrjpoC/iat absol. to be filled, full, to be 
 fully furnished, to abound, Phil. 4, 18. Col. 
 2, 10 tv aura i. e. in Christ, in his Vork. 
 Eph. 3, 19 Iva 77Xr7pw3^Tf (Is Trdv TO Tr\npa>- 
 fta TOW 3eoO, unto all the fulness of God. 
 that the fulness of all heavenly gifts and 
 graces from God may rest upon you. Also 
 Pass. c. ace. Col. 1, 9 Iva TrX^pwS^re TTJV 
 fTriyvo)o~iv KT\. Phil. 1, 11 TT(TT\T]p<Cfj,tvoi 
 Kafnrov (Rec. Kaprraiv) SiKaiocrvvrjs. See 
 Buttm. $ 134. 5. Klihner 281. 3. Winer 
 $ 40. 1. 
 
 3. to fulfil, to perform fully. a) Spoken 
 of duty, obligation, c. ace. Matt. 3, 15 77X77- 
 pSxrat, irdo~av ducatocrvvriv. Acts 12, 25 77X77- 
 poxravrfs TTJV diaKOviav. Rom. 8, 4. 13, 8. 
 Gal. 5, 14. Col. 4, 17. 89 1 Mace. 2, 55. 
 Hdian. 3. 11. 9 77. tVroXdy. Pol. 4. 63. 3. 
 b) Of a declaration, prophecy, to fulfil, to 
 accomplish, c. ace. Acts 13, 27 Taj (powas j 
 TU>V irpoffrriTwv . . . eVXrjpaxraz . 3,18. Often- I 
 er Pass, to be fulfilled, accomplished, to have 
 an accomplishment : Matt. 2, 17 TOTC 77X77- 
 pwSrj TO prfilv. 27, 9. 26, 54. Mark 15, 28 
 VX77po)377 77 ypafptj. Luke 1, 20. 4,21. [21, 
 22.] 24, 44. Acts 1,16. James 2, 23. Here 
 belongs the frequent phrase ii/aTrX^pwS?;, 
 for which see in Iva II. d. Matt. 1, 22. > 
 2, 15. 4, 14. 21, 4. 26, 56. [27, 35.] Mark | 
 14, 49. John 12,38. 13,18. 15,25. 17,12. j 
 18, 9. 32. 19, 24. 36. Also OTTW? 77X77- 
 p3Jj, see in OTTOS II. 2. Matt. 2,23. 8, 17. 
 12, 17. 13, 35. Sept. for xba i K. 2, 27. 
 
 2 Chr. 36, 21. So Hdian. 2. 7. 9 77. ras 
 
 4. to fulfil, to bring to a full end, to ac 
 complish, to complete. a) Pass, of time, to 
 be fulfilled, completed, ended ; Mark 1, 15 77?- 
 77Xi7pjTat 6 Kaipos. Luke 21, 24 a^pt 77X77- 
 pco3wo-i Kmpoi. John 7, 8. Acts 7, 23. 30. 
 9, 23. 24, 27. Once Act Rev. 6, 11 Grb. 
 &>? ov Tr\rjpuo-ovrai SC. rov Kaipov \. xpovov, 
 comp. also in lett. b. Sept. and xbn Gen. 
 25. 24. 29, 21. So Tob. 8, 20. Jos. Ant. 
 6. 4. 1 77Xr7pa>3eVTO? aurov sc. rov xpovov. 
 6) Of a business, work, to accomplish, to 
 finish, to complete, c. ace. Luke 7, 1 V Se 
 tVXTjpwo-e 77dvra Ta pi ifiaTa avrov. 9, 31. 
 Acts 13, 25. 14. 26 tls TO epyov. o tVXijpeo- 
 (rav. 19, 21. Rom. 15, 19 Trfn\r)p(oKfvai TO 
 rvayy(\iov, i. e. the preaching of the gospel. 
 Col. 1, 25. (Sept. and X^ 1 K. 1, 14. 
 
 Comp. Lat. implere me.ssem Pallad. Jun. 2.) 
 Rev. 6, 1 1 Rec. ewr 7rXr;pa)3aJcrt /cat ot o~uv- 
 SovXot, i. e. until their number is full, is 
 completed. So Xen. Mag. Eq. 1. 3. c) 
 Spec, to fill out, to complete, to make perfect, 
 c. ace. Matt. 5, 17, opp. (caroXiia-at. Phil. 2, 
 2 Tr\r]ptj)crare p.ov TTJV %apdv. 2 Thess. 1,11. 
 Pass, to be made full, complete, perfect, e. g. 
 I X apd John 3, 29. 15,11. 16,24. 17,13. 
 1 John 1, 4. 2 John 12; TO Trdarxa Luke 
 22, 16 ; imaKOT) 2 Cor. 10, 6 ; epya Rev. 3, 
 2. Of persons, Col. 4,12 t va o-rijrt reXctoi 
 icat 7Tfn\r]pu>p.tvoi tv Travrl SeXij/iart rou 3eov. 
 
 7r\7//)a)yLia, aros, TO, (TrX^po &j,) fulness, 
 filling. 
 
 1. Pr. fulness, that with which any thing 
 is filled, of which it is full, the contents ; 
 1 Cor. 10, 26. 28 77 yij Kal TO 7rXijpco/j.a av- 
 TTJS, i. e. all that it contains ; quoted from 
 Ps. 24, 1 where Sept. for N ba , as also 
 Ps. 50, 12. 96, 11. So Mark 8/20 TTOO-UV 
 cnrvpio tov TT\r]pu)fjMTa (cXatT/idro)!/ fjparf , 
 how many baskets full of fragments 1 i. q. 
 TroVas o-Trvpidas irXrjpeis, Winer } 34. 2. 
 So Philo Quod omnis prob. p. 871. c, of a 
 ship s ballast. Vit. Mos. p. 451, of the ani 
 mals in Noah s ark. Philostrat. Heroic. 10. 
 5 12, of the Greeks in the Trojan horse. 
 Spec, a filling up, a supplement, that which 
 fills up ; hence i. q. eVi /SXij/xa, a patch, 
 Matt. 9, 16. Mark 2, 21. 
 
 2. Trop. fulness, i. e.full measure, abun 
 dance, a) Genr. John 1, 16 t< roC 77X17- 
 paparos avrov. Eph. 3, 19 see in 
 
 no. 2. d. Eph. 4, 13. Col. 2, 9 TO 
 TTJS Seonjroy, i. e. the fulness, plenitude of 
 the divine perfections ; and so absol. Col. 
 1, 19. Rom. 15, 29 eV TrXTjpti/iart (v\oyias 
 TOV tvayy. i. e. in the full, abundant bless 
 ings of the gospel ; comp. Winer 1. c. So 
 of a state of fulness, abundance, opp. ijmj- 
 pa, Rom. 11, 12. b) Of persons, full 
 number, complement, multitude. Rom. 11, 
 25 TO TrXjypco/ia TG>V e Si/eov, i. e. the full 
 number, all the multitude of the Gentiles. 
 So of a ship s complement, creu\ Pol. 1. 21 
 1. Xen. Hell. 5. 1. 11 ; of the inhabitants 
 of a city, Plato Rep. 371. e. 
 
 3. Meton. fulness, for that which is filled 
 with any thing, i. q. TO Tr(ir\rjpa>p.fvov ; e. g. 
 of the church of Christ, Eph. 1, 23 17 ( KK\T]- 
 tri a, rjris o~Tt TO crco/ia atiroC, TO TrXijpeo/na 
 TOV ra irdvra tv irao-i ir\r]povp.(vov, comp. 
 in rrXijpoa) no. 2. d. So of a ship as filled 
 with men, Luc. V. H. 2. 37 0770 8vo irXvpca- 
 pdrav ep-dxovro. ib. 2. 38. Also Philo do 
 praem. et poen. p. 920, of the soul : yevo- 
 p(vr) 8f 7rXi7pw/i dpertav. 
 
 4. Trop. fulfilment, a fulfilling, full per- 
 
592 
 
 formance, :. q. rj TrXijpaxns, e. g. TOV 
 Rom. 13, 10; comp. TrX^pdca no. 3. a. 
 Philo de Abr. p. 387 TrX^pw/ia f\Tri8a>v. 
 
 5. Of time, fulness, full end, completion, 
 full period ; Gal. 4, 4 ^X3c TO TrX^p&tyia TOV 
 Xpovov. Eph. 1,10 TrX. TCOI> Kaipuiv. Hdot. 
 3. 22 oydtoKovra 8 eVea 077? TrXiypco/Lta ai/Spt 
 
 tOZ/, adv. (rrXrjo ios, TreXar, 7reXdco.) 
 near, near Z>?/; c. gen. John 4, 5 TT. TOV 
 Ywpt ov, comp. Buttm. $ 146. 3. Sept. for 
 >SX Deut. 11, 30 ; Via Deut. 1,1. (Hdian. 
 1/7. 4. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 6.) Trop. emu 
 Tr\T)o- iov TIVOS, to be near any one, to be 
 neighbour to him, i. q. 6 TrX^criov, Luke 10, 
 29. 36 ; see Winer $ 18. fin. With the 
 art. 6 7T\r)o-iov, one near, a neighbour, 
 fellow, another person of the same nature, 
 country, class. a) Genr. a fellow-man, 
 any other member of the human family ; so 
 in the precept, dya^o-ei? TOP Tr\r)o-iov trov 
 is o-fctvToV, quoted from Lev. 19, 18 where 
 Sept. for 5D, Matt. 19, 19. 22, 39. Mark 
 12, 31. 33. Luke 10, 27. Rom. 13, 9. 10. 
 Gal. 5, 14. Eph. 4, 25. James 2, 8. [4, 12.] 
 Heb. 8, 11 Rec. Sept. and ?D Ex. 20, 17. 
 Deut. 5, 19 sq. So Luc. Contempl. 15. 
 Pol. 12. 4. 13. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 2. /3) 
 One of the same people or country, a fellow- 
 countryman, Acts 7, 27, comp. v. 24. 26. 
 y) One of the same faith, a fellow- Christian, 
 Rom. 15. 2. S) From the Heb. a friend, 
 associate, like 51! , opp. 6 e ^Spo y, Matt. 5, 
 43. So 5D , Sept. <iAos, Job 2, 11. 19, 21. 
 Prov. 17, 17. 
 
 TrXfja fJioVJJ, ijs, T], (7ri ^7rXr;/it,) a filling, 
 satisfying, espec. with food, Sept. for 53iU 
 Ex. 16, 8 ; ??fc Ex. 16, 3. JEl V. H. 9. 
 26. Xen. Ag. 5. 1. In N. T. gem. fulness, 
 a satisfying, satiety ; Col. 2, 23 irpos TrX>;- 
 a-fJiovTjv o-apKos. So Plato Legg. 837. c, TTJV 
 rrept TO cru>p.a. . .irXr]<riJ.ovr)V. 
 
 7rX^cr<r&) v. -TTto, f. <a, to strike, to 
 smite, Palaeph. 12. 2. Xen. An. 5. 8. 2, 4. 
 In N. T. from the Heb. to smite, to plague, 
 to afflict with disease, calamity, evil, Pass. 
 Rev. 8, 12 fir\r]yr] TO TQ ITOV TOV ^Xi ov. 
 Sept. for nsn Ex. 9, 32. 33. Ps. 102, 5. 
 Comp. 7raTao-o-co no. 2. b. 
 
 TrXoidptov, ov, TO, (dim. TrXoIoi ,) a 
 small vessel, boat, spoken of the fishing 
 boats on the lake of Galilee, Mark 3, 9 
 comp. 4, 1 . Mark 4, 36. John 6, 22 bis. 23. 
 21,8. Aristoph. Ran. 139. Diod. Sic.2. 55. 
 
 TrXotOf, ov, TO , (7rXta,) a ship, vessel, 
 genr. Acts 20, 13. 38. 21, 2. 3. 27, 2. 6. 
 10 sq. James 3, 4. al. In the Gospels spok- 
 
 en also of the small fishing vessels (boats) 
 on the lake of Galilee, Matt. 4, 21. 22. Mark 
 4, 1. 36. Luke 5, 2. 3. John 6, 17. 19. al. 
 Sept. for fi??N Gen. 49, 13. Jon. 1, 3. 4. 5. 
 Luc. D. Deor. 26. 2. Xen. CEc. 8. IT, 
 dXietmm TrXoTa Xen. Hell. 5. 1.23. -f- 
 
 TrXoo?, contr. TrXoC?, gen. dou, ov , 
 but in later writers also gen. rrXdos, Acts 
 27, 9 Arr. Peripl. Eryth. p. 176, see Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 453 ; a sailing, navigation, voy 
 age, Acts 21, 7. 27, 9. 10. Wisd. 14, 1. 
 m. V. H. 2. 14. Xen. An. 6. 1. 33. 
 
 7T/Voucr09, t a, ov, (TrXovToj,) rich, 
 wealthy, in N. T. only in masc. 
 
 1. Pr. Matt. 27, 57 ai/SpwTror TrXovo-toi 
 drro Apt/iaSai ay. Luke 12, 16. 16, 1. 19. 
 Luke 14, 12 p-r]8e yeiTovas TtXovcriovs. 18, 
 23. 19, 2. Sept. for "HCS 2 Sam. 12, 1. 
 Prov. 28, 11. So Palaeph. 35. 2. Hdian. 1. 
 8. 10. Xen. Ath. 2. 18. Subst. 6 TrXov- 
 <rios, Plur. ot TrXovo-tot, a rich man, the 
 rich, Matt. 19, 23. 24 ^ TrXoutrioK tls T. j3a<r. 
 TOU 3. eiVeXSelfc Mark 10, 25. 12, 41 iroX- 
 Xot TrXovo-iot. Luke 6, 24. 16, 21. 22. 18, 
 25. 21, 1. 1 Tim. 6, 17. James 1, 10. 11. 
 2, 6. 5, 1. Rev. 6, 15. 13, 16. Sept. and 
 "HE? Prov. 22, 2. 7. Jer. 9, 22. So Luc. 
 Kron. 15. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 37, 39. 
 
 2. Trop. rich, prosperous, wanting in no 
 thing, 2 Cor. 8, 9. Rev. 2, 9. 3, 17. Also 
 rich in any thing, abounding in, with V 
 C. dat. Eph. 2, 4 3e6j TrXovo-tos o>j> eV e Xeet. 
 James 2, 5 TrX. eV jrio-Tet. 
 
 TrXoucr/ft)?, a dv. (TrXouo-ior,) richly, 
 abundantly, largely, Col. 3, 16. 1 Tim. 6, 
 17. Tit. 3, 6. 2 Pet. 1, 11. Hdot. 2. 44. 
 Philo de Alleg. II. p. 100. 
 
 7rXoUT0), oj, f. ?;o-a>, (TrXovTOS,) 1. to 
 be rich, absol. Luke 1, 53 TrXouTovrras dnf- 
 o-TftXe Kfvovs. 1 Tim. 6, 9. With drro of 
 source, Rev. 18, 15; Rev. 18, 3. 19. 
 Sept. for "il?S Jer. 5, 27. Hos. 12. 8. 
 Judith 15, 6. ^El. V. H. 2. 11. Xen. An. 
 7. 7. 28; c. dno Luc. D. Deor. 16. 1. 
 
 2. Trop. to be rich, prosperous, wanting 
 in nothing; e. g. ets Ttra, Luke 12, 21 /LUJ 
 TrXovToij/ els Sedf, not rich toward God, i. e. 
 laying up no treasure in heaven. Absol. 
 1 Cor. 4, 8. 2 Cor. 8, 9. Rev. 3, 17. 18. 
 Also to be rich in any thing, to abound, 
 C. (V, 1 Tim. 6, 18 TrXoureiJ ev tpyois dya- 
 So?s. Absol. Rom. 10, 12 Kvpios TrXourwv 
 (Is Trdvras, i. e. rich in gifts and spiritual 
 blessings towards all. 
 
 TrXoyr/^a, f. io-o), (TrXovTos.) to make 
 rich, to enrich ; in N. T. only trop. to bestow 
 richly, to furnish abundantly ; 2 Cor. 6, 10 
 
593 
 
 us WTW^OI, TroAXovs 8e TrXouTifoiTey. Pass, 
 /o be enriched, richly furnished, c. eV iravri 
 1 Cor. 1, 5. 2 Cor. 9, 11. Sept. Prov. 13, 
 7. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 9. Pr. Sept. for 
 Gen. 14, 23. Xen. Ag. 1.17. 
 
 7rXof)TO9, ou, 6, (kindr. TroXuy, 
 also TO TrXovroy in Mss. see Winer \ 9. n. 2. 
 
 1. riches, wealth; Matt. 13,22 i; airarr] 
 TOV TrXovrov. Mark 4, 19. Luke 8, 14. 
 1 Tim. 6, 17. James 5, 2. Rev. 18, 16. 
 Melon, as a source of power and influence, 
 in ascriptions, Rev. 5, 12. Sept. for "icJS 
 1 K. 3, 11. Prov. 8, 18; -pri 28, 8; nn 
 Is. 30, 6. Hdian. 3. 14. 13. Luc. Tim. 5. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 44. 
 
 2. Trop. 6 TrXouTor TOU SeoO v. TOU Xpi- 
 oToO, i. e. the rich gifts and blessings im 
 parted from God or Christ, Phil. 4, 19. Eph. 
 3, 8. Also, good, prosperity, welfare, Rom. 
 11, 12 bis. Heb. 11, 26. 
 
 3. Trop. riches, richness, abundance, usu 
 ally before the genit. of another noun, where 
 it may be rendered as an adj. rich, abundant, 
 pre-eminent; Buttm. 138. n. 12. Winer 
 5 34. 2. Rom. 2, 4 TOV TT\OVTOV TOV xPW 
 tyros, i. q. his rich goodness. 2 Cor. 8, 2. 
 Eph. 1 , 7 TrX. rfs xdpiTos. 2, 7. Col. 2, 2. So 
 TrXovTos Trjy So^f i. e. the abundant, pre 
 eminent glory of God, as displayed in his 
 beneficence, Rom. 9, 23. Eph. 1, 18. 3, 16. 
 Col. 1, 27; comp. in &>|a no. 2. b. Rom. 
 11, 33 a> /3d3oy TT\OVTOV KOI (ro(j)[as Kal yi/d>- 
 <rewr, O the deep richness botk of wisdom 
 and knowledge . Plato Euth. 13. p. 1:2. a, 
 Tpv<pas vno TrXovTow Ttjs o-ocbtas. 
 
 7T\vv(O : f. wa>, to wash. In rinse, espec. 
 clothes, C. ace. Rev. 7, 14 trrXwav TUS OTO- 
 \as avTaiv. 22, 14. in Mss. Sept. for 033 
 Gen. 49, 11. Ex. 19, 10. Artemid. 2. 4. 
 Plato Charm. 161. e, TO favrov ipariov. 
 But Xen. Eq. 5. 7 ovpav KOI ^air^j/ TrXweii/. 
 
 TrvevfACl, aTor, TO, from irvi co to breathe. 
 
 1. A breathing, breath. 1. Of the mouth 
 or nostrils, a breathing, blast, 2 Thess. 2, 
 8 Trvfvp.a TOV oropjiTos, breath of the mouth, 
 the destroying power of God ; so Sept. and 
 tnraiu rvn is. 11,4; comp. Ps. 33, 6. Of 
 the vital breath, Rev. 11, 11 irvevpa >)?, 
 breath of life ; so Sept. and Heb. n^n mn 
 Gen. 6, 17. 7, 15. 22. Hdian. 2. 13.~9. 
 Diod. Sic. 2. 12. Xen. Yen. 7. 3. 
 
 2. breath of air, air in motion, a breeze, 
 blast, the u-ind; John 3, 8 TO irvvp.a, orrov 
 3e Xet, -KVfi. Heb. 1,76 TTOivv TOVS dyye\ovs 
 avTov iTvtviMTa, quoted from Ps. 104, 4 
 where Sept. for rpn ; as also Gen. 8, 1. 
 Is. 7, 2. Hdian. 5. 4. 22. Dem. 48. 24. 
 Xen. An. 6. 1. 14. 
 
 38 
 
 II. The spirit of man, i. e. 1. The vital 
 spirit, life, soul, Lat. anima, the principle 
 of life residing in the breath, breathed into 
 man from God and again returning to God, 
 comp. Gen. 2, 7. Ecc. 12, 7. Ps. 104, 29. 
 Matt. 27, 50 a<^>JjKe TO jrvtv^a lie gore up 
 the ghost, expired. John 19, 30. Luke 23, 
 46 (is ^flpdr o~ou TrapaS^cro/xat TO nvfvp,u 
 fjiov, comp. Ps. 31, 5. Acts 7, 59. Luke 8, 
 55 eVecrrpe^e TO nvev/JLa avTrjs nal dveo-Tij. 
 James 2, 26. Rev. 13, 15. Sept. and nn 
 Gen. Ecc. Ps. 11. cc. Gen. 45, 27. Judg. 
 
 15, 19. al. So Ecclus. 38, 23. Eurip. Hec. 
 571 dfbrJKf Trvevfia. Diod. Sic. 3. 40 TO irvfv- 
 fj.a TJJ dovcrr) (bvo-fi TraXiv dvranfO uKav. An- 
 thol. Gr. IV. p. 284. Trop. John 6, 63 
 bis, TO nvtv/jid fCTTi TO O>OTTOIOVV KT\. i. e. 
 as the spirit in man giveth life to the body, 
 so my words are spirit and life to the soul. 
 Also 1 Cor. 15, 45 tyevfTo . . . A8a/x fls 
 "^ V X*1 V i^o-av 6 Se t<rx- ASa/i [eort] fls 
 TTvevfj.a faoTroiovv, a life-giving spirit, i. e. 
 a spirit of life, as raising the bodies of his 
 followers from the dead into immortal life ; 
 comp. Phil. 3, 21. 
 
 2. The rational spirit, mind, soul, Lat. 
 animus. a) Genr. as opp. to the body 
 and animal spirit ; 1 Thess. 5. 23 TO Trvfvpa 
 teal T) ^vx>] xal TO erco/xa, as a periphrasis 
 for the whole man. Luke 1, 47 p.ryuXiWt 17 
 ^VXTJ fJ-ov TOV Kvpiov, Ka\ ^yaXXi ao-e TO Trvev- 
 fj.a fj.ov. Heb. 4, 12 axpt [ifpio-pov ^VXTJS 
 Tf Koi irvfv^aTos. Rom. 2, 29. 8, 10 TO o-co- 
 fia vtxpov ... TO 8e nvtvp-a fw^. 1 Cor. 5, 
 3 eyco u>s a.irtav Tia <ra>p,aTi, Ttapuv 8e Tt5 
 TrvfvfiaTi. V. 4. 5 fls oXeSpoi TTJS crapKos Iva 
 TO irvtvpa o-co3fl. 6, 20. 7, 34. 2 Cor. 7. 1. 
 Phil. 3, 3. Col. 2, 5. 1 Pet. 4, 6. Heb. 12, 
 9 o iraTTjp TUV wevp.aTO>v, opp. 01 TraTepej 
 TTJS a-apKos. (Comp. Sept. and nil Num. 
 
 16, 22. 27, 16; also Zech. 12", 1.) So 
 where ^vx 1 ? or ""^M are n t expressed ; 
 Rom. 8, 16 QUTO TO Trvfv/J.a (TOV 3fov) o-vfj.- 
 /lapTvpei TW irvfVfJiaTt rjp.u>v the divine spirit 
 itself testifielh with or to our spirit., mind. 
 Gal. 6, 18. 2 Tim. 4, 22. Philem. 25. 
 Also Rom. 1 , 9. John 4, 23. 24 irpoo-Kwelv 
 TW naTpl (V TTVfvpaTi Kal dX;3f ia in spirit 
 and in truth, with a sincere mind ; comp. 
 Phil. 3, 3, and see in dXijSeta no. 1. a. So 
 Wisd. 2, 3 opp. o-c5/za. 16, 14 opp. ^vx^- 
 Plato Ax. 370. C, ei p.r) TI 3fToi> ovruis evrjv 
 TTvtvpa TTJ ifrvxjf- b) As the seat of the 
 affections, emotions, passions of various 
 kinds ; e. g. of humility, Matt. 5, 3 TTTOO^OI 
 TW 7rvfvfj.aTi poor in spirit, lowly in mind. 
 (Comp. Sept. and mi Ps. 34, 19.) So of 
 enjoyment, quiet, 1 Cor. 16, 18 dvtnavo-av 
 yap TO epov Trvevpa. 2 Cor. 2, 12. 7, 13; 
 
594 
 
 Trvevaa 
 
 of joy, Luke 10, 21 ^-yaXXido-aro TW irvev- 
 fj.ari, 6 irja-ovs. Of ardour, fervour, Acts 
 18,25 et Rom. 12, 11 feW T<U irvev^ari. 
 Luke 1, 17 tv Trvev/icrrt KOI dvvdfifi "HXi ou, 
 
 1. e. in the powerful, energetic spirit of 
 Elijah ; comp. Ecclus. 48, 1 dvea-rr) HX/ay 
 7Tpo<pr)T7]f u>s 7Tvp. Kal 6 \6yos avTov ats 
 Xa/i7ray fKaifTO, and v. 12 *cai EXuraie eVe- 
 77X170-377 Trvev/iOToy avrov. Of perturbation, 
 e. g. from grief, indignation, Mark 3. 12 
 uva(TTfvdas T Trvevfiari avTov. John 1 1 , 
 33. 13, 21. Acts 17, 16 irapa&vfTo TO 
 Trvfvfjia avTov ev avrco. Comp. Sept. and 
 nsn Gen. 26, 35. Is. 65, 14. So Wisd. 5, 
 3. c) As referring to disposition, feel 
 ings, temper of mind, Engl. spirit. Luke 9, 
 55 OVK oi Sare otov Trvevnaros tare v/j.fiy. 
 Rom. 8, 15 TTvevp-a SovXei ay a slavish spirit, 
 opp. TO TTV. uio3eo-iay, see below in III. D. 
 
 2. e. Rom. 11,8. 1 Cor. 4, 21 et Gal. 6, 1 
 TTI>. TrpgoYf/Toy, a mild, gentle spirit. 1 Cor. 
 1-1, 14 TO TrvfvjJLO. (jiov TrpovfvxfTai, 6 8f vovs 
 fj.ov (iKapnos e o-Tt, my spirit prays, i. e. mf 
 own feelings thus find utterance in prayer, 
 but what I mean is not understood by ol.iers. 
 v. 15 bis. 16. 2 Cor. 4, 13. 11, 4. J2, 18. 
 Eph. 4, 23. Phil. 1, 27. 2, 1. 2 Ti.,i. 1, 7. 
 1 Pet. 3, 4. Comp. Sept. and nH Ez. 11, 
 19. 18, 31. Num. 5, 30. bo Soph. OZd. 
 Col. 612. d) As implying will, counsel, 
 purpose; Matt. 26,41 et Mark 14,38 TO 
 fj.tv TTVfvua 7rpo 3vp.oi>, TJ be crapt- dcrlSivrjs. 
 Acts 18,5 Rec. o-wei ^e/o TIM TJWv^aTt. 19, 
 21 3eTo IlavXoy eV TW irv. 20, 22 see in 
 6Vto no. 2. b. /3. Sept. and rnn 1 Chr. 5, 
 26. Ezra 1, 1. So 1 Esdr. 2, 2. e) As 
 including the understanding, intellect, Mark 
 
 2, 8 fmyvovs TW ni>fi>fj.ari. Luke 1, 80 et 2, 
 40 TO Sf 7rai8iov rjv^ave Kal fKparaiovro 
 nvcvfiari TrKijpovfj.evoi <ro(pias. 1 Cor. 2, 11. 
 12 Ttv. TOV /cdoTtou, comp. irv. TOV av^p. in 
 v. 11. Sept. and "11 Ex. 28, 3. Job 20, 
 
 3. Is. 29, 24. So Plato Ax. 370. c. f) 
 For irvfvfj.a signifying the mind or disposi 
 tion as affected by the Holy Spirit, see below 
 in III. D. 2. e. 
 
 III. A spirit, i. e. a simple, incorporeal, 
 immaterial being, possessing higher capaci 
 ties than man in his present state. 
 
 A) Of created spirits. 1. The human 
 spirit, soul, after its departure from the body 
 and as existing in a separate state ; Heb. 
 12, 23 TrpocreX^XuSetTe . . . ivvf vpcKn 8iKaia>v 
 rfTeXeiw/zei/o)! , i. e. to the spirits of the just 
 advanced to perfect happiness and glory. 
 1 Pet. 3, 19 ev a> KOL rols ti> (pyXaKy Trvtv- 
 uaa-i TTOpev^ds et(t]pv(i>, in which [spiritual 
 nature] also he once preached [through Noah] 
 to those spirits now in prison, comp. 2 Pet. 
 
 2, 4. 5 ; others refer this to the supposed 
 descent of Christ into Hades after his cruci 
 fixion, and his there preaching the gospel. 
 Acts 23, 8.- So of the soul of a person re 
 appearing after death, a spirit, ghost, Luke 
 
 24, 37. 39. Acts 23, 9. 
 
 2. an evil spirit, demon, i. q. ftaipoviov, 
 Sa//iwi>, q. v. mostly with the epithet dxcftdp- 
 TOV, see in d/cdSapToy no. 3. E. g. nveiipa 
 a/cdS. Matt. 10, 1. 12, 43. Mark 1, 23. 26. 
 27. 3, 11. 30. 5, 2. 8. 13. 6, 7. 7, 25. 9, 
 
 25. Luke 4, 36. 6,18. 8,29. 9,42. 11,24. 
 Acts 5, 16. 8, 7. Rev. 16, 13. 18,2. Also 
 KV. daifioviov uKa^apTov Luke 4, 33 ; irvtv- 
 (MTa Saipoviaiv Rev. 16, 14; Trvtvpu rroirrf- 
 pov Acts 19,15. 16, and ra i^fvp-ara oinjpa 
 v. 12. 13. Matt. 12.46. LUKB 7, 21. 8,2. 
 11, 26; irvev[*a aXaXoj/ Mark &, 17. 25; 
 nvevfj.a dij-lifvei^s, a spirit of infirmity, caus 
 ing discdse, Lu.ve 13, 11, comp. v. 16 ; TTV. 
 7nj3u>i>o,, a spirit of divination, a soothsaying 
 tem^n, Acts 16, 16. 18. Absol. Matt. 8, 
 Id. Mark 9, 20. Luke 9, 39. 10, 20. Eph. 
 
 2, 2 TOV apxoi>Ta Trjs ft-ovaias TOV dtpos, TOV 
 irvevp.aTos TOV tvepyovvros KT\. i. C. Satan, 
 the gen. irvfupaTos being an anacoluthon 
 for TO TTvevp-a. Others here take ToO Trvev- 
 p.aTos in the sense of disposition, as above in 
 II. 2. c ; see Winer 5 65. 8. Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 657 a?r6 TOV Scmzi/a cal TCOV irvtv- 
 HaTtov avTov. p. 729 TCI TSV. TOV BeXidp. 
 
 3. Less often in Plur. of angels, as God s, 
 ministering spirits ; Heb. 1, 14 ov^t irdvres 
 <ri XfLTovpyiKa TTVfvfJMTa . Rev. 1 , 4 driro 
 TCOI/ fTTTa TTVfvp.aTcav a (O~TIV fva>Triov TOV 
 SpoVou avrov. i. e. the seven archangels, see 
 in dp^dyyeXoy. Rev. 3. 1. 4,5. 5.6. Jos. 
 Ant. 4. 6. 3 ayyfXos . . . 3eToi/ Trvevfia. 
 
 B) Of God in reference to his immateri 
 ality ; John 4, 24 TrwOp-a 6 Seds. 
 
 C) Of Christ in his exalted spiritual na 
 ture, in distinction from his human nature. 
 1 Pet. 3, 18 SaiwwSeij p.ev crap*/, 010770117- 
 Seiy oe Tn/ev/iaTi, referring to the spiritual 
 exaltation of Christ after his resurrection to 
 be Head over all things to the church, comp. 
 Eph. 1, 20. 21. 22 ; in which spiritual (pre- 
 existent) nature also he preached (v. 19) 
 through Noah, see above in A. 1. Rom. 
 1 , 4 KUTCI TTVtvpa ayiaHTvinjs, opp. KOTO (rdpica. 
 1 Tim. 3, 16 see in SIAOH OW no. 2. a. So 
 too some take nvevp.a aluviov in Heb. 9, 14, 
 in opp. to the perishable beasts in v. 13, 
 comp. 7, 16. 24; better, the Holy Spirit, the 
 divine influence, which rested on Jesus with 
 out measure and with an eternal efficacy ; 
 comp. John 3, 34, and see below in D. 2 b. 
 For 1 Cor. 15,45 see in II. 1 ; and 2 Cor 
 
 3, 17 see in D. 1. c. 
 
595 
 
 D) Of the Spirit of God, Heb. njrrj wi , 
 TP\J T 1 " 1 , in N. T. TO irvfvp.a TOV Seou 
 v. Kvpiov ; also TO nvtvp-a TO ayiov, the Holy 
 Spirit ; and absol. TO trvevp-a, the Spirit, KOT 
 (oxfiv ; called likewise the Spirit of Christ 
 as being sent or communicated by him after 
 his resurrection and ascension, e. g. TO nv. 
 Irja-ov Acts 16, 7; Xpiorou Rom. 8, 9. 
 1 Pet. 1, 11; iqo-oC Xp. Phil. 1, 19; TOV 
 Kvpiov 2 Cor. 3, 17 ; TOV viov 3eo{5 Gal. 4, 6. 
 For the Heb. usage, see Heb. Lex. art. tyr\ 
 no. 4. In N. T. this Spirit is every where 
 represented as in intimate union with God 
 the Father and Son, as proceeding from and 
 sent forth by them, as possessing the same 
 attributes and performing the same acts 
 with God the Father and Son. The pas 
 sages in N. T. in which irvevp.a is to be re 
 ferred to this signification, may be divided 
 into two classes, viz. those in which being, 
 intelligence, and agency are predicated of 
 the Spirit ; and meton. those in which the 
 effects and consequences of this agency are 
 spoken of. 
 
 1 . The Holy Spirit, as existing, as a di 
 vine agent, etc. 
 
 a) Joined with 6 3edr v. 6 irar^p, and 6 
 Xpioro ff, 6 Kvpios, 6 vios, with the same or 
 with different predicates. Matt. 28, 19 /3a- 
 7rriovT(S avTovs (Is TO ovop.a TOV TraTpbs Kai 
 TOV viov r.al TOV ayiov Trvtvp.aTos, see in 
 ovopa RO 4. 1 Cor. 12, 4. comp. 5. 6, TO Se 
 auTo irvfi.p.a . . . Kal 6 avrbs Kvpios ... 6 8t av- 
 TOS 3eos. 2 Cor. 13, 13 17 x<*P ls TOV Kvpiov 
 irjo-ov XpioTou, icat fj dydnrj TOV 3eoC, *cai 17 
 Koivwia TOV ayiov irvevp-aTos flfril iruvrwv 
 \jp.uiv. 1 Pet. 1, 2 Kcrra irpoyvao-iv 3eoi/ Tra 
 Tpbs ev ayiacr/xw n^fVfJMTos, fls inraKorjv KOI 
 pavrio-p-bv a"ip.aTos irjtrov Xpiorof). Jude 20 
 iv nvevpaTi ayi<j> Trpoo-fvxouevoi, eavTovs tv 
 aydTTT) 3eoi- Trjpr]O-aTf, 7rpocrdexo/if 1/01 TO eXf or 
 TOV. Kvpiov fjuvv lrjo-ot XpioTo? ei? fr}j> 
 alaviov. [1 John 5, 7.] 
 
 b) Spoken in connection with or in refer 
 ence to God, 6 Sfo s, 6 TruTTjp. E. g. where 
 intimate union or oneness with the Father 
 is predicated of TO Trvtvpa. John 15, 26 TO 
 Tri/ef /ia TTjf tiXijSf iaj, o Trapa TOV irarpbs naro- 
 ptvfTai, comp. below in lett. d. Where the 
 same omniscience is predicated of Tonv(Vfj.a 
 as of 6 3e.) r. 1 Cor. 2, 10 TO yap irvtvpa 
 jrdvra fptvva, Ka\ TO. /3a3r; TOV 3eoC. V. 1 1 
 oi/ro (cat Ttt TOII Seof oiiSds oi8tv, (I HT] TO 
 nvfvua TOV 3eov. Where the same things 
 are predicated of TO nvevfjia which in other 
 places are predicated of 6 3edr, e. g. Ananias 
 and Sapphira are said to lie to the Holy 
 Spirit, etc. Acts 5, 3 jnvmu9al ore TO irvev- 
 fi.i TO ayiov, and so v. 9 ; comp. v. 4 OVK 
 
 e ^evcrw dv%pu>nots, ciXXa TW Sew. As speak 
 ing through the prophets of the O. T. Acts 
 1, 16 ypa(pfjv.. .fjv TrpoeiTre TO Trv(Vp.a TO 
 uyiov 8ia o-TofjuiTos Aa/St S, comp. 4, 24. 25 
 (TV 6 3edy ... 6 Sta o~TO/xaTor Aa/318 . . . etrrcoi , 
 and comp. 3, 21 et Heb. 1,1. Acts 28, 25 
 KoAaif TO mt9pa TO ayiov e XaX^ae Sia Haa- 
 tov, comp. Is. 6, 8. 11 where it is > : L X Vp . 
 Heb. 3, 7 AcaSw? Xe yet TO nvev/ia TO ayiov, 
 comp. Ps. 95, 7 where it is O^X Vp. 
 Heb. 10, 15 p.aprvpel 8e *ll L ~ tv Ka " 1 ro irvfvpa 
 TO ayiov, comp. Jer. 31,31 where it is " jj TJ 
 So Heb. 9, 8, comp. 1, 1. Also genr. as 
 speaking and warning men through prophets 
 and apostles, Acts 7, 51, comp. v. 52. 
 Where a person is said to be born of the 
 Spirit, spoken of the moral renovation, the 
 new spiritual life imparted to those who sin 
 cerely embrace the gospel. John 3, 5. 6. 8 
 o yeyfvrjp.fvos fK TOV Trvfvpmos, comp. John 
 1, 13 e *: TOW 3eof< tytmnfttjawr. Where TO 
 irvcT fjLa is said to dwell in or be with Chris 
 tians, as Rom. 8, 9 e??rep nvcvpa 3eoD o iKel 
 tv vfjiiv. V. 1 1 bis, ei Se TO Trvevfjia TOV e yei- 
 pavTOS IT)O~OI>V ex veKpwv oiKfl tv vfuv . . . 8ia 
 TO tvoiKOVV avTOU nvfVfjLa ev vp.lv. 1 Cor. 3, 
 16 OVK oidaTf OTI vabs Seof e ore, Kal TO 
 Trvf\i/J.a TOV 3eoi) oiVet ev vp.lv , 6, 19 TO <ra>ua 
 vp.u>v vabs TOV tv vp.iv ayiov Trvfvp.aTos to~Tiv. 
 2 Tim. 1, 14 8id 7rvtvp.aTos ayiov, TOV tvoi- 
 KOVVTOS tv rip.lv. Compare 2 Cor. 6, 16 
 vp.fis yap vabs 3eoO e crTe a>vros KaSiir tinti, 
 6 3edf OTI fvoiK.T]o-(0 tv avToIs KT\. comp. 
 John 14, 23. Eph. 2, 22. Where TO 7n/ei>a 
 and 6 Seo s are interchanged ; as 1 Cor. 1 2, 
 1 1 irdvra 8e Tavra tvtpyti TO tv Ka\ TO avrb 
 TTvt\<p.a, spoken of miraculous gifts; comp. 
 V. 7 where it is 6 3e6?o evepytav Tcnravra tv 
 tracriv. So Eph. 6, 17 p.d^aipa TOV Trv(vp.a- 
 Toy, o e oTt p JJjua Seoii. 
 
 c) Spoken in connection with or in refer 
 ence to Christ ; e. g. joined with o Xptoro s 
 in emphatic affirmation. Rom. 9, 1 aXjjSetay 
 Xt ya) ev Xpto-Ta3 ov \l/ev8op.ai . . . tv Trvev- 
 p.aTi. In a solemn obtestation, Rom. 15, 30 
 TrapaKoXo) 8e vp.ds . 8ia TOV Kvpiov T/jtzaiv 
 If;cro0 XpioToG, Kal 8ia TTJS dydnrfs TOV 
 irvfvpM.Tos. In the renovation and sanctifi- 
 cation of Christians, 1 Cor. 6, 1 1 dXXa emt- 
 Xoro-aa3e, dXXa ^ytao-SfjTe, dXX tiKaid>%r)TC . 
 tv TO) ovop.aTi TOV Kvpicv ITJO~OV KOI tv TCO 
 nvfvpaTi TOV 3eoi) rjp.a>v. 2 Cor. 3, 17 bis, 
 6 8e Kvpios TO Trvfvp.a to~Tiv (comp. v. 8), 
 ov 8e TO Trvfvp.a Kupi ov, e xet e XevSepia. V. 
 18. Heb. 10, 29. So TO irvevp-a and o 
 Xpio-To f are said to be or dwell with men ; 
 compare the examples cited above in lett. b, 
 with John 14,23. 15,4. 2 Cor. 13,5. Eph. 
 3, 17. Also where TO irvfvua i-o ayiov is 
 
596 
 
 .<aid to descend, o-w/iart/cw e i8ei, upon Jesus 
 after his baptism, Luke 3, 22. Matt. 3, 16. 
 Mark 1, 10. John 1, 32. 33. 
 
 d) As coming to and acting upon men, 
 Christians, exerting in and upon them an. 
 enlightening, strengthening, sanctifying in 
 fluence. Thus where the H. S. is repre 
 sented as the author of revelations to men, 
 e. g. through the prophets of the O. T. see 
 above in lett. b ; or as communicating a 
 knowledge of future events, Acts 10, 19 
 ( iTTtv avr<5 (neVpa>) TO 7rvevp.a I8ov avbpes 
 rpfls faroM o-e 20,23. 21, 11. 1 Tim. 
 
 4, 1. Or as directing or impelling to any 
 net, Acts 11, 12. As communicating in 
 struction, admonitions, warnings, invitations 
 through the apostles ; Rev. 2, 7 e xcov ovs 
 aKovcraro) ri TO Trvevp.a \eyei rait (KK\T)- 
 a-iais. v. 11. 17. 29. 3, 6. 13. 22. 14, 13. 
 22, 17 KOI TO 7TVfvp-a Kai rj vvp.(pr) \eyov(nV 
 epxov, i. e. the Spirit and the whole church. 
 So 1 Cor. 2, 10, comp. above in lett. b. 
 As speaking through the disciples when 
 brought before rulers, etc. Matt. 10, 20. 
 Mark 13, 11. Luke 12, 12. As qualifying 
 the apostles powerfully to propagate the 
 Gospel, Xj^eo-Se 8vvap.iv eTreX^ovros TOV 
 ay. TTV. e<p vpds Acts 1 , 8 ; or aiding in 
 building up and comforting the churches, 
 9, 31 ; or directing in the appointment of 
 church-officers, 20, 28 ; or assisting to speak 
 and hear the Gospel aright, 1 Cor. 2, 1 3 ev 
 8i8aKTo1s TTvevp-aTos ayiov (Xo yoey) in words 
 taught, suggested by the Holy Spirit, v. 14. 
 \lfVKiKos 8e ni/SpcoTroy ov Several ra TOV 
 7rvfvp.aTos TOV 3eoi). Emphat. as the Spirit 
 of the Gospel, 2 Cor. 3, 17; see above in 
 lett. c, and comp. in no. 2. c, below. Also 
 as coming to Christians and remaining with 
 them; imparting to them spiritual know 
 ledge, aid, consolation, sanctification ; mak 
 ing intercession with and for them, and the 
 like. John 14, 17. 26 6 8e irapdichriTos, TO 
 Trvtvpa TO ayiov. . .enelvos vp.as 8i8dd TTO.V- 
 ra. 15,26 6 Trapd/cX^TO? . . . TO Trvevp.a Trjs 
 a\r)%eias, i. e. that divine Spirit who will 
 impart the knowledge of divine truth ; as 
 16, 13 TO Trvfvp.a rf)S dX7/3e/ay oSr/y^cret 
 {i/j.as fls Trao-av TTJV aXr/Sciav. Rom. 8, 14 
 6 croi yap Trvtvp-ari 3eoi ayovrai, OVTOI eiviv 
 viol 3eou. V. 16 avTo TO Trvevp-a KT\. V. 26 
 bis. 27. 14, 17. 15, 13. 16. 2 Cor. 1, 22 et 
 
 5, 5 dppaftuv TOV TrvfvpaTos. Eph. 3, 16. 
 
 6, 18. 1 Thess. 1,6. 2Thess. 2, 13. James 
 4, 5 see in eWo3a. 1 Pet. 1, 22. So 
 where any one is said to grieve the Holy 
 Spirit ; Eph. 4, 30 p.rj XwreiTe TO nvevp.a TO 
 ayiov TOV 3eoC, ev <u e<r(ppayio- Sr)T(, i. e. by 
 whose gifts and influences ye are strength 
 
 ened and confirmed ; comp. Is. 63, 10 where 
 Sept. for VC"!]? ITn. 
 
 2. Meton. the Holy Spirit, put for the 
 effects and consequences of the agency and 
 operations of the Spirit of God, i. e. a di 
 vine influence, a divine energy or power, an 
 inspiration, resulting from the immediate 
 agency of the Holy Spirit, i. q. Svvapis TOV 
 ayiov TTvevpaTos Acts 1, 8. Spoken 
 
 a) Of that physical procreative energy 
 exerted in the miraculous conception of 
 Jesus ; Luke 1, 35 Trvevpa ayiov eVeXev<re- 
 TCU eVt tre, where it is i. q. 8vvap.is v^io-Tov 
 in the next clause. Matt. 1, 18. 20. So in 
 respect to the conception of Isaac out of the 
 course of nature, Gal. 4, 29. 
 
 b) Of that special divine influence, in 
 spiration, energy, which rested upon and 
 existed in Jesus after the descent of the 
 Holy Spirit upon him at his baptism. Luke 
 4, 1 l^o-oCs Se 7rvfvp.aTOS ayiov ir\r)p7)s, 
 comp. 3. 22. John 3, 34 ov yap t< fitTpov 
 b~i8co<riv 6 3eoy TO Trvevu-a, .i. e. the divine 
 influence, energy, resting upon Christ was 
 not measured and occasional, like that of 
 prophets and apostles, but ever abundant 
 and constant. Acts 1, 2. Matt. 12, 18 dya- 
 JTTJTOS p.ov . ..3ijo-G) TO TTfeC/xa fj.ov tif av- 
 TOV, quoted from Is. 42, 1 where Sept. for 
 " HIT. Luke 4, 18 Twev^a Kvpiov eV tp,f. 
 quoted from Is. 61, 1 where Sept. for 
 n ^ WX nsn. Acts 10, 38 Iqa-ovv...^ 
 expicrfv avTov 6 3eo? Trvevp-aTi ayia> KCU 8v- 
 vdfjLft. 1 John 5, 6 bis. 8 TO irvevp.a, KOI TO 
 vdcop, xal TO alp.a. i. e. that divine spirit, 
 energy, which was in Jesus ; by which also 
 he was sealed as a spotless victim for his 
 atoning sacrifice, Heb. 9, 14 ; comp. above 
 in C. As prompting him to various actions, 
 e. g. to go into the desert to be tempted, 
 Matt. 4, 1. Mark 1, 12. Luke 4, 1 ^yeTo ev 
 TO) TTvevu,aTL els TTJV eprjfjiov, and afterwards 
 to return into Galilee Luke 4, 14. As en 
 abling him to cast out demons ; Matt. 12, 
 28 ft Se tv TTvevfJiaTt 3eoO e yo> e K/3aXXo> TO 
 Saip-dVia, comp. Luke 11, 20 where it is et 
 8e ev 8aKTV\a> 3eoi) f/3aXXo) Ta 8aip.6via. 
 In this connection TO nvevp-a TO ayiov is 
 said to be blasphemed, Matt. 12, 31. 32. 
 Mark 3, 29. Luke 12, 10; comp. Matt. 12. 
 28. Mark 3, 30. 
 
 c) Of that divine influence by which 
 prophets and holy men were excited, when 
 they are said to have spoken or acted < 
 TTiffvp-aTi v. 8ia TrvevfMTos, in or through the 
 Spirit, i. e. by inspiration ; Matt. 22, 43 
 TTwy ovv Ao/3iS ev Twev^ari Kvpiov avrov KO- 
 Xel ; Mark 12, 36. So 2 Pet. 1, 21 wo irvev- 
 
 ayiov (pepopevoi e\d\r]o-av. 1 Pet. 1, 
 
597 
 
 11 TO Iv avTois irvfvp.a Xptorov. Of John 
 in the Apocalypse, as being eV nvv/tan, 
 
 1. e. rapt in prophetic vision, Rev. 1, 10. 4, 
 
 2. 17, 3. 21, 10; also Rev. 19, 10, see in 
 fjMpTvpia no. 2. b. Of the inspiration rest 
 ing upon John the Baptist, Luke 1, 15; 
 Zacharias 1, 67; Elizabeth 1, 41 ; Simeon 
 
 2, 25. 26. 27. So of that divine influence 
 and inspiration imparted to Christians, by 
 which they are taught, enlightened, guided, 
 in respect to faith and practice ; John 7, 39 
 bis, TOVTO 8f (iTTf wfpl TOII irvfVfJLaTos . . . ov- 
 rrco yap ffv nv(vfj,a ayiov, on 6 Irjcrovs ov8f- 
 nu> f So^do-Sr;, com p. John 16, 13. 14. So 
 Luke 11, 13. Rom. 5, 5. 1 Cor. 12, 3 bis, 
 ov8tls tv TTVfi>iJ.aTi 3eoO XaXwi , \iyti di/a3e- 
 p.a lr)(roiv KOI ov8els 8vvaTai (inf iv Kvpiov 
 irjcrovv, tl fj.rj v TTVfvuaTi ayi(o. 2 Cor. 3, 3 
 eniOToXfj . . . yyfypafj.fj,fvrj ov p.t\avi, dXXa 
 nvfvfj.aTi Seov &>ITOS. Gal. 5, 5. Tit. 3, 5 
 
 8ia \ovTpov naXiyyevto-ias KOI 
 TrvevfiaTOf ayiov, ov e^f^fff 
 t(f> THJ.OS nXovo-ias. Heb. 6, 4. 1 Pet. 4, 14. 
 So when the disciples of Christ are said to 
 be baptized with the Holy Spirit, i. e. to be 
 richly furnished with all spiritual gifts, see 
 in jSaTrn fw no. 2. b. Matt. 3, 1 1 avros vpas 
 8arrricrfi ev nvtvfJiaTi dyia> Kal irvpi. Mark 
 1. 8. Luke 3, 16. John 1, 33. For Acts 1, 
 5 et 11, 16, see below in lett. d. (So TO 
 ayiov irvtvpa Wisd. 9, 17.) Emphat. as the 
 Spirit of the Gospel, put for the Gospel in 
 opp. to the letter of the Mosaic law, 2 Cor. 
 
 3, 6 bis. 8; comp. v. 17, and above in no. 
 1. d.. 
 
 d) Of that influence of the Spirit by 
 which the apostles were originally qualified 
 to act as founders and directors of the 
 church of Christ ; John 20, 22 evftpvcrt KOI 
 \tyei avTois Xd/3eTf irvev/jui ayiov, comp. 
 v. 23. Spec, of that powerful energy and 
 inspiration imparted by the Holy Spirit on 
 the day of Pentecost and afterwards, by 
 which the Apostles and early Christian 
 teachers were endowed with high super 
 natural qualifications for their work ; e. g. 
 a full knowledge of gospel truth, the power 
 of prophesying, of working miracles, of 
 speaking with tongues, etc. E. g. where 
 they are said to be baptized with this Holy 
 Spirit Acts 1 , 5 et 1 1 , 1 6, comp. 1,8.1 Cor. 
 12, 13 bis, comp. \. 8. 9. Acts 2, 4 bis, 
 ical fir\r)Zr)o-av anavrts 7TVfvfJ.aTos ayiov 
 
 ro mfvpa f8i8ov avrols ti7ro(^3eyyfo-2at, i.e. 
 as the Spirit impelled them. 2, 17. 18, quot 
 ed from Joel 3, 1. 2 [2, 28. 29], where 
 Sept. for n*H. Acts 2, 33 Irjo-ovs . . .TTJV 
 rt frrayy(\iav TOII ayiov TrvevfMTos Xa/3o>i> 
 
 rrapa TOV narpos, t^x ff TOITO. v. 38. 5, 32. 
 8, 15. 17. 18. 19. 9, 17. 10, 44. 45. 47. 
 11,15.24. 13,9. 15,8. 1 9, 2 bis, tine npos 
 avrovs d irvfv^a ayiov e Xdj3rre iria-Tfiicrav- 
 Tfs , ol Se (inov trpos avrov dXX ouSe e 
 Trvfvpa ayiov to-riv, ^Kou(ra/ifz>, i. e. they 
 did not know that the Holy Spirit had yet 
 been given. Acts 19, 6. Rom. 15, 19 tv 
 8vvap.i a~r]p.fi(i)V Kal Tfpdratv, tv 8vvdfJ.fi 
 TrvfvfjiaTos ayiov, i. e. through the power of 
 the internal influences and revelations of 
 the Spirit. 1 Cor. 2, 4. 7, 40. 12, 7. 8 bis. 
 9 bis. 14, 2. 32 Kal TrvtvpaTa Trpo^roov 
 irpocpfjTais vTrorda-o-fTai, the spirits of the 
 prophets are sulyect to the prophets, i. e. in 
 spiration and self-possession go hand in 
 hand, holy inspiration can never cause con 
 fusion and disorder, comp. v. 33. Eph. 1,13. 
 Gal. 3, 2. 3. 5. 14. 1 Thess. 1,5. 4, 8. 5, 
 19 (comp. 2 Tim. 1, 6). Heb. 2, 4. 1 Pet. 
 1. 12. So as prompting to or restraining 
 from particular actions or conduct ; Acts 
 8, 29. 39 irvfvp.a Kvpiov rjpTrao-f TOV &iXin- 
 TTOV, i. e. the divine influence, afflatus, which 
 rested on Philip, hurried him away, comp. 
 Matt. 4, 1 ; so Acts 13, 2. 4. 15, 28. 16, 6. 
 7. As prompting to holy boldness, energy, 
 zeal, in speaking and acting. Acts 4, 8 TOT* 
 TlfTpos TrXjjcrSiets jrvfi/fiaros ayiov. fine irpbs 
 avTovs. V. 31. 6, 3 avSpas eTrrd, irXrjpfis 
 TrvevfjiaTos ayiov Kal o-o(f>ias. v. 5. 10, comp. 
 v. 8. As the medium of divine communi 
 cations and revelations, Acts 11, 28 *Aya- 
 j9of (n ]fj.avf 8ia TOV TrvtvpaTos KT\. 21, 4. 
 Eph. 3, 5. As the source of support, com 
 fort, Christian joy and triumph, Acts 7, 55. 
 13, 52. Eph. 5, 18. Phil. 1, 19. Plur. 
 TrvevfMTa, spiritual gifts, 1 Cor. 14, 12. 
 
 e) Of that divine influence by which the 
 temper or disposition of mind in Christians 
 is affected ; or rather, the spirit, temper, dis 
 position of mind produced in Christians by 
 the influences of the Holy Spirit, which cor 
 rects, elevates, ennobles, sanctifies^ their 
 views and feelings ; fills the mind with 
 peace and joy ; and is the pledge and fore 
 taste of everlasting happiness. E. g. a) 
 As opposed to 17 <rdp, which includes the 
 idea of that which is earthly, grovell.no. 
 imperfect, sinful ; John 3, 6 TO ytytwr^^tvov 
 (K TTJS o-apKos, o-dp (O~TI Kal TO ytytvi tj- 
 fj.evov (< TOV irvevfjuiTos, Trvtiifjid c ort, put 
 for irvevpaTiKov cVri, is spiritual, i. e. has 
 those dispositions and feelings which are 
 produced by the Spirit of God. Rom. 8, 1 
 p,i] KaTa crdpKa TrepnraTovo-iv, dXXa KUTU 
 Trvfiifj,a, i. e. not indulging the depraved 
 affections and lusts of our carnal natures 
 and unrenewed hearts, but foHowin/j those 
 
598 
 
 holy and elevated affections and desires 
 which the Spirit imparts and cherishes, v. 
 2. 4. 5 bis. 6. 9 iv Trvtvp-aTi. v. 13. 1 Cor. 
 6, 17 6 Se KoX\a>/jL(vos TOO Kvpia>, tv irvevfj,d 
 <TTIV, i. e. through the influence of the 
 Spirit such an one has the same disposition 
 and the same temper of mind with Christ. 
 Gal. 5, 16 TTvevfiaTi TrtpiTrarfire, KOL eVt2v- 
 piav aapKos ov p.r) Tf\eo7]Tf. V. 17 bis. 18. 
 22. 25 bis. 6, 8 bis. /3) Genr. Rom. 8, 
 9 7rvfv/j,a Xpto-Tov i. e. the same mind as 
 Christ possessed, wrought in us by the 
 Spirit, comp. Eph. 3, 17. Rom. 7, 6. 8, 15 
 e Xa/3ere Trvevpa vlt&tVMS a spirit of sonship, 
 i. e. a filial spirit, v. 23. 1 Cor. 2. 12. 2 Cor. 
 6, 6. Gal. 4, 6 (comp. Rom. 8, 15). Eph. 
 1, 17 day vp.1v 7rvfvp.a o~o(pias Kal dnoKaXv- 
 tyecas, a spirit of wisdom and illumination, 
 imparted through the Holy Spirit. 2, 18. 22. 
 4, 3. 4. [5, 9.] Col. 1, 8. 1 Tim. 4, 12. 
 
 1 John 3, 24. 4, 13. Jude 19. 
 
 3. Meton. of a person or teacher acting 
 or professing to act under the inspiration of 
 the Holy Spirit, by divine inspiration, i. q. 
 irvfv[j.aTa 7rpo<pr)Ta>i> 1 Cor. 14, 34 , ol XaXoth - 
 Tfs tv irv(i>p.aTt 1 Cor. 12, 3. So 1 Cor. 
 12, 10 8iaKpi<Tfis TrvfVpuiTwv the trying of 
 spirits or teachers, i. e. the judgment as 
 quickened by the Holy Spirit, including not 
 only the power of discerning who was a 
 prophet and who was not, but also of dis 
 tinguishing in the discourses of a teacher 
 what proceeded from the Holy Spirit and 
 what did not. 1 John 4, 1 bis, /ii) jravrl 
 
 ITVtVfUCrt TTKTTfVfTf, aXXa doKl/J,U^Te TO 
 
 rrvfVfj.aTa. v. 2 bis. 3. 6 bis. 1 Thess. 4, 1. 
 
 2 Thess. 2, 2 p.r)T 8id -rrvevp-aTos, i. e. 
 neither by any one professing to be inspired. 
 
 7TVVjJ/ctTlKO $, r^, 6v, (rrvfvu,a^) belon (T - 
 ing to the breath, breathing, as 6 TTV. TOKOS 
 the breast, Theophr. Fr. 7. 12. ib. 10. 7; 
 windy, Theophr. Caus. PI. 4. 12. 5; spirit 
 ual, mental, opp. o-a>p.aTiKov, Plut. de tuend. 
 San. PKEC. 13. In N. T. 
 
 1. spiritual, pertaining to the nature- of 
 spirits, see TrvevfM III. A. 1 Cor. 15, 44 
 bis, (Tw/na Trvfvp.aTiKov a spiritual body, hav 
 ing the nature of a spirit, opp. trw/ia ^sv%i- 
 KOS the animal body. v. 46 bis. Abstr. for 
 concr. Eph. 6, 12 ra Trffu/iari/ca r^v TTOOT?- 
 pias, i. q. ra syev/uira irovypd, comp. Winer 
 34. n. 3. Matth. 445. 5. So ra X^ortAca 
 for TOVS Xfloray Polyaen. 5. 14. 
 
 2. spiritual, as pertaining to or proceed 
 ing from the Holy Spirit, TO Trvevpa TO ayiov, 
 see in 7rvfvp.a III. D. a) Of persons, 
 spiritual, i. e. enlightened by the Holy Spirit, 
 enjoying the influences, graces, gifts of the j 
 
 Holy Spirit; 1 Cor. 2, 15. 3, 1 vp~iv e>s 
 TTVfvp-aTtKols. 14, 37. Gal. 6, 1. b) Of 
 things spiritual, i. e. communicated or im 
 parted by the Holy Spirit, Rom. 15, 27 
 1 Cor. 2, 13 bis, Trvtvp-artKols 7rv(vp.aTiKa 
 a-vjKpivovTfs, see in <rvyKplva> no. 1. 1 Cor. 
 9, 11. Eph. 1, 3. Col. 1, 9. 1 Cor. 12, 1 et 
 14, 1 ra nuevfiaTiKci spiritual gifts, miracu 
 lous powers. Eph. 5, 19 et Col. 3, 16 aSals 
 nvtvp-aTiKois in spiritual songs, composed 
 in the Spirit, on spiritual and religious sub 
 jects. Rom. 7, 14 6 vofios irv. e<rnv, the laic, 
 is spiritual, both as proceeding from the 
 Holy Spirit and as adapted to the spiritual 
 nature and wants of man. Rom. 1, 11 ^a- 
 ptcr/jLa TrvfVfiaTiKov, some spiritual gift, i. e. 
 a gift pertaining to the mind or spirit of 
 Christians as enlightened and quickened by 
 the Holy Spirit ; comp. in v. 12, and see in 
 TTvevna III. D. 2. e. Also of things in a 
 higher and spiritual sense, i. e. not literal, 
 not corporeal, including also a reference to 
 the Holy Spirit ; 1 Pet. 2, 5 bis, OIKOS irvev- 
 paTixs? . . . TTVfv^anKas Sva/ar. 1 Cor. 10, 3. 
 4 bis, /3/><^a Triffv/MiTiKov f<payov, Tropa. TTV. 
 fTTiov, KT\. spiritual food, spiritual drink, 
 i. e. supernatural, given by miraculous 
 power, and intended to affect their faith and 
 spiritual life ; comp. vv. 1. 2. 5. 
 
 7rvev/j,aTiKh)$, adv. (xvfvp.aTiKos, ) spi 
 ritually, i. e. in accordance with the Holy 
 Spirit, in or through the Spirit, 1 "Cor. 2. 
 14. Also Rev. 11, 8 TJTIS /caXeirat TTV. 2o- 
 So/za KOI AiyvTTTos, i. e. speaking in the 
 Spirit, prophetically, allegorically, not liter 
 ally. Clem. Rom. Ep. ad Cor. 1. } 47 irvev- 
 p.aTiKa>s fTTfCTTeiXfv rj/Mi>, SC. UaCAoy. 
 
 TTjyea), f. TTffvo-o/zat, aor. 1 emxv<ra, 
 Buttm. ^ 114; not usually contracted, see 
 Buttm. ^ 105. n. 2. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 220 ; 
 to breathe, to breathe out, Horn. II. 17. 447. 
 Anthol. Gr. IV. p. 129. 2 ; trop. Plut. Aris- 
 toph. et Menand. comp. 1. In N. T: to 
 blow, only of the wind, absol. Matt. 7, 25. 
 
 27 Kal firveva-av ol oW/uot. Luke 12, 55. 
 John 3, 8. 6, 18. Rev. 7, 1. Acts 27, 40 TJ, 
 Trvfovay sc. avpq. Sept. for 3^3 Ps. 147, 
 18 ; t\W Is. 40, 24. So Pakep h. 47. 2. 
 Xen. An. 4. 5. 3. 
 
 irvijo), f. o>, to choke, to strangle, e. g. 
 by drowning, Pass. Mark 5, 13. So Jos. 
 Ant. 10. 7. 5. Plut. de Liber, educ. 13. 
 Xen. An. 5. 7. 25. Spec, to seize by the, 
 throat, to throttle, to choke, c. ace. Matt. 18, 
 
 28 KpaTTjo-as CLVTOV enviyt. So Antiph. 125. 
 39. Aristoph. Nub. 1376. Comp. Sy^ot 
 Luc. D. Mort. 19. 1. ib. 22. 1. 
 
TTVLKTOS 
 
 599 
 
 7m/eT09, ij, 6v, (n-j/iyu,) strangled, pr. 
 Athen. 4. p. 147. d, KdftaXaiov . . . TTVLKTU.S 
 (ptyov TraptSfjKf. In N. T. melon. TO irvi- 
 KTOI>, strangled meat, i. e. the flesh of ani 
 mals killed by strangling, without shedding 
 their blood, Acts 15, 20. 29. 21, 25. This 
 was forbidden to the Jews, Lev. 17, 13. 14 ; 
 oomp. 7, 26. 27. Deut. 12, 16. 23. 
 
 Trvorj. qj, r;, (TiWco,) breath, i. e. 
 
 1. a breathing, breath of life, respiration, 
 Acts 17, 25 u>fjv Ktu TTVOTJV. Sept. for 
 nstis Gen. 2, 7. Is. 42, 5. 2 Mace. 7, 9. 
 Horn! II. 23. 380. Soph. El. 719. 
 
 2. breath of air, a blast, wind, Acts 2, 2. 
 Sept. for nsttja Job 37, 10. Horn. II. 16. 
 149. Thuc. 4. 100 blast of a bellows. 
 
 , fos, ovs, 6, 17, adj. (irovs, obs. 
 po>.) reaching to the feet, spoken of long 
 flowing robes, Rev. 1, 13 fvStdvfjLfvov iro- 
 typr) sc. eV3J}ra. Sept. for J^SO Ex. 28, 
 4. Jos. Ant. 8. 3. 8. Xen. Cyr. 6. 4. 2 
 
 , interrog. adv. whence? correl. 
 with TTOV, Trdre, etc. comp. Buttm. { 116. 4. 
 
 1. Pr. of place, whence ? from what place 
 or quarter? Matt. 15, 33 noSev f] fj.lv ev epn- 
 (iia fiproi TocrouToi KT\. Mark 8, 4. John 
 
 4, 11. 6, 5. Rev. 7, 13. Also indirect, as 
 often in N. T. comp. Winer $ 61. 2. n. 
 Luke 13, 25 OUK olda vp.as trfoev tart, V. 
 27. John 3, 8. 8, 14 bis. Trop. of state, 
 condition, indir. Rev. 2, 5. Sept. for "pXB 
 Num. 11, 13. Gen. 29, 4. Judg. 19, 17. 
 Horn. Od. 16. 57. Plato Farm. 137. a. Xen. 
 CEc. 16. 8. 
 
 2. Of the source, author, cause, also of 
 manner, whence? how? Matt. 13, 27 iro^fv 
 ovv fxft b&via > v - 54 - 56. 21, 25. Mark 6, 
 2. John 1 , 49. 19, 9 7ro3f d a-v ; James 4, 1. 
 Indirect, Luke 20, 7 /zi) dfttvai noSfv. John 
 2, 9. 7, 27 bis. 28. 9, 29. 30. Sept. and 
 " 2 K. 6, 27. (Dem. 241. 17. Xen. 
 Conv. 2. 5.) Spoken in surprise, admira 
 tion, Luke 1, 43 KOI rroStv p.oi TOVTO, iva 
 KT\. (Epict. Ench. 22.) Implying strong 
 negation, comp. Matth. }611. 1. Mark 12, 
 37 Ka\ iro Sfv vlos airov fcm ; So JE,\. V. 
 II. 13. 2. Dem. 749. 10. 
 
 TTOia, as, T), (Dor. for Troa, Ion. Tronj.) 
 grass, herb, herbage ; so some James 4,14 
 Troi a yap 17 co?) v/xwv, comp. 1,10. Better 
 Troi a as fern, of Trotoy q. v. Theocr. Idyll. 
 
 5. 34; Troirj Hdot. 8. 115. Horn. Od. 18. 
 369. Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p 496. 
 
 7TOt&>j <S, f. i t <Tu>. aor. 1 fVo/ijtra, perf. 
 jrtnoinKa, pluperf. irfiroifjKtw, without augin. 
 Mark 15, 7, see Buttm. 5 83. n. 7. Aor. 1 
 
 Opt. 3 pers. plur. irotfjtrtiav Luke 6, 11. 
 see Buttm. $ 103. II. 4. Winer 5 13. 2. d. 
 The various significations of this verb 
 may all be classed under the two primary 
 ones, to make, to do, implying action as 
 completed or as continued. Sept. usually 
 
 for nbs. 
 
 1 . to make, i. e. to form, to produce, to 
 bring about, to cause, pr. of something ex 
 ternal to oneself, something tangible, corpo 
 real, obvious to the senses ; see Passovv s. v. 
 init. Here the Middle is sometimes used 
 with only a remote reference to the subject ; 
 which not seldom wholly vanishes, so that 
 the Mid. does not apparently differ from the 
 Active ; see Passow 1. c. Buttm. { 135. 6, 7, 
 
 8, and espec. n. 4. Matth. 5 492. W T iner 
 5 39. 6. 
 
 a) Genr. a) Pr. and c. ace. Matt. 17, 
 4 iroiT)crop.fv 2>Se rptis crawls. John 9, 1 1 
 jrnXov fTroiTja f. 18, 18 dv Spa.Ktav TTfTroirjKo- 
 Tfs. 19, 23. Acts 7, 40 Stovr. v. 43. 9, 39 
 ipd. 19, 24. Rom. 9, 20. Heb. 12, 13. 
 Rev. 13, 14. With e*c c. gen. of material, 
 John 2, 1 5 Toiijcras (ppaye\\iov f< vjfpanMV. 
 
 9, 6. Rom. 9, 21. With Kara n of man 
 ner, model, Acts 7, 44. Heb. 8, 5. Mid. 
 Acts 1, 1 rbv [J.fi> Trpvrov \6yov eVoijjcrd/^i/ 
 Trepi iravTuv KT\. see above. Sept. for iTl ? 
 Gen. 6, 14 sq. Ex. 25, 9 ; c. x Gen. 6, 14. 
 So Hdian. 1. 11. 2. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 5 ; c. 
 e< An. 4. 5. 14. /3) Of God, to make, i. q. 
 to create, c. ace. Acts 4, 24 6 Troiijo-as rov 
 ovpavbv KT\. 7, 50. 14, 15. 17, 24. Heb. 1, 
 2. 12,27. Rev. 14, 7. So Luke 11, 40; 
 c. dupl. ace. Matt. 19, 4 apo-ev KOI SijXu 
 
 fv avrovs. Mark 10, 6. Sept. for 
 Gen. 1, 7. 16. 25. 31 ; *n3 Gen. 1, 1. 
 1, 1. 21. 27. Is. 42, 5. 
 
 b) Trop. of a state or condition, or of 
 things abstract and incorporeal, and genr. 
 of such things as are produced by an act of 
 the mind or will ; to make, i. e. to cause, to 
 bring about, to occasion ; see Passow. a) 
 Genr. c. ace. Luke 1, 68 fTroirjae \vTpuxnv 
 TO) AaoS ai/Tov. Acts 15, 3 tnotovv xapav 
 ptyaXrjv TTaa-i r. d8(\<pois. 24, 12 tVto^ora- 
 criv iroiovvra o^Xov. Rom. 16, 17. 1 Cor. 
 
 10, 13. Eph. 2, 15 troiuv (lp7Jt>T)v. 4, 16. 
 Heb. 8, 9. Mid. Rom. 15, 26. Heb. 1,3. 
 So Horn. Od. 1. 250. Xen. An. 1. 8. 18. 
 Ag. 1.7 (Iprtivjv. Mid. Hdot. 5. 30. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 4. 14. /3) Spec. Troitiv with its 
 accus. like Engl. to make, often forms here 
 a periphrasis for the kindred verb. So ACT. 
 fKdiKrjfriv TTOKIV to make defence of one s 
 cause, i. q. i K^Kt iv to defend, to right, Luke 
 18, 7. 8. Acts 7, 24 ; comp. Luke ib. v. 3. 
 5. Sept. for cp:3 nb? Mic. 5, 15. (Pol. 3. 
 
600 
 
 8. 10.) evedpav rroifiv to make an ambus 
 cade, i q. fveSptvfiv to lie in wait, Acts 25, 
 3. (Palsph. 1. 10. Xen. Hell. 4. 8. 35.) 
 ro iKavov iroieiv to make satisfaction, i. q. 
 IKCLVOVV to satisfy, to gratify, Mark 15, 15. 
 (Pol. 32. 7. 13.) novrjviroifiv to make one s 
 abode, i. q. \iiveiv to abide, to dwell, John 
 14,23. (Jos. Ant. 13. 2. 1.) 6 S o v iroieiv to 
 make one s way, to go, i. q. 68o7rotov/wu, 
 Mark 2, 23, comp. in 686s no. 2. a; TrdXt- 
 fiiov noLflv to make war or fight, i. q. TroXe- 
 p.e1v to war, to fight ; construed by Hebr. c. 
 /*erd TWOS instead of the dat. Rev. 11,7. 
 12, 17. 13, 7. 19, 19. Sept. for 
 HX i-isnbs Gen. 14, 2 ; 
 Troiflv to make a consultation, i. q. 
 Xeueo-3ai to consult together, Mark 3, 6. 
 15,1. (Plato Prot. 313. b.) a-vvupoa-iav 
 TToiflv to make a conspiracy, i. q. trvv6fj.wfu 
 to conspire, Acts 23, 13. (Hdian. 7. 4. 7. 
 Pol. 1. 70.6.) crv(TTpo(pT)v iroielv to make 
 a combination, conspiracy, i. q. (TvcTTpefa- 
 crSai to combine, Acts 23, 12. Sept. for 
 "rt^ Am. 7, 10 ; comp. arv<TTpe(pop.ai for p 
 2 Sam. 15, 31. 2 K. 21, 22. Mm. often 
 with only a remote reference to the subject ; 
 comp. above under no. 1 init. E. g. dvafto- 
 XTJV mneurSa: to make delay pr. on one s 
 part, i. q. di>a/3dXXo-3ai to delay, Acts 25, 17. 
 (Polyb. Spic. Fragm. T. V. p. 44. Schweigh.) 
 8 e 77 cr f i s 7rotet<r3tti to make prayers, i. q. Set- 
 o-Sat to pray, Luke 5, 33. Phil. 1, 4. 1 Tim. 
 2, 1; (K^oXfjv TToteio-Sat to make a casting 
 out, i. q. eK/3dXXeii> to cast out. Acts 27, 18. 
 (Pollux On. 1. 99.) KoirtTov Troteio-Sai to 
 make lamentation, i. q. KoVrecr3ai to lament, 
 Acts 8, 2. (Comp. Trtv^os TT. Sept. Gen. 
 50. 10. Hdot. 2. 1.) Xdyov TJ-oteio-Sat 1o 
 make account of, i. q. Xoyi eo-3at, Acts 20, 
 24. (Diod. Sic. 20. 36. Pol. 25. 1. 3.) 
 HVfiav TroificrSai, i. q. /ii/ii^ovcw, see in 
 pvfid ; /t v T) p. r) v TroieicrSat, see in [ivr/pr] ; 
 iropfiav TTotfitrSat to make progress or a 
 journey, i. q. 7ropeveo-3ai to journey, Luke 
 13,22. (2 Mace. 3,8. Xen. An. 6. 2. 11.) 
 rrpovoiav 7roiel<r3ai to make provision for, 
 i. q. Trpovoelo-Sat to provide for, Rom. 13, 
 14. (Pol. 4. 6. 11. Diod. Sic. 5. 1; comp. 
 Dem. 1433. 5.) (nrovSfjV TroieicrSai to 
 make diligence, to give diligence, i. q. O-TTOV- 
 8dfi/, Jude 3 ; so Pol. 1. 46. 2. Plut. de 
 Liber, educ. 7. 
 
 c) Spec, of a feast, banquet, to make, i. q. 
 to give, to hold, to celebrate, c. ace. Luke 5, 
 29 fnoirjcrf 8o\r)v /j.e y<i\r)v. 14, 12 orav TTOITJS 
 apivTov KT\. v. 13. 16 ; c. dat. of pers. to or 
 for whom, in honour of whom, Matt. 22, 2. 
 Mark 6,21. John 12,2. Sept. TT. So^v /^ey. 
 for Heb. Vha ntjriia n5 Gen. 21, 8. So 
 
 c. dat. 1 Esdr. 3, 1 ; bfiirvov TroiflcrSat Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 3. 25. Hence of a festival, i. q. to 
 keep, to hold, to celebrate ; Matt. 2G, 1 8 irpos 
 a-e TToio) TO Trdcr^a. Acts 18, 21. In the 
 sense of instituting, Heb. 11, 28. Sept. 
 and ilia? genr. Ex. 12, 48. Josh. 5, 10. 
 So Jos. Ant. 2. 15. 3 TT. ras Svcri av. Xen. 
 Hell. 7. 4. 28 iroitiv TO OXu/wrta. 
 
 d) Also i. q. to make exist, to cause to be, 
 pr. spoken of generative power, to beget, to 
 bring forth, to bear ; as TralSaj TroieurSat 
 Dem. 1312. 7, i. q. TratfioTroieto-Sat, see Lob. 
 ad 1 hryn. p. 200. In N. T. a) Of trees 
 and plants, to make grow, to bear or bring 
 forth fruit, to yield; as napnuv v. Kapnovs 
 Troiflv Matt. 3, 10. 7, 17 sq. 13, 23. 26. 
 Luke 3. 9. Rev. 22, 2. al. Trop. Matt. 3, 
 8. 21, 43. Luke 3, 8. James 3, 12 /ii) 8wa- 
 rat o-vicrj e Xa/a? Troi^crai. So of branches, 
 i. q. to shoot forth, Mark 4, 32. Once of a 
 fountain, James 3, 12 ovre aXvKov yXvKv 
 TToiTjcrii v8a>p. Sept. for flttJS O f plants, 
 Gen. 1, 11. 12. Is, 5, 2. 4. So Jos, Ant. 
 11.3. />. Theophr. Caus. PI. 4. 11. Aristot. 
 de Plan*. 2. 10. /3) Trop. of persons, to 
 make for oneself, to get, to acquire, to gain 
 C. ace. Luke 12, 33 Troujowe e aurolr /3aXi>- 
 Tia . . . Srjcrauftpv avfK\nrTov eV rois ovp. 1 6, 
 9 (piXovs. John 4, 1 /^aS^rdr. Sept. and 
 fW? Gen. 11, 4- (Diod. Sic. 11. 39 do av 
 /uey. Xen. Cyr- 5. 5. 12 <pi\ovs.) In a 
 pecuniary sense, to pain, Engl. to make, Matt 
 25, 16 fnoirja-fv aXXa TTfvr* rdXaira. Luke 
 19,18. So Pol. 2. 62. J -2. Dem. 1045. 5. 
 
 e) Causat. to make do or be any thing, to 
 cause to do or be ; Passow no. 1. c. Herm. 
 ad Vig. p. 759. a) With an ace. and infill. 
 Matt. 5, 32 Trota avrr)i> P.OI^OT ^CH. Mark 1, 
 17. 7, 37 TOVS Kaxpovs iroifi ctKoufiv. 8, 25. 
 Luke 5, 34. John 6, 10. Acts 17, <26. Rev. 
 13, 13; also inf. c. rov, Acts 3, 12 im>ot^- 
 Kocri TOV ntpmardv avrov, see in 6. f>, TO. 
 II. G. 3. b. y. Comp. Winer { 45. 4. p. 378. 
 Matth. j. 540. So genr. Jos. Ant. 2~. 9. 5. 
 Hdian. 8. 3. 22. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 40. ) 
 With Iva c. Subjunct. to make or cause that, 
 see in Iva III. 1. d. John 1 1, 37 OVK tdvvaro 
 OVTOS Troifjcrai . . . iva OVTOS /xr) diro%dvi). Col. 
 4, 16. Rev. 13, 15. By attract. Trot^o-w 
 CIVTOVS iva KT\. Rev. 3, 9. 13, 12. 16. 
 Comp. Buttm. $ 151. I. 6. 
 
 f ) Causat. to make be or become any thing, 
 to cause to be or become so or so, to make 
 into any thing ; with two accus. of object 
 and a predicate of that object, either subst. 
 or adj. or adv. strictly with tlvai implied, 
 a) With a Subst. as predicate ; e. g. of 
 things, Matt. 21, 13 airbv (OLKOV) eVrouytraTe 
 (TTrrjXaiov \Tj(TT(ov. John 4, 46 oirov fjroir}<rt 
 
601 
 
 TTOtett) 
 
 TO vSwp olvov. 1 Cor. 6, 15. Heb. 1, 7. 
 (Hdian. 4. 10. 5.) Of persons, Matt. 4, 19 
 Trotijcrci) vp.lis aXitts dv3pa>7rcoi , com p. Mark 
 1, 17 fully TT. vfj.as yeveVSat dXifTr. Matt. 
 23, 15 Troifire avrov vlbvyffvvrjs. Luke 15, 
 19. Sept. for "[M Gen. 27, 37. So to 
 make, i. q. to constitute, to appoint; John 6, 
 15 Iva TToii]cr<acriv UVTOV /3acnXea. Acts 2, 
 36. Rev. 1, 6. 3, 12. 5, 10; with predic. 
 impl. Heb. 3, 2, comp. v. 1 ; \vith Iva instead 
 of ace. Mark 3, 14 KOI ttnAf<ri ScoSf/ca, Iva 
 2)0-1 ner avrov. Sept. for "(HS Ex. 18, 25. 
 (Hdian. 8. 4. 25. Xen. Cyr. 1.3. 18.) Spec. 
 to make, i. q. to declare, to give out as any 
 one. John 8, 53 riva o-eavrbv Troiel? ; 10, 
 33 TTotely (reavrbv 3eoV. 19, 7. 12. 1 John 
 1,10. So Jos. Ant 2. 11.2 TroieTrai avrbv 
 vlov i. e. declares him a son, adopts him ; 
 comp. ib. 3. 12. 4. /3) With an Adj. as 
 predicate; e. g. of persons, Matt. 20, 12 
 urovs Jjnuf avTovs (TroiTjcras. 28, 14. John 
 16, 2. Rev. 12, 15. In the sense of declaring, 
 John 5, 18, comp. above in a. (Hdian. 5. 1. 
 8. Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 15.) Of things, Eph. 
 2, 14 6 Trotijcrar ra ufjL(p6rfpa ei>. (./El. V. H. 
 14. 32. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 22.) Once to make 
 by supposition, i. q. to suppose, to judge, to 
 assume, Matt. 12, 33 r) Troujo-are TO SeVSpoi/ 
 eaXoV, KOI rbv Kapirbv avrov KO\OV KT\. i. C. 
 either assume the tree to be good and its 
 fruit good, or the contrary. Comp. Herm. 
 .ad Vig. p. 759. So Hdot. 7. 186. Dion. 
 Hal. Ant. 4. 6. Xen. An. 5. 7. 9 TTOIO) 8 
 i>p.as (^UTTarrj SfVTas . . . vtf ffjLov rJKtiv els $a- 
 <riv. In this construction also Trotdv, with 
 tho ace. of the adj. often forms a periphrasis 
 for the kindred verb; e. g. ACT. 8jj\ov 
 ivoiflv to make manifest, to betray, i. q. 8r/\ovv 
 to manifest, Matt. 26, 73 (Xen. An. 3. 5. 
 17) ; (K%fTov itoifiv, i. q. eVriSeVai, to ex 
 pose infants, Acts 7, 19; *v3e/aj Ttoielv 
 ras Tpifiovs to make straight and level (he 
 ways, i. q. etevvfiv, Matt. 3, 3. Mark 1, 3. 
 Luke 3.4; comp. John 1, 23; Xevicovv. 
 (j.f\av TToulv to make while or black, i. q. 
 \fvK(uvfiv \ . p.(\aivtiv, Matt. 5, 36: vytrj 
 Ttoifiv to make whole, to heal, i. q. vyiajjeiz/, 
 John 5. 11. 15. 7, 23. (Palaeph. 27. 3.) 
 (pavfpbv Troiflv to make known, to betray, 
 i. q. fyavtpovv, Matt. 12, 16. Mark 3, 12. 
 (Hdian. 2. 8. 10. Xen. Cyr. 8. 4. 34.) MID. 
 /3 1 /3 a i o v TToifltrSat to make firm, sure, i. q. 
 j3aioCo-3ai, 2 Pet. 1, 10. y) With an 
 Adv. as predicate, TTOK IV riva eeo, to make 
 one be or go out, to cause to go out, to put 
 forth ; comp. Viger. p. 283. n. Acts 5, 34 
 Kf\(v<r(i> eo> ftpaxv n TOVS unocrro\ovs 
 Troiijcrat. So ^El. V. H. 10. 3 Ta ruiv irfpdi- 
 toTTia, fTTtiSav ra^tcrra TOVS TroSar e ^ca 
 
 iroiTjcrT) TOV Xf/i/xaroy. Xen Cyr. 4. 1. 3 ? 
 jSeXecoi/ TTJV rd^iv Troii^cras. 
 
 2. to do, expressing an action as conti 
 nued or not yet completed ; what one does 
 repeatedly, continuedly, habitually ; like 
 Trpatrcrco. Comp. Passow s. v. 
 
 a) With an ace. of thing, and without 
 reference to a person as the remote object ; 
 comp. below in lett. d. a) With ace. of 
 pron. or the like, to do, genr. Matt. 5, 47 rt 
 TTfpicrcroi note ire ; Mark 11, 3 TI TrotetTf 
 rovro ; 14,86 ecr^fi our?;, eVoi j/cre. Luke 
 6, 2. 3. Matt. 8, 9 mltftror TOVTO, Kal iroifi. 
 Luke 7, 8. 20, 2 ev nota e ovcr/a ravra 
 jroie is; John 19, 24. Act s 1, 1. l4, 15. 
 1 Cor. 7, 36. 15, 29. Gal. 2, 10 avrb TOVTO 
 TTOiija-at. Eph. 6, 9. Phil. 2, 14 Trdira TTOI- 
 ( iTf. Col. 3, 17. 1 Tim. 5, 21 fiTjo tv TTOIWJ/. 
 James 4, 15. al. With a participle follow 
 ing, Mark 11, 5 ri Troierre Xvovrts TOV irS>- 
 \ov, as in Engl. what do ye loosing the colt ? 
 Acts 11, 30. 21, 13. Sept. genr. for nb5 
 1 K. 7, 23. 2 K. 6, 21. ssep. So Hdian. V 
 8. 10 TI Totovro. Xen. An. 1. 4. 17 rairra 
 Mem. 1. 3. 1. /3) With ace. of a Subst 
 commonly of particular deeds, acts, works, 
 done repeatedly or continuedly, to do, to 
 perform, to execute, to work; e. g. iroie iv 
 TU epya TOV A/3paa/i John 8, 39. 41 ; T 
 Trpcora epya Rev. 2, 5 ; ra epya TOV SfoG 
 
 1. e. the works which God requires, John 
 10, 37. 38; epyov tvayyf\i<TTov 2 Tim. 4, 
 5 ; TT. f\(os to do mercy, to show mercy, 
 James 2, 13 ; TT. f\frjfjLoo-vvrji> to do alms, 
 to give alms, Matt. 6, 2. 3. Acts 10, 2. 24, 
 17; TT. 8iKaio(rvvTjv id. Matt. 6, 1. So of 
 mighty Seeds, wonders, miracles, e. g. 8wu- 
 /xets Matt. 7, 22. 13, 58 ; epya John 5, 36. 
 10, 25; Kpuros Luke 1, 51 ; a-^/xeia John 
 
 2, 11. 23. 4, 54. 6, 30. 11,47; rt para Kal 
 (rrjufla Acts 6, 8. 7, 36. 15, 12; genr. 
 Matt. 9, 23. Acts 14, 11. al. Sept. and 
 niUS Ex. 4, 17. Ps. 72, 18. 77, 15. Also 
 of the will, precept, requirement of any 
 one, to do, to perform, to fulfil ; as Matt. 
 21, 31 T/S (K TUIV 8vo eVotr/o-e TO 3 Xr//ia rof/ 
 Trarpov; 23, 3. Mark 6, 20 ical HpuSrjs . . . 
 TroXXa tTfoirjcrf, i. e. which John admonished 
 him to do. Luke 17, 9. 10. John 2, 5. Acts 
 16, 21. Eph. 2, 3. Rev. 17, 17. (Hdian. 6. 
 1. 23. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 5.) So of the pre 
 cepts of God or of Christ, Matt. 5, 19. 7, 
 216 TToiwi/ TO 3e Xj7/ua TOV Trarpo y /xov. V. 24. 
 26. Luke 6, 46. 8, 21. John 7, 19 TOV vo- 
 fjiov. Acts 13, 22. Rev. 22, 14. Of that 
 which one asks, entreats, promises ; John 
 14, 13 O,TI av aiTT](TriT . . . eyo) TTOICO. V. 14. 
 Rom. 4, 21 6 eViyyyfXrat, Suwror e crrt KO.I 
 
 i. Eph. 3, 20. 1 Thess. 5, 24 ; with 
 
602 
 
 dat. of pers. Mark 10, 35 Iva o eav aiYqcreo- 
 fj.tv, TTOiTjo-rjs Tjp.lv. v. 36. Of a purpose, 
 plan, decree, Acts 4, 28. Rom. 9, 28 \6yov 
 <7vvreTp.iip.fvov Trojjjcrei Kvpios the Lord ivill 
 execute his word decreed, the judgment 
 threatened. 2 Cor. 8, 10. 11. Gal. 5, 17, 
 Eph. 3, 11. y) Spoken of a course of 
 action or conduct, to do, i. q. to execute, to 
 exercise, to practise ; e. g. Kpia-tv iroifiv to 
 do judgment, to act as judge, i. q. Kpiveiv, 
 John 5, 27. Jude 15. (Xen. Hell. 4. 2. 6, 
 8.) Also Ti]v f^ovaiav TWOS noielv, to exer 
 cise the power of any one, Rev. 13, 12. 
 Spec, of right, duty, virtue ; Rom. 2, 14 ra 
 TOV VOJJLOV rroiy. 10,5; TTJV d\rfieiav John 
 3, 21. 1 John 1,6; TTJV bucauKrvjnjv 1 John 
 
 2, 29. 3, 7 ; TTOL&V xp r ) a " r( J Tr l Ta Rom. 3, 12. 
 Also Matt. 19, 16 ri dyaSoi/ iroiij(ra>; John 
 
 5, 29. 8, 29 TO. dpfo-Td. Rom. 7, 19. Eph. 
 
 6, 8. James 4, 17 tcaXov Troiflv. 3 John 5. 
 So Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 15 TO. biitaia TTOL&V. 5. 
 
 3. 48 Ka\6v TI froiovvTfs. Sept. and niys 
 Ps. 14, 3. Gen. 18, 19. al. 8) Of evil 
 deeds or conduct, to do, to commit, to prac- 
 llte, e. g. ap.dprr)p.a 1 Cor. 6, 18 ; TTJV dp.ap- 
 Tiav John 8, 34. 2 Cor. 11,7. 1 John 3, 4 ; 
 rr)i> dvop.iav Matt. 13, 41. 1 John 3, 4 ; ajia 
 7r\r)y5>v Luke 12, 48 ; avrd Rom. 1, 32. 2, 
 3; j88e \vyfj.a Rev. 21, 27; TO epyov TOVTO 
 1 Cor. 5, 2. 3 John 10; TU p.r) Ka^rjKovra 
 Rom. 1, 28; ovSev evdvriov TIVI Acts 28, 
 1 7 ; KCIKOV Matt. 27, 23. Luke 23, 22 ; Hand 
 Rom. 3, 8. 1 Pet. 3, 12; TrovTjpd Luke 3, 
 19; (povov Mark 15, 7; ^e?.8os Rev. 22, 
 15; genr. John 7, 51. 18, 35. Acts 21, 33. 
 1 Tim. 1.13. al. Sept. and flUS p s . 51,6. 
 Gen. 34, 7. al. So Hdian. 1. 16. 13 pjSeV 
 dvdiov. Luc. Pise. 9 TToXXa adixa. Xen. 
 Cyr. 5. 3. 48 al&xpov ri rroiflv. 
 
 b) Intrans. to do, to act, e. g. a) Absol. 
 
 1. q. to lie active, to work, Matt. 20, 12 ovroi 
 oi f&xaToi fiiav <apav fTroirjaav. Rev. 13, 5 
 e 8o37 avTa> eov<ri a Troirja-ai p.r}vas KT\. 
 Sept. and Fibs Ruth 2, 19; comp. Xen. 
 An. 1. 5. 8. Mem. 3. 9. 9. Others refer 
 both these passages to lett. e, below. /3) 
 With an adv. of manner, to do so and so, to 
 act in any manner, e. g. KaX5>s Matt. 12, 12. 
 1 Cor. 7 37; and so c. particip. Acts 10, 
 33 /caXcas ivoijjaras Tvapa.yfv6ii.fvos. Phil. 4, 
 
 14. 3 John 6. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 13 KoX&s 
 eiroiTjiras TrpoeiTrcoi/.) With Kpfiwov 1 Cor. 
 
 7, 38; ourw John 14, 31. 1 Cor. 16, 1 ; 
 (ppov{p.o>9. Luke 16, 8; cos Matt. 1, 24. 28, 
 
 15. Also Kara TI jroiflv Matt. 23, 3. Luke 
 
 2, 27 ; Trpos TI Luke 12, 47. So Dem. 17. 9 
 
 lav K(l\a>S TTOlOVVTfS KfKTTjVTai. 141. 19. 
 
 Luc. D. Mort. 11. 3 eu enoirja-av. 
 
 c) Spec. Troie o), like Engl. to do, is often 
 
 used in the latter member of a sentence, 
 instead of repeating the verb of the preced 
 ing member ; see Passow s. v. E. g. with 
 ace. of thing, Matt. 5, 46 edv yap dya-n-jja-JjTf 
 TOVS dyaTTcavras v/xur, TWO. pio-Suv e^ere ; 
 oi^i Kai oi TtXcbvai TO ai>To TTOIOVCTIV ; Luke 
 6, 10. Rom. 12, 20 lav 8i\^a, TTOTI^ OVTOV 
 TOVTO ydp TTOIOU/ KT\. Heb. 6, 3. With an 
 adv. as OVTO>, Matt. 5, 47 tdv do-ndcrr)<r :3f 
 TOVS d8t\(povs...ov\l Kal oi e 3i/iKoi OVTQ> 
 TToiovo-iv ; 24, 46 comp. 45. Luke 9, 15. 
 Acts 12. 8; 6/Wo)s iroitlv Luke 3, 11. 10, 
 37 ; coy, Matt. 6, 2 HTJ crakTricrrjs ffiTrpocr SSef 
 
 (TOV, OHTTTfp oi VTTOKpLTal TTQIOIHTLV. Luke 9, 
 
 54 ; Qxravrwy Matt. 20, 5 ; KaScor 1 Thess. 
 5, 11. So c. ace. Dem. 1148. 13 pdStW 
 fTTLOpK.f](rfiv, oTTfp Kal u\\ots TTfTroirjKf. Luc. 
 de Merc. cond. 7 co? TTODJO-OVCTI. 
 
 d) Spoken in reference to a person, to do 
 to or as to any one, i. e. either for or against 
 him ; the person being the remoter object, 
 a) With ace. of person, also c. ace. of thing ; 
 Matt. 27, 22 TI ovv TrotTjo-co irja-olv , Mark 
 15, 12. With an adv. ev Troielv Tiva, Engl. 
 to do one good, Mark 14, 7 ; comp. Buttm. 
 5131.5. Matth. J 415. So Xen. Mem. 2. 
 2. 8 avTTjv OUT etTra OUT eVottyfra ov8ev. 
 An. 1. 9. 11. Mem. 2. 1. 19 TOVS (pi\ovs 
 ev TTOIWO-I. /3) With dat. of pers. see 
 Matth. ^ 415. n. 1. Viger. p. 289. n. E. g. 
 lo or for any one, in his behalf, c. ace. of 
 thing. Matt. 20 ; 32 TI SeXere Troiryo-w v^uv. 
 Mark 5, 19 ocra croi 6 Kvpios TTfTroirjKf. V. 20. * 
 Luke 1, 49. John 9, 26. 12, 16 ; ace. impl. 
 Matt. 25, 40. 45. With an adv. Matt. 5, 44 
 KuXto? Troteire Tols picrovcriv v/j.ds. Mark 15. 
 8. Luke 1, 25. John 13, 15. Sept. and 
 nyy Gen. 21, 1. (Plato Apol. Socr. 17 
 TavTa Kal i fu>Tfp(o Kal 7rpe(r/3uTe po> . . .TTOIT]- 
 crco, Kal (va> Kal UCTTW. Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 
 8.) Also against any one, to his detriment, 
 c. ace. of thing, Acts 9, 13 oo-a KUKO. fTrolrjo-t 
 Tols ayiois. John 15. 21. Heb. 13, 6. With 
 an adv. Matt. 21. 36. Luke 2, 48. Sept. 
 and n&S Gen. 20, 9. (Dem. 855. 15. Xen. 
 OZc. 2. 9.) Or, genr. in respect to any 
 one, in his case ; c. ace. of thing, Matt. 7, 
 12. 21, 40. Mark 9, 13. Acts 4, 16; c. 
 adv. Matt. 7, 12. Luke 6, 23. 26. 31. Comp. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 16 iroielv TI irpos Ttva. 
 y) With fv c. dat. of pers. to do in respect 
 to any one, in his case ; c. ace. of thing ; 
 Matt. 17, 12 HXt as fJ8rj ^X3e...aXX firoirj- 
 o~av ev aiiTco ocra rfi(\r)o~av. Luke 23, 31. 
 Comp. Winer $ 31. 6. So Sept. Gen. 40, 
 14 TT. eV ffiol eXtos- Luc. Philopatr. 18 ftfj 
 (Tfpelov TI Troir](Ti]S tv efjiot. S) With /*era 
 c. gen. of pers. to do with any one, by He 
 braism ; see in p.t TO. I. 2. c. e. Luke 1, 72 
 
603 
 
 iroirjo-ai tXfos p.(T<i TO>J> Trarepw. 10, 37. 
 Acts 14, 27. 15, 4. Sept. for CS fibs 
 Gen. 24, 12. 14. Ps. 119, 65. So fob. 12* 
 6. Judith 8, 26. 
 
 e) Spec, with an accus. of time, pr. in- 
 trans. to do or act for a certain time, or as 
 in comm. Engl. to do up a certain time, i. q. 
 to spend, to pass; comp. Lat. transigere vi- 
 tam Sail. Cat. 2. Acts 15, 33 TroiTjo-ai/re? 
 Se xpovov. 18, 23. 20, 3 iroirjaas re r^ispas 
 Tpfis. 2 Cor. 11, 25 w^^fpov tv TU> j3v3w 
 iTfTroirjKa. James 4, 13. Perhaps Matt. 20, 
 
 12. Rev. 13, 5", better as above in no. 2. b. 
 a. Sept. for nfoS Ecc. 6, 12. Sept. Prov. 
 
 13, 24. Jos. Ant. 6. 1.4 TT. ^rjvas Tttra-apas. 
 Dion. Hal. Ant. 6. 5. Dem. 392/18 ovS" 
 (Troirjo-av xpovov ovdtva. This usage ap 
 pears to belong to the later Greek, see 
 Sturz de Dial. Maced. p. 189. Viger. p. 281. 
 n ; contra, Stallbaum ad Plat. Phileb. p. 
 158. + 
 
 TTOtT^yLta, CITOS, TO, (TTOU W.) a thing made, 
 work. Rom. 1, 20 ra dopara avrov . . . rots 
 TTOUj/iacri voovfMfva KaSoparai. Trop. Eph. 
 2, 10. Sept. for nbsa Ecc. 3, 11 ; IS* 
 Is. 29, 16. Luc. de Dea Syra 29, 49. 
 Plato Menex. 97. e. 
 
 TTOIT/O IS , f<Bj, ^, (TToiew.) a ranking, Jos. 
 Ant. 18. 3. 1 ; vt<av TVO LTJO-IV Thnc. 3. 2. 
 In N. T. a doing, keeping of a la\v ; James 
 1, 25 tv TJI jroiTjcrti sc. TOV vofjiov. So Ec- 
 clus. 19, 17 TroiTjo-if vofjiov. Test. XII Patr. 
 p. 681. 
 
 TTOi^TT??, oi5, 6, (TTOU OJ,) 1. a maker 
 of any thing, inventor, Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 38 
 jr. p.Tjxavr]iJ.a.Ta>v. In N. T. 
 
 1 . a doer, keeper of a law or precept ; 
 Rom. 2, 13 01 Tronjral TOV v6p.ov. James 1, 
 22. 23. 4, 11. ib. 1, 25 TT. tpyov intens. a 
 doer of the deed, i. q. a doer indeed of the 
 law. 1 Mace. 2, 67. 
 
 2. a poet, maker of a poem, Acts 17, 28. 
 Ceb. Tab. 13. jEschin. 20. 4. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 2. 56. 
 
 T], ov, pr. many-coloured, 
 spotted, variegated, Sept. for 1p3 Gen. 31, 
 8. 10. 12. Ceb. Tab. 21. Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 
 14. In N. T. various, divers, manifold ; as 
 jroiKiXaLs voo-ots Matt. 4, 24. Mark 1, 34. 
 Luke 4, 40 ; 7rt3v/iiais ITOIK. 2 Tim. 3, 6. 
 Tit. 3, 3. Hob. 2, 4 TTOIK. o~vvdp.tn. 13, 9. 
 James 1, 2. 1 Pet. 1,6. 4, 10 KOIKES x<J- 
 prror 2eoC, i. e. of his manifold grace, vari 
 ous gifts. So 2 Mace. 15, 21. Hdian. 4. 
 2. 13. Xen. CEc. 16. 1. 
 
 TTOlfJ,aiV(i), f. avu>, (iroifJLTjv,) 1. to feed 
 a flock or herd, to let feed, to pasture, to tend, 
 
 c. ace. Luke 17, 7 SoOXoi e^coi/ . . . TOI/ZCU- 
 vovra. 1 Cor. 9, 7. Sept. for ns-v Gen. 
 30, 31. 36. Ex. 3, 1. Luc. D. DeVr. 4. 4. 
 Dem. 1155. 3. Plato Rep. 345. c. 
 
 2. Trop. to feed, to cherish, to provide for, 
 e. g. kings and princes their people, Matt. 
 2, 6 OOTIS Troi/iayet TOV Xaoi/ p.ov. Rev. 7, 
 17 ; and so pastors and teachers the church, 
 John 21, 16. Acts 20, 28 -rroip-aivfiv TTJV 
 (KK\rjcrtav. 1 Pet. 5, 2. Sept. for n~" < . 
 2 Sam. 5, 2. 1 Chr. 11, 2. (So Anacr. Od . 
 60. 8. Plato Lys. 209. a.) Spec, to rule, 
 to govern, with severity ; Rev. 2, 27 iroi- 
 pavfi avToiis tv pa/38o> atSr/pa. 12, 5. 19, 
 15. Sept. and Mr") Mic. 5, 6. 7, 14. In 
 
 T T 
 
 a bad sense, Ttoip.. favrov, to feed or cherish 
 oneself, to take care of oneself, at the ex 
 pense of others, Jude 12. Comp. Sept. 
 Prov. 29, 3. Ez. 34, 8 eftoo-Krjcrav ol Troi/xeVer 
 tavTovs. 
 
 iroifJL ijVi fvos, 6, I. a herdsman, shep 
 herd, one who tends herds or flocks ; Matt. 
 9, 36 7rpo/3ara p.rj e^ovra rroi^ieVa. 25, 32. 
 Mark 6, 34. Luke 2, 8. 15. 18. 20. Sept. 
 for ns l Gen. 4, 2. Num. 27, 17. Dem. 
 1155. 4. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 9. 
 
 2. Trop. a) Of Jesus, as the Great 
 Shepherd, who watches over and provides 
 for the welfare of the church, his flock ; 
 Matt. 26, 31 et Mark 14, 27 ira.Taa> TOV 
 Troipeva KT\. quoted from Zech. 13,7 where 
 Sept. for nsn . John 10, 2. 1 1 bis. 12. 14. 16. 
 1 Pet. 2, 25. Heb. 13, 20. Sept. for ns l 
 of the Messiah, Ez. 34, 23. 37, 24. So 
 Act. Thorn. ^ 25 Troi/ijjp dyaSoy, of Christ. 
 Also of a king as iroi^v \a<av Horn. II. 1. 
 263. Xen. Mem. 3. 2. 1. b) Spec, a pas 
 tor, the teacher and spiritual guide of a par 
 ticular church. Eph. 4,11. Sept. and ns"i 
 Jer. 2, 8. 3, 15. Ez. 34, 2. 5 sq. 
 
 TTOi/iz^;, TJS, TI, (noip.r)v,) a flock, espec. 
 of sheep, Matt. 26, 31. Luke 2, 8. 1 Cor. 
 9, 7 bis. Sept. for VJ? Gen. 32, 17. So 
 Dem. 1155. 5. Plato "Rep. 415. e. Trop. 
 the flock of Christ, his disciples, church, 
 John 10, 16; comp. in noi^viov. So Act. 
 Thorn. $ 25. 
 
 TTOifAVtov, ov, TO, (sync, for iroiptviov, 
 Troip.fjv. ) a flock, i. q. noip.vr], Sept. for "ins 
 Gen. 29, 2. 3 ; "^S Gen. 31,4. 1 Sam. 14~ 
 32. Luc. D. Deor. 4. 2, 3. Plato Rep. 416. 
 a. In N. T. only trop. the flock of Christ, 
 his disciples, church, Luke, 12,32. Acts 20, 
 28. 29. 1 Pet. 5, 2. 3. Comp. Sept. TO v. 
 Kvpiov for -ny Jer. 13, 17. Zech. 10, 3. 
 So Psalt. Salom. 17, 45. Themist. Orat. 
 23. p. 289, i. q. disciples. 
 
TTOtO? 
 
 604 
 
 7T0409, Troi a, TTOIOJ/, interrog. correl. pron. 
 corresponding to olos, rotor, Buttm. 79. 
 
 1 . Pr. ?iAa< ? <if u-liat kind or sort ? Lat. 
 qualis ; Mark 4, 30 eV TTOIO Trapaj3d\f) Trapa- 
 /3dXo>/iei> avrijf. Luke 6, 32 Troi a vpiV X^/ 3 ? 
 eon ; v. 33. 34. 24, 19. John 12, 33 TTOI W 
 3avarw. 18, 32. 21, 19. Acts 7, 49. Rom. 
 3, 27. 1 Cor. 15, 35. James 4, 14 Troi a yap 
 7 a7 vpa>i/ ; comp. in Troi a. 1 Pet. 1 , 11. 
 2, 20. So ev Troi a fgovo-ia by what authori 
 ty, i. q. by whose authority, Matt. 21, 23. 
 24. 27. Mark 11, 28. 29." 33. Luke 20, 2. 
 8. Acts 4, 7 bis, eV Troi a 8vvdp.fi, jj eV TTOI CO 
 oVdpart ; Adv. Luke 5, 19 Troi ay. or as in 
 Rec. Sia Troi ay, (sc. oSoC,) what way, how ; 
 comp. Si eKfiivjs 19, 4. Sept. for nt ^X 
 1 K. 22, 24. Ceb. Tab. 12. Hdian. 1*17. 
 13. Xen. Mem. 3. 12. 8. 
 
 2. what one 1 sc. out of a number, i. q. 
 what? which? Matt. 19, 18. 22, 36 Troi a 
 eiroXr/ peydX?7 ev ra> voficp , 24, 42 TTOIO 
 c5pa. v. 43. Mark 12, 2s! Luke 12, 39. 
 John 10, 32 Sia TTOIOI> avr<Sv tpywv. Acts 
 23, 34. Rev. 3, 3. Sept. for nt IK 2 Sam. 
 15, 2. Jonah 1, 8. 1 Mace. 2, 10. Ceb. 
 Tab. 6. Xen. Mem. 2. 4. 5. 
 
 j, , f. Tjo-o), (TroAfpoj,) to war, 
 to make war, to fight, with Kara c. gen. Rev. 
 12, 7 6 Mi^ajjX . . . TOV TTo\(fjLrjcrai Kara TOV 
 BpaKovros, (later edit. pera r. 6\) see in 6, 17, 
 rd, G. 3. b. y. By Hebr. with perd c. gen. 
 Rev. 2, 16 TroXepjjo-a) per* avrwj/. 13, 4. 
 17, 14. So Sept. perd for Heb. H? fipfo 
 Judg. 11, 5. 20. 2 K. 14, 15; 3/3 Judg. 
 11, 25 ; see in perd I. 2. c. a. (The usual 
 Greek construction is c. dat. Matth. 5 404. c. 
 Buttm. J133. 2. a.) Absol. Rev. 12, 7; 
 once joined with *piVo>, 19, 11 ev SiKaioa-viy 
 (cpiVct cai TroXepei, zra righteousness doth he 
 judge and make war, i. e. upon those whom 
 he condemns, in order to punish them ; 
 comp. Jer. 21, 5, also TrdXepo? %e>v Xen. 
 An. 2. 5. 7. So c. dat. Jos. c. Ap. 1. 29. 
 Hdian. 2. 1 1. 7. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 10. Hyper- 
 bol. once to u-ar, i. q. to strive violently, to 
 wrangle, to quarrel, James 4, 2 pa^eo-St KOI 
 TroXfpeire, OVK e^ere Sia TO pj) KrX. Sept. 
 and part. cr6 Ps. 56. 2. 3, comp. v. 6. So 
 Diod. Sic. 13. 84. 
 
 TroXe/io?, ov, 6, (VcXo/icu, kindr. Lat. 
 , bellum,) pr. agitation, tumult; hence 
 , battle, war. 
 
 1. a ./ g Ttf, battle, 1 Cor. 14, 8 n r Trapa- 
 at cis TroXepoi/; Heb. 11, 34 to~^v- 
 poi TroXepw. Rev. 9, 7. 9. 12, 7. 16, 14. 
 20, 8. So iroiT)<rai TroXep.oi> perd TWOS, to do 
 battle, to fight, to make war with any one, 
 i. q. TToXeuelj/, Rev. 11,7. 12. 17. 13, 7. 
 
 19, 19 ; see in Troteco no. 1. b, and TroXfp. w 
 Sept. and ^nbn Ex. 13, 17. 2 Sam. 19, 10. 
 Job 39, 25. So ;E1. V. H. 3. 9. Diod. Sic. 
 13. 79. Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 4. Hyperbol. once 
 for violent strife, wrangling, quarrel, James 
 4, 1. So Hdian. 1. 11. 4. Plato Pha3do 11. 
 p. 66. c. 
 
 2. Genr. ivar, Matt. 24, 6 bis, anoveiv TTO- 
 \ffjLovs Kal aKoas iroXepav. Mark 13, 7 bis. 
 Luke 14, 31. 21, 9. Sept. and S-raribn 
 Ex. 1, 10. 2 K. 3, 7. Pol. 3. 7. 1, 2. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 4. 1 4. 
 
 TToXi?, fcos, 17, (TroXe w, Trt Xopai,) a city, 
 pr. enclosed with a wall, a walled town. 
 
 1. Pr. and genr. a city; Matt. 2, 23 KOTW- 
 KTjcrfv eiy TrdXii* \fyofj.fvr]v Na^ape r. Mark 
 6, 56. Luke 8, 1. John 11, 54. 2 Cor. 11, 
 26. al. saep. Sept. for ^ h ? Gen. 4, 16. 11, 
 4. saep. So Hdian. 3. 1. 10, 14. Xen. 
 Mem. 3.1.1 . In various constructions : 
 
 a) With the art. fj TroX/s, the city, i. e. known 
 or before mentioned, as Matt. 21, 17. 18, 
 comp. v. 10. Mark 11, 19 comp. v. 1. John 
 
 4, 8. 28. 30, comp. v. 5. Acts 8, 9, comp. v. 
 
 5. al. Or KCIT f&xrjv, the city, i. q. the chief 
 city, metropolis, e. g. Jerusalem Matt. 26, 
 18. Luke 7. 37. 24, 49. Acts 12, 10. (Jos. 
 Ant. 10. 3. 1, 2.) So of Gadara Matt. 8, 
 33 comp. v. 28. Mark 5, 14. Luke 8, 34. 
 
 b) With an adj. or like adjunct, Matt. 10, 14. 
 15 TI; TroXei tKeivT}. Acts 19, 29 r; TT. O\TJ. 26, 
 11 els raj ?&> TrdXfiy. Rev. 16, 19 r] TrdXir 17 
 peydX?; sc. Ba/3uXa>i/. 18, 10. 21. 8017 iSi a 
 Tro Xis one s own city, \. e. in which one 
 dwells, Matt. 9, 1 comp. 4, 13 ; or, the chief 
 city of one s family, Luke 2, 3 ; 17 dyi a TTO- 
 Xty, the Holy Cily, i. e. Jerusalem as the 
 public seat of God s worship, Matt. 4, 5. 
 Rev. 11, 2. Sept. and ^^} -P? Neh. 11, 
 1. Is. 52, 1. Called also 17 TroXis 17 f)ycnrT)p.evr) 
 in a like sense, Rev. 20, 9. c) With gen. 
 of pers. the city of any one, i. e. one s native 
 city, TT. Aa/3i S Luke 2, 4. 1 1 . (2 Jhr. 8, 1 1.) 
 Or in which one dwells, Luke 4, 29. John 
 
 I, 45. Rev. 16, 19 ; TT. rov peydXov /3ao-iXe a>r, 
 
 1. e. where God dwells, Matt. 5, 35, comp. 
 Ps. 48. 2. Tob. 13, 15. With gen. of a 
 gentile name, Matt. 10, 5 els TTO^IV 2apap* i- 
 rS>v. v. 23. Luke 23, 51. Acts 19, 35. 2 Cor 
 1 1 , 32. d) With the pr. n. of the city sub 
 joined; e. g. in apposit. in the same case, 
 Luke 2, 4 c TrdXewy Nafape r. V. 39. Acts 
 
 II, 5. 27, 8^; so prob. Luke 1, 39 fig noKiv 
 lovSa, i. e. Jutah or Juttah ; see in art. 
 louSa. Or in the genit. Acts 16, 14. 2 Pet. 
 
 2, 6 Tro Xfif 2o&o pa>i> *cai F. comp. Winer 
 5 48. 2. So Apollon. Argon. 2. 654 or 656 
 Trro Xti Opxofj-fvolo. e) With a gen. of 
 region or province, Luke 1, 26 ds TTO\IV rv 
 
605 
 
 TTO/VU? 
 
 PoXiXaiaj. John 4, 5. Acts 21,39; impl. 
 Matt. 14, 13. Luke 5, 12. So some Luke 
 
 1, 39 els iroXiv lov8a, a city of Judah ; but 
 see in lett. d. 
 
 2. Melon, for the inhabitants of a city, 
 Matt. 8, 34 naa-a 17 TroXir ^iyXSei/. 21, 10. 
 Mark 1,33. Acts 13, 44. 21, 30. al. Hdian. 
 
 2. 11. 6. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 25. 
 
 3. Symbol, the city, spoken of the celes 
 tial or spiritual Jerusalem, the seat of the 
 Messiah s kingdom, described as descending 
 out of heaven ; Rev. 3, 12. 21,2 ri^ TTO\IV 
 Ti}V ayiav, if payer. Kaivrjv, fidov KdTaftaivov- 
 <rav (K TOV ovpavov. v. 10. 14 sq. 22, 14. 19. 
 Heb. 11, 10. 16. 12,22. See Schoettgen s 
 Dissert, in Hor. Heb. I. p. 1205 sq. -f 
 
 TroXLTapXTjs, ov, 6, (JTO\IS, (ipx^>) a city- 
 ruler, prefect, magistrate, Acts 17, 6. 8. 
 Greek writers use the form iroXirapxos, 
 ^Eneas c. 26 ; or better TroXiap^os Find. 
 Nem. 7. 125. Plut. Themist. 19. 
 
 TToXiTet a, as, fj, (n-oXtreua),) pr. the 
 being a free citizen, the relation of a free 
 citizen to the state ; hence 
 
 1. citizenship, the right of citizenship, 
 freedom of a city, Acts 22, 28. 3 Mace. 3, 
 21. 23. Dem. 161. 16. Xen. Hell. 1. 1.26. 
 
 2. the state itself, a community, common 
 wealth, Eph. 2, 12 TT. TOV icrpajjX. 2 Mace. 
 4, 11. Pol. 6. 14. 4. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 13. 
 
 , arcs, TO, (TToXtreva.) ad 
 ministration of the slate, any public, measure, 
 Dem. 107. 25. Plato Legg. 945. d. In 
 N. T. the state itself, a community, common 
 wealth, trop. of Christians in reference to 
 their spiritual community, the new Jerusa 
 lem in heaven, Phil. 3, 20. (So pr. 2 Mace. 
 12, 7. Jos. Ant. prooem. 3. Pol. 2. 41. 6.) 
 Others : walk, life, conduct ; comp. TroXiTevco 
 Phil. 1,27. 
 
 TroXtrevft), f. evcrw, (7roXiV;y.) to admin 
 ister the slate, Thuc. 2. 37, 65 ; to live as a 
 free citizen Pol. 4. 76. 2. Xen. Hell. 3. 1. 
 21. Oftener and in N. T. Mid. depon. TTO- 
 \iTevop.ai, f. tv<Top.ai, to be a citizen of a 
 state, to lire as a good citizen, to conduct 
 oneself according to the laws and customs 
 of a state, pr. Dem. 665. 20. Hence in 
 N. T. genr. to Ihe, to order one s life and 
 conduct, PC. according to a certain rule, c. 
 adv. Phil. 1 . 27 allots TOV evayyeXi ou TTO\I- 
 Tfvfo-^f. With dat. of manner and dat. of 
 pers. Acts 23, 1 ira.o~rj crvvtio ficrfi dyaSjJ 
 rreTroXtVeufiai ra> 3ec3, i. e. to or for God, ac 
 cording to his will ; comp. in Geo p no. 1. c. 
 So 2 Mace. 6, 1 roTy TOV Scot) vop.ois. 3 Mace. 
 3. 4. Jos. de Vit. 2. de Mace. } 4 TO TTO- 
 
 7roXiT779, ov, 6, (TrdXiy,) a citizen, a mem 
 ber of a city or state, a freeman; Acts 21, 
 39 OVK acrrmov Tro Xeco? iro\irt}s. Luke 15, 
 15. So 2 Mace. 5, 23. 24. Hdian. 8. 2. 9. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 6. 14. With gen. avrov, i. q. 
 fellow-citizen, Luke 19, 14; also Heb. 8, 
 11 in later edit, where Rec. TOV TrXno-iov. 
 Sept. for ^"S Gen. 23, 11 ; ?"! Jer. 31, 
 34. Prov. 24, 28. So Hdian. 3. 10. 11. 
 Xen. Hell. 6. 3. 6. 
 
 TToXXa, see TTO\VS. 
 
 TToXXa/a?, adv. (rroXv?,) many times, 
 often, Matt. 17, 15 bis. Mark 5, 4. 9, 22. 
 John 1 8, 2. Acts 26, 1 1 . Rom. 1,13. [15, 22.] 
 2 Cor. 8, 22. 11, 23. 26. 27 bis. Phil. 3, 18. 
 2 Tim. 1,16. Heb. 6,7. 9,25.26. 10,11. 
 Palaeph. 21. 2. Xen. Mem. 3. 12. 6. 
 
 7ro\Xa7r\a(Ti(t)i , ovos, 6, fj, adj. (TTO- 
 Xvs,) manifold, many times mote, Luke 18, 
 30. Test. XII Patr. p. 640. Pol. 35. 4. 4. 
 The form TroXXan-Xacrios is more common, 
 Jos. B. J. 5. 13. 5. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 7. 
 Comp. Buttm. 71. 3. 
 
 7ro\veva7r\a<y-xyo?, see in ir\v- 
 
 as, fj, (TroXvXo yor ; iroXvs, 
 Xe ya>,) much speaking, loquacity, Matt. 6. 
 7. Sept. for D-HM ah Prov. 10, 19. Plut. 
 de Curiosit. 9 init. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 3. 
 
 7ToXu/ie/3(M9, adv. (TroXv/iep/r ; iroXvs, 
 pepos.) in many parts, in manifold ways, 
 Heb. 1, 1. Jos. Ant. 8. 3. 9 TOVTU TTOVTO 
 6 ZoXtyidii fls Trjv 3eoi) Tiprjv Tro\v[J.ep>s 
 KOI fJLfyaXoTTpfrru>s KdTfcrKfvao-f. Comp. 
 T)s Aristot. Part. An. 4. 6. 1 . 
 
 ov, 6, 17, adj. (n-oXvy, 
 ,) much variegated, TT. (pdpea Soph. 
 Iph. Taur. 1155. In N. T. very various, 
 manifold, multifarious, e. g. TJ IT. crocpia 
 TOV 3eoD Eph. 3, 10. 
 
 7roXv9, TroXX?;, TroXv, Genit. TroXXoO, fjs, 
 ov, see Buttm. { 64. 1. Comparat. TrXei- 
 a>v, Superl. TrXeto-ror, see in their order. 
 Many, much, pr. of number, quantity, 
 amount. For the usual construction with 
 the article, see in o, TJ, TO, II. A. 2. b. 
 
 1. Sing. pr. many, much; and with a 
 noun implying number or multitude, great, 
 large. a) Without art. John 6, 10 ^dp- 
 TOS TroXvs. 15, 5 Kapjrov Trd\vv. Acts 15, 
 32 Slit Xoyov TroXXov with much discourse, 
 many words. 20, 2. 16, IGtpyaa-iav 7roXX//i>. 
 22, 28. Matt. 1 3, 5 yrjv rroXXTji/ much earth, 
 soil. So with a noun of multitude, Acts 
 11, 21 TT. upiS/io s a great number. 18, 10 
 Xaoy ITO\VS. Mark 5, 24 o^Xor TT. John 6, 
 2. Acts 14, 1 TToAv TrXJjaor". 17, 4. Trop. 
 
606 
 
 Matt. 9, 37 6 piv 3epto>t6r TroXvy, comp. v. 
 36. al. (Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 1.) Absol. Neut. 
 TroXv, much, e. g. Luke 12, 48 G> o3>7 
 TroXv, TroXv friTrfiricrfTcn. KT\. 16, 10 bis, eV 
 TroXXw TTKTTOJ, eV TroXXa) aSiKos. Acts 26, 
 29. Matt. 26, 9 TrpaSrpat TroXXov, lo be sold 
 fur much. So Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 60. b) 
 \Vitli art. Heb. 5, 1 1 irepl ov TTO\VS fjp.lv 6 
 \6yos ff whom we have much to say, many 
 things. Mark 12. 37 6 iroXvs o^Xos, i. q. 
 Engl. the great multitude, the common peo 
 ple. (Hdian. 1. 1. 1 6 TroXvy o/uXos. Xen. 
 An. 3. 2. 36 6 TT. 6 ^Xoy. Comp. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 193, 390.) Absol. Neut. TO TroXv, 
 (he much, 2 Cor. 8, 15 6 TO TroXv sc. t^coi/ 
 v. o-vXXear, quoted from Sept. Ex. 16, 18, 
 comp. v. 17 ; see Winer { 66. 3. n. So 
 Xen. An. 7. 7. 36 6 opifav TO TroXv Kul 
 u\iyov. 
 
 2. Plur/TToXXot, at, a, many, and with 
 nouns of multitude, great, large. a) With 
 out artic. Matt. 8, 16 8aipovionevovs TroX- 
 \ovs. 24, 11. Mark 2, 15 TroXXoi reXou/at. 
 Luke 7, 21. 12, 7. 19 TroXXa dya3d. v. 47 
 see in 8epa>. John 3, 23 vSara TroXXa, many 
 waters, many fountains. Acts 2, 43. Heb. 
 2, 10. al. So with a noun of multitude, 
 Matt. 4, 25 o^Xot TroXXot. Luke 14, 25. 
 (Xen. An. 4. 7. 14.) With another Adj. 
 rrfpot TroXXoi Matt. 15, 30 ; fern. Luke 8, 
 3 ; neut. 22, 65 ; oXXat TroXXat Mark 1 5, 
 41; neut. 7, 4. John 21, 25; TroXXov? aX- 
 \ovs Mark 12, 5. Coupled by KOI, as TT. 
 Acat erf pa Luke 3,18; TT. Kal aXXa ^ <rrj^.fia 
 John 20, 30 ; TT. *at /3apa ama/zara Acts 
 25, 7. Tit. 1, 10. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 1 ; c. 
 u Xen. Conv. 1. 6. Mem. 1. 2. 24.) Ab 
 sol. TroXXoi, many, Matt. 7, 13 KOI TroXXoi 
 ficrtf 01 flo-fpxopfvoi. V. 22 TroXXot epovcri 
 Hoi. Luke 4, 41 drro TroXXwi/. John 8, 30. 
 Acts 10, 27. 2 Pet. 2, 2. Spec, many, i. q. 
 a multitude, all, Matt. 20, 28 XvVpoi> dirt 
 TroXXai/. Mark 10, 45. 14, 24. Heb. 9, 28, 
 comp. Sept. Is. 53, 12. Neut. TroXXd, 
 many things, much, Matt. 13, 3 KOI f\d\rj- 
 o~fv TroXXa (V Trapa/SoXa!?. Mark 5. 26. 
 Luke 10, 41. John 8, 26. 2 Cor. 8, 22 eV 
 n-oXXoTs. 2 John 12. al. (Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 
 50.) With gen. partit. Matt. 3, 7 TroXXoi/j 
 T<av tapuraiw. Luke 1. 16. John 6, 66. 
 Acts 4, 4. al. With e /c c. gen. partit. John 
 0, 60 TroXXoi f< T&V [jLa%T)Ta>v. 10, 20. Acts 
 17, 12. So c. gen. Xen. An. 1. 7. 20. 
 Apol. Socr. 13. b) With the art. as 
 referring to something well known ; c. 
 Subst. Luke 7, 47 at a/xapriat avTrjs at TroX 
 Xat , comp. v. 37. 39. Rev. 17, 1, comp. v. 
 15. Acts 26, 24 TO. TroXXa ypdp.p.aTa, the 
 much learning which thou hast, q. d. thy 
 
 much learning. (Luc. Cynic. 16. Plato 
 Apol. Socr. 1 init.) Absol. ot TroXXoi, 
 the many, i. e. those before spoken of, in 
 cluding the idea of all; as Rom. 5, 15. 19, 
 
 1. e. the many of whom the apostle had been 
 treating as having all suffered through 
 Adam. So the many who receive Christ. 
 all who receive him, v. 15. 12, 5. 1 Cor. 
 10, 17. V. 33 TO TCOJ/ TroXXwj ii/a o"co3a>o i. 
 the many, all to whom I preach. (Xen. An. 
 3. 1. 10.) Also the many, the most, the 
 greater number, but implying exceptions. 
 Matt. 24, 12 17 dyaTn; TO>I> TroXXcoi/. 2 Cor. 
 
 2. 17 wr oi TroXXoi, as the most do, i. e. the 
 Judaizing teachers. Comp. Winer {17. 1. 
 n. p. 119. Matth. {266. So Xen. Cyr. 3. 
 1. 3. 
 
 3. Trop. and intens. of amount, degree, 
 much, great, -vehement, comp. Passow s. v. 
 Matt. 2, 18 68vpfj.6s TroXvr. 5, 12. Luke 10, 
 40. Col. 4, 13 f^Xoi/ TroXvi/. Matt. 24, 30 
 Sdgrjs TroXXfJs. Mark 13, 26. John 7, 12 
 yoyyvo-fjLos IT. Acts 15, 7. 21, 40 TroXX^y 
 o-iyfjs. 24, 3. 7. 25, 23. 27, 10. 21. Rom. 
 9, 22. 1 Cor. 2, 3 V Tpo> TroXXw. 2 Cor. 
 8, 4. Eph. 2, 4. al. saep. Sept. for bl lfi 
 Gen. 41, 29. Dan. 11, 44. Hdian. 7. 1. i. 
 Dem. 23. 31. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 25. 
 
 4. Of time, much, long, Plur. many. 
 Matt. 25, 19 nfTa Se xpoW iro\vv, Mark 
 6, 35 a>pas TToXXrjs yfi>op.fvr/s. Luke 8, 29. 
 John 5. 6. Luke 12, 19 err] TroXXd, many 
 years. Acts 24, 10. Rom. 15, 23 ; rt TroXv 
 for a long time Acts 28, 6; /ZCT ov TroXv 
 not long after Acts 27, 14 ; fifT ov TroXXas 
 ij/xepas Luke 15, 13. Acts 1, 5. Sept. fipe- 
 pat 7T. for Heb. eis-n Hos. 3, 3. 4. Xen. 
 An. 5. 2. 17 TroXXov xpdVov. Plato Apol. 
 Socr. 2 TroXXa err?. 
 
 5. Neut. TroXv. TroXXd, adverbially, 
 Buttm. { 115. 4. Matth. { 446. a) Sing. 
 TroXv, much, greatly, Mark 12, 27 TroXv 
 TrXavao-Se. Luke 7, 47 fjyaTrvcre TroXv. Acts 
 18, 27. Rom. 3, 2. James 5, 16; with a 
 compar. 2 Cor. 8, 22 TroXv a-rrovBaioTfpov. 
 Dat. TToXXw id. with compar. John 4, 41 ; 
 TroXXo) fj.a\\ov Matt. 6, 30. Mark ]0, 48. 
 So Sept. genr. Dan. 6, 14. 23. Hdian. 2. 
 
 3. 4. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 11 ; with compar. 
 Luc. D. Deor. 2. 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 10. 2 ; 
 TroXXw with compar. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 9. 
 b) Plur. rroXXd without artic. many times, 
 often, Matt. 9, 14 vrjo~T(vop.fv TroXXd. James 
 3, 2. (Luc. D. Deor. 19. 2 fin. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 5. 14.) Also much, greatly, Mark 1, 45 
 fjp!;a.To KTjpvo-<Tfii> TroXXd. 3, 12. 5, 10 Trape- 
 /caXfi alriv TroXXd. 1 Cor. 16, 12. Rev. 5 
 4 exXaioi/ TroXXd. (Sept. 2 K. 10, 18. Is. 
 23, 16. Hdian. 1. 16. 11. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3 
 
607 
 
 47 fin.) With the art. TO. TroXXu, these 
 many times, for the mnst part, greatly, Rom. 
 15, 22. So Luc. D. Deor. 16. 1. Xen. 
 Hell. 6. 2. 30. + 
 
 iro\V(T7r\a r yxyo<>, O v, 6, fj, adj. (T>O\VS, 
 fTTi\dyxov.} ver y compassionate, of great 
 mercy, James 5, 11 ; where some Mss. 
 read Tro\vev<nr\ayxvos id. ^ ot found else 
 where. 
 
 7roXuTeXj;9, eoy, ovs, 6, 17, adj. (TTO\VS) 
 TfXor.) very expensive, very cosily, sump 
 tuous, e. g. vdpbos Mark 14, 3; lp.aTia-p.6y 
 1 Tim. 2, 9. Sept. for 1j Prov. 1, 13. 
 So Hdian. 6. 4. 7. Xen. An. 1. 5. 8. 
 Trop. very precious, excellent, 1 Pet. 3, 4. 
 So Diod. Sic. 14. 30. 
 
 7roA.im/i09, ou, 6, fj, adj. (rroXv?, rt/xi^,) 
 of great value or price, very costly, very pre 
 cious, e. g. fj.upyapiTTjs Matt. 13, 46. [26, 7] ; 
 vdpSos John 12, 3; comparat. 1 Pet. 1,7 in 
 later edit. Hdian. 1. 17. 5. 
 
 7roXl>Tp07ro)9; adv. (rroXvTporros ; TTO\VS, 
 rporros, TpVw.) in many ways, in diverse 
 manners, Heb. 1, 1. 4 Mace. 3, 21. So 
 TroXuTpoTTos Time. 2. 44. 
 
 TTO/jia, aros. TO, (iriw, TreVo/zpi,) drink, 
 1 Cor. 10, 4. Heb. 9, 10. Sept. for n^|3 
 Ps. 102, 10 ; nnsja Dan. 1, 16. Ceb. Tab. 
 6. Xen. Mem. 4. 7. 9. Comp. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 455 sq. 
 
 TTOVTJpia, as, 17, (TTOI^POV.) evil nature, 
 badness, in a physical sense, Sept. for ?i 
 Jer. 24, 2. 3. 8. Usually and in N. T. in a 
 moral sense, evil disposition, wickedness, 
 malice, Lat. praiitas ; Matt. 22, 18 yvovs 
 8f 6 irjcrovs TI/V Trovrjpiav avruiv. Luke 11, 
 39. Rom. 1, 29. 1 Cor. 5, 8. Eph. 6, 12 
 TCI Trvfvp.. TTJS TTovrjpias, i. q. ra Trovrjpd, 
 Winer ; 34. 2. Plur. at Trovrjpiai, wicked 
 counsels Mark 7, 22 ; wicked deeds, iniqui 
 ties, Acts 3, 26. Sept. for nsn Ex. 32, 1 1 ; 
 ?"l Ps. 28, 5 ; Plur. for ni:n Jer. 32, 32. 
 33, 5. So Luc. D. Mort. 12. 6. Plut. de 
 and. Poet. 4. Xen. (Ec. 1. 19. Plur. Dem. 
 521. 6. 
 
 TTOvrjpOS, d, 6v, (navea, TTOVOS,) com- 
 jianit". TTovrjpoTepos Matt. 12, 45. Luke 11. 
 ! , : pr. causing or having labour, sorrow, 
 pain ; hence evil, both Act. and Pass. 
 
 1. Act. evil, causing evil. a) Physic 
 ally, hurtful, painful, grievous; Rev. 16, 2 
 f\Kos KCIKW Ka i Tfovripov. Sept. for jn 
 Deut. 28, 23. (Hdian. 2. 12. 11. Plato 
 Prot. 313. d.) Xeut. TO Trovrjpov, ecil as 
 inflicted, calamity, affliction, Matt. 6, 13. 
 Luke 11,4; see in lett. b. a. 
 
 b) In a moral sense, evil-disposed, male 
 volent, malignant, wicked. a) Of persons, 
 Matt. 5, 45 eVi rrovrjpovs Kal dyaZovs. 7, 1 1 
 el vfj.f"is, TTovrjpol owes KT\. 12, 34. 35. 13, 
 49. 18, 32. 22, 10 comp. 14. Luke 6, 35. 
 45. 11, 13. Acts 17, 5. 2 Thess. 3, 2. 
 Sept. and 3H Esth.7,6. Job 21, 30. (Hdian. 
 
 5. 2. 5. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 20.) So jrvtv- 
 fjLara -rrovrjpd, evil spirits, malignant demons, 
 Matt. 12,45. Luke 7, 21. 8, 2. 11, 26. 
 Acts 19, 12. 13. 15. 16. (Sept. and sn 
 1 Sam. 16, 14 sq. 18, 10.) Hence 6 TTOVT] 
 pos the Ecil one, KCIT e ^o^iji/, i. e. Satan, 
 Matt. 13, 19. 38, comp. 39. Eph. 6, 16. 
 
 1 John 2, 13. 14. 3, 12. 5, 18. Some also 
 refer here Matt. 5, 37. 6, 13. Luke 11, 4. 
 John 17, 15. 1 John 5, 19; see in lett a, 
 and in no. 2. b. /3. So Act. Thorn. 5 45. 
 Barnab. Ep. 21. /3) Of things, e. g. 
 o(p3oXp.of TTovrjpos, an ecil eye, envy, Matt. 
 20, 15. Mark 7, 22; comp. in o(p3aX^ds no. 
 
 2 ; SiaXoyicr/ict novr/poi Matt. 15, 19. James 
 2, 4, see in SiaXoyto-p-ds. 1 Tim. 6, 4. Matt. 
 12, 35 et Luke 6, 45 e TOV Trovrjpov Sr/o-au- 
 pou rrjs xapdias, i. q. S^craup. T/? irovrjpias. 
 (Hdian. 1. 8. 5. ^El. V. H. 2. 11 TTOI/. Sf nrva, 
 q. d. Thyestea? epulae.) Also as causing 
 pain or hurt, e. g. words, evil, hurtful, inju 
 rious, mischievous, as wdv Trovrjpov pr^aa 
 Matt. 5, 11. Acts 28, 21. 3 John 10 ; also 
 TO ovofj.d TIVOS u>s Trovrjpov Luke 6, 22, comp 
 Matt. 5, 1 1. Sept. and 3n Gen. 37, 1. Ps. 64, 
 
 6. (Judith 8, 8.) Neut. TO irovrjpov, evil, 
 i. e. ecil intent, malice, wickedness ; Matt. 
 
 5. 37 TO 8e Trepicrorov TOVT&V, tK rov Trovrjpoi 
 (cmv. v. 39. John 17, 15. 2 Thess. 3, 3. 
 
 2. Pass, ecil, in nature or quality, made 
 evil, bad, ill. 
 
 a) Physically, of quality and condition, bad. 
 ill ; e. g. Kap-rrol Tj-ovrjpoi, bad fruit, Matt. 7, 
 17. 18 ; o(p9aX/i6s novrjpos, ill, diseased, Matt. 
 
 6, 23. Luke 1 1, 34. Sept. and S 1 ? Lev. 27, 
 10. 2K.2,19. So Tr.SiWa Plato Rep. 425. c. 
 
 b) In a moral sense, wicked, corrupt, 
 a) Of persons, one wicked, an evil-doer; 
 
 1 Cor. 5, 13 f^aipflre TOV Trovrjpov e v/io>i>. 
 
 2 Tim. 3, 13. So ytvta Trovrjpd Matt. 12. 
 39. 45. 16, 4. Luke 11, 29; atwv irovrjp6s 
 Gal. 1, 4. Sept. for SH Deut. 21,21; 3H* 
 Is. 1,4. 9, 17. (Hdian. 5. 2. 5. Xen. Ath 
 1.1.) Of a servant, bad, remiss, slothful, 
 Matt. 25, 26. Luke 19, 22. So Ecclus. 42, 
 5. Hdian. 1. 13. 6. Xen. CEc. 7. 41. /3) 
 Of things, wicked, corrupt, Jlagitious, e. g. 
 Ttz fpya> John 3, 19 rjv yap Trovrjpd avrtav 
 ra (pya. 7, 7. Col. 1, 21. 2 Tim. 4, 18. 
 1 John 3, 12. 2 John 11 ; patitovpyrjua TTW. 
 Acts 18, 14. 1 TFiess. 5, 22 OTTO navrus t"- 
 
7TOVO? 
 
 COS 
 
 7TOpVO) 
 
 Sovs Trovijpov, see in 6, 17, TO, A. 2. b. y. Heb. 
 3, 12. 10, 22. James 4, 16. So Sept. and 
 5"> Deut. 17, 5. 2 K. 17, 13. Prov. 26, 23. 
 (Jos. Ant. 2. 3. 1. Hdian. 3. 6. 9.) Also 
 of times, as full of sorrow and affliction, 
 evil, sorrowful, calamitous ; e. g. Tjpfpat 
 irovrjpat Eph. 5, 16. 6, 13. Sept. and :n 
 Gen. 47, 9. Ps. 94, 13. Neut. TO TTOVTJ- 
 pov, evil, wickedness, guilt, Luke 6, 45. 
 Rom. 12, 9. 1 John 5, 19. Plur. TO TTO- 
 vrjpd, evil things, wicked deeds, Mark 7, 
 23 ; irovrjpd Matt. 9, 4. 12, 35. Luke 3, 19. 
 So Sept. for 35-3, e. g. TO TT. Deut. 17, 2. 
 Judg. 2, 1 1 ; Ta TT. Gen. 6, 5. 8, 21 ; novypd 
 Ps. 97,10. Hos. 7,15. 
 
 7TOVOS, ov, 6, (jrfvu), 7reVop:at.) 1. work, 
 labour, toil, travail, Col. 4, 13 in later edit. 
 for &\ov. Jos. Ant. 3. 2. 3. Hdian. 2. 10. 
 17. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 3. 
 
 2. Spec, the consequence of toil, distress, 
 pain, suffering, anguish; Rev. 16, 10 e uacr- 
 crfavTO TO.S yXcixrcra? avTuiv (K TOV TTOVOV. 
 v. 1 1. 21, 4. Sept. for 3553 Is. 65, 14 ; fiijb 
 Job 4, 5.JEA. V. H. 5."6. Xen. Mem. 2*. 
 
 2. 5. 
 
 IIovTlKos, 77, o i>, belonging to Pontus, 
 a Pontian, Acts 18, 2. 
 
 JTof Tio?, ov, 6, Pontius, the praenomen 
 of Pilate, see in IIiXaToy. Matt. 27, 2. Luke 
 
 3, 1. Acts 4, 27. 1 Tim. 6, 13. See Diet, 
 of Antt. art. Nomen. 
 
 HOVTOS, ov, 6, Pontus, the north-east 
 ern province of Asia Minor, Acts 2, 9. 
 1 Pet. 1, 1. It was bounded N. by the 
 Euxine ; W. by Paphlagonia and Galatia ; 
 S. by Cappadocia and part of Armenia ; and 
 E. by Colchis. The kingdom of Pontus 
 became celebrated under Mithridates the 
 Great, who waged a long war with the 
 Romans ; in which he was at last defeated 
 by Pompey, and his kingdom made a Ro 
 man province, in B. C. 66. See Strabo 12. 
 p. 541 sq. 562. 
 
 ZToTrXto?, ov, 6, Lat. Publius, pr. n. 
 ot a wealthy inhabitant of Malta, Acts 28, 
 7.8. 
 
 Tropeia, as, YJ, (Tropevca,) a going, way, 
 journey; Luke 13, 22 Tropfiav iroiovufvos 
 making his way, i. e. journeying. Sept. for 
 $rra Jon. 3, 3. 4. So Jos. de Vit. 52. 
 Pol. 4. 69. 3. Xen. Mem. 3. 13. 5. Plur. 
 from the Heb. goings, ways, journey of life, 
 James 1, 11. So Sept. for 7(5 ft Prov. 2,7. 
 
 TropetVU, f. fvcrco, (jropos, Trei pco, 7rfpu&> ; ) 
 to cause to pass over by land or water, to 
 transport, Eurip. Med. 182. Pind. Ol. 1. 
 
 185. m. V. H. 8. 2. Oftener and in N. 
 T. only Pass, depon. iropfvopai, f. tv- 
 o-op.ai, aor. 1 fTropfvSrjv ; pr. to transport 
 oneself, to betake oneself, to pass from one 
 place to another, intrans. 
 
 1. Pr. to pass, to go, implying motion 
 from the place where one is ; hence often 
 i. q. to pass on, to go away, to depart ; found 
 chiefly in Matt. Luke, John, and Acts. 
 E. g. absol. Matt. 2, 9 ot 8e anoixravrts TOV 
 /3ao-iXe o>r, eVopevS^craj/. Mark 16, 10. Luke 
 4, 30. Acts 5, 20. 1 Cor. 10, 27. (Xen. 
 An. 3. 4. 41.) Once c. ace. Acts 8, 39 
 (Trap, Tt)v 686v ai/Tov, see in 686s no. 2. a. 
 With inf. of object, Luke 2, 3 eVopfvoiro 
 Trdvres aTroypdfpfo-^ai. John 14, 2. Comp. 
 Buttm. 140. 3. Usually with an adjunct 
 of place whence or whither; e. g. with a 
 Preposition and its case : diro c. gen. Matt. 
 24, 1 frropevfro OTTO TOV lepov. Luke 4, 42. 
 Acts5,41. (Xen. An. 4. 4. 17.) Side. gen. 
 Matt. 12, 1 8ia TUV (nropifjiaii. (Xen. Cyr. 2. 
 
 4. 24.) els c. ace. of place, Matt. 2, 20 els 
 yr,v icrpar/X. Mark 16, 15. Luke 4, 42. al. 
 (Xen. Hell. 7. 4. 10.) also c. ace. of state 
 or condition, Luke 22, 33 tls ^dvarov. 7, 50 
 els elpfivrjv, see in ety no. 4 fin. cynTrpocrSei/ 
 c. gen. of pers. John 10, 4 ; ev c. dat. of 
 state or manner, Acts 16, 36, comp. in et? 
 no. 4 fin. eVi c. ace. of place, Matt. 22, 9 
 eVi TUS 8it68ovs KT\. Acts 8, 26. 9, 11. 
 (Xen. Ag. 1. 16.) c. ace. of pers. Acts 25, 
 12; also c. ace. of thing sought, object, 
 Luke 15, 4 TT. eVi TO dno\<a\os. (Xen. Cyr. 
 
 5. 3. 16. Hell. 7. 4. 10.) ecor c. gen. of 
 place, eW Kaurapeias Acts 23, 23 ; KOTO 
 c. ace. of place towards which, Acts 8, 26 ; 
 of way along which, 8, 36 ; on-tVa c. gen. 
 of pers. by Hebr. to go after any one, to 
 follow, Luke 21,8. (Sept. for "nnx TI^ 
 Judg. 2, 12. 1 Sam. 6, 12.) jrpos c. ace. 
 of pers. Matt. 10, 6 irpbs TO. 7rpo /3aTa KT\. 
 Luke 11, 5. Acts 27, 3. al. Sept. for 
 Tj^ Gen. 26, 26. (Xen. Hell. 7. 3. 6.) 
 crvv C. dat. of pers. Luke 7, 6 eVopevrro 
 crvv avTots- So with Adverbs : eVcelSej/ Matt. 
 19, 15 ; fVTevSfv Luke 13, 31 ; ov for 6Voi 
 Luke 24, 28 ; TTOV John 7, 35. By a sort 
 of pleonasm, rropevo/xat is often prefixed, 
 espec. in the participle, to verbs which ot 
 themselves imply the idea of going, in order 
 to render the expression more full and com 
 plete ; comp. in ep^o/iai no. 2. a, and dvi- 
 0-TJ7/U II. 1. a. So Part. Matt. 2, 8 7ropfv3V- 
 Tes UKpifiSas e |eTa(rare. 9,13. 10, 7 Tropevd- 
 fifvoi 8e Kr/pvaa-eTe. Luke 7, 22. 14, 10. 22, 
 8. 1 Pet. 3. 19. Imperat. Luke 10, 37 
 Tropevov, KOI crii Troifi 6/xoiW- Sept. and 
 
609 
 
 r^n 2 K. 5, 10. 1 K. 9, 6. Josh. 23, 16. 
 So Jos. Ant. 7. 13. 1 7rpo<rYaei> Icoaj3a> 
 jropevSeVri TUV o^\oi> {^aptS/xijcrai. 
 
 2. Spec, to depart this life, to die, Luke 
 22, 22. So Heb. T^n Gen. 15, 2. Ps. 39, 
 i4, Sept. UTroXvo/iat, dntpx^ofjiai. So oi^o- 
 pai Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 13. Cornp. Wisd. 3, 
 2. 3. 
 
 3. Gear, to go, to walk, pr. Xen. Mem. 
 
 I. 4. 11. In N. T. only trop. and from the 
 Heb. to walk, i. q. to live, to conduct oneself, 
 joined with an adjunct of manner ; e. g. 
 c. dat. of rule or manner, Acts 9, 31 jro- 
 pevofj.evai ro> (poficp rov Kvpiov. 14, 16. Judo 
 
 II. Matth. $ 399! n. 2. Winer } 31. 3. b. 
 (1 Mace. 6, 23.) With a preposition and 
 its case : ev c. dat. of rule or manner, Luke 
 
 1, 6 tv TT. rals fvroXais. 1 Pet. 4, 3 2 Pet. 
 
 2, 10. Sept. for 3 ^n i K. 8, 61. Prov. 
 28, 6. (Ecclus. 5, 2.) Kara c. ace. of 
 rule or manner, 2 Pet. 3, 3 Kara ras I8ias 
 avTtov enftvfjiias. Jude v. 16. 18. (Sept. 
 Num. 24, 1. Wisd. 6, 4.) OTT/O-W c. gen. 
 of rule or manner, 2 Pet. 2, 10 oni<ra> a-ap- 
 KOS, comp. above in no. 1 ; VTTU c. gen. 
 under or among, Luke 8, 14 vno pepipvuv 
 ...iroptvop-cvoi KT\. Absol. Luke 13, 33 
 irXrjv 8fl fj.e (TT]p.(pov ...iropfvfcr Sa.i, to walk 
 i. e. to act, to fulfil my duties. + 
 
 , w, f. T)<ra>, (TrepSo),) to lay 
 waste, to ravage, to destroy, e. g. n]v fKK\Tj- 
 rriav Gal. 1,13; TT/V TTLCTTIV v. 23 ; TOVS KT\. 
 Acts 9,21. Pr. a city, country, Jos. Ant. 
 10. 8. 2. Hdian. 6. 7. 5. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 4. 
 
 7TO/34CT/ZO?, ov, 6, (nopos, Tropifw,) a pro 
 viding, procuring, Pol. 3. 112. 2. In N. T. 
 acquisition, gain, melon, a source or means 
 of gain, 1 Tim. 6, 5. 6. So Wisd. 13, 19. 
 14, 2. Plut. M. Crass. 2. Diod. Sic. 3. 4. 
 
 Uo/3/ao?, ov, 6, Porcius, the przenomen 
 of the procurator Festus, Acts 24, 27. See 
 in "fcijoror, and comp. Diet, of Antt. art. 
 Nomen. 
 
 TTOpveta, as, fj, (iropixvu,) 1. fornica 
 tion, lewdness; Matt. 15, 19 p.ot^ftat, irop- 
 vtlai. Mark 7, 21. Rom. 1,29. 1 Cor. 6, 13. 
 18. 7, 2. 2 Cor. 12, 21. Gal. 5, 19. Eph. 
 5, 3. Col. 3, 5. 1 Thess. 4, 3. Rev. 9, 21. 
 John 8,41 Tj/ieij eVc Tropvdas ov yfyevinj^if ^a 
 we are not born of fornication, we are not 
 spurious children, born of a concubine, but 
 are the true descendants of Abraham. Sept. 
 for n^iat Gen. 38, 24. Hos. 1.2. So Pa- 
 laeph. 53. 6. Dem. 403. 26. Spec, adulle- 
 ry, Matt. 5, 32. 19, 9. (Ecclus. 23, 23.) 
 Also incest, incestuous marriage, 1 Cor. 5, 
 1 bis. Prob. also as including marriages 
 prohibited by the Mosaic law, and genr. all 
 39 
 
 such intercourse as that law interdicted, 
 Acts 15, 20. 29. 21, 25. Comp. Lev. c. 18, 
 and 20, 10 sq. 
 
 2. Symbol, from the Heb. for idolatry, 
 the forsaking of the true God in order to 
 worship idols ; comp. in jropveva no. 2. 
 Rev. 2, 21. 14,8. 17, 2 ; 4. 18,3. 19,2. 
 So Sept. and B^IW Hos.*2, 2, 4, 12; Wat 
 Jer. 3, 2. 9; rVOtn Ez. 16, 15. 22. 32 sq. 
 
 TTOpveVd), f. evo-w, (jropvos, iropvr].) 
 
 1 . to commit fornication, to play the har 
 lot, intrans. 1 Cor. 6, 18 6 Se -rropvevav. 
 10, 8 bis, comp. Num. 25, 1. 9. Sept. for 
 Hos. 3, 3. Luc. Alex. 5. Demosth. 
 612. 5. 
 
 2. Symbol, from the Heb. of idolatry ; 
 the relation existing between God and his 
 church being shadowed forth under the 
 emblem of the conjugal union, which is 
 broken by those who worship idols ; see 
 Heb. Lex. art. n:j no. 2, comp. in ^Xos 
 no. 2. Rev. 2, 14l 20 ; with p. f rd c. gen. 
 Rev. 17, 2. 18, 3. 9. So Sept. and njt 
 1 Chr. 5, 25. Ez. 23, 19. Hos. 9, 1. 
 
 TTOpvr), TJS, t), (iropvos, Trepvaa, ir(pvT)p.i. ) 
 
 1. a harlot, prostitute, Matt. 21, 31. 32. 
 Luke 15, 30. 1 Cor. 6, 15. 16. Heb. 11,31. 
 James 2, 25. Sept. for nail Gen. 38, 15. 
 Josh. 2, 1. Ecclus. 19, 2. ^El. V. H. 4. 
 14. Xen. Mem. 1. 5. 4. 
 
 2. Symbol, from the Heb. of Babylon 
 (Rome), } iropvrj p(ya\rj, the great harlot, as 
 being the chief seat of idolatry, Rev. 17, 1. 
 
 5. 15. 16. 19, 2. Sept. and nait Is. 1, 21. 
 Ez. 16, 29 sq. See in Tropvtvca no. 2. 
 
 Tropvos, ov, 6, (iTfpvau>, irfpfrffjn,} a male 
 prostitute, catamite, Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 13. 
 In N. T. a fornicator, 1 Cor. 5, 9. 10. 11. 
 
 6, 9. Eph. 5, 5. 1 Tim. 1, 10. Heb. 12, 16. 
 13, 4. Rev. 21, 8. 22, 15. So Ecclus. 23. 
 16. 17 
 
 7ropp<w, adv. (Trpo.) for Att. Trpoo-w, Dor. 
 TTopo-w, Buttm. 5 115. 6; pr. forwards, far 
 forwards : hence far, far off, Lat. porro ; 
 Luke 14, 32 ert avrov Troppa ovros. Witli 
 diro c. gen. Matt. 15, 8 et Mark 7, 6 77 K. 
 avTu>v TToppco ajre ^ft an tfiov, quoted from 
 Is. 29, 13 where Sept. for pFH . Sept. for 
 pirn Jer. 12, 2. So Luc. Anachar. 27. 
 Xen. Hell. 4. 6. 4 ; c. diro Xen. Hell. 1. 1. 
 16. Comparat. 7rop pcore p&>, farther, Luke 
 24, 28. So Luc. Tox. 63. Xen. Hell. 4. 
 2. 11. See Buttm. 1. c. , 
 
 TTOppca&ev, adv. (Troppw,) from afar, 
 from a distance, Buttm. $ 116. 1. Heb. 11, 
 13 77. avras Idovrts. Sept. for pin^ri Job 
 2, 12. Is. 49, 12. So Jos. B. J. 3. fi. !. 
 
TToppwrepw 
 
 610 
 
 Trore 
 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 31. Also, far off, at a dis 
 tance, Luke 17, 12 ol fo^nja-av iropp^tv. 
 Sept. and pirna Jer. 23, 23 ; pirn Is. 33, 
 13. So Hdian. 2. 6. 20 eVrwrey TJ-o pp. Comp. 
 in (K no. 1. b. Heb. Lex. art. ")? no. 3. h. 
 7roppo)Tepa), see in rroppv. 
 
 Trop(f)vpa, as, r\, La,t. purpura, i. e. Z/ie 
 purple-muscle, a species of shell-fish found 
 on the coasts of the Mediterranean, which 
 yields a reddish-purple dye, much prized by 
 the ancients, M\. H. Anim. 7. 31, 34; 
 comp. Plin. H. N. 9 36 or 60. Heb. innx > 
 different from the ^?^ or helix iantha 
 Linn, which yields the bluish or cerulean 
 purple ; see Heb. Lex. under these words. 
 Braun de Vestit. Sacerdot. p. 201 sq. Bo- 
 chart Hieroz. II. 740 sq. In N. T. melon. 
 purple, i. e. jiy thing dyed with purple, 
 purple cloths, robes of purple, worn by per 
 sons of rank and wealth, Luke 16, 19 eW&i- 
 
 SlHTKfTO TTOp<f)VpaV KCU filHTCTOV. ReV. 17, 4 
 
 Rec. 18, 12. Sept. and pM JX Ex. 25, 4. 
 26, 1. 31. (1 Mace. 4, 23. Jos . B. J. 6. 8. 3. 
 Hdian. 7. 1. 21. Plato Legg. 847. c.) Spec. 
 a purple robe, put upon Christ as a mock 
 emblem of royalty, Mark 15, 17. 20 ; comp. 
 i) iroptyvpafiaa-iXiKT] Hdian. 1. 16. 8. 2 Mace. 
 4, 38. In Matt. 27, 28 the same is called 
 xh.aij.vs KOKKIVTJ i. e. coccus-dyed, crimson ; 
 just as in English the expressions purple-red 
 and crimson are often interchanged ; so too 
 Hor. Sat. 2. 6. 102 rubro cocco tincta 
 vestis, i. q. vestis purpurea in v. 106. 
 
 7rop(f)VpOS ovs, fa a, tov ovv, adj. (jrop- 
 <pvpa,j purple, i. e. reddish-purple ; John 19, 
 2. 5 t/zdrtof 7rop(pvpovv, comp. in 7rop<pvpa 
 fin. Rev. 18, 16 Trfpi^e^\Tip.fVTj iropcpvpovv 
 sc. TTfpifioXaiov. Rev. 17, 4 in later edit. 
 Sept. for Vsa-iK Judg. 8, 26. Esth. 1, 6. 
 Hdian. 7. 5. 7. Xen. Cyr. 6. 4. 2. 
 
 7TOp(pVpOTra)\l$, teas, 17, (iroptpvpa, TTW- 
 Xew,) a seller of purple cloths, a dealer in 
 purple, Acts 16. 14. Comp. in Gvdreipa. 
 
 Trocra/a?, adv. interrog. (TTOO-OS,) how 
 many limes? how often! Matt. 18, 21. 23, 
 37. Luke 13. 34. Ecclus. 20, 17. Luc. 
 Tim. 4. Plato Epist. 353. d. Comp. Buttm. 
 $71- 2. 
 
 TroiTi?, ecos, f), (TTiVco.) a drinking, Luc. 
 D. Deor. 18. 2. In N. T. drink, John 6, 55. 
 Rom. 14, 17 J3p)(ris KOI TTOCTIJ. Col. 2, 16. 
 Sept. for nrj fla Dan. 1, 10. So Hdian. 1. 
 17. 17. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 15. 
 
 TTOCTO?, T], OP, interrog. pron. correlative 
 to oo-oy, TOO. Buttm. 79. 3, 5 ; how great 1 
 quanlus ? 
 
 1. Of magnitude, quantity, how great? 
 how much? Luke 16, 5 nocrov ofpfiXfts r<p 
 Kvpico pov ; \. 7. Intens. Matt. 6, 23 TC 
 CTKOTOS TTOO-OV ] 2 Cor. 7,11. Dat. TT d cr w by 
 hoiv much, before a com parat. e. g. /j.a\\ov, 
 how much more, Matt. 7, 11. 10, 25. Luke 
 11,13. 12, 24. 28. Rom. 11, 12. 24. Philem. 
 16. Heb. 9, 14; x"P">v Heb. 10, 29; dm- 
 (pfpfi Matt. 1 2, 1 2. So Wisd. 1 2, 21 . Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 5. 4 ; TTOO-W /xaXAoi Diod. Sic. 1. 2. 
 Of an amount of time, how much ? how 
 long? irocrov ^povov Mark 9, 21. So Isocr. 
 Panath. p. 424 TT. xpofos. Plato Rep. 540. a. 
 
 2. Plur. of number, how many ? Matt. 15, 
 34 TTOO-OVS np-rovs fx (Tf 16, 9. 10. Mark 6, 
 38. 8, 5. 19. 20. Luke 15, 17. Acts 21, 20 
 TroVat nvpiddfs. Intens. Matt. 27, 13 et 
 Mark 15,4 jroa-a vov KaTapapTvpovo-iv ; 5. e. 
 how many and great things, what things. 
 Sept. for iiB3 Gen. 47, 8. 2 Sam. 19, 35. 
 jEschin. 2. 20. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 35. 
 
 ov, 6, (perh. TTOTOI, rriVw, q. d. 
 
 ) a river, stream ; Mark 1 , 5 
 tv TW lopSai/T/ TTora^io). Acts 16, 13. Rev. 
 8, 10. 9, 14 TW 7rora/xw rw p.ty. ~Ev(ppdTrj. 
 
 16, 4. 12. Allegor. John 7, 38. Rev. 22, 1. 
 2. Sept. for ^ Gen. 2, 10. 15, 18; Tiao 
 Gen. 41, 1. Ex. 1,22. So Hdian. 7. 1. 13, 
 
 17. Xen. An. 4. 1. 2. Spec, of a stream 
 as swollen, overflowing, i. q. a torrent, Jlood, 
 Matt. 7, 25. 27. Luke 6, 48. 49. 2 Cor. 11, 
 26. Rev. 12, 15. 16. Comp. Sept. and 
 
 Is. 59, 19. 
 
 7roTa/iO<6/9?7T09, ov, 6, 17, adj. 
 p.6s, (popew, (pfpto,) borne away by a Jlood, 
 Rev. 12, 15. Hesych. dnotpa-fv dneTrvit-e, 
 ToureoTt irorap.o(popr]Tov frroirja fv. 
 
 TroraTTOf, r;. ov, interrog. adj. what? of 
 what kind, sort, manner ? spoken of disposi 
 tion, character, quality, i. q. iroios Matt. 8, 
 27 TTOTOTTOS fcrriv OVTOS , what manner of 
 man is this ? Mark 13, 1 bis, TT. XiSot KQITT. 
 oiKoSo/itu; Luke 1, 29. 7, 39. 2 Pet. 3, 11. 
 1 John 3, 1. Dion. Hal. Ant. 1. 7. ib. 4. 
 66. Luc. Parasit. 22. So once iroSanos 
 Dem. 782. 8. The form TroraTros is for TTO- 
 SaTTor, which the earlier Greeks used only 
 in the sense : from what country? whence? 
 Lat. cvjas ? as if from TTOU, iroSfv, and obs. 
 SUTTOJ, i. q. (8a(pos, 8dn(o oi>. Buttmann de 
 rives it from TroO OTTO or 7ro3ev diro ; see 
 Lexil. I. 125, 302. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 56 sq. 
 Passow in irodairos . 
 
 TTOTC, interrog. adv. correl. to rore, ore. 
 Buttm. 116. 4 ; when ? at what lime ? e. g. 
 direct, Matt. 24, 3 Trore ravra eari , 25, 37 
 Trore ere f ido/j.fv iYfiv<avra , V. 38. 39. 44. 
 Mark 13, 4. Luke 17, 20. 21, 7. John 6, 25 
 
Trore 
 
 611 
 
 10, 24. Rev. 6, 10. So ews Trore, until 
 when ? how long ! Matt. 17, 17 bis, &> yevta 
 aTTKrros, fais Trore (crop.ai /*e3 \ifiuiv KT\. 
 Mark 9, 19 bis. Luke 9, 41. Sept. Trore for 
 "TO Job 7, 4 ; eW Trore for TT^ Ps. 80, 
 5. Jer. 4, 14. 21. So Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 32 ; 
 eW TT. 1 Mace. 6, 22. Indirect, Mark 13, 
 33 OVK otfiare yap, Trore 6 Kaipos tart. V. 35. 
 Luke 12, 36. So Jos. Ant. 7. 10. 1 /xeVeu/, 
 TOT eV avrov 6 "A/Seo-aAw/ioy eASty. 
 
 TTOTC, indef. and enclitic, correl. to roYe, 
 ore, Buttm. J 1 16. 4 ; pr. w/ze?z, whenever, i. e. 
 1. ai some time, one time or other, once, 
 both of time past and future. E. g. of the 
 past, once, formerly, John 9, 13 TOV Trore 
 rv(pAoV. Rom. 7, 9 %a>p\s vopov Trore. 11, 
 30. Gal. 1, 13. 23 bis. Eph 2, 2. 3. 11. 13. 
 5, 8. Phil. 4, 10 Sri rjo~r) Trore that now once, 
 now at length. (Dion. Hal. Ant. 7. 32, 
 51.) Col. 1, 21 v/itlr Trore ovrus KT\. 3, 7. 
 Tit. 3, 3. Philem. 11.1 Pet. 2, 10. 3, 5. 20. 
 2 Pet. 1, 21. So Ceb. Tab. 2. Hdian. 1. 
 15. 11. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 2. Of the future, 
 once, one day, at last, Luke 22, 32. Rom. 1, 
 10 etrrou 77877 Trore fvoda>^fjo-op.ai. So Hdian. 
 2. 2. 18. 
 
 2. at any time, ever ; Eph. 5, 29 ovoels 
 yap Trore TTJV tavrov crdpKa (p{<rr)o~fv. 
 1 Thess. 2, 5 oi/re yap Trore. 2 Pet. 1, 10. 
 With negat. /JLTJ it takes the form /i^ore, 
 which see in its order. So Luc. D. Deor. 
 10. 2. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 19. Intens. in an 
 interrogation, like Engl. ever, now, express 
 ing surprise, Buttm. j 149. m. 31. 1 Cor. 
 9, 7 rls orpareverat Idiots o^aw ot? Trore ; 
 Heb. 1,5. 13. Indirect, Gal. 2, 6 orroloi 
 Trore rjo-av. So Ceb. Tab. 2, 3. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 1. 1,2; indir. JEL V. H. 2. 8 5s ris Trore 
 nvros e<mv. 
 
 n, ov, interrog. pron. which of 
 the licoJ Buttm. 5 78. 2. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 4. 
 In N. T. only Neut Trorepoi/ as Adv. 
 whether ? ulrum ? indirect, and followed by 
 77, or, in a question containing two contrary 
 propositions; John 7, 17 TroVepoK e < roG 
 5eoO foriv, *] tya KT\. Sept. for ji Job 7, 
 1-J. So Jos. Ant. 6. 5. 1. Pint. Sept. Sap. 
 Conv. 3 pen. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 4. 
 
 TTOTijplOV, ov, TO, (Trorrjptof, TTOTrjp, TTO- 
 roy, TTifw.) 
 
 1. a drinking vessel, a cup; Matt. 10, 
 42 iroTrjpiov ^u^poC povov. 23, 25 ro e^w- 
 3ev roO iroTTjpiov. v. 26. 26, 27. Mark 7, 4. 
 3. 9, 41. 14, 23. Luke 11, 39. 22, 17. 20. 
 1 Cor. 11, 25. Rev. 17, 4. Sept. for 015 
 Gen. 40, 11. 13. 21. 2 Chr. 4, 5. Ceb. 
 Tab. 5. Luc. Jup. Trag. 42. Plut. Mor. II. 
 p. 13. 
 
 2. Melon, a cup for the contents of a 
 cup, cup-full, e. g. a cup of wine; so of 
 the wine drank at the eucharist, Luke 22, 
 20 et 1 Cor. 11, 25 rovro TO TTOTT/PLOV TJ 
 Kaivrj diaSrjKT]. 1 Cor. 10, 16 TO TT. rrjs euXo- 
 ylas, see in Trao-^a. So TrtVeti/ ro noTrjpiov 
 to drink the cup; 1 Cor. 10, 21 bis, ro 
 TTOTTjpiov Kvplov . . . KOI TO IT. 8aifi.ovl.cav, i. e. 
 consecrated to the Lord or to idols. 11. 26. 
 27. v. 28 iriveiv eVe roO Tror^pi ou, comp. 
 John 4, 14. 
 
 3. Trop. from the Heb. lot, portion, un 
 der the emblem of a cup which God pre 
 sents to be drank, either for good, as Ps. 
 16, 5. 23, 5 ; or also for evil, Ps. 11, 6. 75. 
 8. Ez. 23, 31 sq. In N. T. the cup of sor 
 row, the bitter lot, which awaited the Sa 
 viour in his sufferings and death, Matt. 20, 
 22. 23. 26, 39. 42. Mark 10, 38. 39. 14, 
 
 36. Luke 22, 42. John 18, 11. Spoken 
 also of the cup of which God in his wrath 
 causes the nations to drink, so that they 
 reel and stagger to destruction, see espec. 
 in 3vp.o r, Rev. 14, 10. 16, 19. 18, 6. 
 Arabian writers use the same figure, e. g. 
 cup of death Hamasa ed. Schult. p. 440 ; 
 cup of destruction Abulf. Ann. I. 352 ; 
 see Heb. Lex. art. oi s . 
 
 7nmo), f. (o-w, (TTo roy, iriva),) 1. to 
 let drink, to give to drink, c. ace. of pers. 
 Matt. 25, 35. 42 eVori o-are ^te. 27, 48. Mark 
 15, 36. Rom. 12, 20; ace. impl. Matt. 25. 
 
 37. Luke 13, 15. Trop. Rev. 14, 8. Pass, 
 trop. 1 Cor. 12, 13. Sept. for ^irn Gen. 
 21, 19. 24, 18. (Ceb. Tab. 5.) With two 
 ace. of pers. and thing, comp. Buttm. 131. 
 5. Winer 32. 4. Matt. 10, 42 os tav mmo-?; 
 eca r<uj/ /it/cp<5 r. iroTrjpiov -^v^pov. Mark 9, 
 41. Trop. 1 Cor. 3, 2. Sept. and fifsrrr 
 Gen. 19, 32 sq. Judg. 4, 19. Job 22, 7. See 
 Gesen. Lehrg. p. 810 sq. Ecclus. 15, 3. 
 Cebet. Tab. 19 ; ace. of thing Plato Phjedr. 
 247. e. 
 
 2. Of plants, to water, to irrigate, only 
 trop. of instruction, absol. 1 Cor. 3, 6 e ydj 
 f<pvT(vo~a, ArroXAcBf eVoVto-ef. V. 7. 8. Pr. 
 Sept. for nf?jn Gen. 2, 6. Ez. 17, 7. Xen. 
 Conv. 2. 25. 
 
 IlOTio\oi, av, 01, Puteoli, now Puzzu- 
 oli, a maritime town of Italy on the northern 
 shore of the bay of Naples. Its ancient 
 Greek name was Aiwuapxeia. It was a 
 favourite place of resort for the Romans, on 
 account of the adjacent mineral waters and 
 hot baths ; and its harbour was defended 
 by a celebrated mole, the remains of which 
 are still to be seen. Here Paul landed on 
 his way to Rome. Acts 28, 13. Comp. 
 
7TOT09 
 
 612 
 
 7TOVS 
 
 Strabo 5. p. 245. ib. 17. p. 793. Plin. H. N. 
 36. 14. Jos. Ant. 17. 12. 1. 
 
 TTOTO?, ov, 6, (TriVa>,) pr. a drinking, act 
 of drinking, Xen. An. 2. 3. 15. Oftener 
 and in N. T. a drinking together, a drinking- 
 bout, 1 Pet. 4, 3 (i> K<i>p.ois KOI TTOTOIS- Sept. 
 fur rtnaia Gen. 19, 3. 40, 20. So Jos. Ant. 
 5: 8. 6. JS1. V. H. 3. 23. Xen. Conv. 8. 
 4. 1. 
 
 Trot), interrog. adv. (correl. to irov indef. 
 and ov,) where ? in what place 1 Buttm. 
 116. 4. Matth. 5611. 3. 
 
 1. Pr. and genr. ivhere? a) In a di 
 rect question, before the Indie. Matt. 2, 2 
 TTOV eo-Tiv 6 re^Seiy j3a<ri\fvs. Mark 14, 14. 
 Luke 17, 17. 37. 22, 11. John 1, 39. 7, 11. 
 8, 10. 19. 9, 12. 11, 34. 1 Pet. 4, 18. 
 With %f\ftv before the Subj. Matt. 26, 17 
 TTOV SeXfty (TOifidcra>iJ.ev <rot (payelv TO ird- 
 a-xa. Mark 14, 12. Luke 22, 9. Sept. for 
 X Gen. 4, 9 ; rTX Gen. 18, 9. So Luc. 
 D" Deor. 4. 4. Xen. Mag. Eq. 7. 14. b) 
 Indirect, often in N. T. see Winer } 61. 
 
 2. n. Before the Indie. Matt. 2, 4 eVuvSa- 
 vfTO Trap avTotv, irov 6 X. yewarai. Mark 
 1 5, 47. John 1 , 40 /cat eidov TTOV fifvei. 1 1 , 
 57. 20, 2. 13. 15. Rev. 2, 13. Before the 
 Subj. Matt. 8, 20 TTOV TTJV KecpaXiji/ K\ivr}. 
 Luke 9, 58. 12, 17. c) In a direct ques 
 tion implying a negative, i. e. that a person 
 or thing is not present, does not exist ; 
 comp. Matth. 611. 3. Luke 8, 25 TTOU 
 fo~riv ; iricms i/icov ; Rom. 3, 27. 1 Cor. 
 1, 20ter. 12, 17 bis. 19. [Gal. 4, 15.] 2 Pet. 
 
 3, 4. 1 Cor. 15, 55 bis, quoted from Sept. 
 Hos. 13, 14, where Heb. ing . Sept. and 
 n*N Judg. 9, 38. Job 17, 15. Joel 2, 17. 
 So Luc. D. Deor. 4. 2. Eurip. Phoen. 558 
 or 562. 
 
 2. By attract, after verbs of motion, 
 where 1 i. q. whither 1 to what place ? as 
 often in English ; comp. Buttm. { 151. I. 8. 
 So in a direct question, John 7, 35 TTOV eu 
 ros p.f\\fi TTOpeuWSai ; 13, 36 xvpif, irov 
 virdyfis; 16, 5. Sept. for M3X Gen. 16, 8. 
 Deut. 1.28. Cant. 5, 18. (Luc. D. Mort. 
 
 3. 2.) Indirect, John 3, 8 OVK ol8as...irov 
 virdyti. 8, 14 bis. 12,35. 14,5. Heb. 11, 8. 
 1 John 2, 11. 
 
 TTOV, indef. particle, enclitic, (correl. 
 with TTOV, ov,) somewhere, in some place or 
 other; see Buttm. 5116. 4. } 149. m. 31. 
 Viger. p. 446. Heb. 2, 6 Sie/xaprvpero 8e irov 
 TIS. 4, 4. So Jos. B. J. 6. 3. 3. Xen. Conv. 
 
 4. 7 tine yap irov "Opvpos. Joined with 
 numerals, somewhere about, nearly, Rom. 4, 
 19 fKaTovratTijs irov virapx^v. So JEl. V. 
 H. 13. 4. Xen. (Ec. 17. 2. 
 
 IIov&r)s, 8(vros, 6, Pudens, pr. n. of a 
 Christian, 2 Tim. 4, 21. 
 
 TTo&oy, 6, the foot ; for the accent 
 irovs instead of irovs, see Lob. ad Phryn 
 p. 453, 765. Buttm. Ausf. Sprachl. 5 41. 7. 
 E. g. of men, Matt. 10, 14. 18, 8 bis, 77 6 
 irovs (rov tTKav8aXi^fi ere . . . rj 8vo irodat 
 exovra. 22, 13. Luke 15, 22. 24, 39. 40. 
 John 20, 12. Acts 21, 11. Rev. 2, 18. al. 
 saep. Of animals, Matt. 7, 6. Anthropo- 
 path. of God Matt. 5, 35. Acts 7, 49 ; comp 
 Is. 66, 1. Sept. for ^ Gen. 8, 9. Judg. 
 1, 6. 7. ssep. So Luc. D. Deor. 19. 1. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 3. 19; of anim. Hdian. 1. 15. 11. 
 Xen. Venat. 4. 1 fin. The following spe 
 cial uses of irovs may be noted : a) Trap a 
 TOVS Tro Say TWOS, spoken of what is at 
 one s feet, e. g. to cast or lay at one s feet, 
 i. q. to give over into one s care and charge, 
 as sick persons, Matt. 15, 30; money, pro 
 perty, Acts 4, 35. 37. 5, 2. 7, 58. Also to 
 sit at the feet of any one. as disciples were 
 accustomed to sit on the ground before their 
 master or teacher, see Schoettgen Hor. Heb. 
 I. p. 477. Luke 8, 35. 10, 39 fj 7rapa/ca3t- 
 <ra<ra Trapa TOVS ir. TOV I. Acts 22, 3 irapa 
 T. ir. Tafj.a\LT]\ TTfTraibev/jLevos. But Luke 
 7, 38 crracra Trapa TOVS iroo as avTov OTTUTW, 
 i. e. standing behind the triclinium at the 
 feet of Jesus as he reclined upon it ; see also 
 in lett. d, below. b) viro TOVS irodas TWOS, 
 to put or subdue under one s feet,. to make 
 subject to any one, in allusion to the an 
 cient manner of treading down or putting 
 the foot upon the necks of vanquished ene 
 mies, see Josh. 10, 24. Lam. 5, 5 ; comp. 
 Ps. 8, 7. So Rom. 16, 20 6 3e6f . . . <ruv 
 Tpfyet, TOV SdTavav vrro TOVS IT. vfj.u>v. 1 Cor. 
 15, 25. 27. Eph. 1, 22. Also Heb. 2, 8 
 TTuvra virfTn^as viroKaTd) TK>V TTO&OP avrov, 
 quoted from Ps. 8, 7 where Sept. for 
 1^?? . In a like sense put after in 
 q. v. Matt. 22, 44 tW ai> 3w TOVS fx^povs 
 o-ov vrroTToSioi TCOV irob cav <rov, and so Mark 
 
 12, 36. Luke 20, 43. Acts 2, 35. Heb. 1, 
 
 13. 10, 13, all quoted from Ps. 110, 1 where 
 Sept. for *p^ fc Tj. c) Spoken of 
 the oriental mode of making supplication, 
 or of doing reverence and homage to a su 
 perior, by prostrating oneself before him, 
 comp. Esth. 8, 3. Gen. 44, 14. Ruth 2, 10. 
 2 Sam. 1,2. E. g. to fall at one s feet, in 
 supplication, irecrcov ovv tls TOVS irodas av- 
 TOV Matt. 18, 29 ; Trpos TOVS iroo as Mark 5, 
 22. 7,25. Sept. jrpoj TOVS TT. for i-fori "SB!? 
 Esth. 8, 3. In reverence and homage, ire- 
 (Tflv tls TOVS TrdSay John 11,32; eVi TOVS jr. 
 Acts 10, 25; Trapa TOVS IT. Luke 17, 16 
 
613 
 
 7Tpa/CTO)p 
 
 tvuniov T>V TT. Rev. 3, 9, and ( 
 Rev. 19, 10. 22, 8; cornp. Heb. i 15 fib 
 Estli. 8, 3. In a like sense, Kpartja-ai TOVS 
 irodas TWOS Matt. 28, 9. d) In allusion to 
 the custom of washing the feet of strangers 
 and guests, and also of anointing the feet ; 
 here the washing was usually done by the 
 lowest slaves, see 1 Sam. 25, 41, and comp. 
 Gen. 24, 32. 43, 24 ; but sometimes appar 
 ently by the master himself in token of re 
 spect, comp. Gen. 18, 4. 19, 2 ; see Bibl. 
 Res. in Palest. III. p. 26. E. g. Luke 7, 
 44 vScop eVl TOVS TroSa? p.ov oiiK (BvKas. 
 John 13, 5 ( l^croOy) rjp^aro v nrrtiv TOVS 
 jroSay TWV p. v. 6. 8. 9. 10. 12. 14 bis. So 
 of Mary, who washed Jesus feet with her 
 tears, and kissed and anointed them in token 
 of affection, Luke 7, 38 ter. 44. 45. 46. John 
 11,2; comp. in aXei$a>. e) Meton. to the 
 feet as the instrument of going, walking, is 
 sometimes ascribed that which strictly be 
 longs to the person who goes, walks ; comp. 
 in o<p3aXp.df no. 2. Luke 1, 79 Kareu3u- 
 vat TOVS TT<j8as TJ/JLCOV els 68ov elprjvrjs. Heb. 
 12, 13. (Ps. 119, 110. Prov. 4, 26.) Acts 
 
 5, 9 01 Tr68fs Tcav Sa^ai/rcdf KT\. Rom. 3, 
 15. 10, 15 wf wpaioi ol n68es TU>V flayy. 
 <T\. quoted from Is. 52, 7, where see Ge- 
 sen. Comment. Comp. 1 K. 14, 12. Prov. 
 1, 16. Job 31, 5. + 
 
 TTpayf^a, aTos, TO, (Trpao-ero),) pr. a thing 
 done or to be done, e. g. 
 
 1. Something done, a deed, act, fact, mat 
 ter. Luke 1, 1 8iriyr)(Tiv rrepl T(av...tv Tjp.lv 
 rrpayp-aTcov, i. e. things done, events. James 
 3, 16 TTO.V (pavXov Trpuyjaa. Heb. 6, 18. 10, 
 
 1. 11, 1. Sept. for -o^ Gen. 24, 50. Judg. 
 
 6, 29. Hdian. 7. 5. 8. Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 7. 
 
 2. Something doing or to be done, a mat 
 ter, business, affair. Matt. 18, 19 tav 8vo 
 vfjL&v (TVp.<pa>vr]<Ta>(nv Trepi TTOVTOS Tfpa.yp.a- 
 TOS. Acts 5, 4. Rom. 16, 2. 2 Cor. 7, 11. 
 I Thess. 4, 6. Sept. for yen Ecc. 3. 1. 
 So Luc. D. Deor. 6. 2. Diod. Sic. 2. 2. 
 Xen. An. 5. 6. 28. Spec, in a judicial 
 sense, rrpayna x"> to ^ iave a mai t er a t 
 law, a lawsuit, 1 Cor. 6, 1. So Xen. Mem. 
 
 2. 9. 1. 
 
 7T pay flare ia, as, f], (Tfpayp.a.Ttvop.ai^ 
 a doing, business, affair, 2 Tim. 2, 4. Sept. 
 for n=sba 1 Chr. 28, 21. 2 Mace. 2, 32. 
 Dem. 101/22. Plato Gorg. 501. b. 
 
 Trpay/xarefo/iat, f. fuo-o/zai, Mid. de- 
 pon. (irpaypa,*) to be doing, to be busy, oc 
 cupied, Luc. Philops. 36. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 
 og y n N. T. like Engl. to do business, i. e. 
 to trade, to traffick, absol. Luke 19, 13 ; i. q. 
 (pyafrpsu in Matt. 25, 16. So Trpayp-artv- 
 
 rr)s, a business-man, merchant, Plut. do cu- 
 pid. Div. 4. Id. de non foener. 2 ; comp. 
 Rabb. Diliissjis > a merchant, Buxt. Lex. 
 1799. 
 
 TTpairwpiov, ov, TO, Lat. pratorium, 
 i. e. in Latin usage, the general s lent in a 
 camp, Liv. 3. 5. Cic. de Divin. 1. 33 ; comp. 
 Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 373 ; Diet, of Antt. 
 s. v. Also the house or palace of the go c- 
 ernor of a province, whether a pretor or other 
 officer, Cic. Verr. Act. II. 4. 28. ib. 5. 35 ; 
 any large house, palace, Sueton. Calig. 37. 
 Aug. 63, 72. Tit. 8. Hence in N. T. a 
 praetorian residence, governor s house, pa 
 lace; spoken 
 
 1 . Of the palace of Herod at Jerusalem, 
 built with great magnificence at the north 
 ern part of the upper city (Zion), westward 
 of the temple and overlooking the latter ; 
 to wliich there was also access from the 
 palace over the open place called the Xys- 
 tus and a bridge across the valley of the 
 Tyropo3on ; see Jos. Ant. 15. 9. 3. ib. 20. 
 8. 11. B. J. 1.21. 1. ib. 2. 16. 3. With 
 the palace were connected the three towers 
 Hippicus, Phasael, and Mariamne, Jos. B. J. 
 5. 4. 3, 4. See Bibl. Res. in Pal. I. p. 453- 
 458. In this palace the Roman procurators, 
 whose head-quarters were properly at Cesa- 
 rea (Acts 23, 23 sq. 25, 1), took up their 
 residence when they visited Jerusalem ; 
 their tribunal, /SfJ/ia, being sometimes set 
 up in the open place or area before it ; 
 Jos. B. J. 2. 14. 8, *Xo>poy (Florus) Se TOT? 
 p.fv (v Tols ftao-iXfiois av\i(Tai Trj 8e vorf- 
 pat a firjp.a irpb avrwv Stp.fvos KaSf ffrai <T\. 
 comp. ib. 2. 9. 3. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 
 373 ; comp. art. XiSoVrpwror. So John 18, 
 28 bis. 33. 19, 9 ; in Matt. 27, 27 et Mark 
 15, 16, it seems to refer to the court or part 
 of the palace where the procurator s guards 
 were stationed. So Act. Thorn. 3 7rpard>- 
 pta /3ao-iXiKa. ib. \ 17, 18, 19, where it al 
 ternates With TO TToAaTlOI . 
 
 2. Of the palace of Herod at Cesarea, 
 perhaps in like manner the residence of the 
 procurator, Acts 23, 35. 
 
 3. Of the prcctorian camp at Rome, i. e. 
 the camp or quarters of the praetorian co 
 horts, Phil. 1, 13. These were privileged 
 troops instituted by Augustus to guard his 
 person, and to have charge of the city ; but 
 they soon became the most powerful body 
 in the state ; see Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 563. 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Prcctoriani. Comp. in 
 (rTpa.TOKtba.pxns. 
 
 jrpaKTWp, opos, 6, (n-pao-o-o),) a doer, 
 Soph. Trach. 864. Antiphon. 121. 39. 
 In N. T. an exactor, collector, a public off- 
 
614 
 
 cer who collected debts, fines, penalties, 
 taxes, Luke 12, 58 bis ; com p. virrjpeTrjs in 
 Matt. 5, 25. Sept. for isab Is. 3, 12. So 
 Dem. 778. 18. ib. 1337. 26. See Boeckh 
 Staatsh. d. Ath. I. p. 167, 403. 
 
 TrpagiS, ecos, T], (Trpatro-o),) pr. a doing, 
 action, i. e. 
 
 1. Something done, an act, deed, practice; 
 Plur. acts, works, conduct. Matt. 16,27 airo- 
 Scocret eKatrrco Kara TTJV irpa^iv avrov. Luke 
 23, 51. Acts 19, 18. Rom. 8, 13. Col. 3, 9. 
 So Tlpd^eis TO>V ATrooroAcoi , Acts of the 
 ApoStles, as the title of the book of Acts. 
 Sept. for yi * 2 Chr. 13, 22. 27, 7. Jos. 
 Ant. 10. 4. 5. Hdian. 2. 15. 12. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 I. 3. 1. 
 
 2. Something to be done, business, office, 
 function; Rom. 12, 4 TO 8e pe\T) rrdvra ov 
 TTJV avTrjV e^fi Trpagiv. Ecclus. 11,10. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 1. 6. 
 
 7rpao$, ov, only in masc. and neut. Sing, 
 and masc. Plural ; the rest being from Trpavs, 
 Buttm. ^ 64. 2 ; meek, mild, gentle, Matt. 
 
 II, 29 Trpaos et /u. So 2 Mace. 15, 12. 
 Plut. Mor. II. p. 13. Xen. Ag. 11. 10. 
 Sometimes written irpqos, Passow s. v. The 
 form Trpavs is earlier, but not better ; see 
 Passow in irpavs [Engl. in jrpaos]. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. 403. 
 
 7rpaOTr/$, TTJTOS, rj, (irpaos,) meekness, 
 mildness, forbearance ; 1 Cor. 4, 21 tvnvfv- 
 fj.ari re TrpaoTr/Tos. 2 Cor. 10, 1 Sta rrjs 
 irpaorrjTos roil XpKrrov. Gal. 5, 23. 6, 1. 
 Eph. 4, 2. Col. 3, 12. 1 Tim. 6, 11. 2 Tim. 
 
 2. 25. Tit. 3, 2. Sept. for ni3? Ps. 45, 6. 
 Ecclus. 1. 24. Dem. 1405. 15. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 3. 1.41. 
 
 TTpacna, as, rj, a bed in a garden, gar 
 den-plat, Ecclus. 24, 31. Theophr. H. Plant. 
 
 4. 4. 3. In N. T. an area, plat, square, like 
 a garden-bed ; Mark 6, 40 Trpa<rial Trpaa-tai, 
 plat-wise, by plats, like beds in a garden. 
 The repetition without KO.I denotes distribu 
 tion, i. q. dva irpacrids, comp. Sept. and Heb. 
 Ex. 8, 10 [14]. Gesen. Lehrg. p. 668. Wi 
 ner \ 58. 1 ; see also in 8vo. So pvpta p.v- 
 pia, i. q. Kara fj.vpia8as, ^Eschyl. Pers. 981. 
 
 Trpdcra-co v. rro), f. <, aor. 1 rpaa, 
 perf. TTtTrpaxa, to do, expressing an action 
 as continued or not yet completed ; what 
 one does repeatedly, continuedly, habitually ; 
 like Troie w no. 2. So John 3, 20. 5, 29 ; 
 elsewhere only in the writings of Luke and 
 Paul. 
 
 1 . Trans, to do, with ace. of thing, without 
 reference to a person as the remote object ; 
 see below in no. 3. a) Of particular deeds, 
 acts, works, done repeatedly or continually, 
 
 to do, to perform, to execute; Act* 19, 19 
 iKavcn TU>V TCL TTfpifpya -npa^avruv. V. 36 
 p.T)o~(v irponfTfs. 26, 26. 1 Thess. 4, 11 
 irpda-a-fiv TO {8ia. Once put instead of re 
 peating a preceding verb, 1 Cor. 9, 17 
 eKcov TOVTO irpdvcru, comp. v. 16; see in 
 TTOUCO no. 2. c. So Hdian. 3. 6. 1. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 9. 1 TCI eavrov. Cyr. 5. 4. 11. b) 
 Of a course of action or conduct, espec. of 
 right, duty, virtue, to da, to exercise, to prac 
 tise ; Acts 26, 20 agia TTJS pfTavotas epya 
 Trpdo-o-ovras. Rom. 2, 25 vopov, i. e. ra TOV 
 vopov. 7, 15. 9, 11. 2 Cor. 5, 10. Phil. 4, 9. 
 Sept. and fi5 Prov. 21, 7. So Dem. 310. 
 19.^Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 17 *oAa. c) Oftener 
 of evil deeds or conduct, to do, i. q. to com 
 mit, io practise ; Luke 22, 23 6 TOVTO /j.e\- 
 \a>v Trpdo-o-fw. 23, 15 ov8e aiot> Saiwrou 
 eVrt ij-fTTpayfievov airw, comp. Buttm. 134. 
 4. Luke 23, 41 bis. John 3, 20 o (/>av\a 
 irpdo-o-a>v. 5, 29. Acts 25, 11. 25. 26, 31. 
 Rom. 1, 32 bis. 2, 1. 2. 3. 7,19. 13,4. 
 
 2 Cor. 5, 10. 12, 21. Gal. 5, 21. Sept. 
 and fiias Prov. 10, 24; ^?B Job 36, 23. 
 Prov. 30, 20. So Hdian. 7^ 6. 10. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 29 </>avAa. 
 
 2. Intrans. to do, comp. Buttm. 5 113. n. 
 
 3 fin. E. g. a) to do, to act, with an ad 
 junct of manner ; Acts 3, 17 Kara ayvoiav 
 eV/)aare, comp. v. 14. 15. Acts 17,7 OVTOI 
 iraiTfs aTrevaiTi TU>V Say/A. K.aicrapos Trpar- 
 rova-i. Sept. and niUS Gen. 31, 28. Prov. 
 14, 17. So Pol. 3. 69/8. ib. 5. 75. 9. b) 
 Like Engl. to do, to fare, to be in any state 
 of good or ill, with an adjunct of manned; 
 Eph. 6, 21 TI 7rpd<T<ra>, how I do, how I fare. 
 Acts 15, 29 see in (3. So 2 Mace. 9, 19. 
 Diod. Sic. 11. 54. Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 8. 
 
 3. In reference to a person, to do to or 
 in respect to any one ; in N. T. only of harm 
 or evil. a) Genr. with ace. of thing and 
 dat. of pers. Acts 16, 28 ^SeV Trpd&s treav- 
 rw KaKoV. So (iri riva, as to, Acts 5, 35 ; 
 Trpos rtva, against, Acts 26, 9. So c. dat. 
 Luc. Tim. 50. Xen. An. 5. 7. 29 ; c. dupl. 
 ace. Xen. CEc. 12. 7 ; comp. Buttm. { 131. 
 5. b) Spec. q. d. to do from any one, i. e. 
 to exact, to collect, to extort money from 
 any one ; in N. T. only c. ace. of thing, 
 Luke 3, 13 p.Tjo fv Trktov . . . TrpdcrcrtTf. 19, 
 23 eA3o>j> (rvv TOKO) hv tTvpa^a OVTO. So 
 Jos. Ant. 9. 11. 1. Dem, 617. 24. Xen. Hell. 
 1. 3. 8 ; c. dupl. ace. Luc. Vitar. Auct. 18. 
 Xen. An. 7. 6. 17 eav Trpamjrf OVTOV ra 
 
 ia, as. 17, (Trpavs, 
 pr. a suffering meekly, i. q. meekness, mild 
 ness, gentleness, once 1 Tim. 6, 11 Lachm, 
 
615 
 
 Philo de Abr. p. 379. b. Zonaras Lex. 
 1576. 
 
 W) eta, v, Gen. eos ovr, etas, toy our , 
 
 meek, mild, gentle ; Matt. 5, 5 ftaKapioi oi 
 vpafls. [11,29.] 21,5. 1 Pet. 3, 4. Sept. 
 for ^3 Job 24, 4 ; 13 Ps. 37, 11. Ecclus. 
 10, 14. Hdian. 7. 1. 3. Xen. CEc. 19. 7 
 See in Trpaos fin. 
 
 TrpavTTjS, Tyros, f], (TTpavs,) meekness, 
 mildness, forbearance, James 1,21. 3,13. 
 1 Pet. 3, 15. Sept. for WJS p s . 45, 6. 
 Ecclus. 3, 17. 4, 8. 
 
 TrpeTTO), pr. to be conspicuous, distin 
 guished, to excel, Horn. II. 12. 104. Od. 8. 
 172 Usually and in N. T. impers. IT pe 
 nt i, it becomes, it is right, proper; Part. 
 irptTTov eoTt, it is becoming ; constr. with 
 dat. of pers. and an infin. as subject, see 
 Buttm. 129. 18 ; e. g. Heb. 2, 10 en-pent 
 yap aura) TeXeiwcrat. Matt. 3, 15 irpeirov 
 KT\. (Luc. Imag. 22.) With dat. simpl. 
 Eph. 5, 3 Ka3o>y TrpeVei ayiois. (Xen. An. 
 
 1. 9. 6.) With accus. and infin. 1 Cor. II, 
 13. So Luc. D. Deor. 20. 16. Also in 
 the personal construction with a nominative, 
 Buttm. 1. C. 1 Tim. 2, 10 o jrpenei yvvaigiv. 
 Tit. 2, 1. Heb. 7, 26 TOIOVTOS r]^v eirpenev 
 dpxttpfvs. Sept. for HIM Ps. 33, 1. 93, 5. 
 So Luc. Nigrin. 15. JE\. V. H. 12. 1 pen. 
 
 7T/3e<T/3e/a, ay, 17. (7rpe(reva),) age, sen 
 iority, primogeniture, JEschyl. Pers. 4. Pau- 
 san. 3. 1. 4. In N. T. an embassy, concr. 
 ambassadors ; e. g. Trpecrfieiav djroo-rc XXeti/ 
 Luke 14, 32. 19, 14 ; comp. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 469. 2 Mace. 4, 11. Hdian. 2. 8. 12. 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 1. . 
 
 TTpecrfteva), f. evo-<a, (rrpeo-/3i;r,) to be 
 aged, elder, Dion. Hal. Ant. 1. 70. Hdot. 7. 
 
 2, _ In N. T. to be an ambassador, to act as 
 ambassador, absol. 2 Cor. 5, 20 vrrep Xpi- 
 o-rov olv irpforftevoufv. Eph. 6, 20. So 
 Jos. Ant. 12. 4. 2. Dem. 421. 16. Xen. Cyr. 
 5. 1. 1. 
 
 7rpecr/3vTpioV) iov.ro, (irpeorjBvrfpos,} 
 an assembly of aged men, council of elders, 
 senate ; hence Engl. presbytery ; spoken of 
 the Jewish senate, Sanhedrim, o-vvtSpiov 
 q. v. Luke 22, 66. Acts 22, 5 ; see in art. 
 yepovaia. Of the elders of the Christian 
 church, 1 Tim. 4, 14. 
 
 7rpecr/3i/re/3O9, a , ov, pr. comparat. to 
 nfxvQvs an old man, see Buttm. 69. 3. 
 
 1. Comparat. Adj. older, elder ; Luke 15, 
 25 6 vios airrov 6 Trpeo-fivrtpos, Sept. for 
 n-ias Job 1, 13. 18: iPJ Job 32, 4. So 
 Jos. : Ant. 6. 3. 2. JE\. V. H. 9. 42. Plato 
 Conv. 219. d. Subst. an older person, sen- 
 
 ior ; Plur. old men, seniors, the aged ; 1 Tim 
 5, 1 TrpecrftvTepcp fifj eTrnrX^Tjs. \. 2. Acts 
 2, 17 oi irp. vpuv. 1 Pet. 5, 5. Sept. for 
 JEJ Gen. 18, 11. 12. 24, 1. (Jos. c. Apion. 
 2. 27. Xen. Cyr. 1 . 2. 2.) Also o nrptcr^v- 
 repoi, the ancients, tlie fathers, ancestors ; 
 Matt. 15,2 at TrapaSoo-etr TO>J TTpf<TJ3vT(p<t>v. 
 Mark 7, 3. 5. Heb. 11,2. 
 
 2. Subst. in the Jewish and Christian 
 usage, as a title of dignity, a presbyter, elder, 
 Plur. presbyters, elders, i. e. persons of ripe 
 age and experience who were called to take 
 part in the management of public affairs ;. 
 so in the O. Test. Sept. and Heb. nn3j2T , 
 see Ex. 18, 12. 19, 7. 24, 1. 9. Num. 11, 
 16. al. comp. Gen. 50, 7. In N. T. spoken : 
 a) Of members of the Jewish Sanhedrim 
 at Jerusalem, genr. John 8, 9, comp. v. 3. 
 Acts 24, 1 ; or as one of the classes of mem 
 bers, e. g. 6 dpxifptvs KOI oi ypa/^areir *cai 
 ot Trpfo-pvTfpoi Matt. 26, 57 ; oftener oi 
 dp^tfpeTj KOL oi yp. KOI oi Trpeo-ft. Matt. 16, 
 21. 26,3. 27,41. Mark 8,31. 11,27. 14, 
 43. 53. 15, 1. Luke 9, 22. 20, 1 ; comp. in 
 dpxiepevs no. 2. Also ap^tepelr KOI irpeo-fi. 
 Matt. 21, 23. 26, 47. 59. 27, 1. 3. 12. 20. 
 28, 12 comp. v. 11. Luke 22, 52. Acts 4, 
 23. 23, 14. 25, 15 ; oi 7rpeo-/3. *at oi ypa/x/x. 
 Acts 6, 12 ; oi apxovres Kal oi -rrpea-jS. Kal oi 
 ypafjLp.. Acts 4, 5. V. 8 ap%ovres rov \aov 
 Kai 7rp6O-/3iVepot TOV icrparjX. b) Of the 
 elders in other cities, e. g. Capernaum, Luke 
 7, 3 ; comp. in *puri? no. 3. But more 
 prob. these were elders of the synagogue , 
 see in apxiirvvdyayos. c) Of the elders of 
 Christian churches, presbyters, to whom was 
 committed the direction and government of 
 individual churches, pr. i. q. eVt o-KOTro? q. v. 
 Acts 11, 30. 14,23. 15,2.4.6.22.23. 16, 
 
 4. 20, 17. 21, 18. 1 Tim. 5, 17. Tit. 1, 5. 
 James 5, 14. 1 Pet. 5, 1. Sing. 6 7rpeo-/3w- 
 Tfpor 1 Tim. 5, 19. 2 John 1. 3 John 1. 
 d) Symbol, of the 24 elders around the 
 throne of God in heaven, Rev. 4, 4. 10. 5, 
 
 5. 6. 8. 11. 14. 7, 11. 13. 11, 16. 14, 3. 
 19,4. 
 
 Trpecr^vrr/f, O v, 6, (n-peV/Sur,) an old 
 man, one aged, Luke 1,18. Tit. 2, 2. Philem. 
 9 as IlaCXoy irpecrpvTTjs. Sept. for 112J Ex. 
 10, 9. 1 Sam. 4, 19. Hdian. 4. 12. 1. Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 6. 1 . 
 
 7T/3ecr/3uTt9, ioos, fj, (fern, to 7rpfo-/3i/n)r,) 
 an aged woman, Tit. 2, 3. Jos. Ant 7. 7. 
 2. Hdian. 5. 3. 6. Plato Hipp. maj. 286. a. 
 
 see 7rp.irpr)pi. 
 
 tfs, tos, oOr, 6, f], adj. (kindr. rrpo,) 
 Lat. pronus, i. e. bent forwards, head-fore 
 most, headlong; Acts 1, 18 Trprjvrjs 
 
616 
 
 irpo 
 
 ms, falling headlong ; see more in art. Xa 
 3 Mace. 6, 23. Jos. B. J. 6. 1. 6. Horn. 
 Od. 5. 374. The form is Ionic, for Alt. 
 irpavf]s Xen. An. 1. 5. 8 ; comp. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 431. 
 
 Trptfo v. Trplco, f. io-a>, to saw, to saw 
 asunder, Pass. Heb. 11,37; here spoken of 
 a cruel punishment inflicted on captives in 
 war, see 2 Sam. 12, 31. 1 Chr. 20, 3; 
 cornp. in ixorop.eu. Sept. for \L ; sn Am. 1, 
 3. Susann. 59. Fabr. Cod. Pseud. V. T. 
 p. 1088; genr. Diod. Sic. 3. 27. Plato 
 Theag. 124. a. 
 
 Ttpiv, adv. of time, (kindr. Trpo,) before, 
 formerly, in independent clauses, opp. vvv, 
 Horn. II. 2. 112. Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 36 Usu 
 ally and in N. T. in a relative or conjunctive 
 sense, connecting its clause with a preced 
 ing one, and having the force of a compar 
 ative, before, sooner than; comp. Passow 
 s. v. Buttm. 5139. m. 41. 149. m. 20. 
 Matth. 6 522. 2. Viger. p. 442. 
 
 1. Simply, before, with an Infin. aor. c. 
 ace. when something new is introduced, not 
 before mentioned ; Matt. 26, 34. 75 irplv 
 dXtKTopa (paivrjcrai. Mark 14, 72. Luke 22, 
 61. John 4, 49 KardjS^Si irplv cnrcftavdv TO 
 vaioiov ^ov. 8, 58. 14, 29. Sept. for ***& 
 Ez. 33, 22. Joel 2, 31. Hdian. 1. 9. 7. 
 Epic.t. Ench. 48. 2. Plato Euthyphr. 4. 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 4, 10. 
 
 2. With r},i. e. irplv rj, sooner than, be 
 fore, a usage unknown to the earliest Attic 
 writers, as the tragedians and Thucydides, 
 but current in the middle Attic and later ; 
 see Passow s. v. Elmsley Eur. Med. 179. 
 Reisig Comm. Grit, de Soph. OC. 36. Con 
 strued : a) With an Infin. aor. c. ace. 
 where something new is introduced ; Matt. 
 1,18 irplv fj o-vvf\^f LV avTovs evp&j) KT\. 
 Mark 14, 30. Acts 2, 20. 7, 2. So Tob. 
 14, 15. M\. V. H. 1. 5, 21. Pint. Crass. 
 29 fin. Plato Rep. 501. a, p-qSe ypdfaiv vo- 
 P.OVS, irp\v fj TrapaXa/3eTi KaSapav (770X11 ), *) 
 avTol TToirjo-ai. b) With the Subjunct. aor. 
 where the reference is to something future ; 
 Luke 2. 26 p.rj I8(lv Zdvarov, Trplv t) i Sry TOV 
 Xpto-roV. 22, 34. So Hdot. 1.19; irpiv Jos. 
 Ant. 7. 9. 7. Plato Phaedo $ 6 fin. c) With 
 the Opt. where the preceding clause con 
 tains a negative ; Acts 25, 16 owe earn/ e3os 
 . . . irplv fj ... Kara irpocrairov e^oi TOVS KCITT;- 
 yopovs. Comp. Winer 42. 3. p. 344. 
 Matth. 5522. 2. b. So irpiv Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 4. 14. 
 
 IIpicrKa. T]S, t], Prisca, 2 Tim. 4, 19. 
 Rom. 16,3; and dimin. IIpio-Ki XXa, rjs, fj, 
 Priscilla, Acts 18, 2. 18. 26. [Rom. 16, 3.] 
 
 1 Cor. 16, 19; pr. n. of the wife of Aquila, 
 see in A*v\as. 
 
 II pi(TKl\\a, see in Ilpio-Ka. 
 
 Trpo, a prep, governing the genitive, 
 with the primary signif. before, Lat. pro, 
 prae, both of place and time ; comp. Winer 
 $ 51. d. p. 446. Matth. 575. Buttm. $ 147. 
 n. 1. Passow s. v. 
 
 1 . Of Place, before, in front of, in pres 
 ence of, in advance of; opp. to /nerd c. ace. 
 behind. E. g. c. gen. of place, Acts 5, 23 
 fo~Ta>Tas Trpo TMV Zvpuv. 12, 6. 14 Trpo TOV 
 vruXcoi/os-. 14, 13. James 5, 9. So Jos. Ant. 
 10. 1. 2 ?rpo TUV reix^v. Ceb. Tab. 15 Trpo 
 Ttjs St pay. Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 33 irpo TU>V nv- 
 Xeui . Of person, from the Heb. Trpo Trpo- 
 <ro>nov TWOS, i. q. Heb. ^P?, before the face 
 of any one, but used pleonast. instead of Trpo 
 simply, before any one ; Matt. 11, 10 UTTO- 
 ore XXco TOV ayyfXoV p.ov irpo Trpocrwrrov o-ov, 
 
 1. q. Trpo o-oC. Mark 1, 2. Luke 1, 76. 7, 27. 
 9, 52. 10, 1. See Winer J 67. 1. n. e. 
 Sept. for " Stl? Ex. 33, 2. 34,6. Mai. 3, 1. 
 14. Greek writers here used simply Trpo c. 
 gen. of pers. Diod. Sic. 1 6. 93 Trpo TOU /3a- 
 o~tXe <us ords. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 33. 
 
 2. Of Time, before, i. e. earlier than, prioi 
 to. a) With gen. of a noun of time, Matt 
 8, 29 Trpo Kaipov before the time appointed. 
 John 11, 55 Trpo TOV irao-fta. 13, 1. Acts 5. 
 36. 21, 38. 1 Cor. 2, 7. 4, 5. 2 Cor. 12, 2 
 Trpo fTu>v o~eKaTeo-o-dpa>v. 2 Tim. 1. 9. 4, 21. 
 Tit. 1, 2. Jude 25 in some edit. Sept. foi 
 VJSV) Zech. 8, 10. Neh. 13, 19. So Hdian. 
 
 2. 2. 3. Plut. Crass. 29 bis. Xen. Cyr. 4 
 5. 14. By inversion, John 12, 1 Trpo ! 
 f)p.fptcv TOV irdo-xa, for e| fjp.. Trpo TOV Trdo-^" 
 six days before the passover. Similar inver 
 sions are: Sept. Am. 1, 1 Trpo 8vo eVcoi/ roil 
 cr(icrp.ov. Jos. c. Apion. 2. 2 Trpo ercov rpm- 
 Koa-tav. .. Aavaov (pvyjjf. Plut. Symp. 8. 1. 
 1 Trpo p.ias f]fJLfpas TUV yei/eSXtoji/. Luc. 
 Macrob. 12 Trpo 6 > voii> eVoiv TTJS TeXeurrJr. 
 JEl H. An. 11. 19. Comp. Winer $ 65. 4. 
 b) With gen. of a noun implying an event, 
 as marking a point of time ; Matt. 24, 38 
 Trpo ToC KaTaK\vo-p.ov. Luke i 1 , 38 Trpo TOV 
 upio-Tov. 21, 12. John 17, 24 Trpo /cara/SoXJjj 
 KdVp-ov. Eph. 1, 4. Heb. 11, 5. 1 Pet. 1, 20. 
 Sept. Trpo for ^fib Is. 18, 5. (Plato Phaedu 
 init. Trp6 TOV Saiwrov. Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 21 
 Trpo TOV apiWov.) By Hebr. Acts 13, 24 
 Trpo Trpoo-o)TTOU TTJS (lo~68ov avTov, 1. q. Trpo 
 eto-oSou avrov, see above in no. 1 . Comp. 
 ^Bb, Sept. Trpo, Am. 1,1. c) With gen. 
 of pers. or thing, befure one in time; John 
 5, 7 Trpo ep-ou Kara/3aiWi, before me, i. e. 
 
617 
 
 tooner than I. 10, 8 oo-ot npc tp.ov ^ 
 Col. 1, 17. Also ot irpo TWOS those before 
 any one, who preceded him, were earlier 
 than he, Matt. 5, 12. Rom. 16, 7. Gal. 1, 17. 
 So Palaeph. 53. 2. Hdian. 1.5. 13 oi irpb 
 f /LioC. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 11 -rrpb ij/xcov. d) 
 Before roiJ c. infin. expressing an event ; 
 Matt. 6, 8 717)0 TOV vp.ds airrjo-at. Luke 2, 
 21. 22, 15. John 1, 49. 13, 19. 17, 5. 
 Acts 23, 15. Gal. 2, 12. 3, 23. Sept. for 
 Mb Gen. 13, 10. 27, 7. 10. So Ml V. H. 
 2. 34. Plato Grit. 48. d. 
 
 3. Trop. of precedence, preference, before, 
 above ; as irpb irdvratv before all things 
 James 5, 12. 1 Pet. 4, 8. 3 Mace. 2, 21 
 Seof irpb irdvriav ayios. Hdian. 5. 4. 2. 
 Plato Menex. 249. e, irpo ye aXXcov. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 5. 3. 
 
 NOTE. In composition irpo implies in 
 N. T. a) Place, fore, before, forward, 
 forth ; as irpodya, 7rpo/3aiVco, 7rpo/3dXXa>. 
 b) Time, fore, before, beforehand, Lat. prae ; 
 as irpoelirov, TrpoXeyco, irpofj.fpip.vdu>. c) 
 Preference, as irpoaiptopai. 
 
 Trpodyo), f. <B, (yco,) 1. Trans, to 
 lead forth, to bring forth, e. g. a prisoner 
 out of prison, c. ace. Acts 16, 30 irpoaya- 
 yo avrovs e&>. So in a judicial sense, 
 Acts 12, 6 ore Se ?p.eXXe avrbv rrpodyeiv 6 
 HpcoSr/f. 25, 26 8ib irpofjyayov alrbv e <p 
 vfimv, i. e. before you as judges. So genr. 
 2 Mace. 5, 18. Xen. CEc. 11. 15 ; in a judi 
 cial sense, c. els, Jos. Ant. 16. 11. 6. Arr. 
 Exp. Alex. 4. 14. 3. 
 
 2. Spec, in N. T. to go before, to precede, 
 in place or time; the signif. of the prep, 
 and verb intrans. being combined into one 
 gr.neral idea; comp. in ay no. 2. Winer 
 5 56. 1 . It thus may take an accus. by vir 
 tue of the composition ; although irpo by 
 itself governs only the genitive ; see Matth. 
 5 426. fin. Winer 1. c. compare also Buttm. 
 5147. n. 8. 
 
 a) Of place, to go before, in front, in ad 
 vance ; absol. Matt. 21, 9 ot irpodyovres KOI 
 ol aKoXovSoi/vres eKpaov. Mark 11,9. Luke 
 1 8, 39. With ace. of pers. see above ; 
 Matt. 2, 9 6 dcrrrip . . . irpofjyev avTovs. 
 Mark 10, 32. So Jos. B. J. 6. 1. 6 irpofjye 
 fit TroXu irdvras- 
 
 b) In time, i. q. to go first, to precede; 
 absol. Mark 6, 45 <cai irpodyetv els TO iripav. 
 Trop. 1 Tim. 5, 24 see in piW no. 2. b. 
 With ace. of pers. see above; Matt. 14, 22 
 <a\ irpodytiv avrbv els TO irepav. 21, 31. 26, 
 32. 28, 7. Mark 14, 28. 16, 7. So Jos. c. 
 Apion. 2.15 irpodytiv dpxatunjTt. Particip. 
 jr p o d y a> v , overa. ov. foregoing, former, pre 
 vious ; 1 Tim. 1, 18 KCITO ray irpoayovcras 
 
 (iri ere irpocpijTfias. Heb. 7, 18, So Hdian- 
 
 8. 8. 8. 
 
 ), >, f. i](Tu>, (aipe a>.) to take 
 forth out of any place, to bring forward, 
 Judith 13, 15 TrpoeXovo-a TTJV Ke(f)aXr)v CK 
 rijs irripas. Luc. Rhetor. Praec. 17. Oftener 
 Mid. to take one before another, i. e. to pre 
 fer, to choose, Hdian. 6. 8. 13. Xen. Lac. 9. 
 6 Trpoatpelo-Sai ^dvarov dvr\ TOV fiiov. 111 
 N. T. Mid. irpoaipfofj.a.1, ovfiai, to take 
 or have before oneself, to propose to oneself, 
 to purpose, absol. 2 Cor. 9, 7 Ka3o>s Trpoat- 
 pelrai TTJ KapSia. So Pol. 3. 107. 15. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 1. 2. 
 
 TrpoctiTiao/jLai, <5p.ai, f. aVo/iat, Mid. 
 depon. (atVtao/iat,) to accuse or charge be 
 forehand ; Aor. 1 to have already accused, 
 to have already brought a charge, c. ace. et 
 inf. Rom. 3, 9 ; see in eh. 1 . 2. 
 
 TTpoatcova), aor. 1 irpor]Kovo-a, (axovco,) 
 to hear beforehand; Aor. to have heard of 
 before, already, c. ace. Col. I, 5 tjv [f\iri8a] 
 irporjKovo-aTe. Jos. Ant. 8. 12. 3 irpoa- 
 KTJKOUIS TO. p.f\\ovra. Pol. 10. 5. 5. Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 3. 21. 
 
 TrpoafjLaprdva), f. 770-0), (a/iaprai/o) : ) 
 perf. irpor]fj.dpTT]Ka, to have sinned already, 
 heretofore, 2 Cor. 12, 21. 13, 2. Hdian. 3. 
 14. 8. 
 
 irpoav\iov, \>, TO, (av\rj,) place before 
 a court ; spec, the large gateway of an ori 
 ental house leading through the front into 
 the inner court (aiXiy no. 2), i. e. a gateway, 
 entrance, Mark 14, 68 ; comp. Matt. 26, 71 
 where it is irvXojv. Suid. irpoav\iov TO 
 aii\fjs. 
 
 , f. ftf](TO(Jiai, Oau/o),) to go 
 forward, to advance, intrans. Matt. 4, 21 et 
 Mark 1,19 irpofias fKf &ev. So Jos. B. J. 
 6. 1. 7. Hdian. 7. 12. 10. Xen. Ag. 6. 7. 
 Trop. Part. perf. irpofiefiriKuis, via, or. 
 advanced in life, years ; with tv c. dat. Luke 
 1, 7 irpofifftrjKoTes tv TUIS fip-epais. v. 18. 2, 
 36. Sept. c. dat. for c" 1 !:^ N3 Josh. 23, 
 1. 2. 1 K. 1, 1. So c. tv 2 Mace. 8, 8 ; c. 
 dat. Diod. Sic. 13. 89. 
 
 7rpo/9aX?uw, f. ^aXc5, OaXXw.) 1. to 
 cast or thrust forward, to put forward, c. 
 ace. Acts 19, 33 7rpo/3aXXon-a>i ai/Tttv TCOJ> 
 lovoalav, the Jews thrusting him (Alexan 
 der) forward. Sept. Jer. 46, 4. Hdian. 7. 
 6. 19. Luc. Catapl. 25 Trpd^aXX avTov e s TO 
 
 flfffOV. 
 
 2. Of plants and trees, to put forth, e. g. 
 leaves, blossoms, fruit, Luke 21, 30 STQV 
 7rpo|3aXa>o-t sc. ra (puXXa, comp. Matt. 24, 
 32. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 19 Kapirov. Arr. Epict. 
 1. 15. 7. 
 
618 
 
 , fo, (irpofiaTov^ pertain 
 ing to cattle or sheep. John 5, 2 eVt TJ Trpo- 
 ftariKTJ sc. irv\Tj t by the shee^-gate. So 
 Sept. for - ( x2n -isc Xeh. 3, 1. 32. 12, 39. 
 This gate was near the temple ; and was 
 prob. so called as the place where sheep 
 were sold for the sacrifices of the temple ; 
 see Bibl. Res. in Pal. I. p. 507 sq. 
 
 TrpofiaTOV, ou, TO, (7T/>o,3aii>a>.) pr. 
 what walks forwards ; hence in Ionic and 
 Doric usage spoken of quadrupeds, in distinc 
 tion from things flying, creeping, swimming; 
 genr. TO. irpo&aTa, beasts, cattle, Horn. 11. 
 14. 124. Hdot. 1. 203. ib. 2. 41 ; espec. 
 smaller cattle, sheep and goats, HdoL 1. 
 133. ib. 8. 137. In Attic usage and N. T. 
 a sheep, Plur. sheep, as distinguished from 
 goats, Matt 25, 32 Sxrirtp 6 TTOI/^V afyopi- 
 et ra 7rpo,3ara OTTO TU>V fpi(pu>v. So genr. 
 Matt. 7, 15 see in ej/Sv/w. 9,36. 10, 16. 
 12, 11. 12. 18, 12. Mark 6, 34. Luke 15, 
 4. 6. John 2, 14. 15. 10, 1. 2. 3 bis. 4 
 bis. 12ter. 13. Acts 8, 32. Rom. 8, 36. 
 1 Pet. 2, 25. Rev. 18, 13. Sept. for - ( xs 
 Gen. 12, 16. 13 ? 5 ; nD Ex. 12, 3 sq. So 
 Pol. 5. 35. 13. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 9. Trop. 
 of those under the care and watch of any 
 one, as sheep under a shepherd, Matt. 10, 
 6. 15, 24. 25, 33. 26, 31. Mark 14, 27. John 
 10,7. 8. 11. 15. 16. 26. 27. 21, 16. 17. 
 Heb. 13, 20. 
 
 , f. do-w, (j3id"f<o, /3aiV.) 
 to make come forward, to lead or bring for lh, 
 c. ace. Acts 19. 33 e /c fie TOV o^Xou irpoffli- 
 ftaaav AXeai>8pov they led (drew) forth 
 Alexander out of the crowd, prob. in order 
 to speak in behalf of the Jews. So Pol. 24. 
 3. 7. Trop. to put forward, Pass, to urge 
 (in. Matt. 14, 8 irpoftiftacrZelo-a ivrb TTJS nn- 
 Tpbs avTijs. So Xen. Mem. 1. 5. 1. 
 
 7rpo/2A.e7r(, f. ^<, (/SXe ircB,) to foresee, 
 Sept. for nso Ps. 37, 13. In N. T. Mid. 
 ;rpo/3Xe7j-o/iai, to provide, Lat. protideo, 
 c. ace. Heb. 11, 40. 
 
 TTpoyLVOfiai, perf. 2 jrpoytyova, (yivo- 
 /iot,) to have been before, to be done before ; 
 Rom. 3, 25 TO>I> irpoyeyovoTUiv afjMpTijfjLaT^v 
 sins before done, former sins. 2 Mace. 14, 
 13. Hdian. 1. 14. 4. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 9. 
 
 f. yvuxrofjiai. (yivaxTKat,) 
 to know before, i. e. 
 
 1. Genr. i. q. to know already, to be be 
 fore acquainted with, c. ace. Acts 26, 5 rrpo- 
 yiv&o-Kovres pe livuSfv, comp. for the pleonast. 
 adv. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 10. So c. ace. impl. 
 2 Pet. 3, 17. Wisd. 18, 6. Hdian. 1. 8. 13. 
 Xen. Mag. Eq. 8. 12. 
 
 2. Spec. i. q. to foreknow, to foresee, pr. 
 TCI p.(\\ovra Xen. Apol. 30. In X. T. only 
 of God, to foreknow, perh. with the idea of 
 approval ; spoken of the perfect foreknow 
 ledge of God as connected with his eternal 
 counsels ; so Rom. 8, 29 OTI ovs irpotyvu. 
 KO\ Trpoupicrf, and Rom. 11.2 \abv avroC, Lv 
 irpofyvii). 1 Pet. 1, 20. Comp. yivicnca) 
 1 Cor. 8 ; 3. Gal. 4, 9. 
 
 , (us, 17, (irpoyivoxTKu, ) fore 
 knowledge of future things, irpoyv. r<ov ero- 
 /leVcov Jos. c. Apion. 1. 26. Hdian. 2. 9. 4 ; 
 of a prophetic gift, Judith 11, 19. Jos. An. 
 8. 8. 5. In N. T. only of God, foreknow 
 ledge, as connected with his eternal coun 
 sels ; Acts 2, 23 rfj a>pi<Tfj.(irrj ftov\fj /eat irpo- 
 TOV %ov. 1 Pet. 1 , 2. See in irpo- 
 
 O v, 6, f], (TrpoytVo/iai, irpayt- 
 yova.) pr. earlier born, older, Horn. Od. 9. 
 221. In X. T. of irpoyovoi, progenitors, 
 ancestors, and genr. forefathers, 2 Tim. 1, 3 
 w \arpevo> dirb Trpayovutv. So 2 Mace. 8, 
 19. Hdian. 3. 5. 5. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 3. 
 Spec, parents, 1 Tim. 5, 4 dpoifias 8t86vai 
 rols Trpoyovois. So Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 1. 
 
 Trpojpd^ci), f. ^, (ypd<o>,) to write 
 before, e. g. 
 
 1 . In reference to time past, in the prater 
 tenses, to hare written before, at a former 
 time, Eph. 3. 3 jca~o>f Trpotypa^a tv o\iyco. 
 Rom. 15, 4 bis. Palaeph. 53. 6 toy irpoyt- 
 ypajrrai. 
 
 2. In reference to time future, to declare 
 in writing beforehand, to announce by put 
 ting up a written tablet, Aristoph. Av. 450 
 or 452 (TKOTTflv o.n av ^poypafpcaptv tv 
 rois TnvaKlois. Dem. 1257. 5 (ppovpas irpo- 
 ypa<pei<rr)s. Jischin. 35. pen. Plut. Camill. 
 11. Hence in X. T. 
 
 a) Genr. to announce, to declare, to set 
 forth; as by a public notice or tablet; 
 Pass. Gal. 3, 1 ols KOT o<3oA/iovr l^o-otr 
 Xp, irpoypd<pT) tv ifuv f(rravpci>/j.(i>os, before 
 whose eyes Jesus Christ hath been set forth 
 among you crucified, i. e. set forth as in a 
 public written tablet. b) Spec, to pro 
 scribe, to appoint, to ordain, Pass. Jude 4 01 
 jroXat irpoyfypaf^fjttvoi ds TOITO TO Kpipa. So 
 Appian. B. Civ. 4. 1 bis, 2i)XXa TOV npcoTov 
 rovs t)(%povs fs ~dvaTov Trpoypa^dvros KT\. 
 Pol. 32. 22. 1 ; comp. Lat. prnscribere. 
 
 77^0877X09, ou, 6, TJ, (fi^Xor.) manifest 
 beforehand, Dem. 293. 25. Xen. Hell. 6. 4. 
 9. In X. T. emphat. manifest before all, 
 u-cU-knoicn, conspicuous, 1 Tim. 5, 24. 25. 
 Heb. 7, 14. So Judith 8, 29. PluL Pyrrh. 
 25. Plato Plradr. 238. b. 
 
t>19 
 
 , f. Scocro), (Si 8co/ ; ) 
 beforehand, lo give first, c. dat. Rom. 11, 
 35 Tt s trpofSuKcv avT<p KT\. Pol. 8. 17. 7. 
 Xen. Hell. 1. 5. 7. In Gr. writers oftener 
 to give forth or over, to betray, Hdian. 7. 2. 
 14. Xen. Hell. 1. 3. 16, 19. 
 
 ou, o, (Trpoiw/xi. a e- 
 trayer, traitor, Luke" 6, 16. Acts 7, 52. 
 2 Tim. 3, 4. 2 Mace. 5, 15. Ceb. Tab. 
 34. Xen. Hell. 1. 7. 23. 
 
 7rpoSpe/j,d), see irporpf^u. 
 
 TTp6Spo/jiO<?) ov, 6, 17, adj. (Trporpe ^o). 
 Trpo8pap.flv,) running before, (pvydfta irpo- 
 8pop.ov Soph. Antig. 108. Hdot. 9. 14. In 
 N. T. Subst. a fore-runner, precursor, spo 
 ken of Jesus as entering before his follow 
 ers into the celestial sanctuary, Heb. 6, 20 
 OTTOU Trpobpop-os imfp T)p.a>i> fla-r)\%fv lr)<rovs. 
 SoDiod. Sic. 17. 17, of light troops sent for 
 ward as scouts. Xen. Mag. Eq. 1. 25 ; comp. 
 Wisd. 12, 8. 
 
 jrpoeiSov aor. 2, (e!8ov, see ei Sco,) to see 
 before oneself, afar off, Sept. for piSO Gen. 
 37, 18. Xen. An. 1.8. 20. In N. T* /o fore 
 see, as things future, absol. Acts 2, 31 (Aa- 
 (31$) Trpoi Saw e XdXjjcre *rX. Gal. 3, 8 C. ort. 
 So Wisd. 19, 2. Hdian. 7. 1. 21. Xen. Cyr. 
 2. 4. 21. 
 
 TrpoeiTTOV aor. 2, perf. TrpoeiprjKa, see in 
 enroi/ init. to say before, i. e. 
 
 1. In reference to time past, to have said 
 before, to have already declared, e. g. Aor. 
 Gal. 5, 21 ; c. dat. 1 Thess. 4, <5 npotiita- 
 p.ev ifuv, for this form comp. in elirov init. 
 Perf. Gal. 1, 9. Heb. [4, 7.] 10, 15 ; c. on 
 2 Cor. 7, 3. Perf. 3 Mace. 6, 35. Hdian. 8. 
 4. 27. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 15. 
 
 2. In reference to time future, to say be 
 forehand, lo orelell, lo predict, e. g. Aor. c. 
 aCC. Acts 1, 16 ty [ypa<prjv~\ irpodne TO 
 irveiip.a. Perf. Rom. 9, 29 ; c. vp.lv Matt. 24, 
 25; vp. iv irdvra Mark 13, 23; ort 2 Cor. 
 13, 2 ; Ttov pT]p.dr(M)i> Trpo(ipr]p.(va>i> 2 Pet. 3, 
 
 2. Jude 17. Aor. Pol. 6. 3. 2. Xen. Hell. 
 
 3. 4. 20, 21. Perf. Hdian. 6. 8. 13 ; ra irpo- 
 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 2. 4. 
 
 TrpoeprjKd, see in irpoe nrov. 
 
 TrpoeA/Tri^ei), f. t o-w, (Amfw,) lo hope 
 beforehand, in respect to things predicted ; 
 Eph. 1, 12 i]p.us . . TOVS 7rpoT)\iriK6T(s ev 
 TO> Xptorw, i. e. before his manifestation; 
 spoken of the Jews as having of old had the 
 hope and promise of the Messiah, in opp. to 
 the Gentiles who have now first heard of 
 him, iip-fts aKoixravrts v. 13 ; comp. Rom. 
 3, 1 sq. 9, 4 sq. Athen. 9. p. 377. c. So 
 Pol. 2. 4. 5. ib. 14. 3. 1. 
 
 f. gopcu, (Vapxo/iai,) 
 to begin before ; Aor. to hare begun before, 
 already, 2 Cor. 8, 6. 10. Not found else 
 where. 
 
 7rpoe7rayye\\a), f. e Xw, (fVayy/XXw,) 
 lo announce beforehand, Dion Cass. 40. 32. 
 In N. T. Mid. to promise before, of old : 
 c. ace. Rom. 1, 2 o [tvayyeXiov 6 3eos] 
 7rpo7r?7yyet XaTO Sta TUJV TrpcxprjToiv KT\. i. e. 
 aforetime, of old. 2 Cor. 9, 5 in some edit. 
 So Pass. Dion Cass. 478. 45. 
 
 see Trpoeltrov. 
 
 f. f \fv(Top.ai, aor. 2 TT/JO- 
 ^X3oi< ; see in tp^op-ai. 
 
 1. to go forward, to go further, to pass on, 
 intrans. Matt. 26, 39 et Mark 14, 35 Trpo- 
 eX3o> niKpov. With ace. of the way, Acts 
 12, 10 7rpoi7X3oi> pvp-rjv p.iav, comp. Matth. 
 
 5 409. 4. Buttm. 5 131. 0. Winer 5 32. 6. 
 Jos. B. J. 6. 2. 5. Plut. Thes. 11 nixpw 
 TrpofXad)!/. Xen. Eq. 7. 9 ; c. ace. TTJV 6b~6i> 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 18. 
 
 2. to go before any one, as referring eithei 
 to place or time, e. g. 
 
 a) Of place, to go before, in advance of 
 any one, as a fore-runner, messenger, c. 
 fvaymov TWOS Luke 1, 17; or as a leader, 
 guide, c. ace. Luke 22, 47 lovdas Trpoi^p^rro 
 avTovs sc. TOV ox\ov. For this ace. see in 
 Trpodyo) no. 2. Ecclus. 35, 10. Comp. 
 Sept. c. e/i7rpocr3f TIVOS for "^sb "Q2 Gen. 
 33, 3. 
 
 b) In time, i. q. to go first, to precede, to 
 set off before another ; Acts 20, 5 oro 
 TrpoeXScWes (fievov f]p.as ev TpudSt. 20, 13 
 irpof\Z6vTfs eV! TO TrXotoi . 2 Cor. 9, 5 ei r 
 iftas. So c. gen. Luc. D. Mort. 6. 5 anav- 
 Tts TrpoeXfixTovrai. avTov. Spec, to outgo, to 
 arrive first, Mark 6, 33 Rec. 
 
 Trpoepeco, see tvpodnov. 
 
 TTpoeTOlpdfo, f. da-a, (eroi/idfeo), lo 
 prepare beforehand, Wisd. 9, 18. Pausan. 
 4. 22. 1. Hdot. 8. 24. In N. T. to appoint 
 or ordain beforehand, to predestine, c. ace. 
 et ds, Rom. 9, 23 a TrponTOLp-aa-fv els o6av. 
 Also by attract, c. dat. Eph. 2, 10 ols [ep- 
 yois] irpor)Toip.ao-(v 6 Sfdr, Iva tv avTois Ttt- 
 pmaTTjo-uiJifv. Comp. Philo de Opif. p. 17, 
 
 6 Seos ra tv Kocrp.a> Tvdvra Trpo^TOi/idtraro els 
 epwra KO.\ Trtfaov OVTOV. 
 
 TrpoevayyeXi^o/Aai, f. ia-op.at, Mid 
 (fiayyfXt fa),) to announce glad tidings 
 beforehand, to foretell glad news, c. dat. Gal. 
 3, 8 TrpoevayyeXiVaro TW Aftpadp., on KT\. 
 Comp. Gen. 12, 3. 18, 18. 
 
 Trpoe^a), f. t co, (e^a),) to hold forth or 
 forward, e. g. the hands Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 10. 
 
Mid. to hold before oneself, Hdot. 2. 42 ; 
 trop. to use as a pretext, to allege, Hdot. 8. 
 3. Time. 1. 140. Trop. to have before an 
 other, to have preference or pre-eminence, 
 lo excel, to be superior, belter, Jos. Ant. 7. 
 10. 2 po)firj npoexovTfs. Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 41 
 yv<ap.T] Trpof^fiv. Hence in N. T. Mid. 
 Trpoe xo/xcu, to excel, to be superior, better, 
 sc. on one s own part; Rom. 3, 9 ri olv; 
 n-pof^o /xf 3a ; are we better ? have we a pre 
 ference above the Gentiles ? sc. in respect 
 to being sinners before God. 
 
 Trpo^ yeo/iat, ovpai, f. jjo-o/itu, (ijye o- 
 p.ai,) to lead forward or onward, to go on 
 before, to take the lead, 2 Mace. 11,8. Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 87. Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 27. In N. T. 
 trop. to lead on by example, with ace. and 
 dat. of that in or as to which, Rom. 12, 10 
 rf) Tip.fl dXXr/Xous TTpoyyovfjifvoi in mutual 
 respect taking the lead one of another, giving 
 example to each other. For the ace. comp. 
 in Trpodyw no. 2. 
 
 620 TT/ao/caXeo) 
 
 7 rrjs TrpoS. eVtora/it j/jjs. Luc. Ver. Hist. 1. 
 36. -<Eschin. 6. 14. 
 
 eOS) , ^ (7rpoTi37/it,) a setting 
 before or forth, a setting or laying out, e. g. 
 of a dead body, Dem. 1071. 21. Plato Legg. 
 p. 959. a. In N. T. 
 
 1. Pr. as of food, but only of the shew- 
 bread, as being set out before Jehovah on a 
 ^able in the sanctuary, Heb. 
 
 :he bread of presence, later 
 the bread of rows or of piles, Vulg. panes pro- 
 positionis ; see Lev. 24, 5-9. So as a genit 
 of quality, in an adjective sense, in the phra 
 ses: ot opTot TTJS TrpoSeerews 1 Matt. 12, 4. 
 Mark 2, 26. Luke 6, 4, and fj 7rpo3eo-t? ru>v 
 tipruv Heb. 9, 2, both equivalent to ot aprot 
 ot jrpoTiSe/wvoi, the shew-bread, see Winer 
 34. 2. Buttm. } 132. n. 12. Lehrg. p. 643 
 sq. So Sept. oprot rijs 7rpo3eVea>s for BfD 
 Di?Bn Ex. 35, 12. 1 K. 7, 48. al. HS-iSa 
 1 Chr. 9, 32. 23, 29 7rpo3ecrts aprvv for 
 Dttb a 2 Chr. 13, 11. Comp. 2 Mace. 
 10, 3. 
 
 2. Trop. of what one sets before his mind, 
 proposes to himself, Lat. proposilum, i. q. 
 purpose, counsel ; Acts 27, 1 3 86avTes rfjs 
 7rpo3recos KtKpa.TrjK.ivai. Emphat.jfirm pur 
 pose, firm resolve, Acts 11, 23. 2 Tim. 3, 
 10. Elsewhere of the eternal purpose and 
 counsel of God ; Rom. 8, 28 rots KOTO, irpo- 
 Seo-tj K\T]Tols. 9, 11 see in exXo-yij no. 1. 
 Eph. 1,11. 3, 11. 2 Tim. 1, 9. 2 Mace. 
 3. 8. Pol. 1. 54. 1. Diod. Sic. 20. 102 init. 
 
 set beforehand, appointed, spoken of time ; 
 hence f) 7rpo3eo-/Mi a sc. f]/j.fpa, a set day, 
 appointed time, Gal. 4, 2. Jos. Ant. 12. 4. 
 
 as,.T), (7rpo3up.or,) predis 
 position, readiness, willingness, alacrity of 
 mind ; Acts 17, 1 1 e Se |an-o TW \6yov p-era 
 irda-rjs Trpo%vp.ias. 2 Cor. 8, 1 1. 12. 19. 9, 2. 
 Ecclus.45,23. Dem. 1457.8. Xen. Yen. 2.1. 
 Trpo^Vfios, ov, 6, T), adj. (3up.or,) predis 
 posed, ready, willing, eager ; e. g. TO TrveC/xa 
 7rpo3v/iov Matt. 26, 41. Mark 14, 38. Sept. 
 for a-n; 1 Chr. 28, 21. 2 Chr. 29, 31. So 
 Pol. 4/7. 9. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 22. Neut. 
 TO TrpoS vp.ov, readiness, alacrity, Rom. 
 1, 15 TO KCLT e /xe Trpo Sv/iov (eWi), there is 
 readiness on my part, I am ready ; comp. 
 Eph. 1,15. (3 Mace. 5, 26. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 
 13 TO TTfpi O.VTOVS 7rpo3u/^oi> ToO SeoO. Eur. 
 Iph. Taur. 996.) Others : TO KOT /ie, 
 TrpoSiyiov (e orTi), as much as in me is, there 
 is readiness ; comp. Dem. 1210. 20. 
 
 7T/JO^u/i&)9, adv. (7rpo3vp.os,) readihj, 
 willingly, with alacrity, 1 Pet. 5, 2. Tob. 
 7, 8. Hdian. 1. 5. 24. Xen. Conv. 4. 50. 
 
 7rpoi(TT?7/if, f. irpoa-TTja-co, (ia"rr]fj.i,~) aor. 
 2 Trpoea-rrjv, perf. part, contr. Trpoto-Twj. 
 Trans, to cause to stand before, to set over, 
 Hdian. 5. 7. 13. Pol. 1. 33. 7. See in to-n;- 
 fii, comp. Buttm. 107. II. In N. T. only 
 in the intrans. tenses, e. g. Act. aor. 2 and 
 perfect; Mid. or Pass. pres. to stand be 
 fore, e. g. 
 
 1. to be over, to preside, to rule, absol. 
 Rom. 12, 8 6 Trpotord/iei o?, eV crirovbij. 
 1 Tim. 5, 17 ot KaXSis TrpoeoTWTfs. With 
 a gen. like other verbs of ruling, through 
 the force of ?rpo in compos. 1 Tim. 3, 4 
 TOV tSi ov oucou KaXoJf 7rpo i<Trdp.evov. V. 5 
 TOI) Id. O IKOV TTpoorfji ai. v. 12. 1 Thess. 
 5, 12. So c. gen. 1 Mc cc. 5, 19. Jos. 
 Ant. 8. 12. 3. Hdian. 7. 4. 4. Xen. Mem. 
 3. 4. 3. 
 
 2. Spec, to care for any thing, to be dili 
 gent in, to practise, to maintain ; c. gen. 
 KaXeov epyuiv 7Tpoi<rTa<r%ai Tit. 3, 8. 14. 
 Athen. 13. p. 612. a, 2oX&>j/oy TOV j/o/io3eVou 
 ovS (TTirpfTrovTos o>8pt TuvTrjs TV poicrTaa Sai 
 re^yrfs. Plut. Pericl. 24 ov Kocrp.iov irpoe- 
 crTuxrav (pya(Tias, oiSe crfp-vf/s- Comp. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 2. 2. 
 
 TTpOKaXecO, at, f. eo-a), (KaXe w,) /O caZ2 
 /ort/i, to invite to stand forth, Pol. 23. 9. 2. 
 Oftener Mid. to caZ/ /ortft to oneself, to in- 
 xile, Plato Conv. 217. c ; espec. to combat, 
 to challenge, Diod. Sic. 4. 58. Xen. Cyr. ]. 
 4. 4. Hence in N. T. Mid. TrpoKaXe o/iat, 
 ov/xat, Lat. prowco, to provoke, to excite, c, 
 ace. Gal. 5, 26. So Hdian. 6. 1. 12. Diod, 
 Sic. 1. 21. 
 
621 
 
 TT pOKaTayye\\a>, f. 6 Xco, ((carayyeX- 
 Xa>,) /o announce beforehand, e. g. future 
 events, to foretell, Acts 3, 18. 24. 7,52. 
 Pass. Part. perf. TrpttKaTJ/yyeXp.ei oy, 
 announced beforehand, promised, 2 Cor. 9, 
 5 Rec. Jos. Ant. 2. 9. 4 rois TrpoKarTjyyeX- 
 /itVoiy UTTO ToC 3eou Trt crrii Trapei^f. ib. 1. 
 12. 3. 
 
 TrpOKarapTL^a), f. urco, (Kara/m jjw,) to 
 wia&e reflffy beforehand, c. ace. 2 Cor. 9, 5. 
 Not found in Gr. writers. 
 
 TrpOKGlfjLaij Part. irpoKfi^fVoy, (/ceip,cu,) 
 to Zie before, to be laid or se/ before any one, 
 intrans. pr. Sept. Lev. 24, 7. Luc. Nigr. 2. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 25, 27. In N. T. only 
 trop. 
 
 1 . to lie or be before the mind of any one, 
 i. q. to be present to him ; 2 Cor. 8, 12 
 yap 17 7rpo3up,( a TrpoKftrai. Philo de Vit. 
 Mos. p. 626. a, irpovnaro ti> avrw WXoy. 
 Diod. Sic. 20. 43. Xen. Conv. 2. 7. 
 
 2. Put instead of Pass. perf. of Trpor/Sty/u, 
 comp. in Kelp,ai no. 2 ; to fee Zcn J or set be 
 fore one s mind, e. g. a duty, reward, exam 
 ple ; Heb. 6, 18 rrjs TrpoKdiMtvrjs t\Tri8os 
 KparrjcraL. 12, 1. 2. Jude 7 coy 2o Sop,a KCU 
 Pa p-oppa . . . TTpoKfivrai Seiyp,a. Jos. Ant. 
 
 15. 8. 1. Diod. Sic. 3. 26. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 
 2,8. 
 
 TTpoKrjpva-ad) v. -TTOJ, f. co, (unpixr- 
 aco,) to proclaim beforehand, by a herald, 
 Jos. B. J. 6. 8. 2. Pol. 5. 60. 3. Xen. Lac. 
 11. l. In N. T. genr. to announce or 
 preach beforehand ; in the past tenses, to 
 have before announced, preached ; c. ace. 
 Acts 13, 24 irpoKTjpvgaiTos Icodwov . . . 
 /3a7mcrp,a p-eravoias. Pass. Acts 3, 20 Rec. 
 Jos. Ant. 10. 5. 1 Ifpept ay ra peXXoj/ra 
 TY TToXet Seiva irpo(KT]pve. 
 
 7T/30/C07TJ/, rjs, f], (7rpoKo7rrco.) pr. a going 
 forward, progress ; in N. T. only trop. pro 
 gress, advancement, furtherance ; Phil. 1, 12 
 fls irpoKOTrrjv TOV evayyeXi ov. V. 25. 1 Tim. 
 4) 15.2 Mace. 8, 8. Pol. 2. 37. 10. Diod. 
 Sic. 16. 6. A word of the later Greek, 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 85. 
 
 TTOO/COTTTft), f. -v/rco, (KOTTTCO,) to leal or 
 drive forwards, as if with repeated strokes ; 
 hence, in forward, to further, Thuc. 4. 60. 
 ib. 7. 56. Also intrans. or with iavrov 
 impl. see in ayco no. 2, to beat forward, as 
 in Engl. a ship is said to beat ahead ; hence 
 genr. to go forward, to make progress, to 
 proceed, on one s way, journey, Jos. Ant. 2. 
 
 16. 13. B. J. 4. 2. 4. Comp. in Engl. to 
 push forwards, both trans, and intrans. In 
 N. T. only intrans. and trop. 
 
 1. to make progress in any thing, to ad 
 vance, to increase ; e. g. with dat. of that in 
 
 or as to which, Luke 2, 52 KOI 
 Konre oxx/u a, comp. Winer $31. 3. Matth. 
 5400. 7. With eV c. dat. Gal. 1, 14 / TW 
 louSaiVp-w, comp. Matth. 1. c. note. With 
 eVt c. ace. e. g. Vl TO x f ~ l P ov i 1 wax worse 
 and worse, 2 Tim. 3, 13 ; eVi ir\elov further 
 2 Tim. 2, 16. 3, 9 ; comp. in TrXeiW no. 4. 
 So c. dat. Diod. Sic. 11. 87; c. eV, as 
 TTpoKeKofpws fv TrcuSei a Diod. Sic. VI. p. 30. 
 Arr. Epict. 2. 10. 30 ; eVi TO KUKOV Test. 
 XII Pair. p. 614 ; eVi TT^IOV Diod. Sic. 
 14. 98. 
 
 2. Of time, aor. to be advanced, to be far 
 spent, Rom. 13, 12 ; i/i TrpotKo-^fv. Jos. 
 B. J. 4. 4. 6 TTJS VVKTOS irpoKonrov(rr]s- App. 
 B. Civ. 2. p. 781 fjfitpa TrpovKOTTTf. 
 
 irpOKplfia, arcs, TO, (TrpoKpiVw,) a pre- 
 judgment, prejudice, prepossession, 1 Tim. 
 5,21. 
 
 TTpOKVpoO), >, f. cooxo, (*:vpoco,) to esta 
 blish or confirm before, previously, Pass. 
 perf. Gal. 3, 17. 
 
 7rpo\afJ,{3dva), aor. 2 TrpoeXafiov, (Xap.- 
 Pdva>,~) to take before, i. e. 
 
 1. to take before another, to anticipate an 
 other in doing any thing, c. ace. 1 Cor. 11, 
 21 fKacrTos TO idiov faarvov 7rpoXa/i/3am, 
 
 1. e. the rich man eats the provisions lie has 
 brought, without waiting for the poorer 
 members to come in ; comp. in dydfrrj no. 
 
 2. So Diod. Sic. 20. 107 irpoXanftdveiv TO 
 
 Dem. 32. 27. ib. 79. 2 
 
 yap fj.wv TOVTO 
 
 2. Before an infin. to take up beforehand, 
 to do before the time, to anticipate the time 
 of doing ; c. inf. Mark 14, 8 7rpoe Xa,3e ^upi- 
 crat JJLOV TO crco/xa KT\. i. e. she hath anoint 
 ed my body by anticipation against my bu 
 rial ; comp. Winer 58. 4. Gesen. Lehrg. 
 p. 823. Aristot. de Gener. Anim. 4. 1 KU\ 
 7rpoXa/n/3a/oKrey coy ouTcoy fx ov i Wffo yivop.*- 
 vov ouTojy I8fiv. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 3 oldiHtp- 
 criKol VO/JLOI. 7rpoXa/3oWey eVt/ie Xon-at oTrcoy 
 KTX. Comp. Katpovs Trpo\a^dvfiv Diod. 
 Sic. 14. 63. 
 
 3. Pass. aor. 1 TrpotXfj^Tjv, of persons, 
 to have been before taken, overtaken, surpri 
 sed ; Gal. 6, 1 et KOI Trpo\rj(p~;i a^SpcoTroy tv 
 Ttt>\ TrapaTTTco/xart, if a man be overtaken in 
 a fault, i. e. by surprise, before he thinks of 
 it._Wisd. 11, 17. 
 
 TTp oXeyft), f. ^co, (Xe yco,) to say before 
 hand. in foretell, to forewarn, 2 Cor. 13, 2. 
 Gal. 5, 21. 1 Thess. 3, 4. Sept. for 1151-1 
 Is. 41, 26. Diod. Sic. 1. 50. Xen. An. 7. 
 7. 3. 
 
 Trpo/jiapTVpo/Jicu, Mid. depon. (p-apru- 
 pop.cn,) pr. to call to witness beforehand, 
 
622 
 
 only in N. T. to testify beforehand, to de 
 clare beforehand, 1 Pet. 1,11. See Sta/inp- 
 
 , f. ijcrw, (/^eXfraco,) to 
 practise beforehand, Pol. 10. 47. 3. Xen. 
 Ath. 1. 20. In N. T. to premeditate, c. inf. 
 Luke 21, 14 /J.TJ 7rpo/ieXeraJ> airoKoyrftrjvai.. 
 Comp. Mark 13, 11. 
 
 Trpofjiepi^vdu), z>, f. 770-0), (pepi/xi/aw,) 
 to ca? - e or take thought beforehand, Mark 
 13, 11. 
 
 Trpovoea), <, f. ^o-co, (W&>,) to foresee, 
 to perceive beforehand, Horn. II. 18. 526. 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 13. In N. T. trop. to see 
 to beforehand, to care for*, to provide for, Lat. 
 provideo, c. gen. 1 Tim. 5, 8. So Wisd. 
 13, 16. JEl V. H. 2. 31. Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 1. 
 Mid. to provide for in one s own behalf, 
 C. accus. e. g. Trpovoovp-evoi KaXa evdnriov 
 TWOS, providing for what is good in the 
 sight of any one, taking care to walk up 
 rightly, Rom. 12, 17 and 2 Cor. 8, 21, in 
 allusion to Sept. Prov. 3, 4 irpovoov KO\O. 
 eVcaTnoi Kvpiov. Comp. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 
 12 ; c. gen. Sext. Empir. adv. Eth. 104 
 TrpowetcrSfu TOV KaXoO. Jos. Ant. 9. 1. 1. 
 
 as, fj, (rrpovofo), ) foresight, 
 providence, provision, Acts 24, 3. Rom. 13, 
 14 Trpovoiav p.T) TroietcrSat, see in iroieo) no. 
 1. b. /3. 2 Mace. 4, 6. Pol. 3. 106. 9. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 6. 23. 
 
 TTpOOpua), 5), (opaw,) perf. TrpoopaKa, 
 to foresee, Jos. c. Ap. 128. Xen. Conv. 4. 5 ; 
 to see before oneself, Thuc. 7. 44. Xen. Cyr. 
 5. 4. 49. In N. T. to see before, i. e. 
 
 1. Mid. to see before oneself, to have be 
 fore one s eyes, trop. of what one has vividly 
 in mind, c. ace. Acts 2, ^JHomp^tjvrov 
 Ki-ftov fvwTTiov pxnvquoted from Ps. 16, 8 
 where Sept. for <"ij^ to set. 
 
 2. Perf. to have seen before, in time, Acts 
 21, 29. 
 
 Trpooplfa, f. to-co, (6pt<,) to bound or 
 limit beforehand, trop. of price, Dem. 877. 
 7 si sana lect. In N. T. trop. to predeter 
 mine, to predestinate, spoken of the eternal 
 counsels and decrees of God ; with ace. c. 
 infin. expr. or impl. Acts 4, 28 oo-a ... 17 
 /3ouXn crov Trpowpicre yewVSat. Rom. 8, 29. 
 30. I Cor. 2, 7 ; c. ace. et ds Eph. 1, 5. 
 Pass. v. 11. 
 
 aor. 2 TrpoerraSov, 
 to be affected beforehand, to experience before, 
 e. g. good Hdot. 7. 11. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 5. 
 In N. T. of evil, to suffer before; Aor. 
 to have suffered before, previously, 1 Thess. 
 2, 2. So Thuc. 3. 67, 82. Plato Rep. 376. a. 
 
 TrpoTrdrwp, O pos, 6, (n-cmyp.) a forefa 
 ther, ancestor, Rom. 4, 1 Lachm. for Trtmyp 
 Rec. Hdot. 2. 161. Luc. Alex. 43. Plato 
 Legg. 717. e. 
 
 }, f. ^a>, (mf/wi-co,) to send on 
 before, Jos. Ant. 7. 8. 5. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 1 8 ; 
 to send forwards or forth Wisd. 19, 2. Hdot. 
 4. 33, 121. In N. T. to send forward on 
 one s journey, to bring one on his way, to 
 accompany for some distance in token of 
 respect and honour; c. ace. Acts 20, 38 
 Trpofirfp-irov avTov els TO irkoiov. 21,5. So 
 Jos. Ant. 7. 11.4 irponefj. ^as Aam8r]v fie- 
 XPI TOV lopBdvov. Diod. Sic. 13. 3. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 4. 25. Hence genr. to bring one on 
 his journey, to help one forward, c. ace. 
 1 Cor. 16, 6. 1 1. Tit. 3, 13. 3 John 6. Pass. 
 Acts 15, 3. Rom. 15, 24. 2 Cor. 1,16. So 
 1 Esdr. 4, 47. 1 Mace. 12, 4. 
 
 { os , ovs, 6, ij, (adj. 
 
 >,) falling forwards, Lat. prociduus, Xen. 
 Eq. 1 . 8 ; trop. prone, inclined, ready to do 
 any thing, Xen. Hell. 6. 5. 24. In N. T. 
 trop.-in a bad sense, precipitate, headlong, 
 rash ; Acts 19, 36 firj8ev irponfTes rrpaTTfiv. 
 2 Tim. 3, 4. So Ecclus. 9, 23. Hdian, 1, 
 8. 11. jEschin. 27. 8. 
 
 t,, f. da-op-ai, Pass, depon. 
 to pass on before, to go before 
 any one. e. g. as a leader, guide, c. gen. Acts 
 7, 40 "Zetiis ot TrpoTropeucrozrat f)p.S)v, quoted 
 from Ex. 32, 1. 22, where Sept. for Tjbn. 
 (1 Maci. U, 11. Pol. 18. 2. 5.) Also as\i 
 forerunner, herald, Luke 1, 76 TrpoTr. irpo 
 TrpocrwTrou Kvptov, see in Trpd no. 1 . Sept. for 
 h .?S> ^bn p s . 97, 3; b trtp p s . 89, 15. 
 So Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 23 Trpo-rr. 
 
 a prep, governing the genitive, 
 dative, and accusative ; coinciding in its prim 
 ary signif. with the primary force of these 
 cases respectively, viz. with the gen. imply 
 ing motion or direction from a place hither ; 
 with the dat. rest or remaining by, at, near 
 a place ; with the accus. motion or direction 
 towards or to a place. Buttm. 147. n. 1. 
 Kiihner 298. Matth. 590. Winer 51. f. 
 p. 448. 52. e. p. 471. 53. h. p. 481. 
 
 I. With the GENITIVE, pr. from a place 
 hither, Horn. Od. 8. 29 f elves . . . JWr epov 
 Sco, TJ Trpos Tjoimv. 77 ecnrepiwv av^pu>nu>v. 
 Then, of a place or region from which a 
 person or thing seems to come, in or towards 
 which he appears ; e. g. Trpos Bopeao, npos 
 No rov, Engl. northward, southward, Od. 13. 
 110, 111; jrpos TOV iroTap-ov, at or by the 
 river, Xen. An. 4. 3. 26. Comp. Heb. & 
 Gen. 2, 8. 13, 11. Heb. Lex. ") no. 3. h 
 
7T/309 
 
 Trop. of the source, agent, cause, from 
 which any thing comes or proceeds, e. g. 
 Xo/3eti/ TI rrpo s rivos Hdot. 2. 139, 152 ; and 
 so after neuter or passive verbs, from, of, by, 
 Luc. D. Deor. 14. 1. Hdian. 1. 2. 5. Xen. 
 An. 1. 9. 20. Buttm. { 134. 3. Also mark 
 ing dependence from, relation with or to, i. e. 
 the pertaining or belonging in any way to a 
 person or thing, e. g. Trpor SIK^S according 
 to right Soph. CEd. T. 1014. Hdot. 7. 153 ; 
 aTorra \tyeis ndi ov8a/j,uis Trpor <rov Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 3. 15. Hence in N. T. once, trop. 
 pertaining to, with the idea of advantage, 
 
 1. e. helpful to, for; Acts 27, 34 roiiro yap 
 *vos rr}s vfuripat a-wnjplas inrapxti. Matth. 
 J590. Kiihner $ 298. Winer {51. p. 448. 
 So Luc. D. Deor. 20. 3. Diod. Sic. 18. 50 
 tin. Piato Gorg. 459. c. Thuc. 3. 38. 
 
 II. With the DATIVE, Trpos marks a place 
 or object by the side of which a person or 
 thing is, by, at, near ; as if in answer to the 
 question where ? in N. T. only five (or six) 
 times, e, g. Mark 5, 1 1 rrpos r<j> 6 pet, where 
 Rec. has Trpos rd oprj. Luke 1 9, 37 Trpos rfj 
 KaraffdiTfi rov opovs. John 18, 166 Ilerpos 
 (ia~rr)Kfi Trpbs rfj 3iW. 20, [11.] 12. Rev. 1, 
 13. Matth. ^590. b Buttm. } 147. n. 1. 
 Kiihner } 298. Winer { 51. p. 471. Jos, Ant 
 
 2. 16. 1. Hdian. 5. 3. 24. Xen. An. 1. 8. 4. 
 
 III. With the ACCUSATIVE. TTOOS marks 
 strictly the object towards or to \vhich any 
 thing moves or is directed, see above, init. 
 
 1. Of Place, towards, to, unto, as if in an 
 swer to the question whither ? c. ace. of 
 place, thinjr, person: comp. Matth. 5 591. 
 Buttm. 1. c. Kiihner $ 298. Winer ,j 53. p. 48 1 . 
 
 a) Pr. of motion or direction, e. g. after 
 verbs of going, coming, departing, return 
 ing, and the like, and also after like nouns ; 
 Matt. 2, 12 pr) dvaKafj-^rai Trpbs HpooS^f. 3, 
 5 feTTOpevovro Trpbs alrov. V. 14 Kal cru 
 tp xr) Trpos fie ; 10,13. 11,28. 25, 9. Mark 
 1, 33 TI TroXis O\T] Tno-vvrjy[j.(vr] r/v Trpbs rfjv 
 3vpai/. 6, 25. 45 irpodytiv . . . irpbs ~Brfi<rdi- 
 8dv. 10, 1. Luke 8, 4. 19. 24, 12 aTnjXSe 
 rrpos eavruv, i. e. to their lodgings. John 3, 
 20 OVK fpxerai Trpos TO <pcos. 6, 37. 7. 33. 
 Acts 3, 11. 28, 30. Rom. 1, 10. Gal. 1, 17. 
 al. ep. (Hdian. 1. 13. 2. Pint. Galb. 13 
 init. Xen. Hell. 4. 1. 2.) So after yiVeo-3at, 
 John 10, 35. Acts 7, 31. 13, 32. 2 Cor. 1, 
 18; see in yiVo/im I. 4. b. f. (Comp. Xen. 
 An. 3. 4. 24.) After verbs of sending, c. 
 ace. of pers. Matt. 21, 34 tiTrWeiXe TOVS 
 Sov Xovs avrov irpbs rovs yfcopyovs. Luke 
 23, 27. John 16, 7. Acts 15, 25. Eph. 6, 22. 
 Tit. 3, 12. Hence cVto-ToXij Trpos rtva Acts 
 9, 2. 22, 5. 2 Cor. 3, 1. (Hdian. 2. 12. 10. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 3 ; (iriaroXf) irpus 2 Mace. 
 
 023 
 
 7rpo<? 
 
 11,27. Luc. Nigr. 1 .) After verbs of load 
 ing, bringing, drawing, by force or otherwise ; 
 Matt. 26, 57 ot be Kpanjcraires rbv I. dirf)- 
 yayov npbs Kdid(pav. Mark 9, 17. 19 (pepert 
 airbv Trpos p.f. 11,7. Luke 12, 58. John 
 12, 32 Trdvras tAKucrco Trpos epavrov. 14, 3. 
 Acts 23, 15. Rev. 12, 5. Pragn. Acts 23, 
 24 see in Siacra>o>. So Hdian. 4. 3. 3. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 1 . Also after verbs imply 
 ing motion to a place and a subsequent re 
 maining there, where in Engl. we mostly 
 use at, upon, but also to, unto, E. g. verbs 
 of falling, TTLTrretv v. TTpocrnLnrfiv Trpbs rovs 
 TroSas rivos, to fall at one s feel, Mark 5, 22. 
 7, 25. (Sept. Ex. 4, 25.) So verbs of lay 
 ing, putting, casting, and the like ; as Matt. 
 3, 10 fj divr] Trpbs rfjv piuv Kelrai. Luke 3, 
 9. 16, 20 os fjSefiXrjTO Trpbs rbv Trv\a>va au- 
 roO. Acts 3, 2. So Mark 10, 7. Matt. 4, 6. 
 For the use of Trpo s c. ace. after verbs com 
 pounded with Trpos, see Winer ; 56. 4. 13. 
 Genr. Acts 5, 10 e^ei/ey/cai/res teaifsav Trpbs 
 rbv avftpa avrrjs. Acts 13, 36. After verbs 
 and words implying mere direction, as a 
 turning, reaching, looking, and the like : 
 Luke 7, 44 (rrpa(pe\s Trpos rtjv yvvdiKa. Acts 
 9, 40. 2 Cor. 3, 16. Rom. 10, 21 er Ta<ra 
 ray ^eipds fJ-ov Trpbs XaoV KT\. Eph. 3, 14 
 Kdfj.irra> rd yovard /JLOV Trpbs rbv -irartpa. Trop. 
 James 4. 5 see in eViTroSe co. (Hdian. 6. 4. 3.) 
 So by Hebraism, e. g. /3XeTmi> ri irpocratTrov 
 Trpbs Trp6o~Q)Trov, face to face, 1 (.or. 13, 12 : 
 So Sept. for tn:a ^ D^JB Gen. 32, 31. 
 Deut. 34, 10. Also XoAeu 1 trro/ia npbs o~ro- 
 p.a, mouth to mouth, 2 John 12 ; so Sept. 
 for fB~^"$ nB , Nm. 12, 8. Comp. Matth. 
 J 427. b. 
 
 b) Put with all verbs and words which In 
 clude the idea of speaking to any one, most 
 ly c. ace. of pers. Comp. Matth. Winer, 
 1. c. a) Genr. e- g. after elnnv Matt. 3, 
 15. Luke 1, 13. 18. 34 ; AoXe co Luke 1,19. 
 55. 2, 18. 20; Xe yeu Luke 5. 36. 7,24. 
 Acts 3, 25 ; fpvfil Luke 22, 70. Acts 2, 38. 
 al. So with verbs of answering, as drroKpt- 
 vopat Acts 3, 12. 25, 16 ; of accusing, as 
 Kanjyopeaj John 5, 45 ; of praying, entreat 
 ing, as /3oao> Luke 18, 7 (Sept. 1 Sam. 12, 
 10) ; 8fop.ai Acts 8, 24 ; SVis Rom. 10, 1 ; 
 vxofj.ai 2 Cor. 13,7; Ttpoa-evxn Acts 12, 
 5. Rom. 15, 30 ; so by Hebr. diptiv <paw)v 
 Trpos rbv 3fo i> Acts 4, 24 ; comp. Heb. 
 b p Sb3 Is. 24, 14, and Heb. Lex. art. Xtt 
 no. 1 . e. With words of declaring, making 
 known, as dva8fiis Luke 1, 80; yi>copifw 
 Phil. 4, 6 ; ffj.<pavi& Acts 23, 22 ; of com 
 mand and the like, e. g. tWoXij Acts 17, 
 61 15 ; uTToXoyi a Acts 22, 1. etc. (Sept. 
 1 Sam. 14, 19. Hdian. 3. 6. 2. Plato Hipp 
 
624 
 
 7T/309 
 
 Min. 370. cl. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 14. Mem. 1. 
 3. 2 fv^ofiM Trpos-) Once c. ace. of mem 
 ber, as XaXeij/ Trpos TO ovs i. e. to speak to 
 one in his ear, privately, Luke 12, 3. ft) 
 Of mutual words and sayings; Acts 2, 12 
 iXXos Trpos (iXXov \tyoiTfS. So Trpos aXX)}- 
 Kovs to one another, one to another, Mark 8, 
 16. 9, 33. 15, 31. John 6, 52. 16, 17. 
 Acts 2, 7. 4, 15. (Ceb. Tab. 2. Hdian. 5. 
 2. 14.) Trpo s eavTovs id. Mark 1, 27. 9, 16. 
 33. 14, 4. 16, 3. Luke 22, 23. y) After 
 verbs of swearing to any one, i. q. to pro 
 mise with an oath ; Luke 1, 73 opKov ov 
 w/xocre Trpos Aftpadp.. So Horn. Od. 14. 
 331. ib. 19. 288. 8) After verbs of speak 
 ing, communing, lo or with oneself; Luke 
 18, 11 6 ^apacraios ortSitis Trpos tavTov 
 TCLVTO. rrpoarivxfTo, i. e. standing he prayed 
 thus with himself. So Luc. Contempl. 18 
 jrpos ffj.avToi> ye itvoo. Aristasnet. Ep. 1. 6 
 Trpos f^iavrov e(prjv. 
 
 c) Trop. after verbs and words implying 
 direction of the mind or will, an affection or 
 disposition towards any one ; e. g. a) 
 Favourable, implying good-will, confidence ; 
 2 Cor. 3, 4 TrfTrofarja-iv e^ofiev Trpbs rbv 
 Seoi . 7, 4 Trapprjcria Trpos vpus. v. 12. Gal. 
 6, 10 epyaco/ieSa TO ayaSoj/ Trpos Tratras. 
 Eph. 6, 9. Phil. 2, 30. 1 Thess. 1, 8 ^ rri- 
 <TTIS TI rrpos TOV 3eoV. 5, 14. 2 Tim. 2, 24. 
 Tit. 3, 2. Philem. 5. Also Col. 4, 5 eV o-o- 
 (pia TTfpLTraTf iTf Trpos TOVS e a>. 1 Thess. 4, 
 12. So Jos. Vit. 25 17 Trpos pe TT KTTIS. 
 Plut. Demetr. 39 Trepi <pi\las Trpos CLVTOV. 
 Hdian. 8. 6. 12. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 10. /3) 
 Unfavourable^ i. q. against ; Acts 6, 1 yoy- 
 yvo-/j.bs Trpos TOVS E/3pat ous. 23, 30 \eytiv 
 TO. Trpos aiirov. 24, 19. 25, 19. 1 Cor. 6, 1. 
 Eph. 6, 11 arrival Trpos KT\. Col. 3, 13. 19 
 /ii) TrtKpaiVecrSe Trpos auras. Heb. 12, 4. 
 Rev. 13,6. Comp. Matth. $ 591. <?. JButtm. 
 1. c. Kiihner 1. c. So Hdian. 3. 8. 3. Dern. 
 143. 27. Xen. Mem. 3. 3. 7. 
 
 2. Of Time, e. g. a) Pr. of a definite 
 time when, towards, near; Luke 24, 29 
 Trpos (<rTT(pav eort, Kal KfK\iKfi> rj r;/xepa. 
 Comp. Matth. { 591. e, fin. Winer 1. c. 
 So Jos. Ant. 5. 4. 3 Trpos eW. Thuc. 4. 
 135 Trpos tap rj drj. Xen. An. 4. 5. 21 Trpos 
 rjptpav. j3) As forming with the accus. 
 a periphrasis for an adverb of time how long, 
 q. d. at, for ; as Trpos Kaip6v,for a season, a 
 while, briefly, Luke 8, 13. 1 Cor. 7, 5 ; Trpos 
 Kaipbv u>pas 1 Thess. 2, 17; Trpos a>pai> 
 John 5, 35. Gal. 2, 5. So Heb. 12, 10 
 rpos oXt yas ijpe pas. V. 1 1 Trpos TO Trapoi>,for 
 the present, at present. James 4, 14 Trpos 
 oXi yov sc. xpovov. Comp. Winer 1. c. So 
 Pol. 1. 61. 4 Trpos Kaipov. Luc. D. Deor. 18. 
 
 1 Trpos oXi yoi/. ^El. V. H. 12. 63. Hdian. 1. 
 3. 13 Trpos TO TrapoV. Thuc. 2. 22. 
 
 3. Trop. as denoting the direction, refer 
 ence, relation, which one object has towards 
 or to another, e. g. 
 
 a) towards, i. e. in reference to, in respect 
 to, as to, implying the direction or remote 
 object of an action. a) With ace. of 
 pers. Mark 12, 12 (yvaxrav OTI Trpbs UVTOVS 
 Trjv Trapc^SoXiji/ eirrf. Acts 24, 16 aTrp. crvvti- 
 fya-iv e xeiv Trpbs TOV SeoV KT\. Rom. 4, 2. 
 Heb. 1, 7 Trpos p.tv TOVS ayyeXovs Xeyet. V. 
 8. al. So T Trpds ere ; ri Trpos i^/ias / Matt. 
 27, 4. John 21, 22. 23. Comp. Matth. 5 591. 
 y. Buttm. Kiihner, Winer, 1. c. So Ml. V. 
 H. 12. 64. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 15. Dem. 232. 
 7 ov8tv eori TOVTCOV 8f)7rov irpbs (p.e. /3) 
 With acc. of thing. Heb. 9, 1 3 dyia^Vt Trpos 
 TTJVTTJS aapKos KoSaporijTa. Luke 18, 1 eXeye 
 Trapa/SoXiji O.VTOIS, Trpbs TO Selv TrdvroTe Trpocr- 
 eu^eo-Sai KT\. 2 Cor. 4, 2. After verbs of 
 replying, Matt. 27, 14 OVK aTrtKpi^rj m rw 
 Trpos ovdf ev pijp.a. Rom. 8, 31 Trpos TOVTO. 
 So genr. Plato Hipp. maj. 295. c. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 3. 3 ; Trpos raCra Hdian. 3. 12. 23. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 12. y) In the construc 
 tion TO. trpos Tiva v. TI, things relating 
 or pertaining to any person or thing, e. g. 
 TO. Trpbs tlpr]vr}v, pr. conditions of peace Luke 
 14, 32 ; trop. Luke 19, 42 ; TO. Trpbs TTJV 
 Xpfiav, things necessary, Acts 28. 10; TO 
 Trpbs fafjv 2 Pet. 1 , 3 ; TO. Trpbs TQV %cov 
 things pertaining to God, divine things, 
 Rom. 15, 17. Heb. 2, 17. 5, 1. Comp. in 
 
 6, fj, TO, E. b. So Sept. Ex. 18, 19 ra 
 Trpos 3eoV. Diod. Sic. 1. 72 ra Trpos TTJV ra- 
 (pf)i>. Xen. Cyr. 1.2. 10 ra Trpos TOV TrdXe- 
 
 /J.OV. 
 
 b) Of a rule or standard of action, accor 
 ding to, in conformity with ; Luke 12,47 
 /j.rj8e Troirjaas Trpbs TO Se X^^ia avTov. 2 Cor. 
 5, 10 Trpos a errpagev. Gal. 2. 14. Eph. 3, 
 4. Comp. Matth. 591. 8. Winer 1. c. 
 Luc. Hist, conscr. 38 init. Plato Conv. 
 199. b. Xen. An. 6. 1. 5. 
 
 c) Of the motive, ground, occasion of an 
 action, on account of, because of, for, e. g. 
 Matt. 19, 8 Mwi crJJs Trpos TTJV o-K\rjpoKap8iav 
 vfj.S}V eWrpe\//-ez> KrX. Mark 10. 5. Comp. 
 Matth. ^ 591. /3. Kiihner 1. c. Hdot. 1. 38. 
 Plato Rep. 331. a. Xen. Mem. 3. 8. 5. 
 
 d) A marking the end or result, the aim 
 or purpose of an action, e. g. Trp&s TI ; for 
 what, why ] i. e. to what end, for what pur 
 pose, John 13, 28. Comp. Matth. J 591. S. 
 Kiihner 1. c. (Soph. Aj. 40. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 
 7. 2.) After verbs, as expressing the end, 
 aim, tendency of an action or quality, e. g. 
 Acts 3, 10 OVTOS i)v 6 Trpbs TTJV 
 
7T/W 
 
 625 
 
 Trpocrayco 
 
 KT\. Rom. 3, 26. 15, 2. 1 Cor. 6, 
 
 5 Trpos fvrponT)v iifjuv Xeyw. 7, 35. 10, 11. 
 2 Cor. 1, 20. Eph. 4, 12. 1 Tim. 1, 16. 4, 
 7 yv[i.vdt 8e crtavrov Trpos (vcrtfifiav. Heb. 
 5, 14. 6, 11. 1 Pet. 4, 12. Espec. with TO 
 c. infin. to the end that, as Matt. 5, 28 Tras 
 
 6 jSXerrcoj yiu/atKa Trpos TO eVtSupfJo-at av- 
 T)S. 6, 1 Trpos TO SeaS/pai OVTOIS. 13, 30 
 (7vXXeaTf . . . /cat fiijcraTf . . . Trpos TO Kara- 
 Kavcrat avrd. 23, 5. Mark 13, 22. Eph. 6, 
 11. James 3, 3. (3 Mace. 1, 19. Hdian. 3. 
 14. 2. Time. 7. 8; c. inf. Sept. Jer. 27, 10. 
 Plato Phagdo 60. b.) So after nouns and 
 adjectives, John 11,4 oVSeW ta Trpos 3aVa- 
 TOV. Eph. 4, 14. Col. 2, 23. (Jos. B. J. 4. 
 9. 1 1 (pdpp.ciKov npos crtoTrjpiav. Luc. Merc. 
 Cond. 40 Trpos K/pSos.) John 4, 35 6Yi Xeu- 
 Kai fieri Trpos Zfpio-fibv ^8r). Acts 27, 12 
 aWv3/Tov TOV \ifj.evos VTrap\ovros Trpos Trapa- 
 Xfipcuriav. 2 Cor. 2, 16. 10, 4. Eph. 4, 29. 
 1 Tim. 4, 8. 2 Tim. 3, 17. Tit. 1,16. 1 Pet. 
 3, 15. So Diod. Sic. 5. 37. Plato Menex. 
 247. e, Trdvra T<I Trpos tv8aip.oviav (ptpovra. _ 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 5. 12. Also of a tendency 
 and result, as 2 Pet. 3, 16 a crrpf@\ovo-iv 
 
 . . . Trpos 1 TTJV I8iav avTwv drro}\fiav. 1 John 
 5, 16 TOIS afj.apTa.vovo-1 pi) Trpos SaraToi/. 
 Also dpapTi a Trpos SaVaTOi , v. 16. 1 7. 
 
 e) Of the relation in which one person or 
 tiling stands towards another, towards, with ; 
 comp. Matth. $ 591. e. Luke 23, 12 Trpov- 
 Trrjpxov yup * v ^X - P? ovres Trpos (avrovs. 
 (Hdian. 3. 2. 14.) Rom. 5, 1 flprjvrjv f^ofj.fv 
 Trpos TOV 3foV. (Xen. Hi. 2. 11.) Acts 2, 47 
 f%ovTfs X^P iV jr P os o\ov TOV AaoV. Acts 28, 
 25 do-vpfpcovoi ovrts Trpos d\\T]\ovs- (Diod. 
 Sic. 4. 1.) 2 Cor. 6, 15 TI S 8e av^^vrjcns 
 Xptorw Trpos BeXi ap ; Hence Start SecrSnt 
 SicftrjKTjv npos Tiva, to make a covenant with 
 any one, Acts 3,25. Heb.10, 6. 9, 20 see 
 in crrcXXoyuM. So Diod. Sic. 1 1. 44 marriSc- 
 o-3ai <pi\iav npos Tiva. 1EI. V. H. 9. 41. Xen. 
 Vect. 5. 13. In a comparison, as compared 
 with ; Rom. 8, 18 OVK aia TO TraSij/zaTa TOV 
 v\/v Kaipov irpos TTJV pfXhovcrav So^ai/. Matth. 
 1. c. y. So Ecclus. 24, 29. Plato Hipp. Maj. 
 281. d, ttvai TU>V dp^at toj TOVS Trepl TT]V <ro- 
 <piav (pauXovs Trpos upas. Xen. Mem. 1 . 2. 52. 
 
 4. Sometimes Trpo s c. ace. is used after 
 verbs which express simply rest at, by, in 
 a place, i. q. Trpo s c. dat. But in such in 
 stances, for the most part, the idea of a pre 
 vious coming to or direction towards that 
 place is either actually expressed, or is im 
 plied in the context ; comp. tls no. 4. 
 Matth. \ 591. 77. Winer \ 53. h. Thus 
 a) Genr. c. ace. of place, Mark 11, 4 tvpov 
 rbv TTU>\OV 8(8fp.tvov Trpos Trjv Supai/. 14, 
 54 ZfpfJMivopevos Trpos TO (pis, i. e. at or 
 40 
 
 towards the fire. Luke 22, 56. John 20, 11. 
 So c. ace. of person, i. q. with, by, among, 
 Matt. 26, 18 Trpos ere TTOIW TO Tracr^a. v. 55 
 Trpos vp.as IwAcfdpupi 8i8do~Ku>v, pr. I seated 
 myself to or among you. Mark 14, 49 J^K 
 Trpos v/J.as . . . 8i8do-K(0v. Acts 12, 20. 13, 31 
 oiTiffs vvv fieri pdpTvpes OVTOV Trpos TOV 
 XaoV, to or towards the people. 1 Cor. 2, 3. 
 16, 7 eAjrifa) xpovov Tiva eVipeiVai Trpos 
 vpas. 2 Cor. 1, 12. 5, 8. Gal. 1, 18. 2, 5. 
 4, 18. Phil. 1, 26. 2 Thess. 2, 5. Philem. 
 13. Sept. for i>SS Is. 19, 19. So ^Eschyl. 
 Prom. 348 6s Trpos ecnre pous TO TTOVS eor^Kf. 
 Eurip. Ion. 916. Orest. 468 Trpos Se|iaj> 
 OUTOU eras. Soph. Elect. 931. Xen. Hell. 
 6. 5. 8 VTTO TO Trpos Mavrlveiav Tel^cy. ib. 
 2. 1. 25. b) Rarely and only in later 
 usage is the idea of previous motion or di 
 rection wholly dropped, and Trpo s c. ace. is 
 then i. q. Trapa c. dat. comp. Passow. Mark 
 2, 2 TO Trpos TT/V Supai/, i. e. the space at the 
 door or gate, the vestibule. 4, 1. Matt. 13, 
 56 at aoeXcpat avToO ou^t Truo~ai Trpos fjp.as 
 flo-i ; Mark 6, 3. John 1,16 Xdyos %v Trpos 
 TOV SedV. See in Brunck ad Apoll. Rh. 2. 496. 
 NOTE. In composition Trpo s implies : a) 
 Motion, direction, reference, towards, to, 
 at ; as Trpoo-dyco, Trpoo-fyyt o>, Trpocrep^opat, 
 Trpoo-SoKaw. b) Accession, addition, there 
 to, over and above, more, further ; as Trpoo-- 
 atTew, Trpoo-aTTfiXe o), comp. Herm. ad Vig. 
 p. 861. no. 426 ; hence intens. as TrpoW- 
 vos, Trpoo-<pt\rjs. c) Nearness, a being or 
 remaining near, at, by; as Trpoo-eSpevw, 
 Trpocr/ieVco. + 
 
 TrpocrdfifiaTOV, ov , TO, (Trpo , 0-0/3,30- 
 TOV,) the fore-sabbath, eve of the sabbath, i. q. 
 Trapao-Kfvr), which see; Mark 15, 42. Ju 
 dith 8, 6. See Gr. Harm. p. 219. 
 
 Trpocrayopeva), f. vo-, (ayopevw,) to 
 speak to any one, to address, to salute, Luc. 
 Asin. 4. Hdian. 1. 16. 7 ; to call by name, 
 to name, Jos. Ant. 15. 8. 5. Xen. Mem. 
 3. 2. 1. Hence in N. T. to address as any 
 one, to call by a name or title ; Pass. Heb. 
 5, 10 Trpoo-ayopev3eis VTTO 3eoO dp^ifpf^s. 
 Matth. j 420. Winer { 32. 4. b. Comp. 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 7. 1 r)v o vdfjios ayvfiav Trpocra- 
 
 Trpocrdyci), f. o>, (yw,) aor. 2 Trpoo-r- 
 yayov. 
 
 1 . to lead or conduct to any one, to bring 
 near; c. ace. Luke 9, 41 Trpoo-dyaye &S 
 TOV vlov crov. With ace. and dat. Acts 16, 
 20 irpocraydyovTfs avTovs TOIS crTpar^yots, 
 comp. Matth. 5 402. Sept. for K*2f\ i Sam. 1, 
 25; a-npri Ex. 29, 4. 40, 12. (Hdian. 1 
 5. 1. Dem. 234. 20; Tivd TIVI Xen. Cyr. 3. 
 2. 12.) Implying admission or access to 
 
626 
 
 TrpocrSoKaco 
 
 any one, e. g. to God, to bring near, to pre 
 sent before, c. ace. et dat. 1 Pet. 3, 18. So 
 to a king, Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 8. 
 
 2. Intrans. see yo> no. 2, to come or 
 draw near, to approach, c. dat. as above. 
 Acts 27, 27 vTTfvoovv ol vat/rat trpocrdyfiv 
 Tivd avTo is xu>pav. the sailors deemed that 
 some country drew near to them, i. e. accord 
 ing to the usual optical illusion on board a 
 ship. Sept. for -^pn Ex. 14, 10. Is. 34, 1. 
 yEl. V. H. 3. 21. Epict. Ench. 29. 7 ; of 
 a ship Pol. 1. 46. 9. Comp. Achill. Tat. 2. 
 2. Sii TTJV yrjv (u>p)fj.fv dno rrjs vrjbs Kara 
 uiKpov dva)(a>povo-av, u>s avrfjv Tr\(ov<rav. 
 Cic. Quaest. Ac. 4. 25 fin. 
 
 Trpoa-aycoyij, JJy, 77, (Trpoo-ayo),) a lead 
 ing or bringing to, accession, Pol. 9. 41. 1. 
 Thuc. 1. 82. In N. T. approach, access, 
 admission, e i? TI Rom. 5, 2 ; Trpoy nva Eph. 
 
 2, 18; absol. 3, 12. So Plut. Lucull. 15. 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 45. 
 
 Trpoaairew, >, f. 770-0), (cuVe co,) to ask 
 in addition, to demand more, Xen. An. 1. 3. 
 21. In N. T. intens. to ask repeatedly, to 
 beg, absol. Mark 10, 46. Luke 18, 35. 
 John 9, 8. So Sept. Job 27, 14. Luc. Con- 
 tempi. 15. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 29. 
 
 TrpoaaLTrjS, ov, 6, (Trpoo-atreo),) a beg 
 gar, John 9, 8 in later edit, for Tv(p\6s. 
 Diog. Laert. 6. 56. Plut. Qusest. Gr. 13. 
 
 Trpoa-avaftaivto, aor. 2 irpoa-ffivv, (dva- 
 fiaii o),) to go up further, higher ; so with 
 av&Tfpov pleon. Luke 14, 10 (pi\e, Ttpocr- 
 fwi/SijSi avojTtpov, i. e. take a higher seat, a 
 more honourable place. Sept. pr. for ?&$ 
 Ex. 19, 23. Josh. 11, 17. Judith 13, lV. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 37; of a stream, to rise, Pol. 
 
 3. 72. 4. 
 
 7rpocrava\:icrK(i), f. Xoxrw, (di/aAiWco,) 
 to consume besides, to expend further, c. ace. 
 Luke 8, 43 "/ris larpois [Rec. eis larpovr] 
 irpoo-avaXtao-acra SKov TOV ftiov. Dem. 460. 
 2. Plato Prot. 311. d. 
 
 Trpoa-avaifX-^pow, S>, f. oxroi, (dvair\rj- 
 pdo),) to fill up further, to supply fully, c. ace. 
 ra va-Tfpr]p.aTa 1 Cor. 9, 12. 11, 9. VVisd. 
 19,4. Diod. Sic. 5. 71. Mid. id. Plato Men. 
 84. d. 
 
 TrpocravaTijvjfJ-i, f. 170-0), (awm Sirj/iu,) 
 pr. to lay up or upon in addition ; Mid. to 
 take upon oneself besides, Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 8. 
 In N. T. only Mid. aor. 2 irpoa-avfSe- 
 HTJV, trop. to lay before in addition, to set 
 forth further, on one s own part, e. g. 
 
 1. to impart further, to communicate, c. 
 ace. et dat. Gal. 2, 6 e/aoi yap 01 SoKovvrfs 
 ovftev Trpovav&fvro, i. e. on their part. 
 Comp. dveSewv in V. 2. 
 
 2. Spec. c. dat. by way of consultation, 
 i. q. to confer with, to consult; Gal. 1, 16 
 ov irpoo-av&fHTjv vapiti KCU eu/iarr. Diod. 
 Sic. 17. 116 [ AX^afSpos] rots ftajreon 
 irpoo-av Sepfvos TTfpl TOU a-rjp.elov. Luc. Jup. 
 XTrag. 1 ffiol Trpoo-avdSov Xci/3e p.e <rv[j.8ov- 
 
 Xoi TTOVO)! . 
 
 f. o>, (ai/^eu,) in N. T. 
 only intrans. to rise up, to come forth ; e. g. 
 out of the sea, as land, an island, to jut forth, 
 to shoot forward ; Acts 27, 27 Lachm. VTTTJ- 
 voovv . . . Trpocravf^tiv TWO. avrols ^o>paj>, 
 where Rec. irpoo-dyeiv q. v. So dve^ftv 
 of a headland, H(Jot. 7. 123. Thuc. 1. 46. 
 
 Trpoo-aTretXew, w, f. 770-0), (aTTfiXe co,) 
 to threaten further, absol. Acts 4, 21 ; comp. 
 v. 18. Dem. 544. 26. 
 
 Trpo&SaTravda), , f. Vw, (8a7rai/aw,) 
 to spend more, in addition, c. ace. Luke 10, 
 * 35. Luc. Ep. Sat. 39. Themist. Or. 23. 
 p. 289. 
 
 TrpocrSeo/mt, f. j^cro/iai, Pass, depon. 
 (Sf o/zai,) to need further, in addition, c. gen. 
 Acts 17, 25. Sept. for ^DH Prov. 12, 9. - 
 Ecclus. 4, 3. Dern. 14. 22. Thuc. 2. 41. 
 
 f. o/uu, Mid. depon. 
 ,) to receive to oneself, to admit, i. e. 
 
 1. Of things, trop. to admit, to allow, c 
 ace. as TTJV e\Tri8a Acts 24, 15. Negat. Heb. 
 11, 35 ov Trpoa8(^dfji(voi TTJV dno\vTpa>criv, 
 not accepting, i. e. rejecting ; comp. 2 Mace. 
 c. 7. So Sept. Job 2, 9. Pol. 1. 16. 6. 
 Plato Rep. 561. b. Of evils, i. q. to put up 
 with, to endure, c. ace. Heb. 10, 34 TTJV Ap- 
 TrayrjV ru>v irrap^ovruiv. Sept. for xiZJS 
 Ex. 10, 17. 
 
 2. ,Of persons, to receive, to admit, to 
 one s presence and kindness ; c. ace. Luke 
 15, 2 ourof d/iapro)Xoiif Trpoo-Sf^erat. Sept. 
 for ns-n Mai. 1, 8. Ez. 43, 27. So Diod. 
 Sic. 18. 54. Thuc. 2. 12. Xen. Hell. 1. 5. 
 9. Also in hospitality, to receive kindly, to 
 entertain, as a guest, c. ace. Rom. 16, 2. 
 Phil. 2, 29. Sept. for ^?p 1 Cfir. 12, 18. 
 
 3. Of things future, to wail for, to ex 
 pect, c. ace. Luke 12, 36 d/3po>7rot? Trpoo-- 
 8e^ofj,evois TOV Kvpiov avraiv TroYe KT\. Acts 
 23, 21. So a future good, with the idea ol 
 faith, confidence, e. g. rfjv Pa<n\tiav TOV 
 3eov Mark 15, 43. Luke 23, 51 ; 7rapdK\rj- 
 criv Luke 2, 25 ; \vTpuxriv 2, 38 ; TT/V paKa- 
 piav f\ni8a Tit. 2, 13 ; TO eXeos TOV nvpiov 
 Jude 21. 2 Mace. 8, 11. Pol. 21. 8. 7. 
 Hdian. 3. 1.2. Xen. Apol. 33. 
 
 TrpocrSo/catw, u>, f. 770-0), (5o/ceuo), 8oKa- 
 fo),) to watch toward or for any thing, i. e. 
 1. to look for, to expect, whether in fear 
 
627 
 
 or in hope, e. g. a) With fear, absol. 
 Matt. 24, 50 eV ij/iepa y ov irpoo~8oKa. Luke 
 12, 46. Acts 28, 6 ; also c. inf. ibid, oi &= 
 irpocrfSuKuv auTcv /j.fXX(iv m /ijrpao-Sai. So 
 c. inf. Jos. Ant. 7. 9. 5. Hdian. 2. 2. 9. 
 Xen. An. 7. 6. 11. b) With doubtful 
 hope, absol. Luke 3, 15. Acts 27, 33 ; also 
 c. inf. 3, 5. So c. inf. Hdian. 2. 1. 21. Xen. 
 An. 6. 1. 16. 
 
 2. Genr. to expect, to wait for, to awail, 
 c. ace. e. g. persons, Matt. 11, 3 o-v tl 6 
 fpx6fj.(vos, r) tTfpov irpoa-o oKvp.fv ; Luke 7, 
 19. 20. 1, 21 7rpocrOKa>j> TOV Za^apiav. 8, 
 40. Acts 10, 24. With ace. of thing, 2 Pet. 
 3, 12 TTJV napova-iav. \. 13. 14. Sept. Ps. 
 119, 165. Hdian. 4. 11. 7. Plato Ep. 319.C. 
 
 Trpoa-SoKia, as, 17, (Trpoo-Soncaw,) a look 
 ing fur, expectation, in N. T. only of evil ; 
 Luke 21, 26 dno <^>d/3ov xat TT. TUIV eVepxo- 
 ptvatv. Meton. Acts 12, 11 KOI () TTJS 
 Trpo&Soidas TOV \aov, and from all the ex 
 pectation of the people, from all that which 
 the Jews expected to accomplish against 
 me. Sept. meton. for Heb. f^P?"] Gen. 49, 
 10. Pr. Jos. Ant. 15. 3. 4. Pol. 1. 31. 3; 
 of good, Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 19. 
 
 7rpo<r8pe/J.(i), 
 
 ), , f. aerco, (aw,) to permit or 
 niffer further, c. dat. Acts 27. 7 p.fj jrpoo-e- 
 ivTOf rip.lv dvtp-ov, i. e. the wind not suffer 
 ing us to sail further on that course. 
 
 Trpoo-eyyl(i), f. ia-ca, (eyyi a>.) to come 
 near unto any one, c. dat. Mark 2, 4. Sept. 
 for t ; 53 Gen. 33, 6. 7 ; ^I? Josh. 3, 4. 
 Pol. 39. 1. 4. 
 
 TTpoaeSpeva), f. e vo-w, (irpoa-tSpos. e5pa,) 
 /o sit near, to sit by, Lat. assideo, e. g. by 
 other persons Dem. 313. 11 ; by a city as 
 besiegers, c. dat. Jos. B. J. 7. 2. 1 init. 
 In N. T. to sit or wait near, to attend, to 
 sene ; c. dat. 1 Cor. 9, 1 3 ot rw Suo-iao-rr;- 
 pia> Trpo(rebpfvovT(s, i. p. oi ra if pa tpya6- 
 p.fvni ibid. comp. in Trapf8peva>. So Jos. c. 
 A p. 1.7 777 3f panda TOV 3foG irpoo-e8p(i>- 
 oiray. Diod. Sic. 5. 46 IT. rals TWV 3fa>j/ 3f- 
 
 Trpo(repydofjuti, f. do-o/iat, Mid. de- 
 pon. (e pyab/iat.) /o ?corfc or do besides, Eu- 
 rip. Here. F. 1013; to work out thereto, to 
 get more by labour, Xen. Hell. 3. 1. 28. 
 In N. T. genr. to gain thereto, besides, in 
 addition, c. ace. Luke 19, 16 fj pva <rov irpo<r- 
 
 7TpO(Tep-XO/J,ai, f. tXtvcropai, (ep 
 to come to or near to any place or person, to 
 approach. 
 
 1 . Pr. and with a dat. after npos in comp. 
 
 see Matth. J 402 ; e. g. dat. of place, Heb. 
 12, 18 ov yap fl-poo-eAr/Ai^are i//7jXa0&>/ie j>a) 
 opet. v. 2-2. (Hdian. 2. 6. 11.) With dat. 
 of pers. Matt. 4, 3 Kal TrpocreXSwi avrw o 
 7mpa<|a>i/, (iiTf. 8, 5. Mark 14, 45. Luke 
 23, 52. John 12, 21. Acts 9, 1. Absol. or 
 with dat. impl. Matt. 4, 1 1 <*yyeX<n rrpoa-- 
 ^X3ov Kal KT\. Mark 1, 31. Luke 8, 24. 10. 
 34. Acts 7, 31. 28, 9. al. Sept. usually c. 
 Trpo j, for ti?l Gen. 29, 10. 43, 19; ^ 
 Num. 9, 6. Deut. 1, 22. So c. dat. ^El. \. 
 H. 9. 3. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 27. Spec. i. q. to 
 visit, to have intercourse with, Acts 24. 23. 
 10, 28. 
 
 2. Trop. a) In respect of God or 
 Christ, to come to God, to draw near unto, 
 in prayer, sacrifices, worship, devotion of 
 heart and life ; c. dat. Heb. 7. 25 rovs jrpotr- 
 tpxop.evovs 81 avrov r< Sew. 11,6; with 
 T 3<rw impl. Heb. 10. 1. 22^ So Heb. 4, 
 16 7rpocTfp^a)/ze3a ovv . . . rai Spova) Trjs %d- 
 PITOS. (Sept. pr. of those who approach the 
 altar, for 8535 Lev. 21, 21. Deut. 21, 5; 
 -^B Lev. 21, 16.) Also to Christ, 1 Pet. 
 2, 4 Trpos ov 7rpoo"fp^o/Liej/ot to whom coming, 
 i. e. whom embracing, becoming his disci 
 ples, followers. So of disciples, c. dat. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 47. ib. 1. 6. 1. For trpos 
 c. ace. comp. Winer J 56. 4. 13. b) With 
 dat. of thing, to assent to, to embrace ; 1 Tim. 
 6, 3 /jif] TTpocrepxtrai vyiaivovai Xdyots. 
 So Philo de Gigant. p. 289. a, fj.rj8(vl irpoa-- 
 ep^eo"3at yvd)p.rj r<av flpr]fj.eva>v. Migr. Abr. 
 p. 401. d, Trpoo-fXSoirfs aptrg. + 
 
 s , 17, (npoa-fv\op.ai^) prayer 
 offered to God. 
 
 1. Pr. as Trpoo-fv^i) Trpoy rov 3edv Acts 12, 
 5. Rom. 15,30; irpoa-fvx>} TOV 3eou prayer 
 TO God, Luke 6, 12. Genr. and absol. Matt. 
 17, 21 fl p.rj tv Trpocreu^y Kal vijcrTfia. 21, 
 22. Mark 9, 29. Luke 22, 45 dvaa-Tas drro 
 TTJS Trpocrfv^f/s. So OIKOS Trpocrev^s linuse 
 of (for) prayer, Matt. 21, 13. Mark 11. 
 17. Luke 19, 46. Acts 1, 14 
 
 pdv TTJ TTpo<Ttv)(rj. 6. 4 ; <upa Trjs 
 Acts 3, 1, see in IWaror. 10, 31. Rom. 12 
 12. 1 Cor. 7, 5. Eph. 6, 18. Col. 4, 2. Phil 
 4, 6. 1 Tim. 5, 5. Dat. of manner emphat 
 James 5, 17. Plur. Acts 2, 42 npoarKapTf 
 povvres . . . Tals Trpo<rfv^ais. 10, 4. Rom. 1. 
 10. Eph. 1, 16. Col. 4. 12. 1 Thess. 1, 2. 
 1 Tim. 2, 1. Philem. 4. 22. 1 Pet. 3, 7. 4 
 7. Rev. 5, 8. 8, 3. 4. Sept. for H^EO Ps 
 4, 2. 2 Chr. 6, 19. saep. Tob. 13, 1. EC- 
 clus. 3, 5. 7, 10. 14. Not found in classic 
 writers. 
 
 2. Meton. a proseucha (Juv. Sat. 3. 
 296), i. e. OIKOS v. TWOS rrpocm;^?, n" 
 
628 
 
 n^Etn , a house or place of prayer, an orato 
 ry. Acts 1 6, 1 3 ov evop,lfTo rrpocrf v;^ e^at, 
 wliere according to custom was the proseucha. 
 v. 16. Comp. 3 Mace. 7, 20 ; and see the 
 decree of the city Halicarnassus in Jos. Ant. 
 14. 10. 23, by which the Jews were per 
 mitted Tas jrpoo-fvxas 7roieur3ai Trpos TT} 3a- 
 Xao-07; Kara TO iraTpiov e3oy. These Jew 
 ish proseuchcc were places for social prayer 
 and devotion outside of those towns where 
 the Jews were unable or not permitted to 
 have a synagogue ; they were usually near 
 a river or the seashore, for the convenience 
 of ablution ; see Jos. 1. c. Sometimes the 
 irpoo-fvxh was a large building, as at Tibe 
 rias ; Jos. Vit. ^ 54 els TTJV Tvpo(rev\riv, pfyi- 
 
 pevov. But often it appears not to have 
 been a building, and was prob. some retired 
 place in the open air or in a grove ; so Ter- 
 tullian speaks of the " orationes litorales " 
 of the Jews, ad Nationes c. 1 3 ; also de Je- 
 juniis o. 16, " Judaicum certe jejunium 
 ubique celebratur, quum omissis templis 
 per omne litus quocunque in aperto aliquan- 
 do jam precem ad coelum mittunt." Comp. 
 Juv. Sat. 3. 11 sq. 296. See Wetstein 
 N. T. I. p. 692. Winer Realw. art. Syna- 
 gogen. 
 
 7rpo(rev^ofj,aL, f. o/u, Mid. depon. 
 (euvojuat,) impf. Trpo(n]vx6l jir ) v > aor. 1 Trpoo"- 
 r)vdiJ.T)v ; to pray to God, to offer prai/er or 
 voics to God ; pr. c. dat. TW 3ew or the like 
 after Trpos in comp. see Matth. 402. 1 Cor. 
 
 Trp6(Tfvai TW TraTpi crov Iv TW KpunTw. So 
 Sept. for i^BPifi Is. 44, 17 ; oftener Sept. 
 c. Trpos 3edV 6en. 20, 17. 1 Sam. 1, 10. 
 (Luc. Hermot. 40 TW Au. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 
 1 TOIS Seoiy.) Absol. or TW Sew imp!. Matt. 
 6, 5 KCZI oTav TvpovevxTI- v. 6. 7. 14, 23. 
 Mark 1, 35. Luke 3, 21. Acts 6, 6. 1 Cor. 
 11,4. 1 Thess. 5, 17. 1 Tim. 2, 8. James 
 5, 13. 18. al. Joined with mVeIo-3<n Mark 
 11, 24. Col. 1, 9. So Hdian. 1. 11. 12. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 8. 10. The manner in which 
 one prays is expressed by the dat. 1 Cor. 
 11, 5 yvvfj Ttpocrevxop fvr) aKaTaKdXuTrrw 
 T^ KefpaXfj. 14, 14. 15 7X0)0-077, TW Trvev^nn, 
 TW VOL. James 5, 17 Trpocrevxij ttpwnfvfasn 
 emphat. he prayed earnestly. Also by eV, 
 Eph. 6, 18 (V nvevp.aTi. Jude 20. The mat 
 ter of one s prayer, the words uttered, are 
 put after OUTWS Matt. 6, 9 ; Xe ywv Matt. 26, 
 39. 42 ; eiTrov Acts 1 , 24. (Sept. c. \eywv 
 Is. 37, 15; elnov 2 K. 6, 17.) Or in the 
 accus. Rom. 8, 26 TI 7rpoo-evw/i63a *a36 
 8eT. So p.axpa adv. long, Matt. 23, 13 [14]. 
 Mark 12, 40. Luke 20, 47 ; TUVTU Luke 18, 
 
 11, see in npos III. 1. b. S ; TOTO Iva Phil. 
 
 1 , 9. The object or thing prayed for is put 
 after Iva V. tva p.rj, Matt. 24, 20 Trpocreu^e aSe 
 Se, Iva fjirf yfvrjTai rj\pvyf] KT\. Mark 13, 18. 
 14, 35. 38. 1 Cor. 14,13; d s 6 ... Iva 
 
 2 Thess. 1,11. With inf. final, Luke 22, 
 40 Trpocrevxecr Sf p-rj etcreXSf u< els TTfipacrp.6v 
 James 5, 17 TOU c. inf. see in 6, 17, TO, G. 3. 
 b. /3. The suly ect or person for whom one 
 prays is put with a preposition ; as vrepi c. 
 gen. Col. 1, 3 irepl vp.5>v Trpotreu^o/xei/oi. 
 Heb. 13, 18; vrepi TIVOS Iva Col. 4, 3. 
 2 Thess. 3, 1; mpt TWOS onus Acts 8, 15. 
 Sept. Gen. 20, 7. Jer. 42, 20. So virep c. 
 gen. Matt. 5, 44; vntp TIVOS Iva Col. 1, 9. 
 Sept. Jer. 42, 4. Also ciri c. ace. James 
 5, 14 7rpo<revacr3wo-ai> eV avrov, let them 
 pray over him, in his behalf. So prob. impl. 
 Matt. 19, 13 Kai Trpoo-r^v^Tai. Sept. Jer. 
 14,11. ^ + 
 
 Trpoa-e-^a), f. ^ w , (e\w,) to have in addi 
 tion, Dem. 887. 26; to hold toivards any 
 one, e. g. TO ovs, Sept. for ntirt Jer. 7, 24. 
 26 ; T}JV ao-7r/8a c. Trpo y Hdot. 4. 200. As 
 a nautical word, to hold a ship towards a 
 place, to sail towards, Hdot. 9. 99 TOS vrjas , 
 also intrans. to hold one s course towards a 
 place, by ship, c. dat. Pol. 1. 24. 2 Trpoo-- 
 o-xon-fr rrj Si/ctXta. Diod. Sic. 20. 105 ; fully 
 Dem. 1285. 25 TJ/ vr/t Trpoo-e xen fls Po Sov. 
 In N. T. only trop. 
 
 1. Absol. with rov vovv impl. to apply 
 one s mind to any thing, to attend to, to give 
 heed to ; so fully ifpocrfx flv T v vovv TIVI 
 Luc. D. Deor. 5. 1. Plut. Galb. 13. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 7. 2. 
 
 a) Genr. and with dat. of something spo 
 ken ; Acts 8, 6 Trpoo-fT^oV Te 01 o^Xot TOIS 
 Xeyop-fvois KTX. Heb. 2, 1. 2 Pet. 1, 19. 
 Sept. for -jitxn Ps. 141, J. Deut. 1, 45. 
 (Diod. Sic. 2? 25. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 6 ols 6 
 ^aKpdrns Xe yei Trpocre xo)!/.) Spec, to yield 
 assent, to believe, to embrace, c. dat. Acts 
 16, 14 Tvpo(TfX flv T0 ^ s XaXovpeVoty iiro TOV 
 HavXov. 1 Tim. 1, 4. Tit. 1, 14. So 
 1 Mace. 7, 11. Jos. Ant. 8. 9. 1. JE.L V. H. 
 
 12. 1 med. p. 157. With dat. of pers. i. q. 
 to care for, to watch over ; Acts 20, 28 Trpoo-- 
 e ^eTe ovv eavTois *cal TW 7ro//m w. So Epict. 
 Ench. 51. 1 p.3 as [f]p.fpas] 
 
 b) With dat. reflex. npoirtx*iv e avTw v. 
 eavrots, to take heed to oneself, to beware, 
 mostly Imperat. Luke 17, 3. Acts 5, 35. 
 (Comp. Plut. Pelop. 9 fin.) Foil, by CITTO 
 nvos, Luke 12, 1 Trpoo-fxere tavTols OTTO 
 Trjs (VMS KT\. By p.r)TTOTe Luke 21, 34. 
 Also ellipt. with eavToi? impl. before pr/ c. 
 inf. Matt. 6, 1 Trpoo-e xere . . . p.r] 
 
629 
 
 (Epict. ap. Stob. 74. 22.) With CZTTO TWOS, 
 Matt. 7, 15 rrpocre ^erf dnro TU>V ^ev8onpo- 
 faTuv. 10. 17. 16, 6. 11. 12. Luke 20, 46. 
 Sept. fully c. M ,?, for Heb. ""?!t53 Gen. 
 24, 6. Ecclus. 29, 23 ; ellipt. c. rf Ecclus. 
 13, 11 ; with OTTO TWOS, Sept. for -,33 b nn 
 2 Chr. 35, 21. Ecclus. 11, 34. Comp. Xen* 
 Venat. 6. 23 Trpoo~fx fLV onus P.JJ. 
 
 2. Intrans. or with lavrov imp], see in 
 f^w no. 5 ; pr. to hold to any person or 
 thing, to apply oneself, to give or devote one 
 self to any thing ; e. g. with dat. of thing, 
 <HI><B TroXXo) 1 Tim. 3, 8 ; TJJ avayvaxra. 4, 
 13 ; rc3 Svo-iaon/piw i. q. to give attendance, 
 to minister, Heb. 7, 13. So Polyasn. 8. 
 56 rpv(f)f) Kal p-t%T]- Hdian. 2. 11. 6 yeeop- 
 yia. Xen. Mem. 4. 1. 2. With dat. of pers. 
 to adhere to, to follow, Acts 8, 10. 11. 1 Tim. 
 
 4. 1 TrpocrfYovTfs Trceuuacri nhdvois. 
 fcWzv-/- 
 7TpO(7TJ\Oa), ), {. OXTW, (17X00), T)\OS,~) to 
 
 nail to any thing, to affix with nails, c. ace. 
 et dat. Col. 2, 14 7rpoanj\a>cras avro TOJ crrav- 
 p. 3 Mace. 4, 9. Diod. Sic. 4. 4?! Dem. 
 5^9. 1 ; trop. Plato Ph<ed. 83. d. 
 
 7TpO(T7)\VTO?, ov, 6, r], (TTpoo-epxeytat.) 
 pr. one who comes to another country or 
 people, a stranger, sojourner, Sept. for "ia 
 Ex. 12, 48. 49. 20, 10. In N. T. only in 
 the later Jewish sense, a proselyte, a con 
 vert from Paganism to Judaism, Matt. 23, 
 
 15. Acts 2, 10. 6, 5. 13, 43. (The same 
 are called 01 <rf/3o/u.ei/oi TOV 3eoV Acts 13, 
 
 16. 50. Jos. Ant. 14. 7. 2 ; also lovoatfrv- 
 Tts Jos. B. J. 2. 18. 2 ; comp. B. J. 2. 20. 
 2. Tac. Hist. 5. 5.) The Rabbins speak of 
 two kinds of proselytes ; a distinction which 
 does not appear in N. T. a) p"^ ^3 
 the proselytes of righteousness, i. e. complete 
 proselytes, who embraced the Jewish reli 
 gion in its full extent, and enjoyed all the 
 rights and privileges of Jewish citizenship ; 
 comp. Ex. 12, 48. Jos. Ant. 20. 2. 5. b) 
 a jin 11 a proselytes of sojourning, called 
 also irtTl 113 proselytes of (he gale, i. e. 
 foreigners dwelling among the Jews, who 
 without being circumcised conformed to 
 certain Jewish laws and customs, espec. 
 those which the Rabbins call the " seven 
 precepts of Noah," viz. to avoid blasphemy 
 against God, idolatry, homicide, incest, rob 
 bery, resistance to magistrates, and the eat 
 ing of blood or things strangled. See Bux- 
 torf Lex. Chald. 407 sq. Michaelis Mos. 
 Recht IV. p. 12 sq. or Comment, on the 
 Laws of Mos. III. p. 64 sq. Winer Realw. 
 art. Proselylen. On the baptism of prose 
 lytes and its probable antiquity, see Buxt. 
 I. c. Lightfoot Hor. Heb. ad Matt. 3, 6. 
 
 Selden de Jure Nat. et Gent. II. 2. Winer 
 I.e. 
 
 ou, 6, f), adj. (xatpos,) for 
 a season, transient, temporary, Matt. 13, 21. 
 Mark 4, 17. 2 Cor. 4, 18 opp. aldavtos. Heb. 
 11, 25. Jos. Ant. 2. 4. 4. Hdian. 1. 1. 6, 
 
 , , f. eV, (*aXeco.) to call 
 to, to summon, to send for, Sept. Esth. 8, 1. 
 Xen. Lac. 13. 5. In N. T. only Mid. 
 Trpocr/caXeo/icu, oC/itu, to call any one to 
 oneself, to call for, to summon, c. ace. of 
 pers. Matt. 10, 1 KOI TrpoovcaXov/jfco? TOVS 
 8(o8fKa /Jia^nras avrov. 15, 10. 32. 18, 2. 32. 
 20, 25. Mark 3, 13. 23. 6, 7. 7, 14. 8, 1. 
 34. 10, 42. 12, 43. 15, 44. Luke 7, 19. 
 15,26. 16,5. 18, 16. Acts 5, 40. 6,2. 
 13, 7. 20, 1. 23, 17. 18. 23. James 5, 14. 
 Sept. for 80J3 Gen. 28, 1. Esth. 4, 5. So 
 2 Mace. 8, 1. Luc. Pise. 39. Xen. An. 7. 7. 
 
 1. Trop. of God, to call, to invite, e. g. 
 sinners to embrace the gospel, Acts 2, 39. 
 Also to call one to any office or duty, i. q. 
 to appoint, to choose ; so in Pass. perf. 
 7rpoa-KeK\r]fj.ai as Mid. Buttm. J 136. 3. Acts 
 16, 10. 13, 2 (Is TO epyov [ets] 6 TrpoovcejcX?;- 
 p.ai avTovs, where for t Is omitted see in os II. 
 A. 3. c. j3. Sept. and SO?? Joel 3, 5 [2,32]. 
 
 TTpOa-KaprepeQ), S>. f. ^o-a, (/caprfp/cu,) 
 to be strong, steadfast, towards or for any 
 thing, e. g. 
 
 1 . Of a work, business, to continue in, to 
 persevere in, to be constantly engaged, oc 
 cupied ; c. dat. as -nj Trpoo-fvxfi Acts 1, 14. 
 6, 4. Rom. 12, 12. Col. 4, 2; rfj 8t8ax>j 
 Acts 2, 42. With ds OVTO TOVTO, for tins 
 very purpose, Rom. 1 3, 6. So Jos. Ant. 5. 
 
 2. 6. Pol. 1. 55. 4. Xen. Hell. 7. 5. 14. 
 Once of place, eV TW fepw Acts 2, 46. So 
 Susann. 6 eV TTJ oiKia. 
 
 2. In respect to a person, i. q. to remain 
 near, to wait upon, so as to be in readiness, 
 C. dat. Mark 3, 9 !va irKotapiov Trpocncaprfpfj 
 avrca. Hence, to wait upon, to attend upon. 
 to adJiere to any one, as an attendant, fol 
 lower ; c. dat. Acts 8, 13 ro> ^iXiWw. 10. 
 7. Pol. 24. 5. 3. Dem. 1386. 16. For tV 
 dat. after irpos in comp. see Matth. 5 402. 
 
 (us , 17, npoo-Kaprt- 
 pe co,) perseverance, continuance in any thing. 
 Eph. 6, 18 ft> irdo-J] 7rpo<TKapT(pf)<r(i KOI 8erj- 
 OTI. i. q. TTpo&KapTtpovvTts TTJ decent, comp. 
 Rom. 12, 12. 
 
 TrpO(TKe(f>a\aiOV, ov, TO, (-rrpoa-Kefya- 
 Xaior, KfcpaXij,) a cushion for the head, a 
 pillow, Mark 4, 38. Sept. for rn nDS Efcek. 
 13, 18. 20. 1 Esdr. 3, 8. Theophr. 1 Char 
 2. Plato Rep. 328. c. 
 
Trpoa-tcXijpoco 
 
 630 
 
 Trpoatcvveci) 
 
 7rpO(7K\, )]pOCO^ S>, f. waat, (/cX^poo),) to 
 lot out to any one, to give by lot, to allot, 
 o. g. fortune, destiny, Luc. Amor. 3. Diod. 
 Sic. 3. 18. In N. T. Pass. aor. 1 Trpoa-f- 
 K\r)po> Snv as Mid. to allot oneself to any 
 one, q. d. to join one s lot to his lot, to 
 consort with, to adhere to ; c. dat. Acts 17, 
 4 fTTficr^rjcrav KOL Trpoo-fKhrjpatSTjcrav Tea ttav- 
 Xcf, KT\. Comp. Buttm. 136. 1,2. For the 
 dat. after -jrpos in comp. see Matth. $402. 
 So Plut. Symp. 9. 3. 1 17 fie e8o/zas rw 
 MovcrnyfTj] irpo(TK.K\r)pc0Ta.i. Philo de For- 
 tit. p. 741. C, T TTOirjrfj *at trarpl TWV SXaiv 
 Trpoa-KK\r]pw[jLfvoi. Leg. ad Cai. p. 1001. d. 
 
 TrpOOTcA/^crt?, e a>s, fj, (Trpoo-KaXew,) a 
 summons, citation, accusation, a judicial 
 word, Dem. 1054. 21 sq. In N. T. genr. 
 accusation, charge, 1 Tim. 5, 21 Lachm. 
 p.rio fv Troiojj/ Kara Trp6arK\r)criv, i. e. by rea 
 son of accusation, or by way of accusation. 
 Rec. Kara Trp6<TK\icriv. 
 
 7rpocTK\ivo), f. j/w, (xXiVw,) to make in 
 cline towards, to let lean upon or against, 
 Horn. Od. 21. 138, 165. Intrans. or c. eav- 
 rov impl. to incline towards, to favour, c. 
 dat. Pol. 4. 51. 5. In N. T. Pass. aor. 1 
 TrpotrfK\i%T)v as Mid. to incline oneself 
 /awards, to join oneself to any one, to adhere 
 to, c. dat. Acts 5, 36 w irpo<rfK\fyr) api3/xos 
 in later edit, where Rec. Trpoo-eKoXX^S?;. 
 Comp. Buttm. 5 136. 1, 2 ; and for the dat. 
 Matth. $ 402. 
 
 7rpocr/cXio~i9) ecus, /, (TrpexDcXi i/co.) in 
 clination towards, a leaning against, Diod. 
 Sic. 3. 27 TrpocrKXio-i? TOV o>ou trpos TO Sev- 
 pov. In N. T. trop. a leaning towards, 
 partiality, 1 Tim. 5, 21. So Clem. Rom. 
 Ep. ad Cor. 47. Pol. 5. 51. 8. ib. 6. 10. 10. 
 
 7rpocrKO\\a(i), o>, f. ijo-o), (/coXXuw,) to 
 glue upon ; Pass, to become glued, to ad 
 here to any thing, e. g. VTTO TOV eu/zaToj 
 7rpo(TKO\\T]^rjvai rrjv pop-fpaiav avTov rrj 
 8fia, Jos. Ant. 7. 12. 4 ; to join to, to unite 
 with, TTJV /3a<7tXiKjji> rrj dyopa TrpocreKoXX?;- 
 a-ev Pkit. J. Caes. 29. In N. T. Pass. aor. 1 
 7rpo(TfKo\\r]?iT)v as Mid. Buttm. 136. 
 1,2, to join oneself to any one, as a com 
 panion, follower, c. dat. Acts 5, 36 Rec. 
 For the dat. see Matth. 402. Sept. for 
 p? 1 ^ Ruth 2, 23. (Ecclus. 6, 34. Plato Legg. 
 728. b.) Also Fut. Pass. Trpoo-xoX- 
 Xr;3i7(To^at, to be joined with, or to join 
 oneself unto, after the analogy of the aor. 1, 
 from which it is formed ; hence to cleave 
 unto, e. g. a husband to his wife, c. dat. 
 Matt. 19, 5 Trpoo-KoXXqSijo-erai TTJ yvvaiKt 
 avTov, quoted from Gen. 2, 24 where Sept. 
 for 2 py*. With Trpoy yvvaiKa. id. Mark 
 
 10, 7. Eph. 5, 31. Comp. Winer { 56. 
 4. 13. 
 
 7TpcrKOfJ,/J,a, ros, TO, (Trpoo-KOTTTo),) a 
 stumbling, e. g. gvXov Trpoo-Kop-jnuToy a 
 stumbling-block Ecclus. 34, 7. In N. T. 
 trop. e. g. 6 Xi3os TOV Trpoo-Kop/xaTos, the stone 
 of stumbling, spoken of Christ as the occa 
 sion of fall and perdition to those who reject 
 him, Rom. 9, 32. 33. 1 Pet. 2, 8 ; comp. 
 Is. 8, 14, and see more in art. Xfoos no. 2. 
 Meton. a stumbling-block, trop. a cause 
 of falling, an occasion of sinning; Rom. 
 14, 13 /J.TJ TtSeVat 7rpoVKO/i/ia T6> aSeX(pa>. 
 1 Cor. 8, 9. Rom. 14,20 dia irpoa-Kofi^aTos, 
 i. e. so as to place a stumbling-block ; see 
 in Sia I. 4. a. Sept. for Wgia Ex. 23, 
 33. 34, 12. So Ecclus. 17, 25. 39, 24. 
 
 ], ?}$, 17, (TTPOO-KOTTTCO,) pr. a 
 striking against, a stumbling ; trop. offence, 
 i. e. a being offended, indignation, Pol. 6. 7. 
 8. ib. 30. 20. 8. In N. T. meton. offence, 
 i. e. a cause of offence, occasion of falling 
 into sin ; 2 Cor. 6, 3 p.fj 8i86vrfs irpocrKOTrfjv, 
 i. e. giving no occasion for despising and 
 rejecting the Gospel. 
 
 Trpoa-KOTTTOJ, f. i^w, (KO TTTG),) to beat 
 torvards, to strike upon or against, e. g. 
 
 1 . Intrans. to beat upon, to strike against, 
 c. dat. Matt. 7, 27 *at [ot TroTa/io! KOI of 
 tivfp.oi\ 7Tpo<TfKO\lsav rfj oiKi a fKfiVrj. Comp. 
 Matth. I 402. Theophr. H. PI. 4. 8. 8 ^ 
 7rpoo-xo\//77 TOJ o(p3aX/iw. Plut. Lycurg. 
 9ult. 
 
 2. Spec, to strike the foot against any 
 thing, to stumble, absol. John 11, 9. 10. 
 (Sept. Prov. 3, 23. Tob. 11, 10; c. dat. 
 Xen. Eq. 7. 6.) With ace. of instrum. and 
 Trpo y c. ace. Matt. 4, 6 et Luke 4, 11 HTJ- 
 
 TTOTf 7TpOO-KO\|/7;S TTpOS XlSol TOV TToSa CTOV, 
 
 quoted from Ps. 91, 12 where Sept. for 
 f)?3 ; comp. Winer 56. 4. 13. Comp. 
 Aristoph. Vesp. 275 fj 7rpoo~e/<o^ V TW 
 o-Korw TOV oYiKrvXoV TTov. Trop. to stumble 
 at any thing, to take offence at, so as to fall 
 into error and sin, abso!. 1 Pet. 2, 8 ot Trpoo-- 
 KOTTTOVCTI, rw Xoyw a.TTfi SoiivTfs. Also c. 
 dat. T<B Xi 3 Rom. 9, 32 ; lv w Rom. 14, 21. 
 So Ecclus. 35 [32], 21 ; to be offended, in 
 dignant, Pol. 1. 31. 7. Diod. Sic. 13. 80. 
 
 7rpocrKV\l(t), f. icrw, (jcvXt co,) to roll to, 
 upon, against; c. ace. e. g. Xt Soi/ eVi TTJV 
 3vpav Matt. 27, 60. Mark 15, 46. Dion. 
 Hal. Ant. Rom. 8. 53. Aristoph. Vesp. 
 202. 
 
 TTpocricvveco. o>, f. T]<ro>, (nwfo),} pr. to 
 kiss the hand towards any one, i. e. one s 
 own hand, in token of respect and homage. 
 
631 
 
 According to Herodotus (1. 134) the an 
 cient oriental and espec. Persian mode of 
 salutation was, between persons of equal 
 rank, to kiss each other on the lips ; when 
 the difference of rank was slight, they kiss 
 ed each other on the cheek ; when one was 
 much inferior, he fell upon his knees and 
 touched his forehead to the ground or pros 
 trated himself, kissing at the same time his 
 hand towards the superior. This latter 
 mode Greek writers express by irpoo-Kvvfca, 
 see espec. Hdot. 1. c. *}v 8 TroXXw 17 ouTfpos 
 dyevfo-Tipos, TrpocrTTirrrcoi irpoo-Kvvtfi TOV 
 fTfpov. Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 18 e r;X3e Trpos TOV 
 T\.vpov, Kal TW v6p.(j> Trpoo~Kwr)o-as, eiTTf. 
 Comp. Luc. Enc. Demosth. 49 Kal TTJV x f ^P a 
 TW oro/mTt Trpocrayayovrps, ovdev aXX 77 
 irpo(TKvv(iv, vTreXap./Sai/oi . Wetstein N. T. I. 
 p. 242. Hence in N. T. and genr. to do 
 reverence or homage to any one, usually by 
 kneeling or prostrating oneself before him ; 
 Sept. every where for niriiniZJn to bow 
 down, to prostrate oneself in reverence, ho 
 mage, e. g. Gen. 19, 1. 48, 12; see Heb. 
 Lex. art. nriBJ . 
 
 1. Genr. to do reverence, to do homage, 
 towards a person as superior, or from whom 
 one implores aid ; from the Heb. always 
 with the idea of bowing down, kneeling, 
 prostration. E. g. absol. with words ex 
 pressing prostration added, Acts 10, 25 6 
 Kopvr/Xtos rreo-wv <rVi TOVS irooas, -rrpocrfKit- 
 yrjo-ev. Simpl. Matt. 20, 20 irpoo-Kvvovcra 
 K al aiTovo-a. (Sept. for WTTWDH Gen. 33, 
 6.7. Xen. An. 1. 6. 10.) With dat. of 
 pers. in later usage, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 463. 
 Winer 31. 1. n; so with words express 
 ing prostration, Matt. 2, 11 Kal irfvovres 
 Trpoo-fKvvrjo-av ai/rw sc. TW TraiSiw. 4, 9 eav 
 TTfo-uv irpoo-Kvvt)o-r)s p.oi sc. Satan. 18, 26. 
 28, 9 (KpdTr]o-(V avTov TOVS TroSas Kal npoo-- 
 (Kwrjo-av nvTW. Mark 15, 19 Ti3eVres TO. 
 yovara Trpoo-fKvvovv OL>TW. Simpl. Matt. 2, 
 2 Kal ^X3op.ef Trpoo-Kvvri<Tai OVTW. v. 8. 8, 2. 
 9, 18. 14, 33. 15, 25. 28, 17. Mark 5, 6. 
 John 9, 38. Sept. for njnnan Gen. 27, 29. 
 43, 26. 28. saep. So Heliodor. IX. 366. Pol. 
 5_ ge. 10. With ace. in the earlier Greek 
 usage, Matth. 5 412. Lob. 1. c. Luke 24,52 
 KOI aiTol irpo<TKvvf)0-avT(s avTov. Sept. for 
 nen Gen. 37, 6. 8. So Jos. Ant. 2. 2. 2. 
 ib. 6. 13.4 tTTio-TpafpfVTos oe TOV ^aouXews 
 
 TTPO(TKW( ITCtt ai/TOV TTfO~U>V (TTt TTpOfTWTTOl , 
 
 a,s r3os. ^El. V. H. 1. 21. Pol. 10. 17. 8. 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 14. From the Heb. con 
 strued with (VMiTiov TLVOS Luke 4, 7 ; Vw- 
 TTIOV Tiav TroScoi TLVOS Rev. 3, 9. So Sept. 
 for n :t^> nirmisn Ps. 22. 30. 86, 9. 
 
 1UI i". ...... t . 
 
 2. Spec, of those who pay reverence and 
 
 homage to the Deity, who render divine 
 honours, to worship, to adore, primarily with 
 the idea of prostration, which however is 
 often dropped ; comp. Sept. and n^nnii n 
 Gen. 47, 31. 1 K. 1, 47. a) To God, ab 
 sol. John 4, 20 bis, of ndrepes rjp.>v V TOJ 
 opfi TOUTft) irpoa f<vvr]<Ta.v KT\. V. 24 Oft 
 Trpoo-KWf iv. 12, 20. Acts 8, 27. 24, 11. 
 Rev. 11, 1. Sept. and nt ; n Ps. 95, 6. 
 138, 2. (Jos. Ant. 8. 4. 4.) Praegn. Heb. 
 11, 21 Kai TrpocreKvvTja-av Vt TO aicpov TJJS 
 pa|95ov avroO, he worshipped [bowing] upon 
 the top of his staff, in allusion to Gen. 47, 
 31 where Sept. for RJOWftj, comp. 1 K. 
 1, 47. With a dat. see in no. 1 ; so with 
 words expressing prostration. 1 Cor. 14, 25 
 Treerwv fVl TrpocroOTOi TrpocrKWTJcrai rw 3w. 
 Rev. 4, 10. 5, 14 Rec. 7,11. 11,16. 19,4. 
 Simply, John 4, 21 Trpoo-KwrjaeTf TW narpi. 
 v. 23. Rev. 14, 7. 19, 10 TW 3fw irpoa-Kv- 
 VTJVOV. 22, 9. Sept. and nttJn Gen. 24, 26. 
 Is. 27, 13. (Jos. Ant. 6. 7. 5 TW 3ew.) With 
 accus. see above in no. 1 ; Matt. 4, 10 TOV 
 Seov (TOV irpocrKvvr)(Teis. Luke 4, 8. John 4. 
 22 bis. 23. 24. (Jos. Ant. 6. 4. 2 TW 3foi>. 
 Xen. An. 3. 2. 9 TOV 3edi>.) With J/WTTIOI 
 crou Rev. 15, 4, see above in no. 1. fin. 
 b) To the Messiah, c. dat. Heb. 1,6. c) 
 To angels, with emo-ov tp. rrpoa- Sev, c. dat 
 Rev. 19, 10; absol. 22, 8. d) To false 
 gods, idols ; wjth dat. see in no. 1 ; Acts 7, 
 43 ovs firoifjo-are irpocrKWflv ai/Tots. Re^ 
 16, 2. 19, 20. 20, 4. With accus. see in 
 no. 1 ; Rev. 9, 20 irpoo-Kvi>f]<ra>a-i TCI 8aip.u- 
 vta. 13, 4 bis. 8. 12. 15. 14, 9. 11. So 
 Xen. An. 3. 2. 13 TOVS Seovs. 
 
 7Tpo<J/clvr/T7/9, ov, 6, (TrpotricWw,) a 
 worshipper of God, John 4, 23. Chandler 
 Inscript. App. X. 3 TOIS Trpoa-KwyTais sc. 
 of Augustus. 
 
 TrpocrXaXew, w, f. ^ww, (XaXew,) to 
 speak to or with any one, c. dat. Acts 13, 43 ; 
 absol. 28, 20. Comp. Matth. $ 402. Wisd. 
 13, 18. Luc. Nigr. 7. Plut. Conj. Praec. 37. 
 
 7TpocrKa/J,/3dva)i f. X^o/xcu, (Xa/n|3<i- 
 vca,~) to take besides, in addition, Xen. Mem. 
 3. 14. 4; to receive besides, Xen. An. 7. 3. 
 13 ; to take to or with oneself, in one s com 
 pany, Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 16. In N. T. Mil 
 irpoo-\ap[3dvop.ai, to take to oneself: 
 also to receive to oneself. 
 
 1. to take to oneself, e. g. food, c. gen. 
 Acts 27, 36 KOI avToi 7rpo(reXa/3oTO Tpofprjs. 
 v. 34 Rec. Buttm. $132. 5. d, and 10. i. 
 With ace. /xTjStV Acts 27, 33. (Comp. Xen 
 Mem. 3. 14. 4.) With ace. of pers. to take to 
 oneself, to take by the hand and draw aside, 
 Matt. 16. 22. Mark 8, 32. Also to take to 
 
632 
 
 one s company, intercourse, house ; Acts 
 17, 5 Kal rrpoffXaySo/xei ot . . . TUas avftpas 
 irovrjpovs. 18, 26. 28, 2. So 2 Mace. 8, 1. 
 Jos. B. J. 2. 21. 1. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 24. 
 
 2. to receive to oneself, to admit to one s 
 society and fellowship, to receive and treat 
 with kindness, c. ace. of pers. Rom. 14, 1 
 TOV 8e acr^fvovvra TJJ TriVret TrpocrXa/i/^dfe- 
 o-3at. v. 3. 15, 7 bis! Philem. 12, 17. Sept. 
 for 3-npn Ps. 65, 4. 2 Mace. 10, 15. 
 
 a)S> ^ (7rpoo-Xa/z/3di/6>,) a 
 taking or assuming besides, Plato Theset. 
 210. a ; an assumption, the second member 
 of a syllogism, Cic. de Divin. 2. 53. Diog. 
 Laert. 7. 82. In N. T. a receiving, admis 
 sion to oneself, Rm- H> 15. 
 
 ). f. y<5, (p-eVco,) to remain at 
 a place, with a person, q. d. to remain there ; 
 of place, absol. Acts 18, 18; eV E^eVa 
 1 Tim. 1, 3. (Jos. de Vit. 12. Hdian. 4. 
 15. 15. Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 7.) Of persons, 
 to continue with any one, c. dat. Matt. 15, 
 32. Mark 8, 2. Also to remain faithful to 
 any one, to adhere to, Acts 11, 23 ; for the 
 dat after rrpo y, see Matth. { 402. So Wisd. 
 3, 9. Jos. Ant. 14. 2. 1. Trop. to continue 
 in any thing, to be constant in, to persevere, 
 c. dat. 1 Tim. 5, 5 rats SeTjcrfcri. Acts 13, 
 43 in later edit, for Rec. t 
 
 to bring a ship to anchor at or near a place, 
 to cast anchor, to land at, c. dat. Plut. Parall. 
 2 Sfp^rjs . . . Aprefiicrico Trpocrop/u craj. In 
 N. T. Mid. to come to ajichor, to draw in to 
 shore, absol. Mark 6, 53. So Arr. Exped. 
 Al. M. 6. 20. 7 Trpocropp.icr Sels r 
 
 m. v. H. s. 5. 
 
 , f. faa, (o<pet Xa>,) to owe 
 besides, in addition, Philem. 19 creavrov poi 
 TTpoa-ofpfiXeis. Dem. 650. 23. Xen. Cyr. 
 3. 2. 16. 
 
 ), f. /o-w, (o^St ^w, o^Ss w, 
 o^Sor,) to be grieved towards any one, to be 
 indignant, angry, wroth at, implying detes 
 tation, loathing, c. dat. Matth. J 402. Heb. 
 3, 10. 17 816 TrpocrtD^Sicra 777 -yri/ea (Kfivr), 
 in allusion to Ps. 95, 10 where Sept. for 
 Bsip to loathe. Sept. also for bS5 Lev. 26, 
 15. 43. Ecclus. 6, 25. 25, 2. 
 
 TrpocrTrewos, O v, 6. 17, (irpos intens. jre t- 
 va,~) very hungry, Acts 10, 10. Not found 
 elsewhere. 
 
 Trpoa-Tnjjvvfjit, f. y^co, (Trjyywp-i,) to fix 
 or fasten to any thing, to affix, c. ace. Acts 
 2, 23 rotJToi 1 . . . Trpocnrri^avTfs [TW rravpw] 
 dvetXere. 
 
 ), f. TTftroO/Aat, (TTiWco,) fa 
 /aZZ towards or w/>on any thing, Xen. Eq. 
 7. 6. In N. T. with the idea of purpose : 
 
 1. to fall upon, to rush upon, to dash 
 against, as the wind, c. dat. Matt. 7, 25 
 
 01 avfp.oi Trpocre7rTov TJJ oiKia. Comp. 
 Matth. ^ 402. Of a hostile assault, c. dat. 
 Pol. 1. 28. 9. Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 3. 
 
 2. Of persons, to fall down to or before 
 any one, at his feet or knees in reverence 
 or as a suppliant ; c. dat. of pers. Mark 3, 
 11 TT poo-en iirre avrw. 5, 33. Luke 8, 28. 47. 
 Acts 16, 29 ; also rois yovaviv rivos Luke 
 5, 8. Sept. c. ai/rw for jn3 Ps. 95, 6. So 
 
 2 Mace. 5, 10. Pol. 10. 1877 ; TO LS yovaa-t 
 Diod. Sic. 17. 13 ; absol. Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 2. 
 \VUh Trpbs Tovs+ir68as TWOS Mark 7, 25. 
 Sept. for 55->ari Ex. 4, 25. 
 
 Trpocrvrotect), >, f. ijo-w, (TTOUG),) to make 
 to or for any one, to gain for, Dem. 1393. 
 15. Xen. Hell. 4. 8. 28 TT. ^iX^i/ AeV/3ov 777 
 TrdXet. Usually Mid. depon. irpoa-Troie- 
 ofjiai, ov/iat, to make to oneself, to acquire 
 for oneself, Hdot. 9. 37. Xen. Hell. 4. 8. 28 
 jr. XoX^Scwovr (pi\ovs. Also to take or 
 cZam to oneself, to pretend to, Thuc. 1. 137 ; 
 to pretend, to affect, Xen. An. 2. 1. 7. 
 Hence in N. T. Mid. depon. to make as if, 
 to make a show of being or doing any thing, 
 to affect, c. inf. Luke 24, 28 7rpo<mroiTo 
 TToppatTfpto 7ropeveo-3ai. So Jos. Ant. 7. 8. 
 1 vocrfiv. Plut. Timol. 5 ^atp 61 "- -^- en - ^jr- 
 2. 2. 5, 12. 
 
 irpoarropevo^aL, oO/iai, f. evo-o/^ai, 
 Pass, depon. (Tropevco,) to #o or come /o any 
 one, c. dat. Mark 10, 35 ; comp. Matth. 
 5402. Sept. for ai as Ex. 24, 14. Ecclus. 
 12, 18. Pol. 4. 3. 13. 
 
 Trpocrprjyvv/jU, f. 7j|a>, (pfowp.t, ) to 
 break or 6urs towards or upora any thing, 
 to dasft upon or against, as waves, a flood, 
 intrans. c. dat. Matth. 5 402. Luke 6, 48. 
 49 irpo(rfppriev 6 irorap,os rfj oiKia. So C. 
 acc. Aquil. Ps. 2, 9. Jos. Ant. 6. 9. 3. ib. 9. 
 4. 6. 
 
 7rpO<7Ta,Ti9, iSoy, 17, (IT poo-Tarns, rrpo- 
 arra/uai,) a female curator, and genr. a pa 
 troness, helper, succourer, Rom. 16, 2. 
 Luc. Charid. 10 3ea . . . Trpoo-rcms ovo-a. 
 Bis accus. 29. 
 
 Trpocrracrcra), v. -TTO), f. a>, (rd(ro-a>,) 
 to arrange or se< tn onfer o^ a place, to pos 
 o<, TOTTW jEschyl. Theb. 527. In N. T. to 
 order towards or to any one, to command, to 
 prescribe to ; c. dat. of pers. Matt. 1 , 24 is 
 rrpofffTafv ai>r<a 6 nyyeXoy. 21, 6; impl. 
 Luke 5, 14. Pass. c. dat. Acts 10, 33 irdv 
 Ta TO. TrpocrTfTay/jifva (rot VTTO TOV 
 
633 
 
 Impl. Matt. 8, 4 6 Trpoo-trage 
 Mark 1, 44. Also inf. c. ace. Acts 10, 48. 
 Sept. for njX c. dat. Gen. 50, 2. Num. 5, 
 2 ; ace. et dat. Lev. 10, 1. Deut. 17, 3 ; c. 
 inf. Esth. 3, 2. So c. dat. Dem. 363. 26 ; 
 ace. et dat. Xen. Lac. 6. 2 ; c. inf. 2 Mace. 
 15, 5. Spoken of times or seasons, to pre 
 scribe or appoint to any one, Pass. Acts 17, 
 26 opicras irpo<rrfTayp.fvovs Katpovs, where 
 Rec. TrpoTfTayfjifvovs. 
 
 TrpoffTfeijfjM, f. Stereo, (rferjfju,) impf. 
 Trpoo-fTfevv Acts 5, 14; also 3 pers. Trpoo-- 
 en Sei Acts 2, 47. JE,\. V. H. 3. 18 ; comp. 
 Buttm. 106. n. 5. 
 
 1 . to set, put, lay unto or with any thing ; 
 Pass, with irpos c. ace. Acts 13, 36 KOI 
 rrpo(TTfZrj Trpos TOVS iraTpas avrov, sc. 
 Aafr S. Winer { 58. 4. 13. Sept. for C]OS< 
 Judg. 2, 10. 1 Mace. 2, 69. Comp. Xen. 
 Cyr. 6. 1. 30. 
 
 2. Genr. to join unto, to add unto, e. g. 
 a) Of persons, c. ace. et dat. Acts 2, 47 6 
 8e Kvpios 7rpo<rTi3ei TOVS trcof. Ka3 17^1. rfj 
 fKK\rjaia. 5, 14 et 11, 24 TW Kvpi<a. Pass. 
 Acts 2, 41. Sept. for nib? Num. 18,2. 
 Is. 14, 1. So 1 Mace. 2, 43. Jos. Vit. 25. 
 Plut. Brut. 23. b) Of things, c. ace. et 
 dat. Luke 17, 5 irp6<r%(s r^uv irioriv. Pass. 
 C. dat. Matt. 6, 33 Kal ravra ndvra Trpocrre- 
 ^a-tTai vp.lv. [Mark 4, 24.] Luke 12, 31. 
 Heb. 12, 19. With ace. and ri c. dat. Luke 
 3, 20; irri c. ace. Matt. 6, 27. Luke 12, 
 25. Pass, absol. Gal. 3, 19 Rec. Sept. for 
 C^P 1 ; Lev. 26, 21 ; eVt TI Deut. 12, 32. So 
 Dion. Hal. Ant. 6. 88. Plut. Galb. 8. Xen. 
 Cyr. 2. 4. 14 ; ri TI Ecclus. 3, 26. c) 
 By Hebr. like ?&* before an infin. or some 
 times a finite verb, to add to do any thing, 
 i. q. to do again, to do further ; see Heb. 
 Lex. art. PlP? no. 3. Winer 58. 5. E. g. 
 Mid. aor. 2 -npocreTt^i^v c. inf. Luke 20, 
 11. 12 Kai irpcHT&fTo Trep^rai trtpov, Tpirov, 
 i. e. again he sent. Acts 12, 3 7rpoo-3ero 
 (TvXXa^eiv <a\ IleYpof he further seized also 
 Peter. Part. 7rpoo-3eir before a finite verb, 
 Luke 19, 11 TrpoffSfis fine irapa$o\T]v. So 
 Sept. and r^ Gen. 4, 2. 18, 29. 25, 1. saep. 
 Ecclus. 18, 4 [5] ; comp. Jos. Ant. 6. 13. 
 4 Trpoa SffJ.fvos Stoo/ceiv. Pol. 31. 7. 4 Trpocr- 
 Ztp.tvos 
 
 o), aor. 2 Trpoo-e Spa/zoi , (TP- 
 ,) to run to or towards any one. to rwn up, 
 
 absol. Mark 9, 15. 10, 17. Acts 8, 30. 
 
 Sept. for fll Gen. 18, 2. 33, 4. 1 Mace. 
 
 16, 21. Hdian. 4. 13. 11. Xen. Cyr. 7. 
 
 1. 15. 
 
 Trpocnpayiov, ov, TO, (irpocrfpaydv,} pr. 
 
 what is eaten thereto, with bread ; hence 
 
 genr. any thing to eat, as meat, Jlesh, i. q. 
 fyov, and alsojish, i. q. fydpiov q. v. John 
 21, 5. The Attic word was ctyof, while 
 npo(T(pdyiov is found only in late writers, 
 Eustath. ad II. X. 629. p. 867. 54. Moaris p. 
 274 o^rov Arnicas Trpocrfpdyiov EXX^i tKur. 
 Sturz de Dial. Alex. p. 191. 
 
 7Tp6cr<f>aTO$, ov, 6, 17, adj. (obs. <pa<u, 
 cpfvu, ntcpap.ai, ) pr. slain thereto or thereby, 
 newly killed, just dead, Horn. II. 24. 757. 
 Hdot. 2. 89 ; of flesh, just killed, fresh, as 
 Kpta Hippocr. de Viet. Ac. LX. 317; of 
 vegetables, fresh, recent, as aXcpira Hipp, de 
 Viet. San. II. 5 ; i>3o? Plut. Alex. M. 36. 
 In N. T. genr. recent, new, as 686s irpotr- 
 0aroj Heb. 10, 20. Sept. for l^n Ecc. 1, 9. 
 So Plut. Otho 8. Pol. 1. 21. 9. Dem. 551 
 15. See more in Lob. ad. Pliryn. p. 374 sq. 
 
 , adv. (Trpoo-cparor,) recent 
 ly, lately, Acts 18, 2. 2 Mace. 14, 36. Pol. 
 3. 37. 11. 
 
 7rpO(7(f)epa>, (</pa>,) aor. 1 Trpoajjj/ey/ca , 
 aor. 2 imperat. TrpocreWyKe Matt. 8, 4. Mark 
 1, 44 ; perf. Trpoo-e^i/o^a, Heb. 11,17; see 
 Buttm. ^ 114 (pe pco. To bear or bring to 
 any place or person. 
 
 1. Genr. e. g. of things, with ace. and 
 dat. of place, to bring near or put to, John 
 19, 29 TrpocrrjvfyKav avrov Tea oro/iart sc. 
 TOV (nroyyov. (Luc. D. Deor. 5. 3. Xen. 
 Eq. 6. 7.) So c. dat. of pers. to bring a 
 thing to any one, Matt. 22, 19 ot S Trpoo-ij- 
 vtyxav airo) Srjvdpiov. With ace. simpl. 
 Matt. 25, 20 TrpocrrjvfyKnv ("XXa rreVre ra- 
 \ain-a. Sept. and iOSri Gen. 27, 31. Ex. 
 36, 6. So rt TIVI Xen. Cyr. 6. 4. 2 ; ri Jos. 
 B. J. 1. 24. 7. Plut. Galb. 12. Xen. Conv. 
 5. 2. Of persons, c. ace. et dat. e. g. the 
 sick as brought to Jesus, Matt. 4, 24 Trpoo-- 
 TjvtyKav avrw iravras TOVS KOKUIS e^oi/raj. 8, 
 16. 9, 2. 32. 12, 22. 14, 35. 17, 16 ; n-at- 
 8t a Matt. 19, 13. Mark 10, 13 bis; ftpt(prj 
 Luke 18, 15. (Xen. Ag. 2. 13 rerpco/^Vos 
 irpoffTjisfx^T) Trpbs TT]V (pdXayya.) So to 
 bring or conduct to or before any one, c. ace. 
 et dat. Matt. 18, 24. Luke 23, 14; /a 
 12, 11. 
 
 2. /o o/Ter, to present to any one, c. ace. et 
 dat. e. g. oor Luke 23, 36 ; xPW aTa money 
 Acts 8, 18 ; 8o>pa gifts Matt. 2, 11. Sept 
 irpo(r(f). 8<Lpa for N On Gen. 43, 26. Judg. 
 3, 7. So Xen. Mem. 3. 11. 14. Of things 
 offered to God, oblations, sacrifice ; c. ace. 
 et dat. TW 3e<a or the like, e. g. Suo-t as Acts 
 7,42. Heb. 11,4; Xarpeiav John 16,2; tau- 
 TOV Heb. 9, 14. Once irpos TOV 3foi>, sc. 
 faqa-fts, Heb. 5, 7. Elsewhere with ace. 
 and TW SfoJ or Trpor T 3f oV impl. Matt. 5, 
 
634 
 
 Trpoaanrov 
 
 S3, 24 7rpoV</>epe TO SoipoV crov. 8, 4. Heb. 
 8, 3 bis. 4. 9, 25. 10,1. 11. 11, 17 bis. 
 Pass. Heb. 9, 9. 28. 10, 2. 8. The person 
 or thing/o?- or on account, of which offering 
 is made, is put with vnep v. irepi ; e. g. 
 inrfp TLVOS c. acc. Heb. 5, 1 irpocrcp. 8<apd 
 Tf /cat 3vcrtay vnep ap,apri<av. 9, 7. 10, 12 ; 
 acc. impl. 5, 3. Pass. Acts 21, 26; irepi 
 TIVOS c. acc. Mark 1,44 TrpcxrevfyKe nfpl 
 TOV Ko^apia-f-iov aou a KT\. Acc. impl. Luke 
 5, 14. Heb. 5, 3. Sept. genr. for SO^ 
 Lev. 2, 8. Mai. 1, 13 ; 2"Hp : n Lev. 2, 11. 12. 
 Num. 15, 4. So Jos. B. J. 3. 8. 3 irpocrcp. 
 TO> Sew fi>xfjv. Ant. 3. 9. 3 tpKpov. 
 
 3. Mid. c. dat. trop. to bear oneself towards 
 any one, to conduct towards, to deal with 
 any one so and so ; Heb. 12, 7 ws viols 
 ifjuv Trpoo-cpe peTat 6 Seoy. Jos. B. J. 7. 8. 
 1. Hdian. 7. 4. 5. Xen. Mem. 3. 11. 11. 
 
 toy, ovs, o, f], adj. (npos, 
 eptXe o),) pr. dear to any one, beloved, Jos. 
 Ant. 1. 18. 1 l<iKo>/3os 8e rfj fj.r)Tfpi Trpocr- 
 QiKljs rjv. Hdot. 1. 163. In N. T. of things, 
 acceptable, pleasing, Phil. 4, 8. So Hdian. 
 5. 1. 7. Pol. 22. 5. 7. Xen. (Ec. 15. 4. 
 
 y, 77, (7rpoo-<p<rpo),) an o/Ter- 
 tMgT, ollation, i. e. 
 
 1. Pr. the act of offering to God. Heb. 
 10, 10 6ia rrjs Trpooxpopay TOV crw/iaros I. 
 Xp.v. 14. Trop. Rom. 15, 16. Ecclus. 46, 
 16 fv Trpo<r(popq tipvos ya\a%Tji>ov. 
 
 2. Meton. for the thing offered, an offer 
 ing, oblation, strictly without blood, opp. to 
 Sixrt a and oXoKaurco/iora ; Eph. 5, 2 7rpocr(p. 
 Kal 3u<r/a. Heb. 10, 5. 8. Sept. for MHSa 
 Ps. 40, 7. So Song of 3 Child. 14. Also 
 a sacrifice, with blood, i. q. Svaria, Acts 21, 
 26 eccs o?3 Trpocrr]Vf)(%r) ... 17 irpocr<popd, see 
 Num. 6, 13 sq. Acts 24, 17 comp. 21, 26. 
 So too Trpocrcpopa TTfpi ajuupri ar Heb. 10, 
 18; comp. Lev. c. 4. c. 9 ; so Ecclus. 31, 
 18. 19. 
 
 7rpo<T(p(ovecd, &, f. 770-0), ((paWo>,) pr. to 
 utter sounds towards any one, i. e. 
 
 1. to speak to, to address any one ; with 
 dat. expr. or impl. Luke 13, 12 Trpoo-e<po>- 
 vrjvf ttal flnev avrfj. 23, 20. Acts 21, 40. 
 22, 2, (So 1 Esdr. 2, 21. Diod. Sic. 4. 48 
 init.) Spec, to call out to any one, to exclaim, 
 c. dat. Matt. 11, 16. Luke 7, 32. The 
 earlier construction was Trpoafpcoix iv -nva, 
 Matth. J 402. b, note. Diod. Sic. 4. 48 pen. 
 
 2. to call any one to oneself, c. acc. Luke 
 
 6, 13 7rpo<re(f)(avr]rTf TOVS /mStyray. Jos. Ant. 
 
 7. 7. 4 7rpocr0coi 7)craf eva ru>v oiKfTciiv. 
 
 TTpocrxycnS) ( ws, rj, (7rpocrx &>,) a rour- 
 ing out towards, i. q. affusion, sprinkling, 
 
 jr. TOU m/xaroy Heb. 11, 28; see Ex. 12, 
 7. 22. 
 
 f. ava-a>, (^avw.) to touch 
 upon, to touch, c. dat. Luke 11, 46 ow *rpoer- 
 ^avere rots (popriois. Soph. Philoct. 1054. 
 Find. Fr. 86. 2 Bceckh. 
 
 7rpocrcD7roX??7rTe&>, w, f. 770-0), (Trpoo-w- 
 irdXfjTTTrjs,) to accept or respect the person of 
 any one, /o sftow partiality, absol. James 2, 
 9. Found only in N. T. and i. q. irp6a-<aivoi> 
 Xa/i/3d/eii> Luke 20, 21 ; see in Xa/i/3ai> 
 no. 1. e. /3. Heb. Lex. art. NiUJ no. 3. b. 
 
 Xa/i/3ai/o).) a respecter of persons, Acts 10, 
 34 ov/c ecrri Trp. 6 Seo s. Found only in 
 N. T. see in T 
 
 TTT/O),) respect of persons, partiality, Rom. 
 2. 11. Eph. 6, 9. Col. 3, 25. James 2, 1. 
 Found only in N. T. 
 
 TrpoaWTTOV, ov, TO, (?rpo y, aty,) pr. the 
 part at or aftowi //ie e^e ; hence genr. the 
 face, visage, countenance ; Sept. everywhere 
 for Heb. B^B. Not found in the writings 
 of John. 
 
 1. Pr. the face; Matt. 6, 16. 17 TO Trpdcr- 
 o)7roV O-OTJ vtyai. 17, 2. 26, 67. Mark 14. 
 65 TrepiKaXvTTTfiv TO Trp. avrov. Luke 9, 29. 
 22, 64. 24, 5. Acts 6, 15 bis. 2 Cor. 3, 7 
 bis. 13. 18. 4, 6 comp. 3, 7. 11, 20. Gal. 
 
 1, 22 dyvoov/jifvos TW Trpoo-oWo), unknown 
 by face, Engl. iz/ svg7iL James 1, 23. Rev. 
 4, 7. 9, 7 bis. 10, 1. Sept. and o^B Gen: 
 38, 15. 40, 7. 43, 31. So Jos. Ant. 6. 7. 
 
 2. Hdian. 1. 7. 8. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 29. In 
 phrases : TT lirreiv tTrl Trpownov, Matt. 1 7, 
 26, 39. Luke 5, 12. 17, 16. 1 Cor. 14, 25. 
 Rev. 7, 1 1 . 11,16; see in TT/TTTO) no. 2. Also 
 Trp6<ra>7rov Trpos Trpuo-anrov, face to face, 
 nothing intervening, 1 Cor. 13, 12 ; so Sept. 
 and O^Q bx D^3 Gen. 32, 31, comp. Deut. 
 34,10. So Kara IT po cr a> n ov e^tiis, before 
 the face, face to face, present, Acts 25, 16. 
 2 Cor. 10, 1, opp. a7rcbz>. 2 Cor. 10, 7 TO 
 Kara Trp6ora>Trov, pr. i/ie things before the face, 
 i. e. external things. (Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 15. 
 Diod. Sic. 19. 46. Pol. 25, 5. 2; com} 
 Sept. Deut. 34, 10.) Further, Kara TV poa- 
 atirov ai>To) dvrtcrTTjv Gal. 2, 11; comp. 
 Heb. Lex. fJB no. 1. b. Trop. and by 
 Hebr. Luke 9, 51 Kal avros TO Trpoaunrov 
 O.VTOV eo~T)7pie TOV 7ropeveo~3ai KTX. lie 
 steadfastly set his face to go, he set forth 
 with fixed purpose ; comp. Sept. and Heb. 
 d^SQ fisito c. inf. Jer. 42, 15. 17. 2 K. 12, 
 18. Heb. Lex. HDB no. 1. c. Ellipt. in the 
 same sense, Luke 9, 53 TO Trp. avTov %* 
 
635 
 
 iropfvop.(vov (Is lepovcroXi^i. So 1 Pet. 3, 
 12 Trp. TOV Kvpiov (nl iroiovvras KOKO., comp. 
 Lev. 26, 17. Jer. 21, 10. Heb. Lex. n:Q 
 no. 1. e, f. Trop. in antith. with KapSia, 
 as 1 Thess. 2, 17 Trpoo-corra), ov KapBia, pr. 
 in face, not in heart, in body, not in spirit. 
 2 Cor. 5, 12 (V Trpo<r<oTra> Kav^a>p.(vovs, xal ov 
 KnpS/a, i. e. externally, in appearance, and 
 not in reality. 
 
 2. Meton. the face, put for (he presence, 
 person of any one, chiefly in phrases bor 
 rowed from the Hebrew : a) With pre 
 positions and followed by a genit. of pers. 
 it forms like Heb. B n DQ a periphrasis for a 
 simple preposition, e. g. OTTO Trpoo-coTrou 
 TIVOS , from the face, presence of any one, 
 i. q.from before, from; Acts 3, 19 OTTUS av 
 <X3a>cri Kaipol av. CJTTO Trpoerwrov TOV K. 5, 
 41 OTTO Trp. TOV o~vv(o piov. 7, 45. 2 Thess. 
 1,9. Rev. 6, 16. 12, 14. 20, 11. Sept. 
 and aan Gen. 16, 6. Deut. 2, 22 ; Stfea 
 Gen. 4i, 46. 1 Chr. 19, 18 ; els irp6<ra>- 
 irov TO>I> KK\r]crio)v, i. q. before or to the 
 churches, 2 Cor. 8, 24 ; tv TT p o a- <o TT o> 
 XpttrroO, in <fo presence of Christ, i. e. 5e- 
 fore him, as a formula of asseveration, 
 2 Cor. 2, 10 ; so Sept.. and T-sb Prov. 8, 
 30; Kara irpocraiirov TWOS, in the pre 
 sence nf any one, before him. Lnke 2, 31. 
 Acts 3, 13 Kara Trp. HiXarov. Sept. for 
 \3Bb Gen. 3-2, 21 ; ^Q^ 1 ? Gen. 25, 18. 
 (Test. XII Patr. p. 683.) Also/zera TOV 
 jrpoo-aWou o-o v, wi/fe or in thy presence, 
 with thee, Acts 2, 28, quoted fruiu Ps. 16, 
 11 where Sept. for ^SB fix ; npb irpov- 
 urrov TWOS, before the face of any one, i. q. 
 simpl. Trpd TIVOS, before any one ; so of 
 place, Matt. 11,10 aTroo-TXXo> TOV uyyeXoV 
 fiov Trpo Trpocrwrou crov. Mark 1, 2. Luke 
 1, 76. 7, 27. 9. 5-2. 10, 1 ; once of time, 
 Acts 13, 24. Winer 67. 1. n. e. Comp. 
 genr. Heb. Lex. M?Q l e tt. A, B, C, etc. 
 b) In construction with verbs, with or with 
 out an intervening preposition, and with a 
 genit. of pers. expr. or implied ; here too it 
 forms a periphrasis for the person designated 
 by the genitive. So in the phrase 6pav v. 
 
 I8tlv TO TT pOCTCOTrdf TIVOS, to S66 the face 
 
 of any one, i. q. to see him face to face, to 
 see and converse with any one, Acts 20, 25. 
 38. Col. 2, 1. 1 Thess. 2, 17. 3, 10. Sept 
 ty. TO Trp. avroO for TSB ttX 1 ? Gen. 32, 20. 
 Comp. in 6pda> no. 1. b, and eiSco I. 1. c. 
 Hence also ft\tir(iv \. 6pav TO rrpocr- 
 UTTOV TOV 3fov, to behold the face of God, 
 i. q. to hai-e access to God, to be admitted to 
 his presence, Matt. 18, 10. Rev. 22, 4 ; see 
 fully in jSAeVrw no. 2. a, and 6pa no. 1. b. 
 
 In a like sense, Heb. 9, 24 (p.(pavicr^vai T 
 7rpo<ra>7roj TOV 3eoC inrtp fjn&v, before God ; 
 see in e p,(pai ( ^eo. Elsewhere including the 
 idea of external condition and circumstan 
 ces ; so /3 XeVe iv f Is Trp. TIVOS, to regard 
 the person, i. e. the external appearance, of 
 any one, Matt. 22, 16. Mark 12, 14 ; see in 
 jSXeVco no. 1. a. /3. Also 3au/iaeii> Trpocr- 
 (orrov TIVOS Jude 16, see in 3at//xd<J&> no. 2. 
 For \afj.ftdveiv irpocrwrov TIVOS, Luke 
 20, 21. Gal. 2, 6, see fully in \ap.pdva> no. 
 1. e. /3. c) Once absol. as in the later 
 Greek, a person ; 2 Cor. 1,11 ?roXXwi 
 Trpoo-coTTcoi TO (Is T]fJ.as ^dptcr/ia, the gift to 
 us from many persons. So Pol. 5. 107. 3 
 (&TOVV rjy(fj.6va KOI rrpoo-atrrov. 15. 25. 8. 
 Longin. } 14. Artemid. 2. 36. See Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 380. 
 
 3. Of things, the face, surface, Luke 21, 
 35 tiri 7rp6o~(i>Trov Trdo-rjs TTJS yrjs. Acts 17, 
 
 26. So Sept. and D^Q Gen. 2, 6. 11,4. 8. 
 Spec, the surface, the exlerior, external 
 appearance, Matt. 16, 3 TO p.(v Trp. ToC ovpa- 
 vov. Luke 12, 56. James 1, 11. Sept. and 
 CPJB Ps. 104, 30. 
 
 Trpordcra-ci) v. -rrtw, f. ^<B, (Tdo-o-w,) to 
 arrange or set in order before, in front, Jos. 
 Ant. 2. 16. 3. Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 15. In 
 N. T. of time, to appoint before, Pass. Part, 
 perf. Kaipol TrpoTfTayfj.(voi, times before ap 
 pointed, prescribed, Acts 17, 26 Rec. 
 Comp. in Trpoo-Tao-o-o) fin. 2 Mace. 8, 36. 
 Soph. Trach. 164. 
 
 TrpOTetvo), f. fvo>, (Ten/&>,) to protend, to 
 stretch forth or out, e. g. the hand, Dem. 
 332. 9: Xen. 7. 5. 39 ; to stretch forward, 
 to prolong, e. g. a bridge, Pol. 3. 46. 2. 
 In N. T. to stretch out, or extend before, 
 e. g. a person before the scourge, in order 
 to be scourged ; c. ace. et dat. Acts 22, 25 
 wr 8e 7rpoT(ivav O.VTOV TO!V Iftatnv, see fully 
 in Ifids. So Soph. Aj. 1270. Xen. Eq. 6. 11. 
 
 Trporepof, a, ov, comparat. formed from 
 Trpo, Buttm. 5 69. 2. Matth. $ 1 32 ; before, 
 fore, forward ; of place, Horn. Od. 19. 228 
 nodes irpoTfpot the fore-feet. Usually and 
 in N. T. of time. 
 
 1. before, former, prior ; Eph. 4, 22 KOTO. 
 TTJV irpOTtpav dvao-Tpo<pr)v. Sept. for "^sb 
 Jer. 28, 8 ; -p^an Lev. 26, 45. Deut. 4. 
 32. Hdian. 4. 14. 18. Xen. Vect. 4. 12. 
 
 2. Neuf.. TrpoTf pov as adv. before, first ; 
 comp. Buttm. {115. 4. a) Genr. John 7, 
 [50.] 51 tiiv pr) aKovo-r) trap avTov TrpoYepoi/. 
 2 Cor. 1, 15. 1 Tim. 1, 13. Heb. 4, 6. 7, 
 
 27. Sept. for C^Stb Neli. 13, 5; p ttiji- 
 Deut. 9, 18. 10, 3. So Jos. Ant. 7. 11. 1. 
 
636 
 
 Pol. 2. 55. 5. Xen. An. 1. 3. 18. b) 
 With the art. 6, f) irporepov as adj. for 
 mer, Buttm. \ 125. 6. Heb. 10, 32 ras Trpo - 
 repov fj/jifpas. 1 Pet. 1, 14 rats irp. firftv- 
 /Lu aty. (Sept. Num. 6, 12. Luc. de Sacrif. 
 5. Diod. Sic. 17. 6.9.) Neut. TO irporepov 
 as adv. before, formerly, John 6, 62 OTTOV ^i> 
 TO irpoTfpov. 9, 8. Gal. 4, 13. So Sept. 
 Deut. 2, 12. Josh. 11, 10. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 8. 1. 
 
 7rp<m^77/u, f. 3,70-0), (T&TJ/U,) to set or 
 puZ before, 2 Mace. 1 , 8. Eurip. Iph. Taur. 
 1226; to propose, Plato Soph. 226. c. In 
 N. T. only Mid. 7rpori 3f/iai, i. e. 
 
 1. Trop. to set before oneself, to propose to 
 oneself, to purpose, c. inf. Rom. 1,13 irpo- 
 fZffjiTjv fX^selv irpos vfids. With an ace. 
 Eph. 1, 9. Jos. c. Ap. 2. 40. Pol. 6. 12. 
 8. Plato Legg. 638. c. 
 
 2. to set forth before the world, publicly, 
 sc. on one s own part ; c. ace. Rom. 3, 25 
 
 OV TTpOf^fTO SfOf tXaCTTTJplOV. - So TTpOTlSjJ/il 
 
 JEl V. H. 14. 8. Hdian. 8. 6. 6. Diod. Sic. 
 16. 27. 
 
 TrporpeTTca, f. ^o>, (TpeVo>,) to turn one 
 forwards, to make go forwards, Pass. Horn. 
 II. 5. 700. Od. 11. 18 ; to urge on, to im 
 pel, Soph. Elect. 1193. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 64. 
 Oftener and in N. T. Mid. Trporpeiro- 
 p.ai, to urge on, to impel, on one s own 
 part, i. q. to exhort, absol. Acts 18, 27 Trpo- 
 rpf^rdp-fvot f ypa^av. So 2 MaCC. 11,7. 
 Pol. 2. 22. 2. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 32. 
 
 ), aor. 2 Tr 
 
 to run before, in advance ; c. adv. comparat. 
 John 20, 4 7rpoe8pa/ie Ta\iov TOV ILerpov. 
 Sept. for ijab p- 1 Sam. 8, 11. (An- 
 tiph. 122. l. Xen. An. 5. 2. 4.) Pleon. 
 Luke 19, 4 7rpoe8pafj,fv e/wrpoo-Sej/. So 
 Tob, 11, 2; comp. Trporropeveo-Sat e/i7rpo- 
 o-3ti/ Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 23. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 1 0. 
 
 n^n before, to be beforehand in, Dem. 314. 
 9. Thuc. 3. 40 ; to be or exisZ before, to pre 
 cede in time, Hdian. 1. 14. 4. Thuc. 1. 138. 
 InN. T. impf. jrpovTrripxov, to have been 
 before, only with a participle of another 
 verb, thus forming a periphrasis for a finite 
 tense of that verb ; comp. in vTrdpxeo no- 
 2, and Winer 5 46. 11. Matth. 551. e. 
 559. a. Viger. p. 308. So Luke 23, 12 
 Trpovnripxov tv f x^pa ovres, pr. who before 
 were being in enmity, who before were at 
 enmity. Acts 8, 9 TrpovTrfjpx" naytvatv, 
 who before practised sorcery. So Jos. Ant. 
 4. 6. 5 art TrpoiJirfip^ev tv TOIS ep-7rpoa3ei 
 Xpovois ytvopfva rols 
 
 TrpOtyao lS. fas, 17, (irpofpaivai,) pr. 
 what is shown before ; hence, show, pretence, 
 pretext, put forth to cover one s real intent. 
 Matt. 23, 14 rrpo(f>dcrfi p.ai<pa Tvpocrevxop-tvoi. 
 Mark 12,40. Luke 20, 47. Acts 27, 30 Trpo- 
 (pda-ei us KT\. Phil. 1, 18. 1 Thess. 2, 5 
 ovre ev TTpcxpdcrfi TrXeove^ias, a prel.ext 
 (cloak) for covetousness. So Sept. Hos. 
 10, 4. Jos. Vit. $ 14. Hdian. 3. 9. 1. Xen. 
 An. 1. 2. 1. Hence Trpo(p. ex flv lo ^ ave a 
 pretext, cloak ; i. e. a pretended excuse ; 
 John 15, 22 Trpucpao-iv OVK e^ovo-i Trept TT^S 
 dfji. So Dem. 526. 18. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 27. 
 
 7rpO(pepa), f. Trpoot cro), (cpepw,) to bear 
 or bring forth, out of any place, with ace. 
 and c. gen. Luke 6, 45 bis. Sept. Prov. 
 10, 4. Isocr. p. 11. e, axnrfp fK rap.eiov 
 Trpoffxpeiv. Plato Legg. 936. a, els TO p.(<rov. 
 
 7rpO(pt}Tlct^ as, T), (Trpo(pnT(v<j)^) a pro 
 phesying, prophecy, i. e. 
 
 1. Pr. prophecy, a foretelling of future 
 events, prediction, but including also from 
 the Heb. the idea of prophetic revelations, 
 declarations, exhortations, warnings, uttered 
 by the prophets while acting under divine 
 influence ; see in irpcxpfirvs. E. g. of the 
 prophecies of the O. T. Matt. 13, 14 dva- 
 Tr\T)povrai avrols fj 7rpo(pT]T(ia Ho~cuou. 
 2 Pet. 1, 20 7rao-a npocprjrfia ypafpr/s. V. 21. 
 So of the revelations and warnings of the 
 Apocalypse, Rev. 1, 3 TOVJ \6yovs rrjs npo- 
 fareias. 22, 7. 10. 18. 19. Rev. 19, 10 see 
 in papTvpia no. 2. Sept. and nxi3D 2 Chr. 
 15, 8. Neh. 6, 12. So Ecclus. T 39, : 1. 44, 
 3. Jos. Ant. 7. 9. 5. B. J. 3. 8. 3 ras irpo- 
 (prjTfias T&V ifpuv /St /SAcoi/. In 1 Tim. 1, 
 18 et 4, 14 irpo(pT]T(ia refers to prophetic 
 declarations respecting the labours and suc 
 cess of Timothy, made by those having the 
 gift of prophecy, on occasion of his being 
 sent forth; comp. Acts 13, 2. 20, 28. 
 1 Cor. 12, 4-8 sq. Comp. Chrysost. and 
 Theophyl. Sto TO TraXaiov OTTO rrjs irporpr)- 
 Tfias tyivovro ol if pels, TovrtcrTiv diro Trvfv- 
 P.O.TOS ayiov ovrut 6 Tip.6~eos ilp&r] Vi 
 rrjv iepaxrvvrjv. 
 
 2. Meton. prophecy, the prophetic office, 
 the prophetic gift, spoken in N. T. of the 
 peculiar Charisma or spiritual gift imparted 
 to the primitive teachers of the church ; see 
 in Trpo<pf)TT)s no. 3. Rom. 12, 6 f^ovrts 8e 
 Xa.pLa-p.ara . . . eire Trpcxpyrdav. 1 Cor. 1 2, 
 10. 13, 2. 8. 14, 22. So genr. Ecclus. 46, 
 1. Jos. Ant. 3. 8. 1 Aapwv Sid rf rb yevos 
 Kal rrjv Trpofpr/Tfiav. Plut. Pelop. 16 rrjv 
 
 Echecrates as prophet. Luc. Alex. 60. 
 
 3. Meton. a prophesying, the exercise of 
 
637 
 
 Ihe prophetic office, the acting as an ambas 
 sador of God and the interpreter of his 
 mind and will, Rev. 11, 6. Sept. and 
 rujirs Ezra 6, 14. So Ecclus. 46, 20. 
 Spec, the exercise of the. prophetic gift or 
 Charisma in the primitive church, 1 Cor. 
 14, 6 tav (JLT) vfj.lv XaXijaco . . . ev trpcxpTjTfia. 
 1 Thess. 5, 20. 
 
 7rpO(j)r]Tev(i)j f. evo-co, (Trpoeprjrqr,) to act 
 as prophet, e. g. to prophesy, to foretell fu 
 ture events, to predict ; but often including 
 also from the Heb. the idea of exhorting, 
 reproving, threatening, or indeed the whole 
 utterance of the prophets while acting un 
 der divine influence as ambassadors of God 
 and interpreters of his mind and will ; see 
 in 7rpo(pr ]TT)s. Sept. everywhere for X33 . 
 x ??^n, see Heb. Lex. s. v. So of the pro 
 phets of the O. T. Matt. 11,13 Trdvrfs yap 
 oi TrpofprjTai Kal 6 v6fj.os ecoy I&dvvov irpo- 
 fCprjTfvcrav. 15, 7 et Mark 7, 6 trepl vpuv. 
 1 Pet. 1, 10. Jude 14. In a like sense, of 
 persons acting by a divine influence as pro 
 phets and ambassadors of God under the N. 
 T. Rev. 10, 11 8el a( TrdXiv Trpo(pr)TfV(rai 
 eV! Xaols KT\. 11,3. Also Acts 2, 17. 18, 
 quoted from Joel 3, 1 [2, 28] where Sept. 
 forN23. Sept.genr. for N33, Kasnn, ] K. 
 22, 12. 18. Ezra 5, 1. Jer. 11, 21. Ex. 11, 
 4. saep. (Ecclus. 47, 1. Jos. Ant. 7. 9. 5. ib. 
 10. 2. 2.) Including the idea of praise to 
 God accompanied by prediction, Luke 1, 
 67 ; comp. Sept. and NS3, XSsrrt, i Sam. 
 10, 5. 6. 11. 19, 20. 21. Spec. John 11, 
 5 1 (Kai dcpas) dpxtepfvs &V . . . Trpoecp^rev- 
 vfv, comp. 18,14 where it is o-u/^ovXf vcra s, 
 i. e. his counsel was prophetic, though not 
 as he meant it ; comp. 11, 52. The gift of 
 prophecy was not held to belong to the 
 office of high priest ; Josephus expressly 
 separates the two ; Ant. 3.8. 1 . B. J. 1. 2. 
 8. Of false prophets, Matt. 7, 22. Sept. 
 and i<23 J e r. 14, 14. 15 ; and so of heathen 
 prophets, Diod. Sic. 17, 51 6 p.(v Trpocpjjrey- 
 av dvfip. Hdian. 5. 5. 21. Plut. de Def. 
 Orac. 5 E^eKpdrov? TrpofprjTfvovros. 
 Spoken in mockery by the soldiers to Je 
 sus, q. d. to divine, to give a response, c. dat. 
 Matt. 26, 68. Mark 14, 65. Luke 22, 64. 
 Compare npofprjTfia Jos. Ant. 6. 4. 1, 
 spoken of the response of the prophet to 
 Saul respecting the lost asses. 
 
 2. Spec, of the prophetic gift or Charis 
 ma imparted by the Holy Spirit to the pri 
 mitive Christians; Acts 19, 6 77X3* TO irv. 
 ay. fir avrovs, t\d\ovv Tf yXoxrtratj Kal 
 Trpot(pf]T(vov. 21, 9. 1 Cor. 11, 4. 5. 13, 9. 
 14, 1. 3. 4. 5 bis. 24. 31. 39. See in irpo- 
 no. 3. 
 
 ou, 6, (7rpo<pJ7/,) a prophet, 
 a foreteller of future events ; so in Greek 
 writers, Anacr. 43. 11. Plato Charm. 46. p. 
 174. C, TOVS 8e wy dX^Scif pavrtis ... Trpo- 
 <pf)ras T(OI> fj.f\\6vT(t)v. Hence also i. q. 6 
 pdiwis, pr. one who utters raving the re 
 sponses of an oracle, as Plato 1. c. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 13. 1. Hdot. 8. 36, 37; comp. Diod. 
 Sic. 16. 26 ; likewise an interpreter of the 
 gods or of 6 p.dvri.s , i. e. one who explains 
 the obscure oracles uttered by 6 pdvris, 
 Dion. Hal. Ant. 2. 73 ; espec. Plato Tim. 
 72. b ; comp. Diod. Sic. 1.2. In Sept. and 
 N. T. 6 irpo(pf)TT)s corresponds to Heb. 
 5023 , pr. one who speaks from a divine in 
 fluence, under inspiration, whether as fore 
 telling future events, or as exhorting, re 
 proving, threatening individuals or nations. 
 
 1. e. as the ambassador of God and the in 
 terpreter of his will to men ; comp. Ez. c. 
 
 2. Heb. Lex. art. &O33 . With the Jewish 
 use of N n 33 and jrpoeprjTrjr was connected 
 the idea, that the prophet spoke not his own 
 thoughts, but what he received from God, 
 retaining however his own consciousness 
 and self-possession ; see Philo Opp. IV. p. 
 116, PfeifF. irpo(pr)Tr)s yup i 5toi> p.ev ov8iv 
 dirotp SfyyeTcu dXXorpta Se irdvra vTrr]%ovtrros 
 (Tfpov. See also Ex. 7, 1. 2. 2 Pet. 1, 20. 
 21; espec. 1 Cor. 14, 32. In a wider 
 sense, Heb. fc* 1 ^, Sept. Trpofprjrrjs, is put 
 for any friend of God, to whom God makes 
 known his will, e. g. of Abraham, Gen. 20, 
 7; of the patriarchs, Ps. 105, 15. Hence 
 in N. T. 
 
 1. Of the prophets of the O. T. a) Pr. 
 as Isaiah, Matt. 1, 22. 3, 3. Luke 3, 4. 
 John 1, 23. al. Jeremiah, Matt. 2, 17. 27, 
 9; Joel, Acts 2, 16; Micah, Matt. 2, 5; 
 Jonah, Matt. 12, 39. Luke 11, 29 ; Zecha- 
 riah, Matt. 21, 4; Daniel, Matt. 24, 15. 
 Mark 13j 14. So of Samuel, Acts 13, 20 ; 
 David, Acts 2, 30 ; Elisha, Luke 4, 27 ; 
 Asaph, Matt. 13, 35 ; also of Balaam, 2 Pet. 
 2, 16, comp. Num. c. 22. Plur. genr. Matt. 
 2, 23. 5, 12. 23, 29 sq. Mark 8, 28. Luke 
 
 1, 70. Rom. 1, 2. Heb. 1,1. James 5, 10. 
 1 Pet. 1, 10. al. So Sept. and N nj i K. 
 16, 7. 12. Is. 38. 1. ssep. So Ecclus. 48, 1. 
 
 22. 2 Mace. 15, 14. Jos. Ant. 6. 2. 1. ib. 
 6. 3. 1 6 8e 7rpo(pf)TTjs 2ap.ovrj\os. b) Me- 
 ton. a prophetic book, the prophetic books of 
 the O. T. i. q. at y pa(pal TU>V TrpofprjTiov 
 Matt. 26, 56. So genr. Matt. 5, 17 *cara- 
 Xverai rov vop.ov, 77 roiis TrpotpijTay. Mark 1, 
 
 2. Luke 16, 29. 31. 24, 27. 44. Acts 28, 
 
 23. Rom. 3, 21. Acts 8, 28 dvtyivoxrKt 
 rov -rrpo<p. Ha-atav. Synced, put for the 
 doctrines and declarations contained in the 
 
638 
 
 prophetic books, Matt. 7, 12. 22, 40. Acts 
 26, 27. (2 Mace. 15, 9.) Here 6 TO/HOS na\ 
 ot irpo<pr)Tat. comprise the whole O. T. and 
 the latter therefore include the Psalms ; 
 which elsewhere are also distinguished, as 
 Luke 24, 44 vopos KOI Trpcx^Tm *al ^raX/iot ; 
 see in i/o /nof no. 2. c. 
 
 2. Genr. of persons acting by a divine 
 commission as prophets and ambassadors of 
 God under the new dispensation, i. q. a 
 teacher sent from God ; e. g. Matt. 10, 41 
 6 Sr^ojuei/oy Trpo(j)r)TT)v els ovop.a 7rpo(pT]Tov 
 KT\. 13, 57. Mark 6, 4. Luke 4, 24. 13, 
 33. John 7, 52. Rev. 11, 10. 16,6. 18,20. 
 24. al. Spec, of John the Baptist, Matt. 
 
 11, 9. 14, 5. Mark 11, 32. Luke 1, 76. 20, 
 6. al. Of Jesus, Matt. 21, 11 OVTOS to-Tiv 
 6 I. 6 TrpofprjTTjs. v. 46. Luke 7, 16. 39. 
 24, 19. John 9, 17. Of the Messiah as 6 
 7rpo(J)r]TT)s 6 fp^6fj.evos els TOV Kooy*oj/ John 
 6, 14, in allusion to Deut. 18, 15; so John 
 1, 21. 25. 7, 40. Acts 3, 22. 23. 7, 37. 
 Comp. 1 Mace. 4,46. 14, 41. 
 
 3. Spec, of those who possessed the pro 
 phetic gift or Charisma imparted by the 
 Holy Spirit to the primitive churches, a 
 prophet, i. e. a class of instructors or preach 
 ers, who were next in rank to the apostles 
 and before the teachers, SiSdo-KaXot, 1 Cor. 
 
 12, 28. They seem to have differed from 
 the 8i8do-ica\oi in this, that while the latter 
 spoke in a calm, connected, didactic dis 
 course, adapted to instruct and enlighten 
 the hearers, the prophet spoke more from 
 the impulse of immediate inspiration, from 
 the light of a sudden revelation at the mo 
 ment (aTTOKaXv^is 1 Cor. 14, 30 comp. 26), 
 and his discourse was probably more adapt 
 ed by means of powerful exhortations to 
 awaken the feelings and conscience of the 
 hearers. The idea of speaking from an 
 immediate revelation seems here to be fun 
 damental, as relating either to future events 
 or to the mind of the Spirit in general ; 
 comp. Acts 11, 27. 21, 10. So Acts 13, 1 
 TrpcxpJjrai KOL StSacTKaXot. 1 Cor. 12, 28 
 e Sero 6 Seoj ev rrj eK/cX^crta irp&rov aT 
 \ovs, BevTfpov Trpo(f)rjTas, Tpirov 
 
 \ovs KT\. v. 29. 14,29. 32. 37. Eph. 2,20. 
 3, 5. 4, 11. See Neander Gesch. der apostol. 
 Zeitalt. I. p. 194 sq. [Engl. I. p. 154 sq.] 
 
 4. In the Greek usage, (see init.) a pro 
 phet, spoken of the Cretan poet Epimenides, 
 Tit. 1, 12; so called as one of the seven 
 wise men of Greece ; as sent for by Solon 
 to aid in the preparation of his laws ; and 
 especially also as SetxpiXiys KCU crcxpbs Trepl 
 TO. Sela TTJV fv^ov(naa-TLKT]v KCU Te\f<TTiKT)v 
 <ro(j)iav, Plut. Soloc 12 -f- 
 
 7Tpo^>rjTiffO<f, 77, 6v, (npo(pfjTT)s, ) pro 
 phetic, belonging to or uttered by prophets, 
 Rom. 16, 26. 2 Pet. 1, 19. Luc. Alex. 60. 
 
 TTpoffiTtS, iSoy, 17, (Trpo^ijnjs,) a pro 
 phetess, i. e. in the Greek sense the inter 
 preter or priestess of a god, oracle, Diod. 
 Sic. 16. 26. Plut. de Pyth. Orac. 7. In 
 Sept. and N. T. i. q. ""V^J > comp. in TT/TO- 
 (>r)Tr]s init. 
 
 1. Pr. a prophetess, as speaking and act 
 ing from a divine influence, an ambassadress 
 from God, Rev. 2, 20. Sept. and !"i!O3D 
 Judg. 4, 4. 2 K. 22, 14. 2 Chr. 34, 22* 
 
 2. Spec, a female friend of God, one who 
 lives in communion with God, to whom 
 God reveals himself by his Spirit, Luke 2, 
 36. So Abraham is called TrpcxprjTrjs, X^as 
 Gen. 20, 7 ; comp. Ps. 105, 15. Tob. 4, 12. 
 
 irpo^Kfdvw^ f. do-oj, (<3dz>o>.) to come 
 or get before, to anticipate one in doing any 
 thing, e. g. in speaking, c. ace. Matt. 17, 
 25. Sept. for MR 2 Sam. 22, 19. Ps. 17, 
 13. ^Eschyl. Agam. 1028 7rpo$3a<jao-a 
 Kap8ia y\Hrj-<Tav. Plato Rep. 500. a. 
 
 Trpo^eipi^oiMit, f. iVo/icu, Mid. depon. 
 (xetptfo), x e P ) lo hand forth, to take in 
 hand, to make ready, Dem. 45. 10. Diod. 
 Sic. 15. 15. In N. T. trop. to prepare, to 
 choose, to appoint, c. ace. et inf. Acts 22, 
 14 Trpoe^etpi craro ere yvaivai TO Se X^/xa au- 
 TOV. 2H. 16 Tj-poxetpiVacrSai tre [eiVai] virr]- 
 ptTTjv. Pass. perf. in passive sense, c. dat. 
 Acts 3, 2D in later edit. comp. Buttm. 113. 
 n. 6. Sept. for H|?b J os h. 3, 12. So 2 Mace. 
 3, 7. Pol. 1. 11. 3. Diod. Sic. 12. 27. Pass, 
 perf. Pol. 3. 40. 14. 
 
 Trpo%6ipoTove(0, , f. 170-0), (XPOTO- 
 i/eo),) to choose before, first, Dem. 703. 18. 
 Plato Legg. 765. b, c. In N. T. to choose 
 beforehand; Pass. Acts 10,41 fidprvvi rols 
 TrpoKfxeipoTovrjfjifiiois vrrb TOV 3eoO, i. e. fore- 
 chosen. 
 
 IIpoxppos, ov, 6, Prochorus, pr. n. of 
 one of the seven primitive deacons at Jeru 
 salem, Acts 6, 5. 
 
 7TpV[J,VCl, rjs, fj, (TrpVfJLVos,) i. q. 77 Trpv^ivr) 
 vavs, the hindmost part of a ship, the stern, 
 Mark 4, 38. Acts 27, 29. 41. Pol. 1. 49. 
 11. Xen. An. 5. 8. 20. Comp. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 331. 
 
 Trpwl , adv. (Trpo,) 1. early, early in the 
 day, early morn, Lat. mane ; pr. between 
 day-break and sunrising (Mark 1, 35 comp. 
 John 20. 1), parall. opSpor Luke 24, 1. 
 Absol. Matt. 16, 3. M!ark 1, 35. 11, 20. 16, 
 9. John 20, 1. On Mark 16, 2, see also in 
 17X10*. Sept. for i^ 2 1 K. 3, 21. Is. 5, 1 1 : 
 
639 
 
 oftener TO irpwt Ex. 8, 20. Is. 37, 36. al. 
 So JEl. V. II. 3. 23. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 10 ; 
 TO 7iy>. Hell. 1. 1. 30. With, prepositions: 
 Sfta irpui Matt. 20, 1, see in apa. no. 2; 
 uiro irpatt Acts 28. 23, see in dno no. 2. c. 
 8; (irl TO Trpou Mark 15, 1, comp. Buttm. 
 5 125. 7. So Sept. r TO irp. Ex. 16, 19. 
 Lev. 7, 5; tv ro> ?rp. Ecc. 11, 6. Comp. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 46 sq. According to 
 Theophr. Fr. 6. 1. 9, irpvi was the forenoon, 
 between sunrise and noon. 
 
 2. Melon, the morning icatch, beginning 
 at the 9th hour of the night or day-break, 
 Mark 13, 35 ; see in (pvXaicr] no. 4. 
 
 Trputi d, see in Trpcoi os. 
 
 Trp&H/zo?, r), O v, (TTpou,) early, spoken of 
 the early rain, vfTor np. James 5, 7 ; see 
 fully in o^i/ioy. Sept. v. irp. for i"n"H C^a 
 Dent. 11, 14. Jer. 5, 24. Arr. Peripl. 
 Eryth. p. 157. Xen. (Ec. 17. 4. A poetic 
 and later form instead of Att. Trpouos, Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 52. 
 
 Trpwtvos, Tj, 6i>, (Trpwi,) early, morning 
 Rev. 2, 28 TOV doWpa TOV nptaivov. Rev 
 22, 16 in later edit, for Rec. op3pii>dj. Sept. 
 for lf?i Ex. 29, 49. Hos. 6, 4. Athen. 1. 
 41. Plut. Symp. 8. 6. 5. A late form, Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 52. 
 
 Trpwlos, ta, lov, (Trpwi,) earh/, morning, 
 Aristoph. Pax 1001, 1164. Hdot. 8. 6; 
 comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 52. In N. T. only 
 f) Trpaia (copa), the morning hour, morning, 
 pr. between day-break and sunrise, (Matt. 
 28, 1. Mark 16, 2. Luke 24, 1. John 20, 1) ; 
 Matt. 21,18 TTpcoTur 8e (iravayuiv els rr/v iro- 
 \iv. 27, 1. John 18, 28 Rec. 21, 4. Sept. 
 for 13 2 Sam. 23, 4. Lam. 3, 23. So Jos. 
 Ant. 7. 8. 1 ; fully Luc. Amor. 39 Trpauar 
 a>pas. 
 
 Trpcapa, as, fj, (Trpd,) the forward part of 
 a ship, (he prow, Acts 27, 30. 41. Hdian. 
 1. 11. 12. Xen. An. 5. 8. 20. 
 
 Trpcareva), f. evo-w, (rrpwrof,) to be the 
 first, chief, to hold the first rank, highest 
 dignity, iv ira<nv Col. 1, 18. 2 Mace. 6, 
 18. Hdian. 8. 7. 3. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 24. 
 
 as, f), (TrpoJTOj, KaSt- 
 3pa.) thf first seal, the chief seat, Matt. 23,6. 
 Mark 1 J, 39. Luke 11, 43. 20, 46. Not 
 found in the classics. 
 
 at, f], (irpuros, 
 pr. the first reclining-place at table, the chief 
 place al meals, the middle place on each 
 couch of the triclinium, Matt. 23, 6. Mark 
 12, 39. Luke [11, 43.] 14, 7. 8. 20, 46. 
 See in uva.Ktip.ai. no. 2. Adam s Rom. Ant. 
 p. 436. Diet, of Antt. art. Triclinium. 
 
 T], ov, superlat. from Trpd, com 
 par. Trpdrepor, as if contr. for TrpdraTor, Trpd- 
 aTor, Buttm. $ 69. 2 ; pr. foremost. 
 
 1. Genr. first, the first, of place, order, 
 time. a) Pr. and without art. Mark 16, 
 9 TrpcjTfl a-afifiaTov sc. r/p.(pq. Phil. 1, 5 
 OTTO TrptaTT/s f)p.(pas. Luke 2, 2 see in KvpT^- 
 i/tof. Phil. 1,5. 1 Cor. 15, 3 eV irpwrois, 
 i. q. first of all. Foil, by Sei/repos Acts 12, 
 10. Sept. for yitiX"!, Ex. 12, 15. Josh. 21, 
 10; iv irpa>Tots Gen. 33, 2. 1 Chr. 11, 6. 
 So Hdian. 4. 15. 10. Dem. 328. 25. With 
 the art. comp. in 6, f/, TO, A. 2. b. 8 ; Matt. 
 26, 17 T/7 8e Trpom; TU>V d^\ip.a>v, sc. Tjp.epq. 
 Mark 14, 12 rfj trp. Tjp-fpq TU>V d. (Sept. 
 Lev. 23, 35. 40. Xen. HelL 3. 1. 17. An. 4. 
 8. 1.) Acts 1, 1 TOV irpu>Tov \6yov. 1 Cor. 
 15, 45. Heb. 9, 2 17 rrptonj o-Kr/i/q. v. 6. 8. 
 Rev. 1,17 6 TrpwTos KOI 6 eo-^aTor, see in 
 eo-xaror no. 2. c. Rev. 4, 1. 7. 8, 7. al. So 
 
 01 irpStToi the first Matt. 20, 8. 10. 21, 
 36; Ta TrpaiTa pr. the first things, i. e. the 
 first or former state, condition, Matt. 12, 
 45. 2 Pet. 2, 20. Rev. 21,4. Also 1 Tim. 
 5, 12 17 Trpom; TTICTTIS, i. e. first or originally 
 professed. Rev. 2, 4 dycnrTjv TIJV TrpvTrjv. v. 
 
 5. Opp. Katvos Heb. 8, 13. Rev. 21, 1. 
 Sept. for Titian 2 Chr. 3, 3. Dan. 8, 21. 
 
 2 Sam. 18, 27. (Hdian. 1. 17. 17. Xen. An. 
 
 6. 5. 2, 5.) In division or distribution, 6 
 npuros ... 6 8tvrfpos Matt. 22, 25 ; 6 7rpo>- 
 TOS ... 6 erepos Luke 14, 18. 19, 16; so 
 where only two are spoken of, Matt. 21, 
 28. John 19, 32. 1 Cor. 14, 30. Heb. 8, 7. 
 So Diod. Sic. 1. 50 fin. Xen. Hell. 3. 1. 17. 
 b) In an adverbial sense, comp. Buttm. { 123. 
 6. Matt. 10, 2 irpuTos, 2i>o>i/ KT\. 17, 27. 
 John 1 , 42 fvpio-Kfi OVTOS Trpovror TOI" uSe \<pov 
 KT\. 8,7. Acts 26, 23. Rom. lO, 19. 1 John 
 4, 19. So Hdian. 1. 8. 4. Diod. Sic. 1. 50 
 init. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 2. c) In a compara 
 tive sense, instead of nportpos, adverbially 
 as in lett. b; so before a gen. John 1, 15. 
 30 OTC rrpwTos p.ov TJV. 15, 18 epe TrpuTov 
 vp.d>v. Comp. Herm. ad. Vig. p. 717 sq. 
 Passow no. 3. Matth. $ 464. Winer 5 36. n. 
 4. So ./El. H. An. 8. 12 of Trpcoroi p.ov rav- 
 ra dvtxvfvcravTfs. Athen. 14. 28. p. 630. c. 
 Dion. Hal. de Comp. 17. p. 228 Schacf. 
 Schol. ad Aristoph. Nub. 552. p. 242 Din- 
 dorf. 
 
 2. Trop. of rank, dignity, first, chvf; so 
 without the art. Matt. 20, 27 os tav Z&r, tv 
 vplv dvai TrpwTOf. 22, 38. Mark 12, 30. 
 Acts 16, 12. Eph. 6, 2. W T ith a gen. partit. 
 Mark 10, 44. 12, 28 npuiTrj ndvru>v fvrdXrj. 
 v. 29. 30. 1 Tim. 1, 15. So Sept. Ez. -11, 
 22. Dem. 1263. 25. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 6; c. 
 gen. part. JEA. V. H. 7. 14. Dem 13. 38 
 
640 
 
 With the art. Acts 17, 4 yvvainav re TVV 
 TpwTuv OVK 6\iyai. Luke 15, 22. (Sept. 
 Jer. 52, 21. Pol. 11. 10. 2.) So 6 TrpcSror, 
 ot Trpeorot, ilie. first, the chief, before a 
 gen. of a country or people; Acts 28, 7 
 T Trpcorw TTJS vrjcrov. Mark 6, 21 rots 7rpo>- 
 TOLS Trjs TaXiXaias. Luke 19, 47 ot Trpwrot 
 rov\aov. Acts 13, 50. 25,2. 28,17. Sept. 
 for tfl&b Neh. 12, 45. So Jos. Ant. 7. 9. 
 8. ib. 10. 4. 5. Pol. 1. 31. 5. Xen. Yen. 1. 
 9. In the proverbial phrase : TroXXol eo-ov- 
 rai Trpwrot, ecr^aroi KOI ecr^aroi, TrpcSrot ; 
 also e o-ovrai ot eo-^arot, rrpwroi Kal ol TrpcS- 
 rot, eo-^arot ; the first shall be last, and the 
 last first, i. e. those who seem or claim to 
 be first, shall be last, Matt. 19, 30. 20, 16. 
 Mark 10, 31. Luke 13, 30. 
 
 3. Neut. TTpiuTov as adverb, Buttm. 
 5 1 15. 4. a) Pr. of place, order, time, usu 
 ally without the article ; Matt. 17, 10 TI ... 
 \eyovcriv, on HXt ai/ SfT e XSeti 7rp5>TOV ; V. 
 
 11. Mark 7, 27. Luke 9, 59. 61. John 18, 
 13. Acts 15, 14. 1 Cor. 11, 18. 1 Pet. 4, 17. 
 2 Tim. 2, 6, comp. Winer 65. p. 640. 
 Acts 7, 12 i. q. the first time. (Pol. 1. 43. 2. 
 Hdian. 1. 11. 3. Xen. An. 3. 4. 32.) Em- 
 phat. i. q. first of all, before all, Matt. 23, 26 
 KaSapKrov rrpcarov TO evros TOV Trorrjpiov. 
 Acts 13, 46. Rom. 1, 8 Trpcoroi/ pev fv%api- 
 OTW TW 3o. 1 Cor. 11, 18. (Hdian. 2. 1. 
 8. Xen. Cyr. 4.. 1. 2.) In division or dis 
 tribution, as referring to a* series or succes 
 sion of circumstances, and followed by other 
 adverbs of order or time expressed or im 
 plied ; here some assign to it a comparative 
 sense, i. q. irporfpov, but unnecessarily ; see 
 Herm. ad Vig. p. 718. E. g. foil, by 8evTepov 
 1 Cor. 12, 28; etra, Mark 4, 28 np&Tov 
 \6pTov, dra ardxyv, etra KT\. By eneira 
 1 Thess. 4, 16. James 3, 17; p.era ravra 
 Mark 16, 9, comp. v. 12; /cat rore Matt. 5, 
 24. 7, 5. Mark 3, 27. Luke 6, 42. John 2, 
 10. In a like sense, irpa>Tov . . . Kai, Rom. 1, 
 16. 2, 9. 10. 2 Cor. 8, 5; irpArov . . . 8e 
 Matt. 13, 30. Luke 10, 5. 2 Tim. 1,5. (So 
 foil, by ttra Hdian. 2. 1. 22; eneira Xen. 
 Cyr. 7. 2. 24. Hi. 11. 8 ; pera TO.VTCI Xen. 
 An. 6. 1. 5, comp. 7; oV Cyr. 8. 1. 16.) 
 Rarely with art.ro ir p T o v, first, at first, 
 formerly, comp. Buttm. 125. n. 8. John 10, 
 40 OTTOV TJV laidvvTjs TO irpurov fianTifav. 
 
 12, 16. 19, 39. So Hdian. 6. 3. 11. Xen. 
 Cyr. 151. b) Trop. of importance, 
 dignity, first, first of all, chiejly, especially ; 
 Matt. 6, 33 V;reire 8e TrpuTOV TTJV /SacrtXetaz 
 TOV 3eoC. Rom. 3, 2. 2 Pet. 1, 20. 3, 3 ; 
 TrpatTov iravr&v 1 Tim. 2, 1. + 
 
 7r/9WTOCTTa,T?79) ou, 6, (Trpcoros, MTPf/U,) 
 pr. one who stands first, in the front rank of 
 
 an army, Sept. Job 15, 24. Pol. IS. 12. 5, 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 57. In N. T. trop. a lead 
 er, ringleader-, TIJS a/ pe o-ecos Acts 24, 5. 
 
 TTpCOTOTOKta, coi/, ra, (TTpwroroKoy,) the 
 right of the first-born, birthright, Heb. 12, 
 16. Sept. Vatic, for fnina Gen. 25, 32. 
 33. 34 ; other copies 7rpa>roro/<eia. 
 
 TrpWTOTOtfo?, ov, 6, 17, adj. (npS>Tos, 
 nVrco,) first-born, i. e. 
 
 1. Pr. the first-born of a father or mo 
 ther ; Matt. 1, 25 vibv avTrjs TOV TTPMTOTOKOV. 
 Luke 2, 7 ; also of animals, Heb. 11, 28. 
 The first-born son, besides his other prero 
 gatives, received a double portion of the 
 inheritance, Deut. 21, 17. Sept. for niaa 
 Gen. 27, 19. 32 ; of animals Ex. 1, 5. 12 , 
 12. 29. Anthol. Gr. IV. p. 236. Isidor. 3. 
 31 ; comp. Wetstein N. T. II. p. 282. 
 
 2. Trop. first-born, i. q. the fir sf, the chief, 
 one highly distinguished and pre-eminent ; 
 so of Christ, as the beloved Son of God, 
 Col. 1, 15 comp. v. 16. Heb. 1, 6 comp. v. 
 5. Or in relation to his followers, Rom. 8, 
 29 els TO flvai avTW Trpwr. ev TroXXots d&eX- 
 $019, comp. Col. 1, 18. Or as the first to 
 rise from the dead, the leader and prince of 
 those who shall arise unto eternal life, Col. 
 1,18. Rev. 1,5. So Sept. for Tisa of the 
 Messiah, Ps. 89, 27. Of the saints in hea 
 ven, prob. those formerly distinguished on 
 earth by the favour and love of God, as pa 
 triarchs, prophets, apostles ; Heb. 12, 23 
 fKK\T](ria TrpcororoKcoJ aTroyeypa/^/neVcov ev 
 rots ovpavols. Sept. for "1132 of Israel Ex. 
 
 4, 22 ; of Ephraim Jer. 31, 9. So Psalt. 
 Salom. 13, 8. 18, 4. 
 
 Trraift), f. t o-w, to stumble, to fall, Hdian. 
 
 5. 6. 18. Sept. for 515? 1 Sam. 4, 2. 2 Sam. 
 18, 7. In N. T. trop. to stumble, i. e. 
 
 1. to err, to fail in duty, to offend, with 
 ev C. dat. James 2, 10. 3, 2 el TLS ev Xoyo) 
 ov TTTaiti. Absol. Rom. 11, 11 ^17 enraia-av, 
 Iva Treo-wa-i ; with TroXXd adv. James 3, 2. 
 Sept. for ^3 Deut. 7, 25. Ecclus. 37, 
 12. M. Antonin. 7. 15 i Sto^ av Spumov (piKelv 
 
 K.a TOVS TTTa 
 
 2. to fail, to fall short of success and 
 happiness, 2 Pet. 1, 10. Pol. 1. 35. 3. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 1. 26. 
 
 TTTepva, TJS, T], the heel; John 13, 18 
 eirfipev eV epe Trjv TTTepvav, see in eVm pco, 
 quoted from Ps. 41, 10 where Heb. 3^5, 
 Sept. KTfpvio-fj.6v. Sept. for 2pS Gen. 3, 
 15. 25, 26. Horn. II. 22. 397. Dem. 88.2 
 Aristot. H. A. 1. 15. 6. 
 
 Trrepvyiov, lov, TO, (dim. 7rre pu,) a little 
 wing, winglet, Sept. for 5)33 1 K. 6, 23 ; 
 
irrepv!; 
 
 641 
 
 and so of the feather of an arrow Pol. 27. 
 9. 4. Then any thing like a wing, running 
 to a point, e. g. a Jin, Sept. for *^B?O Lev. 
 11,9. 10. 12 ; the corner or skirt of a gar 
 ment, Sept. for S]33 Num. 15, 36. 1 Sam. 
 24, 5. In N. T. a pinnacle, spoken of the 
 highest point of the temple-buildings, prob. 
 the elevation of the middle portion of the 
 southern portico impending over the valley 
 of Jehoshaphat ; see in itpov no. 1 . Matt. 
 4, 5. Luke 4, 9. 
 
 TTTepvg, vyos, 17, (rrTf/joV,) a pinion, 
 wing, Matt. 23, 27. Luke 13, 34. Rev. 4, 8. 
 9, 9. 12, 14. Sept. for 13 Ps. 55, 7 ; C|33 
 Ex. 19, 4. Ez. 1,6. Dem. 1259. 21. Xen. 
 An. 1. 5. 3. 
 
 TTTIJVOS) 17, 6v, (TTT^VOI, 7reVo/MU,) flying, 
 winged, Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 11 KCU at ptv eXa- 
 (ftoi, wa-nep imjvai. In N. T. Plur. neut. 
 ra irrnvd, the birds, fords, 1 Cor. 15, 39. 
 So Hdian. 3. 9. 10. Xen. Hell. 4. 1. 16. 
 
 TTToeo), w, f. 170-0), to terrify, to frighten ; 
 Pass, to be terrified, agitated with fear ; 
 Luke 21, 9 /if] TrrorjSfjre. 24, 37. Sept. for 
 Tin Ex. 19, 16 ; Finn i Chr. 28, 30. Jos. 
 B J. 1. 30. 4. Plut. Alcib. 10. Pol. 10. 42. 4. 
 . 7TT077cri9, eas, T), (TTTOf w,) a frightening, 
 tei ror,fear ; 1 Pet. 3, 6 prj (j)oj3ovfjLevoi firj- 
 8 *iit> irrorjfriv, fearing no fear, no fright- 
 eninw ; comp. <o/3. <o /3oi> piyav in Mark 
 4, 41. Buttm. 5131. 4. Sept. for T]D 
 Prov. 3, 25. 1 Mace. 3, 25. Diod. Sic. 20. 
 G6. Plut. de Isid. et Osir. 14. 
 
 HYoAe/iaiV, idos, f), Plolemais, a mari 
 time city of Palestine, reckoned to Galilee 
 (Jos. B. J. 2. 10. 2), situated on the bay 
 north of Mount Carmel, Acts 21,7. Heb. 
 is? Acco, Sept. Ax&>> Jud ?- 1> 31 ; called 
 also by the Greeks "A.KTJ Diod. Sic. 19. 93. 
 Strabo 16. 2. 25. p. 758. The name Plo- 
 lemais was prob. introduced about the time 
 of the Romans ; Strabo 1. c. Jos. Ant. 13. 
 12. 2. B. J. 2. 10. 2. Now called Akko 
 by the Arabs ; and by Europeans Acre, St. 
 Jean d Acre. See Reland Palaest. p. 534 sq. 
 Roscnm. Bibl. Geog. II. ii. p. 60. 
 
 TTTVOV, ov, TO, (TTTVO), ) a winnowing- 
 fork, winnowing-shovel,fan, Lat. pala, with 
 which grain was thrown up against the 
 wind in order to cleanse it, Matt. 3, 12. 
 Luke 3, 17. At the present day in Syria 
 the instrument used is a large wooden fork ; 
 Bibl. Res. in Pal. II. p. 277, 371. Diet, of 
 Antt. art. Pala. Hesych. TTTVOV 2pi ra, 
 v\ov tv w fitax<Bpiovcri TOV CT ITOV dnb rov 
 dxvpov. Artemid. 2. 24. Theocr. 7. 156. 
 The later Attic form was TTTIOV, Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 321. 
 
 41 
 
 TTTVpto, f. pa>, (kindr. Trroew,) to terrify, 
 to frighten, Pass. Phil. 1, 28. Plut. Fab. 
 Max. 3. Diod. Sic. 17. 34, 57, 58. Plato 
 Ax. 370. a. 
 
 7TTV<TfAa, aros, TO, (TTTUW,) spittle, John 
 9, 6. Pol. 8. 14. 5. 
 
 TTTt/crcra), f. , to fold, to fold or roll 
 together, e. g. TO /3i/3\i oi> q. v. Luke 4, 20. 
 Jos. Ant. 10. 1. 4. Hdian. 1. 17. 1. Plut 
 Romul. 14 med. 
 
 TTTVCI), f. o-o), to spit, to spit out, absol. 
 Mark 7, 33 ; ets n 8, 23 ; xA"" John 9 > 6 - 
 Sept. c. eiy TI for P^ Num. 12, 4. So 
 r Tt Jos. Ant. 5. 9. 4. Luc. Navig. 15; 
 absol. Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 42. 
 
 irru>p,a. aros, TO , (TT/TTTW,) a fall, JE\. V. 
 H. 9. 31 ; trop. downfall, ruin, Sept. Job 
 18, 12. Plut. Agesi. 33. Meton. any thing 
 fallen, ruins, e. g. of a wall, building, Pol. 
 16. 31. 8. Diod. Sic. 18. 70 bis. In N. T. 
 a dead body, carcass, corpse. Matt. 24, 28 
 OTTOU yap (av y TO irrcofia, txd vvvayfiriiTov- 
 rai 01 aeToi. Mark 6,29. Rev. [14, 12.] 11, 
 8. 9. Sept. for "^B Ez. 6, 5. So Jos. Ant. 
 7. 1. 3. Hdian. 4. 6. 2. Dion. Hal. Ant. 4. 39. 
 Eurip. Orest. 1195. Phrynichus says this 
 word was used absol. in this sense only in 
 late writers, instead of the earlier irrupa 
 vKpov, comp. Phryn. et Lob. p. 375 sq. 
 Thorn. Mag. p. 765. 
 
 TTTcScrt?, ewr, T], (TUTTTW,) a fall, down 
 fall, crash, e. g. of a falling building, Matt. 
 7, 27. So Diod. Sic. 3. 57. Pol. 2. 16. 3. 
 Trop. downfall, ruin, Luke 2, 34 els irra>- 
 tn.v, i. e. a cause of fall and ruin, comp. in 
 dvda-Tacris no. 1. So Ecclus. 5, 13 -yXcoo-o-a 
 di/3pco7rou TTTuxns ai>Tw. Genr. Sept. Jer. 
 6, 15. Ecclus. 3, 31. Anth. Gr. III. p. 130, 
 137. 
 
 TTTW^e/a, as, 77. (TJTCOXOS,) begging, beg 
 gary, Lys. 898. 9. In N. T. poverty, want ; 
 2 Cor. 8, 2 f] Kara /3a3o? Tirade" 1 , deep P- 
 verlij. Also a state of poverty and humilia 
 tion, 2 Cor. 8, 9. Rev. 2, 9. Sept. for 
 niJSGO Deut. 8, 9 ; n ? 2 Chr. 22, 14. 
 Ecclus. 10, 31. 11, 12. Plato Legg. 936. b. 
 
 Trreo^euo), f. (va-u>, (Tmoxo r,) to beg, U 
 be a beggar, Luc. Necyom. 17. Plut. Moral. 
 II. p. 169. In N. T. to be or become poor, 
 to be in a state of poverty and humiliation, 
 absol. 2 Cor. 8, 9 ; comp. Phil. 2, 7. Sept. 
 for bb n Ps. 79, 8; Jsn Ps. 34, 11. So 
 Tob. 4, T 21. Plato Eryx. 394. b. 
 
 TTTto^o?, ij, ov, (TTTCOO-O-W,) begging, beg 
 garly, poor, pr. crouching, cringing in the 
 manner of beggars. 
 
 1. Pr. and often as Subst. a) 6 TTTW- 
 
642 
 
 7TV\1) 
 
 Xos, a beggar, mendicant, Luke 14, 13. 21. 
 16, 20 irra>x s Se TIS rjv ovofiari Adfapos- 
 v. 22. John 9, 8 in Erasm. ed. 2. Trop. 
 Rev. 3, 17. So Luc. Somn. s. Gall. 14. 
 Dem. 574. 19. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 29 Trpocrm- 
 Tfiv &<rirep roi/s Trrw^ovr. b) oiTrrtu^ot, 
 the poor, the needy, those destitute of the 
 necessaries of life and subsisting on the 
 alms of others; Matt. 19, 21 86s TH-W^OIS. 
 26, 9 8o^fjvai TOIS irra>xpis. V. 11. Mark 10, 
 21. 14, 5. 7. Luke 18, 22. 19, 8. John 12, 
 5. 6. 8. 13, 29. So Sept. and TP3X Esth. 
 9, 22. Prov. 31, 20; n Prov. 28, 27. 
 c) Genr. poor, needy, i. q. TT/WJS, spoken of 
 honest poverty as opp. to the rich, without 
 the idea of mendicity ; e. g. pia xnP a T^T^X^ 
 Mark 12, 42. 43. Luke 21, 3 ; and so Rom. 
 15, 26. 2 Cor. 6, 10. Gal. 2, 10. James 2, 
 2. 3. 5. 6. Rev. 13, 16. Sept. and ^ Lev. 
 19, 15. Prov. 29, 14 ; ^ Prov. 22, 7. So 
 Ecclus. 13, 3. 30, 14. 
 
 2. Spec, and from the Heb. poor, low, 
 humble, of low estate, including also the 
 idea of being afflicted, distressed. Luke 4,18 
 f\pi<rt p.e evayyfXuracr3cu TTTCO^OIS, quoted 
 from Is. 61, 1 where Sept. for &V3. Matt. 
 11, 5 et Luke 7, 22 TTTW^OI cvayycXtfovrat. 
 Sept. for p CX Ps. 109, 16 ; 1 Ps, 69, 33. 
 Is. 29, 19. Trop. Matt. 5, 3 ot TTTCOXOI T<B 
 Trvfvp.aTi, the poor in spirit, those who feel 
 themselves spiritually poor and afflicted, the 
 lowly in mind and heart. Luke 6, 20. Comp. 
 n ?-J ; Sept. rairfivos, Is. 66, 2. 
 
 3. Trop. of things, beggarly, poor, imper 
 fect ; Gal. 4, 9 Tirana oroi^eTa. 
 
 TrvyfMJ, jjs, T), (TTV,) the fist, Sept. for 
 Spiax Ex. 21, 8. Is. 58, 4. Horn. II. 23. 
 669 ; also fisting, boxing, i. q. wvypaxia, 
 Xen. Mag. Eq. 8. 7. In N. T. Mark 7, 3 
 tav p.T] irvynfj vfyovrai ras x e ^pas, lit. unless 
 they icash, their hands (rubbing them) with 
 the fist, i. e. not merely dipping the fingers 
 or hand in water as a sign of ablution, but 
 rubbing the hands together as a ball or fist, 
 in the usual oriental manner when water is 
 poured over them (2 K. 3, 11), see in vi- 
 TTTw ; hence ad sensum, sedulously, care 
 fully, diligently ; so the Syr. Version, using 
 the same word by which it expresses eVtp,e- 
 Xois in Luke 15, 8. The Vulg. has crebro, 
 as if from a reading TTVKI^J, i. q. ITVKVO. or 
 irvKvus, of which there is no other trace. 
 An early interpretation makes it, to the 
 elbow, Theophylact. ad loc. viTrreo-Sai irvy- 
 nfj, TovTfcmv iixP l Tov UJKUIVOS. Euthym. 
 ad Matt. 15, 1. 
 
 Ilv^twv^ wj/os, 6, Python, in Greek my 
 thology the name of a serpent or dragon 
 
 slain by Apollo, JEl. V. H. 3. 1 ; then trans 
 ferred to Apollo himself, Anthol. Gr. I. p. 
 55 ; later, spoken of a diviner, soothsayer, 
 held to be inspired of the Pythian Apollo 
 Plut. de Defect. Orac. 9, rovs (yyavTpipv- 
 3ons, EvpvK\fas TrdXat, vuv\ HvSuvas irpoo- 
 ayopevopevovs. These ryyaorpi /ivSot or 
 Hv^avfs, i. e. ventriloquists, were so called, 
 because the god or spirit was supposed to 
 be in them and to speak from their bellies 
 without any motion of the lips ; Plutarch 
 
 1. C. TOV 3eoi/ avrov . . . (v8vop.(vov ds ra 
 (rco/xara ratv 7rpo(pT)T>v V7ro<p3eyye(r3e. 
 Galen. Glossar. Hippoc. eyyao-7-pt p.v3ot ot 
 KfK\fia-fj.fvov TOV ort)p,ar 
 
 8ia TO b oKf iv fK TTJS yaarpos 
 Hence Sept. fyyaarpi p.v3oj for Heb. *1X 
 Lev. 19, 31. 1 Sam. 28, 3. 8. 9 ; comp. 
 Heb. Lex. art. nix. In N. T. Acts 16, 16 
 tXovcra Trvevpa IIv3coi/of, having a spirit of 
 Python, i. e. a soothsaying demon. 
 
 TTVKVOS, r], 6v, (kindr. TTU^,) thick, firm, 
 solid, 3 Mace. 4, 10. Horn. Od. 14. 12 ; 
 thick, dense, close together, Hdian. 8. 1. 13. 
 Xen. An. 2. 3. 3. In N. T. frequent, often, 
 1 Tim. 5, 23 8ia ras TrvKvds trot; dcrSei/fuif. 
 (Thuc. 1. 23. Xen. Eq. 9. 6.) Plur. neut. 
 d as adv. frequently, often, Luke 5, 33 
 cn TrvKvd. Comparat. iriKvorf- 
 pov, adv. Acts 24. 26 ; comp. Buttm. $ 115. 
 5. So TrvKvd JEl. V. H. 2. 21. Xen. Conv. 
 
 2. 26 ; irvKvoTfpov 2 Mace. 8, 8. Dem. 
 1035. 14. 
 
 7TVfCTV(t), f. evo-w, (nv, ) to fist, to box, 
 to fight as a boxer ; absol. 1 Cor. 9, 20 
 otmu TrvKTfvco is OVK dtpa 8(pa>v, see in 
 aiyp. Dem. 51. 24. Xen. Lac. 4. 6. 
 
 TTt/X?;, TJS, f), a door, gate, pr. one wing or 
 door of a folding gate at the entrance of an 
 edifice or city ; diff. from f] 3vpa a common 
 door. a) Genr. e. g. of the temple, wpcu a 
 irv\r] TOV It pov Acts 3, 10 ; of a prison, 12. 
 10 ; of a city, Luke 7, 12 777 TTV\T) TTJS n-oXe- 
 cos. Acts 9,24. [16, 13.] Heb. 13, 12. Trop. 
 Matt. 7, 13 bis. 14. Luke 13, 24 (comp. 
 Cebet. Tab. 15). Sept. of a building, for 
 nna Jer. 43, 9 ; of a city, for nb 1 -! Josh. 6, 
 26~ 2 Chr. 8, 5 ; ISIK Gen. 34J 20. 24. 
 So of an edifice, Hdian. 7. 10. 9. Xen. Cyr. 
 7. 5. 27 ; of a city Dion. Hal. Ant. 2. 50. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 7. b) Spec. ?rvXai 
 a8ov, the gales of Hades, meton. for Hades 
 itself, see in aBrjs, i. e. Hades with its pow 
 ers, Satan and his hosts ; Matt. 16, 18 rfjv 
 fKK\rjo-iav, Kul TrvXat aSov ou /cartcr^vcrovo-tf 
 aiiTjjs. The Hebrews, as well as the 
 Greeks and Romans, ascribed gates to 
 Sheol or Hades ; so Heb. 
 
643 
 
 Trvpa 
 
 t. TTvXat aoov, Is. 38, 10, comp. Ps. 9 
 14; also Wisd. 16, 13. 3 Mace. 5, 51 
 Horn. II. 5. 646. Eurip. Alcest 124. Luc 
 Necyom. 6. Lucret. 3. 67 Lethi portas. 
 
 TTvKoiV, (avos, 6, (TTvXr;,) a large door 
 gate, at the entrance of a building or city. 
 
 1. Genr. e. g. of a house, Acts 10, 17 
 fn(OTT)o-av eVi TOV nv\u>va. 12, 13 see in 
 Svpa no. 1. v. 14 bis. Of a city, Acts 14 
 13. Rev. 21, 12 bis. 13 quater. 15. 21 bis. 
 25. 22, 14. Sept. for nno , of a building, 
 1 K. 14, 27; of a city fit 17, 10. Jos. 
 Ant 18. 2. 2. Luc. Hermot. 11. Plut. Ti- 
 mol. 12 fin. 
 
 2. Synecd. a gale-way, portal, vestibule, 
 the deep arch or passage under which a gate 
 opens, Matt. 26, 71. Luke 16, 20. Sept. for 
 i? Judg. 18, 16. 17. Jos. Ant. 8. 3. 2. 
 Ceb. Tab. 1. Pol. 4. 18. 2. 
 
 TrvVjavOfJULt,, f. nfvo~ofjiai, aor. 2 tnv- 
 Sofjirjv, Mid. depon. 
 
 1. to ask, to inquire ; foil, by Trapa TIVOS 
 from or of any one, e. g. c. ace. John 4, 
 52 eVuSero ovv nap avTwv rfjv copav KT\. 
 Also with an indirect interr. Matt. 2, 4 tnvv- 
 Savero Trap avTtav, nov 6 Xp. yewarat. 
 Acts 10, 18. Sept. for uJ l n Gen. 25, 22. 
 (With ace. Jos. Vit. } 39. "Xen. Cyr. 4. 1. 
 3. Mem. 1. 1. 9 ; indir. Luc. Nigr. 1.) Ab- 
 sol. with a direct interr. Acts 4, 7. 10, 29 
 nvv Sdvofuit. ovv, TLVI Xoyo> (crX. 23, 19. 
 Also before an indir. interrog. with the Opt. 
 after a pneter, comp. Winer 42. 4. c. 
 Luke 15, 26 firvtfSdvtTo, TI eirj Tavra; 18, 
 36. John 13, 24. Acts 21, 33. So Xen. 
 An. 7. 1. 14. In a judicial sense, to in 
 quire, to examine, c. ace. et nfpi TIVOS, Acts 
 23, 20. So Pol. 23. 14. 2. Lys. 909. 8. 
 
 2. to inquire out, to find out, to learn ; 
 c. on, Acts, 23, 34 nvSop.tvos, on dno KtXt- 
 (ci ar. Palaeph. 41. 4. Hdian. 2. 1. 11. 
 Xen. Hell. 1. 1. 11. 
 
 Trvp, nvpos, TO, fire. 1 . Pr. and genr. 
 Matt. 3, 10 (cat tls nvp jSaXXfrai. V. 12. 7, 
 19. 13, 40. 17, 15. Mark 9, 22. Luke 3, 9. 
 17. 22, 55. John 15, 6. Acts 28, 5. Heb. 11, 
 34. James 3, 5. 5, 3. 1 Pet. 1, 7. 2 Pet. 3, 
 7. Rev. 3, 18. 8, 5 Vc TOV nvpos TOV 3uo-ta- 
 fTTrjpiov i. e. upon the altar, v. 8. 9, 17. 18. 
 11,5. 14,18. 15,2. 16,8. 17,16. 18,8. 
 Sept. for &5x Gen. 22, 6. 7. Ex. 32, 19. So 
 Jos. B. J. 3. 4. 1. Pol. 5. 8. 9. Xen. Mem. 4. 
 3. 7. Genit. nvpos often expresses quality 
 and takes the place of an adj. Buttm. $ 132. 
 n. 12. Winer j 34. 2 ; so <X6 nvpos flame 
 of fire, i. q. fiery flame, Acts 7, 30. Rev. 1, 
 14. 2, 18. 19, 12. Sept for o5x 3rtb Is. 
 29, 6 ; anfe 1TX Ps. 104, 4. So avfipanas 
 
 nvpos, burning coals, Rom. 12, 20, comp. 
 in av^paZ and Sept. Lev. 16, 12; y\S><ro-cu 
 loo-fl nvpos Acts 2, 3 ; \afj.nd8es nvpos Rev. 
 4, 5 ; o-rvXoi nvpos fiery pillars Rev. 10, 1 ; 
 comp. Sept. Ex. 13, 21. 22. Spoken of 
 fire from heaven, lightning ; e. g. dno TOV 
 ovpavov Luke 9, 54. 17, 29; TOV ovp. 
 Rev. 13, 13. 20, 9 ; absol. Heb. 1, 7. 12, 18. 
 Rev. 8, 7. Acts 2, 19 quoted from Joel 3, 
 3 [2, 30] where Sept. for rax . So Eurip 
 Phoen. 1191 nvp AtdV. Spec, of that fire 
 with which Christ is to appear in his com 
 ing to judgment, which also is to purify and 
 refine ; 2 Thess. 1 , 8 eV Trvpl <j>\ay6s . Also 
 1 Cor. 3, 13 bis, tv nvpl dnoKaXvnrfTai [fj 
 T]p.epa\ (cat tKaorou TO fpyov onoiov fo~rt, 
 TO nvp 8oKifjuio-fi. Hence also of the builder 
 (teacher) himself, v. l5avToso~e o-wSijo-erat, 
 OVTO> 8e ebf 8ia nvpos, he shall be saved so as 
 through the fire, i. e. as escaping through 
 the fire which destroys his work. The ex 
 pression is proverbial, implying with diffi 
 culty, scarcely ; Aristid. in Apell. p. 126 
 fK p,fo~ov nvpos TOV av8pa o~a>(iv. Comp. 
 genr. 2 Pet. 3, 7. 
 
 2. Symbolically: a) Of God as in 
 flicting punishment, Heb. 12, 29 6 3ffo 
 T)p.)v nvp KaTava\io-Kov. Comp. Deut. 4, 
 24. b) Of strife, disunion, Luke 12, 49. 
 So of the tongue as kindling strife and dis 
 cord, James 3, 6. c) Of evils, calamities, 
 trials, which purify the faith and hearts of 
 professed Christians, as the fire tries and 
 purifies the precious metals ; comp. 1 Pet. 
 1, 7 et Rev. 3, 18. Sept. Is. 10, 17. So 
 Mark 9, 49 see in dXi fw. Jude v. 23 see in 
 Tafco no. 2 ; comp. in no. 1 fin. d) 
 Of the infernal fire, the place of punishment 
 and abode of demons and the souls of wicked 
 men in Hades, represented under various 
 images, e. g. 6 KCL^IVOS TOV nvpos, a fiery 
 furnace, Matt. 13, 42. 50, in allusion to 
 Dan. 3, 6. 11. 15 sq. where Sept. for Chald. 
 SO*D "l^OX Also 17 yttwa TOV nvpos, see 
 in ytfvva, Matt. 5, 22. 18, 9. Mark 9, 47; 
 ro Trvp TO avfleo-Tov v. ov Qawnu Mark 
 9, 43. 44. 45. 46. 48 ; comp. Is. 66, 24 ; TO 
 vp TO alcaviov Matt. 18, 8. 25, 41. Jude 7 ; 
 Xt /iw? ToO nvpos Rev. 19, 20. 20, 10. 14 bis 
 15. 21, 8. Simpl. Rev. 14, 10 ; and so Matt 
 3, 11 et Luke 3, 16, see in fianTifa no. 2. 
 b. Judith 16, 17. Ecclus. 7, 17. 
 
 3. Trop. a burning, i. e. ardour, vehe 
 mence; Heb. 10, 27 nvpos frJXor, see in 
 \.os no. 3. b. 
 
 Trvpa, as, rj, (nvp,} a fire, i. e. as kin- 
 lied and burning, burning fuel, Acts 28, 2. 
 3. Judith 7, 5. 2 Mace. 1, 22. Hdian. 4 
 
644 
 
 TTOtpOO) 
 
 8. 12 ; of a burning funeral pile, Xen. An. 
 6. 4. 9. 
 
 Trvpyos, ov, 6, a tower; comp. Germ. 
 Burg, Engl. burgh. 
 
 1. Pr. for defence, as in the wall of a 
 city, Luke 13, 4 6 irvpyos *v TO> SiXwd^i, 
 i. e. in the wall of the city near Siloam. 
 See on the towers of Jerusalem, Jos. B. J. 
 5. 4. 2, 3. Sept. for V-W52 Judg. 9, 46 sq. 
 So Jos. 1. c. Hdian. 8. *3. 7. Xen. Hell. 3. 
 1. 22. Spec, the watch-tower or turret of a 
 vineyard, Matt. 21, 33. Mark 12, 1. Sept. 
 and ?*}? Is. 5, 2. See Bibl. Res. in Pal. 
 I. p. 3*14. 
 
 2. Meton. of any building with one or 
 more towers, a castle, fortress, palace, 
 Germ. Burg, Luke 14, 28. Horn. II. 22. 
 447 comp. 440. Pol. 26. 4. 1. So Lat. tur 
 ns, Liv. 33. 48. 
 
 TTVpecraw v. -TTO>, f. , (Trvperdy,) 
 to be feverish, to be sick of fever, absol. 
 Matt. 8, 14. Mark 1, 30. Luc. Quom. 
 Hist. 1. J3schin. 69 pen. 
 
 TTtyjeTO?, oC, 6, (nvp,) fiery heat, as of 
 Sirius, Horn. II. 22. 31. In N. T. feverish 
 heat, a fever, Matt. 8, 15. Mark 1,31. Luke 
 4, 38. 39. John 4, 52. Acts 28, 8. Sept. for 
 prn;5 Deut. 28, 22. So Jos. Vit. 5 11. Luc. 
 Philops. 9. Xen. Mem. 3. 8. 3. 
 
 TTVpwos, r), ov, (irvp, ) fiery, burning, 
 Sept. for E5 Ez. 28, 14. 16 ; tinrav irvpi- 
 vcov Ecclus. 48, 9, comp. 2 K. 2, 11. In 
 N. T. fiery, flaming, glittering, Rev. 9, 17 
 3o>po*cTs irvpivovs. Comp. SwpaKtzy TreTrvpco- 
 Htvoi Hdian. 8. 4. 27. 
 
 7TVp6a>, >, f. &xro>, (TJ-vp,) to fire, to set 
 on fire, 2 Mace. 10, 3. Eurip. Phcen. 584. 
 Hdot. 8. 102. In N. T. only Pass, irvpo- 
 
 Ofldl, OVpMl. 
 
 1. to be fired, set on fire, kindled, i. q. to 
 burn, to flame; Eph. 6, 16 see in fc\os. 2 Pet. 
 3, 12 ovpavol irupovp-fvoi XvS^troiTai. Rev. 
 1, 15. So Apollod. Bibl. 2. 4 ptXij TreTrvpw- 
 ^tva. JSschin. Dial. Socr. 3. 21. Trop. to 
 burn, to be inflamed, e. g. with anger, to be 
 incensed, 2 Cor. 11, 29. (2 Mace. 4, 38. 
 14, 45.) With sexual desire, 1 Cor. 7, 9 
 Kpti(T(TOV yap.ij<Tai fj irvpovcr Sai. So Sept. 
 Hos. 7, 4 Vat. eKirvpovo-Zai tls TO p.oix*vfiv. 
 Comp. nvp Ecclus. 23, 16. Lat. uror Virg. 
 vEn. 4. 68. 
 
 2. to be tried with fire, purified, as metals, 
 Rev. 3, 18. Sept. for iria Prov. 10, 20 ; 
 CftX Zech. 13, 9. Ps. 11, 7. 
 
 TTUppd^w, f. do-w, (iruppos, ) to be flame- 
 coloured, red; absol. Matt. 16, 2 TT. 6 ovpa- 
 v6s. v. 3. Not found elsewhere. 
 
 iruppos, u, 6v, (Trvp,) 
 fiery-red, red, I^at. rufus ; Rev. 6, 4 tTrrros. 
 12, 3 Spd/cwi/. Sept. for tHK Zech. 1, 8. 
 Num. 19, 2. Diod. Sic. 1. 88. Xen. Venat. 
 
 4. 7. 
 
 IIvppos, ov, 6, Pyrrhus, pr. n. m. 2<i- 
 Trarpos Hvppov Sopater [son] of Pyrrhus 
 Acts 20, 4 in later edit. Rec. omits Uvppov. 
 
 TrupOMTlS, ewy, T), (TTvpow,) a being on 
 fire, burning, conflagration, Rev. 18,9. 18. 
 So Jos. Ant. 1. 11. 4. Theophr. H. PI. 5. 
 9. Trop. fiery trial, calamity, suffering, 
 1 Pet. 4, 12, comp. in (vtfa no. 2. 
 
 7T&), enclit. partic. yet, even, in N. T. 
 only in composition ; see /IJJTTW, /LtiyStVo), 
 
 OV7TO), OvbfTTO, also TTCOTTOTf. 
 
 7T(uXe&), a), f. Tjcr<i), (kindr. TrtXo), TreXo- 
 p.ai, ) pr. to trade away wares, to barter ; 
 hence to seZZ, c. ace. Matt. 13, 44 oo-a e^ 
 TrcoXei. 19, 21. 21, 12 rS>v iroXovvrw ras 
 Trepio-npas. Mark 10, 21. 11,15. Luke 12, 
 33. 18, 22. 22, 36. John 2, 14. 16. Acts 
 
 5, 1. Pass. c. gen. of price ; comp. Buttm. 
 5 132. 10. c. Matt. 10, 29 oi^ Suo orpovSi o 
 dcrcrap/ov TrwXerrat ; Luke 12, 6. Absol. 
 Matt. 21, 12 rovs TTcaXoiivras KOI dyopdov- 
 ras fv TW tf/><5. 25, 9. Mark 11, 15. Luke 
 17, 28. 19, 45. Acts 4, 34. 37. 1 Cor. 10, 
 25. Rev. 13, 17. Sept. for "? Neh. 5, 8. 
 Joel 3, 3. Ez. 7, 13. Dem. 784. 9. Xen, 
 Cyr. 2. 4. 32 ; c. gen. of price, ^El. V. H. 
 10. 9. Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 10. 
 
 ou, 6, TI, a foal, Lat. pullus, i. e. 
 genr. a young animal, youngling, Sept. 
 Prov. 5, 19. M. V. H. 4. 9. Spec, of the 
 horse, a colt, JE\. V. H. 7. 13. Xen. An. 4. 
 5. 24. In N. T. of an ass, a foal, a r,oll, 
 joined with ovos or the like ; Matt. 21, 2. 5. 
 7. John 12, 15; absol. Mark 11, 2. 4. 5. 7. 
 Luke 19, 30. 33 bis. 35. So Sept. for 1^5 
 Gen. 32, 16. Judg. 10, 4 ; rvi3l nX"ja 
 Zech. 9, 9. 
 
 TTfOTTOTe, adv. (TTCO, Trore,) yet ever, ever, 
 at any time ; in N. T. only after a negative, 
 not yet even, never; Luke 19, 30 e t^ ov ov- 
 8t\s TTtoiroTf eKaSio-e. John 1, 18. 5, 37. 6, 
 35. 8, 33. 1 John 4, 12. Sept. 1 Sam. 25, 
 28. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 4. 
 
 TToapoo), w, f. axroj, (irapos tufa,) pr. to 
 make hard like stone, to petrify, Suid. ircopow 
 Kal Xi3o7roi&>. Then genr. to make hard. 
 callous, to indurate, e. g. oo-re a Dioscor. 1 . 
 C. 90 ; ta rrjs irfTrcopapti rjs crapnos JEl. 
 V. H. 9. 13. In N. T. trop. to harden, to 
 make dull, stupid, e. g. rf]v Kap&tav John 
 12, 40. Pass, to be hardened, dull, stupid, 
 e. g. % napSia Mark 6, 52. 8, 17 ; TO. vor- 
 
645 
 
 7TOJ? 
 
 2 Cor. 3, 14 ; of persons, Rom. 11, 7 
 So Sept. of the eyes, Job 17, 7. 
 
 7T&)/3&)0-f9, fur, 17, (7Tc0pda>,) pr. a /lara 7 - 
 pm ng-, induration; Hesych. Trcopcoo-ty t f 
 uvTftav o-vp(pv(ris /cat <Tvv8t(rfi.os. In N. T. 
 trop. hardness of heart or mind, dullness, 
 stupidity, na>p. T^JS Kapdias Mark 3, 5. Eph. 
 4, 18; absol. id. Rom. 11, 25. 
 
 7T&)9, interrog. partic. correl. to mar, 
 os, onus, Buttm. { 116. 4; how ? in what 
 way or manner ? by what means ? 
 
 I . Pr. how 1 in a direct question ; mostly 
 a) With the Indicative. a) Genr. and 
 simply, Luke 10, 26 ncas dvayivwo-Xfis ; 
 John 7, 15. 9, 10 ncas avfta^Srjcrdv croi of 
 o$3aX/iot; 1 Cor. 15, 35. Mark 9, 12 Rec. 
 cat nS>s ytypanrai KT\. where others read 
 /caSeiy. So Ceb. Tab. 34. Luc. D. Deor. 
 22. 1. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 13. 0) Implying 
 surprise, wonder, admiration, Matt. 22, 12 
 rrats f to-jjXSer 2>8e ; John 3, 9. 6, 52. So 
 with the fut. expressing what may or can 
 take place, Winer 41. 6. Matt. 7, 4 n5>s 
 (pds TW dSeX<c3 o-ov. Luke 1, 34. With 
 intensive particles, e. g. /cat ir>s and how? 
 John 12, 34. 14, 9; irS>s ovv John 6, 42. 
 In the same expression of surprise, was 
 may often be rendered how is it that ? how 
 comes it? why? Mark 12, 35 na>s \eyovo~iv 
 at ypafJifMTfls, OTI 6 Xp. KT\. Luke 20, 41. 
 John 4, 9. 1 Cor. 15, 12. Gal. 2, 14. 4, 9 ; 
 also /cat TTUS Acts 2, 8 ; jreor ovv Matt. 22, 
 43. John 9, 19; nS>s ov, Matt. 16, 11 nt>s 
 01 voire; Mark 4,40. Luke 12,56. So 
 Luc. D. Deor. 4. 1. Plato Phileb. p. 133. 
 ed. Stalb. nu>s ovv Luc. D. Deor. 2. 2. 
 Xen. Conv. 2. 10; nas ov Plato Crito 1. 
 Xen. Ag. 9. 7. y) Often in questions 
 which serve to affirm the contrary ; e. g. a 
 negative, Matt. 12, 29. 34 yevvr^ara e ^tS- 
 vwv, Trcof 8vrao-3e dya3a \aXtiv; i. e. ye 
 cannot. Mark 3, 23. John 3, 4. 1 John 3, 
 17. 4,20; KUL nS>s intens. Luke 20, 44. 
 John 14, 5. So with the fut. see above in 
 lett. /3. Luke 11, 18 nas o-raSijo-rrai 17 
 jSao-tXei a avroO; Rom. 3, 6. 1 Cor. 14,7. 9. 
 Heb. 2, 3. (Plut. de aud. Poet. 12.) Hence 
 nws oi^t implying strong affirmation, 
 Rom. 8, 32. 2 Cor. 3, 8; comp. Matth. 
 5 610. 6. Viger. p. 444. So Xen. Hi. 1. 36. 
 ib. 6. 4. 
 
 b) With the Sulyunctiie, in a question 
 expressing doubt, comp. Matth. $ 516. 2, 3. 
 Winer } 42. 4. Matt. 23, 33 nas (pvyjjrt 
 
 OTTO TTJS KplO-fUS Tr)S y((WT)S , 26, 54. 
 
 c) With the Optative c. dv, expressing a 
 negative subjectively, as Acts 8, 31 TTUS yap 
 &v 8vvaip.r)v ; for how can I? Comp. Buttm 
 5 139. m. 15. Matth. { 514 fin. Winer $ 43. 
 1. b. For Trcof ydp emphat. see Matth. 
 {611. 4. Ko3n. ad Greg. Cor. p. 144 Schsef. 
 So Hdian. 4. 3. 18. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6 22 
 36. 
 
 2. In an indirect question, with the Indi 
 cative expressing what is real and of actual 
 occurrence ; cornp. Winer } 42. 4. Matth. 
 5 507. 3. John 9, 15 fjpajTcov OVTOV . . . noas 
 cbvfktifm, ; So Plut. Moral. II. p. 20. Xen. 
 Mem. 1 . 6. 15. Oftener in oblique discourse 
 after verbs of considering, finding out, know 
 ing, making known, and the like ; here the 
 interrogative force is dropped, and Tris is 
 equiv. to its correlative onus how, in what 
 way, see in ona>s. Buttm. { 116. 4. E. g. 
 a) With the Indie, as above, see Winer. 
 and Matth. 11. cc. Matt. 6, 28 *ara^d3eTf 
 ra npiva TOV dypov, TTWS avgdvei. 12, 4 OVK 
 dvfyviare...7ras eiV^XSei/ etV TOP OIKOV TOV 
 3foC /crX. Mark 5, 16. 12, 41. Luke 8, 18. 
 36. 12,27. 14,7. Acts 9, 27. 11,13. 12, 
 17. 15, 36. 1 Cor. 3, 10. 1 Thess. 1, 9. 
 Rev. 3, 3. So Palaeph. 21. 3. Plut. de 
 Liber, educ. 8. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 16. b) 
 With the Subjunct. where any thing is ex 
 pressed as objectively possible, see Winer 
 .^c. Herm. ad Vig. p. 741. Matt. 10, 19 
 /^pt/ifijo-ijTe ir<os rj ri XoXqo-qrf. Mark 
 4, 1 f^r]Tovv...Trcis avTov airoKTeivdxriv. 
 v. 11. Luke 12, 11. 22,2.4. Acts 4, 21. 
 c) With the future Indie, instead of the 
 Subjunct. as above, Matth. $ 516. n. 2. 
 rm.^ad Vig. p. 747. Mark 11,18 ((TJTOVV 
 Trews avTov airo\t<rov<Tiv. 1 Cor. 7, 32. 33. 
 34. So Hdian. 5. 4. 16 rryvoovv rt, ir<Ss 
 Xp^<rovraL rw irpa.yp.aTi. Plut. Mor. II. 
 p. 399. 
 
 3. As an intensive exclamation, how! 
 how very ! how greatly ! E. g. before an 
 adj. or adv. Mark 10, 24 rnar SvovcoXoV eVri 
 /crX. Matt. 21, 20 TTCOJ irapaxpf)p.a (gqpdv Sr) 
 f) (rvKfj. Mark 10, 23. Luke 18, 24. Before 
 a verb, Luke 12, 50 TTCOC o-v^o/zat cor ov 
 reXfo-3^. John 11, 36 tSf, TTCO? e ^i Xft avrov. 
 So c. adj. Palaeph. 31.5. M. Antonin. 6. 
 27. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 11 ; c. adv. Xen. Mem. 
 4. 2. 23. + 
 
 7T(0?, enclit. part, indef. any how, in an$ 
 way, in some way or other ; in N. T. only 
 in the compounds t"mu>s, prjiras, q. v. Como. 
 TTwr. Buttm. { 116. 4. 
 
Pad/3 
 
 646 
 
 P. 
 
 Pad/3, f], indec. Rahab, Heb. Srn , pr. 
 n. of a harlot at Jericho, who received the 
 Hebrew spies, Heb. 11, 31. James 2, 25 ; 
 see Josh. c. 2. Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 2 Pa^a^h/. 
 See more in Paxa/3. 
 
 Pa/3/3/, 6, indec. Rabbi, Heb. 3 1 !!, 
 comm. " Sn , pr. a great one, vir amplissimus, 
 a title of honour in the Jewish schools for a 
 teacher, master, q. d. doctor ; continued also 
 in modern times ; Matt. 23, 7. 8. 26, 25. 49. 
 Mark 9, 5. 11, 21. 14, 45. John 1, 39. 50. 
 
 3, 2. 26. 4, 31. 6,25. 9,2. 11,8. In 
 Matt. 23, 8 it is explained by /raSi/y^T^y, in 
 John 1, 39 by SiSaovcaXoy, in reference to its 
 use as a title, rather than to signification. See 
 Heb. Lex. 3^ no. 2. d. This title was em 
 ployed in the Jewish schools under a three 
 fold form, viz. a) 2"] Rab, Master, as 
 the lowest degree of honour. /3) With 
 suff. of 1 pers. "2"], Pa$3i, Rabbi, i. e. 
 my Master, of higher dignity. y) "|2^j 
 and as if with suff. Pafiftovi, Rabboni, q. d. 
 my great Master, the most honourable of all, 
 which was publicly given to only seven 
 persons, all of the school of Hillel and of 
 great eminence. This was about the time 
 of Christ ; but when the more general title 
 Rabbi was introduced, is unknown. See 
 Buxtorf. Lex. 2176 sq. Lightfoot Hor. Heb. 
 ad Matt. 23, 7. Winer Realw. art. Rabbi. 
 
 Pafiftovi v. Paftfiovvi, indec. Rab 
 boni, a title of high honour in the Jewish 
 schools; see in Pa/3/3t. Mark 10,51. John 
 20, 16. 
 
 pa/SSifo, f. I O-CD, (pa/3Soy,) to beat with 
 a rod or stick, absol. Acts 16, 22. 2 Cor. 11, 
 25 rp\s tppafto io- Srjv, where on v. 24 comp. 
 Deut. 25, 3 and Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 21, 23. 
 Sept. for 3an Judg. 6, 11. Ruth 2, 17. 
 Diod. Sic. 19. 101. Aristoph. Lys. 587. 
 
 pa/3So9, ov, 17, 1. a rod, stick, staff", 
 genr. Heb. 9, 4 17 pd/38oy Aapuv. Rev. 11,1. 
 Sept. and MMa Ex. 4, 2. 4. (Ceb. Tab. 
 
 4. Luc. D. Mort. 23. 3.) For chastising, 
 scourging, 1 Cor. 4, 21. Sept. and ft BO 
 Is. 9, 3; 25 Prov. 10, 13. Ex. 21, 20. 
 So Plut. Poplic. 6. Xen. Eq. 8. 4. For 
 leaning upon, walking, a staff", Matt. 10, 
 10. Mark 6, 8. Luke 9, 3. Heb. 11, 21 
 tiri TO aKpov TTJS pdfiBov, in allusion to 
 Gen. 47, 31 where Sept. as if for !1B, 
 not fitf a as the Hebrew reads ; comp. 1 K. 
 
 1, 47. Sept. also for fi Gen. 38, 13; 
 PWIfln Ex. 20, 19. 
 
 2. Spec, a sceptre, as if the staff or wand 
 of office : Heb. 1 , 8 bis, pdfiSos eiavnjTos ij 
 pd[38os TJJS /3a<riXei as (rou, quoted from Ps. 
 45, 7 where Sept. for B213. Rev. 2, 27. 12, 
 5. 19, 15. So Sept. and O3W Ps. 2, 9 ; 
 
 naa Ps. no, 2. 
 
 pa/38ovxps, ov, 6, (pa/38os, ?x<,) a rod- 
 holder, a lictor, Acts 16, 35. 38. The lie- 
 tor was an officer or sort of sergeant who 
 attended on the superior magistrates of Ro 
 man cities and colonies and executed their 
 decrees ; so called as bearing the Roman 
 fasces or bundle of rods ; comp. Adam s 
 Rom. Ant. p. 178. Diet, of Antt. arts. Fas 
 ces, Lictor. Dion. Hal. Ant. 4. 5. Plut. 
 Marcell. 29. Hdian. 7. 8. 10. 
 
 Payav, 6, indec. Ragau, Heb. WJ 
 (friend sc. of God) Reu, pr. n. m. Luke 3. 
 35 ; see Gen. 11, 18 sq. 
 
 ytJfAa, aros, TO, (paSioupyew, pa- 
 os, from pa.8t.os, epyov,} pr. what is 
 done lightly, recklessly; hence in a bad 
 sense, a reckless deed, wickedness, crime, Acts 
 18, 14. Luc. Calumn. 20. Plut. Pyrrh. 6. 
 
 pa&lOVpyia, as, 17, (see p aSioupyr^a,) 
 ease or lightness of doing, Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 
 34 ; levity in doing, indolence, effeminacy, 
 Xen. Ag. 11. 6. Lac. 14. 4. In N. T. 
 recklessness, wickedness, mischief, Acts 13, 
 10. So Pol. 12. 10. 5 Diod. Sic. 5. 11. 
 Plut. Cato Min. 16. 
 
 patcd) indec. raca, a word of contempt, 
 Matt. 5, 22 ; prob. from Chald. NI^ (Heb. 
 P" 1 "!) ) empty, worthless, foolish, which occurs 
 often in the Talmudic writings as a term ol 
 reproach and contempt ; Buxtorf. Lex. 
 Chald. 2254. Lightfoot Hor. Heb. et Wetst. 
 in Matt. 1. c. 
 
 paKOf, cos, ovs, TO, (p r/o-o-ea, pTjywpi, ) 1 
 piece torn off, a rag, a torn garment, Sept. 
 Is. 64, 6.* Ceb. Tab. 10. Aristoph. Plut. 
 540. In N. T. genr. a piece, remnant, of 
 cloth; Matt. 9, 16 et Mark 2, 21 eVi^X^a 
 pdicovs dyva(pov, i. q. n /3X7/ia t/xan ou KCU- 
 vov in Luke 5, 36. So Hdot. 7. 76. 
 
 Pa/xa. TJ, indec. Ramah, Heb. fi^^ 
 (a height), pr. n. of a city of Benjamin, five 
 or six Roman miles north of Jerusalem, be 
 tween Gibeah and Bethel; Matt. 2, 18, 
 quoted from Jer. 31,15. It seems to have 
 
pavrifo 
 
 647 
 
 rjyiov 
 
 been the rendezvous where Nebuzaradan 
 collected the Jewish captives for their de 
 parture into exile, Jer. 40, 1 ; see in Pa^X. 
 Comp. Judg. 19, 13. Jos. Ant. 8. 12. 3 
 < Pa/ia3a>i , TroXis crraSiovr aTre ^ovaa lepocro- 
 Xi/fjLuiv Tfo-vapaKovra. } 4. Bibl. Res. in Pa 
 lest. II. p. 315. Now er-Rdm. 
 
 pCLVTlfo, f. icrw, (pavros, p aiVw,) to 
 sprinkle, to besprinkle, c. ace. Heb. 9, 13 
 crno8os 8ap.d\(a>s pavriov<ra TOVS K(KOII>&>- 
 p.tvovs, in allusion to Num. 19, 2 sq. 17. 
 Heb. 9, 19. 21, comp. Ex. 24, 6. 8. Sept. 
 for n Lev. 6, 20 [27]. 2 K. 9, 33. So 
 Athen. 12. p. 521. a. Symbol, for to purify, 
 to cleanse, in a moral sense ; Heb. 10, 22 
 (ppaiTicrp.tvoi TCLS Kap8ias OTTO criivi8i]0~fu>s 
 irovTjpas, for the accus. comp. Buttm. $ 131. 
 7. So Sept. for Kn Ps. 51, 9. 
 
 pavrt(T/jb6?, of), 6, (pai/ri fw,) pr. a 
 sprinkling, melon, purification, cleansing; 
 Heb. 12, 24 atjaan paimo-p-ov, Mood of (for) 
 sprinkling, cleansing ; so Sept. v8a>p pav- 
 oi) for Heb. rw? Num. 19,9. 13,20.21. 
 
 1 Pet. 1, 2 fK\tKTO~lS . . . (Is VTTO.KOr]V KO.I 
 
 pavria-p-ov cupaTos I. Xp. and unto sprink 
 ling with the blond of Jesus, to be cleansed 
 through his blood, comp. 1 John 1,7. Not 
 found in Greek writers. 
 
 pa7Tta>, f. t cra), (pa-iris, pd/38os,) to beat 
 with a rod or stick, Hdot. 7. 35. ib. 8. 59. 
 Later and in N. T. to slap with the open 
 hand, to smite, espec. the cheeks or ears, 
 C. ace. Matt. 5, 39 o<ms <re pairi&t. eVi TTJV 
 &eidv a-ov. Absol. Matt. 26, 67. So Sept. 
 Hos. 11, 4. Luc. D. Meretr. 8. 1, 2. Dem. 
 787. 23. Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 175 sq. 
 
 pa7Tt(T[J,a, aros, TO, (pan-ifa,) a blow 
 with the open hand, a slap, cuff, espec. on 
 the cheeks or ears, Mark 14, 65 of i/Tn/perat 
 pairi(T[Mo~i avTov e/3aXXoc. John 18, 22. 19, 
 3. Sept. Is. 50, 6. Alciphr. III. Ep. 6, 70. 
 Luc. D. Meretr. 8. 2. Found only in late 
 writers, Phryn. et Lob. p. 175 sq. 
 
 pa(f)l<>, iftos, T), (paTrra,) a needle, Matt. 
 19, 24. Mark 10, 25. Luke 18, 25. Hip- 
 pocr. de Morb. 2. 26. Nicet. Annal. 8. 4. 
 p. 136. a. Poll. On. 10. 31. The earlier 
 word was fifXovr], see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 90. 
 
 Pa^a/3, 17, indec. Rachab, Heb. 2PH 
 Rahab, the wife of Salmon, Matt. 1, 5. 
 Prob. the same with Rahab of Jericho, see 
 in Pao/3 ; since Nahshon the father of Sal 
 mon was the leader of the tribe of Judah at 
 the breaking up from Mount Sinai, Num. 
 10, 14; and therefore his son would be 
 contemporary with the fall of Jericho about 
 forty years later. The express mention of 
 
 % Pa^d/3 in the genealogical table as an 
 historical person, as also of ?/ Poi/3 after 
 wards, is in favour of this supposition. 
 
 Pa%ri\ T), indec. Rachel, Heb. i>rn 
 (ewe-lamb), the younger wife of Jacob, and 
 mother of Joseph and Benjamin. Matt. 2, 
 1 8 (paivT) fv Pap.a fjKovo-^r] . . . Pa^jjX (cXai- 
 ovcra TU reKva avTTjs, quoted from Jer. 3 1 . 
 15, where Rachel, the ancestress of the 
 tribe of Benjamin, is introduced as bewail 
 ing the departure of her descendants into 
 exile, from Ramah their place of rendez 
 vous ; see Jer. 40, 1. On the sepulchre 
 of Rachel, on the way from Jerusalem to 
 Bethlehem, and 25 minutes from the latter 
 place, see Bibl. Res. in Palest. I. p. 322. 
 II. p. 157. 
 
 Pe/Qe/c/ca, 77?, 17, Rebecca, Heb. " E^ 
 (a noose) Rebekah, the wife of Isaac, Rom. 
 9, 10. 
 
 pe8r}, ,jj, ,7, Lat. rheda, a carriage with 
 four wheels for travelling, a chariot, Rev. 
 18, 13. So rheda Cic. pro Mil. 10. The 
 word is of Gallic origin, Quinctil. 1. 5. 68. 
 Caes. B. Gall. 1. 51. Comp. Adam s Rom. 
 Ant. p. 554. Diet, of Antt. art. Rheda. 
 
 Penfydv v. Pe(j)dv, 6, indec. Rem- 
 phan, Rephan, Acts 7, 43, quoted from 
 Amos 5, 26 where Sept. ^Paicpdv for Heb. 
 (1*3 Chiun. The LXX held 1^3 to be 
 the pr. name of an idol ; and changing 3 to n 
 wrote it Pai<pdv, Pvcpdv, which by the fur 
 ther corruption of transcribers became Pep.- 
 (pdv, Pf(pdv. It has been assumed, on 
 doubtful authority, that Paifbdv was an 
 Egyptian word denoting Saturn. The Sy 
 rian Version translates I^S directly by Sa 
 turn, i. e. the planet Saturn, which the 
 Semitic nations worshipped along with 
 Mars as an evil demon ; see Gesen. Comm. 
 on Is. II. p. 343. Others more correctly 
 hold "(1*3 to be simply i. q. a statue or sta 
 tues, and read, the statues of your idols, the 
 star of your god, i. e. some planet is under 
 stood, which Jerome conjectured to be Lu 
 cifer or Venus. See Heb. Lex. art. -]!p;p . 
 Winer Realw. art. Remphan. Jablonski 
 Opusc. ed. te Water, II. p. 1. 
 
 pea), f. peuo-o), Att. fut. p(v(Top.ai, Winer 
 J 15. Buttm. ^ 114. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 739 : 
 to flow, absol. John 7, 38 Trorapoi. . .pfixrov- 
 a-iv vdaros favros. Sept. for -IT Lev. 15, 3 ; 
 i>!3 Jer. 9, 17. Hdian. 7. 1. 17. Xen. An. 
 1/2. 7, 8. 
 
 pew, obsol. to speak, see in tlnov. 
 
 Prjyiov, ov, TO, Rhegium, a city on the 
 coast near the S. W. extremity of Italy, 
 
648 
 
 prja-aca 
 
 now Rheggio, opposite Messina in Sicily, 
 Acts 28, 13. Comp. Diod. Sic. 4. 85. 
 Plin. H. N. 3. 14. 
 
 prjy/jia, aros, TO, (prjywp.i, ) a rend 
 ing, breach, ruin, Luke 6, 49. Sept. for 
 n^Sipa Am. 6, 11. Pol. 13. 6. 8. Dim. 
 294. 21. 
 
 prjjvv/jLi, {. , also prjcrao) a poetic 
 and later form, Mark 2, 22. 9, 18. Sept. 
 1 K. 11, 31. Horn. II. 18. 571 ; comp. Moe- 
 ris p. 337. Thorn. Mag. p. 788. To rend, 
 to break, to tear. 
 
 1. Of things, to rend, to burst, e. g. lea 
 ther bottles or skins, c. ace. Mark 2, 22. 
 Luke 5, 37 pr)(i 6 vfbs oivos TOVS aeneous. 
 Pass. Matt. 9, 17. Sept. for Sp2 Num. 16, 
 31. Josh. 9, 13 ; S 1 ^ Job 2, 12. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 17. 1. Diod. Sic. 12. 59. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 6. 16. 
 
 2. As to persons, to rend, to tear, to lace 
 rate, as dogs, Matt. 7, 6. Also to tear down, 
 to dash to the ground, as a demon one pos 
 sessed, Mark 9, 18. Luke 9, 42 eppnt-tv 
 avTov TO 8aifji6viov Kal (rvvf<T7rdpafv. Sept. 
 for IS:? : Is. 13, 16. Wisd. 4, 19. Artemid. 
 
 1 . 60 pr/ai TCI/ aiTiTraXoj , of a wrestler. 
 
 3. Trop. and absol. to break forth, e. g. 
 into rejoicing and praise, Gal. 4, 27 p^ov 
 KOI POTJO-OV KT\. quoted from Is. 54, 1 where 
 Sept. for nSB . Usually c. ace. of manner 
 or thing, as Sept. prjai eixppoa-vvrjv for 
 n|1 JTSQ Is. 49, 13. 52, 9; prjgai <pa>vr)v, 
 Lat. rumpere vocem, Hdot. 5. 93. Artemid. 
 
 2. 12. Aristoph. Nub. 960 or 963. 
 
 pf)fJ<a, ctTOf , TO, (pew, see in flnov^) what 
 is spoken, word, saying. 
 
 1 . Pr. a word, as uttered by the living 
 voice, Plur. TO. pij/xara, words; Acts 6, 11 
 pf]p.aTa /3Xdcr<j7/ia. v. 13. 10, 44. 26, 25. 
 Heb. 12, 19. Sept. for 1M Gen. 27, 34. 42; 
 "iX Ps. 5, 1. Hdian. 1.8. 12. Dem. 1457. 
 18. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 34. 
 
 2. Collect, word, also Plur. words, i. q. 
 a saying, speech, discourse. 
 
 a) Genr. Matt. 12, 36 -nav prjp-a dpyov, 
 see m-dpyos no. 2. 26. 75 KOI p.vT]o-^rj 6 II. 
 rot) prjp.aTos rov lr)<rov. Mark 9, 32. 14,72. 
 Luke 1, 38. 2, 17. 19. 50. 51. 7, 1. 9, 45 
 bis. 18, 34. 20, 26. 24, 8. 11. John 8, 20. 
 Acts 2, 14. 11, 16. 16, 38. 28, 25. 2 Cor. 
 12, 4. Rom. 10, 18 quoted from Ps. 19, 5 
 where Sept. for B^o. Sept. and ">3^ 
 Job 15, 3. 31, 40. Palaeph. 50. 1. Dem. 
 1462. 2. Xen. Cyr. 8. 4. 15. 
 
 b) In the N. T. usage, often like Heb. 
 "tt^ m special senses depending on the 
 adjuncts or context ; comp. in tlnov no. 2. 
 
 E. g. a) a charge, accusation. Matt. 5, 
 11. 27, 14. So Matt. 18, 16 et 2 Cor. 13, 
 1, in allusion to Deut. 19, 15 where Sept. 
 for IS 1 ! ; comp. Num. 14, 36. /3) a pre 
 diction, prophecy, e. g. prjfiara npotipr^iva, 
 2 Pet. 3, 2. Jude 17. So p^ara TOU 3eoG 
 Rev. 17, 17 Rec. y) a promise, e. g. from 
 God, Luke 2, 29. Heb. 6, 5 naXw yewd- 
 pevoi Seoi) pfj^a. So Sept. and "^ 1 K. 
 8, 20. 12, 16. 8) a command, Luke 5, 5 ; 
 pjjpa TOV Sfov, word of God, his omnipotent 
 decree, Heb. 11, 3; impl. Heb. 1, 3. Also 
 Matt. 4, 4 et Luke 4, 4 OVK eV a prw p.6va> 
 6 afSpcoTroj, dXX eVi iravri prjp^Ti 
 onevM 8ia aro/iaros SeoC, i. e. upon 
 every thing which God supplies through 
 his creative word, quoted from Deut. 8, 3 
 where Sept. for njiTpS XSiTD-b^-bs , 
 spoken in reference to the manna. Sept. for 
 "9? Josh. 1, 13. 1 Sam. 17, 29 ; WSO 
 Prov. 3, 1. t) Spoken of a teacher, word 
 or ivords, discourse, teaching, doctrine, e. g. 
 TO. pyp-ara rrjs u>r)s Acts 5, 20, see in a>7j 
 no. 3. b. Acts 10, 22 aKovcrai prjp-aTa rrapa 
 (TOV. 11, 14 or \a\T)cr(i p-^p-ara irpos o~f. 13. 
 42. So pfip.a, pijp.a TIJS Trtcrrea)?, prjp.a 3eoi) 
 v. Kvplov, the word, word of faith, word of 
 God, i. e. the doctrines and promises re 
 vealed and taught from God, the gospel aa 
 preached, Rom. 10, 8 bis, comp. Deut. 30, 
 14 where Sept.. for 1^1 of the Mosaic dis 
 pensation. Acts 10, 37 comp. 36. Rom. 10, 
 17. Eph. 5, 26. 6, 17. 1 Pet. 1, 25 bis. 
 Of Jesus, TO pfjfJiaTa, John 5, 47 TTU>S TO IS 
 fp-ols pfjp.ao-1 KT\. 6, 63. 68. 10,21. 12,47. 
 48. 14, 10. 15,7; rot pi^wmi TOU 3eou, the 
 words or doctrine received from God, John 
 3, 34. 8, 47. 17, 8. ) Luke 3, 2 tytvero 
 pfjp.a Seoi) eVi l&dvivjv, the word of God, an 
 oracle, ejfatum, from God, corresponding to 
 Heb. bx nln^ nnn ^ , Sept. ^a, Gen. 
 15, 1. Jer. 6, 10, comp. 1,1; oftener Sept. 
 Xoyor Jer. 1, 4. 11. Ez. 3, 16. 6, 1. 
 
 3. Melon, from the Heb. something spo 
 ken of; hence genr. a thing, matter, affair. 
 Luke 2, 15 i 8a>/iej> TO prjfJLa TOVTO TO yty&- 
 vos. 1 , 65 SteXaXetTo ndvra TO. prjp.aTa TUVTO. 
 Acts 5, 32. So Sept. and "a 1 * Gen. 21, 11. 
 1 Sam. 4, 17. 12, 16; Plur. Gen. 20, 8. 
 40, 1. Ezra 7, 1. So 1 Mace. 5, 37. Also 
 OV...TTO.V pfjp.a, the neg. ov being joined 
 with the verb, see in ov no. 1. c; equiv. to 
 nothing at all, nothing whatever ; Luke 1 , 
 37 OVK dSwaTTjaei irapa TW Sew ndv prjp-a. 
 Comp. Sept. Gen. 18, 14. Deut. 17, 8. 
 
 Prjcrd, o, indec. Rhesa, pr. ti. m. Luke 
 3, 27. 
 
 
 
 prjcra co, see in 
 
649 
 
 opos, 6, (obs. pew,) a speaker, 
 orator, advocate, Acts 24, 1. jEl. V. H. 9. 
 19. Dem. 303. 15. Xen. Mem. 4. 6. 15. 
 
 pr)TO)s, adv. (prjTos, obs. peco,) in express 
 words, expressly, 1 Tim. 4, 1. Sext. Em- 
 pir. adv. Log. 1.86 Sevo(pu>v PTJTWS (pfja-iv. 
 Strabo 1. p. 4. b. Pol. 2. 23. 5. 
 
 pi%a, as, %, I. a root; Matt. 3, 10 et 
 Luke 3, 9 f) diirj nrpos TTJV piav TO>V 8ev- 
 8pw KeiTai. Mark 11, 20 pia>v from the 
 roots, wholly. Also ov e%etv piav, to have 
 no root, to not take deep root, Matt. 13, 6. 
 Mark 4, 6 ; trop. of those not rooted and 
 established in faith and doctrine, Matt. 13, 
 21. Mark 4, 17. Luke 8, 13. Sept. for 
 thiO Ez. 17, 6. 7. 9 ; pifav Job 28, 9. 
 So Luc. Amor. 33. ^El. V. H. 2. 14. Xen. 
 CEc. 17. 12, 13. Trop. the root, cause, 
 source of any thing, 1 Tim. 6, 10 pia TU>V 
 caicuv. (Ecclus. 1, 6. 20. Wisd. 15, 3.) 
 Also retaining the figure of a root, Rom. 
 11, 16. 17. 18 bis; where Paul makes 
 Abraham and the Jewish people the root 
 from which the gospel dispensation with its 
 blessings has sprung, into which root and 
 stem the Gentiles are ingrafted. Heb. 12, 
 15 P.T) TIS pia niKpias, lest some root of bit 
 terness, i. e. a wicked person whose exam 
 ple is poisonous (comp. v. 16), in allusion 
 to Deut. 29, 17 where Sept. for CJnaJ ; comp. 
 
 2. Melon, from the Heb. a sprout, shoot, 
 from the root ; only trop. for offspring, a 
 descendant; Rom. 15, 12 17 pla TOV leo-tra/, 
 in allusion to Is. 11, 10 where Sept and 
 CiO ; cornp. Is. 11, 1. Also Rev. 5, 5. 
 22^ 16. Ecclus. 47, 22. 1 Mace. 1, 11. 
 
 pl^oa), , f. wo-w, (p t t a >) to root, to let 
 take root ; Pass, or Mid. to be or become 
 rooted, to take root, Theophr. Hist. PI. 2. 5. 
 6. ib. 8. 5. 4. Later intrans. to lake root, 
 Sept. for Po. tnui Is. 40, 24. Jer. 12, 2. 
 In N. T. only Pass. trop. to be roofed, 
 strengthened with roots, to be firmly fixed, 
 constant. Eph. 3, 18 / dyaTrrj tppifaptvoi. 
 Col. 2, 7. So Hdot. 1. 60, 64. Plut. de 
 Liber, educ. 9 clXX OTUV TIS pi&o-y TT]V 8v~ 
 vap.iv KT\. Plato Ep. 336. b. 
 
 piTTij, qs, T], (piWo),) a throw, cast, jerk, 
 as of a stone or weapon, Horn. II. 12. 462. 
 A poll. Rh. Argon. 4. 851 ; a rush or gust 
 of wind, Horn. II. 15. 171. Soph. Antig. 
 137. Plut. non posse suav. viv. 23. In 
 N. T. a jerk of the eye, a wink, twinkling ; 
 1 Cor. 15, 52 iv piny o<3oA/nov, in a mo 
 ment of time, Germ. Augenblick; comp. 
 Luke 4, 5. So Eustath. in II. d. p. 1024. 
 24 iv PpaxuruTT) \povov pirrfj. 
 
 f 
 O, f. lo-oj, (pmis, PI TTTQ),) pr. to 
 
 put in motion ; hence, to fan, to blow, to 
 blow up, e. g. fire, fuel, Aristot. de Admi- 
 rand. nvas Xt 3our 01 Kaiovrat, . . . purt6- 
 p.(voi (r^vi>vvrai ra^t coy. Anthol. Gr. III. 
 p. 20. 6 ; to fan a person, Anthol. Gr. III. 
 p. 42. 5. .Plut. M. Anton. 26. In N. T. 
 genr. to move to and fro, to toss, to agitate, 
 as waves, Pass. James 1 , 6 K\vSa>vi SoXao-- 
 0-171 . . . pnriop,(vq>. So Philo in Wetst. 
 N. T. ad loc. ei /iij irpos dvep,ov pmioiTO TO 
 vdwp. Dio Chrys. 33. p. 368. b. 
 
 pnrrea), S>, (collat. p tWa),) only in pres. 
 and imperf. as a frequentative, to throw or 
 cast repeatedly, Hdot. 4. 188. Pol. 1. 47. 4. 
 Xen. Conv. 2. 8; see Buttm. $ 112. n. 4. 
 5 114. Passow s. voc. In N. T. only Acts 
 22, 23 pnrrovvTuv TO. fytarta, throwing up 
 or tossing their outer garments in the air, 
 as also dust, in approbation and furtherance 
 of the uproar. This was customary in 
 theatres and other assemblies, e. g. Luc. 
 de Salt. 83 Toye Searpov anav . . . (irr]0 a>t> 
 Kai e /3oo>i/ Kal ras ecrS^ra? aTrtppiirrovv. 
 Aristsnet. I. 26 6 8f 8rjp.cs dvecmjKe . . . 
 Kal ra> X f ^P Kivel, Kal rrjv eVSijra ero/3. 
 Ovid. Amor. 3. 274 et date jactatis un- 
 dique signa togis. 
 
 piTTTQ), f. ^o), 1. to throw, to cast, 
 with a sudden motion, to hurl, to jerk, with 
 ace. and els C. ace. Luke 4, 35 ptyav avrbv 
 TO 8aip.6vtov els fMtcrov. 17, 2 ; iv rw i/ao> 
 Matt. 27, 5. With ace. and eVc c. gen. to 
 cast out, Acts 27, 29 tK -rrpvp-vris ptyavrts 
 dyxvpas Tf&crapas, sc. e TOV TrXoiou. V. 19. 
 For Acts 22, 23 see in piTrreco. Sept. for 
 *rpbvri Gen. 37, 19. 23. Ex, 1, 22. Judg. 
 9, 53. So c. tig Ceb. Tab. 10. Xen. An. 3. 
 3. 1 ; tVc Luc. D. Deor. 13. 2. Dem. 798. 
 25. In a milder sense, to put or lay down, 
 as sick persons, c. ace. Matt. 15, 30 tppt- 
 ^av avTovs napa TOVS 7f68as TOV I. Comp. 
 Sept. and Tpbttin 2 K. 2, 16. So Wisd. 
 11, 14. Dem. 413. 11 ovKf^eivoTrov TU iav- 
 TOV piirrei. 
 
 2. to cast forth, to throw apart, to scatter, 
 Pass. Part. perf. tppip-pevos, cast forth, 
 scattered, Matt. 9, 36. Diod. Sic. 13. 9 
 TO>V SvpaKOvaritoV . . . KOTO. TOV Sturyftov 
 fppip.p.fva>v. Pol. 5. 48. 2. 
 
 Po/3oa/i, , indec. Roboam, Heb. 
 D52rTl (he enlarges the people) Rehoboam, 
 pr. n. of the son and successor of Solomon, 
 from whom the ten tribes revolted, Matt. 1, 
 7 bis. See 1 K. c. 12. Jos. Ant. 8. 8. 1 sq. 
 
 P68r/, rjs, TJ, Rhoda, pr. n. of a hand 
 maid, Acts 12, 13. 
 
650 
 
 PoSo9, ov, 17, Rhodes, Acts 21, 1 ; a 
 celebrated island, the southeasternniost of 
 the Sporades, lying off the coast of Caria 
 in Asia Minor. Its capital was also called 
 Rhodes, and was remarkable for the famous 
 Colossus. See Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. III. 
 p. 375. Pococke Descr. of the East, II. i. 
 p. 237. 
 
 poi%r)$6v, adv. (poifew, poifoy,) with 
 rushing sound, with great noise, with a 
 crash, 2 Pet. 3, 10. Hesych. poirj86v 
 <r<po8p(os r)x r l ri<ov - Hero ap. Musaeum 
 339 poifadbv TrpoKaprjvos UTT ^At/Sdrov Tre tre 
 irvpyov. Lycophr. 66. 
 
 pOfKJxua, us, T), a sword, sabre, pr. a 
 long and broad sword used espec. by the 
 Thracians, and carried on the right shoul 
 der, Plut. PauL.^Em. 18 irptaroi fie ot 6pti- 
 Kfs . . . opSay fie pop.(paias /3apvo-ifijjpovy 
 ano To>v Se^tcoi/ u>p.uv eVtaeiWrey. In N. T. 
 genr. a sword, Rev. 1, 16 pop.<pai a fit o-ro- 
 Moy oeia. 2, 12. 16. 6, 8. 19, 15. 21. Trop. 
 Luke 2, 35 o-ov fie avTrjs TTJV ifrvx*l v fiteAev- 
 o-erat pop.q>aia, i. e. anguish of soul shall 
 come upon thee. Sept. for a-in Ex. 32, 
 26. Ez. 5, 1. So Jos. Ant. 6! 12. 4 17 
 pofj.<paia TOV FoXta3ov. 7. 12. 1. 
 
 Povftijv, 6, indec. Reuben, Heb. ^ISO 
 (see, a son !) pr. n. of the eldest son of Ja 
 cob, born of Leah, Gen. 29, 32 sq. In 
 N. T. the tribe of Reuben, Rev. 7, 5. 
 
 PouS", ,7, indec. Ruth, Heb. rvn (female 
 friend), pr. n. of a Moabitess, afterwards 
 the wife of Boaz, Matt. 1, 5. 
 
 Pavlov, ov, 6, Rufus, pr. n. of a Chris 
 tian, Mark 15, 21. Rom. 16, 13. 
 
 pVf^Tjj rjs, f], (obs. pva>, e pvo>,) impetus, im 
 pulse, onset, i. q. 6pp.rj, Jos. Ant. 7. 10. 2. 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 31. In the later usage and 
 N. T. a street, lane, alley of a city, in dis 
 tinction from f) TrXaTfia q. v. Matt. 6, 2. 
 Luke 14, 21 tig ray TrXareiay KOI pvp-as TTJS 
 TroXewy. Acts 9, 11. 12, 10. Sept. for s m 
 Is. 15, 3. So Ecclus. 9, 7. Pol. 6. 29. l . 
 See Lob. ad Phryn. p. 404. Sturz de Dial. 
 Mac. p. 29. Wetstein N. T. I. p. 319. 
 
 pvo/J,at, f. pva-op-ai, Mid. depon. (obs. 
 p vo>, e pvo),) pr. to draw or snatch to oneself, 
 from danger, i. q. io rescue, to deliver ; see 
 Passow sub v. Buttm. } 114. Aor. 1 e pp v- 
 cr^rjv as Pass. Luke 1, 74. al. see Buttm. 
 5 113. n. 6. E. g. a) With ace. simpl. 
 Matt. 27, 43 pvo-do-3o> vvv avrov. 2 Pet. 2, 
 7. Absol. Rom. 11, 26 6 pvoptvos, the de 
 liverer, quoted from Is. 59, 20 where Sept. 
 for bxa . Sept. genr. for bxa Is. 48, 20 ; 
 "Ex. 2, 19. Is. 5, 30. So &L V. H. 
 
 4. 5. Hdian. 1. 15. 12. 0) With an ad- 
 junct/rom whence ; e. g. with OTTO c. gen. 
 Matt. 6, 13 p vo-<u f/p.as OTTO TOV jrovrjpov. 
 [Luke 11, 4.] Rom. 15, 31. 1 Thess. 1, 10. 
 2 Thess. 3, 2. 2 Tim. 4, 18. Sept. for 
 1 b->3tn 2 Sam. 19, 9. Prov. 11, 4; s-VCin 
 ") Ez. 37, 23. With f K c. gen. Rom. 7, 
 24 riy /if pvaerai eVc TOV o-d>/iaroy KrX. 
 2 Cor. 1, 10 ter. Col. 1, 13. 2 Tim. 3, 11. 
 2 Pet. 2, 9. Pass. Luke 1, 74. 2 Tim. 4, 
 17.. Sept. for -pa bxa Gen. 48, 16; injin 
 IB Judg. 8, 34. 2 Sam. 22, 49. So c. V/e 
 Jos. Vit. 15. Diod. Sic. 12. 53. Hdot. 5. 49. 
 pVTrapevopai, Mid. depon. (pWapdy,) 
 to be filthy, trop. Rev. 22, 11 Grb. and later. 
 The form is of very doubtful authority ; see 
 Passow. 
 
 pvTrapia, as , {,, (pWapo y,) filth, filthi- 
 ness, trop. in a moral sense, James 1, 21. 
 Plut. de Adul. et Amic. 19. Id. Critias 
 47. 
 
 d, ov, (pvTros,) filthy, foul, 
 dirty, James 2, 2 TTTU>XOS tv pimapa ecrS^rt. 
 Trop. in a moral sense, Rev. 22, 11 Grb. 
 Sept. for sos Zech. 3, 3. 4. Jos. Ant. 7. 
 11. 3 pvnapav eVSJjra. Ceb. Tab. 10. JEl. 
 V. H. 14. 10. Trop. Act. Thorn. 13pWapa 
 
 pVTTO?, ov, 6, filth, fillhiness, 1 Pet. 3, 
 21 ov aapKos ano^fcns pvnov. Sept. for 
 X5DI3 Job 14, 4 ; nx S Is. 4, 4. Luc. Ana- 
 char. 29. Pol. 32. 1\ 8. Plato Farm. 130. c. 
 
 pVTroo), cS, f. wcro); (pinros, poet, for pv- 
 7rdo) ; ) to be filthy, trop. in Rec. Rev. 22. 1 1 
 bis, 6 pv7rd>j>, pVTrcotrdro) ert. Horn. Od. 23. 
 115. Act. Thorn. 5 52 tVSijy ptpvn<afjLfvrj. 
 
 pvcns, teas, TI, (pe w,) a flowing, flux, 
 e. g. rov aip.aTos Mark 5, 25. Luke 8, 43. 
 44. Sept. for sit Lev. 15, 24 sq. JEL V. 
 H. 6. 6 TTJV p. TOV alp-aros. Pol. 2. 1 6. 6 of 
 a current. Plato Legg. 944. b. 
 
 pirns, /Soy, 17, (obs. pva>, epvw,) a fold, 
 wrinkle, which draws together, contracts ; 
 trop. Eph. 5, 27. Aristoph. Plut. 1051. 
 Diod. Sic. 4. 51. Plato Conv. 190. e. 
 
 pvo), see pvofiai. 
 
 Payfiaitcos, {], 6v, (Pap.r), ) Roman,L\iKti 
 23, 38. Jos. de Vit. 71. Hdian. 5. 5. 6. 
 
 Pft)yLiai09, ov, 6, ( Po>/ij;,) a Roman, a 
 Roman citizen, Acts 2, 10. 16, 21. 37. 38. 
 22, 25. 26. 27. 29. 23, 27. Genr. ot Po>- 
 p-aloi, the Romans, John 11,48. Acts 25, 
 16. 28, 17. Sing. Hdian. 4. 10. 11. Plur. 
 Jos. Vit. 71. Hdian. 1. 12. 11. Plut. 
 Pomp. 1. 
 
651 
 
 adv. CPF?>) in the Roman 
 tongue, in Latin, John 19, 20 icai rjv yrypa/*- 
 pfvov E/3paioTt, EAXjji/tari , Pa>/*a ioTi. On 
 tlie signification of adverbs in -tori see 
 Buttm. J119. 15. c. 
 
 Pco/J,r), rjs, 17, .Row, the city, Acts 18, 
 2. 19, 21. 23, 11. 28, 14. 16. Rom. 1, 7. 
 15. 2 Tim. 1, 17. Hdian. 2. 14. 10. Plut. 
 Pomp. 27. 
 
 paJWVfAi, f. paa-a, to strengthen, to 
 nakejirm, Plut. Camill. 37 paxras TO o-w/ia 
 
 8iaya>>t o-a<r3at. Pass. Plut. Coriol. 24 tfavs 
 ptrSero pa>w>vp.cvov avrov TO cra>p.a. id. Ro- 
 mul. 25. Oftener Pass. perf. tppaspai as 
 present, to be strong, well, 3 Mace. 3, 13. 
 Luc. Somn. s. Gall. 23. Xen. (Ec. 10. 5. 
 Comp. Buttm. 5 113. 7. { 114. In N. T. 
 only imperat. tppaxro, as a formula at the 
 end of a letter, like Lat. vale, Engl. fare 
 well ; Acts 23, 30 eppwo-o. 15, 29 epp<ao-3f. 
 So 2 Mace. 11, 21. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 33. 
 Artemid. 3. 44 iSiof irdfrrjs eVioToXJJf TO 
 tyeiv. 
 
 thou hast forsaken me, from r. p3l*5 to leave, 
 to forsake, 2 pers. Sing. c. suff. Matt. 27, 
 46 et Mark 15, 34, quoted from Ps. 22, 2 
 where Chald. for Heb. ^Mr* id. 
 
 <ra@0(a&, Sabaoth, Heb. rvixas, i.e. 
 hosts, armies, Plur. of jox host. Hence 
 Sept. Kvpios o-a/3a3 i. q. Heb. r^^S flirt 1 ?, 
 Lord </ .ffoste, i. e. of the angelic hosts ; 
 comp. 2 Chr. 18, 18. Ps. 103, 21. Luke 2, 
 13. In N. T. in the like sense, xvpios 
 <ra|3aa>3 , Lord of Sabaoth, Lord nf Hosts, 
 James 5, 4. Rom. 9,29 quoted from Is. 1, 9 
 where Sept. for Heb. * rv<, as a l so 2, 12. 
 6, 3. al. The general sense is Jehovah 
 Omnipotent, and the LXX often translate it 
 by TrairoKpaTwp q. v. See more in Heb. 
 Lex. art. WS no. 2. b. 
 
 cra^8/3artcr/i6?, ov, 6, (o-a/3/3aTi a>, o-d/3- 
 /3aToi>,) sabbatism, pr. a keeping sabbath, a 
 lying by from labour, res* ; in N. T. only 
 of an eternal rest with God, Heb. 4, 9. 
 The Rabbins employ the same figure, see 
 Schoettg. Hor. Heb. ad loc. Plut. de Su- 
 perst. 3. 
 
 cra/3/3aTOi/, O u, TO, the sabbath, Heb. 
 nasJ, pr. rest, a lying by from labour, see 
 Heb. Lex. r. rati. Plur. Ta o-d/3ura, 
 mostly for the Singular ; originally perh. 
 an imitation of the Aramaean form NnaEJ; 
 or else after the analogy of other names of 
 festivals, as TO. iynaivia, TO. ytvta-ia, ra *tv- 
 p.a, also 01 yd/lot, nuptials ; see Winer 5 27. 
 3. n. Plur. dat. TOIS o-d/3ao-i, Matt. 
 12, 1. 5. al. Meleag. 83. 4 ; as if from a 
 nominat. o-d^aT, rai2 ; Winer } 8. 2. n. 
 
 1. Pr. the sabbath,ihe Jewish sabbath, the 
 seventh day of the week, kept originally by 
 a total cessation from all labour, even to 
 
 the kindling of a fire ; but apparently with 
 out any public solemnities except an addi 
 tion to the daily sacrifice in the tabernacle 
 and the changing of the shew-bread ; see 
 Ex. 20, 8 sq. 31, 12 sq. Lev. 24, 8. Num. 
 
 15, 32 sq. 28, 9. Jos. Ant. 13. 1.3. ib. 13. 
 
 8. 4. ib. 14. 4. 2. B. J. 1. 7. 3. The cus 
 tom of reading the Scriptures in the public 
 assemblies and synagogues, appears to have 
 been introduced after the exile ; Neh. c. 8 
 Luke 4, 16 sq. E. g. 
 
 a) Sing. TO o-dfifiaTov as Norn. Mark 
 2, 27 TO o-d/3. 8ia rbv av%p. Lnke 23, 54. 
 John 5, 9. 10. 9, 14 ; as Ace. Matt. 12, 5 
 TO o-d/3. ^e/3r;Xoi)o-t. Mark 2, 27 oi>x o atftp, 
 dia TO a-dfipaTov. Luke 23, 56. John 5, 18. 
 
 9, 16. Acts 13, 27. 42. 15,21. 18,4; TOV 
 o-a/3/3dTov Matt. 12, 8. Mark 2, 28. 6, 2. 
 
 16, 1. Luke 6, 5. Acts 1,12 see in 6So j no. 
 2. b , also f]p,fpa TOV o~a/3/3aTou Luke 1 3, 
 14. 16. 14, 5. John 19, 31. Dat. TW o-a0- 
 /3dTw Luke 13, 14. 15. 14, 1. 3. Acts 13, 
 44 ; f v fra$3aTa> Matt. 12, 2. 24, 20. Luke 
 6, 1. 6. 7. John 5, 16. 7, 22. 23 bis. 19, 31. 
 So genr. Sept. for P2? Ex. 31, 13. 2 K. 
 4, 23. Neh. 10, 31. 13, 15. Jos. B. J. 2. 
 
 17, 10. de Vit. I 32. 
 
 b) Plural. a) In a plural signif. Acts 
 17, 2 eVi o-dffiaTa Tpla. Col. 2, 16. So 
 Sept. Is. 1,13. Hos. 2, 11. /3) Elsewhere 
 only in Gen. and Dat. i. q. Sing, see above 
 init. E. g. Gen. T>V <raj3/3aTG>i>, Matt. 
 28, 1 fyt 8f o-a$|3dTa>i> see in 6SJr no. 2 ; 
 also f)p-fpa TO>I> crajSlSdTuiv Luke 4, 1 6. Acts 
 13,14.16,13. Dat. TO!? o-d^/3ao-t, see 
 above init. Matt. 12, 1. 5. 10. 11. 12. Mark 
 1, 21. 3, 2. 4. Luke 6, 9 ; eV TO IS o-d|3ao-i 
 Mark 2, 23. 24. Luke 4, 31. 6, 2. 13, 10. 
 Jos. Ant. 1. 1. 1 ; fj^fpa TU>V <raft. Sept. 
 Ex. 35, 3. Deut. 5, 12. 1 Mace. 2, 34. Joa. 
 Ant. 12.6. 2 ; TOIJ o-d/3a<ri 1 Mace. 2, 38. 
 
652 
 
 Jos. Anl. 1 3. 8. 4. B. J. 1 . 7. 3 ; but Sept. 
 rots (rafipdTois Num. 28, 10. 2 Chr. 2, 4. 
 8, 13. 
 
 2. Melon, a sabbath, put for the interval 
 from sabbath to sabbath ; hence a se nnight, 
 week ; so espec. Luke 18,12 vyo-revo 8ls 
 rov (rapfidrov. Elsewhere only after nu 
 merals marking the days of the week ; 
 Mark 16, 9 irparr) (fj/jifpa) craftpdrov. Plur. 
 Matt. 28, 1 els ptav a-aPpdrav. Mark 16,2. 
 Luke 24, 1. John 20, 1. 19. Acts 20, 7. 
 1 Cor. 16, 2. So Heb. rrinsia Sept. /3So- 
 pAdas Lev. 23, 15, comp. Deut. 16, 9 ; also 
 the Syriac Vers. Luke 18, 12. In the Tal- 
 mudists the days of the week are written : 
 raiaa inx, /an ^in, un izjibia, i. e. 
 the first, second, third day in the sabbath 
 (week) ; see Lightfoot Hor. Heb. in Matt. 
 28, 1. Comp. Ideler Handb. der Chronol. 
 
 I. p. 481. 
 
 crayijvr), rjs, 17, (crayij, o-arra>,) a net, 
 drag-iiet, seine, used in fishing and drawn 
 to the shore, Matt. 13, 47. Sept. for tnn 
 Ez. 26, 5. 14. Luc. Pise. 51. Ml H. A. 
 
 II. 12. Plut. de Superst. 8 fin. 
 
 2a&8ovfcato<i, ov, 6, a Sadducee ; Plur. 
 oi SaSSovKatot, the Sadducees ; a sect of the 
 Jews, in opposition to the Pharisees and 
 Essenes, Jos. B. J. 2. c. 8. Some derive 
 the name from Heb. PIS or p" 1 ?^, q. d. the 
 Just ; the Talmudists refer it to a certain 
 pVTS Sadok, who according to them lived 
 about three centuries before Christ and was 
 the founder of the sect. The Sadducees 
 rejected all traditions and unwritten laws, 
 which the Pharisees prized so highly ; and 
 held the Scriptures to be the only source 
 and rule of the Jewish religion. They de 
 nied the existence of angels and spirits, as 
 well as an overruling providence ; and held 
 that the soul of man dies with the body, 
 rejecting of course the idea of a future state 
 of rewards and punishments. In their lives 
 and morals they were more strict than the 
 Pharisees ; and although their tenets were 
 not generally acceptable among the common 
 people, yet they were adopted by many of 
 the higher ranks. See espec. Jos. 1. c. and 
 also Ant. 13. 5. 9. ib. 13. 10. 6. ib. 18. 1. 
 4. ib. 20. 9. 1. B. J. 2. 8. 14. Trigland de 
 tribus Judffior. Sectis Syntagma, Delft 
 1703, in Ugolini Thesaur. XXII. Winer 
 Realw. art. Sadducaer. Descendants of 
 the Sadducees are apparently the modern 
 Karaites ; see Henderson s Bibl. Research 
 es and Travels in Russia, p. 233 sq. 306 sq. 
 Trigland 1. c. de Secta Karaeorum, Delft 
 1703, in Ugolini 1. c. Matt. 3, 7. 16, 1. 
 
 6. 11. 12. 22, 23. 34. Mark 12, 18. Luke 
 20, 27. Acts 4, 1. 5, 17. 23, 6. 7. 8. 
 
 2aS(t)K, 6, indec. Sadok, Heb. pVU, 
 pr. n. of one of Jesus ancestors, Matt. 1, 
 14 bis. 
 
 aaivo), f. ai/w, (kindr. <re i,) to wag, to 
 move to and fro, pr. of dogs and other ani 
 mals which wag their tails in fondness, 
 JEl V. H. 13. 41 [42]. Luc. D. Deor. 12. 
 2 ; trop. to caress, to flatter, Luc. Merc. 
 Cond. 20. ^Eschyl. Choeph. 194. In N. T. 
 trop. to move in mind, to disturb ; Pass. 
 1 Thess. 3, 3 r<u /xjySsVa traiVecrSai eV rat? 
 3Xtyeo-i Tavrais . So Diog. Laert. 8. 1 . 21 
 oi 8f (raiv6p.fvoi TOLS \fyop.fvois fSaKpvov. 
 Eurip. Rhes. 55 o-aivei /* evw^os (ppv- 
 KT<apia. 
 
 (rate/cos, ov, 6, Heb. pb, Engl. sack 
 ing, sackcloth, i. e. coarse black cloth com 
 monly made of hair (Rev. 6, 12) and used 
 for straining (Heb. pp^), for sacks, and 
 for mourning-garments ; in the latter case 
 it was worn instead of the ordinary gar 
 ments, or bound around the loins, or spread 
 under a person on the ground ; see Jos. 
 Ant. 8. 14. 4. ib. 5. 1. 12. ib. 10. 1. 3. ib. 
 
 7. 7. 4. Sept. Gen. 37, 34. 1 K. 20, 32. 
 Is. 58, 5. Joel 1, 8. Jon. 3, 5 sq. Such 
 garments were also worn by prophets and 
 ascetics, Is. 20, 2. Zech. 13, 4; comp. 
 2K. 1, 8. Matt. 3, 4. Hence in N. T. 
 genr. sackcloth, Rev. 6, 12 6 ^Xioj eytvtro 
 p.e\as vs O-CLKKOS rpixwos, comp. Is. 50, 3. 
 Ecclus. 25, 17. Of mourning-garments, 
 Matt. 11,21 ev craKKto KOI o-!ro8<p. Luke 10, 
 13. Of a prophet s garment, Rev. 11, 3. 
 Sept. genr. for P^? 11. cc. So Aristoph. 
 Acharn. 745, 822. The correct orthography 
 is every where O-OKKOS, not (TOKOS, Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 257 ; comp. Thorn. M. p. 789. 
 Moeris p. 354. 
 
 5*aXa, o, indec. Sala, Heb. fb& (a 
 dart) Shelah, Salah, pr. n. of a son or 
 grandson of Arphaxad, Luke 3, 35. See 
 Gen. 10, 24. 11, 13; comp. in KaVVav. 
 
 Ha\cfoir)\ 6, indec. Salalhiel, Heb. 
 biOPibNfcJ (I asked him of God) Shealliel, 
 pr. n. a) A son of Jechoniah, an ances 
 tor of Jesus in the royal line, Matt. 1,12 
 bis. See 1 Chr. 3, 17. Ezra 3, 2. b) An 
 other ancestor of Jesus, not of the royal 
 line, Luke 3, 27. See Gr. Harm. p. 186. 
 
 2a\afJ,k, Ivos, f), Salamis, one of the 
 chief cities of Cyprus, on the S. E. coast 
 of the island, Acts 13, 5. Afterwards call 
 ed Constantia; and now Old Famagusia. 
 See Pococke Descr. of the East, II. i. p. 210 
 
653 
 
 fj, indec. Salim, pr. n. of a 
 place, John 3, 23. Prob. the place men 
 tioned by Jerome, eight Rom. miles south 
 of Bethshean in or near the valley of the 
 Jordan. Onomast. art. Salim, " In octavo 
 quoque lapide a Scythopoli in campo vicus 
 Salumias appellatur." Comp. Judith 4, 4. 
 
 cra\.eva), f. euo-&>, (o-oXos,) 1. to moi-e 
 to and fro, to shake, to toss, i. e. to put into 
 a state of waving, rocking, vibratory mo 
 tion ; c. ace. Luke 6, 48. Heb. 12, 26 ov fj 
 (fxvvfj ri]i> yrjv e crdXeiiere. Pass. Matt. 11, 7 
 et Luke 7, 24 Kah.afj.ov virb dvep.ov <raXeuo- 
 pfvov. Matt. 24, 29. Mark 13, 25. Luke 
 21, 26. Acts 4, 31. 16, 26. Luke 6, 38 /*e- 
 rpov a-fcrdkfvpfvov i. e. shaken down. Sept. 
 for 55 Ps. 18, 18; ate 1 Chr. 16. 30. 
 So Jos. T Ant. 8. 5. 2. Diod. Sic. 12. 47. 
 Plato Tim. 79. e. Trop. of things ready 
 to fall and perish ; Heb. 12, 27 bis, ra cra- 
 Xevofieva, things shaken, perishable, i. e. 
 things created, as an emblem of the Mosaic 
 dispensation, opp. TO. /xi) o-aXevoptva, the 
 new heavens and new earth, the Christian 
 dispensation. Comp. Plut. Dion. 8 T^ 
 TvpavviBa (roXevovcrai/. Hdian. 5. 1.7. 
 
 2. Trop. to move in mind, to agitate, to 
 disturb, c. ace. Acts 17, 13 TOVS o^Xou? 
 <ra\(vtiv, to excite the people, to cause a 
 tumult. Pass. 2 Thess. 2, 2. Acts 2, 25 
 quoted from Ps. 16, 8 where Sept. for 
 Ota. 1 Mace. 6, 8. Ecclus. 29, 18. 
 48, 19. 
 
 2aX7?/4, fi, indec. Salem, Heb. O^Qi 
 (peace), the ancient name .of Jerusalem, 
 Heb. 7, 1. 2; see in ifpovo-aX^/i. Jos. 
 Ant. 1. 10. 2 26Xu/ia. 
 
 2a\p(av, 6, indec. Salmon, Heb. "pabiO 
 (clothed), pr. n. of the father of Boaz, Matt. 
 1, 4. 5. Luke 3, 32. See in Paxd/3. 
 
 ^aX/iooi^, ys, t], Salmone, pr. n. of a 
 promontory, the eastern extremity of the 
 island of Crete, Acts 27, 7. Strabo 10. p. 
 472 Sa/Jiuviov. 
 
 craXo?, ov, 6, pr. motion to and fro, agi 
 tation, tossing, i. e. any waving, rocking, 
 vibratory motion ; in N. T. only of the sea, 
 and hence put for the rolling sea, billows, 
 Luke 21, 25. Sept. for C]?t Jon. 1,15; for 
 JVQ of an earthquake Is. 24, 20. Luc. Tox. 
 19. Plut. Thes. 20. Diod. Sic. 20. 74. 
 
 tyyoj, f], a trump, trumpet, 
 1 Cor. 14, 8. Rev. 1, 10. 4, 1. 8, 2. 6. 13. 
 9, 14. As announcing the approach or 
 presence of God, Heb. 12, 19 (Ex. 19, 13. 
 16. 19, comp. 1 K. 1, 34. 39) ; or also the 
 final advent of the Messiah, Matt 24, 31. 
 
 1 Cor. 15, 52 tv TJI (crxdrr] <rd\Triyyt 
 1 Thess. 4, 16 cr. 3eov, see in Seo r no. 1. b 
 Sept. for 18-iri Ex. 1. c. 1 Sam. 13, 3 
 rnx xn 2 K. 12, 14. ^El. V. H. 2. 44 
 Pol. 15. 12. 2. Xen. An. 4. 2. 1. 
 
 craX7n&>, f. iVa), (<raX7rry ; ) aor. 1 
 t a-dXnia-a ; but with earlier aor. 1 <rdX- 
 7riya, Xen. An. 1. 2. 17; comp. Lob. ad 
 Phr. p. 191. Buttm. 5 114. Winer { 15. 
 To trumpet, to sound a trumpet, to sound, 
 absol. Matt. 6, 2 p.f) <rdh.nicrrjs fp.npoa Sfv 
 a-ov. Rev. 8, 6. 7. 8. 10. 12. 13. 9, 1. 13. 
 10, 7. 11, 15. Impers. or with subject im 
 plied, of the final trump sounded before the 
 Messiah; 1 Cor. 15, 52 o-oXTnVet yap. 
 Winer $ 39. 1. n. Buttm. $ 129. 16. Sept. 
 for Sgn Num. 10, 3 sq. Is. 27, 13. Joel 
 
 2, l.JEl V. H. 1. 26. Pol. 12. 4. 4. 
 Xen. 1. c. 
 
 <raX 7UO T?79, oO, 6, (o-aA7rifo>,) a trum 
 peter, Rev. 18, 22. Theophr. Char. 29 or 
 25. Dion. Hal. Ant. 4. 17. Pol. 1. 45. 13. 
 The earlier and better form was 0-0X77 tyKnjr 
 Dem. 284. 26. Xen. An. 4. 3. 29. See 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 191. 
 
 ^aXto/i?;, Tjy, 17, Salome, pr. n. of tho 
 wife of Zebedee, the mother of the apostles 
 James and John, Mark 15,40. 16, 1 ; comp. 
 Matt. 27, 56. 
 
 5*a/tapeia, as, v, Samaria, Heb. ThotB 
 (watch-height), pr. n. of a celebrated city 
 situated near the middle of Palestine, built 
 by Omri king of Israel, on a hill of the same 
 name in the midst of a beautiful region of 
 country. It was the metropolis of the king 
 dom of Israel or the ten tribes ; and after 
 being several times destroyed and restored, 
 it was enlarged and beautified by Herod the 
 Great, and named by him Sebaste in honour 
 of Augustus. It is now an inconsiderable 
 village, still called Sebitslieh, with remains 
 of ancient temples and an extensive colon 
 nade. See 1 K. 16 ; 24. 2 K. c. 17. Am. 
 6, 1. Mic. 1, 5 sq. Jos. Ant. 8. 12. 5. ib. 
 13. It). 2, 3. ib. 14. 5. 3. ib. 15. 7. 7. ib. 
 15. 8. 5. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. II. ii. p. 
 112 sq. Bibl. Res. in Palest. III. p. 139- 
 149. In N. T. 
 
 1. Pr. the city of Samaria, Acts 8, 5. 
 Meton. for the inhabitants, Acts 8, 14. 
 
 2. In a wider sense, the region of Sama 
 ria, the district of which Samaria was the 
 chief city, lying between Judea and Galilee 
 or the plain of Esdraelon ; see Jos. B. J. 3. 
 
 3. 4. E. g. Luke 17, 11. John 4, 4. 5. 7. 
 Acts 1, 8. 8, 1. 9. 9, 31. 15, 3. So 
 Sept. and Thatt 2 K. 17, 26. 23,19. 
 Jos. Ant. 13. 2. 3. 
 
654 
 
 ?, O v, 6, a Samaritan, an 
 inhabitant of the city or country of Sama 
 ria ; spoken in N. T. of the descendants of 
 a people, sprung originally from the heathen 
 colonists sent into the country by Shalma- 
 neser, possibly with an intermixture from 
 straggling Israelites ; 2 K. 17,24. Jos. Ant. 
 9. 14. 1. ib. 10. 4. 7. This people, although 
 priests were sent to teach them the Jewish 
 religion, and although they adopted the 
 books of Moses, continued in gross idolatry, 
 and were always regarded as Gentiles by 
 the Jews; 2 K. 17, 26-41. When the 
 Jews, after their return from exile, began to 
 rebuild Jerusalem and the temple, the Sa 
 maritans also laid claim to a descent from 
 Ephraim and Manasseh, and requested per 
 mission to aid the Jews in their work ; but 
 this being refused, they turned against them 
 and calumniated them before the Persian 
 kings ; Ezra 4, 1 sq. Neh. 4, 1 sq. Jos. 
 Ant. 11. 4. 3 sq. They afterwards erected 
 a temple on Mount Gerizim, in allusion to 
 Deut. 27, 1 1 sq. where they instituted sa 
 cred rites in accordance with the law of 
 Moses ; and Shechem at the foot of Geri 
 zim became their chief city; Jos. Ant. 11. 
 8. 2, 4. From these and other circum 
 stances, the national hatred between the 
 Jews and Samaritans was continually fos 
 tered and augmented ; the name Samaritan 
 became to the Jews a term of reproach, 
 and intercourse with them was carefully 
 avoided ; see John 4, 9. 8, 48 ; comp. Jos. 
 Ant. 11. 8. 6. ib. 12. 5. 5. ib. 13. 3. 4. The 
 temple on Gerizim was destroyed by Hyr- 
 canus about 129 B. C. but the Samaritans 
 still Jield the mountain as sacred and the 
 proper place of national worship, John 4, 
 20. 21. The same is the case with the 
 small remnant of the Samaritans existing 
 at the present day ; who still go three times 
 a year from Nablus, the ancient Shechem, 
 to worship on Mount Gerizim ; see Bibl. 
 Res. in Palest. III. p. 96-136. Winer 
 Realw. art. Samaritaner. The Samaritans 
 like the Jews, expected a Messiah, John 4, 
 25 ; and many of them became the disciples 
 of Jesus, comp. John 4, 39 sq. Acts 9, 31. 
 1 5, 3. On the Samaritan Pentateuch and 
 the Samaritans generally, see Gesen. de 
 Pent. Sam. etc. Hal. 1815. Winer de Vers. 
 Pent. Sam. etc. Lips. 1817. Stuart on Sa- 
 mar. Pent, and Lit. in Bibl. Repos. 1832. 
 p. 681. Cellarii Collectan. Hist. Samarit. 
 Cizae 1688. De Sacy Correspondence des 
 Samaritaines, in Notices et Extraits des 
 Mss. etc. T. XI. Paris 1829. Bibl. Res. 
 in Palest. 1. c. In N. T. Matt. 10, 5. Luke 
 
 9, 52. 10, 33. 17, 16. John 4, 9. 39. 40. 
 8, 48. Acts 8, 25. 
 
 s, f,, a Samaritan wo 
 
 man, John 4, 9 bis. 
 
 r] S , 17, Samolhrace, an 
 island in the N. E. part of the ^Egean sea, 
 north of the Hellespont, with a lofty moun 
 tain, Acts 16, 11. It was anciently called 
 Dardana, Leucania, and also Samos : and 
 to distinguish it from the other Samos, the 
 name of Thrace was added, i. e. 2dp.os 
 QpaKTjf, whence contr. ^afio^spaKrj. The 
 island was celebrated for the mysteries of 
 Ceres and Proserpine, and was a sacred 
 asylum. Still called Samotraki or Saman- 
 drachi, with a single village, Castro. See 
 Diod. Sic. 3. 55. ib. 5. 47. Plin. H. N. 5. 
 12. Miss. Herald 1836. p. 246. O. v. Rich- 
 ter Wallf. p. 438 sq. 
 
 , ov, fj, Samos, an island of the 
 JSgean, near the western coast of Asia Mi 
 nor, southwest of Ephesus. It was cele 
 brated for the worship of Juno, for its valu 
 able pottery, and as the birth-place of Py 
 thagoras. Acts 20, 15. Diod. Sic. 5. 81. 
 Strabo 14. p. 636. Pococke Descr. of the 
 East II. ii. p. 24 sq. 
 
 , 6, indec. Samuel, Ileb. 
 u (heard of God, or, name of God), pr. 
 n. of the celebrated Hebrew prophet, the 
 son of Elkanah and Hannah, the last of the 
 D^DStC nr judges, who anointed Saul and 
 after him David as king ; see his history 
 in 1 Sam. c. 1-25. Acts 3,24. 13,20. Heb. 
 11, 32. 
 
 , 6, indec. Sampson, Heb. 
 tt) (sun-like), pr. n. of a BBiC or judge 
 of Israel, famous for his strength, Heb. 11, 
 32. Comp. Judg. c. 13-16. 
 
 <rav$d\tov, O v, TO, (dim. of o-dv8a\ov.) 
 a sandal, a sole of wood or hide, covering 
 the bottom of the foot, and bound on with 
 thongs, Mark 6, 9. Acts 12, 8. Sept. for 
 i?3 Josh. 9, 5. Is. 20, 2. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 
 23. Hdot. 2. 91. Luc. Herod. 5 6 8e TIS, 
 p.d\a SouXi/ccof dfaiiptl TO o-av8d\iov (K rov 
 TroSoy, ws KaTa.K\ivoiTo fj8r]. See more in 
 
 crai/iy, /Soy, 17, a board, plank, e. g. of a 
 ship, Acts 27, 44. Sept. for n^b Ez. 27, 
 5. Jos. Ant. 8. 5. 2. Pol. 2. 5. 5. Plut 
 Pericl. 28. 
 
 aov\ 6, indec. Saul, Heb. 
 (asked for, desired), pr. n. a) Of the 
 first king of Israel, Acts 13, 21 ; comp. 
 1 Sam. c. 9 sq. b) The Jewish name of 
 
655 
 
 the apostle Paul, which with a Greek end 
 ing became SavXos q. v. Acts 9, 4. 17. 22, 
 7. 13. 26, 14. 
 
 o-aTT/309, a, oV, ((nJTro,) 1. bad, de 
 cayed, rotten ; of vegetable or animal sub 
 stances, as a tree and its fruit, fish, Matt. 7, 
 17. 18. 12, 33 bis. 13, 48. Luke 6, 43 bis. 
 
 Arr.Diss. Epict. 4. 4. 25. Dem. 615. 11. 
 2. Trop. in a moral sense, corrupt, foul, 
 
 e. g. Xdyor Eph. 4, 29. Arr. Epict. 3. 22. 
 61 Sdy/xa. Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 377 sq. 
 
 ^air^eiptj, rjs, 17, Sapphira, pr. n. of 
 the wife of Ananias, Acts 5, 1. 
 
 <ra7T<f)ipo$, ov, f], the sapphire, a pre 
 cious stone, next in hardness and value to 
 the diamond, mostly of a blue colour in va 
 rious shades, Rev. 21, 19. Sept. and Heb. 
 """BO Ex. 24, 10. 28, IS.JEl. V. H. 14. 
 34. Theophr. Fragm. de Lap. 23, 37. See 
 Rosenm. Alterthk. IV. i. p. 35. 
 
 (rapydvij, r/s, f], (comp. Heb. 3^\0, 
 Aram. 3t!P . to interweave, to braid,) pr. any 
 thing braided, twisted, interwoven, e. g. a 
 cord, ^Eschyl. Suppl. 788 or 801. In N. 
 T. a rope-basket, network of cords, 2 Cor. 11, 
 33; comp. Acts 9, 25 am/pis. So Suid. 
 crapydvTj ol ftfv o~\oii>iov TI, ol 8e TrXey^ia TI 
 (< o-xoiviov. Athen. 3. p. 119. b. ib. 9. p. 
 407. e. 
 
 5*apSct9, we, at, Sardis, the metropolis 
 of Lydia in Asia Minor, situated at the foot 
 of Mount Tmolus on the banks of the river 
 Pactolus, celebrated for its wealth and vo 
 luptuous debauchery. Rev. 1. 11. 3, 1. 4. 
 
 Diod. Sic. 13. 70. Xen. Cyr. 7. 2. 11, 12. 
 See Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. I. ii. p. 180, 222. 
 Hamilton s Res. in Asia M. I. p. 146 sq. 
 
 crdpSivos, ov, 6, i. q. vapo ios q. v. Rev. 
 4, 3 Rec. 
 
 adp&ios, ov, 6, sardius, sardian, the 
 Sardian stone, a precious stone of a blood- 
 red or sometimes of a flesh-colour, more 
 commonly known as the cornelian; Rev. 
 4, 3 in later edit. 21, 20 where Lachm. TO 
 <rdp8toi>. So Sept. o-dpo"iov for Heb. E lfc 
 Ex. 28, 17. Ez. 28, 13. Theophr. Fragm. 
 de Lap. 30. See Rosenm. Alterthk. IV. i. p. 
 30 sq. 
 
 crap$6vv%, v%os, 17, sardonyx, a precious 
 stone exhibiting a milk-white variety of the 
 onyx or chalcedony, intermingled with 
 shades or stripes of sardian or carnelian ; 
 Rev. 21, 20. Jos. Ant. 3. 7. 5. Plin. H. 
 N. 37. 12. See Rosenm. Alterthk. IV. i. p. 
 36 sq. 
 
 ISdpeTTTd, a>v, rd, Sarepta, Heb. ^3^-* 
 Zarephalh, now Surafend, a Phenician 
 
 town mid-way between Tyre and Sidon, 
 Luke 4, 26. Comp. 1 K. 17, 9. 10. Obad. 
 20. See Bibl. Res. in Palest. III. p. 413 
 sq. Jos. Ant. 8. 13. 2. 
 
 (rapKlKOfj T], 6v, (<rdp,) of flesh, fleshy t 
 Plut. de placitis Philosopher. 5. 3. In N. 
 T. trop. only in the Epistles,^/?esWy, carnal, 
 pertaining to the flesh or body, opp. Trveo- 
 HariKos ; comp. in <rdp no. 2. 
 
 1. Genr. of things, TO. o~apKiicd, carnal 
 things, i. e. external, temporal, relating to 
 this life, Rom. 15, 27. 1 Cor. 9, 11. So 
 Heb. 7, 16 Rec. ov Kara vo^ov eVroXrjs <rap- 
 
 KIKTJS. 
 
 2. Implying weakness, frailty, proneness 
 to sin ; e. g. a) Of persons, carnal, sen 
 sual, worldly ; 1 Cor. 3, 1 Rec. a>s o-apKi- 
 Kols, w? vT]7riois (v Xpioro). V. 3 bis. 4. Of 
 things, carnal ^worldly, human, 2 Cci 1,12 
 OVK (V (rocpia a-apKiKr). 10, 4 orrXa ov (rapxi- 
 Ka, aXXa Surara KT\. b) Emphat. of sin 
 ful propensity, carnal, e. g. of persons, 
 Rom. 7, 14 eyw 8e (rapniKos flp.i, i. e. under 
 the influence of carnal and sinful desires 
 and affections. Of things, 1 Pet. 2, 1 1 T>V 
 o-apKiK<i>v fTTi^vfj.i5iv, fleshly lusts, carnal de 
 sires, i. e. having their seat in the carnal 
 nature. Comp. in <rdp no. 2. c. 
 
 crdpicwos, ij, ov, (<rap,) fleshy, corpu 
 lent, Pol. 39. 2. 7. In N. T. 
 
 1 . fleshy, of flesh, and therefore soft, 
 yielding to an impression, opp. Xt 3ii/or, 
 2 Cor. 3, 3 ev 7rXai Kap8ias o-apKivais. 
 Sept. Kapo ia o-apKivr], Heb. ^iU3,Ez. 11, 
 19. 36, 26. Plut. adv. Colot. 27 init. 
 
 2. fleshly, carnal, as pertaining to this 
 life ; Heb. 7, 16 Grb. see in crapKiKos no. 1. 
 
 3. Implying weakness, frailty, proneness 
 to sin ; of persons, carnal, worldly, 1 Cor. 3, 
 1 Grb. Emphat. Rom. 7, 14 Grb. See in 
 o-apiciKos no. 2. a, b. 
 
 fj, ^Eol. <rvp, (perh. 
 craipo), o-upw,) pr. that which may be strip 
 ped off; hence, flesh, the flesh of a living 
 man or animal. 
 
 1. Pr. flesh, as one of the constituent 
 parts of the body, Sing. Luke 24, 39 m/eC/m 
 crdpKd KOI ooTea OVK f\f<- 1 Cor. 15, 39 
 quater. So Sept. for ifoa Gen. 2, 21. 
 2 K. 5, 10. 14. (Horn. Od. 19. 450. JEA. V. 
 H. 4. 28. ib. 9. 13.) More commonly Plur. 
 at a-dpKfs, the fleshy parts, comp. Pas- 
 sow s. v. Rev. 19, 18 quinq. tvu (pdyrjTi 
 o-dpKas jSao-tXf ajK KT\. v. 21 ; so trop. and 
 hyperbol. i. q. to consume, to destroi/, James 
 5,3; to maltreat Rev. 17, 16. Sept. for 
 "ib2Gen.41,2. 3. 2K.9,36. So^El.V.H. 
 9. 13. Diod. Sic. 3. 16. Plato Phaedo 98. d. 
 
656 
 
 crapf 
 
 2. Meton.^Zes/t, i. q. the body, corpus, the 
 animal or external nature, as distinguished 
 from the spiritual or inner man, TO irvevfj.a, 
 Jos. B. J. 6. 1 . 5. Arr. Epict. 3. 7. 2 sq. 
 Plut. adv. Colot. 20 pexpl rZ>v irepl crdpKa 
 rrjs fox^s 8vvdp.euv. yEschyl. Sept. 604 
 or 623 yepovra rbv vovv, crdpKa 8 fj^axrav 
 cptpei. Eur. Here. F. 1269 or 1272. In 
 N. T. this usage of <rdp is far more fre 
 quent than in profane writers, prob. in imi 
 tation of Heb. "ND3 . So genr. and without 
 any good or evil quality implied. 
 
 a) Opp. to nvfvfia expr. 1 Cor. 5, 5 els 
 oXe3poi> rrjs crapKos, Iva TO irvev^a CTCC^TJ KT\. 
 2 Cor. 7, 1. Col. 2, 5. 1 Pet. 4, 6 ; comp. 
 Sept. and "i&ja opp. tflB3 Is. 10, 18. Job 14, 
 22. Also <rap KOI alp.a as a periphrasis for 
 the whole physical nature of man, Heb. 2, 14. 
 (Ecclus. 14, 18.) Simply, John 6, 52, com p. 
 trop. below. 2 Cor. 1 2, 7 ovcdXo^ 177 trapxt, 
 i. e. some bodily infirmity. Col. 1, 24. 2, 1 
 TTpocronrov IJLOV ev rfj vapid, v. 23. Gal. 4, 13. 
 14. 1 Pet. 3, 21. 4, 1. Jude 8. 23. Acts 2, 
 26. 31 f) o-dp p-ov, my body, i. e. /, quoted 
 from Ps. 16, 9 where Sept. for ntoa . Trop. 
 John 6, 51 Kal 6 apros . . . rj crdpt- p,ov ecr- 
 riv, i. e. Jesus himself is the bread (princi 
 ple) of life and nutrition to the regenerated 
 soul. v. 53. 54. 55. 56 ; comp. Matt. 26, 26 
 et parall. where it is o-oj/na. Sept. genr. 
 for ifoa Ez. 26, 36. Prov. 14, 30. (For the 
 classic usage see above.) Spec, the mortal 
 body, in distinction from a future and spirit 
 ual existence ; 2 Cor. 4, 1 1 f) fwi) . . . eV rfj 
 SWJTJJ crapKi TJP-UV. Gal. 2, 20. Phil. 1, 22. 
 24. 1 Pet. 4, 2 ; also <rap KOI alpa id. parall. 
 with fj (p%opd, 1 Cor. 15, 50. 
 
 b) Put for that which is merely external, 
 or also only apparent, in opp. to what is 
 spiritual and real ; John 6, 63 TO -rrvevp-d 
 eo-Ti TO faoTroiovv, rj crap OVK eocpeXet ov- 
 dfv. 8, 15. 1 Cor. 1, 26 crocpol KOTO. crdp 
 Ka. 2 Cor. 5, 16 bis, Kara (rdpKa, i. e. with 
 respect to outward circumstances and rela 
 tions. Eph. 6, 5 et Col. 3, 22 xvpiois Kara 
 crdpKa, i. e. externally, as to outward cir 
 cumstances. So of Levitical ordinances 
 and purifications, Heb. 9, 10. 13 ; of out 
 ward afflictions, trials, 1 Cor. 7, 28 SXtyti/ 
 5e T7/ a-apKL f^ovcnv. 2 Cor. 7, 5. Spec, of 
 circumcision" in the flesh, i. e. the external 
 rite, as the symbol of Judaism ; Rom. 2, 
 28 ovftf f] ev TW (pavepto, ev crapKi. 7repirop.f] 
 dXX . . . TreptTO/iij Kap8ias, ev Trvev/mTi KT\. 
 2 Cor. 11, 18. Eph. 2, 11 bis, ?3i/q eV o-apxi 
 . . . TTtpiTOfiris (V crapKi. Gal. 3, 3 vvv crap/ct 
 eVtTeXfto-Se ; i. e. by circumcision, external 
 rites, Judaism, comp. v. 2. Gal. 6, 12. 13. 
 Phil. 3, 3. 4 bis. Col. 2, 13. 
 
 c) As the medium of natural generation 
 and descent, and so of kindred ; John 1,13 
 ovde fK SeXjjp-aros erap/cos . . . fyfvvifirjcrav. 
 Rom. 9, 8 TO ream rijs aapKos. Heb. 12, 9. 
 Eph. 5, 29. 30 6K TTJS (rapxbs avrov /cat ex 
 ra>v do-Tfcov OVTOV, in allusion to Gen. 2, 23. 
 29, 14, where Sept. and Heb. "itoa . Of 
 one s countrymen, Rom. 11,14; of the re 
 lation of a slave or freedman to his master, 
 Philem. 16. So Kara a- d pita, according 
 to the flesh, as to outward kindred, by natural 
 descent, Acts 2, 30. Rom. 9, 3. Gal. 4, 23. 
 29. 1 Cor. 10, 18 TOV icrpaTjX Kara o-ap/ca, 
 Israel after the flesh, by natural descent, in 
 implied antith. with lo-paijX Kara irvtvp-a, 
 comp. Rom. 2, 28. Gal. 3, 29. So Sept. 
 and itoS Gen. 37, 27 ; comp. Judg. 9, 2. 
 2 Sam. 5, 1. 19, 13. 14. 
 
 3. Spec, the flesh, the body, with the ac 
 cessory idea of frailty and proneness to sin, 
 as the seat of carnal and sinful appetites 
 and passions ; comp. the influence ascribed 
 by the Greeks to TO <roip,a, Plato Phaedo 
 $ 10, 11, 27, 30. Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 20 ; comp. 
 Wisd. 9, 15 (p^aprov yap (rcopa ftapvvfi 
 ^v KT\. E. g. 
 
 a) Of man s carnal nature in general, as 
 fallen, frail, corrupt, full of weakness, and 
 prone to error and sin ; e. g. opp. TO 
 TTvevpa expr. Matt. 26, 41 et Mark 14, 38 
 
 Opp. TO TTV. ayiov, John 3, 6 bis, TO yfy- e /c 
 T?ys (rapKos* adp eori Kal TO yfy- fK rov 
 TTV. KT\. Simply, Rom. 6, 19 Sia rrjv dcrSe- 
 vfiav rrjs crapKos v[j.a>v. 2 Cor. 1, 17. 10, 2 
 coy Kara adpKa TrepnraTovvros. v. 3 bis. 
 Also (rapt- Kal at/na id. opp. 6 Trarfjp 6 tv 
 olp. Matt. 16, 17. Spec. Rom. 4, 1 ri ovv 
 fpovfj-fv AjSpaap. . . . fvprjKfvai Kara vdpKa, 
 hath found according to the flesh, parall. 
 with e epyoov in v. 2, i. e. works are called 
 the flesh as proceeding from the carnal 
 mind claiming reward, and not from TO 
 7rvfvp.a or the mind as enlightened by the 
 Spirit ; see Tholuck, De Wette, Meyer in 
 loc. Sept. genr. for *itoa Gen. 6, 3. Ps. 
 78, 39. Ecclus. 28, 5. Plut. adv. Colot. 
 30. T. VI. p. 264, rijs Kara crdpKa f)8ovrjs. 
 Ib. Non posse suav. vivend. 3. p. 180. pi- 
 Kpov fivat ro rrjs crapKos fj8v. ib. 14. p. 198. 
 b) Emphat. of man s carnal nature, as 
 an active principle of corruption and sin, 
 ever at war with his higher spiritual nature 
 as affected by the Spirit of grace through 
 faith. So as opp. TO 7rvfvp.a, i. e. to the 
 Holy Spirit or his influences, Rom. 8, 1 JLDJ 
 Kara crdpKa Trepnrarovcriv, aXXa KaTa -rrvtv- 
 /xa. v. 4. 5 bis. 6. 9. 13. Gal. 5, 16. 17 bis. 
 19. 24. 6, 8 bis. Simply, Rom. 7, 5 ore 
 
657 
 
 <reavrov 
 
 yap fipfv ft. TJJ (rapti. v. 18. 25. 8, 3 ter. 7. 
 8, 1-2 bis. 13, 14. Gal. 5, 13. Eph. 2, 3 bis. 
 Col. 2, II. 18. 2 Pet. 2, 10. 18. 1 John 2, 
 16. C omp. Sept. and "itoa Ecc. 2, 3. 5, 5. 
 Theon. Alex, in Anthol /Gr. III. p. 226 
 voov jraZfotv (v Tol<ri TTOVOIS (Ku^rjpas, eo> 
 crapubs (jBrjs KT\. 
 
 4. Meton. flesh, the human nature, man, 
 homo, like Heb. itUa . Matt. 19, 5. 6 
 faovrai 01 bvo (Is crapta fUOIf dXXa (rap 
 p.ia. Mark 10, 8 bis. 1 Cor. 6, 16. Eph. 6, 
 31. (So Sept. and lto2 Gen. 2, 24.) Jude 
 7 o-ap irtpa, other Jlesh, of a different sex, 
 male; comp. Gen. 19, 5. Rom. 1,27. In 
 like manner, o-ap *al at/xa, Jlesh and blood, 
 
 1. e. man, other men, Gal. 1, 16. Eph. 6, 
 12. Also ;rao-a (rdp all Jlesh, all men, 
 all mankind, Luke 3, 6. John 17, 2. Acts 
 
 2, 17. 1 Pet. 1, 24. Ncgat. ov . . . rraa-a 
 o-dp, no Jlesh, no man, where ov qualifies 
 the intervening verb, see in ov no. 1. c. 
 Matt. 24, 22. Mark 13, 20. Rom. 3, 20. 
 Gal. 2, 16; also p.f) . . . nacra o-dp id. 
 1 Cor. 1, 29. So Sept. and liua-bs Gen. 
 6, 12. Ps. 65, 3. Is. 40, 5. 7. jVr. 25, 31 ; 
 c. ^17 Ecclus. 30, 20. 29. Spec, of the in 
 carnation of Christ, his human nature ; John 
 1,146 Xo yo? o~ap t yeWro. 1 John 4, 2. 3 
 Xp. iv o-apKi eX^Xv3dra. 2 John 7. Rom. 1, 
 3 Kara adpKa. 9, 5. Eph. 2, 15 eV TT/ crapK\ 
 avroO. 1 Tim. 3, 16. Heb. 5, 7. 10, 20. 
 1 Pet. 3, 18. 4, 1. Col. 1, 22 V TW o-co^ari 
 rr/s a-apKos avrov, in (he body of his Jlesh, of 
 his human nature. Comp. Ecclus. 23, 16. 
 
 , 6, Saruch, see 
 
 crapoco, u>. f. o>o-6>, (o-a/po> ; ) to sweep, 
 with a broom, c. ace. Luke 1 5, 8 KOI crapol 
 rfjv OIKIUV. Pass. Matt. 12,44. Luke 11, 25. 
 Artemid. 2. 33. p. 119. Pamphil. in Geo- 
 pon. 13. 15. 4. A later form instead of the 
 earlier o-mpca, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 83. Sturz 
 de Dial. Maced. p. 192. 
 
 J!dppa, ay, TI, Sarah, Heb. "^tt and 
 nnb (princess), pr. n. of the wife of Abra 
 ham , Rom. 4, 19. 9, 9. Heb. 11,11. 1 Pet. 
 3, 6. 
 
 Jtdpwv, wj/ov, 6, Saron, Heb. "p" 1 ^ 
 Sharon, pr. n. of the plain of Palestine 
 along the sea-coast between Cesaraea and 
 Joppa, celebrated for its rich fields and pas 
 tures, Acts 9, 35. Comp. Is. 33, 9. 65, 10. 
 
 1 Chr. 27, 29. See Relandi Palaest. p. 188, 
 370. Bibl. Res. in Palest. III. p. 31. 
 
 Jtaravas, a, 6, once larav, 6, indec. 
 
 2 Cor. 12, 7, Satan, Heb. "^3 an adver 
 sary ;. in N. T. mostly c. art. the Adversary, 
 as the Heb. proper name for the devil, Gr. 
 
 42 
 
 o 5idj3oXof, the prince of the fallen angels ; 
 see fully in 5id/3oXoy, and comp. Buxt. Lex. 
 Chald. 1464, 1495. Matt. 4, 10. 12, 26 bis. 
 Mark 4, 15. Luke 10, 18 comp. in 8aip6- 
 viov no. 2. Luke 22, 3. 31. John 13, 27. 
 Acts 26, 18. al. So Heb. "jaton Sept. 8id- 
 0X0? 1 Chr. 21, 1. Job 1, 6 sq. (Ecclus. 
 21, 27. Test. XII Patr. p. 650, 657 dno 
 TOV 2arai/a KCU TVV TfV(vp.dTu>v avrov.) As 
 present in men tempting them to evil ; Matt 
 16, 23 et Mark 8, 33 vn-aye OTTUTW fiov, 
 Sarava, comp. Luke 22, 3. Acts 5, 3. Others 
 here refer it directly to Peter in the sense 
 of adversary, seducer, rilled with Satan ; as 
 Sept. for ",Bto 1 K. 11, 14. 23. 25, comp. 
 2 Sarn. 19, 23 where Sept. eVi ^ovXoy. -f- 
 
 (raroVj ov, TO, satum, a measure, Heb. 
 fiXO seah, Aram. Xnxo Buxt. Lex. Chald. 
 1413, a Hebrew measure for things dry, 
 Matt. 13, 33. Luke 13, 21. According to 
 the Rabbins it was the third part of an 
 ephah ; and according to Jerome on Matt. 
 1. c. was equal to a modius and a half; 
 hence it was equivalent to nearly \\ peck 
 English ; comp. in /ioStoj. Jos. Ant. 9. 4. 
 5 pen. 
 
 .4aGAo?, ov, 6, Saul, i. q. 2aovX with a 
 Greek termination, the Jewish name of 
 Paul, Acts 7, 58. 8, 1. 3. 9, 1. 8. 11. 19. 
 22.24.26. 11,25.30. 12,25. 13,1.2. 
 7. 9. 
 
 cravrov, jjy, oO, see in o-eaurov. 
 
 a-ftevvvfu, f. o-/3Vo), 1. to quench, to 
 put out; e. g. a light, fire, c. ace. Matt. 12, 
 20 \ivov TV(p6iJ.voi> ou o-/3e cre i, see in \ivov. 
 Eph. 6, 16. Heb. 1 1 , 34. Pass, to be quench 
 ed, to go out, Matt. 25, 8 ai Xdp.7raSfr. Mark 
 9, 44. 46. 48, Sept. for ^33 Is. 42, 3. 
 Lev. 6, 12. 13 ; ^ Job 21, 17. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 10. 1. Thuc. 2. 77. 
 
 2. Trop. to quench, to dampen, to hinder, 
 to prevent any thing from exerting its full 
 influence; c. ace. 1 Thess. 5, 19 TO Trvev- 
 p.a pr) o-ftfvwTf. Sept. o-jSfVat rrjv dydmjv 
 for .MH3 Cant. 8, 7. Jos. B. J. 6. 1. 4 o-/3. 
 rf]i> x a P<*v- A&> V. H. 6. 1 3v/ioV. Plut. 
 Lycurg. 20. Plato Legg. 888. a. 
 
 (reavrov, f) S , ov, also contr. aavrov. 
 779, ov, (o-v, atrdf,) reflexive pers. pron. 
 2 pers. Sing, genit. of thyself, dat. o-favrw, 
 fj, <S, to thyself, etc. Gen. John 1, 22. Acts 
 26, 1. al. Dat. Acts 9, 34. 16, 28. al. Ace. 
 Matt. 4, 6. 8, 4. Luke 10, 27. al. See 
 Buttm. } 74. 3. Where a special emphasis 
 is to be expressed, airo r is written sepa 
 rately, e. g. Luke 2, 35 Kai o-ov Sc avn/c. 
 See Matth. 5 148. n. 2. Buttm. $ 127. 3. 4- 
 
658 
 
 f. do-ojim, Pass, depon. (o-e- 
 t, o-f/3o/iai.) /o 6e a/mid o/ doing, to be 
 timid, to fear, Horn. II. 6. 167, 417. In N. 
 T. to stand in awe of any one, to reverence, 
 to venerate, to -worship; c. dat. Rom. 1, 25 
 eVf/3dcr3770-ai> xat e Xdrpeuo-ai> rj; urio-fi. So 
 Hesych. Vf/3ao-3^crai > o-e/3do-/u.ao-t 
 
 cre/3a<7/ia, TO?, TO, (o-<rj3do/xm,) an o&- 
 y&tf of worship, any thing venerated and 
 worshipped, e. g. a god, an altar, a temple ; 
 Acts 17, 23. 2 Thess. 2, 4. Wisd. 14, 20. 
 Bel and Drag. 27 ; comp. Dion. Hal. Ant. 
 1. 30. ib. 5. 1. 
 
 cre/3ao"T09, 77, dV, (o-f/Sdfo/tai,) pr. vene 
 rated, august, Lat. augustus, Hesych. o-e- 
 ftacrros irpo<TKvvr)T6s, Tip.r)Tos. In N. T. 
 6 2e/3ao-rdr, Lat. Augustus, as an hono 
 rary title, and then pr. n. 
 
 1. Pr. a title first assumed by Caesar Oc- 
 taviamis, and retained by his successors as 
 a personal appellation ; comp. Adam s Rom. 
 Aat. p. 169. Diet, of Antt. art. Augustus. 
 In N. T. only of Nero, Acts 25, 21. 25. 
 Philo Leg. ad Cai. p. 1012. d. Hdian. 2. 
 10. 19. 
 
 2, Adj. Augustan, pertaining to Augus 
 tus, as tntttpi) 2e/3ao-rij, the Augustan co 
 hort, Acts 27, 1. Several Roman legions 
 bore this honorary title, though no such 
 name of a cohort is mentioned ; Claudian. 
 de Bell. Gild. 422. Ptolem. 2. 3 \eyeuv 
 Sevrepa 2f/3aoTr;. 4. 3, 9; comp. Tacit. 
 Ann. 14. 15. Others suppose it to be a 
 Samaritan cohort, so called from 2e/3aor;j, 
 Sebaste, the name given by Herod the 
 Great to Samaria in honour of Augustus; 
 so Josephus mentions troops called 2e/3a- 
 a-TTivoi, prob. from Sebaste or Samaria, Ant. 
 20. 8. 7. B. J. 2. 4. 3. But then it would 
 read : a-nfip^s KaXou/xewjs ^epao-rijvcav ; SO 
 Josephus, filav "ikriv Ka\ovp.fVT]v Se/SaoTT?- 
 vuv, B: J. 2. 12. 5. Ant. 20. 6. 1. 
 
 ere/3<w, defect. Buttm. Ausf. Spr. \ 114 ; 
 to honour, to worship, c. ace. Find. 01. 14. 
 17. Xen. Mem. 4. 5. 19. Plato Legg.-647. 
 a. 777. d. Commonly Pass, depon. o-f/3o- 
 Hai, lobe fitted with awe, to shame oneself, 
 Horn. II. 4. 242. In N. T. o-eftopai, only 
 in Pres. to stand in awe of, to reverence, to 
 worship God; c. ace. Matt. 15, 9 et Mark 
 7, 7 p.aTT)i> 8e ffcfiovrai pe, quoted from Is. 
 29, 13 where Sept. for run* . Acts 18, 13. 
 19, 27. Sept. for X^ Josh. 4, 24. Job 1, 
 9. So Jos. Ant. 9. 10. 1. Diod. Sic. 1. 35. 
 Xen. Ag. 3. 2. Spec. Part, a-fftoncvos, 
 17, ov, absol. or with rbv 3eoV, i. e. worshipping 
 God, religims, decout, spoken of proselytes 
 
 to Judaism from the heathen, in distinction 
 fr<m the Jews, Acts 13, 43. 50. 16, 14. 
 17, 4, 17. 18, 7. 
 
 <retpa, as, 17, (ftpo>, Lat. sero,} a cord, 
 band, Hdot. 7. 85. In N. T. a chain, 
 2 Pet. 2, 4, comp. in 6<pos. So Jos. Ant. 
 3. 7. 5. Luc. D. Deor.21. 1. Plato Theaet. 
 153. c. 
 
 <retp09, ov, 6, (i. q. o-tpds,) a pit, cavern, 
 2 Pet. 2, 4 Lachm. creipois fdtpov, for Rec. 
 a-tipais. So o-tpo j Dem. 100. ult. Eurip. 
 Phryx. 4. 
 
 craoyi09, ov, 6, (o-fi co,) 1. motion, a 
 
 \ shaking, concussion ; e. g. eV TV; SaAdo-o-r;, 
 
 i. q. a tempest, tornado, Matt. 8, 24. Sept. 
 
 for !T^O, fTlSffl, Jer. 23, 19. Neh. 1, 3. 
 
 2. Spec, an earthquake, Matt. 24, 7 eo-owai 
 o-eto-juot Kara TO TTOVS. 27, 54. 28, 2. Mark 
 13,8. Luke 21, 11. Acts 16,26. Rev. 6, 
 12. 8,5. 11, 13 bis. 19. 16, 18 bis. Sept. 
 for <"?n Is. 29, 6. Am. 1,1. Zech. 14, 5. 
 JE\. V. H. 4. 17. Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 24. 
 
 creia). f. o-fi o-o>, 1. to move to and fro, 
 to sJiake, with the idea of shock, concus 
 sion ; Pass. Rev. 6,13 O-VKTJ . . . vno pry. 
 avfp.ov (Tfiop.(VT). Of earthquakes, Matt. 27, 
 51 f] yr) eVeio-Sr/. Act. C. ace. Heb. 12, 26 
 o-ei co ov fiovov TTJV yijv, dXXa KOI rbv ovpavov. 
 in allusion to Hagg. 2, 6 where Sept. for 
 CS-n.Luc. Bacch. 2. Pausan. 3. 5. 8. 
 Xen. Hell. 4. 7. 4. 
 
 2. Trop. to move in mind, to agitate, to 
 put in commotion and perturbation ; Pass. 
 Matt. 21, 10 eWo-3?; 17 TTO\IS. 28, 4. Sept. 
 for IE? 1 ? I s . 14, 16. Ez. 31, 16. Pind. 
 Pyth. 4. 484 TrdXti/. Antiph. 146. 22. Plato 
 Eryx. 397. d. 
 
 5*6KOwSo9, ov, 6, Lat. Secundus, pr. n. 
 of a Christian, Acts 20, 4. 
 
 3!e\VKia, as, f], Seleucia, a city cf 
 Syria, situated west of Antioch on the sea- 
 coast just north of the mouth of the Oron- 
 tes ; called sometimes Seleucia Pieria, from 
 the neighbouring Mount Pierius, and also 
 Seleucia ad Mare, in order to distinguish it 
 from several other cities of the same name 
 in Syria and the vicinity, all so called from 
 Seleucus Nicanor. Acts 13, 4. 1 Mace. 
 11, 8. Jos. Ant. 18. 9. 8. Pol. 5. 59. 1. 
 See Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. I. ii. p. 261. 
 Biblioth. Sacr. 1848. p. 450 sq. 
 
 a-e\^vr}, 775, r;, (o-Xa?,) the moon, Matt. 
 24, 29. Mark 13, 24. Luke 21, 25. Acts 2, 
 20. 1 Cor. 15, 41. Rev. 6, 12. 8, 12. 12, 
 
 1. 21, 23. Sept. for n^ T Gen. 37, 8. Joel 
 
 2, 31. Hdian. 5. 6. 11. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 4 
 
659 
 
 (re\r)vi,do/j.ai, Pass, depon. (o-eX^,) 
 . o 6e moon-struck, lunatic; in Greek usage, 
 i. q. to 6e epileptic, to be afflicted with epi 
 lepsy, the symptoms of which were sup 
 posed to become more aggravated with the 
 increasing moon ; comp. Luc. Tox. 24 
 where a certain woman e\eytro Se KCU KCLTCL- 
 TriTTTtiv irpos Ti)v cr(\r]VT]v av^avofjLfvrjv. The 
 symptoms of this disease are ascribed in N. 
 T. and elsewhere to the influence of un 
 clean spirits, demons ; see in Sat/udwoi/, Sat- 
 /ioi/t bjiat, also Luc. Philops. 16. Act. 
 Thorn. { 12. Isidor. Origg. 4. 7 "cadens 
 aeger spasmam patiatur. Hos etiam vulgus 
 lunaticos vocat, quod per hunc cursum co- 
 mitetur eos insania daemonum." Matt. 4, 
 24. 17, 15 on <Tf\rjvidtTai (cat KCIKMS ird- 
 o-x, comp. v. 18 et Mark 9, 17 et Luke 9, 
 39 where it is referred to a tiaipoviov, 
 jri>vp.a. So Act. Thorn, j 12. Manetho 4. 
 81,216. 
 
 61; o, indec. Semei, Heb. "^a fl Shi- 
 mei, pr. n. m. Luke 3, 26. 
 
 cre/iioaXty, f<0 s, f), fine flour, the finest 
 wheaten flour, Rev. 18, 13. Sept. often for 
 nbb Ex. 29, 2. 40. Lev. 2, 1. Ecclus. 38, 
 11. Jos. Ant. 3. 9. 4. Athen. 1. p. 28. a. 
 ib. 4. p. 172. b. 
 
 O"6/ii/o?, y, 6v, (o-6/3o/xai,) venerable, re 
 verend, Lat. venerandus, 2 Mace. 8, 15. 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 37. In N. T. of things, 
 honourable, reputable, Phil. 4. 8 ; of persons, 
 grave, dignified, 1 Tim. 3, 8. 11. Tit. 2, 2. 
 So Luc. D. Mort. 12. 3. Hdian. 1. 2. 6 
 (Tfjjivca jySft KOI /3i < cr<ji><ppovi. Diog. Laert. 
 
 2. 24 (SoJKpdivjr) avrdpKrjs 8e TJV <a\ <rfp.v6s. 
 
 (reuvoTr/s, 777-0?, fj, ((rcpvos,) venerable- 
 ness, sanctity, 2 Mace. 3, 12. Jos. B. J. 6. 
 5. 1. In N. T. gravity, dignity, probity; 
 1 Tim. 2, 2 ev TraoT; eucre/Sfi a KOI crf/xi/or^rt. 
 
 3, 4. Tit. 2, 7. So Jos. Vi t. { 49.. ^El. V. 
 FI. 2. 13 afp.von]s fiiov. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 1. 
 
 Jjepyios, ov, o, Sergius, i. e. Sergius 
 Pauhip, a Roman proconsul in command at 
 Cyprus, converted under the preaching of 
 Paul and Barnabas, Acts 13, 7. See in 
 
 2!epov%, 6, indec. Seruch, Heb. 
 Serug, pr. n. of the father of Nahor, Luke 
 3, 35 ; see Gen. 11, 20. Rec. has 2apoi>x- 
 
 r, 6, indec. Seth, Heb. n (a re 
 placing), pr. n. of the third son of Adam, 
 Luke 3, 38. 
 
 Srjp, 6, indec. Sem, Heb. EtO (name, 
 renown) Shem, pr. n. of the eldest son of 
 Noah, Luke 3,36; comp. Gen. 5,32.10,1 sq. 
 
 , f. ai>cu, (c%ia,) aor. 1 cVij/ 
 Acts 11, 28. Rev. 1,1, instead of the more 
 Attic fa-Tinqva ; as also Esth. 2, 22. Judg. 
 7, 21. Xen. Hell. 2. 1. 28; comp. Buttm. 
 { 101. n. 2. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 24. Winer p. 
 81. To give a sign or signal, i. e. public. 
 Sept. for S^fi Num. 10, 9. Xen. An. 5. 2. 
 12. In N. T. to signify, to make knoivn, to 
 declare, before an indir. clause, John 12, 33 
 (TTjuaivcav, TTOI OJ Sawirw jjfj.f\\fv aTro SvrjcrKfiv. 
 18, 32. 21, 19 ; or with ace. and inf. 
 Acts 11, 28; ace. simpl. Acts 25, 27 ras 
 KdT avrov alrias <rrjfj.ai/m. Absol. Rev. 1, 
 1. Sept. for 1>1 Esth. 2,22. So Jos. 
 Ant. 4. 6. 3. Pol. 2. 27. 3. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 4. 
 
 ov, ro, (o-fj/xa,) a sign, signal, 
 Hdian. 4. 1 1 . 8 ; an ensign, standard, Sept. 
 for 03 Is. 11, 12. Hdian. 8. 5. 22. Xen. 
 Cyr. 7. 1. 4 ; a sign of something past, a 
 memorial, monument, Sept for f\1X Josh. 
 4, 6. Jos. B. J. 1. 10. 3. In N. T. a sign, 
 mark, token, e. g. 
 
 1 . Pr. a sign, token, by which any thing is 
 known or distinguished ; Matt. 26, 48 
 
 KT\. Rom. 4, 11 arjfj.. eXa/3f 
 , . e. circumcision as TO o-ynflov 
 T^S 8ta.^Krjs, comp. Gen. 9, 12. 13. 17, 11, 
 where Sept. and nix. So Plato Soph. 262, 
 a. Spec, a sign by which the character 
 and truth of any person or thing is known, 
 a token, proof; Luke 2, 12 roOro \>iiiv TO 
 (rrjp.dov. 2 Cor. 12, 12 ra (rrjfjLfla rC diro- 
 (TTO\OV. 2 Thess. 3, 17 o eVrt crrjfj.. tv irdcnj 
 (Tri<TTo\fj. Sept. and nix 1 Sarn. 14, 10. 
 2 K. 20, 8. So ^Eschin. 67. 42. Pol. 3. 
 30. 2. Xen. Conv. 8. 34. 
 
 2. a sign, by which the divine power and 
 majesty is made known, a supernatural 
 event or act, a token, wonder, miracle, by 
 which the power and presence of God is 
 manifested, either directly or through the 
 agency of those whom he sends. a; As 
 wrought of God, 1 Cor. 14, 22 wore at 
 yXaxraai (Is crrjfJifiov flaw, ov rois jriorev- 
 ovcriv, aXXa Tms dnicrTOLs. i. e. the gift of 
 tongues is a sign, a supernatural token, in 
 tended not for churches of believers at 
 home, where it is unnecessary, but for un 
 believing heathen in other lands. Also ro 
 (rrjuftov l<avd, the sign of Jonah, the won 
 der which God wrought in the case of Jo 
 nah, Matt. 12, 39, comp. v. 40. Matt. 16, 4. 
 Luke 11, 29. Melon, of persons sent from 
 God, whose character and acts are a mani 
 festation of the divine power; Luke 11, 30 
 Aca3i)f tytvfro Icavus <TT]fj.tiov rois Nivfvi- 
 TCUS- 2, 34 OVTOS KeiTai . . . ds o-rj/j.f iov dvrt- 
 . Also of signs, wonders, mira- 
 
660 
 
 Cies which God is said iroitiv 8m TWOS, to do 
 through any one ; joined with rtpara, e. g. 
 Acts 2, 22/43. 4, 30. 5, 12. 14, 3. 15, 12. 
 (So oTjp-ela Koi T/para J\. V. II. 12. 57. Pol. 
 3. 112. 8.) Spec, as foreshowing future 
 events, a sign of future things, a portent, 
 presage; Matt. 16, 3 cn/p-eTa TU>V Kaipwv, 
 i. e. the miraculous events and deeds which 
 foreshow the coming of the Messiah in his 
 kingdom; comp. Ecclus. 33 [36], 6. 8. 
 Matt. 24, 3 Tt ro (rrjfj.dov TTJS crrjs irapov- 
 a-ias; v. 30. Mark 13, 4. Luke 21,7. II 
 (rrififla un ovpavov p-eyaAa. V. 25. Acts 2, 
 19. Rev. 12, 1. 3. 15, 1. Sept. and nix 
 Deut. 13, 1. 2. So Jos. B. J. proo3m. {11. 
 JEl V.U.I. 29. Plut. Timol. 8. b) Of 
 signs, wonders, miracles, wrought by Jesus 
 and his apostles in proof and furtherance of 
 their divine mission ; Matt. 1 2, 38 SeXo/ucp 
 anb crov (jrrjfjLflov ISdv. V. 39 bis. 16, 1.4 
 bis. Mark 8, 11 cr^/mov dnb TOV ovpavov. 
 V.-12 bis. 16, 17. 20. Luke 11, 16. 29 bis. 
 23, 8. In John only in this sense, e. g. 2, 
 
 11. 18. 23. 3, 2. 4, 54. 6, 2. 14. 26. 30. 7, 
 31. 9,16. 10,41. 11,47. 12, 18. 37. 20, 
 30. Acts 4, 16. 22. 8, 6. 1 Cor. 1, 22. 
 Joined with repara, 8vva/j.e1s, John 4, 48. 
 Acts 6, 8. 7, 36. 8, 13. Rom. 15, 19. 2 Cor. 
 
 12, 12. Heb. 2, 4. Sept. and nix Ex. 4, 
 8 sq. 17. 28. 30. c) Spoken by analogy 
 of signs, wonders, professedly wrought by 
 false prophets claiming to act by divine 
 authority, Rev. 13, 13. 14. 16, 14. 19, 20; 
 c. Ttpara Matt. 24, 24. Mark 13, 22. 
 2 Thess. 2, 9. 
 
 <r7)[AlOCi), a), f. ci>cru>, (o"r)p.f1ov, cr^/ia,) 
 
 to sign, to mark, to note with marks, Pol. 
 
 3. 39. 8. In N. T. only Mid. to mark for 
 oneself, to note; c. ace. 2 Thess. 3, 14 
 TOVTOV crrjp.dovo- Sc, note that man, q. d. set 
 a mark upon him as one to be shunned. So 
 Pol. 22. 11. 12. ib. 1. 47. 1. 
 
 crijfAepov, adv. Att. rf]fj.fpov, (as if 777 
 r)p.epa,) to day, this day. 
 
 1. Pr. Matt. 6, 11 fior rj^lv trff^tpov. v. 
 30. 16, 3. 21, 28. 27, 19. Mark 14, 30. 
 Luke 2, 11. 5, 26. 12, 28. 19, 5. 9. 22, 34. 
 23, 43. 24, 21. Acts 27, 33. Heb. 13, 8. 
 Jnmes 4, 13. Luke 13, 32. 33 a-fjufpov KOI 
 avjiiov, see in avpiov. Sept. for DYsft Gen. 
 
 4, 13. 40, 7. Ex. 16, 25. So Hdian. 7. 5. 
 1 1 . Luc. Paras. 8. With the art. as adj. 17 
 0-rjp.fpov (rjfifpa), this very day, Acts 19, 
 40. See Buttm. 5 125. 6, 7. 
 
 2. Spec, at this time, now, Luke 4, 21 
 <rf]p.tpov 7re7rX?7pcorat 17 ypafprj avnj. Acts 
 4, 9. 13, 33. 22, 3. 24, 21. 26, 2. 29. Heb. 
 1, 5. 3, 7. 13. 15. 4, 7 bis. 5, 5. 2 Cor. 3, 
 
 15 eco? (TT]fifpov. So Sept. and Di*n Deut, 
 
 I, 39. 1 Sam. 12, 17. With the "art. as 
 adj. > ; 0-rjp.fpov (i^epa), Buttm. 1. c. Acts 
 20, 26 fv rfj crf)p(pov rjpepa. So a^pi rjjs 
 arr]fj.epoi>, unto this day, until now, 2 Cor. 3, 
 
 14 ; fjuxpl rrjs o-T)fj.epoi> id. Matt. 11, 23. 28, 
 
 15 ; (us TTJS o-f;p.fpov id. Matt. 27, 8. Rom, 
 
 II, 8. 
 
 (T^TTO), f. ^o>, IQ make rotten, to corrupt. 
 to destroy, Sept. for r^n Job 40, 12. Dion. 
 Hal. 11. 37. Plato Theaet. 153. c. Usually 
 and in N. T. Pass. o-jjTro/nat, 2 perf. a-etrrj- 
 rra, intrans. Buttm. 97. 5. n. 5. j 113. n. 
 3 ; to rot, to be corrupted, to perish ; James 
 5, 2 6 TT\OVTOS vp,d)i> cre cr^TTf, i. e. your 
 hoarded stores. Sept. for pj5a Niph. Ps. 
 
 38, 6. So Jos. B. J. 6. 2. 9. M. V. H. 12. 
 40. Xen. CEc. 19. 11. 
 
 (WjpiKOS, q, 6v, (VTJP silkworm,) silken, 
 of silk, Jos. B. J. 7. 5. 4 e o-S^o-eo-i a-rjpiKais. 
 Plut. Conjug. Prac. 48 pen. In N. T.- 
 Neut. TO a-ripiKov Subst. silk, silken stuffs, 
 Rev. 18, 12. 
 
 O">;?> a-rjTus, 6, (Heb. DO.) a moth, cloth- 
 worm, Matt. 6, 19. 20. Luk T e 12. 33. Sept. 
 for 00 I s . si ( 8 ; 5 I s . 50, 9 Theophr. 
 
 H. PI. 1. 16 TOVTO KCll TTpOS TOVS (TTJTaS tV 
 
 Tols IfJLariois tlycftov. Luc. Epist. Sat. 21. 
 
 o-ijTofipwros, ou, 6, f}, adj. (O-TJS, I3ij3po>- 
 (rKw,) moth-eaten ; James 5, 2 lp.aria ip.co< 
 o-T^rd/Spcora. So Sept. for tiJS l ^3s< Job 
 
 13, 28. Comp. tinearum epulse Hor. Sat. 
 2. 3. 119. 
 
 a ^evoci), c3, f. wo-w, (o-SeVos,) to strength 
 en, to confirm; absol. 1 Pet. 5, 10 a%(vo>- 
 o-fi, or as in Rec. Opt. a-Sf^wo-ai, comp. Wi 
 ner { 45. 7. Hesych. <r3f vwafi ewo-^va-ei, 
 Swap-coo-ft. A late word, not found else 
 where. 
 
 cnaywv, 6vos, f], pr. the jaw-bone, jaw, 
 Sept. for inb Judg. 15, 15 sq. Xen. Eq. 1. 
 8. In N. T. synecd. the cheek, Matt. 5, 
 
 39. Luke 6, 29. Sept. and h H^ 1 K. 22, 
 24. Lam. 3, 29. Cant. 5, 14. 
 
 crtyaw, c3, f. TJO-W, (o-t fw,) to lie silent, 
 still. 
 
 1. Intrans. to keep silence, to hold one s 
 peace; absol. Luke 9, 36 av-nl faiyrjo-av. 
 [18, 39.] 20, 26. Acts 12, 17. 15, 12. 13. 
 1 Cor. 14 : 28. 30. 34. Sept. for S^-inn Ex 
 
 14, 14; ndn Ecc. 3, 7. Dem. 291. 20. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 6. 
 
 2. Trans, to keep in silence, to keep secret, 
 Pass. Rom. 16, 25 fj.v(mjpiov \p6vois ala>- 
 viois crf(TiyTjij.fvov. Eurip. Med. 80 <riya 
 \6yov. Pass. Find. 01. 9. 156. Plato Epist. 
 310. d, e. 
 
661 
 
 }f> /, (criyao},) silence, Acts 21, 
 40 TroXX^f o-tyfjr. Rev. 8, 1. Wisd. 18, 
 14. Plut. Dion 43. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 25 
 TroXXi) crryij. 
 
 <rib)jpeo$. fa, fov, contr. <ri8r)povs, a, 
 ovv, (o-iftrjpos.) iron, of iron. Acts 12, 10 
 KvKqv TJ]V tridrjpav. Rev. 2, 27. 9, 9. 12, 5. 
 19, 15. Sept. for bj-ia Lev. 26, 19. Deut. 
 3, 11. Dem. 778. 20. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 30. 
 
 aiSrjpo?, ov, 6, iron, Rev. 18, 12. Sept. 
 for bna Gen. 4, 21. Dem. 645. 16. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 1. 23. 
 
 2iSa>v, S,vos, fj, Sidon, Heb. "(V^S Zidon, 
 a celebrated commercial city of Phenicia, 
 situated on the sea-coast northward of Tyre, 
 and now called Saida ; in N. T. every 
 where coupled with Tyre except twice, 
 Acts 27, 3. Luke 4, 26 (is Sdpenra rjjy 2t- 
 8a>vos, i. e. the country or territory of Sidon. 
 So Matt. 11, 21 evTvpca Kal 2i8o>>{. v. 22. 
 15, 21. Mark 3, 8. 7, 24. 31. Luke 6, 17. 
 10,13. 14. The name TiTX-is pr. fishing, 
 fishery, and such is the etymology given 
 by Justin 18. 3; comp. Heb. Lex. s. voc. 
 But Josephus derives it from Sidon the 
 eldest son of Canaan, Gen. 10, 15. Jos. Ant. 
 1.6.2. Sidon is a very ancient city, older 
 than Tyre Gen. 10, 19. 49, 13; and was 
 assigned by Joshua to the tribe of Asher, 
 but never subdued by them, Josh. 19, 28. 
 Judg. 1, 31. 10, 12. Jos. Ant. 15. 4. 1 
 rrpoyov&v (Xtv^jfpa- It afterwards surren 
 dered to Salmanassar king of Assyria ; and 
 was destroyed by Artaxerxes Ochus king 
 of Persia about 350 B. C. Jos. Ant. 9. 14. 
 12. Diod. Sic. 16. 41 sq. It was again re 
 built, and not long after was taken by Alex 
 ander the Great, before the siege of Tyre, 
 Jos. Ant. 11. . 3. Arr. Alex. M. 2. 15. 
 After his death it was subject alternately to 
 the kings of Syria and of Egypt, and then 
 to the Romans. At present the population 
 of Saida is estimated at from 5000 to 7000, 
 mostly Muhammedans. See Rosenm. Bibl. 
 Geogr. II. i. p. 20 sq. Bibl. Res. in Pal. III. 
 p. 416-428. 
 
 Zl&(i)Vlo$, MI, ov, Sidoninn, and oi 2 1 S ei>- 
 vtoi the Sidonians, inhabitants of Sidon, 
 Acts 12, 20. Also Luke 4, 26 Lachm. 2a- 
 pfirra TTJS 2taw ar (\<apas). Jos. Ant. 17. 
 
 12. 1. 
 
 , aiKapiOf^ ov, 6, Lat. sicarius, (sica, a 
 dagger,) pr. a dagger-man, assassin, robber, 
 Acts 21, 38 ; see Jos. Ant. 20. 8. 6. B. J. 
 2. 13. 5. Bands of robbers and outlaws of 
 this name and character were common in 
 Judea under the procurators ; Jos. B. J. 2. 
 
 13. 3 ti8os XflOTcof oi KaXoiifj.d oi (riKiipioi 
 
 rats eo-Sijo-eo-tj/ vTTOKpv-nroirrts piKpa t 
 . Ant. 20. 8. 5 ; comp. B. J. 7. c. 8-1 1 . 
 
 criKepa, TO, Heb. " | 3^, indec. (Gen. o-i- 
 Ktpos Euseb. Prajp. Evang. 6. 10,) sikera, 
 i. e. strong drink, any intoxicating liquor, 
 whether wine Num. 28, 7, or more usually 
 as prepared from grain, fruit, honey, dates, 
 or the like; Luke 1, 15 otvov nal o-iufpa 
 ov p.fj irijj. So Sept. and "^lU Lev. 10, 9. 
 Deut. 29,6. Judg. 13, 4. 7. 14. Hieron. 
 ad Nepot. Opp. IV. p. 364. Mart. " Sikera 
 Hebrao sermone omnis potio, qus inebriare 
 potest, sive ilia quac frumento conficitur, 
 sive pomorum succo ; aut cum favi deco- 
 quuntur in dulcem et barbaram potionem ; 
 aut palmarum fructus exprimuntur in liquo- 
 rem, coctisque frugibus aqua pinguior colo- 
 ratur." Plin. H. N. 14. 19, "Fierent vina 
 et a pomis, primumque e palmis quarum 
 Palaestina feracissima fuit, quo Parthi et 
 Indi utuntur, et Oriens totus." The Egyp 
 tians prepared a similar drink from barley, 
 Hdot. 2. 77. Diod. Sic. 1. 20, 31. 
 
 4(Adp, see in 2tXouai>o j. 
 
 3,i,\ovav6$, ov, 6, contr. .1X0,9, a, 6, 
 Sili-anus, Silas, pr. n. of a distinguished 
 Christian teacher, the companion of Paul in 
 his journeys in Asia Minor and Greece. 
 The former name only is found in the Epis 
 tles ; the latter only in Acts ; e. g. 2iXova- 
 v6s, 2 Cor. 1, 19. "l Thess. 1, 1. 2 Thess. 
 1,1. 1 Pet 5, 12 ; 2/Xas, Acts 15, 22. 27. 
 32. 34. 40. 16, 19. 25. 29. 17, 4. 10. 14. 
 15. 18, 5. 
 
 .4 tX<oa/A, 6 v. TO, indec. Siloam, Heb. 
 fj3 ^ (sent, a sending, i. e. an aqueduct) 
 Shiloah, Sihah, pr. n. of a fountain in the 
 valley by Jerusalem, John 9, 7. 11 xoXu/i- 
 ftrfipa TOV 2tX. Luke 13,46 trvpyos tv rw 
 2tX. see in irvpyos. So Sept. for Heb. D ? 
 Is. 8, 6. Josephus usually r; 2iXwa/i, once 
 ToO 2tXaja/Lt B. J. 6. 7. 2, and once TOV 2i- 
 X5 ib. 2. 16. 2. See Heb. Lex. art. n Va. 
 The fountain of Siloam is on the south 
 eastern part of Jerusalem, near the foot of 
 Mount Zion, having Moriah on the north. 
 In this quarter there are two fountains so 
 called. The upper or northern one (now 
 known as the Fountain of the Virgin) issues 
 into a small reservoir twenty feet or more 
 below the surface of the ground under the 
 western wall of the valley ; to which reser 
 voir there is a descent by two flights of 26 
 steps in all. From this place it is carried by 
 a winding passage cut beneath the mountain 
 for more than a quarter of a mile to another 
 reservoir in the mouth of the valley of the 
 Tyronceon ; whence it flows as a beautiful 
 
662 
 
 nil winding its way down into the valley of 
 Jehoshaphat towards the south-east. The 
 water is soft, of a sweetish taste, and plea 
 sant, though slightly brackish ; according 
 well with the description of Josephus, y\v- 
 Kfla Koi TroXXj) TTfyyjj, B. J. 5. 4. 1. The 
 second or lower reservoir is doubtless the 
 Siloam of Scripture. From a misappre 
 hension of the language of Josephus (B. J. 
 5. 4. 1,2), Reland and some other modern 
 writers have sought for Siloam on the south- 
 ivestern side of Zion. Rel. Pal. p. 858 ; 
 comp. Bibl. Res. in Palest. I. p. 494. See 
 genr. ibid. I. p. 493-508. 
 
 v, ov, TO, Lat. semicinctium, 
 
 1. e. an apron, pr. covering half the person, 
 and worn by artisans and servants, Acts 
 19, 12. 
 
 Sifjiwv, a>vos, 6, Simon, Heb. V>SBttj 
 (a hearkening) Simeon, pr. n. of several 
 persons. 
 
 1. Simon Peter, the apostle, see in He 
 rpes, Matt. 17, 25. Mark 1, 16. Luke 4, 38. 
 
 22, 31 . al. Elsewhere also, 2i /^o>i/ 6 Xeyo p,e- 
 i/oy V. eViKaXovjiiei os 1 Herpos, Matt. 4, 18. 1 0, 
 
 2. Acts 10, 18. 11,13; Sipmv wopa IleVpoy 
 Mark 3, 16, comp. Luke 6, 14 ; 2t p.wi> He - 
 rpos Matt. 16, 16. Luke 5, 8. John 1, 41. 
 6, 8. 13, 6. 9 ; Si/tap 6 vlbs Icava John 1, 
 43 ; 2t |ua>i> Bapioova Matt. 16, 17 ; 2//x<uj/ 
 Iwm John 21, 15. 16. 17. + 
 
 2. Simon, also an apostle, surnamed 6 
 ZrjXuTrjs Luke 6, 15. Acts 1, 13 ; or 6 Ka- 
 vavirrjs Matt. 10, 4. Mark 3, 18 ; see these 
 articles. Not improb. he may have been 
 the brother of James the Less and Jude ; 
 at least, he is mentioned next to them in all 
 the lists of the apostles, Matt. 10, 4. Mark 
 
 3. 18. Luke 6, 15. 
 
 3. Simon, a son of Mary and brother of 
 Jesus, Matt. 13, 55. Mark 6, 3. Others 
 regard him as the brother of James the Less 
 and Jude, and only a kinsman of Jesus ; but 
 see in laKupos no. 3. 
 
 4. Simon, the father of Judas Iscariot, 
 John 6, 71. 12,4. 13,2. 26. 
 
 5. Simon a Pharisee, who invited Jesus 
 to his house, Luke 7, 40. 43. 44. 
 
 6. Simon 6 \fnp6s, i. e. formerly a leper, 
 Matt. 26, 6. Mark 14, 3. 
 
 7. Simon the Cyrenian, Kvprjvaios, who 
 was compelled to aid in bearing the cross 
 of Jesus, Matt. 27, 32. Mark 15, 21. Luke 
 
 23, 26. 
 
 8. Simon 6 p-ayevav, a sorcerer in Sama 
 ria, Acts 8,9. 13. 18. 24. 
 
 9. Simon 6 fivpa-evs, a tanner at Joppa, 
 Acts 9, 43. 10, 6. 17. 32. 
 
 Siva, TO, indec. Sinai, Heb. "^D ; Sept. 
 TO 2ira Judg. 5, 5. Ex. 19, 1. 2 ; Josephua 
 TO Sivaiov (opor) Ant. 3. 5. 1 ; pr. n. of a 
 mountain or rather cluster of mountains in 
 the Arabian peninsula between the two 
 gulfs of the Red Sea, celebrated as the place 
 where the Mosaic law was given ; Acts 7, 
 30. 38. Gal. 4, 24. 25. The proper Sinai 
 is a lofty ridge between two deep and very 
 narrow valleys ; the northern end impends 
 perpendicularly towards the north over a 
 narrow plain er-Rahah ; the southern rises 
 into a higher summit, the modern Jebel 
 Musa. In the S. W. beyond the deep valley 
 is another ridge, on which is the summit St. 
 Catharine. The place of the giving of the 
 law was prob. the northern end of the first 
 ridge ; see Biblioth. Sacr. 1849. p. 381 sq. 
 The Arabic name for the whole mountain 
 is now Jebel el-Tur. See a full description 
 of Sinai with a Map in Bibl. Res. in Palest. 
 I. p. 129 sq. 139sq.*148sq. 157 sq. 175 sq. 
 Comp. also Burckhardt s Trav. in Syria etc. 
 4to. p. 565 sq. RiippelPs Reisen in Nub. 
 u. dem petr. Arabien, p. 257 sq. Id. Reise 
 in Abyssinien, I. p. 117 sq. Ritter Erdkunde 
 XIV. p. 517-638. 
 
 Givasm, eo), TO, mustard, sinapis orien- 
 talis, a plant often growing in the fertile 
 soil of Palestine to a very considerable size, 
 Matt. 13, 31. Mark 4, 31. Luke 13, 19. 
 See Buxt. Lex. Chald. 823. Irby and Mangles 
 found it " growing wild, as high as the 
 horses heads ;" p. 355 [108]. The phrase 
 K.OK.KOV o-tvdireus, a grain of mustard, is pro 
 verbial, i. q. the least, the smallest particle 
 Matt. 17, 20. Luke 17, 6. So Rabb. 
 ^iP? ^T??, Buxt. I.e. 822. Others re 
 gard the o-iVoTrt of the N. T. as the shrub 
 or tree Salvador a Persica, found by Irby 
 and Mangles on or near the peninsula of the 
 Dead Sea. Its fruit hangs " in bunches re 
 sembling the currant, with the colour of the 
 plum ; it has a pleasant, though strong 
 aromatic taste, exactly resembling mustard," 
 and produces a like irritability in the nose 
 and eyes ; see Irby and Mang. p. 354 [108]. 
 Royle in Journ. of Sacr. Lit. 1849. p. 271. 
 sq. So aivain Archipp. in Athen. 9. 68. p. 
 498 ; o-ivaTreas Nicet. Annal. 17. 5. p. 337 ; 
 other late forms are a-ivrj-m Artemid. 5. 5. p. 
 401 ; o-iWv Athen. 2. 78. p. 264. The 
 early and Attic form was vairv ; see Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 288. 
 
 criv$ci)v, oj/os, T], sindon, i. e. fine linen, 
 muslin, from India, Hdot. 1. 200. ib. 2. 95 ; 
 <riv8u>v pvo-ffivr], Hdot. 2. 86. ib. 7. 181 ; 
 also genr. linen cloth, used as a signal, Pol 
 
663 
 
 2. 66. 10. Passovv derives it from 
 Sind; some (as Etym. M.) from the city 
 StScoj ,- while Pollux regards it as of Egyp 
 tian origin, Onom. 7. 172. In N. T. linen 
 cloth, fine linen, e. g. a loose linen garment, 
 linen, worn at night instead of the usual 
 garments ; Mark 14, 51 wtgfifgot trfpt- 
 j3(f3\T)nevos (rivoova eVl yu/ivoC. V. 52. Used 
 also for wrapping around dead bodies, Matt. 
 
 27, 59. Mark 15, 46 bis. Luke 23, 53. 
 Sept. for V10 Judg. 14, 12. 13. Prov. 31, 
 24. So Galen. ^117 yvjj.vbs Ko/iie cr3, dXXa 
 TTfpi^f^\T)fj.vos o-ii>86va, in Wetst. I. p. 63 1 . 
 Hdot. 2. 95 fjv p.ev tv fyiart&> eVeXt^ajuepoy 
 (v8rj 77 a-ivSovi. Thuc. 2. 49. 
 
 atvid^o), f. da-fa, (viviov a riddle,) to sift, 
 to shake, as grain in a sieve or riddle. 
 Trop. c. ace. of pers. impl. Luke 22, 31 
 6 Saravas e^J/T^craro v/iay, rov crividcrai coy 
 TOV &ITOV, i. e. to agitate and prove you by 
 trials and afflictions. Hesych. o-undcrai 
 a-flo-ai, Koo-Kivevo-ai. Not found in classic 
 writers. 
 
 O"iT6UT09, 77, 6v, (a-iTfvv, o-iros,) fed up 
 with grain, fatted; Luke 15, 23 TOV /noV^oi/ 
 TOV o-iTfvrov. v. 27. 30. Sept. for p3^E b35 
 Jer. 46, 21 ; O^X 1 K. 5, 3 [4, 23]. 
 Pol. 39. 2. 7. Xen. An. 5. 4. 32. 
 
 (Tiriov, ou, TO, (o-iToy,) grain, corn, pro 
 vision of grain, Acts 7, 12 Lachm. for Plur. 
 o-Tra. Plur. TO o-m a Jos. Ant. 15. 9. 1. 
 Pol. 8. 37. 1. 
 
 <7iTKTTO9, r], 6v, (o-m fa>, o-iToy,) fed up 
 with grain, failed ; Subst. ra o-tno-ra, fat- 
 lings, Matt 22, 4. Jos. Ant. 8. 2. 4. 
 Athen. 14. p. 656. c. The form o-tTeuToy 
 was more Attic, Thorn. Mag. p. 794. 
 
 CTlTOfJieTplOV) ou, TO, ((TITOS, /nerpfeo,) 
 gram measured out, an allowance, portion, 
 ration, Luke 12, 42. Greg. Naz. Orat. 2. 
 29. Basil. Ep. 393, 404. A word of the 
 later Greek, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 383. Comp. 
 (TiTo^ifTpia Diod. Sic. 2. 41. 
 
 eriT09, ou, 6, Plur. TO o-n-a, wheat, and 
 genr. for grain, corn ; Matt. 3, 12 o-ui/aet 
 TOV O- ITOV aurou. 13, 25. 29. 30. Mark 4, 
 
 28. Luke 3, 17. 16, 7. 22, 31 comp. in 
 o-ii/uico. John 12, 24. Acts 7, 12 see in o-i- 
 T/oK. 27, 38. 1 Cor. 15, 37. Rev. 6, 6. 18, 
 13. Sept. for 13 Gen. 41,49; IJ-j Gen. 
 27, 28. Is. 36, 17. ^El. V. II. 6. 12. 
 Pol. 5. 1. 11. Xen. Anab. 2. 4. 27. 
 
 > see 
 
 Sia)V, 6 \. TO, indec. Sion, Heb. "p*^ 
 (sunny place) Zion, the southernmost and 
 highest of the hills on which Jerusalem 
 was built, containing the citadel, the palace 
 
 and the uppsr city, r/ ai/co TrdXiy v. ayopd 
 Jos. B. J. 5. 4. 1 ; see in lepouo-aX^. In 
 N. T. synecd. for the whole of Jerusalem, 
 as the holy city, the seat of the worship ot 
 the true God, where his presence is said to 
 dwell ; e. g. eVi TO opoy 2io>j> Rev. 14, 1 ; 
 tv 2iwv Rom. 9, 33. 1 Pet. 2, 6 ; tn 2tcoi> 
 Rom. 11, 26; Suyanjp 2ia>v Matt. 21, 5. 
 John 12, 15, see in Suyarr/p no. 3. Of the 
 spiritual or celestial Zion, Heb. 12, 22 ; see 
 in ifpova-aXijfJi no. 3. b. 
 
 a I/WIT (id)) o>, f. jjo"u, (o"tco7TT/,) to be si 
 lent, still, intrans. 
 
 1 . Pr. of persons, to keep silence, to hold 
 one s peace, absol. Matt. 20, 31. 26, 63 6 fie 
 Ifjo-ouy eViowra. Mark 3, 4. 9, 34. 10, 48. 
 14, 61. Luke 18, 39. 19, 40. Acts 18, 9. 
 Of one unable to speak, dumb, Luke 1, 20. 
 Sept. for DM Job 29, 21 ; tf-nnri Is. 36, 
 21. Luc. D. Deor. 21. 2. Dem. 1126. 27. 
 Xen. An. 1. 3. 2. 
 
 2. Trop. of a sea or lake, to be still, calm, 
 hushed; Mark 4, 39 O-ICOTTO, irefpipaxro. 
 Comp. Antb. Gr. I. p. 169. 1 a-eo-iyijKtv fie 
 3aXa<ro-a. Theocr. Id. 2. 38. So sileat mare, 
 Valer. Flacc. 8. 452. 
 
 crKavSaXlfo, f. lo-o), (o-KavfioXop,) pr. to 
 make stumble ; Pass, to stumble ; not found 
 in classic writers. So trop. of external cir 
 cumstances or character, to cause to fall, 
 to bring to ruin, Aquil. for ^?j ^?? 
 Prov. 4, 12. Is. 8, 15. 40, 30. Ps. 64, 9 ; 
 also Ecclus. 9, 5. 23, 8. 35, 15. In N. T. 
 trop. in a moral sense, to make stumble at or 
 in any thing, i. e. 
 
 1 . Genr. to give or cause offence to any 
 one, i. q. to offend, to vex, pr. to scandalize, 
 c. ace. of pers. Matt. 17, 27 iva fie ^17 o~Kav- 
 8aXto"&>/iei> auTouy. John 6, 61. 1 Cor. 8, 
 13 bis. Pass. Matt. 15, 12. Rom. 14, 21. 
 2 Cor. 11, 29. Also Pass. <TKa>8aXieo-3cu 
 tv TIVI, to be offended in or at any one, to 
 take offence at his character, words, con 
 duct, so as to desert and reject him ; Matt 
 11, 6 paicdpios tcrTiv, os tav /ir) o-KaffiaXi- 
 0-377 tv tfj-oi 13.57. 26, 31. 33 bis. Mark 
 6, 3. 14, 27. 29. Luke 7, 23. 
 
 2. Causat. to cause to offend, to lead 
 astray, to lead into sin, i. e. to be a stum 
 bling block, or the occasion of one s sin 
 ning ; c. ace. of pers. Matt. 5, 29 fie 6 
 o(p3. crou o~Kav8a\iei erf. v. 30. 18, 6 6y 8 
 av o-AcavfiuXiOT; tva TO>V pixpatv TOVTUV. v. 8. 
 9. Mark 9, 42. 43. 45. 47. Luke 17, 2. So 
 Psalt. Salom. 16, 7 yvvaiKos irovrjpas crKav- 
 fiaXtfouo-rjy ucppova. Hence Pass, to be 
 made to offend, to be led astray or into sin, 
 i. q. to fall away from the truth, from the 
 
664 
 
 aicevos 
 
 gospel; Matt. 13, 21. 24, 10. Mark 4, 17. 
 John 16, 1. 
 
 (TKavSaXov, ov, TO, (cn>cda> or tr/ca/z/Soj,) 
 a later form for a-KavbdX^pov, pr. a (rap-slick, 
 a bent stick on which the bait is fastened, 
 which the animal strikes against and so 
 springs the trap ; Pollux On. 7. 1 1 4 tpyd- 
 OITO d av 6 TtKTM KO.\ p.vdypas, u>v TO KTTU- 
 fifvuv T KOL o~x.a<)p.fvov irarraXiov TO oe Trj 
 o-irapTivr) TrpovTjpTrmevov o~Kavo d\ifipov Ka- 
 Xelrat. ib. 10. 156. Aristoph. Achar. 687, 
 Schol. Com p. Wetst. N. T. I. p. 302. He- 
 sych. o-Kavoa\o^p LOTOS, KOI o-Kav8a\ov TO tv 
 Tols fjivdypais. .Synecd. a trap, gin, snare, 
 Sept. for tt5J5ia trop. Josh. 23, 13. 1 Sam. 
 18, 21. Hence genr. any thing which one 
 strikes or stumbles against, a stumbling- 
 block, impediment, as Sept. for 
 Lev. 19, 14 dnfvavri Tv<p\ov ov Tr 
 <TKdv8d\oi>, comp. Judith 5, 1. In N. T. a 
 stumbling-block, offence, only trop. in a mo 
 ral sense. 
 
 1. Genr. a cause of stumbling, falling, 
 ruin, morally and spiritually ; e. g. of Christ, 
 as TTtTpa (TKavSdXov, a rock of stumbling, 
 Rom. 9, 33. 1 Pet. 2, 8 ; see in mTpa no. 
 2, and Xt Soy no. 2. Also genr. Rom. 11,9 
 yfi/TjSqrco i) Tpdirfa avT<av . . . fls (TKavSaXov, 
 quoted from Ps. 69, 23 where Sept. for 
 Cgia, comp. above. Sept. for blffiaa 
 Ps. 119, 165. Ecclus. 27, 23. 1 Mace. 5, 4. 
 
 2. As a cause of offence and indignation, 
 i. q. offence, a scandal; Matt. 16, 23 o-icdv- 
 gaXdV pav tl 1 Cor. 1, 23. Gal. 5, 11. 
 Judith 12, 2. 
 
 3. As a cause or occasion of sinning or 
 of falling away from the truth, Matt. 18, 7 
 ter. Luke 17, 1 dvcvfaKTov eVri ^17 eX3eti> 
 ra o-Kdi/SaXa. Rom. 14, 13. 16, 17. Rev. 2, 14. 
 1 John 2, 10 KOI o-KavSaXoi/ eV airw OVK fVTiv, 
 I. e. there is in himself nothing to lead him 
 into sin; comp. v. 11 and John 11, 9. Me 
 lon, of persons, Matt. 13,41. Sept. fonsg-ha 
 Judg. 2, 3. Ps. 106, 36. Wisd. 14, 11. 
 
 (TKaTTTQ), f. A/rco, to dig, to delve, absol. 
 Luke 6, 48 os ttrxa^f KCU e 0d3ui>e, see in 
 /3a3vi/to. 13, 8. 16, 3 vRcarrciv OVK lax- 
 Sept. Is. 5, G, Heb. i"!" Aristoph. Av. 
 1432 a-KaiTTfiv yap OVK rurra/iai. Hdian. 
 4. 7. 6. Xen. (Ec. 16. 14. 
 
 (7Ka(f)r), T]S, f), (o-KaTTTta,) pr. any thing 
 dug out, e. g". a channel, trench, Hdot. 4. 
 73 ; a bowl, Bel and Drag. 33 ; a bath Arr. 
 Epict. 3. 22. 71. In N. T. a skiff, boat, 
 Acts 27, 16. 30. 32. So Dion. Hal. Ant. 
 3. 44. Pol. 1. 23. 7. Plut. Mor. II. p. 17. 
 
 creXo9, (os, ovs, TO, Plur. TO. oWX?;, the 
 leg, the legs, from the hip to the foot, John 
 
 19, 31. 32. 33. Sept. for Q^SnS Lev. 11, 
 21. Am. 3, 12. Aristot. H. An. 1. 15. 5. 
 Pol. 1. 80. 13. Xen. An. 4. 2. 20. 
 
 aros, TO, a-Kfw, ovce- 
 covering, clothing, raiment, 1 Tim. 6. 
 8 f^oiTfs Se 8iaTpo(f)as Kal (TKfTrd(Tfj.aTa, KT\. 
 Jos. B. J. 2. 8. 5 ^uxrd^evoi a-Kindo-fiucri 
 \ivois. Plut. Lucull. 27. Plato Pol. 279. d. 
 
 5*/ceLa9, a, 6, Sceca, pr. n. of a Jew 
 who had been a chief priest, Acts 19, 14. 
 See in dp^itpfvs no. 2. 
 
 CTKevij, fj S , f), (o-KfCo?,) apparatus, equip 
 ment, e. g. for war, Diod. Sic. 11. 71 ; ap 
 parel, equipage, trappings, Hdian. 6. 4. 11. 
 Xen. An. 4. 7. 27. In N. T. of a ship, 
 furniture, implements, effects; Acts 27, 19 
 Trjv (TK.(vi]v TOW TrXot ou fppl^fa^jifv. So Diod. 
 Sic. 1 4. 79. Of household furniture, mov 
 ables, Pol. 2. 6. 6. 
 
 CT/ceOo?, eo?, ovs , TO, (kindr. Kue co, Kev3o>,) 
 a vessel, utensil, implement. 
 
 1 . Genr. of the furniture and utensils of 
 a house, e. g. a) Pr. of a hollow vessel 
 for containing things, Luke 8, 1 6 ovSe \s 8e 
 \v\vov a\lfas, KaXtfllTtl CLVTOV crKfvti. John 
 19, 29. Acts 10, 11. 16. 11, 5. Sept. and 
 ^3 2 K. 4, 3. 4. 6. (^El. V. H. 12. 8. 
 Hdian. 4. 7. 8.) Of a potter s vessel, Rom. 
 9, 21. Rev. 2, 27. Sept. and 1^3 Lev. 6, 
 28. 14, 50. b) Of any vessel or imple 
 ment ; Mark 11,16 OVK rj<pifi> Iva T\S $K- 
 vtyKfl crKfvos 8ia TOV l(pov. 2 Tim. 2. 20. 
 Heb. 9, 21 TO. o-Kfvr) TTJS \(iTovpyias. Rev. 
 18, 12 bis. Sept. and 1^3 1 Chr. 9, 28. 
 Num. 1, 50. Ex. 3, 22. So Diod. Sic. 17. 
 66. Xen. Mem. 1. 7. 5. c) Plur. T 
 o-Kfvn, household stuff, goods, furniture, 
 Matt. 12, 29. Mark 3," 27. Luke 17, 31 TO 
 crKevr) avTov ev Trj otKt a. Sept. Gen. 31, 37. 
 Neh. 13,8. So Palaeph. 38. 3. Hdian. 2. 1.2. 
 Xen. (Ec. 8. 12. d) Spec, in a ship, collect 
 TO a-Kfvos, the tackling, espec. the sails, as the 
 implements of sailing ; Acts 27, 17 x^- 
 o-avT(s TO o-Kfvos, Engl. they stroke sail,. 
 So Ta a-Kf vrj genr. of the implements and 
 tackle of a ship, Dem. 1145. 1. ;E1. V. H. 
 6. 12. Xen. OZc. 8. 11, 12. 
 
 2. Trop. of persons, e. g. a) As the 
 instrument or agent of any one ; Acts 9, 
 15 vKfvos (K\oyrjs, a chosen vessel, instru 
 ment. 2 Tim. 2, 21. Comp. Sept. and 1^3 
 Jer. 50, 25. So Pol. 13. 5. 7 Aa/ioxX^. . . 
 v7rr]pTiKov t)v o-Ktvos (v<pvs. b) In a mo 
 ral respect ; Rom. 9, 22. 23 a-Kfvrj opyys, 
 vKfvr, \tovs, vessels of wrath, of mercij, 
 i. e. those on whom the divine wrath or 
 mercy is to be exercised ; in allusion to the 
 vessels of the potter in v. 21. Comp. in 
 
<7KT]Vi) 
 
 665 
 
 ovc 771/077-010? 
 
 an active sense, Sept. tnuvrj opyrjs, Heb. 
 B?! n ^3 j i. e. instruments of wrath, Jer. 
 50, 25. e) Of the human body as formed 
 of clay, and therefore frail and feeble ; 2 Cor. 
 4, 7 e^ofjifv TUV Srjcravpbv TOVTOV fi> oarrpa- 
 
 KIVOIS ffHfVTlV. 
 
 3. Spec, in the later Hebrew usage, Heb. 
 "^3. (J r . o-Kfios, is put for a wife, as the 
 vessel of her husband ; see Schrcttg. Hor. 
 Heb. p. 8-27. Wetst. N. T. II. p. 301. So 
 
 1 Pet. 3, 7 o)f dcr SevfcrTtpo) o-xevfi rw yvvai- 
 Kfiio, the female vessel as the weaker. 1 Thess. 
 
 4, 4 ro tauTov o-Ktvos Kracr3at, see in KTUO- 
 fiai ; comp. 1 Cor. 7, 2. CEcumen. rivfs 
 TO eavTov (TKtvos TTJV 6p.6vyov r]pfj,r]VfvtTav. 
 
 (TKrjVi], fjs, 17, (kindr. a-Kevos, cr/a a,) a 
 booth, hut, tabernacle, lent, pr. any covered 
 or shaded place, Heb. <"I2O . 
 
 1. Pr. as built of green boughs and the 
 like, a booth; Matt. 17, 4 Trotijo-co^ev wSe 
 rpfls orKTjvds. Mark 9, 5. Luke 9, 33. Sept. 
 for H3O Gen. 33, 17. Is. 1, 8. Jon. 4, 5. 
 So Dem. 284. 24. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 25. 
 Also of skins or cloth, a tent, tabernacle, 
 Heb. 11,9 (v (TKTjvais KaToiKiycray. Sept. and 
 "30 Lev. 23, 43. 2 Sam. 11, 11 ; for bnist 
 Gen. 4, 19. 18, 1 sq. So ^El. V. H. 9. 3. 
 Hdian. 2. 11. 3. Xen. An. 3. 3. 1. Once 
 poetically for a house; Acts 15, 16 dvoixo- 
 8o/iij(r6) Tr)v (TKrjvrjv Aa/318 rrjv TTfTrrcoKuiai , 
 quoted from Amos 9, 1 1 where Sept. and 
 "I3O, metaph. for the family or royal line of 
 David, fallen into weakness and decay. 
 Genr. for abode, dwelling; Luke 16, 9 tig 
 Tas alwviovs o-Knvas. Rev. 13, 6 rfjv crKrjvfjV 
 nvTov PC. TOV 3eo{5, i. e. heaven. Sept. and 
 r.SO Job 36, 29. Ps. 18, 12. 
 
 2! Spec, the tabernacle, the sacred tent 
 of the Hebrews, in which the ark was kept, 
 the earliest seat of the Jewish worship. 
 The ark however was separated from the 
 tabernacle long before the building of the 
 temple, and was kept in Jerusalem ; while 
 the tabernacle itself remained in Gibeon ; 
 
 2 Chr. 1, 3. 4. 13, comp. 2 Sam. 6, 17. 
 1 Chr. 15, 1. a) Pr. and genr. Heb. 8, 
 
 5. 0, 1 Rec. 9, 21. 13, 10. Acts 7, 44 f, 
 CTK. TOV papTvpiov, see in papTvpiov no. 2. 
 Sept, for bnk Ex. 29,4.10. 33,7; ,S aa 
 Num. 1, 50 sq. Synecd. spoken of the 
 outer sanctuary of the tabernacle, Heb. 9, 
 2. 6. 8 ; also of the inner sanctuary, the 
 holy of holies, Heb. 9, 3. b) Symbolic 
 ally of the spiritual or celestial tabernacle, 
 from which the material one is said to have 
 been copied, Heb. 8, 2. 9, 1 1 ; comp. 8, 5. 
 9, 23. 24. Also poetically for the temple 
 in the heavenly Jerusalem; Rev. 15, 5 } 
 raos TTJJ arKr]vf)S TOV p.apTvpiov. 21, 3. 
 
 3. Spec. Acts 7, 43 f] o-Kum] TOV MoXo ^, 
 the tabernacle of Moloch, quoted from Amo? 
 5, 26 where Sept. for Heb. rviSO, i. e . a 
 tabernacle or sanctuary which the idolatrous 
 Israelites constructed in the desert in hon 
 our of Moloch, like that in honour of Jeho 
 vah ; prob. of a small size so as to elude 
 the notice of Moses ; see in Pe/^ui/. Comp. 
 the o-KTjvfj If pd of the Carthaginians Diod. 
 Sic. 20. 65. Petron. 29 " praeterea grande 
 armarium in angulo vidi, in cujus aedicula 
 erant lares argentei positi." 
 
 (TKr)V07rr)yui, as, f], 
 pr. a booth-pitching, tent-pitching, i. e. the 
 festival of booths or of tabernacles, the third 
 great annual festival of the Jews, in which 
 all the males were required to appear before 
 God at the tabernacle or temple, the other 
 two being the Passover and Pentecost 
 (Deut. 16. 16). John 7, 2 fj 0/37-77 TUV 
 louSauoy, (TKnvoTTTjyia. So 17 crKrjvorrTjyia 
 2 Mace. 1, 9. 18; also Heb. rnstpn an, 
 Sept. (opTT) TTJS CTKrjvonriyias Deut. 16, 16. 
 31, 10. Zech. 14, 16. 18. 19 ; also 1 Esdr. 
 5, 51. 1 Mace. 10, 21. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 12. 
 Sept. fopTrj T&V (TKqvcav Lev. 23, 24. Deut. 
 16, 13. This festival was so called from 
 the booths (tabernacles) of green boughs 
 and leaves, in which the people dwelt seven 
 days, on the roofs of the houses and in the 
 courts and streets. It began on the 15th 
 day of the seventh month Tisri, which com 
 menced with the new moon of October, and 
 was celebrated for eight days ; partly as a 
 memorial of the 40 years wandering in the 
 desert, where the Israelites dwelt in tents, 
 Lev. 23, 39-43 ; and partly as a season of 
 thanksgiving for the ingathering of the har 
 vest, hence called fp&Xri an , (he festival 
 of ingathering, Ex. 23, 16. 34, 22. It was 
 a season of rejoicing and feasting ; particu 
 lar sacrifices were offered ; and portions of 
 the law read in public; Deut. 31, 10 sq. 
 Neh. 8, 18. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 12. To these 
 the later Jews added a libation of water 
 brought from the fountain Siloam, mixed 
 with wine, and poured upon the altar. Comp. 
 genr. Lev. 23, 34 sq. 39 sq. Neh. 8, 14. 
 2 Mace. 10, 6 sq. Jos. Ant. 3. 10. 4. ib. 4. 
 8. 12. ib. 8. 4. 1. The first and eighth 
 days were Sabbaths to the Lord, with holy 
 convocations, Lev. 23, 35. 36. 39. Num. 
 29, 12. 35; and the eighth especially is 
 called the last great day of the festival, 
 John 7, 37 ; comp. Neh. 8, 18. 
 
 crKrjvoTTOios, ov, 6, (o-KTjvi], 7roua>,) a 
 tent-maker, spoken of Paul, Acts 18, 3 ; 
 see in IlaCXor. Poll. On. 7. 189; comp. 
 
666 
 
 wp-ai Diod. Sic. 3. 27. Hdian. 
 7. 2. 8. 
 
 (TKrjVOS) eos, ovs, TO, (O-KTJVI J,) a booth, 
 tent, tabernacle, Anthol. Gr. II. p. 162. 
 Hesych. O-KTJVOVS olKrjTrjplov.ln N. T. 
 trop. for the body, as the frail and tempor 
 ary abode of the soul ; 2 Cor. 5, 1 17 ri- 
 yetos ot/ct a TOV O-KTJVOVS, this earthly house, 
 this tabernacle, the genit. being equivalent 
 to an apposition, as in Hebrew, Gesen. 
 Lehrg. p. 677. 2 Cor. 5, 4 ot 6Wer eV TM 
 crKr/vei. So Wisd. 9, 15 TO yecSSes crKrjvos. 
 ^Eschin. Dial. Socr. 3. 5. J31. H. An. 12. 
 17. Plato Axioch. 366. a. 
 
 aiC rjvoci), , f. coo-to, ((TKrjvos.) to tent, to 
 pitch tent, Sept. for itiis Gen. 13, 12. 
 Hdian. 6. 8. 17. In N. T. to dwell as in 
 tents, to tabernacle ; so c. eV rjp.lv John 1 , 
 14 ; eV c. dat. of place, Rev. 12, 12. 13, 6; 
 p-eru c. gen. Rev. 21, 3 ; eVt c. ace. Rev. 
 7, 15. Sept. c. eV for a ]3& Judg. 8, 11. 
 So Xen. An. 5. 5. 11 a-K-nvovv V TCUS 
 
 ros, TO, (O-KIJVOM. ) a booth or 
 tent pitched, a tabernacle, pr. Xen. An. 2. 2. 
 17. In N. T. a dwelling, temple, for God, 
 Acts 7, 46. (Sept. and "jSima Ps. 132, 5. 
 46, 4 ; bnk 1 K. 2, 28. 8, V.) Trop. of 
 the body, as the frail tenement of the soul, 
 2 Pet. 1, 13. 14 ; comp. in <TKT)VOS. 
 
 crtCM, as, TJ, I. a shadow, shade. 
 a) Pr. Mark 4, 32 vno rfjv crxiav avrov. 
 Acts 5, 15. Sept. for }>% Ez. 17, 23. 
 Judg. 9, 36. So m. V. H. 2. 14. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 8. 17. b) Spec, for darkness, 
 gloom, as a-Kia Sai/arou death-shade, thickest 
 darkness, see in Sdvaros no. 4 ; Matt. 4, 
 1G. Lnke 1, 79. Comp. umbra mortis Ovid 
 Met. 5. 191. 
 
 2. Trop. a shadow, i. c. a shadowing 
 forth, adumbration, in distinction from TO 
 erco/ia the body or reality, and 6 tiKcav the 
 full and perfect image ; so of the Jewish 
 rites and dispensation as prefiguring the 
 future and more perfect things of the gos 
 pel dispensation; Col. 2, 17 a m a-nia 
 TO>V fj.e\\6iTa>v, TO de crw/xa TOU Xpioroi . 
 Heb. 8, 5. 10, 1 (TKIUV yap e^aiv 6 VO/JLOS . 
 OVK avrrjv TTJV eiKova TU>V Tvpayparatv. Phil- 
 OStr. Vit. Soph. 1. 20. 1 oTt erKia KGU ovei- 
 paTa al rjo oval jracrai. Comp. Cic. Off. 3. 
 17 " nos veri juris solidam et expressam 
 effigiem nullam tenemus ; umbra et imagi- 
 nibus utimur." 
 
 (TKLpraw, >, f. f)cra>, to leap, to spring, 
 espec. of animals, Sept. Mai. 4, 2. Wisd. 
 17, 19. Luc. D. Marin. 15, 2. In N. T. to 
 leap for joy, to exult, Luke 6, 23 Ampere 
 
 KOL o-KipTTjo-aTf. Of the foetus in the womb, 
 Luke 1, 41. 44 ; comp. Sept. Gen. 25, 22, 
 So Aristoph. Plut. 761 (TKtpraTf /cat xopev- 
 fTe. Plut. de Liber, educ. 18 fin. u-KipTvaa 
 vfoTns. Hdian. 4. 11. 5. 
 
 0-K\7)pOKap&ia, as, 17, O/cX77pos,/cap8/a,) 
 hardness of heart, stubbornness, Matt. 19, 
 8 irpos TTJV crK\rjpoKap8iav vfj.<ov. Mark 10, 
 5. 16, 14. Sept. for 33b n^S Deut. 10, 
 16. Jer. 4, 4. Ecclus. 16, 10*. Not found 
 in classic writers. 
 
 , v, o-K)vat, o-KeXXw,) pr. 
 
 dried up, hard, stiff; so of the voice or 
 sounds, hoarse, harsh, anX. TJX OS J s - Ant. 
 4. 3. 3 ; (TK\. Ppovrai ib. 2. 16. 3. Hdot. 8. 
 12 ; or of things, hard, not soft, TO a-K\rjpa 
 /cat TCI p.aXa/ca Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 1. Hence 
 in N. T. hard, e. g. 
 
 1. Of winds, fierce, violent, James 3, 4 
 VTTO (TK\rjpa>v dvefj.u>v. Comp. in Engl. a 
 hard wind, a stiff wind. Sept. Prov. 27, 
 16 /3ope ar (riiXrjpus avep-os. JE\. V. H. 9. 
 14 (TK\. &vfp.oi. Arr. Alex. M. 1. 26. 3. 
 
 2. Of things spoken, hard, harsh, offen 
 sive; as Xoyor John 6, 60, comp. v. 61. 
 Jude 15 Trept Trdvrcov TU>V ovcX^pwi/ lov e Xd- 
 \r)<rav KUT OVTOV, q. d. hard speeches. 
 Sept. for H Gen. 42, 7. 30. 1 K. 12, 13. 
 So Eurip. jragm. 75 iroTepa SeXtt? <TOI 
 p-aXSa/ca -^fvdij X/yw rj o-/cX>;p aXrj^lij. Of 
 tilings done, hard, difficult ; Acts 9, 5 et 26, 
 1 4 <TK\vp6i> <rot wpos KtvTpa \aKTi(iv. Sept. 
 for "IIZJE Ex. 1, 14. Deut. 26, 6. So Pol. 4. 
 21. 1/Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 20. 
 
 3. Of persons, hard, harsh, stern, austere , 
 Matt. 25, 24 on cncX^poy et <iv%pa>Tros. So 
 Sept. for nc|5 1 Sam. 25, 3. Is. 48, 4. 
 Luc. Somn. 6. Aristot. Eth. 4. 8 ayptot /eat 
 crK\r]poi 8oKov<riv eivai. Athen. 2. p. 55. e. 
 
 TOS, TJ, (o-/cXr;po s,) dnjness, 
 hardness, TTJS yfjs Jos. Ant. 3. 1. 1 ; hardi 
 ness of the body, Plut. de tuend. San. praec. 
 15. In N. T. trop. a-KXrjporrjs TJJS Kapdias, 
 hardness of heart, stubbornness, Rom. 2, 5. 
 Sept. for iifip Deut. 9, 27. 
 
 6, f,, adj. 
 
 hard-necked, stiff-necked, stub 
 born, Acts 7, 51. Sept. for Cl^-n^ps Ex. 
 33, 3. 5. Deut. 9, 6. 13. Bar. 2, 22. Ecclus. 
 16, 12. 
 
 <TK\ r r)pvva), f. vvco, (o-/cX?;po?,) to make 
 dry and hard ; trop. to make hard, heavy, 
 grievous, Sept. for n^ptl 2 Chr. 10, 4. 
 Judg. 4, 24 ; of words V Sam. 19, 43. In 
 N. T. of persons in a moral sense, to harden, 
 to make stubborn; so God, c. ace. Rom. 9, 
 18 ov 8e 3Xet, a-K\rjpvvd, i. e. gives over 
 
ovcoXto? 
 
 667 
 
 to impenitence and hardness of heart ; comp. 
 v. 17 et Ex. 7, 3. Of men, Pass, or Mid. 
 to harden oneself, to be hardened, Acts 19, 
 9. Heb. 3, 13. With ras Kapftias Heb. 3, 
 8. 15 et 4, 7, quoted from Ps. 95, 8 where 
 Sept. for nirpn ; also for prn Ex. 9, 12. 
 
 10,20. So llcclus. 30, 12 firjirore <TK\T]- 
 
 <T/co\t09, a, 6v, (oWXXco,) crooked, bent, 
 pr. from dryness, e. g. v\ov <TKO\IOV Wisd. 
 13, 13 ; <TK. o-io-Tjpos Hdot. 2. 86. In N. T. 
 
 1 . crooked, of a way, or parts of it, Luke 
 3, 5 nal eo-rai TCI cncoXia els (vZflav, quoted 
 from Is. 40, 4 where Sept. for 2pS . Sept. 
 also for ti^S Prov. 2, 15. Jos. Ant. 3. 6. 
 2. Heliodor. 1. 6 a-Ko\iasydp nvas drpa-rrovs. 
 
 2. Trop. crooked, perverse, wicked; as 
 yevfa a-KoXid Acts 2, 40. Phil. 2, 15. Sept. 
 yfv. <TKO\. for -no Ps. 78, 8 ; ttijsS Prov. 
 32, 5. So. Wisd". 1, 3. Plato Rep/506. c. 
 Of masters, perverse, peevish, wayward, 
 opp. (TritiKfjs, 1 Pet. 2, 18. Comp. Sept. for 
 
 Prov. 16, 28. 
 
 OTTOS, 6, (kindr. cnccoXos.) any 
 thing pointed, a stake, palisade, Xen. An. 
 
 5. 2. 5 ; point of a hook Luc. Merc. cond. 
 3 ; a thorn, prickle, Sept. for -pp Hos. 2, 
 
 6. Luc. Ver. Hist. 2. 30 8id rivns duav^- 
 
 boVS Kdl O-KoXoTTttl fJLf<TTl]S aTpllTTOV. Jfi\. H. 
 
 An. 10. 13. In N. T. 2 Cor. ]2. 7 ovcoXo^ 
 rrj <rapici, a thorn in the jlesh, something 
 which excites severe and constant pain, 
 prob. some bodily infirmity, ao- Sevfia, comp. 
 v. 10. So Artemid. 3. 33 Kai>3ai KOI <TKO- 
 \oiTfs obvvas a~r}fj.aivov(Ti 8ia TO 6v. 
 
 aKOTTeco, a3, f. 770-0), (O-KOTTOS.) to lookout, 
 to watch, to reconnoitre, absol. Lfc. D. 
 Deor. 20. 5. Xen. An. 5. 1. 9. In N. T. 
 to look at or upon, to behold, to regard, c. 
 ace. 2 Cor. 4, 18 [IT/ O-KOTTOVVTUIV T^JLUIV TO. 
 pXtnopfva. Phil. 2, 4; c. ace. of pers. i. q. 
 to mark, to note, Rom. 16, 17. Phi!. 3, 17. 
 So 2 Mace. 4, 5. Dem. 1488. 2. Xen. Cyr. 
 2. 2. 18. With a negat. tncoTTf iv p.rj, pr. to 
 look to it lest, to take heed lest, Luke 11, 35. 
 Gal. 6, 1. So Xen. Mag. Eq. 7. 15. 
 
 O7CO7T09, oO, 6, (o-KeVro/zai,) pr. a dis 
 tant object on which one fixes the eye, 
 Lat. scopus, a mark, goal ; Phil. 3, 14 Kara 
 O-KOTTUV SIWKCO. Sept. for tV^V Job 16, 13. 
 Lam. 3, 12. Hdian. 6. 7. 18. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 6. 29. 
 
 (TKOpTTifoi f. lo-w, to scatter, to disperse, 
 trans. A later word for the earlier o-ict- 
 , Phryn. et Lob. p. 218. 
 
 1. Pr. c. ace. John 10, 12 6 \VKOS . . . 
 TO. 7rpo/3ara. 16, 32. Sept. for 
 
 pen 2 Sam. 22, 15. So Jos. Ant. 6. . 3. 
 JEL V. H. 13. 46. Plut. Timol. 4. Spec, 
 in the proverbial expression, Matt. 12. 30 
 et Luke 11, 23 6 /zr) crvvdyatv per tp.ov, 
 o-Koprriu, he that gathereth not with me, 
 scaltereth, i. e. wastes, acts against me. 
 
 2. Spec, to distribute largely, to be liberal, 
 bountiful ; absol. 2 Cor. 9, 9 quoted from 
 Ps. 112, 9 where Sept. for 1?Q. 
 
 (TKOpTrios, ov, 6, a scorpion, Linn, scor- 
 pio Afer, a large insect, sometimes several 
 inches long, shaped somewhat like a small 
 lobster, and furnished with a sting at the 
 extremity of its tail. Scorpions are found 
 only in hot countries ; where they lurk in 
 decayed buildings and among the stones of 
 old walls. The sting is venomous, pro 
 ducing inflammation and swelling ; but is 
 rarely fatal unless through neglect. Luke 
 10, 19. 1 1, 12. Rev. 9, 3. 5. 10. Sept. for 
 "7P? Deut. 8, 15. 1 K. 12, 11. 14. Jos. 
 Ant. 8. 8. 2. ^El. H. An. 6. 20. Plato Eu- 
 thyd. 290. a. See Shaw s Travels p. 190. 
 Russell s Nat. Hist, of Aleppo, II. p. 223. 
 
 a-KorewoSj 77, 6v, (ovcoroy,) dark, without 
 light ; Matt. 6, 23 o\oi> TO (ru>p.d crov <TKO- 
 Tfivuv fo-Tai. Luke 1 1 . 34. 36. Sept. for 
 T|^.n Job 10, 21. 15, 23 ; Tj^n-a p s . 88, 7. 
 Ceb. Tab. 10. Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 1. 
 
 <T/COTta, ay, 17, (o-Koror.) darkness, ab 
 sence of light ; used espec. by late writers 
 for TO CTKOTOS , Moeris p. 354 CTKOTO? ov8tr(- 
 pcas, ATTIKOJS cneori a, EXXrji tAccoy. Comp. 
 Thorn. Mag. p. 800. 
 
 1. Pr. John 6, 17 cncort a ^8rj tytyovei, 
 i. e. it was now dark. 12, 35 6 TrfpnraTuv 
 fi> T7J a-KoTia. 20, 1. Sept. for ^BX Job 28, 
 3 ; HSian Mi c . 3, 6. (Eurip. Phceniss. 346.) 
 So tv TTJ o-KOTia, in darkness, in private, 
 Matt. 10, 27. Luke 12, 3. 
 
 2. Trop. of moral darkness, the absence 
 of spiritual light and truth, ignorance, blind 
 ness, including the idea of sinfulness and 
 consequent calamity; John 8, 12. 12,35 
 iva /xr) crKOTia v/xay KcrraXa/Sr;. V. 46. 1 John 
 1, 5. 2, 8. 9. 11 ter. Comp. T^n Job 37, 
 19. Melon, of persons in moral darkness, 
 John 1, 5 bis. 
 
 (TKOTlfo, f. ia-ca, (er/coTos,) to darken, to 
 deprive of light ; in N. T. only Pass, to be. 
 darkened. 
 
 1 . Pr. Matt. 24, 29 6 fj\tos O-KOTKT^O-C 
 TCU. Mark 13, 24. Luke 23, 45. Rev. 8, 12. 
 9, 2. Sept. for T,*n Job 3, 9. Ecc. 12, 
 2. Plut. adv. Colot. 24. Pol. 12. 15. 10. 
 
 2. Trop. of moral darkness, ignorance, 
 comp. in O-KOTUI no. 2. Eph. 4, 18 S O 
 
CT/COT09 
 
 668 
 
 TTJ Siavoiq. Rom. 1, 21. 11, 10 O-KO- 
 a>o-av ol o<p3oX/ioi avru>v, quoted from 
 Ps. 69, 24 where Sept. for T^n. Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 524 O-KOTIO>V TOV vovv drro TTJS dX?;- 
 Zfias. p. 577. Comp. Dion. Hal. de Thucyd. 
 33 f] o-KOTiovcra Trjv Sidvoiav 
 
 OVCOTO?, ov, 6, also OVCOT09, to?, ovs, TO, 
 darkness, the absence of light. The forms 
 of Masc. 6 O-KOTOS are more frequent in 
 classic writers than those of Neut. TO O-KO- 
 TOS ; see Passovv s. v. Person ad Eur. Hec. 
 825. 
 
 1. Masc. 6 O-KOTOJ, darkness, in N. T. 
 once, Heb. 12, 18 yv6<jxp KOI O-KOTW. Comp. 
 Sept. Deut. 4, 11. Eu rip. Hec. 1. Dem. 
 315. 22. Luc. D. Mort. 26. 2. Xen. Cyr. 8. 
 7. 23. 
 
 II. Neut. TO or KOTOS, darkness. 1. Pr. 
 and genr. Matt. 27, 45 O-KOTOS eyevero < 
 O\T)V T})V ytjv. Mark 15, 33. Luke 23, 44. 
 Acts 2, 20 (Is O-KOTOS. 1 Cor. 4, 5 Ta Kpv- 
 TTTO. TOII O-KOTOVS, the hidden things of dark 
 ness, done in darkness, secret things. 2 Cor. 
 4, 6 6 3e6s 6 elnu>v IK OTKOTOVS (pcos \dfj,^ai, 
 in allusion to Gen. 1,3. Of the darkness 
 of the blind, Acts 13, 11. Sept. for T$n 
 Gen. 1, 2. 4. 5. al. So Ml. V. H. 3. 18 
 VTTO O-KOTOVS. Dem. 411. 25. Xen. Cyr. 4. 
 2. 26 a-KOTovs yevopevov. Spec, darkness 
 for a dark place, a place where darkness 
 reigns, Matt. 8, 12. 22, 13. 25, 30 dX- 
 Xeto els TO O-KOTOS TO f<aTtpov into the outer 
 darkness, remote from the light and splen 
 dour of the feast within, comp. vv. 21. 23; 
 put as the image of the place of punish 
 ment in Hades; comp. in e o>Tepos. So 
 2 Pet. 2, 17 et Jude 13 6(j)os TOV O-KOTOVS 
 fls alojva, spoken also of Hades ; see in fo- 
 (pos and comp. in qftrjs. So OIKOS O-KOTOVS 
 of Joseph s prison, Test. XII Patr. p. 710 ; 
 of Sheol, Sept. Job 10, 22 yf) O-KOTOVS. Tob. 
 4, 10. 14, 10; of the place of punishment 
 in Hades, Wisd. 17. 21. Psalt. Salom. 14, 
 6. Genr. Xen. An. 2. 5. 7 ds rrolov av O-KO- 
 TOS dnobpair]. 
 
 2. Trop. of moral darkness, the absence 
 of spiritual light and truth, ignorance, blind 
 ness, including the idea of sinfulness and 
 consequent calamity, i. q. O-KOTIU no. 2. 
 a) Genr. Matt. 4, 16 6 Xaor 6 Kcftrjpfvos eV 
 a-KOTfi, ele (peas p.fya, quoted from Is. 9, 
 1 where Sept for T^Tl. Luke 1, 79, 
 comp. Sept. and T(^.n Ps. 107, 10. Matt. 6, 
 23 bis. Luke 11, 35. John 3, 19 fiydnrjo-av 
 /iSXXoi TO O-KO TOJ rj TO <wy. Acts 26, 18. 
 Rom. 2, 19 comp. v. 17. 20. Rom. 13, 12 et 
 Eph. 5, 11 f pya TOV O-KOTOVS, the works of 
 darkness, wicked deeds. 2 Cor. 6, 14. 
 
 1 Thess. 5, 4. 5. 1 Pet. 2, 9. 1 John 1, 6. 
 Sept. and 7$n Mich. 1, 8. So Act. Thorn. 
 $ 28, 34. b) Abstr. for concr. of per 
 sons in a state of moral darkness, wicked 
 men, under the influence of Satan ; e. g. 
 f] fovo-{a TOV CTKOTOVS, Luke 22, 53 ; perh. 
 for Satan himself Col. 1, 13. Also Eph. 5, 
 
 8 T)T yap TTOTf CTKOTOy. 6, 12. 
 
 O7COTO&), w, f. (uo-oj, (a-KOTos,) to darken-, 
 to make dark, to cover with darkness ; Pass. 
 Rev. 16, 10 Kal eyevfTO rj j3ao~iXfia avTOv 
 fo-KOTcapevr], i. e. emblematic of distress, ca 
 lamity, destruction. Sept. pr. for T\^rl Ps. 
 105, 28. Ecclus. 25, 17; of blindness, 
 Soph. Aj. 85; trop. Plato Rep. 518. a. 
 
 (TKllftakov, ov, TO, (fs KVVCIS /3aXeiV, 
 Suid. KvalftaXov T\ ov, TO TOLS Kvcrl fla\\6- 
 fj.evov , comp. o-KopaKifa from es KopaKas,) 
 pr. what is thrown to the dogs, refuse, 
 dregs, dross; spoken of the refuse of grain, 
 chaff", Philo de Carit. p. 712. a ; the refuse 
 of a table, of slaughtered animals, or the 
 like, offal, Philo de Ab. et Cain. fin. /i^Sev 
 e o> Tpo<pfjs o-Kt>/3dXa>i> Kal Sep/iaToy. Anthol. 
 Gr. II. p. 180 ; of excrement, dung, Jos. 
 B. J. 5. 13. 7. Artemidor. 1. 69. Plut.de Is. 
 et Osir. 4. In N. T. once Phil. 3, 8 TO 
 irdvra . . . rjyov/jiai o-v/3aXa eivai, i. e. as 
 refuse, dross, things worthless. 
 
 SKV^TIS, ov, 6, a Scythian, Col. 3, 11. 
 The name Scythian in ancient geography 
 is applied sometimes to a people, and some 
 times to all the nomadic tribes, which had 
 their seat on the north of the Black Sea and 
 Caspian, stretching indefinitely eastward 
 into the unknown regions of Asia ; having 
 much the same general extent as the mo 
 dern names Mongols and Tartars, and like 
 them synonymous 1 with barlarian, ftdpfia- 
 pos. See Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. I. i. p. 272. 
 2 Mace. 4, 47. Jos. c. Ap. 2. 37 SxvSat 
 fie (povots xaipovTfs aiftpuiroi, Kal Ppa%v 
 TU>V Sfm>(0y 8ia<pfpoi>Tfs. Luc. Tox. 5 sq. 
 
 (7Kv^pcD7r6<f, ov, 6, f), adj. (o-*v3po sj 
 0-Kvfrp.ai., <u\|/s) pr. angry-looking, of an an 
 gry or sad countenance ; either affected 
 Matt. 6, 16 ; or real Luke 24, 17. Sept. for 
 3H Gen. 40, 7. Ecclus. 25, 23. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 14. 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 12. 
 
 O"uAA&>, f. vXw, pr. to strip, to skin, to 
 flay, whence TO O-KV\OV ; also trop. ./Eschyl. 
 Pers. 557. In N. T. trop. to harass, to 
 trouble, to vex, c. ace. Mark 5, 35 et Luke 
 8, 49 nfj o-KvXXe TOV 8i8do~Ka\ov. Mid. Luke 
 7, 6 fifi O-KV\\OV. Pass. Part. Matt. 9, 36 6Y 
 ?fo-av eovcuXp.e i oi. So Hdian. 4. 13. 8. ih 
 7. 3. 9. 
 
(TKV\OV 
 
 669 
 
 (709 
 
 &KV\OV, ov, TO, (o-KuXXw.) pr. skin, hide, 
 of an animal as stripped off; Hesych. O-KV- 
 \oi>, 8epp.a, Ko>8iov, comp. o-KuXoSe^oy Dem. 
 781. 18. Usually and in N. T. spoil, booty, 
 as stripped from an enemy ; Plur. TO oxCXa, 
 spoils, Luke 11, 22. Sept. for ^ Zech. 
 14, 1. Is. 53, 12. So Hdian. 8. 4. 28. 
 Thuc. 6. 71. 
 
 ^ ov, 6, fj, adj. (O-KW- 
 AIJ|. j3i/3po>o-Kco,) worm-eaten, eaten of worms; 
 spoken of the disease of Herod Agrippa, 
 Acts 12, 23 ; comp. 2 Mace. 9, 5-9. See 
 Jos. Ant. 19. 8. 2. Wetstein N. T. in Acts 
 
 1. c. Bartholin de Morb. Bibl. c. 23. Bochart. 
 Hieroz.. 4. 26. 620, comp. 4. 18. 583. 
 Others wrongly regard it as the (fftfipiaa-is, 
 louse-disease, Eisner Obs. in loc. Of wood, 
 Theophr. H. PL 3. 12. Caus. PL 5. 9. 1. 
 
 (TK(0\r)%, TJKOS, 6, a worm, feeding on 
 dead bodies ; Mark 9, 44. 46. 48 OTTOU 6 
 avrcov ov TeXevra KOI TO irvp ov 
 rai, in allusion to Is. 66, 24, the lan 
 guage of the prophet being applied to the 
 place of punishment of the wicked ; comp. 
 in art. yttwa. The same image is found 
 Judith 16, 17. Ecclus. 7, 17. Sept. for 
 n?Vin i s . ]. c . Deut. 28, 39. 2 Mace. 9, 
 9. Luc. Asin. 25. Plut. de Superst. 1. 
 
 <T/jLapdy8tVOSj , ov, (o-p.dpaySos, ) of 
 umaragdus, of emerald ; Rev. 4, 3 6/xoi a 
 opacrft (Tfj.apay8ivco SC. Xi 3a>. 
 
 CTfidpaySos, ov, 6, 17, smaragdus, a name 
 under which the ancients appear to have 
 comprehended all gems of a fine green co 
 lour, including the emerald; Rev. 21, 19. 
 Sept. for nfJ-ia Ex. 28, 17 ; nna5 28, 9. 
 35, 25. Ecclus. 35, 6. Pint. M. Anton. 
 75. Theophr. Fr. de Lap. 2. 23L See Plin. 
 H. N. 37. 16. Rosenm. Alterthk. IV. i. p. 33. 
 
 crfivpva, TJS, rj, myrrh, Heb. "ifo , a sub 
 stance distilling in tears spontaneously or 
 by incisions from a small thorny tree grow 
 ing in Arabia, balsamodendron myrrlia ac 
 cording to Ehrenberg. These tears soon 
 harden into a bitter aromatic gum, which 
 was highly prized by the ancients, and 
 used in incense and perfumes. See Dios- 
 cor. I. 77, et ibi Sprengel. Plin. H. N. 12. 
 15 sq. Nees v. Esenbeck Plant, officin. Tab. 
 357. Celsii Hierob. I. p. 520. Rosenm. Al 
 terthk. IV. i. p. 159. So Matt. 2, 11 X//3a- 
 vov Koi o-fMvpvav. John 19, 39. Sept for 
 ito Ps. 45, 9. Cant. 3, 6. 5, 5. Diod. Sic. 
 
 2. 49. Theophr. H. PL 9. 3, 4. Hdot. 2. 40. 
 
 Z/jiupva,) TJS, T), Smyrna, an important 
 maritime city of Asia Minor, situated at the 
 head of a deep gulf on the western coast, 
 
 still known as a commercial place, though 
 greatly fallen from its ancient wealth and 
 power. It was frequented by great numbers 
 of Jews. Rev. 1, 11. 2, 8 in later edit 
 Strabo 14. p. 646. Hdot. 1. 16. Pocockell 
 i. p. 34. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. I. ii. p. 
 183, 224. Hamilton s Res. in Asia M. I. p. 
 46 sq. 
 
 2,/J Vpvalos, a, ov, Smyrnean, of Smyr 
 na ; ol 2p.vpva.1ot, the Smyrneans, Rev. 2, 
 8 Rec. Hdot. 1. 143. 
 
 f. /(Tco, (o-p-vpva,) to mingle 
 with myrrh; Pass. Mark 15, 23 (BiSovv 
 avrd) iTLfiv (<Tp.vpvio~p.evov oivov, myrrhed 
 wine, wine mingled with myrrh and bitter 
 herbs ; see fully in oos. Hesych. eo-p,vp- 
 vicrp.(vov xpio-p.a.Ta *X.ov o~p.Vj)vr)s. 
 
 26So(j,a, a>v, ra, Sodom, Heb. Q"ip 
 (a burning), pr. n. of one of the four cities 
 of the vale of Siddim destroyed in the time 
 of Abraham and covered by the Dead Sea ; 
 see Gen. 18, 17 sq. c. 19. Bibl. Res. in 
 Palest. II. p. 601 sq. Matt. 10, 15. 11,23. 
 24. Mark 6, 11. Luke 10, 12. 17,29. Rom. 
 9, 29. 2 Pet. 2, 6. Jude 7. Rev. 11, 8. 
 
 ,oXo/za>i>, also ^foXo/itui/ in Rec. 
 Luke 12, 27. Acts 7, 47; Gen. -a>vos in 
 later edit, and Jos. Ant. 8. 1. 1,2; also 
 -U>VTOS in Rec. see Winer $ 10. 1. n; Heb. 
 fib ^d (pacific) ; Solomon, pr. n. of the son 
 and successor of David, celebrated for his 
 wisdom, wealth, and splendour, Matt. 1, 6. 
 7. 6, 29. 12, 42 bis. Luke 11, 31 bis. 12. 
 27. John 10, 23. Acts 3,11. 5,12. 7,47. 
 See 1 K. c. 1 sq. 1 Chr. c. 28. 29. 2 Chr. 
 c. 1 sq. 
 
 cropos, ov, f], (kindr. o\/w,) an urn, 
 cojfer, coffin, any receptacle for a dead body 
 or its ashes, Luc. D. Mort. 6. 4. JEschin. 
 20. 34. ib. 21. 29. Sept. for yhx a mum 
 my-chest Gen. 50, 26. In N. T. an open 
 coffin, bier, on which the dead were carried 
 to burial, Luke 7, 14 ; comp. "IBB Sept. *Xi - 
 vrjs 2 Sam. 2, 31. See Adam s Rom. Ant. 
 p. 475. Diet, of Antt. art. Funus. 
 
 o~o?, cnj, crov, possessive pron. 2 pers. 
 Sing. Buttm. } 72. 4 ; thy, thine ; tuus, a, 
 um ; spoken of what belongs to any one, 
 or is in any way connected with him ; e. g. 
 by possession, acquisition, Matt. 7, 3 eV roS o-u 
 o</>3oX/ib>. v. 22 ter. 13, 27 tv TW cnu ypw. 
 Luke 15, 31. Acts 5, 4. 1 Car. 8, 11 ; and 
 so TO crov, TO. era, thine, thine own, what 
 is thine, Matt. 20, 14. 25, 25. Luke 6, 30. 
 Also of society, companionship ; Luke 5. 33 
 o S o-ol p.a%T]Tat. Mark 2, 18. John 17. (i. . 
 9. 10 bis. 18, 35; and so of o-oi, thy kin- 
 
670 
 
 dred, thy friends, Mark 5, 19. Of origin, as 
 proceeding from any one, Matt. 24, 3 rfjs 
 0-ijs irapovo-las. Luke 22, 42 TO <TQV sc. 3e- 
 Xr;/ia. John 4, 42. 17, 17 6 Xdyos 6 ords. 
 Acts 24, 3. 4. 1 Cor. 14, 16. Philem. 14. 
 Hdian. 2. 1. 18. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 2. 
 
 crov8dpiov } on, TO, Lat. sudarium, pr. 
 a sweat-cloth, genr. a handkerchief, napkin, 
 Luke 19, 20. John 11, 44. 20, 7. Acts 19, 
 12. Pollux On. 7. 71. Rabb. fcn ilb Buxt. 
 Lex. Chald. 1442. 
 
 Sovcrdvva, rjs, f], Susanna, Heb. MJiaid 
 (lily), pr. n. of a Hebrew woman, Luke 8, 3. 
 
 cro<j)ia ; as, fj, (<ro<dy,) wisdom, pr. skill, 
 lad, experlness in any art, as 17 a-o(pia TOV 
 TETOVO? Horn. II. 15. 412; espec. in the 
 fine arts, as music, poetry, painting, Find. 
 Ol. 9. 16. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 2, 3. An. 1. 2. 
 8 \tyfTca ATrdXXwi eVSetpai Maptri/av, VIKTJ- 
 (ras ept foira ot Trepl <ro(j)ias. Lys. 198. 11. 
 Comp. Heb. n^sn Sept. <ro(t a Ex. 28, 3. 
 36, 1. 2 In N. T. 
 
 1 . wisdom, skill in the affairs of life, practi 
 cal wisdom, ivise management, as shown in 
 forming the best plans and selecting the 
 best means, including the idea of judgment 
 and sound good sense ; Acts 6, 3 avdpas sirra 
 irXrjpels TTV. ay. KOI (rcxpias. 7, 10. Col. 1, 
 28. 3, 16. 4, 5 comp. 6. Luke 21, 15 ord/ia 
 *ai cro(piav q. d. wise utterance. So wis 
 dom in the ordering of one s Christian life, 
 James 1, 5. 3, 13. 15. 17. Sept. for iiasn 
 1 K. 2, 6. Hdian. 1. 5. 23. Plut. Tries . 3^ 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 4, 5. 
 
 2. In a higher sense, wisdom, i. q. deep 
 knowledge, natural and moral, insight, learn 
 ing, science ; implying cultivation of mind 
 and an enlightened understanding. Jos. de 
 Mace. 2 (Toffota 817 roivvv fcrrlv yvaxris %fia>v 
 KOI di/Spanrivav Trpayp-aTav Kat TOV TOVTCW 
 aiTiaiv. Cic.. de Off. 1. 43 " sapientia, quam 
 (Tofpiav Grjeci vocant . . . rerum est divina- 
 rum et humanarum scientia." a) Genr. 
 Matt. 12, 42 et Luke 11, 31 TTJV <ro(piav 
 SoXo/zcovoy, comp. 1 K. 4, 29. Heb. Lex. 
 art. ElDfl . Acts 7, 22 iraa-fl cro<ia Atyv- 
 Trritov, (Jos. Ant. 2. 13. 3.) So wisdom, i. e. 
 knowledge, learning, Luke 2, 40. 52 ; as 
 exhibited in teaching, Matt. 13, 54. Mark 
 6, 2 ; or as implying learned research, Xd- 
 yov p.ev e^ovra aofpias Col. 2, 23 ; also a 
 knowledge of hidden things, of enigmatic 
 and symbolic language, Rev. 13, 18. 17, 9. 
 Sept. for naan Job 11,6. Prov. 1,2. Dan. 
 1, 17. So Hdot. 4. 77. Ml. V. H. 2. 31. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 6. 7. b) Spec, of the learn 
 ing and philosophy current among the 
 Greeks and Romans in the apostolic age, 
 
 which stood in contrast with the simplicity 
 of the gospel, and tended to draw away the 
 minds of men from divine truth ; hence 
 called by Paul a-apKiKr) 2 Cor. 1 , 12; f] 
 <ro(pia TOV KocrfjLov 1 Cor. 1, 20. 3, 19 ; TU>V 
 av%po>Tra>v 2. 5 ; rcoi/ aofputv 1, 19. So 1 Cor. 
 
 2, 4. 13 Xdyoi TTJS a^ pcoTriirrjs ao(p[as. 1,21 
 6 Kocr/io? 8ia TTJS crocpias. V. 22. 1 Cor. 1, 
 17 OVK ev <ro(piq Xdyou not in wisdom of 
 words, i. e. not with mere philosophy and 
 rhetoric. 1 Cor. 2, 1. So Hdot. 1. 60. JE\. 
 V. H. 14. 23. Xen. Conv. 3. 4. c) In 
 respect to divine things, wisdom, i. e. know 
 ledge, insight, deep understanding, repre 
 sented every where as a divine gift, and 
 including the idea of practical illustration 
 and application ; thus distinguished from ff 
 yv<a<ris or theoretical knowledge ; see fully 
 in yvSxns no. 3. Acts 6, 10. Eph. 1, 8 eV 
 Tracn? (ro(pia KOI (ppovrjcrfi. V. 17. Col. 1, 9. 
 2 Pet. 3, 15. 1 Cor. 12, 8 w p.ev St Sorat 
 Xdyoj (rofpias, aXXw 8e Xdyo? yvaxreas. 
 Spec, of insight imparted from God in re 
 spect to the divine counsels, 1 Cor. 2, 6 bis, 
 (Tocpiav \u\ov fiev ... <ro(piav ov TOV alwvos 
 TOVTOV. v. 7. Meton. of the author and 
 source of this wisdom, 1 Cor. 1, 30. 
 
 3. r/ trofpia TOV Seov, the divine wis 
 dom, including the idea of infinite skill, in 
 sight, knowledge, purity; Rom. 11,33 & 
 /3a3or TrXovrou /cat crofpias KOI yixacrfccs 3eou. 
 1 Cor. 1, 21. 24 comp. 22. Eph. 3, 10. 
 Col. 2. 3. Rev. 5, 12. 7, 12. Of the divine 
 wisdom ;is revealed and manifested in Christ 
 and his Gospel, Matt. 11, 19 et Luke 7, 35 
 KOL f8iKai<a^rj rj cro(pia OTTO Tcav TeKvav av- 
 TTJS, comp. in 8iKiu6u> no. 2. a. So Luke 
 11, 49 fj crofpia TOV 3foS elrrev, i. e. the di 
 vine wisdom as manifested in me, Christ ; 
 comp. Matt. 23, 34 where it is e yo>. 
 
 <TO(t&>, f. taw, (cro<o?,) to make wise, 
 skilful, expert ; Pass, to be skilled, expert, 
 e. g. TTJS vavTiXirjs Hes. Op. 647, comp. 658. 
 In N. T. 
 
 1 . Act. to make ivise, to enlighten, in re 
 spect to divine things, c. ace. of pers. 2 Tim. 
 
 3, 15 Ta 1. ypdp.p.aTa. ..Ta Swap-eva. (re cro- 
 (plcrai els o-cnTTjpiav. Sept. for E^fJ^ Ps. 
 19, 8. 105,22. Theoph. ad Autol. 2. p. 82 
 ot 7rpo(pT)Tai. VTTO TOV SeoO crofpto ^StvTfs. 
 Plut. Sept. Sap. Conv. 14 fin. 
 
 2. Mid. o-o<piop.ai as depon. c. ace. of 
 thing, to make wisely, to devise skilfully, 
 artfully; Hdot. 2. 66 irpbs TUVTO <ro(piov- 
 Tai rdSe. ib. 8. 27. In N. T. Part. perf. 
 as Passive, crecrofpicrp-evoi /x3ot, skilfully 
 devised fables, 2 Pet. 1, 16. Comp. Buttm. 
 5 113. n. 6. 
 
671 
 
 cnreipa) 
 
 17, o , 1. wise, skilful, expert, 
 1 Cor. 3, 10 cro(pbs dpxirfKTw. Sept. for 
 t=n Is. 3, 3. 2 Chr. 2, 7. Luc. D. Deor. 
 20. 1. ^schin. Dial. Socr. 1.1. Plato Phil. 
 17. c. 
 
 2. wise, skilled in the affairs of life, dis 
 creet, judicious, practically wise ; comp. in 
 <ro<pia no. 1. 1 Cor. 6, 5 <ro<pos, or 8vvrjcrf- 
 rai 8ia>cpivai KT\. Also wise in the ordering 
 of one s Christian life, James 3, 13. Sept. 
 and" eon Deut 1, 13. Is. 19, 11. Hdot. 7. 
 130. Luc. D. Mort. 8. 1. Xen. Cyr. 1. 1. 1. 
 
 3. wise, skilled in learning, learned, in 
 telligent, enlightened, in respect to things 
 human and divine ; comp. in <ro<pia no. 2. 
 a) Genr. as to human things, Matt. 11, 25 
 et Luke 10, 21 dno o~o(p<Hiv *cal <TVV(TCOI>. 
 Matt. 23, 34. Rom. 1, 14 o-o<pols Tf KOI 
 dvo^rois. 16, 19. 1 Cor. 1, 25. Sept. for 
 can Prov. 1, 6. Ecc. 2, 14. 16. So Pa- 
 lEeph. 53. 6. Hdian. 1. 2. 7. Xen. Mem. 1. 
 6. 11. b) Spec, as to the philosophy cur 
 rent among the Greeks and Romans ; see 
 in tro<pia no. 2. b. Rom. 1, 22 (pdo-Kovres 
 ttvai (rofpol (p.fapdtf Sricrav. 1 Cor. 1, 19. 20. 
 26. 27. 3, 18 bis. 19. 20. So Xen. Mem. 1. 
 6. 14. ib. 3. 9. 5. c) In respect to divine 
 things, wise, enlightened, spiritually, and as 
 conjoined with purity of heart and life ; 
 comp. in <ro<puz no. 2. c. Eph. 5, 15. 
 
 3. Of God, wise, as being infinite in wis 
 dom, skill, insight, knowledge, purity ; Rom. 
 16, 27 nova o-o(p Sew. 1 Tim. 1,17. Jude 
 25. Comp. Ecclus. 1,1. 
 
 ^jjTrazna, as, 17, Spahi, Lat. Hispania, 
 pr. n. of the Spanish peninsula, including 
 modern Spain and Portugal, as constituting 
 a province of the Roman empire. It was 
 the native country of Quinctilian, Lucan, 
 Martial, and other Latin writers ; and many 
 Jews appear to have settled there. Rom. 
 15, 24. 28. 
 
 (nrapdcrcrca v. -rrtu, f. o>, (kindr. 
 o-Traea,) to tear, to rend, to mangle, Plut. Ar- 
 taxerx. 18. Diod. Sic. 5. 30. In N. T. to 
 convulse, to throw into spasms, like epilepsy, 
 spoken of the effects of demoniacal posses 
 sions, c. ace. Mark 1, 26. 9, 20. 26. Luke 
 9. 39. So Plut. de Gen. Socr. 22. p. 101. 
 Max. Tyr. Diss. 23. 
 
 crrrapycLVOO), o>, f. oxru, (a-irdpyavov, 
 <nrdpya>,) to swathe, to wrap in swaddling- 
 clothes, c. ace. Luke 2, 7 ; Pass. v. 12. 
 Sept. Pass, for Pu. ^P" Ez. 16, 4. Aris- 
 tot. H. An. 7. 4. Plut. Queest. Rom. 5. 
 Plato Legg. 782. e. 
 
 <T7T(ZTCtAxi6)) o>, f. Tjcrco, (trrraraArj, trjra- 
 Bdo),) to live in pleasure, voluptuously, wan 
 
 tonly, absol. 1 Tim. 5, 6. James 5, 5. EC 
 clus. 21,15. Hesych. o-TraraXa rpv<a. So 
 Karao-7raraXaa>, Sept. Prov. 29, 21. Anthol. 
 Gr. II. p. 22. 
 
 CTTTttft), >, f. aorco, to draw, to pull, Xen. 
 Eq. 7. 1 ; to draw in the air, to breathe, 
 Wi.-d. 7, 3. In N. T. to draw out, e. g. 
 a sword ; Mid. (nracrdpfvos TTJV p.d%aipav, 
 drawing HIS sword, Mark 14, 47. Acts 16, 
 27. Sept. for t)b Num. 22, 31. Judg. 9, 
 54. So Plut. C. Mar. 14. Xen. Cyr. 7. 3. 
 15. 
 
 (TTreipa, as, f/, also Ion. gen. TJS, Acts 
 10, 1. al. Arr. Tact. p. 73. Buttm. $ 34. n. 
 IV. 1 ; pr. any thing wound, wreathed, spi 
 ral ; a coil, Lat. spira, Anth. Gr. IV. p. 
 176. Jos. Ant. 8. 3. 6 ; a cord, rope, Luc. 
 Tox. 19. Diod. Sic. 3. 36. In N. T. a band, 
 troop, company. 
 
 1. Of Roman foot-soldiers, prob. a cohort, 
 of which there were ten in every legion, 
 each containing three maniples or six cen 
 turies, but varying in the number of men 
 at different times and according to circum 
 stances, from perhaps 300 to 1000 or more ; 
 comp. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 367. Diet, of 
 Antt. art. Exercitus, p. 500. ed. 2. So 
 Matt. 27, 27. Mark 15, 16. Acts 10, 1. 21, 
 31. 27, 1 see in o-f/3ao-ro y no. 2. So Jos, 
 B. J. 3. 4. 2 where of eighteen cmf ipai five 
 are said to contain each 1000 men, and the 
 others 600 ; ib. 3. 2. 1. Ant. 19. 2. 3. Plut. 
 Marcell. 25, 26. Perh. a legion Jos. B. J. 
 
 2. 11. 1. In Polybius rj <nreipa is every 
 where a maniple, manipulus, the third part 
 of a cohort ; e. g. Pol. 11. 23. 1 rpeir o-Trei- 
 pas TOVTO de /caXeirat TO crvvrayna r<av irt- 
 )i> Trapa Pcofjiaiois Koopris, comp. 4. 24. 5. 
 
 2. Of a band from the guards of the tem 
 ple, John 18, 3. 12. These were Levites, 
 who performed the menial offices of the 
 temple and kept watch by night, Ps. 134, 1. 
 2 K. 12, 9. 25, 18 ; espec. 1 Chr. 9, 17. 
 27 sq. They were under the command of 
 officers called orpar^yci , see in (rrpnTrjyos 
 no. 2 ; or also ^tXi ap^ot 1 Esdr. 1,9, comp. 
 Sept. 2 Chr. 35, 8. 9 ; see in ^tXi ap^os no. 
 
 3. Jos. B. J. 6. 5. 3 dpa/ioj/rfr 8f ol rov 
 If pov (pv\aKfs jJyyeiXai/ ra> crTparrj-yu. Some 
 understand in John 1. c. a band of Roman 
 soldiers ; but these would have led Jesus 
 to their own officers, and not to the chief 
 priests ; and besides, this was not a band of 
 armed soldiers, see Matt. 26, 55. Luke 22, 
 52. Genr. Judith 14, 11. 2 Mace. 8, 23. 
 
 , f. a-nepo), 1 . to sow, to scatter 
 seed ; absol. Matt. 6, 26 ra ivfrfiva . . . ov 
 <rnfipov<Tiv. t 13, 3. 4. Mark 4, 3. 4. Lukf> 
 
672 
 
 8, 5 bis. ^2, 24. Part. 6 <rireip<av, the 
 sower, Matt. 13, 3. 18. Mark 4, 3. 14. Luke 
 8, 5. 2 Cor. 9, 10. With ace. of the seed 
 sown, Matt. 13, 24 (nrtipovri. Ka\bv (nrfppa. 
 v. 25. 27. 31. 37. 39. 1 Cor. 15, 36. 37 bis. 
 Pass, of a single seed or grain, Mark 4, 31. 
 32 K.OK.K.OV crivcnrftos . . . vrav (Tnapfj. So by 
 analogy, of the body as committed to the 
 earth, 1 Cor. 15, 42/43 bis. 44. With pre 
 positions of place, e. g. ei? c. ace. Matt. 13, 
 
 22. Mark 4, 18 ; tv c. dat. Matt. 13, 31 ; 
 eVi c. gen. Mark 4, 31 ; eVi c. ace. Matt. 
 13, 20. 23; rrapd c. ace. v. 19 irapa TI]V 
 686v. Sept. genr. for 5^J Ecc. 11,4. Gen. 
 26, 12 ; c. ace. Ecc. 4, 6. Jer. 12, 13 ; c. eV 
 Ex. 23, 16 ; c. ri Hos. 2, 23. So Hdot. 
 
 3. 100. Ml V. H. 3. 18. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 
 13; c. ace. of seed Hdot. 4. 17. Xen. CEc. 
 17. 5 ; also c. ace. of the field, Sept. Ex. 
 
 23, 10. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 38. Hence in pro 
 verbial expressions ; Matt. 25, 24. 26, et 
 Luke 19, 21. 22, Sepi fcoi/ OTTOV OVK ea-rrfipas 
 KT\. John 4, 37 uXXor fcrriv 6 (nrttpcav KT\. 
 2 Cor. 9, 6 bis, 6 a-nfipcov (pfido/j-evcos KT\. 
 Gal. 6, 7 6 yap tav oweipg tivSpanros KT\. 
 for all which see in Sepi co no. 2. 
 
 2. Trop. of a teacher, to sow the word of 
 life, to disseminate instruction, John 4, 36. 
 Mark 4, 14 rbv \6yov a-rrtipei. 1 Cor. 9, 1 1. 
 Pass. Mark 4, 15 bis, oirov (nrdpfrai 6 Xdyoy, 
 KT\. vv. 16. 20. Matt. 13, 19 TO icnmpptvor fv 
 TV Kcipbia. James 3, 18. Also Gal. 6, 8 bis, 
 6 (TiTfipaiV fls Trjv crdpKa ... 6 cnr. tls TO 
 Trvevpa, i. q. whoever liveth to (acteth for) 
 the flesh, or to (for) the Spirit ; see in 3epi- 
 no. 2. a. Comp. Prov. 22, 8. Aristot. 
 Rhet. 3. 3. 18 crv fie ravra alcrxpuis juei/ 
 fcnreipas, KdKcas fie e3e pt(ras. Cic. de Or. 2. 
 65 " ut sementem feceris, ita metes." 
 
 <rjreicov\dr(i)f>, O pos, 6, Lat. speculator 
 v. spiculator, Engl. a pike-man, halberdier, 
 a kind of soldiers forming the body- guard 
 of kings and princes, who also according to 
 Oriental custom acted as executioners, Mark 
 6. 27. Senec. de Ira 1. 16 " centurio sup- 
 plicio praepositus condere gladium specula- 
 torem jubet" Jul. Firmic. 8. 26. Sueton. 
 Claud. 35. Tac. Ann. 2. 12. 2. Comp. 
 Wetst. N. T. I. p. 580. Rabb. TioV^BO, 
 see Buxt. Lex. Chald. 1533. Heb. na, 
 see Heb. Lex. s. v. Greek 8opv<p6pos Hdian. 
 1. 4. 10. 
 
 <T7rev8u>, f. o-7reurcB, to pour out, to make 
 a libation, Sept. for T(05 Gen. 35. 14. Hdian. 
 
 4. 8. 12. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 1. In N. T. Mid. 
 tTTre vSopat, to pour out oneseJf, i. e. trop. 
 one s blood, to offer up one s strength and 
 life, c. eVi TIVI, upon or for any, thing, Phil. 
 
 2, 17 ; absol. id. 2 Tim. 4, 6. Comp. Liv. 
 21. 29 libare vires. 
 
 UTOS, TO, (Wei pw,) seed, 
 sown, whether of grain, plants, or trees. 
 
 1. Pr. Matt. 13, 24 (nrtiptw Kakov 
 
 fjia. vv. 27. 32. 37. 38. Mark 4, 31. 1 Cor. 
 15, 38. 2 Cor. 9, 10. Sept. for 3nj Gen. 
 
 I, 11. 47, 23. JE1. V.H. 9. 25. Xen. CEc. 
 17. 10. 
 
 2. Trop. semen virile, Heb. 11, 11 - r see 
 fully in KaTajBoXr) no. 2. Trop. 1 John 3, 9 
 iras 6 yeyfvrjfjifvos (K rov Seov . . . oWp/ia 
 avrov (3eoC) ev aural fievei, i. e. the germ or 
 principle of divine life through which he is 
 begotten of God, TO Trvfiip-a. Sept. and y-iT 
 Lev. 15, 16. 18, 21. So M. Antonin. 4! 
 
 36. Arr. Epict. 1. 13. 3. Meton. seed, child 
 ren, offspring, Matt. 22, 24. 25 ^ ex^v 
 anfpfjLa. Mark 12, 19. 20. 21. 22. Luke 20, 
 28. (Sept. and 3nj 1 Sam. 1, 11. 2. 22.) 
 Genr. for posterity, Luke 1, 55 TO> AjBpaap, 
 Kal TO> (Tir(pp.aTi avTov. John 7, 42. 8, 33. 
 
 37. Acts 3, 25. 7, 5. 6. 13, 23. Rom. 1,3. 
 4,13.18. 9, 7 bis. 11,1. 2 Cor. 11,22. 
 Gal. 3, 16 ter. 19. 2 Tim. 2, 8. Heb. 2, 16. 
 
 II, 18. Rev. 12, 17. Trop. Christians from 
 the Gentiles also are called the seed of Abra 
 ham, as having the same faith ; Rom. 4, 16 
 TO) (Ttrfpfian, ov rca (K TOII vopov p.6vov, aXXu 
 *ai TO> (K Tu orecos *A/3paa/i. 9, 8. Gal. 3, 29. 
 Sept. for 3nt Gen. 3, 15. 13,16. 15,5. So . 
 pr. Jos. Ant. 8. 7. 6. Soph. Elect. 1508. 
 ^Eschyl. Choeph. 474. Time. 5. 16; also 
 in Plur. ^Eschyl. Suppl. 290. Soph. CEd. 
 Col. 600. Plato Legg. 853. c. But this 
 usage in N. T. comes rather from the He 
 brew ; comp. Winer { 3. p. 35. 2. 
 
 3. Spec, a remnant, a few survivors, like 
 seed kept over from a former year ; Rom. 
 9, 29 et p.T) Kvptos (ra/3acb3 eyKarfXnrfV yplv 
 cnrepiia, quoted from Is. 1,9 where Sept. 
 for t^iO Jos. Ant. 11. 5. 3. Plato Tim. 
 23. b, e S)v Ttacra 17 Tro Xty eVri ravvv vp.uiv, 
 TT(pi\(i(p?!evTos Trore (nrtpfjiaTos (^pa^tos. 
 
 (TTrepfioXoyos, O v, 6, f), ((nrepp.a, Xeyw.) 
 gathering seeds, a seed-picker, of birds, opvi- 
 3o>v o-Trep/zoXoycoi/ Plut. Demetr. 28 ; as a 
 name for crows and rooks, Aristoph. Av. 
 233, 579. Artemid. 2. 20. In N. T. put 
 for a trifter, babbler, who picks up and re 
 tails scraps of knowledge, trifling things, 
 Acts 17, 18. So Athen. 8. p. 344. c. Dem. 
 269. 19; comp. o-Trep^oXoyeco Philostr. 
 Vit. Apoll. 5. 20. Wetstein N. T. II. p. 
 564. 
 
 CTTreuotOj f. evo-w, trans, to urge on, to 
 hasten, Horn. II. 13. 236. Hdot. 1. 38, 206. 
 Oftener and in N. T. intrans. to urge 
 
673 
 
 oneself on, to press on, to make haste, having 
 respect simply to time, and thus differing 
 from (rTrouSafco, where see; absol. Acts 
 22, 18 ; c. inf. Acts 20, 16 Za-irevSf yap 
 . . . yfVf&Sai fls l(povara\r)fjL. (Jos. Ant. 7. 
 9. 7. Hdian. 6. 8. 15. Xen. Hell. 3. 1. 17.) 
 By Hebr. Part, o-irfvo-as is put with a verb 
 of motion adverbially, i. q. hastily, quickly, 
 e. g. Luke 2, 16 ^ 3o " o-Trtvo-atn-fs. 19, 5. 
 6. Sept. and nna Gen. 45, 9. Ex. 34, 8. 
 Josh. 8, 19. See Heb. Lex. ina Pi. no. 1. 
 With an accus. i. q. to hasten after any 
 thing, to await with eager desire ; 2 Pet. 3, 
 12 Trpo&boiciavTas KOI crrrei/o ovTas rf)v irapov- 
 ffiav KT\. For this accus. see Matth. j 423. 
 p. 779. Sept. c. ace. for "pna Is. 16, 5. 
 So Find. Isth. 4. 22 <nrfvb(iv dptrdv. Dion. 
 Hal. Ant. 1.81. Thuc. 6. 39, 79. 
 
 o7TJJ\aiov, ov, TO, (oWoy,) a cave, cav 
 ern, den, Lat. spelunca, Matt. 21, 13. Mark 
 11, 17. Luke 19. 46. John 11, 38. Heb. 11, 
 38. Rev. 6, 15. Sept. for rnsa Gen. 19, 
 30. Josh. 10, 16. 17. Luc. D* Deor. 4. 1. 
 JE\. V. H. 12. 39. Plato Rep. 515. a. 
 
 orrtXa9, aSoy, 17, a rock by or in the sea, 
 a breaker, on which vessels are shipwrecked, 
 Jos. B. J. 3. 9. 3. Pol. 1. 37. 2. Diod. Sic. 3. 
 44. In N. T. Plur. trop. rocks, breakers, Jude 
 12 ; spoken of unworthy persons, through 
 whom the dyaTrat, and the good cause gen 
 erally, suffered shipwreck ; comp. 1 Tim. 
 1, 19. Vulg. has macula, spots, as if for 
 <nrIXot, which is not read ; see 2 Pet. 2, 13. 
 
 OTTiXo?, ov, 6, a spot, stain, blemish, 
 trop. in a moral sense, Eph. 5, 27. 2 Pet. 
 "2, 13. Pr. Jos. Ant. 13. 11.3. Luc. Amor. 
 15. Plut. Symp. 3. 10. 3 fin. A late word 
 used for the Attic /c^Xi j, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
 28. 
 
 O"7rtA,o&)j Q), f. oxrci), (o-7riXor r ) to spot, 
 to stain, to defile, c. ace. James 3, 6 yX&io-o-a 
 17 crTrtAot tra oXoi/ TO aco/xa. Pass. Jude 23. 
 Wisd. 15, 4. Dion. Hal. 9. 6. Luc. Amor. 
 15. A late word, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 28. 
 
 cnrXayxyiZofjLai, f. to-S^o-o/zat, Pass, 
 depon. (o-n\dyxvov, ) to feel the bowels yearn, 
 to hare compassion, to pity ; absol. Matt. 
 20,34 o~Tr\ayxvi(T 5(\s 8( 6 Irja-ovs. Mark 1, 
 41. Luke 10, 33. 15, 20. With Vt c. dat. 
 Matt. 14, 14. Luke 7, 13; Vi c. ace. Matt. 
 [14,14.] 15,32. Mark 6, 34. 8,2. 9,22; 
 Tffpi c. gen. Matt. 9, 36. With gen. sim 
 ply, like Lat. miseret, Matt. 18, 27 oTrXay- 
 XVKT^sds . . ToC 8ov\ov (Kfivov. Symm. 
 Deut. 13, 8. Gr. Anon. 1 Sam. 13, 21; 
 also tTei<nr\ayxyi6fi.(vos Sept. Prov. 17, 5. 
 Elsewhere only in later books, Test. XII 
 43 
 
 Pair. p. 640, 641, 642 ; c, ds p. 642 bis ; 
 c. ri nva p. 636, 641. Act. Thorn. 38. 
 The Act. o-TrXayxvifcu, occurs once in the 
 sense of a~ir\ayxvfva>, to eat the inwards of 
 victims sacrificed, 2 Mace. 6, 8. 
 
 (nrXayxyov, ov, TO, an intestine, bowel, 
 Eurip. Med. 220. Soph. Aj. 995. Plut. adv 
 Colot. 33 crtSr/poCc o-7r\dyxvov. Usually and 
 in N. T. only PLUR. TO o-n\dyxva, the 
 inwards, bowels, viscera; in profane writers 
 chiefly spoken of the upper viscera of vic 
 tims, as the heart, lungs, liver, which were 
 eaten during or after the sacrifice, Horn. II. 
 1. 464. Od. 3. 9, 461. Plut. Marcell. 5. 
 Hdian. 5. 5. 20. In N. T. of persons. 
 
 1. the inwards, bowels; Acts 1,18 eexv%r) 
 irdvra ra <nr\dyxva avrov, see in Xaovew. 
 2 Mace. 9, 5. Plut. de vitand. ^Ere alien. 8. 
 For the womb Find. Ol. 6. 73. 
 
 2. Spec, the inward parts, as in Engl. 
 the breast, the heart, as the seat of the emo 
 tions and passions ; e. g. anger, Aristoph. 
 Ran. 844 rrpos opyrjv cnr\dyxva SepfjLrjwjs. 
 ib. 1006. Soph. Aj. 995. In N. T. of the 
 gentler emotions, as compassion, tender 
 affection, like Heb. d^arn ; put for the 
 heart, soul, mind, the inner man. E. g. 
 a) Genr. 2 Cor. 6, 12 o-Tfi/o^copeio-3* iv 
 ro ts o-rrXdyxvois v/icoi/, parall. with 17 KapSta 
 in v. 11. Philem. 7 TO. crrrX. rtSv ayiatv dva- 
 TTfTravfTai 8ia crov. V. 20. 1 John 3, 17. 
 Sept. and D^arn Prov. 12, 10 ; comp. 
 D^arn Gen. 43, 30. 1 K. 3, 26. So Ec- 
 clus. 3~0, 7. Plut de Virt. et Vit. 2. Test. 
 XII Patr. p. 533, 641. b) Meton. as 
 the seat of pity, compassion, affection, lore ; 
 2 Cor. 7, 15 *ai TU orrXay^j/a avrov irtpio - 
 (TOT(pu>s (Is i>fi.ds (crriv. Phil. 1, 8 a)S tiri- 
 TToSoS irdvras v/iar tv oTrXdyxyois "I. Xp. i. e. 
 not with mere personal affection, but with 
 Christian love. Phil. 2, 1. Intensive, Luke 
 1, 78 8ia ra o-n-X. eXtovs SeoC. Col. 3, 12 
 orrX. oiKTippov. Comp. Gesen. Lehrg. p. 
 671. 3. Genr. D^arn , Sept. eXfor, Deut. 
 13, 18. Is. 47, 6. So Test. XII Patr. 641, 
 643 tx flv o"tr\dyx va Xovf. c) Put for 
 the olyect of affection, e. g. Philem. 12 TO 
 t/jui oTT\dyx^u, my own bowels, as in Engl. 
 my own heart, spoken of a person and im 
 plying strong affection; here parall. with 
 TO tp.bv TKVOV v. 10. So Philostr. Vit. 
 Soph. 2. 3 OVK fTrairoo vo Ofjiai. TOIS e /iou 
 o~Tr\dyxvois. Artemid. 1. 46 01 TraiSes 
 
 \tyovrai, cor KO.\ tVro crSua. 
 
 ov, 6, a sponge, Matt. 27, 
 48. Mark 15, 36. John 19, 29. Horn. Od. 
 1. 111. Luc. Ver. Hist 1.41. Plato Tim. 
 70. c. 
 
674 
 
 J"7ToSo9, ov, rj, ashes, Heb. 9, 13 o-TroSoy 
 dap.dXf>s. Matt. 11,21 et Luke 10, 13 tV 
 <raK*.<a mil (TTroSw . . . /J.fT(v6rj(rav. To lie 
 down in ashes, or to cast ashes or dust on 
 the head, was a part of oriental mourning ; 
 comp. Sept. and 1SK Esth. 4, 1. 3. Is. 58, 
 5. Jei . 6, 26. Jon. 3, 6 ; also 1 Mace. 3, 
 47. 4, 39. Jos. Ant. 7. 9. 2. ^Eschyl. Suppl. 
 826, 1159. Wetst. N. T. I. 384 sq. Genr. 
 Ecclus. 10, 9. Horn. Od. 9. 375. Luc. D. 
 Mort. 20. 4. Arr. Epict. 3. 13. 18. 
 
 cnropaj as, T], (oTreipw,) a sowing, seed 
 time, Sept. for snt 2 K. 19, 29 ; the green 
 sprout, grain, as growing, 1 Mace. 10, 30. 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 14. 4. In N. T. i. q. cnrtp^a, 
 seed, semen virile, (pr. Justin. Mart. Apol. 
 2. p. 93,) trop. 1 Pet. 1,23 ai/ayeyew/^cVot 
 OVK fK criropds (pSapTrjs. So Act. Thorn. 
 J31 Troias crTropas KOI TTOI OU ytvovs vnap- 
 X*is. Justin. Mart. Apol. 1. p. 51. 
 
 <T7r6ptyU-oy. ov, 6, 17, adj. (o-Tre/pw,) sown, 
 for sowing, e. g. oWp/ia Gen. 1 , 29. Lev. 
 11, 37 ; fit for sowing, fj yrj Diod. Sic. 1. 
 36. Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 10. In N. T. Plur. 
 Neut. ra <Tir6 pip. a, sown fields, fields of 
 grain, corn fields, Matt. 12, 1. Mark 2, 23. 
 Luke 6. 1. 
 
 orropo?, ov, 6, (o-im pw,) a sowing, 
 seed-time, Sept. for Ci nn Ex. 34, 21. Xen. 
 CEc. 7. 20 ; Ihe green sprout, grain, as 
 growing Ecclus. 40, 22. In N. T. i. q. 
 (rnepp.a, seed ; Mark 4, 26 /3aX?; TOV crnopov 
 eVi TTJS yrjs. v. 27. Luke 8, 5. 11 ; trop. 
 2 Cor. 9, 10. Sept. for jnj Deut. 11, 10. 
 
 o-TTOvSd^w, f. d<ra> 2 Pet. 1, 15, (O-TTOV- 
 817,) earlier fut. o-Trovb aa-op.ai Buttm. $ 113. 
 n. 7 : to speed, to make haste, pr. as mani 
 fested in diligence, earnestness, zeal ; comp. 
 in (TTrevSw. 
 
 1 . Genr. to make haste, to make effort, to 
 endeavour ; c. infin. 2 Tim. 4, 9 O-TTOVO CKTOV 
 fX3ftf Trpdy p.e ra^ftas- v. 21. Tit. 3, 12. 
 Sept. for liinn Job 31, 5. Judith 13. 12. 
 
 2. to give diligence, to lie in earnest, to be 
 forward ; c. inf. Gal. 2, 10 6 KOI eVn-ouSacra 
 avro TOVTO noirjcrai. Eph. 4, 3. 1 Thess. 2, 
 17. 2 Tim. 2, 15. Heb. 4, 11. 2 Pet. 1, 10. 
 15. 3, 14. Sept. Is. 21, 3. Diod. Sic. 1.58. 
 Xen. Apol. 22. 
 
 <T7rouSato9, a, ov, (O-TTOVO^,) speedy, 
 hasty, in the sense of earnest, diligent, for 
 ward; 2 Cor. 8, 17. 22 bis, o-7rov8aioi> ovra, 
 wvl of TroXu (TTrouSatoTfpoi . Neut. compa- 
 rat. a-TTovoaioTfpov as adv. intens. very 
 earnestly, very diligently, 2 Tim. 1, 17. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 51. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 2. 
 
 <77rouoato)9, adv. (a-rrovbaios, ) speedily, 
 i. e. earnestly, diligently ; Luke 7, 4 -jrapt- 
 
 K.d\ovv avrov (TTTouSa/wy. Tit. 3, .1 3. Com- 
 parat. o-TrovSaiorepcoy, the more speedily, 
 the sooner, Phil. 2, 28; see Buttm. j 115. 
 5. JEI V. H. 2. 2. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 9. 
 
 cTTTOuS^, ;)$, ,7, l. speed, haste, as man 
 ifested in earnestness, diligence, zeal ; e. g. 
 fiera {nrovbrjs, with haste, i. e. hastily, 
 eagerly, Mark 6, 25. Luke 1, 39. Sept. 
 for -pTBn Ex. 12, 11. Wisd. 19, 2. Hdian. 
 3. 4. I Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 6. 
 
 2. Spec, diligence, earnest effort, forward 
 ness ; Rom. 12, 8 TrpoKTrdp-fvos e* (rrrovb^. 
 v. 11. 2 Cor. 7, 11. 8, 7. 8. 2 Pet. 1, 5. 
 Jude 3 7ru(rav crirovb rjv Troiovp.fvos. So in 
 behalf of any one, t/Tre p rivos 2 Cor. 7, 12. 
 8, 16; c. Trpdf final Heb. 6, 11. Jos. Ant 
 20. 9. 2. Xen. Conv. 1. 6; -n-pos nva Jos. 
 Ant. 12. 3. 3; rrepi n Hdian. 1. 13. 15. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 81. 
 
 orrupi?, t Sos, T), (oTTTfipa,) a basket, for 
 storing grain, provisions, or the like ; Matt. 
 15, 37. 16, 10. Mark 8, 8. 20. Acts 9, 25. 
 Arr. Epict. 4. 10. 21 o-rrvpio-i Sfinvio-cu 
 Alciphr. 3. 56. Hdot. 5. 16. Comp. Wetst. 
 N. T. I. p. 426. 
 
 (TTaoiOV) ov, TO, (crrao), urn^u,) Plur. 
 by Metaplasm 01 oraStoi and ra ardSia, 
 Buttm. ^ 56. 6 ; in N. T. only the former ; 
 a stadium, pr. the standard of measure. 
 
 1. Pr. a stadium, furlong, as a measure 
 of distance containing 600 Greek feet, or 
 625 Roman feet, equivalent to 606$ feet or 
 202J yards English ; the proportion of the 
 Greek foot to the Roman being as 25 to 
 24 ; the former being equal to 12.135 inches 
 Engl. and the latter to 1 1 .6496 inches. The 
 Roman mile, p.l\iov, (75 to the degree,; 
 contained eight stadia ; and ten stadia are 
 equivalent to the modern geographical mile 
 of 60 to the degree. See Adam s Rom. Ant. 
 p. 503. Diet, of Antt. art. Mensura, also 
 Append. So Luke 24, 13. John 6, 19. 11, 
 18. Rev. 14, 20. 21, 16. So ot oraSioi 
 Jos. B. J. 7. 6. 6. Pol. 2. 14. 9. Xen. Cyr. 
 7. 1. 5; ra o~rdoia Pol. 3. 17. 2. Hdot. 2. 
 149. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 17. 
 
 2. a stadiwn, circus, in which public 
 games were exhibited ; so called because the 
 Olympic course was a stadium in length ; 
 1 Cor. 9, 24 ot (v crraSia) rpexovrts. See 
 Potter s Gr. Ant. I. p. 39. Adam s Rom. 
 Ant. p. 340, 567. Diet, of Antt. art. Sta 
 dium. Jos. B. J. 2. 9. 3 ev oraSi w. Find. 
 Ol. 13. 42 o-raS/ou Spopov. Also TO <rrd8iov 
 JE\. V. H. 13. 43. Pol. 18. 29. 4. Xen. 
 Hell. 1. 2. 1. 
 
 ara/JiVOS, ov, 6 v. 17, (UTTJ/^I,) an earth 
 en jar, jug, e. g. for keeping wine, 
 
675 
 
 Dem. 933. 25. Aristoph. Plut. 545. 
 In N. T. ajar, pot, vase, in which the man 
 na was laid up in the ark ; Heb. 9, 4 o-rdp,- 
 vos XP V(T ^ comp. Ex. 16, 33, where Sept. for 
 I" 1 ?. 3 ?? 5 ? See Moeris p. 44 dp,(popea, TOV bi<&- 
 TOV o-Tafjivov, \TTIKOIS (rrdfivov, E\\rjviK(os. 
 Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 400. 
 
 O Tda KKTTTj^, ov, 6, (erracrtdfco, ordcrtr,) 
 one who stirs up sedition, makes insurrec 
 tion, an insurgent; Mark 15, 7 Lachm. for 
 <rv<rra<riaoTT]s in Rec. Jos. Ant. 14. 1. 3 
 (ptXos 8e TIS YpKavov iSov/xator AiTiVarpor 
 \ey6fj.vos . . . Spacrn/ptoj 8f TIJV (pvcriv &>v al 
 a-Taa-iao-rfjs. Ptolem. in Tetrab. p. 165. 
 
 Grroo-19, etof, 17, (?cm7p.t,) Act. a setting 
 up, erection, as of a statue, Dion. Hal. Ant. 
 5. 35. Usually and in N. T. in an intransi 
 tive sense. 
 
 1. a standing, the act or state of stand 
 ing ; as (rrdo-iv e^eti/, to have a standing, 
 
 1. q. to stand, Heb. 9, 8 ert TTJS TrpcorT/s O-KT;- 
 vijs f xoixrrjs CTTCKTIV. Dion. Hal. Ant. 6. 95 
 peXpis av ovpavos re KOI yrj TTJV avTrjv ord- 
 <rw e x&xrt. Pol. 5. 5. 3. 
 
 2. a standing up, uprising, e. g. a) Of 
 a popular commotion, insurrection, sedition, 
 uproar; Mark 15, 7 ogives tv TTJ oratm 
 (povov irenoirjKtio-av. Luke 23, 19. 25. Acts 
 19. 40. 24, 5. So Jos. Vit. $ 17. Hdian. 3. 
 
 2. 13. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 63. b) In a more 
 private sense, dissension, controversy, with 
 the idea of violence ; Acts 15,2 yevofjLevrjs 
 ovv crrdo-fcof Kal TJTT) erects. 23, 7. 10. Sept. 
 for 3-n Prov. 17, 14. So Pol. 6. 44. 6. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 11. . 
 
 crrarrjp, fjpos, 6, (urrTj/u,) any weight ; 
 espec. a slater, an Attic silver coin of a cer 
 tain weight, Matt. 17, 27. It was equal to 
 the Attic tetradrachm, or four silver drach 
 mae, originally worth 3s. 3d. sterling or 78 
 cents ; but in the times of the N. T. cur 
 rent among the Romans and Jews for about 
 2s. Gd. sterling or 60 cents ; see in Spa^/uy 
 and dpyvpiov no. 2. Boeckh Metrolog. Un- 
 tersuch. p. 81, 124. Aquil. et Symm. for 
 bj5ti3 Ex. 38, 24. Num. 3, 47. Josh. 7, 21. 
 ^E1.V. H. 12. 1. Xen. Hell. 5. 2. 21. There 
 was also a crrarijp of gold, Jos. Ant. 7. 14. 
 10. Dinarch. 101. 31 ; see Diet, of Antt. 
 art. Stater. 
 
 crrau/30?, oO, 6, a pointed stake, pale, 
 palisade, Horn. II. 24. 453. Jos. B. J. 3. 7. 
 19. Thuc. 7. 25. Xen. An. 7. 4. 14. Later 
 and in N. T. a cross, i. e. a stake with a 
 cross-piece, on which malefactors were 
 nailed for execution, or crucified. This 
 mode of punishment was known to the an 
 cient Hebrews, Deut. 21, 22 ; to the Egyp 
 
 tians, Gen. 40, 19; to the Persians, Ezra 
 6, 11. Esth. 7, 10. Hdot. 6. 30. ib. 7. 194; 
 and also to the Carthaginians, Pol. 1 . 86. 4 ; 
 but was most common among the Romans 
 for slaves and criminals ; and by them was 
 introduced among the later Jews, Jos. B. J. 
 2. 14. 9. ib. 5. 11. 1. Persons about to be 
 crucified were first scourged, and then made 
 to bear their own cross to the place of exe 
 cution ; comp. Jos. 11. cc. Artemid. 2. 56 
 o p.tX\u>i avTu> [crTavpw] TrpocrnXovcrSai, 
 npoTtpov avTov /3ao-rdei. A label or title 
 was usually placed on the breast or over 
 the criminal. See Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 274. 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Crux. 
 
 1 . the cross, as an instrument of punish 
 ment ; Matt. 27, 32 rouroi Tjyydpfvcrav, Iva 
 aprj TOV (rravpov OVTOV, i. e. Jesus being 
 faint under the weight of his cross, Simon 
 was compelled to aid him in bearing it. 27, 
 40. 42. Mark 15, 21. 30. 32. Luke 23, 26. 
 John 19, 17. 19. 25. 31. Phil. 2, 8. Col. 1, 
 20. 2, 14. So Philo in Flacc. II. p. 527. 
 36. c. Luc. de Mort. Pergr. 45. Diod. Sic. 
 
 2. 18. Trop. in the phrases aipttv, acrrd- 
 tiv, \afj.fidv(iv TOV (TTavpov, to take up or 
 bear one s cross, i. e. to undergo suffering, 
 trial, punishment ; to expose oneself to con 
 tumely and death ; so with alptiv Matt. 16, 
 24. Mark 8, 34. 10, 21. Luke 9, 23; 
 fiao-rd&iv Luke 14, 27; \apfidveiv Matt. 
 10, 38. 
 
 2. Meton. the cross, for the punishment 
 of the cross, crucifixion, spoken only of the 
 death of Christ upon the cross, Eph. 2, 16. 
 Heb. 12, 2 vTTf/jLfive oravpoi/. So 6 araupos 
 TOV Xp. 1 Cor. 1, 17. Gal. 6, 12. 14. Phil. 
 
 3, 18 ; 6 Xoyor TOV oravpou 1 Cor. 1, 18: 
 absol. Gal. 5, 11. 
 
 . f. coo-to, (oraupo y,) to stake, 
 to drive slakes, pales, palisades, Thuc. 7. 25. 
 Later and in N. T. to crucify, to nail to 
 the cross ; with ace. expr. or impl. Matt. 
 20. 19 fiacmySxrai Kal (rravpaxrai. 23, 34. 
 26, 2. 27, 22 sq. Mark 15, 13 sq. Acts 2, 
 36. al. Sept. for f^n Egtfj. 7, 10. So 
 Jos. Ant. 17. 10. 10. Luc. Prometh. 1. 
 Pol. 1. 86. 4. Trop. to crucify, to mortify, 
 i. q. Saiwroco, c. ace. Gal. 5, 24 crravpovv 
 TT)v a-dpica, to crucify the Jlesh, to .vanquish, 
 mortify, destroy the power of the carnal 
 nature. 6, 14 f /iot KoV/xor e crravpcorat, xayco 
 TO> Kotr/io), i. e. the world is dead to me and 
 I to the world, I have renounced the world 
 and the world me. -f- 
 
 <rra(pv\T], ^ f , 17, grapes, a cluster of 
 grapes ; Matt. 7,16 P.TJTI oaiXX/yovo ti ana 
 uiv crra(pv\r)v. Luke 6, 44. Rev. 14, 
 
676 
 
 18. Sept. for 233 Gen. 40, 11. Is. 5, 2. 
 Diod. Sic. 4. 5. Xen. (Ec. 19. 19. 
 
 crra^f?, VO s, 6, an ear of grain, Lat. 
 spica; Matt. 12, 1 ri XXeti/ rov? emixvar. 
 Mark 2, 23. 4, 28 bis. Luke 6, 1. Sept. 
 for nVaiZJ Gen. 41, 6. 7. Ruth 2, 1. Eurip. 
 Hec. 593. Luc. Saturn. 7. Plut. Eumen. 
 6 bis. 
 
 .SVa^u?, vor, 6, Slachys, pr. n. of a 
 Christian, Rom. 16, 9. 
 
 (Trejij, rjs, f), (o-Tf yw,) a covering, roof, 
 Matt. 8, 8. Luke 7, 6. Mark 2. 4 aTrfoW- 
 yacrav rrjv crTfyrjv, comp. in dirocrreyd^a>. 
 Sept. for fi&3 Gen. 8, 13. 1 Esdr. 6, 4. 
 JE\. V. H. 9/18. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 14. 
 
 crreya), f. ga>, to cover, c. ace. Luc. Tim. 
 18. Thuc. 4. 34. In N. T. to cover orer 
 in silence, to bear in silence, to bear with, 
 to forbear ; c. ace. 1 Cor. 9, 12 dXXa -rravra 
 <rrfyop.ev. 13, 7; absol. 1 Thess. 3, 1. 5. 
 So Diod. Sic. 11. 32 TTJV fiiav. Pol. 3. 53. 2. 
 Plato Gorg. 493. c. Others in 1 Cor. 13, 7 
 render, to cover, to hide, i. e. to excuse all 
 wrongs ; but not in accordance with Paul s 
 usage ; so Ecclus. 8, 17. Pol. 4. 8. 2. Thuc. 
 6. 72. 
 
 (7Teipo<f, a, ov, (arfppos, crrepfos, kindr. 
 t<rr7/u,) sterile, barren, pr. of soil, like orep- 
 pos; trop. only of females, Luke 1, 7. 36. 
 23, 29. Gal. 4, 27. Sept. for rnpj* Gen. 
 11, 30. Judg. 13, 2. 3. Luc. D. Mo rt. 28. 
 2 bis. Dion. Hal. Ant. 2. 25 fin. Eur. Andr. 
 711. 
 
 crreXXw, f. o-reXw, pr. Germ, stelkn, to 
 set, to place, to make stand in order, e. g. 
 soldiers in battle-array, Horn. H. 4. 294 ; 
 trop. to put in order, to prepare, to fit out, 
 as riva ts [MX r ) v Horn. II. 12. 325; crrpa- 
 riav Hdot. 3. 141 ; also to fit or furnish with 
 garments, to deck, to clothe, Hdot. 3. 14 ; 
 and so Pass. Luc. D. Mort. 3. 2. Xen. An. 
 3. 2. 7. Hence, from the idea of making 
 ready and motion to a place, comes the 
 usual Greek signif. to send, to despatch, im 
 plying a previous fitting out, and so differ 
 ing from TTf/xTro), e. g. Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 4. 
 Thuc. 3. 86 ; Pass, or Mid. to be sent, to go, 
 In take ajourney, Jos. Ant. 1. 19. 1. Hdot. 
 3. 53. Xen. An. 5. 1. 5. Further, as a 
 nautical word, IOTIO ore XXeip, to send in 
 the sails, to draw or take in, to furl, Horn. 
 Od. 3. 11 ; hence also of astringent medi 
 cines, to draw in, to contract, Alex. Aphrod. 
 Ta crre XXowa TTJV KoiXiav. Trop. to repress, 
 to diminish, to assuage, Sept. for T)3^ of 
 the waters Gen. 8, 1. Jos. Ant. 5. 8. 3 \i>- 
 wijv oraXr/cai. ib. 9. 10. 2 6 ^et/x.wj eVraXrj. 
 
 Philo de Vit. Mos. III. p. 668. e, rtjv 
 crav (nr)(riv . . . crre XXeti/ KOI KaSaipelj/. Of 
 persons, to repress, to restrain, with diro, 
 from any thing, Philo de Spec. Legg. p. 
 772. e, OTTO TUIV v^TJXuiv Kal vntpoyKW dv- 
 TKnraxra Kal crre XXoticra. Mid. absol. Plut. 
 Anim. an corp. 4. Mor. III. p. 343, ot Kara 
 ^VXTJV x(in<avfs, oretXao-Sai TOV caftpamov 
 OVK fStvTfs. Hence in N. T. 
 
 MID. or PASS. trop. of persons contract 
 ing or restraining themselves from fear, sur 
 prise, aversion, to shrink from, to withdraw 
 from, to avoid, c. ace. 2 Cor. 8, 20 o-reXXo- 
 fjLtvoi TOVTO. With OTTO, 2 Thess. 3, 6 ore X- 
 Xe(r3at vfius dno travrbs a8eX(ov KT\. Pol. 
 8. 22. 4 TTJV (K rrjs vvvrfiflas Kara^iaicriv 
 o-rt XXeo-Sai. With dno, Sept. Mai. 2, 5 
 OTTO 7rpocra)7rou ovofiOTos /J.DU oreAXeo Sai av- 
 TOV, for Heb. SBB nn? . 
 
 crre/i/^a, aroy, TO, (o-r^>a>,) a fillet, gar 
 land, wreath; Acts 14, 13 ravpovs Kal 
 (TTennara, i. e. victims adorned with fillets 
 and garlands, as was customary in heathen 
 sacrifices ; comp. Potter Gr. Ant. I. p. 225 
 sq. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 323. Diet, of 
 Antt. art. Serla. Luc. Alex. 27. Pol. 16. 
 33. 5. Plato Rep. 617. c. 
 
 orezwy/io?, oO, 6, (o-rtvdfa,) a sigh 
 ing, groaning, e. g. of the oppressed, Acts 
 7, 34, quoted from Ex. 2, 24 where Sept. 
 for HJ5SD , as also Ex. 6, 5 ; for n Judg. 
 
 2, 18. Also of prayers to God not expressed 
 in articulate words, Rom. 8, 26 ; comp. 
 Mark 7, 35. Sept. for Mna, Ps. 38, 10. 
 Luc. Jup. Trag. 2. ^Eschin. Dial. Soc. 3 
 
 3. Plato Rep. 578. a. 
 
 <7Tvd(i), f. , (crr/i/co, ffrevos,) to sigh, 
 to groan, e. g. of persons in distress, afflic 
 tion, absol. Rom. 8, 23 Kal Tjp.cls avrol eV 
 favrols crTfvdfriifv. 2 Cor. 5, 2. 4. Heb. 
 13, 17 ; or from impatience, ill humour, i. q. 
 to murmur, to complain, /car dXXijXeoi 
 James 5, 9. Also of fervent though silent 
 prayer ; Mark 7, 34 dvaj3\tyas . . . eWe- 
 i/ae, comp. Rom. 8, 26. Sept. genr. for 
 $.?. Is. 24, 7. Lam. 1, 22. Wisd 5. 3. 
 Pint Agesil. 16. Dem. 835. 12. 
 
 aTevbs, T), ov, strait, narrow, e. g. 
 77 TrvXj; f) (TT(vf) Matt. 7, 13. 14. Luke 13, 
 24 ; comp. 2 Esdr. 7, 6 sq. Sept. for "i? 
 Is. 49, 20. Ceb. Tab. 10. Hdian. 3. 3. 2 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 25. 
 
 eojj >, f. TJO-W, (o-Tevo^wpo? 
 s t ra ti en f or room, Sept 
 Josh. 17, 15. Luc. Nigr. 13. Pass. Hdian 
 7. 9. 18. Diod. Sic. 20. 29. In N. T 
 Pass. trop. to be straitened, distiessed, not 
 
crrevo^wpta 
 
 677 
 
 arrjp 47/109 
 
 able to turn oneself, 2 Cor. 4, 8. 6, 12 bis, 
 
 *opp. rrXarvva in v. 11. So Arr. Epict. 1. 
 
 25. 28 (avTovs SXi /So/ifv not o~T(vox<0pov- 
 
 fJi(V KT\. 
 
 crrevoxwpia, as, 77, (<rrfvox>pt w,) strait- 
 ness of place, want of room, Diod. Sic. 18. 
 42. Thuc. 4. 26. In N. T. trop. straits, 
 distress, anguish ; as 17 SAtyir Kal a-revox- 
 Rom. 2, 9. 8, 35. 2 Cor. 6, 4 ; V di/dyKatr 
 ... V crrtvoxvpiais 2 Cor. 12, 10. Sept. for 
 Sli5*3 Is. 8, 22. So Ecclus. 10, 26. Arr. 
 Ep ict. 1. 25. 26. Pol. 1. 67. 1. 
 
 <TTepOS) a, 6v, (trrtppos, kindr. to-n;fu.) 
 hard, firm, solid ; e. g. as opp. to a liquid, 
 (TTfpea Tpofprj, solid food, antith. TO ydXa milk, 
 Heb. 5, 12. 14. So Arr. Epict. 2. 16. 39 ov 
 Se Xet? 77877 a>s TO. TratSi a dTroyaXaKTicrSJjixu 
 <a\ a7TT(r3ai rp<xpfjs orfpeorrepay. Diod. 
 Sic. 2.*4 ; Ta ocrra Plato Phaed. 98. c ; Xi 3o? 
 Horn. Od. 19. 494. Trop. firm, stable, im 
 movable, 2 Tim. 2, 19 Sf/xe Xto? row StoO. 
 1 Pet. 5, 9 (rrtptol Ty iriffTd. Sept. for 
 ptn p s . 35, 12. Jer. 31,11. So JEl V. 
 H. 5. 8. Dion. Hal. Ant. 8. 40. 
 
 (TTepeOb), o), f. cotrw, (o-Tfpeo ?.) to make 
 fy-m, strong, to strengthen ; c. ace. Acts 3, 
 7. 1 6 TOVTOV . . . fcmpfuxre TO ovop.a avrov. 
 Sept. for fitos p s . 33, 6 ; S$n Is. 44, 24. 
 So Diod. Sic. 1. 7. Xen. Cyr. 8. 8. 8. 
 Trop. to confirm, to establish, in faith rfj 
 jri oTft Acts 16, 5. So Sept. 1 Sam. 2, 1. 
 Prov. 20, 18. 
 
 CTTepecofJUt, aros, TO, (orepeoo),) any 
 thing made firm, solid ; the firmament, Sept. 
 for S^pn Gen. 1, 6 sq. Ez. 1, 22 ; firm sup 
 port, Esdr. 8, 81. In N. T. firmness, stead 
 fastness, e. g. TTJ? 7ri oTeo>r Col. 2, 5. So 
 1 Mace. 9, 14. 
 
 SVec^ai/a?, 5, 6, Stephanas, pr. n. of a 
 Christian at Corinth, 1 Cor. 1, 16. 16, 
 15. 17. 
 
 crr<f)avo$, ov, 6, (0T $o>,) a circlet, 
 chaplet, crown, encircling the head, e. g. 
 
 1 . a crown, as the emblem of royal dig 
 nity , Rev. 6, 2. 12, 1 crrf(pavoe avrfputv 
 8cj8f*a. 14, 14 <rrt(p. xpvvovv. Ascribed to 
 saints in heaven, elsewhere called kings, 
 Rev. 4, 4. 10. 9, 7 ; comp. in /3ao-iXuo> no. 
 2. Of the crown of thorns set upon Christ 
 in derision, as king of the Jews, Matt. 27, 
 29. Mark 15, 17. John 19, 2. 5. Sept. for 
 rnis 2 Sam. 12,30. Esth. 8, 15. 2 Mace. 
 14* 4. JE\. V. H. 11. 4. Hdian. 5. 3. 12. 
 
 2. a chapkl, wreath, as the prize conferred 
 on victors in the public games and else 
 where ; 1 Cor. 9, 25 (pftaprov or </>. Xd,3a)- 
 r. So Judith 15, 13. Ceb. Tab. 21. 
 
 Xen. Hell. 1. 7. 36. Trop. as an emblem 
 of the rewards of a future life, i. q. prize. 
 reward ; 2 Tim. 4, 8 6 rrjs 8iKaio<rvi>rjs err- 
 (pavos. James 1,12 ore <. TTJS fays. 1 Pet. 
 5,4. Rev. 2, 10. 3, 11. Comp. Sept. for 
 rryjs j er . 13, 18. Lam. 5, 16. So i. q. 
 reward, Diod. Sic. 13. 15. 
 
 3. Trop. an ornament, honour, glory, that 
 in which one may glory ; Phil. 4, 1 dSeX- 
 (pot (MOV . . . x a PQ- Ka <rr((pav6s fiov. 1 Thess. 
 2, 19. Sept. and fT?aS Prov. 12, 4. 16, 31. 
 17, 6. Philostr. Vit. Soph. 1. 21. 2. Lys. 
 154. 17 a~r((p. TTJS naTpidos tlvai ras tav- 
 TOOI/ T^u^dy. 
 
 3,T<pavos, ov, 6, Stephen, pr. n. of one 
 of the seven primitive deacons, the first 
 Christian martyr. Acts 6, 5. 8. 9. 7, 59. 
 8, 2. 11, 19. 22j20. 
 
 crre(f)avo(i), , f. o>o-o>, (o-W^afo?,) to 
 crown, e. g. a victor in the public games, 
 Pass. 2 Tim. 2, 5. Sept. for 1I? Cant. 3, 
 11. So Judith 15, 13. Ceb. Tab. 21. Xen. 
 Ag. 2. 11. Trop. to honour, to adorn, c. ace. 
 Heb. 2, 7. 9, o~6r) KOI rip.fi fcrrf^dvaxras 
 avrov, in allusion to Ps. 8, 6 where Sept. for 
 *^S . So Jos. B. J. 4. 4. 4 o~Tf(p. ras TTV- 
 \as. Diod. Sic. 20. 84. 
 
 , (os, bvs, TO, (kindr. 
 orr/vat,) the breast, Plur. TO. (TTTJ^TJ, the 
 breasts; Luke 18, 13 fruirov tls TO o-rrfios. 
 23, 48. John 13, 25. 21, 20. Rev. 15, 6. 
 Sept. for Chald. inn Dan. 2, 32 ; ab Ex. 
 28, 23. 26.-y-Luc. D! Deor. 19. 1. Hdian. 
 4. 4. 7. Thuc. 2. 49. 
 
 OT77/C&), a late present form, to stand, 
 corrupted from eo-TrjKa, Perf. of 1a~njfj.i, 
 Buttm. J 107- II- 2, marg. Intrans. and 
 absol. Mark 11, 25 orav o-njKT/re Trpocrev- 
 Xoptvoi. Trop. to stand firm in faith and 
 duty, to be constant, to persevere ; c. dat. of 
 pers. Rom. 14, 4 TO> iSiw Kvpia> o~TT]K.fi fj 
 jriirrfi to his own master he standeth or fall- 
 elh, i. e. it is for his own master, not for 
 you, to judge whether he is faithful or un 
 faithful. With dat. of thing, Gal. 5, 1 T fj 
 iXfvZeptq. With tv c. dat. 1 Cor. 16, 13 tmj- 
 KfTf tv TTJ trlcrrd. Phil. 1, 27. 4, 1 iv Kvpia>, 
 i. e. in the faith and profession of Christ. 
 1 Thess. 3, 8 ; absol. 2 Thess. 2, 15. S<> 
 Sept. for SSI^nn Ex. 14, 13 Cod. Alex, et 
 Complut. 
 
 (TTrjpiyfJid?, ov, 6, (oT7;p/fo),) a setting 
 fast, fixedness, a standing still, e. g. of the 
 stars Diod. Sic. 1. 81. Plut. de protect, in 
 Virt. 3. In N. T. trop. fixedness, steadfast 
 ness in mind and faith, 2 Pet. 3, 17 Iva >* 
 
 . . . (KTT((TT)T( TOV ISi 
 
emjpitju 
 
 <rTi)pia>, f. i |o>, 
 
 678 
 
 <rro\r) 
 
 to set fast, to 
 make steadfast, to fix. 
 
 1. Pr. Pass. perf. Luke 16, 26 xao-/ia 
 fie ya fo-TrjpiKTat, i. e. is set fast, is fixed. 
 Sept. *XijLia fo-Trjpiy/jifvij for 2Un Gen. 28, 
 12. So Ecclus. 3, 8. Luc. D. Marin. 10. 
 1 TT)V vrja-ov. Hesiod. Theog. 498 \faov. 
 Intrans. Pint. Marcell. 15. From the Heb. 
 Luke 9, 51 TO TrpoVcoTroi 1 OVTOV tcrTrjpit-e TOV 
 iroptvetr Sai KT\. comp. in Trpoo-carrov no. 1 . 
 
 2. Trop. to make steadfast in mind, to 
 confirm, to strengthen, c. ace. Luke 22, 32 
 
 (TTTJpl^OV TOVi d8f\(pOVS (TOV. Rom. 1, 11. 
 
 16, 25. 1 Thess. 3, 2. 13. 2 Thess. 3, 3. 
 James 5, 8. 2 Pet. 1,12. Rev. 3, 2. 1 Thess. 
 2, 17 et 1 Pet. 5, 10 a-njplgai Opt. in Rec. 
 where later edit, have fut. o-TT]pi(i. So Sept. 
 for r ( ao Ps. 51, 14. 112,8. Ecclus. 6, 40. 
 22, I?". 
 
 crTi/3a9, dSoj, 17, (o-T//3&>, Lat. stipo,~) 
 pr. any thing trodden or stuffed; hence a 
 bed of straw, rushes, boughs, leaves; also 
 a mattress, Hdot. 4. 71. Pol. 5. 48. 4. Xen. 
 Hell. 7. 1. 16; made of yew and myrtle 
 twigs, Plato Rep. 372. b. In N. T. a green 
 twig, bough, branch, Mark 11, 8 Lachm. 
 (TTiftdSas (K.OTTTOV fK To>v 8fv8pa>v, where 
 Rec. has o-roi/SdSay; parall. is Matt 11, 8 
 
 tKOTTTOV KXdSoVS. See Wetst. N. T. I. p. 
 
 609. 
 
 / , , it. \ T 1 3 
 
 (TTiy/ACi, OTOS, TO, (o-Ttfw,) a mark, brand, 
 as pricked or burnt in upon the body, in 
 allusion to the marks with which slaves and 
 sometimes prisoners were branded ; trop. 
 Gal. 6, 17 Ta (TTiypaTa TOV nvpiov Irjcrov 
 tv TW o~<ap.a.Ti JJLOV f3aa~Ta.a>, i. e. the marks 
 and scars of wounds received in the service 
 of Christ; see 2 Cor. 4, 10 et 11, 23 sq. 
 comp. Rev. 14, 9. See Wetst. N. T. II. p. 
 237. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 37. Potter s Gr. 
 Ant. I. p. 64 sq. Pr. Luc. Pise. 46 eVi 
 TOU p.fTti)Trov (TTiyfJiaTci. ^El. V. H. 2. 9. 
 Plut. Pericl. 26. Diod. Sic. 14. 30. 
 
 crrvy/jiij, r/s, f/, (OTI O>,) a prick, point, 
 Diog. Laert. 7. 135 o-Tiyp.rj 8 e oVi ypap.fir)s 
 rrepas, fJTts fO~T\ (rrj^ieiov e Xd^tcrTOi . Irop. 
 for the minutest particle, Dem. 552. 7. 
 In N. T. trop. a point of time, a moment, 
 instant, Luke 4, 5 fv a~riyp.fj xpovov. Sept. 
 for 3>nB Is. 29, 5. So 2 Mace. 9, 11. Plut. 
 de Liber, educ. 17 (myp.Tj xpovov iras 6 /3i oj 
 eW. Anth. Gr. I. p. 172. Comp. Wetst. 
 N. T. I. p. 679. 
 
 <7Ti\/3ft), f. -v^ca, to be bright, to shine, 
 w glitter; absol. Mark 9, 3 i/i<ma ariX- 
 (Soi/Ta. Sept. for 2ns Ezra 8, 26; snb 
 Nah. 3, 3. Pol. 11. 9. 4. Plato Ph<edo 59. 
 p. 110. c. 
 
 <rroa, as, T], (1a-rr)iJ.t,) a colonnade, pvT 
 tico, porch, piazza, surrounded and support-* 
 ed by columns, John 5, 2. Spec, rj <rroa 
 SoXo/xeowj Solomon s porch, John 10, 23. 
 Acts 3, 11. 5, 12 ; see in Ifpov no. 1. This 
 was the eastern colonnade or portico of the 
 temple-area ; and is called by Josephus TO 
 epyov SoXo^icovoy, B. J. 20. 9. 7 ; comp. 
 Ant. 8. 3. 9. B. J. 5. 5. 1. Genr. Dem. 
 776. 20. Xen. CEc. 7. 1. 
 
 oroi/3a?, ddos, T), prob. corrupted from 
 o-Tt/3ay, dSos, TJ, where see, and comp. 
 (rroiftf], o-Toi/3aco ; a green twig, bough, 
 branch; Mark 11, 8 Rec. oroijSaSus o- 
 TTTOV IK rav &(i>8p<*v, where Mss. and Lachm. 
 have o-Ti/3d8ar; comp. Matt. 21. 8. See in 
 
 CTTlftds. 
 
 (TTO^etOVj QV,TO, (dim. O-TOI^OJ, o-Tei xw.) 
 pr. a little step ; then a pin, peg, standi ng 
 upright, e. g. the gnomon of a dial, meton. 
 Aristoph. Eccles. 652. Trop. an element, 
 elementary sound, a letter, Pol. 10. 45. 7. 
 Luc. Jud. Voc. 12. Plato Crat. 424. d. In 
 N. T. Plur. TO. o-Toix(ia,the elements, e. g. 
 
 1 . Genr. the elements of nature, the compo 
 nent parts of the physical world. 2 Pet. 3, 10. 
 12 o-To^eta Kava-opeva.. Comp. Minuc. Felix 
 34. 2 " Stoicis. . . et Epicurseis de elemento- 
 rum conflagratione et mundi ruina eadem 
 ipsa sententia est." Senec. de Consol. ad 
 Marc. 26. Wisd. 19, 17. Luc. Parasit. 11. 
 Hdian. 3. 1. 12. Plato Tim. 48. b. 
 
 2. Of elementary instruction, that elements, 
 the rudiments; e. g. of Christian instruc 
 tion, Heb. 5, 12 TO. o-Toi^ela T^S apx^s, i. e. 
 the first rudiments, principles ; comp. Wi 
 ner J 34. 2. So Plut. de Lib. educ. 16 
 o-Tot^eta TTJS apeTr/s. Spoken of philosophy, 
 and espec. of the Jewish religion in con 
 trast with Christianity , - i. q. the first elements, 
 the mere rudiments, Gal. 4, 3. 9. Col. 2, 8. 20. 
 CTTOi^eft), o>, f. f]o-<0, (OTOI^OJ.) to stand 
 or go in order, to advance in rows, ranks, 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 3. 34. Mag. Eq. 5. 7. In 
 N. T. trop. to walk orderly, and with dat. of 
 rule, to walk by rule, to live according to any 
 rule or duty, to follow; Gal. 6, 16 00-01 T<B 
 Kavovi TovTca <TToixf] (rova 1 - **, 25. Phil. 3, 
 16. Rom. 4, 12. Absol. Acts 21, 24. So 
 Sext. Empir. 1. 10. 233 o-Toixfiy rfj 
 Sei a. Pol. 28. 5. 6 o-Tot^eif TT; TTJS 
 
 crro\ij, TJS, f], (oWXXw,) a fitting out, 
 apparatus, implements, JE\. V. H. 3. 43 ; 
 armature, arms, harness, ib. 3. 24. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 3. 42 ; apparel, attire, dress, JE\. V. 
 H. 13. 1 med. 14. 7. In N. T. i. q. Lat. 
 stola, a robe, vestment, a long flowing robe 
 
679 
 
 reaching to the feet, worn by kings Sept. 
 Jon. 3, 6. JE\. V. H. 7. 1 ; by priests Sept. 
 Ex. 28, 2 sq. Jos. Ant. 3. 7. 1. Hdian. 5. 5. 
 5 ; and in N. T. generally by persons of 
 rank and distinction, Mark 12, 38 iv oro- 
 Xals irepiiraTflv. 16,5. Luke 15, 22. 20,46. 
 Rev. 6, 1 1. 7, 9. 13. 14 bis. Sept. for 152 
 Ex. 28, 2 sq. 2 Chr. 18, 9 ; ^Sa 1 Chr. 15, 
 27. So Ceb. Tab. 18. Diod. Sic. 2. 6. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 4. 26. 
 
 (TTOfMa, aros, TO, 1. the mouth, of men 
 and animals ; e. g. of animals, Matt. 17, 27, 
 2 Tim. 4, 17, comp. in XeW Heb. 11, 33 
 comp. Judg. 14, 8. James 3, 3. Rev. 9, 17 sq. 
 12, 15. al. Sept. and dQ Gen. 8, 11. Ps. 
 22, 22. (Palzeph. 52. 2. Xen. Eq. 6. 9.) 
 Of persons, as the organ of breathing, blow 
 ing, 2 Thess. 2, 8 TW irvfv^ari. TOV ord/ian 
 aiiTov sc. TOV 3eov, comp. Ps. 33, 6. Rev. 1, 
 
 16. 2,16. 11,5. Sept. and M? 2 K. 4, 34. 
 As receiving food and drink, Matt. 15, 11. 
 
 17. John 19, 29. Acts 11, 8. Rev. 10, 9. 10. 
 Sept. and H3 Neh. 9, 20. (Pol. 12. 9. 4. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 14. 5.) Chiefly as the instru 
 ment of speech, Matt. 12, 34 TO <rr6pa XerXe?. 
 Acts 23, 2. Rom. 3, 14. 19. 10, 8sq. Col. 
 3, 8. James 3, 10. al. Sept. and ^B Ex. 4, 
 15. Is. 1. 20. (Luc. Calumn. 8. Xen. Mem. 
 3. 6. 9.) So the mouth as speaking, Matt. 
 15, 8, comp. Is. 29, 13. Matt. 18, 16 et 
 2 Cor. 1 3, 1 em oro/iaror Suo [j.apTvpa>i>, 
 quoted from Deut. 19, 5 where Sept. for 
 no-b5. Luke 11, 54. 19, 22 TOV o-ro- 
 pMTos (TOV KpivS) <Tf. 21, 15 8&><ra> vp.lv ITTO- 
 fj.a KOI o~o(piav q. d. wise utterance. Comp. 
 HB Sept. \6yos 1 Sam. 15, 24. So Soph. 
 CEd. Tyr. 427, 706. In phrases borrowed 
 mostly from the Hebrew : a) dvotytiv 
 TO o-Top.a, to open one s mouth, to speak, 
 see fully in dvoiya no. 4 ; also trop. of the 
 earth as rent in chasms, Rev. 12, 16 see 
 ibid. no. 4. a. 8. ) TO fKiroptvopevov 
 (K TOV o-Top.aTos, i.e. words uttered, say 
 ings, discourse, Matt. 15, 11. 18; comp. 
 Sept. Num. 30, 3. 32, 24. So TO eVcn-op. 
 8ia TOV orofMTos (TOV Sfov), word, precept, 
 Matt. 4, 4, in allusion to Deut. 8, 3 where 
 Sept. for ft? y) \a\flv v. flrrtlv 
 8 1 a o-TopaTos TIVOS, to speak through the 
 mouth of any one, to speak by his interven 
 tion, as God by a prophet, messenger ; Luke 
 1, 70 Ka3o>r AcjXrjcre 8ia o-To/zaTor TU>V dyia>v 
 Trpo<pf)To>v. Acts 1, 16. 3. 18.21. 4,25. 
 1 5, 7. So Sept. and Heb. HB3 2 Chr. 36, 
 21.22. 8)_crTo/ia irpbs o-Tofia Xa- 
 \t I v, to speak mouth to mouih, orally, with 
 out the need of writing, 2 John 12. 3 John 
 14. Sept. for ns-bx no Num. 12, 8; 
 
 comp. Jer. 32, 4. So Jos. Ant. 10. 8. 3 
 XaXe?i> KCLTU o-To /xa. 
 
 2. Synecd. the fore part, front ; spec, of 
 weapons, the point, Horn. II. 15. 389. Hence 
 in N. T. of a sword, the edge, e. g. o-rop.a 
 p.a X aipas Luke 21, 24. Heb. 11, 34. Sept. 
 for Heb. ^.H-IB Gen - 34 > 16 - Jud g- 20 > 37 - 
 38. Ecclu s! 28, 18. Soph. Aj. 651. -f 
 
 CTTOyU.a^09, ov, 6, (oro/ia,) pr. a mouth, 
 opening ; hence, the throat, gullet, Horn. II. 
 3. 292. ib. 19. 266. In N. T. the stomach, 
 1 Tim. 5,23. So Luc. Chronosol. 1 7. Hdian. 
 1. 17. 23. Plut. Cicer. 3. 
 
 arpareia, as, f], (o-TpaTevco,) military 
 service, warfare, Hdian. 4. 9. 9. Xen. Cyr. 
 8. 8. 6 ; a military expedition, campaign, 
 Pol. 2. 22. 2, 6. Xen. Hell. 7. 4. 19. In 
 N. T. trop. of the apostolic office, as con 
 nected with hardships, dangers, trials, a 
 warfare ; 2 Cor. 10, 4 TO. yap oirXa TTJS 
 o-TpaTfias TjfJ.u>v ov o~ap<iKu. Also 1 Tim. 
 1,18, see in o-rpaT(va> no. 2. a. So Jos. de 
 Mace. ^ 9 itpav *al fvycvr) trrpaTtlav, 
 
 arparev/jia, OTOS, TO, (o-TpaTfvw,) a mi 
 litary expedition, campaign, i. q. o-rparfia, 
 Hdot. 3. 49. In N. T. an armament, army, 
 troops, host, genr. Matt. 22, 7. Rev. 9, 16. 
 19, 14. 19 bis. (1 Mace. 9, 34. Hdian. 2. 
 12. 1. Xen. An. 1. 2. 18.) Synecd. a band 
 or detachment of troops, e. g. the garrison 
 in the fortress Antonia, Acts 23, 10. 27; 
 also of Herod s body-guard, Luke 23, 11. 
 So Hdian. 4. 6. 1 1, spoken of a part of the 
 praetorian cohort. 
 
 (rrparevd), f. tvo-to, (orpaTos.) to serve 
 in war, to be a soldier, Xen. Cyr. 4. 4. 11: 
 to wage war, to make an expedition, cam 
 paign, Pol. 2. 2. 7. Diod. Sic. 1. 68. Xen. 
 An. 2. 1. 14. Often and in N. T. only 
 Mid. depon. o-TpaTcuopai, to serve in 
 war, as a soldier ; to be a soldier, warrior. 
 
 1. Pr. and absol. 1 Cor. 9, 7 ris o-Tparev- 
 (Tailbiois o^raivlois iroTf ; 2 Tim. 2,4. Part. 
 6 o-rpaTfvontvos, a soldier, Luke 3, 14. Arr. 
 Epict. 2. 14. 17. Hdian. 8. 7. 20. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 6. 9. 
 
 2. Trop. to tear, to wage war, e. g. a) 
 Of the apostolic office as connected with 
 hardships, trials, dangers, 2 Cor. 10, 3 ; also 
 with ace. of kindred noun, 1 Tim. 1, 18 Iva 
 (TTpaTfvrj Tr]V Ko\r)v orpaTfiav, com p. Buttm. 
 J 131. 4. So Jos. de Mace. $9 itpav KOI 
 evyevfj o~TpaT(iav o~Tpa.T(vo~ao~ Zai virtp TTJJ 
 tvo-efidas. b) Of desires and lusts which 
 war against right principles and moral pre 
 cepts, James 4, 1. 1 Pet. 2, 11. 
 
 crrpaTT/yo?, oO, 6, (orpaTo s, ya>,), pr. 
 leader of an army, commander, general, Jos. 
 
arparta 
 
 6bU 
 
 D. J. 3. 8. 8. Hdot. 7. 83. Diod. Sic. 2. 21, 
 22. Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 3 sq. Ag. 3. 5 ; so of 
 the ten Athenian commanders chosen annu 
 ally, who had charge of the war-department, 
 with whom the TroXep-dpxos was joined, Hdot. 
 6. 109. JEl V. H. 3. 8, 17. Dem. 238. 13 
 6 tirl TU>V oVXcov o-TpaTrjyos Kal 6 eirl TTJS 
 Stotiojo-ecoy. ib. 282. 10. ib. 400. 26; see 
 Potter s Gr. Ant. II. p. 53. Diet, of Antt. 
 art. Strategus. In other Greek cities, a 
 chief-magistrate, prefect, Diod. Sic. 16. 56 
 &d\aiKos 6 3>uKfa>v crTparrjyos. ib. 14. 93. 
 Luc. Tox. 17 ecoSei ot orpar^yol iraprjo~av 
 sc. TU>V E(p(o-ia>v, comp. j 12. Of Roman 
 officers, e. g. the consul, Znaros, Pol. 1 . 7. 
 12. ib. 1. 52. 5. Oftener of the Roman 
 prcctor, Diod. Sic. T. VI. p. 222 T>V Kara 
 TrdXtv [ Pto/iijv] crrpaTTjytov. Plut. Cato Min. 
 44, comp. 39. Arr. Epict. 2. 1. 26. Gruter 
 Inscript. p. 503 orpar^yor Kara TTO\IV Kal 
 (irl fvcov, prcctor urbanus et peregrinus. 
 Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 119sq. In Roman 
 colonies and municipal towns, the chief ma 
 gistrates were usually two in number, called 
 duumviri, (occasionally four or six, quatuor- 
 i-iri, seviri, Minut. in Cic. ad Div. 13. 76. 
 Gruter Inscript. p. 416. 8. p. 565. 3,) who 
 also were sometimes styled pro: tors, i. q. 
 Greek o-Tparrjyoi. Cic. de Leg. Agrar. II. 
 34 " cum ceteris coloniis duumviri appel- 
 lentur, hi se pratores appellari volebant." 
 Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 74. Diet, of Antt. art. 
 Colonia, p. 318. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Of the duumviri, praetors, magistrates 
 of Philippi, which was a Roman colonia, 
 Acts 16, 20. 22. 35. 36. 38. Sept. for 
 D^DIO 5. e. magistrates of the Jewish people 
 under Ezra and Nehemiah, Ezra 9, 2. Neh. 
 2. 16. 4, 14. 13, 11. 
 
 2. Spec. 6 (rrparriyos TOV fepov, the cap 
 tain, governor, prefect of the temple, spoken 
 genr. of the chief officers of the priests and 
 Levites who kept guard in and around the 
 temple ; one of whom apparently held the 
 chief command ; see in cnre ipa no. 2 ; comp. 
 Jer. 20, 1. E. g. fully, Luke 22, 52 o-rpa- 
 rrjyovs TOV Ifpov. Acts 4, 1 6 OTp. TOV Itpov. 
 5, 24 ; absol. Luke 22, 4. Acts 5, 26. Jos. 
 B. J. 6. 5. 3 8pa^LOVT(s 8e ol TOV iepov (pv- 
 XoKfr fjyyei\av rc3 oTpaTTjycp. Ant. 20. 6. 2. 
 JB. J. 2. 17. 2 6 o-Tparr)yu>v. Called also by 
 other names, e. g. Sept. 6 r^yov^ifvos O"KOV 
 3<oi} for Heb. &vrfn rva TM 1 Chr. 9, 
 11. 2 Chr. 31, 13. Jer. 20, 1 ; eWTorai 
 TOV lepov 1 Esdr. 1,8; tfpocrrcmu 7, 2 ; 
 X&.iapxoi 1 Esdr. 1 , 9, comp. 2 Chr. 35, 8. 9. 
 
 (npaTia, as, 17, (errparo?:) an army, 
 host, Sept. for N2S 2 Sam. 3, 23. 1 K. 11, 
 
 15. Hdian. 6. 5. 16. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 17. 
 In N. T. only by Hebr. o-rparta ovpdvios V. 
 TOV ovpavov, i. q. t^SEfn N2S, the host of 
 heaven, the heavenly host, viz. 
 
 1. the angelic host, angels, Luke 2, 13. 
 So Sept. for t^vn s i K. 22, 19, comp. 
 2 Chr. 18, 18. Ps. 148, 2. 103, 21. 
 
 2. Of the host of the firmament, the sun, 
 moon, and stars, Acts 7, 42. So Sept. and 
 CiaiEn s 2 Chr. 33, 3. 5. Jer. 19, 13. 
 Zech. "i, 5. 
 
 ov, 6, (orpaTid,) a soldier, 
 warrior, spoken of common soldiers, Matt. 
 8, 9. Mark 15, 16. Luke 7, 8. John 19, 23 
 sq. Acts 12, 4. al. So 2 Mace. 14, 39. 
 Hdian. 2. 7. 10. Xen. An. 7. 1. 3. Trop. 
 of a Christian teacher, 1 Tim. 2, 3 o>r KaX6r 
 I Xp. See in (TTpaTfia. + 
 
 ), S>, f. jjo-w, (o-TparoXd- 
 yos ; orpardr, Xya>,) to collect an army, to 
 levy, to enlist ; Part. 6 orparoXoyijo-af one 
 who holds a levy or makes an enlistment, a 
 commander, general, 2 Tim. 2, 4. Plut. 
 C. Mar. 9. Diod. Sic. 18. 12. 
 
 crT/3aT07re8a/3^7/9, ov , 6, (arparoVfSoi , 
 ap^co,) Lat. prcsfectus prcctorio, a prefect of 
 the praetorian camp, or commander of the 
 emperor s body-guards (comp. Phil. 1, 13) ; 
 an officer to whose charge Paul was com 
 mitted at Rome, Acts 28, 16. The younger 
 Agrippa was once imprisoned by this officer 
 at the command of the emperor Tiberius ; 
 see Jos. Ant. 18. 6. 6, comp. 10. Krebs 
 Obss. in loc. Plin. Epist. 10. 65 "vinctus 
 mitti ad prsfectos pratorii me debet." See 
 Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 149, 563. Diet, of 
 Antt. art. PrccfecLus. Genr. Luc. Hist. 
 conscr. 22. 
 
 arparoTreSov, O v, TO, (orpards , 7re 6oiO 
 pr. the camping-ground (f an army ; hence, 
 a camp, encampment, Jos. Ant. 7. 9. 6. Ceb. 
 Tab. 1. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 27. In N. T. me- 
 ton. an army encamped, a host, Luke 21 , 20. 
 Sept. for b^n Jer. 34, 1. So 2 Mace. 8, 12. 
 Hdian. 7. 8. 8. Xen. Hell. 1. 1. 21. 
 
 CTTpep\00) : S>, f. coo-co, (o-rpf^Xjy, crrpe- 
 /3Xo r, o-Tpc- <pco,) to roll or wind on a windlass, 
 Hdot. 7. 36 ; to wrench, to turn awry, Hdot. 
 3. 129 ; espec. by torture, 3 Mace. 4, 14. 
 JEl V. H. 7. 18. Pol. 2. 59. 1. In N. T. 
 trop. to wrest, to pervert, e. g. the sense of 
 a writing, c. ace. 2 Pet. 3, 16. Comp. 
 Sept. Pass for bnBrin 2 Sam. 22, 27. 
 
 a~rpe(j)a>, f. ^a>, pr. i. q. rpe rrco, the first 
 and third consonants of the root TP* n being 
 strengthened by the sibilant and aspirate ; 
 to turn, to turn about or around, trans. Mid. 
 
crrprjvuioy 
 
 681 
 
 crpe cpo/iat and Pass. aor. 2 fcrrpd(f)r]v as 
 Mid. to turn oneself, to turn about, intrans. 
 Buttm. 5136. 1,2. 
 
 1 . Pr. to turn, c. ace. also with dat. of 
 pers. towards whom, Matt. 5, 39 o-Tptyov 
 avrd) KOI rf]vaX\r}v. Mid. Part, absol. o-rpa- 
 (pfis,o-Tpa(p(VTfs, turning, being turned; 
 Matt. 7, 6. 16, 23 6 fie (rrpafals finf TO> 
 HeVpo). Luke 9, 55. 14,25. 22,61. John 
 
 I, 38. 20, 16 ; c. dat. rivi Luke 7, 9 ; irpos 
 nva Luke 7, 44. 10, [22.] 23. 23,28. Also 
 Mid. c. els Tiva, Acts 13, 46 oTpe(pdp,f3a els 
 TO. 3T7, we turn [and go] to the Gentiles. 
 So with tls c. ace. of place, Acts 7, 39 
 (0-rpd(pr)o-av TCUS *ap8iair avrcov (Is Atyu- 
 irrov, in their hearts they turned back to 
 Egypt. John 20, 14 tcrrpafprj els TO. OTTUTU. 
 Sept. Act. for njsr; J er . 48, 39 ; Mid. c. 
 ft? TO, oTTt o-w for 230 Ps. 114, 3. 5. Ml. 
 V. H. 14. 15. Epict. Ench. 38. Xen. Lac. 
 
 II. 9. Mid. Pol. 1. 40. 13. Xen. An. 3. 5. 
 1 ; irpos nva Luc. Alex. 8 ; els TO. 8ftd 
 Xen. Eq. 7. 12. 
 
 2. Trop. trans, to turn into any thing, i. q. 
 to convert, to change, e. g. c. els, Rev. 11, 
 6 TO. iioara (Is alp-a. So Sept. for ^S^J 
 Ps. 114,8. Jer. 31, 13. Ex. 7, 15. Mid. of 
 persons, to turn in rcind, to be converted, 
 
 changed, to become a new man ; Matt. 18, 
 3 tav p.f] (TTpafpiJTe (cat ytvrjo^ie a>s iraiftia. 
 Comp. Sept. (TTpa<pfj(rrj is oVSpa dXXov, 
 Heb. qsn, 1 Sam. 10, 6. Once Act. 
 o-rp(p<u intrans. or c. eavrov impl. to turn 
 oneself, to turn, to change one s mind and 
 conduct ; see Buttm. \ 1 30. n. 2. Winer 
 \ 39. 1 . Acts 7, 42 fo-rpe^e 6 3eoj . Comp. 
 Sept. Is. 63, 10. So pr. Xen. Hell. 4. 3. 5. 
 
 (TTprjVlCUi)) o>, f. do-, ((rrpr]vos,<Trpr]vf]s^) 
 pr. to be over strong, lusty, to live hard; 
 hence to run riot, to revel, to live voluptu 
 ously, absol. Rev. 18,7. 9. Hesych. orpj;- 
 viwvres Sta IT\OVTOV vftpifriv KOI /Sap/ coy 
 fepdv. Sophil. ap. Athen. 3. p. 100. a. An- 
 tiphan. ib. p. 127. d. Lycophr. ib. 10. p. 
 420. b. It is a word of the new comedy for 
 the earlier rpvipda, Phryn. et Lob. p. 381. 
 Sturz de Dial. Mac. p. 195. Wetst. N. T. 
 II. p. 342. 
 
 (TTprivo?, tos, ovs, TO, (orpT]vr]s, comp. 
 Lat. strenuus, ) strength, lustiness. Pallad. 
 64, in Anth. Gr. III. p. 128; haughtiness, 
 arrogance, Sept. for iJXU 2 K. 19, 28; 
 eager desire for any thing, e. g. popov Ly 
 cophr. 438. In N. T. riotous living, re 
 velry, voluptuousness, Rev. 18, 3 eVc rrjs 8v- 
 vdp.fu>f TOV (TTpyvovs avrtjs (ir\ovT>jo~av, i. e. 
 from the abundance, vastness, of her lux 
 ury and proud voluptuousness. A word of 
 
 the later Greek, Sturz de Dial. Mac. p 
 195; comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 381. 
 
 (rrpov^iov, ov, TO, (dim. orpovSor,) any 
 small bird, espec. a sparrow, Matt. 10, 29. 
 31. Luke 12, 6. 7. Sept. for lies Ps. 11, 
 1. Lam. 3, 51. Tob. 2, 10. Hierocl. Fa- 
 cet. 10. Athen. 14. p. 654. b. 
 
 crrpwvvvco \. cavvvpi, f. o-rpua-a, (oro- 
 peWv/u, Buttm. 5 114. 5 HO. n. 7,) to strew, 
 to spread, c. ace. Matt. 21,8 bis, eorpwaav 
 tavruv TO. ifjuiria Iv 177 6Sw KT\. Mark 1 1 , 
 8 bis. For this custom see 2 K. 9, 13. 
 Jos. Ant. 9. 6. 2 (Kacrros ea-Tpa>vvvev avra 
 TO lp.aTi.ov. Sept. for SS 1 ^ Esth. 4, 3. Is. 
 
 14, 11. So Dion. Hal. Ant. 9. 26. Luc. 
 Amor. 12. Spec, of a bed, couch, Acts 9, 
 34 orpwcroi/ creauTw sc. KpafifiaTov, K\LVT)V, 
 comp. v. 33. Comp. Sept. Job 17, 13. Ez. 
 28, 7. (Theocr. Id. 21. 7. Artemid. 2. 57 
 or 62 o-rpu>vvvovo-a X/i/as.) Pass, of a sup 
 per-chamber with couches (triclinia) spread 
 around the table, i. q. furnished, prepared, 
 comp. in avaKeifMi no. 2. Mark 14, 15 et 
 Luke 22, 12 avdyaiov p- ya e crrpco^eVoi/. So 
 Sept. Ez. 23, 41. Athen. 4. p. 138. c. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 2. 6 6 OVTOS K\itrqv crTpuivvvo i, rpa- 
 irf^av Koo-p.(1. So triclinium stratum Ma- 
 crob. Sat. 2. 9. 
 
 orvy77T09, 77, 6v, (crruyecu,) hated, hate 
 ful, Tit. 3, 3. Philo de Decal. p. 202. 20. 
 Heliodor. 5. 29. ^Eschyl. Prom. 592. 
 
 (TTWyvafo, f. do-w, (o-rvyvos, <rrvyeo),) 
 to be or become sad, gloomy, to look sad; 
 e. g. of a person, absol. Mark 1 0, 22 6 8e 
 orvyvdo-as etri TW Xoyw dir^XSe \vrrovnfvos. 
 So Nicet. in Andron. Comnen. 2. 2. p. 207 
 KaTT](j)ia>irrts ovv 01 i/2pco7roi /cat oTvyvd- 
 oi>Tts tfiiao-Kov. Trop. of the sky, to 
 lower, absol. Matt. 16, 3 nvppu&i yap 
 o-Tvyvda>v 6 ovpavos. So Wisd. 17, 5 vv 
 o~Tvyvf), comp. arvyvoTrjs Pol. 4. 21. 1. 
 
 crrOXo?, ov, 6, (kindr. o-rfjXrj, ) a column, 
 pillar, Rev. 10, 1 a>s o-rCXot nvpos. Sept. 
 for 11B? Ex. 13, 21. 22. 14, 24. So 
 jEschyl. Ag. 898. Pol. 1. 22. 4. Trop. of 
 any firm support ; e. g. persons of authority 
 and influence in the church, Gal. 2, 9 ot 
 8oKovi>T(s crrvXot elvai sc. eV TTJ fKK\rj(ria. 
 Rev. 3, 12. Of a doctrine on which the 
 Christian religion specially rests, 1 Tim. 3, 
 
 15. So Ecclus. 36, 24. Eurip. Iph. Aul. 
 57 oTvXot yap oi<a>v etcrt TratSf s "ipo tves. 
 
 ^TtutVoy, {], 6v, Stoic, also ot Srcat- 
 Kot, the Stoics, a sect of philosophers found 
 ed by Zeno, so called from the o-rod, por 
 tico, where he taught ; see the works of 
 Epictetus, Arrian, M. Antoninus, his fol 
 lowers. Acts 17, 18. 
 
cri 
 
 W) gen. crov, thou, pers. pron. of the 
 second person ; Plur. v fit Is, ye; seeButtm. 
 72. 3. The oblique cases of the Sing, are 
 all enclitic, except after prepositions, Buttm. 
 ib. n. 2, 3. 
 
 1. Norn. (TV, Plur. v/ieis, usually omitted 
 except where a certain emphasis is requir 
 ed ; Buttm. 129. 14. Winer 5 22. 6. In 
 N. T. inserted : a) With emphasis, e. g. 
 before a vocative Matt. 2, 6. Luke 1, 76. 
 2 Tim. 2, 1 ; or in distribution James 2, 3 ; 
 with an adjunct between it and the verb 
 John 4, 9. Also in interrogations, Matt. 
 27, 11. Luke 24, 18. John 8, 53. Mark 8, 
 29 ; and so at the end of a clause John 1, 
 
 21. 8, 48; in answers Matt. 26, 25. Mark 
 15, 2. In antitheses Matt. 3, 14. Luke 9, 
 60. J*Jin 3, 2. Luke 11,48. 22,26. 1 Cor. 
 3, 23; so KM crv, Kal v/xeiy, Luke 10, 37. 
 
 22, 58. Matt. 7, 12. Genr. Matt. 16, 16. 
 Mark 1. 11. Luke 3, 22. In a relative 
 clause vfjids is sometimes put before the 
 relative, 1 John 2, 24. 27. So genr. Xen. 
 Conv. 8. 4 CTV Se fj.6vos. b) Without special 
 emphasis, o-v John 21, 15. 16. 17. Luke 4, 
 7. John 4, 10; v^els Matt. 28, 5. See 
 Winer. 1. c. So Xen. 1. c. ws crv yap 6pas. 
 
 2. Gen. crov, vp.a>v, are often used 
 instead of the corresponding possessives cros, 
 vfjifTepos, Buttm. 127. 7 ; e. g. crov Matt. 
 
 1, 22. 4, 6. Mark 1, 2. saep. vfj.>v Matt. 
 5, 10. Mark 2, 8. Rom. 6, 12. szep. Genr. 
 a-ov Matt. 2, 6. 3, 14. 5, 29. saep. {j^v 
 Matt. 5, 12. Luke 11,5. saep. For Luke 
 
 2, 35 Kal crov Se avTrjs, see in creavrov. 
 
 3. Dat. eroi, vfjiiv, genr. Matt. 4, 9. 
 Mark 5, 9. Luke 1, 19. Matt. 7, 7. Luke 
 10, 13. 2 Cor. 5, 12. saep. As dat. corn- 
 modi Matt. 21, 5. 2 Cor. 5, 13; dat. in- 
 comm. 2 Cor. 12, 20. Rev. 2, 16. al. For 
 the phrase ri e/xot KOL croi, see in eya>. -f- 
 
 avyyeveia, as, f], (a-vyyevfjs, ) pr. kin, 
 kindred, relationship, Jos. Ant. 13. 4. 1. 
 Pol. 8. 35. 9. Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 21. In N. 
 T. meton. kindred, kinsmen, relatives, fami 
 ly ; Luke 1, 61 ov8(is tcrri ev rrj a-vyyeveia 
 crov. Acts 7, 3. 14. Sept. for JineiZJa Ex. 
 12, 21. Josh. 6, 23. So Pol. 15. SO. 7. 
 Dem. 796. 17. Plato Legg. 627. c. 
 
 crvyyevqs, eos, ovs, 6, f), adj. (a-uv, ye- 
 vos, yiVo/Liat,) kin, kindred, related ; Subst. 
 a kinsman, relative, one of the same family ; 
 Mark 6, 4 OVK ecrri Trpo(pf)Tr)s tirifj-os, fl /XT) ... 
 tv TOLS (Tvyytvecri. Luke 1, 36 EXicrd/3er ?; 
 a-vyyevTjs o-ov. V. 58. 2, 44. 14, 12. 21, 16. 
 John 18, 26. Acts 10, 24. Sept. for tT^l 
 Lev. 18, 14; nnaina L GV 2 5, 45. Josh. 
 21, 27. So Tob. 6, 10. Hdian. 4. 14. 14. 
 
 o uyfca\v7TT(t) 
 
 Xen. Hell. 1. 7. 8. In a wider sense, one 
 of the same nation, a fellow-countryman, 
 spoken by Paul of the Jews as being all 
 descended from a common ancestor ; Rom. 
 9, 3 TWV o-vyyfvwv pov Kara crdpna. 16, 7. 
 11. 21. Comp. Xen. An. 7. 2. 31. Sturz 
 Lex. Xenophont. s. v. lett. c. 
 
 ns , ,, crvyy^coo-Kw, con 
 sent, concession, permission, leave. 1 Cor. 
 7, 6 TOVTO Se Xeyw /caret crvyyj/w/xqi/, ov Kara 
 fTriTayfjv, this I say by way of permission, 
 and not of command, i. e. not as an injunc 
 tion which ye are bound to follow. Ecclus. 
 3, 13. Dem. 121. 9. Xen. Ath. 2. 20. 
 
 a-vjKa^^ai, (/cdS^ai,) to sit down 
 with, to sit with, c. /terd TWOS Mark 14, 54 ; 
 with dat. depending on uvv in compos. Acts 
 26, 30 ; see Winer } 56. 2, 4 fin. Buttm. 
 \ 147. n. 8, 9. Matth. } 405. Sept. for 3151 
 Ex. 23, 33. Ps. 101, 7. Absol. Luc. Pseu- 
 dol. 20. Xen. An. 5. 7. 21. 
 
 a-vyrccfelfa, f. 4 ffw> (,3/fo0 trans, to 
 make sit down with, to seat with ; intrans. 
 to sit down with, to sit with. 
 
 1. Trans, to make sit together with any 
 one ; with eV c. dat. of place, Eph. 2, 6 KOI 
 crvvfjyfipf xal o-vveKaSio-fV [rjnas ro> Xpicrrta 
 v. 5] et> TOLS fTrovpaviois. 
 
 2. Intrans. of several, to sit down toge 
 ther, Luke 22, 55. Sept. for -^ Ex. 18, 
 13. Jer. 16, 6. Esdr. 9, 6. 16. Pl ut. Arat. 
 21. Xen. Hell. 5. 2. 35. 
 
 , f. ,7, ( KaK ona- 
 3<- w,) to suffer evil with any one, to endure 
 affliction with, c. dat. commodi, for which, 
 Winer 31. 1, 3. Buttm. \ 133. n. 5. 2 Tim. 
 1. 8 o-vyKaKOTrd^rjiTov rw fvayyeXi w, suffer 
 affliction with others for the gospel. [2, 3.] 
 
 (TVyKaKOV^ea), w, f. jjo-a>, (aKOVxea>,) 
 only in Pass, to be maltreated or afflicted 
 with any one, to suffer affliction with, c. dat. 
 of pers. Heb. 11, 25 crvy/caKov^eTcrSat ra> 
 XaoJ rov Seov. 
 
 a-vyfcaXea), S>, f. eVa), (/caXe co,) to call 
 together, to convoke, c. ace. Mark 15, 16 
 crvyKaXo{5crii> o\r)v TT)V <nrfipav. Acts 5, 21. 
 Mid. pr. to call together to oneself \ c. ace,. 
 Luke 9, 1 crvyKaXfo-a/ievor rovs ScoSeKa. 
 23, 13. Acts 10, 24. 28, 17. In Luke 15, 
 6. 9 the Act. and Mid. alternate in the same 
 context ; see Winer 5 39. 6. Sept. for unp, 
 Act. Ex. 7, 11. Josh. 9, 22 ; Mid. Zechl 3, 
 10. Jos. Ant. 7. 14. 7. Hdian. 1. 4. 1. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 1.1. Mid. Aristsenet. I. 5 <rvv 
 eKaXeZro rovy (piXovs. 
 
 0-VyKa\V7TTO), f. -^(B, OaXvTTTO),) to 
 cover together, to cover wholly, pr. Sept. foi 
 
083 
 
 rtBS Judg. 4, 18. 19. Jos. Ant. 9. 10. 2. 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 28. In N. T. trop. to hide 
 wholly, to conceal, Luke 12, 2 ovStv crvyKe- 
 Ka\vp.p.e vov etrriv. So Ecclus. 26, 8. Plut. 
 Alex. M. 31. Plato Rep. 452. d. 
 
 cruy/ca/iTTTCU, f. ^co, (Ka/xTrroo,) to &en<Z 
 together, c. ace. e. g. rbv V&TOV TWOS, to bow 
 down wholly, Rom. 11, 10, i. e. trop. to op 
 press, to afflict, quoted from Sept. Ps. 69, 24, 
 where it departs from the Hebrew. Pr. 
 Sept. for ina 2 K. 4, 35. Plato Prized. 
 98. d. 
 
 avyKaTafiaiVO), f. ^o-o/xat, (Kara^aL- 
 vo>,) to go down with any one, from a higher 
 to a lower place, as from Jerusalem to Ce- 
 sarea, absol. Acts 25, 5 <rvy/cara/3an-es sc. 
 >ot. Sept. for "n? Ps. 49, 18. Wisd. 10, 
 14. Pol. 1. 39. 12. Diod. Sic. 11. 18. 
 Found only in the later usage, instead of 
 the earlier crvyKaSunu, Phryn. et Lob. 
 p. 398. 
 
 fit,) agreement, assent, accord, 2 Cor. 6, 16. 
 Pol. 4. 17. 8. Plut. M. Antonin. 51. 
 
 o-vyKararfeefUU, Mid. (Kararfenp.^) 
 to put or lay down with another, to deposit 
 together, at the same time ; Isams 59. 25 
 ypap.p.aTe"iov. Usually and in N . T. only 
 trop. to agree with or to, to assent to, to ac 
 cord with, c. dat. Luke 23, 51. So Hist. 
 Sus. 20. Jos. Ant. 20. 1. 2 avyKa^e^v TJJ 
 yv<afj.T1 ravrrj. Pol. 3. 98. 11. Plato Gorg. 
 501. c. 
 
 cru<ya,Tai|r?7 (/&>, f. io~<o, (K.aTa-<\fri<^l- 
 fa>.) pr. to count down with, i. q. to reckon 
 or number with others; Pass. Acts 1, 26 
 Ta T<av fvfttKa aTrocrro- 
 
 i>. Hesych. ev 
 Karapt3/*/3ei r. Others, Pass, to be chosen 
 by vole with or among, to be voted in among ; 
 but against etymology and classic usage, 
 according to which Mid. Kara^/~r]<pi^ofj.ai is 
 to give one s vote against, to condemn, Dem. 
 790. 15. Xen. Hell. 1. 7. 38. 
 
 (TvyicepavvvfAi) f. pacrw, (icv/Mnro/uO to 
 mix together, to mingle with, Pass. 2 Mace. 
 15. 39 oii>or uSart o-vyKepao- Sels. Anthol. Gr. 
 I. p. 15. 2. In N. T. trop. to mingle together, 
 to temper, i. e. to mix together so that one 
 part qualifies another, c. ace. 1 Cor. 12, 24 
 6 3e6? <rvv(K(pa<rf TO (rco/xa. Pass, with two 
 datives, one depending on avv in comp. and 
 the other a dat. commodi ; Heb. 4, 2 6 \6- 
 yos pr) (TvyitfKtpacrufvos rjj Trio-ret rols 
 aKovo~a<Tiv, comp. Buttm. $ 133. n. 5. So 
 Menand. ap. Stob. Serm. 42. p. 302, rfji> 
 TOV Xoyow p.tv 8vvap.iv rj^ei xp^crrw o~vy<e- 
 
 Kpap.evT]v ("xfiv. Plut. Non. poss. suav. viv 
 20. Thuc. 6. 18; c. dat. pers. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 4. 1. 
 
 avyKiveo), S>, f. ij<ra>, (KH><FO>,) trans, to 
 move with another ; Mid. intrans. to move 
 oneself with, to move together with others, 
 Plut. de Adulat. et Amic. 7. Epict. Ench. 
 33. 10. Trop. to move in mind with any 
 one, to incite, to rouse, sc. to like exertion, 
 to sympathy, Plut. Galb. 1. Pol. 2. 59. 8. 
 ib. 15. 17. 1. In N. T. spec, of a popular 
 commotion, to move together, to stir up at 
 the same time, c. ace. Acts 6, 12 rbv \abv 
 KOI TOVS Trpfcrfivrepovs KT\. comp. Ktrn*. 
 
 o-vyK\,elco, f. et o-w, (xXetw,) to shut up 
 together, to enclose together, c. ace. Luke 5, 
 6 (TvveKh.fi(rav Tr\rfios l^vatv TTO\V. Sept. 
 for i Ex. 14, 3. So 1 Mace. 5, 5. Pol. 
 1. 17. 8. Hdian. 7. 10.6. Trop. to shut up 
 or include together, i. q. to make subject 
 alike ; so with els c. ace. Rom. 11, 32 <rvv- 
 fK\fi(r( yap 6 3eoy TOVS navras els airetieiav. 
 Gal. 3, 23 ; with VTTO c. ace. Gal. 3, 22. 
 Comp. Sept. for 1^3 i^Ort p s . 31, 9. Josh. 
 
 20, 5 ; V n Ps - 78 > 50 - So Diod - Sic - 19 - 
 19 els ToiavTTjv 8" ap-r^^nviav <rvyK\eKr^ie\s 
 Amiyovos. 
 
 pr. a co-heir, joint-Jieir, i. q. a joint-posses- 
 sor, copartner, Rom. 8, 17 <rvyic\. TOV Xpi- 
 <rrov. Eph. 3, 6. Heb. 11,9. 1 Pet. 3, 7. 
 
 (TVyKOlVWVea), ai, f. TJCTCO, (Koiva>vea>.) 
 to be partaker with others, to share until 
 others in any thing, c. dat. Eph. 5, 11. Phil. 
 4, 14. Rev. 18, 4. So c. gen. Dem. 1299. 
 20 <rvyKoiv(avflv TTJS 86^r]s. 
 
 (rvjKOivoovos, ov, 6, 17, (KOIVWOS,) a 
 joint-partaker, copartner, c. gen. Rom. 11, 
 17 trvyn. T^S pifrs KT\. 1 Cor. 9, 23. Phil. 
 1,7; V c. dat. Rev. 1, 9. 
 
 crvyKO[J,lci), f. taw, (KO/X/^W,) pr. to take 
 up and bear together, to bring together, to 
 collect, e. g. fruits Sept. Job 5, 26. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 8. 3 ; children Xen. Ag. 1. 21 ; 
 dead bodies on a field of battle for burning, 
 Plut. Agesi. 19. Thuc. 6. 71. In N. T. of 
 several persons, to bear away together, e. g. 
 a corpse for burial, to help bury, c. ace. Acts 
 8, 2 (rvveKop.icrav Se TOV 2T((pavov tii>8pes ev- 
 Xaj3fly. So Soph. Aj. 1048 ; comp. Sept. 
 Job 5, 26. Phavor. (rvyKop.ieiv iivrl TOV 
 
 ^SllTTTdV, OTTO TtoV (TVVayOfJifVtoV KapTTWV (LS 
 
 Tas OTTo SriKas. 
 
 (Tvyrcpiva), f. i V S>, (xpi i/oj,) pr. to sepa 
 rate out and put together anew ; hence to 
 join together, to combine, to compose ; opp. 
 oiaKpiveiv to separate between, to decom- 
 
CTVyKVTTTQ) 684 
 
 pose; Plut. Consol. ad Apoll. 15, KaXws 6 
 Eir!.X<ipp.os crvvfKptir), (pqcri, Kal SifKpi Sty, 
 ical aTTJ/XSe o%tv i^XSe TraXtc, yd p.tv ds ydv, 
 rrvfvfjia S ava>. Luc. Pseudosoph. 5. Plat. 
 PhEcdo 71. b. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. to join together, to combine, as in clas 
 sic usage above ; c. ace. et dat. 1 Cor. 2, 13 
 TrvfVfj-aTiKols 7rvfvp.aTiKd (TvyKpivovrfs, com 
 bining spiritual things with spiritual, i. e. 
 expressing thoughts taught by the Spirit 
 in words taught of the Spirit (eV SioaKTols 
 irvevp.aros) , giving to our spiritual teaching 
 a spiritual form ; not combining things he 
 terogeneous. Others : explaining spiritual 
 things by spiritual, i. e. the teachings of the 
 gospel by those of the O. Test, but against 
 the context. Others take dat. irvfvp.aTi.Kols 
 as masc. referring to persons. 
 
 2. Spec, to judge of together, to compare ; 
 c. ace. et dat. 2 Cor. 10, 12 bis, o-vyKplvai 
 tavTovs Ticri . . . a-vyKpivovrts eavTovs eav- 
 Tols. Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 21. Luc. Parasit. 51. 
 Pol. 6. 47. 9 ; c. Trpo s Diod. Sic. 2. 5. ib. 
 
 3. 52. 
 
 (TVyKVTTTW, f. ^o>, (Kvnrco,) to stoop or 
 bow together, as persons putting their heads 
 together, Hdot. 3. 82. Luc. Bis. Ace. 4 ; 
 of things inclining toward each other, Xen. 
 An. 3. 4. 19. In N. T. to be bowed toge 
 ther, to be bent double, absol. Luke 13, 11 
 
 So Sept. Job 9, 27. Ecclus. 12, 11. The- 
 mist. Orat. 7 ad Valent. p. 90 dd crvyKfKv- 
 (ptas, dd o~vvvf(pT]s, f(pf\Kop.fvos Tas 6(ppvs- 
 crvyKVpLd, as, fj, (a-vy/cup/co,) pr. a 
 happening together, i. e. coincidence, acci 
 dent, chance; Luke 10, 31 Kara o-vyKvpiav, 
 by chance. Eustath. ad II. 23. 435. So 
 a-vyKvprjcns Pol. 9. 12. 6 ; avyKvprjp.a Pol. 
 
 4. 86. 2. 
 
 / f , 
 
 (TVyvCtlpG)) (yatpo),) aor. 2 o~vffxapnv 
 
 from the Pass, form, see in ^at pw ; to rejoice 
 with any one, to sympathize in another s joy ; 
 c. dat. depending on crvv in compos. Winer 
 {56. 2, 4 fin. Buttm. 147. n. 8, 9. Matth. 
 {405. Phil. 2, 17 cri/y^a/po) Trdcriv vp.lv. v. 
 18. Luke 1, 58. 15, 6. 9. (Sept. Gen. 21, 
 6. Plut. Parall. 16 bis, ^apfWwi 8e navrnv, 
 fj,6vr] T] d8\(pr) ov crvvtxdpr) flpan a. Xen. 
 Hi. 11. 12.) Others in all these passages, 
 to congratulate, as Act. Dem. 194. 23. Pol. 
 29. 7. 4. Mid. 3 Mace. 1, 8. Trop. of 
 things, 1 Cor. 12, 26 TO p.e\v. 13, 6 ov 
 \aiptt, [f] dyaTrrj\ tVl rfj ddiKta, o-vyxaipfi 
 of TTJ d\r)%fiq., i. e. the truth of the gospel 
 leads its followers to rejoice in righteous 
 ness and 17 dydm) rejoices with them. 
 
 0"uy%e<H, (xo.) also crvyxyvat a later 
 form disapproved by the grammarians, Lob. 
 
 ad Phryn. p. 726 ; impf. oW^foi/ and 
 Xwov ; Pass. perf. a-vyKfxvpiai, aor. 1 
 XvZnv, see fully in e *:xa>. Buttm. 114,x<(w. 
 Pr. to pour together, Lat. confundo ; hence- 
 trop. to confound, to confuse, e. g. 
 
 1. Of an assembly, multitude, i. q. to 
 throw into confusion, to excite, to put in an 
 uproar, c. ace. Acts 21, 27 o-vv^xtov rrdvra 
 rov SX\QV. Pass. 19, 32 jj eVc/cX^a/a o-vy/ce- 
 Xw/ttwj. 21, 31. Jos. B. J. 6. 2. 6. Pol. 1. 
 40. 13. Luc. Bis. Ace. 17 KOI ^vyx^v TJ^V 
 (TTfiparo rrjv vvovcriav, eVtrapa^ay rfj floy. 
 Comp. D. Deor. 25. 1. 
 
 2. Of the mind, to confound, to perplex, 
 e. g. a person in disputation, c. ace. Acts 9, 
 22. Pass, of persons in amazement, con 
 sternation, Acts 2, 6 (rwT/XSe ro n\^os, 
 KOI a-vvexfar). 1 Mace. 4, 27. Arr. Epict. 
 3. 22. 25. Diod. Sic. 4. 62 a-w^fer) T f]v 
 
 S,p.ai, f. r/a-op., Mid. de- 
 pon. (xpa.op.ai,} to use with another, to have 
 in common use, Pol. 3. 14. 5. ib. 6. 3. 10. 
 In N. T. to have usage, dealings, inter 
 course with any one, c. dat. John 4, 9 ov yap 
 a-vyxp&vrai. lovSaloi Sa/iapemuy. So Arr. 
 Peripl. Mar. Eryth. p. 159 avixxpfia-avro 
 8e airy [rrj i>jjo-<a] Kal dno Mou^oy rive s, 
 i. e. some from Muza have commerce with 
 the island. Comp. xpaopu Xen. Hi. 5. 2 
 Mem. 4. 8. 11. 
 
 wi, 17, (o-vy^ew,) confusion, 
 tumult, uproar, Acts 19, 29. Comp. Sept. 
 for nElll-lB i Sam. 14, 20. Pol. 14. 5. 8. 
 Plut. Pyrrh. 25. 
 
 crucjato, i, f. ijo-o), (crvv, da>,) to live 
 with any one, i. e. to continue in life, c. dat. 
 expr. or impl. see in a-vyxaipa. 2 Cor. 7, 3 
 eV Tatr KapSiais Tjp.a>v tcrre ds TO crvj/a7ro3a- 
 vfiv Kal a-v^v sc. vfj.lv. Trop. of eternal 
 life with Christ, Rom. 6, 8. 2 Tim. 2, 11. 
 Aristot. Eth. 8. 6. Dem. 363. 4 ols o-vtfv 
 TOV \onrov filov dvdyKt). Plato Polit. 302. b. 
 
 o-v&vyvv/JLl, f. ev<B, (fevyw/xi,) aor. 1 
 <rvi>ffva, to yoke together, to couple, pr. 
 animals, Sept. for "OH Ez. 1, 11. Xen. Cyr. 
 2. 2. 26. In N. T. trop. to join together, to 
 unite, c. ace. e. g. husband and wife, Matt. 
 19, 6. Mark 10, 9. So Jos. Ant. 1. 19. 10 
 Hdian. 3. 10. 4. Xen. (Ec. 7. 30. 
 
 cru^reft), o>, f. faco, (o-vv, ^rco,) to 
 seek any thing with another, as Hercules 
 with Iphitus for his cattle, Apollod. Bibl. 2. 
 6. In N. T. trop. to seek together, i. e. to 
 inquire one of another, to question with, im 
 plying two or more persons or parties : ab- 
 
685 
 
 Bol. Mark 9, 10 (rvfarovirrfs, ri f crri TO t< 
 vtKpfov dva<TTT]vai. With rrpbs (avrous Mark 
 1, 27. Luke 22, 23. (Plato Crat. 384. c. 
 td. Meno 90. b.) Also genr. to question, 
 to reason, to dispute with; absol. Mark 12, 
 
 28 aKovcras avriov CTV^TJTOVVTUV. Luke 24, 
 15 ; c. dat. Acts 6, 9 ; npos Tii/a, Acts 9, 
 
 29 (Tvvf^rjTfi npos TOVS EXX^i/KTTas 1 . With 
 the idea of cavil, captiousness, c. dat. Mark 
 8, 11. 9, 14 ; Trpor riva, Mark 9, 16. 
 
 fu>r, ), <rurfw, nqury 
 together, reasoning, disputation, Acts 15, 
 
 2. 7. 28, 29. Philo de Opif. Mund. p. 11. 
 
 d. Allegor. 2. p. 85. b. 
 
 (rv^rjT rjT^ ov, 6, (trv^rew,) a joint- 
 inquirer, a reasoner, disputant, a sophist, 
 1 Cor. 1, 20. 
 
 crvfyj yos, ov, 6, fj, adj. (o-w^euyw/Lit,) 
 yoked-log ether, paired ; Subst. a yoke-fellow, 
 trop. a wife, Eurip. Ale. 314, 342. In N. T. 
 trop. a fellow-labourer, colleague, Phil. 4, 3. 
 So Aristoph. Plut. 945 eav Se <rvvyov Xa/3o> 
 riva. Eurip. Iph. Taur. 250. 
 
 CTf^UOTTOteO), o>, f. 7?<rw, (a>07roieQ>,) to 
 make alive with any one, to quicken with, 
 
 e. g. trop. into spiritual life with Christ as 
 risen from the dead ; c. dat. T Xp. Eph. 2, 
 
 5. With o-vv repeated Col. 2, 13 ; comp. 
 Winer \ 56. 2, 4 fin. 
 
 <rf a/LUi>O9, ov, f), a sycamine-tree, Heb. 
 Plur. C^apd ; called also the sycamore, o-u- 
 Kop.opos, see fully in crvKonopea. Luke 17, 
 
 6. Sept. for iy 1 K. 10, 27. 1 Chr. 27, 
 28. Is. 9, 9. Dioscor. I. 182, 184 OVKO- 
 p.opov, evioi fie KOI TOVTO (rvudp-ivov \tyovcri. 
 Theophr. H. PI. 4. 2. Diod. Sic. 1. 34. 
 
 crivcea, contr. tru/cr}, gen. ias rjs, 17, (<rv- 
 KOI/,) a fig-tree, ficus carica, Matt. 21, 19 bis. 
 20.21. 24, 32. Mark 11, 13. 20. 21. 13,28. 
 Luke 13, 6. 7. 21,29. John 1,49. 51. James 
 
 3, 12. Rev. 6, 13. Sept. for nj^n Judg. 
 9, 10. 1 1. So JEl.V. H. 3. 38. Xen. CEc. 19. 
 12. As explanatory of Mark 1 1, 13, it may 
 be noted, that in the east the fruit of the 
 fig-tree is of three kinds : a) Early figs, 
 Heb. "TJ 713 ^ Arab, bokkoreh, Lat. prcccox 
 Plin. H. N. 16. 49 ; ripening about the end 
 of June. b) Summer Jigs, Arab, kermus, 
 ripening in August. c) Winter Jigs, 
 grosti, oXw3ot, longer and darker than the 
 kermus, hanging and ripening late on the 
 tree even after the leaves are shed ; and 
 sometimes gathered as a delicious morsel in 
 the spring. See genr. Shaw s Travels, 
 Lond. 1757. pp. 144, 342. Colurnell. de 
 Arb. 21. Winer Realw. art. Feigenbaum. 
 Josephus describes the fig-trees near the 
 
 lake of Gennesareth as yielding fruit during 
 ten months of the year, B. J. 3. 10. 8. 
 
 (TVKO/jLOpea, as, f],-((rvK.ov, /xope a, p.opoi>,) 
 -i. q. f) 0-vKop.opos, a sycamore-tree, Jicus sy- 
 comoros, pr. the fig-mulberry, Luke 19,4. 
 This tree is frequent in Egypt and the level 
 parts of Palestine, resembling the mulberry- 
 tree in its leaves, with fruit similar in ap 
 pearance to the fig growing directly from 
 the stem and boughs, and very indigestible. 
 It is more frequently called the sycamine 
 tree, 77 0-vKap.ivos q. v. See Dioscor. I. 182, 
 184. Theophr. H. PI. 4. 2. Athen. 2. p. 
 51. b. Celsii Hierob. I. p. 310. Rosenm. 
 Alterthk. IV. i. p. 281. Hesych. <n>*o/io- 
 pia a-vKOfjiivov. Other forms in Mss. arr> 
 crvKOficapea, (rvKopopaia, a~VKOfitt)paia. 
 
 GVfCOV, ov, TO, a Jig, see in o-vKea ; Matt. 
 7, 16. Mark 11, 13. Luke 6, 44. James 3, 
 12. Sept. for fiSStn 2 K. 20, 7. Neh. 13, 
 15. Ml V. H. 3! 36. Dem. 314. 12. Xen. 
 Cyr. 6. 2. 22. 
 
 crvKofavTeo), o>, f. j^o-w, (<rv<o(j)dj>T7)s ; 
 (rvKov, (paivci)^) pr. to be a trvKOfpdvrrjs, l. e. 
 a fig-shewer, fig-informer, one who watched 
 and informed against persons who exported 
 figs from Attica contrary to law ; see Suid. 
 s. voc. Potter s Gr. Ant. I. p. 121 sq. Diet, 
 of Antt. art. Sycophantes. Hence genr. to 
 inform against, to accuse falsely, to slander, 
 c. ace. Jos. Ant. 10. 7. 3. ^El. V. H. 2. 13. 
 Hdian. 2. 14. 7. Xen. Mem. 2. 9. 5. In 
 N. T. spec, to extort by false accusations, 
 to overreach, to defraud, c. ace. pers. Luke 
 3, 14; nvos TI 19, 8. Sept. for. pa5 Job 
 35, 9. Ps. 119, 122. Prov. 22, 16. Comp. 
 Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 22 dSt/cwrfpa r<av <rvKO(frav- 
 
 TU1V TTOlfiv. 
 
 O"U\d f ya> r ye(t)) to, f. jjo-co, (a-v\ov, aya>,) 
 to lead off as prey, to carry off" as booty, e. g. 
 captives Heliodor. 10. p. 512; to rob, to 
 spoil, Aristaen. 2. 22. In N. T. trop. to 
 lead captive, to lead astray, of false teachers, 
 c. ace. Col. 2, 8. 
 
 (TV\da), J>, f. 170-0), to strip, to spoil, to 
 rob, hyperbol. c. ace. 2 Cor. 11, 8 a\\as 
 fKK\r)crias eVvXjjcra Xa/3a>i> tyaiviov. Jos. 
 B. J. 1. 1. 1. Hdian. 7. 7. 7. Xen. Hi. 4. 11. 
 
 O"fXXtt\&>. o, f. fj(T(a, (crvv, XaXe o),) to 
 speak or talk with, to confer with, c. dat. 
 Mark 9, 4. Luke 9, 30. 22, 4. With fjitrd 
 nvos Matt. 17, 3. Acts 25, 12 ; irpbs aXX^- 
 \ovs Luke 4, 36. Sept. c. dat. for "12*1 Ex. 
 34, 35. So c. dat. Pol. 1. 43. 1. ib/4. 22. 
 8 ; Trpof aXXTjXovs Dion. Hal. Ant. 10. 12 ; 
 absol. Plut. de Gen. Socr. 32. 
 
 <TV\\af4/3dva), f, X^op-at, (Xup./3ai>a>,) 
 
 to take together, pr. in the two hands toge 
 
686 
 
 ther, Lat. comprehendere ; trop. like Engl. 
 to comprehend, to comprise, Hdot. 3. 82 Vi 
 eWi Trdira o-vXXa/3a>j> 6(Ver . ib. 7. 16. 3; 
 also to ta/ce or bring together, to colled, e. g. 
 scattered troops Hdot. 5. 46 ; to take with 
 oneself, Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 1 drr^fi o-vXXa/3o>i/ 
 TO eTepov a-rpdrfVfia. In N. ". 
 
 1. Lat. comprehendere, of persons, to take 
 or seize altogether, stronger than \ap.fidva>, 
 from the idea of clasping together or grasp 
 ing with the hands clutched together; 
 comp. o-vv intens. 
 
 a) Pr. as of persons taken by authority 
 or force, to seize, to apprehend, to arrest, c. 
 ace. TOV Irjo-oiiv John 18, 12. Acts 1, 16. 
 Matt. 26, 55. Mark 14, 48. Luke 22, 54. 
 Acts 12, 3 TOV UtTpov. 23, 27. Mid. id. Acts 
 26, 21. Sept. for -jab Judg. 7, 25; toatn 
 Josh. 8, 23. 1 K. 20, 18. So JE\. V. H. 5*. 
 18. Hdian. 7. 7. 14. Xen. An. 1. 1. 3. In 
 hunting or fishing, to lake, to catch, aypav 
 Luke 5, 9 ; comp. v. 5, where it is Xa/i/3di/o>. 
 So Eurip. Orest. 1340 oi>x). o-vXXjj^eo-3 
 fiypav. Ml. H. An. 1. 2. 
 
 b) Trop. of females, to conceive, absol. 
 Luke 1, 24 ; c. ace. vlov v. 36 ; eV yacrrpi 
 v. 31 ; (v rfj KoiXt a 2, 21. Sept. for rnn 
 Gen. 4, 1. 16. 19, 36. So Plut. de vitand . 
 JEr. alien. 4. Test. XII Patr. p. 544. Hippocr. 
 Aphor. 5. 46 eV yaa-rpi. Galen de Sem. 1 
 o-v\\ap.pdvftv TO o-neppa. Spec, and me- 
 taph. of irregular desire as exciting to sin, 
 James 1, 15; comp. Sept. and |-nn Ps. 7, 
 15.. So Justin. Mart, de Resurr/ p. 327 
 Eva TOV \6yov dirb TOV o(pas cn>XXa/3oG<ra 
 irapaKorjv Kal Sai/arov ercKe. 
 
 2. to take hold with another, to help, to 
 aid, usually and in N. T. Mid. c. dat. Luke 
 5, 7 eX3uTa? o-vXXa/3eio-3ai auroiy. Phil. 4, 
 3. Sept. Gen. 30, 7. JEl. V. H. 2. 4. Xen. 
 Ag. 2. 31. Act. Hdot. 6. 125. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 3. 18. 
 
 <ruA,Xe f ya>, f. , (Xt yu,) pr. to lay to 
 gether, i. e. to gather, to collect ; e. g. fruits 
 and errain, c. ace. Matt. 7, 16 dnb aKavSiav 
 o-Ta(pv\f)V, CITTO T/H/3oX&>i> <TVKa. Luke 6, 44 
 e axwfc&v o-vKa. Matt. 13, 28. 29. 30. 40 
 &dvia. Genr. TO tls T L Matt. 13,48; rl 
 ( K TIVOS v. 41. Sept. for BJD^ Lev. 19, 9. 
 10. Ruth 2, 3. 7sq. Hdot/1. 68. Luc. 
 Tim. 23. Xen. An. 2. 4. 11 xP TOV - 4 - 3 - 
 1 1 (ppvyava a>s tm irvp. 
 
 avXXo<yi%Piiai. f. iarop.ai, Mid. depon. 
 (\oyiop.ai,) to reckon together, to compute, 
 c. ace, Diod. Sic. 1 . 5. Dem. 355 ult. In 
 N. T. to reason together, to consider, to de 
 liberate; absol. Luke 20, 5 o-weXoyurai/ro 
 -pbs eavTovs, comp. Matt. 21, 25 et Mark 
 
 1,31. Sept. for Part. -|a5 Is. 43, 18. So 
 ol. 1. 44. 1. ib. 1. 63. 8. Plut. Brut. 36. 
 
 co, f. Tjerw, (Xv;re a>,) {f> 
 rieve or afflict with another ; Pass, to be 
 grieved or afflicted with, to condole with ; c. 
 dat. Diod. Sic. 4. 11. Theophr. Char. 1.1. 
 Plato Rep. 462. e. In N. T. Pass, to be 
 rieved withal, i. e. at the same time or 
 along with some other emotion ; Mark 3, 5 
 .VTOVS ptT opyrjs, trvXXu- 
 nov/j.fitos err Tr Trcopcocret TTJS Kapftias avTutv. 
 , f. /Sijo-o/zai, (/9aiVco,) aor. 2 
 v, to go with the feet close together, 
 Xen. Eq. 1. 14. In N. T. of things, events, 
 to come together in time, to happen together, 
 to fall out, to come to pass ; with dat. of 
 pers. to whom, Mark 10, 32 ra /ie XXojra 
 o-vp.fiaivtiv aiiTw. Acts 3, 10. 20, 19. 1 Cor. 
 
 10, 11. 1 Pet. 4, 12. 2 Pet. 2, 22. Part. 
 absol. TO. o-vLipffirjKOTa, things happened, 
 events, Luke 24, 14. Sept. for nip Gen. 
 42, 4. 29. Esth. 6, 13. So 1 Mace. 5, 25. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 17. Part, absol. 1 Mace. 
 4, 26. Diod. Sic. 1. 22. Impers. c. inf. of 
 the principal verb, the infinitive clause be 
 ing strictly the subject ; Acts 21, 35 o-vvf- 
 /3?7 /3acrraeo-3ai avTov, i. e. he was borne ; 
 comp. Buttm. $ 129. 10. Winer 5 45. 2. 
 So 2 Mace. 3, 2. Luc. D. Deor. 20. 8. Pol. 
 1. 22. 3. Diod. Sic. 1. 50. 
 
 crv/J,/3d\\(i), f. /3aX&5, OdXXw,) to throw, 
 send, put together, e. g. of streams flowing 
 together, r. ace. TO vSwp o-v^i/3dXXeii Horn- 
 
 11. 4. 453. Hdot. 4. 50 ; of warriors, TOS ao-nl- 
 8as Xen. Ag. 2. 12. Of persons, to send 
 or bring together, e. g. in strife, Lat. com- 
 mitlere, Horn. II. 3. 70. Xen. Conv. 4. 9. 
 In N. T. 
 
 1 . to throw or put together, pr. with ace. 
 \6yovs or the like implied, like Lat. conferre 
 for conferre sermones, Engl. lo confer 
 together, intrans. a) Genr. i. q. to dis 
 course with, lo dispute wilh, c. dat. Acts 17, 
 18 Tives Se Tt5v (pL\oo~6(j)(av crtW/SaXXoi 
 atiTo). So Jos. Ant. 1. 12. 3 o-v/i/3aXovo-a 
 rroip.fo-i. Jambl. Vit. Pyth. c. 2 Totr eV M/M- 
 (pfi Kai AiotTTToXei p.a\io-Ta o-vufiaXftv iepfv- 
 tri. Fully written (ruju/3. \6yovs TIVI Eurip. 
 Iph. Aul. 830 or 83G. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 21. 
 b) to consult together, Acts 4, 15 o-vvtj3a\ov 
 Trpbs O\\T)\OVS sc. (3ov\(V[j.aTa. So fully 
 Eurip. Phcen. 700 or 755 o-v/i/3. /SotAfv- 
 p.aTa. c) Luke 2, 19 o-v/^SdXXeti/ iv Trj 
 Kapoia sc. TavTa, i. e. to put together in 
 mind, to compare, lo ponder in mind. Comp. 
 Philostr. Vit. Apoll. 4. 43 vp.pa\f~tv TO fl- 
 prjp.evov. Arr. Exp. Alex. 2. 3. 9 TO nav 
 Tflov. Mid. Hdot. 4. 15. 45. 
 
687 
 
 2. Mid. to put together one s own icith 
 another, to contribute, to help ; c. dat. Acts 
 18, 27 o-ufe/3aArro TroXu TOIS ncmcrrfVKoa-t. 
 Wisd. 5, 8. Diod. Sic. 1. 2. Xen. Hell. 7. 
 1.35. 
 
 3. Intrans. or c. eavTo c impl. Buttm. 
 5 130. n. 2. Winer $ 39. 1 ; to cinne together 
 with another, to encounter, to meet with, c. 
 dat. a) In a hostile sense, ds TroXep-oj/ 
 Luke 14, 31. So 2 Mace. 8, 23. Jos. Ant. 
 6. 5. 3 (TVfj.pa\(ov (Is paxfjv. Pol. 10. 37. 4. 
 Xen. Hell. 4. 2. 22. b) Genr. i. q. to 
 meet with, Acts 20, 14 avvfftdXfv fjfuv (is 
 rr)v "A(r<rov. So Jos. Ant. 2. 7. 5. Xen. 
 Cyr. 6. 2. 41. 
 
 av/jL^acriXevco, f. eva-a, (/3ao-iXeuco,) to 
 reign with any one, c. dat. Luc. D. Deor. 
 16. 2. Pol. 30. 2. 4. In N. T. only trop. 
 1 Cor. 4, 8. 2 Tim. 2, 12 ; comp. in ftao-t- 
 \(vo> no. 2. 
 
 <rty/./3/3aa>, f. ao-w, (/3tafa>,) to wiafce 
 come together, to bring together, e. g. 
 
 1 . to join or fcm i together, to unite, trop. 
 of Christians as parts of Christ s spiritual 
 body the church ; Pass. Eph. 4, 16 t ov 
 nav TO erco/ia . . . crvp.ftifta6fj.tvov. Col. 2, 
 1 9 ; eV ayajTT? Col. 2, 2. Genr. Dion Cass. 37. 
 p. 62. Thuc. 2. 29. 
 
 2. to pwi together in mind, and hence 
 praegn. to gather, to infer, to conclude; c. 
 on Acts 16, 10 ; also to prove, to demon 
 strate, c. on, Acts 9, 22 o-v/x/3t/3aj/ on 
 OVTOJ ((rriv 6 Xpicrros. So c. wr Aristot. 
 Rhet. ad Alex. 36 ; c. irfpi Plato Rep. 504. 
 a. See Wetstein N. T. II. p. 109. 
 
 3. From the Heb. to teach, to instruct, c. 
 ace. of pers. I Cor. 2, 16 or o-u/x/3t/3ao-et 
 avroV sc. rov nvpiov, in allusion to Is. 40, 
 13 where Sept. for SJ-Hin ; also Ex. 18, 
 16. Deut. 4, 9; -pnri Is. 40, 14; pppn 
 Ex. 4, 12. Lev. 10, lT 
 
 <rVfM^OV\V(O, f. tvva, (/SouXevo),) lo 
 counsel with any one, to gire counsel, to ad 
 vise; c. dat. John 18, 14 K.a id(pas 6 o-v/i- 
 {$ov\(vu>v TOLS lovbaiois. Rev. 3, 18. Sept. 
 for Y*1 Ex. 18, 19. Jer. 38, 15. So Jos. c. 
 Apion. 1. 34. Luc. Abdic. 5. Xen. Mem. 
 
 1. 3. 13 bis. Mid. spoken of several, to 
 counsel or consult together, e. g. for evil, to 
 jiliil, c. IvOg, Matt. 26, 4 (TVfi^ov\(vcrai>ro, tva 
 TUV \r]<TO\iv Kparr]<ru>ari Xo-yo). John 11, 53 ; 
 c. inf. Acts 9, 23. Sept. for } $" 1 K. 12, 
 8. 2 Chr. 20, 22. So 1 Mace. 9, 59. Pol. 
 
 2. 46. 2. Plato Theag. 122. a. 
 <rvfJ,/3ov\lov, ov, TO, (<rvp.pov\os.) 
 1. a council, melon, counsellors, Acts 25, 
 
 12. Here spoken of persons who sat in 
 public trials with the governor of a pro 
 
 vince ; called also consiliarii Suet. Tiber 
 33 ; assessores Lamprid. Vit. Alex. Sev. 
 c. 46 ; Trapefipoi Dion Cass. p. 505. e. Comp. 
 Jos. B. J. 2. 16. 1. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 
 162. Diet, of Antt. art. Conventus. Genr. 
 Theodot. for TiO Prov. 15, 22. Diod. Sic. 
 13. 12. Plut. de Virtut. mor. 7. p. 221. 
 
 2. counsel, consultation, e. g. Xafi/3awi 
 v. iroifiv <rviiftov\iov, to take counsel, to make 
 or hold a consultation ; so cru/ijS. Xa/j/Samt 
 Matt. 12, 14. 22, 15. 27, 1. 7. 28, 12; 
 o-u/i(3. noidv Mark 3, 6. 15, 1. Comp. 
 o-v/i/3ovXt a Sept. 1 K. 1, 12. Tob. 4, 24. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 4. 
 
 , O v, 6, (<rvv, jSouX^,) a coun 
 sellor, pr. one joined in counsel; Rom. 11, 
 34, in allusion to Is. 40, 13 where Sept. for 
 M T^X. Sept. also for f Si* 2 Sam. 15, 
 12. 1 Chr. 27, 32. 33. Jos. c. Ap. 2. 15. 
 Hdian. 1. 8. 1. Xen. Conv. 8. 39. 
 
 , 6, indec. Simeon, Heb. 
 (a hearkening), pr. n. i. q. Sifjuav. 
 
 1. The second son of Jacob, born of 
 Leah ; also of the tribe descended from him, 
 Rev. 7, 7. See Gen. 29, 33. Jos. Ant. 
 1. 19. 8. 
 
 2. One of the ancestors of Jesus, Luke 
 3, 30. 
 
 3. A pious Jew, who took the infant 
 Jesus in his arms and blessed him in the 
 temple, Luke 2, 25. 34. Some suppose 
 him to be the same with Shammai, Sa/itar, 
 mentioned by Josephus along with Pollio, 
 Ant. 15. 1. 1, et 10. 4 ; others regard him 
 as the R. Simeon, the son of Hillel, mention 
 ed in the Talmud as the father of Gamaliel ; 
 see in ra/xoX;X. But neither of these con 
 jectures has any weight ; see Lightf. Hor. 
 Heb. in Luc. 1. c. Wetst. N. T. I. p. 665. 
 
 4. Simeon, i. q. Simon Peter, elsewhere 
 2t>uj/ q. v. Acts 15, 14. 2 Pet. 1,1. 
 
 5. A Christian teacher at Antioch, sur- 
 named Niger, Acts 13, 1. 
 
 i^,) a fel 
 
 low-disciple, John 11, 16. Plato Euthyd. 
 272. c. Poll. On. 6. 159 nX<mo 6V, o-i/ji- 
 pd$r]Tas (<prj. For some such compound 
 words disapproved by the Atticists, see 
 Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 471. 
 
 CrVfJi/JiClpTVped), &>, f. 7)0-0), (/^apTVpew.) 
 to lear witness with another, to testify with. 
 i. e. at the same time and to the same ef 
 fect ; c. dat. Rom. 8. 16 TO 7rv(vp.a <rvp.fjiap 
 rvpft r< Trv(vfiaTi r]p.<ov, on KT\. 9, 1 ; ab- 
 sol. 2, 15. Rev. 22, 18 Rec. where the bet 
 ter reading is ^lapnipcco. Plut. de Adulat. 
 et Amic. 23. Xen. Hell. 7. 1. 35. 
 
688 
 
 f. t o-a>. (p,eptfo>,) to divide 
 with others, jointly ; in N. T. Mid. to divide 
 with others so as to receive part to oneself, 
 to share with, to partaJce with, c. dat. 1 Cor. 
 9, 13. 
 
 O"y/i/iero^o5, O v, 6, f/, adj. (/tero^o?,) 
 partaking with, Subst. a joint-partaker, 
 Eph. 3, 6. 5, 7. Justin. Mart. Apol. 1. p. 
 
 51 (TUfJ.fJl.fTO^OS TtoV TTdScOl . So 
 
 2 Mace. 5, 20. Xen. An. 7. 8. 17. 
 
 imitator, joint-follower, Phil. 3, 17. On 
 this kind of compounds, see Phryn. et Lob. 
 p. 471. 
 
 (7VfJ,fAOp(f)i(l), f. | (ra>, (<TVp./iOp<pO?,) tO 
 
 make of like form with, to conform, Pass. 
 trop. c. dat. Phil. 3, 10 Lachm. for crvp.p.op- 
 <poa id. 
 
 (rv/J,/JiOp<j)OS, ov, 6, TJ, adj. (fj.op<pr),) 
 having like form ivith, conformed to, like ; 
 c. dat. Phil. 3, 21 TO trw/ia . . . <rvp.fjiop(^ov 
 TO) o &tytan TTJS 86r)s avrov. With gen. 
 Rom. 8, 29 npoonpitrf (rv/x/idp<ovs rrjs eiKo- 
 vos TOV viov avTov. For the gen. after 
 words compounded with o-vv in classic wri 
 ters, see Matth. 379 fin. 
 
 0-V/J,/jLOp(p6c0i , f. coo-o), (o-vp.poptpos, ) 
 to make of like form with another, to con 
 form, Pass. trop. c. dat. Phil. 3, 10. 
 
 criyiTra^yettf, , f. 770-0), (a-u^TraS?^,) to 
 sympathize with, to feel with another, to be 
 affected in like manner ; c. dat. Heb. 4, 15 
 <rv/*7ra3J)crai rais dcr%fi>tiais f)p.u>i>. Przegn. 
 i. q. to have compassion on any one, to af 
 ford sympathizing aid, Heb. 10, 34. Symm. 
 for 1 Job 2, 11. Aristot. Physiog. 4. 1. 
 Plut. Timol. 19. Isocr. p. 64. b. 
 
 tor, ovs, 6, r}, adj. (trvv, 
 ),) sympathizing, feeling with 
 another, like-affected; 1 Pet. 3, 8 crvfjiira- 
 3elf, i. e. the same in feeling, mutually com 
 passionate. Jos. Ant. 19. 7. 3. Plut. de 
 Adulat. et Amic. 9. Pol. 15. 9. 3. 
 
 (rvfjLTrapayivo/jiai, (Ttapaylvo^at.,) to 
 come with any one, to be present with, to 
 stand by any one, as a friend and advocate ; 
 c. dat. 2 Tim. 4, 16 eV 777 irp&rri JJLOV CLTTO- 
 Xoy/a ovo eis /xoi (rv/zTrapeyeWro. Sept. for 
 fW|? Ps. 83, 9. So Dem. 1369. 17. Of a 
 multitude, to come together, to convene, Luke 
 23, 48. So Thuc. 2. 82. 
 
 av[J,7rapaKa\a), &, f. eVco, (irapaKa- 
 Xe co,) to call for or invite with, at the same 
 time, Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 38; to invoke ivith 
 others, ib. 3. 3. 21 ; to exhort with another, 
 e. g. an army, Pol. 5. 83. 3. In N. T. 
 
 Pass, to be consoled, comforted, with others 
 i. e. to receive solace and encouragement 
 in the society of others; Rom. 1, 12 <nip- 
 7TapaK\r)^fivai ev vfuv. See in 
 no. 4. 
 
 aor. 2 -f 
 
 ai/o),) to take along with oneself, 
 as a companion on a journey ; c. ace. Acts 
 12, 25. 15, 37. 38. Gal. 2, 1. Sept. Job 
 1, 4. JEl V. H. 8. 7. Hdian. 2. 2. 2. Plato 
 Phaed. 35. p. 84. d. 
 
 a-V/J,7rapafJ,V(i), f. p. ev ,, (Trapapeva,) 
 to remain along with any one, to continue 
 with, sc. in life; c. dat. Phil. 1, 25. Sept. 
 Ps. 72, 5 (TVfj.irapaii.fVfi T< 17X10). Thuc. 
 6. 89. 
 
 <7VfJ,7rdpeipi,, (irdpeip.i, ) to be present 
 with any one ; c. dat. Acts 25, 24. Jos. 
 Ant. 10. 11. 3. Pol. 9. 25. 6. Xen. Hell. 
 4. 6. 1. 
 
 , f. nfio-opai, (TTOO-XW,) to 
 be affected with or as another, to sympathize 
 with, to suffer with; absol. 1 Cor. 12, 26 tl 
 Tracr^et fv /neXoy, crv/iTraa^ft Trdvra ra /J.f\r]. 
 So Rom. 8, 17, i. q. to endure like suffer 
 ings. Pol. 15. 19. 4. Diod. Sic. 4. 11. 
 Plato Rep. 605. d. 
 
 <n>yU7re/i7r&>, f. \^o), (Tre/iTro),) to send 
 with any one, c. dat. 2 C,or. 8, 22. With 
 /jLtrd c. gen. ib. 8, 18 ; comp. Winer j 56. 
 4 fin. So c. dat. Plut. Artax. 24. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 1. 31 ; c. prr<i Xen. Hell. 1. 4. 21. 
 
 (TVfjiTrepiXafJipdvco, (7repiXap./3di/,) pr. 
 to take around along with something else, 
 
 1. e. to embrace with, to comprehend, to in 
 clude, Dem. 235. 16. Diod. Sic. 14.7. Plato 
 Tim. 74. id. In N. T. to embrace withal, 
 at the same time, Acts 20, 10. 
 
 cry/iTTti tw, aor. 2 crvveinov, (TriVw,) to 
 drink with any one ; c. dat. Acts 10, 41 ot- 
 rivfs &W((pdyop.fv Ka\ crvvfirlo^fv airw, 
 comp. in e o-3/eo no. 2. d. Sept. for OS tinOJ 
 Esth. 7, 1. Dem. 1352. 27. Xen. Cyr/5" 
 
 2. 28. 
 
 ), aor. 2 (rvv(7rt<rov, 
 to fall together, as a house, to fall in ruins ; 
 absol. Luke 6, 49 in Mss. for re<re. Dem. 
 899. 3. Xen. An. 5. 2. 24. 
 
 <TU/i7rX7/-po&>, to, f. 0)0-6), (o-vv intens. 
 TrXijpoeo,) to fill up altogether, to fill wholly, 
 completely. 
 
 1 . Pr. of a vessel filled by the waves so 
 as to drench the persons in it, Pass. Luke 
 8, 23. Of ships as filled out with a crew, 
 Pol. 1 . 36. 9. Xen. Hell. 4. 8. 7. 
 
 2. Of time, Pass, to be fulfilled, complet- 
 
689 
 
 (7V/ji(f)V(0 
 
 ed, to have fully come ; comp. TrXT/pdco no. 
 4. a. Luke 9, 51. Acts 2,. 1. Hdian. 
 7. 4. 2. 
 
 f. , (o- VV) Trviyu,) to choke 
 by pressing together, to suffocate ; hence of 
 plants, to choke, to hinder, c. ace. Mark 4, 
 7 ; trop. Matt. 1 3, 22 f/ aTran; TO! TT\OVTOV 
 (rvp-nvtyfi TOV \oyov. Mark 4, 19. Luke 8, 
 1 4. Also to choke, to smother, in a crowd ; 
 to crowd, to press upon, Luke 8, 42 oi o^Xot 
 o-vveTTviyov avrov. Comp. Mark 5, 24 
 avTov. 
 
 ^,) a fellow- 
 citizen, trop. of Gentile Christians admitted 
 to the privileges of the gospel along with 
 the Jews, Eph. 2, 19. Jos. Ant. 19. 2. 2. 
 JEl. V. H. 3. 44. ^Eschyl. Theb. 605. 
 This form is disapproved by the gramma 
 rians; see Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 172, 471. 
 crvfi7ropevo/j,ai, f. ivo-o^i, Pass.depon. 
 
 1 . t.o go with any one, to accompany, c. 
 dat. Luke 7, 11. 14, 25. 24, 15. Sept. c. 
 fj.(T<i for Heb. nx 7]bn Gen. 13, 5. 14, 24 ; 
 B n Gen. 18, 16. Tob. 5, 8. Xen. An. 
 1/3. 5. 
 
 2. Of a multitude, to come together, to as 
 semble, itpbs avrov Mark 10,1. Sept. for 
 T^fi Job 1, 4. Pol. 5. 75. 1. Plut. Ly- 
 curg 6. 
 
 (TVfJLTTOcnov^ ov, TO, (o-u^7riVa>,) a drink 
 ing together, Lat. compotatio, Sept. for 
 p-i nnda Esth. 7, 7. Xen. Cyr. 8, 4. 13 ; 
 a oanquet. feast, 1 Mace. 16, 16. Jos. Ant. 
 
 7. 14. 6. Xen. Conv. 9. 7. Melon, a ban- 
 queling-hall, Luc. D. Deor. 24. 1 . Xen. Cyr. 
 
 8. 8. 10. In N. T. melon, a banqueling- 
 party, table-yarty ; Mark 6, 39 dvaicXivai 
 Train-as o-u/xTTocria o-vp.no via. i. e. adverbially 
 and distributively, by table-parties ; comp. 
 Gesen. Lehrg. 5 173. b. See in K\HTIO. and 
 espec. in irpavia. 
 
 a-vfATrpeaftvTepos, O v, 6, a fellow-pres 
 byter, co-elder, 1 Pet. 5, 1. See in 
 rtpos no. 2. c. 
 
 , see in o-weo-3i a>. 
 
 aor. 1 a-vvrjVfyKa, 
 
 1. to bear or bring together, to collect, c. 
 ace. Acts 19, 19 trvvtveyxavrfs ras /3//3Xouj. 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 8. 3. Hdot. 7. 152. Xen. An. 
 6. 5. 6. 
 
 2. Intrans. or rather an ace. of thing 
 oeing omitted, to confer, to contribute, to 
 conduce ; and with dat. of pers. to be well, 
 profitable, expedient ; 2 Cor. 8, 1 rorro yap 
 vp.1v o~vp.(pepti. Dat. impl. 1 Cor. 6, 12 ov 
 irdvra a-vp-tptpfi. 10, 23. With inf. as 
 
 44 
 
 subj. c. dat. 2 Cor. 12, 1 ; dat. impl. Matt. 
 19, 10. John 18, 14. Impers. c. dat. et Iva, 
 Matt. 5, 29. 30. 18, 6. John 11, 50. 16, 7. 
 Comp. Buttm. 129. 18. Winer 45. 2. p. 
 266. (So c. dat. Sept. Prov. 19, 10. Luc. 
 D. Mort. 14. 5. Xen. Cyr. 3. 2. 30; inf. et 
 dat. Sept. Esth. 3, 8. Xen. CEc. 13. 2.) 
 PART. Neut. TO o-vp.<p(pov, some good, 
 profit, advantage, 1 Cor. 7, 35. 10, 33. 12, 
 7. Heb. 12, 10. Plur. TO <rvp.<bepovra, things 
 profitable, Acts 20, 20. So 2 Mace. 4, 5. 
 Dem. 209. 7. Plur. Baruch 4, 3. Xen. 
 Conv. 4. 59. 
 
 , ) to speak with another, 
 in the same manner, i. q. to agree with, to 
 assent to; c. dat. Rom. 7, 16 o-vpfapi TO> 
 vo/iw. Dem. 668. 14. Eurip. Hipp. 266. 
 Xen. An. 5. 8. 9. 
 
 ov, 6, f], adj. 
 profitable; Neut.ro o-vp.(bopov as Subst. 
 profit, so Lachm. for TO <rv[j.(p(pov, 1 Cor. 
 7, 35. 10, 33. Xen. Hell. 6. 3. 14. 
 
 cry/i(/>tA,er779, O v, 6, ((pvXerrjs, (pvXij,) 
 pr. one of the same tribe or class, Lat. con- 
 tribulis, Isocr. p. 263. a. Aristoph. Av. 368. 
 In N. T. genr. a fellow-citizen, fellow- 
 countryman, 1 Thess. 2, 14. So Hesych. 
 a-vn(fv\fT<ov o/xoeSfooi . Disapproved of 
 by the grammarians, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 172. 
 Wetst. N. T. in loc. 
 
 <rvfj,<f)VTO<;, ov, 6, 17, adj. (o-i^i5a>,) 
 brought forth together, grown together, 
 Sept. Zech. 11,2. Theophr. Caus. PI. 5. 
 5. 2. Etymol. Mag. ^vpfpvTos 6 crvyyevf]^. 
 Trop. inborn, innate, 3 Mace. 3, 22. Plut. 
 Pyrrh. 7. Lys. 118. 31. In N. T. grown 
 together into one, connate, united, one with. 
 Rom. 6, 5 ft -yap crvfj.(pvroi ytyova/jifv TOJ 
 ofj.oia>pMTi rov 3a>aTOV ai>ToC, dXXa KOI [crv/j.- 
 (pvToi] TTJS dva<TTdo-c<as eVopeSa, for if we 
 are grown together with the likeness of 7n.v 
 death, yea also shall we be [grown togelher] 
 icith his resurrection; for the gen. comp. 
 Plato Phil. 51. d, TOVTCW ^vpfpiiTovs fj8ovai 
 vas. Matlh. 379. fin. Comp. pr. o-vp.- 
 ire(pvK(as grown together, as man and horse 
 in the Centaurs, Luc. D. Mort. 16. 4. Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 3. 18. 
 
 (TV/J,<f)va), f. vo-o), (<puw,) to bring forth 
 togelher, to let spring up or grow togelher, 
 Plato Conv. 192. e. In N. T. only Pass. 
 aor. 2 <rvve<pvT)t>, to spring up or grow 
 togelher ; Luke 8, 7 <rvp,<pvelo-ai al aicaiftai. 
 This is a later form instead of Act. aor. 2 
 o-vv(pw intrans. see in <pvu init. So Philo 
 de Vit. Mos. II. p. 174. 12 17 ^a^/xos KOI 17 
 (Tnopas avTrjs ovat a o-v/i<pvura ijwiSj;. So 
 <rvff(pvv, crvfji7r(<pvKa, Theophr. H. PI. 9. 2. 
 
690 
 
 crvv 
 
 l. V. H. 3. 1 KLTTOS . . . crvp.jre(pvKe rets 
 
 (TVfji<f)(i)ve(i) : >, f. r jcrcc, (a-vpxpcoi oy,) to 
 sound together, to be in unison, accord, pr. of 
 musical instruments, Plato Rep. 617. b. 
 In N. T. trop. to accord with, to agree with, 
 intrans. 
 
 1. Genr. e. g. a) Of what is suitable, 
 congruous, c. dat. Luke 5, 36 T 7roAaia> 
 ov crvufptovfl fTn /SXTj/ia. So Aristot. Polit. 
 7. 15 raCra 8fi jrpbs aXX^Xa crvficpfavdv. 
 b) Of coincidence, concurrence, c. dat. 
 Acts 15, 15 Tovrw crvfjLCpavovcriv ol Xoyot 
 TWI> irpocprjTwv. So Jos. Ant. 10. 7. 2. Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 2. 
 
 2. Of a compact between two or more, to 
 agree together, to make an agreement ; with 
 nfpi c. gen. Matt. 18, 19. Pass. c. dat. 
 Acts 5, 9 Tt ort crvvf<pa>vf)%r) vp.iv, how thai 
 it is agreed upon by you. So Sept. 2 K. 
 12, 8; -rrtpi TIVOS Pol. 2. 15. 5; c. inf. 
 Diod. Sic. 12,80; irpos nva Xen. Hell. 1. 
 3. 8. With dat. of pers. and genit. of price, 
 Matt. 20, 13 ov^t fyvapiov crvvfCpavrjcrds 
 fioi ; Buttm. J 132. 10. c. With v-trd TIVOS 
 and fK c. gen. of price, Matt. 20, 2. So 
 Act. Thorn. J 2 crvvfCptavrj Se p.fT avrov rpi- 
 <av \irp5>v dpyvpiov. 
 
 <7fyU-^)Ct)V7/crt9, fas, 17, (crvfj.cpwfa), ) an 
 agreeing together, accord; 2 Cor. 6, 15 ris 
 Be crvp.(f>a>vT)cris XptoraJ Trpos BeXiaX. 
 Comp. a-vfjt^wvia Jos. c. Ap. 2. 16 pen. 
 Hdian. 3. 13. 8. 
 
 (TVfJ,(f)(i)Vl,a, as, fj, (crvp-cpaveo),) sym 
 phony, a concert of instruments, music, 
 Luke 15, 25. Sept. Dan. 3, 5. 10. Pol. 
 26. 10. 5. Aristot. Polit. 7. 15. 
 
 (TV/J.<f)a)VO l >, ov, 6, f), adj. (crvv, fpcavrj, ) 
 symphonious, in unison, pr. of sounds, musi 
 cal instruments, Luc. Harmonid. 1. Plut. 
 Conjug. Praec. 11. Plato Legg. 812. d. In 
 N. T. trop. con sonant, accordant ; Neut. TO 
 crvp.cp(ovov as Subst. accord, agreement, 
 1 Cor. 7, 5 eVc crvp.(pa)vov. So Pol. 6. 36. 
 5; genr. Diod. 6. 11. Epict. Ench. 49. 3. 
 Plato Lach. 188. d. 
 
 ), f. tVw, (^^t fw,) to reckon 
 together, to compute, e. g. rds rip.ds Acts 
 19, 19. Mid. to vote with, Aristoph. Ly- 
 sist. 142. 
 
 trvf^yx^ ov > > *i> acl J- (<"> ^"Mp 
 
 of one mind ivith others, like-minded, Phil. 
 2, 2. Polemo 2. 54. Comp. Tittm. Syn. N. 
 T. p. 67. 
 
 crvv, prep, governing only the Dative, 
 with, implying a nearer and closer connec 
 tion and conjunction than ^era; much as 
 
 with in Engl. differs from mid, amid, among 
 See Passow. s. v. Matth. 577. Winer 52. 
 b. Tittm. Syn. N. T. p. 176. 
 
 1. Pr. of society, companionship, consort, 
 where one is said to be, do, suffer WITH 
 any one, in connection and company with 
 him ; comp. in /xera I. 2. a. So after verbs 
 of sitting, standing, being, remaining, with 
 any one; as uvaKftpai John 12, 2 in latei 
 editions; yivopai Luke 2, 13; Siarpipo 
 Acts 14, 28 ; torij/u intrans. Acts 2, 14. 4, 
 14 ; tyitrrrip.1 intr. Luke 20, 1. Acts 23, 27 ; 
 Ka2i co Acts 8, 31 ; pri/w Luke 1, 56. 24, 
 29. Acts 28, 16. Spec, dvai a-vv TIW, 
 to be with any one, i. e. present with, in 
 company with, Luke 24, 44. Phil. 1, 23. 
 Col. 2, 5. 1 Thess. 4, 17 <rvv Kvpin, 2 Pet. 
 1, 18; with flvai impl. Luke 8, 1. Acts 21, 
 29. Phil. 4, 21. Or as accompanying, fol 
 lowing, Luke 7, 12. Acts 13,7. 27,2; as 
 a follower, disciple, Luke 8, 38. 22, 56. 
 Acts 4, 13 ; as a partisan, to be on one s 
 side, Acts 14, 4 bis. (Xen. An. 1. 8. 26. Hell. 
 
 3. 1. 18 fin.) So oi crvv rivt ovres, 
 those with any one, his companions, attend 
 ants, followers ; fully Mark 2, 26. Acts 22, 
 9. Oftener with part. <5>i/, ovrts impl. Luke 
 5, 9. 8, 45 in later edit. 9, 32. 24, 10. 24. 
 33. Rom. 16, 14. 15. Gal. 1, 2. 2, 3 
 spoken of colleagues, Acts 5, 17. 21. 19 
 38. So Hdian. 5. 4. 11. Plut. Mor. II. p. 
 40. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 15. Anab. 2. 2. 1. 
 After verbs of going with any one ; e. g. 
 ep^o/iai and its compounds, Luke 24, 1. 
 John 21, 3. Acts 11, 12. 2 Cor. 9, 4; 
 cLTrepxp^ai. Acts 5, 26 ; (la-tp^op.ai. Acts 3, 
 8. 25,23 ; e e pxA Acts 10, 23. 14, 20. 
 16, 3. John 18, 1 ; crui/e p^o/xai Acts 21, 
 16. Also TToptvofjiai Luke 7, 6. Acts 10, 
 20. 23, 32. 26, 13. 1 Cor. 16, 4; tla-uvai 
 Acts 21, 18; eKTrXew 18, 18; TrapayiVo/zat 
 24, 24 ; o-vvdyofjLai 4, 27. So Hdian. 2. 14. 
 1. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 13. Hell. 3. 1. 18 init. 
 Genr. with neuter and passive verbs, like 
 Engl. with, where the verb refers to its sub 
 ject as in company with others. Matt. 26, 
 35 KO.V 8erj p.f crvv croi dncftavflv. 27, 38. 
 Tore crTavpovvrai crvv avrca 8vo \rjcrTat. 
 Mark 9, 4 ojcpSrj avrols H\ias crvv Mcavcrtl. 
 Luke 2, 5 a7roypd\^aa3at crvv Mapta/t TX. 
 22, 14. 23, 32. Acts 1,14 bis. v. 17 Rec. 
 v. 22 p-dprvpa yevecr Sai crvv rjfuv. Acts 3, 4. 
 
 4, 27. 14, 5 wy 8e tjfvero op/t?) TO>I> . . . 
 lovSauoz/ crvv rols ap-^ovcriv. 8, 20. 15, 22 
 f8of rols aTToerroXofr . . . crvv o\rj rfj fKK\rj- 
 cria. 17, 34. 18, 8. 20, 36. 21, 24. 26. 
 1 Cor. 1, 2. 11, 32. 2 Cor. 1, 1. Eph. 3, 
 18. 4, 31. Phil. 1, 1. 2, 22. Col. 3, 3. 4. 
 1 Thess. 4, 17 a/*a crvv avrois dpnayr)cr6fi.t- 
 
avvaja) 
 
 691 
 
 So. 5, 10. So Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 30. An. 1. 9. 
 2. Also with transitive verbs, like Engl. 
 with, where the verb refers either to its sub 
 ject or object as in company with others ; 
 e. g. to the subject, Mark 4, 10 t]pd>Tr)o-av 
 nvTov ol Trepi O.VTOV, o~vi> rots 8&8fK.a. Luke 
 5, 19. 19, 23. 23, 11. 35. Acts 5, 1. 10, 2. 
 14, 13. 21, 5. 1 Cor. 16, 19. To the ob 
 ject, Matt. 25, 27 eKo/no-dpr/i/ av TO ep,6i> 
 o-vv TOKco. Mark 8, 34. 1 5, 27 KOI o~vv av- 
 TO> trravpovcri 8vo X^crrdy. Acts 15, 22 
 7r>^at. v. 25. 23, 15. [16, 32.] 1 Cor. 10, 
 13. 2 Cor. 1, 21. 4, 14. Gal. 5, 24. Col. 3, 
 9. 4, 9. 1 Thess. 4, 14. So with obj. Pa- 
 heph. 31. 10. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 7. 
 
 2. Trop. of connection, consort, as arising 
 from likeness of doing or suffering, from a 
 common lot or event, with, i. q. in like man 
 ner with, like ; Rom. 6, 8 ei 5e ci7ro3dpop.e v 
 vvv XpiorcB. 8, 32. 2 Cor. 1 3, 4. Gal. 3, 
 9 fv\oyovvrai o~vv TW TTIOTO) AjBpad/j,, i. e. 
 with and like Abraham, by the same acts 
 and in the same manner. Col. 2, 13. 20. 
 So CS Sept. /xerd Ps. 106, 6. Ecc. 2, 16. 
 
 3. Of connection arising from possession, 
 die being furnished or entrusted with any 
 ^hing. 1 Cor. 15, 10 f] x<*P ls TOV 3eo ^ *1 ( " 
 <p.ot, i. q. 17 8o3ei<rd pot in Rom. 12, 3. 6. 
 2 Cor. 8, 19 rwtB*iPJfOftn TOV d8e\(f)6v ... 
 ff~i< v TTJ xdpiri ravTTj, i- e. entrusted with this 
 gift. (Psalt. Sal. 7, 4 uTroo-TfiX^r ^avarov 
 <TVV eVroXf;.) James 1, 11 cive reiXe yap 6 
 17X10? o~vv r<u Kavcrtavi. Horn. Od. 24. 193. 
 Xen. Conv/2. 22. Cyr. 1. 2. 4. 
 
 4. Implying a joint-working, co-opera 
 tion, and thus spoken of a means, instru 
 ment, with, through, by virtue of; 1 Cor. 5, 
 4 <rvv 777 8vvdfj.fi. TOV Kvpiov I. Xp. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 7. 13. Conv. 5. 13. 
 
 5. Implying addition, accession, like Engl. 
 with. i. q. besides, over and above ; Luke 24, 
 21 dXAd ye trvv navi TOVTOIS TpiTTjv TOVTTJV 
 fjfjLtpav ayfi o-rjpfpov, with (besides) all this. 
 Comp. Heb. "TJ CS Sept. o-vv TOVTOIS Neh. 
 5, 18. 3 Mace. 1, 22. 
 
 NOTE. In composition <rvv implies : a) 
 Society, companionship, consort, in time or 
 place, with, together, Lat. con- ; also there 
 with, withal ; e. g. <rvvdya>, o-vvt arnica, o-vyicd- 
 Sqpai. b) Completeness of an action, al- 
 to<reiher, on every side, wholly, and is thus 
 intensive ; e. g. o-upTrXr/pdo), o-vy<dXvnTOi. 
 
 a-vvdyco. f. o>, (ayw,) 1 . to lead or bring 
 together, to gather together, to collect, either 
 persons or things, c. ace. Matt. 22, 10 o-vv- 
 fjyayov irdvras oarovs (vpov. Luke 15, 13 
 avvayayuiv airavra. John 6, 12 TO. K\do~fuiTa. 
 15, 6. Rev. 13, 10 alx^u^o-iav crvvdyt i, i. q. 
 to bring together captives, to lead captive. 
 
 With ace. impl. Matt. 13, 47 
 
 Travros yevovs crvvayayova-j]. Matt. 25, 24. 
 
 26. John 6, 13, comp. 12. Sept. for C]OX 
 Ex. 23, 10. Num. 19, 9. 10. So JEl V. 
 H. 4. 14. Diod. Sic. 3. 56. Xen. Mem. 4. 
 
 2. 8. An. 3. 4. 31. Elsewhere with ad 
 juncts, e. g. (Is c. ace. of place, Matt. 3, 
 12 (rvvdfi TOV triToi/ OVTOV fls TTJV diro^r]K.riv. 
 6, 26. 13, 30. Luke 3, 17. John 11, 52 ra 
 TfKva els ev, i. e. into one family, church. 
 (Heraclit. C. 19 TOVS o-rropd8nv OLKOVVTOS fls 
 (v crvvayflv. Dion. Hal. Ant. 2. 45.) So 
 tls final, John 4, 36 ; e Ket, TTOV, Luke 12, 
 
 17. 18; p. era TIVOS Matt. 12, 30. Luke 
 11, 23. 
 
 2. Of persons, an assembly, multitude, 
 i. q. to assemble, to convene, to convoke. 
 a) With ace. Matt. 2. 4 o-vvayay<av ndvras 
 TOVS dp^tepeis KT\. John 11,47. Acts 14,27. 
 15, 30. Also with liri TWO. against anyone 
 Matt. 27, 27; tls TOV TOTTOV Rev. 16, 16; 
 els TToXe/ioi; Rev. 16, 14. 20, 8. Sept. 
 genr. for C]OS Ex. 3, 16. 1 Sam. 5, 11. So 
 Hdian. 4. 3. 11. JE1. V. H. 3. 19. Xen. An. 
 
 I. 3. 9 ; an army Palaeph. 8. 4. Xen. Ag. 1. 
 25. b) Pass, or Mid. to be gathered to- 
 gellier, to be assembled, to come together, 
 Matt. 22, 41 o~vvr)yp,evcav 8f T>V <I>apia aia>i . 
 
 27, 17. Mark 2, 2. Luke 22, 66. Acts 13, 
 44. 15, 6. 20, 7. 1 Cor. 5, 4. Rev. 19, 19. 
 Sept. for t)0a Deut. 33, 5. Neh. 8, 3. 
 (Plut. Mor. II. p. 31.) With adjuncts of 
 place, etc. e/nTrpoo-Se i/ TIVOS Matt. 25, 32 ; 
 eVi TO auro, Matt. 22, 34. Acts 4, 26; 
 eiri Tiva, to any one Mark 5, 21, also 
 against any one Acts 4, 27. (Sept. Gen. 
 34, 30.) So el s c. ace. of place, Matt. 26. 
 
 3. Acts 4, 5; tls final Matt. 18, 20. Rev. 
 
 19, 17; tv c. dat. of place, Acts 4, 27. 31. 
 
 II, 26; p-erd TIVOS Matt. 28, 12; Trpds 
 Tiva, to any one, Matt. 13, 2. 27, 62. Mark 
 
 4. 1. 6,30. 7,1; e/<ei, OTTOV, ov, Mutt. 
 
 18. 20. 26, 57. John 18, 2. 20, 19. Acts 
 
 20, 8. Spoken also of eagles, c. Vcei Matt. 
 24, 28. Luke 17, 37. 
 
 3. From the Heb. pr. to lead or take with 
 oneself, into one s house, to receive to one s 
 hospitality and protection, like Heb. 5)OX 
 ^ . Matt. 25, 35 fvos rjp-fjv, KCU cnu^ydyert 
 p,e. v. 38. 43. So Sept. for ^X t)OX Dent. 
 22, 2. Josh. 2, 18. Judg. 19, 15. 18. 
 
 crvvayatyri, f/s, ^, (o-wdy<a,) a collecting, 
 gathering, as of fruits, Pol. 1. 17. 9; of 
 people, tribes, Pol. 4. 7. 6 ; a mass, multi 
 tude, as collected, e. g. Xi Swv Sept. Job 8, 
 17 ; vSaro? Is. 37, 25 ; or of persons, as 
 the congregation of Israel, Sept. Ex. 12, 3. 
 
 19. Lev. 4, 13. Ecclus. 24, 25. 1 Mace, 
 
692 
 
 14, 28 ; or an army, Ex. 32, 22. 23. 38, 4. 
 15. Hence in N. T. an assembly, congre 
 gation, synagogue; spoken 
 
 1. Of a Christian assembly or church, 
 James 2, 2. 
 
 2. Of a Jewish assembly, synagogue, 
 held in the synagogues, for prayer, reading 
 the scriptures, and with certain judicial pow 
 ers ; comp. in no. 3. Luke 8, 41. 12,11. 21, 
 12 Trapa8i86vTfs [vp,as] fls crvvayuyas KCU 
 (pvXajcdy. Acts 9, 2 eVioroXar TTpos ras a~vv- 
 ayayds. 13,43. 22,19. 26,11. So Hist. 
 of Sus. 41. 60, comp. v. 4. 28. Also Rev. 
 2, 9 et 3, 9 o-vvaywyr] Sarai/d, the synagogue 
 of Satan, Satan s assembly ; spoken of Jews 
 who slander the Christian church ; who, 
 professing to be true Jews and to worship 
 God, are not so, but worship Satan ; comp. 
 Rom. 2, 29. Others understand Judaizing 
 teetchers ; but they are not spoken of as 
 being in the church. Comp. Sept. a-vva- 
 ycoyf] TrovTjpevop-fvcov for Heb. n"l2J Ps. 22, 
 7; comp. Ecclus. 16, 6. 21, 9. 
 
 3. Meton. of a Jewish place of worship, 
 a synagogue, later Heb. P>D33D nig house of 
 assembly, comp. Buxt. Lex. Chald. Rab. 
 1055. Synagogues appear to have been 
 first introduced during the Babylonish exile, 
 when the people were deprived of their 
 usual rites of worship, and were accustom 
 ed to assemble on the sabbath to hear por 
 tions of the law read and expounded. After 
 the return from exile the same custom was 
 continued in Palestine ; comp. Neh. 8, 1 sq. 
 Originally synagogues would seem not to 
 have differed from the later proseuchcc, see 
 in Trpoo-eux ? no. 2 ; being erected without 
 the cities in the fields, and usually near a 
 stream or on the sea-shore for the conve 
 nience of ablution. Afterwards they were 
 built in the more elevated parts of every 
 city, and in the larger cities there were 
 several, in proportion to the population. In 
 Jerusalem, according to the Rabbins, were 
 not less than 480 or 494. Assemblies were 
 held in these at first only on the sabbath 
 and festival days ; but subsequently also on 
 the second and fifth days of the week, i. e. 
 Mondays and Thursdays. The exercises 
 consisted chiefly in prayers and the public 
 reading of the O. T. which was expounded 
 from the Hebrew into the vernacular tongue, 
 with suitable exhortation ; comp. Luke 4, 
 16 sq . Acts 13, 14 sq. The whole was 
 closed by a short prayer and benediction, to 
 which the assembly responded Amen, Neh. 
 8, 6. Comp. generally, Vitringa de Syna- 
 goga Vet. Lightfoot Hor. Heb. ad Matt. 4, 
 23. Wetst. N. T. I. p. 278. Winer Realw. 
 
 art. Synagogen. So Matt. 4, 23. 6, 2. 5. 
 9, 35. 10, 17. 12, 9. 13, 54. 23, 6. 34. 
 Mark 1, 21. 23. 29. 39. 3, 1. 6, 2. 12, 39. 
 13, 9. Luke 4, 15. 16. 20. 28. 33. 38. 44. 
 6, 6. 7, 5. 11, 43. 13, 10. 20, 46. John 6, 
 59. 18, 20. Acts 9, 20. 13, 14. 14, 1. 15, 
 21. 17,17. 18,4.7.19.26. 19,8. 24,12; 
 a-vvayuyf) TU>V Iov8aia>v Acts 13, 5. 42. 17, 
 1 . 10; or. T>V A-ifieprivaiv Acts 6, 9, see in 
 Ai/3eprZi/os. Jos. Ant. 19. 6. 3. B. J. 2. 14. 
 
 4, 5. ib. 7. 3. 3. 
 
 l&fjiai, f. io-opai, Mid. depon 
 tfrp.ai., ) to contend along with, to com. 
 bat with, in company with, e. g. in the gym 
 nasia, Ml. V. H. 12. 43 ; genr. Jos. Ant. 
 
 5. 3. 3. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 49. In N. T. to 
 strive earnestly along with, to wrestle along 
 with, c. dat. Rom. 15, 30 owaywiotsoSku 
 P.OI fv rais Trpocrfv^cus. So Jos. Ant. 12. 
 2. 2. Dion. Hal. Ant. 7. 16. Diod. Sic. 
 1. 21. 
 
 <rvva&Xea), , f. faa, (daXew,) to con 
 tend along with any one, on his side ; only 
 trop. to strive with, together with, i. q. to 
 help, to aid, c. dat. Phil. 4, 3 lv ro> evayye- 
 Xi a> crwTjSX^o-oV /xot. Also mutually, to 
 strive together for any thing, c. dat. corn- 
 modi, rfj irtoTfL Phil. 1, 27. Trop. in a 
 diff. sense Diod. Sic. 3. 4. 
 
 : f. oi o-G), (d3pot, dSpdor,) 
 to gather together, in a heap, e. g. things, 
 Jos. Ant. 10. 4. 3. In N. T. of persons, 
 to gather together, to assemble ; c. ace. Acts 
 19, 25 re \virais . . . ovs avvc&poicras. Pass. 
 Luke 24, 33. Acts 12, 12. Sept. for Vnp? 
 Num. 20, 2 ; Y^ 2 Sam - 2 > 25. 30. So 
 Jos. B. J. 4. 11. 4. Pol. 3. 50. 3. Xen. An. 
 7. 2. 8. 
 
 crvvaipw, f. ap, (atpw,) to take up to 
 gether, Plut. Lysand. 15. Sympos. 3. 10. 3 ; 
 to help, to aid, as if in taking up and bear 
 ing a burden, c. dat. Jos. Ant. 17. 4. 2 <rvv- 
 rfpev avTais. Dem. 1449. 14. Thuc. 4. 10. 
 In N. T. only crvvaipeiv \6yov /nerd 
 TIVOS, to take up an account with any one, 
 for adjustment, i. q. to reckon together, Matt. 
 18, 23. 24. 25, 19. So Etym. Magn. wd- 
 pacr3ru 
 
 a fellow-prisoner, Rom. 16, 7. Col. 4, 10. 
 Philem. 23. 
 
 ), w, f. fja-o, (dKoXov3eo>,) 
 to follow with, along ivith, to accompany, 
 c. dat. Mark 5, 37. Luke 23, 49. 2 Mace. 
 2. 4. Plut. Demetr. 36. Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 5. 
 
 <7fZ/aA.l&>, f. I crcB, (dXi fw, dXijr, i. q. 
 s,) to gather together, in a heap, e. g. 
 
093 
 
 things, Jos. Ant. 8. 4. 1 TO. crKfvr) ndvra 
 <rvva\i<ras. In N. T. of persons, to gather 
 together, to assemble, Pass. Acts 1, 4 a-vva- 
 \t6fj.(i>os TrapfjyyeiKfv avTois. So Jos. B. J. 
 3. 9. 4. Luc. de Luct. 7. Xen. Cyr. 7. 3. 
 48. Act. Hdot. 1. 176. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 14. 
 
 (TVVa\\d<T<T(D, f. o), (dXXucnra>,) to 
 change by bringing together, to bring toge 
 ther, to reconcile, c. ace. Acts 7, 26 Lachm. 
 <TvvrjK\a<T<Tfv avrovs (Is tipr]in]v, for Rec. 
 crvvi]\a<rv. ^Eschyl. Sept. C. Th. 579. 
 Thuc. 1. 24. 
 
 (Twavafiaiva), aor. 2 ovvepnv, (dva- 
 ^atVo).) to go up with any one, from a lower 
 to a higher part of a country ; c. dat. Mark 
 15, 41. Acts 13, 31. Sept. for M^ Ex. 12, 
 38. 1 Esdr. 8, 27. JEl. V. H. 3. 17. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 3. 18. 
 
 crvvavatceifMai, f. eiVo/wu, (dvd.Kftp.ai, ) 
 to recline with any one at table, i. q. to eat 
 with, to dine or sup with, see in dvaKfip-ai 
 no. 2 ; c. dat. Matt. 9, 10 a-waveKnvro TW 
 Irjo-ov. Mark 2, 15. Luke 14, 10. John 12, 2\ 
 Part, absol. of (TvvavaK.fip.fvoi., guests, Matt. 
 14, 9. Mark 6, 22. 26. Luke 7, 49. 14, 15. 
 3 Mace. 5, 39. 
 
 a-vvavafAiyvvfu, f. <a, (/xi yw/u,) to 
 mix up together ; Pass, or Mid. crvvavap-i- 
 yw^iai, to mingle together with, trop. to have 
 intercourse or keep company with, c. dat. 
 
 1 Cor. 5, 9 p.rj a"uvavap.[yvv(r^ai. iropvois. v. 1 1. 
 
 2 Thess. 3, 14. Sept. for ^3nf? Hos. 7,8. 
 Plut. Philopoem. 21. So a-vp.p.iyvvp.1, 
 Dem. 885. 8 a-vup-i^ai novnpois at>3pa>7rotr. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 20. 
 
 crvvavaTrava), f. auo-w, (dvairavo.) Mid. 
 to refresh oneself or be refreshed with any 
 one, in his company ; c. dat. Rom. 15, 32 ; 
 comp. ava-rrava no. 2. So to sleep with, 
 c. dat. Plut. de tuend. sanit. Praec. 6. 
 
 (TWaVTClW) f. rj(Td), (diTuo), dirt,) to 
 
 come together over against one another, to 
 meet together, to meet with, to encounter. 
 
 1. Pr. c. dat. Luke 9, 37 a-vvTjVTTja-fv 
 ai>T<S oxXor TroXvf. 22, 10. Acts 10, 25. 
 Heb. 7, 1. 10. Sept. for fTjpj Num. 23, 16 ; 
 133B Gen. 32, 17 ; S5B Gen. 32, 1. Hdian. 
 1. 17. 8. Xen. An. 7. 2. 5. 
 
 2. Trop. of things, events, to happen to 
 any one, to befall, c. dat. Acts 20. 22 ra . . . 
 <rvvavrr](TovTu. p.oi p.f] flfttas- Sept. and rnp 
 Ecc. 2, 14. 9, 11. 
 
 crwaVTrfCTL^, ea>s, rj, (o-wacrda),) a 
 meeting with ; in N. T. only in the phrase 
 fls <ruvdtTT)o-iv, for meeting with, used for 
 thqBJnfin. crvvavrav, to meet with, c. dat. 
 Matt. 8, 34. So Sept. for rvnpb NS^ 
 
 Gen. 14, 17. Ex. 18, 7. So Plut. Pyrrh 
 16 init. Genr. Dion. Hal. Ant. 4. 66. En- 
 rip. Jon. 535 [547]. 
 
 a-vvavTi\afj,/3dva), f. X^o/iat, (dvrt- 
 Xa/*/3ci &>,) only Mid. (rvvaiTi\ap.^dvofj.ai, to 
 take hold in turn with any one, to lay hold 
 along with, i. q. to help, to aid, c. dat. Luke 
 
 10, 40. Rom. 8, 26. Sept. for "pas Ps. 89, 
 22 ; Nto3 Ex. 18, 22. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. -1. 
 Diod. Sic. 14. 8. 
 
 crvvaTrd ya), f. a , (an-aya,) to lead oj 
 or away with any one, c. dat. of pers. Sept. 
 for npb Ex. 14, 6. Achill. Tat. 7. p. 419. 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 23 ; comp. Wetst. N. T. 
 
 11. p. 81. In N. T. only Pass. trop. to be 
 led or carried away with any thing ; mostly 
 in a bad sense, to be led astray, c. dat. Gal. 
 2, 13 wore Acat Bapvd/3as <rvvairr]x%T] avru>v 
 TTJ vTToicpio-fi. 2 Pet. 3, 17. Also in a good 
 sense, Rom. 12, 16 pfj ra i^Xa fypovovv- 
 res, aXXa TOLS rajreivois <Tvi>cmay6p.fvoi, not 
 minding high things, but led away by lowly 
 things, i. e. not withdrawing yourselves 
 from lowly things in behalf of one another, 
 cultivating humility. Some here take ra- 
 nfivoiy as masc. being conformed to the 
 lowly ; but contrary to the antithesis with 
 
 , aor. 2 o-w 
 
 >,) to die with any one ; c. dat. 
 Mark 14, 31 idv /Lie 8(rj (rvvcmo Savf im eroi. 
 2 Cor. 7, 3. Trop. of dying with Christ, 
 i. e. spiritually, in the likeness of his death, 
 2 Tim. 2, 11 ; comp. trvv no. 2. Ecclus. 
 19, 10. Diod. Sic. 17. 28. Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 22. 
 a-vva,7r6\\vpi, f. oXeVw, (aTroXXv/ii,) 
 to destroy with or together, c. ace. et dat. 
 Sept. for !1BO Gen. 18, 23; impl. Plut. 
 Phoc. 2. Dem. 917. 14. In N. T. Mid. or 
 Pass, to be destroyed with any one, to perish 
 with others, c. dat. Heb. 11, 31 Paa/3...ou 
 (Tui/aTrajXero rolr a7Ti3ij(ra(ri. Sept. for 
 nsG3 Gen. 19, 15. So Ecclus. 8, 15. 
 Hdot. 7. 221. Plato Lys. 221. b. 
 
 0-fra7TOCTTXA,6l>, f. (\S>, (aTTOoWXXo),) 
 
 to send off or away with any one, in compa 
 ny, c. ace. 2 Cor. 12, 18. Sept. for nbd 
 Ex. 33, 2. 22. 1 Esdr. 5, 2. Dem. 53. 5*. 
 Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 4. 
 
 crvvap/J,o\oye(0, i, f. TJO-W, (dp^oXoyew ; 
 dp/io v, Xoyoj,) to joint together, to Jit orframt 
 together, to join together parts fitted to each 
 other ; Pass. Eph. 2, 21 irda-a OI KO&O/^ <rvv- 
 apfj.6\oyovfj.fvrj. 4, 16. 
 
 avvapTrdfa, f. da-a>. (apndfa,) Lat. cor- 
 ripere, to seize or grasp altogether, to seize 
 or catch with the notion of haste and greal 
 
694 
 
 violence ; stronger than dpTrdfa, from the 
 idea of grasping all around ; comp. in o-vX- 
 Xapftdvu) no. 1. a) Of persons, e. g. a 
 multitude or mob seizing individuals, c. ace. 
 Acts 6, 12. 19, 29 ; of a demon seizing 
 violently one possessed Luke 8, 29. Sept. 
 for npb Prov. 6, 25. So Philo de Plant. 
 N. p. 219. e, oXoi/ rov vovv VTTO Sei ay Karoxrjs 
 vvvapTraa^fiy ourrpw. Luc. D. Deor. 8 h n. 
 /cat fjfir) crvvapTrdcra> avrrjv SC. Minerva. Pol. 
 5. 41. 9. Hdian. 7. 1. 20. b) Of things, 
 as a ship caught by a tempest, Pass. Acts 
 27, 15. Comp. Soph. Elect. 1150 iravra 
 yap vvapTrdo as SueXXa. So dwip7rdecr3ai 
 vrr dvtfJLOv Thuc. 6. 104. 
 
 avvav\io/ji,ai, f. tVo/xai, Mid. depon. 
 (avXt bp,) to pass the night with any one, 
 to lodge or remain with, Acts 1 , 4 in Mss. 
 for o-waXtd/zei/os. Sept. Prov. 22, 24, Heb. 
 
 xia. 
 
 avvavdva) : f. 770-6), (atidi/o>,) to make 
 grow with, to augment withal, at the same 
 time, 2 Mace. 4, 4. Pol. 10. 35. 5. Plut. 
 Philopcem. 1. In N. T. Mid. avvavt;dvofj.ai, 
 intrans. to grow together, in company, Matt. 
 13, 30. So Dem. 107. 27. Hdian. 1. 12. 8. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 6. 
 
 <rL>vSecryu,o9j ov, 6, (o-wSew.) what binds 
 together, a band, bond, copula; Col. 2, 19 
 bid ru>v d(pu>i> KOI (rvv8ea-p,a>v. Trop. Eph. 
 4, 3. Col. 3, 14 TT)v dydirrjv, fjrts (crT\ <rvv- 
 dfo-pos rfjs T(\fi6-rrjTos, i. e. which binds to 
 gether all the Christian graces into one per 
 fect whole ; comp. Simplic. in Epict. p. 
 208, KerXcos 01 HvSayopeiot irepia-a-cos T>V 
 aXXwv dpfT&v rr/v (pi\iav trifMtV, KOI crvv- 
 Setr/xoi avrrjv Tracraiv raiv apt-rav cXcyoP. 
 So Sept. Dan. 5, 6. 13. Plut. Numa 6. Plato 
 Rep. p. 616. c. Trop. Acts 8, 23 els . . . 
 a"uv8f<rp.ov TTJS dStK/ay dpa> (re OVTO, I per 
 ceive thai thou art (fallen) into the bond of 
 iniquity, an emblem of the bondage of the 
 wicked ; see in eis no. 4. Comp. Sept. Is. 
 58,6. 
 
 avvSea), f. Sqo-w, (6Vo>,) to bind together, 
 Sept. Judg. 15, 4. Plut. Marcel! . 14. Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 2. 32. In N. T. of persons, to bind 
 together with ; Pass, to be bound or in bonds 
 with any one, dat. impl. Heb. 13, 3 a>s o-w- 
 fieSf/ieVot, i. e. as fellow-prisoners. So Jos. 
 Ant. 2. 5. 3 <rw8e Servos rw olvoxda>. Luc. 
 D. Deor. 17. 2. Xen. Hell/2. 4. 8. 
 
 (ruvSo^d^Ci), f. da-co, (&odo>,) to glorify 
 with any one, i. e. to exalt in dignity and 
 glory with or as another ; Pass. Rom. 8, 17. 
 
 o-wSouXo?, ou, 6, (SovXos,) a fellow- 
 slave, fellow-servant. The Atticists prefer 
 y, Thorn. Mag. p. 649 o 
 
 ArriKoV, ov a-vv8ov\os. Poll. On. 3. SSL 
 Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 471. 
 
 1. Pr. of involuntary service, Matt. 24, 
 
 49 TVTTTflV TOVS O~w8oi>\OVS OVTOV. - Eurfp. 
 
 Med. 64. Aristoph. Pac. 745. Hdot. 2. 134. 
 
 2. Of voluntary service, spoken of the 
 followers and ministers of Christ, as fellow- 
 servants together of Christ, Rev. 6, 11. 19, 
 10. 22, 9 ; espec. of teachers, a colleague, 
 Col. 1,7. 4, 7. Also of the attendants of 
 a king, the officers of an oriental court, 
 Matt. 18, 28. 29. 31. 33 ; comp. v. 23. So 
 Sept. for m 133 colleagues Ezra 4, 7. 9. 5, 
 3.6. 
 
 crvvbpofir], fj s , ^ 
 
 ,) a running together, concourse, Acts 
 21, 30. Judith 10, 18. Pol. 1. 67. 2. Diod. 
 Sic. 13. 87. 
 
 f. epai, (e yeipa),) to wake or 
 raise up together with any one, from the 
 dead, as Christians spiritually in the like 
 ness of Christ s resurrection, c. dat. Eph. 
 2, 6 KCU trvvrjyfipe sc. rjp.ds rw Xpicrrw (as 
 v. 5). Col. 3, 1 ; dat. impl. 2, 12. Pr. to 
 raise or lift up, Jos. de Mace. 3 rd TreTrrw- 
 jcdra. Phocylid. 132 KTTJVOS t^SJpoto. Trop. 
 Plut. Consol. ad Apoll. 30 rds \vnas KO.I 
 TOVS Spyvovs a-vveyfipfiv. 
 
 , ov, TO, (cnWSpos, edpa,) a 
 sitting together, an assembly, consensus, 
 Sept. for B^nn PS. 26, 4. Jos. Ant. 17. 3. 1 
 crvveftpiov Trotetrat ra>v (f)i\a>v. Pol. 2. 39. 1 ; 
 a sitting in council, a council, senate, Jos. 
 B. J. 6. 4. 3. Plut. Pyrrh. 19. Hdian. 4. 3. 
 21. Xen. Hell. 7. 1. 39. In N. T. spoken 
 only of Jewish councils. 
 
 1. The Sanhedrim, Talm. "pl iniO, the 
 supreme council of the Jewish nation, com 
 posed of 70 members besides the high-priest, 
 in imitation of the 70 elders appointed by 
 Moses, Num. 11, 16sq. comp. Jos. Ant. 9. 
 1. 1. The members were selected from 
 the dp^tfpeTf, i. e. former high-priests and 
 the chief-priests or heads of the 24 courses 
 (see in dp^tepevs no. 2) ; TrpeajSiirepoi, el 
 ders ; and ypap.p.ar(1s, scribes or lawyers. 
 The high-priest for the time being was ex 
 officio president, N v ^;^! princeps ; and a 
 vice-president, called V^ ri^a -K, sat at 
 his right hand. The Sanhedrim had cogni 
 zance of all important causes, both civil and 
 ecclesiastical ; and appear to have met ordi 
 narily in a hall not far from the temple, 
 called by Josephus /3ovXr;, fiovXevrfipiov, 
 B. J. 5. 4. 2. ib. 6. 6. 3 ; though on extra 
 ordinary occasions they were sometimes 
 convened in the high-priest s palace, Matt. 
 26, 3. 57. Under the Romans the right of 
 
695 
 
 avvepyeo) 
 
 capital punisliment was taken away, John 
 IS, 31 ; though they might aid in carrying 
 a sentence into execution, John 19, 6. 16. 
 Sae Buxt. Lex. Chald. 514, 1513. Lightf. 
 Hor. Heb. ad Matt. 2, 4. 23, 2. Winer 
 Realw. art. Synedrium. So Matt. 5, 22 
 no^or fcrnu TO> crvveSpita. 26, 59. Mark 14, 
 55. 15, 1. John 11, 47. Acts 5, 21. 27. 34. 
 41. 22, 30. 23, 1. 15. 20.28. 24,20. Me 
 lon, as including the place of meeting, the 
 Sanhedrim as sitting in its hall, Luke 22, 
 66 dvrjyayov avTov (Is TO <rvv(Spiov eavTu>v. 
 Acts 4, 15. 6, 12. 15. 23, 6. Jos. Ant. 
 14. 9. 4. ib. 20. 9. 1 ; de Vit. } 12. Includ 
 ing the idea of place, genr. Hdian. 2. 3. 5. 
 Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 23. 
 
 2. Genr. oWSpia, councils, tribunals, i. e. 
 the smaller tribunals in the cities of Pales 
 tine, subordinate to the Sanhedrim, i. q. 
 cpiW, Matt. 10, 17. Mark 13, 9. See fully 
 in Kpicris no. 3. 
 
 crvveiSrjcris, 6 <aj, f], (o-vvoiSa, o-vvtidf- 
 vat^) a knowing with oneself, consciousness ; 
 and hence conscience, that moral faculty 
 which distinguishes between right and 
 wrong, and prompts to choose the former 
 and avoid the latter ; John 8, 9 VTTO TTJS 
 <Tvv(io f]<T((Lis e\(y\6p.(voi. Rom. 2, 15 o-vju- 
 HapTipov<rr)s ainuiv rrjs crvj/eiSijcrecoy. 9, 1. 
 
 13, 5. 1 Cor. 10, 25. 27. 28. 29 bis. 2 Cor. 
 
 I, 12. 4, 2. 5, 11. 1 Tim. 4, 2. Tit. 1, 15. 
 Heb. 9. 9. 14. 10, 2. 22. So a-vvdSrja-is 
 dya%f], a good conscience, consciousness of 
 right, rectitude, Acts 23, 1. 1 Tim. 1, 5. 19. 
 1 Pet. 3, 16. 21 ; KoXTj Heb. 13, 18 ; *a3a- 
 pa 1 Tim. 3, 9. 2 Tim. 1,3; airpoo-Kcrrros 
 Acts 24, 16 ; mtferayorw aa^Stvfis oStra V. 
 do-Zfvoiia-a, i. e. weak and hesitating in judg 
 ing and deciding, 1 Cor. 8, 7. 10. 12. Also 
 1 Pet. 2, 19 o-vvfidncris TOV 3eoi), a conscience 
 toward God, conformed to his will. 1 Cor. 
 8, 7 (TwdSria-is TOV eiScoXou a conscience to 
 ward the idol, a conscience over which the 
 idol has power, as if something real ; or, a 
 conscientious horror of an idol. Wisd. 17, 
 
 I 1 . Test. XII Patr. 17 avi>ti6iftrlt p-ov crvvt- 
 %( i /it irfpi Ttjs dp-apTias. Epict. Fragm. 97. 
 Luc. Amor. 49. Diod. Sic. 4. 65 ; crvv. dya- 
 3,7 Hdian. 6. 3. 9. 
 
 crvveiSco, obsol. in the present, see in 
 
 l3cd. 
 
 1 . Aor. 2 a- v v e 1 8 o v , Part, trvvtbiav, only 
 trop. to see or perceive wilh oneself, by the 
 senses, to be aware; absol. Acts 12, 12. 
 
 14, 6 cnwSdiTff Kartfyvyov. 2 Mace. 4, 41. 
 Pol. 1. 23. 3. Dem. 1351. 6. Plut. Solon 25. 
 
 2. Perf. 2 o-vvoiba, Part. a~uv(i8a>s, to 
 know with any one, to be conscious of or 
 privy to any thing ; absol. Acts 5, 2 
 
 dvias KOI Trjs yvvaixos avrou. With ace. 
 and dat. e /zavro), to know with oneself, to be 
 conscious of, 1 Cor. 4, 4 ovSeV yap fj.avrca 
 (rvvoida. So C. e avrw Sept. Job 27, 6. 
 Hdian. 7. 1. 3. Xen. Mem. 2. 9. 6. 
 
 (TvveifM, f. <rop.ai, ( /!,) to be with, to 
 be present with, c. dat. Luke 9, 18. Acts 22, 
 11. 2 Mace. 9, 4. ^El. V. H. 12. 52. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 1. 10. 
 
 avveifit, Part. <rvi>i<ai>, (eiju,) to go or 
 come together, to convene, absol. Luke 8, 4. 
 Hdian. 2. 9. 7. Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 19. 
 
 o-vveia-epXofjiai, aor. 2 -ijASoi/, (eiVep- 
 Xo/xat,) to go or come in with any one, to 
 enter with, c. dat. John 18, 15 o-vi>eio-f)\%( 
 TW l^o-oO. Into a vessel, to embark with, 
 c. dat. John 6, 22. Sept. for D SO3 Esth. 
 2, 13. Act. Thorn. 12. Luc. Tox. 18. Xen. 
 An. 4. 5. 10. 
 
 crvvK8r}fAos, ou, 6, 17, adj. (S//iof,) 
 absent together from one s people, a fellow- 
 traveller, Acts 19, 29. 2 Cor. 8, 19. Jos. 
 de Vit. I 14. Palaeph. 46. 4. Plut. de Virtut. 
 et Vit. 2. 
 
 along with, co-elect, like-beloved, 1 Pet. 5, 
 13. Others here take it as pr. n. fern. Syn- 
 eclecte, and understand it of the wife of 
 Peter. 
 
 (TVVe\avvw, f. dara>, (eXaw/o>,) to drive 
 together, into one place, e. g. wild beasts, 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 14; persons, 2 Mace. 4, 
 26. Pol. 28. 5. 6. In N. T. trop. to urge 
 or persuade together, to set at one, c. ace. 
 Acts 7, 26 <rvvT]\acr(v UVTOVS (Is dprjvrjv. 
 So JEl V. H. 4. 15. 
 
 ), , f. fa 
 
 rvpe co,) to bear further witness with any one, 
 to join in attesting, c. dat. of manner, Heb. 
 2, 4, comp. v. 3. Sext. Empir. adv. Log. 2. 
 324 crvvarifiapTvpovcrav ro> Xo yw. Pol. 26. 
 9. 4. 
 
 mpeirtTfyijfu, f. s^o-w, (eW/s^t,) i<> 
 
 put or lay upon together, at the same time, 
 Sept. Num. 12, 11. Plut. Sympos. 8. 7. 4 fin. 
 In N. T. Mid. to set upon or assail with 
 any one, at the same time, to join in assail 
 ing, absol. Acts 24, 9 arvvcire^vro in later 
 edit. comp. v. 2. Rec. arvv&arro. So Sept. 
 Deut. 32, 27. Pol. 1. 31. 2. Xen. Cyr. 
 4. 2. 3. 
 
 avveTTO/jiai, Mid. depon. (JUirat, eWo^at,) 
 to follow with, to accompany, c. dat. Acts 
 20, 4. 2 Mace. 15, 2. Plut. Brut. 18. 
 Xen. Conv. 1. 2. 
 
 (TVvepjeCi), w, f. jjtrca, (o-vi/epydr,) to 
 work together with any one, to cooperate, 
 absol. to be a co-worker, fellow-labourer, 
 
crvvepyos 696 
 
 1 Cor. 16, 16. 2 Cor. 6, 1. (With dat. 
 pers. 1 Esdr. 7, 2. Plut. de Sanit. tuend. 
 fin. TTJ ij/vxf) avvfpyel TO crcoyua Kal avyKcifi- 
 vd.) Hence genr. to help, to aid, c. dat. 
 expr. or impl. Mark 16, 20. James 2, 22 17 
 nicrris (Tvvfpyfi TOLS tpyois avrov. So 
 1 Mace. 12, 1. Jos. B. J. 6. 1. 5. Diod. Sic. 
 4. 77. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 18. Of things, to 
 work together for any thing, to cooperate, to 
 contribute to any result, c. dat. commodi, et 
 fls c. ace. Rom. 8, 28 rots dyairSatnv rov 
 "Stbv Trdvra crvvepyfl els aycftov. So Pol. 
 11. 9. 1. Diod. Sic. 4. 76 ; irpos Plul. Ro- 
 mul. 21. 
 
 <rvvepyo<? : O i5, 6, rj, adj. (epyov, ) working 
 with, cooperating, aiding, Diod. Sic. 13. 70. 
 Pol. 1. 81. 10 ; Subst. a co-worker, fellow- 
 labourer, helper, genr. 2 Mace. 8, 7. Pol. 1. 
 7. 8. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 3. In N. T. spoken 
 only of a co-worker, helper, in the Christian 
 work, i. e. of Christian teachers, c. gen. of 
 pers. crvvepyol TOV 3eot) 1 Cor. 3, 9 ; a~vvfp- 
 yoi p.ov sc. nauXov, Rom. 16, 3. 9. 21. 
 Phil. 2, 25. 4, 3. 1 Thess. 3, 2. Philem. 1. 
 24 ; c. gen. of object, 2 Cor. 1,24 o-wepyol 
 TTJS x a P a s vpmv, co-workers of your joy, i. e. 
 labouring together for your happiness. 
 With dat. commodi, 3 John 8 wvepyoi rfj 
 dXv Sfiq. With els c. ace. for or in behalf 
 of, 2 Cor. 8, 23 els iip-ds crvvepyos. Col. 
 4,11. 
 
 ^ aor. 2 a 
 to go or come with any one, to come together. 
 
 1. With dat. of pers. to go or come with, 
 to accompany; Luke 23, 55 arrives rja-av 
 a-vi/eX^XuSStuai avra ex TTJS FaXtXatas. John 
 
 11, 33 comp. 31. Acts 9, 39. 10, 23. 45. 11, 
 
 12. 15, 38. Also to company or be conver- 
 tant with, Acts 1,21. Once with vvv TIVI 
 Acts 21, 16 ; comp. Winer 56 fin. Sept. 
 for soa Job 22, 4. Wisd. 7, 2; comp. 
 Thuc. 1. 10. 
 
 2. Genr. and usually, to come together, to 
 convene, to assemble, absol. Mark 3, 20 <rvv- 
 fpXfTai irakiv o^Xoy. Luke 5, 15. Acts 1, 6. 
 2,6. 10,27. 16,13. 19,32. 21,22. 22,30. 
 28, 17. 1 Cor. 14, 26 ; c. dat. of pers. with 
 or to whom, Mark 14, 53 ; c. adv. of place, 
 John 18, 20 OTTOV. Acts 25, 17 ; els c. ace. 
 of place, Acts 5, 1 6 ; as marking result, 
 1 Cor. 11, 17. 34; final, v. 33; ev c. dat. 
 1 Cor. 11, 18 ; eVt TO avro 1 Cor. 11, 20. 
 14, 23 ; trpos nva Mark 6, 33. Sept. for 
 5O3 Ez. 33, 30 ; -r^rt Jer. 3, 18 ; c. y for 
 ^bn Zech. 8, 21; C)DX3 2 Chr - 30 > 13 5 
 irp6s Tiva Ex. 32, 5. MiJian. 4. 11. 6. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 42 ; TIVI Pol. 1. 78. 4 ; <rvv TIVI 
 Luc. Asin. 45 ; TO OVTO Luc. Alex. 8. 
 
 3. Spec, of husband and wife, to come to 
 gether in one house, to live together ; Malt. 
 1, 18 comp. v. 20. 24. So Plut. Amator. 
 
 9. Xen. CEc. 10. 4. Of conjugal inter 
 course [1 Cor. 7, 5] ; and so some Matt. 1. 
 c. So Jos. Ant. 7. 8. 1. Plut. Thes. 3. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 4. 
 
 crvvea^iw, aor. 2 wvtyayov, (eo-Sua,) 
 to eat with any one, to eat together, i. e. 
 genr. to have intercourse with, to associate 
 with, c. dat. E. g. <rweo-3. Luke 15, 2. 
 1 Cor. 5, 11 ; c. p.fTa TWOS Gal. 2, 12, 
 comp. Winer J 56 fin. <rvvf(pay. Acts 11,3 
 
 10, 41 oiTives crvt>f<pdyop.fv KOI (rvvenioiitv 
 OVTW, cornp. in eo-3i a> no. 2. d. Sept. crtii - 
 eo-3. for nx bsx Gen. 43, 32 ; absol. Ps. 
 101, 5 ; o-vv ty. for t=5 -Ex. 18, 12. So 
 o-vwo-3. Plut. de occult. Viv. init. <rvv((p. 
 Luc. Parasit. 59. 
 
 ea>s, fj, (o-wirj/ii,) a sending 
 together, conjunction of streams, gvveo-is 
 8vo 7roTa/icoi> Horn. Od. 10. 515. In N. T 
 a putting together in mind, i. e. 
 
 1. discernment, understanding, intelli 
 gence ; Luke 2, 47 egia-Tavro fie jrdvres . . . 
 eVi Trj avvfa-fi avTov. 1 Cor. 1, 19. Eph. 3, 
 4. Col. 1,9. 2, 2. 2 Tim. 2, 7. Sept. for 
 nra Deut. 4, 6 ; nsHDPi Prov. 2, 2 ; ns-ri 
 Job 15. 2. Luc. Ale x. 22. Diod. Sic. 1. V, 
 Dem. 1394. 4. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 23. 
 
 2. Melon, as a faculty of the mind, un 
 derstanding, intellect, put for the mind itself ; 
 Mark 12, 33 TO aya-n-av avrov \%ebv] e 
 OAJJJ TTJS Kap8ms Kal e o\rjs TTJS crvvtcrecas. 
 Ecclus. 47, 23. ^El. V. H. 12. 1. Plut. 
 Thes. 6. Plato Phil. 19. d. 
 
 <TVVeTOS, 77, 6v, (crwt77/it,) pr. putting 
 together in mind, discerning, intelligent, sa 
 gacious; Matt. 11, 25 a7reKpv\^as TUVTO. 
 dirb oro<pa>i> KOI crvvfT<av. Luke 10, 21. Acts 
 13,7. 1 Cor. 1, 19. Sept. for "pan 1 Chr. 
 15, 22; Via; Prov. 28,7; D3n Gen. 41, 
 33. Jos. c. Ap. 2. 16. Luc. D. Deor. 26 
 fin. Plut. de Adulat. et Amic. 12. 
 
 , s>, f. T^O-W, (eu6Wo>) to 
 think well of with others, to take pleasure 
 with others in any thing ; hence to approve, 
 to assent to, c. dat. of pers. Rom. 1, 32 
 (TWfvo oKovo i Tots TTpdcTcrovcri. Elsewhere 
 c. dat. of thing in or as to which, Luke 11, 
 48 o WfvSoKflTe Tols epyois Tail/ iraTtputv. 
 Acts 8, 1. 22, 20. So 1 Mace. 1, 57. 
 2 Mace. 11, 24; absol. Demad. 180. 32. 
 Diod. Sic. 4. 24. With infin. to lie like will 
 ing, like pleased, to do any thing ; 1 Cor. 
 7, 12. 13 Kal avTos (rvffvSoKti oiKflv /X*T* 
 avTJjr, i. e. if both are mutually pleased. 
 
697 
 
 o-yi 177/u 
 
 >, f. 170-0), (evo>xo> ; eu, 
 to /easi or entertain with or to- 
 gether ; Mid. or Pass, to feast with any one, 
 to rere/ with, c. dat. 2 Pet. 2, 13 o-vveva- 
 Xovfjitvoi vp.lv. Absol. Jude 12. Jos. Ant. 
 4. 8. 7. Luc. Philopat. 4. 
 
 cryi/e<tcrT?7/u, (etyiVnj/u,) in N. T. 
 only Aor. 2 wvfirta-Trjv intrans. to 
 s/anJ w/wrc together, to assail together ; e. g. 
 Kara nvoy, Acts 16, 22 (rvvfTVftrrrj 6 o^Xos 
 Kar avT<i>v, i. e. made an assault together 
 against them. Sept. Num. 16, 3 <rurore- 
 o-rrjffav in Codd. Comp. Thuc. 2. 75. 
 
 crvve^ci), f. o>, (ex,) < ^W together, 
 to press together, i. e. 
 
 1. to hold fast, to shut up, c. ace. as TO. 
 MTU to stop one s ears Acts 7, 57. Sept. 
 TO <rro/i, for fB Is.- 52, 15. Of a city 
 besieged, Luke 1 9, 43 irwvoue{ o-e [ lepo- 
 o-oXu/xa] 7rdi/ro3fi>. Sept. and "I lS 1 Sam. 
 23, 8. (2 Mace. 9, 2.) Of a crowd, to press 
 upon any one Luke 8, 45 ; of persons hav 
 ing a prisoner in custody, to holdfast, Luke 
 22, 63. Hdian. 2. 13. 8. Luc. Tox. 39. 
 
 2. Trop. to constrain, i. e. a) to compel, 
 to urge or press on; c. ace. 2 Cor. 5, 14 17 
 yap dyanrj TOV Xp. vvMJH f)^as, constrain- 
 eth us, shuts us up so to act ; Theophylact. 
 <mi/o>3el. Pass. Acts 18, 5 a-vvfi^To Tta 
 irvtvfMTi 6 Haii\os in Rec. see in lett. c. 
 b) Pass, o-vvexop-ai, to be in constraint, 
 to be straitened, distressed, perplexed, absol. 
 Luke 12,50 TTtus (rvvtxofuu teas ov reXecrSj. 
 Phil. 1, 23. (Comp. Jos. Ant. 5. 11. 3 ; TO> 
 TToXe/xw Palaeph. 39. 5 ; rw Xt/xw Pol. 3. 
 62. 4.) Also to ie seized, affected, afflicted, 
 as with fear, disease, or the like ; c. dat. 
 Luke 8, 37 (pd/3 ^eyuXw frwrtgofrro. Matt. 
 4, 24 j otrois (rvvfxon(vovs. Luke 4, 38. 
 Acts 28, 8. So Sept. Job 3, 24. 31, 23. 
 Dem. 1484. 23 <p6&(p. Diod. Sic. 3. 33 
 v6o~ois. Plato Theaet. 479. a. c) Pass, 
 also of a person held fast, pressed, occupied, 
 with a work or the like ; Acts 18, 5 crwei- 
 XfTo T Xoyo) 6 Uav\os in later edit, see 
 above in lett. a ; i. e. Paul now gave him 
 self wholly to preaching the word ; comp. 
 v. 3. So Wisd. 17, 20 tpyois. Hdian. 1. 
 17. 22 ijSowiIr. 
 
 a-vvrj^ofiai, Pass, depon. (rjftofuu,) to 
 joy or rejoice with any one, c. dat. ^El. V. 
 H. 9. 21. Hdian. 8. 6. 2. Xen. Cyr. 4. 1. 
 7. In N. T. to delight with (in) oneself in 
 any thing, like o-vtx~iooi>, c. dat. of thing, 
 Rom. 7, 22 <rvvf)0 opai yap ro> vop.u>, i. e. 
 I take delight with myself in the law, I de 
 light myself in it. Comp. Eurip. Hippol. 
 1 300 Tt raXar ro i 
 
 as, j, a-vvTj^rjs ; crvv, 
 
 a dwelling or living together, yEl. II. An. 
 16. 36. Dem. 1467. 19 ; a being wonted to 
 gether, familiarity, Jos. de Mace. 13 fin. 
 Pol. 1. 43. 4. Diod. Sic. 14. 12. In N. T. 
 a wont, usage, custom, John 18, 39. 1 Cor. 
 [8,7.] 11,16. So Jos. Ant. 10.4.5 17 Trdrpior 
 crwqSeia. Arr. Epict. 1. 27. 20. Xen. Yen. 
 12. 4. 
 
 ov, , 
 
 * a,) one of like age, an equal in age, Gal. 1 , 
 14. Alciphr. Ep. 1. 12. Dion. Hal. Ant. 
 10. 49. Diod. Sic. 1. 53. On such com 
 pounds, which the Atticists sometimes con 
 demn, see Thorn. Mag. p. 207 sq. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 172, 471. 
 
 aW^aTTTa), f. tya, (Sanra),) to bury 
 with any one ; in N. T. trop. with Christ, 
 in the likeness of his burial ; Pass. c. dat 
 Rom. 6, 4. Col. 2, 12 arwrafyevrts avrui tv 
 rco ^arrricrfiaTi. Pr. Hdot. 5. 5 17 yvvrj crvv- 
 Sdirrerai rw avftpi. Plut. M. Anton. 85. 
 Thuc. 1.1 
 
 (Tvv^\d(i), f. do-a>, (3Xda),) to crush to 
 gether, to dash in pieces, Pass. Matt. 21, 44 
 et Luke 20, 18 6 ire<ra>v eVl TOV \tiov rov- 
 TOV, {Tui/aXacrSiJo-fTat. Sept. for ?^J Ps. 107, 
 16 ; yn3 Ps. 58, 7. Plut. Artax. 19. Diod. 
 Sic. 2. 57. 
 
 , f. ^o), (3Xi/3<a,) to press to 
 gether, to press closely, on all sides, as a 
 crowd upon a person, c. ace. Mark 5, 24. 
 31. Ecclus. 34 [31], 14. Plut. Symp. 
 6. 6. 2 fin. Plato Tim. 91. e. 
 
 <rvifepv7rT(o, f. \^o>, (3pv7rTa),) to break 
 together, to crush in pieces; trop. TTJV icap- 
 Siav TWOS to break the heart, intens. i. q. to 
 dishearten, to take away one s fortitude, 
 Acts 21, 13. So oi tzTrorfSpu^i/xej ot ras 
 is Plato Rep. 495. e. 
 
 avvieoo, see in 
 
 f. <rvvf]cru>, (t7/xi,) aor. 1 orwrj- 
 KO, aor. 2 a-vvrjv , also Pres. o-m/teo), whence 
 3 plur. o-vwoCo-t Matt. 13, 13. 2 Cor. 10, 
 12; Part. <rvvi>v Matt. 13,23. Rom. 3, 11 ; 
 comp. Buttm. } 106. n. 5. Matth. $ 210. 1 sq. 
 Winer { 14. 3. n. Pr. to send or bring toge 
 ther, e. g. foes in battle, Horn. II. 1. 8. ib. 7. 
 210. Trop. to bring or put together in mind, 
 and so to discern, to perceive, to be aware of, 
 e. g. a sound, voice, Horn. II. 2. 182 ona 
 SfSs. ib. 2. 26. Hes. Theog. 831. In N.T. 
 genr. to understand, to comprehend, absol. 
 Matt. 13, 13 aKovovTfs OVK anovovcriv, ov8e 
 (rvviovori. V. 14 KOI ov pr) (rvvrfTf. V. 15. 19. 
 23. 15, 10. Mark 4, 12. 6, 52. 7, 14. 8, 
 17. 21. Luke 8, 10. Acts 7, 25 oi 8e ov trv 
 
698 
 
 -2$, 26. 27. Rom. 15, 21. 2 Cor. 10, 
 12 ov trui tovcn, i. e. are not men of under 
 standing, not wise. With ace. Matt. 13, 51 
 <rvvf]KdTf Tavra irdvTa ; Luke 2, 50 TO prjp.a. 
 18, 34. 24, 45. Eph. 5, 17. With on, 
 Matt. 16, 12. 17, 13. Acts 7, 25. Sept. for 
 pan Ig. 6, 9. 10. 2 Chr. 34, 12; c. ace. 
 Prov. 2 f 5. 9; c. 6Yt Is. 43, 10. So Jos. 
 Ant. 7. 8. 4 ; c. ace. Ceb. Tab. 3. Xen. 
 Apol. 10; c. 6rt Hdian. 4. 15. 15. From 
 the Heb to -understand, to be wise, in re 
 spect to duty towards God, to be upright, 
 righteous, godly; Rom. 3, 11 OVK ta-riv o 
 avvi<ai>, quoted from Ps. 14, 2 where Sept. 
 for i^bn ; also Ps. 2, 10. Dan. 11, 35. 
 12, 3. 
 
 ), -avco, see in O-WI O-TJJJU. 
 i, f. o-vo-rqcra, (IOTIJ/U,) also 
 Pres. a-wia-rda 2 Cor. 4, 2. 6, 4. 10, 18 ; 
 a-vvLoravco 2 Cor. 3, 1. 5, 12. 10, 12; 
 see in IO-T^/LU and u7roKa3i o-7-J7/ii. Found in 
 both the transitive and intransitive significa 
 tions, to make stand with, and to stand with ; 
 see in ton?/**. 
 
 I. TRANS, in the Act. present, impf. and 
 aor. 1 , to make stand with, together, to place 
 or set together, Pol. 3. 43. 11. Hdian. 4. 15. 
 12. In N. T. to place or set ivith or before 
 any one. 
 
 1. Of persons, to introduce, to present to 
 one s acquaintance and favourable notice, 
 and hence to commend, to represent as wor 
 thy, c. ace. et dat. Rom. 16, 1 <rvi>i<TTtjp.i Se 
 vfj.1v &oif3r)v. 2 Cor. 5, 12 ; c. ace. et irpos 
 riva 2 Cor. 4, 2 ; ace. simpl. 2 Cor. 3, 1 
 eavroiij (rwicrrdveiv. 10, 12. 18 bis. Pass. 
 2 Cor. 12, 11. 1 Mace. 12, 43. Ceb. Tab. 
 11. Pol. 31. 20. 9. Xen. GEc. 3. 14; ace. 
 simpl. Jos. Ant. 6. 13. 1. Xen. Cyr. 7. 
 3. 12. 
 
 2. Trop. to set forth with or before any one, 
 to declare, to show, to make known and con 
 spicuous, c. ace. Rom. 3, 5 i 8e 17 dStja a 
 fjfjiaiv 3eoO 8iKaiocrvvr]v crvvicrTrjcn. 5, 8. 
 2 Cor. t>, 4 {rvvKrrSiVTfs imrrovt cos 3eoi) St- 
 O.K.OVOI. So c. dupl. ace. Gal. 2, 18 Trapapdrrjv 
 ep.avTov (rvvi<TTrifjii. With ace. and inf. 
 2 Cor. 7, 11. Sept. for T 1 ^ Job 28, 23. 
 Jos. Ant. 7. 2. 1 trvfitrrav tavravs a>s evvovs. 
 Plato Theag. 123. b; c. dupl. ace. Philo 
 Quis rer. div. Haer. p. 517 o-vvio-rrjo-iv avrov 
 Trpo(pr)TT]v. Diod. Sic. 13. 91 ; c. inf. ib. 
 
 14. 45. 
 
 II. INTRANS. in the Act. perf. and aor. 2, 
 to stand with, to stand together. 
 
 1. Pr. of pers. c. dat. Luke 9, 32 8vo liv- 
 Spas TOVS avvea-TwTas airta. Sept. for IBS 
 1 Sam. 17, 26. Pol. 4. 1. 6. Luc. NecyonT. 
 
 15. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 29. 
 
 2. Trop. from the transitive signif. to 
 place together parts into a whole, i. e. to 
 constitute, to create, to bring into existence, 
 Diog. Laert. Carnead. 4. 64 f) avaTrja-aa-a 
 (pi/vis Kal diaXvo-ei. Plato Tim. 30. e, rivi 
 TCOV a>a>v avTov [TOV Kocrpov] fis o/ioto rTjra 
 6 ^VVKTTCIS ^vvecrTTjo-f. ib. 41. d [6 3eos] 
 v<rTf)o-as 8e TO irav. Hence in N. T. in- 
 trans. to be constituted, created, to exist ; 
 Col. 1, 17 Trdira ev avria (rvvecrTTjKe. 2 Pet. 
 3, 5 yrj e vSaros . . . crvvfcrrSxra rw TOV 
 Seov Xoyw. So Philo de Plant. Noe p. 215 
 fK yrjs andin^s Kal navTos vSaros Kal depos 
 Kal Trvpbs . . . avveo-Trj oSe 6 Koir/iov. Max. 
 Tyr. Diss. 25. p. 253, TW At6r veu/iart ytj 
 a-vvea-Tr; KT\. Aristot. de Mundo c. 5 init. 
 Comp. Xen. Mem. 3. 6. 14. 
 
 ), f. ^o-a,, (6Sei/co,) to be on the 
 way with any one, to travel or journey with, 
 c. dat. Acts 9, 7. Wisd. 6, 23. Hdian. 4. 
 7. 11. Plut. M. Anton. 13. 
 
 , as, TJ, (o-woor, 6Sos,) a jour 
 neying together, Plut. de rect. Rat. aud. 18. 
 p. 110. In N. T. meton. a company of 
 travellers, a caravan, Luke 2, 44. So Jos. 
 Ant. 6. 12. 1. Arr. Epict. 4. 1. 91. Strabo 
 4. p. 314. a. 
 
 crvvoiKea), <, f. jjo-w, (OIK< Q),) to house 
 or dwell with any one, to live with, espec. 
 as husbands with wives in one house and 
 family, absol. 1 Pet. 3, 7. Ecclus. 25, 8. 
 Hdian. 1. 6. 11. Dem. 1374. 21. Xen. Lac. 
 1.8; genr. Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 5. 
 
 <TVVOlKoSofjl,ea), , f. ^o-co, (ot /eoSo/ww,) 
 to build with, any one, in company with, c. 
 dat. 1 Esdr. 5, 68 ; to build together into 
 one, Plut. comp. Thes. et Romul. 4. In 
 N. T. Pass. trop. to be built together with 
 other Christians into a spiritual temple, Eph. 
 2, 22 ; see fully in otKoSo/iew no. 3. 
 
 erwo/uXe<0, , f. ryoco, (6/uAe o>,) to be in 
 company with, Ceb. Tab. 13. In N. T. to 
 converse with, to talk with, c. dat. Acts 10, 
 27. 
 
 O~VVO/J,OpCO, >, f. Tjcro), (ojuope co, op.opos , 
 op.os, opoy,) to border together, to border or 
 join upon, c. dat. Acts 18, 7 ov 17 oiK/a 771* 
 crvvop.opovcra Trj crvvayatyfj , i. e. joined upon. 
 Comp. 6/iopea) Hdian. 6. 7. 5. 
 
 (TWO^r], rj s , 17, (o-upe xto,) a holding to 
 gether, a shutting up, e. g. of the womb, 
 Symm. Prov. 30, 16 ; of a city besieged, 
 Sept. Jer. 52, 3. Mic. 5, 1 ; also of a circuit, 
 enclosure, Jos. Ant. 8. 3. 2 ; comp. Horn. 
 II. 23. 330. In N. T. trop. distress, dis 
 quiet, anxiety, Luke 21, 25 avvoxn e^vav. 
 2 Cor. 2, 4 a: KapBias. So Sept. Job 30, 3, 
 
699 
 
 Aquil. for 
 
 a Ps. 25, 17. Artemid. 2. 3 
 
 v. -TTO>, f. 
 to arrange or set in order together, Jos. Ant. 
 7. 12. 3. Dem. 1378. 26. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 2. 
 In N. T. to arrange or se< in order with 
 any one, to order, to appoint, to direct, c. dat. 
 Matt. 26, 19 (iroiTja av oi p.a SrjTdi ws crvve- 
 Tiigfv avTois 6 irj&ovs. 27, 10. [21,6.] Sept. 
 for fij* Gen. 18, 19. 26, 11. So Pol. 
 3. 50. 9. JEl V. H. 9. 13. Xen. Cyr. 5. 
 3. 46. 
 
 <rvvT\eia, as, fj, (o-vi/reA<B,) the be 
 ing brought to an end together, i. e. full 
 end, completion, Diod. Sic. 13. 14. Pol. 11. 
 33. 7. Plut. Quaest. Rom. 34. In N. T. 
 genr. end, consummation, only in the phrase 
 <rvvTt\(ia TOV ala>vos Matt. 13, 39. 40. 49. 
 24, 3. 28, 20 ; avjre A. TO>V aluvav Heb. 9, 
 26 ; see in alow no. 1 . b. a. Sept. for nb3 
 Neh. 9, 31. Jer. 4, 27; yp Dan. 12, 4. So 
 Ecclus. 11, 27. 21, 10. Pol. 3. 1. 5, 9 teara- 
 
 OTpO(pTj KOI (TVVTfXfia. 
 
 rrui/reXe&J, &>, f. eVco, (reXew,) to bring 
 to an end together, Hdian. 2. 2. 15. In 
 N. T. 
 
 1 . to end altogether, fully, to finish wholly, 
 to complete, c. ace. Matt. 7. 28 <rvvtTf\(o-(v 
 6 irjcrovs TOVS \6yovs TOVTOVS- Luke 4, 13. 
 Of time, Luke 4, 2. Acts 21, 27. Sept. for 
 nbs Gen. 2, 2 ; Bn Deut. 34, 8. So Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 3. Hdian. 4. 2. 20. Dem. 522. 4; 
 comp. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 50. Spec, of a pro 
 mise or prophecy, to fulfil, to accomplish, c. 
 ace. Rom. 9, 28 \6yov yap crvvTf\a>v sc. 6 
 Kvpios, in allusion to Is. 10, 22, see fully in 
 o-vvrep.. Pass. Mark 13, 4. Sept. for 
 nb3 Ruth 3, 18 ; *S3 Lam. 2, 17. 
 
 2. By Hebr. as in Engl. to finish, to com 
 plete, i. q. to make ; c. ace. Heb. 8, 8 crw- 
 TfAe crcd eVt TOV OIKOV lcrpafj\ . . . Sia^fjKrjv 
 KCUVTJV. quoted from Jer. 31,31 where Heb. 
 t"fl3, Sept. 8ia3i7<ro/xcu. Sept. a-vvriktiv 
 otaSfi**}* for Heb. rn3 Jer. 34, 8. 15 ; ni35 
 Is. 44, 24. 
 
 <TVVTefJ,VCO, f. tp.<a, (re /iixa,) perf. uvv- 
 TtTpLrjKa, pr. to cut. together, to contract by 
 cutting, Plut. Demetr. 26. Thuc. 7. 36. Xen. 
 Hi. 4. 9 ; of words, discourse, to make con 
 cise, ^Eschin. 32. 23. In N. T. trop. and 
 from the Heb. to decide, to determine, to de 
 cree ; Rom. 9, 28 bis, \6yov yap o-vvrt\u>v 
 na\ crvvrt p,vu>v tv 8iKaioa vvT} art Adyoi o~vv- 
 TfTp.rjp.evov Troif)<T(i Kvpios eVl Trjs yrjs,for 
 his word lie doth fulfil, and doth decree in 
 righteousness ; for his word decreed will the 
 Lord execute upon the land; quoted from 
 Sept. Is. 10, 22. 23, where the Heb. reads 
 
 thus : destruction is decreed, bringing in 
 justice as a flood ; for destruction and a de 
 cree [destruction decreed] doth Jehovah of 
 hosts execute. So Sept. for ^^n Is. 28, 22. 
 Dan. 9, 26 ; TO Dan. 9, 24. 
 
 crwrripeo), , f. 150-0), (r;peo),) to watch 
 closely together or with any one, to watch or 
 keep together with any one. In N. T. 
 
 1. to watch or keep closely, (crvv intens.) 
 c. ace. Mark 6, 20 o-vvfTypft. OVTOV, i. e. 
 Herod kept John in close custody for the 
 sake of protection against Herodias, and 
 often heard him and followed his counsels. 
 Trop. to keep or lay up in mind, pr. with 
 oneself, e. g. TO /5>j/iara Luke 2, 19. Sept. 
 eV TTJ Kapdia for Chald. ">B3 Dan. 7, 28. So 
 Ecclus. 39, 2. Test. XII P atr. p. 563 Iv TTJ 
 i. Pol. 31. 6. 5 vvvTripfiv yvu>p.r)v Trap 
 
 2. to keep or preserve together, from loss 
 or destruction, opp. a7rdAAv/it, e. g. wine 
 and the skins in which it is kept, Matt. 9, 
 17. Luke 5, 38. 1 Mace. 8, 12 $tX& p.(Ta 
 TWOS. 10, 20. Lib. Henoch. in Fabr. Cod. 
 Pseud. V. T. p. 191 vvvrr^pfiv TTJV fyvx*l v 
 
 (IS <l)T)V. 
 
 o-vVTferjfJLi, f. ijo-o), (T&JJ/U,) to set or 
 put together, Xen. Cyr. 8. 5. 4. Mem. 3. 1. 
 7 ; to compose, ovopara Arr. Epict. 3. 23. 23, 
 \6yovs Dem. 277. 5, rrpayua ib. 275. 26. 
 Also to set or put with a person, to deliver to 
 any one, Pol. 5. 10. 4. In N. T. only Mid. 
 o-uiri Se/iat, to set together with another, 
 i. e. between oneself and another, to agree 
 
 O 
 
 together, to covenant together or with any 
 one ; c. inf. Luke 22, 5 KCU crvve^fvro aira! 
 apyvpiov bovvai. Inf. c. TOV Acts 23, 20 ; 
 see 6, 17, TO, G. 3. b. /3. With Iva John 9, 22 ; 
 comp. in Iva no. III. 1 . a. So c. inf. Sept. 
 Dan. 2, 9. Jos. Ant. 13. 4. 7. Hdian. 1. 17. 
 16. Xen. An. 4. 2. 1 ; TOV c. inf. Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 707. Once in Rec. i. q. to assent, 
 absol. Acts 24, 9 ; comp. in o-vmrm Sq/u. 
 So Philostr. Heroic, c. 5 fin. 6\iyois T<av 
 
 , adv. (o-vvTopos, o-vvrf 
 concisely, briefly, in few words, Acts 24, 4. 
 Jos. C. Ap. 1 . 1 ypa^ai trvcTo/iwy. Athen. 
 8. p. 349. a. Xen. (Ec. 12. 19 ws 8e <rvvr6- 
 Hcas flirflv. 
 
 a-VVrpe^O), aor. 2 o-uw Spa/iof, (rpe ^w.) 
 
 1 . to run with others, in company, trop. 
 
 e*s TI, 1 Pet. 4. 4 ^117 o vvrpfxuvTM v[j.<av els 
 
 TT/V avrfjv TTJS ao-oma? dvdxv<nv. Dem. 
 
 214. 7 ; pr. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 9. 
 
 2. Of a multitude, to run together, tofiock 
 together, Mark 6, 33. Acts 3, 1 1 . Judith 6, 
 18. Jos. B. J. 6. 2. 8. Xen. An. 5. 7. 4. 
 
700 
 
 ), f. ^ w , (rpi /3a>,) to rub toge 
 ther, e. g. sticks for kindling fire, ra Trvpela, 
 Luc. Ver. Hist. 1. 32. Usually and in N. T. 
 
 1. to ireaA. or crws/i together, by rubbing 
 or striking against, concussion, to break in 
 pieces, c. ace. Mark 5, 4. 14, 3 see in aXa- 
 Pao-Tpov. John 19, 36. Rev. 2, 27 ra o-Keu;; 
 ra Kepap-iKd. Sept. for 1313 Ex. 12, 46. 
 Lev. 6, 28. 26, 13. So M. V. H. 12. 61. 
 Diod. Sic. 13. 16. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 29. 
 Spec, of a reed, to break together, so as to 
 have a flaw or crack, but not entirely off; 
 Matt. 12, 20 Ka\ap.ov mafrvrpipftimv ov KO.- 
 rfdgei, a reed broken together shall he not 
 break off, quoted from Is. 42, 3 where Sept. 
 for ^SX 
 
 2. Trop. to break together the strength 
 or power of any one, to crush, to weaken, 
 c. ace. Luke 9, 39 irve\ip.a . . . o-virptfifi av- 
 TOV, i. e. weakens him, breaks him down ; 
 comp. Mark 9, 18 where it is ^paiVerai. 
 (Hdian. 5. 4. 20.) So of Satan, to break 
 or crush his power, Rom. 16, 20 ; comp. 
 in novs lett. b. Sept. for ^3^ Josh. 10, 10. 
 Am. 3, 15. (Pol. 26. 3. 6 o-vvrptyat, TOVS 
 A^a/ovs 1 .) Pass. Luke 4, 18 crvvTfTpipfjLe- 
 vovs n}v Kapdiav, broken in heart, dispirited, 
 afflicted, comp. Buttm. 131. 7. Sept. and 
 "Gti P s . 34, 19. 51, 19. So Pol. 21. 10. 2 
 crvvrp. TTJ Sivoia. Diod. Sic. 11. 78 rots 
 (ppovf]fj.a(ri. 16. 81 rats 
 
 O.TOS, TO, (o-vj/rpi /Sa),) a 
 breaking together, a crushing, fracture, Sept. 
 for I3tti Lev. 21, 18. Is. 30, 14. Arist. de 
 Audib. 34. In N. T. trop. destruction, 
 Rom. 3, 16, quoted from Is. 59, 7 where 
 Sept. for IB ; for "Oti Jer. 8, 21. 48, 3. 
 So Ecclus. 40, 11. 1 Mace. 2, 7. 
 
 crvvTpo(po$, ov, 6, f], adj. (o-vrrp/cpw,) 
 nourished or nursed together, Xen. Mem. 2. 
 3. 4. In N. T. Subst. one brought up or 
 educated with another, a comrade, Acts 13, 
 1. So 2 Mace. 9, 29. JEl. V. H. 12. 26. 
 Pol. 5. 9. 4. 
 
 aWTWyxdva), aor. 2 vvvt-nixov, (ruy- 
 xdva>,) to fall in with, to meet with, to come 
 to or at any one, c. dat. Luke 8, 19. Jos. 
 Ant. 1 . 12. 3 <rvvTV)(<ti)V & avrrj Setoy oyye- 
 Xos. Hdian. 2. 14. 12. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 16. 
 
 rjs, f], Synlyche, pr. n. of a 
 female Christian, Phil. 4, 2. 
 
 arvvvTroKplvofJbcu, Mid. depon. (viroKpi- 
 vopai,} Pass. aor. 1 (rvwnfKpfyrjv in Mid. 
 sense, Buttm. 136. 1,2; to play the hypo 
 crite with any one, to dissemble with, e. dat. 
 Gal. 2, 13. Pol. 3. 92. 5. ib. 3. 52. 6. Plut. 
 C. Mar. 14. 
 
 (TVVVTrovpyeco, S>, f. .jo- 
 virovpyos, epyoi>,) to serve, help, aid with any 
 one, together, at the same time, c. dat. of 
 manner, 2 Cor. 1, 11. Luc. Bis accus. 17 
 rfjs i]8ovf)s, rJTrep avrfi ra 
 
 TroXXa 
 
 , f. ivw, (uSiVu,) to be in tra 
 vail together, to bring forth together, of ani 
 mals Porphyr. de Abstin. 3. 10. In N. T. 
 trop. to travail or be in pain together, absol. 
 spoken of fj KTIO-IS collect. Rom. 8, 22. So 
 Eur. Helen. 736 wcoSiV KaKols. 
 
 crvvw^Loaia, as, 17, (o-wo /xw/u,) a swear 
 ing together, a conspiracy; Acts 23, 13 
 arvva>fj.o(rlav nfnoirjKOTfs, comp. in TTOU O) 
 no. 1. b. /3. Jos. Ant. 15. 8. 4. .31. V. H. 
 14. 22. Thuc. 6. 27. 
 
 ^vpa/covcrai, Sjv, al, Syracuse, now 
 Siracusa, the celebrated capital of Sicily, 
 situated on the eastern coast, with a capa 
 cious harbour. It was the birth-place and 
 residence of Archimedes. Acts 28, 12. 
 Xen. Hell. 1. 1. 29, 31. 
 
 ^vpafyoiviKicraa, see in 2vpo<o/- 
 wcrcra. 
 
 as, f], Syria, Heb. t^X Aram, 
 Aramaca, pr. n. of a large country of Asia, 
 lying, in the widest extent of the name, be 
 tween Palestine, the Mediterranean, Mount 
 Taurus, and the Tigris ; thus including 
 Mesopotamia, called in Heb. d^ris D"iX 
 Aramaea of the two rivers ; comp. Plin. H. 
 N. 5. 13 sq. Mela 1. 11. Gesen. Lex. et 
 Thesaur. art. fi ^- Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. 
 II. ii. p. 232 sq. For Ccele- Syria, see in 
 AafMcrxos. Modern Syria includes also 
 Palestine. At the time of the Jewish exile, 
 Syria with Palestine was subject to the 
 empire of Babylon ; and later, to the Per 
 sian monarchs and Alexander the Great. 
 After the death of the latter, Babylon and 
 Syria became a powerful kingdom under 
 the dominion of the Seleucidae ; of which 
 at a later period Antioch was the capital. 
 Syria was subdued by Pompey as far as the 
 Euphrates, and made a Roman province ; 
 including also Phenicia and Judea. In the 
 time of Christ it was governed by a pro 
 consul, to whom the procurator of Judea 
 was amenable ; see in rjyeyLutv no. 2. Jos. 
 Ant. 8. 10. 3 TTJV TIaXai(rrivr]v "Svplav e SouXw- 
 o-aro. Matt. 4, 24. Luke 2, 2. Acts 15, 
 23. 41. 18, 18. 20, 3. 21, 3. Gal. 1, 21. 
 
 a, ov, (Svpt a,) Syrian, e. g. 
 (popn a Jos. Ant. 2. 3. 3. Usually 
 and in N. T. 6 Svpos, a Syrian, Luke 4, 27. 
 So Sept. 2 K. 5, 20. Jos. Ant. 10, 15. 4. 
 Hdian. 3. 11. 17. 
 
701 
 
 as, f], a Syro-Pheni- 
 cian woman, i. e. a PJienician of Syria, 
 prob. in distinction from the At/3o(poiVtK, 
 Phenicians of Libya, or Carthaginians. 
 Mark 7, 26 Rec. comp. Matt. 15, 21. 22. 
 Pr. fern, to 2vpo<poiVi, as Cadmus is called, 
 Luc. Deor. Concil. 4 ; Syrophanix Juv. 
 Sat. 6. 159; comp. 3>ow ; fern. Qoivicraa 
 Horn. Od. 15. 417. Hdot. 8. 118. A later 
 form is Svpafpoivlxicro-a, or Svpo^otinVicrcra, 
 in Mss. and some later editions ; also Clem. 
 Rom. Homil. 2. 5. 19. 
 
 (TvpTlS, tos V. eo>f, T], (o-vpo>,) syrtis, a 
 sand-bank, shoal, quick-sand, dangerous to 
 navigation, pr. so called as drawn together 
 by currents of the sea. Acts 27, 17. Two 
 syrtes or gulfs with quick-sands on the 
 northern coast of Africa, were particularly 
 famous among the ancients ; one called 
 Syrtis Major, between Cyrene and Leptis ; 
 the other Syrt is Minor, near Carthage. 
 See Sallust Jug. 78. Heyne Excurs. IV. 
 ad Virg. JEn. 1. 108 sq. Wetst. N. T. II. 
 p. 642. Jos. B. J. 2. 16. 4. Luc. Dipsad. 6 
 rr}v p.eyd\T)v Svprii/. Diod. Sic. 3. 49. Strabo 
 17. p. 1192. c. 
 
 (Tvpo), f. vpSa, to draw, to drag, to haul, 
 c. ace. John 21, 8 a-vpovres TO SLKTVOV. 
 Rev. 12, 4. Sept. for 2nD 2 Sam. 17, 13. 
 (Luc. Merc. cond. 3. Hdian. 5. 8. 17.) Of 
 persons dragged by force before magistrates 
 or to punishment, Acts 8, 3. 14, 19. 17, 6. 
 So Jos. de Mace. 6 init. Arr. Epict. 1. 29 
 (rvprj ds TO 8<TfjL(i)TT]pi.ov. Lnc. Lexiph. 10. 
 
 avcnrapdcra d) v. -TT<U, f. ao>, (a-vv, 
 a-rrapda-a-o),) pr. to tear or lacerate together ; 
 in N. T. intens. to convulse altogether, to 
 throw into strong spasms, spoken of the ef 
 fects of demoniacal possession producing or 
 resembling epilepsy, c. ace. Luke 9, 42. 
 Comp. in o-7rapao-o-&>. - f ^ a ^ < ^ r iO 
 
 f f *--" c*-I5. C. L t j. 
 
 <TVCra"r)[J,OV, ov, TO, (o-iio-(Tr]p.os, tr^/ia,) 
 a concerted sign, token, signal, agreed upon 
 with others ; Mark 14, 44 o-vo-oynov, comp. 
 Matt. 26, 48 <rr)p.f~iov. Sept. Judg. 20, 40. 
 Diod. Sic. 13. 45, 46. ib. 20. 52. Strabo 6. 
 p. 428. c. A late word, unknown to the 
 earlier Greek writers, Phryn. et Lob. p. 418, 
 421. Sturz de Dial. Mac. p. 196. 
 
 (TUercrw/iO?, ov, 6, fj, adj. (O-W/MJ,) of the 
 same body with another, joined in one body; 
 trop. in respect to the Christian church as 
 TO cru/jui TOV Xpio-rov, and of the Gentiles 
 as partakers in it, Eph. 3, 6. Not found 
 elsewhere. 
 
 rection, a fellow-insurgent, Mark 15, 7. 
 Jos. Ant. 14. 2. 1 KaTa Aptoro/3ovXou KOI 
 TCOJ/ o-va~ra.<Tia<TTu>v avTov. Comp. in crvft- 
 
 O"f(TTOtO"t<Z(TT7^9, ou, 6, 
 <rrao-ir.) a companion in sedition or insur 
 
 17, oV, (owtonj/u,) pr. 
 placing with or before, introducing ; henco 
 commendatory, e. g. eVto-roXi) o-vcrraTiKr], 
 letter of commendation, 2 Cor. 3, 1 bis. 
 Arr. Epict. 2. 3. 1 ypdp-pJiTa. Trap avTov \a- 
 fteiv crvcrTaTiKd. Diog. Laert. 5. 18. 
 
 <rV(TravpO(O, 5>, f. axra>, (o-ravpow,) to 
 crucify with any one, c. dat. Matt. 27, 44. 
 Mark 15, 32. John 19, 32. Trop. Rom. 
 6, 6 6 TraXaioy fip,a>v av%pa>Tros o-weoTavpco3j; 
 (XptoT<), our old [former] man ivas cruci 
 fied ivilh Christ, i. e. since by the death of 
 Christ we are freed from the punishment 
 of sin, so the power of our former carnal 
 nature was destroyed, crucified, when he 
 was crucified. Gal. 2, 20. 
 
 CTV(TTe\\(i), f. Xoj, (o-re XXco,) 1. to 
 deck or wrap together, to envelope, to wind 
 in a garment ; e. g. of a dead body rolled 
 up and swathed for burial, Acts 5, 6. 
 Genr. Eurip. Troad. 382 ou 8dp.apTos iv 
 ytpoiv 7r7rXotf o-ui/eoTaX^o-ei/. So Trept- 
 oTe XXw of a dead body, Sept. Ez. 29, 5. 
 Jos. Ant. 17. 3. 3 TrepioreXXetj ^avovra. 
 Hdot. 2. 90. 
 
 2. to send or draw together, to contract, 
 Ecclus. 4, 31. Luc. Icarom. 12 yrj ts /Spa^u 
 a-vvf(rTa\p.evT]. Diod. Sic. 1. 41. In N. T. 
 1 Cor. 7, 29 OTI 6 xaipbs <rvvf(TTaXfjLet>os, the 
 time is contracted, shortened, short, i. q. 
 fico\opd>%ncrav at rjp-fpai in Matt. 24, 22 and 
 Mark 13, 20. 
 
 crvaTevdfo, f. o>, (orfpafa),) to groan 
 or sigh together, spoken of 17 KTI&IS collect. 
 Rom. 8, 22. Eurip. Ion 935 or 948. 
 
 <Tl/O"TOt^eco, to, f. ijtreo, (oTOt^ecu,) to 
 advance in order together, as soldiers, Pol. 
 10. 21. 7. In N. T. trop. to go togetlier 
 with, to correspond to, c. dat. Gal. 4, 25. 
 So O-IHTTOIXOS corresponding, Pol. 13. 8. 1. 
 Theophr. Caus. PI. 6. 4. 
 
 (TV<TTpaTUt)Tri<>, ou, 6, (crrpaTiwTTjs,) a 
 fellow-soldier ; trop. of Christian teachers. 
 Paul s companions in the labours and dan 
 gers of the Christian warfare, Phil. 2, 25. 
 Philem. 2. Pr. Hdian. 6. 8. 10. Plut. Pomp. 
 79. Xen. An. 1. 2. 26. 
 
 av(TTpe(f)a>, f. ^w, (o-rp/cpo),) to turn 
 about u-ith, at the same time, e. g. a potter s 
 wheel, Ecclus. 38, 29. In N. T. to turn, 
 twist, wind together, into one bundle, band, 
 mass ; hence genr. i. q. to gather together, 
 to collect, c. ace. Acts 28, 3 
 
702 
 
 3e roO Hav\ov <ppvydvu>v TrXJJSor. (Com p. 
 Xen. An. 4. 3. 1 1 fypvyava crv\\fyovTfs a)j 
 eVi 7rt)p.) Sept. for fix , ris (nWorpe^e 
 vdup Iv t/nario), Prov. 30* 4. Of persons, 
 troops, Sept. for B^nrj Judg. 11, 3; 
 Y1% Judg. 12, 4. AJsV Diod. Sic. 3. 36. 
 Xen. An. 1. 10. 6. 
 
 (rva-rpo(f)ij, ys, 77, (<rv(TTpe(p(i>, ) aturning 
 or winding together, as o~ucrTpo<pr] irvevfj.a- 
 ros a whirlwind, Ecclus. 43, 17. In N. T. 
 a gathering together of people, a concourse, 
 multitude, e. g. a public tumult, Acts 19, 
 40. So genr. Sept. for ms Judg. 14, 8. 
 1 Mace. 14, 44. Pol. 4. 34. 6. Hdot. 7. 9. 1. 
 Spec, a combination, conspiracy; Acts 
 23, 12 7roiT)(ravTfs avo-Tpofprjv oi lovftaioi, 
 comp. v. 13; see in Troie w no. 1 . b. /3. 
 Sept. for "ilOj? 2 K. 15, 15; a-va-rp. iroifiv 
 for nttip Am. 7, 10. 
 
 -*T 
 
 >, f. t o-w, (o-x?/iaTifa>, 
 to g"tre /;e same /orm u>i/A, to con 
 form to any thing, Plut. de Prof, in Virt. 
 12. Aristot. Top. 6. 14. 4. In N. T. only 
 Mid. or Pass, to conform oneself, to be con 
 formed to any thing, c. dat. Rom. 12, 2 
 V.T) (TucrxTj/iaT/fea Se TO> alu>vi TOVTCO. 1 Pet. 
 1,14. So Plut. Numa 20 trwrj^ffiartfanru 
 wpbs TOV i> (ptX/g KOL 6/j.ovoia rfj irpbs av- 
 rovs. Plut. de Virt. et Vit. 2. 
 
 dp, fj, indec. Sychar, a 
 city of Samaria, i. q. Shechem, 2u^//i, 
 where see fully ; John 4, 5. The name 
 Sv^ap is not found in the Sept. nor in 
 Josephus ; ai.d not improbably it was at 
 first merely a like-sounding by-name, given 
 by the Jews in contempt to the city Sir^//*, 
 BSttJ , as the seat of the Samaritan worship. 
 As such it might come from Heb. -i>ttj 
 falsehood, spoken of idols Hab. 2, 18 ; or 
 also from TJ3I1) drunkard, in allusion to Is. 
 28, 1. 7. Comp. Ecclus. 50, 26 6 Xao? /na>- 
 po? 6 KaroiKwv (V StKt /zot;. Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 564 ecrrai yap dnb <rf][j.epov SiKTjfj, 
 \eyo/JLvr] rroKis davvfratv. Comp. the sim 
 ilar change in the name BeeXff/3ovX for 
 BeeXff/SovjS; also Belhaven for Bethel, Hos. 
 4, 15. 5, 8, comp. Am. 5, 5. See Wetst. 
 N. T. I. p. 858. Reland Diss. Miscell. I. 
 Q. 141. Bibl. Res. in Palest. III. p. 118. 
 
 6, indec. Sychem, Heb. C3tt5 
 (shoulder) Shechem, pr. n. of the son of 
 Hamor, slain by the sons of Jacob because 
 he had defiled their sister Dinah, Acts 7, 16 ; 
 see Gen. c. 34. 
 
 f,, Sychem, Heb. 
 Shechem, a city of Ephraim, situated in the 
 
 valley between Mount Ebal and Mount 
 Gerizim, Acts 7, \6 ; comp. Sept. Gen. 12, 
 
 6. 37, 12. Josh. 20, 7 Sv^e/i e v TW opti up 
 E^paijU.. Called also 2i /afwz, t/xwv, Sept. 
 2 K. 12, 1. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 44. ib. 11. 8. 6 ; 
 later Ma/3op3d by the inhabitants, and Nfa- 
 TroXtf, Neapolis by the Romans, Jos. B. J. 4. 
 8. 1 ; also on coins, <Xaotn a Ntdiro\is, 
 Flavia Neapolis. For the name Sychar, 
 see in Sv^ap. See fully in Wetst. N. T. 
 I. p. 858. Reland Falsest, p. 1004 sq. Bibl. 
 Res. in Palest. III. p. 114-123. The an 
 cient Shechem was given to the Levites, 
 and was one of the cities of refuge, Josh. 
 20, 7. 21, 21. It was destroyed by Abime- 
 lech, Judg. 9, 45 ; but rebuilt by Jeroboam 
 and made the seat of his kingdom, 1 K. 12, 
 1. 25. Jos. Ant. 8. 8. 4. At a later period 
 it became the metropolis of the Samaritans, 
 and the seat of their worship, Jos. Ant. 1 1 . 
 8. 6. John 4, 5, comp. 20, 21 ; see in 2a/xa- 
 pfiTT]s. At present it is an inconsiderable 
 town, called NAbulus or NAblus (Neapo- 
 olis) ; and among its inhabitants are the 
 few remaining descendants of the ancient 
 Samaritans. See Bibl. Res. in Palest. III. 
 p. 96 sq. 
 
 (repay??, T)S, rj, (o-<pa,) a slaughtering, 
 slaughter, of animals for food or in sacri 
 fice ; Acts 8, 32 <u? Trpoftarov enl arfpayrjv 
 ^Sty, quoted from Is. 53, 7 where Sept. for 
 H2I3 . Rom. 8. 36 ws TrpojBara o-fpayijs, i. e. 
 for slaughter, quoted from Ps. 44, 23 
 where kept, for firnu "jXS ; comp. Sept. 
 for n:nn Zech. 11, 4. James 5, 5 e 3pe- 
 
 T * "! 
 
 ^arf ras Kap8ias lyj.oii a>s tv fj^fpa cr(payf)s, 
 . i. e. like stalled beasts in the day of slaugh 
 ter, without care or forethought. Sept. 
 els fa- a-cpayrjs for ^J"]^ c> 1 ^ Jer. 12, 3. 
 Of persons, Jos. Ant. 7. 1.6. Luc. Quom. 
 Hist, conscr. 31. Xen. Hell. 4. 4. 2. 
 
 cr<j)a<yiov, ov, TO, (cnpaa>,) a victim, as 
 slaughtered in sacrifice ; Acts 7, 42 fir) 
 crcpdyia . . . TrpocrrjvfyKaTe p-oi, quoted from 
 Am. 5, 25 where SepL for M2t . Plut. 
 Pyrrh. 6. Pol. 4. 17. 11. Xen. Lac. 13. 3. 
 
 (rep" a&>, f. aj, Att. o-tpaTTw, to slaughter, 
 to kill, to slay ; pr. animals for food or sa 
 crifice, Pass. Rev. 5, 6 apvlov fcrrrjKos a>s 
 f(r(payfjifvov. v. 9. 12. 13, 8; comp. Is. 53, 
 
 7. Sept. for rC J Gen. 43, 16. Ex. 22, 1 ; 
 onai Gen. 37, So". Ex. 29, 11. (Horn. Od. 
 1. 92. Paleeph. 31. 4. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 24.) 
 Of persons, to kill, to slay, c. ace. 1 John 
 3, 12 bis, 6? f(T(pae TOV d8f\(pbv avrov KT\. 
 Rev. 6, 4. 9. 18, 24. Once hyperbol. of a 
 deadly wound, Rev. 13, 3 KecpaX^ wr V</>a- 
 
a<j)68pa 
 
 ds 3at>aroi/. Sept. genr. for 
 Gen. 22, 10. Is. 57, 5. So JEl V. H. 13. 
 
 2. Xen. Cyr. 7. 3. 14. 
 
 cr(f)oopa, adv. (pr. neut. plur. of o-(po8pos.) 
 vehemently, greatly, very much, Matt. 2, 10. 
 17, 6. 23. 18, 31. 19, 25. 26, 22. 27, 54. 
 Mark 16, 4. Luke 18, 23. Acts 6, 7. Rev. 
 16,21. Sept. for 1SO3 Gen. 17, 18. 19; 
 comp. Sept. Jon. 4, 4. 10. Jos. Ant. 4. 5. 
 
 3. JEl. V. H. 2. 16. Xen. Mem. 2. 10. 2. 
 <T(f)oop(i)<?, adv. (cnpoSpo?,) vehemently, 
 
 greatly, very much, Acts 27, 18. Ecclus. 
 13, 13. Hdian. 4. 13. 4. Xen. CEc. 5. 4. 
 crcppayi^o), f. iVo), (tr^payi s,) to seal, i. e. 
 
 1. to seal up, to close and make fast with 
 a seal or signet; e. g. letters, writings, 
 books, so that they may not be read, Sept. 
 for cnn l K. 21, 8. Is. 29, 11. Eurip. Iph. 
 Aul. 38. Polyaen. p. 414 
 fo~(ppayio iJi(vrjv o~(ppayi8i 
 
 TOS. In N, T. trop. of words, to keep in si 
 lence, not to make known, c. ace. Rev. 10, 4 
 o~(f)pdyio~ov a e XaX^trai at enTa j3poirai, Kal 
 fit) avTO. ypd^rrjs. 22, 10. Sept. for cnO 
 
 Dan. 8, 26. So Stob. Serm. 34. p. 215 
 <r<ppdyio~ov TOVS p.fv \6yovs o-iyfj. Genr. 
 to seal, to set a seal, e. g. for the sake of 
 security upon a sepulchre, or prison ; c. ace. 
 TOV Xi 3oi> Matt. 27, 66 ; tirdva TWOS Rev. 
 20, 3. Sept. for onn Cant. 4, 12. (Bel. 
 and Drag. v. 11. 14. Diog. Laert. 4. 59 TO 
 Tapif tov.) Trop. to secure to any one, to 
 make sure, i. q. to deliver over safely, Mid. 
 c. ace. et dat. Rom. 15, 28 (r<ppayio-dfi.fvos 
 avrols TOV Kupnov TOVTOV. Comp. Sept. 
 Deut. 32, 34. 2 K. 22, 4. Philo de Vit. 
 Mos. p. 607. c. See Loesner Obs. e Phil, 
 p. 269. 
 
 2. to set a seal or mark upon any thing, 
 in token of its being genuine and approved ; 
 e. g. persons, c. ace. Rev. 7, 3 a%pis ov 
 (T(ppayi(T(t)fJifv TOVS 8ov\ovs TOV 3eoO rjfiuv 
 eVi TU>V p.fTo>nu>v OVTOJV. Pass. v. 4 bis. 5 ter. 
 6 ter. 7 ter. 8 ter. So Eurip. Iph. Taur. 1 383 
 Seifotr fie arrjfidvrpOKnv eo fppayio p.tvoi, ((pev- 
 yop.(v KT\. Oftener of decrees, documents, 
 to seal, to attest by a seal, Sept. for cnn 
 Esth. 8, 8. 10. Job 7, 14; tyyvfy Anv 
 Epict. 2. 13. 7. Plut. Pomp. 5. Hence in 
 N. T. trop. to attest, to confirm, to establish, 
 c. ace. John 6, 27 TOVTOV yap 6 7rarr)p 
 to-<ppdyto-(i>, i. e. as the Messiah ; comp. 
 5, 36. With on, John 3, 33 6 Xa/3a>i av- 
 TOV TTJV fj.apTvpiav, O~(ppdyio~fv OTI 3e6f 0X77- 
 Si^s e art. So of Christians, whom God 
 attests and confirms by the gift of the Holy 
 Spirit as the earnest, pledge, seal of their 
 election to salvation ; Mid. c. ace. 2 Cor. 
 
 703 
 
 1,22. Pass. Eph. 1, 13. 4, 30. Comp. 
 Anthol. Gr. II. p. 147. So fnicr<})payiopai 
 in Philo often, see Loesner Obs. e Phil. p. 
 142, 146. Wetst. N. T. I. p. 857. 
 
 cr^payk, I8os, fj, I. a seal, as the in 
 strument for sealing, a signet, signet-ring, 
 Rev. 7, 2. Sept. for nnin i K. 21, 8. 
 Cant. 8, 6. Polyaen. p. 763 TO IS Ilepo-cav 
 j3a<ri\(vo-i (rfypayis /3a<rtXiKij elwav e trrt AcrX. 
 Pol. 16. 22. 11. Plato Hipp. maj. 368. c. 
 
 2. a seal, as impressed upon letters, books, 
 and the like for the sake of privacy and 
 and security ; Rev. 5, 1 <r<ppay~io-iv firrd. 
 v. 2. 5. 9. 6, 1. 3. 5. 7. 9. 12. 8, 1. So 
 Bel and Drag. 17. Hdian. 7. 6. 15, 19. 
 Xen. Hell. 7. 1. 39. Also impressed as a 
 mark or token of genuineness, Rev. 9, 4 ; 
 and so of a motto, inscription, 2 Tim. 2, 19. 
 (Act. Thorn. 5 26 6 Sees 8ia TJJS UVTOV 
 o~<ppayi8os finyivuxTKfi TO. Idia 7rpc5/3ara.) 
 Trop. a token, pledge, proof; 1 Cor. 9, 2 J 
 crcppayis TTJS fftris aTrooToXJJr i/xeis ear*. 
 Rom. 4, 11. So Jos. de Mace. 7. 
 
 <T<f)vp6v, ov, TO, (kindr. o-<pvpa, o-^xitpa,) 
 the ankle, comp. Lat. malleolus pedis, Acts 
 3, 7. Aristot. H. An. 1.15. Dem. 442. 15. 
 Xen. Hell. 5. 4. 58. 
 
 cr^eooi/, adv. (xo>, ""X"" ) near > P r - of 
 place, Horn. II. 3. 15. ib. 4. 247. In N. T. 
 nearly, almost, Acts 13, 44 o-^ffiw nda-a f] 
 TrdXtf o-vv^l- 19, 26. Heb. 9, 22. So 
 2 Mace. 5, 2. Hdian. 3. 4. 2. Xen. Conv. 4. 6. 
 
 habitus, the form, figure, mien, deportment, 
 of body, person, JS1. V. H. 2. 44. Hdian. 
 7. 6. 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 22. In N. T. of 
 external circumstances, fashion, state, con 
 dition, 1 Cor. 7, 31 tT\rifj.a TOV 
 Phil. 2, 8 cr^/iari tvp&fls wr m/ 
 So Jos. Ant. 2. 4. 2 <rx- rrjs SovXei aj. 5. 1 . 
 28 f< Tandvov cr^fjiaTos fls TOVTO 8o^rjs 
 Kal irtptovo-ias TrpoeXSovtri. Xen. Cyr. 7. 
 1. 49. 
 
 cr^t^d), f. iVo), to split, to cleave, to rend, 
 with violence ; e. g. wood, Sept. for 5553 
 Gen. 22, 3. 1 Sam. 6, 14. Xen. Cyr. 5. V. 
 49. An. 4. 4. 12. In N. T. genr. as a gar 
 ment Luke 5, 36. John 19,24 ; Pass, rocks 
 Matt. 27, 51 ; the veil of the temple fls 8vo 
 Matt. 27, 51. Mark 15, 38. Luke 23, 45 ; 
 the heavens Mark 1,10; a net John 21, 11. 
 Sept. and S3 Is. 48, 21. Zech. 14,4; 5^?? 
 Is. 37, 1. (Pol. 2. 16. 11 fls 8vo. Hdot. 2. 
 17 NfiXor /ne 0-771* AiyvirTov o-^/fwi .) Trop. 
 to split into parties, factions, to divide, Pass. 
 Acts 14, 4 e<r^i<r3ij 8e TO TrXrjSoy. 23, 7. 
 So Diod. Sic. 12. 66 TOV TrX^Sou? o-^tfo^it- 
 vov. Luc. Asin. 54. Xen. Conv. 4. 59 
 
704 
 
 aroj. TO, o-xi<. a re 
 garment, Matt. 9, 16 et Mark 2, 21 
 o-xi(rfj.a yiverai. (So a cZp/"/t, of hoofs, Aris- 
 tot. H. An. 2. 1. 26.) Trop. a division, 
 dissension, schism ; John 7,43 o-xio-/ia o&/ 
 eV TO> o^Xw eyevfTO. 9, 16. 10, 19. 1 Cor. 
 1, 10. 11, is. 12, 25. 
 
 cr^OiVLOV, ov, rd, (o-xoivos,) a rush-cord, 
 and genr. a co?-rf, rope, John 2, 15. Acts 27, 
 32 ra o-^oma r^y o-Ka(pi]s. Sept. for ^Dtl 
 2 Sam. 17, 13. Dem. 1145. 6. Plut. Alex . 
 M. 25. 
 
 fln^oXa^iw, f. acra), (er^oX^,) to 7iare Zei- 
 swre, to be free from labour, to have nothing 
 to do, absol. Sept. for riB^i Ex. 5, 8. 17. 
 Pol. 11. 25. 7. Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 9. 
 In N. T. 
 
 1. With dat. commodi, to have leisure 
 for any thing, to give oneself to any thing, 
 free from other cares and hindrances ; 
 
 1 Cor. 7, 5 iva o-xoXd^re TTJ vrjcrreia KT\. 
 Hdian. 1. 9. 8. Dem. 594. 16. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 7. 5. 39. 
 
 2. Trop. of place, to be vacant, empty, 
 absol. Matt. 12, 44 rbv olKov...evpto-Kfi 
 o-xoXdfoira, i. e. unoccupied, uninhabited. 
 Plut. C. Gracch. 1 2 KCU rw 
 
 ovra /xeS rjfj.fpav dvreSei^e 
 
 (T^oXr;, ^y, 17, leisure, rest, freedom from 
 labour and business, vacation, Luc. D. Deor. 
 18. 1. Hdian. 1. 15. 13. Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 9 ; 
 leisure for any thing, i. q. attention, devo 
 tion, study, Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 4 pr/fte rrpbs 
 (v XXo a")(Qkr)v Trotelrai KT\. In later 
 usage and N. T. meton. a school, a place 
 of learned leisure, where a teacher and his 
 disciples came together and held discussions 
 and disputations ; Acts 19,9 8id\fy6/j.fvoi 
 tv rfj crxo^TJ Tt pdwou TIVOS. So Plut Arat. 
 29 TOVS (pi\oo~6(povs tv rals (r^oXatr t]Tovv- 
 ras. Plut. de aud. Poet. 7. Strabo 14. 5. 
 p. 463 ev w (r^oXal Kal StarptjSai ru>v (pi\o- 
 0-00COV. Aristot. Pol. 5. 9. Comp. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 401. 
 
 <r&>o>, f. o-wo-o, ((ruts, obs. <rdoj,) Pass. 
 perf. a-fortoa-p-ai, aor. 1 ea-ai^rjv, Buttm. { 100. 
 n. 2. ^ 114; to save, to deliver, to preserve 
 safe from danger, loss, destruction. 
 
 1. Genr. to save, e. g. persons, c. ace. 
 Matt. 8, 25 Kvpie, croxroi/ ij/ias, oVoXXii/ieSa. 
 14,30. 24,22. 27, 40. 42 bis. Mark 3, 4. 
 13, 20. Luke 6, 9. Acts 27, 20. 31. al. So 
 rrjv tyvxr)v avTov cruxrai Matt. 16,25. Mark 
 
 8, 35 bis. Luke 9, 24 bis. Sept. for ? >1 tJ 1 in 
 Judg. 6. 15; aio 1 Sam. 19, 11 ; ^Srt 
 
 2 Chr. 32, 14. So Luc. D. Deor. 3. 1. 
 Pol. 6. 58. 5. Xen. Mem. 1. 5. 1. With 
 fK c. gen. of thing, to save from, to deliver 
 
 out of any peril, John 12, 27. Heb. 5, 7 er- 
 fiv avTov K ^avarov. (1 Mace. 2, 59. Xen. 
 An. 3. 2. 11.) Once with. c. gen. of 
 place, pragn. Jude 5 \abi> e* yrjs Klyimrov 
 a-axj-as, i. e. having brought them out 
 safely. 
 
 2. Of sick persons, to save from death, 
 and so to heal, to restore to health ; Pass, to 
 be healed, to recover; Matt. 9, 21. 22 bis, 17 
 TTKTTIS crov crtcrcaKf ere Kal eV&>3; 17 yvvfj. 
 Mark 5, 23. 28. 34. Luke 7. 50. 8, 36. John 
 11, 12. Acts 4, 9. James 5, 15. al. Diod. 
 Sic. 3. 58. Isaeus 36. 12. 
 
 3. Spec, of salvation from eternal death, 
 from the punishment and misery consequent 
 upon sin, to save, to give eternal life ; so 
 espec. Christ, as the Saviour, with OTTO 
 C. gen. Matt. 1,21 eroxrfi TOV \abv alrov 
 airb dfj.apriS)v. Acts 2, 40. Rom. 5, 9 atrb 
 TTJS opyfjs. Opp. Kpivfiv to condemn, John 
 3, 17. 12, 47. Of God, praegn. aa^eiv TWO. 
 els TTJV f3a<riX(iav CIVTOV, to bring one safely 
 into his kingdom, 2 Tim. 4, 18. (So c. fls 
 pr. Diod. Sic. 3. 48 /xoXt? els TTJV olnelav 
 a-u^ovrai, Xen. An. 6. 4. 8.) Genr. Matt. 
 18, 11 )?X3e 6 vt. di/Sp&JTTOD crcacrai TO ano- 
 \ai\6s. Rom. 11, 14. 1 Cor. 1, 21 craicrai 
 rovs TTia-Tfiiovras. 1 Tim. 4, 16. Heb. 7, 25. 
 James 1. 21. Once 3ai/drou James 5, 20. 
 Pass. Matt. 10, 22 6 8e uTro/mVa? fls re Xos, 
 OVTOS o-<B37jo-mu. 19, 25. 24, 13. Mark 10, 
 26. 13, 13. 16, 16. Luke 8, 12. 13, 23. 
 John 5, 34. 10, 9. Rom. 5, 10. 1 Cor. 5, 5. 
 1 Tim. 2, 15. al. Hence Part, of <ro>6fj.(voi, 
 those saved, those who have obtained salva 
 tion through Christ, Acts 2, 47. 1 Cor. 1, 
 18. 2 Cor. 2, 15. Rev. 21, 24. Comp. 
 Ceb. Tab. 3 avrbs fie o-cu^erat, *cai (uucApias 
 Kal db aip.av yiyvfrai ev iravrl T<B /Si oi. 
 
 }4- + 
 
 (7fo)yU/a, arcs, TO, a body, as an organized 
 whole made up of parts and members. 
 
 1 . Genr. a body, any material substance, 
 a corporeal frame ; e. g. of plants, 1 Cor. 
 15, 37 ov TO o-co/Lia TO yfvrjaofjLfvov (nrfiptts. 
 v. 38 bis. Also of bodies celestial and ter 
 restrial, the sun, moon, stars, ib. v. 40 <r<a- 
 p.ara firovpdvia, Kal <rcap.aTa firlyfia, com p. 
 
 V. 41. Diod. Sic. 1.11 TO fj.fi> anav <TU>^H 
 TTJS rS)V oXwv (pvcrews f f]\iov Kal (Tf\r]- 
 VTJS a7rapTt feo-3at. Plato Phasdr. 245. e, o-&>- 
 pa (fj.\lsvxov Kal (fy\i\ov. Id. Tim. 32. C. 
 
 TO TOU KO(TfJ.OV (T(afJ.a. 
 
 2. Spec, an animal body, living or dead : 
 a) Of the human body, diff. from o-dp 
 
 which expresses rather the material of the 
 body. E. g. a) As living, Matt. 5, 29. 
 30 Iva . . . p.rj o\ov TO a-aipd crow /3X?j3^ fls 
 . 6, 25 bis. 26, 12. Mark 5, 29. 14, 
 
705 
 
 8. Luke 12, 22. 23. John 2, 21. Rom. 1, 
 24. 4, 19. 1 Cor. 6, 13. 15, 44 <ri/ia ^v 
 XIKOV ... nvfvfjLaTiKov. 2 Cor. 4, 10. 10, 10. 
 Col. 2, 23. Heb. 10, 5. 1 Pet. 2, 24. al. 
 Col. 1, 22 see in o-dp no. 4. In antith. 
 with ft V<-vx ;, Matt. 10, 28. Luke 12, 4 ; or 
 TO rrvfvua, Rom. 8, 10. 1 Cor. 5, 3. 7, 34 ; 
 or where o-w/ia, ^u^jj, irvevpa. make a peri 
 phrasis for the whole man, 1 Thess. 5, 23. 
 Sept. genr. for Itoa Lev. 6, 10. 14, 10; 
 Ft^ia Gen. 47, 18 ; O^a Dan. 4, 30. (Ml 
 V. H. 2. 5. Hdian. 1. 6. 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 8. 1 ; c. ^VXTI Jos. c. Ap. 2. 24. Hdian. 6. 
 5. 18. Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 19.) As the seat of 
 sinful affections and appetites ; comp. in 
 o-dp no. 3. Rom. 6, 6 o-eop-aTfjs afjujprtas. 7, 24 
 comp. 23. 8, 13. Col. 2, 11. So in Plato 
 Pheedo 55 10, 11, 27, 30. Xen. Cyr. 8.7. 20. 
 /3) Of a dead body, corpse, genr. Matt. 14, 
 12 rjpav TO o~5>p.a, KOI t Sa^rav OVTO. 27, 52. 
 58 bis, T/TTjo-aro TO crayta TOV irjarov KT\. V. 
 59. Luke 23, 52. 55. 24, 3. 23. John 19, 
 31. Acts 9, 40. Jude 9. al. Spec, of the 
 body of Christ as crucified for the salvation 
 of men ; Matt. 26, 26 TOVTO tern TO <ra>/ia 
 ftov. Mark 14, 22. Luke 22, 19. Rom. 7, 
 4 8ia TOV cr<i)(j.aTos Xpiorov, i. e. through 
 Christ crucified. 1 Cor. 10, 16. 11, 24. 27. 
 29. Sept. genr. for FPia i Sam. 31, 10. 12. 
 Neh. 3, 3 ; nisi Josh. 8, 29. 1 K. 13, 22. 
 24. So 2 Ma cc. 12, 39. Jos. Ant. 8. 1.4. 
 Hdian. 4. 2. 2. Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 25. 
 
 b) Of beasts, e. g. living, James 3, 3 KOI 
 5\ov TO crtafjia avTtov p.fTayoftfv sc. TCOV ITTTTUIV. 
 (Palaeph. 7. 1 o-oo/xa ?\ov <uj KVVOS.) Also 
 of the dead body of a beast, a carcass, 
 Luke 17, 37 OTTOU TO croma, eVet KT\. comp. 
 Matt. 24, 28 Trrw/xa. Of victims slain, Heb. 
 13, 11 ; comp. Ex. 29, 14. Num. 19, 3. 5. 
 So Horn. II. 23. 169 Spara o-co^ara. Philo 
 de Viet. off. p. 851. e, e iTrnficav a-w/itirwi . 
 
 3. Meton. to the body, as the external 
 man, is ascribed that which strictly belongs 
 to the person, man, individual. a) With 
 a gen. of pers. thus forming a periphrasis 
 for the person himself; Matt. 6, 22 oXov TO 
 o~S>p.d o~ov <jXi>T(ivbv fCfTai. v. 23. Luke 1 1 , 
 34. 36. Rom 12, 1 Trapacrrfjo-ai ra cra>p.ara 
 v/jiSav 3uo-i ai> <a<rav, i. e. your persons, your 
 selves, comp. 6, 13. Eph. 5, 28. Phil. 1, 20. 
 Genr. and absol. 1 Cor. 6, 16 6 KoAXu/zej/or 
 TTI 71-0,3177, (v <ro3/*a eoTi (antith. TO irvfii^a 
 v. 17), in allusion to Gen. 2, 24 where Sept. 
 s o-dpjca p.lav for Heb. 1^3. Comp. in 
 <rdp no. 4. So Xen. An. 1. 9. 12 KOI xpf;- 
 jiara /cat TrdAfts Acat ra lavfmv cra>p.aTa. Jos. 
 Ant. 11. 3. 10 yVKtUMM* KCU naiSiutv o-co/ia- 
 ra. Absol. Sept. Gen. 47, 12 Kara crra/ia, 
 i. e. according to the number of persons. 
 45 
 
 Diod. Sic. 13. 14 iras 6 TOITOS eyf/if erw/ler 
 TU>V. With an adj. ^Eschin. c. Ctes. p. 470 
 Dem. 910. 13 e Xev3f pa o-to/itara. Xen. Mem. 
 3. 5. 2 <ro)/iara dyaSd, good soldiers. Espec. 
 of slaves, c. adj. as o-co/iara 8oGXa Poll. On. 
 3. 71 or 78; cra>/i. a^aAamz Dem. 480. 
 10 ; o-. otKfTiKa ^Eschin. c. Timarch. p. 4-2 : 
 ra o~. T(ov oiKfTcav ib. p. 120. Hence in 
 later usage and N. T. b) Absol. a slate, 
 TO. o-<op.ara slaves ; once Rev. 18, 13 [yd 
 pov] innuiv Kal peScS> KOI o-co/idrcoi . So Tob. 
 10, 11 o~a>para Kal KTrjinj KOL apyvpiov. 
 2 Mace. 8, 11. Strab. 14. p. 985. b, o-w/xar 
 efjL-rropf iv. Pol. 18. 18. 6. Plut. Cimon 9. 
 See Lob. ad Phryn. p. 378. 
 
 4. Trop. a body, a whole, aggregate, a 
 collective mass, spoken of the Christian 
 church, the whole body of Christians col 
 lectively, of which Christ is 17 (ce0o>nj, the 
 head; Col. 1, 18 KCU avTos tcmv 17 Kf^aAi) 
 TOV O~U>HO.TOS, Trjs fKK\Tjo-ias. V. 24 vntp TOV 
 cruifiaros avTov, o tcrTiv 17 eKK\r]cria. Rom. 
 
 12, 5 Ot TToAAot fV O~0jud 0~{J.fV (V XplOTO). 
 
 1 Cor. 10, 17. 12, 13. 27. Eph. 1, 23. 2, 
 16. 4, 4. 12. 16 bis. 5, 23. 30. Col. 2, 19. 
 
 3, 15. Comp. Jos. Ant. 7. 3. 2 AainSrjr fie 
 
 TTjV Tf KCITCO TTO\IV 7T6plAaj3&)I , Kai TT)V UKpdV 
 
 frvvd^ras avTrj, firoirjcrfv tv trco/xa, i. C. one 
 whole. Diod. Sic. 1. 11 fin. TO o-co/ia TOV 
 Kocrfjiov crvyKficr^ai TVO.V e< TCOV Trpofipijfjifvuiv. 
 
 5. Trop. body, substance, reality, opp. 17 
 o-Kid the shadow, type ; Col. 2, 17 a eWt 
 crKia TtZi> fj.f\\6vTci>v, TO 8( crdifjui TOV XpioToiJ. 
 Jos. B. J. 2. 2. 5 o~Kiav aiTrjcro/j.fi os /Sao-t- 
 Aet ar, TJS rjpnacrei> tavTia TO d-wpa. Luc. 
 Hermot. 79. -f 
 
 O~a)/J,aTLKOS, rj, 6v, (o-co^a,) bodily, of or 
 like a body, Luke 3, 22 o-copariKw etSet. 
 Also pertaining to the body, 1 Tim. 4, 8 o-. 
 yvfj.vacria. Jos. B. J. 6. 1. 6 <r. etr. Pol. 
 
 4. 5. 1 o-. do-SeVeta. 6. 5. 7. Plato Locr. 96. a. 
 
 , adv. (o-co/ia,) bodily, in a 
 bodily form, clothed in a body, Col. 2, 9. 
 Plut. de def. Orac. 26. 
 
 O v, 6, Sopaler, pr. n. of a 
 Christian at Berea, Acts 20, 4. See in 2<a- 
 friiraTpos, also in Uvppos- 
 
 (TQ)peV(i)] f. fvcra), (crojpdf,) to heap, to 
 heap up, c. ace. Rom. 12, 20 ai/Spaicar irv- 
 pos crfopfvcTfis (irl TIJV Kf(p. aiTov, quoted 
 from Prov. 25, 22 where Sept. for Finn 
 praegn. comp. in aV3pa. So Judith 15, 11. 
 Pol. 16. 11. 4. Diod. Sic. 1. 62. Also to 
 heap up with any thing, c. dat. trop. 2 Tim. 
 
 3, 6 at o- cope vpera afiapTiais, heaped up with 
 sins, laden, burdened. Sopr. c. dat. Hdian. 
 
 4. 8. 20 \i3dvu TOVS Popovs tcrto 
 Pol. 16. 8. 9 c. gen. 
 
706 
 
 ov, 6, Sosthenes, pr. n. 
 a) Of the chief of a synagogue at Corinth, 
 Acts 18, 17. b) Of a Christian, the com 
 panion of Paul, 1 Cor. 1,1. Many hold 
 him to be the same as in lett. a. 
 
 ^(ocriTrarpof, ov, 6, Sosipater, pr. n. of 
 a Christian, a companion of Paul in Corinth, 
 Rom. 16, 21. Prob. i. q. 2o>7rarpoy Acts 
 20,4. 
 
 awrrfp, ijpos, 6, (o-a>,) a saviour, de 
 liverer, preserver, who saves from danger or 
 destruction and brings into a state of pros 
 perity and happiness ; so in Greek writers 
 of the deliverer and benefactor of a state, 
 Sept. for S- ttJia Judg. 3, 9. 15. Hdian. 3. 
 
 12. 4. Plut. Arat. 53 crovnjp TTJS TroXecas. 
 Xen. Hell. 4. 4. 6 o-wr^pes TTJS irarpiSos. 
 Also of the gods, as Zeiy o-wTJjp Xen. Cyr. 
 7. 1. 10. Plut. Arat. 53; O-WTJJP A-rroXXwv 
 Dem. 1072. 18 ; AtoVKovpoi (romjpey aZ. 
 V. H. 1. 30. In N. T. only of God and 
 Christ. 
 
 1. Of God, a Deliverer, Saviour ; Luke 
 1, 47 eVi TO> 3eo> ro> crcor^pt fi.ov. 1 Tim. 1, 
 ]. 2, 3. 4, 10 Sew U>VTI, Ss eon trtor^p 
 jraircof uv3pa>7ra>i . Tit. 1,3. 2, 10. 3, 4. 
 Jude.25 p.6vq) 3ea> o-coTJJpi rjp.>v. Sept. for 
 abstr. 5tt Is.. 17, 10. Hab. 3, 17 ; Wlti 1 ; 
 Is. 12,2; ?^*0 Is. 45, 15. 21. Ecclus. 
 51, 1. 1 Mace. 4, 30. 
 
 2. Of Jesus as the Messiah, the Saviour 
 of men, who saves his people from eternal 
 death, from punishment and misery as the 
 consequence of sin. and gives them eternal 
 life and happiness in his kingdom ; Luke 2, 
 11 (Tt-^j] vp.lv (Tr]p.cpov crwnjp. Acts 5, 31. 
 
 13. 23. Phil. 3, 20. 2 Pet. 1, 1. 11. 2, 20. 
 
 3, 2. 18 ; O-COTIJP fjp.S>v 2 Tim. 1, 10. Tit. 1, 
 
 4. 2, 13. 3, 6 ; cru>rrjp TOV (rcojuaros sc. TTJS 
 (KK\T)(Tias, Eph. 5, 23 ; crutrfjp TOV KOO~IJ.OV 
 John 4, 42. 1 John 4, 14. 
 
 crtoTijpia, as, 17, (o-wTjjpioy,) 1. safety, 
 deliverance, preservation, from danger or 
 destruction. a) Pr. Acts 27, 34 TOUTO yap 
 irpos rf/s vp.. (rcor^pi ar VTrdp^ei. Heb. 11,7. 
 Acts 7, 25 ; C. e* TWOS, Luke 1,71 crcorr;- 
 piav ( e^Spcoi t]p.u>v. V. 69 Ktpas crutTrjpias, 
 i. q. strong deliverer, see in *pay no. 1. 
 Sept. for SOJ Hab. 3, 12. Ex. 14, 13 ; nSlffiFi 
 Prov. 11, 14; c. OTTO for ftabB 2 Sam. 15, 
 
 14. So 2 Mace. 3, 32. Jos. Ant. 7. 1. 1. 
 jEschin. 83. 38 or. rys TroXswy. JE\. V. H. 
 9. 21. Thuc. 1. 65. b) Genr. welfare, 
 prosperity. Phil. 1,19 rovro poi dno^ria-frai 
 (Is o-ooTJjpiW. 2 Pet. 3, 15. 2 Cor. 6, 2 bis, 
 quoted from Is. 49, 8 where Sept. for 
 nsiis? . Sept. for nfto Gen. 28, 21. 44, 
 17. So Wisd. 6, 26. Hdian. 1. 9. 1. Diod. 
 
 Sic. 16. 43. c) From the Heb. dtliver- 
 ance, victory, Rev. 7, 10. 12, 10. 19, 1. 
 Sept. and Heb. nsiltf J 1 Sam. 14, 45. Heb. 
 3, 8 ; Wttin 2 Sam. 19, 3. 2 K. 5, 1. 
 
 2. Spec, in the Christian sense, salvation, 
 deliverance from punishment and misery as 
 the consequence of sin, and admission to 
 eternal life and happiness in the kingdom 
 of Christ the Saviour. Luke 1, 77 ftovvat 
 yvaxriv (rarripias. 19, 9. John 4, 22 r/ o-ca- 
 rnpia, i. e. salvation by a Messiah. Acts 4, 
 12 OVK fcrnv tv aXXw ovbevl r) <Ta>rr)pia. 13, 
 
 26. 16, 17. Rom. l 16. 10, 1. 10. 11, 11. 
 13, 11. 2 Cor. 1, 6 bis,Rec. 7, 10. Eph. 1, 
 13. Phil. 1, 28. 2, 12. 1 Thess. 5, 8. 9. 
 2 Thess. 2, 13. 2 Tim. 2, 10. 3, 15. Heb. 
 
 I, 14. 2, 3. 10. 5, 9. 6, 9. 9, 28. 1 Pet. 1, 
 5. 9. 10. [2,2.] Jude 3. Acts 13,47 retina o-e 
 . . . TOV flvai o~e fis vwrrjpiav etas t o^drou TIJS 
 yrjs,for salvation, to bring salvation, quoted 
 from Is. 49, 6 where Sept. for n^HJV 
 
 <T&)T^i09, ov, 6, f], adj. (acorjjp,) saving, 
 delivering, bringing deliverance and wel 
 fare, 3 Mace. 7, 18. Diod. Sic. 14. 30 Au 
 (rcor?;pt a). Luc. D. Deor. 26. 4. Xen. Mem. 
 3. 3. 10. In N. T. only in the Christian 
 sense, saving, bringing salvation ; Tit. 2, 
 11 fj x^P ls "7 creoTJjpioy. Hence Neut. TO 
 crwrijpioi as Subst. salvation, Eph. 6, 17 ; 
 also the doctrine of salvation by Christ, Acts 
 28, 28. Sept. for ttMttS-j Is. 12, 3. 51, 6. 
 Melon, for the Saviour, Luke 2, 30. 3, 6. 
 So Test. XII Patr. p. 542 e louSa di>areXeZ 
 vfuv TO crwr^piov TOV SeoiJ. p. 614. 
 
 craxppoveco, >, f. jjo-co, (o-a><pa>i/,) to be 
 of sound mind, i. e. 
 
 1 . to be sane, in one s right mind, compos 
 mentis ; Mark 5, 15 SecopoOo-t TOV 8aip.ovi6- 
 fjLevov . . . o~(i>(ppoi>ovvTa. Luke 8, 35. 2 Cor. 
 5, 13. Luc. Abdic. 1 TOI? /xeV aXXoir o-to- 
 (ppovel, KOT e/noO Se /xaiWrai. Plato Alcib. 
 
 II. 2. p. 133. C, TO /nmVetrSai apd yt virevav- 
 
 TlOV (T0\ SoK6t TW O-toCppOVflv. 
 
 2. Spec, to be sober-minded, to think and 
 act soberly, discreetly, to use sound judgment 
 and moderation ; Rom. 12, 3 (ppovflv ds TO 
 o-cocppovdv. Tit. 2, 6. 1 Pet. 4, 7. Luc. 
 Nigrin. 6. Hdian. 4. 14. 9. Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 
 30. Mem. 1.2. 17. 
 
 crco<frpovi(i), f. io-co, (0-oxppeoi ,) to make 
 of sound mind ; hence to make sober-minded, 
 to make think and act soberly, discreetly, to 
 teach moderation ; Hdian. 3. 10. 3 Toiy vlels 
 rraiSfuwi Kai. crtiXppovifav. Xen. Cyr. 3. ] . 
 
 27. An. 5. 9. 28. In N, T. to moderate, 
 to correct, to teach, c. ace. et inf. Tit. 2, 4 
 Iva o-o(ppoi i co(ri TO.S veas (f)i\dv8povs 
 
 <pl\OTfKVOVS, KlX. 
 
707 
 
 ov, 6, (o-axppoi/t fo),) pr. 
 i making of sound mind ; hence, a making 
 sober-minded, moderation, correction ; 2 Tim. 
 1, 7 jrvfvfjLa . . . (raxppovia-fjiov. Jos. Ant. 
 17. 9. 2. Plut. de Puer. educ. 20 Tmpareoi/ 
 ovv (Is TOV TU>V TtKvaiv (reo(ppovia-fj.ov Traps 
 oo-a/crX. Id. Symp. 3. 6. 1. 
 
 (TQ)(f)povct)f, adv. (a-<a<ppa>v,) with sound 
 mind, rationally, Luc. de Saltat. 84. Plato 
 Rep. 332. a. In N. T. with sober mind, 
 soberly, with moderation ; Tit. 2, 12 Iva 0x0- 
 (ppoixos Kal 8iKai(os KOI fvcrffius (^crco/iei/. 
 So Wisd. 9, 11. Hdian. 5. 8. 3. Xen. Cyr. 
 8. 4. 14. 
 
 s, fj, (o r co(ppcoi ,) sound 
 ness of mind, i. e. 
 
 1 . saneness, sanity, the being compos men 
 tis ; Acts 26, 25 ov jj.aivop.ai . . . craxppcxrv- 
 vrjs pf]p.aTa dncxp Seyyofjiai. Xen. Mem. 1.1. 
 1 6 TI o-dxbpocrvvT] ; rt pavia ; 
 
 2. Spec, sober-mindedness, sobriety of 
 
 mind, moderation of the desires, passions, 
 conduct ; according to Cicero i. q. Lat. tem- 
 peratio, moderatio, etiam modestia, Tuscul. 
 
 3. 8. So 1 Tim. 2, 9 /xera al8ovs Kal <ra>- 
 (ppoa-vvris Kocrp.fiv eavrovs. V. 15. 2 Mace. 
 
 4, 37. jEl. V. H. 7. 9. Plato Phaedo 13. 
 p. 68. c. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 15,21.23. Comp. 
 Sturz Lex. Xenoph. s. v. no. 3. 
 
 cra><f)p(i)V, ovos, 6, T], adj. (crcbs, obs. o-aoy, 
 (pprjv,) pr. of sound mind, sane, compos men 
 tis ; hence of one who follows sound rea 
 son and restrains his passions, Xen. Mem. 
 3. 9. 4 ; comp. Cyr. 3. 1. 15, 16sq. In 
 N. T. sober-minded, temperate, moderate, \. e. 
 having the mind, desires, passions moderat 
 ed and well regulated ; 1 Tim. 3, 2 Set ovi/ 
 
 TOV fTTlO KOTTOV flval . . . O~(l)(ppOVa. Tit. 1, 8. 
 
 2, 2. 5. So m. V. H. 14. 19. Hdian. 2. 1. 
 8. ^Eschin. 25. 37 < iraidbs fls yrfpas <ro>- 
 (ppa>v. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 20. Comp. Cic. 
 Tuscul. 3. 8. 
 
 T. 
 
 raflepvai, e3v, at, Lat. tabernce, taverns ; 
 only in the phrase Tpetr Tafifpvai, I^at. Tres 
 Taberncc, the Three Taverns, as pr. n. of a 
 small place on the Appian way, according 
 to the Itin. Antonin. 33 Roman miles from 
 Rome towards Brundusium. Acts 28, 15. 
 See fully in 
 
 , 7 ;, indec. Tabitha, the Ara 
 maean name of a female Christian, called in 
 Greek Dorcas ; see further in Aopcdy. Acts 
 9, 36. 40. 
 
 TayfACl, aros, TO, (Ta<rcr<u,) any thing 
 arranged in order, an array, e. g. a body of 
 troops, a land, cohort, Sept. 2 Sam. 23, 13. 
 Jos. B. J. 3. 4. 2. Diod. Sic. 17. 80. In 
 N. T. order, series, succession, i. q. rd^is. 
 1 Cor. 15,23 fKoa-ros 8e tv TW iSt w ra 
 
 TaT09, r], 6v, (raoro-a),) pr. set in order, 
 arrayed ; hence trop. set, fixed, appointed, 
 e. g. TaKTJ? Se rjpepa, upon a set day, Acts 
 12. 21. Sept. Job 12, 5 ds XP VOV TOKTOV. 
 Dion. Hal. 2. 74 Ta<rrj ^e pa. Pol. 29. 11. 
 8. Xen. Hell. 6. 2. 36 r. dpyvpiov. 
 
 TflA/U7nupe&), co, f. JJCTW, (raXatTreopof,) 
 to do hard work, to endure toil and hardship, 
 as arising from severe bodily effort, intrans. 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 16. 1. Dem. 156. 25. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 1. 18, 25. In N. T. trop. to endure afflic 
 tion, distress ; to be afflicted, distressed, mise 
 rable ; James 4, 9 TaXai7ro>p^<rarf , afflict 
 
 yourselves. Sept. for T!^ Jer. 4, 13. 20. 
 Mic. 2, 4. So Dem. 22. 24 \vnovvrai KOI 
 <rvv)((as TaXatTrcopoCai. Pol. 3. 60. 3. Thuc. 
 3. 3. Trans, to afflict, Sept. for *niB Ps. 
 17, 9. Is. 33, 1. 
 
 TdXaiTTWpia, as, f], (raXaiTrwpew,) hard 
 ivork, toil, hardship, severe bodily effort, 
 Jos. B. J. 7. 8. 2. AIT. Epict. 3. 24. 64. 
 Pol. 3. 17. 8. In N. T. distress, misery, 
 calamity ; James 5, 1. Rom. 3, 16 <rvvrpin- 
 fia Kal raXatTTcopta V ratr ofiots aircoj/, quot 
 ed from Is. 59, 7 where Sept. for "^O. 
 Sept. for liu Joel 1, 5. Am. 3, 10. JE,i V. 
 H. 13. 37 or 38. Thuc. 2. 70. ib. 4. 117. 
 
 TaXaLTTcapof, ov, 6, rj, adj. (collat. of 
 raXarretptoy ; obs. rXaw, rXij/zi, Tretpa,) pr. 
 enduring toil and hardship, as from severe 
 bodily effort, comp. in ToXaiTrcopeeo. In 
 N. T. trop. afflicted, wretched, miserable ; 
 Rom. 7, 24 raXaiVcopoj e ya> uv Spumos. Rev. 
 3, 17. Sept. for 1OW Ps. 137, 8. So 
 Ceb. Tab. 28. Dem. 548. 12. Plato Euthyd. 
 302. b. 
 
 Ta\avTialo<>, a (a, ov, (TuXairoi/,) weigh 
 ing a talent, a talent in weight ; Rev. 1 6, 
 21 xaXafa /xeyaXr; las TaXai/riat a, hailstones 
 weighing each a talent. Jos. B. J. 5. 6. 3. 
 Pol. 9. 41. 8. Plut. Demetr. 21 ; comp. 
 Diod. Sic. 19. 45. On adjectives of weight 
 and measure as ending in tator, see Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 544. 
 
rdkavrov 
 
 708 
 
 TaXaVTOV, ov, TO, (obs. rXaw,) pr. the 
 scale of a balance, Plur. TO. raXavra scales 
 Horn. II. 8. 69. Then, something weighed, 
 a weight ; and hence a talent, as a certain 
 fixed weight for gold, Horn. 11. 9. 122. 
 Theocr. 8. 53 ; also for silver, Hdot. 7. 28 ; 
 and later in commerce generally, though 
 varying greatly in different states and coun 
 tries. The talent every where contained 
 60 mince, or 6000 drachmae ; and the com 
 mon Attic talent as regulated by Solon, 
 and used in commerce was equivalent to 
 about 80 Ibs. avoirdupois. But the talent 
 of silver was reckoned at 80 Roman pounds, 
 or 57 Ibs. Engl. Pol. 22. 26. 19. Liv. 38. 38. 
 The Jewish talent, ^33 , contained 3000 
 shekels of the sanctuary, Ex. 38, 25. 26, 
 comp. Jos. Ant. 3. 6. 7 ; and was equal to 
 133| Rom. pounds, or about 95 Ibs. Engl. 
 Sept. for -)35j Ex. 1. c. Zech. 5, 7. Jos. Ant. 
 1. c. Diod. *Sic. 2. 9. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 54. 
 See Boeckh Metrolog. Untersuch. p. 52, 
 298 sq. Diet, of Antt. art. Pondera, also 
 App. Further, the talent was also used as 
 a denomination for money, which was an 
 ciently reckoned by weight ; and the value 
 of the talent therefore varied in proportion 
 to its various weight. The common Attic 
 talent is estimated at 243. 15s. sterling, 
 or about $1170; see Diet, of Antt. art. 
 Nummus, also App. Tab. XII. So Luc. 
 Navig. 1 3 ScoSeAca \TTIKU raXaira. Ml. V. 
 H. 1. 20. Xen. Mem. 2. 5. 2. In N. T. 
 genr. a talent, put for an indefinitely large 
 sum of money, Matt. 18, 24. 25, 15. 16 bis. 
 20 quater. 22 ter. 24. 25. 28 bis. 
 
 Aramaean fern. Nrpia , talilha, 
 i. q. Kopdo-iov, a damsel, maiden, Mark 5, 
 41. See Buxt. Lex. Chald. Rabb. 875. 
 
 TCt/uiioVj ov, TO, (Tafjiifva), rapids,} by 
 sync, for ra^ie iov, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 493 ; 
 a store-chamber, store-house, magazine; 
 Luke 12, 24 ols OVK eo-Ti ra^dov, sc. Kopa- 
 fi. Sept. for DGX Deut. 28, 8. Prov. 3, 
 10 ; -Htt Prov. 24, 4. So Luc. Rhetor. 
 prase. 17. Diod. Sic. 20. 58. Xen. Mem. 1 . 
 5. 2. Hence genr. any place of privacy, a 
 chamber, closet ; Matt. 6, 6 orav Trpoo-evxr/, 
 fi o-eXSe (Is TO Tapelov aov. 24, 26. Luke 12, 
 
 3. Sept. for *nn Gen. 43, 30. Is. 26, 20. 
 So Test. XII Pa tr. p. 701. Jos. Ant. 8. 15. 
 
 4. Trop. Psalt. Sal. 14, 5 ra/zeta Kapdias. 
 TafAietOV) ov, TO, (ra/iieuco,) i. q. Tap.fl- 
 
 ov, for which it is read in some editions, 
 Matt. 6, 6. Luke 12, 24. Pol. 6. 13. 1. 
 Xen. Eq. 4. 1. 
 
 ) see in vvv no. 1 . a. 
 
 / Co 
 
 Ta49 5 teas, T], (Tao-trco,) pr. a setting in 
 order, hence, order, arrangement, disposi 
 tion, Pol. 1. 4. 6. Xen. (Ec. 8. 3 ; espec. 
 of troops Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 6. An. 1. 2. 18; 
 an order, rank, in a state or in society, 
 Hdian. 5. 1. 10 e /c TT/S nnrdo os Toor, of 
 the equestrian order. Dem. 171. 17 ; rant, 
 office, post, Jos. Vit. 71. In N. T. 
 
 1. order, arrangement, series; Luke 1. 
 8 ev TTJ rdfi Trjs ((frrjuepias avTov. 1 Cor, 
 14, 40 KOTO. TUIV i. e, in proper order, or~ 
 derly. Trop. good order, well regulated 
 life, Col. 2, 5. 1 Esdr. 1, 15; Dem. 32, 18 
 vo-Tfpovrfj Tati, i. e. in order of time. Plut. 
 Marcell. 5 irapa Tagiv not orderly. 
 
 2. order, rank, quality, likeness; so in 
 the phrase lepevs Kara TUIV MeX^Kred/K, 
 i. e. a priest of the same order, rank, dignity, 
 as Melchisedek, Heb. 5, 6. 10. 6, 20. 7, 11. 
 17. 21; quoted from Ps. 110, 4 where 
 Sept. for Heb. irniM-b? ; and explained 
 by the writer himself, Kara TTJV o^oioYqra 
 MeXxio-eS/K Heb. 7, 15. Also Heb. 7, 11 
 ov KaTa+Tf)v TU^IV Aaptov. 2 Mace. 9, 18 
 tTno-TO\r)V iKfTrjpias Tat-iv f^ovcrav. Dem. 
 481. 21 ev fx%pov raei in quality of a. foe 
 505. 17 TTJV TOV Siicaiov TO.IV. 313. 13. 
 
 os, 77, 6v, (peril. Tanns, Sams 
 .) low, not high, pr. of things, place, 
 Pol. 9. 43. 3, 6 TOTT. 7rora/io y. Strabo 6. p. 
 426 Tanfivbv 8e Kal TO TTJS TroXfooy e Sa0or. 
 Xen. Eq. 1. 3. Mag. Eq. 5. 7. In N. T. 
 trop. 
 
 1. Of condition, lot, low, lowly, humble, 
 of low degree; Luke 1, 52 {tywo-e raTret- 
 vovs, opp. KaSfZXe Suraoras. James 1 , 9, opp. 
 6 irXovcrios. Sept. Job 12, 21. Pol. 25. 8. 
 
 I. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 52. 
 
 2. Of the mind, lowly, humble, modest, 
 including the idea of affliction, depression 
 of mind; 2 Cor. 10, 1 Tcnrtivos ev vfj.lv, i. e. 
 timid, modest, opp. ^appSav. Neut. Rom. 
 12, 16, see in o-viwrayw. (Xen. Ag. 11. 
 11.) Elsewhere with the accessory idea 
 of humble piety towards God, like Heb. 
 13? ^y , see Heb. Lex. s. v. James 4, et 
 1 Pet. 5, 5 Tarreivcls 8e [6 Seor] Si &oxn )(d- 
 ptv, opp. V7repr)(pdvois, quoted from Prov. 3, 
 34 where Sept. for 133 . 2 Cor. 7, 6. Matt. 
 
 II, 29 Tdirfivbs TTJ Kapo ia. So Sept. for 
 13? Is. 11, 4; "* Ps. 18, 28. Is. 66. 2 
 NSn Ps. 34, 19. 
 
 TaTreiVCKfrpOCrvwr), rjs, 17, (roTreu o^pwi ,) 
 lowliness of mind, humility, modesty of mind 
 and deportment; Acts 20, 19 8ov\fva>v T<B 
 Kvptw fifTa Tracrys TaTrftvofppocrviTjs. Eph. 
 4, 2. Phil. 2, 3. Col. 3, 12. 1 Pet. 5, 5. Aa 
 
709 
 
 feigned, Col. 2, 18. 23. So 
 
 Sept. for njtti Ps. 131, 2. Arr. Epict. 1. 9. 
 
 TaTTewofypwv, ovos, o, 17, adj. (ran-eiiw, 
 (f>pr]v.) low-minded, alyect, base, Plut. de 
 Alex! Fort. s. Vint. 2. 4. In N. T. of low 
 ly mind, humble-minded, modest, 1 Pet. 3, 
 8 Tairfiv6(f)povfs in later edit, for (piXo^poyer 
 in Rec. Sept. for nil bBO Prov. 29, 23. 
 
 TCL7TiVdU), o>, f. werco, (raTretvor,) 1. to 
 make low, to depress, c. ace. Luke 3, 5 
 irav opos Kal fiovvbs raTretfeoSijo erai, quo 
 ted from Is. 40, 4 where Sept. for bsej. 
 Strabo 5. p. 347 raTren oGrat ra opr]. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 36 TCOI/ irora/jLtav Tanfi.vovfj.f- 
 va>v. Dion. Hal. Ant. 2. 5. 
 
 2. Trop. a) As to condition, circum 
 stances, to bring low, to humbk, to abase ; 
 c. ace. eavTov to humble oneself, to make 
 oneself of low condition, to be poor and 
 needy, 2 Cor. 11, 7 opp. v^o co. Phil. 2, 8. 
 Mid. or Pass. id. Phil. 4, 12. Sept. for 
 va-hrin P r v. 13, 7; btti Is. 2, 9. 12. 
 So"2 Mace. 8, 35. Diod. Sic. 11. 38, 71. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 4. b) In mind and 
 heart, to make lowly, to humble, sc. one s 
 pride and lofty thoughts by disappointment ; 
 2 Cor. 12, 21 fj.fi iraXiv e ASoVra p.f Tairfi- 
 vwcrr) 6 Seo ff p.ov npos vfj,as. Pass. Matt. 23, 
 12. Luke 14, 11. 18, 14. With ace. eWdV 
 and also Mid. to humble oneself, to be hum 
 bled, to exhibit humility of mind and deport 
 ment; Matt. 18, 4. 23, 12 KOI OOTIS Tanft- 
 vaxTfi tavTov. Luke 14, 11. 18, 14. So 
 with the idea of contrition and penitence 
 towards God ; James 4, 10 Tanfiv^rjrf 
 (vuTTiov ToC 3fo{). 1 Pet. 5, 6. For this 
 Aor. as Mid. see Buttm. 5136.1,2. Sept. 
 for ^Bti Is. 5, 15. 10, 33 ; M Gen. 16, 9. 
 Is. 58, 3. 5. 
 
 TaTTeivwari?, eats, 17, (ranfivoai,) a mak 
 ing low, humiliation, depression, Psalt. Sal. 
 2, 39. Pol. 9. 33. 10. In N. T. the being 
 
 brought low, low estate, humiliation ; Luke 
 i ~ ft 
 
 1, 48 fal/SUy** TTI rr)v ranfivuxriv rrjs oov- 
 
 \rjs avrov. Acts 8, 33. James 1, 10 6 8e 
 rrXovo-toj [Kavxaa^ai ev rta ttyct avrov V. 9] 
 si/ rrj TairfivuHTfi avrov, i. c. even in his ex 
 ternal humiliation. Phil. 3, 21 TO <Ttop.a TTJS 
 TcnrfivGHreas w^v, genit. of quality, i. q. TO 
 (roj/ia TO rcmdvov. Sept. for ^B^. Ps. 1 36, 
 23 ; **y 2 Sam. 16, 12. Neh. 9, 9. So Ec- 
 clus. 2, 4. 5. Diod. Sic. 2. 45 TO!? 8e dv- 
 5pdo-t rcmfivuHTiv KOI 8ov\dav TrepiaTrreiv. 
 Plato Legg. 815. a. Comp. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 352. 
 
 Tapdcraai v. -TTO>, f. ^co, 1. to stir 
 up, to trouble, to agitate, c. ace. e. g. water 
 
 in a pool, TO i/Sw/j John 5, 4. 7. Sept. for 
 nVn Ez. 32, 2. 13. Horn. Od. 5. 291 irov 
 TOV. Luc. Lexiph. 4 (pdpp.aKov. Plut. Symp. 
 
 8. 8. 3 T<J TreXayjj. 
 
 2. Trop. of the mind, to stir up, to trou 
 ble, to disturb, with various emotions ; e. g. 
 with fear, to put in trepidation ; Pass, to be 
 in trepidation ; Matt. 2, 3 6 /SacrtAeuj eYa- 
 pax^- 14,26. Mark 6, 50. Luke 1,12. 24, 
 38. 1 Pet. 3, 14. Act. c. ace. Acts 17, 8. [13.] 
 Sept. for brQ3 Gen. 45, 3. Ps. 6, 2. 3. 
 (Hdian. 2. 5. 4. Xen. An. 2. 4. 18.) With 
 grief, anxiety, to trouble, to disquiet, Pass 
 John 12,27 17 ^f^XTI / iou TfrdpaKTcu. 13,21. 
 14, 1. 27. So John 11, 33 eYapae tavrov, 
 i. q. eVapap^Sj; TW nvevfj-ari in 13, 21. (Sept. 
 Gen. 43, 30. Ps . 55, 5.) With doubt, per 
 plexity, C. ace. Acts 15, 24 trapa^av vp.as 
 Aoyoif. Gal. 1,7. 5, 10. So Luc. Scyth. 
 3 TfTapaypevos rfjv yv^p.T)v. Xen. Mem. 2 
 6. 17. 
 
 Tapayfi, fjs, fj, (Tapao-o-u,) 1. a stir 
 ring up, troubling, agitation, e. g. of water 
 in a pool, John 5, 4. Luc. Haley. 4 AaiAcn^ 
 Kal rapaxr] sc. of the elements. Comp. Sept. 
 Is. 24, 19. 
 
 2. Trop. of popular excitement, a stir, 
 commotion, tumult; Mark 13, 8 eo-ovrai Xt- 
 /ioi Kal rapaxai 2 Mace. 3, 30. Po- 3. 9. 
 
 9. Xen. Vect. 5. 8. 
 
 Ta/3O/^O9, ov, 6, (Tapao-o-w,) a stir, com 
 motion, confusion, i. q. ara^ia Xen. CEc. 8. 
 
 10. comp. 9. In N. T. trap, a stir, e. g. 
 from fear and surprise, consternation, trepi 
 dation, Acts 12, 18. Sept. for maina 
 1 Sam. 5, 9. (Plut. J. Caes. 43. Xen. 1 An. 
 1. 8. 2.) Also of excitement, tumult, com 
 motion, Acts 19, 23. 
 
 Tapcrev$, tus, 6, (Tapo-or,) a man of 
 Tarsus, a native or inhabitant, Acts 9, 11. 
 21, 39. Luc. Macrob. 21. App. B. Civ. 
 5.7. 
 
 Tapcroy, ou, 17, Tarsus, a celebrated 
 city, the metropolis of Cilicia in Asia Minor, 
 on the banks of the river Cydnus, which 
 flowed through it and divided it into two 
 parts ; hence sometimes in Greek writers 
 called Tap<roi, comp. Xen. An. 1. 2. 23. 
 Tarsus was a celebrated seat of Greek phi 
 losophy and literature ; and from the num 
 ber of its schools and learned men was 
 ranked by the side of Athens and Alexan 
 dria; so Strabo 14. 5. p. 673 sq. The 
 city was made free by M. Antony; App. 
 B. Civ. 5. 7 AaoSiKf as 8e Kal Tapo"tay 
 e Xev3f povf i](pi(i Kal drtXels (popw. Th 8 
 seems to have implied the privilege of being 
 governed by their own laws and magis- 
 
Taprapoco 
 
 710 
 
 trates, with freedom from tribute ; but not 
 the right of Roman citizenship ; since the 
 Roman tribune at Jerusalem ordered Paul 
 to be scourged though he knew him to be a 
 citizen of Tarsus, but desisted after learn 
 ing that he was a Roman citizen ; Acts 21, 
 39. 22, 24. 27 sq. Later Tarsus appears 
 HS a Roman colonia, Cellar. Not. Orb. II. 
 p. 216. Com p. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 43, 71. 
 In N. T. Acts 9, 30. 11, 25. 22, 3. So 
 Jos. Ant. 1 . 6. 1 Tdpcros rcav TroXecoi/ [KiXi- 
 Kias] T) dio\oya>TdTT) KaXetrat, /i^rpoTroXis 
 ova-a. Diod Sic. 14. 20. Comp. Wetst. 
 N. T. II. p. 511, 608. Modern Tarsus 
 contains about 20,000 inhabitants with many 
 ruins, and is a filthy and miserable place ; 
 Russegger Reise I. p. 396 ; comp. Irby and 
 Mangles p. 502 sq. 
 
 raprapoa), S>, f. uaa, a verb formed 
 from the pr. n. Tdprapos, Tartarus, which 
 in Greek mythology was the lower part or 
 abyss of Hades, where the shades of the 
 wicked were imprisoned and tormented ; in 
 Jewish usage i. q. yeevva, see in aS?;?. Jos. 
 Ant. 18. 1. 3. Comp. Horn. II. 8. 13, 16. 
 Hes. Theog. 807. Plut. Consol. ad Apoll. 
 36 8t(rp.(i>Tripiov b 8e Idprapov KaXoixnv. 
 Hence in N. T. raprapout, to thrust down to 
 Tartarus, to cast into Gehenna, with ace. 
 impl. 2 Pet. 2, 4 (Tfipals 6(pov Taprapuxras. 
 Comp. els Tdprapov pmrtiv Horn. II. 8. 13 ; 
 tv Taprdpa 8(8ep.fvoi Jos. C. Ap. 2. 33. 
 So KararapTapoa, Sext. Empir. Pyrrh. Hyp. 
 3. 24 6 8f Zcvs rbv Kpovov KaTfTaprdpcocrf. 
 Apollodor. Bibl. I. 1, 2. 
 
 Tacraco v. -TTO), f. , to order, to set 
 in order, to arrange, genr. Sept. 2 Chr. 31, 
 2. Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 7; spec, to draw up 
 soldiers in ranks, in array, 2 Mace. 15, 20. 
 Hdian. 8. 1. 3. Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 8, 11. 
 In N. T. trop. 
 
 1. to set in a certain order, to constitute, 
 to appoint ; c. ace. also c. ds et dat. corn- 
 modi ; 1 Cor. 16, 15 els 8iaKovtav rots ayiois 
 eragav favrovs, i. e. have set or devoted 
 themselves. (Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 11 ovSe tls 
 TTJV 8ov\fiav av tp-avrov Tarrw.) Pass. c. 
 els, Acts 13, 48 ocrot r)(ra.v rerayp-evoi fls 
 feoTjv tumviov. With viro c. ace. Luke 7, 8 
 
 [Matt. 8, 9.] Absol. Rom. 13, 1. Sept. for 
 V33 Ez. 44, 14 ; Wto 2 K. 10, 24 ; rvtt) Jer. 
 3, 19. Pol. 5. 63. 4. Arr. Epict. 2. 17. 25 ; 
 vno nva Pol. 5. 65. 7. Diod. Sic. 4. 9. 
 
 2. to arrange, to appoint, c. ace. et dat. 
 Acts 28, 23 ra^dp-fvoi 8e airco r)p.fpav, i. e. 
 on their part. With dat. and inf. Acts 22, 
 10 2>i/ TfTdKrai croi Troirjcrcu. Inf. impl. 
 
 Matt. 28, 16. With inf. c. ace. Acts 
 15, 2 fragai> dva^aiveiv IlaiJXoi KT\. Sept. 
 for niti Job 14, 13 ; W 2 Sam. 20, 5. 
 So TIVI TI Ml V. H. 11. 9. Xen. Hell. 1. 
 5. 4; Tivl c. inf. Xen. Lac. 11. 6 ; inf. 
 1 Mace. 12, 26. Xen. An. 3. 1. 25. Cyr. 
 4. 5. 11. 
 
 Tow/309, ou, 6, a lull, bullock, Matt. 22 
 4. Acts 14, 13. Heb. 9, 13. 10, 4. Sept. 
 for "iW Ex. 21, 28. 29. Hdian. 5. 5. 16. 
 Xen. An. 2. 2. 9. 
 
 ravrd, by crasis for TO avrd, the same 
 things, 1 Thess. 2, 14; also Kara ravrd 
 after the same manner, thus, so, Luke 6, 
 23. 26. 17, 30. See in avros no. 3. a. 
 Buttm. 74. 2. 
 
 see n OVTOS. 
 Ta<f)r], fjy, jj, (SaTrro),) burial, sepulture ; 
 c. dat. commodi, Matt. 27, 7 tls ra(pr)v rols 
 (t>ois, for burial for strangers, to bury 
 strangers in; see Buttm. 5 133. 2. g, and 
 n. 5 sq. Matth. $ 394. Winer {31.1. Sept. 
 for rntni? Deut. 34, 6. Ecc. 6, 3 ; *OR 
 Ez. 32, 23. Jos. B. J. 1. 9. 1. Hdian. 8. 
 5. 18. Xen. Hell. 3. 3. 1. 
 
 Ta^oy, ov, 6, (3a7rTto,) burial, sepulture, 
 Jos. Ant. 17. 8. 3. Lys. 190. 17. InN.T. 
 and genr. a burial-place, sepulchre, Matt. 
 23, 27. 29. 27, 61. 64. 66. 28, 1. On He 
 brew sepulchres, see in p.vr]p.(lov. Sept. foi 
 131? Gen. 23, 4. 20. 2 Sam. 2, 31. (^El. V. 
 H. 12. 7. Dem. 1393. 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 
 13.) Trop. Rom. 3, 13 rdcpo? dvpyp.(vos 
 6 \dpvy aiircov, quoted from Ps. 5, 10 
 where Sept. for *I3)5 ; see fully in dvoiyu 
 no. 1. b. 
 
 Tappet, adv. (ra^vr,) quickly, speedily, 
 shortly, forthwith, Pol. 18.20.9. Xen. Hell. 
 7. 4. 34. In N. T. readily, lightly, possibly ; 
 hence, peradvenlure, perhaps, Rom. 5, 7. 
 Pliilem. 15. So Wisd. 14, 19. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 6. 5. Xen. An. 5. 2. 17. 
 
 adv. (ra^vs,) quickly, speedily, 
 pr. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 20. In N. T. soon, 
 shortly; 1 Cor. 4, 19 tXeva-op-ai 8e ra^e cos 
 rrpos vp-as. Gal. 1,6. Phil. 2, 19. 24. 2 Tim. 
 4, 9. Sept. for ^K Judg. 9, 48. Is. 8, 3. 
 (Jos. Ant. 7. 13. 2. Ceb. Tab. 31. Pol. 1. 
 61. 6.) Spec, quickly, hastily, Luke 14, 21 
 e^eX3e raxeW. 16,6. John 11, 31. 2 Thess. 
 2, 2. 1 Tim. 5, 22. Sept. for inn Prov, 
 25, 8. So Wisd. 14, 28. 
 
 Ta^t^09, 77, o i>, (ra^vy,) quick, swift, 
 e. g. TroSej-, Sept. for i^a Is. 59, 7. Wisd. 
 13,2; irrepvyes Anth. Gr. I. p. 168. In 
 N. T. trop. swift, speedy, i. e. near at hand, 
 
711 
 
 impending, 2 Pet. 1, 14. 2, 1 tndyovres 
 iavTois Taxivfjv dira>\tiav. So Ecclus. 18, 
 26. Anth. Gr. II. p. 91 tig rax^v \rfit$6va. 
 
 rd^iov, adv. pr. Neut. of Ta^twi/ later 
 comparat. to raxvs, instead of the earlier 
 ado-o-wi/, comp. Buttm. 67. 3 ; condemned 
 by the grammarians, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 77. 
 Winer } 11. 2; more quickly, more swiftly, 
 more speedily, c. gen. John 20, 4 Trpoefipa/xe 
 rdxiov row Iltrpov, i. e. he outran Peter. 
 (Diod. Sic. 20. 92.) Elsewhere sooner, the 
 object of comparison being every where im 
 plied, e. g. sooner than one expected or in 
 tended, the sooner; John 13, 27 o Trotelj, 
 TTOITJO-OV rdx<-ov. 1 Tim. 3, 14 &9cu -rrpos 
 (re rdxiov. Heb. 13, 19. 23. See Matth. 
 457. Winer { 36. 3. So Wisd. 13, 9. 
 
 1 Mace. 2, 40. Test. XII Patr. p. 628. 
 Diod. Sic. 2. 5. 
 
 , adv. (neut. plur. of ra^io-roy, 
 most quickly, most speedily ; e. g. 
 &>r rd^tara, the soonest possible, as soon as 
 possible, with all speed, Acts 17, 15; see 
 Buttm. 115. 4. 5. Luc. Rhetor. Praec. 1. 
 Xen. Cyr. 5. 14. 
 
 ra^09, eos, ovs, TO, (raxvy,) quickness, 
 swiftness, speed, Hdian. 1. 15. 11. Xen. Cyr. 
 3. 2. 4. In N. T. only in the phrase eV 
 rdxtt with speed, i. e. adverbially, quickly, 
 speedily, shortly, i. q. rax^s, see in eV no. 
 3. b. a. Luke 18, 8 Trotrja-ei TT\V fc&iKipru 
 aur<i/ eV ra^ei. Acts 25, 4. Rom. 16, 20. 
 [1 Tim. 3, 14.] Rev. 1, 1. 22, 6. Rev. 2, 
 5 Rec. where later edit. raxv. Also with 
 the idea of haste, Acts 12, 7. 22, 18. Sept. 
 for ina Deut. 9, 3 ; rnna 11, 17 ; us*? 
 Ps. 2, 12. Jos. Ant. 17. 5. 1. Diod. Sic. 
 16. 35. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 12. 
 
 etc, v, quick, swift, nimble, as 
 irobas Horn. II. 13. 249; trnroj T. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 25. In N. T. 
 
 1. Masc. raxvs, trop. quick, swift, i. q. 
 ready, prompt; James 1, 19 raxvs ejj TO 
 aKoCo-ai. Sept. and If* Prov. 29, 20. Ec 
 clus. 5, 11. Luc. Somn. 1. Hdian. 2. 9. 2. 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 31. 
 
 2. Neut. raxv as adv- <! Ta^ewr, 
 comp. Buttm. 115. 4; quickly, speedily, 
 with haste, Matt. 28, 7 rax^ 7ropev3ei<rai. v. 
 8. Mark 16, 8 Rec. Luke 15, 22 Lachm. 
 John 11, 29. Sept. for ^r\-Q 2 Sam. 17, 
 16. So Dem. 982. 17. Xen. An. 2. 2. 12. 
 Also quickly, soon, shortly, Matt. 5, 25 ; 
 and with the idea of suddenness, Rev. 2, 5 
 in later edit. v. 16. 3, 11. 11, 14. 22,7. 
 12. 20. Sept. for ->" Ps. 102, 3. So 
 
 2 Mace. 3, 31. Xen. An. 1. 9. 29. Spec. 
 
 readily, lightly ; Mark 9, 39 raxv 
 
 crai /*e. So Ecclus. 19, 4. Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 4. 
 
 Te. an enclitic copulative particle, and, 
 corresponding to KOI as Lat. -que to et, 
 Buttm. j 149. m. 8. Kiihner 321. 1 ; found 
 in N. T. chiefly in the writings of Luke 
 and Paul, and also the Ep. to the He 
 brews; in Matt, four times, 22, 10. 23, 6. 
 27, 48. 28, 12; Mark once, 15, 36 ; John 
 thrice, 2, 15. 4, 42. 6, 18 ; James twice, 
 3, 7 bis ; Jude once, v. 6 ; in Rev. twice, 
 
 I, 2. 21, 12. In general, <al is used to 
 couple ideas which follow directly and ne 
 cessarily from what precedes ; while re is 
 employed when something is subjoined 
 which does not thus directly and necessari 
 ly follow ; so that strictly speaking, KOI 
 connects and re annexes ; the former is 
 conjunctive, the latter adjunct! ve. Hence 
 re is the most general of all the copulatives ; 
 serving merely to show, that the word after 
 which it stands is to be taken as in some 
 connection with another either preceding 01 
 following. The place of re is usually after 
 the first word of a clause. See Passow s. v. 
 Herm. ad Vig. p. 833 ; ad Eurip. Med. p. 331 
 Matth. ^ 626. Winer 5 57. 3 sq. 5 65. 5. n. 
 
 1. Simply, i. e. without other particles, 
 where it then serves to annex, as above. 
 Matt. 28, 12 (Tvvax^fvrfs ... eriyi/SovAtoi/ rt 
 Xa/Soj/rff. John 4, 42 rfj re yvvaiKi eXeyoi/. 
 6, 18. Acts 2, 3. 33. 37 tlmw re rrpos rov 
 nirpov. 3, 10. 4, 13. 33. 5, 42. 8, 1. 3. 6. 
 12, 12 orwSwi/ re ^\3ev KT\. 18, 11. 20, 
 
 II. 23, 10. 24, 27. Rom. 2, 19. 1 Cor. 4, 
 21. Heb. 1, 3. Jude 6. al. So in a paren 
 thesis, Acts 1, 15 r]v re o^Xor oi/o/idrcov KrX. 
 Once preceded by /i^re . . . /xijre, Acts 27, 
 20. So Wisd. 8, 19. 3 Mace. 6, 32. Hdian. 
 1. 2. 3. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 19 ; with /iqre prec. 
 Xen. An. 4. 4. 6. Also repeated as annex 
 ing several particulars, re ... re , and, and, 
 Lat. que ... que; Acts 2, 46. 16, 11. 12. 
 24, 23. Heb. 6, 2 eVi^e trews re x (l P> v i <*va- 
 (rrdcrecos re veK.p<av, KOI Kpiparos maw ov. 
 Once i. q. both ... and, Aots 26, 16. See 
 Passow no. 2. Matth. 5 626 init. Viger p. 
 518. So Wisd. 7, 13. Hdian. 1. 2. 6. Plato 
 Phaedr. 267. a. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 10. 
 
 2. Most freq. as strengthening KOI, either 
 directly before it, as re KOI, or with one or 
 more words intervening, re ... KM, i. q. Lat. 
 que ... et, implying close connection, not 
 only . . . but also, both . . . and ; see Passow 
 no. 3. Buttm. { 149. m. 8. Kuhner 5 321. 1. 
 Matth. ^ 626. So as connecting clauses; 
 Matt. 27, 48 TrXijeraf re oovs Kal TreptSeit 
 KoXd/LWB. Luke 24, 20. Acts 9, 18. 10,2, 
 
T 
 
 712 
 
 TCKVOV 
 
 Heb. 6, 4. al. (Wisd. 4, 2. Luc. D. Deor. 
 18. 1. Hdian. 6. 6. 1. Thuc. 4. 46.) As 
 coupling together infinitives depending on 
 the same verb ; Luke 12, 45 Kal apgrjTai . . . 
 eVSteif re KOI nivfiv Kal p-eSvovceo-Sat. Acts 
 1,1. (Luc. D. Deor. 19. 2.) As connect 
 ing nouns, etc. e. g. re KOI, Luke 21, 11 
 (pofirjTpd re <al o^p-eta. Acts 2, 9. 10 3>pu- 
 yiav rt Kal ITa/tipuXiaz . 26, 3. Rom. 1, 12. 
 14. 1 Cor. 1, 2. 30. Heb. 2, 4. James 3, 7. 
 al. Adverbs, Acts 24, 3 iravrr] re Kal irav- 
 raxov. (Sept. Job 9, 4. Ceb. Tab. 2. Hdian. 
 1. 1. 1. Plato Legg. 796. d. Xen. Hell. 1. 
 4. 15, 16.) Also where one or more words 
 come between re and KM, as Luke 2, 16 
 TTJV re Mapiap, Kal rbv iwcrijtp. John 2, 15 
 TO. re Trpoftara Kal TOVS /3oay. Acts 1, 8. 
 26, 30. Phil. 1, 7. Heb. 9, 2. 19. al. So 
 Luke 21, 11 creicrp-oi re p,eydXoi ... Kal Xi- 
 fioi. Rom. 1, 16 lovSai w re irpfoTov Kal 
 E\\rjvi. (Hdian. 1. 5. 24. Xen. Mem. 1.1. 
 3.) Here sometimes the word next before 
 re is also implied after KOI, i. e. the re marks 
 it as belonging equally to both members ; 
 e. g. Acts 2, 43 TroXXci re re para Kal [TTO\- 
 Xa] 0-rjfj.fla. Also the article, Acts 1, 13 
 o,re litrpos Kal IaK<o/3oy KrX. 13, 1. Rom. 
 1 , 20. Or a relative, Acts 26, 22 ovSeV eKros 
 Xe ycoi , 3>i> re ot TrpcKprjrai (\aXr)crav . . . Kal 
 MUIVO-TJS. Espec. a preposition, Acts 28, 23 
 OTTO re TOV vop.ov MootJcrecof Kal [OTTO] rail/ 
 irpo(pr)Tw. 25, 23. Comp. Matth. $ C26. 
 Winer } 65. 5. n. (Hdian. 6. 3. 2. ^El. V. 
 H. 3. 1. Plato Legg. 796. d, eis re TroXiret- 
 av Kal ISiovs (HKovy.) So two nouns of op 
 posite signification are sometimes connected 
 byre Kai, forming then a periphrasis for all; 
 Matt. 22, 10 Trovrjpovs re Kal dyaSouj. Acts 
 24, 15. 26, 22. Heb. 5, 14. Comp. Matth. 
 1. c. (Comp. Xen. Hi. 1. 2.) Rarely re KOI 
 is put in the sense of que eliam, and also, 
 Acts 1 9, 27 ; eri re Kai, and further also. 
 Acts 21,28; 6/j.oiats re Kal, and in like man 
 ner also, Rom. 1, 27. Here Kal seems to 
 be used merely to strengthen re ; comp. 
 Winer 57. 3. Herm. ad Soph. Elect. 873. 
 
 3. Sometimes re corresponds to 8e in a 
 following clause, where the connection is 
 then adversative or antithetic, and thus em 
 phatic ; e. g. Acts 19, 3 efrre re irpbs OVTOVS 
 ...ol be flirov. 22, 8, comp. 10. 22, 28. 
 See Passow no. 8 Matth. 1. c. p. 1276. 
 Stallb. ad Plat. Phileb. p, 36. Plato Rep. 
 394, c. Xen. Conv. 8. 2. 
 
 4, With other particles : a) re yap, 
 where re simply annexes and yap assigns a 
 reason, comp. above in no. 1. Rom. 1, 26 
 ai re yap SijXeiai avr&v. 7, 7. Heb. 2, 11. 
 So Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 3 ovroj re yap. 
 
 b) fav re, pr. and if; repeated eav it 
 . . . tav re, i. q. whether ... or, Rom. 14, 8 
 quater ; edz/ re yap Kat, pr. for though also, 
 2 Cor. 10, 8; here the force of ri cannot 
 well be given in English ; comp. above in 
 no. 2 fin. So Xen. Mem. 2. 4. 6. 
 
 c) etre, see in III. 2. i. 
 
 d) o,re, J?,re, ro ,re, i. e. the art. 
 with re , so written to distinguish it from 
 the adverbs ore, rdre, and simply expressing 
 the article in connection with the usage ot 
 re as above given. E. g. where r merely 
 annexes, Acts 19, 12 ret re Trvevp-ara KrX. 
 26, 30. 27, 3. 5. Heb. 9, 1. Followed by 
 KOI after one or more intervening words; 
 see above in no. 2 ; Acts 5, 24 o,re fepev? 
 Kat o (rrpaTijyos. 17, 10. 14. Eph. 1, 10. 
 Heb. 9, 2. Luke 23, 12. Also o,re yap ... 
 Kat, Heb. 2, 11. Rom. 1, 26 ; see above in 
 lett. a. -j- 
 
 ret^09, eor, ot>r , TO, a wall, espec. of a 
 city; Acts 9, 25 KU^KOV dia TO re^or. 
 2 Cor. 11, 33. Heb. 11, 30 ra ret ^ lept^w. 
 Rev. 21, 12. 14. 15. 17. 18. 19. Sept. for 
 !-!?2in Josh. 6, 5. 20. Hdian. 8. 2. 13. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 7. 
 
 T6KfJ,r)plOV t ov, TO, (TfKfJ.aipop.ai, TfK- 
 a sure sign, certain token, infallible 
 proof, Acts 1, 3. 3 Mace. 3, 24. Jos. de 
 Vit. J 1. Diod. Sic. 1. 10. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 
 2. Hesych. reKp-ijptoi/ o~r]p.fiov dX ySe s. 
 
 TeKVlOV, ov, TO, (dim. reWov,) a liiilt 
 child; Plur. trop. as an endearing appella 
 tion. TfKvia, little children, like iat. Jilioli, 
 carissimi; John 13, 33. Gal. 4, 19. 1 John 
 2, 1. 12. 28. 3, 7. 18. 4, 4. 5, 21. Pr. An- 
 thol. Gr. III. p. 44. no. 78. p. 48. no. 95. 
 
 re/cvoyoveo), , f. fjo-ca, (rcKvoyovos; 
 TtKvov, obs. ye i/o), ytVo/iat,) to bear children, 
 or as in Engl. to be the mother of a family, 
 including all the duties of the maternal re 
 lation, 1 Tim. 5, 14 ; comp. v. 10, and see 
 in TfKvoyovla. Pr. Anthol. Gr. II. p. 202. 
 
 TKVoyovia, as, 77, (reKvoyoi/ew,) the 
 bearing of children, and so including all the 
 duties of the maternal relation ; 1 Tim. 2, 
 15 <ra>3)7<Terai 8ia TTJS TfKvoyovlas, i. e. in 
 becoming the mother of a family and the 
 faithful performance of her duties in that 
 relation, in bringing up her household unto 
 God, comp. 5, 10. This is a privilege of 
 the woman, to be set off against v. 14. 
 Chrysost. ad h. 1. TtKvoyovLav (pijcri, TO py 
 fjiovov TCKelv, dXXa Kal Kara Seov dyayelj . 
 
 TeKVOV, ov, TO, (rue,) 1. a child, 
 male or female, son or daughter. a) Sing. 
 a child, Luke 1, 7 OVK TJV avTois Texvov. 
 
T6KVOV 
 
 713 
 
 Te Xew? 
 
 Acts 7, 5. Rev. 12, 4. Plur. children, Matt. 
 10, 21 reKva eVi yovfls. Mark 12, 19. Luke 
 
 20, 31. Acts 21, 5 avv yvvai{-i Kal TfKvois. 
 Tit. 1, 6. 2 John 4, 13. al. Sept. Plur. 
 for B^a Gen. 3, 16. 30, 1 ; D 1 ^? Gen. 33, 
 6. 7. So Plur. Ceb. Tab. 8. Hdian. 8. 3. 
 
 2. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 4. b) Spec, a son, 
 Sing. Matt. 10, 21. 21, 28 T(KVOV, inraye KT\. 
 Phil. 2, 22. Rev. 12, 5. Plur. sons, Matt. 
 
 21, 28 avSpcoTroj fixe dvo TIKVO.. Acts 21, 
 21. Sept. for -ja Gen. 17, 16. 22,7.48, 
 19; CPsa Esth. 9, 25. So Sing. Luc. 
 Tyrann. *20. Hdian. 7. 10. 14. Plur. of 
 daughters, Xen. Cyr. 7. 4. 5. 
 
 2. Plur. TtKita, children, in a wider 
 sense by Hebr. i. q. descendants, posterity ; 
 Matt. 3, 9 eyelpcu Ttxva r<Z A/3pad/*. Luke 
 1, 17. 3, 8. Acts 2, 39. Rom. 9, 7. v. 8 bis, 
 comp. in o-ap no. 2. c, and in eVayyeX/a 
 no. 3. a. Gal. 4, 28. 31. So Sept. for 
 DIJS Ex. 10, 2. Josh. 14, 9. Zech. 10, 7. 
 9; rvnnK Ps. 109, 13. Jer. 31, 17. Em- 
 phat. i. q. true children, genuine descend 
 ants, John 8, 39. 1 Pet. 3, 6. 
 
 3. Trop. a child, one who is the object 
 of parental love and care, or who yields 
 filial love and reverence towards another. 
 
 a) As a term of endearing address in the 
 Vocative, like Engl. my child, my son, Lat. 
 wit Jili, carissime ; e. g. from a friend or 
 teacher, Matt. 9, 2 3upcr, TCKVOV. Mark 2, 
 5. Luke 16, 25. 1 Tim. 1, 18. 2 Tim. 2, 1. 
 Plur. Mark 10, 24. So Sept. for -]3 1 Sam. 
 
 3, 9. 16. So Ecclus. 2, 1. Hdian." 1. 6. 12. 
 
 b) From the Heb. genr. for a pupil, dis 
 ciple, the spiritual child of any one, see in 
 yfvvdo) no. 1. b, and jrarrjp A. 3. 2 Tim. 
 1, 2 Ti/io3e a> dyaTTJjTw rtoHp. Philem. 10. 
 3 John 4. With eV nvplat \ Cor. 4, 17 ; V 
 nioTfi 1 Tim. 1,2; Kara iricrriv Tit. 1 , 4. 
 Plur. 1 Cor. 4, 14. 2 Cor. 6, 13. Comp. 
 Heb. ia Sept. vlos, 1 K. 20, 35. 2 K. 2, 3. 
 5. c) Tfuva roii 3eov, children of God, 
 those whom God loves and cherishes as a 
 father ; see in irarfip B. 1,2; also ye vvaa> 
 no. 1. c. So of the Jews, John 11, 52; 
 comp. Sept. and Qi33 Is. 30, 1. Hos. 11, 1 
 sq. Wisd. 16, 21 comp. 20. Genr. of the 
 pious worshippers of God, the righteous, 
 saints, Christians; John 1, 12 e8<i>K(v au- 
 Tciis (ovo~iav rticva Stou yei/e<r3a. Rom. 8, 
 16. 17. 21. 9, 8. Eph. 5, 1. 1 John 3, 1. 2. 
 10. 5, 2. So Sept. Prov. 14, 27. d) 
 TtKva TOV SiajSoXou, children of the devil, 
 his followers, subjects, vassals, opp. ra T. 
 TOV 3eov, once 1 John 3, 10. Comp. -ja 
 3 K. 16, 7, Sept. vlos. 
 
 4. By Hebr. joined with the name of a 
 
 city or the like, a nalice, an inlutlrilant, one 
 born or living in that city. Matt. 23, 37 
 lfpovo-a\f]fj. . . . Trocrd/Ktr ^3f X;cra eVicrwa- 
 yayfiv TO. TfKva crov. Luke 13, 34. 19,44. 
 Gal. 4, 25. Rev. 2, 23. So Sept. and 
 C^a Joel 2, 23. Zech. 9, 13. Is. 60, 4. 9. 
 Psalt. Sal. 11, 3. 
 
 5. 13y Hebr. with a genit. of quality or 
 condition, the child if any thing, i. e. one 
 connected with, partaking of, or exposed to 
 that thing ; often put instead of an adjec 
 tive. Matt. 11, 19 et Luke 7, 35 (SiKai^rj 
 
 f] O~O(j)ia OTTO T(Ol> TfKVlOV CIVTTJS. Eph. 5, 8 
 TfKIHl (p(OTOS, i. q. flY^ttTW/MVM. 1 Pet. 1, 
 
 14 r. vTraKoijs, i. q. VTTTJKOOI. Eph. 2. 3 T. 
 rfjs opyTJs, exposed to the wrath of God. 
 2 Pet. 2, 14 T. Kardpas. So Sept. TSKVU 
 atrotXfias for Heb. 2>tl5a -nisi Is. 57, 4 ; T. 
 aSiKias for Heb. nblS 13 3 Hos. 10, 9. 
 Comp. also -ja Deut. 25~, 2." 1 K. 2, 26. 2 K. 
 14, 14. Winer 5 34. 2. n. 2. Heb. Lex. art. 
 ,3 no. 4. 8 ; p,a no. 7. Epiph. Opp. I. p. 
 380. b, 01 viol Tijs d\;3n/^f rrlo Tfos. 4* 
 
 TKvorpo(f)e(i), w, f. T)o-a>, (TfKvorp6(pos; 
 TfKvov, rpetpo),) to bring up children, to ful 
 fil the duties of a mother, 1 Tim. 5, 10: 
 comp. in Ttwoyovia. Pr. Aristot. H. An. 
 9. 40. 32 ; so Subst. Texvorpocpia. Id. H. An. 
 3. 4. 5. 
 
 TKTQ)Vj ovos, 6, (kindr. Tt-^vrj, rev^w, 
 TfKflv, TI KTW,) pr. an artificer, craftsman ; 
 spec, a worker in wood, a carpenter, joiner, 
 Matt. 13, 55. Mark 6, 3. Sept. T(KTUV 
 gvXuv for Heb. l^n 2 Sam. 5, 11. Is. 40, 
 20; TfKT. (ri8f]pov 1 Sam. 13, 19; T. x<zA- 
 KOV 1 K. 7, 14. Luc. Vit. Auct. 11. Xen. 
 Ag. 1. 26. Hesych. riiertaw nas ttxvinfe. 
 
 reXeto?, eta, tiov, (TXOJ,) pr. having 
 reached the end, term, limit. . Hence 
 
 1. complete, perfect, full, wanting in no 
 thing; James 1, 4 epyov re Xetoi/. v. 17. 25. 
 1 John 4, 18 T) reXei a aycmr]. Comparat. 
 Heb. 9. 1 1 reXetortpay (rKtjvrjs. Sept. Trpd- 
 /3aroi> reX. for Gi52n Ex. 12, 5. So Aquil. 
 Prov. 11, 1 o-TaBp.iov re\fiov. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 7 rfXe/a avgva-is. Pol. 1. }. 8. Plato Farm. 
 157. e. Trop. in a moral sense; of per 
 sons, Matt. 5, 48 bis, reXetot, Sxrnep 6 ira- 
 rf]p vfj.u>v ... . rtXfius O-TI, comp. Luke 6, 
 36. So Matt. 19, 21. Col. 1, 28. 4, 12. 
 James 1,4 Iva r/re re Xfiot. 3, 2. Of the 
 will of God, Rom. 12, 2. Neut. ro ri\tiov, 
 completeness, perfectness, in knowledge of 
 the truth, opp. tn ptpovs, 1 Cor. 13, 10. 
 Sept. for B-van Gen. 6, 9. 18, 13; aba 
 1 K. 8, 62. 11, 4. So Ecclus. 44, 17. 
 Isocr. Panath. p. 239. c, TfXf/ov? avdpat 
 
714 
 
 tivai, Kal Trdcras fX flv Tas dpeTas- Plato 
 Legg. 643. d. 
 
 2. Spec, of full age, adult, full grown ; 
 of persons, pr. Pol. 5. 29. 2. JEl V. H. 13. 
 1. Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 6. In N. T. trop. of 
 persons full grown, ripe, in mind and under 
 standing, Tais (ppfo-i 1 Cor. 14, 20; or in 
 knowledge of the truth, 1 Cor. 2, 6. Phil. 
 3, 15. Heb. 5, 14; or in Christian faith and 
 virtue, Eph. 4, 13. 
 
 reXetOTT??, 777-0?, f/, (reXftor,) complete 
 ness, perfeclness ; Col. 3, 14 o-vv8fo-}j.os TTJS 
 TfXfioTrjTos, see in crvv8fcrp.os. Heb. 6, 1 
 rt T}JV TfXfioTrjTa (pepw^eSa, i. e. leaving 
 the rudiments of Christian doctrine, let us 
 go on to something more complete, perfect. 
 Wisd. 6, 15. 12, 17. Plato Def. 412. b,d. 
 
 TeXeiOO), co, f. cocrco, (re Xetoy,) to com 
 plete, to make perfect, so as to be full, want- 
 ng in nothing. 
 
 1. Pr. to bring to a full end, to complete, 
 to finish, c. ace. e. g. a work or duty, TO 
 epyov, TO. f pya, John 4, 34. 5, 36. 17, 4. 
 Mid. with epyov imp], Luke 13, 32 Kal TTJ 
 TpiTfl Tf\fiovp.ai, I finish the work. Of a 
 race, TOV 8p6p.ov Acts 20, 24. Sept. genr. 
 for Ban l K. 7, 21 ; obti 2 Chr. 8, 16. So 
 Ecclus. 50, 19. Pol. 8. 36. 2. Plut. Cons, 
 ad Apoll. 17. Of time, Luke 2, 43 TeXeiw- 
 frdvrwv TOS rj/jifpas. Of declarations, pro 
 phecy, i. q. to fulfil, John 19, 28 Iva TeXet- 
 <03# r; ypa(prj. So Act. Thorn. 10 ; Trpo - 
 Seo-ip Diod. Sic. 3. 74 fin. Comp. TfXei co- 
 
 (TIS. 
 
 2. Trop. to make complete, perfect ; to 
 bring to a state of completeness, perfectness. 
 a) Genr. John 17,23 Iva >o~i T(Tf\i<a}ifvoi 
 els ev, praegn. that they may be perfectly 
 united into one. 2 Cor. 12, 9 fj yap 8vvafiis 
 fiov [TOV 3eou] tv acrSevem rfXeiovrai, i. e. 
 my power shows itself perfect in weakness, 
 appears then as the true power of God ; 
 comp. 4, 7. James 2, 22. 1 John 2, 5. 4, 
 12.17.18. (Ecclus. 7, 32.) Of character, 
 Pass. Phil. 3, 12 o\>x on . . fj8r) rereXeuiyiat, 
 i. e. in Christian character and attainments ; 
 see in KaTa\ap.&dva> no. 2. b) In the Ep. 
 to the Hebrews, in a moral sense, to make 
 perfect in respect to sin, to fully cleanse from 
 sin, to make full expiation for- any one ; 
 Heb. 7, 19 ov8ev yap tTf\fia>o~ev 6 v6p.os, 
 i. e. the Mosaic law could make no perfect 
 expiation; comp. 7, 11. 10,4. Of persons, 
 Heb. 9, 9 8capd TC Kal 3vo-uu . . . p.r) 8vvdp.- 
 vai KUTO. (TWti8r]o~iv Te\ia>o~ai TOV \aTpevov- 
 TU, i. e. which could never make full expia 
 tion for the bringer, so as to satisfy his 
 conscience. 10, 1. 14. Also, to make per- 
 
 fect, pr. to carry through to the end, in re 
 spect to condition, happiness, glory ; to 
 bring to a perfect condition of happiness 
 and glory, to make perfect in glory ; equiv. 
 to Sodo John 7, 39. 12, 23. So of Christ 
 as exalted to be Head over all things, Heb. 
 2, 10 TOV dpxyyov TTJS (TdHTTjpias rjfJiuv 8ia 
 Tra%r)p.a.Tui)v TeXftcoaw, i. q. in v. 9 8ia TO 
 TT(far)p.a TOV 3ajrou 8oi; Kal TI/J.TJ fO-Tf(pa- 
 va>jj.(vov. 5, 9. 7, 28. Also of saints ad 
 vanced to glory, 1 1, 40. 12, 23. See Bleek 
 Hebraerbr. II. p. 298. 
 
 reXeto)9, adv. (r Xos,) completely, per 
 fectly ; 1 Pet. 1,13 rcXciW e X7r<rare, i. e. 
 have a full and perfect hope, unwavering 
 confidence. 2 Mace. 12, 42. Pol. 6. 37. 4. 
 Plato Def. 411. d. 
 
 TeX.ei&)cr49, ea>s, fj, (reXeiow,) comple 
 tion, perfection, genr. Diod. Sic. 2. 29. Plut. 
 de Virt. et Vit. 2. In N. T. 
 
 1. Of a prediction,/uZ/iZmen, Luke 1, 45. 
 Judith 10, 9. 
 
 2. perfect expiation, Heb. 7, 11 ; comp. 
 in TeXeio co no. 2. b. 
 
 T\eiO)TT]<f, oC, 6, (i-fXeio co,) a completer, 
 perfecter, finisher, who brings through to 
 the end ; Heb. 12, 2 ds TOV Trjs Tn crrecor dp- 
 XVybv Ka * rcXe*T^i irjo-oGj , unto the author 
 and finisher of our faith. 
 
 re\ea-<f)0pe(i), , f. ijo-w, (rfXeo-^opor ; 
 re Xoy, (p/pw,) to bring to perfection or ma 
 turity, e. g. fruit, grain, to ripen, absol. and 
 trop. Luke 8, 14 ov Tf\to-(popovo-t,, parall. 
 aKapnos yivfTai Matt. 1 3, 22. Pr. of fruits 
 Jos. Ant. 1. 6. 3. Philo de Opif. p. 26. d, 
 avov(Ti Kal Tf\fcr(})opov(n. Diod. Sic. 2. 36. 
 Theophr. H. PL 8. 7. 6. 
 
 TeXeuraft), a>, f. ijaw, (reAfin-^,) to end, 
 to bring about, to finish, to complete, c. ace. 
 Eurip. Phcen. 1597 oi Trdrtp, or raCra re- 
 Xeura. Dem. 13. 15. Also TOV j3iov rfXtu- 
 TQV to end one s life, to die, Jos. Ant. 12. 1. 
 l! Pol. 2. 28. 10. Xen. Mem. 4. 8. 1. In- 
 trans. to end, Jos. Ant. 8. 1. 1. Thuc. 5. 39 
 TOV xei/xcoj os T(\(VT<0vros ^8rj. Xen. Hell. 
 2. 3. 9. In N. T. intrans. or with TOV ftiov 
 impl. to end one s life, to die; Matt. 2, 19 
 Te\fVTTj(ravTos Se TOV HpcoSou. 9, 18 3vyd- 
 TTJP p.ov (IpTi fT(\fvn]o-fv. 22, 25. Mark 9, 
 44. 46. 48. (Comp. Is. 66, 24.) Luke 7, 2. 
 Acts 2, 29. 7, 15. Heb. 11,22. [John 11, 39.] 
 Sept. often for niB Gen. 25, 32. Prov. 11, 
 7. (JE\. V. H. 2. 17. Hdian. 8. 5. 18. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 7. 1.) Of a violent death, Matt. 
 15, 4 et Mark 7, 10 Savdrw reXevTcira) lei 
 him die the death, emphat. quoted from Ex. 
 21, 17 where Sept. in imitation of Heb. iuf 
 
715 
 
 absol rW 1 rvia he sTia/Z swreZy die, be put 
 to death. Comp. Winer j 58. 3. 
 
 reXeuTT;, fjs, fj, (reXew, Te Xoy,) an end, 
 limit, Baruch 3, 25. Dem. 658. 7 ; TeXeuri) 
 row /Si ov Dem. 481. 14. Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 2. 
 In N. T. absol. the end of life, deai/i ; 
 Matt. 2, 15 eooy Tjy TeXeuTT/y Hpwfiou. Sept. 
 for Ma Gen. 27, 2. Josh. 1,1. Judg. 1,1. 
 So 1 Mace. 9, 23. Hdian. 7. 9. 10. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 7. 3. 
 
 TeXeo>, S>, f. eV<a, (Te Xoy,) 1. to end, to 
 finish, to complete, to accomplish; c. ace. 
 Matt. 13, 53 ore fatXfOW o "I. ras 7rapa/3o- 
 Xay. 19, 1 et 26, 1 Tovy Xoyovy. Luke 2, 39. 
 2 Tim. 4, 7 Sp6p.oi>. Rev. 11, 7. Pass. 
 Luke 12, 50 eo>y ou reXeo-Sj sc. TO )3a7rri- 
 o-/ia. John 19, 28. 30 TeTeXeorai, & is finish 
 ed ! i. e. the whole work, all things. Rev. 
 10, 7 eVeXeVSr; TO pwrrqpM* 15, 1. 8. Sept. 
 for nbs, ni Ruth 2, 21. Ezra 9, 1 ; nbia 
 Neh. 6, 15. So Hdian. 2. 3. 25. Diod. Sic. 
 4. 10. Xen. Cyr. 8. 6. 3. CEc. 1. 4. With 
 a Particip. in the participial construction, 
 Buttm. \ 144. 6. a. Matt. 11, 1 6Ve eYeXeo-e 
 6 I. SiaTao-o-cov, as in Engl. when Jesus had 
 finished commanding. So prscgn. with 
 Part. impl. Matt. 10, 23 ol pr) TeXeoTjTe Tots 
 TroXeis TOV lo-pcnyX, ye shall no/ hare finished 
 the cities of Israel, i. e. ye slmll not have 
 finished fleeing or passing through them, 
 for ou P.TI T(\(<rr)Tt bia<p(vy6vT(s v. 8ia/3ai- 
 VOVT(S Tay miXeiy KTX. So Sept. <rvvfrk\((Te 
 Q-iafiaivvv Josh. 3, 17. 4, 1 ; comp. Luc. 
 Tox. 52 TpiTaioy eYe Xeo-e ex Ma^Xvcoi/ e y 
 2v3ay. Thuc. 4. 78. Of time, Pass, to 6e 
 ended, fulfilled ; Rev. 20, 3 TeXe o-3j? TCI x/Xia 
 *nj. v. 5. 7. 
 
 2. to fulfil, to accomplish, to fully carry 
 out, e. g. a rule, law, c. ace. rbv v6p.ov Rom. 
 2, 27. James 2, 8 ; rr)i> (irt^vp-iav rrjf o~ap- 
 KOS Gal. 5, 16. So Act. Thorn. $5 Iva TO 
 3eX7/ia TOU /3ao-iXe a>y TeXe <ra>. Luc Piscat. 
 52 Tf\vp.fv TO. TrapTjyyeXp. W Of declara 
 tions, prophecy, Luke 18, 31 TeXeo-3r;o-eTai 
 Trai/ra T ycypap.p.fva KT\. Luke 22, 37. 
 Acts 13, 29. Rev. 17, 17. Sept. and ^ 
 Ezra 1,1. So Apollod. Bibl. 2. 4. 4. Diod. 
 Sic. 2. 27 voniaas TfTeXeVSat TOJ/ xP J ]< r P v - 
 
 3. Spec, to _/?ms7i wp, to mafce an end of 
 what one owes or what is due, to pay, to 
 pay in full, e. g. taxes, tribute ; comp. in 
 reXof no. 4. E. g. ra 8i8paxp-a Ma!t. 17, 
 24; (popovs Rom. 13, 6. So Jos. Ant. 10. 
 1. 1 et Diod. Sic. 13. 59 (popov. Dem. 1067. 
 27. Xen. Mem. 2. 9. 1. 
 
 Te\O9, (os, ovs, TO, an end, completion, 
 termination. 
 
 1. Genr. of time and condition ; c. gen. 
 
 Luke 1, 33 rr/s j3ao-t\fias avrov OVK f 
 re Xoj. 2 Cor. 3, 1 3 tls TO Tt Xoy TOU Karap- 
 yovp-fvov, i. e. unto the end of the transient 
 shining of Moses countenance, comp. v. 7. 
 Heb. 7, 3 p;T fwfjs reXos. 1 Cor. 10, 11 
 TO TeXr; TWC altovcw, and so 1 Pet. 4, 7 irtiv- 
 rcov TO TtXos. Meton. Rom. 10, 4 WXor 
 yap vop.ov Xpiorof (Is 8iKaioa"uvrjv iravrl TW 
 Trio-TfvoiTt, i. e. with Christ the power of 
 the law has come to an end, that righteous 
 ness by faith may be reckoned to every 
 one who believeth ; comp. Rom. 7, 6. 8, 2. 
 Others refer this to no. 3, but less well. 
 Sept. and fg Is. 9, 7. Dan. 11, 13. (Soph. 
 Trach. 166; T. TOU /ou Dem. 1306. 25. 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 6.) With gen. impl. John 13. 
 1 (Is Te Xoy f)yaTTT](Ttv KT\. i. e. unto the last. 
 Matt. 24, 6 ouTTG) tori TO WXor sc. TU>V trav- 
 Ttov v. TOU alcovos TOVTOV. v. 14. Mark 13, 
 7. Luke 21, 9 ; viropdvas (Is TtXos sc. TOV 
 f<o^y v. TWJ/ 7ra^T]fj.dTcov, Matt. 10, 22. 24, 
 
 13. Mark 13, 13 ; e<os Tf\ovs sc. TTJS fw^? 
 1 Cor. 1, 8. 2 Cor. 1,13; p.e X pi T(\OVS id. 
 Heb. 3, 6. 14; a X pi T(\OVS id. Heb. 6, 11. 
 Rev. 2, 26. In 1 Cor. 15, 24 etra TO Tt Xor, 
 i. e. the end of the work of redemption, 
 when the whole plan of redemption is com 
 pleted. Absol. TeXoy e^tii/, to have an 
 end, to come to an end, to be destroyed, Mark 
 3, 26 ou Suiwai o-TaSijwu, dXXa TeXoj ?;( 
 So some Luke 22, 37 ; see below in no. 3. 
 c. So Xen. An. 6. 5. 2. Cyr. 8. 3. 33. 
 Adverbially, ace. TO Te Xor , finally, at last, 
 1 Pet. 3, 8. (,E1. V. H. 10. 16. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 4. 1.) Also tls Te Xoy, pr. to the end, 
 i. e. continually, perpetually, forever, Luke 
 18, 5. 1 Thess. 2, 16. Sept. for mtfc Job 
 
 14, 20. Ps. 79, 5. 103, 9. So Luc. Navig. 
 27. Xen. CEc. 17. 10. Meton. 17 a 
 ai TO Te Xoy, i. q. TrpwToy (cat 
 
 see in dpx*) no. 2 ; Rev. 22, 1 3 e yd) TO A *al 
 TO Q, TrpwToy KOI f cr \aTos, rf apx 1 ? * a To r " 
 Xoy. 21, 6. 1, 8 Rec. 
 
 2. Trop. an end, i. e. a) an event, issue, 
 result. Matt. 26, 58 (KO%T)TO . . . i6Vi TO Te 
 Xoy. James 5, 1 1 TO Te Xoy Kvpiov, i. e. which 
 the Lord gave to Job. So Test. XII Patr. 
 p. 689. Plut. Romul. 28. Luc. Vitar. Auct. 
 27. Dem. 292. 22 TO TOVTOV TfXoy eV 3e<a 
 Tfv, OVK tv e /xot. b) With gen. of pers. or 
 thing, the end, the final lot, ultimate fate ; 
 Rom. 6, 21 Tt Xos (Kciva>v, SdvaToy. v. 22 TO 
 8e Te Xoy, fo>?ji ala>viov. 2 Cor. 11, 15. Phil. 
 3, 19. Heb. 6, 8. 1 Pet. 1, 9. 4, 17. Sept. 
 for spo Ecc. 7, 2. So Wisd. 3, 19. Jos. 
 Ant. 6. 4. 1. Philo de Charit. p. 717. jEl. 
 V. H. 3. 43. c) Of a declaration, prophe 
 cy, an end,accomplishment,fulfilment; Luke 
 22, 37 *eat yap TO, ntpl (pov TeXoy e^, i. e. 
 
716 
 
 Tepno 1 ? 
 
 have fulfilment, are fulfilled, i. q. the preced. 
 TfXea^vai. So ^Eschyl. Prom, vinct. 13 
 evroXr) AIOS e^ei Te Xoy. Dion. Hal. Ant. 1. 
 19 Tf\os fX flv vfpio-i TO Sfonponiov vneXa- 
 ftov. ib. 9. 12 KOL TfXos fi%e rots Tvpprjvols 
 . Athen. 8. p. 341. c. So re- 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 5. 3- ib. 4. 6. 5. 
 Others in Luke 1. c. render : the things 
 relating to me (my work, my ministry) come 
 to an end, my labours draw to a close ; see 
 in no. 1. 
 
 3. Trop. an end. final purpose, that to 
 which all the parts tend and in which all 
 terminate, the chief point, sum. 1 Tim. 1,5 
 TO fie Te Xo? TTJS rrapayyeXias e<rr\v dydrrrj. 
 So, according to some, Rom. 10, 4 ; but 
 see above in no. 1. Sept. and cpo Ecc. 12, 
 13. Arr. Epict. 1. 12. 5 Te Xoj earri TO eW- 
 tr3ai 3eois. Diog. Laert. 2. 87. Cic. ad Att. 
 12. 6. 
 
 4. Trop. a tax, toll, custom, tribute, pr. 
 what is paid for the maintenance and ex 
 penses of the state ; see in TfXe w no. 3. 
 Matt. 17, 25 TfXrj fj KTJVO-OV. Rom. 13, 7 bis. 
 1 Mace. 10, 31. Jos. Ant. 12. 3. 3. Hdian. 
 
 3. 1. 11. Dem. 745. 15. Xen. Vect. 4. 19, 
 20. See Diet, of Antt. art. Telos. 
 
 reXeoz^, ov, 6, (reXo?, cWop-ai,) pr. a 
 farmer of the taxes or customs, one who 
 pays to the government a certain sum for 
 the privilege of collecting the taxes and 
 customs of a district, 6 irpidp-evos Te Xoy 
 Dem. 745. 15; Lat. publicanus, Cic. pro 
 Plane. 9 ; whence in Engl. Vers. a publican. 
 The public revenues of the Greeks and 
 Romans were usually thus farmed out ; and 
 among the latter the purchasers were per 
 sons of wealth and rank, and in the later 
 periods chiefly of the equestrian order ; 
 comp. Cic. 1. c. Sueton. Octav. 24. Dion 
 Cass. p. 38 TOVS Imrfas . . ndo-ai Tf yap 
 TeXow ai (V avr>v tyevovro. Jos. Ant. 12. 
 
 4. 1, 3, 4 evcrrdcTT]! fie TTJS rjp-tpas, /ca3 TJV 
 
 ra TeXr 7ri7rpacr/ceo-2ai TO>I> 
 
 oi Tols aia>/j.ao-ii> eV Tals irarpiffi 
 Siaepe poires. Comp. Boeckh Staatsh. d. 
 Ath. I. p. 359, 360 sq.. Adam s Rom. Ant. 
 p. 64. Diet, of Antt. art. Publicani. The 
 farmers-general had also sub-contractors, 
 or employed agents, who collected the taxes 
 and customs at the gates of cities, in sea 
 ports, on public ways, bridges, and the like. 
 These too were called TeXwi/ai, or also e- 
 \eyovTfs Dem. 745. 15, Lat. portilores. 
 An agent in the provinces (sub magistro) 
 had to travel about and superintend the ac 
 tual business of collecting the revenues ; 
 such an one was prob. Zaccheus 6 dp\i- 
 f, Luke 19, 2. See Diet, of Antt.l. c. 
 
 In countries subject to the Romans, these 
 inferior TeXwi/ai were objects of hatred and 
 detestation ; so that none but persons of the 
 lowest rank and worthless character were 
 likely to be found in this employment ; 
 comp. Xeno ap. Dicaearch. Trdvrfs TeXtowu 
 TTtivres fieri apnayes. Dio Chrysost. 4. p. 
 75. b, KairrjXovs Kal Te\a>i>as Kal Tropvofio- 
 CTKOVS. Luc. Necyom. 1 1 /xot^oi Kal nopvo- 
 ySocncoi Kal Tf\a>vai Kal KoXaKts KT\. Arte- 
 midor. 1. 23. ib. 4. 42, 57. See the numer 
 ous like passages in Wetst. N. T. I. p. 314 
 sq. In N. T. in the later sense, a toll- 
 gatherer, collector of customs, publican, the 
 object of bitter hatred and scorn to the Jews, 
 and often coupled with the most depraved 
 classes of society ; Matt. 5, 46 oi^i KO.I ol 
 T(\5)vai TO avTo rroiovo-i ; V. 47. 10, 3 Mar- 
 Saioj 6 T\a>vT)s, comp. 9, 9. Luke 3, 12. 5, 
 27. 29. 7. 29. 18, 10. 11. 13 ; rcXawai *ai 
 d/zapraAoi Matt. 9, 10. 11. 11,19. Mark 2, 
 15. 16. Luke 5, 30. 7, 34. 15, 1 ; &VIKOS 
 Kal reXwi/Tjf Matt. 18, 17; oi TfXStvai KOI al 
 nopvai Matt. 21, 31. 32. 
 
 Te\.a)Viov, on, TO, (TfXavrjs,) a toll-house, 
 custom-house, collector s office, Matt. 9, 9. 
 Mark 2, 14. Luke 5, 27. Suid. reXebwov 
 6 TOTTOS fv u> KaSi jJVrcu 6 reXcoj/i^s. Poll. On. 
 9. 28 TO. T\d>via. 
 
 repa9, aror, TO, Plur. TO. TepaTa uncon- 
 tracted, contrary to Attic usage, Mceris p. 
 369. Buttm. J 54. n. 1 ; a sign, wonder, 
 portent, strictly as foreboding something 
 future ; in N. T. only Plur. and always 
 joined with TO. oTj/ma. 
 
 1. Pr. Acts 2, 19 Scoo-a> Tepara tv TW ov- 
 pav<p ava>, Kal o-^/neia eVi Tijs yrjs /caTa). 
 quoted from Joel 3, 2 [2, 30] where Sept. 
 for nfiin Jos. Ant. 2. 12. 1. Artemid. 1. 
 73. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 15. 
 
 2. Genr. 0-rjp.fla *ai TepaTa, Engl. signs and 
 wonders, spoken of mighty works, miracles 
 of various kinds, the two words being here 
 nearly or quite synonymous. So of the 
 miracles of Moses, Acts 7, 36 ; of Christ, 
 John 4, 48. Acts 2, 22 ; of the apostles and 
 teachers, Acts 2, 43. 4, 30. 5, 12. 6, 8. 
 14, 3. 15, 12. Rom. 15, 19. 2 Cor. 12, 12. 
 Heb. 2, 4 ; also of the professed miracles 
 of false prophets or teachers, Matt. 24, 24. 
 Mark 13, 22. 2 Thess. 2, 9. Sept. OTJ/X. 
 KOI TepaTa for Heb. D^nslsl PriniK, of 
 Moses Ex. 7, 3. Deut. 6, 22. 7, 19. Jer. 
 32, 20. So 0-77/4. *ai TepaTa, of impostors 
 Jos. Ant. 20. 8. 6 ; genr. J\. V. H. 12. 57. 
 Pol. 3. 112. 8. 
 
 s, ov, 6, Tertius, pr. n. of Paul s 
 amanuensis, Rom. 16, 22. 
 
717 
 
 Te priAXo?, O v, 6, Tertullus, pr. n. of 
 a Roman orator or advocate employed by 
 the Jews against Paul, Acts 24, 1. 2. 
 
 TeaaapaKovra, J, at, ra, indec. forty, 
 Matt. 4, 2. Mark 1, 13. Acts 1, 3. al. 
 Comp. Buttm. { 70. 4. Sept. for D^Sanx 
 Gen. 5, 13. Ex. 16, 35. Luc. Ver. I list. 
 
 2. 40. Xen. An. 2. 2. 7. + 
 recra-apaKovraeT^ 1 ), eor, oCy, 6, ^, adj. 
 
 (eros,) of forty years ; e. g. TfvaapaKovraf- 
 rf]s xpovos, the time of forty years, forty 
 years time, Acts 7, 23. 13, 18. Comp. 
 8(KaeTT)s xpoVor Max. Tyr. 6. 89 ; SfKaerfis 
 TroXfpor Thuc. 5. 26. On the flexion and 
 accent of such compounds, see Buttm. j 70. 
 n. 3. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 406 sq. 
 
 recr crape?, of, af , Neut. -pa, Gen. u v , 
 Attic Tfrrapts, Neut. -pa, card. adj. four, 
 Matt. 24, 31. Mark 2, 3. Acts 10, 11. Rev. 
 
 4, 4. al. Comp. Buttm. { 70. 4. Sept. for 
 sanx Gen. 11, 16; ^3-iX Gen. 2, 10. 
 Hdian. 6. 6. 11. Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 6. + 
 
 Tecra apecrtcaiSetcaTos, 77, ov, ordin. adj. 
 the fourteenth, Acts 27, 27. 33. Sept. Gen. 
 14, 5. Hdian. 6. 2. 2. Plut. Cat. Min. 3. 
 On the form, comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 409. 
 Buttm. 71. 1. 
 
 TTapratO9; a, ov, (rerapTos,) an adj. 
 marking succession of days, used only ad 
 verbially, on the fourth day ; John 11, 39 
 Tfrapraios yap tern, he is now the fourth 
 day dead, four days dead ; see Buttm. 123. 
 6. Winer J 58. 2. Comp. Se VT -f polos. Pol. 
 
 3. 52. 2 rjbrj of rtrapraiot u>v. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 5. 3. 1. 
 
 rerapTOS, TJ, ov, ordin. adj. (YeWape?,) 
 the fourth, Matt. 14, 25. Mark 6, 48. Acts 
 
 10, 30. Rev. 4, 7. 6, 7 bis. 8. 8, 12. 16, 8. 
 21, 19. Sept. for T^ Gen. 1, 19. 
 Hdian. 4. 2. 14. Plato Rep. 544. c. 
 
 rerpa-, for rt ropa, Tfo-o-apa,four, found 
 only in derivative and compound words ; 
 comp. Buttm. $ 70. n. 3. 
 
 TTpdy(i)VOS, ov, 6, f], adj. (rtrpa-, y<a- 
 vos, ya>i>ia.~) four-cornered, four-square, Rev. 
 21, 16. Sept. for ?W3 Ex. 27, 1. Ez. 41, 
 21. Hdian. 8. 1. 3. Pol. 6. 27. 2. Xen. 
 Lac. 12. 1. 
 
 rerpdSiov, ov, TO, (dim. rrrpar,) a tetrad 
 or quaternion of soldiers, a detachment of 
 four men, the usual number of a Roman 
 night-watch, relieved every three hours. 
 Acts 12, 4. Philo in Flacc. p. 981, or T. 
 
 11. p. 533. 22, CTrpaTKBTTjf 8f riva rv>v tv 
 rotf T(rpa8iois (f)v\aK<vv *a3 68ov fvp<av. 
 Comp. Pol. 6. 33. 7 TO 8( (f)v\aK(i6v (<mv 
 
 fK Tfrrapcav avopuiv, u>v ni p.ti> Trpo rr^ O~KJJ 
 VTJS, ol 8e KaroTTiM Trapa rovs ITTTTOVS noiovv 
 7-at rr]v (J)v\aKr]i>. Veget. R. M. 3. 8, " de 
 singulis centuriis quaterni equites et qua- 
 terni pedites excubitum noctibus faciant." 
 See in (pv\aicr] no. 4. In Acts 1. c. Peter 
 was therefore guarded by four men at a 
 time, two within the prison and two before 
 the doors, comp. v. 6 ; and the four quater 
 nions relieved each other during the night. 
 
 TTpaKHT%l\,lOl, at, a, (rtrpaKis, X ~ 
 Xtoi,) four times one thousand, four thou 
 sand, Matt. 15, 38. 16, 10. Mark 8, 9. 20. 
 Acts 21, 38. Comp. Buttm. 5 70. Sept 
 1 Chr. 12, 26. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 6. 
 
 T&rpaKoaioi, at, a, four hundred, Acts 
 
 5, 36. 7, 6. 13, 20. Gal. 3, 17. Comp. 
 Buttm. 570. Sept. Gen. 23, 15. 16. Hdian. 
 
 6. 4. 10. Xen. An. 7. 1. 27. 
 
 TeTpafJ,r)VO$, ov, 6, 17, (rtrpa-, P-TIV,") of 
 four months ; John 4, 35 rt TfTpdp.T)v6f 
 KOI 6 Sepioyxos ep^erat, i. 8 
 
 four months time. Rec. has Neut. TO re- 
 Tpdp.T)vov in the same sense. Pol. 18. 22 
 5. Thiic. 5. 63. Neut. Sept. Judg. 19, 2 
 20, 47. On the form comp. Lob. ad Phryn 
 p. 549. 
 
 y, or) , ov ovv, jtrpa-. 
 aTrXo or,) fourfold, quadruple, Luke 19, 8. 
 Comp. Buttm. 5 71. 3. 5 60. 5. b. Jos. Ant 
 7. 7. 3. Xen. An. 7- 6. 7. 
 
 rerpciTrovs, Sos, 6, 17, adj. (TtVpa-, 
 TTOVS,) four-footed, quadruped, Plur. absol. 
 TU TeTpdVoSa, quadrupeds, four-footed beasts, 
 Acts 10, 12. 11, 6. Rom. 1, 23. Sept. for 
 nans Gen. 1, 24 ; nn Num. 35, 5 Pol. 
 1. 29. 7 ; TO T. Jos. Ant. 4. 4. 4. Palaeph. 
 34. 1. Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 25. On the forms 
 TtTpajTovs and TtTpaTroSov, see Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 546. 
 
 TTpap^(i}, >, f. rjo-co, (rtrpdpxrjs,) to 
 be tetrarch, to rule as tetrarch, spoken of 
 Herod Antipas, Philip, and Lysanias ; c. 
 gen. Luke 3, 1 ter. Jos. Vit. {11. So 
 Hermo. 268. 22. 
 
 ov, 6, (TfTpds, apx<a,) a 
 tetrarcJi, pr. the ruler of the fourth part of 
 a district or province ; Strabo 12. p. 567 
 [850. c], ottWTO 8i(\6vr(s [of FoXaTat] tls 
 8* p.tpib as, Tfrpapxiav tK.a<rrr]v (Ka\((rav, 
 TfTpdpx^v exovo~av lo iov. In later usage it 
 became among the Romans a common title 
 for those who governed any part of a pro 
 vince or kingdom, subject only to the Ro 
 man emperor ; Strabo 1. c. ird\ai ^iv ov 
 ToiavTT) TIS 8iardis, (taSl ijpas Se tls y, fir 
 fls ft riytpovas, eira (Is eva rjKtv TJ Suraorfta. 
 
718 
 
 Thus Herod the Great and his brother 
 Phasael were at one time made tetrarchs 
 of Judea by Antony, Jos. Ant. 14. 13. 1. 
 The former also at his death left half his 
 kingdom to Archaelaus with the title of eth- 
 narch, and divided the rest between two of 
 his other sons, Herod Antipas and Philip, 
 with the title of tetrarchs, Jos. Ant. 18. 5. 
 1 ; comp. in Hpobfyy no. 1,2. So Lysa- 
 nias is said to be tetrarch of Abilene. Luke 
 3, 1. Comp. Wetst. N. T. I. p. 409. In 
 N. T. spoken only of Herod Antipas, Matt. 
 14, 1. Luke 3, 19. 9, 7. Acts 13, 1. Called 
 also fta<n\(vs Matt. 14, 9. Mark 6, 14 ; see 
 in fiaa-iXfvs no. 2. 
 
 Jj see the lenses of Tvyxavu>. 
 ioo), oi, f. wo-o), (Te<ppa,) to turn into 
 ashes, to consume, to destroy, e. g. cities, . 
 c. ace. 2 Pet. 2, 6. Lycophr. 227. Nic. Al. 
 534. Hesych. Te(ppa>cras criro^uxras- 
 
 Tf^ViJ, rjs, 77, (TI KTO>, TCKeii ,) 1. an art, 
 trade, craft ; Rev. 18, 22 Tfx v tTr l s K ao ~ r ]s 
 
 TfXVTJS. ActS 18, 3 (TKTjVOTTOloi TTjV Tf^I^l , 
 
 for the ace. see Buttm. 131. 7 sq. Sept. 
 
 1 Chr. 28, 21. Luc. D. Deor. 26. 2. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 10. 1. 
 
 2. art, skill, Acts 17, 29 x a P a 7P- aTl Te " 
 XVTJS. Sept. for riosn 1 K. 7, 14. Arr. 
 Epict. 2. 14. 2, 5. Hdian. 3. 3. 11. Xen. 
 An. 7. 2. 8. 
 
 T6^vtT7^9, ou, 6, (rfxvT) >) an artisan, ar 
 tificer, craftsman; Acts 19, 24 Trapet^ero 
 Tols TexviTais tpyacriav. V. 38. Rev. 18, 22. 
 Sept. for tilti Deut. 27, 15. Jer. 10, 9. So 
 Ecclus. 9, 2 T 2. Hdian. 3. 4. 20. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 7. 5. Trop. of God as the builder, found 
 er, of the heavenly Jerusalem, Heb. 11, 10 
 r)s [TrdXcws] Texvmjs ... 6 Seo s . So Wisd. 
 13, 1. 
 
 TTf]KW, f. o>, to melt, to make liquid, 
 Sept. Nah. 1, 6. Diod. Sic. 1. 63. Hdot. 3. 
 96. In N. T. Pass. TTJK op. at, to be melted, 
 to melt, 2 Pet. 3, 12. Sept. for Niph. pS3 
 Is. 34, 4. So Diod. Sic. 1. 38 T^KO^ M; 
 Xtcov. Xen. Mem. 3. 1.7. 
 
 TT/Xavyft)?) adv. (rT]\avyr]s , rJJXe, au- 
 777,) radiantly, brightly, clearly, Mark 8, 25 
 fVffiXf^f TT)\avyu>s uTravras. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 50 Trpor TO TT)\avyt(TTfpov opav. So TTJ- 
 \avyr,s Sept. Job 37, 21. Pind. Ol. 6. 5. 
 Luc: Hipp. 7. 
 
 TrjXiKOVTOS, avTT], oiJTo, demonstr. cor- 
 rel. pron. pr. a strengthened form of 7-77X1 - 
 KOS, 77, ov, Buttm. ^ 79. 5 ; so great, lan- 
 lus, 2 Cor. 1, 10 fK Trj\iKovTov Sai/arou. 
 Heb. 2, 3. James 3, 4. Rev. 16, 18. 
 
 2 Mace. 12, 3. Luc. D. Deor. 26. 2. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 1. 5. 
 
 T T/peo), ), f. 770-0), (rTjpdr,) to watch, to 
 watch oxer, to keep, to guard, e. g. 
 
 1. Pr. to watch, to observe attentively, to 
 keep the eyes fixed upon ; c. ace. Rev. 1, 3 
 K.OL TTjpovvrff TO. tv avTTJ [Trpo(pT)T{ia\ yt- 
 ypap.fji.eva. i. e. watching the fulfilment of 
 the prophecy. 22, 7. 9. Sept. 6 rrjp^v avt- 
 p.ov for "I725 Ecc. 11,4; 133 Prov. 23, 26. 
 So ./El. V. H. 2. 17 6 p.tv eio-njKei rrjpuiv 
 TOVTO. Dem. 836. 5 ; TOV avefiov Thuc. 1. 
 65. Trop. to observe, to keep, to fulfil, e. g. 
 a duty, precept, law, custom ; c. ace. ras 
 eVroXav Matt. 19, 17. John 14, 15. 21. 15, 
 10 bis. 1 John 2, 3. 4. 3, 22. 24. 5, 2. 3. 
 Rev. 12, 17. 14, 12. (Ecclus. 29, 1.) Also 
 r. TTJV (iTo\r)i> a(T7nXo!> 1 Tim. 6, 14 ; Ad- 
 yov, \6yovs, John 8, 51. 52. 55. 14, 23. 24. 
 15, 20 bis. 17, 6. 1 John 2, 5. Rev. 3, 8. 
 10 \6yov TT)S inrofj.ovrjs fJiov, see in vnop.ovr). 
 (Sept. 1 Sam. 15, 11.) voaov Acts 15, 5. 
 
 24. James 2, 10 ; TrapaSocrtj/ Mark 7, 9 ; 
 TO cra/3/3aroj/ John 9, 16. Genr. c. ace. expr 
 or impl. Rev. 2, 26 6 rr/pwj/ ra fpya pov, 
 i. e. who keepeth (doeth) the works which 
 I require. Matt. 23, 3 bis. 28, 20. Acts 21, 
 
 25. Rev. 3, 3. Sept. genr. for ")33 Prov 
 
 3, 1. 21 ; "iaoi Prov. 8, 34. So Philo Le- 
 gat. ad Cai. p. 1033 TTJV SprjaKflav. Arr 
 Epict. 2. 25. 15. Pol. 1. 83. 58iWz. Hdian. 
 6. 6. 1. 
 
 2. to keep, to guard, e. g. a prisoner, a 
 person arrested, c. ace. Matt. 27, 36. 54 nj- 
 povvres TW ITJO-OVV. Acts 12, 5. 6 (pvXaKfs 
 ... fTTjpovv TTJV (pvXaKrjv, comp. Buttm. { 131 
 
 4, Acts 16, 23. 24, 23. 25, 4. 21 bis. Part. 
 Matt. 28, 4 01 TTjpovvTfs, the keepers, guards. 
 Of things, TO. Ifidna Rev. 16, 15. Sept. 
 for lati Cant. 3, 3 ; "M of things Cant. 8, 
 11.12. So of pers. Test. XII Patr. p. 636. 
 Thuc. 4. 30 ; things 1 Mace. 6, 50. Aris- 
 toph. Pac. 201. Pol. 3. 50. 7. Trop. to 
 keep in safety, to preserve, to maintain ; c. 
 ace. of thing simpl. Eph. 4, 3 rr;peu/ rfjv 
 eVoTTjra TOV T^vevp-aros. 2 Tim. 4, 7 TTJV 
 TTLVTIV Tfprjprjxa. Jude 6 p.f) T7)pfj(ravT(s KT\. 
 i. e. deserting. Sept. T. TTJV eavTov tyvxrjv 
 for "inti Prov. 16, 17. (Jos. B. J. 6. 2. 4 ; 
 vofjiovs T) Tas I8ias i^v^ds Diod. Sic. 11. 11; 
 Tria-Tiv Pol. 6. 56. 13. Hdian. 7. 9. 7.) So 
 trop. ace. with adjuncts : with two ace. of 
 pers. and predicate, 2 Cor. 11, 9 bis, d/3apr} 
 vp.lv fp,avTov fTTJp-rjcra /cat r^prjo-o). 1 Tim. 
 
 5, 22. James 1, 27 ; impl. 1 John 5, 18 717- 
 pelv favTov sc. uyvov v. u<rni\ov, see James 
 1. c. (Wisd. 10, 5. M. Antonin. 6. 23 or 30 
 TT]pT){Tov (TfavTov an\ovv.) With adv. 1 Thess 
 5, 23 ; with dat. of pers. Jude 1 TW Xpiorw 
 With (v c. dat. of state or condition, John 
 
719 
 
 17, 11. 12 e yw fTTjpovv ai/Tovs tv rw ovopa- 
 rt crov. Jude 21 ; rii/or John 17, 15. 
 Rev. 3, 10 ; drro TWOS James 1, 27. Sept. 
 c. airo TWOS for "^&J Prov. 7, 5. 
 
 3. /o keep back, to keep in store, to re 
 serve ; c. ace. e. g. things, John 2, 10 <rv 
 TfTripijKas TOV naXbv oivov fo>s apri. 12,7; 
 Tt rtw, e. g. o (por 2 Pet. 2, 17. Jude 13. 
 (Sept. Cant. 7, 13.) TI els TWO. 1 Pet. 1, 4. 
 Of persons, 1 Cor. 7, 37 Trjptlv TTJV iavTov 
 rrapZfvov, i. e. to keep her at home, unmar 
 ried, opp. (Kyapi&iv in v. 38. 2 Pet. 2, 4 et 
 Jude 6 els Kpicnv TT]povp.(vovs. 2 Pet. 2, 9 
 et 3, 7 fls rip-tpav Kpicreos. Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 529 tls KoXacrti TOV ala>vos TtTrjpr)- 
 TCU. Jos. Ant. 1. 3. 7 c. dat. 
 
 TT/pT/cn?, teas, TI, (rr;pe a>,) a watching, 
 keeping, e. g. 
 
 1. Trop. observance, performance, e. g. of 
 precepts, eVroXoSi/ 1 Cor. 7, 19. Ecclus. 
 35, 23 ; vopav Wisd. 1, 18 ; di(ap.aTos Plato 
 Def. 413. e. 
 
 2. guard, ward, 1 Mace. 5, 18. 3 Mace. 
 5, 44. In N. T. meton. a place of ward, 
 a prison ; Acts 4, 3. 5, 18 {Sevro UVTOVS ev 
 TTjpf]o~fi 8rjp.o(ria. So Thuc. 7. 86. 
 
 Tt/3epia$, d8os, TI, Tiberias, a city of 
 Galilee built by Herod Antipas and named 
 in honour of the emperor Tiberius ; now 
 Tubariyeh. It is situated on the S. W. 
 shore of the Lake of Gennesareth, about an 
 hour s distance from the place where the 
 Jordan flows out, John 6, 23 ; and the lake 
 itself is hence sometimes called the Sea of 
 Tiberias, John 6, 1. 21, 1 ; comp. in IVv- 
 i/no-ap/r. The city was celebrated on ac 
 count of the hot springs in its vicinity 
 towards the south ; and after the destruc 
 tion of Jerusalem it became a famous seat 
 of Jewish schools and learning. See Jos. 
 Ant. 18. 3. 3. de Vit. {} 9, 16 sq. Relandi 
 Palaest. p. 1036 sq. Burckhardt s Travels in 
 Syria, p. 320 sq. Bibl. Res. in Palest. III. p. 
 254-274. 
 
 Ti(3epio$, ov, 6, Tiberius, pr. n. of the 
 third Roman emperor, the son of Livia and 
 step-son of Augustus, r. A. D. 14-37. Luke 
 3, 1. John the Baptist commenced preach 
 ing in the fifteenth year of his reign ; and 
 the crucifixion of Jesus took place about 
 four years later. On the relation of this 
 date to the year of our Lord s birth, see Gr. 
 Harm. p. 181. Sueton. Vit. Tiber. Tac. 
 Ann. 1. 3 sq. 
 
 TL^rrjfJil, f. 3r;<ro>, aor. 1 eSq/ea, perf. T- 
 3Ka, see Buttm. $ 106, 107. Imperf. tVf- 
 Souv Matt. 5, 15. 2 Cor. 3, 13. al. see 
 Buttm. $ 106. n. 5. J 107. m. 6. To set 
 
 to put, to place, to lay ; Sept. for nito, p^SJ, 
 also for -jnj . 
 
 1. Pr. to set, to put, where a person or 
 thing is set erect, or is conceived of as 
 erect, rather than as lying down ; c. ace. 
 Act. e. g. a light, Xv^MW virb TOV p.u8ioi> 
 Matt. 5, 15. Mark 4, 21 ; viroKa. K\ivrjs 
 Luke 8, 16 ; fls KpvnTfjv 11, 33. So an in 
 scription, tVt TOV a-Tavpov John 19, 9 ; one s 
 foot, rVi Ttjs %a\do-o-r)s Rev. 10, 2. Mid. to 
 set or put for oneself, on one s own part or 
 behalf, by one s own motion or order, 
 Buttm. 5 135. 8 ; e. g. to put persons in 
 prison, fls (pv\aKrjv Acts 12, 4 ; fls Trjprjo-iv 
 4, 3 ; also tv (pv\aKfj Matt. 14, 3. Acts 5, 
 25 ; fv TTjprio-ti 5, 18 ; comp. tv no. 4. Of 
 things, to set in the proper place, to assign 
 a place, 1 Cor. 12, 186 3eos e3ro ra JwAq 
 . . . t v T<5 aw/Hem KT\. Sept. genr. for ciilJ 
 Gen. 30, 42. 43 ; c. n Num. 21,8. Mid. 
 c. eVi 1 Sam. 6, 11. 15; rPtt5 c. eW Ps. 
 132, 11 ; -jns c. tv Gen. 1, 17. 9, 13. Mid. 
 tv (pv\aicfi Gen. 40, 3. So ^El. V. H. 14. 
 42. Xen. Cyr. 8. 8. 16. Mid. Pol. 25. 1. 2; 
 c. eVi Xen. An. 7. 3. 23. Spoken of food 
 or drink, to set on or out, c. ace. John 2, 10 
 TOV KO\OV oivov TiSricri. So Bel and Drag. 
 11 TOV oivov. Plut. Mor. II. p. 13. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 14. 1. Lat. pocula ponere Virg 
 ^En. 1. 706. 
 
 2. Oftener of things, to put, to lay, to lay 
 down, where the thing is conceived of as 
 laid or lying down rather than as erect. 
 
 a) Pr. e. g. 3 f /i/Xtoi/ Luke 6, 48. 14, 29. 
 1 Cor. 3, 10. 11. (Sept. Ezra 6, 3.) Xi Soi/, 
 irp6o-Kop.p.a, Rom. 9, 33. 1 Pet. 2, 6, quoted 
 from Is. 28, 1 6 where Sept. for 18^ ; c. 
 dat. incomm. Rom. 14, 13. (Sept. Ps. 109, 
 110.) Genr. in the proverbial phrase, Luke 
 19, 21. 22, atpfis 6 owe tStjicas, taking up 
 what thou hast not laid down, i. e. what is 
 not thine own. (Diog. Laert. 1. 2. 9 a ^17 
 e3ov, p.r) dv(\r) fl 8e pr), 3ai/aroy f) r]p.ia, 
 i. e. a law of Solon. Xen. O3c. 8. 2.) 
 With err i c. gen. as TOVS da Sfvf is firi <\i- 
 vvv Acts 5, 15. (Hdian. 1. 17. 4.) eVi c, 
 ace. as Ka\vp.fjia firl TO Trpocr&nov 2 Cor. 3, 
 13 ; Tas x f ip a * tir avTa Mark 10, 16. Rev. 
 1, 17 in later edit. (Sept. Job 21, 5. Ps. 
 139, 4.) So with eVi c. ace. impl. TO yo- 
 vara. riSf rai sc. tVt TTJV yrjv, to place the 
 knees, i. q. to kneel, Mark 15, 19. Luke 22, 
 41. Acts 7, 60. 9, 40. 20, 36. 21. 5 ; see in 
 yovv. With tvoiTTiov TLVOS Luke 5, 18 , 
 impl. Mark 6, 56. (Sept. 1 Sam. 10,25; 
 comp. Ez. 16, 18.) With Trap tavrv 
 1 Cor. 16, 2 ; Trapa TOVS ir68as TLVOS Acts 
 4, 35. 37. 5, 2 ; irpbs -n/v Svpav Acts 3, 2 ; 
 
720 
 
 UTTO TOVS TroSas TIVOS 1 Cor. 15, 25, quoted 
 from Ps. 110, 1 where Sept. for rviU; 
 comp. in TTOVS b. 
 
 b) Spec, of dead bodies, to lay in a tomb 
 or sepulchre, c. ace. Mark 15, 47. 16, 6 
 OTTOV f SrjKfv aiiTov. Luke 22, 53. 55. John 
 11,34. 19,42. 20,2.13.15. Acts 9, 37 ; 
 ds HVTJH IOV Acts 13,29. Rev. 11, 9; ev 
 fj.vr}fj.fla Matt. 27, 60. Mark 6, 29. John 19. 
 41. Acts 7, 16. Sept. c. eV for Dlfo Gen. 
 50, 26; rpart 1 K. 13, 30. 31. So c. ev 
 Test. XII Patir. p. 543. Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 25. 
 
 c) Spec, to lay off or aside, e. g. gar 
 ments, t/zarta John 13, 4. Arr. Epict. 1. 
 24. 12 3<ls TTJV 7r\aTi>o-T)p.ov. Diod. Sic. 20. 
 31, 45 ra 6VXa. Comp. Lat. ponere vestem 
 Ov. Met. 3. 1. 
 
 d) Trop. e. g. TtSeVat TTJV fyvxfiv, to lay 
 down one s life, John 10, 11. 15. 17. 18 bis. 
 13, 37. 38. 15, 13. 1 John 3, 16 bis. Comp. 
 Lat. ponere vitam Cic. ad Div. 9. 24 fin. 
 With en-i c. ace. Matt. 12, 18 Sijo-w TO 
 TTvevfid JJLOV eV avrov, i. e. will give or im 
 part unto him, quoted from Is. 42, 1 where 
 Heb. ^? 1^5 Sept. e Scora. Mid. c. e j/,2 Cor. 
 5, 19 Se/Ltei/os [6 3e6s] ev fjfiiv TOT Xoyoi/ TTJS 
 KaraXXayrjs, i. e. placing in us, laying upon 
 us, committing unto us ; comp. Sept. for 
 S Dlto Is. 63, 11. Mid. with els TO &ra 
 ifjLwv, to lay up in your ears, i. q. to let sink 
 in your ears, minds, Luke 9, 44 ; els TTJV 
 Kapj iav, to lay to heart, i. q. to resolve, Luke 
 21, 14; comp. Sept. Ecc. 7, 22. 1 Sam. 9, 
 20. With tv T KapBiq, to lay up in heart, 
 to lay to heart, i. q. to revolve in mind, to 
 ponder, Luke 1, 66 ; (so Sept. and sba ftlto 
 1 Sam. 21, 13 ;) also i. q. to resolve, to pur 
 pose, Acts 5, 4 ; ev TW TrvevfiaTi id. 19, 21. 
 Comp. Sept. Dan. 1, 8. 
 
 3. Trop. to set, to appoint, to constitute, 
 often i. q. Engl. to make ; e. g. of time, 
 Mid. Acts 1, 7 xpovovs fj Kaipovs ovs 6 ira- 
 TTjp eSero ev rfj Idiq eovcrtq, i. e. which the 
 Father hath set by virtue of his own author 
 ity. (So f]fj.epav Dion. Hal. Ant. 5. 57 pen. 
 Dem. 1042. pen.) Also the lot of any one, 
 TO fj-tpos, c. p.erd rivos, Matt. 24, 51. Luke 
 12. 46. Of a decision, decree, law; Acts 
 27, 1 2 ot 7r\fiovs e Sevro j3ov\fjv, gave coun 
 sel, advised, determined. Gal. 3, 19 in later 
 edit. 6 vo/jios . . . ere^r), the law was set, 
 made; Rec. Trpofrere Sty. So vopov rftevai 
 Jos. c. Ap. 2. 21- Dem. 732. 17. Xen. Lac. 
 1. 2. For the difference between -rftevai 
 vop.ov to make laws for others, and rt SecrSat 
 vSpov to make laws to which one is himself 
 subject, see Buttm. 135. 6. With two 
 ace. of pers. or thing and predicate, Winer 
 
 32. 4. b ; so 1 Cor. 9, 18 dddnavov 
 TO fvayyt\iov, I may make the gospel with 
 out charge, free of expense ; comp. for the 
 sense 2 Cor. 11, 7. 8. (Luc. Gymnas. 16 
 rov do-Ttpos . . TOV dtpa r)pbv KCL\ diaKarj 
 Tt3eWor ^ Of persons, ecus av So> TOVS e ^- 
 Spovs o-t/ t;7TO7roSioz/ ra>v 7ro8a>z> trov, Matt. 
 22, 44. Mark 12. 36. Luke 20, 43. Acts 2, 
 35. Heb. 1, 13. 10, 13, all quoted from Ps. 
 110, 1 where Sept. for t"Ptt5 ; comp. in novs 
 b. Acts 20, 28 iifias . . . eSfTO eVicrKorrovs. 
 Rom. 4, 17 Trarepa TroXXco?/ f%vu>v T&eiKa 
 o-e, from Gen. 17, 5 where Sept. for in) . 
 1 Cor. 12, 28. Heb. 1, 2. 2 Pet. 2, 6. In 
 Pass, construction, c. els 5 final, 1 Tim. 2, 
 7. 2 Tim. 1,11. Buttm. { 134. 1. Sept. for 
 jns Jer. 1, 5. Lev. 26, 31 ; -p2ri Job 11, 
 13. (./El. V. H. 13. 6 6 oiVo? Ti 3r;o-t TOS 
 yvvaiKas TfKvoiroiovs. Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 3.) 
 Once by Hebr. c. ace. et eis TI as predicate, 
 Acts 13, 47 TtSeiKa ere els ^><os (%v<ov, see 
 in els no. 3. a. Winer 5 32. 4. b. Sept. for 
 }> t ins Gen. 17, 16; CW Is. 42, 15. With 
 ace, and els final, Mid. 1 Thess. 5, 9 OVK 
 e SleTo jj/zas 6 3eos els opyr/v, i. e. hath not 
 appointed us to wrath. 1 Tim. 1, 12. Pass, 
 1 Pet. 2, 8. With ace. and Iva, John 15, 
 16 e SjjKa ti/xas, iva vfiels vrrdyrjTe KT\. 
 
 TLKTO), f. T eco Horn. Od. 11. 249; 
 comm. fut. Tegofj.cu, aor. 2 ertnov, see Buttm. 
 5 114. 
 
 1. to bring forth offspring, to bear ; pr. ot 
 the mother, c. ace. Matt. 1, 21. 23 Te^erai 
 8e vlov. v. 25. 2, 2 6 Te^Sets /3ao-iXevs- 
 Luke 1, 31. 57. 2, 6. 7. 11. John 16, 21. 
 Gal. 4, 27. Heb. 11, 11 Rec. Rev. 12, 2. 4 
 bis. 5. 13. Sept. for 1^ Gen. 3, 16. 4, 1. 
 So JE\. V. H. 1. 29. Luc. D. Deor. 10. 1. 
 Xen. Conv. 5. 7. Trop. of irregular desire 
 as exciting to sin ; James 1, 15 eVtSv/i/a 
 trvXXa/3o{5o-a riKrei a^apriav, i. e. leads to sin, 
 causes sin. So Ecclus. 8, 18. Zenob. Cent. 
 3. 28 8i<rj SIKWV eriKre Kal ^\dj3rjv /3Xa/3>;. 
 Anthol. Gr. II. p. 44 dfppoa-vva rtKrei TTO\- 
 \aKi Svcrrv^iav. 
 
 2. Of the earth, to bring forth, to produce, 
 to yield, c. ace. Heb. 6, 7 rj yrj riKTovcra /3o- 
 Tavrjv. Philo de Opif. p. 30. Eurip. Cyclop. 
 332 TJ yfj . . . TiKTovcrcnroiav. Of trees, Philo 
 ib. p. 862. 
 
 rtXXci), f. tXw, to pull, to pluck, ic pull 
 out or ( if, e. g. ears of grain, c. ace. Matt. 
 12, 1. Mark 2, 23. Luke 6, 1 ; see Deut. 
 23, 25. Sept. TiX. rpixas for tna Ezra 9, 
 3. Psalt. Sal. 13, 3. Arr. Epict/ 3. 1. 29. 
 Diod. Sic. 5. 21 TOVS ora^us. 
 
 TV//,ato?, ov, 6, Timccus, pr. n. of 
 man, Mark 10, 46. 
 
TlfJLad) 
 
 721 
 
 i>, f. jjo-o), (rifj.1],) to value, to 
 hold rvorthy, to estimate, e. g. 
 
 1. to esteem, to honour, to reverence, c. 
 cc. a) Genr. 1 Tim. 5, 3 x*!P as r ^( M - 
 1 Pet. 2, 17 ndvras. Spec, parents Matt. 
 15, 4. 5. 19, 19. Mark 7, 10. 10, 19. Luke 
 18, 20. Eph. 6, 2. (Sept. and 133 Ex. 20, 
 12. Deut. 5, 16.) Also kings 1 Pet. 2, 17 ; 
 God and Christ, John 5, 23 quater. 8, 49 ; 
 likewise of feigned piety towards God, Matt. 
 15, 8 et Mark 7, 6 TOIS xei Xeo-i p.e np.q, 
 quoted from Is. 29, 13 where Sept. for 
 133 ; as also genr. Prov. 3, 9. 14, 33. So 
 Ecclus. 3, 3. 4. 6. Hdian. 4. 8. 19. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 2. 12 ; TOVS Zfovs JEl V. H. 2. 31. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 3. 13. b) Spec, to treat with 
 honour, to bestow special marks of honour 
 and favour upon any one, c. ace. John 12, 
 26. Acts 28, 10 TroXXaly rc/ialy MfOjOWt 
 17/nay. So 2 Mace. 3, 2. Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 8 
 vp.as Tip.av gei/iois. Xen. An. 1.9. 14 ftwpots 
 
 2. Spec, to prize, to fix a value or price 
 upon any thing ; Pass, and Mid. c. ace. 
 Matt. 27, 9 bis, TTJV Tip-r/v TOV Terifj.rjfj.fvov, 
 ov fTip-rja-avTO OTTO mutv la-parjX, comp. Zech. 
 11,12.13; seein Iepe/uW Sept. for Tp"}^ 
 Lev. 27, 8. 12. 14. Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 21. 
 Dem. 183. 19. Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 10. 
 
 jf, jj, (TUB,) a valuing, holding 
 worth, estimation ; hence 
 
 1. honour, reverence, worship. a) Genr. 
 e. g. as rendered or exhibited towards any 
 person or thing ; John 4, 44 Trpo^rijs . . . 
 Ttp.f)v OVK e^ei. Rom. 12, 10. 1 Cor. 12, 23. 
 24. Col. 2, 23 OVK (v TI/J.JJ nvi sc. ToO crco- 
 P.OTOS. 1 Thess. 4, 4 eV ri/i>; i. e. reputably. 
 Heb. 3, 3. 1 Pet. 3, 7 ; crKevos fls n/x^i/ 
 Rom. 9, 21. 2 Tim. 2, 20. 21. So as ren 
 dered to masters, 1 Tim. 6, 1 ; to magis 
 trates, Rom. 13, 7 bis ; to elders, 1 Tim. 5, 
 17 ; to Christ, c. 8oa, 2 Pet. 1,17. Rev. 5, 
 12. 13 ; to God, c. 8o a, 1 Tim. 1, 17. 6, 16. 
 Rev. 4, 9. 11. 7, 12. 19, 1 Rec. Sept. for 
 1123 Is. 14, 18; 1^ Dan. 4, 27; T. rw 
 Kvpin for t$ Ps. 29, i. 96, 7. So Jos. c. 
 Ap. 2. 27 yovfvv Tirf. Luc. Haley. 2. 
 Hdian. 2. 15. 4. Xen. An. 6. 1. 20 ; rw Sew 
 Jos. Ant. 1. 3. 1. JE\. V. H. 3. 1. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 3. 3. b) Of a state or condition 
 of honour, rank, dignity, joined with 8da, 
 Heb. 2, 7 8oi; KOI ripy (sTTt(pdva>cras airov, 
 quoted from Ps. 8, 6 where Sept. for "H"? 
 As conferred in reward, v. 9. Rom. 2, 7. 10. 
 1 Pet. 1,7. 2, 7. Once, an office of hon 
 our, Heb. 5, 4. So Jos. Ant. 10. 8. 6. 
 Hilian. 3. 10. 9. Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 1. c) 
 VIeton. an honour, a mark or token of hon- 
 46 
 
 our, favour; Acts 28, 10 TroXXals rt/um 
 fri/jLTjo-av rinas. Sept. for "ij? 1 ? Dan. 2, 6. 
 So Ecclus. 38, 1. Jos. Ant. 3. 2. 5. Xen. 
 Cyr. 2. 2. 18, 20. 
 
 2. value, price ; Matt. 27, 6 np-rj aifj-aros 
 price of blood, v. 9 see in n/iaco no. 2. Acts 
 4, 34. 5, 2. 3. 7, 16 Tip-rj dpyvpiov. 19, 19. 
 1 Cor. 6, 20. 7, 23. Sept. for ^9 Lev. 5, 
 15. 18 ; S)03 Job 31, 39 ; vna is. 55, 1. 
 So Jos. Vit/jSl. JELV. H. 2. 7. Xen. 
 An. 7. 5. 2. Meton. a thing of price, and 
 hence collect, precious things, Rev. 21, 24. 
 26 ; so Sept. for "i^ 1 ? Ez. 22, 25. 
 
 Ti/tiO9, a, ov, (rtjuij.) valued, held worth, 
 estimated, e. g. 
 
 1. esteemed, honoured; estimable, honour 
 able ; Acts 5, 34 Fa/uaXt^X . . . Ti /zior -rravrl 
 TW XaaJ. Heb. 13, 4. Sept. for ^^ Ezra 
 4, 10 ; ig; Ps. 116, 15. Jos. B. J. 5. 13. 1 
 rw 8r]p.a) rifjLios. Hdian. 6. 9. 14. Xen. OZc. 
 9. 13. 
 
 2. valued, prized, precious. a) Pr. of 
 high price, costly, as Xfeor TL/JHOS a precious 
 stone, gem, genr. Rev. 17, 4. 18, 12. 16. 
 21, 11. 19; Plur. costly stones, 1 Cor. 3, 
 12 ; uXoi/ rip.iov costly wood Rev. 18, 12. 
 Sept. for "ifj? 1 K. 10, 2. 2 Chr. 9, 1. 10. 
 So Hdian. 5. 2. 10 X&oi r. ^El. V. H. 7. 8. 
 Xen. An. 1. 2. 27. b) Trop. precious, 
 dear, desirable ; Acts 20, 24 ovSe e^w rr/v 
 tyvx^v p.ov Tip.iai> e /xaurw. James 5, 7. 1 Pet. 
 1, 7. 19. 2 Pet. 1, 4. Sept. for "fan p rov . 
 3, 15. 8, 11. SoWisd. 12, 7. Jos. Ant. 
 1 7. 9. 4 (iXeuj> re HpcoS^ rmtcoraror. Hdian. 
 1. 16. 9. 
 
 Ti/UOTT??, TJTOS, f}, (n /xtor,) preciousness, 
 costliness ; melon, precious things, magnifi* 
 cence ; prob. costly merchandize, Rev. 18, 
 19. Liban. Ep. 1557 irpoo-ayopevca TJJI> rt- 
 
 ov, 6, Timofheus, Timothy, 
 pr. n. of a young Christian of Derbe, the 
 son of a Jewish mother and Greek father, 
 chosen by Paul as the companion of his 
 journeys and labours in preaching the gos 
 pel, Acts 16, 1. 3. Some suppose him to 
 have been with Paul at Rome, Heb. 13, 23 ; 
 but his later history is unknown. Acts 16, 1. 
 17, 14. 15. 18, 5. 19,22. 20,4. 1 Cor. 16, 
 10. 2 Cor. 1,19. Phil. 1,1. 2,19. 1 Thess. 
 1, 1. 3, 6. 2 Thess. 1, 1. 1 Tim. 6, 20 
 2 Tim. 1, 2. TtyioSeoj 6 crvvrpyos p.ov Rom 
 16, 21. T. 6 dSeX^o r 2 Cor. 1, 1. Col. 1, 1. 
 1 Thess. 3, 2. Philem. 1. Heb. 13,23. Tip.. 
 TO TCKVOV p.ov 1 Cor. 4, 17. 1 Tim. 1,2. 18. 
 1 tfj-cav, avos, o, Timon, pr. n. of one 
 of the seven primitive deacons at Jerusa 
 lem, Acts 6, 5. 
 
722 
 
 rty 
 
 ) co, f. TJCTCO, (Ti/icopds, for TJ/ii7- 
 opos, Ti/j.dopos , Tip.r], de/po), aipo>,) pr. to 
 take up one s honour ; hence to help, to 
 succour \ to vindicate, c. dat. Hdot. 1. 141. 
 Dem. 1388. 16. Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 8 ; to 
 avenge, to punish in behalf of any one, c. 
 dat. Hdian. 4. 13. 6, comp. 3. In N. T. 
 genr. to punish, c. ace. Acts 26, 11 Tijico- 
 ouv avTovs. Pass. Acts 22, 5. So Wisd. 
 12, 20. Pol. 2. 56. 11. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 6, 
 ]. q. Ko\dfiv in } 7. 
 
 Ti/ncopia, as, 17, (Ti/zcop/a>,") vindication, 
 avengement, Jos. Ant. 17. 9. 1. Xen. Cyr. 
 4. 6. 7. In N. T. punishment, Heb. 10, 29. 
 So 2 Mace. 6, 26. Pol. 1. 7. 12. Xen. Mem. 
 4. 4. 24. 
 
 see in n. 
 
 Tt ?, Neut. TI, Gen. rivos, pron. interrog. 
 who? which? what? Lat. quis, quec, quid? 
 Sept. TIS for ""O , TI for Mo Always writ 
 ten with the acute accent on t. and thus 
 distinguished from indef. TIS, TI, see in TIS, 
 and comp. Buttm. 13. n. 2. 5 77. 1. The 
 place of TIS is usually at the beginning of 
 the interrogative clause, or at most after 
 a particle or the like ; but see below in 
 \. 1. f. 
 
 A) DIRECT, usually with the Indicative ; 
 sometimes with the Subjunct. and Optative, 
 which then serve to modify its power ; 
 comp. below in no. 6, 7. 
 
 1. With the Indie, genr. and in various 
 constructions : a) Simply, Matt. 3, 7 TIS 
 vn(8(ifv vp.1v cpvyflv KT\. 21, 23 /cat TIS 
 croi e8a>KfV TI/V fov(ruu> TavTr/v ; Mark 2, 7. 
 Luke 10, 29. John 1, 22. 39 ri fre iTf ; 
 13, 25. Acts 7, 27. 19, 3 els ri ovv e/3ajm- 
 o-trjTf, into what? Heb. 3, 17. 18. Rev. 6, 
 17. al. seep. So TI eo-Tt TOVTO ; what is this? 
 what means this ? Mark 1, 27. 9, 10. Eph. 
 4, 9. With a pron. demonstr. in a con 
 tracted clause, Matth. 5 472. 4. Luke 16, 2 
 TI TOVTO aKovto Trepi crov, for TI eori TOVTO o 
 KT\. comp. John 16, 18. Acts 11, 17. For 
 the phrases : TI rrpos rjpas, ri Trpos erf, see 
 in Trpds III. 3. a ; TI e /iot cat croi, see in 
 (yd> no. 3 ; comp. below in lett. d. So 
 Hdian. 2. 1. 17. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 62; TI 
 OTO Luc. D. Deor. 5. 7 ; with a demonstr. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 4. 13. b) With a Subst. 
 or an Adj. taken substantively. Matt. 5, 46 
 riva p.icr Zbv f xfTf t MarkS, 9. Luke 14,31. 
 John 2, 18 Tt o-^fiflov Set/civets ; Rom. 6, 21. 
 Heb. 7, 1 1. Matt. 5, 47 TI -r-fpicrcrbv TrotetTe ; 
 Mark 15, 14 TI -yap KUKOV eVoirjcrej ; al. 
 Comp. Xen. An. 7. 6. 4. c) With genit. 
 of a class or of partition, i. e. of which TIS, 
 Tivts expresses a part. Matt. 22, 28 TtVos 
 
 TO>V e rrra eo-Tat ; Luke 10, 36. Acts 7. 52 
 Ti ra TUIV irpo<pr]T<av ; Heb. 1, 5. 13. Also 
 with fK c. genit. partit. Matt. 6, 27 TIS 5 
 e vfj.wv KT\. John 8, 46 ; also with a Subst. 
 Matt. 7, 9 T( s (CTTIV e i/ucoi/ avSpamos 
 
 KT\. Luke 11, 11. d) After TIS the verb 
 tlvaL is often omitted, e. g. TI ?rpos 17/^04 
 Matt. 27. 4 ; TI e /ioi Kcti croi John 2, 4. 
 Mark 5, 9 TI o-ot ovo/za ; Luke 4, 36. Acts 
 7, 49 ^ TIS TOTTOS Trjs Ka.Tairavo~etosp.ov ; 10, 
 21. Rom. 3, 1. 8, 31. 34. James 3, 13. al. 
 Also yiVeo-Sai Matt. 26, 8. John 21, 21. 
 Comp. Winer 5 66. 2. So Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 
 62. e) Sing. TI as predicate sometimes 
 refers to a Plural neut. as subject ; John 6, 
 9 Tavra TI ttrTiv ds TocravTovs ; comp. in 
 lett. f. Acts 17, 20, comp. below in no. 7. 
 Comp. Matth. 488. 7. Winer { 25. 1. n. 
 So Luc. D. Deor. 11. 1. Plat. Theaet. 155. 
 C, 3avjuao>, TI TTOT f crri TaCra. f) By in 
 version, TIS is sometimes put after several 
 words in a clause ; comp. above init. Matt. 
 6, 28. John 6, 9 dXXa TatJTa TI eo~Tiv KT\. 
 
 16, 18. Acts 11, 17. 19, 15 vpels 8e rivts 
 eo-Te ; Rom. 14, 10. Eph. 4, 9. al. Comp. 
 Matth. J 488. 2. g) With other particles : 
 KCU TIS, and who ? who then ? Mark 10, 26. 
 
 2 Cor. 2, 2 ; see in /Au no. 1. e. y, TIS a pa, 
 who then? see in "tpa no. 2 ; TI yap, whal 
 then? Rom. 3, 3. Phil. 1, 18, see in yd/ 
 no. 3 ; T i ovv, whal therefore ? what then 1 
 see in ovv no. 2. d ; T i o T t why ? see in 
 oTt no. I. 2 ; 8ia TL or SiaTi, on account oj 
 what ? wherefore ? why? see in did II. 1. 
 b. a; fls TI, for what? to what end? 
 wherefore ? why ? Matt. 14, 31. Mark 
 14, 4 ; see in tls no. 3. d. a. But Acts 19, 
 
 3 see above in lett. a. Also Trpbs TI, for 
 what ? for what intent ? wherefore ? John 
 
 13, 28 ; see in Trpo s III. 3. d. (Xen. Cyr. 6. 
 3.20.) II/QTI, that what? to what end? 
 wherefore ? see in IvaTi. 
 
 2. Neut. TI as adverb of interrogation, or 
 as ace. of manner, interrog. a) wherefore 1 
 whyl for what cause ? i. q. 8ia TI. Matth. 
 5 488. 8. Matt. 8, 26 TI 8fi\oi eW ; Mark 
 11, 3. Luke 6, 2. John 7, 19. Acts 26, 
 
 14. 1 Cor. 10, 30. al. sasp. Sept. for OB 
 Ex. 14, 15. (Xen. An. 2. 4. 3.) So Tt /cat, 
 why then? 1 Cor. 15, 29. 30. see in at 
 no. 1. e. y ; TL 8e, but ivhy? expressing 
 surprise Matt. 7, 3. Luke 6, 41 ; also, and 
 why? continuative, 1 Cor. 4, 7, comp. 
 Matth. J 488. 9 ; TI ovv, why /hen? Matt. 
 
 17, 10. John 1, 25. Acts 15, 10. al. see in 
 ovv no. 2. d. Also why ? i. q. to what end ? 
 for what purpose ? i. q. els TI, Matt. 26. 
 65. Gal. 3, 19 TI ovv 6 vdp.os ; b) as to 
 what? how? in what respect? i. q. KOTO 
 
Ttf 
 
 723 
 
 Tfc 
 
 ri. Matt. 19,20 ri en varepcS ; Matt. 16, 
 26. Mark 8, 36. Luke 9, 25. (Xen. Cyr. 
 2. 1. 17.) Also in what way? how 1 ? Rom. 
 8, 24 ri KM. An-iff t ; 1 Cor. 7, 1 6 bis, ri 
 yap <nSay, yvvai, KT\. Acts 26, 8. So 
 Matt. 22, 17 ri o-oi SOKI; Mark 14, 64. 
 Hence intensive, how ! how greatly . Matt. 
 7, 14 in later edit, ri orewj 17 ITV\T). Luke 
 12, 49 ri SeXw, ft 1787 dvrj(j>^rj. So Sept. 
 for fin Ps. 3, 2. Cant. 4, 10. 7, 7. 
 
 3. Where two are spoken of, who or 
 jcfa c/i of the two ? i. q. TroYtpop. Matt. 21, 
 31 ris (K ru>v 8vo. 27, 21 riva dirb rwv 8vo. 
 Comp. above in no. 1. c. Matt. 9, 5 ri yap 
 fo-riv fvKOTrurfpov KT\. 23, 17. 19. Luke 7, 
 42. 1 Cor. 4, 21. See Winer 25. 1. 
 Matth. J488. 4. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 17. Plato 
 Phileb. 52. d ; comp. Stalb. in Plat. 1. c. p. 
 167. 
 
 4. Sometimes ris c. Indie, through the 
 force of the context approaches to the sense 
 of TroZbc, Lat. qualis, i. e. of what kind or 
 sort! Viger. p. 731. E.g. of persons, Matt. 
 16, 13 rlva fj.( \fyovcri ol oz SpcoTTOt tivat ; V. 
 15. Mark 8, 27. 29. 1 Cor. 3, 5 ris ovv tori 
 ElaCXoy ; James 4, 1 2. So ris tipa Luke 1 , 
 66. 8, 25. Neut. Heb. 2, 6 rt eariv uv5pa>- 
 iros; (Soph. Trach. 311.) Of things, Luke 
 4, 36 rip 6 \6yos ovros ; 24, 17. John 7, 
 36. 1 Cor. 15, 29. 
 
 5. Spec, with Indie. Fut. ris expresses : 
 
 a) Deliberation, Matt. 11, 16 rivi 8e olpoi- 
 cotra) rf)v KT\. Mark 6, 24. Luke 3, 10 rt 
 ovv Troifjo-opfv ; v. 12. 13, 18. Acts 4, 16. 
 Comp. Winer 41. 6. In most of these 
 examples, some Mss. have the Subjunctive. 
 So rarely with Indie. Present, John 11, 
 47. Acts 21, 22. Comp. Winer 42. 3. 
 
 b) Hence implying the idea, shall, may, can ; 
 Matt. 5, 13 (v rivi oXto-Sijo-erai ; Luke 1, 
 18 Kara ri yr&mpat rovro ; Acts 8, 33. 
 Rom. 8, 33. 35. Comp. Winer 1. c. c) 
 Sometimes put where a general truth is to 
 be illustrated by a particular example ; 
 comp. Herm. ad Soph. Trach. 451. Matt. 
 12, 11 ris fcrrat e vp.u>v j>3po)7roy, oy eft 
 KT\. Luke 14,5. 11, 5 where the Subjunct. 
 alternates with the Fut. 
 
 6. With the Sufy uncf.. implying delibe 
 ration with the idea of possibility ; comp. 
 Herm. ad Vig. p. 729. Winer 42. 4. b. p. 
 3-15. Matt. 6, 31 Xt yoj/rey ri (pdyco/ifv, 
 KT\. Luke 12, 17 ri TTOIIJO-W ; 16, 3. So 
 Matt. 20, 32 rt SeXtre TTO^O-QJ vfjiiv ; 27, 17. 
 21. 22 ; see in 3t Xa> no. 2. 
 
 7. With the Oplat. and /, implying 
 doubt, uncertainty. Acts 2, 12 ri av 3Xot 
 rovro tivai ; 17, 18. Comp. Herm. ad Vig. 
 D. 729. Luc. D. Deor 7. 1. Vitar. Auct. 12. 
 
 B) INDIRECT, where it is often equiv. to 
 ocrrty, o,rt, see Buttm. 127. 5 and n. 8. 
 Kiihner 344. n. 1. Matth. 488. 1. Winer 
 25. 1. 
 
 1 . With the Indicat. after verbs of hear - 
 ing, inquiring, showing, knowing, and the 
 like ; comp. Winer 42. 4. p. 345 sq. 
 Matth. 507. 2. So in various constructions 
 and uses : a) Genr. Matt. 6, 3 pr) yi>cora> 
 rj aptcrrepd <rov ri Trout 17 Setd crov. 9, 13 
 /xdSere rt (<rriv. 10, 11. 12, 3. 7. 21, 16. 
 Mark 14, 36. Luke 6, 47. 7, 39. Acts 21, 
 33. Ep!i. 5, 10. 1 John 3, 2. John 19, 24 
 \d^a>nfv TTfpt avrov, rivos eorat. So with 
 a Subst. 1 Cor. 15, 2 rivi Xoyo> KT\. 1 Pet. 
 1, 11 ; comp. in A. 1. b. With flvai im 
 plied, comp. in A. 1. d ; Rom. 8, 27 rt ro 
 (ppovrjfjia KT\. Eph. 3, 18. Heb. 5, 12. So 
 Hdian. 2. 8. 8 riva x e7 " 6 yvu)p.rjv. Xen. An. 
 4. 8. 5. Mem. 1. 6. 4. In a double ques 
 tion, Luke 19, 15 tra yva ris ri 8ifrrpayp.a- 
 rfva-aro, pr. that he might know, who had 
 gained ichal ? i. e. who had gained and what 
 he had gained ; comp. Matth. 488. 12 fin. 
 Herm. ad Soph. Antig. 20. Aj. 1164. So 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 3 riVar ovv VTTO rivaiv ev- 
 poi/jLfv *rX. b) i. q. irorepos, comp. in A. 
 3. Phil. 1, 22 ri alpr)crofj.ai ov yvu>pla>. So 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. 17. c) i. q. Trotoy, comp. 
 in A. 4. John 10, 6 oi /c eyvaxrav riva yv a 
 e XaXft. Acts 17, 19. 24, 20. 
 
 2. With the Subjunct. implying what 
 may or can be done, i. e. possibility, Herm. 
 ad Vig. p. 729, 741. Winer 42. 4. b. p. 
 345. Matth. 516. 3. Matt. 6, 25 pr, fitpi- 
 fjLvure ri (pdyrjrf. 10,19. 15,32. Mark 9, 
 6 ov yap fjdti, ri XaXiyVfl. Luke 12, 5. 11. 
 29. 17, 8. 19, 48. Rpm. 8, 26. 1 Pet. 5, 8. 
 So in a double question, Mark 15, 24 /3oX- 
 Xovres /cXi/poi* eV avrd, rt r ri nprj, comp. 
 above in no. 1. 
 
 3. With the Optat. after a preceding 
 praeterite, and implying doubt, uncertainty ; 
 Buttm. 139. m. 63. Herm. ad Vig. p. 740. 
 Matt. } 518. Winer 42. 4. c. p. 346. a) 
 Genr. Luke 8, 9 eV^pcoro)! 8e avrov . . . ris 
 firj Tj Trapa/SoXr) avrrj ; 15, 26 etruvSdvero, ri 
 f"rj ravra; comp. in A. 1. e. 18, 36. 22. 
 23. So Hdian. 2. 8. 5 riVa yvci)fj.rjv evoire. 
 Xen. An. 4. 5. 10. b) With &, as 
 strengthening the idea of uncertainty, comp. 
 Buttm. 139. m. 15. Winer 43. 4. Herm, 
 ad Vig. 729. Luke 1, 62 ro, rt av 3c Xoi Ka - 
 Xe tcrSat ai Tov. 6, 1 1 8if\d\ovv npos dXXij- 
 \ovs, ri av Trotjjcretai ra lr)<rov. 9, 46. 
 John 13, 24. Acts 5, 24. 10, 17. 17, 20. 
 21, 33. So Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 12. + 
 
 TI?, Neut, rl t Gen. nvos, pron. indef, 
 enclitic, Buttm. 14. 2. 77. 1. Kiihner 
 
724 
 
 5 93 ; distinguished by its accent from ris 
 interrog. q. v. 
 
 1 . one, some one, a certain one, referring 
 to some person or thing whom one cannot 
 or does not wish to name or specify more 
 nearly ; so in various constructions : a) 
 Simply, Matt. 12, 47 eiVe 8e ns avra. 20, 
 20 alrelv n. Luke 8, 49. 9, 57. 13, 6. 
 Acts 5, 25. al. Plur. rives Mark 14, 4. 
 Luke 13, 1. 24, 1. John 13, 29. Rom. 3, 3. 
 1 Cor. 4, 18. 1 Tim. 6, 10. 21. Heb. 4, 6. 
 1 Cor. 15, 12 nves ev vfuv. al. So Hdian. 
 6. 1. 15. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 6; rives Hdian. 
 1. 3. 13. b) Joined with a Subst. or an 
 Adjective taken substantively, a certain per 
 son or thing, some, Buttm. $ 124. 2. Matth. 
 5 487 init. So after a Subst. Mark 5, 25 
 yvvf] ns. Luke 8, 27. 9, 19. 10, 31. 38. 
 John 6. 7 fipaxy ri \dprj. Acts 5, 1. 27, 
 39. al. Plur. Luke 8, 2 yvwu/cey rives. 24, 
 22. Acts 9, 19 fji^ pas rivds. 17, 20. 2 Pet. 
 
 3, 16 Svcrvovrd nva. (Ceb. Tab. 1 7riva ris. 
 Xen. (Ec. 8. 3.) Also before the Subst. or 
 Adj. Matth. \ 487. 4, 6. Matt. 18, 12 eav 
 yevqrai rivi dv Spdnra). Luke 17, 12. John 
 
 4, 46. Acts 3, 2. 9. 36. Gal. 6, 1. al. Plur. 
 Luke 13, 31 rives ^npiaaloi. Acts 13, 1. 
 15, 2 rivas o XXovy. 27, 1. Jude 4. So els 
 ris, Mark 14, 51 els ris vea.via-K.os, comp. in 
 els no. 2. Matth. 1. c. init. (Hdian. 3. 11. 2.) 
 Joined with names, either proper or gentile ; 
 e. g. before, Mark 15, 21 Trapdyovrd nva 
 Si/jioova. Acts 9,43 ; by apposit. John 11, 1. 
 After, Luke 10, 33 ^a^apeirrjs Se ris. So 
 Hdian. 4. 8. 10. Xen. Hell. 5. 4. 3 irapa 
 Xapom rivi. c) With genit. of a class or 
 of partition, i. e. of which rls, rives, expresses 
 a part. Luke 14, 15 aKovaras 8e ris rS>v 
 crvvavaKeifievw. 2 Cor. 12, 17 ; eis ris 
 Mark 14, 47, comp. in lett. b. Plur. Matt. 
 9,3. 27,47. Mark 2, 6. Luke 19, 39. Acts 
 6, 9. Rom. 11, 17. 2 Cor. 10, 12. al. 
 (Hdian. 1. 4. 20; els ris Plato Ion 531. 
 d. Plur. Hdian. 1. 6. 2. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 
 19.) In a like sense with CK c. genit. Luke 
 12, 13 erne fie ris eK rov o^Xou. John 11, 
 49. Plur. c. , Luke 11, 15 rives 8e <? 
 avr&v. John 7, 25. 9, 16. Rom. 11, 14. 
 So Hdian. 5. 3, 18. d) With numerals, 
 where it renders the number indefinite, 
 about, some; Luke 7, 19 Trpoa-KaXea-dp-evos 
 &vo rivas ra>v /j.aSTjrwj avrov, i. e. some two, 
 two or three. Acts 23, 23. Comp. Winer 
 I 25. 2. Matth. I 487. 4. So Thuc. 3. Ill 
 ts SiaKocriovs rivas avrfov. 7. 87. e) Dis- 
 tributively, ris . . erepos 8f, one . . . another, 
 1 Cor. 3, 4. (Xen. Conv. 2. 6.) Plur. 
 rives . . . rives 8 Luke 9, 7. 8. Phil. 1, 15. 
 f) Sometimes ris or rives is omitted where 
 
 the sense requires it to be supplied ; Luka 
 8, 20 Km a.7n]yye\r) avra, \ey6vraiv sc. rt- 
 va>v. Mark 2, 1 Si -fifjiepcav sc. rivuv. So 
 before a genit. partit. Acts 21, 16; before 
 c. gen. Matt. 13, 47. Luke 21,16. John 
 16, 17. Rev. 3, 9. Comp. Winer $ 30. 5. 
 66. 3. 
 
 2. Genr. any one, any body, some one CT 
 other, in various constructions and uses ; 
 comp. above in no. 1. a) Simply, Matt. 
 8, 28. Mark 12, 19 edv rivos d8e\<pbs diro- 
 Zdvrj. Luke 14, 8. John 10, 28. Acts 19, 
 38. Rom. 5, 7 bis. poXis yap vjrep SiKaiov 
 ris aTTo^avelrai KT\. James 2, 18. al. Neut. 
 Tt, Matt. 5. 23 e^ei ri Kara trow. Mark 11, 
 
 13. Luke 22, 35. Acts 3, 5. James 1, 7. al. 
 Adv. see below in no. 5. So Xen. Cyr. 2. 
 
 3. 4 ; Tt Hdian. 6. 1.4. b) Joined with a 
 Subst. or Adj. Rom. 8, 39 ovre ris Krivis 
 erepa. Neut. Tt, Luke 11, 36 fj.T) e^oiv n 
 p.epos crKoreivov. Acts 8, 34. So espec. 
 Neut. Tt before adjectives of quality, char 
 acter, etc. Matth. 487. 4 ; e. g. before the 
 adj. Luke 24, 41 e^ere ri ^puxrifjiov. John 
 1, 47. Acts 17, 21. 19, 39; after the adj. 
 Mark 16, 18 KO.V Savdcriuov ri Triaxriv. John 
 5,14. Acts 19, 32. So Plato Conv. 210. e, rl 
 Sav^ao-ToV. c) With genit. of a class 01 
 of partition, comp. in no. I.e. 1 Cor. 6, 1 
 ro\p,q ris vpuv. Acts 5, 15. 2 Thess. 3, 8 
 Neut. rt, Acts 4, 32 KOI oiSe els ri ra>\ 
 vTrapxovrcov aura KT\. Rom. 15, 18. Eph. 
 5, 27. Also with 0770 c. gen. Luke 16, 30 , 
 eK c. gen. Heb. 3, 13 Tty e v^imv. James 2, 
 16. d) Also for the Engl. indef. one, sonu 
 one, Fr. on, Germ, man, Buttm. 5 127. 4. 
 5 129. 19. Matt. 12, 29 TTWS Svvarai ns V 
 eXSeiv KT\. Mark 8, 4. John 2, 25. 1 Tim. 
 1, 8. So Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 3 WOT eVeSi^** 
 av ns KT\. e) In a similar sense, like 
 Engl. one, any one, for every one, ettao-ros , 
 John 6, 50 ovros ecrriv 6 cipros...1va ns e 
 avrov (payfj KT\. Acts 2, 45. 11,29. 1 Cor. 
 
 4, 2. Heb. 10, 28. So Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 2. 
 f) edv ris, if any one, Matt. 21, 3. Mark 
 11,3. Col. 3, 13. James 2, 14. Rev. 22, 18; 
 eav P.TI ris, unless one, John 3, 3. 5. Acts 
 8, 31. Plur. av rives, if any, i. q. who 
 soever, John 20, 23 bis. So Luc. D. Deor. 
 23. 1 fjv ns. g) ei Tty, if any one, see 
 in et I. 2. g. y. In a hypothetical clause, 
 the simple Tts is sometimes said to be i. q. 
 ei Tt?, but not accurately; 1 Cor. 7, 18 bis, 
 TrepirerfJ:r]p.evos ns eK\rj^rj, pr/ eVtcrTrdcrSaj 
 <r\. is one called being circumcised, i. e. be 
 it so that one is thus called. James 5, 13. 
 
 14. Comp. Winer $ 25. I. n. So Athen. 6. 
 p. 223 dcpZaXfjua ris. Plu t. Pner. de educ. 4 
 dXX e cTTi Tty 7ro.<poTr KTA. n) Sometimes 
 
TtrXo? 
 
 725 
 
 rts, any one, is omitted where the sense re 
 quires it to be supplied ; cotnp. above in 
 no. 1. f. Matt. 23, 9 cat wart pa py [TIVO] 
 KaXfcrrjTe vy.>v eVt Ttjs yrjs. 1 Pet. 4, 12. 
 
 3. Emphat. somebody, something, any 
 tiling, i. e. some person or thing of weight 
 and importance, some great one ; Matth. 
 } 487. 5. Winer { 25. 2. a) Simply, Acts 
 5, 36 dvfCTTT} Qfvbds, \eya>v dvai Tiva cav- 
 ruv. (Theocr. 11. 79. Dem. 150. 19 ere fteV 
 iv T!J TroAei Set Tiva (paivftr Sai. Epict. Ench. 
 13.) Neut. 1 Cor. 3, 7 ovre 6 (pvTtvuv eWt 
 rt. 10, 19. Gal. 2, 6. 6, 3 ei yap ot ns 
 flval rt. V. 15. 1 Cor. 8, 2 ft Se TIS SoKei 
 flo-fvai ri. So Plato Gorg. 83. p. 527. d, 
 u>s TI ovras- id. Apol. Socr. 6. p. 21. d, ov- 
 TOS p.fv olfTai TI (I8(vai, oi>K ei Sciy. b) 
 With an adjective, Acts 8, 9 2iuwv...\fycav 
 flval Tiva eavTov p.tyav. Heb. 10, 27 (poptpa 
 8e TIS tKo oxf] Kpia-tcos, i. e. a very fearful 
 looking for of judgment. So Eurip. ap. 
 Stob. 173. 11 Stivf] TIS opyf]. ^Eschin. Dial. 
 Socr. 3. 17 yaXrjvos TIS /3/oy. 
 
 4. With a Subsl. or Adj. T\S sometimes 
 serves to limit or modify the full significa 
 tion, like Engl. someichat, i. q. in some mea 
 sure, a kind of; Winer $ 25. 2. Buttm. 
 $150. m. 6. Kiihner $303.4. Rom. 1,11 tva 
 T . /iera8a) ^api(rp.a vfjuv. v. 13. 1 Cor. 6, 11. 
 James 1,18 els TO dvai f]/j.as d^ap-j^v Tiva 
 *rX. So Luc. D. Deor. 6. 1 o-vviij/jn yap, 
 OTTOIOV TL TO atcT^/Doi/ KT\. Hdot. 5. 48 ov 
 yap Tiva TTO\\OV %povov. 
 
 5. Neut. TI adverbially or as ace. of 
 manner. a) Simply, in or as to some 
 thing, in any icay, Phil. 3, 15 KO\ ft TI ere- 
 po>f (ppovt iTf. Philem. 1 8. Hence i. q. per 
 haps, in the formula t fj.fj TI, unless per 
 haps, Luke 9, 13. John 5, 19. al. see in uf)Ti 
 no. 1. Comp. Buttm. 150. m. 6. So Luc. 
 D. Deor. 2. 1 ei *ai TI rjpapTov. ib. 7. 1. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 9 ; tl M Tl Xen - Hel] - 7 - 
 4. 35. b) With another ace. neut. as 
 Adverb, thus serving to modify it, comp. in 
 no. 4 ; some, somewhat, a little, comp. Matth. 
 5 487. 4 fin. E. g. fipaxv TI, some little, a 
 little, spoken of time Acts 5, 34 ; of place 
 or rank Heb. 2, 7. Acts 23, 20 TI aicptj3<r - 
 (rrtpov. 2 Cor. 10, 8. 11, 16. So ntpos TI, 
 in snme part, partly, 1 Cor. 11, 18. Plato 
 Gorg. 499. b, irdXai TI. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 12 
 (Txfbov TI. Hi. 1. 21 rt rjbiov. -f" 
 
 TtVXo9, ov, 6, Lat. titulus, i. e. a title, 
 inscription, superscription, John 19, 19. 20. 
 He^ych. T LT\OS Tm\iov nrfypa/Jfta fx. ov - 
 
 Tiros, ov, 6, Titus, pr. n. of a Christian 
 teacher of Greek origin, a companion and 
 fellow-labourer of Paul, Gal. 2, 3 ; sent by 
 
 him to Dalmatia, 2 Tim. 4, 10 ; and alsG 
 left in Crete to establish and regulate the 
 churches, Tit. 1, 5. 2 Cor. 7, 6. 13. 14. 8, 
 6. 16. 12, 18 bis. Gal. 2, 1. 3. 2 Tim. 4, 
 10. Ttroj/ TOV d8e\(pov uov 2 Cor. 2, 12. 
 T. Kotvovbs (fibs Kal (Is vp.tis crvvepyos 
 2 Cor. 8, 23. TiV yj^o-/w re/ci/w Tit. 1, 4. 
 Not mentioned in the book of Acts. 
 
 TI<W, f. rtcra), to value, to hold worthy ; to 
 respect, to honour, to reverence, e. g. tivov 
 Horn. Od. 15. 542 ; Seovs II. 8. 540. ib. 9. 
 238 ; also to estimate, to prize, Horn. II. 23. 
 703, 705. Hence Act. and Mid. in fut. and 
 aor. 1 (with Pres. rtVo),) to honour by mak 
 ing compensation, atonement, i. q. to atone 
 for, to pay for, with ace. of the wrong done, 
 e. g. vfipiv Horn. Od. 24. 352 ; (povov II. 21. 
 134. In N. T. to atone by, to pay a penalty, 
 c. ace. of thing offered or suffered in atone 
 ment, e. g. 8tKT)v Ti o-o) to pay or suffer pun 
 ishment, to be punished, Lat. solvere poznas, 
 2 Thess. 1,9. So Horn. Od. 14. 84. ^El. 
 V. H. 1. 24. ib. 13. 2. Plut. do sera Num. 
 vind. 8 tTKTfv 6 Becrcro? TTJV diKrjv. Plato 
 Legg. 905. a. So pres. riva> ib. 933. e. 
 
 rot, enclit. particle, pr. an old dat. for 
 TW, by consequence, accordingly, therefore ; 
 which signification however is found only 
 in the strengthened forms Toiydp, Toiyapovv, 
 etc. while rot itself retains only a sort of 
 confirmatory sense, indeed, forsooth, verily, 
 etc. Buttm. j 149. m. 27. Matth. } 627. In 
 N. T. only in the compounds Kairoiyf, rot- 
 yapoiiv, roivvv. 
 
 TOtyapovv, i. e. rot strengthened by 
 the particles yap, ovv, i. q. by certain con 
 sequence, consequently, therefore ; see Buttm. 
 5 149. m. 27. 1 Thess. 4, 8 Toiyapovv 6 d3f- 
 TUV KT\. Heb. 12, 1. Sept. for 1~b? Job 
 22, 10. 24, 22. Jos. Ant. 10. 1. 2. Ceb. 
 Tab. 20. Xen. An. 1. 9. 9. 
 
 TOtye, see xatToi ye in ye no. 2. f. 
 
 roivvv, i. e. rol strengthened by vvv, i. q. 
 indeed now, yet now, therefore ; used where 
 one proceeds with an inference, Buttm. 
 149. m. 27. Ktihner 5 324. 3. c. Matth. 
 j 627. Usually put after one or more 
 words in a clause, Luke 20, 25 cnro Sort 
 Toiwv TO. Kaicrapos Kaicrapi. 1 Cor. 9, 26. 
 James 2. 24 Rec. So Wisd. 1,11. Ceb. 
 Tab. 3. Diod. Sic. 1. 6. Xen. QEc. 10. 2. 
 More rarely put at the beginning of a 
 clause, Heb. 13, 13 TOIWV t fpxo>fie2a 
 npbs avrov. Sept. for ^3 Is. 3, 10 ; -jsb 
 Is. 5, 13. So Jos. Ant. 6. 13. 4. JE\. H. 
 An. 2. 6. Other examples see in Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 342. 
 
TOiOC 
 
 726 
 
 T0770? 
 
 e, roidSe, rotoVSf, a strengthened 
 form of rotoy, demonstr. pron. correlative to 
 Troioy, ofoy, see Buttm. 79. 4, 5 ; of this 
 kind or sort, such, Lat. taZis; 2 Pet. 1, 17 
 <pa>vj]S ToidtrSe. Jcs. Ant. 17. 13. 3 
 ovap roioVSe. Hdian. 7. 4. 2. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 1. 1. 
 
 TOiOirro?, Toiavrr), TOWVTO and roiofroi 
 Matt. 18, 5, a strengthened form of rotor, 
 demonstr. correl. to TTOIO.C, oioy, see Buttm. 
 79. 4, 5. Kuhner 91 ; of this kind or sort, 
 such, Lat. tails, more frequent in Attic 
 usage than rotor or rotoV8e. Not a com 
 pound of rotoy and OVTOS- 
 
 1. Genr. such, such an one, e. g. a) 
 Without art. or corresponding relative, 
 Matt. 18, 5 os eav oV^rat 7rat8iov TOIOVTOV 
 (i>. Mark 4, 33. John 4, 23. Acts 16, 24. 
 
 1 Cor. 11, 16. James 4, 16. al. (Hdian. 7. 
 8. 17. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 1.) With a corres 
 ponding relat. e. g. ofoy, 1 Cor. 15, 48 bis, 
 otor 6 xo tKoy, roiovroi /cat ot ^o tKot, KT\. 
 
 2 Cor. 10, 11; oVoIoy Acts 26, 29; as 
 Philem. 9. So c. otoy Ecclus. 49, 16. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 6. 12 ; or ib. 2. 8. 3. b) With 
 the art. as marking something definite or 
 already mentioned, Matth. 265. 7. Winer 
 ^ 17 fin. Matt. 19, 14 TWV yap TOIOVTOJV 
 f(TT\v i] /3ao-iXa a T&V ovp. Mark 9, 37. Acts 
 19, 25. Rom. 1, 32. 1 Cor. 5, 11. Gal. 5, 
 21. 1 Tim. 6, 5. 3 John 8. al. So Hdian. 
 
 4. 5. 4. Pol. 8. 2. 5. Xen. An. 5. 8. 20. 
 
 2. Spec, such, so great. a) Without 
 art. or relative, Matt. 9, 8 rov SoVra e ov- 
 trtav roiavTTjv rols ai>3pa>7roiy. Mark 6, 2. 
 John 9, 16. (Ceb. Tab. 4.) Neut. Plur. 
 rotavra, such things, so great things, e. g. 
 good Luke 9, 9; evil, 13, 2. Heb. 12, 3. 
 With a relat. corresponding, 6Wty 1 Cor. 
 
 5, 1; Ss Heb. 8, 1. b) With the art. 
 o rotovroy, such an one, such a person, 
 one distinguished, e. g. in a good sense, 
 2 Cor. 12, 2. 3. 5. (JEl V. H. 11. 9.) In 
 a bad sense, such a fellow, Acts 22, 22, 
 comp. 21, 27. 1 Cor. 5, 5. 2 Cor. 2, 6. 7. 
 Comp. Matth. j 265. 7. + 
 
 rot^o?, ov, 6, the icall of a house or 
 court, paries ; Acts 23, 3 see in Kovida. 
 Sept. for -pp Ex. 30, 3. Lev. 14, 37. Ml 
 V. H. 14. 19. Pol. 5. 33. 5. Xen. Conv. 4. 
 38. Kindred with ret^oy the wall of a 
 city, etc. 
 
 TOKO?, ov, 6, (r/KTco, re roKa,) a bringing 
 forth, birth, Horn. II. 19. 119; any thing 
 born, offspring, a child, Athen. 4. 82 TOKOS 
 KaXetrat ?ruy 6 yevopevos TraTy. Xen. Lac. 
 15. 5. In N. T. trop. gain from money 
 put out, interest, usury. Matt. 25, 27. Luke 
 
 19, 23. Sept. for r$3 Ex. 22, 25. Lev. 25, 
 36. 37. So .EschinVeS. 26.- Dem. 13. 20. 
 Plato Legg. 742. c. 
 
 rdXfiaco. c3, f. JJQ-CO, (rdX/ia ; kindr. obs. 
 rXdw, raXuco.) to have courage, boldness, con 
 fidence to do or undertake any thing ; to 
 venture, to dare, c. infin. Matt. 22, 46 oiSe 
 e ro X/iTjcre rty . . . eVepcor^o ai avrov. Mark 12. 
 34. 15. 43. Luke 20, 40. John 21, 12. Acts 
 5, 13 ovoVis ero X/ia KoXXaaSai avrdls. 7, 32. 
 Rom. 5,7. 15, 18. 1 Cor. 6, 1. 2 Cor. 10, 12. 
 Phil. 1,14. Jude 9. Sept. for & &6 Esth. 
 7, 5. So 2 Mace. 4, 2. Hdian. 2. 6. 19. 
 Dem. 1377. 12. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 10. 
 Spec, without infin. to be bold, to act ivilh 
 boldness, confidence ; so eVi rira against any 
 one 2 Cor. 10, 2 ; iv rti/t in any thing 11, 
 21 bis. So Horn. II. 10. 232. 
 
 T0\p,ripbrepov, adv. (comparat. of roX- 
 /ii/poos, Buttm. H5- 5,) the more boldly, 
 with greater confidence and freedom, Rom. 
 15, 15. Pol. 1. 17. 17. Luc. Icarom. 10 ; 
 Xen. Conv. 2. 12. 
 
 fo ov, 6, (roXjudco,) fit bold, -ven 
 turous, daring man, Jos. B. J. 3. 10. 2. 
 Thuc. 1. 70. In N. T. in a bad sense, one 
 over-bold, audacious, presumptuous, 2 Pet. 
 2, 10. 
 
 TO/40?, T), ov, (r/^ii a),) cutting, sharp, 
 keen, Plato Tim. 61. e. In N. T. only com 
 parat. ro/xwrepor, TJ, ov, sharper, keener, 
 trop. Heb. 4, 12. So Luc. Tox. 11. Pho- 
 cyl. 116 or 118. 
 
 TOjUorrepo?, see in ro/xoy. 
 
 To|foi/, ov, ro. a bow, for shooting 
 arrows, Rev. 6, 2. Sept. oft for Hr> 
 Gen. 27. 3. Ps. 7, 13. Luc. D. Deor. 7. 
 1. Hdian. 6. 5. 9. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 9. 
 
 TOTrdfyov, ov, ro , ( i. q. roVa^or,) the 
 topaz Rev. 21, 20 ; a transparent gem of a 
 golden or orange colour ; not the green 
 topaz of Pliny, which seems to have been 
 the modern chrysolite, H. N. 37. 8 or 32. 
 Sept. for n^JIiQ Ex. 28, 17. Ez. 28, 13. 
 Diod. Sic. 3. 39 where see. Strabo 16. p. 
 769 [1115. a], TO. T07rdia- Xi Soy Se eVrt 
 
 See Wetst. N. T. II. p. 845. Braun. de 
 Vest, sacerdot. p. 508. Rosenm. Alterthk. 
 IV. i. p. 32. 
 
 TOTTO?, ov, 6, a place, space, locus, e. g. 
 
 1. As occupied or filled by any person or 
 thing, a place, spot, space, room. a) Pr. 
 Matt. 28, 6 rov roVoi 6Vov tVelro 6 Kvpios. 
 Mark 16, 6. Luke 2,7 OVK rjv avrols roVoj 
 iv r<5 KaraXv/iart. (Sept. Gen. 24, 23.) 
 
T07TO? 
 
 727 
 
 TOCTOUT09 
 
 Luke 14, 9. 10. 22. John 20, 7. [25.] 
 Acts 7, 33. Heb. 8, 7. Rev. 2, 5 KH^O-M 
 ryv Xv^viav crov TOV TOTTOV auT/jy. 6, 14. 
 20, 11. Sept. for Bipa Gen. 24, 23. 1 K. 
 8, 6. 7. (Luc. Necyom. 17 6 AUIKOS UTTO- 
 HfTpfjcrri exdcTTG) rov TOTTOV, Si Swcrt 8e TO p.- 
 yiiTTov ou TrXfov iroSos. Hdian. 2. 14. 10.) 
 Hence SiStmu TOTTO? rii/i, to give place to 
 any one, to make room, Luke 14, 9. Rom. 
 12, 19. Eph. 4, 27 ; see fully in S/Sw/xt no. 
 I.e. b) Trop. place, condition, part, cha 
 racter; 1 Cor. 14, 166 u.va.Ti\r]pa>v TOV ro- 
 irov TOV iStwrou he who fills the place of one 
 unlearned, i. e. who is unlearned ; comp. in 
 avaTT\npoa> lett. d. [Acts 1, 25.] So Philo 
 Somn. p. 600. e, rbv dyyeXou TOTTOV eVt o-^f. 
 Jos. Ant. 16. 7. 2 auras 8e TroXXaias 1 0770X0- 
 yovptvov TOTTOV \apfiavn. c) Trop. piece, 
 i. q. opportunity, occasion ; Acts 25, 16 irplv 
 ^ ... TOTTOV Tf UTroXoyiay X(i/3oi KrX. Rom. 
 15, 23 p.r]K(Ti TOTTOV fxatv (TOV ft>ayyeXie- 
 o-3ai) tv TO:S K\ip.a<ri TOVTOIJ. Heb. 12, 17. 
 So Ecclus. 4, 5. Pol. 1. 88.2 rorros cXeovs. 
 jEschin. 84. 39. 
 
 2. Of a particular place, spot, where any 
 thing is done or takes place ; Luke 10, 32 
 6p.oia>s Se Kal A.fviTrjs, ytvopevos KOTO. TOV 
 TOTTOV. 11,1. 19,5. John 4, 20. 5,13. 6, 
 23. 10,40. 11.30. 18,2. 19,20.41. 2 Pet. 
 1,19. Pleonast. Rom. 9, 26 ev rw roVw 
 ou, in the place ichere, i. q. simpl. where, 
 quoted from Hos. 2, 1 [1, 10], where Sept. 
 for ics nipsa. Sept. genr. for n- pri 
 Gen. 28, 16. 17. Ruth 3, 4. Pol. 4. 72. 5. 
 Hdian. 1. 8. 11. 
 
 3. Of the place where one dwells, so 
 journs, belongs, e. g. a) Of persons, a 
 dwelling-place, abode, home; Luke 16, 28 
 
 15 TOV TOTTOV TOVTOV TTJS ftcUrdvOV. John 1 1, 
 
 6. 14, 2 iropfvo\iai fToip-dcrai TOTTOV vp.1v. 
 v. 3. Acts 1, 25 see in 18109 no. 2. c. Acts 
 
 12, 17. Rev. 12, 6. 8. 14. So of a house, 
 dwelling, Acts 4, 31 ; also a temple, Acts 
 
 7, 49 TIS TOTTOS Trjs KaTaTTavcrfcas pov, quot 
 ed from Is. 66, 1 where Sept. for C 1 ?^ . 
 Hence the temple as the abode of God is 
 called 6 TOTTOJ ayios Matt. 24, 15. Acts 6, 
 
 13. 14. 21, 28 bis. So Sept. and Q-ipa 
 v:h;3 Ps. 24, 3 ; &}3? B Is. 60, 13. Sept. 
 genr! for Cl pa Gen. 29, 26 ; r^a 1 Sam. 
 10, 26. 2 Chr. 18, 15. So Luc. D. Mort. 
 17. 2. de Luctu 2, spoken of Hades as the 
 abode of the dead. Hdian. 4. 2. 18, i. q. 
 o"KT]p.a $16. b) Of things, the place where 
 any thing is kept, as a sword, i. e. a sheath, 
 scabbard, Matt. 26, 52. 
 
 4. In a geographical or topographical 
 sense, a place, a part of a country, of the 
 earth, etc. a) Of a definite place or spot 
 
 in a city, district, country ; Matt. 27. 33 bis, 
 fls TOTTOV \ey6p.fvov FoXyoSa, o eVri \(ycfi(- 
 vos Kpavinv TOTTOS. Mark 1 5, 22 bis. Luke 
 23, 33. John 19, 17. So Luke 6, 17. 22, 
 40 comp. v. 39. John 6, 10. 19, 13. Rev. 
 
 16, 16. Acts 27, 8. 29. 41. 28, 7. Sept. 
 for Oi pa Gen. 22, 2. 14. 28, 19. So Cob. 
 Tab. 16. Diod. Sic. 1. 9. Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 1 1. 
 b) Of a place as inhabited, a city, village, 
 quarter, or the like ; Luke 4, 37 fls navm 
 
 TOTTOV TTJS TTfpl^UtpOV. 10, 1 flf TTaCTCLV TToXtl* 
 
 (eat TOTTOV. Matt. 14, 35. Acts 16, 3. 27, 2. 
 Rev. 18, 17 in later edit. Also tv iravrl 
 TUTTCO, in eiery place, every where among 
 men, 1 Cor. 1,2. 2 Cor. 2, 14. 1 Thess. 1,8. 
 [2 Thess. 3, 16.] 1 Tim. 2, 8. So Sept. 
 2 Chr. 34, 6. Jos. Ant. 1 1. 8. 4. Hdian. 3.4.6. 
 Xen. Hell . 7. 1 . 3 . c) Of a tract of country, 
 district, region ; e. g. tpr]p.os TOTTOS, eprjuoi 
 TOTTOI, Matt. 14, 13. 15. Mark 1, 35. 45. 6.31. 
 32. 35. Luke 4, 42. 9, 10. 12 ; 8C avvbpuv 
 TIJTTCOV Matt. 12, 43. Luke 11, 24 ; KOTII TO- 
 TTOVS, in divers places, quarters, countries, 
 Matt. 24, 7. Mark 1 3, 8. Luke 2 1 , 1 1 . Also 
 of a land, country, John 1 1, 48 dpovo-iv j]p.~iv 
 TOV TOTTOV Kal TO t^vos, i. e. our country and 
 nation. Heb. 11, 8. Acts 7, 7 Xarpevo-ouo-i 
 p.e (v TO) TOTTO) roi/rw, i. e. in this land, in 
 allusion to Gen. 15. 14, filled out perhaps 
 from Ex. 3, 12. So Hdian. 3. 14. 2. Dem. 
 49. 5 ralf aXXai? raly eV TOVTU> rej TOTTOJ 
 vf/a-ois. Xen. An. 1. 5. 1. ib. 4. 2. 4. d) 
 Trop. of a place or passage in a book ; Luke 
 4, 17 fvpe TOV TOTTOV ov rfv ytypanpfvov. So 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 20. Prob. not found else 
 where in this sense, Sturz Lex. Xen. s. v. 
 Suid. TOTTOS r] e*caoTou Xoyov TrepioSoy. 
 
 TOCTOUT09, TOfravTT], TOCTOVTO and TOVOV- 
 TOV, a strengthened form for TOCTOS, TJ, ov, 
 correl. to oo-oj, TTOCTOS, Buttm. 5 79. 4, 5 ; so 
 great, so much, so many. 
 
 1. Pr. of magnitude, intcns. so great, 
 Matt. 8, 10 ou5e Too-avTrjv TT KTTIV fvpov. 
 Luke 7, 9. John 12, 37. Rev. 18, 17. Plur. 
 Neut. Toa-avTa, so great things, benefits, 
 Gal. 3, 4. With ocroj corresponding, Heb. 
 1,4. 7, 22 comp. 20. 10, 25. Rev. 18, 7. 
 21. 16 Rec. So 2 Mace. 4, 3. Hdian. 7. 8. 
 4. Xen. An. 3. 5. 7 ; c. 6W Hdian. 2. 3. 
 
 17. Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 4. Of a specific amount, 
 so much and no more ; Acts 5, 8 bis, tl TO- 
 (TOVTOV TO x&piov aTT(8o<r^( ; AcrX. So Xen 
 Mem. 1. 3. 5. ib. 2. 4. 4. 
 
 2. Of time, so long ; John 14. 9 rocroOroi 
 Xpovov. Heb. 4, 7. Hdian. 1. 6. 1. Xen. 
 Hell. 4. 6. 13. 
 
 3. Of number, multitude, collect, or in 
 Plur. so many, so numerous; Matt. 15, 33 
 bis, Sproi TocrovToi . . . o%\ov TO<TCVTOV. 
 
rore 
 
 728 
 
 Luke 15, 29. John 6, 9. 21, 11. 1 Cor. 14, 
 10. Heb. 12, 1. Jos. Ant. 11. 1. 3. Hdian. 
 1. 17. 10. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4 2. 
 
 Tore, adv. demonstr. of time, then, at that 
 ft me,correl. to ore, Trore, Buttm. } 116. 4. 
 
 1. In general propositions, then, marking 
 succession ; e. g. after jrpwrov, as Matt. 5, 
 24 Trpurov SiaAAuy^St . . . Kai Tore e AScoi 
 7rpoV</>epe KT\. 12, 29. Mark 3, 27. John 2, 
 10 ; with oral , 2 Cor. 12, 10 oravyap dcrSe- 
 yeo, rore oWaro y et/. John 2, 10. Simply, 
 Luke 11, 26. So c. STOV Hdian. 2. 9. 4. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 17. 
 
 2. Of time past ; e. g. with a notation of 
 time preceding, as ore, Matt. 13, 26 ore Se 
 
 (f3\d<TTT)<TfV 6 XP T S ToVf ffpdvT) Kill TO. 
 
 idvia. 21, 1. John 12, 16 ; with o>r John 
 
 7, 10. 11, 6; perd c. ace. John 13,27. 
 So after a participle as noting time, Acts 
 27, 21. 28, 1 Kai diao-aj3eWey, rore fTTfyvco- 
 crav KT\. comp. Matth. 565. 1 sq. Buttm. 
 5 144. n. 3. Also as opp. vvv, Rom. 6, 21. 
 Gal. 4 8 comp. 9. v. 29. Heb. 12,26; 
 euSews ro re Acts 17, 14. Simply, where 
 the notation of time lies in the context, and 
 ro re, then, at that time, is often i. q. there 
 upon, after that ; Matt. 2, 7 comp. 4. v. 
 17 rore eVA^pcba?; TO prj%(i> KT\. 3, 5. 13 
 ro re irapayivfTai 6 irjcrovs, i. e. after this, 
 comp. v. 6. 7. Matt. 3, 15. 4, 1. 26, 3. 
 John 19, 1. 16. Acts 1, 12. 10, 46. 48. 
 Heb. 10, 7. 9. al. So c. ore Xen. Cyr. 8. 
 4. 14 comp. 13; s- Hdian. 3. 3. 5. Xen. 
 Conv. 1. 14; particip. Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 6 ; 
 opp. vvv Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 8. Simpl. Sept. 
 Gen. 13, 7. Ezra 4, 23. 24. Ceb. Tab. 29. 
 Xen. Conv. 1. 14 ov8e rore. Also in later 
 usage ajro TOT e, from then, from that time, 
 Matt. 4, 17. 16, 21. 26, 16. Luke 16, 16; 
 see Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 461. Sturz de Dial. 
 Mac. p. 211. Sept. for nss [TXt;] Ecclus. 
 
 8, 12. With the art. as adj. 6 rore noa-pos 
 the then world 2 Pet. 3, 6; comp. Buttm. 
 1 125. 6. So Hdian 1. 14. 10. Xen. An. 2. 
 2. 20. 
 
 3. Of a time future, e. g. with Srav pre- 
 ced. Matt. 25, 31 orav 8e eASty 6 vlos rot) 
 di/3p. . . . rore /caSicret eVt SpdVov /crA. Mark 
 13,14. Luke 14, 10. 21,20. John 8, 28. 
 1 Cor. 13, 10. 16, 2. 1 Thess. 5, 3. Pleo- 
 nast. ora/ . . . Tore eV eVeiVaty TOLS fjiiepais 
 Luke 5, 35. (Comp. Dem. 288. 21 ro re 
 KOT tKflvov TOV KatpoV.) With Trpcarov, 
 Luke 6, 42 ; opp. aprt 1 Cor. 13, 12. Sim 
 ply, Mark 13, 21 /cat rore edv TIS vp.lv e^nrj 
 rA. v. 26. 27. Luke 13, 26. 21, 27. 1 Cor. 
 4, 5. 2 Thess. 2, 8. Sept. simpl. for TJJ 
 Ex. 12, 44. 48. Luc. D. Deor. 4. 5 etVd- 
 /xe Sa rore, rt Trpanrtov. Hdian. 3. 9. 13. -j- 
 
 rovvavTiov, (eVaiTioy,) crasis for ra 
 evavriov, Buttm. $ 29. n. 3 ; pr. the opposite, 
 3 Mace. 3, 22. Xen. Hell. 7. 5. 26. In N. 
 T. as adv. on the contrary, contrariwise, 
 2 Cor. 2, 7. Gal. 2, 7. 1 Pet. 3, 9. See 
 Buttm. I 128. n. 4. } 131. n. 14. So Ml V. 
 H. 3. 12. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 8. 
 
 crasis for TO oVo/xa, Buttm. 
 128. n. 4 ; adverbially i. q. by name, Matt. 
 27, 57; see in 6Vyia no. 1. See Buttm. 
 5 131. 7. Jos. Ant. 8. 7. 6. Palzeph. 40. 3. 
 Luc. D. Deor. 3. 1. 
 
 TOVTecrri, crasis for TOUT conn, that is, 
 id est, used in explanations ; so in Acts 1, 
 19 Rec. A/ceXSa/xa, rovreWt, ^atpiov dlp.a- 
 TOS. 19, 4. Rom. 7, 18. 9, 8. Philem. 12. 
 Heb. 2, 14. 7,5. 9,11. 10,20. 11,16. 13, 
 15. 1 Pet. 3, 20. Sept. for KW Job 40, 
 19. In later editions every where written 
 separately, TOVT eori, and so Rec. in Matt. 
 27, 46. Mark 7, 2. Rom. .10, 6. 7. 8. So 
 Diod. Sic. 4. 7. 
 
 TOVTO, see in OVTO?. 
 
 rpdyos, ov, o, a he-goat, Tiircus, Heb. 9, 
 12. 13. 19. 10, 4. Sept. for fii iW? Gen. 
 31, 10 ; "Ttt?S Lev. 16, 5. 7 ; ti 1 ;? Gen. 32, 
 14. Luc. D. Deor. 4. 1. Plut. Thes. 18. 
 
 a, r)s, 17, (prob. for rerpdrre^a 
 TfTpa, Trt ^u,) a table, pr. with four legs. 
 
 1. Genr. a table, for setting on food, ta 
 king meals. a) Pr. Matt. 15, 27. Mark 
 7, 28. Luke 16, 21. 22, 21. 30. So of the 
 table for the shew-bread, Heb. 9, 2, i. q. 
 f) rpdnefr rijs 7rpo3eVea>j 1 Mace. 1, 22 ; 
 Sept. for irttfl Ex. 25, 23. 27 sq. comp. in 
 7rpo3eo-ts no. 1. Sept. and "J^bttii genr. 
 1 Sam. 20, 33. 2 Sam. 9, 7. 10? ^So Pa- 
 laeph. 23. 1. Luc. Asin. 7. Xen. Conv. 2. 1. 
 b; Meton. like Engl. table, for that which is 
 set on, food, a meal, banquet; Acts 16, 34 
 Trape%r)Ke rpuTTf^av he set a table, made 
 ready a meal : comp. in Traparfer)p.i no. 1. a. 
 Acts 6, 2 StaKoi>eii> rpcnregais, see in 6 ta/co- 
 vf<*> no. 2. (M\. V. H. 2. 17. Hdian. 4. 7. 
 8.) Rom. 11, 9 yevrfif]Ta> TJ rp. CLVTUIV els 
 irayiSa, quoted from Ps. 69, 23 where Sept. 
 forinbiy. i Cor. 10, 21 bis. Sept. and 
 V^ti Ps. 23, 5. Prov. 9, 2. So Jos. Ant. 
 10. 9. 4. Hdian. 1. 6. 2. Xen. Cyr. 7. 2. 26. 
 
 2. Spec, the fable of a money-changer, 
 a broker s table or counter, at which he sat 
 in the market or public place, e. g. in the 
 outer court of the temple, Matt. 21, 12. 
 Mark 11, 15. John 2, 15; see in /cep^art- 
 O-TTJS, Ko\\vfti<TTfjs. So Lys. 1 14. 37. Isaeus 
 105. 119. Hence genr. a broker s office, 
 lanlc, where money was deposited and 
 
729 
 
 rpetfxa 
 
 loaned out, Luke 19, 23 StSwai TO apyvpiov 
 iirl TT/V Tpdm^av. See in TpaTrefiTTjr. So 
 Dem. 895. 5, 15. ib. 1356. 10. 
 
 Tpa7reiTr)<?, O v, 6, (rpaTrefa,) one who 
 keeps an exchange-table, a money-changer, 
 broker, banker, in Lat. also called trapezita, 
 mensarius, argenlarius, one who exchanged 
 money, and who also received money on 
 deposit at interest in order to loan it out to 
 others at a higher rate ; see Bo3ckh Staatsh. 
 d. Ath. I. p. 139 sq. Diet, of Antt. arts. 
 Argenlarii, Mensarii. Adam s Rom. Ant. 
 p. 501. Comp. Dem. p. 816 fin. p. 948 init. 
 Matt. 25, 27 eSei ovv ere fiaXelv TO apyvpiov 
 pov TOIS rpanf^irais- Jos. Ant. 12. 2. 3. 
 Pol. 32. 13. 6. Dem. 1186. 7. 
 
 TpavfMdj aros, TO, (riTpaxTKO), Tp<ia>,) a 
 wound, Luke 10, .34. Sept. for SSS Gen. 
 4, 22. Is. 1, 6. 2 Mace. 14, 45. Pol . 2. 69. 
 1. Xen. Mem. 3. 4. 1. 
 
 rpav/jiari^w, f. ura>, (Tpav/ia,) to wound, 
 C. ace. Luke 20, 12 TOVTOI Tpav/xarurai/rej 
 f&paXov. Acts 19, 16. Sept. for SSQ Cant 
 5,7. 1 Mace. 16,9. Luc. Epigr. 20. Thuc. 
 4. 12. Xen. Hell. 4. 3. 23. 
 
 ), f. /o-w, (rpdxi^os, ) to seize 
 by the neck or throat, to throttle, as a wrest 
 ler his antagonist, so as to bend the head 
 back, Plut. M. Anton. 33 ; Pass. Plut. de 
 Curios. 12 opaTe rbv C&XTJTTJV vnb 7raiio~K.a- 
 piov Tpaxrj\i6p.fvov. Plato Riv. 132. c; 
 comp. JE>\. V. H. 12. 58. Also of an ani 
 mal, Diog. Laert. 6. 61 ?8e TOV icptbv dpp.a- 
 
 VlOl>, WS V7TO TOV TV\OVTOS KOpCHTLOV Tpa^TjXt- 
 
 T ai. Hence in N. T. trop. to lay bare, to 
 lay open ; Pass. part. Heb. 4,13 iravra Se 
 yvp.va Kal TfTpa\r]\io~p.fi a Tols <5(p3aX/xoTr 
 avroi). So Hesych. TfTpax^Xto-p-eVa rrt- 
 <pai/fpcop.eW. Comp. Sueton. Vitell. 17 in 
 forum tractus est, reducto coma capite, ceu 
 noxii solent, atque etiam mento mucrone 
 gkdii subjecto, ut visendam praeberet faciam. 
 Plin. Panegyr. 34. See Wetst. N. T. II. 
 p. 398. Bleek Hebriierbr. II. p. 585 sq. 
 Others here refer it to the bending back of 
 the neck of an animal for the slaughter- 
 knife ; for which there seems to be no au 
 thority. 
 
 rpd xrjXo j, ov, 6, the neck, throat, Matt. 
 18, 6. Mark 9, 42. Luke 17, 2. Acts 15, 10 
 see in vy6s no. 1. b. Rom. 16, 4 TOV iavrcav 
 Tpdxrj\ov vn&vKav, sc. under the axe, i. e. 
 have exposed their lives to peril for my 
 safety. Luke 15, 20 et Acts 20, 37 tWn-fo-oy 
 firi TOV Tpd)(Ti\ov OVTOV, i. e. embraced him ; 
 comp. Gen. 33,4 where Sept. for "NJS, as 
 Isn 45, 14. Josh. 10, 24 ; >Fp Deut. 10, 
 
 16. Is. 48, 4. Hdian. 1. 17. 25. Dem. 744. 
 6. Xen. An. 7. 4. 9. 
 
 la, v, (kindr. pdcrcro), p^ 
 
 rough, uneven, e. g. 6o( 
 Luke 3, 5. Acts 27, 29 Tpa^etat Torrot, i. e. 
 rocks, breakers. Sept. for E" 1 ^ 1 } Is. 40, 4. 
 Sept. Jer. 2,25 68bs T P . Ceb. Tab. 15. Xen. 
 An. 4. 6. 12. 
 
 , t 8os, 17, Trachonilis, a part 
 of the tetrarchy of Philip, Luke 3, 1 ; comp. 
 in iroupm a. This was the north-eastern 
 most of the districts into which the habita 
 ble region east of the Jordan was divided, 
 bounded easterly by the Arabian desert ; 
 on the S. \V. by Auranitis and Gaulonitis ; 
 and extending from the territory of Damas 
 cus on the North, to near Bostra on the 
 South ; Euseb. Onom. art. Ituraa. The 
 name according to Strabo is derived from 
 two mountains called Tpax^ves, which are 
 not yet identified ; Strab. 16. p. 755, 756. 
 Trachonitis included what is now known 
 as el-Lejah, on the eastern part of Haur^n, 
 a singular rocky region full of chasms and 
 defiles, and inaccessible to an enemy. The 
 country in its present state is fully described 
 by Burckhardt, Travels in Syria p. 51 sq. 
 211 sq. To Trachonitis belonged Kenath, 
 Canalha, now KunawAl, see Euseb. Onom. 
 art. Canath ; also Phacno, now Musmeih, 
 see Inscr. in Burckh. p. 117. See genr. 
 Jos. Ant. 17. 8. 1 ; also ib. 15. 10. 1. ib. 
 16. 9. 1. Reland Pal. p. 108. Gesen. Notes 
 on Burckh. p. 510. Winer Realw. s. voc. 
 Jos. Ant. 1. 6. 4. ib. 17. 11. 4. 
 
 rpet?, ol, at, Neut. rpia, TO., card. num. 
 three, Matt. 12,40. 13,33. 18,20. al. Buttm. 
 5 70. 3. So Sept. for tiba Gen. 7, 13. saep. 
 Xen. An. 6. 6. 36. For the pr. n. Tpfis 
 Ta/3/pwzt, see in Taftepvai. -f- 
 
 Tpe/^co, (Tpe co.) found only in pres. and 
 impf. Passow s. v. to tremble, from fear, 
 absol. Matt. 5, 33 (pofinSf to-a KOI Tpfp.ovo-a. 
 Luke 8, 47. Acts 9, 6. Sept. for Usn Jer. 
 4, 24. So Hdian. 6. 9. 2. Dem. 314. 24. 
 Plato Rep. 554. d. Hence, to tremble al 
 any thing, to fear, to be afraid of; so with 
 a particip. 2 Pet. 2, 10 ov Tptpovo-i f&aafyr]- 
 liovvTts, they do not tremble speaking eril, 
 they are not afraid to speak evf. ; comp. 
 Buttm. {144. 6. a. Winer 5 46. 1. So c. 
 inf. Soph. OZd. Col. 128 or rp/p.op.fi/ \tyeiv. 
 With an ace. Sept. for l?n I s . 66, 2. 5. 
 Plato Parm. 137. a, 8t e /j7mpt ai> Tpepovrt 
 
 TO fJLf\\OV. 
 
 rpe<j)W, f. 2p<n|/-<u, comp. Buttm. { 18. 2 , 
 pr. to make thick, Jlrm, fast, as a fluid, -yaXa 
 
730 
 
 %pt\l/ai lo curdle milk, Horn. Od. 9. 246. 
 Genr. and in N. T. 
 
 1 . lo make thick or fat, by feeding ; hence 
 to feed, to nurse, to nourish, to cherish ; c. 
 acc. Matt. 6, 26 6 TTarrjp vjj.u>v 6 ovpdvios 
 rpecpft aura. 25, 37 TroYe (re f i8op.fv ittwuiv- 
 ra, /cat fyptyapcv ; Luke 12, 24. [23, 29.] 
 Acts 12, 20. Rev. 12. 6. 14. Spec, to pam 
 per, ray /capSiay James 5. 5. comp. in KapS/a 
 no. 1 . a. y. Sept. for b"OXfi Prov. 25, 22 ; 
 ^3 1 K. 18, 13; r\si Gen. 48, 15. 
 Luc. D. Deor. 20. 13. Dem. 1358. 13. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 7. 2. ib. 2. 9. 2. 
 
 2. to nurture, to bring up, Luke 4, 16 
 Nafoper, ou ^i rftpafipevogf 1 Mace. 3, 
 33. Hdian. 1. 7. 5. Plato Rep. p. 558. d. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 1. 
 
 rpe^co, f. Zptgofjim, aor. 2 tSpapov, 
 Buttm. ^ 18. 2. ^ 114. 
 
 1. to ? un, intrans. and absol. Matt. 27, 
 48 ei<3ecoy dpa/jLcov fls f avTtav. Mark 5, 6. 
 15, 36. Luke 15, 20. John 20, 2 rpe x ovv 
 KOI fpxrrai. V. 4 fTpf%ov Se ol 8vo. With 
 erri c. acc. loc. Luke 24, 12 ; fls final Rev. 
 9, 9 ; inf. final Matt. 28, 8. Sept. for "pi 
 Gen. 24, 28. 2 Sam. 18, 19; c. eVi Gen. 
 24, 20. Joel 2, 9. So 2 Mace. 5, 2. Pa- 
 laeph. 22. 3. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 9. Spec, of 
 those who run in a stadium or public race, 
 1 Cor. 9, 24 bis, ol tv crra8l<a rpxoj/rey, 
 Trdvrfs p.ev rpe^ovcriv KT\. (Hdian. 5. 6. 17. 
 Plut, Mor. II. p. 21, 8pap.flv a-rddiov.) 
 Trop. in comparisons drawn from the pub 
 lic races and applied to Christians, as ex 
 pressing strenuous effort in the Christian 
 life and cause ; 1 Cor. 9, 24 ovrco rpe^ere 
 Iva KaraXd/3?jre sc. TO ftpajSdov. v. 26 ; (is 
 Kfvov, in vain, Gal. 2, 2 bis. Phil. 2, 16; 
 KaXcoy Gal. 5, 7 ; c. acc. of kindr. noun, 
 Heb. 12, 1 Tpfxa>p.(i> TOV 7rpoKflp.fvov rjfuv 
 dyuiva let us run the race set before us ; see 
 Buttm. ^ 131. 4, and for the Subjunct. 
 J 139. m. 3. So c. dyava Dion. Hal. Ant. 
 7. 48. Hdot. 8. 102. Trop. also of strenu 
 ous effort in general, Rom. 9, 16 ou roC 
 SeXoj/roy, ov8e rot) Tpf^ovTos. So Anth. 
 Gr. IV. p. 1 34 Tvivf KOL fvfppaivov T L yap 
 avpiov fj T L ro p.e\\ov ; ov8e\s ywaxTKei fj.fj 
 rpe ^e, p.rj Korrla. 
 
 2. Trop. of rumour, word, doctrine, to 
 run, to spread quickly ; 2 Thess. 3, 1 Iva 6 
 \6yos TOV Kvpiov rpfxy. Comp. Sept. eu>s 
 rd^ovs dpap-f tTai 6 \6yos O.VTOV, for V!|"|i 
 
 s. 147, 15. 
 
 aroj, ro, (rtrpaiVco, rpdco,) pr. 
 that which is pierced through, a hole, e. g. 
 the eye of a needle, Luke 18, 25 Lachm. for 
 rpujuaXt a Rec. Genr. Pol. 1. 22. 6. Plato 
 Gorer. 494. b. 
 
 rptd/COVTa, O h a i, TO, (rpe is, Tpia,} 
 thirty, Matt. 13, 8. 23. 26, 15. 27, 3. 9. 
 Mark 4, 8. 20. Luke 3, 23. John 5, 5. 6, 19. 
 Gal. 3, 17. See Buttm. 5 70. 4. Sept. for 
 c VSJbia Gen. 5, 3. 5. 16. Luc. D. Mort. 6. 
 1. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 31. 
 
 i, a, (rpely, rpi a,) three 
 hundred, Mark 14, 5. John 12, 5. See 
 Buttm. ^70. Sept. for nix a ttJb 15 Gen. 
 6, 15. Luc. Ver. Hist. 2. 13. Xen. An. 3. 
 
 4. 43. 
 
 Tplfto\QS, ^ ^ a dj. ( rpt f , /Se Xos,) three- 
 pointed, three-pronged; Subst. 6 rpi /3oXoy, 
 a caltrop, crow-foot, composed of three or 
 more radiating spikes or prongs, and thrown 
 upon the ground to annoy cavalry ; comp. 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Tribulus. Adam s Rom. 
 Ant. p. 542. Veget. 3. 24. Plut. Mor. II. p. 
 76 rpifioXovs o-iSripovs Karaoke tpai. In 
 N. T. tribulus, the land caltrop, Engl. 
 Vers. thistle, brier, a low thorny shrub so 
 called from the resemblance of its thorns 
 and fruit, to the military caltrop, tribulus 
 terrestris of Linn. Matt. 7, 16. Heb. 6, 8. 
 Sept. for Trm Gen. 3, 18 ; c^JS Prov. 22, 
 
 5. So Dioscor. 4. 15. Hesych. rp//3oXos 
 UKCIV^S etdos. Lat. tribulus Virg. Georg. 1. 
 153. 
 
 Tpipo?, ou, 17, (rp//3w,) a beaten path, 
 way, high-U-ay, e. g. evSei as Troietre ray rpt- 
 povs Matt. 3, 3. Mark 1, 3. Luke 3, 4, all 
 quoted from Is. 40, 3 where Sept. for f&OE. . 
 Sept. also for rnk Gen. 49, 17; Main? 
 Prov. 1, 15. Plut. Sept. Sap. Conv. is . 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 13. 
 
 Tpiena : a ?, 17, (rfunjs ; rpay, rpt a, 
 eroy,) a triennium, the space of three years, 
 Acts 20, 31. Theophr. C. PI. 1. 20. 4. 
 Plut. comp. Demetr. c. Anton. 6. 
 
 Tpi^Q), f. t o-o), onomatop. to give out a 
 stridulous, creaking, grating sound, to 
 screak, Lat. stridere, intrans. spoken chiefly 
 of living things, as of the cry or chirping 
 of young birds, Horn. II. 2. 314. Luc. Tim. 
 21 ; of bats, Hdot. 3. 110. ib. 4. 183 ; espec. 
 of the thin stridulous cry attributed to the 
 manes or shades, Horn. II. 23. 101. Od. 24. 
 5. Luc. Necyom. 11; of the shrieks of wo 
 men, Plut. C. Mar. 19 ; later of the wheez 
 ing or snorting of elephants, Luc. Zeux. 
 10. Also of inanimate things, as the chord 
 of a lyre, Anth. Gr. IV. p. 57 ; iron as filed, 
 Alex. Aphrod. In N. T. of the teeth, to 
 grate, to gnash, c. acc. of part, Mark 9, 18 
 rpi fei rows oSuVray, he gnasheth with his 
 teeth. For the acc. as defining and qualify 
 ing the action of the verb, see Matth. { 424. 
 4. Buttm. 5 131. 7. 
 
731 
 
 Tp07TO(f)Ope(i) 
 
 TplfJiTjVO?, ou, 6, 17, adj. (rpi r, p.r)v,~) of 
 three months, tri7nestris, jEschin. 63. 14. 
 In N. T. Neut. TO rpi^vov, threemonths, 
 trimestre, Heb. 11, 23. Sept. for rbr^a 
 S->irnn Gen. 38, 24 ; nttjblS n 2 K. 24, 8. 
 Pol. 5. 1. 12. ib. 32. 12. i. 
 
 T/otV, adv. (rpeTj, rpi a,) fftn ce, 
 fimes, Matt. 26, 34. 75. Mark 14, 30. 72. 
 Luke 22, 34. 61. John 13, 38. 2 Cor. 11, 
 25 bis. 12,8. So Trl rpis,up to thrice, 
 thrice, Acts 10, 16. 11, 10; see in rt III. 
 2. b. Sept. T pis for B^BSB ubttJ 2 K. 13, 
 18. 19. Luc. Tox. 39. Xen. (Ec. 2. 4. 
 
 rpicrreyo?, O u, 6, 17, adj. (rpiV, o-riyrj, ) 
 pr. three-roofed ; genr. three-storied, having 
 three floors or stories, ouot rpi o-reyoi Jos. 
 B. J. 5. 5. 5 ; o-Toai Dion. Hal. Ant. 3. 68. 
 In N. T. Neut. TO rplvre yov, the third 
 floor, third story, Acts 20, 9; comp. in 
 vntpvov. So Symm. Gen. 6, 16; comp. 
 f] Tpia-Ttyr] Artemid. 4. 46. 
 
 rpia"%L\.lol, at, a, (rpi r, x i ^ tot O three 
 thousand, Acts 2, 41. See Buttm. 70. 
 Sept. for c^J* nubti Ex. 32, 28. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 1. 33. ~ 
 
 T/31TO9, q, ov, ordin. adj. (rpeif,) tfie 
 Hard, e. g. 
 
 1. Genr. Matt. 20, 3 Trepi TTJV rpirqv 
 &pav. 22, 26 6 rpiros. 27, 64. Luke 12, 38. 
 2 Cor. 12, 2. Rev. 4, 7. al. Sept. for 
 tfrtxa Gen. 1, 13. 2, 14. So ;E1. V. H. 
 7. 5. Xen. An. 2. 2. 4. Spec, rfj Tpirrj 
 f]p.fpa on the third day Matt. 16, 21. Mark 
 9, 31 ; Tfl fjfj.. TTJ TpiTt] John 2, 1 ; T?/ TPI TJ? 
 sc. IJ/LI. Luke 13, 32. So Xen. Hell. 4. 1. 
 20 ; TTJ rpi-rr) Cyr. 8. 7. 5. 
 
 2. Neut. TO rpiToi,e. g. a) Subst. 
 with p-tpos impl. a //arc?, the third part, c. 
 gen. of a whole, Rev. 8, 7 TO rpirov T<BI> 
 dt vo-puv. v. 8. 9 bis. 10. 11. 12 quinq. 9, 
 15. 18. 12, 4 ; non al. So Sept. for rvtpbttJ 
 Num. 15, 6. 7. 2 Sam. 18, 2. b) Adv. 
 the third time, e. g. TO rpirov Mark 14, 41. 
 John 21, 17 bis. Simpl. rplrov id. Luke 
 20, 12. 23, 22. John 21, 14. 1 Cor. 12, 28 ; 
 TO LTOV TOVTO, (his third time, 2 Cor. 12, 14. 
 13, 1 ; non. al. Sept. rplrov for t^rsa fciboi 
 Num. 24, 10; rpirov rovro for D ttibui nt 
 Judg. 16, 15. So rpirov Dion Cass. 58. 10. 
 p. 596. Also f< Tpirov adv. the third 
 time Matt. 26, 44 ; see in no. 2 fin. + 
 
 77, ov, (3pi^, Tpt^oj,) of hair, 
 hairy; VCIKKOS rpix<-voy Rev. 6, 12. Sept. 
 for "ttto Zech. 13, 4. Xen. An. 4. 8. 3 
 
 ou, 6, (Vpf /ico.) a tremlling- 
 from fear, terror, Mark 16, 8 ei^f Se ai/Taj 
 Tpo/ios Km (Kcrraais. Sept. for "^"J?^ Job 
 4, 14 ; ins Ex. 15, 15. So 1 Mace. 7, 18. 
 Plut. M. Crass. 26. Plato Tim. 62. b. 
 Coupled with <po,3or, e. g. (pd/3os KOI rp6- 
 fj.os, fear and trembling, intens. expressing 
 great timidity, diffidence, 1 Cor. 2, 3 ; or 
 profound respect, reverence, 2 Cor. 7, 15 
 cor fjiera (po/3ou KOI Tpdjuou e S ao-3e avTov. 
 Eph. 6, 5. Phil. 2, 12. Comp. Sept. Is. 19, 
 6. Ps. 55, 5. 
 
 T/307T/;, f)s, %, (TpeVw,) a turning, turn 
 ing back, e. g. of the heavenly bodies in 
 their courses, as at the solstices, James 1, 
 17 OVK tvi TrapaXXay?}. f) TporrJjs drroo-Ki aoTia, 
 see in aVoo-*/ao-/xa. Sept. Job 38, 33 Tpo- 
 Trar ovpavov. Deut. 33, 14 rj\iov Tponutv. 
 Horn. Od. 15. 404 Tpojra! ^eXi oio. Pol. 9. 
 
 15. 2. Also a turning back or rout of ene 
 mies, 1 Mace. 4, 35. Xen. An. 1. 8. 25. 
 
 Tpo?ro9, ou, 6, (YpeVco.) pr. a turning, 
 turn, direction ; hence genr. a manner, way, 
 mode, Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 19 efs p.fi> StSao-KaXuiy 
 rporros ?)i> auT<5. In N. T. 
 
 1. a turn, manner, way, mode; in ad 
 verbial constructions: a) Ace. c. KOTO, 
 e. g. Ka3" ov -rponov, in what manner, i. e. 
 as, even as, comp. in Kara no. 5. Acts 15, 
 1 1 . 27, 25 ; Kara iravra rpanov in every way 
 Rom. 3, 2 ; Kara p.rjo fva. rporrov in no way, 
 2 Thess. 2, 3. So Sept. Num. 18, 7. Pol. 
 1.87.4. Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 5. b) Ace. as adv. 
 ov Tponov, in what manner, i. e. as, even 
 as, Matt. 23, 37 ov rpoTrov firicrvvdyei opvis 
 ra voa-o-ia. Luke 13, 34. Acts 1, 11. 7, 28. 
 2 Tim. 3, 8. So too Jude 7 TOV opoiov rov- 
 TOIS Tponov. See Buttm. 5 115. 4. J 131. 7. 
 Matth. { 425. Winer $ 32. 6. Herm. ad Vig. 
 p. 880. Sept. for itix? Gen. 26, 29. Obad. 
 
 16. So 2 Mace. 15, 39. Hdian. 1. 2. 3. 
 Xen. An. 6. 3. 1 ; opoiov Tponov Luc. Ca- 
 tapl. 6. c) Dat. iravrl TpdVw, in every 
 way, Phil. 1, 18; see Buttm. 5*133. 4. b. 
 Winer J 31. 4. Also iv iravrl Tp6nq> 
 2 Thess. 3, 16 ; see in eV no. 3. b. So dat. 
 1 Mace. 14, 35. Arr. Epict. 2. 20. 8. Xen. 
 Cyr. 2. 1. 13. 
 
 2. Trop. a turn of mind and life, a man s 
 ways, habits, deportment; Heb. 13, 5 dcpt- 
 Xnpyvpor 6 TpoVof. Jos. Ant. 6. 12. 7. 
 Hdian. 2. 14. 9. Xen. An. 1. 9. 22. 
 
 Tp07TO(j)Ope(i), >, f. faco, (rponos, (po- 
 pe o),) to bear with the turn of any one, i. e. 
 with his disposition, habits, manners, con 
 duct, c. ace. Acts 13, 18 Rec. eTpono(f)6p7)- 
 a-tv avTovs, from Deut. 1, 31 where Sept. 
 Alex, et Compl. for K fiJ . Later edit, e rpo- 
 
732 
 
 (f>o<p6jrjcrev. Constitut. Apost. 7. 36. Cic. 
 ad Att. 1 3. 29. 
 
 rpcxfrtj, Zjs, jj, (rpe(po>,) food, nourish 
 ment, sustenance; Matt. 3, 4 fj 8e rpo(pf) 
 avTov TJV uKpides KT\. 6, 25. 24, 45. Luke 
 12, 23. John 4, 8. Acts 2, 46. 9, 19. 14, 
 17. 27, 33. 34. 36. 38. James 2, 15. Trop. 
 nutriment for the mind, instruction, Heb. 5, 
 12. 14. Sept. pr. for bax Job 36, 31 ; nnb 
 Ps. 136, 25. Prov. 6, 8. So Arr. Epict. 1. 
 11. 12. Hdian. 1. 17. 23. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 11. 6. Spec, a stipend, hire, Matt. 10, 10 
 aios yap 6 fpyaTrjs TTJS rpofprjs O.VTOV, 
 comp. Luke 10, 7 et 1 Tim. 5, 18 where 
 it is TOV fjuor Sov O.VTOV. So Xen. CEc. 
 5. 13. 
 
 T po<fii/j,o? : ov, 6, Trophimus, pr. n. of 
 a Christian of Ephesus, Acts 20, 4. 21, 29. 
 2 Tim. 4, 20. 
 
 T/30(jf>o?, oO. 6, 17, (rpe cpco,) a nurser, 
 nurse, 1 Thess. 2, 7. Sept. for n^j^a 
 Gen. 35, 8. Is. 49, 23. Hdot. 6. 61. Pol". 
 16. 31. 2. Xen. Cyr. 7. 3. 13. 
 
 TpO(f}0(f)Ope(i), <S, f. Tjo-o), (Tpo(po<p6pr)S ; 
 Tpofpf], (pope eo,) to bring nourishment to any 
 one, to cherish, to care for, c. ace. Acts 13, 
 18 in later edit, from Deut. 1, 31 where 
 Sept. Cod. Vatic, for Heb. Ni23 ; see in 
 
 opf o). 2 Mace. 7, 27. Macar. Ho- 
 mil. 46 draXap,/3di/ei neat 7Tfpi3uX7m KOL rpo- 
 (po(popfi eV TroXXfl (TTopyrj. Hesych. eVpo- 
 (po(f)6pr](rev f^pe^fv. 
 
 T P X ta > " r "7> ( T PX 0ff >) a wheel-track, 
 rut, Nicand. Theriac. 876 dp.dgns rpoxid. 
 In N. T. in a wider sense, a track, way, 
 path; trop. Heb. 12, 13 rpo^tas op3as Troifj- 
 o-are roiy iroa\v vp.lv, i. e. ways of life and 
 conduct; quoted from Prov. 4, 26 where 
 Sept. for bjSB, as also Prov. 2, 15. 4, 11. 
 So Suid. rpo^Las Tropeias, rp ijBovs, epya- 
 crias- 
 
 r PX 0< >> v> > ( r P e/ X a) >) P r - a runner, 
 any thing made round for rolling or run 
 ning ; hence genr. a wheel, as of a chariot, 
 Sept. for "(Bfc 1 K. 7, 32. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 
 30; of a potter, Pol. 12. 15. 6; for torture, 
 Luc. D. Deor. 6. 5. Plut. Phocion 35. In 
 N. T. trop. a course, as if run by a wheel, or 
 perh. a circular course, circuit ; James 3, 6 
 Tpoxov TTJS ytveffens. see in yeveais no. 2. 
 Comp. Anacr. 4. 7 TOO^OS app-aros yap ola, 
 PIOTOS Tpe x KvXtcrSei f. Wetst. N. T. II. 
 p. 670. Some of the grammarians make a 
 distinction as between rpoxos wheel, and 
 rpo%6s course ; see Passow in rpoxos fin. 
 
 Tpu/3Xioi/, ov, TO, a dish, bowl, for eat 
 ing or drinking ; Matt. 26, 23 6 f^d^as 
 
 p.(T ep.ov (v r<u rpv/SXua. Mark 14, 20 
 Sept. for rnsp Ex. 25, 39. Num. 4. 7. 
 Luc. Tim. 54. ^El. V. H. 9. 37. Plut. De- 
 mosth. 23. 
 
 rpvyaco, , f. ^^ (rpvyn, ) to gather 
 in ripe fruits or grain, to harvest, gem. 
 Sept. for 12|3 Hos. 10, 12. 14; K^TTOV T/. 
 Long. 2. 4. Oftener and in N. T. of vin 
 tagers, to harvest or gather grapes, c. ace. 
 Luke 6, 44 ovde fK fodrov rpvyaxri (rrcxpv- 
 \r,v. Rev. 14, 18. 19. Sept. for "sa Deut. 
 
 24, 21. Judg. 9, 7. So Dioscor. 5. 29 T> 
 o-Tu(pv\r]v. Luc. Catapl. 20. Xen. CEc. 
 19. 19. 
 
 rpvjcoVj ovos, fj, (rpvfa, rpt fo),) a tur 
 tle-dove, Luke 2, 24; see in Treptorepd. 
 Sept. for "in Lev. 5, 7. 11. ^El. V. H. 1. 
 15. H. A. 1. 35, 39. 
 
 Tpv{j,a\ia, as, fj, (Tpv/j.r), rpvw,) a hole, 
 the eye of a needle, i. q. rpinrnyia, Mark 10, 
 
 25. Luke 18, 25. Genr. rpvp.. rf/s Trtrpas 
 Sept. Judg. 15, 11. Plut. de Puer. educ. 14. 
 
 TpVTTtJpa, aros, TO, (rpuTrdeo. rpvna, 
 rpvca,) a hole, the eije of a needle, Matt. 19, 
 24. Genr. Aristoph. Pac. 1234. Etymol. 
 Mag. 726. 55. Mo3ris p. 289, OTTTJV, Am/coir 
 
 T pvfyawa, rjs, T], Tryphccna, pr. n. of 
 a female Christian at Rome, Rom. 16, 12. 
 
 rpv(f>dc0. a, f. 170-0), (rpucpjj,) to live de 
 licately and luxuriously, to live in pleasure, 
 absol. James 5, 5. Sept. for "jWryj Neh. 
 9, 25 ; M?rjn Is. 66, 11. ^El. V. H. 2. 5. 
 Xen. Ath. 1. 11. 
 
 rpvcf)!], fjs, f), (SpuTTrcD.) delicate living, 
 luxury, sc. as breaking down the mind and 
 making effeminate. Luke 7, 25 ot eV. . . rpv- 
 <pf] vndpxovres. 2 Pet. 2, 13 see in rjp-epa 
 no. 1. a. Sept. for aS>F) Prov. 19, 10. 
 Cant. 7, 6. Test. XII P atr. p. 701 6 iv 
 rpvfyfi 8idya>v. Hdian. 5. 2. 14. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 6/10. 
 
 Tpv(f)h)(ra : TJS, f), Tryphosa, pr. n. of a 
 female Christian at Rome, Rom. 16, 12. 
 
 Tpcods, ddos, Troas, strictly Alexan- 
 dria-Troas, a city of Mysia, situated on the 
 coast over against the island of Tenedos, at 
 some distance southward from the site of 
 Troy. Its solitary ruins are now called 
 Eski-Stamboul. Acts 16, 8. 11. 20, 5. 6 
 2 Cor. 2, 12. 2 Tim. 4, 13. Ptolem. 5. 3 
 Plin. H. N. 5. 30. The name Troas or the 
 Troad strictly belonged to the whole dis 
 trict around Troy. See Pococke II. ii. p. 
 108. O. v. Richter Wallf. p. 462. 
 
 Tpcojv\\iov, ov, TO, Trogyllium, pr. n. 
 of a town and promontory on the western 
 
rpcayco 
 
 733 
 
 coast of Asia Minor, opposite Samos, at the 
 foot of Mount Mycale. Acts 20, 15. Stra- 
 bo 14. 1. 13. p. 636. 
 
 rpcajd), f. IO/MU, aor. frpayov, (kindr. 
 rpaxa. rpvu,) to gnaw, to crack, to chew, pr. 
 fruits, nuts, raw beans, etc. which require 
 cracking with the teeth, Helot. 2. 37. ib. 2. 
 92 ; hence rpa>yd\ia, rpwKra, fruits, nuts, 
 almonds, and the like, set on as dessert. In 
 N. T. genr. to eat, i. q. eo-Sico, absol. Matt. 24, 
 38 TputyovTts KOI nivovres, eating and drink 
 ing, feasting, revelling, comp. in f o-3ia> no. 
 2. C. (Dem. 402. 21 rpatyfiv KOI irivtiv fjcrv- 
 x fj. Pol. 32. 9. 9. Xen. Conv. 4. 8.) With 
 ace. aprov v. aprovs by Hebr. John 13, 18, 
 quoted from Ps. 41, 10 where Heb. ^r 5 *} 
 Sept. e o-Sua, see fully in apros no. 2. Trop. 
 John G, 58 ; ace. a-dpua v. 54. 56. 57 ; see 
 fully in alpa no. 1. 
 
 Tvy%dva)j f. revo/iai, (kindr. rev^aj,) 
 aor. 2 f-rv^ov, perf. Tfrvx^Ka ; also perf. re- 
 nvxa Heb. 8, 6. Hdot. 3. 14, and in later 
 writers, see in no. 1 fin. See Buttm. 5 114. 
 Matth. J 251. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 395. To 
 hit, to strike, to reach a mark or object, so of 
 a weapon, absol. Horn. II. 5. 98. Xen. Cyr. 
 4. 6. 4 ; c. ace. II. 5. 582 ; c. gen. II. 5. 
 .587 ; Ml V. H. 13. 1 fin. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 
 18. Also, to hit upon, to fall in with, to meet 
 casually, of persons, absol. Od. 21. 13. Hes. 
 Theog. 973. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Trans, to attain unto, to obtain, to 
 gain, to receive, c. gen. Luke 20, 35 nara- 
 i<D3eVrej TOV aluvos fueivov Tvxdv. (Dem. 
 262. 27 KOT avTo TOVTO a^ios dpi fTralvov 
 
 fiv.} Acts 24, 3 TroXAr/s dpr/vys ruyxd- 
 8ia a-ov. 26, 22. 27, 3. 2 Tim. 2, 10 
 tva crun-ripias ru^cocri. Heb. 11, 35. Perf. 
 Heb. 8, 6 8uxp. rtrtvxf \eirovpyias. 
 2 Mace. 4, 6 dprjvijs- Diod. Sic. 4. 33 <rw- 
 njpias. Hdian. 2. 3. 25. Xen. (Ec. 11. 8. 
 Perf. TtTfvxa, c. gen. 3 Mace. 5, 35 fion- 
 Set ar TfTv X oTes. Pol. 1. 66. 10. Plut. Al- 
 cib. 1. Comp. Sturz de Dial. Alex. p. 198. 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 395. 
 
 2. Intrans. to hit, to happen, to fall out, to 
 chance, e. g. 
 
 a) Impers. fi TU^DI, if so happen, it 
 may be, i. e. perchance, perhaps, comp. in 
 tl I. 1 ; 1 Cor. 14, 10 et 15, 37. Philo de 
 Nom. mut. p. 1067 p.ov<riKbv jj.tv yap, d TV- 
 Xoi, KOI ypap.fJ.aTi<6v KT\. Dion. Hal. 4. 19. 
 Hdian. 7. 3. 4, 9. Luc. Bis accus. 2. 
 Comp. Wetst. N. T. II. p. 160. Viger. p. 
 301. n. 38. 
 
 b) Part. TUX*" ova-a, 6v. a) As Adj. 
 happening, any where and at all times, i. q. 
 chance, casual, common ; hence ov TVX&V, 
 
 uncommon, special. Acts 19, 11 ovvd^f is rt 
 ov Tas Tvxov(ra.s eVoi ft 6 3eor. 28, 2. So 
 c. ov 3 Mace. 3,7. Jos. Ant. 2. 6. 6. Hdian 
 2. 3. 16. Genr. Pol. 1. 25. 6. Xen. Mem. 
 1. 1. 14. /3) Neut. TV^O" adv. it may 
 be, perchance, perhaps ; 1 Cor. 1 6, 6 TT^OS 
 iyias 8e TVXOV Trapa/zeva). So Arr. Exp. 
 Alex. M. 1. 10. 10. Xen. An. 6. 1. 20. 
 Comp. Viger. p. 365. 
 
 c) Spec, before the participle of another 
 verb, rvyxdvo) is used in an adverbial sense, 
 much like the Engl. phrase to happen or 
 chance to be, before a participle ; e. g. Ceb. 
 Tab. 1 fTvyxavopfv irfpnTaTovvrts we hap 
 pened to be walking about, we were by 
 chance walking. Xen. An. 1. 5. 8 OTTOU 
 eKocrroj (Tvx^v f<TTr)KU)s, where each hap 
 pened to bo standing. Buttm. } 144. n. 6. 
 Kiihner } 310. 4. 1. Matth. 5 553. 8. So 
 espec. with u>v, ovrts, Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 11 tv 
 Trj (TKIJVTJ (Tvyxavf TIS >v, in the tent there 
 happened to be one. Ag. 2. 2 ir\i}i> oa-oi av- 
 TU>V (pvydSts rare ovres trvyxovov. But not 
 seldom, espec. in later writers, S>v is here 
 omitted, particularly before a predicate ; 
 and then Tvyxdvco is equivalent to a condi 
 tional to be, which can often be expressed 
 . in English only by to be or sometimes not at 
 all; comp. Matth. 5 533. no. 1. Thus in 
 the same words of Xen. Hell. 4. 3. 3 n\rjv 
 ocroi avTcav (pvyd8fs TOT (Tvyxavov, except 
 those who happened to be exiles, Engl. who 
 were exiles. Plato Hipp. Maj. 300. e, 8ia 
 ravra Tvyxdvti KaXij. Aristoph. Eccles. 
 1141. Palasph. 15. 2 OTTOV fTi/y^ave iipKros 
 where there chanced to be a bear, Engl. 
 where there was a bear. Jos. Ant. 1. 19. 
 5 flnep Aa/3ai>oti jrals Tvyxdvets ; dost lliou 
 happen to be the daughter of Laban? i. e. 
 art thou perhaps his daughter ? ib. 4. 7. 2 
 Mavcrrjs be, ywpaibs rjSr) Tvyxdvw, Closes 
 happening now to be an old man, Engl. be 
 ing now old. See Matth. 1. c. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 277. Hence in N. T. Luke 10, 
 30 d<pevT(S [avTov] fjfjii^SavTJ Tvyxdvoiva, 
 leaving him happening to be half dead, i. e. 
 leaving him AS IT WERE half dead. 
 
 j f. tVo), from rufj.rravov, tym 
 panum, a drum, tabret, timbrel, (rviravov, 
 T-ilTTTo),) consisting in the East of a thin 
 wooden rim covered over with membrane, 
 and hung round with brass bells or rattles, 
 used chiefly by dancing women, Sept. for 
 CfnEx. 15, 20. Judg. 11, 34. JEl V. II. 9. 
 8. Hdian. 4. 11. 5. But the rvunavov, 
 tympanum, was also an instrument of tor- 
 ture ; as to which interpreters are not 
 agreed whether it was a stick (drumstick ) 
 
734 
 
 Tvpo$ 
 
 tor beating or a frame resembling a drum 
 or timbrel, on which criminals were bound 
 to be beaten to death. The main passage 
 is 2 Mace. 6, 1 9. 28, comp. v. 30 ; and in 
 Jos. de Mace, the same instrument is called 
 Tpo^os, a wheel, } 5, 9. This would seem 
 to imply only a frame or rim on which they 
 were extended. Phot, in Lex. rvptreanv 
 TO TOV 8rjp.iov v\ov, u> TOVS Trapa8i8op.tvovs 
 8if^fipi^fTo. Luc. Catapl. 6 e /c Tv/j.ndvov, 
 ubi Schol. v\ov tv co TOVS KaTdSixovs f(f>6- 
 vevov. Hence the verb Tvp.7ravia>, genr. 
 to drum, to beat the drum or timbrel, Diod. 
 Sic. 3. 59. In N. T. spec, to scourge upon 
 the tympanum, to torture, to beat to death ; 
 comp. Engl. to break upon the wheel ; 
 Pass. Heb. 11,35 XXoi be fTvp.Travio-%r)o-av, 
 in allusion to 2 Mace. 1. c. So Luc. Jup. 
 Trag. 19 dvao-KoKoni^onevovs 8(, *cai Tv^nra- 
 viop.fvovs. Aristot. Rhet. 2. 5. Plut. de 
 Adul. et Amic. 17 ; comp. diroTv/ 
 3 Mace. 3, 27 alo~%io~Tois f$ao~dvois d 
 
 i. Dem. 126. 17. Plut. Galb. 8. 
 
 9j adv. (rwror,) typically, in 
 figures, I Cor. 10,11 Lachm. forruTroiinRec. 
 
 TU7TO5, ov, 6, (rvTrrta.) a type, i. e. any 
 thing caused, produced, made by blows. 
 
 1. a mark, print, impression ; John 20, 
 25 bis, TO TVTTOV TOM/ f]\cov. Athen. 13. p. 
 585. C. TOVS TVTTOVS TO>V TT\TjyS)v ISovcra. 
 Jos. B. J. 3. 9. 3. Plut. Syrnp. 8. 7. 4. 
 
 2. a figure, form, e. g. a) Of an 
 image, statue. Acts 7, 43 TOVS TVTTOVS ovs 
 eVotr/trare Trpoo~<vv(iv avTovs, cjuoted from 
 Amos 5, 26 where Sept. for nbs. So 
 Hdian. 5. 5. 11 TOV TVTTOV TOV 3eou. Diod. 
 Sic. 1. 7. b) Trop. form, manner, e. g. 
 of the contents of a letter Acts 23, 25 ; of 
 a doctrine Rom. 6, 17. So 3 Mace. 3, 30 
 6 ntv TTJS fTTio-ToXrjs TVTTOS KT\. Jambl. Yit. 
 Pythag. C. 23. p. 89, TOV TVTTOV TT]S 8i8ao-Ka- 
 \ias. Pol. 22. 7. 9. c) Trop. of a person 
 as bearing the form and figure of another, 
 i. e. as having a certain resemblance in re 
 lations and circumstances; Rom. 5, 14 6 y 
 
 3. a prototype, pattern. a) Pr. of a 
 pattern or model after which any thing is to 
 be made ; Acts 7, 44 TTOITJO-CII avTrfv /caret 
 THV TVTTOV KT\. Heb. 8, 5. Comp. Ex. 25, 
 40 where Sept. for r"nD"n So Anthol. 
 Gr. II. p. 72. b) Trop. an exemplar, 
 example, pattern, e. g. to be imitated, fol 
 lowed. Phil. 3, 17 (TD/i/xe/ZT/rai /zot> yiWcrSe 
 . . . Ka%a>s fX fre Tvirov r]fj.us. 1 Thess. 1, 7. 
 2 Thess. 3, 9. 1 Tim. 4, 12. Tit. 2, 7. 1 Pet. 
 5, 3. Hence also an example for admoni 
 tion, warning, 1 Cor. 10, 6. 11. 
 
 TVTTTO), f. ^co, 1 . to beat, to strike, to 
 smite, pr. with repeated strokes, e. g. a) 
 In enmity, with a staff, club, the fist ; c. 
 ace. of pers. Matt. 24, 49 TVTTT(IV TOVS <rvv- 
 dovXovs. Luke 12, 45. Acts 18, 17. 21, 32 
 
 TV1TTOVTS T0l> TLaiiXoV. 23, 3 ; TlVa (TT\ TIjr 
 
 aiayova Luke 6, 29 ; els TJ)I> K<j)aXrjv sc. 
 avTov Matt. 27, 30 ; TTJV Ke(f}u\fjv ai Tov 
 KaXci/icp Mark 15, 19; O.VTOV TO irp6o-a>- 
 TTOV Luke 22, 64 ; TO vTo^a Acts 23, 
 
 2. Sept. of pers. for nsn Ex. 2, 11. 
 13. 21. 15. So JEschin. 4/42 TvnTftv TOV 
 TraTfpa, rj TTJV fjiT)T(pa. Pol. 3. 53. 4. Xen. 
 Ath. 1. 8; TIVCI ety TI Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 5. 
 b) Of those who beat upon their breasts in 
 strong emotion ; Luke 23, 48 TvnTovTes 
 eauToif Ta crTrftrf. 18, 13 tTVTTTev [eavTov] 
 fls TO O-TTJ^OS. So Jos. Ant. 7. 10. 5 rv- 
 TrT6fj.fvos TO. o-Tf pva. c) Trop. from the 
 Heb. to smite, i. q. to punish, to inflict evil. 
 to afflict with disease, calamity, spoken 
 only of God, c. ace. Acts 23, 3 TvirTeiv o-f 
 peXXft 6 Seo s. Sept. and nSri 2 Sam. 24, 
 17. Ez. 7, 9. So 2 Mace. 3, 39. Comp. 
 in TraTuo-o-co no. 2. b. 
 
 2. Trop. to strike against, to offend, to 
 wound, e. g. the conscience of any one, 
 TTJV o-vvfio rjo-iv 1 Cor. 8, 12. Sept. and 
 yyi 1 Sam. 1, 8. Horn. II. 19. 125. Helot/ 
 
 3. 64 init. 
 
 ov, 6, Tijrannus, pr. n. of a 
 man at Ephesus, in whose school Paul dis 
 puted, and thus taught the Gospel, Acts 
 19, 9; comp. in o-^oXij. He was prob. a 
 Greek sophist; since Paul had left the 
 Jewish synagogue. 
 
 , f. do-a>, (Tvppn, Lat. turba.) 
 to make turbid, to disturb, to stir up, TOV 
 mjKov Aristoph. Vesp. 257. In N. T. trop. 
 to disturb in mind, to trouble; Pass, or Mid. 
 Luke 10, 41 fj.fpip.vas Ka\ Tvpj3dr) Trepi 
 Tj-oXXu. So Aristoph. Pax 1006 sq. Athen. 
 8. 3. p. 336. 
 
 Tvpios, ov, 6, f], adj. (Tupoj,) Tynan , 
 hence 6 Tvpios, a Tyrian, Acts 12, 20. 
 Hdian. 3. 3. 3. 
 
 Tvpo<S, ov, fj, Tyre, Heb. ii s (rock), 
 Aram, x nip , whence Tvpos, pr. n. of the 
 celebrated emporium of Phenicia, younger 
 than Sidon, and not mentioned by Moses or 
 Homer ; but soon outstripping the latter 
 city in commerce, wealth, and power. Tyre 
 was situated on the coast of the Mediterra 
 nean within the limits assigned to the tribe 
 of Asher ; but was never subdued by the 
 Israelites; Josh. 19, 29, comp. Judg. 3, 3. 
 4. 18, 7. On the contrary, under the reigns 
 
735 
 
 of David and Solomon there was a close 
 alliance of aid and commerce between the 
 two nations; 2 Sam. 5, 11. 1 K. 5, 1 sq. 
 
 1 Chr. 14, 1 sq. 2 Chr. 2, 3. 9, 10. Jos. 
 Ant. 8. 2. 6 sq. ib. 8. 3. 4. c. Ap. 1. 17. 
 The ancient city lay on the continent, and 
 the more modern part upon an island oppo 
 site. It was long besieged by Shalmaneser, 
 Menand. ap. Jos. Ant. 9. 14. 2; and after 
 wards for 13 years by Nebuchadnezzar, 
 Jos. Ant. 10. 11. 1. c. Ap. 1. 21. Comp. 
 Ez. c. 26. 27. 28 Whether it was actu 
 ally captured by ( the latter, is matter of 
 question among critics ; since neither Jose- 
 phus nor any Greek or Phenician writer 
 asserts it ; Jerome ad Ez. 26, 7. At any 
 rate Tyre appears to have come under the 
 dominion of the Babylonians ; and after 
 wards under that of the Persians ; in whose 
 time the Tyrians furnished cedar for the 
 second temple, Ezra 3, 7. Tyre was taken 
 by Alexander the Great, after a celebrated 
 siege, B. C. 332 ; see Diod. Sic. 17. 40 sq. 
 Arr. Exp. Alex. M. 2. 16 sq. Q. Curt. 4. 
 
 2 sq. The ancient part of the city, lying 
 upon the continent, was destroyed in this 
 siege, and never again rebuilt ; the materi 
 als were built up into a causeway or mole 
 from the main land to the island city. Un 
 der the Seleucidae and the Romans, Tyre 
 still retained its importance as a commercial 
 city. Strabo describes it as situated wholly 
 upon an island, and as flourishing in trade 
 and commerce; Strabo 16. 2. 23. p. 757. 
 In the fourth century, according to Jerome, 
 it was still a place of great importance ; ad 
 Ezech. 26, 7 ; and such it continued to be 
 in the time of the crusades. See genr. Re- 
 land Palaest. p. 1046 sq. For the history 
 and present state of Tyre or Sur, a small 
 town on a peninsula, connected with the 
 coast by the enlargement of Alexander s 
 mole, see Bibl. Res. in Palest. III. p. 392- 
 408. The prophets of the O. T. describe 
 Tyre as full of wealth, pride, luxury, and 
 vice ; and denounce judgments against her 
 for her idolatry and wickedness; see Is. 23, 
 13. Ez. 26, 7. 28, 1 sq. 29, 18. In N. T. 
 Acts 21, 3.-7; elsewhere only Tvpot KOI 
 SiScof Matt. 11, 21. 22. 15, 21. Mark 3, 8. 
 7, 24. 31. Luke 6, 17. 10, 13. 14. 
 
 TftpXo?, jj, 6v, (rv(pe\6s, rv(pa>. ) blind, 
 Matt. 9, 27. 28. 11, 5. 12, 22. Luke 7, 21. 
 22. John 9, 1 sq. Acts 13, 11. al. Sept. 
 for -!W Lev. 19, 14. Job 29 15. So Ceb. 
 Tab. 7. Luc. Tim. 20. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 3. 
 Trop. in respect to the mind, blind, ignor 
 ant, stupid, dull of apprehension ; Matt. 15, 
 
 14 odrjyoi dcri rv(p\ol rv(p\ii)v. 23, 16. 17. 
 
 19. 24. 26. Luke 4, 18. John 9, 39. 40. 41. 
 
 Rom. 2, 19. 2 Pet. 1, 9. Rev. 3, 17. Sept. 
 
 and -133 Is. 42, 16. 18. 19. 43, 8. So Luc. 
 
 \itar. Auct. rv<p\os yap fl TTJS ^VXTJS rar 
 
 6<j)Za\p.6v. Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 371 ; comp. 
 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 4. + 
 
 oa)j ^, f. COO-CD, (0Xo r,) to blind, 
 Mind, c. ace. JEl V. II. 13. 24. 
 2. In N. T. only trop. of the 
 blind, to darken, c. ace. John 12, 
 ffiakpovs. 1 John 2, 11. 2 Cor. 
 fjuara. Sept. for 1W Is. 42, 19. 
 XII Patr. p. 534 TOV vovv. Jos. 
 . 2 rfj 8iavoia T(Tv(p\a>fJieva>v. Pla 
 48. p. 99. e. TTJV -^v^v rv(X&>- 
 
 to make 
 Hdot. 4. 
 mind, to 
 40 TOVS 
 4, 4 TU v 
 So Test. 
 Ant. 8. 2. 
 to Phaed. 
 
 TV(pO(O, ). f. o>o:a>, (rv(pos, rix^to,) to 
 smoke, to wrap in smoke or mist, Jul. Cse- 
 sares. nxpovfJ.f Sa VTTO TOV Kairvov, in Riemer 
 s. v. Trop. to wrap in conceit, to make 
 conceited, proud, to in/late, Philo Leg. ad 
 Cai. p. 1015 6 fie Tuios eavrov tT(Tv(f)o>crfv. 
 Jos. B. J. 2. 17. 9. Hdian. 6. 5. 24. In N. T. 
 only Pass, to be conceited, proud, arrogant, 
 lifted up with pride ; 1 Tim. 3, 6 pr) TV$U- 
 Sfiy ds Kpi[j.a fj.Trecrj]. 6, 4. 2 Tim. 3, 4. 
 So Jos. c. Ap. 1. 3. JEL. V. H. 3. 28 rerv 
 (f>u>p.fvos eVt T<a TrXoi/rw. Pol. 3. 81. 1. Dem. 
 116. 6. 
 
 TV<f)(0, f. Stty-o), Buttm. j 18. 2 ; to raise 
 a smoke, with kimlr. ace. KOTTVOV rveptiv 
 Hdot. 4. 196; to smoke, to fill with smoke, 
 KanvM Tvfpfiv TTJV iroKiv Aristoph. Vesp. 457, 
 1079 ; to lei burn out in smoke, i. e. slowly 
 and faintly, c. ace. Diod. Sic. 3. 29 rvfovcri 
 TOV iv Trj xapdo pa xP rov - In N. T. Pass. 
 to be. consumed in smoke, to smoke ; Matt. 
 12, 20 \lvov Tv(j)6fj.fvov, a smoking wick, i. e 
 bnrning faintly, dimly, quoted from Is. 42, ? 
 where Heb. ^^? , Sept. Kanvi^o^ai ; see 
 fully in \lvov. So Chariton. Aphrod. 6. 3 
 Tv^ofitvov nvpus. Anth. Gr. I. p. 7. Plut. 
 Solon. 1 Trapf(pv\af Tv(j)Ofj.(vrjv afipov m pos 
 en u>crav (p\i iya. 
 
 TV^WVUCOS, i), or, (ru^o)! .) typlwnic, 
 like a whirlwind, violent, tempestuous, e. g. 
 uj/f/iof Acts 27, 14. So Tv(p<av a whirl 
 wind, tempest, Aristot. Meteor. 1. de Mundo 
 4. 18. 
 
 ov, , or u^i/co?, 0, TIJ- 
 chicus, pr. n. of a Christian teacher, the 
 friend and companion of Paul, Acts 20, 4. 
 Eph. 6, 21. Col. 4, 7. 2 Tim. 4, 12. Tit. 3, 
 12. Oil the accentuation, see Winer J6. 
 1. m. 
 
 rv^pv, see in rvy^dvo) no. 2. b. /3. 
 
736 
 
 Y. 
 
 s,) hyacinth- 
 tne, having the colour of the hyacinth, Rom. 
 9, 17. Sept. for ttintj Ex. 25, 5 ; r&?W 
 Ex. 26, 4. Horn. Od. 6. 231. Luc. pro 
 [ma. 5. 
 
 ov, 6, fj, the hyacinth, a flower 
 >f a deep purple or reddish blue, Horn. II. 
 1.4. 348. JEL V. H. 13. 1. In JV. T. the 
 hyacinth, a gem of like colour, nearly related 
 to the zircon of mineralogists, Rev. 21, 20. 
 See Plin. H. N. 37. 41. Rosenm. Bibl. Al- 
 terthk. IV. i. p. 38. 
 
 l/aXwo?, 77, ov, (iJaXoy,) of glass, glassy, 
 transparent ; Rev. 4, 6 SaXacrcra va\lvr). 15, 
 2 bis. Aristoph. Ach. 74. 
 
 va\o$, ov, 6, r ij (vco,) pr. any thing clear 
 like water, e. g. any transparent stone or 
 gem, as rock-salt Hdot. 3. 24 ; crystal, Sept. 
 for resist Job 28, 17 ; a burning-glass or 
 mirror, prob. of crystal, Aristoph. Nub. 766 
 or 768 Xi Soy 8ia(pai>f]s, a<p f]s TO nvp anrov- 
 o-i . . . Trjv vaXov. In N. T. glass, Rev. 21, 
 18. 21. So Antiphil. 6 in Anth. Gr. II. p. 
 155. Luc. Quom. Hist. 25. Plato Tim. 61. b. 
 The grammarians prefer the form va\os to 
 the more Ionic ve\os in Hdot. 1. c. Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 309. On the history of ancient 
 glass, see Strabo 14. p. 758. 
 
 vppifo, f. t a - G)) (/3pty,) to act with inso 
 lence, wantonness, loicked violence ; to run 
 riot, Luc. D. Deor. 6. 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 
 30. Cyr. 3. 1. 27; ay riva, towards any 
 one, Luc. D. Deor. 12. 1. Dem. 212. 23. 
 In N. T. c. accus. to act insolently as to or 
 towards any one, i. e. to treat despitefully, to 
 injure, to abuse; comp. Matth. 411. 2. 
 Winer 32. 1. Luke 11. 45 ravra \eyav 
 Kai rjfj.ds vfipifas. Acts 14, 5 ; ace. impl. 
 Matt. 22, 6; Pass. Luke 18, 32. 1 Thess. 
 2, 2. Sept. for bjrn 2 Sam. 19, 43. So 
 2 Mace. 14, 42. Pol. 10. 7. 3. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 1. 5. 
 
 vppis, ems, fj, (kindr. vrre p,) pride, 
 haughtiness, arrogance, as an affection of 
 mind, Sept. for WNS I s . 9, 9 <?<> v p pfl na\ 
 u\lsT]\fi Kap8[q \tyovrts. Prov. 29, 23 ; "Jl Xfi 
 frov. 16, 19. Jos. Ant. 6. 4. 4. Thuc. 1. 38* 
 In N. T. as shown in outward acts : 
 
 1. insolence, despiteful treatment, an out 
 rage ; 2 Cor. 12, 10 tv v&ptcriv, in outrages, 
 as heaped upon one. Sept. for "p^S Is. 16, 
 6. Nah. 2, 2. Aristot. Rhet. 2. 2". Dem. 
 296 11 TOV SavaTOV (pofifpwTfpas Tjyri 
 
 ras v^pfis KOI ray dnfliat. Xen. Cyr g, 
 4. 14. 
 
 2. Meton. injury, harm, damage, ii per 
 son or property, as arising from the inso 
 lence or violence of any one, and trop. from 
 the violence of the sea, tempests, Acts 27, 
 10. 21 rfjv vftpiv TctvTrjv KOL TTJV {TJ/JLLCLV. 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 6. 4 TO re Kavpa Kal TTJV OTTO 
 T&V onftpav vftpiv aTro/ia^^ei/ai. Pind. Pyth. 
 1 . 140 vavtrlarovop vfipiv low. Comp. Dem 
 522. ult. 
 
 v/3pi(TTij$, ov, 6, (vIBpifa,) one insolent, 
 overbearing, injurious; Rom. 1, 30 v/3pt- 
 o-Tds,vrrfpT](f)a.vovs. 1 Tim. 1, 13. Sept. for 
 N? Is. 16, 6; na Job 40, 6. Is. 2, 12. 
 Palffiph. 1. 8 vfipto-Tai KOI vTrtp^avoi. Luc. 
 D. Deor. 6. 1. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 19. 
 
 vyiaivci)) f. av), (vyu js,) I. to be sound, 
 healthy, well, to be in good health ; Luke 5, 
 31 ol iyaivovTfs those well. 7, 10. 3 John 2. 
 Also, to be safe and sound, Luke 15, 27. 
 Sept. for dteia Gen. 29, 6. 43, 27. 28. 
 Ceb. Tab. 36. Dern. 1256. 4. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 2. 10. 
 
 2. Trop. to be sound, free from error ; 
 e. g. of persons, vytaivftv Trj nla-rei V. ev rrj 
 TTtoret, to be sound in the faith, i. e. firm, 
 pure, right, in respect to Christian doctrine 
 and life, Tit. 1, 13. 2,2. (Pol. 28. 15. 12.) 
 Of doctrine, SiSacrKoXi a vyiaivovaa, \6yos 
 vyiaivav, sound teaching, sound doctrine, i. e. 
 true, pure, uncorrupted, 1 Tim. 1, 10. 6,3. 
 2 Tim. 1, 13. 4, 3. Tit. 1, 9. 2, 1. Philo 
 de Abr. p. 32. 29 TOVS vyialvavras Xdyovy. 
 Plut. de aud. Poet. 4 vyiaivovo-ai Trepl 3ecov 
 
 e oy, ouy, 6, f], adj. Dat. e ei, et ; 
 Acc. ea, fj ; so Ace. vyifj for the more usual 
 vyia, John 5, 11. 15. 7,23. Tit. 2, 8 ; also 
 Sept. Lev. 13, 15. Plato Phaed. 39. p. 89. d ; 
 comp. Greg. Cor. p. 163. Matth. 103. n. 1. 
 Winer 9. 1. 
 
 1. sound, healthy, well, in good health ; 
 pr. of the body or its parts, Matt. 12, 13. 
 15, 31 /SXeVozray . . . /aXXovy vyiels. Mark 
 [3, 5.] 5, 34. [Luke 6, 10.] John 5, 4. 6. 
 9. 14. Acts 4, 10. So iroieiv riva vyifj, to 
 make sound, to heal, i. q. vyidfciv, John 5. 
 11. 15. 7, 23 ; comp. in TTOUW no. 1. f. /3. 
 Tob. 12, 3. Dion. Hal. Ant. 4. 4. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 2. 17. Apol. Socr. 7. 
 
 2. Trop. Xo yoy vyirjs, sound doctrine, i. e. 
 true, pure, uncorrupted, Tit. 2, 8. Anth. 
 Gr. IV. p. 85 Xoyoy eppet oi>x vyirjs. M : 
 
vypos 
 
 737 
 
 Antonin. 8. 29 or 30. Dion. Hal. Ant. 2. 20 
 86as oi% vyifls. 
 
 V//309, d, OP, (va>, v8a>p,) watery, wet, 
 moist, Hdian. 6. 6. 2. Xen. CEc. 19. 6,7. 
 In N. T. of a tree or plant, sappy, i. e. fresh, 
 green, opp. np6s, Luke 23, 31 ; see in q- 
 pos. Sept. for nb Judg. 16, 7. 8. So The- 
 ophr. H. PI. 5. 10 Xeyo) 8e vypa ra eXauz. 
 
 vopia, as, T], (t>8a>p,) a water-pot, e. g. a 
 large vessel of stone in which water is kept 
 standing, John 2, 6. 7 ; also a vessel for 
 carrying water, a pot, jar, bucket, in the 
 East mostly of stone or earthen ware, John 
 4, 28. Sept. for 13 Gen. 24, 14 sq. Judg. 
 7, 16. 19. Jos. Ant . 8. 13. 5. Athen. 13. p. 
 589. b. Xen. Hell. 1. 7. 9. 
 
 ), &>, f. 170-0), (vdponoTijs , v- 
 to drink water, to be a water- 
 drinker, absol. 1 Tim. 5, 23. Athen. 2. p. 
 44. c. JEL V. H. 2. 38. Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 26. 
 
 u8p&)7Ti/c09, 17, w, (vop<a\lr, v8wp,) hydro 
 pic, dropsical, Luke 14, 2. Pol. 13. 2. 6. 
 Aristot. Probl. 3. 5. 7. 
 
 vSwp, v8aTos, TO, ((/&>,) water, Plur. ra 
 vSara. the waters. 
 
 1. Pr. and genr. Matt. 27, 24 \aftuv v8a>p 
 direvtyaro KT\. Mark 9, 41. 14, 13. Luke 
 7, 44. John 2, 7. Rev. 16, 12. al. As the 
 instrument of baptism, Matt. 3, 11. Mark 
 
 1, 8. Luke 3, 16. John 1, 26. 31. 33. 3, 5. 
 Acts 1, 5. 10,47. 11,16. 1 John 5, 6. 8. al. 
 Sept. every where for D?E Lev. 1,9. Judg. 
 4, 19. saep. So Hdian. 7. 12. 7. Dem. 73. 
 3. Xen. Mem. 3. 13. 3. Spec, in various 
 connections, e. g. a) v8a>p fa>i>, living 
 water, running, see in fa&> no. 1 . d. Also 
 mryal tiSarcov, see in Trqyf) no. 1. /3) Of 
 medicinal waters, John 5, 3 sq. y) Of 
 flowing waters, a stream, river, e. g. the 
 Jordan, Matt. 3, 16. Mark 1, 10; genr. 
 Acts 8, 36 bis. 38. 39. Also fountains, 
 v8aTa TroXXd, many fountains, John 3, 23 ; 
 see in Ai&>i>. Sept. Ex. 7, 15. Hdian. 3. 
 3. 2. Xen. An. 4. 3. 21. d) Of a lake or 
 sea, e. g. of Tiberias, Matt. 8, 32. 14, 28. 
 29. Luke 8, 24. 25; genr. Rev. 1, 15. 14, 
 
 2. al. Sept. Gen. 6, 17. Luc. Philopatr. 13. 
 Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 19. ) Of a watery fluid, 
 serum, which flowed from the wound in 
 Jesus side, John 19, 34. 
 
 2. Trop. water, as an emblem of spiritual 
 nourishment, i. q. the doctrines and bless 
 ings of the Gospel, John 4,14 ter ; v8<op 
 {a>v 4, 10. 7. 38 ; comp. in d&>, no. 1. d ; 
 also v8o>p faris Rev. 21, 6. 22, 1. 17; see 
 in fo7 no. 1. b. Rev. 7, 17 see ib. Comp. 
 Ecclus. 15, 3 v8a>p ao<pias Trorurei au- 
 
 + 
 
 ov, o, (uo),) rain; Acts 14, 17 
 fjfuv vfToiis 8i8ovs, i. e. rains, seasons of 
 rain. 28, 2. Heb. 6, 7. James 5, 18. Rev. 
 11,6. James 5, 7 vercv irptb i/4ov KOI o\fst[4ov, 
 see in ctyt/ioj. Sept. for cm 2 K. 3, 17 ; 
 ">a Ex. 9, 33. 34. Luc. Icarom. 25. Xen. 
 Yen. 5. 3. 
 
 47 
 
 as, fj, (vios, 3ror, 
 pr. the placing as a son, adoption ; Hesych. 
 vio Ufa-ia orav ris Seroi/ vibv \ap.fiavfi, 
 comp. Hdian. 5. 7. 1 Sea-Sat vlov. Diod. Sic. 
 
 4. 39 Serof viov Troteia-Sat. In N. T. trop. 
 adoption, sonship, spoken of the state of 
 those whom God through Christ adopts as 
 his sons and thus makes heirs of the pro 
 mised salvation ; comp. in vios B. 2. E. g. 
 of the true Israel, the spiritual descendants 
 of Abraham, Rom. 9, 4, comp. v. 6. 7 ; and 
 so of Christians generally, the followers of 
 Jesus, Rom. 8, 15 trvtv^a vioSeo-ias, see in 
 rrvfvua. III. D. 2. e. ft. Rom. 8, 23. Gal. 4, 
 
 5. Eph. 1, 5. Elsewhere Christians are 
 called viol TOV 3eoO, as Rom. 8, 14. Gal. 3, 
 26; comp. John 1, 12. 
 
 vto9, oC, 6, a son, Sept. every where 
 for 1? . 
 
 A) Genr. 1 . Pr. a son, a male child : 
 a) Strictly only of man; Matt. 1,21 T/ferat 
 8f vlov. v. 25. 7, 9. Mark 6, 3. 9, 17. al. 
 sjep. Once pleonast. vios appjjv Rev. 12, 
 5. Emphat. opp. wfeoy, Heb. 12, 8. Sept. 
 for 1? Gen. 4, 16. 24. saep. So Hdian. 3. 6. 
 11. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 14. Spoken of one 
 who fills the place of a son, John 19, 26 
 yvvai, I8ov 6 vios <rov. Also of an adopted 
 son, Acts 7. 21 et Heb. 11, 24, in allusion 
 to Ex. 2, 10 where Sept. and I?. So 
 Hdian. 5. 7, 1. 10, 11. Diod. Sic. 4. 39. 
 Often the case of vios is omitted before a 
 genitive, the article remaining in its place ; 
 see Buttm. 125. 5, also in 6, fj, TO, A. 2. a. 
 Matt. 4, 21 TOV TOV Zffif8aiov sc. vlov. 10, 2. 
 John 21, 15. al. So 1 Mace. 2, 1. Jos. 
 Ant. 14. 13. 3. Xen. An. 3. 3. 20. b) By 
 Hebr. of the young of animals, e. g. the foal 
 of an ass, Matt. 21,5 ira>\ov vlov vnovyiov. 
 quoted from Zech. 9, 9 where Sept. for 
 nia-inK-ja . Sept. Ps. 29, i vlovs tcpiS>v. 
 Comp. Heb. " l i 3"13 son of the herd, & calf, 
 Gen. 18,7. 8. 
 
 2. By Hebr. in a wider sense, a son, a 
 descendant ; Plur. descendants, posterity ; 
 comp. in TCKVOV no. 2. 
 
 a) Sing. Matt. 1, 1 irjo-ov Xpto-rou, viou 
 Aa^i 5, vlov A$paa/*. V. 20 luo-rjfp, vios 
 AajSt 5. Luke 19, 9 KOI OVTOS vios A/9paa/* 
 t OTI. So the Messiah, as descended from 
 the line of David, is said to be 6 vios 
 
W09 
 
 738 
 
 WO? 
 
 Matt. 22, 42. 45. Mark 12, 35. 37. Luke 
 20, 41. 44. Hence vios Ao/Si S, Son of Da 
 vid, i. q. Messiah, Matt. 9, 27. 12, 23. 15, 
 22. 20, 30. 31. 21, 9. 15. Mark 10, 47. 48. 
 Luke 18, 38. 39. Comp. Sept. and I? 
 Gen. 29, 5. Ezra 5, 1 comp. Zech. 1, 1. 
 
 b) Plur. Acts 7, 16 viol Ep.p.6p, Heb. 
 \?2 Gen. 33, 19. Heb. 7, 5 viol Ann sons 
 of Levi, the Levites ; Sept. Num. 26, 57. 
 Gal. 3, 7 viol AjSpaap,, emphat. the true or 
 spiritual posterity of Abraham. Espec. oi viol 
 lo-paqX, the sons, descendants, of Israel, i. q. 
 the Israelites, Matt. 27, 9. Luke 1, 16. 
 Acts 5, 21. 7, 23. 37. Rom. 9, 27. 2 Cor. 
 
 3, 7. 13. Rev. 21, 12. al. So Sept. for 
 banter vaa Ex. is, 19. 14, 2. saep. nrn 
 Ex 16, 31 ! 
 
 c) viof av3pa>7rov, a son of man, a 
 man ; spoken of man, also of Jesus as the 
 Messiah ; see fully in ovSpwTros no. 4. 
 
 3. Trop. and from the Heb. spoken of 
 one who is the object of parental love and 
 care, or who yields filial love and reverence 
 towards another, e. g. a pupil, disciple, fol 
 lower, the spiritual child of any one, comp. 
 in TtKvov no. 3. b. Heb. 2, 10. 12, 5 bis, 
 vp.1v a>s viols StoXeyerat vie fiov, KT\. 
 quoted from Prov. 3, 11 where Sept. and 
 1?. 1 Pet. 5, 13 Map/cos 6 vlos /*ov, comp. 
 Acts 12, 12; others here understand an 
 other Mark, the real son of Peter. So of 
 the disciples and followers of the Pharisees, 
 Matt. 12, 27 Luke 11, 19. Sept. and *3 
 1 K. 20, 35. 2 K. 2, 3. 5. Prov. 2, 1. 3, 1. 
 
 4, 10. 20. al. Ecclus. 4, 11. Comp. among 
 the Greeks larpSiv viol, pr/ropi^v viol, for 
 tarpoi, pijTopes, spoken of classes, castes, 
 professions, as transmitted from father to 
 son. See Heb. Lex. "J3 no. 5. Passow in 
 vids. For vids (viol) TOV 3eov, see 
 below in B. 
 
 4) By Hebr. with a genitive of thing or 
 quality, genit. the son of any thing, i. e. one 
 connected with, partaking of, or exposed to 
 that thing ; often put instead of an adjec 
 tive ; Winer 34. 2. n. 2. Heb. Lex. *2 
 no. 4, 8. E. g. with genit. of place, condi 
 tion, connection, viol TOV wpfpSivos, sons of 
 the bridal chamber, bridemen, Matt. 9, 15. 
 Mark 2, 19. Luke 5, 34; see in wp.<pS>i>. 
 Matt. 8, 12 viol rrjs jSao-iXei as (ra>v ovpa- 
 WBI>,) sons of the kingdom, to whom its pri 
 vileges belong of right, here spoken of the 
 Jews ; but also of the true subjects or citi 
 zens, Matt. 13, 38; comp. in /3ao-tXei a no. 
 3. b. Opp. are viol TOV irovrjpov, sub 
 jects, vassals of Satan, his followers, imita- 
 tators, ib. 13, 38; and so vie TOV 8ta/3oXov 
 
 Acts 13, 10. Comp. Sept. vJ6s f\(v%(pa>r 
 for B-nrr-ja ECC. 10, n. So i Mace. 4, 
 2 viol TTJS aKpas. With a genit. implying 
 quality, character, e. g. viol PpovTrjs sons 
 of thunder Mark 3, 17 ; see in Eoavrpyft . 
 Luke 10, 6 vios ci pjjiTjs, a son of peace, one 
 appointed to salvation ; opp. Ttxvov opyf/s 
 Eph. 2, 3. 1 Thess. 5, 5 viol TTJS ij/iepar, 
 
 1. e. enlightened with true knowledge. Acts 
 
 4, 36 vios napaK\r]crt)s, see in 7rapaK\r)cris 
 no. 2. John 12, 36 viol TOV fyatros, i. e. en 
 lightened with the true light ; and so 1 Thess. 
 
 5, 5. Luke 16,8. Opp. viol TOV al>vos TOV- 
 TOV, sons of this world, devoted to this world, 
 ib. 16, 8. 20, 34 ; viol TTJS airf&eias, i. q. of 
 aTmSeis, the disobedient, Eph. 2, 2. 5, 6. Col. 
 3, 6. Comp. Sept. vios 8vvdp.t(os for bin~13 
 2 Sam. 13, 28 ; vios dvopias for fi^S- 1 )3 
 Ps. 89, 23. With genit. of that in which 
 one is a partaker, *o which one is exposed ; 
 Luke 20, 36 viol TTJS dvao~Tao-fa>s, sons of 
 the resurrection, partakers in it. Acts 3, 25 
 viol T&V Trpo<f)r]T>v KOI TTJS SiaSijjojs, i. e. to 
 whom the prophecies and the covenant ap 
 pertain. Also vlos TTJS a7r<oXeias, son of 
 perdition, devoted to destruction, see in 
 an-eoXfia no. 1. b, John 17, 12. 2 Thess. 2, 3 ; 
 vios T^S ytfvvr]s, i. e. deserving everlasting 
 punishment, Matt. 23, 15. Comp. Sept. 
 v6s SawiTov for Heb. f^.*" 1 )*} l Sam. 20, 
 31. 2 Sam. 12, 5. So Psalt. Sal. 17, 17 
 viol T!)S SiaSijKijs. 
 
 B) In relation to God, vios TOV 3eov, 
 viol TOV 3eov, son of God, sons of God, i. e. 
 
 1. Of one who derives his human nature 
 directly from God, and not by ordinary ge 
 neration ; e.g. Adam, impl. Luke 3, 38. 
 So, according to some, Jesus, Luke 1, 35 ; 
 better under no. 3. b. 
 
 2. Of those whom God loves and cher 
 ishes as a father ; see in TTCITTJP B. 2 ; ytv- 
 vda> no. I. c; comp. in TTKVOV no. 3. c. So 
 genr. of the pious worshippers of God, the 
 righteous, the saints. a) Genr. Matt. 27, 
 54 et Mark 15, 39 dAj/Sois 6 av%p. OVTOS 
 vlos ?]v 3fov, comp. Luke 23, 47 where it is 
 8/Kaios T/V. Matt. 5, 9 fiaKapioi ol elprfvoTvoioi, 
 OTI viol TOV 3eov K^rftrja-ovrai. So of one 
 who is like God, e. g. in eternal life, Luke 
 20, 36 ; in disposition, benevolence, Matt. 
 
 5. 45. Luke 6, 35 viol TOV V^IOTOV. Sept.. 
 and |2 Ps. 73, 15. Deut. 14, 1. So Wisd. 
 
 2, 18. 5, 5. Ecclus. 4, 10. Psalt. Sal. 13, 
 7. b) Spec, of the Israelites, Rom. 9, 26. 
 2 Cor. 6, 18. Sept. and D" 1 ?? Is. 1, 2. 43, 
 
 6. Jer. 3, 14. Sing. Ex. 4, 22. 23. Hos. 
 11, 1. c) Of Christians, Rom. 8, 14. 19. 
 Gal. 3. 26 irdvTfs yap viol 3eov e ore 8ia TTJS 
 
739 
 
 *HTTfa>s (v Xp. I. 4, 6. 7. Heb. 12, 6 sq. 
 Kev. 21, 7. Comp. in rttcvov no. 3. c. 
 
 3. Of Jesus Christ, as 6 vlos TOV 3fov, 
 /Tie Son of God ; also 6 vlos TOV v\jsi<rrov 
 the Son of the Most High, Luke 1, 32, comp. 
 Mark 5, 7. Luke 8, 28 ; and simply 6 vlos, 
 the Son, HOT fi-oxfjv. a) In the Jesvish 
 sense as the Messiah, the Anointed, 6 Xpi- 
 oro f, the expected king of the Jewish na 
 tion, constituted of God, and his vicegerent 
 in the world ; see fully in ftuo-tXfia no. 3. 
 So as joined with 6 Xptoros in explanation ; 
 Matt. 16, 16 (TV 6 Xptcrro?, 6 vlos TOV 
 SeoC. 26, 63. Mark 14,61. Luke 4, 41. 
 John 6, 69. 11, 27. 20, 31. Also John 1, 
 50 a-v ti 6 vlos TOV 3eot), crv ei 6 fiaaiXevs 
 TOV lo-pafjX, comp. Luke 1, 32. So too 
 Matt. 2, 15, quoted from Hos. 11, 1 v^here 
 Sept. for 1? spoken of Israel. Matt. 4, 3 et 
 Luke 4, 3. Matt. 8, 29 et Mark 5, 7 et 
 Luke 8, 28. Matt. 14, 33. 27, 40. 43. Mark 
 3, 11. Luke 22, 70. John 1, 34 comp. 42. 
 9, 35. Perhaps Acts 13, 33 et Heb. 1, 5 
 et 5, 5 vlos fJ.ov ft (TV, 0-fj/j.tpov yfyfvvjjKa. o~(, 
 quoted from Ps. 2, 7 where Sept. for h ?a ; 
 comp. in yew/aw no. 1. c. But these pas 
 sages belong rather to lett. b, below. So 
 Sept. for 1? , e . g. of Solomon whom God 
 calls his son, 2 Sam. 7, 14 ; also for 
 IfyfT^ of kuig s or magistrates, Ps. 82, 
 6 ; comp. Ps. 89, 28. b) In the Gospel 
 sense, as the Messiah, the Saviour, the 
 Head of the Gospel dispensation ; so called 
 as begotten in the flesh by the special 
 power of God, Luke 1, 35; as proceeding 
 and sent forth from God, as partaking of the 
 divine nature, and being in intimate union 
 with God the Father ; comp. in 9t 6s no. 2 ; 
 Xoyoj III ; Kvpios II- 2. b ; /SaeriXe la no. 3. 
 Compare also passages like John 10, 33- 
 36. Matt. 11, 27. Luke 10,22. John 1, 
 14. 18. Heb. 1. 5 sq. 3, 6. So where 6 rra- 
 rrjp and 6 vlos are mentioned in connection 
 or antithesis, as in most of the above passa 
 ges ; also Matt. 28, 19. Mark 13, 32. John 
 5, 26. 1 John 1, 3. 2, 22. 4, 14. 2 John 3, 
 
 9. Genr. Matt. 3, 17 OVTOS t<mv 6 vlos pov 
 6 dyarrrjTos- 17, 5. John 3, 16 OVTO) yap 
 T)yaTrT)o~fv 6 3f6r TOV Kocrpov, <uore TOV vlov 
 avTov TOV povoyfvfj (8<i>K.(v KT\. V. 17. 18. 
 17, 1. Rom. 1, 3. 4. 9. 5", 10. 8, 3. 29. 32. 
 1 Cor. 1, 9. 15, 28. 2 Cor. 1, 19. Gal. 1, 
 16. 2, 20. Eph. 4, 13. Col. 1, 13. 1 Thess. 
 1, 10. Heb. 1,2. 6, 6. 2 Pet. 1, 17. 1 John 
 1,7. 5, 5. Rev. 2, 18. sap. -f 
 
 v\ij, rjs, f], (kindr. vXoi>,) a wood,forest, 
 Lat. sylva, Sept. Job 38, 40. Hdian. 7. 2. 
 
 10. Xen. An. 5. 2. 31. In N. T. wood, 
 
 fire-wood, fuel, James 3, 5. So Ecclus. 28, 
 10. Pol. 34. 2. 16. Plato Legg. 849. d. 
 In Greek writers also timber, materials, 
 Hdot. 4. 10. 2. Xen. Hell. 1. 1. 25. 
 , Plur. of (TV, where see. 
 
 O u, 6, Hymenaus, pr. n. of a 
 man, an adversary of Paul, 1 Tim. 1, 20. 
 2 Tim. 2, 17. 
 
 a , ov, possess, pron. 
 your, Lat. vestri, vestra, vestrum; comp. 
 Buttm. 5 72. 4. 
 
 1. Subjective, pr. of that which ye have, 
 which belongs or pertains to you; John 7, 
 6 6 Katpbs 6 vfj-fTtpos- 8, 17 fv ro> vop.a> ro> 
 v/i. Acts 27, 34. Rom. 11, 31. Gal. 6, 13. 
 So Luke 6, 20 i/nrrepa (o~r\v fj jSaaiXeta 
 TOV 3fo{J. 16, 12 TO vp.(Tcpov your own, that 
 which belongs to you or is assured to you. 
 Sept. Prov. 1, 26. Hdian. 3. 6. 7. Xen. 
 Hell. 6. 3. 6. 
 
 2. Objective, of that which proceeds from 
 you, of which ye are the source, cause, oc 
 casion; John 15, 20 KCU TOV v^tTtpov [Xo- 
 yoi ] TTjpfivovo-i. 1 Cor. 15, 31 vfj rfv v/jtt- 
 Tepav Kav^o-iv f)v e^co, i. e. my boasting as 
 to you. 2 Cor. 8, 8. Hdian. 1. 5. 25. 
 Thuc. 1. 33 TOVS AaKfSat/ioj/iou? (po,3<i> r<jt 
 vp.(Tfpcj> 7ro\(p.T)o-(iovras. Comp. Matth. 
 }466. 2. 
 
 VfAveco, >, f. rjcro), (vp.vos,) to hymn, i. e. 
 
 1 . Pr. c. ace. to sing hymns to any one, 
 to praise in song, e. g. TOV Seov Acts 1 6, 
 25. Heb. 2, 12. Sept. for rnin Is. 12, 4 ; 
 ^n 2 Chr. 29, 30. Jos. Ant. 7. 12. 3 TOV 
 3edV. ^El. V. H. 2. 4. Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 23 
 TOVS 3fovr. 
 
 2. Intrans. to sing a hymn or hymns, to 
 sing praise, absol. Matt. 26, 30 *al vp.vrj- 
 cravTfs e ijX3ov. Mark 14, 26. Sept. for 
 finin Neh. 12, 24; W^n 2 Chr. 23, 13; 
 l-nfin Ps. 65, 14. Is. 42, 10. Plato Rep. 
 463. d. 
 
 v/J,vo<>, ov, 6, (tJ8a>,) a hymn, song of 
 praise , Eph. 5, 1 9 ifsa\p.ots nal vfj.vois xal 
 wSal? Trvfvp. Col. 3, 16. Sept. for I" 1 
 Is. 42, 10; !"iinn 2 Chr. 7, 6. Ps. 40, 4. 
 Arr. Exp. Alex. M. 4. 11. 3 ts TOVS 3eouj. 
 Hdian. 4. 2. 10. Plato Legg. 799. b. 
 
 VTTaycOj f. a|w, (vrro, ayeo,) to lead or 
 bring under, as horses under a yoke, Luc. 
 D. Deor. 25. 3. Horn. II. 16. 148 ; to bring 
 under a tribunal, i. e. before a judge on his 
 elevated seat, to arraign, to accuse, Hdot 6. 
 72, 82. Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 28 ; to bring under 
 one s power or will, to subdue, Hdot. 8. 
 106. Jos. Ant. 5. 10. 1. Thuc. 7. 46; to 
 lead or bring down, tls TO neotov Jos. Vit 
 
740 
 
 V 24 ; to lead or bring away under, i. e. from 
 under any thing, Horn. II. 11. 163 "E/cropa 
 8" (K @t\f>v vnayf Zfi/s. In N. T. and 
 later usage intrans. or with tavrov impl. to 
 go away, pr. under cover ; strictly with the 
 idea of stealth, stillness, without noise or 
 notice ; see in aya> no. 2. 
 
 1 . Pr. to go away, to depart, to withdraw 
 oneself, so as to be under cover, out of sight ; 
 absol. of persons, Mark 6,31 ol tp\6p.fvoi 
 KCU ol vndyovTfs. v. 33. John 18, 8; trop. 
 of persons withdrawing themselves from a 
 teacher or party, John 6, 67. 12, 11. Iin- 
 perat. vnayf, go thy way, depart, as a word 
 of dismissal, Matt. 8, 13. 32. 20, 14. Mark 
 7, 29. 10, 52. Luke 10, 3. Once a<ere 
 vrrayeiv John 11, 44. So vrraye fls flprjvrjv 
 Mark 5, 34, ev flpfivy James 2, 16 ; see in 
 tls no. 4 fin. As expressing aversion, get 
 thee hence, begone, virayf Sarava Matt. 4, 
 10; elsewhere vnaye OTTIO-O) pov Matt. 16, 
 23. Mark 8, 33. Luke 4, 8 ; comp. in 
 oTrurco no. 2. With t 1 s local, fls TOV olxov 
 Matt. 9,6. Mark 2, 11. 5, 19. Trop. Rev. 
 
 13, 10 fls alxpaXcoo-iav. 17, 8. 11 els dnu>- 
 \fiav. With TT p 6 s c. ace. e. g. irpbs TOV 
 irartpa John 7, 33. 13, 3. 16, 5. 10. 16. 
 17 ; impl. 8, 21 ryo> vTrayv. 14, 28 virdya> . . . 
 rropfvofiai, npbf T. TT. In a like sense with 
 irov, whither, John 8, 14 bis. 13, 36. 14, 
 5. 16, 5 ; OTTOV John 8, 21. 22. 13, 33. 36. 
 
 14, 4. Once of the wind, c. TTOV, John 3, 8. 
 Trop. and absol. to depart this life, to die ; 
 Matt. 26,24 et Mark 14,21 6 vlbs TOV dv%p. 
 vndyu, Ka3o>s ytypanrai KT\. Thorn. Mag. 
 p. 866 TO virdyo) p.rj t lTrrjs dvrl TOV dnep^o- 
 pai, dXX dvrl TOV vnb vybv (iya>. Arr. 
 Epict. 3. 16. 10 jjiciKpuv OTTO TOV r/\iov vna- 
 y<Tt. Theogn. 917. Anth. Gr. III. p. 57. 
 no. 2, fls aorjv vrrdyto. Comp. Hdot. 4. 120, 
 122. Thuc. 4. 126. 
 
 2. Genr. i. q. to go, to go away to a place ; 
 so with fls local, fls TTJV iro\iv V. Ku>p.r)v 
 Matt. 26, 18. Mark 11, 2. 14, 13. Luke 19, 
 
 30. Matt. 20, 4. 7 els TOV d;wreXa>j/a. John 
 7, 3. 9, 11 vnayt tls TTJV Ko\vp.pf)%pav. 11, 
 
 31. 6, 21 els ty [yr/v] vir^yov sc. by ship. 
 With fj.fTd TIVOS Matt. 5,41. Luke 12,58; 
 fKtl John 11,8; irov John 12, 35. 1 John 
 2, 11; OTJ-OV Rev. 14, 4; with inf. final, 
 John 21, 3 V7rdya> aXifvdv. Absol. John 4, 
 16. 9, 7 comp. 11. Luke 8,42. 17, 14. By 
 a species of pleonasm, {maya is often pre 
 fixed, espec. in the imperative, to verbs 
 which of themselves imply motion or action, 
 in order to render the expression more full 
 and complete ; see in iropfv<a no. 1 ; avl- 
 
 II. 1. a. John 15, 16 Iva vp.t is vnd- 
 Kai KapTrbv (peprjTt. Matt. 13, 44. Im- 
 
 perat. Matt. 5, 24 vnayf , npcoTov 
 3t. 8, 4. 18, 15. 19, 21. 21, 28. 27 ; 65. 28. 
 10. Mark 1, 44. 6, 38. 10, 21. 16, 7. Revi 
 10, 8. 16, 1. Arr. Epict. 3. 21. 6 {Wye, 
 r)Tfi KT\. So, to go forwards, to advance, 
 slowly, gradually, Pol. 11. 16. 1. Xen. An 
 3. 4. 48. 
 
 V7TdKOT]j ijs, f/, (vnaKovu),) a hearing 
 attentively, a hearkening, listening, Sept. 
 for rvias 2 Sam. 22, 36. Aquil. for nS72QiT3 
 2 Sam. 23, 23. In N. T. obedience; Rom. 
 1, 5 fls inraKorjv Tn orecor, i. e. obedience 
 which springs from faith. 5, 19 8ia vnaicor)s 
 TOV fvos. 6, 16 bis. 15, 18. 16, 19. 26. 2 Cor. 
 7, 15. 10, 6. Philem. 21. Heb. 5, 8. 1 Pet. 
 1, 2. v. 14 see in TCKVOV no. 5. With ge- 
 nit. of object, 2 Cor. 10, 5 vTraKorjv TOV Xpt- 
 O-TOV, i. e. to or towards Christ. 1 Pet. 1, 
 22 VTT. TTJV dXrjSeias. Not found in the 
 classics. 
 
 f. ovcra>, (VTTO, aKova>,) to hear, 
 pr. with submissiveness, stillness, attention. 
 i. q. to hearken, to listen. 
 
 1. Pr. of a porter or door-keeper who 
 listens and replies to the knock or call of 
 anyone from without; absol. Acts 12, 13 
 Kpovo-avros be avTov . . . TrpoaJjXS* TraiSieio^ 
 vTraicovo-m. Dem. 1149. 27. Plut. de Gen. 
 Socr. 31. Xen. Conv. 1. 11 Kpovo-as TTJV 
 %upav tint T<a vnaKovo-avTi eicrayyetXat. 
 
 2. Trop. to listen to any one, to obey, c. 
 dat. Matth. 362. no. 2 ; so c. dat. of pers. 
 Matt. 8, 27 et Mark 4, 41 6 avfpos KOI rj 
 3aX. vmiKovovcriv auraJ. Mark 1, 27. Luke 
 8, 25. 17, 6. Eph. 6, 1. 5. Col. 3, 20. 22. 
 Heb. 5, 9. 1 Pet. 3, 6; dat. impl. Heb. 11, 
 8. With dat. of thing, Acts 6, 7 WIJACOVOI/ 
 TTJ Trioret. Rom. 6, 12. 16. 10, 16. 2 Thess. 
 l , 8. 3, 14 ; dat. impl. Rom. 6, 17. Phil. 2, 
 12. Sept. c. dat. for yaiy Gen. 39, 10; 
 comp. Deut 20, 12. So c. dat. Jos. Ant. 
 5. 4. 1 TOIS vojj-ois. Hdian. 3. 12. 15 TO> 
 /3ao-tXfT. Xen. Cyr. 1. 1. 3. Mem. 1. 2. 30*. 
 The more usual construction is c. gen. 
 Sept. Gen. 16, 3. Xen. CEc. 14. 3; comp. 
 Matth. J 3G2. 4. 
 
 V7ravSpo$, ov, 6, 17, adj. (vrro, dvyp,) 
 under a husband, subject to a husband, 
 spoken of a wife, Rom. 7, 2. Sept. for 
 tt^N nntn Num. 5, 29. Ecclus. 9, 9. Plut. 
 Pelopid. 9. Pol. 10. 26. 3. 
 
 VTTClVTaG), S>, f. r]o~a>, (vivo, dvrda>, dvr[,) 
 to come opposite to any one, to encounter, to 
 meet, pr. with the idea of stealth, unper- 
 ceived, without noise or notice ; c. dat. 
 Matt. 8, 28 vTrTjVTTjcrav avrw 8vo aip.ovi6- 
 t ufvoi. Luke 8, 27. John 11, 20. 30. 12, 18 
 
741 
 
 vrrep 
 
 [Mark 5,2. Luke 14,31. John 4,51.] 
 Tob. 7, 1. Hdian. 1. 7. 4. Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 57. 
 
 VTTairrria Lf, f<B f, 9, (im-cu/raw,) meeting, 
 encounter; in N. T. only in the phrase els 
 vndvTT)<riv, for inf. viravrqv, to meet; c. dat. 
 John 12, 13 ef)\%ov tls imdvTT)<riv avry. 
 [Matt. 8, 34; c. gen. 25, 1.] Sept. for 
 rsnpb Judg. 11, 34. Genr. Jos. Ant. 11. 
 8. 4. 
 
 trrapgt?, ear, 17, (vrrapxw,) being, ex 
 istence, rov aya3ou Plut. adv. Stoic. 18. 
 In N. T. the being to any one, possession ; 
 melon, a possession, property, goods, sub 
 stance ; Acts 2, 45 ray irrrdpfis ftrbrpa- 
 O-KOV. Heb. 10, 34. Sept. for fflson 2 Chr. 
 35, 7; -jin Prov. 18, 11. 19, 1 4! Test. 
 XII Patr. p. 583 f] yfj KOI 17 vTrapts avTrjs. 
 Dion. Hal. Ant. 7. 8. Pol. 2. 17. 11. ib. 10. 
 25. 5. In later usage put for the earlier TO. 
 imdpxovra, Tittm. de Syn. N. T. p. 193. 
 
 vrrapxa), f. |o>, (VTTO, apxa>, ) to begin 
 pr. in some degree, gradually, impercepti 
 bly, Horn. Od. 24. 286. Dem. 12. 1 ; to be 
 gin doing, to do first, with particip. Xen. 
 An. 2. 3. 23. ib. 5. 5- 9; c. ace. impl. Dem. 
 1 345. 7 ; to begin to be, to come into exist 
 ence, to arise, Dem. 408. 22 TTJV inrdpxovo-av 
 ai(rxviv]v. Hence genr. and in N. T. 
 
 1. to exist, to be extant, present, at hand; 
 absol. Acts 19, 40 /j.r)8fv6i ulriov imdpxov- 
 TOS irtpl ov KT\. 27, 21. 28, 18 Sta TO fiydf- 
 piav alriav 3a/aTou imdp^eiv ev e/zoi. 1 Cor. 
 11,18. So Dem. 32. 20 TOVT ovv fi npov- 
 fivai. TO. 8 aXXa vnapxei. Xen. Ag. 8. 1 
 vTrapxovo-Tjs n*v rt/x^f KT\. Cyr. 3. 3. 52. 
 With dat. of pers. to be present to any one, 
 implying possession, property ; Acts 3, 6 
 dpyvpiov Kal xpvaiov ovx \indp\(i /xot, silver 
 and gold have I none. 4, 37 vndpxovros 
 avria dypov. 28, 7. 2 Pet. 1 , 8. (Sept. Job 
 2,4 . Hdian. 1. 10. 9. Xen. An. 2. 2. 11.) 
 Hence Particip. TO. vTrdpxovra,&s Subst. 
 things present, things in hand, to any one, 
 possessions, property, goods, substance, c. 
 dat. of pers. as above, Luke 8, 3. Acts 4, 
 32; c. gen. of pers. Matt. 19, 21 TrwXrjo-oV 
 crou TO. \mdp\ovra. 24, 47. 25, 14. Luke 11, 
 21. 12, 15. 33. 4.4. 14,33. 16,1. 19,8. 
 1 Cor. 13, 3. Heb. 10, 34. See Matth. 
 \ 570. Lob. ad Soph. Aj. p. 577. Schaef. ad 
 Greg. Cor. p. 139. Sept. for ris^a Gen. 
 31, 18. 36, 6. 7; cJWj Gen. 12/5 . 1 Chr. 
 28, 1. So Ceb. Tab. ?. Pol. 4. 3. 1. Xen. 
 Vect. 4. 22. 
 
 2. Simply, to be, i. q. / , as a logical 
 copula connecting the subject and predi 
 cate ; comp. in elpi II. a) With a Subsi 
 sts predicate; Luke 8, 41 KCU avros 
 
 rf/s <ruvay(oyr}s vTrfjpxf- 23, 50. Acts 2, 30 
 4, 34 ocroi yap KTrjropfS . . . VTrijpxw. 16, S. 
 20. 37. 17, 24. 29. 21, 20. 22, 3. 1 Cor. 11, 
 
 7. 12, 22. Gal. 1, 14. 2, 14. 2 Pet. 2, 19. 
 So Hdian. 6. 7. 2. b) With an adj. as 
 predic. Luke 9, 48. 11, 13 el ovt> v/uI$ 
 Troi^po! inrdpxoiTfs- 16, 14. Acts 3, 2. 4, 
 34 ov8e yap eVSeijj ris inrfipxff- 7, 55. 14, 
 
 8. 27, 12. Rom. 4, 19. 1 Cor. 7, 26. 2 Cor. 
 8, 17. 12, 16. James 2, 15. 2 Pet. 3, 11. 
 So Diod. Sic. 4. 11. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 1. 
 c) With a Participle of another verb as 
 predic. comp. / II. 6. So with Part. 
 Pass. perf. as Adj. Acts 19, 36. As form 
 ing a periphrasis for a finite tense of the. 
 same verb; Acts 8, 16 p.6voi> 8e fitfiaim- 
 0-fj.evoi inrrjpxov KT\. only they were baptized, 
 where ffv fnmcmwKos precedes. Comp. 
 Matth. J 559. Winer { 46. 8. So Dem. 305. 
 23 KOI TO. p.fv rf]s TroXecoy ovreor inrrjpxfv 
 (Xovra. d) With an adverb as predic. 
 Acts 1 7, 27 TOV 3e6 . . . ov paKpav . . . vndp- 
 Xovra. e) With a Prep, and its case as 
 predic. e. g. ev c. dat. where virdpxfi then 
 implies a being, remaining, living in any 
 state or place ; so e i> c. dat. of state or con 
 dition, Luke 7, 25 ot ev . . . rpv<f)fj inrdpxov- 
 Tts. 16, 23. Acts 5, 4. Phil. 2, 6. (Jos. Ant. 
 7. 15. 2.) tv c. dat. of place, Acts 10, 12. 
 Phil. 3, 20; np6s c. gen. Acts 27, 34 roC- 
 TO yap irpos Ttjs v/i. (rarrjpias inrdpx- 
 
 irrreiKQ), f. o>, (wo , etxco,) to give way 
 under, to give under, to yield, so pr. to cease 
 fighting and withdraw, c. dat. Hdian. 1.15. 
 16. Xen. Hell. 5. 4. 45. In N. T. to yield, 
 to submit to, c. dat. Heb. 13, 17. So Jos. de 
 Mace. 6 TG>V f]8ovcav Kpartiv, fJ.t]8f avrals irtrti- 
 KCIV. Hdian. 2. 13. 10. Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 33. 
 
 VTTCVCtVTlOS, a, ov, (VTTO, (vavrios,) over 
 against, opposite to, c. dat. Hes. Scut. 347. 
 Plato Thezet 176. a. In N. T. opposed, 
 contrary, adverse, pr. with the idea of stealth, 
 covertness, clandestineness ; Tittm. de Syn. 
 N. T. p. 157. With dat. Col. 2, 14 6 r,v 
 vrrfvavriov rjfiiv. Subst. ot vrrtvavrioi, op- 
 posers, adversaries, Heb. 10, 27. Sept. 6 \m. 
 for ^i* Ex. 23, 27 ; 1* Deut. 32, 27. So 
 JEl. V. H. 13. 40 vTTfvavriov n. Plut. Agesi. 
 24. Subst. Wisd. 18,18. Pol. 1. 11. 14. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 38. 
 
 mrep, a prep, governing the genitive and 
 accusative, with the primary signif. hyper- . 
 over, Lat. super, Germ. uber. 
 
 I. With the GENITIVE, pr. of place where, 
 i. e. the place over or above which any thing 
 is or moves, without immediate contact : 
 e. g. of rest over, Hdian. 5. 5. 20. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 4. 6 ra vntp ra>v opp-drav. Ol 
 
742 
 
 motion over, Hdian. 2. 6. 19. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 8. 9 6 T]\IOS VTrep f)p.S>v Kal T>V o~Tty<av no- 
 pevo/xei/oy. So a mountain or hill is said to 
 be over a place, to overhang, Hdot. 2. 105. 
 Xen. An. 1. 10. 12. Comp. Buttm. { 147. 
 n. 1. Kiihner$293. Matth. $582. Winer 
 551 ult. In N. T. only trop. 
 
 1. With the idea of protection, care, fa 
 vour, benefit, over, for, in behalf of, for the 
 sake of, i. e. in commodum alicujus ; pr. 
 as if bending over a person or thing, and 
 thus warding off what might fall upon and 
 harm it. a) Genr. John 17, 19 KM vnep 
 avTav e yo> ayid(o e pavToV. Acts 21,26 teas 
 ov Trpoo^i/e ^S^ VTrep evbs eKacrrov avTcav rj 
 Trpoo-cpopd. 2 Cor. 13, 8. Col. 1,7. 4, 12 
 TrdiroTe dya>i>idp.(vos virep v/xcof tv TOIS 
 irpoo-fvxals. Heb. 6, 20. 13, 17. al. So 
 JEl. V. H. 3. 25 v?rep njs E\\d8os tv KOI 
 KaXfos dy(ovio~dfjL(voi. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 21 
 fiaxovvrai vTrep TU>V Tp((p6vra>v. An. 7. 7. 
 21. Espec. after verbs or words implying 
 prayer for any one, comp. Engl. to pray 
 over any one, James 5, 14 ; so c. gen. of 
 pers. as 8eio-3ai VTre p TWOS Acts 8, 24 ; ev- 
 Xto-Sai James 5, 16 ; TTpoo-(vxfo~%ai Matt. 
 5, 44. Luke 6, 28. Col. 1,9. (2 Mace. 12, 
 44.) So 8f7j<ns vTre p TWOS Rom. 10, 1. 
 2 Cor. 9, 14. Phil. 1, 4. Eph. 6, 19 where 
 vTrep TLVOS and Trepi TWOS alternate, comp. 
 Winer $51 fin. irpoa-tvxrj Acts 12, 5. Rom. 
 15, 30. Genr. 1 Tim. 2, 1. 2 Seijo-eu, Trpoo- 
 ev^dr, eVrev^eis 1 , ei^aprrt as VTrep iravrcav 
 KT\. After verbs implying speaking, plead 
 ing, intercession for any one ; Acts 26, 1 
 VTrep creavroi! Xeyftv. Rom. 8, 26 TO 7rvtvp.a 
 vnfpevrvyxdvfi VTrep rjficav. V. 27. 34. Heb. 
 7, 25. 9, 24. (jEschin. Dial. Socr. 1. 8. 
 Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 13 T! dntlv VTrep r)p.>v.) 
 After verbs and nouns implying zeal, care, 
 effort for any person or thing; 1 Cor. 12, 
 25 dXXa TO avro VTre p aXX^Xeoi p.(pip.vu>o-i 
 So rj\os VTre p TWOS 2 Cor. 7, 7. 
 
 Col. 4, 13 ; o-Trov8^ 2 Cor. 7, 12. 8, 16 ; 76 
 Phil. 4, 10. (Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 12 
 ai vrre p TWOS-) So flvat VTrep 
 TWOS, to be for any one, to take his part ; 
 Rom. 8, 31 tl 6 3e6y VTrep f]p.5>v [eVn], TIS 
 Ka3 T)p.a>v ; Mark 9, 40. Luke 9, 50. Often 
 after verbs or words implying the suffering 
 of evil or death for, in behalf of any one ; 
 c. gen. of pers. as dcd3epa twai vTre p TWOS 
 Rom. 9, 3; diro%vT]o-Kfw John 11, 50. 51. 
 52. Rom. 5, 6 Xpioror . . vrrep due/Saw 
 a7re 3aj/. V. 7 bis. 8. 14, 15. 2 Cor. 5, 14. 
 15 bis. 1 Thess. 5, 10 ; aTroXeVSat John 18, 
 14; yeveo-Sat Savarov Heb. 2, 9; 8180 vat 
 f avrdi/ V. TO o-copa Luke 22, 19. Tit. 2, 14. 
 1 Tim. 2, 6 ; tKxvvew TO aip,a Luke 22, 20 ; 
 
 Sveiv TO Traa^a 1 Cor. 5, 7 ; KaTapa yiVe<r3ai 
 Gal. 3, 13 ; K\$V TO o-wpa 1 Cor. 11, 24; 
 TrapaStSwai e avTov V. TWO. Rom. 8, 32. Gal. 
 2, 20. Eph. 5, 2. 25 ; Trdo-x*" TI 1 Pet. 2, 
 21. 3, 18. 4, 1 ; Troieii* Twa apapTiav 2 Cor. 
 5^ 21 ; o-Tavpovo-3ai 1 Cor. 1, 13; TiStVai 
 TT)V tyvxr)v John 10, 11. 15. 13, 37. 38. 15, 
 13. 1 John 3, 16 bis. With gen. of thing, 
 John 6, 51. Rom. 16,4. 2 Cor. 12, 15. So 
 Ecclus. 29, 15. Xen. An. 7. 4. 9 aTroSwj- 
 (TKfiv VTre p TWOS. b) Closely allied to the 
 above is the sense for, instead of any one, 
 in place of; comp. Winer $ 51 fin. Philem. 
 13 wa VTrep crou pot SiaKovfi ev TO IS SfffpLols 
 TOV evayy. Pern. 2 Cor. 5, 20 bis, VTrep 
 Xpto-Tov ovv irpto-ptvofjuv, KT\. Eph. 6, 20. 
 Here some refer the class of passages cited 
 in lett. a, fin. So Palaeph. 41. 1. Eurip. 
 Alcest. 701. Pol. 21. 14. 9. Thuc. 7. 13. 
 
 2. Causal, for, i. q. because of, on account 
 of, propter, implying the ground, motive, 
 occasion of an action ; comp. Matth. Winer, 
 11. cc. John 11, 4 17 da^fVfia OVK eort Trpos 
 SdvaTov, dXX VTrep TTJS 86r]s TOV 3eov,_/br 
 the glory of God, in order to manifest his 
 glory. Acts 5, 41 VTrep TOV ovopaTos OVTOV, 
 for his name, for his honour. 9,16. 15,26, 
 21, 13. Rom. 1, 5. 15, 8. 1 Cor. 15, 3 Xp. 
 direSavev VTrep TU>V dp.apTiu>v f)pu>v. v. 29 bis. 
 2 Cor. 1,6. 12, 10. 19 VTrep TJJS vfiS>v OIKO- 
 Soptjs. [Gal. 1, 4.] Eph. 3, 1. 13. Phil. 1, 
 29 bis. Phil. 2, 13 VTre p TTJS ev&Waj, for 
 (by virtue of) his own good-pleasure, be 
 cause it is his will. Col. 1, 24 bis. 2 Thess. 
 
 I, 4. 5. Heb. 5, 1 bis. 3. 7, 27. 9. 7. 3 John 
 7. So after 8odeti/ Rom. 15, 9 ; tv^apt- 
 <rr(~w Rom. 1,8. 1 Cor. 10, 30. 2 Cor. 1, 
 
 II. Eph. 1, 16. 5, 20. Jos. Ant. 3. 8. 6 
 VTrep dpapTaSwi . Isocr. 301. c. Xen. An. 1. 
 7. 3 TTJS e Xev3ept as . . . VTrep rjs vfids e ya> 
 
 3. As marking an object of speech, 
 thought, hope, or the like, e. g. a) After 
 verbs of speaking and the like, over, upon, 
 about, concerning; comp. in Engl. to talk 
 over a matter, to boast over ; Matth. Winer, 
 
 11. cc. Rom. 9, 27 Ho-cua? 8e Kpafei vTrep 
 TOV lo-pa^X. 1 Cor. 4, 6. 2 Cor. 5, 1 2. 7, 
 4 TroXX^ p-oi Kavx jo i-s VTrep vp-oiv. V. 14. 8, 
 23. 24. 9, 2. 3. 12, 5. 8. So jEl. V. H. 
 
 12. 52. Pol. 1. 13. 7 lOTOpelv VTre p TWOS. 
 b) Also, as to, in respect to ; 2 COT. 1 , 6 17 
 e XTTif ijp-oJv fifftaia v?rep vp.eoi/. v. 8 dyvoe w 
 . . VTrep TT)S 3Xtyecos KTX. i. q. dyvoe w irtpi 
 TWOS 1 Cor. 12, 1. Phil. 1,7 TOUTO tppovtw 
 VTrep vp,wj>. 2 Thess. 2, 1 . So Jos. Ant. 
 15. 3. 6. Pol. 3. 4. 3. Dem. 554. 11 17 ov- 
 X?) vTrep Apicrrdpxov. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 12 
 
vrrepaipa) 
 
 743 
 
 II. With the ACCUSATIVE, pr. of place 
 whither, implying motion or direction over 
 or above a place ; Hdot. 4. 188 pinrf overt 
 vntp TOV 86pov. Eurip. Ion 46. Hdian. 7. 
 2. 13 virtp yaoTfpa TOV ITTTTOV ^pf^op.fvov. 
 Pol. 3. 84. 9. Also over, above, beyond, 
 Xen. An. 1.1.9 rots Qpa\ TO IS vrrep E\- 
 \T)(T7rovTov oiKoOat. Comp. Matth. } 582. 
 b. Kiihner $ 293. Winer 53. e. In N. T. 
 only trop. over, above ; comp. Winer 1. c. 
 
 1. As marking superiority in rank, digni 
 ty, worth, oi%r, above ; Matt. 10, 24 bis, OVK 
 eoTt pM%r)TT)s vntp TOV StSao-KoXoz/. KT\. Luke 
 6,40. Eph. 1,22 KefaXriv vrrtp ndvra. Phil. 
 2, 9 ovofia TO virep TTCLV ovopa. Philem. 16. 
 Luc. Vit. Auct. 2 -TIS vrrtp avSpanov tlvai 
 ftovXerai ; JEA. V. H. 12. 1. p. 159 AoTracn a 
 . . . virep Tas yvvaixas /SacriXtKwr KT\. 
 
 2. As marking excess beyond a certain 
 measure or standard, and spoken compara 
 tively, over, above, beyond, more than. a) 
 Genr. and simply ; Matt. 10, 37 bis, 6 (pi\5>v 
 iraWpa fj p.r)repa virep e p-e KT\. Acts 26, 13 
 
 I/Trip TT]V \dfJL1T pOTTJTa TOV TJ\IOV . . . (f>US. 
 
 2 Cor. 1, 8 et 8, 3 imtp 8vvaiJ.iv. Gal. 1, 14 
 irpofnoirrov ev T<a Iov8a io-p.<p vntp TroXXouj 
 rrX. Eph. 3, 20. Also v-rrtp o , above what, 
 more than what, 1 Cor. 4, 6. 10, 13. 2 Cor. 
 12, 6. Philem. 21. So Sept. 1 Sam. 15,22. 
 Ecclus. 7, 1. Dion. Hal. Ant. 5. 68. Epict. 
 Ench. 31 et 37 vnep o~vvap.iv. Xen. Mem. 
 4. 3. 8 TTCOS oi>x virip \6yov. b) Pleonast. 
 after comparatives ; e. g. after an Adj. in 
 the comparat. degree, Luke 16,8 cppovonu- 
 rtpoi vntp TOVS vlovs TOV (peorof. Heb. 4, 
 12 ; comp. in irapd HI. 4. c. With a verb, 
 2 Cor. 12, 13. yap earn/, o rjTTTft-r}Tt vntp 
 TUS \oiiras fKK\rjo-ias ; comp. Winer j 53. e. 
 So Sept. ov Kpdo-o-tov flfj.1 vntp TOVS Trare- 
 pas /iou, for Heb. "| comparat. 1 K. 19, 4 ; 
 also Judg. 11, 25. Ps. 19, 11. c) With 
 out case, where it then stands as an adverb, 
 i. q. more, much more ; comp. Buttm. } 147. 
 n. 5. Matth. 5 594. 1. Winer 5 54 ult. n. 2. 
 2 Cor. 11, 23 SiaKovoi XpioroC eiVt ; v-rrtp 
 eyw. See Kypke ad loc. For the adverb 
 ial forms vnep Xt ac, vrrtp (Kirfpio-(rov, see 
 the arts. vrrfpXiav, virfptKirtpio-o-ov. 
 
 NOTE. In composition vntp implies : a) 
 Motion or rest over, above, beyond a place 
 or thing ; as {nrfpaipa, vTrtpfiaivo), virtpf^o). 
 b) Protection, aid, for, in behalf of ; as vrrtp- 
 (vrvyxdvo). c) Excess, a surpassing, over, 
 above, more than, often with the idea of cen 
 sure ; as wrfp^oXXw, vrrfpfKTfivu, vrrfp- 
 irfpi<TO-(va>, also vn-tpav^dvu, vntpviKdv. 
 
 VTrepaipo), f. apS>, (alpa,) to lift or raise 
 up over, above, any thing, Luc. Amor. 54 
 (roi rf)V <f)i\o(ro(})ias ofppvv \nrep avrovs 
 
 TOVS tcpoTatpovs vir(pf)pKao-i. Plato Phaedr. 
 248. a. Intrans. to rise up over, e. g. of 
 water overflowing, Dem. 1274. 20 ; of per- 
 sons passing over walls, mountains, Pol. 2, 
 23. 1. Xen. Mag. Eq. 8. 3. In N. T. only 
 Mid. vTTfpaipop.ai, trop. to lift up one 
 self overmuch, to over-exalt oneself, to be 
 come elated, conceited, arrogant ; absol. 
 2 Cor. 12, 7 bis, iva M virepaipoiiai KT\. 
 With eVi Tiva 2 Thess. 2, 4. So 2 Mace. 5, 
 23. Anthol. Gr. IV. p. 11. no. 22. Aristot. 
 Virt. et Vit. 7. 5. 
 
 inrepaKfios, O v, 6, 17, adj. (0/^17,) beyond 
 the flower of life, past the proper age ; 1 Cor. 
 7, 36 tav jj vTrepoK/io? sc. i; TrapStVor. 
 
 Suid. VTTfpOKpMS VTTtpO paiJLWV TTJV UtpOV, 
 
 Found only in N. T. 
 
 irrrepdvo), adv. (VTT/P, ai/oi,) intens. over 
 above, Engl. up above, high above ; of place, 
 C. gen. Eph. 4, 10 virtpdvea rravratv oiipa- 
 vS>v. Absol. Heb. 9, 5. Sept. for nbsi=b 
 Ex. 8, 2 ; !^ia Ez. 11, 22. So c. gen. 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 7. 2. ^El. V. H. 9. 7 ; absol. 
 Luc. D. Deor. 4. 2. Trop. of rank, digni 
 ty, C. gen. Eph. 1,21 {rrrepdvo) irdoijs apxys 
 Sept. for TPb3J Deut. 26, 19. 28, 1. 
 
 VTTepav^dva), f. tfo-a, (avdva>,) in 
 tens. to overgrow, i. e. trop. to grow exceed 
 ingly, to increase greatly, in a good sense ; 
 intrans. 2 Thess. 1, 3 virfpavdvti 17 n-i 
 vuv. Andocid. 32. 23. 
 
 f. ^170-0^01, (/3aii/o>,) trans. 
 to let pass over, to transfer, c. ace. Xen. Eq. 
 7. 2. Intrans. to go or pass over, e. g. a 
 wall, mountains, c. ace. Sept. 2 Sam. 22, 
 30. Hdian. 3. 2. 11. Xen. An. 7.3.43. 
 Trop. to overgo, to overpass certain limits, 
 to transgress, c. ace. TO laov K.OI TO bixaiov 
 Diog. Laert. 8. 18 ; vopov Diod Sic. 17. 34. 
 ^Eschin. 58. 30. In N. T. trop. and absol. 
 to overgo, to go too far, to transgress, i. e. 
 to go beyond right, 1 Thess. 4, 6. 
 
 V7rep/3a\\6vTco?, adv. (vrrfpjSaXXooiO 
 exceedingly, above measure, 2 Cor. 11, 23. 
 Sept. Job 15, 11. Pol. 5. 43.8. Xen. 
 Ag. 1. 36. 
 
 u7re/3/3a\X<w, f. jSaXw, OaXXw,) to throw 
 or cast over, beyond, e. g. beyond a certain 
 goal or limit in ace. Horn. Od. 1 1 . 595 dXX 1 
 oTf /w XXot [Xoav] axpov {mfpfia\f(iv, i. 6. 
 Sisyphus. II. 23. 843 ; of a kettle, to throw 
 over, to boil over, Hdot. 1 . 59 ; intrans. to 
 throw oneself over a mountain or the like, 
 to pass over, Xen. An. 4. 4. 20. Also to 
 throw beyond or further than another, to 
 surpass in throwing a weapon, c. ace. of 
 pers. Horn. II. 23. 637 ; hence genr. to 
 
744 
 
 surpass, to exceed, to excel, Jos. Ant. 2. 2. 
 1 TrXouro) re yap {>7rep/3aXXf TOIIJ eVt^co- 
 ptW. Xen. Hell. 7. 3. 6. In N. T. only 
 Particip. pres. u7rep/3dXX&>j/, oucra, ov, 
 surpassing, exceeding, supereminent ; 2 
 Cor. 3, 10 fVfKfv TTJS VTrfpf3a\\ovo-rjs 86rjs- 
 
 9, 14 Sia T>)> v7rep/3aXXoucrai/ X^P iV TO ^ % f v- 
 Eph. 1,19. 2, 7. 3, 19. So 2 Mace. 4, 13. 
 Jos. Ant. 4. 2. 2. Hdian. 3. 10. 12. Xen. 
 Hi. 11. 2. 
 
 V7rep/3o\ij, qy, f], (i7rep/3dXXa>,) a *7ir0M>- 
 tng-, casting, shooting beyond, Soph. (Ed. 
 Tyr. 1 196 *a3 vneppoXav Togtvaras. Also, 
 a passing over, e. g. a river, mountain, Pol. 
 
 10. 1. 8. Xen. An. 1. 2. 25. In N. T. trop. 
 excess, excellence, supereminence ; 2 Cor. 
 4, 7 17 uTTfp/SoXr} TTJS cWd/iewy. 12, 7. So 
 Jos. B. J. 6. 7. 3 6Y inrep!3o\t)v to/non/roy. 
 Ant. 1. 13. 4. Dem. 97. 3. Pol. 3. 99. 4. 
 With a prep, adverbially: Ka3 vTrepfio- 
 \r)>>,\.q. exceedingly, supereminently, Rom. 
 7,13. 2 Cor. 1,8. Gal. 1, 13. 2 Cor. 4, 
 17 see below. Also i. q. Fr. par t excel 
 lence 1 Cor. 12, 31 Kai en *a3 vir(p[3o\T]v 
 68oV, a way par excellence, a far better way. 
 Comp. in KOTO. II. 1. d. y. (Luc. Luct. 12. 
 Pol. 3. 92. 10. Diod. Sic. 17. 47.) els 
 vTTfpfio\t]v id. exceedingly ; hence intens. 
 by Hebr. Ka3 t>7rep/3oAr}j> els VTrepfioXrjv, q. d. 
 exceeding exceedingly, in the highest possi 
 ble degree, 2 Cor. 4, 17 ; see Gesen. Lehrg. 
 p. 693. 2. So Ml V. H. 4. 20. ib. 12. 1. 
 p. 160, (Is i/7rep/3oXr)i Tifiav. 
 
 VTrepeya), 2 Cor. 11. 23 Lachm. for 
 
 Rec. {/Trip fya>. 
 
 V7repei8ov, ( f ?Sw,) as aor. 2 to vnepo- 
 pdw, to see or look out over, e. g. TTJV SdXao-- 
 o-ai/ Hdot. 7. 36 fin. In N. T. trop. to 
 overlook, not to regard, i. q. to bear with, 
 not to punish, c. ace. Acts 17, 30 xpoVouf 
 TTJS dyvoias vnfpiSutv 6 3edy. Sept. for 
 fc^ri Lev. 20, 4. So Jos. Ant. 2. 6. 9 [8] 
 ro TTfpt pixpuv {rjfjLKafjLaTOiv d<pf1vm TOVS 
 n\T]p.iJL{\T)cravTas, enaivoit rfntyKf rols vrrfpi- 
 Sovo-i. Also to slight, Tob. 4, 3. Ml V. H. 
 3. 22 ; to despise, Xen. Ag. 8. 4. 
 
 vTrepe/ceiva, adv. (eWoy, Buttm. 5 1 15. 
 n. 5.) pr. beyond those parts ; hence be 
 yond, over beyond; and with the art. ra 
 vrrfpeKfiva vficav sc. p.ept], the parts beyond 
 you, 2 Cor. 10, 16; comp. Buttm. 5 125. 6, 
 7. Bus Ellips. ed. Schaef. p. 289. Thorn. 
 Mag. p. 336 cntKfiva pfjropfs \tyov<riv 
 iintptKfiva 8f, jjn ivoi 01 (rvp<paK(s. 
 
 VTrepeKTrepicra-ov, adv. (imep tie. Trepto-- 
 croC,) intens. more than abundantly, comp. 
 in irtpuro-os no. 2 ; i. e. superabundantly, 
 very exceedingly, above all measure ; Eph. 
 
 3, 20 vTrep iravra 7701770-01 v 
 
 Z)t> aiTovp.f^a. 1 Thess. 3, 10. 5,13. Sept. 
 
 for Chald. n^tTi Dan. 3, 23. 
 
 VTrepeKTrepura-o)?, adv. i. q. vT 
 piaa-ov, 1 Thess. 5, 13 Lachm. 
 
 VTrepeKTelvca, f. fV S}, (ecrV<,) to stretch 
 out ovennuch, beyond measure ; trop. r 
 ace. of pers. 2 Cor. 10, 14 ov vne pturt ivo- 
 p.tv eavTovs we stretch not ourselves out too 
 far, we do not go beyond our measure. 
 i. e. TO p.fTpov TOV KO.VOVOS in v. 13. Luc. 
 Eunuch. 2 KfKpayorfs Kal VTrfpfKreivopevoi, 
 Schol. vTrfp(pi\oi>fiKovvT(s , but some edi 
 tions read vT 
 
 Pass. (fK X vvo>, (KX^J 
 to be poured out over, as from a vessel, i. q. 
 to run over, to over/low, absol. Luke 6, 38 
 p-trpov virfpfKxvv6fj.fj>ov. Sept. for 
 Joel 2, 24. Sept. vnfpfKXfofiai for 
 Prov. 5, 16 ; also ^El. H. An. 12. 41. 
 
 t, (fvrvy X d- 
 j/w,) to intercede for any one, in his behalf; 
 c. vwfp TIVOS, Rom. 8, 26. Comp. Winer 
 56. 2. a. 
 
 f. fa, (? XO)) ) to hold over, 
 e. g. any thing over the fire, Horn. II. 2, 
 246 ; also for protection, TTJV x e P" Tlvl v - 
 TWOS Anth. Gr. I. p. 193. Jos. Ant. 6. 2. 2. 
 Pol. 15. 31. 11. Intrans. pr. to hold oneself 
 over or beyond, comp. ^<o no. 5 ; hence to 
 be over, to be prominent, to jut out over or 
 beyond, Sept. Ex. 26, 13. 1 K. 8, 8. ^El 
 V. H. 9. 13. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 8. In N. T 
 trop. 
 
 1. to hold oneself above, to be superior, 
 better, to surpass, to excel ; see in f^< no. 
 5. E. g. c. gen. of pers. also c. dat. ol 
 manner, Phil. 2, 3 aXXijXous f)yovp.fi>ot. vntp- 
 fXQvras (avrcov. Matth. { 358. Buttm. 5 132. 
 10. b. So Hdian. 4. 15. 11. Diod. Sic. 17. 
 77. Xen. Venat. 1. 11. With ace. Phil. 
 4, 7 TJ (Iprjvrj TOV 3eoi) 17 VTrfpe^oucra Traira 
 vovv, comp. Matth. J 358 note. So Diod. Sic. 
 3. 22. Plato Phaedo 50. p. 102. d. Xen. 
 Hell. 6. 1. 4. p. 236. Part. TO vTrfpe^o* 
 as Subst. excellence, supereminence, i. q 
 inrfpoxr], Phil. 3, 8 8ia TO vrrepexov TTJS yvoa 
 crews. See Matth. $ 570. Lob. ad Soph. Aj 
 p. 277. Schaef. ad Greg. Cor. p. 139. 
 
 2. Of rank, dignity, Part. inrfpexa 
 ovo-a, ov, superior, higher ; Rom. 13,1 
 fov(riais V7r(ptxov<rais. 1 Pet. 2, 13. 
 Wisd. 6, 5. Pol. 28. 4. 9. Hdian. 4. 9. 4. 
 
 V7repr)(f>avia, as, f], (v7rtpr)<pavos q. V.) 
 arrogance, haughtiness, pride, Pol. 6. 1 rf 5. 
 Dem. 577. 16. Xen. Cyr. 5. 2. 27. In N. 
 T. from the Heb. arrogance, pride, with the 
 
745 
 
 accessory idea of impiety, ungodliness, Mark 
 7, 22. Sept. for nix? p s . 31, 24. Is. 16, 6; 
 lixa Ps. 59, 13. Prov. 8, 13; THt Deut. 
 17, 12. So Tob. 4, 17. 1 Mace. 1, 23. 
 Jos. Ant 1. 11. 1. 
 
 V7Tpij<pavo<? t ov, 6, q, adj. (inrtp, (pai- 
 v<a,) appearing over, conspicuous above 
 other persons or things ; so pr. Xen. Mag. 
 Eq. 5. 7 rovf pi* op3u TO. 86para fx.fiv, TOVS 
 8 aXXovr ranfiva KOI p.fj inrfprjfpava (others 
 vrrtp<pavT}). Elsewhere trop. conspicuous, 
 distinguished, splendid, as oiKias ra>v no\- 
 \ajvinrfpr](pavo>Tpas Dem. 175. 10; usually 
 of persons, with censure, arrogant, haughty, 
 proud, JE\. V. H. 12. 63. Diod. Sic. 4. 13. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 25. In N. T. from the 
 Heb. arrogant, proud, with the accessory 
 idea of contemning God, impiety, wicked 
 ness, Luke 1,51 difcncopTricrtv inrfprj(pdvovs 
 Siavoia KapBias, see in art. Sidvoia no. 3. 
 Rom. 1, 30. 2 Tim. 3, 2 James 4, 6. 1 Pet. 
 5, 5. Sept. for -IK? Ps. 94, 2. 140, 6 ; It 
 Ps. 119, 21 ; on Job 38, 15. Is. 2, 12. So 
 Wisd. 14, 6. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 17. 
 
 inrep\iav, adv. (Xi av,) overmuch, very 
 exceedingly, supereminently ; c. art. 6 inrfp- 
 \iav adj. the most eminent, the very chief, 
 Ttitv vjT(p\iav drrooroXuv 2 Cor. 11,5. 12, 
 11 ; comp. Buttm. 125. 6. On such com 
 pounds, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 45-48 ; as 
 vrrtpdyav 2 Mace. 10, 4 ; inrtpfv Dem. 228. 
 
 17. Xen. Hi. 6. 9. 
 
 VTrepvitcaa), , f. ^o-<o, (i/iKa,) to more 
 than conquer, absol. Rom. 8, 37. Leo 
 Tact. 14. 25 VLKO. KOI pr) vnepviKa. Socr. 
 Hist. Ecc. 3. 21 VLKO.V KaXov, vntpviicav 8e 
 
 (TTlffilOVOV. 
 
 VTTepoy/co?, ov, 6, 17, adj. (oy*os,) over- 
 swollen, much swollen, overgrown, JE\. V. 
 H. 13. 1. Xen. Hell. 5. 4. 58. In N. T. 
 trop. over-tumid, over-swelling, boastful, 
 with the idea of insolent pride, impiety ; so 
 of language, 2 Pet. 2, 18 virtpoyKa yap pa- 
 TatonjTos (p^fyyoptvoi. Jude 16 TO oro/ia 
 avrcav XaXfi imtpayKa. Sept. for 3113 Ex. 
 
 18, 22; ntf]5 Ex. 18,26; nisbB? Dan. 11, 
 36. So of style Plut. de Lib. educ. 9; 
 comp. vrrtpoyKov <j)povrjp.a Plut. Lucull. 21. 
 
 j, j t (vTrepe^o), a prom 
 nence, eminence, e. g. a mound, hill, Pol. 3. 
 104. 3 ; a peak, summit of a mountain, ib. 
 
 10. 31. 1. In N. T. trop. 
 
 1. prominence, eminence, e. g. of station, 
 authority, power ; 1 Tim. 2, 2 (ia(Ti\(uv u 
 ndvru>i> ru>v tv imtpo^fj ovra>t>. 2 Mac. 3, 
 
 11. Pol. 5. 41. 3. Diod. Sic. 4. 41. Plato 
 Legg. 711. d. 
 
 2. Genr. superiority, excellence ; 1 Cor. 2, 
 
 1 *ea3 \mfpoxriv \oyov. Pol. 5. 41. 1. Plato 
 Def. 416. 
 
 to abound over, much more, to superabound ; 
 in a comparative sense, absol. Rom. 5, 20 
 of oe tir\(6va<Tfv fj dp,apTi a, vircpTr(pi<r<rtv- 
 o-fv 17 xaptr, comp. v. 15. Without compar 
 ison, Pass, depon. to superabound overmuch, 
 greatly, exceedingly, in any thing ; c. dat. 
 
 2 Cor. 7, 4 imfpirfpi<T(Ttvop.a.i rrj \apa, i. e. 
 I am exceeding joyful. Not found in the 
 classics. 
 
 , adv. (VepKro-ir,) more 
 than abundantly, very exceedingly, beyond 
 all measure; Sma^ \ty. Mark 7, 37 \nrtp- 
 
 V7rep7T\Ovd&, f. d, (n-Xeovafw,) to 
 superabound, to abound exceedingly, intrans. 
 1 Tim. 1, 14. Psalt. Salom. 5, 19. 
 
 VTrepir^oo), ,, f. &><ro>, (i\^o &),) intens. 
 to make high above, to raise high aloft; 
 only trop. to highly exalt, over all, c. ace. 
 Phil. 2, 9 3t6s OVTOV uTrepityoxre. Sept. 
 Pass, for nb?3 p s . 97, 9 ; comp. Sept. Ps. 
 37, 35. So in praise, Sept. Dan. 4, 34. 
 Song of 3 Childr. 28. 29. 
 
 V7Tp(f>pOVe(i), >, f. ^o-w, (vnepfppuv, 
 (ppr)t>,) to think overmuch of oneself, to be 
 high-minded, i. q. to be proud, arrogant, 
 disdainful, intrans. Rom. 12, 3 /xi) vntptypo- 
 vdv nap o 8d (ppovtlv. Jos. Ant. 1. 11. 1 
 ot 2o8o/ilrat TrXovrw . . . virfpfypovovvrts. 
 Pol. 6. 18. 7. ^Eschyl. Agam. 10. 39. 
 
 fTTepaX)?, a, ov, (virep, as narpuof from 
 Trarrjp,) over, upper, e. g. of a chamber, 
 Plut. Pelop. 35 6 8( SaXa^or eV w *a3f vSttv 
 (lu^fcrav, v7T(p<pos rjv. Philo de Vit. Mos. 2. 
 p. 662 oiKrjfjLara eVtVefia Kcil vTrepwa, in the 
 ark. Lur,. Asin. 45. Oftener and in N. T. 
 Neut. TO vtrepnov, an upper chamber, the 
 upper part of a house, i. e. a sort of guest- 
 chamber not in common use, where the 
 Hebrews received company and held feasts, 
 and where at other times they retired for 
 prayer and meditation, i. q. dvdyaiov q. v. 
 In Greek houses it occupied the upper 
 story ; among the Hebrews it seems some 
 times to have been on or connected with the 
 flat roof of their dwellings, Heb. f*b5 Sept. 
 virtpfov 1 K. 17, 19. 22. 2 K. 4. 10; comp. 
 Acts 10, 9. See Jowett s Chr. Researches 
 in the Mediterranean, Lond. 1824. p. 67 
 where he describes the chief room in the 
 houses of Haivali (opposite Lesbos) as in 
 the upper or third story, secluded, spacious, 
 and commodious, " higher and larger than 
 
746 
 
 V7TO 
 
 those below, having two projecting win 
 dows, and the whole floor so much extended 
 in front beyond the lower part of the build 
 ing, that the projecting windows considera 
 bly overhang the street ;" comp. Acts 20, 8 
 sq. where the tVepwov at Troas is also / 
 rip rpto-reyco. For a similar arrangement 
 of the houses in Palestine, see Bibl. Res. in 
 Palest. III. p. 26, 417. In N. T. Acts 1, 
 13 tit TO virep<oot> ov T/o~av KaTafievovres KT\. 
 9, 37. 39. 20, 8. So Jos. Vit. $ 30. Luc. 
 Tox. 61. Lys. 93. 46. 
 
 i/7re^<, f. {xf)tga>, (f^m,) 1 hold under, 
 e. g. the hand, Horn. II. 7. 188; a vessel, 
 Hdot. 2. 151. Plut. M. Anton. 9. Trop. to 
 hold out under, i. e. towards or before any 
 one, e. g. ovas, to give ear, Simonid. Fr. 7. 
 1 6 ; \6yov, fvSvvas, to render account, Pol. 
 18. 35. 3. Plut. J. Caes. 33 ; 8i ji/ Tivi, to 
 render satisfaction, to make atonement, 
 Soph. CEd. Tyr. 552. Hence in N. T. 
 trop. SIKTJV v TT f x f " to pay or suffer pu 
 nishment ; Jude 7 TroXe is . . . Trvpbs alnviov 
 SiKTjv vTTxovo-ai. So 2 Mace. 4, 48. Hdian. 
 1. 8. 12. Pol. 12. 8. 5 HavaTov tcpio-iv. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 1. 8 TOVTOV 8iKT]v vne^fiv. 
 
 U7T77009, ov, 6, 17, adj. (inraKova), ) listen 
 ing, obedient, c. dat. Acts 7, 39 co OVK ^3e- 
 \r)(rav virfjKooi yeveVSat. 2 Cor. 2, 9 tls 
 rrdvra. Absol. Phil. 2, 8. Jos. Ant. 2. 4. 3 
 \nrrjKoos yivop.ai. c. dat. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 22 ; 
 absol. Plut. Pelop. 29. Xen. Mem. 3. 4. 9. 
 
 inrr/perecOj tS, f. 170-00, (virr)peTT]s, ) pr. to 
 serve as an virrjpfTTjs, e. g. as a rower, ^El. 
 H. An. 13. 2. In N. T. genr. to act for 
 any one, to minister, to serve ; c. dat. Acts 
 13, 36 Aa/3!8 p.ev yap I8ia ytvfa VTTT)pTT)cras. 
 20, 34 TOIS xpe/ais p-ou . . . VTrrjperrjcrav at 
 Xf tpts avTai. 24, 23. So Wisd. 16, 21. 24. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 70. Xen. Mem. 2. 4. 7. 
 
 ov, 6, (VTTO, (pir^s 
 pr. an under-rawer, genr. a common sailor, 
 hand, as distinguished from 01 vavTai ship- 
 men, seamen, and 01 n/3aTcu mariners, 
 Dem. 1209. 11, 14 in some editions, where 
 others read iirrjpfa-ia collect, id. Comp. 
 also Dem. 1208. 20. 1214. 23. 1216. 13. 
 Pol. 1. 25. 3. H;nce genr. a hand, agent, 
 minister, attendant, who does service under 
 the direction of any one ; in N. T. spoken 
 1. Of those who wait on magistrates or 
 public bodies and execute their decrees, a 
 lictor, officer, like the modern constable, bea 
 dle, e. g. as the attendant on a judge, Matt. 
 5, 25, i. q. Trpaierwp in Luke 12, 58. So of 
 the attendants or beadles of the Sanhedrim, 
 Matt. 26, 58. Mark 14, 54. 65. John 7, 32. 
 45. 46. 18, 3. 12. 18. 22. 19, 6. Acts 5, 
 
 22, 26. Genr. Jos. 1 5. 8. 4. Luc. Pise. 45. 
 Xen. Hell. 2. 3. 54. ib. 3. 1. 27. Of the 
 Roman lictors, Dion. Hal. Ant. 2. 8. ib. 5. 2. 
 See Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 178sq. Diet, of 
 Antt. art. Lictor. 
 
 2. Of the attendant, minister, in a syna 
 gogue, who handed the volume to the reader, 
 and returned it to its place, Luke 4, 20. 
 
 3. Genr. a minister, attendant, associate 
 in any work, John 18, 36. Acts 13, 5 fi^ov 
 8e Kal l<advirr)v VTnjptrrjv. So of a minister 
 of the word or of Christ, Luke 1, 2. Acts 
 26. 16. 1 Cor. 4, 1. Wisd. 6, 4. Jos. Ant. 
 3. 1. 4 TT)i> vnripfTrjv 3eov sc. Moses. Dem. 
 1285. 2 virrjpfTai Kal trvvtpyol ovrot KXeo- 
 
 eVouj. Xen. An. 1. 9. 27. 
 
 VTTVOS, ov, 6, sleep, Matt. 1, 24. Luke 9, 
 32. John 11, 13. Acts 20, 9 bis. Sept. for 
 nv Gen. 28, 16. So Hdian. 2. 1. 12. Xen. 
 Hi. 6. 9. Trop. of spiritual sleep, torpor, 
 sloth, Rom. 13, 11. Comp. Psalt. Sal. 3, 1 
 Ivari iinvois ^1^17, KOI OVK fi/\oyfls TOV KV- 
 piov. 
 
 VTTO, a prep, governing the genitive and 
 accusative ; in the Greek classics ako the 
 dative ; with the primary signification under. 
 
 I. With the GENITIVE, pr. of place 
 whence, i. e. the place/rom under which any 
 thing comes forth, Horn. Od. 9 141 pVei xp^vrj 
 VTTO crTTfiovs. Hes. Theog. 669 Zevy . . . vno 
 X%ov6s r/Kf (pooxrSe. Also of loosing or 
 freeing from under any thing ; II. 8. 543 
 ITTTTOVS p.tv \vcrav VTTO vyov. 9. 248 tpvt- 
 <r3<u VTTO Tpcowi/. ib. 21 . 553. Also of place 
 where, under which, like VTTO c. dat. Plato 
 Legg. 728. a, o T tnl yf/s Kal vrro yjjs \P V ~ 
 aos. Trop. after passive and neuter verbs, 
 to mark the subject or agent from under 
 whose hand, power, agency, causation, the 
 action of the verb proceeds, in Engl./rom, 
 by, through ; comp. Buttm. 134. 1,2. 147. 
 n. 1. Matth. 592. Winer 5 51. p. 442 ; see 
 also in dno note 2. In this sense only is 
 VTTO c. gen. found in N. T. 
 
 1 . With Passive verbs, by, through. from ; 
 c. gen. of pers. Matt. 1, 22 TO prfiev VTTO TOV 
 Kvpiov. 2, 16 lvtTrai)fer) imo roof p-aycov. 3, 
 6 /3a7m ojTO {ITT OVTOV. 4, 1 dvrjx^ 7 ] v^b 
 TOV Trvcvp-aros TreipacrSiJi ai VTTO TOV 8ia@6- 
 \ov. 5, 13. Mark 1, 13. 2, 3. Luke 5, 15. 
 14, 8. John 10, 14. Acts 4, 36. 23, 27 bis. 
 Rom. 15, 15. 1 Cor. 7, 25. 2 Cor. 1, 16. 
 Gal. 1, 11. al. ssepiss. With gen. collect. 
 Luke 21,20. Acts 15,4 TrpoTrepxpSeVrey inrb 
 T;)S tKK\nvias. 2 Cor. 8, 19. With gen. of 
 thing, Matt. 8, 24 -wore TO TrXoIof KoXvTTTf- 
 o-3tu VTTO TOJV Kvp.aTa>v. 14, 24. Luke 7, 24 
 ied\ap.ov inrb dvtfjiov <Ta\v6p.evov. 8, 14. 
 John 8, 9. Acts 2, 24. 27, 41. Rom. 12, 
 
747 
 
 21. 1 Cor. 10, 9. 2 Cor. 5, 4. James 3, 4. 
 6. 2 Pet. 1, 17 (pwvrjs (Vf\^5(io~r)s O.VT& VTTO 
 rfjs p.fyah.oTrpcrrovs 86^ns, i. e. a voice being 
 sent forth unto him from (by) the radiant 
 glory, by the divine Majesty, from God him 
 self. 2 Pet. 2, 7. 17. Jude 12. Rev. 6, 13. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 8, 15. Hdian. 2. 7. 9. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 5. 1. ib. 4. 4. 4 ; c. gen. of thing, 
 JE\. V. H. 13. 1 init. pa&v papwoptvav 
 inro TOV ydXaicros- Hdian. 4. 15. 14. Xen. 
 An. 1. 5. 5. 
 
 2. With Neuter verbs having a passive 
 power, by, through, from ; e. g. after yivo- 
 fiat and flvm signifying to be made, done ; 
 SO yivop-ai, Luke 9, 7 rot yivop.(va VTT avTov. 
 13, 17. 23, 8. Acts 12, 5. 20, 3. 26, 6. 
 Eph. 5, 12 ; fivai Acts 23, 30 ; impl. 
 2 Cor. 2, 6. (So yiv. Xen. An. 7. 1. 30 ; 
 impl. Xen. Hi. 1. 28. ib. 7. 6.) Also TTO- 
 vxeiv TI vno TWOS, Matt. 17, 12. Mark 5, 
 26. 1 Thess. 2, 14. So Hdian. 7. 12. 6. 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 36. Con v. 1. 9. In like 
 manner after some transitive verbs, where 
 a passive sense is implied ; e. g. \ap.ftdvfiv 
 n vno TIVOS to receive by or through, i. e. to 
 have inflicted by any one, 2 Cor. 11, 24 ; 
 V7rop.fv(iv TI vno TIVOS id. Heb. 12, 3 ; UTTO- 
 KTflvai . . . vno r<av Srjpicov, to kill by beasts, 
 i. e. to cause to be killed by beats. Rev. 6, 
 8. So Hdian. 7. 10. 9 yvovrts [ravra] inro 
 TTJS <f>T)M f - Comp. Buttm. } 147. n. 1. -f 
 
 II. With the ACCUSATIVE, pr. of place 
 whither, i. e. of motion or direction under 
 a place ; but also of place whr<\ i. e. of 
 rest under a place. Buttm. 1. c. Matth. \ 593. 
 Winer \ 5:<. k. 
 
 1. Of Place whither, after verbs of motion 
 or direction, under, beneath ; e. g. Tfttvai 
 \ii\vov inrb TOV p.68iov Matt. 5, 15. Mark 4, 
 21. Luke 11, 33 ; vno TTJV K\IVTJV Mark 4, 
 21 ; VTTO TTJV o~T(yr]v do~f pxt& Sai Matt. 8. 8. 
 Luke 7, 6 ; ttmrofaytat inro TCIS nrtpvyas 
 Matt. 23, 37. Luke 1 3, 34 ; also Mark 4, 32. 
 James 2, 3. So Palaph. 10. 2 \v%vovs xa- 
 Ta<j)pa>v inro TTJV yfjv. Diod. Sic. 13. 51. 
 Xen. An. 1. 10. 14. Trop. of what is 
 brought under the power of any one, e. g. 
 VTTO Tar n68as TIVOS Rom. 1 6, 20. 1 Cor. 1 5, 
 25. 27. Eph. 1, 22 ; comp. in novs b. Rom. 
 7, 14, see in ninpdo-Kco. Gal. 3, 22. 23, see 
 in <TvyK\eiu>. James 5, 12, see in ninrv no. 
 5. 1 1 et. 5, 6, see in Tantivou no. 2. b. So 
 JE\. V. H. 6. 11. Isocr. p. 142. b, ando-rjs TTJS 
 EXXdSoj vno TTJV no\iv f]po)v vnon((rovcrr)s. 
 
 2. Of Place where, after verbs implying 
 a being or remaining under a place ; e. g. 
 tivai, John 1,49 ovra inro TTJV O-VK.TJV. 1 Cor. 
 10, 1 ; impl. Luke 17, 24 bis. Acts 2, 5 
 TV inro TOV ovpavov. 4, 12. Rom. 3, 13. 
 
 Col. 1,23. Tude 6 imo 6<pov TtTrjjrjKfv. So 
 Sept. 1 K. 19, 5. Palaeph. 10. 1 ra VTTO -f]v. 
 Hdian. 2. 1. 9. Dem. 33. 31 .Trop. of what 
 is under the power or authority of any per 
 son or thing ; genr. Matt. 8, 9 bi^, *iv?Spa>Tr6s 
 elfj.i imo (ovcriav, (\u>v i>n ffjMVTov trrpart- 
 a>ras. Luke 7, 8 bis. Gal. 3. 25. 4, 2. 
 (1 Esdr. 3, 1. Hdian. 3. 14. 17. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 5. 3.) With ace. of thing, implying state 
 or condition under any thing ; 1 Tim. 6, 1 
 VTTO vyov SovXoi. So VTTO vop.ov Rom. 6, 
 14. 15. 1 Cor. 9, 20 ter. Gal. 4, 4. 5. 21. 
 5, 18 , VTTO x^P lv R m - 6, 14. 15 ; ixf) ap.ap- 
 Ttav Rom. 3, 9 ; inro Kardpav Gal. 3, 10 ; 
 VTTO TCI orot^ela TOV Koo~p.ov Gal. 4, 3. So 
 Hdian. 1. 4. 20. 
 
 3. Of Time when, under, at, during, Lai. 
 sub ; once Acts 5, 21 inro TOV opZpov. Jos. 
 Ant. 14. 15. 5 init. imo Se TOV OVTOV %p6vov. 
 JE\. V. H. 14. 27. Thuc. 1. 100; into vii- 
 KTO. Sept. Jon. 4, 10. Thuc. 7. 22 ; imo n^ 
 (a%ivr)v Pol. 53. 4. Comp. Matth. $ 593. 
 
 NOTE. In composition imo implies : a) 
 Place, i. e. motion or rest under, beneath ; 
 as v7ro/3aXX<a, imobfoi, imoTrodiov. b) Sub 
 jection, dependence, the being under any 
 person or thing ; as vnavBpos, vTroraoxrw. 
 c) The being behind, after, as vTrcXein-w, 
 imo[j.(V(it , comp. inrfnrtiv to speak after : to 
 swijoin, Dem. 797. 19 ; also into c. ace. be 
 hind, Hdot. 1. 12. Pol. 6. 31. 1. Lat. sub- 
 sequi. d) Something done or happening 
 under-hand, covertly, by stealth, unperceiv- 
 ed, without noise or notice ; also a little, 
 somewhat, by degrees;* like Lat. sub; as 
 vnovofd), vrronvfct), comp. in imavrdd). inrtv- 
 avrlos. Lat. subirascor, subridere. See Vi- 
 ger. p. 672, marg. 
 
 VTTO/SaXXoj. f. /3a\5>, OdXXa),) to cast 
 or throw under, e. g. under foot, Xen. CEc. 
 18, 5 ; under a person, X?TO Horn. Od. 10. 
 353. Xen. Cyr. 5. 5. 7 ; to put or thrust 
 under, e. g. a child to another mother, to 
 substitute, Dem. 563. 5. Xen. Venat. 7. 3 ; 
 to thrust under one s notice, to suggest, 
 Hdian. 7. 10. 13. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 55. In 
 N. T. of persons, to thrust under, to put 
 forward by collusion, to suborn, c. ace. 
 Acts 6, 11. So Aristid. de Parathegm. p. 
 618. App. B. Civ. 1. 27. p. 663 inte^rftn- 
 crav KaTTjyopoi. So vrro/SXjjros Jos. B. J. 
 5. 10. 4. 
 
 o, , wroypw, pr. a 
 
 Writing-copy, inroypap.fj.ol TratSiKoi, Clem. 
 Alex, see in Passow s. v. In N. T. trop. 
 a copy, pattern, example, for imitation, 
 1 Pet. 2, 21. So 2 Mace. 2, 28. Clem. Ep. 
 I. ad Corinth, p. 40 [naCXop 
 inroypap.[i6v. 
 
748 
 
 , aroy, TO, (vrro8(iKvvp.i,) pr. 
 what is shown, i. e. 
 
 1. a pattern, example, as set before any 
 one under his eyes ; either for imitation, 
 John 13, 15 vTr6otiyp.a eSaxca /i>, ira KT\. 
 James 5, 10; or for warning, Heb. 4, 11 
 
 2 Pet. 2, 6. 2 Mace. 6, 28. 31. Hdian. 8. 
 8. 4. Pol. 3. 17. 8. The earlier Attic writ 
 ers used Trapd8tiyp.a, Phryn. et Lob. p. 12. 
 2. Melon, a copy, likeness, taken from an 
 original ; Heb. 8, 5. 9, 23 viro8fiyp.aTa T&V 
 tv Toils ovpavols, i. q. T<J avrirvna in v. 24. 
 Aquil. for Heb. msMj Deut. 4, 17. 
 
 VTroSeiKVVfAl, f. a>. (Scixi/u/LU,) to S/IOMJ 
 
 or pozr?< ou^, pr. underhand, by stealth, pri 
 vately, i. q. to give to understand, to signify, 
 to let be known, Sept. Y^fl Estn - 2 > 10 - 
 Hdot. 1. 189. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 13; hence 
 genr. to show, to let see, Ecclus. 49, 8 opa- 
 riv 86r)s f)v vnt8(i(v avrta. Andocid. 19. 
 11. Diod. Sic. 13. 12. In N. T. trop. to 
 s ww, by words or example, to teach, to sig 
 nify, with ace. and dat. foil, by on, Acts 
 20, 35 Travra vnf8ei^a vp.1v OTI KT\. With 
 dat. of pers. c. infin. Matt. 3, 7 et Luke 3, 
 7 T/S vTre8fi(-(v iip.lv (pvydv KT\. With dat. 
 foil, by an indirect clause, Luke 6, 47. 12. 
 
 5. Acts 9, 16. Sept. for rnirt 2 Chr. 15, 
 3. So Ecclus. 48, 25. Jos . Ant. 2. 3. 1. 
 Pol. 3. 6. 1. Plut. Marcell. 20. 
 
 ofjiai, f. /*ai, Mid. depon. (Se- 
 ,) to receive to oneself, pr. as if placing 
 the hands or arms^under, comp. Engl. un- 
 rfertal.:?; hence genr. to receive favourably, 
 kindly, to admit e. g. ei^aj Hes. Theog. 
 419. Usually and in N. T. of guests, to 
 receive hospitably, to welcome, to entertain ; 
 C. ace. Luke 10, 38 Mdp3a vireoegaro avTov 
 (Is TOV OIKOV avTrjs- 19, 6 vn(8eaTo avTov 
 Xaipuv. Acts 17, 7. James 2, 25. So Tob. 
 7, 8. Palajph. 5. 1. 1E\. V. H. 4. 9. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 3. 13. 
 
 i/TTOoeco, f. 170-0), (8ta>,) to bind under, 
 as sandals under the feet, to put on sandals, 
 slippers, to shoe. Plut. Amator. 16. p. 488, 
 inroSrjcras TTJV yvvdiKa Kpr)Trlo~i. In N. T. 
 only Mid. vTro8fop.ai, to bind under or 
 put on one s own sandals ; Acts 12, 8 vno- 
 &T}<rai TO. (rav8d\id crov, Buttm. 135. 4. 
 Pass. perf. as Mid. to haie bound on one s 
 sandals, to be shod ; c. ace. Mark 6, 9 vno- 
 o(8(p.(vovs o-av8d\ia. Buttm. } 136. 3; comp. 
 134. G, 7. With ace. of the part, Eph. 6, 
 15 11770877 cra/ievo i TOVS ir68as. Buttm. 135. 
 
 6. Sc c. ace. of sandal Hdian. 4. 8. 5. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 6. 6 ; ace. of part JE\. V. H. 1 . 18. 
 Thuc. 3. 22. 
 
 O.TOS, TO, (wroStw,) a sandal, 
 pr. what is bound under the foot, a sole of 
 wood or hide bound on with thongs, i. q. 
 cravodXiov q. v. In later usage vn6or)p.a KOI- 
 \ov, and also {nr68r]p,a simply, is put for the 
 Roman calceus or shoe which covered the 
 whole foot ; so Jos. B. J. 6. 1. 8, of the thick 
 nailed shoes of the Roman soldiers, caliga ; 
 see the Commentators on Aristoph. Plut. 
 983. Passovv s. v. Diet, of Antt. art. Cal 
 ceus. Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 419 sq. Genr. 
 Matt. 10,10. Luke 10,4. 15,22 vjroS^ara 
 (Is TOVS TroSaj. 22, 35. Acts 7, 33 ACo-ov TO 
 V7r6dr]p.a TO>V noBaiv crov, loose (put off) the 
 sandals of thy feet, quoted from Ex. 3, 5 
 where Sept. for ^?? | as also Deut. 25, 9. 
 Josh. 5, 15. Is. 5, 27. So Hdian. 5. 5. 21. 
 JE.L V. H. 7. 1 1. Plut. Conjug. Prac. 30 bis. 
 Plato Alcib. 1. 128. a. Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 5. 
 Hence TO v7ro&rjp.aTa TIVOS ftaa-Tacrai, to 
 bear the sandals of any one Matt. 3,11; also 
 XiJcrai TOP lp.dvra TWV v7ro8r)p,aTa>v TIVOS, to 
 unbind one s sandals, Mark 1 , 7. Luke 3, 16. 
 John 1,27. Acts 13,25 ; expressions imply 
 ing inferiority, since this was usually done 
 only by menial servants or slaves, for their 
 masters. See Arr. Epict. 3. 26. 1. Luc. 
 Herod. 5, quoted in o-avodXiov. Plut. Symp. 
 7. 8. 4 TOIS TO viro8r]p.aTa K.op.iovo-i rrai8a- 
 piois. Diog. Laert. 6. 44 irpos TOV vno TOV 
 OIKTOV {i7ro8ovp.(vov. Tcrent. Heauton. 1.1. 
 72 domum revertor . . . accurrenl servi, 
 soccos detrahent. Sueton.Vitell. 2. Comp. 
 Talm. Babyl. Kiddushin f. 22. 2, Quomodo 
 emitur servus ? Solvit ementi calceum, por- 
 tat post eum quae ei necessaria ad balneum, 
 exuit eum, . . . induit calceos ac a. terra le- 
 vat. Cetuboth f. 90. 1, Omnia opera qua? 
 servus prsestat hero, etiam discipulus praes- 
 tat praeceptori, prater solutionem calcei 
 ejus. See Wetstein N. T. I. p. 266. 
 Lightfoot Hor. Heb. ad Matt."3, 11. Diet, of 
 Antt. art. Ccena. 
 
 VTToSucos, ov, 6, 77, adj. (Siicr),) pr. un 
 der process ; hence, liable to punishment, 
 condemned, guilty ; Rom. 3. 19 Iva vnoSiKos 
 yfvrjTcu Trds 6 Koo-p,os TW 3ec3, i. e. before or 
 in the sight of God, comp. Matth. 5 388. a. 
 Luc. Phalar. alt. 13. Dem. 518. 3 vnoSi- 
 KOS eo-TQ) T<B TraSoWt. Plato Legg. 846. b. 
 
 VTToQjyiOV, ov, TO, (yiro^vyios, fvydr,) a 
 least for the yoke, a draught-animal, beast of 
 burden, genr. Jos. B. J. 3. 5. 2. Hdian. 1. 
 12. 2. Xen. An. 1. 3. 1. In N. T. spec, an 
 ass, Matt. 21, 5 quoted from Zech. 9, 9 
 where Sept. for lian . 2 Pet. 2, 16, in allu 
 sion to Num. 22, 28 sq. where Heb. "pPX, 
 Sept. ij ovos. So Diod. Sic. 19. 20 virotv 
 
749 
 
 yittv IT\TJ^OS, opp. innovs. Plato Legg. 936. 
 6, inrovyioi> fj ITTTTOS. 
 
 VTro&VWfjil, f. coo-&>, (feoi/i/v/it,) to un- 
 dergird, as of persons, Jo gird under the 
 breast, VTTO TOVS pao~Tovs 2 Mace. 3, 19. 
 /El. V. H. 10. 22. In N. T. of a ship, to 
 undergird, i. e. to gird around the whole 
 body of the ship horizontally from stem to 
 stern with cables, in order to strengthen it 
 against the waves, Acts 27, 17. Such 
 cables, viroa>paTa, made a part of the tack 
 ling of a Grecian vessel ; see Bo3ckh Att. 
 Seewesen p. 133-138. Diet, of Antt. art. 
 Navis II. 1. p. 789. So genr. Pol. 27. 3. 
 3 KCU \JL vavs inrofavvvtiv. Comp. A pp. 
 B. Civ. 5. 91 K T&V fivvaTuv 8iafavwp.evovs 
 TCI (TKa<pr). Plato Rep. 616. c, TCI VTTOO>- 
 pciTa TOJV Tpirjputv. 
 
 UTTO/carw, adv. (KCITCD.) Engl. under 
 neath, i. e. below, under, spoken of place, 
 c. gen. Mark 6, 1 1 . 7,28 {rrroKaro) TT/S rpa- 
 iTffas. Luke 8, 16. John 1, 51 vTroKtmo rrjs 
 OTK^S. [Matt. 22, 24.] Rev. 5, 3. 13. 6,9. 
 12,1. Trop. virorafTueiv vnoKara TO>V iro- 
 8S>v TWOS Heb. 2, 8, see in irovs b. Sept. for 
 nnn EZ. 24, 5-, Tinnn i K. 6, 6. Pol. 3. 
 55. 2. Diod. Sic. 1. 72. Plato Conv. 222. e. 
 
 VTTOKptvofJ,aL, Mid. depon. (xpi i/co,) pr. 
 to give judgment under a cause or matter ; 
 hence genr. lo answer, to reply, used by the 
 earliest writers instead of the later Attic 
 anoKpivopai, Horn. II. 7. 407. Hdot. 1. 78. 
 Thuc. 7. 44. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 1 ; to inter 
 pret dreams, in answer to inquiries, Horn. 
 Od. 19. 535, 555. Artemid. 1. 9. Then in 
 Attic usage, to answer upon the stage, to 
 speak in dialogue, to play, to act, Luc. de 
 Merc. cond. 30. JEl V. H. 14. 40. Diod. 
 Sic. 1 3. 97 vnoxpivfo- Sai Tpaycabiav TLvpiiri- 
 bov <boivio-<ras- Hence genr. and in N. T. 
 to play a part, to act the hypocrite, to dissem 
 ble, to feign, c. ace. et inf. Luke 20, 20 
 VTTOK.pivop,evovs fovrovs SiKaiovs fivai. So 
 2 Mace. 6, 21. 24. Epict. Ench. 17. Pol. 2. 
 49. 7. Dem. 878. 3. 
 
 U7ro#pt<T49) fas. fj, (vnoKpivop.ai, ) an 
 answer, response, e. g. of an oracle Hdot. 
 
 1. 90, 116. Thorn. Mag. p. 874 viroKplvopai 
 KOI TO anoKpivop.ai, KOI viroKpio-is TO OVTO. 
 Genr. stage-playing, acting, the histrionic 
 art, Luc. Fiscal. 32. Artemid. 3. 13. Anth. 
 Gr. IV. p. 284 ult. TpayiKrjs f?8or vnoK.pl- 
 *<ar. In N. T. hypocrisy, dissimulation, 
 Matt. 23, 28. Mark 12, 15 6 8e dbas OVTUV 
 rfjv vrroKpia-iv. Luke 12, 1. Gal. 2, 13. 
 1 Tim. 4, 2. 1 Pet 2, 1. So 2 Mace. 6, 25. 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 6. 10. Luc. Somn. 17. Pol. 35. 
 
 2. 13. 
 
 ov, 6, (vnoKpivop.ai, ) a stage* 
 player, actor, Luc. Piscat. 33. JE\. V. H. 
 3. 30. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 9. In N. T. a hy 
 pocrite, dissembler, in respect to religion, 
 piety, Matt. 6, 2. 5. 16. 7, 5. 15, 7. 16, 3. 
 22, 18. 23, 13. 14. 15. 23. 25. 27. 29. 24, 
 51. Mark 7, 6. Luke 6, 42. [11,44.] 12, 
 56. 13, 15. Sept. for t]3n Job 34, 30. 36, 
 13. So Aquil. et Theod. Job 15, 34. 20, 5. 
 Not found in this sense in classic writers ; 
 Eustath. in II. rj, p. 564. 8, inroKpiTr)s -rrapa 
 TOIS iKrTfpoytvecri prfTopcriv 6 /JLTJ ft v/fu^S 
 \-ya>v T] TrpaTTW, fJLi]8f OTTfp (ppovtl. 
 
 V7ro\afj.ftdva), f. X^o/wu, (Aa^d,) 
 to take up by getting under a person or 
 thing, as the dolphin did Arion, c. ace. Hdot. 
 1. 24. Plato Rep. 453. d. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. lo take or receive up, c. ace. Acts 1, 9 
 V((pt\r] vTTfXaftfv avTov d?ro TUV tj^aXpuv. 
 Plut. Demost. 29. Plato Conv. 212. d. 
 Comp. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 48 fin. 
 
 2. to take up, to receice, under one s pro 
 tection, 3 John 8 Lachm. Xen. An. 1.1.7. 
 
 3. Trop. to lake up the discourse, to con 
 tinue ; hence to answer, to reply ; absol. 
 Luke 10, 30 v7roAa/3o>i Se 6 lijo-ouj fine. 
 Sept. for f\5S O ft in Job, c. 2, 4. 4, 1. 6, 1. 
 Dan. 3,9. ^El. V. H. 14. 8 vTro\afia>v e^iy. 
 Pol. 15. 8. 1. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 29. 
 
 4. Trop. lo lake up in thought, to sup 
 pose, to think; absol. Acts 2, 15 ov yap. as 
 ifids inroXanftdvfTf KT\. With ort, Luke 
 7, 43. Sept. Job 25, 3 c. ort. Jos. Ant. 
 12. 2. 3 init. Dem. 623. 5. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 4. 
 
 l/TroXet/i^ta, aror, TO, (ujroAf /TTO),) a rem 
 nant, remainder, Rom. 9, 27 Lachm. for Rec. 
 . Theophr. C. PI. 1. 11. 3. 
 
 ), f. ^a>, (A7ra>,) to leave be 
 hind, remaining, see in vno note lett. c ; 
 Pass, to be left behind, to remain ; Rom. 1 1 , 
 3 Kayo> vTTfXfiffirjv paws, quoted from 1 K. 
 19, 10. 14, where Sept. for vnSn, nrris. 
 Sept. for "iXttJ? Ex. 10, 19. Judg. 7, 3. 
 Jos. Ant. 6. 4. 2. Luc. Mort. Peregr. 14. 
 Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 27. 
 
 VTroXtjviov, ov, TO, (\rjv6s.) the under-vat 
 of a wine-press, into which the juice of the 
 grapes flowed ; see in \rjv6s no. 2 Mark 12,1. 
 Sept. for 2h Is. 16,10.Joel3,13.Hagg.2,17. 
 
 V7TO\ifnrdvca, a lengthened form for 
 vTToAfiVo), found only in pres. and impf. 
 Buttm. J 112. 11 ; to leaie behind, c. ace 
 1 Pet. 2, 21 vtTO\ijj.irav(av vTroypap.p.oi . So 
 to fail, Dion. Hal. Ant. 1. 23. Act. Thorn. 
 J 43 KaTa\inTrdva>. 
 
 irrronevca, f. (V v, (/neVw,) 1. Intrans. 
 to stay or remain behind, after others are 
 
750 
 
 VTTOVOia 
 
 gone ; see in \m6 note lett. c. Luke 2, 43 
 iirfftfivtv irjcrovs 6 rrais fv lfpov(rd^r]p,. 
 Acts 17, 14 fK.fi. Jos. Ant. 6. 5. 2. ^El. 
 V. H. 5. 5 avTos vne/Jifivf OIKOI. Dem. 671. 
 1 5 tv Tols Tfi^f cri. Xen. Conv. 9. 7. 
 
 2. Trans, to remain under the approach 
 or presence of any person or thing, to await, 
 Tob. 5, 7 vrcop.fi.v6v fj.f. Jos. Ant. 5. 2. 2. 
 Xen. An. 4. 1. 21 ; espec. a hostile attack, 
 to await, to sustain, Jos. Ant. 7. 4. 1 VTTO- 
 Htvftv Toitv 7roXe/u coi> (^dXayyes. Hdian. 5. 3. 
 26. Xen. An. 6. 5. 26. Hence in N. T. 
 trop. a) to bear up under, to be patient 
 under, to endure, to suffer; c. ace. 1 Cor. 
 13, 7 irdvra vTfop.fvfi. 2 Tim. 2, 10. Heb. 
 10, 32 Tro\\rjv cfeXycriv inrfp-fivaTf. 12, 2. 7. 
 v. 3, comp. in VTTO I. no. 2. James 1, 12. 
 Sept. for ^3^3 Mai. 3, 2. So Diod. Sic. 1. 
 3 TOV Ttovov. JEl. V. H. 1. 34. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 1. 17. b) Absol. or neut. to endure, to 
 be patient, to suffer ; e. g. iras 8e 6 vTrop.fi- 
 vas tls Tf\os Matt. 10, 22. 24, 13. Mark 
 13, 13. 2 Tim. 2, 12. James 5, 11. 1 Pet. 
 2, 20 bis ; also with dat. of condition, Rom. 
 12, 12 Tfl 3Xn|m vrrop-tvovrfs. Sept. for 
 Dan. 12, 12. So Jos. Ant. 12. 3. 1 
 
 Luc. Prometh. 21 vjro/xei/e ovv KapTfp>s. 
 Thuc. 1. 76. 
 
 ), f. v 
 
 O-K<U.) to remind, pr. privately, by hints or 
 suggestions, to suggest ; hence genr. 
 
 1 . Act. to put in mind of, to bring to re 
 membrance, in various constructions ; so 
 with two ace. of pers. and thing, John 14, 
 26 vrrop.vf]crti vp,as irdvra. Winer 30. 7. 
 Matth. 5 347. n. 2; comp. Buttm. 131. 5. 
 (Thuc. 7. 64. Xen. Hi. 1. 3.) With ace. 
 of pers. and irtpl TOVTCBI/, 2 Pet. 1, 12; 
 comp. Matth. 347. n. 1. With ace. of 
 pers. c. inf. Tit. 3, 1 ; or c. ori Jude 5. (So 
 c. inf. Plut. Mor. T. II. p. 28 ; c. on Ml 
 V. H. 4. 17.) With ace. of thing, e. g. 
 precepts, duties, 2 Tim. 2, 14 ravra vrro- 
 p.ip.vr)(TKf. Also evil deeds, with the idea 
 of censure, reprehension, 3 John 10 vrro- 
 p.vt]<ra> avTov TO. epya. Comp. Matth. 347. 
 n. 2. So Hdian. 6. 2. 11. Dem. 316. 10 
 vTrop,ip.vT)<rKfiv Tas I8las tvepyecrias p.i<pov 
 8fiv op.oiov e crri raj 6vti8[fiv. 
 
 2. Mid. to call to mind, to recollect, to 
 remember, c. gen. Luke 22, 61 vTrf/ij^o-Sr; o 
 HfTpos TOV Xoyou TOV Kvplov. Comp. Matth. 
 ^347. b Buttm. \ 132. 10. d. Luc. Catapl. 
 4. M, V. H. 5. 19. Plato Phil. 47. e. 
 
 f7ro/Al^cri9, ear. q,(ii7j-o/it/iMjovc<B,) aput- 
 ting in mind, a reminding, remembrance. 
 
 1. Trans lv vrron.vt)<rfi by putting in 
 
 mind, by way of remembrance, 2 Pet. 1,13. 
 3, 1. 2 Mace. 6, 16. Thuc. 4. 95. 
 
 2. Intrans. recollection, remembrance, 
 so vn6fjLvrj<nv \ap.ftavfiv, to take remem 
 brance of, i. q. to remember, 2 Tim. 1,5; 
 comp. v. 4. So vTrd/ii/Tjcru TroieurSai Act. 
 Thorn. J 38. Genr. Wisd. 16, 11. Pol. 1. 1. 
 2. Plato Legg. 732. d. 
 
 VTTO/AOVr), fjs, T), (i7ro/xVco,) a remain 
 ing behind, abode, Sept. 1 Chr. 29, 15. 
 Dion. Hal. Ant. 1. 44. In N. T, trop. 
 
 1. a bearing up under, patient endu 
 rance, comp. in vnop.fva> no. 2 ; so c. gen. 
 of thing borne, as evils, persecutions, 2 Cor. 
 1,6 iv vrropovfj TU>V avTatv TraS^dro)* . 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 2. 1 trovatv {mop-ovr). Pol. 4. 51. 
 
 1 VTT. TOV iroXtp-ov. Diod. Sic. 5. 34. Plato 
 Def. 412. c. 
 
 2. Genr. endurance, patience, constancy, 
 under suffering, in faith and duty ; absol. 
 Luke 8, 15 KapTrofpopovviv tv vrrop.ovfj. 
 Rom. 8, 25. 2Cor. 6,4. 12, 12. Col. 1, 11. 
 Heb. 10, 36. 12, 1. James 1, 3. 4. 2 Pet. 
 
 1, 6 bis. Rev. 2, 3. With gen. of that in 
 or as to which one perseveres, Rom. 2, 7 
 Ka3* v nop.ovrjv epyov dya3ov. 1 Thess. 1, 3 
 TTJS inrofiovrjs TTJS f\rri8os. Winer } 30. 2. 
 With gen. of pers. Luke 21, 19 eV 777 vrro- 
 jj-ovfi i>p.a>i> KTT)<rao-%e TUS ^u^ay vp.u>v. 
 
 2 Thess. 1, 4. 3, 5. James 5, 11. Rev. 1, 
 9. 2,2. 19. 13,10. 14,12. 3, 10 TOV \ayo* 
 TTJS i rrofjLovris p.ov, i. e. the precept which 
 requires constancy for and in Christ, that 
 which belongs to Christians, comp. Rev. 1, 
 9. So genr. Psalt. Salom. 2, 40 xpjjoror 
 
 6 KVplOS Tolg fTTlKO^OVUfVOlS OVTOV (V V7TO- 
 
 p.ovfj. Diod. Sic. 11.9 TTJV eV TOIS KivSvvois 
 vTrop,ovT]v. Spec, patience as a quality of 
 mind, the bearing of evils and suffering 
 with tranquil mind, Rom. 5, 3 TJ 3Xn/aj 
 virop.ovr)v KaT(pydfTai. v. 4. Rom. 15, 4. 5 
 6 3e6f Tys VTTOIJ.OVTJS, i. e. who bestows pa 
 tience. 1 Tim. 6, 11. 2 Tim. 3, 10. Tit. 
 
 2, 2. So Sept. for patient hope, Heb. ! " 1 5p ? 
 Ezra 10, 2; MJpFl p s . 9, 19; comp. Ec- 
 clus. 2, 13. 16, 13. 
 
 vTrovoea), &>, f. 170-0), (i/oe w,) Lat. suspi- 
 cere, suspectare, i. q. to suspect, to surmise, 
 Hdot. 9. 99. Diod. Sic. 20. 42. Thuc. 7. 
 73. In N. T. i. q. to conjecture, to sup 
 pose, to deem, c. ace. impl. Acts 25, 18 &v 
 [TOVTWV a] vnevoovv tya>. With ace. et inf. 
 Acts 13, 25. 27, 27. Judith 14, 14. Plut. 
 de Garrul. c. 1 4 ov\ imovoovvros, dXX tl86- 
 TOS f(paivfTo. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 20. 
 
 VTTOVOMi as, f), (vTroi/oeo),) suspicion. 
 surmise, 1 Tim. 6, 4 vnovoiai Trovrjpai. 
 Ecclus. 3, 24. Pol. 5. 15. 1. Dem. 1178. 2 
 
VTTOT M^O) 
 
 751 
 
 ), Dor. for inroirttfa, (irufa,) 
 to press under, to suppress, to oppress, in 
 Mss. for vTrwTTiafa), Luke 18, 5. 1 Cor. 9, 
 27. So inroirieCot Clem. Alex. Paed. 3. 16. 
 Plut. de Fac. in orb. Lun. 5 ; alii vnunid- 
 (iv. 
 
 inroTT\eci), f. eutro/iat (TrXew,) to sail un 
 der, i. e. under the lee or shelter of an 
 island or shore ; c. ace. depending on viro 
 in com posit. Acts 27, 4. 7 iiTmrAevo-a/iei/ 
 TTJV Kprjrrjv. Matth. } 426. 3. Buttm. $ 147. 
 n. 8, 9. Winer $ 56. 2, 3. Anthol. Pal. IX. 
 296. 
 
 UTTOTTi/eo), f. eucro), (nW ,) to iZow g?n- 
 Zy, so/Wy, of the wind, Acts 27, 13. Comp. 
 in inro note, lett d. 
 
 VTTOTToSlOV, ov, TO, (vrro7ro 8iof, Trot/r,) a 
 footstool ; James 2, 3 jcdSoi/ &8f UTTO TO VTTO- 
 TroSioi /iou. Anthropopathically of God, 
 whose footstool is said to be the earth, TO 
 vTTOTroSioi/ TU>V TroSoJi aiiTou Matt. 5, 35 et 
 Acts 7, 49 ; comp. Is. 66, 1 where Sept. 
 and O"in. For the phrase Ti3fW TOIT 
 f^povs VTTOTTOO IOV TUIV TroScoc TIVOS, quoted 
 from Ps. 110, 1 where Sept. for D lrl, see 
 in irovs b. Matt. 22, 44. Mark 12, 36. 
 Luke 20, 43. Acts 2, 35. Heb. 1,13. 10, 
 13. Sept. genr. for cnn p s . 99, 5. Lam. 
 2, 1; ^33 2 Chr. 9, 18. Sext. Empir. 
 adv. Math. 1. 246. Chares ap. Athen. 12. 
 9. Athen. 5. p. 192. e. Luc. Hist, conscr. 27. 
 A late word, found in no early writer ; 
 comp. Sturz de Dial. Alex. p. 199. 
 
 ecus, 17, (VCO-TTJ/U, any 
 thing set under, a foundation, substructure, 
 Sept. Ez. 43, 1 1 VTT. TOV OIKOV. Diod. Sic. 
 1. 66 VTT. TOV rd<pov. 13. 82. Then of any 
 thinf which subsides, sediment, Pol. 34. 9. 
 10; atjuaToj vTTooratrtr K.a.1 l\vs Galen, de 
 Temper. 2. 5. Tom. III. p. 66. f ; also lees, 
 dregs, excrement, TJ tv ir&a> TOV o tvov {nro- 
 0-rao-i.s, tvtopa, Pacat. in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
 73. Trop. foundation, origin, beginning, 
 Jos. c. Ap. 1.1. Diod. Sic. 1. 3 VTT. TTJS tV:- 
 /JoX/js. ib. 15.70; purpose begun, under 
 taking, Diod. Sic. 16. 32, 33. In N. T. 
 
 1. Melon, well-founded trust, firm expec 
 tation, confidence, pr. the foundation or 
 ground of trust and confidence. Heb. 3, 
 14 TTJV dpxyv TTJS vTrocrrdo fcor, i. e. our first 
 hope, trust, confidence, in Christ, i. q. TTJV 
 irpa>TT)v iricmv 1 Tim. 5, 12 ; comp. Heb. 
 10, 35. So Heb. 11,1 eon 8 nicms (\TTI- 
 op,(V(t>v vrr6(TTa(Tis, faith is confidence as 
 to things hoped for ; so Engl. Vers. marg. 
 comp. below in no. 3. 2 Cor. 9. 4 KOTOL- 
 
 fi Tavrrj, 
 
 in later edit. comp. in no. 2. So Sept. for 
 nbnin p s . 39,8 ; nypn Ruth 1,12. Ez. 19,5. 
 
 2. Melon, of that quality which leads one 
 to stand under, endure, or undertake any 
 thing, firmness, boldness, confidence ; 2 Cor. 
 11,17 tv Tavrr) TTJ virotrrdcrfi T^S (cau^7j(rea)f, 
 in this boldness of boasting, this confident 
 boasting. So 2 Cor. 9, 4 Rec. comp in no. 
 1. Jos. Ant. 18. 1. 6. Diod. Sic. Tom. 
 VI. p. 37 17 Se tv ftacrdvois vnocrTacris TJJS 
 ^vxrjs. Pol. 4. 50. 10. ib. 6. 55. 2 vTroo-Ta- 
 cris KOI ToX/ia. 
 
 3. Trop. hypostasis, Lat. substantia, i. e. 
 what really exists under any appearance, 
 substance, reality, essence, being ; Heb. 1, 3 
 \apaKTrjp TTJS VTroarrdcrfvs CLVTOV (3eoi)), i. e. 
 the express image or counterpart of God s 
 essence or being, of God himself. So 
 Heb. 11, 1, according to Chrysostom and 
 others; better as above in no. 1. VVisd. 
 16, 21. Test. XII Patr. p. 633 Trda-a r, vrro- 
 trracris TO>V (nr\ayxv5>v. Artemid. 3. 14 
 
 HTJ. Aristot. de Mund. 4. 21. Luc. Parasit. 
 27. Diod. Sic. 1. 38 ve(povs vTroorao-ftr, real 
 clouds. 
 
 uTTOo-reXXa), f. ( \s>, Co-reXXw,) to send 
 or draw wider, as a sail, to contract, to furl, 
 Pind. Isth. 2. 59. In N. T. c. eavro i/ and 
 Mid. to draw oneself back, pr. under cover, 
 out of sight ; hence genr. to shrink or draw 
 back, to withdraw oneself, from timidity, not 
 openly and boldly ; Gal. 2,12 {weWf XXe 
 favrov. Heb. 10, 38 tav vno(TTfi\rjTai, 
 quoted from Sept. Hab. 2, 4 where Heb. 
 VaS. (Pol. 1. 16. 10 6 & /3ao-iXeis vntoTfi- 
 Xar tavTov VTTO TTJV Pa>p.al(t>v crKfTnjv. Mid. 
 Jos. B. J. 3. 8. 1.) With ace. of thing, pr. 
 to draw back as to any thing, i. q. to keep 
 back, to suppress, from timidity, clandes 
 tinely ; Acls 20, 20 ov8(v virt<rrd\dfjiT)v 
 TU>V crvfjiCptpovruv, TOV (J.TI dcayyflXai KTX. 
 With ovdtv impl. v. 27. So Jos. B. J. 1. 
 20. 1 fjirjSfv TTJS dXr/^fias vTreoTeiXd^iei/of 
 dvriKpvs (irr(. Diod. Sic. 13. 70. Dem. 54, 
 ult. Plato Apol. Socr. 10. p. 24. a, ovTf p.f- 
 ya ovre crpiKpov dTTOKpv^dp.(Vos ey&) Xeyco, 
 ov8e vTrooTfiXd/iei os 1 . 
 
 VTTO(rr6\rj, fjs, ^, (u7roo-TfXX<u,) a shrink 
 ing or drawing back, from timidity, clan 
 destinely, Heb. 10, 39; comp. v. 38. 
 Meton. timidity, Jos. Ant. 2. 14. 12. Hesych. 
 ia, (pvyf/. 
 
 ), f. i^a>, (o-rpe^w,) to turn 
 behind, back, to turn about, c. ace. e. g. 
 mrovs Horn. II. 5. 581, comp. 505 ; see in 
 {mo note, lett. c. In N. T. intrans. or c. 
 tavrov impl. to turn back, to return, either 
 
V7TOCTTp(i)VVV(i) 
 
 752 
 
 from a short distance, or from a journey. 
 Absol. Mark 14, 40 i/Trocrrpe^ras fvptv av- 
 roiis KT\. Luke 2, 43. 17, 18. 23, 48. 56. 
 Acts 8, 28 rjv 6e vnoo-Tpecpvv, was returning. 
 Sept. for asitf Josh. 2, 23. So Jos. Ant. 
 11. 2. 2. Palaeph. 1. 6. Xen. An. 6. 6. 38. 
 With adjuncts of place, etc. fls c. ace. 
 Luke 1, 56. 2, 39. 45. 4, 14. Gal. 1, 17; 
 tls c. ace. of condition, fls 8ia<p3opai> Acts 
 13, 34. (Sept. Gen. 50, 14. JEl V. H. 3. 
 29; fls of condition ib. 3. 18.) OTTO c. gen. 
 Luke 4, 1. Heb. 7, 1 ; K c. gen. Acts 12, 
 25 ; 8 id c. gen. Acts 20, 3. So Sept. for 
 Mtf, c. OTTO Gen. 50, 14 ; Ruth 1, 6. + 
 
 vTroarpcovvvw v. -oWtyu, f. VTTO- 
 o-rpaxro), (crrpa>vvvu>,} to straw underneath, to 
 spread under; c. ace. Luke 19, 36. Sept. 
 for siszn Is. 58, 5. Hdian. 4. 2. 3. Xen. 
 Cyr.Vs. 16. 
 
 VTTOTayr), JJj, ^, (virordo~o-<t>,) subordina 
 tion, suly ection, submission ; 2 Cor. 9,13 
 see in 6/ioXoyt a. Gal. 2, 5 ovde irpos tipav 
 tiap.fv Trj vnoTayrj, i. e. by or as to subjec 
 tion, so as to submit to them. 1 Tim. 2, 11. 
 3. 4. Ignat. ad Eph. } 2. In the Greek 
 Grammarians vTrorayij is the subordinate 
 mode, or Subjunctive. 
 
 i>7rOTacrcr&) v. -rrco, f. , (racro-w.) 
 
 1. to arrange or pwi under, to subordi 
 nate, to make sulyect; also in Pass, to ie 
 subjected, to be subject, subordinate; con 
 strued c. ace. et dat. expr. or impl. Rom. 8, 
 20 bis, Tfi yap p.aTaioTrjTL fj KTICTIS virfrdyr) 
 . . . 8id TOV vnord^avra. 1 Cor. 14, 32, see 
 in irvfvp.a III. D. 2. d. 1 Cor. 14, 34. comp. 
 Eph. 5, 24. 1 Cor. 15, 27ter. 28ter, comp. 
 irnrovs. Eph. 1,22. 5,24. Phil. 3,21. Heb. 
 
 2, 5. 8 ter. 1 Pet. 3, 22. Sept. for mtt> 
 Ps. 8, 7, comp. in TTOVS ; "i^fi Ps. 47, 4 ; 
 b^lBBri Dan. 11, 39. 2 Mace, 8, 9. 22. 
 Hdiah. 7. 2. 20. Pass. Jos. Ant. 1. 19. 8. 
 So ot vTTOTao-o-oufvoi, soldiers Pol. 3. 13. 8; 
 subjects ib. 3. 18. 3. Diod. Sic. 1. 55. 
 
 2. Mid. to submit oneself, to be sulyect, to 
 be obedient, c. dat. Luke 2, 51 rjv vnoracra-o- 
 Hfvos avTols. 10, 17. 20. Rom. 8, 7. 10, 3 
 rf) 8tKaioo-vvrj TOV SeoO ov^ vnfTdyrjcrav. 13, 
 1. 5. 1 Cor. l 6, 16. Eph. 5,21. 22 al yvval- 
 Kfs, TOIS I8iois di>8pdo-iv VTroracro-eo Se. Col. 
 
 3, 18. Tit. 2, 5. 9. 3, 1. Heb. 12, 9. James 
 
 4, 7. 1 Pet. 2, 13. 18. 3, 1. 5. 5, 5 bis. 
 Sept. for ea^ Ps. 62, 6, comp. v. 2. Pa 
 laeph. 2. 6. Arr. Epict. 4. 12. 11. Diod. Sic. 
 16. 46 6 Hpo>Tay6pas f /covering virorayels 
 rots TLfpo~ais. 
 
 WOTlSty/U, f. Sijtroo, (Ti 37/it,) to set or 
 put under, to lay under, e. g. a prop, sup 
 port, Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 12. In N. T. 
 
 1. Pr. c. ace. Tt3eVcu TOV rpa^jjXoi/, to lay 
 down one s neck under the sword or axe of 
 the executioner, i. q. to hazard one s life, 
 Rom. 16, 4. ^El. V. H. 10. 16 vnotlfav 
 TT/V K((f>a\r;v, sc. for one to strike. Of 
 those who place their necks under a yoke, 
 Arr. Diss. Epict. 4. 1. 77; trop. Ecclus. 
 51, 26. 
 
 2. Mid. irrori Sf/zai, to bring under the 
 mind or notice of any one, to suggest, to put 
 in mind of, as a teacher or otherwise ; c. 
 ace. et dat. 1 Tim. 4, 6. Jos. B. J. 2. 8. 7. 
 Pol. 1. 22. 3. Plato Euthyphr. 11. p. 9. d, 
 
 (TKOTTfl, (I TOVTO V7To3e p.fVOS , OVTOi paiTTa p.( 
 
 8i8dets o {/TTfcr^ov. 
 
 VTTorpe^O), aor. 2 vn^papov, (rpe xw,) 
 to run under, e. g. under a tree, Plut. Mor. 
 11. p. 37, TOIS TrXardvois, als VTrorpe^ovcri 
 Xfip-a6p.(voi. In N. T. of a ship, to run 
 under the lee or shelter of an island or 
 coast; c. ace. as in vTTOTrXeco. Acts 27, 16 
 VT)<riov 6V Tt vTro8pafi6vT(s. So c. dat. Plut. 
 Mor. II. p. 191. Comp. Wetst. N. T. H. 
 p. 642. 
 
 V7TOTV7ra)(Ti$, ear, ^, (VTTOT-VTTO CO,) a 
 form, sketch, outline, an imperfect delinea 
 tion, trop. 2 Tim. 1, 13 VTT. vyiaivovrav \6- 
 ycav. So Poll. On. 7. 128 a>ypd(p<,)v epya 
 . . . TO. 8e p-fpr/ TTJS T^vr/s vTTOTvnuo-is . . . 
 aKiav vTroTviraxrao- Sai. Plotin. Ennead. 6. 
 37. Strabo 2. p. 182. b, dvaXafiovTes drro 
 TTJS 7rp<aTT]s VTrorvrrcocrfwy. Comp. Wetst. 
 N. T. II. p. 320. Meton. a sketch, pattern, 
 for imitation, 1 Tim. 1, 16 Trpbs vnoTVTra- 
 o-iv. So Hesych. npos VTroTvirao-iv Trpbs 
 o~rjp.fl.oi>. 
 
 V7TO(f)ep(i), aor. 1 vnrjveyKf, ((pepa.) old 
 Engl. to underbear, i. e. to bear up from 
 underneath, to support, to sustain ; e. g. 
 oTrXa, heavy armour, Engl. to be under 
 arms, Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 57. In N. T. trop. 
 to bear up under, to endure, e. g. evils, c. 
 ace. 7Tfipao-p.6v 1 Cor. 10, 13 ; Siwy/iovs 
 2 Tim. 3, 11 ; \vrras 1 Pet. 2, 19. Sept. 
 for Kto Ps. 69, 8. Prov. 18,14. So 2 Mace. 
 2, 28/Pol. 1. 1.2. Xen. Conv. 8. 40. 
 
 VTTO^copea), S>, f. TIO-O), (x&>pe w,) to give 
 place covertly, to ivilhdraw oneself under 
 cover, without noise or notice ; intrans. 
 c. fls local, Luke 9, 10 {nrfx<*>pr](Tf KUT t Suzv 
 fls TOTTOV tprjiiov. So c. tv Luke 5, 16, see 
 in eV no. 4. Sept. Judg. 20, 37. Jos. Vit. 
 5 29 imfxti>pr)<rav fls TJJV olniav. ISBBUS 58. 
 19 fls SiKvvva. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 2. 
 
 U7ra>7rtaa>5 f. dcra>, (inra>Tnoi> ; lira, 
 &\lr,) to hit under the eye, to give a black 
 eye, to beat black and blue ; Aristoph. Pac. 
 539 or 541, et ibi Schol. Plut. de Fac. in 
 
753 
 
 UCTT6/D09 
 
 Lun. 4 (Xeytv, vTrwridfciv [al. vnonit(iv] 
 avrovs TT]V cr(\T)vr)v, <T7rtXo>i Kal p.(\aiTp.(i>v 
 dvainp.TT\dvras. Comp. Wetst. N. T. I. p. 
 779. In N. T. genr. to maltreat, to disci 
 pline severely, to mortify, c. ace. TO a-wpA 
 /zov 1 Cor. 9, 27. Trop. to weary with 
 prayers, entreaties, Engl. to beat out, c. ace. 
 Luke 18, 5. Comp. Lat. oblundo Ter. 
 Adelph. 1. 2. 33. See inroiridfa. 
 
 W, vos, 6, 17, a sit-ine, 2 Pet 2, 22 ; see 
 in ftopfiopos. Sept. for -nm Deut. 14, 8. 
 ^El. V. H. 10. 5. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 10. 
 
 /(7<r<u7ro9, ov, 17, (Heb. a-hx ,) hyssop, 
 a low plant or shrub, put in antith. with the 
 cedar as growing out of the wall or rocks, 
 1 K. 5, 13 [4, 33.] Dioscor. 3. 30. Plin. 
 H. N. 14. 16. The Hebrews, under the 
 names rritx and tWowor, appear to have 
 comprised not only the common hyssop, 
 hyssopus officinalis, but also other similar 
 aromatic plants, as lavender and espec. ori 
 ganum or wild marjoram, Origanum cre- 
 fense, called by the Arabs Za ler (Ocimum 
 satarhendi Forsk. p. 109, 110), and found 
 in great abundance around Mount Sinai 
 and on Mount St. Catharine ; see Burck- 
 hardt s Travels in Syria p. 570. Bibl. Res. 
 in Palest. I. p. 162, 314. According to R. 
 Tanchum of Jerus. " SITS nomen est ori- 
 gani (satureia, savory) et Kornith, i. e. 
 Btcechadis, quae est species origani." See 
 fully in Gesen. Thesaur. Ling. Heb. I. p. 
 67. Winer Realw. art. Ysop. Celsii Hierob. 
 [. p. 407 sq. Dr. Royle supposes the Heb. 
 317 X to be the same with the Arabic asuf, 
 a name still applied to the caper plant, Gr. 
 Kajnrapis, Lat. capparis. which is found in 
 Egypt, Sinai, and Palestine. ofte*h growing 
 on walls ; Journ. of the R. Asiatic Soc. 
 Nov. 1844. Hyssop was much used in the 
 ritual purifications and sprinklings of the 
 Hebrews, comp. SIT!* Sept. VO-O-WTTOJ Ex. 
 12, 22. Lev. 14, 4. 6. Num. 19, 18. Ps. 51, 
 8. Jos. Ant. 4. 4. 6. In N. T. hyssop, spo 
 ken of a .talk or stem of hyssop, John 19, 
 29, i. q. KaXafjios in Matt. 27, 48 et Mark 
 15. 36. Also of a bunch of hyssop for 
 sprinkling, Heb. 9, 19; comp. Sept. and 
 3iTX Lev. 14, 4. 6. 49. 51. 52. So Jos. 
 Ant. 2. 14. 6 v(T(T03nov Knp.as. 
 
 ucrrepea), a>, f. 7jcra>, (vcrrtpos.) to be be 
 hind, after, later ; e. g. in place, vo-Tcprjo-av 
 nj 8to>et Thuc. 1. 134; in time, absol. 
 Hdot. 1. 70; c. gen. Xen. An. 1. 7. 12. 
 In N. T. trop. of dignity, condition, strength, 
 and the like, to be behind, inferior, to lack ; 
 in later usage also depon. Pass. v 
 
 48 
 
 fiat id. On the construction see Lob ad 
 Phryn. p. 237. 
 
 1 . Of dignity, etc. absol. i. q. to be behind, 
 to be the worse ; 1 Cor. 8, 8 ovre eav p.rj <pd- 
 yofjitv TL. o-Ttpovp.&a. With a genit. depend 
 ing on the idea of comparison contained in 
 the verb, comp. Matth. 357. 2 Cor. 11, 5 
 Xoyi b/iai yap p.ne>> iicrrfprjufvai raw inrtp- 
 \iav dnoo-ToXvv. 12, 11. So varfpi^tii 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 13. 
 
 2. Genr. to lack, to fail, e. g. a) to fail 
 of any thing, to come short of, to miss, not 
 to reach, c. gen. expr. or impl. Rom. 3, 23 
 Trdvrfs v(rTfpoi/vrai TTJS do^rjs rov Sfou, all 
 hare come short of the glory of God, that 
 which God bestows. Heb. 4, 1 v<rrep^<Vat 
 sc. TTJS Karairavcrftos ravrrjs. Once with diro 
 c. gen. praegn. Heb. 12, 15. So c. gen. Pol. 
 5. 101. 4. Thuc. 3. 31 ; c. OTTO comp. Ec- 
 clus. 7, 34. b) to lack, to leant, to be with 
 out ; c. gen. Luke 22, 35 p,rj TIVOS vorep^- 
 crare ; (Jos. Ant. 15. 6. 7 pjSf oivov fJ.rji( 
 vdaros vffTfprj^rjvai. Diod. Sic. 13. 110.) 
 With tv c. dat. of that in which one is want 
 ing, 1 Cor. 1, 7; comp. the usual Greek 
 construction c. dat. of thing, Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 237. Ecclus. 11, 12. With ace. of thing 
 as to which, Matt. 19, 20 rl CTI v<TTep<o ; 
 what lack I yet? comp. Mark 10, 21 et 
 Luke 18, 22. (Sept. ri vcrrepio tya, for 
 ^n Ps. 39, 5 ; ^On Dent. 15, 8.) Absol. 
 to be in want, to suffer need, Luke 15, 14. 
 
 2 Cor. 11,8. Phil. 4, 12. Heb. 11, 37. So 
 Ecclus. 13, 4. c) Intrans. of things, to 
 fail, to be lacking, icani.ing, absol. John 2, 
 
 3 vcrTepj]cravTof oivov. With dat. Mark 10, 
 21 ev a-oi ixTTtpfl, comp. Luke 18, 22. 
 Sept. for 1W? Neli. 9, 21. Ps. 23, 1. Di 
 oscor. 5. 87 vcrrtpoiHrns rriroftov. 
 
 vcrTeprjfUl, aros, TO, (vorepe o),) 1 . what 
 ? .s- wanting, want, lack ; c. gen. of thing, 
 Phil. 2, 30 TO vfji<ai> vtTTfpTjpa rrjs rrpos 
 p.t XftToupyiav, and so impl. 1 Cor. 16, 
 17. Col. 1, 24 Ta ii(TTfpr)fj.aTa riav 3Xt- 
 ^tcov TOV \p. i. e. what is yet lacking of 
 afflictions for Christ. 1 Thess. 3, 10. Sept. 
 for "ibHB Judg. 18, 10. 19, 19. 20; "0n 
 Ps. 34, 9. 
 
 2. Absol. or c. gen. of pers. want, need. 
 poverty, Luke 21, 4, comp. Mark 12, 44. 
 2 Cor. 8, 13. 14. 9, 12. 11, 9. 
 
 fU f, fj, ({>crrepe a>,) the being 
 in want, want, need, poverty, Mark 1 2, 44, 
 comp. Luke 21, 4. Phil. 4, 11 OVK OTI <ca3 
 
 ;<TTepo9, a, ov, a defective comparative, 
 Buttm. 569. 2. Ausf. Sprachl. J 69. 2; 
 
754 
 
 later, latter, hinder; e. g. in place Horn. II. 
 5. 17; comp. Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 42. In N. 
 T. only of time : 
 
 1 . Genr. later, latter ; 1 Tim. 4, 1 eV 
 vo-Ttpois Kaipols, in the latter times, in after 
 times ; comp. in to-xaros no. 2. b. Sept. for 
 yhnx i Chr. 29, 29. Pol. 2. 41. 9. Xen. 
 Hell. 7. 2. 10. 
 
 2. Neut. vo-rtpov as adv. a) Before 
 a gen. later, after, last ; Matt. 22, 27 et 
 Luke 20, 32 ixrrtpov 8e -navr^v dnf^Save KCU 
 y yvvr], last of all, after all. Sept. for "^HS 
 Jer. 31, 19. So Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 22. b) 
 Absol. afterwards, at last ; Matt. 4. 2 vo-Tf- 
 pov eVeiVao-e. 21,29. 32.37. 25,11. 26, 
 60. Mark 16, 14. Luke 4, 2. John 13, 36. 
 Heb.- 12, 11. Sept. for rrnnx p ro v. 5, 4. 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 15. 1. J5L ; V. H. 5. 13. 
 Xen. Conv. 1. 14. 
 
 , {), 6v, (v(palv(a,) woven, John 
 19, 23 p(iTo>i/ vfyavrbs 81 oXou, see in appa- 
 <or. Sept. for :n Ex. 39, 21. 26 ; 3fln 
 Ex. 26, 32. 28, 6. Jos. Ant. 3. 2. 4. 
 Thuc. 2. 97. 
 
 , ,,, V, (ityt, ttyoj,) 1. Tno-ft, 
 Zo//y, elevated; as 6 poy t^Xw Matt. 4, 8. 
 17, 1. Mark 9, 2. Luke 4, 5. Rev. 21, 10 ; 
 re: X os ty. v. 12. Sept. for ttha Is. 2, 15 ; 
 cn Ig. 2, 14. So Palsph. 29. 5. Hdian. 5. 
 6. 21. Xen. An. 3. 4. 25. From the Heb. 
 TO v-^rjXd, the Ugh places, the heights, 
 put for the highest heavens, Heb. 1,3; comp. 
 in ovpavos no. 4. b. So Sept. for cvia Ps. 
 93, 4. Is. 33, 5. In a like sense spoken of 
 Christ, comparat. v-v/^Xdrepoy TUV ov- 
 pavuiv yevofJLfvos, being made higher than 
 the heavens, i. e. exalted above the heavens, 
 Heb. 7. 26; comp. Eph. 4, 10 eVdi co ndv- 
 rcav ovpavwv. Symbol, by Hebr. Acts 13, 
 17 p.eTa fipaxiovos i^Xou c^rjyayev avrovs 
 t AiyvTTTov, with a high arm, with the arm 
 up-lifted as if about to destroy the enemy, 
 emblematic of threatening power. Sept. 
 for Heb. ^3 siiT Ex. 6, 6. Deut. 4, 34. 
 Ez. 20, 33. 34. Comp. Sept. xfip 1^17X17 
 for cn Tj Ex. 14, 8. Num. 33, 3. For the 
 force of the figure, see Is. 5, 25. 9, 12. 
 14, 26. 
 
 2. Trop. high, lofly, i. e. highly esteemed, 
 regarded with pride; Luke 16, 15 TO ei> 
 diftpamois v^rjKov, /38eXvy/xa fvanriov TOV 
 3eov. Rom. 12, 16 JJ.TJ TO. vijsTJ\a (ppovovv- 
 Tfs, high things, things highly prized by 
 man, proud things, opp. TU Tcmeivd ; comp. 
 in crvvaTrdya). Sept. XaXfTi i^Xa, Heb. 
 Vp*, 1 Sam. 2, 3; comp. Ecc. 7, 8. Is. 9, 
 8. Theocr. Id. 16. 98 i\/^Xoi> jcXeov. Dion. 
 
 Hal. Ant. 10.49 \6yov vtyrfk6v. luc. Her- 
 mot. 5 v^rrfka (ppovetv. 
 
 v-^]\o(j)pov6(a, , f. ^ W) (^Xc y, 
 (ppovea,) to be high-minded, to be proud, 
 haugkty, arrogant, absol. Rom. 11, 20 
 1 Tim. 6, 17. Comp. Rom. 12, 16. 
 
 in|rto-TO?, T), ov, ({tyt, vt/ros,).a defective 
 superlative, Buttm. J 69. n. 1. Matth. { 133 ; 
 the highest, most elevated, loftiest ; as fyiarov 
 opos Hdian. 3. 3. 2. In N. T. only from 
 the Heb. 
 
 1 . Pr. r d v*lsi<TTa,the highest places, the 
 heights, put for the highest heavens, comp. 
 in ovpavos no. 4. b. Matt. 21,9 werawa iv 
 rols fyivrois. Mark 11, 10. Luke 2, 14. 
 19, 38. So Sept. for n^ai -ia Job 16, 19; 
 for Sing. Bii^ Ps. 71, 19. Ecclus. 43, 9. 
 
 2. Trop. 6 v^to-Tos, the Most High, 
 spoken of God as dwelling in the highest 
 heavens, and as far exalted above all other 
 beings ; see in ovpavos no. 4 ; Mark 5, 7. 
 Luke 1, 32. 35. 76. 6, 35. 8. 28. Acts 7, 
 48. 16, 17. Heb. 7, 1. Sept. for Heb. 
 li^S Deut. 32, 8. Ps. 9, 3 ; Cliald. fixis 
 Dan. 7, 25. So Ecclus. 41, 8. 2 Mace! 3, 
 31. Philo Leg. ad Cai II. p. 569. 8. Diog. 
 Laert. 8. 1. So of Jupiter, Find, NV-m. 1. 
 90. Theocr. Id. 25. 159. 
 
 n|ro?, (os, ovs, TO, (tyi,) 1. height, 
 elevation ; Eph. 3, 18 ai 0a3oj, KOI ttyos 
 Rev. 21, 16. Sept. for PHS 1 Sam. 17, 4, 
 ttB.l P Gen. 6, 15. So Hdian. 4. 2. 3. Xen 
 An. 3. 4. 7. From the Heb. the height, on 
 high, put for heaven, the highest heaven, the 
 abode of God, comp. in ovpavos no. 4. So 
 e v^ovs, from on high, from God, Luke 1, 
 78. 24, 49 ; els ityoy to on high, to God, 
 Eph. 4, 8,* quoted from Ps. 68, 19 where 
 Sept. for Ci-iab. Sept. e fyovs, Heb. 
 Bl - n, Ps. 18, 17. 144,7. So genr. Ecclus. 
 17,26. 43, 10. Act. Thorn. $ 10. 
 
 2. Trop. elevation, dignity, of a Christian, 
 James 1, 9; see also in Tcmeivaxns. Sept. 
 for Bina Job 5, 11 ; nbja 2 Chr. 1,1. 17, 
 12. 1 Mace. 1, 4. Luc. Tim. 5. Hdian. 1 
 13. 12. 
 
 ir^row, w, f. oxrw, (ity-os,) 1 . to heighten, 
 i.e. to raise high, to elevate, to lift up, e. g. of 
 the brazen serpent and also of Jesus on the 
 cross, John 3, 14 bis, KO%U>S Mwi/o-rjr v\^o>er 
 TCV o(piv, ovrtas v^wS^vat Set TOV vlov TOV 
 afSpoWov. 8, 28. (So Test. XII Patr. p. 
 739 eVi uXou v^coSijo-eTat. Genr. Sept. for 
 *^ Gen. 7, 17; J^paan 2 Chr. 33, 14. 
 Anth. Gr. I. p. 241 rd(pov v\^u>o-avro. IV. 
 p. 18 Spovovs.) Hence Jesus is further 
 said v\jr(a%T]vai e* rr)s yrjs, to be lifted un 
 
755 
 
 from the earth and exalted to heaven, with 
 allusion to the death of the cross, John 1 2. 
 32. 34. Also, ri; &eia rov 3oC VA^a>3fiV, 
 exalted to (at) the right hand of God, Acts 
 2, 33. 5, 31 ; comp. Heb. 7, 26 in i\^r]\ds 
 no. 1 ; and see Mark 16, 19. 1 Pet. 3, -22. 
 Heb. 1,3. 8, 1. 12, 2. For this dative of 
 place whither, comp. epx f(r3at T /7 wdXet Fa 
 bric. Pseudep. V. T. I. p. 594 ; vTroSe^e- 
 <r3at TTJ oiKta Luc. Asin. 39. Winer {31.2. 
 p. 243 . 
 
 2. Trop. to elevate, to exalt, i. e. a) 
 Genr. to raise to a condition of prosperity, 
 dignity, honour ; Luke 1 , 52 xa2eIXe &wd- 
 arras dnb %poi>a>v, Kal ityoxre rarravovs. Acts 
 13, 17. 2 Cor. 11, 7. James 4, 10. 1 Pet. 
 5,6. Pass. v^^fjo-frai Matt. 23, 12. Luke 
 14, 11. 18, 14. Matt. 11, 23 et Luke 10, 15 
 KaTTfpvaovp., fj (<as rov ovpavov u\^3eZ<ra, 
 exalted to heaven, either in external pros 
 perity, or more espec. in respect to the pri 
 vileges of the Gospel, as the abode of Jesus ; 
 
 comp. in K.antpvaovp., also in ovpnvus no. 1. 
 Sept. for H32 Job 36,7 ; D^n Num. 24,7; 
 bi^nn Josh. 3, 7. So Ecclus. 15, 5. Diog. 
 Laert. 1. 3. 2. Pol. 5. 26. 12. b) Reflex. 
 tn/fda) (fMvrov, to exalt oneself, to be proud, 
 haughty, arrogant, Matt. 23, 12. Luke 14, 
 11. 18, 14. So Sept. Pass, or Mid. for pna 
 Is. 3, 16; comp. V\^U>^T] 17 Kapftia nvds for 
 lab P125 Ps. 131, 1. Prov. 18, 12. 
 
 Tor, TO, (v\^6ca,~) a high place, 
 height, elevation ; Rom. 8, 39 ovre ttyto/xa, 
 ovre a3or, prob. put for heaven, comp. in 
 fyos- (Epiph. adv. Haer. 1. 1. 1.) Trop. 
 of a proud adversary, under the figure of a 
 lofty tower or fortress built up proudly by 
 the enemy, 2 Cor. 10,5 irav v^tapa. tnatpo- 
 p.evov Kara rfjs yi/awrewf rov Sfov. Pint. 
 Sept. Sap. Conv. 3, rovs da-rtpas v\^-d>fjuiTa 
 KOI ranti.voip.ara Xapftdvovrai iv rots ronois 
 ovs 8ieta<rt. Trop. exaltation, Judith 10, 8. 
 13, 6 ; pride Sept. Job 24, 24. 
 
 <f)dyofjiai,, ((payov, see in e crSio). 
 
 <frdyo$, ov, 6, ((paydv,) an eater, a glut 
 ton; Matt. 11, 19 avSpwiros (pdyos KCU olvo- 
 irarrjs. Luke 7, 34. Eustath. in II. p. 1630. 
 15. ib. 1737. 50. Written also $ayo y. see 
 Lob. ad Phryn. p. 434. n. 
 
 <f>ai\6vT)$, ov, 6, by metath. for tpatvo- 
 X?j?, Lat. pccnula, a cloak, travelling-cloak, 
 a thick upper garment, used chiefly in tra 
 velling instead of the toga, as a protection 
 against the weather. It seems to have been 
 a long cloak without sleeves, with only an 
 opening for the head. 2 Tim. 4, 13 Erasm. 
 See Diet, of Antt. art. Pccnula. Adam s 
 Rom. Ant. p. 419. Cic. pro Milon. 20. For 
 tne metathesis see Buttm. ^ 19. n. 2. Matth. 
 } 16. 2. c. Written also in Mss. and edit. 
 (pat\^)vr)S, (p&ovTjs, ^eXeuj/qy. Athen. 3. p. 
 97. e, ou ffv el, o Acai rov Kaivbv (pt\6vr]v 
 (ttprjrai yap, a> /StXricrre, Kal 6 (pdivoXrjs) 
 rlnuv -rrai AeC/ce, 86s /tot TW dxpr)crrov (pai- 
 v6\r,v, where comp. Schweigh. So (paivo\rj 
 Artemid. 2. 3. Arr. Epict. 4. 8. Others 
 less well suppose it to be a cloak-bag, port 
 manteau, with books; Hesych. e^aiXoi^f 
 (l\Tjrdptov p-fp-fipdivov, f/ yXa>cr(7o KO/xoi>. 
 
 (fraiVb), f. (fxiva), (0ao>, (pdos , </)wf,) Pass, 
 aor. 2 ((fidvrjv, pr. to lighten, to illuminate. 
 
 1. Trans, to bring to light, to make to ap 
 pear, to show, c. ace. rtpas Horn. II. 2. 324 ; 
 <nj/urra 2. 353. Xen. Cyr. 6. 4. 13 ra If pa 
 
 fjtj.lv oi 3eol <f>aivov<riv. Oftener and in N. 
 T. only Pass, or Mid. (fratvouai, aor. 2 
 t<pdvrii>, to come to light, to appear, to be or 
 become visible. 
 
 a) Strictly, to shine forth, to shine ; c. ev 
 of place, Rev. 18, 23 (f>u>s \v\vov ov fiij 
 (pavfj Iv trot tn. Trop. Phil. 2, 15 eV ofs 
 (paivto-Sf o)s (poMTTTjpfs tv Kovpa. Sept. for 
 r\-\\ Is. 60, 2. Pr. 2 Mace. 12,9. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 4. 3. Xen. Conv. 1. 9 orav (ptyyos 
 rt tv WKT\ (pavy. 
 
 b) Genr. to appear, to be seen, c. dat. of 
 pers. expr. or impl. a) Of persons, Matt 
 
 1, 20 yyeXoj Kvpiov Kar ovap t(j)dvr) avrca. 
 
 2, 13. 19. Mark 16, 9. Sept. for rnjro 
 Num. 23, 3. (2 Mace. 3, 33. Luc. D. De o r. 
 20. 5. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 43.) With a particip. 
 or adj. as predicate in nominal, comp. Matth. 
 ^ 549. 5. p. 1078. Herm. ad Vig. p. 769. 
 Matt. 6, -16 OTTO>? (pavuxTi avSpcoTroir 1^7- 
 OTfvovrtf. V. 18. 23, 28 vp.f is (f)atve <r3f 
 TO IS di/3pw7roir [oTf] SiVatot. With dat. 
 impl. 2 Cor. 13,7 ; particip. impl. Matt. 6, 5 
 OTTOS &V (paivwo-i TOIS avSp. sc. rrpoa-ev^ov- 
 rts- (So c. part. Luc. D. Deor. 4. 1 . Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 3. 1 ; c. adj. Hdian. 3. 14. 15. Xen. 
 Hell. 4. 3. 10 6 ^Xtos p.rjvo(iof)S (8of (pa- 
 vfivai. Dat. impl. Ceb. Tab. 5. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 4. 19.) Absol. to appear, to make his 
 appearance, Luke 9, 8. 1 Pet. 4, 18. /3) 
 Of things, e. g. ra fifawa Matt. 13, 26. 
 
756 
 
 (2 Mace. 1, 33.) Of an event, Matt. 9, 33 
 tv rtf icrpaijX. So ra (pai vop.t va, things 
 visible, apparent to the senses, Heb. 11,3. 
 With a predicate, see above in a ; Matt. 23, 
 27. Rom. 7, 13 Iva (pavfj ap-ap-ria . . . Karep- 
 yaop.fVT) SdvaTov. Espec. of things, phe 
 nomena, appearing in the sky or air ; Matt. 
 
 2, 7 TOV xpovov TOV (fiaivofjifvov ao~Ttpos. 
 24, 27. 30. James 4, 14. So Horn. II. 8. 
 556. Hdian. 2. 15. 11. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 1 
 do-Tparral Kai ftpovrai . . . rovrutv 8e (pavfvra>i>. 
 
 c) Trap, as referred to the mental eye, 
 to appear, to seem, with dat. of pers. and 
 predic. Mark 14, 64 ri vp.l.v (paiveTai; with 
 tva-mov TWOS Luke 24, 11. So c. dat. 
 1 Esdr. 2, 21. Horn. Od. 1. 318. Aristoph. 
 Eccl. 870 ; c. inf. Xen. Cyr. 2. 2. 20. 
 
 2. Intrans. to give light, to shine forth, 
 to shine as a luminary or light ; absol. Rev. 
 1, 16 us 6 ijXtoy <f>aivfi. 8, 12. With tv 
 c. dat. of place, 2 Pet. 1, 19 cos AV^WB (pat- 
 VOVTI tv avxfJLT]p<a TOTTW. Rev. 21, 23. Sept. 
 for "i^Xtl Gen. 1, 17. Ex. 13, 22. So 
 Theocr. Id. 2. 11 SfXava, <paii> KaXoV. 
 Anth. Gr. I. p. 183. 1. Horn. II. 11. 64. 
 Trop. of spiritual light and truth, comp. in 
 erKOToy no. 2. John 1, 5 TO cpS>s tv rrj CTKO- 
 Tia (paivei. 5, 35. 1 John 2, 8. 
 
 $d\te 6, indec. Phalek, Heb. i^S 
 (part) Peleg, pr. n. m. the son of Eber, 
 Luke 3, 35. Comp. Gen. 11, 16 sq. 
 
 (fravepos, d, 6v. (<patV,) apparent, visi 
 ble, conspicuous, Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 10 TrXrj- 
 %OVO~T]S dyopds e/ce i (pavepos TJV sc. Socrates. 
 Usually and in N. T. apparent, manifest, 
 known ; e. g. (pavepov tlvai, to be manifest, 
 known, Acts 4, 16. Rom. 1, 19. Gal. 5, 19. 
 
 1 Tim. 4, 15. 1 John 3, 10. (Ecclus. 6, 24. 
 
 2 Mace. 6, 30. Diod. Sic. 1. 10. Xen. Mem. 
 
 3. 9. 2.) So cpavfpbv yivto-^ai to be or be 
 come apparent, manifest, well known, Mark 
 6, 14. Luke 8, 17. Acts 7, 13. 1 Cor. 3, 
 13. 11, 19. 14, 25. Phil. 1, 13. (1 Mace. 
 15, 9. 2 Mace. 1, 33. Pol. 1.18. 14.) Also 
 <pavfp6v iTOitiv riva, to make one manifest, 
 known, to disclose, Matt. 12, 16. Mark 3, 
 12. So 2 Mace. 12, 41. Jos. Ant. 3. 4. 2. 
 Neut. c. prep, tls (pavtpov e X3e/, to 
 become manifest, known, to be brought to 
 light, Mark 4, 22. Luke 8, 17. (So els TO 
 cp. Luc. Calumn. 9.) Also tv TW (pavt- 
 pta, adverbially, comp. in ev no. 3. a. a; 
 manifestly, openly, Matt. 6, 4. 6. [18] ; like 
 wise externally, outwardly, Rom. 2, 28 bis. 
 So Jos. Ant. 4. 2. 4. Xen. Cyr. 8. 1. 31. 
 
 (fravepoo), co, f. &xra>, ((pavepos,) to make 
 apparent, manifest, known ; to manifest, to 
 show openly. 
 
 1. Of persons: a) Reflex, c. avroV,oi 
 Mid. (pavfpov/ieu, Pass. aor. 1 t (pave patent 
 as Mid. Buttm. 136. 1, 2 ; to manifest one- 
 f^elf, to show oneself openly, to appear. So 
 reflex, c. dat. John 7, 4 (pavepaxrov ffavTov 
 TW Ko oyiw, show thyself to the world, appear 
 publicly. Mid. with e/iTrpoo-SeV TWOS, 2 Cor, 
 5, 10 iravras f]p.as (pavfp^rjvai Set e/zn-po- 
 v%fv TOV ftrjfjLaTos TOV XpiaTov. Espec. of 
 those appearing from heaven or from the 
 dead; reflex, c. dat. John 21, 1 bis, ((pave- 
 puxrfv tavTov TTO\IV 6 I. Tots /xaSrjralr, 
 KTX. Mid. c. dat. John 21, 14 TOVTO 17817 
 TpiTov f(pavepa>^r] 6 I. Tols /xa3. QVTOV. 
 1 John 1, 2 KCU ffpavfp^r) rip.lv. Mark 16, 
 12. 14 ; absol. Col. 3, 4 bis, STOV 6 Xp. <j)a- 
 vfpc&y KT\. 1 Tim. 3, 16. Heb. 9, 26. 
 
 1 Pet. 1, 20. 5, 4. 1 John 1, 2 K al r, faq 
 f(pavfp<a%T], i. e. Christ as the source of 
 eternal life. 2, 28. 3, 2. 5. 8. b) Pass. 
 to be manifested, to be made or become mani 
 fest, known, c. dat. John 1,31 Iva ^avtpo^rj 
 TW lo-paTjX. 2 Cor. 5, 1 1 ; tv c. dat. ib. 5, 
 1 1 ; V Travrl els ifj.as 11, 6 ; with ort, 
 
 2 Cor. 3, 3. 1 John 2, 19. In the sense 
 to become known, conspicuous, Hdot. 6. 
 122. Act. to make conspicuous, Dion. Hal. 
 Ant. 10. 37. 
 
 2. Also in N. T. of things, Act. t. ace, 
 John 2, 1 1 ((pavepao-f TTJV 8nav avToC. 
 
 1 Cor. 4, 5. 2 Cor. 2, 14 a/ iravrl TOTTW. 
 Col. 4, 4. Tit. 1, 3; c. ace. et dat. John 
 17, 6. Rom. 1, 196 yap 3e6j avToIs [TOIJTO] 
 f(pavepa>o-e. Pass. Mark 4, 22 ov yap 
 fo-Tt Ti KpvnTov o (av p.}) (pave poftfj. John 
 3, 21 <W (pavepwSjj TO. tpya. 9, 3. Rom. 
 
 3, 21. 16, 26. B Cor. 7, 12. Eph. 5, 
 1 3 bis, TO 8e ndvra . . . (pavfpovTai TTO.V 
 yap TO (pavepovfjievov, (poiy e crrt, whatever is 
 made manifest, is it self light. 2 Tim. 1,10. 
 Heb. 9, 8. 1 John 3, 2 ov-a tfyavfpaftr) TI 
 taofjif^a. Rev. 3, 18. 15, 4 ; ei/TovTw 1 John 
 
 4, 9 ; tv TW o-u>y.aTi 2 Cor. 4, 10. 11 ; c. 
 dat. Col. 1, 26. Sept. Act. for nib J er . 33, 
 6. Suid. (pavtpovv els (pus aytiv. 
 
 ^jaz/e^w?, adv. ((pavfpos, ) manifestly, 
 openly; i. e. dearly, evidently, Acts 10, 3; 
 publicly, Mark 1, 45 (pavtp5>s fls ir6\iv eiV- 
 (tedv. John 7, 10. Jos. Ant. 5. 6. 2 
 Hdian. 7. 11. 7. Xen. An. 1. 9. 19. 
 
 (f)avepa>cri<>, etay, 17, (<pavep6a>, ) a making 
 known, manifestation ; 77 (p. TTJS dX^Se/as 
 
 2 Cor. 4, 2 ; f] (p. TOV TrvtvpaTos, i. e. in the 
 charismata, 1 Cor. 12, 7. 
 
 <f)avo$, ov, 6, (<paiVo>.) a light, lantern, 
 torch ; John 18,3 JJHTO. (pavcav Kal Xa/i7ra- 
 8uv. Artemid. 5. 20. Dion. Hal. 11. 40 
 diravTts d3pdot 
 
tot 
 
 cpavovs (\DVTfs Kal \afjLnd8as. Xen. Lac. 5. 
 7. Comp. Phryn. et Lob. p. 59 sq. Hesych. 
 ATTIKOI 8t Xu^i/oC^oj/ tKaXovv, ov 
 
 (pavuv. 
 
 $avovri\, 6, indec. Phannel, Heb. 
 iw:Q (face of God) Penuel, pr. n. of the 
 father of Anna, Luke 2, 36. 
 
 (pavTcia), f. o-co, ((pcuVw,) strictly a fre 
 quentative, implying repeated action, Buttm. 
 5 119. 5. 2 ; to make appear, to make visible, 
 In show ; rare in the Act. Callistr. Stat. 1 4 
 (pavrdfav TTJV aia^rjcriv. Alex. Aphrod. TOV- 
 TO <pavrdoi>Ta u>s /car dXiySleiai . Usually 
 and in N. T. Pass. (pavrd o/iat, to appear, 
 to be seen, to be visible ; hence Particip. 
 neut. TO (paiTa6p.(vov L q. TO ^aivo^fvov, 
 the phenomenon, appearance, sight, the spec 
 tacle, Heb. 12, 21; comp. Ex. 19, 16 sq. 
 Buttm. 1-28. 2. Winer 46. 4. So Wisd. 
 6, 16. Hdian. 8. 3. 21. Diod. Sic. 1. 12 
 TOVS Seovs (pavTa^o^itvovs rots ai/3pd>7ro(f tv 
 fepa>i/ a><i>v jj.opfpa.ls. Plato Phil. 38. c. 
 
 (pavracna, as, T), ((pavrdfrpai,) an ap 
 pearing, appearance, Pol. 11. 27. 7. Diod. 
 Sic. 20. 11. Plato Theaet. 152. c. In N. 
 T. appearance, shoiv, -pomp, Acts 25, 23. 
 Sept. for n^r!" Zech. 10, 1. So Pol. 10. 
 40. 6. Athen. p. 212. c. 
 
 (paVTacffjia, aros, TO, (<paiTdbp,at,) a 
 phantasm, phantom, apparition, spoken of a 
 spirit, spectre, ghost, Matt. 14, 26. Mark 6, 
 49._Jos. Ant. 1. 20. 2. Artemid. 1. 2. 
 ^Eschyl. Theb. 710. Of phantasms in 
 dreams, Wisd. 17, 15. Jos. B. J. 3. 8. 3. 
 Theocr. 21. 30. 
 
 <j)dpaj^, ayyor, 77, (kindr. (pdpvyf-,) a 
 ramne, chasm, valley, a narrow and deep 
 pass or valley with precipitous rocky sides ; 
 Luke 3, 5 nacra <pdpay 7r\77pa>3>yo-erat, 
 quoted from Is. 40, 4 where Sept. for N" 1 ?, 
 as also 22, 1. Josh. 15, 8. Sept. for ^ 
 Gen. 26, 17. Deut. 2, 24. Jos. B. J. 7. 6. 
 1. Pol. 3. 52. 8. Xen. Hell. 7. 2. 13. 
 
 $apaa>, 6, indec. Pharaoh, Heb. niriB, 
 pr. the king,the common title of the Egyptian 
 kings down to the time of the Persian inva 
 sion ; employed in the Scriptures as a pro 
 per name ; Acts 7,10 tvavriov $apau> /3acrt- 
 XeW AiyvTTTov. v. 13. 21. Rom. 9, 17. 
 Heb. 11, 24. Jos. Ant. 8. 6. 2 6 *apaa>i/ 
 KUT Alyvirriovs /3ao-tXea crry/naiVi. The 
 Heb. nbno is strictly a Coptic word signi 
 fying the king ; but prob. was so inflected 
 by the Hebrews as to appear in a Semitic 
 form, i. q. ""IS a leader, prince ; see Heb. 
 Lex. in ^*nc . 
 
 <&apes, 6, indec. Phares, Heb. f^? 
 fa breach), pr. n. o one of the sons of Ju- 
 
 dah by Tamar, Matt. 1, 3 bis. Luke 3, 33 
 See Gen. c. 38. 
 
 , ov , 6, a Pharisee, one of the 
 sect of the Pharisees, Heb. tills, O^-iB, 
 of a^wpur/xeVoi, the Separated, see Buxtorf 
 Lex. Chald. Rabb. 1851 sq. This was a 
 powerful sect of the Jews, in general op 
 posed to the Sadducees (2aSSoviuoi q. v.) 
 first mentioned by Josephus as existing un 
 der Hyrcanus about B. C. 130, and already 
 in high repute; Jos. Ant. 13. 10. 5, 6. 
 The Pharisees were rigid interpreters of the 
 Mosaic law, and exceedingly strict in its 
 ceremonial observances ; but often violated 
 the spirit of it by their traditional and 
 strained expositions ; comp. Matt. 5, 20 sq. 
 12, .2sq. 19, 3sq. 23, 13 sq. They also 
 attributed equal authority to the traditional 
 law, or unwritten precepts, relating chiefly 
 to external rites, as ablutions, fastings, 
 prayers, alms, and the avoiding of inter 
 course with Gentiles, publicans, and the 
 like; Matt. 9, 11. 23, 2 sq. Mark 7, 3 sq. 
 Luke 18, 11 sq. Jos. Ant. 17. 2. 4. Their 
 professed sanctity and adherence to the ex 
 ternal ascetic forms of piety, gave them 
 great favour and influence with the pecple, 
 and especially with females; Jos. Ant. 13. 
 10. 5, 6. ib. 17. 2. 4. B. J. 1. 5. 2. They 
 believed, with the Stoics, that all events are 
 controlled by fate ; but yet did not wholly 
 exclude the liberty of the human will. They 
 held to the separate existence of spirits and 
 of the soul, and believed in the resurrection 
 of the body ; both of which the Sadducees 
 denied ; Acts 23, 8. They are sometimes 
 said to have admitted the transmigration of 
 souls ; but this was only partially the case ; 
 since they merely held that the souls of the 
 just pass into other human bodies ; Jos. B. 
 J. 2. 8. 14. See genr. on their character 
 and tenets, Jos. Ant. 18. 1. 2 sq. B. J. 2. 8. 
 14. Trigland de tribus Judsor. Sectis 
 Syntagma, Delft. 1703; in Ugolini The- 
 saur. XXII. Winer Realw. art. Pharisder. 
 In N. T. Jesus is often represented a? 
 denouncing the great body of the Pharisees 
 for their hypocrisy and profligacy, e. <r. 
 Matt. 23, 13 sq. Luke 16, 14. al. Yet there 
 were exceptions, and individuals among 
 them appear to have been men of probity and 
 even of a spirit of piety ; e. g. Gamaliel 
 Acts 5, 34 ; Simeon Luke 2, 25 ; Joseph 
 of Arimathea Luke 23, 51 ; Nicodemus 
 John 7, 50, comp. 19, 39. + 
 
 as, ), 
 
 KOJ/,) the preparing and using of medicirt . 
 pharmacy, Diod. Sic. 17. 31. Xen. Mem. 4. 
 
758 
 
 2. 17 ; a poisoning Pol. 6. 13. 4. In N. T. 
 magic art, sorcery, witchcraft, Gal. 5, 20. 
 Rev. 9, 21. 18, 23. Sept. for nianb, 
 C- -ulb, Ex. 7, 11. 22 ; DIBITS Is. 47, 9. 12. 
 So Wisd. 12, 4. Luc. Merc. cond. 40. Dem. 
 1012. 11 ; comp. Lat. veneficium Cic. Brut. 
 60. Plin. H. N. 18. 6. 
 
 (j)ap/jia,KV<> } (cos, 6, ((papp.aMvca, ) a phar 
 macist, apothecary, one who prepares and 
 uses medicines, Luc. D. Deor. 13. 1 ; a 
 poisoner, Jos. Vit. 31. Plut. Artax. 19. 
 In N. T. a magician, sorcerer, wizard , 
 iropvois KOI (pappaKivcri Acts 21, 8 Rec. 
 Others (pappaKos q. v. So Luc. Merc. cond. 
 40 P.OIXOV r) (pappaKta o~f. See Lob. ad 
 Phryn. p. 316. 
 
 ov, 6, f], (<pdpp.aKov,~) i. q. 
 fvs Lob. ad Phryn. p. 316 ; a poi 
 soner, Jos. Ant. 17. 4. 1. Dem. 794. 4. In 
 N. T. a magician, sorcerer, wizard, Rev. 
 2 1 , 8 in later edit. 22,15. Sept. for dia^n 
 Ex. 9, 12 ; f]fc ; = Ex. 7, 11. Deut. 18, 10~ 
 So Jos. Ant. 9. 6. 3 TTJV fj.rjTfpa avrov (pap- 
 fiaKov KOI Tropvrjv dnoKa\fcrai. Hippon. 44. 6. 
 
 <j>acris, fus, T), ((prjjj.1,) a saying, word, 
 report, Acts 21, 31. So of private report, 
 information, Dem. 793. 16. Poll. On. 8. 6. 
 47 KOIVUS 8e (pdo-fis fKa\ovvro Tracrai ai p.rj- 
 
 (j)acTKa>, impf. t(pao-Kov, defect, to say, to 
 affirm, i. q. 0j/u ; so with inf. and ace. Acts 
 24, 9. 25, 19. Rev. 2, 2; inf. and nom. 
 Rom. 1, 22 ; comp. Buttm. 142. 2. a. 
 Sept. for 10X Gen. 26, 20. 2 Mace. 14, 
 27. 32. Hdian. 3. 12. 21. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 
 29. On (pdo-KU) and (pnp-l. comp. Buttm. 
 109. I. n. 2. 
 
 <f>arv^, r]s, f), a crib, manger ; Luke 2, 
 7. 12. 16. 13, 15 ov A vet . . . TQV ovov drrb 
 rys (pdrvris. Sept. for OIDX Job 39, 9. Is. 
 
 1, 3. Jos. Ant. 8. 2. 4. Luc. Tim. 14 /caSa- 
 nep TTJV tv rfj (purify Kvva. Xen. Eq. 4. 1 
 TOI! ITTTTOV (TITOV KXcHrrjvai (K TTJS (paries. 
 
 <a{/A.09, T), ov, bad, ill, worthless, Germ. 
 faul, flau ; physically, as food, a garment, 
 Hdian. 4. 12. 4. Xen. Mem. 1. 6. 2. ib. 3. 
 11. 13. In N. T. morally, bad, evil, wicked; 
 irdv <pav\ov Trpdyp.a James 3, 16. [Rom. 9, 
 11]; TO. <pav\a evil deeds John 3, 20. 5, 29 ; 
 <pat\ov \tyfiv Tit. 2, 8. Sept. for Sibl? 
 Prov. 22, 8. So Luc. Hermot. 82 (pad\ov 
 oibfv iroiria-ovtriv. Pol. 4. 45. 1. Xen. Mem. 
 
 2. 3. 17. 
 
 <f>eyyo<$, tos, ovs, ro, (kindr. <pdos,) light, 
 brightness, splendour, espec. of the moon, 
 see Passow s. v. whence in Mod. Gr. (ptyyd- 
 oiov the moon. Matt. 24, 29 et Mark 1 3, 24 
 
 ov 8a>(Tfi TO (ptyyos avTijs, comp. Is. 
 13, 10. Of a lamp, Luke 11. 33. Sept. 
 for KM of the stars Joel 2, 10 ; of the snn 
 2 Sam. 23, 4. Of fire, 2 Mace. 12, 9 ; of 
 the moon Xen. Venat. 5. 4. Genr. Jos. 
 Ant. 2. 14. 5. Xen. Conv. 1. 9. 
 
 (peioofAai) f. (pdaofiai, Mid. depon. to 
 spare, e. g. to abstain from using, to use 
 sparingly, to save, c. gen. Hes. Op. 603 or 
 606 o-irov. Xen. Mem. 1 . 2. 22 ; (govo-ias 
 Plut. Cato Maj. 8. In N. T. also 
 
 1. to spare, to abstain from doing any 
 thing, to forbear ; absol. 2 Cor. 12, 6 <pei8o- 
 (j.ai 8e sc. TOU Kavxdo-Zcu. Sept. c. inf. for 
 ban 2 Sam. 12, 4. 6. So c. gen. of action, 
 Hdian. 7. 9. 22 ; ToLet inf. Xen. Hell. 7. 1.24. 
 
 2. to spare, i. q. to abstain from treating 
 with severity, to treat with forbearance, ten 
 derness ; c. gen. Buttm. 132. 10. e. Acts 
 20, 29 ^f] (pei86/j.(i>oi rov iroifjiviov. Rom. 8, 
 32 I8iov viov OVK f(pfio~aTo. 11,21 bis. 1 Cor. 
 7, 28. 2 Cor. 1, 23. 2 Pet. 2, 4. 5 ; c. gen. 
 impl. 2 Cor. 13, 2. Sept. for om 1 Sam. 
 24, 11. Neh. 13, 22; ban 2 Chr. 36, 15. 
 17; ^ton Gen. 22, 12. 16. Wisd. 11, 26. 
 Dion. Hal. Ant. 5. 10 e ya> TIV ffimv ov 0et- 
 o-d/jifvos TKi>(ov. Hdian. 2. 13. 15. Xen. Cyr 
 4. 2. 1. 
 
 <f>ei,oofjtevoo$, a dv. (^)ei So/iai,) sparingly , 
 i. e. frugally, not bountifully, 2 Cor. 9, 6 bis. 
 Plut. Alex. M. 25 <ei8o/xeWs 
 TOiy 7rapovo~i. 
 
 ov, 6, i. q. <pai\6vr]s where see ; 
 so 2 Tim. 4, 13 Rec. 
 
 (pepo), f. ot trco, aor. 1 rjveyKa, Pass. aor. 
 1 fjvtx^Tjv ; to bear, Lat./ero. 
 
 1. Pr. to bear, as a burden or the like, to 
 bear up, to have or take upon oneself, c. 
 ace. Luc. Contempl. 1 1 T I KO\ tnl ra>v wpcov 
 (pfpovo-i. Hdian. 2. 11. 18. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 1 3. 6 (popriov (ptpeiv . . . TTorfpov Ktvos, TJ 
 (ptpav TI. ib. 2. 2. 5. In N. T. only trop. 
 a) to bear up under, to bear with, to endure, 
 e. g. evils, c. ace. Rom. 9, 22 3e6j rjvfyKti> 
 o-KVT) dpyrjs. Heb. 12, 20. 13, 13 rov oVeiSi- 
 O-/JLOV avrov (ptpoiTts. Sept. ovfiStcrnov (p. 
 for x(C3 Ez. 34, 29. 36, 15; genr. Gen. 36, 
 
 7. Deut. 1, 12. So jEl. V. H. 9. 33 opyfr. 
 Hdian. 4. 13. 4 TO.S vjSpeis. Xen. Mem. 4. 
 
 8. 1. b) to bear up any thing, to uphold, 
 to sustain, i. e. to have in charge, to direct ; 
 e. ace. Heb. 1, 3 (p(pa>i> re rd irdvra rw prj- 
 p-ari KT\. Sept. and xitja Num. 11, 14. 
 Deut. 1, 9. Chrysost. ad h. 1. (pepuv KV- 
 pepvajv, biaTriirrovra o-vyKpar&v. So Plut. 
 Lucull. 6 K.e Srjyov dv^ovvra TTJ S6j) TOT* 
 KOL <pepovra TTJV TTO\IV. A late usage, comp 
 Passow (ea no. 2. 
 
759 
 
 2. lo bear, with the idea of motion, to bear 
 along or about, to carry ; c. ace. Luke 23, 
 26 Toe (rravpuv (pepfiv onto~^}ev TOV irjo ov. 
 Sept. for xica Is. 30, 6. 40, 11. So JEl 
 V. H. 3. 2 2 [Aive/ay] TOV irartpa. . . . Taiis 
 w/ioiy tfpfpfv. 10. 21 TOV IlXaTcova 17 Htpi- 
 KTIOVJ] e faptv (v rats dyjcaXaiy. Hdian. 4. 
 15. 8. Xen. An. 3. 4. 32. Pass. <pt popai, 
 to be borne along, e. g. as in a ship before 
 the wind, to be driven, Acts 27, 15. 17. 
 (Test. XII. Patr. p. 670 xeifjia(6p.fvoi, Vt 
 TO TrtXayoy f(p(pa>n(%a. Diod. Sic. 20. 16.) 
 Trop. i. q. to be moved, incited, 2 Pet 1,21 
 VJTO uvevfiaTos ayiov (pepopevoi. So Sept. 
 Job 17, 1 Trvfiip-aTi (pepopfvos. Jos. B. J. 6. 
 
 5. 2 (pepopevoi Tols Zvp-ols. Pint. Alex. M. 
 4. Mid. (ptpouai, to bear oneself along, 
 to move along, to rush, as a wind ; Acts 2, 
 2 coo"7rfp (pepop.eitjs nvorjs. Trop. lo go on, 
 to advance, in teaching, eVi TTJV TeXeioTrjTa 
 Heb. G, 1 . Sept. pr. vBup jStauor ava> tpepo- 
 fjLevov for bn Jer. 18, 14; 5|auj Is. 28, 15. 
 18. SoDio g. Laert. 10. 104. 25 Bia TOV 
 nvfi/naros TroXXoC (pepopevov. Comp. Xen. 
 Yen. 10.21. 
 
 3. to hear, with the idea of motion to a 
 place, lo bear hither, thither, lo bring. a) 
 Of things, c. ace. expr. or impl. Mark 6, 28. 
 Luke 24, 1 ^XSov eVi TO p.vr]fj.a, (pfpowai A 
 ijToipaaav ap<i>p.ara. John 19, 39. Acts 4, 
 34. 37. 5, 2. 2 Tim. 4, 13 (pep* /cat ra /3i- 
 /SXi a. With OTTO partit. John 21, 10 eVy- 
 KdTf [TI] OTTO r<av tyapiuv. Pass. Matt. 14, 
 1 1 . Mark 6, 27. Also with dat. of pers. ri 
 TIVI, Matt. 14, 11 Kal TJveieyf [avTrjv] rfj prj- 
 rpl avTTJs- Mark 12, 15 cpfpeTf p.oi 8r)vdpioi>. 
 So impl. v. 16. John 2, 8. 4, 33 P.TJTIS rjvey- 
 Kfv avTca (paytlv , With &8e added, Matt. 
 14, 18 ; with tig c. ace. of place, Rev. 21, 
 24. 26. Spoken of the finger or hand, to 
 reach hither, John 20, 27 bis. Sept. genr. 
 for &o::n Gen. 43, 2. Neh. 8, 3. 4 ; c. dat. 
 Gen. 27* 14. 17; c. tls 1 Sam. 31, 12. 
 (Hdian. 8. 1. 13 rrpoo-ia<nv ol Imrf is TTJV 
 Kttbdktjv TOV Maip.ivov (pepovrts. Xen. Cyr. 
 2. 2. 9 ; c. dat. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 1.) Trop. 
 of a voice or declaration, Pass, to be borne, 
 brought, to come, (pcavfjs ht^Stifflft OVTW 
 ... eg ovpavov 2 Pet. 1, 17. 18. (Comp. 
 Plut. J. Caes. 1 (p(0vfjs ivcjfif unjs irpbs 
 Kat aapa.) Of good brought to any one, 
 bestowed on him, Pass. c. dat. 1 Pet. 1,13 
 TTI rrfv (pfpofitvrjv vfjuv x^P 1 " (Hdian. 5. 
 
 6. 22. Xen. An. 2. 1. 17.) Of accusations, 
 charges, or the like, to bring foncard, to 
 present, with KOTO. TIROS , John 18, 29 TWZ 
 KciTTjyopiav (peptTf KdTa TOV dv3p. TOVTOU ; 
 Acts 25, 7. [18.] 2 Pet. -J. 1 1, comp. Jude 9. 
 (Comp. JE\. V. II. 3. 14.) Of a doctrine, 
 
 prophecy, i. q. to announce, to make knoum, 
 Trjv 8idaxr]v 2 John 10 ; TTpofprjTfiav 2 Pet. 
 1, 21. (I)iod. Sic. 13. 97 fin. T&V 8 ifpduv 
 (pfpovruv vix.nv, i. e. announcing, portend 
 ing. Dem. 72. 22.) Of a fact or event as 
 reported or testified, to adduce, to show, to 
 proie; Pass. Heb. 9, 16 onov yap StuSr}^, 
 3ai/aToi/ dvdyKT] (ptp((T%ai TOV diaZffjiivov. 
 So Diod. Sic. 1. 89, 90, 97 T^* 8 O^pov 
 napovo-ias aXXa <rr}p.tla (pepovo i, KOI /idXtcrTa 
 TIJI/ KTX. b) Of persons, c. ace. to bear, 
 to bring, e. g. the sick, Mark 2, 3 tp^ovrai 
 irpos avTov 7rapa\VTiKov (pipovrff. Luke 5, 
 18. Acts 5, 16; with dat. TIVU TI*I, Matt. 
 
 17, 17 (ptptTe /iot ai/Toi> wSf. Mark 7, 32. 
 8, 22 ; Trpos c. ace. Mark 1, 32. 9, 17. 19. 
 20. Spoken also of any motion to a place, 
 not proceeding from the person himself, 
 i. q. to bring, to lead, c. ace. et rt , Mark 
 15, 22 Kal (p(povo~ii> avTuv iiri FoXyoSu TO- 
 TTOJ . John 21, 18 STTOV. Of beasts, Luke 
 15, 23. Acts 14, 13. Sept. for joan Neh. 
 12, 27. Ezra 8, 17 ; c. npos 1 K. 1, fs. 
 
 4. Absol. of a way, path, gate, to lead lo 
 any place, tls ri, as TTJV TruX^j/ TIJV (pfpovcrav 
 ds TTJV TTO\IV Acts 12, 10. Jos. Ant. 5. 2. 
 
 I. Pol. 8. 32. 6 17 TT^XJ; <p(povcra eVi Tor 
 \iptva. Xen. Hell. 7. 2. 7. 
 
 5. to bear, as trees or fields their fruits, 
 to yield, e. g. Kapnov Mark 4, 8. John 12, 
 24. 15, 2 ter. 4. 5. 8. 16. Sept. for xaj 
 Ez. 17, 8. Joel 2, 22. Jos. Ant. 15. 4. 2*. 
 Hdian. 4. 2. 16. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 28. 
 
 </>eu<ya>, f. o/iai, aor. 2 tyvyov, to Jlee, 
 to fly, to betake oneself to flight. 
 
 1. Pr. and absol. Matt. 8, 33 o 8 06- 
 o-KovTfs efpvyov. 26,56. Mark 5, 14. 14, 50. 
 Luke 8, 34. John 10, 12. 13. Acts 7, 29. 
 With an 6 c. gen. Mark 16, 8 ((pvyov ana 
 TOV nvrjpciov. 14, 52. John 10, 5. James 4, 
 7 (p(vcTai d$> vp.a>v. With tie out of, Acts 
 27, 30 AC TOV TrXoi ov. With els c. ace. 
 Matt. 2, 13 (pevyf f ls MiyvnTov. 10, 23 bis. 
 Mark 13, 14 fls TO &pn. Luke 21, 21. Rev. 
 12, 6 ; ri TO. opr) Matt. 24, 16. Sept. for 
 rna Ex. 14,5; 0*3 Gen. 39, 12; c. and 
 Ex.*4, 3; tK Jer. 51,6; els Gen. 14, 10. 
 Jer. 50, 16. So Hdian. 3. 2. 20. Dem. 33. 
 7. Xen. An. 1. 10. 11 ; c. diro Xen. Cyr. 
 7. 2. 4 ; ex Palaeph. 43. 3 ; els Luc. Asin. 
 
 18. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 24; eVt Hdian. 3. 4. 
 
 II. Xen. Ag. 2. 1 1 .Poetically of death 
 as fleeing, ana TWOS Rev. 9, 6. Also of 
 heaven and earth, to Jlee away, to vanish 
 suddenly, diro TWOS Rev. 20, 1 1 ; absol, 
 16,20. Comp. Ps. 114, 3. 5. 
 
 2. to Jlee from, to escape ; with djro c. 
 gen. Mat*.. 3 7 et Luke 3, 7 (pvydv dno -rrft 
 
760 
 
 fji(\\oi>(TT]s opyrjs. Matt. 23, 33. So c. 
 Xen. Hell. 4. 4. 4. With ace. Heb. 11, 
 34 e(j)vyov crro/tara paxaipas. Absol. to es 
 cape, Heb. 12. 25. So Horn. II. 2. 401 3a- 
 VOTOJ/. Hdian. 2. 1. 23 Kivdvvov. 
 
 3. Trop. /o _y?ee, to avoid, to shun, with 
 TTO C. gen. 1 Cor. 10, 14 (p. dno TTJS etfico- 
 \o\arpfias. (Ecclus. 21, 2 0. O.TTO rfjs afj.ap- 
 rias.) With ace. 1 Cor. 6, 18 <f>. rrjv irop- 
 vdav. 1 Tim. 6, 11. 2 Tim. 2, 22. So M. 
 V. H. 13. 1 post init. rds riav dvbpcav 6/u- 
 X/uj ffavye. Dem. 498. pen. Xen. Cyr. 8. 
 1. 31 TO aicrxpa (ptvydv. 
 
 $?j\ij;, IKOS, Felix, pr. n. of the eleventh 
 Roman procurator of Judea, about A. D. 
 51-58, after Cumanus and before Festus. 
 He was a freedman of the emperor Clau 
 dius, or perhaps also of the emperor s mo 
 ther Antonia, and hence is called Claudius 
 and also Antonius. He first married Dru- 
 silla, a grand-daughter of Antony and Cleo 
 patra ; and afterwards another Drusilla, the 
 daughter of Herod Agrippa I (see A/JOV- 
 aiAXa,), by whom he had a son who per 
 ished in an eruption of Vesuvius. Sueto 
 nius calls him the husband of three queens, 
 trium reginarum maritus, Suet. Claud. 28. 
 Ilia administration in Judea was cruel and 
 vindictive ; and Tacitus says of him : jus 
 regium servili ingenio exercuil, Hist. 5. 9. 
 
 6. He was recalled by Nero, and escaped 
 punishment only through the influence of 
 his brother Pallas, the emperor s favourite. 
 See Tacit, et Sueton. 11. cc. Jos. Ant. 20. 
 
 7. 1 sq. ib. 20. 8. 5-9. B. J. 2. 13. 2, 7. 
 Bibl. Repos. 1832. p. 382. Paul was 
 brought before Felix, and left by him in 
 prison ; Acts 23, 24. 26. 24, 3. 22. 24. 25. 
 27 bis. 25, 14. 
 
 (77/^77, r)s, T), Dor. <pdp.a, ((prjpi,) whence 
 Lat. fama, Engl. fame, i. e. common fame, 
 word, report, rumour, Matt. 9, 26. Luke 4, 
 14. Sept. for riSlBttJ Prov. 16, 1. JEl V. 
 H. 14. 30. Hdian. ] . 4. 19. Thuc. 1. 11. 
 
 i , enclit. and defect, (obs. <ao>,) 
 impf. ecpTjv, pr. to bring to light by speech, 
 jjenr. to say, to speak, to utter ; see fully in 
 Buttm. J 109. 1. The other tenses are sup 
 plied from elnov, where see. 
 
 1. Genr. to say, usually followed by the 
 express words ; Matt. 26, 34 t(pij avrw 6 
 irjaovs dp.t)i>, \eya> (rot wX. V. 61. Luke 
 7, 44. Acts 8, 36. 10, 28. 31 ; c. ace. 
 1 Cor. 10. 15 icptVare tymr o <pr)p.i. So 
 Hdian. 5. 6. 9. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 45. Hence 
 it is put in the middle of a clause quoted, 
 like Engl. said I, said he, Lat. inquam; 
 Matt. 14, 8 86s pvi, (pycriv, o>Sf eVi 
 
 KT\. Acts 23, 35. 25, 5. 22. 1 Cor. C, 16, 
 2 Cor. 10, 10. Heb. 8, 5. So Hdian. 2. 1. 
 16. Xen. CEc. 9. 14. Mem. 3. 11. 15. See 
 Sturz Lex. Xenoph. s. v. (frdvai no. 16. 
 
 2. As modified by the context, where the 
 sense often lies not so much in <pr)p,i as in 
 the adjuncts ; e. g. a) Before interroga 
 tions, to say, to ask, to inquire ; Matt. 27, 
 23 6 8f rjyfpcov ty*) ri yap KaKovJtroirjo-fV, 
 Acts 16, 30. 21, 37. So Xen. Mom. 1. 
 2. 41 sq. b) Before replies, to say, to 
 answer, to reply ; Matt. 4, 7 efprj avra> 6 
 Iqaovs HdXiv yeypaTrrai KT\. 13,29. John 
 1, 23. Acts 2, 38. al. With dnoKpi^is 
 added, Matt. 8, 8. Luke 23, 3. So Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 41 sq. c) Emphat. i. q. to 
 affirm, to assert, to declare, Rom. 3, 8. 1 Cor. 
 7, 29. 10, 19. 15, 50. So Hdian. 2. 8. 8. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 90. Xen. Cyr. 4. 4. 2. -f- 
 
 ^^O-TO?, ov, 6, Festus, i. e. Porcius 
 Festus, the twelfth Roman procurator of 
 Judea, about A. D. 58-62; sent by Nero 
 to supersede Felix ; comp. Jos. Ant. 20. 8. 
 9 sq. B. J. 2. 13. 7. ib. 2. 14. 1. Bibl. Re 
 pos. 1832. p. 382. Festus sent Paul to 
 Rome as a prisoner, on his own appeal ; 
 Acts 24, 27. 25, 1. 4. 9. 12. 13. 14. 22. 23. 
 24. 26, 24. 25. 32. 
 
 (p&ava), f. ao-w, aor. 1 tffiaara, to go or 
 come before another, in being or doing any 
 thing, to be beforehand with. 
 
 1. Pr. c. ace. i. q. to precede, to antici 
 pate, Lat. pravenire, old Engl. to prevent, 
 to come before; 1 Thess. 4, 15 ov ^ $3a- 
 a-up-fv rovs Koifj.rj ZevTas, i. e. in being ad 
 mitted into the divine kingdom. For the 
 accus. see Matth. 412.4. Plut. Pyrrh. 3. 
 Hdot. 7. 161. Thuc. 3. 5 ffido-ai Se ov 8v- 
 vdp.fvoi TOV TU>V ASrjvaitov eV/TrXow. In 
 Greek writers 03d vu with the participle of 
 another verb may often be rendered adverb 
 ially, before, sooner than ; Buttm. 144. n. 6. 
 On the construction of $3ai/co generally, 
 see Buttm. J 150. m. 37. Matth. 5 533. Herm. 
 ad Vig. p. 761 sq. 
 
 2. Aor. 1 efpZaa-a, to have come first, al 
 ready, by anticipation ; with a^pi c. gen. 
 2 Cor. 10, 14 axpi yap \ip.u>v t<p%dcrap.V fv 
 T<B fuayyeXiw, for even as far as to you 
 have we, already come in preaching (he Gos 
 pel, comp. v. 16. With tts TI, trop. i. q. 
 to have already attained unto, Rom. 9, 31. 
 Phil. 3, 16. With eVi nva, to have al 
 ready come to or upon any one, Matt. 12, 
 28 et Luke 11, 20 apa fcbZao-av (<$/ vp.us 17 
 |3acr. TOV 3eoi. 1 Thess. 2, 16 fj opyrj. Sept. 
 for Chald. N*^, c. !W Dan. 4, 8. 7, 13 ; 
 tls Dan. 4, 18. 19; Vt Dan. 4, 21 ; M3 
 
761 
 
 Ecc. 8, 14. So with W c. gen. Test. XII 
 Patr. p. 530 ; d s pr. Xen. Cyr. 5. 4. 9. 
 
 corruptible, perishable, mortal; Rom. 1,23 
 (p. v3 pwrof. 1 Cor. 9, 25 <p. o-rt(pavos. 
 
 15, 53. 54. 1 Pet. 1, 18. 23. 2 Mace. 7, 
 
 16. Philo de Cherub, p. 516. Plut. Consol. 
 ad Apoll. 10 rt Sav/iaarw . . . ei TO $3apToi 
 
 f. y^opai, Mid. depon. 
 (kindr. <peyyos,~) to sound, pr. to emit a c/ear 
 or brilliant sound, clang, tone, as a trumpet, 
 Xen. An. 7. 4. 19; of thunder, Cyr. 7. 1. 
 3; of the voice, Sept. for 3Xti Am. 1, 2. 
 Xen. An. 1. 8. 18. In N. T. of the voice, 
 In utter a sound, to speak, absol. Acts 4, 18. 
 
 vov 2 Pet. 2, 16; c. ace. irrrtpoyKa 2 Pet. 
 2, 18. So Hdian. 4. 6. 12. Xen. Conv. 2. 
 7 ; c. ace. Ecclus. 13, 22. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 6. 
 
 (f&eipa), f. epo>, Pass. aor. 1 fffidprjv, 
 to spoil, to corrupt, to destroy, genr. to bring 
 into a worse state; c. ace. 1 Cor. 3, 17 bis, 
 (1 TIS TOV vabv TOV 3eoi) (f&ftpfi, (pSepfi roO- 
 TOV 6 3fdr. 2 Cor. 7, 2. [2 Pet. 2, 12.] Mid. 
 Jude 10. Sept. for nni3 Gen. 6, 11. Is. 
 54, 16. Jer. 13, 9. So Wisd. 16, 27. Plut. 
 Consol. ad Apoll. 10, see in <p3api-o f. Xen. 
 Hell. 5. 3. 3 ; of a virgin dishonoured, Dion. 
 Hal. Ant. 2. 67. Trop. in a moral sense, to 
 torrupt. to deprave; c. ace. 1 Cor. 15, 33 
 (p3ipovcrt Jjfeij xpjOTa op.i\iai Kcucai , from 
 Menander, see below.. Eph. 4, 22. Rev. 19", 
 2. Praegn. 2 Cor. 11, 3 /iijTrw? . . . OVTU> 
 (bHaprj TO. vorjpaTa v/xtoi/ dno TTJS OTrXoTTjros 
 KT\. So Menand. in Poet. Gnom. ed. 
 Tauchn. p. 187, (p%fipovo~iv rj^jj xpijcr3 6fj.i- 
 Vat Kaitai. Xen. Mem. 1. 5. 3. 
 
 <p3iV, o7ro)pa,) autumnal; Jude 12 8fv8pa 
 tpSti/. trees <f autumn, stripped of their 
 fruits and leaves. Plut. Symp. 8. 10. 2. 
 Arist. H. An. 5. 1 1 . 1 ; (f). lor][j.tpia, the au 
 tumnal equinox, Pol. 4. 37. 2. 
 
 (t&oyyoS) ov, 6, (</>3<yyo/iat,) a sound, 
 espec. of a musical instrument, 1 Cor. 14, 
 7. Poet, for the voice, Rom. 10, 18, quot 
 ed from Ps. 19,5 where Sept. for 1j3. 
 Wisd. 19, 18. Arr. Epict. 3. 6. Plut. Con- 
 jug. Prase. 1 1 (p3dyyoi 8uo myi^ttfoc. 
 
 (i)rjOi^Ct). o>, f Ticro), (tpSofor.) to envy, 
 c. dat. Gal. 5, 26 dXXi^Xoi? (pZovovvrts. 
 James 4, 2 in some edit, for (j>ov(va>. Jos. 
 Ant. 4. 8. 21. Hdian. 3. 2. 6. Xen. Mem. 
 5. 3. 16. 
 
 dV^oW9, ov, 6, envy, Matt. 27, 18. Mark 
 15, 10. Rom. 1, 29. Phil. 1, 15. 1 Tim. 6, 
 
 4. Tit. 3, 3. James 4, 5. Plur. <3(5i*, 
 envyings, bursts of envy, Gal. 5, 21. 1 PeL 
 2, 1. 1 Mace. 8, 16. Pol. 6. 9. 11. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 9. 8. 
 
 (f&opd, as, rf, ((p3/p,) a spoiling, cor 
 ruption, destruction, genr. the bringing or 
 being brought into a worse state ; e. g. of 
 the air, TOV dtpos Hdian. 1. 12. 3 ; of a 
 female dishonoured, Jos. c. Apion. 2. 24. 
 Dion. Hal. Ant. 2. 25 $3. TOV o-ci/xaroj. 
 In N. T. 
 
 1. corruption, destruction, of things which 
 are consumed and so perish ; Col. 2, 22 tls 
 (fftopdv, for perishing, to perish ; see in 
 dnoxpr^tris. Put for death, slaughter ; 2 Pet. 
 2, 12 fo>a . . . (is a\(i)o~iv KOL (p3opui/. Also 
 of mortality, mortal nature, a dying away; 
 Rom. 8, 21 dno TTJS 8ov\das rrjs <p3opa?. 
 1 Cor. 15, 42. 50. Sept. for rn cfi p s . 103 
 
 4. Jon. 2, 7. So Jos. Ant. 7. 13. 3. Diod 
 Sic. 1. 10. Thuc. 2. 47. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 64 
 Trop. of spiritual death, condemnation, 
 misery, corruption, perdition, Gal. 6, 8. 
 
 2. Trop. in a moral sense, corruptness, 
 depravity, wickedness, 2 Pet. 1, 4. 2, 12 
 fv Trj <p3opo avT&v. V. 19. Wisd. 14, 
 12. 25. 
 
 <j)ia\,r), rjs, f], a bowl, goblet, broad and 
 shallow, Lat. patera ; see Dirt, of Antt. 
 art. Patera. Rev. 5, 8 (pia\as xpi/traj yc 
 p.ovo-as Su^tia/idraji . 15. 7. 16, 1. 2. 3. 4. 
 8. 10. 12. 17. 17, 1. 21, 9. Sept. for P^a 
 a bowl for sprinkling, Ex. 27, 3. Num. 7 
 1 3 sq. Jos. Ant. 3. 6. 6. Luc. Tox. 25. 
 Xen. Conv. 2. 23. 
 
 <f)i\d i ycfeo<>, ou, 6, 17, adj. (<p/Xo?, dya- 
 3dr.) loving goodness, a lover of good, up 
 right, Tit. 1, 8. Wisd. 7, 22. Plut. Prac. 
 conjug. 17. Aristot. M. Mor. 2. 14. 3. 
 
 <?i\aSeX<f>eia, as, 17, Philadelphia, an 
 ciently the second city of Lydia, situated near 
 the foot of Mount Tmolus, about 27 miles 
 
 5. E. from Sardis ; so called from its found 
 er, Attains Philadelphus king of Pergamus ; 
 with whose kingdom it came under the 
 power of the Romans. It was subject to 
 earthquakes ; and was thus destroyed, with 
 the adjacent cities, in the reign of Tiberius, 
 A. D. 17; Strabo 13. p. 628. Tac. Ann. 2. 
 47. It is still a considerable town ; called 
 by the Turks Allah Sheher ; see Rosenm. 
 Bibl. Geogr. I. ii. p. 181,223. Arundel s 
 Visit to the Seven Churches, p. 167. Ha 
 milton s Res. in Asia Minor II. p. 375. 
 Rev. 1, 11. 3, 7. 
 
 <f)i\a8e\(f)ia, as, TJ, ((ptXcz8cX</>oj,) bro* 
 therly love, in N. T. only in the Christian 
 sense, the mutual love of Christian brethren, 
 
762 
 
 Rom. 12, 10. 1 Thess. 4, 9. Heb. 13, 1. 
 
 1 Pet. 1, 22. 2 Pet. 1, 7 bis. Pr. Jos. Ant. 
 4. 2. 4. Luc. D. Deor. 26. 2. 
 
 <f>i\d8e\(f)os, ov, 6, f], adj. (<j>!Xos, dSeX- 
 <^oy.) loving one s brethren, in N. T. only 
 in the Chrisiian sense, loving each other 
 as Christian brethren, 1 Pet. 3, 8. Pr. 
 
 2 Mace. 15, 14. Plut. Solon 27. Xen. Mem. 
 2. 3. 17. 
 
 <f)l\av&pos, ov, r), adj. ((pi\os, tivfip,") 
 loving one s husband, conjugal, spoken of 
 a wife, Tit. 2, 4. Luc. Haley. 8. Plut. 
 Brut. 13. Plut. Amator. 23 (iXoYewot KOI 
 
 as, 17, (<ptXdi>3po>7ro?,) 
 philanthropy, love of mankind, humanity, 
 benevolence, Acts 28, 2. Tit. 3, 4. 2 Mace. 
 6, 22. Hdian. 2. 3. 16. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 1. 
 
 faXaiftpcOTTCOS, adv. (<ptXdj/3p&>7roy, ) 
 philanthropically, humanely, with kindness, 
 Acts 27, 32 Mace. 9, 27. Pol. 1. 68. 13. 
 Dem. 411. 10. 
 
 <pi\apyupia, as, }, (cpiXdpyvpov.) love 
 of money, covelousness, 1 Tim. 6, 10. Sept. 
 for SS3 Jer. 8, 10. Ceb. Tab. 23. Hdian. 
 6. 9. 17. Diod. Sic. 5. 26. 
 
 <f>i\dpyvpOf, ov, 6, f), adj. (<pi Xo?, apyv- 
 pos,) money-loving, covetous, Luke 16, 14. 
 2 Tim. 3, 2. Jos. de Mace. 3. Ml V. H. 
 9. 1. Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 10. 
 
 (frlXaVTOS, ov, 6, T], adj. (<piXo?, avroi),) 
 loving oneself, selfish, 2 Tim. 3, 2. Jos. 
 Ant. 3. 8. 1. Aristot. M. Mor. 2. 14. 3. 
 Plut. Arat. 1. 
 
 <j>L\e(o, <i, f. qcr<B, (cptXof,) to love, imply 
 ing affection generally ; more rarely used 
 of sexual love, as Horn. II. 9. 40. Hdot. 4. 
 176. Aristoph. Ran. 541. Comp. in dya- 
 Traw. 
 
 1. Pr. to love, to have affection for; c. 
 ace. of pers. Matt. 10, 37 bis, 6 (pi\a>v Trart- 
 pa rj p.r)rtpa KT\. John 5, 20 6 Trarjjp <ptXet 
 TOV vlov. 11. 3. 36. 15, 19. 16, 27 bis. 
 20, 2. 21, 15. 16. 17ter. 1 Cor. 16,22. 
 Tit. 3, 15 V Trio-ret, i. e. with Christian 
 love. Rev. 3, 19. Sept. for Snx Gen. 37, 3. 
 Prov. 8, 17. So Hdian. 1. 5. 12. Dem. 
 1161. 18. Xen. Mem. 2. 7. 9. Of things, 
 to be fond of, to like, c. ace. Matt. 23, 6 (pt- 
 Xoucri re rt]v Trpo>TOKki<riav. Luke 20, 46. 
 Rev. 22, 15. With the idea of overween 
 ing fondness, 6 <pi\u>v TJ]V ^vx 1 ?" avroC John 
 12, 25. Sept. for 3TIX Gen. 27, 4. 9. Prov. 
 29, 3. So Wisd. 8, 2. JEl V. H. 12. 15 
 ink. Xen. GEc. 20. 27, 29. 
 
 2. Spec, to show one s love by a kiss ; 
 
 hence, to kiss, c. ace. Matt. 26, 48 ov &* 
 (pi\T]o-a>, avros e crn. Mark 14, 44. Luke 22, 
 47. Sept. for P123 Gen. 27, 26. 27. Ex. 
 18, 7. Tob. 10, 13. J31. V. H. 9. 26. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 11. 10. Fully, with oro/m add 
 ed, Luc. Ver. Hist. 1. 8 ital f<f)i\ovv Sr ijpaf 
 rots a-TOfj.a<ni>. 
 
 3. Before an intin. to love to do any thing, 
 i. e. to do willingly, gladly, and so to be wont 
 to do, solere. Matt. 6, 5 (piXovaiv tv ruts 
 o-vvaywyals Trpoo-eu^ecrSai, they love to pray 
 in public, are wont to do it. Winer $ 58. 4. 
 So Sept. for ^ 2fiX c . inf. Is. 56, 10. ^El. 
 V. H. 14. 37 (pi\S) fie /xTjSe TO. dyaXfiara . . . 
 dpycas 6pav. Hdian. 1. 2. 8. Xen. Mag. Eq. 
 7. 9. 
 
 js, r], (fern, of (p/Xoy.) a femah 
 friend, Luke 15, 9. Aquil. for l" 1 ?^"!! Cant. 
 1, 15. 2, 2. Xen. Mem. 3. 11. 16. 
 
 <J)t\ijSovo<>, ov, 6, T], adj. (<pi\os, T]o~ovf),) 
 pleasure-loving; Subst. a lover of pleasure, 
 2 Tim. 3, 4. Pol. 40. 6. 11. Plut. Cato 
 Maj. 9. 
 
 <f)iXtjf^a, aros, TO, ((piXew,) a kiss, pr. a 
 love-token, given in salutation, comp. Ex. 
 18, 7 ; also in trpotrKUvto. Luke 7, 45 <f>i- 
 \rjfJ-ti pot OVK f8d>Kas. 22, 48. Sept. for 
 ,-||5lS5 Prov. 27, 6. Cant. 1,2. So Luc. 
 Asin. 17 (pL\r]fjLao~iv rjo-ira^ovTo dXXTjXouf. 
 JEl V. H. 1. 15. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 8 sq. 
 Spec, the sacred kiss given by Christians 
 to each other as the token of mutual love. 
 (pi X^/xa ayiov Rom. 16, 16. 1 Cor. 16, 20. 
 2 Cor. 13, 12. 1 Thess. 5, 26 ; (pt Xrj/na ayd- 
 TTTJS 1 Pet. 5, 14. 
 
 ^l\ij/ji(i)V, ovos, 6, Philemon, pr. n. of a 
 Christian of Colosse, Philem. 1 ; comp. v. 
 10 and Col. 4, 9. He was converted under 
 the preaching of Paul, and a church met in 
 his house, v. 2. 19. Paul sent back to him 
 his slave Onesimus from Rome, with an 
 epistle. 
 
 09, ov, or $i\r]TO<?, ov, 6, Phi 
 letus. pr. n. of an opposer of Paul, 2 Tim. 
 2, 17. 
 
 <tXuz, as, T], (<p/Xoy,) love, friendship, 
 fondness, c. gen. of object, James 4. 4 fj 
 (ptXia roO KoVp-ou. Sept. for ^^HX Prov. 
 10, 12. 15, 17. Jos. Ant. 11. 3. 1. Dem. 
 19 pen. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 4. Hi. 3. 3. 
 
 $iXt7T7r>7<ri09, ov, 6, a Philippian, Phil. 
 4, 15. 
 
 $i\l7T7roi, w, 01, Philippi, a city of 
 proconsular Macedonia, situated eastward 
 of Amphipolis within the limits of ancient 
 Thrace, Acts 16, 12. 20, 6. Phil. 1, 1 
 
763 
 
 1 Thess. 2, 2. It was anciently called 
 Kprjvtdf s, from its many fountains ; but hav 
 ing been taken and fortified by Philip of 
 Macedon, he named it after himself. Philip- 
 pi. In its vicinity were gold and silver 
 mines ; and it became afterwards celebrated 
 for the defeat of Brutus and Cassius. In 
 Acts 16, 12 it is called a colony, see in *o- 
 Aom a. Plin. H. N. 4. 11 intns Philipjn co- 
 Ionia. It is there said also to be npurrj TTJS 
 p.tpi8os Tijs MaKfo ovias rro\is, i. e. A chief 
 city of this part of Macedonia ; not the cap 
 ital, for this was Amphipolis, Liv. 45. 29. 
 Others explain Trpcorr; of its geographical 
 position, the first city as one comes from the 
 east ; but Paul had just landed at Neapolis, 
 still farther east. See Diod. Sic. 16. 8. 
 Strabo 7. p. 330. Dion Cass. 47. p. 232. See 
 also Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. III. p. 393. For 
 its site and the present state of its ruins, 
 see W. G. Schauffler in Miss. Herald, 1836. 
 p. 334 sq. Leake s Trav. in North. Greece 
 III. p. 214 sq. 
 
 $tXt7T7r09 ; ov, 6, Philip, pr. n. of seve 
 ral persons. 
 
 1. Philip, one of the twelve apostles, a 
 native of Bethsaida, John 1, 44. 45. 46. 47. 
 49. 6,5.7. 12, 21. 22 bis. 1-1,8 9. Matt. 
 10, 3. Mark 3, 18. Luke 6, 1-1 Acts 1, 13. 
 
 2. Philip the Evangelist, 6 et <iyyf Ato-Tiyr, 
 one of the seven primitive deacons at Jeru 
 salem, but residing afterwards at Cesarea, 
 Acts 6, 5. 21, 8. After the death of Ste 
 phen he preached the gospel at Samaria, 
 Acts 8, 5. 6. 12. 13 ; comp. v. 14. It was 
 he also who baptized the Ethiopian treasu 
 rer, Acts 8, 26. 29. 30. 31. 34. 35. 37. 38. 
 39. 40 ; comp. v. 5 sq. 
 
 3. Philip, tetrarch of Batanea, Trachoni- 
 tis, and Auranitis, Luke 3, 1. He was a 
 son of Herod the Great, by his wife Cleo 
 patra, and own brother of Herod Antipas ; 
 at his death, his tetrarchy was annexed to 
 Syria. From him the city Paneas took the 
 name of Cesarea Philippi, Matt. 16, 13. 
 Mark 8, 27 ; see in Kmo-apeta no. 1. Comp. 
 in Hpw&jv no. 1 fin. Jos. Ant. 17. 1. 3. ib. 
 17. 11. 4. ib. 18. 4. 6. B. J. 1. 28. 4. ib. 2. 
 6. 1, 3. 
 
 4. Philip Herod, called by Josephus only 
 HptbSr/s, also a son of Herod the Great, by 
 Mariamne the daughter of Simon the High 
 Priest. He was the first husband of Hero- 
 dias, see in HpwSi ar ; and lived a private 
 life, having been disinherited by his father ; ! 
 Matt. 14, 3. Mark 6, 17. Luke 3, 19. See 
 Jos. B. J. 1. 28. 4, comp. Ant. 17. 1.2. 
 Also Ant. 17. 4. 2, comp. B. J. 1. 30. 7. 
 Ant. 18. 5. 1. 
 
 . O v, 6, f/, adj. (<pi Aor, Ztos,) 
 loving God, pious ; Subst. a lover of God, 
 2 Tim. 3, 4. Poll. On. 1. 20. Luc. Calumn. 
 14 Trpbs TW eua-ffifj KOI <piAo3foi>. 
 
 4>tA6Xoyo9, OU) 6, Philolngus, pr. n. of 
 a Christian at. Rome, Rom. 16, 15. 
 
 <j)i\oveiKia : as, f], (cpiAoWiKo?,) love of 
 strife, contentiousness, Dem. 1440. 22. Thuc. 
 
 I. 41 ; emulation, ardour, Pol. 4. 49. 2. 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 18. In N. T. quarrel, con 
 tention, strife, Luke 22, 24. So 2 Mace. 
 4, 4. Pol. 5. 93. 9. Plato Rep. 555. a. 
 
 (f>i\6vei,fco<;, O v, 6, 17, adj. ((piAor, /*,) 
 loving strife, contentious, quarrelsome, 1 Cor. 
 
 II, 16. Jos. Ant. 15. 6. 2. Pint. Agesi. 2. 
 Xen. Eq. 9. 8. 
 
 <f)i\ot;ev{a, as, f], ((j)i\6evos,) love to 
 strangers, hospitality, Rom. 12, 13. Heb. 13, 
 2. Plut. Thes. 14, 23. Pol. 4. 20. 1. Plato 
 Legg. 953. a. 
 
 <j>i\.6^evo<f, ov, 6, 17, adj. (<piAos, Vor.) 
 loving strangers, hospitable, 1 Tim. 3, 2. 
 Tit, 1, 8. 1 Pet. 4, 9. Palseph. 5. 1. Plut. 
 Cimon 10. Xen. Hell. 6. 1. 3. 
 
 <pl\O7TpO)TeV(i), f. (va-to, (<ptAoVpo>rof,) 
 to love to be first, to strive for pre-eminence, 
 3 John 9. Only in N. T. Comp. <piAo- 
 Trpcoror Artemid. 2. 33. Plut. Solon 29. 
 
 <tA,09, T), ov, pr. Pass, loved, clear, be 
 friended, Horn. Od. 2. 363 (p/Af rtwov. Jos. 
 Ant. 4. 3. 3 Trai/3* ocra (pi Xa TOVTOIS rjv. 
 Hdian. 7. 9. 14. Also Act. loving, friendly, 
 kind. Jos. Ant. fi. 2. 1 3eoy tvfJLfvfjs up\tTm 
 yi ffo-3ai KOL (piXos. Dem. 480. 9. Thuc. 7. 
 1. In N. T. Subpt. 6 (piXos, a friend, 
 Buttm. ^ 123. 5. Luke 7, 6 errf/x^e npos av- 
 TOV . . . cpi Xovs. 11,5 bis. 6. 8. 12, 4. 14, 
 12. 15, 6. 29. 16, 9. 21, 16. 23, 12. John 
 11, 11. 15, 13. 14. 15. 19, 12 (pi Xor TOV 
 Kaurapoy, a favourer of Caesar, loyal to him. 
 Acts 10, 24. 19, 31 ovns avrw <piAoi, friends 
 to him. 27, 3. James 2, 23 (pt Xos SfoC. 4, 4 
 (f). TOV Koo-p-ou. 3 John 15 bis. In the sense 
 of companion, associate, Matt. 11. 19 (p. T(- 
 Xa>fo)i/ *rX. Luke 7, 34. John 3, 29 (p. TOV 
 wfj.(f)iov, a brideman, see in wp.<pa)v. As a 
 word of courteous address, Luke 14, 10. 
 Sept. for 2nx Esth. 5, 10 : 5"^ Ex. 33 ; 11. 
 Job 2, 11 ; "^H companion Dan. 2, 13! 17. 
 18. So Pol. 9. 24. 2. *Dem. 113. 27. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 4. 1 ; c. dat. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 33. 
 For 17 (f>i\r) a female friend Luke 15, 9, 
 see art. <piAr;. 
 
 <pC\.0(TO(pl(l : as, T), ((ptAocro(pe a>, <piAo(ro- 
 <poj,) pv. love of wisdom, Hdian. 1.2.6; 
 then, philosophy, knowledge natural and 
 moral, knowledge of things human and di- 
 
<j)l,\6(TO(f)OS 
 
 764 
 
 vine, comp. in croc/ua no. 2. J3schin. Dial. 
 Socr. 2. 22. Hdian. 4. 5. 13. Xen. Conv. 1. 
 5 ; spoken of the wisdom and learning of 
 the Chaldeans, Diod. Sic. 2. 29. In N. T. 
 philosophy, i. e. the Jewish theology or theo 
 logical learning, pertaining to the interpre 
 tation of the law and other scriptures, and 
 to the traditional law of ceremonial observ 
 ances, Col. 2, 8 ; comp. v. 16 et 1 Tim. 6, 
 20. So Philo, irdrpios (f)i\o(ro(pia, i. e. Jew 
 ish theology, Leg. ad Cai. p. 1014. d; de 
 Somn. p. 1125. d ; also Josephus, c. Ap. 2. 
 
 4. Ant. 18. 1.2. 
 
 (j)t\dcro^>0?, ov, 6, f], adj. (tpi Xo?, crocpi a,) 
 pr. loving whdom ; then as Subst. a philo 
 sopher, an inquirer after knowledge natural 
 and moral, in things human and divine ; 
 spoken in N. T. of Greek philosophers, Epi 
 cureans and Stoics, who spent their time in 
 inquiries and disputations respecting moral 
 science, Acts 17, 18. Arr. Epict. 3. 23. 30. 
 Hdian. 1. 9. 7. Xen. Vect. 5. 4 a-cxpio-Toi 
 (cat <piXo<ro<pot. 
 
 (f)i\6a-TOpyo<>, ov, 6, 17, adj. ((pi\os, 
 a-ropyf],) loving tenderly, kindly affectioned, 
 pr. towards one s kindred ; in N. T. towards 
 Christian brethren, Rom. 12, 10. Pr. Jos. 
 Ant. 7. 10. 5. Plut. Cleomen. 1. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 3. 2. 
 
 <f)i\.OTeKVO$i ov, 6, f], adj. ((plXos, reVi/ov,) 
 loving one s children, Tit. 2, 4. Luc. Ty- 
 rann. 4. Plut. Amator. 23, see in (piXavSpos. 
 
 <tXcm/ieo/zat, oC/iai, f. TJO-O/WU, Mid. 
 depon. (^uXoYi/ioy , (frtXos, Tip.i j. ) to love ho 
 nour, to be ambitious, Luc. Icarom. 17. Dem. 
 1046. 7. In N. T. with an infin. to be am 
 bitious of doing any thing, to exert oneself, 
 to strive, pr. from a love and sense of hon 
 our ; as in Engl. to make it a point of hon 
 our to do so and so. Rom. 15, 20 OVTCO fie 
 (f)i\OTip.oviJ.ei>ov eiiayyeXi^VcrSat KT\. 2 Cor. 
 
 5, 9. 1 Thess. 4, 1 1 TrapaKoAov/iei/ vp.as . . . 
 (^tXori/zeicrSat jjcrv^affti/ KT\. So Jos. Ant. 
 15. 9. 5. JE\. V. H. 9. 29. Diod. Sic. 1. 1 
 init. Xen. Mem. 2. 9. 3. 
 
 (f>!,\o(f>p6va)<?, adv. ((ptX6<ppa>v,*) in a 
 friendly-minded manner, kindly, courteously, 
 Acts 28, 7. 2 Mace. 3, 9. Plut. Solon 5. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 4. 
 
 <f>i\o<f)pa)V, oi os, 6, 17, adj. (<p[Xos, (ppfjv, ) 
 friendly-minded, kina, courteous, 1 Pet. 3, 
 8 Rec. where later edit. Tcnreiv6<ppa)v. 
 Plut. Amator. 19. Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 6. 
 
 <>l/i6&), w, f. oxrw, ((pin6s,~) 1. to muz 
 zle, as oxen treading out grain ; c. ace. 1 Cor. 
 9, 9 et 1 Tim. 5, 18 ov <pi/*dxreiy ftovv dXo- 
 tovra, quoted from Deut. 25, 4 whe^e Sept.. 
 for con ; see in art. -iXodco. 
 
 2. Trop. to muzzle, to stop the mouth, t 
 put to silence; Pass, to be silenced, silent, 
 to hold one s peace. a) Spoken of per 
 sons, Matt. 22, 34 OTI f(pifJLu><Tf rovs 2aS- 
 8ovKaiovs. 1 Pet. 2, 15. Pass. Matt. 22, 12. 
 Mark 1, 25 et Luke 4, 35 <i/M&>377n. So 
 Jos. B. J. 1. 22. 3. Luc. Mort. Peregr. 15. 
 Sext. Empir. adv. Logic. II. 275. b) Of 
 winds and waves, Pass, to be still, hushed; 
 Mark 4, 39 Tre^i/nwo-o. On this Perf. im- 
 perat. comp. Buttm. 137. n. 13. So Jos. 
 de Mace. J 2 fin. 
 
 PXeytwy, ovos, 6, Phlegon, pr. n. of a 
 Christian at Rome, Rom. 16, 14. 
 
 <f)\oyi(d, f. j o-w, (<Xo.) to set on fire, 
 to burn up, pr. Sept. for Sinb Ps. 97, 3. 
 Ecclus. 3, 30. Soph. Philoct. 1199. In N. 
 T. trop. to inflame, to fire with passion, 
 discord, hatred ; spoken of the tongue, c. 
 ace. James 3, 6 bis. 
 
 (f)\0, y6s, f), ((pX/yco,) a fiame, Luke 
 16, 24 ev rfj (f)\oyl ravrrj. So (X6 nvpos, 
 a fiame of fire, flaming fire, Acts 7, 30. 
 Rev. 1, 14. 2, 18. 19, 12 ; eV irvpl (p\oyos 
 id. 2 Thess. 1, 8; comp. in jrvp no. 1. 
 Sept. for art Is. 29, 6 ; ^cnb J oe l l, 19; 
 f!2^ Ex. 3, 2. So Ecclus. 8, 13 iv irvpl 
 (pXoyos. JE\. V. H. 5. 6. Xen. Conv. 2. 24. 
 Of lightning, Heb. 1, 7 nvpbs <p\6ya, 
 quoted from Ps. 104, 4 where Heb. UX 
 BFi^> Sept. Vatic, rrvp (p\tyov. Sept. fo 
 3rb Is. 30, 30. 
 
 <j)\vapeo), a, f. jjo-o), (<p\vapos,) to talk 
 nonsense, to prate, to trifle, intrans. ^Eschin. 
 Dial. Socr. 2. 16. Xen. An. 3. 1. 26. In 
 N. T. c. ace. to prate about or against ; 
 3 John 10 Xoyotj iroi>r)pois (p\vapa>v fjfjiaf. 
 
 <f)\vapo<>, ou,6, 77, adj. ((p\ixo, \At.fluo,} 
 pr. overflowing with talk ; hence Subst. 
 a silly talker, prater, trifler, 1 Tim. 5, 13. 
 Arr. Epict. 3. 25. 8. Luc. Asin. 10. Plato 
 Ax. 369. b. 
 
 <o/3ep05, d, 6v, (0o/3eo),) fearful, tem- 
 Ue, frightful ; Heb. 10,27 (po^toa 8f TIS 
 ftSoxr) Kpio-fus. v. 31. 12, 21. Sept. for 
 SO-iJ Gen. 28, 17. Deut. 10, 17. Dem. 
 505. 12. Xen. An. 5. 2. 23. 
 
 </>0/3eo), o>, f. T)<ra>, ((pofios,) (o put in 
 fear, to terrify, to frighten, Hdian. 1. 8. 4. 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 48 at Acd^Xoi f(p63ow TOVS 
 "imrovs. Oftener and in N. T. only Mid. 
 (pofieopai, ovfJLai, Pass. aor. 1 (po^fj^r]i> 
 and fut. 1 ^>o/3^3)7(ro/iat often in Mid. sense ; 
 pr. to put oneself in fear, i. e. 
 
 1. to fear, to be afraid, to be terrified, af 
 frighted, eithei from fear simply or from 
 astonishment ; see Buttm. 5 135. 3, 4, 5. 
 
765 
 
 { 136. 1, 2. In various constructions : a) 
 Intrans. and absol. Rom. 13, 4 iav 8e KOKOV 
 iroifjf, <poj3ov. So p.}) <j)oftoii fear not Mark 
 
 5, 36. Luke 1, 13, 30; /LHJ cpo/3elo-3e Matt. 
 14,27. Mark 6, 50; tyofiovvro Mark 10, 
 32. 16, 8; tyopfir) Matt. 14, 30. Acts 22, 
 29 ; tyopfcvvav o-(p<t8pa Matt. 17, 6. 27, 
 54. etc. Heb. 13, 6 Kvpios e /iot /So/jSoy KM 
 ov (f>o^r)^f](TOfiai, quoted from Ps. 118,6 
 where Sept. for X")^ ; as also Gen. 15, 1. 
 50, 19. Ex. 2,14. (Palaeph. 32. 2. JE\. V. 
 H. 3. 43. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 30.) With ac- 
 cus. of a kindred noun ; comp. Buttm. J 131. 
 4. Winer 5 32. 2 ; so 1 Pet. 3, 14 rov 8i 
 (f>6[3ov avraiv pi) <o/3f;3i7Tf. fear not (heir 
 fear, i. e. which they would inspire, v. 6 prj 
 $0/3. ^8ffj.iav TTTOTJCTIV. Emphat. Mark 4, 
 41 et Luke 2, 9 ffoPforjo-av (pofiov u-tyav. 
 
 b) Trans, c. ace. comp. Buttm. 5 1 35. 3, 4, 5. 
 Winer 39. 2. So c. ace. of person, Matt. 
 JO, 26 pfj ovv <froftrfiT}Tf avrovs. 14, 5 (<po- 
 Pfa rov ox^ov. Mark 12, 12. Luke 20, 19. 
 John 9. 22. Acts 9, 26. Rom. 13, 3 r^v 
 (t-ovcriav conor. Gal. 2, 12. al. Sept. for 
 SO? Num. 21, 34. Deut. 3, 2. (Luc. D. 
 Deor. 16. 3. Xen. Hi. 2. 18.) With ace. 
 of thing, TO Sumzy/ia Heb. 11, 23 ; rbv 3u- 
 ftov TOV ao-iXe a>y v. 27 ; p.r]8tv Rev. 2, 1 0. 
 So Luc. D. Deor. 19. 2. Plut. Galba 22. 
 Xen. Hell. 4. 4. 8 ; ri Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 22. 
 
 c) With air 6 c. gen. to fear from, to be 
 afraid of any one : Matt. 10, 28 p.r] (po- 
 
 ffelCrSf OTTO TCOV dTTOKTfVOVrOIV TO (TUtfJLa. 
 
 Luke 12, 4. Sept. for 1 X 1 ?: Deut. 1, 29. 
 Lev. 26, 2. Ps. 3, 5 ; "fl rnn Jer. 10, 2. 
 
 d) With fjiri, lest; Acts 27, 17 fapovp-evoi 
 Tf, P.T) ds TT]V avpriv ianmifft- Also c. 
 Wnas id. v. 29. 2 Cor. 11,3. 12, 20. Gal. 
 4, 1 1 (o/3oCfu v/j.ds, fj.f)Tru>s KT\. i. e. as to 
 you; c. prjirore id. Heb. 4, 1. So c. ^17 
 Hdian. 1. 14. 27. Time. 1. 36. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 
 6. 10; wnoTf Sept. Gen. 32, 11. e) 
 With an infin. to fear to do any thing, to 
 scruple, to hesitate ; Matt. 1, 20 U.TJ (pofir)- 
 3>/? 7rapaXa/3f Ii/ Mapia/x. rrjv yvvalnd (rov. 2, 
 22. Mark 9, 32. Luke 9, 45. Sept. for 
 X"} 1 ; Gen. 19, 30. 46, 3. Ex. 34, 30. So 
 Plut. Galba 27. Xen. An. 1. 3. 17. 
 
 2. Morally, to fear, to reverence, to honour, 
 c. accus. a) Genr. Mark 6, 20 efpopdro 
 TOV iwdvwjv. Eph. 5, 33 Iva (popfjrai rbv 
 avbpa. Sept. and N 1 ^ Lev. 19, 3. Josh. 4, 
 14. So Plut. Galba 3. Hdian. 3. 13. 6. 
 b) Spec, rov %(bv V. rbv Kvptov (po/Seto-aai, 
 to fear God, to reverence, e. g. to stand in 
 awe of God, the punisher of wrong, so as 
 not to do evil ; Luke 18, 2 TOI 36i> /i>j $o- 
 fjovp.evos, KOI av Sptoirov pr] (vrptTrofjLfvos. V. 
 4. 23, 40. Col. 3 22. 1 Pet. 2, 17. (Sept. 
 
 Ex. 1, 17. 21. Lev. 19, 14.) Also by 
 Hebr. in the sense of religious owe, piety, 
 i. q. to worship, to adore God; Luke 1, 50 
 KOI TO eXfos avrov . . . ToTy (^oj^ov/jLevois av- 
 rov. Acts 10, 2. 22. 35. Rev. 11, 18. 14, 7. 
 15, 4. 19, 5. So ot (poj3ov[j.(i>oi rbv 3foV, 
 
 1. q. proselytes, Acts 13, 16. 26; comp. in 
 o-//3o). Sept. and K^ Deut. 4, 10. 29. 
 1 Sam. 12, 14. etc. + 
 
 <f>6/3r)Tpov, ov, TO , ($o|9<F<0,) something 
 fearful, a fearful sight, terrible portent; 
 Luke 21,11 (f>6^T]rpd re ical o~rjfj.(la air ov- 
 pavov. Sept. for j<5n Is. 19, 17. Anth 
 Gr. III. p. 45. Luc. Philopatr. 9. Plato Ax. 
 367. a. 
 
 (popos, ov, 6, ((pe^ofiai,) I. fear, terror, 
 affright; Matt. 14, 26 dnb rov (po^ov txpa- 
 f-av. Luke 1,12 (pofios fiTfirtcrfv 6rr avrov. 
 
 2, 9 (<$>oftrfirio-av (popov peyav, see in <j)o- 
 ^e co 1. a. 8, 37. 21, 26. Rom. 8, 15. 2 Cor. 7, 
 5 cfroftoi, fears, v. 11. 1 Tim. 5, 20. 1 John 
 
 4, 18 ter. With gen. of pers. or thing 
 feared, i. e. which inspires fear ; Matt. 28, 
 4 dnb 8e rov <pd/3ou avrov SC. rov dyyeXou. 
 John 7, 13. 19, 38. 20, 19. 1 Pet. 3, 14 
 comp. in (po/3/w no. 1. a. Heb. 2, 15 <p. rov 
 %avdrov. Rev. 18, 10. 15. Melon, a terror , 
 an object of fear, Rom. 13, 3. Sept. for 
 run 1 } Gen. 9. 2. Jon. 1, 10. 15; nno Deut. 
 11, 25 ; <pd/3oi for D^n^X Job 20, 25. So 
 Hdian. 1. 14. 19. Dem. 798. 3. Xen. An. 2. 
 2. 19, 21. Spec, with the idea of astonish 
 ment, amazement ; Matt. 28, 8 p.tra (poft >v 
 Kal xapd? p.eyd\T]f. Mark 4, 41. Luke 1, 65. 
 
 5, 26. 7, 16. Acts 2. 43. 5, 5. 11.19, 17. 
 Rev. 11, 11. 
 
 2. In a moral sense, fear, reverence, re 
 spect, honour ; e. g. towards persons, Rom. 
 13, 7 bis, oTrdSoTf ovv ndcri ras o^etXay . . . 
 rw rbv <po / 3oi , (pofiov. Elsewhere of God 
 or Christ, 0o/3or rov SfoO v. xvpiov, i. P. a 
 deep and reverential feeling of accounta 
 bility to God or Christ; 2 Cor. 5, 11 elSorts 
 ovv rbv (poftov rov Kvpiov xr\. 7, 1. Eph. 5, 
 21 vnorao O ofjLfvoi oXX^Xoty iv <^>o/3<a Xpi- 
 O-TOV. Simply, with ToC 3eou or the like 
 impl. 1 Pet. 2, 18 comp. Eph. 5, 21. Jude 
 23. Intens. V <^o /3&> KM eV rpofiai, 1 Cor. 
 2, 3. 2 Cor. 7, 15. Phil. 2, 12. Eph. 6, 5. 
 (Sept. for ruo-i 2 Chr. 19, 9. Ps. 2, 11 ; 
 1HB Ps. 36, 1.) By Hebr. i. q. religion, 
 piety, (p. rov Kvpiov Acts 9, 31 ; (p. TOV 3foi 
 Rom. 3, 18; simpl. 1 Pet. 1, 17. 3, 2. 15. 
 Sept. for rvjrn p&n-i p s . 19, 10. Prov. 1,7. 
 29. 8, 13. So Ecclus. 1, 12. 18. 40, 26. 
 
 $oi/3r/, rjs, fi, Phoebe, pr. n. of a Chris 
 tian female, an almoner (fj SiaKovos*) in the 
 church at Cenchrea, whom Paul, writing 
 
766 
 
 from Corinth, commends to the church at 
 Rome, Rom. 16, I. 
 
 $oiviKr), TJS,-, 17, (cpoiVif,) Phoenicia, 
 Phenice. a narrow tract of country on the 
 eastern shore of the Mediterranean, north 
 of Palestine ; according to Greek and Ro 
 man writers, terminating on the north at 
 the river Eleutherus, nearly opposite the 
 little island Aradus; and extending on the 
 south as far as Dora, or even to Pelusium ; 
 though according to the Scriptures all the 
 country south of Tyre belonged to the 
 Hebrew jurisdiction ; comp. in Tvpos. The 
 Phemcians were the most celebrated com 
 mercial nation of antiquity ; their chief 
 cities were Tyre and Sidon ; and they plan 
 ted many colonies, among others Carthage. 
 Other cities were Byblus, Orthosias. Bery- 
 tus now Beirut. See Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. 
 II. i. p. 1 sq. Winer Realw. art. Phonicien. 
 Acts 11, 19. 15, 3. 21,2. 
 
 <f>oivi%, IKOS, 6, (sometimes <poiw,) a 
 palm-tree, the date-palm, Phanix daclylifera 
 of Linnaeus, one of the princes of the vege 
 table kingdom. The palm is a lofty tree, 
 consisting of a straight scaly trunk, crowned 
 with a spreading evergreen tuft of long 
 narrow leaves. It was anciently very abun 
 dant in Palestine, particularly around Jeri 
 cho, which was thence called the City of 
 Palms, B"HaFiri ""? > Sept. TroXis (poiviKwv, 
 Deut. 34, sVJudg. 1, 16. 2 Chr. 28, 15; 
 comp. Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 1. ib. 15. 4. 2. al. 
 Hence on Jewish and Roman coins, the 
 palm sometimes appears as the emblem of 
 Palestine. Its fruit is the date, a great 
 article of food in oriental countries. The 
 boughs, called also palms, were borne in 
 
 O * * 
 
 the hands or strewed in the way on seasons 
 of rejoicing; so John 12, 13. Rev. 7, 9; 
 comp. I Mace. 13, 51. Sept. for "inn 11. 
 cc. Neh. 8, 17. 2 Mace. 10, 7. Jos. B*. J. 4. 
 8. 3. Diod. Sic. 2. 53. Xen. Cyr. 6. 2. 22. 
 
 <ou>if, IKOS, f], Phoenix, a city on the 
 
 5. E. coast of Crete, with a harbour, Acts 
 
 27, 12. 
 
 (fiovevs, fus, 6, (tpoveuco,) a manslayer, 
 murderer, Matt. 22, 7. Acts 3, 14. 7, 52. 
 
 28, 4. 1 Pet. 4, 15. Rev. 21, 8. 22. 15. 
 Wisd. 12, 5. Hdian. 3. 12. 4. Xen. Cyr. 4. 
 
 6. 6. 
 
 (j)oveva>, f. fvo-u, (<p6vos ,) to kill a per 
 son, to slay, to murder ; absol. ov (povtvo-fis 
 Matt. 5, 21. 19, 18. Rom. 13, 9 ; p.r/ <povfv- 
 o-j/s Mark 10, 19. Luke 18,20. James 2, 11. 
 (Sept. for nsn Ex. 20, 13. Deut. 5, 17.) 
 Genr. Matt. 5, 21. James 2, 1 1. 4, 2 see in 
 
 77X00) no. 3. With an accus. Matt. 23, 31 
 Ttav (povfvcrdvTtoV TOVS 7rpo(pr)Tas. V. 35. 
 James 5, 6. Sept. for nsn Deut. 4, 42. 
 Josh. 20, 5. 6 ; :nrj Neh. 4, *11. Hdian. 1. 
 17. 25. Diod. Sic." 20. 22. Xen. Mem. 1. 
 2. 11. 
 
 ^>0^09, ou, o, (obs. (ptva>,) a killing ol 
 men, murder, slaughter; Mark 15, 7 (povov 
 irriroiT)Keio-av. Luke 23, 19. 25 (rrd<nv KOI 
 (pdvov. Acts 9, 1. Rom. 1, 29. Heb. 11, 37 
 iv <poV<a (j.axaipas. Plur. (povoi, murders 
 Matt. 15, 19. Mark 7, 21. Gal. 5, 21. Rev. 
 9, 21. Sept. for e n bloodshed Ex. 22, 2. 
 Prov. 1, 18 ; (p. iroitiv Deut. 22, 8 ; (p. p.a- 
 X aipas for 2nn"<B Ex. 17, 13. Deut. 13, 
 15. 2 Mace. 4| 35. JE\. V. H. 2. 17. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 3. 65. 
 
 <f)0p(ti, o>, f. qcra>, (<pe po>,) pr. frequenta 
 tive, implying the repetition or continuance 
 of the simple action expressed by (pfpa>, 
 Passow s. v. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 585 ; to bear 
 about with or on oneself, to wear, c. ace. 
 Matt. 11, 8 TO /iaXa/ca (popovvrts. John 19, 
 5 ortfpavuv. Rom. 13, 4 TTJV p-d 
 1 Cor. 15, 49 bis. James 2, 3 TTJV e 
 Ecclus. 11,3. Pol. 6. 22. 1. Xen. (Ec. 
 17. 3. 
 
 (jiopov, ov, TO, Lat. forum, only in pr. n. 
 Qopov ATTTJ-IOU, Forum Appii, a small town 
 on the Appian way, Acts 28, 15 ; see fully 
 in ^ATTTTtof. 
 
 <6^o<r, ov; 6, ((epa>,) pr. what is borne, 
 brought in ; hence, a tax, tribute, laid upon 
 persons and their property annually, in dis 
 tinction from rf Xoj toll, which was more usu 
 ally levied on merchandise and travellers ; 
 Luke 20, 22 (popov Soiivat. 23, 2. Rom. 13, 6 
 (popovs reXfTre. v. 7 bis. Sept. for oa 
 Judg. 1, 30. 2 Sam. 20, 24; rWQ Ezra 4, 
 20. 1 Mace. 3, 31 (p. ru>v ^wpoiv. Jos. Ant. 
 17. 11. 2 (popovs eVi/3aXXo/zeVovj eKiia-rois 
 TO fir eroy. Hdian. 6. 2. 3. Xen. Conv. 4. 32. 
 
 <j6opT/<y, f. t o-w, ((popTos, ) to burden, to 
 load, to lay a burden upon any one, pr. 
 Anthol. Gr. IV. p. 289. ult. In N. T. trop. 
 of the burden of the Jewish ritual, with two 
 ace. Luke 11,46 <popri erf TOVS av^punrovs 
 (popTia Svo-jSuo-ra/cra, comp. Buttm. 131. 5. 
 Winer ^ 32. 4. Pass. Part. Matt. 1 1 , 28 
 01 KoiricavTfs ical irf(popTio-p.(voi, ye weary 
 and heai-y laden, sc. with the burden of sin 
 and suffering. 
 
 fopriov, ov, TO, (<p6pTos,~) a burden, 
 load; a dimin. in form but not in sense, 
 comp. Buttm. J 119. n. 15. 
 
 1 . Spoken of a ship, the lading, freight, 
 cargo, Acts 27, 10 in later edit, for 
 
</>0/3TO? 
 
 in Rec. Jos. Ant. 14. 14. 3. Xen. (Ec. 
 3. 12. Genr. Sept Is. 46, 1. M. V. H. 9. 
 14. Xen. Mem. 3. 13. 6. 
 
 2. Trop. a) Of the Jewish ceremo 
 nial law as a burden upon its followers, 
 Matt. 23, 4. Luke 11, 46 bis ; com p. in 
 ^opr/fw. Of the precepts and requisitions 
 of Christ, in antithesis, Matt. 1 1, 30 ; comp. 
 in vy6s So Act. Thorn. { 28. Diog. Laert. 
 7. 5. 4 avros p.6i>os Supa<r3ai /Satrrdcrat 2r}- 
 vovos (popTiov. b) Of the burden of one s 
 faults, sins, Gal. 6, 5. Comp. Sept. and 
 NEB Ps. 38, 5. 
 
 (f>6pro<;, ov, 6, (0 po>,) pr. what is 
 borne, a burden, load; e. g. of a ship, 
 lading, freight, cargo, Acts 27, 10 Rec. 
 see in fapriov no. 1. Luc. Navig. 18 TO 
 TrXoiov . . . KCU 6 (popros. Soph. Trach. 537. 
 
 QopTovvdro?, ov, 6, Fortunatus, pr. n. 
 of a Christian, 1 Cor. 16, 17. 
 
 <f>paye\\iov, ov . T 6, Lat. Jlagellum, a 
 rvhip, scourge, John 2, 15. See in Ipas no. 
 2. Schol. in Aristoph. Acharn. 724, tpav- 
 Tas 6V, \<apovs, (ppcryeXXuz. Hesych. O~KV- 
 raXai rcav octant <ppuyf\\ia, Xcopot. 
 
 <f>paj\\6d), w, f. wo-o), ((ppaytkXtov,) 
 Lat. flagello, to flagellate, to scourge, c. ace. 
 Matt. 27, 26. Mark 15, 15. See in ipas 
 no. 2. Test. XII Patr. p. 728 <ppay(\\>- 
 tras fJ-f- 
 
 (frpayfAOS, ov, 6, ($pa<ro-<B,) a fence, a 
 hedge, as inclosing any thing ; e. g. a thorn- 
 hedge around a vineyard, besides which 
 there was usually a wall ; Matt. 21, 33 (ppa- 
 yp.ov avTta Trept/SrjKe. Mark 12, 1 ; comp. 
 Is. 5, 2. 5 where Sept. for p5 and naiiaa . 
 Luke 14, 23 ds ras 68ovs Kal (ppayp.ovs, 
 into the highways and hedges, i. e. the nar 
 row ways among the vineyards. Trop. 
 Eph. 2, 14, see in uto-oToixov. Sept. also 
 for "Ha Num. 22, 24. Ecc. 10, 8. Plut. 
 Cimon 10 TCOV dypa>v TOVS <f)payp.ovs d0ei- 
 \tv. Xen. Venat. 11.4. 
 
 (f)pdd), f. do-&>, to say, to speak, to tell, 
 to declare in words, c. ace. Luc. D. Deor. 
 6. 2. Plut. Theseus 12. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 
 15. In N. T. to tell, to explain, to inter 
 pret. C. ace. Tr)v irapafio\r)v Matt. 13, 36. 
 15, 15; Sept. for Van Job 6, 24; rn-in 
 Job 12, 8. Jos. Vit. J 59. Ceb. Tab. 33. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 3. 11. 
 
 (fopdcra a) v. -rrtu, f. o>, to inclose with 
 it fence, hedge, wall, for protection, to fence 
 trmind, in hedge in, c. ace. Sept. for T^ttJ 
 Hos. 2, 6. Xen. Cyr. 2. 4. 25 ; a city with 
 \\nlK In fortify Hdian. 8. 2. 13; a defile 
 with troops, to shut up, Plut. Cato Maj. 13. 
 
 >7 <f)pi<T(T(0 
 
 So the ears with wax, to slop, ra a>ra, Sept 
 for DOX Prov. 21, 13. Luc. Nigr. 19. In 
 N. T. only in reference to the mouth, (ppdo-- 
 <rfiv TO oro/ia, to slop the mouth, viz. 
 
 1. Pr. as of wild beasts, Heb. li, 33 
 f(f)paav oro^aara \{<jirra>i>, i. e. rendered 
 them harmless, powerless ; comp. Dan. 6, 
 22. M. Antonin. 12. 1, 6 8( QvXios irtpi- 
 ftaXwv TOV ftpa%iova. Trj {{rSfJrt, r; ((popti, 
 (<ppae T TO (TTOfJia TOV Xeovros. Diog. 
 Laert. 5. 5. 
 
 2. Trop. i. q. to silence, to put to silence; 
 Rom. 3, 19 Iva TTO.V o~Tofj.a (fopayfj. So 
 2 Cor. 11, 10 f) Kav^Tjo-ts avTr) ov (ppayrj- 
 o-fTai. 2 Mace. 14, 36. So f/j.(ppdo-o-tiv 
 TO o-TofjM Dem. 406. 5. 
 
 (fipeap, OTOS, TO, a well, pit, cistern, for 
 water, dug in the earth, and thus strictly 
 distinguished from 7777717 a fountain ; though 
 a well may also be called a. fountain; comp. 
 in 7777717 no. 2, and Heb. Lex. art. ixa . 
 Luke 14, 5. John 4, 11 ro (pptap eWl /3a3v. 
 v. 12. Sept. for 1K3 Gen. 16, 14. 26, 15. 
 18 sq. So Jos. Ant. 7. 9. 7. Luc. Demon. 
 22. Xen. An. 4. 2. 25. Trop. of any pit, 
 abyss, e. g. in Hades, the bottomless pit, 
 Rev. 9, 1. 2 ter. Sept. (ppeap Sta^Sopaj 
 
 for rrra nxa p s . 55, 24. 
 
 fppGVCnrctTClO), co, f. r]o~<t), (d>pr^v, aTTfT" 
 Tata,} to deceive the mind of any one ; genr. 
 to deceive, c. ace. Gal. 6, 3 tavrov (p. He- 
 sych. (ppevcmaTd ^Xfvd^et. Not found in 
 classic writers. 
 
 (jzpevaTrciTr/s, ov, 6, (<ppfya77aTua>,) a 
 mind-deceiver ; genr. a deceiver, seducer, 
 Tit. 1, 10. Etymol. Mag. 811. 3. Not 
 found in classic writers. 
 
 <f>pijv, (vos, 17, the diaphragm, midriff, 
 separating the heart and lungs from the 
 abdomen. JSschyl. Prom. 881 ; Plur. Plato 
 Tim. 70. a. Meton. the heart and parts 
 about the hear!, the breast, Lat. prcccordia, 
 Horn. II. 10. 10. ib. 13. 493. Hence, as 
 the supposed seat of all mental emotions 
 and faculties, usually and in N. T. melon. 
 the mind, the soul, including the intellect, 
 disposition, feelings ; 1 Cor. 14, 20 bis, ^ 
 77u8i a yivtcrSe rats (ppto-iv . . . Tats 8f <pp(o t 
 Tf Xftoi 7tVeo-3f. Sept. for 3^ Prov. 7, 7. 
 9, 4. Hdian. 3. 11. 17. Dem. 780. 21 vov 
 Kal <ppfi>u>i> dya%>i> (cat npovoias iroXXfjs. 
 Xen. Conv. 8. 30. 
 
 <j)pi<T(T(i) v. -TT&), f. a>, ((pp/.) to be 
 rough, ruffled, uneven, with bristling points, 
 to bristle; e. g. a field with ears of grain, 
 Horn. II. 23. 599 ; an army with spears, 
 II. 13. 339. Spec, of the hair, to bristb 
 
68 
 
 to stand on end, Hes. Op. 538 or 542; 
 also of animals, to bristle up the hair or 
 mane, Hes. Scut. 391. Plut. Aristid. 18. 
 In N. T. of persons, to shudder, to quake, 
 from fear or aversion, in which the skin 
 becomes rough and pimpled, and the hair 
 stands on end ; absol. James 2, 19 ra 8ai- 
 povta . . . (bpio-o-ovo-i. So Sept. Dan. 7, 15. 
 Judith 16, 8. Plut. dePuer. educ. 12. Dem. 
 332. 11 
 
 eo), w, f. TJO-CO, (<ppf)v,) expressing 
 the action of the (ppr)v, (ppeves, i. e. of the 
 mind, heart, will ; so to have mind, intellect, 
 to think, to be compos mentis, Horn. II. 6. 79. 
 JEA. V. H. 14. 29. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 12. 
 In N. T. and usually, to mind, to be minded, 
 to have in mind, to be disposed or inclined 
 in any way ; spoken generally of any act 
 or emotion of the mind. 
 
 1. Genr. to think, to mean, to be of opi 
 nion ; with ace. of thing implying manner 
 of thinking, Acts 28, 22 aKoixrai a (bpovds. 
 Rom. 12, 3 Trap" o del (ppovelv. 1 Cor. 4, 6. 
 Gal. 5, 10. Phil. 1, 7 TOVTO (bpovelv virep 
 vp.o>v. With an adv. or the like, 1 Cor. 13, 
 11 a>s vfjTrios efppovovv. Rom. 12, 3 (ppovelv 
 fly TO <ru(ppov(iv. Wisd. 14, 30. Jos. B. J. 
 5. 7. 4 ovSev vyies (bpove iv. Hdian. 4. 4. 1 
 ra evavrla. Dem. 319. 27. Thuc. 6. 36 
 KdKcoy. Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 8. 
 
 2. As including the affections, emotions, 
 to be minded, to think, to be disposed in mind, 
 c. accus. a) Genr. Phil. 2, 5 TOVTO yap 
 (bpovflo-Ha) ev vp. i.v o ev Xpiorw, i. e. let the 
 same mind be in you as in Christ. Phil. 3, 
 15 bis. Rom. [11,20.] 12, 16 TCI tyrjKa 
 (ppovflv, see in v^Xds no. 2. (So p-eya 
 (ppovflv Luc. D. Deor. 15. 1. Xen. Cyr. 3.1. 
 26.) In the phrase TO avrd V. TO ev (ppo- 
 vfiv, to lie of one mind, one accord, to 
 think the same tiling, Rom. 12, 16. 15, 
 5. 2 Cor. 13, 11. Phil. 2, 2 bis. 3, 16. 
 4, 2. So ra aura Jos. B. J. 5. 7. 4 ; TO 
 auTo Dion. Hal. Ant. 4. 20. Hdot. 1. 60. 
 b) Spec, to think, to mind, to favour, pr. to set 
 the mind and affections upon ; c. ace. Matt. 
 16, 23 et Mark 8, 33 ol (ppove is TO. TOV SfoC, 
 dXX TO rooz/ ai SpcoTrwi . Rom. 8, 5 (p. TO TIJS 
 <rap<6s. Phil. 3, 19 ra eVt yeta. Col. 3, 2 TO. 
 avca. So 1 Mace. 10, 20 (b. TO f]p.o)v. Jos. 
 B. J. 5. 13. 1. Hdian. 8. 6. 13. Xen. Hell. 
 4. 8. 24. 
 
 3. to mind, to regard, to care for ; with 
 wep TIVOS Phil. 4, 10 bis. So 2 Mace. 14, 8. 
 Spec, of time, to regard, (o keep, TT/V fip.e- 
 pav Rom. 14, 6 quater; com p. Gal. 4, 10. 
 
 (frp6vr)/jia, aros, TO, ((ppovfu.) pr. what 
 one has in mind, what one thinks, feels, 
 
 wills; hence, mind, thought, will; Rom 
 8, 27 ol8e TI TO (bpovrj/jia. TOV Tiwv/zaTOS. 
 V. 6 bis. 7 TO (pp6vrjfj.a TTJS crapxos KT\. 
 Jos. B. J. 4. 6. 1. Diod. Sic. 20. 12. Dem. 
 173. 23. Xen. Cyr. 2. 1. 13. 
 
 (ppovrjais, fa)s, 77, ((ppoi/ew,) a minding, 
 thinking, intention to do so or so, Soph. 
 (Ed. T. 664. In N. T. 
 
 1. mind, disposition, intention, i. e. the 
 mode of thinking and feeling; Luke 1, 17 
 ev (ppovfjo-fi Si/ccu coy. Luc. Amor. 47 rj 
 Seotj yeiTuv rjpuiicr) cbpovijo-is. 
 
 2. understanding, insight, prudence ; Eph. 
 
 1 , 8 ev irdo-r) o-o<pia KCU (ppovrjo-ft. Sept. for 
 fij^a Prov. 1,2. 7, 4 ; f ;13FJ Prov. 3, 13. 
 8, 1 ; finsn i K. 3, 28. 4, 29. Jos. Ant. 
 8. 7. 5. Luc. Haley. 6. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 
 10. Cic. de Off. 1. 43 "prudentia enim, 
 quam Graeci (bpovrja-tv dicunt, est rerum ex- 
 petendarum fugiendarumque scientia." 
 
 <f>p6vi/JLOS, TJ,OV, ((bpovea), ) having mind, 
 thinking, prudent, wise ; Matt. 7, 24 6/xoi- 
 wo aj avTov av8pl <ppovip.(j>. 10, 16. 24, 45. 
 25, 2. 4. 8. 9. Luke 12, 42. 1 Cor. 4, 10. 
 
 10, 15. Comparat. (bpomp.<oTpos Luke 16, 
 8. Also Trap eavTols (ppwipoi, wise in their 
 own conceit, Rom. 11, 25. 12, 16; impl. 
 
 2 Cor. 11, 19. Sept. for C=n i K. 3, 12 r 
 Trap" eavTw Prov. 3, 7 ; THJ Prov. 14, 6. 
 18, 15. Ceb. Tab. 3. Plut. Cato Maj. 9. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 1. ib. 4. 8. 11. 
 
 <f)povi/J,(i)S, adv. ((pp6vip.os,) with mind, 
 thinkingly, prudently, wisely, Luke 16, 8. 
 Xen. Ag. 1. 17. 
 
 (f)pOVTl(i), f. t o-o), ((bpovris, (bpoveca, 
 rjvj to take thought, to be thoughtful, 
 provident ; to take care, to be watchful ; 
 c. inf. Tit. 3, 8 Iva (ppoi>ri<i>o~i KO\>V 
 fpyw Trpoio-Tao-Zai. Sept. c. gen. for S^fl 
 Ps. 40, 18. 2 Mace. 2, 26. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 
 11. 12; c. Iva Pol. 2. 8. 8. 
 
 o>, f. Tjo-o), ((ppovpos, irpo- 
 opdw,) to watch, to keep watch, absol. Thuc. 
 8. 35. In N. T. and genr. 
 
 1. to watch, to guard, to keep ; e. g. of a 
 military watch, c. ace. 2 Cor. 11, 32 6 
 f Svapxr)! . . e(j)povprj(re Trjv TTO\IV. Trop. 
 as of a prisoner, Gal. 3, 23. Judith 3, 6. 
 Jos. B. J. 3. 8. 1. Hdian. 2. 13. 8. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 2. 12. 
 
 2. Trop. to keep, to preserve in any state ; 
 Phil. 4, 7 TO? KapSta? vp.vv ev Xpiarw. 
 Pass. 1 Pel. 1, 5 TOVS (bpopovptvovs fls cr<a- 
 njplav. Pr. Eurip. Ion 98. 
 
 (f)pvd(rcra> v. -rro), f. |o>, (kindr. /3pw, 
 Ppudfa,) in classic writers only Mid. depon 
 
769 
 
 <f>v\a/aj 
 
 4>pvd<r<rofjiai v. -rro/iat, to rage, to be fierce, 
 pr. of animals, as of horses high-spirited and 
 fierce, Callim. Hymn, in Lav. Pall. 2. Plut. 
 Lycurg. 22 ucrnfp ITTTTOIS yavpiaxri KOL 
 (ppvarrofnevois irpos TOVS dy<avas. Of per 
 sons acting with pride and insolence, 
 2 Mace. 7, 34. 3 Mace. 2, 2. Diod. Sic. 4. 
 74. In N. T. once in the Active voice, 
 aor. 1, to rage, to make a noise and tumult, 
 intrans. Acts 4, 25 Ivarl t(ppvaav t^vrj, 
 quoted from Ps. 2, 1 where Sept. for W^ . 
 (ppvyavov, ov, TO, (<ppvya>, (^putrcra),) a 
 dry stick or twig ; Plur. dry sticks, brush 
 wood ; Acts 28, 3 (ppvydvw TrXJjSlor. Sept. 
 for CJ? Is. 40, 24. 47, 14. Theophr. H. 
 Plant. 1. 5. Hdian. 4. 2. 21. Xen. An. 4. 
 
 3. 1 1 (frpvydva crvXXfyovrts o>? rt nvp. 
 (frpvyia, as, 17, Phrygia, an inland pro 
 vince of Asia Minor, bounded N. by Bithy- 
 nia and Galatia ; E. by Cappadocia and Ly- 
 caonia ; S. by Lycia, Pisidia and Isauria ; 
 and W. by Caria, Lydia and Mysia. Acts 
 2, 10. 16, 6. 18, 23. [1 Tim. 6, 23.] In 
 early times, Phrygia was divided into Phry 
 gia Major on the South, and Phrygia Minor 
 on the Northwest. The Romans divided it 
 mto three parts ; Phrygia Salutaris on the 
 East ; Phrygia Pacatiana on the West ; and 
 Phrygia Katakekaumene in the Middle. 
 The cities of Phrygia mentioned in N. T. 
 are Laodicea, Hierapolis, and Colossae ; An- 
 tioch of Pisidia was also within its limits. 
 Hdian. 1. 11. 3. Xen. An. 1. 2. 6sq. See 
 Strabo 12. p. 571,576. Cellar. Not. Orb. II. 
 p. 123 sq. 144-149. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. 
 
 1. ii. p. 202 sq. 
 
 rftvyeAA,^, ou, 6, PhygeUus, pr. n. of a 
 man who deserted Paul, 2 Tim. 1, 15. 
 
 <f)Vjrj, fff, {). (<et7,) a fleeing, flight, 
 Matt. 24, 20. Mark 13, 18. Sept. for OW 
 Jer. 49, 23 ; Oian Jer. 25, 35. 2 Mace. 
 12, 22. Hdian. 7. 12. 10. Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 28. 
 
 <f>v\aicrj, Jjs, T], ($iAao-o-(i>,) watch, 
 guard, i. e. 
 
 1. Pr. the act of keeping watch, guard- 
 inf ; Luke 2, 8 <f)v\do-<rovr(s <pv\a*ds, 
 watching watches, i. e. keeping watch or 
 guard, excubias agentes ; see Buttrn. J 131. 
 
 4. Sept. for rvroa i<fl Num. 1, 53. 3, 
 7. 29 sq. So (pv\aKds fpuXarrfiv Xen. An. 
 
 2. 6. 10. Cyr. 8. 6. 14. Plato Phaedr. 240. 
 e ; and genr. Pol. 6. 35. 1. Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 3. 
 
 2. Meton. of persons set to watch, a 
 watch, guard, collect, guards ; Acts 12, 10 
 fitfXSoires Of npvrrjv <f)v\aKi]v Kal otvrfpav. 
 Jos. B. J. 6. 2. 5. Dion. Hal. Ant 1. 
 86. Xen. Cyr. 3. 3. 33. 
 
 49 
 
 3. Meton. the place where watch is Kept, 
 e. g. a) a ivatch-post, station, pr. Sept. 
 for rnottJa Hab. 2, 1. Xen. Hell. 5. 4. 49. 
 Comp! Bar. 3, 34. In N. T. trop. of Baby 
 lon as the watch-post, station, haunt of de 
 mons and unclean birds, where they resort 
 and hold their vigils, Rev. 18, 2 bis. Comp. 
 Is. 34, 11 sq. Jer. 50, 39. 51, 37. Others 
 i. q. hold, den, cage, in which they are im 
 prisoned, as in lett. b ; but less well. b) 
 Of the place where any one is watched, 
 guarded, ward, custody, a prison, genr. 
 Matt. 5, 25 ds (pvXaKrjv fi\rfiT](TT]. 14, 3 
 e3ero tv <pv\aKrj. v. 10 dn(K((f)d\i(Tf roj/ lo)- 
 dvvr]v tv TTJ 0vXa*fl. 18, 30. 25, 36. 39. 43. 
 44. Mark 6, 17. 28. Luke 3, 20. 12, 58. 
 
 21, 12. 22, 33. 23, 19. 25. John 3, 24. 
 Acts 5, 19 ray Svpas rfjs (pvXaKrjs. v. 22. 25. 
 8, 3. 12, 4. 5. 6. 17. 16, 23. 24. 27. 37. 40. 
 
 22, 4. 26, 10. Rev. 2, 10. Spec, for im 
 prisonment, 2 Cor. 6, 5. 11, 23. Heb. 11, 
 36. Sept. genr. for lttJB Gen. 40, 3 sq. 
 Lev. 24, 12; rnqjj Neh. 3, 25; vb* JT3 
 1 K. 22, 27. So Arr. Epict. 1. 29 tis <j>v- 
 XaKTjv & /SaXcb. Diod. Sic. 4. 46 avrfjv fK 
 TT/S (^vXaKfjr d<pielcrav. Poet, of the bot 
 tomless pit, abyss, Tartarus, as the prison 
 of demons and the souls of wicked men, 
 1 Pet. 3, 19. Rev. 20, 7 ; comp. 2 Pet. 2, 
 4 and Jude 6. See in raprapoa), and comp. 
 Act. Thorn. { 10. 
 
 4. Meton. of time, a watch of the night, 
 a division of the night during which one 
 watch of soldiers kept guard, and were then 
 relieved; Luke 12, 38 bis, tv rrj dtvrfpa 
 <f)v\aKrj, KOI tv rfj TpiTT) tpvXaxfj. Matt. 14, 
 25 T(TapTT) 8t <pv\aKr/ TJJS WKTOS. 24, 43. 
 Mark 6, 48. The ancient Hebrews, and 
 probably the Greeks, divided the night, into 
 three watches of four hours each, Heb. 
 MIBUJK , Sept. (pvXaKr), Judg. 7, 19. Ps. 
 90, 6 ; see Heb. Lex. art. maiax . Bux- 
 torf Lex. Chald. 2454. Sturz Lex. Xenoph. 
 art. $vXaK>j no. 4. Potter s Gr. Ant. II. p. 
 74. VVetst. N. T. ad Matt. 14, 25. But 
 after the Jews came under the dominion of 
 the Romans, they made like them four 
 watches of about three hours each. These 
 were either numbered first, second, third, 
 fourth, as above ; or were also called o\^, 
 HTOVVKTIOV, d\(KTOpo<j>(i>via, Trpou ; see 
 Mark 13, 35, and these articles respect 
 ively. See Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 333. 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Castro, p. 250. Veget. R. 
 M. 3. 8, " in quatuor partes ad clepsydram 
 sunt divisae vigiliee, ut non amplius quam 
 tribus horis nocturnis necesse sit vigilare. 
 Censorin. de Die natal. 23. Jerome ad Matt. 
 14, " Stationes et vigiliae in terna horarum 
 
770 
 
 spatia dividuntur." See in art. TfrpdStoi/. 
 Jos. Ant. 18. 9. 6 Trepi 0. rerdpr^v. Arr. 
 Exp. Al. M. 5. 24. 2. Diod. Sic. 18. 40 
 yrept TJ)f fttvTfpav (p. Xen. An. 4. 1.5. 
 
 <f)V\aKl(i), f. io-a>, ((pvXaiejj,) to put in 
 ward, to imprison, c. ace. Acts 22, 19. 
 Wisd. 18, 4. Act. Thorn. $ 45 6 <pvXa<- 
 6fievos fv dfo-fj.oiTT)pM. Not found in clas 
 sic writers. 
 
 (j)V\aKTl]plOVj ov, TO, ((pv\a.KTT)p, (pv- 
 XriVa-w,) a watch-post, guarded place, Hdot. 
 5. 52. Pol. 8. 17. 1. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 12. 
 Trop. protection, safe-guard, Dem. 71. 24. 
 Plut. Arat. 25 ; hence, an amulet, Plut. de 
 Is. et Osir. 65, 68. Horapoll. 1. 24. In 
 N. T. Plur. TU (pv\aKTr)pia, phylacteries, 
 Heb. niEBlB prayer-fillets, later Heb. T^Ett 
 prayers, i. e. strips of parchment on which 
 are written various sentences of the Mosaic 
 law, (as Ex. 13, 1-10. 11-16. Deut. 6, 4-9. 
 
 11. 13-21,) and which the Jews since the 
 exile are accustomed to bind in different 
 ways around the forehead and left arm 
 while at prayer, following a literal interpre 
 tation of Ex. 13. 16. Deut. 6, 8. 11, 18. 
 The Rabbins have many minute precepts re 
 specting them. See Heb. Lex. art. ni BBlD. 
 Buxtorf Lex. Chald. 1743. Wetst. N. T. I. 
 p. 481. Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 13. Matt. 23, 5 
 n\aTvvov(TL Se TO (pvXciKTrjpia, see Lightf. 
 Hor. Heb. in loc. 
 
 <pl/Xa|;, QACOS, 6, (0t>XdW,) a watcher, 
 keeper, guard ; Acts 5, 23. 12, 6. 19. Sept. 
 for iieiB Gen. 4, 9. Is. 62, 6. Hdian. 3. 3. 
 
 12. Xen. Ath. 3. 4. 
 
 (f>v\d(raa) v. -TT&>, f. w , t watch, not 
 to sleep, Horn. Od. 20. 53 ; to keep walch by 
 night, Horn. Od. 5. 466. ib. 22. 1 95. In N. T. 
 
 1. Intrans. to watch, to keep watch, c. ace. 
 of the kindred noun ; Luke 2, 8 <pv\do-o~ov- 
 Tfs <pv\aicds. See fully in (pvXaxr) no. 1. 
 
 2. Trans, c. ace. to watch, to guard, to 
 keep, e. g. a) Persons or things from 
 escape or violence; persons, Luke 8, 29 
 eSeo-/ieiTO . . . (pv\a<T(rofj.fvof. Acts 12, 4 0. 
 avrav sc. rov Utrpov. 28, 1 6 ; tv rw TrpaiTca- 
 pia> 23, 35. Acc. TI, Luke 11, 21. Acts 
 22, 20 TCI i/iaria. Sept. for "lEKJ 1 Sam. 
 19, 11. Gen. 2, 15. 3, 24. So rlvd Hdian. 
 1. 17. 3. Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 40; , Palaeph. 
 19. 1. Ml V. H. 2. 4. Xen. Ag. 4. 1. 
 b) Of persons or things kept in safety, 
 to keep, to preserve, e. g. persons, John 17, 
 12 ovs 8(8a>Kas p.oi e(pv\aga. 2 Pet. 2, 5; 
 vpas dirraio-Tovs Jude 24 ; dnh TOV wovrj- 
 pov 2 Thess. 3, 3. Acc. ri, 1 Tim. 6, 20. 
 2^ Tim. 1, 14; c. ds fj^pav 2 Tim. 1, 12 ; 
 ft faqv John 12, 25. Sept. for 
 
 Prov. 6, 22. Ex. 23, 20 ; c. OTTO for -jo tO 
 Ps. 141, 9. So rivd Wisd. 19, 6. Hdian. 4. 
 4. 9 ; c. dVd Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 7 ; ri Dem. 
 25. 23; c. ds K aip6v JEl V. H. 9. 21. 
 c) Mid. and once Reflex, to keep oneselj 
 from or as to any thing, to be on one s 
 guard, to beware of, to avoid; e. g. with 
 djro TWOS, once reflex. 1 John 5, 21 <pv\d- 
 gore eavTovs dno ru>v ei8&>Acoj>. Mid. Luke 
 12, 15. (Reflex. Test. XII Patr. p. 648. 
 Mid. Ecclus. 22, 26. Xen. Cyr. 2. 3. 9.) 
 Mid. c. accus. to guard against, to beware. 
 of, Acts 21, 25. 2 Tim. 4, 15 ov nai <rv (f>v- 
 Xao-o-ou. Winer { 32. p. 255. (Jos. B. J. 4. 
 9. 11. Hdian. 3. 5. 9. Xen. Mem. 2. 2. 14.) 
 With Iva w, 2 Pet. 3, 17 0vXao-o-eo-3f, Iva 
 
 M . . . fKTTfVrjTf KT\. So O7T60S pr) Xen. 
 
 Mem. 1. 2. 37 ; /x7 Epict. Ench. 34. 
 
 3. Trop. to keep, to observe, not to violate, 
 e. g. precepts, laws, c. ace. Luke 11, 28 TOV 
 \6yov TOV 3eov. Acts 7, 53. 16, 4 ra fio-y/^a- 
 ra. 21,24r6 o /Li<H>. Rom. 2,26. Gal. 6, 13. 
 1 Tim. 5, 21. [John 12, 47.] Mid. Tramz rav- 
 ra (<pv\agdfjiT)v, all these have I kept of my 
 self, Matt. 19, 20. Mark 10, 20. Luke 18, 21. 
 Sept. for 1j Ps. 105, 45. Prov. 4, 4. sa^p. 
 ^?3 Prov. 6, 20; Sniy i K. 11, 38; niT5 
 Deut. 5, 15. Ecclus. 21, 11. Hdian. 1.7^ 
 12. Xen. Hell. 1. 7. 30. 
 
 <j>v\rj, 
 
 vu,) a kindred, 
 
 , , 
 
 race, tribe, descended from a common an 
 cestor, i. q. <pii\ov. 
 
 1. a race, people, nation; Matt. 24, 30 
 Tracrai 0vXai TT/S yfjs all the tribes (nations) 
 of the earth. Rev. 1, 7. Pleonast. 5, 9 
 TTOO-J/S (pvXrjs Kal y\a>crar)s Ka\ \aoii KOI ?3- 
 vovs. 7, 9. 11,9. 13,7. 14,6. Sept. for 
 nne-iJa Gen. 12, 3. Am. 3, 2. Mic. 2, 3 ; 
 t=b p r ov. 14, 34. Sept. Dan. 3, 4. 30. 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 25 Kara <f>v\ds, others Kara 
 (pvXa. ib. 8. 5. 7. Comp. Sturz Lex. Xen. 
 <pv\T] no. 4. 
 
 2. Spec, a tribe, clan, spoken of the tribes 
 of Israel, as subdivisions of a whole nation ; 
 Matt. 19, 28 et Luke 22, 30 uplvovrts TUS 
 dtaSfica <pv\ds TOV icrpa^X. Luke 2, 36 enc 
 <f)v\qs Acnjp. Acts 13, 21. Rom. 11, 1. 
 Phil. 3, 5. Heb. 7, 13. 14. James 1, 1. Rev. 
 5, 5. 7, 4. 5 ter. 6 ter. 7 ter. 8 ter. 21. 12. 
 Sept. for fiaa Ex. 31, 2. 6. saep. Mia Ex. 
 24, 4. Deut. 1, 13. saep. Jos. Ant. 7. 2. 2 
 TTJS Iov8a <pv\^f. ib. 10. 1. 1. So of 
 tribes, classes, orders in a state, Plut. Ro- 
 mul. 20. Dem. 556. 5. Xen. Mem. 3. 4. 5. 
 Vect. 4. 30. 
 
 <()vX\ov, ov, TO, ((pva>,) a leaf; Plur. TO 
 (pv\\a leaves, f oliage ; Matt. 21,19. 24,32. 
 Mark 11, 13 bis. 13, 28. Rev. 22, 2. Sept, 
 
771 
 
 for nbr Gen. 3, 7. 8, 11. Neh. 8, 17 
 V. H. 9. 24. Diod. Sic. 2. 49. Bern. 615. 10. 
 
 aros, TO, (<pupdo>, (pupco,) fit 
 kneaded mass. genr. a mass, lump ; e. g. of 
 potter s clay prepared for moulding, Rom. 
 9, 21. (Geoponic. 15. 2. 8.) Of a mass of 
 dough, proverbially, 1 Cor. 5, 6 et Gal. 5, 
 9 ; see in fup.?;. Trop. Rom. 11, 16 see in 
 dnapxri no. 2. 1 Cor. 5, 7. Sept. for fiO^I? 
 Num. 15, 20. 21 ; rnxiS? Ex. 8, 3. 12* 34"! 
 M. Antonin. 7. 68 ; a kind of cake Athen. 
 9. p. 402. 
 
 (f)V(riKO$) 77, 6v, (<pvo-ty,) physical, natu 
 ral, from or by nature, Test. XII Patr. p. 
 648 TixpXoi TOVS (pvartKovs o<p3aXp,ovj avrov. 
 Arr. Epict. 3. 24. 91. Xen. Mem. 3. 9. 1. 
 In N. T. natural, according to nature, <pu- 
 (TtKr) xp*j~ ls Rom. 1, 26. 27. Of beasts, 
 Xoya a>a, (pvtrtAcd, i. e. following their na 
 tural bent, sensual, brutish, 2 Pet. 2, 12. 
 So Arr. Epict. 2. 20. 6 (pvo-iKr) Koivuvia dv- 
 SpcoTTtoi rrpos dXXijXoir. Luc. Somn. s. Gall. 
 27. Diod. Sic. 3. 61 or 62. 
 
 <f)V(Tl,K(0s, adv. ( (pvcriKos, ) physically, 
 naturally, from or by nature ; Jude 10 oara 
 8e (pvo~iKcos, cor Ta a\oya &>a, firi&TavTai, 
 naturally, by the natural senses, sensually. 
 Diog. Laert. 10. 137 fpvo-iK&s /cat ^copty 
 Xoyou. Diod. Sic. 20. 5. 
 
 (f>vcnoct), <i, f. coo-a), in N. T. i. q. cpvo-t- 
 da), ((pvo~d<o, (pvo~a, <pva>,) pr. to blow, to 
 puff, to pant ; so (puo-idco intrans. of horses, 
 Horn. II. 4. 227. ib. 16. 506. In N. T. 
 (pvo-io co trop. to puff up. to inflate with pride 
 and vanity, absol. 1 Cor. 8, 1 17 yvvo-is <pv- 
 o-toi. Pass, or Mid. 1 Cor. 4, 18.- 19. 5, 2. 
 13, 4; VTTtp TIVOS 1 Cor. 4. 6; VTTO TWOS 
 Col. 2, 18. So Test. XII Patr. p. 579 KOTO 
 
 TU)V (lTO\(t3V TOV 3eoO (pV(TlOV[Ji(VOl. IgHat. 
 
 ad Magnes. j 12 oi Sa on ov (pv(Tiovo~%f p.t] 
 npofffxfiv Tails (pvcriov<riv p.t. Hesych. <pw- 
 oriovp.f Sa Vaipo /ie3a, rvcpnvp.f Sa. In clas 
 sic writers <puo - tdco comes from <pv<ris, and 
 signifies to make natural, Simplic. in Epict. 
 p. 219 ; see Passow s. v. 
 
 ^>fO"t9, fats, f], (<puco,) physis, nature, 
 pr. vis genilr-ic, generative and productive 
 power ; like Lat. natura from nascor. 
 Hence, 
 
 1. nature, i. e. natural source or origin, 
 generation, birth, descent; Gal. 2, 15 i^p-etr 
 (pvo-fi lovSalot. Rom. 2. 27 fj e *c (pvo-tcas 
 aKpoflvaria. Pol. 3. 12. 3 TOV ai/Tov Kcrra 
 (pvo-tv vlov. Luc. de Merc. cond. 24 d ofrvorei 
 SovXor ntrSa. Plato Menex. 245. d, (pvo-tt 
 
 2. a nature, as generated, produced, na 
 turally existing, a being, genus, kind ; James 
 
 3, 7 bis, nacra yap (pvo-is Sr/pt ojj/ . . . SfSd/za- 
 o-rat rjj (pvcTfi rfj dv Spumivr). Gal. 4, 8 rolr 
 P.T] <pv<Tfi oven Sfolr, i. q. oi Xfyo p-fi/ot 3foi 
 in 1 Cor. 8, 5. 3 Mace. 3, 29 rrao-a Sw/ri) 
 (f>v(Tis. Epict. Ench. 27 ouSe KUKOV (pvo-is tv 
 Koafjia) yivtrai. Soph. O3d. R. 869 3j/ar 
 <fiv<ris dv(pa>v. Xen. Venat. 3. 1. 
 
 3. the nature of any person or thing, the 
 natural constitution, the innate disposition 
 and qualities. a) Of persons, in a moral 
 sense, the native mode of thinking, feeling, 
 acting, as unenlightened by the influence of 
 divine truth ; Eph. 2, 3 rinva (puo- opy>J?. 
 Rom. 2, 14 (pva-fi TU rov vopov Trot^. By 
 analogy, once of the divine moral nature, 
 2 Pet. 1 , 4 Set as Koivtavol <pvo-e& s, partakers 
 of the divine (moral) nature, i. e. regenerat 
 ed in heart and disposition. So Wisd. 7, 20. 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 8. 1 (pvcrei Tfdvras dvai (j)i\av- 
 TOVS. Dem. 774. 8, 11 17 fj.ev <pvo-ir av y no- 
 vrjpd, TroXXaKtf (paCXa /3ovX iirai. Xen. Mem. 
 
 2. 1. 27. So in a physical sense, Jos. B. J. 
 7. 6. 1 17 TOV \u>piov <pv<rts. Xen. CEc. 16. 2 
 rrjv (p. TIJS yqs. Spec, a natural feeling 
 of decorum, a native sense of propriety, e. g. 
 in respect to national customs in which one 
 is born and brought up ; 1 Cor. 11, 14 ov8t 
 ai/rfj fj (pvffis o~i8do~K(i vfias, on <iW7p p.(v eav 
 Kofid drifiia aurco tart , doth not your own 
 natural feeling teach you 1 It was the na 
 tional custom among both the Hebrews and 
 Greeks, for men to wear the hair short, and 
 women to wear it long. Among the He 
 brews, comp. the law of the Nazarite Num. 
 6, 1 sq. Judg. 13, 5. 1 Sam. 1,11; genr. 
 Ez. 44, 20 ; for women, Is. 3,24. Judith 10, 
 
 3. Luke 7, 38. For the Greek custom, see 
 espec. Plut. QuaBSt. Rom. 14. Hdot. 1. 82. 
 Phocylid. 199 sq. Diet, of Antt. art. Coma. 
 b) Genr. the nature of things, the order and 
 constitution of nature ; e. g. Kara (pvo-tv, 
 according to nature, natural, Rom. 11, 21. 
 24 bis. Also irapa (pvo~iv, contrary to nature, 
 unnatural, Rom. 1, 26. 11, 24. Comp. 
 Wetst. N. T. II. p. 24 sq. So Kara <. Luc. 
 Vit. Auct. 23. Xen. Mem. 3. 11. 11 ; napd 
 (p. Athen. 13. p. 605. d, oi napa <pvo-iv rfi 
 
 ot. Philo Leg. Spec. II. p. 
 
 306. 17 6 Se nato epaa Tys . TTJV irapa <pvo~tv 
 uiHCft. Xen. Hi. 1. 22. 
 
 up, inflation, trop. with pride and vanity, 
 2 Cor. 12, 20. Hesych. (pvo-iWtr eirap- 
 cris, v\lrr)\o(ppoo-vvT). 
 
 (j)vreutj as, f], ((pvTfvw,) a planting, the 
 act of planting, rrjs dp.nf\ov Sept. Mic. 1,6. 
 Jos. Ant. 12. 3. 4. Xen. CEc. 19. 12. In 
 N. T. a plantation, plant, i. q. rpvrevp-a, trop. 
 Matt. 15, 13 nda-a (pvrfla KT\. refer ring to 
 
772 
 
 the teaching and traditions of the Pharisees. 
 Psalt. Salotn. 14, 3 17 (pvrfia avr&v f ppi- 
 (opftT] (Is rov alaiva. Pr. Athen. 5. p. 207. e. 
 
 <j)VTVO), f. evcrd), ((bvrov, (pva>,) to plant ; 
 C. ace. Matt. 21, 33 t(pvTfv<Tfv dp,n(\a>va. 
 Mark 12, 1. Luke 20, 9. 1 Cor. 9, 7. Luke 
 13, 6 O-VKTJV. Absol. 17, 28. Pass. Luke 17, 
 6. Sept. for SB3 Gen. 9, 20. Deut. 6, 1 1 ; 
 5sniy Ps. 1, 3. (Diod. Sic. 3. 62. Dem. 1275. 
 9. Xen. CEc. 4. 21.) Trop. Matt. 15, 13, 
 see in <pvTfia. Of a teacher planting the 
 word of divine truth, absol. 1 Cor. 3, 6. 7. 8. 
 
 <f}V(O, f. ^>vo-&j, to generate, to produce, to 
 bring forth, to let grow, e. g. plants, Horn. 
 II. 1. 235. Luc. Epist. Sat. 20. Diod. Sic. 1. 
 10 ; Kapnov Jos. Ant. 3. 1. 1. Hdot. 9. 122 ; 
 persons, avdpas (pvftv, to beget, to bear, 
 Hdot. 9. 122. Eurip. Phoen. 34. Pass. <vo- 
 pai, also Act. aor. 2 ecpvv (as if from a 
 pres. (pvfju) and perf. irt(pvKa as intrans. to 
 be generated, produced, to spring up, to grow, 
 e. g. plants, Sept. Prov. 26, 9. Xen. Mem. 
 4. 3. 10; f<f>w Xen. CEc. 19. 8; irtyvKa 
 Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 11 ; of persons, to be born, 
 to grow up, to be by nature, Plut. conjugal. 
 PrsEC. 42 ; f(pw Luc. Gymnas. 20. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 3. 4 ; iri^vKa Hdian. 4. 9. 4. Xen. 
 Cyr. 5. 1. 7. Trop. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 11 
 
 tTKOTTtoV, OTTCOS 6 KO(Tp.OS ((f>V. See Buttm. 
 
 $ 114. Kiihner j 192. 11. Matth. 254. In 
 N. T. 
 
 1. Pass. aor. 2 f(pvr]v, part, (pvds, to 
 spring up, to grow ; e. g. a plant, see above ; 
 Luke 8, 6 KOI <pv(i> tiy>ajfai], sc. TO o-TTf p/za 
 V. TO (pvrov, V. 8 (pvev eTToirjcre KapTrov. 
 This form of the Aor. is used only by late 
 writers, instead of the earlier ecpw, see 
 above; Buttm. 1. c. Winer 15. Schol. in 
 Apoll. Rhod. 2. 354 t ys [x^V f ] <pvrjvai 
 TO Ka\ovp.evov anovirov <pdpp.aKov. So crv^i- 
 (pvtis Philo de Vit. Mos. II. p. 174. 12; 
 comp. in <rvp.(pva>. 
 
 2. Act. intrans. to spring up, to grow up ; 
 Heb. 12, 15 pia TrtKpias ava> <pvov<ra, 
 quoted from Deut. 29, 17 where Sept. for 
 Heb. rnB. Ecclus. 14, 18. 
 
 <o>Xeo9, oO, 6, a hole, burrow, lurking- 
 place of animals, Matt. 8, 20. Luke 9, 58. 
 JEl. H. An. 6. 3. Plut. T. Gracch. 9. 
 
 <&)!/&>, u>, f. 770-0), ((fxavr),) to sound, to 
 utter a sound, voice, cry. 
 
 1. Intrans. and absol. a) Of animals, 
 e. g. a cock, to crow, Matt. 26, 34. 74. 75. 
 Mark 14, 30. 68. 72 bis. Luke 22, 34. 60. 
 61. John 13, 38. 18, 27. So JEsop. Fab. 
 119; of other birds, Sept. Jer. 17, 11. Is. 
 38, 14 ; of beasts, to cry, Zeph. 2, 14 ; of 
 a trumpet, Sept. for sp?m Am. 3, 6. 1 Mace. 
 
 9, 12. b) Of persons, to cry out, to ex 
 claim, to call out; Luke 8, 8 e <o>m 6 
 fXW &TO. KT\. v. 54 f(bo)i>f)(re Xe ycov. 16, 
 24. Acts 10, 18. So with dat. of kindred 
 noun, Luke 23, 46 (puvi]a-as (puvfj p.fyd\y. 
 Acts 16, 28. With dat. of pers. to whom 
 Rev. 14, 18. Sept. for jopj Dan. 4, 11: 
 SiattJri 1 Chr. 15, 16. So Esdr. 8, 92. 
 Luc. Jup. Trag. 17. Xen. Conv. 3. 13. 
 
 2. Trans, to cry or call to any one, to 
 speak to. to address, to call, c. ace. a) 
 Genr. with the words spoken, as a title or 
 the like ; to call one so or so, to name ; John 
 13, 13 vfjifis (pcovelrf jue 6 StSdo-KaXoj KOI 
 6 Kvpios. Comp. Horn. Od. 4. 77. b) 
 As implying invitation to come near or to 
 the speaker ; Matt. 20, 32 tfbuvnve avrovs. 
 Mark 3, 31. 9, 35 ((putvrjo-e roi s 8<a8fKa. 
 
 10, 49 ter. Luke 16, 2. John 1, 49. 2, 9. 
 4, 16. 9, 18. 24. [10,3.] 11, 28 bis. 18,33. 
 Acts 9, 41. 10,7; c. dat. avrm Luke 19,15, 
 
 1. q. irpbs alrov, comp. Winer 31.2. Matth. 
 { 401. 3. (So c. irpos Tob. 5, 8.) With e *, 
 to call one out of any place, John 12, 17 ; 
 comp. 11, 43. Also, to invite to a feast, 
 Luke 14, 12 ; to call out to any one for 
 help, Matt. 27, 47 et Mark 15, 35 H\/a> 
 <pa>vt1. So Soph. Aj. 73 A iavra <f>a>vi, 
 comp. v. 89. ib. 543. Theocr. Id. 2. 109. 
 
 <j)(avr] : ;}$., jy, (obs. (pda>, kindr. fopl ) 
 a sound, tone, as given forth or uttered. 
 
 1 . Genr. and spoken of things, a sound , 
 e. g. of a trumpet or other instrument, 
 Matt. 24, 31. 1 Cor. 14, 7. 8. (Sept. for 
 Wp Ez. 2, 6. 13. Dan. 3, 5. 7. 10.) Of 
 the wind, John 3, 8. Acts 2, 6 comp. v. 2. 
 Sept. 1 Sam. 12, 18. Of rushing wings, 
 chariots, waters, Rev. 9, 9. 14, 2. 18, 22. 
 19, 6. (Sept. and il p Ez. 1, 24. 3, 13. 
 26, 10. Nah. 3, 2.) Of thunder, $*$ 
 PpoiTTJs Rev. 6, 1. 14, 2. 19, 6; <pcava\ KOI 
 Ppovrai Rev. 4, 5. 8, 5. 11, 19. al. (Sept. 
 and Wp Ex. 19, 16. 20, 18. 1 Sam. 7, 10. 
 Ecclus. 43, 17.) So <ba>VT) pij/jLarmv, the 
 sound (resounding) of the words, the thun 
 ders in which the words of the law were 
 proclaimed, Heb. 12, 19; comp. Ex. 19, 19. 
 Poll. On. 4. 11. p. 397 tmois S av TO 
 (bSfyfia rrjs craXmyyos (pwfjv. Jos. Ant. 12. 
 
 2. 1 TU>V S.vpuiV ypap.p.d.TO)V %apaKTT)p KO\ 
 (pa>vrj. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 6 TTJV dicoTjv x- 
 cr%ai Trdcras <pa>vds. 
 
 2. Spec, a voice, cry, spoken of persons, 
 a) Pr. and genr. as in phrases, with verbs 
 
 of speaking, calling, crying out, (pcaiy pt- 
 yd\r) Matt. 27, 46. 50. Mark 5, 7. 15, 34. 
 Luke 8, 28. John 11, 43. Acts 8, 7. Rev. 
 6, 10 ; tv fj.(yd\Tj (puvfj Rev. 14, 15 ; 
 
773 
 
 uryd\Tjs (pav^s Luke 17, 15. Sept. for bl p 
 Neh. 9, 4. Job 2, 12 ; c. tv 2 Sam. 19, 4 
 (Hdian. 1. 8. 12. Luc. Nigr. 14. Xen. Cyr 
 3. 3. 58.) So u(/)uV<u 0. /*yaXj7 , /o w 
 a loud cry, to cry with a loud voice, Mark 
 15, 37 ; aipfiv V. tnaiptiv (fxavrjv, to lift up 
 the voice, i. q. to cry or call aloud, Luke 11, 
 27. 17, 13. Acts 2, 14. 4, 24. 14, 11. 22, 
 22; see in alpu>, tiraipca. (Dem. 301. 10.) 
 Luke 23, 23 (jrtKfivro ptydXais (fxav 
 So where the voice of one speaking, crying 
 out, wailing, is said to be, to come, or the 
 like ; as <pu>vri tyivtro Luke 9, 36. Acts 7, 
 3 1 ; irpos Tiva Acts 1 0, 13; <p. (ptptTai nvi 
 2 Pet. 1, 17, com p. in (pepv no. 3; with 
 fK C. gen. as ^XBI/I) e yeVero V. e/a^erat V. 
 tfpX e * K TWOSI 6. g. t ovpavov V. < 
 r<av ovpavuv, Matt. 3, 17. Luke 3, 22. John 
 12, 28 ; < T^S vffeXrjs Mark 9, 7. Luke 9, 
 35; tK TTavrcov Acts 19, 34; with an 6 c. 
 gen. id. Rev. 16, 17. (Sept. c. tVc Is. 66, 6 ; 
 c. cm6 Zeph. 1, 11.) Also tucovn* (fxavrfv 
 v. <pa>vT]s, lo hear a voice, Matt. 2, 18. Acts 
 9, 4. 7. Rev. 6, 6 ; with c. gen. as 
 ovpavov 2 Pet. 1 , 18; eVc TQ>V Tecrer. Ktp. 
 Rev. 9, 13; t< TOV ord/Aaror Acts 22, 14. 
 Rev. 1, 10 T)Kov<Ta o-rritrat pov (ptovfjv fity. 
 v. 12 ft\tiTfiv TT)v (fxavr/v, see in /SXtVa) no. 
 2. a. Sept. Gen. 3, 8. 10. 4, 22. (Dem. 
 240. 12.) With gen. of pers. Matt. 3, 3 
 <fru>vr] jSoeojTOf iv Ttj fprjfjicp. 12, 19. Mark 
 
 I, 3. John 5, 25 <. rov vlov TOV Scot). 
 V. 28. 37. Acts 12, 14 $. TOV Ilerpov. v. 
 22. 1 Thess. 4. 16. Heb. 12, 26. Rev. 5, 
 
 II. 19, 1 0. oxXou. 19, 6. (Sept. Gen. 27, 
 22. 1 Sam. 24, 17. Palaeph. 7. 1. Xen. 
 Apol. 12.) Also of song, c. gen. <$>a>vr) 
 Ki3apo>8&>i> Rev. 18, 22 ; <p. wp.(piov KOI 
 vvfifas v. 23. Sept. Jer. 16, 8. 25, 10. Of 
 salutation, 17 <p. TOV do-Traa-fjiov <rov, i. q. thy 
 saluting voice, Luke 1, 44. To the voice 
 as the instrument of speech, is sometimes 
 ascribed that which strictly applies only to 
 the person ; comp. in o<3oX/idr no. 2. 
 Thus, aKoveiv TTJS (fxavrfs TLVOS, to hear [and 
 obey] one s voice, i. e. to obey the person 
 himself. John 10, 16. 27. Heb. 3, 7. 15. 4, 
 7. So Sept. Gen. 3, 17. 16, 3. 27, 13. 
 Trop. Gal. 4, 20 aXXd^at riji> ^xui/iji/ p.ov, to 
 change my voice, as in Engl. lo change one s 
 tone, to speak in a different manner and spi 
 rit. Comp. Xen. Conv. 1. 10. 
 
 b) Meton. what is uttered by the voice, a 
 word, saying; Acts 13, 27 ray (fxavas rS>v 
 npofaTw. 24,21. So^El.V.H.4.8. Plut. 
 Timol.5. Diod.Sic.20. 30. Xen.Ven. 13. 16. 
 
 c) Melon, of a manner of speaking, speech, 
 language, dialect; 1 Cor. 14, 10 Toa-avra 
 yivT} (fxavvv tv T<B Kocr/ia>. V. 11. Sept. and 
 
 12? Gen. 11, 1. Jos. Ant. 8. 5. 3 17 <&>- 
 vr) EXXqj/i/cij. Ceb. Tab. 33. Hdian. 5. 3. 8 
 Xen. An. 4. 8. 4. + 
 
 <p(ty>, (pa>TOf, TO, ((paa>, contr. for 0dor,) 
 light, pr. with the idea of shining, bright 
 ness, splendour. 
 
 1. Pr. and genr. a) Of light in itself, 
 2 Cor. 4, 6 6 tiTruv eVc CTKOTOVS (pa>s \dfj.\^ai. 
 Matt. 17, 2 XfVKa us TO (pS>s. V. 5 i/e0e X?; 
 0curo y, i. e. a bright cloud ; Rec. vp. $&>- 
 Tfivi]. Sept. and liK Gen. 1, 3. 4. 18. So 
 Luc. Philopatr. 13. Xen. Conv. 6. 7. b) 
 As emitted from a luminous body ; e. g. a 
 lamp. 0. \vxvov Luke 8, 16. Rev. 18, 23 ; 
 of the sun, <p. TOV f]\lov Rev. 22, 5. Sept. 
 for "ViX Is. 30, 26. Jer. 25, 10 ; n?3 Is. 4, 
 5. So Andoc. 9. 38 0. TOV ijXi ov. Diod. Sic. 
 3. 48. Xen. Conv. 7. 4 Xv^vos (f)a>s Trapt^ti. 
 c) Of day-light, day, John 11, 9. 10, opp. 17 
 vvg. John 3, 20 bis, 6 <j)av\a irpdva-aiv, pi- 
 a-fl TO (j)us KT\. v. 2 1 ; (v T<a (f>a>Tt, in the 
 light, openly, publicly, opp. tv rj; o-Koria, 
 Matt. 10, 27. Luke 12, 3. So Eph. 5, 13 
 bis, opp. a-KOTos in v. 1 1 ; comp. in <pavt- 
 poa. Sept. and "il X 1 Sam. 25, 34. 36. 
 Job 3, 16. So JE\. V. H. 10. 3. Pol. 1. 
 45. 6. Xen. An. 6. 3. 2. d) Of the daz 
 zling light, splendour, glory, which sur 
 rounds the throne of God, in which God 
 dwells ; 1 Tim. 6, 16 0d>j OIKCOV dirp6o~iTov 
 sc. 6 3fo ?. Rev. 21, 24. Comp. Ps. 104, 2. 
 Is. 60, 1.19. 20. Wisd. 7, 26 ; see in 86ga 
 no. 3. b. (Comp. Plut. Pericl. 39 TOV /V 
 
 T07TOV (V 0) TOVS SfOUS KO.TOIKC "lV \fyoV(Tll> . . . 
 
 (purl AcaSapw TOV airavra \p6vov 6p.aXo>s 
 irfpi\afjLTr6fjii/ov.) Hence also as surround 
 ing those who dwell with or come from 
 God ; e. g. the Lord Jesus Christ, as ap 
 pearing in glory after his ascension, Acts 
 9, 3 (puts dno TOV ovpavov, comp. v. 5. 22, 
 6. 9. 11. 26, 13; of angels Acts 12, 7. 
 2 Cor. 11, 14 ; of glorified saints, Col. 1,12 
 K\f)pos T>V ayiuiv tv rw (purl. Comp. Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 2. 15. 
 
 2. Meton. a light, a luminous body, e. g. 
 a) a lamp or torch, Acts 16, 29 atrijo-aj 8e 
 <f>S>Ta. Sept. and "il x Ps. 119, 105. So 
 Xen. Hell. 5. 1. 8. b) afire, Mark 14, 54 
 ^fpp.aiv6fj.(vos irpos TO (f)>s. Luke 22, 5fi. 
 So 1 Mace. 12, 29. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 27. 
 c) Of the heavenly luminaries, the sun, 
 moon, and stars ; James 1, 17 dirb naTpbs 
 <pd>Ta>v, see in iraTrjp fin. Sept. and 
 Jer. 4,23. So of the sun, Dem. 1396. 
 15. d) Trop. of intellectual light, ro <j)a>s 
 TO tv <roi, i. e. the mind, reason, judgment, 
 6 vovs, corresponding to o \v%vos et p 6(p- 
 , Matt. 6, 23. Luke 1 1 , 35. Comp. 
 
774 
 
 Philo de cond. Mundi I. p. 12 oirtp vovs fv 
 V^Xffj TOVTO o(fo^5a\p.os (V o-co/Aart. 
 
 3. Trop. Zi^fa, i. e. moral and spiritual 
 light and knowledge, which enlightens the 
 mind, soul, conscience ; including also the 
 idea of moral goodness, purity, and holiness, 
 and of consequent .reward and happiness ; 
 opp. o-KOTia v. CTKOTOS where see. a) Genr. 
 light, i. e. the true knowledge of God and 
 spiritual things, Christian piety ; John 3, 19 
 bis, fjyaTrrjcrav p.a\\ov TO CTKOTOJ fj TO (foots. 
 8, 12 TO (foots TIJS (JcoTJs. Acts 26, 18 TOW eVt- 
 crTpo^ai aTro O~KOTOVS (Is (foots. Rom. 13, 12. 
 2 Cor. 6, 14. Eph. 5, 9. 1 John 2, 8 ; viol TOV 
 (footTos, i. e. Christians, Luke 16, 8. John 12, 
 36. 1 Thess. 5, 5 ; rtuva (footTos id. Eph. 5, 
 8 ; ib. T)T( iroTf O~KOTOS, vvv Se (foots (v Kvpiat, 
 
 1. q. (foo>Ti6p.(voi. So ev T< (footT\ elvai, fj.f- 
 vtiv, 1 John 2, 9. 10. As exhibited in the 
 life and teaching of any one ; Matt. 5, 16 
 \afj.^f6.TOt TO (foots vfj.aiv ffJLirp. Totv dv^p. 
 John 5, 35. (Sept. n-optv ^otp.ev ev TW (foatTt 
 xvpiov, for "ri&t Is. 2, 5.) So where the 
 idea of holiness predominates ; as of God 
 and those conformed to him, 1 John 1,56 
 3eor (foots m. v. 7 bis. Where the idea 
 of peace and happiness predominates ; 1 Pet. 
 
 2, 9 ToC ex. O~KOTOVS vfids Ka\(o~avros (Is TO 
 3av/i. OVTOU (foots. Matt. 4, 16 bis, 6 Xaoy 6 
 KaSStfUtvos tv ovcdrct, (iB( (foots peya, KT\. 
 quoted from Is. 9, 1 where Sept. for *rist. 
 Acts 26, 23. Sept. and list Ps. 36, 10. Is. 
 58, 8. 10. So i. q. welfare, deliverance, Anth. 
 Gr. I. p. 63. b) Meton. a light, i. q. the 
 author or dispenser of moral and spiritual 
 light, a moral teacher; genr. Rom. 2, 19 
 (foots Totv tv o-Koret. Of apostles, Matt. 5, 14 
 vfj.(is e ore TO (foots TOV Kocrp-ov. Acts 13, 47 
 T&fiitd o-e tls (fools eSvoiv, quoted from Is. 
 49, 6 where Sept. and -iis< ; also 42, 6. 
 Espec. of Jesus as the great Teacher and 
 Saviour of the world, who brought life and 
 immortality to light in his Gospel (2 Tim. 
 1, 10) ; Luke 2, 32 (foots (Is diroKa\v\lfiv 
 tevuv. John 1, 4. 5. 7. 8 bis. 9. 8, 12 (fo. 
 TOV Koo-p.ov. 9, 5. 12, 35 bis. 36 bis. 46. 
 So Test. XII Patr. p. 578 TO (fovs TOV 
 Koo-fiov sc. the Messiah, p. 644 awrreXet 
 vp.1v avTos Kvpios, (foots diKaioo-vvrjs. p. 
 746 sq. 
 
 , rjpos, 6, ((foots, (fo<oo-Ka>,) pr. a 
 light, light-giver, in classic writers, i. q. a 
 window, Hesych. <^>coorr;p Svpis. In N. T. 
 a light, luminary ; Phil. 2,15 $mlt*rt o>s 
 (footo-rrjpfs (v Koo-fiot. Sept. of the heavenly 
 luminaries, for " l ^ s ?) Gen. 1, 14. 16. 
 (Wisd. 13, 2 (fo. ovpavov. Psalt. Sal. 18, 12. 
 Theoph. ad Autol. 2. p. 94.) Meton. bright- 
 
 ness, shining, spoken of the divine glory, 
 Soa, Rev. 21, 11 ; com p. in (foots no. 1. d. 
 
 <f>G)cr(f)6po<>, ov, 6, T), adj. ((foots, <//><,) 
 light-bearing, light-giving, shining, radiant ; 
 e. g. ofj.p.aTa (foo>o-(fo6pa, Plut. de Fortun. 3 ; 
 aaTpov cuSepiov nal (footo-(foopov, i. e. the 
 moon, Plut de Fac. in Orbe Lun. 4. In 
 N. T. Subst. 6 (fou>o-(fo6pos, Phosphorus, 
 Lar. Lucifer, as pr. name of the morning 
 star, the day-s/ar ; put as emblematic of the 
 dawn of spiritual light and happiness upon 
 the benighted mind, 2 Pet. 1, 19; comp. in 
 (foots no. 3. So pr. Plut. de Placit. Philos. 
 2. 1 5. Plato Tim. Locr. 96. e. 
 
 ^wuretvo?, 77, ov, ((foots,) light, shining, 
 bright; Matt. 17, 5 Rec. ve(fo\r) (footTtivfj. 
 Others v((fo. (fouTos. So Ecclus. 17, 31. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 4. Trop. of the body,/wZZ 
 of light, all light, Matt. 6, 22. Luke 11, 34. 
 36 bis. Comp. Act. Thorn. 6. 
 
 <ft>T/<0, f. io-ot, ((foots,) to light, to 
 lighten, i. e. 
 
 1. Intrans. to give light, to shine, c. eVi 
 Ttva, Rev. 22, 5 Kvpios 6 Seos (footTel eV av- 
 Tovy, where for the Attic fut. see Butfm. 
 5 95. 7, 9. Rec. has (foatTt&i avTovs, as in 
 no. 2. Sept. for lix, TW;, Num. 8, 2. 
 Prov. 4, 18. Ecclus. 43, 9. Theophr. Fr. 
 de Lap. 3. 30 6 ai/3pa ov (foo>Ti(i ato~7T(p f) 
 <Xrf 
 
 2 Trans, to give light to, to shine upon, to 
 enlighten, e. g. 
 
 a) Pr. and c. ace. Luke 11, 36 o>s OTOV 6 
 \v%vos Trf do-Tpanfj (footTi^d. ere. Rev. 21, 
 23. Pass. Rev. 18, 1. Sept. for 1^ Is. 
 60, 19. Diod. Sic. 3. 48 6 jjXios ... $om - 
 
 (l TOV KOQ-fHOV. 
 
 b) Trop. c. ace. of pers. to light, to en 
 lighten, to impart moral and spiritual light, 
 to enlighten the mind or mental eyes of any 
 one; comp. in (foots no. 3. John 1, 9 6 
 [<a>s] (foorTi^d TrdvTa av^potnov. Pass. Eph. 
 
 1, 18 7T((footTl(TfJ:(VOVS TOVS 6(fo%a\fJLOVS T1JS 
 
 Siavoias. Heb. 6, 4. 10, 32. Sept. and 
 ^SWi Ps. 119, 130. . Bar. 1, 8. Hence, to t 
 teach, to instruct ; Eph. 3, 9 (fouTio-ai irdvras, 
 TIS f] oiKovofj.ta KT\. Sept. for rnin Judg. 
 13, 8. 2 K. 12, 2. 17, 27. So Diod. Laert. 
 1. 57. ib. 4. 67. Hesych. ((footTicrw (8i- 
 8ag(v. 
 
 c) With ace. of thing, to bring to light, 
 to make known ; 1 Cor. 4, 5 os /cat (footTio-a. 
 TO KpvTrra TOV O-KOTOVS. 2 Tim. 1, 10 (footTi- 
 o-avTos 8e fafjv KT\. Arr. Epict. 1. 4. 31 
 
 v. Pol. 23. 3. 10. 
 
 ov, 6, ((foo>Tiot,) a lighting, 
 giving light, shining, pr. Sept. for 11X tv 
 
775 
 
 .w nvpos Ps. 78, 14. 44, 3. Job 3, 9. 
 Hesych. 0omo-/xdf avyfj, Tr)\avy(s, KO.TO.V- 
 yafav. In N. T. trop. of moral and spiri 
 tual light, illumination, comp. in <po>s no. 3. 
 E. g. with gen. of that which illumines, 
 2 Cor. 4, 4 fls TO fifj avydo-ai TOV (ptaTio-p,bv 
 TOV fvayyeXtov. 2 Cor. 4, 6 npos 
 
 T?)S yvuHTtats, i. q. npos TO <pa>Tifiv irjv yi>b>- 
 triv, i. e. in order to make luminous the 
 knowledge, to impart it to others ; comp. 
 Eph. 3, 9. So Sept. for "HX Ps. 27, 1 . Test. 
 XII Patr. p. 578 TO <pr TOV Koo-p.ov, TO 
 iv vp.Ii/ Trpbs (p(i>Tio~p.bv iravrbs dv- 
 
 X. 
 
 f. xaipf]o-u, later and in N. T. 
 fut. xapijo-op-at Luke 1, 14. John 16, 20. 
 22. Phil. 1, 18. Sept. Hab. 1, 15. Zeph. 10, 
 7 ; aor. 2 ( xdprjv from the Passive ; see 
 genr. Buttm. { 114. Matth. { 225. Wi 
 ner JIS. 
 
 1. to joy, to rejoice, to be glad, intrans. in 
 various constructions : a) Absol. Matt. 
 
 5, 12 x a l P ere KOI dyoXXtao-Sf. Luke 6, 23. 
 
 15, 32. 22, 5. 23, 8 f^tlprj \lav. John 4, 
 36. 8, 56 KOI tide, KOI ixapij. 16, 20. 22. 
 Acts 11, 23. 13, 48. Rom. 12, 15 bis, X ai- 
 ptiv p-fTa xaipovrcav. 1 Cor. 7, 30 bis. 2 Cor. 
 7, 7. 13, 9. 11. Phil. 2, 17. 1 Thess. 5, 
 
 16, 3 John 3. Rev. 19, 7. Once with Iva, 
 to the end that. 1 Pet. 4, 13. Part. xai po>i>, 
 toying, rejoicing, 2 Cor. 6, 10 act 8e ^ai- 
 povrf s. (Sept. for HBttJ i K. 4, 20. 8, 67.) 
 Joined with another verb or participle, Part. 
 Xaip<av may often be rendered joyfully, 
 gladly ; as Col. 2, 5 ^mpcov KOI j$\(ntav, 
 i. q. joyfully beholding,by Hendiadys. Luke 
 
 15, 5. 19, 6 vTT(8(aTo avrbv ^a/pwi . v. 37. 
 Acts 5. 41. 8, 39. See Buttm. { 144. n. 6. 
 Sept. for ^a Joel 2, 21. Hab. 1, 15 ; rrafo 
 1 Sam. 19, 5. Zech. 4, 10. So Ceb. Tab. 8. 
 Luc. Philopatr. 24 bis. Dem. 437. 7; ^ai- 
 pa>i> adv. Luc. Tim. 34. Xen. An. 5. 6. 32. 
 b) With the kindred noun xP a > e - m 
 ace. intens. Matt. 2, 10 (xdprjcrav xapav /^e- 
 ydXrjv. (Sept. for i-ibSs Mniaia nnto Jon. 4, 
 
 6, comp. 1 K. 1, 40. See Buttm. {131. 4.) 
 In the dat. John 3, 29 x a P9 X at P"> intens. 
 he rejoicelh greatly ; and so without empha 
 sis 1 Thess. 3, 9. See Winer j 58. 3. 
 Matth. j 408. n. c) With dat. of cause, 
 i. e. of that in or over which one rejoices; 
 Rom. 12, 12 TJj cXn-i dt x ai P ovrts - B uttm - 
 {133. 4. c. Matth. { 399. c. This is the 
 usual Greek construction. So Sept. Prov. 
 
 17, 19. JEl V. H. 9. 4. Hdian. 1. 17. 5. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 5. 4. d) With ace. of 
 cause; Phil. 2, 18 TO 8 at/To KOI i/fids x ai ~ 
 ptT(,for the same cause also do ye joy. Rom. 
 
 16, 19 ^ai pw TO tcp* vp.1v. Comp. Matth. 
 414. Passow in ^mpw no. 3. So Horn. 
 
 II. 21. 347. Dem. 323. 6 TO rai>Ta Xvn-to-;3at 
 KOI TavTa xaipetv. e) With a particip. in 
 nominal, expressing the occasion of joy ; 
 also a freq. construction in Greek writers; 
 comp. Buttm. { 144. 6. a. Matth. { 555. 
 Herm. ad Vig. p. 775. Mark 14, 11 UKOV- 
 <ravrfs exd.pr)o~av. John 20, 20 fxdpi)o~av 
 ovv of p-aS^Tal ISovres TOV Kvpiov. Phil. 2, 
 28. (Horn. II. 19. 185 ^mpto aKovoras. Luc. 
 D. Mort. 2. 1. Hdian. 1.5.8. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 5. 12.) Once c. part, of a kindred verb 
 intens. imitating the Heb. infin. absol. 1 Pet. 
 4, 13 Iva ... xapijTf dyaXXiw/xfj/ot. Comp. 
 Winer {46. 7. f) With OTI, marking 
 cause or occasion, that, because ; Luke 10, 
 20 x a t P ( rf 8*> on TO. ovofjiaTa KT\. John 14, 
 28. Acts 5, 41. 2 Cor. 7, 9 vvv xa P) oi/x 
 OTI ... dXX on ACTX. v. 16. 2 John 4. (Sept. 
 Ex. 4, 31.) So tv TOVTW on Luke 10, 20 ; 
 iv Kvptca OTI Phil. 4, 10 ; fit vp.as OTI John 
 11,15. Comp. below in lett. g. g) With 
 prepositions expressing the cause or occasion 
 of joy; e. g. iiri c. dat. Matt. 18, 13 x at p" 
 iif avTaJ p.d\\ov fj KT\. Luke 1, 14. 13, 17. 
 Acts 15*, 31. 1 Cor. 13, 6. 16, 17. 2 Cor. 7, 
 13. Rev. 11, 10. (Sept. Prov. 2, 14. Hab. 3, 
 17. Diod. Sic. 1. 25. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 35.) 
 iv c. dat. to rejoice in; Phil. 1, 18 bis, iv 
 TOVTW ^eupw Kal xapj7o-op,at. Col. 1, 24 ; tv 
 Toi>T(f OTI Luke 10, 20, comp. above in lett. 
 f. (Sept. Zech. 10, 7, Jacobs Epigr. Gr. I. 
 60, tv df ydXaKTi ga^MM?.) Also iv Kvpita 
 Xaiptiv, to rejoice in the Lord, i. e. in union 
 and communion with him, Phil. 3, 1. 4, 4 
 bis ; tv Kvpio) OTI 4, 10 ; 8 id c. ace. John 3. 
 
 29 x a p? x a V ei ^ ta r n v < P a>lr n v T v vvfj.(pion. 
 
 1 Thess. 3, 9; 6V iip-ds OTI John 11, 15. 
 With d?ro c. gen. 2 Cor. 2, 3 Iva pf) XVOTJV 
 ^a> dcp" 5>v (8(i p,f ^aipttc, where it is strictly 
 for x a P av *X (lv corresponding to \inrnv tx^i 
 comp. 3 John 4. 
 
 2. Imperat. and Infin. as a word of salu 
 tation or greeting. a) Imper. ^alp*, 
 XalptTt, in a personal salutation, pr. joy 
 to thee ! joy to you ! hail ! Lat. salve ! Matt. 
 26, 49 xai> Pa^i. 27, 29 
 
776 
 
 Wr. 28, 9. Mark 15, 18. Luke 1,28. John 
 19,3. So Luc. D. Deor. 22. 1. JELV. H. 
 4. 17. Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 18. b) Infrn. X ai- 
 pftv, pr. fully Xyo> ^at peti/, to wish well, to 
 bid hail ! to salute, 2 John v. 10. 11. Ab 
 sol. xm /jfti/, like Engl. greeting ! to send 
 gree/ing, at the beginning of an epistle, Acts 
 15,23. 23,26. James 1, 1. Sept. absol. 
 for Elba Is. 48, 22. 57, 21. So fiirav X ai- 
 pfiv Anthol. Gr. II. p. 182; ae/Sto xnlpeiv 
 ib. IV. p. 279 ; absol. 2 Mace. 1, 10 xaiptiv 
 KOI vytaivfiv. JEL V. H. 1 . 25. Xen. Cyr. 
 4. 5. 27. Comp. Artemid. 3. 44 i&iov irda-rjs 
 f7Tio-To\rjs TO x a l P f Ka tppaxro \fyeiv. 
 
 ^aA,aa, ar, 17, (^aXaw,) hail, sleet ; pr. 
 something let go, let fall ; Rev. 8, 7. 11, 
 19. 16, 21 bis. Sept. for *na Ex. 9, 18. 
 19 sq. Jos. Ant. 6. 5. 6. Plut. Timol. 28. 
 Xen. (Ec. 5. 18. 
 
 f. dcrw, (obs. xda>,) Pass. aor. 1 
 jv, to let go, to slacken, to loosen, c. 
 ace. ra tana Sept. for iU^B Is. 33, 23 ; ra 
 Seoyxa Xen. Eq. 5. 4. In N. T. to let down, 
 to lower, c. ace. Mark 2, 4 ^aXwo-t rov pa- 
 ftarov. Luke 5, 4 TO diK-rua. v. 5. Acts 9, 
 25. 27, 17. 30. Pass. 2 Cor. 11, 33. Sept. 
 for nfcq J er . 38, 6. So Test. XII Pair. p. 
 578. Alciphr. Ep. I. 1. Pind. Pyth. 1. 12. 
 
 Xa\8aio<>, ov, 6, a Chaldean, Plur. 01 
 XoXSaioi, the Chaldeans, Chaldees, inhabit 
 ing Babylonia, including also in a wider 
 sense Mesopotamia, comp. Ez. 1,3. 11,24. 
 Hence Abraham in removing from Ur in 
 Mesopotamia, is said to come yrjs XaX&u - 
 a>>, Acts 7, 4. So O-wttea -MX, Heb. eV rj} 
 \<*>pq T&V XaA.Satcoi , Gen. 1 1, 28. Sept. yrj 
 XaXSa/u)j/ for * Yl*$ Jer. 24, 5. 25, 12. 
 On the origin of the Chaldeans, see Heb. 
 Lex. art. 
 
 rj, 6v, difficult, hard, Lat. diffi- 
 cilis, i. e. 
 
 1. Of things, hard, burdensome, perilous, 
 connected with toil, suffering, peril ; 2 Tim. 
 3, 1 Ktupot xaXorot. Wisd. 3, 1 9. Jos. Ant. 
 13. 16. 5 voo-ov xaXen-qi . Dem. 127. 26. 
 Xen. An. 3. 2. 2 ^aXeTra p.fv ra Trapovra. 
 
 2. Of persons, hard, harsh, stern, cruel, 
 Hdian. 3. 8. 6 e x 3poy *aX. Xen - An - 2 - 6 - 9 - 
 Hence in N. T. of demoniacs, fierce, fu 
 rious, raving, Matt. 8, 28. So of dogs and 
 wild swine, Xen. An. 5. 8. 24. Venat. 10. 23. 
 
 Xa\ivaywyea), , f. ^^ ( X a\iv6s, 
 yo>,) pr. to lead or guide with a bit ; 
 hence to rein in, to bridle, i. q. to check, to 
 moderate, to restrain, c. ace. James 1,26 
 l^t) xaXii ayto yaii y\a><T(rav avrov. 3, 2 0X01* 
 <ru>fj.a. Luc Tyrann. 4 ras t)8ovwv opfeis 
 
 ij . id. de Saltat. 70. Comp. 
 Kypke Obs. II. p. 421. Loesner Obs. e Phil. 
 p. 459. 
 
 ^dkivof) ov, 6, (xaAdo>,) a bit, curb ; 
 James 3, 3 r<av tmruv TOVS ^aXtvoif els TO. 
 o-ro/xara jSdXXo/^fc. Rev. 14, 20. Sept. for 
 * 2 K. 19, 28. Is. 37, 29. 2 Mace. 10, 
 29. JEl V. H. 9. 16. Xen. Eq. 10. 6-13. 
 
 %a\K0<>, ta, fov, contr. ^aXKovs, rj, 
 ovv, (^aXKo r.) if copper or brass, brazen, 
 Rev. 9, 20. Sept. for nttjns Ex. 26, 11. 
 37 ; ttJsina 2 Sam. 22, 35. Hdian. 6. 4. 6. 
 Xen. An. 5. 2. 29. 
 
 o r,) pr. a brasier, 
 coppersmith; Horn. II. 12. 295. Aristoph. 
 Av. 4GO. In N. T. of any worker in me 
 tals, a smith, 2 Tim. 4, 14. Sept. xoXivs 
 XO\KOV KOI (rio ripov, for ^H Gen. 4, 22 ; 
 SJ-in 2 Chr. 24, 12. So Arr. Epicr, 4. 11. 
 136 ftiv ^aXxeiiy e|tcb(ret TO criSijpioi/. Luc. 
 D. Deor. 17. 2, of Vulcan. Xen. Hell. 3. 4. 
 17 ^aX/Kfiy, comp. Ag. 1. 26 where it is o-i- 
 
 , 6vos, 6, chalcedony, a gem 
 including several varieties, one of which is 
 the modern cornelian, Rev. 21, 19; later 
 edit. Kapxr)8wv carbuncle. Epiphan. i>3pa 
 . . . yiverat 8f tv KapxnBovi rrjs Aiflvys ?errt 
 8e 6 ^aX^Sdi oy KaXovptvos X/3os TropairX?}- 
 a-ios roi/T<a. Plin. H. N. 37. 18. See Ro- 
 senm. Bibl. Alterthk. IV. i. p. 31. 
 
 %a\KlOV, ov, TO, (XC&KOS, ) i. q. X^K^OV, 
 a copper or brazen vessel, Mark 7, 4. Poll. 
 On. 6. 109. Xen. (Ec. 8. 19. 
 
 %a\KO\i/3avov, ov, TO, Rev. 1, 15. 2, 
 18, lit. smooth or burnished brass, Vulg. 
 aurichalcum, a factitious metal, prob. the 
 fjXtKTpov, electrum, of the ancients ; not am 
 ber, but a mixed metal composed of some 
 four parts gold and one part silver, and dis 
 tinguished for its brilliancy ; see Pausan. 5. 
 12. 6. Plin. H. N. 33. 4 or 23. Buttmann 
 iiber das Elektron, in his Mythol. II. p. 
 337 sq. Passow art. rj\Tpov. Suid. ,\oA- 
 
 o~ov ecrTi 5e TO fj\fKTpov clXXoruTTui 
 p,ffjiiy[j:fvoi> ve Xw KOI Xi2e/a. In a similar 
 connection Ez. 1, 4. 27, and espec. Ez. 8, 2, 
 stands Heb. ^^n, burnished brass, Sept. 
 and Vulg. rj\fKrpov, electrum ; but in Ez. 
 1,7 it is bb|5 ^J2j n 3 id. Sept. (t-aa-TpaTrraiv 
 ^aXcoy. Hence Gesenius suggests, that 
 Xa^Ko\i^avov may be a corrupted form for 
 Xc&Kbv XiTrapoV, i. q. ^^H Heb. Lex. s. v. 
 Se De Wette Handb. in Apoc. 1. c. Ro- 
 senm. Bibl. Alterthk. IV. i. p. 58, 60. 
 
777 
 
 oC, 6, pr. ore, metal, of any kind, 
 Hesych. ^aXor- 6 trio npos. Id. ^aX*covy 
 TOVTO 7rt TOU xpv<rov itai dpyvpov f\tyov. 
 Comp. Passow s. v. Genr. and in N. T. 
 copper, brass, espec. as wrought and tem 
 pered for arms, utensils, and the like. 
 
 1. Pr. brass, Rev. 18, 12 trav o-Kfvos tic 
 . . . x<*b.Kov Kal tridripov. Sept. for ruJns 
 Gen. 4, 22. Ezra 8, 26. Palaeph. 10. 2. 
 Xen. Cyr. 6. 4. 1. 
 
 2. Meton. brass, for any thing made of 
 copper or brass ; e. g. 1 Cor. 13, 1 ^aX^os 
 TIX^I sounding brass, i. e. a trumpet or 
 cymbal. Also brass or copper coin, money, 
 Matt. 10, 9. Mark 6, 8. 12,41. Liban. Ep. 
 121 1. Luc. Contempl. 1 1 ol8a yap TOV ^oX- 
 K.OV, Of3oXov (K\ty(i)v. So ^aXuovs Pol. 5. 
 26. 23. Dem. 1283. 4. 
 
 adv. Lat. humi, to or upon the 
 ground; John 9, 6 (irrvo-f x a M ai - 18, 6 
 TTfo-ot> xa/zai. Sept. for PIX1X Job 1, 20. 
 Judith 12, 14. Luc. D. Mori 20. 2. Xen. 
 Ag. 2. 14. 
 
 XavaaVj 6, indec. Canaan, Heb. "]S33. 
 (he ancient name of Judea or Palestine, pr. 
 the low lands, in distinction from the 
 highlands of Libanus and Syria ; comp. the 
 like distinction in Scotland. Spoken genr. 
 of the country on this side Jordan, in an- 
 tith. to Gilead, Num. 33, 51. Josh. 22, 9. 
 Jos. Ant. 2. 15. 3. Also spec, of Phenicia, 
 the northern part of Canaan at the foot of 
 Mount Lebanon, whose inhabitants call 
 themselves ,333 on coins, Is. 23, 11 in Heb. 
 and Sept. So too the Carthaginians, as a 
 colony of the Phenicians, called themselves 
 Chanani, August, in Expos. Ep. ad Rom. 
 { 13. See Heb. Lex. art. ,r32 . Rosenm. 
 Bibl. Geogr. II. i. p. 69. In ft. T. genr. 
 Acts 7, 11. 13, 19 cSlir; trrra tv yij \avadv, 
 see in Deut. 7, 1. Comp. Jos. Ant. 1. 6. 
 2 \avavaiav Tt]V vvv lovSpiav KaXovp,tvr]V. 
 
 XavavaiOS, a, nv, (Xai/adv,) Canaani- 
 tish ; Plur. 01 \avavdioi, the Canaanites, 
 Heb. ^yij) collect, pr. the lowlanders, as 
 inhabiting the lowlands or plains, opp. to 
 the inhabitants of the highlands, Num. 13, 
 29. Josh. 11, 3; see in Xavadv. Then, as 
 a general name for the inhabitants of Ca 
 naan or Palestine, Gen. 12, 6. 24, 3. 34, 30. 
 Josh. 17, 12. Judg. 1, 27 sq. Also spec, of 
 the Phenicians, Judg. 1, 32, comp. v. 31; 
 eee in \avadv. See Heb. Lex. art. *?*?> 
 no. 1. Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. II. i. p. 251 sq. 
 In N. T. of a Phenician woman, yvvfj 
 Xavavata Matt. 1 5, 22 ; comp. Mark 7, 26 
 
 where it is 2vpo<poiviKto-o-a q. v. Sept. <I<3p. 
 \avavalos for iJSSS Gen. 38, 2. 
 
 us, T], (xat pto,) 1 . joy, rejoicing, 
 gladness; Matt. 2, 10 f^dpnvav x a P av p.t- 
 ydXrjv, see in ^aipa> no. 1. b. Luke 1, 14 
 eorat x a P a " ot Aca ayoAXuKriy. 15, 7. 10. 
 John 3, 29 bis, x a P<? X a l P e< - KT ^- see * n X at " 
 poj no. 1. b. John 15, 11 bis. 16, 20. 21. 22. 
 24. 17, 13. Acts 8, 8. 13, 52. 15, 3. Rom. 
 14, 17 xP a * v irvfvfjLaTi ayi w, joy in the 
 Holy Ghost, the joy which the Holy Spirit 
 imparts by his influences; and so 15, 13. 
 2 Cor. 1, 24. 2, 3. 7, 4. 13. 8, 2. Gal. 5, 22. 
 Phil. 1, 25 \apa rrjs TrlcrTfcos, joy of faith, 
 \. e. in and arising from the faith of the Gos 
 pel. 2, 2. 29. 1 Thess. 1, 6 /xera X opas TOV 
 TrvfvfjLaros, comp. Rom. 14, 17 above. 
 1 Thess. 3, 9. 2 Tim. I, 4. [Philem. 7.] 
 James 4, 9. 1 Pet. 1 , 8. 1 John 1 , 4. 2 John 
 
 12. So diro x a Ps< from or fur joy Matt. 
 
 13, 44. Luke 24, 41. Acts 12, 14; pera 
 Xopas, m h joy, joyfully, rejoicingly, Matt. 
 13, 20. 28, 8. Mark 4, 16. Luke 8, 13. 10, 
 17. 24, 52. Acts 20, 24. Phil. 1, 4. Col. ], 
 11. Heb. 10, 34. 12, 11. 13, 17; tv X apa in 
 joy, joyfully, Rom. 15, 32. Sept. for nrraip 
 Jer. 15, 16. Jon. 4, 7 ; c. perd I Chr/29, 
 22; liiaiSJ Zech. 8, 19. Pol. 11. 33. 7. 
 Diod. S\c. 3. 17. Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 32 ; fitrd 
 Xapds Xen. Hi. 1. 25. 
 
 2. Meton. cause, ground, occasion of joy, 
 Luke 2, 10. Phil. 4, 1 x a P a * aW<pai>dr 
 /iou. 1 Thess. 2, 19. 20. James 1, 2. 3 John 4. 
 
 3. Meton. enjoyment, fruition of joy, bliss ; 
 Heb. 1 2, 2 dvrl rf/s irpoKfi[j.(irr]s aiiTu ^apar. 
 Matt. 25, 21. 23 fi<reX3e ds TTJV x a P alf T v 
 Kvpiov ffov, into the rejoicing of thy Lord, 
 here put for the bliss of the kingdom of 
 heaven, represented under the figure of a 
 banquet ; comp. v. 30 and Matt. 8, 11. 12. 
 Act. Thom. J 53 iv rfj dvairavcrti avrov 
 [TOV 3eoC] dvanaiKTTj, Ka\ (Is TTJV x a P^ v av ~ 
 TOV toy. ib. J 7. 
 
 %apa<yfjut, OTOS, TO, (^apdo-cro).) pr. 
 something graven, sculptured, e. g. 
 
 1. a graving, sculpture, sculptured work, 
 as images, idols, Acts 17, 29. Anthol. Gr. 
 IV. p. 33. 
 
 2. a mark cut in or stamped, a stamp, 
 sign, Rev. 13, 16. 17. 14, 9. 11. 15, 2. 16, 
 2. 19, 20. 20, 4. Anacr. 55. 2 nvpbs x<z- 
 poy/za. So of the stamp on coin, Pint. 
 Agesi. 15 TOV &( Tlfp<riKov von <rftaTos \d- 
 paypa To6rrjv e^oiroj. 
 
 ^apatcrr/p, jjpos, 6, (^apdo-o-co.) pr. a 
 grater, graving tool, Lat. ceclum, Staph. 
 Byzant. in AaAce8m p.o>i> 413 ; also of a per 
 son, an engraver, Euryph. ap. Stob. p. 
 
778 
 
 556. 8. Usually, something graven, cut in, 
 stamped, a character, e. g. a letter, mark, 
 sign, Jos. Ant. 12. 2. 1. Luc. Hermot. 44. 
 Diod. Sic. 3. 67 ; the stamp on coin, Arr. 
 Epict. 4. 2. 17. Diod. Sic. 17. 66. In 
 N. T. impress, image, form; Heb. 1, 3 ^a- 
 paKTrjp vTroo-racrecoy ToO Trarpos, the express 
 image or counterpart of God s essence or 
 being ; com p. in vTroa-racris no. 3. So 
 Hesycl). x a P a ^p 6p.oi<a<ns. Philo Quod 
 det. potior. p. 170 TVTTOV rtva KOI \apaKrrjpa 
 3eiar 8vvdp,f(os. Id. de Plant. Noe p. 217. 
 Luc. Amor. 38, 44 ov8e <ronTpa TU>V dvri- 
 u.6p(pa>v xapciKTTjpwv aypdfpovs fixovas. 
 Sext. Empir. adv. Log. I. 251. Plato 
 Phaedr. 263. b. Trop. Plut. Thes. 7 e>- 
 (pavrj x a paKTtjpa rijy (iiyevfias. Arr. Epict. 
 3. 22. 80. Comp. Wetst. N. T. II. p. 387. 
 Eisner Obs. in N. T. II. p. 333 sq. 
 
 j^apa^ OKOS, 6, (xapdo-<T(o,) a pointed 
 slake, pale, e. g. for vines Geopon. 4. 12. 
 289 ; in which sense it is oftener fem. Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 61 ; a pale, palisade, Lat. val- 
 lus, in fortification, Pol. 18. 1. 1. Thuc. 3. 
 70. In N. T. a rampart, mound, Lat. val 
 lum, Luke 19, 43 ; i. e. a military rampart 
 around a camp or a besieged city, formed 
 of the earth thrown out of a trench and 
 stuck vvith sharp stakes or palisades; com p. 
 Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 373. Diet, of Antt. 
 art. Vallum. Sept. for nbbb Is. 37, 33. 
 Ez. 4, 2. So Jos. Vit. } 43 /3aXXd/if i/or ^a- 
 oaxa Trpb TTJS IlToXf/iaecoi/ TrdXecoy. Arr. Exp. 
 Alex. M. 2. 19. 9. Pol. 1. 29. 3. 
 
 Xapi&nai, f. uro|uai,Mid. depon. (^upi?,) 
 Pass. aor. 1 e ^apto-S^v in Pass, see in Acts 
 3, 14. 1 Cor. 2, 12. Phil. 1, 29 ; also Pass, 
 fut. 1 xapio-S^rrojuat Pliilem. 22 ; see 
 Buttm. ^ 113. n. 6. Pr. to gratify, to do 
 what is grateful and pleasing to any one, c. 
 dat. of pers. JEl. V. H. 14. 45. Hdian. 7. 1. 
 23. Xen. Cyr. 1.1. 5. In N. T. 
 
 1. to gratify one with any thing, c. ace. 
 et dat. of pers. i. e. to give, to grant, to be 
 stow, as a matter of gratification, favour. 
 Luke 7, 21 TV<p\o1s TroXXoIs f^apicraro TO 
 8\fniv, unto many blind he granted to see, 
 
 1. e. he gave them sight. Rom. 8, 32. 1 Cor. 
 
 2, 12. Gal. 3, 18. Phil. 1,29. 2, 9. 2 Mace. 
 7, 22. Hdian. 1. 17. 3. Pol. 16. 24. 9. 
 
 2. to give up any thing to any one. a) 
 Persons, i. q. to deliver up or over, in an 
 swer to the demand or prayer of any one ; 
 Arts 3, 14 jjrfjaacT^Se av8pa (povea x a P l(r ^ 
 vai vpTiv. 27, 24. Philem. 22. Also to the 
 power and malice of any one for harm or 
 destruction, Acts 25, 11. 16, ds cmu>\fiav. 
 So Jos. B. J. 1. 27. 5. Dion. Hal. Ant. 10. 
 
 6 init. b) Things, e. g. a debt, to remit, 
 to forgive, not to exact ; Luke 7, 42. 43 <a 
 Se TrXdov f xapuraro. Genr. of wrong, sin, 
 to forgive, not to punish, 2 Cor. 2,7. lOter. 
 12, 13 xapt<rao-3e (JLOI TTJV dftiKiav TOVTTJV. 
 Eph. 4, 32 bis. Col. 2, 13. 3, 13 bis. So 
 Dion. Hal. Ant. 5. 4 (ppovip.(ov piv di/3p&>- 
 7r<ov fpyov eori rals (pi\iats xapt eo-3ai ras 
 
 , adv. see in 
 
 no. 5. 
 
 XO-ptf, ire? , 17, ace. X"/ 31 ") Cx / 3 " ) g" race 
 Lat. gratia, pr. what causes joy, pleasure, 
 gratification. 
 
 1. grace of external form or manner; 
 pr. of person, gracefulness, elegance, Ec- 
 clus. 26, 15. Horn. Od. 2. 12. . JEl. V. H. 
 12. 1 post init. Acrnaa-ia . . . xapirav p,iv 
 cKp Soviav ftx fv - 1 N. T. only of words, 
 discourse, grace, gratefulness, acceptable- 
 ness ; Luke 4, 22 eVt rots Xoyoty TTJS X a P l ~ 
 TO?, the words of grace, gracious words. 
 Eph. 4, 29 Iva 5w X<*P IV T t* aKovovcn, i. e. 
 that it may minister what is acceptable unto 
 the hearers, Sovvai x<*P lv i- 1- x a p t(VTa f ^ vai - 
 Col. 4, 6 \6yos ev xdpiri, i. q. Xdyos xapt ety. 
 Sept. and in p s . 45, 3. So Ecclus. 21, 16. 
 Horn. Od. 8. 175. Dem. 51. 9. 
 
 2. grace in disposition, feeling, towards 
 any one, i. q. favour, kindness, good-will, 
 benevolence. a) Genr. Luke 2, 40. 52 
 TrpOfKOTrre ^opin irapa Sew KOI dfSpawoiy. 
 (Sept. Ex. 33, 12.) Acts 2, 47 ( X OVTf f X- 
 piv npbs SXov TOV \aov, having favour with 
 all the people. 4, 33. 7, 10 efiwKei ai>rw 
 Xapw tvavriov 4>apaa>. (Sept. Gen. 39, 21.) 
 So fvpio-Kfiv x^P lv i t fi 71 ^ grace or favour, 
 Trapa Sfw Luke 1, 30 ; (vumiov TOV 3foi 
 Acts 7, 46; impl. Heb. 4, 16. (Sept. Gen. 
 6, 18. 18, 3. Esth. 2, 16. al.) Also KUTU- 
 3e tr3ai ^aptc TIV I, to lay down [Engl. to lay 
 up] favour with any one, to gain favour, 
 Acts 25, 9. 24, 27 x a P ira s *cara3eV3at TOIS 
 lov&atW, where for the plur. comp, the 
 Engl. phrase, to be in one s good graces. 1 
 Meton. an object of favour, something ac 
 ceptable, 1 Pet. 2, 19. 20 TOVTO x"P ls "" n P 
 Sew, i. e. this is something well-pleasing to 
 God ; comp. for the sense 1 Tim. 2. 3. 5, 4. 
 Col. 3, 20. So genr. Hdian. 2. 15. 9. Diod. 
 Sic. 13. 101. Xen. Hi. 8. 2, 3, 5; KaraSs. 
 Xdpiv. Hdian. 2. 3. 15. Xen. Cyr. 8. 3. 26. 
 b) Of the grace, favour, good-will of God 
 and Christ as exercised towards men ; e. g. 
 where x^P ls s ji ne d with tlprjvr], eXeoj, and 
 the like, in salutations, including the idea of 
 every kind of favour, blessing, good, as 
 proceeding anb TOV 3eou irarpbs <al xvplov 
 I. Xp. Rom. 1, 7. 1 Cor. 1, 3. 2 Cor. 1, 2. 
 
779 
 
 Gal. 1, 3; and so in the introduction to 
 most of the epistles. Rev. 1, 4. Also 17 
 X<*pis rov Kvpiov I. X. in the benedictions 
 at the close of most of the epistles, Rom. 
 16, 20, 24. 1 Cor. 16, 23. 2 Cor. 13, 13. 
 Gal. 6, 18. al. .Simpl. 17 \apis in a like 
 sense, Eph. 6, 24. Col. 4, 18. 1 Tim. 6, 21. 
 2 Tim. 4, 22. Tit. 3, 15. Heb. 13, 25. 
 Of Christ, genr. Acts 1 5, 1 1 8ia rfjs x a P lTOS 
 rou K. I. Xp. 7Ti(rr(vop.(v o-eoSiji/at. 2 Cor. 
 8, 9. 1 Tim. 1, 14. Of God, genr. the 
 gracious feeling of approbation, benignity, 
 love, which God exercises toward any of 
 the human race ; so x- TOV ^ fov or the like, 
 Acts 14, 3 roi Xoyw TTJS xdpiToj avrov, the 
 word of his grace, the gospel, i. q. TO vay- 
 yf\iov TTjs x- r v Sfov 20, 24. Acts 14, 26 
 et 15, 40 7rapa8o?Sfls rfj xdptrt rov 3 f v- 
 Rom. 3, 24 ftuuiMMymoi Suptav TTJ avrov 
 Xapiri. 1 Cor. 15, 10 ter. 2 Cor. 1. 12. 9, 
 14. 12. 9 apK.fi croi 17 X^P ls P- ov - Gal. 1* 15. 
 Eph. 1, 6. Heb. 2, 9. 1 Pet. 4,10.al. With j 
 TOW 3foC or the like implied, Acts 18, 27 
 TOIS TTfTTicrTfvKacri. 8ia TTJS xapiTos. Rom. 4, 
 16. 11,5 comp. in tVcXoyjj. 11, 6 quater. 
 
 12, 6. 2 Thess. 2, 16. Heb. 2, 9 xdpin 
 3foG i. e. through the gracious counsel of 
 God. 4, 16. al. Here too belong the 
 phrases tv x<*P iTl TV Tov ! -fy- R (1| n. 5, 15, 
 iv x ( *P irt Xp. Gal. 1, 6, i. e. the grace of 
 God through Christ; also Heb. 10, 29 TO 
 Trvfvp.a TTJS xdptroj, the Spirit of grace, 
 the gift and earnest of the divine favour. 
 c) Spec, of the divine grace and favour as 
 exercised in conferring gifts, graces, bene 
 fits on man ; 2 Cor. 4,15 Iva rj x^P ls ""Xfo- 
 vacrafra 8ia T<0>v irXeiovuv TTJV fu^apicrriav 
 irtpKra-fvcrrj. 8, 1 TT)V x^P lv TOV %*v TTJV 
 8(8ofifVT]v (v rats (KK\T)criats TTJS Max. James 
 4, 6 bis. 1 Pet. 5, 5. Particularly as mani 
 fested in the benefits bestowed in and 
 through Christ and his Gospel, Eph. 4, 7. 
 1 Pet. 1, 10 eu TTfpl TTJS (Is vp.as x ( ip lT s 
 npo<pT)T(va-avTcs. v. 13. Or as exhibited in 
 the pardon of sins and admission to the di 
 vine kingdom, i. e. saving grace ; x- r v 
 3fov, Rom. 5, 15 17 x^P ls ro ^ 3eoG KOI rj 8<a- 
 ptd. Gal. 2, 21. Tit. 2, II. 3, 7. 1 Pet. 5, 
 12 ; \dpiy fw^r 1 Pet. 3, 7. Simpl. id. Rom. 
 
 1, 5. 5, 2. 17. 20. 21. 6, 1. 14. 15 OVK (o-^fv 
 VTTO vofiov, aXX" vno \o.piv. Gal. 5, 4. Eph. 
 
 2, 5. 8 xaptri e ore <Tcra><rp.tvoi. 1 Pet. 1, 
 
 13. al. 
 
 3. grace in act and deed, an act of grace, 
 a favour conferred, a kindness, benefit, bene 
 faction. a) Genr. Rom. 4, 4 6 pi<r36r ov 
 Xoyi frrai Kara XP lv ^ a ^ a Kara o(pf[\r]p.a. 
 Acts 25, 3 aiTovfj.(voi X^P 1 " KaT avrov, i. e. 
 
 asking a favour against Paul, to his preju 
 
 dice, viz. that he might be sent for to Jeru 
 salem. Also a gift, alms, 1 Cor. 16, 3 
 cmtvtyKfiv Tr)v x^P lv vpcov els lepovtraXjjp-. 
 2 Cor. 8, 4. 6. 7. 19. So Dion. Hal. Ant. 
 2. 15 fin. Hdian. 2. 3. 19. Pol. 1. 31. 6. 
 Xen. Ag. 4. 3, 4. b) Of the divine fa 
 vours, benefits, blessings, gifts conferred on 
 man through Christ and his Gospel ; espec. 
 the manifestation of the divine love, John 
 1, 14 ir\T]pT]s xdptrof KOI aXqSet ay. V. 16 
 bis, ^dp(i avrl xapiros, see in avrl no. 2 b. 
 v. 17; comp. 3, 16. 17,23. Genr. Acts 11, 
 23 18(tiv TTJV x^-P lv T v 3<oC. 1 Cor. 1, 4. 
 2 Cor. 9, 8. Col. 1, 6. 1 Pet. 4, 10 as /ca- 
 Xot oiK.ovop.oi TTJS TroiKtXns x^P LTOS %tov. 
 Jude 4. So particularly the gift of the 
 Gospel, salvation by grace in Christ ; Acts 
 13, 43 irpo<r[j,(i>(iv rfj ^dpin rov 3to). 2 Cor. 
 
 6, 1. Pllll. 1, 7 (TVyKOlVGOVOVS /iOU TT)S X^P l ~ 
 
 TOS, i. e. fellow-partakers with me in the 
 grace of the Gospel. Heb. 12, 15. 13,9 
 KO\OV yap xapiri ftfftaiova- Sai TIJI/ Kap8iat>, 
 ov /Spco/iao-ii/, it is good thai the heart be 
 made steadfast in grace, not in meats, i. e. in 
 the grace of the Gospel, the Gospel doc 
 trines ; comp. for the sense, Rom. 14, 15 
 17. Spec, of the grace or gift of the apos 
 tleship, the apostolic office, Rom. 12, 3 
 Xe yco yap, 8tn TTJS ^dpiroj rijs SoSfto-r;? p,ot. 
 15, 15. 1 Cor. 3, 10. Gal. 2, 9. Eph. 3, 2. 
 8. 2 Tim. 2, 1. c) Melon, gratification, 
 pleasure, joy, as arising from a favour or 
 benefit received ; 2 Cor. 1, 15 t$ov\6p.r)v 
 npos vfj.as ASfZi/ TTportpov, Iva 8fvrpav 
 X a P lv *X fr6 > wnere some Mss. read ^apdv. 
 Philem. 7 in some edit. x^P lv 7"P fx / 1 " 
 iro\\f)v Kal irapaK\T]iTii>, where also others 
 read x a p av - Opp- ^VTTT] Tob. 7, 18. Eurip. 
 Helen. 66 1 or 665 (p.a 8e 8aKpva . . . ir\(ov 
 
 4. grace in return for favours, benefits, 
 Lat. gratia, Fr. graces, i. e. gratitude, 
 thanks ; e. g. iroia vp.lv X"P ls <>a " rt 5 what 
 thank have ye ? what thanks do ye de 
 serve ? Luke 6, 32. 33. 34 ; xP" <X (iV 
 Tivi, Lat. gratias habere, to be thankful, 
 Luke 17, 9. 1 Tim. 1, 12. 2 Tim. 1, 3. 
 Heb. 12, 28; comp. in e^o) no. 2. d. 0. 
 (2 Mace. 3, 33. Jos. Ant. 7. 9. 4. Pol. 5. 
 104. 1. Xen. Mem. 3. 11. 2.) So x <*pis 
 r<a Sew Rom. 6, 17. 1 Cor. 15, 57. 2 Cor. 
 2, l4. 8,16. 9,15. Dat. x<ip IT i, with thanks, 
 thankfully, 1 Cor. 10, 30 ; / xP id. 
 Col. 3, 16. So genr. Diod. Sic. 1. 90 r i,v 
 dp.oifBf)v TTJS irpos TOVS fvepytTas ^dptror. 
 Luc. Tim. 36 <ro\ p.iv KU\ r&5 Ait TrXft cmj 
 X<ipts. Hdian. 5. 1. 13. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 3. 
 
 5. Accus. x^P lv as a d v - or prep, before 
 a genit. Buttm. 5 146- n. 2. j 115. 4 ; Lat. 
 
780 
 
 X l / Mt)V 
 
 gratid ; pr. in favour of, in behalf of ; hence 
 on account of, because of, usually put like 
 gratia, after the case it governs, Buttm. 1. c. 
 Luke 7, 47 ov x^P lv on which account, 
 wherefore. Eph. 3, 1 et 14 TOVTOV x^P lv ^ 
 on this account, for this cause. Gal. 3, 19 
 Tcav 7rapa/3d(Tfa>v xdpiv- 1 Tim. 5, 14. Tit. 
 1,5. 11. Jude 16. Once before its case in 
 an interrogation, 1 John 3, 12 KOI x a P lv T L ~ 
 vos f<r(f)a(v avrov ; comp. Herm. ad Vig. 
 p. 700. Non al. in N. T. Ecclus. 35 [32], 
 2. Hdian. 3. 2. 61. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 54. 
 Before its gen. Ecclus. 37, 5. Pol. 1. 
 64. 3. + 
 
 %apl<r(J,a, aros, TO, (xapijTo/iat,) a gift, 
 grant, benefit, a good conferred, Hesych. 
 xdpta-fjia- 85)pov. In N. T. only of gifts 
 and graces imparted from God, e. g. deli 
 verance from peril, 2 Cor. 1, 11 ; a gift or 
 quality of the mind, 1 Cor. 7, 7 ; gifts of 
 Christian knowledge, consolation, confi 
 dence, Rom. 1, 11. 1 Cor. 1, 7; redemp 
 tion, salvation through Christ, Rom. 5, 15. 
 16. 6,23. 11,29. Spec, of the Charis 
 mata or miraculous gifts imparted to the 
 early Christians and particularly to Chris 
 tian teachers by the Holy Spirit, Rom. 12, 
 6. 1 Cor. 12, 4. 9 ^apio-p-crra iapaTotv. V. 28. 
 30. 31. 1 Pet. 4, 10. As communicated 
 with the laying on of hands. 1 Tim. 4, 14. 
 2 Tim. 1, 6. Comp. in irvevpa D. 2. d. 
 
 ^api,TO(i), <S, f. oxroi), (^dpir,) to grace, 
 
 1. e. to cause to be gracious, acceptable ; Pass. 
 to be gracious, acceptable, Ecclus. 18, 17. 
 Liban. 4. p. 1071. In N. T. to grace, to 
 favour, spoken only of the divine favour ; 
 Luke 1 , 28 x P f > *:fX a / 3l1 " co / i "7 hail, thou 
 favoured sc. of God. Also of spiritual 
 graces; Eph. 1, 6 eV T; [^dpm] e^apiVa)- 
 Tfv ruins with which [grace] he hath graced 
 us, in which he hath richly imparted grace 
 unto us, i. e. in the forgiveness of our sins, 
 comp. v. 7. So Test. XII Patr. p. 698 lv 
 
 j rjiurjv, Kai 6 <ra>Trjp e ^aptYoxre p.e ev 
 
 f, Kal eXvcre p.. 
 Xappdv, fj, indec. Charran, Heb. T^H 
 Haran, also Xdppav Jos. Ant. 1. 16. 1 ; pr. 
 n. of a city in the northern part of Mesopo 
 tamia, where Abraham sojourned for a time 
 on his way to the land of Canaan, Acts 7, 
 
 2. 4. Comp. Gen. 11, 31. 12, 5. Jos. Ant. 
 1. c. et 1. 19. 4. It was afterwards called 
 by the Greeks and Romans Kdp pai, Came ; 
 was a place of considerable importance ; 
 and became celebrated by the defeat and 
 death of Crassus. See Rosenm. Bibl. Geogr. 
 I. ii. p. 149. Ritter Erdk. X. p. 243 sq. XI. 
 p. 291 sq. 
 
 ov, 6, (xapdcro-a>,) Lat. charta, 
 paper, a leaf of paper, made of the layers 
 of the papyrus, 2 John 12. Ceb. Tab. 4. 
 Dioscor. I. 116. See Adam s Rom. Ant. 
 p. 506. Diet, of Antt. art. Liber. 
 
 OTOS, TO, ^ai, ^o-fcco, a 
 chasm, gulf, Luke 16, 26. Sept. for nna 
 2 Sam. 18, 17. Palsph. 29. 5. Luc. D. 
 Mort. 21. 1. Plato Rep. 359. d. 
 
 ^et\09, fos, ovs, TO, I. a lip ; Plur. 
 TO. x et %7> the lips ; Rom. 3, 13 tor do-7n 8a>> 
 VTTO TO. X f ^ T } avTtav. Heb. 13, 15 Kapnbv 
 XAeiui>, see in Kapnos no. 2. d. 1 Pet. 3, 
 10. As the outward instrument of speech, 
 the lips, Matt. 15, 8 et Mark 7, 6 6 \abs 
 OVTOS rots ^ftXeo-t p.e Tip.a, i. e. only with 
 their lips, in words only, quoted from Is. 
 29, 13 where Sept. for iisto; a s also Job 2, 
 10. Prov. 17, 4. ssep. So Palseph. 48. 2. 
 Luc. D. Deor. 5. 2. Xen. Conv. 5. 7. Me- 
 ton. from the Heb. a language, dialect, like 
 tongue; 1 Cor. 14, 21 V ^fiXeo-tv tTepois, 
 in allusion to Is. 28, 1 1 where Sept. and 
 HBiU. So also Sept. and fiSiU Gen. 11, 1. 
 6. 9 ; Heb. ^Sia, Sept. yXio-o-a, Is. 19, 18. 
 
 2. Trop. TO ^elXoy TT/J SaXao-a?;?, the lip 
 of the sea, the shore, Heb. 11, 12. Sept. and 
 S-lBia Gen. 22, 17. Ex. 14, 31 ; X - i irora- 
 Hov Ex. 7, 15. So of a river, Jos. B. J. 3. 
 10. 7. Diod. Sic. 3. 10. Hdot. 4. 141 ; x > 
 rfs Td(pov Thuc. 3. 23. 
 
 >, f. do-ft), (x/*a> kindr. x a>")) to 
 storm, to raise a storm, Xen. CEc. 8. 16 ; 
 also to winter, to pass the winter, Diod. Sic. 
 19. 37. Xen. Hell. 1. 2. 15. In N. T. Pass. 
 Xei/J-dfrnai, to be storm-beaten, tempest-tossed 
 at sea ; Acts 27, 18 a-(po8pS)s 8e x^ab,Li- 
 va>v rjp,a>i>. So Jds. Ant. 12. 3. 3 ^et^afo- 
 p-fvrjs yens. Luc. D. Deor. 26. 2 wzurat x- 
 Plato Ion 540. b. 
 
 Xelpappos, ov, 6, fj, adj. (x^a, pea,, ) 
 winter-flowing, wintry, as x- noTajjios Horn. 
 II. 5. 88. Soph. Antig. 712. Epict. Fragm. 
 1. ed. Schweigh. In N. T. Subst. 6 x f - 
 fj,appos, a storm-brook, winter -torrent, 
 which flows in the rainy season or winter, 
 but is dry in summer ; spoken of the Kidron 
 John 18, 1 ; see art. KeSpwy. Sept. and 
 ^H? of the Kidron, 2 Sam. 15, 23. 1 K. 2, 
 38. 15, 13. So genr. Luc. Hermot. 86. 
 Xen. Hell. 4. 4. 7. Strictly poet, for ^- 
 fjidppoos, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 234, 669. 
 
 j(eifJM>V) o>i>of, 6, (^fl/Lia, kindr. ^tcov,) 
 pr. stormy or rainy iveaiher, e. g. 
 
 1. Genr. storm, tempest, foul weather; 
 Matt. 16, 3 at irpai- eri^/xepoi/ x el P<*>v. Acts 
 27, 20 ^et/icoi/os re OVK oXi yov eiriKfiufvov. 
 
X C P 
 
 781 
 
 Sopt. for Dttia Ezra. 10, 9. Job 37, 6. Jos. 
 Ant. 6. 5. 6. JEl. V. H. 8. 5. Plut. Timol. 
 
 19. 28 TOO Xet/iOWOf (TTlKdfJLfVOV. Xen. Mem. 
 
 3. 5. 6. 
 
 2. Meton. the season of rains and storms, 
 the rainy season, winter ; for the winter of 
 Palestine, see Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. p. 
 96 sq. John 10, 22 KOI xetjiwi/ rjv. 2 Tim. 
 
 4, 21. Genit. as time when, ^ei/ion/or, in 
 winter, Matt. 24, 20. Mark 13, 18. Sept. 
 for IPO Cant. 2, 1 1 . Diod.- Sic. 1. 41 init. 
 Dem. i24. 3. Xen. Mem. 1.2. 1. Genit. 
 
 Xen. Conv. 2. 18. 
 
 i 
 
 X l Pi P?) /i 1 TO hand, the human 
 hand ; Pltir. at x f ~ l P es > the hands ; Matt. 3, 
 
 12 OV TO TTTUOV (V TTJ X fl P^ C.VTOV. 5, 30 ft T) 
 
 dfid (TOV ^elp (TKav8aXifi erf. 8, 15 ; TTJV 
 X f L P a fx v npdv\. fT)pafj.fj.(injvl2, 10. Mark 
 3, 1. 3. Matt. 15, 20 dv nrrois ^f peril/ cpayeli . 
 26, 23 6 ffj.pd\l/as p.tr e /iov tv rco rpv/3Xta> 
 TTJV xelpa, in allusion to the oriental manner 
 of eating. Matt. 27, 24. Mark 3, 5. Luke 6, 
 
 I. 24, 39. John 20, 25. 27. Acts 3, 7. 17, 
 25. 28, 3. 4. 1 Cor. 4, 12 et 1 Thess. 4, 1 1 
 tpydf crSai THIS Idiais X f P~ 1 - Gal. 6, 1 1 et 
 Philem. 19 eypa^a rfj epf) xetpt. Col. 4, 18 
 
 6 dcnracr/jios rfj (p.fj x ft p i - Heb. 12, 12. James 
 4, 8. 1 John 1, 1. al. saep. So of angels, 
 Matt. 4, 6 iiii x fl P<0> v dpovcri ere. Luke 4, 
 
 II. Rev. 1, 16. 17. 6, 5. 8,4. al. Sept. 
 very often for 1? , as Gen. 22, 6. 24, 2. 
 Prov. 26, 15. Is. 6, 6. (Luc. D. Deor. 26. 
 1. Hdian. 1. 9. 7. Xen. An. 6. 1. 9. ib. 1. 
 10. 1.) In phrases; e. g. tpya xp&>i> TI- 
 vos, the works of one s hand*, idols, Acts 7, 
 41 ; evil deeds or conduct, Rev. 9, 20 ; of 
 God, the works of creation, Heb. 1, 10. 2, 
 
 7 ; comp. below in no. 2, and also in tpyov 
 no. 3. For alptiv TTJV x e W a Rev. 10, 5, see 
 in aipv no. 1. For other frequent phrases 
 and constructions, see the following arti 
 cles : 8t|tof no. 2. a ; e /creiVw no. 1 ; eVm- 
 pw no. 1 ; eVt$dXX<a no. 1 ; Vt3ecriy, eVt- 
 Ttinp.i no. 1. b ; eVtXa/zjSdi a) no. 1. a ; Kara- 
 ereto) ; Kpartd) no. 1. b; I/OTTO). 
 
 2. Of God, anthropopathically, i. q. the 
 powerful hand of God ; e. g. Acts 4, 30 eV 
 ro> TTjv X fl P^ crov (KTfivtiv ere (Is laaiv, comp. 
 in eVreiVw no. 1. Elsewhere to the hand of 
 God as the instrument of action and of 
 power, is ascribed that which strictly be 
 longs to God himself; comp. in oc/>3oX/io r 
 no. 2. Acts 4, 28 ocra 17 x e P crov * a "7 
 3ov\r) crov irpou>pi(Tt yej/fcrSat. 7, 50 ov^i rj 
 X(i,3 pov eVot ijcre ravra ndvra ; 1 Pet. 5, 6. 
 So ra fpyu T>V xetpeo* TOU 3eoi), see above 
 in no. 1, and in tpyov no. 3. Comp. Sept. 
 and I? Is. 66, 2. Ps. 103, 22. 8, 6. Also 
 i) \fip Kvplov rfv /xer avrov, the hand of the 
 
 Lord was with him, for help, aid, i. q. the 
 Lord was with him. Luke 1, 66. Acts 11, 
 21. Sept. and B BS> PiirP 15 i Sam. 22, 
 17. 2 Sam. 3, 12. Further, Acts 13, 11 
 (Sou, x f ip Kvplov 7rt ere , lo ! the hand of the 
 Lord is upon t/iee, for punishment. Sept. 
 for B b? vr Am. 1, 8 ; ^ Ez. 13, 9 : 
 3 /n 1 Sam. 7, 13. 12, 15 ; comp. Heb. Lex. 
 "^ no. 1. b, c. Non al. 
 
 3. With Prepositions, mostly by Hebra 
 ism, where to ^ei p as the instrument of ac 
 tion and power, is often ascribed what 
 strictly belongs to the person himself or to 
 his power ; cornp. above in no. 2. E. g. 
 
 a) 8 1 a x fl pos v. x fl P^ v TWOS, by the 
 hand or hands of any one, by his interven 
 tion, i. q. Sid TIVOS. Mark 6, 2 Swdpfis TOI- 
 aiirai. dia TOJV ^etpoii/ avrov yivovrai. i. e. are 
 done by him. Acts 2, 23. 5, 12 8ia TU>V x- 
 ptav TUIV OTT. tytvfTO o-Tjfj.f ia Kal Ttpara. 7, 
 25.11,30. 14,3. 15,23. 19, ll.nonal. 
 Sept. and B *ra Lev. 10, 11. 2 Chr. 34, 
 14. Sept. often eV xp , 1 K. 2, 25. 12, 
 15 ; see below in lett. c. Heb. Lex. "^ aa. 
 
 b) tls ^eipds TWOS, into the hands of 
 any one, i. e. into his power ; so chiefly 
 TrapaStSoVat etj x- ^ att - 17 22 - 26 i 45. 
 Mark 9, 31. 14, 41. Luke 9, 44. 24, 7. 
 Acts 21, 11. 28, 17. non al. Comp. in Tra- 
 pa8i8(op,i no. 1. Sept. for s "T3 -JPi 
 1 Sam. 23, 4. 12. 14. Job 16, 11. al. Sept. 
 oftener eV xeipi, Judg. 2, 14. 6, 1. al. Also 
 with verbs of committing, SiSoVcu rt etr ^. 
 John 13, 3 ; Trapari S^i e*y ^. Luke 23,46. 
 Sept. and Heb. Gen. 42, 37. (Pol. 3. 52. 7. 
 Dem. 32. 1.) Once e ^7r/Trreti eiy xelpds 
 rtwy, to fall into the hands of any one, into 
 his power, for punishment, Heb. 10, 31. 
 Sept. for B *na bE3 2 Sam. 24, 14. 1 Chr. 
 21, 13. So Ecclus. 2, 18. 38, 15. Comp. 
 e X3eIi/ (Is x^P as ^uc. Gymnas. 25. Xen. 
 Cyr. 2. 4. 15. c) tv x fl P - rtv Si once 
 i. q. eij ^eipdy TIVOS, comp. eV no. 4. John 
 3, 35 Trdvra 8t8(i>K(v eV Trj ^ftpt OVTOV. 
 (Sept. for B TJ3 -jni Josh. 2, 24. Judg. 1, 
 2.) Elsewhere i. q. 8ia ^etpo j TIVOS, see 
 above in lett. a, i. e. by or through the inter 
 vention of any one, Acts 7, 35 V x- dyyi- 
 \ov. Gal. 3, 19 eV ^. /iecnrov. Sept. for 
 B ra Num. 15, 23. Jer. 37, 2. So Ec 
 clus. 48, 20. 49, & d) e /t xf po* rti/or, 
 ow^ c///ie ?iand of any one, out of his power, 
 after verbs of freeing, delivering, and the 
 like ; Luke 1,71 o-caTrjpiav e *c ^etpoy irdv- 
 TU>V <crX. v. 74. John 10, 28. 29. 39. Acts 
 12, 11. 24,7 Avcri aj . . . [aii-ov] e < TU>V ^ei- 
 ptav TJH&V dnrjyayf. Sept. for " JO Gen. 32, 
 11. Ex. 18, 9. 10. So Jos. Vit. $ 15 Seoi 
 
782 
 
 puwacr3ai p.f tK TTJS fKfivatv %fip6s. Comp. 
 Luc. D. Deor. 11. 2. + 
 
 Xeipaywyed), cS, f. qo-w, (^eipaywyor,) 
 to lead by the hand, c. ace. Acts 9, 8. 22, 
 11. Artemid. 5. 20. Luc. Tirn. 30, 32. 
 Diod. Sic. 13. 20. 
 
 %eipay(i)y6$, O u, 6, fj, adj. (x p y> 
 dywyr/,) leading by the hand, a hand-leader, 
 Acts 13, 11. Artemid. 1. 50 TucpXous eVoi- 
 rja-fv, Iva xpay<uyoi? 7o-o>irai. Pint, de 
 Fortun. 2 fin. 
 
 Xf p> ypd(p.) chirography, hand-writing, 
 Dion. Hal. Ant. 5. 8. Pol. 30. 8. 4. In 
 N. T. meton. a hand-writing, manuscript, 
 something written by hand, e. g. the Mosaic 
 law, the letter in antith. to the spirit, Col. 
 2, 14; comp. Eph. 2, 15. So genr. Pol. 
 30. 8. 4 ; and of a written obligation, bond, 
 Tob. 5, 3. 9, 5. Artemid. 3. 40. 
 
 XeipOTTOirjTOS, ou, 6, rj, adj. (xe/p,7rou<,) 
 made with hands, artificial, external, e. g. 
 vaos xeipoTj-oiTjro? Mark 14, 58. Acts 7, 48. 
 17, 24. Eph. 2, 11 irepiroij.fi x- Heb. 9, 11. 
 24. Judith 8, 18. Hdian. 8. 1. 14. Xen. 
 An. 4. 3. 5. 
 
 ^eipOTOVeWj cS, f. 770-0), (xeiporovos , 
 Xfi p, TfiVw,) to stretch out the hand, to hold 
 up the hand, as in voting ; hence to vote, to 
 give one s vote, by holding up the hand, in- 
 trans. Pol. 9. 30. 5. In N. T. trans, to choose 
 by vote, to appoint ; c. ace. et dat. Acts 14, 
 23 x ft P OTOV *] (TavTfS avrois TtpffflUvTepovs. 
 Pass. 2 Cor. 8, 19. [2 Tim. 4, 23. Tit. 3, 
 16.] So Jos. Ant. 13. 2. 2 x fl P OTOl ^t JLfV 
 ere a-f]p.fpov dpxtfpfa. Hdian. 7. 10. 3. 
 Xen. Hell. 6. 2. 11. 
 
 %ipa)i>. ovos, 6, 17, worse, irreg. Compa- 
 rat. to adj. KOKOS, from an obsol. posit, xw* 
 see Buttm. j 68. 2 ; spoken of state, condi 
 tion, quality, Matt. 9, 16 et Mark 2, 21 
 crxio"fi,a x f ^P v yiverai. Matt. 1 2, 45 Ta t(r\a- 
 TO. rov ai/3p. fKfivov yiverai. x f ip ova T( "" 
 npvruv. 27,64. Mark 5, 26. Luke 11, 26. 
 John 5, 14. 2 Pet. 2, 20. Of punishment, 
 worse, more severe, Heb. 10, 29. So Wisd. 
 15, 18. Hdian. 3. 13. 14. Diod. Sic. 20. 57. 
 Xen. Mem. 4. 5. 6. Trop. of persons, in a 
 moral sense ; 1 Tim. 5, 8 (MHO-TOD -jftlptov- 
 2 Tim. 3, 13. So ^Eschin. 60. 15. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 32. 
 
 Xepovfllp, Heb. Plur. D^VO, cheru 
 bim, from Sing. 21">3, Sept. x f Pv& Ex. 41, 
 18, a cherub ; in N. T. spoken of the golden 
 figures representing the cherubim and pla 
 ced on or over the ark, Heb. 9, 5 ; comp. 
 Sept. and Heb. Ex. 25, 18 sq.--The cheru 
 
 bim, in the theology of the Hebrews, are 
 beings of a celestial nature, having a form 
 composed from the figures of a man, eagle, 
 ox, and lion, as the emblems of wisdom and 
 strength, with four wings ; comp. Ez. c. 1. 
 10. As to their office, they are first men 
 tioned as guarding the gate of Paradise, 
 Gen. 3, 24 ; then, as bearing the throne of 
 God upon their wings swiftly through the 
 clouds, 2 Sam. 22, 11. Ps. 18, 12. Ez. 1. c. 
 Golden figures of cherubim were placed on 
 or over the ark, so as to cover it, Ex. 25, 
 1 8 sq. and as the ark was the seat of God s 
 visible presence, he is hence said to dwell 
 between the cherubim, 1 Sam. 4, 4. 2 Sam. 
 
 6, 2. Ps. 80, 2. 99, 1. When the temple 
 was built, other like images were placed 
 over the ark and around the holy of holies, 
 1 K. 6, 23 sq. 8, 6 sq. See espec. Heb. 
 Lex. art. 2113 J os . Ant. 3. 6. 5 TW 8 
 fTT&efiMTi avTT)s [TTJ! KijSwroC] rj<Tav irpocrTV- 
 Tffis ftiio ^fpovjSeTr /tei avrovs E/Spaioi *a- 
 Xouo r t. ib. 8. 3. 3. 
 
 %ijpa, as, f), (x^poj,) a widaw, one Oe 
 reaved of a husband; Matt. 23, 13 [14] olnias 
 Tcav xnp<*> 1 - Mark 12, 40. 42 p.ia x*!P a TTTO)- 
 XJ. v. 43. Luke 2, 37. 4, 25. 7, 12. 18,3. 
 5. 20,47. 21,2.3. Acts 6,1. 9,39.41. 
 1 Cor. 7, 8. 1 Tim. 5, 3. 4. 5. 9. 11. 16 bis 
 James 1, 27. Sept. for ^5^ Gen. 38, 11. 
 Ex. 22, 22. 24. al. (2 Mace. 3, 10. Soph. 
 Aj. 653. Luc. de Mort. Peregr. 12.) With 
 yvvr] added ; Luke 4, 26 Trpor yvvaiKa xnP av 
 to a widuio woman. Sept. yvvf) x*!P a f r 
 ns^bx 2 Sam. 14, 5. 1 K. 7, 14. So Jos. 
 Ant. 8. 13. 2. 1 lut. Mor. II. p. 28. ^Esop. 
 Fab. 24. Poet, of a city left desolate, Rev. 
 18, 7 ; comp. Is. 47, 8. Lam. 1, 1. 
 
 ^^9, adv. yesterday, John 4, 52. Acts 
 
 7, 28. Heb. 13, 8. Sept. for iian Gen. 31, 
 2. 2 Sam. 3, 17. Hdian. 8. 6. 3. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 7. 3. Xen. An. 6. 4. 18. The Attics 
 wrote also e^3e f, comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 
 323. 
 
 ou, 6, (xXtot, px w a c 
 liarch, captain of a thousand, Sept. for "ib 
 D^B^S Deut. 1, 15. 2 Sam. 18, 1. Xen. 
 Cyr. 3. 3. 11 crvviKaXecre p.vpidpxovs KOI 
 X^tdpxovs KCU ra^idpxovs KOI Xo^ayouj. 
 In N. T. a chiliarch, put for a commander, 
 captain, a military chief, viz. 
 
 1. Genr. Mark 6, 21. Acts 25, 23. Rev. 
 6, 15. 19, 18. Jos. Ant. 7. 2. 2. 
 
 2. Spec, a tribune, a military tribune, an 
 officer of the Roman armies, six of whom 
 were attached to each legion and were its 
 chief officers. In battle each tribune seems 
 to have had charge often centuries : whence 
 
783 
 
 prob. the Greek name x i ^ a PX s see ^~ 
 am s Rom. Ant. p. 369, comp. p. 193. Diet. 
 of Antt. art. Exercitus, p. 503. In N. T. 
 spoken of the tribune Claudius Lysias, who 
 commanded the garrison in the fortress An- 
 tonia at Jerusalem, Acts 21,31. 32. 33. 37. 
 22, 24. 26. 27. 28. 29. 23, 10. 15. 17. 18. 
 
 19. 22. 24, 7. 22. So Hdian. 3. 12. 18. 
 Dion. Hal. Ant. 6. 4. 
 
 3. Spoken of the captain or prefect of the 
 temple, John 18, 12 ; see fully in orpcrnj- 
 yos no. 2, and oTretpo no. 2. 
 
 ^tXia9, d8os, 17, (xtXtot,) a chiliad, a 
 thousand, the noun of number, Luke 14, 31 
 bis. Acts 4, 4. 1 Cor. 10, 8. Rev. 5, 11. 7, 
 4. 5 ter. 6 ter. 7 ter. 8 ter. 11,13. 14, 1. 3. 
 21, 16. Sept. for C]i Gen 24,60. Ex. 
 12, 37. Luc. Hermot. 56. Plato Phaedr. 
 256. e. Comp. Buttm. 70. 
 
 %i\ioi, at, a, adj. numeral, a thousand, 
 2 Pet. 3, 8 bis. Rev. 11, 3. 12, 6. 14,20. 
 
 20, 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Sept. for S)b Gen. 20, 
 16. Ex. 38, 25. Hdian. 1. 15/19. Xen. 
 Hell. 1. 4. 21. Comp. Buttm. $70. 
 
 Xi o?, ov, 17, Chios, now Scio, one of the 
 larger Greek islands, lying near the coast 
 of Asia Minor, between Samos and Lesbos. 
 and celebrated for its mastix and wine. Acts 
 20, 15. Did. Sic. 5. 81. Comp. Hor. Od. 
 3. 19. 5. Pococke Descr. of the East; II. 
 i. p. 1- f 
 
 yyrwv^ 5>vos, 6, (Heb. ^3h3 ,) a tunic, 
 the inner garment, worn next the skin, 
 mostly with sleeves, and reaching usually 
 to the knees, rarely to the ancles ; see Heb. 
 Lex. art. ^^3. Adam s Rorn. Ant. p. 416. 
 Diet, of Antt. art. Tunica. So Matt. 5, 40 
 rat TOV \iTotvd crov Aa/Seiy. Luke 6, 29. 
 John 19, 23 bis. Acts 9, 39. Jude 23. 
 Sometimes two tunics seem to have been 
 worn, prob. of different stuffs, for ornament 
 or luxury ; Matt. 10, 10. Mark 6, 9. Luke 
 3, 11. 9, 3. Hence is said of the high 
 priest, biappfj^as TOVS x tT ^ vas $** Mark 
 
 14, 63 ; comp. 2 Mace. 4, 38. Jos. Ant. 3. 
 7. 4, wherp ^mov is the ^ S E or outer tunic. 
 Sept. genr. for ftths Gen. 37, 3. 2 Sam. 
 
 15, 32. Cant. 5, 4. --E1. V. H. 1. 16 iv 
 
 &VVTCI aVTOV TOV ^ITUtVa, KOI Sot/LtOTlOJ 7T6- 
 
 pifidkoufvov. Luc. D. Deor. 13. 2. Diod. 
 Sic, 4. 38. Xen. Cyr. 6. 4. 1, 2. 
 
 %wi>, 6vos, T), snow, Matt. 28, 3. Mark 
 9, 3. Rev. 1,14. Sept. for &U Job 37, 6. 
 Is. 1, 18. JE\. V. H. 7. 6. Hdian. 3. 3. 9. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 30. 
 
 v\a/AU9, vSor, f], chlamys, a wide cloak 
 worn sometimes by kings, Jos. Ant. 5. 1. 
 
 10. Hdian. 7. 5. 7 ; by military officers, 
 2 Mace. 12, 35. JEL V. H. 14. 10 ; by sol 
 diers and others Plant. Rud. 2. 2. 9. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 7. 5 ; also by a hunter, Luc. D. 
 Deor. 11. 2. In N. T. prob. the Roman 
 paludamentum, officer s cloak, usually of 
 purple, Matt. 27, 28. 31 ; see in 7rop<pupa fin. 
 The paludamentum was hung loosely over 
 the shoulders, being fastened across the 
 breast by a clasp ; and reached below the 
 knees; see Adam s Ant. p. 371. Diet, of 
 Antt. art. Paludamentum, Chlamys. 
 
 X\ei/aa>, f. d<r<a, (x^iy,) to jest, to de 
 ride, to scoff, absol. Acts 17, 32 ; also Acts 
 2, 13 Rec. where others StaxXevafco q. v . 
 Wisd. 11, 14. Pol. 4. 3. 13. Aristoph. Ran. 
 376 ; c. ace. Plut. Timol. 15. Dem. 78. 12. 
 
 lukewarm, Rev. 3, 16. Athen. 3. p. 123. 
 e, vSup x*- Plut - de Fluv - 25 - 3 - 
 
 X\6r), TJS, TI, Chloe, pr. n. of a female 
 Christian at Corinth, 1 Cor. 1, 11. 
 
 d, 6v, (xA 7> x or > P r - P a - 
 green, yellowish-green, the colour of the first 
 shoots of grass and herbage, Horn. Od. 16. 
 17. In N. T. 
 
 1 . Genr. green, verdant, like young her 
 bage ; Mark 6, 39 eVt TW x^ w P<? XP T V- 
 Rev. 8, 7. 9, 4. Sept. for P" Gen. 1, 30. 
 Is. 15, 6 ; p 1 ?; 2 K. 19, 26.JE\. V. H. 13. 
 16. Plut. Romul. 20. Thuc. 4. 6. 
 
 2. pale, dun, of a horse, Rev. 6, 8 innos 
 xXeopor . Artemid. 1 . 77 or 79 x^o>Pr yap 
 6 xpv&os. Anthol. Gr. III. p. 11 x^ (u p | 7 1 
 (rapxa. lies. Scut. 231 x^- aftdpas. 
 
 X^S , six hundred and sixty-six, the 
 number for which these letters stand, viz. 
 X 600, f 60, r 6 ; see Buttm. $ 2. n. 3. 
 Rev. 13, 18. 
 
 ^oi/co9, 17, 6v, (\oos, x o ^ f >) f earth, 
 earthy, terrene, 1 Cor. 15, 47. 48 bis. 49. 
 Only in N. T. 
 
 ^oiw, IKOS, fj, a chcenix, an Attic mea 
 sure for grain and things dry, equal to the 
 48th part of the Attic medimnus, or to the 
 eighth part of a Roman modius, and conse 
 quently nearly equivalent to one quart 
 English ; see in art. /wSSior. A chantx of 
 grain was the daily allowance for one man, 
 whether soldier or slave, Hdot. 7. 187 ; see 
 Boeckh Staatsh. der. Ath. I. p. 99 sq. So 
 Rev. 6, 6 bis, x "^ O-ITOV 8r)vapiov, nai rptls 
 XoiViKf s KptSf/r 8nvapiov, implying excessive 
 dearness, since the ordinary price of a me 
 dimnus of wheat in Attica and Sicily did not 
 exceed five or six drachma? or denarii ; see 
 Bosckh 1. c. p. 102 sq. Sept. Ez. 45. 10. 
 
784 
 
 11. Ml V. H. 1. 26. Diod. Sic. 19.49. 
 Xen. An. 1. 5. 6. 
 
 ^0^30?, ou, 6, 17, a swine; Matt. 7, 6, 
 comp. in <i. Matt. 8, 30. 31. 32 bis. 
 Mark 5, 11. 12. 13. [14.] 16. Luke 8, 32. 
 33. 15, 15. 16. ^El. V. H. 2. 11. Hdian. 
 5. 6. 21. Xen. An. 7. 8. 5. 
 
 %p\d(i), >, f. TJO-W, (xXr;.) to be bilious, 
 melancholy, mad, i. q. fj.\ayxo\da, Aris- 
 toph. Nub. 833. Later and in N. T. i. q. 
 Xo\ovp,ai, to be fall of gall, to be angry, en 
 raged, c. dat. pers. John 7, 23 e/xoi ^oXarf. 
 So 3 Mace. 3, 1. Mosch. 1. 10. Artemid. 1. 
 4. Diog. Laert. 9. 66. Schol. in Aristoph. 
 Plut. 12, xoXav Trapa ro is Am/coij, TO 
 3ai jrapa rots KOIVOIS, TO 
 
 s, TJ, the bile, gall, Palaeph. 27. 
 2. Plato Rep. 564. b ; then as the seat of 
 anger, choler, wrath, Luc. Fugit. 19. Dern. 
 778. 8. In N. T. gall, bitterness, viz. 
 
 1. poison, venom, trop. Acts 8, 23 ds yap 
 XO\TJV niKpias . . . 6pa> (re ovra, i. q. (Is x~ 
 \T]V TtiKpdv, bitter gall, venom ; see in TriKpia 
 and crvvSfcrpos. Sept. pr. for 15 6O poppy, 
 poison, Deut. 29, 17. 32, 32. Plut. Romul. 
 
 17 UXTTTfp 10V KOI XoXJjJ tvltOV ^rjptCOV. 
 
 2. From the Heb. bitter herbs, e. g. worm 
 wood, poppy, myrrh, and the like ; Matt. 
 27, 34 fftaiKav aurw mclv oos fj.frd ^oX^s 
 uffj.iyfj.evov, comp. Mark 15, 23; see fully 
 in ooy. Sept. for "i$?? wormwood, Prov. 
 
 5, 4. Lam. 3, 15 ; and for tixi poppy, Ps. 
 C9, 22. Jer. 8, 14. 
 
 %009, 6, (x">, x o/c0 ) contr. nominat. 
 X<>vs, gen. p^oof, dat. ^cu, ace. x^ v - com P- 
 Passow s. v. Buttm. 58 pen. earth, as 
 dug out and thrown up, a heap of earth, 
 mound, Hdot. 1 . 1506 ^ovy 6 ft-opvx^eis. 
 Pol. 4. 40. 7. Thuc. 2. 76. In N. T. genr. 
 loose earth, dirt, dust; Mark 6. 11 enriva.- 
 are rov \ovv KT\. i. q. Koviopros in Matt. 
 10, 14; see in eVrii/do-<ra>. (Sept. for IS* 
 Is. 52, 2.) Rev. 18, 19 e(3a\ov xvv " T^S 
 Kf(j)a\as aiirvv, in token of grief, mourning ; 
 see in a-rro86s, and so Sept. for IBS Josh. 7, 
 
 6. Sept. genr. for "> Gen. 2, 7. 2 Chr. 
 J, 9. So Hdian. 8. 4. 11. 
 
 Xopafyv) fj, indec. Chorazin, written 
 also in Mss. XopafdiV, Xwpa^tV, or x^P a 
 Zlv, a place of Galilee mentioned in connec 
 tion with Bethsaida and Capernaum, and 
 probably near them, Matt. 11, 21. Luke 10, 
 13. According to Eusebius and Jerome in 
 Onomast. Chorazin was a village (KM/XI;) of 
 Galilee, two Roman miles from Capernaum, 
 already deserted in their day ; see Rosenm. 
 Bibl. Geogr. II. ii. p. 72. Reland Palaest. p. 
 721 sq. Bibl. Res. in Palest. III. p. 294. 
 
 u>, f. 770-0), 
 
 ayca,) to be chorus-leader, to lead a chorus ol 
 singers and dancers, Anthol. Gr. I. 73 ; 
 trop. Luc. Necyom. 16. Plato Theaet. 27. 
 p. 179. d. Then, to lead out or furnish a 
 chorus on public occasions at one s own ex 
 pense, for which purpose at Athens persons 
 called xopqyoi were appointed from eacli 
 tribe, Dem. 565. 11. Xen. Mem. 3. 4. 3, 6. 
 Xen. Ath. 1. 13 xop^yovcrt ot TrXoiicrtot. 
 Sturz Lex. Xen. art. xopyyos. Potter s Gr. 
 Ant. I. p. 86. Diet, of Antt. art. Choregus. 
 Hence genr. and in N. T. to furnish, to 
 supply, to give, c. ace. 1 Pet. 4, 1 1 e toqu 
 es T/y [j)j/] ^op^yei 6 3edy. 2 Cor. 9, 10 6 8e 
 fmxoprjyaiv cnrtpfj-a rw (rnfipovri . . . XP r )~ 
 yfjcrai Kal ir\rfi{jvai rov a-jropov vp.>v, where 
 for the Opt. see Matth. 513. Buttm. J 139. 
 m. 7. Winer 5 42. 5. So Ecclus. 1, 10. 25. 
 JEl V. H. 4. 19. Hdian. 1. 6. 9. Diod. Sic. 
 2. 35 xoprj-yotlcra ras rpo(pas a<p3oi>a>s. 
 
 %o/?09, oO, 6, a dance, ring-dance, and 
 in general, dancing as connected with music 
 and song, espec. on festive occasions ; Luke 
 15, 25 rjnovtre crv/Jifptovias Knl ^opaiy. Sept, 
 for i-lbiira Ex. 15,20. Judg. 11,34. Horn. 
 II. 16^ 18. Luc. D. Deor. 22. 3. Dem. 530. 
 23. Xen. Hi. 6. 2. Meton. a chorus, troop 
 of dancers and singers, Jos. Ant. 7. 4. 2 
 Hdian. 4. 2. 9. Xen. Mem. 3. 2. 12. 
 
 Xpprafo, f. ao-cB, (xo proy,) to feed with 
 grass, hay ; to fodder ; pr. beasts, c. ace. 
 Hes. Op. 450 or 454. Plato Rep. 372. d. 
 In N. T. genr. to feed, to Jill with food, to 
 satisfy, to satiate ; spoken 
 
 1. Of birds of prey; Pass. c. ?K TWOS, 
 Rev. 19, 21 Ta opvea e^opracrS?; fK TO>I> 
 
 2. Of persons, in the usage of the later 
 Greek, Sturz de Dial. Alex. p. 200. Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 64; so c. accus. expr. or impl. 
 Matt. 15, 33 cdtrre ^oprdcrai o\\ov TocroC- 
 TOV. Pass. Matt. 14, 20 KCU e<f)ayov irdvrts 
 KOI e xoprdo-Srjo-uj/. 15, 37. Mark 6, 42. 7, 
 27. 8, 8. Luke 9, 17. John 6, 26. Phil. 4, 
 12. James 2, 16. Sept. for sab Jer. 5, 7. 
 Ps. 37, 19. (Arr. Epict. 1. 9. "19. Athen. 
 3. p. 99. f. Plut. Symp. 1. 2. 2.) With 
 a further adjunct of the material, c. gen. 
 Mark 8, 4 TOVTOVS . . . ^oprdtrai aprons. 
 Matth. 5 352. With drro TWOS, Luke 16, 
 21 {irSvfJ.aiv ^opratrSfji at airb r&v ^t^icof. 
 Sept. c. gen. for 3 sa(t) Lam. 3, 15. 30 ; c. 
 dno for ) Sato Ps. 104, 13. So c. gen. 
 Anthol. Gr. III. p- 22. Trop. to satisfy the 
 desire of any one, to fill; Pass. Matt. 5, 6. 
 Luke 6, 21. 
 
 ^opracr/jLa, aros, TO, (^oprdfo),) fodder, 
 forage, green or dry, for animals, Sept. for 
 
785 
 
 Gen. 24, 25. 32. Pol. 9. 4. 3. Diod. 
 Sic. *20. 76. In N. T. genr. food, suste 
 nance, for persons, Acts 7, 1 1 . So XO PTOJ 
 Anth. Gr. I. p. 119. 
 
 ^opro?, ov, 6, (kindr. Lat. hortus, ) pr. 
 an inclosure, yard, court, Horn. II. 11. 773 
 or 774 ; espec. for cattle, ib. 24. 640 ; then 
 of a place or range of pasturage, a pasture, 
 range, Eurip. Iph. Taur. 134 ^oprot tv- 
 SerSpot. ib. Cyclop. 504 or 507. Find. Ol. 
 13. 62 x^pTot \fovros. Meton. fodder for 
 animaJs, green or dry, grass, hay, Hes. Op. 
 604 or 608. Luc. As in. 15. Xen. Cyr. 8. 6. 
 12. An. 1. 5. 10 xoprov Kov<pov. Hence 
 genr. and in N. T. grass, herbage; Matt. 
 6, 30 rov x<>pTov TOU dypov. 14, 19. Mark 
 6, 39 fVi T<u xXeapw X"P T V- Luke 12, 28 . 
 John 6, 10. 1 Cor. 3, 12. James 1, 10. 11. 
 1 Pet. 1, 24ter. Rev. 8, 7. 9, 4. Also of 
 grain as growing, Matt. 1 3, 26. Mark 4, 28. 
 Sept. for -psn Ps. 38, 2. Is. 40, 7. 8; 
 SiBS Gen. 2/5. Prov. 19, 12. So Plut 
 Romul. 8. Xen. An. 1. 5. 5 ov yap rfv ^o p- 
 Tor, ov8e aXXo SeV8poi> ov8ei>, dXXa 
 
 Xov^as, a, 6. Chuzas, pr. n. of the 
 steward of Herod Antipas, Luke 8, 3. See 
 in (ir iToTTos no. 1. 
 
 %o?, see 
 
 *Xpdw, , f. ,70-00, contracted in 77 instead 
 of a, like faco, Buttm. $ 105. n. 5. The 
 root, xpaco under different forms, has in 
 prose four different significations, viz. xp a 
 to viler an oracle, not found in N. T. ; 
 KiXpr)p.i to supply with, to lend; xpaopai 
 to use : XPV i m P ers - & needs, behooves; see 
 in Buttm. $114. Passow in xP a<a - n 
 N.T. 
 
 I. Ki xp;p.ij to lend, see in its order. 
 
 II. xpao/iai, f. 7jo-op.at, Mid. depon. aor. 
 1 t xpTjo-ap-Tji/, Imperat. xprjo-ai 1 Cor. 7, 21 ; 
 to use, to make use of, c. dat. Buttm. 5 1 33. 
 
 4. a. Matth. $ 396. 1 . a) Of things, Acts 
 27, 17 jSorjaeiW ( xpuvro. 1 Cor. 7, 21. 31. 
 9, 12. 15. 2 Cor. 1, 17. 3, 12. 1 Tim. 1, 8. 
 
 5, 23 olva> oXt yw XP- ^ Wisd. 2, 6. 
 jEl. V. H. 5. 1. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 4. b) 
 Of persons, to use well or ill. to treat, c. dat. 
 et adv. Acts 27. 3 <piXay3pa>7ra>f re 6 lov- 
 Xtos T IIavX<0 xprjo-ap-eror. With adv. 
 simpl. 2 Cor. 13, 10 Iva. napuv /.u] aVoTopwj 
 (vfuv) xpi7o-o>p.at, lest I treat, ynu sharply, 
 use sharpness, comp. Sept. FMh. 1, 19. 9, 
 27. Sept. for b ntoS Gen. IP, 6. 19, 8. 
 So Jos. Ant. 2. 15. 1 x aXeTi-ws. Hilian. 3. 13. 
 8. Xen. Mem. 4. 6. 5. 
 
 III. Impers. ^p^impf. f xp iv, inf. xpiji/at, 
 Buttm. j 1 14 ; pr. there is use for ; hence, 
 
 50 
 
 it needs, it behooves, it ought, Germ, et 
 braucht ; c. inf. James 3, 10 ov xp*l rav- 
 TO ovTco yjVeo-Sat, tliexe things ovglU not so 
 to be. Buttm. } 129. 18. Jos. Ant. 14. 13. 
 7 TI xp*> iroidv. JEi. V. H. 2. 12. Hdian. 1. 
 6. 18. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 19, 24. 
 
 ^pLa, as, T), (xptos, xpao/int,) 1 . use, 
 usage, employment, the act of using, Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 2. 25 irpbs TTJV TOV ITTTTOV xP f * av - 
 ib. 2. 4. 1. In N. T. meton. that in which 
 one is employed, an employment, affair, bu 
 siness ; Acts 6, 3 ovr KOToo-T^o-opei/ eVt Trjs 
 Xpdas Taiirrjs. So 2 Mace. 7. 24. Jos. B. J. 
 2. 20. 3 ov/c tTr(<m)O av [avTov^irais xP f al s- 
 Pol. 3. 45. 2 Toly eir\ TTJV avrr/v xpdav fa- 
 Treo-roX/ieVotj-. Dion. Hal. Ant. 5. 7 fin. 
 
 2. need, necessity, want. a) Genr. 
 Eph. 4, 29 et TIS [Xoyos] dyaSor Trpbs OIKO- 
 8ofj,rjv Trjs xp f ^s, genit. of qual. for needful 
 edification; comp. Winer. 34. 2. So^pe/a 
 e o-Tt, there is need, opus esf, c. gen. Luke 
 10, 42 ivos 6V f o-Tt xpei a, one thing is need 
 ful ; also c. infin. Heb. 7, 11. Diod. Sic. 
 1. 19. Plut. Pericl. 8; c. gen. Ecclus. 3, 
 22. Pol. 3. 111. 10 OVK eYt Xoycoi/, dXX 
 (pycov farlv f] xP f ia - Xen. Mem. 3. 3. 3. 
 
 b) Of personal need, necessity, want ; 
 Acts 20, 34 TCHS xP* La s pov . . . innjpfTna cai 
 at x e P f f a ^ rat - ft- " 1 - 12, 13. Phil. 2, 25. 
 
 4, 1 9 ; ds TTJV xpdavfor one s need or wants, 
 Phil. 4, 16; ds TOS xP"s id- Tit. 3, 14; 
 Ta Trpor xpd^av, things for need, such things 
 as were necessary to us, Acts 28, 10. 
 Ecclus. 29, 2. Plut. Cato Maj. 3. Luc. de 
 Merc. cond. 7. Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 10. 
 
 c) Elsewhere only in the phrase xP e ^ a9 
 e^W) to hare need, to need, to want, e. g. 
 a) Genr. and c. genit. to have need of; 
 Matt. 9, 1 2 ov xpf i-av exovcriv < 
 
 larpov. 21, 3. 26, 65 TI ?Tt xpeiaz/ 
 pxiprvptoi/ ; Mark 2, 17. 11, 3. 14, 63. Luke 
 
 5, 31. 9, 11 rovf xpd^av (%ovras Separreiay. 
 15, 7. 19, 31. 34. 22, 71. John 13, 29. 
 1 Cor. 12, 21 bis. 24 ov XP* MV *X fl sc - eu 
 o-^/iocn^r. Heb. 5, 12 bis. 10, 36. Rev. 
 21, 23. 22, 5. With infin. Act. Matt. 14, 
 16 ov xpd^av (xovaiv aVeXSe Tc. John 13, 10. 
 1 Thess. 1,8.4,9; also inf. Pass. Matt. 3. 
 14. 1 Thess. 5, 1. Comp. Buttm. } 140. 2. 
 Matth. 5 535. n. Winer J 45. n. 1. With 
 Iva, John 2, 25. 16, 30. 1 John 2, 27. Sept. 
 c. gen. for fen Prov. 18. 2. Is. 13, 17. 
 So c. gen. Ecclus. 13, 6. Pol. 9. 12. 1 
 Diod. Sic. 18. 42. )3) Of personal need, 
 want ; c. gen. Matt. 6, 8 olde yap 6 iraTrjp 
 vp.a>v, lav xpdav fxrre. 1 Thess. 4, 12. Rev. 
 3, 17. Absol. to hare need, to be in need, to 
 he in want ; Mark 2, 25 TI e7ro^o-e Aa3i <5, 
 ore xpetav eo-^e. Acts 2, 45. 4, 35. Eph. 
 
786 
 
 4, 28 
 3, 17. 
 
 XpeaxpeiX.eTr/?, ov, 6, (xP e f> Alt. XP 
 uf, o0ft X<B,) a debt-ower, debtor, Luke 7, 
 41. 16, 5. Sept. Prov. 29, 13. Dion. Hal. 
 Ant. 6. 22. Plut. J. Caes. 5. Comp. Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 691. 
 
 tj, impers. verb, see in xP aca HI- 
 
 ), f- >?0 & ) , (xp>?> XP et a >) * ee ^> to 
 have need of, to want, to desire; c. gen. 
 Matt. 6, 32 et Luke 12, 30 oI8e yap 6 irarrip 
 vp.u,v . . . ort X?il& Te TOVT(OV Trdvrcttv. Luke 
 11,8. Rom. i 6. 2. 2 Cor. 3, 1. Symm. 
 for 7?n Jot 22, 3. Hdian. 4. 11. 10. Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. *5. 22. 
 
 ^prj/Lta, arcs, TO, (xpaop-cu,) pr. some- 
 /TiiHg- /or use, useful, what one can use, 
 what one needs, Xen. CEc. 1. 7sq. Hence 
 genr. and in N. T. profit, riches, wealth, 
 usually Plur. ra xP?P- ara > Matt. 10, 23 
 ol ra xPW aTa fX OVTes > * e> tne Tlc ^ v ^ 
 TreTroiSoYar eVi rots xPW acriv - Luke 18, 24. 
 Sept. for t^ons Josh. 22, 8. 2 Chr. 1,11. 
 12. (Hdian. 3* l3. 11. Pint. Theseus 3. 
 Thuc. 1. 8. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 45 r&v TO. 
 Xpwara e xdiTtof.) Spec, money; once 
 Sing. Acts 4, 37 fj veyice TO XPW a > * ie mo ~ 
 ney, the price, i. q. rip.fi in 5, 2. Plur. Acts 
 8, 18. 20. 24, 26. Sept. for C)03 Job 27, 
 17. So 1 Mace. 14, 32. Hdian. 5. 4. 4.* 
 Diod. Sic. 13. 106. In Greek writers also 
 i. q. a thing, matter, business, rrpayp-a, 
 Palsph. 31. 8. Pol. 12. 15. 8. Xen. Cyr. 
 5. 2. 34. 
 
 ^pTjfiaTi^o), f. lo-co, (xpfip-a,} to do busi 
 ness, to be engaged in business, cither pri 
 vate or public, Sept. 1 K. 18, 27. Ml. V. 
 H. 3. 4 xP r )P- aT L i a>t wre p Tiixav 8rjp.o(ri<DV 
 Kal Koiva>v Trpayndraiv. Thuc. 1.87; espec. 
 in trade and money affairs, Mid. to do good 
 business, to make profit, to gain, JE1. V. H. 
 4. 12. Xen. Lac. 7. 1, 5. Of kings and 
 magistrates, to do business publicly, to gue 
 audience and answer as to ambassadors or 
 petitioners, to give response or decision, Jos. 
 Ant. 11. 3. 2 6 ^ao-iXeiif . . . KaSiVas eV cp 
 XprjfJ.aTieiv ei coSq TOTTW. Pol 4. 27. 9 o fie 
 
 f. Dem. 250. 10. Xen. Ath. 3. 2. Hence 
 in N. T. 
 
 1 . Spoken in respect to a divine response, 
 oracle, declaration, to give response, to speak 
 as an oracle, to warn from God ; absol. 
 Heb. 12,25 TOV r! yrjs TrapaiTT)o-dp.evoi XP^~ 
 ^ari^ovra, i. e. MOPPS, who consulted God 
 and delivered to the people the divine re 
 sponses, precepts, warnings, and the like. 
 So Sept. of a prophet, for "isn Jer. 26, 2 ; 
 
 of God, 30, 2. 36, 4. (Jos. Ant. 10. 1. 3 
 
 3fou. ib. 1 1 . 8. 4 (XprjpdTio ev avTto KaTa 
 TOVS VTTVOVS 6 3fdy. Diod. Sic. 3. 6 TOVS 
 Sfovy avTols TOVTU KexpypaTiKtvat.) Pass. 
 of persons, to receive a divine response, 
 warning ; to be ivarned or admonished of 
 God; absol. Heb. 8, 5 coy KfxP 7M" TU7 " rat 
 MeoiJo-qy. So c. inf. Matt. 2, 12. Acts 10, 
 22 VTTO ayye Xou. With TTfpt TWOS Heb. 1 1 , 
 7; KOT 6vap Matt. 2, 12. 22. Of things, 
 to be given in response, to be revealed ; 
 Luke 2, 26 r/v avTa> KfXp^l^aTta p.tvov VTTO 
 TOV 7TVfv[j.aTos dyiov. So Jos. Ant. 11. 8. 4 
 TO xpnpciTio-^fv, a divine oracle. 
 
 2. In the later Greek usage, i. q. to do 
 business as any one, under any name ; 
 hence genr. to take or bear a name, to be 
 named, catted; constr. with the name in ap 
 posit. Acts 11,26 xP r !P- aT i(J at Tf TrpwTov fv 
 AvTioxfta TOVS paS^Tay \pio-Tiavovs. Rom. 
 7, 3 jnotx u Xiy xp^MftTi j^ei. Jos. Ant. 13. 11. 
 
 ATJI/. Plut. M. Anton. 54 fin. KXo7raTpa 
 . . . vea "lo-is e xpqp-aTife. Diod. Sic. 1. 44. 
 Pol. 5. 57. 2. 
 
 ov, 6, (xprjp.aT, pr. 
 the doing of business ; hence, business, 
 profit, gain, Plut. Philopo3m. 4. Dem. 568. 
 18; the giving audience, response, decision, 
 JE\. V. H. 9. 13. Pol. 28. 14. 10. j n N. 
 T. a response from God, an oracle, answer, 
 Rom. 11, 4. So 2 Mace. 2, 4. 
 
 %pr)<rifj,0$, 7], ov, (xpaop-ai.) good for 
 use, useful, profitable ; 2 Tim. 2, 14 ets 
 ov&eV xpr]~ l P- v - Sept. for SS3 Gen. 37, 265 
 n^S Ez. 15, 4. Wisd. 8, 7. Plut. de Ira 
 cohib. 6 eV ovbfvl xp^f P-? 1 Xen. Mem. 
 2. 7. 7. 
 
 XpfjcnS, fas, 17, (xpaop,cu,) use, a using, 
 Jos. Ant. 4. 8. 5. Hdian. 3. 14. 13. Xen. 
 Lac. 7. 6. In N. T. spec, the use of the 
 body in sexual intercourse, Rom. 1, 26. 27. 
 So Ocell. Lucan. 4 Trpos TTJV rvv dcppoSio-i- 
 COK xpr)o-iv. Luc. Amor. 25 
 comp. 19. Isocr. 386. c. 
 
 vp^crreuoyaat, Mid. depon. 
 to show oneseJf xp^ffToy, to be good-natured, 
 gentle, kind; 1 Cor. 13, 4 17 dydnrj p.aKpo- 
 3up,et, xP r )< J " rf vfTa.i. Only in N. T. 
 
 %pr)(TTO\o<yia, as, 17, (XP^CTTO ?, Xd-yoj,) 
 good-na/ured discourse, good words, fair 
 speaking; Rom. 16, 18 Sia TTJS xp 7 ? " 1 " ^ " 
 yias Kal evXoyias. Theophyl. ad h. 1. XPT 
 (TToXoyia KoXaKei a. OTOI TO p.fv p^/iaTa <pt- 
 Xtas T/, 17 8e Stuvoia 86\ov yep.ovo-a. Eu- 
 stath. in II. ^, p. 1437. 55. Comp. 
 Xdyot Hdian. 8. 3. 10. 
 
787 
 
 XpUTTOi 
 
 ,7, 6v, (xpao/xat,) useful, pro 
 fitable, serviceable, good fur any use, e. g. 
 
 1. Of things ; Luke 5, 39 6 iraXatos [01- 
 i/or] xprj(rr6r(pi ts f ort, is belter for drinking : 
 comp. Welst. N. T. I. p. 689 sq. Sept. of 
 figs, for Sia, Jer. 24, 2. 5. So Athen. 13. 
 p. 585. e, otvov xpTjtTTw f*iv, uXiyov 5e. 
 Theophr. Char. 2. 4; genr. Hclian. 3. 13.3. 
 Dem. 183. 22. Trop. good, gentle, easy to 
 use or bear; Matt. 11, 30 6 yap vyos pov 
 Xprjo-Tos- Also morally useful, good, virtu 
 ous, in the proverb 1 Cor. 15, 33 (pSftpou- 
 o-tv rj^Sr] xpTj&Ta 6/xiAiai KaKai, quoted from 
 Menand. in Poet. Gnom. p. 187. Tauchn. 
 So fftrj xP- Aristoph. Nub. 956 or 959 ; 
 rj^os xP- Luc. Phalar. pr. 7 ; epya XP- 
 Hdian. 2. 4. 11. Xen. Ath. 1. 5 anpi^fia 
 rrXfioTrj (Is TO. xpr/OTU. 
 
 2. Of persons, useful towards others; 
 hence good-natured, good, gentle, kind; 
 Luke 6, 35 avrbs [6 3eor] xpjjoroy e cm 
 eVl roiis dxapiCTTOvs KOL novrjpovs. Eph. 4, 
 32. 1 Pet. 2, 3. Neut. TO ^pjjoroi/, good 
 ness, kindness, i. q. fj xpjjcrroT^r, Rom. 2, 
 4. Sept. genr. for 213 Ps. 34, 9. 86, 5. 
 1 Mace. 6, 11. Hdian. 2. 6. 3. Dem. 1345. 
 10. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 20. 
 
 XJjrjcrTOTrjs, jjTor, 17, (\pr)<rr6s,) pr. use 
 fulness of persons towards others, i. e. 
 
 1. goodness, gentleness, kindness; Rom. 2, 
 
 4 fj TOV TT\OVTOV TT/f XP1< TT TT l rOS UVTOV . . . 
 
 KtiTacppovfl s , 11, 22 ter,aSe ovv XPI<TT. 3eov 
 . . . iirl 8e <Tf xpJjOTorjjra, tav fTrifj.(ivr)s TTJ 
 XpT)o*r6Tr)Ti, i. e. iflhou continue in his good 
 ness, if thou fall not away. 2 Cor. 6, 6. 
 Gal. 5, 22. Eph. 2, 7. Col. 3, 12. Tit. 3,4. 
 Sept. for aia Ps. 25, 7. 31, 20. 145, 7. 
 JE\. V. H. 1. 30. Hdian. 1. 4. 11. Plut. 
 Aristid. 27 fin. 
 
 2. Trop. in a moral sense, goodness, 
 righteousness, uprightness, comp. in xP1~ 
 trros no. 1 fin. Rom. 3, 12 OVK eort irotuiv 
 Xprjo-TOTijTa, quoted from Ps. 14, 1. 3, 
 where Sept. for 213. Hdian. 2. 10. 7. 
 Plato Def. 412. e. 
 
 Xpicr/jLa, error, TO, CxP w ) P r - some 
 thing rubbed or smeared on, e. g. oil for 
 anointing, ointment, unguent, Jos. Ant. 3. 
 8. 3. jEl. V. H. 3. 13. Xen. Anab. 4. 4. 13. 
 Meton. chrism, an anointing, unction, Sept. 
 for nnttSn Ex. 29, 7. 30, 25. In N. T. 
 trop. as to Christians, an. anointing, unction 
 from God, in the gifts and graces of the 
 Holy Spirit imparted to them ; 1 John 2, 
 20 I /itlr xpi oTia fX (Tf " 7TO T0 ^ ayiov, Kal 
 oiSaTf Trdvra. v. 27 bis. The allusion is to 
 the anointing and consecration of kings and 
 priests, 1 Sam. 10, 1. 16, 13. 1 K. 1, 39. 
 
 Ex. 28, 41. 40, 15. Jos. Ant. 6. 8. 1. This 
 was emblematic of a divine spirit descend 
 ing and abiding upon them from God ; as 
 was afterwards the laying on of hands: 
 Deut. 34, 9. Joel 3, 1 [2, 28]. Jos. Ant. 6. 
 8. 2 ; comp. Matt. 3, 16. 17. Acts 2, 1 sq. 
 8, 15. 17. 1 Cor. c. 12. 
 
 XpccrTiavos, ov, (Xpio-To s,) a Chris 
 tian, Acts 11, 26. 26, 28. 1 Pet. 4, 16. 
 Act. Thorn. 22. Luc. de Mort. Peregr. 12. 
 
 ^ptcrro?, jj, 6v, (xpt w,) anointed, as 
 Sept. 6 ifptvs 6 xpKTTos f r l ?" *? 5 ? f ? "iv! s r? 
 the high-priest, Lev. 4, 3. 5. 16; also 
 2 Mace. 1, 10 ; comp. Ex. 28, 41. 40, 15. 
 Subst. 6 xpioTo? sc. rov Kvpiov, the anointed 
 of the Lord, spoken of the Hebrew kings, 
 comp. in ^piV/ia fin. 1 Sam. 12, 3. 5. 16,6. 
 2 Sam. 1, 14. Ps. 18, 51. 28, 8 ; once of 
 Cyrus, Is. 45, 1. 
 
 In N. T. 6 X/JKTT09, the Christ, the 
 Anointed, i. q. rl^csri , (he Messiah, the 
 king constituted of God ; pr. an appellative 
 of Jesus the Saviour, but often passing over 
 into a proper name or cognomen. On the 
 character of the Messiah and his kingdom, 
 see fully in /3ao-iXe/a no. 3. 
 
 a) Pr. as an appellative : a) Absol. 6 
 Xpio-To r, the Christ, the Messiah ; Mark 15, 
 32 6 Xpto-To? 6 /3ao-iXeiiy TOV lcrparj\. John 
 1 . 42 TOV Mecro /af o e art p.f^fpp,T}v(v6/j.fvoi> 
 6 Xpio~ro f. 4, 42 6 crcaTTjp TOV /coV/iou, 6 
 Xpjo-To ?. Acts 2, 36 oTt xat Kvpiov avTui> 
 Kal Xptorov 6 Seos fnoirjcrf TOVTOV TOV "l?j- 
 o-ovv. 9, 22. 18, 28. So Matt. 1, 17. 2,4. 
 16, 16. Mark 12, 35. 13, 21. Luke 2, 11. 
 26 TO? Xp. iwptW 4, 41. 23, 2. John 1, 
 20. 25. Acts 2, 30. 3, 18. Rom. 8, 11. 
 1 John 2, 22. 5, 1. 6. Rev. 11, 15. 12, 10. 
 al. saepiss. Sept. and H" 1 1 ^ Dan. 9, 25. 
 Ps. 2, 2, comp. 4, 13. So Psalt. Salom. 
 18, 6 6 Xp. To{5 Kvpiov. 17, 36. 18, 8 6 Xp. 
 Kvptos. /3) Joined with Irjo-ovs, e. g. ir;- 
 (rovs 6 Xpto-Tor Acts 5, 42. 9, 34. 1 Cor. 
 3, 11. al. iqo-oCr Xpioroj, John 17, 3 ov 
 direa-TfiXas I. Xpiorov. Acts 2, 38. 3, 20. 
 1 John 4, 2. 3. 2 John 7. al. 6 Xpttrror Ir;- 
 <rovs Acts 17, 3. 18, 5. 28. 19, 4. 
 
 b) As pr. name or cognomen, Chri.<;t : 
 a) Absol. Xptoro? or 6 Xpiordj, chiefly in 
 the Epistles; Rom. 5, 6. 8. 8, 10 6 fyeipa* 
 TOV Xp. (K venpuv. 1 Cor. 1,12. 3, 23. Gal. 
 1, 6. 7 TO fvayy. TOV XpKrrov. 2, 20 Xpio-T<u 
 (rvv(O-Tavp<i)p.ai. Eph. 4, 12. Heb. 3, 6. 5,5. 
 1 Pet. 1, 11. 4, 14. al. snep. /3) Oftener 
 joined with y ln<rovs, as Matt. 1,16 Irjaovs 
 6 \fy6fjLevos Xptoror. So l^aovr Xptoro ?; 
 in the Gospels Matt. 1, 1. 18. Mark 1,1. 
 John 1, 17; elsewhere often, Acts 3, 6 
 
788 
 
 r owJ/iort I. Xp. 4, 10. 8, 12. 10, 36. 28, 
 31. Rorn. 1, 1. 6. 8. 1 Cor. 1, 1. 5, 4. al. 
 sacpiss. Xpto-ros Irjcrovs, only in the Epis 
 tles ascribed to Paul, 1 Cor. 1, 30. Gal. 3, 
 14. 26. 4, 14. Phil. 2, 5. 3, 3. 8. Col. 1. 4. 
 al. and so Heb. 3, 1 Rec. For the use of 6 
 Kvpios in connection with the names Irjcrovs 
 and Xpiardj, see in Kvpios II. 2. b. 
 
 c) Meton. a) For 6 Xdyos TOV Xp. the 
 word or doctrine of Christ, the Gospel, 
 2 Cor. 1, 19. 21. Eph. 4, 20. /3) For TO 
 0-wp.a TOV Xp. Christ s body, i. e. the church, 
 1 Cor. 12, 12. y) For the salvation of 
 Christ, obtained through him, Gal. 3, 27 Xp. 
 evfbvo-ao-^Sf. Phil. 3, 8 "wa Xp. KepSqo-co. 
 8) ev Xpio-T<5, see fully in ev no. 1. c. a ; 
 comp. ev Kvpica in Kvpios II. 2. b. -f- 
 
 XpiG), f. urea, pr. to touch gently the sur 
 face of a body ; hence, to rub over, to oint, 
 to anoint with oil, ointment, as a shield, ar 
 mour, Sept. for H- ttha 2 Sam. 1, 21. Diod. 
 Sic. 4. 36. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1.2; the body, af 
 ter bathing, exercise, Plut. Agesi. 34. Xen. 
 Conv. 1.7. In Sept. also to anoint, as a 
 sacred rite, to consecrate by unction to any 
 office, comp. in ^pio-p-a fin. Sept. for Heb. 
 ntZJn of a priest, Ex. 28, 41. 40, 15 ; of a 
 prophet, 1 K. 19, 16. Is. 61, 1 ; espec. a 
 king, 1 Sam. 10, 1. 15, 1. 2 Sam. 2, 4. 
 1 K. 1, 34. Ecclus. 46, 13. 48, 8. Hence 
 in N. T. to anoint, to consecrate as by unc 
 tion, to set apart for a sacred work, c. ace. 
 e. g. a) Jesus, as the Messiah, the anoint 
 ed King, comp. in Xpicrro s, Acts 4, 27 bv 
 Asa prophet, c. infin. Luke 4, 18 
 -e pe fvayyt\i(cr Zai Trrw^oTf, from Is. 
 61, 1 where Sept. for H^B-j see above. 
 So genr. c. dat. Trvevp.aTi ayt ca Acts 10, 38 ; 
 C. dupl. ace. Heb. 1, 9 ep^tcre erf 6 3e6s . . . 
 ?\aiov dyaXXiao-ewy, quoted from Ps. 45, 8 
 where Sept. so for ftU-ia ; comp. Buttm. 
 5 131. 5 and n. 12. Gesen. Lehrg. p. 812. 
 b) Of Christians, as anointed, consecrated, 
 set apart to the service and ministry of 
 Christ and his gospel by the gift of the 
 Holy Spirit; comp. in xp/a/ia. 2 Cor. 1, 
 
 21 6 8e /3eat a>i> r^ias . . . KOL xpiVar rjp-us. 
 Seoy 6 Koi . . . 8ovs TOV dppaflwra TOV 
 
 rX. 
 
 , f. ura>, (xpoVor,) Alt. fut. 
 Xpovita Heb. 10, 37, comp. Buttm. $ 95. 7, 
 9 ; to spend or while away time, to linger, to 
 delay, to be long in coming or doing ; intran. 
 and absol. Matt. 25, 5 xpow^oiroj 8e TOV 
 wp.(piov. Heb. 10, 37. (Sept. Hab. 2, 3.) 
 So c. eV, Luke 1,21 eV r<u va<a. With. inf. 
 fpXfo-3ai Luke 12, 45, e XSeu/ Matt. 24, 48. 
 Sept. for in** Judg. 5, 28 ; c. inf. Gen. 34, 
 
 19. Theophr. Caus. PI. 4. 10 fin. Diod. 
 Sic. 2. 27. Thuc. 6. 49 ; eV 177 Pup-u, Pol. 
 33. 16. 6. 
 
 , ou, 6, time, in the abstract, aa 
 perceived and measured by the succession 
 of objects and events ; see Tittrn. de Syn. 
 N. T. p. 39 sq. 
 
 1. time, pr. and genr. a) Mark 9, 21 
 Troaos xpovos eVriV; Luke 4, 5 eV ony/zj 
 Xpovov. Acts 7, 23 Tfo-o-apaKovTafTrjs XP 
 vos. 27, 9. Gal. 4, 4, comp. in TrXjjpco/xai no. 
 
 5. Heb. 11, 32. Rev. 2, 21 tSuKa avry 
 Xpovov, see in St S&>/ no. 1. c. /3. Rev. 10. 
 
 6. So 8iaTpij3fiv TOV xpwov, see in fitarpt- 
 /3a>, Acts 14, 3. 28 ; TroiTjcrai TGI> XP OVOV 
 Acts 15, 33. 18, 23, see in TTOWW no. 2. e. 
 (Hdian. 8. 5. 1. Pol. 6. 17. 5 xpovov dovvai. 
 Dem. 178. 9. Xen. An. 7. 7. 47.) With 
 prepositions: Sta TOV xp vov Heb. 5, 12; 
 tK xpu va)V iKavuv, of or from long times. 
 Luke 8, 27. [23, 7] ; e v Travrl XP V( P Acts 
 1,21. (Sept. Josh. 4, 24.) iir\xpovov,for 
 a time, Luke 18, 4. Acts 18, 20 ; e (p CO-OP 
 Xpovov Rom. 7, 1. 1 Cor. 7, 39. Gal. 4, 1 ; 
 p,t TO. xp ovov TroXuv, after long time, Matt. 
 25, 19. Heb. 4, 7. So c. Sid Dem. 615. 10 ; 
 c. fK, Diod Sic. 1.4; c. eV, Hdian. 1. 1.4. 
 Xen. Vect. 4. 25 ev TG> iravT\ xpovm. c. eVi 
 Xen. Venat. 5. 7 ; c. peTa Hdian. 5. 6. 2. 
 Xen. Venat. 1. 2. b) Accus. xpdvov, 
 ^porous, marking duration, time how 
 long, Buttm. 131. 9. Mark 2, 19 o<roj> 
 Xpovov . . . t xovo-i TOV w[j.<piov. Luke 20, 9 
 ciTTfSrjp.iio f xpovovi iKavovs. John 5, 6 TTO- 
 Xiu/ XP OVOV - ^i 33 p-ixpov xpovov. 12, 35. 
 14, 9. Acts 13, 18. 19, 22. 20, 18. 1 Cor. 
 16, 7. Rev. 6, 11. 20, 3. Sept. for D" 1 ? 1 ; 
 Deut. 12, 19. 22, 19. Josh. 4, 14; X p. 
 piK P 6v for San Is. 54, 7. So Ceb. Tab. 2. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 4 TrXeuD xpoVoi/. Pol. 3. 64. 
 4 TOO~OVTOVS ^pofovr. Xen. Mem. 3. 6. 13. 
 c) Dat. xpdvw, xP vols marking time 
 when, in or during which, comp. Matth. 
 5406. a. Winer 31. 5. Buttm. $ 133. 4. e. 
 Luke 8, 29 TroXXoTs yap x oovols tfvmjpfftacu 
 avTov. i. e. in, during, since long time. Acts 
 8, 11. Rom. 16, 25 XP OVOLS aloaviois, comp. 
 below in no. 2. So Hdian. 5. 3. 5 /ua*py 
 Xpovca. Soph. Trach. 599. 
 
 2. Spec, by the force of adjuncts, 
 stands for a time, period, season, like 
 comp. Tittm. 1. c. E. g. Plur. joined with 
 Koipoi, Acts 1, 7 yvcovat XP OVOVS *1 Kaipovs. 
 1 Thess. 5, 1. With a genit. of event or the 
 like ; Matt. 2, 7 TOV xp vov Tov (paivop-evon 
 do-Tepos. Luke 1, 57 6 xp. TOU TfKtiv. Acts 
 3, 21. 7, 17. 17, 30. 1 Pet. 1, 17. 4, 3 6 Trap- 
 fX^Xtftcbs xP ovos T0 ^ & v - With an adjee- 
 
789 
 
 tive, pronoun, or the like; Matt. 2, 16 Kara 
 TOV xpovov ov rjKpi^(aa-f. Acts 1,6 tv XP^ V( ? 
 roi/rcp. Jude 18 (v eV^arw xpoVa), and 1 Pet. 
 1, 20 V (crxdrvv xpovcuv, see in etr^aTOf 
 no. 2. b. 2 Tim. 1, 9 et Tit. 1,2 irpo XP~ 
 viav atomcop, see in altavios no. 1. 1 Pet. 4, 
 
 2 TCI/ fTtikoiirov tv (rapid xpuvov. So Sept. 
 for IIST Ecc. 3, 1. Palaeph. 52. 1. Ml V. 
 il. 11* : 3. Dem. 399. 9. Xen. Mem. 1. 4. 12. 
 rov (TOVS xpovov. ib. 2. 1. 34 TOV /^fXXoi/ra 
 ^puVoi/ TOV jSi ou. 
 
 %pOVOTpt/3e(t), w, f. i^crco, (xpoW, Tpt- 
 /3o>,) /o icear away time, to spend or waste 
 time, to delay, intrans. Acts 20, 16. Aris- 
 tot. Rhet. 3. 3. 3. Eustath. in II. //. 1447. 
 11. ib. 1450. 38. 
 
 ^aucreof, t jj, eov, contr. xpuo-oCf , rj, 
 ovv, (xpvo-o j,) golden, of gold ; 2 Tim. 2, 
 20 o~K(VT) xP vo ~ a - Heb. 9, 4 bis, crap-i/or 
 Xpvrf. Rev. 1 , 1 2. 1 3. 20. 2, 1 . 4, 4. 5, 8. 8, 
 
 3 bis. 9, [7.] 13. 20. 14, 14. 15, 6. 7. 17, 4. 
 21, 15. Sept. for ant Gen. 41, 42. Ex. 3, 
 22. Hdian. 5. 5. 20/Xen. Mem. 3. 8. 6. 
 
 Xpvcriov, ov, TO, (dim. of xpvo-o r,) gold, 
 pr. in small pieces or quantity, espec. as 
 wrought. 
 
 1. Genr. Heb. 9, 4 TIJV KiftoTov . . . irtpi- 
 KfKa}(.vp.iJ.evT)v travTcfttv xptxr/w. 1 Pet. 1, 7. 
 Rev. 3, 18. 21, 18. 21. Sept. for ant Ex. 
 37, 2. 4. 6. Luc. Tim. 56. Arr. EpTct. 1 . 
 
 1. 5. Hdot. 3. 97. 
 
 2. Melon. a) a golden ornament; 
 I Pet. 3, 3 7Tfpi3eo-ir xpuo-tW Rev. 17, 4 
 et 18, 16 in later edit. So Sept. Job 27, 
 16. Dem. 1182. 26 xputri a TroXXa 
 
 /cat fpxiria KaXa. Thuc. 2. 1 3 rots 
 fjuvois xpuo-i oiy. b) gold coin, money, 
 Acts 3, 6. 20, 33. 1 Pet. 1, 18. So Ecclus. 
 40, 27. Hdian. 6. 7. 22. Xen. An. 1. 1. 9. 
 
 ^pvcroSa/CTuXto?, O u, 6, 17, adj. (xpv- 
 o-o?, SaicrvXior,) gold-ringed, having a gold 
 ring upon the hand, James 2, 2. So Arr. 
 Epict. 1. 22. 18 xP vo ~vs o~a.KTV\iovs 
 TroXXouf. Comp. Luc. Tim. 20 ^pu 
 
 Xpva-6\feo$, ov, 6, (xpvo-os, 
 <:hrysolile, pr. golden stone, a name applied 
 by the ancients to all gems of a golden or 
 yellow colour ; but prob. designating par 
 ticularly the topaz of the moderns. Rev. 
 21, 20. Sept. for itt5>ir) topaz Ex. 28, 
 
 20. 39, 11. Jos. Ant. 3. 7. 5. Diod. Sic. 
 
 2. 52. Comp. Plin. H. N. 37. 42, 43, 73. 
 Rosenm. Alterthk. IV. i. p. 40. 
 
 XpvcroTrpao OS) ov, 6, (xpvo-os, npu- 
 <roi>,) chrysoprase, a precious stone of a 
 greenish golden colour, like a leek; Rev. 
 
 21, 20. Comp. Plin. H. N. 37. 20, 32, 34, 
 
 73. Many suppose the beryl to be meant ; 
 see Winer Realw. art. Edelsteine no. 11. 
 
 ou, 6, 1. gold, Matt. 2, 11 
 ov KCU \i$avov. 23, 16. 17 bis. Act.s 
 17, 29. 1 Cor. 3, 12. Rev. 18, 12. 9, 7 Rec. 
 Sept. for anj 2 Chr. 3, 7. Ezra. 1 , 6. Prov. 
 
 17, 3. LucV Contempl. 4. Hdian. 8. 7. 4. 
 Xen. Cyr. 8. 4. 27. 
 
 2. Meton. a) golden ornaments, 1 Tim. 
 2, 9 r/ xpucrw fj fjiapyapiTais. Rev. 17, 4 et 
 
 18, 16 Rec. So Luc. de Dom. 8 r<u xP vv < 
 fs TOO-OVTOV KfKo o-p-j/Tat. Dinarch. 95. 40. 
 b) gold coin, money, treasure, Matt. 10, 9. 
 James 5, 3. So Hdian. 2. 6. 11. Dem. 
 122. 2. Xen. Mem. 3. 1. 13. 
 
 see 
 
 >, f. wo-w, (xpuo-dr,) to deck 
 with gold, to gild, Pass. Rev. 17, 4 Ktxpv- 
 o-(i3/j.firrj xpvo-o) V. xpucrt o), Comp. Engl. to 
 gild with gold. 18, 16. Sept. xpvo-o o> xpv- 
 o-i w for ant nQS Ex. 26, 32. 37. 36, 34 ; 
 simpl. 2 K. 18, 16. Luc. Philops. 19. 
 Plut. Philopcem. 9. Diod. Sic. 4. 47. 
 
 %P&>?) xparo y, 6, (kindr. xpo a, XP t/a > 
 Xpa>p.a,) pr. the surface of a body, espec. of 
 the human body, the skin, Sept. for *n y 
 Ex. 34, 29. 30. Xen. CEc. 10. 5; also col 
 our, complexion, teint of the skin, Diod. Sic. 
 2. 6. Genr. and in N. T. the body; Acts 
 19, 12 UTTO roC xpeorof (rovb dpia, i. e. which 
 had been on his body. Sept. for liaa Lev. 
 13, 2 sq. So Dion. Hal. Ant. 9. 5oVXen. 
 Conv. 4. 54. 
 
 ^&jA.of, TJ, ov, (kindr. Lat. claudus,) lame, 
 halt, crippled in the feet, of persons ; Matt. 
 11, 5 *at xwXot Trtpmarovcri. 15, 30. 31. 
 18, 8. 21, 14. Luke 7, 22. 14, 13. 21. John 
 5,3. Acts 3, 2. [11]. 8,7. 14,8. Trop. 
 Heb. 12, 13, see in cfcrpcVa) no. 1. Once, 
 lame from the loss of a foot, for dvdirrjpos, 
 maimed, Mark 9, 45 ; comp. Lob. ad Phryn. 
 p. 474 marg. Sept. for naa Lev. 21, 17. 
 Deut. 15, 21. ^El. V. H. 1 1. 9 8eias x ^ 
 \6v Tiva KOL dvdirrpov. Luc. D. Deor. 1 5. 1 . 
 Xen. Cyr. ]. 4. 11. 
 
 %(i)pa, as, 17, (obs. xW)) P r - space, which 
 receives, contains, surrounds any thing ; 
 and so, place, spot, in which one is, where 
 any thing is or takes place, Luc. D. Deor. 
 28. 1. Dem. 701. 16. Xen. Mem. 3. 8. 10. 
 Hell. 4. 2. 20. Hence genr. and in N. T. 
 
 1. a country, land, region, province; 
 a) Genr. Luke 3, 1 TTJS Irovpmaj *at Tpa- 
 XwiTibos x<opa?. 15, 13. 14. 15. 19, 12. 
 John 11, 54. 55. Acts 8, 1 rar ^copar lov- 
 8aias Kal 2a/iaprtar. 10, 39. 13, 49. 16, 6 
 et 18,23 TTJV ra\aTiKf]v ^copai/, the Galatian 
 country, the region or province of Galatia. 
 
790 
 
 2n, 20 ; c. gen. avruv Matt. 2, 12. So 
 genr. Matt. 4, 16 ev x^P? Ka * ~K 5 3awm>v, 
 comp. in 3dwm>r no. 4. (Is. 9, 1.) Opp. 
 the sea, Acts 27, ?7. Sept. for -px Gen. 
 42, 9. Job 1, 1. Jon. 1, 8 ; fij^a 1 K. 20, 
 14 sq. So Jos. Ant. 11. 1. 1 eV TJ; lovSai a 
 \ a>pa. Hdian. 6. 7. 10 TTJV lrd\)v xP av - 
 Xen . An. 5. 6. 25. Vect. 1. 3 wo-Trep Se 17 
 yi} ovrw xat 17 TTfpl TI)I> x t *>P av SdXarra 7ra/n- 
 (popwrdTT) fcrri. b) Melon, for the inhabi 
 tants of a country or region; Mark 1, 5 
 ((7ropfvfTO Trpbs avrbv Tracra f] lovdaia ^co- 
 pa. Acts 12, 20. So Ecclus. 47, 18. 
 
 2. Put with the name of a town, city, or 
 people, a district, territory, around and be 
 longing to that city ; Matt. 8, 28 els TTJV 
 X&pav T<av Tpy((rr)v>v. Mark 5, 1. Luke 8, 
 "26 ;. impl. Mark 5, 10. Luke 2, 8. Hdian. 
 
 3. 9. 5, 6. Diod. Sic. 1 . 56. Xen. Hell. 6. 2. 7. 
 
 3. Spec, the country, the open country, 
 fields ; as opp. the city, Luke 21,21 01 ev 
 rals xcopair, opp. TJ lepowaXi/p. in v. 20. 
 (Dem. 255. ult. Xen. Cyr. 7. 1. 43.) As 
 sown, tilled, harvested, Luke 12, 16. John 
 
 4, 35 3edcracr3f ras ^copa?, on \evKai flat 
 n-poy 3epio-poV. James 5, 4. So Ecclus. 43, 
 3. Jos. Ant. 7. 8. 5. Hdiari. 6. 4. 11. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 6. 11. 
 
 Xwpafyv, see XopaftV. 
 
 ^copeft), a>, f. Jjcrw, (x&>pa, ^wpor,) to 
 make space, place, room, for another ; to 
 give way, to yield, Horn. II. 16. 592 ; c. gen. 
 to retire or retreat from, ib. 15. 655. Hence 
 in N. T. 
 
 1 . to make room for oneself, to go for 
 ward, to go or come on, i. e. a) Genr. to 
 go or come, to pass ; c. tls. Matt. 15, 17 els 
 TTJV KoiXiav ^copeT. Trop. 2 Pet. 3, 9 TTO.V- 
 ras fls fjitravoiav ^cop^trat. So ./Eschyl. 
 Pers. 379 or 385 Tray avr/p . . . e y vavv e ^co- 
 pei. Xen. Ag. 1. 29 ; c. ri Hdian. 8. 5. 13. 
 Hesych. x^P fl KP f vov. b) Trop. to 
 have place or entrance, to be received, trop. 
 John 8, 37 6 Xoyoy 6 epoy ov x^P" " vfiv, 
 \.e.amongyou. So Wisd. 7, 23. Jos. Ant. 6. 
 3.1. Hdian. 5. 3. 21 . Others, to have success, 
 progress; as 2 Mace. 15, 37. Pol. 10. 15. 4. 
 
 2. Trans, of capacity, to make place or 
 room for, to take in or receive, to hold, to 
 contain. a) Pr. as a vessel, c. ace. of 
 measure, John 2, 6 vSpuu . . . xa>pov<rai ava 
 Herpqras Suo r) rpfls. Genr. of a place, 
 c. ace. of thing, Mark 2, 2 oxrrf p^KtVi XCD- 
 peu sc. avrovs. John 21, 25 oi>...T6i> K.O- 
 crfioi> x&>p?jcrai ra ypa(j). ]3ij3Xia. Sept. of a 
 vessel, for b W 1 K. 7, 25. 2 Chr. 4, 5 ; 
 genr. for ^>3? Gen. 13, 6. So a vessel, 
 Luc. Tim. 57. Xen. An. 1. 5. 6; genr. 
 
 Jos. B. J. 6. 2. 5 Trjv bvv. pij x w p i; p** 7* 
 TW TO TTW. J21. V. H. 1. 3. Time. 2. 17. 
 b) Trop. to receive, e. g. a doctrine, matter, 
 to admit, to assent to, c. ace. Matt. 19, 11 
 ou ndvTfs x^povtri rbv Xdyov TOVTOV. Ace 
 impl. v. 12 bis. (Act. Thorn. \ 50. Plut. 
 Cato Min. 64 oiibe TO Kdravos (pp6vr)p.a 
 X<apoi5o-i.) Also persons, to receive to one s 
 heart, affection ; 2 Cor. 7, 2 x^pjjo-aTe ijpaj, 
 in allusion to c. 6, 11. 12. 13. So Chrysost. 
 ad h. 1. <pC\T]craTf pe. 
 
 apart, to separate, to sunder, c. ace. Matt. 
 19, 6 et Mark 10, 9 a ovv 6 3eoy oWffuei>, 
 ai/3pco7Toy p^ x G) P C ra)> With 0770 c. gen. 
 from any thing, Rom. 8, 35 rls i^pay x^P " 
 (ret OTTO T^y dyaTT^y TOU Xp. V. 39. Pass. 
 Heb. 7, 26. Pol. 6. 31. 4. Plut. Cato Maj. 
 2. Pass. Hdot. 1. 4; c. OTTO Wisd. 1, 3; 
 Xpio"poy dn-d Plato Phaedo 1 2. 
 
 2. Mid. x pif JLai i an d P ass - aor - 1 
 e x<opi(737i> as Mid. to separate oneself, to 
 depart, e. g. from a person ; c. 0770, 1 Cor. 
 7, 10 yvvaiKa anb dvSpoy p^ x a) P t(T ~ ? I at 
 Absol. v. 11. 15 bis. Philem. 15. (Of a 
 wife, Isaeus 73. 2 ; genr. Sept. for b^a? 
 Neh. 9, 2. Xen. Cyr. 6. 1. 8.) From a 
 place, i. q. to go away, to depart, c. drrd, 
 Acts 1, 4 dnb Ifpovcr. pij x^P T* "^"- Also 
 C. tit, Acts 18, 1 xP*o~3e(y 6 IlavXoy e TWV 
 A%nvS>v. v. 2. So c. CK, Pol. 3. 90. 2 ; c. ets, 
 2 Mace. 5,21. Pol. 5. 2. 8. Diod. Sic. 19. 65 
 
 y^wpiov, ov, TO, (xipoy, x^P")) dimin. 
 in form but not in sense, comp. Buttm. 
 5 119. n. 15; a place, spot, Hdian. 2. 9. 8. 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 26 ; a country, region, 
 Luc. D. Deor. 20. 5. Xen. Hell. 5. 1. 7. 
 In N. T. like Engl. place, i. q. a field, farm, 
 possession; Matt. 26, 36 et Mark 14, 32 
 ds xo>p LOV Xeyopevoi/ TfSo-Tjpai T/, comp. John 
 18, 1 where it is Kerrey. John 4, 5. Acts 1, 
 18 eKTTjararo x<opiov. v. 19 bis. 5, 3. 8. 
 Plur. TO x w P a possessions, estates, Acts 4, 
 3i. 28, 7. Sept. for D^.3 1 Chr. 27, 27. 
 Jos. Ant. 5. 2. 12. JSL V. H. 14. 44. 
 Thuc. 1. 106. Xen. Hell. 2. 4. 1. 
 
 ^twptV, adv. and prep. (obs. xa<> kindr. 
 X<opoy, x^P" ) a P ar ^ separately, asunder; 
 Buttm. ^ 146. 3. Winer 5 58. 6. 
 
 1 . Adv. John 20, 7 x w P y evrervKiy^fvov. 
 Jos. Ant. 17. 11. 2. Pol. 6. 26. 3. Xen. 
 An. 6. 6. 2. 
 
 2. Prep. c. gen. see Buttm. and Winer 
 1. c. apart from, without. a) Genr. Matt. 
 13, 34 et Mark 4, 34 x w P s 
 
 without a parable. Luke 6, 49 x^ 
 
 John 1, 3 X^P 5 avT v eyevfro ou8e ev. 15, 5. 
 
 Rom. 3, 21 x w P vup-v- v. 28. 4, 6. 7, 8. 9. 
 
791 
 
 10,14. 1 Cor. 4, 8. 11, 11 bis. [2 Cor. 12, 3.] 
 Eph. 2, 12. Phil. 2, 14. 1 Tim. 2, 8. 5, 21. 
 Philem. 14. Hob. 4, 15 x<apl? d/uipTi as, yet 
 without sin. 7,7.20.21. 9,7. 18.22.28. 10, 
 28. 11,6.40. 12, 8. 14. James 2, 18. 20. 26 
 bis. So Luc. Parasit. 17 ovre nnreveiv ^w- 
 ois ITTTTOV. Diod. Sic. 3. 34 bis, \a>p\s vno- 
 6Vcreo>? . xcopir TTupoy. Xen. An. 1. 4. 13. 
 b) without, besides, exclusive of; Matt. 14, 
 21 et 15, 38 x w P y yvvaiKuv KOI 
 
 2 Cor. 1 1, 28. Sept. for "laia Gen. 46, 26. 
 Num. 16, 49 ; fa lab 1 K. ~5, 16. So Pol 
 6. 56. 13. Diod. Sic. 2. 9. Xen. Cyr. 1 
 5. 5. 
 
 Xwpos, ov, 6, Lat. Corns, Caurus, the 
 Latin name of the north-west wind ; Virg. 
 Georg. 3. 278, 356. CJES. B. G. 5. 7. See 
 Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 548. In N. T. me- 
 ton. the north-west, the quarter whence Co- 
 rus blows, Acts 27, 12. 
 
 , f. ^aXw, (\^aco,) to touch, to 
 twitch, to pluck, e. g. the hair or beard, 
 ^aXX tefipav ^Eschyl. Pers. 1062 ; also 
 a string, to twang, e. g. the string of a 
 bow, roou Vfvpav ^ra\\fiv Eurip. Bacch. 
 784 ; and so f$e\os f /c Kepaos ^dXXeti/ 
 Anthol. Gr. II. p. 240 ; espec. of a stringed 
 instrument, of music, Aristot. Probl. ^op- 
 orjv i^aXXeic to touch or strike the chords ; 
 Anacr. Fr. 16. 3. ed. I*isch. ^dXXw m;- 
 KTiba. Hence oftenest absol. ^dXXetj/, 
 to touch the lyre or other stringed instru 
 ment, to strike up, to play, Jos. Ant. 11.3. 
 9. Plut. Pericl. 1. Luc. Parasit. 17 ovre 
 yap auXeTf eW ^wpts 1 auXcoi/, ovre v/^aXXetj/ 
 avru \vpas. Plato Lys. 209. b. More ge 
 neral than Ki%apifiv and distinguished from 
 it, Hdot. 1. 155. Dion. Halic. de Comp. 
 Verbor. 25 pen. p. 30. 43. ed. Sylburg. 
 So Sept. -\^dXXeti/ ev x et pl f r "-J 1 Sam. 
 16, 23. 18, 10. 19, 9. In Sept. and N. T. 
 to sing, to chant, pr. as accompanying 
 stringed instruments; absol. James 5, 13; 
 c. dat. pers. to or in honour of whom, Rom. 
 15, 9 rdi ovofiarl trou v|^aXw. Eph. 5, 19 
 v^aXXoiTf s (i> 777 KapSi a vp.a>v TOJ Kvpico. So 
 c. dat. of manner, 1 Cor. 14, 15 bis, ^aXeS 
 r< nvfvp.ari . . . rw voi. Sept. often c. dat. 
 pers. for b 1BT J u dg. 5, 3. 2 Sam. 22, 50. 
 Ps. 9, 3. So Psalt. Sal. 3, 2 vpvov ^d 
 
 oi5, 6, (v/raXXw.) a touching, 
 twang, e. g. of a bowstring, TOOU Eurip. 
 Ion 173 or 175; of stringed instruments, 
 a playing, music, Anthol. Gr. II. p. 73, 74. 
 IV. p. 257 ; tone, melody, measure, as play 
 ed, A^aXp.oi> AvSioi/ Pind. Fr. epinic. 4. T. 
 III. p. 17. Heyne. In later usage, song, 
 pr. as accompanying stringed instruments, 
 Jos. Ant. 6. 1 1. 3 rw -v^aX^cp icai roTy vp.t>ois 
 ea8eii> avrov. Pint. Alex. M. 67 /loi/cra 
 a-vpiyy&v Kal av\u>v, wS^s re KOI ^aX/LtoC. 
 ib. Pomp. 2 1. In N. T. 
 
 1. a psahn, a sons, in praise of God ; 
 
 1 Cor. 14, 26 (KCKTTOS vp,<av 
 Eph. 5, 19 ifraXfiols Kal v^vois KOI w 
 TTVfvp.aTi.Ka.is. Col. 3, 16. So Sept. for 
 rnT Ps. 95, 2 ; "n aja in superscript. Ps. 
 3. 4. 5 sq. Psalt. Sal. 1 5, 5 -^aXp-ov Ka\ alvov. 
 2. Spec. Plur. the Psalms, the book ot 
 Psalms, as a part of the O. T. Luke 20, 42 
 fi> PfiXc* ^-aX/iw^. 24, 44. Acts 1, 20. 
 Once Sing. Acts 13, 33 eV ra> \|^aX/to> TW 
 Stvrepc;). Comp. in npofprjTrjs no. 1 . b, and 
 
 no. 2. c. 
 
 o, , 
 
 a false brother, i. e. a false Christian, a 
 hypocrite, spoken apparently of Judaizing 
 professors of Christianity. 2 Cor. 11, 26 
 Gal. 2, 4. 
 
 on-oXo?,) a false apostle, a pretended minis 
 ter of Christ, 2 Cor. 11,13. 
 
 t ^IrevSifr, tor, ovs, 6, 17, adj. (^evSo/zai,) 
 false, lying, deceiving; Acts 6, 13 fid 
 pas ^euSeir. Rev. 2, 2. Sept. for 
 1 K. 22, 22. 23. Prov. 12, 23. 19, 5. 9 
 So Arr. Epict. 3. 7. 15. Plut. de Add. et 
 Amic. 24. Thuc. 4. 27. Spec, false to 
 wards God, wicked, ungodly, Rev. 21. 8 
 etSwXoXarpaty KOI ira(ri rots *// vSeVt. Sept. 
 for V^y Prov. 28, 6 ; ^an Prov. 8, 7. 
 
 r,) a false teacher, one who teach 
 es false doctrines, 2 Pet. 2, 1 . 
 
 "^revSoXoyos, O v, 6, TJ, adj. (^evS^r, 
 Xe ycu,) speaking falsely, lying, spoken of 
 false teachers, 1 Tim. 4, 2. Genr. Luc. de 
 Electr. 3 >//-. i/3po>7roy. Pol. 32. 8. 9. 
 
 TJrev8ofji,dpTVp, vpos, 6, rj, 
 /xaprup,) a false witness, Matt. 26, 60 bis. 
 1 Cor. 15, 15. Plut. Rep. ger. Pracc. 29. 
 Plato Gorg. 472. b. 
 
 ). , f. fj 
 
 to bear false witness, e. g. Km 
 
792 
 
 ai/Tov Mark 14, 56. 57. Absol. ^ \^euSo- 
 papTvpr](T[js, bear not false loitness, Mark 
 10, 19. Luke 18. 20; also ov ^evSop-apru- 
 ofjo-fis, thou shall not bear false witness, 
 Matt. 19, 18. Rom. 13, 9; all quoted from 
 Ex, 20, 16 et Deut. 5, 18 where Sept. for 
 "i|3it; 12 ttjsn Kb . For the difference, 
 com p. in pr) I. 6. c ; espec. ov no. 1. b. 
 Jos. Ant. 3. 5. 5. Dem. 851. 13. Xen. 
 Mem. 4. 4. 11. 
 
 as, j, 
 
 p<?&>,) false witness, Matt. 15, 19. 26, 59. 
 Dem. 846. ult. Andocid. 10. 22. Plato Legg. 
 937. b. 
 
 QfynjSi) ft false prophet, i. e. one falsely pro 
 fessing to come as a prophet and ambassa 
 dor from God, a false teacher ; comp. in 
 jrpofprjTrjs no. 2. Matt. 7, 15. 24, 11. 24. 
 Mark 13, 22. Luke 6,26. Acts 13, 6. 2 Pet. 
 2, 1. 1 John 4, 1. Rev. 16, 13. 19, 20. 20, 
 
 10. Sept. for K-oj Jer. 6, 13. Zech. 13, 
 2. al. Test. XII Patr. p. 614. Jos. Ant. 8. 
 13. 1. ib. 10. 7. 3. B. J. 6. 5. 2. 
 
 i/reOoo?, eos> OUf) T( j ; (kindr. i|/-iJ3or, i^u- 
 %rjs,) falsehood, lying, a lie; John 8, 44 
 OTUV \d\Tj TO ^eCSoy. Eph. 4, 25 comp. 
 Col. 3, 9. 2 Thess. 2, 9 a-, Kal repacrt ^tv- 
 8ovs, genit. of qual. false, deceiving, v. 11. 
 1 John 2, 21. 27. Sept. for 313 Ps. 7, 7 ; 
 1J31B IP. 44, 20. Jer. 5, 2. So" jEl. V. H. 
 5.21. Pol. 12. 7. 4. Xen. Mem. 4. 2. 17. 
 Spec, falsehood, toward God, wickedness, 
 ungodliness ; so 7roteti> \j/fv8os, to do false 
 hood, to commit wickedness, Rev. 21, 27 
 noulv flSthvyfjLa KOL ^fv8os. 22, 15 ; comp. 
 in Troieco no. 2. a. 8. Rev. 14, 5 in later 
 edit, for 80X0?. Sept. and iun Hos. 7, 3. 
 12, 1 [11, 12]. Meton. of false religion, 
 idolatry; Rom. 1, 25 /*eri7XXaai> TTJV dXij- 
 Setai/ TOU Seou eV TW ^euSet. Comp. in 
 dfitKt a no. 2. So Sept. of false gods, for 
 1j3Ui, Jer. 3, 10. 13, 25. 
 
 TJrevSoxpia-TOS, ov , 6, (^evdqs, Xpi- 
 OTO S,) a false Christ, a pretended Messiah, 
 Matt. 24, 24. Mark 13, 22. 
 
 T/reu&o, f. o-o), (^eCSos.) to speak falsely, 
 lo lie to any one, to deceive, rivd Soph. QEd. 
 Col. 628, 1512. Xen. Cyr. 1. 5. 13. Pass. 
 lo be deceived, disappointed, c. gen. Thuc. 
 4. 108. Usually and in N. T. only Mid. 
 depon. \jstv 8 op a i, f. eva-opai, to speak 
 falsely, to lie, to deceive; absol. Matt. 5, 
 
 11. Rom. 9, 1 aXfofiav Xe yco, eV Xptoroj 
 .ov ^tvdofuu. 2 Cor. 11, 31. Gal. 1, 20. 
 
 1 Tim. 2, 7. Heb. 6, 18. James 3, 14 Kara 
 rijs dXjj3fi ay. 1 John 1, 6. Rev. 3, 9. Also 
 c. ace. pers. Acts 5, 3 ^euo-acr3at <re TO 
 
 7ri>ev/j.a TO ayiov. With eiy Tiva towards 
 any one, Col. 3, 9. Sept. for -S3 absol. 
 Prov. 14, 5; c. ace. Is. 57, 11 ; IZJns a b so ], 
 Lev. 19, 1 1 ; c. ace. Deut. 33, 29. So absol. 
 Hdian. 1. 4. 21. Xen. Mem. 2. 6. 36; c. 
 ace. Hdian. 2. 11. 12. Xen. An. 1. 3. 10; 
 TTpos nva Xen. An. 1. 3. 5. Also in N. T. 
 and Sept. c. dat. of pers. to lie to any one, 
 Acts 5, 4 owe (\lsevo-c0 di/SpaWoty, dXXa TW 
 Sew. So Sept. for ^ 5*3 Ps. 78, 36. 89, 
 36 ; i? tins p s . 18, 45. Comp. Winer 
 31. 2. 
 
 ov, o, 17, adj. ( 
 wo/za,) falsely named, falsely so called, 
 1 Tim. 6, 20. Philo de Vit. Mos. II. p. 161. 
 6 roii? ^fv8a)vvfj.ovs so. Seovr. Plat. Rep. 
 ger. Prajc. 14. ^Eschyl. Prom, vinct. 716. 
 "freva-fj,ct, arcs, TO, fyfvbonai,} a being 
 
 false, falsehood, Symm. for "ifJIO Job 13, 4; 
 =J3 Ps. 61, 3. Luc. Tim. 55. Pint. Artax. 
 13. Plato Men. 71. d. In N. T. spec. 
 
 falsehood toward God, wickedness, ungodli 
 ness; Rom. 3, 7 et yap f] dXijSeta TOV Seou 
 eV rw e /ia) Ap-eutr/iart eTTfpicro-fvo-fv, comp. v. 
 3. 4. 5. Comp. in -^fv8os, dSt/a a no. 2. 
 
 ^reyo-TT;?, ou, 6, (^evSw,) o?ie /a/sc, 
 a liar, deceiver, John 8, 44. 45. 1 Tim. 1, 
 10. Tit. 1, 12. 1 John 1, 10. 2, 4. 4, 20.. 
 5, 10; also of a false teacher, impostor, 
 1 John 2, 22, comp. v. 18. So Ecclus. 25, 
 2. Died. Sic. 1. 76. Dem. 404. 5.-rSpec. 
 one false towards God. an apostate, wicked 
 person, Rom. 3, 4 ; comp. in -^fva-^a. 
 Sept. for 513 Prov. 1 9, 22, opp. fitWor. 
 So Ecclus. 15, 8 avdpes ^ffvcrTai, parall. 
 ai>8pes d/j.apT<i>\oi V. 7. 
 
 a(jidca : &>, f. i^o-co, (\^do>, -^dXXo). 
 ,) to touch, to feel, to handle, c 
 ace. Luke 24, 39 \lsTJ\a<pr)<raT( p*. Heb 
 12, 18. 1 John 1,1. Trop. to feel after, c 
 ace. Acts 17, 27 et upaye ^rrfXa ^rjartiav av- 
 TOV Kal fvpoiev. Sept. pr. for "Otft Gen. 
 27, 12. 21. 22. Judg. 16, 27. Aristoph 
 Eccl. 315 ore 5 ^ 6 e /ceiVo \l/rf\a<piJL>i> OVK (8v- 
 vaip.r]v fvptlv. Pol. 8. 31. 8. Xen. Eq. 2. 4. 
 
 i|r770/<i>, f. j o-o), fyfj(pos,) pr. to count or 
 reckon with pebbles or counters, -^rj(poi, upon 
 the abacus, Pol. 5. 26, 13; see Diet, of 
 Antt. art. Abacus. In N. T. genr. to count 
 up, to reckon, c. ace. Luke 14, 28 \fsr)<pig(i 
 Tr)v Saitdvrjv. Rev. 13, 18. So Aquil. for 
 ISO P s . 48, 14. Anthol. Gr. III. p. 49,^,- 
 (pifav 8 uvtKfiTO TTOO-OV 8a>o-fi SteyepSeiv 
 IrjTpols /ito-3dj/, Kal T I voaruiv 8a7ravq. In 
 the classics also Mid. to give one s vote, to 
 vote for, to decree, Jos. Ant. 17. 2. 4. 
 Hdian. 5. 2. 1. Xen. Hell. 1. 5. 18. 
 
793 
 
 ov, 17, (^ciw, ^<w,) a smaZZ 
 stone, pr. as worn smooth by water, a pebble, 
 Lat. calculus, gcnr. Sept. Ex. 4, 25. Lam. 3, 
 16. Ecclus. 18, 9. Find. Ol. 10. 13. ib. 13. 
 66 ; any polished stone, Find. Ol. 7. 159 ; 
 the stone or gem of a ring, Artem. 2. 5. 
 Trnp. in various senses according to the 
 uses to which the Greeks applied such 
 pebble-stones ; e. g. of the stones or counters 
 for reckoning on an abacus, Fol. 5. 26. 13. 
 Aristoph. Vesp. 656. Diod. Sic. 12. 13; 
 see Diet, of Antt art. Abacus. Also of 
 dice, lots, used in a kind of divination, 17 Sta 
 TU> T}rT](ptov fjiavriKT), Heyne Apollodor. 3. 
 10. 2. 9. p. 274. Most freq. a vote, spoken 
 of the black and white pebbles used in 
 voting, viz. the white for approval or ac 
 quittal and the black for condemnation ; 
 ./El. V. H. 13. 37 or 38 dra TTJV p.f\aivav 
 (fj.ftd\Tj ai/rt TTJS \fvKTJs \lsrj(pov. Luc. Har- 
 rnonid. 3 TUIV a\\u>v (Kd&Tov p.inv ^TJcpov 
 
 (pfpOVTUtV, (KflVOl fJLOVOl (KUTfpOS (IVTOW 8l/O 
 
 efpepov ... CTV yf KOI /uaXtcrra ocrw rfjv Xeu- 
 KTJV dtl KOL <Tu>ovcrav (frepeis. ./Eschin. 57. 
 10. See Potter s Gr. Ant. I. p. 119. Diet. 
 of Antt. art. Psephus. Hence in N. T. 
 
 1. Melon, a vole, voice, suffrage; Acts 
 26, 10 naTrjVfyKa -^^(bov, I gave my vote, sc. 
 with alacrity, zeal ; see in KaTacbfpu no. 2. 
 Jos. Ant. 1 0. 4. 2 TO pi v 3etoi> fjSrj KUT av- 
 TUV ^ffCpov rjvfyKf. JE\. V. H. 1 . 34 TT)V 
 KaTaftiKd^ovcrav dyaytiv ^l/Tj(pov. Dem. 362. 
 
 1. Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 18. 
 
 2. Perh. i. q. tessera, a die, token; Rev. 
 
 2, 17 bis, TO> fiKfovri . . . 8axra> avTu ^TJfpov 
 XfVKTjv Kal firl TT]V \lfTj(bov OVO/JLU Kaivbv ye- 
 ypap.p.(vov. This some refer to a custom of 
 the Roman emperors, who in the public 
 spectacles are said to have thrown among 
 the populace dice or tokens inscribed with 
 the words frumentum, discus, servi, ves- 
 tes, and the like, and whoever obtained one 
 of these tokens received whatever was thus 
 marked upon it ; see Xiphilin. de surnt. Titi 
 ludis, p. 228 sq. So Eichhorn Comm. in 
 loc. comp. Aretas in Eichhorn 1. c. But 
 this accounts neither for the white stone 
 nor the mystic name. Others suppose allu 
 sion to be made to the mode of casting lots, 
 in which sometimes tesserae or dice, tokens, 
 with names inscribed upon them were used, 
 and the lot fell to him whose token first 
 came out; comp. Eisner Obs. in N. T. II. 
 p. 442. Potter s Gr. Ant. I. p. 333. Adam s 
 Rom. Ant. p. 302. But the idea of lot or 
 choice has here no place. In any case, the 
 \evKTj \^ij<por was a symbol of good-fortune 
 and prosperity ; Hesych. \(v*t) 
 jrapoifjiia firl TU>V (vftaifiovtas . . 
 
 In Greek writers also persons of distin 
 guished virtue are said to receive a ^(bot 
 from the gods, i. e. an approving testimonial 
 to their virtue ; Plut. Compar. Cimon et 
 Lucull. fin. WOTS KOI rrjv napa ruiv 3eo>z> 
 )j/rj(pov avTols virdp^fiv, us dyaSoIj /cat 3et- 
 ois ri]v (pva-iv d[j.(poT( pois. See further in 
 Eisner I. c. p. 443. Wetst. N. T. II. p. 758. 
 De Wette in loc. 
 
 oO, 6, 0/a3upt fa>,) a whis 
 pering, Plut. de rect. Rat. audiendi 13 fin. 
 Luc. Amor. 15. In N. T. whispering, 
 secret slander, detraction, 2 Cor. 12, 20. 
 So Plut. Conjug. Prscc. 40. 
 
 whisperer, a secret slanderer, detractor, Rorn. 
 1, 30. Dem. 1358. 6 ?rapa ruv 
 
 /, ou, TO, (dim. of i/n; ^i a>, 
 v^ua),) a lillle bit, crumb, of bread, meat. 
 food, Matt. 15, 27. Mark 7, 28. Luke 16^ 
 21. Only in N. T. 
 
 > >7> (V ^" ) P r - the breath, 
 Sept. for tt5?S Job 41, 13. Gen. 1, 30. 
 Usually and in N. T. the vital breath, Lat. 
 anima, life, through which the body lives 
 and feels, i. e. the principle of life manifest 
 ed in the breath, Heb. ^B3 . 
 
 1. Pr. the soul, as the vital principle, 
 Lat. anima, i. e. the animal soul, the vital 
 spirit, life. a) Genr. Luke 1 2, 20 raviy rfj 
 WKTt rr]V \lsv)(f]V crov dnaiTovcriv OTTO o-oC. 
 Acts 20, 10 17 yap ^v^r) avrov tv avria 
 f o-Tt. Of beasts, Rev. 8, 9 TO. [wio-para] 
 fXovra \lsvxds. Sept. and t B5 Gen. 35, 18. 
 1 K. 17, 21. So Hdian. 2."l3. 16. Plut. 
 Romul. 28. Xen. Cyr. 8. 7. 19 sq. Mem. 1. 
 2. 53 rijs ^vx^fjs e^fXSouo-^f sc. ToG o-cop,a- 
 TOJ. b) Meton. and genr. life ; Matt. 6, 25 
 bis, HTJ fjLfplfjivdTf rfi tyvxrj . . . ov^l 17 V 1 ^ ? 
 TrXeloV e o-Tt T^r Tpo(pijs ; Luke 12, 22. 23. 
 Matt. 20, 28 et Mark 10, 45 Sovvai TTJV -^v- 
 XTJV avrov \\irpov. Mark 3, 4 et Luke 6, 9 
 o-oio-ai rfjv ^u^iyv. Luke 14, 26. 21, 19 see 
 in KTao/xai. Acts 15, 26. 20, 24. 27, 10. 22. 
 Rom. 16,4. Phil. 2, 30. 1 Thess. 2,8. Rev. 
 12, 11. So TtSeVat TT]V ijrvxriv, to lay down 
 one s life, John 10. 11. 15. 17. 13, 37. 38. 
 15, 13. 1 John 3, 16 bis; comp. in Tfarjfit 
 no. 2. d. Also ijjTfiv rfjv v^v^i/ TWOS, to 
 seek one e life. Matt. 2, 20. Rom. 11,3; so 
 Sept. and CB3 tiSjjsa Ex. 4, 19. 1 Sam. 20, 
 1. Sept. genr. for CB3 Gen. 19, 17. 19. 
 44, 30. Ex. 21, 23. (/El. V. II. 13. 20. 
 Pol. 28. 9. 4. Eurip. Heracl. 551 TTJV e /iijr 
 TJ/VXTJV e yco didtofj. ticovcra. Xen. An. 4. 6. 4. 
 ib. 3. 3. 44.) In some antithetic declara 
 
794 
 
 tiens of Jesus, ^vx>? refers not only to 
 natural life, but also to life as continued be 
 yond the grave ; John 12, 25 bis, 6 (piX^i/ 
 TrjV \j/ i>x 7< / avTov, aTToXecrft avTrjv KM o 
 fj.i(Tcav TTJV ^vxyv avTov ev rat KoV/MW roirra), 
 fls farjv alwviov <puXd avrrjV, where au- 
 rf/v (for rfv ^x 7 ?") refers to eternal life ; 
 so Matt. 10, 39 bis. 16, 25 bis. Mark 8, 35 
 bis. Luke 9, 24 bis. 17, 33. Also as in 
 cluding the idea of life or the spirit both 
 natural and eternal, Matt. 1 6, 26 bis. Mark 
 8, 36. 37 ; oomp. Luke 9, 25. c) Of a 
 departed soul, ghost, shade, separate from the 
 body ; spoken in Greek mythology of the 
 shades, manes, ghosts, inhabiting Hades ; 
 Passow no. 2. Rev. 6, 9 ras -^v^as ru>v 
 fcrfpayfjLfvaiv 8ia TOV \6yov TOV 3eoO. 20, 4. 
 Acts 2. 27. 31,oiiK eyKaraXetyeis TTJV ^vx^f 
 /J.QV els a Soti, quoted from Ps. 16, 10 where 
 Sept. for UJS3 So Wisd. 3, 1 SiKaicov 8e 
 ^VXCIL tv x ft P^ 3eou. Jos. Ant. 6. 14. 2 yv- 
 vaiov . . . TCIS TU>V Tf SvrjKOTwv ^v^as fKKa- 
 \ovfjievov. ib. KfXfvfi TTJV Sajuoi^Xoi -^vxrjv 
 dvayaytiv. Horn. II. 1. 3. Luc. de Mort. 16. 
 4. ib. 17. 1. 
 
 2. Spec, the soul as the sentient principle, 
 Lat. animus. a) As the seat of the 
 senses, desires, affections, appetites, pas 
 sions, i. e. the lower and animal nature 
 common to man with the beasts ; distin 
 guished in the Pythagorean and Platonic 
 philosophy from the higher rational nature, 
 o vovs, TO irvevna, belonging to man alone ; 
 see espec. Lresner Obs. e Philon. p. 381, 
 503, This distinction is also followed by 
 the LXX. and sometimes in N. T. see in 
 7TVfvp.a no. II. 2. So 1 Thess. 5, 23 TO 
 Trvfiifj-n KM rj v/ t X 7 ) KOI TO crmfj-a, i. e. the 
 whole man. Heb. 4, 1 2 a^pi fjapia-uov ^u- 
 Kai 7rvfvfJ.aTos. Luke 1 , 46 p.eya\vvfi fj 
 V Tov K vpiov, Ka nyaX\lacre TO TTVfv- 
 p.d p.ov. As distinguished from bidvoia, Matt. 
 22, 37. Mark 12, 30. Luke 10, 27; from o-v- 
 vfo-is Mark 12, 33. (So Wisd. 15, 11. Jos. 
 Ant. 1. 1. 2 fn\a<rfv 6 Seos TOV av^pcoTrov 
 ftovv arro TT)? yrjs Xa/Scoi . (cat Trvev/jia eviJKfV 
 avT<a KOL ^rvx^v. ib. 3. 11. 2.) Simpl. the 
 soul, i. q. the mind, feelings; Matt. 11, 29 
 evprjartTe avi nravcriv Tais ^v^ais Vfjicov. 
 Luke 2, 35 o-oC Se aiiTrjs TTJV -^vx^v 8it\fv- 
 <TTai potato. John 10, 24. Acts 14,2. 22. 
 15, 24. Heb. 12, 3. 1 Pet. 1, 22. 2 Pet. 2, 
 8. 14. Sept. for 5BS Ex. 23, 9. 1 Sam. 1, 
 15; t& 1 K. 11, 2. Is. 44, 19. al. (Arr. 
 Epict. 4. 11. 6 epya ^vx^s, oppav, dcpop- 
 pqv, opeyeo-Sai, KTX. Hdian. 2. 1. 15. Xen. 
 Mem. 1. 2. 4.) So eV 0X77 T!J ^vxfj with 
 all the soul Matt. 22, 37, and O\TJS TTJS 
 
 vs id. Mark 12, 30. 33. Luke 10, 27; 
 so Sept. and 1UB3 Deut. 26, 16. 30, 2. 6. 10 ; 
 33^ 2 Chr. 15,15. 31,21. (So e o\r,s 
 M. Antonin. 3. 4. ib. 4. 31 ; 6Ai/ T^ 
 
 TI Epict. Ench. 29. 3. Xen. Mem. 3. 
 
 11. 10.) Also e< ^VXTJS, from the soul, 
 heartily, Eph. 6, 6. Col. 3, 23. (Theocr. 8. 
 35. Xen. An. 7. 7. 43.) Spec, pla ^VXT) 
 elvai, to be of one soul, unanimous, united 
 in affection and will, Acts 4, 32. Phil. 1, 27. 
 So Diog. Laert. 5. 1 1 (pcnT^els TI ta-Ti (pi- 
 \os ; f<pT), pia ^VXT) $vo crco/xao-tf evoiKoixra* 
 To the soul, ^vx*)) as the seat of the 
 desires, affections, appetites, is often ascrib 
 ed that which strictly belongs to the person 
 himself; Matt. 12, 18 els ov evdoKrjo-a TJ 
 
 T] pov. 26, 38 et Mark 14, 34 nepiXviros 
 v TJ faxy pov. Luke 1, 46. 12, 19 bis. 
 
 John 12, 27. Heb. 10, 38. 3 John 2. Rev. 
 
 18, 14. Sept. and 5B3 Gen. 27, 4. 19. Is. 
 
 1, 14; SV> Is. 33, 18. So Ecclus. 7, 21. 
 Jos. Ant. 11. 1. 1. Xen. Cyr. 5. 1. 27. ib. 
 7. 3. 8. b) Genr. the soul of man, his 
 spiritual and immortal nature, with all its 
 higher and lower powers, its rational and 
 animal faculties ; Matt. 1 0, 28 bis, ^17 <o- 
 /3elo-3e OTTO Ttav . . . TTJV tyvxyv p.rj 8vvafj.fva)V 
 anoKTelvai (pofiferjTe p.a\\ov TOV 8vv. ^VXTJV 
 KOI o-co/xa aTroXeVai fv yeevvrj. 2 Cor. 1, 23. 
 
 12, 15. Heb. 6, 19. 10, 39 tls Trfpnroirjo-iv 
 \lsvxijs, opp. oTniXeta. 13, 17. James 1, 21 
 TOV \6yov, TOV 8vviip.evov (raxrai TUS i^vxas 
 v/jiuiv. 5, 20. 1 Pet. 1, 9 cra>Tr)piav v^u^co! . 
 
 2, 11. 25. 4, 19. So Wisd. 1, 4. 11 o-Td>a 
 KaTa^evbopevov dvaipel tyvx^v. Jos. Ant. 
 18. 1. 3 ifadvaTov lo-^vi TOLS ^vx<us elvai. 
 Hdian. 3. 14. 5. Diod. Sic. 16. 20. Plato 
 Phaedo 28. p. 80. a, ev TW OVTO) 3>cri 
 
 0-atp.a ...TTJ 8e, f apxfiv KM {(T7r6fiv . . . 
 Tea 3et6) eoiKe KT\. Xen. Mem. 
 
 4. 3. 14 ciySp&OTOV ye 
 
 3. Concr. a soul, a living thing, animal, 
 in which is fj -^VXTJ life ; like Heb. ^S3 . 
 a) Genr. and from the Heb. 1 Cor. 1 5, 45 
 tyfVfTO 6 TtpaiTos iiv^p. fls \j/-vxrjv foxrai/, i. e. 
 a living soul or creature, in allusion to Gen. 
 2,7 where Sept. for Mn %3.b . R ev . 16, 3 
 KM vrao-a A/ VX ? fays (f r C^" a ) MTtSoiw 
 ev T}) SaXao-ofl. So Sept. and n*n T1JB3 
 Gen! 1, 24. 2, 19. 9, 10. 12. 15. See Heb. 
 Lex. art. 1BS5 no. 4. b) Oftener of man, 
 a soul, a living person, man, rraa-a V vx ? 
 erery soul, every person, every one, Acts 
 2, 43. 3, 23. Rom. 13, 1. So in a peri 
 phrasis, 7rao-a ^. ai/3p&>7Tou, even/ sou? of 
 man, every man, Rom. 2, 9 ; tyvxas av Spw- 
 TTWV, men, Luke 9, 56 Rec. Sept. and rlSE3 
 
795 
 
 geiir. Gen. 17, 14. Deut. 24, 7. Lev. 5, 1. 
 2; tyvxn di>3/>u>7Tou for O^X 3 Num. 19, 
 11. 13. (Eurip. Phcen. 1314 (poviai v/n^at.) 
 Also in enumerations ; Acts 2, 41 ^u^at 
 wo-el rpto-xiXiai. 7,14. 27,37. 1 Pet. 3, 20. 
 Sept. and %? Gen. 46, 15. 18. 26. 27. Ex. 
 1, 5. Deut. 10, 22. So 1 Mace. 2. 38. 
 Pol. 8. 5. 3 /it a faxr]- Eurip. Hel. 52 ^t^a! 
 Se Ti-oXXai. Conip. Plut. Symp. 6. 7. 1 
 
 KOI Ke()ar)v rov av SputiTov eic>a/xei> 
 an TO>I> KvpioraTtov vTroKopifJeo-Sai. c) 
 Spec, for a servant, slave; Rev. 18, 13 
 i^u^ay dvSpwTrw, men s souls, human per 
 sons, slaves, perh. more emphatic than the 
 preced. o-dyiara ; in allusion to Ez. 27, 
 13 where Sept. for C"1X CS3 id. see in av- 
 Spwros no. 2. e. Simpl. Sept. ^VXT) and 
 EB3 Gen. 12, 5. So 1 Mace. 10, 33. Test. 
 XII Patr. p. 715 KAeVreif ^u^ar e< yfjs 
 Eppaivv. Epict. Fragm. 33. ed. Schweigh. 
 III. p. 77, TroXXas 8ov\ev(i.v r^i^ay. 
 
 ^t%l09, T], 6v, C^ux 1 ? ) 1- breathing, 
 living, animal, possessing animal life ; so 
 of the body, aeo^a ^-VXIKOV, an animal body, 
 having breath and animal life, physical, na 
 tural ; 1 Cor. 15, 44 bis. 46 ; opp. TO <ro>/ia 
 Trvtvfj.aTi>c6v, see in Trvfu/iTrmi? no. 1. 
 Diod. Sic. 1. 12 amoy rov tyvx<-<ov rots 
 a>otf. 
 
 2. Spec, of the soul, mind, animal, natu 
 ral, i. e. pertaining to the animal or natural 
 mind and affections, swayed by the affec 
 tions and passions of human nature, not 
 under the influences of the Holy Spirit, 
 opp. irvfVfuiTiKos ; comp. in \lsv%r] no. 2. a, 
 and irvevfiariKos no. 2. 1 Cor. 2, 14 "^vxt- 
 KOS avtSp. ov Several ra TOV irvfvfjLaros TOV 
 3eoO. Jude 19 \^w^tKot, Trvev/jni pf] e^ovrfv. 
 So James 3, 15 fj <jo^>la V/^U^IK^. Comp. 
 fyvxh Eccliis. 5, 2 ; comp. also ^VXIKOS as 
 distinguished from o-co/iariKor, Jos. de Mace. 
 2. Pol. 6. 5. 7. Arr. Epict. 3. 7. 5 f] ifiovrj 
 T) T\r\ix<-<i]- P ut - Gonsol. ad Apoll. 2. 
 
 A | r ^XS ) fos, ovs, TO, (-^v^o).) cold, fri- 
 gus, John 18, 18 on -^i>xos yv. Acts 28, 2. 
 2 Cor. 11, 27. Sept. for V Gen. 8, 22 ; 
 
 ^P, Ps. 147, 17. Song of 3 Childr. 40 
 Pol. 5. 56. 10. Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 8, 9. 
 
 a, ov, (^vx^i) C M> cool, fresh, 
 refreshing, e. g. TTOTTJPIOV ^vxpov (v8aror) 
 Matt. 10, 42. So Plut. de Garrul. 17 s 
 HpajcXeiroj. . .Xa/3&)j/ ^vxpov KvXuca. Epict. 
 Ench. 29. 2 /xij -^vxpov irivtiv. Fully, -^u- 
 Xpoi/ vSwp Theocr. 11. 47. JE\. V. H. 13. 
 
 1. Xen. Mem. 3. 13. 3. Trop. cold, cold- 
 hearted, indifferent, spoken of a person with 
 out decision or firmness of Christian char 
 acter, oi/re ^vpxos, ovTf fforos, Rev. 3, 15 
 bis. 16. So Plato Euthyd. 284. e. Xen. 
 Cyr. 8. 4. 22, 23. 
 
 i|ru^&), f. vo>, Pass. aor. 2 tyvyyv 
 Buttm. \ 100. n. 8 ; to breathe, to blow, 
 Horn. II. 20. 440 ; c. ace. to blow upon, 
 and hence to cool, Sept. Jer. 6, 7. Plut. 
 Symp. 6. 6. 2. Plato Tim. 46. d. In N. T. 
 Pass, -^{/xop-ai, fut. 2 ^vyijfroju.ai, to be 
 cooled, to grow cold, trop. of affection, Matt 
 24. 12 ^vyfjcrfTni 17 dydnrj TO>V TroXXcoj/. Sf 
 pr. Jos. Ant. 7. 14. 3. Plut. de Sanit. tuend. 
 
 2. Plato Phaedo71. b. 
 
 Y % &)/Xtyi), f. tVo), (\|fo>/io y, ^coco, A/mw,) 
 to feed by bits, morsels, as one does children 
 or sick persons, Aristoph. Thesm. 692. 
 Plut. Quffist. Rom. 21. In N. T. genr. to 
 feed, to supply with food, c. ace. pers. Rom. 
 12, 20. With ace. of thing, to feed out; 
 1 Cor. 13, 3 tav ^co^ierca iravra TO. virdp- 
 Xovrd p.ov. So fully with two ace. of pers. 
 and thing, Sept. ris rjfJ-as ^w^iift Kpta, for 
 b^3Xn Num. 11,4. Ecclus. 15, 3. Winci 
 J 32. 4. Buttm. $ 131. 5 ; with ace. of pers 
 or animal, Porph. de Abstin. 3. 23 i//-o>/ii 
 fovo-t TO. vfoma. Plut. Symp. 5. procem 
 
 ^rw^iov, ov, TO, (dim. ^co/idy.) a bit, 
 morsel, mouthful, John 13, 26 bis. 27. 30. 
 Diog. Laert. 6. 37. 
 
 ijra)%a), f. ga>, (^wta, ^aw,) to rub in 
 pieces, e. g. ears of grain, c. ace. Luke 6, 1. 
 Nicand. Th. 629. Etym. Mag. ^fu>x ovr( * 
 tSpinrrovrfs, \fTTTvvovrfs. Comp. the Ionic 
 Hdot. 4. 75. 
 
 n. 
 
 fl, o mega, the last letter of the Greek 
 alphabet ; hence poet, for the last, i. q. 6 
 to-xaros and TtXoy, Rev. 1,8. [11]. 21, 6. 
 22, 13. See in lett. A. 
 
 o>, interj. O! before the Voc. in a direct 
 address; Matt. 15, 28 w yvvai. 17, 17. 
 Mark 9, 19. Luke 9, 41. 24, 45. Acts 1, 1 
 
 f. 13,10. 18, 14. 27, 21. Rom. 
 2, 1. 3. 9, 20. Gal. 3, 1. 1 Tim. 6, 20. 
 James 2, 20. So Sept. Jer. 4, 10. Ceb. 
 Tab. 2, 3, 4. Xen. Hell. 1. 7. 16. Once 
 in admiration, Rom. 11, 33 2) a3or KT\. O 
 the depth ! in this sense sometimes written 
 &, Buttm. { 117. n. 5. Sept. for "nx Is. 6, 
 
796 
 
 5; ^ Nah. 3, 1. Zeph. 3, 3. So Soph. 
 Ajax 372. 
 
 V2jj8, 6, indec. Oierf, Heb. "WiS (serv 
 ing sc. God), pr. n. of the son of Boaz and 
 Ruth, Matt. 1, 5 bis. Luke 3, 32. Comp. 
 Ruth 4, 13 sq. 
 
 e58e, demonstr. adv. (oSe, see Buttm. 
 5 116. 7, and n. 7,) pr. /7ms. so, in this way 
 or manner, Horn. II. 1. 181. Palaeph. 1. 3. 
 Luc. D. Mort. 16. 5. Xen. Mem. 1.7. 1. 
 In poetic and later usage and in N. T. 
 also adv. of place, hither, here, i. e. to or in 
 this place, viz. 
 
 1. hither, to this place, after verbs of mo 
 tion; Matt. 8, 29 ^XSes o>8f. 14, 18 et 17, 
 17 (pepere poi avrovs wSe. 22, 12. Mark 11, 
 
 3. Luke 9, 41. 14, 21. 19, 27. John 6, 25. 
 20, 27. Acts 9, 21. Rev. 4, 1. 11, 12; tcos 
 2)Se Luke 23, 5. Sept. for DIPn Ex. 3, 5. 
 Ruth 2, 14. Ceb. Tab. 14, 22. Theocr. 
 Id. 25. 35. Plato Prot. 328. d. 
 
 2. here, in this place, after verbs imply 
 ing rest and the like : a) Pr. Matt. 12, 6 
 OTt TOV ifpov pfifav (<TT\V S)Se. V. 41. 42 
 jrXetoi 2oXo/i<Bj/os o>Sf. 14, 8. 17. 16, 28. 
 17, 4 bis. 20, 6 TI &>8e eVri^Kare dpyoi ; 24, 
 2. 26, 38. 28, 6. Mark 6, 3 Se npbs fads, 
 here in our city. 8,4. 9, 1. 5. 14, 32. 34. 16, 
 
 6. Luke 4, 23. 9, 1 2 $>8e ev fpfaa r&rw. V. 27. 
 33. 11,31.32. [15,17. 16,25.] 22, 38. 24,6. 
 John 6, 9. 11, 21 . 32. Acts 9, 1 4 S>8e, here in 
 this city. Heb. 7, 8 et 13, 14 o>Se, here on 
 earth. James 2, 3 KO%OV wSe, and so Sept. for 
 MB Ruth 4, 1. 2. 2 K. 7, 3. Opp. to eVcei, 
 Mark 13, 21. Luke 17, 21. 23. James 2, 3 ; 
 or repeated, 2>8e . . . o>Se id. Matt. 24, 23 ; 
 ra a>Se the things done here Col. 4, 9. Sept. 
 genr. for MB Gen. 19, 12. Num. 32, 16. 
 Judg. 19, 9. So Ceb. Tab. 9, 10. Theocr. 
 Id. 25. 11,14. Hdot. 1. Ill, 115 fin. b) 
 Trop. herein, in this thing, Rev. 13, 10. 18. 
 
 14, 12 bis. 17,9. 
 
 6)877, jjs, f], (contr. for doiSq ; ae/8a>, 
 aSw,) an ode, song, e. g. in praise of God, 
 Eph. 5, 19. Col. 3, 16. Rev. 5, 9. 14, 3 bis. 
 
 15, 3 bis. Sept. for iifc) Judg. 5, 12. 1 K. 
 
 4, 32. Ps. 42, 9. Ecclus. 39, 19, Jos. Ant. 
 
 7. 12. 3 wSaj fls Sfoj* *ai vfj.vovs. Genr. 
 Luc. Bis/ Ace. 16. Diod. Sic. 3. 17. Xen. 
 Conv. 6. 4. 
 
 &)SiJ/, Ti/or, fj, (kindr. oSw?;,) a very late 
 
 form of the nominative, 1 Thess. 5, 3. Sept. 
 
 Is. 37, 3 ; instead of the usual f] o>8/y, Ivos, 
 
 see Winer 5 9- 2. 1 ; comp. Buttm. 41. 4. 
 
 . marg. Ausfiihrl. Sprachl. 41. n. 4. 
 
 1. a throe, pain, pang of a woman in 
 travail ; 1 Thess. 5, 3 oXe3poj, axrnfp f] 
 ato iv rfi eV yacrrpl i^ttwrg. Sept. for ^3P! 
 
 Jer. 22, 23. Hos. 13, 3. Ml. V. H. 2. 7. 
 
 Plut. Thes. 20. Plato Thest. 6. p. 149. d. 
 
 2. Trop. pain, sorrow, calamity, of the 
 severest kind; Matt. 24, 8 et Mark 13, 9 
 ravra dp^j) w8iva>v. (Sept. and ^2h Job 
 21, 17; fcin Ex. 15, 14; rtnsn Nah. 2, 
 11.) So Acts 2, 24 Xu(raj ray coSivas TOV 
 Sawrou, having loosed the pains of death, in 
 allusion to Ps. 18, 5 where Sept. utblves 3a- 
 VUTOV for Heb. p. 1 ] 73 n ban , which the LXX 
 refer to ii^ri a throe, pain, instead of ian 
 a band, snare, comp. v. 6. The phrase 
 \vetv coSira? occurs also in Greek writers, 
 e. g. Lycophr. Cass. 1198 <r<pe wSivas (f- 
 \va~f XaSpai aj yovrjs. JEl. II. An. 12. 5 
 Touy rwv u>8ivaiv Xucrat Setr/zoi y. ib. 7. 12 
 Aiywria>i> at yvvaiK.es rrjv u>8iva O.TTO\II- 
 cracrat KOL e^afatrrdcrat KT\. Strabo 16. p. 
 763 Xuet 8e Kf(pa\a\yias Sau/Macrrwy, SC. the 
 balsam of Jericho. Comp. Sept. Job 39, 3. 
 
 a)Su>&>, f. ii/w, (a>Si ff,) to be in the throes, 
 to travail in childbirth, absol. Rev. 12, 2 eV 
 yacrrpl f^ovcra Kpdfi, u>8ivov<ra, being in 
 travail. Gal. 4, 27 17 OVAC toSiVovo-a, //iow /Tia/ 
 travailest not, who art barren, i. q. 17 a-relpa. 
 Sept. for >sin Is. 23, 4. 26, 18. 66, 7. 8 ; 
 ban Cant. 8, 5. So Horn. II. 11. 269. 
 Luc. Somn. s. Gall. 19. Plut. Thes. 20. 
 Trop. of a Christian teacher, c. ace. to tra 
 vail with any one, in spiritual birth, Gal. 4, 
 19. Comp. yevvda no. 1. b. 
 
 (w/io?, ov, 6, (kindr. Lat. humerus, ) a 
 shoulder, Matt. 23, 4. Luke 15, 5. Sept. 
 for CDtt3 Gen. 21, 14. Is. 9, 6 ; 5]n3B Num. 
 7, 9. Is. 49, 22. Jos. Ant. 3. 8. 9. Hdian. 
 
 7. 10. 15. Xen. Mem. 3. 10. 13. 
 aiveofAai, ovp.ai, f. T)(rop.ai, Mid. depon. 
 
 with aor. 1 a>vr)o-dp.r)v a form condemned by 
 the Atticists, instead of which Attic writ 
 ers used fjrpiap,r)v, comp. Phryn. et Lob. p. 
 137 sq. Buttm. 114 fin. To buy, to pur 
 chase ; c. ace. et gen. of price. Acts 7, 16 
 6 u>vr]craro A/3paa^i rip,jjs dpyvpiov. Luc, 
 D. Mort. 4. 1 Tt3i> TreVre [Spa^coi/] toi/ij<ra- 
 p.T)i>, Kcii. TpoTr&JTTJpa 8vo ojSoXwi . ib. Hermot. 
 81 ; c. ace. JEl. V. H. 3. 27. Hdian. 2. 10. 
 
 8. Pres. Dem. 123. 21. Xen. An. 3. 1. 20. 
 <u6v, ov, TO, an egg, Lat. ovum, luke 
 
 11,12. Sept. for ns^3 Deut. 22, 6. Job 
 39, 14. ^Esop. Fab. 47. Tauchn. Luc. D. 
 Deor. 20. 14. Diod. Sic. 1. 87. Plato Conv. 
 190.e. 
 
 wpa, as, I], Lat. hora, Engl. hour, pr. 
 limited time, season, a definite space or divi 
 sion of time recurring at fixed intervals, as 
 marked by natural or conventional limits ; 
 e. g. a season of the yeai, fbpa TOV 3/povr 
 
wpa 
 
 797 
 
 l. V. H. 3.1. Xen. Venat. 9. 20 ; wpa x - 
 vos JE\. V. H. 7. 13. Thuc. 4. 6 ; fj TOV 
 pa Hdian. 8. 4. 3. ^El. V. H. 1. 15; 
 al KOT tviavTov upat Diod. Sic. 1.16. Plato 
 Legg. 906. d. Trop. of a season of life, 
 (lie fresh full bloom and beauty of youth, 
 the ripeness and vigour of manhood, bloom, 
 beauty, vigour; Jos. Ant. 4. 6. 8 wpa TOV 
 0-wp.arof. Pint. Marcell. 2. ./Eschin. 19. 4 
 K(iXXfi Kal wpa. Thuc. 6. 54 wpa jjXi/ci as. 
 Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 22 fV3J?ra, e TJS av p.d\i- 
 <rra wpa SiaXa/inrot. In N. T. of shorter 
 intervals, a time, season, hour, viz. 
 
 1. Of the day generally, day-time, day ; 
 Matt. 14, 15 17 wpa 778?; Trap^XSe. Mark 6, 
 35 bis, fjdrj upas TroXXfjs yevop-fvrjs, *crX. 11, 
 1 1 o\lsias rj8r) ovcrrjs rrjs upas. Pol. 5. 8. 3 
 TTO\\TJS upas. Dion. Hal. Ant. 2. 54 <%H 
 TroXX^y wpar. Dem. p. 541 pen. Xen. Hell. 
 7. 2. 22 rfv fj.ev TIJS upas p.iKpbv Trpb 8viros 
 f]\iov. 
 
 2. Of a definite part or division of the day ; 
 in earlier writers used only of the greater 
 divisions, as morning, noon, evening, night, 
 os, p.to-T)p.ppia, fvirepa, wg, as WKTOS tv 
 up?) Horn. II. in Merc. 155; or also morn 
 ing, noon and evening, opSpor, xaipbs /if- 
 (TT) fj.fi pivos, K. SeiXiw ?, K. ea-irepos, Sturz 
 Lex. Xen. wpa no. 3. So Xen. Mem. 4. 3. 
 4 bis, 6 rj\ios (puTfivbs uv rds re upas TTJS 
 tjpfpas . . . o-a(pvid . . . iia-rpa, a tip.lv rat 
 &pas Trjs WKTOS tp.(pavi(i. Dion. Hal. de 
 Comp. Verb. 3 wpa ea&tpq. In N. T. an 
 hour, one of the twelve equal parts into 
 which the natural day and also the night 
 were divided, and which of course were of 
 different lengths at different seasons of the 
 year ; prob. introduced by astronomers, and 
 first so used by Hipparchus about B. C. 
 140 ; see Ideler s Chronol. I. p. 239. 
 Adam s Rom. Ant. p. 333 sq. Diet, of Antt. 
 \rt. Horn. 
 
 a) Pr. and genr. Matt. 24, 36 Trepi Se r?p.e- 
 ms Kal upas otifiety olSev. 25, 13. Mark 13, 
 32. Luke 22, 59. John 4, 52 eVvSero Trap 
 avTvv TTjV upav. 11, 9 ot^i ScoSeKti fieri 
 wpat jjp.tpas. Acts 5, 7 ws wputv rpiaii/ 5ia- 
 trnj/ia. 10, 30 p.(XP l rainy s rrjs a>pas. Rev. 
 9, 15. Dat. c. eV, of time when ; Matt. 8, 
 13. 24, 50 fv T]p.fpa . . . Kal tv wpa )J ov yi- 
 vuxTKfi. Luke 12, 46. John 4, 53. Accus. 
 of time how long; Matt. 20, 12 piav &pav 
 eiroir)<rav, see in iroito) no. 2. b. 26, 40 /zi ai/ 
 uipav ypTjyopfj<rai. Mark 14, 37. Acts 1J, 
 34 wf cVl wpas dvo. With a numeral 
 marking the hour of the day, as counted 
 from sunrise ; Matt. 20, 3 irepl rriv Tpinyv 
 u>pav. V. 5. 6. 9. 27, 45 bis, anb 8e (KTTJS 
 upas eo>y &pas f warns . V. 46. Mark 1 5, 
 
 25. 33 bis. 34. Luke 23, 44 bis. John 1 
 40. 4, 6. 52. 19, 14 wpa fie woVi (KTT,, 
 Acts 2, 15 wpa rptTij TTJS r]fJ.epas. 3, 1 
 utpav TTJS Trpoo-fu^^f, rrjv fvvdrrjv. 10, 3. 9. 
 30. So of the hours of the night, as 
 counted from sunset; Acts 16, 33 eV fudvy 
 rfj wpa TTJS WKTOS. 23, 23 drrb TptTrjs wpar 
 TIJS WKTOS. Jos. B. J. 6. 2. 6 dpd/j.(voi 
 
 T1JS WKTOS fVVUTTJS WpOS, V7Tp Tr/jUTTT^!* TTJS 
 
 T)[j.epas StfXv3>;crai . ib. J 8 -rrtpl fopav evSeKa- 
 TTJV TTJS Tj/j-cpas- Nicol. Damasc. p. 486 ?rpo 
 8(KaTT)s wpar. Luc. Epigr. 17 1^ wpat. 
 
 b) Trop. for a short time, a brief interval, 
 as ace. p.lav utpav Rev. 17, 12; dat. /iia 
 wpa Rev. 18, 10. 16. 19; irpbs wpai> John 
 5, 35. 2 Cor. 7, 8. Gal. 2, 5. Philem. 15; 
 also Trpos xaipbv upas id. 1 Thess. 2, 17. 
 
 3. Meton. and genr. an hour, time, period, 
 spoken of any definite point or space of time. 
 
 a) With adjuncts ; e. g. an Adj. or Pron. 
 drro TTJS upas fKflvr]? Matt. 9, 22. 15, 28. 
 17, 18. John 19, 27 ; so Dat. of time 
 when, avTfj TJJ wpa Luke 2, 38. 24, 33. 
 Acts 16, 18. 22, 13 ; n-oia wpa, fj wpa, 
 Matt. 24, 42. 44. Luke 12, 39. 40. (Sept. 
 Dan. 3, 6. 18.) ev avTfj TTJ wpa id. Luke 
 7, 21. 10, 21. 12, 12 ; . [13, 3L] 20,19; 
 fv fKe ivr) TTJ wpa Matt. 10, 19. 18, 1. 26, 
 55. Mark 13, 11. Rev. 11,13. So Rev. 3, 
 3. 1 Cor. 4, 11 a^pt TTJS apTi upas. 15, 30 
 Tracrav upav all the time. (Sept. for ~ ^3 
 r Ex. 18, 22. 26.) With an adverb or 
 relative, etc. John 4, 21 ep^erat wpa,orf KT\. 
 V. 23. 5, 25. 28 ep^frnt wpa eV 77 KT\. 16, 
 25. So c. iva, see in Iva III. 4, John 12, 
 23. 13, 1. 16, 2, 32. With gen. of thing 
 to be done or to happen ; Luke 1,10, comp. 
 Sept. Dan. 9, 21. Luke 14, 17 rrj wpa rov 
 Seiirvov, the time of the supper or feast. Rev. 
 3, 10. 14, 7. I5;~impl. Luke 22, 14; c. inf. 
 Rom. 13, 11 wpa r/juaj fjdrj t VTTVOV eyfpSi}- 
 vai. (So c. gen. Sept. for nS 2 Sam. 24, 15. 
 Dan. 9, 21. Diod. Sic. 13. 94 ; .c. inf. Sept. 
 Gen. 29, 7. JEA. V. H. 1. 21.) With 
 gen. of pers. one s time, i. e. appointed to 
 him, in which he is to do or suffer, Luke 
 22, 53. John 16, 21 ; elsewhere of Christ, 
 John 2, 4. 7,30. 8,20. 13, 1. 
 
 b) Simply, ; wpa, the time, as spoken of 
 or otherwise understood ; Matt. 26, 45 
 rjyyiKfv f] wpa. Mark 14, 41. John 16, 4. 
 1 John 2, 18 bis, see in eo-xror no. 2. b. 
 (Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 2.) Emphat. John 17, 1 ; 
 and so spec, the time or hour of trial, sor 
 row, suffering, Mark 14, 35. John 12, 
 27 bis. 
 
 a>paio$, a, ov, (wpa,) timely, seasonable, 
 tempestivus, as fruits, like Engl. fruits of 
 
798 
 
 the season, JE1. V. H. 1. 31. Diod. Sic. 3. 
 69 or 70. Xen. Conv. 8. 25. Trop. of a 
 virgin ripe for marriage, JE\. V. II. 4. 1. 
 Xen. Cyr. 4. 6. 9. In N. T. trop. fair, 
 comely, beautiful, spoken of things ; see in 
 copa init. Matt. 23, 27 rdcpois . . . oiTives ta>- 
 3ei/ fjifv (paivovrai copatoi. Rom. 10, 15, see 
 in TTOVS lett. e. Sept. of things, for iTans 
 Gen. 2, 9. 3, 6 ; of persons, for nen Gen. 
 24, 17. 39, 6. So of things, TrXoos cop. 
 Anthol. Gr. I. p. 168 ; 7rpoVco7roi> Hdian. 5. 
 6. 24 ; of persons, Luc. D. Deor. 5. 5. 
 Plut. Cato Maj. 4. Xen. Mem. 1.3. 10, 13, 
 14. Spoken of a gate of the temple, Acts 
 3, 2 TTJV Svpav rov tepov TTJV Aeyo/uV?;!/ 
 vpalav, and V. 10 eVi rfj copaia Trv\rj, sup 
 posed by some to have been the large gate 
 leading from the court of the Gentiles to 
 the court of the Israelites, over against the 
 eastern side of the veto s, called by the Rab 
 bins the gate of Nicanor, and described by 
 Josephus as covered with plates of gold and 
 silver, and very splendid and massive ; Jos. 
 B. J. 5. 5. 3. ib. 6. 5. 3. Ant. 15. 11. 5. 
 Lightf. Hor. Heb. in Chorogr. Cent. Mat- 
 thaso pram. c. 30 ; espec. Wetst. N. T. II. 
 p. 471 sq. But from Acts 3, 3. 8, it would 
 seem to have been one of the external gates, 
 leading from without into the area of the 
 temple or court of the Gentiles, on the east 
 side of which also was Solomon s porch, 
 v. 11; see in lepov no. 1 , also in crroa. We 
 are left, however, without definite informa 
 tion as to these external gates ; for the 
 porta Shushan and porta Huldcc (yiJllti 1SQJ, 
 mV,n tti) mentioned by the Rabbins have 
 no historical weight ; Lightf. Hor. Heb. in 
 Acts 3, 2. Disq. Chor. Johanni praem. c. 6. 
 5 1. Most probably one of the external 
 gates was so called because of its archi 
 tectural decorations ; possibly the present 
 Golden gate on the east, or the still more 
 ornamented one on the south ; see Bibl. 
 Res. in Pal . I. p. 437, 477. Biblioth. Sac. 
 1846. p. 626; also Biblioth. Sac, 1843. p. 
 19sq. Traill s Josephus Vol. I. App. Plates. 
 d)pvofj,ai, f. varofjiai, Mid. depon. (kindr. 
 opi/yco, epevyopai,) to roar, to hoivl, as beasts 
 of prey from rage or hunger ; e. g. a lion, 
 1 Pet. 5, 8 cos X,cw atpvojjifvos. Sept. of a 
 lion for **& Judg. 14, 5. Ps. 22, 4. Apol- 
 lon. Rh. Arg. 4. 1339; of wolves, Theocr. 
 1. 71 ; of dogs. id. 2. 35. Luc. D. Mort. 
 10. 13. 
 
 ft)?, relat. adv. (os ; ) correl. to TTCOS, rcos, 
 Buttm. \ 1 1 6. 4. 5 ; pr. in which way, in what 
 way, and hence genr. as, so as, how ; some 
 times equivalent to a conjunction, see be 
 
 low in no. 3 ; see Passow in cos Buttm. 
 $ 149 init. Matth. J 628. For cos av, see in 
 av II. 1 . b, c ; also IV. 
 
 1. In comparisons; see Matth. 1. c. p. 
 1283. In Attic writers Sxnrfp is the pre 
 vailing word in this usage ; Passow in 
 
 UXTTTtp. 
 
 a) Pr. fully, with a corresponding de- 
 monstr. adv. as oCVcor or the like, either 
 preceding or following ; e.g. OVTCOS...WS, 
 so ... as, Mark 4, 26 oirrcos etrrii/ r; /3acrtXei a 
 Toi 3eoC, cos fav avSpcovros KrX. John 7, 46. 
 1 Cor. 3. 15; cos... our cos, as... so, Acts 
 8, 32 coy dfj.v6s . . . OVTCOS OVK dvoiyei KT\. 
 quoted from Is. 53, 7 where Sept. for ") ... 3 . 
 Acts 23, 11; cos yap. ..ovrco Rom. 5, 15. 
 18. 2 Cor. 7, 14. 11,3. iThess. 2,7. 5,2. 
 So i or os... cos Acts 11, 17; 6/zoicos *al cos 
 Luke 17, 28. Also cos... /ecu, where ou- 
 rcos is strictly implied, comp. in Kai no. 2. b ; 
 Matt. 6, 10 cor ev ovpavco, Kai eVt TTJS yrjs. 
 Acts 7, 51. Gal. 1, 9. (So OVTO>S...O>S 
 Xen. An. 7. 1. 27; cos . . . ourcos Sept. Ecc. 
 11, 6. 1 Mace. 3, 60. JE1. V. II. 4. 17. 
 Plut. de cohib. Ira 8; u>s...Kai Plut. Mor. 
 II. p. 9. Hdot. 7. 128. Thuc. 8. 1 ult.) 
 More freq. OVTCOS is omitted, and then cos 
 may often be rendered so as, or simply as ; 
 Matt. 6, 29 ov [ovrco?] 7rfpte/3aAeTO cos e> 
 TOVTWV. 10, 25 upKfrov TOO p.a^T]TTJ, wo. ye- 
 vrjrai cos 6 8t8dcr*caXos avrov. Mark 1,22 r/v 
 yap fiiKiirrKuiv avTovs [ovrcos] &>s e^ovtriav 
 e^coi>, KUI ou^ cos ot ypa/i/zarets. Luke 6,10. 
 40. 21. .T). Acts 7, 37. Rom. 4, 17. 5, 16. 
 1 Cor. 14, 33. Gal. 4, 12. 1 Thess. 5, 6. 
 Heb. 1,11. 1 Pot. 2, 25. 1 John 1, 7. Rev. 
 20, 8. al. szep. (Horn. II. 13. 389. Paige ph. 
 31. 2.) Sometimes the whole clause to 
 which cos refers is omitted, as Mark 4, 31 
 cos KOKKOV (TivaTTfcos. suppl. rj /3acnXet a rov 
 SfoC eVn, comp. v. 30. Mark 13, 34 cos av- 
 SpcoTTor aTTodrjuos, suppl. 6 vlos TOV cii Spco- 
 TTOV fiTTi, or e yco elfit, comp. v. 26. 
 
 b) Genr. before a noun or adj. in the 
 nominat. or accus* as, like as, like ; comp. 
 Buttm. Lexil. I. p. 239. Matt. 10, 16 </>pd- 
 mpot cos ot 6 <pfts, KOI nKepaioi cos al nepi- 
 tTTepai. 13, 43 rare ol SiKaioi fK\dfj.\^ovcnv 
 cos 6 rj\ios. 28, 3. Mark 6, 15. Luke 10, 3 
 7TOcrreXXco vp.as cos apvas fi> p-fcrco XUKCOV. 
 22,31. John 15, 6. Acts 11, 5. 1 Cor. 3, 10. 
 Heb. 6, 19. James 1, 10. Jude 10. Rev. 
 1,14. 8,10. 10, 1. 22, l.al. saep. So Sept. 
 for 3 Judg. 8, 18. 1 Sam. 25, 36. (Horn. 
 11.2.144. Eurip. Phcen. 848 sq. or 852. 
 Paleeph. 53. 6. Hdian. 1. 17. 19.) Here 
 too the construction is often elliptical ; e. g. 
 where a participle belonging to the noun 
 before cos, is also implied with the noun 
 
799 
 
 (U9 
 
 after o>s, as Luke 10, 18 TOV "Zaravav us 
 diTTpaTTiyi fK TOV ovpavov TTftrovra, comp. 
 Matt. 3, 16. Mark 1, 10. So where the 
 noun before a>s is also implied after it, as 
 Rev. 1, 10 fjKovo~a (pavi)? peydXnv <ur [<a>- 
 vfjf] (rd\Triyyos. 16, 3. Sept. and 3 Jer. 4, 
 31. (Palseph. 7. 1 <rcu/ia e^op, " r (Cvwfc. 1 ) 
 Sometimes the noun after y is implied be 
 fore it ; Rev. 6, 1 fJKov<ra evos . . . heyovTos 
 [<j)a>vf]] <s (fxavfj jSpovrfjs. By Hebr. a 
 noun preceded by a>s often denotes some 
 thing like itself, a person or thing like that 
 which the noun signifies, Engl. as it were ; 
 Rev. 4, 6 fvairiov TOV %p6vov a>s SdXaerera 
 vaXiVr;, pr. something like a sea of glass, as 
 it were a sea of glass. 15. 2. 8, 8 o>? opos 
 (JLfya, as it were a great mountain. 9, 7 wr 
 (rretpavoi xpvaroi. Accus. Rev. 19, 1 rjicovo-a 
 cos (fxovfjv /zeydXrjf o^Xov, i. e. a sound like 
 the voice, etc. v. 6. So Sept. and 3 Dan. 
 10,18 ijx^aro p.ov u>s opacris dvSptatrov, see 
 Heb. Lex. art. 3 B. 1. a. So Act. Thorn. 
 40 aTrrjvrrjo-f pot u>s av Spamos TIS- 
 
 2. As marking quality, character, cir 
 cumstances, known or supposed to exist in 
 respect to any person or thing ; something 
 which is matter of belief or opinion, whether 
 true or false ; comp. Passow B. I, and C. 
 
 a) Before Participles referring to a prece 
 ding noun, and expressing a quality or cir 
 cumstance belonging to that noun, either 
 real or supposed, as, as if, as though ; 
 Passow C. Matth. 568. Buttm. { 145. n. 
 7. a) Before a Nominal, as referring to 
 a preceding subject ; Luke 16, 1 OVTOS ftta- 
 j3X7j3r; avTa a>s 8ia<TKopni<av KrX. as wast 
 ing his goods, i. e. being so accounted. 
 Acts 23, JO wf p.e\\ovT(s TL d/cpi/Secrre/joi/ 
 irvv Sdvfo- Sai, as though they would inquire. 
 28, 19 ov% coy TOU fSvovs fJ-ov f^utv TI Acarrj- 
 yoprjo-ai, not as having, i. e. not supposing 
 that I have. Rom. 15, 15. 1 Cor. 4, 7. 5, 
 3. 7, 25. 2 Cor. 6, 9 ter. 10 bis. 10, 14. 
 13, 2. Col. 2, 20. 1 Thess. 2, 4. Heb. 11, 
 27. 13, 3 bis. 17. James 2, 12. al. With 
 Part. impl. Eph. 6, 7 SouXevoirf s <uy [Sov- 
 \fvovTfs] T<5 Kvpico. 1 Pet. 4, 11. Sept. for 
 3 Gen. 27, 12. So 2 Mace. 3, 8. Ceb. 
 Tab. 1. Plato Menex. 241. d. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 I. 1. j3) Before a Genit. referring to a 
 preceding noun ; Heb. 12, 27 877X01 TWV 
 
 (Jos. Ant. 1. 16. 2. Hdian. 5. 7. 5. Plut. 
 do cohib. Ira 9 init.) Often before a gonit. 
 absol. 1 Cor. 4, 1 8 u>? p.rj ipjfofttvov 8e pov 
 irpiis ipus, t(pv(Tia> :3r](Tdv rivet, i. e. they 
 supposing that I shall not come. 2 Cor. 5, 
 20. 1 Pet. 4, 12. 2 Pet. 1, 3. So after 
 fi Acts 27, 30 ; comp. 2 Mace. 3. 8. 
 
 See Matth. 5 568. 2. Buttm. \ 145. n. 7 
 Winer } 67. 6. So ^El. V. H. 4. 12. Hdot 
 8. 69. Xen. Mem. 3. 5. 20 <us OVK (VTUKTUV 
 OVTW ASnvaiav. y) Before a Dat. refer 
 ring to a preceding noun ; Acts 3, 12 ij/uj/ 
 ri dr(vi(fre u>s . . . TreTroiTjKocri TOV irfpnra- 
 Tf iv avTov. 1 Pet. 2, 14. So Xen. Mem. 
 
 1. 2. 35 tas ovnco (j)povifiLois ovui. S) Be 
 fore an Accus. referring to a preceding 
 object; comp. Matth. } 568. 1. Buttm. 1. c. 
 Acts 23, 15 -rrpos was, us p.f\\ovras 
 8tayiva>o-Kfiv KT\. Rom. 6, 13. 2 Cor. 10, 
 
 2. Rev. 5, 6. Ellipt. John 1,14 86av a>s 
 [86av] p.ovoyei>ovs KT\. So Jos. Ant. 9. 8. 
 2. Ceb. Tab. 40 bis. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 21. 
 e) Once before an Infin. apparently with a 
 participle implied, or perhaps instead of the 
 participial construction ; 2 Cor. 10, 9 iva fu} 
 8oct> u>s av [povXo/jLfvos] (Kfpoftflv iip.uy. 
 Comp. Matth. j 545. So Plato Crit. 3. p. 
 44. b, (cat TroXXoir 86a>, a>s, oios T u>v <re 
 <ra>(iv r . . d/ieXrjcrai, alii d^ieXrjcratjai. Seo 
 in art. av IV. Winer 5 43. 6. 
 
 b) Before a Subst. or Adj. either as pre 
 dicate or object, expressing a quality or cir 
 cumstance known or supposed to belong to 
 a preceding noun, as, as if, as though. 
 Here the part. a>v, oZa-a, ov, or the like, may 
 always be supplied ; and the construction is 
 then the same as in lett. a, above ; comp. 
 Matth. J 568. n. a) Before a Nominal, a? 
 referring to a preced. subject ; 2 Cor. 6, 4 
 
 0-VVHTTU>l>TtS fdVTOVS U>S 3f oO SuiKOVOl. 1 1 , 
 
 15. Eph. 5, 1. 8 u>s TtKva (pu>Tos nfpnraTfiTf, 
 i. e. as it becomes children of the light, as 
 they are supposed to walk. 6, 6. Col. 3, 
 12. 22. 23. Heb. 3, 5. 6. James 2, 9. 1 Pet. 
 1, 14. 2, 2. 5. 16. 4, 10. Rom. 3, 7 ri TI 
 Kuyw cbf dfj,apTu>\os KpivofjLai , i. e. as thougli, 
 I were a sinner. 2 Cor. 6, 8. 10. 13, 7. 
 1 Pet. 4, 15. 16. Once preceded by rotoC- 
 TOS, Philem. 9 TOIOVTOS u>v, u>s IlavXo? irptcr- 
 PVTJJS, being such an one as Paul the aged, 
 i. e. such an one as tliou knowest Paul to 
 be, thine aged teacher and friend. So 
 1 Esdr. 8, 7. Act. Thorn. } 39. Hdian. 8. 
 1. 6. Hdot. 3. 156; c. TOIOVTOS, Andocid. 
 in Alcib. TO Se SfivoTaTov Vrt, TOIOVTOS u>v, 
 
 6)f fVVOVS TO) S^/iCJ TOVS XoyOUf TTOtflTat. 
 
 /3) Before a Genit. as referring to a prece 
 ding noun; 1 Pet. 2, 12 v/xwi/ &>? KUKO- 
 jroiwv. 3, 16. With a genit. absol. comp. 
 above in lett. a. . y) Before a Dat. as 
 referring to a preceding noun ; 1 Cor. 3, 1 
 ter, vp.~iv u>s TTvevp.aTiKo is KT\. 10, 15. 2 Cor. 
 6, 13. Heb. 12,5. 7. 1 Pet. 2, 13. 3, 7. 
 
 4. 19. 2 Pet. 1, 19; impl. 1 Pet. 1, 19 
 aifj.a.Ti o>s [ai^an] djj.vov KT\. So Hdian. 
 
 5. 1.13. Xen. Cyr. 3. 1. 39 w? TroX^t o.* 
 
(05 
 
 800 
 
 eoy 
 
 avrois xpcoirai. 8) Before an Accus. as 
 referring to another object; Matt. 14, 5 on 
 coy irpo<priTT]v avrbv ei^oy. Luke 6, 22. 15, 
 19 troiiffov fie coy fva TU>V [uorSicw trou. 
 Acts 17, 22 tby 8eicri8atfjiov(rTepovs vp.as 
 Secopco, sc. than others. Rom. 1, 21 ov% coy 
 2eov fdogacrav sc. auroV. 1 Cor. 4, 9. 14. 
 8, 7. 2 Cor. 11,16. Heb. 11,9; also OVTCOS 
 coy 2 Cor. 9, 5. SoHdian. 3. 11. 18. Xen. 
 An. 6. 6. 9. Hell. 2. 1. 7. 
 
 c) Before Prepositions with their cases, 
 in the same manner as before Participles, 
 see above in lett. a ; since a participle may 
 usually be supplied before the preposition ; 
 see Passow C. II. a) So with 8ia, 
 2 Thess. 2, 2 P.TJTS 6V eVtoroArjy coy Si ijp.coi 
 sc. yeypa/i/ieVjjy. With ev. John 7, 10 ov 
 (jbai/epcoy, dXX coy e j> Kpurrrcp SC. dvaflds. 
 Rom. 13, 13. With e, Rom. 9, 32 OVK 
 TTi o-Tfcoj-, dXX coy epyu>v vop.ov SC. Stco- 
 KCOI/, comp. v. 31. 2 Cor. 2, 17 bis. 3, 5. 
 1 Pet. 4,11. With eVt, Gal. 3, 1 6 ou ... coy 
 eVi TroXXcov, dXX cos f (p evoy SC. Xe ycov. Matt. 
 26, 55 coy tVri ~\rja-Trjv as though against a 
 robber. So Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 25 coy eV KCO/ZCO. 
 Hdot. 8. 101 Eepr;y coy e /c KOKCOC e^aprj. 
 Philo de Joseph, p. 545 o-TreuSoi/rcy coy eV 
 dyaScoi K\ripovop.iav. Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 8 a\>- 
 roy fj-eZvcrKfTo ... coy eV evruxia. An. 4. 3. 
 11. /3) Before a prep, implying motion 
 /o a place, coy qualifies the force of the pre 
 position, as if to, i. e. toivards, in the direc 
 tion of, leaving it undetermined whether 
 one arrives at the place or not ; comp. 
 Buttm. \ 149 init. Matth. 5 628. 3 fin. Wi 
 ner 67. 6 fin. In N. T. only once c. eVt, 
 Acts 17, 14 TropfvecrSai coy eVl TTJV SaXacr- 
 <rav. So Arr. Exp. Al. M. 3. 1. 6 xareVXa 
 Kara TOV Trora/zoi coy eVt Sakacrcrav. Diod. 
 Sic. 14. 49. Time. 5. 3. Xen. Hell. 1. 6. 5. 
 
 d) Before Numerals, as if, about, nearly, 
 marking a supposed or conjectural round 
 number; comp. Buttm. 149 init. Mark 5, 
 13 rj<rav Se coy Sierx/Xiot. 8, 9. Luke 2, 37. 
 8, 42. John 1, 40 copa Se TJV coy 8eK(irr}. 6, 
 19. 21, 8. Acts 1, 15. 5, 7. 19. 34. Rev. 8, 
 ,. al. Sept. for 3 Ruth 1, 4. 1 K. 22, 6. 
 Jos. Ant. 5. 6. 5. Pol. 1. 19. 5. Dem. 
 1378. 18. Xen. An. I. 6. 1. 
 
 e) Emphat. how ! how very! how much! 
 Lat. quam ! expressing admiration, in N. T. 
 only before adjectives ; comp. below in no. 
 3. C. Rom. 10, 15 coy copcuoi ol TrdSes KrX. 
 how beautiful the feet, etc. 11, 33. Comp. 
 genr. Passow D. I. Matth. 628. 3. Sept. 
 for ^ Ps. 73, 1. Horn. Od. 24. 194. Aris- 
 toph. Plut. 1. Luc. D. Deor. 12.2. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 3. 2 coy KaXo y /xoi 6 Tramrds. 
 
 3 \s marking manner, before a depend 
 
 ent clause qualifying or defining the action 
 of a preceding verb ; comp. Passow coy A. 
 
 11. a) Genr. as, according as ; Matt. 1 , 
 24 f7roir](Tfv coy TrpcxreTa^fV aurco 6 ayyeXoy. 
 8, 13 coy eTTicrreucray, yei/eS^rco croi. 20, 14. 
 Luke 14, 22. Rom. 12, 3. 1 Cor. 3, 5. Col. 
 2, 6. 4, 4. Tit. 1, 5. Rev. 9, 3. 18, 6. 22, 12. 
 Once with otmo corresponding, 1 Cor. 7. 17 
 fKaa-Tov coy KfK\rjKev 6 3edy, OVTCO TTfpnraTti- 
 rco. (Sept. Ezra 7, 25. Luc. D. Deor. 8. 
 1. Hdian. 7. 6. 16. Xen. Hell. 4. 2. 19 ; c. 
 ovrcoy Xen. Cyr. 4. 2. 19.) Here in a 
 somewhat laxer construction, coy /cat, like 
 the relat. oy, serves as a connective parti 
 cle ; see in art. oy B. 1. Matth. 5 628. p. 
 1282. Acts 13, 33 TO.VTTJV 6 Seoy fKTreTrXij- 
 pa>Kf ... coy KOI Iv TCO Trpcorco ^/aX/nco ytypa- 
 irrai KT\. 17, 28. 22, 5. 25, lO. Rom. 9, 25. 
 So Plut. de cohib. Ira 4. b) Before a 
 minor or parenthetic clause, which then 
 serves to modify or restrict the general pro 
 position ; Passow 1. c. Matt. 27, 65 v-rrd- 
 yere, oV^aXuracrSe coy oi Sare. Mark 4, 27. 
 10, 1 Kai, coy etcoSei, Trdkiv e8i8acrKfv av- 
 rovs. Luke 3, 23 u>v, coy evop-i^ero, vlas ico- 
 0-J70. Acts 2, 15. 1 Cor. 12, 2. 1 Pet. 5, 12. 
 2 Pet. 3, 9. Rev. 2, 24. So Hdian. 1. 16. 
 8. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 10. An. 1. 6. 3. c) 
 Before a superlative, emphat. like Lat. 
 quam ; comp. above in no. 2. e. So coy TO- 
 ^to-ra, pr. in what way most speedily, as 
 speedily as possible, Acts 17, 15; comp. 
 Buttm. 5 149 init. Viger. p. 562. So Dion. 
 Hal. Ant. 8. 30. Hdian. 2. 13. 18 ; coy rd- 
 Xto-ra Diod. Sic. 14. 96. Xen. Hi. 6. 13. 
 
 4. Before dependent clauses expressing 
 the object or reference of a preceding verb 
 or word, the nature of the action, the cir 
 cumstances under which it takes place, and 
 the like ; in what way, how, as, according as, 
 often equivalent to a conjunction ; Passow 
 coy B. 
 
 a) Genr. how, i. q. on-coy no. I ; comp. 
 Matth. ^ 485. So with the Indie, aor. Mark 
 
 12, 26 OVK dvtyvatre ... coy dirfv aurco 6 
 Sedy *rX. Luke 8, 47. 23, 55 (Zedo-avro TO 
 pin] p-flov KOL coy eV/2?7 TO o-co//a avrov. 24, 
 35. Acts 11,16. Rom. 11,2. 2 Cor. 7, 15. 
 Pleonast. Luke 22, 61 we/i^crST; 6 Ilerpoy 
 TOV Xoyou TOD Kvptov, coy elnfv avTai. Once 
 with TOVTO preced. Luke 6, 3. 4 ovSe TotVo 
 dveyvar? . , . coy eiO"^X3ei/ els TOV OIKOV TOV 
 SeoO KT\. (Jos. B. J. prooBm. 7-10, where 
 coy and 6Vcoy alternate. Hdian. 1. 1. 11. 
 Xen. An. 2. 1. 1. Pleonast. Xen. Cyr. 8. 2. 
 14 KOI Xdyoy aurov dTrop-v^p-oveiifTai, coy X- 
 yot /crX.) So toy OTI , how that, as that, to 
 wit that, in N. T. subjoined to a noun for 
 fuller explanation ; usually regarded as pie- 
 
801 
 
 onastic>but not so in strictness ; coinp. Wi 
 ner J 67. 1. n. f. 2 Cor. 5, 19 TTJV faaicoviav 
 Tijs KaTaX\ayrjs, us on 3eor TJV eV XpiorcS 
 icrX. 11, 21 Kara dripiav \tyu, us on fjfj.els 
 Tjo-Zevrjo-antv, I say it to my reproach, how 
 (hat we are weak, i. q. as though we were 
 weak ; spoken in iron} . 2 Thess. 2, 2 
 
 p,T)T( (V e TTtOToXJJs . . . US 6Yl fVf<TTI]KfV f] 
 
 ly/if pa roO xvpiov, nor by letter ... as that, 
 etc. So Dion. Hal. Ant. 9.14 tmyvovs, us 
 OTI (t> ((Txarois elviv. Dinarch. 109. 17. 
 Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 14. 
 
 b) Before an objective clause in a stricter 
 sense, how, how that, thai, with the Indie. 
 equiv. to on ; comp. on no. I. 3. Buttm. 1. 
 c. Matth. J 628. 2. Acts 10, 28 v/jLtis eVt- 
 ora(r3e us a3e^uroJ CCTTIV KrX. V. 38. Rom. 
 1, 9. 1 Thess. 2, 10. Sept. for i* 1 Sam. 
 13, 11 ; icx Dan. 1, 8. Jos. Ant. 7. 1. 6 
 
 fliapTvpa.ro TrdvTas . . . us ovTf KOIVUVOS (r) 
 KT\. Luc. D. Deor. 4. 5. Hdian. 3. 12. 11. 
 Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 2. 
 
 c) Before a final clause, i. e. expressing 
 end or purpose, as that, so that, i. q. that, to 
 the end that, like Iva, onus. Matth. 628. 1. 
 Passow B. II. Buttm. 1. c. So c. infin. ex 
 pressing the purpose of a preceding verb, 
 so as to, in order to ; Acts 20. 24 us reXei- 
 wcrat TOV 8pop.ov fj.ov p.(Ta ^apa?, i. e. I count 
 not my life dear, so that I may finish, etc. 
 Also us enos eiTTflv, so to speak, that I may 
 so speak, Lat. ut ita dicam, Heb. 7, 9. 
 Comp. Matth. J 545 init. Genr. Xen. Cyr. 
 1. 2. 8 Kco2cofa. us CITTO TOV 7TOTap,ov dpvo~a- 
 <r3ai. CEc. 11. 13. So cos enos tlirt iv Pol. 
 1.1.2. ib. 2. 21. 8. Plato Gorg. 5. p. 450. d. 
 
 d) Before a clause expressing result or 
 consequence, so, so as that, so thai, like wore ; 
 comp. Buttm. 1. c. Passow B. II. With an 
 Indie. Heb. 3, 1 1 et 4, 3 us co/iocra ev Trj opyjj 
 fiov, quoted from Ps. 95, 1 1 where Sept. 
 for ICX.So c. indie. Hdot. 1. 163. ib. 2. 
 15>5. Xen. Hell. 6. 1. 4 pen. voptfa OVTUS 
 (\fiv, us . . - dnooTTjo-ovrai OIITOV at rroXeis. 
 
 e) Before a clause expressing a cause or 
 reason, as, inasmuch as, since, because, like 
 eVei, on; Buttm 1. c. Matth. $ 628. 5. 
 J Tim. 1, 3 us afitoXetTTTOj e^w TTJV Trepl 
 crov pveiav KT\. Plato Prot. 335. d. Xen. 
 Cyr. 4. 2. 29 as St pos r/i/. 
 
 f) Before a clause implying time, as, 
 when, like m q. v. Passow 1. c. no. 5. [V.] 
 Matth. 628. 4. a) Genr. as, when, in 
 lliat, while ; c. Indie. Matt. 28, 9 o>? fie ro- 
 pfvovro airayyti\ai. Luke 1,41 u>s TJKovo fV 
 f; EX. TOV dcrvracr/ioi KrX. V. 44. 4, 25. 19, 
 5. John 2, 9. Acts 5, 24. 28, 4. al. sajp. 
 Spec, whenever, as often as, Luke 12, 58. 
 Ga!. 6, 10. Sept. for r2 2 Chr. 24, 11. 
 
 51 
 
 So genr. Judith 15, 1. Jos. Ant. 6. 11. 4. 
 Hdian. 2. 11. 12. Xen. Cyr. 1. 4. 23. /3) 
 Also when, after that, postquam, c. Indie. 
 Luke 1, 23 ical lyevtTo, us fnXrja-^rja-av at 
 Tjp.fpai . . . dnrjtefv. 2, 15. 39 us eVeXtyai/ 
 airavra ... VTreWpe^av *crX. 11, 1. John 4, 
 
 1. 6, 12. 16. Acts 7, 23. 10, 7. 13, 18. 
 29. al. saep. Foil, by roYe, John 7, 10. 
 Once from when, since, Mark 9, 21. So 
 genr. Judith 10, 1. Test. XII Patr. 
 p. 670 us fie eVauo-aro 6 ^et/^coi/. Hdian. 
 
 2. 8. 12. Xen. Mem. 2. 1. 23. y) 
 us av, whensoever, as soon as, with Sub- 
 junct. aor. 1 Cor. 11, 34 us tiv tXZu. Phil. 
 2, 23 ; us tdv id. Rom. 15, 24. See in av 
 II. 1. c. e. So Ceb. Tab. 4 us av eiVX3co- 
 O-LV fls TOV fiiov. ib. 9 opas ovv, us av trap- 
 eX3;;j TrjV nv\r)v Kr\. -f- 
 
 wcrawd, interj. Hosannah! ^Heb."-15 i a i irt 
 N3 , pr. save now, succour now, be now pro 
 pitious ! from the Hebrew, a word of joyful 
 acclamation; absol. Matt. 21, 9. Mark 11, 
 9. 10. John 12, 13; c. dat. TU vlu Aa/3/5 
 Matt. 21. 9. 15. See Heb. Lex. art. S^ 
 Hiph. no. 1. Wetst. N. T. I. p. 461. 
 
 (ocravrcos, adv. (us, OVTUS, avTos,) in 
 the same way, in like manner, likewise; 
 Matt. 20, 5 f-rroirja-fv ua-avTus. 21, 30. 36. 
 25, 17. Mark 12, 21. 14, 31. Luke 13, 3. 
 20, 31. 22, 20. Rom. 8, 26, comp. v. 16. 
 1 Cor. 11, 25. 1 Tim. 2, 9. 3, 8. 11. 5, 25. 
 Tit. 2, 3. 6. Sept. for nJtIS Judg. 8, 8 : 
 "ttn? Deut. 12,22. Ceb. Tab. 3. 31. Diod 
 Sic. . 1. 29. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 2. 
 
 Cdcret, i. q. W r d, as if, as though, with 
 the Opt. Horn. II. 11. 389. Od. 10. 416. 
 In N. T. only before a noun or adjective : 
 
 1. In comparisons, as if, as it were, i. q. 
 as, like as ; comp. as no. 1 . b. Matt. 9, 36 
 , ucrfl TrpOjSara *crX. 28, 3 \evKov 
 
 v - v> 4> ^ ar k 9 > 26 ^ jU ie 22 > 44 - 
 24, 11. Acts 2,3. 6, 15. 9, 18. Heb. 1,12. 
 
 11, 12. Rev. 1, 14. Ellipt. where a participle 
 or infin. belonging to the noun before uo-fi 
 is also implied with the noun after ua-el, e. g. 
 Matt. 3, 16 ciSt TO Trvfvfjui TOV SeoG /wiTa- 
 fiaivov uo-\ TTfpio-Tfpdv SC. KaTaj3aivovo-av. 
 Mark 1,10. John 1, 32 ; so infin. Luke 3. 
 22. See in us no. 1. b, and comp. Luke 10. 
 18. Sept. for 3 Job 28, 5. 29, 25. Dion. 
 Hal. Ant. 6. 86. 
 
 2. Before words of number and measure, 
 as if, as it were, about, something like ; comp. 
 us no. 2. d. So before numerals ; Matt. 
 [4, 21 avdpes were! Trei^a/cttr^iXtot. [Mark 
 6, 44.] Luke 1, 56 uo-fl p.ijvas rpeir. 3, 23 
 9, 14. 28. 22,59. 23, 44. John 4, 6 upa 
 
 wo-ei ficn}. 6, 10. 19, 14. 39. Acts 2. 41 
 
flarje 
 
 802 
 
 wraptov 
 
 4, 4. 5, 36. 10, 3. 19, 7. Of measure, 
 Luke 22, 41 wo-ei X/Sov /3oXiji/. Sept. for 3 
 Judg. 3, 29. Neh. 7, 66. Xen. Hell. 1. 2. 
 9. ib. 2. 4. 25. 
 
 ficrrje, 6, indec. Osee, Heb. ?if (de 
 liverance) Hoshea, Hosea, pr. n. of a proph 
 et of the O. T. Rom. 9, 25. See Hos. 1,1. 
 
 OHTTrep. adv. i. e. d>y strengthened by 
 cnclit. irep, pr. wholly as, just as; genr. as, 
 like as, according as, Passow s. v. Matth. 
 ^ 629. In N. T. only in comparisons ; also 
 in Attic writers the prevailing particle in 
 this usage ; see Passow s. v. 
 
 1. Pr. as introducing a comparison, fol 
 lowed by a corresponding clause with OVTUS, 
 or the like; as, just as, like as ; Matt. 12, 
 40 wcrTTfp yap rjv lavas . . . ovrats eorai 6 
 vios TOV aVSpcoTTou KrX. 13, 40. 24, 27. 37. 
 38. Luke 17, 24. John 5, 21. 26. Rom. 5, 
 19. 21. 6,4. 19. 11, 30. 1 Cor. 11, 12 
 15, 22. 16, 1. 2 Cor. 1, 7. Gal. 4, 29. 
 Eph. 5, 24. James 2, 26. Once with u vr<as 
 omitted in anacoluthon, Matt. 25, 14; or 
 suspended by a parenthetic clause, Rorn. 5, 
 12, comp. v. 18. Once also *ith Kai, for 
 OUTGO? Kai, 2 Cor. 8, 7 ; comp in KUI no. 2. 
 b. Sept. Ecc. 5, 16. Hdian. 2 9. 15. Xen. 
 Cyr. 1. 4. 21. Mem. 1. 6. 14. 
 
 2. Genr. and without OVTUS correspond 
 ing, as, just as, like as, Matt 5, 48 eo-fo-Sf 
 ovv vp.f is reXeiot, axTTTtp 6 nairjp tip-wi/ KT\. 
 6, 2. 5. 7. 16. 20, 28. 25, 32. Luke 18, 11. 
 Acts 2, 2. 3, 17. 11, 15. 2 Cor. 9, 5 Rec. 
 1 Thess. 5, 3. Heb. 4, 10. 7, 27. 9, 25. 
 Rev. 10, 3. Matt. 18, 17 eorco o-ot ua-irep 6 
 teviicos, let him be to thee as a heathen, etc. 
 Cebet. Tab. 25. Hdian. 1. 4. 8. Diod. Sic. 
 1. 3. Xen. Cyr. 5. 3. 5. 
 
 3. After a hypothetical proposition, as 
 asserting or confirming its truth and reality, 
 as indeed; comp. Matth. { 629. p. 1288. 
 1 Cor. 8, 5 /cat yap ei77ep fiVl Xeyo p-ei/ot 
 3eoi . . . Sxnrep fieri SeoiTroXXot KrX. [10, 7.] 
 Epict. Ench. 1. 3 tav 8e TO <rov povov 
 oi/jSiys 1 arov tlvai, TO 8e aXXoVpioi , eocrirep 
 eVrtV, dXXoYpioj , KT\. Hdot. 5. 53. 
 
 axTTrepet, adv. (Sxnvtp, et,) just as if, as 
 if it were, 1 Cor. 15, 8 ; also 4, 13 in some 
 edit, for us. Jos. Ant. 3. 7. 1. Diod. Sic. 
 3. 40. Xen. Cyr. 4. 3. 3. 
 
 wore, i. e. as strengthened by enclit. 
 T, serving to connect more closely a follow 
 ing clause with the preceding ; pr. adv. like 
 &>?, &o-tTp, used in comparisons, as, like as, 
 Horn. II. 2. 289. ib. 16. 3. Genr. and in 
 N. T. as a conjunction, so as that, so that, 
 before a clause expressing an event, result, 
 consequence, whether real or supposed ; 
 
 and followed usually by an Infinitive, b 
 also by the Indicative ; comp. in c*s no. 4. d. 
 Passow s. v. Buttm. 149. m. 2. 140. 4. 
 Matth. 629. 531. n. 2. $ 533. n. 1. Wi 
 ner $ 42. 5. n. 1. 45. 3. n. 
 
 1. With an Infin. c. ace. expr. or impl, 
 so that. a) Fully, preceded by a de- 
 monstr. as OVTUS, TOIOVTOS ; Acts 14, 1 Kai 
 XaXfJcrat OUTCOJ, ware Trtcrrevtrai . . . TroXi 
 
 -. Matt. 15, 33 aproi TocroilToi UHTTC 
 ai o^Xov Toaovrov. Comp. Buttm. 
 
 5 140. 4. So preced. by OVTUS ^Eschin. 12. 
 
 16. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 5; Too-ovror Diod. Sic. 
 
 4. 71. Xen. Hi. 3. 9. b) Simply, without 
 
 a preced. demonsir. Matt. 8, 24 wore TO 
 
 7T\oloV KoXv7TTc(r3Ql VTTO TCoV KU/tOTCOJ>. V. 28. 
 
 10, 1 fdaxev avrois fovcriav . . . coore 
 fK$aA.\fiv avTc t sc. Ta TrvevfjLara. 13, 54. 
 Mark 1, 27. 45. Luke 5, 7. Acts 1, 19. 16, 
 26. Rom. 7, 6. 15, 19. 1 Cor. 5, 1. al. saep. 
 Sept. Gen. 9, 15. Josh. 10, 14. So Luc. D. 
 Deor. 13. 2. Diod. Sic. 1. 5. Xen. Cyr. 1. 
 4. 1, 10. c) Rarely, instead of an actual 
 result, COOT? c. infin. serves to mark a pur 
 pose, like iva, onus ; e. g. Matt. 27, 1 o-v/i- 
 @ov\iov (\aj3ov . . . Kara TOV l^crov, axm 
 Sai/aTttxrat aitrov. Luke 4, 29. 9, 52. non al, 
 Comp. Matth. } 629. p. 1286. Sept. foi 
 b c. inf. Num. 8, 11. Gen. 15, 7. So Xen. 
 Hell. 2. 4. 8 tj3ov\r)^n(Tav E\fv<r iva e(Sio>- 
 trauSat, eocrre fivai crtylo i K.ara(^vyrjV. An 
 3. 4. 21. 
 
 2. Foil, by an Indicat. so as that, or simpl. 
 that; with ovrcas preced. John 3, 16 OVTU, 
 yap TjyaTrrja-fv 6 3eor TOV Kocrp-ov, uxrre TOV 
 viov avTov (8a>Kfv KT\. Simpl. Gal. 2, 13. 
 So c. OVT<OS prec. Luc. D. Deor. 15. 2. 
 Thuc. 3. 104. Simpl. Ml V. H. 12. 30. 
 Xen. An. 2. 4. 2. Mem. 1. 2. 31. 
 
 3. Often at the beginning of a sentence, 
 with the Indie, or Imperal. as an emphatic 
 illative particle, so that, consequently, there 
 fore, wherefore ; comp. Matth. Buttm. Jl 
 cc. Winer 42. 5. n. 1. So with Indie 
 Matt. 12, 12 axTTf etcrrt Tols <rdj3^acri Ka 
 \usrroielv. 23, 31. Mark 2, 28. 10, 8. Rom 
 7, 12 SxTTf 6 fjifv v6p.ov ayios KT\. 1 Cor 
 3, 7. 7, 38. Gal. 3, 9. 24. al. With Impe 
 rat. 1 Cor. 3, 21. 15, 58. Phil. 2, 12. 4, i.. 
 1 Thess. 4, 18. James 1, 19. 1 Pet. 4, Ib. 
 al._Wisd. 6, 25. Diod. Sic. 11. 6. Xen. 
 An. 1. 7. 7; c. imper. Xen. Cyr. 1. 3. Id 
 axTTf Sapcrft. -f- 
 
 : ov, TO, (dim. ovf,) an ear, i. q. 
 con oi/, Mark 14, 47 *cai dtpeiXev avToO ri 
 a>Taptoi>, so Lachm. for d>T/oi> in Rec. Lu- 
 cill. 17, in Anth. Gr. III. p. 32. See Lob. 
 ad Phryn. p. 212. 
 
cariov 
 
 80 
 
 o)Tiov : ov, TO, (dim. ovt,) an ear, one of 
 Jie ears ; condemned by the Atticists, but 
 used in the language of common life, which 
 often employs diminutives for the parts of 
 the body, just as we do in speaking with 
 children; comp. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 211 sq. 
 Matt. 26, 51 dfalXfv avrov TO curi oi/. Mark 
 14, 47. Luke 22, 51. John 18, 10. 26. Sept. 
 for "JTK i Sam. 9, 15. 20, 2. Am. 3, 12. 
 Ecclus. 43, 29. Anthol. Gr. III. p. 31 
 
 (O")(OV 8 fV IIt(777 fJLfV ff COTIOV. 
 
 a)(j)\eia, as, t], (co<peXea>,) help, aid, 
 succour, in war, 2 Mace. 8, 20. Thuc. 1. 
 35 ; from a physician, larpuo) axpe Xeia Plato 
 Lys. 217. a. In N. T. use, profit, adi-an- 
 tage ; Rom. 3, 1 TLS fj oxpe Xeta TTJS irfpiTo- 
 uqs; Jude 16. Sept. for SS3 Job 22, 3. 
 Ps. 30, 10. So Ecclus. 20, 30. Diod. Sic. 
 1. 21 fin. Xen. Mem. 2. 3. 6. 
 
 , f. 170-0), (o<eXoy,) 1. to 
 help, to aid, to profit, to be of use, absol. 
 Rom. 2, 25 irfpiTop.^ p.(v yap oxpeXei. (Xen. 
 An. 5. 1. 12.) With two accus. of pers. 
 and neut. TI , ovSev, p/SeV, comp. Buttm. 
 ^ 131. 5, espec. 8 and n. 12. Matth. 415. 
 n. 3. Mark 8, 36 ri yap oxpeXTjcrfi tiv Spat- 
 jrov, iav KT\. 1 Cor. 14, 6. Gal. 5, 2. Ace. 
 of pers. simpl. Heb. 4, 2. Ace. TI, ov8fi>, 
 fuiMv, simpl. Matt. 27, 24. John 6, 63. 12, 
 
 19. Sept. c. ace. pers. for b^sin Prov. 10 
 2. Is. 30. 5. 6. So c. dupl. ace. Wisd. 5 
 8. Ceb. Tab. 35. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 61 ; ace. 
 of pers. Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 1 ; ace. TI Arr 
 Epict. 1. 2. 22. JEl V. H. 3. 47. Xen. 
 Mem. 3. 4. 11. 
 
 2. Mid. or Pass, to be profited, to have ad 
 vantage ; with ace. neut. TI, ov8ev, /w/oVi/, 
 see above in no. 1 ; and for the passive 
 construction see Buttm. $ 134. 6. Matt. 16, 
 26 TI yap axpeXeirat acSpuTroj, tav KT\. 
 Mark 5, 26. Luke 9, 25. 1 Cor. 13, 3. 
 (Jos. Ant. 2. 5. 5. Hdian. 2. 3. 21. Xen. 
 Mem. 1 . 7. 2.) With t K c. gen. to be pro 
 fited of or by any one, c. neut. o, Matt. 15, 
 5 5&jpoi>, 6 tav f f /iov ojfpfXrj Srjs. Mark 7, 1 1. 
 (Sept. Jer. 2, 11. Antiphon. 121. 23 e o>/ 
 ^.dXtcrra TO KOIVOV a)0eXirat. Xen. Mem. 2. 
 4. 1.) With tv c. dat. Heb. 13, 9 hols 
 OVK u><$>e\ffiri<Tav oi TrfpinaTrjcravrfs, where 
 ev oils depends equally on ot nfpnrari]<ravTfs. 
 So Xen. Ath. 1. 3. 
 
 fo)<^>eXt/i09, ov, o, 17, adj. 
 helpful, profitable, useful; with irpos TI, 
 1 Tim. 4, 8 bis, fj yap crotyiariKj) yvfumrla 
 npos oXiyov ecrrt dx^)eXt/xoy, KT\. 2 Tim. 3. 
 16 ; c. dat. Tit. 3, 8. Ceb. Tab. 37 ; irpos 
 TO irapov Hdian. 2. 5. 6 ; ds TOV ftiov Xen. 
 (Ec. 5. 11 ; c. dat. JEl V. H. 12. 54. Xen. 
 Mem. 2. 7. 9. 
 
 CORRIGENDA. 
 
 Page 11, B. 7, after "passing." add: (^Eschyl. Ag. 1592. Aristoph. Nub. G26.; 
 
 Page 180, A. 15, bottom, dele " John 9, 24." Then, after Acts 12, 33, add : Also JD 
 obtestations to speak the truth, John 9, 24. 
 
 Page 243, A. 12, dele all after 25, to the dash in the next line, so that it will read 
 25 ; Jos. etc. 
 
 Page 244, B. 10, bottom, after 15 add: Others better of rank, dignity, John 11 cc 
 So Sept. and -yob Gen. 48, 20; comp. Matt. 3, 11. 
 
 Page 523, B. 4. dele " 1 Cor. 15, 27." 
 
 Page 593, B. 12. at the beginning, dele "Gen " 
 
ADDENDA. 
 
 THE following words, which are read in some manuscripts cf the 
 Testament, and most of which appear -Iso in the edition of Lachmann, were 
 omitted in their proper order : 
 
 f. eX<w, to bring word, to an 
 nounce, to tell; c. dat. et OTI, John 20, 18 
 Lachm. dyyeXXovcra rols fJ.a^rjTais OTI KT\. 
 Rec. aTj-ayy XXoutra. Hdian. 6. 5. 14. Xen. 
 Hell. 1. 1. 27. 
 
 arjoia, as, 17, (aqSijs ; a priv. ^Sor,) a 
 being ill pleased, displeasure, dislike ; Luke 
 23, 12 ovTfs ev di]8ia. Rec. ei> e^Spa. 
 Dem. 401. 18. Plato Legg. 802. d. 
 
 a/taraTracrTO?, O v, 6, ?}, adj. (a priv. 
 Kardrrao-Tos , Tracrcrca,) pr. unbesprinkled, 
 unbestrewed ; hence trop. not satisfied, in 
 satiable ; 2 Pet. 2,14 Lachm. o<p3aX/ious 
 . . . eiKaTaTrdoTour a/xa/may. Rec. dKaranav- 
 arovs. Found in no Gr. writer or lexicon. 
 
 MXacrcra, as, rj, Alassa, Vulg. Tha- 
 lassa, pr. n. of a city in Crete ; Acts 27, 8 
 Lachm. for Aacrala Rec. 
 
 dfJL(f)ia(i)) f. aero), (apxpi,) to put around 
 or on, as garments, to clothe, c. ace. et OVT&S, 
 Luke 12, 28 Lachm. for d^ievw^i Rec. 
 Sept. for tal; Job 29, 14. So Eryc. 12, 
 in Anth. Gr. III. p. 12. Some Mss. read 
 d/itptefo) id. as also Sept. Job 31, 19. Plut. 
 C. Gracch. 2. 
 
 avcnrdofiat,) f. Treujcro/iai, Mid. depon. 
 (7rdop.ai,) to possess largely, to have large 
 fruit, c. ?K TIVOS, Rev. 14, 13 Lachm. tva 
 dvmraf](TovTai fK TCOI/ K. avrwv. Rec. dvairav- 
 o-wvrai. Not found elsewhere, and wholly 
 anomalous ; see Buttm. 1 14 Trdcrao-Sai. 
 
 aVa7TlpO$i ov, 6, f), adj. (dvaTreipco 
 to pierce through,) pierced, wounded ; so 
 
 Lachm. dvane ipovs Luke 14, 13. 21. Flee. 
 dvairrjpovs. Not found elsewhere. 
 
 avaTTijoaa), ,, f. ^o-co, (TT^SUCO,) to leap 
 up, to spring up ; Mark 10, 50 Lachm. dva- 
 rrrjb fjcras i^XSe. Rec. tli/aoras ^X3e. Sept. 
 for Dip i Sam. 20, 33. Dem. 403. 5. 
 Plato Conv. 213. b. 
 
 ou, 6, 17, adj. (a priv. 
 without mercy, stern, James 2, 13 Lachm. 
 for dviXecas Rec. Not found elsewhere. 
 
 adv. (/3a2Jv?,) deeply; Luke 
 24, 1 Lachm. 6 pSpov /3a3<Fcos. Rec. /3a3eos 
 see in art. PO%VS.- So of sleep, Plut. J. 
 Caes. 63. 
 
 ou, 6, (5e|ia, 0X0?, (3aX- 
 Xa>,) one throwing with the right hand; 
 perh. a spearman, lancer ; Plur. Acts 23, 
 23 Lachm. eio/36Xovr SiaKocriovs, Vulg. 
 lancearios. Rec. 5etoXa/3ouj. Not found 
 elsewhere. 
 
 eytcaicea), a>, f. TJO-W, (eV, /caKew,) to be 
 have badly or cowardly, in any thing, c. ace. 
 Pol. 4. 19. 10. In N. T. to be faint-hearted, 
 to faint, to fail, ev rais 3Xtyecri Eph. 3, 13; 
 absol. Luke 18, 1. 2 Cor. 4, 1. 16. Gal. 6,9. 
 2 Thess. 3, 13. So Symm. Gen. 27, 46. 
 Num. 21, 5. In all the above passages 
 Rec. has (KKaKea> q. v. 
 
 eyKav%dofJi,ai, wpu, f. TJO-O/XCU, Mid. 
 depon. (tV, Kavxdop.ai,) to glory in, to boast 
 in ; C. fv TII>I, 2 Thess. 1, 4 eV V/MV (yrav- 
 Xacr^at. Rec. KavxaaZat. Sept. Ps. lOfi 
 47. 74, 4. 
 
 FINIS. 
 
VD 
 
 0/ Qoo 
 <ioJ3? 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY